Digital Ricoeur - JStor
Ricoeur appearing with Search Term: act
Book Results: 8355
Journal Results: 3162
Introduction from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Maryks Robert Aleksander
Abstract: The following twelve essays are a selection of papers presented at the first International Symposium on Jesuit Studies held at Boston College’s Institute for Advanced Jesuit Studies in June 2015. The symposium theme was the distinctiveness of Jesuits and their ministries. The participants explored the
quidditas jesuitica, or the specifically Jesuit way(s) of proceeding in which Jesuits and their colleagues operated from historical, geographical, social, and cultural perspectives. They asked whether there was an essential core of distinctive elements that characterize the way in which Jesuits lived their religious vocation and conducted their various works and how these ways of
CHAPTER 3 Civic Education on Stage: from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Rzegocka Jolanta
Abstract: The Jesuit order and its theater have played a vital part in the history of Europe and its cultural heritage.¹ Ever since the founding of the Society in 1540, the Jesuits have been active preachers, distinguished theologians and disputants, and have served as confessors and tutors to sovereigns and members of royal families across Christendom.² However, it is the order’s emphasis on education and the Jesuits’ role as teachers that put the activities of the Society at the heart of the present chapter. Jesuit colleges modeled after their prominent school, the Collegium Romanum (1551), offered a combination of high-quality teaching
CHAPTER 5 Priestly Violence, Martyrdom, and Jesuits: from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Redden Andrew
Abstract: The question of what makes a Jesuit, the
quidditas jesuitica, is thrown into stark relief by the extraordinary case of Diego de Alfaro (d.1639) and its apologia, written in 1644 by the former provincial of the Paraguayan province, Diego de Boroa (d.1657).² Alfaro—superior of the missions of Guairá in the province of Paraguay—took up arms in 1639 and fought alongside his Guarani faithful againstbandeirantes(slave raiders) from the Portuguese city of São Paulo; in the gunfight with these slavers, Alfaro was killed. Portuguese and Spanish detractors of the Society alike decried the scandal of a priest under
CHAPTER 6 Colonial Theodicy and the Jesuit Ascetic Ideal in José de Acosta’s Works on Spanish America from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Green Bryan
Abstract: This chapter aims to demonstrate the centrality of the problem of theodicy in José de Acosta’s (1540–1600) scientific, ethnographic, and historical writings on Spanish America.¹ Based on Acosta’s experience as the Jesuit provincial of Peru and his active participation in the political and ecclesiastical reforms initiated under the viceroy Francisco de Toledo (1515–82), these works bear witness to the moral evils running rampant among his fellow Spaniards and the concomitant suffering inflicted upon the indigenous population.² While Acosta recognizes the moral evil at the root of Spanish sovereignty, namely greed in the ruthless pursuit of precious metals, his
CHAPTER 9 The Distinctiveness of the Society of Jesus’s Mission in Pedro de Ribadeneyra’s Historia ecclesiastica del schisma del reyno de Inglaterra (1588) from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Weinreich Spencer J.
Abstract: “Two more private and particular considerations encouraged me in the work. The first, that I am a Spaniard; the second, that I am a priest of the Society of Jesus.”¹ Such was the explanation offered by the priest and scholar Pedro de Ribadeneyra (1526–1611) for the production of the
Historia eclesiastica del scisma del reyno de Inglaterra(henceforth, the “Historia”), his polemical account of the English Reformation. Troublingly, virtually all scholarship on theHistoriahas concentrated on the former factor, to the detriment of our appreciation of the latter. This chapter, and my larger project of an annotated translation
CHAPTER 10 Discerning Skills: from:
Exploring Jesuit Distinctiveness
Author(s) Casalini Cristiano
Abstract: The ability to examine talents is one of the key features that continue to distinguish the Jesuits in a large number of fields today. The mission statements of many educative institutions run by the Society all around the world, such as schools and universities, insist on the cultivation of students’ skills and talents as a hallmark of their excellence. Yet, this characteristic goes beyond the boundaries of the ministry of education, for it involves many other tenets of the Jesuit identity.
Book Title: The Political Style of Conspiracy-Chase, Summer, and Lincoln
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Pfau Michael William
Abstract: The turbulent history of the United States has provided a fertile ground for conspiracies, both real and imagined. From the American Revolution to the present day, conspiracy discourse-linguistic and symbolic practices and artifacts revolving around themes, claims, or accusations of conspiracy-has been a staple of political rhetoric. Some conspiracy theories never catch on with the public, while others achieve widespread popularity. Whether successful or not, the means by which particular conspiracy theories spread is a rhetorical process, a process in which persuasive language, symbolism, and arguments act upon individual minds within concrete historical and political settings.Conspiracy rhetoric was a driving force in the evolution of antebellum political culture, contributing to the rise and fall of the great parties in the nineteenth century. One conspiracy theory in particular-the "slave power" conspiracy-was instrumental in facilitating the growth of the young Republican Party's membership and ideology.
The Political Style of Conspiracyanalyzes the concept and reality of the "slave power" in the rhetorical discourse of the mid-nineteenth-century, in particular the speeches and writing of politicians Salmon P. Chase, Charles Sumner, and Abraham Lincoln. By examining their mainstream texts, Pfau reveals that, in addition to the "paranoid style" of conspiracy rhetoric that inhabits the margins of political life, Lincoln, Chase, and Sumner also engaged in a distinctive form of conspiracy rhetoric that is often found at the center of mainstream American society and politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt13x0p8c
1 Problems of Interpretation: from:
The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Conspiracy, the secret cooperation for the achievement of some base design, has been a frequently recurring topic of political discussions since ancient times. But it has been the turbulent history of the United States that has provided the most fertile ground for conspiracy discourse. From the time of the Revolution to the present day, conspiracy discourse—that is, linguistic and symbolic practices and artifacts revolving around themes, claims, or accusations of conspiracy—has pervaded diverse forums and genres of American political discourse. For many critics and commentators, the ubiquity of conspiracy theories in American history and the increasing appeal of
3 Charles Sumner’s “Crime Against Kansas”: from:
The Political Style of Conspiracy
Abstract: Charles Sumner was a latecomer to politics. While he had established a reputation as a philanthropist and reformer in the 1830s and early 1840s, he was not politically active until the Texas annexation controversy of the mid-1840s. As is evident by his July 4, 1845, oration, ʺThe True Grandeur of Nations,ʺ Sumnerʹs sudden entrance into politics was inspired largely by his pacifism and his belief that the measure to annex Texas was the work of the slave power and designed to expand slavery westward. At the time, Massachusetts Whigs in Congress were themselves engaged in a vigorous opposition to annexation
Chapter One The Public and Its Fundamentalists from:
Superchurch
Abstract: In
The Public and Its Problems(1927), John Dewey defended the ideal of strong publics. Challenging Walter Lippmann’s pessimistic assessment that modern states were far too complex to be managed by their citizens, Dewey offered a fluid understanding of democracy and the state that highlighted the critical role of robust “public interests.”¹ Yet, as his title suggests, Dewey’s optimism was tempered by a sense that the modern public was in trouble. In the context of expanding technology, bureaucratization, and a dehumanizing standardization of action and association, the public, he argued, was fragmenting. The problem for Dewey, as Robert Asen argues,
Chapter Two The Fundamentals of Revival from:
Superchurch
Abstract: Revival speech is the foundation of Fundamentalist politics. At the heart of Fundamentalist efforts to remake the public—from abolition and temperance to contemporary struggles against abortion and environmentalism—is a desire to make a world in which the gospel message can be propagated and in which people will be more receptive to revivalist persuasion. For much of Christian history it was assumed that this transformation could only come “in the fullness of time,” which had been preordained by God, but Fundamentalist counterpublicity derives from an emerging belief in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that human actions could affect God’s
Chapter Five The Superchurch Reimagined from:
Superchurch
Abstract: To be Fundamentalist is to be marginal. It is to adopt and enact one’s own marginalization in society. It is to assume a position of outsider. It is to invoke counterpublic speech against public norms. Yet it is also to lay claim to an imagined higher standard than that which society currently upholds. It is, as we discussed in the last chapter, to envision a world in which Fundamentalist speech is normative. It is to speak for a public that the Fundamentalist community imagines but cannot, itself, enact. Therefore, we have seen, within Fundamentalism, a continual and productive tension between
Conclusion from:
Superchurch
Abstract: Fundamentalism is, at its essence, a church movement. By this I mean, as we have explored throughout this study, that Fundamentalist counterpublicity is intimately intertwined with narratives about the survival and status of the Fundamentalist church, a universal idealization of local believing communities. This idealization, in turn, conflates political and spiritual, public and private concerns in Fundamentalist rhetoric. The church marks the boundaries and exclusions of Fundamentalist identity, yet it also builds bridges between private belief and public action. It is in defense and propagation of the Fundamentalist church and the ideal of revivalism that the local church finds its
Book Title: Invoking the Invisible Hand-Social Security and the Privatization Debates
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Medhurst Martin J.
Abstract: In Invoking the InvisibleHand Robert Asen scrutinizes contemporary debates over proposals to privatize Social Security. Asen argues that a rights-based rhetoric employed by Social Security's original supporters enabled advocates of privatization to align their proposals with the widely held belief that Social Security functions simply as a return on a worker's contributions and that it is not, in fact, a social insurance program.By analyzing major debates over a preeminent American institution, Asen reveals the ways in which language is deployed to identify problems for public policy, craft policy solutions, and promote policies to the populace. He shows how debate participants seek to create favorable contexts for their preferred policies and how they connect these policies to idealized images of the nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt16wd0hf
INTRODUCTION: from:
Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: In this famous passage from
The Wealth of Nations, Adam Smith employs a powerfully evocative metaphor that bursts through his prose to escape the confines of political economy and obtain the status of a common sense. Resonating across national contexts and historical eras, the metaphor of the “invisible hand” has spoken to many people as an intuitive description of how the world works and an unparalleled prescription for ethical individual action. The invisible hand artfully captures the spirit of a market ethics by insisting that in working for oneself, an individual works for the good of others. The invisible hand
1 Policy Polysemy and the 1935 Social Security Debates from:
Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: Americans know Social Security. They likely know it better than any other public policy. Whereas many policies appear distant from Americans’ everyday lives, seemingly addressed only to Washington insiders, Social Security touches ordinary citizens directly. For millions of Americans, Social Security has provided irreplaceable benefits to compensate for income lost through the tragic injury or death of a breadwinner. For millions more, Social Security has provided steady retirement benefits for oneself, a parent, or a grandparent, affirming, in the process, the honorific status of senior citizen. And virtually all Americans have experienced the rite of passage enacted by obtaining a
CONCLUSION: from:
Invoking the Invisible Hand
Abstract: FDR understood the dynamics of politics and public policy. Defending the dedicated financing of Social Security, he recounted that “we put those payroll contributions there so as to give the contributors a legal, moral, and political right to collect their pensions and their unemployment benefits. With those taxes in there, no damn politician can ever scrap my social security program.”¹ And he was right. Dedicated financing distinguished Old-Age Insurance from most other social policies and provided the program with a compelling basis for support. Old-Age Insurance ostensibly operated independently, and its conspicuous character enabled Americans to develop a proprietary view
Book Title: Enigmas of Sacrifice-A Critique of Joseph M. Plunkett and the Dublin Insurrection of 1916
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Cormack W. J. Mc
Abstract: Enigmas of Sacrifice: A Critique of Joseph M. Plunkett and the Dublin Insurrection of 1916is the first critical study of the religious poet and militarist Joseph M. Plunkett, who was executed with the other leaders of the Dublin insurrection of 1916. Through Plunkett the author gains access to areas of nationalist thought that were more often assumed or repressed than publicly formulated.In this eye-opening book, W. J. Mc Cormack explores and analyzes Plunkett's brief life, work, and influence, beginning with his wealthy but dysfunctional family, irregular Jesuit education, and self-canceling sexuality. Mc Cormack continues through Plunkett's active phase when amateur theatricals and a magazine editorship brought him into the emergent neonationalist discourse of early twentieth-century Ireland. Finally, the author arrives at Holy Week 1916, when Plunkett masterminded the forgery of official documentation in order to provoke and justify the insurrection he planned. Mc Cormack analyzes Plunkett's significant texts and provides context through critical perspectives on his milieu.Enigmas of Sacrificeis unique in its effort to understand a major figure of Irish nationalism in terms that reach beyond political identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt18kcvc1
A LONG PROLOGUE: from:
Enigmas of Sacrifice
Abstract: It is unlikely that the Victorian crisis of belief, loosely associated with the impact of scientific and philosophical discoveries (e.g., those of Charles Darwin, Charles Lyell, and John Tyndall), has been seriously proposed as a relevant context-background for reconsiderations of the insurrection that broke out in Dublin on Easter Monday 1916. Less unlikely, yet still remote, would be an examination of the impact of more specifically Christian-focused and critical works, most notably David Strauss’s
Das Leben Jesu(1835–1836) or Ernest Renan’sVie de Jésus(1863). None of these momentous developments occurred in Ireland, though the physicist Tyndall (1820–1893)
EPILOGUE: from:
Enigmas of Sacrifice
Abstract: The disruption of their household that the Plunkett family experienced in the years after 1916, and lasting well into the 1920s, inevitably led to some disordering of papers relating to Joseph’s politico-military activities and writings. The distribution of books and papers after his father’s death in 1948 added a further hazard to orderly preservation. It is therefore gratifying that G. N. Plunkett’s archive in the NLI should disclose a small amount of material generated by his eldest son. Mss. 12,009–10 contain two notebooks, the first labeled Philosophy and dating from 1908 to 1909, the second containing literary matter from
Book Title: Mourning Animals-Rituals and Practices Surrounding Animal Death
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Kalof Linda
Abstract: We live more intimately with nonhuman animals than ever before in history. The change in the way we cohabitate with animals can be seen in the way we treat them when they die. There is an almost infinite variety of ways to help us cope with the loss of our nonhuman friends-from burial, cremation, and taxidermy; to wearing or displaying the remains (ashes, fur, or other parts) of our deceased animals in jewelry, tattoos, or other artwork; to counselors who specialize in helping people mourn pets; to classes for veterinarians; to tips to help the surviving animals who are grieving their animal friends; to pet psychics and memorial websites. But the reality is that these practices, and related beliefs about animal souls or animal afterlife, generally only extend, with very few exceptions, to certain kinds of animals-pets. Most animals, in most cultures, are not mourned, and the question of an animal afterlife is not contemplated at all.
Mourning Animalsinvestigates how we mourn animal deaths, which animals are grievable, and what the implications are for all animals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1c6v89n
Discarded Property from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) JOHNSTONE MARY SHANNON
Abstract: Before I began this project, I knew that animal euthanasia was a fact. When I heard the statistics, I naively wanted to believe that those two hundred thousand euthanized dogs and cats were the bad ones—the sick, aggressive, feral, mean dogs and cats that needed to be put down. But
Mourning the Sacrifice: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) MORRIS JAMES
Abstract: The remains of animals, fragments of bone and horn, are often the most common finds recovered from archaeological excavations. The potential of using this material to examine questions of past economics and environment has long been recognized and is viewed by many archaeologists as the primary purpose of animal remains. In part this is due to the paradigm in which zooarchaeology developed and a consequence of practitioners’ concentration on taphonomy and quantification.¹ But the complex intertwined relationships between humans and animals have long been recognized, a good example being Lévi-Strauss’s oft quoted “natural species are chosen, not because they are
All the World and a Little Bit More: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) PRĘGOWSKI MICHAŁ PIOTR
Abstract: Burying companion animals had been practiced by humans as early as 16,500 years BP, as recent archeological findings from the Epipaleolithic cemetery of Uyun al-Hammam suggest.¹ During the Early Neolithic (ca. 8000 BP) the burials of dogs who accompanied hunter-gatherers were already common.² Despite having a significant history, mortuary practices related to companion animals gained social significance not so long ago—in the nineteenth century, following industrialization, urbanization, as well as the rise of the middle class. At that time, purebred dogs ceased to dwell mostly in upper-class estates and became a fixture in the confined spaces of European and
Clutching at Straws: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) WANNER CHRISSIE
Abstract: One summer morning in 2013, I received a call from a vet who had been assisting me in my research on the ethics of pedigree dog breeding. She asked me to meet her at her canine reproduction clinic because she had been contacted by a client whose three-year–old male dog, Jake, had just been diagnosed with terminal cancer and was not expected to see the end of the summer. The owner had been given the diagnosis the previous day, and the clinic was her first port of call. The vet did not offer any hope of a cure for
Mourning the Mundane: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) MONAHAN LINDA
Abstract: I forced myself to look. Turned away from approaching traffic, but visible in profile as my car crawled to a stop was the bloodied face of a fawn. The young deer must have been killed a few days ago as skin was still largely intact, but exposed wounds were black with rot. In that time, tens of thousands of drivers and even more passengers would have passed his or her body. How many noticed? How many had time to take note of the species, possible age, and likely circumstances of the killing? And how many felt compelled to mourn the
Keeping Ghosts Close: from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) GRUEN LORI
Abstract: “I can’t take it anymore! I can’t take all this death!” she howled. Two other sanctuary workers, each with years of experience, made eye contact, wondering: How will this go? Danielle gulped, then switched gears and began reciting Dante’s
Grieving at a Distance from:
Mourning Animals
Author(s) PRIBAC TEYA BROOKS
Abstract: It is not often that, in the daily inundation of concise and carefully selected wordings accompanying images, jointly aiming at bringing the attention of the current-time ever-distracted and ever-rushing viewer to focus on some important plight or another, a verbal-image combination—an Internet meme—strikes me so powerfully as to remain with me for years, possibly forever. This was the case, however, with the photograph of a calf, removed from the mother far too young and placed in a barren crate with barely enough room to move. The calf is looking directly into the camera with pleadingly confused eyes. The
Book Title: Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy-The Living Art of Michael C. Leff
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Henry David
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by introducing the central insights of one of the most innovative and prolific rhetoricians of the twentieth century, Michael C. Leff. This volume charts Leff 's decades-long development as a scholar, revealing both the variety of topics and the approach that marked his oeuvre, as well as his long-standing critique of the disciplinary assumptions of classical, Hellenistic, renaissance, modern, and postmodern rhetoric.Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy includes a synoptic introduction to the evolution of Leff 's thought from his time as a graduate student in the late 1960s to his death in 2010, as well as specific commentary on twenty-four of his most illuminating essays and lectures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1d10hh7
Introduction from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: What distinguishes the study of rhetoric from other pursuits in the liberal arts? From what realms of human existence and expression, of human history, does such study draw its defining character? What, in the end, should be the purposes of rhetorical inquiry? And amid so many competing accounts of discourse, power, and judgment in the contemporary world, how might scholars achieve these purposes through the attitudes and strategies that animate their work?
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy: The Living Art of Michael C. Leffoffers answers to these questions by collecting the key works and introducing the key insights
Tradition and Agency in Humanistic Rhetoric from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I intend to approach the issue of tradition indirectly by first considering some problems connected with rhetorical agency. This strategy might seem awkward, if not actually dangerous, since it entangles two equally complex and disputed concepts. Nevertheless, I hope to show that, within the humanistic strand of rhetoric, these concepts are linked in a way that is not now recognized but has an important bearing on our understanding of both. Specifically, I argue that the humanistic approach entails a productively ambiguous notion of agency that positions the orator both as an individual who leads an audience and as a member
The Uses of Aristotle’s Rhetoric in Contemporary American Scholarship from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: The reception of Aristotle’s
Rhetoricin the twentieth century presents us with a complicated and somewhat ironic tale. Through much of the century, while rhetoric remained an unfashionable subject, the treatise was largely ignored or dismissed by philologists and philosophers, but it was studied avidly by scholars in the language arts, especially by those in the emerging discipline of speech communication and by literary critics concerned about close, formalistic readings of poetic texts. More recently, as interest in rhetoric has revived, theRhetorichas attracted broader attention: Classicists, after a long hiatus, have produced new commentaries and translations; philosophers have
Up from Theory: from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: When I first began to study rhetoric, some forty or so years ago, the terms “substance” and “theory” occupied privileged positions in disciplinary consciousness. “Substance” referred to content or subject matter, and in this pre-postdisciplinary scheme of things, scholars were supposed to work within bounded and clearly differentiated domains of inquiry. A discipline, that is, needed to have a proper subject, and since scholarship demanded rationally refined, systematically organized abstract principles that stood above and apart from particulars, the study of an academic subject required the use of “theory.” In the quasi discipline then known as speech (
requiescat in pace),
Decorum and Rhetorical Interpretation: from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: I want to begin with an unlikely text, Jonathan Valin’s novel
Day of Wrath, a crime novel, in fact a work belonging to that unrefined subgenre known as the “hard-boiled” detective story. The novel’s protagonist and narrator is named Harry Stoner, and the name aptly suggests the qualities of a detective-hero. Stoner, of course, has a hard and tough exterior, but more than that, his name defines a set of psychological traits which set him apart from his environment. He is self-contained, independent, resistant to the corruption that surrounds him, and impervious to social pressure. A rugged individualist and an
Textual Criticism: from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: At the moment of his fatal heart attack last November, Jerry Mohrmann was engaged in his normal academic business. He was writing rhetorical criticism. More specifically, he was completing a close analysis of a short but important speech text—John Calhoun’s oration “On the Reception of the Abolition Petitions.” This study had a specific and seemingly narrow focus, but it arose from a number of complex, general issues and incorporated many of Jerry’s characteristic interests. Thus, to recall the history of this project allows us to learn much not only about the man but also about the vocation he pursued.
Things Made by Words: from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: This essay is in part an effort to influence the continuing debate about textual criticism and critical rhetoric and in part an exercise in self-criticism. Since I am a principal in the debate, I cannot pretend to assume a neutral or disinterested position, but my present concern is not polemic, or at least not explicitly polemic. Instead, following and extending a point made by Dilip Gaonkar,¹ I want to frame the debate in terms that differ from the prevailing conception and in fact differ from the way I have thought about it in the past. Gaonkar argues—quite rightly, I
Hermeneutical Rhetoric from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: “Hermeneutical rhetoric” is the counterpart of Steven Mailloux’s “rhetorical hermeneutics.” In an article bearing that title and more extensively in his book
Rhetorical Power, Mailloux offers an “antitheory theory” of interpretation that situates literary hermeneutics within the context of rhetorical exchange.¹ Traditional literary theory, Mailloux argues, relies upon a general conception of interpretation as the basis for justifying particular interpretative acts. Such “theory” takes two forms—“textual realism,” where meaning is found in the text, and “readerly idealism,” where meaning is made through intersubjective agreements among a community of interpreters. As theories, these positions are diametrically opposed, but, Mailloux maintains,
[PART 4. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: The first two essays in this section—“Lincoln at Cooper Union: A Rhetorical Analysis of the Text” and “Lincoln at Cooper Union: A Rationale for Neo-Classical Criticism”—have earned a place in the literature of rhetorical criticism as milestones of inventional practice. In the generation immediately following their publication in the early 1970s, the Cooper Union essays, each written with G. P. Mohrmann, challenged rhetorical critics of diverse theoretic tendencies to reconsider the potential resources of a rich heritage that the neo-Aristotelian program had at best only hinted at and, at worst, had discredited and distorted rather than deployed. The
[PART 5. Introduction] from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: Teaching rhetoric, like rhetorical criticism, was one of Leff’s living arts. In the course of his varied career, he taught at Indiana University, the University of California at Davis, and the University of Wisconsin, and he chaired the Departments of Communication at both Northwestern University and the University of Memphis. He mentored countless undergraduate and graduate students at those institutions; he was also an active presence in the lives of students beyond his own university. Leff worked to build an infrastructure for rhetoric’s future that could unite students and teachers of rhetoric across the country, even the world. Scarcely a
Teaching Public Speaking as Composition from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: This article is intended as a call for reform, but I must begin by confessing some uncertainty about what it is that I am attempting to reform. The fact is that I do not have a secure understanding about the state of the art as it is now practiced in teaching public speech. I have not made a survey of the methods now used in classroom instruction, nor undertaken a systematic study of the textbooks, and I have not reviewed the current scholarly literature. What I have to say is based upon personal experience and depends on anecdotes, hunches, and
Theory and Practice in Undergraduate Education from:
Rethinking Rhetorical Theory, Criticism, and Pedagogy
Abstract: The question posed for this panel is both new and old. In the context of our own lives and careers, it is something new to question the nature and role of theory in our work. As Jo Sprague said, in her letter attempting to orient today’s speakers, not so long ago we were quite confident that we knew what theory was and how to use it as teachers. Theory, on this view, was something that stood apart from and above practice. It consisted in a set of hierarchically ordered abstract propositions (i.e., laws or rules) that were capable of explaining
Book Title: To Become an American-Immigrants and Americanization Campaigns of the Early Twentieth Century
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Hahner Leslie A.
Abstract: Pledging allegiance, singing the "Star-Spangled Banner," wearing a flag pin-these are all markers of modern patriotism, emblems that announce the devotion of American citizens. Most of these nationalistic performances were formulized during the early twentieth century and driven to new heights by the panic surrounding national identity during World War I. In
To Become an AmericanLeslie A. Hahner argues that, in part, the Americanization movement engendered the transformation of patriotism during this period. Americanization was a massive campaign designed to fashion immigrants into perfect Americans-those who were loyal in word, deed, and heart. The larger outcome of this widespread movement was a dramatic shift in the nation's understanding of Americanism. Employing a rhetorical lens to analyze the visual and aesthetic practices of Americanization, Hahner contends that Americanization not only tutored students in the practices of citizenship but also created a normative visual metric that modified how Americans would come to understand, interpret, and judge their own patriotism and that of others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt1tqx76n
Conclusion from:
To Become an American
Abstract: In his 1915 Flag Day speech, President Wilson argued that the flag was an emblem of the nation’s possibilities. That token reminded citizens that “national life” was created not by abstract ideals, but by the “actual daily endeavors of a great people to do the tasks of the day and live up to the ideals of honesty and righteousness and just conduct.”¹ His words tied behavior to national ideals—an association that heralded the actions of “sober, quiet” citizens, not “swashbuckler[s].”² His goal was to honor the quotidian nature of citizenship, those who did not attract attention to their patriotism
Introduction from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Abstract: Our globalized world of today brings with it a unity of humankind such as never experienced before. Opportunities to fi ght hunger and poverty on a worldwide level and to act globally against the threats of climate change have come within the reach of humankind. Globalization, however, also brings with it terrorist threats and related apocalyptic dangers. Concerning religion, the world of today faces two important challenges. We need to overcome an all too simple secularism that reduces religion to a solely private matter, and we have to acknowledge the plurality of religions at the local as well as at
Sacrifice in Hegel and Girard from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Ramelow Anselm Tilman
Abstract: A comparison between G. W. F. Hegel and René Girard on the notion of sacrifice might seem far-fetched; at least it is not immediately clear how to identify the points of contact between both theories. And yet, in a recent text
(Battling to the End)as well as in conversation, Girard recalls the great influence Hegel had had early on in his thought. Similar to many other French intellectuals in the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s, Hegel’s influence seems to have come to him by way of Alexandre Kojève. It is noteworthy that an important essay by Georges Bataille connected Kojève’s
Why Rousseau Cannot Laugh: from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Alberg Jeremiah
Abstract: I begin with a quote from the introduction to René Girard’s
Achever Clausewitz.¹ I want to use this quote to extract a kind of operational definition of what it means to “achever,” or, according to the English translation, “to complete,” a thinker and then use this as a programmatic outline for this attempt to understand Rousseau and his status as a religious thinker. Girard writes:
The Roots of Violence: from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) von Rospatt Alexander
Abstract: René Girard’s complex and sophisticated theory of sacrifice offers insights into the workings of human society that transcend culture and time and, while privileging Christianity and modernity, claim a certain universality. This invites scholars of other cultures and religions to consider the applicability of Girardian thought to their own fields of study. As scholars of Buddhism we take up this challenge by bringing Buddhism into conversation with Girard. Instead of concentrating on a particular text (Schlieter 2009) or genre (Hahn 2009) or practice (Arifuku 2009), we aim for a more comprehensive and general engagement with Girard by suggesting how Buddhism
Religious Sacrifice, Social Scapegoating, and Self-Justification from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Peters Ted
Abstract: When the term
sacrificeis used to designate practices common to various world religions and used to designate a historical scapegoat at the founding of a social order, are we referring to the same thing? Perhaps not. Th e sacrifi ce of which the Girard school speaks applies to any social order—whether a political order, an ideological organization, a social movement, or such—not merely to an established religious tradition.¹ So, let us pose the question: What is the value of Girardian theory? Is it to illuminate the religious concept of sacrifice or to illuminate human nature in general?
Girard and the Analogy of Desire from:
Mimetic Theory and World Religions
Author(s) Alison James
Abstract: If the devil is in the details, then God is in the prepositions, and I want today to look at one such preposition: the little word “for.” I think this to be the most diffi cult and delicate word to parse in the whole of theology. Let me explain why. As St. Th omas Aquinas taught us, we cannot say of God what God is, only what God is not. Th is very properly negative approach to God is vital if we are to avoid idolatry. Idolatry is where whatever passes as “god” is in fact a function of our
Conclusion from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: In Girard’s thought, this dimension arises from the consideration that, as a result of the demystifying action of the Gospels, the sacrificial crisis in which we are living can no longer be resolved by yet another victimary expulsion. Moreover, humanity’s present military
Transition: from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Author(s) Ell Theodore
Abstract: Since 1961, Girard’s production has grown without interruption, to at least the same degree as his fame. Without doubt, the fascination with Girard’s thought derives from the fact that he has constructed a true “speculative cathedral,” a theory that proposes to explain everything from myths to rituals, Greek tragedies to modern novels, holocausts of historical magnitude to everyday customs. At first glance, it would seem that Girard has changed little or nothing of his speculative construction since then, but if we look closely, there are noticeable problems and corrections that threaten the very foundations of mimetic theory. Indeed, recent criticism
The Self in Crisis from:
Intellectual Sacrifice and Other Mimetic Paradoxes
Abstract: Research work in the humanities in general, and in philosophy in particular, is today looked at with a certain degree of suspicion, for various, and sometimes even opposed, reasons. On one hand, work on subtle epistemological questions and/or historical analysis of the thought of past philosophers is regarded as a navel-gazing activity, otiose at best, wasteful at worst. On the other hand, when philosophy and intellectual analysis come to focus on popular culture phenomena, such as comics, movies, and TV programs, they are regarded as trivializing ideas and as committing themselves to marginal and eventually unimportant work. One possible solution
INTRODUCTION. from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: Oprah Winfrey, icon of popular culture, pens a monthly column titled “What I Know For Sure.” Less bold than Oprah, who has been espousing sureties for years, I am certain of few things. However, beyond a doubt, I know that our early life experiences shape our lives in profound ways. My conviction has been tutored by psychoanalytic theory, which offers a compelling account of the lasting impact on us of our early experiences, especially within the family.
PRELUDE. from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: Siblings play a critical role in mimetic rivalries that characterize the family romance. As a consequence, our relations with siblings anticipate, for better or worse, later adult relationships. As we grow and our world expands beyond the immediate family to encompass other relationships, we may remain caught in rivalries that have characterized our initial relationship with our siblings. Or, diverging from that scenario, we may experience with our siblings and with others a supportive intimacy that enables us to overcome the effects of trauma and violence in our lives.
CHAPTER 4 The House of Labdacus: from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: Sophocles’s three Theban plays—
Antigone, Oedipus the King, Oedipus at Colonus—are not formally a trilogy. Sophocles wrote the plays across the span of his career andAntigone, whose dramatic action comes late in the chronology of Oedipus’s family, was likely written and performed a decade beforeOedipus the Kingand over three decades beforeOedipus at Colonus.¹ As a consequence, the plays that comprise the Theban cycle are most often understood to share a familial narrative drawn from myths rather than a single artistic frame of reference. InOedipus the King, Oedipus fulfills an oracle when he kills his
CHAPTER 6 Antigone and the Ethics of Intimacy from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: Traumatic violence has caught Oedipus in an ongoing repetition of mimetic rivalry, rooting him in an eternal present. Compellingly demonstrated not only in
Oedipus the Kingbut also inOedipus at Colonus, his trauma is visceral. For Oedipus’s suffering is written on his body: his unsightly face, expressed pain, and profound exhaustion offer graphic testimony.¹ Others reflect back to Oedipus their horror: Oedipusisa polluting presence.² Attentive to Oedipus’s distress, in this chapter I examine the representation of trauma as well as actions that promise to break open constraints on Oedipus, permitting the transformation of Oedipus’s memories.³ InOedipus
PRELUDE. from:
Intimate Domain
Abstract: The father is dead. On this point, Julia Kristeva and René Girard agree. What then can be said any longer of the paternal function? What legacy of the father persists in ongoing economies of sacrifice? And, if the father is not actually dead but only missing in action within the family romance, site of our earliest mimetic rivalries, what role, if any, could a father play in an intimate domain characterized by positive, nonconflictual mimesis? May a father yet live within intimate spaces? Endeavoring to answer these questions, I turn to literature, for Girard and Kristeva agree that literature is
Book Title: Post-Realism-The Rhetorical Turn in International Relations
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Hariman Robert
Abstract: Beer and Hariman provide a coherent set of essays that trace and challenge the tradition of realism which has dominated the thinking of academics and practitioners alike. These timely essays set out a systematic investigation of the major realist writers of the Post- War era, the foundational concepts of international politics, and representative case studies of political discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt5q8
Realism and Rhetoric in International Relations from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Hariman Robert
Abstract: The conduct of international relations has always involved skillful use of persuasive discourse. Relations between states might depend on factors such as military capability and natural resources, but the decisions made about the conduct of peace and war are also a result of the successes, failures, habits, and nuances of persuasive appeal among elites and publics alike. For the most part, however, academic research in international relations has not focused on the forms and effects of conversations, speeches, debates, narratives, or discourses in political practice. This systematic inattention to the role of words in foreign affairs is the result of
[II Introduction] from:
Post-Realism
Abstract: Critics of realism often point to its impersonality. Realist doctrine presumes an objective world that operates according to natural laws; its first lesson is to look for those constraints on action that will thwart one’s intentions; it culminates in rational analysis. Yet this impersonal model can not be quite right, for it is difficult to think of realism without thinking of realists. Realism is not only a set of precepts but also the personae of Kissinger, Kennan, Niebuhr, Morgenthau, and others. It is both a tradition of political thought and a genealogy of thinkers, each of whom has affected its
Henry Kissinger: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Hariman Robert
Abstract: One consequence of realism being deeply embedded in Western culture is that it can operate effectively in fragments. The entire code can be activated any time we are reminded, e.g., that people are by nature self-interested, that law is useless without enforcement, or that testaments of common ideals are mere rhetoric. As we accept these and similar nostrums, we enter a world of states competing for power, experts capable of calculating advantages, and idealists and other amateurs counseling folly. As these beliefs cohere, they shape our attitudes, our sensitivities (or lack of them), and our political identity.
Realism Masking Fear: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) L.Ivie Robert
Abstract: Fear is a feature of human nature that political realists typically factor into their pessimistic view of international affairs. The world as it actually “is,” they assume, consists of nation-states inherently conflicted over competing interests and limited resources, arbitrating their differences and seeking security through the elusive agency of power. Humankind is motivated less by morality and law than by fear and greed, motives which must be managed through the intelligent application of power—not just military power, but economic and ideological might as well. Providing for national security and fulfilling national interests are constant aspirations and tenuous achievements in
E. H. Carr: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Jones Charles
Abstract: T
he Twenty Years’ Crisisis the of the work of E. H. Carr most familiar to students of international relations. In this book Carr took great pains to situate himself precisely half way between utopianism and realism.¹ Yet the strategy has generally been regarded as little more than a flourish. Carr has consistently been taken for a political realist. A lecture not long ago by William Fox, subtle and knowledgeable in its treatment of Carr, unhesitatingly referred to “Carr’s realist vision” and his “version of realist doctrine,” and Carr certainly exhibited many of the characteristic marks of the realist school.²
Martin Wight: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Epp Roger
Abstract: Martin Wight’s reputation as a realist rests primarily on two texts. The first is his 1946 tract,
Power Politics,which framed what became the conventional analysis of the League of Nations in the language associated now with realism: in the end, the League was a facade made possible, then shattered by a shifting balance of power; it had not supplanted the international anarchy.Power Politicswas greeted by one emigre scholar as a “brilliant summary of ideas which we share”—ideas which in the “appeasement period” had been a “minor heresy.”³ The second text is the well-known essay whose title—“Why
Hans J. Morgenthau In Defense of the National Interest: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Goodnight G. Thomas
Abstract: The dramatic ending of the Second World War—the obliteration of Hiroshima and Nagasaki, the revelation of the holocaust, the establishment of the United Nations, and the transformation of the Soviet Union from wartime ally to global competitor—challenged prevailing precepts and practices of international relations. Abjuring the traditional language of diplomacy, elite and public policy discourses of the 1940s were spoken within the horizons of global necessities and apocalyptic fears. A Soviet atomic test in 1949 yet again disrupted the contexts of international relations. “In truth, the first atomic explosion on Russian soil has shattered American foreign policy as
[III Introduction] from:
Post-Realism
Abstract: One rewrites in order to improve a text. Sometimes the result is thought to be the better expression of an original meaning; at other times, it extends the idea in a new direction. In any case, textual revision is a process characterized by imperfection, change, negotiation, and fallibility. Traditionally, realism has seemed to be above this process: One identifies the relations of power or suffers the consequences. This attitude is reflected in the standard invocation of the classics of realism, which are seen as equivalent statements of a core doctrine of universal truths. From Thucydides to Machiavelli to Morgenthau, there
Rethinking Sovereignty from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Elshtain Jean Bethke
Abstract: Sovereignty is the vote. The union card. The insignia of membership in the club. Less exclusive than it once was, the club now encompasses much of the globe and those not members at present continue to seek entry, often utilizing rather impolite methods to that end. Sovereignty remains the “essential qualification for full membership in international society, or, to express the point more comprehensively, the qualification which makes a state eligible for full membership.”¹ Sovereignty names an aspiration; serves as a goad to action; signifies an accomplishment; defines an opposition (state/society); and encodes a legalistic construction (formal sovereignty).
Metaphors of Prestige and Reputation in American Foreign Policy and American Realism from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Milliken Jennifer L.
Abstract: During the Vietnam War, the objectives of American policy toward Vietnam centered not on the strategic importance of the “real estate” involved, but on the effects a defeat in Vietnam would have on the United States’ prestige in the world and its reputation for keeping its commitments.¹ American policy makers spoke often of these considerations. And they measured American actions in Vietnam against them, weighing the costs in lives and resources of deepening intervention against the costs in prestige and reputation of halting that intervention.² If prestige and reputation are, as many claim, the intangible side of power, then in
A Reinterpretation of Realism: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Derian James Der
Abstract: Realism. Historical, social, philosophical, political, economic, artistic, cinematic, literary, legal realism. Machiavellian, Hobbesian, Rousseauian, Hegelian, Weberian, Kissingerian realism. Optimist, pessimist, fatalist realism. Naive, vulgar, magical realism. Technical, practical, empirical realism. Classical and scientific realism. Structural, structurationist, poststructuralist realism. Minimalist, maximalist, fundamentalist, potentialist realism. Positivist, post-positivist, liberal, neoliberal institutionalist, radical, radical interpretivist realism. Critical, nuclear, epistemic realism. Sur-, super-, photo-, anti-, neo-, post-realism. And now at your local malls and supermarket check-outs, hyper-realism.
[IV Introduction] from:
Post-Realism
Abstract: From the perspective of realism, writing policy is the least of the tasks of statecraft. Action, not words, is the credo, and written statements are incidental accoutrements/or means of deception/or the hallmark of institutions that lack the force to back up their pronouncements. Once again, however, the realist is caught unaware. As the essays in this section demonstrate, foreign policy is a mixture of manifold practices of composition. Whether dependent on unacknowledged texts, or extending cultural practices of racial labeling into state action, or rein scribing the general text of modernity on indigenous peoples, or constructing a common narrative through
Rhetorics of Place Characteristics in High-Level U.S. Foreign Policy Making from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Majeski Stephen J.
Abstract: At the Yalta Conference, in February 1945, Roosevelt and Stalin briefly discussed Indochina and the role that the French should play therein after the world war ended. During their colloquy, “the President said that the Indochinese were people of small stature, like the Javanese and Burmese, and were not warlike.”¹ Five years later, Roosevelt’s successor approved an official policy statement in which those Indochinese fighting against the French were described as “a determined adversary who manufactures effective arms locally ... and who was, and is able, to disrupt and harass almost any area within Vietnam ... at will.”² In the
Realistic Rhetoric but not Realism: from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Boynton G. R.
Abstract: The speeches of United States senators are important political data. The Senate has major foreign policy responsibilities under the American Constitution. Senators are substantial American political leaders, playing a significant foreign policy role; their speeches are notable verbal political acts. Actions and events, without words to explain them, are mute. When senators talk, they articulate an American vision of the map of the world. They express many of the thoughts and motivations that lie behind American foreign policy. They give foreign policy a meaning that American citizens can understand.
Strategic Intelligence and Discursive Realities from:
Post-Realism
Author(s) Hariman Robert
Abstract: The realist is right about one thing: Much of the time, international politics boils down to strategy. The calculation of advantage in the game of nations is the first condition, the final necessity, and—not to be underestimated—the continuing attraction for those who presume to be players. Therefore, it is not enough for post-realists to articulate a broader conception of scientific inquiry; if we are to move beyond realism, we shall have to provide decision makers with better instruments for strategic analysis. It may seem that these two objectives are mutually contradictory. For example, the post-realist perspective exemplifies the
Book Title: The Genesis of Desire- Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Webb Eugene
Abstract: We seem to be abandoning the codes that told previous generations who they should love. But now that many of us are free to choose whoever we want, nothing is less certain. The proliferation of divorces and separations reveal a dynamic we would rather not see: others sometimes reject us as passionately as we are attracted to them.Our desire makes us sick. The throes of rivalry are at the heart of our attraction to one another. This is the central thesis of Jean-Michel Oughourlian's
The Genesis of Desire, where the war of the sexes is finally given a scientific explanation. The discovery of mirror neurons corroborates his ideas, clarifying the phenomena of empathy and the mechanisms of violent reciprocity.How can a couple be saved when they have declared war on one another? By helping them realize that desire originates not in the self but in the other. There are strategies that can help, which Dr. Oughourlian has prescribed successfully to his patients. This work, alternating between case studies and more theoretical statements, convincingly defends the possibility that breakups need not be permanent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt5s7
Introduction from:
The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: During my years of clinical practice, however, something became
CHAPTER 1 Psychological Movement from:
The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: Every movement requires an
energy, a “driving force.” It also supposes afinality,that is, agoaltoward which its trajectory can be oriented—some object, an idea or an ideal that can order it, attract it, give it definiteness. The
CHAPTER 3 Universal Mimesis from:
The Genesis of Desire
Abstract: What is it that makes for the cohesion of the human race? What can explain the way human beings take such an interest in each other and try to live together? What is it that both draws them together and pushes them apart, unites them and sets them in opposition to one another? These are questions that philosophers, anthropologists, and psychologists have been intrigued by for centuries. Each discipline has been exploring along its own lines the mysterious, universal attraction that human beings exert on each other, and each has tried to find its own answers. Some of the intuitions
Book Title: Shared Land/Conflicting Identity-Trajectories of Israeli & Palestinian Symbol Use
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Frank David A.
Abstract: Shared Land/Conflicting Identity: Trajectories of Israeli and Palestinian Symbol Useargues that rhetoric, ideology, and myth have played key roles in influencing the development of the 100-year conflict between first the Zionist settlers and the current Israeli people and the Palestinian residents in what is now Israel. The Israeli-Palestinian conflict is usually treated as an issue of land and water. While these elements are the core of the conflict, they are heavily influenced by the symbols used by both peoples to describe, understand, and persuade each other. The authors argue that symbolic practices deeply influenced the Oslo Accords, and that the breakthrough in the peace process that led to Oslo could not have occurred without a breakthrough in communication styles.Rowland and Frank develop four crucial ideas on social development: the roles of rhetoric, ideology, and myth; the influence of symbolic factors; specific symbolic factors that played a key role in peace negotiations; and the identification and value of criteria for evaluating symbolic practices in any society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt60k
Introduction from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: Two of the most important developments of the twentieth century have been the return of large numbers of Jews to Israel (and the creation of the state of Israel following that return), along with the rise of a Palestinian people. In this book, we illuminate these events through an analysis of the trajectories of Palestinian and Israeli symbol use over roughly the last century. Our thesis is that symbolic practices—speeches, essays, poetry, and other public communication—have played a crucial role in shaping each society and the conflict between them.
1 The Symbolic Roots of the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: Many of those who have focused on the handshake and other events in the Middle East peace process have explained the movement toward peace based on historical factors such as the demise
9 Symbolic Stagnation and Ideological Calcification in Israel from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: The roughly fifteen-year period from Begin’s resignation as prime minister to the election of Benjamin Netanyahu can best be understood as a period of symbolic stagnation. The symbolic equation that had been established in the late 1970s and early 1980s remained firmly in place. Labor’s perspective, especially as enunciated by Shimon Peres, reduced itself to ungrounded pragmatism, what might be called a “Let’s Make a Deal” approach, in which there was no firm ideological principle to guide action. The absence of a grounded perspective on security created a symbolic weakness that became especially obvious in the aftermath of terrorist incidents.
12 From Symbolic Stasis to the End of Revisionism from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: The 1996 Israeli election reflected the stasis that characterized Israeli politics for the fifteen years following the war in Lebanon. Labor and Likud existed in a kind of symbolic balance. The pragmatic Labor approach gave the party the advantage on “peace,” while Likud’s ideology and myth gave it the advantage on “security” and commitment to Eretz Israel. In this period, the stasis was broken only once, by the election of Yitzhak Rabin, whose personal credibility and gruff style reassured many Israelis that they could have both peace and security. After the death of Rabin, Shimon Peres was unable to marshal
13 Symbol Use and the Israeli-Palestinian Conflict from:
Shared Land/Conflicting Identity
Abstract: In the previous chapters, we have described how the hundred years of conflict between first Zionism and then Israel and the Palestinians has been shaped by the interaction of the symbolic trajectories of Labor and Revisionist Zionism and of the Palestinian people in relation to the events in the world. We now turn to a discussion of their shared symbolic trajectory and an evaluation of their symbolic evolution. At the end of the chapter, we draw implications from the symbolic practices found in the Palestinian-Israeli conflict for Western liberal democratic societies in general and the United States in particular.
Book Title: Christianity and the Mass Media in America-Toward a Democratic Accommodation
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): Schultze Quentin J.
Abstract: The mass media and religious groups in America regularly argue about news bias, sex and violence on television, movie censorship, advertiser boycotts, broadcast and film content rating systems, government regulation of the media, the role of mass evangelism in a democracy, and many other issues. In the United States the major disputes between religion and the media usually have involved Christian churches or parachurch ministries, on the one hand, and the so-called secular media, on the other. Often the Christian Right locks horns with supposedly liberal Eastern media elite and Hollywood entertainment companies. When a major Protestant denomination calls for an economic boycott of Disney, the resulting news reports suggest business as usual in the tensions between faith groups and media empires.Schultze demonstrates how religion and the media in America have borrowed each other's rhetoric. In the process, they have also helped to keep each other honest, pointing out respective foibles and pretensions. Christian media have offered the public as well as religious tribes some of the best media criticism- better than most of the media criticism produced by mainstream media themselves. Meanwhile, mainstream media have rightly taken particular churches to task for misdeeds as well as offered some surprisingly good depictions of religious life.The tension between Christian groups and the media in America ultimately is a good thing that can serve the interest of democratic life. As Alexis de Tocqueville discovered in the 1830s, American Christianity can foster the "habits of the heart" that ward off the antisocial acids of radical individualism. And, as John Dewey argued a century later, the media offer some of our best hopes for maintaining a public life in the face of the religious tribalism that can erode democracy from within. Mainstream media and Christianity will always be at odds in a democracy. That is exactly the way it should be for the good of each one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7zt6fv
Introduction from:
Christianity and the Mass Media in America
Abstract: I address in this book the relationship between the mass media and Christian ʺtribesʺ in America. At its core this relationship is a dynamic tension between civil generality, on the one hand, and a sectarian particularity, on the other. The Christian metanarrative of transcendence assumes a theistic perspective where God acts in real human history; this God-oriented view of human affairs is never fully in accord with the mainstream mediaʹs own subnarratives of immanence, which morally assume that human action is the beginning and end of history. Nevertheless, religious groups and the media borrow each otherʹs rhetoric both to embrace
1 Conversing about Faith and Media in America from:
Christianity and the Mass Media in America
Abstract: A lexis de Tocqueville recalled reading a news story during his visit to the United States in the 1830s about a court in New York where a witness declared that he did not believe in the existence of God or the immortality of the soul. As a result of the witnessʹs confession, the judge refused ʺto accept his oath, given, he said, that the witness had destroyed in advance all the faith that could have been put in his words.ʺ Apparently astonished by the story, Tocqueville added to his report the fact that the newspaper offered no commentary about the
René et moi from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Gans Eric
Abstract: I first encountered René Girard on entering the graduate program in Romance languages at Johns Hopkins University in 1960, just before the publication of
Mensonge romantique et vérité romanesquein 1961 brought him wide public recognition.¹ Although I was immediately struck by the power and range of his intellect, it was only with the appearance ofLa violence et le sacréin 1972 that I realized that his mimetic theory of desire was in fact the kernel of a radically new anthropology.²
My Encounter with René Girard from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bandera Cesáreo
Abstract: It happened in the town of East Aurora, in Western New York, where René lived at the time. We had just finished lunch, and he was talking passionately about his work. “I’m convinced,” he said, “I can explain the passage from animal to man.” I will never forget it. My reaction was a bit nervous. I think I told him, only half jokingly, that he should not say such things in public. People might think he was going a little over the edge. But I was impressed by the sheer intellectual power and the scope of what he was explaining
My Life with René from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Oughourlian Jean-Michel
Abstract: In my adolescence and youth, I was an imitator, and I used my gift to amuse my classmates and friends as well as to play practical jokes, such as mimicking the voice of one of my parents’ friends and phoning his butler to order dinner for twelve for that very evening—a prank that I found hilarious but that resulted in some stern reprimands. My faculty for imitation was a natural outgrowth of my curiosity
Eucharisto, René Girard: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Lépine Jacques-Jude
Abstract: In my early twenties, I joined a Byzantine Catholic commune in the south of France, La Communauté de la Théophanie. It was at the crossroads of a number of influences, especially Gandhian nonviolence and the discovery and practice of Eastern Christianity, along with a third influence, the Charismatic Renewal, with its religious fervor and warm ecumenical impulse. Nonviolence was a whole program. It meant a simple, rural daily lifestyle tending toward economic self-sufficiency and a refusal to participate in any form of violence, direct or institutional, such as military service. A disciple and friend of Gandhi, Lanza del Vasto, had
Breakout from the Belly of the Beast from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hamerton-Kelly Robert
Abstract: We are asked to tell how “the encounter with his [Girard’s] work has changed your own work,” how it changed the way we do things in all the contexts about which we are willing to write. My encounter with Girard had a great impact on me and I shall try to tell of it in three contexts: general experience (anthropology), biblical interpretation (hermeneutic), and pastoral work (psychology and sociology). Our mandate means that my remarks will perforce be unusually personal; nevertheless, I shall try to stay out of the swamp of sentimentality and off the mountaintop of self-attested success. There
For René Girard: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Golsan Richard J.
Abstract: I am very pleased and honored to contribute to this volume honoring René Girard. Girard’s ideas have been so important to me in my professional and personal life that it is very difficult to assess that impact in a brief narrative. In effect, I “live” with Girard every day and find it hard to imagine negotiating the world without the benefit of his insights.
Dispatch from the Girardian Boundary from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Mabee Charles
Abstract: René Girard is another in the increasingly long list of modern thinkers who remind us that the world we live in is not quite what it appears to be. The list of these venerable hermeneuticians of suspicion is by now quite long, exceeding by several orders of magnitude what might be termed “the Big Three” of Nietzsche, Marx, and Freud (should Darwin and Feuerbach have been left off the original list?). More contemporary members of the club might include by common agreement such iconoclasts as Foucault, Derrida, Rorty, Ellul, Kuhn, Deleuze, Lyotard, Feyerabend, and Dawkins, among others. And why exactly
Things Still Hidden . . . from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Bartlett Anthony
Abstract: We would have to wait just a little to see these features of the parable converge with fact—a new millennium, a new world order. In the meantime, however, in that same storied year, literature and history came together for me at a level more truthful even than Orwell’s masterpiece. Another book fell into my hands, one that established a
Sacrifice and Sexual Difference: from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Reineke Martha
Abstract: The groundwork for my encounter with the work of René Girard was laid early in my life. I grew up in a tumultuous era that sensitized me to violence. Trips with my parents through the U.S. South enabled me to observe the persistence of Jim Crow in “colored” and “white” schools. Even as a child, I saw and felt that race-based disparities in educational opportunity constituted a reprehensible act of violence. The Vietnam War shaped my experience in high school and college. Especially in college, I brought the resources of my liberal education to bear upon the violence around me.
Mimetic Theory and Christian Theology in the Twenty-first Century from:
For René Girard
Author(s) Hardin Michael E.
Abstract: In 1944, from his prison cell at Tegel, Dietrich Bonhoeffer wondered whether Christianity had in fact outlived its usefulness as a religion.¹ His sentiments have been echoed in the subsequent half-century since, particularly with the rise of the postmodern climate. It would not be difficult to multiply logarithmically these critiques of Christianity. That there has been an expulsion of things Christian from the academy there is no doubt; more notably, it is paralleled in the expulsion of Jesus from the Christian churches.
Book Title: Nosotros-A Study of Everyday Meanings in Hispano New Mexico
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Author(s): KORTE ALVIN O.
Abstract: Much knowledge and understanding can be generated from the experiences of everyday life. In this engaging study, Alvin O. Korte examines how this concept applies to Spanish-speaking peoples adapted to a particular locale, specifically the Hispanos and Hispanas of northern New Mexico. Drawing on social philosopher Alfred Schutz's theory of typification, Korte looks at how meaning and identity are crafted by quotidian activities. Incorporating phenomenological and ethnomethodological strategies, the author investigates several aspects of local Hispano culture, including the oral tradition, leave-taking, death and remembrances of the dead, spirituality, and the circle of life. Although avoiding a social-problems approach, the book devotes necessary attention to
mortificación(the death of the self),desmadre(chaos and disorder), andmancornando(cuckoldry).Nosotrosis a vivid and insightful exploration with applications in numerous fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/j.ctt7ztb3t
CHAPTER 1 Phenomenology of Everyday Life: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: This book is a study of epistemology, which I define as what people know in their daily lives. Becker and Laing are used as starting points for a general depiction of Hispano thought, which includes the study of how language develops an understanding of the world of everyday life. Language usage is the vehicle for understanding how people name events, interactions, attitudes, and values. Understanding how words are used to construct the edifice of everyday life is best accomplished by using concepts from phenomenology.
CHAPTER 2 The Oral Tradition: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: In one sense this knowledge has the characteristic of processed knowledge or
CHAPTER 3 Mortification, an Interactional Perspective: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: Yo tengo mortificaciones; tu tienes mortificaciones; todos tenemos mortificaciones!We all have minor and major troubles that beset us. This chapter discusses a single concept,mortificación,but the method of examination can be used to clarify other terms relating to people’s well-being. What is taken up in these pages is the intentionality of consciousness of the emotion calledmortificación,the experience of being mortified. The consciousness of mortification is experienced in the consciousness of body and in social interaction, what the phenomenologists call intersubjectivity. What is presented in these pages is not new, since it is well known in the
CHAPTER 4 Shame, Respect, and Joking Exchanges: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: In 1922, John Dewey wrote, “These two facts, that moral judgment and moral responsibility are the work wrought in us by the social environment, signify that all morality is social; not because we
oughtto take into account the effect of our acts upon the welfare of others, but because of facts. Othersdotake into account what we do and they respond accordingly to our acts” (Dewey 1922, 316).
CHAPTER 6 Being in Prison: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: Hispano life in prison is poorly documented. This is due in part to lack of access and in part to the fact that men in prison as brothers, husbands, or sweethearts are often forgotten by society. The work reported in this chapter is partly drawn from a study conducted many years ago in a southwestern state. Other material was collected at a correctional facility in another state. I refer to these institutions as CF I and CF II. For purposes of continued confidentiality I do not identify the facilities further and I have given the men fictitious names in this
CHAPTER 9 Leave Taking: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: Hispanos in northern New Mexico commemorate the death of a loved one with a written narrative referred to as a recuerdo (a remembrance). These narratives (or ballads) share many characteristics of the corrido and its forerunner, the Spanish romance. The romance, a popular form of epic poetry, and the corrido depict events in the lives of heroic, historical, and common folk. Both reflect historical events, describe injustices, depict social values, and present moral teachings elicited from catastrophic social events, for example, a tragic murder, a sentence of death, or imprisonment for a heinous act. An important and fundamental aspect of
CHAPTER 10 From Tombstones to Star Trek: from:
Nosotros
Abstract: Joseph Campbell raises an interesting question about the differing views of death in planting cultures, on the one hand, and hunting and forest cultures, on the other. Planting cultures turn to the plant as a metaphor for understanding death. The self-regenerative powers of the plant mean that its nature can be characterized as “continuing inbeingness.” Pruning is helpful to a plant because it stimulates new growth. Out of the rot in a forest comes new life. Cut a branch from a tree, and new suckers appear in profusion. They are the “bright new little children who are part of the
Book Title: Memory Work-Anne Truitt and Sculpture
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): de Baca Miguel
Abstract: Memory Workdemonstrates the evolution of the pioneering minimalist sculptor Anne Truitt. An artist determined to make her way through a new aesthetic in the 1960s, Truitt was tireless in her pursuit of a strong cultural voice. At the heart of her practice was the key theme of memory, which enabled her not only to express personal experience but also to address how perception was changing for a contemporary viewership. She gravitated toward the idea that an object in one's focus could unleash a powerful return to the past through memory, which in turn brings a fresh, even critical, attention to the present moment. In addition to the artist's own popular published writings, which detail the unique challenges facing female artists,Memory Workdraws on unpublished manuscripts, private recordings, and never-before-seen working drawings to validate Truitt's original ideas about the link between perception and mnemonic reference in contemporary art. De Baca offers an insider's view of the artist's unstinting efforts to realize her artistic vision, as well as the cultural, political, and historical resonances her oeuvre has for us today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19633fp
1 FIRST (1961) from:
Memory Work
Abstract: In 1961, Anne Truitt made a sculpture, about fifty-four inches tall, called First (plate 1). Truitt’s title signaled a critical shift in which the artist broke away from the highly wrought sculptural experimentation characteristic of her style in the late 1950s and began to concentrate on formal simplicity. These concerns are articulated clearly in First, which is pared down to basics: three vertical, white, painted wooden planks cut to resemble the pickets of an iconic American picket fence. The simplicity of design and construction suggest that Truitt was forging connections to minimalism. Yet if we are to properly historicize First
4 TRUITT IN TOKYO (1964–1967) from:
Memory Work
Abstract: Truitt had breakthroughs in Tokyo, but they were hard won. Despite the professional recognition that Truitt achieved while she lived in Japan from 1964 to 1967, it was a time of deep isolation, sadness, and frustration with her studio practice. At the turn of the 1970s, Truitt looked back on the sculptures she made in Japan and found them “simply intelligent,” “lifeless,” and inconsistent with the conceptual thrust of her work since First — and in December 1971, she had the majority of these Japanese works destroyed, nineteen sculptures in all.¹ Yet, despite this iconoclasm, after Truitt returned to the United
Book Title: The Red Sea-In Search of Lost Space
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Wick Alexis
Abstract: The Red Sea has, from time immemorial, been one of the world's most navigated spaces, in the pursuit of trade, pilgrimage and conquest. Yet this multidimensional history remains largely unrevealed by its successive protagonists. Intrigued by the absence of a holistic portrayal of this body of water and inspired by Fernand Braudel's famous work on the Mediterranean, this book brings alive a dynamic Red Sea world across time, revealing the particular features of a unique historical actor. In capturing this heretofore lost space, it also presents a critical, conceptual history of the sea, leading the reader into the heart of Eurocentrism. The Sea, it is shown, is a vital element of the modern philosophy of history.Alexis Wick is not satisfied with this inclusion of the Red Sea into history and attendant critique of Eurocentrism. Contrapuntally, he explores how the world and the sea were imagined differently before imperial European hegemony. Searching for the lost space of Ottoman visions of the sea,
The Red Seamakes a deeper argument about the discipline of history and the historian's craft.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19633g6
ONE The Place in the Middle: from:
The Red Sea
Abstract: The now seemingly established explanation for the origin of the name “Red” (that it derives from the common ancient practice of assigning particular colors to the different cardinal points) is charming in its simplicity,² but it fails to take
Book Title: The Thought of Music- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Kramer Lawrence
Abstract: What, exactly, is knowledge of music? And what does it tell us about humanistic knowledge in general?
The Thought of Musicgrapples directly with these fundamental questions-questions especially compelling at a time when humanistic knowledge is enmeshed in debates about its character and future. In this third volume in a trilogy on musical understanding that includesInterpreting MusicandExpression and Truth, Lawrence Kramer seeks answers in both thoughtaboutmusic and thoughtinmusic-thinking in tones. He skillfully assesses musical scholarship in the aftermath of critical musicology and musical hermeneutics and in view of more recent concerns with embodiment, affect, and performance. This authoritative and timely work challenges the prevailing conceptions of every topic it addresses: language, context, and culture; pleasure and performance; and, through music, the foundations of understanding in the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt19cc225
TWO Speaking of Music: from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: Speaking of music is also speaking
formusic, not in the sense of appropriation or ventriloquism, though neither can be entirely ruled out, but in the sense of acting with care or concern, of speaking on music’s behalf. With music, as with anything else, speech, language, may be deferred but it cannot be avoided. But that necessity settles nothing by itself. Speaking of music may be
SEVEN The Newer Musicology? from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: The vicissitudes of authorship revisited in chapter 6 point to a larger issue. Since around 2000 there has been a lot of musicological effort lavished on the “workconcept” and the competing claims of the fixed, authoritative musical work and the creative act of performance, mostly to the detriment of the work. Like most such binary quarrels, this one reveals a little and obscures a lot. It certainly oversimplifies the historical situation, which is full of complex instances in which the roles of the work—as inscription, conception, or instruction—and of performance—as animation, interpretation, or reproduction—meet, mix, and
POSTSCRIPT: from:
The Thought of Music
Abstract: The musical score is iconic in classical music. Only with the score can fully composed music, musical works, be transmitted intact for realization in multiple performances. The score, one would think, is a wonderful invention. But in recent years the score has lost a good measure of the authority and prestige that once seemed to accrue to it automatically. For some, at any rate, the chief features of the score are its incompleteness and imprecision, up to and including a fundamental falseness.
Book Title: Symposium of the Whole-A Range of Discourse Toward an Ethnopoetics
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Rothenberg Diane
Abstract: Symposium of the Wholetraces a discourse on poetry and culture that has profoundly influenced the art of our time, with precedents going back two centuries and more. Beginning with a reassertion of the complexity of poetry among peoples long labeled "primitive" and "savage," many recent poets have sought to base a new poetics over the fullest range of human cultures. The attempt to define an ethnopoetics has been significantly connected with the most experimental and future-directed side of Romantic and modern poetry, both in the Western world and, increasingly, outside it. As a visionary poetics and as a politics, this complex redefinition of cultural and intellectual values has involved a rarely acknowledged collaboration between poets and scholars, who together have challenged the narrow view of literature that has excluded so many traditions.In this gathering, the Rothenbergs follow the idea of an ethnopoetics from predecessors such as Vico, Blake, Thoreau, and Tzara to more recent essays and manifestos by poets and social thinkers such as Olson, Eliade, Snyder, Turner, and Baraka. The themes range widely, from the divergence of oral and written cultures to the shaman as proto-poet and the reemergence of suppressed and rejected forms and images: the goddess, the trickster, and the "human universe." The book's three ethnographic sections demonstrate how various poetries are structured and composed, how they reflect meaning and worldview, and how they are performed in cultures where all art may be thought of as art-in-motion.Among the poetries discussed are the language of magic; West African drum language and poetry; the Huichol Indian language of reversals; chance operations in African divination poetry; picture-writings and action-writings from Australia and Africa; and American Indian sacred-clown dramas and traditional trickster narratives. The cumulative effect is a new reading of the poetic past and present-in the editors' words, "a changed paradigm of what poetry was or now could come to be."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1bmzkq4
From a Correspondence on Ossian and the Songs of Ancient Peoples from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HERDER JOHANN GOTTFRIED
Abstract: With Herder we get the outlines for an actual and still viable ethnopoetics—a concept of poetry ʺemancipated from rationalist or Christian context and strictures, opening to world horizons, the dimension of time and cultural relativism, and deepening its meaning as a profound mode of truthʺ (Feldman, Modern Mythology, p. 225). But the universal poetics Herder creates has a new and strict regard for cultural autonomies and particularities—allowing the reentry of the outcast European (ʺfolkʺ) past and the more distant poetries of peoples then falling to European domination. Herderʹs Volkslieder (1778) is a first anthology with ethnopoetic scope: ʺnot
In Wildness is the preservation of the World from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) THOREAU HENRY DAVID
Abstract: Thoreau brings the ʺwildernessʺ side of the proposition into focus: what the nineteenth century would have subsumed under the word ʺnatureʺ and the later twentieth century under ʺecology.ʺ The emphasis is in fact characteristically American, and the view of wilderness and wildness brings together ideas (social and personal) of place, of language, of body, and of mind. In the American instance, also, the persistent presence is that of the Indian (ʺthe vengeful ghost lurking in the back of the troubled American mindʺ—G. Snyder), as one remembers the word ʺIndianʺ spoken by Thoreau on his death bed—or his vision
From The Chinese Written Character as a Medium for Poetry from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FENOLLOSA ERNEST
Abstract: Fenollosaʹs long essay, written circa 1908, is the outstanding instance of the impact on contemporary practice not simply of another poetry but of the inherent poetics of another language—its written as well as spoken form. Ezra Pound, who had translated Japanese Noh plays with Fenollosa, arranged for the essayʹs posthumous publication, writing in introduction: ʺIn his search through unknown art, Fenollosa, coming upon unknown motives and principles unrecognized in the West, was already led into many modes of thought since fruitful in ʹnewʹ Western painting and poetry…. The later movements in art have corroborated his theories.ʺ In spite of
Paideuma from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FROBENIUS LEO
Abstract: One of the first Westerners to recognize the actual achievement of traditional African art, Frobenius (1873–1938) spent many years in Africa, gathered and translated African oral traditions, and founded the Institute for Cultural Morphology in Frankfurt as a repository for (largely facsimiles of) prehistoric and African paintings and engravings. He was, in anthropological terms, a leading German diffusionist who advocated a complex, multifactorial approach to the analysis of cultural transmission, but in British and American anthropology, for example, his reputation is by now minimal. At the same time, he has profoundly influenced at least two major and largely unrelated
The Duende from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) LORCA FEDERICO GARCÍA
Abstract: Lorcaʹs poetry of the late 1920s/early 1930s fuses Surrealist concerns with that sense of native culture (Andalusian and Gypsy), a true Paideuma (see above, p. 36), which permeates this essay. ʺCharacteristically,ʺ writes Arturo Barea, ʺLorca took his Spanish term for daemonic inspiration from the Andalucían idiom. While to the rest of Spain theduendeis nothing but a hobgoblin, to Andalucía it is an obscure power which can speak through every form of human art, including the art of personalityʺ (Lorca: The Poet and His People). Theduendeessay, originally a lecture, followed a year in New York City (1929–
From Tristes Tropiques from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) LÉVI-STRAUSS CLAUDE
Abstract: The founder of ʺstructural anthropologyʺ Lévi-Strauss globalizes Durkheimʹs ʺcollective mindʺ and here carries it into the heart of the city—the contemporary world of the new wilderness. Beneath the primitive-civilized dichotomy, he asserts a deep structure, a principle of psychic unity that offers a way out of the anomie caused not only by a breakdown of the social bond but by rejection of the underlying unity of mind and nature. The resultant proposition is a new science—based like that of Vico (see above, p. 4) on the reshaping of a primary ʺpoetic wisdomʺ—and a recognition of the actual
Human Universe from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) OLSON CHARLES
Abstract: ʺWe are estranged from that with which we are most familiar,ʺ wrote Olson, quoting ancient Heraclitus, and he set out on a search through the American and human past—Pleistocene, pre-Biblical Mediterranean (Sumerian, Hittite, etc.), Norse, Mayan, and American Indian—with a conviction ʺthat the reality the Trobriand Islanders hearken toʺ (at least the process of getting at it, reenacting it as myth)ʺ is not at all a local or primitive one, is as much our own as theirs, whatever the differencesʺ (Olson 1978: 67). And on a local level—and here was his major contribution—he put a renewed
Plato and the Definition of the Primitive from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) DIAMOND STANLEY
Abstract: At the heart of Diamondʹs engaged and committed anthropology is the image of a ʺsearch for the primitiveʺ—as ʺan attempt to define a primary human potential,ʺ to transcend thereby the ʺprimitive-civilized dichotomyʺ that he traces back to the origins of the political state, with its antagonism to ambivalence and to the concrete instance in favor of a ʺPlatonic abstraction, the essence of civilized modalities of thoughtʺ (Compare Olsonʹs ʺwe have lived long in a generalizing time,ʺ p. 63, above.) More than any contemporary anthropologist of note, with the possible exception of Victor Turner, Diamond insists on an internalized poetics
Poetry and the Primitive: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SNYDER GARY
Abstract: More than most poets, Snyder has been a model of these values put into practice, engaged with experimental and traditional religion and with an experimental—still tentative—communal life. ʺForming the New Society / Within the shell of the Old,ʺ he writes (quoting the old Wobbly motto) in his first book,
Pre-Face to Technicians of the Sacred from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ROTHENBERG JEROME
Abstract: ʺTherefore, in outline: (1) the traditions in question add to any reconsideration of poetry as ʹvisionʹ & ʹcommunionʹ a series of authentic instances (historical & cultural) in which such functions were realized; (2) they provide the idea of the oral & mythic as self-corrective tellings, & the evidence of how it works; (3) they give a functional dimension to ʹmeaningʹ or ʹsignificanceʹ in the poetic act: the evidence that even apparently minimal forms may have a great complexity of function (ʹthe smallest things can turn you onʹ—P. Blackburn) … but at the same time, an expanded notion of alternative poetic & linguistic structures; (4)
The Meaning of Meaningless Words and the Coefficient of Weirdness from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MALINOWSKI BRONISLAW
Abstract: Malinowski lays down one major line of British functionalism, as A. R. Radcliffe-Brown lays down the other (structural-functionalism). But if Radcliffe-Brownʹs version has the greater theoretical carry-over at present, Malinowski has set a model for anthropological fieldwork and its attendant theory and has had an extraordinary impact as a teacher of later anthropologists and on a range of Western and Third World thought outside of anthropology itself. His principal writings in this regard come out of his extended work in the Trobriands and other islands off the southeast tip of New Guinea (1912–1916), and include such books as Argonauts
How the Names are Changed on the Peyote Journey from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SILVA RAMÓN MEDINA
Abstract: The poetry of reversals described by the maraʹakáme (shaman), Ramón Medina Silva, of San Sebastian, Mexico, is part of the Huichol peyote hunt and ritual (see below, p. 225). The tactic is common to the languages, acts, and dream-work of shamans and sacred clowns throughout the world. Its Crow Indian manifestation, for example, took the form of warrior societies of ʺcontrariesʺ (Crazy Dogs) whose behavior included ʺsaying the opposite of what you mean & making others say the opposite of what they mean in returnʺ (Rothenberg 1972: 195). As a more deeply rooted philosophy of contradictions, it reentered Western thought through
Drum Language and Literature from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: ʺOf very great interest and importance is the possibility of transferring the whole system of speech symbolism into other terms than those that are involved in the typical process … a transfer, direct or indirect, from the typical symbolism of language as spoken and heard…. The ease with which speech symbolism can be transferred from one sense to another, from technique to technique, itself indicates that the mere sounds of speech are not the essential fact of language, which lies rather in the classification, in the formal patterning, and in the relating of conceptsʺ (Sapir 1921: 19–21).
The Written Face from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) BARTHES ROLAND
Abstract: The Japanese theatrical face is not painted (powdered), it is written. This unforeseen movement occurs: though painting and writing have the same original instrument, the brush, it is not painting, however, which seduces writing with its decorative style, its sprawling, caressing touch, its representative space (as no doubt would have happened with us in the West, for whom the civilized future of a function is always its esthetic ennoblement); on the contrary, it is the act of writing-which subjugates
The Divination Poetry of Ifa from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FINNEGAN RUTH
Abstract: Though divination as such has had minimal impact on contemporary poetry, the underpinnings of divination in systematic chance procedures relate closely to processes used by experimental poets and artists, from the Dada work of Duchamp, Arp, and Tzara to its fuller development by Jackson Mac Low and John Cage. For this, the traditional system most drawn from is that of the Chinese I Ching, as modified by Carl Jungʹs speculation on ʺsynchronicity,ʺ the ʺacausal connectionsʺ between things happening at the same time (Wilhelm/Baynes 1950). But itʹs in the widespread African practices that we find a still actively creative, large, and
Some Ewe Poets from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) AWOONOR KOFI
Abstract: A major African poet and himself a native Ewe-speaker, Awoonorʹs first-hand assessment of the individuality of the Ewe song-poets puts to rest the common view of the anonymous/collective nature of all tribal poetry. His own work in English, he tells us, has ʺattempted to incorporate the features of the Ewe dirgeʺ and other forms of oral poetry, ʺborrowing liberally from [such poets as] Akpaluʺ in what Awoonor calls ʺa deliberate act of falling back upon a tradition which has been ignored in our missionary education and whose practice has been labeled paganistic by our Christian mentorsʺ (1975: 202, 208).
The Meaning of Everyday Objects from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) FIRE JOHN
Abstract: What Lame Deer says here of the resonance and meaning of ʺordinary, common thingsʺ among the Lakota (Sioux) had burst into Western consciousness as well—if not as the common practice he implies, then as a central issue of poetics from the first Romantics to the later modernists and ʺpostʺ-modernists. Thus Blake, for example, in 1802 (ʺA Letter to Thomas Buttsʺ), writes:
The Mushrooms of Language from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SABINA MARÍA
Abstract: Of the use of the psychedelic Psilocybe mushroom in pre-Conquest Mexico, an early Spanish chronicler wrote: ʺThey pay a sorcerer who eats them [the mushrooms] and tells what they have taught him. He does so by means of a rhythmic chant in full voice.ʺ The practice is continued today by shamans (ʺWise Onesʺ) among the Mazatec Indians of northeastern Oaxaca. But it isnʹt the shamans who speak directly; itʹs the mushrooms, called ʺsaint children,ʺ and ʺlittle ones,ʺ and ʺflesh of god.ʺ that give them language. ʺIf you ask a shaman where his imagery comes fromʺ—Henry Munn tells us in
The Fertilizing Word from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) GRIAULE MARCEL
Abstract: The conversations between Ogotemmêli, an elder of the Dogon in the Western Sudan, and the ethnographer, Marcel Griaule, took place over thirty-three successive days in October 1946. During that time, according to Griaule, Ogotemmêli ʺlaid bare the framework of a world system: … a cosmogony as rich as that of Hesiod, poet of a dead world, and a metaphysics that has the advantage of being expressed in a thousand rites and actions in the life of a multitude of living beingsʺ (1965: 3). That ʺsystemʺ—or the part of it presented to Griaule—sets up a vast web of correspondences
The Dreaming from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) STANNER W. E. H.
Abstract: ʺExistence is elsewhere,ʺ wrote André Breton and pointed to the reintroduction of dream into everyday life, toward ʺthe future resolution of these two states, dream and reality, which are seemingly so contradictory, into a kind of absolute reality, a surrealityʺ (The First Surrealist Manifesto, 1924). A projection of Surrealist yearning, the idea of a process, an ʺact of dreamingʺ by which ʺthe mind makes contact with whatever mystery it is that connects the Dreaming [the Eternal Dream Time] and the Here and Now,ʺ is fundamental to mythic thought throughout the world and is at its most developed in the traditions
Return to Wirikuta: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) MYERHOFF BARBARA G.
Abstract: Rituals of opposition and reversal constitute a critical part of a lengthy religious ceremony, the peyote hunt, practiced by the Huichol Indians of north-central Mexico.¹
From “On the Balinese Theater” from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) ARTAUD ANTONIN
Abstract: Artaudʹs efforts ʺto break through language in order to touch lifeʺ placed him, finally, among the truly radical poets of the twentieth century and among those who pioneered a necessary ethnopoetics toward such ends. An actor by profession, he pursued a new overview of art and life, first as the director of the Paris-based Bureau of Surrealist Research and, after his break with the Surrealists, through his thwarted experiments with theater and film, his writings such as The Theater and Its Double (from which the present excerpt), and his collapse into a personal agony he could yet project through language.
From The Sorrow of the Lonely and the Burning of the Dancers from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SCHIEFFELIN EDWARD L.
Abstract: The interaction between performer and spectator has been an issue of performance theory—Western and other—from Aristotleʹs catharsis to contemporary experiments with participatory theater, etc. (see below, p. 311). In the Papua New Guinea instance following, the projection and expulsion, here of grief and anger, works through a language-centered, basically social and nonmystical exploitation of human feelings—a cathartic geography, a primal poetry of name and place. ʺMoving and violent,ʺ in Schieffelinʹs words, the Gisaro Ceremony is itself part of a larger series of ceremonial events involving ritual exchanges between kinsmen who are living at some distance from each
Nsibidi/Action Writing from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) THOMPSON ROBERT FARRIS
Abstract: Icon defines itself in act south of the Sahara. Things done, sculpture and dress, combine with things happening, music and dance. A fundamental principle is made manifest: action is a superior mode of thought. Movement serves long-term knowledge with sensuous uprush and spontaneity, answering to the imperatives of life. There is no turning back.
Poetry without Sound from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) BELLUGI URSULA
Abstract: Even in its early, tentative stages, the signing poetry emerging as an aspect of the ʺculture of the deafʺ challenges some of our cherished preconceptions about poetry and its relation to human speech. Ameslan (American Sign Language) represents, literally, a poetry without sound and, for its practitioners, a poetry without access to that experience of sound as voice that weʹve so often taken as the bedrock of all poetics and all language. In the real world of the deaf, then, language exists as a kind of writing in space and as a primary form of communication without reference to any
From Ritual to Theatre and Back: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) SCHECHNER RICHARD
Abstract: In the late 1960s Richard Schechner, as director of the New York-based Performance Group and a leading shaper of contemporary ʺperformance theory,ʺ pioneered a so-called ʺenvironmental theaterʺ that could draw on all elements in and around the performance space, including the actor-audience nexus and that between both and ʺthe larger environments outside the theatre.ʺ Schechnerʹs deliberate use of models to ʺstimulate [the environmentalistsʹ] creativityʺ turned from familiar Western sources to ʺAmerican Indian, Oceanic, African, Siberian, or Eskimo societies,ʺ or back in history ʺto Altamira and the other caves, and then forward to Egypt, the Near and Middle East, Asia, and
Some North Pacific Coast Poems: from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) HYMES DELL
Abstract: As a major anthropological linguist, Hymesʹs early and ongoing contribution to an ethnopoetics has been a practical ʺstructuralismʺ that attempts to examine and represent ʺways in which narratives [or, as here, songs] are organizations of linguistic meansʺ—a work he has pursued not by ʺleaping to universalsʺ but by ʺthe development of theories adequate and specific to each tradition.ʺ Beginning with the present essay—a criticism and virtual ʺdeconstructionʺ of earlier translation work—Hymes later focused on the performative side of traditional oral poetry (i.e., on its ʺrealization in performanceʺ) in ways akin to the proposals and practice of Dennis
The Tenth Horse Song of Frank Mitchell from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) McALLESTER DAVID P.
Abstract: Among the great American ethnomusicologists, David P. McAllester has had an eminent sense of the possibilities of an actual poetics emerging from the verbal materials with which he has dealt. His principal area of ethnographic concern has been Navajo, and he has worked with Navajo music and poetry (and their complex interworkings) for close to thirty-five years. The present essay was originally published alongside Jerome Rothenbergʹs experimental translations of the Navajo horse-songs (see above, pp. 381, 387), for which McAllester served as transmitter and adviser. Though their strategies for translation diverge significantly, McAllesterʹs view, circa 1966, of the spirit of
Neo-HooDoo Manifesto/The Neo-HooDoo Aesthetic from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) REED ISHMAEL
Abstract: Ishmael Reed has long been a prolific and active poet and novelist, whose language and concerns reflect the particular and universal poles of a genuine ethnopoetics. As editor of the influential magazine, YʹBird,and as a founder (with Bob Callahan, Frank Chin, Victor Hernandez Cruz, David Meltzer, and Simon Ortiz) of the San Francisco-based Before Columbus Foundation, he writes: ʺWe welcome a time in history when ʹAmericanʹ is no longer interchangeable with rudeness, grossness and provincialism, but has begun to stand for a society where all of the cultures of the world may co-exist and in which cultural exchange is
Expressive Language from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) BARAKA IMAMU AMIRI
Abstract: By the mid-1960s, Baraka had become one of the major figures (poetry, fiction, theater) of the ʺnew American poetry.ʺ His contribution to an ethnopoetics was the articulation (both in theory and practice) of black cultural and linguistic values within a highly charged social/political context in which he participated notably from a home base in Newark, New jersey. Changing over the years, his cultural writings are marked by early warnings of ʺcultural imperialism,ʺ etc. (see above, pp. 12, 340) and by a recent return to a universalism along Marxist-Leninist lines but drawing from the black instance still central to his poetry.
From “DiaLogos: Between the Written and the Oral in Contemporary Poetry” from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) QUASHA GEORGE
Abstract: George Quashaʹs wide-ranging magazine, Stony Brook,provided a first forum, 1968–1969, to renew the discourse about ethnopoetics as such. (The term itself was first used here—by Jerome Rothenberg, who also acted as ʺethnopoetics editor.ʺ) Quasha has also been co-editor ofAmerica a Prophecy(Quasha and Rothenberg 1973), editor of two anthologies of contemporary work, Open PoetryandActive Anthology,and author of the ongoing long poem, Somapoetics.His contribution to the issues of voicing/writing as mapped in this anthology has been to expand the idea of a poetics in a variety of ways (metapoetics, parapoetics, somapoetics, etc.) and
The Death of Sedna from:
Symposium of the Whole
Author(s) CARPENTER EDMUND
Abstract: Edmund Carpenterʹs field studies and media experiments range from the Canadian Arctic and Siberia to Southeast Asia, Borneo, and New Guinea. His early collaboration with Marshall McLuhan gave the latter his principal link to areas of anthropological concern. A significant part of Carpenterʹs own work involves the impact of the new technology and its resultant monoculture on the worldʹs surviving software cultures. Principal works:Eskimo Realities, They Became What They Beheld, Explorations in Communication(ed., with Marhsall McLuhan), andOh, What a Blow that Phantom Gave Me!
1 The Role of Agency in the Desistance Process from:
A Dream Denied
Abstract: While they were held in detention facilities or treatment centers, most teenagers expressed an inflated sense of agency. Relying on the cultural narrative of the “American Dream,” they believed in their ability to desist from crime, even if the odds were stacked against them. Criminologists often overlook the role agency plays in the desistance process. Structural conditions can be measured and quantified reliably. Operationalizing agency is more difficult. Direct observations of criminal acts are ethically dubious. Even if researchers were able to witness a crime in the making, it would be impossible to generalize from isolated instances. Although agency manifests
Book Title: Listening for the Secret-The Grateful Dead and the Politics of Improvisation
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): OLSSON ULF
Abstract: Listening for the Secretis a critical assessment of the Grateful Dead and the distinct culture that grew out of the group's music, politics, and performance. With roots in popular music traditions, improvisation, and the avant-garde, the Grateful Dead provides a unique lens through which we can better understand the meaning and creation of the counterculture community. Marshaling the critical and aesthetic theories of Adorno, Benjamin, Foucault and others, Ulf Olsson places the music group within discourses of the political, specifically the band's capacity to create a unique social environment. Analyzing the Grateful Dead's music as well as the forms of subjectivity and practices that the band generated, Olsson examines the wider significance and impact of its politics of improvisation. Ultimately,Listening for the Secretis about how the Grateful Dead Phenomenon was possible in the first place, what its social and aesthetic conditions of possibility were, and its results.This is the first book in a new series,Studies and Texts of the Grateful Dead Phenomenon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1p0vkcz
Series Foreword from:
Listening for the Secret
Author(s) Meriwether Nicholas G.
Abstract: From the bandʹs inception, the Grateful Dead attracted critical attention ranging from insightful to sensationalistic. Often obscured by the media fanfare was the seriousness of the groupʹs project, although some of that early attention was thoughtful, appreciative, and even scholarly. As early as 1966, academics gravitated toward the band, attracted by the intelligence and accomplishment they heard. What was also clear was the depth of the bandʹs commitment, which became one of the hallmarks of the Dead, especially noteworthy in an industry substantially defined by brevity, novelty, and shallowness. Over the course of their thirty-year career, the Dead managed to
2. Wave That Flag: from:
Listening for the Secret
Abstract: On January 20, 1994, Vuong Thinh, director of International Relations for the Ministry of Culture and Information, sent the Grateful Dead an ʺOfficial invitation to perform in Vietnamʺ at what was called ʺThe U.S.A./Vietnam Peace, Healing and Friendship Festival.ʺ¹ The band never did perform in Vietnam, but why would a self-declared ʺapoliticalʺ band be invited to the Socialist Republic of Vietnam? Whatever the Vietnamese authorities might have thought, the Grateful Dead never really actively protested the war. The band stubbornly called itself ʺapolitical,ʺ defending itself against appropriation from conventional ʺestablishmentʺ politics, as well as from antiestablishment, left-wing politics. This probably
3. Crashes in Space: from:
Listening for the Secret
Abstract: The Grateful Dead improvised—this is a given. Improvisation was a decisive aspect of what made the band special and set it apart from other bands. The band, of course, acknowledged the fundamental role of improvisation in its music—one could say it was part of the bandʹs DNA. Jerry Garcia said, ʺWe don’t improvise out of choice! We improvise because we donʹt have any choice! Itʹs not as though we could play anything exactly the same as we played it last night because weʹre incapable. So, improvisation, for us, is not an option, itʹs our coloration, itʹs our personality.ʺ²
time on my hands from:
i never knew what time it was
Abstract: in fact the whole idea of coming and talking at ten in the morning was already committed to an engagement with time since i was coming from san diego to talk at ten in the morning and ten in the morning is quite early to make a trip up to mcbean parkway when youre coming from san diego it used to be faster to come to mcbean parkway and then it was slower to get to mcbean parkway and then it got
Book Title: Lectura Dantis-Purgatorio, A Canto-by-Canto Commentary
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): ROSS CHARLES
Abstract: This new critical volume, the second to appear in the three-volume
Lectura Dantis,contains expert, focused commentary on thePurgatorioby thirty-three international scholars, each of whom presents to the nonspecialist reader one of the cantos of the transitional middle cantica of Dante's unique Christian epic. The cast of characters is as colorful as before, although this time most of them are headed for salvation. The canto-by-canto commentary allows each contributor his or her individual voice and results in a deeper, richer awareness of Dante's timeless aspirations and achievements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pn7mj
CANTO II The New Song and the Old from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) HOLLANDER ROBERT
Abstract: The preeminent musicality of Canto II appears to continue the celebrative mood of the preceding canto, which is characterized by motifs such as rebirth, sweetness, delight, and freedom. Yet Canto II, like its number, has a double focus. Each of the three
cantichethat comprise theDivine Comedybegins with a canto devoted to the presentation of a
CANTO III The Sheepfold of the Excommunicates from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) KIRKPATRICK ROBIN
Abstract: In the concluding moments of Canto III, a figure appears who, while initially unidentified, is described by Dante with characteristic precision: “he was fair-haired and handsome and his aspect / was noble” (107–108). With an uncanny exactitude of attention, the figure before us is said to carry still on his body the physical scars of the battle in which his time on earth was ended. His brow is cleft: “but one eyebrow had been cleft” (108); and before he names himself the penitent displays a wound “high on his chest” (111). This figure, as one learns at line 112,
CANTO V The Keys to Purgatory from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) SCAGLIONE ALDO
Abstract: In Canto V there appears none of those cruxes on which contemporary criticism often fastens as a basis for understanding the poem’s deeper meaning. Nevertheless, this canto contains some of the most vivid episodes of the journey, especially in its second part, which involves the stories of three memorable characters. As is typical of the whole
cantica,and especially evident in the first cantos, we find that the three souls we meet here are, by the very definition of their realm, in a liminal state between two forms of existence, the earthly and the celestial. They are gradually shedding the
CANTO X The Art of God from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) Ross Charles
Abstract: Canto X begins the great cycle of penitence and education that characterizes Purgatory proper. The souls in Purgatory follow the order of the seven mortal sins as defined by Christian doctrine. They traverse the seven circles of the mountain, pausing in each circle, for a time, according to their inclination toward each sin that has remained in them after their life on earth. They are not punished for any specific crimes they may have committed, as happens in Dante’s Hell. Instead, at each stage of Purgatory, penitence regularly consists of a meditation and a
contrapasso(a punishment suited to the
CANTO XI Gone with the Wind from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) OLDCORN ANTHONY
Abstract: Sandwiched between two descriptive cantos, in which there are remarkably few lines of actual dialogue and in which the foregrounded speech is the increasingly complex virtual (or visual) discourse (“speech made visible,” X , 94) evoked by the attitudes of the figures in relief (in the most complex of these trompe l’oeil—or is it
trompe l’oreille?—dialogues, the sculpted stances of the emperor Trajan and the supplicant widow are read as an extended exchange in which each of the two participants speaks no less than three times), Canto XI, the second of the three cantos dedicated to the sin
CANTO XIV The Rhetoric of Envy from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) VERDICCHIO MASSIMO
Abstract: In the previous canto, Dante and Virgil have arrived at the Second Terrace, where the envious are punished. In Canto XIV, they meet two souls, Guido del Duca and Rinieri da Calboli, who denounce the sin of envy. However, the actual invective against envy will spill over and conclude in the following canto (XV).
CANTO XVIII Love, Free Will, and Sloth from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) MIGIEL MARILYN
Abstract: Many readers have been inclined to pass quickly over Canto XVIII, thinking its philosophical discussion of love and free will to be of little importance and finding no particularly significant character or event. To such readers, the philosophical discussion may appear repetitive of Marco Lombardo’s statements on free will and the soul in Canto XVI; moreover, there is nothing in Canto XVIII to match Marco’s engaging image of the
anima semplicetta(“soul is simple,”Purg.
CANTO XIX Vectors of Human Love from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) STURM-MADDOX SARA
Abstract: Canto XIX of the
Purgatoriohas not been among the most favored in terms of its readers’ attention. A survey of its critical history reveals, moreover, that readers have been attracted largely by one element, that of the dream of the siren with which the canto begins. The account of the pilgrim’s dream, however, occupies only nine tercets, or twenty-seven verses out of a total of 145. Even if we include in the episode the two introductory tercets that afford a temporal orientation, as well as the dreamer’s awakening to Virgil’s call and the latter’s explanation of the dream experience,
CANTO XXVII At the Threshold of Freedom from:
Lectura Dantis
Author(s) CAMBON GLAUCO
Abstract: When Mario Sansone stated that Canto XXVII functions as a narrative pause between two climactic sequences (the rise through the three richly populated last cornices of the purgatorial mountain and the meeting with Matilda and Beatrice in the Terrestrial Paradise), he certainly did not mean to reduce Canto XXVII to merely a link lacking a poetical strength of its own. In fact, Sansone has added that the pauselike quality or narrative suspension following the poignant voice of Arnaut Daniel in the refining fire and foreshadowing the apparition of Matilda in the place of perennial springtime is counterpointed by an “ascending
CONCLUSION: from:
The Cosmic Time of Empire
Abstract: What is the value of resuscitating a temporal politics of modernism, as this book has attempted to do? If, as I have suggested, modernism represented a crucial stage in the history of the suppression of temporal politics because it alternately engaged in that suppression and resisted it, what can we learn from modernism about the political constitution of time in the age of GPS and instantaneity? My argument has been that we can draw from modernist temporality a model for a politicized time that is neither subsumed under global standard time’s uniformity nor retracted into a psychical, fluid interiority. Somewhere
3 THE POLITICAL DIMENSIONS OF EMASCULATION: from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) MacDougall John M.
Abstract: This chapter explores the rise in political and religious vigilance in post–New Order Lombok, Indonesia, and the role that militias played in denying Soleh, a nationalist activist in Lombok, the social horizons (loosely, the nation and its youth) he once relied upon to define his political and, in the end, personal reality. The chapter provides an individual case study in order to examine how social disorder and political violence are experienced by a leading intellectual who has been deeply involved in Indonesian politics on the island of Lombok. It makes clear that resistance is at once a social and
5 LABORATORY OF INTERVENTION: from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Pandolfi Mariella
Abstract: Since the end of the colonial era, many of the territories where anthropologists have worked have been witness to an increasingly visible “humanitarian presence.” The massive army of volunteer workers, international experts, local staff, and soldiers associated with humanitarian intervention has had a remarkable impact on local cultural landscapes. Despite the increasing proliferation of these zones of humanitarian and military intervention, anthropologists are only beginning to examine the theoretical and practical consequences of these new forms of intervention. Intervention studies present a perilous but necessary challenge to the anthropological community. They force us to consider both new sites of intervention
6 EVERYDAY AIDS PRACTICES: from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Hyde Sandra Teresa
Abstract: When this policeman downplays AIDS, he is not ignoring the emergence of the epidemic; rather, he reflects a recurrent discourse around HIV/AIDS that emphasizes policing and surveillance of China’s border regions.¹ Borders here provide a liminal space where many transactions occur and where the spread of HIV in Sipsongpanna, an autonomous minority prefecture bordering Laos and Burma, symbolizes what Arjun Appadurai (1996) characterizes as late-twentieth-century cross-border migrations. These mass migrations of peoples, goods, services, and now viruses color a moving transnational canvas. This chapter focuses on the late-socialist Chinese state and untangles the actions of certain actors, such as the
11 INSTITUTIONAL PERSONS AND PERSONAL INSTITUTIONS: from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Saris A. Jamie
Abstract: This piece is a sustained reflection on three types of marginality found in Kilronan, a market town and its environs containing about sixteen hundred people found in the Sligo-Leitrim area of Ireland. The three terms I am investigating—“character,” “unrespectable,” and “mental patient”—all overlap in the life of one of my consultants who has been connected to the mental hospital in Sligo town, about eighteen miles away, for much of his adult life. My main purpose in this piece is to try to think clearly about the implications of the simultaneous presence of these seemingly different forms of subjectivity,
14 POSTCOLONIALITY AS THE AFTERMATH OF TERROR AMONG VIETNAMESE REFUGEES from:
Postcolonial Disorders
Author(s) Hollifield Michael
Abstract: In this chapter we examine the problem of subjectivity as a transformation of lived experience in the wake of civil warfare and formation of the postcolonial nation-state. The specific terms of subjective alteration—collectively imprinted as a clash of political ethos¹ and personally imprinted as a shattering of identity and sentiment—are considered in relation to a culturally produced anguish in the aftermath of a conflict. Our ethnographic illustration of this process is the well-known case of the Socialist Republic of Vietnam.² Prior to this political formation in 1975, multiparty warfare was waged throughout a fractured nation, as anticommunist armies
1 Hermeneutics from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: This is a book about musical hermeneutics. A generation ago, no one would have wanted to write it. Music by nature seemed to rule it out. Music did not seem to mean the way other things do if it seemed to mean at all. This book tries to show why and how that situation has changed—changed dramatically. Each chapter examines a different concept or practice associated with the deceptively simple phrase
interpreting music. Hermeneutics is the art of interpretation. What do we do when we interpret music? What do we learn by doing it? What is at stake? Why
3 Subjectivity from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: The previous chapter frankly acknowledged the limitations, even the banality, of much of what we say about music, and it defended those qualities for what we can make of them. The give-and-take of speech acts in the imaginary dialogue about Mendelssohn’s concerto helps point the way to something more resonant, but we need to go further in that direction. We want, I assume, to articulate meaning, not just approximate it, as much so with music as with anything else. We need a reason to trust our interpretive statements. On the basis of the last chapter, again, we can surmise that
11 Things from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: “Odradek” is the name—its origin unclear, its meaning unknown—by which the speaker of Kafka’s parable “Cares of a Family Man” knows an indescribable something that lives in his house. This object, which is also half a subject, appears now and again in transitional spaces, “the attic, the stairway, the halls, the foyer,” attracting annoyance and affection in equal measure. Its shape, which is no shape, lies somewhere between that of a star and a spool. It is not only equivocal in itself but set equivocally between the banal (a typographical mark; a spindle for the threads that dangle
16 Musicology from:
Interpreting Music
Abstract: Not so long ago the question would never have come up. Musicology was self-validating. It was grounded in a fixed conception of Western identity that it also helped perpetuate. Like the music it studied, primarily Western art music, it served the values of the humanistic tradition embodied in both the modern university and the high culture of a great civilization. It accumulated knowledge for deposit in a stable cultural archive that could support continuities of practice and understanding across time. It often debated its methods but rarely critiqued or interpreted the uses to which
Book Title: Reason to Believe-Cultural Agency in Latin American Evangelicalism
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Smilde David
Abstract: Evangelical Protestantism has arguably become the fastest-growing religion in South America, if not the world. For converts, it emphasizes self-discipline and provides a network of communal support, which together have helped many overcome substance abuse, avoid crime and violence, and resolve relationship problems. But can people simply decide to believe in a religion because of the benefits it reportedly delivers? Based on extensive fieldwork among Pentecostal men in Caracas, Venezuela, this rich urban ethnography seeks an explanation for the explosion of Evangelical Protestantism, unraveling the cultural and personal dynamics of Evangelical conversion to show how and why these men make the choice to convert, and how they come to have faith in a new system of beliefs and practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnncj
[PART TWO Introduction] from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: The question of whether people can decide to believe not only affects our understanding of Evangelicalism and empowerment in Latin America; it runs through the center of contemporary sociological research on culture and religion. In the past twenty-five years approaches that portray people as strategic actors who consciously choose their meanings have reinvigorated the sociology of culture and religion after the decline of the modernization and secularization theories of the 1950s and 1960s. However, these approaches are increasingly being criticized as reductionist, incoherent, or incomplete by scholars who recommend a return to emphases on religion and culture as autonomous symbolic
CHAPTER 3 Imagining Social Life I: from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: Participant observation in hundreds of services and events, as well as with church members in everyday life over the course of three years, left me with little doubt that hardship and suffering have permanent seats in Venezuelan Evangelical discourse. Exhortations to gain control of one’s life through Jesus Christ were mixed with warnings of what will happen if one backslides from the Way, were interspersed with testimonies about God’s power to resolve intractable problems and impossible situations. My findings agree, then, with the dominant social scientific interpretation that Latin American Evangelicalism is a religion oriented toward those experiencing sustained life
CHAPTER 4 Imagining Social Life II: from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: The complex of substance abuse, gambling, crime, and violence described in the previous chapter constitutes the most common reason the men I studied gave for conversion to Evangelicalism. Leaving the analysis there would amount to a serious distortion. Often the problems leading to conversion are simply acute versions of the issues of personal development and social connection that most people experience at some point in their lives. The men I discuss in this chapter reported enduring periods of dis-ease that they found difficult to shake. In Evangelicalism they found a package of meanings and practices that helped them to both
CHAPTER 5 Imagining Evangelical Practice from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: In the preceding chapters I showed that Evangelical religious practice can fit into projects of self-reform among poor Caracas men. But I am yet to address the most difficult question: how can people intentionally adopt a set of religious beliefs and practices in order to confront life problems? The tradition of thought that defines religion and culture in contradistinction to individual rationalistic action can be traced to Durkheim if not earlier. But despite this long-term conceptual trend, the incompatibility of intention and belief has been built on as a presupposition, not established through argument. One exception is the political philosopher
[PART THREE Introduction] from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: An adequate theory of cultural agency needs both a nonreductionist concept of culture as something that can have an independent impact and a concept of human agency in which people can adopt cultural meanings because they understand these impacts. I have argued that such a theory can be built on the concept of imaginative rationality. In some situations people may certainly create meanings in order to avoid or escape from their problematic experiences, as neo-Marxists would have it. However, the Evangelical men studied here seem to create meanings in order to confront problematic experiences. These decisions to believe are made
CHAPTER 6 The Social Structure of Conversion from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: Gabriel has suffered from epileptic seizures for most of his life. When he was a boy he worked for seven years in a shoe-repair factory. In his context it was a decent job that provided resources for his poor family; and his cousin would fill in for him when his health made it impossible to work. However, at fifteen he was in one of Caracas’s nightmarish bus accidents—in this case the bus plunged into the Guaire River that runs along most of the main highway. The injuries he suffered made his seizures more frequent and eventually obliged him to
CHAPTER 8 Toward a Relational Pragmatic Theory of Cultural Agency from:
Reason to Believe
Abstract: My analysis suggests that the distinctions social scientists make between empowerment and moral order, self-interest and morality, calculation and contemplation need to be rethought. Among Evangelical men in Caracas, religion does not begin with disinterest. It begins with dis-ease that is consciously and rationally addressed through religious practice. And this pragmatic quality does nothing to challenge its viability or its sincerity. The smiles and tears, courage and fear are all real. It would be a mistake to regard this as unique to Latin American Evangelicalism. I suspect any close review of empirical research on contemporary religious and cultural practices around
Book Title: Between One and One Another- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Jackson Michael
Abstract: Michael Jackson extends his path-breaking work in existential anthropology by focusing on the interplay between two modes of human existence: that of participating in other peoples’ lives and that of turning inward to one’s self. Grounding his discussion in the subtle shifts between being acted upon and taking action, Jackson shows how the historical complexities and particularities found in human interactions reveal the dilemmas, conflicts, cares, and concerns that shape all of our lives. Through portraits of individuals encountered in the course of his travels, including friends and family, and anthropological fieldwork pursued over many years in such places as Sierra Leone and Australia, Jackson explores variations on this theme. As he describes the ways we address and negotiate the vexed relationships between “I” and “we”—the one and the many—he is also led to consider the place of thought in human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnphx
CHAPTER 1 Preamble from:
Between One and One Another
Abstract: In the late 1930s, Gregory Bateson and Margaret Mead did pioneering ethnographic fieldwork in a Balinese village, using still and movie cameras to capture some of the “intangible aspects” of Balinese culture and everyday life, including trance, eating, gesture, mourning, family interactions, children’s play, art, and shadow-play puppets. In her introductory essay to their 1942 monograph, Mead speaks of a Balinese passion for being part of a noisy, festive crowd. Whether a marketplace, temple court, theatrical event, elaborate carving, or close-packed array of offerings on an altar, “the crowd preference is seen everywhere in Balinese life.¹ Women are said to
[PART I Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: Subjectivity is a ″vanishing subject,″ writes Amélie Oksenberg Rorty in this book′s opening chapter. As she traces the history of some of the philosophical insights that have shaped current understandings of subjectivity and the subject, Rorty finds not a progression but various contested movements and fragmentary meanings. Self-awareness has a different philosophical trajectory than individuated perception does; scholars have emphasized a diachronically unified persona and, at times, posed it against a synchronically unified persona; the meanings of emotions, the body, social interactions, and suffering as subjectivity have all been areas of contestation. For example, according to Rorty, ″Where Aristotle finds
2 The Experiential Basis of Subjectivity: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) FITZ-HENRY ERIN
Abstract: For years, the study of subjectivity has been dominated by theories of the self that interrogate cultural representations and performance. These studies have a certain richness in helping us understand how societies change because they are able to deal with collective transformations through major cultural meanings and practices. But they usually leave the intimate subjectivity of individuals unanalyzed, like a black box, or bring to it a decidedly sectarian view, such as Freudian psychoanalysis, which has long been overworked and overreached as an explanatory framework. However, anthropology has downplayed, at least since W. H. R. Rivers, the importance of theories
3 How the Body Speaks: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) DAS RANENDRA K.
Abstract: In this chapter, we reflect on the meaning and use of diagnostic categories to make illness knowable in the course of social transactions. The ″illness narrative″ has emerged as a classic genre in medical anthropology, and it offers a way of contrasting patient and physician perspectives on illness. The focus on the patient′s construction of her experience is a powerful tool to contest and even reform the power that the expert exercises in clinical encounters. Thus, the emphasis on illness narratives and patients′ ″explanatory models″ serves an important therapeutic purpose: Kleinman (1989) used it with stunning effect in his critique
4 Anthropological Observation and Self-Formation from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) RABINOW PAUL
Abstract: The recent past has seen a number of relatively new forms of anthropological practice emerging; others most certainly will be invented in the near future. Among the current approaches is one that I have been experimenting with, an approach that privileges extensive interviewing with a distinctive group of actors, within a restricted field setting. The challenge of this undertaking is to determine what form to give the material that results. As a form of inquiry that is site restricted and dependent on directed interviews and problematized narratives, the approach can be contrasted to the more traditional ethnographic practice of broad-ranging
[PART II Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: In ″Hamlet in Purgatory,″ literary scholar Stephen Greenblatt challenges Freud′s privileging of Oedipus as the modern representative of psychological interiority. Greenblatt maintains that Shakespeare′s Hamlet is the one who does this work (chapter 5 in this volume). ″Remember me″ is the haunting demand of the dead father to Prince Hamlet. Following Goethe′s lead in seeing the prince as more of a neurotic than a hero, Greenblatt tests Jacques Lacan′s idea that the subject is the doing of the phantasm (1979) by actually traversing Hamlet′s ghost in history, so to speak. ″Something have you heard of Hamlet′s transformation: so I call
5 Hamlet in Purgatory from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) GREENBLATT STEPHEN
Abstract: Early in 1529 a London lawyer, Simon Fish anonymously published a tract addressed to Henry VIII called
A Supplicacyon for the Beggers. The tract was modest in length but explosive in content: Fish wrote on behalf of the homeless, desperate English men and women, ″nedy, impotent, blinde, lame and sike,″ who pleaded for spare change on the streets of every city and town in the realm. These wretches, ″on whome scarcely for horror any yie dare loke,″ have become so numerous that private charity can no longer sustain them, and they are dying of hunger.¹ Their plight, in Fish′s account,
[PART IV Introduction] from:
Subjectivity
Abstract: Science and technology are integral to the definition of reality and to the restructuring of power relations and bodily experience. In
The Human Condition, Hannah Arendt argues that in the course of the twentieth century, political action has increasingly focused on the control of natural life and on the fabrication of automatons.¹ Thehomo fabergave way to thehomo laborans—that is, people became ever more involved in mass production and were most concerned with physiological existence. Scientific practices have been central to this transformation. Arendt argues that the experimental process that came to define the natural sciences—″the
13 ″To Be Freed from the Infirmity of (the) Age″: from:
Subjectivity
Author(s) KRAKAUER ERIC L.
Abstract: Ms. A is a seventy-five-year-old woman with multiple chronic medical problems related to her long history of diabetes mellitus, hypertension, and smoking. She had two myocardial infarctions that resulted in congestive heart failure. She also has a history of chronic renal failure, emphysema, chronic foot pain, and mild dementia that probably was the result of several small strokes. A working class, Protestant widow, Ms. A had lived in a retirement home for the past few years, where she required some assistance with her activities of daily living. She had worked intermittently at part-time jobs as a housekeeper and waitress, had
Book Title: The Language of the Gods in the World of Men-Sanskrit, Culture, and Power in Premodern India
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Pollock Sheldon
Abstract: In this work of impressive scholarship, Sheldon Pollock explores the remarkable rise and fall of Sanskrit, India's ancient language, as a vehicle of poetry and polity. He traces the two great moments of its transformation: the first around the beginning of the Common Era, when Sanskrit, long a sacred language, was reinvented as a code for literary and political expression, the start of an amazing career that saw Sanskrit literary culture spread from Afghanistan to Java. The second moment occurred around the beginning of the second millennium, when local speech forms challenged and eventually replaced Sanskrit in both the literary and political arenas. Drawing striking parallels, chronologically as well as structurally, with the rise of Latin literature and the Roman empire, and with the new vernacular literatures and nation-states of late-medieval Europe,
The Language of the Gods in the World of Menasks whether these very different histories challenge current theories of culture and power and suggest new possibilities for practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnqs7
Introduction from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: This book is an attempt to understand two great moments of transformation in culture and power in premodern India. The first occurred around the beginning of the Common Era, when Sanskrit, long a sacred language restricted to religious practice, was reinvented as a code for literary and political expression. This development marked the start of an amazing career that saw Sanskrit literary culture spread across most of southern Asia from Afghanistan to Java. The form of power for which this quasi-universal Sanskrit spoke was also meant to extend quasi-universally, “to the ends of the horizons,” although such imperial polity existed
CHAPTER THREE The World Conquest and Regime of the Cosmopolitan Style from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: The new political culture and cultural politics embodied in the public expression of power in Sanskrit spread across southern Asia with remarkable speed. Just to register this
digvijaya, or conquest of the quarters—and the very unusual sort of conquest that it was—is to grasp something of the character and reality of the Sanskrit cosmopolis. Within a mere two centuries, in locales that ranged from Kashmir and Puruṣapura (Peshawar) in the foothills of the western Himalayas eastward to Champa (central Vietnam), Prambanam on the plains of central Java, and even beyond in the further islands of today’s Indonesia, from
CHAPTER FIVE The Map of Sanskrit Knowledge and the Discourse on the Ways of Literature from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: When the scholar Hemacandra completed his grammar and presented it to King Jayasiṃha Siddharāja of Gujarat, the king had the book copied and distributed throughout the world—a world that was vast yet delimited in its vastness and completely named and known. The fact that a cosmopolitan grammar should have escaped its local confines in Aṇahilapāṭaka and circulated as far north as Nepal and as far south as Cōḻa country is in itself hardly surprising. After all, Sanskrit, like Prakrit and Apabhramsha (which are also analyzed in Hemacandra’s grammar), was no language of Place and was quite capable of traveling
CHAPTER SEVEN A European Countercosmopolis from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: We can gain a sharper sense of the peculiar nature of the cultural order that Sanskrit helped to create, and the kind of political order for which it was cultivated, if we consider both from an explicitly comparative perspective. There is a natural tendency, exhibited even (or especially) in social and cultural theory, to generalize familiar forms of life and experience as universal tendencies and common sense. Comparison offers an antidote to this by demonstrating the actual particularity of these apparent universalisms. Among those forms of life and experience, Latin literary culture and the Roman political formation, as well as
CHAPTER TEN Vernacular Poetries and Polities in Southern Asia from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Processes of literary-cultural transformation exactly like those found in the Kannada-speaking world are in evidence across much of southern Asia for a period of some five centuries beginning a little before 1000. Given so vast a domain with local complexities everywhere, and few comprehensive accounts existing for any one language let alone for the entire southern Asian world, only the general shape of this vernacular revolution can be sketched out here, with a few especially representative or complex instances examined more closely. Several features discernible in many instances (not, of course, all) will serve as focal points: the place of
CHAPTER ELEVEN Europe Vernacularized from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: To an outside observer, the vernacularization of Europe as a literary-cultural process in itself and, even more so, in relation to political processes appears to be one of the great understudied topics of Western history. The editor of a recent edition of the
Oxford History of Medieval Europe, while observing that a major factor in “the new diversity” that marked the late Middle Ages was “the exploitation of a variety of languages in important writings,” confesses himself at a loss to explain the development itself; the origins of the vernacular turn are for him as “mysterious” as its results are
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Actually Existing Theory and Its Discontents from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: If the passing of the so-called master narratives that have shaped modern ways of knowing the world—accounts based on belief in the progress of scientific reason, for example, or human emancipation—is partly a result of discontent with their apparent claims to a monopoly on truth or their rigid laws of developmentalism, there is no little irony in the fact that they are being replaced, in some instances, by what might be called cultural naturalism as the explanatory model of change in the history of culture and power. To be sure, theories linking cultural change and biological evolution have
Epilogue. from:
The Language of the Gods in the World of Men
Abstract: Few things seem as natural as the multiplicity of vernacular languages used for making sense of life through texts—that is, for making literature. And few things seem as unnatural as their gradual disappearance in the present, especially from the pressures exerted by globalizing English. Literary-language loss is in fact often viewed as part of a more general reduction of diversity in a cultural ecosystem, a loss considered as dangerous as the reduction of biological diversity, to which—in another instance of cultural naturalization—it is often compared. Today’s homogenization of culture, of which language loss is one aspect, seems
2 NON-INDIC THEORIES OF REBIRTH from:
Imagining Karma
Abstract: Although it is well known that rebirth beliefs exist in Africa, especially in West Africa, their ethnographic documentation is meager. West African eschatology needs the kind of rethinking done by the authors of
Amerindian Rebirthin their studies of Northwest Coast and Inuit religions.¹ In the African situation ethnographers were sensitive to religious and magical practices with which they were familiar, especially those resonating with their own European traditions, or they recorded customs exotic in the extreme if only to show the hidden rationality of seemingly irrational beliefs and practices. These were such things as African theism or pantheism or
7 IMPRISONING FRAMES AND OPEN DEBATES: from:
Imagining Karma
Abstract: In this final chapter I want to further explore a theme that pervades much of this work, that even radical religious innovation must occur within the frame of preexisting structures of thought, which can on occasion act as “prisons of the
longue durée.” As usual I will place that notion within ethnographic and historical contexts, returning to the “small-scale” societies discussed in chapter 2, especially Trobriand. Then, varying our theme somewhat, I deal with Bali, a “nation” consisting of villages that resemble the small-scale societies of our sample yet have historical connections with Buddhist and Hindu cultures.
3 What My Fingers Knew: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Nearly every time I read a movie review in a newspaper or popular magazine, I am struck by the gap that exists between our actual
experienceof the cinema and thetheorythat we academic film scholars construct to explain it—or perhaps, more aptly, to explain it away. Take, for example, several descriptions in the popular press of Jane Campion’sThe Piano(1993): “What impresses most is the tactile force of the images. The salt air can almost be tasted, the wind’s furious bite felt.”¹ The film is “[a]n unremittingly sensuous experience of music and fabric, of mud and
5 “Susie Scribbles”: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: The following phenomenological meditations on the carnal activity of writing were provoked by an electronic doll. A contemporary version of eighteenth-century anthropomorphic writing automata, “Susie Scribbles” appeared on the shelves of Toys R Us quite a number of Christmases ago and sold for $119. Unable to resist, I bought her. Susie and the peculiarities of her existence raised significant questions about writing bodies and writing technologies—not only because her automaton’s instrumentalism interrogated what writing is and how it is accomplished but also because the form in which this instrumentalism was embodied interrogated what is—or is not—“human” about
6 The Scene of the Screen: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: What happens when our
expressivetechnologies also becomeperceptivetechnologies—expressing and extending us in ways we never thought possible, radically transforming not merely our comprehension of the world but also our apprehension of ourselves? Elaine Scarry writes that “we make things so that they will in turn remake us, revising the interior of embodied consciousness.”¹ Certainly, those particularly expressive technologies that are entailed in the practices of writing and the fine arts do, indeed, “remake” us as we use them—but how much more powerful a revision of our embodied consciousness occurs with the inauguration of perceptive technologies such
8 Is Any Body Home? from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: To say we’ve lost touch with our bodies these days is not to say we’ve lost sight of them. Indeed, there seems to be an inverse ratio between
seeingour bodies andfeelingthem: the more aware we are of ourselves as the cultural artifacts, symbolic fragments, and made things that we see in—and as—images, the less we seem to sense the intentional complexity and richness of the corporeal existence that substantiates them. In a culture like ours, so preoccupied with images of bodies and bodies of images, we tend to forget that both our bodies and our
9 A Leg to Stand On: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Let me begin again with the fact that I have a prosthetic left leg—and thus a certain investment in and curiosity about the ways in which “the prosthetic” has been embraced and recreated by contemporary scholars trying to make sense (and theory) out of our increasingly technologized lives. When I put my leg on in the morning, knowing that I am the one who will give it literal—if exhaustible—vitality even as it gives me literal support, I don’t find it nearly as seductive a matter—or generalized an idea—as do some of my academic colleagues. And
10 Inscribing Ethical Space: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: Always concerned with the subversive capacity of cinema to show us what we may not wish to see, critic Amos Vogel has frequently commented on the medium’s tendency to avert its eyes before the sight of actual death. He writes: “Now that sex is available to us in hard-core porno films, death remains the one last taboo in cinema. However ubiquitous death is—we all ultimately suffer from it—it calls into question the social order and its value systems; it attacks our mad scramble for power, our simplistic rationalism and our unacknowledged, child-like belief in immortality.”¹ Death, Vogel suggests,
11 The Charge of the Real: from:
Carnal Thoughts
Abstract: The integration of documentary footage into fiction films often causes something of a stir in the popular press. Although the practice dates back to the very beginnings of cinema, what has attracted current attention to it and raised the issue of media ethics is the particular manner in which new digital technologies have transformed this practice by supposedly making such integration so seamless as to undermine the public’s ability to differentiate fact from fiction, the real from the imaginary or “irreal.”¹ Thus, the media hype: first around the digital wonders of
Forrest Gump(Robert Zemeckis, 1994), which inserted its eponymous
Book Title: After the Massacre-Commemoration and Consolation in Ha My and My Lai
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Faust Drew
Abstract: Though a generation has passed since the massacre of civilians at My Lai, the legacy of this tragedy continues to reverberate throughout Vietnam and the rest of the world. This engrossing study considers how Vietnamese villagers in My Lai and Ha My-a village where South Korean troops committed an equally appalling, though less well-known, massacre of unarmed civilians-assimilate the catastrophe of these mass deaths into their everyday ritual life. Based on a detailed study of local history and moral practices,
After the Massacrefocuses on the particular context of domestic life in which the Vietnamese villagers interact with their ancestors on one hand and the ghosts of tragic death on the other. Heonik Kwon explains what intimate ritual actions can tell us about the history of mass violence and the global bipolar politics that caused it. He highlights the aesthetics of Vietnamese commemorative rituals and the morality of their practical actions to liberate the spirits from their grievous history of death. The author brings these important practices into a critical dialogue with dominant sociological theories of death and symbolic transformation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pnztv
CHAPTER 6 Grievous Death from:
After the Massacre
Abstract: “The bodies are all naked and they are all wounded,” a woman in My Lai said of the mass grave near her house. She meant to draw attention to the fact that the victims of the massacre had been buried without coffins or funeral clothing, and that the broken pieces of individual bodies had not been put together before burial. Other relatives of victims in My Lai also spoke of the village’s mass graves in graphic terms and with forceful indignation. A survivor of the Le family told me that thinking of his relatives enduring the terrible conditions in the
CHAPTER 8 The Decomposition of the Cold War from:
After the Massacre
Abstract: Heroes, ancestors, and ghosts coexist in the village environment. While revolutionary politics and traditional religious heritage separate them, the three social classes in afterlife associate in popular ritual practices. Although they constitute a hierarchy, the hierarchy that structures their relative values varies at different sites of memory. Their status changes between the state war memorial and the community temple, and the war heroes who occupy the symbolic center in the former are relegated to the margins, outside the village ancestors, in the latter. The position of ghosts also shifts in this movement of memories. The memory of tragic death is
Conclusion from:
After the Massacre
Abstract: If we consider the history of the Cold War “from above” and reduce it to the doctrine of deterrence, of imagining war in order to prevent war—which has been a dominant paradigm in international history—it appears that political history and the morality of death have no meaningful relationship. If we consider it “from below” instead and include in it the experience of violent political confrontations within local and national communities, which is what the Cold War actually meant in much of the world in the past century, the political bifurcation of the human community and a moral polarization
Book Title: Jewish Identities-Nationalism, Racism, and Utopianism in Twentieth-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Móricz Klára
Abstract: Jewish Identitiesmounts a formidable challenge to prevailing essentialist assumptions about "Jewish music," which maintain that ethnic groups, nations, or religious communities possess an essence that must manifest itself in art created by members of that group. Klára Móricz scrutinizes concepts of Jewish identity and reorders ideas about twentieth-century "Jewish music" in three case studies: first, Russian Jewish composers of the first two decades of the twentieth century; second, the Swiss American Ernest Bloch; and third, Arnold Schoenberg. Examining these composers in the context of emerging Jewish nationalism, widespread racial theories, and utopian tendencies in modernist art and twentieth-century politics, Móricz describes a trajectory from paradigmatic nationalist techniques, through assumptions about the unintended presence of racial essences, to an abstract notion of Judaism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp27d
Chapter 4 Denied and Accepted Stereotypes: from:
Jewish Identities
Abstract: The story of Jezebel’s violent death belongs among the cold accounts of bloody wars, battles, and massacres in the Old Testament. Despite the frequency of similar stories, there is something especially disturbing about Jezebel’s slaughter by men who then “eat and drink,” thereby treating her murder as a routine task that does not involve emotion. Bloch, who was attracted to the savagery of some Old Testament stories and who, as his opera
Macbethreveals, did not shrink from setting bloodshed to music, chose Jezebel as the heroine of his projected Jewish opera. The opera stage required some leavening of the
Chapter 7 Torsos and Abstractions: from:
Jewish Identities
Abstract: Schoenberg left behind several drafts of his stage set for the second part of act 1 of his 1927 play
The Biblical Way. On graph paper he worked out the exact dimensions of the stadium and the bleachers and made pastel and watercolor pictures of the administrative building and the stadium. The bleachers surrounding the stadium are seen from the audience’s perspective as a semicircle, on two pictures closing almost into a full circle. Nature behind the stadium appears either as bucolic green hills or as towering snow-covered peaks. In either case, nature is obviously separated from humans, who gather
Book Title: A Usable Past-Essays in European Cultural History
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): BOUWSMA WILLIAM J.
Abstract: The essays assembled here represent forty years of reflection about the European cultural past by an eminent historian. The volume concentrates on the Renaissance and Reformation, while providing a lens through which to view problems of perennial interest.
A Usable Pastis a book of unusual scope, touching on such topics as political thought and historiography, metaphysical and practical conceptions of order, the relevance of Renaissance humanism to Protestant thought, the secularization of European culture, the contributions of particular professional groups to European civilization, and the teaching of history. The essays inA Usable Pastare unified by a set of common concerns. William Bouwsma has always resisted the pretensions to science that have shaped much recent historical scholarship and made the work of historians increasingly specialized and inaccessible to lay readers. Following Friedrich Nietzsche, he argues that since history is a kind of public utility, historical research should contribute to the self-understanding of society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1pp5kk
Introduction from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: The title of this collection is derived from Friedrich Nietzsche’s essay “On the Uses and Disadvantages of History for Life.”¹ The central argument of this passionate work, judiciously qualified, reflects my own deepest convictions about the value of historical scholarship. Nietzsche opened his essay with a quotation from Goethe: “I hate everything that merely instructs me without augmenting or directly invigorating my activity.” This meant to him that a vital historiography must serve the “life and action” of society. There is, Nietzsche argued, a “natural relationship of an age, a culture, a nation with its history—evoked by hunger, regulated
2 Changing Assumptions in Later Renaissance Culture from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: The familiar notion of a “later” Renaissance immediately presents itself as an innocent effort at chronological arrangement, as a convenience for determining relationships in time. But of course it is much more. It calls upon us to distinguish the differing characteristics of successive moments, to trace a process of development from inception to maturity and possibly on to decline; and it introduces the complicated problem of the relations between Italy and the Northern Renaissance.¹ It is thus closely connected with one of the most fruitful tendencies in all aspects of modern Renaissance scholarship: the effort to distinguish stages in a
5 Lawyers and Early Modern Culture from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: Although European historians have increasingly recognized the impact of large-scale change or significant events on human culture, they have paid little attention to the importance of the less dramatic aspects of social experience for shaping the attitudes of men. The result has been, for most of us, a schism between social and intellectual history that has impoverished both. As Frederic C. Lane has reminded us, the routine tasks of daily life are likely to impress those engaged in them with a profound sense of what the world and especially men are like and to produce patterns of expectation and systems
9 Renaissance and Reformation: from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: Since the peculiar mixture of responsibility and presumption in the title of my paper will scarcely have escaped the notice of this distinguished audience, I feel some need to explain at the outset that it represents an assignment on the part of those who planned our meeting. The significance of the problems to which it points is suggested by the great historians who have grappled with it in the past, albeit (a fact that should constitute something of a warning) with somewhat contrary results, among them Michelet, Dilthey, and Troeltsch.¹ Its practical importance lies in the need of most of
10 Venice, Spain, and the Papacy: from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: Although Paolo Sarpi is one of the great figures of the seventeenth century, not only of Italy, but of all Europe, and although many historians, Italian and non-Italian, have studied his career and thought, he remains an enigma and a subject of controversy. It is true that we have good editions of his most important writings and an increasing body of information concerning his life and surroundings. Yet there is still no satisfactory general work on Sarpi, nor is there any generally accepted interpretation of his personality, his thought, and his purposes.
19 Christian Adulthood from:
A Usable Past
Abstract: The elasticity of Christianity, as it has accommodated itself to two thousand years of cultural change, is well known; and it poses special problems for the identification of a peculiarly “Christian” conception of what it means to be an adult. It is also likely to make any attempt at such definition seem arbitrary. I shall nevertheless try to show in this essay that Christianity does contain a characteristic conception of healthy human maturity, but to do so it will be necessary to distinguish between what I shall call
historicalandnormativeChristianity. Historical Christianity reflects the composite of those cultural
THREE Ethical Caring and Obligation from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: In this chapter, we’ll discuss the move from natural caring to ethical caring. We’ll also take a close look at caregiving—long defined as “woman’s work.” Carework is both the incubator of natural caring and a current site of contention. On one hand, it represents the set of activities in which females have developed an enhanced capacity for empathy. On the other, society’s expectation that women will continue to do the lion’s share of care labor is a legacy of the second source of female empathy—subordination.
FIVE Relation, Virtue, and Religion from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Virtue ethics and care ethics share a significant basic characteristic. Both turn to something inside the moral agent instead of to a principle when faced with making a moral decision. The
SEVEN Needs, Wants, and Interests from:
The Maternal Factor
Abstract: Care ethics is oriented to needs rather than rights. This orientation seems exactly right in the context of families and small communities, but it becomes more difficult to sustain in larger settings. Indeed some philosophers have argued that the concept of needs is too complex to employ usefully in policy decisions. I mentioned earlier in my very brief discussion of a care-driven approach to justice that care ethics is centrally concerned with needs. In the same chapter, I explored some of the difficulties we face in caring at a distance and deciding which obligations are individual and which collective. Now
Chapter 1 After Historicism, Is Metaphysics Still Possible? from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) Malone Paul
Abstract: Understanding and Event [Verstehen und Geschehen]was to be the title ofTruth and Methodafter the publisher expressed his dissatisfaction with the dry suggestionPrinciples of a Philosophical Hermeneuticsand the pioneering titleTruth and Methodhad not yet been hit upon. Over the decades, this book has stimulated philosophical discussion in Germany as no other. Its career is not so much owing to its manifestly hostile stance toward the human sciences, which misunderstand their “understanding” as method; rather, its success can be explained by the relevance of one basic question that Gadamer’s hermeneutics seeks to answer. The original
Chapter 3 On the Coherence of Hermeneutics and Ethics: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: My purpose in what follows is to take up the relation of hermeneutics and ethics as it emerges in a post-Heideggerian philosophical context. In terms of proper names this means giving an account of the conceptual symmetries and differences between Gadamer’s philosophical hermeneutics and Emmanuel Levinas’s ethical theory, which is sometimes called an ethics of alterity or of responsibility, in order to contrast it with subject-centered theories that emphasize thinking and acting in accord with rules, principles, duties, codes, beliefs, teachings, communities, theories of the right and the good, and so on, where to be in accord with such things,
Chapter 4 Gadamer and Romanticism from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) BOWIE ANDREW
Abstract: The contemporary Western philosophical scene can be characterized in terms of divisions and interactions between approaches to philosophy which assume that their task is inextricably linked to the development of the natural sciences and approaches which often regard this assumption with considerable suspicion. Philosophers who adopt the former approach have the obvious advantage that the project of which they see themselves as a part produces more and more results which are in principle—if not in practice—publicly testable and which appear to confirm their underlying assumption that science is converging towards an already constituted reality as it is “in
Chapter 5 Literature, Law, and Morality from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) WARNKE GEORGIA
Abstract: Richard Posner lists several reasons to think that morality and law are enterprises distinct from literature: the fact that the heinous actions of German lawyers and citizens in the 1930s and 1940s coexisted with Germany’s status as one of the most cultured nations of the world; the circumstance that one of the well-known abilities of many well-read people is to remain insensitive to the suffering of others; the fact that moral atrocities fill the literary canon without affecting either the aesthetic virtues of the work or its reader’s own moral attitudes; and, finally, the distance between the concerns of law
Chapter 6 A Critique of Gadamer’s Aesthetics from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) KELLY MICHAEL
Abstract: There are three main critiques through which Hans-Georg Gadamer develops his conception of aesthetics, which has a central role in his philosophical hermeneutics, which in turn is his principal contribution to philosophy in the twentieth century, all of which he amazingly witnessed. He offers a critique of the philosophy of art which regards art as a lie and that denies it is capable of making truth claims; a critique of aesthetic consciousness as an alienated abstraction from the experience of truth in art; and a critique of the subjectivization of modern aesthetics, which he traces back to Immanuel Kant’s
Critique
Chapter 10 Radio Nietzsche, or, How to Fall Short of Philosophy from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) WAITE GEOFF
Abstract: A good place to start is from where and whom we distance ourselves, even if ultimately we all think, make our decisions, and act “in the emptiness of a distance taken.”¹ Well-known statements by Gadamer observe a certain distance from Nietzsche, and Gadamer is not the explicit subject of my intervention in this anthology devoted to him and his repercussions. An essay on Nietzsche may be out of place,
hors de saison et de combat,so I should justify my inclusion here with a prologue.
Chapter 11 The Art of Allusion: from:
Gadamer’s Repercussions
Author(s) Gaiger Jason
Abstract: On February 11, 1995, Gadamer reached the age of ninety-five. The tributes that were paid to him were justifiably numerous; in the
Frankfurter Allgemeine Zeitunghe was celebrated as “the most successful philosopher of the Federal Republic,” placed even before Jürgen Habermas, to whom the title of philosopher was awarded only with certain reservations.¹ The worldwide influence of Gadamer’s thinking is closely connected with the reception of his principal work,Truth and Method(1960). In 1979, Habermas characterized Gadamer’s achievement as the “urbanization of the Heideggerian province.” The bridges that Gadamer has built consist above all in an elaboration of
Book Title: A Problem of Presence-Beyond Scripture in an African Church
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Engelke Matthew
Abstract: The Friday Masowe apostolics of Zimbabwe refer to themselves as “the Christians who don’t read the Bible.” They claim they do not need the Bible because they receive the Word of God “live and direct” from the Holy Spirit. In this insightful and sensitive historical ethnography, Matthew Engelke documents how this rejection of scripture speaks to longstanding concerns within Christianity over mediation and authority. The Bible, of course, has been a key medium through which Christians have recognized God’s presence. But the apostolics perceive scripture as an unnecessary, even dangerous, mediator. For them, the materiality of the Bible marks a distance from the divine and prohibits the realization of a live and direct faith. Situating the Masowe case within a broad comparative framework, Engelke shows how their rejection of textual authority poses a problem of presence—which is to say, how the religious subject defines, and claims to construct, a relationship with the spiritual world through the semiotic potentials of language, actions, and objects. Written in a lively and accessible style, A Problem of Presence makes important contributions to the anthropology of Christianity, the history of religions in Africa, semiotics, and material culture studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppcdv
FIVE Listening for the True Bible: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: I WAS TOLD THAT BEING an apostolic is a “full-time thing.” Th is saying picks up on the commitment Shimmer highlighted in his conversion narrative: one cannot be half Christian and half outside. An apostolic should maintain his or her commitment at all times and in all places. The language of commitment is indeed a common feature of the apostolics’ discourse (if not always practice). One of their worries, for example, is the “Sunday Christian”—someone who seems to forget what the Word entails during the rest of the week. The concept of mutemo plays a crucial role in the
SIX Singing and the Metaphysics of Sound: from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: SINCE SHONIWA-JOHANE’S DESCENT FROM the Marimba hill, singing has been central to the makeup of apostolic Christianity. Johane’s position as a prophet was marked by music well before the articulation of a distinct Friday or Saturday message. It was the singing, in fact, as much as what Johane said, that often got the nascent apostolics into trouble. In a report to the chief native commissioner in Salisbury, the native commissioner at Goromonzi wrote that in the last months of 1934 “singing, shouting and dancing could be heard nightly” from the summit of a hill in the Chindamora Reserve. Local missionaries
SEVEN The Substance of Healing from:
A Problem of Presence
Abstract: TO WHAT EXTENT CAN RELIGION be given over to a project of immateriality? In 2003 the Victoria and Albert Museum in London mounted an exhibition,
Gothic: Art for England,that provided something of an answer. One of the pieces in the show was a defaced church panel. Sometime in the sixteenth century the image on the panel had been scratched out. A verse from the Bible had been written in its place. Th e panel was an artifact of the Reformation; the Word had been used to destroy the evidence of Catholic idolatry. But if some English iconoclast had indeed
CHAPTER ONE Genre and the Spatial Histories of Modernity from:
Imaginary Communities
Abstract: Terry Eagleton asks, “What traumatic upheaval of perception is involved in thinking of the political no longer as a question of local sovereignty, of something interwoven with the labor and kinship relations of a specific place, but as an abstract
nationalformation?”¹ The debate onto which Eagleton’s question opens up—over the origins of the nation-state as both a uniquely modern conceptualization and practice of cultural and social space—has taken on a special urgency in our present, as concerns grow that the nation-state, at once beset by the forces of globalization and of ethnic fragmentation, may already be in
CHAPTER FIVE A Map of Utopia’s “Possible Worlds”: from:
Imaginary Communities
Abstract: One of the most significant lessons of the literary criticism of the last few decades has been that the currently accepted meaning of any text is a product of the interpretive institutions and communities acting upon it. Fredric Jameson suggests that we never really encounter textual meaning “as a thing-in-itself. Rather, texts come before us as the alwaysalready-read; we apprehend them through sedimented layers of previous interpretations, or—if the text is brand-new—through the sedimented reading habits and categories developed by those inherited interpretive traditions.”¹ Stanley Fish further observes that some interpretations, for a variety of reasons, succeed so
FIVE The Obligation to Receive: from:
Being There
Author(s) Coleman Leo
Abstract: The practice of social and cultural anthropology has long been rooted in an attempt to account for persons and social forms on the basis of extended and, by the standards of most other social sciences, extraordinarily intimate encounters. Close involvement with others is not only our method but in large part also our object; we seek to understand, generally speaking, the significant relations people make with each other.
TEN Afterthoughts: from:
Being There
Author(s) Borneman John
Abstract: As we reflect back on the essays assembled in this volume, it appears that each deals with a particular defining moment of thinking about and practicing anthropology. They do not aim to define a subdiscipline in anthropology or formulate an encompassing theoretical orientation regarding substantive issues. As a group, the authors differ in ethnicity, gender, and nationality, and in their respective stages of professional development. Though they all live near and work in U.S. and Canadian universities, their research spans societies that vary widely in geographical location, language, and sociopolitical situation: Canadian Inuit, European, Arab, African, Indian, and Russian societies.
1 Historicizing Ottoman Egypt: from:
Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: At the close of the nineteenth century, Egypt was a place marked by rapid intellectual, political, economic, and cultural changes. It was an extremely dynamic era. None of the changes that occurred in the period can be explained by a single ideology (nationalism, Pan-Islamism, constitutionalism) or a fixed set of abstract intellectual agendas (positivism, Darwinism, Spenserism), and it is very important to acknowledge the diversity of thought that is to be found in the thinking of this period. If dynamism was a sign of the era, it necessarily meant that intellectual horizons were wide open for the absorption, modification and
2 Talking History: from:
Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: By 1920, modern historical thought had reached a certain point of maturity. My aim in this chapter is to explain this process. With improved accessibility to new types of knowledge and completely new forms of intellectual organization, the perceptual tools of educated people were modified, at first quite slowly, but by 1919, quite decisively. Though it is yet too early to speak of a genre of modern history, the development of new linguistic resources, in fact an entire semantic field, was the crucial and final element that brought the historicization process to a mature point. The association between history writing
7 Demonstrating History: from:
Gatekeepers of the Arab Past
Abstract: The decade that followed the events of July 1952 critically altered the conventional assumptions of post–World War I Egyptian historiography. This impact was obvious. A variety of state-owned media invoked the memory of past events on a daily basis. Indeed, over the years, scholars had been drawn to the extensive usage of the past during the 1950s. Subscribing to the idea that the task of historiography is mainly that of studying shifts in historical representation, they emphasized the changing image of several rulers and popular leaders.¹ Though the issue of changing historical images was the most visible historiographical trait
Book Title: Little India-Diaspora, Time, and Ethnolinguistic Belonging in Hindu Mauritius
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Eisenlohr Patrick
Abstract: Little Indiais a rich historical and ethnographic examination of a fascinating example of linguistic plurality on the island of Mauritius, where more than two-thirds of the population is of Indian ancestry. Patrick Eisenlohr's groundbreaking study focuses on the formation of diaspora as mediated through the cultural phenomenon of Indian ancestral languages-principally Hindi, which is used primarily in religious contexts. Eisenlohr emphasizes the variety of cultural practices that construct and transform boundaries in communities in diaspora and illustrates different modes of experiencing the temporal relationships between diaspora and homeland.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppkdj
CHAPTER 3 Social Semiotics of Language: from:
Little India
Abstract: Hindu Mauritians make use of a wide repertoire of registers and styles of language in order to construct and inhabit interactional stances and claim ethnic and diasporic identities, which raises the issue of performance and its role in establishing social relationships and distinctions.¹ Building on John Austin’s theory of performance, Judith Butler (1990) has conceptualized social identities as created and reproduced through acts of performance, which in turn depend on the citationality of conventional signs recognized by others. Focusing on these qualities of performance, in this chapter I explore the multiple ways in which Hindu Mauritians both construct and align
CHAPTER 5 Performing Purity: from:
Little India
Abstract: Hindu activists in religious organizations and state and para-state bodies, some of whom are also involved in the network of Hindu nationalist organizations that operate in both India and Mauritius, are concerned about the rapid language shift from Bhojpuri to Mauritian Creole among Hindu Mauritians. Interpreting the decreasing use of Bhojpuri as a threat to the reproduction of Hindu difference in Mauritius, and making use of their close connections to state institutions, they are trying to reverse the shift to Creole by arranging for the use of Bhojpuri on national television and radio. As I will discuss below, the use
CHAPTER 6 Calibrations of Displacement: from:
Little India
Abstract: In this chapter I examine the creation and transformation of diasporic “Indianness” in Mauritius through alternative understandings of temporal remove and simultaneity in relation to an Indian homeland. The purpose is to interrogate temporality as a mode of building ethnic and national communities with an eye to how the category of diaspora is thus turned into a malleable entity. In this way, I seek to contextualize diasporization in Mauritius through practices that shift diasporic allegiances, preventing them from being permanently tied to a certain homeland. Language plays a central role in the production and transformation of the relations diasporic communities
Conclusion: from:
Little India
Abstract: In this book I have sought to account for the emergence of diaspora in practical, phenomenological, and ideological terms by analyzing how a sense of being in diaspora is produced by language and its uses among Hindus in Mauritius. In this, I have focused on the indexical and iconic values of linguistic practices whose deployment in everyday social interaction and metapragmatic discourse results in ethnolinguistic forms of belonging pointing to a diasporic homeland. To be meaningful, these practices depend on a whole range of other linguistic practices and valuations among Hindu Mauritians that are not immediately concerned with issues of
Book Title: Cannibal Talk-The Man-Eating Myth and Human Sacrifice in the South Seas
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: In this radical reexamination of the notion of cannibalism, Gananath Obeyesekere offers a fascinating and convincing argument that cannibalism is mostly "cannibal talk," a discourse on the Other engaged in by both indigenous peoples and colonial intruders that results in sometimes funny and sometimes deadly cultural misunderstandings. Turning his keen intelligence to Polynesian societies in the early periods of European contact and colonization, Obeyesekere deconstructs Western eyewitness accounts, carefully examining their origins and treating them as a species of fiction writing and seamen's yarns. Cannibalism is less a social or cultural fact than a mythic representation of European writing that reflects much more the realities of European societies and their fascination with the practice of cannibalism, he argues. And while very limited forms of cannibalism might have occurred in Polynesian societies, they were largely in connection with human sacrifice and carried out by a select community in well-defined sacramental rituals.
Cannibal Talkconsiders how the colonial intrusion produced a complex self-fulfilling prophecy whereby the fantasy of cannibalism became a reality as natives on occasion began to eat both Europeans and their own enemies in acts of "conspicuous anthropophagy."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppn6j
ONE Anthropology and the Man-Eating Myth from:
Cannibal Talk
Abstract: As the title of this book,
Cannibal Talk, implies, I deal with the discourses of cannibalism and the behaviors and practices associated with such talk (“discursive practices”) in the interaction between natives and Europeans following the “discovery” of Polynesia by Captain James Cook in the voyage of theEndeavour, 1768–72. The “South Seas” of my title is also the product of the European romantic imagination rather than an ethnographic or oceanographic category. In exploring the theme of cannibal talk I am deeply indebted to William Arens’s pioneering work,The Man-Eating Myth: Anthropology and Anthropophagy. Writing many years later and
THREE Concerning Violence: from:
Cannibal Talk
Abstract: The change in Maori practice is probably the most controversial part of my argument. I present my thesis hesitantly because no one seems to have a clear knowledge of precontact or “traditional” Maori anthropophagy. In fact this phrasing might be a misnomer because New Zealand consisted of a multiplicity of Maori communities, such that, forms of anthropophagy, wherever they existed, would have shown local variations. Conventional ethnography simply constructs an ideal type of Maori cannibalism from a variety of statements—interviews with older men, myths, missionary and magistrate accounts, and even that of eyewitnesses. These sources of information are treated
SIX Cannibal Feasts in Nineteenth-Century Fiji: from:
Cannibal Talk
Abstract: Despite that fact that I am not as familiar with the political and economic situation of Fiji in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries as I am with the Maori, I believe that in Fiji also there developed a form of pronounced anthropophagy that must be seen in terms of the European presence. The lure of trade, the musket wars, and the rise of powerful chiefdoms and the political confederations that resulted drew Fiji gradually into the world capitalist order. We know that pronounced anthropophagy existed in New Zealand mainly, though not exclusively, in the Bay of Islands area.
I The Divine Homer and the Background of Neoplatonic Allegory from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Our concern here will be to examine one among several traditions of the interpretation of Homer in antiquity: that characterized by the claims that Homer was a divine sage with revealed knowledge of the fate of souls and of the structure of reality, and that the
IliadandOdysseyare mystical allegories yielding information of this sort if properly read. It will be necessary to omit from discussion the larger part of the history of the interpretation of Homer in antiquity¹ in order to look specifically at the tradition closing that history and looking forward to the Middle Ages and
II Middle Platonism and the Interaction of Interpretive Traditions from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: The tradition of mystical allegorical commentary on Homer has survived in substantial form only in the writings of the Neoplatonists, but evidence from the first two and a half centuries of the Christian era—before the great synthesis of Plotinus, which marks the beginning of Neoplatonism proper—indicates that this period was a crucial one in the development of that tradition. Félix Buffière’s insistence on the second century as the time of the birth of mystical allegory needs qualification, as the discussion of the role of the Pythagoreans has suggested, but this does not alter the fact that Numenius and
IV The Interaction of Allegorical Interpretation and Deliberate Allegory from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: The emergence of allegorical writing on a large scale and the mystical allegorical interpretation of non-epic literature are both developments rooted in the period of the authors we have been discussing. Neither of these developments is well understood, and if neither has found its historian, it is doubtless because the evidence is sparse, difficult to interpret, and often difficult to date. My comments will be limited to a sampling of texts providing evidence that the tradition of allegorical reading we have been examining was, in fact, crucially important in generating patterns of thought about literature and responses to literature that
VI The Transmission of the Neoplatonists’ Homer to the Latin Middle Ages from:
Homer the Theologian
Abstract: Up to this point, with the exception of a brief discussion of Prudentius, this study has been concerned exclusively with Greek literature and thought. In fact, much of what has been discussed has been of Italian origin, from the archaic Pythagoreanism of southern Italy to the teachings of Plotinus and Porphyry in Rome. Virtually all the material examined, however, has been Greek in language and tradition. Traces of the Platonized Homer can be found in Latin authors as early as Apuleius,¹ a contemporary of Numenius, but there is no single work in Latin that explores at length the conception of
Introduction from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) van der Laan Cornelis
Abstract: With one estimate of 500 million adherents worldwide, converted in the course of one century, Pentecostalism has become one of the main branches of Christianity.¹ A popular theory locates the origin of Pentecostalism in a 1906 revival meeting at the Azusa Street Mission in Los Angeles. In this community the gifts of the Holy Spirit—for example, speaking in tongues, healing, and prophecy—were discovered and celebrated. There are reports, however, of the more or less simultaneous occurrence of similar movements in other parts of the world. Within a few years of the 1906 upsurge Pentecostalism had in fact established
1 Varieties, Taxonomies, and Definitions from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Anderson Allan
Abstract: Th is chapter is about defining Pentecostalism/s, in view of the fact that definitions are often static and prone to generate confusion. It seeks to give some clarity to the discussion of ways in which Pentecostalism can be described and analyzed, and it tries to offer direction through the maze of different shifting forms of Pentecostalism/s. In addition, it outlines some of the ways in which this movement can be identified by using the family resemblance analogy. It looks at the parameters by which we make categories, offers a flexible and overlapping taxonomy, and examines how various scholars have approached
4 Gender and Power from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Brusco Elizabeth
Abstract: The goal of this chapter is to comment on the scholarship on gender in the Pentecostal movement and to provide some case contextualization from my own ethnographic field research with Pentecostals in Colombia. Since I began to explore the gendered nature of Pentecostal conversion in the beginning of the 1980s, there has been, not exactly an explosion, but at least some steady growth in scholarly interest in the area, across a range of disciplines. My own discipline, anthropology, and area specialty in Latin America bias my perspective, but I believe that some of the most significant publications on the topic
5 Conversion Narratives from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Gooren Henri
Abstract: The emphasis in this chapter is on
howpeople tell the story of their conversion. I follow a historical and phenomenological approach to the conversion narrative, analyzing it as a social construction and not necessarily as a factual description of the main events in an individual’s life. A comprehensive conversion experience changes one’s self-image. This transformation, which is a process taking longer than just one day or one week, is gradually reflected in the most important indicator of conversion:biographical reconstruction.¹ People who undergo a conversion experience literally reconstruct their lives, giving new meanings to old events and putting different
7 Psychology of Religion from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Huber Odilo W.
Abstract: As an academic discipline, psychology is characterized by heterogeneity of approaches and fields of
12 Missiology and the Interreligious Encounter from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Richie Tony
Abstract: Pentecostals have always been heavily involved in missions and hold missionaries in high esteem as extraordinary heroes of the faith.¹ But they have traditionally not given as much thought to the topic of theology of religions, or interreligious dialogue and encounter, as to other theological loci.² Why this is the case may be related in part to the fact that academic Pentecostalism is but a recent arrival to the theological scene, with its first generation of professionally trained theologians—as opposed to historians or biblical scholars—emerging only since the early 1990s.³ Yet Pentecostal scholars can no longer avoid giving
13 Practical Theology from:
Studying Global Pentecostalism
Author(s) Cartledge Mark J.
Abstract: The discipline of practical theology is one that appears to be in constant redefinition in recent times, although there might at last be some consensus emerging. It was once regarded as the crown of theological study, placed toward the end of theological education for the ordained ministry. At this point in the process all the necessary “tips and hints” were added under the rubric
pastoralia.In this context it was closely aligned with education for ministry and by extension church education in a broader sense. Thus would-be clergy learned how to preach, lead worship, conduct pastoral conversations with the insights
Book Title: Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema- Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Morgan Daniel
Abstract: With
Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema, Daniel Morgan makes a significant contribution to scholarship on Jean-Luc Godard, especially his films and videos since the late 1980s, some of the most notoriously difficult works in contemporary cinema. Through detailed analyses of extended sequences, technical innovations, and formal experiments, Morgan provides an original interpretation of a series of several internally related films-Soigne ta droite(Keep Your Right Up, 1987),Nouvelle vague(New Wave, 1990), andAllemagne 90 neuf zéro(Germany 90 Nine Zero, 1991)-and the monumental late video work,Histoire(s) du cinéma(1988-1998). Taking up a range of topics, including the role of nature and natural beauty, the relation between history and cinema, and the interactions between film and video, the book provides a distinctive account of the cinematic and intellectual ambitions of Godard's late work. At the same time,Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinemaprovides a new direction for the fields of film and philosophy by drawing on the idealist and romantic tradition of philosophical aesthetics, which rarely finds an articulation within film studies. In using the tradition of aesthetics to illuminate Godard's late films and videos, Morgan shows that these works transform the basic terms and categories of aesthetics in and for the cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvj2
4 Cinema without Photography from:
Late Godard and the Possibilities of Cinema
Abstract: At the very beginning of the book, I described a scene from
Allemagne 90 neuf zérothat takes place in the Alte Nationalgalerie in Berlin. It starts with a shot of a woman in the act of taking a photograph; a 180-degree cut over her shoulder shows that she is photographing Gustave Courbet’s paintingThe Wave(see figure 1). As she presses the shutter, Lemmy Caution says in voice-over, “Bonjour, Monsieur Courbet,” and Godard cuts to a black-and-white film clip of a large wave rising up from the bottom of the frame and tossing a small ship. When I discussed
Book Title: Transpacific Displacement-Ethnography, Translation, and Intertextual Travel in Twentieth-Century American Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Huang Yunte
Abstract: Yunte Huang takes a most original "ethnographic" approach to more and less well-known American texts as he traces what he calls the transpacific displacement of cultural meanings through twentieth-century America's imaging of Asia. Informed by the politics of linguistic appropriation and disappropriation,
Transpacific Displacementopens with a radically new reading of Imagism through the work of Ezra Pound and Amy Lowell. Huang relates Imagism to earlier linguistic ethnographies of Asia and to racist representations of Asians in American pop culture, such as the book and movie character Charlie Chan, then shows that Asian American writers subject both literary Orientalism and racial stereotyping to double ventriloquism and countermockery. Going on to offer a provocative critique of some textually and culturally homogenizing tendencies exemplified in Maxine Hong Kingston's work and its reception, Huang ends with a study of American translations of contemporary Chinese poetry, which he views as new ethnographies that maintain linguistic and cultural boundaries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppvzv
THREE The Intertextual Travel of Amy Lowell from:
Transpacific Displacement
Abstract: What follows is not a coda or supplement to Imagism, although Amy Lowell’s work is often denigrated as such—“Amygism” is the usual epithet used to parody the poetry activities that went on after Lowell took over from Pound the leadership in promoting Imagism. My focus is on a new mode of conceptualizing Asia as manifested in Lowell’s work. In the preceding chapter, I described the ways in which Pound founded his pancultural program on intertextual ground; in this one, I explore a unique feature of Lowell’s ethnographic writing: her intertextual travel. As a traveler in the world of texts,
Book Title: Fighting Words-Religion, Violence, and the Interpretation of Sacred Texts
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Renard John
Abstract: One of the critical issues in interreligious relations today is the connection, both actual and perceived, between sacred sources and the justification of violent acts as divinely mandated.
Fighting Wordsmakes solid text-based scholarship accessible to the general public, beginning with the premise that a balanced approach to religious pluralism in our world must build on a measured, well-informed response to the increasingly publicized and sensationalized association of terrorism and large-scale violence with religion. In his introduction, Renard provides background on the major scriptures of seven religious traditions-Jewish, Christian (including both the Old and New Testaments), Islamic, Baha'i, Zoroastrian, Hindu, and Sikh. Eight chapters then explore the interpretation of select facets of these scriptures, focusing on those texts so often claimed, both historically and more recently, as inspiration and justification for every kind of violence, from individual assassination to mass murder. With its nuanced consideration of a complex topic, this book is not merely about the religious sanctioning of violence but also about diverse ways of reading sacred textual sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt1ppx1q
2 A Brief History of War in the Hebrew Bible and the Jewish Interpretive Tradition from:
Fighting Words
Author(s) Firestone Reuven
Abstract: The Hebrew Bible is a collection of diverse kinds of literature, reflecting many wide-ranging aspects of human culture and society, and spanning up to a thousand years of human experience.¹ Within this anthology one can find numerous stories depicting violence, battles, and all-out wars between individuals, families, tribes, and national communities. Some legal material also treats rules of behavior in war. These all reflect the social and political reality of the ancient Near East, where war and violent acts were considered to be normal, effective, and acceptable tools within the political repertoire available to family, tribal, and national leaderships. Israel²
7 Justifiable Force and Holy War in Zoroastrianism from:
Fighting Words
Author(s) Choksy Jamsheed K.
Abstract: There are numerous past and present scholarly debates over interpretations of theological, ritual, and philological issues in the Zoroastrian Avesta, or scriptures, and its
Zand, or priestly commentaries. However, unlike for example the raging discussions over the Muslim pillar of faith known asjihād, scholars of the ancient Iranian religion named Zoroastrianism, after its founder Zarathushtra, have rarely broached the issues of just and unjust violence and of holy and sacrilegious war. Combat when examined both by the faith’s practitioners and by scholars is largely understood in terms of theodicy and eschatology linked to the human condition.
Book Title: Rifle Reports-A Story of Indonesian Independence
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Steedly Mary Margaret
Abstract: On August 17, 1945, Indonesia proclaimed its independence from Dutch colonial rule. Five years later, the Republic of Indonesia was recognized as a unified, sovereign state. The period in between was a time of aspiration, mobilization, and violence, in which nationalists fought to expel the Dutch while also trying to come to grips with the meaning of "independence."
Rifle Reportsis an ethnographic history of this extraordinary time as it was experienced on the outskirts of the nation among Karo Batak villagers in the rural highlands of North Sumatra. Based on extensive interviews and conversations with Karo veterans,Rifle Reportsinterweaves personal and family memories, songs and stories, memoirs and local histories, photographs and monuments, to trace the variously tangled and perhaps incompletely understood ways that Karo women and men contributed to the founding of the Indonesian nation. The routes they followed are divergent, difficult, sometimes wavering, and rarely obvious, but they are clearly marked with the signs of gender. This innovative historical study of nationalism and decolonization is an anthropological exploration of the gendering of wartime experience, as well as an inquiry into the work of storytelling as memory practice and ethnographic genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt2jcbst
INTRODUCTION: from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: Each year on August 17 the highland town of Kabanjahé, like every other district seat in Indonesia, celebrates the proclamation of national independence. Banners, billboards, and strings of electric lights decorate the broad main streets.
Perjuangan(struggle) andMerdeka!(independence), the keywords of nationalist mobilization, appear everywhere, from cigarette advertisements to T-shirts. Freshly painted gateways at the entrances of side streets and public buildings mark off national time in red-stenciled numerals: on the left side, 17–8-45, the date of the independence proclamation, and on the right, 17–8 of the present year (figure 1). Schoolchildren begin practicing their parade
CHAPTER 2 Buried Guns from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: It was nearly dark by the time we arrived in Kuta Bangun, a midsized village in the central region of the Karo plateau. Even without the banner we couldn’t have missed the place. It was bustling with the kind of activity that signaled a ceremony, and the shoulder of the road was lined with city cars: low-slung Toyota sedans and Daihatsu Charades, SUVs and Land Rovers with government license plates. The funeral announcement
CHAPTER 3 Imagining Independence from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: Word of Indonesia’s independence reached the Karo highlands even before it was officially announced in Medan. According to Sektor III historian A. R. Surbakti, the news was carried by Selamat Ginting and his friends when they came to collect the buried guns of Juma Pali. In an exuberant rush of movement and emotion, Surbakti’s (1978:34) account draws the reader into the action as their 1938 Ford coupé convertible speeds back toward the city, loaded now with the disinterred Japanese guns: “Their spirits seethed with joy, as if no power on earth could oppose them.” When a policeman stops the car
CHAPTER 5 Sea of Fire from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: “They talk about the Bandung sea of fire [Bandung
lautan api],” said Nandé Timur beru Ginting, the widow of the former Sektor III chief of staff Ulung Sitepu, “but if you want to talk about a real ‘sea of fire,’ actually compared to our villages, the sea of fire wasn’t there,herewas the real sea of fire.” She was referring to the burning of the city of Bandung, West Java, in March 1946. It was one of the most famous events of the independence struggle, one of the handful of incidents that all Indonesian schoolkids would know, at least
CHAPTER 7 The Memory Artist from:
Rifle Reports
Abstract: News from afar sometimes seems to bear an uncanny resemblance to one’s own remembered past. This is not because of the banal redundancy of events but because of memory’s interpretive reach and its inclination to refurbish itself in contemporary designs and novel images. In 1994, when I was collecting these stories, horrifying pictures of ethnic violence from around the world seemed to appear nightly on the television news. In central Africa, roadways were filled with thousands of starving, desperate people traveling toward unknown destinations. This made a big impression on my Karo informants. “That’s exactly how it was here,” they
Postface: from:
The Fate of Place
Abstract: Irigaray’s challenging reading of Aristotle’s
Physicsreanimates an ancient (and very recent) question: How are body and place related? A first answer, given by Aristotle himself, posits a rigid material body in place by virtue of its sheer contiguity with the inner surface of what immediately surrounds it—a strictly physical intimacy that works by close containment. This containment acts in effect to cap and control the vagrant and violent movements of elemental qualities and powers as depicted in Plato’sTimaeus,a cosmogonic tale in which the tumult ofchōragives way to the order of determinatetopoi.Whether this
Book Title: Controlling Contested Places-Late Antique Antioch and the Spatial Politics of Religious Controversy
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Shepardson Christine
Abstract: From constructing new buildings to describing rival-controlled areas as morally and physically dangerous, leaders in late antiquity fundamentally shaped their physical environment and thus the events that unfolded within it.
Controlling Contested Placesmaps the city of Antioch (Antakya, Turkey) through the topographically sensitive vocabulary of cultural geography, demonstrating the critical role played by physical and rhetorical spatial contests during the tumultuous fourth century. Paying close attention to the manipulation of physical places, Christine Shepardson exposes some of the powerful forces that structured the development of religious orthodoxy and orthopraxy in the late Roman Empire.Theological claims and political support were not the only significant factors in determining which Christian communities gained authority around the Empire. Rather, Antioch's urban and rural places, far from being an inert backdrop against which events transpired, were ever-shifting sites of, and tools for, the negotiation of power, authority, and religious identity. This book traces the ways in which leaders like John Chrysostom, Theodoret, and Libanius encouraged their audiences to modify their daily behaviors and transform their interpretation of the world (and landscape) around them. Shepardson argues that examples from Antioch were echoed around the Mediterranean world, and similar types of physical and rhetorical manipulations continue to shape the politics of identity and perceptions of religious orthodoxy to this day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt5vjzxb
1 The Power of Prestigious Places: from:
Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: The Greek sophist Libanius recounts in his autobiography the struggle that he faced when he returned to his hometown of Antioch in the middle of the fourth century, intending to teach there after years abroad. At first confined to teaching in his home to a small group of students, he eventually acquired a classroom at the edge of the marketplace (
agora), and then finally the coveted right to lecture at thebouleutērion,the city hall, where he gained numerous students, and his authority increased exponentially. Libanius’s manipulation of Antioch’s places also reveals itself through the numerous interactions that he narrates
2 Burying Babylas: from:
Controlling Contested Places
Abstract: In the midst of the intra-Christian controversies in fourth-century Antioch, Christians undertook to acquire and redefine not only other Christians’ places, but also places associated with Greek and Roman gods and with Judaism. The emperor Julian’s interest in rebuilding the Jerusalem Temple inflamed Christian anti-Jewish rhetoric around the empire,¹ and his support of places and practices associated with the gods further complicated Christians’ relations with their neighbors in Antioch.² These latter tensions increased during the conflict involving Daphne’s famous oracular temple of Apollo. Although other scholars have used the complex history of Babylas’s relics as an example of fourth-century contests
8 Terrorism, Torture, and Psychological Abuse from:
Women and Evil
Abstract: So far we have looked at natural evil and cultural evil, both of which reveal forms of moral evil supporting them. Now we will look at practices that are ultimately evil—those that deliberately cause pain, separation, and helplessness and build on these states for their own ends. Who performs such acts? What is their purpose arid genesis?
Book Title: The Wherewithal of Life-Ethics, Migration, and the Question of Well-Being
Publisher: University of California Press
Author(s): Ouédraogo Ibrahim
Abstract: The Wherewithal of Lifeengages with current developments in the anthropology of ethics and migration studies to explore in empirical depth and detail the life experiences of three young men - a Ugandan migrant in Copenhagen, a Burkina Faso migrant in Amsterdam, and a Mexican migrant in Boston - in ways that significantly broaden our understanding of the existential situations and ethical dilemmas of those migrating from the global south. Michael Jackson offers the first biographically based phenomenological account of migration and mobility, providing new insights into the various motives, tactics, dilemmas, dreams, and disappointments that characterize contemporary migration. It is argued that the quandaries of African or Mexican migrants are not unique to people moving between 'traditional' and 'modern' worlds. While more intensely felt by the young, seeking to find a way out of a world of limited opportunity and circumscribed values, the experiences of transition are familiar to us all, whatever our age, gender, ethnicity or social status - namely, the impossibility of calculating what one may lose in leaving a settled life or home place; what one may gain by risking oneself in an alien environment; the difficulty of striking a balance between personal fulfillment and the moral claims of kinship; and the struggle to know the difference between 'concrete' and 'abstract' utopias (the first reasonable and worth pursuing; the second hopelessly unattainable).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/j.ctt7zw54w
Ibrahim from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: IN 2007 MY COUSIN LOUISA JACKSON and her friend Evelien Kuipers were working as volunteers for an NGO in Ghana. Louisa was helping out in an orphanage; Evelien was teaching English in an elementary school five hundred miles away. When they first met, Evelien responded instantly to Louisa’s unconventional personality, and both quickly discovered a shared commitment to protecting the environment and helping the poor. Th e two young women (Evelien was thirty, Louisa twenty-three) kept in touch by telephone and began planning a seven-week tour of Togo, Benin, and Burkina Faso when their contracts in Ghana ended. Evelien had
Postscript from:
The Wherewithal of Life
Abstract: JOAN DIDION ONCE WROTE, “We tell ourselves stories in order to live.”¹ Our stories provide us with parsimonious, coherent, and uncomplicated versions of events that have overwhelmed us. They offer the consoling illusion that even if we do not always have a hand in determining the course of our lives, a hidden hand is guiding our destiny from behind the scenes. In the opening of his autobiographical novel
Look Homeward, Angel,Thomas Wolfe imagines a thread of fated connections that transcend time and memory: “Each of us is all the sums he has not counted: subtract us into nakedness and
Book Title: Explorations and Encounters in French- Publisher: University of Adelaide Press
Author(s): MROWA-HOPKINS COLETTE
Abstract: The essays selected for inclusion in Explorations and Encounters in French bring together many of the current research strands in French Studies today, tapping into current pedagogical trends, analysing contemporary events in France, examining the Franco-Australian past, while reviewing teaching practice and the culture of teaching.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.20851/j.ctt1sq5wjr
Foreword and Acknowledgements from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Abstract: The Federation of Associations of Teachers of French in Australia is a young federation whose genesis goes back to 1996. Australia had active associations of teachers of French in every state but with relatively little contact between them, other than the exchange of newsletters. There was, however, a national link amongst the universities whose association, the Australian Society of French Studies (ASFS), held an annual conference.
Explorations and Encounters: from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Author(s) MROWA-HOPKINS COLETTE
Abstract: The theme of exploration requires little explanation in terms of its relevance to the constant strivings of human life and, by extension, to the activities of learning and scholarship; indeed, with its corollary of the journey, it underlines, as do writings since time immemorial, including many a school motto, the intimate relationship between seeking and discovering; striving and finding; quest and knowledge. The title of this volume —
Explorations and Encounters in French— can therefore be seen as self-evident, announcing as it does its essentially investigative nature and its position within a field of study. However, if the title
Les TICE: from:
Explorations and Encounters in French
Author(s) CZAPLINSKI IWONA
Abstract: Les enseignants de langue font depuis longtemps figure de pionniers en matière de technologie. L’audio, la vidéo, les produits multimédia et autres DVD ont été progressivement intégrés dans la panoplie du professeur de langue et on s’est fréquemment interrogé sur leur rôle dans l’apprentissage. Les technologies de la communication sont venues s’y ajouter ces dix dernières années et la communication médiée par les systèmes informatiques soulève à son tour des interrogations. Ce nouvel environnement modifie certaines conditions d’apprentissage, en complexifiant les relations entre les principaux acteurs de la communication. Ceux-ci interagissent au moyen d’outils qu’ils peuvent adapter à leurs besoins.
4 Defining the Historical Novel from:
Whose History?
Abstract: There will never be a satisfactory answer to these questions, but these are the arbitrary decisions we’ve made.
5 The Increase of History as a Subject for Novels: from:
Whose History?
Abstract: History teachers have available to them a rising tide of popularity in the reading of historical novels. There is no sign of this popularity waning. As this chapter will demonstrate, the historical novel continues to develop as a literary genre as increasing numbers of authors are attracted to it.
6 ‘The plot against the plot’: from:
Whose History?
Abstract: When teachers or academics recommend a particular historical novel as a teaching/learning strategy for an undergraduate unit or classroom activity, they enter into a very problematic and contested domain. But most teachers or academics would agree that the first consideration should be meeting their students at their point of need. It is likely that many students will have been exposed to, or will have read, historical novels generally and/or Australian historical novels. Some may be aware of the changes that have come over the historical novel, and the Australian historical novel specifically, since the onset of the postmodernist and postcolonial
10 Whose History? from:
Whose History?
Abstract: Alert students will often tell teachers and university lecturers that there is sometimes a significant discrepancy between the same historical characters, settings or incidents in historical fiction and nonfiction. An illustration of this point arises with hugely successful author Bryce Courtenay’s work of historical fiction,
The Potato Factory(1995), and a subsequent work of nonfiction, which sought to put the record straight on Isaac (Ikey) Solomon, one of the principal characters in Courtenay’s novel. Judith Sackville-O’Donnell, a Melbourne author, challenged Courtenay’s depiction of Ikey Solomon, who was also believed to be the model for Charles Dickens’s fictional villain Fagin.
12 Unpacking Historical Novels for their Historicity: from:
Whose History?
Abstract: Historical figures have become historical characters in this type of novel. But is their characterisation partly imaginary? Often
1 The doubling of the frame — Visual art and discourse from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) Poiana Peter
Abstract: The notion of framing is one that has emerged as a key factor in current investigations into representations of culture. In the disciplinary area of French Studies, framing is understood as collective and individual rules of identity construction that are based upon a combination of modes of visual production, past and present narratives, and discourses of knowledge and power. The present volume will pursue the question of framing in all three areas.
3 An artist in the making: from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) West-Sooby John
Abstract: The link between scientific discovery and empire building was never more evident than in the latter decades of the eighteenth century. During that time, as Mary Louise Pratt has noted, the 'international scientific expedition' became 'one of Europe's proudest and most conspicuous instruments of expansion'.¹ For Pratt, this period coincided with the emergence of a new version of Europe's 'planetary consciousness' — one which was characterised by 'the construction of global-scale meaning through the descriptive apparatuses of natural history'.²
6 Framing the Eiffel Tower: from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) Stephens Sonya
Abstract: The visual impact, and iconic status, of the Eiffel Tower have long been established. Indeed, it was conceived as both a monumental sight and as a place for viewing, and so its place in visual culture, it might be argued, was a very part of the Tower's conception in 1884, long before a committee had even been formed to select a centerpiece for the 1889
Exposition Universelle. Recent innovations in a range of fields, including cultural geography and visual culture, have led scholars to reflect on what constitutes an urban icon, to question that which is precisely the 'visual' in
9 The image of self-effacement: from:
Framing French Culture
Author(s) Hogarth Christopher
Abstract: Michel Beaujour states his dissatisfaction with the term 'autoportrait' to encapsulate adequately literary endeavours at self-representation.¹ The connection between self-portraiture and painting is evident, and the slippage of the term across mediums leads, in Beaujour's opinion, to deny the specificity of literary works. Yet, referring to works such as Michel de Montaigne's
Essais, Michel Leiris'sL'âge d'hommeand Jean-Jacques Rousseau'sRêveries, Beaujour highlights its usefulness as a tool that distinguishes it from autobiographical texts for two fundamental reasons. First, self-portraiture insists upon an absence of continuity, thus defying any clearly arranged order of events that contribute to a personality created
1.3 The Interaction between Sciences and Humanities in Nineteenth-Century Scientific Materialism: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Meneghello Laura
Abstract: Positivism is normally understood as favoring separation of the humanities and the natural sciences, rather than interaction between them. This is because, around the 1850s, the modern scientific method seemed to provoke a progressive demarcation between the exact sciences and other disciplines. I would like to question this assumption by analyzing the attitude of Jacob Moleschott’s scientific materialism – which has typically been interpreted as one of the most radical movements within Positivism – vis-à-vis the humanities.
2.2 Soviet Orientalism and Subaltern Linguistics: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Leezenberg Michiel
Abstract: One of the attractions of the park surrounding the Villa Borghese in Rome is a group of statues of national poets. Included among them are such obvious examples as the Persian Abulqasim Firdowsi, author of the
ShahnâmehorBook of Kings; the Georgian Shota Rustaveli, who wroteThe Man in the Panther Skin(Vepkhistqaosani); and the Montenegran Petar Njegos, writer ofThe Mountain Wreath(Gorski Vijenac). More surprising, however, is the presence of a statue, unveiled in 2012, of the ‘Azerbaijani poet’ Nizami Genjewi. Nizami composed all of his poems in Persian, but now he is claimed as the national
3.3 The Professionalization of the Historical Discipline: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ottner Christine
Abstract: Scholarly periodicals are important pacemakers and trendsetters in the process of academic professionalization and institutionalization: they not only reflect developments within scientific disciplines or their relationship to other scientific fields, they also influence such developments decisively by way of an active editorial policy.¹ Already in the course of the eighteenth century many journals dealing with ‘historical’ issues had been founded, i.e., treating genealogical, numismatic, and statistical contents.² Most of them were media of education which intended to spread and discuss established ideas within a circle of educated readers.³ At that time and also during the early years of the nineteenth
4.3 ‘Big Science’ in Classics in the Nineteenth Century and the Academicization of Antiquity from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Baertschi Annette M.
Abstract: The digital revolution of the past years has profoundly changed higher education and the academic world in general. Not only has ‘much of the teaching and learning apparatus moved online’, thus effectuating new forms of classroom instruction, but ‘the computational technologies and methodologies’ available today have also ‘transformed research practices in every discipline’.¹ The digital humanities in particular have created exciting new tools, which have attracted a lot of attention within the scholarly community and received positive media coverage.² This in turn has boosted public interest in humanities research, especially in relation to new technologies that ‘facilitate insights into history,
5.1 Furio Jesi and the Culture of the Right from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Rowland Ingrid D.
Abstract: On the night of June 16, 1980, Furio Jesi, Italian scholar, critic, poet, novelist, actor and political activist, died in his home, suffocated by an accidental gas leak from the water heater.¹ He had turned thirty-nine only a month before, but his curriculum vitae was already long enough for several people twice his age: he had written nearly twenty monographs on subjects including Egyptology, mythology, German literature, and Hebrew mysticism, as well as newspaper articles, novels, translations, poetry, and a spate of unpublished manuscripts. In 1979, typically, he had produced two books,
Materiali mitologici(Mythological Materials:Myth and Anthropology in
5.3 Theater Studies from the Early Twentieth Century to Contemporary Debates: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Buglioni Chiara Maria
Abstract: No other discipline within the humanities has had to struggle with its own interdisciplinary character as much as theater research in Europe. The fathers of the new-born scholarship
Theaterwissenschaftwere mainly concerned with distinguishing theater from other forms of art and with asserting its right as an independent field of enquiry. The need to define a specific methodological approach, however, was not taken into account. This initial lack in the creation of the scientific discipline has influenced the controversial development of theater studies and has caused frequent identity crises.
7.3 The History of Musical Iconography and the Influence of Art History: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Ruccius Alexis
Abstract: Musical iconography is a prime example of a research field that emerged through the affiliation of two disciplines from the humanities. Over a period of 150 years, musicologists had already turned to art works in search of visual evidence to guide in the reconstruction of musical instruments and historical performance practices. Understood as being fundamentally representational in nature, pictures were used as reliable historical sources, by Julius Rühlmann or Hugo Leichtentritt, for example. In the twentieth century, under the influence of the Warburg School, this field of study expanded into an independent research field known as ‘musical iconography’. Aiming at
8.2 The Emergence of East Asian Art History in the 1920s: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Orell Julia
Abstract: Late-nineteenth- and early-twentieth-century Europe saw an increasing interest in non-European art from Africa, Pre-Columbian America, Asia, the Pacific Islands and elsewhere. Private collectors and museums eagerly collected, exhibited, and published such works, often in competition with each other in the context of colonization.¹ In addition to museums and collectors, artists developed a great interest in non-European art and artifacts since at least the mid-nineteenth century, ranging from Japanese woodcut prints to African masks, often summarized under the problematic category of primitivism. The academic discipline of art history, however, was slow in responding to the broadening range of images and objects
9.1 Historical Roots of Information Sciences and the Making of E-Humanities from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) van den Heuvel Charles
Abstract: Information scientist Christine Borgman in
Scholarship in the Digital Agedistinguishes between data used by natural scientists, social scientists and humanities scholars and discusses the implications hereof for their research practices. The analysis of these practices in combination with information technology must in her view result in an infrastructure for digital scholarship to facilitate distributed, collaborative, multidisciplinary research and learning that relies on large volumes of digital resources.¹ The distinction in data that Borgman mentioned has been used as one of the arguments to explain why scholars in the humanities and social sciences make less use of digital infrastructures and
9.2 Toward a Humanities of the Digital? from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Sprondel Johanna
Abstract: In their seminal paper ‘The Verbal Concordance to the Scriptures’ from 1974, R.H. and M.A. Rouse characterize concordances to the scriptures to be ‘not only one of the earliest but probably the most important [technical aid], because its system of reference, its method of compilation and its successful application of complete alphabetization were used by generations of later tool-makers’.¹ To what extent this holds true for more recent inventions, such search engines, and more specifically web search engines, is the question I shall address in this paper: Can we consider Google & Co. as concordance?
11.1 Explaining Verstehen: from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Bouterse Jeroen
Abstract: Max Weber is, of course, famous as one of the founding fathers of sociology. From the perspective of a threefold division of scholarly activity – natural sciences, social sciences, and humanities – it might seem odd to devote focused attention to him in a discussion of the humanities.
12.2 Critique and Theory in the History of the Modern Humanities from:
The Making of the Humanities, vol. III
Author(s) Jay Paul
Abstract: What role has poststructuralist literary, critical, and cultural theory played in the making of the humanities, particularly in the period between 1968 and the present, and what role should theory have going forward as we come to terms with the corporatization of higher education, with its stress on practical skills, vocational training, and on measuring concrete learning outcomes? Exploring these questions requires confronting – and linking – two key issues currently at the core of sometimes-fierce debates about the humanities in the West, and particularly in the US.
Book Title: In Defense of Doctrine-Evangelicalism, Theology, and Scripture
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Putman Rhyne R.
Abstract: Questions surrounding the relationship of Scripture and doctrine are legion within the Protestant tradition. How can doctrine develop over time and maintain fidelity to the sacred text, especially for communities who cling to the Reformation principle of sola scriptura? Does not an appeal to contemporary, constructive theology belie commonly held Protestant and Evangelical convictions about the sufficiency of Scripture? Does admission and acceptance of doctrinal development result in a kind of reality-denying theological relativism? And in what way can a growing, postcanonical tradition maintain a sense of continuity with the faith of the New Testament? This study is an apologetic for the ongoing, constructive theological task in Protestant and Evangelical traditions. It suggests that doctrinal development can be explained as a hermeneutical phenomenon and that insights from hermeneutical philosophy and the philosophy of language can aid theologians in constructing explanatory theses for particular theological problems associated with the facts of doctrinal development, namely, questions related to textual authority, reality depiction, and theological identity. Joining the recent call to theological interpretation of Scripture, Putman provides a constructive model that forwards a descriptive and normative pattern for reading Scripture and theological tradition together.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878jm
1 Reading Scripture and Developing Doctrine from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: For Christian believers, no one captivates the attention, moves the affections, or stirs the imagination like Jesus of Nazareth. He is the visible display—the perfect icon—of the inexhaustible love and power of an invisible God (Col. 1:15). What we know of this Jesus we have read in the writings of the New Testament. These first-century texts are the gateway to Christ, the “primary sources” on which we base our historical, theological, and practical beliefs about him. Through the theologically flavored biographies, ecclesial missives, and dreamlike visions contained within, we can get to know him and get a glimpse
2 Historical Consciousness, Development, and Hermeneutics from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: Doctrinal development may be an inevitable, even essential element of the theological task as it has been practiced for nearly two millennia, but explicit theoretical reflection on the nature of this phenomenon is a relatively recent feature in Christian thought. The history of evangelical attention to the problem of development is much shorter, because, as we shall see, Roman Catholic theologians began addressing the issue much earlier than their Protestant and evangelical counterparts. The study of general hermeneutics or hermeneutical theory, a discipline concerned with understanding the relationship between interpreters and texts (i.e., written texts or any other complex aggregate
5 Interpretive Authority and Doctrinal Development from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: By whose “authority” does the church develop doctrine? What guide can aid in differentiating between positive developments and doctrinal distortions? By whose rule can we draw the line between orthodoxy and heterodoxy? The construction of doctrine in the broader Christian tradition and in systematic theology is a complex operation that involves many people over a great span of time with many disciplinary specialties and pastoral concerns. Naturalist interpretations of religion chalk all of these processes up to socio-cultural or bio-cultural factors. These are undirected by external forces and products of a human culture, a building of gods in the images
7 Development and Continuity from:
In Defense of Doctrine
Abstract: The most critical issue for any model of doctrinal development is the question of doctrinal continuity. Can doctrines
develop, grow, orprogresswithout compromising their fidelity to “the faith once delivered unto the saints” (Jude 3)? Can there be maintained identity between New Testament teachings and later doctrinal formulations that utilize very different conceptual frameworks? Most importantly, if doctrines do in fact develop over time through expansion, contextualization, and critical correction, how can the faith communities that develop and reformulate doctrines claim to be part of the same broad Christian tradition?
2 Reinterpreting the Myth: from:
The Mission of Demythologizing
Abstract: “Ein
Bildhielt uns gefangen”—apictureheld us captive. So wrote Ludwig Wittgenstein in §115 of hisPhilosophische Untersuchungen.³ When it comes to Rudolf Bultmann, a certain picture of his theology has held people captive for many years. I have called this picture the myth of the whale and the elephant. We have looked at two of the best attempts to overcome this picture, but these efforts, as important as they are, remain unsatisfactory and insufficient.
Book Title: Writing Theologically- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: Of course, by writing we refer to the kinds of reflections, essays, and exams students will have to complete in the seminary classroom. But writing also encompasses the many modes of communication and self-discovery that creative expression can unlock. Writing Theologically introduces writing not just as an academic exercise but as a way for students to communicate the good news in rapidly changing contexts, as well as to discover and craft their own sense of vocation and identity. Most important will be guiding students to how they might begin to claim and hone a distinctive theological voice that is particularly attuned to the contexts of writer and audience alike. In a collection of brief, readable essays, this volume, edited by Eric D. Barreto, emphasizes the vital skills, practices, and values involved in writing theologically. That is, how might students prepare themselves to communicate effectively and creatively, clearly and beautifully, the insights they gather during their time in seminary? Each contribution includes practical advice about best practices in writing theologically; however, the book also stresses why writing is vital in the self-understanding of the minister, as well as her or his public communication of the good news.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt12878rq
4 Writing Briefly from:
Writing Theologically
Author(s) Smith Shively T. J.
Abstract: Quintilian suggests that oral speech develops persuasiveness through the practice of writing, not more speech making. As such, we acquire forceful and energetic speech
5 Power and Wealth from:
Power and Politics in the Book of Judges
Abstract: When the messenger of Yhwh first encountered Gideon, he addressed him saying, “Yhwh is with you, mighty and prosperous warrior” (Judg. 6:12).¹ Besides exercising great power, Gideon and the other central characters in the book of Judges accumulated and managed substantial wealth. As heads or members of prominent houses they owned fields and herds, administered revenue-generating shrines, were proprietors of thrashing floors, retained servants and slaves, possessed many wives, had numerous sons and daughters, engaged the services of professional diviners, hired mercenaries, gained access to town treasuries, redistributed the spoils of battle, rode on donkeys instead of walked, and were
2 The Legalist within Us from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: The outer shell of a Kosta Boda bowl is thick glass. Since 1742, glassmaker Kosta Boda in Småland just south of Stockholm has been making artistic glassware that decorates many home interiors in Europe and North America. Kosta Boda glassware may look delicate, but it is sturdy. Normally, it does not need reinforcement. Duct tape would add nothing to its strength and would only detract from its beauty. Yet, a fragile soul might want to reinforce the exterior with spiritual duct tape, just in case. One brand of such duct tape is legalism, the most popular form of self-justification. We
11 Faith as Trust from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we looked at how—in faith—we give attention to God’s Word, perceive that God is gracious, and believe selected doctrines to be true. If we wanted to be persnickety, we might dub these acts of faith
works. It takes work on our part to believe in the truth of doctrines. If it takes work to have faith as belief, then we might rightfully ask: How can our faith be saving faith if it is a form of work? Faith as belief looks like one more way to climb the spiritual ladder, right? What happened to
13 The Joint Declaration on the Doctrine of Justification from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Luther’s insight and conviction led to a theological eruption that resulted in a religious lava flow. For five centuries, it flowed down the medieval mountainside, increasing in speed until it crashed into the ecclesial hierarchy and hardened into the Protestant Reformation of the sixteenth century. The medieval edifice underwent a torrent of change as new rivulets divided the mountain; these divisions came to include the Lutherans, the Reformed, the Anglicans, and the radicals (or Anabaptists). Eventually these groups fractured further, giving rise to the Quakers, Methodists, deists, and revivalists. To change metaphors, like Humpty Dumpty falling to pieces, Western Christendom
16 The Life of Beatitude from:
Sin Boldly!
Abstract: Our present and our past are defined by our future, by God’s future. This makes the human soul’s identity contingent, dependent on what we will yet become. The end of the story will retroactively determine the meaning of all previous chapters in this story.²
Book Title: Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Netzley Ryan
Abstract: What's new about the apocalypse? Revelation does not allow us to look back after the end and enumerate pivotal turning points. It happens in an immediate encounter with the transformatively new. John Milton's and Andrew Marvell's lyrics attempt to render the experience of such an apocalyptic change in the present. In this respect they take seriously the Reformation's insistence that eschatology is a historical phenomenon. Yet these poets are also reacting to the Regicide, and, as a result, their works explore very modern questions about the nature of events, what it means for a significant historical occasion to happen. Lyric Apocalypse argues that Milton's and Marvell's lyrics challenge any retrospective understanding of events, including one built on a theory of revolution. Instead, these poems show that there is no "after" to the apocalypse, that if we are going to talk about change, we should do so in the present, when there is still time to do something about it. For both of these poets, lyric becomes a way to imagine an apocalyptic event that would be both hopeful and new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fr4
Conclusion. from:
Lyric Apocalypse: Milton, Marvell, and the Nature of Events
Abstract: So ending, it turns out, is much more difficult than it appears. Modern popular psychology to the contrary, closure and resolution are actually quite easy, insofar as they turn the world into a series of problems to be solved, riddles to be unraveled. Ending is difficult, for humans at least, because it entails stopping something without being recognized for doing so, either with the praise of one’s fellows or the spoils of victory in a strategic contest. The modern discomfort with endings can be encapsulated in one concept: the “postapocalyptic.” The postapocalyptic, no matter how horrific, promises us that the
Book Title: To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): NEWTON ADAM ZACHARY
Abstract: How can cradling, handling, or rubbing a text be said, ethically, to have made something happen? What, as readers or interpreters, may come off in our hands in as we maculate or mark the books we read? For Adam Zachary Newton, reading is anembodied practice wherein "ethics" becomes a matter of tact in the doubled sense of touch and regard. With the image of the book lying in the hands of its readers as insistent refrain, To Make the Hands Impure cuts a provocative cross-disciplinary swath through classical Jewish texts, modern Jewish philosophy, film and performance, literature, translation, and the material text. Newton explores the ethics of reading through a range of texts, from the Talmud and Midrash to Conrad's Nostromo and Pascal's Le Memorial, from works by Henry Darger and Martin Scorsese to the National September 11 Memorial and a synagogue in Havana, Cuba. In separate chapters, he conducts masterly treatments of Emmanuel Levinas, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Stanley Cavell by emphasizing their performances as readers a trebled orientation to Talmud, novel, and theater/film. To Make the Hands Impure stages the encounter of literary experience and scriptural traditions he difficult and the holy through an ambitious, singular, and innovative approach marked in equal measure by erudition and imaginative daring.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287fz7
CHAPTER 1 Pledge, Turn, Prestige: from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Every great magic trick consists of three parts or acts. The first part is called “The Pledge.” The magician shows you something ordinary: a deck of cards, a bird or a man. He shows you this object. Perhaps he asks you to inspect it to see if it is indeed real, unaltered, normal. But of course, it probably isn’t. The second act is called “The Turn.” The magician takes the ordinary something and makes it do something extraordinary. Now you’re looking for the secret, but you won’t find it, because of course you’re not really looking. You don’t want to
CHAPTER 6 Ethics of Reading III: from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: Stanley Cavell’s memoir
Little Did I Know: Excerpts From Memory(2010) introduces us to a rather thickly described Jewish upbringing for which his non-autobiographical writings may not quite have prepared us.¹ References to Jewish material culture do not exactly stand out in the body of his work. It is fair to assume that the passage from the mishnaic tractate on Temple measurements that stands as the first epigraph to this chapter is not one with which he would necessarily be familiar. The mechanism it describes, however, can be taken for a somewhat uncanny precedent for two harbingers of the cinematic
CHAPTER 7 Abyss, Volcano, and the Frozen Swirl of Words: from:
To Make the Hands Impure: Art, Ethical Adventure, the Difficult and the Holy
Abstract: The excerpt from Bialik’s poem as the first epigraph begins with a contact between scroll and person far more intimate than any proscribed by the Talmud. It terminates, at least as I have reproduced it here, with the poem’s title—transliterated as “
Lifneiaron ha-sefarim”—rendered in Hebrew characters. Part of what Levinas calls the Gemara’s “secret scent” lies in its orthography and graphemes, the characters that make up the Hebrew-Aramaic alphabet. So, indeed, does the secret scent of Bialik’s poetry. If the classic books of Jewish religious instruction no longer exert their pull on the poem’s speaker, if their columns
Book Title: Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BERGER HARRY
Abstract: Figures of a Changing World offers a dramatic new account of cultural change, an account based on the distinction between two familiar rhetorical figures, metonymy and metaphor. The book treats metonymy as the basic organizing trope of traditional culture and metaphor as the basic organizing trope of modern culture. On the one hand, metonymies present themselves as analogies that articulate or reaffirm preexisting states of affairs. They are guarantors of facticity, a term that can be translated or defined as fact-like-ness. On the other hand, metaphors challenge the similarity they claim to establish, in order to feature departures from preexisting states of affairs. On the basis of this distinction, the author argues that metaphor and metonymy can be used as instruments both for the large-scale interpretation of tensions in cultural change and for the micro-interpretation of tensions within particular texts. In addressing the functioning of the two terms, the author draws upon and critiques the work of Friedrich Nietzsche, Roman Jakobson, Christian Metz, Paul Ricoeur, Umberto Eco, Edmund Leach, and Paul de Man.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287gfz
ONE Two Figures: from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: I begin with an absolutely arbitrary and unwarranted assertion, namely, that given a distinction between metaphor and metonymy, the tendency to make metaphors is characteristic of the modern attitude, while the tendency to see metonymies is characteristic of the traditional attitude. Any traditional ambience that becomes a cosmos does so because it has been structured into a field for the perception of metonymies, has been organized, we might say, by the metonymizing process. Modernization (or disenchantment) is then the transformation of metonymies into metaphors; to modernize is to de-metonymize, to metaphorize. To re-traditionalize is to demetaphorize, to re-metonymize. The traditional
THREE Making Metaphors, Seeing Metonymies from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: My way of formulating the contrast between metaphor and metonymy is indebted to various linguistic, structuralist, and semiotic discussions for some, but not all, of its elements. I have selectively synthesized certain aspects that characteristically emerge in those discussions and rejected others, so as to shift the emphasis of the distinction toward my focus on the problematics of culture change. Ever since Roman Jakobson placed the opposition between metaphor and metonymy at the foundations of language use, the terms have been subject to continuous definitional torquing and distension.¹ And although the privileged status of these tropes has been accepted or
SIX The Semiotics of Metaphor and Metonymy: from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: Nietzsche is fundamentally concerned with the circuitous and deceptive character of our relations to things, and with the transcendence of actuality to our representations of it at the level of the signifier. But to a semiotician, the distinction between linguistic activity and extralinguistic reality is naive, and so I turn to Umberto Eco’s more doggedly semiotic approach to this distinction in
A Theory of Semiotics. Eco divides semiotics into two parts: the theory of codes or signification and the theory of sign-production or language use.Codedesignates the system of rules that “generate signs as concrete occurrences in communicative intercourse.”¹
NINE Metaphor and Metonymy in the Middle Ages: from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: The time is the late Middle Ages. The texts that follow illustrate the kinds of historical constraint that impose themselves on the characterization and valuation of our two rhetorical figures. The first passage, a famous anonymous jingle, states in popular form the theory of fourfold interpretation that guides much symbolic practice during the Christian Middle Ages, and the second passage is an equally famous but sophisticated justification of the theory:
ELEVEN Ulysses as Modernist: from:
Figures of a Changing World: Metaphor and the Emergence of Modern Culture
Abstract: The passage occurs in act 1, scene 3 of Shakespeare’s
Troilus and Cressida. Agamemnon and Nestor have been trying to shore up the courage of the other Greek leaders with the argument that their inability to take Troy after seven years derives from Jove’s wish to test their constancy. Ulysses begs them to let him air his own view of the matter, and this leads to the following exchange:
Book Title: The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): GORDON PETER E.
Abstract: Derrida's writings on the question of religion have played a crucial role in the transformation of scholarly debate across the globe. The Trace of God provides a compact introduction to this debate. It considers Derrida's fraught relationship to Judaism and his Jewish identity, broaches the question of Derrida's relation to the Western Christian tradition, and examines both the points of contact and the silences in Derrida's treatment of Islam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287gjh
“Et Iterum de Deo”: from:
The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) DE VRIES HENT
Abstract: Neither traditional philosophical theism nor modern secular humanism nor, for that matter, theoretical or practical humanism and atheism seem adequate designations to capture the simultaneous generalization and trivialization, intensification, and exaggeration to which Derrida subjects the religious and theological—indeed, theologico-political—categories, drawn from the vastest and deepest of archives.¹
Habermas, Derrida, and the Question of Religion from:
The Trace of God: Derrida and Religion
Author(s) GORDON PETER E.
Abstract: In the history of religion the arrival of the millennium is often imagined as the έσχατον, an end of history or “end-time” that brings an apocalyptic and ultimate answer to all human questions. But the perennial quarrel between religion and philosophy can hardly be illustrated with greater force than by recalling that for Socrates the practice of philosophy remains forever marked by άπορεία. It is a mode of critical interrogation or
maieuticsthat is always incomplete, and that must forever exceed or undo any ideal of plenitude. In this sense, although its detractors consign philosophy to the ostensibly unworldly realm
Book Title: Ostension-Word Learning and the Embodied Mind
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Engelland Chad
Abstract: Ostension is bodily movement that manifests our engagement with things, whether we wish it to or not. Gestures, glances, facial expressions: all betray our interest in something. Ostension enables our first word learning, providing infants with a prelinguistic way to grasp the meaning of words. Ostension is philosophically puzzling; it cuts across domains seemingly unbridgeable -- public--private, inner--outer, mind--body. In this book, Chad Engelland offers a philosophical investigation of ostension and its role in word learning by infants. Engelland discusses ostension (distinguishing it from ostensive definition) in contemporary philosophy, examining accounts by Quine, Davidson, and Gadamer, and he explores relevant empirical findings in psychology, evolutionary anthropology, and neuroscience. He offers original studies of four representative historical thinkers whose work enriches the understanding of ostension: Wittgenstein, Merleau-Ponty, Augustine, and Aristotle. And, building on these philosophical and empirical foundations, Engelland offers a meticulous analysis of the philosophical issues raised by ostension. He examines the phenomenological problem of whether embodied intentions are manifest or inferred; the problem of what concept of mind allows ostensive cues to be intersubjectively available; the epistemological problem of how ostensive cues, notoriously ambiguous, can be correctly understood; and the metaphysical problem of the ultimate status of the key terms in his argument: animate movement, language, and mind. Finally, he argues for the centrality of manifestation in philosophy. Taking ostension seriously, he proposes, has far-reaching implications for thinking about language and the practice of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287hgz
1 The Philosophy of Action, Perception, and Play from:
Ostension
Abstract: How do children learn the meaning of their first words? Thinkers from every theoretical persuasion admit they must make the right association of sound and sense in order for communication to occur. For example, John Locke writes: “To make words serviceable to the end of communication, it is necessary as has been said that they excite in the hearer exactly the same idea they stand for in the mind of the speaker. Without this men fill one another’s heads with noise and sounds; but convey not thereby their thoughts, and lay not before one another their ideas, which is the
4 Merleau-Ponty: from:
Ostension
Abstract: Edmund Husserl, the founder of the phenomenological movement, focused his research primarily on the origin of mathematics, logic, and science. Yet the phenomenological method of investigation bore fruit in other areas as well. His
Ideas II, which circulated in manuscript form to Heidegger and later to Merleau-Ponty, proved revolutionary for its inquiry into the living body and the surrounding world.² Heidegger finds attractive Husserl’s new emphasis on the “experiential context as such.”³ Indeed, Merleau-Ponty avers that Heidegger’sBeing and Time“springs from an indication given by Husserl and amounts to no more than an explicit account of the ‘natürlicher weltbegriff’
7 Phenomenology: from:
Ostension
Abstract: In the American elementary school activity called show-and-tell, children bring something interesting from home to show to their classmates. Attention focuses on the item shown, and the presence of the item serves as the point of departure for the child to speak about it. “This is Santa on a surfboard. It’s something my mom bought in Hawaii when she was a girl. Every Christmas, I get to hang it on our Christmas tree.” Telling can speak about many absent things, but it begins with something present: the shown thing. The interplay of showing and speech in this game recalls the
8 Mind: from:
Ostension
Abstract: In
Charlie and the Chocolate Factory, chocolatier Willy Wonka lets his guests peer into a room full of a most curious treat: “There you are! Square candies that look round!”² The children protest that the candies look square, not round, but thereupon Wonka flings open the glass doors and all the candies look round to see who has entered the room. (The little sugar cubes have tiny pink faces painted on them.) The word “look” involves a kind of mirroring. It can mean the act of turning to see what’s there, or it can mean what appears there to be
11 Conclusion: from:
Ostension
Abstract: “Has philosophy lost contact with people?” wondered Quine in a 1979
Newsdaycolumn. He was responding to Mortimer Adler, an Aristotelian and Great Books enthusiast, who maintained that professional philosophy no longer appealed to the general literate public. Quine acknowledges that the menu of philosophy has become exotic, and only connoisseurs will appreciate its offerings today. But Quine takes umbrage at the suggestion that this specialization should be taken as a shortcoming. It rather constitutes philosophy’s maturation into a scientific discipline. The linguistic turn had the great merit of undermining modern introspective notions, which proved inadequate for accounting for our
Book Title: Myth and Scripture-Contemporary Perspectives on Religion, Language, and Imagination
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Callender Dexter E.
Abstract: In this collection scholars suggest that using "myth" creates a framework within which to set biblical writings in both cultural and literary comparative contexts. Reading biblical accounts alongside the religious narratives of other ancient civilizations reveals what is commonplace and shared among them. The fruit of such work widens and enriches our understanding of the nature and character of biblical texts, and the results provide fresh evidence for how biblical writings became "scripture."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287n15
“God Was in Christ”: from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Johnson Luke Timothy
Abstract: Without question, 2 Corinthians is the hardest of Paul’s letters to read and understand. This is partly due to the complex character of its composition: even if we do not accept its segmentation into several fragments,¹ the
logosrhetoric, especially in its arrangement, remains opaque.² Paul’s extraordinarily dense language intertwines the specific circumstances of Paul and his readers with the work of God in Christ. Readers have always found it difficult to discern precisely where Paul speaks to the very human situation of alienation existing between him and the Corinthian church and the very concrete project of his collection for
Myth, Allegory, and the Derveni Papyrus from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Fitzgerald John T.
Abstract: One of the most notorious aspects of ancient Greek myth was its frequent depiction of the gods as engaging in conduct that is morally problematic. The scandalous manner in which various myths portrayed the gods was doubtless one of the factors that made them popular in many social circles, but these same immoral depictions raised a number of serious intellectual and ethical questions that were debated at length throughout antiquity. The fundamental question was whether these common depictions of the gods were true. If so, the gods were often exemplars of vice rather than of virtue, and human morality was
Response to Robert A. Segal, “The Life of King Saul as Myth” from:
Myth and Scripture
Author(s) Collins Adela Yarbro
Abstract: If we follow Hooke and define “myth” as the story that a ritual enacts, we then have to decide what counts as “ritual.” Do we limit the term
ritualto gestures that seem
Book Title: Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Thatcher Tom
Abstract: Articles that integrate the study of collective memory and social psychology into religious studiesEssays from Barry SchwartzTheories applied rather than left as abstract principles
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1287n36
Selective Recall and Ghost Memories: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Newsom Carol A.
Abstract: Biblical studies has long been concerned with aspects of what is now called “cultural memory,” especially in the form of a preoccupation with tradition history.¹ Yet even though the major theorists of tradition history were active at the same time that Maurice Halbwachs and Aby Warburg were developing their ideas about cultural memory in society and art, there is no evidence of intellectual cross-fertilization. More recently, the debates over historiography in biblical studies in the 1990s raised in an acute fashion issues relating to the preservation of reliable data in the historical narratives of the Bible versus the invention of
Memory and Loss in Early Rabbinic Text and Ritual from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Fraade Steven D.
Abstract: Early rabbinic literature poses special challenges to social memory theory and its application that are in some ways very different from those posed by the New Testament and the search for the “historical Jesus.” Conversely, early rabbinic literature provides exceptional opportunities for examining the relation between the practice and theory of collective memory in relation to the formation and maintenance of social identity. In what follows I will attend to both these challenges and opportunities (typically the flip side of one another) through the analysis of specific rabbinic texts that both thematize and practice collective memory in the face of
Prolegomena on the Textualization of Mark’s Gospel: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Keith Chris
Abstract: One of the defining characteristics of Barry Schwartz’s substantial contributions to social memory studies is his consistent insistence that researchers should avoid being more skeptical about the connections between the past and the present than is warranted (inter alia, Schwartz 1982, 395–96; Zhang and Schwartz 1997, 189–91, 196–97, 205–8). This theme has also featured prominently in Schwartz’s interdisciplinary contributions to biblical studies. In one of his early contributions, he argued against overly cynical skepticism in Gospels scholarship (Schwartz 2005, 47–54; see also 2011, 225–26, 230–34), and his introductory essay to this volume continues
The Shape of John’s Story: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Thatcher Tom
Abstract: This essay will engage two foundational premises of Barry Schwartz’s theoretical model to address the long-debated questions of the “outline” of the Gospel of John and, secondarily, of the relationship between the structure of John’s narrative and the actual past of the world outside that text. In view of the obvious differences in structure and presentation between the Fourth Gospel (FG) and the Synoptics, and following Clement of Alexandria’s well-worn theorem that John’s is a “spiritual Gospel” (Eusebius,
Hist. eccl. 6.14.5–7), commentators have tended to assume that FG’s outline is essentially a function/expression of its author’s theology and/or literary
Social Memory and Commemoration of the Death of “the Lord”: from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Duling Dennis C.
Abstract: Paul’s attempt to resolve factions related to the Lord’s Supper meal at Corinth (1 Cor 11) poses a series of questions. Were the divisions based on ethnic divisions between Judeans and Gentiles, for example, differences in dietary restrictions? Were the factions reflective of social stratification in the Greco-Roman world? Did they mirror tensions in banquet customs in the broader culture? Did the usual living and dining spaces in which Christians gathered contribute to the divisions? What was Paul’s approach for resolving the differences, and was he successful in resolving them? Particularly for the purposes of the present volume, how did
Harvest from:
Memory and Identity in Ancient Judaism and Early Christianity
Author(s) Schwartz Barry
Abstract: Memory’s fallibility is well documented; its powers, less so. Acknowledging the evidential traces that all significant events leave behind, the preceding essays in this volume make memory’s credibility more evident. How ironic it is that so much ink has been spilled on social memory’s incidental functions—the forgetting or ignoring of wrongdoing, legitimating and challenging power, exaggerating and underestimating beneficent acts, giving voice to the marginalized—while its major function, to bring us into more direct contact with the past, the very capacity that gives memory its survival value, has led to nothing significant in the way of theoretical explication.
Book Title: Cine-Dispositives-Essays in Epistemology Across Media
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Tortajada Maria
Abstract: This collection brings together a number of leading scholars in film studies to explore viewing and listening dispositives-the Foucauldian concept of a strategic and technical configuration of practices and discourses-from the emergence of film studies as a field in the 1960s to more recent uses of the concept. In particular, the contributors confront points of view and perspectives in the context of the rise and spread of new technologies-changes that are continually altering the boundaries and the spaces of cinema and thus demand new analysis and theoretization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130h8ks
The Dispositive Does Not Exist! from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Tortajada Maria
Abstract: Five ways to approach the dispositive emerge from the texts that appear in this volume; none is exclusive of the others, some are conjoined or articulated, some are separate. In French, the term “dispositif” refers to a plurality of meanings, from the simple mechanism of a device, instrument or machine, to the epistemological construction liable to produce effects of power and knowledge – the disciplinary
dispositifor thedispositifof sexuality. From its most concrete to its most abstract definition, the “dispositif” involves the common signification ofarrangement.Still, the different meanings of the notion subject it – and its users – to
Between Knowing and Believing from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Elsaesser Thomas
Abstract: The
Imagined Futuresresearch project, coordinated with two of my colleagues (Wanda Strauven at the University of Amsterdam, and Michael Wedel at the University of Film and Television, Potsdam), concerns itself with the conditions, dynamics and consequences of rapid media transfer and transformation. “Media” in our case refers in principle to all imaging techniques and sound technologies, but cinema has provided the conceptual starting point and primary historical focus. While changes in basic technology, public perception and artistic practice in sound and image media may often evolve over long historical cycles, our main working assumption is that there are also
Notes on the Bergsonian Cinematograph from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) During Elie
Abstract: We know how Gilles Deleuze turned the commonplace inside out: Bergson, so it went, had “missed” cinema, contenting himself with a critique of its dispositive – the mechanism of the projecting device called the “cinematograph,” to be specific. Before the critique of the “cinematographic illusion,” developed for the most part in 1907 in
Creative Evolution,¹ there was indeed the doctrine of real movement, whose touchstone was the pure perception of movement as an act or progression rather than as a relation distributed in the spatial order. Movement unfolds in time, not in space. This bold thesis, exposed inMatter and Memory,
The Stereopticon and Cinema from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Musser Charles
Abstract: Today, many academics working in the Humanities and Social Sciences are pursuing a broad interest in media studies. At least at Yale University, where we have created an interdisciplinary seminar in this area, what we mean by media studies – our actual focuses and concerns – differ substantially. In the English Department, for instance, Media Studies foregrounds the study of the book and the move from the scroll or codex. In the more contemporary context, Michael Warner and Jessica Pressman are clearly interested in the way the digital media and the Internet are impacting the book and print culture more generally. Part
The “Dispositive Effect” in Film Narrative from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Ortel Philippe
Abstract: Like the idea of structure, the notion of the “dispositif” does not pertain to a single level of analysis: it applies to specific objects, such as the mechanism of a watch, but also to large ensembles, as in Foucault’s work, where it came to substitute for the episteme in the late 1970s. By contrast to the episteme, focused too narrowly on the utterances produced by a society, Foucault’s
dispositifrefers more widely to the totality of discourses, social practices, technical inventions, architectural creations instituting, at a given time, the partition between the true and the false in the domain of
The Social Imaginary of Telephony from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Boillat Alain
Abstract: What I propose to do here, within a perspective involving both epistemology and the archaeology of media, is to approach “talking cinema” through the examination of discourses produced in the last two decades of the nineteenth century, that is, almost fifty years prior to the generalization of talkies and the institutionalization of practices related to sound in the domain of cinema.² Beyond this specific medium, I will examine the series of machines of audiovisual representation, one of whose many actualizations was “talking cinema” (which is why quotation marks are fitting here, with regard to “cinema” as well as “talking”). Among
Between Paradoxical Spectacles and Technical Dispositives from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Guido Laurent
Abstract: When trying to grasp the complex relationships between dance and moving images, during the emergence of the cinematic medium, one can hardly avoid noticing the necessity of investigate, once again, the films dedicated to the famous number of “serpentine” dance developed and started in 1892 by music-hall performer Loïe Fuller. The phenomenal craze created by this original stage spectacle ended up imposing it as one of the motifs characterizing artistic expression at the turn of the twentieth century. Countless variations have attested to this, at least until the First World War, in areas as diverse as sculpture, painting, architecture, furniture,
Two Versions of the Television Dispositive from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Delavaud Gilles
Abstract: Many debates on the identity of television as a medium and as an art accompanied its expansion in the United States in the late 1940s and in France in the early 1950s. In 1948, Jack Gould mentioned the fact that television found inspiration in preexisting arts to argue that, precisely because it combined “[…] the close-up of the motion picture, the spontaneity of the living stage and the instantaneousness of radio” and was “the fusion of these three elements,” it was absolutely unique.² Reviewing the 1949 season, Flora R. Schreiber was even more assertive: “I am seeking an idiom that
Reality Television as Dispositive: from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Bouchez Charlotte
Abstract: While scholars are sometimes confronted with the ignorance of their interlocutors about their field of research, anyone who has ambitions to work on “reality TV” is in exactly the opposite situation. The mere mention of the term conjures up an impression of self-evidence, as reality television does not immediately appear to be complex subject matter. Still, a simple look at the phenomenon already reveals a variety of objects. Starting from a study carried out on reality television in French-speaking Switzerland,¹ this study questions how the term “reality television programming” has come to make sense within social exchange and examines the
Dispositive and Cinepoetry, around Foucault’s Death and the Labyrinth from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Wall-Romana Christophe
Abstract: This 1946 text implicitly refers to the famous umbrella of
The Songs of Maldoror, which reads: “as beautiful as the random encounter between an umbrella and a sewing machine upon a dissecting table.”² Yet Ponge, dismissing the fantastic element, extracts a domestic
Archaeology and Spectacle from:
Cine-Dispositives
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: To examine the notion of the
dispositiveand identify its place in contemporary practices at the intersection of two institutions, Cinema and the Museum, this text proposes a progression through a few individual cases, with the outlines of a study. This may appear as lacking indisciplinewith regard to the call for papers for the conference “Dispositifs de vision et d’audition” (Université de Lausanne, May 29-31, 2008), which was the first step in the present work. The call underlined how the study of a series of isolated cases would risk “perpetuating the ambiguity of encounters in which epistemological questioning
2 The Folkloric Film: from:
Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: The film movementin folklore begins much later than that of other fields, but it reflects all of the techniques and preoccupations of earlier documentary filmmakers.¹ Like the “films of fact” shot in the early 1900s, folklore films are often made up of short clips of interesting phenomena captured for posterity. Certain folklore films have a heavily narrated and expository style similar to those documentaries made before World War II and lasting through the 1960s. Other folklore films utilize either a cinéma vérité or postvérité approach or one that combines sync-sound or voice-over with linear depictions for the recording of
4 A Search for Self: from:
Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Folklorists often privilegethe voices of their informants, allowing their words to eclipse those of the folklorist. Of course, folklorists, like filmmakers, then edit the material to construct their own notion of what is significant.¹ Cutting and splicing the interviews, they impart the answers to those questions that interest them. An interactive discussion in film addresses the subjects both the folklorist and the interviewee find significant, just as it does in the field. The folklorist’s job is much like that of the quiltmaker or the filmmaker: to cut up all the pieces and put them back together again to create
6 Structure Shifts and Style: from:
Documenting Ourselves
Abstract: Effective folklore films provide a sense of involvement in the event for the audience by following the actual structure of the processes of narrating, singing, ceremony, dancing, playing, and similar events and conveying them as holistically as possible through myriad styles. How one chooses to present folklore shifts as a result of one’s growth as a filmmaker at the same time as one’s attitudes about film and technique shift. A look at my own work quickly reminds me how filmmakers change not only what they choose to shoot but how they do so. Filmmakers are not the only ones who
2 The Shadow of God from:
The Unfolding God of Jung and Milton
Abstract: Many of the difficulties modern readers experience with
Paradise Lostare reactions to one character, God the Father. The Father, defending himself and combating Satan, often resembles a flawed human being. Consequently, to presume, as the narrator frequently does, that he manifests supreme goodness seems a mockery of truth. Offended, moderns may retort that, far from being supremely good and deserving worship, the Father deserves to be repudiated as evil. Jung's analytical psychology, however, offers a more refined perception, which promotes a more balanced response.
3 Decisive Identity from:
The Unfolding God of Jung and Milton
Abstract: In his epics Milton attempts to portray decisive identity. By “decisive identity” I mean a conscious guiding of individuation wherein identity and character are created through moral decisions. Decisive identity does not imply creating what we initially are. Rather, it involves consciously deciding what we become, which requires a troublesome but indispensable element, freedom. Milton develops themes, character, and plot by showing the origins and consequences of identity-forming decisions. These decisions are the foci of moral judgment and meaning. In
Paradise LostandParadise Regainedthe crucial decisions are those by Adam and Eve causing man’s fall and those by
Book Title: The Shriek of Silence-A Phenomenology of the Holocaust Novel
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): PATTERSON DAVID
Abstract: "In the Holocaust novel, silence is always a character, and the word is always its subject matter." So writes David Patterson in this profound and original study of more than thirty important writers. Contrary to existing views, he argues, the Holocaust novel is not an attempt to depict an unimaginable reality or an ineffable horror. It is, rather, an endeavor to fetch the word from silence and restore it to meaning, to resurrect the human soul, to regenerate the relation between the self and God, the self and other, the self and itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130j86j
7 The Implication of the Reader from:
The Shriek of Silence
Abstract: In
The Dialogic ImaginationMikhail Bakhtin argues that the novel “and the world represented in it enter the real world and enirch it, and the real world enters the work and its world as part of the process of its creation, as well as part of its subsequent life, in a continual renewing of the work through the creative perception of listeners and readers” (254). This statement describes what we have called a phenomenological approach to the novel as an event. Examining what occurs in the process of the novel’s creation, we deal not only with author and character but
3 A Poetry of Geographical Imagination: from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: “What is the source of our first suffering? It lies in the fact that we hesitated to speak. It was born in the moment when we accumulated silent things within us.” Kept as a reminder in Heaney’s poetry notebook, Gaston Bachelard’s warning could stand as the motto for Heaney’s early work.¹ In
Death of a Naturalist,the silent things given speech through the poet’s art derive primarily from his personal history, from the rhythms of the yard experienced in childhood. Not surprisingly, Narcissus is the book’s presiding deity, in whose image Heaney “rhymes to see himself.” With Heaney’s second book,
4 Cooped Secrets of Process and Ritual: from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: On January 30, 1972, British paratroopers killed thirteen Catholic demonstrators in Derry. They had been protesting the institution of forced internment without trial in Northern Ireland for Republicans suspected of IRA affiliation, as well as practices of torture committed on internees by the British authorities. The Bloody Sunday Massacre only swelled Catholic grassroots support for those who would kill for what Heaney called the Nationalist myth, the idea of an integral Ireland variously personified as Kathleen Ni Houlihan and the Shan Van Vocht: the Old Mother, the native feminine spirit of the land. In Dublin, the British embassy was bombed,
6 A Poet’s Rite of Passage: from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: Robert Frost observed that poetry begins in delight and ends in wisdom. When asked in an interview whether the same could be said of a poet’s career, Seamus Heaney responded by saying that a poet “begins in delight and ends in self-consciousness.”¹ In their claims about poetic practice, both Frost and Heaney embrace the commonplace notion that poets first begin to find a voice by delighting in language. Beyond this, their statements also suggest that such playful indulgence leads, or should lead, not only to a greater command of language but to a more pervasive and subtle knowledge of the
8 Parables of Perfected Vision: from:
Passage to the Center
Abstract: “Without needing to be theoretically instructed, consciousness quickly realizes that it is the site of variously contending discourses,” Heaney remarked in
Crediting Poetry(13). Within the context of his Nobel lecture, Seamus Heaney’s observation reminds the reader that even the apparent innocence of childhood is in fact nothing less than a school “for the complexities of his adult predicament.” In a profound sense, Heaney’s insight at once harkens back to the narrow limits of his first world, as well as the nexus of forces that constitutes its ground. At the same time, it illuminates Heaney’s artistic passage beyond his home,
Book Title: Poetry Of Discovery-The Spanish Generation of 1956-1971
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DEBICKI ANDREW P.
Abstract: Although each of these poets has developed an individual style, their work has certain common characteristics: use of the everyday language and images of contemporary Spain, development of language codes and intertextual references, and, most strikingly, metaphoric transformations and surprising reversals of the reader's expectations. Through such means these poets clearly invite their readers to join them in journeys of poetic discovery.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jd70
2 FRANCISCO BRINES: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: The work of Francisco Brines exemplifies some of the main features of Spanish poetry in the 1960s. Meditative and philosophical, often centered on the themes of time and death and on the reactions that these evoke, Brines’s poetry is also marked by the very careful and artistic use of seemingly ordinary language. Critics have observed the symbolic nature of his work and its way of giving impact to seemingly common vignettes and expressions by juxtapositions, superpositions, and linguistic devices.¹
4 ANGEL GONZÁLEZ: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Although Angel González is considered one of the most important Spanish poets of the late 1950s and the 1960s, his work has proved perhaps the most difficult to characterize. This is due in part to its range and variety: even though González published his first book relatively late (in 1956, at the age of thirty-one), he has written a number of volumes of poetry and dealt with a variety of subjects in very different tones. Because of that he has been characterized in different ways as critics have sought to highlight individual aspects of his work.
7 JAIME GIL DE BIEDMA: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Jaime Gil de Biedma’s poems come across on first reading as clear and “realistic.” Many of them comprise detailed evocations of specific episodes, narrated by a first-person speaker who gives commentaries and conclusions. Quite often these commentaries offer philosophic insights; at times, especially in the later books, they contain social or political ideas. All of this has led some critics to characterize Gil de Biedma as a realistic poet proccupied with ethical and social issues.¹ The very clarity of his work has caused readers to miss its depth and originality.
8 CARLOS SAHAGÚN: from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: Carlos Sahagún’s poetry calls less attention to itself than that of most other Spanish writers of the 1960s. We do not find in it the novel use of colloquial expressions that characterizes Angel González and Gloria Fuertes, nor the surprising changes and reappraisals typical of José Angel Valente, nor the alternation of linguistic codes used by Claudio Rodríguez. The language of Sahagún’s verse seems ordinary but never blatantly colloquial; his works often consist of easy-to-understand evocations of past experiences, expressed in a low key.¹ They contain many visual images and make use of some metaphors, but these tend to be
10 ANGEL CRESPO and MANUEL MANTERO from:
Poetry Of Discovery
Abstract: The two poets I will study in this chapter are not often considered members of the group I have been studying in this book. Neither Angel Crespo nor Manuel Mantero is included in the anthologies of Ribes and Batlló, or discussed in José Olivio Jiménez’s
Diez años de poesía española. Some of this may be explained by the fact that Mantero never associated with the other poets and has spent twelve years teaching in the United States, while Crespo published many of his books prior to 1960 and has been living in Puerto Rico for many years. Both of these
Book Title: Whistling in the Dark-Memory and Culture in Wartime London
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Freedman Jean R.
Abstract: By exploring the differences between wartime documentation and postwar memory, oral and written artifacts, and the voices of the powerful and the obscure, Freedman illuminates the complex interactions between myth and history. She concludes that there are as many interpretations of what really happened during Britain's finest hour as there are people who remember it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt130jmtp
2 London Can Take It: from:
Whistling in the Dark
Abstract: In 1939 London was the largest city in the world, the world’s busiest port, and the home of more than eight million people. Greater London consisted of many urban boroughs and two administratively designated “cities”: the ancient city of London, consisting of one square mile and home to its financial district, and the adjacent city of Westminster, where most government business was enacted. Around the core of these two cities the boroughs spread in concentric circles for miles, each with its own personality and self-contained neighborhoods. Financially and commercially London was one of the most powerful cities on earth, though
5 London Pride: from:
Whistling in the Dark
Abstract: Few art forms cover so broad a base as the one called music.¹ Some arts, such as theater, are essentially communal, while others, such as literature, are in large measure solitay Some are basically the province of amateurs, such as storytelling, while others are largely the domain of professionals, such as sculpture. Yet music encompasses all these realms: it ranges from the communal forms of symphony and choir to the solo vocalist or concert artist to the solitary music student practicing in a small room. Music ranges from the highly virtuosic, in symphonies and chamber orchestras and opera companies, to
Book Title: God--The World's Future-Systematic Theology for a New Era
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Peters Ted
Abstract: God—The World’s Future has been a proven and comprehensive textbook in systematic theology for over twenty years. Explicitly crafted to address our postmodern context, Peters explains the whole body of Christian historical doctrine from within a “proleptic” framework, “whereby the gospel is understood as announcing the pre-actualization of the future consummation of all things in Jesus Christ.” Peters skillfully deploys this concept not only to organize the various theological areas or loci but also to rethink doctrines in light of key postmodern challenges from ecumenism, critical historical thinking, contemporary science, and gender and sexuality issues. The Third Edition is thoroughly revised with updated chapters, additional chapters, updated annotations and bibliographies, and further elaborations in light of recent developments in method and theological reflection. This classic text opens up systematic theology in new dimensions, retrieving traditional categories and topics for a new generation of students and learners to give a fresh reading of Christian theology and articulation of the liberating message of the gospel of God’s grace for the future of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwwrr
4 God and the Continuing Creation from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: To think of the world as a creation implies belief in a creator who is the “maker of heaven and earth, and of all things visible and invisible.” This raises the question: How does God make heaven and earth and everything else? Although no easy answer can be given, explicating the symbols relating to the gospel provides a response. Just as the experience of the gospel with the Son of God led to the understanding of God as Father, so also the experience of new creation in the gospel will have an impact on our understanding of newness regarding the
8 The Gift of Justification from:
God--The World's Future
Abstract: In the previous chapter on soteriology, we noted how the doctrine of justification is the result of theological reflection on the significance of the symbol of Christ as the lamb of God. The innocence of the scapegoated lamb of God is transferred to us. Our own deeds of justice, our own good works, our own holiness, do not make us just in the sight of God. Our justice is rather an alien justice, one that comes to us from without but one that becomes our own through an act of God’s grace. Our justification is a gift.
Foreword from:
The Creative Word
Author(s) Erickson Amy
Abstract: In August of 1997, I was actively second-guessing my decision to leave Vail, Colorado, to start the Master of Divinity program at Columbia Theological Seminary. My sister-in-law, Denise, a pastor in the Presbyterian Church (USA), trying to be encouraging, predicted that because I loved literature, I would surely love the Old Testament. Perhaps I was in a particularly skeptical mood, but her analogy struck me as untenable. It made as much sense as if she had said, “You love Colorado, and so surely you will love Georgia.” I couldn’t see the connection. I loved medieval tales of Arthur, Beowulf, eighteenth-century
Book Title: Metaphor and the Ancient Novel- Publisher: Barkhuis
Author(s): Frangoulidis Stavros
Abstract: This thematic fourth Supplementum to Ancient Narrative, entitled Metaphor and the Ancient Novel, is a collection of revised versions of papers originally read at the Second Rethymnon International Conference on the Ancient Novel (RICAN 2) under the same title, held at the University of Crete, Rethymnon, on May 19-20, 2003.Though research into metaphor has reached staggering proportions over the past twenty-five years, this is the first volume dedicated entirely to the subject of metaphor in relation to the ancient novel. Not every contributor takes into account theoretical discussions of metaphor, but the usefulness of every single paper lies in the fact that they explore actual texts while sometimes theorists tend to work out of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wwxsr
Metaphor, Gender and the Ancient Greek Novel from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Morales Helen
Abstract: Metaphors are dangerous in other ways too. Metaphor plays a fundamental role in the construction of meaning.¹ Feminist scholarship in particular has analysed the dangers and disadvantages for women in how metaphors are used to shape concepts and experiences. It has been observed that metaphor routinely enshrines and enacts power relations, and, more often than not, works to celebrate male supremacy and female oppression.² This can be all the more dangerous when a metaphor becomes used so often that it becomes ordinary and barely visible. ‘Faded’ or ‘dead’ metaphors naturalise the power relations they enact.³ No metaphor is ever
just
Greek novel and the ritual of life: from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Dowden Ken
Abstract: Nothing is less persuasive than alleging that novels are ‘allegorical’ in a modern age of sophisticated literary criticism. Yet it is perhaps time that we saw where a modern sense of allegory might fit in the kaleidoscope of approaches to the meaning, or effect, or characteristic methods of operation, of literary text.
‘Philip the Philosopher’ on the Aithiopika of Heliodorus from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) Hunter Richard
Abstract: The prefatory letter to Anatolius which introduces Porphyry’s
Homeric Questions¹ begins with a statement of principle: ‘Frequently in our conversations with one another, Anatolius, questions concerning Homer arise, and while I try to show that although he regularly provides the explanation of his own verses, we, because of our childhood instruction, read into him rather than reflect upon what he is saying (περινοου̑μεν μα̑λλον ἐν τοι̑ς πλείστοις ἢ νοου̑μεν ἃ λέγει)’. Porphyry proceeds to issue a challenge: no ‘interpretation’ (ἐξήγησις) may be offered until the interpreter has made absolutely clear to himself what the verses actually mean – we might
Real and Metaphorical Mimicking Birds in the Metamorphoses of Apuleius from:
Metaphor and the Ancient Novel
Author(s) James Paula
Abstract: In this contribution I propose yet another way of negotiating Apuleius’ allusiveness in his richly textured narrative. As the title suggests my conceptual journey has as its starting point the actual appearance in the novel of articulate birds but ends up in a strangely configured metaphorical place. In the fable of Cupid and Psyche the sea mew and the eagle parody rhetorical techniques but their very existence in the novel also highlights the loss of speech suffered by the hero who is listening in on this enchanting tale told by the old robber housekeeper. Both these versatile birds do things
Book Title: Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Every other is truly other, but no other is wholly other.This is the claim that Aspects of Alterity defends. Taking up the question of otherness that so fascinates contemporary continental philosophy, this book asks what it means for something or someone to be other than the self. Levinas and those influenced by him point out that the philosophical tradition of the West has generally favored the self at the expense of the other. Such a self-centered perspective never encounters the other qua other, however. In response, postmodern thought insists on the absolute otherness of the other, epitomized by the deconstructive claim every other is wholly other.But absolute otherness generates problems and aporias of its own. This has led some thinkers to reevaluate the notion of relative otherness in light of the postmodern critique, arguing for a chiastic account that does justice to both the alterity and the similitude of the other. These latter two positions-absolute otherness and a rehabilitated account of relative otherness-are the main contenders in the contemporary debate.The philosophies of Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel provide the point of embarkation for coming to understand the two positions on this question. Levinas and Marcel were contemporaries whose philosophies exhibit remarkably similar concern for the other but nevertheless remain fundamentally incompatible. Thus, these two thinkers provide a striking illustration of both the proximity of and the unbridgeable gap between two accounts of otherness.Aspects of Alterity delves into this debate, first in order understand the issues at stake in these two positions and second to determine which description better accounts for the experience of encountering the other.After a thorough assessment and critique of otherness in Levinas's and Marcel's work, including a discussion of the relationship of ethical alterity to theological assumptions, Aspects of Alterity traces the transmission and development of these two conceptions of otherness. Levinas's version of otherness can be seen in the work of Jacques Derrida and John D. Caputo, while Marcel's understanding of otherness influences the work of Paul Ricoeur and Richard Kearney.Ultimately, Aspects of Alterity makes a case for a hermeneutic account of otherness. Otherness itself is not absolute, but is a chiasm of alterity and similitude. Properly articulated, such an account is capable of addressing the legitimate ethical and epistemological concerns that lead thinkers to construe otherness in absolute terms, but without the absolute aporiasthat accompany such a characterization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvd0
1 The Question of Otherness from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: We are told that our postmodern age is characterized by the breakdown of Grand (or “Master”) Narratives, the overarching systems that allow us to make sense of the world as a unified whole, as a cosmos rather than a chaos. In his famous report on knowledge, Jean-François Lyotard asserts that “incredulity toward metanarratives” is the very definition of postmodernity.¹ Without recourse to these guiding narratives, we find ourselves in a situation of paralogy, confronted by a host of “petite narratives.” These petite narratives express diverse perspectives and frequently take part in incommen-surable “language games,” each of which is as (il)legitimate
6 The Other and God from:
Aspects of Alterity: Levinas, Marcel, and the Contemporary Debate
Abstract: The preceding chapters have portrayed Emmanuel Levinas and Gabriel Marcel as two philosophers who share a similar vocation, although it is a vocation that manifests itself in dissimilar—even contradictory—ways in their respective philosophies. This shared vocation reveals itself in the emphasis, common to both thinkers, placed on the other. However, in spite of this common inspiration, significant discrepancies remain. If one examines the intractable differences between Marcel and Levinas, it quickly becomes apparent that these issues all derive from divergent conceptions of otherness.
Book Title: Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS MICHELLE VOSS
Abstract: The intensity and meaningfulness of aesthetic experience have often been described in theological terms. By designating basic human emotions as rasa, a word that connotes taste, flavor, or essence, Indian aesthetic theory conceptualizes emotional states as something to be savored. At their core, emotions can be tastes of the divine. In this book, the methods of the emerging discipline of comparative theology enable the author's appreciation of Hindu texts and practices to illuminate her Christian reflections on aesthetics and emotion. Three emotions vie for prominence in the religious sphere: peace, love, and fury. Whereas Indian theorists following Abhinavagupta claim that the aesthetic emotion of peace best approximates the goal of religious experience, devotees of Krishna and medieval Christian readings of the Song of Songs argue that love communicates most powerfully with divinity. In response to the transcendence emphasized in both approaches, the book turns to fury at injustice to attend to emotion's foundations in the material realm. The implications of this constructive theology of emotion for Christian liturgy, pastoral care, and social engagement are manifold.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvhj
3 The Rasa of Love Incarnate from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The followers of the medieval
bhaktisaint Caitanya, known as the Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇavas, cultivate love for Kṛṣṇa by contemplating scenes from his life. Among the favorite scenes for contemplation are the five chapters of the Bhāgavata Purāṇa that narrate the story of therāsa līlā, the dance Kṛṣṇa performs with his belovedgopīs. In this celebrated passage, Kṛṣṇa calls the cowmaidens to him with the sound of his flute. They abruptly leave home in the middle of their activities (getting dressed, applying makeup, milking cows, nursing babies) to go to him. After enjoying themselves with him for a while, the
4 A Dilemma of Feeling from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: Like Rūpa Gosvāmin, the medieval Christian theologian Bernard of Clairvaux (1090–1153) elevates love over all other emotions in the devotional life. He finds ample material for the devotional sentiment of love in the biblical Song of Songs. He writes no fewer than eighty-six sermons on the first chapters of this short book of Hebrew wisdom literature, which consists of a series of poetic exchanges between two lovers. Bernard ranks “reverence” and its attendant emotions of “horror or stupor or fear or wonder” (characteristic of
śāntain Rūpa’s system) far below the intimacy of love (Serm. 83.3).¹ For him, nuptial
5 Love, Bodies, and Others from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The four distancing strategies discussed in the last chapter set fences around appropriate devotional feeling, but they also set the devotional community apart from persons suspected of inappropriate love for God. This dynamic is most clear with regard to rival religious groups. Bernard of Clairvaux projects perverse practices upon heretical groups, and later church officials view with profound suspicion unauthorized women who claim Christ as their lover. These moves anticipate the Fourth Lateran Council’s careful circumscription of the real presence and body of Christ to the institutional Church and its sacraments.¹ The rivalry of Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇavas with other sects around
7 Fury as a Religious Sentiment from:
Tastes of the Divine: Hindu and Christian Theologies of Emotion
Abstract: The REDS dancers drum up a cauldron of emotions: joy in communal celebration, fear and confusion in the face of violence, courage and defiance toward oppressors, and pride in their victory. The beat of the drum communicates the impetus of these emotions, as do the force of the physical actions of pushing, kicking, and stomping. One of the important emotions that fuels their efforts is anger, which, when distilled into its pure form, can be savored as the
rasaof fury (raudra).¹ Fury is integral to the composition, performance, and reception of Dalit arts for liberation. In the REDS street
Book Title: Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): GOOD CARL
Abstract: The essays in this collection examine philosophical, religious, and literary or artistic texts using methodologies and insights that have grown out of reflection on literature and art. In them, them phrase "material spirit" becomes a point of departure for considering the continuing spectral effects of religious texts and concerns in ways that do not simply call for, or assume, new orrenewed forms of religiosity. The writers in this collection seek to examine religion beyond traditional notions of transcendence: Their topics range from early Christian religious practices to global climate change. Some of the essays explore religious themes or tones in literary texts, for example, works by Wordsworth, Hopkins, Proust, Woolf, and Teresa of Avila. Others approach in a literarycritical mood philosophical or para-philosophical writers such as Bataille, Husserl, Derrida, and Benjamin. Still others treat writers of a more explicitly religious orientation, such as Augustine, Rosenzweig, or Bernard of Clairvaux.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvp4
Introduction from:
Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) GOOD CARL
Abstract: The authors in this collection were given a simple invitation: to write on the topic—or paradox—of “material spirit.” No limitations or parameters were specified for their contributions save a request that they speak to contemporary concerns in the study of religion and whenever possible take into consideration the relation between religion and literature by drawing on the language and concepts of literary and critical theory in the treatment of questions that might ordinarily be considered more proper to religion or theology. The authors responded with essays on an array of subjects, ranging from religious practices in early Christianity
Impossible Confessions from:
Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: In a roundtable presentation from 1944, published under the title “Discussion on Sin,” Georges Bataille levels against Christianity the harshest possible condemnation: he declares it boring. As regards most of both Christian practice and doctrine, this criticism holds up pretty well. But there have always been other strains in Christianity, as Bataille himself sometimes acknowledges—when he isn’t declaring himself purely hostile to all its versions¹—and some of those strains have been interesting in very Bataillean ways—cruel, sacrificial, or perverse. Indeed, it is a Christian priest (well, a Jesuit) who declares in the discussion, “For me, spiritual comfort
The Third Life of Saint Teresa of Jesus from:
Material Spirit: Religion and Literature Intranscendent
Author(s) Paden Jeremy
Abstract: In this
villancicoby Saint Teresa of Jesus,¹ the verb “to die” has three meanings: it designates the psychical and physical act by which the soul uncouples itself from the body in order to start heading down the way of dust (the physical death mentioned in the second half of the refrain, “… because I do not die”); it signifies the terrible suffering undergone by one who “experiences” God but does not die physically and thus definitively leave behind the prison of the body (the agony of this world, given expression in the first part of the refrain, “For I
Book Title: The Catholic Studies Reader- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: The Catholic Studies Reader is a rare book in an emerging field that has neither a documented history nor a consensus as to what should be a normative methodology. Dividing this volume into five interrelated themes central to the practice and theory of Catholic Studies-Sources and Contexts, Traditions and Methods, Pedagogy and Practice, Ethnicity, Race, and Catholic Studies, and The Catholic Imagination-the editors provide readers with the opportunity to understand the great diversity within this area of study. Readers will find informative essays on the Catholic intellectual tradition and Catholic social teaching, as well as reflections on the arts and literature. This provocative and enriching collection is valuable not only for scholars but also for lay and religious Catholics working in Catholic education in universities, high schools, and parish schools.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzvt6
2 The Catholic Intellectual Tradition: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) O’DONNELL MARY ELLEN
Abstract: “Just as we reject the principle of divorcing faith and works, so we reject the principle and the practice of divorcing the life of faith and the life of study,” wrote Father Leo Ward of the University of Notre Dame in 1961.¹ Describing the ideal for the Catholic school, Ward’s rejection invites reflection on Catholic intellectual life. However, this comment, which might galvanize Catholic professors who perceive themselves as exemplars of the ideal, might also solicit quite a different reaction from those outside the professionally academic arena. The public perception of Catholicism does not always incline toward a scholastic tradition.
9 Afflicting the Comfortable: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) McGUINNESS MARGARET M.
Abstract: Faculty members involved in Catholic Studies programs at Catholic colleges and universities throughout the United States (and their deans, provosts, and presidents) should pay careful attention to a recent report released by the Pew Forum on Religion and Public Life detailing the religious landscape of the modern United States. Based on interviews with 35,000 Americans over the age of eighteen, the study found that many of us move from one religion to another with relative ease. More than a quarter of Americans, for instance, no longer practice the religion in which they were raised and have either joined another denomination
15 Seeing Catholicly: from:
The Catholic Studies Reader
Author(s) O’DONNELL ANGELA ALAIMO
Abstract: In her poem “The Robin’s My Criterion for Tune,” Emily Dickinson attempts to describe the peculiar vision that powers her imagination and informs her poetry. With typical deftness, she states simply, “I see—New Englandly.” Anyone who has read even a few of Dickinson’s poems—each sparse and spare, yet offering up food for the soul even the angels might savor—recognizes exactly what she means by this. Dickinson’s geographic home, an accident of her birth, has located her in the universe, given her a vantage point from which to see the world and a language to engage it. The
4 Glory, Idolatry, Kairos: from:
Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Murchadha Felix Ó
Abstract: The terms of the title—glory, idolatry, kairos—are Christian, not Greek, if we understand Greek as the Greek of classical philosophy. Kairos is a Greek word meaning the opportune moment, but prior to Christianity it had little philosophical significance¹; idolatry comes from
eidolon, which in Plato means a deceiving image but in Christianity comes to mean false gods; glory—gloria—translatesdōxa, a philosophical term that, however, is used in a new way to translate the Hebrewkabod. Thus, these very terms themselves point to a turning, a movement of thought that characterizes Christianity; one can say of them,
8 Phenomenality in the Middle: from:
Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Mackinlay Shane
Abstract: “The Reason of the Gift”¹ is part of Jean-Luc Marion’s broader phenomenological project, which begins from his critique of the traces of a constituting subject retained by Husserl and Heidegger. While Marion’s phenomenology of givenness (
donation) eliminates these traces, it does so only by reducing the subject to a passive recipient on whom phenomena impose themselves. In contrast, Claude Romano (another contemporary French phenomenologist) responds to the same concerns aboutDasein’s subjective character without limiting the subject to pure receptivity.² By comparing these two responses to the issue of a constituting subject, I will draw attention to some of the
9 The Dative Subject (and the “Principle of Principles”) from:
Givenness and God: Questions of Jean-Luc Marion
Author(s) Leask Ian
Abstract: Jean-Luc Marion’s philosophical project is largely about being true to phenomenology’s supreme principle—the principle that every originary intuition is a legitimizing source of cognition, that everything originarily offered in intuition be accepted as it presents itself.¹ It is by interrogating this “principle of principles,” by unfolding its full consequences, that Marion can posit his “third reduction”—beyond both Husserl and Heidegger—and so unveil the primacy of sheer givenness. In doing so, Marion would claim, any autarchic subjectivity (whether transcendental or existential) is dethroned and dismantled in one and the same act that givenness (
donation) is “set free”: accepting
Book Title: Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SABINE MAUREEN
Abstract: A provocative, interdisciplinary study of nuns on the big screen, from The Bells of St. Mary's (1945) to Doubt (2008), that shines fresh light on the cinematic nun as a woman and a religious in the twentieth century. Ingrid Bergman's engaging screen performance as Sister Mary Benedict in The Bells of St. Mary's made the film nun a star and her character a shining standard of comparison. She represented the religious life as the happy and rewarding choice of a modern woman who had a "complete understanding" of both erotic and spiritual desire. How did this vibrant and mature nun figure come to be viewed as girlish and naive? Why have she and her cinematic sisters in postwar popular film so often been stereotyped or selectively analyzed, so seldom been seen as women and religious? In Veiled Desires--a unique full-length, in-depth study of nuns in film--Maureen Sabine explores these questions in a groundbreaking interdisciplinary study covering more than sixty years of cinema. She looks at an impressive breadth of films in which the nun features as an ardent lead character, including The Bells of St. Mary's (1945), Black Narcissus (1947), Heaven Knows, Mr. Allison (1957), Sea Wife (1957), The Nun's Story (1959), The Sound of Music (1965), Change of Habit (1969), In This House of Brede (1975), Agnes of God (1985), Dead Man Walking (1995), and Doubt (2008). Veiled Desires considers how the beautiful and charismatic stars who play chaste nuns, from Ingrid Bergman and Audrey Hepburn to Susan Sarandon and Meryl Streep, call attention to desires that the veil concealed and the habit was thought to stifle. In a theologically and psychoanalytically informed argument, Sabine responds to the critics who have pigeonholed the film nun as the obedient daughter and religious handmaiden of a patriarchal church, and the respectful audience who revered her as an icon of spiritual perfection. She provides a framework for a more complex and holistic picture of nuns on screen by showing how the films dramatize these women's Christian call to serve, sacrifice, and dedicate themselves to God, and their erotic desire for intimacy, agency, achievement, and fulfillment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzx0r
1 SELFLESS DESIRES: from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: When Ingrid Bergman appeared on-screen as Sister Mary Benedict inThe Bells of St. Mary’s, she was already a major film celebrity, but she made the film nun herself a star who “light(s) up dark lives … with luminous Hollywood beauty” (Loudon 1993: 16). The movie reviewers in 1945 felt that Bergman succeeded in representing the Catholic nun to a modern audience as an attractive, appealing, and admirable figure. Yet by the end of the century, actual nuns had come to take a dim view of her film performance as Sister Benedict and to lament her role in typecasting them
5 SACRED DESIRES: from:
Veiled Desires: Intimate Portrayals of Nuns in Postwar Anglo-American Film
Abstract: Reflecting on the effect that the Second Vatican Council had on American Catholic nuns in the 1960s, distinguished Benedictine leader and religious writer Sister Joan Chittister remarked that this decade of unprecedented change and renewal “was wonderful and it was terrible. It started with hope and excitement and ended in a lot of bitterness and difficulty for a long time.” Chittister had joined a community with the characteristics that Maria projects so unforgettably in
The Sound of Music—“high energy, high love” and “a lot of joy” (Rogers 1996: 295–6). She became a postulant in the early fifties at
Book Title: The Phenomenology of Prayer- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): WIRZBA NORMAN
Abstract: This collection of ground-breaking essays considers the many dimensions of prayer: how prayer relates us to the divine; prayer's ability to reveal what is essential about our humanity; the power of prayer to transform human desire and action; and the relation of prayer to cognition. It takes up the meaning of prayer from within a uniquely phenomenological point of view, demonstrating that the phenomenology of prayer is as much about the character and boundaries of phenomenological analysis as it is about the heart of religious life.The contributors: Michael F. Andrews, Bruce Ellis Benson, Mark Cauchi, Benjamin Crowe, Mark Gedney, Philip Goodchild, Christina M. Gschwandtner, Lissa McCullough, Cleo McNelly Kearns, Edward F. Mooney, B. Keith Putt, Jill Robbins, Brian Treanor, Merold Westphal, Norman Wirzba, Terence Wright and Terence and James R. Mensch. Bruce Ellis Benson is Associate Professor of Philosophy at Wheaton College. He is the author of Graven Ideologies: Nietzsche, Derrida, and Marion on Modern Idolatry and The Improvisation of Musical Dialogue: A Phenomenology of Music. Norman Wirzba is Associate Professor and Chair of the Philosophy Department at Georgetown College, Kentucky. He is the author of The Paradise of God and editor of The Essential Agrarian Reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzzs4
Introduction from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Abstract: How could there be a vibrant religious life without the practice of prayer? In both theistic and nontheistic traditions, religious followers are generally counseled to steadfast prayer—to pray “without ceasing.” Without prayer, religious sensibility would likely atrophy and perhaps die. Yet what makes prayer so essential to a life of faith?
1 Prayer as the Posture of the Decentered Self from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: There is something right about that prayer. After all, Jesus teaches us to pray for our daily bread, if not exactly gelato. But it is the prayer of a three-year-old, a beginner in the
4 Prayer as Kenosis from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) MENSCH JAMES R.
Abstract: Prayer, both private and public, is one of the most common of human activities. All human history records it; its roots probably go back to before recorded history. Yet when we attempt to submit its most common form, that of petition, to philosophical analysis, we run into difficulties. All too often we pray for things, such as victory or gaining a desired position, and forget that there are losers in such competitions. Prayer, here, seems caught in the “mimetic violence” that René Girard describes. According to Girard, our socialization involves our imitating others. It thus leads us to desire what
7 Irigaray’s Between East and West: from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) KEARNS CLEO MCNELLY
Abstract: In
Between East and West, her recent reflections on the encounter between her yoga practice and her work in Western philosophy, Luce Irigaray notes that breathing and speaking are, for most people, inverse operations, using the body, the diaphragm, and the lungs in almost opposite ways.¹ The result is a split, an alienation, between the verbal and the organic rather than a mutual enrichment of the two. Irigaray goes on to warn that “a religion centered on speech, without the insistence on breathing and the silence that makes it possible, risks supporting a non-respect for life” (51). As she develops
8 Heidegger and the Prospect of a Phenomenology of Prayer from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) CROWE BENJAMIN
Abstract: An attempt to contribute to a “phenomenology of prayer” ought to begin with the recognition that the word “phenomenology” means many different things to many different people. Moreover, it must be recognized that none of these usages has any obvious claim to being the normative one. Given these inescapable facts, it is therefore incumbent on one who would make such a contribution to define just what it is that he or she might mean by “phenomenology.”
9 Edith Stein: from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) WRIGHT TERRENCE C.
Abstract: In her autobiography, Edith Stein tells us that at the age of fifteen she “deliberately and consciously” gave up praying.¹ Perhaps the most significant experience between this decision and her return to the practice of prayer with her conversion to Catholicism at the age of thirty was her contact with Edmund Husserl and his theory of phenomenology. In fact it may be the case, as Jude Dougherty has observed,² that her religious conversion was made possible by her philosophical conversion to phenomenology. Husserl, himself a convert to Christianity, understood prayer in terms of the inward turn of his transcendental phenomenology.
14 How (Not) to Find God in All Things: from:
The Phenomenology of Prayer
Author(s) ANDREWS MICHAEL F.
Abstract: What is meant by the phenomenology of prayer? Following Levinas, I shall argue in this paper that prayer, like ethics, “reverses” Husserl’s model of intentionality. Prayer
disprivileges the role of cognition in every act of genuine transcendence. On account of this radical reversal, I shall further argue that the face of God, whose only condition of possibility is that it never appear in phenomenal givenness,foundsprayer in the same way that the face of the other founds ethics. Like ethics, prayer originates from outside every horizon of expectation. It describes how the transcendent and ineffable presence of God becomes
Book Title: Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): PUTT B. KEITH
Abstract: Merold Westphal has been in the foremost ranks of philosophers who proclaim a new postsecular philosophy. By articulating an epistemology sensitive to the realities of cognitive finitude and moral weakness, he defends a wisdom that begins in both humility and commitment, one that always confesses that human beings can encounter meaning and truth only as human beings, never as gods.The present volume focuses on this wisdom of humility that characterizes Westphal's thought and explores how that wisdom, expressed through the redemptive dynamic of doubt, can contribute to developing a postsecular apologetic for faith.This book can function both as an accessible introduction to Westphal for those who have not read him extensively and also as an informed critical appreciation and extension of his work for those who are more experienced readers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13wzzv5
Merold Westphal on the Sociopolitical Implications of Kierkegaard’s Thought from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) EVANS C. STEPHEN
Abstract: Søren Kierkegaard is widely regarded as an archindividualist with little concern for political and social issues. Furthermore, it is well known that he himself had extremely conservative, even reactionary, political views. He was, for example, not happy about the elimination of absolute monarchy in Denmark in 1848.¹ He also was distinctly unsympathetic with the cause of women’s emancipation, an issue I will discuss in more detail later in this essay. Merold Westphal has for many years waged a campaign to show that the textbook characterization of Kierkegaard as an apolitical individualist is mistaken. On Westphal’s view, social and political concerns
Levinas and Kierkegaard on Triadic Relations with God from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) FERREIRA M. JAMIE
Abstract: Merold Westphal’s many insightful comparisons and contrasts between Emmanuel Levinas and Søren Kierkegaard prompt me to reconsider one aspect that continues to intrigue me—namely, Westphal’s characterization of the triadic relation found in each thinker. In “Kierkegaard and Levinas in Dialogue,” Westphal offers the following picture: “Whereas Kierkegaard would repeat Jesus’ summary of the Torah, that the first commandment is to love God and the second to love one’s neighbor as oneself (Mark 12:28–34), Levinas reverses the order. For him ethics is first, then religion, and the neighbor always stands between me and God, while for Kierkegaard religion is
Between the Prophetic and the Sacramental from:
Gazing Through a Prism Darkly: Reflections on Merold Westphal's Hermeneutical Epistemology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Merold Westphal has been one of the most significant voices in Continental philosophy of religion in recent years. He, along with Paul Ricoeur, has contributed what might be called a specifically Protestant inflection to the ongoing “theological turn in phenomenology,” a movement that otherwise bears the largely Catholic accent of thinkers such as Marion, Henry, and Chrétien. Yet another contributor to this debate, the theologian David Tracy, has made a useful distinction between what he calls the “sacramental” character of the Catholic vision and the “prophetic” character of the Protestant. He sees both as complementary, the former emphasizing the more
Hospitality—Under Compassion and Violence from:
The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) DUFOURMANTELLE ANNE
Abstract: Hospitality has become the gateway to hell. I am aware that this might sound hyperbolic—I do, however, mean it seriously. One could picture Cerberus, in the antique representations of hell, guarding the entry to the netherworld, or Horus, in Egyptian mythology, weighing the good and bad actions as they are presented to him by those newly arrived, as figures of radical hospitality, since they are the ones that separate the living from the dead. In the face of today’s political rules, hospitality is not an invitation for a better life—at most, it offers a shelter—but a fully
To Open: from:
The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) CHEAH PHENG
Abstract: Hospitality has emerged as a key concept in our contemporary era of global migration. The
Oxford English Dictionarydefines hospitality as “the act or practice of being hospitable; the reception and entertainment of guests, visitors, or strangers, with liberality and goodwill.” The host (from the Latin,hospes), the individual agent who practices or gives hospitality, is “a man who lodges and entertains another in his house.”¹ Whether it is an ethical, political, or juridical concept, a matter of philanthropy or a matter of right, the central gesture of hospitality is that of opening, more precisely, to open oneself up to
Frictions of Hospitality and the Promise of Cosmopolitanism from:
The Conditions of Hospitality: Ethics, Politics, and Aesthetics on the Threshold of the Possible
Author(s) ERIKSEN THOMAS HYLLAND
Abstract: In an original analysis of food consumption and exchange in the everyday life of a small hamlet on the southern seaboard of Norway, Runar Døving (2001; 2003) develops some subtle insights into the dynamics of hospitality. Describing the conventions of social visits in the community, he asks what the reactions would be if a guest insisted on not being served anything but a glass of water. Convention dictates that coffee be served on these visits, usually accompanied by a slice of cake or some biscuits.
Book Title: Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Custance Gloria
Abstract: Bruno Latour stirs things up. Latour began as a lover of science and technology, co-founder of actor-network theory, and philosopher of a modernity that had "never been modern." In the meantime he is regarded not just as one of the most intelligent and also popular exponents of science studies but also as a major innovator of the social sciences, an exemplary wanderer who walks the line between the sciences and the humanities. This book provides the first comprehensive overview of the Latourian oeuvre, from his early anthropological studies in Abidjan (Ivory Coast), to influential books like Laboratory Life and Science in Action, and his most recent reflections on an empirical metaphysics of "modes of existence." In the course of this enquiry it becomes clear that the basic problem to which Latour's work responds is that of social tradition, the transmission of experience and knowledge. What this empirical philosopher constantly grapples with is the complex relationship of knowledge, time, and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x00jv
Introduction from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Bruno Latour has many faces.¹ He is known to many as an ethnographer of the world of everyday technology who in meticulous studies has shown how seemingly trivial things, like a key or a safety belt, actively intervene in our behavior. Others know Latour as an essayist very well versed in theory who charged the philosophers of postmodernity—principally Lyotard and Baudrillard but also Barthes, Lacan, and Derrida—that their thinking merely revolves around artificial sign-worlds and who confronted them with the provocative assertion that “we have never been modern.”
ONE Exegesis and Ethnology from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Beaune is one of France’s most famous and important wine centers. The small city in Burgundy is also the birthplace of two important scientists: in 1746 the mathematician Gaspard Monge, and in 1830 the physiologist Étienne-Jules Marey. Unsurprisingly for this region of the world, wine is one of the connecting links between Monge and Marey. Both scientists came from families of winegrowers and wine merchants—the two families had actually joined forces for a time in the late eighteenth century. And even the scientific work of these two sons of Beaune was associated: although their subjects could not have been
THREE Machines of Tradition from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: During this phase, Latour’s activities initially focused on the Fondation Maison des Sciences de l’Homme (FSMH). Founded in the early 1960s, the FMSH is a humanities and social
SIX Science and Action from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: Around 1985 the Center for the Sociology of Innovation at the Écoles des Mines in Paris became the institutional basis of actor-network theory. Although “theory of the actor-network,” “actor-network theory,” or simply “ANT” did not become common currency until the early 1990s,¹ the “author network” of actor-network theory had already formed several years previously at the Center for the Sociology of Innovation. The association between Latour and Callon was the nucleus of this network. Callon, Lucien Karpik’s successor, was director of the center from 1982 to 1994. Latour also arrived there in 1982 and stayed for almost a quarter of
Conclusion from:
Bruno Latour in Pieces: An Intellectual Biography
Abstract: We do not have to decide for ourselves what makes up our world, who are the agents “really” acting in it, or what is the quality of the proofs they impose upon one another. Nor do we have to know in advance what is important and what is negligible and what causes shifts in the battle we observe around us. (PF 9)
CHAPTER 3 Personalism and the Natural Roots of Morality from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) De Tavernier Johan
Abstract: The debate about the relevance of biology for ethics dates back to the time of Aristotle. In premodern theologies, nature and personhood have mainly been considered as two complementary notions. On the one hand, the human person was presented as a unique realization of nature; on the other, the human person fulfilled the assumptions that nature had given to him or her by virtue of his or her free will and the possibility for free choice. In other words, nature opens the possibility for free and responsible action. Since Darwin’s
The Descent of Man(1871), the question of the relevance
CHAPTER 5 Neuroscience, Self, and Jesus Christ from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Davies Oliver
Abstract: Change in science involves a change in the way we understand materiality and the world around us. Since we ourselves are material as well as mind, what we
think, or authoritatively hold, matter to be is significant for our own self-understanding. More than that, the introduction of the new science into our own embodied space, through new technologies, can even change our “contact” with the world: how we are in the world as self-aware creatures who are both mind and body at the same time. For anyone who doubts the potential of scientific advances to shape our humanity, it would
CHAPTER 6 Incarnation in the Age of the Buffered, Commodified Self from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Godzieba Anthony J.
Abstract: Action, in my life, is a fact, the most general and the most constant of all, the expression within me of a universal determinism; it is produced even without me. More than a fact, is it a necessity…. More than a necessity, action often appears to me as an obligation…. If I do not act out of my own movement, there is something in me or outside of me that
CHAPTER 7 The Gifted Self: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Horner Robyn
Abstract: Vatican II remains a powerful and enduring symbol for many because it represents, above all, the preparedness of the Church to dialogue with all that is “genuinely human.” There can be few higher or more hope-filled expressions of engagement with the world than
Gaudium et Spes. Nevertheless, in the same moment that, in this document and others, Vatican II was opening the windows of the Church to dialogue, it opened onto a modern world that was already passing—if, in fact, it had ever really been. As Lieven Boeve maintains, the correlative theology (that is, theology in dialogue with modernity)
CHAPTER 8 Difference, Body, and Race from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Gonzalez Michelle A.
Abstract: The nature of humanity, our relationship with each other, and our relationship with the sacred is the starting point for reflections on theological anthropology. For centuries Christians have wrestled with defining what makes us particular in light of our humanity yet at the same time interconnected with God’s creation. Musings on this subject range from abstract philosophical speculation, to dialogue with the natural sciences, to a serious consideration of the diversity and complexity of the embodied human condition. Within systematic theology, the study of what it means to be human, created in the image and likeness of God, falls under
CHAPTER 9 Public Theology: from:
Questioning the Human: Toward a Theological Anthropology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: Public theology is sometimes defined by the praxis of doing theology for the differing audiences, communities of accountability, or publics of the church, academy, and society that theologians address.¹ At other times, public theology is characterized by the method used to reach those audiences, either by making religious claims more intelligible to wider society via shared norms and practices of rational public discourse or by relying on religious institutions to shape and equip persons with virtues for participating in political discourse.² And, at other times, public theology is determined by the goal of integrating theology and ethics into the discursive
1. Face Off: from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: Literary scholars have long been duped by the defensive posture initiated by the ironic Greek philosopher who dismissed poetry from the realm of thought and the ideal Republic. Between the philosopher-guardian and the poet, Plato presents a long list of craftsmen, each providing a specific product for the needs of the community. When he gets to the poet, however, “someone who has the skill to transform himself into all sorts of characters and to represent all sorts of things,” Plato declares that the community will politely send him packing, telling the poet that “he and his kind have no place
5 Reconsidering Allegory and Symbol: from:
Structures of Appearing: Allegory and the Work of Literature
Abstract: In the “Epistemo-Critical Prologue” to
The Origin of the German Tragic Drama, Benjamin establishes allegory in a realm out of the reach of aesthetics and idealism. Allegory is characterized by violence and is not at all beautiful, admittedly lacking “all ‘symbolic’ freedom of expression, all classical proportion, all humanity” (166;Der Ursprung des deutschen Trauerspiels145). Any time allegory is subjected to the critical palate of philosophical taste, it will seem a bitter alternative to beauty. However, by discrediting the presumed authority of aesthetics (the beautiful) and idealism (the symbolic determination of the object as a reflection of the object
Book Title: Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Overcoming Onto-theology is a stunning collection of essays by Merold Westphal, one of America's leading continental philosophers of religion, in which Westphal carefully explores the nature and the structure of a postmodern Christian philosophy. Written with characteristic clarity and charm, Westphal offers masterful studies of Heidegger's early lectures on Paul and Augustine, the idea of hermeneutics, Schleiermacher, Hegel, Derrida, and Nietzsche, all in the service of building his argument that postmodern thinking offers an indispensable tool for rethinking Christian faith. A must read for every student and professor of continental philosophy and the philosophy of religion, Overcoming Onto-theology is an invaluable collection that brings together in one place fourteen provocative and lucid essays by one of the most important thinkers working in American philosophy today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0123
5 Christian Philosophers and the Copernican Revolution from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: This is not a majority report. Christian philosophers, both Catholic and Protestant, have often felt a strong need to be realists and have exhibited a correspondingly strong allergic reaction to Kantian idealism in all its forms. No student of Art Holmes is likely to say that there is only one way to be a Christian philosopher;
8 Father Adam and His Feuding Sons: from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: I find this reactionary/radical dichotomy at least as misleading as it is illuminating.² It is perhaps one of those hierarchical dyads that needs to be deconstructed. But, following the old preacher’s adage, “a text without a context is a
11 Derrida As Natural Law Theorist from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: But there is a difference between positivism and postmodernism that must not be lost sight of. In the former case it was the proponents and practitioners of the position who insisted that the overthrow of metaphysics was also the end of ethics in any objective sense, leaving ethics
14 Nietzsche As a Theological Resource from:
Overcoming Onto-Theology: Toward a Postmodern Christian Faith
Abstract: Not every construal of the theological enterprise will be able to entertain the possibility of Nietzsche as a resource, if not exactly an ally. For example, if theology interprets itself onto-theologically, it will be unable to see any ambiguity or irony in his self-designations as immoralist and anti-Christ. They will simply be the literal confessions of a loathed enemy. The possibility of Nietzsche as
ancilla theolugiaepresupposes at least an interruption of the interpretation of theology in onto-theo-logical terms.
CHAPTER ONE Showing the Saying: from:
Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: In this book I set out once again to expose the veil of poetic imagination woven within the fabric of the Jewish esoteric tradition, demarcated generically by scholar and adept as “kabbalah.” The semantic range of the term encompasses practice and theory, in Western philosophical jargon, or, in rabbinic locution,
maʿasehandtalmud, a way of doing and a way of thinking. To speak of one is not to exclude the other, a perspective that has been enhanced by a critique of the so-called Scholemian school for focusing more on the speculative dimensions of kabbalah to the detriment of the
CHAPTER THREE Phallomorphic Exposure: from:
Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: As I intimated in the preceding chapter, the project of reshaping the feminine in contemporary liturgical discourse—and thereby destabilizing the male-centered symbolic that has dominated Judaism—can proceed without relying on philological and historical research, but the re/envisioning is proportionately impoverished to the degree that it neglects or obfuscates the tradition it purports to reflect. I am not so naïve as to ignore the fact that shared existential circumstances impact the reader’s interpretative stance. On the contrary, I readily acknowledge that the reader is prejudiced by hermeneutical assumptions that mirror a complex web of factors ranging from the socioeconomic
CHAPTER FIVE Flesh Become Word: from:
Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: For kabbalists in the late Middle Ages, in consonance with contemporaneous patterns of Christian and Islamic piety but especially the former, the body was a site of tension, the locus of sensual and erotic pleasure on the one hand, and the earthly pattern of God’s image, the representation of what lies beyond representation, the mirror that renders visible the invisible, on the other. Given the intractable state of human consciousness as embodied—not to be understood, as I will elaborate below, along the lines of Cartesian dualism of mind/body but rather in Merleau-Ponty’s phenomenological sense of the embodied mind/mindful body—
CHAPTER EIGHT Coming-to-Head, Returning-to-Womb: from:
Language, Eros, Being: Kabbalistic Hermeneutics and Poetic Imagination
Abstract: There is a variety of literary settings in which the ideal of spiritual eroticism cultivated in the mystical piety of various traditions has found expression, but one medium that has been especially significant in the history of Judaism and Christianity is the commentarial tradition on the Song of Songs, the biblical book that most overtly employs tropes of sensual love and carnal sexuality.¹ As Bernard McGinn astutely articulated the matter, “Among the many intimate bonds between Jewish and Christian mystical traditions none is more important than the fact that both found in the Song of Songs the mystical text par
Book Title: For Derrida- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Miller J. Hillis
Abstract: This book-the culmination of forty years of friendship between J. Hillis Miller and Jacques Derrida, during which Miller also closely followed all Derrida's writings and seminars-is for Derridain two senses. It is for him,dedicated to his memory. The chapters also speak, in acts of reading, as advocates for Derrida's work. They focus especially on Derrida's late work, including passages from the last, as yet unpublished, seminars. The chapters are partial to Derrida,on his side, taking his part, gratefully submitting themselves to the demand made by Derrida's writings to be read-slowly, carefully, faithfully, with close attention to semantic detail.The chapters do not progress forward to tell a sequential story. They are, rather, a series of perspectives on the heterogeneity of Derrida's work, or forays into that heterogeneity.The chief goal has been, to borrow a phrase from Wallace Stevens, plainly to propoundwhat Derrida says. The book aims, above all, to render Derrida's writings justice. It should be remembered, however, that, according to Derrida himself, every rendering of justice is also a transformative interpretation. A book like this one is not a substitute for reading Derrida for oneself. It is to be hoped that it will encourage readers to do just that.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x01v0
CHAPTER 2 Who or What Decides, for Derrida: from:
For Derrida
Abstract: The previous chapter attempts to identify Derrida’s answer to an urgent question he raises in his work on the university without condition. “To whom, to what,” he asks, am I responsible when I refuse to “reply for my thought or writing” to “constituted powers,” that is, powers of state or institutional powers, such as my university? What justifies my saying “No; I won’t do what you ask”? Derrida’s answer, as I have shown, is that I have a higher obligation to
le tout autre, “the wholly other,” whatever, exactly, that may mean. In this chapter I raise a different question.
CHAPTER 7 Derrida’s Special Theory of Performativity from:
For Derrida
Abstract: 1. Performativity in the sense of the way a dance, a musical composition, or a part in a play is performed has practically nothing to do with performativity in the sense of the ability a given enunciation has to function as a performative speech act. “He gave a spectacular performance of Hamlet” does not exemplify, nor does it refer to, the same use of language as does saying “He gave his solemn promise that he would be here at ten,” even though both are forms of enunciation, of speaking out,
CHAPTER 8 “Don’t Count Me In”: from:
For Derrida
Abstract: The “third,” neither/nor, or both/and is a fundamental feature of Derrida’s thought or, better put, of his characteristic style,
CHAPTER 11 Touching Derrida Touching Nancy from:
For Derrida
Abstract: How can I touch Derrida, now that he is dead? How can I touch, in a shapely chapter, on the immense and immensely complex text he wrote touching touching, the tactile, tactility, the contingent, the tangential as a theme in Nancy’s immense work,¹ and as a theme in Western philosophy from Aristotle to Husserl, Heidegger, Levinas, Didier Franck, Jean-Louis Chrétien, and, by way of Immanuel Kant, Félix Ravaisson, Maine de Biran, and others? One little touch, that’s all I want, such as the touch at one point the tangent line makes on a curved line before flying off at a
Book Title: Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Vatter Miguel
Abstract: Tocqueville suggested that the people reign in the American political world like God over the universe.This intuition anticipates the crisis in the secularization paradigm that has brought theology back as a fundamental part of sociological and political analysis. It has become more difficult to believe that humanity's progress necessarily leads to atheism, or that it is possible to translate all that is good about religion into reasonable terms acceptable in principle by all, believers as well as nonbelievers. And yet, the spread of Enlightenment values, of an independent public sphere, and of alternative projects of modernitycontinues unabated and is by no means the antithesis of the renewed vigor of religious beliefs.The essays in this book shed interdisciplinary and multicultural light on a hypothesis that helps to account for such an unexpected convergence of enlightenment and religion in our times: Religion has reentered the public sphere because it puts into question the relation between God and the concept of political sovereignty.In the first part, Religion and Polity-Building,new perspectives are brought to bear on the tension-ridden connection between theophany and state-building from the perspective of world religions. Globalized, neo-liberal capitalism has been another crucial factor in loosening the bond between God and the state, as the essays in the second part, The End of the Saeculum and Global Capitalism,show.The essays in the third part, Questioning Sovereignty: Law and Justice,are dedicated to a critique of the premises of political theology, starting from the possibility of a prior, perhaps deeper relation between democracy and theocracy. The book concludes with three innovative essays dedicated to examining Tocqueville in order to think the Religion of Democracybeyond the idea of civil religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x026n
CHAPTER 8 The Evangelical-Capitalist Resonance Machine from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Connolly William E.
Abstract: What is the connection today between evangelical Christianity, cowboy capitalism, the electronic news media, and the Republican Party?¹ Can these connections be understood through the terms of efficient causality, in which you first separate factors and then show how one is the basic cause, or how they cause each other, or how they together reflect a more basic cause? Does, say, a corporate-Republican elite manipulate the evangelical wing of this assemblage, leading the latter to subordinate its economic interests to spurious appeals to faith? Or are the leading parties to this coalition linked first and foremost by economic interests, in
CHAPTER 12 Drawing—the Single Trait: from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Weber Samuel
Abstract: Politics, in its theory and even more in its practice, has always tended to subordinate the singular to the general, generally by equating it with the particular, which, qua “part,” already implies its dependency upon and subservience to a “whole.” At the same time—a “time” that is first of all that of Western “modernity,” here defined as the period ushered in by the Reformation, the ensuing Wars of Religion and the Treaty of Westphalia (1648) and extending until today, “postmodernism” notwithstanding—theoreticians of “liberal democracy” have sought to legitimate the institution in which the Whole materializes itself politically—either
CHAPTER 13 The Religious Situation in the United States 175 Years After Tocqueville from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Casanova Joseé
Abstract: Eighteenth-century philosophers had a very simple explanation for the gradual weakening of beliefs. Religious zeal, they said, was bound to die down as enlightenment and freedom spread. It is tiresome that the facts do not fit this theory at all. . . .
CHAPTER 14 The Avatars of Religion in Tocqueville from:
Crediting God: Sovereignty and Religion in the Age of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Jaume Lucien
Abstract: One of the complexities presented by
Democracy in Americais that Tocqueville continuously intertwines his observations of the American case (including the exceptional factors that distinguish the first “republic in a large country,” as one used to say in that period) with the attempt to define a type (or ideal type) that stands out through the American example. This complexity is particularly felt in the case of Tocqueville’s discussion of religion, a topic where he pursues several related or parallel questions: First, what is the common trait that characterizes all of the sects of American Christianity? Second, in what way
2 Husserl and Heidegger from:
Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: A concise way of defining phenomenology is to say that it is characterized by two questions: What is given (to consciousness)? and How (or according to what horizon) is it given? While what is given may not necessarily be a gift, it is already evident from the framing of this definition that the question of the gift will not be irrelevant in this context. Just how that is so will become clearer in later chapters. For the moment, however, it is sufficient to note that the reading of the gift that Marion propounds aims to be a strictly phenomenological one,
4 Refiguring Givenness from:
Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: Phenomenology has been broadly characterized as the study of phenomena as they give themselves to consciousness, but clearly there are many interpretations of what such a study might entail. For Husserl, it seems phenomenology aims to observe what is given in presence to consciousness; for Heidegger, phenomenology has as its object the uncovering of what gives itself in “presencing”; for Levinas, phenomenology, in its failure, alerts us to what gives by exceeding conscious thematization. Paying heed to each of these three styles as well as others, Marion develops his phenomenological approach. In doing so, he maintains that what he achieves
8 Rethinking the Gift II from:
Rethinking God as Gift: Marion, Derrida, and the Limits of Phenomenology
Abstract: We turn now to the second way in which Derrida addresses the gift—as that which is given, rather than the condition for the given, although as it has already been pointed out, such a clear distinction is not always to be found in Derrida’s writing. Both readings of gift stem from a “moment’s madness,” from “an effraction of the circle,” or from “the instant all circulation will have been interrupted.”¹ Similarly, the conditions of possibility and impossibility for the gift will here remain the same, although they will he applied in their abbreviated form and will take into account
Book Title: Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burt E. S.
Abstract: Although much has been written on autobiography, the same cannot be said of autothanatography, the writing of one's death. This study starts from the deconstructive premise that autobiography is aporetic, not or not only a matter of a subject strategizing with language to produce an exemplary identity but a matter also of its responding to an exorbitant call to write its death. The I-dominated representations of particular others and of the privileged other to whom a work is addressed, must therefore be set against an alterity plaguing the I from within or shadowing it from without. This alterity makes itself known in writing as the potential of the text to carry messages that remain secret to the confessing subject. Anticipation of the potential for the confessional text to say what Augustine calls the secret I do not know,the secret of death, engages the autothanatographical subject in a dynamic, inventive, and open-ended process of identification. The subject presented in these texts is not one that has already evolved an interior life that it seeks to reveal to others, but one that speaks to us as still in process. Through its exorbitant response, it gives intimations of an interiority and an ethical existence to come. Baudelaire emerges as a central figure for this understanding of autobiography as autothanatography through his critique of the narcissism of a certain Rousseau, his translation of De Quincey's confessions, with their vertiginously ungrounded subject-in-construction, his artistic practice of self-conscious, thorough-going doubleness, and his service to Wilde as model for an aporetic secrecy. The author discusses the interruption of narrative that must be central to the writing of one's death and addresses the I's dealings with the aporias of such structuring principles as secrecy, Levinasian hospitality, or interiorization as translation. The book makes a strong intervention in the debate over one of the most-read genres of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x02w0
INTRODUCTION. from:
Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: In the numerous studies that have been devoted to autobiography in the past 30 years, surprisingly few take on directly the question of the other. The reason for the surprise is simple enough: One can hardly envision the self without the other against which it is defined or an autobiography that does not involve the other both in its narrative and as the one to whom the “I’’ addresses itself in its act of confessing. In representing itself, the I must not only represent the others encountered in life, but must also address that representation to another. What is more,
CHAPTER 1 Developments in Character: from:
Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: “Reading” is a term that, through overuse, can easily become confused with interpretation. In fact, there is a crucial difference: Reading involves the undoing of interpretative figures; because it is not an operation opposed to the understanding but rather a precondition for it, it allows us to question whether the synthetic moves of the understanding can close off a text. It leads away from meaning to such problems as the text’s constitution and meaning generation. Unlike interpretation, which implies a development over the course of a narrative toward a single figure reconciling all its diverse moments, reading states the logic
CHAPTER 2 Regard for the Other: from:
Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: One difference between shame and embarrassment in Rousseau can be stated quite simply. Shame is a passion productive of discourse. The confessing done under its aegis seems marvelously able to serve as an action of which to be ashamed, and so to provoke more confession. Embarrassment, on the other hand, is tonguetied, an anacoluthon in the grammar of feelings. Where, under influence of timidity, Rousseau manages to blurt something out nonetheless, the effect is not to end the silence but most often to prolong it, rendering the hapless speaker even more incapable of timely speech. The blurted phrase is less
CHAPTER 3 The Shape before the Mirror: from:
Regard for the Other: Autothanatography in Rousseau, De Quincey, Baudelaire, and Wilde
Abstract: Baudelaire’s work is far from self-evidently autobiographical.
Les Fleurs du mal, for instance, cannot be easily compared with a self-declared poetic autobiography like Victor Hugo’sContemplations, whose poems are of decidedly personal inspiration, bear dates that attach them to experience, and lay out a plausible narrative of poetic development. In contrast, Baudelaire’s undated poems appear impersonal and, in their emblematic character, untethered to experience. Although the poet does give the collection the status of an expressive work in one letter to Ancelle: “Do I have to tell you, you who have guessed it no more than the others, that in
Book Title: Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SLAUGHTER JOSEPH R.
Abstract: In this timely study of the historical, ideological, and formal interdependencies of the novel and human rights, Joseph Slaughter demonstrates that the twentieth-century rise of world literatureand international human rights law are related phenomena. Slaughter argues that international law shares with the modern novel a particular conception of the human individual. The Bildungsroman, the novel of coming of age, fills out this image, offering a conceptual vocabulary, a humanist social vision, and a narrative grammar for what the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and early literary theorists both call the free and full development of the human personality. Revising our received understanding of the relationship between law and literature, Slaughter suggests that this narrative form has acted as a cultural surrogate for the weak executive authority of international law, naturalizing the assumptions and conditions that make human rights appear commonsensical. As a kind of novelistic correlative to human rights law, the Bildungsroman has thus been doing some of the sociocultural work of enforcement that the law cannot do for itself. This analysis of the cultural work of law and of the social work of literature challenges traditional Eurocentric histories of both international law and the dissemination of the novel. Taking his point of departure in Goethe's Wilhelm Meister, Slaughter focuses on recent postcolonial versions of the coming-of-age story to show how the promise of human rights becomes legible in narrative and how the novel and the law are complicit in contemporary projects of globalization: in colonialism, neoimperalism, humanitarianism, and the spread of multinational consumer capitalism.Slaughter raises important practical and ethical questions that we must confront in advocating for human rights and reading world literature-imperatives that, today more than ever, are intertwined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x031j
CHAPTER 4 Compulsory Development: from:
Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: “DEVELOPMENT IS A LIE” protests a placard carried by Manu, a recurring character in Epeli Hau’ofa’s satirical short stories,
Tales of the Tikongs(1983), about the euphoria of developmentalism that washed over Tonga and other Pacific-island nations in the 1970s, during the heyday of internationally sponsored development projects.¹ As “the only teller of big truths in the realm,” Manu peddles his “lonely message against Development” throughout the island of Tiko, a fictionalized version of Tonga.² Recounting parables of the pitfalls and failures of progress, Manu broadcasts his warning that “Tiko can’t be developed … unless the ancient gods are killed”
CHAPTER 5 Clefs à Roman: from:
Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: In a racially mixed school in a predominantly African-immigrant neighborhood of Paris, Mamadou Traoré, the young protagonist of Calixthe Beyala’s novel
Loukoum: The ‘Little Prince’ of Belleville(1995), gets his first official lesson in international relations and French humanitarianism. “The world,” instructs his teacher with the kind of Caesarean confidence and precision that once trifurcated Gaul, “is divided into developed countries and developing countries. The industrialised nations must help the poorest ones.”¹ Appealing to the children’s “generosity,” “courage [gallantry],” and “sense of solidarity,” Mamadou’s teacher proceeds to recreate that world in microcosm within the classroom and to reenact the moment
CODICIL from:
Human Rights, Inc.: The World Novel, Narrative Form, and International Law
Abstract: Adama is the name of the neighborhood where the main character, a smart young Saudi
3 Postmodern Saintliness: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: What must saintliness be if we are to think of it as postmodern? Does the term
postmodernismnot refer to a dizzying array of ever-shifting significations attributable to aesthetic styles and cultural practices? I shall focus upon postmodernism as a revolt against modes of rationality that make foundational claims, that is, as an attack upon what Jean-François Lyotard calls “grand narratives,” by which he means comprehensive epistemological schema, as well as all-encompassing theories of emancipation. In preference to the logics of modernity in their idealist and empiricist expressions, postmodern thinkers embrace what I should like to call an epistemic erotics,
6 Asceticism as Willed Corporeality: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Heidegger and Foucault can be envisioned as thinkers of emancipatory askeses, disciplines of liberation in which each may be seen as engaged in freeing knowledge and truth from embedding contexts of repressive epistemological constraints and their ancillary ethical implications, a freeing through which a certain release is attained.¹ Techniques in which historical accretions are not merely jettisoned but reenvisioned are deployed by Heidegger to deliver the relation of Being and beings in what he calls a concealing-revealing and by Foucault to uncover the disguises truth wears by bringing to light the strategic power relations that generate the practices of knowledge,
8 The Howl of Oedipus, the Cry of Héloïse: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Yet, I want to argue, there is also for every psycho-social practice an episteme, a cluster of often invisible ideas, that is both the conceptual backdrop and the enabling mechanism for the emergence of ascetic life in
9 From the Death of the Word to the Rise of the Image in the Choreography of Merce Cunningham from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: When one of the key figures in the world of dance, who is generally envisaged as an exemplar of high modernism, Merce Cunningham, appeals to the power of images rather than to a semiology of movements as the basis for his new work, then a shift that must be interrogated has occurred. As Wittgenstein demonstrated to philosophers the kinetic force of language in his apothegm “The meaning is in the use,” so Cunningham showed the world of modern dance that the meaning is in the action or movement. Along with Martha Graham, Paul Taylor, Murray Louis, and later Twyla Tharp,
10 Empathy and Sympathy as Tactile Encounter from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Empathy and sympathy are feeling-acts that open unique modes of access to other persons. While they differ from one another in object and intentional structure, both bring other persons into proximity to the experiencing subject. This “bringing near” suggests that empathy and sympathy are misunderstood if they are interpreted as mental acts whose objects yield their meanings only when they are taken as traversing an intervening space, as originating at a remove from the act of apprehension. Sight and hearing are the paradigmatic senses for grasping objects that are given as coming from elsewhere. Visual objects are apprehended as coming
15 Incursions of Alterity: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: What, we might ask, could Gregory Bateson’s description of the double bind have to do with the question of evil? I hope to show that the double bind, the claim that no matter what one does one cannot win, not only plays a role in determining the development of schizophrenia, as Bateson maintains, but is intrinsic to the emergence of the moral life.¹ I view the double bind as a prior condition for deciding that a contemplated act is evil and for the sense of obligation that enters into the avoidance or pursuit of ends that are deemed to be
16 Memory, History, Revelation: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: A piece of historical writing is often thought of as a narrative interpreting the times of those who can themselves no longer depict the epoch in which they lived and moved and had their being. The subjects of this story are no longer here to attest to their era’s culture, economy, institutions, politics, and way of life, whether to praise or to excoriate them. The historian is challenged to configure for the living the lives and times of dead others, making inferences from the clues that are trusted by the profession: archives, artifacts, and transmitted traditions. What remains unstated in
17 Exemplary Individuals: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Efforts to develop a phenomenological ethics have until now begun from two altogether different starting points. The first, a tack taken by Max Scheler, Nicolai Hartmann, and others, assumes that values are instantiated in the world and have properties that open them to intuitive grasp. Values are independent in being and accessible to us without being attached to things.¹ The second starts with the embodied existent’s actual encounters with other persons and finds in these transactions an empirical locus for what is prescribed or forbidden in the moral realm. Levinas turns to the experience of the other to develop a
18 Interview with Emmanuel Levinas from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Author(s) Levinas Emmanuel
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas: I am quite surprised that [you assert] there is a change and that there is no longer phenomenology. [In fact] there is not at all an analysis of language. It is a certain manner of speaking, of finding in
22 Facts, Fiction, Ficciones: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Absent in the narrative I am about to recount is the romance of the story. What must be repressed in the telling is that facts are objects of our desire, of a certain
Sehnsucht, not because by nature we want to know, as Aristotle maintained, but
23 Eating the Text, Defiling the Hands: from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: “A masterpiece always moves, by definition, in the manner of a ghost,” its mode of temporalization, its timing, always out of joint, spectrally disorganizing the “cause” that is called the “original,” Derrida tells us (
SoM, 18). Can there be an “original” describing an event that has already occurred but that rearises spectrally in the gap between theophany and inscription, the space between the golden calf and the tablets of the law (Exodus 32:19–20), between the idol as a physical artifact and writing? These questions are raised in the context of Arnold Schoenberg’s operaMoses and Aron,¹ a masterpiece that,
30 The Mathematical Model in Plato and Some Surrogates in a Jain Theory of Knowledge from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: One of the generative questions in Benjamin Nelson’s late work was: What accounts for the breakthrough insights that permit the reduction of all quality to quantity, the proclaiming of a mathematical reality behind the experiential immediacies of experience and the affirmation of a homogeneous time and space throughout the universe, insights that characterize Western science? It is a question that exercise both Nelson and Joseph Needham; both consider it from an intercivilizational perspective. To put the matter in Needham’s terms: “What was it that happened in Renaissance Europe when mathematics and science joined in a combination qualitatively new and destined
31 Soft Nominalism in Quine and the School of Dignāga from:
Crossover Queries: Dwelling with Negatives, Embodying Philosophy's Others
Abstract: Nominalists argue that everything that is must be particular. D. M. Armstrong contends, “Nominalists deny that there is any objective identity in things which are not identical. Realists, on the other hand, hold that the apparent situation is the real situation. There genuinely is, or can be, something identical. Besides particulars there are universals.”¹ Quine appreciates the difficulties of this position. Because the “quixotic” nominalist “foreswears quantification over universals, for example, classes, altogether,” Quine prefers “conceptualism,” a position that acknowledges that there are universals but holds them to be “manmade.” “Tactically conceptualism is … the strongest position … for the
Book Title: Interstices of the Sublime: Theology and Psychoanalytic Theory- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Interstices of the Sublime represents a powerful theological engagement with psychoanalytic theory in Freud, Lacan, Kristeva and Zizek, as well as major expressions of contemporary Continental philosophy, including Deleuze, Derrida, Marion, and Badiou. Through creative and constructive psycho-theological readings of topics such as sublimation, schizophrenia, God, and creation ex nihilo, this book contributes to a new form of radical theological thinking that is deeply involved in the world. Here the idea of the Kantian sublime is read into Freud and Lacan, and compared with sublimation. The sublime refers to a conflict of the Kantian faculties of reason and imagination, and involves the attempt to represent what is intrinsically unrepresentable. Sublimation, by contrast, involves the expression and partial satisfaction of primal desires in culturally acceptable terms. The sublime is negatively expressed in sublimation, because it is both the sourceof sublimation as well as that which resists being sublimated. That is, the Freudian sublime is related to the process of sublimation, but it also distorts or disrupts sublimation, and invokes what Lacan calls the Real. The effects of the sublime are not just psychoanalytic but, importantly, theological, because the sublime is the main form that Godtakes in the modern world. A radical postmodern theology attends to the workings of the sublime in our thinking and living, and provides resources to understand the complexity of reality. This book is one of the first sustained theological readings of Lacan in English.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x03fr
Book Title: Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KAVKA MARTIN
Abstract: Since the publication of her first book, Emmanuel Levinas: The Problem of Ethical Metaphysics, in 1974-the first book about Levinas published in English-Edith Wyschogrod has been at the forefront of the fields of Continental philosophy and philosophy of religion. Her work has crossed many disciplinary boundaries, making peregrinations from phenomenology and moral philosophy to historiography, the history of religions (both Western and non-Western), aesthetics, and the philosophy of biology. In all of these discourses, she has sought to cultivate an awareness of how the self is situated and influenced, as well as the ways in which a self can influence others.In this volume, twelve scholars examine and display the influence of Wyschogrod's work in essays that take up the thematics of influence in a variety of contexts: Christian theology, the saintly behavior of the villagers of Le Chambon sur Lignon, the texts of the medieval Jewish mystic Abraham Abulafia, the philosophies of Levinas, Derrida, and Benjamin, the practice of intellectual history, the cultural memory of the New Testament, and pedagogy.In response, Wyschogrod shows how her interlocutors have brought to light her multiple authorial personae and have thus marked the ambiguity of selfhood, its position at the nexus of being influenced by and influencing others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x03hs
The Impossible Possibility of Ethics from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) ALTIZER THOMAS J. J.
Abstract: Edith Wyschogrod is perhaps our deepest and most serious contemporary ethical thinker, the one who has most comprehensively explored our ethical crisis today, and explored it with such decisive finality as to foreclose seemingly all possibility of a real and actual ethics for us. Although most deeply inspired by Levinas, she nevertheless has not succumbed to his absolute and absolutely primordial or pre-primordial ethics; she could not so succumb, if only because she will not abandon the actuality of our world. That actuality is most powerful for her in a uniquely contemporary “death-world,” a death-world ending everything that we have
The Empty Suitcase as Rainbow from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: In her project of revisioning moral philosophy, Edith Wyschogrod takes a decisive turn from moral theory to hagiography, from abstract analysis and argument to concrete life stories. The negative motivation for this turn is a critique of moral theory. Two elements of this critique strike me as especially forceful. First, moral theory depends on arguments that do not persuade those outside the hermeneutic circle within which the arguments occur. Thus she points to “the circularity of standard modes of rationality.”¹ The problem is that “background claims … cannot be agreed upon. If there is no common frame of reference, no
“God,” Gods, God from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) PEPERZAK ADRIAAN T.
Abstract: Gedanken sind frei. Thoughts are free. Thinking is autonomous. Philosophers are free because they are able to receive, accept or refuse, distance, display, suspend, or focus on all that exists or has been thought. But philosophy is never first (except,perhaps, in a quite abstract sense of being first), because, before beginning to practice it, philosophers have already been educated, formed, accustomed to a particular language and culture, become part of an ongoing history, and set on a certain path.
Kenotic Overflow and Temporal Transcendence: from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: In a number of previously published studies, I have explored the phenomenon of time in kabbalistic literature from various perspectives.¹ Needless to say, the permutations of this theme that may be gleaned from this variegated corpus are complex and multifaceted. Without denying that any attempt to represent the kabbalah as monolithic is prone to criticism, it seems to me nonetheless legitimate from the perspective of both the kabbalists’ own hermeneutical practices and contemporary theoretical models to offer generalizations that are based on a plethora of specific textual sources. With regard to the notion of time, I am prepared to say
Memory and Violence, or Genealogies of Remembering from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) KELBER WERNER H.
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that have increasingly distinguished her writings. This linking of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all, ethics, is carried off with a high degree of
An Exercise in Upbuilding from:
Saintly Influence: Edith Wyschogrod and the Possibilities of Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) WYSCHOGROD EDITH
Abstract: In this extraordinary collection of essays, I encounter myself in a Kierkegaardian sense as “the single individual,” the one by whom the work itself “wishes to be received as if it had arisen in [the] heart” of the self whom it addresses. I read each essay as a discourse in
upbuilding, as Kierkegaard understood the term, so that the writer whose name is affixed to the essay is one who generously accepts responsibility for its every word. Neither a sermon nor a treatise that is designed to increase abstract knowledge, the discourse that is upbuilding drives the addressee between alternatives
Book Title: Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: What does theology have to say about the place of eroticism in the salvific transformation of men and women, even of the cosmos itself? How, in turn, does eros infuse theological practice and transfigure doctrinal tropes? Avoiding the well-worn path of sexual moralizing while also departing decisively from Anders Nygren's influential insistence that Christian agape must have nothing to do with worldly eros, this book explores what is still largely uncharted territory in the realm of theological erotics. The ascetic, the mystical, the seductive, the ecstatic-these are the places where the divine and the erotic may be seen to converge and love and desire to commingle.Inviting and performing a mutual seduction of disciplines, the volume brings philosophers, historians, biblical scholars, and theologians into a spirited conversation that traverses the limits of conventional orthodoxies, whether doctrinal or disciplinary. It seeks new openings for the emergence of desire, love, and pleasure, while challenging common understandings of these terms. It engages risk at the point where the hope for salvation paradoxically endangers the safety of subjects-in particular, of theological subjects-by opening them to those transgressions of eros in which boundaries, once exceeded, become places of emerging possibility.The eighteen chapters, arranged in thematic clusters, move fluidly among and between premodern and postmodern textual traditions-from Plato to Emerson, Augustine to Kristeva, Mechthild to Mattoso, the Shulammite to Molly Bloom, the Zohar to the Da Vinci Code. In so doing, they link the sublime reaches of theory with the gritty realities of politics, the boundless transcendence of God with the poignant transience of materiality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x040h
Introduction: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BURRUS VIRGINIA
Abstract: What does theology have to say about the place of eroticism in the salvific transformation of human subjects, even of the cosmos itself? How, in turn, does eros infuse theological practice and transfigure doctrinal tropes? Veering off the well-worn path of sexual moralizing, this volume explores what is still largely uncharted territory in the realm of theological erotics even as it also deliberately disrupts the disciplinary boundaries of theology. Indeed, it invites and performs a mutual seduction of disciplines—theology, philosophy, scripture, history—at multiple sites charged by desires at once bodily, spiritual, intellectual, and political. It seeks new openings
What Do We Talk About When We Talk About Platonic Love? from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BOYARIN DANIEL
Abstract: In his celebrated study of Christian love, Anders Nygren identifies the emergence of heresy with the perversion of agape: “Agape loses its original meaning and is transformed into Eros; not, however, be it observed, into the sublimated ‘heavenly Eros’ of which Plato and his followers speak, but into that despised variety, ‘vulgar Eros.’”¹ The implications of this framing require unpacking. To do so, we must return to Plato’s
Symposium,where the term “heavenly Eros” occurs in the discourse of Pausanias, signifying a practice of desire that begins with physical love but ultimately transcends the physical. Yet Pausanias is not the
Sexual Desire, Divine Desire; Or, Queering the Beguines from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) HOLLYWOOD AMY
Abstract: In the face of what the social historian Judith Bennett refers to as “the virtual absence of actual women from the sources of medieval lesbianisms,” a number of literary and cultural scholars have recently turned to texts by or about women to uncover homoerotic possibilities within the metaphoric structures of women’s own writings or in the practices ascribed to women or female characters within male-and female-authored literary and religious documents.¹ Karma Lochrie, for example, looks to a number of medieval devotional texts and images in which Christ’s bloody side wound becomes a locus of desire.² According to Lochrie, not only
Feetishism: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) ALTHAUS-REID MARCELLA MARÍA
Abstract: In 1986, Glauco Mattoso, the blind Brazilian poet and self-confessed foot fetishist,¹ wrote a book that has become almost an object of underground cult.
The Loving Feetishist Handbook: Adventures and Readings from a Guy Crazy for Feetwas converted into a cartoon and renamedThe Adventures of Glaucomix, the Feetishist.Both books were very successful and even attracted international academic attention.² Glaucomix (recalling Asterix) is portrayed as a young university student and foot fetishist. In previous books and poems, Mattoso had deliberately mixed contrasting issues of marginalization and power. In these works, issues such as power and disempowerment are represented
Passion—Binding—Passion from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) SHERWOOD YVONNE
Abstract: The seductive enigma of the word
passion—and the Christian passion to which it is tied—seems to me to lie in the way in which it allows the subject at its center to function as subject and object both at once. Derived from Latinpassioand Greekpathos, it is bound, in its first appearances in anything we would recognize as English, to passivity, suffering, affliction, and “the fact or condition of being acted upon or affected by an external agency” (OED). As if to illustrate this sense of passion as the subjection of the subject, the word was
Praying Is Joying: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) BURRUS VIRGINIA
Abstract: “Happy the spirit [
nous] which attains to total insensibility at prayer,” exults Evagrius of Pontus in hisChapters on Prayer(120).¹ TheChapters,like so many ancient texts, comes wrapped in the envelope of a personal letter (though we no longer know the name of Evagrius’s addressee). A response to another letter, it begins suspensefullyin medias res—in the midst of an epistolary exchange between friends and also in the midst of a charged moment for Evagrius himself. “It was so characteristic of you to get a letter to me just at a time when I was aflame with
Lyrical Theology: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) LINAFELT TOD
Abstract: The statement by T.S. Eliot with which I begin is not without its problems, the most obvious of them the difficulty of actually defining “poetry.” Yet it seems worth sticking with Eliot’s formulation for the time being, inasmuch as too often the fact that the Song of Songs is poetry—and not another thing—seems to be forgotten by interpreters, or at least neglected. What would it mean to consider the Song of Songs as poetry? And further, what
kindof poetry do we find in the Song of Songs? What are the “other things” that it ought not to
The Shulammite’s Song: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The Song of Songs offers no single, stable perspective from which to view the amorous scenes unveiled on its pages. Most readers of the Song from antiquity to the present have, however, been inclined to identify with the female figure traditionally known as the Shulammite. But who is the Shulammite, and who, for that matter, is her beloved? The sustained ambiguities of identity and fluid reversals of erotic roles have made this text fertile ground for conceiving and reconceiving the mysteries of desire, in particular, the mysteries of
divine desire—despite (or perhaps because of) the fact that God is
Suffering Eros and Textual Incarnation: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) WOLFSON ELLIOT R.
Abstract: FLASH—instant of time or of dream without time; inordinately swollen atoms of a bond, a vision, a shiver, a yet formless, unnamable embryo. Epiphanies. Photos of what is not yet visible and that language necessarily skims over from afar, allusively. Words that are always too distant, too abstract for this underground swarming of seconds, folding in unimaginable spaces. Writing them down is an ordeal of discourse, like love. What is loving, for a woman, the
Afterword: from:
Toward a Theology of Eros: Transfiguring Passion at the Limits of Discipline
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: So many loves. A time of depletion after excess. Afterward—is it the lull of exhaustion or satisfaction, disappointment or fulfillment, detumescence or engorgement? Or some uneasy incompletion? The seduction has been attempted, we may be falling in love or out, getting up or going down, ascending, descending or just turning, oh, God. An afterword comes too late, or too soon; the double entendres are dissipating, the flesh has confessed, the closet is open, the book is closing, and still we may not have figured it out. “It” almost came, is still to come, may have come and gone already.
Book Title: Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SMITH DAVID NOWELL
Abstract: Sounding/Silence charts Heidegger's deep engagement with poetry, situating it within the internal dynamics of his thought and within the domains of poetics and literary criticism. Heidegger viewed poetics and literary criticism with notorious disdain: he claimed that his Erlauterungen ("soundings") of Holderlin's poetry were not "contributions to aesthetics and literary history" but rather stemmed "from a necessity for thought." And yet, the questions he poses--the value of significance of prosody and trope, the concept of "poetic language", the relation between language and body, the "truth" of poetry--reach to the very heart of poetics as a discipline, and indeed situate Heidegger within a wider history of thinking on poetry and poetics. opening up points of contact between Heidegger's discussions of poetry and technical and critical analyses of these poems, Nowell Smith addresses a lacuna within Heidegger scholarship and sets off from Heidegger's thought to sketch a philosophical "poetics of limit".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x044k
Introduction: from:
Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: To set up a limit is a dual gesture, at once instituting difference and indicating a point of contact. Martin Heidegger’s critique of the discipline of poetics, a recurrent feature throughout his long engagement with poetry, is just such a gesture. On the one hand, he claims that his own readings of poems or
Erläuterungen(“soundings-out”) can articulate aspects of these poems to which poetics itself is blind. It thus stands beyond the limits of poetics—limits, that is, not simply born of bad critical practices, but which belong to the very “essence” of poetics as a mode of questioning.
Conclusion: from:
Sounding/Silence: Martin Heidegger at the Limits of Poetics
Abstract: At the end of the last chapter I observed that Heidegger’s readings of poetry are not exegeses but preservations, and moreover, that these preservations become genuine encounters with the poems they read only when they are themselves unable to gauge the shape of this encounter. This led to a paradoxical situation in which Heidegger’s readings are most compelling when they undermine his own portrayal of them. The first of these observations impacts on how we read Heidegger: if we take Heidegger’s refusal of exegesis seriously, we cannot perform an exegesis of Heidegger’s readings, but rather the preservation of a preservation.
2 Emmanuel Lévinas and the Infinite from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Lévinas was one of the first thinkers to introduce phenomenology into France. Originally Lithuanian Jewish, he emigrated to France as a young student. He was educated in Straβburg and spent a formative year (1928–29) with Husserl and Heidegger in Freiburg. Husserl had retired but was still teaching, and Heidegger had just published
Being and Time. Students flocked to his lectures. Lévinas talks about this experience inEthics and Infinity, an interview with Philippe Nemo and broadcast on French radio, describing the excitement of Heidegger’s initial lectures and the tremendous impact ofBeing and Time, which he calls “one of
4 Paul Ricoeur: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Ricoeur was one of the most prolific French philosophers in his long life, authoring over thirty books on a great variety of topics. He was born in 1913 and died in Paris in 2005, having taught for many years in Straβburg, Paris, and Chicago. Ricoeur is known primarily as a hermeneutic thinker, although his hermeneutic work always also refers to and assumes phenomenology and interacts with various other philosophical approaches. In fact, in many ways a possible conversation between various philosophical traditions, approaches, and discourses could be said to be a distinctive mark of Ricoeur’s philosophy. Richard Kearney suggests that
7 Jean-Louis Chrétien: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Jean-Louis Chrétien’s writings are a powerful example of the character of what I have called a new type of apologetics. In no way does he ever engage in anything like proofs for God’s existence, evidence for the validity of religious experience, or any consideration of the rational coherence of an idea of the divine. And yet his work is imbued and overflows with Christian imagery and references to Christian sources. Even when he is not addressing explicitly religious themes, his poetic language has the flavor and tonality of Christian mysticism. Chrétien (born in 1952) is one of the youngest of
9 Emmanuel Falque: from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Emmanuel Falque (born in 1963), along with Jean-Louis Chrétien, belongs to the next generation of French thinkers. He was a student of Jean-Luc Marion and Jean Greisch and is presently dean of the faculty of philosophy at the Institut catholique in Paris. He has degrees in both philosophy and theology and merges the two disciplines far more fully than any of the other thinkers, occasionally even challenging the boundaries between these subject matters as unnecessary and superficial.¹ Falque’s work is especially characterized by a phenomenological reading of theological doctrines and thinkers. His dissertation was a phenomenological reading of Bonaventure (
Saint
10 Postmodern Apologetics? from:
Postmodern Apologetics?: Arguments for God in Contemporary Philosophy
Abstract: Each of the chapters in this part of the book has identified apologetic elements in the work of the thinkers discussed. Before examining some of their appropriations in the North American context in more detail, it might be worthwhile to consider this apologetic or quasi-apologetic character more fully. Are these projects apologetic ones? Do they “defend” the divine and argue on behalf of faith? Certainly their arguments for God are not arguments in the traditional (modern) sense. They are primarily phenomenological depictions of religious experience in a variety of registers. Their depictions do not always agree, although there are indeed
Book Title: A Scholar's Tale: Intellectual Journey of a Displaced Child of Europe- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: For more than fifty years, Geoffrey Hartman has been a pivotal figure in the humanities. In his first book, in 1954, he helped establish the study of Romanticism as key to the problems of modernity. Later, his writings were crucial to the explosive developments in literary theory in the late seventies, and he was a pioneer in Jewish studies, trauma studies, and studies of the Holocaust. At Yale, he was a founder of its Judaic Studies program, as well as of the first major video archive for Holocaust testimonies.Generations of students have benefited from Hartman's generosity, his penetrating and incisive questioning, the wizardry of his close reading, and his sense that the work of a literary scholar, no less than that of an artist, is a creative act. All these qualities shine forth in this intellectual memoir, which will stand as his autobiography. Hartman describes his early education, uncanny sense of vocation, and development as a literary scholar and cultural critic. He looks back at how his career was influenced by his experience, at the age of nine, of being a refugee from Nazi Germany in the Kindertransport. He spent the next six years at school in England, where he developed his love of English literature and the English countryside, before leaving to join his mother in America.Hartman treats us to a biobibliographyof his engagements with the major trends in literary criticism. He covers the exciting period at Yale handled so controversially by the media and gives us vivid portraits, in particular, of Harold Bloom, Paul de Man, and Jacques Derrida.SEND GEOFFREY COVER COPY All this is set in the context of his gradual self-awareness of what scholarship implies and how his personal displacements strengthened his calling to mediate between European and American literary cultures. Anyone looking for a rich, intelligible account of the last half-century of combative literary studies will want to read Geoffrey Hartman's unapologetic scholar's tale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04h8
A Scholar’s Tale from:
A Scholar's Tale: Intellectual Journey of a Displaced Child of Europe
Abstract: Trajectory, itinerary, journey.¹ These are attractive and deceptive metaphors. They suggest a chosen or predetermined path, with a distinctive goal and course corrections. This is bound to lead to ego fiction. Was the classifier at Barnes and Noble right, the one who marketed
A Critic’s Journey, my book of selected essays, under “Travel”?
Introduction: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Treanor Brian
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche famously stated: “There are no facts, only interpretations.”¹ Perhaps this could be slightly rephrased: no facts go uninterpreted. There are simply no bare facts, at least if a fact is to be meaningful. Every fact has meaning only in relation to other facts, to context, and to the human understanding itself. In other words, at the heart of every confrontation of concept and perception is the issue of
hermeneutics: the art and science of interpretation.
CHAPTER 3 Layering: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Mugerauer Robert
Abstract: Among the most challenging issues facing environmental hermeneutics is how to think about person-world relationships in an integrated manner—not by way of conceptually separated natural environments and social spheres—as if there were either some “pure nature” untouched by our interpretations and actions or any human life apart from environmental dynamics. Rather, the interactions of the physiochemical and biological, the individuating and communal dimensions—at all scales—provide our subject matter. For instance, it makes little sense to carry on studying “sense of place” and “identity” as we have been, assuming that these phenomena are stable and that the
CHAPTER 4 Might Nature Be Interpreted as a “Saturated Phenomenon”? from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Gschwandtner Christina M.
Abstract: Could elements of “nature” appear to us as what Jean-Luc Marion calls “saturated phenomena”?¹ And if so, how might that be useful for environmental thinking? While at first glance it might seem obvious that natural phenomena could be experienced as saturated, Marion himself has never employed such phenomena as examples for his notion of the saturated phenomenon. In fact, there is almost no reference to (nonhuman) animals anywhere in his work and a tree is mentioned only once and in that case is listed together with a triangle as a “technical object” and thus a “poor” phenomenon.² Marion has never
CHAPTER 6 Environmental Hermeneutics and Environmental/Eco-Psychology: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Utsler David
Abstract: Environmental hermeneutics is, as the subtitle of this book claims, an “emerging field.” It is not the case that philosophical hermeneutics and environmental discourse have not been thought together before. But a “field” suggests a body of knowledge that is at once diverse yet coherent: Diverse, in that there are multiple perspectives and applications; coherent, in that there are recognizable characteristics that make environmental hermeneutics identifiable as a particular way of engaging environmental philosophy. Hermeneutics itself is widely recognized and understood to have multiple applications across a wide variety of disciplines and themes. Indeed, “environmental hermeneutics” might be simply defined
CHAPTER 9 Narrative and Nature: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Treanor Brian
Abstract: Common convention, as well as numerous philosophical and scientific accounts, suggests that there are two primary ways of gaining understanding: theory (
theoria) and practice (praxis). In this context, I mean by the former all sorts of abstract ways of coming to know or understand things, with the caveat that in our age pride of place is given to scientific understanding. We tend to think we know things when we can prove them—often without reflection at all on the nature of “proof”—and, consequently, we subject all sorts of inquiry to this quasi-scientific standard. Imagine, for example, a clichéd exchange
CHAPTER 10 The Question Concerning Nature from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) McGrath Sean
Abstract: In this chapter, I situate Timothy Morton’s and Slavoj Žižek’s “ecology without nature” (hereafter EWN) within the broader history of transcendental-structuralist ontology.¹ I will argue that, notwithstanding Morton’s recent turn to object-oriented ontology, his deconstruction of a certain notion of nature, which we provisionally describe as the extra-lingual intelligible order, does not deviate from the a-cosmic trajectory of late modern thinking, from nineteenth-century transcendental philosophy, through hermeneutics and semiotics to Lacanian psychoanalysis. Even if something like nature in fact existed, the argument goes, we would have little to say about it, locked as we are into a self-referential meaning system,
CHAPTER 11 New Nature Narratives: from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Drenthen Martin
Abstract: Philosophical hermeneutics is built on the assumption that people make sense of their lives by placing themselves in a larger normative context.
Environmentalhermeneutics focuses on the fact that environments matter to people, too, because environments embody just such contexts.¹ This is most obvious for cultural landscapes, yet it applies to the specifically natural world as well: Nature can function as a larger normative context with its own narrative dimension. However, there are many different placial and temporal dimensions at play in our relation to the landscape, which can give rise to different normative interpretations of the meaning of a
CHAPTER 12 Memory, Imagination, and the Hermeneutics of Place from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Clingerman Forrest
Abstract: Humans are creatures of the present, and the places that we inhabit oftentimes abet an emphasis on presence. For example, much of our daily interaction occurs in spaces that offer little to discriminate the times of day or season. Artificial lights, heating, air conditioning, walls, and doors maintain a continuous backdrop and regulate the experience of embodiment in space as days and weeks move into the past. Yet we might still find ways to break through mere geometric space, through the anonymity of these situations. In the materiality of these environments, there are fractures and idiosyncrasies that beckon us to
CHAPTER 13 The Betweenness of Monuments from:
Interpreting Nature: The Emerging Field of Environmental Hermeneutics
Author(s) Donohoe Janet
Abstract: Often when we think about the environment, we think about natural places and the negative impact of the human being upon those places. We think of global warming, melting ice caps, mountain topping, extinction of animals, and other threats to nature. With the increasing public and social emphasis on environmentalism, we are encouraged to think of our impact on the natural environment by recycling more, using water less, and reducing our environmental footprint. The environment we are supposed to be concerned with and thinking about is “out there” beyond the perimeters of our cities where we only go for a
Book Title: Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stagaman David
Abstract: Three of the most influential Catholic theologians of the twentieth century-Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner-were all born in 1904, at the height of the Church's most militant rhetoric against all things modern. In this culture of suspicion, Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner grew in faith to join the Society of Jesus and struggled with the burden of antimodernist policies in their formation. By the time of their mature work in the 1950s and 1960s, they had helped to redefine the critical dialogue between modern thought and contemporary Catholic theology. After the dtente of the Second Vatican Council, they brought Catholic tradition into closer relationship to modern philosophy, history, and politics. Written by leading scholars, friends, and family members, these original essays celebrate the legacies of Lonergan, Murray, and Rahner after a century of theological development. Offering a broad range of perspectives on their lives and works, the essays blend personal and anecdotal accounts with incisive critical appraisals. Together, they offer an accessible introduction to the distinctive character of three great thinkers and how their work shapes the way Catholics think and talk about God, Church, and State.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x04wz
7. Memories of “Uncle Jack”: from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Williams Mark
Abstract: In mid-April 2005, while attending a Georgetown-sponsored Ignatian retreat in western Maryland, I realized that the former Woodstock College was nearby. It is where my uncle, John Courtney Murray, S.J., lived and taught for many years, and where he is now buried. The Woodstock’s buildings and campus were sold to the State of Maryland in the early 1970’s. It is now the Maryland Job Corps Center, but the Jesuit cemetery, which lies at the edge of the property, remains intact and accessible. And so, late on a warm and sunny spring afternoon, I spent an hour at the simple gravesite
9. Murray: from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Hughson Thomas
Abstract: Catholics and other Christians most likely know John Courtney Murray as a protagonist in the production of the Declaration on Religious Freedom at the Second Vatican Council, published almost forty years ago. Its significance for the public life of Catholicism in religiously pluralist societies remains hard to overestimate. Social ethics, fundamental theology, practical theology, public theology, and communications are theological specialties that also have found substance in his writings.
11. Karl Rahner’s Theological Life from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Egan Harvey D.
Abstract: “Strengthened by the Church’s sacrament and accompanied by the prayers of his Jesuit brothers, shortly after completing his eightieth year, Father Karl Rahner has gone home to God. He had loved the Church and his religious order and spent himself in their service.” So read part of the official Jesuit announcement of the death of Father Karl Rahner, S.J., on March 30, 1984. With his death, the Catholic Church lost one of her most loyal sons. Although well known for his controversial reinterpretations of the Christian tradition and for his criticisms of much in the Church’s practical life, Rahner always
12. Karl Rahner: from:
Finding God in All Things: Celebrating Bernard Lonergan, John Courtney Murray, and Karl Rahner
Author(s) Griener George E.
Abstract: Karl Rahner is one of the most influential Roman Catholic theologians of the twentieth century. The international impact of Rahner’s project, surprising even to some of his close colleagues, irritating to some of his critics, is a phenomenon not yet fully explained by the criteria of academic theology. It also needs to be explored as a historical-cultural event.
Book Title: Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: The title Translating Investments, a manifold pun, refers to metaphor and clothing, authority and interest, and trading and finance. Translation, Latin translatio, is historically a name for metaphor, and investment, etymologically a reference to clothing, participates both in the complex symbolism of early modern dress and in the cloth trade of the period. In this original and wide-ranging book, Judith Anderson studies the functioning of metaphor as a constructive force within language, religious doctrine and politics, literature, rhetoric, and economics during the reigns of the Tudors and early Stuarts. Invoking a provocative metaphorical concept from Andy Clark's version of cognitive science, she construes metaphor itself as a form of scaffolding fundamental to human culture. A more traditional and controversial conception of such scaffolding is known as sublation-Hegel's Aufhebung, or raising,as the philosophers Jacques Derrida and Paul Ricoeur have understood this term. Metaphor is the agent of raising, or sublation, and sublation is inseparable from the productive life of metaphor, as distinct in its death in code or clich. At the same time, metaphor embodies the sense both of partial loss and of continuity, or preservation, also conveyed by the term Aufhebung. Anderson's study is simultaneously critical and historical. History and the theory are shown to be mutually enlightening, as are a wide variety of early modern texts and their specific cultural contexts. From beginning to end, this study touches the present, engaging questions about language, rhetoric, and reading within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism. It highlights connections between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those evident in the earlier texts, controversies, and crises Anderson analyzes. In this way, the study is bifocal, like metaphor itself. While Anderson's overarching concern is with metaphor as a creative exchange, a source of code-breaking conceptual power, each of her chapters focuses on a different but related issue and cultural sector. Foci include the basic conditions of linguistic meaning in the early modern period, instantiated by Shakespeare's plays and related to modern theories of metaphor; the role of metaphor in the words of eucharistic institution under Archbishop Cranmer; the play of metaphor and metonymy in the writings of Luther, Zwingli, and Calvin and in John Donne's Devotions; the manipulation of these two tropes in the politics of the controversy over ecclesiastical vestments and in its treatment by John Foxe; the abuse of figuration in the house of Edmund Spenser's Busirane, where catachresis, an extreme form of metaphor, is the trope du jour; the conception of metaphor in the Roman rhetorics and their legacy in the sixteenth century; and the concept of exchange in the economic writing of Gerrard de Malynes, merchant and metaphorist in the reigns of Elizabeth and James. What emerges at the end of this book is a heightened critical sense of the dynamic of metaphor in cultural history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05b5
1. Renaissance Metaphor and the Dynamic of Cultural Change: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: This book studies the functioning of metaphor in Tudor and early Stuart culture. Accordingly, its chapters treat a range of disciplines, including language, religion, rhetoric, politics, literature, and economics. Also and inevitably, it touches the present, raising questions about the position of language and rhetoric within post-structuralism and neo-cognitivism and doing so in a way that highlights the connection between intellectual problems active in our own culture and those manifested in the sixteenth- and seventeenth-century texts, controversies, and crises that I discuss.
Translating Investmentsis thus conceived as simultaneously a critical and a historical study.
2. Translating Investments: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: In this chapter, my argument, which is historical in orientation, suggests a way of conceiving language that informs the metaphoricity of Renaissance writings and bears on our reading of them. In doing so, it also addresses contemporary debates about the metaphoricity of language and their application to the early modern period. Ultimately it treats Shakespeare’s use of the word
investmentin2 Henry IVandHamletas telling instances of the linguistic character of early modern metaphor, whose conditions of meaning differ in significant ways from our own. What follows in this chapter is an effort to make history, theory,
7. Catachresis and Metaphor: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: Twice in recent chapters, I have invoked Richard Lanham’s definition of catachresis as a wrenching of metaphor or an extravagant use of it, in any case, as a violent (mis)use of language. Qualifying Lanham’s definition, I have also observed the appreciation of traditional rhetoric for the necessity, and not merely the extravagance, of catachresis in the absence of any other suitable words. Lanham’s definition is a cogent synthesis abstracted from classical and Renaissance sources, and I have annotated it as such, along with reference to Patricia Parker’s provocative analysis of definitions of metaphor and catachresis from classical times to the
8. Exchanging Values: from:
Translating Investments: Metaphor and the Dynamics of Cultural Change in Tudor-Stuart England
Abstract: In 1622, Gerrard de Malynes, self-styled ‘‘Merchant,’’ published his
magnum opusentitledConsuetudo, vel Lex Mercatoria, or The Antient Law-Merchant. While concerned with mercantile law (and nowadays found in law libraries),Lex Mercatoriafocuses primarily on mercantile custom. It fundamentally engages economic issues, as do Malynes’ earlier writings, on which discussion of his historical significance has focused.Lex Mercatoriaaffords a broader context for these views than do his other writings, however, and it affords ways of looking at them that cast light on the curious fact of his also having composed an allegory about usury and exchange, complete with
Terror, Religion, and the New Politics from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: Rk: In the interview with Dominique Janicaud (
Heidegger en France[Heidegger in France]), you talk about deconstruction as being a preference for discontinuity over continuity, fordifféranceover reconciliation, and so on. These two traits are always at work in your thought. I was wondering, at the practical level, what this preference might mean in the current political situation. In the wake of September 11, there is much talk of the West versus Islam. In Northern Ireland, there was much negotiation over decommissioning of arms. And there are all these tensions between Pakistan and India and, of course, between Palestine
The Hermeneutics of Revelation from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Rk: They are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: Both of us owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricœur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the
differencesin our respective positions in regards to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean-Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more
On Narrative Imagination from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Rk: You have written much about the power of narrative to provide people with a sense of identity and cohesion. You have also written much about the fact that human existence is always in quest of narrative by way of providing us with a historical memory or future. Do you believe that narrative has a positive therapeutic potential?
Myth, Ideology, Sovereignty from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Dumézil Georges
Abstract: Rk: There is still some debate as to how exactly your work should be situated and classified. Is it primarily philosophical, sociological, anthropological, theological, or linguistic? After your early research, you begin to define your study of ancient myths and religions as “the comparative study of the Indo-European religions” or simply “Indo-European civilization,” in contradistinction to the earlier title of “comparative mythology.” How does this change in nomenclature describe your specific approach to myth and religion?
Being, God, and the Poetics of Relation from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Breton Stanislas
Abstract: Sb: First, I would say that my philosophical journey is related to my biographical one. My early upbringing and education in a rural community in La Vendée certainly had a significant impact on my subsequent thinking; it determined my later leanings towards a certain philosophical
realism. This perhaps accounts somewhat for the fact that in the doctorate I presented to the Sorbonne,
Deconstruction and the Other from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: Rk: The most characteristic feature of your work has been its determination to “deconstruct” the Western philosophy of presence. I think it would be helpful if you could situate your program of deconstruction in relation to the two major intellectual traditions of Westem European culture—the Hebraic and the Hellenic. You conclude your seminal essay on the Jewish philosopher Emmanuel Levinas with the following quotation from James Joyce’s
Ulysses:“GreekJew is JewGreek.” Do you agree with Levinas that Judaism offers an alternative to the Greek metaphysics of presence? Or do you believe with Joyce that the Jewish and Greek cultures
Text Matters from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) Rainwater Mara
Abstract: H-gg: My way to hermeneutics describes my initial experiences with the study of language as a young philologist in Marburg. I had already completed a dissertation on Plato for my first philosophical studies with [Richard] Honigswald, [Paul] Natorp, and Nicolai Hartmann, and I had also met Heidegger. Only then did I actually begin my course of studies as a classical philologist with Paul Friedlander. It was at that point I had the opportunity to recognize the vital importance of a literary genre itself, especially when we are trying to
Between Selves and Others from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) TEIGAS DEMETRIUS
Abstract: Demetrius teigas: I would like to put some critical questions to you, not in order to oppose your views, but to welcome your fresh thoughts on the topic of alterity, and also to invite you to elaborate on the diacritical hermeneutics you propose in your recent trilogy. Such an effort, in my opinion, could fill in a gap felt daily in our present historical conditions, where we witness countless exclusions of the
otherin terror and suffering. Although you distinguish clearly your proposal for a diacritical hermeneutics from both Gadamerian and radical hermeneutics, it is not evident what exactly you
Thinking Is Dangerous from:
Debates in Continental Philosophy: Conversations with Contemporary Thinkers
Author(s) COSTELLO STEPHEN J.
Abstract: Rk: No, I never wanted to do medicine because I had a terrible fear of blood and was very squeamish when it came to human pain, inflicted or endured. So I wasn’t a good potential doctor or, indeed, sportsman, except sport that did not involve painful physical contact. As a player on the rugby team in Glenstal Abbey (Limerick, Ireland), I was scrum-halfbut that consisted of avoiding forwards rushing in at
Book Title: God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garfitt Toby
Abstract: Gathering in one place a cohesive selection of articles that deepen our sense of the vitality and controversy within the Catholic renewal of the mid-twentieth century, God's Mirror offers historical analysis of French Catholic intellectuals. This volume highlights the work of writers, thinkers and creative artists who have not always drawn the attention given to such luminaries as Maritain, Mounier, and Marcel. Organized around the typologies of renewal and engagement, editors Katherine Davies and Toby Garfitt provide a revisionist and interdisciplinary reading of the narrative of twentieth-century French Catholicism. Renewal and engagement are both manifestations of how the Catholic intellectual reflects and takes position on the relationship between the Church, personal faith and the world, and on the increasingly problematic relationship between intellectuals and the Magisterium. A majority of the writings are based on extensive research into published texts, with some occasional archival references, and they give critical insights into the tensions that characterized the theological and political concerns of their subjects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x05fq
2 Paul Valéry and French Catholicism: from:
God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Gifford Paul
Abstract: It must be something of a paradox to identify the sociopolitical and intellectual context of the renewal of French Catholicism in the third and fourth decades of the twentieth century by appealing to an agnostic intellectual, a poet, thinker, and public writer who, in the preceding period, observes the church, its beliefs, practices, and behavior—closely, to be sure—but with unfailing skepticism and consistently from the outside, looking in. Yet Paul Valéry, precisely because he does
notbelong to the house hold of Catholic obedience, sharing neither its philosophic mind nor its Christian faith, while still operating in the
6 From Mystique to Théologique: from:
God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Consult any concert program, review, or advertising for the music of Olivier Messiaen: very likely some variation of the word “mystic” will appear as an identifier or modifier. Partly, this is simply modernity’s lack of an appropriate category. One of the most recent examples is a book review that appeared in 2010 in the
Journal of the British Institute of Organ Studies: “The title [Messiaen the Theologian] is perhaps (deliberately?) provocative: as the contributors demonstrate, Messiaen was profoundly influenced by certain theological traditions. Yet it is slightly implausible to ascribe to a composer the didactic, essentially word-based role of ‘theologian’;
7 Rethinking the Modernity of Bernanos: from:
God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) Sudlow Brian
Abstract: Since the 1990s there has been a broad critical consensus that the polemical writings of Georges Bernanos are paradoxically modern in substance and style. In his essay on
Les grands cimetières sous la lune(A Diary of My Times, 1938), Bernanos’s tract about the Spanish Civil War, Michel Estève underlines how Bernanos’s dissent from the textbook Catholic response to the war was evidence of his affirming the primacy of conscience over ideology.¹ Pierrette Renard has mounted the most complex and detailed argument in the secondary literature to demonstrate how Bernanos, in his polemical writings, was a modern in spite of
10 Louis Massignon: from:
God's Mirror: Renewal and Engagement in French Catholic Intellectual Culture in the Mid-Twentieth Century
Author(s) O’Mahony Anthony
Abstract: Louis Massignon (1883–1962) was a singular figure in the French Catholic intellectual world between the First and Second World Wars up until Vatican II.¹ His place in the French Catholic milieu defies easy categorization: soldier-diplomat, leading scholar of Islam and the Muslim World, politically engaged, a religious activist, and latterly ordained a Catholic priest in the Melkite Catholic Church in 1950.² Massignon was considered by some of his contemporaries to be a unique mediating voice in France’s relations with the Arab world.³
Book Title: Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Stahlberg Lesleigh Cushing
Abstract: Scrolls of Love is a book of unions. Edited by a Jew and a Christian who are united by a shared passion for the Bible and a common literary hermeneutic, it joins two biblical scrolls and gathers around them a diverse community of interpreters. It brings together Ruth and the Song of Songs, two seemingly disparate texts of the Hebrew Bible, and reads them through a number of the methodological and theological perspectives. Respectful of traditional biblical scholarship, the collection of essays moves beyond it; alert to contemporary trends, the volume returns venerable interpretive tradition to center stage. Most significantly, it is interfaith. Despite the fact that Jews and Christians share a common text in the Hebrew Scripture, the two communities have read their Bibles in isolation from one another, in ignorance of the richness of the other's traditions of reading. Scrolls of Love brings the two traditions into dialogue, enriching established modes of interpretation with unconventional ones. The result is a volume that sets rabbinic, patristic, and medieval readings alongside feminist, psychoanalytic, and autobiographical ones, combining historical, literary, and textual criticism with a variety of artistic reinterpretations-wood cuts and paper cuts, poetry and fiction. Some of the works are scholarly, with the requisite footnotes to draw readers to further inquiry: others are more reflective than analytic, allowing readers to see what it means to live intimately with Scripture. As a unity, the collection presents Ruth and Song of Songs not only as ancient texts that deserve to be treasured but as old worlds capable of begetting the new.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0610
SUBVERTING THE BIBLICAL WORLD: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) LaCocque André
Abstract: It is essential that we read Ruth in light of a complex social environment that in many ways the book is reacting
against. This means taking into account the status of women in ancient Israel and, more broadly, the ancient Near East. It also means considering the status of foreigners within these same surroundings. Both issues become especially intense in a tale whose title character is both female and foreign.
DARK LADIES AND REDEMPTIVE COMPASSION: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Polen Nehemia
Abstract: Jewish tradition celebrates Shavuot as the festival of the Giving of the Torah, the anniversary of the time when, fifty days after the Exodus, God came down on Mount Sinai and spoke the Decalogue (the “Ten Commandments”) to Israel. So it is that every year synagogue congregations take out the Torah scroll from the Holy Ark, place it on the reading table, and read from Exodus 19–20 as a public reenactment of that ancient covenantal proclamation. But just before that happens, another, much smaller scroll is opened and read: the scroll of Ruth.¹
RUTH SPEAKS IN YIDDISH: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Hellerstein Kathryn
Abstract: Erich Auerbach famously characterized the direct discourse of the Hebrew Bible as serving “to indicate thoughts which remain unexpressed,” in contrast to speech in Homer’s
Odyssey, which serves “to manifest, to externalize thoughts.”¹ However, when the first speech occurs in the book of Ruth 1:8, Naomi, pausing on the road home back toward Bethlehem, in the land of Judah, addresses her widowed Moabite daughters-in-law in what seems to me a forthright way that makes her thoughts and feelings utterly explicit: “Go, return each of you to her mother’s house; the Lord deal kindly with you as ye have dealt with
PRINTING THE STORY: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Parker Margaret Adams
Abstract: It can be argued that printmaking in Europe grew up alongside the printed Christian Bible. The print’s beginnings in Western Europe¹ coincided roughly with the development of the printing press and movable type. Indeed, the impact of the biblical print is in some ways analogous to that of the printed text. Just as the printing press made possible the broader dissemination of the Bible, the print made biblical images widely available. Likewise, translations of the Bible into local vernaculars made the text accessible to those who could not read the Latin Vulgate, just as the printed image “told” the biblical
TRANSLATING EROS from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Bloch Chana
Abstract: “Kiss me, make me drunk with your kisses! Your sweet loving / is better than wine.”¹ The great love poem that begins with these words does not follow the conventional romantic plot: boy meets girl, boy and girl get acquainted, boy proposes marriage. That the two are already intimate is clear from the very first words of the Song of Songs. Love, not marriage, is what they propose, and the woman, who is called the Shulamite, does most of the proposing. She, in fact, is the one who issues that first urgent invitation. If she declares that his loving is
“I AM BLACK AND BEAUTIFUL” from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) LaCocque André
Abstract: In
Romance, She Wrote: A Hermeneutical Essay on Song of Songs,¹ I argue that the Song contains erotic descriptions that neither ask for nor require justification. In vivid contrast to the prophetic writings, in which eros is employed only in condemnation, it affirms, even revels in, sensual life. In fact, the Song’s eroticism is deliberately subversive in its challenge to the institutions of the Hellenistic era (ca. 333–175 bce), the probable time of its composition. I take it that the book’s author is a woman and that this female authorship adds to its polemical celebration of “free” love, that
THE FEMALE VOICE: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Fassler Margot
Abstract: Hildegard of Bingen was deeply engaged with Scripture, and one of the ways to understand her thought is by tracing her treatment of particular figures from the Bible or especially important passages from favored sections of the text. How did she organize her commentaries—written, visual, and sonic? How did she take the common coin of theological understanding and turn it into a practiced, embodied knowing within communal action? These are the questions addressed here, and they are grappled with by focusing primarily upon this theologian/composer/poet’s treatment of the Song of Songs.¹ Hildegard knew the book as a source of
“WHERE HAS YOUR BELOVED GONE?”: from:
Scrolls of Love: Ruth and the Song of Songs
Author(s) Stahlberg Lesleigh Cushing
Abstract: In an essay in this volume, Ellen Davis contests the predominant scholarly understanding that the Song of Songs gained its place within the canon entirely because the rabbis
misread the book, taking it not as a poem about human love, but as pertaining rather to the love of God and Israel. She contends that this scholarly view represents a misunderstanding, that in fact “the Song was correctly understood by those who accorded it a place among Israel’s Scriptures.”¹ Thus, in Davis’s view, the Song “really is, in large part, about the love that obtains between God and Israel—or, more
Book Title: Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Burrell David B.
Abstract: How do Catholic intellectuals draw on faith in their work? And how does their work as scholars influence their lives as people of faith?For more than a generation, the University of Dayton has invited a prominent Catholic intellectual to present the annual Marianist Award Lecture on the general theme of the encounter of faith and profession. Over the years, the lectures have become central to the Catholic conversation about church, culture, and society.In this book, ten leading figures explore the connections in their own lives between the private realms of faith and their public calling as teachers, scholars, and intellectuals.This last decade of Marianist Lectures brings together theologians and philosophers, historians, anthropologists, academic scholars, and lay intellectuals and critics.Here are Avery Cardinal Dulles, S.J., on the tensions between faith and theology in his career; Jill Ker Conway on the spiritual dimensions of memory and personal narrative; Mary Ann Glendon on the roots of human rights in Catholic social teaching; Mary Douglas on the fruitful dialogue between religion and anthropology in her own life; Peter Steinfels on what it really means to be a liberal Catholic; and Margaret O'Brien Steinfels on the complicated history of women in today's church. From Charles Taylor and David Tracy on the fractured relationship between Catholicism and modernity to Gustavo Gutirrez on the enduring call of the poor and Marcia Colish on the historic links between the church and intellectual freedom, these essays track a decade of provocative, illuminating, and essential thought. James L. Heft, S.M., is President and Founding Director of the Institute for Advanced Catholic Studies and University Professor of Faith and Culture and Chancellor, University of Dayton. He has edited Beyond Violence: Religious Sources for Social Transformation in Judaism, Christianity, and Islam (Fordham).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06dp
INTRODUCTION from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) HEFT JAMES L.
Abstract: Nearly a decade ago, the first volume of Marianist Award lectures appeared in print.¹ In the preface to that volume, I explained how the University of Dayton, founded by the Marianists (Society of Mary) in 1850, had been giving since 1950 an annual award to a leading Mariologist. Some years after the Second Vatican Council, during a period when many Marian practices fell into desuetude, so did the granting of this annual award. However, the commitment of the university to the support and continued development of its Marian Library remained firm. For example, the leaders of the university and of
CHAPTER 3 Forms of Divine Disclosure from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) TRACY DAVID
Abstract: third, the separation of theory and practice.
CHAPTER 7 A Feeling for Hierarchy from:
Believing Scholars: Ten Catholic Intellectuals
Author(s) DOUGLAS MARY
Abstract: To receive the Marianist Award is a great honor. For the occasion I am asked to say something about the influence of my religious faith on my work, or about the interaction of one with the other. This is perhaps a straightforward assignment for a person whose work has been involved with the direction of public affairs. But it is less easy for an anthropologist, partly because it means delving into fairly intimate thoughts as you will see, and partly because of this particular religion, the Roman Catholic faith.
Book Title: The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: The book provides a series of approaches to the ancient question of whether and how God is a matter of experience,or, alternately, to what extent the notion of experience can be true to itself if it does not include God. On the one hand, it seems impossible to experience God: the deity does not offer Himself to sense experience. On the other hand, there have been mystics who have claimed to have encountered God. The essays in this collection seek to explore the topic again, drawing insights from phenomenology, theology, literature, and feminism. Throughout, this stimulating collection maintains a strong connection with concrete rather than abstract approaches to God.The contributors: Michael F. Andrews, Jeffrey Bloechl, John D. Caputo, Kristine Culp, Kevin Hart, Kevin L. Hughes, Jean-Yves Lacoste, Crystal Lucky, Renee McKenzie, Kim Paffenroth, Michael Purcell, Michael J. Scanlon, O.S.A., James K. A. Smith. Kevin Hart is Notre Dame Professor of English and Concurrent Professor of Philosophy at the University of Notre Dame; among his many books are The Trespass of the Sign: Deconstruction, Theology, and Philosophy (Fordham), and The Dark Gaze: Maurice Blanchot and the Sacred. His most recent collection of poems is Flame Tree: Selected Poems. Barbara Wall is Special Assistant to the President for Mission Effectiveness and Associate Professor of Philosophy at Villanova University. She is co-editor of The Journal of Catholic Social Thought and The Journal of Peace and Justice Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06gq
11 Faith Seeking Understanding: from:
The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) ANDREWS MICHAEL F.
Abstract: Similar to many contemporary postmodern philosophers, the phenomenologist Edith Stein rejected certain “modernist assumptions” concerning the human self and the self’s experience of God. Although she did not live to participate in contemporary discussions on modernism,¹ I submit that Stein would, in fact, be quite sympathetic to several postmodern philosophical trends. In this essay, I shall describe how Edith Stein rejects an Enlightenment view of the self in a manner similar to that of Jean-Luc Marion. I will also show how Stein, like Marion, remains genuinely committed to the apophatic tradition, drawing effortlessly on the negative theological imagery of Dionysius
12 The Twilight of the Idols and the Night of the Senses from:
The Experience of God: A Postmodern Response
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: The question of experience of God may be taken to respond to the thought that experience of God has become questionable. Heard in this way, the question summons the idea that what we call “God” is in fact not God, whether this is taken to mean simply that there is no God or that God is somehow other or more than what we say. The fact that the experience of God can be the theme of questioning and inquiry thus informs us that reflection on the experience of God is always accompanied by doubt, whether this doubt is only the
Introduction: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: What has happened to “religion” in its present and increasingly public manifestation, propelled by global media, economic markets, and foreign policies as much as by resistance to them? How should we understand the worldwide tendencies toward the simultaneous homogenization
andpluralization of our social and cultural practices, that is to say, of our individual and shared forms and ways of life? To answer these questions, we must interrogate a complex and shifting semantic, axiological, and imaginative archive, whose historical origins and modern disseminations have pragmatic ramifications for burning contemporary issues of the political (le politique) and politics (la politique), of
Politics and Finitude: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Pranger M. B.
Abstract: If, generally speaking, readers’ and writers’ attitudes toward the autobiographical genre can be characterized as naïve in that they take for granted the sincerity of the author, it is even harder for historians to be professionally effective without taking their products to be authentic reflections of time. There is a sense, however, in which histories of the state, histories of the church, and, indeed, histories of great institutions at large are so many contradictions in terms, at least if state and church are taken—as they are bound to be—to be bodies whose temporal existence transcends the moment, to
On the Names of God from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Laclau Ernesto
Abstract: God is nameless for no one can either speak of him or know him. . . . Accordingly, if I say that “God is good,” this is not true. I am good, but God is not good! In fact, I would rather say that I am better than God, for what is good can become better and what can become better can become the best! Now God is not good, and so he cannot become better, he cannot become the best. These three are far from God: “good,” “better,” “best,” for he is wholly transcendent. . . . Also you
Prepolitical Moral Foundations of a Free Republic from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Nguyen Anh
Abstract: In the acceleration of the tempo of historical developments in which we live, two factors, it seems to me, stand out above all others as characteristics of a development that, earlier, began only slowly. The first is the formation of a world society in which individual political, economic, and cultural powers depend, more and more, on each other, and come into contact and permeate each other in their different spheres of life. The other is the development of man’s possibilities, of his power to make and to destroy, possibilities that, exceeding everything to which we have previously been accustomed, raise
Saint John: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Scherer Matthew
Abstract: JOHN RAWLS IS A SAINT. In the words of Amy Gutmann, who remarked, when delivering his eulogy, that she felt “privileged to have lived in his time,” Rawls was “saintly as well as wise.”¹ Within certain communities of political theorists, such sentiment appears to be widespread, as is evident from expressions of personal admiration in the wake of Rawls’s death. The general fact of this sentiment presents a number of problems, not only for a highly private man who by all accounts went to great lengths to avoid celebrity, let alone sainthood, but also for secular liberals who share in
Reinhabiting Civil Disobedience from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Singh Bhrigupati
Abstract: To clarify it again, what, then, is the difference between religion and philosophy? A core distinction would be that the latter can subsist without a conception of the divine. In other words, philosophy does not necessitate a conception of another, higher world, with which to slander or to beautify, or to authorize its work in this world. It need not traffic in super-earthly hopes. Of what consequence then, is this emergent conception of a “post-secular” world where it is religion that is (so much stronger? or only more distinctly?) an intervening force in the practical affairs of this world, enmeshed
The Figure of the Abducted Woman: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Das Veena
Abstract: Writing in 1994, Gyanendra Pandey, the well-known historian of the subaltern, took the neglect of the Partition in the social sciences and in Indian public culture to be a symptom of a deep malaise.¹ Historical writing in India, he argued, was singularly uninterested in the popular construction of Partition, the trauma it produced, and the sharp division between Hindus, Muslims, and Sikhs it left behind. He attributed this blindness to the fact that the historian’s craft has never been particularly comfortable with such matters as “the horror of Partition, the anguish and sorrow, pain and brutality of the ‘riots’ of
Prophetic Justice in a Home Haunted by Strangers: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Prato Bettina
Abstract: What does it mean to practice a peace activism simultaneously rooted in Judaism and in human rights, in a context in which trauma-influenced readings of Jewish identity are invoked to justify violating the rights of other people(s)?¹ How can the language of universal rights be reconciled with a belief in Jewish uniqueness that includes a history of exceptional suffering and a divinely granted claim to a Promised Land inhabited by others? And, most importantly, what are the theoretical and practical consequences of affirming not just the possibility but the need for such reconciliation in the name of Jewish identity itself,
The Agency of Assemblages and the North American Blackout from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Bennett Jane
Abstract: One thing that globalization names is the sense that the “theater of operations” has expanded greatly. Earth is no longer a category for ecology or geology only, but has become a political unit, the whole in which the parts (e.g., finance capital, CO
2emissions, refugees, viruses, pirated DVDs, ozone, human rights, weapons of mass destruction) now circulate. There have been various attempts to theorize this complex, gigantic whole and to characterize the kind of relationality obtaining between its parts. Network is one such attempt, as is Michael Hardt and Antonio Negri’s empire.¹ My term of choice to describe this whole
Automatic Theologies: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Khatib Kate
Abstract: To write about surrealism and theology seems an almost heretical act, on both sides of the equation. Like other Romantic and post-Romantic artistic movements of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, surrealism owes a debt to mysticism and the occult that is already widely acknowledged, as is the occurrence of religious symbolism throughout its corpus. Were these works of art equal to the sum total of the surrealist interventions in the theological realm, there would be little more to discuss. A less cursory inspection reveals, however, that the presentation of surrealism as a fleeting moment in the artistic history
Theoscopy: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Geroulanos Stefanos
Abstract: To be forever seen without seeing back is to succumb to a mercy and grace carved in religious force, to walk in fear and faith of a tremendous power one cannot face. It is to live a paranoid existence of nakedness before a God who is all-seeing, hence omniscient and omnipotent, and who accordingly metes out a social experience and aknowledge of oneself and one’s history that is based on this awareness of being seen. I will name this condition
theoscopy. Widespread from patristic texts to contemporary media artifacts and works of social theory, theoscopy involves the establishment of a
Come On, Humans, One More Effort if You Want to Be Post-Christians! from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Woods Fronza
Abstract: In the spring of 2003, the news came from the diocese of Helsingoer—Hamlet’s country, quite appropriately—that Thorkild Grosboell, a theologian and minister in the Lutheran Church of Denmark, was an atheist. The pastor later retracted, but the fact remains: he had publicly stated that he believed neither in God the creator of the world, nor in the resurrection of Christ, nor in the eternal life of the soul. Mr. Grosboell is my post-Christian hero. I sincerely hope that history will remember his name as that of a pioneer in a new kind of enlightenment. To see the existence
The Right Not to Use Rights: from:
Political Theologies: Public Religions in a Post-Secular World
Author(s) Hamacher Werner
Abstract: The claim that human rights are
rightsand that they are the rights ofhuman beingsmeans two things. First, it means that they apply neither to the empirical totality of a bio- or zoological species nor to any individuals as the privileged (because exemplary) instances of such a species but rather to the human “as such” or “in truth.” Human rights do not define man in his historically contingent appearance, but rather provide an explication of human essence as it presents itself in and of itself after all external attributes have been subtracted. Only human rights present man in
1 The Place of Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Metaphor, that old, anarchical alchemist, transmutes belief into truth, illusion into reality, ignorance into knowledge—only then to turn around and do the opposite. How? She lets unsociable differences cross over to dwell with and interpret one another in order to reveal unsuspected identities—fictional, real, and virtual.¹ Water is one thing, electricity is another; but when Faraday crossed them and saw electricity through hydraulics, a new science was born. Electricity isn’t a fluid and does not flow, yet its dynamics are formally the same as those of water. Sometimes what is seen is an artifact of the metaphor. Waves
5 Deictic Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Plato’s metaphors tend toward the transcendent, but now the matrix must have its due. Deictic images seek out the factical uniqueness that condemns us to live in both truth and untruth, in openness and in concealment. How can this be if, as it is said, Plato is unable to accommodate the
todi ti,the individual? But does Aristotle do better? His solution hinges on the distinction between sensing the individual and, except inphronesis,knowing it as universal, and that gets us nowhere. Can Plato be rescued? Perhaps. The way to the individual is the way of love, but in
7 Aristotle: from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: In the
Gorgias,Plato proposed that sophistry be purged from rhetoric, which could then be fashioned into a dialectical instrument (499A ff) that would incorporate the monstrative and persuasive potentials of metaphor andmythos.¹ In theRepublic(510B), however, he eliminated appeals to sense and its images in the “upward” movement of the dialectic for the sake of an eidetic intuition; on the other hand, we propose to enlist him in the countermovement of deictic metaphor, which discloses form in the fact rather than in an abstract and imageless thinking.² This strange disclosive power is never more apparent than in
8 “To the Things Themselves” from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: We hope to transport metaphor from its usual Aristotelian setting into a Platonic context where the Good, not Being, is supreme. If we are to displace being, what are we displacing? Aside from its vitalistic, durative, and fact-stating senses,
einai(to be) has a locative power, a presence in the present. We shunt these senses over to the matrix, which, though beyond being, gives each being life, duration, a place, a present, and that facticity of a there to a here. “Existence” is not one of the meanings ofeinai. In his important study of the Greek verb “to be,”
13 Otherwise than Metaphor from:
Between Chora and the Good: Metaphor's Metaphysical Neighborhood
Abstract: Thanks to the gifts of the instant that is beyond beings, beings can enter into the rubrics of metaphor, hermeneutics, and participation, all of which share a reflexive structure. In perception, the paradigm case of participation, a form is engendered when the “subject” crosses over and interprets what is actively received. This resembles both the crossings of hermeneutics and metaphor.¹ We must now go beyond these in approaching the Good, though the beyond is always under an ontological pall.
Book Title: Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Heft James L.
Abstract: From the beginning, the Abrahamic faiths-Judaism, Christianity, and Islam-have stressed the importance of transmitting religious identity from one generation to the next. Today, that sustaining mission has never been more challenged. Will young people have a faith to guide them? How can faith traditions anchor religious attachments in this secular, skeptical culture?The fruit of a historic gathering of scholars and religious leaders across three faiths and many disciplines, this important book reports on the religious lives of young people in today's world. It's also a unique inventory of creative and thoughtful responses from churches, synagogues, and mosques working to keep religion a significant force in those lives.The essays are grouped thematically. Opening the book, Melchor Sanchez de Toca and Nancy Ammerman explore fundamental issues that have an impact on religion-from the cultural effects of global consumerism and personal technology to pluralism and individualism. In Part Two, leading investigators present three leading studies of religiosity among young people and college students in the United States, illuminating the gap between personal values and organized religion-and the emergence of new, different forms of spirituality and faith. How religious institutions deal with these challenges forms the heart of the book-in portraits of best practicesdeveloped to revitalize traditional institutions, from a synagogue in New York City and a Muslim youth camp in California to the famed French Catholic community of the late Brother John of Taiz. Finally, Jack Miles and Diane Winston weave the findings into a broader perspective of the future of religious belief, practice, and feeling in a changing world.Filled with real-world wisdom, Passing the Faith will be an essential resource for anyone seeking to understand what religions must, and can, do to inspire a vigorous faith in the next generation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06n9
Looking for God: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) de Toca Melchor Sánchez
Abstract: As we neared the public presentation of the Pontifical Council for Culture’s 2004 research into unbelief, religious indifference, and new forms of alternative religion, I somewhat absentmindedly recited to my secretary a rather detached theoretical analysis of unbelief. Unable to restrain herself, she burst out with her very own story: “My children have lost the faith.” They are good boys, born to a Christian family, whose mother works in the Vatican and is active in the parish. But they no longer go to Mass on Sundays. Indeed, not only do they no longer practice, but quite simply they no longer
Is Moralistic Therapeutic Deism the New Religion of American Youth? from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Smith Christian
Abstract: All human communities face the general challenge of social reproduction—that is, socializing subsequent generations to carry on community identities and practices. Meeting this challenge successfully requires effective practices of socialization, identity formation, role modeling, intergenerational transference of authority, and so on. Many other factors, however, typically play into the success or breakdown of social reproduction, including competing institutional demands and changing social environmental conditions that make passing on a collective way of life over time more or less difficult. Religious communities are only one among many types of human communities that face this general challenge of reproducing themselves in
Congregations That Get It: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Loskota Brie
Abstract: Organized religion in the United States is on the threshold of a seismic shift. Today, religious and community leaders are witnessing a crisis in the transmission of religious memory, practice, and tradition to the next generation. In major urban centers across the United States, there is a generalized perception that individuals in their twenties and early thirties constitute a “black hole” in congregational life. Members of the young-adult population are simply missing from most churches, synagogues, and mosques. Religious and community leaders are given to lamenting about the throngs of young people who are “spiritual but not religious” as a
BJ: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Matalon Rabbi J. Rolando
Abstract: I am pleased to be here to talk about the work that my congregation, located on the Upper West Side of Manhattan in New York City, has been doing for the past eighteen years. Congregation Bnai Jeshurun (BJ) was founded in 1825. Until then, the only synagogue in New York City was a Spanish-Portuguese synagogue, which observed Judaism according to the customs of Sephardic Jews. In 1825, there were enough Eastern European Jews to permit the founding of their own synagogue, where they could observe Judaism according to their own customs. Originally Orthodox, this active and prominent community was eventually
Current Expressions of American Jewish Identity: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Schwadel Philip
Abstract: This chapter explores the characteristics of 114 American teenagers’ Jewish identities using data from the National Study of Youth and Religion (NSYR).¹ The NSYR includes a telephone survey of a nationally representative sample of 3,290 adolescents aged 13 to 17. Jewish teenagers were over-sampled, resulting in a total of 3,370 teenage participants. Of the NSYR teens surveyed, 141 have at least one Jewish parent and 114 of them identify as Jewish. The NSYR also includes in-depth face-to-face interviews with a total of 267 U.S. teens: 23 who have at least one Jewish parent and 18 who identify as Jewish. The
Making Safe Space for Questioning for Young American Muslims from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Quraishi Amira
Abstract: brings Muslim families and individuals of diverse backgrounds together for a fun-filled week of Islamic living, learning and inspirational experiences in nature. By encouraging camaraderie, personal spiritual exploration and respect for diversity of Islamic practice, MYC seeks to be a strong catalyst in the creation
Teach Your Children Well: from:
Passing on the Faith: Transforming Traditions for the Next Generation of Jews, Christians, and Muslims
Author(s) Winston Diane
Abstract: The October 2004 conference, “Faith, Fear and Indifference: Constructing Religious Identity in the Next Generation,” and the subsequent collection of essays based on this gathering confirm this hoped-for outcome. Scholars, theologians and clergy, practitioners
Book Title: Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness traces the reflections of the French philosopher and musicologist Vladimir Jankelevitch on the conditions and temporality of forgiveness in relation to creation, history, and memory. The author demonstrates the influence of Jewish and Christian thought on Jankelevitch's philosophy and compares his ideas about the gift character of forgiveness, the role of retributive emotions in conceptions of justice, and the limits of reason with those of Aristotle, Butler, Kant, Kierkegaard, Nietzsche, Scheler, Arendt, Derrida, Levinas, and Ricoeur. The Shoah was the pivotal historical event in Jankelevitch's life. As this book shows, Jankelevitch's question "Is forgiveness possible as a response to evil?" remains a potent philosophical conundrum today. Paradoxically, for Jankelevitch, evil is both the impetus and the obstacle to forgiveness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06pt
2 Apophatic Approaches from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Forgiveness, for Vladimir Jankélévitch, is simple. It is almost nothing (
presque rien). For this reason, he approaches the topic of forgiveness apophatically. As he writes, “The élan of forgiveness is so impalpable, so debatable, that it discourages all attempts at analysis.” He sees no points of contact or solid ground “in this fleeting shock, in this imperceptible flickering of charity” that would make a philosophical discourse possible. The negative method he adopts, therefore, primarily takes account of the “empirical substitutes for metaempirical forgiveness [or] the natural forms of supernatural forgiveness.” About these he has a vast amount to say.¹ To
3 The Temporality of Human Existence and Action from:
Vladimir Jankelevitch: The Time of Forgiveness
Abstract: Irreversibility, irrevocability, and imprescriptibility relate to each other as the natural to the ethical to the legal. In a sense, these terms represent a progression of an idea, moving from one category to another, sharpening and narrowing its scope in the procession from nature to ethics to the legal and juridical domains. The idea driving these notions is that of time or, more precisely, the temporal constitution of human affairs. Temporality forms the core of each of these terms individually and in their interrelation. Time is irreversible and subjects all things to its one-way directedness; free will and action take
Book Title: The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de Bolla Peter
Abstract: The Architecture of Concepts proposes a radically new way of understanding the history of ideas. Taking as its example human rights, it develops a distinctive kind of conceptual analysis that enables us to see with precision how the concept of human rights was formed in the eighteenth century. The first chapter outlines an innovative account of concepts as cultural entities. The second develops an original methodology for recovering the historical formation of the concept of human rights based on data extracted from digital archives. This enables us to track the construction of conceptual architectures over time. Having established the architecture of the concept of human rights, the book then examines two key moments in its historical formation: the First Continental Congress in 1775 and the publication of Tom Paine's Rights of Man in 1792. Arguing that we have yet to fully understand or appreciate the consequences of the eighteenth-century invention of the concept "rights of man," the final chapter addresses our problematic contemporary attempts to leverage human rights as the most efficacious way of achieving universal equality
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x06zz
CHAPTER 4 “The Rights of Man Were but Imperfectly Understood at the Revolution”: from:
The Architecture of Concepts: The Historical Formation of Human Rights
Abstract: Any historical account of the concept of human rights in the eighteenth century must negotiate the reputation of Thomas Paine’s
Rights of Man, for, whatever else may be said or believed about this book, it is incontrovertible that Paine’s counterblast to Edmund Burke’sReflections on the Revolution in Francehas had a very energetic afterlife. Claims on its behalf—as to its notoriety, the number of readers it attracted, and the corresponding number of copies either sold or printed—have been extravagant: It is not uncommon to see figures in the millions as indices to its readership.¹ Although at the
Enabling God from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this essay—“Enabling God”—can be read both ways. God enabling us, us enabling God. As such, it affirms the freedom that characterizes our relationship to the divine as a mutual act of giving. So doing, it challenges traditional concepts of God as omnipotence. The notion of an all-powerful, autonomous, and self-sufficient deity has a long history ranging from the self-thinking-thought of Aristotelian ontology to the self-subsisting-act (
ipsum esse subsistens) or self-causing-cause (ens causa sui) of medieval scholasticism and modern rationalism (Spinoza, Leibniz). It is a powerful lineage pertaining to a powerful concept of a powerful God.
Hermeneutics and the God of Promise from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) WESTPHAL MEROLD
Abstract: In
The God Who May Be, Richard Kearney has given us a gift whose power to provoke thought is out of proportion to its small size. Its opening sentences read as follows: “God neither is nor is not but may be. That is my thesis in this volume. What I mean by this is that God, who is traditionally thought of as act or actuality, might better be rethought as possibility. To this end I am proposing here a new hermeneutics of religion which explores and evaluates two rival ways of interpreting the divine—theeschatologicaland theonto-theological.”¹
Is the Possible Doing Justice to God? from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) JANICAUD DOMINIQUE
Abstract: I hope He will forgive me nevertheless, for speaking
ofHim in this chapter, taking into account the fact that this is a reply to a friend of mine whom I like and sincerely admire. Long before Heidegger asked, “How does the deity
Christianity and Possibility from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: We do not yet know what it means to speak of the death of God, and not only because those who speak of it do not always have the same thing in mind. The simplest controversy is also the weightiest, and still the most painful: Is it only a persistent idol that dies, or must it be religion itself, as the practice of idolatry? Do the fires of suspicion only purify, or do they consume everything that touches them? What religion, if any, survives the fever of Sils Maria and Turin?
Divine Metaxology from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) OLTHUIS JAMES
Abstract: Richard Kearney is a possibility thinker, a philosopher, novelist, and poet fired by a passion for/of God. For Kearney, philosophy links imagination and affectivity with reason in a rhetoric of persuasion aiming for individual and societal transfiguration. In other words, as I read him, philosophy is not an abstract-theoretical exercise dedicated to getting things straight, finding solutions for particular theoretic problems. Rather, for Kearney, philosophy is a way of life, a spiritual exercise¹ working toward the incitement of passion for visionary transformation and cultural change rather than the elaboration of grand systems and the elimination of paradoxes. Indeed, it is
Prosopon and Icon: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) MANOUSSAKIS JOHN PANTELEIMON
Abstract: Aristotle, in distinguishing between actuality (ἐνέργεια) and possibility (δύναμις), undertook two crucial steps that have haunted the history of Western metaphysics ever since: he gave a qualitative priority to actuality over potency, and then he identified the former with pure essence. Possibility, for Aristotle, is a mode that denotes transition and corruption, and thus imperfection. However, the risk that he acknowledges and fears most is that potency is ambiguous and undecidable. In his words, “the possible could be both a being and a non-being … it could equally be both things and neither” (1050b10, 1051a1). It is this
coincidentia oppositorum
Desire of God: from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Kearney: Derrida’s own response to the postmodern dilemma of undecidability would seem to be twofold—
believeandread! In spite of our inability to know for sure “who speaks” behind the many voices and visages that float before us—now present, now absent; now here, now elsewhere—Derrida tells us that we must continue to trust and have faith. “Je ne sais pas, il faut croire,” as the refrain ofMemoirs of the Blindgoes. But if our belief is blind, and each moment of faithful decision terrifying, Derrida suggests that we can always be helped by the vigilant practice
Hermeneutics of Revelation from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: Kearney: There are many similarities between your work, Jean-Luc, and mine: we both owe a great deal of our philosophical formation to the phenomenologies of Husserl and Heidegger; we have both engaged ourselves in close dialogue with Levinas, Ricoeur, and Derrida. Given these evident similarities, it would be more fruitful and interesting, it seems to me, if we take a look here into some of the
differencesin our respective positions in regard to the phenomenology of God. One question that I would like to put to you, Jean Luc, and which, in fact, I have put in a more
Kearney’s Endless Morning from:
After God: Richard Kearney and the Religious Turn in Continental Philosophy
Author(s) KELLER CATHERINE
Abstract: In at least two registers—one of genre and one of doctrine—Richard Kearney’s philosophical theology appears suddenly and luminously at the forefront of theology itself. In other words, it invokes a “possible God,” and thus a possible theology. Theology has wanted the fully actual, active God, however, not a possible one—and so has generated an impossible one. The possible God suggests a third space, indeed a certain kind of
posseof theology itself, a “paradox of future anteriority” (Kearney’s Levinas) for a freshly Christian sense of eschatological possibility. Responding to his work mainly by way of his Villanova
Book Title: The Relevance of Royce- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Jones Jude
Abstract: This collection represents the rediscovery of Josiah Royce's rich legacy that has occurred over the past decade. The first part presents a series of historical explorations. The second takes up practical extensions of Royce's work, bringing his ideas and methods to bear on contemporary philosophical matters. Among the topics addressed are the paradoxes of individualism; loyalty, democracy, and community; Royce's efforts to respond to historical American racism; his contributions to engaged inter-faith religious discourse; the promise of his theory of error for a feminist account of knowledge; and his ethics of loyalty as a component in medical ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x07ns
ONE JOSIAH ROYCE: from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) McDermott John J.
Abstract: As this is a banquet talk, or as I prefer an “Address at the Banquet,” I take the liberty of beginning with acts of gratitude. Although the scholarly works on Josiah Royce do not match the girth of those devoted to the philosophy of William James,
FIVE LOYALTY, FRIENDSHIP, AND TRUTH: from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Shew Melissa
Abstract: While scholarly attention has been paid to the influence of German idealism on the thought of Josiah Royce, few scholars have examined the relationship between Royce and Greek philosophy. When sustained attention has been given to this relationship, the focus has been on connections between Plato and Royce.¹ It is undeniable, however, that Royce also engaged the thought of Aristotle throughout his philosophical career.² In fact, some of his earliest writings, from his undergraduate days at the University of California at Berkeley, attest to Royce’s interest in Aristotle. “The Aim of Poetry” (1875) and “The Life-Harmony” (1875) are short essays,
TEN ENLIGHTENED PROVINCIALISM, OPEN-ENDED COMMUNITIES, AND LOYALTY-LOVING INDIVIDUALS: from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Green Judith M.
Abstract: An important aspect of the relevance of Royce’s philosophical vision for the twenty-first century grows from the great potential of his three-part progressive prescription for democratic cultural transformation—enlightened provincialism, open-ended communities, and loyalty-loving individuals—if all three parts are developed together and interactively. This will not be easy: Many forces and habits within American society and other nations and cultures to which we are closely linked by economy, communications media, productive and transportive technologies, and ways of living have profoundly antidemocratic implications.¹ Nonetheless, with some critical modifications to reflect subsequent social and technological developments, Royce’s three-part prescription is both
FOURTEEN COMMUNITIES IN PURSUIT OF COMMUNITY from:
The Relevance of Royce
Author(s) Mahowald Mary B.
Abstract: As a philosophy graduate student in the 1960s, I was struck by the statement of Royce that his entire philosophy was encapsulated in his conception of community. Initially, my interest was sparked by the fact that I lived in a small community, and the term, as I understood it, identified an appealing ideal of how human beings in general might live or aspire to live together. I also thought, perhaps naively, that this ideal could be practically implemented, at least in part. So I wrote my dissertation on Royce, tracking how a pragmatic element intertwined with idealism in the development
Introduction from:
Committing the Future to Memory: History, Experience, Trauma
Abstract: In the preface to the second edition of the
Science of Logic, Hegel refers to “the peculiar restlessness and distraction of our modern consciousness.”¹ Although the tone of this statement makes it sound like something to be avoided or at any rate minimized, a moment’s reflection tells us that for Hegel, it is one of modernity’s irreducible and most definitive components. Superficial though it may be, restlessness is nonetheless also the forerunner of negativity, what he calls elsewhere the “seriousness, the suffering, the patience and work of the negative.”² Finally, for Hegel, this restlessness is the active dimension without which
Book Title: Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: Theology usually appears to us to be dogmatic, judgmental, condescending, maybe therapeutic, or perhaps downright fantastical-but seldom enticing. Divine Enticement takes as its starting point that the meanings of theological concepts are not so much logical, truth-valued propositions-affirmative or negative-as they are provocations and evocations. Thus it argues for the seductiveness of both theology and its subject-for, in fact, infinite seduction and enticement as the very sense of theological query. The divine name is one by which we are drawn toward the limits of thought, language, and flesh. The use of language in such conceptualization calls more than it designates. This is not a flaw or a result of vagueness or imprecision in theological language but rather marks the correspondence of such language to its subject: that which, outside of or at the limit of our thought, draws us as an enticement to desire, not least to intellectual desire. Central to the text is the strange semiotics of divine naming, as a call on that for which there cannot be a standard referent. The entanglement of sign and body, not least in interpretations of the Christian incarnation, both grounds and complicates the theological abstractions. A number of traditional notions in Christian theology are reconceived here as enticements, modes of drawing the desires of both body and mind: faith as "thinking with assent"; sacraments as "visible words" read in community; ethics as responsiveness to beauty; prayer as the language of address; scripture as the story of meaning-making. All of these culminate in a sense of a call to and from the purely possible, the open space into which we can be enticed, within which we can be divinely enticing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x08ps
1 Seductive Epistemology: from:
Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: There appears to be a curious incompatibility between seduction and any proper sort of epistemology.
Knowledge, with its firm and enduring grasp of true facts and its carefully maintained distance from opinion, seems clearly opposed both to the reserve, mystery, and elusive play of seduction and to theunknowing in the face of the infinite by which even slightly apophatic theology is not inaptly characterized. When we try to think the divine or the sacred, we think that reserve and mystery; perhaps we also think of origin or ground, of joy or ecstasy, or of the world newly revealed as
3 Because Being Here Is So Much: from:
Divine Enticement: Theological Seductions
Abstract: The very notion of seductive ethics is likely to give us pause, to seem more error than paradox. Ethics is more often than not conceived as the very resistance to seduction, if not in fact to any sort of pleasure (or bliss, which seems to undermine the ethical subject).¹ It is dutiful, we think, a little bit ascetic (provided we don’t overly enjoy our asceticism), rule-bound or abstemiously virtuous. And if seduction is about sustaining the possible, then to prescribe, whether character or behavior, seems contradictory to it. But the prescriptions of ethics are not always a matter of foreclosure;
THREE Girl Powered: from:
Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: Recently we’ve seen a growing fascination with girls and wolves, whether it is the virgin high-schooler Bella Swan from
Twilight, whose best friend turns out to be a werewolf, or sixteen-year-old virgin Katniss Everdeen fromThe Hunger Games, who hunts and kills wild dogs and other wild animals to feed her family and to have meat to trade for supplies, and is eventually chased by and forced to kill mutant wolves during the Hunger Games.¹ The title character ofHannais another hunting virgin, trained by her father to fend for herself.² Indeed, all of these girls are tough as
FOUR Rearview Mirror: from:
Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: If we interpret deconstruction as a form of translation as transference, we have moved into the territory of psychoanalysis. Indeed, if poetic majesty acts to unseat sovereign majesty through the cut that carries with it rebirth, as in the story of Little Red Riding Hood, then psychoanalysis may be the discourse best equipped for articulating the dynamics of this wound that is also a source of life. In other words, psychoanalysis may provide the tools with which to analyze the thorny relationship between violence and life, particularly through the concepts of death drive and sublimation. Returning to our violent girls,
FIVE Elephant Autopsy: from:
Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: Derrida asks us to read (hear) his seminar
The Beast and the Sovereignas a fable, similar to the fables of La Fontaine that punctuates the text. Just as La Fontaine’s fables often employ two (or more) characters—animals—to teach us lessons about political power, the seminar is the story of two characters—two animals—the beast and the sovereign, engaged in a life-and-death struggle, in which the sovereign turns out to be the more beastly of the two. If Derrida’sBeastis a fable, we might ask, what is its moral? What lessons are we to learn from
SIX Deadly Devices: from:
Technologies of Life and Death: From Cloning to Capital Punishment
Abstract: Can animals be sentenced to death? Can they be assassinated, or become victims of genocide? Certainly in our common parlance, these dubious rights are reserved for man; murder, assassination, genocide, and the death penalty are proper to man alone. Even in death, we insist upon separating ourselves from the animals. Yet our practices suggest otherwise. Animals are regularly killed for “crimes” committed against humans. For example, recently in Switzerland a swan was killed for trying to drown a swimmer by sitting on him; and dogs are regularly “put down” if they are considered dangerous. Unlike humans, however, usually animals are
Book Title: Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Lee Kyoo
Abstract: Focusing on the first four images of the Other mobilized in Descartes' Meditations--namely, the blind, the mad, the dreamy, and the bad--Reading Descartes Otherwise casts light on what have heretofore been the phenomenological shadows of "Cartesian rationality." In doing so, it discovers dynamic signs of spectral alterity lodged both at the core and on the edges of modern Cartesian subjectivity. Calling for a Copernican reorientation of the very notion "Cartesianism," the book's series of close, creatively critical readings of Descartes' signature images brings the dramatic forces, moments, and scenes of the cogito into our own contemporary moment. The author patiently unravels the knotted skeins of ambiguity that have been spun within philosophical modernity out of such cliches as "Descartes, the abstract modern subject" and "Descartes, the father of modern philosophy"--a figure who is at once everywhere and nowhere. In the process, she revitalizes and reframes the legacy of Cartesian modernity, in a way more mindful of its proto-phenomenological traces.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0b2f
PREAMBLE II Descartes Needs Rereading from:
Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: My mind seems to have been actively suspended by certain constantly slippery gaps and cinematic interplays between the memory of my own first unschooled encounter with Descartes, the shock of the
Meditations(1641) on the one hand, and the usual scholarly scenes of interpretation, or scholastic “filters” around that philosophical time bomb, on the other. As John Carriero put it,
SCENE 2 Elastic Madness: from:
Reading Descartes Otherwise: Blind, Mad, Dreamy, and Bad
Abstract: In the four-page opening passage of chapter 2 of the
History of Madness¹ and later in the essay “My Body, This Paper, This Fire,”² Michel Foucault launched a point-by-point self-defense against Derrida. Previously, in his forty-six page essay “TheCogitoand the History of Madness,”³ Derrida had pointed to some traces of Cartesianism ironically but unwittingly enacted by Foucault.
TWO ENLIGHTENING THOUGHT: from:
Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: The imagination is notoriously difficult to define.¹ Indeed, this difficulty may explain the fact that prior to the Enlightenment there was no attempt to develop a unified theory of the imagination. In the history of ancient Greek philosophy, its amorphous character contributed to its being treated in two distinct, albeit related, ways. On the one hand, imagination was defined in terms of inspired artistic expression, outside the realm of explanation and description. On the other, it was described as a mysterious mental faculty that somehow accomplished the impossible, bridging the divide between the world of sensation and the world of
SIX ONTOLOGY AND IMAGINATION: from:
Thinking Through the Imagination: Aesthetics in Human Cognition
Abstract: During the 1880s, Peirce employed the triadic nature of thought to ground his budding cosmology. As Karl-Otto Apel suggests, it was during this time (particularly in 1885) that Peirce developed a “metaphysics of evolution.”¹ Peirce’s attempt to expose a continuous relation among the three aspects of human thought becomes a desire to unify three realms of being. He comes to reassert the necessary connection between epistemology and ontology. Just as Kant’s discussion of imagination and reflective judgment in 1792 leads him to speculate on the topics of time and purposive nature, Peirce’s examination of the triadic character of logic and
Book Title: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy
Abstract: Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics presents a decade of thought about the origins and possibilities of political theory from one of contemporary Italy's most prolific and engaging political theorists, Roberto Esposito. He has coined a number of critical concepts in current debates about the past, present, and future of biopolitics-from his work on the implications of the etymological and philosophical kinship of community (communitas) and immunity (immunitas) to his theorizations of the impolitical and the impersonal. Taking on interlocutors from throughout the Western philosophical tradition, from Aristotle and Augustine to Weil, Arendt, Nancy, Foucault, and Agamben, Esposito announces the eclipse of a modern political lexicon-"freedom," "democracy," "sovereignty," and "law"-that, in its attempt to protect human life, has so often produced its opposite (violence, melancholy, and death). Terms of the Political calls for the opening of political thought toward a resignification of these and other operative terms-such as "community," "immunity," "biopolitics," and "the impersonal"-in ways that affirm rather than negate life. An invaluable introduction to the breadth and rigor of Esposito's thought, the book will also welcome readers already familiar with Esposito's characteristic skill in overturning and breaking open the language of politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bdm
MELANCHOLY AND COMMUNITY from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: What kind of relationship exists between these two terms? Is there something essentially “common” in melancholy, and does melancholy have something to do with the very form of community? The answer that the literature on melancholy has offered has often been negative. Within both its pathological interpretation as a sickness of the body and spirit and its positive one as genial exceptionality, melancholy has generally been situated as not only different from community but actually in opposition to it. Indeed, we might say that for much of the interpretative tradition, and most markedly within sociological inquiry, melancholic man has been
IMMUNITARY DEMOCRACY from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: Does the term
communityrefer to democracy? Might it, or is it too profoundly rooted in the conceptual lexicon of the romantic, authoritarian, and racist Right? This question, first posed in the context of American neocommunitarianism, is emerging once again in Europe, above all in France and Italy, as we venture a new thought about community. This question is not only legitimate but in certain ways quite unavoidable at a time when democratic culture is interrogating its own theoretical mandates and its own future. However, this doesn’t change the fact that the question is incorrect in its very formulation, or
IMMUNIZATION AND VIOLENCE from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: In an essay dedicated to Kant as an interpreter of the Enlightenment, Michel Foucault identifies the task of contemporary philosophy in a certain kind of attitude. It has to do with our strained relationship to the present that he calls the “ontology of actuality.” What does he mean? What does it mean to place philosophy at the point, or on the line, in which actuality reveals itself in all the richness of its historicity? What exactly does
ontology of actualitymean? First of all, the expression implies a shift of the gaze inward, toward ourselves. Situating ourselves ontologically within the
COMMUNITY AND VIOLENCE from:
Terms of the Political: Community, Immunity, Biopolitics
Abstract: Humankind has always seen community and violence as inherently related. Such a relation is, in fact, at the heart of the most important expressions of culture across history, be they of art, literature, or philosophy. The first graffiti etched in prehistoric grottoes depicted the human community through scenes of violence (hunting, sacrifice, battles). So too would war be the theme of the first great poem of Western civilization. Almost all world literatures, from the Hebrew to the Egyptian to the Indian, open with interhuman conflict and its images of violence and death to confirm for us a connection between community
Book Title: Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Waldmeir John C.
Abstract: The metaphor of the Church as a bodyhas shaped Catholic thinking since the Second Vatican Council. Its influence on theological inquiries into Catholic nature and practice is well-known; less obvious is the way it has shaped a generation of Catholic imaginative writers. Cathedrals of Bone is the first full-length study of a cohort of Catholic authors whose art takes seriously the themes of the Council: from novelists such as Mary Gordon, Ron Hansen, Louise Erdrich, and J. F. Powers, to poets such as Annie Dillard, Mary Karr, Lucia Perillo, and Anne Carson, to the Pulitzer Prize-winning playwright John Patrick Shanley. Motivated by the inspirational yet thoroughly incarnational rhetoric of Vatican II, each of these writers encourages readers to think about the human body as a site-perhaps the most important site-of interaction between God and human beings. Although they represent the body in different ways, these late-twentieth-century Catholic artists share a sense of its inherent value. Moreover, they use ideas and terminology from the rich tradition of Catholic sacramentality, especially as it was articulated in the documents of Vatican II, to describe that value. In this way they challenge the Church to take its own tradition seriously and to reconsider its relationship to a relatively recent apologetics that has emphasized a narrow view of human reason and a rigid sense of orthodoxy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0bn7
Introduction: from:
Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: It is as clear for the writers to be discussed here as it was for Leo XIII that, when one brings the strongest attributes of imaginative literature to bear directly upon Catholic faith and practice, liturgy becomes the primary site of interaction. Moreover, when that literature is dedicated to representing the body, the possibilities for a sustained and compelling correspondence increase significantly. During the drama of the Mass, individual bodies join symbolically and actually with each other and with the body of Christ. As the novelist Ron Hansen says, Catholics
1. Discovering the Body: from:
Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: Because the panegyric discourse of Vatican II strives to embrace such a broad vision of the Church, it tends to laud the social dimension of the faith. Of course, Catholicism has a long and rich tradition of social engagement. Nevertheless, this council emphasized the tradition in new ways. Consider that the Tridentine Profession of Faith in 1564 had characterized the Church as not only “holy, catholic, and apostolic” but also as “mother and teacher.”¹ It had insisted that salvation depended upon “true obedience” to one individual: “the Roman pontiff, successor of the blessed Peter, chief of the apostles, and vicar
4. Clothing Bodies/Making Priests: from:
Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: There is a scene in J. F. Powers’ 1988 novel,
Wheat That Springeth Green, in which the protagonist, Father Joe Hackett, is watching television in one of his favorite positions: reclined in a Barcalounger with drink in hand. His attention is evenly divided between what he sees on the screen and what he is hearing from his new curate, Father Bill Schmidt, who is trying to hold a conversation with him about fundraising. When the sudden appearance of a commercial for breakfast cereal captures Father Hackett’s eye, he sits up and studies the action in the ad. He then remarks
6. The Body “As It Was”: from:
Cathedrals of Bone: The Role of the Body in Contemporary Catholic Literature
Abstract: On 22 January 2004, Peggy Noonan, columnist and contributing editor to the
Wall Street Journal, recounted her efforts to report accurately papal reaction to the year’s most popular artistic work about the human body by a Catholic: Mel Gibson’s filmThe Passion of the Christ. “My December 17 column,” Noonan wrote, “reported that Pope John Paul II had seen Mel Gibson’s movie on the crucifixion of Christ,The Passion, and had offered a judgment on it: ‘It is as it was.’” That quote,” Noonan went on to explain, “came from the film’s producer, Steve McEveety, who told me that it
Book Title: Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: What is strange? Or better, who is strange? When do we encounter the strange? We encounter strangers when we are not at home: when we are in a foreign land or a foreign part of our own land. From Freud to Lacan to Kristeva to Heidegger, the feeling of strangeness-das Unheimlichkeit-has marked our encounter with the other, even the other within our self. Most philosophical attempts to understand the role of the Stranger, human or transcendent, have been limited to standard epistemological problems of other minds, metaphysical substances, body/soul dualism and related issues of consciousness and cognition. This volume endeavors to take the question of hosting the stranger to the deeper level of embodied imagination and the senses (in the Greek sense of aisthesis). This volume plays host to a number of encounters with the strange. It asks such questions as: How does the embodied imagination relate to the Stranger in terms of hospitality or hostility (given the common root of hostis as both host and enemy)? How do we distinguish between projections of fear or fascination, leading to either violence or welcome? How do humans sensethe dimension of the strange and alien in different religions, arts, and cultures? How do the five physical senses relate to the spiritual senses, especially the famous sixthsense, as portals to an encounter with the Other? Is there a carnal perception of alterity, which would operate at an affective, prereflective, preconscious level? What exactly do embodied imaginariesof hospitality and hostility entail, and how do they operate in language, psychology, and social interrelations (including racism, xenophobia, and scapegoating)? And what, finally, are the topical implications of these questions for an ethics and practice of tolerance and peace?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0brs
2 Putting Hospitality in Its Place from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: For the past several decades, continental philosophy has exhibited an ongoing concern with what we might call liminal phenomena, among them friendship, the gift, mourning, responsibility, forgiveness, and hospitality. Of course, to call these “phenomena” already begs the question, or at least a question, the question of whether and to what extent these events actually take place. Thinking in the wake of Jacques Derrida it is impossible to ignore, for example, the excess of the call to forgiveness over the sort of forgiveness that actually takes place in concrete situations. In the case of hospitality, this excess is apparent in
3 Things at the Edge of the World from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: Confronted by the snake, an emissary of the strange, D. H. Lawrence is conflicted from the beginning, switching in a trice from fear and hostility to wonder and hospitality. Eventually, he throws a log at the snake, declaring, “And immediately I regretted it. I thought how paltry, how vulgar, what a mean act! I despised myself and the voices of my accursed human education.”
5 The Hospitality of Listening: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) MACKENDRICK KARMEN
Abstract: Among the most promising-seeming possibilities for an ethics linked to theology—always a risky proposition—is that of regarding the world as sacramental. A sacramental sensibility seems, potentially at least, a way to a valuing of some aspects of the world, but not a way particularly welcoming of the strange or the stranger. But fundamental to such a sensibility, I want to argue here, is a discipline of attention, of a carefully open listening, and such an attentiveness in fact requires that we listen to what we do not already understand, what sounds in our ears and appears to our
8 The Null Basis-Being of a Nullity, Or Between Two Nothings: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) CRITCHLEY SIMON
Abstract: At times, reading a classical philosophical text is like watching an ice floe break up during global warming. The compacted cold assurance of a coherent system begins to become liquid and great conceptual pieces break off before your eyes and begin to float free on the sea. To be a reader is to try and either keep one’s footing as the ice breaks up, or to fall in the icy water and drown.
10 Progress in Spirit: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) RUMBLE VANESSA
Abstract: In the penultimate chapter of
Strangers to Ourselves(1989), Julia Kristeva distills the “political and ethical impact of the Freudian breakthrough.”¹ Surfacing at the close of an invigorating cultural (and classically Kristevan) romp through political, literary, and philosophical history, carrying us from dawning awareness of sexual difference (“the first foreigners: women”) to Jewish, Greek, and Roman representations of autochthony and otherness, and finally to Enlightenment thinking on universalism, her remarks on the uncanny in Freud signal our entry into a domain decisively shaped by Kristeva herself: that of politics and psychoanalysis. “The ethics of psychoanalysis implies a cosmopolitanism … of
12 Being, the Other, the Stranger from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: Consider Wittgenstein’s
Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus. Should we
13 Words of Welcome: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) BLOECHL JEFFREY
Abstract: No human or interhuman relationship can be enacted outside of economy; no face can be approached with empty hands and closed home. Recollection in a home open to the Other—hospitality—is the concrete and initial fact of human recollection and separation; it coincides with the Desire for the Other absolutely transcendent.¹
15 Between Mourning and Magnetism: from:
Phenomenologies of the Stranger: Between Hostility and Hospitality
Author(s) YATES CHRISTOPHER
Abstract: Plutarch recounts a scene in the life of the Athenian lawmaker Solon (sixth century BC), when another Greek sage, Anacharsis, has come to visit: “Anacharsis, coming to Athens, knocked at Solon’s door, and told him, that he, being a stranger, was come to be his guest, and contract a friendship with him; and Solon replying, ‘It is better to make friends at home,’ Anacharsis replied, ‘Then you that are at home make friendship with me.’”¹ In his
Les Misérables(1862), Victor Hugo describes the moment in which Jean Valjean, a convict, arrives unexpectedly at the home of Monseigneur Bienvenu, the
FOUR THE BEING OF NATURE: from:
The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: American philosophy has been dominated by the theme of “Nature.”¹ From Edwards to Emerson to Dewey to Dennett, American thought has variously invoked Nature. But to articulate a philosophy of Nature is not thereby to espouse a form of “naturalism.” In fact, philosophies undertaken in the name of “naturalism” seem to have a different temperament than those that begin with the
thoughtof Nature as such. As a theme, “Nature” invites an expansive mood for reflection, while “naturalism” sounds constrictive and combative. “Nature” disposes the mind to musement, “pondering,”theoria, Denken—to becoming Emerson’s “transparent eyeball.” “Naturalism” has something of
FIVE THE HUMAN EROS from:
The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: I wish here to explore the relation between our desire to exist meaningfully through action and the question that this poses for philosophy. My thesis is simple: We are erotic beings. Our Eros, however, is neither divine nor animal. It is distinctively human: We are beings who seek meaning imaginatively through each other, and the locus of this transformative encounter is the community. This model of human nature contrasts with the dominant view in analytic philosophy of humans as “minds” consisting of “states,” as purely “epistemic subjects” whose primary function is thought to lie in generating propositional claims about the
SIX PRAGMATIC IMAGINATION from:
The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: Pragmatism originated as a movement that sought to clarify meaning in terms of action. We recall the phrasing of Peirce’s famous maxim: “Consider what effects, that might conceivably have practical bearings, we conceive the object of our conception to have. Then, our conception of these effects is the whole of our conception of the object.”¹ The effort to clarify this maxim might be said to constitute the subsequent history of pragmatism. Whereas there was a tendency in pragmatism to interpret consequentialism in a positivistic sense, it was systematically avoided by its main developers, Peirce, James, Mead, and Dewey, because they
TWELVE TRICKSTERS AND SHAMANS: from:
The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: This essay is at once an effort to present something of a synopsis of views I have been developing over the past decade as well as to articulate that aspect of them that falls under the area of
aisthēsis, by which I mean the “aesthetic” reconceived as ecstatic, transformative existence.Aisthēsisis a mode of participatory existence in which the immediacy or texture and symbolic depth of the world stand forth with illuminated intensity, defining in its transitory and metamorphic way both world and spirit.¹ It is at once a concrete actualization, a full engagement, an awakening of the world
FOURTEEN BEAUTY AND THE LABYRINTH OF EVIL: from:
The Human Eros: Eco-ontology and the Aesthetics of Existence
Abstract: Among the thinkers of the past century who offer themselves to the future for its reflection, Santayana must stand out as a singular figure, one whose thought is dedicated to the overarching possibility of the spiritual life undertaken without religious faith or metaphysical dogma. Among the throngs that fill the philosophical bestiary of the twentieth century, Santayana may be the one genuine contemplative of note. The majority of doctrines dominant in the century have been directed either toward the goal of action (Marxism, pragmatism, existentialism) or the problem of knowledge, truth, and meaning (pragmaticism, positivism, analytic philosophy, phenomenology). Genuinely contemplative
Book Title: Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kreienbrock Jörg
Abstract: Why do humans get angry with objects? Why is it that a malfunctioning computer, a broken tool, or a fallen glass causes an outbreak of fury? How is it possible to speak of an inanimate object's recalcitrance, obstinacy, or even malice? When things assume a will of their own and seem to act out against human desires and wishes rather than disappear into automatic, unconscious functionality, the breakdown is experienced not as something neutral but affectively--as rage or as outbursts of laughter. Such emotions are always psychosocial: public, rhetorically performed, and therefore irreducible to a "private" feeling. By investigating the minutest details of life among dysfunctional household items through the discourses of philosophy and science, as well as in literary works by Laurence Sterne, Jean Paul, Friedrich Theodor Vischer, and Heimito von Doderer, Kreienbrock reconsiders the modern bourgeois poetics that render things the way we know and suffer them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0c3f
Introduction: from:
Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: This study focuses on the obstinate obtrusiveness of what Martin Heidegger calls
Zeug, a recalcitrant term that so thoroughly defies translation that only colloquial terms give some handle on what Heidegger is after. Often translated by “equipment,” the term is probably better understood as the underlying stuff of everyday life,¹ the tools and equipment that are at one’s disposal. Malicious objects refuse to disappear into their automatic, unconscious functionality and instead remain stubbornly conspicuous. Endowed with agency, these cunning and perfidious intruders into the lifeworld of the subject seem to actively interrupt his or her intentions, unleashing anger and rage
CHAPTER THREE Malicious Objects: from:
Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: On November 29, 1879, the British satirical magazine
Punchreported on a recently published article by the German philosopher and poet Friedrich Theodor Vischer. Earlier that month “Herr Vischer, an eminent authority on Art and Aesthetics,” appalled by the obnoxious behavior of a fellow traveler on a recent train ride, had been “emptying the vials of his wrath … over rude people who lay their dirty foot-coverings on railway cushions in front of him.”¹ What exactly was the cause of Vischer’s rage, which he had meticulously documented in an essay for a Stuttgart newspaper under the title “Podo-Booetism [Podoböotismus], or
CHAPTER FOUR Igniting Anger: from:
Malicious Objects, Anger Management, and the Question of Modern Literature
Abstract: Heimito von Doderer’s 1962 novel
The Merowingians or The Total Family (Die Merowinger oder die totale Familie)begins with a scene in the clinical practice of the psychiatrist Professor Dr. Horn. The patient, Dr. Bachmeyer, describes his ailment: “Rage, Professor. I suffer heavy attacks of rage that are terribly strenuous for me and extremely exhaust me.”¹ Dr. Bachmeyer experiences rage as an exhausting disease that disrupts his psychological as well as physiological health and for this reason seeks treatment in Dr. Horn’s “Neurological and Psychiatrical Clinic” (13). Rage constitutes a pathological deviance from the norm that requires clinical treatment, since
Book Title: Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Statler Matthew
Abstract: The last half century has seen both attempts to demythologize the idea of God into purely secular forces and the resurgence of the language of Godas indispensable to otherwise secular philosophers for describing experience. This volume asks whether pietymight be a sort of irreducible human problematic: functioning both inside and outside religion.S. Clark Buckner works in San Francisco as an artist, critic, and curator. He is the gallery director at Mission 17 and publishes regularly in Artweek and the San Francisco Bay Guardian. He has a Ph.D. in philosophy from Vanderbilt University. Matthew Statler is the Director of Research at the Imagination Lab Foundation in Lausanne, Switzerland. His current research is focused on practical wisdom as it pertains to organizational phenomena such as strategy making and leadership. He also has a Ph.D. in philosophy from Vanderbilt University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0cj5
6 How Does Philosophy Become What It Is? from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Statler Matthew
Abstract: According to Aristotle’s
Metaphysics, the most distinctly unfunny thing about philosophy is the principle of noncontradiction. Indeed, we are encouraged as philosophers to respect this most serious and fundamental principle, namely, that “the same thing cannot at the same time and in the same respect both belong and not belong to the same object.”¹ Aristotle certainly refuses to take the matter lightly, providing eight different proofs and maintaining that the principle holds as a law with absolute psychological as well as ontological governance. With regard to the psychological application of the law, Aristotle insists that our thought and our actions
9 A Touch of Piety: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Naas Michael
Abstract: “When it comes to
Antigone, everything has already been said and we come too late in the game.”¹ So late do we come that it seems presumptuous, if not actually impious, even to try to lend a helping hand, let alone speak with any authority on the work that has already been done or the game that has been played out. Though we can try to forget that we are touching here on an almost sacred work of art, what Hegel called “one of the most sublime, and in every respect most consummate works of art human effort ever produced,”²
12 Those Weeping Eyes, Those Seeing Tears: from:
Styles of Piety: Practicing Philosophy after the Death of God
Author(s) Wyschogrod Edith
Abstract: How can one write an ethics without appearing to command the Other? Is not an ethics always already written from the standpoint of God, as it were? “Do Thou examine the motives upon which thy actions shall be based and act upon a maxim that thou would’st will to become a universal law.” Or, “Assess the outcomes of thy actions and comport thyself accordingly.” More modestly stated, in writing an ethics, one creates a macro, it would seem, a system of keystrokes that is entered into the memory of one’s computer, and then orders, “Execute.” Baudrillard might say playfully that
CHAPTER 1 Breakdown: from:
The Tears of Sovereignty: Perspectives of Power in Renaissance Drama
Abstract: “Theory must move among the events,” Machiavelli writes in a 1503 letter to Piero Soderini. Ten years later, he writes to Soderini again: “… that man is fortunate who harmonizes his procedure with his time, but on the contrary he is not fortunate who in his actions is out of harmony with his time and with the type of its affairs.” The question of time, in relation to sovereignty, is one of Machiavelli’s central preoccupations, and it stayed with him throughout his work. As the philosopher Antonio Negri has shown, time and theory move together in Machiavelli’s thought, particularly in
Book Title: Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Mieszkowski Jan
Abstract: This book is a major new study of the doctrines of productivity and interest in Romanticism and classical political economy. The author argues that the widespread contemporary embrace of cultural historicism and the rejection of nineteenth-century conceptions of agency have hindered our study of aesthetics and politics. Focusing on the difficulty of coordinating paradigms of intellectual and material labor, Mieszkowski shows that the relationship between the imagination and practical reason is crucial to debates about language and ideology.From the Romantics to Poe and Kafka, writers who explore Kant's claim that poetry sets the imagination freediscover that the representational and performative powers of language cannot be explained as the products of a self-governing dynamic, whether formal or material. A discourse that neither reflects nor prescribes the values of its society, literature proves to be a uniquely autonomous praxis because it undermines our reliance on the concept of interest as the foundation of self-expression or self-determination. Far from compromising its political significance, this turns literature into the condition of possibility of freedom. For Smith, Bentham, and Marx, the limits of self-rule as a model of agency prompt a similar rethinking of the relationship between language and politics. Their conception of a linguistic labor that informs material praxis is incompatible with the liberal ideal of individualism. In the final analysis, their work invites us to think about social conflicts not as clashes between competing interests, but as a struggle to distinguish human from linguistic imperatives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0d6g
INTRODUCTION: from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: Contemporary literary criticism is guided by the belief that a human act is best understood by considering the space and time in which it emerges. This idea is powerful in its simplicity, appealing to the notion that more background information is always better. It is less clear whether the assumption of a fundamental connection, if not an outright identity, between origin and purpose is sound for all social or aesthetic phenomena. Can and must the study of
textsproceed by situating them in their cultural and historicalcontexts? If we want to read a nineteenth-century novel, we may take it
ONE The Art of Interest from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: Throughout his oeuvre, Kant focuses on the uncertain relations between universal principles and singular events that threaten to confound the elaboration of a comprehensive model of the mind. One of the central concepts in his account of the (dis)equilibrium of the self is interest, a term that appears at crucial moments in the three
Critiques, but whose very ubiquity has tended to divert attention from its importance. “All my reason’s interest (speculative as well as practical),” explains Kant in theCritique of Pure Reason, “is united in the following three questions: What can I know? What ought I to do?
TWO Breaking the Laws of Language from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The doctrine of productive imagination that informs Kant’s theory of art would appear to complement his discourse on freedom, the cornerstone of the three
Critiques. It is far from obvious, however, whether Kant’s efforts to develop a model of practical human autonomy are in any sense “clarified” by his statement that poetry “sets the imagination free.” A great deal of scholarship on Romanticism has relied, implicitly or explicitly, on the assumption of a substantive connection between creativity and liberty—if not their outright identity—but this position is rarely evaluated by trying to use it as a vantage point from
THREE On the Poetics and Politics of Voice from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The vision of the self that emerges from Kleist’s reading of Kantian ethics differs sharply from the figure of specular self-determination generally associated with Idealist thought. In forcing us to reconsider the assumption that language can be a medium of rational activity, Kleist seems to part company from those inheritors of Kant who accord ultimate primacy to the authority of reason. At the same time, one could argue that Kleist shares with both Kant and the Idealists a sense of the volatile power of literary language and a more general concern with the historical dimensions of artistic creation. It is
FOUR Economics Beyond Interest from:
Labors of Imagination: Aesthetics and Political Economy from Kant to Althusser
Abstract: The last fifteen years have seen an explosion of interest in Adam Smith. In addition to the fact that the success of capitalism is often celebrated in his name, his oeuvre is increasingly heralded as the key to understanding the relations between politics, aesthetics, and economics in the eighteenth century. As research on Smith has moved beyond
The Wealth of NationsandThe Theory of Moral Sentimentsto include his writings on jurisprudence, belles lettres, and even astronomy, it is often suggested that his work is a unique example of an interdisciplinary thought attentive to the demands of both metaphysics
Book Title: Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Anderson Judith H.
Abstract: Judith H. Anderson conceives the intertext as a relation between or among texts that encompasses both Kristevan intertextuality and traditional relationships of influence, imitation, allusion, and citation. Like the Internet, the intertext is a state, or place, of potential expressed in ways ranging from deliberate emulation to linguistic free play. Relatedly, the intertext is also a convenient fiction that enables examination of individual agency and sociocultural determinism. Anderson's intertext is allegorical because Spenser's Faerie Queene is pivotal to her study and because allegory, understood as continued or moving metaphor, encapsulates, even as it magnifies, the process of signification. Her title signals the variousness of an intertext extending from Chaucer through Shakespeare to Milton and the breadth of allegory itself. Literary allegory, in Anderson's view, is at once a mimetic form and a psychic one-a process thinking that combines mind with matter, emblem with narrative, abstraction with history. Anderson's first section focuses on relations between Chaucer's Canterbury Tales and Spenser's The Faerie Queene, including the role of the narrator, the nature of the textual source, the dynamics of influence, and the bearing of allegorical narrative on lyric vision. The second centers on agency and cultural influence in a variety of Spenserian and medieval texts. Allegorical form, a recurrent concern throughout, becomes the pressing issue of section three. This section treats plays and poems of Shakespeare and Milton and includes two intertextually relevant essays on Spenser.How Paradise Lost or Shakespeare's plays participate in allegorical form is controversial. Spenser's experiments with allegory revise its form, and this intervention is largely what Shakespeare and Milton find in his poetry and develop. Anderson's book, the result of decades of teaching and writing about allegory, especially Spenserian allegory, will reorient thinking about fundamental critical issues and the landmark texts in which they play themselves out.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0d91
10. The Antiquities of Fairyland and Ireland from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In our century the words
antiqueandantiquitynormally have a resonance different from what they had for late sixteenth-century readers of Spenser’sFaerie Queene. For us, these words suggest not only age but also antiquation. They signal both the distance of time and that of obsolescence: while something “antique” might be valuable or quaint or interesting, it is not essentially practical or even very useful. This sense of antiquation, which registers a lack of functional relevance, is not unknown to the late sixteenth century or to Spenser, but it is novel and rare rather than usual and standard. It
17. Patience and Passion in Shakespeare and Milton from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: In
King LearandOthello, when Shakespeare’s anguished protagonists memorably invoke patience, they do so with an unwitting irony that plays on the linguistic genealogy of this virtue, on its combination of passion and passivity. More than a half century later, Milton’s poetry recalls the centrality and complexity of Shakespeare’s engagement with patience but goes beyond it to render the traditional significance of this virtue dynamic and revisionary. In the unifying insight of the blind poet, patience becomes action, rather than simply giving way to action or being replaced by it. The traditional binarism of passive endurance and assertive action
19. Spenser and Milton: from:
Reading the Allegorical Intertext: Chaucer, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton
Abstract: Of relatively recent studies of Milton’s poetics, Mindele Anne Treip’s
Allegorical Poetics and the Epic: The Renaissance Tradition to “Paradise Lost”remains, for my purpose, the most historically significant.¹ In the Renaissance, Treip explains, Salutati’s theoretical discussions of poetry anticipate “a practical paradigm of epic allegory of the kind Tasso would evolve, suggesting how the poet may weave together the entire linguistic surface of a poem, along with its narrative substructure, so that ‘all’ in it (‘deeds’, ‘figures’, ‘things’) will hang together in one subtle system as forms of ‘translated’ discourse, together signalling the presence of an underlying Idea or
Book Title: Written Voices, Spoken Signs-Tradition, Performance, and the Epic Text
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: These innovative essays by leading scholars of Homer, oral poetics, and epic invite us to rethink some key concepts for an understanding of traditional epic poetry. Egbert Bakker examines the epic performer's use of time and tense in recounting a past that is alive. Tackling the question of full-length performance of the monumental
Iliad, Andrew Ford considers the extent to which the work was perceived as a coherent whole in the archaic age. John Miles Foley addresses questions about spoken signs and the process of reference in epic discourse, and Ahuvia Kahane studies rhythm as a semantic factor in the Homeric performance. Richard Martin suggests a new range of performance functions for the Homeric simile. And Gregory Nagy establishes the importance of one feature of epic language, the ellipsis. These six essays centered on Homer engage with fundamental issues that are addressed by three essays primarily concerned with medieval epic: those by Franz Bäuml on the concept of fact; by Wulf Oesterreicher on types of orality; and by Ursula Schaefer on written and spoken media. In their Introduction the editors highlight the underlying approach and viewpoints of this collaborative volume.Reviews of this book:"Despite its wide range of topics and approaches, the volume has a clear thematic focus. All contributors seek to leave behind the more formal concerns of past generations of scholars and aim instead at an understanding of orality as that which is (conceptually or actually) close, immediate, or performed. In their joint search for the new picture, classicists, linguists, and medievalists discover a range of different 'oralities'."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x0fd2
CHAPTER 2 Writing the Emperor’s Clothes On: from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) BÄUML FRANZ H.
Abstract: I shall propose the hypothesis that the development of literacy in the Middle Ages went hand in hand with the growing belief in the existence of “facts” as independent entities. Moreover, I shall maintain that this notion of “facts” is dependent on literacy and cannot arise in an oral culture, and I shall argue this using examples from medieval sources. Though I do not necessarily subscribe to a theory of two different “mentalities,” one “oral” and one “literate,” I do contend that the tools with which one thinks affect one’s thinking, that the way in which one thinks has its
CHAPTER 5 Hexameter Progression and the Homeric Hero’s Solitary State from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) KAHANE AHUVIA
Abstract: The poetry of Homer as we have it today is a highly
textualizedverbal artifact. In other words, we come into immediate contact with theIliadandOdysseyas fixed sets of graphic symbols that are independent of any particular performance event, rather than as time-bound sequences of sounds that are unique to their performance context. Many aspects of thistextare indeed unchanging regardless of whether we speak out, or hear the poems, or read them silently. At the same time, we are increasingly aware of what we might call thenontextualaspects of Homer, that is, of the
CHAPTER 6 Similes and Performance from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) MARTIN RICHARD P.
Abstract: The linguist Michel Bréal, better known as a semanticist than Homerist, had been a teacher of Antoine Meillet, the great comparatist who succeeded him in the chair in comparative grammar of the Collège de France.¹ Bréal’s little book
Pour mieux connaître Homèreis actually cited once by Meillet’s student Milman Parry inL’Épithète traditionnelle,to the effect that the fixed epithet provides not only a rest to the singer but also a pause for the audience.² It is not his view on the formula, however, that seems to me an appropriate introduction to this paper, but rather Bréal’s remarks on
CHAPTER 7 Ellipsis in Homer from:
Written Voices, Spoken Signs
Author(s) NAGY GREGORY
Abstract: In the dictionary of Liddell and Scott, the verb
elleipōis defined as (1) leave in, leave behind; (2) leave out, leave undone; (3) fall short, fail.¹ The abstract nounelleipsis,derived from this verb, designates a “leaving out” of something, as we see from the use of the word in a grammatical sense: in Athenaeus 644b, for example, the termelleipsisis applied to
Introduction: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Chiu Monica
Abstract: The eponymous Japanese Canadian protagonist in Mariko Tamaki and Jillian Tamaki’s graphic narrative
Skimis visually contrasted against her blonde-haired, fair-skinned Canadian peers. However, Western-based assumptions of the challenges she faces because of her racial difference are overlooked by many Japanese readers, who find Skim’s image disconcerting in the novel’s Japanese translation. An Orientalist reading of character Chin-kee in Gene Yang’sAmerican Born Chinese—a buck-toothed, yellow-faced high school student speaking pidgin English and sporting a queue in a twenty-first-century classroom—is lost on Chinese students in Mainland China. The irony of Chin-kee’s representation is overlooked by these readers in
2 Asian/American Postethnic Subjectivity in Derek Kirk Kim’s Good as Lily, Same Difference and Other Stories, and Tune from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Hsu Ruth Y.
Abstract: Derek Kirk Kim received the Ignatz in 2003, an award that recognizes promise in new graphic storytellers. The following year, he was given both the prestigious Eisner and Harvey for
Same Difference and Other Stories.¹ In 2007, Kim published Good as Lily, with Jesse Hamm as the illustrator. Then, in 2011, Kim launchedMythomania,a web-based video series that Kim writes and directs and that features amateur actors and that he describes as a parallel universe toTune,a web-based comics series with art by Les McClaine. Andy Go, the name of the main character in both series, experiences similar
3 The Model Minority between Medical School and Nintendo: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Dong Lan
Abstract: At the beginning of the new millennium, Soo-Young Chin, Peter X. Feng, and Josephine Lee discussed the increasing visibility of Asian American culture both inside and outside academia and consequently the growing complexity required to understand and assess Asian American cultural production. They raised key questions about what characterizes Asian American cultural production and how we understand, experience, and analyze Asian American culture (270). As Chin, Feng, and Lee have broadly defined it, the term “cultural production” refers to “processes by which certain subjects (Asian Americans and others) produce material objects, actions, and interactions; it pertains to the interpretation of
5 When the Monkey King Travels across the Pacific and Back: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Liu Kuilan
Abstract: Transformation is the key element adding thematic as well as structural unity to Gene Luen Yang’s award-winning coming-of-age graphic novel
American Born Chinese. The book artfully weaves together stories of three characters. The realistic character Jin Wang, of Taiwanese parentage, moves from Chinatown to a predominantly non-Chinese suburb, falls in love with a white American girl, and wrestles throughout the novel with his identity as a Chinese American among non-Chinese American peers. The mythological Monkey King, banished from heaven because of his lowly status yet trained to be a deity, finally comes to terms with his simian, not deitic, identity.
6 “Maybe It’s Time for a Little History Lesson Here”: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Ford Stacilee
Abstract: Over the past several years many undergraduate students have come to rely more readily on various graphic narrative-type representations of history. The “cartoonification” of multiple interpretations of the past has become a way for them to distill large amounts of information into “chewable bites” as well as to help them remember facts and ideas that they might forget without a visual reminder of meanings. Texts ranging from
America: A Cartoon History,Addicted to War: Why the U.S. Can’t Kick Militarism, andUnderstanding Postfeminism(and a host of general histories focusing on various events and time periods) are used not only
8 From Fan Activism to Graphic Narrative: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Gruenewald Tim
Abstract: From 2005 to 2008, three seasons of the animated television series
Avatar: The Last Airbender(henceforthAvatar) were first broadcast on Nickelodeon. Although the show premiered on a children’s channel, its reach extended far beyond that demographic. It became a global hit and spawned a vast fandom in the United States and beyond. Among the fans were graphic novelists Gene Luen Yang and Derek Kirk Kim. Following the commercial and critical failure of M. Night Shyamalan’s 2010 live-action film adaptationThe Last Airbender(henceforthAirbender), Yang was hired to write a graphic novel trilogy, which was published by Dark Horse
12 Manga-fying Yang’s American Born Chinese from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Berndt Jaqueline
Abstract: Thierry Groensteen argues that “the narrative techniques and processes that are used in manga give the reader the feeling of being immersed in the action, whereas Western comics create a more distant relation between the reader and the narrative” (27). It goes without saying that both “Western” and “Eastern” graphic narratives escape such generalization. However, Angela Moreno Acosta’s redrawing of one sequence from Gene Luen Yang’s American Born Chinese visualizes what has come to dominate the global image of manga, including Groensteen’s, namely the assumption that this kind of comics is particularly qualified for highlighting emotions, moods, and private interpersonal
13 Skim as Girl: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Berndt Jaqueline
Abstract: In recent years, graphic narratives¹ in general and manga in particular have attracted critical attention from a variety of fields, including media and globalization research as well as Japanese, gender, and ethnic studies. This broadening of topic-oriented interest usually leads to two lines of contestation, one pertaining to manga-specific expertise and the other to culturally divergent mediascapes as contexts of productions and use. Taking a typical case of discordance—the ethnic identity of manga characters—opinions differ notoriously as to whether mangaesque faces and physiques are to be regarded as “stateless” (
mukokuseki) or “Caucasian.” The latter position may meet manga
15 Conveying New Material Realities: from:
Drawing New Color Lines
Author(s) Zhao Shan Mu
Abstract: In the 2011 film
The Green Hornet, starring Taiwanese pop star Jay Chou as Kato, there is a short scene depicting Kato’s apartment as he watches the television. The décor of his apartment is clearly visible: a Chinese decorative knot, ink brush calligraphy, and a miniature terracotta warrior. By contrast, in the award winning graphic novelAmerican Born Chineseby Gene Luen Yang, the narrative streams set in contemporary times feature very little décor that would qualify as “Chinese” in the same way; instead, it features items such as Transformers toys and bubble tea. Instead of reflecting the everyday practices
Chapter Two WHAT THE SORCERER SAID from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Paul Dukas’s symphonic scherzo
L’apprenti sorcier(The Sorcerer’s Apprentice, 1893) is an eventful work—so lively, in fact, that it rattles the cage constructed of assumptions about musical narration. I shall argue thatThe Sorcerer’s Apprenticeallows a single instance of narrating. As a way into an interpretation of that sound, however, we should remember another moment, a strange passage at the midpoint of the piece, at which its entire musical progress comes to a full stop. There is a silence, and the piece begins to regenerate itself, by repeating again and again, far too many times, first a note,
Chapter Three CHERUBINO UNCOVERED: from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: Is operatic narration in fact an interlude of tedium, and, as such, a time during which one’s thoughts are free to depart elsewhere? If so, perhaps this is not
Chapter Four MAHLER’S DEAFNESS: from:
Unsung Voices: Opera and Musical Narrative in the Nineteenth Century
Abstract: In opera, the characters pacing the stage often suffer from deafness; they do not
hearthe music that is the ambient fluid of their music-drowned world. This is one of the genre’s most fundamental illusions: we see before us something whose fantastic aspect is obvious, since the scenes we witness pass to music. At the same time, however, opera stages recognizably human situations, and these possess an inherent “realism” that demands a special and complex understanding of the music we hear. We must generally assume, in short, that this music is not produced by or within the stage-world, but emanates
Book Title: Edgar Allen Poe: A Phenomenological View- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): HALLIBURTON DAVID
Abstract: The book begins with a methodological chapter that sets out the assumptions and procedures of the approach. This is followed by analyses of Poe's major works, exploring such special problems as Poe's treatment of the material world, including technology; the interrelation of body and consciousness; poetic voice; attitudes toward women; and the will to affirmation, plenitude, and unity. The center of interest is neither Poe's biography nor environment but always the meaning of Poe's words. Because these works are shaped by a single imagination and because they are experienced in time, as a process, each work has its own "way of going." The aim of the interpretation is to find this way and go along with it; to live each work dynamically, as it "happens," while tracing its interaction with other works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1373
chapter four Existential Freedom from:
Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: As we have seen, world-orientation, whether undertaken on a theoretical level (chapter ii) or approached from a practical standpoint (chapter iii) leaves us in the lurch. Science, though astonishingly successful at achieving universally valid knowledge of objects within the world, cannot view the world as a whole, penetrate the veil of appearance, evaluate ends, or justify anything—itself included. When professional philosophers confront the basic questions, the result is not reliable knowledge, but such cacaphonies of incompatible views as are currently represented by the familiar textbook anthologies that, by making all positions readily available, render every position suspect. While any
chapter six Ultimate Situations from:
Karl Jaspers: An Introduction to His Philosophy
Abstract: Why philosophize? Why not be content with scientific knowledge and disregard the perennial perplexities of traditional philosophy? How can we recommend either individual or social support of an exhausting intellectual enterprise that produces no practical results, leads to no unanimity, provides no reliable knowledge, and solves no problems? If, as Jaspers tells us, “we are scarcely entitled to say that we have progressed beyond Plato,”¹ is there any reason to continue? What powerful motives serve to perpetuate groundless speculations whose apparent futility is notorious?
Chapter 4 The Gaps in Christology: from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: Crime and Punishmentends with the words: “But that is the beginning of a new story, the story of the gradual renewal of a man . . . of his slow progress from one world to another, of how he learned to know hitherto undreamt of reality. All that might be the subject of a new story, but our present story has come to an end.” Now it is well known that Dostoevsky’s next novel,The Idiot,was to revolve around a “genuinely good,” a “truly beautiful” man. The main character was to be an exemplary Christian: indeed, something like
Chapter 5 The Biography of Legion: from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: The Idiotends in a Swiss asylum;The Possessed,Dostoevsky’s next novel, concludes with two notes from that already dead citizen of the canton of Uri, Nicholas Stavrogin. Silence of madness, silence of suicide—so end novels that take their shape from characters unable to find coherent stories for themselves. The discontinuity of identity is in both cases dramatized as a temporal rupture, but a different kind of cutoff in time defines the conditions of each dilemma.
Afterword from:
Dostoevsky and the Novel
Abstract: Dostoevsky’s role in the history of the novel is determined by his use of the novel to interrogate history. The growing privilege that attached to history from the Renaissance through the Enlightenment peaked in the nineteenth century, an age in which the modern conception of its study was born. It is, of course, a gross oversimplification, if perhaps a necessary one, to say that before Niebuhr and Von Ranke each nation or each religion compiled a past that took into account “what had really happened” only insofar as the facts provided a sanction for the present. History, on the other
Introduction from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) LANCE VICTOR
Abstract: The essays contained in this volume are contributions to that intense and self-conscious assessment of the perspectives, resources, and terms by which contemporary literary criticism has sought to justify its validity, its function, and its historical legitimacy. If literature itself seems in our time to have lost its innocence, if neither its subjective nor its objective character is self-evident but demands of its readers a sharp awareness of its modality, it has by this challenge called forth a breathtaking variety of systems of critical discourse; indeed, it has created a pre-eminence of theoretical consciousness that may tend, at times, to
Fiction—The Filter of History: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) ISER WOLFGANG
Abstract: In the “General Preface” to the
Waverley Novels,Scott reflects on his own situation as narrator. He tries to clarify his intentions, which—unlike those of earlier novelists—are no longer concerned with expounding moral norms. Instead, he takes as his guide his own personal development, as he seeks to explain the curious innovation of history as the subject of fiction. His starting point, he says, is as follows: “I had nourished the ambitious desire of composing a tale of chivalry, which was to be in the style of theCastle of Otranto, with plenty of Border characters and supernatural
Syntax and Obscurity in Poetry: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) STEMPEL WOLF-DIETER
Abstract: “Guerre à la rhétorique et paix à la syntaxe!” With this warcry Victor Hugo declared, in his oft-quoted Réponse
á un acte d’accusation(1854), donning the mantle of a romantic Malherbe (“Alors . . . je vins . . .”) that he had brought about a “quatre-vingt-treize” in French literature. Concerning the nature of his campaign against rhetoric, Hugo tells us two things: at his very appearance, he says, all metaphors fled in terror to hide beneath the robes of the “Academie, aieule et douairiere”; but at the same time he lets us know, as so often in his lyrical
Chance as Motivation for the Unexplained in Historical Writing: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) KOSELLECK REINHART
Abstract: The main difficulty in discussing chance in historiography is the fact that this subject has its own history, which as yet is unwritten. It is certainly impossible to discuss the role of chance in any given situation without first taking into account the whole terminology of the historian concerned. One needs to ask what is the opposite term that will exclude chance, or what is the overall term that makes it relative. Raymond Aron, for instance, begins his introduction to the philosophy of history with the antithesis, based on Cournot, between “
ordre” and “hasard”; he concludes: “Le fait historique est,
Myth as a Recurrent Theme in Greek Tragedy and Twentieth-Century Drama from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) FUHRMANN MANFRED
Abstract: 1. The seemingly pedantic title
Amphitryon38 points to a phenomenon which is obviously characteristic of dramatizations of Greek myths, i.e., repetition, the assiduous rehandling of well-worn material. Twentieth-century plays are not the first to conform to this principle of repetition, nor are all those “modern” dramas which have adapted ancient legends. Even the authors of Attic tragedies staged the same stories over and over again.
Patterns of Communication in Joyce’s Ulysses from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) ISER WOLFGANG
Abstract: Joyce called his novel
Ulyssesafter Homer’s hero, though the latter never appears in the book. Instead Joyce deals with eighteen different aspects of a single day in Dublin, mainly following the involvement of two characters—Leopold Bloom and Stephen Dedalus—in events that take place between early morning and late at night. What, then, is the connection between theOdysseyand June 16th, 1904? Most answers to this question try to join these two poles of the novel through the “tried and tested” ideas of the recurrence of archetypes, or the analogy between the ideal and the real.¹ In
The “New Myth” of Revolution—A Study of Mayakovsky’s Early Poetry from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) STRIEDTER JURIJ
Abstract: In these lines from Vladimir Mayakovsky’s revolutionary poem 150,000,000 (1919/20), revolutionary action is linked to the demand for a “new myth”; out of them arises the question of the extent to which revolution can be mythicized, the relation of the old myth to the new, and the function of poetry in the creation of new myths. A full discussion of these questions, either in general or in relation to Mayakovsky’s poetry, would be far beyond the scope of this essay, but we shall attempt to provide a basis for such discussion by outlining certain facets of the subject, with concrete
Story as Exemplum—Exemplum as Story: from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) STIERLE KARL-HEINZ
Abstract: If one understands texts as a permanent rendering of continuous speech actions, then the most common frame of reference as regards the constitution of texts must be a theory of action.¹ At the beginning of his
Philosophische Untersuchungen, Wittgenstein makes the far-reaching observation that speech occurs in actions.² This is only a short step away from the idea that speech occurs as an action. It is characteristic of actions that the impulses of which they consist are orientated towards a particular meaning, which in
The Fall of Literary History from:
New Perspectives in German Literary Criticism: A Collection of Essays
Author(s) WELLEK RENÉ
Abstract: Some thirty years ago I wrote a book entitled
The Rise of English Literary History.¹ Today one could write a book on its decline and fall. George Watson, inThe Study of Literature,speaks of “the sharp descent of literary history from the status of a great intellectual discipline to that of a convenient act of popularization.”² Christopher Ricks, in a review of Watson’s book, even doubts that “literary history is a worthwhile activity” and that it ever was “a great intellectual discipline.”³ Ricks cannot think of any literary historians who would represent the “tradition of confident historiography of literature,”
III The Art of Historical Questioning from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: Anyone working in a historical discipline experiences within himself, at certain times, a sympathetic reverberation of Stephen Dedalus’s cry that history is a nightmare from which he must awake. This feeling of suffocation steals over the philosopher when he attends to the long tradition of texts and studies in his field. Then, the history of philosophy seems to be an externally imposed and pressing structure, controlled entirely by lines of investigation laid out in the far distant past and extending into one’s present activity only in order to cramp and discourage the creative mind. This is indeed a nightmarish view
VI Teleology of Historical Understanding from:
Interpreting Modern Philosophy
Abstract: In this concluding chapter, I will make a final try at probing the knowledge pattern developed in history of modern philosophy. Until now, the emphasis has fallen upon the elements in our general theory and their unification in actual historical writings and the learning situation. Were we to stop the examination at this point, however, we would be omitting one essential requirement and one distinctive viewpoint upon the entire process of understanding the modern sources. For the co-ingredient factors show their significance not only in reference to some forms of their actual unification and expression but also in reference to
CHAPTER 1 The Insufficiency of Survival from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We should then have, as the embodiment of the highest ideal perfection of mental development, a creature of superb cognitive endowments, from whose piercing perceptions no fact was too minute or too remote to escape; whose all-embracing foresight no contingency could find unprepared; whose invincible flexibility of resource no array of outward onslaught could overpower; but
CHAPTER 2 The Sum Total of Possibility from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We turn from William James’s halo that eradiates and enriches—and confusingly complicates—objects by extending them far beyond their original compact, utilitarian, readily comprehensible core. Now to hear from Josiah Royce, contemporary and philosophical adversary of James. In his 1897 work,
The Conception of God, Royce set down his position as neo-absolutist and idealist (the stance James rebuked with friendly lack of rancor when he told Royce, “Damn the Absolute!” and smiled as he said it, the two men facing one another, astraddle a fence in a famous photograph). Listen to Royce’s actual words before his phrases and James’s
CHAPTER 5 America as the Woman Who Waits from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We have learned our lessons of cynicism well in the American school for success; our teachers have been good ones. The business of America is “well-being”
(Tocqueville).Money-grabbing and getting ahead is the characteristic trait of the American (Frances Trollope). A man realizes he is a failure the day he sees he is incapable of commanding five dollars on the job market(Henry Adams).Although warned that America is not thePays de Cocagneand its streets not paved with wheaten loaves(Franklin),men still devour the ground out from under their own feet(just about everyone).
CHAPTER 7 Luminism and Terribilità from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: If the wonder stirred by America’s landscape participates in the sacred which even the profane acts of history cannot deny, this same quality of the sacerdotal and the wondrous combines into what Michelangelo termed
terribilità.According to Barbara Novak inAmerican Painting of the Nineteenth Century, terribilitàlies well within the American way of looking at its terrain. Mrs. Trollope’s pleased shivers of fear over the falls of the Potomac are somewhat prettied-up versions of the more extensive anxiety with “its pleasures of risk, its throttled fear like the sensuous tremorings of a fall in a dream” which Norman Mailer
CHAPTER 8 America as “Eventing” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Before the sense of human presence and its mystery, the continent evaporates, yet also coalesces, regroups into places and times felt, seen, realized—the land itself a presence, a mystery. Faulkner’s imaginative relation to space is much like that of the Hopi Indians defined by Benjamin Lee Whorf in his essay “Time, Space, and Language.” To the Hopis reality is viewed in terms of events (or “eventing”), both objective and subjective. They know no imaginary space, only the actuality, in contrast with the space-concepts of the “English” mind.
CHAPTER 9 The American Claimant from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: In 1829 Thomas Skidmore denounced out of hand the entire conception of heirs and contracts between generations. He felt no property should be thought of as transferable; no father ought to hand on
in absentialand or money to his sons. Mark Twain also rebuked the burden imposed upon him by the charge his father had given him on his death-bed, “Cling to the land and wait; let nothing beguile it away from you.” As he records it in hisAutobiography,the Tennessee Claim was for the Clemens family both unattained dream and solid land that contained coal, iron, copper,
CHAPTER 11 “Presence” and “Pittsburgh” from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: If it is difficult enough to succeed; it is even more difficult to know what success is and what it means, truly, to fail. Yet however much the writers to whom we are listening realized that the worlds of words they create are unlike the object-hard universe they live in, they continued to attempt to define “winning” and “losing” as active terms in the immediate reality.
CHAPTER 13 In The Nick and Out of It from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: There have always been Americans—just as “American” as those who pull at the motherly breasts of well-being or who strive to emulate the father in power—who are actively in pursuit of
thought.Henry Thoreau, Henry Adams, and Henry James are such men.
CHAPTER 14 Fate, Will, and the Illusion of Freedom from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Henry Adams would not rest until he went back behind all events to learn their purpose. In their day Emerson and Thoreau had less urgency to know why since they believed that through strong character and will men could
CHAPTER 15 Principles, Things, People, and Mass from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: It is uncanny the way the American mind is able to
thinkits way into strength. But it is misguided to believe that foes simply melt before the burning glance of the idea of victory. The obstacles are many, and possibilities for failure continually rough up the texture of the imagination ofvirtus—the inner power that is goodness and the central good that acts with force. If idea attempts to transcend contingency, it must live with the fact thatprinciples(iron-bound ideas and unbending ideals) are often at the mercy ofthingswith the thrust to crack open the
CHAPTER 16 Bottom Being from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The man of character cannot fail at anything he does since he has chosen to fulfill his natural birthright of joy. “I am
Defeatedall the time,” Emerson assures himself in his journal of 1842, “yet to Victory I am born” (VIII, 228). Life is a battle that mankind is meant to win, Thoreau writes on March 21, 1853. “Despair and postponement are cowardice and defeat. Men were born to succeed, not to fail.” Of course, various moods may run through the same man, as Thoreau notes on November 4, 1851. He may contain “dark and muddy pools,” but higher
CHAPTER 19 Strain and Relaxation from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: We should test those strange occasions when a man’s guilt becomes an actively useful fact. Mailer, Adams, and Henry James’s Lambert Strether provide instructive cases in point for the value of strain when it is set in contrast to the too easeful man freed from any sense of guilt at all.
CHAPTER 21 Some Versions of Melodrama from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: In a world where justice appears to be the most one can ask for, there is no room for forgiveness and much space for the particular cruelties practiced in the name of the war against wickedness. Significantly, those who stress justice often turn it most harshly upon themselves. According to Paul Ricoeur in
The Symbolism of Evil,to trace the history of men’s reactions to sin helps us to distinguish the stages through which mankind has moved in its reactions to the world. In the earliest stage, the force that punished the guilty lay outside men. Once conscience became consciousness,
CHAPTER 24 History—as Facts and as Faith from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Apocalypse is defined in two general senses by Meyer Abrams: sudden revelations that renew or violent upheavals that destroy. When Abrams is working in
Natural Supernaturalismwith the term as it spoke to the need of the English and Continental Romantics to revitalize decadent societies, he stresses the first of those meanings: the Biblical-historical panorama of weary, corrupt worlds which are jokingly, joyously replaced by visions of worlds freshly reborn. Those acts of the mind in America which attempt to split open the future, freeing history from its own limitations, have been informed by an urgency as great as that
CHAPTER 26 Opposing Perfection from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: To be saved by silence in order to arrive at the silence offered by total absorption into God’s consciousness or the self’s core: this solution to the babble of the objective world has not gone unnoticed by a number of American writers. Injoy to leap away from combative individuality toward the democratic spirit held in common; to have the inferior absorbed into superior being; to replace the limitations of the phenomenal with the endless space and light of the noumenal. Any one of these acts would bring an end to the failure of being. Perhaps such attempts go counter to
CHAPTER 28 Going Up and Coming Down from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: Edgar Allan Poe’s
Eurekaof 1848 fulfilled the dearest wishes of its author’s gothic soul by cleansing the universe of all matter (that basic fact of human failure) through the return to the purity of the primal Thought. The result is an apocalypse with a happy ending—for the Poe-narrator at least, if not for the rest of us—since consciousness ends where it began: with itself alone, and all because God’s plan has been carried through without a flaw.
CHAPTER 30 Sufficiency from:
Failure and Success in America: A Literary Debate
Abstract: The answer to more than survival and less than perfection proposed by many of the writers we have been listening to is simplicity itself:
find sufficiency.What keeps us still failing is the fact incarnated by Norman Mailer—he who is like God and like us, only more so. It is, as he constantly shows us, the fact of bad timing and wrong positioning. When we are not where our destiny requires us to be, frustration mounts. When we have “found life too brief for perfection and long for comfort,” we fit these words of Robert Lowell’s sonnet fromNotebook,
Book Title: Value and Values-Economics and Justice in an Age of Global Interdependence
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Hershock Peter D.
Abstract: Especially in the aftermath of what is now being called the Great Recession, awareness has mounted of the imperative to question the modern divorce of economics from ethics. While the domains of economics and ethics were from antiquity through at least the eighteenth century understood in many cultures to be coterminous and mutually entailing, the modern assumption has been that the goal of maximizing human prosperity and the aim of justly enhancing our lives as persons and as communities were functionally and practically distinct. Working from a wide array of perspectives, the contributors to this volume offer a set of challenges to the assumed independence of the quantitative and qualitative dimensions of human and planetary well-being. Reflecting on the complex interrelationship among economics, justice, and equity, the book resists "one size fits all" approaches and struggles to revitalize the marriage of economics and ethics by activating cultural differences as the basis of mutual contribution to shared human flourishing. The publication of this important collection will stimulate or extend critical debates among scholars and students working in a number of disciplines in the social sciences and humanities, including philosophy, history, environmental studies, economics, and law.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k8c
Introduction from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Hershock Peter D.
Abstract: Economics and ethics have not always been considered separate domains of inquiry and action. From antiquity through at least the eighteenth century, the fields of economics and ethics were in many cultures understood to be coterminous and mutually entailing. Rather than being assumed to be naturally distinct, “value” and “values” were seen as intimately related.
4 Fouling Our Nest: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Hurd Heidi M.
Abstract: I worry that our best ethics are not up to the task of protecting the global environment from our worst economics. This is not a practical claim; it is a philosophical one. My concern is that moral philosophy lacks the ability to explain or account for the moral significance of the planet upon which we live and the natural resources upon which we depend. It is hard to find a natural resource on the Earth that is not being exploited or that is not an object of commercial greed. Today, more than 60 percent of vital ecosystem goods and services
5 The Visible and the Invisible: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Park Jin Y.
Abstract: In his book
Small Is Beautiful(1973), the economist E. F. Schumacher diagnosed the problem of value in the capitalist economic system and warned of its disastrous result if we did not change the way we understood economic growth and the development of human society. Schumacher asked, “What is the meaning of democracy, freedom, human dignity, standard of living, self-realization, fulfillment? Is it a matter of goods, or of people?”¹ As his book’s subtitle, “Economics as if People Mattered,” suggests, Schumacher’s discussion of the meaning of economics and economic development focuses on their impacts on human beings, society, and environments
8 Doing Justice to Justice: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Ames Roger T.
Abstract: A minimum standard of justice would seem to require that all U.S. children have equal access to U.S. educational institutions, and that any school admissions policy that would exclude a candidate on the basis of race or ethnicity is in clear violation of this principle. Such a basic standard has certainly been upheld by the judgment of the Supreme Court in lawsuits where it was contravened. But I want to argue that the Court in coming to such a decision not only might be failing to serve justice, but in fact would be compounding a grave injustice—at least in
9 Moral Equivalents from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Higgins Kathleen M.
Abstract: In his essay “The Moral Equivalent of War” (1910), William James observes that despite its obvious destructiveness, war has long had its defenders, who stress the important role that war time military service has traditionally served in developing discipline, toughness, and character in young men. Although himself motivated by the desire for a peaceful world, James concedes that “militarism is the great preserver of our ideals of hardihood, and human life with no use for hardihood would be contemptible.”¹ Given the harms that come from war, he argues that we need a “moral equivalent” of war, a nonviolent alternative to
12 John Dewey, Institutional Economics, and Confucian Democracies from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Hickman Larry A.
Abstract: For some economists, institutional theories offer an attractive alternative, or perhaps better put, attractive supplements, to conservative approaches based on the work of free-market theorists such as Milton Friedman and Friedrich Hayek, as well as liberal theories based on the work of John Maynard Keynes, which taken together form the central doctrines of what has been called the “neoclassical synthesis.”¹ According to one noted conservative economist, neoclassical economic theory is based on several fundamental assumptions, including the following: “1. People have rational preferences among outcomes. 2. Individuals maximize utility and firms maximize profits. 3. People act independently on the basis
14 Swaraj and Swadeshi: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Garfield Jay L.
Abstract: Gandhi introduced the terms
swarajandswadeshito colonial Indian discourse, and while many academics and activists adopted these terms in their framings of the Indian independence struggle, consensus on their interpretation was hard to come by. The debate between Tagore and Gandhi is often taken as crucial in the contest over the meanings of these terms, but the interpretation of that debate is itself contested. We would like to reexamine that well-known debate as it is refracted through the lens of an epistemological predicament articulated by K. C. Bhattacharyya. This will allow us to see more clearly points of
15 Economics and Religion or Economics versus Religion: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Leaman Oliver
Abstract: There are two contrasting images of Islamic economics that are often evoked today, and both are wrong. One is that Islamic finance has done well in the banking crises that began in the twenty-first century, the implication being that it is more solidly based and less speculative. Opposed to that is the image of Islam as an obstacle to the flourishing of the economies of the Islamic world because it is so restrictive as to what can be done with money and how property can be passed down to the next generation. Yet the fact is that Islamic banks have
18 The Conversation of Justice: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Saito Naoko
Abstract: In the introduction to this collection, Roger Ames and Peter Hershock draw attention to the need, in the context of contemporary global dynamics, for a conversation between economics and ethics. The issues of fairness and justice cannot be separated from our “senses of what is good” and from “how and why we live as we do.” As a characterization of the kind of conversation between economics and ethics that they have in mind, Ames and Hershock suggest the necessity of diversity, inclusiveness, and particularity. This would be a conversation that involved “multiple voices” so that “different disciplines and cultures come
28 Aging, Equality, and Confucian Selves from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Geisz Steven F.
Abstract: A number of authors have recently brought the Confucian tradition into meaningful contact with the theory and practice of democracy. The literature includes accounts of what Confucian democracy is or would be,¹ explorations of the relationship between Confucianism and fundamental features of political liberalism such as rights,² and a variety of attempts to link Confucianism and, more broadly, Chinese political theory and practice in general to theories of deliberative democracy in particular.³ In this essay, I would like to add to this growing discussion by thinking about ways in which a Confucian valuation of and deference to the elderly might
29 Institutional Power Matters: from:
Value and Values
Author(s) Keleher Lori
Abstract: Academics and practitioners working in international economic development often cite the critical role of empowerment within development; however, relatively little attention has been paid to institutional power.¹ Institutionalized power plays an important role in generating, reinforcing, and reproducing the inequalities that prevent or limit various groups of individuals—most notably women—from acting as agents, engaging in empowerment processes, or being empowered. In other words, we cannot adequately address the role of empowerment with development without properly understanding the role of institutionalized power in empowerment. This essay seeks to briefly explain what institutionalized power is and the significant role it
Book Title: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan-Modernity, Loss, and the Doing of History
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Karlin Jason G.
Abstract: Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan is a historical analysis of the discourses of nostalgia in late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century Japan. Through an analysis of the experience of rapid social change in Japan’s modernization, it argues that fads (ryūkō) and the desires they express are central to understanding Japanese modernity, conceptions of gender, and discourses of nationalism. In doing so, the author uncovers the myth of eternal return that lurks below the surface of Japanese history as an expression of the desire to find meaning amid the chaos and alienation of modern times. The Meiji period (1868–1912) was one of rapid change that hastened the process of forgetting: The state’s aggressive program of modernization required the repression of history and memory. However, repression merely produced new forms of desire seeking a return to the past, with the result that competing or alternative conceptions of the nation haunted the history of modern Japan. Rooted in the belief that the nation was a natural and organic entity that predated the rational, modern state, such conceptions often were responses to modernity that envisioned the nation in opposition to the modern state. What these visions of the nation shared was the ironic desire to overcome the modern condition by seeking the timeless past. While the condition of their repression was often linked to the modernizing policies of the Meiji state, the means for imagining the nation in opposition to the state required the construction of new symbols that claimed the authority of history and appealed to a rearticulated tradition. Through the idiom of gender and nation, new reified representations of continuity, timelessness, and history were fashioned to compensate for the unmooring of inherited practices from the shared locales of everyday life. This book examines the intellectual, social, and cultural factors that contributed to the rapid spread of Western tastes and styles, along with the backlash against Westernization that was expressed as a longing for the past. By focusing on the expressions of these desires in popular culture and media texts, it reveals how the conflation of mother, countryside, everyday life, and history structured representations to naturalize ideologies of gender and nationalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1k9w
CHAPTER 4 The Lure of the Modern: from:
Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: As new social practices were introduced into Japan during the early Meiji period, they disseminated unevenly from the cities to the countryside. While Western fashions were adopted initially among the elite, who had ties to the government and who were concerned about promoting Japan’s image as a civilized nation, they soon spread to members of the middle class, who embraced Westernization as a means of social mobility and distinction. The high cost of Western fashions limited their widespread appeal, but by the Taisho period (1912–1926) and the introduction of uniformed clothing in various work professions, Western fashion became increasingly
CONCLUSION from:
Gender and Nation in Meiji Japan
Abstract: I began this book by considering how the Meiji Restoration had nurtured the sentiment that the revolution was incomplete. The calls to action that adhered around the notion of the “incomplete Restoration” in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries were (re)productive of the myth of the Meiji Restoration. For both the state and its critics, revolutionary action was legitimized by invoking the Restoration: the state pursued the modernization of all aspects of social life, denouncing customs and practices incompatible with its ideology of progress as backward and barbarous, while its opponents condemned the state for its decadence and superficiality arising from
Book Title: Building a Heaven on Earth-Religion, Activism, and Protest in Japanese Occupied Korea
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Park Albert L.
Abstract: Why and how did Korean religious groups respond to growing rural poverty, social dislocation, and the corrosion of culture caused by forces of modernization under strict Japanese colonial rule (1910-1945)? Questions about religion's relationship and response to capitalism, industrialization, urbanization, and secularization lie at the heart of understanding the intersection between colonialism, religion, and modernity in Korea. Yet, getting answers to these questions has been a challenge because of narrow historical investigations that fail to study religious processes in relation to political, economic, social, and cultural developments. In
Building a Heaven on Earth, Albert L. Park studies the progressive drives by religious groups to contest standard conceptions of modernity and forge a heavenly kingdom on the Korean peninsula to relieve people from fierce ruptures in their everyday lives. The results of his study will reconfigure the debates on colonial modernity, the origins of faith-based social activism in Korea, and the role of religion in a modern world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt13x1kgg
2 Economic and Social Change under Japanese Colonialism from:
Building a Heaven on Earth
Abstract: This chapter examines the transformation of the Korean rural economy and society from 1910 to 1937 and its impact on the lives of peasants, who accounted for 80 percent of the Korean population. In so doing, it adds to the rich scholarship on Korean rural affairs and the commercialization of agriculture during the Chosŏn and colonial periods by including writings and observations on rural life by intellectuals and religious figures from the colonial period. Numerous studies of rural Korea have provided valuable statistical and quantitative data that show how rural life changed under colonialism, but these studies have left out
Guilt, Guile, and Ginger in Small Ceremonies from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Waterston Elizabeth
Abstract: Last winter in Florida I unceremoniously bombarded my friends with
Small Ceremonies.I wanted to see how readers not familiar with Carol Shields’s work would respond to this book, her first published novel. They ritually responded, “What’s with this character Furlong? So he is an American draft dodger—Why should that seem so hilarious to a Canadian author?”
Revisiting the Sequel: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Roy Wendy
Abstract: The current proliferation of sequels in both literary and cinematic venues suggests an abiding interest in stories that follow up on and expand previously circulated stories. Sequel novels are written, published, and read for many different reasons, the most commonly expressed being a desire by the reader for repetition, but with difference; a wish by the author to explore in more detail a character or situation from a previous book; and a need expressed by the author or publisher, or both, to continue an economically successful venture. One of the most oftquoted commentaries on sequels is Terry Castle’s 1986 study
Assembling Identity: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Life Patricia
Abstract: Two Canadian novels, published twenty-nine years apart, facilitate an examination of identity and agency in relation to aging. Carol Shields’s 1993 novel
The Stone Diariesgestures towards Margaret Laurence’s 1964 novelThe Stone Angelin its recording of the life of an aged central female character, its stone imagery, its depiction of aging as decline and loss, and its enquiry into the themes of late-life recollection and search for selfhood and meaning. Both texts focus on the protagonist’s interior life and on the construction of personal identities more than on the action of an external plot. Both present the protagonist
“To Be Faithful to the Idea of Being Good”: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Steffler Margaret
Abstract: In her final novel,
Unless,and in a number of interviews toward the end of her life, Carol Shields drew attention to the concept of goodness. She told Eleanor Wachtel at the beginning of 2002 that goodness was “the main preoccupation of [Unless]” and that she had been “interested in the idea of goodness for a number of years” (Wachtel 153). An earlier comment on a more contained version of goodness focused on Shields’s fondness as a child for the world and characters of “Dick and Jane readers” and the way in which “everyone was terribly good to everyone else.”
Shields’s Guerrilla Gardeners: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Boyd Shelley
Abstract: In an interview Carol Shields once stated, “I would never write a war story, I mean
thewar story, as it were, is entirely a male-modelled genre. . . . violence has not been a part of my experience and I am far too fond of my characters to want to do them violence” (Anderson 143–44). Although Shields rejected war narratives as unfamiliar and unappealing, she was drawn to an alternative form of battle taken up entirely by her female characters—guerrilla gardening. Among the many homeowners who tend their yards in Shields’s fictional worlds is a peculiar cast
Cool Empathy in the Short Fiction of Carol Shields from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Rose Marilyn
Abstract: In reviewing Carol Shields’s short story collection
Various Miracles(1985),New York Timesbook reviewer Josh Rubins refers to her “serious whimsy,” a “fragile amalgam that . . . is sometimes surprisingly powerful as well as highly engaging. (11)” He notes the way that some of Shields’s “tiny fictions” have “sizable impact” and observes that her stories are somehow “disarming,” and pull “the reader inside her reckless imagination before the usual resistances can take shape.” He concedes that not all of her stories are equally successful: some are merely droll or seem to strain for effect. The best, however, exhibit
The “Perfect Gift” and the “True Gift”: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Reimer Elizabeth
Abstract: Mothers, daughters, and gift giving: in two mirroring stories written by Carol Shields and Joyce Carol Oates we are invited to penetrate some of the mysteries of these expressive transactions. The titles themselves suggest a dialogue between the two writers: Oates’s “The Scarf” was published in 2001, one year after Carol Shields’s “A Scarf” appeared in
Dressing Up for the Carnival.Oates reviewed Shields’s collection of stories but it is not known whether her story responds directly to Shields’s or whether the stories germinated independently. Nevertheless, they form a dialogue with each other even as they highlight the importance of
Prepositional Domesticity from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) van Herk Aritha
Abstract: Carol Shields claimed once, in my hearing, that she wasn’t a very good cook. I registered the comment’s wry self-deprecation, and immediately knew that she had performed one of those marvellously ironic sleights of hand that made her very talent both inconspicuous and adroit. She was not about to broadcast her abilities with
boeuf en daube,how she had perfected exactly the dish that Mrs. Ramsey presides over in Virginia Woolf’sTo the Lighthouse:the “beef, the bay leaf, and the wine” (Woolf 80) combining into the “exquisite scent of olives and oil and juice” (Woolf 100) rising from the
The Clarity of Her Anger from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Urquhart Jane
Abstract: Many things could be said, and no doubt have been said, in praise of both Carol Shields and the work she created: her humanity, her ability to record and celebrate what others might see as less than dramatic lives, her skill in character development (evidenced by the veracity of dialogue, eccentricity of action, and sensitive renditions of her character’s inner lives), and her ability to put together beautifully crafted sentences. I loved Carol and loved everything about her work, and, at the end of the day, what I loved more than anything was what I will call the clarity of
My Seen-Sang, Carol Shields: from:
The Worlds of Carol Shields
Author(s) Choy Wayson
Abstract: In the form of a rather personal memoir, I would like to examine Carol Shields’s characteristic “goodness,” that is, how I now perceive her quality of “goodness,” and how this quality has inspired my own writing.
Book Title: Playful Identities-The Ludification of Digital Media Cultures
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Raessens Joost
Abstract: In
Playful Identities, eighteen scholars examine the increasing role of digital media technologies in identity construction through play. Going beyond computer games, this interdisciplinary collection argues that present-day play and games are not only appropriate metaphors for capturing postmodern human identities, but are in fact the means by which people create their identity. From discussions of World of Warcraft and Foursquare to digital cartographies, the combined essays form a groundbreaking volume that features the most recent insights in play and game studies, media research, and identity studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brqd4
1. Homo ludens 2.0: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: A playful specter is haunting the world. Since the 1960s, when the use of the word “ludic” became popular in both Europe and the US to designate playful behavior and artifacts, playfulness has become increasingly a mainstream characteristic of modern and postmodern culture. In the first decade of the 21st century we can even speak of the global “ludification of culture” (Raessens 2006; 2014). Perhaps the first thing that comes to mind in this context is the immense popularity of computer games, which, as far as global sales are concerned, have already outstripped Hollywood movies. In the US, 8- to
Introduction to Part I from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: This part of the book sheds light on how play, as it was described in the introductory chapter, actually manifests itself in present-day culture. The authors in this section examine different contemporary expressions of playfulness, varying from people engaging with games, Do-It-Yourself (DIY) computer technologies, or social networks. The contributions in this section substantiate our earlier claims that play is also culturally determined and has different functions in different cultural settings. So we may speak of the current ludification of culture as evidence that play is mutable, and that what this transformation entails is versatile in scope and character. Together
4. Playful computer interaction from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Cermak-Sassenrath Daniel
Abstract: For a long time the computer was a tool for experts, inaccessible and also prohibitively expensive for private users. This changed in the mid-1980s. The increasingly widespread use of the computer and the growing experience of its users have since led to a new kind of interaction. In many cases the computer is no longer seen as a machine with which well-planned, methodical, or repetitive tasks are conducted. The interaction¹ with it is now perceived as an open-ended process characterized by creative, explorative, goal-oriented, and challenging activities. Connected with this process is self-directed learning, experimental tinkering around, and the self-gambling
5. Playful identity in game design and open-ended play from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Bekker Tilde
Abstract: Gamers are, like Yamauchi, described as nonconformist, creative, and self-confident persons, who seem unafraid to make mistakes (Beck and Wade 2004). Is it true that games present us with an opportunity to develop a particular identity, or are specific people attracted to games that create these opportunities? In the last decade, research has been conducted into the (playful) organizational style of gamers, and into the leadership qualities that may be developed in a game (DeMarco, Lesser, and O’Driscoll 2007; Reeves and Malone 2007). The search for an answer to the above question is the aim of this chapter. To be
6. Breaking reality: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Glas René
Abstract: The problem, however, is that I never actually was on a boat. I checked in at Amsterdam Central Station
7. Playing with bits and bytes: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Frissen Valerie
Abstract: This chapter focuses on the relation between play and the practices of technological modification and innovation.¹ Playing with technologies has always been an important driving force behind technological transformation. This is even more the case in the digital era, which has given rise to a lively Do-It-Yourself (DIY) culture, in which amateurs and ordinary users have become prominent players in the technological game. It is argued that play offers an interesting angle to understand the characteristics of this DIY culture. In the digital DIY culture technology is used and tinkered with in an open-ended way. In the process of playing
Introduction to Part II from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: The authors in this part of the book all look at how contemporary media technologies afford playful interactions. Underpinning all chapters are questions pertaining to power and agency. Do digital media mark a shift in how the user as player engages with and has agency in everyday life, and if so, do we need a new vocabulary to understand this engagement properly? The authors in this section of the book share a special interest in how specific digital technologies and genres can be approached as playful media. They interrogate how play can be defined in contemporary media cultures, be it
11. Ludic identities and the magic circle from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Calleja Gordon
Abstract: Johan Huizinga’s work has received renewed attention with the emergence and expansion of Game Studies. An important aspect of Huizinga’s explication of play is its bounded nature. Like other cultural artefacts Huizinga describes in
Homo ludens(1955), the act of game playing requires the crossing of a boundary that marks the game from the ordinary world. The crossing of this boundary into game-space implies a shift in the players’ identity that takes them from their everyday, “ordinary” selves, into their ludic selves. Suits has described this as the “lusory attitude” (1978, 52); a disposition one enters into when interacting with
12. Play (for) time from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Crogan Patrick
Abstract: Through their deployment of interactivity, virtualization, and simulation, video games are prime examples of the contemporary form of what philosopher of technology Bernard Stiegler has termed the “industrial temporal object” (2009, 241). This is his term for mass produced media works designed to provide experiences that unfold over time through the user’s provision of his/her conscious attention. From the phonograph’s replaying of musical performances, to editing together film shots and the compilation of longer sequences of experience in television scheduling, to the design of systems for user-configured perceptions in newer media forms, industrial temporal objects have played an increasingly significant
Introduction to Part III from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: The contributions in the third part of the book look at how digital media technologies shape human identities in playful ways. A common thread that weaves through these chapters is that media technologies and practices mediate how people identify with others, the world, and themselves. When new media technologies rise to the fore the mediation of identity changes along with it, and play offers a range of fruitful perspectives to understand these changes. Another common thread in these chapters involves questioning the intricate connections between play and everyday life. From being a more or less separate space for experimenting with
14. Playing out identities and emotions from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Jansz Jeroen
Abstract: In this chapter, I will develop a specific answer to the question why people are attracted to playing video games, including ones with a violent, if not atrocious content. Central to my argument is
15. Playing with others: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Timmermans Jeroen
Abstract: In this chapter I zoom in on one of the characteristic paradoxes of modern, mediated identities, forged from a peculiar mix of individual interests and collective behavior, that can be encountered in people’s use of social network sites in particular. I tentatively explore the ramifications of the World Wide Web as a social medium, in which playful, light, frivolous self-presentation of people seems to be accompanied by the serious task of coping with social pressures induced by omnipresent (communication) media. The focus here is on social network sites and the paradox they create between being alone in front of a
18. The conflicts within the casual: from:
Playful Identities
Author(s) Mäyrä Frans
Abstract: It is relatively easy to find examples of deep, immersive play that has effects on personal or social identity: an intensive psychodrama, live action role-play, and even some massively multiplayer online (MMO) game players report experiences that have affected the ways they perceive themselves, or human condition in general. Most of contemporary play, however, is not deep or transformative in a similar manner. This article will focus on casual gameplay that takes place in common games such as Solitaire, or more recently games such as
FarmVille(which peaked at 80 million active players in February 2010), as well as through
Book Title: Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Wurth Kiene Brillenburg
Abstract: Musically Sublime rewrites musically the history and philosophy of the sublime. Music enables us to reconsider the traditional course of sublime feeling on a track from pain to pleasure. Resisting the notion that there is a single format for sublime feeling, Wurth shows how, from the mid eighteenth century onward, sublime feeling is, instead, constantly rearticulated in a complex interaction with musicality. Wurth takes as her point of departure Immanuel Kant's Critique of Judgment and Jean-Francois Lyotard's aesthetic writings of the 1980s and 1990s. Kant framed the sublime narratively as an epic of self-transcendence. By contrast, Lyotard sought to substitute open immanence for Kantian transcendence, yet he failed to deconstruct the Kantian epic. The book performs this deconstruction by juxtaposing eighteenth- and nineteenth-century conceptions of the infinite, Sehnsucht, the divided self, and unconscious drives with contemporary readings of instrumental music. Critically assessing Edmund Burke, James Usher, E.T.A. Hoffmann, Novalis, Friedrich Holderlin, Arthur Schopenhauer, Richard Wagner, and Friedrich Nietzsche, this book re-presents the sublime as a feeling that defers resolution and hangs suspended between pain and pleasure. Musically Sublime rewrites the mathematical sublime as differance, while it redresses the dynamical sublime as trauma: unending, undetermined, unresolved. Whereas most musicological studies in this area have focused on traces of the Kantian sublime in Handel, Haydn, and Beethoven, this book calls on the nineteenth-century theorist Arthur Seidl to analyze the sublime of, rather than in, music. It does so by invoking Seidl's concept of formwidrigkeit ("form-contrariness") in juxtaposition with Romantic piano music, (post)modernist musical minimalisms, and Lyotard's postmodern sublime. It presents a sublime of matter, rather than form-performative rather than representational. In doing so, Musically Sublime shows that the binary distinction Lyotard posits between the postmodern and romantic sublime is finally untenable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzjk
5. Anxiety: from:
Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: The sublime is not only duplicitous in its paradox of pleasure and pain, but also in its “double mode” of a quieter and a more violent sublime: what John Baillie called the sedate sublime and the sublime mixed with pathos—and what Kant, of course, called the mathematical and the dynamical sublime.¹ Usually, critics interpret these two varieties of the Kantian sublime experience as pertaining to theoretical or speculative and practical reason respectively. They can, however, also be elucidated by pointing to the eighteenth-century cult of the sublime as being a cult of empty and vast but also of wild
Coda: from:
Muscially Sublime: Indeterminacy, Infinity, Irresolvability
Abstract: Years ago, I was hitching with a friend on a Buginese fishing boat from Sulawesi to the island of Lembata in eastern Indonesia. One late afternoon, when the sun was at its lowest, we had spotted a whale rising up from the waters within yards before us—so close and unexpected as to almost become unreal. Dolphins regularly accompanied our boat, and the sea stretched out with nothing in sight save some deserted islands scattered here and there. It was exactly one year before the great flood devastated eastern Flores, wiping away several islands in the Flores Sea. Now, however,
Book Title: The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): van Maas Sander
Abstract: Present-day music studies conspicuously evade the question of religion in contemporary music. Although many composers address the issue in their work, as yet there have been few attempts to think through the structure of religious music as we hear it. On the basis of a careful analysis of Olivier Messiaen's work, this book argues for a renewal of our thinking about religious music. Addressing his notion of a hyper-religiousmusic of sounds and colors, it aims to show that Messiaen has broken new ground. His reinvention of religious music makes us again aware of the fact that religious music, if taken in its proper radical sense, belongs to the foremost of musical adventures.The work of Olivier Messiaen is well known for its inclusion of religious themes and gestures. These alone, however, do not seem enough to account for the religious status of the work. Arguing for a breakthrough toward the beyondon the basis of the synaesthetic experience of music, Messiaen invites a confrontation with contemporary theologians and post-secular thinkers. How to account for a religious breakthrough that is produced by a work of art?Starting from an analysis of his 1960s oratorio La Transfiguration de Notre-Seigneur Jsus-Christ, this book arranges a moderated dialogue between Messiaen and the music theology of Hans Urs von Balthasar, the phenomenology of revelation of Jean-Luc Marion, the rethinking of religion and technics in Jacques Derrida and Bernard Stiegler, and the Augustinian ruminations of Sren Kierkegaard and Jean-Franois Lyotard. Ultimately, this confrontation underscores the challenging yet deeply affirmative nature of Messiaen's music.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14brzn4
Introduction from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Is what is convincing also true? This classic question often preoccupied me when leaving the concert hall or church where, just before, a work by the French composer Olivier Messiaen (Avignon, December 10 , 1908–Paris, April 27, 1992) had been performed. The question seems naýïve, because the occasion is so evidently about experiencing a work of art that is manufactured, shaped by human hands, not a religious, sacramental ritual. Nonetheless, the great power of some of Messiaen’s work still forces this question on the listener—and I am not alone in this respect. The euphoric ovations or reverent testimony
2. Five Times Breakthrough from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The first chapter mapped the “program” of Messiaen and exploring the theoretical possibilities that he discerned for putting it to practice. Now it is time to turn to the question of how he endeavored to realize these possibilities. What does it look like in practice, this “glistening music” of soundcolor, dazzlement, and breakthrough? How does Messiaen actually compose this music of
éblouissement? What is it that makes music and religion relate so intimately to one another? Several levels come into view. What chords and colors exactly come into play? How does Messiaen use them? Are there perhaps any other musical
4. The Gift of Dazzlement from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The notion of saturation surfaced more than once in the discussion of the dazzlement passages in Chapter 2. A saturated sound-image was created with Messiaen’s so-called turning chords (
La Transfiguration, Part VIII); along with that, different forms of chromatic saturation were mentioned, as with the sound field of the third movement (Part XII) or the fully chromatic chords in both chorales (Parts VII and XIV). Especially in these latter instances, saturation pertained to a parametric phenomenon: the notion referred to the fact that all twelve tones on the chromatic scale occurred in the sound field or the relevant chord form.
5. The Technics of Breakthrough from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: The varied and conflicting vocabularies Messiaen uses when speaking of his own work are a reflection of the complex cultural-historical background that informs it: secularization, individualization, modernism, postmodernism, and technology, to name a few. In the opening paragraph of his
Conférence de Kyoto, Messiaen blames the lack of understanding that often informs the reception of his work on the decline of faith. He laments the fact that as a “Christian and a Roman Catholic,” he speaks of “God, Divine Mysteries, and the Mystery of Christ to unbelievers or people who have little knowledge of religion and theology.”¹ This sounds like
6. The Circumcision of the Ear from:
The Reinvention of Religious Music: Olivier Messiaen's Breakthrough Toward the Beyond
Abstract: Messiaen’s discourse on
éblouissementand the possibility of a breakthrough toward the beyond is surprisingly radical. This is not only because the composer calls attention to the actual possibility of religious music—and in a certain sense hyperreligious music, for Messiaen places it above religious music—in an age when, to all appearances, this possibility had definitively turned into its opposite, but also because of his surprising move of connecting the domain of religious experience directly to the coordinates of the musical artifact. In this way, he suggests that a religious experience can be evoked by musical-technical means, countering the
Book Title: Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This book is a profound and eagerly anticipated investigation into what is left of a monotheistic religious spirit-notably, a minimalist faith that is neither confessional nor credulous. Articulating this faith as works and as an objectless hope, Nancy deconstructs Christianity in search of the historical and reflective conditions that provided its initial energy. Working through Blanchot and Nietzsche, re-reading Heidegger and Derrida, Nancy turns to the Epistle of Saint James rather than those of Saint Paul, discerning in it the primitive essence of Christianity as hope. The religion that provided the exit from religion,as he terms Christianity, consists in the announcement of an end. It is the announcement that counts, however, rather than any finality. In this announcement there is a proximity to others and to what was once called parousia. But parousia is no longer presence; it is no longer the return of the Messiah. Rather, it is what is near us and does not cease to open and to close, a presence deferred yet imminent.In a demystified age where we are left with a vision of a self-enclosed world-in which humans are no longer mortals facing an immortal being, but entities whose lives are accompanied by the time of their own decline-parousia stands as a question. Can we venture the risk of a decentered perspective, such that the meaning of the world can be found both inside and outside, within and without our so-immanent world?The deconstruction of Christianity that Nancy proposes is neither a game nor a strategy. It is an invitation to imagine a strange faith that enacts the inadequation of life to itself. Our lives overflow the self-contained boundaries of their biological and sociological interpretations. Out of this excess, wells up a fragile, overlooked meaning that is beyond both confessionalism and humanism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs028
A Faith That Is Nothing at All from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Bergo Bettina
Abstract: Among his singular characteristics, Gérard Granel presents a singularity more singular than others: that of being one of the very rare contemporary philosophers, if not the only one, to have affirmed, for a time, his belonging to the Catholic confession and Church—this while practicing a philosophy clearly tied, on the one hand, to Heidegger and, on the other, to Marx. Broadly speaking, we could say that he is one of the few, if not the only one, to have held together without confusion a religious faith and his engagement in philosophy (no “Christian philosophy,” here, to the contrary!). He
Verbum caro factum from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: For the time of a brief note, for the moment, let us analyze this central proposition of Christianity:
verbum caro factum est(in Greek and in the Gospel of John:logos sarx egeneto). That is the formula of the “incarnation” by which God makes himself man, and that humanity of God is indeed the decisive trait of Christianity, and through it a determinative trait for the whole of Western culture—including the heart of its “humanism,” which it marks indelibly, or may even be its basis (in return for a “divinization” of man—to stick to a short summary treatment).
The Deconstruction of Christianity from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: My question will be very simple, naïve even, as is perhaps fitting at the beginning of a phenomenological procedure: How and to what degree do
we holdto Christianity? How, exactly, are we, in our whole tradition, held by it? I am well aware that this is a question that may appear superfluous, because it
Dis-Enclosure from:
Dis-Enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity
Author(s) Smith Michael B.
Abstract: Space is not the name of a thing, but of that outside of things thanks to which their distinctness is granted them. Things could not be distinct in nature if they did not also occupy distinct places. If I am taking the tree’s place (and not just “replacing it”), there is neither tree nor human being, but something else: a sylvan divinity, for example. When the distinction of place is hindered or rejected, a crushing, a constriction, and a suffocation is produced. That is what we can see in those geological folds and contractions out of which come igneous fusions,
Book Title: Missing Link-The Evolution of Metaphor and the Metaphor of Evolution
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): DONALDSON JEFFERY
Abstract: We look for missing links in the sciences and humanities, but the essential missing link - metaphor - is always in front of us. In Missing Link, Jeffery Donaldson unites literary criticism and evolutionary and cognitive science to show how metaphor has been with us since the beginning of time as a seed in the nature of things. With examples from centuries of poets, critics, philosophers, and scientists, he details how metaphor is a chemistry, an exchange of energies forming and dissolving, and an openness in the spaces between things. He considers the ways in which DNA learns how to liken things that have been, how mutation makes errors and then tries them on, and how evolution is hypothesis - nature's way of "thinking more." The mind is a matrix of relations: neural synapses cascade into ever-changing pathways and patterns. Metaphor is the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen. It is the unbroken thread between matter and spirit. Whether offering analysis of a turn of phrase or chemical reaction, Missing Link presents a vision of literature that is also a vision of the cosmos, and vice versa. It enters the debate between evolution and religion, and challenges scientists, literary theorists, and religious advocates to rethink the relations between their disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bs0fz
Introduction from:
Missing Link
Abstract: It begins with metaphor, with A = B. It begins with identity and difference, with forms attracting and repelling. It begins with the spaces between things, between things and us, and between ourselves and each other. It begins with the gaps that hold us apart and with the binding energies that dwell in gaps. It begins with patterns and unities, with change and possibility, with transgression and impertinence. Metaphor makes us what we are. It is how we got here. It is how we live, how we act, how we think and dream. Metaphor has bequeathed to us the tensions
3 Chemistry: from:
Missing Link
Abstract: “In our beginning is our end” (
Complete, 177). T.S. Eliot’s Alpha-and-Omega shell game is sometimes used as a first salvo in long arguments; it makes my case succinctly, so I’m pressing it into service again. Whatever end we human beings currently represent as evolved metaphoric thinkers is already present and active in whatever beginning the Big Bang represents for our universe. The launching of the metaphoric initiative and the launching of the universe are one and the same event. They consist of the same fabric, a material condition and a pattern of behaviour, a content and a form, as one.
4 DNA and the Three R’s from:
Missing Link
Abstract: The metaphoric initiative was on the move. Getting its big boost from the Big Bang, it expanded, as tensions within gaps are like to do, and quickly constituted the laws of attraction and repulsion among subatomic particles. Metaphoric relation came to inform both the limits and the content of the cosmos. Fostered by an environment that determined its behaviours, the chemicals that burst from the Big Bang bonded with one another and made molecules, the molecules bonded to make compounds, gaseous, liquid, and solid. Nature became a realm of interacting forces of mutual transformation and exchange, dizzyingly complex in its
13 Spirit and Its Metaphoric Environment from:
Missing Link
Abstract: Our symbolic thinker, human being, has set out to design a world that gives it survival advantage. Thinking ahead, testing and deliberating, it has striven to build and inhabit a world that, it would hope, makes sense. The thick cream of its society has been whipped into myriad shapes that stand on their own. At the same time, that most characteristic of human being’s talents, its prowess for symbolic thinking, has evolved a domain unique to itself, where the symbol as symbol has come to the fore, where hypothetical thinking has become a survival-enhancing end in its own right, as
LA JUSTICIA TRAS EL CONFLICTO. from:
Conflicto armado interno, derechos humanos e impunidad
Author(s) Sola Natividad Fernández
Abstract: En contextos de conflictos armados, principalmente de carácter no internacional, la desaparición forzada de personas se convierte en un arma de tipo psicológico con la finalidad de aterrorizar al adversario o al opositor político o en algunos casos, incluso, con finalidad genocida. Las desapariciones de kurdos practicadas por Irak y por Turquía, las desapariciones en Líbano durante la ocupación siria, en Bosnia-Herzegovina, en algunos países latinoamericanos como Colombia y los casos masivos en los últimos años contra la población chechena por parte de Rusia son tan solo algunos ejemplos que ilustran cuanto decimos y traen a nuestra mente atroces escenas
LEY DE CONVIVENCIA Y SEGURIDAD CIUDADANA, O POPULISMO LEGISLATIVO EN NOMBRE DE LA LUCHA CONTRA LA IMPUNIDAD Y LOS DERECHOS DE LAS VÍCTIMAS from:
Conflicto armado interno, derechos humanos e impunidad
Author(s) Álvarez Juan Carlos Álvarez
Abstract: La Ley de Convivencia y Seguridad Ciudadana² es una de esas leyes que por sus finalidades explícitas—y también implícitas—, por la manera como fue tramitada, por los actores que intervinieron y los asuntos de los que se ocupó sirve de punto de referencia para caracterizar algunos rasgos del proceso legislativo de las leyes penales en la Colombia de hoy y para contrastar los objetivos que se pronuncian y los contenidos de las normas que se aprueban. No se trata de algo nuevo, es más bien la constatación, mediante el análisis minucioso del trámite legislativo, de algo que ya
INTRODUCCIÓN from:
Seguridad democrática
Abstract: El presente texto expone los resultados de la investigación acerca de la política de
Seguridad democráticaaplicada en Colombia durante las dos administraciones del presidente Álvaro Uribe Vélez, enmarcada en el contexto internacional. Las preguntas que guiaron la investigación inicialmente estaban referidas a auscultar el impacto directo de esta política en la protección de los derechos humanos de los colombianos y las colombianas,¹ para evaluar hasta qué punto con ella se garantizó u obstaculizó el ejercicio de los derechos.
Capítulo III POLÍTICAS DE SEGURIDAD, ESTRATEGIAS DE CONTROL SOCIAL Y MOVIMIENTOS DE RESISTENCIA EN LA HISTORIA DE COLOMBIA from:
Seguridad democrática
Abstract: La política de
Seguridad democráticade los dos gobiernos del presidente Uribe Vélez, por la manera como se implementó, por el hondo impacto que produjo en la población colombiana y en la opinión pública internacional, pudo dar la impresión al observador desinformado de ser algo completamente insólito y original en la historia colombiana. No obstante, al hacer una atenta revisión de lo ocurrido en los casi doscientos años de vida republicana, encontraremos que en otros momentos de nuestra historia las clases dominantes han acudido a estrategias de seguridad similares en su afán de mantener sus privilegios económicos, de sostener un
Capítulo IV NEOLIBERALISMO Y BONAPARTISMO EN COLOMBIA. from:
Seguridad democrática
Abstract: Dos grandes temas tratamos en el presente capítulo: el primero, referido a las transformaciones económicas que concretan la expansión y consolidación del modelo neoliberal en Colombia, bajo los gobiernos de Uribe Vélez. El segundo, se centra en el análisis del nuevo régimen político instaurado a partir de la presidencia de Uribe, al que caracterizamos como bonapartista y del que exponemos los rasgos fundamentales.
2. FENOMENOLOGÍA COMO EPISTEMOLOGÍA. from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: En la actual discusión filosófica en Latinoamérica, al menos en ciertos círculos universitarios, parece que la fenomenología no solo no tuviera nada que aportar al problema de la filosofía, sino que incluso su pensamiento perjudicara la “cosa misma” de la filosofía. Esto puede ser explicable en su superficie como reacción al pensamiento de años inmediatamente anteriores, muy influenciado por la fenomenología de Husserl, por Scheler, por Heidegger; era un pensamiento filosófico, se dice, cuya vinculación con la política aparecía más bien accidentalmente y no siempre en forma correcta. Un cambio de signo en la intervención política de la filosofía tendría
4. ¿QUÉ TAN REDUCCIONISTA ES LA REDUCCIÓN FENOMENOLÓGICA? from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Me propongo presentar el camino recorrido por el fundador de la fenomenología Edmund Husserl para fundamentar la filosofía y con ella tanto las ciencias como el conocimiento cotidiano en lo que él mismo llamara “el darse las cosas mismas”. Este camino es caracterizado por él como el de la reducción fenomenológica trascendental.
5. LA FENOMENOLOGÍA HUSSERLIANA Y EL POSITIVISMO CIENTÍFICO from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Edmund Husserl crítica el positivismo científico por reducir el sentido del mundo de la vida, como si este consistiera en un conjunto de objetos manipulables instrumentalmente, a la vez que oculta la subjetividad operante tanto a nivel de la ciencia como a nivel de la experiencia precientífica. El retorno al mundo de la vida (
Lebenswelt) como contexto universal de significados y fuente inagotable de recursos para validar las pretensiones de verdad, normatividad y veracidad del sujeto, permite a la fenomenología reconstruir genéticamente el sentido de la ciencia, la técnica y la tecnología como actividad humana determinable ética y responsablemente.
7. LA ÉTICA FENOMENOLÓGICA from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Entre el 2 y el 7 de septiembre de 1934 tuvo lugar en Praga el VIII Congreso Internacional de Filosofía, para el cual se invitó a importantes filósofos, que no podían participar personalmente, a que escribieran sobre “la tarea actual de la filosofía”. Husserl expuso su pensamiento en una carta al presidente del Congreso, seguida por una ponencia, que le serviría un año más tarde como base para su Conferencia de Viena sobre “La filosofía en la crisis de la humanidad europea”.² Esto nos permite pensar que lo que Husserl propone acerca de la función de la filosofía en 1934
8. LA ÉTICA FENOMENOLÓGICA COMO RESPONSABILIDAD PARA LA RENOVACIÓN CULTURAL from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: El texto de Edmund Husserl que se traduce aquí corresponde a una serie de artículos preparados por él entre 1922 y 1924 para la revista japonesa
The Kaizo, de los cuales, aunque estaban previstos cinco, solo se publicaron tres, debido a circunstancias totalmente ajenas al contenido mismo de los ensayos. Se sabe que por esta época la fenomenología tenía mucha acogida en Japón,² lo que explica el que ya desde entonces filósofos japoneses visitaran con frecuencia las clases y los seminarios de Husserl y de Heidegger. Estos artículos pertenecen a una época de abundante producción filosófica de Husserl, caracterizada por
10. COMUNICACIÓN Y MUNDO DE LA VIDA. from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Una lectura desprevenida de Jürgen Habermas permite observar entre sus obras
Conocimiento e interés(1968) yTeoría de la acción comunicativa(1981),³ lo que ya en 1977 caracterizaba autorizadamente Alfred Wellmer como “el giro de la teoría crítica hacia la filosofía analítica del lenguaje”.⁴ Hay un cambio de la teoría del conocimiento a la de la acción comunicativa.
11. EL MUNDO DE LA VIDA COMO TEMA DE LA FENOMENOLOGÍA from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: En este trabajo quiero mostrar cómo entre el pensamiento de Husserl y el de Heidegger se puede descubrir y conservar el mundo de la vida (
Lebenswelt) como tema de la fenomenología. En efecto, si para Husserl el tema de la fenomenología, según la crítica de Heidegger, termina por ser la conciencia inmanente, en el extremo opuesto, para Heidegger termina por ser el “ser” el tema de la fenomenología. Intento ubicarme en el medio, en actitud fenomenológica, en la correlación entre conciencia y ser, para descubrir el mundo de la vida como tema de la fenomenología. Sin embargo, es necesario mostrar
12. CRISIS, FILOSOFÍA Y NUEVO HUMANISMO: from:
Investigaciones fenomenológicas
Abstract: Quiero abordar las relaciones entre filosofía y crisis desde la fenomenología y la teoría crítica, buscando aclarar el sentido de filosofía en cuanto descripción y crítica que adopta la fenomenología de Edmund Husserl, y el sentido de crítica en la crisis sustentado en especial por los fundadores de la teoría crítica de la sociedad, para proponer un modo de solucionar las crisis desde la teoría del actuar comunicacional de Jürgen Habermas en íntima relación con los análisis del mundo de la vida del fundador de la fenomenología. La crisis contemporánea es una crisis de humanidad a la cual debe responder
INTRODUCCIÓN from:
La gestión del testimonio y la administración de las victimas
Abstract: Una lectura de los contextos en los que se han generado las dinámicas de violencia en Colombia, como de las dinámicas socio-históricas y culturales e identitarias de las víctimas y de sus familiares, es fundamental para el desarrollo de una política pública de reparación. Este aspecto supone el reconocimiento tanto de las condiciones diferenciales (étnicas, sociales, políticas y de género) de los impactos de la violencia, como de las estrategias de afrontamiento individuales y colectivas. Implica empezar a develar el entramado de violencias que subyacen al proceso de constitución del Estadonación en Colombia. Un reconocimiento de este nivel permitiría reenfocar
1 Transitional Justice and the Ethics of Anger from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Are the strongly vindictive desires expressed in the first quote above by the witness to a massacre of civilians in Sarajevo fundamentally undesirable or unjustified? Would it have been more commendable if he had rather expressed a desire to see justice done in order to prevent such atrocities from happening again? Or should one at least hope that he has since then been able to transform vindictiveness to a more compassionate attitude to the perpetrators of the heinous crime: hating their acts, but forgiving the agents? What is the moral significance of the experience and expression of anger in the
12 Wishful Thinking? from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: Améry defends both the refusal to let time heal all wounds and the refusal to forgive or forget as being the right and privilege of the moral person. He characterizes his unwillingness to move on or to let go of his
ressentimentsas a display of personal moral virtue, rather than as a failure to be condemned or treated. In fact, he ties the special kind ofressentimentharbored by the survivor of the Holocaust to different kinds of virtues and values: a protest against forgetfulness and shallow conciliatoriness, a struggle to regain dignity; an acute sense of the inexpiable
14 Epilogue: from:
Resentment's Virtue
Abstract: After working extensively with the problems facing postwar countries and with victims in particular, Eric Stover, in a 1999 interview, expressed fatigue with reconciliation talk.² His comments came after the interviewer characterized Stover’s work with forensic investigations and postwar reconstruction as part of a process of reconciliation. I wrote this book because I felt a similar fatigue with the rhetoric of forgiveness, closure, and reconciliation, and I wanted to challenge a certain cluster of unquestioned assumptions and implied inferences. This book offers examples from various contexts, but the rhetoric and logic against which it objects are part of a global
4 The Impossibility of Intentionless Meaning from:
Intention Interpretation
Author(s) MICHAELS WALTER BENN
Abstract: The clearest example OF the tendency to generate theoretical problems by splitting apart terms that are in fact inseparable is the persistent debate over the relation between authorial intention and the meaning of texts. Some theorists have claimed that valid interpretations can only be obtained through an appeal to authorial intentions. This assumption is shared by theorists who, denying the possibility of recovering authorial intentions, also deny the possibility of valid interpretations. But once it is seen that the meaning of a text is simply identical to the author’s intended meaning, the project of
groundingmeaning in intention becomes incoherent.
13 Intention and Interpretation: from:
Intention Interpretation
Author(s) LEVINSON JERROLD
Abstract: The newly written essays in this book—by Gary Iseminger, Nöel Carroll, Colin Lyas, Michael Krausz, Richard Shusterman, Daniel Nathan, and Göran Hermerén—explore in many ways the issues surrounding the interpretation of literary texts and the relation of that activity to the existence and character of an author’s intention in writing such texts. It would not be possible, or particularly desirable, for me to try to summarize in this space the twists and turns in the debate to which I have been asked to make a final contribution. What I plan to do instead is briefly spell out what
Book Title: Italian Irish Filmmakers- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Lourdeaux Lee
Abstract: "This penetrating study examines how these filmmakers confronted their cultural heritage and used it as a counterpoint to their depiction of mainstream America." --American Cinematographer In this unique film history, Lee Lourdeaux traces the impact of Irish and Italian cultures on four major American directors and their work. Defining the core values and tensions within each culture, and especially focusing on the influence of American Catholicism, he presents John Ford, Frank Capra, Francis Coppola, and Martin Scorsese as ethnic Americans and film artists. Lourdeaux shows each filmmaker on set with writers and actors, learning to bypass stereotypes in order to develop a shrewd reciprocal assimilation between his ethnic background and Anglo America. Beginning with D. W. Griffith's depiction of Irish and Italian immigrants, the author discusses Hollywood's stereotypical portrayals of ethnic priests, cops, politicians, and gangsters, as well as their surface acculturation in the movies of the 1920s. By the decade's end, John Ford was using all-American stories to embody the basic myths and tensions of Irish-American life. In his later westerns and foreign films, he tried to understand both Irish political strife and the key figures of Irish liturgy. Frank Capra pitted Italian family values against the Anglo success ethic, turning out social comedies about oppressed little people. Several decades later, Martin Scorsese and Francis Coppola were highly critical of their religio-ethnic heritage, though they gradually discovered that to outline its weaknesses, like the blind pursuit of success, was to fashion a critical mirror of mainstream America. Lourdeaux discusses a number of recent films by Coppola and by Scorsese that have not yet been analyzed in any book. And, in the chapter on Scorsese, a personal interview with the director reveals how his ethnic childhood shaped his work in film. Examining the conflicts within American culture, Lourdeaux shows how the filmmakers themselves had to confront the self-destructive aspects of their ethnic background, not only to accommodate WASP audiences but to better understand their own heritage. He also observes that ethnicity is a strong draw at the box office, as in The Godfather, because it creates a sense of the Other who can both be admired and at the same time ridiculed. Illustrated with scenes of the movies discussed, this fascinating film history tells how four of America's most famous filmmakers assimilated their ethnic backgrounds on set and on screen. "Mr. Lourdeaux walks a tricky path in analyzing the films of each [director]: avoiding the trap of excessively detailing their lives and many films, while steering clear of ethnic stereotyping. Those interested in ethnic influences on outstanding persons or in the production of films by four of the best will find the book enjoyable." --The Baltimore Sun "This is an invaluable book because it arouses critical awareness of the ethnicity underlying many Hollywood movies that might otherwise appear merely to represent American archetypes." --Journal of American Studies "A valuable addition to the literature on ethnic identity in film. The insights Lourdeaux offers into major figures like Griffith, Ford, Capra, Coppola, and Scorsese contribute significantly to our understanding of their films." --Virginia Wright Wexman, University of Illinois at Chicago "For a number of years now, church historians have been giving us an account of American Catholicism that is much richer and more varied than the older institutional accounts of the Catholic Church ever let on. In this comprehensive and insightful study, Lee Lourdeaux shows us how much the ethnic movies of directors like Ford and Capra, Coppola and Scorsese have to teach us as well about Irish- and Italian-Catholic mores and instincts." --John B. Breslin, S.J., Director "A wonderfully sensitive, intelligent study of the complex issue of how the Catholic imagination works in the creative personalities of those raised in the Catholic heritage." --Andrew M. Greeley
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bsx1s
Introduction: from:
Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: In the 191Os, D. W. Griffith used Irish and Italian characters to touch the fears and address the needs of Anglo-American moviegoers: He probed nativist fears in scenes of ethnic violence, and he responded to Anglo needs with subtly distinctive Irish and Italian values. In the 1920s, a second stage commenced with the release of several hundred mainstream films featuring stereotypical ethnics and supposedly
CHAPTER 1 Irish and Italian Immigrants and the Movies from:
Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: In the early 1900s when the American film industry was just getting on its feet, several million Irish and Italians immigrated to America looking for prosperity. They had fled the grinding poverty of Kilkenny and Catania, endured terrible hardships at sea, and then signed up for twelve-hour shifts in American factories. But at least they could feed a large family and gradually build up some savings. Nothing in their ethnic values or their religion prevented them from subscribing to the country’s Anglo-Protestant ethic of hard work, private ownership, and success.
CHAPTER 4 Frank Capra and His Italian Vision of America from:
Italian Irish Filmmakers
Abstract: Frank Capra Frank Capra hails from the same social tradition in American film as D. W. Griffith and John Ford. Like them, he explored issues of family, law, decency, and democracy. Yet, Capra’s distinctive ethnic background also made a difference. Though as much a social moralist as Griffith, Capra brought to his characters an Italian sense of gentle compassion; his familial concern for others was an ethnic world apart from Griffith’s Anglo view of greedy human nature. As for a resemblance to Ford’s work, Capra’s films often relied on communal values and family scenes. But whereas Ford wrestled with age-old
1 Introduction from:
Hegemony
Abstract: Words matter. Currently, there is much talk and writing about
empireorAmerican empire—words used to describe the dominant force in world politics today.¹ I want to challenge this creeping consensus by proposing a different word to describe the current state of affairs. This wordhegemonyis often confused with empire and frequently appears with such ancillary words asimperial, imperialist,and so on, as if they all meant the same thing. Of course, they can be made to mean the same thing. But what if the consensus is fundamentally mistaken about what is actually unique about the current
3 American Hegemony and the New Geography of Power from:
Hegemony
Abstract: In mainstream theories of world politics, the workings of political power are usually seen as a historical constant. They share the view expressed so clearly by Paul Ricoeur that “power does not have much of a history.”¹ At the same time, political power is overwhelmingly associated with “the modern state,” to which all states are supposed to correspond, but which is usually a version of France, England, or the United States regarded as a unitary actor equivalent to an individual person. Political power is envisioned in terms of units of territorial sovereignty (at least for the so-called Great Powers) that
6 Globalizing American Hegemony from:
Hegemony
Abstract: “Globalization” is one of the premier buzz words of the early twenty-first century. In its most general usage it refers to the idea of a world increasingly stretched, shrunk, connected, interwoven, integrated, interdependent, or less territorially divided economically and culturally among national states. It is most frequently seen as an economic-technological process of time-space compression, as a social modernization of increased cultural homogeneity previously national in character scaled up to the world as a whole, or as shorthand for the practices of economic liberalism spontaneously adopted by governments the world over.¹ I do not want to deny the truth in
7 The New Global Economy from:
Hegemony
Abstract: In recent studies of the world economy invoking the impact of globalization, the idea of “time-space compression” or its equivalents have dominated discussion among geographers and many others.¹ This idea postulates that revolutionary changes in communication and transportation technologies are producing a new global economy. In this chapter I challenge the adequacy of this idea for understanding the course of the contemporary world economy and the new uneven development it is producing. In its place I argue for the importance of the geopolitical role of the United States and the vision of world economic order—
transnational liberalism—which, post–1970s,
9 Conclusion from:
Hegemony
Abstract: The terms “globalization” and “imperialism” signify two features of contemporary world politics that are regarded as antagonistic to each other. The former stands for a seemingly autonomous process of globe shrinking or stretching (depending on how you look at it), whereas the latter indicates a self-conscious extraction and movement of profit from some places to others through political domination and coercion more than economic rationality. If advocates of the first tend to have a postmodern, depoliticized view of the world, those of the latter tend to have a profoundly modernist geopolitical view in which dominant states (above all, the United
Book Title: The Roots Of Thinking- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Sheets-Johnstone Maxine
Abstract: "A significant contribution to the study of early humans, this book is a philosophical anthropology.... it makes genuinely novel, and highly persuasive, claims within the field itself." --David Depew In this ground-breaking interdisciplinary study about conceptual origins, Maxine Sheets-Johnstone shows that there is an indissoluble bond between hominid thinking and hominid evolution, a bond cemented by the living body. Her thesis is concretely illustrated in eight paleoanthropological case studies ranging from tool-using/tool-making to counting, sexuality, representation, language, death, and cave art. In each case, evidence is brought forward that shows how thinking is modeled on the body-specifically, how concepts are generated by animate form and the tactile-kinesthetic experience. Later chapters critically examine key theoretical and methodological issues posed by the thesis, Sheets-Johnstone demonstrates in detail how and why a corporeal turn in philosophy and the human sciences can yield insights no less extraordinary than those produced by the linguistic turn. In confronting the currently popular doctrine of cultural relativism and the classic Western metaphysical dualism of mind and body, she shows how pan-cultural invariants of human bodily life have been discounted and how the body itself has not been given its due. By a precise exposition of how a full-scale hermeneutics and a genetic phenomenology may be carried out with respect to conceptual origins, she shows how methodological issues are successfully resolved. "Ranging across the humanities and sciences, this thoroughly original book challenges both traditional metaphysics and contemporary cultural relativism. In their place, it persuasively develops a phenomenonological, tactile-kinesthetic account of the origins of thinking. This philosophical anthropology could not be more timely. It replaces the 'linguistic turn' with a promising new 'corporeal turn.'" --John J. Stuhr, University of Oregon "This work takes a much-needed stand in the inter-disciplinary field of philosophical anthropology. Sheets-Johnstone is well-read in the history of philosophy and in contemporary anthropology. The point of view she offers is inventive, insightful, well-established, and fruitful." --Thomas M. Alexander, Southern Illinois University at Carbondale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14bt5v1
1 The Thesis, the Method, and Related Matters from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: This book is about conceptual origins. In particular, it addresses the question of the conceptual origin of fundamental human practices and beliefs that arose far back in evolutionary human history: tool-making, counting, consistent bipedality, language, the concept of death, engraving and painting. Typically, answers to questions about origins—how a verbal language originated, how counting began, for example—take for granted the very concepts basic to the practice, the concept of oneself as a sound-maker in the case of language, for instance, or the concept of numbers in the case of counting. Insofar as fundamental human practices and beliefs entail
2 The Hermeneutics of Tool-Making: from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: The tools will speak for themselves throughout and in so doing attest to the fact that they are the result of corporeal concepts in the sense in
4 Hominid Bipedality and Primate Sexuality: from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: The purpose of this case study is to launch an examination of a posturally significant and behaviorally critical aspect of hominid bipedality that is consistently overlooked in assessments of its evolutionary impact. Hominid bipedality eventuated in a radically different primate bodily appearance: male sexual characters relatively hidden in quadrupedal primates are visibly exposed in bipedal ones. Conversely, female sexual characters normally visible in quadrupedal primates are relatively hidden in bipedal ones. Loss of estrus—physiological and behavioral—can be explained in the light of continuous and direct male genital exposure. Typical primate estrus cycling was replaced not by year-round female
5 Corporeal Representation from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: To place early hominid sexual signaling behavior in the broader context of communication, and in fact in the broader context of an evolutionary semantics, necessitates first of all an examination of similarities—and thus ultimately continuities—in primate sexual signaling behaviors. It furthermore requires an extensive critical analysis of the privileging of human language since preferential treatment of the latter precludes not only an unbiased investigation of the root of the similarities (and continuities) but acknowledgment and analyses of the body which is the dynamic locus of communicative acts. In the course of meeting both requirements, this chapter will show
9 On the Origin and Significance of Paleolithic Cave Art from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Like the practice of stone tool-making that long preceded it, paleolithic cave drawing originated in a particular kind of tactile–kinesthetic activity, and one similarly giving rise to the creation of spatial forms. With cave drawing, however, the spatial forms entailed concepts tied to pictorial rather than sculptural space. In traditional discussions of cave art where functional or semantic interpretations dominate, little if any attention is given to these concepts. Instead, theories are advanced—and disputed—concerning the representation of animals and the practice of hunting-magic; figural representations in general are analyzed in the context of fertility rites, sexual symbolism,
10 The Thesis and Its Opposition: from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Ludwig Wittgenstein’s question and sardonic remark on thinking quoted at the beginning of the first chapter underscores the fact that by current Western standards, thinking remains a more inaccessible mystery than either consciousness or intelligence, and this in spite of its immediate accessibility and ostensive prevalence throughout all human societies at the very least.¹ It is not surprising, then, that the origin and genealogy of thinking is not a prominent concern in philosophy or the human sciences, or that the relationship between the evolution of hominid thinking and hominid evolution has never been seriously examined. Yet in some respects the
12 The Case for a Philosophical Anthropology from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Philosophical anthropology. The label conjures up a hybrid few have heard of, and for many of those, a hybrid of questionable viability. Indeed, the words sound a flat thud in the ears of most philosophers and a rude intrusion in the ears of most anthropologists, who hardly want anything to do with it. Some would in fact question the very existence of such an animal since the cross-disciplinary marriage necessary to its birth is believed never to have been consummated—at least to the satisfaction of both parties.
13 Methodology: from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: The paleoanthropological case studies in Part II demonstrate a fullscale hermeneutical methodology in action. It is apposite in this chapter only to illustrate in greater detail the method’s central role in elucidating the roots of human thinking through corporeal analyses, and to examine in greater detail its central role in the science of paleoanthropology itself. An abbreviated look at interpretations of stone tool-making, and then of upright posture, will first demonstrate how a full-scale hermeneutics of the body is called for.
15 The Case for Tactile–Kinesthetic Invariants from:
The Roots Of Thinking
Abstract: Epistemological justification of sufficient similarity answers the second question posed in the last chapter, namely, How do we know what the point of view of ancestral hominids was in the first place? The justification rests ultimately on the body. If present-day humans can approximate to the point of view of their hominid ancestors, then explicit corporeal grounds exist for affirming that approximation. Tactile–kinesthetic invariants obviously provide the strongest and most direct way of demonstrating those grounds. Rather than taking up these invariants straightaway, however, a more circuitous epistemological route will be followed, and this in order to demonstrate how
1 On Writing a Philosophical Novel from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lipman Matthew
Abstract: IN 1969, having taught introductory logic to college students for some years, I was beginning to have serious concerns about its value. I had entertained similar doubts while I was a graduate student, for I hadn’t found the subject a congenial one. But when one has taught a course for several years, one comes to think of it as useful and meaningful, whatever one’s earlier reservations. Yet, I found myself wondering what possible benefit my students were obtaining from studying the rules for determining the validity of syllogisms or from learning how to construct contrapositives. Did they actually reason any
2 How Old Is Harry Stottlemeier? from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Lipman Matthew
Abstract: ASCERTAINING the age of fictional characters can be treacherous. Take Pixie, after whom one of the Philosophy for Children novels is named. Pixie remarks, at the very beginning of the book, “How old am I? The same age you are.” If she is addressing us, and we are of all ages, then so is she. But can we be sure that she is speaking to us?
[PART THREE: Introduction] from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Abstract: The first chapter in this part is Ann Margaret Sharp’s “Discovering Yourself a Person.” Here she examines Chapter One of Harry Stottlemeier’s Discovery. In it, Sharp finds that because the first chapter relies heavily on the analysis of concepts like reasoning, reflecting, falsifying, inquiring, and so on, it is an appropriate place for the discovery (or invention, it might be added) of who and what we are. As one watches the characters in Harry begin the process of inquiry and as one watches them stumble toward the formation ofa community, one finds them formulating individual ways or styles of thinking.
12 A Guided Tour of the Logic in Harry Stottlemeier’s Discovery from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Splitter Laurance J.
Abstract: LOGIC FORMS the backbone of the
Harrysyllabus, although it is by no means the only philosophical theme that arises there. However, the logical discoveries—exemplified by the persistence and single-mindedness of the central character, Harry—constitute a recurring theme that weaves its way through the overall story, and thereby into the thought and talk of the classroom community of inquiry. For it is logic that holds our thinking together—the rules and principles of logic provide criteria for distinguishing better thinking from worse. It is logic in language that makes reasoning possible.
15 Countering Prejudice with Counterexamples from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Guin Philip C.
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER I intend to accomplish three major objectives. I will show that sensitivity to the rule of contradiction can be useful in the lives of children, especially in combating prejudice and discrimination. Sensitivity to the rule encourages children to seek counterexamples to universal judgments. Second, I will argue that sociological models that attempt to delineate the roots of prejudice can be complemented by an understanding of the rule of contradiction. Here I am concerned with the phenomenon, cited by such models, of assimilating relative differences among groups, which in fact may be true, to overgeneralizations that allege natural
16 On The Art and Craft of Dialogue from:
Studies in Philosophy for Children
Author(s) Reed Ronald F.
Abstract: THE TASK of this chapter is a fairly complex one. In the course of a few pages, I will attempt to explain this “thing” called “Philosophy for Children,” paying special attention to assumptions, goals, strategies, and evidence regarding its success or failure. I will then try to relate discoveries made in the practice of Philosophy for Children to problems that may arise for art educators as they develop curricula designed to involve students in aesthetic inquiry.
Program Notes from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) Stowe John Chappell
Abstract: A week later I wrote back, “Hey, nice to hear! Thanks. Actually, come to think of it, I may have a piece for you.” I attached the abstract and a draft of a paper I had
3 Stranger Danger: from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) MARTIN JOHN LEVI
Abstract: Michael Bell proposes that modern composition, like modern sociological theory, has low tolerance for being surprised. He argues that making a space for such contrary action—strangency—is related to a more dialogic conception of music and theory. Although his critiques of composition and theory seem justified, it is far from clear (1) that the “actor” in theory is analogous to the “performer” in music or that the theorist is thus parallel to a composer, (2) that allowing performers more freedom in playing does what Bell seems to want, and (3) that sociology can do much with an attention to
4 A Sisyphean Process? from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) STEINBERG MARC W.
Abstract: It is a great pleasure to respond to “Strange Music.” I almost never get to engage a fellow sociologist in a discussion of dialogics and certainly none more astute to the writings of the Bakhtin Circle than Michael Bell. “Strange Music” is vital not only because it raises the profile of dialogics within the field but also because it highlights current critical debates of epistemology and practice (to which other of the respondents to the essay have been quite central).
5 Growing a Chorus from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) BLAU JUDITH
Abstract: I may have skipped a beat somewhere, but the idea that sociology aims for explanation seems old-fashioned to me. My sociology aims for revolution. We live in a small and shrinking world with an out-of-control CIA, Pentagon, and president; a reactionary Supreme Court; and greedy CEOs; and we live in a world that faces looming environmental crises. America has the highest rate of incarceration the entire world, ranks at the bottom of all Organization for Economic Co-operation and Development member countries on its rate infant mortality, and has the highest Gini coefficient on income inequality. We torture prisoners in violation
6 Why I Like Contemporary Classical Music and Contemporary Sociological Theory: from:
The Strange Music of Social Life
Author(s) KHAN SHAMUS
Abstract: I had never heard of classical music’s first principle until I read Michael Bell’s paper (that principle is “Do what you are told”). In fact, as a violinist, what immediately popped into my head as a “first principle” was “Play in tune!” This is exactly what I was told the first time I ever played for the pedagogue Dorothy DeLay (to be more accurate, I was told, “Sugarplum, you need to work on your intonation”). So I started to ask musicians I know—some known, some working on becoming so, and some just working—“What is the first principle of
Book Title: A Moral Military- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Axinn Sidney
Abstract: Axinn answers "yes" to these questions. His objective in
A Moral Militaryis to establish a basic framework for moral military action and to assist in analyzing military professional ethics. He argues for the seriousness of the concept of military honor but limits honorable military activity by a strict interpretation of the notion of war crime.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14btf9m
3 Military Honor and the Laws of Warfare: from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: In ideal terms, military honor is military persons’ display of what Thomas Hobbes called
the relish of justice:“That which gives to human actions the relish of justice, is a certain nobleness or gallantness of courage, rarely found, by which a man scorns to be beholden for the contentment of his life, to fraud, or breach of promise.”¹ In other words, honor is honesty even when it hurts. If honor is desirable and if Hobbes is right that it is rarely found, can we teach it?
6 Spies from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: Suppose the two countries involved are at peace. Does this definition apply to the case of obtaining restricted (confidential, secret, or other classified)² information from one’s own country with the intention of giving it to a foreign power when the two countries are not at war? While such an act may be most serious and
7 Nonhostile Relations with the Enemy from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: What dealings, other than hostilities, does a military unit have with its enemy? In addition to the responsibility for POWs, several kinds are to be expected. An armistice period, a period in which fighting ceases, may have to be arranged and carefully monitored. A surrender may be agreed upon and carried out. These activities, along with travel within occupied territory, must be regulated. Occupation of a territory may require all or most of the machinery of the ordinary government.
9 The Dirty-Hands Theory of Command from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: If we take our subject seriously, the theory of leadership known as “dirty hands” must be considered. Without this theory, a discussion of military morality would seem unreal. Briefly, the theory holds that in order to govern an institution, one must sometimes do things that are immoral. To act properly as a mayor of a city, a chief of a police department, a head of a large corporation, or a commander of an engaged military unit, one must have morally dirty hands. Further, this theory insists, we do not want leaders who are so concerned with their own personal morality
10 Torture from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: Tony Lagouranis, who spent a year in Iraq as a U.S. Army military interrogator in Abu Ghraib and other prisons, says that he “noticed something very disturbing. People are absolutely fascinated by torture. As soon as someone learns that I was an interrogator, I can see him formulate the next question.… ‘Did you torture anyone?’ It comes from people all across the political spectrum, from people both disgusted by torture and from people who actually want the troops to do it.”¹ I’ll leave to the psychologists the question of why people are so fascinated by torture. This chapter will deal
12 Conclusions from:
A Moral Military
Abstract: To judge moral status calls for us to locate three factors: (1) the moral
actor, (2) thebeneficiaryof
II. CONDICIONES DE POSIBILIDAD DE LOS PROCESOS DE RECUPERACIÓN FABRIL from:
Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: La ocupación de fábricas ha sido una estrategia utilizada por los trabajadores en distintos momentos de la historia argentina. Para analizar la emergencia de los actuales procesos de recuperación fabril es necesario, en primer lugar, reconstruir las condiciones históricas que hicieron posible dichas prácticas, es decir, ubicar el horizonte en el que adquieren significación y singularidad. Historizar el fenómeno social estudiado es un ejercicio fundamental para desnaturalizarlo y temporalizarlo. Ello no significa concebir las acciones como el efecto mecánico de causas externas que vienen dadas de una vez y para siempre, sino más bien considerar que las prácticas de los
IV. LA DEFINICIÓN JURÍDICO-POLÍTICA DE LA “FÁBRICA RECUPERADA” from:
Fábrica de resistencias y recuperación social
Abstract: Las fábricas recuperadas se ubican entre las formas emergentes de organización y reivindicación de los trabajadores y, en cuanto tales, su reglamentación e institucionalización es una manifestación de la extensa y profunda transformación del
campo del trabajoargentino. La definición de la forma legítima que debe adoptar esta formación social equivale a lapuesta en juegodelcampodelimitado en esta investigación, que consiste en la producción de las reglas que distribuyen los recursos necesarios para intervenir en la actividad político-económica y expresan la relación de fuerza entre los agentes del campo que tienden a imponer su definición usando los
Humanismo emergente y antropología de la dominación en Augusto Salazar Bondy para una reconstrucción de la tradición del humanismo latinoamericano from:
Liberación, Interculturalidad e Historia de las idea. Estudios sobre el pensamiento filosófico en América Latina
Author(s) Arpini Adriana
Abstract: En su acepción primera y restringida,
Humanismoalude a la actitud consciente de estimación de las letras clásicas; a su estudio y cultivo en tanto expresión de lahumanitas. Es decir que el Humanismo clásico consiste en la exaltación de lo humano, que por su dignidad merece ser cultivado, y en la convicción de que tal cultivo se logra por medio de las letras, sobre el supuesto del carácter ejemplar de la Antigüedad Clásica. Sin embargo, ambos caracteres no resultan inescindibles. Tras la controversia de los “antiguos” y los “modernos” se hace progresivamente manifiesto que es posible la afirmación de
Book Title: 1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos- Publisher: University of Santiago de Chile
Author(s): Álvarez Rolando
Abstract: Este libro no pretende hacer un balance de la historiografía actual acerca del comunismo chileno. Más bien representa un momento en su desarrollo, reuniendo, principalmente, los trabajos que fueron presentados en las III Jornadas de Historia de las Izquierdas en Chile, realizadas en junio de 2012, y que en esta versión estuvo dedicada a los 100 años del comunismo local. El papel que el comunismo chileno ha jugado en el desarrollo político del país a lo largo de los pasados cien años, explica el interés que ha despertado en la historiografía que analiza a Chile del siglo XX. En los últimos años, el renovado interés por la historia política –con sus nuevas simbiosis con la historia social, cultural o internacional– ha tenido al comunismo chileno en el centro de sus múltiples realizaciones.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14jxs77
Prólogo from:
1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Abstract: El año 2012 el Partido Comunista Chileno celebró 100 años de vida. Pocos partidos políticos en el mundo actual y menos en América Latina pueden demostrar tanta longevidad. Fundado en 1912 por Luis Emilio Recabarren como Partido Obrero Socialista, cambió de nombre en 1922 al adherir a la Tercera Internacional, pasando a llamarse Partido Comunista de Chile. A diferencia de la casi totalidad de los partidos socialistas de la época, no se trató de una escisión por la izquierda de la antigua agrupación, sino de la incorporación del partido en su conjunto a la citada Internacional. A lo largo de
El Partido Comunista de Chile y las políticas del tercer periodo, 1931-1934 from:
1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Barnard Andrew
Abstract: Cinco años después de su fundación, en 1922, el partido Comunista de Chile (PCCh) fue proscrito y perseguido por el gobierno autoritario del General Carlos Ibáñez, situación que se prolongaría por cuatro años. Aunque durante ese tiempo el PCCh experimentó duras pérdidas y dificultades, las condiciones generales que reinaban en Chile cuando el partido emergió de la clandestinidad en 1931 parecían ser particularmente propicias para su rápida recuperación, e incluso para el triunfo final de la causa revolucionaria. Durante los primeros años de la década de 1930, Chile recibió de lleno el impacto de la Gran Depresión, resultando de ello
“Los destructores del Partido”: from:
1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Tapia Manuel Loyola
Abstract: En 1958, en momentos en que el Partido Comunista de Chile (PCCh) recobraba su legalidad¹, su órgano de difusión teóricopolítica, la Revista
Principios, dedicó un número expresamente para abordar las nuevas tareas de la organización. Como parte de los fundamentos que debían animar la nueva fase de la actuación partidaria, se recurrió a dejar en claro que la etapa que se abría no podía sino ser expresión de un signo primordial de su trayectoria: su “indestructibilidad”, no obstante el cúmulo de acciones que desde fuera y desde dentro de la organización se habían ejecutado en los últimos diez años en
El Partido Comunista y las representaciones de la crisis del carbón: from:
1912-2012 El siglo de los comunistas chilenos
Author(s) Barahona Cristina Moyano
Abstract: La transición a la democracia en Chile generó un conjunto de nuevas expectativas en distintos actores sociales. Tras 17 años de dictadura, se esperaba un proceso de democratización creciente, sin embargo, el nuevo gobierno asumió restringido por un conjunto de normas heredadas de la dictadura, así como también, con un conjunto de nuevas imágenes y conceptos que se habían construido durante la experiencia dictatorial, en el que se redefinieron componentes claves de la cultura política y que caracterizarán al menos los tres primeros gobiernos concertacionistas en forma consecutiva. En ese proceso de redefinición, se juegan la significación de los actores
2. Las dos transiciones futuras: from:
Religión, Política y Cultura en América Latina. Nuevas miradas
Author(s) Freston Paul
Abstract: No hay nada de novedoso en decir que la relación entre religión, sociedad y política en América Latina ha cambiado dramáticamente en las últimas décadas, con la Iglesia Católica enfrentando diversos dilemas y los evangélicos creciendo numéricamente y buscando transferir su tradición de activismo para el campo de la política formal. Tampoco es novedoso decir que los evangélicos no parecen ser amenaza a la democracia latinoamericana, y pueden quizás fortalecer las
consolidaciones democráticas(aunque generalmente no tanto lastransiciones democráticas). Pero aquí quiero hablar de otras transiciones, dedos transiciones futuras. Pues, si los cambios fueron grandes en las décadas
6. Política y catolicismo en el gobierno del Dr. Kirchner: from:
Religión, Política y Cultura en América Latina. Nuevas miradas
Author(s) Mallimaci Fortunati
Abstract: Luego de la caída del bloque soviético en los 90 y el fin de la polarización capitalismo-comunismo, la dimensión política de las religiones aparece en el centro de las reflexiones de las ciencias sociales. La caída del bloque socialista tiene -entre múltiples causas- la participación activa de instituciones, creyentes y símbolos cristianos que colaboraron a su disolución. Al mismo tiempo la homogeneidad del mercado desbocado diluye los sólidos de la modernidad, debilita sus oposiciones históricas en el campo político-partidario y aparece el mundo religioso -en su multiplicidad, diversidad y globalidad- siendo también diluido pero también como uno de sus posibles
14. Religión y cambio climático: from:
Religión, Política y Cultura en América Latina. Nuevas miradas
Author(s) G. Cristián Parker
Abstract: La conciencia medioambiental está creciendo desde las últimas décadas del siglo XX, pero estamos ante una situación particularmente interesante y desafiante dado que el cambio climático está impactando de manera inusitada al planeta. En efecto, el cambio climático producido por el calentamiento global108 de la tierra, está afectando la vida en el planeta, produciendo intensas lluvias y tormentas en algunas regiones y sequías y desertificación en otras, afectando la agricultura y la salud y variando ecosistemas, recursos hídricos y costas. El Grupo Intergubernamental de Expertos sobre el Cambio Climático (IPCC, sigla en inglés), fundado en 1988 por la Organización Meteorológica
Book Title: Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923- Publisher: Royal Irish Academy
Author(s): Jones Heather
Abstract: This book arrives on foot of a decade of commemorations. Contemporary Ireland was founded during the fractious years of 1912-1923. This volume features essays by leading historians, journalists, civic activists and folklorists. The outstanding body of scholarship offers a complexity of new views in the debate how to commemorate a divided past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14jxtrg
1 Violence and War in Europe and Ireland, 1911–14 from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Mulligan William
Abstract: Both Irish and European politics were riven with conflict between 1911 and 1914. For all the difference of scale between them, they were connected both by the nature of the tensions involved and also by the potential impact of the Irish crisis on the United Kingdom as one of the leading great powers. At the international level there were wars between Italy and the Ottoman Empire in 1911 and 1912, and two wars in the Balkans in 1912 and 1913. In addition, the great powers consolidated their alliances, gave increasing weight to narrowly defined conceptions of military security, and embarked
6 Ireland and the Wars After the War, 1917–23 from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Horne John
Abstract: What happens if we enlarge the time frame of the Great War? European and world politics were militarised well before the war. In both Ireland and the Balkans, the violence that fed directly into the war started in 1912–13, as William Mulligan has shown in chapter 1. Continued militarisation of politics and far worse violence prolonged the fighting beyond 1918. In fact, the Great War was the epicentre of a larger cycle of conflict that did not finish until 1923, with the end of the war between Greece and Turkey, the resolution of the crisis over German reparations—which
9 The Long Road from:
Towards Commemoration: Ireland in war in revolution 1912-1923
Author(s) Hartley Tom
Abstract: It is often said that the journey is more important than arriving at the destination. Life as a political activist has posed many challenges, with many twists and turns, and it has often been uncomfortable. If there is one thread that holds this experience together, it is my political aspiration for a thirty-two-county united and independent Ireland. I cannot tell you when this aspiration entered my consciousness, yet it has always been there in my living memory, and it is probably fair to say that my own aspirations and political experience are reflective of the journey of the Northern nationalist
Book Title: Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns-Linguistic and Rhetorical Perspectives on a Collection of Prayers from Qumran
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Hasselbalch Trine B.
Abstract: Hasselbalch asserts that current theories about the social background of Thanksgiving Hymns are unable to explain its heterogeneous character. Instead the author suggests a reading strategy that leaves presumptions about the underlying social contexts aside to instead consider the collection's hybridity as a clue to understanding the collection as a whole.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt14jxv6p
6 Two Voices in Unison: from:
Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: The heterogeneous nature of 1QHodayot
ais underscored by the presence of this text in the collection. Because of its exceptional character,
7 Recapitulation and Recontextualization: from:
Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: The heterogeneous character of the collection must be explained. The prevailing idea that some compositions basically expressed leadership issues whereas others expressed the sentiments of ordinary community members has not been very helpful. on the contrary, this
8 Conclusions from:
Meaning and Context in the Thanksgiving Hymns
Abstract: This book is basically a study of how we can, or cannot, access the contexts of ancient texts—in this case 1QHodayot
a. Textual interpretation is in part a question of understanding the meaning of a text in light of its sociohistorical circumstances. More specifically, I have attempted to reach a meaningful explanation for the heterogeneous character of 1QHodayota. So far, explanations have been based on the notion that differences between the so-called Leader Hymns and the so-called Community Hymns mirror a social dichotomy, and that the one group of hymns was spoken by the community leadership, whereas the other was
Chapter Four The Fisherman from:
Huihui
Author(s) Puleloa Michael
Abstract: There’s a community meeting at the Kulana ‘Ōiwi hālau in Kalama‘ula. It’s a big one. There’s going to be a presentation on the vacant property makai of Kaunakakai Town, on a development project, and many people from across the island show up because they don’t like the word. Development. There’s a popular bumper sticker on the island, in fact, that reads, “Don’t change Moloka‘i. Let Moloka‘i change you.” And local people take this to heart.
Chapter Eleven Sovereignty out from under Glass? from:
Huihui
Author(s) King Lisa
Abstract: The long relationship between Euro-American museums and Indigenous peoples bears a legacy of problems and abuses, as museums have interpreted Indigenous peoples’ histories and cultures through an exclusively Euro-American worldview. The Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum of Honolulu is no exception. It is this chapter’s purpose to explore the ways in which the Bishop Museum has recognized this colonial rhetorical framework through which it has maintained and displayed its collections. In particular, the chapter analyzes how the 2006–2009 renovation of the Hawaiian Hall facilities at the Bishop Museum was an active, if ultimately ambiguous, attempt to decolonize the rhetorical habits
Chapter Twenty I write (J’écris) from:
Huihui
Author(s) Anderson Jean
Abstract: in our country as in every colonized country is not the act of writing in and of itself the supreme act of protest re sis tance subversion dissidence does it not carry within itself all the ferment the protests that will sprout forth blossom open out multiply
Book Title: Joy and Human Flourishing-Essays on Theology, Culture, and the Good Life
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Volf Miroslav
Abstract: Joy is crucial to human life and central to God’s relationship to the world, yet it is remarkably absent from contemporary theology and, increasingly, from our own lives! This collection, the result of a series of consultations hosted by the Yale Center of Faith and Culture, remedies this situation by considering the import of joy on human flourishing. These essays—written by experts in systematic and pastoral theology, Christian ethics, and biblical studies—demonstrate the promise of joy to throw open new theological possibilities and cast fresh light on all dimensions of human life. With contributions from Jurgen Moltmann, N. T. Wright, Marianne Meye Thompson, Mary Clark Moschella, Charles Mathewes, and Miroslav Volf, this volume puts joy at the heart of Christian faith and life, exploring joy’s biblical, dogmatic, ecclesiological, and ethical dimensions in concert with close attention to the shifting tides of culture. Convinced of the need to offer to the world a compelling Christian vision of the good life, the authors treat the connections between joy and themes of creation, theodicy, politics, suffering, pastoral practice, eschatology, and more, driven by the conviction that vital relationship with the living God is integral to our fullest flourishing as human creatures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2mp
Introduction: from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Crisp Justin E.
Abstract: Why joy—and why now? It is perhaps counterintuitive for joy to occupy a central place in a Christian theology, or at least in a theology capable of taking seriously the state of the world in which we live. Have not the masters of suspicion sufficiently warned theologians away from commending religious sentiments that, in their spiritual purity, distract their subjects from the material situation of life and issue in a total flight from the world? Did not the manifold tragedies of the mid-twentieth century disabuse theologians once and for all of their Pollyanna-ish penchant for progress, their sure confidence
4 Toward a Theology of Joy from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Mathewes Charles
Abstract: Christians regularly confess that humanity’s “chief and highest end is to glorify God, and fully to enjoy him forever,” as the Westminster Catechism puts it. But what exactly it is to glorify God, and to enjoy God forever, is a matter of some dispute. In fact, none of us can safely say that we fully understand what those words mean. We are called to a destiny that we can name, but one whose inner energies remain veiled to our eyes, in this dispensation at least.
6 The Crown of the Good Life: from:
Joy and Human Flourishing
Author(s) Volf Miroslav
Abstract: “To¹ miss the joy is to miss all,” wrote Robert Louis Stevenson in his essay “The Lantern-Bearers” (1887).² No matter what we possess or experience and irrespective of how we act, if we miss joy we have missed all. Stevenson’s bold and perhaps exaggerated claim is a distant and garbled echo of the accolade the Master in one of Jesus’ parables gave to the good and trustworthy servant: “Enter into the joy of your master!” (Matt. 25:23). Here joy is
thereward for a job well done and a hefty return on investment achieved, which is to say, the reward
3 Moral Conversion and the Structure of the Good from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we considered religious conversion in terms of an inchoate (total) fulfillment of our conscious-intentional orientation toward meaning, truth, and goodness. It is the experience of God’s love flooding our hearts (Rom. 5:5), of being loved by God “before the foundation of the world” (Eph. 1:4). This involves a radical shift in our horizon so that in everything we do we act on a different level, with an expanded range of possibilities for meaning, truth and goodness. Still, as with the human experience of falling in love, this is only the first momentous step in our sustained
5 Psychic Conversion and the Question of Beauty from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: Thus far, we have considered religious, moral, and intellectual conversions and their foundational role in the life of the theologian seeking to be an authentic subject engaged in theological work. The question can arise as to whether this is an exhaustive account of the foundational theological subject. What other types of conversion might we consider? Previously we have mentioned our fundamental orientation to meaning, truth, and goodness. Goodness and values relate to moral conversion, while questions of meaning and truth relate to intellectual conversion. We have already seen how the presence and absence of these conversions may impact on the
7 Revelation and Divine Self-Communication from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: Since the era of Vatican II, it has become a commonplace to speak of revelation as an act of
divine self-communication. This terminology, derived from the work of Karl Rahner and adopted by Pope John Paul II, seeks to express the fact that God does not simply communicate various “facts” about God’s life and his relationship to us; rather God communicates God’s very self to us.¹ God is both the communicator and what is communicated. As Scripture puts it, we have become sharers in the divine nature (2 Pet. 1:4). God communicates something of the divine nature to us in
8 Heuristic Anticipation of Doctrines from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: The task of foundations is not to preempt doctrines, but at the same time, sound foundations provide heuristic anticipations of doctrines, especially as these foundations emerge out of dialectical conflicts of interpretations of the history of doctrinal development. Without actually coming to the point of making a judgment, one can argue for the congruence of foundational categories with key doctrines such as Trinity, Incarnation, and Church. Many of the questions about the reasonableness of central doctrines are taken up in traditional fundamental theology, but in the form of apologetics and emphasizing credibility. Here, the goal is more modest, to show
9 The Communicative Context from:
Foundational Theology
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we provided a heuristic anticipation of certain positions in relation to the church, its nature and mission. In this chapter, we move from those more abstract considerations to the present and more concrete context of the church’s mission and communication, in a world of growing secularism on the one hand, and increasing exposure to religious pluralism on the other, while still drawing on the foundations developed in the first part of our work. Let us begin then with an ending:
Ite missa est. These words express the dismissal declared at the end of the Roman Catholic
Book Title: Puzzling the Parables of Jesus-Methods and Interpretations
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Zimmermann Ruben
Abstract: Modern scholarship on the parables has long been preoccupied with asking what Jesus himself said and what he intended to accomplish with his parables. Ruben Zimmermann moves beyond that agenda to explore the dynamics of parabolic speech in all its rich complexity. Introductory chapters address the history of research and distinguish historical from literary and reader-oriented approaches, then set out a postmodern hermeneutic that analyzes narrative elements and context, maps the sociohistorical background, explores stock metaphors and symbols, and opens up contemporary horizons of interpretation. Subsequent chapters then focus on one parable from early Christian sources (Q, Mark, Matthew, Luke, John, and the Gospel of Thomas) to explore how parables function in each literary context. Over all reigns the principle that the meaning or theological “message" of a parable cannot be extracted from the parabolic form; thus the parables continue to invite hearers' and readers' involvement to the present day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j2q7
2 Understanding the Parables over the Past Century: from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: As was demonstrated in the last chapter, the parables of Jesus are texts that can be considered from three different perspectives. First, they are historical texts that arose in a particular time and cultural space and that are part of a history of tradition. Second, they are fictional texts that have a typical form and poetic style and that use literary devices. Third, they are texts notably addressed to their recipients, their hearers and readers, in order to evoke a process of thinking and rethinking that ultimately leads to deeper insights and even corresponding (re-)action. In order to understand parables,
10 The Good Samaritan (Luke 10:30–35) and the Parables in Luke from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: Some of the Lukan parables portray a surprising level of complexity of stylistic elements and characterization. For instance, two marked introductions for
11 The Dying and Living Grain (John 12:24) and the Parables in John from:
Puzzling the Parables of Jesus
Abstract: The next sample parable has been taken from the Gospel of John. But are there actually any parables in John? In much of parable scholarship, John is ignored as a source of the parables of Jesus. This may have been due to the close relationship between parable-research and historical Jesus-research. If the goal was to reconstruct the original Jesus wording, the late Fourth Gospel seemed to be worthless with regard to the parables. Many of these presuppositions have been challenged in current New Testament scholarship. This alone justifies a short preliminary comment on the issue with regard to research history
1 Lord, Liar, Lunatic … or Just Freaking Awesome from:
The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: I have discovered a secret way of solving the most perplexing theological questions. My college roommate and I invented it in our dorm room as a way of finding answers to some of our most contentious debates. We were religion and philosophy majors, which means we argued about religion and politics as a kind of recreational sport. When we arrived at an intractable difference of opinions, we settled it like any nineteen-year-old scholar should—by playing a video game. We settled our disputes over a game of Madden 2001, to be exact. We decided that the best way for the
2 Jesus’ Jewish Neighborhood from:
The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: Jesus was Jewish. I know it seems obvious, but here’s a crazy fact: until fairly recently, scholarship about Jesus didn’t really take his Jewishness into account. Throughout the early church, the Middle Ages, and the Reformation, the experts who studied Jesus in the Bible pretty much ignored the fact that Jesus, his disciples, his opponents, and just about everyone who wrote about him in the New Testament were
Jews. That means Augustine, Aquinas, Luther—they all overlooked the fact that Jesus and the whole cast of characters were Jewish. And to make it even crazier, some of them (cough, Luther,
3 Abba Says, “Drop the G” from:
The Homebrewed Christianity Guide to Jesus
Abstract: I remember the first time I talked to someone who really had no clue about Jesus—she knew nothing about him beyond his birth story, death story, and accompanying holidays. Her name was Angela, and she was a college sophomore sent to interview a minister from the religion she was least attracted to. That’s probably not how it was written in the syllabus, but it definitely made for a conversation I wasn’t going to pass up.
Introduction from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: In order to get a sense of the multifaceted nature of Karl Barth’s ethics, one thing to do is to conjure up before the inner eye images that western societies commonly associate with a long interval of the twentieth century such as the years between 1932 and 1967. This was the time it took Barth to publish his multi-volume
Church Dogmatics (CD),¹ which comprises both theology and ethics. Moreover, the various social, ecclesial and political contexts of his work are reflected in the fact that the critical edition of Barth’s works includes five volumes of individual smaller texts, written for
1 The Development of Barth’s Ethics from the First Epistle to the Romans to Church Dogmatics I/1 from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: In Barth’s early thought, two major aspects are of particular ethical significance. To begin with, Barth attributes great significance to the notion of sacrifice and repentance, which the literature on Barth has not sufficiently noted.¹ In order to keep this critical, negative dimension from dominating ethics, Barth eventually developed the actualistic concept of revelation.² This is the roadmap for this chapter’s discussion of Barth’s major works from the first edition of
The Epistle to the Romans(henceforthRomI) toCDI/1.
2 The Ethics of the Doctrine of God in Church Dogmatics II/2 from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: “Judgment
andgrace, condemnationandbeatification—these are always the implications of this event, of God’s command in its revelation. It encounters me thus, killing me and making me alive.”¹ As the ethics lectures highlighted especially the aspect of judgment in discussing God’s command, the notion that moral obligation is constituted by the gospel did not attain full force—on the contrary. Even to the extent that the gospel rather than the law ultimately determined the sinner’s status before God, Barth drew attention to this relationcoram Deorather than to the moral reality of an ethos, of actions and
3 The Ethics of the Doctrine of Creation in Church Dogmatics III/4 from:
Citizenship in Heaven and on Earth
Abstract: The discussion of
CDII/2, chapter 8 detected a significant contradiction between ethical actualism on the one hand and the priority of the gospel over the law or the doctrine of election on the other. The ensuing volumes ofCDIII deal with the doctrine of creation. The subvolume discussing the ethical aspects of the doctrine of creation,CDIII/4, discusses those ethical questions that arise with regard to God’s work as Creator. In part, Barth explicitly retains the actualistic concept of ethics, especially at the beginning. Yet at the same time, he engages in the discussion of empirical phenomena,
Book Title: The Executed God-The Way of the Cross in Lockdown America
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Taylor Mark Lewis
Abstract: The new edition of Mark Lewis Taylor’s award-winning The Executed God is both a searing indictment of the structures of “Lockdown America" and a visionary statement of hope. It is also a call for action to Jesus followers to resist US imperial projects and power. Outlining a “theatrics of state terror," Taylor identifies and analyzes its instruments—mass incarceration, militarized police tactics, surveillance, torture, immigrant repression, and capital punishment—through which a racist and corporatized Lockdown America enforces in the US a global neoliberal economic and political imperialism. Against this, The Executed God proposes a “counter-theatrics to state terror," a declamation of the way of the cross for Jesus followers that unmasks the powers of US state domination and enacts an adversarial politics of resistance, artful dramatic actions, and the building of peoples’ movements. These are all intrinsic to a Christian politics of remembrance of the Jesus executed by empire. Heralded in its first edition, this new edition is thoroughly revised, updated, and expanded, offering a demanding rethinking and recreating of what being a Christian is and of how Christianity should dream, hope, mobilize, and act to bring about what Taylor terms “a liberating material spirituality" to unseat the state that kills.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j3fk
Introduction from:
The Executed God
Abstract: To consider the executed God and the spiritual practices it entails will demand some important preparatory work. Christians have written a great deal on the notion of Jesus’ crucifixion and death. What new turn is taken when we emphasize today, as this book does, that Jesus’ death was an execution?
2. Theatrics and Sacrifice in the U.S.-Led Imperium from:
The Executed God
Abstract: The overall argument of this chapter is that the state terror that targets poor communities
withinthe United States, and racialized ones in particular,¹ is also part of the U.S. state’s pursuit of aglobalsovereignty. The U.S. deploys abroad both “soft power” (cultural influences and ideologies of U.S. “American exceptionalism”) as well as the brutal economic policies of neoliberal capitalism. These ways of pursuing global sovereignty are regularly supported by the threat or actuality of the terrors of overt or covert war. Lockdown America is, then, anationalsite of state terror that is also integral to aglobal
3. Way of the Cross as Adversarial Politics from:
The Executed God
Abstract: Christian groups and communities of faith have often sponsored programs that address issues of economic inequality, the poor, and the imprisoned. Such Christians have also stepped forward with their prison ministries and projects in anti-racism and advocacy for gender and sexual justice. Some of these are necessary for challenging Lockdown America. In other cases, as with some church “prison ministries,” Christians are in fact part of the problem, reinforcing today’s U.S. political ideologies that drive the U.S. criminal justice crisis.¹
4. Stealing the Show: from:
The Executed God
Abstract: The way of the cross is adversarial, yes, but the embodied expression of that way under conditions of empire is neither violent tactical maneuvering nor passive endurance. Both of these responses may be necessary in certain situations. But the binary of violence/nonviolence is not the most important consideration when weighing how to express an adversarial politics. The greater question is how effective action is possible—action that will, in fact, resist and transform. This chapter turns to the second defining characteristic of Jesus’ way of the cross after its adversarial politics: the forging of dramatic action. It points to the
5. Building Peoples’ Movements - 1: from:
The Executed God
Abstract: With this chapter, we come, now, to stand on the precipice of action, as we begin the first of two chapters interpreting the way of the cross as “building peoples’ movements.” A book does not create action; it might, though, create spaces where we open ourselves toward it. In a book, perhaps, we can measure ourselves and the needs of our era—exposing, feeling, and thinking through the injuries and pain created by structural violence, “fingering its jagged grain,” as Ralph Ellison is oft-quoted to have said of the blues’ musical impulse.¹ That impulse will be needed if we are
6. Building Peoples’ Movements - 2: from:
The Executed God
Abstract: Building people’s movements amid and against Lockdown America also includes organizing against the U.S. death penalty, which at the federal and state levels assigns death as penalty for over 60 crimes.¹ Opposing it is surely no more important than the demilitarizing of policing in the U.S. or decarcerating the nation, which I have discussed in the previous chapter. Nevertheless, work against the death penalty is no mere add-on, some “extra-issue” to be raised. Instead, it is intrinsic, or ought to be, to our work against the carceral violence encountered in U.S. policing practice and mass incarceration, as well as in
Introduction from:
The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Askani Hans-Christoph
Abstract: The present volume gathers most of the papers presented at an international theological conference held May 23–25, 2013, at the University of Geneva and organized by the
Faculté de théologie protestanteand theInstitut romand de systématique et d’éthique(IRSE) of that University. The conference’s main purposes were to examine the first two chapters of Paul’s First Epistle to the Corinthians, (aspects of) the reception of these chapters in the history of theology, and, in a constructive approach, their potential meaning today. The fact that two systematic theologians (the co-editors of this book) and a historian of early Christianity
7 Luther’s Theologica Paradoxa in Erasmus and Cusanus from:
The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Bader Günter
Abstract: Wisdom and foolishness intertwined—the theology of the cross—and consequently speeches in the form of
theologica paradoxa, of paradoxical theology: these are all widely known as characteristics of Reformation theology, especially of the Lutheran style. Indeed, it was Luther who furnished this connection and put it under the rubric oftheologica paradoxa. But why look fortheologica paradoxain Erasmus and Cusanus if this rubric is distinctive to Luther? Despite the somewhat strange juxtaposition of these two authors with Luther, it is likely that neither of them would have put their work under a Lutheran heading. Therefore, this discussion
12 The Foolishness and Wisdom of All God’s Ways: from:
The Wisdom and Foolishness of God
Author(s) Tanner Kathryn
Abstract: God violates the norms and expectations of those who take themselves to be wise and in that way appears foolish in the eyes of the world.¹ The cross of Christ is the most startling, scandalous, and in that sense paradigmatic instance of this. But I believe Christian theologians soon generalize from it. In all God’s activity
ad extraGod violates the expectations of the wise by being intimately connected to a world of loss, suffering, and conflict. God for us is simply a God who breaks down the wisdom of the wise: a God of radical transcendence who always and
3 The soul governed from:
Resisting history
Abstract: When William James sniffed nitrous oxide in the spring of 1882, he resurrected and transformed an experimental gesture which had been central to the practice of Christian mysticism. For centuries, Western ecstatics had attempted to transcend the boundaries of the human personality, and thus approach a knowledge of the divine life through the employment of ascetic and meditative techniques. The writings of Père Surin, Madame Guyon and Catherine of Genoa give minute and often horrifying descriptions of these methods: Surin crippled himself jumping from a window into the River Garonne; Catherine starved herself; while Mme Guyon (perhaps the most extreme
Book Title: Acceptable words-Essays on the poetry of Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): WAINWRIGHT JEFFREY
Abstract: Geoffrey Hill has said that some great poetry 'recognises that words fail us'. These essays explore Hill's struggle over fifty years with the recalcitrance of language. This book seeks to show how all his work is marked by the quest for the right pitch of utterance whether it is sorrowing, angry, satiric or erotic. It shows how Hill's words are never lightly 'acceptable' but an ethical act, how he seeks out words he can stand by - words that are 'getting it right'. This book is the most comprehensive and up-to-date critical work on Geoffrey Hill so far, covering all his work up to ‘Scenes from Comus’ (2005), as well as some poems yet to appear in book form. It aims to contribute something to the understanding of his poetry among those who have followed it for many years and students and other readers encountering this major poet for the first time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j67x
4 ‘Our love is what we love to have’: from:
Acceptable words
Abstract: Geoffrey Hill’s poems have often presented us with a series of scenes, livid tableaux, ‘spectacles’: the Jews in Europe, the Battle of Towton, the endurances of some poets, Boethius in his cell, the nailer’s darg, real and fancied martyrdoms like those of his Sebastians. If his vision of the world were to be put in symbolic terms then the character of the Romanesque style as described by Henri Focillon might provide an analogy:
11 Afterword: from:
Acceptable words
Abstract: In this closing passage of ‘Discourse: For Stanley Rosen’¹ I want to dwell on the penultimate line: ‘its bleak littoral swept by bursts of sunlight’. The littoral has held a powerful place in Geoffrey Hill’s poetic imagination right from the beginning. The seashore and tracts between water and land appear recurrently in
For the Unfallen. In ‘Genesis’ the speaker sees ‘The osprey plunge with triggered claw, / Feathering blood along the shore’. It is bleak too in ‘Requiem for the Plantaganet Kings’ where ‘the sea / Across daubed rock evacuates its dead.’ In ‘The Guardians’ the old ‘wade the disturbed
Book Title: The new aestheticism- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Malpas Simon
Abstract: The interest in aesthetics in Philosophy, Literary and Cultural Studies is growing rapidly. 'The new aestheticism' contains exemplary essays by key practitioners in these fields which demonstrate the importance of this area of enquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j77d
4 What comes after art? from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Bowie Andrew
Abstract: Kafka’s last completed story has become something of an allegory of contemporary theoretical approaches in the humanities. In ‘Josefine, the singer, or the mouse people’, the narrator, a mouse, ponders the phenomenon of Josefine, a mouse who sings. The problem with Josefine is that she actually seems to make the same kind of noise as all the other mice, but she makes a performance of it, claiming that what she does is very special. She is able, moreover, to make a career out of being a ‘singer’, despite the doubts voiced by some of her audience. Kafka’s story plays with
9 Critical knowledge, scientific knowledge and the truth of literature from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Eaglestone Robert
Abstract: a book is not shut in by its contours, is not walled up as in a fortress. It asks nothing better than to exist outside itself, or to let you exist in it. In short, the extraordinary fact in the case of a book is the falling away of the barriers between you and it. You are inside it; it is inside you; there is no
11 Kant and the ends of criticism from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Banham Gary
Abstract: Since the beginning of the 1990s there has been a marked revival of interest in both Kant and aesthetics.¹ This revival has been accompanied with a move beyond the theoretical positions that sought to displace the notion of aesthetics and often requires a rethinking of the relationship between criticism and philosophy. I wish to present here an account of Kant’s ‘invention’ of aesthetics that allows its terms to become both operative within and yet also transformed by the practice of critical engagement with literary and visual works of art. It is important to mention however that the context for this
13 Aesthetics and politics: from:
The new aestheticism
Author(s) Hodge Joanna
Abstract: The alignments of T. W. Adorno to the protracted, difficult process of coming to terms with a broken Marxist inheritance and of Martin Heidegger to the Nazi politics of rethinking the human might seem to leave them at opposite non-communicating poles of political difference.¹ Their views on aesthetics seem similarly starkly opposed, in terms both of judgements and of the place of aesthetics within the philosophical pantheon. Aesthetic theory for Adorno marks out a domain of experience relatively immune from the impact of the banalisation of evil, indicated by Hannah Arendt to be distinctive of the latter part of the
4 Nowhere, anywhere, somewhere: from:
Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Souvenir of Canada,Coupland’s first explicit reading of the national consciousness, begins with an aerial vision of the country’s unpopulated, wild northern lands. Gazing at the enigmatic landscape, the writer lists places that, apart from the colonial act of naming, appear to be untainted by human intervention (‘Hudson Bay and the Ungava Peninsula, Ellesmere Island, Baffin Island’) and starts the work of rethinking his own relationship with geography. Cocooned in the memory of one or many aeroplane cabins – an interchangeable tourist space emblematic of modernity’s uninhibited penchant for constant motion – Coupland attempts to connect the knowable and malleable (sub)urban reality
5 ‘You are the first generation raised without religion’: from:
Douglas Coupland
Abstract: Belief, or its absence, haunts Douglas Coupland’s most dispirited protagonists. The wilderness reflections, for example, uttered by the anonymous narrator of ‘In the Desert’ – one of the thematically interconnected narratives in
Life After God– pivot around a sensation of spiritual dissatisfaction that is shared by many individuals in Coupland’s fiction. This desert sojourner’s conviction that he was raised in a creedal vacuum, without fixed beliefs – a personal history ‘clean of any ideology’ – is optimistic but, as he suspects, not entirely credible. The blank-slate, zero history contexts that he and many of his contemporaries view as normative are, above all else,
Book Title: Conrad's Marlow-Narrative and death in 'Youth', Heart of Darkness, Lord Jim and Chance
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Wake Paul
Abstract: Variously described as ‘the average pilgrim’, a ‘wanderer’, and ‘a Buddha preaching in European clothes’, Charlie Marlow is the voice behind Joseph Conrad’s ‘Youth’ (1898), Heart of Darkness (1899), Lord Jim (1900) and Chance (1912). Conrad’s Marlow offers a comprehensive account and critical analysis of one of Conrad’s most celebrated creations, asking both who and what is Marlow: a character or a narrator, a biographer or an autobiographical screen, a messenger or an interpreter, a bearer of truth or a misguided liar? Reading Conrad’s fiction alongside the work of Walter Benjamin, Maurice Blanchot, Jacques Derrida and Martin Heidegger, and offering an investigation into the connection between narrative and death, this book argues that Marlow’s essence is located in his liminality – in his constantly shifting position – and that the emergence of meaning in his stories is at all points bound up with the process of his storytelling.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j9p3
Introduction: from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: Charlie Marlow, whose forename is given on only two occasions, is the most celebrated of Conrad’s narrator-characters. Variously described as ‘not in the least typical’, ‘the average pilgrim’, a ‘wanderer’, and ‘a Buddha preaching in European clothes’, Marlow is the voice behind ‘Youth’ (1898),
Heart of Darkness(1899),Lord Jim(1900) andChance(1912).¹ All four stories, whose texts are supposedly faithful reproductions of his words, are transcribed by an unnamed and largely unobtrusive narrator, or narrators, of whom we learn little beyond the fact that he has, like Marlow, some connection to the sea and, we are invited to
3 Lord Jim and the structures of suicide from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: In
Writing as RescueJeffrey Berman makes the claim that ‘a higher suicide rate inheres within Conrad’s world than within that of any other major novelist writing in English’, a bold statement that Todd G. Willy echoes, identifying a ‘chronic epidemic of suicides that broke out in the late Victorian fiction of Joseph Conrad’, whilst Ian Watt notes that ‘the role of suicide in Conrad’s fiction is certainly of exceptional importance.’¹ Certainly there is a prodigious suicide rate among Conrad’s characters. Jocelyn Baines counts nine ‘leading’ characters who commit suicide inJoseph Conrad: A Critical Biography, C. B. Cox lists
4 Chance and the truth of literature from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: Conrad’s conception of the artist’s work as an act of ‘translation’ in which the writer wrestles with words ‘worn thin, defaced by ages of careless usage’ evinces a similar concern to that of the Russian formalists who set literature the task of responding to the ‘habituation’ of perception and an everyday language that, through its very overuse, ‘devours works, clothes, furniture, one’s wife, and the fear of war’.¹ In his attempts to ‘appeal to the senses’, which are close to the formalist notion of defamiliarization, Conrad repeatedly allies the processes of reading with the processes of perception – making the
Epilogue: from:
Conrad's Marlow
Abstract: Who exactly is Charlie Marlow? Or, is it perhaps more appropriate to ask ‘what’ exactly is Charlie Marlow? In its attempts to get to grips with Conrad’s most famous creation, this study has certainly approached Marlow in both senses: asking of him both who and what. Is Marlow a character or a narrator, a biographer or an autobiographical screen, a messenger or an interpreter, a bearer of the truth or a misguided liar? It might be expected of a conclusion to offer a definitive answer to one, or all, of these questions, but following an argument that has been concerned
Book Title: "Insubordinate Irish"-Travellers in the Text
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): hAodha Mícheál Ó
Abstract: This book traces a number of common themes relating to the representation of Irish Travellers in Irish popular tradition and how these themes have impacted on Ireland’s collective imagination. A particular focus of the book is on the exploration of the Traveller as “Other", an "Other" who is perceived as both inside and outside Ireland’s collective ideation. Frequently constructed as a group whose cultural tenets are in a dichotomous opposition to that of the “settled" community, this book demonstrates the ambivalence and complexity of the Irish Traveller “Other" in the context of a European postcolonial country. Not only has the construction and representation of Travellers always been less stable and “fixed" than previously supposed, these images have been acted upon and changed by both the Traveller and non-Traveller communities as the situation has demanded. Drawing primarily on little-explored Irish language sources, this volume demonstrates the fluidity of what is often assumed as reified or “fixed". As evidenced in Irish-language cultural sources the image of the Traveller is inextricably linked with the very concept of Irish identity itself. They are simultaneously the same and “Other" and frequently function as exemplars of the hegemony of native Irish culture as set against colonial traditions. This book is an important addition to the Irish Studies canon, in particular as relating to those exciting and unexplored terrains hitherto deemed “marginal" - Traveller Studies, Romani Studies and Diaspora/Migration Studies to name but a few.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155j9t5
Introduction from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: This book is an introduction to Traveller Studies and its corollaries, Romani Studies and Diaspora and Migration Studies. This book traces a number of common themes relating to the representation of Irish Travellers in Irish popular tradition and how these themes have impacted on Ireland’s collective imaginary. A particular focus is the development of the ‘settled’ (i.e. non-Traveller) community’s perception of Travellers as an outsider group in Irish society and the representation of Travellers as an Other who are perceived as both inside and outside Ireland’s collective ideation.
2 The Traveller colonised from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: The question of group origins as a marker for cultural legitimacy is today often considered a very recent development, a development that can be attributed entirely to modernity. The issues of ethnogenesis, group origins, kin-related heredity and apparent ‘legitimacy’ in both cultural and historic terms were all issues which fascinated intellectuals and scholarly communities in the nineteenth century and earlier, however. In fact such subjects or ‘objects of enquiry’ would actually serve as the backdrop to the very first ‘institutionally-inspired’ studies of Travellers and Gypsies in Western Europe.
3 Irish Travellers and the bardic tradition from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: The initial Gypsilorist interest in Irish Travellers/tinkers was a short-lived phenomenon and it faded away after a few years. More than three decades passed before the subject was revived again as a source of interest. Once again, philology and its relation with cultural categorisation would prove the catalyst. It was not until the late 1930s that an interest in Traveller culture resurfaced once more and on this occasion it was the Traveller language known as Cant/Gammon and Shelta which acted as a catalyst for this renewed interest.
5 Mapping ‘difference’: from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: I have briefly traced the development of the Irish ‘Othering’ tradition as encompassed in a reiterative and reductionist discourse because Ireland’s history of colonisation has meant that the ‘official’ version of the Irish people (including Irish Travellers) and Irish history is, it can be argued, itself a form of ‘Othering’. Healy’s statement regarding the ‘manufactured’ or mediated nature of much of the historical record can be seen to be particularly pertinent to Irish history: ‘History is a construct, often a narrative of interested parties who seek to prove a thesis’ (Healy, 1992: 15). That the interpretation of history and definitions
6 Travellers as countercultural from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: Aside from the construction of Travellers as ‘degraded’ or ‘threatening/dangerous’ Other, the second primary discourse that serves to delineate Travellers within the Tinker Questionnaire material is that which ‘frames’ them as a culturally exclusive group, one who function completely ‘independently’ of the major organs of Irish society and who actually function as a countercultural group, forming ‘a society within a society’.
7 Narrative and the Irish imaginary: from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: Traditionally post-colonialism has read Irish culture through its inherited dichotomy of colonised/coloniser and empowered/disempowered thereby replicating imperialist power structures of old; the reading of the two primary strands within the representative discourse explored here points rather to the atypicality, the nomadic qualities, of Ireland’s postcolonial configurations and the subaltern histories of social groupings which Gramsci characterised as ‘fragmented and episodic’ (Gramsci, 1971: 55). My discussion seeks to underscore the importance of rethinking and re-interpreting nationalist ideology and praxis within the Irish (post-) colonial context. Emphasised in the narratives explored here however is the ‘radically undecidable nature of the text’ and
8 Anti-Traveller prejudice: from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: The folktales explored here are no longer as widely known or as widely disseminated as they once were. However their
raison d’être– i.e. the ‘accursed’ or ‘disordered’ status of Travellers as a consequence of their perceived ‘punishment’ – continues to resonate strongly both in Irish popular belief and in the general public discourse concerning Travellers in Ireland. I argue that reductionist stereotypes as applied to Travellers in the folklore tradition and in Irish popular belief generally continue to have an impact upon the way in which the popular image of Travellers is constructed in Ireland. For the settled community
10 The dichotomy of Self and Other: from:
"Insubordinate Irish"
Abstract: This volume has traced the development of the Traveller image as ‘Other’ through mythical and binary discourses of alterity. Until the recent arrival of a more overtly multicultural society in Ireland Travellers have constituted the ‘Other’ for mainstream Irish society. As ‘Other’ they have often acted as objects on whom power is exercised. Their representation and the roles constructed for them have been determined primarily by the settled community and have been influenced by the need to define national, social and class identity. This project of representation has used the tools of mythology and history. These two related aspects of
CHAPTER 2 Feminist theology: from:
The subject of love
Abstract: As is already well evident even here, in discourses of love the overwhelming presence of the opinions, experiences, and reflections of men is uncontestable. If history is indeed a record of ‘winners’, as feminists have by no means been alone in suggesting, this insight should come as no surprise. The historical record of love is primarily the written trace of a masculine vision of love, and Plato’s Diotima stands as an effulgent exemplar of woman’s place in that record. Diotima is the absent presence of woman, spoken
about, but not actually speaking; spoken through, but unable to speak for herself.
CHAPTER 3 Hélène Cixousʹ subject of love from:
The subject of love
Abstract: In an interview in 1996 with Hélène Cixous, Kathleen O’Grady broke something of a critical silence regarding the subject of Cixous’ relationship to religion. To the question of her personal relation to God, Cixous describes herself as ‘religiously atheistic’ (O’Grady, 1996–97). The statements that frame this disclosure, however, provide a context in which to read just what it is that she is implicitly distancing herself from and, more importantly, what it might be within religious discourses with which in practice she aligns herself. In the preceding sentence she said of God something she has said many times throughout her
4 Bourdieu, ethics and reflexivity from:
The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu was a contrarian and sociologist, perhaps in that order. As with Adorno and Foucault, he can be claimed, also, for a further intellectual lineage – that of ethical reflection as opposed to just negatively critical, denunciatory sociology. This does not just mean that Bourdieu was right-minded and ‘ethical’ in the sense of being moral (whatever one might mean by this). It means that his work is addressed as much to issues of the self, and especially to our reflexivity and autonomy, as to just epistemic issues of positive ‘knowledge’ and denunciatory critique. In fact, the – again, ultimately ethical – issues
Conclusion from:
The structure of modern cultural theory
Abstract: This book has claimed that there is – or was – such a thing as modern cultural theory and argued that there is – or was – something ultimately ethical about it. It would no doubt be an understatement to observe that a great many issues and problems remain. Of the many, perhaps four stand out in particular. There is still, naggingly, the question of the exact status of this entity, modern cultural theory. Related to this, there might be continuing queries about what is ‘modern’ and what is ‘theoretical’ about modern cultural theory. There are questions of politics. And then there is more,
1 Modern philosophy and the emergence of aesthetic theory: from:
Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The importance attributed to aesthetic questions in recent philosophy becomes easier to grasp if one considers the reasons for the emergence of modern aesthetic theory. Kant’s main work on aesthetics, the ‘third Critique’, the
Critique of Judgement(CJ) (1790), forms part of his response to unresolved questions which emerge from hisCritique of Pure Reason(CPR) (1781) andCritique of Practical Reason(1787).¹ In order to understand the significance of theCJone needs therefore to begin by looking at the first two Kantian Critiques.² The essential problem they entail, which formed the focus of reactions to Kant’s work at
5 Hegel: from:
Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: Hegel’s work has come in recent years to exemplify many of the choices facing contemporary philosophy. The changed status of Hegel can, though, seem rather odd, given the labyrinthine nature of his texts, the huge divergences between his interpreters from his own time until today, and the fact that some of the philosophers who now invoke him come from an analytical tradition noted for its insistence on a clarity not always encountered in Hegel himself. Even contemporary interpreters range between those who still pursue his grand aims by trying to show how he offers a systematic answer to the major
6 Schleiermacher: from:
Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The recent growth of interest in German Idealist and Romantic philosophy has tended to focus on Fichte and Hegel, and, to a lesser extent, on Schelling. However, given the philosophical motivation for the new attention to the thought of this period, it is actually rather strange that its main focus has not been the work of F.D.E. Schleiermacher (1768–1834). The contingent reasons for the neglect of Schleiermacher are, admittedly, quite simple. Schleiermacher’s theological work, as the major Protestant theologian of the nineteenth century, has largely determined his reputation, and he did not produce de fi nitive versions of his
7 Music, language and literature from:
Aesthetics and subjectivity
Abstract: The divergent interpretations of the relationship between music and language in modernity are inseparable from the main divergences between philosophical conceptions of language. The attempt to explain language in representational terms in the empiricist tradition that eventually leads to analytical philosophy, and the understanding of language as a form of social action and as constitutive of the world we inhabit in the hermeneutic tradition give rise to very different conceptions of music. One paradigmatic contrast has emerged in the preceding chapters, which can somewhat crudely be summarised as follows. On the one hand, music can be regarded as a deficient
Book Title: Britain and Africa Under Blair-In pursuit of the good state
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Gallagher Julia
Abstract: Africa was a key focus of Britain’s foreign policy under Tony Blair. Military intervention in Sierra Leone, increases in aid and debt relief, and grand initiatives such as the Commission for Africa established the continent as a place in which Britain could ‘do good’. Britain and Africa under Blair: in pursuit of the good state critically explores Britain’s fascination with Africa. It argues that, under New Labour, Africa represented an area of policy that appeared to transcend politics. Gradually, it came to embody an ideal state activity around which politicians, officials and the wider public could coalesce, leaving behind more contentious domestic and international issues. Building on the story of Britain and Africa under Blair, the book draws wider conclusions about the role of ‘good’ and idealism in foreign policy. In particular, it discusses how international relationships provide opportunities to create and pursue ideals, and why they are essential for the wellbeing of political communities. It argues that state actors project the idea of ‘good’ onto idealised, distant objects, in order to restore a sense of the ‘good state’. The book makes a distinctive and original contribution to debates about the role of ethics in international relations and will be of particular interest to academics, policy-makers and students of international relations, Africa and British foreign policy, and to anyone interested in ethics in international affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jct4
5 Healing the scar? from:
Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: This chapter examines what Africa means to actors clustered around the state: MPs, officials and those working with them during the Blair era. I start out with some basic questions: How is British policy in Africa different from policy in other parts of the world? Why does Britain engage in it? What do the actors involved get out of it? Public sources gave clues: speeches, papers and initiatives from the government, and MPs directly interested or engaged in work in Africa suggested a number of themes which were pursued in interviews.
7 The good state from:
Britain and Africa Under Blair
Abstract: This book has been about the way in which Britain under New Labour ‘did good’ in Africa as a way of creating a central core of ideal activity for the state. The themes and approaches contained within this trend were not new, but drew on eighteenth- and nineteenth-century ideas about the continent and Britain’s role there. I have suggested that the creation of a good project formed an important part of protecting the state from internal ambiguity and decay, by creating a utopian core at the heart of what it does.
Book Title: Shakespeare and Spenser-Attractive opposites
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): LETHBRIDGE J. B.
Abstract: "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" is a much-needed volume that brings together ten original papers by the experts, on the relations between Spenser and Shakespeare. There has been much noteworthy work on the linguistic borrowings of Shakespeare from Spenser, but the subject has never before been treated systematically, and the linguistic borrowings lead to broader-scale borrowings and influences which are treated here. An additional feature of the book is that for the first time a large bibliography of previous work is offered which will be of the greatest help to those who follow up the opportunities offered by this collection. "Shakespeare and Spenser: Attractive Opposites" presents new approaches, heralding a resurgence of interest in the relations between two of the greatest Renaissance English poets to a wider scholarly group and in a more systematic manner than before. This will be of interest to Students and academics interested in Renaissance literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jd1q
Perdita, Pastorella, and the Romance of Literary Form: from:
Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Cheney Patrick
Abstract: We have long known that Shakespeare models the Perdita story in
The Winter’s Talepartly on the story of Pastorella in Book 6 of Spenser’sFaerie Queene. As Richard Neuse writes inThe Spenser Encyclopedia, ‘Both are exposed as infants by aristocratic or royal parents, both grow up ignorant of their origins in a society of shepherds, both are wooed by aristocratic or royal suitor disguised as a shepherd, and both are eventually reunited with their true parents’.¹ Even so, we have not examined this moment of intertextuality in any detail in order to re-think the character of Shakespearean authorship.
What Means a Knight? from:
Shakespeare and Spenser
Author(s) Hays Michael L.
Abstract: A word about this paper¹ —not only its subject and approach, but also its kind—to avoid false expectations. In considering Redcross Knight and Edgar as chivalric knights, I explore Spenser’s and Shakespeare’s respective uses of materials from the tradition of chivalric romance. So I rule out source or influence study. Shakespeare knew Spenser’s version, among many versions, of the Lear story, but I neither trace the untraceable—exact and exclusive similarities between the two versions—nor appraise the authors’ use of this story. Likewise, I rule out critical judgments about their better or worse use of the materials from
Introduction from:
Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: The mention of the hitherto unknown Leah at a crucial moment in the play becomes a significant and complicating factor in the audience’s understanding of both Shylock
4 ‘Pleasing punishment’: from:
Mothers and meaning on the early modern English stage
Abstract: Previous Chapters Have Focused Upon The Mother Figure As A Signifier Of Spiritual, Personal And Political Concerns That Is Often Mediated Through An Association Of The Mother’s Body With Suffering And Violence As Well As Boundless Love And Nurture. This Chapter Considers The Material Signifiers Of Maternity That Were So Thoroughly Exploited By Peele In
Edward IAnd That Routinely Colour The Construction Of The Dramatised Mother Figure. The Mother’s Body Implies, And Invites Consideration Of, The Conditions Of Gestation And Lactation And In Doing So Evokes A Response Where Moral, Spiritual And Political Meanings Are Complicated By The Pleasures
1 Narrative identity and the challenge of literary global politics: from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: Some – if not all – contemporary wars are conducted for a multiplicity of reasons by an increasingly diverse set of actors. One corollary of this may be a reading of a broader spectrum of political violence which is neither exclusively political nor military, but is in part shaped by cultural and social forces captured in narrative. Even if narrative approaches have a long provenance in other disciplines, they have only recently touched the shores of IR. And yet, an approach which addresses accounts of narrative identity does much to capture the social, cultural and ontological assumptions which inform our
2 Kosovo and Chechnya/Kosova and Ichkeria from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: This chapter will introduce Kosovo and Chechnya as examples of contemporary conflict. Delving into the history and geopolitics of Kosovo and Chechnya will help, insofar as it draws attention to a range of features, as well as a range of similar and dissimilar trends which inscribed the character of violence. These trends and features may be discernible in mythic stories of war and identity. In this way, analysis of geopolitical legacies and historical narratives provides valuable and often neglected insight into both regions. The analysis which follows draws on the account of storied identity, cultural narratives and founding events in
5 Stories of war in the Balkans and Caucasus from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: A substantial amount of theoretical literature now exists in both International Relations and political theory which explores how culture impacts upon violence. As yet, however, this body of literature has not been applied fully to analyse the move to war in either Kosovo or Chechnya.¹ Aside from exploring the cultural construction of an enemy – enemification – and locating this within a broader body of work on colonialism and post-colonialism, this chapter argues that stories play an important role straddling the divide between culture and politics. In many ways stories interpenetrate these two realms – aided, as mentioned in Chapter
6 Criminality and war from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: So far this book has focused on a range of issues related to narrative and interpretive IR, as ways into analysing contemporary violence. In doing so, attention has been drawn to different levels of analysis, the role of history in the Caucasus and Balkans, and different social, cultural and local forms of identification. In both Kosovo and Chechnya we see contract soldiers, special police units and federal army units fighting against armed resistance movements. The armed resistance movements were, however, made up of a multiplicity of groups and networks, and this, alongside the role of NATO, the UN and other
Conclusion: from:
Contemporary Violence
Abstract: Following the First World War, countries across Europe were met with unprecedented challenges from new political ideologies; namely Communism and Fascism. Throughout 1934, following the general elections in November 1933, violence in parts of Spain erupted. By 1936, the steady decline into chaos was replaced with the start of a full-blooded civil war. Although subsumed in literature about the Second World War, historians have raised questions about the origins and implications of the Spanish Civil War, asking, for instance, how the local milieu impacted upon the character of the conflict and why left-wing volunteers – including dozens of Albanian and
Book Title: The arc and the machine-Narrative and new media
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Bassett Caroline
Abstract: The Arc and the machine is a timely and original defence of narrative in an age of information. Stressing interpretation and experience alongside affect and sensation it convincingly argues that narrative is key to contemporary forms of cultural production and to the practice of contemporary life. Re-appraising the prospects for narrative in the digital age, it insists on the centrality of narrative to informational culture and provokes a critical re-appraisal of how innovations in information technology as a material cultural form can be understood and assessed. The book offers a careful exploration of narrative theory, a sophisticated critique of techno-cultural writing, and a series of tightly focused case studies. All of which point the way to a restoration of a critical - rather than celebratory approaches - to new media. The scope and range of this book is broad, its argumentation careful and exacting, and its conclusions exciting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jg5r
3 Those with whom the archive dwells from:
The arc and the machine
Abstract: Chapter 2 of this book set out to consider the terms of a culture’s contemporary engagement with networked new media; to ask how we plug in, and to what. I argued that the engagement between humans and machines within the social totality constitutes the human–machine interface, understood in its broadest terms. Interacting with machines, at whatever scale, is therefore, and
inescapably, a historically located social process as well as a technical reality. This position has implications for how contemporary interfaces are understood and investigated, not least because, viewed in this way, interactions across the human–machine interface can never
4 Annihilating all that’s made? from:
The arc and the machine
Abstract: ‘This is not an image space’, but as I type these few words, describing a virtual community and its transformation, appear on my screen. I view them as an image as well as read them as a text. This textual visual display thus seems to confirm and confound the assertion it articulates. Clearly any claim that cyberspace, the interactive world that appears on the screen but that also reaches behind it to other screens in other places through a network staggering in scale and astonishing in
5 ‘Just because’ stories: from:
The arc and the machine
Abstract: With some trepidation, this chapter explores a film called
Elephant.² This is Gus Van Sant’s 2003 account of the shootings at Columbine High School and is at once an experiment with non-linear narrative and an exploration of interactivity as a cultural logic, one emerging within specific historical horizons: those of the United States at war with itself and with the world.
1 Introduction from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: ‘I select and confect’, the narrator of A. S. Byatt’s 1987 short story ‘Sugar’ states, for ‘[w]hat is all this, all this story so far, but a careful selection of things that can be told, things that can be arranged in the light of day?’ (
S:241). ‘Sugar’, the last and eponymous piece in Byatt’s first collection of short stories, is essentially a story about the act of storytelling – about its place in and its shaping of our everyday lives, our individual and collective identities, and our complicated sense of what, if anything, can be said to constitute a ‘truth’
2 Fathers, sisters and the anxiety of influence: from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: To latter-day readers and critics, the early works of any established writer undoubtedly hold a special kind of attraction. Do their first forays into fiction ‘reveal’, as Kuno Schuhmann (2001: 75) puts it, ‘a personality that may be more carefully hidden in later texts? Does the first shaping of themes throw additional light on the later novels?’ In relation to A. S. Byatt’s early work, Kathleen Coyne Kelly (1996: 14), in her monograph on the author, provides at least a partial answer to these questions when she remarks that ‘[w]hile Byatt’s art has certainly matured over the past thirty years,
3 Writing the contemporary: from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: In her 1979 survey of contemporary fiction, ‘People in Paper Houses’, A. S. Byatt ponders the ‘curiously symbiotic relationship between old realism and new experiment’ perceived to be at the heart of the English postwar novel (
PM:170). The conflict between literary experimentation and realist allegiances, with all its connotations of avant-garde innovation and linguistic astuteness on the one hand, and the socio-political impulse to return to a portrayal of ‘understandable characters in a reasonably straightforward style: no tricks, no experimental foolery’ (Kingsley Amis qtd in Morrison, 1980: 299) on the other, had become something of a commonplace in criticism
4 Two cultures: from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: The ending of
Still Lifeand the start ofBabel Towerboth feature surprise events which shift the plot of the Quartet in unexpected directions, and make manifest a quality that Iris Murdoch (1961: 23), in her seminal essay ‘Against Dryness’, proposed as an essential characteristic of realist prose: ‘contingency’.Still Lifeends with the sudden death of one of its main characters, an event avowedly designed to simulate the emotional impact caused by a real-life accident. Six years further on in the story of the Quartet,Babel Towerbegins with a surprise reunion as the poet Hugh Pink stumbles
6 The dark side of the tale: from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: As the previous chapter has shown, many of A. S. Byatt’s stories and tales offer their subjects and, one might add, their readers, the possibility of empowerment and liberation. And yet, not all of Byatt’s tales prove a liberating force for good. Indeed, Byatt also often chooses to foreground the darker side of the storytelling imagination – the part which is concerned, to quote Rifat Orhan from ‘The Djinn in the Nightingale’s Eye’, ‘with Fate, with Destiny, with what is prepared for human beings’ (
DNE: 125). Inevitably, this prepared fate is not always a happy one. Characters such as Daphne Gulver-Robinson
7 Critical storytelling: from:
A.S. Byatt
Abstract: Throughout her writing career, A. S. Byatt’s fictional output has been matched, in both scope and in volume, by her work as a literary and cultural commentator. Indeed, Byatt has embraced the full spectrum of contemporary critical activities, from the scholarly editions, monographs and essays one might expect of a former university lecturer, through an impressive amount of reviews and commentary in newspapers and journals, to participating in television and radio debates and ad-hoc literary discussions at festivals and live events. Assuming the role not of reclusive writer but of public intellectual, A. S. Byatt has never disappeared neatly under
Book Title: Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Kempshall Matthew
Abstract: This book provides an analytical overview of the vast range of historiography which was produced in western Europe over a thousand-year period between c.400 and c.1500. Concentrating on the general principles of classical rhetoric central to the language of this writing, alongside the more familiar traditions of ancient history, biblical exegesis and patristic theology, this survey introduces the conceptual sophistication and semantic rigour with which medieval authors could approach their narratives of past and present events, and the diversity of ends to which this history could then be put. By providing a close reading of some of the historians who put these linguistic principles and strategies into practice (from Augustine and Orosius through Otto of Freising and William of Malmesbury to Machiavelli and Guicciardini), it traces and questions some of the key methodological changes that characterise the function and purpose of the western historiographical tradition in this formative period of its development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jhjx
2 RHETORIC AND HISTORY from:
Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: In seeking to establish exactly how the writing of history was conceptualised and practised in the Middle Ages, a sensible starting point is to identify where historiography fitted into a programme of study, that is, where medieval authors would themselves have encountered the writing of history as a body of material and as part and parcel of their education.¹ What becomes immediately apparent is that, initially at least, it would have been as an integral component of the study of grammar and rhetoric – in grammar, as excerpts from classical historians and, in rhetoric, as the theory and practice of narrating
3 INVENTION AND NARRATIVE from:
Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The categorisation of classical rhetoric into its demonstrative, judicial and deliberative forms reveals significant differences in emphasis, but also significant similarities in approach, in the way in which the relationship between an individual’s character (
mores) and deeds (res gestae) could, and should, be described by a speaker or writer. The principles which these three categories of rhetoric shared as common ground, however, exerted an impact on medieval historiography that went well beyond engineering the specific didactic, legal or political goals of particular works of history. This influence can be gauged by means of the two standard schemes according to which
5 HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORY from:
Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: The influence of classical rhetoric on the writing of history in the Middle Ages centred on the relationship between the depiction of character (attributes of person) and the description of deeds (attributes of events), on the invention of arguments (causation, testimony and proof), and on the construction of a brief, lucid and, above all, verisimilar narrative. This does not mean, of course, that all the principles involved in each one of these areas were applied either simultaneously or consistently across the broad range of writings which the single term
historiacould comprise and across the conventional periodisation of a thousand
CONCLUSION from:
Rhetoric and the Writing of History, 400-1500
Abstract: Medieval historiography was neither crude nor credulous nor conceptually unsophisticated. Such characterisations would be no more, and no less, applicable to the writing of history in the early modern and modern periods and, if only on this basis, medieval historians deserve better than to suffer the methodological condescension of posterity. The present study has been designed accordingly as an introduction to a set of interpretative criteria on which works of medieval historiography might be assessed, primarily through examining principles of classical rhetoric which would have been second-nature to writers who had been brought up, directly or indirectly, on the precepts
1 Louise L. Lambrichs: from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) BEST VICTORIA
Abstract: The novels of Louise Lambrichs are brilliant but troubling psychological dramas focusing on the traumas that inhabit the family romance: incest, sterility, the death of those we love and the terrible legacy of mourning. Bringing together themes of loss and recompense, Lambrichs’s novels trace with in fi nite delicacy the reactions of those who suffer and seek obsessively for comfort and understanding. But equally they perform a subtle and often chilling evocation of the secrets, lies and crimes that bind a family together and create a pattern of behaviour that can motivate or cripple subsequent generations. Louise Lambrichs’s oeuvre comprises
2 Evermore or nevermore? from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) Smith Aine
Abstract: The body of writing produced by Marie Redonnet between 1985 and 2000 is an unusually coherent one. Settings and characters drawn up in one text are echoed in later works; certain stories and motifs figure again and again; the style of writing rarely changes from one text to the next. This is not to suggest, however, that the work does not evolve over the period. Indeed, while there is a large degree of overlap between the works published in the 1980s and more recent texts, there are also significant differences, of which the most obvious is increased realism in characterisation
7 ‘On ne s’entendait plus et c’était parfait ainsi’ (They could no longer hear each other and it was just fine that way): from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) STACEY SARAH ALYN
Abstract: In the first three of the four novels Agnès Desarthe has published at the time of writing –
Quelques minutes de bonheur absolu(1993),Un secret sans importance(1996),Cinq photos de ma femme(1998) andLes Bonnes Intentions(2000) – the binary opposition understanding–misunderstanding stands out as a central issue, particularly with regard to identity. What emerges is a relentless impulse on the part of the characters to be understood and to understand, or, more precisely, to be defined by, and to define, the other in absolutist terms. However, their dependence upon what are shown to be society’s generally accepted,
14 The subversion of the gaze: from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) MAJUMDAR MARGARET A.
Abstract: Of mixed Franco-Algerian parentage, Leïla Sebbar spans a variety of genres in her writing, including short stories, journalism, essays, children’s writing and contributions to collaborative works, including collections of visual material. She also has a number of major novels to her credit. In its thematic content, Sebbar’s work straddles the Mediterranean, focusing attention on the dynamics between the generations. She is not engaged in any mission of nostalgia for lost youth, however. Her writing is resolutely orientated towards the youth of today. This focus is evident not only in her characters, but also in the young audience that she targets.
Conclusion from:
Women’s writing in contemporary France
Author(s) WORTON MICHAEL
Abstract: One of the major features of this book is its focus on various aspects of the subject and identity as they are conceived and represented in contemporary women’s writing in France. The contributors to this volume have overwhelmingly read the works of our chosen writers as tales of, quests for, explorations of, and crises in the self. It should be noted that this self is actually plural and that the selves in question are not necessarily those of the writers (either within or outside the text). Rather, as fictions, they exemplify the kaleidoscopic proliferation of selves that we are as
Introduction: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: What do you get if you cross detection and science fiction? What happens when you stage a sci-fi picaresque inside an animal’s body? And what happens when a kangaroo develops the power of speech and starts wielding a gun? The punchlines are all to be found in Jonathan Lethem’s writing, and they are only partially comic. This book proceeds from the broad and frequently rehearsed observation that Jonathan Lethem’s novels and short stories subvert established fictional genres in some way, and that the frequent intermingling and clashing of genres is reflected in the bizarre characteristics displayed by many of the
1 Private dicks: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: The paratextual features of Lethem’s debut novel,
Gun, With Occasional Music(1994) enact their own ambiguous evolutions, and this chapter begins by unpacking sets of significances from these features that will then be applied to the novel as a whole. Patterned with crosshairs, the cover of the most recent Faber edition unashamedly declares the hard-boiled, noir credentials of the narrative within. Indeed the cover design, visually indebted to the famous shot in John Huston’s film adaptation ofThe Maltese Falconin which Sam Spade’s partner Miles is murdered, can be regarded as a distillation of noir into some of its
3 Alice in the academy: from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: As these words are written, Humanities scholars across the United Kingdom are engaged in urgent dialogues about the forthcoming Research Excellence Framework, or REF. Chief amongst their concerns is the increased emphasis on ‘impact’ outside the academy. According to the Higher Education Funding Council for England, ‘significant additional recognition will be given where researchers build on excellent research to deliver demonstrable benefits to the economy, society, public policy, culture and quality of life’ (2009).¹ While it is easy to conceive of the impact medical research or stem cell research or structural engineering research might have, it is perhaps harder to
Conclusion from:
Jonathan Lethem
Abstract: Anyone who has read ‘Five Fucks’, ‘Sleepy People’ (both 1996) or
This Shape We’re Inmight find it surprising that Lethem claims to be an ‘extremely traditional writer’ (Personal Interview, 2009). He is ‘so devoted to the traditional means’ of ‘scenes and characters and dialogue and paragraph and plot’ and although he sometimes makes ‘intertextual jokes’, he believes there is nothing in his work to ‘threaten anyone short of the mandarins who just don’t want the Fantastic Four ever to be mentioned inside a novel’ (Personal Interview, 2009). Citing as a specific example the insertion of the ‘Liner Note’ into
Book Title: Cruzados en la Reconquista- Publisher: Marcial Pons, Ediciones de Historia
Author(s): Quesada Miguel Ángel Ladero
Abstract: Desde el siglo XI y durante más de cuatro siglos numerosos guerreros cristianos provenientes de muchos lugares de Europa se dirigieron a la Península Ibérica para participar en la guerra que, desde el siglo VIII, mantenían los cristianos hispanos contra los musulmanes de al-Andalus y a la que la historiografía en general ha denominado Reconquista. Muchos de ellos, después de su estancia en Hispania, proseguían su camino hacia Tierra Santa para combatir en las Cruzadas. Otros venían ex profeso para participar en una «Guerra Santa» que desde el siglo XI fue auspiciada por los papas, quienes consideraron las fronteras hispánicas como un frente cruzado específico. Las relaciones entre cruzados e hispanos no fueron fáciles y las razones de tal hecho son muchas: desconocimiento mutuo, tradiciones culturales diferentes, actitudes encontradas, intereses distintos de todo tipo... que a la postre dejaron una imagen distorsionada de unos y otros.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jjfv
Capítulo V CRUZADA Y RECONQUISTA DURANTE LA CONSOLIDACIÓN POLÍTICA Y MILITAR DE LAS MONARQUÍAS HISPANAS (1218-1492) from:
Cruzados en la Reconquista
Abstract: Señalábamos en el capítulo anterior cómo en 1213 Inocencio III había revocado en la decretal
Quia Majorlos privilegios de cruzada otorgados en años anteriores a quienes acudieran a la Cruzada hispana: «Et procter eadem causam remissiones et indulgentias hactemus a nobis concessas procedentibus in Hispaniam contra Mauros […] revocamus»¹. Cinco años más tarde, fue Honorio III quien se negaba a la petición de las autoridades portuguesas para que los cruzados alemanes y flamencos que habían participado en la toma de Alcaçer do Sal se quedaran en las fronteras peninsulares ayudando en las tareas de conquista y repoblación. A estos
CONCLUSIONES from:
Cruzados en la Reconquista
Abstract: Su viaje a través de los Pirineos, su arribada a las costas atlánticas y mediterráneas ibéricas, su presencia y activa participación militar en las conflictivas fronteras hispánicas eran consecuencia directa de su implicación en uno de los más
9 Theologies of Scripture in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries: from:
Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Franke John R.
Abstract: The Christian tradition has been characterized by its commitment to the significance of the Bible for life and thought. Indeed, Christian communal identity has largely been formed around a set of literary texts that together form canonical scripture. As David Kelsey remarks, acknowledging the Bible as scripture lies at the very heart of participating in the community of Jesus Christ, and the decision to adopt the texts of Christian scripture as “canon” is not “a separate decision over and above a decision to become a Christian.”¹ Yet the past two centuries have seen considerable change in the nature and function
14 Tradition and Traditions: from:
Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Ward Graham
Abstract: Convention is a form of social action governing behavior that has no ritual or symbolic value. In Britain a friend may be greeted with
15 Scripture, Feminism, and Sexuality from:
Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Cochran Pamela D. H.
Abstract: On August 5, 2003, at the national gathering of the Episcopal Church USA’s leadership, its bishops confirmed the diocese of New Hampshire’s election of the Reverend Eugene V. Robinson as its Bishop Coadjutor. This action made Rev. Robinson the first openly gay bishop in the Episcopal Church. Bishop Robinson and his supporters praised his election as a major step forward in the struggle for gay rights in America. Opponents decried the lack of biblical fidelity that Robinson’s election evidenced and predicted that it would split the Church asunder. Within months, this prediction came true, as churches renounced their denominational affiliation.
17 Postmodern Scripture from:
Christian Theologies of Scripture
Author(s) Loughlin Gerard
Abstract: Postmodernism—the arrival of the “future now”—is already past. It is history. The postmodern may be what comes after (
post) the present, the now (modus), but people are already seeking what comes after the postmodern, while others who once used the term have given up on it because it is so unhelpful. At one level, of course, talk of the postmodern was just a way of indicating the “up to date,” the newer than new. But at a more serious level it indicated something about modern times, about those characteristics of modernity that have become so intense that they
Book Title: Jesus the Central Jew-His Times and His People
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: In this book, LaCocque presents the case that Jesus was totally and unquestionably a Jew. He lived as a Jew, thought as a Jew, debated as a Jew, acted as a Jew and died as a Jew. He had no intention of creating a new religion; rather, he was a reformer of the Judaism of his day. True, his critique went far beyond an intellectual subversion. In fact, Jesus progressively thought of himself as the "Son of Man" inaugurating the advent of the Kingdom of God on earth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt155jm7q
Introduction from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: A vast literature has been and is now dedicated to the rediscovery of the historical Jesus. It is beyond the scope of this present attempt to do justice to more than a fraction of that literature. I must, therefore, start with an apology to all those scholars whose work is not specifically mentioned in this book. That is not a sign of nonappreciation but of the limitations of the author.
1 The Gospel as Retrospective from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: But this ostensible chronology is defeated by an internal logic whereby the end is the beginning and the beginning is really the end. As a matter of fact, the evangelists wrote their pieces a posteriori, that is, after realizing that
2 Jesus the Messiah from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: Jesus was born around 7 or 6 BCE, shortly before the death in 4 BCE of Herod the Great (who, incidentally, practiced state terrorism). He seems to have started his ministry at the age of thirty-three or thirty-four, after his baptism by John the Baptist, probably in 27 or 28 CE. The gospels cover about two and a half years of Jesus’s life. On April 6 or 7 of the year 30 CE, at the age of thirty-six, he was arrested and crucified.
8 Jesus Taught in Parables from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: What is a parable? It is a short story characterized by verisimilitude and conveying a lesson, usually moral. A parable is, in Hebrew terms, a haggadic or midrashic
mashal. The whole of Jewish tradition is bidimensional; it is built into the halakah (legal dispositions) and the haggadah (paradigmatic stories illustrating the meaning, impact, and relevance of a biblical theme or text). Historically, it must be said that preference has been given by Jewish readers to the halakic side of the tradition because of its obvious bearing on ways of life according to the divine order. Great revivalist movements in Judaism,
9 The Birth Narratives from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: Were I writing my book in the nineteenth century, I could have come with a typically explicit title such as “The Retrospectively Set Birth Stories in the Beginning of Jesus’s Ministry by Matthew and Luke.” As I said earlier, the gospels are written from the perspective of the death and resurrection of their main character, so that the end is the beginning and the beginning is the end. In other words, for the evangelists, Jesus’s death was no ordinary death, and so his birth was no ordinary birth.¹
12 Jesus Is Betrayed from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: The fate of both Jesus and the temple is—at least in the eyes of some early Christians—clearly consolidated into one large-scale event. John 2:21 says that, when Jesus spoke of the coming destruction of the temple, he was speaking of his own body. Witnesses at his trial accused him of forecasting the end of the temple—which in fact occurred some forty years later. It seems reasonable to conclude that both the cross and the temple ruins after 70 CE were seen as a dual inauguration of a new and final chapter in Israel’s history. True, the accusation
13 The Trial of Jesus and His Passion from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: According to Marcus Borg, Jesus’s entry into Jerusalem was a counterdemonstration, as Pilate’s troops were also entering the city from the opposite direction to reinforce the garrison on the Temple Mount during Passover. Jesus’s entry, modeled on Zech 9:9–10, symbolized the peaceful kingdom of God. Peaceful, yes, but with active resistance through public criticism and symbolic acts. For, to our surprise, Jesus has recourse to violence in the temple! His pacifism must thus be qualified: it is “bifocal.” Toward the Roman occupation, its aspect is of nonresistance, but toward the temple personnel and the perversion of their mission, it
Conclusion from:
Jesus the Central Jew
Abstract: The text of the gospel contains a canto of citations from the Hebrew Scriptures, and this for good reason, for the gospel writers wanted the Jewish roots of its message to be strong and conclusive.¹ Even an apparently non- Jew like Luke is eager to “prove” the authenticity of the messianic identity of Jesus by frequently citing the Hebrew Bible. In fact, this dependence of the gospel on Jewish traditions goes well beyond these quotations. The Hebrew Scriptures provided a rich hermeneutic treasure trove for the evangelists to build pesharim and haggadoth, illustrating the providential events of the life of
Form versus Function: from:
Abiding Words
Author(s) Schuchard Bruce G.
Abstract: In 1985, Maarten Menken’s essay “The Quotation from Isa 40,3 in John 1,23”¹ signaled an important development in the direction of the work being done at the time to characterize the form of the explicit Old Testament citations in the Gospel of John.² Over a roughly ten-year time span, Menken continued to publish one after another article devoted to a focused treatment of each of the Gospel’s citations³ until, in 1996, his book
Old Testament Quotations in the Fourth Gospel: Studies in Textual Formrepublished the revised sum of his previous work, adding to it an introduction, a conclusion, and
Quotations of Zechariah in the Fourth Gospel from:
Abiding Words
Author(s) Bynum William Randolph
Abstract: It is well known that Zechariah, particularly what is commonly called Second Zechariah (Zech 9–14),¹ had a significant impact on the writers of the four gospels, as well as on the authors of various other New Testament books.² The Fourth Gospel (FG) indeed exhibits an unmistakable preference for Second Zechariah,³ for the only two explicit citations in the FG from the Minor Prophets, or Book of the Twelve,⁴ are from this part of Zechariah. The first is in 12:15, citing Zech 9:9 at the triumphal entry, and the second is in 19:37, citing Zech 12:10b at the end of
Whose Zeal Is It Anyway? from:
Abiding Words
Author(s) Lappenga Benjamin J.
Abstract: The editorial comment in John 2:17 (“His disciples remembered that it was written, ‘Zeal for your house will consume me’”) interrupts the narrative flow between the account of Jesus’s actions in the temple (vv. 14–16) and the inquiry by “the Jews”¹ as to what sign Jesus gives for acting as he does (v. 18). Interpreters disagree about the significance and function of the citation of Ps 69:9 in verse 17, but most agree that “will consume” (καταφάγεται) is a reference to Jesus’s death, and nearly all agree that “zeal for your house” (ὁ ζῆλος τοῦ οἴκου σου) refers to
CAPÍTULO 1 ¿Para qué nos sirve la idea “organización”?¹ from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: La primera consideración que debemos hacer para abordar el desarrollo organizacional es que el término “organización” es una herramienta conceptual que nos permite establecer, más o menos claramente, los límites de un campo de actividad humana. Si desde una perspectiva social, las organizaciones son subsistemas de la sociedad, desde el punto de vista de los individuos y grupos, la organización es un campo de acción que nos imaginamos y que nos permite actuar de manera coordinada, estableciendo las identidades y atribuciones que serán utilizadas en ese contexto (Robertson, Roberts y Porras, 1993; Schvarstein, 2002). Para ejemplificar estas definiciones, tomemos el
[segunda Parte: Introducción] from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Esta segunda parte está dedicada a la revisión de modelos y herramientas ocupadas en la práctica profesional del desarrollo organizacional. Hoy, además de los estudios de clima, descritos en el capítulo sobre motivación, las intervenciones demandadas a psicólogos están asociadas fundamentalmente a cuatro niveles de amplitud en el impacto inicial de los acciones. El primero se refiere a modificar características o cualidades de los sujetos, como sus niveles de conocimiento, valores o habilidades. Esto se hace desde modelos como
benchmarkinginterno, mejores prácticas o diversos enfoques de competencias. Un ejemplo de intervención en este nivel es modificar los conocimientos, creencias
CAPÍTULO 5 Competencias y otros enfoques para la gestión del desempeño from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Empezaremos la revisión de intervenciones con aquellas que suponen la modificación de comportamientos o desarrollo de capacidades específicas en los sujetos. Este tipo de modelos asume que las características y cualidades generales del sujeto son adecuadas, ya sea por el efecto de selección o por formación, y que, por tanto, es posible intervenir en algunas de sus características específicas a través de la capacitación o entrenamiento. En este sentido, son intervenciones relativamente acotadas, lo que no significa que no sea posible integrarlas en los niveles más amplios de individuo, grupo u organización.
Anexo capítulo 5: from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Al analizar el desempeño en un rol es necesario discriminar entre los objetivos por lograr, las acciones que permiten lograr este objetivo y los factores que posibilitan o inhiben la capacidad del sujeto para implementar la acción. Por ejemplo, un objetivo del rol vendedor es la superación de las objeciones de los clientes que tienen que ver con tiempo para recibirlos. Una acción requerida es la de aplicar las técnicas de manejo de objeciones y un factor determinante es la capacidad de razonar bajo presión. La siguiente tabla muestra algunos ejemplos en este mismo sentido.
Anexo capítulo 7: from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: En muchas ocasiones los clientes piden entrenamiento o formación de equipos para grupos de trabajo en los que cada sujeto actúa en un solo rol y en los que no se requiere generar nuevas estrategias, sino que mejorar la comunicación. En estos casos es más conveniente realizar un entrenamiento en negociación, tema al que se dedicará este anexo.
CAPÍTULO 12 Capacidad empresarial e innovación from:
Desarrollo y eficacia organizacional
Abstract: Las capacidades para desarrollar proyectos empresariales e innovar son dos factores claves en la gestión actual y en el trabajo de consultoría son demandados a través de competencias, programas de coaching y equipos, así como en estudios de cultura. Por eso se ha dedicado un capítulo a la reseña de algunos modelos que no se describieron anteriormente y que sirven para contextualizar la preocupación por estas capacidades.
CAPÍTULO II ESTATUTO DE LA PERSONA from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Resumiremos los rasgos prominentes de los derechos humanos, considerando especialmente su formulación en el Capítulo III de la Constitución de 1980 y la relación de aquél con el artículo 5 inciso 2º del mismo Código Político. Tales características serán expuestas con intención ilustrativa, de modo que las reflexiones que siguen no configuran una explicación exhaustiva en el tema.
CAPÍTULO VII INVIOLABILIDAD DEL HOGAR Y DE LAS COMUNICACIONES PRIVADAS from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Ambos son atributos inalienables de la persona, indicativos de su proyección desde lo íntimo hacia la comunidad y de la incidencia de esta en la autonomía del sujeto. Como tales, trátase de derechos inalienables, pero susceptibles de ser adecuadamente o no ejercidos, característica que justifica regularlos para que se encuadren en la legitimidad que los justifica por principio. Sólo la ley puede restringir su goce, aunque siempre respetando la esencia libertaria que hemos destacado. Esta potestad normativa se halla, sin embargo, sujeta al control de supremacía por el Tribunal Constitucional y al homónimo político de los medios de comunicación. Reabramos
CAPÍTULO VIII LIBERTAD DE CONCIENCIA Y DE CULTOS from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La Constitución asegura a todas las personas la libertad de conciencia, la manifestación de todas las creencias y el ejercicio libre de todos los cultos. Trátase de tres derechos relacionados pero distintos, siendo el primero de ellos tan vinculado al fuero interno del individuo que pudo quedar ubicado antes en la numeración del artículo 19 del Código Político. Los problemas que se sufren en la actualidad están vinculados a la penetración, por medios externos, en la conciencia de la persona para manipularla sin ninguna consideración ética. Esos problemas se observan también, desde el extremo opuesto, cuando se invoca tal libertad
CAPÍTULO XVIII DERECHO DE ASOCIACIÓN from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Los partidos políticos no podrán intervenir en actividades ajenas a las que le son propias ni tener privilegio alguno o monopolio de la participación ciudadana; la nómina de sus militantes se registrará en el servicio electoral del Estado, el
CAPÍTULO XXII DERECHO DE SINDICARSE from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: La ley contemplará los mecanismos que aseguren la autonomía de estas organizaciones. Las organizaciones sindicales no podrán intervenir en actividades político partidistas.
CAPÍTULO XXV DERECHO A DESARROLLAR ACTIVIDADES EMPRESARIALES from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: El Estado y sus organismos podrán desarrollar actividades empresariales o participar en ellas sólo si una ley de quórum calificado los autoriza. En tal caso, esas actividades estarán sometidas a la legislación común aplicable a los particulares, sin perjuicio de las excepciones que por motivos justificados establezca la ley, la que deberá ser, asimismo, de
CAPÍTULO XXVI AMPARO ECONÓMICO from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: El actor no necesitará tener interés actual en los hechos denunciados.
CAPÍTULO XXVII IGUALDAD DE TRATO ECONÓMICO from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: Sólo en virtud de una ley, y siempre que no signifique tal discriminación, se podrán autorizar determinados beneficios directos o indirectos en favor de algún sector, actividad o zona geográfica o establecer gravámenes especiales que afecten a uno u otras. En el caso de las franquicias o beneficios indirectos, la estimación del costo de éstos deberá incluirse anualmente en la Ley de Presupuestos.
CAPÍTULO XXIX DERECHO DE PROPIEDAD from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: 470. Introducción. El artículo 19 Nº 24 de la Carta Fundamental es una disposición extensa, tanto que puede afirmarse que no hay otra más larga en su texto, salvo el artículo 93. Esa longitud es paralela a la complejidad del estatuto que asegura. Una y otra característica se explican y justifican, sin embargo, por la constitucionalización del dominio, ya que la propiedad es de aquellas instituciones que sufrió hondos y frecuentes cambios en los períodos de transición, como ocurrió en Chile en 1925, 1967, 1971 y 1980. Se pretende, por consiguiente, infundir en la Carta Fundamental estabilidad al ordenamiento jurídico de
CUARTA PARTE DEBERES CONSTITUCIONALES from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno II
Abstract: 649. Características. La Constitución de 1980, reiterando el criterio que guió al Poder Constituyente en la Carta Fundamental de 1818, contempló por separado los derechos, en primer lugar, y los deberes, en seguida. Se quiere dejar así en claro que unos y otros son inseparables, de modo que los límites y restricciones que recaen en los derechos son, a la vez, los deberes y obligaciones correlativas que han de cumplirse para que su ejercicio sea legítimo.
CONCLUSIONES from:
José Medina Echavarría y la sociología como ciencia social concreta (1939-1980)
Abstract: La interpretación propuesta en este libro supuso dejar de lado factores que pueden resultar claves en una historia de la sociología centrada en el papel de las elites intelectuales, sus querellas y pasiones, sus filias y fobias, sus redes, las intenciones y los resultados de la acción, como es propio de las biografías intelectuales o de textos como las memorias personales. Estos son, sin duda, invaluables fuentes de registro del pasado, cuyo sello distintivo es el recuerdo de los individuos. Sin embargo, esta perspectiva de análisis resultó incompatible con el objetivo trazado en la investigación, centrada en proponer una interpretación
MEMORIA Y NACIÓN: from:
Entre el olvido y el recuerdo
Author(s) Rincón Carlos
Abstract: Memoria y nación son temas caracterizados hoy por tener un rasgo en común. Debatirlos a la altura de las exigencias actuales no sólo exigió establecer nuevos puntos de partida para conseguir abordarlos, a pesar de tratarse de asuntos que se podían suponer archiconocidos. Fue necesario, sobre todo, comprobar en su escrutinio que se trata de campos donde los planteamientos de las diversas disciplinas académicas específicas apenas consiguen aclarar aspectos parciales de los fenómenos incluidos en ellos. Los estudios contemporáneos sobre memoria y recuerdo, nación y comunidades imaginadas no marcan por eso exclusivamente cambios en los modos de construcción y representación
EXCULPACIÓN Y EXALTACIÓN DE MIGUEL ANTONIO CARO from:
Entre el olvido y el recuerdo
Author(s) Rincón Carlos
Abstract: Un dogma acerca de Miguel Antonio Caro, cuya vigencia se extendió hasta finales del siglo XX, selló la memoria cultural de los colombianos. Sus formulaciones básicas fueron acuñadas en un lapso muy corto, entre 1917 y 1923, dentro de una ofensiva reinvidicadora que, sin haber transcurrido siquiera una década desde su fallecimiento, buscó exculpar a Caro de sus graves yerros políticos y consagrarlo como ancestro fundacional. No sólo se trató de exaltar la significación de sus actividades de traductor y comentarista autodidacta de Virgilio, apologista, gramático, periodista y poeta.
EN BUSCA DE LA OTREDAD PERDIDA: from:
Conmemoraciones y crisis
Author(s) de Pedro Robles Antonio Elías
Abstract: La imagen anterior pertenece a la
Real Expedición Anticuaria de la Nueva España(1805-1808), dirigida por el militar español de origen austriaco Guillermo Dupaix (1750-1817), y realizada por su compañero de expedición, el dibujante novohispano Luciano Castañeda. Forma parte del llamado, por el desaparecido historiador de la arqueología José Alcina Franch (1922-2001),Manuscrito de Sevillafechado en la Nueva España en 1820, y que actualmente se encuentra en el archivo de la Universidad de Sevilla, España.
III Populismo y filosofía from:
Crítica de la razón latinoamericana
Abstract: Si hay algo que caracteriza al pensamiento filosófico latinoamericano del siglo XX es su estrecha vinculación con la vida política y su preferencia por temas relaciona dos con la reflexión socioanalítica. A diferencia de lo que ocurre en Europa, donde la vida intelectual goza de un relativo grado de independencia con respecto a los cambios intempestivos del clima social –lo cual permite que las disciplinas científicas se desarrollen con base en la lógica interna de sus paradigmas–, en América Latina ha existido siempre una fuerte relación de consanguinidad entre el pensamiento y la política. Esto se debe a que,
Book Title: El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe- Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): VÁSQUEZ GUILLERMO HOYOS
Abstract: Este libro reúne las ponencias del seminario Nuevas formas de democracia (CLACSO, 2007) y del coloquio Nuevos y viejos populismos (Universidad Javeriana y Goethe Institut, 2008). En total son 23 autores que reflexionan, plantean ideas teóricas y hacen estudios de caso específicos relacionados con la democracia, el populismo y el pluralismo en varios países de América Latina durante el siglo XX y en algunas de las políticas actuales.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15hvxc9
EL CONTROVERTIDO CONCEPTO DE DEMOCRACIA EN ARISTÓTELES from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Rossi Miguel Ángel
Abstract: La problemática del populismo como categoría teórica no existió en el Mundo Antiguo.¹ Sin embargo, ello no implica que ciertos de sus atributos, con los que generalmente se caracterizó dicho concepto, no estuviesen presentes en el pensamiento político de la antigüedad.
DEMOCRATIZACIÓN EN AMÉRICA LATINA Y CRISIS DE HEGEMONÍA EN LA POLÍTICA NORTEAMERICANA from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Figueredo Darío Salinas
Abstract: El trabajo aborda un eje de preocupación que tiene que ver con el proceso de democratización en la región, esto es, los proyectos de cambio político en un contexto de “sociedad de mercado” bajo señales de crisis. Más que un desarrollo exhaustivo de los referentes particulares, se busca una presentación general, sugiriendo algunos de los principios analíticos que nos parecen relevantes para el estudio de procesos sociopolíticos actuales y sus perspectivas. Observando las tendencias que se desarrollan, y que corresponden a la historia política reciente, emergen interrogantes de relevancia que caen en el campo del análisis político y buscan reinterpretar
¿UNA NUEVA ERA POPULISTA EN AMÉRICA LATINA? from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Boron Atilio A.
Abstract: En fechas recientes el populismo experimentó una vigorosa resurrección en el discurso público de nuestros países. Categoría teórica que había desaparecido, como tantas otras, del léxico de las ciencias sociales, en los últimos años hizo su triunfal reaparición en la academia y también fuera de ella, en la esfera pública dominada por los grandes medios de comunicación de masas. Contribuyó decisivamente a esto la caracterización que de algunos gobiernos y movimientos de izquierda y progresistas de América Latina y el Caribe hicieran fuentes estrechamente vinculadas a la lógica de la dominación imperial. En efecto, el Departamento de Estado y el
CINCO TESIS SOBRE EL POPULISMO from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Dussel Enrique
Abstract: Deseo resumir el tema en cinco tesis sobre el fenómeno del populismo que ha cobrado actualidad dada la existencia de gobiernos latinoamericanos que, a excepción de México y Colombia han escogido presidentes de centro-izquierda en las últimas contiendas electorales desde el año 2000. Un cierto cansancio ante los modelos neoliberales aplicados por las élites y la constatación de las masas populares de los efectos negativos del consenso de Washington han promovido movimientos y decisiones que se juzgan como populistas por los grupos o los intereses conservadores, de
dentrode América Latina o desdefuera,es decir, desde Estados Unidos o
LA COMPLEJA Y AMBIGUA REPOLITIZACIÓN DE AMÉRICA LATINA from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) E. Luis Javier Orjuela
Abstract: A fuerza de repetirla la afirmación de que América Latina ha girado hacia la izquierda se ha ido convirtiendo en un lugar común. Pero ¿qué significa ese giro? En estas páginas desarrollo la tesis de que el contexto actual de la región se puede interpretar como una verdadera repolitización, si la comparamos con la situación de las décadas de los ochenta y noventa, que las podemos considerar como una despolitización generada por tres factores: 1) La existencia de regímenes militares que inhibieron la vida y la confrontación políticas. 2) La liberalización de la economía y el intento de sustituir la
LA CONFEDERACIÓN NACIONAL DE TRABAJADORES ROJASPINILLISTA, ¿ UN PROYECTO POPULISTA? from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Hernández Álvaro Oviedo
Abstract: Es reconocida la ambigüedad misma del término “populista” tanto desde la perspectiva teórica como de las experiencias históricas así mencionadas. Son claramente diferenciables el populismo americano de los granjeros estadounidenses, el populismo de los intelectuales rusos, el latinoamericano del período de la sustitución de importaciones y el llamado neopopulismo del período neoliberal. Pero al mismo tiempo hay consensos, a veces relativos, en torno a calificar como populistas a determinados gobiernos, como los de Haya de la Torre, Grove, Cárdenas, Betancourt, Perón, Velasco Ibarra, Vargas, Quadros, Brizola o Goulart; o a señalar prácticas y rasgos característicos del populismo tales como la
LA ESTRATEGIA POPULISTA EN LA POLÍTICA EXTERIOR: from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Piñeros Diego Vera
Abstract: Los nuevos populismos, término con el que se tratan de definir los rasgos típicos de muchos gobiernos latinoamericanos de las últimas dos décadas, han tenido impacto directo en el campo de la política exterior de los países de la región sobre los procesos de integración al debilitar las racionalidades y estructuras comunitarias y al oponer proyectos múltiples de cohesión superficial y desestructurada, que giran en torno a apuestas y posiciones coyunturales. Estas prácticas se desprenden de una exacerbación del interés nacional o gubernamental y de la rigidez de los programas y metas personales, además de la preponderancia de las ambiciones
¿SE HACE JUSTICIA A LOS GRUPOS SUBORDINADOS CUANDO SE LOS RECONOCE? from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Grueso Delfín Ignacio
Abstract: Por su potencial crítico o por su fuerza normativa, algunas teorías filosófico-políticas trascienden exitosamente su nicho original y se hacen objeto de una rápida apropiación social. Su lenguaje, permeando primero las disciplinas académicas, aparece de pronto en la oratoria política y en los documentos gubernamentales y su uso se generaliza como si todos tuviéramos que saber el significado exacto de su terminología. Un ejemplo de esto, que parece estar siguiendo el mismo curso del positivismo, el marxismo o el estructuralismo es la apropiación social de las nuevas teorías de la justicia (la de John Rawls y las de sus críticos
ANCESTRALIDAD Y PRÁCTICA POLÍTICA: from:
El eterno retorno del populismo en América Latina y el Caribe
Author(s) Barrera Eduardo A. Rueda
Abstract: En este trabajo caracterizo el papel que cumplen ciertos recursos culturales de origen ancestral en la definición de la práctica política de un sector importante de actores en la región.
Introduction from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Singerman Diane
Abstract: The city of Cairo, like all global mega-cities, is entrenched in processes of globalization where flows of labor, capital, and information are re-shaping its physical boundaries, the structure of the economy, and its political landscape.¹ The Egyptian state seeks to remake itself as the “Tiger on the Nile,” a growth engine that will not only sustain Egypt’s regional dominance but also propel it to become a truly global capital, drawing investment for its industry, franchises, services, and new ‘planned’ cities in the desert. The country’s heritage and its monuments attract millions of tourists annually, and tourism has become a pillar
4 The Siege of Imbaba, Egypt’s Internal ‘Other,’ and the Criminalization of Politics from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Singerman Diane
Abstract: A negative, pejorative characterization of informal housing areas,
manatiq al‘ashwayi’at, became a common refrain in Egyptian public discourse in the 1990s. These unplanned, lower-income, and poorly serviced areas came to be defined as a deviant phenomenon and, by association, the residents of those areas as deviants. Yet, estimates suggest that between 4.7 and 7 million Cairenes lived in informal housing areas in this decade.¹ What drives the labeling of a third or half of the residents of Cairo as deviants? This chapter examines how and why such a large share of Cairo’s residents have been deviantized and stigmatized. An answer
5 From the Hara to the ‘Imara: from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Mehrez Samia
Abstract: Given the dominance of the realist tradition in Egyptian literature, it is no surprise that Cairo, whether it is the historic city or the modern metropolis, should be the main metaphor for much of the literary production during the twentieth century. Urban space, for the writers of the city, has been a major architect of its social, economic, and political fabric. At one level, the city of Cairo emerges as an actor with real agency that embodies and structures social power, as well as political, economic, and symbolic processes. Cairo is not simply a physical presence that writers reproduce. Rather,
8 Extract from a Diary: from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Ibrahim Kareem
Abstract: “This is unbelievable!” I said, astonished to see this beautiful building for the first time. Meanwhile he, a British expert who used to work in Historic Cairo, looked at me out of the corner of his eyes, somehow proud of the fact that he knew something about my city that I did not. I must admit that it was shocking for me to discover this highly refined building a few steps off al-Dab al-Ahmar Street, very close to the well-known Bab Zuwayla, the southern gate of Historic Cairo. Despite the fact that I have been through this area hundreds of
12 Economic Liberalization and Union Struggles in Cairo from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Paczynska Agnieszka
Abstract: In mid-July 1998, labor activists distributed a leaflet among workers of the Iron and Steel Factory in Helwan, a sprawling industrial Cairo suburb that has long been the site of labor activism. The leaflet warned workers that the early retirement package that the government was offering would mean that their overall pension benefits would be lower than if they continued working until the usual retirement age. The leaflet appeared during a summer when the Egyptian government was trying once again to jump-start its slow-moving privatization plan, one of the central components of its structural adjustment program. The voluntary early retirement
16 Amr Khaled and Young Muslim Elites: from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Sobhy Hania
Abstract: Like many Egyptians, I have witnessed religious practice and consciousness evolve over the past two decades across generations inside my family, within my wider social setting, and in Cairo as a whole. My experiences within Muslim communities in Canada and the United Kingdom have sensitized me to the strength of similar patterns of religious identification in these communities. Perhaps contrary to the expectations of many westerners, Cairenes are becoming more religiously observant and more consciously Muslim, than they were in the 1940s, 1950s, or 1960s. As described in various intellectual histories of the Arab world, a clear change in the
17 African Refugees and Diasporic Struggles in Cairo from:
Cairo Contested
Author(s) Grabska Katarzyna
Abstract: Cairo, representative of many different faces, nationalities, traditions, languages, and cultures, has enjoyed the status of a cosmopolitan city throughout its history. Egypt also has been sought as a place of exile by sizeable refugee populations, including Palestinians after 1948 and Armenians who fled the 1915 massacre under the Ottomans. Traditionally, Palestinians constitute the largest proportion of exiled residents, today numbering between fifty and seventy thousand (el-Abed 2003).¹ In the 1950s and 1960s, Cairo was host to exiles from liberation movements in Africa and the Middle East, mainly small numbers of political activists.
Book Title: Laïcité et humanisme- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Blanc de Charles Le
Abstract: À la fin du recueil figure un texte de Voltaire sur la tolérance, qui vient à la fois inscrire les questions abordées dans une perspective historique et illustrer le caractère continu d'un débat dont cet ouvrage se veut l'un des nombreux échos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15nmj6x
Introduction from:
Laïcité et humanisme
Author(s) Blanc Charles Le
Abstract: La laïcité est un espace public au sein de l’État où chacun, pour le dire comme les stoïciens, peut ériger cette citadelle imprenable qu’est la conscience humaine. En elle-même, cette conscience est libre. Les maints tableaux des contraintes physiques, psychologiques ou politiques qu’offre cependant l’Histoire, la crainte qu’inspirent ces supplices, peuvent induire à la soumission de la conscience, limiter son champ d’action, la détruire. La conscience est donc libre, ou elle n’est pas. C’est la raison pour laquelle, dans les États démocratiques, tous les moyens sont développés pour protéger la liberté de conscience des citoyens. Cette protection s’appuie sur l’éducation.
Valeurs, humanisme et transhumanisme from:
Laïcité et humanisme
Author(s) Dufresne Jacques
Abstract: Le texte que je vous propose n’était pas destiné à un ouvrage collectif sur la laïcité ou la neutralité de l’État (je ne parviens pas à dissocier ces deux choses) dans le contexte québécois actuel. Il se termine en outre par une proposition qui ressemble fort à une boutade : transplanter
Laïcité scolaire et neutralité from:
Laïcité et humanisme
Author(s) Leroux Georges
Abstract: Nos sociétés sont composées d’individus qui sont certes unis par une commune appartenance à la nation, mais l’ensemble des caractéristiques qui constituent leur identité est si vaste et si complexe que la diversité détermine toute compréhension de cette identité aujourd’hui. Comprendre l’individu, c’est d’abord comprendre comment il construit ses normes et ses valeurs au sein de cette diversité. Plus qu’un simple fait, le pluralisme devient dès lors une norme qui confère à la diversité un statut qui dépasse ce que nous observons chaque jour : au-delà d’un ensemble de différences constatées, cette diversité représente la condition d’accès à une altérité
Contribution au débat sur la laïcité au Québec à partir d’éléments de droit comparé from:
Laïcité et humanisme
Author(s) Rousseau Guillaume
Abstract: Lorsque l’actualité québécoise est marquée de vifs débats sur la laïcité, comme ce fut le cas à l’hiver 2014, les contributions à ces débats proviennent d’une foule de disciplines : sociologie, philosophie, science politique, droit, etc. Parmi ces disciplines, les contributions se réclamant du droit sont souvent formulées avec un ton traduisant une certaine prétention à la primauté. Cela est logique, puisque l’un des principes à la base du système juridique canadien est justement celui de la primauté du droit. En vertu de ce principe, rien ni personne n’échappe au droit. Ainsi, toutes les sciences humaines du monde auraient beau
Deux concepts de laïcité et leurs enjeux from:
Laïcité et humanisme
Author(s) Baillargeon Normand
Abstract: À maints égards, il faut hélas en convenir, le débat sur la laïcité qui a eu cours au Québec durant de nombreux mois aura été profondément désolant. Si je devais résumer en quelques mots ce qui lui confère ce caractère, je dirais qu’il a trop souvent consisté, pour les uns comme pour les autres, à « empoisonner le puits » .
Book Title: Jouer la traduction-Théâtre et hétérolinguisme au Canada francophone
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Nolette Nicole
Abstract: Une analyse percutante, actuelle, de la circulation, en traduction, de la production théâtrale de l'Ouest canadien francophone, de l'Ontario français et de l'Acadie, qui prend des allures de terrain de jeu pour le français et l'anglais.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15nmj8z
1 The Duvaliers and Apocalyptic Memory from:
Tropical Apocalypse
Abstract: Noirisme was a form of political and cultural ideology that grew out of indigenism, which in turn was a reaction to the American occupation of 1915–34.¹ During the occupation, Haitian intellectual culture was reenergized in diverse and often contradictory ways, constructing a discourse of resistance that would finally imprison the nation in a rigid idea of cultural and racial authenticity that served also as the ideological justification for the worst excesses of the Duvalier regime.
2 The Marsh of Modernity from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Palsson Gisli
Abstract: Nature is unruly, continually causing problems through flooded rivers and perfect storms and, of course, receding glaciers and global warming. In the modernist language of mainstream ecology, things spin out of control, beyond steady states and tipping points. While some of these events may be less surprising than they used to be, they often pose spectacular problems for human society and, as a result, demand close attention and concerted action. Wetlands have repeatedly provided apt examples, refusing to “behave”. Representing a substantial part of the earth’s land surface (about 6%), wetlands occur practically everywhere, on every continent (except Antarctica), in
3 Biographies of Biotopes from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Kolen Jan
Abstract: Even more so than the large urban networks of our time, the natural landscapes of the prehistoric past appear to have been anonymous entities, largely devoid of humans and lacking individual authorship. However, on closer inspection, even the most ‘anonymous’, ‘natural’ and ‘original’ of landscapes bears the imprint of human authorship and personal identity, not only in terms of past human presence and practices, but also in terms of aesthetic experiences, retrospective vision, scientific interpretation and naturalist engagement. For this reason, this chapter explores the possibilities of a biographical approach to places and landscapes that we conventionally experience as natural.
4 Automobile Authorship of Landscapes from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Benediktsson Karl
Abstract: In landscape studies, the idea of ‘biography’ originates in American geography (Samuels, 1979) and was primarily concerned with biographies of individual people in the (not-too-distant) past and the influence of their decisions and actions upon the landscape (see also Meredith, 1985). A biography of a landscape
6 Places That Matter from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Papmehl-Dufay Ludvig
Abstract: My wife and I recently bought a house. It is not a new one, it is nearly 120 years old and has been inhabited by farmers all of this time. It was built in 1892 on the remains of two older houses that were destroyed in a fire that same year. From people in the neighbourhood we have learned some details about people who resided in the house before we bought it, and through findings within the four walls we have come in close ‘contact’ with specific events in the history of the house, such as the covering of old
8 ‘To Preserve the Terrain in its Present State’ from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Purmer Michiel
Abstract: In 1949 a small series of photographs was taken on the country estate of Eerde (province of Overijssel, The Netherlands). The photographs, that were probably commissioned by the new owner, the
Vereniging tot Behoud van Natuurmonumenten in Nederland(Society for the Protection of Natural Monuments in the Netherlands; shortly known as ‘Natuurmonumenten’), for publicity purposes, ended up in the archives of the Society. When visiting the exact locations of these pictures, the resemblance is often striking. The two oaks in the photo (see figure 8.1a and b) hardly seem to have grown in the past 60 years. This is a
9 The Quiet Authors of an Early Modern Palatial Landscape from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Ronnes Hanneke
Abstract: Academic research into elite architecture focuses mainly on the first building phase and, to a lesser extent, on later building campaigns; not on the much longer periods in between when the houses were actually lived in. Moreover, in such studies the research method or perspective used is predominantly that of art (or architectural) history; a cultural-historical approach is rare.
10 Piet Mondrian’s Victory Boogie Woogie, 1942-44 from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Stoye Jürgen
Abstract: New York is a city of extreme dimension. Its rectangular pattern, its verticality and density have a strong impact on the image of the city as well on how the city is imaged and imagined. Lyonel Feininger, Georgia O’Keefe, Alfred Stieglitz, Erich Mendelsohn, to name just a few, all were impressed by it. When setting their impressions on canvas or capturing it in a photograph, almost always the same perspectives are chosen: a flight of endless streets, a view from below to the heights of the towering buildings, a view from a certain height on a collage-like cityscape, or the
12 A Kaleidoscopic Biography of an Ordinary Landscape from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) de Jong John
Abstract: Reconstructing the biography of a landscape is like trying to unscramble a scrambled egg. You just cannot do it. Due to the variety of authors, the multiplicity of their actions, as well as the evolving condition of social relations, any attempt to unravel the social processes that underlie the transformation of our physical world is reckless. Moreover, it would be an impossible challenge to describe in detail the reverse impact the environment had on the knowledge, perceptions and practices of people that lived in the past. In addition to this complexity regarding the interpretation of the cultural dimension of landscape,
13 The Cultural Biography of a Street from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Hupperetz Wim
Abstract: This chapter presents a scheduling principle that can be used to improve the practical approach to cultural history. It is not
14 Post-Industrial Coal-Mining Landscapes and the Evolution of Mining Memory from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) van Veldhoven Felix
Abstract: The landscape tells – or rather is – a story. It enfolds the lives and times of predecessors who, over the generations, have moved around in it and played their part in its formation. To perceive the landscape is therefore to carry out an act of remembrance, and remembering is not so much a matter of calling up an internal image, stored in the mind, as of engaging perceptually with an environment that is itself pregnant with the past (Ingold, 1993, p. 152).
17 Layered Landscapes from:
Landscape Biographies
Author(s) Renes Johannes
Abstract: In Dutch landscape studies, the biography of landscape has become a popular theme during the last decade, being used as a basic ingredient for many local studies as well as a large research programme (Kolen, 2005; Bloemers
et al., 2010). However, the landscape biography is not a hermetic theory, but rather an inspiring metaphor, used as an umbrella for a number of ideas that have changed the ways we look at the history of as well as the actual dealing with landscapes (see the introductory chapter of this volume). The core of this set of ideas is the vision of
Book Title: Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955- Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Katz Steven T.
Abstract: How Jews had been treated during the war continued to influence both Jewish and non-Jewish society in the post-war years. The volume examines the ways in which moral and political issues of responsibility combined with the urgent problems and practicalities of restoration, and it illustrates how national imperatives, international dynamics, and a changed self-perception all profoundly helped to shape the fortunes of postwar French Judaism.Comprehensive and informed, this volume offers a rich variety of perspectives on Jewish studies, modern and contemporary history, literary and cultural analysis, philosophy, sociology, and theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3xkf
3 Centralizing the Political Jewish Voice in Post-Holocaust France: from:
Post-Holocaust France and the Jews, 1945-1955
Author(s) GHILES-MEILHAC SAMUEL
Abstract: Anti-Semitic persecutions targeting French and foreign Jews in France from 1940 to 1944 had deep consequences when it came to Jewish political organization. This chapter focuses on one of the most striking of these consequences: the creation in the winter of 1943–44 of the Conseil représentatif des israélites de France (Representative Council of French Israelites, CRIF). This organization symbolized unification of the different cultural and political Jewish groups that were active illegally under German occupation. The chapter therefore presents the events leading to this revolution and focuses on the political life of this new organization in postwar France.
Book Title: Narrative Criminology-Understanding Stories of Crime
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Sandberg Sveinung
Abstract: The contributors uncover the narratives at the center of their essays through qualitative interviews, ethnographic fieldwork, and written archives, and they scrutinize narrative structure and meaning by analyzing genres, plots, metaphors, and other components of storytelling. In doing so, they reveal the cognitive, ideological, and institutional mechanisms by which narratives promote harmful action. Finally, they consider how offenders' narratives are linked to and emerge from those of conventional society or specific subcultures. Each chapter reveals important insights and elements for the development of a framework of narrative criminology as an important approach for understanding crime and criminal justice. An unprecedented and landmark collection,
Narrative Criminologyopens the door for an exciting new field of study on the role of stories in motivating and legitimizing harm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15r3xt2
FOREWORD: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) MARUNA SHADD
Abstract: The irony, of course, is that there is nothing radical about narrative criminology at all. Throughout this book, the authors draw on a sophisticated array of leading thought in psychology, philosophy, cultural studies, and elsewhere. The so-called narrative turn in the social sciences (Brown et al. 1994) has characterized these other fields of enquiry
Introduction: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) SANDBERG SVEINUNG
Abstract: Narratives are central to human existence. By constructing our lives as stories, we forge connections among experiences, actions, and aspirations. We know ourselves as
oneover time—one consistent moral actor or one unified group of moral actors—however numerous or varied the cultural story elements that we access and integrate into our self-stories. Our self-stories condition what we will do tomorrow because whatever tomorrow brings, our responses must somehow cohere with the storied identity generated thus far. Criminologists have made ample use of offenders’ narratives, mainly, albeit not exclusively, as vehicles for data on the factors that promote criminal
1 The Rapist and the Proper Criminal: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) UGELVIK THOMAS
Abstract: Understood as a moral space, a prison symbolically positions its prisoners as a group of immoral others. Everyday life behind bars has numerous ways of communicating that most basic of the prison’s messages to its prisoners: you are not to be trusted. All forms of interaction in the institution will be structured by prison officers’ professional focus on the worst case, and their multiple efforts to keep it from becoming reality. The result is that day in and day out prisoners are reminded of the fact that being a prisoner is being a member of a group of immoral people
2 In Search of Respectability: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) FLEETWOOD JENNIFER
Abstract: Rather than approach offenders’ narratives as a record of events, narrative criminologists see talk as a form of social action (Presser 2009; Sandberg 2010, 2011). Building on Sykes and Matza’s techniques of neutralization, research in this vein has mainly explored narrative in the construction of deviant or desisting identity (Maruna and Copes 2005; see also Copes et al. 2008; Sandberg 2011; Topalli 2005). Although important developments have been made, women offenders’ narratives have been somewhat absent.¹ They arguably warrant special consideration: women’s offending is less common, their offending careers are shorter, and they are less likely to have co-offenders than
3 Gendered Narratives of Self, Addiction, and Recovery among Women Methamphetamine Users from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) GUNDERMAN MIKH V.
Abstract: Narrative criminology, with its ethnomethodological influences, has much in common with feminist theoretical frameworks that concern themselves with uncovering the constitutive nature of gendered practices, including speech (Butler 1990; Connell 2002; Stokoe 2006; West and Zimmerman 1987). If narratives provide us, as analysts, a window into how individuals “organize views of themselves, of others, and of their social worlds” (Orbuch 1997, 455), then a critical facet of narrative analysis involves investigating how “women are constructed or construct themselves” within them (Daly and Maher 1998, 4). Narratives impart essential messages about gender, with the structure, content, and usage of language emerging
Conclusion: from:
Narrative Criminology
Author(s) SANDBERG SVEINUNG
Abstract: It would be easy enough to categorize narrative criminology as an organizational advance, an assembling of research involving stories related to crime, and to pronounce once again the importance of stories as data. But narrative criminology is far more innovative and vital than that, a fact underscored by the studies shared in this book. Narrative criminology conceives of a world where experience is always storied and where action advances or realizes the story. This vision produces new understandings of harm as well as new and difficult questions.
ÉTICA DE LA DISCUSIÓN from:
Acción, ética, política
Abstract: Una práctica ancestral de la educación ha arraigado en cada uno de nosotros una representación de la verdad como un hecho físico acabado, como un bien material que existe en algún lugar o que es posesión de algún sujeto o grupo particular, hasta el punto de excluir a los demás de su disfrute, o exigir normas o rituales para acceder a él. La educación, desde este punto de vista, sería entonces el acto a través del cual un maestro que “posee” un saber porque “es un sujeto que se supone que sabe”—según la célebre fórmula de Lacan—lo comunica
ACCIÓN, ÉTICA, POLÍTICA. from:
Acción, ética, política
Abstract: El historiador Eric J. Hobsbawm ha mostrado que los siglos de la historia humana no empiezan exactamente el año 1 de una nueva centena.¹ Más que “periodos cronológicos” los siglos están jalonados por acontecimientos o procesos que establecen configuraciones históricas singulares con un tiempo propio diferente al del calendario. El siglo XIX, por ejemplo, “un siglo largo”, comenzó con el estallido de la Revolución francesa en 1789 y terminó con el comienzo de la Primera Guerra Mundial en 1913. El siglo XX, “un siglo corto”, comienza con la Primera Guerra Mundial y la Revolución rusa (que se produce como consecuencia
NORBERT ELIAS Y LA TEORÍA DEL SÍMBOLO from:
Acción, ética, política
Abstract: Norbert Elias murió en Amsterdam el primero de agosto de 1990 a la edad de 93 años. Sus capacidades mentales no se alteraron con la vejez y hasta el último instante mantuvo una vida intelectual supremamente activa como lo atestigua el hecho de que en 1989 apareció en inglés el libro
The Symbol Theory: An Introductionpublicado por entregas en tres números sucesivos de la revistaTheory Culture and Society, que había terminado en el verano de 1988. Poco antes de morir estaba trabajando, comenta su editor, en una nueva introducción que quedó infortunadamente inconclusa, pero que hace parte de
EDUCACIÓN: from:
Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) Tabares Jhon Henry Orozco
Abstract: Cuando hablamos de
educaciónaludimos a algo que ya no se refiere estrictamente a la escuela, tampoco a la instrucción pública, ni siquiera a los procesos de expansión de la escolarización. Su existencia actual nos coloca en otro lugar, en otro trayecto que pide, además, un esfuerzo de diferenciación desde el lenguaje. Nos preguntamos por una noción de “educación” que pierde su fisonomía. Quizás estemos cercanos a Carlos Skliar cuando piensa que la crisis educativa es un padecimiento que atañe más a una imagen del mundo que a una imagen escolar.³ Sin embargo, hacemos investigación para recordar que es deber
LA PEDAGOGÍA COMO CAMPO PROFESIONAL Y DISCIPLINAR. from:
Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) Gaviria Diego Alejandro Muñoz
Abstract: Colombia, desde el punto de vista pedagógico, parece uno de esos cuartos de maravillas o gabinete de curiosidades aparecidos durante el Renacimiento, en los que se coleccionaban y exhibían gran cantidad de objetos raros y extraños. En nuestro contexto abundan “curiosidades pedagógicas y educativas” que producen todo tipo de sensaciones y de sentimientos. Por ejemplo, se hacen actos académicos que giran en torno a la pregunta por la importancia de la pedagogía para la formación docente. Imagínense lo curioso, por no decir ridículo, que sería un acto académico de medicina donde su pregunta central fuera aquella acerca del papel de
PEDAGOGÍA, EDUCACIÓN, MARGINALIDAD Y CRISIS EN COLOMBIA (1978-1990) from:
Paradigmas y conceptos en educación y pedagogía
Author(s) de los Ríos Alexander Yarza
Abstract: En efecto, todavía estamos bregando con el impacto de largo alcance que la crisis económica y financiera global ha provocado no sólo en los sistemas bancarios del mundo entero, sino en todos los sectores del desarrollo humano, incluido el de la educación. Nos hallamos en una encrucijada. O bien continuamos como si no hubiera ocurrido nada y corremos el riesgo de arruinar los progresos
JUSTICIA TRANSICIONAL. from:
Después de la violencia memoria y justicia
Author(s) Amado Juan Antonio García
Abstract: La idea de justicia transicional (en adelante JT) se asienta en la literatura jurídica, política y filosófica a partir de los años ochenta del siglo XX, y tiene su explosión bibliográfica en los años noventa y en la primera década del siglo actual.¹ La JT se ocupa del tratamiento que en tesituras de transición política se puede o se debe dar a ciertos delitos graves o ciertas injusticias patentes ocurridas en la situación o bajo el régimen anterior a la transición en cuestión.²
Book Title: The Secret Life of Stories-From Don Quixote to Harry Potter, How Understanding Intellectual Disability Transforms the Way We Read
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Bérubé Michael
Abstract: In
The Secret Life of Stories, Michael Bérubé tells a dramatically different tale, in a compelling account of how an understanding of intellectual disability can transform our understanding of narrative. Instead of focusing on characters with disabilities, he shows how ideas about intellectual disability inform an astonishingly wide array of narrative strategies, providing a new and startling way of thinking through questions of time, self-reflexivity, and motive in the experience of reading. Interweaving his own stories with readings of such texts as Faulkner'sThe Sound and the Fury, Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time, Kingston'sThe Woman Warrior, and Philip K. Dick'sMartian Time-Slip, Bérubé puts his theory into practice, stretching the purview of the study of literature and the role of disability studies within it. Armed only with the tools of close reading, Bérubé demonstrates the immensely generative possibilities in the ways disability is deployed within fiction, finding in them powerful meditations on what it means to be a social being, a sentient creature with an awareness of mortality and causality-and sentience itself. Persuasive and witty, Michael Bérubé engages Harry Potter fans and scholars of literature alike. For all readers,The Secret Life of Storieswill fundamentally change the way we think about the way we read.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt15zc6mw
CHAPTER 6 Education That Integrates Culture and Religion from:
A Godly Humanism
Abstract: In the united states, at the mention of “religion,” what people often think of first is a moral code. We’re a pragmatic people; we’re practical people; we’re concerned about how to do things and how to act. In fact, pragmatism as a philosophy argues that theorizing follows action. Whereas classical Western wisdom stresses the thinking first and only thereupon the action that follows, Americans are very strong on action, and when it comes to defining religion, we tend to divide religions according to how they influence people’s behavior. Is it a “strict” religion? Is it an “easy” religion? What does
1 Deuteronomy 32 from:
Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: The first text in the Torah that will be analysed is the song of Moses in Deuteronomy 32:1–43. There are two good reasons for this. One is the already noted fact that 32:4 is the only Torah text that proclaims God is just in all his ways, righteous and upright. This claim applies not just to all that God says and does in the Torah but to all that God will say and do in the future. Another reason is that the song is located at a strategic point in the Torah and exercises an important function in relation
1 Book of Isaiah from:
Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: is in fact three books in one: there is a ‘First-Isaiah’ in chapters 1–39
1 The Psalter from:
Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: The one hundred and fifty psalms of the Psalter are divided into five books (Psalms 1–41; 42–72; 73–89; 90–106; 107–150), perhaps in imitation of the Pentateuch.¹ Some relationship between the one and the five is indicated not only by the fact that the five are parts of a larger book but also because each book ends with a doxology of praise. Does this signal that the overall purpose of the Psalter is the praise of God and to urge its users to join in that praise? As well as this, within the five books there
2 Book of Job from:
Restoring the Right Relationship
Abstract: David Clines, who recently completed a massive three–volume commentary on Job, thinks most readers would see ‘the major question’ of the book as the problem of (innocent) suffering. However Clines himself thinks that it is the ‘moral order of the world, of the principles on which it is governed’ by the divinity.¹ The two views are in fact related because the reality of innocent suffering questions in what sense, or whether in any sense, God’s governance of creation can be called just. The argument or arguments that seek to defend the righteousness/justice of God in the face of such
Book Title: Experiencing Scripture-Intimacy with Ancient Text and Modern Faith
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Campbell Antony F
Abstract: This book aims to enable a user to become closely familiar with a limited number of Older Testament texts and so be in a position to form judgments about them and, resulting from that, to have an under- standing of the nature of biblical text itself. Beyond this, the reality that these are key texts for the understanding of the Bible means that they have fundamental impact for the basics of faith today our understanding of ourselves before God, essential to faith in the life, death, and resurrection of Jesus Christ. Israel's prophets reflect on the role of God in human life; faith in God's love, God's passion for justice, the essential place of fidelity in faith. Israel's foundational narratives explore the nature of human lives before God; they include issues such as creation, human freedom, and faith in God's unshakeable commitment to human life. Alongside these concerns, there is the importance of getting a feel for the nature of scripture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t892
Introduction from:
The Church in China
Author(s) Rule Paul
Abstract: Of course, there have been some Christians in China, probably for nearly as long as Christianity has existed, and today there may be as many as fifty to eighty million; the very fact that nobody can count them says much about their low
Chapter Six Buddhism and the Religious Awakening of China from:
The Church in China
Author(s) Vermander Benoît
Abstract: This is not surprising; from the very beginning of Buddhist expansion in China, the monastic community constitutes the axis around which rotate the devotional practices, the beliefs and the institutional continuity of Buddhism. A liturgical place, the temple acts as a collective intercessor for the community
Theology and Culture: from:
From North to South
Author(s) Rochford Dennis
Abstract: Because of the wide range of themes and various methodological approaches present in the writings of Edward Schillebeeckx, it is difficult to find the core concern or unifying theological thread that characterises his life’s work. Does one identify particular texts as seminal to this task?¹ If so, what texts might one choose? What subjects stand out as commanding his attention?
Bonhoeffer and the Yoke of Discipleship in Contemporary Australia from:
The Bonhoeffer Legacy
Author(s) Schild Maurice
Abstract: This paper touches on dynamic constitutive dimensions of Bonhoeffer’s life as a twentieth century Christian and disciple. In so doing it discerns the actuality of discipleship in his life and death as being integral to his legacy for those who follow. In his case the call of the Master meant a particular journey and its culmination in martyrdom; but the call is to Christians of every time and place to accompany the Christ who died. The paper is therefore unapologetic about linking Bonhoeffer and his witness with the challenges which face believers living among the cultural modes and religious ambivalences
Chapter Two ‘The Mystical’ And ‘The Political’ As Dualities from:
Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: Not only are the terms, ‘the politics of mysticism’ and ‘the mysticism of politics’ saddled with the complexity of defining words, but the historical tendency to view ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ as pure dualities also places questions on the dialectic that is being proposed. In these dualities mystical experience and political action are intimated, most often, as in a certain opposition one to the other. In particular, this chapter will identify the following antecedent dualities: Augustine’s ‘two cities’ and Luther’s ‘two kingdoms’; the religious ‘mystical’ and ‘prophetic’ typology of Friedrich Heiler; and the mystical and political divide as found
Chapter Seven Twentieth Century Lay Movements from:
Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: The nineteenth century provides both background to, and valuable insight into, the tension between ‘the political’ and ‘the mystical’ as they then coalesce in the experience of developments throughout the twentieth century which gives rise to new forms of ecclesial community. In these new forms we also see evidence of how ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ form alliance into illustrations of either a ‘politics of mysticism’ or a ‘mysticism of politics’. This chapter explores those lay movements, intrinsically spiritual in character, which develop in the twentieth century. As spiritual movements that are lay and, thereby suggesting the possibility of Christian
Conclusion from:
Between the 'Mysticism of Politics' and the 'Politics of Mysticism'
Abstract: This has been a study of the mystical-political dialectic as it has emerged in theological reflection and through historical practice within the modern Roman Catholic period. I have suggested that such a reflection is necessitated by the universal call to holiness articulated at the Second Vatican Council. This proposes the secularity as a significant locus for the pursuit of the spiritual life. In this context a negotiation between ‘the mystical’ and ‘the political’ and the attempt to live a particular integration between them will only increasingly become apparent. It is, perhaps, the spiritual challenge of the legacy of Vatican II.
4 ‘I handed on to you . . . what I also received’ (1 Cor 15:3) from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Bergant Dianne
Abstract: ‘The living Tradition is essential for enabling the Church to grow through time in the understanding of the truth revealed in the Scriptures.’¹ These words from the Post-Synodal Apostolic Exhortation of Benedict XVI throw light on the relationship between Scripture and Tradition as understood by the Roman Catholic Church. It speaks of the revelatory character of the Scriptures, and of the Tradition as being living and dynamic as it opens the Church to the revelation of God. However, within the broader Christian Church, the relationship between Scripture and Tradition has been a source of contention and, despite the strides that
8 A Review and Assessment of the Church’s Engagement with Historical Critical Analysis of the New Testament as outlined in Dei Verbum from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Murphy-O’Connor Jerome
Abstract: The more conciliar documents of bygone years are studied, the extent to which they were conditioned by historical circumstances becomes more and more evident. It is important, therefore, to first situate
Dei Verbum(DV) in the history of the twentieth century Church. Then I shall examine what exactlyDVsaid about the New Testament, and conclude with an assessment of the impact of this document on the Church. It will appear that while authorities in the Church adhere faithfully to the directives ofDV, there remains a ground swell of bitter discontent among those who have not been brought up
10 Translating Biblical Texts Within an Ecclesial Context from:
God's Word and the Church's Council
Author(s) Launderville Dale
Abstract: Standardisation is necessary for coordinated group activity. There must be some fixed point or process that keeps the diverse members of the group acting in concert. With regard to the sacred text of the Bible, the translator is called to be faithful to the text. Yet as the Word of God, the message is communicated by God’s speaking it and the members of the community hearing it. The letters on the page participate in this communicative act and facilitate it as a fixed point within the process of communication. The translation of God’s Word via human words is more than
Book Title: In-Between God-Theology, Community, and Discipleship
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Pickard Stephen
Abstract: In-Between God' explores three important areas for contemporary Christianity: theology, community and discipleship. Part One inquires into the rhythms of faith as it interacts with themes of uncertainty and doubt, the nature of theological discourse, the task of systematic theology, evangelism and the various ways in which theology is done. Part Two discusses the importance of place in relation to the church, and themes of innovation, undecideability and new forms of monastic community. Part Three addresses themes in discipleship: simplicity, mysticism, the passions and pilgrimage. A red thread connecting these essays is the character of the triune God who is the energy and life in between all things.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t981
Chapter Two Uncertainty, Religion and Trust from:
In-Between God
Abstract: In the popular mind uncertainty is rarely associated with religious claims, particularly in an age of religious fanaticism and fundamentalism. This chapter examines the nature and function of uncertainty in religion. It does so by way of ten provisional theses: five general theses regarding religion in contemporary society and five theses exploring uncertainty from within the Christian tradition. In Part I the theme of uncertainty is considered against the background of fundamentalism and the accompanying lust for certainty; the impact of appeals to certainty with the rise of the modern sciences from the seventeenth century and the religious response; and
Chapter Three Trinitarian Dynamics of Belief from:
In-Between God
Abstract: More recently Jürgen Moltmann, among others, has drawn attention to the impact of this loss of trinitarian belief within the wider socio/political and
Chapter Five The Ways of Theology: from:
In-Between God
Abstract: What place does theology occupy in Australian Anglicanism? Australian pragmatism and impatience with matters of the intellect has had little enthusiasm for or apparent need of theologians in the Church. Some kinds of theological activity—overly academic, elitist and irrelevant—might only confirm such prejudice! If theology occupies a somewhat marginal place then perhaps this is as it should be. After all, in a management and market driven world what is the value of theology in the life of the Church? It is a question once addressed by that famous ex-Anglican John Henry Newman. In his preface to the re-publication
Chapter Six Evangelism and Theology in Dialogue from:
In-Between God
Abstract: Evangelism and theology have not proved to be very compatible partners, at least in the modern period of the Christian tradition. The relationship perhaps has more the character of a stormy courtship ending in separation rather than a well-established marriage. The nature of their partnership was nicely symbolised in the meeting in August, 1960 of Billy Graham and Karl Barth—arguably the two greatest figures in evangelism and theology respectively in the twentieth century. The Barthian interpretation of the meeting is recorded by Barth’s biographer, Eberhard Busch:
Chapter Eight Innovation, Undecidability and Patience from:
In-Between God
Abstract: Innovation derives from the Latin
innovare, meaning to renew or alter; essentially to bring in or introduce something new. Hence we may speak of novel practices and/or doctrines. It is a controversial feature of the life of the Christian church. Innovation is almost endemic to Christianity. The very nature of the gospel suggests that notions of surprise and novelty belong to the life of discipleship because they first inhere in the very character and action of God. The great surprising act of God in the incarnation and resurrection of the Messiah sets the pattern for the emergence of novelty at
Chapter Thirteen Unfinished Emmaus Journey: from:
In-Between God
Abstract: We live in a pressured, fractious and often violent world. We are all too familiar with the effects of disintegration in our personal lives and in wider society. As a result we seek peace and integration but it often remains a puzzle to us why such things seem so elusive or beyond our capabilities. We wonder whether we lack the patience and strength to craft a way forward, to remain on task and see something through to its conclusion. We are too aware at times that we lack the resilience required for the pursuit of peace and harmony; and for
Thou Shalt not Covet the Environment’s Water from:
Water
Author(s) Paton David C
Abstract: The Murray-Darling Basin stretches from southern Queensland across most of New South Wales and into Victoria and South Australia, and has been described as Australia’s food bowl. By the last decade of the twentieth century, eighty per cent of the most profitable farm enterprises within Australia were within the Basin. Economic wealth and productivity grew from the ability to extract water from the rivers of the basin for irrigation. The growth in irrigation during the second half of the twentieth century largely went on without careful consideration of the quantities of water available and little appreciation of the variability in
Australian Water Law: from:
Water
Author(s) Brindal Mark
Abstract: Any treatment of the water resource in Australia must, inevitably, confront the murky depths of its legal and political regulation, found both in common law emanating from courts and in legislation enacted by Parliaments. We use the plural here, for this law developed over centuries, first in England, Australia’s legal ancestor, and then, having been received as a consequence of the English acquisition of sovereignty, in the Australian courts and Commonwealth, State and Territory Parliaments. Make no mistake: coming to terms with water law is no easy task. Indeed, those who are expert in the area have spent years developing
Rising Sea, Drifting Bones, Dispersing Homes from:
Water
Author(s) Havea Jione
Abstract: This chapter engages some of the trials with which the rising sea gifts islanders in Oceania, and beyond.¹ Whether climate change or global warming causes the sea to rise, and rise, perpetuated by human action or not, is beyond the focus of this chapter. My concern is with an existential predicament: the sea is rising on the shores of Oceania and this pushes islanders (1) to rethink our beliefs and understandings, (2) to grieve at the unearthing of the remains of ancestors from beach-front graves, and (3) to relocate our understandings of homes and gathering sites because they are no
Water: from:
Water
Author(s) Ayre Clive W
Abstract: My aim in this paper is to consider water first as a religious symbol, but then also as something far more than that. My approach is based on a practical theology paradigm in which theory and praxis interact in
The Story of Jonah as Told by the Sea from:
Water
Author(s) Stroede Phoebe
Abstract: In
In Conversation with Jonah,Person develops his own reader-response approach to the Jonah narrative by combining observations from the field of conversation analysis with the reader-response theory of Wolfgang Iser.¹ He discusses the different narrative elements of the Jonah story (plot, character, atmosphere, and tone) and provides a reader-response commentary—that is, a commentary by the implied reader of the text. According to Iser, the ‘implied reader’ cannot be located within the text or even outside of the text in actual readers, but must be found in the ‘interaction between text and reader’.² In this interaction, ‘text’ and ‘reader’
To Hear what Water is Saying to the Churches from:
Water
Author(s) Daly-Denton Margaret M
Abstract: In recent years, as more and more Christian traditions retrieve the ancient practice of baptism by immersion, there has been increasing scope for artists to create baptismal pools that give visual expression to the rich symbolism that Christianity has traditionally attached to water. The new baptismal fonts at Salisbury Cathedral and the Cathedral of Our Lady of the Angels in Los Angeles, both dramatically located at the entry point to the liturgical space and both featuring the flow of ‘living’ water, are particularly inspiring examples. Reflecting on this development, the liturgist Gordon Lathrop expresses the hope that the sight of
Book Title: Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church- Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Regan Hilary D
Abstract: In November 2012 the Australian federal government announced the establishment of a ‘Royal Commission into Institutional Responses to Child Sexual Abuse’. This Royal Commission was set up after many years of reports of sexual abuse in Australia within religious institutions of various Christian churches, some state government inquiries and in the context of inquiries in other countries, most notably Ireland. The Royal Commission began its first hearing in April 2013. It has been forecast that the Commission will be hearing submissions for a number of years from witnesses, both from those who ask to speak to the Royal Commissioners and from those who will be asked to appear before the Commission. At the same time as the establishment of the Royal Commission, the Catholic Church in Australia established a Truth, Justice and healing Council to oversee the Catholic Church’s engagement with the Royal Commission. This collection brings together essays from biblical scholars, a church historian, theologians, ministers of religion from a number of churches, lawyers and a psychologist. They each address the issues of sexual abuse, society and the church in the context of the Australian inquiries. The volume ends with an overview of the processes engaged with by the Catholic Church and the State in the Republic of Ireland and reactions to these inquiries. The volume of essays considers sexual abuse from the perspective of the victims. What is to be done about the mess we are in over clerical sexual abuse? That question is puzzling concerned people today. This diverse collection offers them profitable reading, wherever they are coming from. It has enough useful suggestions and ideas to stimulate the calm, intelligent discussion now demanded by our communities.’ Edmund Campion, Australian Catholic University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9qr
The Space for Religion in Australian Society: from:
Child Sexual Abuse, Society, and the Future of the Church
Author(s) Babie Paul
Abstract: The 2012 establishment of the Australian Royal Commission into Institutional Responses to Child Sexual Abuse (‘the Royal Commission’)¹ focuses, for the first time, national attention on the ways in which religious organisations have dealt with matters that involve their interaction with the broader Australian society and its legal structures. The concern, seemingly well-founded, which lies behind the establishment of the Royal Commission, is that many religious organisations acted in ways which at best ignored and at worst actively sought to circumvent and pervert the operation of the law related to the abuse of children and others at the hands of
Lifestyle And Hermeneutics: from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Oliver Barry D
Abstract: How do Adventists who live in the twenty-first century understand the observations of Ellen White with respect to lifestyle? Most of her instructions were written over one hundred years ago in a very specific cultural and historical context. What does Adventists’ practical application of her instructions tell us about the way in which they are interpreting her writings? And why do some say that her writings are no longer relevant? These are fascinating questions that should be addressed candidly and openly by Seventh-day Adventists who are committed to fulfilling the gospel commission of Jesus and take seriously the mandate that
A Feast of Reason—The Legacy of William Miller on Seventh-day Adventist Hermeneutics from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Crocombe Jeff
Abstract: In his historical survey of Seventh-day Adventist views on inspiration, Alberto Timm makes the following observation: ‘Seventh-day Adventists inherited their early views of scripture from their former denominations and the Millerites.’¹ This essay will test the validity of this assertion, particularly the important role attributed to Millerite views. It will consider the sources of Miller’s hermeneutics, and then explore their impact on contemporary Seventh-day Adventist approaches.
Where Did Satan Come From? from:
Hermeneutics, Intertextuality and the Contemporary Meaning of Scripture
Author(s) Skeggs Andrew
Abstract: One of the most important parts of appreciating a story is identifying and understanding the main characters, including their origin and background. The key characters in the Christian story are God, Satan, and the human race. The Bible reveals the origin of humanity and teaches us that the eternal God has no origin. But where does Satan come from? This study will examine what the Bible actually tells us about the origin of Satan, namely about his origin, and his fall.
Book Title: Opening the Bible-Selected Writings of Antony Campbell SJ
Publisher: ATF Press
Author(s): Campbell Antony
Abstract: "When Tony Campbell, aged 75, asked the Council of Jesuit Theological College for Emeritus status and retirement from JTC, both were granted most graciously, along with a testimonial document which said in part: ‘His teaching has combined evocation and provocation in the best sense of those terms. He has mentored research students with scholarly exactitude and personal care. He has published books of the highest scholarly quality, of engaging readability, and of passionate conviction.’ When we at ATF were considering asking him for a volume of Collected Works or Selected Writings, we were well aware that ‘published books of the highest scholarly quality’ were likely to be found on the shelves of libraries and of specialised academics, but not with students and others generally interested. There may be a dozen or more of Tony’s books on the list from Amazon.com booksellers, along with another two or three that are not listed there. But most are heavy-duty specialist works, not easily accessible even to the educated public. We were equally well aware that there was a surprising number of essays and articles scattered in journals and proceedings of conferences that were, because of the scattering, often just as inaccessible. We thought that a collection of these in a single volume would be of great value to those interested. In the Introduction to this volume, Father Campbell has gone into some detail about the contents. Suffice for us to say that Job and the issues associated with suffering concern us all, that the interplay of history and narrative is a constant in the understanding of much biblical text, and that the nature of the Bible and its role in our lives is a major concern for most thinking Christians. While Father Campbell’s focus is on the Older Testament, pondering what he looks at throws light on much of the Newer Testament as well. The writings Tony Campbell has pulled together in this single volume address significant issues within the readable length of an article or a talk. Addressed originally to thinking people, we at ATF believe they are likely to be of interest to a wide audience."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt163t9t9
Introduction from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The beauty of a volume like this for someone like myself, whether collected essays or selected writings, is to see the struggle unfolding over a lifetime with fundamental issues of Christian faith and issues of the Older Testament, driven by the pressure of the biblical text.¹ Perhaps the younger me is best characterised by the reaction of the assembled students of the United Faculty of Theology to my selfdescription as a ‘simple Bible Christian’, a statement that was greeted with a wave of spontaneous laughter. Apparently students were not convinced; but I was sincere. I certainly held to the Bible
Job: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: It was a friend who practises both as psychologist and biblical scholar who pointed out to me that the encounter with a text proceeds on much the same lines as the encounter with a person. I suspect an academic approaches a book in much the same way that a psychiatrist approaches a client. You want a history from a client. So do we from a book. Where did the author study and under what scholars? What is the background to the book: doctoral dissertation or years of mature study? What problem is the client presenting? What insight or impulse drove
God And Suffering—‘It Happens’: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: When looking at suffering intellectually, JL McKenzie concludes with characteristic honesty: ‘We have no answer to the problem.’ He settles as such on ‘an experience of God’ as the ultimate answer (
Two-Edged Sword, 237). Some such experience has to be the ultimate answer; there is no other. Nevertheless, I propose that the second section of the initial divine speech (Job 38:39–39:30, some thirty-three verses), may invite us or allow us to move ‘the problem’ to a quite different context. The experience of God is still crucial, but the context is radically other than generally allowed for in the book
Synchrony and the Storyteller from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: As recently as some thirty years ago, an influential scholar, a member of the western biblical establishment, published comments suggesting a redactor might have ‘mindlessly mutilated’ a text and referring to ‘the more or less mechanical piecework of a redactor’. Such remarks may betray what Robert Polzin has pilloried as a view of ancient editing involving the ‘damned hands’ of ‘inept redactors’.¹ Where this view exists, any attempt at serious synchronic study would be dishonest and a waste of time. I fear that it has been around for a long time and in some quarters has not yet vanished. When
Who Dares Wins: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: This paper really begins where an article of mine in this year’s
Australian Biblical Reviewended. The article discusses the story of David and Goliath in the books of Samuel, and in its last footnote refers to the two theological positions latent in interpretations of this story. In one understanding, God’s role is to empower David to use his human talents and prowess in a courageous and daring act. But, in the more common interpretation, when the emphasis is shifted toward David as the little shepherd boy, God is no longer portrayed enabling full human potential to be realised, but
Pentateuch Beyond Sources: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Among the factors that bear most weight in the demise of the hypothesis, a couple are of particular significance. The
The Nature of Biblical Narrative from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Something of a paradigm shift has been in the making for a while in biblical studies. A future shape has yet to jell. The old historical-critical analysis has not been generating new life for a long time.¹ Other approaches have not so far struck lasting root. The interaction of developmental (cf diachronic) reading and interpretational (cf synchronic) reading is under way, but far from any agreed integration. A resolution of tensions between critical and literary approaches is still to be achieved. The factors involved in any shift are complex; among them, the often competing needs of faith communities, university communities,
The Storyteller’s Role: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The three factors needing to be considered here are:
Women Storytellers in Ancient Israel from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Something of a paradigm shift has been in the making for a while in biblical studies. A future shape has yet to jell. The old historicalcritical analysis has not been generating new life for a long time.¹ Other approaches have not so far struck lasting root. The interaction of developmental (cf diachronic) reading and interpretational (cf synchronic) reading is under way, but far from any agreed integration. A resolution of tensions between critical and literary approaches is still on the far horizon. The factors involved in any shift are complex; among them, the often competing needs of faith communities, universities,
Form-Criticism’s Future from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: Form criticism had a meteoric rise in the early part of the twentieth century and fell from favour toward its end. For some, the future of form criticism is not an issue: it has none. But if form criticism embodies an essential insight, it will continue. If it is to continue in the reflective and thinking world of academic scholarship, the attraction that triggered its rise, the flaws that caused its fall, and the aspects that assure its future all need to be analysed. So this article will have three parts: the past—the rise and fall of form criticism;
The Bible’s Basic Role from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: For some, the well-supported avowal that 1–2 Samuel is not the best authenticated near-contemporary record of aspects of the history of Israel comes as a matter of relief and liberation; for others, such distancing from history is a cause for sorrow. For some, the realisation that 1–2 Samuel contains optional variants and conflicting, on occasion contradictory, traditions comes as no surprise; for others, the fact that it is not a reliable source of information, to be trusted
Word of God or Word of God’s People: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: The most significant factor contributing to the weighty significance of the Bible is probably the phrase ‘the word of the Lord’ or ‘the word of God’ (
debar yhwh) in its various equivalents in Hebrew and in translations. Church councils, church authorities, preachers, teachers, and so many others contribute to our understanding of the phrase, from literal to highly metaphoric. Leuven professor Msgr Raymond Collins in that most orthodox of reference works,The New Jerome Biblical Commentary,in his article on Inspiration, writes: ‘This traditional formula [the word of God], apparently simple, is extremely complex and polyvalent.’²
The Reported Story: from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: This paper emerges from a combination of three factors: intuition, commonsense logic, and everyday observation. The intuition is simply a storyteller’s conviction, after working with the text of 1–2 Samuel for a while, that no storytellers worth their salt would be able to tell some of the stories the way they are in the text.¹ In exciting areas, they are too bare, too bald; they cry out for embellishment. Commonsense logic says that as well as the simple telling of a story and the skilled fashioning of a story as a work of literary art, there is also the
God, Anger, and The Old Testament from:
Opening the Bible
Abstract: A part from a detour in defence of Job last year, my contributions to these gatherings have been focused on the appropriateness of the language we use when speaking about God. In 1985, I entered a plea for the right of the human analogy to be given full value as a paradigm for language about God: in a nutshell, it is unlikely to be appropriate or helpful to speak of God’s action upon a human person in ways that could not be applied to the action of another human person. In 1986, I appealed to the story of David and
13. ENTRE UNA REALIDAD PLURILINGÜE Y UN ANHELO DE NACIÓN. from:
Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Villavicencio Frida
Abstract: Considerar la sociolingüística como el estudio de las necesidades comunicativas de los hablantes implica conocer las condiciones sociales en las que dicha comunicación se produce y las repercusiones que estas condiciones tienen en la producción y las actitudes lingüísticas de las personas que interactúan en un contexto específico. Los fenómenos sociolingüísticos a los que dan lugar las necesidades comunicativas son complejos y dinámicos, por ello fenómenos como el cambio, variación, contacto, bilingüismo, diglosia y desplazamiento o muerte de lenguas sólo pueden entenderse a cabalidad si se atiende tanto sincrónica como diacrónicamente al contexto en el que estos fenómenos se producen.
16. DIGLOSIA Y OTROS USOS DIFERENCIADOS DE LENGUAS Y VARIEDADES EN EL MÉXICO DEL SIGLO XX: from:
Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Zimmermann Klaus
Abstract: El concepto sociolingüístico que tuvo más impacto en el empeño de concebir y describir una de las formas establecidas para diferenciar el uso de dos o más lenguas, sus condiciones y consecuencias es el de
diglosia o poliglosia. Antes de entrar en más detalles sobre este concepto, podemos constatar que en la historia de la humanidad en muchas (no en todas) situaciones de convivencia (en su sentido neutral) de dos o más lenguas dentro de un mismo territorio comunicativo, los integrantes de este grupo o sociedad desarrollaron un tipo de regularidad para la repartición del uso de las lenguas presentes.
17. LENGUAS ORIGINARIAS EN RIESGO: from:
Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Muntzel Martha
Abstract: El propósito de este capítulo es describir el fenómeno del desplazamiento lingüístico (“muerte de lenguas”), ubicarlo en el mundo actual y evaluar la configuración de los factores contribuyentes con referencia a las lenguas indígenas de México, para diagnosticar las diferencias individuales y descubrir si existe un proceso generalizado de desplazamiento de las lenguas “minorizadas”. Se presenta un resumen de los avances obtenidos en nuestra comprensión del proceso y las medidas tomadas para detener la pérdida de lenguas mexicanas¹.
21. LAS LENGUAS Y LOS MEDIOS: from:
Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Ávila Raúl
Abstract: En la actualidad, en las habitaciones de los hoteles se ofrece al viajero, como algo normal, un televisor, una radio, un teléfono y, cada vez más frecuentemente, una conexión para internet¹. Si no está disponible el acceso a la red mundial en la habitación, es posible que ese servicio se ofrezca en el área de recepción. Además, casi siempre está presente un medio más antiguo: el impreso. Aparte de las revistas y los anuncios, si el hotel está, por ejemplo, en una ciudad alemana como Berlín, el viajero puede encontrar también una Biblia en tres lenguas: alemán, francés e inglés.
22. SIGNIFICADO Y FILIACIÓN DE LAS POLÍTICAS DE LENGUAS INDOAMERICANAS. from:
Historia sociolingüística de México
Author(s) Cruz Héctor Muñoz
Abstract: En abstracto, una política es un conjunto de prioridades en una dirección determinada, que se elige a la luz de ciertas condiciones, para sustentar decisiones presentes y futuras (Schiffman 2005). Por derivación, una política del lenguaje contiene representaciones y decisiones —regulaciones, normas legales, instrucciones— acerca de problemas tales como el estatus, uso, normalización, dominios, enseñanza y territorio de los idiomas, así como de los derechos civiles de los hablantes. El conjunto de las representaciones y decisiones constituye una propuesta multilingüe compatible o no con un proyecto de sociedad. Los componentes comunicativos distintivos de toda política del lenguaje son el lenguaje
Book Title: Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Campbell Timothy C.
Abstract: This is a book about the need for redemptive narratives to ward off despair and the dangers these same narratives create by raising expectations that are seldom fulfilled. The quasi-messianic expectations produced by the election of President Barack Obama in 2008, and their diminution, were stark reminders of an ongoing struggle between ideals and political realities. Redemptive Hope begins by tracing the tension between theistic thinkers, for whom hope is transcendental, and intellectuals, who have striven to link hopes for redemption to our intersubjective interactions with other human beings. Lerner argues that a vibrant democracy must draw on the best of both religious thought and secular liberal political philosophy. By bringing Richard Rorty's pragmatism into conversation with early-twentieth-century Jewish thinkers, including Martin Buber and Ernst Bloch, Lerner begins the work of building bridges, while insisting on holding crucial differences in dialectical tension. Only such a dialogue, he argues, can prepare the foundations for modes of redemptive thought fit for the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1657v0t
INTRODUCTION from:
Redemptive Hope: From the Age of Enlightenment to the Age of Obama
Abstract: This is a book about our need for redemptive narratives to ward off despair and the dangers these same narratives create by raising expectations that are seldom fulfilled. The story of the rise of secular redemptive hope narratives from the age of Enlightenment to the early part of the twenty-first century has been a story of the struggle between heightened expectations and postutopian despair.¹ The quasi-messianic expectations produced by the election of President Obama in 2008—followed by the diminution of these expectations—was a stark reminder that redemptive hope is seldom satisfactorily fulfilled. Although what led to the dashing
Introducción from:
Pasados y presentes de la violencia en Colombia
Abstract: En este libro, defendemos la idea de que las comisiones de estudio sobre la violencia son tecnologías o artefactos institucionales de construcción de memorias históricas sobre lo ocurrido en Colombia desde mediados de los años cuarenta hasta hoy. En ese sentido, pensamos que las comisiones de estudio sobre la violencia han funcionado, en medio del conflicto, como correas transmisoras de narrativas de país, como intentos de gestión pública de las violencias y como dispositivos de producción histórica de versiones sobre el conflicto, en unos marcos temporales que son vividos de diversas maneras por los actores involucrados (véase rufer 2010). Examinemos
Book Title: La muerte-Siete visiones, una realidad
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Posse Eugenia Villa
Abstract: Los seres humanos sabemos que vamos a morir. ¿Fortunio o desgracia? Sin duda, algunas personas quisieran vivir sin pensar en esta condición. Más aún, la sociedad actual expele la muerte y, en consecuencia, ha cifrado una conspiración para silenciarla. Por tal razón, el libro que tiene en sus manos aventura una múltiple respuesta a la pregunta “¿Qué es la muerte?". Hemos recogido aquí las voces de algunas disciplinas —literatura, antropología, sociología, psicología, medicina, filosofía y teología—para las cuales resulta insoslayable esta pregunta. Su lenguaje sereno y claro, aunque académico, quiere satisfacer a aquel lector que siente inquietud respecto al tema. Los tonos narrativo, descriptivo, analítico, metafórico y hermenéutico que se encuentran en sus siete capítulos reconocen la riqueza que encierra el problema de la muerte y exploran su significado como realidad existencial, símbolo, memoria, complejidad o sacramento. Así como la muerte posee un valor educativo porque nos enseña que nuestro sentido no está en el tener y que el amor es lo único que queda después de la muerte, así también esta obra tiene una pretensión educativa: que el lector se haga más amigo de la muerte, aunque permanezca el miedo hacia ella.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zsfn
Introducción from:
La muerte
Author(s) Rueda José Luis Meza
Abstract: Los seres humanos sabemos que vamos a morir y, aunque compartamos en un alto porcentaje nuestro genoma con otros seres vivos, estos últimos ignoran que son mortales. ¿Fortunio o desgracia? Sin duda, algunas personas quisieran vivir sin pensar en esta condición, ni vivir ninguna situación que se las recuerde. E. Duque afirma que la sociedad actual expele la muerte y, en consecuencia, ha cifrado una conspiración para silenciarla. Queremos esconder la realidad de la muerte para distraernos en una vida llena de cosas superfluas y banales. Adicionalmente, cada vez más existe un rechazo fragante al duelo, llegando incluso a su
CAPÍTULO 6 Horizontes para comprender la muerte: from:
La muerte
Author(s) Rodríguez Roberto Solarte
Abstract: La muerte es un hecho que sobreviene a todos los seres vivos. La humanidad ha tenido diversas actitudes ante la muerte, básicamente de carácter religioso y, más recientemente, filosófico y científico. Lo común a todas ellas es que se trata de un hecho que no acabamos de comprender, pues las descripciones de qué nos pasa al morir no nos dejan satisfechos. En este sentido, las diversas elaboraciones de las culturas sobre la muerte mantienen unos rasgos propios del misterio y, muchas veces, de la manifestación de lo sagrado.
CAPÍTULO 4 EL RECONOCIMIENTO DIALÓGICO DE LA PERVERSIDAD HUMANA from:
Mal y sufrimiento humano
Abstract: La problemática de la libertad humana alcanza en la filosofía del idealismo alemán su máxima expresión. Así, Heidegger caracteriza la filosofía de la libertad desarrollada por Schelling en 1809 como la “obra más profunda del idealismo y con ello de la filosofía occidental”¹ y, al mismo tiempo, la designa como “la cumbre de la metafísica del idealismo alemán”². Esta obra de la que habla Heidegger aquí son las
Investigaciones sobre la esencia de la libertad humana y los objetos con ella relacionadospublicada por Schelling en 1809. En 1809 Schelling busca distanciarse de manera decisiva de la filosofía de la
CAPÍTULO 6 ESCUCHAR EL DOLOR DE LA FEROCIDAD EXTREMA from:
Mal y sufrimiento humano
Abstract: En el desarrollo histórico-filosófico de nuestro presente el desafío del mal ha alcanzado su máximo nivel de despliegue. Con frecuencia nuestra época ha sido caracterizada como la edad de la crisis de la razón, pero también puede ser considerada como la de la crisis de la teodicea y, con ello, de todo esfuerzo racional por neutralizar y compensar el despliegue inmanente del mal y del sufrimiento humano en el mundo. En este contexto, los acontecimientos sociopolíticos y culturales del siglo XX parecen indicar que no se puede ya más comprender el mal como un mero fenómeno parasitario, esto es, como
I CIBERNÉTICA from:
Pensar sistémico
Abstract: El término cibernética tiene su origen en la palabra griega
kybernetiké, su sentido es el de significar aquellos oficios relacionados con la navegación, bien sea timonel o piloto. Fue Norbert Wiener quien, en 1948, acuñó el términocibernéticacon el sentido actual para incluir en éste aspectos que hacen referencia a la teoría de control y de comunicación, los cuales resultan pertinentes para comprender cómo opera la causalidad, tanto en organizaciones vivas como en organizaciones no vivas, como lo son las máquinas.
II ESTRUCTURA Y ORGANIZACIÓN from:
Pensar sistémico
Abstract: El concepto de relación ha sido transformado por la sistémica en su objeto de observación por excelencia; ha incorporado unos elementos de reflexión nuevos al acto de pensar. Del estudio de la “relación” se han derivado otros matices cuya naturaleza impone nuevas formas de reflexionar. Así, el concepto de conexión, pauta, vínculo, patrón u otros sinónimos encierran en su significado algún sentido de carácter relacional, han permitido que la atención de la sistémica se centrara en cómo las relaciones no se dan en el orden del aislamiento y, por lo tanto, son la esencia misma de totalidades que se organizan
IV EL PENSAR COMPLEJO from:
Pensar sistémico
Abstract: Es frecuente encontrar que en aquello de lo cual se da cuenta en las descripciones, que posteriormente serán motivo de explicaciones, se cifra la verdad de lo que estipula la razón, con la persistente actitud de considerarlo como algo objetivo. Sin embargo, la
VI HERMENÉUTICA (TRADUCCIÓN/LENGUAJE/INTERPRETACIÓN) from:
Pensar sistémico
Abstract: El conocimiento emerge en el contexto de dos movimientos elementales entre quien conoce y el objeto de conocimiento, el acercamiento y el alejamiento. Estos dos actos resumen en su sencillez la esencia misma del acto de conocer. Acercar se para tener una experiencia más conectada con el mundo de las cosas, con sus objetos, con el universo. Alejarse para poder obtener así la distancia suficiente que otorgue a la experiencia sobre el mundo una dimensión en perspectiva. Acerca miento para sentir el universo, para sumergirse en él; alejamiento para no sentirlo, para desvincularse del universo.
Book Title: Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia-Huellas históricas de la cooperación científica entre dos continentes
Publisher: Pontificia Universidad Javeriana
Author(s): Barajas Angélica Hernández
Abstract: Este libro sigue las huellas de los dos hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en la Nueva Granada y actual Colombia, para mostrar los caminos históricos de cooperación e intercambio científico entre Alemania y Colombia. Desde el famoso viaje de Alexander von Humboldt a América y su encuentro con José Celestino Mutis y otros reconocidos investigadores del Nuevo Mundo en Santa Fe de Bogotá en el año 1801, la cooperación científica entre Alemania y Colombia se ha desarrollado en un amplio panorama de encuentros, relaciones, correspondencias e intercambios. Por otro lado, es menos conocida la influencia del hermano Wilhelm von Humboldt en la academia de Latinoamérica. No obstante, a pesar de que Wilhelm von Humboldt nunca visitó el Nuevo Continente, el discurso de este importante reformador del sistema de educación en Prusia tuvo un importante eco en una buena parte del pensamiento académico que se ha gestado desde la Nueva Granada hasta nuestros días. Seguir las huellas de estos dos hermanos, recorriendo los caminos que han tomado sus ideas y pensamientos en el contexto latinoamericano, es el propósito de los ensayos que se unen en este libro. Con esto se busca evidenciar no solo el impacto del pensamiento humboldtiano en Colombia como un ejemplo significativo en la historia de la ciencia entre Europa y Latinoamérica, sino también indagar por la actualidad de las propuestas humboldtianas para la ciencia y la cooperación académica de nuestro presente.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt169zt3z
Alexander von Humboldt: from:
Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia
Author(s) Ángel Jorge Tomás Uribe
Abstract: Sin duda, la actividad de Humboldt que más atención ha recibido ha sido la científica, la cual se proyectó generosamente en todas las ramas del saber relativas al conocimiento de la naturaleza. Sus dos estancias –entre el 12 de abril y el 2 de junio de 1800 y entre el 23 de marzo y el 31 de diciembre de 1801– le permitieron adentrarse desde la periferia hasta el corazón de la Nueva Granada y la Gobernación de Popayán, con lo que su sentido de observación se nutrió de ese paisaje tan diferente al que percibía en su natal Europa.
Las ocho láminas de Humboldt sobre Colombia en Vistas de las cordilleras y monumentos de los pueblos indígenas de América (1810) from:
Los hermanos Alexander y Wilhelm von Humboldt en Colombia
Author(s) Ángel Marta Herrera
Abstract: Hace un par de años recibí una amable invitación para estudiar las láminas relativas al actual territorio de Colombia que habían sido publicadas en el libro de
Vistas de las cordilleras y monumentos de los pueblos indígenas de América(1810).¹ La idea de analizar láminas publicadas en la obra de Humboldt me entusiasmó, por lo que sin muchas dilaciones acepté la invitación. Lo señalado explica algunos elementos que delimitan el tratamiento del tema: primero, que el territorio considerado en este artículo es el de la actual Colombia y no el del virreinato de la Nueva Granada. En efecto, cuando Humboldt
Book Title: Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Sitze Adam
Abstract: In this fascinating and rare little book, a leading Italian feminist philosopher and the Archbishop of Milan face off over the contemporary meaning of the biblical commandment not to kill. The result is a series of erudite and wide-ranging arguments that move from murder and suicide to just war and drone strikes, from bioethics and biopolitics to hermeneutics and philology, from Theodor Adorno and Max Horkheimer to Hannah Arendt and Michel Foucault, from Torah and Scripture to art and literature, from the essence of human dignity and the paradoxes of fratricide to engagements with Levinasian ethics. Less a direct debate than a disputation in the classical sense, Thou Shalt Not Kill proves to be a searching meditation on one of the unstated moral premises shared by otherwise bitterly opposed political factions. It will stimulate the mind of the novice while also reminding more advanced readers of the necessity and desirability of thinking in the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16f8cb0
COMMANDMENTS AND COVENANT from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: This introductory framework should suffice to demonstrate that the very concept of “commandment,” when linked to the precepts of the Decalogue, requires a clarification that restates the authentic law. If we are to grasp the meanings of moral law in its actual cultural context, we cannot possibly trust some sort of common sense without immediately getting lost in a maze of multiple misunderstandings and contradictions. We will have to find ways to peel off the sedimented crust formed by the usual meanings and to strip ambiguity from the very debates that should have critically illuminated the problems.
RESPONSIBILITIES AND CHALLENGES: from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: It is clear that, for whoever lives within the Judeo-Christian tradition, the first responsibility that issues from the commandment “You shall not kill” consists of deciding to remain within the covenant-pact and thence too of advocating that all men follow the dictates of rational, universal moral law. This responsibility is never obvious; it ever renews itself, and indeed its perennial renewal is an inexhaustible source of wonder and joy. The covenant-pact and the rational recognition of the splendor of the truth of fundamental moral experience, which shines in every man, is not a thing of the past. It is the
CRIME AND PUNISHMENT from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: In April 2010 the D’Orsay Museum in Paris opened an exhibition that drew thousands of visitors. They were attracted first of all by its irresistibly fascinating title: “Crime and Punishment.” The reference to Dostoyevsky’s masterpiece is explicit. In the minds of the show’s curators, crime is synonymous with murder: its paintings, photographs, illustrations, and other forms of documentation all display, in various modes, the crime of murder—that is, the individual offense. As for punishment, it is largely understood in juridical terms. Its symbol is the guillotine: the “merciful” machine, created by the French Revolution to kill in an egalitarian
WHEN KILLING IS LAWFUL AND JUST from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: No matter how often it sings the praises of peace, the Bible abounds with massacres and wars carried out against the enemies of Israel in the name of God. The cultural semantics of monotheistic religions are notoriously characterized by a crude and ferocious vocabulary of violence.¹ The episode of the golden calf may serve as an example. There an infuriated Moses shouts: “This is the message of Yahweh, the God of Israel: ‘Gird on your sword, every man of you and quarter the camp from gate to gate killing one his brother, another his friend, another his neighbor.’”² As for
TO CUT LIFE SHORT from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: The special law of the sixth commandment—in other words, its inability to be proposed as an absolute prohibition—finds a crucial touchstone in the absolute nature of its very object: death and its irreversibility. To kill is to mete out death. In the other commandments, life is not the issue, and the consequence of transgression is not irrecoverable. If I rob, I can restitute or repay. If I give false testimony, I can retract it. But for death—at least on the plane of earthly existence—there is no remedy. For whoever has a mortal body, to kill strikes
IN THE BEGINNING from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: The problem of the double beginning of the human race is one of the many problems for interpretation posed by the account of Genesis. Born not of woman but created by God on the sixth day, Adam and Eve live in the Garden of Eden in a state that knows no sorrow, no toil, and, above all, no death. Already freed from the human condition of being born an infant, Edenic humanity is also missing the fundamental characteristic recognized as human by nearly all cultures: mortality. As in ancient Greece, in the prehistoric time before Pandora’s box was opened, there
HOMO NECANS from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: Scholars from various disciplines currently hold the opinion that homicide is an anthropological constant, a distinctive trait of the universally understood human spirit, a bloody trademark of the species. It appears we must say much the same for war as a permanent factor in the history of man and for the transcultural presence of vendetta in archaic societies. Tribal avenger or warrior—and founder of community—the masculine figure resides in the stories of the origin in many versions, with a certain documentable persistence. And when research like this takes up the evolutionary model and turns to looking into the
THE SEX OF CAIN from:
Thou Shalt Not Kill: A Political and Theological Dialogue
Abstract: And if Cain had been a woman? The hypothesis is obviously absurd, and it is so for more than one reason. Even though Eve has an important role in the Edenic scene of sin that establishes humanity as a mortal species, the homicidal and fratricidal act that initiates human history provides for no woman. Something analogous happens to Pandora, the first woman according to Hesiod, from whose belly is born death in addition to other ills for the human race: the lineage that then descends from her is exclusively male, often brothers or those united in the warrior brotherhoods, whose
Un acto metodológico básico de la investigación social: from:
Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Peón Fortino Vela
Abstract: La actividad científica en las ciencias sociales no sólo se enfrenta a las dificultades y complejidades que su labor impone, sino también cuando se trata de elegir métodos y técnicas apropiados para abordar, interpretar y explicar la realidad social. Aun cuando las cuestiones referentes al método son conflictivas y cubren un espectro de temas que van desde las relaciones entre sujeto y objeto, en un plano más general y abstracto involucran hasta el fin mismo de la ciencia; es claro que la adopción de un método particular condiciona con mucho las técnicas de recolección y el análisis de la información
Biografía: from:
Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) García Ramón R. Reséndiz
Abstract: El uso de las biografías como recurso o enfoque metodológico se encuentra íntimamente vinculado y forma parte de lo que se ha dado en llamar los métodos cualitativos. Es una denominación genérica que incluye procedimientos, técnicas y perspectivas de investigación distintas, pero que tienen como rasgo común la preocupación por dar cuenta del sentido que para el actor tiene la realidad social que vive, las acciones propias y de otros actores, más que cuantificar o medir la realidad social.
Lo biográfico en sociología. from:
Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Wiesner Martha Luz Rojas
Abstract: El trabajo que a continuación se presenta intenta sistematizar algunas reflexiones que varios autores han hecho en torno al método biográfico en sociología y, en particular, en torno a las historias y relatos de vida. No se trata de una revisión exhaustiva, ni se abordan las técnicas que el método biográfico involucra, pues estas últimas forman parte de otro artículo que, sobre el tema, aparece en esta publicación (véase Reséndiz). De lo que sí se trata es de hacer algo de historia de lo biográfico con el propósito de destacar la diversidad de contenidos que caracterizan el enfoque y la
Buscando al actor. from:
Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) León Velia Cecilia Bobes
Abstract: El presente trabajo tiene como objetivo presentar y discutir sucintamente uno de los métodos más novedosos dentro de la metodología cualitativa: la intervención sociológica. Desarrollada por Alain Touraine y sus seguidores en la década de los ochenta, la intervención sociológica se centra en las relaciones sociales, cuyo significado es evaluado mediante la participación conjunta del sociólogo y los actores de un movimiento social en un grupo de investigación.
Innovación metodológica en una época de ruptura. from:
Observar, escuchar y comprender
Author(s) Plascencia Jorge Ramírez
Abstract: En las décadas precedentes, principalmente entre los años sesenta y ochenta, emergió un caudal de argumentos desde los más diversos ámbitos del quehacer intelectual que ponían en tela de juicio características centrales del pensamiento occidental. Lo novedoso de esta plétora de argumentos no consistió tanto en su tono decididamente polémico, ni quizá en la diversidad de aspectos que sometió a examen, sino en su eficacia para motivar la reflexión y, en algunos casos, el replanteamiento de valores tenidos por inalterables.
La experiencia personal y el diálogo teórico como insumos para el desarrollo de un problema de investigación social from:
El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Espinoza Helder Binimelis
Abstract: Este proceso culminó con la realización de una investigación doctoral que ofreció una comparación entre los casos de Brasil y Chile en relación con diversos aspectos de sus legislaciones, políticas públicas y actores
Los giros del helicoide. from:
El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Gobato Federico
Abstract: A modo de un ejercicio de reflexión crítica sobre mi experiencia como tesista, este ensayo se enfoca en los aspectos prácticos, lógicos y materiales del proceso mutuamente imbricado de construcción del
temay delproblemade investigación. En el caso que aquí reconstruyo analíticamente, ambos inscriben y orientan la prosecución de un proyecto de investigación de largo aliento, que involucró tanto la realización de una tesis de maestría, como los esfuerzos actuales en pos de la tesis doctoral.
Los procesos de subjetivación de las víctimas del conflicto armado en Colombia, o de cómo nace una pregunta de investigación from:
El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Barón Mariana Delgado
Abstract: Colombia ha padecido un conflicto armado interno por más de cuarenta años, caracterizado por el enfrentamiento y la lucha por el control territorial entre las fuerzas insurgentes —principalmente las Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia (FARC)—, grupos paramilitares congregados en las Autodefensas Unidas de Colombia (AUC), y el Estado, representado en sus fuerzas armadas. En los últimos años, el conflicto se ha agudizado debido a la crisis del desplazamiento forzado que ha despojado de sus tierras aproximadamente a cuatro millones de campesinos¹pero también por la sistemática persecución de líderes y defensores de derechos humanos,² el constante crecimiento del universo de
Rutas, desafíos y limitaciones teórico-metodológicas en la investigación acerca de las comisiones de estudio sobre la violencia en Colombia from:
El helicoide de la investigación
Author(s) Marín Jefferson Jaramillo
Abstract: Desde la segunda mitad del siglo XX, Colombia es testigo de tres grandes manifestaciones de violencia que han tenido gran impacto para este país no sólo por las dimensiones históricas del fenómeno involucrado, sino también por la magnitud de sus secuelas en la población.¹ La primera de estas manifestaciones es representada casi siempre de manera simple y llana como la
violenciay refiere a un enfrentamiento entre las dos subculturas políticas de más tradición en el país, liberales y conservadores, el cual ocurrió entre 1946 y 1965 y que dejó como saldo más de 170 000 víctimas, especialmente campesinos, en
Capítulo 2 Los delitos y su contexto from:
Tramitando el pasado
Abstract: El conjunto de escenarios descritos en el capítulo anterior forma el marco histórico en que se produjeron las guerras sucias generadoras de violaciones a los derechos humanos en gran escala. La Operación Cóndor y otras acciones similares constituyeron una red supranacional de actividades antisubversivas coordinadas en varios países (Argentina, Bolivia, Brasil, Paraguay, Uruguay e inclusive Perú, que vivía bajo un régimen menos opresivo). En ocasiones, estas operaciones se trasladaron a Europa Occidental y a Estados Unidos (notoriamente, el atentado contra el ex ministro chileno Orlando Letelier, sucedido en Washington, D.C., en 1976). Más aún, el abogado paraguayo Martín Almada, descubridor
Capítulo 5 El caso mexicano from:
Tramitando el pasado
Abstract: El término “guerra sucia” en México, como en otros países, es entendido de distintas formas pero siempre es referido a un Estado que recurrió a la ilegalidad para acabar con la oposición, pacífica o armada, colocándose fuera de sus propios preceptos en materia de derechos humanos. Por ejemplo, el Centro de Derechos Humanos “Miguel Agustín Pro Juárez” definió como guerra sucia al periodo en el que “el Estado aplicó una política de represión en contra de [los grupos guerrilleros], de activistas políticos y dirigentes sociales, realizando en su contra allanamiento de morada, detenciones ilegales, desapariciones, tortura y ejecuciones extrajudiciales” (Centro
Prólogo from:
Políticas literarias
Author(s) Bartra Roger
Abstract: Los ensayos que reúne este libro son el espléndido fruto de muchos años de trabajo empleados por John Kraniauskas, agudo crítico inglés, a investigar la realidad latinoamericana. Kraniauskas practica con su bisturí analítico una serie de disecciones eruditas en el cuerpo literario latinoamericano, para presentarnos su estimulante interpretación de las relaciones de la cultura literaria y cinematográfica, con el trasfondo de las estructuras políticas y económicas. Mirar los problemas de América Latina a través de la literatura y el cine resulta un experimento revelador. No se trata simplemente de observar cómo se refleja la sociedad en la literatura. Kraniauskas nos
7. El Estado es un mono: from:
Políticas literarias
Author(s) Bartra Ari
Abstract: Quiero comenzar mi lectura de
El apando(1969) de José Revueltas —escrita durante su reclusión, a raíz de su participación en los sucesos de 1968, en la infame prisión de Lecumberri de la ciudad de México, el actual Archivo General de la Nación— con un breve pasaje del arriba mencionadoLos límites del individualismo burguésde León Rozitchner, obra publicada por primera vez en Argentina en 1972:
13. La elasticidad de la demanda: from:
Políticas literarias
Author(s) Salgado Óscar
Abstract: La serie de televisión
The Wire(HBO, 2002-2008), creada por David Simon y Edward Burns, abre con una muerte, y desde allí se expande a lo largo de cinco temporadas y sesenta horas de televisión. Narra la vida actual de una ciudad posindustrial neoliberalizada, desde la perspectiva de las sangrientas esquinas callejeras de Baltimore Oeste, en Estados Unidos.¹The Wirees la continuación de la anterior serie de televisión creada por Simon y Burns,The Corner(La Esquina) (HBO, 2000), una reconstrucción casi antropológica de vidas reales, dirigida por Charles S. Dutton. De hecho, en muchos sentidos combina y desarrolla
Book Title: Política y sociedad en México-Entre el desencuentro y la ruptura
Publisher: Facultad Latinoamerica de Ciencias Sociales, sede México
Author(s): Vázquez Daniel
Abstract: Una obra que contiene una original perspectiva de las temáticas que actualmente son referencia obligada en el debate político mexicano: la democracia, el populismo y el conflicto social, cuestiones que son discutidas a partir de algunos hitos fundacionales de la política contemporánea en México y del análisis de recientes hechos sociales tan cruciales como el proceso electoral de 2006 o el movimiento que en el mismo año se desarrolló en Oaxaca.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16f8cz9
Cardenismo y peronismo. from:
Política y sociedad en México
Author(s) Aibar Julio
Abstract: Uno de los aspectos que con mayor virulencia atacan los detractores del populismo es su supuesto contenido nacionalista. Para algunos sectores de la izquierda, por ejemplo, el nacionalismo se opone a los principios de la tradición internacionalista y es una expresión inequívoca del carácter burgués de la empresa populista. Para una buena parte de la derecha liberal, en cambio, el nacionalismo populista representa un residuo del pasado que obstaculiza la integración económica global y el libre fluir de los agentes en un mundo cada vez más asimilado a la lógica del mercado mundial.
Populismo, construcción política e instituciones. from:
Política y sociedad en México
Author(s) Olmeda Juan C.
Abstract: Mucho se ha escrito en los últimos años acerca de la emergencia y consolidación de movimientos populistas en Latinoamérica. En el caso de México, especial atención ha recibido el “fenómeno López Obrador” y su campaña como candidato a la presidencia en 2006. En los análisis, tanto críticos como celebratorios de los mencionados procesos, se han priorizado fundamentalmente enfoques orientados a destacar los componentes ideológicos del discurso populista y su efecto en términos de activación de particulares clivajes sociales. No está de más destacar, además, que dichas perspectivas, en general, han centrado la atención en el líder del movimiento y la
El “peligro para México”. from:
Política y sociedad en México
Author(s) Alcántara Javier Contreras
Abstract: El 1º de diciembre de 2006 tomó posesión de la presidencia de la República el panista Felipe Calderón Hinojosa (FCH) en un evento caracterizado por la tensión y los amagos de violencia entre los diputados del Congreso de la Nación que lo respaldaban y aquellos que seguían al perredista Andrés Manuel López Obrador (AMLO).²
Democracia liberal procedimental y movimientos sociales. from:
Política y sociedad en México
Author(s) Vázquez Daniel
Abstract: El objetivo de este texto es analizar
las limitaciones de los recursos políticos provenientes de la acción colectiva en la generación de influencia en la toma de decisiones gubernamentales de un gobierno democrático. Para analizar estas limitaciones utilizaré el caso del conflicto en Oaxaca que muestra la fuerza que los actores colectivos pueden llegar a tener, así como sus limitaciones en la influencia en la toma de decisiones. Al final, compararéqué forma de control tiene mejor institucionalizados sus recursos políticos para influir en la toma de decisiones: el poliárquico-electoral, el mercado o la acción colectiva.
Los derechos humanos en los estudios sociojurídicos from:
Los derechos humanos en las ciencias sociales
Author(s) Ansolabehere Karina
Abstract: Habida cuenta de estas características del campo de estudios, el principal objetivo de este capítulo es repasar las preocupaciones más relevantes que atraviesa la literatura sobre derechos humanos, y derechos en general, en los estudios sociojurídicos en la academia anglosajona, por considerar que ésta representa un espacio de producción muy dinámico en la materia, especialmente influyente en la de América
Políticas públicas y derechos humanos from:
Los derechos humanos en las ciencias sociales
Author(s) Chac Manuel Canto
Abstract: En las reflexiones contemporáneas sobre los derechos humanos (DH) es común la referencia a las políticas públicas, particularmente a partir de la década de 1990. No ocurre así en los análisis sobre políticas públicas (PP), en los que recién hace pocos años se inició la reflexión sobre el vínculo que pueden tener con los DH. Fue principalmente en el ámbito de las organizaciones civiles especializadas en desarrollo social donde se iniciaron las reflexiones sobre esta relación, en particular a propósito de los informes alternativos de la sociedad civil a los informes de los Estados parte de los pactos internacionales en
Book Title: Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Pernsteiner Alexis
Abstract: This landmark collection by an international group of scholars and public intellectuals represents a major reassessment of French colonial culture and how it continues to inform thinking about history, memory, and identity. This reexamination of French colonial culture, provides the basis for a revised understanding of its cultural, political, and social legacy and its lasting impact on postcolonial immigration, the treatment of ethnic minorities, and national identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gh82z
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ferro Marc
Abstract: This foreword is based on a 2005 interview conducted with the historian Marc Ferro, a specialist on the issue of colonization and the reception of this past in French society, namely in books such as
L’Histoire des colonisations(1994),Les tabous de l’Histoire(2002), andLe Livre noir du colonialisme(2003).¹ He has described the current situation—a situation in which the French public has turned its back on the work of historians—as a form of “self-censorship by citizens,” paired with a “censorship by the governing authorities.” This sort of postcolonial posture, which characterizes France at the beginning of
5 Literature, Song, and the Colonies (1900–1920) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Ruscio Alain
Abstract: Colonial writing both could have and should have been the ancestor of the current trend of “surprising traveler” novels. However, it is not. Today, colonial literature has been all but forgotten, and even when it is evoked, it is to reaffirm its negative status. In terms of its literary qualities, the genre rarely produced texts rich enough to leave a mark on French literature. Never mind a masterpiece. There was never a
French Kipling—at least not according to traditional doxa on the subject. The theme of colonization all too often produced literary works of a didactic and ideologically heavy-handed
8 Dying: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Deroo Éric
Abstract: On July 14, 1913, during the patriotic High Mass that the Longchamp military parade had become, the president of the Republic, Raymond Poincaré, awarded the Legion of Honor to the first regiment of Senegalese tirailleurs (First RTS ). The act was significant, as this is the highest honor that can be bestowed upon a unit. It recognized the contributions of black soldiers in all colonial operations since 1854, from sub-Saharan Africa to Madagascar up to the most recent campaigns in Morocco. In another gesture of symbolic recognition, which was widely covered in the press, the president presented a French flag
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Daeninckx Didier
Abstract: One often recalls one’s “first love.” Without the eternal emotions to which it gives life, whole swaths of our culture would fall: song would practically disappear, poetry would be but a shadow of itself, miles of film would become obsolete, thousands of actors would be without lines to repeat, without secrets to tell, instruments would abandon the symphony, the ballerina would remain backstage, and white gouache would replace every nuance of color on the painter’s palette. We speak less of another, and yet just as decisive, just as earth-shattering “first time,” the shade of which could be defined through its
11 To Civilize: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The Other is a recurring anthropological figure in every field of social science. On the one hand, because figures of exteriority are the mirrors through which the substance and borders of collective identities are formed, transformed, firmed up, and reaffirmed.¹ The Other is endowed with “characteristics” that vary with the times, but that always fall between two poles: stigmatization and desire. On the other hand, figures of the Other play an invaluable part since they are the motors of all forms of social mobilization and are called upon and instrumentalized to inaugurate or consolidate networks of sociability, to structure or
13 The Athletic Exception: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Bancel Nicolas
Abstract: Black athletes from the French colonies began to appear in metropolitan France in the early twenties.¹ They were represented in the media according to two models: black American champion-athletes, who had become popular in France toward the end of the nineteenth century, and black colonial subjects. The image of the colonial black athlete was elaborated at the intersection of these two imaginaries. However, the progressive stereotyping of these black athletes cannot be reduced exclusively to race. Instead, given the varying contexts in which these stereotypes were produced, their reversible and ever-evolving character, we would do well to consider the different
16 National Unity: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The ambiance surrounding the 1931 exposition in the French capital was quite strange, to say the least. The context in metropolitan France had been changing over the prior two years. Between 1929 and 1931, the number of colonial newspapers went from seventy to seventy-seven, the news media became colonial in the space of a few months, and Radio-Paris began proposing regular conferences on the Empire. The French media had a new infatuation, and was preparing the French populace for an event controlled by political parties that also, directly and indirectly, had an influence on major periodicals. But what exactly was
Foreword: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Stora Benjamin
Abstract: In the field of history, the practice of analyzing (and utilizing) images began in the 1990s, with classifications and typologies. The sensorial shock of an image can both influence the course of one’s life and change one’s perception of history. With respect to the end of the Algerian War, Jean-François Sirinelli rightly asks, “Do not the shocking photos in
Paris-Match,with a French readership of 8 million, weigh more than the words of intellectuals? And, knowing that some of the reports featured inCinq Colonnes à la Une(dating back to January 1959) have remained anchored in the collective memory
20 Education: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Denis Daniel
Abstract: Novels, comic strips, movies, an abundance of colonial iconography all testify to the existence of a very specific cultural apparatus that worked to deeply inscribe the “imperial” into metropolitan culture.¹ Moreover, this
imperial culture,through targeted means of forming and educating the youth, was a major factor in the creation of a “Homo imperialis” in metropolitan France. It did this according to two mechanisms, which have thus far received little scholarly attention. The first concerns the school and the textbooks in which one finds texts and images promoting imperialism. The second is the role played by an extracurricular activity with,
22 Control: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Deroo Éric
Abstract: The presence of immigrants from the colonies became “visible” in France in the late 1930s, particularly in Paris. Though this novel and much criticized—by the right and the extreme right, as well as by some on the left, and almost the entirety of immigration “specialists”—phenomenon is rarely associated with colonial history, it is, in fact, as much a part of the colonial as it is the history of immigration. It remains today a major and enduring legacy of the imperial enterprise in French society. For many French people, for whom the colonial saga was of little interest, who
26 Decolonizing France: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Hémery Daniel
Abstract: Understanding the role of the Indochina War in the history of French society from the second half of the twentieth century, and the fracture it caused to the cultural universe of what we used to call the “metropole,” is not a simple task. Research has typically focused on the political choices taken, the economic implications of such choices, the military history of the conflict, the ideological and political response in the metropole, and the implied social and cultural spaces.¹ A view of the whole has been largely neglected. My thinking here must therefore necessarily be interrogative in nature and organized
28 North Africans Settle in the Metropole (1946–1961) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Manceron Gilles
Abstract: Muslim North Africans accounted for a significant number of French forces from 1943 to 1945, with around 200,000 men on active duty during this period and closer to 300,000 if one includes various operations beginning in late 1940. However, their efforts went all but
unnoticedafter the war. Meanwhile, in the years directly following the war, immigration to the metropole grew to previously unseen rates. Between 1947 and 1954, the number of immigrants from the Maghreb exceeded one million. After the conflict in Indochina and the independence of both Morocco and Tunisia, the Suez Expedition marked another blow to France’s
29 Crime: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Einaudi Jean-Luc
Abstract: Over the course of imperial history, colonial violence in France has been primarily anti-Algerian. This can in part be explained by the scale of Algerian immigration to the metropole. Officially, more than 250,000 Algerians were living in France in the early 1950s, mainly in greater Paris, though also in the northeast and in the cities of Marseille and lyon. Most were factory workers and unskilled laborers who worked in the metalworking or chemical industries, in construction, public works, and mines. Also, of course, many were unemployed. Another reason for anti-Algerian sentiment was the fact that this labor immigration was organized
30 Modernism, Colonialism, and Cultural Hybridity from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Lebovics Herman
Abstract: For all of aesthetic modernism’s self-containment, and for all of colonialism’s faraway-ness, the two activities were twinned. In parallel fashion they rose in the mid-nineteenth century, flourished for about a hundred years, and crashed together in the third quarter of the twentieth. In this chapter, I shall demonstrate that there was indeed—in France, at least—a co-variation between the rise, triumph, and decline of aesthetic modernism and the life cycle of French colonialism. The correlation in timing is not complicated to establish. But then, I wish to argue that the two are reciprocally potentializing. In other words, no French
32 The Impossible Revision of France’s History (1968–2006) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Citron Suzanne
Abstract: A collaborative book published in 2005,
La Fracture coloniale, emphasized the role of the “national narrative” in the French reluctance to recognize alterity.¹ The debates surrounding the law of February 23, 2005, which highlighted the “positive” role of French colonization, resulted in a media frenzy regarding the issues at stake and their implication for the national narrative, what it says and what it does not say, in other words its very transmission. Will the memorial brouhaha and the uproar of historians finally end with a rereading of our past?
34 The Illusion of Decolonization (1956–2006) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Dozon Jean-Pierre
Abstract: For the most part, the facts are known. Far from constituting a rupture, the independence of the vast majority of sub-S aharan French territories to arise with the emergence of the Fifth Republic (including the mandated territories of Togo and Cameroon, which went to France after the First World War), was instead the beginning of a new relationship, a new history between France and the African continent. Officially, this has been referred to as “decolonization,” or a major historical moment of rupture and emancipation that is strongly associated with the France of the imposing General de Gaulle. This, in spite
36 Trouble in the Republic: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Vergès Françoise
Abstract: I am less concerned with untangling the relationship between collective and personal memories, or between memory and history, than with showing once more the reticence on the part of the French academic “ nomenclature” to integrate the colony into discussions, notably, at a time of public debate on the slave trade, slavery, and colonialism. Critical and negative reactions have abounded with respect to what have often been considered poor “ group” manners, namely, the demand to be considered equal among equals. They were asked to be patient, to become civilized, to calmly wait at France’s door for the invitation to
38 The Army and the Construction of Immigration as a Threat (1961–2006) from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Rigouste Mathieu
Abstract: The army is far from being “
une grande muette.”¹ It communicates a lot, sometimes even on activities it presents as “secret,” and regularly generates reports on “threats”² and how to handle them, which are then disseminated as widely as possible throughout various networks. French military doctrine counts as part of its mission of national defense and the promotion of a “spirit of Defense” within the “collective consciousness.”³ In fact, it operates from the assumption that if the “national body” is to be able to defend itself in case of aggression, it must be mentally healthy, thus perfectly aware of potential
43 Can We Speak of a Postcolonial Racism? from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Tevanian Pierre
Abstract: To the question of whether or not we can speak of a postcolonial racism, we ask another: How can we not? How can we speak of contemporary forms of racism without referring to their primary genealogies: systems of slavery and colonialism? How can we possibly negate the fact that a
deep racismexists, which can be traced back to the French colonial Empire’s institutions, practices, discourse, and forms of representation? How can we negate it when, for example, opinion polls clearly indicate a strong and durable form of scorn or targeted rejection with respect to immigrants from the former colonized
44 From Colonial Stereotypes to the Postcolonial Gaze: from:
Colonial Culture in France since the Revolution
Author(s) Wolton Dominique
Abstract: There exists no communication without a representation of the Other, because the Other is never a “reality,” but a virtuality. Admittedly, this virtuality was able to acquire the (illusory) image of a “reality” in the colonial space, because the colonized Other had a status, actually a nonstatus, that was relatively coherent within the dominant colonial stereotype. This means that some people were able to believe in a “real” connection between the image and the figure, making in some way a “being” out of this virtuality, that of the native. In our own postcolonial times, this vision admittedly persists, but not
15 Necessity as Virtue: from:
The Future of Continental Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Robbins Jeffrey W.
Abstract: In his “Circumscription of the Topic” from
The Varieties of Religious Experience,William James famously defined the religious sentiment as making “easy and felicitous what in any case is necessary.”¹ To James, it was this total and joyous acceptance of the universe that stood out as the most distinguishing characteristic of religious experience. Far from the dour or legalizing portrait of religion, James insisted it was by religious people’s genuine good cheer that religion separates itself from both stoicism and bare morality. “More than a difference of doctrine,” James insists; “rather [it is] a difference of emotional mood that parts
4 Forgive Me, Friend: from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) SPADOLA EMILIO
Abstract: In Morocco I tend—like many American anthropologists—to seek rapport with a smile. Retailers in Fes refer to American tourists by the code word
miska—chewing gum—meaning they are all teeth and lips. (British tourists, in contrast, aread-dam al-barid, which means cold blood.) Yet a Moroccan acquaintance of mine characterized Americans as tragically sad friends. The United States is so enormous, he said, and everyone so mobile, that “you Americans are always ready to drop a friend.” He’s right, in my experience. The friendly first steps of rapport are, if not the opposite of friendship, a firm
5 Suspicion, Secrecy, and Uncomfortable Negotiations over Knowledge Production in Southwestern Morocco from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) HOFFMAN KATHERINE E.
Abstract: Power relations inherent in the encounter between anthropologist and informant engaged the advocates of reflexive anthropology working in Morocco (Crapanzano 1980; K. Dwyer 1982; Rabinow 2007 [1977]). Their analyses have reconfigured the practice and writing of ethnography over the last three decades. Questions of truth, disclosure, and suspicion shape not only anthropologists’ relationships in the field, but also the data that can be collected and the forms in which it can be presented to outsiders. Irfan Ahmad remarks in regard to ethnographic informants’ frequent suspicion of the state that perhaps we should “also talk—after Geertz’s ‘theatre state,’ Dirks’s ‘ethnographic
8 Shortcomings of a Reflexive Tool Kit; or, Memoir of an Undutiful Daughter from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) BARGACH JAMILA
Abstract: Bougainvilleas of multiple colors—burgundy, yellow, rose, and white—draped the walls of what seemed to be a timeless corner villa and separated it from the small streets paved with a puzzle, hard bricks that made a funny buzzing sound when cars drove on them. Past imposing metal doors, a tiny cemented walkway led up the stairs to the inside of this art-deco villa where there was practically no garden, except for the branches of the bougainvilleas shooting outside. This was the main headquarters of the nongovernmental organization (NGO) Solidarité Féminine, SolFem for short. The villa had been built around
11 Afterword: from:
Encountering Morocco
Author(s) DWYER KEVIN
Abstract: The essays in this volume address topics that, for a long time, were present only at the margins of academic anthropological discourse, if they appeared at all. Issues like the anthropologist’s “identity”—the implications of the anthropologist’s origins and how anthropologists construct themselves in the field; the attractions and perils of friendship; the impact of the anthropologist’s family on fieldwork; suspicion of and hostility toward the anthropologist and competition between the anthropologist and others in the field; the tensions among the many aspects of an anthropologist’s humanity, and between the roles of researcher and judge, between “scientific” observation and judgmental
CHAPTER 2 Secular Domesticities, Shiite Modernities: from:
Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) KARIMI PAMELA
Abstract: The extensive use of propagandist imagery by the Islamic Republic and the subsequent scholarly attention paid to this phenomenon has somehow eclipsed the use of visual imagery published by religious scholars and activists prior to Iran’s 1979 Revolution. Of the hundreds of publications disseminated by religious groups before the revolution,
Nabard-i Millat—the widely distributed weekly newspaper of the religious fundamentalist organization Fadaian Islam published in the first half of the 1950s—is particularly striking. This periodical is filled with political cartoons that portray the cleric-founder of Fadaian Islam, Navvab Safavi (1924–55), juxtaposed with “demonized” images of political figures
CHAPTER 5 The Muslim “Crying Boy” in Turkey: from:
Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) SAVAŞ ÖZLEM
Abstract: A group of paintings known as Crying Boys—attributed to Italian painter Bruno Amadio (1911–81), also known as Bragolin—gained widespread popularity in many parts of the world in the 1980s. Portraying the tearful faces of children, these works have inspired various popular cultural practices, including the establishment of fan clubs and the telling of urban legends devoted to the subjects’ “curse.”¹ In the 1970s and 1980s one of these paintings became especially popular in Turkey (fig. 5.1 and plate 11). Initially, Crying Boy was in vogue in the private realm, displayed in many working- and middle-class homes—reproductions
CHAPTER 6 The New Happy Child in Islamic Picture Books in Turkey from:
Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) AZAK UMUT
Abstract: As elsewhere, Islamism in Turkey has been a political and cultural project that challenges the dominant dichotomies of traditional/modern, public/private, and Islamic/non-Islamic.¹ Studies of the cultural transformation and the emergence of new subjectivities brought by Islamism demonstrate the high significance of “visibility” to the Islamist project,² which has altered the public sphere to emphasize the “Islamic” difference—often through dress codes for women. According to Nilüfer Göle, since 1990 Islamism has experienced a second phase, in which its cultural program has become more apparent. The movement’s first phase was characterized by militant and revolutionary politics. In this second phase of
CHAPTER 9 Pushing Out Islam: from:
Visual Culture in the Modern Middle East
Author(s) GENCER YASEMIN
Abstract: A cartoon published in 1924, on the front page of the Turkish satirical journal
Akbaba(Vulture), depicts a machine and as its operator, Mustafa Kemal, the president and leader of the recently founded Turkish Republic (fig. 9.1).¹ A second man, identifiable by his long cloak and turban as a mullah, is caught in a grinding machine. The machine is identified in the register below the cartoon as “the Republic’s Machine” (Cumhuriyet Makinesi). Further clarifying the cartoon, its caption reads, “Conservative Reaction gets himself caught in the Modern Machine, whose meaning he did not understand.” The text equates the concept of
ONE Historical Events and Historical Research from:
Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion uses the term “event” in two different but closely connected senses in his work, especially in his presentation in
Being Given.On the one hand, he speaks of the event as a characteristic of all given phenomena: phenomena give themselves as events, they are “being given.” He develops this in §17 ofBeing Givenas the fifth characteristic ofallphenomena alongside anamorphosis, arrival, incident, and fait accompli. Most prominently, however, the event isone typeof saturated phenomenon, namely the phenomenon saturated according to quantity. The phenomenon of the historical or cultural event gives “too much” information, it
TWO Art and the Artist from:
Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: Marion has written fairly extensively on art, although this topic has not been discussed much in the secondary literature on his work.¹ One of his early works,
The Crossing of the Visible,is an extended reflection on the status of the image in art and contemporary culture. In his later writings, the work of art occupies a central place as the second type of saturated phenomenon, saturated according to quality. A “mediocre” Dutch painting and the practice of anamorphosis employed in painting is an element of the discussion of the given phenomenon in general in Being Given, and the chapter
FOUR Love and Violence from:
Degrees of Givenness
Abstract: The lover “declares his love as one declares war” (EP, 79; PE, 129). So insists Marion repeatedly in his investigation into the nature of the erotic phenomenon. War, of course, is here “only” a metaphor illustrating the absolute commitment of the lover. Yet the fact that this analogy is used several times throughout
The Erotic Phenomenonseems to indicate that it is not insignificant. Rather, it points to a problematic aspect of Marion’s treatment of eros, namely the extreme—if not almost militant—character of this love. And the careful reader finds the connotations of absoluteness exacerbated by another subtheme,
Introduction from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: Paradoxically, while African political and intellectual elites tend to scorn
palabreand prefer a superficial legalism directly borrowed from the west, western countries and Japanese businesses resort topalabrewhenever a conflict requires settlement or a law requires interpretation.¹ The very people who overemphasized law are returning to practices of informal mediation, while those who spontaneously practiced the latter in their own tradition want to codify everything according to a rigid legal model. Strange how things turn out.
1 The Public Space of Palabre from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Abstract: What is
palabre? Not just an exchange of words, but also a social drama, a procedure, and a series of human interactions.Palabreis therefore an act of staging [mise en scène], ordering, and putting into speech.
Rationalities and Legal Processes in Africa from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Burrell Jean
Abstract: 1. Whether it is a collision or a harmonious synthesis, the encounter consists of a rather
fragilebalance, since two realities (cultures, or forms of rationality) in contact will never be arithmetically proportionate; asymmetry is a necessary part of the encounter with the other, as Emmanuel Lévinas would say. Hence that fragility, which is indeed the expression of the encounter as a place and moment of instability and thus reversibility.
Strategies for “Constructing Belief” in the African Public Sphere: from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Hengehold Laura
Abstract: Nonidentity has been perpetually stifled in Africa by discourses and practices of repression. Research is needed to show how the political dimension affects the concept of possibility in Critical Theory and in the confrontation between African modernity and its possibilities. Further, the epistemo-political importance of such an inquiry must be demonstrated. Finally, given the multiplicity of parameters that may be generated by every discourse on the political domain or political practice, we must identify the
sitefrom which our own interrogation of African political reality will emerge.
The Internet and the African Academic World from:
Law and the Public Sphere in Africa
Author(s) Burrell Jean
Abstract: Any practice, technology, or form of expertise needs an account that can explain its basis and organization as well as its objectives. Whether the internet is understood as a practice, or as a journey through a space that knows no borders, or whether one curses it as the latest example of human excess (
hybris), its reality nevertheless raises questions about our experience of the world (experimentum mundi). By means of the internet, we test the world’s consistency and go beyond our assumptions to arrive at an exact measure of the relationship between humans and machines. With this in mind, a
3. Christian Hate: from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Buben Adam
Abstract: Should Søren Kierkegaard be listed among Christian apologists such as Anselm, Thomas Aquinas, or even Blaise Pascal? Focusing on his connections to Pascal, twentieth-century scholars Denzil G. M. Patrick and José Raimundo Maia Neto claim that Kierkegaard is, in fact, engaged in the same sort of project.¹ Kierkegaard himself seems to lend support to these claims when he states, “I have never broken with Christianity … from the time it was possible to speak of the application of my powers, I had firmly resolved to employ everything to defend it, or in any case to present it in its true
5. Thinking Death into Every Moment: from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Muench Paul
Abstract: Doing philosophy may be hazardous to your health, resulting in a condition of “absentmindedness” or distraction in which you forget yourself.¹ In such a case, philosophy becomes an activity that positively interferes with the age-old Socratic task of attending to and caring for the self, and may even have the opposite effect of making people “incompetent to act” (CUP, 1:135/SKS 7, 126). If you are the type of person who is drawn to philosophy and perhaps insufficiently aware of its hazards, then what could be more valuable than a book that seeks to alert you to these dangers, and in
8. A Critical Perspective on Kierkegaard’s “At a Graveside” from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Marino Gordon D.
Abstract: Kierkegaard and his pseudonyms stress that thinkers who fail to express their words in their actions do not really understand what they are spouting. Over and over
12. Derrida, Judge William, and Death from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Duckles Ian
Abstract: In this chapter, I attempt to take seriously Derrida’s reading of Kierkegaard’s
Fear and TremblinginThe Gift of Death.¹ In particular, I focus on Derrida’s claim that all universalizing ethical systems involve an evasion of responsibility for one’s actions. As Derrida sees it, this has important connections with mortality, since (following Heidegger)² it is through developing the correct attitude toward my own mortality—and consequently my singularity as this particular individual—that I am able to lead an authentic life. In effect, I take Derrida to be suggesting that pursuing ethical considerations is an attempt to avoid confronting one’s
14. Duties to the Dead? from:
Kierkegaard and Death
Author(s) Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Perhaps nothing in Kierkegaard’s writings has proven quite as polarizing as
Works of Love. The reception of this work has been characterized by perennial charges that it articulates an inhuman, acosmic, inward-looking vision of ethical life. These criticisms famously begin with Adorno, who claims that Kierkegaard’s concern to avoid “preferential” love in all forms leads to an “object-less” love in which the other is reduced to a mere “stumbling block.”¹ The result is an ethic whose “content is oppression: the oppression of the drive which is not to be fulfilled and the oppression of the mind which is not allowed
Introduction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Houston Christopher
Abstract: What is phenomenology? And why should anthropologists, as well as students of history, psychology, education, or political economy be interested in it? Within philosophy, phenomenology is as diverse as its practitioners. Indeed, Moran (2000: 3) in an introduction to philosophical traditions of phenomenology finds it important to warn readers not to overstate the degree to which phenomenology “coheres into an agreed method, or accepts one theoretical outlook, or one set of philosophical theses about consciousness, knowledge, and the world.” Some of this diversity continues to be a feature of anthropological uses of phenomenology, as we show here. Yet we also
6 Unmeasured Music and Silence from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Bedford Ian
Abstract: This essay originates in an effort to comprehend some aspects of music in Muslim countries. I recall my first exposure—a kind of ambush—to procedures in music new to me. Up until 1971 the nation of Pakistan precariously consisted of two wings, West Pakistan and East Pakistan, soon to become Bangladesh. In October 1970, heavy floods, a cyclone, and then a tsunami battered the East wing, with enormous loss of life. In December the country was still in mourning. There were (as ever in Pakistan) all kinds of distractions and preoccupations—with livelihood, governance, rumor. Campaigning was underway for
7 Experiencing Self-Abstraction: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Fisher Daniel
Abstract: This chapter draws on fieldwork in an Aboriginal Australian urban radio station in order to explore some experiential aspects of vocal cultural production and the forms of mediatized self-abstraction it entails. I focus on the ways that technical features of media production and the institutional life of media in contemporary Indigenous Australia come together to make perception available for problematization in the studio. At 4AAA, a large, Indigenous-run country music station with a broad and at times national audience, young Indigenous media trainees take on the task of representing Aboriginal Australia to itself, and their experience of learning to perform
8 Being-in-the-Covenant: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Timmer Jaap
Abstract: Biblical prophecy makes a major contribution to discourses and practices of nation and destiny in Solomon Islands. After discussing its broader context, this article investigates the power of Old Testament prophecies through analysis of the 2010 Queen’s Birthday speech of Solomon Islands’ governor-general, Sir Frank Kabui, entitled “Our connection with the Throne of England” (Kabui 2010), given to an audience of national and international officials in Honiara, the capital of Solomon Islands. Kabui, a To’abaita speaker from North Malaita, focuses on a British-Israelite theory that claims that Jacob’s pillar stone is kept in Scotland because the kings and queens of
10 Writing Affect, Love, and Desire into Ethnography from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Wynn L. L.
Abstract: The matter-of-fact irritation that Hammond expresses toward talking about “the sexual problem” is an apt analogy for contemporary anthropology’s approach to love. Sex, of course, has figured in anthropology’s public image ever since the earliest years of the discipline, with Margaret Mead’s
Coming of Age in Samoa(1928), or Malinowski’s more explicitThe Sexual Life of Savages(1929), replete with descriptions of exotic sexual positions. And in recent years, “desire” has become an increasingly popular catchphrase in anthropological writing (e.g., Rofel 2007). Yet for all the attention anthropologists pay to sex and desire,lovewas, until quite recently, curiously rare
11 Senses of Magic: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Van Heekeren Deborah
Abstract: I have long admired Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s writing on Paul Cézanne because it provides insight into the artist’s practice beyond the general conventions of art history. The philosopher saw the painter as a paradigm example of the essence of perception.¹ As he writes, “Cézanne did not think he had to choose between feeling and thought, between order and chaos. He did not want to separate the stable things which we see and the shifting way in which they appear; he wanted to depict matter as it takes on form, the birth of order through spontaneous organization” (Merleau-Ponty 1964 [1945]: 13).
12 Neither Things in Themselves nor Things for Us Only: from:
Phenomenology in Anthropology
Author(s) Houston Christopher
Abstract: Fiction is a genre that tells the stories of characters whose lives are parasitic upon yet identical to none of those 15 million people. Unlike macro-social science with its illuminating focus on political economic structures that mediate personal history and condition social experience, potentially making the stories of 15 million people variations on a theme, fiction gives attentive value to the particular, the quixotic, and the perverse. Characters’ lives and experiences are different from each other yet interlocked in strange and fateful ways. Nevertheless, in fiction, too, authors work with a presumption of resemblance, even as it is shown not
ONE Ideologies from:
The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: Order may be conferred upon the following unchronologically arranged reminders of the history of thinking about linguistic representation if they are prefaced by the reminder that the word
Gegenstand, so frequently used by Wittgenstein in theTractatus Logico-Philosophicus, and that word’s Latinate predecessor “object” bring with them the notion of something that is over against or cast in front and so stands in the way. A further complexity arises for us today from the fact that when the Scholastics, followed by Descartes and others, speak of the objective reality of an idea as distinct from its formal reality, objective means
FOUR Phenomenology as Rigorous Science from:
The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: As a student of mathematics at Berlin, Husserl became acquainted with Karl Weierstrass and his project for founding mathematical analysis on the concept of number. Not without finding Weierstrass guilty of a certain naïve empiricism, Husserl himself aimed to further this program in the dissertation
On the Concept of Number(1887) which he went on to compose at Halle under the direction of Carl Stumpf, a former student of Brentano, and which became integrated into hisPhilosophy of Arithmetic(1891).¹ In these works Husserl demonstrates that numbers belong to a continuum that presupposes a mental act of collecting. It is
SIX Meanings and Translations from:
The Rigor of a Certain Inhumanity
Abstract: In
Speech and Phenomenaone reads that “Bedeutung is reserved[by Husserl] for the content in the ideal sense ofverbalexpression, spoken language….”¹ This may not mean, as it is taken to mean by J. Claude Evans inStrategies, that “Bedeutungis used to characterize speech” by Husserl as opposed to characterizing something else.² What it says is that “Bedeutung” is used to characterizethe content in the ideal senseof verbal expression, whereas “Sinn” is not limited to that.
3 Second-order realism and post-modern aesthetics in computer animation from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Darley Andy
Abstract: This paper is concerned with questions of aesthetic form. It is about the relationship between computer imaging and the emergence of a new aesthetics of self – referentiality and surface play. I want to indicate some ways in which such an aesthetic is occurring, and attempt to locate and describe some of its defining characteristics and forms.
6 Putting themselves in the pictures: from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Law Sandra
Abstract: Many filmmakers working in live action and animation have been concerned to find alternative means of portraying women and women’s issues. This essay explores the animation of three
8 Clay animation comes out of the inkwell: from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Frierson Michael
Abstract: Clay animated films were produced in the United States as early as 1908 when Edison Manufacturing released a trick film entitled
The Sculptor’s Welsh Rarebit Dream.In 1916, clay animation became something of a fad, as an East Coast artist named Helena Smith Dayton and a West Coast animator named Hopkins produced clay animated films on a wide range of subjects. Hopkins in particular was quite prolific, producing over 50 clay animated segments for the weeklyUniversal Screen Magazine.But by the 1920s, cartoon animation using either cels or slash system was firmly established as the dominant mode of animation
9 Bartosch’s The Idea from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Berthold Bartosch deserves to be discussed among the important filmmakers – not just important animators – both for the intrinsic artistry of his 1932 film
The Ideaand for its seminal position as the first animation film created as an artwork with serious, even tragic, social and philosophical themes (as opposed documentary’, educational animations of McCay and the Fleischers or abstract of Ruttmann and Fischinger). That Bartosch does not always occupy position of honour in film history stems partly from the fact that the 25-minuteIdeahas not always been available to viewers and partly becauseThe Ideacould be his only
12 The thief of Buena Vista: from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Felperin Leslie
Abstract: We begin with a true story, but one so dense with stories within its stories, so layered with conflicting versions of the truth, that it seems to have garnered the narrational generative capacities of myth. It would take a modern Sheherezade far more than a thousand-and-one nights tounravel the complex skein of fact and fiction that surrounds the ur-narrative of the Gulf War of 1990. But that is not the purpose of this essay: here we are concerned with tracing how that vast story-cycle of fact is entangled with another story, the fictional film
Aladdin, which is itself enmeshed in
13 Animatophilia, cultural production and corporate interests: from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Langer Mark
Abstract: One of the best-publicised events related to animation and video during 1992 was the conflict between Nickelodeon and filmmaker John Kricfalusi over the cablecast animation series
The Ren & Stimpy Show. Critics have hailed Kricfalusi as ‘a man of genius’ and the series as ‘the best animated cartoon come along since the glory days of the 1940s’.¹ Nickelodeon owned the rights to the programme and characters devised by Kricfalusi. Despite the acclaim for the filmmaker and the series, Nickelodeon transferred production from Kricfalusi’s Spumco studio to a new Games Productions studio,which used many former Spumco staff. Nickelodeon maintained that they
15 Body consciousness in the films of Jan Svankmajer from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Wells Paul
Abstract: The work of Jan Svankmajer, celebrated Czechoslovakian animator and avant-garde filmmaker, demonstrates an ongoing pre-occupation with the codes and conditions of bodily function and identity. His fictions are characterised by the recognition of transience in the body and the place of the body as a defining instrument in socio-cultural mechanisms and indeed, as a socio-cultural mechanism. Svankmajer uses the unique vocabulary of animation in expressing these principles and essentially re-defines the conditions by which the body might be represented and re-defined aesthetically and politically.
16 Eisenstein and Stokes on Disney: from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) O’Pray Michael
Abstract: Sergei Eisenstein loved the cartoon figure Mickey Mouse. The Soviet film director not only admired Walt Disney’s films but also made them part of the subject matter of his theoretical studies. With his characteristic ambition, these theoretical explorations of Disney’s animation were intended to serve as the bases for understanding animation and developing questions alluding to the nature of art itself.¹ Most of these writings are from the early 1940s, some years after his return from Hollywood where he had met Disney in 1937.² He was also reconsidering or at least reformulating his theoretical ideas, especially that of montage. That
18 Restoring the aesthetics of early abstract films from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Moritz William
Abstract: Critical writing about the abstract films of the 1920s is generally ‘bogged down’ with the question of primacy. Hans Richter, who supplied information to most early film historians, stressed the point that his own films were the
firstabstract, experimental films ever made – along with Viking Eggeling’sDiagonal Symphony– which Richter dated 1919 or 1921, even in film titles that he had during the 1950s and 1960s. He consistently suggested that Walther Ruttmann Fischinger began filmmaking later, that Fischinger was a pupil and assistant Ruttmann’s, and furthermore insisted that Ruttmann was an artistic fraud whose lacked a true sense of
20 European influences on early Disney feature films from:
A Reader In Animation Studies
Author(s) Allan Robin
Abstract: The Disney company today has become one of the most powerful entertainment conglomerates in the world. As the years go by it seems more than ever important to identify some of the cultural and aesthetic forces that influenced the founder of this empire, Walt Disney. The empire is based on film and still relies upon succeeding generations being familiar with the situations, stories and characters made popular through Walt Disney’s films, and the films themselves were indebted to an older cultural heritage which Disney absorbed and recreated for a new mass audience as part of the popular culture of his
INTRODUCTION from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: “Why are the most unlikely people, including myself, suddenly talking about God?” Terry Eagleton asks, referring to the return of religion among intellectuals, in affirmation as well as criticism of it.¹ Stanley Cavell also has quite a bit to say about God, as attested by the very existence of this book. But since religion is notably not one of the topics on which Cavell’s fame as a thinker rests, it seems reasonable to count Cavell among the “unlikely people” Eagleton has in mind. Nonetheless, such a characteristic would be misleading. Cavell has not “suddenly” or recently started “talking about God”;
FOUR Skepticism, Finitude, and Sin from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Acknowledgment is an interpretation of knowledge, Cavell insists, or perhaps an interpretation of what lies at the heart of any knowledge, entailing a certain sense of receptivity or responsiveness, a willingness to confess and reveal oneself in a practical and responsible reply to the other, the world, or as I have suggested, to God. But such acknowledgment presupposes a separation from that which one responds to, or more generally, it presupposes finitude. Central to Wittgenstein’s philosophy, and thus also to Cavell’s own philosophy, is therefore the acknowledgment of human limitation, an acknowledgment that, however, seems hard to achieve. A significant
SIX The Other and Violence from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: Despite the fact that Levinas and Cavell
SEVEN Forgiveness and Passivity from:
Stanley Cavell, Religion, and Continental Philosophy
Abstract: In the previous three chapters, I have attempted to outline what I have sometimes called an anthropology of finitude. The basic findings seemed less than cheerful, such that we are finite and mortal and yet revolt against our conditions (chapter 4), that we are vulnerable to tragic consequences because we speak and act in ways that outrun our previews (chapter 5), and that we, confronted with the otherness of the other, harbor violent impulses (chapter 6). If one holds these considerations together, one reaches a reasonable backdrop of what makes forgiveness important to human affairs—that is, why humans stand
4 On the Way to Philosophical Hermeneutics from:
Gadamer
Abstract: The importance of the question of understanding in the aesthetic realm requires a redefinition of hermeneutics, or a critical reconstruction of its history, which in the end amounts to its actual construction. It is not an exaggeration to say that hermeneutics, in a certain sense, was
constructedin the middle of the 1950s. Those are the years in which, while Heidegger inquires into the meaning of the word “hermeneutics” in his famous essay “A Dialogue on Language,” from 1953–54, Gadamer is working on his project of a philosophical hermeneutics.¹ The discipline, which only from the seventeenth century on is
5 The Constellation of Understanding from:
Gadamer
Abstract: Gadamer emphasizes the breaks more than the continuities in his reconstruction of hermeneutics. The decisive break occurs with “Heidegger’s disclosure of the forestructure of understanding” (
TM 265/GW1 270). Heidegger conceives of understanding as the movement ofDaseinitself, and he uncovers circularity as its basic character. Gadamer begins with Heidegger’s view, but reinterprets both thecircleandunderstanding.He broadens thehermeneutic circleso fundamentally that it becomes the guiding thread of the entire middle section ofTruth and Method.
6 An Ethics Close to Life from:
Gadamer
Abstract: To understand means to apply; understanding is always put into practice and thus becomes a form of action in itself, in the world, and with others. It should come as no surprise that hermeneutics, as it recuperates the theoretical as well as practical value it has had since antiquity, develops in proximity to
practical philosophy.Gadamer emphasizes this point in his 1972 essay, “Hermeneutics as Practical Philosophy” (RAS88–112/VZW78–109). Here theethicaldimension of hermeneutics becomes clearer: it does not lie in understanding as such, and even less in the alleged task or duty of understanding, but rather in
TWO Feminism, Socialism, and Christianity Revisited from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) MAHOWALD MARY B.
Abstract: Nearly three decades ago, I wrote an article in which I identified myself as ideologically committed to feminism, socialism, and Christianity.¹ The invitation to contribute to this book provides me with an opportunity to review those commitments and what they mean to me now. As then, I acknowledge the gap between my theory and my practice.
FOUR Three Aspects of Identity from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) MORKOVSKY MARY CHRISTINE
Abstract: A believer who came to feminism through philosophy—that is how I would characterize myself. Chronologically, I was born into a Roman Catholic family and baptized as an infant; after becoming a religious Sister, I was trained in philosophy; and in the 1980s I became aware of and content with the fact that I am a feminist. Some autobiographical details will explain how this unfolded. Then I will discuss the tensions and rewards that ensued.
FIVE Reflections on Identity from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) ELSHTAIN JEAN BETHKE
Abstract: When I was a graduate student of medieval and reformation history, I picked up and read a work that had a rather dramatic impact on me as an academic-in-training in the human sciences who was soon to find herself stifling within the confines of the then-dominant positivistic and behaviorist models in social science. That book was Erik Erikson’s
Young Man Luther.¹ WhenYoung Man Lutherwas first published, there were a number of excited discussions about “psycho-history” and restoring a rich understanding of human subjects in the social sciences. Although the book was not assigned in any of my graduate
THIRTEEN A Skeptical Spirituality from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) NODDINGS NEL
Abstract: When we try to answer the question whether philosophy, feminism, and faith can be reconciled, we see that many people have attempted the reconciliation, and quite a few have done so to their own satisfaction. Despite the multitude of personally satisfying accounts, no universally accepted reconciliation has ever been constructed. To argue for the compatibility of philosophy, feminism, and faith, then, is not a mathematical sort of task—one that can be completed to the satisfaction of some professionally constituted public. Part of the difficulty lies in the fact that neither philosophy nor feminism is a unitary body of thought.
FOURTEEN Faith, Philosophy, Passions, and Feminism: from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) SCHERER IRMGARD
Abstract: To “profess”
philosophicthe love of wisdom, as a teacher in the classroom and as a scholar in intellectual pursuits, faithful to one’s life experiences and deeply held private beliefs, can be a high calling, a sacred mission, and a great need all in one. But most of all it is a delicate balancing act of competing demands in one’s own soul. The attempt to “steer one’s own rudder true,” for example to live a life of religious faith in private, but divorce it from one’s publicprofessionwhich is based on different categories is, as the Existentialists have insisted,
SIXTEEN Toward a Visionary Politics: from:
Philosophy, Feminism, and Faith
Author(s) NISSIM-SABAT MARILYN
Abstract: We need, and our society needs, to create a vision of our human future and to actualize that vision in practice. I believe that just such a vision can emerge from a synthesis of feminist, philosophical, and spiritual resources. While the project of constituting such a vision is implicit in the work of writers and activists in a variety of fields, I hope in this paper to make a contribution by making the project of synthesis explicit and discussing some of its theoretical and concrete ramifications. The following remarks explain how I came to embark on this project.
Introduction: from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) JAFFE AARON
Abstract: We’re sure you’ve noticed that zombies are everywhere these days. Why else would you be reading this book? As it says in the stairwell: THE END IS EXTREMELY FUCKING NIGH. [#zombies.] In the bunker, out on the rooftop, inside and out back, stalking the horizon, zombies pose significant threats to both human identity and human civilization.
Who are they? What do they want? How do they“think”?What do they mean?The recent explosion of zombies in film, literature, graphic novels, video games, and fan culture is inescapable. Even sociology, philosophy, and literary theory have gotten into the zombie act,
1 Zombie Psychology from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) WATT STEPHEN
Abstract: Two scenes in Ruben Fleisher’s
Zombieland(2009) emblematize key psychical and affective dimensions of much zombie culture, dimensions that are often subordinated in critical discussions to such terms asterrororhorroror neglected altogether. At first glance the earlier of these scenes seems almost silly—so much fodder for gifted actors to exploit—and irrelevant both to the film’s narrative and to the larger psychical and affective issues inherent to such recent films as 28Days Later (2002), Shaun of the Dead (2004), Pontypool (2009),and others. After Tallahassee (Woody Harrelson), zombie exterminator extraordinaire and one of the film’s
6 Zombie Physiology from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) RAGLIN JACK
Abstract: While it has become de rigueur to portray the zombie onslaught as a war, this analogy is in fact seriously flawed and can result in lethal outcomes for humans who hew to orthodox strategies of offensive or defensive warfare. Consider that zombie warfare is not driven by a religious motive or geopolitical objective. Beyond the common innate drive to consume human flesh, zombies exhibit no cooperative group objective. Moreover, zombie predation does not appear to be driven by any planned or organized strategies conforming to the strictures of either traditional or terrorist warfare, although as described later, sufficient densities of
7 Zombie Performance from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) SATTAR ATIA
Abstract: The zombie consumes us. It occupies our minds, books, screens, and streets; devours and squanders our flesh and bodies; infects us with disease; and overwhelms our very social order. And yet we chase after zombies. In recent years we have facilitated their rise as a veritable cultural phenomenon, compelling them into our movie-theater screens in greater and faster-moving hordes than ever before, into our homes with shows like
The Walking Dead,and onto our college campuses with Humans vs. Zombies, a live-action game of survival. Even the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
9 Zombie Politics from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) MORTON SETH
Abstract: Carl Grimes, the cowboy-hat-wearing son in
The Walking Dead,gives his father, Rick, a cold reminder about the world they live in: “The costumes, the candy—everyone walking around, acting like nothing is happening around them. They’re all stupid. The roamers [zombies] don’t go away because you can’t see them. I hate this place, Dad. It doesn’t feel real. It feels like everyone is playing pretend. . . . I don’t want to get used to this. It will make us weak” (Kirkman 16). This cynical political philosophy—more “pragmatic than argumentative”—marks Carl as a member of Generation Zombie
11 Zombie Linguistics from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) SOLDAT-JAFFE TATJANA
Abstract: Zombies don’t make good conversation partners. When Sydney and Grant, the two main characters in
Pontypool(2009), realize that the disease that transforms humans into zombies might be carried through language—specifically, English language—they look for a source. In the sudden realization thatunderstandinglanguage is the source, Sydney asks Grant, “How do you stop understanding? How do you make it strange?” Such questions point to crucial issues concerning the nature of human language and the possibility of zombie language. First, they Tatjana Soldat-Jaffe encourage us to examine general definitions of language use and communication. Must language always involve
12 Zombie Arts and Letters from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) EBURNE JONATHAN P.
Abstract: Genre fiction is project-based art. Whether cowboy Western or intergalactic sci-fi, genre writing entails a double inventiveness according to the set of directives imposed upon each story in advance. On the one hand, by definition such writing exercises a creative function following explicit conditions of constraint, whether formal, aesthetic, historical, moral, or economic. From the pulps to the remainder bin, genre fiction necessarily knows its limits; this is part of its “project.” On the other
14 Zombie Cocktails from:
The Year's Work at the Zombie Research Center
Author(s) SCHNEIDER STEPHEN
Abstract: When Betsy Connell, female lead in Jacques Tourneur’s
I Walked with a Zombie(1943), confesses that is she isn’t in fact familiar with zombies, her interlocutor, Dr. Maxwell, first tells her that she is dealing with “a ghost, the living dead” and then informs her more cheerfully that the Zombie is also a drink, at which point Betsy finds herself on more familiar territory. “I tried one once,” she says, “but there wasn’t anything dead about it.” Uttered in 1943 at the height of Hollywood’s tiki craze, these lines are no doubt an inside joke. By this time, actors and
Book Title: Material Feminisms- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hekman Susan
Abstract: Harnessing the energy of provocative theories generated by recent understandings of the human body, the natural world, and the material world, Material Feminisms presents an entirely new way for feminists to conceive of the question of materiality. In lively and timely essays, an international group of feminist thinkers challenges the assumptions and norms that have previously defined studies about the body. These wide-ranging essays grapple with topics such as the material reality of race, the significance of sexual difference, the impact of disability experience, and the complex interaction between nature and culture in traumatic events such as Hurricane Katrina. By insisting on the importance of materiality, this volume breaks new ground in philosophy, feminist theory, cultural studies, science studies, and other fields where the body and nature collide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzgqh
INTRODUCTION: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Hekman Susan
Abstract: The purpose of this anthology is to bring the material, specifically the materiality of the human body and the natural world, into the forefront of feminist theory and practice. This is no small matter indeed, and we expect this collection to spark intense debate. Materiality, particularly that of bodies and natures, has long been an extraordinarily volatile site for feminist theory—so volatile, in fact, that the guiding rule of procedure for most contemporary feminisms requires that one distance oneself as much as possible from the tainted realm of materiality by taking refuge within culture, discourse, and language. Our thesis
3 CONSTRUCTING THE BALLAST: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Hekman Susan
Abstract: The purpose of this essay is to tell a story. It is a story that attempts to explain why feminists in particular and critical theorists in general are facing a theoretical and practical crisis. In order to tell this story we have to understand the origin of the crisis, where we are now, and where we might be going in the future. It is a story that has a beginning, although not an origin. The events of the story have precipitated a crisis that has not yet been resolved, although the parameters of the resolution are emerging. It is a
4 POSTHUMANIST PERFORMATIVITY: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Barad Karen
Abstract: Language has been granted too much power. The linguistic turn, the semiotic turn, the interpretative turn, the cultural turn: it seems that at every turn lately every “thing”—even materiality—is turned into a matter of language or some other form of cultural representation. The ubiquitous puns on “matter” do not, alas, mark a rethinking of the key concepts (materiality and signification) and the relationship between them. Rather, it seems to be symptomatic of the extent to which matters of “fact” (so to speak) have been replaced with matters of signification (no scare quotes here). Language matters. Discourse matters. Culture
5 OTHERWORLDLY CONVERSATIONS, TERRAN TOPICS, LOCAL TERMS from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Haraway Donna J.
Abstract: Nature is for me, and I venture for many of us who are planetary fetuses gestating in the amniotic effluvia of terminal industrialism and militarism, one of those impossible things characterized during a talk in 1989 in California by Gayatri Spivak as that which we cannot not desire. Excruciatingly conscious of nature’s constitution as Other in the histories of colonialism, racism, sexism, and class domination of many kinds, many people who have been both ground to powder and formed in European and Euro-American crucibles nonetheless find in this problematic, ethno-specific, long-lived, and globally mobile concept something we cannot do without
6 VISCOUS POROSITY: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Tuana Nancy
Abstract: As I considered the news reports of the various impacts of Katrina and thought about the city of New Orleans, I knew that
7 NATURAL CONVERS(AT)IONS: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Kirby Vicki
Abstract: The “linguistic turn” in postmodern and poststructural criticism has had a major impact on the landscape of the humanities and social sciences and the way we conceive and communicate our various concerns. Words such as “text,” “writing,” “inscription,” “discourse,” “language,” “code,” “representation,” and so on are now part of the vernacular in critical discussion. Indeed, over the years the textualizing of objects and methodologies has generated new interdisciplinary formations across the academy and transformed the content, approach, and even the justifications for research. On the political front we have seen similar shifts in the practices, modes of argumentation, and even
9 LANDSCAPE, MEMORY, AND FORGETTING: from:
Material Feminisms
Author(s) Mortimer-Sandilands Catriona
Abstract: In a recent exchange in the journal
Environmental Ethics, David Abram and Ted Toadvine engage in a spirited debate about questions of sensuousness, perception, reflection, writing, memory, and landscape. Focused on their conflicting interpretations of Abram’s popular bookThe Spell of the Sensuous(1996), and eventually resting on their divergent readings of Merleau-Ponty’sPhenomenology of Perception(1962),¹ Toadvine and Abram each attempt to address a set of ontological questions that are, I think, foundational for environmental philosophy: How can we understand the human body as a particular site of perceptions of, and interactions with, the more-than-human world? How can we
5 The Anthropological Question from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: Who am I? This is the question of the human being seeking self-understanding. It is also a question the incurved self cannot ultimately answer, because it seeks to answer this question itself through reflection on its own possibilities and acts. In order for the self to be put into the truth about itself, it must be addressed by a word from outside of itself. This external word constitutes the self and opens it toward the future. Following our discussion in chapter 4, we can distinguish between two different ways of relating to the future: (1) According to a conditional word,
6 The Concreteness and Continuity of Faith from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In chapter 5 we saw how the self is constituted through the address of an external word, which gives the self its point of unity (
Einheitspunkt). But if the self is constituted in the event of being addressed, how does the self have continuity from moment to moment? Does this event have any concrete extension in the life of the self, or does this account lead in the direction of an actualistic or punctual (Pünktlich) self?
7 The Capable Human Being as a Penultimate Good from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In chapter 6 we saw that the cruciform self is not a punctual self. In this chapter I demonstrate the sense in which the cruciform self is a capable self, since capability is one of the central themes of philosophical anthropology. On Ricoeur’s definition, capability is a power or potentiality that the self is able to exercise—most basically, “the power to cause something to happen.”¹ So our question is this: What place do human agency and the power to act have in the life of faith? What does the word of the cross mean for our understanding of the
8 The Call to Responsibility from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: As a result of the preceding chapter, we can see how the category of the penultimate allows us to affirm human capability yet also discern the limits of human capability and avoid a synergistic confusion of divine and human agency. The ultimate word is pronounced from beyond the self and its immanent possibilities and capacities, but within the horizon of the penultimate the self is
homo capax. We can therefore identify the capacities that Ricoeur discusses in his phenomenology ofl’homme capable—speaking, acting, narrating, and assuming responsibility—as penultimate capacities. If time permitted it would be worthwhile to examine
9 Reflexivity, Intentionality, and Self-Understanding from:
A Philosophical Anthropology of the Cross
Abstract: In chapter 7 we saw how the category of the penultimate allows for a critical affirmation of human capability. This chapter employs a similar strategy regarding self-reflexivity and self-understanding, showing that the for-itself has a proper penultimate status in the life of faith and that the cruciform self is a self-interpreting animal. It is necessary to make this argument given our interpretation of sin as incurvature, which might seem to reinforce the Romantic-idealist interpretation of the fall as a
felix culpa, a condition for the possibility of self-consciousness. Moreover, Bonhoeffer’s claim that the intentionality of faith is anactus directus
FOUR THEOPOETICS AS THE INSISTENCE OF A RADICAL THEOLOGY from:
The Insistence of God
Abstract: We cannot start with a stable concept of “philosophy” and a stable concept of “religion” and then “apply” “philosophy” to “religion.” We must allow what are called “philosophy” and “religion” to tremble together under the force of their mutual contact, letting each push back on the other. That contact can
SIX IS THERE AN EVENT IN HEGEL? from:
The Insistence of God
Abstract: Let there be no mistake. I am following Hegel where he did not quite mean to lead, marching to a drum he did not quite beat, taking up a cause he did not quite advocate. I am proposing, as Heidegger would have said, to “repeat” Hegel, to repeat not what Hegel actually said, which has already been said by Hegel, but to repeat the possible in Hegel, remaining loyal to the possibilities Hegel opened up for us by being faithfully disloyal to Hegel. To repeat Hegel in a productive way is, of course, to repeat Hegel’s own prodigious ability to
NINE AS IF I WERE DEAD: from:
The Insistence of God
Abstract: I object to the blackmail, to the bad choice—theism or atheism!—and to the violence of double genitive in the
odium theologiae—the total contempt for religion on the part of secularists, the demonization of atheism by the theologians, which leads to outright violence by religious extremists. The whole thing is a perfect recipe for war. The current form this blackmail has taken in recent years is a new wave of “materialism,” “realism,” and “atheism” that has arisen in reaction to the so-called theological turn. These terms are used more or less interchangeably, as if theology is allergic to
ELEVEN A NIHILISM OF GRACE: from:
The Insistence of God
Abstract: I return now to the hard hypothesis, that life is a passing feature of the universe, an interim phenomenon, not an ultimate or permanent part of the cosmic furnishings. An ineluctable fate lies in store for us—terrestrial, solar, galactic, and universal death in entropic disintegration, that point when there is no chiasm or poetics, no life or religion. What then of God, perhaps?
Book Title: What Is Fiction For?-Literary Humanism Restored
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Harrison Bernard
Abstract: How can literature, which consists of nothing more than the description of imaginary events and situations, offer any insight into the workings of "human reality" or "the human condition"? Can mere words illuminate something that we call "reality"? Bernard Harrison answers these questions in this profoundly original work that seeks to re-enfranchise reality in the realms of art and discourse. In an ambitious account of the relationship between literature and cognition, he seeks to show how literary fiction, by deploying words against a background of imagined circumstances, allows us to focus on the roots, in social practice, of the meanings by which we represent our world and ourselves. Engaging with philosophers and theorists as diverse as Wittgenstein, Sartre, Merleau-Ponty, Foucault, Derrida, F. R. Leavis, Cleanth Brooks, and Stanley Fish, and illustrating his ideas through readings of works by Swift, Woolf, Appelfeld, and Dickens, among others, this book presents a systematic defense of humanism in literary studies, and of the study of the Humanities more generally, by a distinguished scholar.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzkgb
ONE Humanism and Its Discontents from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: The study of literature in universities – “humane letters,” as it was once quaintly known – has traditionally been held to belong, along with history, and for that matter with philosophy in its most central aspects, to “the humanities.” T.hat term trades on the common distinction between the natural world, the world of birds and beasts, stone, stars, and the sea, and the human world, the world of politics, religious beliefs, sexual and familial practices, cultural institutions, beliefs, loves, hatreds, hopes, and fears. The former, we tend to think, is the province of the natural sciences; the latter is that of the
THREE Truth, Meaning, and Human Reality from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Our task in this chapter is to find a persuasive reply, one that does without mimeticism, to the discordant chorus of charges against literary humanism I have outlined. It is not easy to know where to begin. The problem is not only that, in the equally bewildering array of arguments underpinning the main charges against literary humanism, it is difficult to distinguish those whose centrality makes them most worthy of attack. Matters are made still worse by the fact that the claims traditionally regarded as fundamental to literary humanism, here summarized as CIC and the six claims of literature study,
FOUR Leavis and Wittgenstein (1): from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: The main lines of the defense of literary humanism offered in chapter 3 were originally worked out in a series of essays that were the basis for some of the later chapters in this book. When I wrote them, my acquaintance with the work of F. R. Leavis was minimal. Readers of these essays were not long in pointing out to me, however, that some of the notions developed in them – notably, that of literature as one of the main activities involved in the constitution of “human worlds” – bear a strong family resemblance to related ideas advanced, with similar goals
EIGHT Aharon Appelfeld and the Problem of Holocaust Fiction from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: The problem many find with literary fiction about the Holocaust is that it is fiction. Such fiction presents us, therefore, no doubt among other more important things, with a further challenge to bring the arguments concerning fiction and reality that occupied us in part 1 down from the abstract empyrean of philosophical debate to the firm ground of practical literary criticism.
TEN Reactive versus Interpretive Criticism from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: In part 1 of this book I presented a general case in favor of the traditional humanist assumption that major creative literature is of
cognitivevalue – of value, among other things, for “what it can teach us” about “the human condition.” And in part 2, in the course of rerunning those arguments in some new contexts designed to bring out further aspects and implications of the general position they define, I offered some concrete examples, with reference to Dickens, Woolf, Appelfeld, and others, of the sort of thing that might in practice constitute, exemplify, the sort of cognitive gain to
THIRTEEN Reanimating the Author from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: In the background of proclamations, by late twentieth-century literary theorists-cum-cultural critics, of “the death of the author,” and in the last analysis motivating them, stand the two traditional doctrines of Marxism mentioned briefly in section 2 of chapter 1. The first is the doctrine that culture per se is causally ineffective – a mere reflection, or epiphenomenon, of the underlying realities of exploitation and class conflict that actually govern historical change. The second is the connected, though not wholly consistent doctrine that the primary functions of the institutions of culture are
ideologicalin the Marxist sense of that term. That is,
SIXTEEN Meaning It Literally: from:
What Is Fiction For?
Abstract: Derrida’s essay “La mythologie blanche” was originally published in
Poétiques S(1971) and reappeared as the longest of the eleven essays inMarges de la philosophie(Les éditions de minuit, 1972), essays that, in various ways and from various directions, “argue their way through a rigorous and consequential treatment of the various blind spots, aporias or antinomies that characterise the discourse of philosophic reason.”¹ Its topic is, broadly speaking, the place of metaphor in philosophical discourse.
Book Title: Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): VALLEGA ALEJANDRO A.
Abstract: While recognizing its origins and scope, Alejandro A. Vallega offers a new interpretation of Latin American philosophy by looking at its radical and transformative roots. Placing it in dialogue with Western philosophical traditions, Vallega examines developments in gender studies, race theory, postcolonial theory, and the legacy of cultural dependency in light of the Latin American experience. He explores Latin America's engagement with contemporary problems in Western philosophy and describes the transformative impact of this encounter on contemporary thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16gzkjc
1 The Question of a Latin American Philosophy and Its Identity: from:
Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: Philosophy and Western culture have been synonymous at least since Hegel’s philosophy of history. Even when philosophy has been ignored, degraded, reappropriated, or put into question and even when philosophers have sought to “destroy” it, philosophy has been taken as a given inseparable from Western culture and born of it. Practically speaking, no one from the West or educated under the Western tradition, no matter how critical of it, would put into question the existence of European, French, German, or Italian philosophy. In Latin America the situation is different: The question that animates the very arising into existence and the
9 Thinking in Remarkable Distinctness: from:
Latin American Philosophy from Identity to Radical Exteriority
Abstract: These opening words from Walter Mignolo’s essay “Decolonial Thought: Detachment and Opening (A Manifesto)” capture the fluid and disseminating movement from which and toward which the thought of Dussel, Quijano, and Castro-Gómez have led us.¹ In light of the previous chapters, we are faced with the challenge to think in other ways than those sustained by instrumental rationalism and the coloniality of power, knowledge, and time. In this chapter I first reintroduce the idea of hybrid thinking in Castro-Gómez in order to set up and gain access to the relevance and impact of three contemporary Latin American philosophers. These thinkers
Foreword: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Cohen Jeffrey Jerome
Abstract: A rock jumps. Every hiker has had the experience. The quiet woods or sweep of desert is empty and still when a snake that seemed a twig writhes, a skink that was bark scurries, leaves wriggle with insectile activity. This world coming to animal life reveals the elemental vibrancy already within green pine, arid sand, vagrant mist, and plodding hiker alike. When a toad that seemed a stone leaps into unexpected vivacity, its lively arc hints that rocks and toads share animacy, even if their movements unfold across vastly different temporalities. Just as the flitting hummingbird judges hiker and toad
Introduction: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Oppermann Serpil
Abstract: An ancient Mediterranean landscape; an endangered species in the Amazon; the Library of Congress; the Gulf Stream; carcinogenic cells, DNA, dioxin; a volcano, a school, a city, a factory farm; the outbreak of a virus, a toxic plume; bio-luminescent water; your eyes, our hands, this book: what do all these things have in common? The answer to this question is simple. Whether visible or invisible, socialized or wild, they are all material forms emerging in combination with forces, agencies, and other matter. Entangled in endless ways, their “more-than-human” materiality is a constant process of shared becoming that tells us something
7 When It Rains: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Duckert Lowell
Abstract: Responding to his country’s record rainfalls in the beginning of the twenty-first century, British journalist Brian Cathcart seems to bring more of it.
Rainmakes a dreary forecast: “It is only when things go wrong that our dim consciousness of scientific meteorology rises to the surface” (66). French sociologist of science Bruno Latour would diagnose this tendency as “blackboxing.” Focusing only on the success of a scientific or technological apparatus paradoxically renders “the joint production of actors and artifacts entirely opaque” (Hope 183).¹ When a meteorology machine runs smoothly, it produces factual climates that we can reasonably predict and accurately
10 Pro/Polis: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Sandilands Catriona
Abstract: In his essay “Ten Theses on Politics,” Jacques Rancière writes that politics is a specific mode of action with its own rationality: politics is neither the general exercise of power nor the specific capacity of a select group of individuals to rule, but is instead fundamentally concerned with the constitution of a particular kind of subject of ruling, one “that is at once the agent of an action and the matter upon which that action is exercised” (
Dissensus 29). The political ubject, here, is only possible on the assumption of equality. To partake in the paradox ofsimultaneouslyruling and
11 Excremental Ecocriticism and the Global Sanitation Crisis from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Phillips Dana
Abstract: New materialists are fond of lists. Consider, as a first example, the beginning of Myra Hird’s 2009 review essay on “material feminism”: “Trans-corporeality. Entanglement. Meeting-with. Matter. Nonhuman. Causality. Intra-action. Disclosure. Agential realism.” Each of the terms on this list names a concept central to the “emerging field” Hird is preparing to survey (329). Most of them have come to occupy an equally important position in the discourse of new materialist theory broadly speaking, which draws on material feminism but also taps additional sources, such as phenomenology and the philosophy of science, for ideas.
12 Oceanic Origins, Plastic Activism, and New Materialism at Sea from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Alaimo Stacy
Abstract: Climate change. Ocean acidification. Dead zones. Oil “spills.” Industrial fishing, overfishing, trawling, long lines, shark finning. Bycatch, bykill. Ghost nets. Deep-sea mining. Habitat destruction. Dumping. Radioactive, plastic, and microplastic pollution. Ecosys tem collapse. Extinction. The state of the oceans is dire. The destruction of marine environments is painful to contemplate and tempting to ignore. Having returned from a week on the Gulf of Mexico, where sea life was sparse, I could hardly bear to read Callum Roberts’s
The Unnatural History of the Sea,which describes the staggering abundance of fish and mammals that once inhabited the oceans. Roberts argues that
14 Corporeal Fieldwork and Risky Art: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Glotfelty Cheryll
Abstract: It may go without saying that a landscape photographer must do fieldwork. How can you take a picture of a place without being there? But this very presumption of physical presence tends to obscure the role of fieldwork in landscape photo graphy, a process that resonates strongly with the material turn in ecocritical theory. Photographer Peter Goin (b. 1951) has devoted more than thirty years to photographing altered landscapes in America, documenting the legacy of human actions on the land. Author of more than a dozen books and recipient of numerous awards, including two National Endowment for the Arts fellowships,
15 Of Material Sympathies, Paracelsus, and Whitman from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Bennett Jane
Abstract: Paracelsus (1493–1541) experienced the natural world as a complex order of sympathies, resonances, magnetic attractions, and analogies (Pagel 52).¹ Though Paracelsus is variously categorized as physician, philosopher, alchemist, herbalist, I like to think of him as a plant physiognomist, as, that is, a practitioner of the art of discovering temperament and character from outward appearance. Each natural object bore for him a divine “signature” encoded in the thing’s shape, smell, texture, color, posture. This equivocal sign served as a spur to the human perceiver to engage in the artistry—the speculative thinking and practical experimentation—that would give determinacy
16 Source of Life: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Adamson Joni
Abstract: At the end of the eighteenth century, German intellectual and scientist Alexander von Humboldt traveled to the Amazon. Later, back in Europe, the publication of his five-volume
Cosmoswould influence a generation of thinkers on several continents. Today, his work still resonates strongly among scholars who are studying “the material interactions of bodies and natures” (Iovino and Oppermann, “Material” 77). According to Laura Dassow Walls, who describes the impact of his journey on both the sciences and the aesthetics of the Americas in her book A Passage to Cosmos, Humboldt considered “nature” as “a planetary interactive causal network operating across
19 Mindful New Materialisms: from:
Material Ecocriticism
Author(s) Gaard Greta
Abstract: It is Saturday-morning yoga class at the Minneapolis Midtown YWCA. A diverse group of practitioners assembles, varying in ages, genders, classes, races, sexualities, and nationalities, all gathered to practice an hour of mindful yoga. In Pali (the language of the Buddha), “yoga” means “to join” or “to unite,” and its practice involves joining attention to movements involving the body, the breath, the mind, and the larger interconnectedness of all beings. We begin with sun salutation and end in a position familiar to those who have seen the most common depictions of the Buddha, seated in yogic meditation. Joining body ecology
FOUR Interdisciplinarity and the Deepening of the American Mind from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: Interdisciplinarity has recently become a subject of considerable interest in the academy. No doubt some of its topicality derives from the perennial American fascination with borders, frontiers, and unexplored territory. Much of the current fascination with interdisciplinarity, however, now also derives from its appeal to leftist ideology that associates intellectual disciplines with the institutional structures that create and empower them and that, in the hyperbolic mood of a good deal of critical discourse these days, are prepared to view the demarcation of intellectual territorialities as potentially a police tactic that is both imprisoning and oppressive. The radical response is to
EIGHT The Place of Culture in the Play of International Politics from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: This book is organized around the belief that cultural assumptions, principles, and aspirations have played a much larger role in international politics than is often conceded. In the American academy as well as the public arena, there has until fairly recently been considerable skepticism about, if not resistance to, such an idea. Not that anyone has considered international affairs immune to the influence of ideologies, values, or even symbols, but only that the conventional orthodoxy in international relations has tended either to downplay the effects of such factors or, more likely, to presume that the best way of understanding their
NINE The Transcivilizational, the Intercivilizational, and the Human: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: In a world where traditional international rules have sometimes proved inadequate, recent interest in the notion of “legitimacy” as a complementary source of legal authority has raised a number of issues—legal, moral, and what some would call “ontological.”⁴ These issues came to the fore most dramatically, though not for the first time, during the Kosovo War of 1999, when in the face of grave and intolerable human rights abuses it became necessary to override legal protections against intervention into the activities of sovereign states. These questions were soon to become still more urgent and vexed when “legitimacy” was employed
TEN Global Ethics from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: From this perspective, there is always both a theoretical and a practical dimension to global ethics, but
Epilogue: from:
Ideas to Live For
Abstract: What is the utility of a cosmopolitan perspective in a globalized world? This is a world many of whose most serious challenges arise not just from geopolitical, social, and economic disputes between and across nationstates but also from intercultural and cross-cultural misunderstandings and conflicts going on around and within them. By
cosmopolitanmost people mean “worldly,” “universalist,” “tolerant,” or “civilized,” but there are in fact almost as many versions of cosmopolitanism as there are brands of dry cereal. Cosmopolitanism not only comes in various kinds—political, social, economic, cultural—but also in various forms—“vernacular,” “situated,” “realistic,” “patriotic,” “Eurocentric,” “emancipatory,”
5 Motherhood Refigured: from:
The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: To his critics, Bourdieu’s understanding of human agency (upon which I have relied to loosely structure my explanation of the abandonment) amounts to nothing more than a sophisticated version of social determinism.¹ Although Bourdieu’s intention had been to articulate a way of thinking about why people do what they do that transcended the reductive binaries of domination and resistance, his critics have consistently accused him of proposing a model of agency that condemns human actors to the reproduction of their own histories. And it is easy to see upon what logical grounds such accusations rest. For Bourdieu, after all, social
Afterword/Afterward from:
The Cruelest of All Mothers: Marie de l'Incarnation, Motherhood, and Christian Tradition
Abstract: So, what happened afterward? What became of the abandoned son? We know that Marie went on to enjoy a vibrant mystical life and an active occupation among the indigenous girls of the New World. But what about Claude? How does his story end?
1 Reflections on Heraclitus from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: The work of Heraclitus, unlike the work of Plato or Aristotle, has come down to us only in fragments preserved in various ancient sources that cited his work. As Charles Kahn has pointed out, every age has “projected its own meaning and its own preoccupations onto the text of Heraclitus.”¹ His fragments have had a peculiar attraction in modern times. Hegel said that there was not a single fragment (or “proposition”) that had not found a place in his System.² Nietzsche drew deeply from them. He claimed that “what he (Heraclitus) saw, the teaching of
law in becomingand of
4 Phenomenology and the Perennial Task of Philosophy: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: In his
Prolegomena to a History of the Concept of Time, Martin Heidegger made what might seem an odd claim, namely, that phenomenology is a return to Plato and Aristotle.¹ But then that is not so odd when we consider that the practitioners of twentieth-century phenomenology and these two ancient founders were all initially after the eidetic or the essential forms given in experience. Plato is famous for his doctrine of Forms, of changeless eidetic features. He advises his readers, when carrying out eidetic analysis, to “carve along the joints” of what is given rather than hacking through like a
10 Kant’s “Antinomic” Aesthetics from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Even a cursory glance at Kant’s thought indicates that it revolves around “antinomies,” literally “contrary laws” or the clash of different modes of legislation. In the
Critique of Pure Reason, we find the famouscosmological antinomiessetting the empirical against the rational: the limited or unlimited character of time, the divisible or indivisible character of the basic constituents of things, freedom or the laws of nature, and necessity or contingency as the basis of things.¹ In theCritique of Practical Reason, the rational nature, governed by duty, is set over against the animal nature of inclination, duty against happiness, deontology
15 The Free Spirit: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: One hears in Hegel that freedom is the recognition of necessity;¹ one reads in Nietzsche that the free spirit is characterized by
amor fatias the will to the Eternal Recurrence of the Same.² It seems that we have identical, if paradoxical, claims. Both of them find affinities in Spinoza, for whom everything follows with rigid necessity, and the free man is one who is privileged by the working of necessity to recognize that fact by rising above the appetites that cloud the mind.³ Awareness of belonging to the Whole and accepting the necessity of fate link Nietzsche to Spinoza
17 The Phenomenologists from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: What is Phenomenology? Externally considered, it is a philosophical movement that originated in Germany at the turn of the nineteenth into the twentieth century, found its classic inspiration in the sustained work of Edmund Husserl, and developed in differing ways in thinkers like Max Scheler, Martin Heidegger, Jean-Paul Sartre, and Merleau-Ponty, more recently in Paul Ricoeur and Hans-Georg Gadamer and most recently in figures like Jean-Luc Marion. It continues to have wide impact in such diverse areas as the philosophy of physical science and mathematics, psychology, psychiatry, sociology, legal theory, economics, history, literature, political science, linguistics, anthropology, aesthetics, and religion.
21 The Dialogical Principle: from:
The Beautiful, The True and the Good
Abstract: Riding the crest of a wave of popularity in the 50s, 60s, and 70s, today Gabriel Marcel and Martin Buber are largely thinkers who have been forgotten—except perhaps for
I and Thou, whose poetic character gives it the status of something like Kahil Gibron’sThe Prophet.¹ And yet the center of what they both touch upon—the center that they share in common with each other and with a still “live” thinker like Heidegger—is something essential to being human and thus carries an enduring relevance.
PROLEGOMENON: from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: At the start of our study of Thomistic Christology, we might first ask: is there such a thing as a
modernThomistic Christology? Behind this question there are a number of substantive issues. For example, what is does it mean to be modern? What constitutes “Thomism”? What is the relation between Thomistic thought and characteristically modern philosophy and theology? These are of course immense topics. Without pretending to ignore their importance, however, it is permissible to narrow the scope of our inquiry if we refocus the initial question posed here in a twofold way by asking: what are the particular
2 The Human Nature and Grace of Christ from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: The most contested affirmation regarding Jesus of Nazareth pertains to his divinity. It is the case, however, that the traditional affirmation of the perfect humanity of Jesus is also utterly controversial in modern theology. In one sense, this is simply because it is inherently controversial to affirm that there exists a real “essence” of human nature that God could assume. The subjacent question is philosophical: can we speak about perennial natures present in things in general and in human beings in particular down through time, and if so, how is it the case? In another sense, the controversial character of
7 Did God Abandon Jesus? from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: Modern theology has focused upon the last words of Christ in Mark 15:34—“My God, my God, why have you abandoned me?”—as a key locus of Christological dispute and interpretation.¹ Revisionist Enlightenment historians such as Reimarus have perceived in this verse an “authentic saying” of Jesus that predates the redaction of the Gospels. For him it is the indication of the Nazarene’s disillusioned apocalypticism.² Protestant theologians, meanwhile, have found warrant in this Scriptural text for a theology of Christ’s “god-forsakenness” experienced for us as a dimension of redemption. For Calvin it indicates Christ’s state of abandonment as an “experience
8 The Death of Christ and the Mystery of the Cross from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: In the Prolegomenon to this book, I argued that modern Christology has been characterized by two important challenges: how should we respond to the Kantian critique of classical metaphysics? How might theologians employ modern historical-critical studies of the person of Jesus of Nazareth? Both topics impact the theology of the incarnation, but they affect the theology of the redemption as well. How should we understand the saving character of the death of Christ?
9 Did Christ Descend into Hell? from:
The Incarnate Lord
Abstract: Is it an irony of modern theology that in the age in which Rudolph Bultmann should raise the question of the fundamentally mythological character of many New Testament ideas, Hans Urs von Balthasar should seek to reinvigorate the theological meaning of the descent of Christ into hell on Holy Saturday? Perhaps not. By offering a distinctive and in many ways innovative reading of this teaching of the Apostles’ Creed, Balthasar sought to challenge an age of overly reductive scientistic rationality, underscoring in Catholic theology the permanently valid interplay of literary symbolism, metaphysics, dramatic beauty, and Trinitarian mystery. In the words
Jesus’ Bethsaida Disciples: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Appold Mark
Abstract: Seldom do biblical scholars reach full agreement on issues of textual interpretation. That certainly has to do with the very nature of the texts themselves. One notable exception, the product of two centuries of scholarship, is the now generally accepted recognition that none of the four Gospels can be read simply as historical reportage but that each one must rather be taken as an ultimately irresolvable mix of discoverable “facts” and faith. The problem does not hang on a simple either/or but on an examination of the many points in between. Johannine scholarship has examined virtually every interpretive possibility that
“Destroy This Temple”: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) McGrath James F.
Abstract: The material found in John 2:13–22, depicting Jesus’ action in the temple and the saying about its being destroyed and rebuilt in three days, is a key point of intersection between the Gospel of John, the Synoptics, and the Gospel of Thomas. As such, it provides one of the relatively few places where questions of John, Jesus, and history can be discussed, as it were, “synoptically.” Because of this multiple attestation, there are very few scholars who dispute that Jesus engaged in
some sortof action in the temple, however small or symbolic, and that he spoke insome
John as Witness and Friend from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Coloe Mary
Abstract: The Fourth Gospel is the most historical of all the Gospels. While it has been entitled “the spiritual Gospel,” its depth of spiritual insight does not in any way detract from its focus on the actual life and death of Jesus of Nazareth.¹ In fact, this Gospel proclaims that history is now the locus of the divine presence. In the flesh of Jesus, we have the eternal Word of God. For this reason, history is now radiant with the glory of God: “The Word became flesh and dwelt among us, and we have seen his glory, glory as of the
The Woman at the Well: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Miller Susan
Abstract: The account of the meeting of Jesus and the Samaritan woman (John 4:4–42) portrays the positive response of a Samaritan woman to Jesus’ mission. The Samaritan woman recognizes Jesus as the Messiah, and she then tells others in her town about Jesus. As a result of her actions, Jesus stays two days in the Samaritan town, and more Samaritans come to faith in him. There is no account of a Samaritan mission, however, in the other Gospels. Mark does not make any reference to the Samaritans, while Matthew includes a prohibition to the disciples not to enter a city
Aspects of Historicity in John 1–4: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Koester Craig R.
Abstract: The manner in which modern scholars investigate questions of historicity is one that the Fourth Evangelist would find peculiar. In contemporary research, the historical Jesus is the pre-Easter Jesus, and questions of historicity focus on how much we can know about the ministry of Jesus prior to his death. The writer of the Fourth Gospel, however, assumes that truly understanding the pre-Easter Jesus involves a post-Easter perspective. At points this Gospel specifically draws later insights into the meaning of Jesus’ words and actions and acknowledges that Jesus said and did things that were not understood prior to his resurrection (John
Jesus and the Galilean ‘Am Ha’arets: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Freyne Sean
Abstract: In discussing the historical plausibility or otherwise of episodes or speeches in the Fourth Gospel, a number of important interpretative decisions have to be taken. These methodological issues cannot be discussed in detail in this essay. My own opinion, as stated in my study of Galilee and the Gospels, is as follows: “The fact that Galilee enters the ironic patterns that the author (John) seeks to develop, shows just how important the memories associated with the region were to Christian self-understanding, even when there is no concern to develop a realistic narrative of that setting” (Freyne 1988, 131–32). In
What’s in a Name? from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Witherington Ben
Abstract: The environment in which the New Testament was written was both oral and rhetorical in character. Texts, especially religious texts, function differently in oral cultures that are 90 percent illiterate and in which even the texts that exist are oral texts, meant to be read aloud. These important insights, when coupled with the realization that orally delivered and rhetorically adept discourse and storytelling was at the heart of first-century culture, should long ago have led us to a new way of reading the Gospels themselves.
John’s Last Supper and the Resurrection Dialogues from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) van Os Bas
Abstract: (1) First, the Johannine tradition is formed around the Beloved Disciple. This tradition interacts with other developing Gospel traditions, such as those that would be used in the Synoptic Gospels, especially Mark’s.
Imitating Jesus: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Burridge Richard A.
Abstract: From earliest days, John has been viewed as the “spiritual gospel” (πνευματικὸν εὐαγγέλιον), while the “external facts” (actually, “the bodily things” (τὰ σωματικὰ) were preserved in the Synoptics (a saying originally attributed to Clement of Alexandria by Eusebius,
Hist. eccl.6.14.7). Thus John has been seen as relatively late and Hellenistic, and primarily theological, while the Synoptics were seen as earlier and more Jewish, and therefore, according to this argument, more historical. Not surprisingly, then, John has been neglected in the various quests for the historical Jesus. Nowhere is this contrast more obvious than with regard to the ethical teaching
At the Court of the High Priest: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Bond Helen K.
Abstract: Despite a general preference for the Synoptic Gospels, several features of John’s narrative have often commanded a certain historical respect: the lengthier ministry and its wider geographical location, the more complex relationship between Jesus and John the Baptist, the date of the crucifixion, and the passage that concerns us now—John’s Jewish interrogation of Jesus (Smith 1993, 252–67). C. H. Dodd argued in 1963 that John’s “account of the interrogation is drawn from some source, almost certainly oral, which was well informed about the situation at the time, and had contact with the Jewish tradition about the trial and
Peter’s Rehabilitation (John 21:15–19) and the Adoption of Sinners: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Labahn Michael
Abstract: John 21 may seem to be a surprising point of departure for a discussion about John and the historical Jesus.¹ Historical-critical scholarship, though challenged by conservative exegesis and/or by scholars using linguistic and narrative methods (e.g., Thyen 2005), still interprets John 21 as a later addition to the Gospel (e.g., Schnelle 2007a, 523–24). The judgment that John 21 has a secondary character is evident even in the more text-centered approaches of Francis Moloney (1998b, 545–47, 562–65) and Manfred Lang (1999, 294–95 n. 918).² So why take that chapter as a point of departure for raising the
Aspects of Historicity in the Fourth Gospel: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 2
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: In reflecting upon the above treatments of aspects of historicity in the Fourth Gospel, a multiplicity of approaches and disciplines is here employed in getting at a common interest: the historical character of the Johannine tradition and ways in which it casts light upon the Jesus of history—his intentions, doings, teachings, travels, and receptions, as well as impressions, memories, interpretations, narrations, and writings about him in later settings. The division of the Gospel of John into three sections involving chapters 1–4, 5–12, and 13–21 works well as a means of dividing up the ministry of Jesus
Book Title: Speak Thus-Christian Language in Church and World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hovey Craig R.
Abstract: In its various forms, speech is absolutely integral to the Christian mission. The gospel is a message, news that must be passed on if it is to be known by others. Nevertheless, the reality of God cannot be exhausted by Christian knowledge and Christian knowledge cannot be exhausted by our words. All the while, the philosophy of modernity has left Christianity an impoverished inheritance within which to think these things. In Speak Thus, Craig Hovey explores the possibilities and limits of Christian speaking. At times ethical, epistemological, and metaphysical, these essays go to the heart of what it means to be the church today. In practice, the Christian life often has a linguistic shape that surprisingly implicates and reveals the commitments of people like those who care for the sick or those who respond as peacemakers in the face of violence. Because learning to speak one way as opposed to another is a skill that must be learned, Christian speakers are also guides who bear witness to the importance of churches for passing on a felicity with Christian ways of speaking. Through constructive engagements with interlocutors like Ludwig Wittgenstein, George Lindbeck, Jeffrey Stout, Stanley Hauerwas, John Howard Yoder, Thomas Aquinas, and the theology of Radical Orthodoxy, Hovey offers a challenging vision of the church'able to speak with a confidence that only comes from a deep attentiveness to its own limitations while able to speak prophetically in a world weary of words.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt16wdm5z
INTRODUCTION from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: The theme that unites these essays is speech. It is a theme that is woven in different ways (and in admittedly more and less obvious ways) throughout what follows. I have brought together these writings hoping that they will prove useful for students and practitioners of theology and ethics who are looking for a display of the difference Christian ways of speaking make to the ongoing life of the church in our time.
CHAPTER 1 Narrative Proclamation and Gospel Truthfulness from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: Let us begin with an observation that is at home within Radical Orthodoxy: Written texts can be misleading insofar as what they report can be imagined as free-floating facts, events, or ideas; that is, unbounded by the realities of cultural existence, of conditions surrounding both the production and reading of texts. This observation makes plain the ways we may be tempted to draw a straight line from the meaning of a text to the truth of that meaning, assuming that both can be exhaustively captured and assessed on the basis of the written word alone.
CHAPTER 4 Metaphors We Die By from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: Caring for the ill is a great moral task that brings into sharp relief our convictions about life and death. Not only does such care place the caregiver in unavoidable proximity to profound questions, but also the acts of care themselves reveal the nature of deeply held assumptions. Even the language that forms our descriptions of illness indicates some level of how we conceive of illness; our descriptions of illness also indicate how we understand the significance of life when it is in good health. In short, the words used for illness carry strong interpretive and evaluative power.
CHAPTER 5 Story and Eucharist from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: The thought and practice of sixteenth-century Anabaptism seem peculiar to many moderns precisely because modernity has no conceptual framework capable of correctly understanding the movement. Recent philosophical trends within postmodernity, however, provide fresh models for reassessing Anabaptism in terms more attuned to Anabaptism’s unique character. Some working within the Anglo-American strains of postmodernity have addressed and advanced post-Enlightenment thought in a remarkably successful manner, especially in regard to theology.¹ In this idiom, George Lindbeck is prominent among recent scholars using postmodern philosophy to help us imagine new ways of thinking about theology, particularly regarding the nature of religion, doctrine, and
CHAPTER 8 How Free Are We? from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: In modern times, there is almost nothing better we can think of than being free. Just think about the freedom of choice. What could be better than the ability to choose freely? Nothing. In fact, choice has become
CHAPTER 9 Basking and Speaking in Ordinary Time from:
Speak Thus
Abstract: Now, for those who pay attention to such things, the Christian calendar actually seems to allow
5 Spleen in Shakespeare’s comedies from:
The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Wood Nigel
Abstract: In
A Midsummer Night’s Dream, Lysander realises early in the action that lovers resemble poets and the mad in that they have access to perceptions that confound common sensibilities. Any ‘sympathy in choice’ is prey to ‘war, death, or sickness’, rendering it ‘momentany as a sound’,
7 What’s happiness in Hamlet? from:
The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Chamberlain Richard
Abstract: The emotions are not simply a matter for literature: critics have them too. Or, more interestingly, perhaps, they play an important role in the critical process which goes far beyond any naively expressive response to the emotional content of literary works. The reading of
Hamletpresented here raises this as a problem in the theory and history of emotions, in that it foregrounds the questions of what happiness and unhappiness are, and of how they might best be deployed in acts of criticism. Happiness, one might think, must be scarce enough in this play, and indeed it is, at least
8 ‘They that tread in a maze’: from:
The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Kesson Andy
Abstract: On Shrove Tuesday 1584, Elizabeth and her courtiers sat down to watch John Lyly’s
Sapho and Phao.¹ They saw a play about the mutual infatuation of the Queen Sapho and the ferry boy Phao, an infatuation engineered by Venus in order to ‘conquer’ the Queen’s virginity (1.1.40). This play therefore asked exacting questions, about royal sexuality and social status, of an audience arranged around a female monarch and her court. As Susan Doran and John Guy have shown, neither virginity nor court patronage was a neutral term in the 1580s, and despite Lyly’s modern reputation as a reassuringly conservative courtly
11 Discrepant emotional awareness in Shakespeare from:
The Renaissance of emotion
Author(s) Rawnsley Ciara
Abstract: Emotions-based commentary on early modern literature, and Shakespeare in particular, may suffer from a reductiveness due to reluctance to reflect multiple emotional states present simultaneously, either within an individual as ‘mixed emotions’, or between different characters often listening ‘at cross purposes’, or between characters and the audience (‘dramatic irony’). This perceived deficiency arguably stems from three basic assumptions that can be challenged. First, there has been recently an emphasis on the physiological approach to emotions, which suggests that early modern theory analysed feelings as primarily stemming from the body.¹ In general terms this approach is clearly justifiable in the light
[Introduction] from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: When looking at the relationships between democracy, culture, and Catholicism within the Lithuanian context, what immediately comes to the fore are interactions characterized by trauma, distrust, and tragedy. The origins of this bleak picture can be traced back to Lithuania’s history, to the decades this nation and its people spent alternating under the rule of Soviet, Nazi, and (again) Soviet occupation. The themes of trauma and distrust come out clearly in the chapters included in this section. The concepts of democracy, culture, and Catholicism, so foundational to the objectives of this book, remain indeterminate in the Lithuanian context. This is
Traumatized Society, Democracy, and Religious Faith: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Gailienė Danutė
Abstract: Severe traumatization has a deep and long-lasting impact on individuals and societies. In societies that have experienced mass political, economic, and cultural crises, the effects of trauma remain even after the crises have abated. Today, more than twenty years after regaining democratic independence, the people of Lithuania are still experiencing the traumatic effects of successive occupations of their country by the Soviet Union in 1940, Nazi Germany between 1941 and 1944, and the Soviet Union from 1944 to 1990. One might argue that Lithuania’s efforts at building democracy have been hampered by the effects of social trauma.
Christianity and Politics in Post-Soviet Lithuania: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Putinaitė Nerija
Abstract: Stereotypes about Christianity and attitudes of Christians toward public action were engrained into the minds of Lithuanian people during the Soviet regime and are evident in contemporary Lithuania. As clearly outlined in the chapters by Streikus and Šimkunas, the Soviet ideological apparatus sought to annihilate the influence of Christianity from the lives of people. From the beginning of the Soviet occupation of Lithuania in 1940–1941, and especially from 1944 until Stalin’s death in 1953, the Christian churches in Lithuania were brutally attacked as “the biggest obstacle to the smooth sovietisation of the occupied country.”¹ Many priests were deported, parishioners
[Introduction] from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: What profoundly marks Catholicism’s relationship to democracy and culture in Indonesia is the fact that Catholics are a minority in a majority Muslim country. Yet, given the profound commitment of Indonesians to the principles of democracy, Catholics have often found themselves at the table of political and civic discourse and involved in the processes of democratization. Nevertheless, the contributions Catholics have made to Indonesian society and government have always remained in the shadow of their minority status. Because of this status, Indonesian Catholics struggle to find their voice and to come to terms with the reality of precisely how effective
Catholics in Indonesia and the Struggle for Democracy from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Wardaya Baskara T.
Abstract: Colonized for over 150 years and gaining independence only after World War II, Indonesia is relatively new to the idea and practice of democracy. In the first two decades of Indonesian independence, democracy was difficult to put into practice because the country was undergoing a transitional period from being a colonial territory to an independent nation. Under the threat of domestic rebellion and the impact of the Cold War, Indonesia tried to democratize, but it never fully succeeded.
The Influence of Catholic Social Teaching on the Democratic Practice of Corporate Social Responsibility: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Yudianti Francisca Ninik
Abstract: Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) is driven by the idea that businesses are part of society and therefore ought to contribute positively to social conditions and goals. Some of these conditions and goals include the democratic principles of respect for human rights, the rule of law, and transparent decision-making. CSR proponents argue that businesses should be held accountable not only for their economic impact on society but also for the other non-economic consequences of their activities on society and the natural environment.¹ There is growing pressure on businesses to respect human rights and the rule of law wherever they operate, to
Catholicism and the Struggle for Memory: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Gehri Gonzalo Gamio
Abstract: The work of memory is an ethical act. Among its foci can be the recollection of violence. In 2001, a truth and reconciliation commission, or Comisión de la Verdad y Reconciliación (CVR), was established by the transitional government of Valentín Paniagua to examine atrocities committed during the 1980s and 1990s, when Peru was plagued by the worst violence in its history. The CVR was given a two-year term to produce a rigorous research on the violence. The final report was completed and published in 2003.
The Catholic Church, Indigenous Rights, and the Environment in the Peruvian Amazon Region from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Espinosa Oscar A.
Abstract: In recent years, there have been signs of a renewed and more intimate relationship between the Catholic Church and the indigenous movement in the Amazon region of Peru. After almost two decades of little public activity, the Amazonian bishops have explicitly expressed their concern for, and solidarity with, the claims of indigenous persons to both their land and rights.
Religion as a Political Factor in Latin America: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Trelles Jorge Aragón
Abstract: Research conducted in some Latin American countries has shown the existence of connections between self-reported levels of religious devoutness, church attendance, and specific political attitudes and orientations (e.g., trust in the government or satisfaction with the democracy). In light of this, the goal sought in this chapter is twofold. First, to contribute to a better understanding of the way religion can be considered as a political factor in Latin America. Second, through analyzing public opinion data, to provide an initial answer to the question as to whether Peru is a country where some religious beliefs and practices are associated with
Access to Information: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Sullivan Barry
Abstract: No government can operate entirely in the round. Some amount of secrecy is both necessary and inevitable.¹ But secrecy is fundamentally an affront to representative democracy, and it always exacts a cost. Secrecy engenders distrust, frustrates accountability, encourages arbitrary action, compromises the value of citizen participation, and disrespects human dignity. Secrecy also adds to the sense that government is distant and unresponsive. Institutions practice secrecy at their peril, yet many yield to its siren song. Institutions practice secrecy to various degrees and for various reasons: sometimes leaders or others have something terrible to hide, but often it simply seems easier
[Introduction] from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Abstract: Any foray into the relationship between democracy, culture, and Catholicism calls for critical reflection on two interrelated questions: first, what exactly do we mean by the terms “democracy,” “culture,” and “Catholicism,” and, second, what foundation(s) can we provide for their alleged relationality. The final section of this volume attempts a response to these questions by turning to the notion of praxis. A praxis-oriented approach is one that combines the theoretical and the practical, so that they may mutually inform and correct each other in the dialectical process of deliberation. Theory without practice is ineffective; practice without theory is irresponsible. The
Rendering unto Caesar? from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Schraeder Peter J.
Abstract: Observers of the complex relationship between church and state have noted throughout history that religious activity seems greater where religion is more free from state regulation.¹ Yet it is only recently that social scientists began systematically working out the mechanisms by which varying levels of church-state separation have contributed to enhanced religious vitality and religiously based political activism, most notably in support for transitions toward democracy. Indeed, the last quarter century has been marked by an increase in scholarship exploring the role and compatibility of various religious traditions with the spread and consolidation of democratic practices. Such research has included
Civil Discourse and Religion in Transitional Democracies: from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Ingram David
Abstract: On January 19, 2004, world-renowned German political theorist Jürgen Habermas met with Cardinal Joseph Ratzinger (later Pope Benedict XVI) to discuss religion as one of the cultural foundations of the democratic state.¹ Two points of convergence emerged from their discussion. First, both agreed that reason alone cannot sustain respect for individual dignity and the common good without more substantive faith commitments. Second, they agreed that these values, however complementary they might be philosophically, are difficult to harmonize in practice. Agreeing on policies that respect the right of each to pursue his or her own conception of the good appears all
Epilogue on Democracy, Culture, Catholicism from:
Democracy, Culture, Catholicism: Voices from Four Continents
Author(s) Schuck Michael J.
Abstract: In the
Nichomachean Ethics, Aristotle famously defined the human being as azoon politikon, a political animal. Small wonder, then, that group endeavors often reap rewards. For scholars, such rewards include the satisfaction of exploring ideas with new colleagues. Again, from Aristotle: “The whole is more than the sum of its parts.”¹ As a collection of chapters by new acquaintances from very different cultures, this volume’s emergent whole presents an intriguing montage. Like any montage, there are pieces present and pieces absent. This epilogue considers both.
Book Title: Keeping the Feast-Metaphors of Sacrifice in 1 Corinthians and Philippians
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Patterson Jane Lancaster
Abstract: Clarification of the strategic function of metaphors as a means of establishing an imaginative framework for ethical deliberationEvidence of Paul's active processes of theological reflectionExploration of the intertwining of Jewish cultic practice with the rhetoric of moral commitment within early Christian churches
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk6wx
2 Sacrifice as Metaphor in Pauline Rhetoric from:
Keeping the Feast
Abstract: Clearly, before any early Christian began to use metaphors of sacrifice in teaching or argumentation, there was the actual practice of sacrifice in Jewish and Greco-Roman worship. That statement may seem so obvious that it hardly bears mentioning, but the fact often becomes lost in Christian theologizing, in which the move from sacrificial practice to sacrificial metaphor has become obscured by what appears to be the givenness of the metaphor of sacrifice. While in the first century CE sacrifice was a
familiarcategory that could be employed to explain thenot-yet-understoodimplications of Jesus’s life and death for the Christian
3 Sacrifice as a Greco-Roman and Jewish Practice from:
Keeping the Feast
Abstract: While it makes sense logically that Paul might develop a language of temple and sacrifice that would be as valid for the Greco-Roman cults as for the Jewish cult, in fact part of what will become clear in chapter 6 is how Paul’s metaphors of temple and sacrifice in 1 Corinthians seem to have as their principal referent the Jewish cult in particular, and not a more generalized reference to ancient cults of all kinds.¹ It is the Jewish system of texts and practices in which Paul is a learned specialist. His expertise and authority are based in his experience
4 Sacrifice as an Object of Study from:
Keeping the Feast
Abstract: Sacrifice has been a widely practiced human act, various in its details, variously understood by those who have sought to explain it, and now almost unknown as an actual practice in developed countries. Most of those who have written on the subject would agree that sacrifice “means something” or “accomplishes something” beyond what is strictly observed, though most primary texts on sacrifice focus on what is
done, not on what itmeans.J. H. M. Beattie wrote in 1980, “sacrificial ritual, like other rites, is a form of art, a drama, which is believed by its performers … to work.
BRAZIL from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Alves Lynn Rosalina Gama
Abstract: In Brazil, the history of video games began in the 1980s when the first video game appeared on store shelves. According to Chiado (2011, 26), the first Atari VCS (1977), “half mounted and half manufactured in Sao Paulo,” reached stores in April 1980. Joseph Maghrabi, a 1980s entrepreneur, was instrumental in bringing video games to Brazil and created Channel 3, a pioneering club that manufactured game cartridges. As Maghrabi stated in an interview, “Before creating Channel 3, I founded the Atari Electronics Company. It was for the importing of devices and accessories of the Atari console. We imported the printed
CANADA from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Guay Louis-Martin
Abstract: To understand the development and importance of video games in Canada, a few geographical and sociological facts must first be pointed out. Canada occupies the northern part of North America and is surrounded by three oceans and its only neighbor, the United States. While Canada is the second-largest country in the world by total area (9,984,670 square kilometers, which is approximately 5% larger than the United States’ 9,526,468 square kilometers), it has a relatively small population of approximately 34 million (Statistics Canada 2012). When compared to the United States’ 2010 population of 308 million (US Census Bureau 2010), it is
CHINA from:
Video Games Around the World
Abstract: Video games have become an increasingly popular activity in everyday life, especially with the strong growth of online games, which are now the cause of a worldwide mania. In 2010, the revenue of the global game market was USD $52 billion, and it is expected to increase to USD $70 billion in 2017 (DFC Intelligence 2012). A research report from Gartner also foresees that the global gaming industry will even exceed USD $74 billion in 2011 and possibly reach USD $112 billion by 2015 (McCall and van der Meulen 2011).
FINLAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Mäyrä Frans
Abstract: Finland, a sparsely populated Nordic country with 5.4 million inhabitants, has a fast-growing and disproportionately large video game culture and industry. Combining high technology with the spirit of experimentation, Finnish game design has managed to join other Finnish success stories in high technology, such as the Linux operating system and Nokia mobile phones. On the other hand, the public perception of gaming in Finland has often been conflicted. The studies conducted have nevertheless revealed Finns of all ages to be rather active game players.
GERMANY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Liebe Michael
Abstract: In describing the computer gaming culture in Germany, one must deal factually with two different countries at least until 1990, when the GDR and FRG were united.¹ This is not an uninteresting chapter in Germany’s history; while computer games and video games were unavailable to most people in East Germany, in West Germany, as in all industrialized countries, games were quickly developing into a popular medium. This makes it possible to compare the development of computer games in two entirely different systems, which differ both socially and politically, yet have a common history and culture. This will be taken into
HONG KONG from:
Video Games Around the World
Abstract: Hong Kong, a free port city with a population of more than 7.1 million, is one of the major game consumption centers in Asia. More than being a mainstream young male culture, gaming has become a citywide entertainment, actively consumed by people of different ages, genders, and socioeconomic backgrounds. Children and adults are as ardent as teenagers in gaming, and the number of female players has increased tremendously. There is no obvious difference between white-collar and blue-collar patterns of game consumption; wherever you go, you will always find someone playing games. At home, people play console games, outside the home,
HUNGARY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Beregi Tamás
Abstract: When the average foreigner is asked about Hungary, he or she can usually mention only a few names from the twentieth century, such Béla Bartók, the composer and pianist, Ferenc Puskás, the legendary football player, and Ernő Rubik, inventor of the famous Rubik’s Cube, which led to a worldwide fever in the early 1980s. The cube, just like the Russian game
Tetris(1984), became the symbol of Eastern European creativity, which flourished even behind the Iron Curtain, a symbol of a game that is free in its abstraction and that follows strict mathematical laws, yet still is immensely variable.
INDONESIA from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Darmawan Hikmat
Abstract: This chapter provides a general overview of the video game industry and practices in Indonesia. The term “video game” is often used to mean arcade games, console games, computer games, and online games that have become popular over the past twenty years.¹ However, we have found through interviews and literature reviews that console and online games have had the most significant economic and cultural implications in Indonesia, a country of 240 million citizens, 130 million of whom live on the island of Java, where physical and information infrastructure are significantly more developed compared to the rest of the country.²
IRELAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Mellamphy Deborah
Abstract: Although video game play has long been an important part of popular culture in Ireland, video games were never treated seriously by the Irish government or Irish society in the past, which is demonstrated by the enormous lack of information on the early history of video games in the country; the Irish government and media never recognized the potential until recently when global video game companies began to develop operations in Ireland. It is surprising that Atari established a manufacturing base in rural Tipperary in 1978, employing just over 200 people in their plant, manufacturing Atari arcade cabinets, which were
ITALY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Gandolfi Enrico
Abstract: In the history of digital entertainment, in the past as well as the present, Italy usually appears in terms of characters and settings: from Super Mario to Ezio Auditore passing through the mafia’s topoi, the stereotypes and the artistic patrimony of this
JAPAN from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) deWinter Jennifer
Abstract: Japan is a densely populated island country with a population of 127.52 million as of 2012 (“Statistical Handbook of Japan” 2013) coupled with an active US military population of 39,222 (Department of Defense 2011). Since the late 1970s, Japan has had a strong role in the international computer game market, developing both successful hardware and software brands. This success is of particular note when compared to the rather weak-performing IT industries in Japan (Casper and Storz 2012; Azuma et al. 2009). The Japanese game industry’s success may be attributed to the rather strong influences of related entertainment industries, such as
THE NETHERLANDS from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: Gaming is a hot topic in the Netherlands. Dutch consumers make up the most active online gaming market in Europe. The Dutch games industry is a young and dynamic sector that has a lot of potential. While there is a clear focus on entertainment gaming worldwide, strikingly, the Dutch industry shows an almost fifty-fifty split between entertainment and serious gaming. In the varied Dutch market, small independent (indie) developers, innovative serious (or applied) gaming developers, and developers of entertainment games are all represented.¹ Digital distribution of games is a big focus of Dutch businesses, and a large number of companies
PERU from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Nakasone Arturo
Abstract: The adoption and expansion of video games in Peru has been relatively slow, mainly due to the hard economic situation the country was going through during much of the 1980s and the first half of the 1990s. Video game history in Peru basically starts with the introduction of arcade machines during the beginning of the 1980s. At that time, a small number of businesses appeared, ranging from medium-sized arcade game centers, which deployed tens of machines, to small stores that had just a handful of them. The majority of arcade machines was provided by Japanese manufacturers such as Namco, Konami,
POLAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Budziszewski P. Konrad
Abstract: “You need to appreciate how much our team had to rule for guys in America to trust us with their precious baby—their biggest money-maker ever. It’s as though some Polish company took its most successful product and farmed it out to Kazakhstan” (Chmielarz 2007, 126). Thus spoke Adrian Chmielarz, cofounder and creative director of People Can Fly (PFC), reflecting on the latter’s relationship with Epic Games—a relationship that netted the studio a contract for the PC version of
Gears of War(2007) and led to partial acquisition by Epic. In a peculiar combination of self-aggrandizement and self-effacement, Chmielarz
SOUTH KOREA from:
Video Games Around the World
Abstract: This chapter introduces the developmental history of South Korea’s video game industry. It first traces the political and social factors that led to the birth of Asia’s online game industry. It then examines the history of video gaming in South Korea since the 1970s, highlighting the types of video games and processes of production and consumption that developed during particular stages of the industry’s growth. This provides an opportunity to document foreign game imports and analyze their influence on South Korea’s domestic industry, particularly the country’s development as a cultural exporter between 2002 and 2012. The indigenous video game culture
SWITZERLAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Javet David
Abstract: In order to consider the status of video games in Switzerland, one must adopt a cultural, historic, and geopolitical approach regarding the place of this country on the international stage: four national languages and five bordering countries are unique elements that define Swiss culture, with the idea of diversity at its core. First, its geographical position—at the center of Western Europe—places Switzerland in the position of a complex cluster for market strategies and legal practices in and out of its bordering countries. In addition, while being at the heart of the European continent, Switzerland is not part of
THAILAND from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Soranastaporn Songsri
Abstract: Video games (sometimes called “VDO games” in Thailand) are popular and attract massive numbers of players around the world. Thai players engage console games, computer games, online games, and handheld games, and many organizations and companies are involved in video games in Thailand, yet there are few studies on the subject. Therefore, this chapter will describe the history of video games, the current situation of video games, and explain the behavior of video game players in Thailand. The population in this study included four groups who are involved in video games, including e-learning, animation and computer graphics, movie production companies,
TURKEY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Cagiltay Kursat
Abstract: Turkish people may have encountered computer games later than many Westerners, but they have wasted no time catching up. The modern Turkish game industry is one of the most rapidly growing markets in the world (Newzoo 2012). Thus, almost all game hardware producers and major game development companies have been paying special attention to Turkey. The average game playing durations, habits, and preferences of Turkish survey respondents are similar to those of developed countries (Karakus, İnal, and Cagiltay 2008; Durdu, Tüfekçi, and Cagiltay 2005). In the area of game development, however, Turkey remains far behind; no game hardware development activity
URUGUAY from:
Video Games Around the World
Author(s) Frasca Gonzalo
Abstract: Uruguay is a small country squeezed between two giants, Argentina and Brazil. Unlike its neighbors, Uruguay never produced consoles or computers but benefited from their hardware endeavors. Circa 1975, Argentina created the Telematch de Panoramic, a hacked Magnavox Odyssey clone that removed many of the superfluous original games. It even added a brand new game that was almost a cultural requirement of the region—soccer—and incorporated extra buttons to control the goalies. Little is known about this machine, but it is very likely that a few made it to Uruguay. Brazilian clones had a bigger impact in the mid-1980s,
Book Title: Mind in Architecture-Neuroscience, Embodiment, and the Future of Design
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: Although we spend more than ninety percent of our lives inside buildings, we understand very little about how the built environment affects our behavior, thoughts, emotions, and well-being. We are biological beings whose senses and neural systems have developed over millions of years; it stands to reason that research in the life sciences, particularly neuroscience, can offer compelling insights into the ways our buildings shape our interactions with the world. This expanded understanding can help architects design buildings that support both mind and body. In
Mind in Architecture, leading thinkers from architecture and other disciplines, including neuroscience, cognitive science, psychiatry, and philosophy, explore what architecture and neuroscience can learn from each other. They offer historical context, examine the implications for current architectural practice and education, and imagine a neuroscientifically informed architecture of the future. Architecture is late in discovering the richness of neuroscientific research. As scientists were finding evidence for the bodily basis of mind and meaning, architecture was caught up in convoluted cerebral games that denied emotional and bodily reality altogether. This volume maps the extraordinary opportunity that engagement with cutting-edge neuroscience offers present-day architects.ContributorsThomas D. Albright, Michael Arbib, John Paul Eberhard, Melissa Farling, Vittorio Gallese, Alessandro Gattara, Mark L. Johnson, Harry Francis Mallgrave, Iain McGilchrist, Juhani Pallasmaa, Alberto Pérez-Gómez, Sarah Robinson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kk8bm
INTRODUCTION: from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Robinson Sarah
Abstract: Rain draws sap from creosote leaves, releasing their astringent odor into the air. Rain washes hard earth; sinks into the saguaro’s radial roots—uncreasing the crinoline folds of its skin. Rain enervates the landscape; turns cactus needles into hairs that stand on end, antennae tuned to capture water. The raindrops beat on my metal roof like a drum. From below, veils of canvas draw the line thinly between outside and in. The south-facing wall arches against my back like the cupped palm of a giant hand, exhaling its stored heat into the length of my spine. The wind outside howls.
2 THE EMBODIED MEANING OF ARCHITECTURE from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Johnson Mark L.
Abstract: Human beings are creatures of the flesh who arrange spaces and physical structures fitted to their bodies. We live in and through our ongoing interactions with environments that are both physical and cultural. The structures we make are loosely adapted to the functions we perform. Some of these functions are necessary for our survival and flourishing, such as working, eating, having shelter, playing, and sleeping. However, we also order our environments to enhance meaning in our lives and to open up possibilities for deepened and enriched experience. In other words, although we are animals evolved for fitness, we are just
3 BODY, MIND, AND IMAGINATION: from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: Instead of stepping on the specialized ground of neuroscience, I wish to elaborate on the specific mental essence of architecture—a realm that is deeply biologically and culturally grounded, although poorly understood in both education and practice. It is my hope that the exciting doors that the biological and neurosciences are now opening will valorize the interaction of architecture and the human mind, and reveal hidden complexities that have thus far escaped measurement and rational analyses. In our postmodern society, dominated by shallow rationality and reliance on the empirical, measurable, and demonstrable, the embodied and mental dimensions of human existence
5 TENDING TO THE WORLD from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) McGilchrist Iain
Abstract: Many scientists assume that describing something at the brain level reveals the ultimate truth about its nature. However, as Wittgenstein, among others, observed, nothing can ever be
reducedto anything: it is what it is. People got terribly excited when neuroscientists found a brain circuit that “lit up” when you fell in love; perhaps you remember the splash it made in the papers. We were invited to think that this brain activity told us something about the business of falling in love, just as describing spiritual experience at the brain level seems to have explained that experience away. Of course
8 EMBODIED SIMULATION, AESTHETICS, AND ARCHITECTURE: from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Gattara Alessandro
Abstract: Cognitive neuroscience today offers a novel approach to the study of human social cognition and culture. Such an approach can be viewed as a sort of “cognitive archaeology,” as it enables the empirical investigation of the neurophysiological brain mechanisms that make our interactions with the world possible, thereby allowing us to detect the possible functional antecedents of our cognitive skills and to measure the sociocultural influence exerted through human cultural evolution on that very same cognitive repertoire. Thanks to cognitive neuroscience we can deconstruct some of the concepts we normally use when referring to intersubjectivity or to aesthetics, art, and
9 FROM INTUITION TO IMMERSION: from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Farling Melissa
Abstract: Eberhard’s description of experiencing Amiens Cathedral explains all that a person takes in with her senses, and allows us to understand not only the psychological, but also the neurological and physiological aspects of that experience. This rich, multidimensional understanding was exactly what I was hoping to explore twenty-seven years ago in architecture school.
10 NEUROSCIENCE FOR ARCHITECTURE from:
Mind in Architecture
Author(s) Albright Thomas D.
Abstract: Buildings serve many purposes. One might argue that their primary function is to provide shelter for the inhabitants and their possessions—a place to stay warm and dry, and to sleep without fear of predators or pathogens. Buildings also provide spaces to safely contain and facilitate social groups focused on learning, work, or play. And they provide for privacy, a space for solace and retreat from the social demands of human existence. These primary physical requirements, and their many subsidiaries, simply reflect the fact that we are biological creatures. In addition to building constraints dictated by site, materials, and budget,
Book Title: Reconfiguring Myth and Narrative in Contemporary Opera-Osvaldo Golijov, Kaija Saariaho, John Adams, and Tan Dun
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Dun Tan
Abstract: Yayoi Uno Everett focuses on four operas that helped shape the careers of the composers Osvaldo Golijov, Kaija Saariaho, John Adams, and Tan Dun, which represent a unique encounter of music and production through what Everett calls "multimodal narrative." Aspects of production design, the mechanics of stagecraft, and their interaction with music and sung texts contribute significantly to the semiotics of operatic storytelling. Everett's study draws on Northrop Frye's theories of myth, Lacanian psychoanalysis via Slavoj Žižek, Linda and Michael Hutcheon's notion of production, and musical semiotics found in Robert Hatten's concept of troping in order to provide original interpretive models for conceptualizing new operatic narratives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17kmw6p
4 John Adams’s Doctor Atomic: from:
Reconfiguring Myth and Narrative in Contemporary Opera
Abstract: Near the end of the
Doctor Atomic,the countdown to the test explosion of the atomic bomb in the Alamogordo, New Mexico, begins as Oppenheimer quotes from Baudelaire: “Time has disappeared; it is eternity that reigns!” John Adams’s ethereal, polyrhythmic music simulates numerous clocks ticking away as the characters on stage anxiously await the test explosion. In the semi-staged 2008 production ofDoctor Atomicby the Atlanta Symphony Orchestra, the audience watched a large image of the atomic mushroom cloud erupt on the screen as their seats began to shake from the low vibrations emanating from the surround sound system.
Epilogue: from:
Reconfiguring Myth and Narrative in Contemporary Opera
Abstract: Interpreting operatic narrative is a deeply personal activity in the sense that it is shaped by the viewer’s prior knowledge of the source material, the cultural values s/he brings to the table, as well as the extent of her/his immersion into the given opera’s production history. The lengthy proportion of the second act of
Doctor Atomicseems entirely appropriate if s/he understands the operatic narrative as a Faustian parable, characterized by a slippage into a mythological realm where past, present, and future meld together. Similarly, the viewer’s engagement with the irony in Ha Jin and Tan Dun’s rendering ofThe
Book Title: Luther and Liberation-A Latin American Perspective
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): Altmann Walter
Abstract: With the approach of the 500th anniversary of Martin Luther’s inauguration of the Protestant Reformation and the burgeoning dialogue between Catholics and Lutherans opened under Pope Francis, this new edition of Walter Altmann’s Luther and Liberation is timely and relevant. Luther and Liberation recovers the liberating and revolutionary impact of Luther’s theology, read afresh from the perspective of the Latin American context. Altmann provides a much-needed reassessment of Luther’s significance today through a direct engagement of Luther’s historical situation with an eye keenly situated on the deeply contextual situation of the contemporary reader, giving a localized reading from the author’s own experience in Latin America. The work examines with fresh vigor Luther’s central theological commitments, such as his doctrine of God, Christology, justification, hermeneutics, and ecclesiology, and his forays into economics, politics, education, violence, and war. This new edition greatly expands the original text with fresh scholarship and updated sources, footnotes, and bibliography, and contains several additional new chapters on Luther’s doctrine of God, theology of the sacraments, his controversial perspective on the Jews, and a new comparative account with the Latin American liberation theology tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17mcsdm
1 Luther at the Crossroads Between the Old and the New from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The Reformation originated in the action of the Augustinian monk Martin Luther (1483-1546). Luther’s outstanding importance in his own time and his relevance still today are too obvious to ignore. However, nothing is more inappropriate for Luther than to simply celebrate him.¹ For “What is Luther?” asked Luther in 1522, describing himself as “poor and stinking maggot fodder,” and his name as “wretched,” so that no one should call themselves “Lutheran,” but simply “Christian.” In any case, “Neither was I crucified for anyone.”²
2 The God of Life Against All Falsehood of the Idols of Death from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The question of God is raised differently, according to various cultural, socio-economic, and political contexts. In developed and affluent capitalist countries the question of God is largely raised in the context of the expansion of atheism. It is not always a well-elaborated theoretical atheism, but rather a widespread practical atheism.
3 In the Cross of Christ, Victory over All Evil from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Luther lived exactly at the beginning of the conquest and colonization of Latin America by the Spanish and the Portuguese. If we look at the history of the research and images of Jesus throughout these centuries, we find how differently the issues are highlighted in Central Europe and Latin America.
4 Conversion, Liberation, and Justification from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: In his novel
Aunt Julia and the Scriptwriter, the renowned Peruvian writer Mario Vargas Llosa describes with irony a character “in a certain sense much, much more grave” than a criminal type, that is, “a believer.” Gumercindo Tello, a Jehovah’s Witness, is accused of raping a girl of thirteen. In him one can detect
5 Scripture—Instrument of Life from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Although it is advisable to avoid generalizations, there is no doubt that the relationship of the Catholic Church with the Bible has changed significantly since Vatican II. In previous Catholic practice the Bible was an almost
7 Sacraments from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Sacramental practice suffers, in a fairly general way, from a strong ambiguity. Quite widespread in Brazilian Lutheranism—and, if I am seeing correctly, in Catholicism too—is an individualist, magical, and uncommitted understanding of the efficacy of the sacraments. It refers to the practice of the sacraments as a holy recourse to divine forces, able to remedy problems and existential angst—even physical illnesses—without resulting in a deepening of faith, strengthening of community, and a commitment to love of the neighbor.
9 The Political Calling and the Church from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: 2. to denounce the exploitative and conservative action on the part of the institutional Church in this situation;
11 The Economy and the Community from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: In 1520, Luther wrote a sermon on usury. In 1524, he picked up the theme again, writing the work
Trade and Usury, which is the main subject of this assessment on Luther’s conception of economics. The writing on the “common chest” of Leisnig from 1523 was selected to represent a creative and innovative attempt to tackle the main social problems that Luther detected. In 1539/40 Luther would again focus on issues of economic policy in a specific and particularly virulent writing against the practice of usury,³ demonstrating how this particular concern was not merely occasional but corresponded to a deep
15 What Did Luther Want, in the End? from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: Luther seems to have many faces—in part, for external reasons. He lived in a turbulent time of profound transformations in all sectors: in culture, economy, social and political order, religion, and in morality. Luther never had the privilege or the misfortune of being able to reflect with an inner or outer distance on the historical process in upheaval. Not only was he forced to think, speak, and act in the middle of events; the facts themselves, so to speak, rained down on him, while others barreled him over. Generally, however, he retained a peculiar and surprising freedom of belief
16 Matthew 25:31–46 from:
Luther and Liberation
Abstract: The great social encyclicals of the Catholic Church almost invariably cite it, particularly verse 40.¹ Vatican Council II also invokes it when it exhorts us to become “to make ourselves the neighbor of every person . . . and of actively helping him.”² The IECLB also refers to this parable when, from it, the church introduces its social position confessing “our failure.”
Introduction: from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: The rhino is standing in the sun,” runs the praise poetry in Botswana for the Tswapong divinatory tablets. “His shade is his ears. He flaps over those dwelling beneath.” As with that powerful being the rhino, so too with the ancestors, who provide the canopy. If you dwell in their shade, you are blessed and protected; your “shadowiness” is actually cast by them for you. Abandoning them leaves one bereft of powerful dignity, shunned by the dead and so shunned by the living, diviners argue.
2 In Praise of the Moral Imagination from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: The moral imagination encounters a powerful challenge in wisdom divination. It is at once visual, tactile, and verbal—to draw on an oral archive of archaic praise poetry and to make small things—the divinatory lots—speak with much moral significance about elusive and often ill-defined concerns. Many images are brought to bear with the poetry and the lots; the juxtapositions are sometimes paradoxical, not easily fused together. Yet there is a promise of getting wise guidance from an expert—the experienced diviner. What a diviner and his clients seek to grasp escapes ordinary knowledge—it concerns the occult in
5 Family Séances: from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: This chapter crosses a frontier in divination research by showing the
practiceof wisdom divination through a series of séances. On the basis of my earlier account of Moatlhodi’s archive, I turn to divination as an interpretive process of highly artful deliberation about moral peril. This makes persuasive reasoning and argument the focus, rather than the so-called politics of divination, the mere jockeying of interested parties to get a preferred outcome, for example, a witchcraft accusation (see chapter 1). Such manipulation, now all too familiar in divinatory studies, remains in the background, although still evident.
8 The Cross-Over: from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: In this chapter, I explore the second archive, that of hooved divination, in its actual re-creations. First, as a source for one whole poem, this archive appears in the diviner’s presentation of personal significance and his own identity. Second, there is a charismatic crossover, encompassing diverse modes along with classic wisdom divination. In the city, some diviners originally from Moremi village, have very recently combined wisdom divination with exotic forms, including Christian spiritual practices. Young prophets in Gaborone’s Apostolic churches, who reform received Christianity, are also engaging, somewhat uneasily, with legacies from divination, (see Werbner 2008, 2011a, 2011b). But at
9 The Charismatic Séance: from:
Divination’s Grasp
Abstract: This chapter examines how a charismatic séance by Morebodi worked on several fronts at once: on the practical, material, and physical realities, on the sense of spiritual inspiration, and on the subjective person of each of his clients. In turn, they were oriented, at least in the diviner’s rhetoric, as persons in an ordered cosmos that included invisible beings. Here, my main interest is in the vicissitudes of consultation. My account traces shifts from moment to moment, in an actual and filmed séance and later in post-séance events, some of which reconstitute the meaning of the séance in the eyes
Book Title: Evil in Africa-Encounters with the Everyday
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): PARKIN DAVID
Abstract: William C. Olsen, Walter E. A. van Beek, and the contributors to this volume seek to understand how Africans have confronted evil around them. Grouped around notions of evil as a cognitive or experiential problem, evil as malevolent process, and evil as an inversion of justice, these essays investigate what can be accepted and what must be condemned in order to evaluate being and morality in African cultural and social contexts. These studies of evil entanglements take local and national histories and identities into account, including state politics and civil war, religious practices, Islam, gender, and modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt17t75bk
FOREWORD from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) PARKIN DAVID
Abstract: The comparative study of moral systems is fundamental to anthropological thinking. This collection of nineteen chapters and the editors’ introduction present rich ethnographic cases from sub-Saharan Africa on a topic bearing on the definition of morality that has been at the forefront of anthropological findings drawn from research in the continent. Yet, as the editors point out, anthropologists have been hesitant to use a concept of “evil” to refer to acts and beliefs indigenously regarded as moral inversions or perversions of humanity. The term,
evil, is indeed an ethnographic imposition drawn from the English and cognate languages and therefore part
INTRODUCTION: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) OLSEN WILLIAM C.
Abstract: In his ethnographic account of the Muslim precept of knowledge in Mayotte, Lambek provides thick descriptive detail regarding the cultural and moral system of behavior, including the imagination of evil. In Mayotte, evil is often personified by a figure that circulates after sunset, dancing on graves in blatant contempt for the memory and space of the departed. Rogue characters of the night go unclothed, walk backward, feast on human waste, disrespect the elderly, mock the living, and are particularly harmful toward children. They disregard human morality, social custom, and relations of kin and society. Such actions form the substance of
2 UNTYING WRONGS IN NORTHERN UGANDA from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) OBIKA JULAINA
Abstract: Evil in northern Uganda is notorious. The film
Kony 2012, depicting the Lord’s Resistance Army (lra) rebel leader Joseph Kony as the incarnation of brutality, went viral in social media soon after it appeared. More than 120 million people, mostly young Americans, have clicked in to watch a video about a war and a part of Africa about which they had known very little. It described Kony’s guerrilla tactics of abducting children for the lra. In the video, we meet Jacob, from Acholiland, who was seized and made to watch his brother being killed by the rebels. The American narrator
4 GENOCIDE, EVIL, AND HUMAN AGENCY: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) BURNET JENNIE E.
Abstract: While few cultural anthropologists practicing today would be willing to label culturally bound human behaviors as “evil,” many apply this label to the gruesome individual and collective acts that constituted the 1994 genocide of Tutsis, politically moderate Hutus, and others defined as an “enemy of the state.” Because evil, conceived of as the opposite of good, is defined by a moral system, its application in a particular context involves moral judgment and violates the principle of cultural relativism, which lies at the heart of anthropology. Furthermore, on the continent of Africa, the concept of evil is inextricably tied up in
5 POLITICS AND COSMOGRAPHIC ANXIETY: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) MACGAFFEY WYATT
Abstract: This essay explores the possibility that there may be an inverse causal relationship, in a given historical period, between political stability and the degree of definition of worldview. Evil is not only a moral and ethical problem, but also a political one, in that evildoers real or imaginary must be legitimately dealt with.¹ Because political institutions and activities are intrinsically historical, ideas about evil and the means to deal with it can be expected to change. Indeed, “dealing with” evil by consulting a diviner, healer, or shrine; following through on the recommendations; and mustering economic and social support for remedial
9 DISTINCTIONS IN THE IMAGINATION OF HARM IN CONTEMPORARY MIJIKENDA THOUGHT: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) CIEKAWY DIANE
Abstract: In discussions about spirit aggression and human agents of harm, Mijikenda,¹ whose lifeworld is centered in the coastal hinterland of Kenya, assert particular views about the importance of moral action. Their claims are imbedded in a complex of thought and practice that has been described by various works on Mijikenda religion, most notably by David Parkin in
Sacred Void: Spatial Images of Work and Ritual among the Giriama of Kenya(1991). His comprehensive volume details central dimensions of Mijikenda thought and practice and offers conceptual schemes that provide a foundation for contemporary scholarship.
12 REFLECTIONS REGARDING GOOD AND EVIL: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) LARSEN KJERSTI
Abstract: This essay addresses the moral category of evil from an anthropological perspective. For that reason I shall explore “evil” from a particular ontology rather than as a universal concept. This is the only approach that could disclose understandings that may challenge the dominant emic Judeo-Christian theological or philosophical framework. Investigating the manner in which evil is embedded in cosmologies of the everyday, I shall pay attention to practice including discourse as, within this domain, it would only rarely be elaborated in any abstract mode. Furthermore, being attentive to how evil is perceived and identified through its practice renders possible a
13 CONSTRUCTING MORAL PERSONHOOD: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) RASMUSSSSEN SUSAN J.
Abstract: Evil often induces human suffering; it may, for example, result in illness. In many African societies, it is often synonymous with witchcraft, possession, and other malevolent practices elaborated in ritual (Comaroff and Comaroff 1993; Ferme 2001; Rasmussen 1998, 2001; West 2005, 2007), and it is often combated through formal religious and political means. I contend that, in addition to these manifestations, evil may also be addressed more informally, in moral testing during deceptively trivial ordinary everyday sociability, not solely in public formal ritual or large-scale political contexts. Preoccupations in such tests include combating literal physical harm, tangible material theft, and/or
14 THE GENDER OF EVIL: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) HODGSON DOROTHY L.
Abstract: Although there is an emerging scholarship in anthropology on evil (e.g., Parkin 1985a)—its symbolism, manifestations, associations, and changes over time—few scholars have explored whether gender shapes experiences and expressions of evil, and if so how. Women and men appear as agents or victims of evil acts or forces, whether as intentionally negligent mothers (Parkin 1985c) or witches (van Beek 1994), but there has been little systematic effort to analyze what evil acts, beings or forces may tell us about gender relations, or, conversely, how a gender analysis may complicate our understandings of evil. But if, as David Parkin
17 SORCERY AFTER SOCIALISM: from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) GREEN MAIA
Abstract: In his introduction to the
Anthropology of Evil, published some thirty years ago, David Parkin calls for an approach to the social manifestation of evil that extends beyond a narrow focus on witchcraft. If evil is perceived more broadly, as a range of actions that are associated with causing human harm, the categorization can include diverse instantiations of the phenomenon. Moreover, as a classification that is inherently relational, involving the imputation of responsibility to someone or something, the analysis of evil takes us into concerns with wider issues of cosmology and ontology. What is the universe of human and extra
18 TRANSATLANTIC PENTECOSTAL DEMONS IN MAPUTO from:
Evil in Africa
Author(s) VAN DE KAMP LINDA
Abstract: Regularly, Pentecostals summoned me to pray when we were on the street in Maputo, the capital of Mozambique.¹ They stressed that we needed to be aware of and protect ourselves against negative spiritual influences that were hiding everywhere. We had to keep our distance from what was happening around us as we first had to judge the intentions of people who approached us. Pentecostals could often tell me the exact moment when someone had approached them on the street or in a building and how afterward they had lost their job or their partner had disappeared because the person they
5 ESTUDIO DE CASO from:
Psicoplástica
Abstract: EL PLANTEAMIENTO DE un caso es siempre una oportunidad para comprender a cabalidad la aplicación de un modelo, por lo que a continuación describo y explico los pasos seguidos en el desarrollo de una actividad específica de psicoplástica y luego presento el caso particular de una integrante del grupo en el taller. En la actividad escogida se verifican todas las etapas de manera muy característica, se ejemplifican las problemáticas que aborda la psicoplástica y se extraen conclusiones fundamentales para comprender los procesos que se comprueban en quien experimenta la influencia que ejercen sobre él sus propias imágenes.
A MODO DE CONCLUSIÓN from:
Psicoplástica
Abstract: La experiencia adquirida a través de la aplicación de la psicoplástica, en muchos y diversos grupos de personas, me ha hecho visualizarla como una instancia vincular que integra e interrelaciona en forma viva y activa a quien guía el taller, a los participantes y al espacio de la propia actividad.
¿Somos libres? from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Seifert Josef
Abstract: ¿Somos libres, e implica esto el señorío sobre el ser o no-ser de nuestros actos, tal como Aristóteles describe la libertad, cuando dice: “Porque [el hombre] es el señor del ser y no-ser de éstas [sus acciones]?”¹. En otros textos, Aristóteles se refiere al libre albedrío también como “el primer principio”, “la causa” y “el señor de la acción”².
La promesa de la libertad o la libertad de prometer from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Wischke Mirko
Abstract: A esta pregunta –que proviene de Jaspers– se le dan en la discusión actual dos respuestas. La primera dice que aquellas prohibiciones fundamentales que el derecho formula mediante reglas específicas tienen que estar enraizadas en la moral; y la segunda respuesta sostiene que moral y derecho
La libertad como consentimiento from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Peña Jorge
Abstract: Una breve y densa definición de lo que es la libertad nos la proporciona Leonardo Polo cuando la caracteriza como “poseerse en el origen”. Es decir, que no haya nada al margen de nuestra propia elección, que todo cuanto hacemos procede originariamente de nosotros mismos. Jacinto Choza recoge y comenta esta definición cuando escribe: “Disponer de sí en el acto mismo de empezar a ser, de forma que no suceda que cuando el sujeto vaya a decidir algo o cuando vaya a actuar, resulte que ya exista con una multiplicidad de determinaciones surgidas por decirlo así a sus espaldas, y
La ley como modelo antropológico de libertad from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) de Undurraga Francisco
Abstract: En
El pensamiento salvaje,¹ Lévi-Strauss se refiere a la operación en conjunto de la etnología y de las ciencias exactas y naturales, en dos etapas que integran, primero, un proceso de “disolución” y luego, un mecanismo de reintegración de la “cultura en la naturaleza, y finalmente, de la vida en el conjunto de sus operaciones físico-químicas” (294). La “disolución” de que nos habla Lévi-Strauss no implica en absoluto, aclara el autor, una destrucción, sino la desarticulación en partículas. La “disolución” faculta, podemos discurrir: 1) el estudio pormenorizado de los componentes del fenómeno; 2) la interrelación de dichas partículas con otras,
La pre-concepción de una posible salvación desde las experiencias de la muerte y de la culpa. from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Lambert César
Abstract: La tesis que vamos a exponer se centra en la idea de que las experiencias humanas de la culpa y de la muerte del prójimo contienen una comprensión implícita de una posible salvación. “Pre-comprensión” o “comprensión implícita” son términos que no aluden a actos concretos de entender esto o aquello, sino a estructuras propias de la existencia humana como tal. Desde esta óptica entroncan con la noción de comprensión, tal como la propone Martin Heidegger en
Ser y tiempo.
Identidad personal y racionalidad práctica en la época de la biopolítica from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Frías Rodrigo
Abstract: Según uno de los diagnósticos más penetrantes acerca de la época actual– y que debemos a Heidegger–, la nuestra sería aquella en la que la totalidad de lo real, y con ello la vida, se incorpora, definitiva y radicalmente, a la lógica de la racionalidad calculante; es decir, aquella época en la que la voluntad de poder que opera en la esencia de la técnica se orientaría al sometimiento de lo ente a la lógica de la disponibilidad¹. Para el autor de este diagnóstico, sin embargo, este moderno fenómeno del imperar de la esencia de la técnica tiene ante
“Animal que tiene lenguaje”. from:
Realidad humana e ideal de humanidad
Author(s) Choza Jacinto
Abstract: “El primer humanismo, esto es, el romano, y todas las clases de humanismo que han ido apareciendo desde entonces hasta la actualidad, presuponen y dan por sobreentendida la esencia más universal del ser humano. El hombre se entiende como
animal rationale. Esta
4 Apes and Cannibals in Cambria: from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) BOHATA KIRSTI
Abstract: The late eighteenth- and nineteenth-century imperial project to define the distinctive ethnological and ‘racial’ features of the peoples of empire (as well as the various types of European) had a profound influence on the way different races, nationalities, cultures and even classes were viewed. Fundamental to this project were the supposedly empirical sciences of physical anthropology, such as physiology, phrenology and craniology. The forms of ‘knowledge’ derived from these studies became part of the popular consciousness and, despite the complex characteristics of cultures and peoples, powerful stereotypes were constructed that often denied realities or, indeed, even worked to alter perceived
9 Religious Diversity in Wales from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) CHAMBERS PAUL
Abstract: Welsh religious belief and practice has historically been associated with Nonconformity and an egalitarian religious practice grounded in the local chapel and the Welsh language and culture. Nonconformism emerged as a significant cultural and social force in Welsh society in the late eighteenth century and was consolidated in the nineteenth century. Grounded in religious and cultural dissent and subject to constant schisms, the religious landscape of Welsh was dotted with a patchwork of small Protestant denominations, sects and independent congregations. Taken individually, these groups were diverse in matters of belief and politics. Taken together they constituted something rather more significant,
11 Experiencing Rural Wales from:
A Tolerant Nation?
Author(s) WILLIAMS CHARLOTTE
Abstract: The link between rural Wales and notions of authentic Welshness has been a long-standing theme in both the academic literature and in popular representations. The Welsh countryside and its imagined characteristics hold a very privileged place in dominant constructions of national identity. Myths of a peaceable and tolerant nation, deeply embedded in the national imaginary are rooted in an idealized Welsh rural community life that summons the trope of the gwerin, a particular form of localized communitarianism to express the values of egalitarianism, classlessness and internationalism. Myths are of course important to nation building but they also function as a
Book Title: Time-A Vocabulary of the Present
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Elias Amy J.
Abstract: The concept of time in the post-millennial age is undergoing a radical rethinking within the humanities.
Time: A Vocabulary of the Presentnewly theorizes our experiences of time in relation to developments in post-1945 cultural theory and arts practices. Wide ranging and theoretically provocative, the volume introduces readers to cutting-edge temporal conceptualizations and investigates what exactly constitutes the scope of time studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18040s0
2 Extinction / Adaptation from:
Time
Author(s) HEISE URSULA K.
Abstract: Extinction and adaptation are, according to Darwinian theory, normal components of evolutionary processes that have taken place during all of the 3.5 billion years of biological life on Earth. Genetic changes that arise randomly in biological organisms create handicaps or advantages for certain individuals and populations as they interact with a complex
3 Modern / Altermodern from:
Time
Author(s) JAMES DAVID
Abstract: Criticism has reached a moment when the distinctions between modernity and contemporaneity have never been more debated; when the case for seeing periodization as a professional restriction and intellectual impediment is gaining traction; when postmodernism as a critical category, an epoch of aesthetic production, and a cultural pathology of our late-capitalist condition is considered to be passed; and when artistic modernism itself is being regarded as unfinished and irrepressible, a keyword that resurfaces afresh to capture a range of experimental practices across the visual, textual, acoustic, and plastic arts. At such a disciplinary moment as this—and notwithstanding the precept
8 Human / Planetary from:
Time
Author(s) HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: After exploring the landscapes and histories of the Lake Superior region, poet Lorine Niedecker announces in a letter to Cid Corman, “I’m going into a kind of retreat so far as time (going to be geologic time from now on!) is concerned.”¹ Writing in 1966, at the dawn of so-called modern environmentalism,² she wishes to break through the dam separating the human and the planetary. Conceptual silos enclose these domains despite the obvious fact that (for now) being human requires being of planet Earth. Niedecker’s project of geologic timekeeping names time as one of the categories of thought that has
11 Labor / Leisure from:
Time
Author(s) ANABLE AUBREY
Abstract: In 1930, the economist John Maynard Keynes predicted that by 2030 the wealth created by new technologies would bring about an era of universal leisure.¹ We can safely say that Keynes’s prediction was way off the mark.² In the West, the postwar transformations of work—from the computerization of factories and offices to the outsourcing of manufacturing jobs to the global south—have changed the labor landscape dramatically since 1930. Still, labor, not leisure, structures the vast majority of people’s time. Labor—a word that names both the kind of remunerated work that we do and also how that work
12 Real / Quality from:
Time
Author(s) MCGURL MARK
Abstract: Among the handful of time concepts that can be said to be original to the postwar period, two are prominent enough to lay claim to decisive significance for our understanding of the historical specificity of the present. The terms “real time” and “quality time” bob near the surface of contemporary life, too compact to count as clichés but too inflated with surplus meaning to be considered simply as keywords. As distinct modifications of a more basic (and yet notoriously mysterious) noun, each emerges from a relatively specialized postwar discourse and begins to circulate promiscuously in the realm of everyday American
13 Aesthetic / Prosthetic from:
Time
Author(s) MATZ JESSE
Abstract: Wired to a tank lies the mutilated corpse of Captain Colter Stevens, an army pilot killed in action in Afghanistan. His body is gone below the ribcage. But his brain lives still, patched into a computer system with a vital purpose: time travel. Sent into the past for information about a terrorist attack, Stevens ultimately saves Chicago from a massive dirty bomb. That such a radically disabled body could have such ability—to travel in time, to save a city—is the central premise of Duncan Jones’s 2011 film
Source Code.¹ The film demonstrates a remarkable form of prosthesis by
15 Embodied / Disembodied from:
Time
Author(s) STEPHENS SANDRA
Abstract: People Revisited, an interactive video installation by Sandra Stephens, presents life-size projections of people, walking in one main scene.¹ As viewers watch the video, they can use a trackball set up on a stand to control the movements of people within the projection (see figures 15.1 and 15.2).
17 Authentic / Artificial from:
Time
Author(s) REED ANTHONY
Abstract: Questions of authenticity and artificiality haunt black culture’s transition from an appropriated set of practices to a set of commodity objects and reveal along the way a racialized set of spatiotemporal assumptions that persist into the digital era. The possibility of counterfeit haunts the digitally produced cultural object in two specific ways: concern over the legality and provenance of the physical object, and concern over the legitimacy of the art as “expression” of a nebulous “folk-spirit.” The latter is my primary concern in this discussion. For if the possibility of recording retrospectively creates the “live” performance, the possibility of the
18 Batch / Interactive from:
Time
Author(s) MONTFORT NICK
Abstract: “Batch” and “interactive” are modes in which computer systems operate, the latter being a mode that is much more common and visible in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries, the former having dominated mainframe computing, beginning in the late 1950s. In early, archetypal batch processing, programs were written out, punched cards were prepared on keypunch machines, the deck was brought in and—when the computer could accommodate the job—the program was run. A tiny error would mean that the programmer would have to come back the next day and try again with the corrected program. Interactive computing, which
19 Transmission / Influence from:
Time
Author(s) HAIDU RACHEL
Abstract: The time of artistic influence is
pastin a manner that reveals the schisms and anxieties of academia itself. On the one hand, “influence” is a term that has been out of fashion for more than forty years in humanistic disciplines touched by theory; on the other hand, it persists as a principle of thought, abandoned but still lurking, something we might wish to unthink but instead find ourselves actively repressing. We might repudiate, disavow, or just ignore it, but influence is still part of our consciousness, often part of the way we define what we study as objects in
Book Title: Critical Trauma Studies-Understanding Violence, Conflict and Memory in Everyday Life
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Wertheimer Eric
Abstract: Trauma is a universal human experience. While each person responds differently to trauma, its presence in our lives nonetheless marks a continual thread through human history and prehistory. In
Critical Trauma Studies, a diverse group of writers, activists, and scholars of sociology, anthropology, literature, and cultural studies reflects on the study of trauma and how multidisciplinary approaches lend richness and a sense of deeper understanding to this burgeoning field of inquiry. The original essays within this collection cover topics such as female suicide bombers from the Chechen Republic, singing prisoners in Iranian prison camps, sexual assault and survivor advocacy, and families facing the devastation of Hurricane Katrina. As it proceeds,Critical Trauma Studiesnever loses sight of the way those who study trauma as an academic field, and those who experience, narrate, and remediate trauma as a personal and embodied event, inform one another. Theoretically adventurous and deeply particular, this book aims to advance trauma studies as a discipline that transcends intellectual boundaries, to be mapped but also to be unmoored from conceptual and practical imperatives. Remaining embedded in lived experiences and material realities,Critical Trauma Studiesframes the field as both richly unbounded and yet clearly defined, historical, and evidence-based.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt180414n
1 Within Trauma: from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) CASPER MONICA J.
Abstract: The Sonoran Desert in autumn, after the heat, is beautiful. Hackberries and wolfberries emerge and barrel cacti blossom. Wildflowers open out in magenta, saffron, Indian red, and burnt orange, feeding butterflies and bees. Snakes map their route to winter sleep, lizards grow sluggish, and winged raptors—wintering hawks, kestrels, falcons, and owls—soar above the cover of fallen petals from summer-blooming perennials. And yet, the pastoral desert is also predatory. Lacerated mesquite trees bleed black sap. Cacti of all shapes and sizes protect themselves with spikes and spurs. Deadly heat, especially in high summer, leeches moisture from flesh, leaf, bone,
8 Future’s Past: from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) Schwab Gabriele M.
Abstract: Martin Beck Matuštík: In Holocaust studies, “second generation” has come to describe children of the survivors. Among key formative impacts on this area would be, for example, Holocaust literature as well as memoir narrative (Helen Epstein, Primo Levi, Elie Wiesel), the Yale Video Archive Testimony project (Larry Langer, Geoffrey Hartman, Shoshana Felman, Dori Laub), and theoretical struggles with representation, meaning, and faith including the memorial, political, and clinical repair work of coming to terms with the past and open future. It took you many years of courage, thinking, listening, and personal working through to offer your testimony as a member
10 Body Animations (or, Lullaby for Fallujah): from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) ORR JACKIE
Abstract: What can live performance become when reinscribed for the page? How does a writing voice (without breath) generate the embodied animations, and invite the intimate architextures, of the timespace of performance? Torn from the “real time” of its never fully real staging, performance struggles to reenact on the page its peculiar obsession: to inhabit the magical, archaic economies of possession and dispossession. Hands empty. Hands full. Empty. Repeat. If trauma often vibrates at the collective edge of live performance, then where does trauma dwell when the performative text is held in your hands, alone? How does trauma’s body transform when
12 Answering the Call: from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) JACKSON DEBRA
Abstract: After years of struggle with their disconnection, in 1999 I found a touchpoint between my activism and academic life.¹ I had been a Crisis Center volunteer for two years when I was introduced to the concept of witnessing trauma at the Feminist Visions of the Future symposium at Purdue University. Feminist philosopher Kelly Oliver’s presentation on witnessing ethics resonated with my experiences of answering crisis calls and advocating on behalf of rape survivors. I was immediately struck by the fact that the central skills of crisis intervention enacted the process of valuing experiential truth over empirical truth and the double
13 Documenting Disaster: from:
Critical Trauma Studies
Author(s) ANOKYE AKUA DUKU
Abstract: In the United States, “trauma,” “disaster,” and “catastrophe” have often been defined as moments that reveal our best imagined communities, that bring us together in spirit and action, events that make us proud of our national belonging. After the bombing of Pearl Harbor and, more recently, after the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, historians, librarians, educators, social scientists, and archivists have been called upon to chronicle the lives of survivors—to capture and record their stories so as to ensure that we have not only the “official” accounts, but the reactions of those impacted beneath the view of political
Book Title: Music, Analysis, Experience-New Perspectives in Musical Semiotics
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Reybrouck Mark
Abstract: Transdisciplinary and intermedial analysis of the experience of music Nowadays musical semiotics no longer ignores the fundamental challenges raised by cognitive sciences, ethology, or linguistics. Creation, action and experience play an increasing role in how we understand music, a sounding structure impinging upon our body, our mind, and the world we live in. Not discarding music as a closed system, an integral experience of music demands a transdisciplinary dialogue with other domains as well. Music, Analysis, Experience brings together contributions by semioticians, performers, and scholars from cognitive sciences, philosophy, and cultural studies, and deals with these fundamental questionings. Transdisciplinary and intermedial approaches to music meet musicologically oriented contributions to classical music, pop music, South American song, opera, narratology, and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt180r0s2
[Part One. Introduction] from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: This part reflects on the nature of music. It broadens its definition as a mere description in terms of a sounding structure by comparing it to language and speech. By stressing their roles in action and performance, both music and language in action establish social bonds that afford listeners and performers the feeling of a genuine and shared experience. The figure of the performer who acts as a mediator between music and audience is a crucial element in understanding the mutual relationship between theoretical approaches to music and its possible, actual performances. Ethnomusicology, popular music studies, new musicology and (post-)semiotics,
Music, Speech and Meaning in Interaction from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Cross Ian
Abstract: Music and language seem, in our western conceptions, distinct spheres of human activity. Each has features that the other does not: language can refer, and is of paramount importance in our transactions with each other; music lacks any referential exactness and seem limited to the domain of affect, having powers to elicit emotions and their concomitant personal memories and meanings to a degree to which language, outwith the domain of poetry, rarely aspires. But seen, heard and understood from the perspective of cultures other than our own, the distinctness of music and language blurs. Music, for us primarily an aesthetic
Performativity Through(out) Media: from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Corbella Maurizio
Abstract: In this paper I will focus on performance analysis in popular music from the standpoint of intermediality. Furthermore, I will trace some methodological trajectories that, to be truly tested, should be substantiated by a wide selection of case studies. Since there is no room to extensively concentrate on case studies, this contribution should be considered as a methodological introduction to upcoming new chapters. I claim that the study of how ideas of performativity are translated throughout the web of media in the process of the production, circulation and consumption of a musical artifact can contribute to point out common traits
Semiotic Narrativization Processes from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Marty Nicolas
Abstract: This point of view can prove somewhat fruitful when applied to the study of acousmatic music listening. In fact, it allows for the distinction between a narrative as a recountal of events and narrativity as the quality of anything
that might be made into a narrative.
Where to Draw the Line? from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Wierød Lea Maria Lucas
Abstract: Musicology has always been puzzled with semantic questions: does music have meaning? The difficulty lies in music’s inability to function referentially. One might say that literature suffers from the opposite problem: verbal texts contain a centrifugal tendency to direct the recipient’s attention away from their artwork character (form) in favor of their referential message (content) (Kyndrup, 2011, p. 87). However, the specific case of poetry (as opposed to prose) often displays a certain quality that maneuvers attention toward the form of the message itself; a move notably termed
the poetic functionby Jakobson (1987, p. 69). This can be understood
The Ability of Tonality Recognition as One of Human-Specific Adaptations from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Podlipniak Piotr
Abstract: Tonality is understood by musicologists and musicians in many different, often mutually exclusive senses. Sometimes it is regarded as a distinctive characteristic of solely Western music (e.g. Dahlhaus, 1988), but sometimes this understanding is applied to the features of non-Western music too (e.g. Krumhansl, 1990). Even as a term restricted to the features of Western music it is assigned a variety of meanings such as an aspect of melodic relations (Thomson, 1999) or an exclusive trait of harmonic organization (Lowinsky, 1990). Also in the psychological sense,
tonalityis defined by scholars both as the hierarchical arrangements of pitch phenomena in
The Death of Klinghoffer: from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Nellestijn Maarten
Abstract: The opera
The Death of Klinghoffer, by composer John Adams, librettist Alice Goodman, and director Peter Sellars, from the moment of its US première in 1991 in the Brooklyn Academy of Music on, has led to an intensive debate in both the newspapers and the scholarly domain. Central to these debates are its supposed merits and shortcomings regarding its representation of sensitive political issues. This precariousness was heightened after 9/11, shortly after which a performance of the two opening choruses was canceled in an act of self-censorship at the hand of the Boston Symphony Orchestra. It is not unthinkable that
“What Kind of Genre Do You Think We Are?” from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Author(s) Marino Gabriele
Abstract: While single genre histories have been quite explored (e.g., Charlton, 1994; Borthwick & Moy, 2004; F. Fabbri, 2008), the notion of
musical genreis not very much studied in itself, as a theoretical entity (cf. F. Fabbri, 1982, 2012; Hamm, 1994; Moore, 2001; Marx, 2008). This is not that surprising, as it is a crucial notion (possibly, the highest level of abstraction we can deal with as we talk about music), but, at the same time, a very ambiguous one.¹
[Part Five. Introduction] from:
Music, Analysis, Experience
Abstract: The interaction between analysis and extramusical interpretation brings together five contributions by Pawłowska, Martinelli, Liddle, Hatten, and Thumpston, which explore aspects of musical experience and interpretation by transcending a mere acoustic description of the sound. They all combine theoretical groundings with musical analyses, proposing a type of hermeneutics that relies on the concepts of musical topic, musical allusions and anthropomorphic conceptions of music in terms of musical agency and narrativity.
Book Title: Mestizaje and Globalization-Transformations of Identity and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): YOUNG PHILIP D.
Abstract: The Spanish word
mestizajedoes not easily translate into English. Its meaning and significance have been debated for centuries since colonization by European powers began. Its simplest definition is "mixing." As long as the term has been employed, norms and ideas about racial and cultural relations in the Americas have been imagined, imposed, questioned, rejected, and given new meaning.Mestizaje and Globalizationpresents perspectives on the underlying transformation of identity and power associated with the term during times of great change in the Americas. The volume offers a comprehensive and empirically diverse collection of insights concerning mestizaje's complex relationship with indigeneity, the politics of ethnic identity, transnational social movements, the aesthetic of cultural production, development policies, and capitalist globalization, with particular attention to cases in Latin America and the United States.Beyond the narrow and often inadequate meaning of mestizaje as biological and racial mixing, the concept deserves an innovative theoretical consideration due to its multidimensional, multifaceted character and its resilience as an ideological construct. The contributors argue that historical analyses of mestizaje do not sufficiently understand contemporary ways that racism, ethnic discrimination, and social injustice intermingle with current discourse and practice of cultural recognition and multiculturalism in the Americas.Mestizaje and Globalizationcontributes to an emerging multidisciplinary effort to explore how identities are imposed, negotiated, and reconstructed. The chapter authors clearly set forth the issues and obstacles that Indigenous peoples and subjugated minorities face, as well as the strategies they have employed to gain empowerment in the face of globalization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gxvs
CHAPTER TWO Mestizaje in Colonial Mexican Art from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WICKSTROM STEFANIE
Abstract: Addressing ambivalence in established categories of colonial art in Mexico, this chapter proposes a “mestizo” category to characterize works of visual art elaborated during the Viceroyalty of New Spain, mainly in the sixteenth century. Those works of interest here are devotional paintings, sculptures, and the doors and façades of a number of architectural complexes, which integrate aesthetic and iconographic elements common to Western European art and pre-Columbian art of Mesoamerica. I address the connection between
mestizajeand culture in art, although mestizaje in Mexico often refers to race.
CHAPTER FOUR Born Indigenous, Growing Up Mestizos: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) ARREDONDO MARIELLA I.
Abstract: The city of Arequipa, Peru’s second largest, has experienced rapid growth due to migration from surrounding rural highland areas. In the past thirty years, Arequipa has seen its population increase by over four hundred thousand inhabitants. Recent population shifts are changing the perception long-time Arequipeños have of their city. Throughout Peru’s republican history, the city has long been represented, from within and without, as a place of diverse racial and ethnic mixing, and it has been characterized as possessing a strong regionalist and unique mestizo culture. Mestizo refers to racial/ethnic/cultural mixing as a category of identity which can refer both
CHAPTER FIVE Questioning the Nation: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) VIEIRA PAULO ALBERTO DOS SANTOS
Abstract: Affirmative action policies have existed in Brazil for some time. Between the 1940s and 1980s, Brazilian society tolerated policies of this nature, including a quota system, without major criticism. National legislation promulgated affirmative action policies which extended to the labor market and public universities.¹ From this perspective, there is nothing new in the use of mechanisms that promote equality. However, the situation changed when these policies were specifically extended to the black population. Since its implementation in 2002 in the public universities of Rio de Janeiro state, the system of quotas for black students has been heavily criticized vis-à-vis the
CHAPTER TWELVE Politicizing Ethnicity: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) WICKSTROM STEFANIE
Abstract: The theme of the emergence of ethnicity in Latin America and its crystallization into organized pluriethnic platforms that empower political actors at the national and international levels has been gaining prominence in the social sciences in recent decades. Without doubt spurred by the visibility that Indigenous movements have achieved in settings such as southeastern Mexico, post-war Guatemala, and Ecuador during the Indigenous “uprisings” of the 1990s, and with the ascendency of Evo Morales to the presidency of Bolivia, the research agendas of anthropologists, sociologists, and political scientists have focused attention on trying to explain the “resurgence” of the “Indian question.”
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Beyond Mestizaje: from:
Mestizaje and Globalization
Author(s) STOLLE-MCALLISTER JOHN
Abstract: On June 4, 1990, the majority white-mestizo residents of Quito found the highways leading to their city blocked and the central areas of the historic district occupied by Indigenous activists. What most surprised many Quiteños was not so much Indigenous demands for effective land reform and redress of a series of legal issues, but rather that they
stillexisted at all. Despite the fact that some estimates put the Indigenous population as high as three million out of a total population of twelve million, for many Ecuadorians, Indigenous peoples remained invisible or folkloric relics of the past. Over the next
Book Title: Religion Without Redemption-Social Contradictions and Awakened Dreams in Latin America
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Löwy Michael
Abstract: The world’s eyes are on Latin America as a place of radical political inspiration and as an alternative to the neoliberal model. Each country in the region deals differently in its method of government, yet there are common cultural themes that tie the continent’s trajectory together. Religion without Redemption looks at the sociology of religion, political philosophy and the history of ideas of the continent, in an attempt to show how Western understanding fails to come close to a correct analysis of how and why political and economic characteristics work as they do. Luis Martínez Andrade focuses on how the centrality of religion for the people of Latin America has influenced how they interact with the changes in the modern economic system. Capitalism, for example, has taken on religious characteristics: it has sacred places of worship (the shopping mall) as well as its own prophets. Martínez Andrade discusses how this form of ‘cultural religion’ accompanies many aspects of life in a contradictory manner: not only does it fulfil the role of legitimating oppression, it also can be a powerful source of rebellion, unveiling thus a subversive side to the status quo. Religion Without Redemption advances the ideas of liberation theory into the 21st century, and challenges the provincialism to which many Latin American thinkers are usually consigned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183gzrq
Foreword from:
Religion Without Redemption
Author(s) Löwy Michael
Abstract: Luis Martínez Andrade is a brilliant young Mexican scholar, whose writings, published in Spanish, Portuguese, Polish, English and French, are beginning to attract world-wide attention. His essay on shopping malls, included in this book, received first prize for the 2009 international competition Thinking Against the Current, organised by the Cuban Book Institute. This volume is a collection of essays, on very different topics; however, in spite of the diversity, it holds remarkable unity and coherence, given by his theoretical/political approach: a critical Marxist viewpoint, from an emancipatory – that is, anti-capitalist – Latin American perspective. The multiplicity of his intellectual sources in
2 Victorians, Germans and a Frenchman from:
A History of Anthropology
Abstract: Between the Napoleonic Wars (1792–1815) and the First World War (1914–18), we see the rise of modern Europe – and of the modern world. This was, above all, the age of the Industrial Revolution. In the 1700s, profound transformations had taken place in agriculture and manufacturing, particularly in Britain. Steam power and spinning machines had become widespread, and a growing class of landless peasants and urban labourers began to make themselves heard. But greater changes were ahead. In the 1830s, the first major railways were built; a decade later, steamships crossed the Atlantic on a regular basis; in
6 The Power of Symbols from:
A History of Anthropology
Abstract: In the first decades of the twentieth century, the younger generation of anthropologists carefully distanced themselves from the search for historical origins that was characteristic of the nineteenth century. They sought an anthropology based on synchronous analysis and meticulous observation. By the 1950s, a new generation was rediscovering change, either as an evolutionary movement (in the United States) or an outcome of individual action (in Britain). All the while, other anthropologists were looking for new ways to study meaning and symbolism.
4 The Social Person from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The press occasionally brings stories about ‘feral children’ who are discovered after allegedly having spent many years in a forest or similar wilderness, isolated from culture and human society. According to such stories – Kipling’s novel about Mowgli,
The Jungle Book, is the most famous one (and one which does not, incidentally, claim authenticity) – these children have been raised by animals, usually monkeys, and are therefore unable to communicate with humans. Normally, ‘feral children’ are said to reveal a pattern of acting similar to animal behaviour; they growl, they are terrified of humans and they lack human language, table
6 Person and Society from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The person is a social product, but society is at the same time created by acting persons. In the previous chapters, this apparent paradox has been illustrated in several ways. It has also been made clear that there will always be some aspects of society which change and some aspects which remain the same, if we look at the entire system over an extended period. Put differently, one might say that different parts of a society change at different speeds. In this chapter, we draw some theoretical lessons from these themes, and also propose a model of the relationship between
9 Gender and Age from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: In all societies, there are differences in power between persons. There is not a single society where all adults have exactly the same influence over every decision, where everyone has exactly the same rights and duties. Social differentiation and inequality are, in other words, universal phenomena. The European ideas of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries about the ‘original primitive society’, where all humans supposedly had the same rank and were political equals, was completely devastated when the first professional ethnographers returned from the field. Even among very small groups, and even among peoples with very simple technology, differences in rank
10 Caste and Class from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Like gender and age, caste in the Indian subcontinent refers to ostensibly inborn, ascribed characteristics. In theory, changing your caste membership is as difficult as changing your gender.
12 Exchange and Consumption from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: Just as the anthropological study of politics is markedly different from the discipline of political science, economic anthropology distinguishes itself in important ways from the economic sciences. Anthropologists have always – at least since Boas and Malinowski – wished to call attention to the ways in which the economy is an integrated part of a social and cultural totality, and to reveal that economic systems and actions can only be fully understood if we look into their interrelationships with other aspects of culture and society. Just as politics ought to be seen as part of a wider system which includes
14 Religion and Ritual from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: In a study of the Basseri pastoralists of southern Iran, Barth (1961) expresses some surprise regarding their lack of religious interest (they describe themselves as ‘slack Muslims’). His surprise is caused by the fact that religion seems to loom large in the lives of most of the peoples described in classic anthropological studies. This may be a major reason why religion has always been a central field of inquiry in anthropology, even if, as Evans-Pritchard (1962) once pointed out, social scientists have themselves often been indifferent or even hostile to religion.
20 Public Anthropology from:
Small Places, Large Issues
Abstract: The common denominator of these practices is the conviction
Book Title: Border Watch-Cultures of Immigration, Detention and Control
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: Questions over immigration and asylum face almost all Western countries. Should only economically useful immigrants be allowed? What should be done with unwanted or 'illegal' immigrants? In this bold and original intervention, Alexandra Hall shows that immigration detention centres offer a window onto society's broader attitudes towards immigrants. Despite periodic media scandals, remarkably little has been written about the everyday workings of the grassroots immigration system, or about the people charged with enacting immigration policy at local levels. Detention, particularly, is a hidden side of border politics, despite its growing international importance as a tool of control and security. This book fills the gap admirably, analysing the everyday encounters between officers and immigrants in detention to explore broad social trends and theoretical concerns. This highly topical book provides rare insights into the treatment of the 'other' and will be essential for policy makers and students studying anthropology and sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p2n9
1 Introduction: from:
Border Watch
Abstract: Locksdon immigration removal centre accommodates men who have been detained under UK immigration law. The centre is a cluster of buildings set behind an imposing perimeter wall topped with razor wire. For Locksdon officers, staff and visitors, entry to the establishment is through a small door in the wall that leads into the gate area. For people who find themselves detained at Locksdon, entry is in the back of an escort contractor’s van, often at the end of a long and exhausting journey. Inside the centre walls, detainees getting out of the escort van, like staff coming through the gate
5 Drawing the Line: from:
Border Watch
Abstract: The Locksdon alarm bell could sound at any moment of the day or night. Its loud ringing indicated a crisis in the regime: a detainee or staff member in danger, a medical emergency, or a fire. Alarm buzzers were positioned around the establishment so that officers or detainees could call for help from every zone. For officers, the alarm bell signalled an emergency where life itself could be at stake. When it rang, the establishment appeared to freeze for a second before bursting into action. Available officers would drop what they were doing and run to the illuminated plan near
7 Conclusion from:
Border Watch
Abstract: On 8 April 2009, news broke that the UK police and security agencies had foiled a major planned terrorist bomb plot and had arrested twelve men in Manchester under the UK Terrorism Act 2000. The men, all but one of them Pakistani, had been under surveillance since their arrival in Britain on student visas. One of the arrested men was released shortly after, but the remaining eleven men were held for two weeks under the Terrorism Act as the police investigated the plot and the men’s alleged terrorist activities. By 22 April, however, Operation Pathway was causing controversy when it
Book Title: Anthropology's World-Life in a Twenty-first-century Discipline
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Hannerz Ulf
Abstract: In this masterly, state of the art work, Ulf Hannerz maps the contemporary social world of anthropologists and its relation to the wider world in which they carry out their work. Raising fundamental questions such as 'What is anthropology really about?', 'How does the public understand, or misunderstand, anthropology?' and 'What and where do anthropologists study now, and for whom do they write?' Hannerz invites anthropologists to think again about where their discipline is going. Full of insights and practical advice from Hannerz's long experience at the top of the discipline, this book is essential for all anthropologists who want their craft to survive and develop in a volatile world, and contribute to new understandings of its ever-changing diversity and interconnections.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p30z
1 Introduction: from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: Anthropology’s World, as in the title of this book, can mean at least two things. On the one hand it is anthropology as a social world in itself—the community of a discipline, with its internal social relationships, its ideas and practices. On the other hand, anthropology’s world is the wider outside world to which the discipline must relate in various ways. For anthropology, which more than any other discipline may have a constant ambition to be global in its scope, this involves humanity everywhere, and the attempt to understand its variety of ways of life and thought and its
3 Diversity Is Our Business from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: Almost since the beginnings of anthropology as an organized endeavor, its practitioners—some of them at least—seem to have had a morbid tendency to dwell on the likelihood of its impending demise. In
Argonauts of the Western Pacific(1922), perhaps the earliest field-based ethnography still reasonably widely read, Bronislaw Malinowski started his foreword by proposing that his discipline was “in the sadly ludicrous, not to say tragic, position, that at the very moment when it begins to put its workshop in order, to forge its proper tools, to start ready for work on its appointed task, the material of
7 Before and After: from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: But what actually happens may not be entirely the result of
8 And Next, Briefly: from:
Anthropology's World
Abstract: Again, my own dwelling in anthropology’s world has extended over close to 50 years, since the early 1960s. Given that an active life of learning and practicing in a scholarly field may extend from someone’s early twenties to the age of retirement (whatever that may turn out to be), and possibly beyond, I would hope that some of you who have read this book
1 RESEARCHING ‘WHITENESS’: from:
White Identities
Abstract: This book is an exploration of sociological and psycho-social theories of the construction of whiteness vis-à-vis perceptions and imaginings of otherness. It has three main aims. First, to introduce the reader to the history and theoretical unfolding of contemporary studies of whiteness in North America and Europe. Second, to explore the structural facilitating factors of these constructions, through such institutions as the state and the media. Finally, the book synthesises a psycho-social perspective to look at the underlying mechanisms which fuel social exclusion and inclusion in society. Theory is never separated from practice and the book makes full use of
6 PSYCHO-SOCIAL INTERPRETATIONS OF CULTURAL IDENTITY: from:
White Identities
Abstract: The social construction of white identity, or indeed identities in general, can offer us a real insight into how we perceive the self and others. In this chapter we argue that a psycho-social dimension goes beyond traditional analysis and allows us to understand the emotional, affective and visceral content of identity construction. Drawing on psychoanalytic ideas and concepts, we unravel the psychological dynamics involved in the construction of the white ‘we’ in relation to the otherness of the Other. Cultural identities are marked by a number of factors – ‘race’, ethnicity, gender and class to name but a few – yet the
Introduction from:
Blaming the Victim
Abstract: Back in the early twentieth century, one of America’s finest journalists and authors, Upton Sinclair, wrote
The Brass Check, one of the first comprehensive studies about journalism practices and media ownership. InThe Brass Check, Sinclair warned that the United States had ‘a class-owned press, representing class interests, protecting class-interests with entire unscrupulousness, and having no conception of the meaning of public welfare’ (1919: 318). Others such as Hamilton Holt saw journalists as ‘tools or vassals of the rich men behind the scenes’ (1909: 4). In both cases, it was perhaps a harsh assessment of the overall state of the
Book Title: Fredrik Barth-An Intellectual Biography
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Garsten Christina
Abstract: Fredrik Barth is one of the towering figures of twentieth-century anthropology. This intellectual history traces the development of Barth’s ideas and explores the substance of his contributions. In an accessible style, Thomas Eriksen’s biographical study reveals the magic of ethnography to professional anthropologists and non-practitioners alike. Exploring his six decade career, it follows Barth from early ecological studies in Pakistan, to political studies in Iran, to groundbreaking fieldwork in Norway, New Guinea, Bali and Bhutan. Eriksen argues that Barth's voracious appetite for fieldwork holds the key to understanding his remarkable intellectual development and the insights it produced. The book raises many of the same questions that emerge from Barth's own work - of unity and diversity, of culture and relativism, of art and science. Thomas Eriksen is himself a major contributor to the study of anthropology, as well as a distinguished educator, and is therefore ideally placed to introduce the life and work of Fredrik Barth. This will surely be the definitive book on its subject for many years to come.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p5d4
7 Baktaman Vibrations from:
Fredrik Barth
Abstract: He needed to expose himself to something new. Barth has rarely mentioned wanderlust as a motivating factor in his professional life, but that must be because he takes it for granted. For it is difficult to imagine that he would have exposed himself to the
10 Cultural Complexity from:
Fredrik Barth
Abstract: The
waliwas attracted to the idea, but he made it a condition that Barth should write the book. This was naturally a great honour and a genuine act of trust, and in practice it was impossible to refuse the offer, even if the material from Sohar
11 The Guru and the Conjurer from:
Fredrik Barth
Abstract: Bali was not an obvious next stop in Barth’s life as an ethnographer. While he would have liked to go to Vanuatu, Bali had been Wikan’s preference. One reason for Barth’s initial doubt was the fact that Bali had been studied by good anthropologists previously. Margaret Mead and Gregory Bateson had been there in the 1940s, Clifford Geertz in the 1960s. The British anthropologist Mark Hobart was about to devote a lifetime of study to Bali. And there were others. Barth sensed that others had already been there and taken the prime cuts.
Book Title: Mexico in Verse-A History of Music, Rhyme, and Power
Publisher: University of Arizona Press
Author(s): BEEZLEY WILLIAM H.
Abstract: The history of Mexico is spoken in the voice of ordinary people. In rhymed verse and mariachi song, in letters of romance and whispered words in the cantina, the heart and soul of a nation is revealed in all its intimacy and authenticity.
Mexico in Verse, edited by Stephen Neufeld and Michael Matthews, examines Mexican history through its poetry and music, the spoken and the written word.Focusing on modern Mexico, from 1840 to the 1980s, this volume examines the cultural venues in which people articulated their understanding of the social, political, and economic change they witnessed taking place during times of tremendous upheaval, such as the Mexican-American War, the Porfiriato, and the Mexican Revolution. The words of diverse peoples-people of the street, of the field, of the cantinas-reveal the development of the modern nation. Neufeld and Matthews have chosen sources so far unexplored by Mexicanist scholars in order to investigate the ways that individuals interpreted-whether resisting or reinforcing-official narratives about formative historical moments.The contributors offer new research that reveals how different social groups interpreted and understood the Mexican experience. The collected essays cover a wide range of topics: military life, railroad accidents, religious upheaval, children's literature, alcohol consumption, and the 1985 earthquake. Each chapter provides a translated song or poem that encourages readers to participate in the interpretive practice of historical research and cultural scholarship. In this regard,Mexico in Verseserves both as a volume of collected essays and as a classroom-ready primary document reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183p8n6
CHAPTER SIX El Niño Proletario: from:
Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Albarrán Elena Jackson
Abstract: With this stark imagery, radical poet Jesús Sansón Flores closed the introductory remarks to his volume
El niño proletario: poemas clasistas(The Proletarian Child: Classist Poems). A young, self-designated “revolutionary poet” from the state of Michoacán, Sansón Flores had published widely since the 1920s on social and political issues, garnering a reputation as an ardent defender of the oppressed classes. A book of children’s poetry hardly stood to launch him into international literary fame. Little more than a cardboard-bound pamphlet of fifteen simple didactic verses for children, this collection nevertheless captured the essence of Sansón Flores’s Marxist social critique at
CHAPTER SEVEN “That Mariachi Band and That Tequila”: from:
Mexico in Verse
Author(s) Toxqui Áurea
Abstract: From the late 1930s to the 1950s, Mexican cinema experienced its greatest era, known as the Golden Age. Many factors made possible the development of a truly national cinema at the time. For experts focusing on economics and politics, World War II was a catalyst. For those highlighting cultural and social reasons, the people involved in the movie industry were responsible for this blossoming. However, for the common Mexican and Latin American aficionado, the music, songs, and performers were the key element of the films produced. Many melodramas and comedy movies used popular music to emphasize their drama and romance,
Conclusion from:
Mexico in Verse
Abstract: For centuries scholars took this work more or less at face value. Here, they asserted, was lyrical proof of colonial optimism, pride, and potential. Contemporaries knew better. Close interpretations of the political and social context of the time now offer us a different reading from the tradition of Balbuena as lauding greatness. The tract, it seems, reflected
Book Title: Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality- Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: In this follow up to their widely read earlier volume, The Trouble with Community, Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport ask: 'Do notions of community remain central to our sense of who we are, in the dislocating context of globalization, or can we see beyond community closures to a human whole?' This volume explores the variable nature of contemporary sociality. It focuses on the ethical, organizational and emotional claims and opportunities sought or fashioned for mobilizing and evading social collectivities in a world of mobile subjects. Here is an examination of the tensions and interactions between everyday forms of fluid fellowship, culturally normative claims to identity, and opportunities for realizing a universal humanity. The book offers a new perspective on human commonality through a dialogue between two eminent anthropologists who come from distinct, but complementary positions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183pd2b
Prologue: from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: In
The Trouble with Community: Anthropological Reflections on Collectivity, Movement and Identity(2002), Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport entered into a dialogue that concerned the ideology, the practice and the conceptualization of community at the millennial turn. ‘The trouble with community’ concerned the tension between attempts to fix social and political relations in communal frames and the drives toward individuation and fragmentation that regularly undid these efforts but that also could be constrained by them. This volume assumes the same dialogic form and revisits the themes of the first volume.Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonalitycontinues Amit’s
4 Mobility and Cosmopolitanism: from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: The recent resurgence of interest in cosmopolitanism has been characterized by a proliferation of overlapping definitions of this concept. Thus, while concluding that cosmopolitanism is still an imprecise concept that refers to a great variety of ‘often unfinished projects’, Ulf Hannerz nonetheless notes that it ‘has to do with a sense of the world as one’ (2007: 83–84). Pnina Werbner similarly invokes the Greek roots of the term as a ‘citizen of the world’ to argue that ‘at its most basic, cosmopolitanism is about reaching out across cultural differences through dialogue, aesthetic enjoyment, and respect; of living together with
5 The Space of Cosmopolitanism and the Cosmopolitan Subject from:
Community, Cosmopolitanism and the Problem of Human Commonality
Abstract: The human condition, according to Georg Simmel (1971), could be truly apprehended only by taking account of a certain ‘dialectical circuitry’ which underlay experience and gave human life a sense of passage and progress. The characteristic human experience concerned ‘co-present dualisms’: public and private, rule and practice, antagonism and solidarity, freedom and constraint, rebelliousness and compliance, creativeness and structure. Here were paired phenomena one element of which presupposed the second element which yet, in turn, presupposed the first; one element influenced the second element which yet, in turn, influenced the first. Human experience oscillated and flowed between one and the
1 Catholicism and French Society: from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: “The Nation,” says Jacques Maritain, “is one of the most important, perhaps the most complex and complete community engendered by civilized life.”² For certain purposes a modern nation, this lofty example of human development, can usefully be considered as one single entity. But often national activities can best be understood if some of the constituent elements of the nation are examined first. This is particularly true in the case of France, where the fabric of historical evolution is rich with the multicolored threads of divergent groups and ideologies.
2 Historical Sketch: from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: In France, at least among a certain educated elite, the legacy of the past largely determines present actions. For example, today’s quarrels between
laïquesandcléricauxover the school question cannot be fully understood without referring to the events of the early 1900’s.¹ Thus, without pretending to give a complete panorama of Catholicism in French history, this historical sketch will provide some of the background necessary for unlocking the mysteries of present-day Catholic behavior.
3 The Ecclesiastical Nucleus from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Because this cosmological image must be considered in a political sense, it is greatly complicated and thereby loses much of its orderliness. In the first place, the ecclesiastical nucleus of French Catholicism has no single, unified political behavior pattern. Secondly, political activity seems to increase as one moves
5 Catholic Social Action Organizations from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: In the French Church, always full of subtle shadings, a tacit distinction has arisen between Catholic Action groups, mandated by the Church, and other organizations reflecting Catholic principles. Groups which are mandated exist primarily because of their religious functions. They are integral parts of the Church, instruments of a particular form of evangelization. Their civic and political activities can be limited by the Hierarchy itself. They are always willing to follow, in temporal as in spiritual affairs, the advice of their ecclesiastical counsellors. On the other hand, the organizations outside of Catholic Action, though they might have “Church approval,” exist
7 Organizations of Catholic Inspiration from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Two factors distinguish Catholic inspiration organizations from groups closer to the
9 Concluding Remarks from:
Catholicism and Crisis in Modern France
Abstract: Outside of a narrow range of dogma, Catholics disagree among themselves on practically everything relating to social and temporal life. Yet there are certain social principles which have very widespread acceptance among the vast majority of Catholics in France. Usually most members of the Hierarchy endorse these principles, though they are not considered as Church dogma. In fact, they have become so generally identified with Catholicism that Catholics with different views must usually explain their reasons for going against the crowd.
Book Title: Cities of Affluence and Anger-A Literary Geography of Modern Englishness
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): KALLINEY PETER J.
Abstract: Providing a compact literary history of the twentieth century in England, Cities of Affluence and Anger studies the problematic terms of national identity during England's transition from an imperial power to its integration in the global cultural marketplace. While the countryside had been the dominant symbol of Englishness throughout the previous century, modern literature began to turn more and more to the city to redraw the boundaries of a contemporary cultural polity. The urban class system, paradoxically, still functioned as a marker of wealth, status, and hierarchy throughout this long period of self-examination, but it also became a way to project a common culture and mitigate other forms of difference. Local class politics were transformed in such a way that enabled the English to reframe a highly provisional national unity in the context of imperial disintegration, postcolonial immigration, and, later, globalization.Kalliney plots the decline of the country-house novel through an analysis of Forster's Howards End and Waugh's Brideshead Revisited, each ruthless in its sabotage of the trope of bucolic harmony. The traditionally pastoral focus of English fiction gives way to a high-modernist urban narrative, exemplified by Woolf's Mrs. Dalloway, and, later, to realists such as Osborne and Sillitoe, through whose work Kalliney explores postwar urban expansion and the cultural politics of the welfare state. Offering fresh new readings of Lessing's The Golden Notebook and Rushdie's The Satanic Verses, the author considers the postwar appropriation of domesticity, the emergence of postcolonial literature, and the renovation of travel narratives in the context of globalization. Kalliney suggests that it is largely one city--London--through which national identity has been reframed. How and why this transition came about is a process that Cities of Affluence and Anger depicts with exceptional insight and originality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt183q3bk
6. MAD GOAT IN THE ATTIC: from:
Cities of Affluence and Anger
Abstract: Most academics read
The Satanic Verses(1988) as an extended meditation on cultural hybridity. As Gayatri Spivak argues, its mode of representation is “citation, reinscription, re-routing the historical,“epitomizing postcoloniality because it systematically dislodges “every metropolitan definition” (104). The novel is predicated on this trope of postcolonial disruption, foregrounding the political and cultural fallout of imperial contraction and the immigration of former colonial subjects to the metropole. InThe Location of Culture,Homi Bhabha famously reads Rushdie’s novel as a testament to “culture’s [inherent]hybridity” and the “indeterminacy of diasporic identity” (38, 225). Its main character, Saladin Chamcha, he says, “stands,
The Economic Situation of the Philippian Christians from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Oakes Peter
Abstract: Texts give us access not only to their author’s message but also, with varying degrees of clarity, to historical evidence on a wide range of subjects: evidence of linguistic usage at the time of the text; evidence of cultural reference points and their significance; evidence of social structures, practices, and norms; and evidence of events and people. In the case of Philippians, we learn some significant points about the community of people to whom Paul is writing. Understanding these people is important in itself, as the present volume argues. It also helps our understanding of what the letter means. Seriously
Collaboration of “Samothrakiasts” and Christians in Philippi from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Verhoef Eduard
Abstract: Within the frame of the overarching theme of this study, I will try to describe the position of the young church among the other religions or cults in Philippi and especially its relation to the cult of Euephenes in the fourth and fifth century CE. I will argue that this relation is based on earlier good contacts.¹
Letter from Prison as Hidden Transcript: from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Standhartinger Angela
Abstract: In recent years, reconstructions of the Christ-community in Philippi have been much improved by research focusing on the letter’s local and sociohistorical context.¹ With the help of archaeological, numismatic, and epigraphic data and studies on the political, cultural, and social impact of Roman imperialism to the provinces of Roman east, we have learned a lot about the local environments of the
Colonia Iulia Augusta Philippensis. But not at least because archaeological and historical data remain ambiguous and open to different interpretations, it still remains difficult to identify those everyday Philippians to whom Paul wrote and their specific socialcultural contexts in
Response from:
The People beside Paul
Author(s) Wire Antoinette Clark
Abstract: Angela Standhartinger’s and Joseph A. Marchal’s essays can be seen as parallel studies in that they focus on a particular, radically disadvantaged group in the society of the time and place of Paul’s Philippian letter, Standhartinger on the imprisoned and Marchal on the enslaved (although Marchal sets out to consider women as well as slaves, it is the enslaved or freed of both genders that get his attention). The parallel between the two chapters extends to the fact that each group is a victim of social structures and practices. They are
imprisoned,enslaved, and should be described that way. What
FIVE The Quest for Destruction from:
The Hidden God
Abstract: Luther and philosophy is a topic that requires careful consideration, since there is a certain discrepancy between Luther’s rhetoric and his actual involvement in philosophical issues. His many more or less uncouth comments on philosophers as sophists, mad, or impious, of reason as a whore, and so forth, should be treated with a grain of salt and ascribed to his image as a barbarian and simple spokesman of the truth from the northern provinces of the Roman Empire. This is an image ascribed to him by his opponents and enemies and exploited in lampoons and caricatures, but it is also
NINE Deus Absconditus from:
The Hidden God
Abstract: On one point Erasmus of Rotterdam and Martin Luther perfectly agree: There are too many myths circulating in society, church, and academia, and too much superstition, ignorance, and mysticism surrounding the notion of God. Malicious tongues would probably comment that things haven’t changed a lot over the five centuries that have passed. For the discussion on the hidden and mysterious god,
deus absconditus,this general estimation of beliefs and superstitions turns out to be significant. Erasmus claims that the very notion of‘deus absconditus’contributes to the confusion and the speculations concerning the nature of God and distracts from the
TEN Topology of the Self in Luther from:
The Hidden God
Abstract: The hidden God is to a certain extent a neglected
toposof modernity, either in the form of a passive forgetfulness or an active exclusion of this topic due to its inconvenient, problematic—indeed, ratherunmodern—connotations. In particular Protestant theology seems to be dominated by a rationalistic tendency up to the Enlightenment, which is strictly opposed to this crucial distinction in Luther’s thought and therefore tends to exclude it from the scope of theological inquiry.¹ The major philosophers are more apt to raise the basic questions concerning the conditions for thought, including the limits of reason and the distinction
Book Title: El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado-una estrategia sustentable de construcción social del territorio, en el contexto de la globalización, a partir del concepto de topofília.
Publisher: Universidad Piloto de Colombia
Author(s): MAX-NEEF MANFRED
Abstract: Esta publicación está dirigida a estudiantes y profesionales de Arquitectura, Diseño, Ingeniería Civil y Administración y Gestión Ambiental, por lo tanto, contempla los elementos necesarios para elaborar un contexto general, el cual se trata a partir de los aspectos básicos sobre los factores climáticos y de la biodiversidad, para luego abordar su papel en las construcciones y particularmente sobre las envolventes arquitectónicas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18d84hj
INTRODUCCIÓN: from:
El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: El
problema centralque aborda este trabajo es el dela pérdida del sentido de lo local que acompaña, frecuentemente, la propia pérdida del sentido de pertenencia y de los nexos de apropiación de los habitantes de las grandes metrópolis(particularmente en los países de América Latina) producto, en gran medida (aunque no de manera exclusiva), del embate homogenizador de la globalización y de sus secuelas de exclusión social, deterioro ambiental, desequilibrio territorial y debilitamiento de las instituciones y de los colectivos sociales; características, todas estas, que se suman a los grandes conflictos socio-espaciales que de manera atávica caracterizan estas
CAPÍTULO II LA CIUDAD ACTUAL EN EL MARCO DE LA GLOBALIZACIÓN: from:
El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: Como señala el
Informe de la Comisión Nacional de Educación, Ciencia y Desarrollode El Salvador en documento editado en junio de 1996, la globalización implica “considerar el mundo como mercado, fuente de insumos y espacio de acción tanto para la producción como para la adquisición y la comercialización de productos”, lo que supone la creación de un mercado mundial (en el que circulen libremente los capitales financiero, comercial y productivo) caracterizado por el aumento del comercio exterior, la libre exportación de capital, el menor uso de materias primas, la desconcentración de los procesos productivos y, especialmente, la multiplicación de
CAPÍTULO VI LOS COMPONENTES DEL PLANTEAMIENTO TOPOFÍLICO: from:
El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: En este sentido, la
participaciónpuede ser vista como un cambio de actitud de los ciudadanos -pero
X. COMENTARIOS FINALES from:
El Desarrollo Territorial Integrado
Abstract: La Globalización es, sin duda, el más grande fenómeno del mundo actual y, por lo mismo, su mayor reto. Las fuertes contradicciones que le son inherentes, particularmente en lo que se refiere al permanente juego de inclusiones y exclusiones que realiza su carácter selectivo y manipulador, hacen necesario entender tanto el origen del mismo y su proceso histórico, como sus presupuestos teóricos y filosóficos, con el fin de construir un marco de pensamiento desde donde abordarla y/o enfrentarla; marco que supone la “capitalización” de la memoria histórico-cultural de los diferentes actores involucrados en sus distintos contextos a fin de establecer
1 Introduction: from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: Few, if any, entire academic fields have attracted more consistently febrile attention than cultural studies. It has always received criticism, invective, vituperation; often angry, often confused and confusing (mis)representations of what it is, what it does, and why it goes about things the ways it does. It has also, of course, had its fair share of celebration, (over)indulgent congratulation and flattery. These two types of reaction entail each other: if cultural studies has often announced itself as being somehow messianic or at least deeply consequential – ‘radical’, ‘revolutionary’, ‘emancipatory’, and so on – then it is surely inevitable that those
6 Two Cheers for Cultural Studies: from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Norris Chris
Abstract: One of my difficulties in answering that question would be the problem I have with certain aspects of the trend toward interdisciplinarity. Of course it’s good that people should talk across disciplines, and that they should question some of the more restrictive practices that go on within disciplines. It’s good that philosophers should talk to sociologists, sociologists to cultural theorists, cultural theorists to historians, historians to economists and legal theorists, etc. It opens up all sorts of interesting and valuable lines of enquiry. But there’s also the risk, I think, that if you push too far towards that breaking down
[Part Five: Introduction] from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Abstract: What is the position of cultural studies? What does the concept of ‘position’ entail or mean, itself; or indeed, how might it, paradoxically, position us, in ways that we cannot see – is our viewpoint positioned by our conception of what
position itselfis, and of whatourposition is? Both John Mowitt and Jeremy Valentine are explicitly attentive to this, and trace many ramifications of the problems and possibilities of ‘position’, an attentiveness that leads to highly circumspect analyses of the agency/structure conundrum, or that is, to the relationship between ‘action’ and what makes it possible. Steven Connor, too,
12 The Subject Position of Cultural Studies: from:
Interrogating Cultural Studies
Author(s) Valentine Jeremy
Abstract: So to begin with the first question, I must confess that I barely manage to position myself at all with respect to anything. My overwhelming experience is one of being positioned. So I am not very comfortable with my existence in a culture that can be characterised by the prevalence
3 Sexual and Textual Excess: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Like the man who wrote them, the novels, stories and poems of Pierre Louӱs (1870–1925) overflow with an irrepressible and childlike
joie de vivreand, in the case of both man and work, the dominant trait is excess. The extreme emotions of a romantic adolescence, the practical jokes of a young poet and, later, an extravagant self-indulgence, whether in the consumption of cigarettes or in the socially less acceptable tastes of the libertine, all of these excesses in Louӱs’s life and character are reflected in his writing, both in the critically acclaimed published canon and in the erotic works
7 Progressive Slidings of Identity: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: The
nouveau romanor New Novel is a term coined in the 1950s by Alain Robbe-Grillet himself to denote his own work and that of a number of other writers, principally Nathalie Sarraute, Claude Simon, Michel Butor, Robert Pinget, Samuel Beckett and, initially at least, Marguerite Duras, all of whom were published by Les Éditions de Minuit, and who shared a rejection of the traditional novel’s approach to plot, characterisation and form, and so were considered experimental and avant-garde. As John de St. Jorre says of William Burroughs’sNaked Lunch, however, most New Novels remain difficult and at times inaccessible
8 Homotextuality: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: Born in 1945, Tony Duvert is the author of a dozen works of fiction, all of them homoerotic, and of two polemical essays. Although Duvert has never achieved the public acclaim of a Duras or the notoriety of an Arsan, the undoubted literary merit of much of his writing has not gone entirely unrecognised: his fifth novel,
Paysage de fantaisie, won the Prix Médicis, a literary prize that rewards innovation, in 1973. Duvert now lives in seclusion in a small, provincial French town and has had no direct contact with his publisher, Éditions de Minuit, for many years. His last
9 ‘Enfin, une érotique féminine?’: from:
Forbidden Fictions
Abstract: In its thematic preoccupations with masturbatory fantasy and its essentially romantic treatment of sexual attraction, Élisabeth Barillé’s
Corps de jeune fille, which was published in France in 1986 and in England asBody of a Girlin 1989, is an excellent example of contemporary erotic writing by women. Barillé displays a remarkable maturity of style, her narrative voice fizzing with ironic wit and more than a touch of self-mockery. Her first fictional publication (the author is also a journalist) is not so much a novel as a series of vignettes about sex written from a young woman’s point of view
Book Title: Ireland Beyond Boundaries-Mapping Irish Studies in the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): WHELAN YVONNE
Abstract: Ireland Beyond Boundaries provides an authoritative, up-to-date account of the development of Irish Studies over the past two decades. The fourteen contributors examine some of the key debates that have underpinned recent scholarship and analyse critical concerns that have shaped the subject’s remarkable growth. The book is divided into two parts. Part One traces the institutional fortunes of Irish Studies in Ireland, the USA, Canada, Australia and Britain. Part Two features in-depth critical accounts of specific trends and themes within Irish historiography, literary criticism, religion, migration, music, cultural geography, sport and media culture. Throughout the collection there is a recurring engagement with the role of interdisciplinary approaches within Irish Studies and its impact on teaching and research. Combining synoptic overviews with informed analyses, Ireland Beyond Boundaries is an essential text for all those working in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs8kn
2 Reconfiguring Irish Studies in Canada: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Kenneally Michael
Abstract: Since its emergence as an academic subject in the 1960s, Irish Studies in Canada has evinced some of the tendencies characteristic of the discipline in general, while also moving in directions that can offer instructive critical models for further development both at home and abroad. Despite Canada’s relatively small academic population, the accomplishments of the founding generation of Irish Studies scholars over the past four decades constitute an impressive body of work. However specific their original areas of research, many of these scholars embraced and contributed to the international trend to expand both the objects of their scrutiny and the
5 Teaching Irish Studies in Ireland: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Brown Michael
Abstract: The events of 28 July 2005 alter our perspective. If we are to believe the statements of intent, and all concerned pass this high test of character, the announcement by the Irish Republican Army that it will decommission its arms marks an end of the Troubles and, albeit less significantly, a defining moment in the Irish culture wars of the last 40 years. Perhaps this sanguine vision is deceptive and the protracted peace process will persist in being characterised by sporadic slides into crisis. If so, then this vision of an end to the culture wars will also deceive; but
11 Placing Geography in Irish Studies: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Harte Liam
Abstract: The cultural turn of the late 1980s had great ramifications for the practice of social and cultural geography. Freshly invigorated by postmodern and poststructuralist ideas, geographers set about challenging traditional approaches and methodologies within the discipline and the neglect of geographical perspectives in other fields. The critical human geography that began to take shape announced the interpretive significance of space and the arrival of ‘a new animating polemic on the theoretical and political agenda, one which rings with significantly different ways of seeing time and space together, the interplay of history and geography’ (Soja, 1989: 11). As space became a
12 Listening to the Future: from:
Ireland Beyond Boundaries
Author(s) Smyth Gerry
Abstract: I think it is fair to say that music has not loomed large in the legend of Irish Studies.¹ When I say ‘Irish Studies’ I don’t mean the long-established and widely dispersed ‘study’ of diverse Irish cultural produce – the consumption, discussion, appreciation and review of Irish culture that, like the poor, has always been with us. I mean, rather, the specialised academic field that began to emerge as a discrete intellectual and institutional concern during the 1970s, and which, as I understand the matter, forms the focus of the present collection. Irish Studies has in fact tended to be
Book Title: Locating Cultural Creativity- Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Liep John
Abstract: The contributors to this volume reexamine the interconnectedness of culture and creativity in an increasingly hybrid world. They argue that while many of the old certainties about high culture and artistic canons may now be disintegrating, culture and creativity themselves are still very much a reflection of social processes involving power and the control of resources. Case studies include youth subcultures in Europe; experimental theatre derived from the Brazilian candomblé dance; the role of memory in mythology among the Pukapukan of Polynesia; the evolution of football and polo in Argentina; gender relations in Algerian raï music; the notion of authenticity in artistic movements in Zanzibar; traditional and modern practices of the Lio in Indonesia; and kula exchange and social movements in the Trobriand Islands in the Pacific.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18fs9q6
3 THE IRON CAGE OF CREATIVITY: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Friedman Jonathan
Abstract: Creativity has become something of a slogan among latter-day Birmingham cultural sociologists and their more seasoned allies, the cultural studies crowd. There has been a clear move from the study of working-class culture to the aesthetics of everyday life. While Birmingham certainly flirted with abstract structural Marxism, their interests lay more in the direction of the concrete, since they, unlike many Marxist sociologists, were trying to gain a purchase on reality in the street, so to speak – although one may have reservations about the nature of their ethnography, which, except for some of the research reports, was explicitly focused
6 THE CONSTRUCTION OF AUTHENTICITY: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Lindner Rolf
Abstract: The traditional dilemma of anthropology as an account of the culturally different is contained in the postulate of authenticity which, explicitly or implicitly, underlies it. In this context the word ‘postulate’ should be taken quite literally: a moral demand is made of the group being investigated, that it keep as far away as possible from worldly influence, whether of an economic, social or cultural nature. Renato Rosaldo (1989) has drawn attention to the fact that for anthropologists, if they adhere to the classic norms, the groups possessing the most ‘culture’ are those that are in themselves coherent and homogeneous, and
8 THE ‘PLAYING’ OF MUSIC IN A STATE OF CRISIS: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Schade-Poulsen Marc
Abstract: Creativity is closely linked to processes of appropriation. Novelties are nothing unless
acceptedandworkedon as social facts. A ‘social contract’ has to be established between the creators and their surroundings in order to generate a
10 ESCAPING CULTURES: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Parkin David
Abstract: I take the paradox to be globally widespread. Consumers or, more commonly, spectators of others’ consumerism, see commodities replaced one after another by new ones. Yet, despite being new, each such commodity may sometimes be regarded as representing tradition and as having originated from inside the society rather than having been imported or affected by external influences. For example, local artists and craftsmen may think they know what foreign tourists want, but in fact find that their art works are bought by local people as much as and even more than by outsiders. This unexpected outcome is not always something
11 RECONTEXTUALIZING TRADITION: from:
Locating Cultural Creativity
Author(s) Howell Signe
Abstract: Following independence in 1949, the new nation state of Indonesia faced the formidable task of uniting a population scattered over several thousand islands and consisting of several hundred distinct cultural groupings – each with its own language and cultural practices. The new motto became ‘unity through diversity’ and the national charter emphasized democracy, social justice and the belief in ‘the unique Godhead’. Indonesian law recognizes five monotheistic world religions and has made the adherence to one of these a legal requirement. Moreover, Indonesian (
bahasa Indonesia) was declared the national language, to be employed in schools everywhere and as the language
Book Title: Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Maslov Boris
Abstract: Since the mid-1980s, attempts to think history and literature together have produced much exciting work in the humanities. Indeed, some form of historicism can be said to inform most of the current scholarship in literary studies, including work in poetics, yet much of this scholarship remains undertheorized. Envisioning a revitalized and more expansive historicism, this volume builds on the tradition of Historical Poetics, pioneered by Alexander Veselovsky (1838-1906) and developed in various fruitful directions by the Russian Formalists, Mikhail Bakhtin, and Olga Freidenberg. The volume includes previously untranslated texts of some of the major scholars in this critical tradition, as well as original contributions which place that tradition in dialogue with other thinkers who have approached literature in a globally comparatist and evolutionary-historical spirit. The contributors seek to challenge and complement a historicism that stresses proximate sociopolitical contexts through an engagement with the longue duree of literary forms and institutions. In particular, Historical Poetics aims to uncover deep-historical stratifications and asynchronicities, in which formal solutions may display elective affinities with other, chronologically distant solutions to analogous social and political problems. By recovering the traditional nexus of philology and history, Persistent Forms seeks to reinvigorate poetics as a theoretical discipline that would respond to such critical and intellectual developments as Marxism, New Historicism, the study of world literature, practices of distant reading, and a renewed attention to ritual, oral poetics, and genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr6cs
FOREWORD from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) HAYOT ERIC
Abstract: One day someone will look back at the last few de cades of U.S. literary criticism and remark on the strange trajectory of the category of the “universal.” Beginning with the reaction against structuralism, that person will observe a strong conceptual and rhetorical preference for multiplicity, diversity, and smallness across the major categories of the field. Among the many examples of this trend we can include the antagonism toward “grand narratives,” the postcolonial emphasis on hybridity, the resistance to Marxist models of totality (synonymous, briefly, with totalization) or to masculine models of desire seen in French feminism and queer theory
CHAPTER 4 Metapragmatics, Toposforschung, Marxist Stylistics: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MASLOV BORIS
Abstract: Alexander Veselovsky’s versatile body of work is notably hard to synthesize, and the method as well as the conceptual apparatus he refined over the years, yet never fully explicated, does not lend itself easily to either systematic summary or piecemeal extraction. It is in part for this reason that Veselovsky’s legacy proved of no direct use to the totalizing twentieth-century theories of literature, such as Structuralism of the French or Soviet varieties, or to the more recent transnational literarycritical practice, whose volatile methodological eclecticism favors the propagation of isolated conceptual moves and argumentative schemata. For Veselovsky’s is an approach that
CHAPTER 7 A Remnant Poetics: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) KUNICHIKA MICHAEL
Abstract: One needed to know little about Vshchizh, a settlement located in the southeast of Russia. It was situated on the right bank of the Desna river; the nearest city was Briansk; it was razed by Mongols sometime in the thirteenth century; and not far from it was a complex of kurgans, or burial mounds, which archaeologists had begun excavating in the 1840s.¹ These were some of the few facts recorded in the entry “Vshchizh” in the 1896 Brokgauz-Efron encyclopedia, which designated it an “insignificant settlement.”² Although condemned to insignificance, Vshchizh does possess some value for Russian literary history because two
CHAPTER 9 The Age of Sensibility (1904) from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) VESELOVSKY ALEXANDER
Abstract: From the first third of the eighteenth century, a new style begins to install itself in European literatures. Wherever it was engendered, it was preceded by a corresponding mood
[nastroenie]of the social psyche, a reflection of the recently accomplished social revolution. This is what happened in England, which explains England’s leading role in the ensuing currents of European thought, the influence of its didactic comedy and itscomédie larmoyante,its novelists, whom Diderot and Rousseau indulged in reading. This influence had an uneven impact, depending on how well prepared, in a given society, the soil was to receive the
CHAPTER 10 Against Ornament: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) MARTIN RICHARD P.
Abstract: This essay on historical poetics will comprise two parts: historical and poetic. To put it another way, I will attempt to offer a theoretical examination and then a practical explication, the former dealing with the concept of metaphor as developed and employed by the sadly neglected Soviet-era philologist and theoretician Olga Mikhailovna Freidenberg, the latter centered on the poetry of Pindar. The goal is to see how Freidenberg’s work might still be of relevance and usefulness, not just in relation to more recent theories of metaphor, but also as a heuristic device in the study of archaic Greek poetry, one
CHAPTER 11 Breakfast at Dawn: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) VINITSKY ILYA
Abstract: As the authors of the introduction to this volume observe, one of the goals of Veselovsky’s historical poetics dealt with uncovering “the ways in which literary practices constitute[d] historical experience by perpetuating conceptual, emotional, and behavioral schemata across space and time.”³ In this context, the ill-famed “age of Sensibility” in Russia⁴ presented a special interest for Veselovsky. In his classical book on Vasily Zhukovsky’s life and work, eloquently subtitled
The Poetry of Sentiment and of the “Heart’s Imagination”(1903; published in 1904), the scholar posed an intriguing question of how the Western literary modes of sentimentality were absorbed by a
CHAPTER 12 From the Prehistory of Russian Novel Theory: from:
Persistent Forms: Explorations in Historical Poetics
Author(s) HOLLAND KATE
Abstract: Scholarly work on the subject of Alexander Veselovsky rarely, if ever, deals with the fact that the philologist and folklorist was an exact contemporary of the great Russian novelists Dostoevsky, Turgenev, and Tolstoy, and that most of his philological work was done in the period of the generic hegemony of the Russian novel. At first sight this omission seems understandable; in his own scholarly work Veselovsky was more interested in examining archaic drama and medieval legends than the works of his own contemporaries. Yet like his more internationally renowned successor, Mikhail Bakhtin, Veselovsky used the medium of genre as a
Book Title: Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Levine Nina
Abstract: In late-sixteenth-century London, the commercial theaters undertook a novel experiment, fueling a fashion for plays that trafficked in the contemporary urban scene. But beyond the stage's representing the everyday activities of the expanding metropolis, its unprecedented urban turn introduced a new dimension into theatrical experience, opening up a reflexive space within which an increasingly diverse population might begin to "practice" the city. In this, the London stage began to operate as a medium as well as a model for urban understanding. Practicing the City traces a range of local engagements, onstage and off, in which the city's population came to practice new forms of urban sociability and belonging. With this practice, Levine suggests, city residents became more self-conscious about their place within the expanding metropolis and, in the process, began to experiment in new forms of collective association. Reading an array of materials, from Shakespeare and Middleton to plague bills and French-language manuals, Levine explores urban practices that push against the exclusions of civic tradition and look instead to the more fluid relations playing out in the disruptive encounters of urban plurality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr6ft
4. The Place of the Present: from:
Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage
Abstract: London city comedies catered to the moment and to an increasingly consumerist public—“fit for the times and the termers,” Thomas Middleton quipped to readers of
The Roaring Girl(1611), slyly retailing his own as well as the city’s investments in the contemporary scene.¹ Famous for the notoriety of its title character,The Roaring Girlpushes these investments far beyond those of the other plays in this study. Not only do Middleton and Dekker track the close encounters of London’s population across a vividly drawn cityscape, but they take the novel step of impersonating a recognizable local figure on stage,
Epilogue: from:
Practicing the City: Early Modern London on Stage
Abstract: Ben Jonson’s note “To the Readers,” inserted into the 1631 edition of
The Staple of News, marks a decided intensification of his preoccupation with the reception of his work. Even without this note, the play is overloaded with critical apparatus, including an onstage audience that holds forth after every act in a series of intermeans. Returning to the device inaugurated in his first play with a London setting, Jonson envisions theatrical performance in terms of debate and disagreement. But here, in place of the urbane moderators ofEvery Man Out of His Humor, he presents a quartet of outspoken gossips,
Book Title: The Literatures of the French Pacific-Reconfiguring Hybridity
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): FORSDICK CHARLES
Abstract: Hybridity theory, the creative dissemination and restless to-and-fro of Homi Bhabha’s Third Space or of Stuart Hall’s politics of difference, for example, has opened up understandings of what may be produced in the spaces of cultural contact. This book argues that the particularity of the forms of mixing in the literatures of the French Pacific country of New Caledonia contest and complexify the characterisations of hybrid cultural exchange. From the accounts of European discovery by the first explorers and translations of the stories of oral tradition, to the writings of settler, déporté, convict, indentured labourer and their descendants, and contemporary indigenous (Kanak) literatures, these texts inscribe Oceanian or Pacific difference within and against colonial contexts. In a context of present strategic positioning around a unique postcolonial proposal of common destiny, however, mutual cultural transformation is not unbounded. The local cannot escape coexistence with the global, yet Oceanian literatures maintain and foreground a powerful sense of ancestral origins, of an original engendering. The spiral going forward continually remembers and cycles back distinctively to an enduring core. In their turn, the Pacific stories of unjust deportation or heroic settlement are founded on exile and loss. On the other hand, both the desire for, and fears of, cultural return reflected in such hybrid literary figures as Déwé Gorodé’s graveyard of ancestral canoes and Pierre Gope’s chefferie internally corrupted in response to the solicitations of Western commodity culture, or Claudine Jacques’ lizard of irrational violence, will need to be addressed in any working out of a common destiny for Kanaky-New Caledonia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18kr78q
Introduction from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: Pacific literatures in French are little known. In French scholarship, as in French libraries and bookshops, this region of the world has tended to be tacked on to Asia (a category also referred to as Asia-Pacific) in a concession to what is largely absent or imagined as vast and empty. The colonial fracture of the Pacific region into French-speaking and English-speaking countries has continued into the present with the result that the literatures of the French-speaking Pacific that include the indigenous and settler literatures of New Caledonia, French Polynesia, and the now independent Vanuatu have also been virtually unstudied in
1 Behind the Accounts of First Encounter and the Tales of Oral Tradition: from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The earliest accounts of the ‘discovery’ of New Caledonia were published in Europe in 1777 from journals written by members of James Cook’s expedition and, later, from the French expedition led by Bruny d’Entrecasteaux.¹ The first European to bear witness to contact with the indigenous peoples, Captain James Cook weighed anchor in Balade in September 1774 and remained in that north-east coast location for eight days. Some nineteen years later, d’Entrecasteaux’s ship used Cook’s accounts to navigate its way through the break in the reef into the same harbour, where his party was to spend three weeks. Like the English
2 Writing (In) the Language(s) of the Other: from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The sites of translation from indigenous to European languages, considered in this chapter as further and particular spaces of writing and reading hybridity between cultures, derive from different periods of New Caledonian post-contact history. They also come from different areas of an archipelago that includes the main island of
Grande Terre, the Isle of Pines and Belep, to the south and to the north respectively, and the Loyalty Islands – Maré, Lifou, and Ouvéa. New Caledonian history is distinctive in that the main island’s geography has resulted in the division of the indigenous peoples into separate language groups, from valley
3 Histories of Exile and Home: from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The previous chapters looked at two different kinds of hybrid texts that have resulted from European-Kanak contact: the texts of the European explorers in the eighteenth century and the translations into French of texts of oral tradition in the nineteenth, twentieth, and twenty-first centuries. The present chapter extends the examination of the hybridity of New Caledonian culture(s), their mix of differences and commonalities, by considering the respective approaches to a trope present in the work of every group of writers, from the colonial period to the postcolonial present. This is the theme of exile, or living in-between the lost home,
8 Writing Métissage in New Caledonian Non-Kanak Literatures: from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: In the nineteenth-century novels set in New Caledonia,
métissage, as the process and outcome of racial mixing, was most particularly associated with women characters, and largely characterized by sexual permissiveness and biological degeneration. The earliest written literature in New Caledonia was, for the most part, produced by Metropolitan French people passing through. Louise Michel, considered in Chapters 1 and 2, spent eight years in the country’s penitentiary system, leaving New Caledonia after the general amnesty to rejoin her ailing mother in France. Jacques and Marie Nervat came to the colony a decade later, where they lived from 1898 to 1902.
10 Summing Up from:
The Literatures of the French Pacific
Abstract: The various studies of this book have revealed the presence of multiple and shifting hybridities, at all levels of the work of recovery and reconstruction underway in all communities, if to varying degrees of transculturality. Accounts of first contacts on beaches with savages were shown to be largely a product of European Enlightenment thinking, the circulation of European ships and texts. Translation of the texts of oral tradition was an early locus of production of a hybrid new cultural entity, different nonetheless in degrees of transformation in the publications of the red virgin, the missionary-ethnographer, and the contemporary ethnographer. To
CHAPTER 3 Sources: from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: The volume of material relating to the soldiers’ experience of the Great War is truly astounding. It has grown dramatically in the last few decades and shows little sign of diminishing. Indeed, with the centenary of the outbreak of the war only two years away (at the time of writing), there is every likelihood that there will be a further upsurge, not least from those interested in family history for whom ‘grandfather’s war’ (and increasingly ‘great-grandfather’s war’) remains a matter of central interest. It would be hypocritical to bemoan such a wealth of material but, putting aside the practical problems
CHAPTER 4 At the Front: from:
Memory, Narrative and the Great War
Abstract: Following the outbreak of war Patrick MacGill enlisted in the London Irish Rifles, the 18th battalion of the London Regiment. A young adult in his mid-20s, he brought with him experiences and values that would influence his recollection of wartime experiences. He already had a life narrative that would shape his responses but that in turn would be challenged and changed by the new experiences of being a soldier on active service in France. But what sort of man was he as he entered army life? What values did he espouse? How did he define himself as a man? How
Chapter 2 Eccentric cities and citytexts: from:
EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: Lines linking eccentric cities bend through space and time – stretching between St. Petersburg and Rio de Janeiro by curving through and around a European centre and a Eurocentric history. Until recently, these cities were connected only occasionally by actual contact, more consistently by concentric ripples of modern history. They were linked directly by Portuguese navigators, sailors, soldiers and merchants who headed southeast and southwest to establish Portugal’s portals into Old and New Worlds and to secure its hold on empire, but also sailed northeast with goods and skills that helped build Peter the Great’s naval power and port city, Russia’s
Chapter 5 Hallucinated cities from:
EccentriCities: Writing in the margins of Modernism
Abstract: (Where exactly the clerk who had invited [Akaky Akakievich] lived, unfortunately, we cannot say: our memory is beginning to slip seriously, and all
Introduction from:
South African performance and archives of memory
Abstract: For decades theatre in South Africa had a specific role: to ‘protest’ injustices, to break silences, to provoke debate on issues in spaces that could facilitate discussion, often actually during performances. This theatre was about lived experiences that were often officially denied. As Fugard suggests, play-makers like himself sought ‘to witness as truthfully as [they] could, the nameless and destitute (desperate) of this one little corner of the world’ (1983: 172). This witnessing extended beyond telling one’s own stories, to the dramatisation of those of wider communities. These plays were not about the past; they explored present realities, while rehearsing
1 The Truth and Reconciliation Commission’s reconfiguring of the past: from:
South African performance and archives of memory
Abstract: This chapter begins with the moment of rupture: with the release of Mandela in 1990 and the negotiations for full democracy in South Africa to be achieved by 1994, followed by a period of transition, characterised publicly to a large extent by the Truth and Reconciliation Commission (TRC), which sat from 1994–98. It will look at the role the TRC has played, both as live event and as an archive produced from oral testimonies, in the construction of a ‘new’ South Africa. In analysing the archive, I explore its function, how it has been performed and constructed, the various
2 Dramatising the Truth and Reconciliation Commission: from:
South African performance and archives of memory
Abstract: The end of apartheid brought with it many changes, including changes to the memories with which we engage. The TRC and arts practitioners have played different roles in piecing together fragments of memories: in reconstructing a sense of a shared past and thereby formulating a narrative for the new ‘rainbow nation’, or by challenging the silences in official histories. This chapter focuses on the contributions of the performing arts in these processes.
Book Title: The Trouble with Community-Anthropological Reflections on Movement, Identity and Collectivity
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Mitchell Jon P.
Abstract: 'Community' is one of social science's longest-standing concepts. The assumption, of much social science, has been that it is in communities -- and to communities -- that human individuals, as social and cultural beings, belong. Communities are said to embody that interactive environment from which individuals' identities and senses of self derive, and in which they continue to dwell. The trouble with 'community' is that this is not necessarily so; the personal social networks of individuals' actual experience crosscut collective categories, situations and institutions. Communities can prove unviable or imprisoning; the reality of community life and identity can often be very different from the ideology and the ideal. In this provocative new book, anthropologists Vered Amit and Nigel Rapport draw on their various ethnographic experiences to reappraise the concept and the reality of 'community', in the light of globalization, religious fundamentalism, identity politics, and renascent localisms. How might anthropology better apprehend social identities which are intrinsically plural, transgressive and ironic? What has anthropology to say about the way in which civil society might hope to accommodate the on-going construction and the rightful expression of such migrant identities? Nigel Rapport and Vered Amit give their own answers to these questions before entering into dialogue to assess each other's positions. Nigel Rapport is Professor of Anthropological and Philosophical Studies at the University of St. Andrews. He is author of Transcendent Individual (1997). Vered Amit is an Associate Professor at Concordia University in Montreal. She is the editor of Realizing Community (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnx3
PROLOGUE: from:
The Trouble with Community
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: This book is a dialogue between two anthropologists; it concerns
the conceptualization, the ideology and the practice of community in the contemporary world. All three of these dimensions of community involve a tension between efforts to fix social and political relations in communal frames and the considerable pressures toward individuation and fragmentation which regularly undo these efforts, but may also be constrained by them. The book offers a review and a reassessment of community as a political, legal, theoretical and ethnographic concept within anthropology.
5 INCOMMENSURABILITY: from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: There are at least two potential pitfalls in this project, pitfalls of hoary longevity: the attempt to move from ‘is’ to ‘ought’, from science to morality; and the attempt to move to morality from moralities. At the least, much wisdom would lead one to suspect that an account of a relationship between science and morality which is clearer and firmer than the ambiguous and uneasy one which Gellner finds presently to characterize liberal society would have to take the form of a continuing negotiation of plural and partial compromises rather than anything more singular or statutory. It would be an
6 EDUCATING FOR LIBERAL DEMOCRACY from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: Richard Rorty is under no illusions concerning the revolutionary change in sensibility which procedural justice and substantive irony, as the public traits of a civil society, amounts to. If the shift from religiosity to secularism has proceeded over a number of centuries, is still ongoing and is periodically beset by reactionary counter-reformations, then the shift to postmodern bourgeois liberalism, as a global form of polity, might be equally gradual. For the paradox of ‘getting rid of God and of grammar’ (Nietzsche) while keeping as sacrosanct a method of rationally asserting and adjudicating their (good) riddance – of believing liberal democracy
7 THE IRONIZATION OF LIBERAL DEMOCRACY from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: Nietzsche described a ‘revaluation of all values’ as his formula for humankind’s supreme ‘coming-to-itself’. The cognitive act which he called for was an ironic one; the human quality he was calling upon, and raising into a supreme value itself, was irony.
9 UNIVERSALISM AND RELATIVISM IN THE GLOBAL ECUMENE from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: Ernest Gellner spoke of the ‘well-matured political systems’ of the liberal West (1995b: 9), as we have heard, where efficacious scientific practice and knowledge sat alongside cultural faith and spectacle (however ambiguously). In best effecting the satisfaction of human needs and of liberating humanity from material want, in proceeding towards ‘the goal of human liberation’ as such, it was not only true to say that some choices in human world-view and behaviour were better than others, but also that one choice was pre-eminent. This was the liberal West: the meaning-system which had developed and accommodated itself socio-culturally to the power
10 EXISTENTIAL ANTHROPOLOGY from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: What may be drawn from the Salman Rushdie affair, and from Rushdie’s own words, in the context of this essay so as to take the argument forward? Regarding the partiality of meaning which Rushdie describes, I have written elsewhere about the randomness of the creative process and the freedom or arbitrariness with which the imagination is wont to select those construed items from which meaningful worlds are constituted (2001; also cf. Brodsky, 1988: G2). But Rushdie’s words do not only give on to literary concerns; I would read implications in them which are also
realpolitische, practical and prescriptive.
11 EXISTENTIAL POLITICS from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: If individual consciousness and agency is seen as responsible for creating and maintaining the diversity of cultural worlds, then anthropologically to ‘decolonize’ the individual human subject also entails the anthropologist proclaiming the value of the former as a prerequisite of the latter. It becomes an anthropological duty to explain that individuals make communities and create traditions, likewise to champion those social environments in which such individuality is recognized and respected, and to declaim against those which bury individual worth under a weight of so-called traditional or revelational or institutional knowledge and practice. Anthropology, in other words, becomes, at least in
13 NIGEL RAPPORT RESPONDS TO VERED AMIT from:
The Trouble with Community
Abstract: How is ‘culture’, that abstract explanatory notion of causation and control by which anthropologists have put so much store – that ‘set of control mechanisms ... for the governing of behaviour ... by whose agency the breadth and indeterminateness of [man’s] inherent capacities are reduced to the narrowness and specificity of his actual accomplishments’ (Geertz, 1973: 44–5)–to be properly ‘seen’ or made concrete? In Part I of the book Vered Amit begins by arguing that, as with ‘place’, portrayals of ‘community’ and ‘collectivity’ no longer convince as metaphors. And yet, while having finally given up on the fixity
Book Title: Pierre Bourdieu-A Critical Introduction
Publisher: Pluto Press
Author(s): Reader Keith
Abstract: 'This beautifully written and lucidly argued study is the most persuasive account of Bourdieu's work yet to be published. Lane illuminates much that can puzzle a foreign readership by expertly situating Bourdieu within a French context. At the same time he points to those aspects of Bourdieu's writing which are of particular relevance to contemporary debates on questions of citizenship and globalization. He gives a fascinating account of Bourdieu's astonishingly prescient analyses of the impact of the expansion of higher education, the influence of the mass media, the growth of the culture industries, and the changing nature of political and social elites, not just in France, but in the western world.' Professor Jill Forbes, Queen Mary and Westfield, University of London
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18mvnzm
CHAPTER 1 Peasants into Revolutionaries? from:
Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: The broad details of Pierre Bourdieu’s background and early intellectual career have been well documented, both in existing critical studies and in interviews. He was born in 1930, the son of a postman in a peasant community in the Béarn in the French Pyrenees. Having passed through the
classes préparatoiresat the renowned Lycée Louis-le-Grand in Paris, he entered the elite École normale supérieure to study for anagrégationin philosophy, perhaps the most prestigious academic qualification in France at that time. Bourdieu obtained hisagrégationin 1954 but, frustrated by the abstract tenor of academic philosophy, he abandoned his
CHAPTER 4 Returning to Kabylia from:
Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In a footnote to
Reproduction, Bourdieu stated that his ‘theory of pedagogic action’ was ‘grounded in a theory of the relations between objective structures, the habitus and practice’, which would ‘be set out more fully in a forthcoming book’ (1970, p. 9n.1 [p. xiii n.1]). The book in question was published two years later and drew on fieldwork Bourdieu had conducted during the Algerian War. EntitledEsquisse d’une théorie de la pratique(1972), it took the form of three anthropological studies of Kabylia followed by a sustained reflection on the political, ethical, and epistemological implications of anthropological study. Five years
CHAPTER 5 Anthropology and Sociology from:
Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In the spring of 1980, the year in which the French edition of
The Logic of Practicewas first published, Kabylia was shaken by a series of strikes, mass demonstrations, and violent anti-government protests. Generally referred to as ‘the Berber Spring’, the events of April 1980 were sparked by the decision of the ruling Islamic and Marxist FLN to ban a lecture given by Mouloud Mammeri at the University of Tizi-Ozou to promote a bilingual French-Kabyle collection of poetry,Poèmes kabyles anciens(1979). A violent reaction against merely the latest in a series of attempts by the FLN to extinguish
CHAPTER 7 Neo-Liberalism and the Defence of the ‘Universal’ from:
Pierre Bourdieu
Abstract: In
DistinctionBourdieu had been concerned to trace the shift to a more individualistic, cosmopolitan, business-oriented culture in the lifestyles and tastes of France’s bourgeoisie and petty bourgeoisie. This shift in the ‘social field’ as a whole, epitomised by the rise of the ‘progressive fractions’ of France’s bourgeoisie, had also manifested itself in a series of homologous shifts in a range of other fields or sub-fields. Thus, the rise of the ‘new bourgeoisie’ and their allies, the ‘new petty bourgeoisie’, was mirrored in the political field in the rise of ‘reconverted conservatism’ as the new dominant ideology, in the educational
Book Title: Truth Commissions-Memory, Power, and Legitimacy
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Bakiner Onur
Abstract: Bakiner demonstrates how truth commissions have recovered basic facts about human rights violations, forced societies to rethink the violence and exclusion of nation building, and produced a new dynamic whereby the state seeks to legitimize its central position between history and politics by accepting a high degree of societal penetration into the production and diffusion of official national history. By doing so, truth commissions have challenged and transformed public discourses on memory, truth, justice, reconciliation, recognition, nationalism, and political legitimacy in the contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt18z4gmr
CHAPTER 1 Definition and Conceptual History of Truth Commissions: from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: Few ideas have gained as much international attention in such a short time span as the concept of the
truth commission. Successful and failed initiatives to set up ad hoc panels called “truth commissions” to investigate patterns of human rights violations abound. In addition, in some countries single incidents of violence have led to calls for a commission when the facts about the event remained in the dark for decades. Two examples that come to mind are the 1985 siege and fire in Colombia’s Palace of Justice¹ and the 1994 bombing of the Israeli-Argentine Mutual Association in Buenos Aires.² Perhaps
CHAPTER 2 Speaking Truth to Power? from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: First, this chapter identifies the decision points before and during a commission process, and the interactions between the commissioners and the
CHAPTER 4 Truth Commission Impact: from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: In what ways do truth commissions influence policy, human rights accountability, and social norms? The transitional justice literature suggests various mechanisms through which truth commissions are expected to achieve a set of moral and political objectives in peace-building and democratization contexts. However, only a handful of studies have explored the commission
andpost-commission processes to assess claims of truth commission impact. In this chapter I explain whether or not, and the specific ways in which, truth commissionsin facttransform the lessons from history into policy, human rights accountability, and changes in shared social norms. In short, this chapter is
CHAPTER 6 Explaining Variation in Truth Commission Impact (II): from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: The detailed description of the pre-commission, commission, and postcommission processes in Chile and Peru in Chapter 5 reveals the complexity of interactions between politicians, state bureaucracies, civil society actors, and commission members. This chapter zooms out to explore how these dynamics influence commissions’ mandate, composition, goals, modes of operation, and outcomes in thirteen other societies that have lived through political transitions from authoritarianism to democracy and/or violent conflict to peace. There is enormous cross-national variation with respect to commissions’ impact on policy, judicial behavior, and social norms, as well as the sources of impact (i.e., political will to implement reforms
CHAPTER 7 Comparing Truth Commissions’ Memory Narratives: from:
Truth Commissions
Abstract: The enormous variation across truth commissions in terms of goals, findings, recommendations, and impact is explored in Chapters 5 and 6. Truth commissions’ explanations of the under lying causes of past violence and violations exhibit considerable variation as well. No doubt some of the differences owe to the context in which violations happen, as well as the nature of the violations themselves. Yet, one often observes divergent historical narratives describing comparable historical contexts. The civil wars in El Salvador and Guatemala had much in common, but the Salvadoran Truth Commission’s overall preference for avoidance and brevity shared little with the
Introduction from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Dyk Janet
Abstract: In 2001 the first phase of a worldwide initiative called “Through the Eyes of Another” was launched, and, with a focus on John 4, a method for bringing Bible reading groups to interact with one another was developed. The novelty of this project was not that readers from different cultures and contexts were asked to participate, nor that biblical scholars carefully began to listen or “read with” nonprofessional Bible readers. What was innovative
3 The Ethics of Transformative Reading: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Prior John Mansford
Abstract: Another reaction is simply to go with the flow, to allow oneself to be swept along
4 Transformation in Intercultural Bible Reading: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Schipani Daniel S.
Abstract: The connection between reading a sacred text and experiencing human transformation is an assumption inherent in the very value assigned by religious communities to certain texts deemed sacred. That is the reason for those communities to engage in reading, interpreting, and appropriating their message. This applies as well to the Bible, even though, strictly speaking, Christianity should not be considered a “religion of the Book” in ways that Judaism and Islam might. The expression “people of the Book” appears in the Qur’an (29:46) in reference to Jews and Christians. Recently it has become commonplace to characterize the so-called Abrahamic traditions
5 Toward Transformation: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) van Zyl Danie C.
Abstract: Since its inception, the intercultural Bible reading project had a dual aim: to serve the academic community with insight in the way ordinary readers read the Bible and to achieve a practical result in such communities through their participation (see De Wit 2004). Behind this lies the acknowledgment that grassroots communities in particular read the Bible “for life” and that their readings have (transformative) consequences. The project seeks to open up the community of readers by linking groups that would otherwise have no knowledge of one another, in the hope that this interaction would serve transformation through reading the Bible
8 Reading the Text—Reading the Others—Reading Ourselves (A Dialogue between Germany and Indonesia) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Kessler Rainer
Abstract: Due to her commitment to ecumenical contacts, I asked the minister of the small village of Oberrosphe to form a German group for the reading cycle of 2011–2012. The group comprised about ten persons, all from the rural area north of Marburg, a traditional university town
11 How to Share Stories of Trauma: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) van Berkum Willemien
Abstract: In this essay I reflect on the course of the exchanges and the factors that contributed to the absence of a deepened understanding of oneself, of one another,
12 “We Are All Tamar”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Ejiogu Godian
Abstract: The title of this essay might seem strange for a Bible story that happened hundreds of years ago in the Middle East, with no connection to India at the time. I chose the title because of the contemporaneity of this story in worldwide news. At the time we were reading this story (2012), a twenty-three-year-old lady in India was raped and died. It could be that raping a lady without any consequences for the offender was normal at the time of Tamar. In present-day India, the justice system takes little or no action, just like King David in the case
14 Making the Circle Safer: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Barker Kim
Abstract: Empirical researchas a term often conjures up images of strict clinical procedures and of painstakingly precise work conducted in sterile circumstances by a person wearing a white lab coat. Although certain types of research require such settings, in the present essay we trace a complex and often messy process that is characteristic of empirical qualitative research. Qualitative research has been described as messy, because it aims to account for the multiplicity of human experiences within a certain context:
15 The Biblical Text as a Heterotopic Intercultural Site: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) West Gerald
Abstract: I have used Michel Foucault’s notion of “heterotopia” in an earlier essay to argue that space is an important component in enabling the poor and oppressed to forge an articulated response to domination (West 2009). There I argued that the question of whether the subaltern
canspeak (Spivak 1988) should be recast as a question that takes space seriously: “Wherecan the subaltern speak?” For, as James Scott so eloquently argues, subordinate classes are less constrained at the level of thought and ideology than they are at the level of political action and struggle “since they can in secluded settings
16 “It Has Been Ordained by Our Ancestors That Women Keep Quiet”: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Sihombing Batara
Abstract: The sharing of the story of John 4 gives rise to a remarkable growth of insights in the text. Here, it is shown how faith itself touches the heart of the other reader and transforms the attitude toward the text. Personal experience and engagement with struggle and resistance emerge as significant hermeneutical factors for transformation. Hermeneutical courage is stimulated;
17 Ghosts, Women, and Evangelism (A Dialogue between Bolivia and Indonesia) from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Autero Esa
Abstract: The late Walter Wink stated in his book on the Bible and human transformation: “The model for students should be not the biblical scholar, but the biblical interpreter—a person competent to help any group of people understand the impact of the Bible in human transformation” (2010). He explains the reasons for the bankruptcy of traditional biblical criticism: “[it is] incapable of achieving what most of its practitioners considered its purpose to be: so to interpret Scriptures that the past becomes alive and illuminates our present with new possibilities for personal and social transformation” (2010). While everyone might not be
18 Easter at Christmas: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Anum Eric Nii Bortey
Abstract: In the context of intercultural Bible reading, a text is not going to be read within the specific, well-instituted, and practiced traditions; rather, it is to be read specifically as a tool for exchange of meaning across different communities of readers. This method takes up the question, “Can intercultural reading of Bible stories result
25 On Becoming a Family in South Africa: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Jonker Louis
Abstract: Introduced with the liberation of Nelson Mandela from prison in February 1990, the new political dispensation in South Africa has brought an acknowledgment of the diversity of cultures, languages, and religions. The infamous success of the apartheid ideology as a social engineering process lay exactly in the area of cultural refutation in which the social interaction was regulated in terms of four “racial” groups—so-called white, black, colored, and Indian people. More recently, the acknowledgment of the diversity of culture, language, and religion has become one of the building blocks of the new democracy. Generally speaking, South Africans have come
26 An Intimate Revelation: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Wolverton Taggert E.
Abstract: In 2009 a pilot project was launched to determine whether adolescent readers could benefit from the process of intercultural Bible reading in ways similar to those reported by adult readers. The focus of the research with the adolescents also attempted to measure whether the reading process would be catalytic to the spiritual growth of the participants. For the purposes of the study, the concept of spiritual growth was originally defined along axes that included a deepened sense of belief, an observable increase in theological knowledge, and an increase in the amount of Christian activities. Due to the small size of
27 Sharing Memories, Overcoming Solitude: from:
Bible and Transformation
Author(s) Hoyos José Vicente Vergara
Abstract: In this essay I take a brief tour of contextual situations in which Latin American people live in the face of impunity; I also cover some interpretations of the biblical text, taking as a starting point the life of believing communities in our continent. It brings together the sincere and supportive interaction between those who share the same reality of pain, suffering, and the need to make claims so that impunity does not reign, but justice. I deal with three aspects: the impunity in Latin America, the struggle for justice, and the transformation toward an attitude of solidarity.
[BOX I Introduction] from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: In the United States, even the most confidential archives become the dominion of popular culture; the more secret, the more classified or off-limits, the better. Reciprocally, all popular culture becomes archival material, finding its way into an oddball archive of one sort or another. In its perpetual accumulation of tales, artifacts, and stories about accumulating tales and artifacts, American culture enfolds itself in weirdo predilections.
4 “MARCUSE’S UNREASON: THE BIOLOGY OF REVOLUTION” from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Blyn Robin
Abstract: “We can use the word revolution again for the first time in many years,” Douglass Kellner declared in October 2011.¹ The scene was not Tahrir Square or the streets of Tunis. Nor was it Zuccotti Park. Rather, Kellner was speaking at the University of Pennsylvania, at the Fourth Biennial Conference of the International Herbert Marcuse Society. It was clearly a moment for Kellner and his audience to savor; together, the Arab Spring and Occupy protests of 2011 seemed to vindicate the very idea of revolution and with it the work of a philosopher variously dismissed as impractical, irrational, irrelevant, and
[BOX III Introduction] from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Abstract: All archives promise – and ineluctably fail – to offer a bulwark against the passage of time. In their task of making up for lost memory – that is, for the loss of ways of thinking, as well as for the passing of successive eras – archives carry out their functions incompletely. Archives mark what has been lost in their preservation of remnants that remain incomplete in what we imagine to be their testimony to a much fuller moment. Can we think of archives as time machines that bring us into direct contact with the documents and relics of a forgotten age? Or do
AFTERWORD: from:
The Year's Work in the Oddball Archive
Author(s) Martin David L.
Abstract: It is a curious, if not downright odd, first thing to say about
The Oddball Archivethat, above all else, it has spoken to me at the level of politics. After all, particularly as it is practiced in the contemporary academy, politics or political science is a discipline famed for its “seriousness”; its social-science predictive ways; its focus on institutions, structures of power, and governance; and its avoidance of the messy stuff of culture, agency, and desire. Could anything be less oddball, less hospitable to the playfulness of hoaxers and hoarders, or the incongruity of dissected fish and Dixie cups?
Book Title: Medium, Messenger, Transmission-An Approach to Media Philosophy
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Krämer Sybille
Abstract: Medium, Messenger, Transmissionuses the figure of the messenger as a key metaphor for the function of all transmission media. Sybille Krämer illustrates this argument with a diverse range of situations involving some form of transmission, including the circulation of money, the translation of languages, the spread of infectious diseases, processes of transference and countertransference as seen in psychoanalysis, and even the development of cartography. This rich study provides a comprehensive introduction to the field of media philosophy while illuminating transmission media as active mediators in all systems of exchange.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19630z0
The Messenger Model from:
Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: The texts by Benjamin, Nancy, Serres, Debray, and Peters are all extremely different. It may seem peculiar to invoke these authors as ‘introductions’ to the theme of mediality when only the last one actually discusses concrete media, yet this is quite deliberate. I want to debate the question of ‘What is a medium?’ from the very beginning in the context of mediality. ‘Mediality’ does not refer to media that are distinct from each other, like sound, text, and image, but rather its aim is to describe an elementary dimension of human life and culture.¹
Test Case from:
Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: I have not yet provided an example of a phenomenon that can unproblematically be identified as a medium or demonstrated how the messenger and transmission perspective I have developed actually brings to light
newaspects of this phenomenon. There are two additional requirements that would – ideally – be satisfied by such a test case: It should be a medium that cuts across different times, that is not rooted in only one respectable tradition, but rather that provides a context in which the changes associated with the development of information technologies and digitalization can also be reflected and studied. Furthermore,
Epilogue from:
Medium, Messenger, Transmission
Abstract: This discussion is (almost) at an end; all that remains is a conclusion, and I want to open this conclusion by raising a concluding and very fundamental question: What is the use of a study that proposes to rehabilitate the model of the messenger and transmission? Surely it is intended to develop a more interesting – if also slightly outmoded – approach to media theory, but isn’t the risk of misunderstandings too high a price to pay for this mediatheoretical perspective given the obvious heteronomy of the messenger figure and his apparently dependent transmission activity? This risk is further exacerbated
EL ANDAMIAJE DEL ADULTO Y SU INCIDENCIA EN LA PRODUCCIÓN DE NARRACIONES EN UNA POBLACIÓN INFANTIL from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Planas María Rosa Solé
Abstract: Bruner considera que toda buena narración cuenta, simultáneamente, la realidad, es decir, los acontecimientos o las acciones que se producen en el mundo real, y la percepción que tienen los personajes de esa realidad, sus creencias, deseos y temores. De esta manera, en toda narración hay dos escenarios, citando sus palabras: “one is the landscape of action, where the constituents are the arguments of action: agent, intention or goal, situation, instrument, something to corresponding to a “story grammar”. The other landscape is the landscape of consciousness: what those involved in the action know, think, or feel, or do not know,
DE TÍTULOS, INICIOS Y FINALES. from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Villanueva Rebeca Barriga
Abstract: Este trabajo forma parte de una investigación etnográfica denominada
Interculturalidad Urbana, Narraciones Orales y Escritas(iunoye), uno de cuyos objetivos principales es analizar, por medio de la producción, principalmente narrativas¹ escritas, el impacto del español en el proceso de enseñanza-aprendizaje de niños indígenas mexicanos bilingües². Este proceso se da en circunstancias de alto riego. Los niños—hijos de migrantes de primera y segunda generación—viven entre el uso restringido de su lengua materna, destinada básicamente al ámbito familiar, y el uso del español, multipresente en su mundo circundante, en especial en la escuela, donde adquieren todos los saberes científicos y
LA COHERENCIA EN NARRATIVAS ESCRITAS POR NIÑOS HISPANOHABLANTES DE MÉXICO Y DE ESTADOS UNIDOS from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Navarrete Gina
Abstract: Las características de migración mundial propician el desplazamiento de niños de un país a otro. La búsqueda de sus padres de mejores oportunidades económicas y laborales conlleva a que ellos queden de manera abrupta inmersos en una sociedad diferente a la de origen donde tendrán que aprender una segunda lengua. De hecho, Kindler (2001) estima que existen aproximadamente 4.6 millones de niños bilingües en las escuelas de Estados Unidos de América (eua), de los cuales alrededor del 79% (3.6 millones) hablan español como primera lengua. Así, al llegar a eua estos niños pronto ingresan a la escuela, la cual, la
“ESPAÑOL, WHERE ARE YOU?” from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Parra María Luisa
Abstract: En la actualidad, una de las áreas de mayor auge en la investigación sobre el desarrollo infantil es, sin duda, el bilingüismo. En una época de migraciones masivas y constitución de sociedades multiculturales como la que hoy vivimos es imperioso plantearse preguntas sobre el proceso de adquisición y desarrollo de la(s) lengua(s), oral y escrita, en contextos multilingües, si se quieren entender y resolver los enormes retos educativos que la población infantil inmigrante impone a los sistemas escolares de los países que la acoge. Un ejemplo que ilustra con claridad estos retos es la población infantil hispana en los Estados
EL DESARROLLO DE LAS HABILIDADES NARRATIVAS EN EL CONTEXTO DE UN BILINGÜISMO SUSTRACTIVO from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Gómez Pablo Rogelio Navarrete
Abstract: El estudio de la narrativa en comunidades de habla de lengua indígena hoy en día les ofrece una nueva oportunidad a los investigadores para indagar sobre la relación entre el lenguaje y la cognición y entre el lenguaje y los conocimientos culturales en particular. Estas investigaciones, a su vez, pueden dar cuenta de las políticas educativas relacionadas con el uso del lenguaje en el salón de clases. Al mismo tiempo, surgen problemas interesantes acerca de otro tema de orden práctico: ¿cuáles son los procedimientos más efectivos en el trabajo de rescate y documentación de artefactos culturales en materia de narrativa
SABER NARRAR UN CUENTO. from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Lozano Leonora Patricia Arias
Abstract: Este trabajo pretende comparar las características de la estructura narrativa de cuentos escritos en español y hñähñú de niños indígenas bilingües que están cursando de 1° a 6° de la escuela primaria. Se trata de un estudio comparativo de la producción escrita de 67 textos en dos lenguas, a partir de un mismo patrón de estímulo, cuento ilustrado para la creación de narraciones. Para ello se recurrió al sistema de análisis discursivo de Van Dijk y al planteamiento de Cummins sobre el desarrollo de habilidades académicas y su transferencia al aprendizaje de la segunda lengua.
LA REFERENCIA A LOS PARTICIPANTES EN NARRACIONES DE NIÑOS CON DISLEXIA Y NIÑOS SIN DISLEXIA from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) López Paula Gómez
Abstract: Es bien sabido que no hay un acuerdo general sobre la definición de dislexia, sin embargo, en sus diversas concepciones pueden encontrarse características comunes. En este trabajo, entendemos la dislexia como una dificultad en el proceso de aprendizaje de la lectura y la escritura (Monfort 2004, p. 348; Nieto 1995, p. 19). Se trata de un problema en la expresión de la comunicación escrita que se manifiesta en el empobrecimiento de las funciones lectoras (Bravo 1997, p. 37). Este problema abarca también el nivel textual. Por ejemplo, se han registrado problemas en los textos narrativos escritos por niños hispanohablantes con
MÁS ALLÁ DE LA NARRATIVA: from:
Las narrativas y su impacto en el desarrollo lingüístico infantil.
Author(s) Uccelli Paola
Abstract: El estudio de la narración infantil es de gran importancia por múltiples razones. Al aprender a narrar, los niños aprenden también a interactuar con los adultos y con sus pares; amplían, paso a paso, su conocimiento gramatical y discursivo y van construyendo su propia historia de vida en colaboración con sus padres y otros familiares. Al mismo tiempo, los niños, en general van adquiriendo patrones comunicativos, actitudes y creencias hasta convertirse —la mayoría de las veces— en participantes expertos de las lenguas y culturas con las que se relacionan a diario.
ENTRE AMÉRICA Y EUROPA: DOS FORMAS DE ENTENDER AMÉRICA LATINA from:
La historia intelectual como historia literaria (coedición)
Author(s) Zeiter Katja Carrillo
Abstract: Cuando en 1924 y 1925 Rojas y Vasconcelos publican los dos textos que a continuación se analizarán, tanto la sociedad argentina como la mexicana se vieron confrontadas con situaciones políticas marcadas por cambios que no sólo afectaron los respectivos sistemas políticos, sino también la vida intelectual. La Argentina había vivido una reforma universitaria dando paso a la participación de los estudiantes. Al mismo tiempo, en México, como consecuencia de la Revolución mexicana, entraron nuevos actores en la esfera universitaria, académica y educativa.
LOS INTELECTUALES-ESCRITORES Y LA IMPORTACIÓN CULTURAL EN ARGENTINA Y MÉXICO ENTRE MEDIADOS DE LOS AÑOS TREINTA Y FINES DE LOS CUARENTA. from:
La historia intelectual como historia literaria (coedición)
Author(s) Pagni Andrea
Abstract: Leer la historia de los intelectuales en América Latina desde la perspectiva de una historia de la cultura literaria implica, por una parte, interrogar la figura y el estatuto del escritor en tanto intelectual, preguntar por los modos específicos de intervención intelectual del escritor, por los usos y funciones de la literatura en el marco del discurso intelectual; e implica, por otra parte, analizar las instituciones en las que el escritor actúa y los mecanismos de acceso a las mismas, prestar atención a las condiciones concretas de producción y difusión de sus textos, a sus soportes materiales.¹
DE “LUGARES GEOMÉTRICOS” Y PAISAJES MENTALES: from:
La historia intelectual como historia literaria (coedición)
Author(s) Callsen Berit
Abstract: Emprendamos un viaje a tres lugares insulares: Xiphos, Metaxiphos y Villings. Lejos de ser archipiélagos aislados, estos lugares se pueden considerar espacios centrales de la historia literario-intelectual del siglo xx. Son lugares de la mente que se vuelven todos de una u otra manera objetos de observaciones autorreferenciales y, con esto, son topografías mentales que devienen en escenarios del acto de pensar mismo.
Book Title: Timing Canada-The Shifting Politics of Time in Canadian Literary Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Huebener Paul
Abstract: From punch clocks to prison sentences, from immigration waiting periods to controversial time-zone boundaries, from Indigenous grave markers that count time in centuries rather than years, to the fact that free time is shrinking faster for women than for men - time shapes the fabric of Canadian society every day, but in ways that are not always visible or logical. In Timing Canada, Paul Huebener draws from cultural history, time-use surveys, political statements, literature, and visual art to craft a detailed understanding of how time operates as a form of power in Canada. Time enables everything we do - as Margaret Atwood writes, "without it we can't live." However, time also disempowers us, divides us, and escapes our control. Huebener transforms our understanding of temporal power and possibility by using examples from Canadian and Indigenous authors - including Jeannette Armstrong, Joseph Boyden, Dionne Brand, Timothy Findley, Lucy Maud Montgomery, Gabrielle Roy, and many others - who witness, question, dismantle, and reconstruct the functioning of time in their works. As the first comprehensive study of the cultural politics of time in Canada, Timing Canada develops foundational principles of critical time studies and everyday temporal literacy, and demonstrates how time functions broadly as a tool of power, privilege, and imagination within a multicultural and multi-temporal nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1970584
INTRODUCTION: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: You see – my faith in the days of the week has been seriously undermined. When I woke up this morning, I wasn’t exactly sure what
3 Reading Time and Social Relations Critically from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: “Over the millennia,” writes Christopher Dewdney, “our penchant for technology and abstract thought has helped us to construct an empire of time, a chronological culture within which our lives are scheduled and measured out.”³ While Dewdney’s reference to “our” chronological culture appears to reflect a singular social entity, his use of the phrase “empire of time” also hints at the unequal and divisive nature of normative temporality; like all empires, an empire of time inevitably contains deeply entrenched biases and power divisions. I have discussed some of the ways in which human culture colonizes time, and in particular the ways
CONCLUSION: from:
Timing Canada
Abstract: Like so many articulations of temporality, this book remains inevitably provisional. There will always be more to learn from the particular ways in which experiences of time are tied, for instance, to spatial regions of human activity or to the ecological and geological matrices of the natural world. Rather than accounting for every possible model of time within Canada, though, my goals here have been to offer a framework for understanding the major cultural structures of time that have taken hold in the nation; to articulate the ways in which social patterns that may appear unconnected to temporality can in
2 Getting Around: from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: For me, it’s all about mobility.¹ Since, until very recently, I was so favored as to be virtually without pain, it’s the challenge of getting around. “Disabled” or “handicapped” are abstractions that take shape for me in what politically correct jargon might call “mobility-challenged.” This is my personal story, not a treatise on disability; I try to avoid generalizations. Not that generalizations shouldn’t be made, but since it is individuals who are struck with infirmity and each one has a distinctive story, abstractions must always be held accountable according to their impact on actual persons. If my story has broader
3 Personal Narrative: from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Pederson Ann Milliken
Abstract: Memories can be like paintings in a gallery that we can stroll through, gazing at them and then pausing to examine the details. Or memories can come and go, unexpectedly; they interrupt us in the middle of our story. Suddenly, scenes send us reeling into our past. I can feel those memories in my body when I think about why my knees bother me now almost forty years later from carrying forty-five pound packs up trails in the mountains. Or the tenderness I sense in my hands whenever I try to practice the piano but can’t because of too many
4 In the Early Years: from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Barreto Susan
Abstract: One early frosty Saturday morning in mid-December, one mom and dad were initially told that there was a 25 percent chance that their third child, a newborn baby girl, would live. This was simply due to the fact that she was born in 1973, happened to weigh 2 pounds 1 ounce, was born weeks early, and was in a hospital in rural Northwestern Illinois. Quickly realizing the situation’s seriousness, a local pediatrician suggested transporting the baby to the nearest state-run hospital with a preemie center in Peoria, Illinois.
7 A Scientific Take on Our Bodyselves: from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: Evolutionary science establishes—unassailably—that self is body. In this chapter we explore how science makes this point and what it means for us. Some years ago, I had an experience that brought it home to me in an unforgettable way. A young man, who showed promise to become an exceptional pastor, arrived in his first call after graduation from seminary. At every step of his preparation, he had proved himself to be unusually well-suited for parish ministry—everyone expected great things from him. It was a shock when in the first months of this activity he was unexpectedly overwhelmed
8 The Human Journey from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: Clearly, when we speak of bodies, we are speaking of ourselves, and furthermore our bodies as they are embedded in technology. Rather than thinking of ourselves as abstractions, our selves are a rich mix of dimensions that defy separation—they exist together in ways that our words and concept struggle to understand. The central issue is human identity. It’s about the struggle to arrive at the meaning of being human today, or theological anthropology. The struggle to arrive at human meaning is the grappling with our own human creativity, particularly in its technological expression. This struggle is at the heart
9 Nature, Mystery, and God from:
Our Bodies Are Selves
Author(s) Hefner Philip
Abstract: Nature is an epic historical narrative—from cosmic beginnings 13 billion years ago in the Big Bang to the emergence of planet earth, its life forms, and the emergence of humans and our culture. A focus on specific segments of the epic may lose sight of the grand epic narrative, which presents us with unimaginable diversity, from cosmic origins to the molecular structure of life, the amazing gamut of living creatures, primates, and human culture. Our basic assumption is that this is one process, one natural hiMstory—nature’s epic. We can speak of it as a drama in several acts
Book Title: Chora 7-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: For over twenty years, the Chora series has received international acclaim for its excellence in interdisciplinary research on architecture. The seven volumes of Chora have challenged readers to consider alternatives to conventional aesthetic and technological concepts. The seventy-eight authors and eighty-seven scholarly essays in the series have investigated profound cultural roots of architecture and revealed rich possibilities for architecture and its related disciplines. Chora 7, the final volume in the series, includes fifteen essays on architectural topics from around the world (France, Greece, Iran, Italy, Korea, and the United States) and from diverse cultures (antiquity, Renaissance Italy, early modern France, and the past hundred years). Thematically, they bring original approaches to human experience, theatre, architectural creation, and historical origins. Readers will also gain insights into theoretical and practical work by architects and artists such as Leon Battista Alberti, Peter Brook, Douglas Darden, Filarete, Andy Goldsworthy, Anselm Kiefer, Frederick Kiesler, Claude-Nicolas Ledoux, and Peter Zumthor. Contributors to Chora 7 include Anne Bordeleau (University of Waterloo), Diana Cheng (Montreal), Negin Djavaherian (Montreal), Paul Emmons (Washington-Alexandria Architecture Center of Virginia Tech), Paul Holmquist (McGill University), Ron Jelaco (McGill University), Yoonchun Jung (Kyoto University), Christos Kakalis (Edinburgh School of Architecture and Landscape Architecture), Lisa Landrum (University of Manitoba), Robert Nelson (Monash University), Marc J Neveu (Woodbury University), Alberto Pérez-Gómez (McGill University), Angeliki Sioli (Monterrey Institute of Technology and Higher Education), Nikolaos-Ion Terzoglou (National Technical University of Athens), and Stephen Wischer (North Dakota State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jch8m
3 Peter Brook’s “Empty Space”: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Djavaherian Negin
Abstract: IN
THE EMPTY SPACE, Peter Brook (1925–), one of the most influential directors in modern theatre, describes his concept of Immediate Theatre by bringing together two others: Holy Theatre, which deals with the “invisible” and its hidden impulses, and Rough Theatre, which focuses on the actions of human beings.² In Brook’s view, Immediate Theatre is able to “slide” us between our “ordinary level and the hidden level of myth.” It awakens in us a sudden insight into hidden folds of the “fabric of reality.”³ This is achieved through what he calls “empty space.” Emptiness allows our imagination to fill
7 Constructing Architectural History in the Joseon Industrial Exhibition of 1915 from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Jung Yoonchun
Abstract: This relationship between Asia and the West underlies the nationalistic characteristics of
10 The Laughing Girls from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Neveu Marc J
Abstract: THOUGH VERY LITTLE has been written about Douglas Darden, he is well known for his exquisite pencil drawings, displayed in various exhibitions, and for his book
Condemned Building, published in 1993.¹Condemned Buildingdescribes ten acts of building. Each begins with a canonical statement and the overturning of that canon. The act of turning over is a tactic often used and represented by Darden. Two details on the left side of the frontispiece ofCondemned Building, for example, show the turning over of a turtle to reveal its underbelly.² Turning over was considered by Darden to be an architectural trope;
11 Filarete’s Sforzinda: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Pérez-Gómez Alberto
Abstract: THE ARCHITECT ANTONIO DI PIERO AVERLINO (ca 1400–1469 ) characterized his life’s work rhetorically by adopting the pseudonym Il Filarete, coupling the Greek words
philiaandaretéto refer to himself as a lover of virtue. In the mid-fifteenth century he became the first “modern” to design an ideal city in its totality, founded from scratch in a natural site without history. This ideal city, named Sforzinda after his patron Francesco Sforza, is the central topic of hisTrattato di architettura.¹ Although the operation that Filarete describes has been interpreted generally as a precursor of rational planning, it is
13 The Juridical Character of Alberti’s Mind from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Terzoglou Nikolaos-Ion
Abstract: PICO DELLA MIRANDOLA, in
Oration on the Dignity of Man, codified a new idea of the humanist subject in the early Renaissance, writing, “Who would not admire this our chameleon?”¹ Leon Battista Alberti seems to incarnate the ideal human type that Pico della Mirandola envisaged. This had been recognized already by Alberti’s contemporaries; the striking versatility of his writings led Cristoforo Landino to characterize him as a “new chameleon” (nuovo cameleonta) in 1481.² A few years later, in 1486 , Angelo Poliziano’s preface to the first edition ofDe re aedificatoriafor Lorenzo de’ Medici noted the many-sidedness of this
14 The Architecture of Anselm Kiefer: from:
Chora 7
Author(s) Wischer Stephen
Abstract: BECAUSE ART AND ARCHITECTURE SINCE the eighteenth century typically have been understood as specialized and separate, elucidating relationships between the German artist Anselm Kiefer’s creation at La Ribaute and modern architectural practice may seem precarious. Yet, having recently visited Kiefer’s former home and studio, I will argue that his integration of painting, sculpture, photography, bookmaking, and construction at La Ribaute pursues the fundamental task of architecture. Kiefer’s creations rely on a poetic form of making that disregards conventional art historical categories and reveals significant connections with architectural origins. It should not be surprising that an artist who is so concerned
Book Title: Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature-From Alexis to the Digital Age
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Murray-Román Jeannine
Abstract: Working with twentieth- and twenty-first-century sources ranging from theatrical works and novels to blogs, Murray-Román examines the ways in which writers such as Jacques Stephen Alexis, Zoé Valdés, Rosario Ferré, Patrick Chamoiseau, and Marlon James experiment with textually compensating for the loss of the corporeality of live relationship in performance traditions. Through their exploration of the interaction of literature and performance, she argues, Caribbean writers themselves offer a mode of bridging the disjunction between cultural and philosophical approaches within Caribbean studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jchc5
1 Performance and the Expansion of Personhood in Marissa Chibas’s Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: The task of this book is to think through how Caribbean textual representations of performance broaden understandings of personhood. To explore how the genre of performance specifically can intercede in definitions of personhood, this chapter offers a performance analysis of Marissa Chibas’s 2007 one-woman play
Daughter of a Cuban Revolutionary. Throughout the play, Chibas performs much of the “backstage” work—such as establishing the scene’s time and place, or getting in and out of character—and exposes otherwise unseen labor. In so doing,Daughterdemonstrates how the means of creating theater give us a point of entry into redefining personhood.
3 From Spectator to Participant: from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: As we have seen in Chamoiseau’s and James’s novels, observing how witnesses of a performance event are impacted by it is an important tool for writers to describe the significance of performance. Two reasons this strategy works particularly well for Caribbean representations of social performance are that first, audience members form the circle with their bodies, presence, and attention; and second, any audience member is a potential participant, to return to Marlene NourbeSe Philip’s encapsulation, “you crossing from looking to dancing and back again to looking” (152). This chapter focuses on the role of audience members in creating the dance
4 Staceyann Chin and Zoé Valdés: from:
Performance and Personhood in Caribbean Literature
Abstract: Can a dance circle exist without the copresence of persons to form it? Just as the dark and densely textured spaces examined in chapter 3 stretch the concept of the dance circle to include spaces where performer and audience are not configured in a literal circle, this chapter looks to social media interactions for examples of the circle’s permissive protection. Here, the dance circle stretches to sites where moving bodies are separated by time and space but are connected by digital networks. I analyze the online presence and interactive literary engagements of two Caribbean writers, Zoé Valdés and Staceyann Chin,
Book Title: Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"-Text, Image, Reception
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The
Romance of the Rosehas been a controversial text since it was written in the thirteenth century. There is evidence for radically different readings as as early as the first half of the fourteenth century. The text provided inspiration for both courtly and didactic poets. Some read it as a celebration of human love; others as an erudite philosophical work; still others as a satirical representation of social and sexual follies. On one hand it was praised as an edifying treatise, on the other condemned as lascivious and misogynistic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19jcj20
2. “Cele [qui] doit estre Rose clamee” (Rose, vv. 40–44): from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Uitti Karl D.
Abstract: On first reading these lines do not appear to impress the reader as seriously problematic. They merely recount how the Lover, having gazed into Narcissus’s “perilous fountain” in the Jardin de Déduit and been wounded by Cupid’s arrow, first sees and fixes upon what would be the object of his amorous passion, the rosebud. Yet, the undeniable indeterminacy with respect to the object of our lover-protagonist’s passion underscores a certain emptiness that appears to characterize this object, at least at this juncture in Guillaume’s poem. This is quite jarring; readers conventionally speak of the Lover’s obsession with
arose. In
9. Discourses of the Self: from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Brownlee Kevin
Abstract: In the decade between 1395 and 1405, Christine de Pizan successfully established herself as a major figure in French literary history. This process necessarily involved a complex coming to terms with the dominant discursive practices of the late-medieval literary tradition: the creation of a new and distinctive voice within the context of this tradition. For Christine, this posed a special set of problems. It was not simply a question of attaining and demonstrating her formal mastery of various established literary genres. Her identity as a woman inevitably problematized her status as an “official” speaking subject in all of these generic
11. The Bare Essential: from:
Rethinking the "Romance of the Rose"
Author(s) Harrison Robert Pogue
Abstract: The following chapter on
Il Fiorerequires a rather protracted prologue about its intention. While scholars have for the most part speculated about the work’s author, my intention was to approach theFioreas an autonomous and anonymous artifact. This soon proved an impossible prospect, however, for the poem is denied both autonomy and anonymity by its literary parentage as well as its circumstantial history. Behind it lies theRoman de la Rose: the master text, the determining precedent, the French “original” transcribed into Italian. So much for autonomy, then. The problem of anonymity is more difficult to ponder, for
Translators’ Introduction from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Raffoul François
Abstract: Dominique Janicaud’s
Heidegger in Franceis a major work of breathtaking historical scope, a unique intellectual undertaking reconstituting in two volumes the history of the French reception of Heidegger, from its earliest stages in the late 1920s until 2000.¹ One “certainty” guided Dominique Janicaud in this enterprise, that of “the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly one sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought” (HF, 301). Volume 1 is
7 Dissemination or Reconstruction? from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: The years that led from the events of 1968 to the death of the Master in 1976 cannot be characterized in one way. On the contrary, the French reception of Heidegger split up into different, if not contradictory, camps. The appropriation of his thinking became dogmatic in each camp, each closing in upon itself; marginalizations, and indeed, excommunications, proliferated. In acknowledging this dissemination, we are not forgetting what this allusion to the title of Jacques Derrida’s book (which appeared in 1972) connotes:¹ threads become woven with more specialized research and with Heidegger’s most difficult, ambitious, and inapparent themes; one should
10 The Return of the Repressed? from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: It was a scandal, and indeed a media-driven scandal, that occurred. But wherein lay the scandal? In the abomination and dishonor of a “great philosopher” suddenly put in the stocks? Or (secondarily), in the fact that the print and broadcast press carried out a media lynching of a famous person (postmortem, to be sure) without taking the trouble to verify the sources of the accusation, as if the pleasure of disparaging the man compensated for the frustration of not understanding the thinker. Finally, one will object that it is a scandal that I devoted an entire chapter to these stories
11 Between Erudite Scholarship and Techno-Science from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: In October 1990, the translation of a much-awaited book by the historian Hugo Ott² was published, a biography of Heidegger that was on the whole well received, although it contained no sensational revelations. Everyone recognized the seriousness of the historian from Freiburg, at least in terms of the establishment of the facts. Ott is not a philosopher and does not claim to be one (his
Conclusion from:
Heidegger in France
Abstract: With respect to the certainties, what has inspired us from the very beginning has been confirmed: the omnipresence in France of the influence, direct or indirect, of Heidegger’s thought and work. Apart from the mathematical sciences and life and earth sciences, there is hardly any sector of knowledge or intellectual activity that has not been positively or negatively affected by that thought, at times marginally, often
Jean-Luc Marion: from:
Heidegger in France
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: When did I first read Heidegger? In philosophy class in high school? In
khâgne?From Jean Beaufret? In fact, my first encounter with Heidegger was during a celebration at UNESCO in April 1964. I was there; I was not even in my senior year in high school, but was in the year before; I had read Kierkegaard or something like that. I understood nothing; I listened and that was very good; I attended this improbable thing: the session where Beaufret read a homage to Kierkegaard, a text by Heidegger
6 Bernard Lonergan from:
Lex Crucis
Abstract: it was surrounded on three sides by factories and at the rear by the main rail yard of Union Station. Freight trains spent the night shunting to build up their cargo for their journey the next day. The house . . . was constantly showered with soot and grime from the coal fires of the steam engines. In
3 Preaching and Prayer from:
Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: It may not always be obvious to human eyes, but to the One who sees the heart as an altar, it is clear that what is inside preachers is just as important as what comes outside of preachers through words and actions. In the long view of life, it may be possible to discover that an altered life is an altar-ed life, though in the micro-moments of the everyday this may be hard to discern. Even more, when it comes to preaching, we may not be so sure what impact the spiritual life truly has on our preaching and what
9 Preaching and Technology from:
Ways of the Word
Author(s) Powery Luke A.
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we learned how the Word became flesh in Jesus Christ and the ways in which this deepens our understanding of the role of the human body in preaching. While this is true, it is also obvious that in this digital age, some may assert that the Word has also now become digital. One cannot deny technology’s pervasive presence in society, including the church and its preaching. The fact of technology and its use will not be disappearing anytime soon; thus, this chapter will explore what it means to engage technologies in preaching and some of the
Book Title: Engaging Bonhoeffer-The Impact and Influence of Bonhoeffer's Life and Thought
Publisher: Augsburg Fortres
Author(s): ZIEGLER PHILIP G.
Abstract: Engaging Bonhoeffer documents the extraordinary impact of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s life and writing on later thought. Despite his lasting legacy, little substantial scholarship has been conducted in this area. In this magisterial collection, leading international scholars fill this striking gap and critically demonstrate the ways in which Bonhoeffer has been one of the most inspirational writers of the twentieth century. In addition to shedding light on the different trajectories that Bonhoeffer’s work may forge, Engaging Bonhoeffer offers a critical window through which to view the ideas of many leading theological voices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19qgg3z
Introduction—Whose Bonhoeffer? from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Abstract: But who actually is this Bonhoeffer? After 70 years of scholarship, have we finally figured him out? Until relatively recently, Eberhard Bethge’s magisterial work,
Dietrich Bonhoeffer: A Biography, had been the authoritative version
4 Reinhold Niebuhr and Dietrich Bonhoeffer on Responsibility from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Lovin Robin W.
Abstract: Reinhold Niebuhr and Dietrich Bonhoeffer were separated both by ideas and experience, but united in their most important convictions. They differed theologically, a difference apparent in their different interpretations of the Sermon on the Mount. They came from different backgrounds, and they saw the events of the twentieth century from different sides of the Atlantic. Yet despite these differences, each wanted to make a place for faithful action that would change the course of the political crisis through which they were living, and both understood the moral risks involved in that kind of action. The idea of responsibility—
Verantwortung—bore
7 Dietrich Bonhoeffer and Liberation Theologies from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Kirkpatrick Matthew D.
Abstract: Liberation theology is one of the most important and provocative theological developments of the last century. Although it was largely forged in Latin America in distinction from the theologies of Western Europe and North America, Dietrich Bonhoeffer is often cited as a significant inspiration. Julio de Santa Ana and Beatriz Melano, Methodist theologians from Uruguay and Brazil respectively, offer moving first-hand testimony of Bonhoeffer’s impact on the development of Protestant liberation theology from its beginnings in the early 1950s—twenty years before Gustavo Gutiérrez’s seminal work,
A Theology of Liberation, brought a systematic overview to the attention of the West.¹
9 “Love of Life”—The Impact and Influence of Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s Life and Thought on Jürgen Moltmann from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Schliesser Christine
Abstract: “My attitude towards life or what is nowadays called spirituality.” This was Jürgen Moltmann’s answer when asked what areas of his own theology he felt were most prominently impacted by Dietrich Bonhoeffer.¹ As the interview continued, Moltmann offered Bonhoeffer the highest of praise, particularly
Letters and Papers from Prison, which he called an “eye-opener”² in its ideas of this-worldliness, the polyphony of life, and thecantus firmus. What is strikingly clear, in both has been a steady companion on Moltmann’s theological path.³ Not a companion that he would always agree with. Far from that. But one that he has enjoyed
13 The Critique of Religion and Post-Metaphysical Faith: from:
Engaging Bonhoeffer
Author(s) Gregor Brian
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur was one of the leading French philosophers of the twentieth centuries. He was also one of the most erudite. From his starting point in phenomenology, Ricoeur ventured into structuralism, psychoanalysis, biblical studies, linguistics, narrative theory, historiography, and even neuroscience. Ricoeur’s exploration in these diverse fields is part of his overarching project of philosophical anthropology, which asks the questions of human being, self-understanding, and action. These questions also provide the context for Ricoeur’s work in the philosophy of religion, which is where Bonhoeffer’s influence on Ricoeur is most evident.
1 JOSÉ Y SUS HERMANOS from:
José Gaos en México:
Abstract: Expresión de la frágil convivencia entre los hombres, migración, éxodo y exilio son algunas constantes que atraviesan la historia de la humanidad. A la manera de placas tectónicas, en estos desplazamientos se ha ido configurando, sutil o violentamente, la topografía de las culturas. Aunque el fenómeno resulta consustancial a nuestra vida en el planeta, no es casual que el término “globalización” surgiera en el siglo xx, momento en que la movilidad transfronteriza se intensificó hasta erigirse en uno de sus rasgos distintivos. “Tiempos líquidos” es la expresión con que Zygmunt Bauman caracterizó la era moderna. En el estado acuoso, las
5 EL LIBRO DE LAS ILUSIONES from:
José Gaos en México:
Abstract: Cada hombre es por lo que hace, pero también por lo que deja de hacer. Y es que al acto se encadenan, como halos de cometas, los universos alternos de lo que pudo ser. Acerca de ese mundo de ideas malogradas, gestos perdidos y palabras silenciadas dejó George Steiner un testimonio contundente. “Un libro no escrito —afirmó— es algo más que un vacío. Acompaña a la obra que uno ha hecho como una sombra irónica y triste. Es una de las vidas que podríamos haber vivido, uno de los viajes que nunca emprendimos. […] Es el libro que nunca hemos
8 DIAGNÓSTICO DE NUESTRO TIEMPO from:
José Gaos en México:
Abstract: En el inicio fue la circunstancia, reza el evangelio vitalista. Fiel discípulo de esa escuela, José Gaos se esforzó por seguir sus mandamientos, en primer lugar aquel que exigía hacer del correr de los días y de los rasgos propios de la época objeto de una filosofía. Con análogo empeño, también procuró cumplir con el segundo —serás consecuente con la realidad, permaneciendo siempre atento a su carácter proteico—, si bien en este caso los resultados fueron desiguales, en proporción exacta a la dificultad de la tarea. Aunque desde sus años en España había mostrado talento en tanto portavoz de
11 LA LENGUA ABSUELTA from:
José Gaos en México:
Abstract: “¡Pobre traductor!”, exclamaba Eugenio Ímaz en un artículo publicado en 1950. No tanto las estrecheces materiales, cuanto la eterna insatisfacción con su trabajo, constituía la auténtica miseria de aquellos nobles mediadores entre idiomas y culturas. Un leve desliz, alguna variante léxica o cierta omisión en los matices bastaban para que el oprobio cayera sobre cientos de páginas traducidas con esmero y precisión. ¿Cómo encontrar en cada caso el equivalente certero, siendo que las lenguas se intersectan sin corresponderse del todo? ¿Cómo evitar los yerros y las inexactitudes, cuando el régimen editorial moderno exige trasvasar a toda prisa un grueso volumen
Foreword from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: The title of this work comes from a closing line in Heidegger’s
Being and Time. He is speaking of the future of phenomenology as a promise of things to come—a sentiment already anticipated in an opening claim of the book: “In phenomenology possibility stands higher than actuality.”¹ For Heidegger this spelled a revolutionary reversal of the old metaphysical paradigm of being as presence, substance, and act and a radical openness to new kinds of questioning.
French Phenomenology in Historical Context from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) COURTINE JEAN-FRANÇOIS
Abstract: The Archives Husserl de Paris, a research center at the Centre national de la recherche scientifique (CNRS), was in fact “refounded,” so to speak,
The Phenomenology of Givenness from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: I was studying history, French literature, Latin, Greek, and so on in the
classe préparatoirefor the École normale supérieure’s compulsory admissions exam. At that time, my “major,” so to speak, was, in fact, French literature. So when I was admitted to the École Normale my initial plan was to study literature. And for two years—I was very fortunate but not aware of how fortunate I was—I had Jean Beaufret as my teacher, one of Heidegger’s closest friends. He was very
The Fundamental Concepts of Phenomenology from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) ROMANO CLAUDE
Abstract: It seems to me that one could diagnose a current crisis in philosophy that echoes Husserl’s statement at the beginning of the last century. On one side, the positivist paradigm that prevailed for a long time in the Anglophone philosophy of language, in the wake of a certain reading of the
Tractatusand the work of the Vienna Circle, has reached exhaustion: not only the idea of a
Phenomenology and the Frontier from:
Quiet Powers of the Possible: Interviews in Contemporary French Phenomenology
Author(s) LACOSTE JEAN-YVES
Abstract: You have characterized your work as the exploration of the “frontier zone” between philosophy and theology, where the boundaries between them are no longer meaningful. Reflecting on your work as a whole, one might further say that your theoretical task has been to investigate, by means of phenomenology, the reaches of philosophical reflection in light of what you have called the “liturgical possibility.” What kind of possibility does the “liturgical” refer to and how does it relate to the frontier between philosophy and theology?
INSOMNIA ON A MORAL HOLIDAY: from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Pihlström Sami
Abstract: This chapter will examine the relation between religion and morality from a pragmatist point of view, focusing on the fundamental importance of a certain kind of attitude toward the reality of evil and suffering based on Jamesian pragmatism. My discussion differs from many other treatments of pragmatist philosophy of religion and moral philosophy due to what might be called its “via negativa” methodology. I am not trying to positively characterize, or to interpret James’s characterizations of, such notions as the “good life,” the “goods,” or “fruits” of religious life and religious experiences—even though I do regard (Jamesian) pragmatism as
PRAGMATISM, NATURALISM, AND GENEALOGY IN THE STUDY OF RELIGION from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Proudfoot Wayne
Abstract: The word “naturalism” is used in many different ways in contemporary philosophy. For some, it has required that a properly naturalistic account appeal only to what is countenanced by the natural sciences, but there have been a number of recent attempts to formulate more liberal approaches to naturalism that allow for natural accounts that recognize the normative character of beliefs, practices, actions, and institutions.¹ A certain priority is rightly given to the sciences in the sense that, as Huw Price has put it, science tells us that humans are natural creatures, and any naturalistic approach should honor that.² But that
RELIGIOUS EXPERIENCE AND ITS INTERPRETATION: from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Joas Hans
Abstract: The pragmatist theory of religion has two very different roots. One of them indubitably lies in the foundation of an empirical psychology of religion developed by William James in his 1902 masterpiece
The Varieties of Religious Experience.¹ James was a brilliant writer—I am sometimes tempted to say even more brilliant than his brother, the great novelist Henry James—and his book, although more than one hundred years old, has not lost its original freshness and, at least in the English-speaking world, has become a true classic, even for the wider public. To characterize it as a mere contribution to
PRAGMATIC OR PRAGMATIST / PRAGMATICIST PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION? from:
The Varieties of Transcendence: Pragmatism and the Theory of Religion
Author(s) Deuser Hermann
Abstract: As a theory of action, classical pragmatism—founded by the scientifically trained philosophers Charles S. Peirce and William James in New England—is also always a philosophy of religion. Human experience is not (as in the German tradition) divided according to practical experience, on the one hand, and scientific empiricism, on the other. Instead, it is precisely the interplay of belief in relation to action that explains our everyday behavior as much as the scientific method and religious experience. While different conceptions of god have inevitably resulted from the latter over time, the images, narratives, and symbols are nonetheless comparable.
Book Title: Turns of Event-Nineteenth-Century American Literary Studies in Motion
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Blum Hester
Abstract: Taken together, these essays survey the field of American literary studies as it moves beyond new historicism as its primary methodology and evolves in light of ideological, conceptual, and material considerations. There is much at stake in these movements: the consequences and opportunities range from citational and evidentiary practices to canon expansion, resource allocation, and institutional futurity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rmcdc
Chapter 3 The Cartographic Turn and American Literary Studies: from:
Turns of Event
Author(s) BRÜCKNER MARTIN
Abstract: A survey of literary studies reveals a relatively sudden and now widespread fascination with all things cartographic. According to the
MLA International Bibliography, published essay and book titles using the word “map” and its variants increased exponentially over the past forty years. Before 1990, a total of 503 titles used the terms “map” or “mapping.” After 1990, the enthusiasm for using “ map” as the defining label grew by a factor of three (Figure 3.1). Between 2001 and 2010 the search term “map*” identified over 1,400 titles in books, essays, collections, and dissertations. A fifth of these titles—281 to
Chapter 6 The Geopolitics and Tropologies of the American Turn from:
Turns of Event
Author(s) ALLEWAERT MONIQUE
Abstract: A turn suggests a change in direction that might be rendered as a curved line that stops short of a full circling.
A turndoes not entail a completed action in time, as the governing metaphor ofrevolutionused by older Americanist scholarship tended to suggest . Figuring the turn as a curved line gives it a geometry, which implies at least an abstract temporality and spatiality but does not anchor the turn in a specific geography. And while it offers the possibility of movement, which implies temporality, it implies no teleology. In short, the metaphor of the turn evokes
Book Title: Local Church, Global Church- Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): YOUNG JULIA G.
Abstract: This important volume investigates the many forms of Catholic activism in Latin America between the 1890s and 1962 (from the publication of the papal encyclical Rerum Novarum to the years just prior to the Second Vatican Council). It argues that this period saw a variety of lay and clerical responses to the social changes wrought by industrialization, political upheavals and mass movements, and increasing secularization. Spurred by these local developments as well as by initiatives from the Vatican, and galvanized by national projects of secular state-building, Catholic activists across Latin America developed new ways of organizing in order to effect social and political change within their communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt19rmckz
CHAPTER 1 Messages Sent, Messages Received? from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Edwards Lisa M.
Abstract: By the middle of the nineteenth century, the Catholic Church faced serious challenges from competing ideologies, including Protestantism, liberalism, Marxism, and anarchism. These new ideas and actors posed a real threat to the Catholic Church’s privileges and moral influence in Latin America. Throughout the region, these challenges often took the form of debates over freedom of religion, the role of religion in state educational systems, civil marriage, and secular cemeteries. They were exacerbated by the proliferation of secular, and sometimes even overtly anti-Catholic, political parties. As an institution, the church had to revise its previous strategy of either condemning or
CHAPTER 2 Catholic Vanguards in Brazil from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Borges Dain
Abstract: To understand the roots of lay Catholic activism in Brazil, it is helpful to look to the last years of the empire and the first decades of the republic. From 1870 to 1916, a variety of Catholic organizations built the repertory for dynamic Catholic revival and restoration, a repertory of new ideologies and new forms of lay social action that were just as “globalized” as they were simply Roman and “ultramontane.” During this period, the Brazilian church connected with Baltimore, Leiden, and Lourdes, as well as with Rome itself.
CHAPTER 6 The Transnational Life of Sofía del Valle: from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Andes Stephen J. C.
Abstract: From May 1934 to June 1937, Sofía del Valle traveled the length and breadth of the United States on a mission. Mexican Catholic officials had given del Valle two fundamental tasks. First, del Valle endeavored to sway American Catholic public opinion in favor of her coreligionists in Mexico, to convince American Catholics that their brothers and sisters to the south were suffering a kind of modern-day martyrdom, mercilessly persecuted by a faction of anticlerical leaders who had risen to power in the wake of the 1910 revolution.¹ Second, del Valle’s mission was to raise as much money as possible for
CHAPTER 7 A “Third Way” in Christ: from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Pensado Jaime M.
Abstract: The 1950s saw the rise of a new generation of leftist, conservative, and Catholic students in Latin America that began calling for a unique form of hemispheric solidarity. Their efforts reflected concerns about momentous contemporary events that had a profound impact at their universities, like the anticolonial war in Algeria, the rise of military dictatorships in Guatemala, and the “ iron fist” following the Hungarian insurrection. But these students also harkened back to the “arielista” language that characterized the first two decades of the twentieth century.¹ Asserting their ideological positions during the incipient cold war, they participated throughout the 1950s
CHAPTER 8 Catholic Campuses, Secularizing Struggles: from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Snider Colin M.
Abstract: When university students in Brazil’s Catholic University Youth (Juventude Universitária Católica, or JUC) movement tried to define their mission in 1956, they proclaimed that, while social issues were important, the organization’s focus would continue to be “evangelization,” even while also addressing social inequalities. These efforts at evangelization alongside social reform among university youth in Brazil in the late 1950s and early 1960s preceded similar official changes in the Catholic Church with Vatican II (1962–1965) and the Bishops’ Conference in Medellín in 1968. By the end of 1966, Catholic activism faced a very different context. The church abolished the JUC
CHAPTER 9 The Antigonish Movement of Canada and Latin America: from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) LeGrand Catherine C.
Abstract: Throughout Latin America during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, Catholics drew inspiration from political and social movements, as well as philosophical inquiries, from the rest of the Catholic world. Latin American Catholic activists sought to implement these foreign practices while, at the same time, adapting them and improvising changes that would make more sense in the local context. One of the most successful examples of this transnational interchange and adaptation occurred between Latin American Catholic activists and a little known but highly influential social movement in the Catholic Scots-Irish region of eastern Nova Scotia.
FINAL REFLECTIONS from:
Local Church, Global Church
Author(s) Young Julia G.
Abstract: A flawed teleology exists in the historiography of Catholic activism in Latin America. In this narrative the Catholic Church before the Second Vatican Council was conservative, preservationist, concerned with its institutional interests as opposed to the plight of the poor, and fundamentally antimodern. It was a church in captivity, chained by its own elite-centered interests, ignorant of its call to shepherd the People of God. The history of the church, in essence, was progressing from captivity to liberation: the Second Vatican Council and its Latin American interpretation, the Conference of Latin American Bishops at Medellín in 1968 was the turning
2 Husserl’s Galileo Needed a Telescope! from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: This chapter is a look at Husserl’s explicit philosophy of science in the light of contemporary analyses of science in practice. The
Crisis,published in 1936, was his last major publication on this topic. Yet it takes very little imagination to realize that since 1936, epochal changes have occurred in both the sciences and the interpretations of science, including philosophy of science.
4 Whole Earth Measurements Revisited from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: The Society for Philosophy and Technology met in Puebla, Mexico, 1996, and I presented a paper titled “Whole Earth Measurements,” a bit tongue-in-cheek, which looked at the problem of global warming. My subtitle was “How Many Phenomenologists Does It Take to Detect a Green house Effect?” and I turned to both Heidegger and Husserl as my exemplary phenomenologists. This was before today’s grand political debate about climate change with so many rightwing people not only denying global warming but arguing particularly that the homogenic factors claimed are a great hoax. Here I return to that issue as a crucial testcae
5 Dewey and Husserl: from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: Phenomenology as a twentieth-century philosophy has since its classical beginnings been portrayed as a subjective philosophy and frequently claimed to be antiscience. I argue that both characterizations are false or distortions of phenomenology, and so a modification of classical phenomenology is needed, and that is postphenomenology. This chapter follows that trajectory in a somewhat different way. The late twentieth century began to see two science paradigm shifts in the Kuhnian sense. The first was a revival and renewal of interest in consciousness and the other, often closely related, in animal studies. Here I interweave these two contemporary movements to a
7 From Phenomenology to Postphenomenology from:
Husserl's Missing Technologies
Abstract: The act of naming frequently follows somewhat behind the thing or process to be named. That was clearly the case with both science and technology. If early modern science began, as the standard view has it, in the seventeenth century, it was not until 1833 that it was named
scienceby William Whewell. Earlier the most frequent name wasnatural philosophy. Similarly, technology for a long time, even after the Industrial Revolution, was called a product of the industrial arts, or simplymachines, or products of engineering. Historians of technology, including Thomas Hughes and David Nye, point out that technology
Book Title: Formas de hispanidad- Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): OCHOA PAULINE
Abstract: En este libro el lector encontrará estudios con enfoques desde la ciencia política la teoría política la historia la filosofía la sociología la economía los estudios literarios y culturales entre otras perspectivas académicas. Los aportes de cada aproximación teórica y disciplinar están orientados al logro de una meta común: la de reconstruir y reinterpretar la tradición histórica hispánica desmantelando prejuicios ideológicamente provocados con el fin de comprender los fenómenos políticos que la caracterizan. Por las mismas razones este libro se sitúa en el debate sobre las formas de escritura de la historia que no es sólo un debate de teoría de la historia sino también de filosofía de lo histórico. El libro presenta siete temas claves: el mundo sefardí las filosofías políticas hispánicas los lenguajes políticos hispánicos la construcción de las naciones hispánicas las cuestiones de identidad hispánica las formas de la hispanidad en la literatura y el arte y finalmente la educación y la cultura en el mundo hispánico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b18wz3
Lenguaje y tiempo humano. from:
Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) López Carlos Arturo
Abstract: La inestabilidad de los regímenes de libertades y del Estado de Derecho constituye un rasgo endémico de la historia política iberoamericana. Su explicación se ha buscado usualmente en el pasado colonial, en las deficiencias institucionales, en el subdesarrollo económico y en la dependencia geopolítica. Desde esa perspectiva, el examen de los factores culturales, ideológicos y religiosos que contribuyeron a minusvalorar el pluralismo en nuestra tradición política suele reiterar el tópico del tradicionalismo católico como baluarte del Antiguo Régimen frente a una
La gestación de la idea nacional. from:
Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Gaviria Radamiro
Abstract: El papel activo de los criollos dentro del nacionalismo hace de éste un instrumento de la construcción del Estado-nación, de modo que puede pensarse en el Estado nacional como una invención americana.
España al dominio del mundo from:
Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Esquivel Ricardo
Abstract: El origen del Imperio español, entre 1517 y 1556, es un fascinante fenómeno internacional de la historia moderna. España devino en eje del poder europeo debido a una complejidad de diversos factores. Durante el mismo período, los españoles iniciaron el proceso de desarrollo del Estado-nación en territorio colombiano. Ambos lados, el español y el colombiano, estuvieron sujetos a las contradicciones políticas y económicas de tales procesos novedosos en la historia.
Un cuerpo político virtuoso: from:
Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Cabrera Marta
Abstract: Thomas Hobbes hacía, en la manera típica de los siglos XVII y XVIII, una detallada correspondencia entre las partes y funciones del cuerpo humano y las partes y funciones del cuerpo político, en los siguientes términos: “[…] gracias al arte se crea ese gran
Leviatánque llamamos larepúblicaoEstado(en latíncivitas) que no es sino un hombre artificial”.¹ En otras palabras, el cuerpo político se podía constituir mediante un acto creativo y sería, en consecuencia, un cuerpo coherente, unitario. Este proceso necesariamente incluiría la incorporación/exclusión de otros cuerpos y su resultado final sería la producción de un
Los fundamentos filosóficos del proyecto educativo del Gimnasio Moderno from:
Formas de hispanidad
Author(s) Conforti María Cristina
Abstract: Agustín Nieto Caballero (1889-1975) es uno de los 17 nombres que figura en el acta de fundación de la Sociedad Gimnasio Moderno, establecida en Bogotá, el 25 de abril de 1914.¹ Además de ser uno de los fundadores, fue el inspirador de la fundación del Gimnasio y uno de los educadores y humanistas colombianos más importantes del siglo XX, debido a su influencia en la concepción de la educación, en el delineamiento de políticas, objetivos y fines de la educación de los que cientos de colombianos hemos sido herederos y deudores.
Book Title: Fumando mañas.-Construcción del sentido de la realidad social en un contexto de ilegalidad
Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): Bourgois Philippe
Abstract: Este texto ilustra la interacción entre violencia estructural y actores marginales para ver cómo lo primero crea lo segundo, y cómo, a su turno, la dinámica de estos actores les permite articularse y / o fugarse de sus condiciones. A lo largo del texto, los lectores encontrarán imágenes tomadas en campo, incluso por los interlocutores, así como un grueso volumen de sus opiniones. En general, el libro se ha organizado siguiendo los parámetros de un texto literario, por considerarlo una muestra del género de etnografía posmoderna.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b18x03
Capítulo 1 Cualidad de agencia y potencial de acción en un espacio social caracterizado por la marginalidad from:
Fumando mañas.
Abstract: Fundada en el último cuarto del siglo XVII, Medellín se hizo capital del departamento de Antioquia en 1826 (Botero, 1996), pero casi 100 años después, en 1910, ya atraía por su prosperidad económica a muchos campesinos que abandonaron las áreas rurales del departamento por el atractivo centro industrial y comercial en que se constituía “la bella villa”. Entre 1912 y 1918, cerca de 14.000 personas llegaron a Medellín, que para entonces contaba con menos de 70.000 habitantes (Salazar y Jaramillo, 1992). La ciudad se convirtió en un vibrante foco de actividad comercial e industrial, pero la violencia que abarcó desde
Capítulo 3 Violencia: from:
Fumando mañas.
Abstract: Uno de los mercados negros de mayor impacto social y económico en el mundo es el de las drogas ilícitas. Según Naciones Unidas (2005: 5) un 5% de la población mundial entre los 15 y los 64 años las consumen. El mercado de las drogas, a pesar de ser ilegal, comparte muchas similitudes con los mercados tradicionales, ambos se rigen por las mismas normas básicas de la oferta y la demanda, y responden a estímulos y presiones. Si resultan necesarios conceptos y herramientas económicas para comprender las principales características del fenómeno, se deben tener en cuenta las situaciones especiales que
Book Title: Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder- Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): ARCOS HUGO EDUARDO RAMÍREZ
Abstract: Este libro es el resultado del esfuerzo conjunto de un grupo de académicos de distintas nacionalidades que desde sus líneas de investigación realizan análisis que le brindan al lector elementos para comprender de manera global lo que significa una década de gobierno del presidente Chávez en Venezuela. El texto corresponde a una lectura profunda de la actual política venezolana que va más allá de los estereotipos, prejuicios y de la polarización con la que este tema ha sido comúnmente tratado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b34820
La sociedad civil en el marco de la Revolución Bolivariana y del Socialismo del siglo XXI (1999-2009) from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Jácome Francine
Abstract: Entre 1958 y 1998 la sociedad civil en Venezuela había transitado por dos etapas fundamentales (García-Gaudilla, 2003). Una primera, entre 1958 y finales del decenio de los setenta, caracterizada por la formación de organizaciones y movimientos sociales autónomos cuyo desarrollo del activismo en los barrios populares se centró en aspectos culturales con grupos religiosos, de teatro y periódicos comunitarios paralelos a las luchas vecinales (Antillano, 2005). Una segunda, a partir de los ochenta que dio paso a una nueva fase de consolidación y diversificación de las Organizaciones de la Sociedad Civil (OSC). En ella desempeñó un papel importante el proceso
Diez años después: from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Arcos Hugo Eduardo Ramírez
Abstract: Carismático, espontáneo y provocador, el actual mandatario de los venezolanos cumple 10 años de su mandato. Entre las voces de quienes lo aclaman como el salvador de la nación y las de aquellos que lo denuncian como un dictador, el gobierno del presidente Chávez y su proyecto de Revolución Bolivariana, constituyen una forma particular de establecer lazos entre gobernante y gobernados.
El discurso de Hugo Chávez. from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Arreaza Irma Chumaceiro
Abstract: En el contexto latinoamericano actual, la figura, el discurso y la acción política de Hugo Chávez son motivo permanente de controversia: de fuertes adhesiones y de polémicos rechazos. Venezuela, a diez años del ejercicio en la presidencia de Chávez, vive día a día el poder movilizador de su palabra y de su acción. Seguidores y opositores del proyecto ideológico del presidente se debaten entre el respaldo irrestricto a su carismático liderazgo y el ataque frontal y vehemente a sus políticas y a su ejercicio dirigente. Por un lado, su verbo coloquial, encendido y confrontador seduce y mantiene fuertes adhesiones entre
Discurso, poder e historia en el pensamiento de Hugo Chávez (1998-2009) from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Quiñonez Yessica
Abstract: En este estudio se plantea el análisis del discurso por medio de la expresión política que adquiere. Ello conlleva, en primer lugar, a entender el discurso como una interacción social y no solo como un mecanismo de expresión de ideas, es decir, que los actos del habla —escritos, impresos, audiovisuales, entre otros— no consisten solamente en estructuras de sonidos e imágenes, en formas abstractas de oraciones o complejas estructuras de sentido global o local, sino que es necesario describirlos como acciones sociales que llevan a cabo los usuarios del lenguaje cuando se comunican entre sí, en situaciones sociales y dentro
La estructura aglutinante del poder revolucionario en la Venezuela de Hugo Chávez from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) R. Vicente Torrijos
Abstract: Pero eso sería un error ya que, conceptual y materialmente, la estructura simbólica y física del poder conforma una unidad activa y actuante (
una estructura aglutinante en construcción permanente) que sintetiza el origen, la evolución e, incluso, el
Aspectos sociales de la política actual from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) de Acedo Clemy Machado
Abstract: Se desarrollarán dentro del siguiente texto las características de los programas sociales de la V República, cuyos voceros, en términos mucho más radicales que los del Gobierno anterior, marcan diferencias profundas con las estrategias “economicistas” de la IV República y su política social “asistencialista”.
La economía durante la Revolución Bolivariana from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Leidenz Claudia Curiel
Abstract: Es usual que el análisis sobre la economía de un país comience por temas relacionados con su senda de crecimiento, y con la composición y desempeño de la actividad productiva. Sin embargo, los diez años de la Revolución Bolivariana plantean un esfuerzo analítico, a partir del modelo de desarrollo propuesto en el marco del proyecto político que lidera el presidente Hugo Chávez. Esta situación ha producido cambios profundos en las relaciones entre el Estado y la empresa privada, que caracterizan la dinámica de la actividad productiva. Uno de los principales elementos modeladores de estas relaciones ha sido la modificación del
Diez años de política exterior from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Romero Carlos A.
Abstract: Este proceso se ha dado dentro de una combinación de temas tradicionales y novedosos: la utilización del petróleo como el instrumento principal de participación en el escenario mundial y hemisférico; el activismo internacional del país; un cambio de régimen y la
Cambios en el tipo de régimen y la nueva política exterior de Venezuela from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Corrales Javier
Abstract: Este ensayo explora cómo una variable particular —el cambio en el tipo de régimen político— ha influido la política exterior de Venezuela.¹ Propondré que el cambio de Venezuela desde una democracia fallida, pero aun así pluralista, hacia un régimen semi-autoritario (Corrales, 2005; Corrales & Penfold, 2007) ayuda a explicar dos tipos de cambios en la política exterior. El primero tiene que ver con los
objetivos. En particular, argumentaré que dos de los nuevos objetivos de la política exterior de Venezuela —la búsqueda de vínculos más cercanos con países no democráticos (non-democracies) y el apoyo activo a grupos políticos y gobiernos
La integración energética y la estrategia regional de integración del gobierno del presidente Hugo Chávez from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Becerra Carlos Martínez
Abstract: Para contextualizar este análisis es importante revisar la actual crisis económica en cifras, en particular el detonante en 2007, a propósito del crecimiento de la deuda de Estados Unidos con el exterior —10 billones de dólares—, mientras que la deuda total, incluyendo deuda pública, empresarial y personal, se elevó a la cifra de 50 billones de dólares, tres veces
Diez años en la relación transfronteriza colombo-venezolana from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Bustamante Ana Marleny
Abstract: La relación transfronteriza colombo-venezolana en los diez años de gobierno del presidente Hugo Rafael Chávez Frías ha sido tan dinámica como impredecible. Su propuesta de cambiar sustancialmente el régimen político dominante en Venezuela hasta 1998, y la decidida militancia de los gobiernos de Colombia con su sistema, son factores preponderantes en los desencuentros en la política exterior y en las relaciones entre ellos.
Avances y retrocesos en la concepción del agua en Venezuela y la gobernanza de las cuencas binacionales from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) León Pauline Ochoa
Abstract: La visión actual del agua en Venezuela, plasmada en la Constitución de 1999,¹ está encaminada a transformar la relación entre la población y las instituciones,
Los partidos políticos en la década de Chávez from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Egaña Fernando Luís
Abstract: La crisis del sistema de partidos políticos en Venezuela no empezó con el arribo al poder de Hugo Chávez Frías. De hecho, puede afirmarse que la profundidad y extensión de esa crisis, incubada desde mediados del decenio de los setenta y eclosionada a finales de los años ochenta, es un factor primordial para ayudar a comprender el ascenso político del comandante Chávez y el sostenimiento de la denominada Revolución Bolivariana.
Del partido único al partido militar from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Blanco Carlos
Abstract: Hugo Chávez presume que conduce una revolución, definida por su condición bolivariana y cuyo propósito es instaurar el Socialismo de siglo XXI. Para lograr ese objetivo requiere la construcción de un partido que dirija, sostenga y respalde el proceso. En este trabajo se plantea que el objetivo de erigir un partido único de la revolución se ha hecho difícil, dadas las características políticas y sociales del régimen venezolano, y en su lugar, el verdadero soporte es el que proporciona la Fuerza Armada Nacional Bolivariana (FANB), que se ha procurado constituir como partido de la revolución. Dada la naturaleza de la
Entre el sistema electoral y la coyuntura política en Venezuela from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Henao Javier Andrés Flórez
Abstract: El dos de febrero de 2009 el presidente de Venezuela, Hugo Chávez Frías, cumplió diez años de vigencia en el Palacio de Miraflores, celebración que prácticamente empató con la posibilidad que ahora tiene de permanecer en el poder indefinidamente, gracias a la aprobación del referéndum realizado el 15 de febrero de 2009. Al día de hoy, Hugo Chávez se autoproclama como presidente-candidato y se entiende, entonces, que sus actos de gobierno, son también actos de campaña, lo que sin duda pone en desventaja a sus posibles rivales. Parece ser que estos diez años son tan solo el comienzo de la
Relaciones civiles y militares en Venezuela (1998-2008) from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Irwin Domingo
Abstract: Los cambios experimentados en la sociedad venezolana, durante los últimos diez años, son de evidente dimensión militar, tanto en su organización interna como en su interactuar con el resto de la sociedad. Las relaciones civiles y militares 1 en Venezuela durante la última década presentaron situaciones novedosas y un protagonismo castrense, no visto desde las reformas implementadas después del 23 de enero de 1958, y el fin de la llamada Década Militar. Procurando seguir un hilo conductor cronológico, se comentarán los aspectos que consideramos como relevantes sobre las transformaciones castrenses y su relación con la sociedad venezolana durante los últimos
Diez años de Revolución Bolivariana: from:
Hugo Chávez. Una década en el poder
Author(s) Buttó Luís Alberto
Abstract: El conjunto de cambios de diversa índole, introducidos en la sociedad venezolana con el triunfo de la mencionada revolución, encontró expresión privilegiada en la manera de pensar, organizarse y actuar de los numerarios de la Fuerza Armada Nacional (FAN),
1 Hermeneutical Theology from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: Everything has its time. Hermeneutical theology had its time—in the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. That is a significant duration. In contrast to some other theological movements, it did not simply remain an announcement and an agenda; it actually has a history that is worth remembering. But does it have a present that is worth mentioning? Or any future at all? Are there reasons to continue that which students of Rudolf Bultmann such as Ernst Fuchs, Gerhard Ebeling, and Eberhard Jüngel—and their own students—began two or three generations ago? And what would there be to continue, if one
2 Trends within Twentieth-Century Hermeneutics from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: We can understand, and sometimes we actually do. Yet we do not always understand, and we do not need to understand all the time in order to live our lives. Much of what we do in our shared worlds of meaning is governed by daily routines that we perform without understanding what they are
3 Guiding Ideas of Understanding from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: Understanding can occur only within a specific context, under particular conditions, and with some guiding assumptions. A central task of critical hermeneutics is to consider these factors and address their impact. The (mostly unthematized) contextual conditions of the attempt to understand show up in many places: in the standpoint of the interpreter, in the process of interpretation, in that which is assumed to be already understood, and also, most decisively, in how the
interpretandumis defined. How one defines what one is trying to understand determines which questions of understanding arise and are investigated. The guiding preunderstanding, which is manifest
7 On Hermeneutical Theology’s Hermeneutical Approach from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: The universal, comprehensive, and exclusive employment of the word-event model is also the basis for the characteristic and fundamental hermeneutical orientation of hermeneutical theology. Its primary goal is to understand the understanding of God and to understand everything else in the light of this understanding.
11 Resonance Analysis of Revelation from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: Bultmann sought to ground his theology in the responsive structure of faith, which confessed itself to be based on God’s revelation. God’s revelatory action is
12 Radical Theology from:
Radical Theology
Abstract: From other standpoints, this new point of view may appear to be merely a
differentviewpoint, one other variant within a series of (cultural or religious) phenomena. This is not wrong. In fact, that it can be seen in this way
Book Title: Exodus and Resurrection-The God of Israel in the Theology of Robert W. Jenson
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Nicol Andrew W.
Abstract: Exodus and Resurrection establishes the important place God’s identity as the “God of Israel" has in the systematic theology of Robert W. Jenson. The work demonstrates that the identification of the God of Israel as the agent of Jesus’ resurrection functions as a foundational premise in Jenson’s Trinitarian theology. Andrew W. Nicol argues that a central characteristic of Jenson’s work is not merely his recognition that the same God who rescued Israel from Egypt raised Jesus from the dead, or the related yet distinct step of renovating his theology in a nonsupersessionist fashion, but also his attempt to conceive of the full implications for doing so in Christian theology, in the church’s self-understanding, and in the church’s relation to Israel and continuing Judaism. In this, Exodus and Resurrection provides a clear and critically appreciative account of Robert W. Jenson’s work and offers a new vital architectonic map of Jenson’s systematic vision.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t751
1 The God of Israel in the Theology of Robert Jenson from:
Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: Robert Jenson numbers among the world’s most influential living theologians, and his
Systematic Theologymay yet prove to be one of the most learned and stimulating written in English, or any language, in the last fifty years.¹ As Jenson continues to apply his breadth of knowledge to all manner of theological, ecclesial, and cultural concerns, one theme has attracted much of his energy and focus for over a decade. Indeed, the “theology of Israel” that comes to fruition in theSystematic Theologydisplays Jenson’s determination to work through the implications of a “newly demanding” confrontation with the fact of Judaism.²
3 God in Israel’s Life from:
Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: In biblical Israel’s narrative, there is a telling of God’s identity that is not finally reducible to a mere expression of “normal” religion’s apprehension of deity. This chapter further explicates Jenson’s understanding of this “telling,” of Israel’s history, and the manner in which this drama makes and shapes the gospel promise. In addition, while aspects of Jenson’s account of the God of Israel’s intimate dealings with this people are relatively conventional, others have attracted considerable criticism. This extrapolation seeks to draw attention to innovation and locate Jenson’s characteristic moves within the conceptual nexus that integrates his system, highlighting their significance
5 The God of Israel and the Trinity from:
Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: The one God of Israel who speaks and acts through Word and Spirit is intimately identified by and with Israel’s life. Can Israel’s Scripture accommodate the gospel so that it is seen that this same God, the God of Israel, speaks by Word and Spirit in and through Jesus Christ? The doctrine of the Trinity is the church’s emphatic answer to this question. In contrast to some assumptions, Jenson insists that the church’s Trinitarianism does not in fact depart from Israel’s interpretation of God.² This is to be observed in the shape of the early Christian mission where primal Trinitarianism
7 The Identity of the One and Triune God of Israel from:
Exodus and Resurrection
Abstract: As noted in chapter 1, this book is concerned to assess the impact Jenson’s understanding of the God of Israel has on his wider systematic framework, including its effect on the overall coherence of his thought. In so doing, it also seeks to situate his work within the wider dogmatic tradition, insofar as this illuminates and scrutinizes his work and the importance of the abiding significance of God’s identity as the “God of Israel.” We have seen in earlier chapters that Jenson’s explication of the dogmatic centrality of the God of Israel touches on almost all loci of theology proper.
2 The Flesh of Christ in Modern Theology: from:
The Holy One in Our Midst
Abstract: In the first chapter we highlighted the significance of the doctrine known as the
extra Calvinisticumand attempted to identify some important areas of discussion that have gone unaddressed. In addition, we offered a preview of the cumulative-case argument to be constructed and identified the major goals of this project. Specifically, we claimed that there have been no extended statements of or responses to the theological objections to theextra Calvinisticum; the question of the doctrine’s overall coherency has largely been ignored by its adherents and is quickly appealed to by its detractors. Because of this confusion, chapters 2 and
Book Title: Theology in the Flesh-How Embodiment and Culture Shape the Way We Think about Truth, Morality, and God
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress
Author(s): Sanders John
Abstract: Metaphors and other mental tools are used to reason (not just speak) about God, salvation, truth, and morality. Figurative language structures our theological and moral reasoning in powerful ways. This book uses an approach known as cognitive linguistics to explore the incredibly rich ways our conceptual tools, derived from embodied life and culture, shape the way we understand Christian teachings and practices. The cognitive revolution has generated amazing insights into how human minds make sense of the world. This book applies these insights to the ways Christians think about topics such as God, justice, sin, and salvation. It shows that Christians often share a set of very general ideas but disagree on what the Bible means or the moral stances we should take. It explains why Christians often develop a number of appropriate but sometimes incompatible ways to understand the Bible and various doctrines. It assists Christians in understanding those with whom they disagree. Hopefully, simply better understanding how and why people think the way they do will foster better dialogue and greater humility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b3t7k7
7 Christian Doctrines from:
Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Thinking about theological topics such as sin and salvation makes use of the ordinary embodied cognitive processes we use every day. There is not a particular area of the brain or specific pattern of brain activity associated with religious experiences. Rather, as Brown and Strawn suggest: “there are a multitude of forms of body and brain activity that can mediate and embody religious experiences and the sense of the presence of God, but any particular brain-body event is experienced as religious or not based on the person’s expectations and ways of understanding their subjective experiences.”¹ The way we understand theology
9 Conceiving God from:
Theology in the Flesh
Abstract: Do we have to think of God using human categories? If we do, which characteristics should be attributed to God? Is God more like a person or more like a force, such as gravity? Can we escape anthropomorphism? Is all of our thinking about God metaphorical or is any of it literal? This chapter examines these questions from a cognitive linguistics approach and argues that humans have to use anthropogenic (human originating) and species-specific concepts for God. The real debate is about which concepts various religious communities believe are appropriate for God. The concept of God is a graded category
Book Title: The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things-A Contemporary Chinese Philosophy of the Meaning of Being
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Meyers Chad Austin
Abstract: Yang Guorong is one of the most prominent Chinese philosophers working today and is best known for using the full range of Chinese philosophical resources in connection with the thought of Kant, Hegel, Marx, and Heidegger. In The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things, Yang grapples with the philosophical problem of how the complexly interwoven nature of things and being relates to human nature, values, affairs, and facts, and ultimately creates a world of meaning. Yang outlines how humans might live more fully integrated lives on philosophical, religious, cultural, aesthetic, and material planes. This first English translation introduces current, influential work from China to readers worldwide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x4qv
Introduction from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Abstract: That which human being faces is neither an already-completed world nor primordial beings in-themselves.¹ From human being’s perspective, the world is incomplete by nature and in appearance. By “the world” we mean actual beings relative to the being of humans. Beings in-themselves are indeed really there, but they might not be actual for human beings. To be actual, beings must become objects of human being’s cognition and practice, and consequently, present actual meaning to human being. In this sense, actuality is characterized by becoming. The transformation of beings in-themselves into actuality is thus a historical interaction. In ancient Chinese, this
3 Systems of Norms and the Genesis of Meaning from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Abstract: The historical process of accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things, as we have seen, is internally conditioned by human capacities, but many forms of normative systems condition it as well. On the one hand, accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things concretely unfolds as a process of knowing and practicing, which involves different senses of normativity. On the other hand, the knowledge and wisdom formed through this process further constrain knowing and practicing by means of externalizing, transforming into universal systems of norms. Directed at knowing the world and the self and changing both the self and the world, norms not only involve
4 Meaning in the World of Spirit from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Abstract: Conditioned by the interrelation of human capacities with systems of norms, accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things constitutes human being’s basic way of being and mode of being. In the historical unfolding of accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things, the presentation of things and the directionality of intentions reciprocally interact; the world enters the realm of ideas through this interaction and henceforth becomes being with meaning. As noted earlier, the problem of meaning does not occur to the world in-itself; rather, the source of meaning lies in the historical process of one coming to know the world and oneself while transforming both
5 Meaning and Reality from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Abstract: In the process of accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things, meaning is not only presented at the level of ideas in the act of cognizing and evaluating; when grounded in practical activity, meaning is also externalized as the world of actual beings or the real world. As the externalization or actualization of meaning, this domain of being, which is generated through the process of knowing and practicing could also be seen as the actual or external formation of a world of meaning, whose actual content is the Nature for-humans or things-for-us as social reality or the living world.
7 Accomplishing Oneself and Accomplishing Things: from:
The Mutual Cultivation of Self and Things
Abstract: Free individuality, human capacities, and inner state of mind most directly involve the personal space of the self but also in a broader sense the distinction and interaction between the individual domain and the public sphere. As interrelated aspects of the social world, the individual domain and its connection to the public sphere also sets the concrete background for the historical process of accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things. As the actual mode of being, accomplishing oneself and accomplishing things is never separable from diverse social resources, and the acquisition, possession, and distribution of resources involves the issue of social justice.
L’Histoire interrogée from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: I. Le rapport du roman français contemporain à l’Histoire, qui est l’objet du présent volume, se poursuit depuis une bonne trentaine d’années avec une régularité remarquable, tout en ne représentant qu’une parmi les tendances de la littérature d’aujourd’hui, qu’on est loin de vouloir surestimer. Les récits qui développent cette relation sont en principe caractérisés par un regard rétrospectif tourné vers le passé, même si, comme le remarque André Peyronie dans le collectif Le
Romanesque et l’historique, « on trouve […] nombre de romans dont l’action est située dans la contemporanéité de leur auteur, mais qui prennent fortement en compte la
Petit éloge du biais. Ou comment la fiction habille l’Histoire par le travers ; exposé illustré de quelques exemples de couture – la photo de famille, l’archive, le document from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Garat Anne-Marie
Abstract: Ce titre s’inspire d’une activité de couture qui présente avec celle de l’écriture maintes analogies textiles – la couture, tropisme de fille ? Mettons, sans tomber dans l’autofiction, que j’ai grandi non loin de la table de coupe, des chutes de tissu et de la machine à coudre de marque Singer, desquelles je m’autorise pour aborder par ce biais de la couture le rapport de la Fiction à l’Histoire, souvent présente dans mes romans (et même leur fil à bâtir) sans en être proprement le sujet : je ne cherche pas à imiter les champions dix-neuviémistes et autres feuilletonistes illustres qui
Globalisation et synchronies historiques: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Viart Dominique
Abstract: En épigraphe à
L’Invitation, récit d’un voyage en URSS¹, Claude Simon rappelle la formule de Bismarck selon laquelle « Le seul facteur permanent de l’Histoire, c’est la géographie » . La phrase semble frappée au bon coin de l’évidence. Mais en est-on si sûr ? La géographie elle-même n’est-elle pas mouvante ? Les continents ne dérivent certes qu’imperceptiblement mais, notre époque est bien placée pour le savoir, les saisons, les climats, l’activité sismique ne sont pas toujours égaux à eux-mêmes. La flore en est changée quand ce n’est pas l’activité humaine qui s’emploie à ces métamorphoses, déforeste ici, canalise là,
Événement révolutionnaire, fractures narratives et ruines ontologiques en contexte post-révolutionnaire from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Lagardère Lucie
Abstract: Dans le cadre de cette recherche, nous nous demandons s’il existe des thèmes et des formes caractéristiques des proses narratives s’occupant d’écrire l’histoire et l’actualité. En remontant vers le XIX
e, c’est le sens historien du terme “contemporain” que nous choisissons et le regard vers l’arrière que nous épousons. Il nous semble en effet que la question posée ne soit pas réservée aux XXeet XXIesiècles et que nous pouvons trouver des points de ressemblance avec les premières années du XIXe, pendant l’époque révolutionnaire et impériale. Celle-ci est plus particulièrement sentie par les auteurs que nous étudions comme une période
Regards romanesques sur la Grande Guerre: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Schoentjes Pierre
Abstract: L’intérêt pour l’histoire, qui caractérise la littérature contemporaine depuis 1980, s’accompagne régulièrement d’une attention accrue pour l’univers de la violence, souvent extrême. Alors qu’aucune des grandes nations de la « vieille Europe » n’a plus connu de conflit militaire sur son territoire depuis la fin de la Seconde Guerre mondiale, les écrivains se sont tournés massivement vers la thématique guerrière. Il y a aujourd’hui plus de trente ans qu’ils se sont mis à interroger la Grande Guerre, 40-45 et les guerres de décolonisation. Le succès remporté par
Les Bienveillantesde Jonathan Littell en 2006 et plus récemment encore par Alexis
Dire la décolonisation à la française: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Panocchia Sabina
Abstract: Culturellement, la France est le pays du cartésianisme, de la laïcité, le berceau du Siècle des Lumières qui a influencé la révolution américaine, puis française, et a promulgué les droits de l’homme. Mais pendant des siècles la France a été aussi un pays colonisateur qui a soutenu l’esclavage et l’oppression des peuples. Certes, l’ère de la décolonisation a pris fin mais l’histoire de la décolonisation française semble être encore à écrire. En effet, le silence est au coeur des guerres de décolonisation. Un silence qui trouve, sans doute, dans le contexte politique français des années 60-70 un des facteurs déterminants.
La révolution du désir pendant Mai 68: from:
Le roman français contemporain face à l’Histoire
Author(s) Tamassia Paolo
Abstract: Observateur pénétrant ou, selon certains, dissecteur cynique de l’âge contemporain, Michel Houellebecq estime nécessaire un regard historique rétrospectif pour comprendre le présent. L’un des axes principaux de son oeuvre romanesque vise à répondre à une question fondamentale : pourquoi en est-on arrivé à la situation présente ? Situation jugée catastrophique et sans issue. C’est la question que se posent plusieurs personnages des
Particules élémentaires¹, roman dont il s’agit dans cette étude. Si Houellebecq n’est pas le seul auteur contemporain qui se tourne vers le passé afin de comprendre l’état actuel des choses, plus rares sont les écrivains qui esquissent dans
L’état des choses from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Au début des années quatre-vingt-dix en Italie, l’étude de la littérature française du présent comptait quelques adeptes qui partageaient souvent cette tâche avec celle sur la littérature des autres saisons, considérées, celles-ci, comme consolidées par le temps. Nul n’envisageait que les incursions dans la prose d’une extrême actualité puissent devenir un domaine scientifique autonome. À la limite, on considérait ces “ digressions” occasionnelles comme un appendice de la littérature du XX
èmesiècle, comme l’expression d’une certaine excentricité de la part de qui s’y consacrait. Les promoteurs solitaires de tentatives extratemporelles étaient, à l’époque, retenus des scientifiques marginaux, dont les ambitions
Solitudes familiales from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Rubino Gianfranco
Abstract: Solitude: Situation d’une personne qui est seule, de façon momentanée ou durable; situation de celui qui est habituellement seul ou presque seul, qui a peu de contacts avec autrui.
Polyphonie du solitaire: from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Rabaté Dominique
Abstract: Réfléchir en commun aux nouvelles solitudes contemporaines est, pour moi, une façon de revenir sur les propositions faites dans
L’invention du solitaire¹, en les prolongeant vers notre temps le plus actuel. J’avais en effet essayé de distinguer trois périodes pour cette histoire des figures du solitaire. Dans le sillage de Rousseau, qui constitue l’indispensable archéologie de cette notion, c’est le moment romantique qui inaugure la modernité du questionnement mené par le solitaire, et l’exploration d’un divorce (cruel et fécond à la fois) entre individu et société. La question qui pourrait emblématiser ce premier moment est celle de Jean-Jacques: suis-je «
Géométries solitaires: from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Termite Marinella
Abstract: Comment la solitude peut-elle rétablir des contacts (ou bien en engendrer d’autres) et déjouer
La communauté des lecteurs à l’oeuvre sur le web from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Majorel Abeline
Abstract: Par sa gestuelle, ses habitudes, l’acte même de déchiffrer des signes, le lecteur n’est jamais seul. Il est communauté. Son interprétation d’un texte est individuelle, elle lui est propre, mais, même isolé du monde, le fait de lire le place dans la grande communauté de l’humain. Lire est une expérience sociale, une valeurtemps de communion. L’auteur par son acte d’écrire se confronte à son individualité, à son expérience, il est seul. Le lecteur jamais. Il partage déjà, il dialogue avec l’auteur. Comme l’a dit Michel Houellebecq, « le lecteur doit faire 50 % du travail ». Intervenir sur la thématique
Des solitudes, ensemble from:
Nuove solitudini
Author(s) Jacquet Marie Thérèse
Abstract: Pour cerner la question des “nouvelles solitudes” qui pose, au premier niveau, la question du rapport, réel ou supposé, du sujet avec ses semblables, il me semble utile de faire un détour pour prendre en considération les façons dont ce même thème peut être lu ou vécu, actuellement, autour de nous, dans des domaines plus ou moins éloignés de la littérature, qui ont connu des transformations susceptibles d’un impact fort sur nos vies et, peut-être alors, sur notre rapport avec la notion qui nous intéresse.
Book Title: Le bal des arts-Le sujet et l’image : écrire avec l’art
Publisher: Quodlibet
Author(s): Rolla Chiara
Abstract: Aujourd’hui, les frontières des formes artistiques tendent à devenir de plus en plus indéfinissables sous l’effet d’une intense activité de circulation, d’hybridation et de métissage conduisant à la naissance de nouveaux régimes de la création et à la composition d’oeuvres complexes et multiples. Les textes littéraires n’échappent pas à cette transformation mettant en scène de nouveaux paradigmes de lecture et de signification par l’expérimentation d’autres manières de dire la réalité, de raconter des histoires, de se poser face au monde. Le sujet, son statut et les modalités de sa présence dans les oeuvres littéraires qui entretiennent une relation avec les autres arts, sont autant d’axes privilégiés dans ce volume. En transgressant les frontières entre les arts, les oeuvres donnent à voir et à penser des univers de signification et de représentation élargis devant lesquels le sujet bénéficie en retour d’un accroissement de ses capacités de compréhension et d’invention. Dans ces textes la communication entre les différentes formes artistiques se trouve mise en jeu au point qu’il ne suffit plus de la définir en termes d’hybridation, et qu’il convient peut-être mieux d’y réfléchir en termes d’intermédialité. Le présent volume reprend ces thématiques de recherche et ces interrogations ; il les approfondit et les développe en déchiffrant des pratiques d’écriture contemporaines qui entretiennent des rapports étroits avec les arts et les techniques de l’image. Les mises au point théoriques et méthodologiques côtoient des analyses pointues et des propositions d’interprétation de phénomènes nouveaux et encore peu définis par la critique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b7x7k7
De la porosité des frontières from:
Le bal des arts
Author(s) Bricco Elisa
Abstract: Les frontières des formes artistiques tendent à devenir de plus en plus indéfinissables et poreuses sous l’effet d’une intense activité de circulation, d’hybridation ou, encore mieux, de métissage conduisant à la naissance de nouveaux régimes de la création et à la composition d’oeuvres complexes et multiples. Ces processus et ces aboutissements caractéristiques de l’esthétique contemporaine sont analysés par Nicolas Bourriaud dans son essai
Radicant¹, où il entreprend de déchiffrer les diverses approches des oeuvres et de la création artistique aujourd’hui. Les traits distinctifs des démarches artistiques qu’il inventorie sont tout à fait transposables au champ littéraire, notamment lorsqu’il spécifie l’activité
Espace historique et espace intime dans l’essai littéraire contemporain sur la peinture (Claude Esteban, L’ordre donné à la nuit) from:
Le bal des arts
Author(s) Vaugeois Dominique
Abstract: L’ordre donné à la nuitde Claude Esteban, le dernier des écrits du poète sur l’art, paru en 2005 aux éditions Verdier, pose d’intéressantes questions à qui étudie l’essai contemporain sur l’art. Il s’agit d’une petite prose caractérisée par ce que l’on peut considérer comme un trait classique dans l’histoire de l’essai de poète sur l’art: la relation à sa propre pratique poétique au miroir de la création plastique. Toutefois ce qui retiendra notre attention, ce n’est pas le rôle que la peinture a joué dans la compréhension par Esteban de son itinéraire de poète, même s’il s’agit de la
Narration et photographie. from:
Le bal des arts
Author(s) Hertrampf Marina Ortrud M.
Abstract: Un regard sur la production littéraire dans le domaine des textes (auto) biographiques et autofictionnels des dernières années nous montre la prolifération des iconotextes. Cela n’étonne pas vraiment, car la mémoire et l’acte de se souvenir entretiennent une forte relation avec la photographie. Pour un très grand nombre de textes (auto) biographiques et autofictionnels, une photographie sert de stimulus pour la mémoire et suscite l’acte d’écrire sur son propre passé ou celui d’autrui. Comme traces du passé, des photos servent de documents authentiques et d’archives visuelles de la biographie du narrateur-protagoniste¹.
La force discrète des sentiments from:
Il ritorno dei sentimenti
Author(s) Majorano Matteo
Abstract: Quel espace ont en effet les sentiments dans la littérature française actuelle? Dans quelle mesure sont-ils présents et, dans ce cas, de quelle manière ont-ils modifié l’écriture contemporaine transalpine?
Book Title: Grand Hotel Abyss-Desire, Recognition and the Restoration of the Subject
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Safatle Vladimir
Abstract: Long-expected translation of the Portuguese academic bestseller Grande Hotel Abismo. In the last two decades recognition - arguably one of the most central notions of the dialectical tradition since Hegel - has once again become a crucial philosophical theme. Nevertheless, the new theories of recognition fail to provide room for reflection on transformation processes in politics and morality. This book aims to recover the disruptive nature of the dialectical tradition by means of a severe critique of the dominance of an anthropology of the individual identity in contemporary theories of recognition. This critique implies a thorough rethinking of basic concepts such as desire, negativity, will and drive, with Hegel, Lacan and Adorno being our main guides. The Marxist philosopher György Lukács said that the Frankfurt School (Horkheimer, Adorno, etc.) left us with nothing but negativity towards the state of the world. Their work failed to open up a concrete possibility of practical engagement in this world. All too eager to describe the impasses of reason, the Frankfurt philosphers remained trapped in a metaphorical Grand Hotel Abyss (Grand Hotel Abgrund). It was as living and being guardian of lettered civilization in a beautiful and melancholy grand hotel, of which the balconies face a gaping abyss. But perhaps in this way Lukács gave – and no doubt without realizing it himself – a perfect definition of contemporary philosophy, namely to confront chaos, to peer into what appears to a certain rationality as an abyss and to feel good about it. Touching Hegelian dialectics, critical theory and psychoanalysis, Grand Hotel Abyss gives a new meaning to the notion of negativity as the first essential step for rethinking political and moral engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1b9x1k5
Chapter III Not all things are destined for transience from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: Let us dwell for a moment on the suggestive closing lines of the preceding chapter: the transformation of individualities into political subjects implies their having the ability to convert subjective gestures into manifestations of a trans-individual multiplicity of desires. Were that to be the case, political subjects could conceivable attain a historical density of such great proportions within social struggles that they would in effect become modes for the actualization of a past never entirely gone, and, subsequently, points of contact for experiences scattered throughout time. This is unequivocally grasped by Walter Benjamin, as evidenced in the following statement: History
Chapter VII Our time unlocks a multiplicity in each desire from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: While the foregoing discussion of psychoanalytic drive theory has brought us to a renewed understanding of the problem of negativity, and allowed us to conceive of an individuality no longer subjugated to what we have termed the egological reduction of the subject, we have yet to examine how the restructuring of psychic activity is to be conducted; in particular, how psychic syntheses – understood here as being no longer exclusively dependent on egoderived modes of synthesis – operate.
Chapter VIII On the political power of the inhuman from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: If we accept: (a) the general consequences that follow from the mode of reflection on the nature of the subject presented in the first two parts of this book; as well as (b) the demands that recognition theory must consequently be able to meet, how are we to conceive of the practical dimension of rationality? Or, more specifically: once the rational normativity dependent on transcendental determinations of free will is removed as a reference point, for instance, what grounds remain for reflections on the morality of an action? Once we accept the proposed articulation between modes of psychic synthesis and
Conclusion from:
Grand Hotel Abyss
Abstract: Such were the questions that confronted us at the beginning of this book. Through the constitution of a system of conceptual interpenetrations derived from a dialectical tradition which has Hegel, Lacan and Adorno as its central figures – a system designed to privilege questions set in motion by the notions of desire, drive, fantasy and action – the aim of the ensuing pages has chiefly been to demonstrate how, remarkably often, an indistinct picture is indeed the one we need. After all, the adoption of a sharp image in place of an indistinct one frequently leads to the loss of precisely the
Book Title: Derecho Constitucional chileno I- Publisher: Ediciones UC
Author(s): Egaña José Luis Cea
Abstract: Esta obra contiene un completo análisis de la trayectoria constitucional de nuestra República desde 1925 a la fecha, las características y todas las reformas de las cartas fundamentales de aquel año y de 1980, además de la explicación del alcance de los capítulos I y II de la Constitución actualmente vigente y su legislación complementaria. En esta nueva edición han sido incorporadas las más recientes modificaciones al Derecho Positivo y las diversas interpretaciones que de ellas se han hecho, en particular por el Tribunal Constitucional. La inclusión de gráficos y cuadros estadísticos que ilustran sobre los rasgos principales de los procesos electorales, la abundante jurisprudencia y la transcripción de la historia fidedigna de los procesos constitucionales, además de un completo índice onomástico y de conceptos, consolidan a esta obra como un referente indispensable del derecho.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bhkqfr
PRÓLOGO A LA TERCERA EDICIÓN from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Author(s) Egaña José Luis Cea
Abstract: Los objetivos y desarrollo de la obra son los de la primera edición, inalterados en la segunda de ellas. He introducido, sin embargo, bibliografía adicional, jurisprudencia complementaria, cuadros estadísticos actualizados y, especialmente, planteamientos de nuevos problemas y la respuesta del autor a ellos.
CAPÍTULO III REFORMAS CONSTITUCIONALES 1943-1973 from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Diez fueron las modificaciones introducidas a la Constitución de 1925 desde su entrada en vigencia hasta la interrupción del proceso democrático en septiembre de 1973. A continuación se expondrán las características generales de todas ellas, para después analizarlas en particular.
CAPÍTULO II CARACTERÍSTICAS from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Dichas características no son las
CAPÍTULO I FUENTES from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Miguel Reale
261define las fuentes del derecho como los procesos o medios en virtud de los cuales las normas jurídicas se positivizan con fuerza legítima obligatoria, esto es, con vigencia y eficacia. El mismo autor menciona, con el carácter de fuentes, al proceso legislativo, a los usos y costumbres, a la actividad jurisdiccional y al poder negocial o expresión de la autonomía de la voluntad.
CAPÍTULO VII ESTADO DE DERECHO from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Tal tipo de Estado tiene ostensible sentido axiológico, imposible de limitar al positivismo formal de la legalidad escrita. Posee, además, ciertas bases y finalidades sustantivas que lo caracterizan, en el caso de Chile contempladas principalmente en los artículos 6° y
CAPÍTULO VIII PROBIDAD Y TRANSPARENCIA from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: Son públicos los actos y resoluciones de los órganos del Estado, así como sus fundamentos y los procedimientos que utilicen. Sin embargo, sólo una ley de quórum calificado podrá establecer la reserva o secreto de
[Quinta Parte Introduction] from:
Derecho Constitucional chileno I
Abstract: El capítulo II de la Constitución, en que aparecen las tres materias nombradas, tiene importancia sustantiva, pero menos densidad conceptual y riqueza jurídica que los capítulos I y III, referentes a las Bases de la Institucionalidad y a los Derechos Humanos, respectivamente. El capítulo II es, además, por la naturaleza de su contenido, más simple de reformar, pues los capítulos I y III requieren de un quórum excepcionalmente elevado a raíz de condensarse en ellos el
telosdel constitucionalismo que caracteriza al Código Político en vigor.
4 La personalidad de Jesús de Nazaret from:
Jesús de Nazaret en la percepción de un psicólogo
Abstract: EL OBJETIVO DE esta segunda parte es tratar de describir algunas características psicológicas de la personalidad de Jesús de Nazaret a partir de las narraciones de los evangelios. El término “personalidad” en psicología es un constructo o modelo teórico, que se utiliza para describir o para explicar algunos modelos de conductas que caracterizan a las personas y las diferencian de otras. El estudio de una personalidad comprende el análisis de un conjunto estructurado de rasgos que son más bien estables, los cuales configuran actitudes específicas y permanentes, que describen un carácter y otorgan un sello personal. La personalidad se puede
5 Las parábolas y la pedagogía de Jesús from:
Jesús de Nazaret en la percepción de un psicólogo
Abstract: UNA DE LAS características más notorias de la personalidad de Jesús fue su capacidad pedagógica, expresada en la originalidad de su lenguaje y en su habilidad para crear parábolas y metáforas, y para plantear comparaciones que enriquecían sus enseñanzas. La estrategia pedagógica de utilizar las parábolas constituyó un modelo de pedagogía abierto, formulado sobre la base de diálogos con sus oyentes. Sus contenidos aparecen siempre tomados de experiencias cotidianas. En algunos casos su enseñanza aparece como una estrategia pedagógica “activa” que implica la participación de quienes lo escuchaban basadas en ejemplos simples, de fácil comprensión. Algunas de ellas empiezan con
Book Title: Moments of Silence-Authenticity in the Cultural Expressions of the Iran-Iraq War, 1980-1988
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Vatanabadi Shouleh
Abstract: The Iran-Iraq War was the longest conventional war of the 20th century. The memory of it may have faded in the wake of more recent wars in the region, but the harrowing facts remain: over one million soldiers and civilians dead, millions more permanently displaced and disabled, and an entire generation marked by prosthetic implants and teenage martyrdom. These same facts have been instrumentalized by agendas both foreign and domestic, but also aestheticized, defamiliarized, readdressed and reconciled by artists, writers, and filmmakers across an array of identities: linguistic (Arabic, Persian, Kurdish), religious (Shiite, Sunni, atheist), and political (Iranian, Iraqi, internationalist). Official discourses have unsurprisingly tried to dominate the process of production and distribution of war narratives. In doing so, they have ignored and silenced other voices.Centering on novels, films, memoirs, and poster art that gave aesthetic expression to the Iran-Iraq War, the essays gathered in this volume present multiple perspectives on the war's most complex and underrepresented narratives. These scholars do not naively claim to represent an authenticity lacking in official discourses of the war, but rather, they call into question the notion of authenticity itself. Finding, deciding upon, and creating a language that can convey any sort of truth at all-collective, national, or private-is the major preoccupation of the texts and critiques in this diverse collection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bj4sc8
2 Lost Homelands, Imaginary Returns: from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) SHOHAT ELLA
Abstract: When I first contemplated my participation in the “Moments of Silence” conference, I wondered to what extent the question of the Arab Jew / Middle Eastern Jew merits a discussion in the context of the Iran-Iraq War. After all, the war took place in an era when the majority of Jews had already departed from both countries, and it would seem of little relevance to their displaced lives. Yet, apart from the war’s direct impact on the lives of some Jews, a number of texts have engaged the war, addressing it from within the authors’ exilic geographies where the war
4 War Veterans Turned Writers of War Narratives from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) GHANOONPARVAR M. R.
Abstract: Writers of fiction often rely on their imagination in their work, and professional writers are able to recreate scenes, events, and incidents of actual or imagined wars by imagining them. In contrast, some of those who experience war first hand, especially as combat soldiers, write about those experiences using the format of memoirs, and on occasion in the form of novels and short stories. The creative process for these veterans who have become writers of fiction is the reverse to that of what I have called professional writers. They fictionalize the actual traumatic events they have experienced.
7 Not a Manifesto: from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) BEARD MICHAEL
Abstract: There is a genre of landscape painting that developed in the late sixteenth century, notably in a series of six etchings Jacques Callot drew depicting the Spanish Siege of Jeda (1624–25). We know that Callot was commissioned by the Spanish government to memorialize their victory, and this may account for its visual orientation. In the foreground we see, from behind, a cluster of warships gliding toward the shore. We see ahead of them, inland, further up the picture, their Dutch opponents, much smaller, smaller in fact than perspective requires. Perspective is distorted further still as the eye moves up
10 Representation of the Iran-Iraq War in Kurdish Fiction from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) AMINPOUR MARDIN
Abstract: This chapter investigates some of the perspectives modern Kurdish literature has generally adopted vis-à-vis the phenomenon of war and the Kurds’ prolonged struggle for independence, with a narrower focus on examination of some of the notions and impressions of war informing the Kurdish fictional narratives that deal with the question of the Iran-Iraq War. Speaking in broad terms, nationalism has served as an interface between modern Kurdish literature and the Kurdish struggle for independence, establishing a dual-natured interaction between the two spheres such that, despite their unanimity of purpose, they have also confronted one another now and then. Conterminous with
11 Editing (Virayesh) as a Movement of Resistance during the Iran-Iraq War from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) FARAHZAD FARZANEH
Abstract: The role of language in shaping collective and national identities is of prime importance in socio-linguistic studies. The issue gains special significance in the case of Iran. There are at least three reasons for this. The first is that Iran has historically been in constant contact with
the foreignthrough political as well as economic, literary, and cultural interactions. The second is that it accommodates a variety of ethnic groups, minority languages, and dialects still spoken in different parts of the country. And the third is that, since its conversion to Islam, Iran was exposed to Arabic, both as the
12 Narratives of Silence: from:
Moments of Silence
Author(s) KHORRAMI MOHAMMAD MEHDI
Abstract: In a letter to F. Scott Fitzgerald, Ernest Hemingway called war “the writer’s best subject.” Hemingway justified this description by saying that “[War] groups the maximum of material and speeds up the action and brings out all sorts of stuff that normally you have to wait a lifetime to get.”¹ Keeping in mind the notion of dramatic license, he was probably right. And considering the fact that in the past few centuries the Persian literary tradition has had many chances to experience this “best subject,” it is reasonable to expect that many great works of Persian war literature have been
Book Title: Nowhere in the Middle Ages- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): LOCHRIE KARMA
Abstract: Literary and cultural historians typically cite Thomas More's 1516
Utopiaas the source of both a genre and a concept. Karma Lochrie rejects this origin myth of utopianism along with the assumption that people in the Middle Ages were incapable of such thinking. InNowhere in the Middle Ages, Lochrie reframes the terms of the discussion by revealing how utopian thought was, in fact, "somewhere" in the Middle Ages. In the process, she transforms conventional readings of More'sUtopiaand challenges the very practice of literary history today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzkpm
CHAPTER 4 “Something Is Missing”: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: Fredric Jameson’s assertion that utopia’s deepest subject is its own inconceivability—its own failure of imagination, in a sense—baldly contravenes a positivist utopian tradition characterized precisely as the full-fledged blueprint of an alternative, more perfect society. Jameson’s negative utopianism embraces this aspect of failure, but it is important to understand that this failure is not simply the commonplace fatality of a compromised individual or authorial imagination. It is, instead, what Jameson calls “the systemic, cultural, and ideological closure of which we are all in one way or another prisoners.”¹ Despite Thomas More’s inspiration for, and association with, utopianism of
CHAPTER 5 Reading Forward: from:
Nowhere in the Middle Ages
Abstract: Utopia, for all its playful allusiveness to “no-place,” comes from someplace, or rather from some places and not others. Like the chimerical centaur, it is a complex idea composed of an assemblage of other ideas and, at the same time, it engages with and responds to historical realities. But it is also entirely new, and the fact that Thomas More coined a self-canceling name for the island and the political idea associated with it tends to function somewhat like King Utopus’s moat, cordoning off that idea from the continent from which it might have come, either directly or indirectly. The
4 Kerygma and Decision from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: In Chapter 3, I claimed there is no confessing faith outside of an original philosophical faith. A common ground of
believingalways precedes thedecidedact of believing. To recognize oneself as “believing otherwise” is then not to disregard faith or to condemn the so-called unbeliever. This position is neither a kind of ostracism nor a kind of conformism, nor does it aim to relativize. On the contrary, it arises from a real resolution. Believingtheologicallyin God rests on first believingphilosophicallyin the world or in others—whether via a Cartesian act of negation, a Husserlian suspension of
5 “Tiling” and Conversion from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: The pathway from hermeneutics in Part I to belief in Part II, or from interpreting to deciding, opened a space for a philosophy of religious experience that was not content with a philosophy of religion. The importance of the kerygma calls for the rediscovery or reestablishment of an act of philosophizing, as proved by Pascal and Kierkegaard in their day, for which the experience of believing is not dismissed as a matter of course. In this Part III, the time has come to formalize what this essay on the boundaries between philosophy and theology truly aims to express from the
Epilogue: from:
Crossing the Rubicon: The Borderlands of Philosophy and Theology
Abstract: Primum vivere deinde philosophari—“first live and then philosophize.” This famous saying of the ancients reminds us what is at stake in the act of writing and thinking. We do not first write and then live afterward or “on the side,” as it were. Rather,we live and then we write.The first imperative is not to know how to write but to learn to live; otherwise we run the risk of having nothing to say. The particularity of the philosopher is that he participates in the incarnate. No error is greater than his confusing himself for an abstraction, whereby
Completion Instead of Revelation: from:
Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) FENVES PETER
Abstract: This essay is concerned with the act of the Messiah. According to a brief sketch that Walter Benjamin read to Theodor and Gretel Adorno in the winter of 1937–1938 and that has since acquired the title of “Theological-Political Fragment,” there is a single messianic act, the description of which requires three separate terms. Two of these terms can be easily translated into English, for they belong to a long tradition of theological speculation that encompasses a broad group of languages, including German and English. But the word through which Benjamin identifies
theact of the messiah—namely,vollenden—cannot
The Will to Apokatastasis: from:
Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) JENNINGS MICHAEL W.
Abstract: To begin with the ending: Walter Benjamin’s much discussed and little understood allegory of the Turkish puppet in his last known text, “On the Concept of History,” raises one central question for the entirety of his work: exactly
howmight politics take theology into its service, and to what effect?¹ Throughout his career, Benjamin’s use of theological concepts and motifs is invariably bound to the formulation of a politics; but how are we to trace the invisible strings that allow theology to ensure that historical materialism always wins? Benjamin’s deployment of theological motifs and his political commitments are of course
On Vanishing and Fulfillment from:
Walter Benjamin and Theology
Author(s) FRIEDLANDER ELI
Abstract: In various places in Benjamin’s writing the divine is identified in the total passing away and disappearance of the phenomenal. Probably the most famous case for such annihilative characterization of the divine occurs in the essay “Critique of Violence.” Yet, the account of divine violence in that essay, with its intimation of active destruction, tempts one to construe the moment of disappearance in terms of catastrophic effects wrought by God on the physical world, on the model of a force that makes visible changes in reality. This problematic figuration of the catastrophic in Benjamin’s vision of history might hide a
Book Title: The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis-Bicultural Film Archiving Practice in Aotearoa New Zealand
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Kelly Emma Jean
Abstract: Jonathan Dennis (1953-2002), was the creative and talented founding director of the New Zealand Film Archive. As a Pakeha (non-Maori/indigenous New Zealander) with a strong sense of social justice, Dennis became a conduit for tension and debate over the preservation and presentation of indigenous and non-indigenous film archival materials from the time the Archive opened in 1981. His work resulted in a film archive and curatorship practice which differed significantly from that of the North American and European archives he originally sought to emulate. He supported a philosophical shift in archival practice by engaging indigenous peoples in developing creative and innovative exhibitions from the 1980s until his death, recognizing that much of the expertise required to work with archival materials rested with the communities outside archival walls. This book presents new interviews gathered by the author, as well as an examination of existing interviews, films and broadcasts about and with Jonathan Dennis, to consider the narrative of a life and work in relation to film archiving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn6b
Chapter 2 The practice of the archive from:
The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: The cultural practice of archiving physical materials in dedicated institutions emerges from European museums and libraries and is adapted by film archives, which over time have developed their own styles most appropriate to the media which they house. In examining the literature on the physical archive it becomes quickly apparent that at times the pragmatic everyday aspects of archiving can seem very far removed from the more philosophical discussion, and that archivists may be under-resourced and overworked to the point where they take for granted the perspectives which ingrain their practice. The divide between the everyday work and the philosophical
Chapter 3 Jonathan SpencerDennis and the early years from:
The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: Barry Barclay described Jonathan Dennis’ work and his “stumbling prescience back in the first years …” which “… showed, at least in film archive circles, certainly in this country and perhaps internationally too, how he was much ahead of his time” (Barclay, 2005 p. 107). Conal McCarthy’s text,
Museums and Māori: Heritage Professionals Indigenous Collections Current Practice(2011) also briefly commented on Dennis’ work during the early 1980s which he said “demonstrated through an active public programme and community outreach how a small cultural organisation such as the archive could begin to take on board Māori values and practices” (McCarthy
Chapter 7 Beyond cinema, beyond the NZFA from:
The Adventures of Jonathan Dennis
Abstract: The previous chapter examined Dennis’ narratives of his life, while this chapter takes the threads of Dennis’ experience and knowledge of social injustice and relates these to the presentation of archival materials which he undertook. It will demonstrate how Dennis’ practice was a creative endeavour and a collaborative venture which sought, through remembering rather than forgetting the colonial history of NZ and the South Pacific, to trouble the contemporary moment. Stephen Turner’s analysis of settler culture and its effects is employed to consider Dennis’ practice.¹⁴⁰ In addition Homi Bhaba’s concept of hybridity is investigated in relation to one of Dennis’
Book Title: Moving Images-From Edison to the Webcam
Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: The 17 previously unpublished essays in Moving Images represent the best of current research in the history of this field. They make a timely and stimulating contribution to debates concerning the impact of new media on the history of cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzn7v
Foreword from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Olsson Jan
Abstract: M
oving Images:From Edison to the Webcam is the outcome of a conference held in the Department of Cinema Studies at Stockholm University from 6–9 December 1998. Organised in association with the Institute for Futures Studies, the conference showcased thirteen keynote addresses and almost sixty papers covering aspects as diverse as intermediality, indexicality, prosthesis, film and stage, screen practices and reception studies, documentary, film, history, memory, filmand changes in the modes of subjectivity, and transformations in the public and private spheres.
Introduction from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Widding Astrid Söderbergh
Abstract: On 17 October 1888, Thomas Alva Edison filed a caveat in which he announced that he was ‘experimenting upon an instrument which does for the Eye what the phonograph does for the Ear, which is the recording and reproduction of things in motion, and in such a form as to be Cheap, practical and convenient’. Just as work on the development of the instrument to which Edison referred, a precursor of the Kinetoscope, instances an apparatus that was framed in terms of the known technologies of the phonograph and the microscope, the essays in this collection variously address the contexts
Seeing Seeing: from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Gaycken Oliver
Abstract: In 1850, Hermann von Helmholtz published a short treatise entitled
Description of an Ophthalmoscope. Near its beginning, he describes his objective in the following words: ‘The present treatise contains the description of an optical instrument by which it is possible to see and recognize exactly in the living eye the retina itself and the images of luminous objects which are cast upon it.’² Helmholtz’s invention frequently is described as an event of foundational importance in the field of ophthalmology, an event that, indeed, creates that field in its modern sense.³ While such claims are not exaggerated, the ophthalmoscope nonetheless should
‘We Partake, as it Were, of His Life’: from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Griffiths Alison
Abstract: In her speech as outgoing president of the American Anthropological Association in 1960, pioneering visual anthropologist Margaret Mead urged her colleagues to make greater use of the technologies of the still camera, audio tape recorder and motion picture camera. According to some observers, the reaction among Mead’s professional audience was decidedly mixed. Her appeals were greeted with ‘restless stirrings and angry murmurs … as these notebook-oriented scholars expressed their irritation at this revolutionary suggestion.’¹ In some respects, it is hardly surprising that Mead’s colleagues balked at the idea of using tape recorders and motion picture cameras in the field; beyond
Stereotyping a Competitor: from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Camporesi Valeria
Abstract: If the question of the interrelationship of the cinematographic image to its signified cannot be avoided, the prime purpose of this study is not to establish whether there is a ‘discrepancy between facts and representations’.¹ My aim will be to analyse the ways in which an historical process, in this
Space and Character Representation in Interactive Narratives from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Thuresson Björn
Abstract: – How does an interactive narrative (I’m deliberately using the term ‘narrative’ instead of ‘fiction’) work and function?¹ What does it look like? How do you construct it?
Lurking and Looking: from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Murphy Sheila C.
Abstract: The 1990s has been a decade in which communications technologies and moving image technologies have converged inmultiple ways, producing new cultural ‘extensions’ (and fragmentations) of the human body and of subjectivity. I am particularly interested in the new mode of cultural engagement enacted by Internet users who extend their visual access to the public sphere by connecting to Internet webcamsites and becoming part of the always only partially knowable subculture of webcams (Fig. 1). Briefly, webcams, also known as SpyCams, are Internet websites that contain views of a wide range of vistas produced by connecting a video camera to a
The Interactive Filmmaker’s Challenge from:
Moving Images
Author(s) Hales Christopher
Abstract: This essay demonstrates how computer technologies can now offer completely new interactive movie paradigms and structures; that the expectations of the audience
Book Title: Early Cinema and the "National"- Publisher: John Libbey Publishing
Author(s): King Rob
Abstract: While many studies have been written on national cinemas, Early Cinema and the "National" is the first anthology to focus on the concept of national film culture from a wide methodological spectrum of interests, including not only visual and narrative forms, but also international geopolitics, exhibition and marketing practices, and pressing linkages to national imageries. The essays in this richly illustrated, landmark anthology are devoted to reconsidering the nation as a framing category for writing cinema history. Many of the 34 contributors show that concepts of a national identity played a role in establishing the parameters of cinema's early development, from technological change to discourses of stardom, from emerging genres to intertitling practices. Yet, as others attest, national meanings could often become knotty in other contexts, when concepts of nationhood were contested in relation to colonial/imperial histories and regional configurations. Early Cinema and the "National" takes stock of a formative moment in cinema history, tracing the beginnings of the process whereby nations learned to imagine themselves through moving images.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bmzncx
Introduction from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) King Rob
Abstract: The
nationand thenationalhave long circulated as useful, supposedly definitive categories in cinema history. One can find them in early film manufacturer catalogues such as the 1896 Lumière sales catalogue of films shot in distant parts of the globe and organized according to country of origin. Or in early trade press attempts “to classify the film product of the world”, such asNew York Dramatic Mirror’s 1908 compilation of the “distinguishing characteristics” or “infallible ear marks” of films produced by different countries.¹ Or in early histories of the cinema’s aesthetic development, such as Léon Moussinac’sNaissance du cinéma
1 Early cinema as global cinema: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: “Early cinema is a global cinema.” “National cinema only appears later in film history.” I would endorse both these statements as important historical principles, and might restate them, borrowing a phrase from my colleague Michael Raine, one of the finest historians of Japanese cinema, as “cinema was international before it was national”. However, immediately a flurry of problems intervene, mainly dealing with terminology. What do we mean by: “global”, “international” or even “national”? I am reminded of a story I heard from my former colleague Homi Bahbha (my apologies to him if my memory is not exact). Interviewing an executive
2 Nationalizing attractions from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Auerbach Jonathan
Abstract: Like most of us, I manage to wear more than one academic hat, having been trained in literary analysis, which I continue to pursue, along with my research in early cinema for the past decade or so, with American studies serving as something like a bridge between these two very different modes of representation, the verbal and the visual. Given the pressure to be “interdisciplinary” (whatever that means, exactly), I tried at first to combine these two interests, but have since learned the hard way that it is sometimes best to keep your hats separate. Attempting to import key operational
6 Mind-reading/mind-speaking: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Liepa Torey
Abstract: Despite the seemingly uncanny pithiness of Al Jolson’s famous lines, “Wait a minute! Wait a minute! You ain’t heard nothin’ yet”, in 1927, speech was not new to the cinema. In fact, speech had played a substantial role in silent films for nearly two decades. Dialogue intertitles and character-written inserts allowed cinematic representations to extend beyond the pictorial exterior and into the linguistic consciousness of characters. Silent film dialogue, however, brought more than a symbolic image of individual consciousness to the cinema. Reflecting a broader social matrix of language and power, written dialogue gave voice to the cultural politics endemic
9 Our Navy and patriotic entertainment in Brighton at the start of the Boer War from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Gray Frank
Abstract: Britain, as an imperial power, dominated the world at the end of nineteenth century. Jan Morris described it succinctly as, “the largest empire in the history of the world, comprising nearly a quarter of the landmass of the earth, and a quarter of its population”.¹ Its role as a global superpower was to assert its political and economic authority, especially in Africa and Asia. The so-called Pax Britannica (British peace) was a product of this status. It was expressed profoundly in 1900 by the fact that Britain and its global interests were defended by its navy – the largest navy in
10 “An England of our Dreams”?: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Christie Ian
Abstract: The Anglo-Boer War of 1899–1902 has long been known as one of the first conflicts in which modern media played an important role, with photographic illustration, telegraphy and film all actively involved.¹ But it would be more accurate to say that these “new media” were finding their place amid the established media of print and performance. Rather than stake a simple claim for the novelty of film, historians of the medium and its place in visual culture can offer the more complex insights that arise from tracing how film borrowed from and echoed the themes expressed in other media,
11 “The transport of audiences”: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) de Klerk Nico
Abstract: The materials that are the subject of this essay, films and their accompanying printed texts, were produced in the early and mid-1910s by the Association Koloniaal Instituut, in Amsterdam. This association was founded in 1910 as a centre for the promotion of science, education, trade, and manufacture. Alerted by a lack of interest in the Dutch colonies, in particular the East Indies (now Indonesia), the association’s founders conceived of the Colonial Institute as a center for the collection and study of data and objects of, and the dissemination of knowledge about, Dutch overseas territories. Besides exhibitions, publications or lectures, they
13 Teaching citizenship via celluloid from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Dahlquist Marina
Abstract: In the summer of 1910, Francis Oliver, the Chief of the Bureau of Licenses in New York City, conducted a study of moving picture theaters and concluded: “the motion picture theaters which were just now being condemned by a great many people, [are] a potent factor in the education of the foreign element and therefore an advantage to the city”.¹ Challenging misgivings that moving pictures suggested “bad” ideas, he further claimed “that many foreigners who could neither read nor write were enabled through the proper kind of pictures to get a good working idea of the customs of this their
14 Fights of Nations and national fights from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Mayer David
Abstract: My subject, a brief film shot for American Mutoscope & Biograph (AM&B) by Billy Bitzer, initially attracted me because four of the six episodes are cleverly choreographed variety stage acts – i.e. theatrical vaudeville sketches – restaged for the camera. Each sketch is undeniably abridged, but not otherwise altered: filmed straight-on in what appear to be single takes, the camera set-ups and lighting (or exposures) sometimes differ for different episodes. As a theater historian aware of how many scraps of the Victorian theater – narratives, genres, staging, effects – can be recovered from early film, I scour these films for evidential remnants, and Fights
16 Nationalist film-going without Canadian-made films? from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Moore Paul S.
Abstract: In urban, English Canada, the First World War was a significant marker of Canadian independence, maturing into a nation after British colonial adolescence. In defense of the British motherland, Canada found its national pride. This is especially applicable to Ontario, where stalwart Loyalist patriotism and a remarkable volunteerism signaled how Toronto would eventually eclipse Montreal culturally, industrially and economically as the national metropolis, having already done so in fact in the war effort.¹ But a Toronto-centric Canadian nation would never have that metropolis as a sentimental focus, neither as the heartland of a folk or an avant-garde culture, nor even
18 Wondrous pictures in Istanbul: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Balan Canan
Abstract: This essay presents a panorama of the evolution of viewing conventions in Istanbul, in the late 19th and early 20th centuries (from the 1890s to the 1930s). Within the Ottoman Empire, Westernist, Turkist and Islamist schools of thought were in keen competition when the cinématographe arrived in Istanbul, in 1896. Traces of the discursive space configured by these schools are quite visible in Turkish cultural history, specifically in the history of cinematic spectatorship. A set of binary oppositions – between East and West, between National and International, and, finally, between Islamist and Secular – dominated the framework for reactions to the cinématographe.
22 Joseph Dumais and the language of French-Canadian silent cinema from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Lacasse Germain
Abstract: Between 1910 and 1960 or so, the religious authorities in Québec as well as the lay conservatives who supported them would voice that opinion, a quotation from Joseph Dumais, an odd character who was a renowned diction teacher in the early 20th century. He also
25 “A purely American product”: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) King Rob
Abstract: In February 1915, Jeff Davis, the self-styled “King of the Hobos”, took the stage of New York’s Hammerstein’s theater to give audiences a tramp’s perspective on their nation’s history. America, Davis explained, was a nation founded on the tramp spirit. “He said Christopher Columbus was the first hobo ‘gink’ – since Queen Isabella had to ‘ stake him’ for the trip over.” Yet, while Davis admired Columbus as a hobo prototype, he was less enthusiastic about others who had followed the explorer’s trans-Atlantic journey: he ended his act by calling for immigration restriction, the better to give the American-born a shot
26 The “Chinese” conjurer: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Solomon Matthew
Abstract: One of the main roles in the ballet
Parade, the historic collaboration that brought Jean Cocteau, Pablo Picasso, and Erik Satie together with Serge Diaghilev’s Ballets Russes, is the “Chinese” Conjurer. Set outside of a fairground show, this 1917 one-actballet réalistefeatures a series of performers whose feats are meant to draw paying spectators inside. The ballet’s eponymous “parade” began with a dance choreographed and performed by Léonide Massine that consisted of a series of leaps and an elaborate pantomime of several conjuring tricks: drawing an egg from his sleeve, swallowing it, and producing it from his toe, then
27 A note on the national character of early popular science films from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Gaycken Oliver
Abstract: Various nations produced popular science films during the first twenty years of cinema history. The first systematic production of films on scientific topics for a wide audience came about in England, where F. Martin Duncan’s “The UnseenWorld” series, made for the Charles Urban Company, debuted in 1903. In late 1909 and early 1910, there was a flourishing of
films de vulgarisation scientifiquein France, following the success of Jean Comandon’s microcinematographic films produced for Pathé-Frères. In the USA, George Kleine published a catalogue of educational subjects in 1910, and soon thereafter the Edison Manufacturing Company made a foray into popular
32 Who is the “right” star to adore?: from:
Early Cinema and the "National"
Author(s) Haller Andrea
Abstract: In the early 20th century, movie stars often seemed to offer everything that real men did not. This essay explores how the female cinema audience in Imperial Germany responded to male movie stars and how their emerging movie fandom was linked to the contemporary discourse about nationality, national identity and patriotism during World War I. A telling example for this discussion is the German fan magazine debate about whether or not it was acceptable to “adore” the Norwegian actor Gunnar Tolnaes, who played characters as “foreign” as an Indian maharaja, instead of the German supreme commander, Paul von Hindenburg.
Chapter 3 The Elusive French Exception from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Collard Sue
Abstract: What exactly is the French exception? What, if anything, makes the French claim to exceptionalism more convincing than others such as the American, the German or the British (Lipset 1996; Adams and van Minnen 1994; Madsen 1998; Gauzy 1998; Colley 1992)? Are all nations not in some respect exceptional? Here my approach is not to seek the answers through a scholarly demonstration of the ways in which French history, politics and culture have combined to produce a particular set of events and traditions that are allegedly different from those of any other country, or by means of a comparative study
Chapter 4 French Communism: from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Bell David S.
Abstract: French exceptionalism in politics comes down in many respects to French ‘political culture’. ‘Political culture’ is used here to mean the orientation that people have towards politics and their expectations of political action. However, political culture is not a passive given. Political culture is inherited from the past but it is adapted and built on by political institutions which in this way help shape a society’s attitudes to politics. In the case of the French Communist Party (Parti communiste français: PCF), it successfully picked up and used aspects of a pre-existing political culture but it also added its own components.
Chapter 6 The French Administrative Exception: from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Stevens Anne
Abstract: In attempting to categorise administrative systems Edward Page (1995: 280) assigned the French system to a group onto itself. France is often regarded as being a particularly striking example, indeed the epitome, of a ‘Napoleonic’ or continental model, its features memorably summarised by Vincent Wright: ‘[s]tatist, powerful, hierarchically structured, ubiquitous, uniform, depoliticised, instrumental, expert and tightly controlled... a model attractive to tidy minds in untidy countries’ (1994b: 116). Pierre (1995) sees it as constituting one of the two globally dominant models, the other being the ‘Anglo-Saxon’ model. Sabino Cassese (Cassese 1987: 12) on the other hand, identifies three models: the
Chapter 8 The French Socialists, Dirigisme and the Troubled Europeanisation of Employment Policy from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Clift Ben
Abstract: The case for French exceptionalism in the field of state-economy relations centres on the distinctive French State tradition of
dirigisme.Dirigismehas been succinctly defined as ‘a set of interventionist policies and directive policy-making processes’ (Schmidt 1997: 229). Traditions of state direction of, and intervention in, economic activity in France have a long heritage, traceable at least as far back as Jean-Baptiste Colbert, minister under Louis XIV between 1661 and 1683. His bent for state interventionism in economic affairs reached a zenith when, in 1666, he issued arèglementto the effect that the fabrics of Dijon and Selangey were
Chapter 9 French Foreign and Defence Policy: from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Bryant Janet
Abstract: This chapter examines the notion of exceptionalism in the context of French foreign and defence policy in the Fifth Republic. The idea that France is exceptional in this area of policy has been characterised by the plethora of adjectives such as different, unusual, unconventional, distinctive and sometimes even maverick, that are often used when describing French actions. To what extent does it really make sense to talk about French exceptionalism in foreign and defence policy? Might it be argued, rather, that this term is particularly difficult to apply to an area of ‘high’ policy where every state will be seeking
Chapter 11 The Myth of Exceptionalism? from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Kuhn Raymond
Abstract: In the early summer of 2001 the French terrestrial television channel M6 broadcast a programme that attracted large audience ratings, especially among young viewers.
Loft Storywas the French version of BigBrother, the reality show which had originated in the Netherlands, and the format for which had then been imported into the U. K. to become one of the most talked about programmes of 2000. M6 had taken a proven format, tweaked it for its domestic market and then sat back to watch the rise in audience figures, which was helped no doubt by the attendant blaze of controversial
Chapter 12 Cultural exception(s) in French Cinema from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Rollet Brigitte
Abstract: There are few areas in which the idea of a possible French exception has asserted itself to such an extent as in the field of culture, and it is actually hardly surprising that the term ‘cultural exception’ has come to be associated with France, or a certain idea of France. The issue came to the forefront during the 1993 round of GATT (General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade) negotiations, when France insisted on removing cultural products from the negotiations, on the grounds that ‘culture is not just another commodity’. In so doing, the French representatives may have compounded France’s bad
Chapter 13 Sport and Politics: from:
The French Exception
Author(s) Mignon Patrick
Abstract: In France, sport is characterised by strong intervention by both the state and local authorities. It is one of the manifestations of the famous French exception, which is embedded in a historic continuity that begins in the years following the war of 1870 and continues through the Popular Front, the Vichy regime and the Republics since 1947. What began as material and financial support has come to define sport as the state’s field of competence. The reasons for this intervention are no different from those of other countries which, depending on the period, may be concern for the physical and
Book Title: Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Straub Jürgen
Abstract: A generally acknowledged characteristic of modern life, namely the temporalization of experience, inextricable from our intensified experience of contingency and difference, has until now remained largely outside psychology's purview. Wherever questions about the development, structure, and function of the concept of time have been posed - for example by Piaget and other founders of genetic structuralism - they have been concerned predominantly with concepts of "physical", chronometrical time, and related concepts (e.g., "velocity"). All the contributions to the present volume attempt to close this gap. A larger number are especially interested in the narration of stories. Overviews of the relevant literature, as well as empirical case studies, appear alongside theoretical and methodological reflections. Most contributions refer to specifically historical phenomena and meaning-constructions. Some touch on the subjects of biographical memory and biographical constructions of reality. Of all the various affinities between the contributions collected here, the most important is their consistent attention to issues of the constitution and representation of temporal experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbw85
Foreword from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: Until now, psychology has barely dealt with the topics of historical consciousness and historical thought. Although the discipline has given thorough attention to other forms of thought—to other forms of the construction of reality—there is no distinctive tradition with the theoretical or clinical objective of establishing a psychology of specifically historical acts of meaning-construction. Seen properly, this is astonishing. Psychology is commonly considered one of the key modern sciences that aspire to investigate as well as to shape our relationships to others and to the world from a genetic, structural, and functional perspective. However, a generally acknowledged characteristic
CHAPTER 1 Narrative Psychology and Historical Consciousness: from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Polkinghorne Donald E.
Abstract: Postmodern theory has severely undercut the notion that historians can produce objective and accurate descriptions of past episodes. Instead, it proposes that discovering the factual truth about historical events is extremely problematic because knowledge production is relative to the values and agenda of the inquirer. The question of the validity of historical knowledge has informed the general topic “Making Sense of History,” the theme of the book series of which the present volume is a part. The postmodern critique of the modernist epistemology of the humanities and social sciences has produced considerable consternation and disturbance in most of these disciplines.
CHAPTER 3 Telling Stories, Making History: from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: The contemporary discussion of
GeschichteandHistorie, of historical consciousness and historical thought, seems infinite.¹ We especially encounter these terms when our collective practice is beset by difficulties, crises, or conflicts over psychosocial or political orientation. In Germany, more than fifty years after the end of the National Socialist dictatorship, there are still very “immediate” reasons for the importance of historical reflection. Whatever may occasion this reflection, historical communication is never simply a “medium” through whichgroupsunderstand themselves—their past, present, and future.Individuals, too, understand themselves, that is, their lives, against the horizon of the history in which
CHAPTER 5 Narrative Truth and Identity Formation: from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Spence Donald P.
Abstract: Early in the
Culture of Narcissism, Christopher Lasch calls our attention to the way in which unremitting self-awareness has become the bane of modern society. We long, he suggests, for the “suspension of self-consciousness.” Modern man, “imprisoned in his pseudo-awareness of the self … would gladly take refuge in anidee fixe, a neurotic compulsion, a ‘magnificent obsession’—anything to get his mind off his own mind.”¹ A similar idea can be found in a recent book by Christopher Bollas titledBeing a Character: Psychoanalysis and Self-Experience. Believing that mental health demands a tolerance for a variety of inner states,
CHAPTER 6 The Concept of Time and the Faculty of Judgment in the Ontogenesis of Historical Consciousness from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Brumlik Micha
Abstract: Historical consciousness originally appeared in human beings, from both the phylogenetic and the ontogenetic perspective, as narrative consciousness. Even myths and cosmologies embedded in a cyclical conception of time require narratives, accounts of things, actions, and events connected with adverbial particles such as “before” and “after,” “later” and “earlier,” “in the beginning” and “in the end.”
CHAPTER 7 Historical Consciousness: from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Seixas Peter
Abstract: A common complaint about history education in both North American and European schools is that it consists predominantly of the memorization of factual information. There is thus a huge gap between the practices of school history and the notions of “historical consciousness” that inform this volume. My purpose in this chapter is to articulate a conception of historical consciousness that might be of use in the reform of the practice of history in the schools, in order that pedagogy might serve more purposefully to develop students’ historical consciousness.
CHAPTER 8 Empirical Psychological Approaches to the Historical Consciousness of Children from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Hausen Monika
Abstract: Today, historical consciousness is frequently taken as a “central category of historical didactics.”¹ There is nevertheless a lack of empirical investigations on how historical consciousness looks in different age groups and regions in concrete terms, and above all, on how it develops.² Current developmental and social psychological research includes the topic of historical consciousness mostly with reference to adults, and not, however, to children. Yet we have a comprehensive store of investigations that deal with basis competencies of historical consciousness, such as investigations on cognitive development in general, on moral development, on the development of the ability to change perspectives,
CHAPTER 9 The Psychological Study of Historical Consciousness from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Wineburg Samuel S.
Abstract: School children the world over spend countless hours every year learning about the past. In Western countries, the block of the school day devoted to this study is referred to as “history,” “social studies,” “civics,” “government,” or a host of other names. Yet, despite this variety in nomenclature, in practically every case, students are taught something about what transpired before their births. Despite variations in context, different national traditions and curriculuar customs, students from Tokyo to New York, Auckland to Berlin, and Tel Aviv to Toronto all learn something about a movement known as the Renaissance, an event known as
CHAPTER 12 Albert Speer’s Memories of the Future: from:
Narration, Identity, and Historical Consciousness
Author(s) Welzer Harald
Abstract: The description of this hasty departure occurs under the entry for July 13, 1959, in Albert Speer’s prison diary in Spandau. The year 1959 was the thirteenth year of Speer’s twenty-year prison sentence—how did he get to Peking during this period? Quite simply, by walking. And not just to Peking, but to Istanbul, to Vladivostok, to Karachi, and to other exotic regions and cities. Of the 31,816 kilometers of his journey round the earth, he had completed exactly 14,260 when he reached Peking. “If someone had told me then,” reflected Speer, “at the beginning of my walk to Heidelberg,
Chapter 4 War within War from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: ‘So now I’m cured of socialism, if I needed to be cured’. Thus Sartre wrote in his notebook on 14 September 1939.¹ For Sartre the Second World War had begun with the Hitler–Stalin Pact of 23 August 1939. It is important to remember just what a shock the Pact was for all those on the left, whether inside or outside the PCF. For nearly five years the PCF’s strategy had been centred on the idea of the Popular Front; it had argued indefatigably that the struggle against fascism must take priority over everything else, including the struggle for socialism,
Chapter 7 The Spectre of Trotsky from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: After completing ‘Matérialisme et révolution’, Sartre’s quest continued. Philosophically and politically dissatisfied with the PCF, he wished to establish a revolutionary alternative. Yet Naville’s anti-Stalinist materialism was clearly not what he was looking for. In this context a major influence was his fellow-editor of
Les Temps modernes, Maurice Merleau-Ponty, who was usually the author of editorial statements signed ‘T.M’., to which Sartre gave his consent,¹ apparently recognising that Merleau-Ponty was more politically sophisticated than he was. Merleau-Ponty was not a Trotskyist, but he had had a number of friends and contacts in the Trotskyist movement since before the war.²
Chapter 8 The RDR from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The year 1947 saw the outbreak of the Cold War, and the exclusion of the PCF from government. This opened up a new situation in which Sartre had to reorient himself. In so doing he involved himself in a movement, which, very briefly, seemed to have the potential for making a real political impact.
Chapter 10 Reorientation from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: Following the collapse of the RDR, Sartre seems to have been politically disoriented. Some of the survivors of the RDR formed the CAGI (
Comité d’action des gauches indépendantes), which ran candidates in the 1951 elections. But for the moment Sartre had no stomach for another attempt to organise the independent left; he retreated back to his literary and philosophical preoccupations, and wrote little of direct political significance for the next two years.
Chapter 12 Debate with the Far Left from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: For Sartre, as we have seen, ‘an anti-Communist is a dog’. But he did go so far as to recognise that there was more than one breed of the species. In fact, in
Les Communistes et la paixhe carefully distinguished between ‘left’ and ‘right’ varieties, while arguing for their essential symmetry:
Chapter 15 The Battle over Algeria from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: The war for Algerian independence (1954–62) was bloody and protracted, fought ruthlessly on both sides, but with the defenders of French rule lapsing into the worst savageries of torture and mass repression. Like the Vietnam War for the United States a decade later, it tore through the very fabric of French society, and destroyed the fragile institutions of the Fourth Republic, bringing de Gaulle to power in 1958. Sartre again found himself in a triangular relation with the PCF and the anti-Stalinist left. Above all, the war led to a profound and lasting radicalisation of Sartre’s position.
Chapter 16 Rebuilding the Left from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: During the Algerian War, Sartre’s conduct was that of an exemplary anti-imperialist. Even the PCF no longer dared to vilify him in the old way. But the broader task of rebuilding the French left proved more intractable. Here Sartre was still bound by the contradictions of his own past. In particular, he had not resolved the question of how to relate to the PCF.
Chapter 18 Conclusion: from:
Sartre Against Stalinism
Abstract: ‘Revolutionaries of the J.-P. Sartre style have never disturbed the sleep of any banker in the world’.¹ So asserted Raymond Aron in 1952, and in the absence of any more extensive research on insomnia in the financial services industry we shall have to take his word for it. Yet bankers, by the nature of their trade, are immersed in the short term, the day-to-day fluctuations of the market. They are not the most sensitive judges of the longterm permeation of ideas and values which can eventually have a major impact on social change.
Book Title: Critical Junctions-Anthropology and History beyond the Cultural Turn
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Tak Herman
Abstract: This volume focuses on the conjunction of two disciplines where both the analytic promises as well as the difficulties involved in the meeting of humanist and social science approaches soon became obvious. Anthropologists and historians have come together here in order to recapture, elaborate, and criticize pre-Cultural Turn and non-Cultural Turn modes of analysing structures of experience, feeling, subjectivity and action in human societies and to highlight the still unexploited possibilities developed among others in the work of scholars such as Norbert Elias, Max Gluckman, Eric Wolf, E.P. Thompson and Raymond Williams.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbxqc
Chapter Two The Past in the Present: from:
Critical Junctions
Author(s) Giordano Christian
Abstract: Having been trained as both a sociologist and an anthropologist, I have in my research consistently been oriented toward the present. While carrying out fieldwork projects, however, I have often been confronted by opinions, questions, answers, convictions, reasoning, reflections, and concrete forms of social behavior that cannot be untangled and articulated exclusively in terms of the “here and now.” It would be all too easy to develop a tendency to underestimate the past by viewing it as a dead hand upon the present, rather than an active, operating force. There is, however, more to the presentist orientation in social research
Chapter Five “Bare Legs Like Ice”: from:
Critical Junctions
Author(s) Kalb Don
Abstract: Few serious social researchers would deny the inescapability of pondering the conundrum of class—a conundrum because, while steadily contested, politically compromised, and conceptually inflated, the unsettling suspicion keeps surfacing that class involves inequality, power, culture, exploitation, accumulation, struggle and action, being in history and the making of history, being in place and the making of space, all in the same moment. Class, power, time, and space together form a huge program that has haunted social inquiry since Marx. Disciplined social science, on the other hand, has been a recurrent escape from its embrace, and understandably so, since it is
Chapter Six Prefiguring NAFTA: from:
Critical Junctions
Author(s) Musante Patricia
Abstract: Eric Wolf ’s emphasis on interconnected, global processes in
Europe and the People Without History(1982) provides a model for bringing the concerns of history, geography, and anthropology together to study the political economy of globalization, both past and present. To his list of “thingified” concepts I would add the local or thecommunitywhich have been, and continue to be, reified within anthropological discourse and practice. The boundaries of the local or the community—however broadly they may be defined or imagined—are often taken as a given, and hence naturalized. This tendency continues even as anthropologists increasingly broaden
Introduction from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Picard Jeanine
Abstract: The purpose of the present volume is to explore the relationship between this surge in academic interest and a demonstrable shift in public consciousness and public passions; the contributors exemplify the many and varied forms that these passions take. Its originality resides in the fact that it
3 WAR MUSEUMS IN FRANCE from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Joly Marie-Hélène
Abstract: The museum is just one element of commemorative public policies and the way war is remembered. In fact, there are many other vehicles for memorialising war besides museums, ranging from social care for war veterans and the management of military cemeteries, to the politics of commemoration (the choice of Remembrance Days, the organisation of commemorative ceremonies) and the erection of physical memorials (wall plaques and tablets; war memorials and large commemorative monuments) as well as the naming of streets. Given all this activity, museums form only a very small part of the way in which memories of war are perpetuated.
4 PUBLIC HISTORY AND THE ‘HISTORIAL’ PROJECT, 1986–1998 from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: My subject is public history, history outside the academy, linking historians to the broad population interested – sometimes passionately interested – in historical inquiry. Public history is defined by this extension of the domain within which the scholar operates. The audience for historical literature defines the discipline as much as the professional credentials of the practitioner. Public history is thus an attempt to flee from the increasing specialisation and decreasing readership of professional academic work, both in journals and in monograph form. It is also a recognition that historical scholarship is intrinsically tied to concepts of educating the public, and
7 HERITAGE AND HISTORY: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Chappé François
Abstract: By definition, and this is the only definition possible, heritage is a human activity with a universal application in time
10 A MARKET CULTURE: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Marchenay Philippe
Abstract: There is no better example of the interaction between the heritage movement and the socio-economic interests of modern French agriculture than that of the so-called
produits de terroir. The termproduits de terroiritself is notoriously difficult to define, but it is perhaps best described as traditional ‘local agricultural products and foodstuffs’ (English official rendering) whose qualities cross time and space and are anchored in a specific place and history. Products such asEpoisses de Bourgogneorfoie grasare defined by the fact that they depend on the shared savoir-faire of a given community and its culture. These products,
11 PRODUITS DE TERROIR: from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Portet François
Abstract: In the course of the last twenty-five years, the conception and practice of both French heritage and culture have been transformed. The 1970s were marked by the proliferation of cultural activities touching on regional identity, languages, traditions, trades and the individual culture of specific professions. In 1978 the creation of a
Direction du Patrimoine(Department of Heritage) within the Ministry of Culture opened the way for new objects to be studied, protected and preserved. 1980 was declared ‘Heritage Year’, and events associated with it helped to legitimise new forms of heritage especially in the industrial and rural sectors. The approach
13 PUBLIC POLICY AND URBAN CULTURES IN FRANCE from:
Recollections of France
Author(s) Ménard François
Abstract: Three-quarters of the French population live in urban areas, and yet urban cultures have only recently begun to take their place in cultural policy. While it is true that the state does now finance operations or organisations which are defined by a specifically urban frame of reference (
Projets culturels de quartiers– Neighbourhood Cultural Projects,Rencontres des cultures urbaines– The Festival of Urban Cultural Expression,Maîtrise d’oeuvre urbaine et culturelle– contracts for the construction of cultural projects in urban areas), the involvement of the public authorities is often ambivalent. This means that the operation can fit rather uncomfortably
Introduction from:
Identities
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: The notion ‘identity’ opens towards a variety of questions. Derived from ‘
idem,’ the word’s semantic field ranges from ‘the sameness of a person or thing at all times or in all circumstances; the condition or fact that a person or thing is itself and not something else; individually, personally’ to its use in logic and mathematics and asks the question, how something can remain the same despite time and inevitable change. The word addresses at the same time the ‘condition’ and the ‘fact’ of remaining the same person throughout the various phases of existence. It underlines the ‘continuity of the
Chapter 2 Identity and Selfhood as a Problématique from:
Identities
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: Many formalised discourses of the human sciences—such as law, liberal political philosophy and neo-classical economics—work with a notion of the singular human being as a unit that is characterised by its indivisibility, for those reasons also called the individual. An additional assumption about the guiding orientation or behaviour of these units then needs to be introduced to arrive at ways of conceptualising stable collectivities. In the discourses mentioned above, this assumption is basically one of rationality, with specific variations. In liberal political theory, their capacity for rationality leads the individuals to enter into a social contract for their
Chapter 3 Personal and Collective Identity: from:
Identities
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: ‘Identity’ has been among the most central concepts in 20
thcentury psychology and sociology. It acquired its significance, which has persisted in all essentials until today, particularly in the context of pragmatist, interactionist and psychoanalytical thought,—even if the term played no role in the work of either Sigmund Freud or William James, but rather only in subsequent attempts to develop their theories of the subject and the self (Straub, 1991, 1994). Of course the remarkable career of ‘identity’ is due especially to certain works that were still close to the sources of psychoanalysis and pragmatism, even if they were
Chapter 7 The Performance of Hysteria from:
Identities
Author(s) Bronfen Elisabeth
Abstract: ‘
Je est un autre’ (‘I is an other’) wrote Arthur Rimbaud in 1871, at a time when this statement may still have been understood as a provocation. Ever since the dawn of the postmodern era, however, we are constantly offered new theoretical arguments to persuade us of the plurality and the frailness of the I. It is commonplace nowadays to talk of the individual as a representational construct that is conditioned, manufactured and manipulated by language, images and society, a construct that can even be artificially portrayed. The subject, so the argument runs, emerges precisely because it issubjectedto
Chapter 12 Culture and History in Comparative Fundamentalism from:
Identities
Author(s) Sivan Emanuel
Abstract: Over the last two decades or so, a thriving cottage industry has developed dealing with the origins and genesis of fundamentalist movements around the globe. Yet the scholars, policy analysts and intelligence experts involved in this huge effort had precious little to say about why such movements survive, and even flourish at times. After all, the odds are pretty much against them, as evidenced by the fact that the membership turnover rate is high. The stringent behavioural requirements, typical of fundamentalist groups, stand in stark contrast to the anything-goes, hedonistic, open society around them. One can just pick up one’s
Book Title: Beyond Rationalism-Rethinking Magic, Witchcraft and Sorcery
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Kapferer Bruce
Abstract: This book seeks a reconsideration of the phenomenon of sorcery and related categories. The contributors to the volume explore the different perspectives on human sociality and social and political constitution that practices typically understood as sorcery, magic and ritual reveal. In doing so the authors are concerned to break away from the dictates of a western externalist rationalist understanding of these phenomena without falling into the trap of mysticism. The articles address a diversity of ethnographic contexts in Africa, Asia, the Pacific and the Americas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1btbzsw
Chapter 2 Beyond Vodou and Anthroposophy in the Dominican-Haitian Borderlands from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Brendbekken Marit
Abstract: This essay¹ concerns the paradoxes emerging in the dynamic space of hybridisation between vodou magic² and the occult science of anthroposophy. These lived imaginaries and registers of interpretation are engaged within counter-modernising environmental discourses and practices in the Dominican-Haitian borderlands. Here NGO-affiliated European anthroposophists, orientated by the work of Rudolf Steiner,³ are organising a biodynamic programme in co-operation with marginalised Dominican and Haitian borderlands peasants who live the consequences of radical deforestation. These peasants have for long been subjugated to the often violent dictates of post-colonial ruling élites, and their world of vodou spirits is itself the creation of ‘resistant
Chapter 4 Sorcery, Modernity and the Constitutive Imaginary: from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Kapferer Bruce
Abstract: The cosmologies implicated in sorcery practice are human-centric. Within them, human beings are at the heart of processes that are integral in the formation of their psychical, social and political universes. Sorcery fetishises human agency, often one which it magically enhances, as the key mediating factor affecting the course or direction of human life-chances. The fabulous character of so much sorcery practice, its transgressive and unbounded dimensions, a rich symbolism that appears to press towards and beyond the limits of the human imagination, is surely connected to the overpowering and totalising impetus that sorcery recognises in human agency and capacities.
Chapter 6 Sorcerous Technologies and Religious Innovation in Sri Lanka from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Bastin Rohan
Abstract: This essay examines the importance of sorcery in the dynamics of religious innovation in contemporary Hindu and Buddhist Sri Lanka.¹ My interest stems from two observations. First, in almost stark contrast to other Hindu ritual forms that emphasise unchanging text-based rites, the sorcery practices I describe display an almost modernist preoccupation with innovation. Second, much of this innovation originates, or is seen to originate, from outside the cosmic order both of the pantheon and of society. Consequently, sorcery practices manifest a dynamism that often results in the appearance of sorcery having sprung up from nowhere or of being on the
Chapter 7 Maleficent Fetishes and the Sensual Order of the Uncanny in South-West Congo from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Devisch René
Abstract: Diversely echoing Gail Weiss (1999) and Paul Stoller and Cheryll Olkes (1987), I hold that maleficent fetishes that sustain lethal sorcery shape and enact, yet pervert, their proper contours of embodied interactions and transactions. These interactions are being absorbed and consumed, if not devoured, by the sensual order of the uncanny and by forces of abjection. From my immersion in the life of the Yaka people in Kinshasa and south-west Congo, I am aiming at some endogenous understanding of how interacting bodies – or more precisely, intercorporeal awareness – can conform to (attune to) and become subordinated to (and implicated
Chapter 8 Fantasy in Practice: from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Lambek Michael
Abstract: What is the relationship of psychoanalysis to questions of dignity, self-respect and respect for others?¹ How, ultimately can we link Freud with Aristotelian concerns for eudaimonia – human flourishing – and for phronesis – sustained moral judgement?² If Freud rightly tempers Aristotle’s optimism, how might Aristotelian questions illuminate and complement Freudian forays into personhood? If repression is defined as a state of disconnection and disavowal, of non-acknowledgement of one’s own thoughts and acts, then it is morally and politically problematic. Repression generates projection, in which accountability is displaced onto others. However, I argue that in some instances, and given the
Chapter 10 Strange Fruit: from:
Beyond Rationalism
Author(s) Feldman Allen
Abstract: At no other time more than in the present day has individual, social and institutional memory come under such concerted pressure, critique and exposure as a fragile foundation for truth and facticity. This current reluctance to authenticate social memory is intimately tied to well-known postmodernist depredations, which profoundly disenchanted the authority of tradition and authenticity, and emptied core institutionalised myths of their temporal and semantic continuity. As institutionalised memory fails to provide overarching master narratives that can win cultural consent, it has also become increasingly disjunctive with previously unnarratable history and experience. Consider the synchronic fictions of recent ethno-histories, the
2 Identity at Play: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Hastrup Kirsten
Abstract: Identity categories are at the core of anthropological practice, in terms of both individual identities (or notions of the self ) and collective identities (or notions of ethnicity). In this chapter I shall deal primarily with the interface between the self and the collectivity in order to discuss identity as a response to multiple actualities rather than a fixed frame of subjectivity. This tallies with other attempts at understanding the self as composite and malleable (Cohen 1994; Rapport 1997). It also in its own way reflects the insight of relational identities provided by scholars of gender such as Shirley Ardener
4 Making Sense of the Past: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Making sense of the past ranks among the key intellectual activities of any society and indeed of any individual. Not only must we learn to select those social and personal events with which we have had direct or indirect experience, make connections between these events, smooth out inconsistencies, establish meanings, construct narratives, mask out uncertainties, and develop an aesthetic appreciation of our historical understanding of things; we also seem to be able to do it all the time. We know how to adapt previous interpretations to suit new circumstances, and we are capable of remodelling our memories of the past
5 A Sense of People and Place: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Cohen Gaynor
Abstract: Within Britain, the Welsh language is often presented by the English media as controversial. In some cases it is seen as the instrument through which the minority, namely Welsh language speakers, impose their will on the majority. Promoters have been accused of encouraging linguistic racialism in Wales in the context of bilingual education policy. Yet few would deny the importance of language in a person’s identity: ‘For a man to speak one language rather than another is a ritual act, it is a statement about one’s personal status; to speak the same language as one’s neighbours expresses solidarity with those
11 Revolting, Revolutionary, and Rebellious Women: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Frankenberg Ronnie
Abstract: This essay uses some of the Ardeners’ seminal/uterine, even vaginal insights to analyse the way that anthropological research can be seen as a cooperative exercise between subjects rather than merely informant and fieldworker – to illuminate such diverse investigations as resistance and struggle in West Africa and images in art and drama. Finally, on the basis of Rhian Loudon’s own field research, they inform analysis of the both vulnerable and powerful, dominant and muted, speech and actions of British Asian women, observed in shared multiple simultaneous realities of home and health-service/social-service workplace. It accepts one challenge posed by Ardener’s discussions
12 What Women Really Want: from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Moore Fiona
Abstract: Traditionally, social studies of factories have focused on issues of discrimination, oppression, and resistance. The earliest studies in industrial anthropology, the Hawthorne research projects, examined the ways in which workers controlled the production process against the interests of management (Baba 1986). More recently, the work of Roberts et al.,
Language and Discrimination(1992) focused on ways in which English managers unconsciously exclude their non-English workers through the use of language and communication, and Westwood’s (1984)All Day, Every Dayanalyses how women from a variety of ethnic origins gain empowerment against their male relatives and bosses through subversive practices. Much
13 Can You Call This Fieldwork? from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Sciama Lidia D.
Abstract: Reflexive anthropology, anthropology ‘at home’ or ‘half-way home’, and the recognition of the researcher’s as well as her informants’ subjectivity have dominated much of anthropology since the 1970s. All are intimately bound with feminist critiques of ethnographic approaches and have been guiding principles in research conducted within the framework of Oxford’s Centre for Cross-Cultural Research on Women (E. Ardener 1975; S. Ardener 1975; Ardener and Burman 1995). To reach a closer understanding of women’s lives, it proved essential to focus on the contacts and active interactions of women in the societies we studied. Indeed, one of the questions we posed
Shirley’s African Roots from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Swaisland Cecillie
Abstract: Shirley Ardener has a long association with West Africa, beginning when she accompanied her husband Edwin Ardener to Nigeria for his fieldwork. They had met when they were students at the LSE together. Subsequently, in the 1950s, Shirley and Edwin Ardener moved to the Cameroons, where Edwin became the Honorary Adviser on Archives and Antiquities (see S. Ardener’s introduction to her edited volume,
Kingdom on Mount Cameroon, Berghahn Books, 1996). So began Shirley’s interest and concern with the Cameroons. She acted as Edwin’s associate and developed a love of the land, the people and especially the Bakweri in the south.
Shirley’s Magic from:
Identity and Networks
Author(s) Webber Jonathan
Abstract: Let me explain.
JASO: Journal of the Anthropological Society of Oxfordwas founded by Edwin Ardener in 1970 to disseminate new approaches in social anthropology. Little did I realise, when I became its editor in 1979, just what it meant in practice to be associated so closely with the Ardeners, even though I had
Book Title: Critical White Studies- Publisher: Temple University Press
Author(s): Stefancic Jean
Abstract: No longer content with accepting whiteness as the norm, critical scholars have turned their attention to whiteness itself. In
Critical White Studies: Looking Behind the Mirror, numerous thinkers, including Toni Morrison, Eric Foner, Peggy McIntosh, Andrew Hacker, Ruth Frankenberg, John Howard Griffin, David Roediger, Kathleen Heal Cleaver, Noel Ignatiev, Cherrie Moraga, and Reginald Horsman, attack such questions as:*How was whiteness invented, and why?*How has the category whiteness changed over time?*Why did some immigrant groups, such as the Irish and Jews, start out as nonwhite and later became white?*Can some individual people be both white and nonwhite at different times, and what does it mean to "pass for white"?*At what point does pride in being white cross the line into white power or white supremacy?*What can whites concerned over racial inequity or white privilege do about it?Science and pseudoscience are presented side by side to demonstrate how our views on whiteness often reflect preconception, not fact. For example, most scientists hold that race is not a valid scientific category -- genetic differences between races are insignificant compared to those within them. Yet, the "one drop" rule, whereby those with any nonwhite heritage are classified as nonwhite, persists even today. As the bell curve controversy shows, race concepts die hard, especially when power and prestige lie behind them.A sweeping portrait of the emerging field of whiteness studies,Critical White Studiespresents, for the first time, the best work from sociology, law, history, cultural studies, and literature. Delgado and Stefancic expressly offer critical white studies as the next step in critical race theory. In focusing on whiteness, not only do they ask nonwhites to investigate more closely for what it means for others to be white, but also they invite whites to examine themselves more searchingly and to "look behind the mirror."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1bw1kc5
1 The End of the Great White Male from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GRAHAM JOHN R.
Abstract: Five centuries ago, the foundations of the world were shaken. So-called immutable truths toppled forever as man was replaced by the sun as the center of our universe. Equally wrenching is the current shattering of white males’ world view, in which they long have seen themselves as the central characters on society’s stage. All around are the effects of a revolution that is both painfully distressing and totally confusing to what well may become known as the last of the great white males.
4 The Way of the WASP from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) BROOKHISER RICHARD
Abstract: When Benjamin Franklin decided to improve his own character, he drew up the list of virtues which so annoyed D. H. Lawrence [
Studies in Classic American Literature, chapter 2. Ed.]. Originally there were twelve. “But a Quaker friend having kindly informed me that I was generally thought proud … of which he convinced me by mentioning several instances; I determined endeavoring to cure myself, if I could, of this vice or folly among the rest, and I addedHumility tomy list”—along with an explanatory note: “Imitate Jesus and Socrates.”¹
5 Hiring Quotas for White Males Only from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FONER ERIC
Abstract: Affirmative action has emerged as the latest “wedge issue” of American politics. The recent abrogation of California affirmative action programs by Governor
6 Innocence and Affirmative Action from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) ROSS THOMAS
Abstract: When we create arguments, when we act as rhetoricians, we reveal ourselves by the words and ideas we choose to employ. Verbal structures that are used widely and persistently are especially worth examination. Arguments made with repeated, almost formulaic, sets of words suggest a second argument flowing beneath the apparent argument. Beneath the apparently abstract language and the syllogistic form of these arguments, we may discover the deeper currents that explain, at least in part, why we seem so attached to these verbal structures.
12 Ignoble Savages from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) D’SOUZA DINESH
Abstract: For the Europeans who first voyaged abroad, much of the rest of the world came as a shock for which they were poorly prepared. Early modern accounts, such as Richard Hakluyt’s sixteenth century
Principal Navigationsor Samuel Purchas’s seventeenth centuryPurchas His PilgrimageandHakluytus Posthumus, convey the stupefaction of the Europeans who encountered distant and unfamiliar peoples. Europeans who were even then making a transition into the modern era found themselves genuinely amazed and horrified at other cultures which appeared virtually static, confined from time immemorial in the nomadic or the agrarian stage. The consequence was that many Europeans
15 Transparently White Subjective Decisionmaking: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: Goodson, Badwin & Indiff is a major accounting firm employing more than five hundred persons nationwide. Among its twenty black accountants is Yvonne Taylor, who at the time this story begins was thirty-one years old and poised to become the first black regional supervisor in the firm’s history. Yvonne attended Princeton University and received an M.B.A. from the Kellogg Graduate School of Management at Northwestern University. While employed at Goodson, she was highly successful in attracting new clients, especially from the black business community. In all other respects her performance at the firm was regarded as exemplary.
17 Imposition from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) STEFANCIC JEAN
Abstract: Society generally deploys terms of
impositionat key moments in the history of a reform effort, such as blacks’ struggle for equal opportunity, or women’s campaign for reproductive rights. Before reaching that point, society tolerates or even supports the new movement. We march, link arms, and sing with the newcomers, identifying with their struggle. At some point, however, reaction sets in. We decide the group has gone far enough. At first, justice seemed to be on their side. But now we see them as imposing, taking the offensive, asking for concessions they do not deserve. Now they are the aggressors,
19 The Tower of Babel from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) BROWN ELEANOR MARIE
Abstract: Social scientists have identified a number of features that characterize contemporary white attitudes toward blacks. First, traditional stereotypes and blatant discrimination are no longer common. Most whites, regardless of their political orientation, reject these traditional forms of discrimination. This is particularly true of white liberals who condition their behavior toward blacks on beliefs that strongly condemn traditional discrimination. Second, whites use ostensibly nonracial factors to justify any behavior that may have a disproportionate impact on blacks or could be perceived as being racist. Third, whites harbor attitudes of ambivalence toward blacks resulting in extreme positive or negative reactions. These attitudes
20 The Quest for Freedom in the Post-Brown South: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) DOUGLAS DAVISON M.
Abstract: In their response to the civil rights movement of the 1960s, moderate southern communities differed from their recalcitrant counterparts in at least one significant aspect. These communities understood that white self-interest demanded a certain degree of accommodation to integration demands. Thus, in many moderate southern cities, white elites, especially business leaders, played critical roles in facilitating limited racial integration as a means of preserving a strong business environment. At the same time, this need to appear racially moderate provided the black community with an important opportunity to challenge racial segregation that activists successfully exploited in many southern communities.
22 Dysconscious Racism: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) KING JOYCE E.
Abstract: “Dysconscious racism” is a form of racism that tacitly accepts dominant white norms and privileges. It is not the
absenceof consciousness but animpairedconsciousness or distorted way of thinking about race as compared to, for example, critical consciousness. Uncritical ways of thinking about racial inequity accept certain culturally sanctioned assumptions, myths, and beliefs that justify the social and economic advantages white people have as a result of subordinating others. Anything that calls this ideology of racial privilege into question inevitably challenges the self-identity of white people who have internalized these ideological justifications. The reactions of my students to
25 “Only the Law Would Rule between Us”: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) VAN TASSEL EMILY FIELD
Abstract: Gender and race were closely connected in the ideology of the white South; they were mutually defining. Consider legal prohibitions on interracial marriage, for example. At the core of the early debate were several closely linked questions about what kind of contract marriage was, its social and legal meaning in the shambles of the slave system, and, finally, what the limits of the right to marry, or to choose one’s associates, might be in a world where the meaning and content of “rights” remained to be decided.
31 White Law and Lawyers: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) HALEWOOD PETER
Abstract: Much has been written on surrogate motherhood as an application of biotechnology which challenges conventional understandings of equality and the family. Surrogacy also challenges conventional notions of embodiment. Indeed, the law has responded to surrogacy by bracketing off the surrogate mother’s embodiment—her factual experience of pregnancy—from the legal facts relevant to deciding disputes over custody arising from surrogacy arrangements. For example, even where the so-called surrogate is pregnant with her own fertilized ovum, she is defined not as the “biological” mother but as the “surrogate” mother, thus denying the biological and experiential fact that she is the mother.
35 The Transparency Phenomenon, Race-Neutral Decisionmaking, and Discriminatory Intent from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: In this society, the white person has an everyday option not to think of herself in racial terms at all. In fact, whites appear to pursue that option so habitually that it may be a defining characteristic of whiteness: to be white is not to think about it.¹ I label the tendency for whiteness to vanish from whites’ self-perception the transparency phenomenon.² Because transparency is such a pervasive fact of whites’ conceptualization of ourselves, we have reason to be skeptical of ostensibly race-neutral decisionmaking by white decisionmakers. I propose that white decisionmakers adopt that deliberate skepticism as well regarding their
36 Toward a Black Legal Scholarship: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) CULP JEROME MCCRISTAL
Abstract: Initially, the law largely treated black slaves as non-beings.¹ Eventually, the law evolved into a paternalistic system that viewed blacks as lesser beings whom white masters and overseers needed to protect from their own ignorant, sloven, and evil nature. Finally, slave law provided for legal limitations on the activities of slaves and their masters; in other words, the state stepped between slaves and masters and imposed external rules.² Thus, slavery bequeathed three powerful constructions of law to legal interpretation—ignoring blacks altogether, treating blacks paternalistically, and creating limited legal rules to regulate white behavior toward blacks. The post-slavery period added
38 The Constitutional Ghetto from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) LEVIT NANCY
Abstract: First,
Plessyoriginated, and recent decisions embrace, a concept of natural racism. This view holds that racism inheres in the human condition. Racism is innate and inevitable and, as a consequence, it must be tolerated—by the federal courts among others—as an unfortunate fact of human existence. The Constitution and the construing Court are powerless to alter the course of racial instincts; separation may not be equal, but it is entirely natural.
40 The Curse of Ham from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) JONES D. MARVIN
Abstract: The fact that black and white represent a falling out of color represents the idea that ultimately black and white signify a falling out of meaning² and
44 Residential Segregation and White Privilege from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAHONEY MARTHA R.
Abstract: Residential segregation and white dominance are integrally related. White choices are not only the aggregation of individual preferences regarding proximity to blacks. Rather, governmental and private forces—in interaction with each other—in the past created a racialized process of urban/suburban development in which “good” neighborhoods were defined as white and whiteness was defined as good, stable, employed, and employable.
45 Mules, Madonnas, Babies, Bathwater: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) AMMONS LINDA L.
Abstract: Facts from a recent case help to illustrate how the conduct of a battered black woman is contrasted with the perception of how a battered white woman responds. A twenty-nine-year-old black woman, Pamela Hill, lived with her abusive boyfriend, Roy Chaney. At trial, the evidence revealed that police had been called to Hill’s residence on five separate occasions to protect her. According to the police report, on the night in question, Chaney had been drinking and began slapping Hill. Hill got a knife and the two began struggling over it. Hill got control of the knife and suffered several cuts
50 The GI Bill: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) SACKS KAREN BRODKIN
Abstract: The GI Bill of Rights, as the 1944 Serviceman’s Readjustment Act was known, was arguably the most massive affirmative action program in U.S. history. It was created to develop needed labor-force skills, and to provide those who had them with a life-style that reflected their value to the economy. The GI benefits ultimately extended to sixteen million GIs (veterans of the Korean War as well) included priority in jobs—that is, preferential hiring, but no one objected to it then—financial support during the job search; small loans for starting up businesses; and, most important, low-interest home loans and educational
54 Stirring the Ashes: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) ANSLEY FRANCES LEE
Abstract: The “class model” of white supremacy portrays it as a means to justify and enhance class dominance and thus to strengthen existing relations of economic power. This function gives racism its central status in American political life and assures its survival. This is the source of racism’s strength and resilience. The class model addresses how, in a white supremacist system, the poor people of all races come out on the short end while the people of the dominant classes appear to extract extraordinary benefits.
58 The First Word in Whiteness: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) ROEDIGER DAVID
Abstract: A character in Chester Himes’ 1945 novel,
If He Hollers Let Him Go, has a “funny thought.” He begins to “wonder when white people started to get white—or rather, when they started losing it.” The narrower question of when new immigrants “started to get white” and of what they lost in doing it has received passionate and varied treatment within African-American thought. That treatment provides the best points of entry to the question of white identity among new immigrants to date.
61 Beyond the Melting Pot from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) MOYNIHAN DANIEL PATRICK
Abstract: It was reasonable to believe that a new American type would emerge, a new nationality in which it would be a matter of indifference whether a man was of Anglo-Saxon or German or Italian or Jewish origin, and in which indeed, because of the diffusion of populations through all parts of the country and all levels of the social order, and because of the consequent close contact and intermarriage, it would be impossible to make such distinctions. After all, in 1960 almost half of New York City’s population was still foreign-born or the children of foreign-born. Yet it is also
62 The Economic Payoff of Attending an Ivy-League Institution from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FRANK ROBERT H.
Abstract: Look at the legal profession. Lawyers who deal with mergers and business acquisitions, for example, receive just a small percentage of the money that changes hands in the transactions that they negotiate, but their fees can amount to millions of dollars in multibillion-dollar deals. Not surprisingly many bright and ambitious young people ask themselves, “How can I get a job as a Wall Street
70 Black Like Me from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GRIFFIN JOHN HOWARD
Abstract: The doctor, well-disposed, gave me many warnings about the dangers of this project in so far as my contact with Negroes was concerned. Now that he had had time to think, he was beginning to doubt the wisdom of
74 What Does a White Woman Look Like? from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FRANKE KATHERINE M.
Abstract: In significant ways, legal texts produce a narrative of national identity. They weave stories about who we are, what we are committed to, and what we expect of one another, individually and collectively. Certain foundational fictions, like “We the People,” provide the glue that over time binds a people to its past and to one another as a nation. But should law play the same role with respect to other aspects of human identity? I think not. Current debates surrounding affirmative action, congressional redistricting, the Million Man March, and the appointment of Clarence Thomas to the Supreme Court all represent
76 Notes of a White Black Woman from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) SCALES-TRENT JUDY
Abstract: We Americans have been talking about race for a long time. It is a constant theme in our lives and in our common language. Although the specific topic changes over the years—varying all the way from fugitive slave laws to affirmative action—the theme remains. Ideas about race lie at the core of the American character and the American dream.
82 Embodiment and Perspective: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) HALEWOOD PETER
Abstract: Where we are positioned in society, and how we think of and live in our bodies, are questions we do not usually connect to the (both everyday and scholarly) claims we make about social and legal problems. “The body” and “knowledge” have traditionally been understood as unrelated categories. However, recent interdisciplinary work in philosophy and law emphasizes “positionality,” and calls into question the abstract, disembodied quality of conventional Western theories of knowledge (epistemologies) which ground the Western conception of law. Western epistemology, its critics say, has artificially bracketed off the material particulars of experience and identity, including the spatial particularity
83 Bell Curve Liberals: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) WOOLDRIDGE ADRIAN
Abstract: Opposition to the use of IQ testing goes back as far as testing itself. Its practitioners have been accused of misusing science to justify capitalist exploitation; allowing their obsession with classification to blind them to the huge variety of human abilities; encouraging soulless teaching; and, worst of all, inflaming racial prejudices and justifying racial inequalities. To this school of thinking,
The Bell Curvewas a godsend. Charles Murray and Richard J. Herrnstein succeeded in effectively linking IQ testing firmly in people’s minds with spectacularly unpopular arguments: that different racial groups have different IQ averages; that America is calcifying into rigid
87 Hearts of Darkness from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) JUDIS JOHN B.
Abstract: “The assumption of genetic cognitive equality among the races has practical consequences.”
88 Thank You, Doctors Murray and Herrnstein (Or, Who’s Afraid of Critical Race Theory?) from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) BELL DERRICK A.
Abstract: Radical assessment can encompass illustration, anecdote, allegory, and imagination, as well as analysis of doctrine and cases. I want to utilize all of these techniques to comment on a contemporary phenomenon:
The Bell Curve. A great deal of attention and energy has been devoted to commending and condemning Charles Murray and the late Richard Herrnstein, authors of this best-selling book on racial intelligence. This book suggests great social policy significance in the fact that black people score, on average, fifteen points below whites on I.Q. tests.
89 Dangerous Undertones of the New Nativism from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) KANSTROOM DANIEL
Abstract: In the late summer of 1918, with the final defeat of the German empire only a few months away, the first volume of
The Decline of the Westappeared in Germany and Austria. Written by a then unknown German historian named Oswald Spengler, the book soon became a sensation with a profound impact on intellectual debate and German politics for the following two decades. Though originally conceived as a political critique of the folly and criminal and suicidal optimism of pre–First World War German foreign policy, the work grew substantially beyond that modest goal. According to Spengler, the book
90 The Rise of Private Militia: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) POLESKY JOELLE E.
Abstract: Copious news coverage of Ruby Ridge,¹ Waco,² and the Oklahoma City bombing³ has prompted a growing concern with the proliferation of paramilitary organizations and paramilitary activity.⁴ The public’s anxiety is fueled by the belief that private militia pose a threat to society. Private militia are commonly misunderstood and mischaracterized as organizations comprised solely of right-wing militants adhering to Aryan, racist ideology. Although many militia members subscribe to these views, allegiance to the far right is not a prerequisite to membership in a private militia.⁵ Instead, ardent belief in the need to protect individual rights from encroachment by the federal government
91 The Changing Faces of White Supremacy from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) MAUNEY MARY ANN
Abstract: White supremacy holds that the interests of people of European descent are superior to those of people who believe, act, or look differently than” normal.” It perpetuates the stratification of class, race, religion, sexual orientation, and gender. It embraces Nazism, fascism, and violence. Its open manifestations are extremist hate groups; its results are political and social systems based not on the democratic ideals of majority rule, tolerance, diversity, equality, and justice, but on “white is right.” White supremacists are America’s deepest nightmare because they attack not only individuals and groups, but the legitimacy of our democratic process itself.
93 Blue by Day and White by [K]night from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) BARNES ROBIN
Abstract: In 1871, during its deliberations on what has become widely known as the Ku Klux Klan Act, Congress compiled nearly six hundred pages of testimony dealing with the activities of Klansmen and
97 Antidiscrimination Law and Transparency: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: Racial identity is not a central life experience for most white people, because it does not have to be.¹ Like members of any socially dominant group, white people have the option to set aside consciousness of the characteristic that defines the dominant class—in this case, race. Thus whiteness is experienced as racelessness, and personal identity is conceived in a race-neutral manner. However, race plays quite a different role in the lives of people of color in this society. It is, again as a consequence of existing social structures that define and give meaning to racial identity, a central facet
101 How to Be a Race Traitor: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) IGNATIEV NOEL
Abstract: Identify with the racially oppressed; violate the rules of whiteness in ways that can have a social impact.
105 “Was Blind, but Now I See”: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) FLAGG BARBARA J.
Abstract: The most striking characteristic of whites’ consciousness of whiteness is that most of the time we don’t have any. I call this the
transparencyphenomenon: the tendency of whites not to think about whiteness, or about norms, behaviors, experiences, or perspectives that are white-specific. Transparency often is the mechanism through which white decisionmakers who disavow white supremacy impose white norms on blacks. [See also Chapters 15, 35, and 97. Ed.] Transparency operates to require black assimilation even when pluralism is the articulated goal; it affords substantial advantages to whites over blacks even when decisionmakers intend to effect substantive racial justice.
107 Resisting Racisms, Eliminating Exclusions: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) GOLDBERG DAVID THEO
Abstract: Resistance to racisms consists in vigorously contending and disputing exclusionary values, norms, institutions, and practices, as well as assertively articulating open-ended specifications and means for an incorporative politics. Where racisms are openly and volubly expressed, it is likely a matter of time before a more or less organized resistance by its objects, often in alliance with other antiracists, will arise in response; witness the emergence of resistance to slavery in the United States, to the destruction of indigenous people on all continents, to the [Nazis and their allies in Europe and to]
apartheidin South Africa, to David Duke in
108 Dysconscious Racism: from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) KING JOYCE E.
Abstract: One goal of my course, when I was Associate Professor of Teacher Education at Santa Clara University, was to sharpen the ability of students to think critically about educational purposes and practice in relation to social justice and to their own identities as teachers. The course thus illuminates a range of ideological interests which become the focus of students’ critical analysis, evaluation, and choice. For instance, a recurring theme is that of the social purposes of schooling. This is a key concept about which many students report they have never thought seriously. Course readings, lectures, discussions, and other activities are
110 Confronting Racelessness from:
Critical White Studies
Author(s) BROWN ELEANOR MARIE
Abstract: Kendall Thomas coined the phrase “we are raced”¹ as a race-conscious challenge to the abstract notions of citizen and state as they are conceptualized in liberal legalism. Thomas insists that our received notions of rights and duties in law are rife with racial implications. This is particularly the case given the highly charged racial context within which notions of rights and duties were developed, who they were meant to exclude, and our societal struggle to make the law “color-blind.” In this context, abstract notions of citizen, government, rights, and duties do not begin to account for the relationship between people
El dolor transfigurado from:
El mito de la filosofía
Abstract: De forma paralela, la medicina bioenergética y la homeopática, para citar solo dos, han inventado remedios alternativos que buscan paliar el
dolor, paulatinamente y a mediano plazo, de acuerdo con una metodología no reactiva, como sucede con los fármacos químicos y sin tener la potencia devastadora de estos.
El asombro ante lo cotidiano from:
El mito de la filosofía
Abstract: No obstante, el asombro, modernamente hablando, no se limita al sentido metafísico de la contemplación del ser en cuanto ser y a la búsqueda de las causas más allá de lo físico, en un apartado lugar, llámese Olimpo o Cielo de las Ideas. El pensamiento actual se orienta, de preferencia, al mundo de aquí abajo, a la realidad observable. El asombro se da ante
El fin de la historia, ¿fatalidad para Latinoamérica? from:
El mito de la filosofía
Abstract: En Washington, verano de 1989, apareció publicado en
The National Interest,una revista sobre política exterior de los Estados Unidos, un artículo polémico, incluido el título, a saber: ¿El fin de la historia? Su autor, Francis Fukuyama, cuyo apellido tiene claras referencias orientales, lo había redactado antes de ingresar a la Secretaría de Estado de los Estados Unidos en calidad de analista político.
A modo de introducción. from:
Los derechos humanos
Abstract: Se ha convenido en subrayar como característica excepcional la estabilidad de la democracia en Colombia. Su régimen político solo ha visto quebrada su institucionalidad democrática en una única ocasión. Sin embargo, tal atributo bien puede ser considerado como una paradoja de la política nacional. En la democracia colombiana coexisten la justicia y la impunidad, la participación y la exclusión, la riqueza y la pobreza, el orden y la violencia (Guzmán, 2002, p. 11). Podríamos afirmar, entonces, que el país ha tenido serias di -ficultades durante los últimos 50 años. Asimismo, que la debilidad institucional ha posibilitado no solo la agudización
1 LA REPARACIÓN DESDE LA PERSPECTIVA DE LÍDERES DE ORGANIZACIONES SOCIALES DE VÍCTIMAS DEL CONFLICTO ARMADO INTERNO COLOMBIANO from:
Los derechos humanos
Author(s) González Fabián D. Buelvas
Abstract: Escenarios como estos han convertido a integrantes de la sociedad civil no combatiente en víctimas del conflicto en diversas regiones del país durante las últimas décadas. Ante la atrocidad experimen tada, no se puede definir un único patrón de comportamiento de las víctimas; sin embargo, teniendo en cuenta la importancia de su participación en el proceso de justicia transicional que se está im plementando en Colombia a partir de la vigencia de la Ley 1448 de 2011 resulta social y políticamente relevante visibilizar ideas y emociones que actualmente circulan en torno a luchas sociales por el cumplimiento y materialización del
3 COMUNIDAD INTERNACIONAL, DDR Y DERECHOS HUMANOS EN EL POSTCONFLICTO from:
Los derechos humanos
Author(s) Linares Pedro Montero
Abstract: La particularidad de los conflictos armados internos que recien temente fueron superados en los últimos años en búsqueda de la normalización social que significa el postconflicto tiene el común denominador de caracterizarse por la intervención directa e indi recta de la Comunidad Internacional, entendiendo por esta tanto a países ajenos al conflicto como a las organizaciones internacionales cuya finalidad es apoyar los procesos de negociación en el mundo.
4 EL DEVENIR DE LAS NEGOCIACIONES DE PAZ: from:
Los derechos humanos
Author(s) Chimá Javier Tous
Abstract: La historia republicana de Colombia se ha visto marcada por una situación casi constante de violencia. El siglo XIX y los inicios del XX se han encontrado de cara a guerras civiles. Luego de estos perio dos, la subida al poder del Partido Conservador en 1946 provocó el inicio de la violencia bipartita entre conservadores y liberales. En efecto, los enfrentamientos y las persecuciones de los liberales en zonas rurales influyeron en la creación de grupos armados. En 1957, los vientos de reconciliación soplaron gracias a un pacto conveni do entre los partidos políticos. El pacto llamado “Frente Nacional” preveía
5 ACTOS HUMANITARIOS Y PROCESOS DE RESISTENCIA CIVIL FRENTE A LOS ACTORES ARMADOS: from:
Los derechos humanos
Author(s) Rosero Luis Fernando Trejos
Abstract: Este trabajo inicia intentando encontrar una respuesta a la pregunta ¿cómo lograr la ampliación del campo humanitario en medio de un conflicto armado interno como el que vive Colombia? Teniendo en cuenta que en este tipo de conflictos armados la población civil es parte integral de las estrategias político-militares de los actores en frentados, lo que dificulta la aplicación de las normas del Derecho Internacional Humanitario (DIH).
14 SEGURIDAD CIUDADANA Y DERECHOS HUMANOS: from:
Los derechos humanos
Author(s) Mendoza Carlos Enrique Guzmán
Abstract: Con la preocupación del ciudadano común y corriente, lleno de subjetividades y miedos, algunos infundados y otros no tanto, pero al mismo tiempo con la mirada atenta en los hechos sociales y políticos propia del investigador, este trabajo se ocupará de un asunto que además de generar tensiones e interrogantes en el conjunto de los ciudadanos y en las autoridades responsables, resulta complejo en su tratamiento por la multiplicidad de factores que podrían estar asociados en su explicación: la
seguridad ciudadana, asociada con la convivencia y el reconocimiento de los derechos, humanos principalmente, de todos los asociados.³
Book Title: El individuo en la cultura y la historia- Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Norte
Author(s): Bayona Jesús Ferro
Abstract: Consciente de la necesidad actual de clarificar la relación entre el psicoanálisis y algunas de las principales propuestas filosóficas y psicológicas contemporáneas que de alguna manera se han visto influenciadas por los planteamientos psicoanalíticos, el autor se aproxima a los planteamientos freudianos desde una perspectiva que, aunque implica el aspecto psicológico, también apunta a la contextualización de éste en el ámbito histórico y cultural.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c3pxvm
JEAN-PAUL SARTRE: from:
El individuo en la cultura y la historia
Abstract: El tema, no obstante, removió a todos los círculos intelectuales franceses, que son quizás los más atractivos del mundo, respondiendo al objetivo trazado por las directivas de la revista: se estaba presenciando, como fenómeno irrepetible, el
CAPÍTULO III. EL LADO LUMINOSO DEL CAPITAL from:
Economía para el ser humano
Abstract: Gústenos o no, ya sea que tomemos una actitud crítica con respecto a la economía capitalista del mercado, o que más bien la aprobemos, que situemos a nuestros enemigos entre los responsables de los entes financieros, o entre las corrientes que critican al capitalismo, el hecho es que el capital determina nuestras vidas hasta lo más profundo de nuestros sentimientos. Nos enriquece y nos agobia; como ya lo hemos indicado, tiene un lado oscuro y otro luminoso. Ambos son reales, y se dan relaciones efectivamente entremezcladas que no siempre se dejan entender con facilidad.
CAPÍTULO VI. EL CAPITAL A LA LUZ DE LA REFLEXIÓN TEOLÓGICA from:
Economía para el ser humano
Abstract: Conectar la reflexión teológica con cuestiones acerca de una actividad económica que respete la dignidad humana, o simplemente acerca de la naturaleza particular del dinero, la riqueza y el capital, necesita una justificación. Porque para muchas personas que toman parte en la economía, la religión no suele desempeñar ningún papel significativo en sus vidas. Y para muchas personas religiosamente motivadas, el mundo de las finanzas y del capital tiene un significado secundario, y tal vez incluso hasta negativo.
CAPÍTULO VII. EL SENTIDO DEL CAPITAL Y LA LÓGICA DE LA HISTORIA from:
Economía para el ser humano
Abstract: En este sentido, hay unas propiedades y unos parámetros fijos e inamovibles que se hallan conectados con todas las formas de capital. Por una parte, es abstracto y universal; mientras que, por la otra, no lo podemos imaginar sin una referencia a un tiempo y a un lugar determinados, aunque
Asserting Personal Capacities and Pleading for Mutual Recognition from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) RICOEUR PAUL
Abstract: The prize with which I have been honored by the John W. Kluge Center at the Library of Congress, and for which I extend my sincere thanks, is motivated by the humanism attributed to my life’s work by these generous benefactors. The reflections that follow are devoted to examining some of the bases of this humanism.
Remembering Paul Ricoeur from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) PELLAUER DAVID
Abstract: Early on he said, “The word is my kingdom and I am not ashamed of it.”¹ In a later book,
Memory, History, Forgetting, he cited this from Vladimir Jankéloevitch as an epigram: “He who has been, from then on cannot not have been: henceforth this mysterious and profoundly obscure fact of having been is his viaticum for all eternity.”²
Narrative Matters among the Mlabri: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) HERDA ELLEN A.
Abstract: The most persuasive moment of Paul Ricoeur’s work for the development anthropologist is his idea of narrative imagination. This concept, applied to the development act of working together with the other who faces marginalization, fear, famine, and isolation, provides a medium for both the anthropologist and the local to emplot history and fiction into a social reality that brings each to a new place. Far from static, this new place is an emerging plot that enables movement from shame and hunger to selfsustainability on the part of the local, and movement from the confinement of Western individualism to an ontological
Emplotting Virtue: from:
A Passion for the Possible: Thinking with Paul Ricoeur
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur’s work remains lamentably underappreciated a few years after this death. Several factors contribute to the relative neglect of his thought. First, Ricoeur is fastidious to a fault in acknowledging his intellectual debts, which can, deceptively, make his thought appear derivative. Second, the pattern of “detour and return” that characterizes his thinking can make it difficult to keep up with him. Following Ricoeur takes one through the diverse fields of existentialism, structuralism, psychoanalysis, and analytic philosophy, to name only a few of his better-known detours. How many philosophers read both Derrida and Parfit? Heidegger and Searle? Nevertheless, those willing
Book Title: Religion: Beyond a Concept- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): de VRIES HENT
Abstract: What do we talk about when we talk about religion? Is it an array of empirical facts about historical human civilizations? Or is religion what is in essence unpredictable-perhaps the very emergence of the new? In what ways are the legacies of religion-its powers, words, things, and gestures-reconfiguring themselves as the elementary forms of life in the twenty-first century?Given the Latin roots of the word religion and its historical Christian uses, what sense, if any, does it make to talk about religionin other traditions? Where might we look for common elements that would enable us to do so? Has religion as an overarching concept lost all its currency, or does it ineluctably return-sometimes in unexpected ways-the moment we attempt to do without it? This book explores the difficulties and double binds that arise when we ask What is religion? Offering a marvelously rich and diverse array of perspectives, it begins the task of rethinking religionand religious studiesin a contemporary world. Opening essays on the question What is religion?are followed by clusters exploring the relationships among religion, theology, and philosophy and the links between religion, politics, and law. Pedagogy is the focus of the following section. Religion is then examined in particular contexts, from classical times to the present Pentacostal revival, leading into an especially rich set of essays on religion, materiality, and mediatization. The final section grapples with the ever-changing forms that religionis taking, such as spirituality movements and responses to the ecological crisis.Featuring the work of leading scholars from a wide array of disciplines, traditions, and cultures, Religion: Beyond a Concept will help set the agenda for religious studies for years to come. It is the first of five volumes in a collection entitled The Future of the Religious Past, the fruit of a major international research initiative funded by the Netherlands Organization for Scientific Research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chhf
Introduction: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) de Vries Hent
Abstract: “Religion” may—or may not—be here to stay. As a “concept” (but which or whose, exactly?), from one perspective it might seem to be losing its received reference (the transcendent, the world beyond, and the life hereafter) and its shared relevance (a unified view of the cosmos and all beings in it; a doctrine of the origin, purpose, and end of all things; an alert, enlightened, or redeemed sense of self; a practice and way of life), if it has not done so already. Yet from another perspective, it continues to claim a prominent role in attempts to understand
The Christian Invention of Judaism: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Boyarin Daniel
Abstract: It seems highly significant that there is no word in premodern Jewish parlance that means “Judaism.” When the term
Ioudaismosappears in non-Christian Jewish writing, to my knowledge only in II Maccabees, it doesn’t mean Judaism, the religion, but the entire complex of loyalties and practices that mark off the people of Israel; after that, it is used as the name of the Jewish religion only by writers who do not identify themselves with and by that name at all, until, it would seem, well into the nineteenth century.¹ It might seem, then, that Judaism has not, until some time
The Future of the Religious Past from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Taylor Charles
Abstract: But I still my fears by telling myself that what I’m actually going to do is give an account of the vectors of religious development up to the present (itself a high-risk, accident-prone enterprise), from which some very tentative guesses might be made about their continuation or alteration in the future.
Religion as Memory: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Farhat John A.
Abstract: Until the end of the 1960s, the sociology of religion was governed by one principal objective: namely, that of illuminating and analyzing the structural connection between the rise of modernity and the cultural and social repression of religion. The readings of the founding fathers of the discipline, dominant up to that time, furnished the theoretical underpinnings for this program: Marx, Durkheim, and Weber have certainly developed radically different approaches to the structures and functions of society, but each has, in his own way, contributed to establishing that the process of rationalization characterizing the advance of modernity is identical to the
Teaching Religious Facts in Secular Schools from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Ginsburg Daniela
Abstract: A truly secular school must give each student access to an understanding of the world. For this reason, it has always been possible to speak of religions in the schools of the Republic, insofar as they are facts of civilization. Contrary to a tenacious prejudice, the content of our schools’ curricula attests to this, and has long done so.
Secularization: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Bremmer Jan N.
Abstract: In his fascinating but not always easy to follow study “What Might an Anthropology of Secularism Look Like?” Talal Asad embarks on an important quest, namely, to determine the nature of the secular. He takes it that the secular is “a concept that brings together certain behaviors, knowledges, and sensibilities in modern life.” Moreover, he stresses that “the secular is neither singular in origin nor stable in its historical identity, although it works through a series of particular oppositions.” In fact, Asad takes the view “that ‘the religious’ and the ‘secular’ are not essentially fixed categories.” He also assumes “that
As Close as a Scholar Can Get: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Droogers André
Abstract: Among all the phenomena that scholars study, religion occupies an exceptional position because as a form of knowledge it is commonly presented as the opposite of science. Religion, as we now use the term, is a relatively recent construct, formed explictitly in contrast to science. When in modernity science came into a dominant position, religion was categorized in accordance with its nonscientific nature, given that the transcendental reality to which it refers is not open to empirical verification. That nonempirical reality could not be accepted as a causal factor in explaining religion. As a consequence, theories of religion refer primarily
The Field of Religion and Ecology: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Watling Tony
Abstract: This essay is concerned with “religion and ecology,” or religious environmentalism. It analyzes how religious traditions are used to understand and interact with the environment and environmental issues, suggesting ways of relating to these that are different from and possibly less destructive and ecologically harmful than those of the modern secular worldview. It argues that religious traditions may thereby be gaining new private and public relevance, while perhaps also being changed in the process, becoming more environmentally friendly and ecumenical. The article ethnographically and qualitatively analyzes a “field of religion and ecology” comprising ecologically minded academics and representatives of various
The Politics of Love and Its Enemies from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Nirenberg David
Abstract: Theology and the Political, the latest volume in Slavoj Žižek’s series SIC, comes with an introduction by the Archbishop of Canterbury, Rowan Williams. Within its brief compass, the archbishop’s introduction outlines two views of meaningful action. The first understands meaningful action as assertion, existing only where “a particular will has imprinted its agenda on the ‘external’ world”; the second insists that “meaningful action is action that is capable of contributing to a system of communication, to symbolic exchange.” The first “pervades so much of modernity and . . . postmodernity,” including “popular liberal and pluralist thought,” and ”raises a a
Neutralizing Religion; or, What Is the Opposite of “Faith-based”? from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Sullivan Winnifred Fallers
Abstract: The Center for Studies in Criminal Justice at the University of Chicago Law School held a two-day conference in May 2001 entitled “Faith-Based Initiatives and Urban Policy.”¹ The principal focus of the conference was the then relatively new use of private “faith-based” social service agencies in addressing the needs of the urban poor. Could churches replace or supplement government agencies by delivering social services in a more effective manner? Speakers and participants were largely expert in sociology or criminal justice. None were in religious studies, however loosely defined. From time to time, the question would surface as to exactly what
Troubles with Materiality: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Masuzawa Tomoko
Abstract: Upon hearing the standard disciplinary history of the science of religion (
Religionswissenschaft),¹ one might get the impression that, by the second half of the nineteenth century, talk of fetishism should have been all but dead. By then, “fetishism” as a particular type or form of religious belief and practice was supposedly no longer a viable or respectable category in debating the origin, evolution, or morphology of religion. Thus we read in the Victorian chapter of this history about the rise—and usually also the fall—of various theories concerning the origin of religion, such as Edward B. Tylor’s animism theory,
Religious Sensations: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Meyer Birgit
Abstract: Whether we like it or not, religion appears to be of the utmost importance in the early twenty-first century. The idea that the public relevance of religion would decline with modernization and development, yielding a disenchanted world, has been contradicted by actual developments, from the manifestation of so-called political Islam to the rise of Pentecostal-charismatic movements propagating the Gospel of Prosperity, from wars that mobilize religious convictions to acts of terror in the name of God, from contests over blasphemous representations and sacrilege on the part of Muslims and Christians to the deep entanglement of religion and entertainment, from accusations
Intimate Exteriorities: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) van Maas Sander
Abstract: It is not a rare phenomenon today to find a concert hall—that bourgeois temple of the cult of Art—filled with religious music. This may not seem surprising, since soon after its invention in the eighteenth century the concert hall became a location for the performance of religious repertoires. The times have changed, however, and the position of religion today can hardly be compared with the one it occupied centuries ago. The presence of religion in classical music performances today is mostly historical in character, such as, for instance, when Handel’s oratorios are played, or Mozart’s
Requiem.
Death in the Image: from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) Alexandrova Alena
Abstract: A number of group and solo exhibitions offer evidence that both curators and visual artists are increasingly interested in the controversial issue of religion and its role in the contemporary art scene.¹ Artworks that deal with or refer to religious themes and motifs constitute a very heterogeneous group. They have in common the fact that they do not function in religious contexts and cannot be described as “religious art.” Instead, these artworks are
aboutreligion and its practices, concepts, ideas, and images in the sense that they thematize its continued cultural relevance. Curators and artists interested in religious themes are
Spirituality in Modern Society from:
Religion: Beyond a Concept
Author(s) van der Veer Peter
Abstract: In December 1911, Wassily Kandinsky published his
Über das Geistige in der Kunst (Concerning the Spiritual in Art). The book’s main purpose was to arouse a capacity to experience the spiritual in material and abstract things, for Kandinsky believed this capacity enables experiences that in the future would be absolutely necessary and unending. Kandinsky emphasizes that he is not creating a rational theory, but that as an artist he is interested in experiences that are partially unconscious. One of the formative experiences he describes in his bookRückblicke (Glances Back) is his encounter at a French exhibition with Monet’sHaystack:
Book Title: Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): LIMON JOHN
Abstract: Almost all twentieth-century philosophy stresses the immanence of death in human life-as drive (Freud), as the context of Being (Heidegger), as the essence of our defining ethics (Levinas), or as language (de Man, Blanchot). In Death's Following, John Limon makes use of literary analysis (of Sebald, Bernhard, and Stoppard), cultural analysis, and autobiography to argue that death is best conceived as always transcendentally beyond ourselves, neither immanent nor imminent. Adapting Kierkegaard's variations on the theme of Abraham's near-sacrifice of Isaac while refocusing the emphasis onto Isaac, Limon argues that death should be imagined as if hiding at the end of an inexplicable journey to Moriah. The point is not to evade or ignore death but to conceive it more truly, repulsively, and pervasively in its camouflage: for example, in jokes, in logical puzzles, in bowdlerized folk songs. The first of Limon's two key concepts is adulthood: the prolonged anti-ritual for experiencing the full distance on the look of death. His second is dirtiness, as theorized in a Jewish joke, a logical exemplum, and T. S. Eliot's "Ash Wednesday": In each case, unseen dirt on foreheads suggests the invisibility of inferred death. Not recognizing death immediately or admitting its immanence and imminence is for Heidegger the defining characteristic of the "they," humanity in its inauthentic social escapism. But Limon vouches throughout for the mediocrity of the "they" in its dirty and ludicrous adulthood. Mediocrity is the privileged position for previewing death, in Limon's opinion: practice for being forgotten. In refusing the call of twentieth-century philosophy to face death courageously, Limon urges the ethical and aesthetic value of mediocre anti-heroism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5chjz
CHAPTER ONE Preliminary Expectoration from:
Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: As the crisis of
Catch-22approaches, just before Yossarian must choose whether to sell out to the Army or flee it, he has a dream while under an anesthetic. The novel, to this point, has been radically antipsychological—what use is the diagnosis of paranoia, for example, if everyone is in fact shooting at you?—and Yossarian, on Heller’s behalf, has delighted in concocting dreams to placate or frustrate psychoanalysts. But he is frightened by his one actual dream, and feels the urgency of plumbing its recesses.
CHAPTER FIVE Tickling the Corpse: from:
Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: 1.2 The first paradigm is Albrecht Dürer’s
St. Jerome(1521), in which a ferocious St. Jerome glares down to his left, his vision passing behind and beyond the skull on his desk, which he points to and softly touches with his left index finger. Among the things that Jerome is not looking at is the crucifix behind him and over his right arm. Nevertheless, it would seem to be in his mind’s eye or, more exactly,
CHAPTER EIGHT Re: from:
Death's Following: Mediocrity, Dirtiness, Adulthood, Literature
Abstract: On February 29, 1960, when I was exactly, by way of a rare half-birthday, eight-and-a-half, my father, Gerald Limon, was finally killed by an aneurysm, not yet thirty-nine. He had fainted in his car outside his factory, had improved daily for about a week, and died. Family policy, pretty strictly adhered to, was never to discuss him, either his life or death, again. Some time after his death, maybe a month or two, my mother asked me if I had any questions about it. None came to mind. She thought perhaps I had worried that I might die in the
Introduction: from:
Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: If it is true that a book can always be traced back to an occasion from which it must have started out, then the initial occasion for writing this book was not exactly irony. The chapter that was written earliest and which therefore stands more or less at its source is entitled “
Fear and Trembling”—an essay that in the first instance ought to be about faith. It may well be, of course, that the book in its entirety is about the unexpected ways in which irony and faith are indissociable. At any rate, the faith that first occasioned the
SEVEN Death in Venice: from:
Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: It would certainly be ironic, as they say, if it turned out that one of the most celebrated theorists and practitioners of irony in the twentieth century had actually misconstrued what makes irony into such an unruly and troublesome factor within the discourses of literature and philosophy alike. Such may indeed be the case for Thomas Mann, whose critical essays and literary fictions are regularly cited whenever romantic and postromantic irony becomes a topic for serious consideration. For if, in the case of Socrates, Kierkegaard wondered just how serious the Greek thinker could be about irony, since while rightfully maintaining
EIGHT Terrible Flowers: from:
Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: How is literature possible? The question is actually the title of an essay written by Maurice Blanchot, which is itself a response to a most enigmatic book by the French editor, critic, writer, and literary theoretician Jean Paulhan, called
Les Fleurs de Tarbes, ou, La Terreur dans les lettres (The Flowers of Tarbes, or, The Terror in Literature).¹ In what way, exactly, does Paulhan’sThe Flowers of Tarbesask about the possibility of literature? Can the question of rhetorical fl owers, that is, the question of whether and how literature is possible, be asked without its having immediate and far-reaching
TEN “What Is Happening Today in Deconstruction” from:
Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: In all likelihood, bibliographies will one day reveal that none of the proper names, movements, currents, or themes comprising the many strands of French thought in the twentieth century solicited more or more varied attempts at description and definition than
deconstruction. No doubt, it also produced the most frustration, since it is increasingly clear that in every case such attempts at description and definition fail to achieve their goal in satisfactory fashion. The failure is built in to the extent that, even in French, the very worddéconstructionalready belongs to more than just one language, thus making any effort
Coda: from:
Irony on Occasion: From Schlegel and Kierkegaard to Derrida and de Man
Abstract: What is the relationship between freedom and knowledge? Is it possible to be free without knowing it? Alternatively, is there something about knowledge and its conditions of possibility that imposes exacting limits upon the concept and experience of freedom? These are among the questions that emerge from reading J. M. Coetzee’s strangely disturbing novel
Disgrace.¹ They have to “emerge” from a reading because they are not there at the beginning. Or, rather, the questions are there from the start, but in the unacknowledged and displaced mode of answers, of presupposed “solutions” for problems that no longer seem of direct concern
1 The Wager of Carnal Hermeneutics from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: What is the sense of sense? How do we read between the lines of skin and flesh? How do we interpret the world with our bodily senses, and especially those long neglected in Western philosophy—taste and touch? How, in other words, do we discern the world
asthis or that,ashospitable or hostile, as attractive or repulsive,astasty or tasteless, as living or dying? These are key questions of carnal hermeneutics.
3 Rethinking Corpus from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) NANCY JEAN-LUC
Abstract: The meaning of this idiom is “to kill someone,” or metaphorically speaking “to reduce someone to nothing,” “to settle the score.” Life escapes through skin that’s been pierced by a weapon. Skin that is intact protects life, holding it together, but in order to do this, it has to tie itself together; it has to tie a knot in the cut umbilical cord. The cord is an extension of skin in the nourishing mass of placenta, but all the while it’s distinct from the mother’s body. It penetrates the placenta with tiny ramifications, but it is formed as an organ
7 On the Phenomena of Suffering from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) MARION JEAN-LUC
Abstract: Life only lets itself be said in a negative mode, despite the fact that it precisely has the privilege of negating any negativity. For my life only conceals itself, withdraws and flees far from me as inaccessible and foreign, because it happens to me so intimately that I cannot
watch it cometo me, nor establish the least gap between it and me—this gap without which transcendence, intentionality, and horizon cannot operate or let anything show itself. I do not see my life, because I am it—or more exactly, because I am only within it. Life is that
9 Skin Deep: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) CASEY EDWARD S.
Abstract: Some places are hard to bear—to bear bodily. For example, solitary confinement. It has been realized, much too belatedly, how devastating being kept alone in a prison cell continuously—for days, months, even years—can be for human beings. Lisa Guenther opens her recent book
Solitary Confinementwith the statement that “there are many ways to destroy a human being, but one of the simplest and most devastating is through prolonged solitary confinement.”¹ The effects studied so far have been mostly about the psychological impact of living in an entirely isolated way: it is known that many prisoners will
10 Touched by Touching from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) WOOD DAVID
Abstract: In this paper I take select concrete “instances” as opportunities for reflection, openings for imagining a broader practice of carnal hermeneutics. These instances include snatches of conversation, experiences, and works of art. The general assumption is that these cases exhibit many “thinks at a time,” that philosophical reflection can bring this out, and that such reflection feeds back into deepening the original experience. After years in the deconstructive trenches, I have been recently influenced by a certain strain of Wittgensteinian practice. I have come to think that the point of philosophy is to encourage and inculcate dispositions that take up
12 Getting in Touch: from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) ALLOA EMMANUEL
Abstract: If we look at its history, hermeneutics never was anything but diacritical. In his seminal essay on the origins of hermeneutics (“Die Geburt der Hermeneutik,” 1900), Wilhelm Dilthey argued that hermeneutics was born in Alexandria, in the Hellenistic period. Although according to Dilthey the art of
hermēneia(interpretation) was already practiced in classical Greece, it is only with the post-classical Alexandrian school of philology that hermeneutics became a self-standing discipline. As it were, the problem of the correct understanding becomes all the more insistent as the object of interpretation is far away: from the perspective of the Alexandrian philologists, the
15 The Passion According to Teresa of Avila from:
Carnal Hermeneutics
Author(s) KRISTEVA JULIA
Abstract: Teresa of Avila (1515–1582) experienced and wrote about what we call mysticism at a time when Spain’s glory and power—that of the Conquistadors and the Golden Age—began its decline. Erasmus and Luther were shaking up traditional beliefs; new Catholics such as the Alumbrados attracted Jews and women; the Inquisition banned books in Castilian; and trials to determine the “
limieza de sangre” multiplied. The daughter of a “christiana vieja” and a “converso,” Teresa, in her childhood, witnessed the case brought against her father’s family in which they had to prove they were truly Christian and not Jewish. Teresa’s
Re-opening the Question of Religion: from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) van ROODEN AUKJE
Abstract: One of the most complicated and ambiguous tendencies in contemporary Western societies is undoubtedly the phenomenon usually referred to as the “turn to religion,” “the post-secular,” or, more generally, the “return of the religious.” What at first sight appears to be a simple return to religious values, inspired by a critical rejection of the basic assumptions of modern secular culture, is in fact a refined dialogue with this culture, a dialogue in which religious and secular arguments often change places. This delicate relationship between religion and modernity manifests itself not only in daily practical discussions about the role of religion
Sense, Existence, and Justice; or, How Are We to Live in a Secular World? from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) VANDEPUTTE KATHLEEN
Abstract: In fact, Nancy tries to tell us something different: unless we want to inhabit
Intermezzo from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) Kate Laurens ten
Abstract: In the previous part of this book, the deconstruction of Christianity has been presented as an analysis of the complex relation between modern culture and religion. As Nancy carries it out, this analysis is not simply a form of “deconstructive activity”—deconstruction as a means to investigate an object—but an examination of Christianity’s self-deconstruction. The interplay between religion and modernity brings to the fore a dynamic of self-deconstruction, in which both are involved in a constant process of “turning away from themselves” and “leaving themselves behind.” This retreat from self, Nancy suggests, may be a movement that is as
God Passing By: from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) KATE LAURENS ten
Abstract: The central characteristic of monotheism may be, not the exclusive acknowledgement of a single God, but something that Jan Assmann recently named the “Mosaic distinction.”¹ This distinction is twofold. According to Assmann, it primarily designates the discordant difference between true and false religion, and between a true and a false God.² Assmann demonstrates how this distinction turned the natural and obvious presence of religion itself into a
problem. Religion had to interrogate its truth instead of simply coinciding with it—“being” its own truth—and in this way its presence was no longer guaranteed, nor was that of its God:
“My God, my God, why hast Thou forsaken me?” from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) van ROODEN AUKJE
Abstract: A thesis only marginally stressed in
Dis-enclosure: The Deconstruction of Christianity, though revealing one of its essential structures, is that a deconstruction of Christianity should be understood as a form of demythologization. Or, as Nancy has it, Christianity “understands itself in a way that is less and less religious in the sense in which religion implies a mythology (a narrative, a representation of divine actions and persons)” (D37/57). The seemingly strange statement that the Christian religion increasingly understands itself “in a way that is less and less religious,” is a reformulation of Nancy’s central thesis that Christianity is a
Literary Creation, Creation ex Nihilo from:
Re-treating Religion: Deconstructing Christianity with Jean-Luc Nancy
Author(s) McKeane John
Abstract: In
Dis-enclosure, Jean-Luc Nancy suggests that in Western culture “God’s act of creation” has provided “the least bad analogical recourse” for designating the “void-artist-body [corps-vide-artiste]” (D69/99; first trans. modified). Working backward, from this we can posit, still speaking analogically, that God’s act of creation generated the myth or concept of creation that is involved in the process and results of literary writing. Such a myth of creation should be understood in at least two senses: first, myth as an originary tale (récit) of foundation that has come down to us via the Judeo-Christian tradition (Genesis), and second, myth in
Book Title: Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Words of Life is the sequel and companion to Phenomenology and the Theological Turn,edited by Dominique Janicaud, Jean-Francois Courtine, Jean-Louis Chrtien, Michel Henry, Jean-Luc Marion, and Paul Ricoeur. In that volume, Janicaud accuses Levinas, Henry, Marion, and Chrtien of veeringfrom phenomenological neutrality to a theologically inflected phenomenology. By contrast, the contributors to this collection interrogate whether phenomenology's proper starting point is agnostic or atheistic. Many hold the view that phenomenology after the theological turn may very well be true both to itself and to the phenomenological things themselves.In one way or another, all of these essays contend with the limits and expectations of phenomenology. As such, they are all concerned with what counts as properphenomenology and even the very structure of phenomenology. None of them, however, is limited to such questions. Indeed, the rich tapestry that they weave tells us much about human experience. Themes such as faith, hope, love, grace, the gift, the sacraments, the words of Christ, suffering, joy, life, the call, touch, listening, wounding, and humility are woven throughout the various meditations in this volume. The contributors use striking examples to illuminate the structure and limits of phenomenology and, in turn, phenomenology serves to clarify those very examples. Thus practice clarifies theory and theory clarifies practice, resulting in new theological turns and new life for phenomenology. The volume showcases the work of both senior and junior scholars, including Jean-Luc Marion, Jean-Yves Lacoste, Kevin Hart, Anthony J. Steinbock, Jeffrey Bloechl, Jeffrey L. Kosky, Clayton Crockett, Brian Treanor, and Christina Gschwandtner-as well as the editors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjph
“it / is true” from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: Phenomenology, as properly practiced, is a response to what is given rather than a single procedure that can be perfected. Responses can take various forms—essays, treatises, paintings, conversations, narratives, plays, and poems—each of which has constraints that, whether respected or transgressed, inflect phenomenological observation in different ways. Literature certainly gives us a range of examples for understanding phenomenology. When reading Italo Calvino’s
Invisible Cities(1972) we see exactly what “free phantasy” is, and when watchingOthellowe grasp theeidosof jealousy far better than in reading a paper about that obsessive state in a psychology journal.¹ Yet
Michel Henry’s Theory of Disclosive Moods from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) HANSON JEFFREY
Abstract: Michel Henry pursued throughout his career a remarkable, and remarkably consistent, account of disclosive mood. As a phenomenologist of affectivity, it is no surprise that Henry focused his attention on specific tonalities that reveal a privileged truth. Early in his career Henry emphasized despair as the privileged tonality, but later he dispensed with despair and instead preferred to speak of anxiety. Despite the change in vocabulary, however, in each case his interpretation of what the disclosive mood discloses is the same.¹ Beyond the sort of disclosure characteristic of any ordinary feeling, a disclosive mood, according to Henry, reveals the self
Radical Phenomenology Reveals a Measure of Faith and a Need for a Levinasian Other in Henry’s Life from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) MERCER RONALD L.
Abstract: Jean-Yves Lacoste reminds us in “The Work and Complement of Appearing” that things exist inasmuch as they invite themselves to us. Were we but able to render an account of this invitation, were we only to perceive that it is not in disguise that things appear to us, and were we, finally, to know the conditions under which consciousness is open, all the work of philosophy would be, by right, achievable.¹ “Were we”—a contrary to fact conditional. If we
wereto have made these accounts, perceptions, and conditions—but we have not—then all of philosophy’s work would be
The Truth of Life: from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) CROCKETT CLAYTON
Abstract: With the translation of
I Am the Truth, Michel Henry has emerged in the English-speaking world as one of the Christian phenomenologists associated with the turn to religion on the part of contemporary continental philosophy. Henry’s previous phenomenological books, such asThe Essence of ManifestationandPhilosophy and Phenomenology of the Body, can be read as significant philosophical works in themselves or alternatively as leading toward his later, more explicitly religious writings.¹ Whether in his dense phenomenological reflections or his intense religious meditations, Henry’s language is provocative, and I would like to second Jean-Luc Marion’s initial negative reaction. Referring to
Embodied Ears: from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) TREANOR BRIAN
Abstract: The mainstream philosophical tradition of the West is characterized by a marked preference for the visual metaphor. Plato, for example, analogizes knowledge and vision explicitly in his attempt to describe the role played by the Good (
agathon) in intellection (eithernoesisordianoia). “As the good is in the intelligible region with
The Witness of Humility from:
Words of Life: New Theological Turns in French Phenomenology
Author(s) WIRZBA NORMAN
Abstract: There is no task more difficult than to be faithful and true to our creaturely condition. Whether out of fear, blindness, suspicion, arrogance, or rebellion, our abiding temptation is to evade, dissimulate, or distort each other and our place in the world. Rather than patiently and honestly living up to our need before others—by taking full account of, and then honoring, the breadth and depth of the relationships we live through—we deform need into fantasy and remake the world to suit our own desires. Rather than being grateful for the fact that others contribute to our well being
Book Title: Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kripal Jeffrey J.
Abstract: From rumors about gnostic orgies in antiquity to the explicit erotic symbolism of alchemical texts, from the subtly coded eroticism of medieval kabbalah to the sexual magic practiced by contemporary occultists and countercultural translations of Asian Tantra, the history of Western esotericism is rich in references to the domains of eros and sexuality. This volume, which brings together an impressive array of top-level specialists, is the first to analyze the eroticism of the esoteric without sensationalism or cheap generalizations, but on the basis of expert scholarship and attention to textual and historical detail. While there are few domains where the imagination may so easily run wild, the various contributions seek to distinguish fact from fiction-only to find that historical realities are sometimes even stranger than the fantasies. In doing so, they reveal the outlines of a largely unknown history spanning more than twenty centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c5cjzn
INTRODUCTION: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Hanegraaff Wouter J.
Abstract: In recent years, the academic study of Western esotericism has been developing rapidly from a somewhat obscure specialty pursued by a few dedicated researchers into a burgeoning professional fi eld of scholarly activity and international organization. Once a domain restricted to the relatively secluded circles of specialists and hence hidden from the sight of most academic and non-academic readers, it is now becoming an increasingly popular topic of public and critical discussion in the context of journals, monographs, conferences, and scholarly organizations.¹ The book you now hold in your hands is the fruit, one of many, of this growing branch
SEXUALITY AND SEXUAL SYMBOLISM IN HERMETIC AND GNOSTIC THOUGHT AND PRACTICE (SECOND–FOURTH CENTURIES) from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) van den Broek Roelof
Abstract: The hermetic current claimed to transmit the teachings of the ancient Egyptian sage Hermes Trismegistus.¹ The magical, astrological, and alchemical hermetic writings attributed to Hermes, and usually referred to as the “technical hermetica,” fall beyond the scope of the present chapter, which concentrates on what is known as “philosophical Hermetism.” Its most characteristic
CONCEIVING SPIRITS: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) DeConick April D.
Abstract: Valentinian thought and practices have been the subject of countless academic studies even prior to the discovery of the Nag Hammadi collection in 1945. In this literature, the Valentinians were characterized as elitist Gnostics who believed in the certainty of their salvation due to the existence of a particle of spirit within them, a “seed” which guaranteed the acquisition of
gnosis. Due in part to their characterization as spiritual snobs and intellectual egotists, they have been portrayed either as libertines who believed that they could claim a certain sexual freedom denied to other Christians, or as conservatives who embraced celibacy
PASCHAL BEVERLY RANDOLPH AND SEXUAL MAGIC from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Deveney John Patrick
Abstract: By the mid-nineteenth century, magic (and the occult generally) in the West were in parlous straits, paralleling those described in the surprising recent bestseller by Susanna Clarke,
Jonathan Strange & Mr. Norrell.¹ The novel is set in a fair approximation of early nineteenth-century England and depicts a world in which magic was venerated, indeed diligently studied, but in an antiquarian fashion only, with no thought of—and indeed a horror of—practical application of the trove of abstruse knowledge. Magic before the arrival of the mysterious Mr. Norrell is a bit of flotsam only, the debris of a once-great synthesis
THE KNIGHT OF SPERMATOPHAGY: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Pasi Marco
Abstract: Do you want to know a secret? It is a secret that has been kept intact for centuries, but it is of supreme importance, actually indispensable for understanding the real essence of Christianity and the hidden development of Western culture. It can give you the key to penetrating the core of all religious traditions in the world. Here it is: during the Last Supper, it is not bread and wine that Jesus Christ gave to the apostles as symbols of his body and of his blood. What Jesus really offered on that occasion, which was to become the model for
THE YOGA OF SEX: from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Urban Hugh
Abstract: Since their first discovery of the complex body of texts and traditions known as “Tantra,” Western authors have been at once horrified and tantalized, scandalized and titillated, by this seemingly exotic form of Eastern spirituality. Above all, Western authors have been particularly obsessed with the use of sexual rituals in Tantric practice—a phenomenon that was a source of disgusted revulsion for most Christian missionaries and Orientalist scholars, even as it was a source of erotic allure for many European esoteric groups. By the end of the nineteenth century, in fact, Tantra had begun to be appropriated by various European
THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF SEXUAL MAGIC, EXEMPLIFIED BY FOUR MAGICAL GROUPS IN THE EARLY TWENTIETH CENTURY from:
Hidden Intercourse: Eros and Sexuality in the History of Western Esotericism
Author(s) Hakl Hans Thomas
Abstract: For obvious reasons, sexual magic is a subject that evokes controversy and curiosity. Surprisingly, however, there exists—with the laudable exception of two works on the Hermetic Brotherhood of Luxor and on Paschal Beverly Randolph¹—practically no critical scholarly literature that studies it as a historical phenomenon and, as a result, the information available to a wider public tends to be sensationalist, secondhand, and mostly unreliable. In this chapter we will present a factual presentation of the theories and practices of four of the most important groups and orders devoted to sexual magic in the twentieth century, based upon direct
1 Considering Contemporary Selves: from:
Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: Bonhoeffer’s account of the ethical self has become even more apropos with the onset of “postmodernity.” While this term is perhaps too disputed to be helpful, it heralds increased skepticism regarding the concept of selfhood. Important for the Christian theologian is the question of how God impacts the self. Two texts of particular relevance to this proposed consideration of theological selfhood stand out. They provide tools for considering the concept of an ethically oriented self. Specifically, these texts present the concept of ethical selfhood not as the fruit of reflection on oneself, but as engagement with an “other” who encounters
4 Weil’s “Attention” and the Other-Oriented Self from:
Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Ethical Self
Abstract: The previous three chapters outline the concept of an ethically oriented self, existing in responsibility for another. That ethically oriented self emerges primarily from discourse between Bonhoeffer and Levinas on the character and limits of responsibility. In this chapter, Weil’s concept of attention adds greater specificity to the self’s existence “for” the other. The first section of this chapter outlines the contours of Weil’s concept of attention, emphasizing the place of attention within Weil’s discussion of the self. Here, the stress is placed not on attention as a metaphysical idea, but as an ethical one.¹ By invoking Weil’s concept of
1 The Performed Text from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: Biblical Performance Criticism is a way of understanding the Bible. It is the result of many streams of thought meeting over the last century, including form criticism, oral-tradition studies, rhetorical criticism, narrative criticism, memory studies, media studies, and performance studies. In some way, each of these streams analyzes four elements: (1) someone speaking, (2) someone hearing, (3) a text, and (4) a social situation. Each has contributed to the understanding that the Bible should be read in terms of the interaction of those four elements rather than any one of them in isolation.
2 What Is Biblical Performance Criticism? from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: To describe biblical performance criticism, I start by explaining how human beings communicate. Performance criticism analyzes and practices certain kinds of communication, specifically repeated behaviors for an audience. Inquiry, imagination, and intervention are three aspects of a performance and its analysis. Biblical performance criticism is the analysis and practice of performances of biblical traditions. The basic method of biblical performance criticism is to prepare, internalize, and perform a biblical text. Although it may make it sound like a step-by-step process, performance criticism is really more circular and interrelated, like nodes on a network that influence each other rather than a
3 Performing Habakkuk from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: The basic method of performance criticism is
prepare, internalize, andperform. These three steps roughly correlate to the three aspects of performance:inquiry, imagination, andintervention. As I demonstrate below, however, preparation requires not only inquiry but also imagination and intervention. Internalization is not only an act of imagination but also depends on inquiry and intervention. The performance itself integrates inquiry, imagination, and intervention into one experience for performer and audience.
5 Ten Insights from Performance Criticism from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: By preparing, internalizing, and performing texts, I have been given many insights into the texts themselves, the impact they have on audiences, and how biblical studies can change to better address how traditions were transmitted in ancient times and how they function in modern times. Of the many insights that could be chosen, here are my top ten.
6 Conclusions, Challenges, and Considerations from:
Insights from Performance Criticism
Abstract: They are performers with texts and audiences in concrete situations. The father sits with his son practicing commandments. The reader opens the book and occasionally looks up at the group as she reads. The storyteller sits with others in a circle sharing a well-known tale. The leader reminds the group of their founder’s words and draws out new implications for their situation. The scribe explains what the law means for the people assembled. The song leader guides the rehearsal of a choir. The group follows the script of the annual gathering. A scholar reads her paper that analyzes the nuances
4 A Revised Cosmic Hierarchy Revealed from:
Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Bryan David K.
Abstract: In 1987, Mikeal Parsons revived the narrative significance of Luke’s dual inclusion of Jesus’s ascent into heaven at the conclusion of the Gospel and the beginning of Acts.¹ Parsons argued that Jesus’s ascent supplies a “triumphal exit” to Luke’s Gospel, an interpretation typically affirmed by scholars today who also view the ascension as a concluding “exaltation.”² In spite of this general consensus, it remains debated exactly how this brief conclusion to Luke’s Gospel portrays Jesus as “triumphal” or “exalted,” and how the ascent relates to the preceding narrative of the Gospel.³ In other words, within the Gospel of Luke alone,
7 Jesus’s Ascension and the Lukan Account of the Restoration of Israel from:
Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Pao David W.
Abstract: Among the New Testament (NT) writings, only Luke provides an explicit account of the public ascension of Jesus. The significance of Jesus’s ascension in his writings is further accentuated by the fact that it appears in both his first and second volumes. While it is widely acknowledged that the ascension account found at the end of Luke’s Gospel serves to provide a proper conclusion to this gospel (Luke 24:50–53),¹ and the one found at the beginning of Acts serves to introduce the mission of the apostles after Jesus’s departure (Acts 1:9–11),² the programmatic significance of the ascension narrative
10 The Ascension as a Cultic Experience in Acts from:
Ascent into Heaven in Luke-Acts
Author(s) Strelan Rick
Abstract: In this essay, I propose that the Acts narrative of the ascension of Jesus (1:6–11) derived from, and was shaped by, the cultic and devotional practices of Luke’s audiences. In these practices, they experienced, often in visions, the exalted Jesus as the ascending Lord. Rather than the narrative determining the practices, these visionary experiences determined the narrative. In this, I imitate to a degree the argument of Hurtado that some early Christians experienced Jesus as Lord in a worship setting, and it was from that experience of him that they developed their christological understandings.¹ The priority and significance of
Book Title: On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy-A Guide for the Unruly
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: Marcel Duchamp once asked whether it is possible to make something that is not a work of art. This question returns over and over in modernist culture, where there are no longer any authoritative criteria for what can be identified (or excluded) as a work of art. As William Carlos Williams says, A poem can be made of anything,even newspaper clippings.At this point, art turns into philosophy, all art is now conceptual art, and the manifesto becomes the distinctive genre of modernism. This book takes seriously this transformation of art into philosophy, focusing upon the systematic interest that so many European philosophers take in modernism. Among the philosophers Gerald Bruns discusses are Theodor W. Adorno, Maurice Blanchot, Arthur Danto, Stanley Cavell, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Michel Foucault, Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari, Jacques Derrida, Jean-Franois Lyotard, Jean-Luc Nancy, Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe, and Emmanuel Levinas.As Bruns demonstrates, the difficulty of much modern and contemporary poetry can be summarized in the idea that a poem is made of words, not of any of the things that we use words to produce: meanings, concepts, propositions, narratives, or expressions of feeling. Many modernist poets have argued that in poetry language is no longer a form of mediation but a reality to be explored and experienced in its own right. But what sort of experience, philosophically, might this be? The problem of the materiality or hermetic character of poetic language inevitably leads to questions of how philosophy itself is to be written and what sort of communitydefines the work of art-or, for that matter, the work of philosophy.In this provocative study, Bruns answers that the culture of modernism is a kind of anarchist community, where the work of art is apt to be as much an event or experience-or, indeed, an alternative form of life-as a formal object. In modern writing, philosophy and poetry fold into one another. In this book, Bruns helps us to see how.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gmm
2 Ancients and Moderns: from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Play of the Artwork. Possibly there is a no more unlikely, or maybe even unwanted, commentator on modernism than Hans-Georg Gadamer, a classical philologist, distinguished Plato scholar, and author ofWahrheit und Methode(Truth and Method) (1960), the monumental articulation of philosophical hermeneutics, one of whose central chapters concerns the normative character of the “classical” or “eminent” text. (WM. 269–75/TM. 285–90). Nevertheless, it happens that Gadamer is also an accomplished art historian who thinks that the claim of the modernist work (one of Duchamp’s Readymades, for example) is every bit as compelling as that of the classical
3 Foucault’s Modernism: from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Modernism Once More. Fredric Jameson has usefully proposed that we think of modernism not as a period concept but, more loosely, as a “narrative category” in which topics like nineteenth-century realism, self-reflexive language, and the impersonality of the artist get articulated and rearticulated in multifarious ways.¹ It is certainly the case that modernism is often defined more clearly by examples than by theories—serial music, cubism, nonlinear or fragmentary texts like Stein’sTender Buttons(or Wittgenstein’sTractatus), as well as avant-garde groups like the Surrealists whose aim was often less to produce works of art than to develop new forms
4 Poetic Communities from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Ecstasy. Scholarly tradition pictures Hesiod, like Homer before him, as a great pedagogue.¹ The poet is in charge of a vast encyclopedia concerning gods and heroes (and also, in Hesiod’s particular case, everyday life). But from Hesiod we also learn that poetry itself is not a kind of learning but a species of ecstasy. No one studies to be a poet. No one asks to be such a thing. One is, for no reason, summoned out of one’s house and exposed to a kind of transcendence. Exactly what kind of transcendence is not always clear. One can imagine preferring the
5 Francis Ponge on the Rue de la Chaussée d’Antin from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Artspace. What becomes of things in art? This is still the question of questions in aesthetic theory, which has understood from the beginning of modernism that the terms “nonrepresentational,” “nonmimetic,” or “abstract,” however much they may capture something of what the experience of nontraditional works of art is like, have little application to twentieth-century art and literature. Modern art is filled with things. A cubist collage is made of real newspaper clippings, and so is a poem by William Carlos Williams. The method of modern poetry is, manifestly, “quotation, commentary, pastische,” as if the poem had become a space for
6 The Senses of Augustine: from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: The Pagan. At the time of his death in 1998 the French philosopher Jean-François Lyotard had begun writing what was to have been a substantial work on Augustine’sConfessions. In the event he has left us only fragments—notes, paragraphs,envois, sketches, and two lectures stitched together to form a kind of monograph called “La Confession d’Augustin”:theconfession, referring, as we shall see, to Augustine’s confession of his love for God. Like all of Lyotard’s productions, this posthumous assembly leaves us guessing as to what kind of writing it is supposed to be. In fact Lyotard was never much
7 Anarchic Temporality: from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Poetry as Unhappy Consciousness. It is well known that in Maurice Blanchot’s early criticism writing appears to be less a productive activity than a self-reflexive movement. For example, at the outset of “Littérature et la à la mort” (1947– 48) he remarks that literature begins when it becomes a question for itself (PF. 293/WF. 300–301). What sort of question, exactly? Evidently not Jean-Paul Sartre’s “What is literature?’’ which like all “what is . . . ?” questions carries a demand for justification. Inquiring after the nature of a thing is a way of asking why there is such a
8 The Concepts of Art and Poetry in Emmanuel Levinas’s Writings from:
On the Anarchy of Poetry and Philosophy
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas’s writings are rich in comments and reflections on art, poetry, and the relations between poetry and ethical theory.¹ Of particular importance is the question of language, because there appears to be a kind of symmetry between language as an ethical relation and the language of poetry, both of which expose us to regions of subjectivity or existence on the hither (anarchic) side of cognition and being. The ethical and the poetic are evidently species of saying (
le Dire) in contrast to the propositional character of the said (le Dit), yet neither one is translatable into the other, and
Book Title: Writings on Medicine- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Meyers Todd
Abstract: At the time of his death in 1995, Georges Canguilhem was a highly respected historian of science and medicine, whose engagement with questions of normality, the ideologization of scientific thought, and the conceptual history of biology had marked the thought of philosophers such as Michel Foucault, Louis Althusser, Pierre Bourdieu, and Gilles Deleuze. This collection of short, incisive, and highly accessible essays on the major concepts of modern medicine shows Canguilhem at the peak of his use of historical practice for philosophical engagement. In order to elaborate a philosophy of medicine, Canguilhem examines paramount problems such as the definition and uses of health, the decline of the Hippocratic understanding of nature, the experience of disease, the limits of psychology in medicine, myths and realities of therapeutic practices, the difference between cure and healing, the organism's self-regulation, and medical metaphors linking the organism to society. Writings on Medicine is at once an excellent introduction to Canguilhem's work and a forceful, insightful, and accessible engagement with elemental concepts in medicine. The book is certain to leave its imprint on anthropology, history, philosophy, bioethics, and the social studies of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c84gs6
ONE The Idea of Nature in Medical Theory and Practice from:
Writings on Medicine
Abstract: One may wonder whether the doctor-patient relationship has ever succeeded in being a simple, instrumental relation that could be described in such a way that the cause and the effect, the therapeutic gesture and its result, would be directly related one to the other, on the same plane and at the same level, without being mediated by something foreign to its space of intelligibility. It is certain, in any case, that the centuries-old invocation of a
healing nature[une nature médicatrice] has been and remains the reference to just such a mediator, who would account, throughout history, for the fact
FOUR Is a Pedagogy of Healing Possible? from:
Writings on Medicine
Abstract: Understood as an event in the doctor-patient relationship, healing is at first sight what the patient expects from the doctor, but not what he always obtains from him. There is thus a discrepancy between the patient’s hope regarding the power that he attributes to the doctor on the grounds of the latter’s knowledge and the doctor’s recognition of the limits of his own efficacy. There, without doubt, lies the main reason why, of all the objects specific to medical thought, healing is the one that doctors have considered the least. Yet this is also due to the fact that the
Painting Theory: from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Redfield Marc
Abstract: By way of analogy: the fact that universal thought, in all its domains, by all its path-ways
Dancing in the Dark with Shelley from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Faflak Joel
Abstract: This chapter entertains film musicals as what Jacques Khalip calls “the romantic remains of a modernity that defines itself in the claims it cannot reflect, and which it cannot also bury.”² John Ridpath wonders, “If films were once likened to the theatre, perhaps the modern movie is closer to the musical.” Video and digital media have turned cinema’s “immobile, attentive, disciplined, receptive” public into a “distracted audience” engaged in “boundless activity.” This shift transforms cinema’s private catharsis into democratic exchange at the same time that it broadcasts desire as pleasure’s same dull round. For J. Hoberman, this “‘cyborg cinema’” turns
Free Indirect Filmmaking: from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Balfour Ian
Abstract: Jane Austen was and is a phenom. One might like to have said Jane Austen’s
writingwas and is that phenom, but in some respects her writing—so brilliant, so exacting—has been displaced in the popular cultural imagination by the proper name that stands in for or is associated with all the writing, the films, the made-for-TV renditions of her novels, spinoffs of many sorts, all of which are caught up in the huge network of more or less institutionalized devotion to her, from “societies” to websites to blogs to conferences where amateurs (in the original and latter-day senses)
Willing Suspension of Disbelief, Here, Now from:
Constellations of a Contemporary Romanticism
Author(s) Spivak Gayatri Chakravorty
Abstract: Two pieces of practical advice. Like Aristotle in the
Poetics, Coleridge is giving advice on how to sell poetry. And Marx cautions against basing all analysis on people’s sense of things; rather one should investigate what worldly factors produce that sense. One is talking about producing a certain willingness in the readership. The other is saying that willingness is produced by material conditions bigger than the personal will. For Coleridge, the determinant is spiritual. For Marx, social. Let us call this these remote presuppositions of my argument.
Book Title: Memory-Histories, Theories, Debates
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): SCHWARZ BILL
Abstract: Memory has never been closer to us, yet never more difficult to understand. In the more than thirty specially commissioned essays that make up this book, leading scholars survey the histories, the theories, and the faultlines that compose the field of memory research.The volume reconstructs the work of the great philosophical and literary figures of the last two centuries who recast the concept of memory and brought it into the forefront of the modernist and postmodernist imagination-among them, Bergson, Halbwachs, Freud, Proust, Benjamin, Adorno, Derrida, and Deleuze. Drawing on recent advances in the sciences and in the humanities, the contributors address thequestion of how memory works, highlighting transactions between the interiority of subjective memory and the larger fields of public or collective memory.The public, political life of memory is an increasingly urgent issue in the societies we now inhabit, while the category of memory itself seems to become ever more capacious.Asking how we might think about the politics of memory, the closing chapters explore anumber of defining instances in which the troubled phenomenon of memory has entered and reshaped our very conception of what makes and drives the domain of politics. These include issues of slavery, the Soviet experience, the Holocaust, feminism and recovered memory, and memory in post-apartheid South Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999bq
1. How to Make a Composition: from:
Memory
Author(s) Carruthers Mary
Abstract: The so-called “arts of memory,”
artes memorandi, which were taught commonly in the curricula of dialectic and rhetoric for roughly two thousand years between the fourth century BCE and the sixteenth century CE, belong to a different psychological country from that of the modern Western, post-Enlightenment “memory” that is the concern of most of the rest of this volume. Of course, there are also complex medieval attitudes and practices regarding history and commemoration of the dead, but it is not with these that theartes memorandiare concerned.¹ Academic redefinitions and reclassifications of the old natural and philosophical sciences, especially
9. Adorno on the Destruction of Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) O’Connor Brian
Abstract: In Theodor W. Adorno’s philosophy, memory is analyzed as a form of knowledge that has become problematic. Adorno argues that what we can know through memory is threatened with eclipse by certain allegedly more rational forms. That eclipse, though, amounts to an act of forgetting that is, as he puts it, equivalent to a “destruction of memory.”¹ Now obviously not all events or all things can be remembered or ought to be remembered. Adorno’s considerations of the issue, in fact, pivot specifically both on the loss of
individualityand on the danger of forgettinghuman suffering. This places memory at
12. Memory and the Unconscious from:
Memory
Author(s) Kennedy Roger
Abstract: From its early days the place and function of memory has been central to the theory and technique of psychoanalysis, though the picture of how memory functions from a psychoanalytic point of view has undergone many transformations. From memories that arose from the hypnotic treatment of adults, Freud began with the notion that hysteria was caused by the sexual molestation of children. As is well known, Freud later felt that in this early work on hysteria, he had overvalued reality and undervalued fantasy.¹ In his later work, the main emphasis passed away from actual sexual abuse as a cause of
14. Memory and Cognition from:
Memory
Author(s) Barnier Amanda J.
Abstract: In his contribution to the first issue of
Memory Studies, Jeffrey Olick notes that despite “the mutual affirmations of psychologists who want more emphasis on the social and sociologists who want more emphasis on the cognitive,” in fact “actual cross-disciplinary research . . . has been much rarer than affirmations about its necessity and desirability.”¹ The peculiar, contingent disciplinary divisions that structure our academic institutions create and enable many powerful intellectual cultures, but memory researchers are unusually aware that uneasy faultlines and glaring gulfs lie in the uncertain zones between them. The processes of memory are simultaneously natural and cultural.
16. Memory-Talk: from:
Memory
Author(s) Alexander Sally
Abstract: Marc Bloch’s remark comes halfway through the unfinished final chapter of
The Historian’s Craft, on historical causation. For Bloch human consciousness is “the subject matter of history . . . reality itself.” To ask why something happened or how it happened and under what conditions is a “common law of the mind,” Bloch avers, an “instinctive need of understanding.” Historical facts are psychological facts in the sense that however “brutal” are external forces, “their action is weakened or intensified by man and his mind.” Man’s mind is not always conscious, logical, or rational, Bloch continues; it can be explained neither
18. Telling Stories: from:
Memory
Author(s) Freeman Mark
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering work of Sir Frederic Bartlett, it has become commonplace to assume that the process of remembering the personal past is a reconstructive one mediated by a host of significant factors, ranging from prevailing conventions of remembering all the way to the inevitable impact of present experience on the rendering of the past.¹ The recognition of this simple and seemingly indisputable fact has become something of a double-edged sword in the conceptualization of memory. On the one hand, it has vastly expanded the field of memory studies: memory, far from being the mere videotape-like replica of the
19. Ritual and Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) Feuchtwang Stephan
Abstract: The simplest definition of ritual is repeated and standardized communicative action, in which communication is not simply through signs but also through symbols. In the
International Encyclopaedia of the Social Sciences’s entry on ritual, Edmund Leach defines it as any form of repeated action that is not only functional or
21. Sites of Memory from:
Memory
Author(s) Winter Jay
Abstract: Sites of memory are places where groups of people engage in public activity through which they express “a collective shared knowledge . . . of the past, on which a group’s sense of unity and individuality is based.”¹ The group that goes to such sites inherits earlier meanings attached to the event, as well as adding new meanings. Such activity is crucial to the presentation and preservation of commemorative sites. When such groups disperse or disappear, sites of memory lose their initial force, and may fade away entirely.
Afterword from:
Memory
Author(s) Passerini Luisa
Abstract: The present state of memory studies requires a particular attention to the transmission of what has been accumulated in this field since the 1970s. That was a decade in which many of the energies that had been employed in direct political activism during the previous decade were translated into cultural terms, opening up new areas of research, in which memory was central. I am thinking of the role memory has played over the past four decades in the constitution of cultural history and cultural studies in general, and more specifically of gender studies, cinema and literary studies, area studies, age
3 The Avatars of First Philosophy from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: That phenomenology is a fundamentally philosophical enterprise and that it is based on a decisive act of bracketing (
mise entre parenthèses) of the natural attitude—here are two essential elements of the Husserlian legacy that any phenomenology worthy of its name would seem obliged to accept, even today. However, Husserl was even more ambitious: thanks to phenomenology, he was able to champion both the re-foundationof philosophy as a rigorous science and as a first philosophy at the same time. Under what conditions can this ambition be reaffirmed or displaced? And to what extent? Within what limits?
5 Toward a “Minimalist” Phenomenology: from:
Phenomenology Wide Open: After the French Debate
Abstract: By setting itself up as first philosophy, claiming that it alone occupies the position of a “real” philosophy to come, a certain kind of phenomenology seems to us to have overestimated its capacities. Its presumption consists in seeking to reinstitute the ancient, royal privilege of philosophy over the particular sciences, in speculating excessively upon its very own “possible,” and even in engaging in a tactic of hyperbole in order to win the attention and recognition of the vast majority of nonpositivist philosophers. Whether this is a deliberate plan, a genuine faith in the mission of philosophy, or an illusion sincerely
Book Title: Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come-J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Kujundžić Dragan
Abstract: This book is a marker of the state of theorytoday. Its rich array of wideranging essays explores the dimensions and implications of the work of J. Hillis Miller, one of the most eminent literary scholars in America. For nearly half a century, Miller has been known for his close and imaginative engagement with the implications of European philosophical thought and for his passionate advocacy of close reading.Building on this intellectual legacy, the contributors instantiate and extend the practice and ethics of sustained close reading that is Miller's hallmark. The book culminates in a moving piece by Jacques Derrida, Miller's close friend of forty years, who engages Miller's readings of Gerard Manley Hopkins in a historic encounter between French philosophy and American reading practices.A provocation to reading for new generations of students and teachers, these essays offer important resources for grasping the question of language in historical perspective and in contemporary life-a task essential for any democratic future. Barbara Cohen is Director of HumaniTech at the University of California, Irvine. She is co-editor of Material Events: Paul de Man and the Afterlife of Theory. Dragan Kujunzic is Professor of Russian and Comparative Literature and Director of Russian Studies at the University of California, Irvine. Among his publications is The Returns of History: Russian Nietzscheans after Modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c999h9
CHAPTER 3 Finding the Zumbah: from:
Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Odom Glenn
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller begins
Speech Acts in Literaturewith a promise to show the problematic nature of speech acts in and as literature.¹ Miller’s promise has the authorization that comes, as he says “by being ‘appointed,’ by being given ‘tenure,’ by having [his] seminar description approved beforehand” (4). My critique of his work carries with it none of Miller’s authority. I am perhaps, to cite Miller’s citation of J. L. Austin, “Some Low Type” (or perhaps I should say “‘some low type,’” since this is my citation of Miller’s citation of Austin, a graduate student attempting to claim authority (ibid.).
CHAPTER 4 Between “the Cup and the Lip”: from:
Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Castillo Larisa Tokmakoff
Abstract: Charles Dickens’s
Our Mutual Friendis a retroactively oriented text, a text that works to undo the events that actuate it. The text begins with an ending, a corpse being drawn from the Thames, and withholds the circumstances surrounding this central event until half of the plot has transpired. While we learn the victim’s history much sooner than we do the events leading to his death, his history, nonetheless, is represented inconsecutively—after his demise. We are never to meet the victim himself; we are never to hear his story from his lips; we are never to receive a linear
CHAPTER 5 Hillis’s Charity from:
Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Williams Jennifer H.
Abstract: J. Hillis Miller has loved well as a writer, critic, and theorist. For Hillis, one cannot read well without love—reading is a matter of love because one must submit oneself to an uncontrollable performative force that arises when one attends to a radical recognition of difference in the text. Miller’s long career teaches us that love is the primary obligation that binds the critic to his or her work because instead of covering over a multitude of sins and acting as a blinding or obfuscating force, love requires the critic to respond to the absolute differences and particularities of
CHAPTER 9 War on Terror from:
Provocations to Reading: J. Hillis Miller and the Democracy to Come
Author(s) Redfield Marc
Abstract: Who speaks, and in what mode, when war is declared on terror? What are the conditions of possibility for this speech act; what clumps of historical context cling to it? To what performative felicity could it aspire? Has such a declaration of war indeed occurred? Could it occur or, for that matter, not occur? Both in what the United States government is now calling the “homeland” and in those generally more distant places where the fighting and killing is going on, the world is now enduring the consequences of what the Western media proclaims, over and over, to be a
Book Title: Machiavellian Rhetoric-From the Counter-Reformation to Milton
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Kahn Victoria
Abstract: In this revised history, Machiavelli offers a rhetoric for dealing with the realm of de facto political power, rather than a political theory with a coherent thematic content; and Renaissance Machiavellism includes a variety of rhetorically sophisticated appreciations and appropriations of Machiavelli's own rhetorical approach to politics. Part I offers readings of
The Prince, The Discourses,and Counter-Reformation responses to Machiavelli. Part II discusses the reception of Machiavelli in sixteenth-and seventeenth-century England. Part III focuses on Milton, especiallyAreopagitica, Comus,andParadise Lost.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99bcq
INTRODUCTION from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: AS THE EVENTS of the English civil war were unfolding, the royalist Edward Hyde, Earl of Clarendon, recorded his thoughts in his
History of the Rebellion.¹ Reflecting on the struggle for power between Cromwell and the Presbyterians in 1647, after the imprisonment of Charles I in Carisbrooke Castle, Clarendon described Cromwell with a characteristic mixture of appreciation and biting irony. In Clarendon’s judgment, Cromwell was a true Machiavellian: a brilliant tactician who was governed by considerations of necessity rather than morality, and who did not hesitate to use force and fraud to serve his purposes. Those who condemn Machiavelli for
[PART ONE: Introduction] from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: THE EARLY Italian reception of
The Princeand theDiscoursesshows that, from the outset, Machiavelli’s readers recognized and responded to his distinctive rhetorical flair. They were shocked (or pretended to be) by his brutal examples of practical politics; they resented his exposure of the inefficacy of the traditional virtues. They saw that the dramatic effect of Machiavelli’s work depended on his subversion of the conventions of humanist treatises on politics.¹ And some, like Guicciardini, recognized that, precisely because of this, Machiavelli was more of a humanist than he would have his reader believe.
ONE THE PRINCE from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: MACHIAVELLI scandalized his Renaissance reader not because he advised the prince to use force and fraud but because he refused to cloak his advice in the rhetoric of scholastic or Christian humanist idealism. Instead, he insisted that the prince acts in a world in which there are “no prefigured meanings, no implicit teleology,”¹ in which order and legibility are the products of human action rather than the a priori objects of human cognition. To recognize this, he argued, is to acknowledge the truth of power, as opposed to an idealistic notion of truth conceived in terms of representation, as correspondence
FIVE MACHIAVELLIAN DEBATES, 1530–1660 from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: WHEN Andrew Marvell sought to describe Cromwell’s troubling
virtùin the “Horatian Ode,” he chose a Machiavellian rhetoric of de facto political power, of terrifying natural energy whose capacity to create seemed inextricably linked to its capacity to destroy. He also imitated Machiavelli’s own rhetoric, at once dispassionate and critical, with his description of Cromwell as a man who “Could by industrious Valour climbe / To ruine the great Work of Time.” Marvell’s Machiavellian rhetoric can serve as an emblem of generations of Renaissance Englishmen who identified Machiavelli with political innovation—with ruining and remaking the great Work of Time.
SIX A RHETORIC OF INDIFFERENCE from:
Machiavellian Rhetoric
Abstract: IN THIS chapter, I consider Milton’s intervention in the debate concerning things indifferent in his prose works. As we will see, in enlarging the sphere of things indifferent and giving the individual conscience discretion in such matters, Milton departs from the usual puritan position, according to which “nothing is indifferent.” At the same time, he develops the principle of indifference into a rhetoric, thereby dramatizing his awareness that the sphere of indifference is the sphere of rhetoric, in which persuasion and action may take place. Milton’s Machiavellism in his prose works is both general and specific. In reflecting on the
Introduction: from:
Empire of Chance
Abstract: the increasingly loud thunder of the cannon is followed by the howling of bullets, which attracts the attention of the inexperienced. Bullets begin to strike the ground close to us, before and behind. We run toward the hill where the commanding officer is positioned with his large retinue. Here the impact of the cannonballs and the explosion of shells become so frequent that the seriousness of life shatters the adolescent fantasy. Suddenly a friend falls to
3 Modus Operandi: from:
Empire of Chance
Abstract: In the collection of Napoleonic bon mots that Balzac collected and published in 1838, the French emperor at one point states, “War is above all a matter of tact.”¹ The pithy formulation compresses a whole discourse in philosophy, military theory, pedagogy, and literature into a single concept. What for Napoleon, or at least for Balzac’s Napoleon, is presented as a self-evident truth in need of no further explanation was the subject of a more detailed analysis in various fields that attempted to develop a kind of knowledge that could guide action. Clausewitz instituted probability as a conceptual paradigm for the
4 Exercising Judgment: from:
Empire of Chance
Abstract: The interest in operational knowledge was not limited to the fields of philosophy, military theory, and literature. As the logical extension of the attempts to delineate its basic features the question arose: How does one acquire operational knowledge, and, conversely, how does one teach it? Practical knowledge entered the curriculum of educational theory. Military pedagogy, however, differed from the contemporary developments in educational theory during the second half of the eighteenth century in that it was specifically tailored to the state of war. This created a fundamental problem, for how does one train a recruit without exposing him to the
Book Title: A Practice of Anthropology-The Thought and Influence of Marshall Sahlins
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins (b. 1930) is an American anthropologist who played a major role in the development of anthropological theory in the second half of the twentieth century. Over a sixty-year career, he and his colleagues synthesized trends in evolutionary, Marxist, and ecological anthropology, moving them into mainstream thought. Sahlins is considered a critic of reductive theories of human nature, an exponent of culture as a key concept in anthropology, and a politically engaged intellectual opposed to militarism and imperialism. This collection brings together some of the world’s most distinguished anthropologists to explore and advance Sahlins’s legacy. All of the essays are based on original research, most dealing with cultural change - a major theme of Sahlins’s research, especially in the contexts of Fijian and Hawaiian societies. Like Sahlins’s practice of anthropology, these essays display a rigorous, humanistic study of cultural forms, refusing to accept comfort over accuracy, not shirking from the moral implications of their analyses. Contributors include the late Greg Dening, one of the most eminent historians of the Pacific, Martha Kaplan, Patrick Kirch, Webb Keane, Jonathan Friedman, and Joel Robbins, with a preface by the late Claude Levi-Strauss. A unique volume that will complement the many books and articles by Sahlins himself, A Practice of Anthropology is an exciting new addition to the history of anthropological study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1c99c4k
Introduction: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) KELLY JOHN D.
Abstract: It is time to add Marshall Sahlins to the short list of great anthropologists, time to celebrate his contributions to the discipline, and time to discuss the far–reaching impact of his works. Sahlins has proved a more difficult (and diffdent) subject for celebratory synthesis than many of his peers. The works of Eric Wolf (Abbink and Vermeulen 1992), Louis Dumont (Heesterman 1985), and others have received the attention they deserve, and the paeans for Clifford Geertz began even before his unfortunate passing in 2006 (Ortner 1999, Shweder and Good 2005). The most important anthropologist of the period afted the
2 Monarchical Visions: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) LINNEKIN JOCELYN
Abstract: On 18 August 1885 the Samoan high chief Malietoa Laupepa wrote a letter to Queen Victoria (Figure 2.1).¹ Addressing her as “Tupu Tamaitai,” the “Lady King” of Great Britain and Ireland, Laupepa endeavoured to clarify Samoan political custom for her. He would have her know that, according to the customary beliefs of Samoa from the earliest times,
he– Malietoa Laupepa – was the “real King” (Tupu) of Samoa. Laupepa’s letter to Victoria was but one of many appeals by would-be Samoan kings to foreign powers and powerful resident foreigners. During the protracted “kingship dispute” of the late nineteenth century, Samoan chiefly
7 The Past Is Old, the Future Is Traditional: from:
A Practice of Anthropology
Author(s) FIENUP-RIORDAN ANN
Abstract: I never heard the word “culture” used in southwest Alaska thirty years ago – today it is on everyone’s lips. Conscious culture is the trademark of the new millennium in Alaska as elsewhere, requiring effort to preserve and reproduce past practices and defend them against assimilative pressures. In this struggle, as Marshall Sahlins (2000b: 196) says so well, “the continuity of indigenous cultures consists in the specific ways they change.”
Prelude for the Listener from:
Freud's Moses
Author(s) Yerushalmi Yosef Hayim
Abstract: “Prelude” rather than “introduction,” for in all essential respects the work must introduce itself along the way; “listener” rather than “reader,” for the text that follows remains exactly as it was delivered orally. Except that my lectures have become chapters I have altered nothing, in the hope that some echo of the spoken word will somehow survive the transition onto the printed page. Tempted though I was to dispense with any further apparatus, my scholarly superego (as well as my own frequent frustration in trying to trace the sources of others) has induced me to add
2 Sigmund Freud, Jewish Historian from:
Freud's Moses
Abstract: That Freud should have turned to history to solve his Jewish riddles comes as no surprise. Historicism of one kind or another has been a dominant characteristic of modern Jewish thought since the early nineteenth century, while the “historical” bent of psychoanalysis itself is, theoretically and therapeutically, part of its very essence.
Book Title: The Idea of Wilderness-From Prehistory to the Age of Ecology
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): OELSCHLAEGER MAX
Abstract: How has the concept of wild nature changed over the millennia? And what have been the environmental consequences? In this broad-ranging book Max Oelschlaeger argues that the idea of wilderness has reflected the evolving character of human existence from Paleolithic times to the present day. An intellectual history, it draws together evidence from philosophy, anthropology, theology, literature, ecology, cultural geography, and archaeology to provide a new scientifically and philosophically informed understanding of humankind's relationship to nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2krg
CHAPTER TWO Ancient Mediterranean Ideas of Humankind and Nature: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The prehistoric mediterranean world is sometimes characterized as “the first Eden” or “garden of God.”¹ The roots of the word
Edeninclude the Babylonianeinduand the HebrewÉdhen, translated variously as paradise, plain, and hunting ground. The transition from a hunting-foraging way of life toagri-culture has often been associated with or identified as the so-called Fall.² In leaving the Paleolithic world for the Neolithic, humankind likely encountered a host of woes and travails unknown in its collective experience, not the least of which was work itself. Paleolithic peoples, existing in traditional ways established over untold millennia, lived in
CHAPTER NINE Contemporary Wilderness Philosophy: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: Contemporary ideas of wilderness are implicit Within activities as diverse as the legislative and judicial decisionmaking processes, policy implementation, and philosophical speculation. Ideally, some distinct idea might cut across this array of subjects and unite them along a continuum, much as the principles of liberal democracy unite diverse elements of the body politic. As Samuel Hays observes, environmentally oriented inquiry has not led “to a single system of thought such as social theorists might prefer, and it would be difficult to reduce its varied strands to a single pattern” ¹ Typically, however, those concerned with the idea of wilderness offer
CHAPTER TEN Cosmos and Wilderness: from:
The Idea of Wilderness
Abstract: The anomalies of modernism, that paradigm for thought and action upon which the contemporary world rests, are reflected throughout the conceptual spectrum of chapter 9. Yet paradigmatic revolution—a profound change in consciousness, however foolish that idea seems—is in the wind, and humankind may be on the brink of a postmodern age. Of course such qualifiers as anti-or posttend to obscure the central issue: Modernism.¹ Crucially, the idea of wilderness appears to undergird a new paradigm for understanding humankind as embodying natural process grown self-conscious. The wilderness paradigm might be viewed as only an outgrowth of the environmental movement
Book Title: Criticism in the Wilderness-The Study of Literature Today
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HARTMAN GEOFFREY H.
Abstract: Originally published in 1980, this now classic work of literary theory explores the wilderness of positions that grew out of the collision between Anglo-American practical criticism and Continental philosophic criticism. This second edition includes a new preface by the author as well as a foreword by Hayden White."A key text for understanding 'the fate of reading' in the Anglophone world over the last fifty years."-Hayden White, from the Foreword"
Criticism in the Wildernessmay be the best, most brilliant, most broadly useful book yet written by an American about the sudden swerve from the safety of established decorum toward bravely theoretical, mainly European forms of literary criticism."-Terrence Des Pres,Nation"A polemical survey that reaffirms the value of the Continental tradition of philosophical literary criticism."-Notable Books of the Year,New York Times Book Review
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cc2mjv
Introduction from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: This is a book of experiences rather than a systematic defense of literary studies. The best apology for criticism (as for literature) is doing it; and, at present, reading it closely. Though we have perfected—some will say overperfected—the technique of close reading, it has been applied almost exclusively to creative ,writing rather than to criticism or nonfictional prose. What follows is an attempt to bring together my reading of criticism with my reading of literature: to view criticism, in fact, as within literature, not outside of it looking in.
CHAPTER ONE Understanding Criticism from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: What difference does reading make? Is it perhaps, like traveling, a fool’s paradise? “We owe to our first journeys,” writes Emerson, “the discovery that place is nothing. At home I dream that at Naples, at Rome, I can be intoxicated with beauty, and lose my sadness. I pack my trunk, embrace my friends, embark on the sea, and at last wake up in Naples, and there beside me is the stern Fact, the sad Self, unrelenting, identical, that I fled from. I seek the Vatican, and the palaces. I affect to be intoxicated with sights and suggestions, but I am
CHAPTER THREE The Sacred Jungle 2: from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: It is but twenty-five years since Walter Benjamin’s writings began to be published in full. Whatever the merit of this extraordinary man of letters, whom it has now become fashionable to invoke, his interest in both Marxist thought and Jewish mysticism has made him a war zone subject to incursions by competing factions. Is he a religious thinker, or is he a social thinker inspired primarily by Marxism? Though the terms of the debate seem naive, they suggest that religious and political modes of thought are enemy brothers disputing the same territory. After Marx and Freud, there is a tendency
CHAPTER FIVE Purification and Danger 1: from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: Art is a radical critique of representation, and as such is bound to compete with theology and other, ritual or clinical, modes of purification. “The pure products of America / go crazy,” William Carlos Williams wrote; and it is necessary to admit from the outset that the word “pure” has many meanings, some ambiguous, some downright deceptive. Though my theme is purity, and more specifically language purification in American poetry, one could easily write on “Seven Types of Purity.” Empson’s
Seven Types of A mbiguitywas, in fact, a response to doctrines of “pure poetry” around him.¹ Our new, hypothetical
CHAPTER SIX Purification and Danger 2: from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: A strange thought comes to Errlerson on reading Carlyle’s
Sartor Resartus. It is an uncleanly book, a rag-bag philosophy, conceived (Carlyle jokes) among the Old Clothes shops of London, though rising to transcendental flights of fancy. “There is a part of ethics,” writes Emerson, “... which possesses all attraction to me; to wit, the compensations of the Universe, the equality and the coexistence of action and reaction, that all prayers are granted, that every debt is paid. And the skill witll which the great All maketh clean work as it goes along, leaves no rag, consumes its smoke.”¹
CHAPTER SEVEN The Work of Reading from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: In the matter of art we cannot draw up a Guide for the Perplexed. We can only urge that readers, inspired by herrneneutic traditions, take back some of their authority and become both creative and thoughtful, as in days of old. It is true, of course, that today they are less
liablefor their mistakes, and that being creative is for many a defense for whatever they do. The rabbinical or patristic exegete was creative within a scrupulosity as exacting as any invented by extreme apostles of the Catholic or Puritan conscience; he pretended not to violate the letter of
CHAPTER EIGHT Literary Commentary as Literature from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: The school of Derrida confronts us with a substantial problem. What are the proper relations between the “critical” and “creative” activities, or between “primary” and “secondary” texts? In 1923, writing his own essay on “The Function of Criticism,” T. S. Eliot accused Matthew Arnold of distinguishing too bluntly between critical and creative. “He overlooks the capital importance of criticism in the work of creation itself.” Eliot’s perception was, of course, partially based on the literary work of French writers since Flaubert and Baudelaire, including Mallarmé, Laforgue, and Valéry. But Eliot is wary lest his charge against Arnold, and in favor
CHAPTER NINE Centaur: from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: The literature of criticism exists, yet we show it ambivalence and condescension. Literary devices when found in the language of critics are viewed as a breach of decorum: we like our criticism neat, a secondary and clearly separated activity in style and function. We could echo the reply of Thamus to Egyptian Theuth, in Plato’s
Phaedrus, after Theuth has extolled Writing, which he has invented. “O most ingenious man,” says Thamus, “to one is given to create the things of art, and to another to judge what measure of harm and profit they have for those that employ them.”
A Short History of Practical Criticism from:
Criticism in the Wilderness
Abstract: What at present preoccupies scholars and students in the literary humanities is clear: the lack of interaction between their profession and the mainstream of society. Though this is a recurrent problem, I. A. Richards had thought to find a secure place for literary studies by denying the existence of a “phantom aesthetic state” and basing the critic’s work on two pillars. “The two pillars upon which a theory of criticism must rest are an account of value and an account of communication” (
Principles of Literary Criticism, 1924). Having established these principles, an eminently “practical criticism” became possible; the bookPractical
4 “Both Sides and Neither”: from:
Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: The fact that a number of contemporary American gay writers continue to return to the poetry of Wallace Stevens – the work of Mark Doty and Michael Cunningham are the signal instances in previous chapters of this study – will probably suggest the limit case for Stevens’s “masculinity” in his own poetry, and the “erotic poetics” hypothetically subtending it. But in view of the extensive correspondence between José Rodríguez Feo and Stevens gathered together in
Secretaries of the Moon(1986), and of the considerable interest recounted there by the letter writers in a number of other homosexual authors familiar to
5 Stevens and New York School Poetry in the Distance from:
Wallace Stevens among Others
Abstract: In a searching meditation on “New York School” poets Frank O’Hara, John Ashbery, and “The Paradoxes of Friendship,” Andrew Epstein pauses over “an intriguing wrinkle” of their early relationship in the final chapter of his magisterial
Beautiful Enemies: namely, “O’Hara, always assumed by critics to be so distant from Stevens and his influence, actually began his friendship with Ashbery with a shared mutual passion for the poet” (237). “Stevens was a more important poet to them than Eliot,” O’Hara and Ashbery would apparently divulge to novelist Harold Brodkey while at Harvard together with them in the late 1940s – “a
Introduction from:
Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Although it is not always recognized, art is produced and enjoyed and even defined against a background of theories and ideas. Oversimplifying greatly, up to the 18th century theories of art were largely developments of and reactions to elements in Greek thought. The 18th and 19th centuries saw a tremendous development of new thinking about art. The 20th century has been even more prolific in production of new approaches. Some are developments of earlier themes but on the whole they can be studied independently. At the same time one can discern a good deal of interrelation between those 20th century
3 The Psychological Approach from:
Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: In the case of the psychological approach it becomes even more immediately obvious that in fact the title refers not to a single theory but a number of approaches emerging from different psychological theories. Our selections introduce psycho-analytical and gestalt theories.
4 The Sociological Approach from:
Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: One reason for the variety of approaches in this case is the fact that Marx himself did not develop a theory of art, nor did Engels. Marx obviously was well acquainted with
5 Semiotics and Structuralism from:
Twentieth Century Theories of Art
Abstract: Even more than in the case of the other sections it must be stressed that the selections presented constitute nothing more than an introduction. The double-barrelled title already suggests an embarrassment: are we dealing with one movement or two? In fact semiotics (or semiology, the term often preferred in Europe), let alone structuralism, is used to cover a considerable variety of positions. In the case of movements such as the expression theory and formalism the approaches in their alternative versions have already been pretty thoroughly worked out. Here we are dealing with a dynamic movement (or movements?) which has not
Book Title: Archaeology and Memory- Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): Borić Dušan
Abstract: Memory can be both a horrifying trauma and an empowering resource. From the Ancient Greeks to Nietzsche and Derrida, the dilemma about the relationship between history and memory has filled many pages, with one important question singled out: is the writing of history to memory a remedy or a poison? Recently, a growing interest in and preoccupation with the issue of memory, remembering and forgetting has resulted in a proliferation of published works, in various disciplines, that have memory as their focus. This trend, to which the present volume contributes, has started to occupy the dominant discourses of disciplines such as sociology, philosophy, history, anthropology and archaeology, and has also disseminated into the wider public discourse of society and culture today. Such a condition may perhaps echo the phenomenon of a melancholic experience at the turn of the millennium. Archaeology and Memory seeks to examine the diversity of mnemonic systems and their significance in different past contexts as well as the epistemological and ontological importance of archaeological practice and narratives in constituting the human historical condition. The twelve substantial contributions in this volume cover a diverse set of regional examples and focus on a range of prehistoric and classical case studies in Eurasian regional contexts as well as on the predicaments of memory in examples of the archaeologies of 'contemporary past'. From the Mesolithic and Neolithic burial chambers to the trenches of World War I and the role of materiality in international criminal courts, a number of contributors examine how people in the past have thought about their own pasts, while others reflect on our own present-day sensibilities in dealing with the material testimonies of recent history. Both kinds of papers offer wider theoretical reflections on materiality, archaeological methodologies and the ethical responsibilities of archaeological narration about the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cd0pmc
2. The diversity and duration of memory from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Whittle Alasdair
Abstract: Does it matter where archaeologists get their theories from? We are often told that our own world and culture are bad guides to what went on in the past, and the desire to avoid ethnocentrism is obvious and understandable. This has, however, regrettable consequences, since it can lead to the creation of very general, if not rather abstract theory. Current interest in agency is a good case in point. John Barrett has presented some of the most important discussions of this central topic. An earlier study was centred on the case study of developments in the area around Avebury during
5. Layers of meaning: from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Jones Andrew
Abstract: A number of features characterise mortuary rituals at the end of the Neolithic and the beginning of the Bronze Age in Britain (the period covering approximately 2200–1500 BC). These include the construction of barrows of layered earth and stone cairns of mounded rubble covering the dead; the burial of individuals as inhumations or cremations enclosed in grave cuts, stone cists, or coffins; and the deposition of artefacts in close association with the dead. Outside the mortuary sphere, but necessarily connected with it, this period of prehistory also witnesses the emergence of large scale hoards of artefacts, typically metalwork, typically
11. YugoMuseum: from:
Archaeology and Memory
Author(s) Bajić Mrdjan
Abstract: Have you ever wished that you could make an enormously voluminous collection of objects that together had absorbed the meaning of the epoch in which you lived? And then, to group these objects according to your decision, to your will or whim, with the conviction that, grouped in just this way, they render with more truth and blatancy their meaning and significance into the field of obviousness; creating a profile of the ‘fabric’ of historical facts and layers – of which they give evidence – thereby revealing the malignancy of the era. Yugomuseum is the result of such a wish.
Book Title: Land and People-Papers in Memory of John G. Evans
Publisher: Oxbow Books
Author(s): O’Connor Terry
Abstract: This volume is derived, in concept, from a conference held in honour of John Evans by the School of History and Archaeology and The Prehistoric Society at Cardiff University in March 2006. It brings together papers that address themes and landscapes on a variety of levels. They cover geographical, methodological and thematic areas that were of interest to, and had been studied by, John Evans. The volume is divided into five sections, which echo themes of importance in British prehistory. They include papers on aspects of environmental archaeology, experiments and philosophy; new research on the nature of woodland on the chalklands of southern England; coasts and islands; people, process and social order, and snails and shells - a strong part of John Evans' career. This volume presents a range of papers examining people's interaction with the landscape in all its forms. The papers provide a diverse but cohesive picture of how archaeological landscapes are viewed within current research frameworks and approaches, while also paying tribute to the innovative and inspirational work of one of the leading protagonists of environmental archaeology and the holistic approach to landscape interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cfr8z1
1 Professor John Gwynne Evans, 1941–2005 aka ‘Snails’ Evans – an appreciation from:
Land and People
Author(s) Allen Michael J.
Abstract: John ‘snails’ Evans, developed a whole new sub-discipline of palaeo-environmental enquiry for archaeology, advancing both the understanding of past landscapes and human activity, and that of palaeo-molluscan ecology. He was an influential figure both as an environmental archaeologist and prehistorian, and as an old-fashioned field naturalist. Although others before him (Zeuner, Dimbleby) had set the course, it was John who almost single-handedly developed the discipline of environmental archaeology and, in 1970, was appointed as lecturer of environmental archaeology at Cardiff, the first post of its kind outside London. He became a Reader in 1982, a Professor in 1994 and retired
2 Culture and Environment; mind the gap from:
Land and People
Author(s) O’Connor Terry
Abstract: The landscape around us is the very substance of archaeology. In it are the traces of past human activity that we seek to understand, many of those traces having originated in the response of earlier peoples to the landscape around them. That earlier landscape in turn bore the traces of yet earlier peoples’ ways of shaping and using the land. Successive generations of people living in a locality understand and respond to its particular characteristics in distinctive ways, thereby altering the content and appearance of that landscape for the future, whilst also responding to the landscape features and qualities that
4 Experimental Archaeology: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Bell Martin
Abstract: Experimental archaeology may be defined as the creation of activities and contexts in which ideas about the past can be thought through in practical terms and tested. For instance: how were artefacts made and buildings constructed; what residues are left of particular activities; and what is the capability of a boat? Experiments often mean that some parameters are controlled in order to make precise observations about others, such as the effects of time. The main syntheses of the subject were written 30 years ago or more (Coles 1973; 1979), even then it was a diverse field encompassing many distinct specialisms.
[Part 2 Introduction] from:
Land and People
Abstract: The nature of the postglacial history of the chalklands has long been recognised to be of ecological significance – its relevance to people and archaeology is obvious and is emphasised by the mystery and myth imbued in the environment created within ancient woodlands. But at a pragmatic level, the presence of woodland and its
proximityto monuments and past activity has clear implications for the nature of that activity.
9 Cows in the Wood from:
Land and People
Author(s) Healy Frances
Abstract: John Evans was a power and a force. His energy, originality and independence prompted colleagues to thought, action, disagreement or all three. His pioneering analyses of molluscan assemblages from the Wessex chalkland remained a feature of his career over five decades. This paper examines the role of molluscan analysis in the interpretation of the fourth millennium cal BC monument complex on Hambledon Hill, Dorset (Mercer & Healy 2008) and its large faunal assemblage, which is dominated by cattle.
[Part 3 Introduction] from:
Land and People
Abstract: The study of coasts and islands provides many opportunities. Many sites, now on our coast, may be presevered and protected by depositional processes enveloping them in sequences of blown sand, facilitating both exceptional preservation, and potentially great stratigraphic separation of sequences of activity such as at Gwithian, Brean Down, Nornour and Northton for instance. In many cases their costal position today may belie their location in prehistory. Conversely, others may be exposed by coastal erosion making them available for research for a short window of time before they are ultimately lost to us. Islands allow us to examine island communities
13 Beaker Settlement in the Western Isles from:
Land and People
Author(s) Sharples Niall
Abstract: In this paper I wish to follow up some conversations I had with John Evans about the distinctive characteristics of Beaker settlement in the Outer Hebrides. In the early stages of his career John had a particular interest in the machair landscapes of northern Britain and he worked with his students on the important Neolithic and Early Bronze Age settlements of Northton, Harris; Udal, North Uist; Rosinish, Benbecula and Skara Brae and Knap of Howar in Orkney (Evans 1979). The results from the work at Northton were particularly important and provided a signifi cant contribution to a seminal paper on
14 Environmental Change in an Orkney Wetland: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Bunting M. Jane
Abstract: Freshwater Mollusca have perhaps not figured as large in the environmental archaeology literature as their terrestrial counterparts, despite their abundance and habitat specificity. In the case of small bivalves of the genus
Pisidium, the difficulties involved in their extraction and identification may be a contributory factor. Freshwater Mollusca are undoubtedly at their most valuable as part of a multi-proxy study, integrated as one of several sources of evidence. Recent work in the Orkney Islands has made good use of multi-proxy approaches to reconstruct landscape changes through the mid-Holocene (de la Vega Leinertet al.2000; 2007). Sometimes these studies can
15 Mysteries of the Middens; change and continuity across the Mesolithic~Neolithic transition from:
Land and People
Author(s) Craig Oliver E.
Abstract: Current debates on the Mesolithic–Neolithic transition in Britain are largely focused around whether change occurred through indigenous acculturation through contact and innovation (eg, Thomas 2007) or whether new practices and material culture were introduced through the movement of people from the continent (eg, Sheridan 2007). These hypotheses are also concerned with the speed of change with views ranging from the idea that there was a rapid adoption of farming (eg, Rowley-Conwy 2004) to the stance that there was a gradual uptake of farming but a rapid ideological change (eg, Thomas 1999). However, it has been noted that these debates
[Part 5 Introduction] from:
Land and People
Abstract: All aspects of archaeology, including environmental archaeology and subdisciplines within it, are ultimately about people in the past. Archaeology has been good at studying the material world that humans have produced and the items they have made, but less good at attempting to understand the people themselves. Attempts to get into the minds of people long gone or to attempt in some small way to engage with their feelings and life styles have often been considered unscientific and unhelpful. Yet humans are a part of the natural world, and they modify it and act as communities within in. Their actions
18 As We Were Saying: from:
Land and People
Author(s) Whittle Alasdair
Abstract: John Evans hated formality; anything that involved suits, ties or agendas made him unhappy. This unease extended, I believe, to grand or over-abstract theorising. He was much more comfortable in informal settings; field trips, especially with a small group, or the task of cross-examining a section during excavation, were his
forte. There he could bring to bear, in particular situations, his extraordinarily wide frame of reference. Looking back on his last two books,Land and ArchaeologyandEnvironmental Archaeology and the Social Order(Evans 1999; 2003), and especially the latter, one might be tempted to see a superficially anecdotal style,
20 The Social Face of Threshing Floors from:
Land and People
Author(s) Paschali Aikaterini K.
Abstract: A man in Kolofana said ‘Things like that are primitive’ when I asked him about the threshing floors. A strange feeling that was – in the middle of nowhere there was a threshing floor – either up on the mountains where the actual process takes place or at the side of the village (Figs 20.1 & 20.2).
1. The Meaning of Atheism from:
Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: Practical atheism
4. The Argument from Evil from:
Atheism for Beginners
Abstract: In the history of atheism one argument against God stands head and shoulders above all others. This is the so-called ‘argument from evil’ – the term ‘evil’ being used here as shorthand for the existence of pain and suffering. We briefly referred to this argument in Chapter One: the indisputable fact that an innocent child dies of cancer is, so the atheist argues, incompatible with any notion of God as an omnipotent and benevolent being.¹ Any counter theistic attempt to resolve this alleged incompatibility is, to borrow a term from the German philosopher, Gottfried Leibniz (1648-1716), technically known as a
3 Revising Yoderʹs Theology of Violence from:
Principalities and Powers
Abstract: The social and spiritual context of human beings suggests that the refusal of grace, as much as its acceptance, is not just an inner or individual phenomenon. Yoder’s sociological theology unsurprisingly casts sin in broad structural and cosmic terms. The powers are fallen, meaning, the created social structures are now badly malformed. God’s intended peaceful order has been disrupted and violence is the norm. As a Christian pacifist, Yoder was concerned to expose how violence is implicated in the everyday language and practices of Christians. Some critics argue that he was so focused on violence that he lost sight of
4 Revising Yoderʹs Theological Method from:
Principalities and Powers
Abstract: The powers’ dynamic autonomization never escapes the grip of providence. The fallen powers are created powers. As neither wholly good, nor wholly evil, the shape of the powers must be discerned. Yoder’s theological method privileges a form of discernment rooted in the practical encounter between specific Christian communities and specific powers. Discernment is ultimately a function of mission. Theologians’ contribution to this mission is limited, according to Yoder, yet indispensable for the discernment process. The theologian’s gifts of linguistic analysis and scriptural and historical memory are useful because they facilitate a comparison of the powers with the way of Jesus.
5 Revising Yoderʹs Ecclesial Politics from:
Principalities and Powers
Abstract: Alongside his christocentric pacifism, Yoder is perhaps best known for posing the church as an alternative political body to the nation state. In imitation of the politics of Jesus, Christian communities are to share goods, welcome the excluded, and practice reconciliation, servant leadership, and the priesthood of believers.¹ When it does these things, the church becomes “a proclamation of the lordship of Christ to the powers from whose dominion the church has begun to be liberated.”² Through faithfulness to its master, not compromise, the church fulfills its call “to contribute to the creation of structures more worthy of human society.”³
Foreword from:
In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Author(s) Swinton John
Abstract: The world of mental health and illness is a strange place. It is strange, not because people are strange, but because it is essentially mysterious. What exactly do we mean by mental illness? How can a mind be ill? Indeed, how can something immaterial be either broken or mended? It is clear that whatever mental illness is, it is not the same as measles or influenza. It may be that some claim to have tracked down biological, neurological, or genetic causes for our psychological disturbances. But such explanations, whilst arguably telling us from where such experiences come from, do little
2 The Historical Contexts of Psychiatry and Mental Illness from:
In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: In this chapter, we will begin to develop a rich
situationalperspective to further our investigation. In order to grasp the reality behind the phenomenon of mental illness, we need to contextualize it within its historical framework and understand why and how it is culturally perceived, and how that perception has influenced the treatment options. What are the historical and political dimensions of this phenomenon? Who is benefiting from it, and who are the victims? What are the real barriers to recovery? Situations, including illness, never happen in abstraction; they always happen in a context and have different forces affecting
4 A Path Forward: from:
In the Fellowship of His Suffering
Abstract: In the last chapter, I argued that illnesses are not purely meaningless biological phenomena. Particularly, with regards to mental illness (an area where medical science has been severely challenged to offer satisfactory explanations of the experience), the voice of illness ought to be heard in the context of the sufferer’s community. In reference to a psychotic experience Aderhold et al., remind us that, “It is not the psychosis—whatever this might be—that is being treated, but a human being in the midst of an altered experience” who should be “supported and accompanied, realizing that each individual is very different
Book Title: Facing the Fiend-Satan as a Literary Character
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Baillie Eva Marta
Abstract: With the preponderance of visual imagery in our late modern period, why is it the literary Satan keeps emerging? And what can the literary figure of Satan contribute to the understanding of evil? Eva Marta Baillie argues that the literary is the only means by which Satan can survive, and that as a result of the changing literary (and cultural, philosophical, and theological) landscape and our changing perceptions of evil as we move into the twenty-first century, the satanic character must also change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cg4ks4
Introduction: from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: The character of Satan is problematic; he is the “weak place of the popular religion, the vulnerable belly of the crocodile.”¹ Current popular culture makes Satan a subject of its attention. Films featuring the devil are successful blockbusters, books on the occult sell well, and Satan appears in various music genres, ranging from American folk to heavy metal. Outside popular culture, however, and in particular in the theological discourse, there is little “Sympathy for the Devil.”² The idea of Satan cannot be adequately expressed and discussed in terms of theology. The Christian system of monotheism does not allow a systematic
one Is Satan Evil? from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Understanding Satan as a character requires the introduction of a
contextin which the character operates. Our search for Satan’s dwelling place takes us to different areas of definition and interpretation, but the most fundamental question at this point is the relationship between Satan and evil. The question of whether the character of Satan is evil or not cannot be answered readily, since the problem is twofold: like any character, Satan has many layers and describing him as evil is an over-simplification. At the same time, the abstract concept of evil depends on contextual circumstances. The best approach seems the
three Satan in Story and Myth from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Satan is part of the myth of evil and if we assume that the story is one way to approach the reality of evil, we need to examine the myth in more detail. From a secular viewpoint, any metaphysical approach to the question of evil does not work. The responsibilities for all human actions lay, since Kant, in the agent’s will and accordingly, so does the decision to commit an evil deed. Nevertheless, despite all efforts to explain human behavior with psychology, sociology, biology, and psychoanalysis, there seems to be an explanatory gap when it comes to actions that hurt
[Part Two: Introduction] from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: As we have seen in the discussion of his biography, Satan is a paradoxical figure, showing contradictory characteristics and constantly evading definition. In this section, I explore how different satanic characters in literature represent manifestations of evil, in conjunction with the theological concepts of theodicy and theological discussions of evil. I refer to it as a literary exploration of postmodern or contemporary thoughts on evil in philosophy and theology. We have seen now how Satan is a literary figure and finds his
raison d’êtrethrough narrative. But what happens to Satan in late modern fiction? Is there room for talk
five The Restless Wanderer from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: I start with a linguistic analysis of two terms that characterize a state of being—to dwell and to roam. Dwelling means to live and to reside, it expresses steadiness and
six The Tormented Shadow from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: Joseph Conrad’s character Kurtz is a restless wanderer,¹ dying in utter isolation and self-inflicted exile:
Conclusion: from:
Facing the Fiend
Abstract: The story of the possessed from Gadara is popular in art and fiction, in particular the demon’s claim, “for we are many.”² It implies not only the possible diversity of the satanic character, but also the power that stands behind him. The different characters discussed in this work are only a very small aspect of the satanic figure, but they were chosen to highlight the ambiguity of Satan’s nature and to express the diversity of his appearance in the story. The origins of Satan lay, as we have seen, in his function as the stumbling block and the adversary, he
4 Sin Has Its Place, but All Shall Be Well: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Sweetman Robert
Abstract: Julian of Norwich has a high profile these days. This is surely no accident. In an age that has become sensitive to the wisdom sounding in voices historically less heeded, she speaks as a medieval woman. In an age that has learned to wonder whether the systematic discourses of reason penetrate to those mysteries lying at the very heart of things, she speaks in the language of mystical revelation. Moreover, among the female, medieval, and mystical voices we have been minded to listen to anew, hers is one of the most mellifluous. I mean that her voice attracts us. It
9 Postmortem Education: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Horrocks Don
Abstract: The evangelical tradition has virtually co-existed, albeit uneasily, with concepts of universal salvation. If the period from 1730 to the mid-1800s is accepted as the heyday of evangelical Protestantism as a movement, its classic conversionist, crucicentrist, biblicist, activist expression² remained paramount throughout. Liberalizing trends were strongly resisted, and incipient universalist tendencies were strenuously repudiated. Faced with challenges to depart from what it saw as an established, traditional, biblical, and doctrinal position with regard to salvation, judgment, and eternal punishment, reaction was usually swift and hostile, often prompting simultaneous renaissance of historic definitive positions. Denial of eternal punishment and embrace of
11 The Final Sanity Is Complete Sanctity: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Goroncy Jason A.
Abstract: Upon his return from Göttingen in September 1872, Peter Taylor Forsyth (1848–1921) enrolled himself as a theology undergraduate (on probation) at New College London. By the time the young Aberdonian had resigned in 1874, two meetings had occurred that were to have a lasting effect upon him. First, he met Maria Hester (Minna) Magness, whom he married in 1877. Second, he came under the influence of James Baldwin Brown (1820–1884), Congregationalism’s mediator of F. D. Maurice (1805–1872). In fact, it may have been Brown who first drew Forsyth to London, Forsyth traveling the six and a half
13 “I Do Teach It, but I Also Do Not Teach It”: from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Crisp Oliver D.
Abstract: In this chapter, I will defend the following thesis: The seope of human salvation tnvisaged in the theology of Karl Barth is ctthcr a species of universalism, or comprises s·evernl distinct. incompatible strnnds of doctrine that he does not finally resolve.¹ I remain convinced that it is the right way to think about Barth’s understanding of the scope of human salvation, despite the fact that most Barth scholars seem unwilling to draw this conclusion. I will also offer some explanation as to why many Barth scholars have thought his position both internally consistent and non-universalistic. Though I do not think
15 In the End, God . . . : from:
All Shall be Well
Author(s) Hart Trevor
Abstract: John Robinson is best remembered nowadays as an
agent provocateurin ecclesial and theological terms. The self-confessed “radical”¹ became a household name more or less overnight in the early 1960s due to two particular acts of self-conscious provocation. First he appeared at the Old Bailey to defend Penguin Books against charges of obscenity in connection with their publication of an unexpurgated text ofLady Chatterley’s Lover.² Then, just as the dust was settling and the press pack losing interest, Robinson published his own “sensational” paperback,Honest to God—a popular work designed to introduce the “man on the Clapham omnibus”
3 Overcoming Missions Guilt: from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Cook Richard R.
Abstract: The Protestant missionary movement had a profound impact on China, but also left an unintended legacy in the West. Western missions guilt is an unanticipated backlash from the missionary movement, which still reverberates today. Did the missionary movement draw the missionaries inexorably into the imperial project and, thus, the sins of the West? Popular culture in America has castigated the missions movement for decades, and missions in America has seemed to be in a defensive mode. Although missions, particularly North American evangelical missions, continued to expand—with an estimated more than 110,000 American and Canadian long-term Protestant missionaries serving today—
5 The Old Testament in Its Cultural Context: from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Younger K. Lawson
Abstract: Christians all over the world struggle with issues of identity within the various different cultures in which they find themselves. Some Christians identify themselves through “Christian” tradition, which may or may not actually be Christian. No matter what culture Christians are in, they ultimately should derive their identity from the Bible. But this presents an ongoing problem. The Bible (whether Old or New Testament) was written in different cultural settings than the one Christians are in today. There are, of course, varying degrees of difference, but all cultures are different from those of biblical times. In the case of the
7 “Holy War” and the Universal God: from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Pao David W.
Abstract: The celebration of the 200th anniversary of the first Protestant missionary’s arrival in China provides us with an opportunity to consider various topics related to the impact of the missionary movements, the development of Western evangelicalism and global Christianity, the relationship between biblical confession of faith and indigenous religions, and the reading of the Bible in various cultural contexts. At the intersection of these various considerations, one often finds the symbol of the Holy War. This symbol points to various periods of our history that many people find disturbing. For those who consider themselves to have been manipulated by such
10 “Who Am I?” from:
After Imperialism
Author(s) Priest Robert J.
Abstract: My family and I enjoy movies made by the Hong Kong actor and movie producer Jackie Chan. In one movie, Jackie loses his memory and cries out, “Who am I?” For the rest of the movie, he goes by the name “Who am I?”
1 The Greco-Roman Context of the New Testament from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Understanding the historical context is crucial for the serious study of any important document, person, or event. Using a modern example, no earnest interpreter of the U.S. Constitution can ignore the importance of eighteenth-century mercantilism and the prevalent teaching of social contract and popular sovereignty. Historical context is crucial for understanding. We will return to this same analogy in chapter 5.
2 The Jewish World of the New Testament from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Heredity or environment? Which of these factors most determines the behavioral development of a child? This question has been debated vigorously among psychologists and behavioral scientists. No doubt most would conclude today that both hereditary and environmental factors are important and that both should be considered. This is also the case with the development of early Christianity, if we may employ an analogy between human growth and the historical development of a religious movement. What later became rabbinic Judaism and Christianity were both developments out of Judean state religion. Jesus and his disciples were Jews, and for some time Christianity
8 The Genres of the Apocalypse (Revelation) of John from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: As we tried to imply in the last two chapters, the disclosure of literary genre is intended to be a momentous event in the introduction of a text, tantamount perhaps to the discovery of an edible species of plant by a starving explorer. Despite the promise of such an occasion, however, in actual practice it can sometimes be frustrating, offering less of a hermeneutical advantage than is sometimes anticipated. But take courage! It is a bit like the great dialogue of Plato,
Theaetetus, where knowledge and understanding are discussed and debated. One begins by thinking s/he knows what knowledge is,
11 The Message of Jesus from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: Judging from the Apostles’ Creed, which jumps from the birth of Jesus to his death (Lat.
Natus ex Maria virgine; passus sub Pontio Pilato), the details of neither Jesus’s life nor his teaching carried much creedal significance. But if one important function of such a creed was for baptismal instruction and for profession at baptism when the convert renounced the devil and his works, and if part of Jesus’s life was in fact a battle with evil (victory’s being a fait accompli through his death and resurrection), then perhaps in the loosest terms one can see Jesus’s life suggested between
12 A Chronology of Paul’s Life from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: The problems of Pauline chronology are similar to those in the study of Jesus. Evidence is sparse and scattered, and the sources are often dominated by literary and religious purposes. Factors that are distinctive for a chronology of Paul are that (a) we have the apostle’s own words about certain events in his life; (b) references to Paul’s life in Acts sometimes coincide with statements in Paul’s letters; and (c) an ancient inscription confirms the Lukan account of Paul’s appearance before Gallio (Acts 18:12–17).
14 Emerging Christian Orthodoxy: from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: “Christianity Adjusting to the World and Becoming an Institution,” “The Period of Consolidation,” “Early Catholicism,” and “The Emerging Great Church”—these are some descriptive titles that have been given to this formative stage of early Christianity. This phase was characterized by a general loss of expectation for Christ’s immediate return, a break with Judaism as the “parent religion,” doctrinal solidarity, and a fixed organizational structure.¹
15 Emerging Christian Orthodoxy: from:
An Introduction to the New Testament
Abstract: In this chapter we shall look at the following characteristics of emerging orthodoxy: a fixed organizational structure, efforts to preserve the apostolic
Introduction from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: This is a book on the impact of one country on the other. At first sight the selection of this topic may seem a bit odd in light of the fact that it describes the relationship of two geographically distant countries: the United States, the most powerful state of the times, and Hungary, a weak client state in the middle of Europe. It is the history of how the framers of American policy sought to exploit this small but strategically well-located state to further America’s strategic interests and how Hungarians, caught in the net of aggressors, first Germany, then the
2 Cuius Regio, Eius Religio: from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: Historians have taken for granted that the Cold War originated at least partly in the fatal discord between the Soviet Union and the United States over the future of Eastern Europe. Scholars also tend to have narrowed the debate to the timing of and motivations behind the introduction of Stalinist regimes in Eastern Europe, generally focusing on whether the Sovietization of Eastern Europe was the predetermined result of Soviet foreign policy or a reaction to American assertiveness. This chapter will suggest that American policies had little or no influence on the course of events in Hungary. There is no evidence
3 Rollback from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: The year 1948 saw a basic shift in American policymakers’ attitudes toward Soviet control of European territory. The idea of peaceful cooperation, nurtured up to then by many British and American politicians and diplomats, was shattered. The last Eastern European democracy, Czechoslovakia, had been amalgamated into the Soviet camp and closed off, although, almost miraculously, Finland was released from Moscow’s grasp. Washington no longer saw Soviet control as a stabilizing factor in Eastern Europe. Instead, the restoration of independent states and the rollback of Soviet military power became the prerequisites of a secure and lasting continental peace. The goal thenceforth
4 1956: from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: On October 23, 1956, Hungary exploded. Although it is hard to pinpoint why one country remains docile under tyrannical rule while another revolts, historians have dedicated years of research to identifying the specific factors that led to the only armed uprising against Soviet rule. Because virtually all segments of Hungarian society had suffered various forms of repression, unrest was not confined to the capital city. Centrally engineered “circular social mobility” failed to satisfy even the social groups whose aspirations the regime had privileged.¹ Grievances included foreign military occupation, state terror that sometimes exceeded even the limits of Soviet tolerance, serious
9 “Love Toward Kádár”: from:
Dealing with Dictators
Abstract: Even though the United States had finally accepted the division of the continent on a permanent basis – and was not particularly secretive about having done so – the years of détente were coming to an end. Each side was accusing the other of violating the terms of the SALT I treaty. The Soviet Union may have been exploiting loopholes in the agreement to build superiority in the field of strategic nuclear missiles.¹ In fact, confidence between the two superpowers or indeed the two military alliances had never really taken hold. Security, as Churchill once put it, remained the “sturdy
5 Collaborative Preaching and the Bible: from:
Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) MCCLURE JOHN S.
Abstract: Several long-standing shifts in biblical studies suggest that biblical interpretation is done best in a collaborative way. Fernando Segovia, in
Reading from This Place: Social Location and Biblical Interpretation in the United states, asserted that reading the Bible should involve “positioned readers, flesh-and-blood persons” who are in “critical dialogue” within a “truly global interaction” regarding the meaning of biblical texts.¹ Daniel Patte, in his bookEthics of Biblical Interpretation: A Re-evaluation, argued for a conversation between levels of exegetical practice and for the inclusion of the “ordinary reader” in that conversation.² in his book,Texts under Negotiation: The Bible and
7 Liberating Preaching: from:
Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) CORTÉS-FUENTES DAVID
Abstract: Transculturation is characterized by the missionary movement of North America into Latin America. Most of
11 Epilogue from:
Preaching and the Personal
Author(s) HOWELL J. DWAYNE
Abstract: The Bible, the sermon, and the congregation are all intricately related to the personal. Each is influenced by what is seen and heard and by how events and words are interpreted. The biblical text has a rich historical context in the ancient Near East that aids the reader in understanding what the text meant. However, this history is not a static history, locked in the past. Instead, it is a dynamic history of the divine acts of God that can be seen throughout the canonizing process as successive generations interpreted the tradition and text for their situations. The interpreted history
Introduction: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: The city streets exhibit a peculiar justice. Poets, filmmakers and songwriters romanticize it, but many of those found at the margins of city life must live by it. It is an adversarial justice, often enacted violently. It is a world where “just desserts” are meted out with Old Testament severity. Occasionally this includes demanding a “ life for a life.” Security guards regulate access to many nightclubs and entertainment venues on the main strips. Cloistered inside the boardrooms and backrooms, albeit with slightly more sophistication, the same, adversarial justice reigns. Found amidst the rough justice of the alleyways, the clubs
2 Justice without Retaliation: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: The restorative Christ restores victims. The compassionate Jesus, according to Chris Marshall, offers restoration to both victim and wrongdoer because they are on a parallel journey. Does the “rule of compassion” deliver justice for both victim and wrongdoers? How can victims forgo retaliation—and the concomitant renunciation of violence—without denying their right to justice? Jesus’ command to “turn the other cheek” appears to invite the wrongdoer to further acts of aggression and violence. How might ordinary victims of everyday wrongs capture the imaginative vision of Gandhi or Martin Luther King? Or does their extraordinary example make justice without retaliation
Conclusion: from:
Restorative Christ
Abstract: Can the Anglican Church of Australia play its part in repairing the past injustices to Indigenous Australians? How might the restorative Christ make an appreciable difference? There are compelling reasons for wanting to avoid the complexities associated with achieving reconciliation and repair between Indigenous and non-Indigenous Australians. I am not Indigenous. I am an Anglican priest representing an institution with a history of misplaced presumptions and misguided policies in its dealings with Indigenous people. The practice of restorative justice among Indigenous Australians has not been uniformly welcomed or effective. The potential to repeat these mistakes of the past is ever-present.
FOREWORD from:
Reading Scripture with the Saints
Author(s) Fowl Stephen E.
Abstract: One of the very first tasks I took up as a newly minted PhD was a review of Clifton Black’s
The Disciples According to Mark: Markan Redaction in Current Debate. I do not recall why I was asked to review the book or why I even agreed to do it, since I am not a specialist in Mark. The book was an absolute delight to read. Even though the material was quite technical, Black had a graceful writing style that made the material accessible without oversimplifying and distorting it. The book is a gentle but devastating criticism of the attempts
7 LUTHER TIMES THREE from:
Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: Most standard treatments of Martin Luther’s (1483–1546) biblical commentary move deductively: general propositions are enunciated (e.g., holy Scripture as its own interpreter; all correct interpretation standing under the rule of the analogy of faith, construed christocentrically) and are then bolstered by extracts from the
Weimar AusgabeorLuther’s Works.¹ Though such a procedure can be instructive, its total effect is a rather flat presentation of Luther’s exegesis. Perhaps some of the subject’s dimensions—its unity and diversity, constancy and development—would become clearer by adopting a more inductive procedure: examining, comparing, and contrasting three different specimens of Luther’s exposition
9 SEARCHER OF THE ORACLES DIVINE from:
Reading Scripture with the Saints
Abstract: Charles Wesley (1707–1788), John’s younger brother, was Methodism’s unofficial poet laureate. By the most conservative reckoning, Charles penned some 6,500 hymns, perhaps hundreds more sacred poems,¹ many of which propelled Methodist worship and evangelism in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. More controversial is whether Wesley’s hymns² are “theological works” as such.³ Less debated—only for being more neglected—are the character and quality of biblical exegesis in Wesley’s poetry. This chapter attempts some soundings of that subject.
Book Title: Returning to Reality-Christian Platonism for our Times
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Tyson Paul
Abstract: Could it be that we have lost touch with some basic human realities in our day of high-tech efficiency, frenetic competition, and ceaseless consumption? Have we turned from the moral, the spiritual, and even the physical realities that make our lives meaningful? These are metaphysical questions -questions about the nature of reality- but they are not abstract questions. These are very down to earth questions that concern power and the collective frameworks of belief and action governing our daily lives. This book is an introduction to the history, theory, and application of Christian metaphysics. Yet this book is not just an introduction, it is also a passionately argued call for a profound change in the contemporary Christian mind. Paul Tyson argues that as Western culture’s Christian Platonist understanding of reality was replaced by modern pragmatic realism, we turned not just from one outlook on reality to another, but away from reality itself. This book seeks to show that if we can recover this ancient Christian outlook on reality, reframed for our day, then we will be able to recover a way of life that is in harmony with human and divine truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdwbb
Introduction from:
Returning to Reality
Abstract: As integral with realistic action as our metaphysical beliefs are, most of
4 Platonist Ideas in the New Testament from:
Returning to Reality
Abstract: The first reason why proof texting is of limited value here is that Christian Platonism is not actually
5 How Christian is Christian Platonism? from:
Returning to Reality
Abstract: Even though there is no shortage of sympathy between the New Testament and some central Platonist ideas, modern Western Christians often find the idea of Christian Platonism immediately suspect. Much of this suspicion is more the product of the distinctive epistemic and metaphysical incompatibilities that exist between modernity and Christian Platonism than it is a function of a carefully supported negative evaluation of how Christian Platonism came into being and what it actually entails. In what follows we will now do some historical spadework to dispel ignorance around how Christian Platonism arose and what its distinctive features as
ChristianPlatonism
4 A New Pastoral Care Orientation for Parishioners from:
Grace for the Injured Self
Abstract: Students in seminary are taught how to “think theologically.” More is required than just a pious spirit. Clergy need a theological template, a set of perspective-giving tools by which the activities of human life (once symbolized by the newspaper) can be understood from various theological viewpoints (once symbolized by the Bible). In ongoing parish work, pastors typically need to refer to the theological template. They have to consciously apply it rather than having so thoroughly internalized the template that they automatically “think theologically.”
6 First Interview with Heinz Kohut from:
Grace for the Injured Self
Author(s) Kohut Heinz
Abstract: Kohut: I don’t think that I could honestly say that religion is one of my foremost preoccupations. It’s really not. But since I’m interested in human beings andtheirpreoccupations, in what makes them tick, what’s important to them, and what’s on their minds, obviously religion is a powerful force in life. It has been an essential aspect of human existence as long as there has been any knowledge of human activity at all. So, naturally I’m interested in it as a student
Book Title: The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand-Evangelical Apocalyptic Belief in the Northern Ireland Troubles
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Searle Joshua T.
Abstract: This book provides a comprehensive description of how evangelicals in Northern Ireland interpreted the "Troubles" (1966-2007) in the light of how they read the Bible. The rich and diverse landscape of Northern Irish evangelicalism during the "Troubles" is ideally suited to this study of both the light and dark sides of apocalyptic eschatology. Searle demonstrates how the notion of apocalypse shaped evangelical and fundamentalist interpretations of the turbulent events that characterized this dark yet fascinating period in the history of Northern Ireland. The book uses this case study to offer a timely reflection on some of the most pressing issues in contemporary negotiations between culture and religion. Given the current resurgence of religious fundamentalism in the wake of 9/11, together with popular conceptions of a "clash of civilizations" and the so-called War on Terror, this book is not only an engaging academic study; it also resonates with some of the defining cultural issues of our time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgdx0n
2 Texts, Contexts, and Cultures from:
The Scarlet Woman and the Red Hand
Abstract: The aim of this chapter is to provide the theoretical grounds for my main hypotheses. The first part will set out the theoretical basis for the notion of the text as an active agent in the interpretive process. The second part also focuses on theory and deals with the conceptual structure of the argument, based on a methodical examination of texts, contexts, and cultures. After introducing general theoretical considerations to these three concepts, this chapter will then elucidate their application and relevance to the case of Northern Ireland evangelicalism during the Troubles. These descriptions shall be complemented by several examples
2 History and Meaning: from:
Why Resurrection?
Abstract: The problem of evil is closely related with the question about the meaning of history. Some people could argue that the idea of a meaning in history is not clear at all: why is it necessary that there be a meaning, a sense for the historical events? Isn’t history an abstraction, the generalization of particular experiences that the individuals have in their own lives, and that we project onto a universal scenario which encompasses the whole of humanity?
3 The Apocalyptic Conception of History, Evil, and Eschatology from:
Why Resurrection?
Abstract: The goal of the sociological analysis of religious ideas is to help clarify the nature of the context in which they emerged, paying special attention to the motivations of the actors involved (individuals and groups with affinities and common interests). This is the way to reach a better understanding of the impact of the conceptions of some social groups and of why these ideas became hegemonic in a certain cultural space.
3 Two Arguments for God’s Existence: from:
The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: For the positive atheist’s case to succeed, a range of classic arguments for God’s existence must be refuted.¹ Although sometimes called ‘proofs’, only one of them can lay legitimate claim to that name. This is the so-called ontological argument first presented by Anselm of Canterbury (c.1033-1109). Here Anselm argues that, from the definition of God – that ‘God is something than which nothing greater can be conceived’ – one may conclude, as a matter of logic, that God exists, his existence being a necessary requirement of his unsurpassable greatness. The
a prioricharacter of this argument – which involves no
4 The Problem of Evil from:
The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: The existence of evil in the world is regarded by most atheists as the principal objection to the existence of God, called by the Roman Catholic theologian Hans Küng the ‘rock of atheism’. By ‘evil’ is meant the fact of pain and suffering and the ‘problem’ that it poses for religious belief is not hard to see. How can evil exist in a world created by an omnipotent and omni-benevolent God? For the positive atheist this question exposes an insuperable inconsistency within religious belief, thereby invalidating the claim that any God exists. Nor, I should add, is discussion confined to
Conclusion from:
The Atheist's Primer
Abstract: The three main authors discussed in this chapter – Feurbach, Marx and Freud – subscribe to the wishful-thinking school of atheism. They maintain that the fundamental purpose of religion is to make human life more bearable by making the suffering endured more understandable; and that the believer achieves this by projection: by transforming the natural human desires for protection and self-affirmation into the consolations provided by a benevolent deity. Each of them – and here we should also include Nietzsche – believed therefore that the religious consciousness was self-deceiving because the impulse to faith was in fact generated by powerful
2 Lyrical Theology: from:
Lyrical Theology of Charles Wesley - Expanded Edition
Abstract: Some years ago I wrote an article for
Theology Todayentitled “Hymns are Theology,”² in which I made the case for a more serious consideration of this genre of sacred literature as theology. In that article I maintained, “The hymns of the churcharetheology. They are theological statements: the church’s lyrical, theological commentaries on Scripture, liturgy, faith, action, and hosts of other subjects which call the reader and singer to faith, life, and Christian practice.”³
Foreword from:
Storied Revelations
Author(s) Peterson Eugene H.
Abstract: This is a most timely book. Timely, because the lives of Americans are increasingly distracted, and diverted—hijacked by the computer into cyberspace where it is possible to live without relationships, without grounding, without connection, without commitments, without ritual, without worship. A great number of wise and insightful observers for several decades now have been calling our attention to the resulting cultural, political, and spiritual poverty.
Introduction from:
Storied Revelations
Abstract: Parables—used by Jesus to reveal to us the Kingdom of God, used to move us from being bystanders to active recipients of God’s work of revelation—are constantly at risk of being buried into “mummies of prose” as George MacDonald puts it. We become so familiar with the language of Scripture and are so far removed from the context in which these parables had their meaning that Jesus’ parables no longer work on us in this revelatory and transforming way. Each new generation must recover the vibrant, often shocking dimension of Jesus’ parables and create a new context in
Introduction from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Pabst Adrian
Abstract: In a sense, the global recession of 2007–2010 is just another reminder that capitalist economies suffer periodic crises but that capitalism does not collapse under the weight of its own inner contradictions. Instead, it always reverts to the “normal” cycle of expansion, contraction, and recovery. This reversion is linked to over-accumulation and falling profit rates that prompt capital owners to cut the real wages of laborers in order to generate new surplus value, as both Adam Smith and Karl Marx recognized.¹ But whereas Smith evaded the issue of “primitive accumulation,” Marx followed Sir James Steuart in arguing that this
6 The Paradoxical Nature of the Good from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Pabst Adrian
Abstract: A cross different academic disciplines, we are witnessing a fundamental and perhaps paradigmatic shift away from individuality towards relationality. Both natural sciences and humanities are seeing the emergence of different relational models that attempt to theorize the widespread recognition that reality cannot be reduced to self-generating, individual beings and that the outcome of interactions between various entities is more than the sum of parts (whether these be more atomistic or more collectivist). For instance, in particle physics it has been suggested that there are “things” such as quarks (subatomic particles) which cannot be measured individually because they are confined by
9 Common Life from:
The Crisis of Global Capitalism
Author(s) Rtherford Jonathan
Abstract: The buildings of Canary Wharf in east London are huge factories of information and communications that have grown out of the old industrial structure of the Docklands. There are no longer any cranes on West India Dock lifting heavy goods from the holds of ships, very few workers engaged in physical toil, and no trade routes from the workshop of the world to the four corners of empire. The hard lives this industrial economy sustained have been made redundant. The new engines of Western capitalism are companies like Credit Suisse, HSBC, Citigroup and Morgan Stanley. The new trade routes are
Book Title: Radical Embodiment- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Nikkel David H.
Abstract: "Radical embodiment" refers to an anthropology and an epistemology fundamentally rooted in our bodies as always in correlation with our natural and social worlds. All human rationality, meaning, and value arise not only instrumentally but also substantively from this embodiment in the world. Radical embodiment reacts against Enlightenment mind-body dualism, as well as its monistic offshoots, including the physicalism that reduces everything to component matter-energy at the expense of subjectivity and meaning. It also rejects certain forms of postmodernism that reinscribe modern dualisms. David H. Nikkel develops the perspective of "radical embodiment" by examining varieties of modern and postmodern theology, and the nature and role of tradition-in terms of linguistic and non-linguistic experience, the religion and science dialogue on the nature of consciousness, and the immanent and transcendent aspects of God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0ht
Book Title: Drinking from the Wells of New Creation-The Holy Spirit and the Imagination in Reconciliation
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Dearborn Kerry
Abstract: The Holy Spirit, as God’s abiding presence to draw people to Christ, can cleanse wounds and bring love and hope into our hearts. Kerry Dearborn’s insightful focus on the Holy Spirit transforming our moral imagination and putting us on the path of reconciliation with Jesus Christ is both profound and encouraging. Biblical analysis, historical surveys and references to acclaimed theological authors support Dearborn’s nuanced yet practical application of imagination as a tool for awakening, recovery, and dissolving intellectual or psychological barriers that isolate us from God. She considers effectively how imagination can be connected to reality, and is able to delve deep into this vein of thought with startling clarity. Drinking from the Wells of New Creation provides spiritual guidance for dealing with oppression in society; an issue that affects people both within and outside the Christian faith. The acknowledgement of reconciliation as a creative process provides a fresh outlook and will excite those delving into both theological and psychological studies, as well as those seeking to understand God’s unification of life, regardless of tribe, tongue and nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0kv
2 Who Is the Holy Spirit and Does the Spirit Effect Reconciliation? from:
Drinking from the Wells of New Creation
Abstract: Who is the One who now fills and transforms Jesus’ disciples for participation in the ministry of reconciliation? The following pages will highlight three prominent characteristics of the and the specific implications for each of these characteristics in the of reconciliation. Though many more qualities could be explored, for purpose of this book the focus will be on God’s Spirit as 1) universal; 2) and personal; and 3) the breath and source of life. In light of these Torrance, characteristics of the Spirit the following questions will be addressed: What does it mean to honor the Holy Spirit as God
Book Title: The Gift of the Other-Levinas, Derrida, and a Theology of Hospitality
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bouma-Prediger Steven
Abstract: We live in an age of global capitalism and terror. In a climate of consumption and fear the unknown Other is regarded as a threat to our safety, a client to assist, or a competitor to be overcome in the struggle for scarce resources. And yet, the Christian Scriptures explicitly summon us to welcome strangers, to care for the widow and the orphan, and to build relationships with those distant from us. But how, in this world of hostility and commodification, do we practice hospitality? In The Gift of the Other, Andrew Shepherd engages deeply with the influential thought of French thinkers Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida, and argues that a true vision of hospitality is ultimately found not in postmodern philosophies but in the Christian narrative. The book offers a compelling Trinitarian account of the God of hospitality—a God of communion who “makes room" for otherness, who overcomes the hostility of the world though Jesus’ life, death, and resurrection, and who through the work of the Spirit is forming a new community: the Church—a people of welcome.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0nw
2 Unconditional Hospitality, the Gift of Deconstruction?: from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: Levinas’ ethical philosophy has had a major impact on philosophical and religious thinking of the late 20th century. Notable amongst the number of writers who have been influenced by Levinas’ thought is well-known and controversial French philosopher, Jacques Derrida. In this chapter, we will explore the ways in which Levinas’ commendation of the priority of the ethical, manifested in concepts such as the “transcendence of the Other” and the “infinite responsibility” of the subject, are developed further by Derrida into the theme of “unconditional hospitality.” Defining and Delineating Derrida’s Deconstruction? Biographical Philosophy While clearly pivotal to the development of his
3 Levinasian and Derridean Hospitality: from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: In seeking to offer a theological account of the ethical practice of hospitality we have begun our journey by reflecting on the work of Emmanuel Levinas and his friend and compatriot, Jacques Derrida. The choice of Levinas and Derrida as interlocutors is not arbitrary. As well as the far-reaching influence of Levinasian and Derridean thought, not unimportant is the extent to which their respective philosophies have been shaped by their own life experiences of inhospitality, exclusion and violence. Such experiences have led them to the conclusion that not only is Western thought ill-equipped to respond to the inhospitable and unethical
A tête à tête. from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: A few chapters after recounting the relationship between YHWH and Abraham, the Genesis narrative introduces us to Abraham’s grandson, Jacob. From the very beginning of the narrative, in the recounting of Jacob’s inter-uterine grappling with his twin brother, the reader is made aware of the struggle which will characterize Jacob’s life. Having stolen the birthright and father’s blessing from his brother Esau, and forced to flee for his life to his Uncle Laban, as Jacob’s life progresses it takes on a regular pattern. Despite receiving the blessing of the LORD (28: 10–20), for Jacob, unlike Abraham, this experience of
A tête à tête. from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: The motif of Christ as
Eikonand the transformation that occurs as we look to the face of Christ is one employed by British theologian David F. Ford in his bookSelf and Salvation. Ford, in a Christology shaped by a close interaction with the thought of Levinas, suggests that “being faced by God” and “turning to face Jesus Christ in faith” are among the defining characteristics of Christianity.¹
6 Dwelling in Christ and the In-Dwelling Other: from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: Previously, we have argued that all of creation, and humanity itself, is brought into being as a gift, its origins lying in the hospitable and ecstatic actions of the loving Triune God. However, distorted by our own desire to live
distantlyandseparatelyand therefore cut off from the life of this divinecommunion, humanity becomes fearful ofotherness. The Other is no longer perceived as one who comes offering joy, enrichment and mutual beneficence, but rather as a threat to our existence, one to be struggled against and overcome. Fear erupts into violence, hospitality gives way to hostility.
Conclusion: from:
The Gift of the Other
Abstract: Building relationships with the stranger has become increasingly difficult in an age where the dual discourses of the “war on terror” and “the market” hold sway. The influence of these pervasive discourses means Others come to be conceived as threats. The stranger is either to be explicitly feared—a potential “terrorist” coming to “destroy civilization” and our place in it—or, is simply another abstract commodity, at best, to be “tolerated,” or at worst, competing for limited resources, one to be struggled against.
Book Title: Life in the Spirit-A Post-Constantinian and Trinitarian Account of the Christian Life
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): snavely Andréa D.
Abstract: Christians are united in saying that the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. But the unity breaks down when explaining how the Christian life is a life in the Spirit. Life in the Spirit is the first book to engage the post-Constantinian critique of the church with the field of Spirit Christology. Building upon the work of post-Constantinians John Howard Yoder and Stanley Hauerwas and upon the Trinitarian Spirit-Christology of Leopoldo Sánchez, this account provides a framework for seeing one’s Christian life as one transformed by the Spirit. Snavely rejects the characterisation of life in the Spirit as bringing sinners to faith, and instead proposes that as Jesus lived as the Son of the Father in the Spirit, the Spirit also makes other sons of the father in the image of Jesus. This Trinitarian interpretation shows the Christian life as being one of total trust in God with one’s own life, and after death living in Jesus’ resurrected life in the Spirit. Snavely’s account calls for a reimagining of the church and the Christian life in terms of ecclesial structure, Christian discipleship and the Christian view of marriage. Life in the Spirit will not only help Christians to have a better understanding of the place of vocation in the world as witnesses to the lordship of Jesus Christ, but it will also promote unity in the body of Christ based on the actual unity that all his adopted sons and daughters already have by belonging to Jesus Christ’s life in the Spirit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0pd
1 The Christian Life as Life in the Spirit from:
Life in the Spirit
Abstract: This work will give an account of the Christian life as life in the Spirit. This should be obvious enough from the new testament witness and especially Paul’s description of the Christian life as the Spirit’s work of making people into the image of Jesus Christ. However, we should not take it for granted that we have and in fact live by such an account for two reasons. The first reason is that the kind of life Jesus lived is not taken seriously for what it means for a Christian to live a life in the Spirit, or even for
4 God Gives His Spirit by Working Jesus Christ in Others from:
Life in the Spirit
Abstract: The basic difficulty in giving the kind of account presented here is the fact that much theological reflection on the Christian life discounts the life of Christ as determinative for the Christian life. As I discussed earlier, yoder took up this problem especially in
The Politics of Jesus, in which he argued that the Incarnation implied that Christ’s life must inform the life of the Christian. But yoder’s account does not adequately attend to the question ofhow one is made a discipleof Jesus, what Adolf Köberle called the “energy” question,¹ because he does not adequately account for the
Book Title: An Unexpected Light-Theology and Witness in the Poetry and Thought of Charles Williams, Micheal O'Siadhail and Geoffrey Hill
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Mahan David C.
Abstract: A growing number of professional theologians today seek to push theological inquiry beyond the relative seclusion of academic specialization into a broader marketplace of public ideas, and to recast the theological task as an integrative discipline, wholly engaged with the issues and sensibilities of the age. Accordingly, such scholars seek to draw upon and engage the insights and practices of a variety of cultural resources, including those of the arts, in their theological projects. Arguing that poetry can be a form of theological discourse, Mahan shows how poetry offers rich theological resources and instruction for the Christian church. In drawing attention to the peculiar advantages it affords, this book addresses one of the greatest challenges facing the church today: the difficulty of effectively communicating the Christian gospel with increasingly disaffected late-modern people.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0tg
Foreword from:
An Unexpected Light
Author(s) Quash Ben
Abstract: One of the most valuable tasks that can be undertaken by Christian thinkers in our present time is the re-equipping of people’s imaginations—helping Christians and non-Christians alike to have imaginations that are capable of responding to the divine dynamics of their reality. Today’s Christianity may try to achieve this education of the imagination in various ways. It may find help by returning afresh to its sources in Scripture, liturgy and prayer. Or it may do so (and this is not incompatible with the first possibility) by renewing and deepening its relationship with other religious traditions and their practices. But
1 Introduction: from:
An Unexpected Light
Abstract: An essay written in 1991 for
The Atlantic Monthly¹ by the poet and literary critic Dana Gioia generated thunderous reaction, sending rumbles through the offices of academics and public intellectuals alike. Gioia’s theme was as straightforward as it was provocative. He asked, simply: “Can Poetry Matter?” Inquiring after the decline in poetry’s “cultural importance” Gioia laid down a gauntlet of sorts, one charged with implications not only for the status of poetry in contemporary Anglo-American society at large, but for a diverse range of more specified intellectual enterprises as well. It is not the aim of my book to explore
Book Title: In the Eyes of God-A Metaphorical Approach to Biblical Anthropomorphic Language
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Howell Brian C.
Abstract: Anthropomorphic language has provided a conundrum for exegetes and theologians for millennia. Attempting to use human language to describe the divine presents ontological and epistemological problems that push our speech to the breaking point. In this new work, Howell shows that instances of divine action should not automatically be reduced simply to theological categories such as omnipotence, omniscience, omnipresence, immutability, etc., nor to criteria such as personhood, life, and approachability. Rather, he introduced readers to two unique approaches to “anthropomorphic expressions".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf0wh
2 Approaching Divine Metaphors from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In the previous chapter we said that metaphors provide us with a manner of speaking of God that is neither too human in its univocity, too nebulous in equivocity, too ungrounded as with analogy, while being both functional and context-sensitive. We now take a closer look at how metaphors convey information, the type of information they bear, and their ability to make truth-conditional propositions. As we shall see, these factors directly impact subsequent interpretations of the Bible, including its descriptions of God.
3 Theomorphism from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: At this point, it is important to note how the problem of direction of transference within a metaphor impacts anthropomorphic language. Whilst the theories of Lakoff and Grady propose a transference from the source to the target domain, in biblical anthropomorphic language it becomes difficult to discern which is which. The traditional approach involved a transfer of human concepts to the divine, often resulting in either a mundane univocity, or a need for accommodating the language to the point of rendering it equivocal with respect to the divine. But, as we have seen, this need not be the case. In
4 Seeing Good and Evil—Genesis 1–3 from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we found that according to the biblical text, mankind is actually in a theomorphic relationship with God. This effectively casts the human sense of terms as the derivative one, with the divine sense being primary. Hence, the divine sense cannot be determined from the human, as the human is dependent upon the divine. Rather, this must be gleaned from its context of usage—something Josef Stern’s approach is uniquely suited to do. In his conception, metaphors (
de re) can point to objects without fully defining them. Rather, their content is determined, like that of the indexical
6 A View to Judgment from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: We have seen that God’s sight can incur many different connotations, from receiving aesthetic pleasure, transferring authority, judgment of sin, acknowledgment of righteousness, and active commitment to a covenant. In this narrative, we find sight expressing irony as well as discrediting the builders of the tower, again demonstrating the context-sensitivity of the metaphor.
8 A Second Look at Sodom from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In our previous chapter, we found divine sight to be informed by the primary themes of status and blessing. It thus functioned as both an affirmation of Hagar’s worth as well as motivation for her to return to the conduits of God’s covenantal blessing, Abram and Sarai. The story of Babel laid emphasis on God’s vantage point in looking at the city and the tower, and thus commented on the project as well as its future ramifications. In our next text, Gen 18 and 19, we find a narrative in which the act of “seeing” plays both a structural and
9 The Mountain with a View from:
In the Eyes of God
Abstract: In our last chapter, we found God’s sight acting in both a performative manner and by proxy. It performed actions through the use of sight, such as witnessing, confronting, and extending mercy. This accords with Stern’s context-based approach to metaphor, which expects to find differing meanings within each individual instantiation of a particular metaphor like divine “sight.” Furthermore, it demonstrates a distinct overlap in divine and human abilities. Although the
modus operandimight be different, God is still using sight in a manner that humans use it.
Foreword from:
The Joshua Delusion?
Author(s) Moberly Walter
Abstract: Evangelical Christians are characterized by, among other things, high regard, indeed reverence, for Scripture. The Bible is the word of God. This means, among other things, that the Bible is understood to contain the self-revelation of the one true God, who is made known in many and various ways, and supremely in Jesus Christ. As such, the Bible is to be trusted and what it says is to be carried out – this is the way to live life most fully and faithfully.
Metaphysics, Its Critique, and Post-Metaphysical Theology: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) HALL ERIC E.
Abstract: Metaphysics has recently made a comeback. It is not at all clear whether this is good news, bad news, or something in between. One reason for this uncertainty lies in the still open question of what returns with metaphysics: what commitments, presuppositions, worldviews, and actions? No doubt, some might hold that this description is already misleading since metaphysics has never been absent, only confusedly and ruinously neglected metaphysics has acted as avia absconditafrom which we have taken but a short hiatus. Others might react with deep concern, fearing that all achievements of past battles against this “totalizing” power
1 Theology without Metaphysics? from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) HART KEVIN
Abstract: The modern quest for a Christian theology without metaphysics properly begins with Albrecht ritschl who sought to separate theology from scholasticism, on the one hand, and the speculative philosophical theology practiced by Hegel, on the other.² Of course, one finds a good deal of theology since then, including Karl Barth’s, that wishes to limit or eliminate metaphysical adventure. Barth himself thought that a theologian could travel through philosophy as a gypsy passes through a foreign land, being in conversation with its people but not accepting their assumptions about life.³ He knew that he had no choice but to use certain
6 Disclosure and Disruption: from:
Groundless Gods
Author(s) YI ZANE
Abstract: In
A Secular Age,¹ Taylor repeats and develops a claim that he has made in earlier works.² According to Taylor, there is a disparity between the lofty ethical ideals affirmed by those living in secular, Western societies and the motivation of individuals to consistently live out and actualize these ideals. High moral standards require adequate “moral sources.” Accordingly, Taylor argues that non-religious humanisms fail to provide adequate sources and, conversely, claims that certain religions do.
3 The Cons of Contextuality . . . Kontextuality from:
Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Havea Jione
Abstract: I begin by acknowledging—as any respectful Tongan would do, following the customary practice of
fakatapu, which is where one honors thetapu(taboo), the sacredness, of land and of people, in one’s audience—that I am here sharing a reflection that I wrote, while being a migrant worker, in the country of the Darug people, in Australia. I am a foreigner to where I now live, so it is necessary to acknowledge and honor the tapu of my location, my context. I offer my fakatapu with the hope that I am permitted to think and reflect as a foreigner,
8 Mission as an Invitation to the Feast of Life: from:
Contextual Theology for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Keum Jooseop
Abstract: The World Missionary Conference held in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1910, has long been regarded as the historic landmark of world mission and the modern ecumenical movement. It is important to remember that one of the outcomes of Edinburgh 1910 was a desire to seek and attain unity in mission. Particularly, Commission VIII’s report and discussion emphasizes the importance of practical measures between mission societies of different nationalities and denominations to find agreements in the “mission fields” in order to avoid competition, duplication, and division of missionary efforts.¹ The commission insisted on the importance of learning to know each other, of
Introduction from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: An engagement with the themes of the hermeneutical self and the ethical difference is undertaken in a comparative religious framework. In the aftermath of colonialism it implies an attempt to overcome the Western tradition of individual consciousness from Descartes to Husserl. In this tradition the thinking subject (knowledge of the self) takes on an ever-increasing importance in the theory of knowledge. In this philosophical development, the thinking subject has been prioritized, while sidestepping human life embedded within socio-historical locations and ethical practices. To improve on this shortcoming, I undertake a comparative religious-ethical study concerning interpretation and ethical self in dialogue
1. Interpretation and Experience from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Friedrich D. Schleiermacher (1768–1834) is the founder of modern Protestant theology, as well as the father of modern hermeneutics. When he lived in Berlin, Schleiermacher was in close personal contact with Friedrich Schlegel and the other Romantics, kindling his interest in hermeneutics. Schleiermacher argues that the universe is active and reveals itself to us at every moment. An impact of the universe on us is to accept everything individual as a part of the whole. Individual ability depends upon the prior activity of the universe. Our place in the universe (or “being-in-the-world” in Heideggarian fashion) transcends both our cognitive
4. Understanding and Linguistic Experience from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Heidegger (1884–1976) studied Husserl’s early writings and worked as his assistant in 1916, and succeeded Husserl in the chair at the University of Freiburg in 1928. Unlike Husserl, Heidegger’s basic conviction is that we do not study our activities by bracketing the world, because we are always “in-the-world.” Heidegger in his early career declared that the fundamental question of metaphysics is the question of Being: “why is there anything at all rather than nothing?” He sought to discover Being or reality (later called a new ground of meaning) by beginning with authentic human existence. This project introduces us to
5. Mediation: from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Immanuel Kant (1724–1804) saw morality in light of human reason. Practical reason itself becomes the criteria for right and wrong, stimulating moral action. Practical reason enables the human being to grasp innate moral law. The moral law is deontological in the sense that moral action has little to do with the consequences. For Kant, the categorical imperative is grounded solely in the notion of duty. There is one domain of value, the domain of moral value which is immune to human fragility and vulnerability. The very notion of a moral precept, for instance “Don’t kill”, can never conflict with
10. Interpretation in Long Route and Social Location from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: Hermeneutics of the symbol paves the way for hermeneutical relevance to social science and practical philosophy. According to Ricoeur, we must think not behind the symbols, but start from symbols. In short, the symbol gives rise to thought (thought in the sense of philosophical reflection).¹ In
Existence and Hermeneutics, Ricoeur defines a symbol
11. Discourse Ethics and Communicative Rationality from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: “The end of ideologies” has changed into the end of history,¹ according to Fukuyama: liberal democracy constitutes the end point of humankind’s ideological evolution and the final form of human government; and, finally, liberal democracy forms the end of history.² In the phase of late capitalism embedded within the empire and the end of ideologies, a lifeworld is violated, reified, and colonized by political power, capital dominion, and mass media. In taking issue with this process of colonizing the lifeworld, Habermas’s notion of communicative moral practice becomes a counter proposal to “the end of ideologies” and can be endorsed as
12. Neo-Aristotelian Ethics and Neo-Kantian Framework from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: In the work of Aristotle, the central question is: “How should I live? or “How should one live?” Practical questions are invested with teleological significance. The question “what ought I to do?” or “what is right for me?” is subordinate to the question “what is the good life?” Aristotle speaks of the good and happy life in this regard. He views the ethos of the individual as embedded in the
poliscomprising the citizen body. Practical reason assumes the role of judgment illuminating the historical life-horizon of an ethos.¹ In the turn toward an ethics of the good, practical reason
13. Aesthetics of Existence and Ethics of Alterity from:
The Hermeneutical Self and an Ethical Difference
Abstract: We have seen the gamut of interaction between Aristotelian virtue ethics and Kant’s deontological rigor. In this interaction Habermas’s discourse ethics occupies a significant place, while Neo-Aristotelian ethics plays a counterpart to Neo-Kantian deontological orientation. However, in postmodernity’s ethical emphasis on the Other, an ethical-hermeneutical model assumes an aesthetic dimension and prophetic witness. Foucault’s concept of care of self and Levinas’s unprecedented concern for the Other are to be understood as a new mode of interpretation in prioritizing care for others.
Book Title: Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism-A Critical Evaluation of John Hick
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Nah David S.
Abstract: The question of religious pluralism is the most significant yet thorniest of issues in theology today, and John Hick (1922–2012) has long been recognized as its most important scholar. However, while much has been written analyzing the philosophical basis of Hick’s pluralism, very little attention has been devoted to the theological foundations of his argument. Filling this gap, this book examines Hick’s theological attempts to systematically deconstruct the church’s traditional incarnational Christology. Special attention is given to evaluating Hick’s foundational theses “that Jesus himself did not teach what was to become the orthodox Christian understanding of him" and “that the dogma of Jesus’ two natures . . . has proved to be incapable of being explicated in any satisfactory way." By elucidating the ways in which Hick’s arguments fail, David Nah demonstrates that Hick was unwarranted in breaking away from the church’s incarnational Christology that has been at the core of Christianity for almost two thousand years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf1qd
3 Hick’s Theology of Religious Pluralism from:
Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: Having considered hick’s philosophy of pluralism in the last chapter, I am now ready to examine Hick’s theology of pluralism, concentrating especially on his Christology for a pluralistic age. as one of the leading philosophers of religion of our time, hick has not only been active in the contemporary theological scene, his contributions, particularly in the area of Christology, have been very significant. Specifically, hick has attempted to advance the limits of the traditional boundaries of Christology beyond the understanding of Christ and Christianity to the world of religions. Traditionally, Christianity has always confessed Jesus of Nazareth as god incarnate,
4 An Evaluation of Hick’s Historical Arguments from:
Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I have given a detailed survey of Hick’s negative descriptions of the traditional Christian understanding of Jesus of Nazareth as God incarnate, who became a man to die for sins, and who founded the church to proclaim this. I have also described hick’s own metaphorical Christology, proposed as an alternative model more appropriate for a pluralistic age. The purpose of this chapter and the next is to engage in a critical evaluation of these ideas. Specifically, in this present chapter, I shall evaluate what i have previously characterized as hick’s “historical argument” against the church’s incarnation
5 An Evaluation of Hick’s Conceptual Arguments from:
Christian Theology and Religious Pluralism
Abstract: Having examined Hick’s thesis that Jesus never claimed to be divine but that this momentous doctrine was the creation of the church subsequent to his death, my next task is to assess his other important thesis, which I am here calling his “conceptual argument.”¹ This is the thesis that the belief in Jesus as God the Son incarnate, as articulated in the language of the two-natures Christology of Nicaea and Chalcedon, has proven to be incoherent and incapable of being explicated in any satisfactory way, and that, in fact, no adequate explanation has thus far been proposed. I shall examine
Book Title: Jesus and the Cross-Necessity, Meaning, and Atonement
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Laughlin Peter
Abstract: According to the Nicene Creed, Christ died for us and for our salvation. But while all Christians agree that Christ’s death and resurrection has saving significance, there is little unanimity in how and why that is the case. In fact, Christian history is littered with accounts of the redemptive value of Christ’s death, and new models and motifs are constantly being proposed, many of which now stand in stark contrast to earlier thought. How then should contemporary articulations of the importance of the death of Christ be judged? At the heart of this book is the contention that Christian reflection on the atonement is faithful inasmuch as it incorporates the intention that Jesus himself had for his death. In a wide-reaching study, the author draws from both classical scholarship and recent work on the historical Jesus to argue that not only did Jesus imbue his death with redemptive meaning but that such meaning should impact expressions of the saving significance of the cross.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf285
Foreword from:
Jesus and the Cross
Author(s) Ormerod Neil
Abstract: I can still remember as a young theology student coming across the book
The Aims of Jesusby biblical scholar, Ben Meyer. It was a heady time for theology students with the appearance of works by Hans Küng (On Being a Christian) and Edward Schillebeeckx (Jesus: An Experiment in Christology) both reflecting the impact of critical biblical scholarship on our understanding of Jesus. Within the excitement of these works, Meyer’s book stood out as something different, serious, scholarly, patient and measured in its conclusions. But one thing that really struck me was the implication of the title—Jesus had intentions,
3 Atonement, History, and Meaning from:
Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: Why should the theologian care about what Jesus of Nazareth thought of his impending death? The question becomes more potent if we phrase is slightly differently: Would it actually make any difference to the Christian faith if its doctrine of the atonement had no basis in the intention of Jesus and was merely a symbolic invention of the early church? An uncritical reaction to this type of question is to answer with an indignant affirmation, since there is more than a little audacity in the suggestion that Jesus’ intention is irrelevant to the Christian proclamation of salvation. However, does the
4 The Meaning of Jesus’ Death from:
Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: In the previous chapter I argued for the viability of a theological engagement with history for the purpose of informing our theology of the atonement with the historical intention of Jesus of Nazareth. The task now is to discuss what can be known of the world of meaning that Jesus constituted for his death and then, in the next chapter, to bring these results to bear on our understanding of Christian atonement. Easy enough perhaps to state, a rather more difficult task in practice. Indeed, the endeavor threatens to become all-consuming; John Meier’s four-volume work is ample evidence of the
5 From Meaning to Motif from:
Jesus and the Cross
Abstract: In chapter one it was argued that an atonement motif that wished to remain faithful to Christianity would demonstrate a degree of continuity with the meaning that Jesus of Nazareth constituted for his death. That contention still stands, and our analysis of the previous chapter has brought us to the point in which we must now discuss what kind of continuity is, in fact, to be expected. How should we incorporate the meaning that Jesus created for his death into our contemporary presentations? What kind of continuity are we looking for? Are our articulations to be constrained to the categories
Foreword from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Author(s) Jasper David
Abstract: The sacramental life of the Christian Church has, from the very earliest times, been acquainted with scandal. There is reason to think that the celebration of the Eucharist, in some form, predates even the canonical Gospels, and by the end of the second century of the Christian era, Tertullian was grimly satirizing those outside the Church who clearly thought that the sacrament was shocking in the extreme and beyond what was tolerable. “We are accused,” he wrote, “of observing a sacred ritual in which we kill a little child and eat it.” He goes on to describe this action in
Introduction from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: This book is an interdisciplinary inquiry into the nature of sacrament and into the relationship between the Eucharist—the ritual partaking of the body and blood of Christ in the symbols of bread and wine—as the sacrament
par excellence, and sacramental themes or “traces” of sacramentality that appear in contemporary fictional narratives. In a “post-Christian” (or at the very least “post-ecclesial”) age characterized by waning participation in traditional Christian practices,² a surprising persistence and relevance of sacramental themes and eucharistic allusions may be observed within contemporary literature and the creative arts more broadly. One wonders, then—apart from the
1 Skandalon: from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: Before we are able to discuss sacrament as a linguistic or a corporeal scandal, we must have a basic understanding of what a sacrament is . In this chapter, we will establish what we mean by
sacramentandsacramentality, and examine the reasons this concept has been a stumbling-block to Christian theology and liturgy. Any understanding of sacrament must be tethered closely to the entire Christ event, to the biblical witness concerning the person of Jesus Christ and the sacred meal he instituted in the Last Supper. However, sacraments must also be understood as cultural artifacts of a sort; indeed
2 “The Word . . .”: from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we have shown that the scandal of sacramentality derives first from Christ himself, the Word of God made flesh, crucified on Calvary, which St. Paul calls a “stumbling-block” (
skandalon). Sacraments are visible and tangible, yet they mediate to us the invisible and intangible saving grace of God, which is resident within the material, created order precisely because of the incarnation of God in Christ Jesus, the Word of God made flesh. Through participation in this mediation, the ecclesial community is both constituted,made intothe body of Christ called Church, and unmade: fractured, broken, de-stabilized, and
3 “. . . Made Flesh”: from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: We have thus far established that the central corporate act of the Christian
ecclesia, from which the Church derives its identity as the Body of Christ and its sacramental structure, is the Eucharist, the participation in Christ’s broken body and shed blood. The Eucharist not only points toward the cross of Christ but toward the entire narrative of the incarnation of God in human body of Jesus of Nazareth. We glimpse the central stumblingblock—what St. Paul calls askandalon—of Christian faith and practice: “we preach Christ crucified: a stumbling block to Jews and foolishness to Gentiles” (1 Cor
5 Consuming: from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: In the previous chapter, we examined the traces of sacramentality in the broken, fractured body of Christ and the bodies of characters in contemporary literature. In this chapter, we will focus on the
skandalonof the Eucharist as it relates to bodily consumption. We deliberately employ the ambiguous phrasebodily consumptionprecisely because it implies both eating—the physical, digestive processes associated with bodily consumption—as well as the more cannibalistic connotation of the phrase: the consumption of the body (as food) as well as the body’s consumption (of food). To grapple with the Eucharist asnecessarilyscandalous and scandalizing
6 Penetrating: from:
The Scandal of Sacramentality
Abstract: Although we have thus far avoided the language, it should be clear by now that the mediacy and materiality of sacramentality is another way of saying that sacraments are sensuous they engage us, and we participate in them, at the level of our senses. We see, taste, touch, and smell the bread and the wine; we hear the fraction of the host and the pouring of water and wine into the chalice. And relatedly, sacraments are
sensual—theygratifythe senses, in a way that might almost connote carnality. As we concluded the previous chapter, we began to move from
Book Title: Justification in a Post-Christian Society- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Gunner Göran
Abstract: Since the Reformation in the sixteenth century, Lutheran traditions have impacted culture and politics in many societies. At the same time, Lutheran belief has had an effect on personal faith, morality, and ethics. Modern society, however, is quite different from that at the time of the Reformation. How should we evaluate Lutheran tradition in today’s Western multicultural and post-Christian society? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran theological position that can be regarded as reasonable in a society that evidences a considerable weakening of the role of Christianity? What are the challenges raised by cultural diversity for a Lutheran theology and ethics? Is it possible to develop a Lutheran identity in a multicultural society, and is there any fruitful Lutheran contribution to the coexistence of diff erent religious and non-religious traditions in the future?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf32j
1 Introduction: from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) GUNNER GÖRAN
Abstract: Lutheran tradition has been of immense importance not just within the churches in quite a lot of countries worldwide but also for society and culture in general. Ideas within Reformation theology have in various ways influenced education, health care, attitudes to work, economy, and politics. This impact of Lutheran tradition has been based on particular theological positions that have been developed in different ways. Some of these positions are the doctrine of justification by grace alone, the idea that the Bible has a particular role as a source for theological reflection, the doctrine of original sin, the idea of a
2 Promise and Trust: from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) SCHWÖBEL CHRISTOPH
Abstract: It is a commonplace that today we live globally—and often locally as well—in a multicultural society where different cultures coexist, oscillating between cooperation and competition. These multicultural settings are the result of various factors, from the migration movements of large groups of people caused by economic necessity, war, oppression, displacement, and the search for better opportunities for shaping one’s life. If one wanted to write a diachronic history of the genesis of most multicultural societies, one would come across the most grievous aspects of modern history, racism, nationalism, ethnic strife, exploitation, and religious oppression, leading to the banishment
3 The Experience of Justification from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) HELMER CHRISTINE
Abstract: The late American liberal theologian, Gordon Kaufman, once said something to me that struck my religious sensibilities. “Experience and God,” he said, “is a category mistake.” Kaufman came to his claim by his particular reading of Kant’s
Critique of Pure Reason. Kant, according to Kaufman, argued that the ideal of God was a symbol with no corresponding reality. 1 It can be debated whether Kaufmann’s interpretation of Kant is correct. According to Kant scholar Allen Wood, Kant actually held on to the existence of God as the ground of all possibility, namely a “subjectively necessary hypothesis (A 581–2/B 609
4 Atonement in Theology and a Post-Einsteinian Notion of Time from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) JACKELÉN ANTJE
Abstract: There are a number of obstacles for a consistent presentation of the doctrine of atonement today. How can the suffering and self-sacrifice of the One be salvific in our global context? Does the atoning activity of God in Christ presuppose total passivity on the human side? Is not atonement terminology remote from the realities of human life in contemporary Western societies? In this chapter I argue that post-Einsteinian notions of time may contribute to theological attempts to cope with some of these obstacles. Albert Einstein’s theories of relativity mean that the previous Newtonian concept of time is inadequate. A reception
8 Lutheran Spiritual Theology in a Post-Christian Society from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) JOHANNESSON KARIN
Abstract: Many scholars studying how religious faith develops around the world today emphasize one important transition. Linda Woodhead and Paul Heelas, following the philosopher Charles Taylor, characterize this ongoing transformation as a spiritual revolution.¹ It reveals itself,
inter alia, as a growing interest in a multifaceted variety of activities associated with various religious traditions that have one important thing in common. They have traditionally been conceptualized as spiritual training since they have been assumed to contribute to a more flourishing relationship with God or a deeper contact with a spiritual reality. Yoga, pilgrimages, and meditation are examples of such undertakings.
9 Lutheran Theology and Dialogical Engagement in Post-Christian Society from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) CHILDS JAMES M.
Abstract: In Canadian philosopher Charles Taylor’s massive and highly regarded work, he has examined the impact of a long and continuing process of secularization on our views of religion in society.¹ In the societies of the Western world we commonly see secularization as implicated in the development of our post-Christendom age and the emergence of post-Christian society. Post-Christendom and post-Christian are not terms that Taylor employs. However, he sees one expression of secularity to be the public sphere “emptied of God or any reference to ultimate reality” and the norms of our various spheres of activity devoid of any reference to
10 Physicality as a New Model for Lutheran Ethics in a Multicultural Global Community from:
Justification in a Post-Christian Society
Author(s) PERRY RICHARD J.
Abstract: In this chapter I explore the practice of physicality by some African and European American elders within the Lutheran communion. My claim is that this practice establishes a new model for Lutheran ethics in a multicultural global community. Physicality I define as “the act of intentionally placing one’s body into public spaces as a means of expressing concerns for justice in the world.”¹ At the core of physicality is God’s justifying grace. These elders carried their bodies, anchored by their faith in a justifying God, from the sanctuary of their churches to the streets where God was also active with
Book Title: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hebbard Aaron B.
Abstract: Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics sets out to read the book of Daniel as a narrative textbook in the field of theological hermeneutics. Employing such disciplines as historical criticism, literary criticism, narrative theology, and hermeneutics, this work seeks to maintain an interdisciplinary outlook on the book of Daniel. Two inherently linked perspectives are utilized in this reading of Daniel. First is the perception that the character of Daniel is the paradigm of the good theological hermeneut; theology and hermeneutics are inseparable and converge in the character of Daniel. Readers must recognize in Daniel certain qualities, attitudes, abilities, and convictions well worth emulating. Essentially, readers must aspire to become a Daniel. Second is the standpoint that the book of Daniel on the whole should be read as a hermeneutics textbook. Readers are led through a series of theories and exercises meant to be instilled into their theological, intellectual, and practical lives. Attention to readers is a constant endeavor throughout this thesis. The concern is fundamentally upon contemporary readers and their communities, yet with sensible consideration given to the historical readerly community with which contemporary readers find continuity. Greater concentration is placed on what the book of Daniel means for contemporary readers than on what the book of Daniel meant in its historical setting. In the end, readers are left with difficult challenges, a sobering awareness of the volatility of the business of hermeneutics, and serious implications for readers to implement both theologically and hermeneutically.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf34k
1 A Hermeneutic Reading of Daniel from:
Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: Our reading of Daniel
Bis consciously hermeneutical, both in theory and practice as the very literature itself demands. Theoretically we read DanielBas a literary construct intended to teach the reader how to go about doing the business of interpretation. We come to these conclusions by means of praxis, by actually doing the business of interpretation. Such a relation between theory and practice becomes indicative of the mysterious points of entry and exit of our hermeneutical circle.
2 Narration in Daniel from:
Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: Narration in Daniel
Bmakes for one of the most fascinating studies of narration in the Hebrew and Christian canons. Of the sixty-six books of the Protestant Christian canon, none display such intricacies and complexities as multiple narrators, characters as narrators, a Gentile convert as a narrator, and the intermittent shifting of their roles. Each narrator in DanielBhas a specific purpose and viewpoint in his narration, and not always are they in complete agreement with each other, or at least this is how it seems on the surface. The coherence of these narrational voices, however, essentially lies in the hermeneutical end;
6 The Reader as Hermeneut from:
Reading Daniel as a Text in Theological Hermeneutics
Abstract: We have in this reading attempted to find the significance for the pistic, sophic, and interpretive community as it engages in the reading of Daniel
B. Therefore we have taken the time and effort to display how the contemporary ideal/competent reader might interact with DanielBas text along the way. We reach a point now when our reading of the text is completed and we must make some necessary comments regarding the general implications left for the reader. Rather than a reiteration of the reader’s interaction with smaller episodes, we need to make some broader and more sweeping generalizations about the
Book Title: Grasping Truth and Reality-Lesslie Newbigin's Theology of Mission to the Western World
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Le Roy Stults Donald
Abstract: When Lesslie Newbigin returned to Britain in 1974 after years of missionary service, he observed that his homeland was as much a mission field as India, where he had spent the majority of his missionary career. He concluded that the Western world needed a missionary confrontation. Instead of the traditional approach to missions, however, Newbigin realized that the Western world needed to be confronted theologically. From his earliest days at Cambridge University, Newbigin developed the theological convictions that shaped his understanding of the Christian faith, and he used these theological convictions as criteria to evaluate the belief system of Western culture and to provide an answer to its dilemma. The Enlightenment reintroduced humanism and dualism into Western culture, which resulted on the loss of purpose and the rise of skepticism. This book discusses Newbigin's theological convictions and how they factored into both his critique of and his solution to Western culture's spiritual and worldview problems. Donald Le Roy cleverly explains Newbigin's solution to reintroduce the Christian belief system into Western culture in order to restore purpose and truth to Westerners and put them back in contact with true reality through Jesus Christ.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf353
Introduction from:
Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: When J.E. Lesslie Newbigin retired from missionary service and returned to Britain in 1974, he discovered that his homeland was as much of a mission field as India. While he had been in constant contact with Britain and the West throughout his missionary career, what he saw upon his return ignited his missionary spirit and caused him to set out in retirement to discover the cause of the problem and propose an answer. It was not that he would discover something new; in fact, he had the answer all along but had to articulate it anew for the new context.
4 Humanity’s Need for Salvation and the Call for Radical Conversion from:
Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Newbigin’s view of humanity is one that acknowledges human sinfulness while maintaining the value and worth of human persons as God’s creation. His methodology is to discuss Christian doctrine in dialogue with the Enlightenment and post-modern thinking. The Enlightenment sought to free humanity from the ‘ dogma’ of original sin because they believed that “the most dangerous and destructive of all the dogmas which have perverted human reason is the dogma of original sin.”¹ Enlightenment thinkers saw the significance of the doctrine of original sin as central to the whole Christian ‘system.’ If humanity is not, in fact, sinful, then
7 Living in Truth and Reality from:
Grasping Truth and Reality
Abstract: Throughout the previous chapters, there have been numerous references to the church, usually in connection to some task or action that Newbigin believes the church must perform to confront Western culture. While the emphasis thus far has been on the substance of Newbigin’s theology in the face of the challenge of the Enlightenment ideology, it would be incorrect to conclude that what Newbigin envisions is somehow confined to mere words, as important as words are. His theology includes, in fact
culminates in, his vision for a community of faith that would live out its faith in contemporary Western culture.
Introduction from:
Our Only Hope
Abstract: Years ago, I heard a sermon about hope as I sat with my baby girl near the back of our Episcopal church. The preacher urged the congregation to face life’s challenges with hope. He gently criticized the parishioners for their tendency to sit back and let life go by, and he championed instead more active, responsible, and upbeat engagements with the world. He proclaimed the virtue of making a difference in one’s own life and in the world by adopting an attitude of hopefulness. I listened to this sermon from within the depths of an overwhelming bout of depression. I
3 A Thomistic Grammar of Hope from:
Our Only Hope
Abstract: Chapter 1 Described The distinctive characteristics of Moltmann’s theology of hope and the subsequent construction of Moltmannian hope. Chapter 2 examined some of the costs of an exclusive reliance on a Moltmannian theology of hope. This chapter considers the theology of hope presented by Aquinas that Moltmannian hope misunderstands and dismisses,¹ in order to recover some resources for contemporary theological hope. Chapter 4 will investigate resources from discourses not often considered in conversations about theological hope.
5 Our Only Hope from:
Our Only Hope
Abstract: Chapter 1 described Jürgen Moltmann’s future-determined, creationfocused, ideologically-modern, hope in the passible God who has been brought to suffer with humanity by Jesus Christ’s suffering and death. I followed the sketch of Moltmann’s theological hope with examples of Moltmannian hope and its humanist, this-worldly hope in the changes that responsible, hopeful actions can make. In chapter 2, I noted what an exclusive reliance on Moltmannian hope loses: non-modern imagination, divine impassibility, Christ’s two natures, heaven, transcendent human flourishing, and apparently irresponsible discipleship. Chapter 3 considered patristic and Thomistic presentations of theological hope and twenty-first-century treatments of hope from theologians appreciative
Chapter Two Challenging the Holy Marriage: from:
Translating the English Bible
Abstract: Relevance Theory is a development of communication theory springing from Paul Grice’s notion that there must be a ‘Co-operative Principle’ at work in conversation. This principle underwrites Maxims of Conversation underlying our ability to communicate. One of these, the so-called Maxim of Relation, simply specifies this: Be Relevant. Grice observed that speakers in conversation seem to observe this maxim, both in speaking and in interpreting, and that it is this ‘unspoken agreement’ which allows communication to take place, despite the indeterminacy of reference which is characteristic of language. Two linguists, Dan Sperber and Deirdre Wilson picked up this ball in
Chapter Three Start as you mean to go on? from:
Translating the English Bible
Abstract: We have seen in the previous chapter that a Relevance based theory of translation (which we christened
RTT) presents a number of attractions in forming a broadly based account for a phenomenon which plays an enormously significant role in human behaviour and culture yet has notoriously defied rigorous analysis. The attractions on which we focussed centred on the simplicity of the account, its integration with communication theory as a whole and with other aspects of human behaviour, and its potential for effecting an intellectual rapprochement with other quite different approaches to the problems of human communication, approaches which are far
Chapter Four When is a priest not a priest? from:
Translating the English Bible
Abstract: In Chapter Three we considered the Preface to Luke’s gospel, and found that it was a certain combination of syntactical features, rather than the semantics of the piece, which gave it its relevance. This, of course, is not the universal or perhaps even the normal state of affairs: on the contrary, the semantic properties of a text are normally very important in how it achieves relevance. Although part of the agenda of the present work is to challenge the assumption that semantics are always and everywhere the ‘trump card’ in interpreting a text, it has to be acknowledged that they
Chapter Six Repetitive texture and four kinds of literalism from:
Translating the English Bible
Abstract: We ended the last chapter with the potentially disruptive finding that
anyfeature of a text may be a communicative clue, and may indeed turn out to be the most important clue to how a given text achieves relevance for a particular reader. As we have seen repeatedly, there is a longstanding practice in biblical translation of attending to only some of the clues to relevance, and this arises because the translator’s mind is clouded by the idea of ‘equivalence’. Because she or he thinks that her task is to produce a target text which is somehow equivalent (however that
Book Title: The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Longman Tremper
Abstract: Cephas Tushima provides a thorough analysis of the fate of Saul's heirs, focussing on whether their tragedies were due to continuing divine retribution, coincidence, or Davidic orchestration. He concludes that David was unjust and calculating in his dealings with the Saulides and, like other Near Eastern usurpers, perpetrated heinous injustices against the vanquished house of Saul. Traditionally readers saw Saul as evil and David as a hero; but more recently scholars have written about Saul as a tragic character and David as a villain, turning the book of Samuel into deeply contested interpretive territory. Tushima provides analysis of the critical literature surrounding this contentious issue and contributes his own study that will prove important to the continuing debate. He assesses David's character by analysing how he treats the surviving children of his predecessor, drawing upon the provisions for justice in the covenant community in the book of Deuteronomy. He demonstrates a connection between Samuel and the Torah through themes and motifs, and develops theological conclusions from them on such issues as the impact of human conduct on the environment, marriage, monarchy and Zion theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf3qc
Foreword from:
The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Author(s) Gundry Robert H.
Abstract: The story of Saul and David is vivid and compelling drawing the reader into a narrative of gripping action and complex characters. Typical of the best hebrew narrative, the narrator of the Saul and David story rarely reveals the motivations of characters and even more sparingly provides moral evaluation of its characters’ actions, preferring a strategy of showing rather than telling the story. Readers are expected to enter into the story with their imagination and to do their own evaluations.
5 David and Michal from:
The Fate of Saul's Progeny in the Reign of David
Abstract: The focus of this endeavor as a whole is to investigate the fortunes of King Saul’s progeny during David’s reign. My goal is to ascertain, if possible, the factors that account for the great ills that visited the Saulides after the demise of their father, and especially to determine if there had been any Davidic complicity in any of these misfortunes. In the previous chapter, the analysis of the civil war years, reached a few tentative conclusions. First, with respect to the murder of Abner by Joab, David, by his actions and especially his inactions, was at the least blameworthy,
Book Title: Onslaught against Innocence- Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: While in Genesis 2-11 the Yahwist confronts the issue of evil through a sequence of stories on the progressive deterioration of the divine-human relationship, in Genesis 4 he describes the initial slaughter of one human being by another as fratricidal. This book provides a close reading of J's story by using literary criticism and psychological criticism, and shows that the biblical author has more than an "archaeological" design. His characters - including God, Adam, Eve, Cain, and Abel, plus minor character - are paradigmatic, as they allow J to proceed with a fine analytical feel for the nature of evil as performed by "homo" as "homini lupus." No imaginative "mimesis" of evil has ever been recounted with such an economy of means and such depth of psychological insight.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf49n
Chapter Two The Anthropological Dimension from:
Onslaught against Innocence
Abstract: Jstates that Cain offered the fruit of his fare to God. Abel did the same with the product of his shepherding. From the very beginning of his narrative composition, J has displayed a striking preoccupation with the human work. Does it mean originally the opposite of rest and enjoyment? J’s first answer comes with the myth of Adam and Eve, and it is a resounding No. In the Garden of Eden, the human enjoyable activity was work (see Gen 2: 15). But, while the origin of work is devoid of pain and anxiety, it is transformed after the human transgression
6 On Thoughts and Prayer from:
The Philokalia and the Inner Life
Abstract: If the
Philokaliais concerned with mental well-being, or with the proper ordering of the inner life of thoughts, then its only understanding of this is in the context of prayer. It is concerned primarily with prayer, yet it insists that prayer may only be properly understood and practised if attention is given first to the world of thoughts. This understanding of an inextricable relationship between thoughts and prayer runs all the way through thePhilokalia.
1 Desire, Lack, and the Absorbing God from:
Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: Man is the active animal, intensely restless and forever questing.¹ Living on the move, no sooner do human beings settle in a place but its limits become manifest to them, and their restlessness reappears within its borders. As marked by desire, their being often sends them bustling over the globe to gain a habitation and a home. As temporal beings, their present slips away into the past, while the future they anticipate shows them not to be selfsame, not to be coincident with themselves. Behind themselves in a past, in front of themselves in a future, in the present, humans
7 Desire, Otherness, and Infinitude from:
Desire, Dialectic and Otherness
Abstract: The desire to know is capable of unreserved openness to otherness. It is openness to what is given. But what is given, we now see, cannot be restricted to the contracted concreteness of the particular thing. Thus the four degrees of concreteness previously discussed are modes of appearance of the thing, progressively more complex presentations of its otherness; correlatively, the four modes of identification are increasingly ample acknowledgments of its inherent richness. As the immanent self-articulation of the thing becomes more concretely communicable, so the matching openness of a human being moves from the immediate, through the dialectically self-mediated, to
2 Constructing a Double Vision Hermeneutic from:
A Double Vision Hermeneutic
Abstract: In the introduction, I have proffered myself and my experience as the locus of my double vision hermeneutics. In chapter 1, dissatisfaction was expressed with the doctrinal approach and interest shown in developing Archie lee’s “Two Texts” concern and K. K. Yeo’s cross-cultural and intersubjective hermeneutics. I accept the call for an exegesis that seriously considers both the literary and historical context of the texts seriously and will apply this exegetical principle to my study of
Yìzhuànand Pauline texts. I find the reflection of my personal experience to be in line with Chinese Christians who wrestle with their inheritance
4 Interpreting Text A1: from:
A Double Vision Hermeneutic
Abstract: In the double vision hermeneutic I delineated in chapter 3, I had emphasized the intersubjective factor, i.e. the intersubjective experience of
shì. Developing from the hermeneutic of Gadamer, I have drawn attention to the cultural-linguistic effect ofshìas part of the larger body of Chinese traditionary texts, andshìas culturally inborn and subjectively experienced within myself, which together form an intersubjective experience. Thus,shìis something that is external to me, the interpreting subject but yet simultaneously exists as an intrinsic element in me. in other words, withshìas part of my inner world acting as a
3 God in Your Grace Transform the World from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: The New Testament witness that God graciously sent Jesus Christ into the world has to be the preeminent transforming act overshadowing every other transformation, past or future. The gospel writer John says: “And the Word became flesh and dwelt among us, full of grace and truth” (John 1:14). Paul too tells the church at Rome that “all have
5 Deuteronomy from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: Deuteronomy, the fifth book of the Pentateuch, is the Preeminent document on law and ethics in the Hebrew Scriptures / Old Testament (OT). Emanating from the late eighth or early seventh century BC, the major portion of the book (Deuteronomy 1–28) updates, supplements, and sermonizes on the Decalogue and Covenant Code of Exodus 20–23. Deuteronomy also differs in content from the so-called Priestly laws in Exodus, Numbers, and Leviticus, as well as the Holiness Code of Leviticus 17–26. The book has recognized parallels to preaching of the eighth-century prophets, particularly Amos and Hosea, stating climactically in a
9 The Confessions of Jeremiah from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: In Jeremiah we are accustomed to speak of the prophet’s confessions, so named because of their likeness to the
Confessionsof Saint Augustine. These are a singular legacy of Jeremiah, for in them the prophet is not so much speaking Yahweh’s word with power and passion, although some of this is definitely to be found in them, but rather telling us how he feels about what is going on, and what impact his preaching is having on him personally. We see in these confessions the other side of Jeremiah’s role as mediator and divine messenger, which is to bring concerns
13 Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond from:
Theology in Language, Rhetoric, and Beyond
Abstract: That Christian theology be assertive—strongly and aggressively assertive—should occasion no surprise, since Christian preaching from earliest times has 1) centered on gospel proclamation (
kerygmain acts 2: 14–
Introduction: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Boscaljon Daniel
Abstract: With the blessings of technology, we have infused the twenty-first-century world with matters of the moment: we have acquired a taste for what occurs now and no longer have the patience to suffer our dreams to come to fruition. Marketers create a craving for consumption, convenience, and certainty: they frame digital technologies as tools whose use is restricted to temporarily satiating such demands. eliminating the arduous temporal gap that more ephemeral goods demand, our world provides a series of superficial goods whose certain attainment encourages us to sacrifice the search for that which would provide more authentic fulfillment. Because distractions
4 Desiring Utopian Subjects: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) White Holly
Abstract: The status of literary utopias at the turn of the third millennium is fraught with productive complexity. often used colloquially to deride impractical or vaguely hopeful social arrangements, the term “utopia” is still employed to signal a representation of society based on principles that direct human satisfaction. Literary theorist Krishan Kumar reflects that while utopianism is still a lively part of social and cultural life, literary utopia has waned, occluded by its alter identity—dystopian literature.¹ While others contemplate the decline of myth generally or the modern myth of progress specifically, Kumar suggests that utopian fiction may be eclipsed at
5 John Calvin, Geneva, and Godly Patriarchs: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Plank Ezra L.
Abstract: On 17 January 1544, Pierre Rosset appeared before the ecclesiastical disciplinary tribunal in Geneva—the consistory—and was questioned regarding his treatment of his wife, anthoyne. The previous week, she had testified that he regularly beat her. When confronted, pierre claimed that, in fact, he did “not want to live except according to god;” the problem was that his wife did “not want to do what he command[ed] her.” He further asserted that anthoyne insulted him, demonstrating that she “want[ed] to be the master.” in a strong assertion of patriarchal sovereignty that modern readers find appalling, he insisted that he
8 Reframed Hope: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Hamner Everett
Abstract: In
True Religion, graham Ward argues that “the end [of religion] does not signal the falling into disuse or the oblivion of the religious. Rather, it signals exactly the opposite: the extension and hype of the religious as the ultimate vision of the excessive and the transgressive.”¹ As he observed over a decade ago, early twenty-first- century society is less the product of religion’s disappearance than its immersion in spectacle. foreshadowing much contemporary scholarship, Ward found religion not just in traditional institutional settings, but “in commercial business, gothic and sci-fi fantasy, in health clubs, themed bars and architectural design, of
11 The Coming Community: from:
Hope and the Longing for Utopia
Author(s) Hall W. David
Abstract: A chronicler who recites the events without distinguishing between the major and minor ones acts in accordance with the following truth: nothing that has ever happened should be regarded as lost for history. To be sure, only a redeemed mankind receives the fullness of its past—which is to say, only for a redeemed mankind has its past become citable in all its moments. Each moment it has lived becomes a
citation à l’order du jour— and that day is Judgement day.¹
Book Title: Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology-Theological Reflections on Rationality and Agency with Special Reference to Paul Ricoeur and G.W.F. Hegel
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Ille George
Abstract: The present study seeks to respond theologically to current discussions about ideas of self from the perspective of God’s action in and towards the world. Its aim is to trace a view of rationality that follows the drama of God’s engagement with the world, thus involving dying and resurrection, ascesis and abundance, suffering witness and Eucharistic communion. Since, as Calvin notes, knowledge of God and knowledge of self are intimately bound together, this exercise of discerning the shape of a theological rationality in the present arena of competing promises of meaning and truth is carried out on two levels: the theological and the anthropological.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf5zz
Introduction from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The present study seeks to respond theologically to such a situation from the perspective of God’s action in and towards the world. Its aim is to
[Part I Introduction] from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: The work of Paul Ricoeur has inspired an impressive amount of literature. The formidable breadth of his philosophical compass, including as it does, fields as diverse as literary criticism and analytic philosophy, psychoanalysis and biblical interpretation, not only recapitulates the battles and aspirations of his own generation, but witnesses to the living tension between reflection and action, past and present, academic vogues and enduring truths. In a century of turmoil, marked by alternations of unprecedented bursts of hope for a reconciled humanity and unfathomable sources
5 The Unfolding of God’s Story: from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: It was Gadamer who suggested that Hegel may become more important for hermeneutics than Schleiermacher.¹ This may come as a surprise for those who know Hegel as the author of the absolute system, the “conceptual” Hegel, the philosopher who thought he could think God’s thoughts “before the creation of nature and of finite mind.”² As it is well known, immediately after his death, Hegel’s disciples divided among themselves, and the division has continued ever since, as nobody has succeeded in showing convincingly how Hegel’s system works in actual fact.
7 Epiphanies of Presence: from:
Between Vision and Obedience - Rethinking Theological Epistemology
Abstract: Theological discourse, whether implicitly or explicitly, is in search of some kind of justification. It was because of its contamination by various intellectual heresies, old and new, that often this justificatory practice rather than letting the discourse flow beyond itself, tended to lead it into the fortress of a regulatory concept, practice or institution or a contingent or illusory foundation. But as history so often witnesses, it is precisely when discourse guards itself most securely that it must face the most formidable objection because it loses its ecstatic character, ceasing thus to reflect the overriding feature of its source.
Book Title: Biblical Knowing-A Scriptural Epistemology of Error
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Bartholomew Craig G.
Abstract: The Christian Scriptures could be theologically described as beginning and ending with an epistemological outlook. The first episode of humanity’s activity centers on the knowledge of good and evil. The final stage of humanity is pictured by Jeremiah as a universally prophetic and knowing society: 'And no longer shall each one teach his neighbor and each his brother, saying, 'Know the Lord', for they shall all know me, from the least of them to the greatest, declares the Lord' (Jer 31:34). What happens to knowledge in between? In this work, Dru Johnson reconsiders epistemology with the tool of biblical theology: an approach to knowledge as developed in Genesis 2 and explored throughout the Tanakh (i.e., the Old Testament) and New Testament. By re-examining the neglected idea that Christian Scripture might be developing robust descriptions of knowing that can direct us today, the ambition of this book is to lay the groundwork for a biblical theology of knowledge - how knowledge is broached, described, and how error is rectified within the texts of the Christian canon. Proper knowing as it occurs in the Scriptures means that there are better and worse ways to know. Even more, the epistemology that is found to be advocated in Scripture is not relegated to religious knowing. Johnson argues that scientific epistemology and biblical epistemology make significant points of contact suggesting that they are fundamentally consistent with each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf65j
Introduction from:
Biblical Knowing
Abstract: The Christian Scriptures could be theologically described as beginning and ending with an epistemological outlook. The first episode of humanity’s activity centers on the knowledge of good and evil. The final stage of humanity is pictured by Jeremiah as a universally prophetic and knowing society: “And no longer shall each one teach his neighbor and each his brother, saying, ‘Know the Lord,’ for they shall all know me, from the least of them to the greatest, declares the Lord” (Jer 31: 34). What happens to knowledge in between? We intend to hash out epistemology with the tool of biblical theology:
2 Knowledge in the Garden: from:
Biblical Knowing
Abstract: Take a long look at this X-ray film.¹ In it, the bullet that wounded President Theodore Roosevelt can be seen. Actually, the bullet cannot be seen by just anyone. While anyone can see
something, we want to know exactly what we are seeing. If it were not for the physician, Dr. Hochreim, trained to read radiographs who also knew the historical context of the X-ray film (i.e., it was to get a look inside Roosevelt’s chest) and marked the film for us, we would only see the bare outline of what we presume to be someone’s chest. Only by the
3 Error in the Garden: from:
Biblical Knowing
Abstract: It must be admitted at the outset: Pursuing an abstract idea like knowledge in the Edenic account of the Fall is audacious. A prominent Christian philosopher once warned me that any attempt to derive a philosophical view
fromthe Scriptures is a fundamentally asinine attempt. Before we attempt this particular asinine feat from the error in the Garden, let us first consider a direct implication of knowing in the Fall which happened on the top of a mountain: The Transfiguration of Jesus.
5 Knowing under the Prophet-Messiah: from:
Biblical Knowing
Abstract: In the prior chapters, we have offered a view of knowing as a process that begins with listening to accredited authorities and then enacting their directions in order to see. Submission and praxis are not novel concepts in the history of Judaism or Christianity (or any religion for that matter). However, the idea that accredited authorities, process, and embodied participation form the centerpiece of all proper knowing is a more radical proposition.
9 Implications for Theologians and the Church from:
Biblical Knowing
Abstract: For the purpose of this text, it is impossible to describe all of the implications of the epistemological process as proposed here. But, in an effort to show the practical matters that have to do with the lives of theologians, philosophers, teachers, pastors, and more, we will briefly consider some reflections and paint pictures of what knowing looks like as a real life process. Further, we will describe some reverberations from thinking about the church’s normal activities as epistemological processes, seeking to enliven our wisdom together in the church.
7 The Profit and Loss of Lament: from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Moffat Donald P.
Abstract: Lament and penitential prayer are closely related. Both are responses to suffering and crisis yet the ways in which they address God and the assumptions they make about the relationship and the allocation of responsibility are quite different. In the light of recent research on penitential prayer I want to re-examine aspects of the relationship between such prayers and the laments. In the process I want to look again at the implications for theology and Christian practice that were highlighted in seminal work by Claus Westermann and Walter Brueggemann.¹
10 Liturgy and Lament from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Buchanan Colin
Abstract: [Personal: I am an Anglican liturgist from England, and I notified Tim Meadowcroft of Laidlaw that I would be in Auckland in February 2011, simply hoping to meet for a cup of coffee. However, he brought me into the theological seminar on “Lament,” to contribute from my own discipline. I was well aware of the earlier earthquake in Christchurch (I had just been there on my travels), as well as of the more tragic mining disaster on the West Coast; and the raw memories of these events were sobering factors in my preparation and presentation. What none of us could
12 Framing Lament: from:
Spiritual Complaint
Author(s) Mathews Jeanette
Abstract: In this chapter I suggest that the form-critically identified laments of the Hebrew Bible can be understood via the performance concept of “framing.” In art, drama, and literature the frame lifts the work or event to a heightened consciousness and provides a context for practitioners and audiences to interact. My interest is in the link between frame (form) and content. I argue that the lament form provides a literary framework for the expression of anguish by empowering those who are suffering to name their pain, despite the constraints of the form that generally culminate in a leaning towards hope. Comparison
CHAPTER 3 John Wesley’s Amendment of Covenant Theology from:
From Faith to Faith
Abstract: What we know of John Wesley’s covenant theology comes by way of the minutes of Conferences, the letters borne of controversy, counsel, and reflection, and the sermons, extracts, and journal entries comprising the Wesley corpus. These chronicle his encounter with the covenant theology instilled in the theological understanding of his companions, converts, and antagonists. One indicator of its status as the common currency of theological discourse is Wesley’s confidence that his use of its technical terminology would be understood by his audience. And yet, as the opening paragraph of his sermon “The Righteousness of Faith” clearly demonstrates, he recognized that
CHAPTER 5 John Wesley’s Covenant Theology in Context: from:
From Faith to Faith
Abstract: As the relationship of the servant-son metaphor to covenant theology comes more into view, its value to Wesley as a definitive narrative of his vision of the way of salvation is more clearly apparent. After all, the biblical foundation of the metaphor was indisputable and its capacity for imaging “the two grand manifestations of God, the legal and the evangelical” had established it from pulpit to pew as a familiar and theologically trustworthy summary of God’s saving activity. And yet, the soteriological content of the metaphor is more extensive than its overt relationship to the superstructure of the covenant of
4 Campbell’s Apocalyptic Gospel and Pauline Athanasianism from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Tilling Chris
Abstract: In
The Deliverance of GodDouglas campbell seeks to provide a vision of a revelatory, transformational, unconditional, and liberational Pauline theology, one that, he maintains, stands in stark contrast to readings of Paul influenced by contractual foundationalism.¹ in response to the reviews by me and Michael Gorman,² campbell elucidates his understanding of the contrast involved by speaking of it in terms of the debate between Athanasianism and Arianism. The foundationalist reading is Arian in its basic theological dynamics, and cannot stand together with but is necessarily antagonistic towards Paul’s essentially athanasian gospel. in this chapter i will explore the basic
5 “Arian” Foundationalism or “Athanasian” Apocalypticism: from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Smith J. Warren
Abstract: When I am in the company of New Testament colleagues they ask what I, as a patrologist, think of Douglas Campbell’s invocation of Athanasius and Arius to characterize the difference between his and previous readings of Romans. In their voice I detect a hint of skepticism. After all, they think of “Athanasian” and “Arian” as theological categories—markers for competing views of the trinity or Christology. What do Arius and Athanasius have to do with issues of theological method or participatory Soteriology that are at the heart of Campbell’s assessment of Romans? This skepticism is understandable given the way the
6 Connecting the Dots: from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Campbell Douglas A.
Abstract: The journey to a solution from the problems I outlined in chapter 3 can begin usefully by considering just one concern— Judaism—in relation to a limited text—Galatians 2:15–16.² This consideration can illustrate both why the presence of a fundamentally Arian type of western contractualism in Paul is so problematic, however unnoticed, and what the basic strategy for resolving it is that
Deliveranceis proposing. In what follows, largely for the sake of convenience, I will call the problematic approach “forwardness.”³ in Galatians 2:15–16 Paul states, Ἡμεῖς φύσει Ἰουδαῖοι καὶ οὐκ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἁμαρτωλοί· [16] εἰδότες δὲ
9 Rereading Romans 1–31 from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Campbell Douglas A.
Abstract: Despite what some have said, Romans 1–3 is generally read prospectively or forward, setting up a tacitly Arian or foundationalist variant within Paul’s theology more broadly in the form of Western Contractualism, so we need to engage with this text carefully if we are ever to rid Paul of this problem. without a
11 Rereading Romans 1–3 Apocalyptically: from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Wilson Brittany E.
Abstract: In my response to Douglas Campbell’s essay “Rereading Romans 1–3,” I want to begin by way of disclaimer. Overall, I am very sympathetic to Campbell’s reading of Paul. Like Campbell, I read Paul apocalyptically, and I agree that Romans 5–8 lies at the heart of Paul’s apocalyptic soteriology.² Moreover, I also reject what Campbell calls a “prospective” reading of Paul, or what he elsewhere terms “Arianism,” foundationalism, contractualism, and justification discourse. Such readings lead, inter alia, to an individualistic view of salvation in which the gospel is not freely given, but necessitated because of human sinfulness. I applaud
12 Rereading Paul’s ΔIKAIO-Language from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Campbell Douglas A.
Abstract: We considered in chapter 9 one way that a destructive foundationalism can be unleashed into our broader accounts of Paul’s thinking about salvation—through a forward construal of the argument in Romans 1–3. This construal will release foundationalism in its own right, in the specific form of course of Western contractualism, although it may form an alliance with a more general commitment on the part of Paul’s interpreter to a fundamentally rationalistic and moralistic, and invariably quite individualizing, anthropology—a conception of the human person that primarily governs itself, which is deeply congenial to modern thought and culture (repeated
13 Reading Paul’s ΔIKAIO-Language. from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Hafemann Scott
Abstract: Campbell’s own resistance to such a construct is based on his conviction that this “western contractualism” can be countered once we
14 Campbell’s Faith: from:
Beyond Old and New Perspectives on Paul
Author(s) Tilling Chris
Abstract: I have regularly lamented the fact that the hardback version of
Deliverancewas published using endnotes (rather than footnotes), and this has no doubt meant that even those who have read the whole book may not have mustered the willpower to
Book Title: The Dialogical Spirit-Christian Reason and Theological Method in the Third Millennium
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Yong Amos
Abstract: Contemporary proposals for Christian theology from post-liberalism to Radical Orthodoxy and beyond have espoused their own methodological paradigms. Those who have ventured into this domain of theological method, however, have usually had to stake their claims vis-à-vis trends in what may be called the contemporary "post-al" age, whether of the post-modern, post-Christendom, post-Enlightenment, post-Western, or post-colonial varieties. This volume is unique among offerings in this arena in suggesting a way forward that engages on each of these fronts, and does so from a particularistic Christian perspective without giving up on Christian theology's traditional claims to universality. This is accomplished through the articulation of a distinctive dialogical methodology informed by both Pentecostalism and Evangelicalism, one rooted in the Christian salvation-history narrative of Incarnation and Pentecost that is yet open to the world in its many and various cultural, ethnic, religious, and disciplinary discourses. Amos Yong here engages with twelve different interlocutors representing different ecumenical, religious, and disciplinary perspectives. 'The Dialogical Spirit' thus not only proffers a model for Christian theological method suitable for the twenty-first century global context but also exemplifies this methodological approach through its interactions across the contemporary scholarly, inter-religious, and theological landscape.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf6g6
Introduction from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: Soon after completing my PhD thesis I wrote a book on theological method,
Spirit-Word-Community: Theological Hermeneutics in Trinitarian Perspective.¹ I was motivated in this direction in part because the theological academy was caught up, around the turn of the millennium, on questions related to method,² and in part because my own graduate training under a philosophical theologian alerted me to the importance of providing methodological argumentation in a time when theological claims were no longer being received merely because they were asserted. Both trends were reactions to the post-Enlightenment world that had been emerging with increasing clarity across the last
CHAPTER 1 The Demise of Foundationalism and the Retention of Truth: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In a recent essay entitled “ The Postpositivist Choice: Tracy or Lindbeck?,” Richard Lints suggests that there are basically two methodological options available to contemporary theology: either the postmodern approach that highlights the public or universal character of theological rationality or the postliberal emphasis on intertextuality, narrative, and the cultural-linguistic framework of all knowledge.¹ Although Lints writes from within the evangelical tradition, a movement well known for taking a stand for the truth, he refrains from offering an answer to the question posed in the title, preferring instead to provide a descriptive survey of the two options.² As part of
CHAPTER 8 Mind and Life, Religion and Science: from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In this chapter, I explore what happens to the Buddhist-Christian dialogue when another party is introduced into the conversation, in this case, the sciences. My question concerns how the interface between religion and science is related to the Buddhist-Christian encounter and vice versa. I take up this question in four steps, correlating with the four parts of this chapter. First, I sketch a brief overview of the Buddhist-science encounter, and then turn my attention more specifically to the recent exchanges in the Mind and Life Dialogues involving Western scientists and philosophers and Tibetan Buddhist practitioners, including His Holiness the Dalai
CHAPTER 9 Tibetan Buddhism Going Global? from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: There is a growing awareness of Tibetan Buddhism as one viable representative of the Buddhist tradition in global context.¹ In this chapter, I want to add to the case for viewing Tibetan Buddhism as a global Buddhist tradition by focusing on its contemporary encounter with science. More specifically, I suggest that the recent Tibetan Buddhist dialogue with the sciences provides one avenue to understand the dynamic character of this tradition as an emerging global presence.
CHAPTER 10 The True Believers? from:
The Dialogical Spirit
Abstract: In the last twenty-plus years, Francis X. Clooney, SJ, has emerged as perhaps one of the most important theologians in our contemporary global Christian context through his work on reading Hindu and Christian texts side by side. Yet despite his remarkable output, Clooney’s work has received little attention from evangelical thinkers or theologians. I would urge, however, that evangelicals neglect interacting with Clooney’s work to their loss; rather, Clooney’s project is important precisely because of his concerns about maintaining confessional integrity as a Christian theologian (in his case as a lifelong Roman Catholic priest) while crossing over into and taking
3 Tamar from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: The way Hebrew narrative portrays characters has been thoroughly explored by Alter,¹ Sternberg,² and Bar-Efrat.³ Below is a very brief summary of the main points to be noted.
4 Rahab from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: A scarlet thread ties the stories of Tamar and Rahab together, as does the fact that they are both Canaanite women who use trickery to outwit men and gain control of their situation to save their lives and the lives of others. Yet, the setting to Rahab’s story is very different to Tamar’s. Her story is embedded in the account of the conquest of Canaan by the tribes of Israel led by Joshua. The Joshua narrative seeks to define boundaries, not just in terms of who lives where in the promised land but in terms of who is “in” and
5 Ruth from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Surprisingly, the character of Ruth has much in common with both Tamar and Rahab.¹ Tamar and Rahab are foreigners, outsiders, and as such might be expected to pose a threat to Israel. Similarly Ruth is a Moabite woman and Moabite women had a reputation in Israel’s history; it was sexual relations with the women of Moab that had led Israel astray
6 “She of Uriah” from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: The shock of the reference to the fact that Solomon’s mother did not “belong” to David but to Uriah is compounded by the knowledge that technically this is “incorrect” since Bathsheba was David’s wife by the time she conceived and bore Solomon. Clearly, Matthew
8 Tamar, Rahab, and Ruth: from:
Mothers on the Margin?
Abstract: Part 1 has established that the first three named women of Matthew’s Gospel are characterized within their Hebrew narratives not in terms of their sinfulness or scandalous sexual activity but by their virtues of righteousness, faith, and loyalty. This short chapter will argue that righteousness, faith, and loyalty are three central aspects of the Matthean Jesus’ teaching in relation to discipleship. It is therefore significant that these themes first appear in the stories of Tamar (righteousness), Rahab (faith and loyalty), and Ruth (loyalty). The naming of Tamar, Rahab, and Ruth in the genealogy highlights and anticipates the importance of these
Book Title: God's Wounds-Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of the Divine Suffering, Volume 2. Evil and Divine Suffering
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Pool Jeff B.
Abstract: This book constitutes the second volume of a three-volume study of Christian testimonies to divine suffering: God's Wounds: Hermeneutic of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering, vol. 2, Evil and Divine Suffering. The larger study focuses its inquiry into the testimonies to divine suffering themselves, seeking to allow the voices that attest to divine suffering to speak freely, then to discover and elucidate the internal logic or rationality of this family of testimonies, rather than defending these attestations against the dominant claims of classical Christian theism that have historically sought to eliminate such language altogether from Christian discourse about the nature and life of God. This second volume of studies proceeds on the basis of the presuppositions of this symbol, those implicit attestations that provide the conditions of possibility for divine suffering-that which constitutes divine vulnerability with respect to creation-as identified and examined in the first volume of this project: an understanding of God through the primary metaphor of love (God is love); and an understanding of the human as created in the image of God, with a life (though finite) analogous to the divine life-the imago Dei as love. The second volume then investigates the first two divine wounds or modes of divine suffering to which the larger family of testimonies to divine suffering normally attest: (1) divine grief, suffering because of betrayal by the beloved human or human sin; and (2) divine self-sacrifice, suffering for the beloved human in its bondage to sin or misery, to establish the possibility of redemption and reconciliation. Each divine wound, thus, constitutes a response to a creaturely occasion. The suffering in each divine wound also occurs in two stages: a passive stage and an active stage. In divine grief, God suffers because of human sin, betrayal of the divine lover by the beloved human: divine sorrow as the passive stage of divine grief; and divine anguish as the active stage of divine grief. In divine self-sacrifice, God suffers in response to the misery or bondage of the beloved human's infidelity: divine travail (focused on the divine incarnation in Jesus of Nazareth) as the active stage of divine self-sacrifice; and divine agony (focused on divine suffering in the crucifixion of Jesus of Nazareth) as the passive stage of divine self-sacrifice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf8fn
Introduction to Part One: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: This moment in the symbol, like all three of this symbol’s principal moments, develops through the interaction of the two presuppositions that I have already analyzed in volume one of this project.² I repeat the most general features of those two presuppositions.
First,
Introduction to Division One: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: God’s creation of humans in the divine image established the conditions of possibility for the occasion of the first divine wound. I have shown previously that the Christian symbol of divine suffering construes human being or life in the image of God as love. Furthermore, as being-inact (
ens actu), theimago Deiactualizes itself asimitatio Dei. The human never loses or annihilates theimago Dei, but certainly can distort and pervert itself as such.¹ Thus, humans always actualize their being or life as love in an imitation of God either authentically or inauthentically. As Augustine said to God in
1 Human Cupiditas: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Human life as
cupiditas, human sin as the occasion for the first divine wound or divine grief, exhibits several formal characteristics. By no means do I pretend, with my identification of these formal characteristics, exhaustively to analyze this occasion for divine suffering. I only examine here the broad contours of the factors that structure the beloved human’s infidelity, those structural characteristics of human sin that figure most prominently as features of the occasion for the first divine wound. Most generally, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering, the creaturely occasion for the first divine wound exhibits six formal characteristics:
2 Human Cupiditas: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Human life as
cupiditas, or human sin as the creaturely occasion for divine grief, also exhibits several material characteristics. The disruption among, and the re-ordering of, both the dimensions of human love and the sequentiality of the subjects in the love-relationships determine the material characteristics of sin. When the human lives ascupiditas, or when the human falsely actualizes theimitatio Dei, then the human disorders both the dimensions and the subjects of its love. As I stated in the first volume of this study, the sequentiality of human love refers to the order among the subjects of love, while
Introduction to Division Two: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Human sin, the false or inauthentic actualization of human life as love, human life as
cupiditas, or the beloved human’s betrayal or rejection of the divine lover, occasions the first divine wound, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering. Of course, although prominent theologies from the European reformations of the sixteenth century tended to found themselves on theologies of the cross, even those theologies refused to attribute any actual form of suffering to the divine nature: this refusal, of course, extended to divine grief as well.¹ Nonetheless, by radical and intentional contrast, Christian testimonies to divine suffering consistently, and
3 Divine Sorrow: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: This chapter identifies and examines the formal characteristics that structure divine sorrow.¹ Several questions immediately arise concerning the interaction among the characteristics of this symbol’s two presuppositions² with reference to the characteristics of human sin in division one of the present volume of studies. (1) What is the relationship between divine vulnerability and this passive stage of divine grief? (2) To which operation or role of the Christian God does the symbol of divine sorrow refer? (3) Toward which subjects does divine sorrow direct itself or with which subjects does God concern the divine self in God’s sorrow? (4) What
4 Divine Sorrow: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Throughout my previous analysis of the formal characteristics of divine sorrow, various aspects of divine
caritashave repeatedly surfaced. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasthat have emerged in divine sorrow. The three dimensions (philial, agapic, and erotic) of divine love, as expressed in the passive stage of divine grief, constitute the material characteristics of divine sorrow. While all three dimensions of divinecaritasoperate in divine sorrow, the erotic dimension predominates in this mode of divine suffering. Moreover, for this symbol, God actualizes each material characteristic of divine
Introduction to Division Three: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: According to the Christian symbol of divine suffering, God grieves
not only passively, not only with sorrow over radical human distortion of the relationship between divine creator and creatures, not only about both creaturely self-willed refusal of authentic alterity and God’s un-desired loss of genuine divine enrichment. Due to this selfwilled human abandonment of both God and the human’s own genuine actualization, God also grievesactively, a stage of divine grief to which numerous Christian attestations to divine suffering witness.¹ Following numerous testimonies to divine suffering, I have designated the active of divine grief as divine anguish, the anguish of
5 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: I will inquire into the formal characteristics of the second stage in divine grief through questions that resemble those questions with which I have already examined the first, more passive, stage of this symbol. Again, these questions will also reappear in the following studies of this symbol. (1) What is the relationship between divine vulnerability and the active stage of divine grief? (2) To which divine role or operation does the symbol of divine anguish primarily refer? (3) Toward which subjects does divine anguish direct itself or which subjects concern God in divine anguish? (4) What spatial and temporal features
6 Divine Anguish: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The philial, agapic, and erotic dimensions of divine love, as expressed in this active stage of divine grief, constitute the
materialcharacteristics of divine anguish. Like my study of divine sorrow, in my previous analysis of theformalcharacteristics of divine anguish, various aspects of divinecaritashave appeared several times. In this chapter, then, I will draw together the major strands of those dimensions in divinecaritasas they display themselves in divine anguish.
Introduction to Part Two: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Like the first divine wound, this second wound of God originates from the interaction of the two presuppositions that I examined in the first volume of this work.¹ The second divine wound, however, differs from God’s first wound in the following way. Human betrayal of the divine lover inflicted the first divine wound, thereby
Introduction to Division Four: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: In Christian attestations to
divine self-sacrifice, the predicament of the beloved human occasions this second mode of divine suffering as well. Strictly considered, however, both the beloved human’s infidelity (human sin) and the misery of the beloved human’s infidelity (the consequences of human sin) comprise the occasion for divine selfsacrifice. Neither sin nor its consequences ever appear isolated from one another, cannot even occur apart from one another. For this reason, previously, I examined as one formal characteristic of human sin the indissoluble bond between sin and its consequences. Nevertheless, the Christian symbol of divine suffering distinguishes these two aspects
7 Misery of Human Cupiditas: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: The formal characteristics of human misery certainly include those initial consequences of human infidelity to God that I briefly described in chapter 1: guilt (
culpa), self-enslavement to selfdeification or life against God (servum arbitrium), and sinful social fatedness or subjugation to a world of sin (peccatum originale). For the purposes of this chapter, however, first, I will more fully develop from chapter 1 only my interpretation of the second consequence, since it forms the taproot from which the other formal characteristics of human misery grow. Nonetheless, the second formal characteristic of human misery, human self-destruction, also stems from the central
8 Misery of Human Cupiditas: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: Just as the formal characteristics of human misery depended upon and extended the formal characteristics of human sin from chapter 1, so too the material characteristics of human misery depend upon and extend the basic quality of the material characteristics of the beloved human’s infidelity that I analyzed in chapter 2. The inescapability and conflicts that constitute the misery of human infidelity, however, intensify the disruption and re-ordering of human life as
cupiditas, both in the dimensions of human love and in the sequentiality of subjects within the relationships of love. In the exposition that follows, I will not repeat
9 Divine Travail: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: In my study of the first stage of divine self-sacrifice, or divine travail, I commence with an analysis of the formal characteristics in this moment of divine suffering as I have done previously. Those questions with which I formerly isolated and examined the principal formal characteristics of the first divine wound function similarly here with respect to divine travail. (1) What is the relationship between divine vulnerability and activity in the first stage of divine self-sacrifice? (2) To which divine role or operation does the symbol of divine travail refer? (3) Toward which subjects does divine travail direct itself, or
10 Divine Travail: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: In divine travail, the operations and interactions of the three dimensions of divine
caritasproduce divine travail’s material character, but involve even greater complexity than in the two stages of the previous divine wound, principally due to the self-externalization or self-concentration of the divine presence within the creation, through God’s becoming-human as Jesus of Nazareth. Strictly speaking, then, I should examine divine travail by combining analyses that followboththe pattern of my analyses of human life as love in terms ofcaritasandcupiditas andthe pattern of my previous analyses of divine life as love.¹ While aspects of
11 Divine Agony: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: I initiate this analysis of divine agony, as I have in each interpretation of the previous stages in divine suffering, with an exposition of the formal character of divine agony. Furthermore, once again, I submit the same four principal questions to this stage in the Christian symbol of divine suffering, the answers to which yield the formal character or structure of divine agony. (1) What is the relationship between divine vulnerability and this more passive stage of divine self-sacrifice? (2) To which operation or role in the divine life does the symbol of divine agony refer? (3) Toward which subjects
12 Divine Agony: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: As the second stage of divine self-sacrifice, the material character of divine agony closely resembles the material character of divine travail. God has lost the equilibrium between the agapic and erotic dimensions of divine love in divine travail, however, as divine travail progressed into divine agony. Although God’s erotic
caritascontinues to motivate divine agapiccaritastoward the divine philial goal, during the human’s victimization of the divine lover, the human disequilibrates the operations between these two dimensions of love in divine life. Consequently, the agapic dimension of divine love, with its predominantly self-sacrifi-cial character, assumes the leading role in
Epilogue: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: While I have concluded my exposition of Christian attestations to divine agony, perhaps the most negative though perhaps not the most perplexing moment in the Christian symbol of divine suffering, I acknowledge that I have left many areas unexplored and other areas more under-developed than I would prefer. Specifically, I would have preferred to develop more extensively my exposition of the features of God’s active resistance in the second divine wound, features that already provide the basis for diverse communities of genuine solidarity with those who suffer oppression, suppression, repression, abuse, marginalization, and victimization. Nevertheless, the Christian symbol of divine
6 Luther and Asian Eucharistic Theology from:
Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: What shapes and characterizes Luther’s ecclesiology is his theology of Word and Sacraments. In this chapter we meet Luther’s eucharistic theology in relation to Roman Catholic teaching. Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper, when seen in a time-related and eschatological dimension, will engage the spirituality of ancestral rites that has been controversial until the present in Asian churches and theologies. Would it be possible to deepen Luther’s theology of the Lord’s Supper in terms of his keen insight into Jesus’ descent into hell? If we perceive a real presence of Jesus Christ in the Eucharist in relation to Christ’s total
7 Re-visitation of Martin Luther and Karl Barth in Interreligious Dialogue from:
Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: The Baar Statement of the World Council Churches (1990) encouraged Christian theology to improve concern about other religions and take issue with interreligious dialogue in exploration of the theology of religious pluralism. The theology of religions has become more and more attractive, but also controversial in its encounter with postmodern thought and hermeneutic theory. In the circle of theology of religions, Martin Luther and Karl Barth have undergone intensive criticism for their conservative-evangelical attitude toward world religions. Barth’s understanding of other religions is often criticized as a model advocating the conservative position, the content of which would imply an exclusive
8 Conclusion from:
Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: In this writing I am interested in articulating a hermeneutical theology of interfaith dialogue in engagement with this issue of suffering by interpreting and actualizing Luther’s theology as it encounters (Mahayana) Buddhist wisdom. According to Hans Urs von Balthasar, a theological aesthetics begins with the expression that God’s glory appears. Thus, God’s beauty leads the beholder out of the previous existence into a participation in God’s mission in Christ in the presence of the Spirit.¹
Afterword: from:
Martin Luther and Buddhism
Abstract: Luther’s theological aesthetics of God’s glory in Christ’s suffering love lays a basis for reshaping and redirecting motives of Asian post-confessional theology toward a different understanding and transformation of Luther. When Luther encounters a postmodern context, he can best be understood by challenging and transcending him. His doctrine of justification, theology of the cross, Trinity, law and gospel, eucharistic theology, and two kingdoms theory among others are seen at the point of the death, resurrection and reconciliation of the crucified Christ, the scope and reach of which is of inclusive, universal character allowing and tolerating other ways. If aesthetics are
Conclusion: from:
Facing the Other
Abstract: Three concluding judgments can be made based on the study of the place of the body in Karol Wojtyla/John Paul II and Levinas. First, that the fruitful dialogue between John Paul and Levinas has been largely overlooked. Second, John Paul and Levinas’ approaches to the body are discordant (more on this below). Third, John Paul’s account of the body is a positive theological development that is made clearer and enhanced by reading Levinas. In consideration of these three judgments, a way is opened up that indicates how a theological approach to the body can be fruitfully developed. In fact, John
Book Title: Contextual Theology-The Drama of Our Times
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Matheny Paul Duane
Abstract: For centuries, the global understanding of Church has been shaped by Western theological imperatives. Yet today, the decline of institutional religion in the West, and the extraordinary growth of the Church of the global South mean that a radical movement beyond such theologies is required. In this book, Paul Matheny argues that the Church would benefit by becoming more contextualized and less Western. Contextual Theology is an attempt to address that issue and to examine how a reassessment of the relationship of the Gospel to cultural context can advance this critical and necessary development. Through an accessible and critical approach, Matheny considers the historical background to contextual theology. In the same way, he aims to show how to use contextual methods to think theologically and act missiologically in different cultural contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf9rs
2 Contextual Methods within the Theological Processes of Christian Churches from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: Missiologists, such as Lamin Sanneh and Andrew Walls, have made it clear that the migratory nature of Christianity is evident today in a dramatic way. We are facing a new Christianity centered geographically, socially, culturally, economically, and politically in environments unfamiliar to the West, such that our theological work is called upon to think creatively in terms of the ideas and cultural life, the beliefs and practices of the churches of the new center.¹ The reality of a new Christianity in the offing is the stimulus for a commitment to an ecumenical and ecclesial theology and praxis of mission. It
3 The Helpfulness of Theology in the Life of the Church from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: The rise of the “new Christianity” has led Christian theologians to retrieve insights within Christian traditions that are helpful as the faith takes root and forms new and vital communities and practices. According to these traditions, good theology is not a search for universal truths that can be applied in all contexts and times, but rather an engagement with the lives of peoples and communities. The eschatological framework of Christian thinking and the centrality of theological theories of God’s grace ensure the openness of Christian thinking to new contexts. The creation of new Christian communities is a social and cultural
6 Theology, Both Local and Ecumenical: from:
Contextual Theology
Abstract: Historical and social realities provide textual meaning with its temporal and cultural limits and possibilities. We experience our world because we are part of a world. For our faith to have meaning it must be meaningful in a particular historical, cultural, and social context. The question of whether and how the meaning of the beliefs and practices of Christian faith can be translated into those that share the same truth in other cultures becomes acute. For the claims of Christian conviction to be true they must be commensurable. All this leads to an assertion: once the faith has been shared,
Book Title: Christian Ethics as Witness-Barth's Ethics for a World at Risk
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): HADDORFF DAVID
Abstract: Christian ethics is less a system of principles, rules, or even virtues, and more of a free and open-ended responsible witness to God's gracious action to be with and for others and the world. Postmodernity has left us with the risky uncertainty of knowing and doing the good. It also leaves us with the global risks of political violence and terrorism, economic globalization and financial crisis, and environmental destruction and global climate change. How should Christians respond to these problems? Haddorf creatively explores how Christian ethics is best understood as a witness to God's action, bringing together two of his interests, Christian social ethics and social theory, and the theology and ethics of Karl Barth. Although demanding and sometimes uncertain after postmodern changes, christian ethics enable humankind to remain God's witnesses of love and care for the future, even in a world at risk.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgf9s9
CHAPTER ONE Theological Ethics in Transition from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter looks at the conversation between theology and ethics in its historical transition from modernity to postmodernity. The first part of the chapter discusses how the relationship of theology and ethics leads to an inherent tension within the strategies of theological and Christian ethics. The second part provides a general summary of the characteristics of modernity and its affect on modern theological ethics, with particular references to Rene Descartes, Immanuel Kant, and Friedrich Schleiermacher. Two of the most important characteristics of modern theology and ethics are the emphasis on
poesisandpraxis, which leads to two important rami-fications, the
CHAPTER THREE Barth’s Social Ethics: from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In the last chapter, we saw how Barth, in his early writings, responded theologically and practically to the events around him during 1910s and 1920s. Reversing the dominant structure of modern ethics, which attempts to secure human freedom by separating humanity from God, Barth saw clearly that human freedom depends upon God’s freedom to act
in relatio. Thus, his task, in these early writings, was not to simply contrast God’s action and our action as the way to preserve human autonomy, but instead attempts to demonstrate how divine agency establishes, rather than negates, human agency. This theme more fully emerges
CHAPTER FOUR Social Theory and Postmodernity from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: The last two chapters have demonstrated the fact that the church, as a witnessing community, cannot rise above and live outside its surrounding society and culture. In his 1924 essay “Church and Culture,” for example, Barth writes that the church cannot give witness without conversing with the “actual political and economic standards of its own age. Throughout its own course, the Church swims along in the stream of culture” (
TC: 351). This does not imply, of course, that the church ought to accommodate itself to its surrounding culture, only that the church cannot “free itself even partially” from society and
CHAPTER FIVE From Modern to Postmodern Ethics from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter shifts our focus from social theory to ethical philosophy, showing how it too has been shaped by the transition from modernity to postmodernity. In chapters 1–2, we introduced this theological transition by looking at the shift from Kant and Schleiermacher to Barth. In the last chapter, we discussed characteristics of postmodernity as understood within current social theory, and concluded that social theory, by itself, cannot provide an answer to the problem of moral epistemology in social ethics. Although social theory makes positive contributions to our understanding of the social world we inhabit, it fails to provide a
CHAPTER SIX Witness and the Word of God from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In the last two chapters, we have examined two central responses to the postmodern situation, and concluded that neither theory, as such, can tell us with certainty what the
goodis and how we ought to practice it in the world. The crisis of postmodernity affects both the “supply” and “demand” of ethics, that is of moral knowledge and action, of truth and agency, and embodying and doing the good. Without a coherent moral ontology there is no coherent understanding of moral realism; we cannot have a coherent view of the good because we cannot account for the moral structure
CHAPTER SEVEN Witness and Christian Moral Judgment from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: Ethics as Christian witness begins with God’s action to be “with us” and “for us” in Jesus Christ. In this event, God has given Christians the
freedomto respond, as witnesses, to this objective reality both individually and collectively within the church. This leads to a particular dialectical understanding of ethical judgment and action. That is, Christians give witness by both standing against the various powers that oppress humanity and standing with and for others, the church, and the world. In chapter two, we saw how Barth’s dialectical thought during theRömerbriefperiod often began with the No of transcendent
CHAPTER NINE Witness and Public Ethics: from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter concludes this section exploring themes in Barth’s theological ethics in the context of contemporary Christian ethics. We have mostly been concerned with theoretical rather than practical issues, thereby looking at issues like moral knowledge, agency, and judgment. These various theoretical issues that Barth began struggling with in the early twentieth century still remain with us a century later. After a period of great liberal optimism and growing internationalism came the crisis of World War I. This horrific event challenged Barth and others of his generation to rethink strategies of Christian ethics, both in method and in practice. Central
CHAPTER TEN Witness and Christian Responsibility from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In this last section of the book, we carry through in practice what was developed in theory, namely that Christian ethics is “responsible witness of the Word of God” serving both “God and men” (
CDIV/3: 609). In each movement, there is a corresponding dialectic of God’s initiating action and human response. In chapters 7–8, we saw how the Yes of moral knowledge of the good, human agency, and moral judgment is followed by the No against the nothingness of sin, death, evil, and the powers. We are now able to discuss further how God’s reconciling Yes provides the
CHAPTER ELEVEN Political Witness: from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: In the next three chapters, we carry through in a practical way Christian responsible witness as social ethics in political, economic, and environmental practice. In the last chapter, we focused on responsible witness to the other, the church, and the world. In each case, there is a dialectical movement between synthesis and diastasis, between the homogeneity and heterogeneity of church and world. As demonstrated earlier, the church as the “inner circle” is a witness to the “outer circle” of the civil community demonstrating how it, as secular witness, can affirm social ethical practice that is free and open-ended as it
CHAPTER TWELVE Economic Witness: from:
Christian Ethics as Witness
Abstract: This chapter follows the same pattern at the last chapter, but the focus shifts from political to economic witness. In so doing, we look at
CDIV/2, where Jesus Christ embodies love and overcomes the sin of sloth, leading to “upbuilding” of the Christian community. Although the sins of pride and falsehood could equally apply to the power of mammon, this chapter correlates the sin of sloth with structural power of mammon. So, in dialectical fashion, sloth is juxtaposed with love, and mammon is juxtaposed with justice. Just as political witness leads to the practice of peace in the civil
Foreword from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: This synthesis pivots round the concept of “gift.” This is no arbitrary, idiosyncratic choice on Fr. López’s part, because today, to a remarkable degree, much academic and practical thinking is converging round this theme. Ever since Marcel Mauss, anthropologists, sociologists, and historians have come more and more to realize that human society as such
I. Gift’s Originary Experience from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: Originary experience opens up a seldom pursued but uniquely fruitful path for pondering the form of the unity of being. In part because of the troubled history of the concept, and partly because of the contemporary use of the term “experience,” originary experience may seem a doubtful starting point. “Experience,” in fact, has been described as the “most deceitful” and “most obscure” of terms.¹ Nevertheless, if by originary experience we mean the engagement of the whole of our being with the whole of reality and with God, who is their innermost and transcendent center, originary experience, despite its difficulties, can
III. Reception and Reciprocity from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: The response of wonder before God’s communication of esse deepens when we become aware that God gives the human person, along with the capacity to stand on his own, the capacity to act out of his own being (
autexousia).¹ When God gives, he gives because he wants to share his giving. In fact, it would not be a real giving if God did not allow the concrete singular being to participate in his capacity to give, in his own freedom. The divine creating act goes so far that Aquinas claims that the human person is the cause of himself.² Gregory
VI. Gift’s Unifying Memory from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: Our attempt to understand the unity of being in terms of gift so far has brought to light the primal character of gift. Gift is a primal, a principle, inasmuch as it is a permanent source. The positivity of concrete singular beings suggested by originary experience rests on the permanent, personal principle of originating and ordering, a Father whose face we are invited to see in his beloved, Incarnate Son. Gift is also a primal because it indicates “first-ness.” According to this second sense of “primal,” being’s primordial unity is an ever-new beginning. Each concrete singular being is created; it
Envoi from:
Gift and the Unity of Being
Abstract: Contemplating the mystery of birth and our own originary experience invited us to acknowledge that the nature and unity of the singular being is gift, given to itself in order to recognize and adhere to the mystery of God, the
agapicgiver. The existence of the concrete singular reflects at every level— from the dual unity of its being to its action— its constitutive being-gift. Failing to heed the call to affirm himself and the world as gift by gratuitously recognizing that God is everything, the created singular human being attempted to grasp at a greater delight by conceiving himself
Book Title: Allegorizing History-The Venerable Bede, Figural Exegesis and Historical Theory
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Furry Timothy J.
Abstract: What is history? This question can be taken in many ways, including radically skeptical ones, but in 'Allegorizing History' Timothy J. Furry asks the questions not with that axe to grind but because it has become clear to him, through study of Bede and other ancient Christians, that history is not so simple. To be sure, many, if not all scholars, know that thanks to the work of postmodern philosophers and twentieth-century historical theorists like R.G. Collingwood, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Hayden White. In this work, Furry shows that there are competing notions and purposes of historical practice, more specifically between Bede and the scholars who have recently studied him. Moreover, he explaisn why this difference matters and what implications result from such competing notions and practices of history, especially in the exegesis of Scripture as well as how exegesis also influences conceptions of history. Following a tradition of historians and theologians who have sought to blur the lines between theology and other disciplines, Furry explores how, if biblical exegesis was not an isolated discipline for ancient and medieval Christians, then its effects should be seen in other arenas. His argument here is that one of these arenas or disciplines is history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfb0w
Introduction from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: What is history? This question can be taken in many ways, including radically skeptical ones, but I ask it not with that axe to grind. Instead, I ask it because it has become clear to me, through my study of Bede and other ancient Christians, that history is not so simple. To be sure, many, if not all scholars, know that thanks to the work of postmodern philosophers and twentieth-century historical theorists like R. G. Collingwood, Hans-Georg Gadamer, and Hayden White. In what follows, I will show that there are competing notions and purposes of historical practice, more specifically between
2 Can History Be Figural? from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: According to recent secondary literature, Bede is most famous for his
Ecclesiastical History of the English People. Regardless of how subsequent generations have remembered him, Bede actually thought his primary task was to comment on the sacred page. In his conclusion to theHistoria, Bede offers the clearest picture of what his life was actually like and how he understood his vocation.
3 Interpreting Genesis: from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: The preceding chapter showed that Bede did not figurally exegete events in the English Church’s history, despite frequent opportunities to do so. I will argue in this chapter that Bede’s commentary on Genesis and how he reads the creation of time, history, and the world displays a theological and philosophical ambiguity that factors into how Bede conceives of God’s action or providential caring for history and humanity. Using
In genesimas my point of departure, I am following Charles Jones who describes Bede’s commentary as “God’s Word on Nature and Grace.”¹ In order to highlight what I think are Bede’s
4 Anachronism and the Status of the Past in Bede’s Historia and Figural Exegesis from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: Before transitioning to the subject for this chapter, a brief recounting of my argument to this point seems appropriate. Along with summarizing contemporary scholarship on Bede’s
Historiaand exegesis, Chapter 1 alluded to the fact that reading Bede in light of modern historical methods and presumptions results in distortion. Part of that discussion revolved around the status of the past and its relationship to the present. The work of Charles Jones made such issues come to the fore in my historiography, specifically Jones’s application of the categories of realist and romantic to Bede, and Jan Davidse applied such concerns to
5 Bede and Frank Ankersmit: from:
Allegorizing History
Abstract: Up to this point, I have tried to show how Bede’s practice of history was deeply theological yet ran into some difficulties that someone like Augustine was able to avoid when he came to the literal sense of Genesis 1. One of these problems revolves around how language refers in its literal and historical usage. Recall that Bede read the days in Genesis 1 as literal 24-hour days, despite Augustine’s unwillingness to affirm such a reading in his literal commentary on Genesis. For Bede the literal and the allegorical were in tension with each other; when one moves to allegory,
2 Being Human, Becoming Human: from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: John de Gruchy’s work, both in his essay in this volume and in previous publications,¹ already suggests that Bonhoeffer’s theology is best characterized as a Christian humanism. De Gruchy seeks to recover Christian humanism as an alternative cultural stance to scientific fundamentalism on the one hand and to religious fundamentalism on the other,² especially when the latter conflates religion and nationalism.³ Let me say from the outset that I fundamentally agree with de Gruchy’s desire to affirm a humanist identity for Christians and that Bonhoeffer is indeed a rich resource for doing so. As the title of my contribution suggests,
3 Bonhoeffer’s Theology and Economic Humanism: from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Frick Peter
Abstract: The aim of this essay is to examine Bonhoeffer’s theology vis-à-vis economics. Admittedly, at first glance, this may appear as a rather farfetched idea, since Bonhoeffer was neither trained nor known as an economist and has left us no systematic treatment of his thought on that subject. Yet, there is the curious fact that Bonhoeffer’s entire adult life unfolded within an inexorable economic downward spiral. The height of that spiral was for Bonhoeffer in all probability the granting of his doctoral degree in theology in 1927. The bourgeois élan of the Bonhoeffer family, embedded as it was in intellectual elitism
4 Sociality, Discipleship, and Worldly Theology in Bonhoeffer’s Christian Humanism from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Green Clifford J.
Abstract: A striking phenomenon of the vast secondary literature about Dietrich Bonhoeffer is that so little of it tries to address his theology as a whole. What are its fundamental patterns of thought? What are their enduring characteristics? What are new developments? What drives its movement? When we look at Bonhoeffer’s older contemporaries in Protestant theology in the twentieth century—Barth and Tillich, for example—there is a fairly broad consensus about their work read as a whole. There is no such consensus about Bonhoeffer. Indeed, while early interpreters were bold to advance theses about the nature of Bonhoeffer’s theology as
7 The Christological Presuppositions of Discipleship from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Yoder John H.
Abstract: The body of teaching and practice among the earliest Anabaptists that we have come to call “discipleship” had at least three kinds of rootage, of unequal genetic immediacy. There was the heritage of late-medieval Jesus-legalism,² which had been espoused most widely in Franciscan and Waldensian forms, most recently and firmly among the Czech Brethren. Here the accent lay upon determining the status of Jesus’s teachings, especially in the Sermon on the Mount, with the clear understanding that, if they have the status of law, they then are to be obeyed.³ A direct and causal linkage of this tradition with the
9 Con-Formation with Jesus Christ: from:
Being Human, Becoming Human
Author(s) Dahill Lisa E.
Abstract: What do we learn from Dietrich Bonhoeffer about being and becoming human? That question animating this volume of essays pushes deep into Christian anthropology, ecclesiology, social analysis, and Christology—that is to say, it invites us into the territory of the
body. To assert that the questions at the heart of Bonhoeffer’s thinking and witness are inherently matters of reflective Christianembodimentin the world may seem so clear as not to warrant comment; obviously humans are constituted as bodies, and anything we might say about our humanity and life together in the world must take account of that fact.
Introduction from:
Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: In the past several decades, the theological interpretation of Scripture has emerged as an identifiable discipline within systematic theology.¹ The theological interpretation of Scripture emerged as an attempt to bridge the ugly ditch between biblical studies and systematic theology which has been dug since the Enlightenment. In response to this modernist divorce between theological disciplines, the theological interpretation of Scripture attempts to explain how Scripture functions as the “soul of sacred theology,” by articulating how Scripture operates as a locus of God’s ongoing self-communicative action, and why scriptural reading must be primarily an activity performed by the church and for
CHAPTER 1 God’s Use of Scripture for Self-Communication: from:
Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: On first read, Vanhoozer and de Lubac would seem a most unfit choice of dialogue partners of the topic of God’s use of Scripture. Vanhoozer insists on the sufficiency of the literal sense, while de Lubac insists on the indispensability of the spiritual sense. Vanhoozer develops an elaborate proposal for God’s authorship based on speech-act theory, while de Lubac largely ignores divine authorship and instead focuses attention on God’s sacramental presence in Scripture. Vanhoozer focuses on Scripture’s determinate meaning, while de Lubac focuses on Scripture’s infinite meaning. Yet what the two have in common is their persistent emphasis on God’s
CHAPTER 2 Vanhoozer’s Covenantal Ontology and de Lubac’s Sacramental Ontology: from:
Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: In the last chapter we examined the way in which Vanhoozer and de Lubac both seek to show that God’s use of Scripture is the foundational norm for all subsequent hermeneutical reflection. God’s use of precisely this collection of texts for self-mediation to readers is what makes Scripture unique, and all rules for reading should be developed from this assumption.Vanhoozer’s understanding of God’s speaking action through a clear, determinate canonical sense of Scripture, and de Lubac’s understanding of God’s speaking action through a three-fold spiritual sense of Scripture both arise from the same desire to articulate God’s present speaking action
CHAPTER 3 God’s Use of Scripture and Church in the Economy of Redemption from:
Reading Scripture to Hear God
Abstract: In the last chapter we saw that Vanhoozer envisions God’s communicative action taking covenantal form in the Scriptures which mediate Christ to the church. We also saw that de Lubac envisions Christ’s self-communication taking sacramental form in Scripture, church, and Eucharist, so that each builds the other sacramental realities. Without leaving the discussion of ontology aside, this chapter will focus specifi-cally on the relationship between Scripture and church in the economy of redemption. The relationship between Scripture and church has been a significant issue in Catholic and Protestant interpretations of Scripture, and it remains the area of greatest disagreement between
Book Title: Making Memory-Jewish and Christian Explorations in Monument, Narrative, and Liturgy
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Vincent Alana M.
Abstract: The twentieth century has been called a "century of horror". Proof of that, designation can be found in the vast and ever-increasing volume of scholarly work on violence, trauma, memory, and history across diverse academic disciplines. This book demonstrates not only the ways in which the wars of the twentieth century have altered theological engagement and religious practice, but also the degree to which religious ways of thinking have shaped the way we construct historical narratives. Drawing on diverse sources - from the Hebrew Bible to Commonwealth war graves, from Greek tragedy to post-Holocaust theology - Alana M. Vincent probes the intersections between past and present, memory and identity, religion and nationality. The result is a book that defies categorization and offers no easy answers, but instead pursues an agenda of theological realism, holding out continued hope for the restoration of the world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cgfbg4
Prelude from:
Making Memory
Abstract: This is a book about living with the past—not about memory itself
per se, but about the process of constructing cultural memory, about the negotiation, implicit or explicit, between what is remembered, transmuted into narrative, handed on from generation to generation, and what is forgotten, unspoken, overlooked. My underlying assumption is that the understanding of the past generated by such a process plays an essential role in shaping attitudes and actions of individuals and societies in the present. This understanding (“memory”) is at times difficult to distinguish from the process of its formation (“memorialization”); the former is often the
FOUR Making Memory Solid: from:
Making Memory
Abstract: Montgomery’s¹ fiction provides a useful window into the way that practices and understandings of death, mourning, and commemoration shifted from before the First World War to the period immediately following the war. However, the view from that window is necessarily limited: it the perspective of one woman, close to the events about which she writes. However influential
Rilla of Inglesidehas been in terms of carrying and constructing the memory of small-town Island life during the First World War, and in the minds of young girls (the intended audience of theAnne of Green Gablesseries) throughout the world, it
Interlude from:
Making Memory
Abstract: When the Second World War broke out in 1939, less than three years after he had returned to Canada, Allward reacted with panic and rage. He deluged the Department of National Defence with telegrams begging for reports and demanding that the memorial be sandbagged against aerial bombardment. As the weeks passed and he received no replies, he retreated into an inner landscape of great bleakness, pacing the house in the middle of the night, imagining the worst [. . .]
Coda from:
Making Memory
Abstract: This conclusion is not simple or satisfactory. It may seem to be barely a conclusion at all; this book, much like the two novels discussed in this chapter, may appear to terminate abruptly,
en routeto a destination but never actually arriving. Unsatisfactory as it may be, however, I remain convinced that this suspension is the most appropriate response to the material addressed in this book.
Introduction from:
Religion and Violence
Abstract: In social and cultural milieus across the globe, religion and violence are often linked dramatically by the actions of violent religious agents, and intellectually by academics, commentators, and authors who seek to understand these actions.¹ The link between violent struggle and the Koran has become commonplace in Western media since the events of September 11, 2001. More broadly, diverse groups and individuals across the religious spectrum have been involved in violent actions: so-called Christian groups blow up abortion clinics for the purpose of killing health professionals involved with acts of abortion; Jewish fundamentalist groups defend militarily their perceived religious right
3 Lonergan, Religion, and Violence from:
Religion and Violence
Abstract: The insights presented by Girard, Taylor, Jones, and Juergensmeyer have provided us with enough evidence to support the proposition that some forms of religious expression both motivate and justify the violent actions of religious agents. However, the survey of these authors’ works also leads me to assert that it is not enough simply to demonstrate empirically that people are motivated to commit violent acts by religious images, symbols, and doctrines. It is also important to dialectically engage religious images, symbols, and doctrines so as to judge whether they are conducive to authentic living, whether they are authentic understandings of a
8 A Dialectical Engagement with Demonization from:
Religion and Violence
Abstract: The third symbol presented by Juergensmeyer and others for understanding the link between violence and religion is the phenomenon of demonization. In this chapter, I will argue that without a heuristic account of evil, people will be unable to discern why demonization continues the cycle of violence. We will see that social exclusion and humiliation provide for the emergence and survival of demonizing processes, while acts of dehumanization escalate those processes to the point where those demonized are robbed of their subjectivity. Emerging out of situations where there is an imbalance of power, I will demonstrate the role of
ressentiment
9 A Dialectical Engagement with Warrior Empowerment from:
Religion and Violence
Abstract: Juergensmeyer’s fourth symbol for understanding the link between violence and religion is warrior empowerment, which joins two interrelated aspects: the practice and code of the warrior, and the empowering of the warrior. Although Juergensmeyer’s title chapter uses the term “warrior” to structure his analysis, he does not use the term in the body of his writings, preferring to refer to “fighters” and “soldiers.”¹ However, there is evidence that the term “warrior” has been used in communities, for example, the
mujahidor holy warrior is a key figure in Islamic warfare. Holy warriors are called toinghimasor to throwing themselves
3 Hypothetical Structure of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: On the basis of my previous preparatory steps, this chapter supplies a third, briefer, and final orientation for interaction with the Christian symbol of divine suffering. In one sense, this chapter initiates that interaction, since it provides a hypothetical overview of the symbol’s structure. In another sense, however, this chapter retains its orienting character, in that it does not yet
fullybegin to interpret actual Christian attestations to divine suffering. Rather, in this chapter, I offer an overview of the symbol’s structure as a hypothesis that I will demonstrate throughout all three volumes of this work. The present chapter serves,
Introduction to Part Two: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: In part two, the most complex transitional steps emerge in the movement of this study into the more concrete analyses of this Christian symbol. In the chapters that follow, I will examine this symbol’s two principal presuppositions, both of which taken together supply part two of this book with its title: Presuppositions of the Christian Symbol of Divine Suffering. Nevertheless, a moment of abstraction remains. I have drawn these two presuppositions from testimonies to divine suffering in which they remain embedded as the conditions of possibility for divine suffering.
4 Divine Lover: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: This chapter constitutes the first stage in my analyses of the first presupposition of the Christian symbol of divine suffering. I repeat my formulation of this presupposition:
The God whose life is love limits the divine self in God’s creative activity; or, as the creator who is love, God limits the divine self as God creates. This first stage of my analysis works on the basis of an abstraction of divine life or being from divine activity, in order to clarify the characteristic ways in which this symbol envisions the actualization of divine love in divine creative activity. In the
5 Divine Lover: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: I now shift from considering God’s being and activity, as methodologically abstracted from one another, to discussing divine love’s actualization in God’s creative activity.1 Previously, I have surveyed characteristics and dimensions of God’s being as love through attestations to divine activity in the history of Jesus the Nazarene. The present chapter examines the character of God’s creative activity, as determined by the divine being, in order to disclose the meaning of the first presupposition for the Christian symbol of divine suffering as well as to illumine the basis upon which to analyze this symbol’s second presupposition. Thus, I proceed in
Introduction to Division Two: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: My analysis of this symbol’s first presupposition disclosed the implicit character of the second presupposition in the first presupposition. As a consequence, that disclosure requires an analysis of the second and implied presupposition, in order to comprehend as satisfactorily as possible even the first presupposition. Having begun with an analysis of this second presupposition would have required the same procedure in reverse. The elegant and fertile dialectical network between this symbol’s first and second presuppositions, as a result, begins to appear in all of its complexity through the present exposition. Although herein I continue to
treatthese two presuppositionsdistinctly
6 Beloved Human: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: This chapter develops the first half of an exposition of the second major presupposition of the Christian symbol of divine suffering. As I have mentioned already, most specifically, this presupposition takes the following form:
God has created human life or being, through the actualization of the divine being as love in God’s self-limiting creative activity, in the image of God with the being or life of love. Working on the basis of the abstraction of being or life from its actualization, this chapter will identify and analyze the formal and material structures of the human as the image of God,
7 Beloved Human: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: So far, my analyses have identified both formally and materially the structural characteristics of human being in this anthropological presupposition of the Christian symbol of divine suffering, characteristics of authentic human being or human being
Epilogue: from:
God's Wounds
Abstract: In this study, I have aimed both to establish an approach to the Christian symbol of divine suffering and to inaugurate the first stages of an interpretation of this symbol through an analysis of its two principal presuppositions. The dialectical network between these two presuppositions constitutes the symbol of divine vulnerability: the symbolic condition of possibility for all forms or modes of actual divine suffering, according to the Christian symbol of divine suffering.
Introduction: from:
Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: A theological concept of the church’s mission and its ethical responsibility cannot be properly understood and practiced apart from God’s justice for those who suffer in the world. The God who forgives is the One who demands justice. The church is a community of witness to the universality of the gospel, especially in regard to the fragile, the voiceless, and the vulnerable. Economic justice is an indispensable part of the church’s responsibility for society. An integration of theology with the study of economics takes on a new and major significance given the reality of devastation that economic globalization has brought.
5 Sociocritical Dialectics in the Shift from Alienation to Emancipation from:
Church and Ethical Responsibility in the Midst of World Economy
Abstract: This chapter is a study of the limitations and contributions of Karl Marx in the economic field. I shall deal with basic elements in Marx’s political economy and his method of historical materialism in reference to Hegel, because Marx’s thought cannot be properly understood without Hegel’s concept of labor and alienation in civil society. Marx’s critique of religion implies his negative evaluation of the role of church mission in the domestic-economic context, as well as in the colonial context. As we have previously seen, Marx’s critique of mission and colonialism and his analysis of the Christian character of capital accumulation
Book Title: Vatican II-Expériences canadiennes – Canadian experiences
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Routhier Gilles
Abstract: The Second Vatican Council (1961-1965) was one of the most significant religious events of the twentieth-century. In Canada, it was part of a moment of unprecedented cultural and societal change, causing Canadian Catholics to reexamine the church's place and mission in the world. For four years, Canadian Catholic bishops met with their peers from around the globe to reflect on and debate the pressing issues facing the church. This bilingual volume explores the interpretation and reception of Vatican II in Canada, looking at many issues including the role of the media, the reactions of other Christians, the contributions of Canadian participants, the council's impact on religious practice and its contribution to the growth of inter-religious dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch77hx
Introduction (English) from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Routhier Gilles
Abstract: The Second Vatican Council (1962–65) is recognized as the most significant religious event of the twentieth century, having a global influence. Its importance is no less significant when viewed from a Canadian perspective. In fact, this was the first time that a substantial number of Canadian bishops took part in an ecumenical council. Moreover, the Second Vatican Council was held at a moment when Canadian society was beginning to undergo a period of profound change, at a time when the Catholic Church in Canada was called to an unprecedented transformation due to its changing place within this evolving culture
Le concile Vatican II dans la région de la Beauce: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Pelchat Marc
Abstract: Nous disposons déjà, sur la couverture de presse de Vatican II, d’un bon nombre d’études qui nous éclairent sur la diffusion des idées et la réception des enseignements ou des décisions du concile¹. Cependant, les études réalisées sur la couverture de l’événement conciliaire par des publications hebdomadaires en région sont beaucoup plus rares. Dans ce dernier cas, le regard porté sur l’événement, dans la durée, révèle une attention plus particulière à certains thèmes, dans les limites d’une population précise, possédant ses caractéristiques propres. L’importance du journalisme hebdomadaire en regard de la diffusion des idées auprès d’une population régionale ne saurait
Deux événements reliés au concile dans les médias québécois: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Pagé Pierre C.
Abstract: C’est toujours par l’image médiatique que les faits religieux d’une société rejoignent le grand public, qu’il s’agisse de la population chrétienne active en Église ou de la population québécoise toutes sensibilités religieuses confondues. Au début des années soixante, la composition socio-démographique du Québec évolue rapidement, et la culture religieuse se modifie au rythme de la culture publique commune. Il est pertinent de jeter un regard critique sur deux événements qui ont constitué à cette époque des moments exceptionnels par rapport à l’activité régulière de la vie de l’Église au Québec. Ces deux faits médiatiques représentent des ruptures dans l’image collective
“Hold onto Your Hats”: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Hayes Alan L.
Abstract: The Second Ecumenical Council of the Vatican had a profound impact on Canadian Anglicans in two general ways: it changed their ecumenical landscape forever, and it helped guide farreaching changes in their denominational identity. As for the change in ecumenical landscape, Vatican II led Anglicans and Roman Catholics in Canada to cordial and close relationships with surprising speed. Within ten years of the opening session of Vatican II, the Canadian arms of the two communions were co-operating in such ventures as dialogue groups, local collaborations of various kinds, the Toronto School of Theology, and inter-church coalitions for social justice. As
Inspiration after Dei Verbum from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Spatafora Andrea
Abstract: The fiftieth anniversary of the calling of the Second Vatican Council by Pope John XXIII is an appropriate occasion to assess its impact on the Church and on its theology. This article will examine the developments in the Church’s doctrine of inspiration since the council and will focus principally on the contribution of a Canadian exegete, Walter Vogels.¹ The study will begin with an overview of the origins and development of the concept of inspired Scripture up to Vatican II, followed by a brief presentation of the Dogmatic Constitution on Divine Revelation,
Dei Verbum’s treatment of inspiration, and a brief
Cardinal Paul-Émile Léger and the Establishment of the Mixed Commissionon Revelation from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Schelkens Karim
Abstract: This article investigates the role of one of Canada’s most prominent voices at the Second Vatican Council, that of Cardinal Paul-Émile Léger, from material found in several archival collections.² In recent years, several publications have already documented Léger’s conciliar activities, making clear that Léger was—in the context of Vatican II—omnipresent.³ Therefore, this contribution simply cannot study the full scope of Léger’s actions, let alone the entire story of his involvement in the council’s revelation debate, on which it will focus. On that debate too, much research has already been conducted. It remains a
communis opinioamong Vatican II
The Council Diary of Metropolitan Maxim Hermaniuk and Turning Points in the History of the Catholic Church: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Galadza Peter
Abstract: Allow me to begin on a note of thanks to the organizers of the conference upon which this collection is based. If not for the conference I would have remained ignorant of certain important moments in the history of my own Church, the Ukrainian Catholic.¹ Before outlining how I plan to structure my analysis of the Council Diaries of Metropolitan Archbishop Maxim Hermaniuk, allow me to share some facts that illustrate this ignorance, and then, more importantly, suggest the significance of this lack of knowledge. I do so only to indicate that in some parts of the Church “the state
Le synode extraordinaire de 1985: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Racine Jacques
Abstract: Revivre en quelque manière cette atmosphère extraordinaire de communion ecclésiale qui caractérise
“A Great Historic Day”: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Skira Jaroslav Z.
Abstract: This essay will broadly examine some of the late Metropolitan Maxim Hermaniuk (1911–96) of Winnipeg’s contributions to the preparatory stages and sessions of the Second Vatican Council¹ through his comments on his experiences on the Preparatory Theological Commission, the Secretariat for Christian Unity, and in actual council debates. This research is largely based on selected passages of his unpublished council diaries and his work on two conciliar pastoral letters of the Synod of the Ukrainian Catholic Bishops.² In these diaries the late metropolitan dealt with a number of themes, such as relations with the Orthodox churches, interreligious dialogue, sobornicity
La réception de Vatican II dans la formation catéchétique au Québec from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Brodeur Raymond
Abstract: Cette recherche s’inscrit dans l’œuvre novatrice entreprise depuis quelques années par Gilles Routhier autour de l’herméneutique relative à l’événement et aux productions de Vatican II. L’angle de travail privilégié ici traite des apports de Vatican II sur le développement de la catéchèse et, de manière plus précise, sur ce qui touche à la formation d’une nouvelle génération de catéchètes. Cette étude contient d’emblée de nombreuses vertus, car elle concerne à la fois la façon de concevoir la mission première de l’Église, la formulation des contenus théologiques, les aspects anthropologiques, sociologiques et psychologiques inhérents aux personnes destinataires des activités catéchétiques et
Imaging Perfectae Caritatis: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) MacDonald Heidi
Abstract: In the 1960s some 60,000 Canadian women belonged to 183 congregations and orders. These congregations were diverse in historical roots and governance. Some were provinces of international communities; others were indigenous Canadian foundations. Regardless of their origins or orientations, Vatican II marked a significant event in their history. While many of the council’s documents both directly and indirectly impacted on their identities and caused some to question the very nature of the vowed life (e.g., the Dogmatic Constitution on the Church [
Lumen Gentium] in its call to holiness of all the faithful), this essay will focus on the response of
La question de la liberté religieuse au Québec à l’heure du concile from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Routhier Gilles
Abstract: L’origine de cette étude se trouve dans une lettre envoyée par Philippe Delhaye à André Laurentin, à l’été 1965. Delhaye, qui n’avait pas obtenu de poste à Louvain et qui, de ce fait, avait dû s’expatrier à Lille et à Montréal, enseignait alors à temps partiel au nouvel Institut de sciences religieuses à l’Université de Montréal. Ses contacts avec les milieux montréalais lui avaient valu d’être nommé, à la demande du cardinal Léger,
peritusau concile en 1962.
Anglican–Roman Catholic Dialogue in Canada: from:
Vatican II
Author(s) Clifford Catherine E.
Abstract: One of the principal motives in calling the Second Vatican Council, as signified in John XXIII’s decision to announce it in the Week of Prayer for Christian Unity on January 25, 1959, was the restoration of Christian unity. The council made the Catholic Church’s full commitment to ecumenism explicit in its Decree on Ecumenism (
Unitatis Redintegratio).¹ Among the many practical ways that this engagement in the search for the full visible unity of the divided churches was to be carried out, the decree set out the conditions for the establishment of formal commissions of “dialogue between competent experts from different
Introduction from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Perrier Sylvie
Abstract: The practitioners of interdisciplinarity are
1 Vellum and Vaccinium: from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Masemann Charlotte
Abstract: The systematic study of gardens as loci of food production during the Middle Ages has largely been overlooked by agrarian historians. Economic agrarian history is based epistemologically on the idea that human actions can best be understood through their economic foundations and consequences, and methodologically on the idea that the best and most accurate conclusions can be reached from a base of quantifiable and documented evidence. This strong epistemological and methodological base has resulted in a large body of excellent and rigorous work. Its focus on numbers and documents has, however, largely obscured the economic importance of cultivation carried out
9 Les sources juridiques au service de l’histoire socio-culturelle de la France médiévale et moderne from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Perrier Sylvie
Abstract: Depuis quelques décennies, l’histoire sociale, médiévale aussi bien que modeme, exploite ce matériau de choix que sont les archives judiciaires pour étudier le fait social dans toute sa complexité: travail, migrations, pratiques matrimoniales, marginalité, criminalité, etc. Depuis peu cependant, le questionnement s’est porté sur la nature et la signification des actes juridiques et sur les pratiques qu’ils révèlent. Le renouveau de l’histoire du notariat, en particulier, a amene les historiens à s’intéresser à la pratique notariale autant qu’au contenu des actes, redonnant ainsi sa juste place au contexte juridicoprofessionnel qui a produit a ces sources incontournables de l’histoire sociale¹.
17 What do the Radio Program Schedules Reveal? from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) MacLennan Anne F.
Abstract: Although content analysis is used extensively in the field of communications, it has been applied only sporadically to broadcasting history. Most of the standard works on Canadian radio history are nationalistic in tone and make reference to the threat of American programming without quantifying its impact for assessment. Extensive content analysis of Canadian radio program schedules during the 1930s in Vancouver, Montreal, and Halifax questions some of the long-held historical misconceptions about Canadian radio. While judgmental samples and the representations of lobbyists to government commissions would be considered suspect and completely unsuitable for a contemporary study, these remain the standard
19 “Wie es eigentlich gewesen?” from:
Building New Bridges - Bâtir de nouveaux ponts
Author(s) Beaulieu Michel S.
Abstract: It is a belief, an incantation as E. H. Carr suggests, that while “not a very profound aphorism [it] had an astonishing success.”² This sentence embodied for nearly a century the activity performed by academic historians. Leopold
II The Fate of the Helping Relationship in the Age of Manualized Treatments: from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Schöttler Tricia
Abstract: Despite the gloomy tone of the title of this chapter, the aims of this discussion are ultimately benevolent: to highlight the crucial importance of the helping relationship, a proven medium of client change; to outline the current trends in psychotherapy research and training as they relate to the recognition, or lack thereof, of the role of this crucial factor; to speculate on the possible future of the helping relationship within this current social/political/economic climate; and to offer some alternative paths that might serve to counteract what seems to me and many others to be a growing trend toward ultimately divesting
III Transference and Countertransference Revisited from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Meier Augustine
Abstract: During the past decade, there has been increased interest in the theoretical construct of countertransference. Attempts have been made to broaden its meaning to include all of the therapist’s feelings toward the client, in therapy and beyond therapy, and not to limit its meaning to the expression of the therapist’s unconscious and conflicted feelings as a reaction to a client’s transference. To better appreciate this trend, it is essential to revisit the concept of countertransference and to ascertain its original meaning, see how it has evolved over time, and consider the factors that have contributed to its modification.
VI The Medical Model of Psychotherapy: from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Dimock John
Abstract: One usually goes to a doctor when one is sick. Th at has been true for time immemorial. Hua T’o was, according to the annals of the later Han Dynasty, an excellent Chinese surgeon who practised around 220 AD. He possibly used opium dissolved in wine as his anaesthetic. Western medicine was introduced to China in the early 17
thcentury, while Emperors Fu Hsi, Shen Nung, and Huang Ti were said to have founded the art of healing long before. Tao—the method of maintaining harmony between this world and the beyond—was subdivided into heaven, earth, and man. The
VIII Mentoring: from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Ste-Marie Lorraine
Abstract: Mentoring is generally understood as a relationship between two people aimed at enabling a wide range of learning, experimentation, and development. Although mentoring is becoming increasingly recognized as a significant aspect of both personal and professional development today, the mentoring-type relationship has existed in all of human history. This is well exemplified in the characters of Mentor and his mentee, Telemachus, in the ancient Greek story of
The Odyssey(Daloz, 1999, p. 17). In the past 25 years, there has been an increase in the use of formal mentoring programs in the workplace as well as in academic and professional
IX The Helping Relationship in CPE Supervision from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Cutting Marsha
Abstract: The word
ezer(“helper”) in its various forms is widely used in the Hebrew Bible—120 times, to be exact. If we examine the passages whereezeris used, we find that a helper keeps one from being alone and can be a partner (Genesis 2:18), the powerless have particular need of a helper (Job 29:12), God is appealed to as a helper (Psalm 30:10), and God delivers those who have no helper (Psalm 72:12). Also, if God opposes you, you won’t prevail, even with help (Jeremiah 47:1–7), people are foolish to put faith in helpers who oppose God
X The Pastorate as Helping Relationship from:
The Helping Relationship
Author(s) Morrison Bradley T.
Abstract: Spiritual care is rapidly replacing pastoral care in institutional settings. While the assumptions of spiritual counselling may be a better fit for hospitals, nursing homes, and counselling centres, the pastoral paradigm remains the better fit for congregational care. This chapter argues that the pastoral paradigm provides a productive framework for addressing developments in the field of pastoral care and congregational ministry. The chapter correlates the psychotherapy outcome research of the common factors model with features of the pastoral paradigm to identify the ways in which the pastoral paradigm leverages the relational and communal dimensions of congregational life. The pastorate is
Book Title: Multiculturalism and Integration-Canadian and Irish Experiences
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Conrick Maeve
Abstract: The volume brings together an international group of scholars working in a variety of fields including politics, law, sociolinguistics, literature, philosophy, and history. Their interdisciplinary approach addresses the complex factors influencing integration and multiculturalism, painting detailed and accurate portraits of these issues in Canada and Ireland.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch782p
Introduction: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) REGAN VERA
Abstract: The thirteen essays collected in
Multiculturalism and Integration: Canadian and Irish Experiencesoffer new insights into issues of diversity, integration and identity that are important in all multicultural societies. The essays were developed from contributions to the 2008 fourteenth biennial international conference of the Association for Canadian Studies in Ireland. The issues raised are of central concern in many international contexts, where societies are coming to grips with accommodating cultural diversity within a civic identity. Multicultural and multilingual diversity are relatively recent phenomena in contemporary Ireland, whereas Canada’s policies and practices addressing cultural and linguistic diversity are several decades old
Chapter II Diachronic and Synchronic Perspectives on the French Language in Canada: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) REGAN VERA
Abstract: This chapter addresses a range of issues, several of which could be treated individually at some length. The focus of the chapter is, therefore, on a selection of issues that are of specific linguistic interest, linguistic diversity and homogenization in France and in New France, the current status and position of the French language in Canada, attitudes to the French language and issues of norm from a sociolinguistic perspective and Canada as a multilingual society and language contact: change, borrowing, code-switching.¹ The chapter as a whole aims to elucidate questions, some of which have been a source of interest for
Chapter IV The Linguistic Impact of Target-Language Contact on the Speech of Irish and Canadian Learners of French L2 from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) LEMÉE ISABELLE
Abstract: The aims of the present study are to investigate the social aspects of French language acquisition by both Irish and Canadian learners, but also to illuminate some differences and similarities surrounding the acquisition of French in the study abroad and immersion learning contexts. Finally, I would like to identify precisely how native speaker contact may be an important missing link in the immersion learner’s acquisition of French.
Chapter V Robert Lepage’s Lipsynch: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) KOUSTAS JANE
Abstract: We often confuse voice, speech and language, but those are indeed three very distinct and totally different things.
Lipsynchis about the specific signification of all three and their interaction in modern human expression … The voice is an internal machine that finds its ultimate expression outside of the body, but in order to examine it and try to understand it properly one needs to pull away from the visual stimuli for a while and go where the voice is “seated”.¹
Chapter X From Assimilation to Diversity: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) URSCHEL KATRIN
Abstract: For the past two centuries, the Irish have formed one of the largest ethnic groups in Canada. In the 2001 census, almost 13 percent of Canadians claimed Irish ancestry (Statistics Canada). Over the course of this long period, Irish-Canadian writing has often been a direct reflection of the contemporary cultural discourse. Irish-Canadian literature has, on the one hand, been formative in the creation of a national aesthetic, creating and responding to the pressure to assimilate. On the other hand, it has reacted to the multiculturalist urge to diversify, broadening the spectrum of genres and post-colonial voices, and moving away from
Chapter XI Writing “Irish” in Pre-Confederation Canada: from:
Multiculturalism and Integration
Author(s) PETERMAN MICHAEL
Abstract: If Canadians today think back to the decade before Confederation, they do so with precious little interest or curiosity. Yet, it was a complicated and fiery prelude to that period of developing Canadian nationhood, a vexed and contradictory era, marked by religious pressures, shifting political alliances, much tentativeness and a climate of financial uncertainty. Powerful national, religious and ethnic agendas were at work before the gaze of an anxious and sometimes violent public. If, for instance, one were Irish-born and living in Canada, one’s position on the possibility of “confederation” depended upon many factors—whether one was Catholic or Protestant,
Book Title: Enjeux interculturels des médias-Altérités, transferts et violences
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Moser Walter
Abstract: Cet ouvrage vise à éclairer deux problématiques actuelles, l'intermédialité - l'interaction des représentations médiatiques - et l'interculturalité - l'interaction des cultures. Trois questions principales guident les contributeurs au volume : Comment les médias se sont-ils inscrits dans le processus actuel de mondialisation culturelle ? Quelles sont les images d'autres cultures qu'ils construisent ? Dans quelle mesure les médias exercent-t-ils une violence par rapport à d'autres cultures qui n'ont pas l'habitude de se représenter dans les genres médiatiques de l'Occident ? Pour y répondre, les auteurs explorent le rôle des médias dans la connaissance de l'Autre, la violence interculturelle et la mondialisation. Ils découvrent que le fil conducteur réside dans la tension entre mondialisation et réappropriation, entre images stéréotypées et images complexes, entre violence médiatique et formes de résistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch7836
À la découverte du monde avec le cinéma : from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Perivolaropoulou Nia
Abstract: Le processus actuel de mondialisation culturelle présuppose – cela va tellement de soi qu’on l’oublie – l’achèvement de l’entreprise de découverte du monde, amorcée depuis le Moyen Âge par l’Occident avec les voyages d’exploration. Cette découverte du monde visait conjointement la conquête scientifique et la domination politique, avec ses corrélats, la christianisation ou l’exploitation économique. Si l’écrit est resté longtemps déterminant pour la dimension médiale du discours de la découverte, la dimension visuelle qui a gagné en importance au fil du temps retient de plus en plus l’attention des chercheurs¹. Les configurations médiales du discours sont tributaires du savoir et
Ethno-cinémato-graphie ou la fonctionnalisation de l’autre au cinéma from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Ochsner Beate
Abstract: Le questionnement principal du présent ouvrage porte sur la fonction globalisante, interculturelle et parfois violente de la représentation médiatique de l’autre, plus exactement d’un autre « distant », qui « s’avère être une capture, une invention, une construction, sinon une “fabrication” de toutes pièces »¹. Cet autre, principalement conçu comme le représentant d’une autre culture, est censé venir d’un dehors, d’une autre ethnie, d’une autre partie du monde. Dans notre contribution, nous nous permettons de déplacer légèrement la question et d’attirer l’attention sur un « autre » autre, plus proche : l’autre de soi-même (ou soi-même comme l’autre), ainsi que
Cinéma et intertemporalité : from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Habib André
Abstract: Les écarts culturels ont longtemps été – et sont toujours – maintenus par le pouvoir de domination médiatique d’une culture sur une autre : celle qui a le pouvoir technique de représenter et d’imposer sa représentation de l’Autre fixe ses attributs, ses traits ainsi que son caractère, et sa « singularité » ne repose que sur ce qui le distingue de celui qui l’observe. Les « sujets exotiques » qui apparaissent dans les relations de voyages, les gravures, les photographies ou les vues cinématographiques ont, bien souvent, été envisagés et traités comme s’ils appartenaient à un passé immémorial, hors de
Texte et image : from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Araujo Ana Lucia
Abstract: Bien avant l’arrivée de la photographie, du cinéma, de la télévision, de la vidéo et de l’Internet, la gravure imprimée était le seul média capable de rendre compte des réalités exotiques par le moyen de l’image. Depuis le xvi
esiècle, c’est à travers la gravure, produite très souvent par des dessinateurs et des graveurs qui n’étaient jamais allés en Amérique du Sud, que le public européen entrait en contact avec cet « Autre » à la fois sauvage, guerrier et cannibale. Le lecteur pouvait ainsi voir avec ses propres yeux combien les populations amérindiennes sud-américaines entretenaient des rapports violents et
Postface from:
Enjeux interculturels des médias
Author(s) Moser Walter
Abstract: Distinguons – bien schématiquement – entre trois approches théoriques aux médias : la théorie du déterminisme technologique qui définit les médias comme causalement issus des développements technologiques a alors tendance à leur attribuer une fonction instrumentale ; la théorie « prothésiste » les voit comme des prolongations et des extensions des sens humains, les médias donnent alors à l’être humain un plus grand rayon d’action dans le monde ; finalement, il y aurait une théorie anthropologique des médias. Cette dernière confère aux médias un statut bien plus fondamental que les deux premières, car elle les inscrit comme des attributs constitutifs
Book Title: Enjeux et défis du développement international- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Haslam Paul A.
Abstract: Dans cet ouvrage sont abordées les grandes thématiques de ce développement en changement. Le monde peut-il être changé ? Comment ? Qui sont les acteurs, ceux et celles qui peuvent agir ? Que dire des grandes institutions, l'ONU par exemple ? La place des femmes est devenue centrale dans tout processus de changement, en même temps persiste la discrimination. La dette, la famine, l'analphabétisme, les épidémies sont des problèmes complexes : peuvent-ils être surmontés ? Comment faire face aux grandes crises humanitaires qui résultent des guerres et des catastrophes qu'on dit « naturelles » ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch786r
Introduction from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) BEAUDET Pierre
Abstract: En 2008, les deux directeurs de cet ouvrage ainsi que Jessica Schäfer publiaient
Introduction au développement international. Approches, acteurs et enjeuxaux Presses de l’Université d’Ottawa. L’ouvrage actuel est la continuité de ce livre. Ses textes ont été totalement remaniés et plusieurs nouveaux chapitres, écrits par de nouveaux auteurs, viennent l’actualiser. Évidemment, le domaine du développement a bien évolué en six ans. Les effets des diverses crises économiques, financières, sociales, politiques et écologiques ont bousculé les actions des principaux acteurs. Mentionnons notamment:
Introduction à la première section from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Abstract: Domaine complexe et changeant, le développement international relève d’un ensemble de pratiques, d’interventions et de projets, en même temps qu’il est un objet d’études, de recherches et d’explorations théoriques. Cette section offre un regard panoramique et croisé sur les grands débats actuels et passés, insistant sur leur incidence non seulement sur les plans théorique, philosophique et conceptuel, mais également sur le plan des sociétés dans leurs complexités, contradictions et explorations.
Chapitre 3 Le développement et le postdéveloppement from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) CANET Raphaël
Abstract: À l’origine, la vision initiale du développement conçoit, dans la lignée de la pensée keynésienne, l’État comme un acteur central pour l’essor économique des pays.
Introduction à la deuxième section from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Abstract: Dans cette deuxième section, il est question des grands acteurs qui sont au cœur du domaine du développement international aujourd’hui. Les divers chapitres fournissent une masse d’informations nécessaires pour comprendre leur évolution, leurs débats, leurs contradictions.
Chapitre 9 L’ONU, les agences multilatérales et le développement from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) SOGGE David
Abstract: Le monde actuel devient de plus en plus un espace unifié. Les frontières nationales s’estompent devant les nombreux défis et problèmes qui s’accumulent telles les grandes pandémies ou les guerres qui frappent plusieurs régions. Derrière ces défis se situent de grandes inégalités nées du maldéveloppement et des choix politiques qui mènent à l’injustice et à l’humiliation. Pour faire face à ces menaces, et pour promouvoir leurs intérêts nationaux, les gouvernements ont choisi d’agir collectivement grâce à des conventions internationales et des pactes de défense. Ils ont mis en place des agences internationales et constitué des blocs économiques régionaux.
Chapitre 10 Le secteur privé et le développement from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) SONG-NABA Florent
Abstract: Dans le contexte de la fin de la guerre froide et de la mondialisation néolibérale depuis lors, la promotion de l’initiative privée semble faire l’unanimité. Ce consensus est fondé sur les liens supposés ou réels entre l’entrepreneuriat (particulièrement par le biais de la petite entreprise) et le développement. Contrairement à certains préjugés, même les pays dits les moins avancés ne sont pas des déserts entrepreneuriaux. Divers groupes ou segments de populations y conduisent, à des échelles variables, ou envisagent d’y créer, des activités génératrices de revenus et d’emplois. Toutefois, ces initiatives se heurtent à un environnement souvent peu favorable, voire
Chapitre 11 Entre contestation et conformité: from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) de SANTIS FELTRAN Gabriel
Abstract: La littérature du développement international considère généralement les États, les marchés et les agences multilatérales comme les principaux acteurs dans le domaine du développement. On peut cependant observer le rôle de plus en plus important joué par les acteurs non institutionnels dans le domaine, surtout depuis les années 1980. De plusieurs manières, ces acteurs contribuent aux pratiques, théories et significations. Ils permettent d’intégrer dans les débats et les pratiques de nouvelles valeurs liées à la qualité de vie et à la reconnaissance de la différence, mais aussi de faire participer de larges pans de la société aux débats sur les
Introduction à la troisième section from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Abstract: Dans le chapitre 12, Nasser Ary Tanimoune analyse le lancinant problème de la dette extérieure qui pèse très lourd sur les pays du Sud. Il analyse la genèse de cette problématique, décrit les responsabilités multiples et explore les pistes identifiées par les acteurs pour amoindrir et même résoudre cette question d’une
Chapitre 14 La santé et le développement from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) M’JID Najat
Abstract: Il n’est pas aisé de définir la santé. Les définitions ont évolué dans le temps en fonction des approches adoptées. La définition la plus connue est celle de l’Organisation mondiale de la santé (OMS), qui stipule que « la santé est un état de complet bien-être physique, mental et social, et ne consiste pas seulement en une absence de maladie ou d’infirmité » (). Pour définir la santé, l’OMS fait ainsi référence à la notion de bien-être, considéré comme la satisfaction des besoins et l’accomplissement des capacités physiques, intellectuelles et spirituelles. Pour être en « bonne santé », les
Chapitre 15 Le développement, les conflits et les États fragiles from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) ZAHAR Marie-Joëlle
Abstract: La guerre et la construction de l’État Dans des environnements sécuritaires compétitifs, la survie d’un chef guerrier dépend essentiellement de ses capacités militaires. Pour survivre, il faut pouvoir se défendre, et pour se défendre, il faut en extraire les moyens de la société que l’on contrôle. La nécessité d’avoir des moyens pour mener à bien des activités guerrières a favorisé la mise sur pied d’institutions pour systématiser la collecte et l’utilisation des ressources. Ainsi seraient
Chapitre 18 Les pays émergents et les enjeux du développement from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) SALAMA Pierre
Abstract: Parmi les économies émergentes, notre intérêt porte plus particulièrement sur quelques pays qui font partie de ce qui est devenu connu sous l’acronyme BRICS (Brésil, Russie, Inde, Chine, Afrique du Sud) parce qu’ils participent activement aux changements dans la division internationale du travail depuis une vingtaine d’années. Nous allons cependant concentrer notre attention sur trois de ces pays, soit le Brésil, la Chine et l’Inde. Il est maintenant reconnu que la contribution de ces trois pays à la croissance mondiale et à celles des pays avancés est de plus en plus déterminante. Leur poids économique devient considérable. En 2012, l’accroissement
Chapitre 21 L’économie sociale et solidaire: from:
Enjeux et défis du développement international
Author(s) FRÉCHETTE Lucie
Abstract: En matière de développement, l’influence la plus décisive est entre les mains des multinationales qui gouvernent nos vies dans les secteurs les plus stratégiques comme l’alimentation, la santé, la culture et les communications ou la finance personnelle. Cependant, il y a des contrepoids, et les formes que la solidarité internationale a prises au cours des 25 dernières années ne sont pas étrangères à l’émergence sur l’avant-scène de nouveaux acteurs « qui instaurent des relations directes avec les représentants des communautés locales de base (quartiers, villages, chefs de famille, associations de femmes, de jeunes, de producteurs, etc.) » (Copans, 2006, p.
Book Title: Dictionnaire des écrits de l'Ontario français-1613-1993
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Pichette Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Le Dictionnaire des écrits de l'Ontario français (1613-1993), c'est aussi la première lecture intégrale de quatre siècles d'écriture en français dans tous les domaines des sciences humaines soit 2 537 écrits imprimés de 1613 à 1993 par 1000 auteurs et présentés en un dictionnaire alphabétique et encyclopédique.Le Dictionnaire des écrits de l'Ontario français (1613-1993), c'est encore le fruit de la rédaction collégiale de 166 collaborateurs, un outil de référence unique pour les Franco-Ontariens et un guide indispensable pour les chercheurs de la francophonie.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ch78cb
4 Antiformalism in Constitutional Theory from:
Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: The preceding chapters have examined a number of efforts to explain why a small group of people, called judges, should be allowed to displace the otherwise legally authoritative decisions of a somewhat larger group of people, called legislators, who are selected by processes that seem closer to the normatively attractive mechanisms of democracy than those used to select judges.¹ These efforts attempt to provide “formalist” solutions to the countermajoritarian difficulty with which the liberal tradition is concerned. This chapter examines antiformalist attempts to displace concern with the countermajoritarian difficulty rather than to allay that concern. It argues that these antiformalist
6 The Constitution of Government from:
Red, White, and Blue
Abstract: Many of the criticisms developed in Part I are familiar to constitutional scholars. The presentation here is distinctive only because it accepts
allthe familiar criticisms. This skepticism about “the rule of law” characterizes Legal Realism, a school of thought from which my arguments are descended. The first section of this chapter describes Legal Realism’s attack on the theory of the rule of law at the heart of the liberal tradition and introduces a discussion of some jurisprudential responses to the Realist challenge. The second section examines a recent development in constitutional theory—structural review—that is another heir to
Book Title: Home-Work-Postcolonialism, Pedagogy, and Canadian Literature
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Sugars Cynthia
Abstract: Canadian literature, and specifically the teaching of Canadian literature, has emerged from a colonial duty to a nationalist enterprise and into the current territory of postcolonialism. From practical discussions related to specific texts, to more theoretical discussions about pedagogical practice regarding issues of nationalism and identity,
Home-Workconstitutes a major investigation and reassessment of the influence of postcolonial theory on Canadian literary pedagogy from some of the top scholars in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpc18
Postcolonial Pedagogy and the Impossibility of Teaching: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) SUGARS CYNTHIA
Abstract: Writing Canadian literature has been historically a very private act. … Teaching it, however, is a political act.
The Culture of Celebrity and National Pedagogy from:
Home-Work
Author(s) KAMBOURELI SMARO
Abstract: I’m on pat bay highway, Wednesday morning, the twentieth anniversary of the Charter of Rights and Freedoms, driving home after dropping a friend at the Swartz Bay ferry terminal. Naturally, I'm listening to CBC. Mary Walsh is hosting the most recent “do” about Canadian literature. “The Battle of the Books,” an ad in the
Globe and Mailcalls it, a literary competition imaged as warfare in keeping with the times. The panel, consisting of the novelists Leon Rooke and Nalo Hopkinson; lead singer of the Barenaked Ladies, Steven Page; actor Megan Follows; and the former prime minister Kim Campbell, is
Cross-Talk, Postcolonial Pedagogy, and Transnational Literacy from:
Home-Work
Author(s) BRYDON DIANA
Abstract: My title, “cross-talk,” evokes the ambivalence of the conflictual classroom where dialogue is engaged about issues that matter enough to get people angry. Postcolonial questions in Canadian contexts can function like lightning rods for channelling complex and inarticulate anxieties about the changing shape of the nation. This paper was first inspired by my surprise at the anger that Dionne Brand’s perspective on the Writing Thru Race conference, held in 1994 after significant media controversy, can still inspire, several years after its enactment. It arises from my attempts in the classroom, together with my students, to work through that anger to
Globalization, (Canadian) Culture, and Critical Pedagogy: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) MIKI ROY
Abstract: 1. noun: the most active, thriving, or successful state
Canadian Literature in English “Among Worlds” from:
Home-Work
Author(s) MONKMAN LESLIE
Abstract: In the immediate aftermath of the events of September 11, 2001, at the Pentagon and the World Trade Center, assertions that “the world” had irrevocably changed dominated American media coverage of the attacks. Early counter-reactions from voices such as Susan Sontag and Noam Chomsky met with intense resistance as tantamount to treason. Within a fortnight, Slavoj Žižek was pointing out that Peter Weir’s film,
The Truman Show, offered an appropriate gloss on the dominant American reaction to the events of the 11thas a radical disruption of “the world”:
From Praxis to Practice: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) HAUN BEVERLEY
Abstract: This paper is divided into two parts. It begins by reviewing current postcolonial pedagogical theory, both focusing on its interests and identifying its omissions in relation to public education in Canada. It ends with an appendix of practical suggestions for implementing a postcolonial pedagogical supplement designed to transform teachers’ and students’ understanding, public memory, and reading of curricular texts.
“You Don’t Even Want to Go There”: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) MUKHERJEE ARUN P.
Abstract: Teachers of english, postcolonialists or others, have not paid much attention to pedagogical matters. Classroom teaching is the major part of what we do, and we undergo several levels of evaluation of our teaching practices. Yet, as Heather Murray suggests, we do it in the context of the “intense privatization and isolation of the classroom” and “the lack of written record of its practices” (161). In a special issue of
PMLA, devoted to “The Teaching of Literature,” Biddy Martin expresses surprise about the lack of material on pedagogy:
Reading against Hybridity?: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) HÄRTING HEIKE
Abstract: Both of these epigraphs serve as a rough itinerary of this essay’s conceptual inquiries and multi-generic reading practices. Through their different political perspectives, the two quotations raise questions about, first, indigenous accounts of what Zygmunt Bauman calls the “human” and “social consequences of the globalizing process” (1), and, second, the theoretical and pedagogical value of diverse concepts and metaphors of cultural hybridity in an indigenous context. But they are also a reminder that “epigraph[s],” in Jacques Derrida’s words, “will never make a beginning” but comprise an indefinite network of texts (
Dissemination43) and conversations. Indeed, to a great extent, the
Postcolonialism Meets Book History: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) GERSON CAROLE
Abstract: Pauline Johnson offers a rich opportunity to engage students with various intersecting features of turn-of-the-century society and culture in the larger British Empire. As a mixed-race woman, she personally embodied the sexual interaction between English conquerors and Aboriginal subjects that has recently received extensive attention from postcolonial critics. As an unmarried woman with a successful career, this implicit New Woman challenged patriarchal values. As a public performer and a published author, she wrote poetry for both the stage and the page. Simultaneously a Canadian nationalist and a staunch imperialist, she demonstrates the pull of the imperial centre even to those
Cornering the Triangle: from:
Home-Work
Author(s) CONNOR KATHLEEN MARIE
Abstract: Postcolonial concerns are important to understanding the place of children’s literature in pedagogical and extracurricular pursuits. Peter Hulme has described “the classic colonial triangle … [as] the relationship between European, native and land” (qtd. in Bradford 196). In his view, territories, culture, and world-views are appropriated once certain tropes of superiority and dominion over “others” have been established by colonizers. It would be naive not to recognize that realistic animal tales for children were part of the discursive practice of colonialism in Canada’s history. These tales cohere around colonial constructs of dominion, had a significant role in the civilizing or
Book Title: De l'écrit à l'écran-Les réécritures filmiques du roman africain francophone
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): TCHEUYAP ALEXIE
Abstract: De l'écrit à l'écran est le premier ouvrage qui aborde la question de la réécriture filmique du roman africain francophone. Il se sert de la sémiologie de l'image, de la poétique et des théories post-coloniales pour définir les enjeux théoriques, idéologiques et sémantiques régissant le passage des textes littéraires au cinéma. Il identifie des paramètres importants dans la poétique de l'écriture et montre le rôle de l'acte créateur dans l'altérité du texte dérivé, filmique, par rapport au texte de départ, littéraire. De ce fait, il formule des propositions novatrices par rapport aux interrogations purement spéculatives, thématiques ou idéologiques sur « l'adaptation », acte de recréation et de réécriture dont les mécanismes dépassent le seul cadre des cinémas africains.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpcnk
Chapitre 2 LE TEXTE DÉRIVÉ from:
De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Les analyses précédentes indiquent qu’il est difficile de séparer une poétique de l’écriture ou de la réécriture, procès toujours prospectif, de celle du texte. En effet, le texte est aussi le résultat d’une activité poétique. Mais les conceptions de la notion de texte ne sont pas des plus univoques. Appliquées à la réécriture filmique des textes littéraires, elles le sont encore moins. Comment en serait-il autrement? Le film lui-même, considéré comme production sémiotique, ne semble pas pour autant intégré dans le champ de la théorie textuelle. Au point que Michel Sorlin écrit, de manière sentencieuse, posant l’affirmation en principe :
Chapitre 3 FORMES DE L’ORALITÉ from:
De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Y a-t-il une spécificité du récit africain : littéraire et, par suite, filmique? Réponse : oui. Le récit africain est principalement travaillé par les formes de l’oralité¹. Cela entraîne, évidemment, des aspects singuliers dans la problématique plus générale de l’inscription littéraire à l’écran. Il s’agira donc de repérer les paramètres principaux de cette oralité afin de déterminer les caractéristiques d’un apport africain, car il faut avant tout noter avec Manthia Diawara que
Chapitre 6 MONTAGE, TECHNIQUE ET DISCOURS from:
De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: La localisation de l’autorité narrative dans les chapitres précédents permet de situer la narration filmique dans le domaine de renonciation. Autrement dit, c’est le lieu d’un discours manifeste ou latent. Ce chapitre travaillera à matérialiser cette caractéristique en considérant le montage et le dispositif technique en tant que « signifiants », ce qu’on s’attachera à élucider.
Chapitre 7 LA REMISE EN SCENE DU POUVOIR from:
De l'écrit à l'écran
Abstract: Le parcours des films abordés permet, à bien des égards, d’adhérer à la thèse centrale de Christian Zimmer (1974) selon laquelle « tous les films sont politiques ». Non pas nécessairement parce que leur enjeu consiste en la conquête ou en la défense du pouvoir, mais essentiellement parce qu’ils impliquent la gestion des hommes, les ruses diverses impliquées dans leurs relations quotidiennes. Le chapitre précédent l’indique assez, le discours est toujours un exercice idéologique caractérisant un rapport réel ou virtuel de force.
INTRODUCTION from:
Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: The aim of this book is to present the main ideas of
Being and Time,Heidegger’s most important philosophical work, in a clear and accessible manner. In so doing, the book also strives to correct certain fundamental misconceptions of Heidegger’s thought, including the mischaracterization of Heidegger as an “existentialist.” No one could plausibly deny thatBeing and Timeis a dense and difficult philosophical treatise. Its stylistic flaws, even in the original German, are too obvious to excuse. Nevertheless it is equally undeniable thatBeing and Timeis an original, systematic, and epoch-making philosophical work. Without a doubt it was
CHAPTER 3 THE TIMING OF TIMELINESS from:
Rephrasing Heidegger
Abstract: In Section One, we initially characterized Dasein as being-in-the-world. The
Introduction from:
At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) MOSS JOHN
Abstract: Labour day evening, 2001; the CBC is rebroad-casting a mosaic of interviews from “This Hour Has Seen Days,” originally televised in 1966. There is Pierre Trudeau, a slightly effete and nervous intellectual coaxing the Liberal Rene Levesque into admitting the inefficacy of Quebec separation; actually, Larry Zolf conducts most of the interview, but history intervenes, and the viewer sees the nearly silent Trudeau as key player in the discourse. There is Leonard Cohen making love to the camera, making love to the smitten interviewer, loving himself, making the viewer voyeur. And there is Marshall McLuhan, introduced by Patrick Watson with
A Move to the Glebe from:
At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) MOSS JOHN
Abstract: I stopped reading books when i turned fifty. Under the aegis of Marshall McLuhan, I determined that the impact of print on my life was antithetical to living well. Not being a zealot, I have not given up reading in dailies or weeklies the captions under photographs, or print on signs or cereal boxes, or printed texts emblazoned on screens; nor, when I made the conversion from print to experience, did I consign my library to a ceremonial pyre. I am neither a fanatic nor given to grandiloquent gestures. Instead, I boxed up the vast collection of leatherbound books I
McLuhan, Media, and Hybridity: from:
At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) AJAYAKUMAR P. P.
Abstract: Marshall mcluhan’s theory of “hybrid energy” adopts, almost self-evidently, a hybrid structure. Although he develops and refines this concept in association with his revelations regarding various forms of media, he also links this concept with larger cultural experiences. Connecting the interplay of media with civilians, relating society to the human psyche, and juxtaposing fission and fusion, McLuhan crosses the boundaries of diverse disciplines and concepts to reveal the interaction among them. When he observes that “everybody notices how coal and steel and cars affect the arrangements of daily existence,” he seems to assert not only the interrelationship between apparently unconnected
Wychewode Parke from:
At the Speed of Light There is Only Illumination
Author(s) FAWCETT BRIAN
Abstract: #3, (the house number) is of brass—probably from Thailand and of recent manufacture—fixed to a tree at the end of the driveway that overlooks a pond, which is older than the brass or the tree even though probably artificial, the possibly accidental product of road-building.
CHAPTER 3 THE BEARERS OF RIGHTS: from:
Is There a Canadian Philosophy?
Author(s) Fairfield Paul
Abstract: It is an old Canadian political impulse to seek reconciliation between apparent opposites both at the levels of political philosophy and practice. Perhaps a legacy of the historic agreement that brought together in a single nation cultures as diverse as the English, the French, and an assortment of aboriginal peoples, the practice of seeking political consensus through compromise—sometimes at the expense of principle—has long been the norm in Canadian political culture. Conciliation, accommodation, and
rapprochementare commonly touted as characteristically Canadian virtues, at least in this nation, and not without some claim to truth. This pragmatic turn of
Introduction from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Moser Walter
Abstract: Par quel bout aborder la question de la modernité qui, tout affectée qu’elle est de toutes sortes de crises, de nos jours, fait preuve d’une remarquable persistance, voire résilience? Mais, d’abord, de quelle modernité parle-t-on? En suivant les divers débats sur la modernité, nous observons en fait que «modernité » peut se référer à une multitude de scénarios discursifs sectoriels et partiels qui montrent souvent une tendance à occuper la totalité du champ en question et, de ce fait, à nous faire oublier que le paradigme moderne se constitue de la convergence et de l’interaction—souvent conflictuelle—de ces divers
2 Modernity, Science and Democracy from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Harding Sandra
Abstract: The “modern” in “modern science” is a relatively unexamined concept within the sciences and in the philosophy, sociology and history of science; it is a concept for which theories have yet to be developed, this at a time when other aspects of Western sciences have been fruitfully explored in critical and illuminating ways, and when the exceptionalism and triumphalism characteristic of Western attitudes toward our sciences have been explicitly criticized and purportedly abandoned by many of the scholars working in science studies fields. By exceptionalism is meant the belief that Western sciences alone, among all human knowledge systems, are capable
7 Exploring Post/Modern Urban Space: from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Löbbermann Dorothea
Abstract: Ever since the 1980s, the problem of urban homelessness has occupied not only activists and social critics, but also the cultural imagination, reviving, in a way, a topic that has been prevalent in North American literature since the 19
thcentury (on the history of homelessness in 19th- and early 20th-century American literature and culture, see Giamo, 1989; Kusmer, 2001; Allen, 2004). In recent literature, homeless characters have started to move from the margin to the centre of urban representation (see for instance, the work of Paul Auster [Moon Palace, 1989;In the Country of Last Things, 1987], Samuel R. Delany
Conclusion from:
Modernité en transit - Modernity in Transit
Author(s) Gin Pascal
Abstract: Quelque particulière que soit la perspective caractérisant chacune des études que regroupe le présent volume, celles-ci s’inscrivent collectivement contre la caducité présumée d’une réflexion contemporaine sur la modernité. Au-delà de ce constat qui confère cohérence à l’effort intellectuel traversant cet ouvrage, il importe toutefois de préciser certaines orientations sousjacentes aux regroupements thématiques qui l’ordonnent textuellement. De l’expérience japonaise de la modernité à l’écriture d’un cosmopolitisme postnational, d’une responsabilisation politique de la raison scientifique aux nouvelles disparités qu’introduit la modernisation numérique se communiquent effectivement des préoccupations saillantes justifiant que nous nous y attardions. Dégageant une à une ces trois orientations dont
Book Title: Entre lieux et mémoire-L'inscription de la francophonie canadienne dans la durée
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): THÉRIAULT Joseph Yvon
Abstract: Dans Les lieux de mémoire, Pierre Nora affirme que « la mémoire s'enracine dans le concret, l'espace, le geste, l'image et l'objet » (1984, xix). Entre lieux et mémoire adopte une perspective semblable et jette un regard sur les expériences concrètes, géographiquement situées, par lesquelles les francophones du Canada construisent leur identité à partir des réminiscences de leur passé. Ce questionnement est essentiel, car la géographie de la francophonie canadienne évolue rapidement, consolidée au Québec au cours notamment des dernières cinquante années, mais fragilisée dans les milieux les plus dynamiques de la francophonie hors Québec, là où les francophones se confrontent quotidiennement à l'Autre : anglophone, immigrant et allophone. Dans ces lieux consolidés et fluides se tissent les appartenances et les identités de ceux qui les occupent. Les auteurs abordent les lieux de mémoire du Canada français selon trois approches : l'histoire, la géographie et les arts. Tous mettent en évidence que la fondation d'un lieu de mémoire est un acte politique. Enfin, ils montrent qu'une étude des lieux de mémoire, par l'entremise des individus et des groupes qui les instituent, constitue un préalable à la compréhension de l'identité francophone canadienne, dans son unité comme dans sa diversité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpdtn
À propos de l’Inventaire des lieux de mémoire de la Nouvelle-France : from:
Entre lieux et mémoire
Author(s) ALLAIRE Gratien
Abstract: Depuis 2001, un véritable chantier de la mémoire de la Nouvelle-France est lancé. L’
Inventaire des lieux de mémoire de la Nouvelle-France(accessible en ligne à partir dewww.memoirenf.cieq.ulaval.ca) est un projet ambitieux et risqué. Ambitieux d’abord, parce que, s’appuyant sur les technologies de pointe, il entend restituer, du moins partiellement et virtuellement, les relations complexes qui lient personnes, lieux et activités à l’époque de la Nouvelle-France, et ce, à partir des traces qui en subsistent aujourd’hui dans le paysage des deux côtés de l’Atlantique. Cette mise en relation permet aussi de relire l’apport de cette époque à la construction des
Lieux de mémoire et aménagement from:
Entre lieux et mémoire
Author(s) BERDOULAY Vincent
Abstract: La prospective actuelle portant sur le devenir de la francophonie canadienne ne peut faire l’économie d’une interrogation sur la mémoire, quel que soit le degré d’investissement avec lequel elle est convoquée. C’est en effet par son intermédiaire que des éléments du passé sont mobilisés pour justifier les actions présentes ou futures. Je voudrais montrer ici qu’elle est nécessairement une mémoire des lieux et que, à ce titre, elle soulève une série d’enjeux d’aménagement qui dépassent la trop rapide et trop fréquente référence au « lieu ».
Savoir habiter le lieu de la mémoire : from:
Entre lieux et mémoire
Author(s) BELKHODJA Chedly
Abstract: Dans les grands événements mémoriels de notre époque, les images qui nous lient au monde réel disparaissent et deviennent flottantes, un peu comme ces êtres humains dans un récent film du cinéaste chinois Jia Zhang Ke,
The World(2004). On y voit des personnages se promener dans un parc d’attractions touristiques à Pékin, détachés de la réalité et aspirés par la mise en scène perpétuelle du lieu (Aspe, 2006 : 46). Dans un autre film,Plaisirs inconnus(2001), le cinéaste nous montre la même situation en suivant le désoeuvrement de jeunes Chinois dans une ville industrielle égarée sur un immense
Book Title: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Sweet William
Abstract: Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rightsexamines the relations and interrelations among theoretical and practical analyses of human rights. Edited by William Sweet, this volume draws on the works of philosophers, political theorists and those involved in the implementation of human rights. The essays, although diverse in method and approach, collectively argue that the language of rights and corresponding legal and political instruments have an important place in contemporary social political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckpdx6
Two THE ETHICAL BACKGROUND OF THE RIGHTS OF WOMEN from:
Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Hutton Sarah
Abstract: Dictionary definitions are often historically revealing. The term “right” as used in the expression “human rights” is usually understood as some kind of entitlement or “privilege.” The term has both legal and ethical connotations. According to the
Oxford English Dictionary, a right is a “justifiable claim, on legal or moral grounds, to have or obtain something, or to act in a certain way” or “a legal, equitable or moral title or claim to the possession of property or authority.”¹ What is right is also just. The legality and moral value of rights is implied in the definition of “right” as
Fourteen SOLIDARITY AND HUMAN RIGHTS from:
Philosophical Theory and the Universal Declaration of Human Rights
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: The word “solidarity” and the call to solidarity are familiar to us all. “Solidarity” reminds many of us of the trade union movement that arose in 1980 in opposition to the Polish government, whose leader Lech Walesa was awarded the Nobel Peace Prize in 1983 and whose actions were instrumental in the collapse of totalitarian regimes in Central and Eastern Europe. And for some four decades, the term “solidarity” and the call to be “in solidarity” have been uttered wherever we find those in need–the poor, the oppressed, and the marginalized.
The Leaven of Wine and Spirits in the Fiction of Robertson Davies from:
Robertson Davies
Author(s) STICK K.P.
Abstract: “Visited a friend this evening who had procured a bottle of a very special tonic called
Noilly Prat; in the interest of temperance, we experimented to see how much of the tonic it was necessary to put with a jigger of gin in order to kill the horrid taste. After several tries we got the measurements exactly right.” So says Samuel Marchbanks in hisDiary.¹ Whether Davies himself liked martinis is of no concern here. My subject is his fondness for literary references to alcohol; they are as readily evident in his Marchbanksian ventures as in all of his novels
Metadrama and Melodrama: from:
Robertson Davies
Author(s) SHERLOW LOIS
Abstract: Robertson Davies’ first play,
Three Gypsies, a romantic comedy set in Wales, was written during Davies’ final year at Oxford (1937-1938), just before his brief first career as a theatre professional.¹ Davies did not apply himself seriously, however, to becoming a playwright until 1944, when he could foresee a post-war resumption of theatrical activity both in Europe and Canada. He developed his craft in what he himself later called “the primitive era of Canadian theatre.”² In the 1940s and early 1950s in Canada, opportunities for professional production of new plays were almost non-existent; the only critics available to assess and
Authentic Forgeries: from:
Robertson Davies
Author(s) HALLETT DAVID
Abstract: When Simon Darcourt calls Francis Cornish a “true son of Hermes” early in
What’s Bred in the Bone, he provides a hermeneutic “skeleton key” both to meaning in the novel and to a comprehension of Davies’ sense of self as moral fictionist.¹ The figure of Hermes organizes and gives meaning to the novel’s many uses of artifice and invention, even as the hermeneutic notion of “horizon(s) of expectation” enables a recognition of the didactic component of Davies’ fiction. Reference to devices such as retouched photos, player pianos, stories and lies that characters tell each other, and, especially, art restoration help
“Medical Consultation” for Murther and Walking Spirits and The Cunning Man from:
Robertson Davies
Author(s) BRIGG PETER
Abstract: This is not an academic paper but a story with academic interest. It is the story of a book collector who particularly collected the books of Robertson Davies and who contacted him to ask if he would sign some books. From this grew an acquaintance of eight years and from that acquaintance came a correspondence in which that highly encyclopaedic among modern writers began to ask the book collector, who happened to be a physician-my physician, in fact-if he could provide answers to some unusual medical questions.
Stratégies de spatialisation et effets d’identification ou de distanciation dans Cantique des plaines from:
Vision-Division
Author(s) Sing Pamela V.
Abstract: Cantique des plaines, selon Nancy Huston, est un ouvrage où l’on se retrouve face à ses racines, plus précisément à l’enfance, cette « période séparée et distincte [au] caractère totalement singulier » (Huston, 1999 : 19) et révélatrice du « vrai moi » (Huston et Sebbar, 1986 : 60). En l’occurrence, le moi de la langue première, l’anglais, creuset d’« émotions si turbulentes » (ibid. : 139) dont l’auteure avait jusqu’alors évité de se servir pour ses textes de fiction. Car l’on sait, d’après sa biographie, que la langue et le pays maternels rappellent irrévocablement le départ de la mère
Variations littéraires dans Les Variations Goldberg from:
Vision-Division
Author(s) Khordoc Catherine
Abstract: Une œuvre littéraire dont le thème privilégié serait la lecture est une œuvre fondamentalement spéculaire, car ce thème se transmet par la lecture. C’est donc une tâche complexe que se propose de réaliser l’auteur d’une telle œuvre. Plusieurs stratégies littéraires peuvent servir à mettre l’acte de lecture en évidence, c’est-à-dire à faire prendre conscience au lecteur du fait qu’il est en train de lire : l’inscription de personnages écrivains ou lecteurs, l’enchâssement de textes à un second degré, la mise en abyme du texte, entre autres. Un autre moyen d’évoquer la lecture consiste en l’interprétation textualisée de formes d’expression artistique
Chapitre 2 CULTURE, TERRITOIRE ET PROPRIÉTÉ from:
Trajectoires culturelles transaméricaines
Abstract: À la fin des années I960, Frederik Barth publiait
Ethnie Croups and Boundaries. The Social Organization of Culture Différence⁴. Il soutenait la nécessité de considérer le fait de partager une même culture moins comme une caractéristique définitive que comme le résultat d'une activité constante. Pour lui, cette activité devait être saisie dans sa dimension relationnelle liée au pouvoir. Par pouvoir, on entend une violence légitimée, c’est-à-dire appropriée par une institution qui s’impose et qui est reconnue. C'est dire que certains groupes vont, à une certaine époque, se constituer en nation, tandis que d’autres seront des ethnies à l’intérieur d’une nation
Conclusion from:
Trajectoires culturelles transaméricaines
Abstract: Que soulignent tous ces jeux allant des déplacements géo-symboliques à la productivité sémantique et aux surprises du paradoxe ? D’abord que le discours postmoderne/postcolonial lié à la nouvelle économie rejoint ce que Karl Popper appelait « an abstract society² ». Par là, il entendait une société qui ne reposait plus sur un caractère organique, sur des relations contiguës, mais sur des relations choisies en dehors des accidents de la naissance, en dehors du fait de vivre dans telle famille ou sur tel ou tel territoire. Ces relations « abstraites » d'échange et de coopération fondent l’individualisme démocratique qui nous demande
INTRODUCTION from:
Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Feist Richard
Abstract: The founder of the phenomenological movement, Edmund Husserl (1859-1938), lived through a dynamic time for the sciences.¹ Not only were there major developments in mathematics and physics, but some of the greatest practitioners of these disciplines were pursuing foundational questions with an unprecedented depth and rigour. Although Husserl did not directly contribute to these developments, it is not correct to say that he simply sat on the sidelines. He personally knew and corresponded with several of the finest scientific and mathematical minds of the time. It is, therefore, not surprising that the relationship between Husserl’s philosophy and the sciences is
CHAPTER NINE FROM THE LIFEWORLD TO THE EXACT SCIENCES AND BACK from:
Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Kerszberg Pierre
Abstract: Ever since the rise of the modern exact sciences, it has become more and more clear that the scientific mind is not bound by an exhaustive understanding of its own doings. The fact is that, while discovering the inner structure or the nexus of relations pertaining to an object, science ignores the paths that led to this structure or these relations; but these paths lie precisely at the basis of the ontological ground of the object. Husserl reflected on this legacy of the scientific revolution when he argued that “it is not always natural science that speaks when natural scientists
CHAPTER TEN HUSSERL ON THE COMMUNAL PRAXIS OF SCIENCE from:
Husserl and the Sciences
Author(s) Buckley R. Philip
Abstract: It is well known that for a long period within the phenomenological tradition itself, there was a tendency to view the
Crisis-texts of Husserl’s last years as marking a radical shift in his thought. Major figures such as Gadamer and Merleau-Ponty¹ are well-known exponents of this view, and even circumspect and insightful subsequent scholars such as Carr tend to stress the novelty, for example, of the infusion of history into Husserl’s later philosophy² Some treat this ‘novelty’ as a reaction to the historical crisis of the 1930s, and also imply that the proximity and popularity of Heidegger should not be
Introduction from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) BANDIA PAUL F.
Abstract: Over the last thirty years there has been a substantial increase in activities relating to the history of translation.
Translation, History and the Translation Scholar from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) FOZ CLARA
Abstract: There is no doubt that history and translation are bound together. Translation represents not only a central process in historical work, but is, in itself, a historical practice. However, so far these ties have not forged connections across the two disciplines. It must be acknowledged that the difference between the status of translation and history in the research community is such that the use of translation by historians has long been considered “normal” and “natural,” while translators studying the history of their profession (so far of little interest to those who are historians by trade) are in general careful not
Glosas croniquenses: from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) FOSSA LYDIA
Abstract: Glosas croniquensesis a project that exhibits a distinct postcolonial approach, in that it considers texts as discourses and criticizes those accepted as foundational by conventional historians and anthropologists. Native languages and Spanish, as they appear in those discourses, have been studied as languages in contact by Solano (1991, 1993) and Rivarola (1990), as well as by Rosenblat (1977) and Alvar (1970) among others. These scholars deal with ever-changing Royal linguistic policies, the emergence of Spanish dialects in the Andes, the impossibility of expressing Catholic dogma in native languages, and the influences co-existing languages had on each other. A fresh
Translating the New World in Jean de Léry’s from:
Charting the Future of Translation History
Author(s) YORK CHRISTINE
Abstract: One of the effects of translating a historical text years, even hundreds of years after its initial publication is the continued life given to it by the translation. The work lives on in its translation. The voices contained within the text are revived and returned to circulation. We shall see this occur in Janet Whatley’s 1990 translation of a book first published in 1578, Jean de Léry’s
Histoire d’un voyage fait en la terre du Brésil. The book describes Léry’s voyage, part of an early attempt by France to establish a colony in the New World, and his contact with
Introduction from:
Du corps des femmes
Author(s) KÉRISIT MICHÈLE
Abstract: Depuis quelques années, le corps occupe une place importante dans les manifestations artistiques et culturelles les plus remarquées. Par exemple, Lynn Hershman, dans son exposition
Virtuellement vôtre, reprend l’idée de Virginia Woolf d'une chambre à soi pour y montrer « l’individu, le soi transmué, fractionné, reproduit, reconfiguré par les médias électroniques » (Musée des Beaux-Arts du Canada, 1995 : 3). Hershman utilise différents médias pour « déterminer comment s’imbriquent le médium et le personnage, l’identité, le corps et le soi » (ibid. : 4). Quelques années auparavant, en 1991, Jane Sterbak, lors d’une exposition intituléeCorps à corps / States
1 Le corps des femmes dans la construction des savoirs et des savoir-faire : from:
Du corps des femmes
Author(s) HEAP RUBY
Abstract: Dans ce chapitre, nous nous proposons d’examiner, à partir de la littérature existante en histoire et en sociologie, l’impact de la « naturalisation » des femmes dans les domaines de l’éducation et du travail salarié au Canada anglais et au Canada français aux XIX
eet XXesiècles. Par « naturalisation » des femmes, on entend un système de pensée qui postule que la nature entretient avec les femmes un rapport spécifique articulé autour de leur corps et de ses fonctions. Comme nous le verrons, un tel postulat aura comme conséquence, dans les deux domaines qui nous concernent, ou leur exclusion
7 Marquage du corps, discipline, résistance et plaisir : from:
Du corps des femmes
Author(s) BEAUSOLEIL NATALIE
Abstract: Dans ce chapitre, nous examinons un type particulier de marquage du corps chez les femmes dans la société occidentale contemporaine, le maquillage. Le maquillage marque spécifiquement la féminité dans la société contemporaine occidentale, car en général les femmes se maquillent et les hommes ne se maquillent pas. Le maquillage fait partie d’un ensemble de pratiques corporelles de présentation de soi des femmes dans les activités quotidiennes. Dans certains cas, c’est non seulement un indice de féminité, mais aussi un indice de sexualité des femmes. Si le maquillage apparaît particulièrement frivole, il n’en demeure pas moins que l’industrie cosmétique est une
Chapter 1 Simultaneity and Delay: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Robinson Jason
Abstract: The nature of time has been an irresistible mystery for philosophers for thousands of years. The same is no less true today, although questions of time have changed dramatically under the influence of physicists such as Newton and Einstein, and the hegemony of the natural sciences. For instance, most no longer think of time in terms of the Ancient Greeks’ cyclical time, modelled on the periodical rhythms of nature, or Christian eschatological time (rectilinear historical time), with its actual though postponed Kingdom in the present age (both fulfilled and fulfilling). While elements of both persist—such as the association of
Chapter 2 Faire sens du sensé ou Bergo et la sortie de soi par l’arrivée de l’autre from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Malenfant Gabriel
Abstract: Si l’autre brusque ma pensée, s’il interrompt l’idée que je me fais–interruption de l’activité même de toute création de concept–, c’est qu’il brise la tâche incessante que l’intentionnalité prend à bras le corps, soit celle de la connaissance. Néanmoins, l’épistémie faite du monde par un épicentre subjectif semblait, jusqu’à Lévinas, englober l’autre (dans le cartésianisme ou par l’intersubjectivité husserlienne, notamment). Après tout, l’autre est justement du monde et, à ce titre, il peut être, comme la pierre, objet pour un sujet. Mais la plupart, sinon la totalité, des raisonnements religieux et éthiques des traditions confessionnelles et philosophiques ont
Chapter 4 Mallin and Philip Glass’s “The Grid” from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Marshall John
Abstract: Arguably one of the most difficult tasks of philosophy is to grasp where we are today. While undoubtedly this has something to do with the usual biases of the day, in that philosophers are as surely bound by mundane prejudices as everyone else, it also seems to derive from a factor peculiar to philosophy. It is no accident that philosophers have long dealt with the question of the good life. Philosophers have always wanted to leave the cave. Whether or not one fashions the departure in grand metaphysical terms, one can maintain, with fairly adequate justification, that a defining characteristic
Chapter 6 Mediating Play: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Zubcic Stephanie
Abstract: This paper concerns an important and prominent theme in Hegelian study: the power of mediation to unite diverse voices in dark times. I begin with my interpretation of Hegel’s phenomenological subjectivity of “self-consciousness.” According to my reading of his
Phenomenology of Spirit, his dialogical project gives significant emphasis to the idea that mediation acts as a dialogical process of representational “interplay.” I briefly discuss the historical and conceptual origin of this idea as it pertains to Hegelian thought. The central aim of this paper is to account for the role of imagination epistemologically as it relates to moral action. Exploring
Chapter 8 Russon’s Pharmacy: from:
Philosophical Apprenticeships
Author(s) Marratto Scott
Abstract: In his book
Human Experience: Philosophy, Neurosis, and the Elements of Everyday Life(2003), John Russon explores some of the major themes of contemporary European philosophy, such as time, embodiment, and language, and does so in the clear, engaging, and conceptually precise manner that I, as one of his grateful students, have come to recognize as the hallmark of his teaching style. In fact,Human Experienceis a book written in the “voice” of a teacher, and in a manner that exemplifies Russon’s philosophy of education. Its argument unfolds in such a way to lead the reader through what seems
“Pity the Northrop Frye Scholar”? from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Denham Robert
Abstract: I have a relatively clear memory of my first encounter with
Anatomy of Criticism. Browsing the shelves of the University of Chicago bookstore in the early 1960s, I picked up a copy of the book, not because anyone had recommended it but because it looked interesting. I had decided by then that I would be doing my degree in the history and theory of criticism, and leafing through this book made me think it worth looking into, though I did not actually read it until a couple of years later. That was after I was jerked out of my graduate
History, Tradition, and the Work of Pastoral: from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Stacey Robert David
Abstract: It would be difficult to exaggerate the impact Frye’s 1965 “Conclusion to a
Literary History of Canada” has had on the theory and practice of Canadian literary criticism. Republished in 1971 as the conclusion to yet another landmark text, Frye’s ownThe Bush Garden: Essays on the Canadian Imagination, which collected the author’s Canadian criticism written over the previous twenty-five years, the essay has exerted a tremendous influence—registered with varying degrees of anxiety—on successive generations of Canadian critics. For Robert Lecker writing in 1993, the ideas expressed in the “Conclusion” “form the primary basis of how most Canadian
Frye’s “Pure Speech”: from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Sherbert Garry
Abstract: Given the desire to write about “pure speech” (
dv83) in literature and the work of Northrop Frye, one might suspect that I would be precipitously thrown into a discourse on religion for, as Jacques Derrida observes, “the desire for purification in general” is “the desire for the safe and sound, for the intact or immune (heilige)” (Echographies134). In his essay “Faith and Knowledge: The Two Sources of ‘Religion’ at the Limits of Reason Alone,” Derrida asks, “Can a discourse on religion be dissociated from a discourse on salvation: which is to say, on the holy, the sacred, the
The Interruption of Myth in Northrop Frye: from:
Northrop Frye
Author(s) Grande Troni Y.
Abstract: A growing number of feminist critics are finding their own new directions from the critical path forged by Northrop Frye.¹ While his outline of literature as a “systematic structure of knowledge” (
ac19) has certainly been useful to feminists, Frye’s myth-making, aimed at creating an integrated community, has been judged a failure insofar as it ignores the problem of gender difference—specifically, the subjugation and exclusion of the embodied woman. Yet if Frye himself showed no focused interest in the way gender inflects the reading of literature and the practice of criticism, the woman (both as a figure and an
FILIATIONS ET FILATURES: from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Gauvin Lise
Abstract: Marco Micone, Adrien Pasquali : l’un, originaire d’Italie, a immigré au Québec à l’âge de treize ans. L’autre, né de parents italiens et originaire du Valais suisse, n’a pas connu directement l’immigration mais l’a mise en récits et en a fait l’un des sujets privilégiés de sa réflexion. L’idée de comparer ces deux itinéraires m’est venue lors d’un séjour en Suisse il y a deux ans où, à l’occasion d’un colloque, j’avais été frappée par un certain nombre de traits communs entre les deux écrivains et, notamment, par la nécessité de signer, de part et d’autre, des textes de facture
L’EXIL ET L’INNOCENCE DANS LE DISCOURS POLITIQUE ET LITTÉRAIRE D’HAÏTI from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Munro Martin
Abstract: Vraiment ? Sommes-nous tous des Caribéens dans nos archipels urbains ? Sommes-nous tous des exilés, séparés à jamais de nos cultures d’origine ? Ou bien cette phrase de Clifford, serait-elle une tentative facile—voire (auto) exoticisante—de s’identifier à l’Autre tropical pour effacer ou normaliser l’expérience caribéenne de l’exil ? Une connaissance générale de l’histoire et de l’actualité caribéennes suffit à nous faire savoir que les îliens ont une expérience particulière, voire unique de l’exil.
AU TEMPS DU FLEUVE AMOUR D’ANDREÏ MARINE OU LE DÉSIR D’AILLEURS from:
Problématiques identitaires et discours de l'exil dans les littératures francophones
Author(s) Gonfond Claude
Abstract: L’ici et l’ailleurs, avec leurs multiples interactions et les sentiments qui les expriment, sous-tendent l’œuvre romanesque d’Andreï Makine, et s’inscrivent aussi dans sa vie. Son enfance se déroule en Sibérie orientale où il est né, à Krasnoïarsk, au nord de la Mongolie. Il a fait des études classiques à Moscou, puis a enseigné la philosophie à Nougorod. Plus tard il enseignera à Paris, à l’École normale de la rue d’Ulm et à l’École de sciences politiques. Car en 1987, âgé de trente ans, il émigré en France, où il va connaître d’abord des moments de misère et de solitude. Pour
Introduction from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Technological changes have had a dramatic impact upon the financing, organization and delivery of health care services in Canada. Professionals and health care decision makers now wrestle with increasingly complex sets of challenges that must involve various types of professionals in programs of care. The result is that administrators, nurses, physicians, social workers and other professionals have had diverse roles to play in programs of care and, consequently, have insisted that their voices be heard in the decision-making process alongside the voices of patients and their families. Needless to say, the ensuing discussions have become difficult because the diverse professional
Chapter 5 Synthesis of Part 1 from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Flaherty Tim
Abstract: Analysis of professional interaction shows three points of interest:
Introduction to Part 2 from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Currently, health care practitioners who must wrestle with ethical issues in their daily work experience are confronted with a diversity of theories and principles in the field of ethics. Professionals do not have a standardized set of ethical tools and methods for deliberating and deciding on issues. Rather, they must choose among diverse sets of such tools. Furthermore, their own personal choices are never the last word. They must work with other professionals whose approaches to ethics are often quite different. These differences often give rise to conflicts. In health care institutions, these conflicts often must be resolved through discourse
Chapter 6 Theories of Discourse Ethics from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Sauer James
Abstract: One of the fundamental assumptions of the liberal tradition of democracy, and so of the institutions nourished explicitly or implicitly by that tradition, is that there are a plurality of values that can conflict with one another and that are not reducible to one another. Consequently, it is widely accepted that value conflicts will not be eliminated. We do not expect to resolve our value conflicts to the satisfaction of all parties.¹ However, this belief sets up a problem for social living. How can this irreducible pluralism of values be combined with a notion of legitimate social or collective action?
Chapter 7 The Cognitional Theory of Bernard Lonergan and the Structure of Ethical Deliberation from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: The focus of the proceduralists (e. g., Habermas, Rawls, Ackerman) is on the structure of ethical discourse and/or the political contracts and institutions that establish procedures for adjudicating conflicting value claims. Their interest is in general structural features that operate in all ethical discourse regardless of context or ethical content. In their view, all participants are rationally bound to accept these norms
Introduction to Part 3 from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: Part 3 of this study takes the results of parts 1 and 2 and applies them to a case-study, action-research context. Two teams of health care professionals from Anglophone and Francophone pediatric chronic care institutional settings volunteered to participate in videotaped discussions of case studies involving ethical issues typically encountered in their work. These videos were then examined by the research team in the light of the analyses of parts 1 and 2. In keeping with the overall goals of this study, the observers focussed on the ethical deliberation process. We sought to determine whether insights from the implicit ethics
Chapter 9 Action Research on Ethical Deliberation from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Monette Peter
Abstract: The work of the action research went forward with these two goals pursued concurrently. The members of the research team,
Chapter 11 Thinking About Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: The first concern was linked to the two practical goals of the project: (1) to help understand value conflicts and ethical decision making in the concrete experiences of multiprofessional health care teams; and (2) to develop tools
Concluding Reflections from:
Ethical Deliberation in Multiprofessional Health Care Teams
Author(s) Melchin Kenneth R.
Abstract: The changing face of health care has made the task of patient care much more complex than in past decades. This is especially the case in the field of chronic care. Professionals who care for patients, particular young children, face a bewildering array of challenges for which they often feel ill-prepared. These challenges come from the rapid pace of technological change, the diversity of religions and cultures in our society, the collaborative character of decision making, the restructuring of health care funding, the complexities of our diverse institutions of care and the diversity of citizens’ values regarding the end of
Book Title: Le Complexe d'Hermès-Regards philosophiques sur la traduction
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Le Blanc Charles
Abstract: Lauréat du Prix Victor-Barbeau et finaliste des Prix littéraires du Gouverneur général.Sans théorie générale, la traduction est limitée à réfléchir sur son activité de communication et à n'être jamais qu'une fraction d'une discipline nommée herméneutique. Cette limitation de la traduction à son rôle de communication, rôle qui marque un certain enfermement dans le langage, forme ce que l'on nomme le « complexe d'Hermès ». Cet ouvrage entend montrer qu'il est possible de sortir de cet enfermement du langage en considérant comment l'usage de la langue participe au sens du message, comment l'organisation rhétorique participe au sens fondamental du langage. Cela étant, on déplace la traduction de la linguistique à l'esthétique, permettant un discours théorique sur la traduction en tant que discipline esthétique. Sur ce chemin, on trouve alors Apollon, le dieu de la théorie et le dieu des arts, qui a raison d'Hermès, dieu du langage et dieu des menteurs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ckphw4
Book Title: Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): BOSSART W. H.
Abstract: Postmodernism is sometimes characterized as a loss of faith in reason, a loss of self, and an exaggerated relativism. W.H. Bossart discusses these alleged losses in the light of the "triumph" and subsequent decline of the transcendental turn in philosophy initiated by Kant.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6r4p
Introduction from:
Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience
Abstract: In “Averroes’ Search” Borges imaginatively reconstructs the effort of the greatest of the Western Muslim philosophers to deal with the
Poeticsof Aristotle.¹ Averroes’ commentaries on Aristotle were a powerful influence on Scholasticism, which means, of course, on the history of Western philosophy in general. But Averroes was dealing with an Aristotle in translation, an Aristotle, in fact, twice removed from Arabic, for Aristotle was first translated into Syriac by Christian Syrians and then into Arabic from the Syriac.² Knowing neither Greek nor Syriac, this monumental scholar, whom the Schoolmen honoured simply as the “the Commentator,” was twice removed from
CHAPTER 4 Discontinuity and Coherence from:
Apperception, Knowledge, and Experience
Abstract: We have been reading certain developments in German philosophy as an attempt to close the gap between Kant’s transcendental apparatus and the world to which that apparatus gives order and coherence. We have seen, however, that none of the developments under consideration has been able to provide a completely transcendental or a priori account of the Kantian schema. Rather schemata appear to result from the interaction of the mind and the empirical data of experience. Hence we might conclude with Heidegger that it is through schemata that what we call a “world” is first opened up. In confronting these diverse
[PART I Introduction] from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Abstract: Linda Christianson Ruffman, Francine Descarries, and Mary Lynn Stewart corne together to identify thé power of fédéral granting agencies in discouraging woman-centered research and scholarship in postsecondary institutions. The Canada Council and later thé Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council (SSHRC) failed to acknowledge women until thé Royal Commission on thé Status of Women and thé 1975 United Nations Décade on Women. The steps which led to SSHRC’s Women and Work Stratégie Grant and thé grant’s limited success in opening research funding to women are described. This chapter is written from thé perspective of thé académie activists who initially proposed
[PART II Introduction] from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Abstract: Linda Briskin’s article addresses thé topic of women and unions within économie parameters. She notes events from as early as 1981, and informs us about unions and feminist leaders across Canada. Exclusion from male-dominated executive boards and educational courses has been central to oppression of women in unions, particularly at national levels. In spite of thé introduction of affirmative action policy, Briskin recognizes that complex patterns of structural discrimination continue. A feminist leader in labour studies, she emphasizes thé importance of mutual support among union women at thé local level in achieving goals important for working women. Parsons and Goggins
Feminisms, Feminization, and Democratization in Canadian Unions from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Briskin Linda
Abstract: In a 1981 assessment of thé situation of women in Canadian unions, Charlotte Gray concluded that thé main achievement of thé previous five years of union activity was a shift in attitudes.¹ In 1996, extensive évidence suggested that thé organizing of union women has had a dramatic impact on thé structures, policies, practices, and climate of thé union movement — a transformation that goes well beyond thé elusive change in attitudes. The 1994 Policy Statement “Confronting thé Mean Society” (Canadian Labour Congress [CLC]) underscores thé significance of thèse changes:
Intersecting Multiple Sites of Marginalization: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Goggins Starla
Abstract: I am a white woman frorn Nova Scotia. Having been raised in a région of économie disparity and in a large family with a strong commitment to grassroots community activism, I became politically aware of social inequity
Girl Guides of Canada: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Whitney Patricia
Abstract: If woman came from Adams rib, as thé Bible claims, so thé Girl Guides came forth from thé Boy Scouts. The analogy is apt, given thé “Muscular Christianity” that imbues thé foundations of both thé Guides and thé Scouts. This particular form of Christian practice saw Victorian men living "by Gods blessing ‘a strong, daring, sporting wild man-of-thewoods’ life” while preaching “a healthful and manly Christianity, one which does not exalt thé féminine virtues to thé exclusion of thé masculine,” as thé Révérend Charles Kingsley wrote in
His Letters and Memories of His Life(1877) (Houghton 1964, 204). The Boy
Place aux actrices sociales! Les Franco-Ontariennes de 45 à 64 ans from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Garceau Marie-Luce
Abstract: Depuis le milieu des années 1980, les travaux scientifiques des chercheures, tout comme l’action soutenue des intervenantes féministes et des organismes
Aboriginal Women’s Economie Renewal: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Corbière Laura Day
Abstract: This paper will describe practical methods that allow Aboriginal women to succeed in économie development. A thorough background of thé historical oppression and légal limitations imposed on Aboriginal women — and thé nature and outcomes of thèse limitations — will explain that others besides Aboriginal people are responsible for their deprivation. This review will also explain why économie renewal must be based on thé cultural and historical strengths
Sous le soleil féministe en théologie from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Dumais Monique
Abstract: Depuis plus de 20 ans, des chercheures féministes en théologie et en sciences religieuses se préoccupent d’investir un champ de réflexion qui est notoirement patriarcal, celui de la théologie¹. Il est en effet apparu et devenu important que les femmes marquent des traces précises et visibles pour manifester qu’elles sont présentes et actives dans le monde de la pensée et de l’action religieuses. La féminisation d’institutions telles que la théologie chrétienne et l’Église catholique est un processus scientifique qui vise à créer et à promouvoir un espace d’expression, de valorisation et d’engagement du potentiel des femmes dans les domaines indiqués.
Réflexion sur les méthodes et la féminisation de l’institution médicale from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Gagné Elsy
Abstract: Dans le domaine de la santé, le développement des méthodes de recherche est un phénomène dont les implications économiques, politiques et sociales sont telles qu’il a, jusqu’à présent, suscité des débats intéressants et passionnés. La majorité des écrits portant sur le sujet repose essentiellement sur une conception technique de la science et de ses méthodes. Les chercheurs ne sont concernés que par les effets physiques des traitements mis en oeuvre. Il ne faut donc pas s’étonner que ces analyses, s’appuyant sur des techniques de recherche objectives, attribuent au progrès scientifique une place prépondérante parmi les nombreux facteurs de succès. Mais
Alternatives to Hierarchy in Feminist Organizational Design: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Laiken Marilyn E.
Abstract: Beyond management practices, which include issues of power and particular difficulty with thé rôle of executive director (Martin 1990; Ristock 1991), there seem to be many other obstacles to thé effective functioning of such organizations. Issues of class, gender, and ethnicity challenge increasingly multi-cultural and mixed économie workforces: “The attempt to replace
The Feminization of the Black Baptist Church in Nova Scotia from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Moreau Bernice
Abstract: I believe that any inquiry into Black Canadian womens tradition could spark controversy and debate over thé interprétation of concepts such as spirituality. This paper, an interprétation of thé religious or spiritual practices of a group of Black Canadian women in résistance to patriarchal church governance, is no exception. Be that as it may, I will argue that thèse Black womens religious or spiritual practices, until recently, were not only for their personal satisfaction and empowerment but were also stratégies for change in their spiritual community. It is worthy of note that thèse Christian Baptist women were not unique in
Mothering for the State: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Nason-Clark Nancy
Abstract: Poster mothers are women who enter a contractual relationship with thé child welfare System for thé care of children who hâve been apprehended by thé state. Poster care can be described as “thé provision of planned, preferably short-term, substitute care for children who cannot be adequately maintained at home” (McKenzie 1989,1). In New Brunswick, thé rôle of thé foster mother and other foster family members is described as providing thé apprehended child with “stability of a substitute family” (New Brunswick Health and Community Services Information Sheet n. d.).¹
Caring to Overcome Differences, Inequities, and Lifestyle Pressures: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Blackford Karen A.
Abstract: This article discusses disability and family life, arguing that living with disability can heighten ones appréciation for and practice of thé feminist principles of equity, dailiness, and respect of différence. This article is based on fmdings from a study of 18 Ontario families in which a parent has multiple sclerosis.
Implementing Principles: from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Rogerson Pat
Abstract: To expand thé capacity to act powerfully;
Part VI What We Have Learned from:
Feminist Success Stories - Célébrons nos réussites féministes
Author(s) Kirby Sandra
Abstract: In thé opening chapter of this book, we reviewed Rosemarie Tong’s (1989) idea that ferninist theory is demonstrated by action imbedded in particular locations and identifies. From this starting point, we introduced each of thé sections of thé book to highlight thé diverse identifies and locations of Canadian authors and their various approaches to creating change.
CHAPTER TWO LET NOT THY LEFT HAND KNOW WHAT THY RIGHT HAND DOETH from:
Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter
Abstract: The question of thinking and living in the New World began, for the British in Acadia, with a problem of continuity of place. Fundamentally, theirs was the problem of imagining continuity where there was none. Complicating the issue, however, was the fact that a great many British settlers were possessed of a sense of identity that had been in some measure disfigured and that they were consequently trying to recover. In most cases, the identity that they sought to preserve was of British origin.
CHAPTER THREE THE SHROUDING OF AMBIGUITY from:
Myth, Symbol, and Colonial Encounter
Abstract: Why is it that the British colonial language of inclusion (paternalistic and morally degrading though it was) was at such variance with colonial practice? The answer may lie in the British assertion of cultural purity that sought to create the colonial human being and Acadia itself, and that, paradoxically, constituted the foundation of calls for the civilization of aboriginal peoples. The claim to be firmly British was clearly problematic. These peoples’ European identity had been transformed in the process of becoming colonials. Western Europeans, for instance, were not scalpers; the British in eighteenth century Acadia were. After announcing in 1749
FOREWORD from:
Roman Ingarden's Ontology and Aesthetics
Author(s) Klibansky Raymond
Abstract: Dr. Mitscherling provides the first comprehensive monograph on the life and the works of a philosopher who in Germany and in his native Poland has long been known as a thinker of marked originality. Now that several of Roman Ingarden’s writings have become available in English translations and that his distinguished pupil Anna-Teresa Tymieniecka has published some essays on him, his thought is attracting growing interest both in Europe and in North America.
Book Title: A Theology for the Earth-The Contributions of Thomas Berry and Bernard Lonergan
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): DALTON ANNE MARIE
Abstract: While many feel that something must be done, few perceive the state of the ecological crisis as a "profound religious problem." While Thomas Berry sought to fire the imagination and motivate his listener to action, Bernard Lonergan was absorbed by the growing gulf between traditional Christian theology and its relevance to modern problems. This book brings together the work of these dynamic thinkers and examines their mutual contribution to theology for our time and for our planet.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6smd
CHAPTER ONE THE METHOD AND TRADITION OF BERRY’S CULTURAL HISTORY from:
A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: Berry’s first interest was cultural history, a designation he gave his own work and which remained significant. While on occasion he showed his awareness of political and social influences on the topic under discussion, it is clear throughout his work that his predominant focus was the influence of ideas and intellectual/spiritual movements in history. His penchant for tracing ideas across cultures and making syntheses of large amounts of data remained characteristic of his work.
CHAPTER SIX BERNARD LONERGAN AND EMERGENT PROBABILITY from:
A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: The previous chapters have been an attempt to understand Berry’s response to the ecological crisis in the context of the genetic development of his thought and under the horizon that attracted him in the later years of his work. In moving the horizon to Christian theology, we move beyond the question of what Berry himself meant or intended to the further question, What aspects of his work are going forward with respect to a reform of Christian theology in the light of the ecological crisis? Bernard Lonergan’s compelling and inclusive account of emergent probability is especially suited as a framework
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS from:
A Theology for the Earth
Abstract: This work originated in a desire to discover the relationship between two urgencies of our times. The first was the ecological crisis and the second, the reform of Christian theology. The preliminary, largely untested insights that moved the project into actuality were that (1) as Thomas Berry had loudly and clearly proclaimed, the ecological crisis was also religious; it had religious roots and it required a religious solution, and (2) a theology that did not serve to increase hope in the possibility of authentically negotiating the major crises of our time had already died. Bernard Lonergan seemed to corroborate this
Book Title: Pluralisme et délibération-Enjeux en philosophie politique contemporaine
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): SAVIDAN PATRICK
Abstract: Cet ouvrage à voix plurielles se place résolument dans une perspective interdisciplinaire. Neuf auteurs de premier plan, oeuvrant sous des horizons diversifiés, se confrontent à la crise actuelle de la démocratie. Une thèse centrale ordonne le travail d'analyse : cette crise tire son origine de l'oubli de la notion même de démocratie, dans le rejet de toute problématique de fondements. Identité et différence, communauté et pluralisme, droits individuels et droit collectifs, discours public et légitimation de valeurs, autant de problèmes cruciaux pour le renouvellement de la démocratie et de sa pratique publique, autant de centres autour desquels gravite la réflexion de la philosophie politique contemporaine. C'est ce qu'interroge ici chacune des contributions. Un fil rouge les traverse : la question de la reconnaissance de l'identité et de la différence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6srg
CHAPITRE DEUXIÈME LA GUERRE DES DIEUX: from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Renaut Alain
Abstract: La question que je voudrais examiner ici porte sur les fondements philosophiques de la conviction qui a cours aujourd’hui et qui est constitutive de l’idéal multiculturaliste, conviction suivant laquelle les sociétés humaines seront ou seraient d’autant meilleures qu’elles constitueront ou constitueraient des sociétés culturellement pluralistes. Au-delà du fait que la plupart des sociétés actuelles, surtout les sociétés démocratiques, sont, pour des raisons diverses tenant à leur origine ou à leur histoire, des sociétés multiculturelles, la question se pose en effet de savoir au juste ce qui permet de passer du fait au droit, de l’être au devoir être, de la
CHAPITRE QUATRIÈME DÉMOCRATIE ET RATIONALITÉ: from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Miguelez Roberto
Abstract: La problématique de la démocratie est devenue centrale dans la réflexion politique actuelle ainsi que dans la réflexion philosophique sur le politique. D’une part, l’échec des expériences du socialisme « réel » joint à la disparition de dictatures dans plusieurs pays du tiers monde semble confirmer de façon éclatante les mérites du régime démocratique, de même que son caractère incontournable dans des sociétés « modernes ». D’autre part, bien avant l’échec de ces expériences du socialisme « réel », l’opposition entre le totalitarisme et la démocratie était envisagée dans une optique philosophique, en particulier sous la forme d’une recherche des
CHAPITRE HUITIÈME LA RÉALITÉ EXISTANTE EST CHANCELANTE ET BRISÉE from:
Pluralisme et délibération
Author(s) Vernes Paule-Monique
Abstract: La confrontation actuelle entre l’universel, le singulier et les agrégats ou les totalités partielles menace-t-elle dans ces conditions ce qui faisait la
CHAPTER 1 God and the Good: from:
God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: These theologians will readily grant what is plainly true, namely, that as a matter of fact many non-religious people behave morally; but they contend that without a belief in God and his Law there is no
ground
CHAPTER 5 On Taking Human Nature as the Basis of Morality: from:
God and the Grounding of Morality
Abstract: Generalizations about linguistic analysis and ethics are not likely to be very useful; nor, as a general rule, are general descriptions of linguistic methods in philosophy enlightening. Unless one has actually seen some live philosophical tangle unsnarled by such a technique, one will not be very convinced by even a very accurate general description of the methods used. On the other hand, sample analyses of moral concepts often do not make clear their relevance (direct or indirect) to actual moral perplexities. Nevertheless I shall brave the latter barrier, rather than launch into yet another general description of linguistic analysis in
Introduction: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) MOSS JOHN
Abstract: Book titles are important. They provide the parentheses within which we read as an activity separable in mind from other things. The symposium relayed its title to the book and here we are. Do
Structuralism/Post-Structuralism: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) GODARD BARBARA
Abstract: My dilemma is that of Scheherazade, for I speak under the threat of forced closure. Like hers, mine is an endless tale, the saga of the “new new criticism” of Canadian literature. Such is the evolving nature of my subject that, even as I speak, it slips away from me. The thread of my narrative will be unravelled when I stop. Presenting their poststructuralist readings of Canadian literature, other critics will add new episodes to chapters or introduce new characters and new points of view. Such is the fate of a historical narrative about a contemporary phenomenon. Endings are elusive
Reading for Contradiction in the Literature of Colonial Space from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) MURRAY HEATHER
Abstract: To get at this complex experience we must begin from the hereness, the local nature of cadence. We never encounter cadence in the abstract; it is insistently here and now. Any man aspires to be at home where he lives, to celebrate communion
“Listen to the Voice”: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) GRACE SHERRILL
Abstract: The importance of Mikhail Bakhtin for literary scholarship does not reside in his often carelessly applied notions of carnival and polyphony. Bakhtin’s primary significance lies in his dialogism, that theory of discourse which enables him to establish, chart, and identify so many of the ways in which literary forms coincide with other diachronic systems of human communication. His theory of discourse is, in fact, an epistemology, even an ontological category (“
To be,” writes Bakhtin, “meansto communicate,” 1984, 287),¹ and it is a vital method for analyzing, not only texts, but concepts of literary canon, language acquisition, social identity, culture
Lacan: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) CAMERON BARRY
Abstract: This paper is an enactment of theory. It constitutes a series of beginnings about the implications and appropriations of theory: the implications of the relationship between psychoanalysis and (Canadian) literature, the ways in which each of these discourses—concerned as they both are with seeking meaning through narration and with the construction of the subject in and by language/discourse/culture—is implicated in the other as its “
otherness-to-itself,itsunconsciousness” (Felman 1982, 10), and my appropriations of theory and theorists. It is a paper everywhere traversed by other languages, other critical texts/discourses/scenes, other rhetorical strategies. Of necessity, too, my text is
Reconstructing Structuralism: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) STEELE JAMES
Abstract: The Theme-Text model of literary structure, a theory developed by Alexander Zholkovsky and Ju. K. Sčeglov, combines certain traditional critical concepts—rigorously redefined—with a set of systematic postulates for their practical use. In recent years, arguments and counterarguments advanced by structuralists and post-structuralists have indicated that neither the superimposition of pre-conceived structures on literary texts nor the sceptical rejection of the meaning of literary conventions offers a sound basis for literary theory. The Theme-Text model rests, as it were, on a more productive middle ground. Its main premise is that the artistic message of any TEXT¹ has a structure
History and/as Intertext from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) HUTCHEON LINDA
Abstract: The context of this examination of history and/as intertext is what I see as the paradoxes, not to say contradictions, of what we seem to want to call “postmodernism” in both artistic practice and theoretical discourse. Postmodernism in both areas is fundamentally paradoxical: in both, we find masterful denials of mastery, totalizing negations of totalization. The conventions of discourse are used and abused, inscribed and subverted, asserted and denied. This is the context in which I want to look at what I see as the literary equivalent of postmodern architecture. What we usually label as postmodernist in literature today, though,
Rewriting Roughing It from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) THURSTON JOHN
Abstract: Susanna Moodie did not write
Roughing It in the Bush.In fact,Roughing It in the Bushwas never written. Susanna Moodie andRoughing It in the Bushare interchangeable titles given to a collaborative act of textual production whose origin cannot be limited to one person or one point in time. This activity is ongoing. It is not merely a matter of the interpretation or reception ofRoughing It.The process for which this text is the focus involves its actual production. Susanna Moodie’s is only one hand among the many involved in this collaborative activity. In this paper,
Bakhtin Reads De Mille: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) CAVELL RICHARD
Abstract: A number of Canadian critics—Frank Davey, Bruce Powe, and Paul Stuewe among them—have recently argued that Canadian criticism has reached an impasse. While the thematic criticism which has characterized writing on Canadian literature is acknowledged to have played a necessary part in the articulation of a Canadian literary identity, that criticism has been unable to respond adequately to the formal nature of the texts about which it seeks to speak (as Russell Brown, among others, has argued). As a solution to this impasse, these critics have proposed a re-orientation towards formalism—towards “literature as language and . .
The Reader as Actor in the Novels of Timothy Findley from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) SEDDON ELIZABETH
Abstract: When the novelist experiments with narrative techniques the reader, necessarily, becomes actively engaged in the process of discerning patterns and perceiving meanings. Within the context of reader response theory this paper explores the narrative layering in the novels of Timothy Findley and the structuring of texts that consciously anticipate the role of the reader. Implicit in this reading of Findley’s work is a tripartite model of reader response theory that includes a self-consciously constructing writer, a self-referentially deconstructing reader, and the enigmatic text of their mutual exchange. While the theory of the reader’s response has tended to be based on
Blown Figures and Blood: from:
Future Indicative
Author(s) DORSCHT SUSAN RUDY
Abstract: Blank pages, comic strips, quotations, jokes, dreams, rhymes, newspaper clippings, ads, etymologies, multiple selves, silence: what we have traditionally referred to as the writing of Audrey Thomas is obsessed with the contextual, contradictory meanings, and meaninglessnesses, of words, with the ways subjectivity is represented, in fact present only, in and as language. When I say “the writing of Audrey Thomas” then, I mean to point out the duplicity of the phrase. The words “the writing of Audrey Thomas” may refer to those texts which, because of our particular ideology of literary production, we say have been written by Audrey Thomas,
Book Title: Europe et traduction- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Ballard Michel
Abstract: La traduction est un phénomène central pour l'Europe telle qu'elle est en train de se construire : elle assure les échanges entre états sans qu'une langue commune donne l'impression d'une hégémonie quelconque ou d'un abandon des identités nationales. Cet attachement à la notion d'identité tout en ménageant les échanges culturels est une constante de l'histoire européenne et ces échanges passées, fondés sur la traduction, font que la construction de l'Europe ne se réduit pas à la création d'une entité économique et politique : elle possède une dimension humaine et culturelle spécifique, qui lui donne son âme. Ce colloque a abordé ces deux aspects du rôle de la traduction en Europe : dans le passé et aujourd'hui comme facteur de découverte mutuelle et ferment culturel ; de manière plus spécifique aujourd'hui comme facteur d'équilibre et instrument de communication au sein des institutions. Le colloque a rassemblé des spécialistes de nombreux pays européens ou observateurs jetant un regard sur l'Europe. Les textes partent de la traduction en Irlande au Moyen Age pour aboutir aux traducteurs allemands de Roumanie au XIXe siècle. La dernière partie du colloque tente de faire le point sur divers aspects de la recherche en matière de traductologie ainsi que la formation des traducteurs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1cn6t8q
PRÉSENTATION from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Ballard Michel
Abstract: Par ce thème on choisissait de s’intéresser à une activité appelée à jouer un rôle de plus en plus important dans une Europe multilingue et dont le rôle passé comme ferment culturel et linguistique n’est pas toujours suffisamment connu. L’ensemble, on le voit, tend à s’organiser, de façon naturelle, en deux volets. Le premier est constitué
LA TRADUCTION COMME CONSCIENCE LINGUISTIQUE ET CULTURELLE: from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Ballard Michel
Abstract: Il est significatif de la position centrale de la traduction dans un dispositif cohérent et réaliste d’enseignement moderne et humaniste qu’elle apparaisse aussi bien dans les études dites de langues que dans les études dites de français (ou de lettres modernes). La traduction n’y assume pas ce rôle utilitaire qu’on lui voit conférer dans d’autres disciplines où l’on estime qu’elle permettra d’accéder à de l’information. Elle est davantage au coeur d’un dispositif d’échange et de réflexion dont le potentiel n’est d’ailleurs pas toujours pleinement exploité faute de politique élaborée et concertée en matière de didactique.
LE CLASSICISME FRANÇAIS FACE A L’ESPAGNE from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Hautcoeur Guiomar
Abstract: Est-il possible cependant de croire que les années 1660 aient représenté une fracture telle que deux générations de lettrés et d’écrivains soient devenus
APRES L’EDIT DE FONTAINEBLEAU: from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Lautel Alain
Abstract: Que furent-ils ? Non pas des génies ; mais des esprits curieux, des esprits actifs ; des caractères vigoureux, qui acceptèrent virilement la grande aventure de
GETTING TRANSLATED: from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Pym Anthony
Abstract: “The gréât Panama Canal to France has been opened...” Thus wrote Nietzsche to his friend Heinrich Kôselitz (Peter Gast) on 22 December 1888, jubilant at thé prospect of having his works translated into French. The translations would be an opening of some importance, not just a contact between océans but apparently also an avenue of escape from thé frustrations of writing in German for Germans. The move would make Nietzsche a properly European writer. And this enthusiasm coincided, at thé end of 1888, with thé date announced for thé first passage through thé Panama Canal. Yet history was not quite
ERNST JÜNGER, SUR LES FALAISES DE MARBRE - QUELQUES REFLEXIONS SUR LA TRADUCTION FRANÇAISE D’UN CHEF-D’ŒUVRE DE LA LITTERATURE ALLEMANDE from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Gallagher John D.
Abstract: En 1939, juste avant le début de la seconde guerre mondiale, l’écrivain allemand Ernst Jtinger fit paraître un roman allégorique intitulé
Auf den Marmorklippen.Ce récit hautement original, qui marque un sommet dans l’art de Jiinger, fut interprété aussitôt comme une critique acerbe de l’hitlérisme. L’action se déroule dans un pays mythique où s’affrontent le Bien et le Mal, le Mal étant représenté en l’occurrence sous les traits du sombre et sinistre grand Forestier.
RUDOLF BORCHARDT (1877-1945) – POETE ET TRADUCTEUR PLURILINGUE ALLEMAND from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Sallager Edgar
Abstract: Rudolf Borchardt est parmi les traducteurs du XX
esiècle tout à la fois l’un des plus complets, des plus productifs et des plus originaux¹. Qu’il soit de nos jours presque tombé dans l’oubli, vient peut-être, précisément, de ces superlatifs. A sa manière, en effet, R. B. était « Europe et Traduction »². Je voudrais donner une idée de la logique historique et du tragique personnel de cet oubli. Pour cela, on définira les traductions de B. comme lieu de rencontre de facteurs surtout psychologiques, mais aussi, bien entendu, historiques, sociologiques et poétologiques. Au lieu de présenter, de manière nécessairement sélective,
MOUVANCES EURO-LINGUISTIQUES. from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Gambier Yves
Abstract: L’intégration européenne est une expérience grandeur nature du contact des langues. Passée il y a plus d’un an de 12 à 15 membres et de 9 à 11 langues, l’Union Européenne (U.E.) ne cesse d’avoir un effet de loupe sur le changement linguistique, sur les transferts linguistiques. Pour nombre de pays, depuis longtemps adhérents du Marché Commun puis de la CEE et à la langue souvent d’assez large diffusion (français, allemand, anglais, espagnol, etc.), cet effet peut ne pas apparaitre, ou sembler très secondaire. Je me propose d’esquisser les enjeux et les facteurs linguistiques liés à l’adhésion de la Finlande
LA RECHERCHE TRADUCTOLOGIQUE EN ESPAGNE UNE TENTATIVE DE BILAN PROVISOIRE 1985-1995 from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Dominguez Fernando Navarro
Abstract: Sur les études de traduction et sa recherche en Espagne nous avons plusieurs aperçus de Julio-César Santoyo (1989 et 1991), Emilio Lorenzo (1989 et 1990) et Miguel-Angel Vega (1994). C’est surtout le premier qui donne un aperçu assez clair de l’état actuel de la recherche. Santoyo (1991:14) affirme que le point de départ de ces études dans notre pays commence à la fin des années soixante-dix. Jusqu’à cette date et au début des années 80, la recherche n’a pas été à la hauteur de celle de nos voisins car, comme souligne Santoyo (p. 19) dans l’article cité: « Ni aqui
LA TRADUCTION LITTERAIRE: from:
Europe et traduction
Author(s) Wuilmart Françoise
Abstract: J’ai quelque trente minutes pour vous dresser le portrait-robot du traducteur littéraire européen actuel. Pour dresser un portrait-robot, me direz-vous, il faut avoir aperçu la créature. Je voyage assez bien, et de par mes fonctions, je fréquente un très grand nombre de traducteurs littéraires, régulièrement. Et notre créature, je l’ai vue, à plusieurs reprises, de plus en plus souvent même. A croire qu’elle s’est multipliée, qu’elle a été clonée. Cela dit, le portrait que je vais risquer de brosser est peut-être aussi un portrait heuristique, dans lequel la part d’observation se mêle à celle du rêve. Toute hypothèse heuristique n’est-elle
The Last Days of Jesus in John: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: The passion narrative—recounting the last days of Jesus’s life—has the greatest continuity and overlap between the four canonical Gospels, including the Gospel of John. In fact, nearly half of John’s close parallels with Mark and the other Synoptics can be found in John 18–19, tracing the events from the arrest of Jesus to his burial. When the larger outline of parallels between John and the three Synoptic Gospels regarding the last days of Jesus is listed, the particulars are impressive. Therefore, the passion narratives of the Gospels serve as a fitting place to begin when investigating glimpses
Story, Plot, and History in the Johannine Passion Narrative from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Zumstein Jean
Abstract: Both narrative analysis as practiced by paul ricoeur (1983–1985) and the new approach to history as seen in Hayden White (1999) have emphasized the decisive hermeneutical role of plot in the construction of a story. In particular, the shaping of the plot in historiographical works allows the narrator to structure and contextualize the story and place it in a certain perspective (Bauckham 2007a; Luz 2009; Schmeller 2009). The creation of the plot is a central moment in the creation of meaning.
Points and Stars: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) North Wendy E. S.
Abstract: We may never know who the Fourth Evangelist was, but there is no mistaking the distinctiveness of his contribution to the New Testament witness to the life of Jesus of Nazareth. From the slow-moving, authoritarian Greek style, the cosmic scale of the setting, and the theological self-awareness of the central character, to the layering of irony, the often blistering polemic, and the ever-present parentheses to guide his readers, we know him well enough, do we not? In other words, we are aware that what dominates this account from beginning to end is the powerful and creative mind of its author.
Traces of Jesus in a Pre-Johannine Passion Narrative from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Fortna Robert T.
Abstract: As to the possibility of discovering “what actually happened,” my doctorfather, J. Louis Martyn, has often said that every would-be historian should repeat, each day three times before breakfast, slowly and solemnly, the words: “We do not know.” History is, broadly speaking, a myth: neither some ultimate truth, nor necessarily something untrue, but perhaps something unattainable.
The Works of Jesus in John: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: The works of Jesus are described in a number of ways in the canonical Gospels. Some of them are common to John and the Synoptics, while others are only in the Synoptics or only in John. John’s riddles include the fact that many of the Synoptic features of Jesus’s works are missing from John: Jesus’s baptism, his temptation in the wilderness, calling twelve disciples, exorcisms, healing lepers and women, dining with sinners, tax collectors, and Pharisees, sending out disciples on service trips, ministering in Nazareth, feeding the four thousand, the transfiguration on the mount, and making a long and momentous
Who Were the First Disciples of Jesus? from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Köstenberger Andreas J.
Abstract: In the early 1990s, while completing my PHD at Trinity Evangelical Divinity School in Deerfield, Illinois, I experienced a fairly precipitous drop in my ability to see. I procrastinated as long as I could before finally going to see a doctor. When, at long last, I got around to visiting an ophthalmologist, my eyesight had gotten so bad I was in desperate need of new glasses (or, as it turned out, special contact lenses). You might argue that something similar has happened in historical Jesus studies which, for centuries, have heavily tilted toward the Synoptic portrait of Jesus while giving
The Perspective of a Jewish Priest on the Johannine Timing of the Action in the Temple from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) McLaren James S.
Abstract: Discussion of the Fourth Gospel, Jesus, and history invariably incorporates consideration of the temple incident. In general, the Synoptic Gospel version of the positioning of the incident has been given priority over that of the Fourth Gospel. In effect, we have an either/or discussion, a choice between the Fourth Gospel and the Synoptic Gospels as
therecord of when the incident actually took place. My intention here is to argue for an alternative approach to be adopted when our concern is historical reconstruction. The Johannine version and the Synoptic version of the incident should be placed on equal footing, as
The Signs in the Gospel of John from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Schnelle Udo
Abstract: The Johannine miracle stories are of decisive importance for the interpretation of Johannine Christology, because, according to John 10:41, the working of signs is the distinguishing feature of Jesus as Messiah. Moreover, the miraculous signs are extremely important for an understanding that the Gospel as a whole, since πcιεϊν σημεϊα (“doing signs”) marks the beginning (2:11), the turning point (12:37), and the end (20:30) of Jesus’s activity in the Gospel of John. Only John tells his readers how they are to understand the miracles/signs: “Now Jesus did many other signs in the presence of the disciples, which are not written
John, Jesus, and Virtuoso Religion from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Ling Tim
Abstract: In November 2009, somewhere over the Atlantic Ocean on a flight to Dallas International Airport, I found myself having a conversation with a fellow passenger. She was returning home from Northern Sudan, where she had been working for an aid organization. She told me about the profound restrictions on the freedom of women to participate in any form of public life that for her characterized life in Sudan. She also, without noting the irony, told me about her work, which involved leading project teams and advocacy, including liaising with local political leaders. Her experience was both real and exceptional. We
Response to the Essays in Part 2 from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Merz Annette
Abstract: As a scholar deeply devoted to research into the historical Jesus, I have been interested in the activities and reflections of the John, Jesus, and History Group for years now. While I am delighted to give my critical thoughts on the articles in part 2 of this interesting volume, I do not intend to point out all stimulating contributions the articles provide to the scholarly debate. Instead, I will strictly confine myself to questions regarding the methodologies applied and the findings obtained with regard to historical-Jesus research. The reader will observe that in some cases the articles have challenged me
The Message of Jesus in John: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: The words of Jesus pose the greatest challenge to scholars seeking to identify the message of Jesus within his ministry. If the historical Jesus indeed spoke in parables about the kingdom of God—a near-certain likelihood—why does John’s narrative include no Synoptic-like parables, and why is the kingdom of God mentioned only in John 3:3,5? There Jesus declares access to the kingdom requires being born from above, and in John 18:36–37 he describes the character of his kingdom as one of truth; but unlike the teachings of the Synoptic Jesus, John’s kingdom sayings are contrastive statements (the kingdom
Semitic Language and Syntax within the Speech of the Johannine Jesus from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Graham Steven A.
Abstract: Despite the fact that the Fourth Gospel was finalized in a Hellenistic setting, its cultural background and thought forms remain thoroughly Jewish.¹ Recognizing Semitic terms and syntax within the Johannine narrative provides a distinctive window into the Evangelist’s presentation of Jesus. While scholars have tended to assume with varying degrees of certainty that none of the Evangelist’s words go back to the historical Jesus, the presence of this Semitic material nonetheless requires an accounting for its origin. Such an inquiry cannot claim to verify a primitive recollection of the Galilean rabbi within the memory of Johannine tradition, yet it still
Observations on God’s Agent and Agency in John 5–9: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Borgen Peder
Abstract: The Gospel of John is the product of expository activity. The most important components are the life of Jesus and the scriptures, transmitted as traditions and subject to applications and other forms of interpretation. The expository activity followed certain methods. Thus a dynamic process was at work, so that the metaphor of “biology” seems more adequate than the metaphor of “anatomy” (Culpepper 1983) as a descriptor for the Fourth Gospel’s character and structure.
John and the Historical Jesus: from:
John, Jesus, and History, Volume 3
Author(s) Dunn James D. G.
Abstract: The complaint that john’s Gospel has been neglected as a possible, perhaps even highly valuable, source for and contributor to the quest of the historical Jesus is a legitimate one. The issues include: (1) whether the lateninteenth century judgment that John’s Gospel was too different from the Synoptic Gospels to be counted as a historical source for Jesus should be wholly discounted or discounted in significant degree; and (2) whether, despite these differences, the character and details regarding Jesus of Nazareth still shine through John’s Gospel with sufficient clarity to substantiate, qualify, or add to whatever picture of Jesus is
2. La “hibridez” en un marco transnacional: from:
Políticas culturales:
Abstract: En “Marxismo después de Marx: historia, subalternidad y diferencia” (“ Marxism after Marx: History, subalternity and difference”, 1996), el historiador indio Dipesh Chakrabarty ofrece una lectura subalternista de la historicidad del capital. De la misma manera en que su colega Ranajit Guha en
A subaltern studies reader : 1986-1995(1997) recupera las huellas de la agencia subalterna en las narrativas históricas de los estados indios coloniales y poscoloniales, Chakrabarty también reflexiona acerca de la coexistencia de diferentes temporalidades al interior del tiempo del capital: por un lado existe la temporalidad del trabajo abstracto mercantilizado, que en su opinión sustenta la
CHAPTER FOUR The Concept of Nature: from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) KOTERSKI JOSEPH
Abstract: There are numerous ways in which philosophy can be of service to theological education. There is something invaluable, for instance, in the art of making distinctions, and among the many ways of acquiring such facility, this skill is especially promoted by training in logic, philosophy of nature, and metaphysics. It is not just a matter of avoiding arbitrary distinctions without a basis in real differences but of devising distinctions that make their cuts between diverse natural kinds. Crucial to the theoretical justification for this activity is the notion that things have real natures that can be discovered by human inquiry.
CHAPTER SIX Logos as Reason and Logos Incarnate: from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) DALEY BRIAN
Abstract: One of Pope Benedict XVI’s first serious clashes with the “chattering classes” represented by today’s media was his now-famous lecture to academic faculties of the University of Regensburg, in September of 2006. As you doubtless remember, that lecture was widely interpreted as a strong critique of Islam on religious grounds, and it inspired heated reactions—against him and against Christian institutions in general—all over the Muslim world. Actually, though, it was not a lecture on Islam and Christianity at all, but a subtle and carefully constructed discussion of faith and human reason. More explicitly, Benedict was really talking about
CHAPTER FIFTEEN Moderating the Magnanimous Man: from:
Theology Needs Philosophy
Author(s) GUERRA MARC D.
Abstract: In a still-influential book published sixty-three years ago, Harry Jaffa argued that St. Thomas Aquinas “mistakes Aristotle’s intention,” and for that reason Thomas endeavors to “save” the character of the
Nicomachean Ethic’s magnanimous man “in accordance with what Thomas evidently considers a higher standard of perfection.”¹ The higher standard of perfection Jaffa has in mind is “Christian ethics,” as revealed in an epigram from Winston Churchill that Jaffa uses to open his book: “It is baffling to reflect that what men call honor does not correspond always to Christian ethics.” Jaffa’s argument is not simply that Aristotle’s account of the
APPETITE FOR DISRUPTION from:
Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) SIMONSEN RASMUS R.
Abstract: Warm Bodies, Zombieland, World War Z, The Walking Dead, Pride and Prejudice and Zombies: The living dead seem to have infested every corner of popular culture. Zombies have definitely enjoyed a resurgence in recent years—something that appeared unlikely even a decade ago—and the termrenaissance(rebirth) seems entirely appropriate in this regard (see McGlotten and VanGundy 2013, 101). Be that as it may, I hesitate to call what we are witnessing now a zombie renaissance for the simple fact that, in most cases, what passes for a zombie in contemporary cinema is nothing more than a prop in
VAMPIROS MEXICANOS from:
Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) BORGIA DANIELLE
Abstract: Since the early nineteenth century, vampire literature has been an accepted way to introduce transgressive representations of sexualities into the cultural imagination of the Western world. The earliest English-language vampire tales expand on the folk legend of the
vardoulachafrom Eastern Europe (specifically Romania, Hungary, and Greece), starting with John Polidori’s “The Vampyre” of 1819 featuring the malevolent Lord Ruthven. These sexual transgressions are symbolized by the heightened emotion of fear and disgust with which the human characters regard the vampire protagonists’ pleasure in the murders of their victims. As Nina Auerbach, Talia Schaffer, and others have demonstrated, the fictional
HYBRIDITY SUCKS from:
Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) MUELLER MONIKA
Abstract: Annie Palmer, “the white witch of Rose Hall,” was a Jamaican plantation owner of British descent, who, according to the widespread lore about her, not only killed her three husbands in the 1820s but also practiced voodoo¹ and acquired a reputation for excessively whipping her slaves. Her legend has inspired two novels, a folk song, and several performances. While Johnny Cash’s 1973 song “The Legend of Annie Palmer” focuses on Annie as a sadistic slave owner and husband killer, Herbert G. de Lisser’s 1929 novel
The White Witch of Rosehall—the thematic focus of this essay—presents the legendary Annie
UNDEAD AVATARS from:
Vampires and Zombies
Author(s) KIRKLAND EWAN
Abstract: Despite the monster’s pervasive presence within the medium, academics writing about zombies in popular culture can have a somewhat smug attitude toward video games. There is often something slightly elitist in the attitude of theorists in their treatment of the video-game zombie as a lesser creature, a monstrous aberration in comparison to the true undead of cinema. Kyle Bishop’s disparaging description of the first
Resident Evilfilm as “an action-packed science fiction movie that is more video game than narrative” (2009, 19) resonates with Geoff King and Tanya Krzywinska’s observation that, within the cultural hierarchy, comparing films to games represents
Introduction: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Roberts Michelle Voss
Abstract: The North American religious context is changing. If, in recent generations, the dominant Protestant Christianity came to terms first with Catholicism and then again with Judaism and Islam as fellow “Abrahamic” faiths, today the pluralism within public, intellectual, and family life is even more evident. Many Christians are curious about this reality and open to learning about it. They are encountering religious diversity and evaluating their beliefs and practices in light of it.
6 “Only Goodness Matters”: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Farley Wendy
Abstract: Rory Block, the great blues singer, poses the question of evil in her wonderful song, “Faithless World.”¹ In her characteristic way, she evokes the poignancy of suffering, leaving the question of meaning visceral and open. She identifies us as “travelers” in this place of “many wonders” and “tears.” Her hard road has taught her that suffering is not punishment but rather a task given to the “enlightened,” a “lesson to be learned,” which each individual must learn for themselves. This “faithless world” is as, Jeffery Long puts it, a kind of moral gymnasium; it is a place of suffering against
10 What Child Is This? from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Bidlack Bede Benjamin
Abstract: Comparative theology begins with reading across religious bound aries until the reader finds a doctrine—or a practice, trope, or work of art—that resonates with his or her own faith. Close study disturbs the theologian’s categories and presuppositions. Usually, such a disturbance results in the expansion of a category, its rediscovery, or simply the growth of the reader. Such is the supposed path of the theological explorer.
11 Who Is the Suffering Servant? from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Moyaert Marianne
Abstract: Isaiah 53 played an important role in Christianity’s self-definition as it parted ways with Judaism, and it continued to have an impact far into the Middle Ages in theological-hermeneutical disputes
14 Sleeper, Awake: from:
Comparing Faithfully
Author(s) Betcher Sharon V.
Abstract: In her novel A
Tale for the Time Being, author and Zen Buddhist priest Ruth Ozeki sets before the reader—in the figure of a young Japanese girl, raised by her grand mother, a Buddhist nun—the question of how we live as “a time being,” as a floating speck of stardust in cosmic vastness: “Our human body appears and disappears moment by moment . . . , and this ceaseless arising and passing away is what we experience as time and being . . . In even a fraction of a second, we have the opportunity to . .
Introduction: from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: The traditional dualism of body and soul is now considered dated, but we have put a new binary structure in its place: that of flesh and body. Certainly this is an important step forward and one that has proved fruitful. When we talk of the “flesh” we describe the
lived experienceof our bodies, and we bring into view what we actually do, while we also bracket off theorganicquality of the “body,” seeing it as an obstacle to the body’s subjectivity. But there are some questions that we still need to consider: Hasn’t philosophy forgotten thematerialand
2 The Staging of the Last Supper from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: Ever since Vatican II, public discussions of the eucharist (not to mention library shelves devoted to the topic) have been dominated, quite appropriately, by reflections on the eucharist either as a meal (a “repast”) or an “action of grace” (
eu-charis): the food that gives us strength; the sharing with fellow guests; the one who presides, and so on. A curtain has been drawn, however, over the meaning of what is to be eaten—probably because the significance of transubstantiation, something inherited from medieval categories, is not simple to explain. If the eucharistic Passover is certainlybread broken for a new
[PART II Introduction] from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: Apocalypse, in the Book of Revelation, opens with a vast introductory program of the nuptial festivities of the Lamb (Rev. 19:7) (see Part I). God takes part with humankind in the Apocalypse—they are to sojourn with him—in a sense to dwell here: “‘See the home of God is among mortals. He will dwell with them; they will be his peoples, and God himself will be with them’” (Rev. 21:3). It is not enough to call on us to dwell with God, nor even to participate in the act of the eucharist as an appropriate place for remaining or
5 Return to the Organic from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: From “The Animal That Thus I Am” (Chapter 4), or rather from the animality in myself that is called upon to be subsumed and converted in the act of the eucharist, we return to the organic, to this
bodying lifethat we have already seen in the Kantian “mass of sensations” and in organs of the body as the site of drives (§ 4).¹ The organic, however, this time does not point simply to themanner, but to thematter, the organicity (or ensemble of phenomena associated with the organ), as well as the materiality (organic matter). It is not
8 “This Is My Body” from:
The Wedding Feast of the Lamb
Abstract: I am not going to attempt here a history of the doctrine of transubstantiation. This is neither the place nor the time to attempt something that has been done perfectly well and fully discussed by others.¹ The thread of my argument here leads me instead to try to think through the transformation of our embodiedness in the act of the eucharist (eucharistic
content), having rooted it in an animality that is converted into humanity through recognition of its filiation (eucharisticheritage), and before performing the donation in an agape that loses nothing of its erotic genesis even in relinquishing its
LOS UNIVERSOS TEXTUALES DE JOSÉ MEDINA ECHAVARRÍA EN MÉXICO: from:
Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) López Laura Angélica Moya
Abstract: La Colección de Sociología del Fondo de Cultura Económica (fce) y
Jornadas, publicación del Centro de Estudios Sociales de El Colegio de México (1943-1946), tuvieron su punto de partida como una selección de obras especializadas que contribuyeron a la formación de los primeros practicantes de ciencias sociales a partir de los años cuarenta del siglo xx en México. Asimismo, son claro reflejo de uno de los mecanismos más destacados de socialización intelectual de su época. El estudio de colecciones como éstas y, en general, de las publicaciones especializadas en ciencias sociales, desde la perspectiva de la historia del libro, permite
AMOR Y SENTIDO: from:
Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) Torres Luis Arturo
Abstract: Cuatro son al menos, desde la prescripción epistemológica de la historiografía contemporánea, los ejes a partir de los cuales es posible describir el contenido disciplinar de su práctica, función y racionalidad operativa: el que trata de su ser como el de una observación liminar relativa al tiempo histórico; el que la sitúa dentro de un espacio cultural y un lugar institucional; el que la condensa en los términos de su realización como escritura; y el que, bajo la adscripción de su insoslayable autorreferencialidad, la despliega como observación de segundo orden abocada a dar cuenta de los límites de su caracterización
JUAN HERNÁNDEZ LUNA from:
Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) Gerardo Diana Roselly Pérez
Abstract: El 12 de marzo de 1940 Juan Hernández Luna envió una carta al Presidente de La Casa de España, el reconocido escritor Alfonso Reyes, en la que solicitaba una beca para cursar el Doctorado en Filosofía en la Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México.¹ En esas fechas, Hernández Luna tenía veintisiete años de edad y vivía en su natal Morelia, Michoacán donde llevaba una vida social, cultural y políticamente activa.
LA PLUMA Y EL PLUMERO. from:
Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) de Pablo Hammeken Luis
Abstract: Es mucho lo que se puede decir sobre Adolfo Salazar y Roiz de Palacios (1890-1958) porque también es mucho, y muy variado, lo que hizo a lo largo de su vida. Fue, entre otras cosas, compositor, poeta, musicólogo autodidacta, historiador del arte, promotor de la cultura, extraordinario docente, exquisito conversador, gastrónomo, enólogo y
bon-vivant, buen amigo y generoso consejero de algunos de los más grandes artistas e intelectuales de su época y, sin lugar a dudas, el crítico musical de habla hispana más influyente del siglo xx. Se trata de un verdadero virtuoso de la pluma: el mero volumen de
JOSÉ MORENO VILLA from:
Los empeños de una casa
Author(s) Arias Rebeca Saavedra
Abstract: A finales de noviembre de 1938, Daniel Cosío Villegas, impulsor de La Casa de España en México, en carta a Enrique Arreguín, expresaba sus miedos ante la posibilidad de que la élite cultural mexicana se mostrase hostil a los españoles invitados por el gobierno de Lázaro Cárdenas a instalarse en México para trabajar en aquella institución. Intuía que, quizás, José Gaos, Juan de la Encina o Gonzalo Rodríguez Lafora podían encontrar, en sus respectivos medios, si no el rechazo abierto, sí una actitud de indiferencia o incomprensión hacia sus trabajos. Sin embargo, estaba seguro de que ni Enrique Díez-Canedo ni
Book Title: Beyond Bali-Subaltern Citizens and Post-Colonial Intimacy
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Esposito Adele
Abstract: This ethnography explores how Balinese citizens produce postcolonial intimacy-a complex interaction of claims to proximity and mutuality between themselves and the Dutch under colonialism that continues today. Such claims, Ana Dragojlovic explains, are crucial for the diasporic reconfiguration of kebalian, or Balinese-ness, a concept that encompasses the personal, social, and cultural complexities involved in Balinese identity in Dutch postcolonial society. This identity enables Balinese migrants to see themselves as carriers of unique cultural traditions both promoted by and in disagreement with Dutch cultural values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d8hb16
Introduction from:
Beyond Bali
Abstract: This book is an ethnography that charts reconfigurations of
kebalian(Balineseness) – a notion that encompasses the personal, social, and cultural complexities involved in being persons and collectives of Balinese ethnicity in post-colonial Dutch society. I explore how Balinese subaltern citizens engage in discourses and materialities of the colonial in the present by asserting claims of proximity between themselves and the Dutch on the basis of colonial history through an active production of what I call postcolonial intimacy. My understanding of Balinese subaltern citizens’ claims of proximity that emerged so prominently in my ethnographic material urges me not to see
INTRODUCTION from:
Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: Stephen Duffy observes that “no dimension of Christian life or thought can be addressed without” at least implicit recourse to the problem of nature and grace.¹ Precisely because of its fundamental importance, it embraces an exceedingly long and complex history. It has generated magisterial pronouncements, fulminated controversies that have fractured Christendom, and pitted religious orders against each other. Moreover, no commentator in whatever era can say anything meaningful about the subject without appealing to metaphysics, which finds little sympathy in today’s agnosticism about universal truth claims. The question thus arises: how is it currently possible for someone to address the
Chapter 2 ATTEMPTED REUNIONS from:
Analogies of Transcendence
Abstract: We have seen that
Dei Verbumexpansively recapitulates medieval exegesis. Building on the letter as the intrinsic symbol of the spirit, it understands divine revelation as a system of continuous symbols that join together Christ, his words and works, the apostolic tradition of the church, and the written scriptures and their interpretation. Whenever a synthesis is grounded in symbolism, its aesthetic dimension cannot help but be invoked. Heidegger reminds us, for instance, that symbolism constitutes the essence of art.¹ In the creative fashioning of an artifact, truth itself is preserved as beauty. Accordingly, if the Son is the Father’s image,
Book Title: Body or the Soul?-Religion and Culture in a Quebec Parish, 1736-1901
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ABBOTT FRANK A.
Abstract: There are many analyses of Tractarianism – a nineteenth-century form of Anglicanism that emphasized its Catholic origins – but how did people in the colonies react to the High Church movement? Beating against the Wind, a study in nineteenth-century vernacular spirituality, emphasizes the power of faith on a shifting frontier in a transatlantic world. Focusing on people living along the Newfoundland and Labrador coast, Calvin Hollett presents a nuanced perspective on popular resistance to the colonial emissary Bishop Edward Feild and his spiritual regimen of order, silence, and solemnity. Whether by outright opposing Bishop Feild, or by simply ignoring his wishes and views, or by brokering a hybrid style of Gothic architecture, the people of Newfoundland and Labrador demonstrated their independence in the face of an attempt at hierarchical ascendency upon the arrival of Tractarianism in British North America. Instead, they continued to practise evangelical Anglicanism and participate in Methodist revivals, and thereby negotiated a popular Protestantism, one often infused with the spirituality of other seafarers from Nova Scotia and New England. Exploring the interaction between popular spirituality and religious authority, Beating against the Wind challenges the traditional claim of Feild’s success in bringing Tractarianism to the colony while exploring the resistance to Feild’s initiatives and the reasons for his disappointments.There are many analyses of Tractarianism – a nineteenth-century form of Anglicanism that emphasized its Catholic origins – but how did people in the colonies react to the High Church movement? Beating against the Wind, a study in nineteenth-century vernacular spirituality, emphasizes the power of faith on a shifting frontier in a transatlantic world. Focusing on people living along the Newfoundland and Labrador coast, Calvin Hollett presents a nuanced perspective on popular resistance to the colonial emissary Bishop Edward Feild and his spiritual regimen of order, silence, and solemnity. Whether by outright opposing Bishop Feild, or by simply ignoring his wishes and views, or by brokering a hybrid style of Gothic architecture, the people of Newfoundland and Labrador demonstrated their independence in the face of an attempt at hierarchical ascendency upon the arrival of Tractarianism in British North America. Instead, they continued to practise evangelical Anglicanism and participate in Methodist revivals, and thereby negotiated a popular Protestantism, one often infused with the spirituality of other seafarers from Nova Scotia and New England. Exploring the interaction between popular spirituality and religious authority, Beating against the Wind challenges the traditional claim of Feild’s success in bringing Tractarianism to the colony while exploring the resistance to Feild’s initiatives and the reasons for his disappointments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9892h
Book Title: The Event-Literature and Theory
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): ROWNER ILAI
Abstract: Rowner offers a new method of thinking about the particular characteristics of the event within literary works and defines the creative value of literature as the aspiration toward
the un-happening within the happening. In this study the experience of literature-as an act of both writing and reading-becomes the struggle to capture the excessive movement of the event while also revealing the creative energy within that work of literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nk7w
7 Toward a Theory of Literary Events: from:
The Event
Abstract: What is literature? What is the being of literature? What is the
literarinessof literature? What happens as a result of the fact that we have literature? Is there a particular substance or essence of literature? Although answers to these questions are offered in diverse classical poetics, aesthetics, and modern textual theories, these fundamental questions remain enigmatic. What is literature as a discourse and as an art, as an aesthetic object and as a poetic experience?
9 Writing Corporeally: from:
The Event
Abstract: Defining the event of literature as
the un-happening within the happeningbrings us to a main intersection between a transcendent understanding of the event and an immanent approach to it. The transcendent approach emphasizes the absolute other that engenders the happening: essentially the impossible horizon of the happening or the ungraspable which is always about to occur. The immanent approach insists, instead, that the event is graspable as it takes place, that it is a fact unfolding among or between its declared historical elements, a real undetermined movement of flight, what Nancy calls “thethatitself of the ‘that-it-happens.’”¹ To
10 AIR RAID TWO: from:
The Event
Abstract: An uncanny scene of sexual seduction takes place under the menace of an air raid at the end of Céline’s novel
Féerie pour une autre fois(Fable for Another Time).¹ Locked in a prison cell, Ferdinand, the character of the writer in this novel, attaches his memories of the Allies’ invasion of Paris in the spring of 1944 to his betrayal by his best friend and his wife.² This scene begins by a sudden, brief eruption of the narrative tone, a violent textual crack, and what appears to be present of the writing is flooded by anger and shame. The
Book Title: Ethos and Narrative Interpretation-The Negotiation of Values in Fiction
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Herman David
Abstract: Demonstrating the extent to which ethos attributions, and hence, interpretive acts, play a tacit role in many methods of narratological analysis, Korthals Altes also questions the agenda and epistemological status of various narratologies, both classical and post-classical. Her approach, rooted in a broad understanding of the role and circulation of narrative art in culture, rehabilitates interpretation, both as a tool and as an object of investigation in narrative studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nm18
Why Ethos? from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: Houellebecq’s work and persona provide for a book like mine almost too good a case.¹ Let me explain what I mean through some brief comments on
Atomised, the author’s breakthrough novel, and its reception.²Atomisedtells the story of two half brothers, Bruno and Michel, left to the care of their grandparents by their mother, who went off to discover the thrills and deceptions of self-actualization, spurred by the spirit of May 1968 in France. While Bruno is obsessed with sex, which brings him more solitary suffering than pleasure, Michel, just as lonely and desperate, withdraws into the realm of
[PART 1. Introduction] from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The question of how and why readers would attribute an ethos to literary characters, narrators, or authors is part of the more general issue of how people make meaning from and with texts. Within the humanities, such issues are traditionally the province of hermeneutics, which encompasses the theory, the method (or the “art”), and the practice of interpreting texts. Alternately, interpretations and their underlying processes are studied from the perspective of literary and aesthetic phenomenology, the sociology of literature, discourse analysis, the reception history of literary works (
Wirkungsgeschichte), or empirical research on actual readers’ responses. Current literary and narrative studies
1 Literary Interpretation, Ethos Attributions, and the Negotiation of Values in Culture from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The following chapter brings together insights from different theoretical frameworks. My intention is not, however, to suggest that such an eclectic juxtaposition amounts to a theory. My aim is, rather, to point out between these quite different frameworks transversal echoes that shed fresh light on narrative, interpretation, and in particular, ethos attributions. While this chapter’s wide-angle perspective seems to lead us away from the more concrete issue of ethos attribution in the context of literary narratives, it actually speaks to the broader relevance of my study, explaining why it is important to debate the authenticity of James Frey’s narrator or
[PART 2. Introduction] from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The controversy surrounding frey’s
A Million Little Pieces, sparked by his passing off as factually correct and honest a memoir that rather creatively invented its truth, raises some central questions. What might the consequences be of framing a work as fiction, or rather as (to some extent) factual, and of experiencing our reading of such a novel as a communication with a fictional character, or rather with a narrator, or even an author? In what respect would our ethos attribution change? What made readers expect Frey to be authentic and truthful in his narration of his character’s tribulations? Can and
3 Narratology between Hermeneutics and Cognitive Science from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: As has been amply observed, the current proliferation of narratologies did not exactly increase disciplinary consensus on terms and procedures. Concepts that involve ethos attribution, such as those of the implied author or the (un)reliability of narrators, play a central role in rhetorical, ethical, and other forms of critically engaged narratologies, yet there is not much agreement about even these core concepts. This should not come as a surprise, since such concepts bring into the open fundamental divergences of opinion and uncertainties about what narratology is or should be.¹ The appeal to cognitive sciences has not really solved this problem,
On Narrative, Ethos, and Ethics from:
Ethos and Narrative Interpretation
Abstract: The notion of ethos has been characterized by Ruth Amossy as a crossroads at which different critical approaches meet. I hope this book has highlighted the fruitfulness of making narratology encounter some perspectives focused on the social construction and negotiations of meanings and values.
4 Radcliffe-Brown and “Applied Anthropology” at Cape Town and Sydney from:
Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) CAMPBELL IAN
Abstract: A. R. Radcliffe-Brown (1881–1955) was one of the founders of modern social anthropology. His published output was not large, but it was influential. His reputation was probably greater through his teaching and personal contacts, for he was a compelling lecturer with an apparently powerful and attractive personality. The extent of his fieldwork is compared unfavorably with that of his contemporary, Bronislaw Malinowski (though Malinowski’s only sustained experience of fieldwork was his enforced stay in the Trobriands). Hence Radcliffe-Brown is known mainly as a theorist, not as an ethnographer, and as an advocate of pure research grounded in the scientific
6 An Elegy for a Structuralist Legacy: from:
Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) DARNELL REGNA
Abstract: Structuralism, whatever that term may mean over a decade into the twenty-first century, is overdue for reassessment. The death of Claude Lévi-Strauss in 2009 provides the obligation as well as the opportunity to engage in such an exercise of historical retrospect. Lévi-Strauss moved with characteristic creative aplomb across a remarkable range of potential disciplinary homes, but anthropology remained his home base, the place of comfort from which to discomfit other disciplines. The history of anthropology therefore has a particular claim to the movement he founded and popularized beyond its origins in Saussurean linguistics despite the fact that French structuralism has
7 Lévi-Strauss’s Approach to Systems of Classification: from:
Anthropologists and Their Traditions across National Borders
Author(s) RUBEL PAULA
Abstract: Lévi-Strauss, in the first paragraph of
The Savage Mind, refers to Franz Boas’s discussion in theIntroduction to the Handbook of American Indian Languages. Though many scholars once maintained that native people lacked the capacity for “abstract thought,” Lévi-Strauss agreed with Boas that the systems of classification found in the languages and cultures of “native peoples” were indeed examples of abstract thought.
Book Title: Artifacts and Illuminations-Critical Essays on Loren Eiseley
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: As a writer who bridged the sciences and the humanities, Eiseley is a challenge for scholars locked into rigid disciplinary boundaries.
Artifacts and Illuminations, the first full-length collection of critical essays on the writing of Eiseley, situates his work in the genres of creative nonfiction and nature writing. The contributing scholars apply a variety of critical approaches, including ecocriticism and place-oriented studies ranging across prairie, urban, and international contexts. Contributors explore such diverse topics as Eiseley's use of anthropomorphism and Jungian concepts and examine how his work was informed by synecdoche. Long overdue, this collection demonstrates Eiseley's continuing relevance as both a skilled literary craftsman and a profound thinker about the human place in the natural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nqjg
Introduction from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) MAHER SUSAN N.
Abstract: Acknowledged as one of the most important twentieth-century American nature writers, Loren Eiseley was a widely admired practitioner of creative nonfiction, a genre that, in part due to his example, has flourished in recent decades. Contemporary nature writers regularly cite Eiseley as an inspiration and model. General readers, as well, appreciate Eiseley’s eloquent, complex, and informative essays; devoted readers have helped keep Eiseley continuously in print since his books first began appearing more than a half century ago. Clearly, Eiseley is a writer who matters.
2 “Never Going to Cease My Wandering”: from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) DOWNS M. CATHERINE
Abstract: In the summer of 1926 or thereabouts, young Loren Eiseley and his friends from high school hopped a freight in California (Christianson,
Fox50–54).¹ One of their number was, in the slang of Eiseley-the-boy’s favorite author Jack London, aprofesh, a boy who had jumped trains in previous acts of derring-do. Perhaps in earlier years he had enticed Eiseley on short runs from the freight yards of Lincoln, Nebraska, where they were living, to the next town, but this California trip was a real adventure. Their trip had the hallmarks of boys’ rough play and concomitant bad planning. The
5 Anthropomorphizing the Essay: from:
Artifacts and Illuminations
Author(s) BOARDMAN KATHLEEN
Abstract: “Anthropomorphizing: the charge of my critics.” With these abrupt words, Loren Eiseley began a one-paragraph notebook entry defending his representations of animals and animal-human relationships from the attacks of real and imagined detractors. On the day of the entry — January 22, 1970 — Eiseley was in the midst of a productive late-career period:The Unexpected Universehad recently been published,The Invisible Pyramidwas about to appear, and no doubt Eiseley was in the process of assembling and revising the essays — most of them previously published — that would composeThe Night Country. In addition, he was drafting
Book Title: Writing at the Limit-The Novel in the New Media Ecology
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): PUNDAY DANIEL
Abstract: By examining how some of our best fiction writers have taken up the challenge of film, television, video games, and hypertext, Daniel Punday offers an enlightening look into the current status of such fundamental narrative concepts as character, plot, and setting. He considers well-known postmodernists like Thomas Pynchon and Robert Coover, more-accessible authors like Maxine Hong Kingston and Oscar Hijuelos, and unjustly overlooked writers like Susan Daitch and Kenneth Gangemi, and asks how their works investigate the nature and limits of print as a medium for storytelling.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1d9nr4r
Coda: from:
Writing at the Limit
Abstract: In this book, I have offered an unlikely image of the novel within the contemporary media ecology. We would expect that media would create a sense of connection to social and cultural forms by reaching out to describe larger media systems directly. Instead, what we have seen is that the contemporary media novel emphasizes quite the opposite: the limits of writing. Instead of isolating novelists, characters, and readers, those limits are precisely what allow them to be aware of the world beyond themselves. In emphasizing media limits, these writers are able to embrace an agency that comes from being an
Book Title: Contemporary Comics Storytelling- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KUKKONEN KARIN
Abstract: Applying a cognitive approach to reading comics in all their narrative richness and intricacy,
Contemporary Comics Storytellingopens an intriguing perspective on how these works engage the legacy of postmodernism-its subversion, self-reflexivity, and moral contingency. Its three case studies trace how contemporary comics tie into deep traditions of visual and verbal storytelling, how they reevaluate their own status as fiction, and how the fictional minds of their characters generate complex ethical thought experiments. At a time when the medium is taken more and more seriously as intricate and compelling literary art, this book lays the groundwork for an analysis of the ways in which comics challenge and engage readers' minds. It brings together comics studies with narratology and literary criticism and, in so doing, provides a new set of tools for evaluating the graphic novel as an emergent literary form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8c6
Introduction from:
Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: Many reasons for the rise of comics to a medium of cultural prominence have been put forward in recent years. Paul Douglas Lopes in
Demanding Respect: The Evolution of the American Comic Book(2009) emphasizes one: “While comic books originally were based on short stories in serial format, now comic books present long-arced narratives with complex storylines. Now the fastest growing market for comic books, graphic novels, presents this art in book-length format, again allowing for complex and compelling storytelling” (2009, xvi). Lopes then goes on to discuss how sophisticated storytelling in comics moves beyond genre boundaries and attracts the
1 How to Analyze Comics Cognitively from:
Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: The first Sunday installment of Milton Caniff’s
Steve Canyonseries (1947–88) presents readers with a formidable density of narrative information: from patterns of black and white on the page, readers can construct an entire story. They identify characters, understand what motivates them and how they relate to each other, and connect their actions and words into a narrative. How does this process work? And how can we harness insights into the cognitive processes involved when reading comics for analyzing them? Milton Caniff, one of the comics authors who set the standards for storytelling in the medium in the 1930s
2 Textual Traditions in Comics: from:
Contemporary Comics Storytelling
Abstract: A man leaves a note for the woman he has just spent the night with. He asks her to pick up his suits from the dry cleaners and to do his laundry. He mentions that he has helped himself to her spare apartment keys and some money from her purse. “I didn’t want to wake you to ask,” he writes, “and knew you wouldn’t mind” (
Fables1:30). This man, who treats women like domestic servants and suppliers of money, and disenfranchises them, is none other than Prince Charming, the coveted spouse and the character supplying the happy ending for many
Book Title: Herta Müller-Politics and Aesthetics
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): Glajar Valentina
Abstract: Two languages-German and Romanian-inform the novels, essays, and collage poetry of Nobel laureate Herta Müller. Describing her writing as "autofictional," Müller depicts the effects of violence, cruelty, and terror on her characters based on her own experiences in Communist Romania under the repressive Nicolae Ceauşescu regime.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ddr8pv
Introduction from:
Herta Müller
Author(s) Glajar Valentina
Abstract: Two languages inform the writings of Nobel Prize laureate Herta Müller: German as well as Romanian bear on Müller’s novels, essays, and collage poetry. Born in 1953 in German-speaking Nitzkydorf—a Banat-Swabian village in southwestern Romania—Müller grew up as part of a linguistic and ethnic minority in a Communist state. Her writing career began with a fictionalized portrayal of the village of her childhood, an isolated backward community deeply influenced by National Socialism and characterized by narrow-minded ethnocentrism. Romanian literary censorship, which had dramatically increased in the 1980s, delayed the publication of Müller’s first collection of short stories for
6 “Die akute Einsamkeit des Menschen”: from:
Herta Müller
Author(s) Haines Brigid
Abstract: Loneliness is an unnatural and unwanted state of isolation in which the individual cannot thrive.¹ It is not to be confused with solitude, which may be sought and savored. Loneliness is often seen as a feature of modernity, associated with the breakdown of traditional communities and extended family structures. In the second half of the twentieth century it was identified more as a product of Western capitalist societies, which tend to atom ize individuals, than of Eastern bloc societies. The latter attempted to unite their citizens through socialist values and central planning, while in practice often uniting them in disaffection.
7 Facts, Fiction, Autofiction, and Surfiction in Herta Müller’s Work from:
Herta Müller
Author(s) Bozzi Paola
Abstract: Over the last fifteen years the emergence of groundbreaking work on trauma in literature and critical theory has made a profound impact both within and beyond the field of literature. This cutting-edge research has been applied to Herta Müller’s work by scholars such as Beverley Driver Eddy, Brigid Haines, and Lyn Marven, who have connected images and strategies of fragmentation and disruption with trauma theory. Müller surely represents and reflects upon the traumatic events of twentiethcentury Europe, as well as the cultural diversity of East Central Europe; she feels compelled to write about them (Glajar 2) and to show her
11 Osmoses: from:
Herta Müller
Author(s) Johannsen Anja
Abstract: After her Nobel Prize was announced, commentators never tired of emphasizing that Herta Müller lent her literary and political voice to the victims of Stalinism and the Ceauşescu dictatorship. Müller is without question a political author whose writing describes and indicts the mechanisms of surveillance and oppression and their effects on people. Harassment and surveillance by the authorities and secret police of the Romanian dictatorship frequently mark the day-to-day life of her protagonists. The living conditions of her characters have severely damaged them and considerably affected their perception of themselves and the world. What is interesting above all, in my
Book Title: Born in the Blood-On Native American Translation
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Swann Brian
Abstract: Since Europeans first encountered Native Americans, problems relating to language and text translation have been an issue. Translators needed to create the tools for translation, such as dictionaries, still a difficult undertaking today. Although the fact that many Native languages do not share even the same structures or classes of words as European languages has always made translation difficult, translating cultural values and perceptions into the idiom of another culture renders the process even more difficult.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1df4gp3
Introduction from:
Born in the Blood
Author(s) Swann Brian
Abstract: Translating Native American languages is a very different process from translating European languages. For one thing, the translation of European languages does not usually present real physical and spiritual dangers.¹ For another, there are the complexities of collaboration between non-Native academics and Native American culture-bearers, formerly “informants.” Moreover, translators have to decide how to transform oral expression into a written form, and in addition they may have to produce their own grammars and dictionaries, as part of what Julie Brittain and Marguerite MacKenzie in this volume term “a unique constellation of factors.” This constellation can also include “the interaction of
8 In the Words of Powhatan: from:
Born in the Blood
Author(s) Rudes Blair A.
Abstract: Among the numerous screen and stage events staged to celebrate the four hundredth anniversary of the founding of the first permanent English colony in the Americas at Jamestown, Virginia, in 1607, perhaps the most ambitious and widely seen was the film
The New World(New Line Cinema 2005). The film’s screenwriter and director, Terrence Malick, used the legendary romance of Pocahontas and John Smith to depict the impact that the settlement of Jamestown had on both the English and the native Virginia Algonquian people. Despite the questions that surround the authenticity of the Pocahontas story, Malick wanted to provide as
11 Translating the Boundary between Life and Death in O’odham Devil Songs from:
Born in the Blood
Author(s) Lopez David I.
Abstract: I do not think it a stretch to say that translating Native verbal arts occupies an unseen boundary with its comings and goings between what is actually said, what is interpreted, then invented out of those words, and the written text that is presented as a faithful rendition of what was originally stated or sung. And while translation is of course reliant upon getting the words straight, I think the heart of translation is centrally about re-expressing the rhythms and movements expressed by those words. As we are all very much aware, words have the ability to move us. And
19 Memories of Translation: from:
Born in the Blood
Author(s) Thompson Laurence C.
Abstract: This is not a technical essay on the sport of translation. It is some reminiscences about the experiences of a pair of linguists while studying several of the twenty-three Salishan languages of the Pacific Northwest during the active working years of our lives, between 1960 and 1995. We realize how very fortunate we were to be able to work with elders of the Lummi, Lushootseed, Thompson River Salish, Klallam, and Tillamook.
Book Title: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence-Native Ghosts in North American Culture and History
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska Paperback
Author(s): Thrush Coll
Abstract: Phantom Past, Indigenous Presenceexplores the importance of ancestral spirits and historic places in Indigenous and settler communities as they relate to territory and history-in particular cultural, political, social, historical, and environmental contexts. From examinations of how individuals reacted to historical cases of "hauntings," to how Native phantoms have functioned in the literature of North Americans, to interdisciplinary studies of how such beliefs and narratives allowed European settlers and Indigenous people to make sense of the legacies of colonialism and conquest, these essays show how the past and the present are intertwined through these stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1df4h07
2 Violence on the Home Front in Robinson Jeffers’s “Tamar” from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) GANO GENEVA M.
Abstract: World War I was not “the Good War.” Americans in general were reluctant to become involved in what was widely viewed as a “European war” (Wilson’s successful presidential campaign slogan in 1916 was “He kept us out of war”), and the draft did not help foster general enthusiasm for it. Among artists and intellectuals, the war was even less popular. Randolph Bourne, an influential writer and critic associated with the radical little magazine
Seven Arts, declared that “war is the health of the state,” and Jane Addams, the progressive reformer and peace activist, maintained that war in general is destructive
3 Hauntings as Histories: from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) THRUSH COLL
Abstract: Another way to frame this question is to ask whether places—physical locations and the multiple human histories embedded in them—have distinct identities and are capable of agency. Can a single place be home to a certain kind of history, persistent and cohesive, even across boundaries of time and cultural regime? Can the nonhuman, in the form of organisms, climate, or other entities, define the shape of a place and even its meaning? Can remnants of past societies—ruins, ecological footprints, artifacts—“speak” in active ways for the histories they represent? And can we include
5 The Baldoon Mysteries from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) MCDOUGALL ALLAN K.
Abstract: Shortly after the British–U.S. border dividing the Great Lakes was established by the 1783 Treaty of Paris, the respective governments began treaty processes with the highly respected and powerful First Nations in the Old Northwest, in an attempt to accommodate the needs of the First Nations in anticipation of an influx of settlers to the regions. Prior to that time, contact with the First Nations in the Great Lakes region was extensive, largely through fur-trading operations and Catholic missions. Priests and traders from Lower Canada and Europe had built close relations with the First Nations. Indeed, many of the
8 Indigenous Hauntings in Settler–Colonial Spaces: from:
Phantom Past, Indigenous Presence
Author(s) FREEMAN VICTORIA
Abstract: At a multi-faith event in the fall of 2005, a group of Indigenous and non-Indigenous activists reclaimed one of the Toronto Islands as “Spirit Island,” reconsecrating and reactivating the land as a sacred site for healing ceremonies and teachings by elders. During that ceremony, an Indigenous elder from Greenland sang a healing song passed down from his great-great-grandmother. He sang it for the sculptor who hoped to create a healing garden for children on the site, which he envisioned as a medicine wheel of sculptures by Indigenous artists. The sculptor spoke of being raised white and only later in life
Introduction from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PIETERSEN LLOYD K.
Abstract: We are delighted to present this
Festschriftin honor of our esteemed friend and colleague, Professor Andrew T. Lincoln, on the occasion of his retirement. The title of this volume reflects andrew’s lifelong interests in Christian origins, the reception of biblical texts in believing and scholarly communities, and the embodiment of the gospel in believing communities made possible by the Spirit. Furthermore, his commitment to careful exegesis of biblical texts, combined with a sensitivity to theological interpretation of those texts and a passionate desire to see such theological interpretation worked out in the life and practice of believing communities, result
1 Figures in Isaiah 7:14 from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) MCCONVILLE J. G.
Abstract: In Matthew 1:23 we read: “Behold, a virgin shall conceive and bear a son, and his name shall be called immanuel” (RSV), in a formula that is immediately recognizable as a central element in Christian liturgy and theology about Jesus Christ. There are curiosities about the passage, not only in its announcement of a virgin birth, but also in the fact that the child that is born is called not immanuel, but Jesus, a first indication (in our present enquiry) that texts do not necessarily say exactly what they mean. This oblique connection between text and meaning is evident in
3 Let John be John (2) from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) DUNN JAMES D. G.
Abstract: I offer in congratulation this reflection on its distinctive christology, drawn principally from my current work on the subject.² For it is undoubtedly John’s christology which constitutes his greatest contribution to the development of Christian theology. But our over-familiarity with it has probably diminished our perception of the radical transmutation that John in fact makes in his portrayal of Christ.
9 Wine, Debauchery, and the Spirit (Ephesians 5:18–19) from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PIETERSEN LLOYD K.
Abstract: A sumang’s confident assertion echoes andrew Lincoln’s conclusion in his magisterial commentary on ephesians, which remains a significant resource for commentators on this letter more than twenty years after its publication. Lincoln has a particularly fine discussion of the verse under consideration in this chapter, Eph 5:18. There he considers whether the prohibition against drunkenness concerns misconduct in the assembly as in 1 Cor 11 or the influence of pagan mystery cults, especially that of dionysus. he is unconvinced by these proposals and instead argues that drunkenness is a prime characteristic of the darkness mentioned earlier (Eph 5:8) and that
10 The Metaphor of the Face in Paul from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) BARTON STEPHEN C.
Abstract: character, and values, especially in
relations of
13 What Makes New Testament Theology “Theology”? from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) MORGAN ROBERT
Abstract: The question presupposes what the phrase itself implies: that “New Testament theology” is or should be in some sense “theology.” What that contention might mean depends not only on the contested phrase “New Testament theology,” but, prior to that, on how “theology” itself is understood, whether (to condense the range of non-disparaging dictionary meanings) in the strong sense of articulating and perhaps advocating a religious stance by expressing its belief and practice in a rational way, or in the secondary sense of philosophical, historical, and related scholarship describing and analyzing the commitments of others. Both senses imply an adjective indicating
14 Who and What is Theological Interpretation For? from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) PADDISON ANGUS
Abstract: In recent years “Theological interpretation” has consolidated itself as a key contributor to the series of conversations that make up contemporary theology.¹ as a movement it has spawned commentary and book series, dedicated journals, countless monographs, and edited volumes. amidst this flurry of activity is the particular contribution made by the edited volume that andrew and i produced whilst we worked together at the University of Gloucestershire,
Christology and Scripture: Interdisciplinary Perspectives. The volume arose out of an intensive and memorable weekend spent in a diocesan retreat house in the company of systematic theologians, church historians, and biblical scholars. at
17 Good Sex, Bad Sex: from:
Conception, Reception, and the Spirit
Author(s) ALEXANDER LOVEDAY
Abstract: Many years ago, in conversation with a German biblical scholar, I happened to mention that andrew Lincoln was one of my colleagues in the department of Biblical Studies in Sheffield. “Ah!” said my interlocutor: “paradise Lincoln!” Andrew’s
Paradise Now and Not Yetwas already making a favorable impression on the exacting world of Germanneutes-tamentlicher Wissenschaft. it is a pleasure to contribute to this collegial appreciation of andrew’s academic achievements, recalling those heady days back in 1986, when we had just joined the Sheffield department (Andrew six months ahead of me), and enjoyed together the excitement of testing out new
Book Title: Slavery's Capitalism-A New History of American Economic Development
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rockman Seth
Abstract: Drawing on the expertise of sixteen scholars who are at the forefront of rewriting the history of American economic development,
Slavery's Capitalismidentifies slavery as the primary force driving key innovations in entrepreneurship, finance, accounting, management, and political economy that are too often attributed to the so-called free market. Approaching the study of slavery as the originating catalyst for the Industrial Revolution and modern capitalism casts new light on American credit markets, practices of offshore investment, and understandings of human capital. Rather than seeing slavery as outside the institutional structures of capitalism, the essayists recover slavery's importance to the American economic past and prompt enduring questions about the relationship of market freedom to human freedom.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnrs7
Introduction. from:
Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) ROCKMAN SETH
Abstract: During the eighty years between the American Revolution and the Civil War, slavery was indispensable to the economic development of the United States. Such a claim is at once self-evidently true and empirically obscure. A scholarly revolution over the past two decades, which brought mainstream historical accounts into line with long-standing positions in Africana and Black Studies, has recognized slavery as the foundational American institution, organizing the nation’s politics, legal structures, and cultural practices with remarkable power to determine the life chances of those moving through society as black or white. An outpouring of scholarship on nineteenth-century public health, criminal
CHAPTER 1 Toward a Political Economy of Slave Labor: from:
Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) BAPTIST EDWARD E.
Abstract: Charles Ball had been a family man, a skilled worker. From his cabin on Maryland’s Eastern Shore, he had seen a brighter future. True, he was enslaved, like his wife and children. Yet in 1805, men with his intelligence and drive were finding ways to buy their freedom from enslavers in Mary land’s tobacco districts. But on this morning, when a blaring horn jerked him out of sleep before dawn, he sat up in a loft bed at the top of a cabin 500 miles to the south-west, and he was no longer who he had been. In fact, he
CHAPTER 9 “No country but their counting-houses”: from:
Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) CHAMBERS STEPHEN
Abstract: Cuban slavery impacted early American capitalism through Russia. In the early nineteenth century, as the U.S.–West Indies trade increasingly centered on the Spanish colony of Cuba, a small nexus of elite Americans—particularly New Englanders—became owners of Cuban plantations.¹ Intensive American participation in the Cuban slave regime both reinforces and complicates scholars’ recognition of slavery as a national rather than sectional bedrock of U.S. state formation. When convenient or profitable, the character of U.S. slavery was also transnational.² At the very moment of the continued expansion of the North American plantation frontier and the formation of the U.S.
CHAPTER 13 The Market, Utility, and Slavery in Southern Legal Thought from:
Slavery's Capitalism
Author(s) BROPHY ALFRED L.
Abstract: Pre–Civil War Americans turned to all sorts of technology, from canals, steam power, and the telegraph to more obscure forms such as the daguerreotype and mining lamps, to hasten the pace of economic and moral progress. Law was another key technology they used. The law worked in favor of economic growth in several ways. First, judicial decisions self-consciously molded the law to promote economic efficiency. Second, legislatures used statutes to streamline credit markets, market transactions, and the formation of corporations. For the last several decades, scholars have often invoked Morton J. Horwitz’s apt insight that there was an “instrumental
Chapter 3 The Vicissitudes of Civil Society from:
The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: In July 2006, one of the Greek associations in Reggio Calabria, comprised mainly of Greek nationals of the diaspora, invited a high-ranking member of parliament from the governing Greek New Democracy party to visit South Italy. The association acted as a mediator between the mayor of Reggio Calabria, Giuseppe Scopelliti, and the Greek government, and the invitation was intended to foster relations of good will between Reggio Calabria and Athens. According to the president of the Greek association, the meeting was conceived of as a New Democracy initiative toward pastoral care for Greek communities abroad. The association went to great
Chapter 4 Hegemonic Networks, Kinship Governance from:
The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: Kinship, Herzfeld argues, “carried the dead weight of outmoded assumptions” (2007:315). Like Fabian’s (1983) perceptions regarding the subject of anthropology, kinship became the “Other,” perpetually locked in direct association with Africanist structuralist theory. Nevertheless, kinship “has insidiously slipped back everywhere” (Herzfeld 2007:315) and is here to stay. Grecanici kinship is highly politicized and contributes to dense networks of governance and representation. With a strong emphasis on patrilineality, kinship is a political and genealogical order with far-reaching consequences for socioeconomic organization. The coordination of the next generation of relatives is desired by people who know exactly their own lines of relatedness.
Chapter 5 Messy Realities of Relatedness from:
The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: So far I have discussed conventional kinship organization among the Grecanici, based predominantly on sharing the same blood. Alongside blood kin, further lines of relatedness are pursued that create equally strong politicized links between the related parties, thus forming dense networks for minority governance. This chapter discusses
amicizia(friendship) andcomparaticoorSangiovanni(godparenthood)¹ in order to account for kinship-like arrangements that infiltrate political domains. Civil society factions are predominantly based on friendship, godparenthood, and kinship, creating an ultra-dense matrix for claims to national and international resources available for the governance of the linguistic minority. In their desire to create
Chapter 8 Minority on the Fringes of Europe from:
The Grecanici of Southern Italy
Abstract: When I left Reggio Calabria, I felt I had left a part of myself back in the field. “Making relatedness” between the ethnographer and the research participants reveals the deep humanistic nature of the ethnographic adventure (Gay y Blasco 2012b). The final story narrates the relationship between Venere and the ethnographer. While Venere is an actual person, she also stands as a metonymy for the complex networks of relatedness present in Reggio Calabria on which fearless governance is built.
Book Title: Useful Fictions-Evolution, Anxiety, and the Origins of Literature
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): AUSTIN MICHAEL
Abstract: Drawing on evolutionary biology, anthropology, narrative theory, cognitive psychology, game theory, and evolutionary aesthetics, Austin develops the concept of a "useful fiction," a simple narrative that serves an adaptive function unrelated to its factual one. In his work we see how these useful fictions play a key role in neutralizing the overwhelming anxiety that humans can experience as their minds gather and process information. Rudimentary narratives constructed for this purpose, Austin suggests, provided a cognitive scaffold that might have become the basis for our well-documented love of fictional stories. Written in clear, jargon-free prose and employing abundant literary examples-from the Bible to
One Thousand and One Arabian NightsandDon QuixotetoNo Exit-Austin's work offers a new way of understanding the relationship between fiction and evolutionary processes-and, perhaps, the very origins of literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnsfj
INTRODUCTION: from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: Here are some of the questions that this book will try to answer: Why do stories with sad endings make us cry? Why do we like scary movies but not scary situations in real life? How is it that we can think of a fictional character as a “friend” whose triumphs thrill us and whose misfortunes cause us pain? Why will we continue to watch a movie or television show that we don’t really like just to see how it turns out? Why can a single summer blockbuster movie earn more than a billion dollars in worldwide box-office receipts and
4 Information Anxiety from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: The turning point of
Robinson Crusoeoccurs precisely halfway into the narrative when Crusoe, after fifteen years of presuming himself the only inhabitant of his island, discovers a single footprint on a sandy beach.¹ Before this incident,Robinson Crusoetells the story of a solitary individual and his relationship with nature, God, and himself. Afterward, it becomes a political novel full of battles, colonial aspirations, social contracts, and an expanding cast of characters—including cannibals, excannibals, mutineers, Spaniards, and English sailors. For the two years after Crusoe discovers the footprint—an interval of time that requires a mere ten pages
5 The Problem of Other People from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: The human brain is adapted—of that much we can be sure. However, nobody is quite sure what it is adapted to. The usual evolutionary explanation—that the brain adapted to the natural environment in which humans developed—doesn’t account for all of the facts that need to be explained. For one thing, humans and other hominids have developed and flourished in nearly every habitable environment on the earth. Even more perplexing, however, is the fact that human cognition seems to be so much more complex than it needs to be. There can be no question that some advanced cognitive
6 Sex, Lies, and Phenotypes from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: Though lying is not the same as storytelling, the two are not entirely unrelated. Both involve the construction and communication of counterfactual propositions and narratives. The difference between the two is in both the intent of the speaker and the understanding of the audience. Liars know the truth and attempt to conceal it, usually to advantage themselves at the expense of their auditors. On the other hand, both storytellers and story hearers (or story readers) usually understand that a fictional story is something other than literal truth—rather than working against each other, they collaborate in a mutually beneficial form
Conclusion: from:
Useful Fictions
Abstract: Human beings are not fact machines—beings who scan the environment for information and then process it in their extremely large brains to produce pasteurized lumps of truth. Thomas Gradgrind’s vision in Charles Dickens’s
Hard Times—a board of fact, composed of commissioners of fact, who will force the people to be a people of fact—has never been realized.¹ Through the course of the novel, Gradgrind comes to understand that human beings are not governed by facts and that they cannot be forced into a world of fact without a substantial amount of violence against their very natures. There
THREE Law and History in Australian War Crimes Trials: from:
Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: Following the successful passage of the War Crimes Act amendments, which left little of the 1945 statute intact, the Special Investigations Unit (SIU) continued its inquiries. The files that were felt to contain the strongest evidence were sent to a leading Sydney criminal lawyer, Greg James QC, who reviewed the information and evidence and advised the Commonwealth’s director of public prosecutions (DPP) on those cases that in his opinion could be pursued through the courts. The practice that was adopted conformed with the underlying ethos of the prosecution scheme that had informed the Australian war crimes process from its beginnings.
FOUR Mikolay Berezowsky: from:
Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: Mikolay Berezowsky of Royal Park, South Australia, was arrested by police attached to the Special Investigations Unit siu and charged under section 9 of the War Crimes Act. The case against him was in many ways reflective of the historical understanding of the practicalities of massacres in Ukraine. The indigenous police, the Schutzmannschaft, typically functioned in the preliminary stages of the
Aktionby surrounding the village or ghetto and rounding up the local Jewish communities. The prosecution alleged that Berezowsky was a member of the Schutzmannschaft in the village of Gnivan in the Vinnitsa area and that he had participated
FIVE The Story of Daviborshch’s Cart: from:
Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: Saul Friedlander has identified the anxieties that have come to characterize debates about the historical construction of events known as the Shoah, the killing of European Jews by the Nazis and their national collaborators in occupied Europe. He writes: “On the one hand, our traditional categories of conceptualization and representation may well be insufficient, our language itself problematic. On the other hand, in the face of these events we feel the need of some stable narration; a boundless field of possible discourse raises the issue of limits with particular stringency.”¹ These concerns about processes, rhetoric, and memory have an impact
SIX Translating Law, Translating History, in Australian War Crimes Trials from:
Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: Eyewitnesses in the three Australian war crimes cases, both those who were Jewish survivors of the atrocities and non-Jewish Ukrainians, bystanders and perpetrators, had suffered psychologically from the trauma of the events. For some this means that their testimony might be considered to be more reliable than accounts in ordinary criminal cases because events would be fixed more firmly, more definitely, and, so the argument goes, more accurately, in their minds. On the other hand, trauma can adversely affect cognition. Memories can be fixed that do not necessarily coincide with physical reality. This does not mean that eyewitnesses are acting
EIGHT Law, Memory, and Justice: from:
Daviborshch's Cart
Abstract: The three trials of alleged Nazi criminals that took place under the Australian war crimes legislation are exemplary studies in the art of police investigation and the benefits that can be derived from international legal cooperation in the pursuit of those accused of the commission of atrocities and violations of international criminal law norms. Special Investigations Unit (SIU) investigators, historians, and lawyers tracked down witnesses to events in Ukraine during the Nazi occupation fifty years after the fact. These witnesses were identified through the combined expertise of historians and police officers. Their evidence was gathered by police and lawyers in
Book Title: Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): KALISA CHANTAL
Abstract: African and Caribbean peoples share a history dominated by the violent disruptions of slavery and colonialism. While much has been said about these "geographies of pain," violence in the private sphere, particularly gendered violence, receives little attention. This book fills that void. It is a critical addition to the study of African and Caribbean women's literatures at a time when women from these regions are actively engaged in articulating the ways in which colonial and postcolonial violence impact women.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dfnvj2
4 Sites of Violence from:
Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: Calixthe Beyala and Gisèle Pineau explore further the concept of “geographies of pain” by depicting intimate space, language, and the body as sites of pain, exile, and resistance to violence.¹ In the tradition of women’s literature, the two writers turn their attention to internal sources of violence and, through their characters, condemn those who still focus solely on the external factors of violence. They ask questions such as: How can women successfully re-territorialize their violated bodies within the intimate spaces from which they have been exiled? How can they overcome linguistic limitations in expressing pain? Beyala sees linguistic violence as
5 War and Political Violence from:
Violence in Francophone African and Caribbean Women's Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine how women writers redefine war in their writing about political violence. The term
warnormally refers to a “hostile contention by means of armed forces, carried on between nations, states, or rulers, or between parties in the same nation or state; the employment of armed forces against a foreign power, or against an opposing party in the state” (Oxford English Dictionary Online). This definition needs to be expanded to include several consequences of war with a disproportionate impact upon women, such as sexual violence; the destruction of family and the loss of husbands, sons, and
Book Title: Views from the Margins-Creating Identities in Modern France
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): Curtis Sarah A.
Abstract: What does it mean to be French? What constitutes "Frenchness"? Is it birth, language, attachment to republicanism, adherence to cultural norms? In contemporary France, these questions resonate in light of the large number of non-French and non-European immigrants, many from former French colonies, who have made France home in recent decades. Historically, French identity has long been understood as the product of a centralized state and culture emanating from Paris that was itself central to European history and civilization. Likewise, French identity in terms of class, gender, nationality, and religion mainly has been explained as a strong, indivisible core, against which marginal actors have been defined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dgn3mw
2 Marcel Lefebvre in Gabon: from:
Views from the Margins
Author(s) RICH JEREMY
Abstract: On the fiftieth anniversary of his ordination in 1979, Monsignor Marcel Lefebvre (1905–91) gave a sermon at a Parisian church crowded with supporters of his traditionalist Catholic vision, opposed to the liturgical and theological reforms of the Vatican II council of the 1960s. As a result of the Second Vatican Council, the Roman Catholic Church significantly changed its practices. These innovations included the use of vernacular languages during church services, the full endorsement of democratic institutions, and the abandonment of earlier views deemed as overtly anti-Semitic. Lefebvre was opposed to these changes and became a leading conservative critic of
5 Autonomy or Colony: from:
Views from the Margins
Author(s) GOODFELLOW SAMUEL HUSTON
Abstract: Emblematic of the complexity of Alsatian identity and its role as a border area between Germany and France is an Alsatian folk ditty that goes, “Hans in Schnockeloch has all that he wants. And what he has he doesn’t want, and what he wants he doesn’t have. Hans in Schnockeloch has all that he wants.”¹ A pro-German, pro-Nazi folklorist, Karl Roos, popularized this piece of doggerel during the 1920s as part of an anti-French movement.² The expression of ambivalence—simultaneously desiring inclusion and chafing at external control—aptly characterizes Alsatian identity throughout the 1920s, 1930s, and into World War II.
8 Gender and the Creation of the French Intellectual: from:
Views from the Margins
Author(s) EPSTEIN ANNE R.
Abstract: It is the others who declare you an intellectual, never oneself. . . . Hence also the consoling fact that everybody can always become the intellectual of someone. . . . Brigitte Bardot may some day be elected to the Collège de France. Simone Signoret is virtually there already. The intellectual is the one in whose discourse the public hears, directly or indirectly, the echo of its ultimate ends. One is an intellectual only on the basis of elective criteria.¹
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: “Like people and schools of criticism, ideas and theories travel—from person to person, from situation to situation, from one period to another. Cultural and intellectual life are usually nourished and often sustained by this circulation of ideas, and whether it takes the form of acknowledged or unconscious influence, creative borrowing, or wholesale appropriation, the movement of ideas and theories from one place to another is both a fact of life and a usefully enabling condition of intellectual activity.” Edward Said’s words suggest how ideas and theories travel or are borrowed and used in different places for different purposes: “For
3. WELCOME TO WESTWORLD from:
The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: An expanded critical regionalism like that explored in the previous chapters demonstrates that no region can be static or inward-looking, for it needs to recognize forces beyond the nation, considering how the regional travels and dialogues with other cultures, circulating as it is consumed and re-produced in other forms. As the West is performed and practiced outside its geographical and ideological boundaries (or grids), as in Khaled Hosseini’s Afghanistan-set novel
The Kite Runner(quoted above), it undergoes changes akin to the “wandering lines” described by Michel De Certeau—“‘indirect’ or ‘errant’ trajectories obeying their own logic … [creating] unforeseeable sentences,
4. “THE ‘WESTERN’ IN QUOTES” from:
The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: As I discussed in the previous chapter, Sergio Leone’s films were seen by some as the death knell of the Western and by others as its regenerative force, breathing new life into a tired, mythic formula and seeing the genre as the site for cultural critique and counterhegemonic practice. The established generic grid of the Western proved elastic and porous enough for new filmmakers looking to utilize its broad expectations and codes for different purposes, building on the promising works of directors such as Nicholas Ray, Sam Peckinpah, and Robert Altman. Often these innovations came from outside the Hollywood mainstream,
CONCLUSION: from:
The Rhizomatic West
Abstract: Jean-François Lyotard’s postmodern experimental text
Pacific Wallbegins with a description of the University of California, San Diego library as a “transparent jewel” with its “walls of glass” pointing in all directions, both “internal” and “external,” radiating both total vision and knowledge “without problem or hindrance.” However, his narrator goes on to think more about this elaborate crystal grid as a “maze” or labyrinth whose refractions and angles draw the eye away from the books, “behind the western face,” from inside to outside and back again, until “it begins to jump from one to the other, and the suspicion arises
Introduction from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) PULITANO ELVIRA
Abstract: European critical practices and theoretical discourses transcend the boundaries of nations, disciplines, and academic traditions. A collection of essays on Native North American literatures by scholars in Europe takes the Atlantic as a site of cross-cultural exchange and circulation of ideas, a bridge linking the Old and New Worlds, in
1 “They Have Stories, Don’t They?”: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) ISERNHAGEN HARTWIG
Abstract: The notion of
story, ornarrative(the two terms will be taken to be synonymous for purposes of this argument), is so central in the practice, criticism, and theory of Native American literature that around it gather — or it actively attracts to itself — many of the major issues in that literature. At the same time, the notion is necessarily modified by interaction with those issues, as they provide the larger contexts for its use. This essay will attempt to trace some such interactions and contexts as well as to place the entire complex within the wider context of
6 Of Time and Trauma: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) MADSEN DEBORAH L.
Abstract: In the introduction to her 1998 essay “Contemporary Two-Spirit Identity in the Fiction of Paula Gunn Allen and Beth Brant” Tara Prince-Hughes observes that for Native American writers the “struggle for identity has required writers to engage actively and dispute dominant Western fictions of ‘Indianness’ and to express the fragmentation experienced by people of mixed ancestry” (9). In this essay I want to address the way in which Paula Gunn Allen, in
The Woman Who Owned the Shadows(1983), actively engages and disputes dominant Western fictions of “trauma” in a Native American context. In a central sequence of episodes in
8 Anamnesiac Mappings: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) TILLETT REBECCA
Abstract: Generating some notable critical hostility upon its publication in 1991,¹ Leslie Marmon Silko’s contentious novel
Almanac of the Deadhas since been hailed as “a radical, stunning manifesto” that offers a graphic, brutal, and highly political analysis of America and the Americas at the turn of the twenty-first century.² Confronting the willful amnesia that pervades contemporary U.S. society regarding the history of settlement and of subsequent Anglo-Indian relations, Silko offers an anamnesiac consideration of the trauma of contact and a celebration of the significance of memory in the face of cultural assimilation and of the power of remembrance to heal
9 Vizenor’s Trickster Theft: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) TAYLOR PAUL BEEKMAN
Abstract: “When I was seeking some meaning in literature for myself,” Vizenor recalls, “some identity for myself as a writer, I found it easily in the mythic connections” (quoted in Owens,
Other Destinies239). His earlier autobiographical essays, collected inInterior Landscapes: Autobiographical Myths and Metaphors, equate fact with myth and myth with truth in accordance with the etymology ofmyth: “word, truth, speech” (Greekmuthos>*Indo-Europeanmudh, “to think, imagine”). In early Greek usage myth designates an oral pronouncement made to an audience, and Vizenor follows this mold as a maker of myth, neither in the Tolkien political or C.
13 Clowns, Indians, and Poodles: from:
Transatlantic Voices
Author(s) PELLERIN SIMONE
Abstract: When I met Louis Owens in his Parisian hotel lobby some seven or eight years ago, he was on a tour organized by his French publishers, Albin Michel, to promote the French translation of one of his novels. I had been a translator, off and on, for the same publishing house for some time, and, though the translation of
The Sharpest Sight, to my great disappointment, had not been “given” to me, the editor of the “Terre indienne” collection had informed me of the fact that Owens would be “free” on that afternoon and arranged a meeting for my benefit.
2. JURISTA VS. LEGULEYO from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Este capítulo es una interpelación muy concreta dirigida a los estudiantes de derecho. La alternativa que propone, sin embargo, puede adaptarse a cualquier profesión. El estudiante de derecho debería plantearse la cuestión de si va a aprender el derecho con cierto nivel de profundidad o va a memorizar un montón de leyes, que se pueden aplicar relativamente bien sin estudiar cinco años. Por lo tanto, tiene que optar entre estudiar derecho con mentalidad filosófica o con mentalidad meramente pragmática; si estudiar derecho con la actitud del que busca la verdad y la justicia o con la actitud del que quiere
4. AUT, AUT VS. ET, ET from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: En nuestra actitud filosófica, o incluso
8. TÚ Y NOSOTROS: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Con cierta frecuencia me han formulado, con no poco desconcierto, la siguiente pregunta: “¿Por qué ha habido un ataque tan sistemático a la familia como institución, en la historia de los últimos dos siglos, aunque en forma acelerada en la segunda mitad del siglo XX?”. No se trata de un desprecio a las familias concretas –nada más apreciado en todas partes–, sino a la familia como institución, con sus características esenciales: el matrimonio monógamo, indisoluble, fecundo; los hijos, nacidos bajo el amparo del matrimonio entre su padre y su madre; la vinculación de la institución familiar con la política
12. LA LÓGICA FORMAL from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: A veces decimos que “Pedro es muy lógico”, o que “Juan es poco lógico”. Nos referimos así a la
lógica espontánea, más o menos rigurosa en cada persona, ese orden interior que la razón sigue en su proceso de conocimiento de la verdad. Sobre esa lógica espontánea se edifica la lógica considerada como arte, es decir, como un saber práctico, que se puede definir como “el arte que dirige los actos de la razón para proceder en el conocimiento de la verdad ordenadamente, con facilidad y sin error”.106
14. EL COMIENZO DEL RIGOR: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Hemos visto que la lógica, como arte y como ciencia, abarca tres grandes capítulos: los conceptos, las proposiciones y el raciocinio. El concepto es un
ente de razón(i.e., que solo existe en nuestra mente), en el cual y por medio del cual conocemos la esencia abstracta de una cosa. En general, los conceptos representan de forma mental el modo de ser universal de los seres reales, un modo de ser que se realiza solo en cosas individuales existentes en sí fuera de nuestra mente. Sin embargo, podemos crear conceptos de cosas que no existen, imaginarias, como cuando pensamos en
15. EL MOMENTO DE LA VERDAD: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: La lógica de las proposiciones estudia el segundo acto fundamental de la inteligencia humana, después del concepto y antes del raciocinio: el juicio. El juicio es la
operación de la mente que compone o divide, es decir, que une o separa conceptos por medio del verbo ser, explícito o bien implícito en otro verbo. Laproposiciónes la expresión lógica del juicio. En todo juicio, por lo tanto, hay un sujeto y un predicado, y, explícito o implícito, el verbo ser, que señala realidad. El verbo ser tiene muchos significados vinculados entre sí: es analógico.118Puede significar la realidad de
22. EL MOVIMIENTO: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Un concepto metafísico, presente en el sentido común, suscita algunas dificultades cuando se formula de modo más riguroso, como hace la filosofía. Se trata de una distinción que refleja una realidad profunda y, al mismo tiempo, tiene un
carácter operativo,148es decir, que, aunque las personas no suelen tratarla de manera específica y temática, está implícita en el lenguaje y sirve para resolver auténticos problemas sustantivos. Me refiero a la distinción entreacto y potencia, que, inicialmente, es la distinción entreser en acto y ser en potencia. El problema filosófico que llevó a tematizar esta distinción es el llamado
23. HILEMORFISMO: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Los conceptos de acto y de potencia están implícitos en el lenguaje ordinario y están presupuestos en la noción de naturaleza, entendida como aquello que una cosa es en cuanto principio de sus operaciones, pues en cuanto tal principio hace referencia a aquello hacia lo cual tiende. La naturaleza es algo en acto; pero puede desplegarse en dirección hacia una perfección que todavía no es, es decir, hacia una perfección que el ser posee en potencia, según su naturaleza. Otras distinciones conceptuales estructuran nuestra mente porque corresponden a la estructura misma de la realidad. Nuestra mente se adapta a la
24. LAS CATEGORÍAS: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: En el campo de la bioética hay un debate acerca de cómo tratar a determinados cuerpos humanos biológicamente vivos. ¿Son personas o no son personas? Un embrión humano congelado fuera del vientre de una mujer, un feto humano que no ha nacido, un niño de 2 años, un joven que está en estado vegetativo persistente, un anciano de 80 años con demencia senil, un adolescente con síndrome de Down: todos son seres biológicamente humanos, que viven en unas circunstancias o con unas características que son claramente una modificación de lo que es normal en la naturaleza,
i.e., de lo que
25. LOS TRASCENDENTALES DEL SER: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Nuestras controversias morales, más allá de los asuntos concretos (
v.gr., la licitud de las drogas, de la tortura o de la venganza privada), arriban a menudo a la cuestión más abstracta de si hay o noalgo objetivode bueno o de malo en nuestras acciones y elecciones. Lo mismo pasa con las decisiones judiciales. El juez, ¿debe discernir qué es lo objetivamente justo o injusto en un caso, o solo debe mediar entre intereses contrapuestos, igual de subjetivos? En política, cuando se apela al bien común para justificar una decisión, de manera inmediata surge el rechazo o la sospecha,
27. SOBRE EL SER Y LA ESENCIA: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Los capítulos precedentes han ido acostumbrando nuestros pobres ojos a la luz superior de la metafísica. Hemos visto la objetividad de la verdad y el rigor de la lógica; la distinción entre lo real y lo aparente; la noción de naturaleza y la variedad de las naturalezas; la verdad del cambio, que supone un sujeto que permanece a través del movimiento, y la distinción metafísica entre el acto y la potencia; las composiciones metafísicas subyacentes al cambio sustancial (
i.e., materia prima y forma sustancial) y al cambio accidental (i.e., sustancia y accidentes); las categorías del ser (i.e., la de sustancia
29. LA IMAGEN DEL HOMBRE Y SU FELICIDAD from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: En
Las instrucciones del microondas,216un pequeño divertimento literario, el capítulo central, por desgracia incomprendido, glosa las instrucciones de un microondas alemán. Son muy divertidas. Descienden a los detalles más increíbles, como, por ejemplo: “No meta su mascota en el microondas”. A nadie le llama la atención que estos aparatos vengan con un manual de uso, que explica hasta el último detalle sobre cómo es el artefacto, para que pueda cumplir su función y de verdad sirva a aquello a lo cual está destinado. En la misma línea hay todo tipo de libros sobre cómo cuidar a su mascota, cómo
30. LA UNIDAD DE LA PERSONA HUMANA: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: La visión clásica y cristiana del ser humano, vista desde la perspectiva filosófica, incluye solo aquellos rasgos que podría comprender una persona –en principio– con su razón humana natural, sin el auxilio de la fe cristiana. Sin embargo, desde un punto de vista histórico no se puede negar que los trazos más profundos de esa imagen del hombre fueron incorporados a la tradición filosófica perenne por influjo del cristianismo. Pensemos, por ejemplo, en una ideología actual, el liberalismo político democrático, que se edifica sobre la base de que todos los ciudadanos tienen igual dignidad y libertad, y, según pretenden deducir
31. LOS GRADOS DE VIDA Y LAS FUNCIONES VITALES from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: El problema ético-jurídico de la llamada “muerte cerebral”, como criterio para determinar si una persona está efectivamente muerta, constituye un debate de actualidad con la única consecuencia práctica –importante, desde luego– de que, al paciente declarado muerto, se le pueden extraer sin escrúpulos los órganos para trasplantarlos. La cuestión es: ¿está realmente muerto o está vivo? ¿Por qué hay tanto debate? Porque la apariencia externa es que está vivo; sin embargo, hay un diagnóstico que, apoyándose en el cese irreversible de las funciones encefálicas, afirma que, en realidad, está muerto. La muerte en sí no se puede observar sensiblemente, porque
33. LAS POTENCIAS DEL ALMA HUMANA: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Los animales se mueven impulsados por inclinaciones que responden al conocimiento que han adquirido de los objetos convenientes o inconvenientes. Tras haber analizado el conocimiento tanto sensible –parecido al que se da en los brutos– como intelectual o racional –propio de los humanos–, nos corresponde ahora estudiar los apetitos o tendencias. El análisis ha de situarse en el marco de una
noción genéricade apetito. En un sentido técnico, el apetito es la inclinación o tendencia que tiene una cosa, cualquier cosa, hacia un bien que la perfecciona. Las cosas se mueven, pasan de la potencia al acto,265lo
39. LA ESENCIA DE DIOS from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Una definición mínima de Dios es necesaria para preguntar si acaso Dios existe. Aunque los expertos en filosofía discrepan acerca de cuál puede ser de forma exacta esta definición mínima, anterior a una determinación de los atributos divinos que completan el conocimiento humano de su esencia, me parece que la pregunta por la existencia de la divinidad se refiere a alguna realidad que tenga estas dos características mínimas: (i)
superioridad y trascendencia en el ser: debe tratarse de una realidadsuperior y trascendentecon relación a la realidad inmediata visible y, de modo especial, en relación con los seres humanos;
EPÍLOGO: from:
Filosofía: conceptos fundamentales
Abstract: Thomas Hobbes, uno de los más influyentes pensadores políticos y teológicos de la modernidad, escribió un pequeño libro titulado
A Dialogue Between a Philosopher and a Student of Jurisprudence(Un diálogo entre un filósofo y un estudiante de derecho). El filósofo logró, en pocos siglos, cambiar el modo de pensar del jurista. La sociedad dejó de verse como algo natural, para concebirse como un artificio, un pacto social al servicio de la composición de intereses y de la paz entre hombres que por naturaleza son antisociales, lobos para el hombre, ávidos de dominar a los demás y siempre temerosos. La
Book Title: Laudato Si-Carta encíclica de S. S. Francisco. Sobre el cuidado de la casa común
Publisher: Ediciones UC
Abstract: La nueva Encíclica del papa Francisco, Laudato si’, sobre el cuidado de la casa común, se centra en el cuidado de la tierra y las relaciones humanas que en ella se desarrollan. Es un texto con un fuerte acento social en torno al concepto de ecología integral, como paradigma capaz de articular las relaciones fundamentales de la persona: con Dios, consigo misma, con los demás seres humanos y con la creación. En el centro del recorrido de la Laudato si’ encontramos este interrogante: “¿Qué tipo de mundo queremos dejar a quienes nos sucedan, a los niños que están creciendo?" y sobre ella se plantea una serie de preguntas sobre el sentido de la vida, el trabajo y las relaciones sociales, entre otras. Si bien el mensaje de Francisco generará un impacto sobre las importantes y urgentes decisiones en el ámbito político ambiental, el texto posee una eminente riqueza “magisterial, pastoral y espiritual" propios de su naturaleza, cuya amplitud, profundidad y mensaje no pueden reducirse al aspecto de las determinaciones de las políticas ambientales.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1djmfj2
CAPÍTULO PRIMERO LO QUE LE ESTÁ PASANDO A NUESTRA CASA from:
Laudato Si
Abstract: 17. Las reflexiones teológicas o filosóficas sobre la situación de la humanidad y del mundo pueden sonar a mensaje repetido y abstracto si no se presentan nuevamente a partir de una confrontación con el contexto actual, en lo que tiene de inédito para la historia de la humanidad. Por eso, antes de reconocer cómo la fe aporta nuevas motivaciones y exigencias frente al mundo del cual formamos parte, propongo detenernos brevemente a considerar lo que le está pasando a nuestra casa común.
CAPÍTULO CUARTO UNA ECOLOGÍA INTEGRAL from:
Laudato Si
Abstract: 137. Dado que todo está íntimamente relacionado, y que los problemas actuales requieren una mirada que tenga en cuenta todos los factores de la crisis mundial, propongo que nos detengamos ahora a pensar en los distintos aspectos de una
ecología integral, que incorpore claramente las dimensiones humanas y sociales.
CAPÍTULO QUINTO ALGUNAS LÍNEAS DE ORIENTACIÓN Y ACCIÓN from:
Laudato Si
Abstract: 163. He intentado analizar la situación actual de la humanidad, tanto en las grietas que se observan en el planeta que habitamos, como en las causas más profundamente humanas de la degradación ambiental. Si bien esa contemplación de la realidad en sí misma ya nos indica la necesidad de un cambio de rumbo y nos sugiere algunas acciones, intentemos ahora delinear grandes caminos de diálogo que nos ayuden a salir de la espiral de autodestrucción en la que nos estamos sumergiendo.
CAPÍTULO SEXTO EDUCACIÓN Y ESPIRITUALIDAD ECOLÓGICA from:
Laudato Si
Abstract: 202. Muchas cosas tienen que reorientar su rumbo, pero ante todo la humanidad necesita cambiar. Hace falta la conciencia de un origen común, de una pertenencia mutua y de un futuro compartido por todos. Esta conciencia básica permitiría el desarrollo de nuevas convicciones, actitudes y formas de vida. Se destaca así un gran desafío cultural, espiritual y educativo que supondrá largos procesos de regeneración.
Book Title: Writing and Materiality in China-Essays in Honor of Patrick Hanan
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Widmer Ellen
Abstract: Speaking about Chinese writing entails thinking about how writing speaks through various media. In the guises of the written character and its imprints, traces, or ruins, writing is more than textuality. The goal of this volume is to consider the relationship of writing to materiality in China’s literary history and to ponder the physical aspects of the production and circulation of writing. To speak of the thing-ness of writing is to understand it as a thing in constant motion, transported from one place or time to another, one genre or medium to another, one person or public to another. Thinking about writing as the material product of a culture shifts the emphasis from the author as the creator and ultimate arbiter of a text’s meaning to the editors, publishers, collectors, and readers through whose hands a text is reshaped, disseminated, and given new meanings. By yoking writing and materiality, the contributors to this volume aim to bypass the tendency to oppose form and content, words and things, documents and artifacts, to rethink key issues in the interpretation of Chinese literary and visual culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dnn90j
Introduction from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Zeitlin Judith T.
Abstract: Speaking about writing, especially Chinese writing, entails thinking about the ways in which writing speaks to us through a variety of media and forms. Whether it be a consideration of the written character or its imprints, traces, or ruins, writing always appears in its multifarious guises to be much more than an embodiment of textuality. To reflect on this and related features of writing is the goal of this volume, as we consider a fundamental problem: What is the relationship of writing to materiality over the course of China’s literary history? In some manner or other, all the chapters in
Disappearing Verses: from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Zeitlin Judith T.
Abstract: This chapter is about a category of traditional Chinese poetry called
tibishi—poems written on walls. Although it is tempting to translatetibishias “graffiti poetry,” in fact, the two are essentially different. Graffiti are generally understood to be a form of defacement, to compromise the integrity and value of the public surfaces on which they appear. For this reason, Susan Stewart has argued in an essay on graffiti as crime and art, “It is interesting to see how graffiti becomes dirt once we consider, in the mode of much recent cognitive anthropology, that dirt is something in the wrong
The Literary Consumption of Actors in Seventeenth-Century China from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Volpp Sophie
Abstract: Among the luxury goods traded by the elite during the late Ming and early Qing were actors.¹ Not only individual actors but entire troupes were bestowed on friends, bequeathed to relatives, or sold. Their circulation served to create and maintain networks of social exchange, in much the same manner as did gifts of fine ceramic wares, calligraphic scrolls, and ancient bronzes. The cultural prestige of the actor as a luxury good was, in turn, predicated on a highly refined discourse of connoisseurship, typified by the theater aficionado Pan Zhiheng’s 潘之旦(1556–1622) disquisitions on the art of acting, which were collected
Duplicating the Strength of Feeling: from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Lowry Kathryn
Abstract: This chapter examines the emergence of the love letter (
qingshu青書) as a distinct literary genre in miscellanies, encyclopedias for daily use (riyong leishu日用類書), and epistolary guides published in China during the late Ming, that is, in the late sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries. These publications were purportedly anthologies of selected examples of “genuine” qingshu from correspondence, model letters, random jottings (biji筆言己), and erotic fiction, presented as models or illustrations of how to express one’s innermost feelings.Qingshudiffer from the modern notion of a love letter in that they were written not only between lovers (actual or
Considering a Coincidence: from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Widmer Ellen
Abstract: The year 1828 saw the publication of two works of fiction that at first glance appear to inhabit different worlds. The first is
Zai zaotian, 再造天,a tanci彈詞 (or prosimetric fictional narrative) by Hou Zhi 侯芝 (1764–1829), a woman editor, author, and poet. In contrast to some of her other output,Zai zaotianhas not enjoyed much scholarly or readerly acclaim. This is in part because of its didacticism. The plot, which concerns a struggle over control of the throne during the Yuan dynasty, centers almost exclusively on the lessons to be learned from the good and bad
Creating the Urban Beauty: from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Yeh Catherine Vance
Abstract: During the late nineteenth century, a visual revolution began in the Chinese print industry. Spearheaded by Shanghai and its publishing houses and aided in part by new, foreign printing technologies such as copper engraving, lithography, and photography, new forms of visual publication started to have an impact on the marketplace.¹ As Western material culture in the form of imported goods made inroads into the daily life of Shanghai residents, new types of illustrated publications—magazines, urban and entertainment guides, and later newspapers—increasingly catered to this urban readership rather than to the traditional literati elite. At the center of this
Tope and Topos: from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Wang Eugene Y.
Abstract: A site is often a
toposin that it both marks a locus and serves as a topic. It is a common place that can be traversed or inhabited by a public and a rhetorical commonplace familiar to both its author and his audience.¹ Although there is no exact equivalent in Chinese to the Greek wordtoposthat conveniently collapses the dual senses oflocus and topic, the notion ofji績 (site, trace, vestige) comes close. Ajiis a site that emphasizes “vestiges” and “traces.” It is a peculiar spatial-temporal construct. Spatially, a landmark, such as a tower, a
A Folksong Immortal and Official Popular Culture in Twentieth-Century China from:
Writing and Materiality in China
Author(s) Liu Lydia H.
Abstract: Five years after the new copyright laws and regulations protecting intellectual property rights went into effect in China in January 1991, a retroactive lawsuit over the violation of the copyrights in the film
Liu Sanjie劉二姐 was filed.¹ Released in 1961, this Him had been adapted from a well-known musical drama written by a team of local writers from the Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous Region, which is dominated by the Zhuang 僮 nationality. In preparing the script, the writers had done extensive fieldwork among this minority group collecting folksongs, and on the basis of those materials, a local opera troupe produced
PART II Age as positioning the self from:
Public Memory in Early China
Abstract: The physical decrepitude to be suffered by the elderly was indeed a readily acknowledged fact of life in the minds of Han writers and thinkers, even though efforts were made to stave off the biological inevitability. For example, one might endeavor to forestall the decay
Book Title: Ancestral Memory in Early China- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Brashier K. E.
Abstract: Ancestral ritual in early China was an orchestrated dance between what was present (the offerings and the living) and what was absent (the ancestors). The interconnections among the tangible elements of the sacrifice were overt and almost mechanical, but extending those connections to the invisible guests required a medium that was itself invisible. Thus in early China, ancestral sacrifice was associated with focused thinking about the ancestors, with a structured mental effort by the living to reach out to the absent forebears and to give them shape and existence. Thinking about the ancestors—about those who had become distant—required active deliberation and meditation, qualities that had to be nurtured and learned. This study is a history of the early Chinese ancestral cult, particularly its cognitive aspects. Its goals are to excavate the cult’s color and vitality and to quell assumptions that it was no more than a simplistic and uninspired exchange of food for longevity, of prayers for prosperity. Ancestor worship was not, the author contends, merely mechanical and thoughtless. Rather, it was an idea system that aroused serious debates about the nature of postmortem existence, served as the religious backbone to Confucianism, and may even have been the forerunner of Daoist and Buddhist meditation practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dnnb5m
Part I An Imaginary Yardstick for Ritual Performance from:
Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: Alongside the hundreds of definitions for religion in modern scholarship, there are almost as many explanations for ritual. That is, not only is there no consensus as to what religion is, but there is just as little agreement as to what constitutes the practice of it. Among the structuralist, functionalist, phenomenologist and psychoanalytical approaches to ritual, the relatively recent discussions on “performance theory” have been most promising in terms of usefulness, likening ritual to a kind of interactive theater that highlights 1.) ritual’s experiential side, 2.) its framing techniques and 3.) the seemingly complete microcosm it endeavors to offer. In
Part IV The Context of Early Chinese Performative Thinking from:
Ancestral Memory in Early China
Abstract: When discussing texts that closely intertwine memory and spirits, Part III used the phrase “performative thinking” for thinking that, in and of itself, directly impacts the environment outside the thinker. As already noted, I adapted this notion from J. D. Austin’s “performative utterances,” utterances that, by Austin’s own definition, do not merely report about or stimulate an act but are the very execution of the act itself, such as when someone pledges “I do” in a marriage ceremony or is pronounced “Guilty!” at a trial.¹ The celebratory wedding or the courtroom drama are highly ritualized institutions in modern society, and
Book Title: Lydia Ginzburg's Prose-Reality in Search of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Van Buskirk Emily
Abstract: The Russian writer Lydia Ginzburg (1902-90) is best known for her
Notes from the Leningrad Blockadeand for influential critical studies, such asOn Psychological Prose, investigating the problem of literary character in French and Russian novels and memoirs. Yet she viewed her most vital work to be the extensive prose fragments, composed for the desk drawer, in which she analyzed herself and other members of the Russian intelligentsia through seven traumatic decades of Soviet history. In this book, the first full-length English-language study of the writer, Emily Van Buskirk presents Ginzburg as a figure of previously unrecognized innovation and importance in the literary landscape of the twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr36q1
CHAPTER 2 The Poetics of Desk-Drawer Notebooks from:
Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: At a private gathering sometime in the early 1930s, after Ginzburg had begun experimenting with longer narratives, she read a draft of “The Return Home” (“Vozvrashchenie domoi”)¹ to a group consisting of Anna Akhmatova, Nikolai Punin, Nikolai Oleinikov, Grigory Gukovsky, Boris Engelgardt, and at least six others.² After the reading, she recorded (in an unpublished note) her listeners’ opinions and characterizations of her narrative’s theme, style, and genre.³ Grigory Gukovsky chose to describe the genre of the innovative piece as a “novel” (
roman) whose material was “human thought” rather than experience. (It was Gukovsky who proceeded to spread the rumor
CHAPTER 4 Passing Characters from:
Lydia Ginzburg's Prose
Abstract: In her book
On Psychological Prose, first published in 1971, Ginzburg articulates the realm in which life and literature dynamically interact as we model our personalities: in daily life, people understand themselves and others through “creative constructs,” carrying out the aesthetic work of “selection, correlation, and symbolic interpretation of psychic elements.” The processes through which we compose and project our self-images resemble the creative acts authors perform when designing literary characters or lyric personae. Not only are these processes similar, they are symbiotic, since a personality “shapes itself, both internally and externally, by means of images, many of which have
Book Title: Forms of Life-Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PRICE MARTIN
Abstract: Martin Price writes here about ways in which character has been conceived and presented in the novels of the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. Beginning with chapters that cogently argue the artistic value of character, Price then deals with the different forms character has taken in individual novels. His first discussions center on authors-Jane Austen, Stendhal, Charles Dickens, George Eliot, and Leo Tolstoy-who define individuals by their adherence or opposition to social norms. The next chapters deal with novelists for whom the moral world is largely internalized. The characters of Henry James, Joseph Conrad, D.H. Lawrence, and E.M. Forster live in society and act upon it, but the authors are particularly concerned with the confusions, terrors, and heroism that lie within consciousness. The last chapter uses novels about the artist by James Joyce, Virginia Woolf, and Thomas Mann in order to apprehend the process by which experience is transformed into art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr37p0
Introduction from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: “Character, in any sense in which we can get at it,” Henry James wrote in an essay on Anthony Trollope, “is action, and action is plot, and any plot which hangs together … plays upon our emotion, our
1 The Fictional Contract from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: We are all of us born into a world with social and linguistic rules. We inherit both kinds of rules, and each of them shapes us even as it supplies us with the means of becoming ourselves: ourselves, but not any selves. And yet selves that can question the system they inherit. We may question the contracts that have been made for us—whether, in fact, they are contracts at all, to which we have never given assent and to which there are no alternatives. “We may as well assert,” David Hume wrote, “that a man, by remaining {aboard} a
3 The Other Self: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: If characters exist for the sake of novels, they exist only as much as and in the way that the novel needs them. Jane Austen’s world is a strikingly limited one. It is a world of visits and conversations, which usually take place in houses and gardens. We do not see people at work; we do not directly encounter violent action or violent passion. The limits of what may be said are fairly narrow. We are given, in effect, a shallow and well-lighted stage where we can see the comedy of manners played out with great attention to speech and
4 Austen: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: Jane Austen’s novels present a world more schematic than we are accustomed to find in more recent fiction. The schematism arises in part from her “vocabulary of discrimination,”² those abstract words which classify actions in moral terms. Wittgenstein’s remarks recall the adaptability of our responses, the readiness of our minds to discover how a literary work conveys its meanings and to make insensible adjustments to the forms its signs may take. Black-and-white photography can make discrminations and tonal gradations that cannot be achieved by color, just as, in another case, an engraving can define a structure through line that a
5 Stendhal: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: Stendhal’s irony is more radical than Jane Austen’s. His characters tend to be unstable compounds, and they demand a shifting and flexible response from the reader. That response is enacted for us by the narrator, who regards his hero from constantly varying distances and directions. Stendhal’s rhetoric recalls, in its shifts and dodges, the example of Byron’s
Don Juan. That poem, like Stendhal’s novels, is a work of an age of reaction and political repression, of institutionalized banality. Behind both lie the French Revolution and the remarkable career of Napoleon. The vitality of the revolution and of the young Napoleon
9 James: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: In his later novels, Henry James leaves some crucial portion of his action, and of his characters, indeterminate. He does this, in part, by giving us characters’ conscious responses—at a somewhat shallow level of awareness—without accounting for their deeper motives or even, in some cases, indicating whether the surface awareness is consistent with what lies below. By a shallow level I mean only that the principal action of his novels takes place close enough to the surface of consciousness to alert us to meanings that are almost evident and therefore the more frustrating for their elusiveness. We are
10 Conrad: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: In
The Fable of the BeesBernard Mandeville created a dazzling paradox: private vices are public benefits. The more self-indulgent a nation, the more trade it generates: the more people it must employ in the manufacture and transport of luxuries, the more services it will require and reward. On the contrary, an abstemious people are content with little, live on their own productions, remain a self-subsistent nation with little need for commerce or expansion and of little note in the world. Clearly such a paradox seems to undermine morality; and it was designed, in fact, to reveal the confusions of
12 Forster: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: One may as well begin with Miss Bartlett’s words to Lucy Honeychurch. The scene is Florence, the Pension Bertolini. The ladies have been given rooms that overlook an interior court. Mr. Emerson and his son offer their own rooms in exchange: rooms with a view. Miss Bartlett is offended by the indelicacy of the proposal, but Lucy is less certain how to take it: “ ‘No, he is not tactful; yet have you noticed that there are people who do things which are most indelicate, and yet at the same time—beautiful?’ ”“ ‘Beautiful?’ said Miss Bartlett, puzzled at the
13 The Beauty of Mortal Conditions: from:
Forms of Life
Abstract: “Sceptically, cynically, mystically, he had sought for an absolute satisfaction and now little by little he began to be conscious of the beauty of mortal conditions.”
Book Title: The Postmodern Bible-The Bible and Culture Collective
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Wuellner Wilhelm
Abstract: The burgeoning use of modern literary theory and cultural criticism in recent biblical studies has led to stimulating-but often bewildering-new readings of the Bible. This book, argued from a perspective shaped by postmodernism, is at once an accessible guide to and an engagement with various methods, theories, and critical practices transforming biblical scholarship today.Written by a collective of cutting-edge scholars-with each page the work of multiple hands-
The Postmodern Bibledeliberately breaks with the individualist model of authorship that has traditionally dominated scholarship in the humanities and is itself an illustration of the postmodern transformation of biblical studies for which it argues.The book introduces, illustrates, and critiques seven prominent strategies of reading. Several of these interpretive strategies-rhetorical criticism, structuralism and narratology, reader-response criticism, and feminist criticism-have been instrumental in the transformation of biblical studies up to now. Many-feminist and womanist criticism, ideological criticism, poststructuralism, and psychoanalytic criticism-hold promise for the continued transformation of these studies in the future. Focusing on readings from both the Hebrew Bible and the New Testament, this volume illuminates the current multidisciplinary debates emerging from postmodernism by exposing the still highly contested epistemological, political, and ethical positions in the field of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dr3804
5 Psychoanalytic Criticism from:
The Postmodern Bible
Abstract: By the time Sigmund Freud published
The Interpretation of Dreams(1900), the principles of psychoanalysis were in place. What were they? Laplanche and Pontalis’s scrupulous definition of psychoanalysis begins: “a method of investigation which consists essentially in bringing out the unconscious meanings of the words, the actions and the products of the imagination … of a particular subject” (367; cf. Freud, 1923b:235). This discovery or institution of the unconscious, that dark realm that governs us but which we cannot govern, whose contents express themselves obliquely—not transparently—in displacements, sublimations, condensations, and substitutions, was to be defining for psychoanalysis. It
Book Title: Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BRUNS GERALD L.
Abstract: In this wide-ranging meditation on the nature and purpose of hermeneutics, Gerald L. Bruns argues that hermeneutics is not merely a contemporary theory but an extended family of questions about understanding and interpretation that have multiple and conflicting histories going back to before the beginning of writing.What does it mean to understand a riddle, an action, a concept, a law, an alien culture, or oneself? Bruns expands our sense of the horizons of hermeneutics by situating its basic questions against a background of different cultural traditions and philosophical topics. He discusses, for example, the interpretation of oracles, the silencing of the muses and the writing of history, the quarrel between philosophy and poetry, the canonization of sacred texts, the nature of allegorical exegesis, rabbinical midrash, the mystical exegesis of the Qur'an, the rise of literalism and the individual interpreter, and the nature of Romantic hermeneutics. Dealing with thinkers ranging from Socrates to Luther to Wordsworth to Ricoeur, Bruns also ponders several basic dilemmas about the nature of hermeneutical experience, the meaning of tradition, the hermeneutical function of narrative, and the conflict between truth and freedom in philosophy and literature. His eloquent book demonstrates the continuing power of hermeneutical thinking to open up questions about the world and our place in it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dszwtv
Introduction: from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: Let me try to situate my book by taking up, in some fairly familiar ways, the question of what sort of thing hermeneutics might he and what its point is. The simplest answer is that hermeneutics is a tradition of thinking or of philosophical reflection that tries to clarify the concept of
verstehen, that is, understanding. What is it to make sense of anything, whether a poem, a legal text, a human action, a language, an alien culture, or oneself? The difficulty is that this is not an entirely coherent question; or rather, the question of understanding turns up in
2 Thucydides, Plato, and the Historicality of Truth from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: It must be acknowledged that hermeneutics belongs to the realm of opinion, or rhetoric, rather than to the realm of truth, or philosophy.¹ But it seems part of every hermeneutical desire to cross the threshold of rhetoric and to speak, well, philosophically. My purpose in this chapter is to consider one or two ancient examples of this desire. These examples are related to the question of tradition, that is, the question of how we stand with respect to all that comes down to us from the past. A main problem about tradition is that things do not seem exactly to
5 The Hermeneutics of Midrash from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: In this chapter I want to examine in some detail a midrashic text that, from a hermeneutical standpoint, seems to articulate most fully the ancient rabbinical conception of what it means to interpret the Scriptures. In spite of its reputation, midrash is not just a sort of edifying companion to the Bible that goes off by itself; it is a genuinely hermeneutical practice in the sense that its purpose is to elucidate and understand scriptural text as such.¹ But what counts as understanding in this case? In Philo we saw that understanding and interpretation are internal to the practice of
6 Ṣūfīyya: from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: Not all texts are for reading. Of course, the word
textitself contradicts this idea. Discourse from a textual standpoint is not so much expression as ciphering and concealing, that is, plotting and weaving, layering and folding, structuring and packing; and these are metaphors that call for reading in the strong modernist sense of analytical action. Texts impose tasks that it seems natural for us to characterize in the language of instrumental reason—of grasping and penetrating, getting on top of and breaking down, unpacking and laying bare. The text is an object defined by our ability to reduce and
8 Wordsworth at the Limits of Romantic Hermeneutics from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: In this chapter I want to try to gloss the above passage, with its reference to something that looks very much like the Stanislavsky method of getting into character, where one loses oneself in the construction of someone else. Imagine a theory of poetry as acting, in which the distinction between being and acting loses its ontological force. As it happens, glossing this passage will mean situating Wordsworth within the history of interpretation, by which I mean the history that concerns itself with the question of understanding. What is it that happens when something, or someone, makes sense, or maybe
12 Against Poetry: from:
Hermeneutics Ancient and Modern
Abstract: The title is meant to take us back to the quarrel between philosophy and poetry that Socrates already regarded as ancient. My sense is that every hermeneutical situation has the structure of this quarrel, which is governed by a logic that is by turns exclusionary and allegorical. Plato’s idea seems to have been that poetry embodies something (we’re not sure what) that interferes with the sort of discourse Socrates is trying to set up and that he seems to be practicing in texts like the
Republic, where one statement follows another more or less justifiably or according to some principle
EDITORS’ INTRODUCTION from:
Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: This volume rounds off what would have been a decade of
Histories of Anthropology Annualif we had met the ideal in producing an annual volume. In actuality it has taken a couple of extra years to reach this point.HoAAbegan in the book division at the University of Nebraska Press, then moved to the journals portfolio, and then returned to the book division with a renewed emphasis on the stand-alone character of each volume. Each volume now has a unique title, albeit still within the mandate ofHoAAto provide an outlet for work in the history of
7 “I Wrote All My Notes in Shorthand”: from:
Local Knowledge, Global Stage
Author(s) HATOUM RAINER
Abstract: There is no doubt that Franz Boas, the personification of American cultural anthropology and the concept of cultural relativism, eventually succeeded in making his urge come true, which he expressed in the line from a letter to his sister Toni quoted above. More importantly for this essay, though, is the fact that this urge led Boas to build for himself a lasting and monumental legacy in writing that, to this day, influences research by countless scholars both directly and indirectly. Among them are those scholars who are still trying to cope with the enormous amount of raw material left behind
Book Title: In a Different Place-Pilgrimage, Gender, and Politics at a Greek Island Shrine
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Dubisch Jill
Abstract: Dubisch examines in detail the process of pilgrimage itself, its relationship to Orthodox belief and practice, the motivations and behavior of pilgrims, the relationship between religion and Greek national identity, and the gendered nature of religious roles. Seeking to evoke rather than simply describe, her book presents readers with a sense of the emotion, color, and power of pilgrimage at this Greek island shrine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8nz
CHAPTER TWO The Pilgrim and the Anthropologist from:
In a Different Place
Abstract: Tinos is a rugged island, one of a group of the Aegean Islands of Greece known as the Cyclades, a name derived from the fact that they form a circle (
kíklos) around the ancient sacred island of Delos. For contemporary pilgrims, however, it is not Delos but Tinos that forms the sacred center of the Cyclades. These pilgrims come in droves during the summer months, in ships buffeted by themeltémi, the relentless north wind of
CHAPTER SIX The Observer Observed from:
In a Different Place
Abstract: My own “vow” reflects a particularly complex, long-term, and even intimate relationship with a certain set of religious practices. As I look back on my earlier fieldwork, I realize that religion was part of my experience of Greek life almost from my first days in the village. This is illustrated by an entry in my journal on August 4, 1969, about two weeks after my husband and I had settled in Falatados. I spent part of this day with some village women, accompanying them to their garden in the countryside. It was a frustrating experience for me as I struggled
CHAPTER SEVEN An Island in Space, an Island In Time from:
In a Different Place
Abstract: So far I have brought both the pilgrim and the anthropologist to Tinos and have described something of the activities of each at the pilgrimage site. These activities are located within two larger fields: the practices and beliefs of the Greek Orthodox religion on the one hand, and the practices and beliefs of anthropology on the other. Up to this point Tinos, the island, has remained in the background, noted merely as the location of the Church of the Annunciation, as the site of my earlier village fieldwork, and as a place to which both pilgrim and anthropologist must travel
Book Title: Firewalking and Religious Healing-The Anastenaria of Greece and the American Firewalking Movement
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Danforth Loring M.
Abstract: "If the Saint calls you, if you have an open road, then you don't feel the fire as if it were your enemy," says one of the participants in the Anastenaria. This compelling work evokes and contrasts two forms of firewalking and religious healing: first, the Anastenaria, a northern Greek ritual in which people who are possessed by Saint Constantine dance dramatically over red-hot coals, and, second, American firewalking, one of the more spectacular activities of New Age psychology. Loring Danforth not only analyzes these rituals in light of the most recent work in medical and symbolic anthropology but also describes in detail the lives of individual firewalkers, involving the reader personally in their experiences: he views ritual therapy as a process of transformation and empowerment through which people are metaphorically moved from a state of illness to a state of health. Danforth shows that the Anastenaria and the songs accompanying it allow people to express and resolve conflict-laden family relationships that may lead to certain kinds of illnesses. He also demonstrates how women use the ritual to gain a sense of power and control over their lives without actually challenging the ideology of male dominance that pervades Greek culture. Comparing the Anastenaria with American firewalking, Danforth includes a gripping account of his own participation in a firewalk in rural Maine. Finally he examines the place of anthropology in a postmodern world in which the boundaries between cultures are becoming increasingly blurred.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1dxg8pg
VIII The American Firewalking Movement from:
Firewalking and Religious Healing
Abstract: Firewalking is certainly one of the most dramatic activities that take place at the many classes, seminars, and workshops attended by the increasing number of Americans who hope to bring about a “New Age” of peace, unity, and higher consciousness through personal growth and spiritual transformation. By the 1980s a wide range of belief systems, social causes, and healing practices, whose origins lay in the counterculture of the 1960s, had come together under the general rubric of New Age phenomena. The women’s movement, the environmental movement, and the peace movement; health food, renewable resources, and appropriate technology; parapsychology, astrology, and
Book Title: La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): Roy Matthieu
Abstract: Les innovations sociales, à la manière de bougies d’allumage, engendrent des actions collectives qui proposent des solutions différentes de celles des pratiques dominantes en mettant l’économie au service des personnes et de la société. Or la simple multiplication des innovations sociales ne peut générer la transformation sociale à elle seule. La mise en relation des mouvements sociaux et de leur visée émancipatoire est nécessaire pour façonner de nouvelles normes et règles et mettre en place de nouveaux sentiers institutionnels. Ce sont certains de ces nouveaux sentiers que montrent les textes regroupés dans cet ouvrage. Fruit du ive Colloque international du Centre de recherche sur les innovations sociales, il expose les enjeux que pose la trans-formation sociale par l’innovation sociale et les documente par des illustrations ciblées sur des thématiques ou des expériences précises. Une discussion théorique sur le lien entre l’innovation sociale et la transformation sociale est d’abord proposée, puis les méthodes d’analyse de l’innovation sociale, le partage de connaissance entre les chercheurs et les acteurs sociaux, le rôle de l’État et des politiques publiques, l’économie solidaire et la place de l’entreprise sociale sont abordés. L’ensemble des textes analytiques et des textes illustratifs de cet ouvrage offre des pistes de réflexion sur la transformation sociale par l’inno-vation sociale, c’est-à-dire sur la façon dont certaines expérimen-tations aboutissent à la transformation de la société. L’ouvrage met ainsi de l’avant le rôle des citoyens et des organisations qui travaillent pour le bien-être des collectivités en expérimentant des solutions à leurs problèmes et en se mobilisant pour exiger leur reconnaissance. Il vise à poser les jalons pour comprendre et participer à la reconstruction sociale déjà à l’œuvre, dans le but de la renforcer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f1163h
1 L’ÉCONOMIE SOCIALE ET SOLIDAIRE, L’ENTREPRENEURIAT SOCIAL ET L’INNOVATION SOCIALE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Laville Jean-Louis
Abstract: Nous pouvons observer un certain décalage entre la capacité de transformation sociale de l’innovation sociale et son traitement dans l’actualité politique. En effet, au sein de cette actualité, les innovations sociales ne sont pas traitées en tant qu’éléments clés de la construction d’un nouveau compromis. Pour élucider ce décalage de perceptions, nous ferons un détour du côté politique sans pour autant nous éloigner du champ scientifique.Nous pouvons citer à ce propos Paul Ricoeur selon lequel il n’y a que deux façons de faire des sciences sociales, soit en déniant ses présupposés normatifs et en les réintroduisant de manière subreptice, soit
3 L’INNOVATION SOCIALE FACE AUX DÉFIS DE LA GLOBALISATION: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Mingione Enzo
Abstract: Il y a actuellement un engouement pour les expériences d’ « innovation sociale » . L’innovation sociale est aujourd’hui à la fois un thème de recherche (Moulaert
et al., 2013a) et un champ d’intervention publique en quête de bonnes pratiques pour surmonter les difficultés des Étatsprovidence érodés par les changements globaux et individualisés. La Commission européenne (BEPA, 2010) tente d’attirer l’attention de la recherche et des politiques publiques vers des innovations sociales qui sont considérées comme génératrices de cohésion, d’inclusion et de protection. Néanmoins, le concept d’innovation sociale demeure mal défini oscillant entre une définition générale regroupant toutes les nouvelles
[PARTIE 2 Introduction] from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Abstract: Alors que l’innovation sociale est sur toutes les tribunes et qu’elle s’affirme comme objet de recherche et comme source d’inspiration pour le renouvellement de l’action publique, il s’avère nécessaire, pour mieux l’analyser, en mesurer l’incidence et l’évaluer, de développer des méthodologies, des outils de diagnostic et des indicateurs pertinents. C’est ce que proposent les trois chapitres et les trois textes illustratifs compris dans cette partie.Tout d’abord, le texte de Frank Moulaert interroge les dérives épistémologiques de la recherche sur l’innovation sociale, puis présente les jalons d’une méthode d’analyse qui s’applique au domaine du développement territorial. Le second texte, de Florence
8 LES MARQUEURS D’INNOVATION SOCIALE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Chochoy Nicolas
Abstract: En nous appuyant sur la coconstruction d’un outil collectif d’analyse des éléments porteurs d’innovation sociale, les marqueurs d’innovation sociale, en région Picardie (France), l’objet de cette contribution est de montrer qu’une démarche de recherche partenariale, associant chercheurs, acteurs et institutions, permet d’accompagner et d’orienter une dynamique propice à l’émergence de nouvelles trajectoires d’innovation. Aussi, nous expliciterons dans quelles mesures cet outil participe à l’amorce de nouvelles trajectoires d’innovation en Picardie : d’une part, par l’appropriation de la notion d’innovation sociale par les participants lors de sa construction collective et, d’autre part, par le repérage des pratiques porteuses d’innovation sociale permettant
9 LE COMMERCE ÉQUITABLE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Reed Darryl
Abstract: Bien que l’économie sociale et solidaire (ESS) ait considérablement évolué au cours des dernières années, il n’en reste pas moins qu’encore aujourd’hui, elle comprend : a) des entreprises de petite échelle qui b) opèrent en marge de l’économie formelle c) dans des activités économiques fortement compétitives générant peu de profits. Afin de sortir les gens de la pauvreté et leur fournir un certain degré de sécurité économique, l’ESS a besoin de connaître une nouvelle croissance (
scaling). Plus précisément, elle a besoin de croître (ou de se déployer) dans trois directions différentes : 1) horizontalement, afin d’incorporer davantage de personnes marginalisées
[PARTIE 3 Introduction] from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Abstract: Comme soulevé par Frank Moulaert dans la partie précédente, la recherche sur l’innovation sociale nécessite une méthodologie en accord avec sa nature et ses valeurs intrinsèques. Ainsi, pour analyser l’innovation sociale, fruit des acteurs sociaux, on gagne à utiliser une méthode qui donne une place à ces acteurs ; c’est ce qu’on entend par coconstruction de la connaissance. Cette méthode génère des apprentissages collectifs autant du côté des chercheurs que de celui des milieux de pratique. Éléments essentiels de l’innovation sociale, ces apprentissages peuvent alors être mis à profit pour enrichir l’initiative et faciliter sa diffusion. D’abord, Jean-Marc Fontan pose
11 L’INNOVATION ET LA TRANSFORMATION SOCIALES: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Fontan Jean-Marc
Abstract: Dans un premier temps, nous montrerons comment le processus innovant constitue en apparence un champ d’action plus ou moins homogène et d’intérêts convergents. Le deuxième temps nous permettra de porter un jugement évaluatif sur la capacité réelle d’initiatives locales innovantes de proposer de nouvelles orientations culturelles ou encore de générer de nouveaux
12 D’UN ESPACE DE RECHERCHE À UN ESPACE DE PRODUCTION COGNITIVE from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Bussières Denis
Abstract: Notre présentation porte sur la relation partenariale qui prend forme entre des praticiens et des chercheurs dans le cadre de recherches impliquant une relation étroite entre ces deux acteurs. Dans la littérature, ce type de recherche se retrouve sous des dénominations différentes : recherche collaborative, recherche-action, recherche partenariale, recherche participative. Ces dénominations impliquent une relation étroite entre chercheurs et praticiens tout au long du processus de recherche. Cette collaboration est concrétisée par le terme de coconstruction des connaissances dont se réclament ces différentes appellations.
13 LA RECHERCHE-ACTION COMME APPUI À LA TRANSFORMATION SOCIALE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) El-Jed Mahdiah
Abstract: Gestion des déchets, émissions de gaz à effet de serre liées aux transports, consommation énergétique des activités de production et de transformation : le système alimentaire actuel soulève des défis environnementaux qui ont des répercussions tant locales que planétaires. Mais c’est également la question de la sécurité alimentaire, c’est-à-dire l’accès pour tous à des aliments frais et à prix abordables, qui pose problème, y compris dans une ville comme Montréal où perdurent des « déserts alimentaires ». Avec plus de 80 % de la population québécoise vivant au sein d’agglomérations urbaines, la ville est un creuset fertile pour l’expérimentation d’alternatives
14 L’INSÉCURITÉ IDENTITAIRE ET L’ACTION COLLECTIVE EN MATIÈRE DE LOGEMENT POUR AÎNÉS: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Bagaoui Rachid
Abstract: Le but de ce texte est de s’interroger sur les conditions de réalisation d’une recherche de type partenarial à partir d’une étude menée sur le logement des aînés dans la région de Sudbury (Ontario) entre 2011 et 2012. Quelles sont les formes de coproduction des connaissances générées par ce type de recherche ? Quel est le but poursuivi ? Qu’en est-il de la mobilisation des acteurs qui y participent ? Que peuvent-ils réaliser ensemble et comment y parviennent-ils ? À quelles conditions peut-on parler de recherche partenariale ?
[PARTIE 4 Introduction] from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Abstract: Chaque initiative d’innovation sociale prend racine dans un terreau spécifique qui influe sur son évolution, sur sa trajectoire. Une approche territoriale permet la prise en compte de l’ensemble des acteurs impliqués dans les processus innovants et de faire ressortir les événements déclencheurs, les ressources mobilisées ainsi que les processus qui mènent à l’ancrage territorial des initiatives. Les textes regroupés dans cette partie abordent l’effet territorial dans l’innovation sociale. Pierre-André Tremblay et Yann Fournis réfléchissent sur la tension entre l’action communautaire (ancrée dans le local) et l’État dans le contexte du Québec. Cordula Kropp, à partir de l’étude de communautés alpines,
16 L’INNOVATION COMMUNAUTAIRE EN LIEU ET PLACE DU MOUVEMENT SOCIAL from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Fournis Yann
Abstract: La dialectique innovation/institution est mal comprise. Concevoir l’innovation sociale au Canada et au Québec sur un mode monologique serait trompeur: conformément au style canadien des politiques réglementaires, l’État ne peut produire seul une politique innovatrice et doit nécessairement s’appuyer sur l’action de la société civile et des mouvements sociaux qui font le lien entre elle et la société politique. Symétriquement, la société civile ne se réalise pas dans l’apesanteur institutionnelle; pour émerger et se définir, elle renvoie et s’articule aux programmes et politiques configurant l’espace politique national. Or, en dépit de sa diversité, la réflexion québécoise sur le mouvement communautaire
17 LA TRANSFORMATION DURABLE PAR L’INNOVATION SOCIALE DANS LES ALPES from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Kropp Cordula
Abstract: Sur le plan du développement durable, l’innovation sociale est prometteuse à trois égards. Premièrement, elle faciliterait l’accès de la société aux processus d’innovation en permettant aux citoyens, clients et collectivités locales de devenir, au même titre que les entreprises et les universités, des acteurs pertinents façonnant les changements sociaux et
19 L’INNOVATION TERRITORIALE EN ESPACE RURAL FRAGILE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Rieutort Laurent
Abstract: Cette illustration a pour objet d’explorer, à partir d’un exemple paradigmatique (le rôle d’une association d’insertion en milieu rural isolé), les capacités mobilisatrices des acteurs de l’innovation sociale pour le développement des territoires. Il s’est agi aussi de formuler l’hypothèse de l’émergence discrète d’un nouveau style de développement pour la valorisation des ressources territoriales et, plus largement, de nouveaux territoires ruraux. L’analyse s’est appuyée sur une démarche qualitative engagée dans le cadre d’une recherche-action soutenue par le Conseil régional d’Auvergne au titre d’un appel à projets en « recherche-action dans le champ de l’innovation sociale » lancé en 2012. Ce
22 DES VOIES OUBLIÉES, DES SENTIERS OUVERTS: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Gaiger Luiz Inácio
Abstract: Ce chapitre a pour but d’esquisser une thèse générale sur les rapports entre l’innovation sociale et le solidarisme populaire en Amérique latine. Pour bien comprendre le sens de l’innovation sociale sur ce continent et les défis auxquels elle fait face en tant qu’outil de transformation sociale, le texte propose d’abord une analyse rétrospective des changements survenus en Amérique latine ces dernières décennies. Cela permettra de saisir que l’enjeu majeur à l’heure actuelle découle de l’emprise progressive de l’économie de marché et de la culture utilitariste qui lui confère sa légitimité, au détriment d’autres formes d’économie et d’autres systèmes de vie.
23 L’ÉVALUATION DU POTENTIEL DE L’INNOVATION SOCIALE POUR RÉDUIRE STRUCTURELLEMENT LA PAUVRETÉ: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Oosterlynck Stijn
Abstract: De nombreux gouvernements nationaux en Europe ont récemment découvert l’innovation sociale comme étant un nouveau paradigme pour l’intervention sociale. Au sens le plus générique, l’innovation sociale consiste en une innovation que l’on qualifie de sociale à la fois dans ses objectifs et dans ses moyens (Mulgan
et al., 2006). Il s’agit d’aborder des besoins sociaux et des défis sociétaux à travers la transformation des relations sociales (Ghys et Oosterlynck, 2013a). Dans le contexte actuel, l’innovation sociale est souvent associée à des projets sociaux innovants d’organisations de la société civile, d’entrepreneurs sociaux et de gouvernements locaux.
24 DE L’INNOVATION À L’EXPÉRIMENTATION: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Denis Jean-Michel
Abstract: Jusqu’à peu, l’innovation n’était pas une notion couramment employée pour analyser les relations professionnelles (Garabige
et al., 2013). Leur confrontation à la thématique de l’innovation s’est néanmoins amplifiée ces dernières années, tant en raison de la « plasticité » de la notion que du constat de la transformation du système des relations professionnelles, de son architecture, du nombre et du rôle de ses acteurs, de ses normes, etc., l’ensemble de ces changements intervenant dans un contexte de profonde déstabilisation des cadres antérieurs, qu’il s’agisse de la nation, de la loi ou de la convention collective. Ce bouleversement des cadres n’a
28 L’INNOVATION SOCIALE ET L’AIDE À DOMICILE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Tremblay Diane-Gabrielle
Abstract: Deux facteurs suscitent des innovations sociales dans le secteur de l’économie sociale, soit le besoin social non assouvi et la capacité d’imagination des acteurs sociaux. Ainsi, plusieurs innovations sociales ont fait le Québec d’aujourd’hui : le régime québécois d’assurance maladie, le régime d’assurance parentale, les Centres à la petite enfance, etc.
29 L’INNOVATION SOCIALE ET L’ENTREPRISE SOCIALE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Nyssens Marthe
Abstract: En Europe, le débat sur l’entreprise sociale a émergé durant les années 1990 à la suite de l’identification de dynamiques entrepreneuriales innovantes centrées sur la primauté de la finalité sociale. Ces initiatives se sont inscrites, pour la plupart, au sein du « troisième secteur ». Les concepts d’entreprise sociale et d’innovation sociale se sont également largement diffusés dans l’arène des institutions européennes. Si l’innovation sociale ne se limite pas au champ des entreprises sociales, ce type d’entreprise demeure un acteur central de l’innovation sociale. Cependant, derrière ces discours, les conceptions de l’entreprise sociale et de l’innovation sociale sont multiformes. Ce
30 L’EUROPE EN TRANSITION: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Salvatori Gianluca
Abstract: Ce texte vise à décrire le rôle des entreprises et coopératives sociales en tant que modèle économique. Il s’agit d’organisations non lucratives qui assument un rôle de plus en plus important en Europe (comme le montre l’exemple de l’Initiative pour l’entrepreneuriat social lancée récemment par la Commission européenne) en contribuant à son développement économique et social. De façon plus générale, le texte vise à mettre en exergue l’impact économique et social des entreprises et coopératives sociales, en s’appuyant principalement sur des exemples issus des coopératives sociales italiennes.
31 L’INNOVATION SOCIALE ENTRE VOGUE ET VAGUE: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Petrella Francesca
Abstract: L’ampleur de la crise actuelle et les multiples soubresauts du modèle économique depuis la fin des années 1970 favorisent un regain d’intérêt pour l’innovation, supposée à l’origine d’un nouveau régime de croissance. On perçoit aussi que la croyance dans le progrès technologique comme réponse aux situations de crise trouve ses limites. Dans ce contexte, l’innovation sociale apparaît comme la nouvelle solution susceptible de favoriser non seulement la croissance, mais aussi une forme de partage de ses fruits plus équitable et, dans certains cas, de redéfinir les politiques sociales (Moulaert
et al., 2013a). Elle est souvent présentée comme une façon de
32 LA FABRIQUE SOCIALE DES INITIATIVES SOLIDAIRES from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Mahieu Christian
Abstract: Rien n’est moins évident que la prise d’initiative citoyenne solidaire. Le « pas de côté » qu’elle nécessite ne va pas de soi, tant sont prégnants les processus qui structurent la société salariale. La création d’activités ne se repère qu’à travers des processus faiblement questionnés et n’offrant, comme seule « alternative » , que l’entrepreneuriat et l’indépendance libérale.
33 LE DÉLIBÉRALISME: from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Goujon Daniel
Abstract: L’innovation sociale est un terme très présent dans les documents de l’Union européenne et dans la terminologie des acteurs de l’économie sociale et solidaire (ESS). Devant faire face, d’un côté, aux contraintes budgétaires sans précédent, de l’autre, à la nécessité d’inventer un développement territorial endogène et durable, les politiques publiques et les acteurs de la société civile se retrouvent sur le terme d’innovation sociale. Tous les deux insistent sur la nécessité de décloisonner, de promouvoir l’entrepreneuriat social et solidaire, de s’inscrire dans la culture sociale et historique du territoire. Cependant, n’y a-t-il pas contradiction entre le désir d’alternative économique exprimé
CONCLUSION from:
La transformation sociale par l'innovation sociale
Author(s) Roy Matthieu
Abstract: La lecture des textes présentés dans cet ouvrage nous conduit à différents constats. Tout d’abord, ils montrent que les expérimentations en cours dans les organisations et dans les communautés peuvent être vues comme des bougies d’allumage de processus qui peuvent amener la société à se transformer. Cette perspective permet d’établir un lien entre diverses actions collectives en apparence peu significatives sur le plan sociétal mais qui, répondant aux mêmes aspirations, créent les bases pour de nouvelles façons de faire, pour de nouvelles règles et pour de nouvelles façons de comprendre l’évolution des sociétés. Les innovations sociales, en s’appuyant sur de
CHAPITRE 5 Le « Lost in Translation », ou la faiblesse des supports identificatoires en contexte de disqualification from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) DELCROIX SYLVIE
Abstract: LE DISPOSITIF de protection de l’enfance marque un point d’entrée de la puissance publique dans l’espace privé pour préserver l’intérêt des plus faibles dans l’espace familial. Il met en scène des acteurs pris dans des relations contraignantes avec les institutions, captifs de décisions qu’ils ne maîtrisent pas. La domination de classe subie par les familles concernées, défavorisées, contrôlées, stigmatisées a été analysée de longue date (Donzelot, 1977). Ce qui a moins été analysé, c’est la place des enfants et des jeunes dans le dispositif d’aide, leurs « stratégies de débrouillardise » et les « bricolages biographiques » (Vuille et Schultheis,
CHAPITRE 6 Le recueil de la parole de l’enfant victime dans un cadre judiciaire: from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) SÉRAPHIN GILLES
Abstract: DANS LE champ de la protection de l’enfance, la question d’une juste prise en compte de la parole des enfants devient récurrente. L’objectif d’une meilleure considération de cette parole semble aujourd’hui partagé par l’ensemble des acteurs. Pourtant, l’application pratique semble moins aisée. Au-delà des questions théoriques quant au statut de cette parole (Qu’est-ce qu’une parole? La parole est-elle véridique?…) se posent des questions plus pratiques sur les méthodes voire les dispositifs à engager pour la considérer.
CHAPITRE 8 L’enfant placé: from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) MANDRILLON CÉCILE
Abstract: POUR LES enfants pris en charge par la protection de l’enfance, l’expression d’une parole est rendue difficile étant donné les expériences non structu rantes et discontinues qui ont marqué leur construction psychique (Rottman et Richard, 2009). Les circonstances à l’origine d’un placement sont complexes et multiples. Les discontinuités sont fréquentes et importantes: discontinuités dans l’histoire individuelle et familiale des enfants dès leur plus jeune âge, parfois dès leur naissance, discontinuités des contacts, de la qualité des relations et des soins… (Houzel, 1999). Des phénomènes de dysparentalité (Clément, 1993), des troubles de la relation précoce correspondant à une psychopathologie de l’attachement
CHAPITRE 9 La parole vivante et la parole morte: from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) IUS MARCO
Abstract: Dans ces expériences, le sujet est conçu comme un auteur et non seule ment comme un acteur
CHAPITRE 12 La participation des parents en protection de l’enfance: from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) SÉRAPHIN GILLES
Abstract: LA PARTICIPATION du mineur, de ses parents et du jeune majeur dans le champ de la protection de l’enfance est devenue une norme d’action publique, sous l’influence des traités internationaux et du droit interne français. Elle est fortement encouragée par différents organismes publics en France tels que l’Agence nationale de l’évaluation et de la qualité des établissements et services sociaux et médico-sociaux (ANESM, 2014). Cette tendance n’est pas unique au secteur de la protection de l’enfance, mais concerne l’ensemble des politiques publiques. Elle fait figure d’impératif démocratique et remet en question le partage des pouvoirs, que ce soit dans les
CHAPITRE 13 Les paroles de parents sur l’accès et l’adhésion aux services de la pédiatrie sociale en communauté from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) GOSSELIN CAROLINE
Abstract: Dans leur recension des écrits, Boag-Munroe et Evangelou (2012) insistent sur les deux pôles qui expliquent la difficulté des parents à accéder aux services qui leur sont pourtant destinés, à savoir leurs caractéristiques personnelles et familiales, et les caractéristiques des services qui facilitent ou
CONCLUSION from:
La protection de l'enfance
Author(s) CHAMBERLAND CLAIRE
Abstract: LES CHAPITRES de cet ouvrage ont tous été écrits dans l’intention d’inviter les divers acteurs professionnels du dispositif de la protection de l’enfance (et cela inclut autant les professionnels eux-mêmes que les chercheurs) à se pencher sur la parole des enfants et des parents de même que sur le contexte dans lequel cette parole peut être exprimée et entendue. Au terme de cet exercice collectif, et en guise de conclusion, il nous est apparu nécessaire de mettre en relief certains points autour desquels un débat devrait être fait. Nous laissons donc aux lecteurs l’initiative de prolonger cette réflexion collective à
CHAPITRE 6 QUAND L’INNOVATION PAR LE NUMÉRIQUE VIENT RÉVEILLER LES RESSOURCES DORMANTES: from:
Changement et grands projets
Author(s) MATHIEU JEAN-PASCAL
Abstract: Professionnel des médias interactifs depuis l’apparition des premiers cédéroms grand public il y a un peu plus de 20 ans, j’anime l’innovation dans une société de conception et de réalisation de produits et services numériques : sites Web, applications mobiles et objets connectés. J’ai assisté à l’émergence du numérique moderne avec la connectivité des ordinateurs personnels.
CHAPITRE 11 DÉCHIFFRER LES SAVOIRS DES ACTEURS LOCAUX ET CRÉER LA COLLABORATION ENTRE LES PARTIES PRENANTES: from:
Changement et grands projets
Author(s) JAUJARD FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Si la gestion d’un projet territorial s’appuie sur les principes de la méthodologie de projets intraorganisationnelle, elle s’en distingue également du fait de variables comme la multiplicité et de la variété des acteurs locaux et des structures territoriales. Un territoire est un espace répondant à un « code profond » ; par analogie au structurel défini par Giddens (1991), il se situe « hors du temps et de l’espace », il est à l’origine de « traces mnésiques grâce auxquelles les agents compétents orientent leurs conduites ». Un espace représenté ou imaginé, nos sens, notre mémoire (des schèmes mémorisés) et
Aveux de comploteurs en Guinée: from:
Écritures de la réclusion
Author(s) Barry Alpha Ousmane
Abstract: Comme le souligne si bien Lewin¹, aujourd’hui encore, peu d’États du monde sont aussi mal connus que la Guinée – cette ancienne colonie française – qui s’est affranchie de la tutelle de la métropole en votant « Non » au général de Gaulle le 28 septembre 1958, et où s’est instauré un régime à parti unique. La marche forcée vers un État totalitaire a eu pour corollaire la dénonciation régulière de complots contre la sûreté de l’État, laquelle reposait sur le simulacre d’un conflit permanent entre révolutionnaires et réactionnaires. L’amplification de la propagande orchestrée par le régime s’est manifestée dans
Le Centre de rééducation civique de Tcholliré: from:
Écritures de la réclusion
Author(s) Woudammiké Joseph
Abstract: Le présent article étudie l’un des centres d’internement administratif édifiés au Cameroun au lendemain de l’accession du pays à l’indépendance en 1960. Il s’agit du Centre de rééducation civique (CRC) de Tcholliré. L’étude d’un tel thème permet d’établir une connexion avec, d’une part, la politique de répression des acteurs politiques au Cameroun et, d’autre part, la déportation et la mise en résidence surveillée des acteurs politiques qui ont eu maille à partir avec les régimes au pouvoir.
Book Title: Identité et multiplicité en ligne- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): Perraton Charles
Abstract: On pourrait croire à tort que les internautes sont libres de se construire n’importe quelle identité, parce qu’ils n’auraient aucune contrainte physique dans le cyberespace. L’identité serait ainsi sortie de ses frontières pour permettre à chacun de créer et multiplier à sa guise autant d’identités qu’il le souhaite. Il ne faudrait toutefois pas conforter la croyance dans le sujet et dans l’idéologie de la représentation de laquelle il relève en centrant le questionnement sur l’identité. Sujet et identité vont en effet de pair avec une surestimation de la conscience et une conception idéaliste de la volonté qui pourrait être préjudiciable à la compréhension des grands enjeux liés à l’expérience de l’univers numérique. On le sait, la notion d’identité est d’une grande utilité pour caractériser et responsabiliser les individus dans les sociétés de contrôle. Elle permet aux autorités et aux gestionnaires de toutes sortes d’administrer les corps à distance ; elle permet aux organisations de profiter du numérique pour développer de nouveaux outils de profilage. Elle pourrait faire écran à la compréhension des véritables enjeux de l’expérience du cyberespace si on oublie de porter l’analyse sur les différents agencements auxquels ouvre l’expérience des mondes virtuels où se trouvent mobilisés les corps et les objets dans l’exploration de nouveaux territoires et l’invention de nouvelles formes de vie.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f1171z
Identité(s) du joueur et du personnage: from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Dor Simon
Abstract: C’est la moindre des choses de dire que le jeu vidéo a l’
avatarbien chevillé au corps, pour s’approprier une formule célèbre de Christian Metz (1964 : 62). Alison Gazzard, en affirmant qu’« il y aura toujours une présence “avatariale” dans des environnements interactifs immersifs¹ » (2009 : 192), semble bien illustrer l’idée qu’on ne peut jamais vraiment se détacher du concept d’avatar pour analyser les jeux vidéo. Pourtant, nombre d’entre eux n’impliquent pas un personnage-joueur au sens traditionnel du terme², comme c’est évidemment le cas dans la plupart des jeux de stratégie.
Par-delà l’identité et les assemblages, le concept d’agencement from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Perraton Charles
Abstract: Le concept d’agencement semble avoir davantage d’intérêts théoriques et pratiques pour l’analyse des expériences du joueur que la notion d’assemblage telle qu’elle est proposée actuellement chez T. L. Taylor (2009). Ce premier concept permettrait de mieux comprendre les relations dans lesquelles le joueur est impliqué avec les autres éléments de la pratique du jeu (plus particulièrement les jeux en ligne massivement multijoueurs ou MMOG). Afin de soutenir cette idée, je partirai d’une réf lexion générale sur les choses de notre environnement quotidien, pour considérer ensuite la proposition de Taylor (2009) sur la manière de poser le problème de notre rapport
Le profil Facebook a-t-il un sexe? from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Aoun Rania
Abstract: Dès qu’un questionnement sur l’identité en ligne est soulevé, tous les regards sont pointés vers l’usager qui est considéré comme étant la seule personne concernée par la construction de cette identité. Cette perception univoque qui continue à occuper une place importante dans les recherches actuelles rejette tacitement l’intervention d’autres acteurs dans la construction identitaire et réduit le pouvoir dont dispose une plateforme pour définir l’identité de ses usagers. En d’autres termes, elle limite la responsabilité à une seule partie (l’usager). Or, l’évolution des plateformes de réseautage social, en particulier celle de Facebook, confirme davantage l’implication de ces nouvelles formes institutionnelles
La vie publique des objets: from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Rowley Marc
Abstract: Depuis le début du XXI
esiècle, les réseaux socionumériques (RSN) prennent de plus en plus de place dans le discours social. Plusieurs de ces réseaux sont investis par des journalistes, des artistes, des personnages publics et des individus quitweetent,facebookentetinstagrammentleurs activités quotidiennes, leurs opinions ainsi que leurs observations du moment ; ils cherchent ainsi à interagir avec le plus vaste public possible et à se faire remarquer pour leur contribution au discours en ligne (et même, à se démarquer du discours commun dans certains cas). Il arrive également que ces activités finissent par laisser des traces
L’approche juridique au profit des identités numériques: from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Bourgeois Isabelle
Abstract: En droit international, la femme est souvent perçue selon son statut de mère et de conjointe, la confinant à sa relation à la famille comme élément central de la société. La sphère privée reste le seul espace où elle a le pouvoir d’agir. Les caractéristiques de rationalité, de pouvoir et d’objectivité liées au domaine public et masculin (Charlesworth, Chinkin et Wright, 1991 : 626-627) rendent l’accès à la sphère publique plus restreint aux femmes. Elles n’ont ni les acquis pour accéder avec facilité à la politique, ni les opportunités pour défendre leurs droits sur la place publique. Au niveau international
Consommation et identité en ligne: from:
Identité et multiplicité en ligne
Author(s) Cordelier Benoit
Abstract: Pour Goffman (1973), la présentation de soi se fait à travers des interactions et des négociations avec autrui et constitue une composante tangible et intentionnelle de l’identité. L’acteur cherche à projeter une impression qu’il gère grâce à un comportement et des actions répétées et cohérentes avec son intention et les attentes des tiers dans une relation réflexive qui relève de l’
imposition de statut(Strauss, 1992). Dans un contexte d’interactions physiques, l’acteur peut s’appuyer sur ce que Marcel Mauss (1936) ou encore André Leroi-Gourhan (1991) ont pu qualifier detechniques du corps. La présentation de soi devient donc une manipulation de
Book Title: Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): Jaspard Maryse
Abstract: Des professionnels du terrain et de la recherche mobilisent tous leurs savoirs et leurs compétences afin de lever le voile sur les violences faites aux femmes. Mettant de l’avant un outil de conscientisation efficace pourtant resté dans l’ombre, les responsabilités individuelles et collectives, ils cherchent à responsabiliser plus et autrement l’ensemble des acteurs de changement et à rendre plus efficaces les orientations politiques et sociales en la matière.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f11751
CHAPITRE 2 REVICTIMISATION ET VICTIMISATION SECONDAIRE from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Daigneault Sylvie
Abstract: [T]ous les actes de violence dirigés contre le sexe féminin, et causant ou pouvant causer aux femmes un préjudice ou des souffrances physiques, sexuelles ou psychologiques, y compris la menace de tels actes, la contrainte ou la privation arbitraire de liberté, que ce soit dans la vie publique ou dans la vie privée.
CHAPITRE 3 LA VIOLENCE CONJUGALE, C’EST CRIMINEL from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Pollender Geneviève
Abstract: Quel rôle l’État devrait-il jouer dans la résolution d’un problème social qui relève historiquement de la sphère privée ? La judiciarisation de la violence conjugale demeure le moyen choisi par plusieurs gouvernements, dont celui du Québec, pour soustraire cette problématique de l’ordre du privé. Cette position est parfois contestée par les différents acteurs qui prennent part à la lutte pour enrayer la violence conjugale. De nombreux enjeux animent les débats relatifs à cette responsabilisation collective du problème. Il devient donc essentiel de tenir compte du contexte historique derrière la mobilisation des États, des différentes politiques gouvernementales en place au Québec
CHAPITRE 11 LES VIOLENCES À L’ENCONTRE DES FEMMES AU MAROC from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Rame Ali
Abstract: Si tout le monde est conscient de l’universalité de la lutte contre les violences à l’égard des femmes, c’est-à-dire des actes dirigés contre le sexe féminin, et causant ou pouvant causer aux femmes un préjudice ou des souffrances physiques, sexuelles ou psychologiques, y compris la menace de tels actes, la contrainte ou la privation arbitraire de liberté, que ce soit dans la vie publique ou dans la vie privée¹, on peut considérer que ces actes constituent une atteinte aux principes des droits de l’homme. Il y a lieu de constater que les moyens de lutte contre ce fléau restent divers
CHAPITRE 12 LA VIOLENCE FAITE AUX FEMMES DANS LA PROSTITUTION AU CANADA from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Miville-Dechêne Julie
Abstract: En 2002, le Conseil du statut de la femme participait à la réflexion collective en publiant une recherche intitulée
La prostitution : profession ou exploitation ? Une réflexion à poursuivre. Dix ans plus tard, nous avons considéré que le temps était venu de répondre à la question et de prendre clairement position dans ce débat épineux qui recouvre des enjeux complexes, notamment celui des nombreux actes de violences perpétrés contre les femmes prostituées. Aussi la publication récente d’un avis intituléLa prostitution : il est temps d’agirnous a-t-elle permis de revisiter les grands axes historiques, sociologiques et juridiques entourant
CHAPITRE 16 DES RÉPONSES RESPONSABLES AUX VIOLENCES CONTRE LES FEMMES from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Risse David
Abstract: « L’union fait la force. » On le pense volontiers et on le dit à tout va. Mais quand il s’agit de mettre en oeuvre ses bonnes intentions, de passer des discours aux actes et, partant, du « dire » au « faire » (dans la perspective critique des
speech acts), on réalise assez vite qu’un problème social aussi coriace et lancinant que les violences faites aux femmes est encore loin d’unir toutes et tous les responsables : les ministères et personnes élues, les organisations gouvernementales et non gouvernementales, les services de santé, de conseil et d’aide et les organismes
CHAPITRE 18 PROTECTING WOMEN AND CHILDREN FROM VIOLENCE from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Hagemann-White Carol
Abstract: Violence against women was neither recognized as a significant problem, nor was it studied empirically, until women’s political action in the 1970s and 1980s. In particular, the success of grassroots feminist activism in creating hotlines, shelters, and counseling centres for women made men’s violence visible as a widespread social problem and a structural element in gender relations. Thus, in much of Western Europe, addressing violence against women began by creating places of safety and support for victims.
CONCLUSION from:
Responsabilités et violences envers les femmes
Author(s) Smedslund Katja
Abstract: Qu’il nous soit ici permis de conclure sur ce sujet d’actualité mondiale qui demeure, malgré la diversité (Nations Unies, 2006, p. 139) et la gravité des enjeux (Amnesty International, 2006, p. 10-11), un problème social lancinant qui hante les sociétés contemporaines. Par la multitude, l’ampleur et la complexité des problèmes qu’elles n’ont de cesse de générer et l’ensemble des responsabilités qu’elles mettent en jeu et en crise, les violences faites aux femmes (VFF) nécessitent le développement d’autres hypothèses et études critiques, le questionnement d’autres réalités et le croisement avec d’autres regards disciplinaires. La nécessité de clôturer provisoirement ces réflexions croisées
Book Title: Vers une approche géopoétique-Lectures de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio
Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): BOUVET RACHEL
Abstract: Toute perspective de lecture est liée à un ancrage géographique. Chaque lecteur est habité par des paysages. Pour Rachel Bouvet, ce paysage est celui de l’océan tel qu’on peut l’observer le long des côtes bretonnes, cette force gigantesque, sublime, mais aussi porteuse d’une douceur infinie. Les auteurs Kenneth White, Victor Segalen et J.-M. G. Le Clézio partagent eux aussi cet ancrage breton : White vogue principalement entre les Côtes-d’Armor et l’Écosse, Segalen naviguait surtout entre le Finistère Nord et le Pacifique, Le Clézio voyage entre le Finistère Sud et le Nouveau-Mexique en passant par l’océan Indien et la Méditerranée. Consciente de son attachement breton, provoquant chez elle une sensibilité accrue aux paysages maritimes et désertiques, le désir de la géopoétique et un questionnement sur l’altérité, Rachel Bouvet réfléchit à la dimension géographique de l’acte de lecture. Par son analyse des œuvres de Kenneth White, de Victor Segalen et de J.-M. G. Le Clézio, elle montre que la géopoétique peut donner lieu à une approche singulière des textes littéraires. Faisant souvent appel à la géographie, aussi bien à la géographie physique qu’à la géographie humaine, avec les questions de paysage, de carte, de territoire, d’archipel, de frontière, elle illustre de quelle manière une interprétation basée sur les principes essentiels de la géopoétique peut se déployer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f1176j
2 Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel: from:
La trace et le rhizome - Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel
Abstract: En 1768, un riche gisement de kaolin est découvert à Saint-Yrieix-la-Perche, près de Limoges. Turgot, alors intendant du Limousin, obtient que ce kaolin ne soit pas, comme initialement prévu, acheminé à Paris pour alimenter la Manufacture Royale de Sèvres, mais directement exploité sur place, tant il en perçoit l’intérêt pour le territoire concerné. À ce moment-là, tous les royaumes d’Europe, suivant l’exemple de la Saxe (à Meissen), recherchent dans leur sol cette substance argileuse blanche qui permet de produire une céramique analogue à l’ancestrale porcelaine chinoise. En 1771, Turgot confie à un faïencier le soin de réaliser la première cuisson,
3 Les valeurs du patrimoine culturel: from:
La trace et le rhizome - Les mises en scène du patrimoine culturel
Abstract: Région du Togo, le Koutammakou se caractérise par une maison familiale, la takienta, placée sur la liste du patrimoine mondial en 2004. La volonté de ses habitants Batammariba de conserver leur indépendance et leur liberté s’y manifeste en effet depuis des siècles à travers une architecture et une organisation spatiale tout à fait particulière. L’habitation et ses dépendances (greniers, etable, poulailler, ruche), concentrées en un seul corps de bâtiment, se présentent comme un ensemble de tourelles, carrées, circulaires ou ellipsoïdes, d’où l’appellation de maisons-châteaux. Elle n’a qu’une seule entrée, ce qui permet un contrôle et renforce son aspect défensif. Le
AMIN MAALOUF ET LA LITTÉRATURE CHRÉTIENNE MÉDIÉVALE: from:
Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) Rey Mimoso-Ruiz Bernadette
Abstract: Dès l’avant-propos des
Croisades vues par les Arabes¹, Maalouf indique clairement l’intention qui l’anime : ne pas écrire « un nouveau livre d’histoire », mais « “le roman vrai” des croisades, de ces deux siècles mouvementés qui ont façonné l’Occident et le monde arabe, et qui déterminent aujourd’hui encore leurs rapports ». Le lecteur est ainsi averti qu’il se trouve en présence d’un ouvrage qui va raconter une période historique, non pour vérifier l’exactitude des événements, mais pour en extraire les éléments aptes à expliquer le monde actuel. La mention de « roman vrai », pour oxymorique qu’elle paraisse, vise
ÊTRES HYBRIDES DANS LÉON L’AFRICAIN ET LES JARDINS DE LUMIÈRE D’AMIN MAALOUF from:
Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) El Ouardirhi Sanae
Abstract: Issue des études postcoloniales, l’hybridité est une notion clé pour comprendre les multiples déplacements identitaires, ainsi que les croisements linguistiques et culturels dus à l’accentuation des mouvements migratoires et à la contamination des modèles culturels. Le concept d’hybridité souligne le caractère mixte d’un objet, que ce soit une identité, une culture, une langue, un texte ou un personnage. Si les notions d’hybridation (processus) et d’hybridité (produit) aident à mieux comprendre les sociétés et les phénomènes politiques, historiques et sociaux, elles servent aussi à mieux appréhender l’évolution des cultures et des objets culturels – particulièrement les plus récents –, et à
QUESTIONS POLITIQUES ET VISION CRÉPUSCULAIRE DE L’ORIENT DANS LES DÉSORIENTÉS from:
Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) El Bousouni Abdelmounym
Abstract: De tous les romans de Maalouf,
Les désorientésest celui où le politique occupe une position organique. On ajoutera qu’il est le seul roman à investir ouvertement le réel politique du monde arabe dans son actualité. Enfin, il est le roman où la dialectique entre politique et esthétique donne lieu à une poétique de l’inachevé, au contraire des autres romans de Maalouf. On pourrait conclure cette série de remarques en estimant que le dernier roman de Maalouf est dominé par une vision crépusculaire, fortement pessimiste.
ENTREVUE AVEC AMIN MAALOUF from:
Amin Maalouf: une oeuvre à revisiter
Author(s) MAALOUF AMIN
Abstract: – J’ai le sentiment, peut-être illusoire, d’une grande continuité dans mon parcours. À certains moments, j’aurais pu m’écarter de l’écriture pour suivre une carrière politique ou diplomatique, ou pour choisir un autre mode d’expression artistique tel que le cinéma. Finalement, j’ai toujours choisi de me consacrer à mon activité d’écrivain, avec tout juste
3. Les monastères en Russie: from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Bellat Fabien
Abstract: Les monastères russes sont des miraculés en position précaire. Pour ceux qui ont échappé aux tendances iconoclastes ou aux reconversions soviétiques, une nouvelle menace de dénaturation est d’actualité, à cause de travaux maladroits, de restaurations menées sans contrôle et, de manière générale, du peu de compétence artistique ou patrimoniale des représentants du patriarcat orthodoxe. Le 25 décembre 1991, la chute de l’Empire soviétique plongea la Russie dans un chaos étrange, celui de la ruine soudaine de tout un système, suspendant un continent à des débris de loi et, surtout, aux coups de force de quelques arrivistes profitant de la vacance
7. Mort et résurrection de l’ancienne abbaye royale de Royaumont from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Leniaud Jean-Michel
Abstract: Les abbayes et les grands établissements ecclésiastiques de l’Ancien Régime ont subi des sorts divers après la Révolution. Certains ont été privatisés, d’autres non. Les premiers ont été totalement ou partiellement détruits ; les seconds, affectés à des services publics ; d’autres ont retrouvé à plus ou moins longue échéance leur vocation originelle. L’histoire monographique de ces bâtiments à partir du XIX
esiècle reste souvent à faire ou à moderniser : celle de Clairvaux, de Fontevraud, du Mont-Saint-Michel, de Jumièges, d’Ourscamps, des Vaux-de-Cernay, etc., mériterait d’être questionnée et mise en vue panoramique : qui ont été les acteurs des transformations,
8. Heritagization of an Abbey Ruin: from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Coomans Thomas
Abstract: From the early 19th-century Romanticism, ruins of medieval abbeys and castles became part of the Western culture. This was a consequence of the massive destruction in the French Revolution. For the first time, ruins were no longer the exclusive domain of ancient and classical cultures, but people realized that the world had changed and parts of their own past were vanishing. It was no longer necessary to go to Italy or Greece to see ruins; they were everywhere in the nearby countryside. A complex blend of feelings attracted Romanticists to medieval abbey ruins, from the search for mystery and strong
12. Convents in the Netherlands: from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Nelissen Nico
Abstract: In the Netherlands, the first convents were founded in the seventh and eighth centuries by missionaries from Ireland who had come to convert the northern regions of Europe to Christianity. The famous saying
ora et labora(prayer and work) implied not only praying and carrying out missionary activities, but also often very hard work. The monks’ first work was to cultivate the land, prepare the ground,
14. Patrimonialisation des monastères en Europe et nouvelles charges symboliques pour les moines from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Jonveaux Isabelle
Abstract: À l’heure de l’exculturation du catholicisme¹, les lieux traditionnels de pratique religieuse comme les monastères pourraient sembler voués à tomber en désuétude. Or, c’est exactement le contraire que l’on observe avec un attrait renouvelé pour les monastères qui confine à une certaine mode du monastique. La myriade d’articles de journaux abordant le sujet des retraites en monastère ou des produits monastiques le prouve.
16 Traditions spirituelles et esprit du lieu from:
Des couvents en héritage / Religious Houses: A Legacy
Author(s) Lucier Pierre
Abstract: Les traditions religieuses et spirituelles se sont inscrites dans des habitats et des lieux de culte et d’accueil souvent très différents, à l’image des insistances particulières de leur adhésion croyante et de leurs règles de vie. Entre les spiritualités des familles religieuses, l’aménagement architectural de leurs couvents et bâtiments et les modalités de leur présence et de leur action, il y a dès lors des correspondances qui comptent pour beaucoup dans l’
esprit du lieuqui habite ces ensembles. C’est cetesprit du lieuqui constitue l’assise de la signification culturelle des couvents et qui, dans les cas où une authentique
CHAPITRE 1 Les dimensions réflexive et professionnalisante de l’écriture: from:
L'écriture réflexive
Author(s) Morisse Martine
Abstract: L’inflation actuelle de la réflexivité dans les discours sur la professionnalisation des acteurs de la formation va de pair avec une conception croissante portant sur l’avènement d’un sujet de plus en plus autonome et responsable (Dubet, 1994 ; Ehrenberg, 1998 ; Taylor, 1998). Or, la flexibilité et les transitions perpétuelles que vivent les adultes sont marquées aussi par une fragilisation croissante des modes de vie, personnelle, familiale, sociale, et une plus grande vulnérabilité attachée à la destinée des individus (Boutinet, 2009). C’est donc en portant un regard sur un environnement complexe, changeant et paradoxal que nous interrogerons dans ce texte
CHAPITRE 3 Saisir les effets de l’activité d’écriture dans un dispositif de formation: from:
L'écriture réflexive
Author(s) Petit Lucie
Abstract: Les considérations épistémologiques et méthodologiques sur la relation que l’écriture, la réflexivité et la professionnalisation entretiennent, sont au centre du présent ouvrage. Dans cette contribution, nous ne cherchons pas à restituer ce que nous avons appris sur un objet de recherche qui nous préoccupe depuis une dizaine d’années, à savoir les effets de l’activité d’écriture dans un dispositif de formation. Nous nous focalisons plutôt sur les méthodes et les techniques que nous avons mobilisées pour l’étudier. La problématique proposée par les coordonnatrices de cet ouvrage nous y invite et, si les connaissances produites sur l’objet sont elles aussi mentionnées, c’est
Québec, « ville du Nord », lieu de mémoire et d’oubli dans la littérature québécoise actuelle from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Barreiro Carmen Mata
Abstract: Les recherches menées autour de la nordicité depuis la décennie 1970, tout d’abord par des géographes tels que Louis-Edmond Hamelin ou par des politologues tels que Paul Painchaud, identifient une double dimension de la nordicité, à savoir, d’une part, un fait objectif, mesurable en fonction d’un certain nombre de critères qui définissent une région particulière sur le plan physique et humain et qui concernent les interactions société – environnement², et, d’autre part, ce que Hamelin a appelé « un Nord fabriqué et inventé³ », un Nord symbolique, ou ce que le géographe et historien Christian Morissonneau a appelé « le
Des lieux réels aux « Cornouailles » imaginaires. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Davaille Florence
Abstract: Si cartographier consiste à envisager quelle représentation du territoire est possible, en répertoriant aussi quels lieux doivent être consignés pour mémoire, le cas de Pierre Perrault (1927-1999) est alors tout particulièrement intéressant, car son œuvre est régulièrement centrée autour de lieux qui en structurent le sens. Elle convoque également dans son imaginaire l’outil de la carte, par exemple dans le recueil de poèmes
Portulan. Cinéaste documentariste, poète, avocat reconverti dans le métier de la caméra à la grande époque des débuts de l’Office national du film (ONF), Perrault exerce son activité de créateur entre les années 1950 et 1990, soit
Notes for an Artwork. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Landon Paul
Abstract: The action of the science fiction film
Quintet¹ takes place in a frozen post apocalyptic future, possibly during a nuclear winter.² The sets are barren and strewn with redundant technology; a snow-covered landscape is punctuated by derelict modern architecture and frozen machinery.Quintetwas shot in Canada, in what is now the territory of Nunavut and on Île Notre-Dame in Montréal in the remains of the pavilions of the world exposition that took place there in 1967.³ Altman uses the (nuclear) winter setting ofQuintet, the expanses of white snow, the ice-encased structures and the fogginess produced by condensation in
Look at My Picture; Read My text. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Rygaard Jette
Abstract: Richard M. Rorty has characterized the history of philosophy as a series of
turns, and he described what he in 1967 saw as a final stage,i.e. the linguistic turnin which words gained power upon the things and the ideas. Since then, we have seen moreturnsas for instance the recentaffective turn,² thesensuous turn³ and, of immediate importance here, thepictorial turnas the American art historian W. J. T. Mitchell in 1994 named it.⁴ This pictorial turn indicates that we must understand humans as creatures that possess an internal and external imaginative and evocative power
Mémoires du Nord. from:
Le lieu du Nord
Author(s) Regimbald Manon
Abstract: Qu’arborent-ils, ces paysages nordiques du rapport de l’homme à la nature, tantôt horizon sensible de notre existence, tantôt points de vue éthique et esthétique? Vouées au Nord, ces images témoignent-elles de son actualité ou de son épopée? Quelles mémoires nous livre-t-il, ce regard cartographique, dont les visions, tour à tour icariennes, nomades, allégoriques ou entropiques, se tournèrent, à dessein, vers le Nord? Avec elles, allons-nous vers ce qui est passé ou ce qui adviendra? Attestent-elles de l’immédiateté du moment ou perpétuent-elles l’immensité intemporelle du Nord? S’agit-il de construire un patrimoine nordique ou une mémoire à venir?
2 Teaching Fairy Tales in Folklore Classes from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Gabbert Lisa
Abstract: That the Brothers Grimm are among the founding fathers of folk lore is a fact learned early on in most folklore studies. The Grimms, who collected their tales with the interest in promoting German language and culture, produced
Kinder- und Hausmärchen (Children’s and Household Tales, 1812), a scholarly but also wildly popular publication that served as a kind of handbook for tale-collecting enthusiasts in various European countries during the mid to late nineteenth century (Grimm and Grimm 1974). These enthusiasts included Alexandr Afansef in Russia, Joseph Jacobs in England, and Peter Christen Asbøjrnsen and Jørgen Moe in Norway. Across Europe,
3 At the Bottom of a Well: from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Wood Juliette
Abstract: The numerous tales brought together by the Brothers Grimm and other collectors provide a seemingly endless selection of folk narratives. Although early scholarship sought to situate the folktale within theoretical frameworks that could explain the evolution of culture, it also recognized the characteristically patterned nature of such tales and produced indexes concerned with mapping out the components of oral tales. The most notable and comprehensive indexes were undoubtedly those of Stith Thompson and Antti Aarne, which are still in use today (Aarne and Thompson 1961).
4 The Fairy-Tale Forest as Memory Site: from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) McGonagill Doris
Abstract: TeachIng undergraduate courses In German StudIes I have had the opportunity to prepare several courses and smaller teaching units on the Grimms’ folk and fairy tales, but each time I find myself facing the same question: How should I structure my material? There are some obvious choices—chronological, regional, thematic—each with its own advantages and limitations. Structuring principles based on thematic similarities and related plot elements—the folklorists’ tale types—can provide a basic infrastructure, along with specific character constellations, motifs, and topoi. Thus your groups may include tales about family conflict and gender relationships (“child victims,” “bad dads,”
10 Teaching Hans Christian Andersen’s Tales: from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) François Cyrille
Abstract: As one of the most famous fairy-tale writers and one of the most translated authors in the world, Andersen should be given a prime place in a teaching unit on fairy tales. At the same time, as he was a Danish writer, both the language and the cultural context make it difficult for non-Danish -speaking instructors to grasp the many dimensions of his work. This chapter gives advice and suggests activities that can be used to work on Andersen’s tales in an academic setting, focusing on a comparative analysis of translations to approach the particular language in which they were
11 Teaching Symbolism in “Little Red Riding Hood” from:
New Approaches to Teaching Folk and Fairy Tales
Author(s) Silva Francisco vaz da
Abstract: I often teach an optional course on fairy tales to undergraduate social-anthropology students. This is usually the first contact they have with fairy tales in an academic setting, and I mean to make it memorable. Many of my students find themselves fascinated by the topic of symbolism in fairy tales but cannot quite fathom why. This course aims to develop the students’ intuitive grasp of fairy-tale meanings into a level of explicit comprehension. It shows how to make sense of (apparent) nonsense in traditional narratives. This chapter describes the basic contents of four prelimi nary sessions, spanning two weeks, in
Activismo judicial y derechos económicos sociales y culturales en la justicia colombiana from:
De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Ferrer Ana Giacomette
Abstract: Los desc constituyen un particular impacto tanto en el nuevo orden constitucional (a raíz de la Carta Política de 1991) como en el tejido social,
La Corte Constitucional colombiana y el control previo de los tratados internacionales 1992-2012 from:
De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Abello-Galvis Ricardo
Abstract: Este rango se tomó teniendo en aras de actualizar esta investigación con ocasión de los veinte años de labores que cumplió la Corte Constitucional.
Dos décadas de debates entre la Constitución de 1991 y el derecho internacional: from:
De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Matamoros Laura Victoria García
Abstract: La vida de una Constitución está lejos de llegar a su plenitud cuando finaliza su discusión en el seno de la Asamblea Nacional Constituyente y es suscrita, promulgada, publicada y aplicada por primera vez, para ser apreciada y entendida de ese momento en adelante, como “norma de normas”, máximo referente normativo del sistema jurídico y como expresión del pacto político construido por los ciudadanos o sus delegatarios.
La “Constitución exterior” y la constitucionalización de la política exterior colombiana from:
De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Molano-Roja Andrés
Abstract: Durante las últimas décadas, y en el marco del llamado “nuevo constitucionalismo”, se ha venido produciendo una paulatina y cada vez más extendida “constitucionalización” del derecho, lo cual ha tenido un profundo impacto no solo en la lógica que rige el funcionamiento de los sistemas jurídicos, sino también en el desarrollo mismo del proceso político.
Ordenamiento territorial, asignatura pendiente from:
De la constitución de 1991 a la realidad
Author(s) Castro Jaime
Abstract: López Michelsen consiguió que el Congreso, mediante acto legislativo, el 2 de 1997, convocara la
pequeña constituyenteque debería hacer las “reformas de envergadura” que requerían la administración de justicia y el régimen departamental y municipal. Para conseguirlo, adujo que las cámaras de entonces no reunían las condiciones que les permitieran tratar en debida forma los temas objeto de la convocatoria, y aprobar reformas tan importantes como las que en otras materias expidieron en 1936 y 1945, pues sus tareas principales habían cambiado y no disponían, por ello y otras razones más, del tiempo y el ambiente necesarios para investigar,
“La serena simplicidad de nuestro espíritu”: from:
La nación expuesta
Author(s) Scheel Sylvia Dümmer
Abstract: Cuando el gobierno chileno aceptó la invitación de participar en la Exposición Iberoamericana de Sevilla, en 1929, lo hizo con el objetivo de atraer inversión, inmigrantes y turistas, al tiempo de incrementar “el prestigio nacional”. La imagen de nación que se quería dar para ello era la de ser un país de progreso que destacaba sobre sus pares latinoamericanos. Como sostenía el diario
El Mercurio, era necesario “que las naciones más adelantadas […] sepan que Chile en la actualidad, se encuentra en muchos de los aspectos de progreso mundial a la altura de las naciones más civilizadas” (1927a). Este era
¿Juntos y bien revueltos? from:
La nación expuesta
Author(s) Hoyo Henio
Abstract: El objetivo de este capítulo es analizar cómo las estampillas postales se han usado para difundir un
imaginario nacional oficialsobre las características étnicas, culturales e históricas de México y los mexicanos.¹ Para ello, primero se ofrece una introducción general sobre el estudio académico de las estampillas postales, luego se presenta una historia breve sobre los temas e iconografía presentados en estampillas postales de México durante el siglo XIX. Finalmente, me enfoco en el estudio de las estampillas mexicanas emitidas entre 1933 y 1940 —es decir, inmediatamente antes y durante el sexenio del presidente Lázaro Cárdenas del Río (diciembre de
Mapas, geodesia y estudio geográfico en la constitución del imaginario nacional en Ecuador, siglos XVIII a XX from:
La nación expuesta
Author(s) Capello Ernesto
Abstract: La consideración del mapa como “conocimiento exacto”, según lo describió Luis Tufiño, antiguo director del Observatorio Nacional en Quito y cartógrafo militar, ha sido recientemente objeto de una serie de desafíos. Estos se han
Conclusiones from:
La tradición política en la obra de Hannah Arendt
Abstract: Los estudios arendtianos apuntan continuamente a indagaciones que versan sobre cuestiones del pasado —las cuales, por cierto, le ha costado innumerables críticas a su autora pues se la ha señalado de ser una nostálgica del pasado grecorromano—, tales retornos buscan fuentes iluminadoras para el presente, ya que tras el agotamiento de los recursos actuales, podrían hacerse nuevamente fecundas. Reconsiderar el pasado no resulta gratuito, Paul Ricoeur señala en un artículo sobre la obra de Arendt que “hay un punto de Hannah Arendt en el que la rememoración es al mismo tiempo un proyecto del futuro” (1991). La misma Arendt
Sociorhetorical Criticism: from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Robbins Vernon K.
Abstract: Sociorhetorical criticism is a textually based method that uses programmatic strategies to invite social, cultural, historical, psychological, aesthetic, ideological and theological information into a context of minute exegetical activity. In a context where historical criticism has been opening its boundaries to social and cultural data and literary criticism has been opening boundaries to ideology, sociorhetorical criticism practices interdisciplinary exegesis that reinvents the traditional steps of analysis and redraws the traditional boundaries of interpretation. Sociorhetorical criticism, then, is an exegetically oriented approach that gathers current practices of interpretation together in an interdisciplinary paradigm.
KNOWING IS SEEING: from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Huber Lynn R.
Abstract: As we saw in chapter 1,¹ since the earliest centuries of the church, interpreters have acknowledged the imagistic or metaphorical nature of the book of Revelation, although they disagree about what this characterization means. This suggests that bringing the insights of metaphor theory to bear on Revelation would be an appropriate and fruitful endeavor, especially contemporary theories of metaphor that emphasize the cognitive nature of this phenomenon. This is not to suggest that scholars have ignored discussions about metaphor in their work on Revelation; rather, there has been little systematic analysis of the metaphorical language in the text. Scholars who
Conceptual Blending and Early Christian Imagination from:
Foundations for Sociorhetorical Exploration
Author(s) Robbins Vernon K.
Abstract: The emergence of early Christianity during the first century CE is a truly remarkable phenomenon. The literature this movement produced during its first seventy years of existence exhibits profound creativity in the context of traditional cultures, which are known for their conservative nature. Years ago, scholars such as Amos Wilder observed that there were amazingly “new” formulations of phrases and words in New Testament literature.¹ There has, however, been only limited progress in our understanding of how this “newness” emerged. Many scholars have exhibited and discussed the wide reaching diversity in traditions, concepts, and practices among different groups of early
Book Title: Voies multiples de la didactique du français-Entretiens avec Suzanne-G. Chartrand, Jean-Louis Chiss et Claude Germain
Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): Schneuwly Bernard
Abstract: Comment s’est constituée la didactique du français comme discipline à caractère scientifique ? Quels sont ses fondements épistémologiques et méthodologiques ? La didactique du français langue première, la didactique du français langue seconde et la didactique du français langue étrangère forment-elles une seule et même didactique ? Quel est le rôle du didacticien d’une langue ? Y a-t-il autant de didactiques que d’objets d’enseignement : la lecture, l’écriture, la communication orale, la grammaire, le lexique, etc. ? À ces questions, et à bien d’autres encore, trois didacticiens du français, Suzanne-G. Chartrand (Université Laval), Jean-Louis Chiss (Université Sorbonne Nouvelle – Paris 3) et Claude Germain (Université du Québec à Montréal), ont accepté d’apporter leurs réponses accompagnées parfois de nouvelles interrogations. Parlant de leurs travaux, ils nous offrent leur vision de la discipline, fruit d’un long et riche cheminement. Leurs réponses se rejoignent sous certains angles, divergent sous d’autres, traçant ainsi les diverses voies de la didactique du français. Deux autres didacticiens du français participent à la réflexion, Gladys Jean et Bernard Schneuwly ; ils nous disent, la première en introduction et le second en conclusion, ce qu’ils retiennent de ces trois voix. Adoptant la forme dynamique de l’entretien, l’ouvrage Voies multiples de la didactique du français invite le lecteur à prendre part au dialogue en découvrant de multiples voies, à les emprunter, à les prolonger, à s’en écarter, à s’en inspirer pour trouver la sienne ou à en ouvrir de nouvelles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89sw3
AVANT-PROPOS from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Kadri Djaouida Hamdani
Abstract: Cet ouvrage adoptant le genre de l’entretien s’adresse d’abord aux étudiants en didactique du français ainsi qu’aux enseignants de français – langue première, langue seconde ou langue étrangère – qui doivent faire face à la réalité complexe de la classe de français. Il s’adresse aussi à celles et ceux qui, passionnés par l’enseignement et l’apprentissage des langues – du français en particulier –, voient un grand intérêt à (se) poser des questions sur la didactique du français et sont curieux des réponses et des interrogations apportées par des didacticiens dont la richesse du parcours, la profondeur de la réflexion et l’apport à la
INTRODUCTION from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Jean Gladys
Abstract: Bien que le pédagogue et grammairien tchèque Comenius (1592-1670) soit en quelque sorte considéré comme le père de la didactique des langues et, surtout, de la didactique de la grammaire¹, la didactique – celle du français dans le cas qui nous intéresse – est toujours vue comme une « science » très jeune qui est en train de se définir, de trouver ses ancrages, de se frayer un chemin dans la brousse des sciences humaines et plus précisément des sciences de l’éducation. Et il y a des défricheurs, des bâtisseurs qui œuvrent à son développement et à celui de ses sous-disciplines, comme
ENTRETIEN AVEC SUZANNE-G. CHARTRAND from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Elghazi Lahcen
Abstract: « Reconnue » , il faudrait mettre un ou deux bémols… Par qui ? Les autorités du ministère de l’Éducation ? Mes collègues didacticiens du français ? Une partie du corps enseignant québécois ?
ENTRETIEN AVEC JEAN-LOUIS CHISS from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Elghazi Lahcen
Abstract: Monsieur Chiss, vous qui avez consacré tant de publications à la didactique de l’écrit, que pensez-vous de la formule ou plutôt du genre – le mot serait plus juste – de l’entretien, auquel vous avez aimablement accepté de vous prêter, et du regain d’intérêt qu’il connait dans le domaine des publications à caractère scientifique?
ENTRETIEN AVEC CLAUDE GERMAIN from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Kadri Djaouida Hamdani
Abstract: Claude, même abrégé, ton CV compte plus d’une cinquantaine de pages et témoigne d’un parcours d’une grande richesse de professeur et de chercheur. Tu détiens un doctorat de troisième cycle en linguistique, obtenu à l’Université d’Aix-Marseille, en France, et un Ph. D. en épistémologie de l’Université d’Ottawa, mais ta carrière a été consacrée essentiellement à la didactique des langues. Ta formation universitaire remonte au milieu des années 1960, alors qu’on ne parlait pas encore de « didactique ». Quel parcours as-tu suivi afin d’en arriver là ?
CONCLUSION from:
Voies multiples de la didactique du français
Author(s) Schneuwly Bernard
Abstract: C’est à une belle polyphonie en didactique du français¹ que nous assistons dans ce livre, polyphonie d’ailleurs mentionnée comme caractéristique de tout discours dans l’une des entrevues. Certes, les voix – deux ténors et une contre-alto – sont présentées l’une après l’autre, la matérialité du livre l’impose; mais il faut les lire en superposition, ce que rend possible la magnifique orchestration réalisée par les responsables de cet ouvrage, qui jouent de fait, par leur questionnement extrêmement documenté, le rôle d’une basse continue rendant le tout cohérent et lisible comme une seule pièce. C’est cette œuvre que nous décrivons dans la présente conclusion,
Book Title: Writing of the Formless-Jose Lezama Lima and the End of Time
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Matos Jaime Rodríguez
Abstract: In this book, Jaime Rodr+¡guez Matos proposes the GÇ£formlessGÇ¥ as a point of departure in thinking through the relationship between politics and time. Thinking through both literary and political writings around the Cuban Revolution, Rodr+¡guez Matos explores the link between abstract symbolic procedures and various political experiments that have sought to give form to a principle of sovereignty based on the category of representation. In doing so, he proposes the formless as the limit of modern and contemporary reflections on the meaning of politics while exploring the philosophical consequences of a formless concept of temporality for the critique of metaphysics._x000D_ Rodr+¡guez Matos takes the writing and thought of Jos+¬ Lezama Lima as the guiding thread in exploring the possibility of a politicity in which time is imagined beyond the disciplining functions it has had throughout the metaphysical traditionGÇöa time of the absence of time, in which the absence of time no longer means eternity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89tmf
Introduction from:
Writing of the Formless
Abstract: The dislocation of form and content: I take my epigraph from a piece in which Brett Levinson reviews the state of the Latinamericanist field in recent years. He emphasizes the extent to which scholarship on Latin America has been fundamentally defined by the need to point to or show phenomena that are most essentially characterized by the lack of graspable form, or formlessness, if by form we understand Western schemata meant to determine universally what is and is not thinkable, and more generally, what can and should be and what falls beneath the dignity of Being. In reference to the
1 Toward the Absence of Time from:
Writing of the Formless
Abstract: In 2007 Fidel Castro was in seclusion, and no one seemed to know much about the actual state of his health. Since July 2006 his physical condition had become a state secret. The absence of the leader coincided with the reappearance of figures who had been in positions of power during some of the Revolution’s most repressive years. These were people who many thought had disappeared for good from the public sphere. Their return, in the nation’s various media, gave rise to a clamorous and by now well-known exchange of e-mails, some written by victims of these henchmen.¹ The discussion
3. The (Mixed) Times of Revolution from:
Writing of the Formless
Abstract: José Lezama Lima came of age under the sign of neocoloniality.¹ Which meant that his first political experience was politics as farce. The Republic was a pseudorepublic. Everything political took on the hue of the counterfeit. Rather than imagining that this was an accident that could be corrected, that there was a true politics, and that it was a matter of locating and activating it, Lezama’s early orientation shows a young intellectual who assumes the opposite. Politics is always counterfeit. Neocoloniality, a scene in which colonial rule goes under the name of democracy, with all the formal institutions necessary to
ONE “Ego sum, ego existo”: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: Mister President, you have imposed Draconian limits upon me. As a result, I must cut to the chase. The abstract that you might have received is not, as you no doubt grasp, a summary of my talk: not only because I hadn’t yet given my text a definitive form but also because what I have to say, since it remains highly open to discussion, is very difficult to summarize. Rather than drawing conclusions, my goal today is merely to arrive at questions; and I would consider myself a very happy man if, to some extent, you were to concur that
FOUR From Sense Certainty to the Law of Genre: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: The present discussion is not exclusively devoted to the thought and work of Jacques Derrida. It is rather an attempt to bring the reading and discussion of Derrida in relation with other texts, and other heritages, in order to illustrate how his manner of philosophizing has transformed our understanding of certain fundamental problems. I would argue that what distinguishes his specific practice of deconstruction is the way in which it displaces the classical question of the “paradoxes of the universal,” if only because it dismantles the metaphysical opposition between the universal and the particular, along with that of the absolute
SEVEN Zur Sache Selbst: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: Certain great commentators on Hegel’s
Phenomenology of Spirit(Kojève, Marcuse, Luk á cs), in part inspired by Marxism and Existentialism, built their interpretations around the statement that defines spiritual “substance” (Substanz) as a “work” (Werk) resulting fromthe activity of all and each (das Tun aller und jeder).¹ Sartre should also be included, since one section of theCritique of Dialectical Reasoncomprises an explicit allusion to the “animal regime of spirit” and could be read as a gigantic attempt, in permanent altercation with Hegel, to reformulate the dialectic of “action in common” as the collectivized (and thus aa a
NINE The Social Contract Among Commodities: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: From the first, Marx’s theory of commodity and money fetishism formed one of the most admired and contested aspects of his “critique” of political economy. In an astonishing fashion, it restores the correlation of sovereignty and subjection to the heart of the modern “social relation” that appears to herald the triumph of free individuality. To this end, it was necessary conceptually to reinscribe the classical schema of the “contract” into the representative and practical space of commodity exchange, whose immediacy he explodes by showing its latent metaphysics, which is also an anthropology and a politics. I will attempt in this
TEN Judging Self and Others: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: In French and several other languages, the notion of judgment designates both a “faculty” or “capacity” and an action that takes place within the sphere of public or private relations. It can have a general neutral signification (that of an evaluation about the adequacy of means to ends or to the quality of the ends themselves). But more often it designates, in dissymmetrical fashion, the determination of a deserved or undeserved sanction upon the action of a subject, especially when the action in question is a “crime” or a “delict.”
THIRTEEN Blanchot’s Insubordination: from:
Citizen Subject
Abstract: The title of this chapter derives from a metonymical displacement. Blanchot himself never authorized any confusion between his role as a drafter of the
Manifesto of the 121and that of the draft dodgers, deserters, and militants whom, along with his cosignatories, he intended to support and defend before the law. However, as we shall see, the wordinsubordinationencompasses both a narrow and a broad sense; it connotes a community of action and feeling, evoked in what theManifestocalls “the cause of all free men.” My point of departure is a footnote in Christophe Bident’s bookMaurice Blanchot
Book Title: Taking Hold of the Real-Dietrich Bonhoeffer and the Profound Worldliness of Christianity
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Harvey Barry
Abstract: Dietrich Bonhoeffer writes in one of his last prison letters that he had “come to know and understand more and more the profound this-worldliness of Christianity." In Taking Hold of the Real, Barry Harvey engages in constructive conversation with Bonhoeffer, contending that the “shallow and banal this-worldliness" of modern society is ordered to a significant degree around the social technologies of religion, culture, and race. These mechanisms displace human beings from their traditional connections with particular locales, and relocate them in their “proper places" as determined by the nation-state and capitalist markets. Christians are called to participate in the profound this-worldliness that breaks into the world in the apocalyptic action of Jesus Christ, a form of life that requires discipline and an understanding of death and resurrection. The church is a sacrament of this new humanity, performing for all to hear the polyphony of life that was prefigured in the Old Testament and now is realised in Christ. Unable to find a faithful form of this-worldliness in wartime Germany, Bonhoeffer joined the conspiracy against Hitler, a decision aptly contrasted with a small French church that, prepared by its life together over many generations, saved thousands of Jewish lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1f89trh
Introduction: from:
Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: “We live”, writes Dietrich Bonhoeffer, “in the time before the last things and believe in the last things, is that not so?”¹ We live, in other words,
in medias res, in the middle of things. There is nothing novel in this observation, for this has been a perennial fact of human existence since our first parents were cast out of the garden. What is unprecedented, and what I attempt to account for in this book in constructive conversation with Bonhoeffer, is the distinctive character of the middle here and now. Prior to the sixteenth century there existed a recognizable consensus
4 The End(s) of “Religion” from:
Taking Hold of the Real
Abstract: Rowan Williams ignited a heated debate in 2008 when he proposed in a lecture that Muslim construals of
sharia(together with Orthodox Jewish practice) might be allowed to have a role in the conduct of public affairs, primarily in civil matters, in a religiously and culturally diverse England. He notes that social identities are not established by only one set of relations or mode of belonging, and to insist that they should be thus established is dangerous. The menace arises, Williams writes, “not only when there is an assumption on the religious side that membership of the community (belonging to
Book Title: Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing-Engaging Urban Space in London and New York, 1851–1986
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Forsdick Charles
Abstract: Examining the aesthetics and politics at stake in urban travel writing as spatial practice, this book explores French travellers’ representations of London and New York from 1851 to the 1980s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ffjq0w
INTRODUCTION: from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: Long before the age of the megalopolis, movement has defined cities. As complex constellations of people, objects and signs, cities are spaces where social, political and historical relations undergo constant negotiation and where the realities and representations of urban life are in persistent and dynamic states of becoming. This is to say that each person’s experience of the city organizes an intricately shifting site for the production and exchange of meaning. Simply walking through the streets – choosing a particular path to follow, avoiding certain others – involves many acts of interpretation and mediation, ways of practising urban space that
Chapter One PRODUCING THE CITY from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: Recognizing the inexhaustible quality of the urban flow of goods, capital and people that inform metropolitan life and in order to approach a means of interpreting urban travel writing, it is helpful to engage with a number of influential theoretical approaches for understanding cities. This chapter explores theories of the city along two main axes: first, as a material condition of the planning perspective, which is to say an urban environment concerned with function and place-making; and, second, as a narrative space, a space of practice where meanings are performed by subjects in places across space and time. Both of
Chapter Three REVEALING AND RECONSTRUCTING LONDON from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: As we have seen in the previous chapter, in constant tension with the representations of space of London’s orderly West End and tourist attractions are spaces of urban disorder, social ‘dysfunction’, and poverty that continually threaten to depose the institutional and ideological clarity of the figured city. For the French travellers examined in this chapter, spaces of disorder perform in correspondence and contrast with the monumentality of more official sites. Disorder is a trope that provides a key to analysing these travellers’ strategies for making meaning for London during the interwar period – in the case of Jacques Dyssord (1880–
CONCLUSION from:
Alternative Modernities in French Travel Writing
Abstract: In this book I have been preoccupied with the question of modernity, with the challenges Western modernity poses to the subject’s sense of their place in the world, and to the expression of these challenges in relation to the great capitals of the modern era, London and New York. Taylor tells us that ‘from the beginning, the number one problem of modern social science has been modernity itself: that historically unprecedented amalgam of new practices and institutional forms (science, technology, industrial production, urbanization), of new ways of living (individualism, secularization, instrumental rationality); and of new forms of malaise (alienation, meaninglessness,
INTRODUCTION from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: Just less than half a century ago, Habermas bemoaned the fact that a gulf had developed between the natural sciences, which are taken to be concerned with the formulation of explanatory laws (‘nomological sciences’), and the human sciences, which
Chapter 3 SOCIOLOGY AT THE SCALE OF THE INDIVIDUAL: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Vandenberghe Frédéric
Abstract: Since the turn of the century, the international reception of the work of Pierre Bourdieu has steadily gathered pace and taken on such a magnitude that we can say (with some exaggeration) that genetic structuralism now occupies the position of the hegemon within the global field of sociological theory, comparable perhaps to the one of structural functionalism in the post-war period. Nowadays, one can like or detest Bourdieu’s critical sociology; however, one cannot afford to ignore it. He is the main ‘attractor’ in the field of sociology (with Michel Foucault playing a similar role within the rival, anti-disciplinary field of
Chapter 4 BOURDIEU AND INTERNATIONAL SOCIAL SCIENCE from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: ‘“The point of view”, says Ferdinand de Saussure, “creates the object”’. This is the opening sentence of part 2 of
Le métier de sociologue: Préalables épistémologiques(The craft of sociology: epistemological preliminaries), which Pierre Bourdieu coproduced with Jean-Claude Chamboredon and Jean-Claude Passeron in 1968 ([1968], 1991, 33). The co-authors proceeded to quote from Karl Marx and Max Weber to suggest that there was an epistemological principle articulated in the Saussurean statement that unified social science practice in spite of ideological differences, one that involves seeing science as ‘an instrument for breaking with naive realism’ ([1968], 1991, 33). The whole text
Chapter 5 BOURDIEU INSIDE EUROPE: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Gallelli Andrea
Abstract: Bourdieu’s positions against the EU have attracted much attention among scholars and commentators, and political actors as well. However, Bourdieu’s relation with Europe cannot be reduced to his cries and attacks against Brussels, the EU rules, its institutional powers and its economic policies. Europe is much more than its
Chapter 7 WORLDS WITHIN AND BEYOND WORDS: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Jain Sheena
Abstract: While verbal expressions, whether oral or written, sometimes fail to convey all that we wish to, and as precisely as we want to, this is seldom viewed as a limitation inherent in language itself. More often than not, it is attributed, with some justification, to a lack of adequate skills on the part of the speaker or author. Just as often, the fact that theoretical expressions in the social sciences are linguistically mediated is something that is taken for granted and regarded as unproblematic, while it is in the conceptual framework of the theory being considered that the source of
Chapter 9 BOURDIEU’S USE AND RECEPTION: from:
The Anthem Companion to Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Méndez María-Luisa
Abstract: In an article entitled ‘On the Cunning of Imperialist Reason’, Pierre Bourdieu and Loïc Wacquant (1999) refer to theorization as ‘the power to universalize particularisms linked to a singular historical tradition by causing them to be misrecognized as such’ (Bourdieu and Wacquant 1999, 41). In other words, theorization is understood as a form of neutralization of the historical context. In this, as in other pieces, Bourdieu showed reluctance to extract concepts – understood as structured structures – from the contexts of their production, or from their structuring structures (Robbins 1994). This, he thought, was a way of imposing (Western) sociological
Book Title: The Southern Hospitality Myth-Ethics, Politics, Race, and American Memory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Richardson Riché
Abstract: Historians have offered a variety of explanations of the origins and cultural practices of hospitality in the antebellum South. Economic historians have at times portrayed southern hospitality as evidence of conspicuous consumption and competition among wealthy planters, while cultural historians have treated it peripherally as a symptomatic expression of the southern code of honor. Although historians have offered different theories, they generally agree that the mythic dimensions of southern hospitality eventually outstripped its actual practices. Szczesiul examines why we have chosen to remember and valorize this particular aspect of the South, and he raises fundamental ethical questions that underlie both the concept of hospitality and the cultural work of American memory, particularly in light of the region's historical legacy of slavery and segregation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2km4s
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: How important is “southern hospitality” to “your definition of today’s South?” So asked question 82 of the spring 1995 edition of the Southern Focus Poll conducted by John Shelton Reed and the Howard W. Odum Institute for Research in Social Science at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. Reed and the Odum Institute ran the Southern Focus Poll from 1992 to 2001, interviewing by phone thousands of southerners and nonsoutherners, seeking their responses on a wide range of political, economic, social, and cultural issues, as well as their sense of regional identity and cultural characteristics. Question 82 was one
CHAPTER THREE Making Hospitality a Crime: from:
The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: In the early 1850s, Americans North and South entered into a bitter, protracted debate over the relationship between hospitality and slavery. This debate—carried out in the halls of Congress, in newspapers and magazines, in sermons and denominational papers, in poems and novels, and in the domestic space of American households—was sparked by the passage of the Fugitive Slave Law of 1850, the most controversial provision of the set of legislative acts known collectively as the Compromise of 1850. The compromise, ushered through Congress largely through the efforts of Senators Henry Clay of Kentucky, Stephen Douglass of Illinois, and
CHAPTER FOUR Southern Hospitality in a Transnational Context: from:
The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: Writing against the backdrop of the civil rights movement in the 1960s, the historian and activist Howard Zinn offered the following assessment of what he described as the South’s pervasive xenophobia, linking it to southern hospitality: “It is one of the curious paradoxes of Southern life that suspicion of strangers, of outsiders, goes along with what is called ‘Southern hospitality.’ The answer to the paradox is that there is a line of demarcation which separates the accepted person from the unaccepted. Within that line, the warmth is almost overwhelming. But outside it, the coolness can become hostility to the point
CHAPTER SIX The Modern Proliferation of the Southern Hospitality Myth: from:
The Southern Hospitality Myth
Abstract: Unfortunately for his tourist guests from the North, when Mayor Earl Buckman promises them the best of southern hospitality, what he actually has in mind includes torture, mutilation, dismemberment, burning, cannibalism, and ritualistic mob violence. The shock film
Two Thousand Maniacs!was screened in drive-in theaters around the country, North and South, in the summer of 1964, and it was ardently promoted and particularly popular in southern markets. I begin this concluding chapter withTwo Thousand Maniacs!for a number of reasons. First, like perhaps no other text, the film shows the incredible, even absurd, ranginess of the myth of
Authenticity and Transparency in The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) KAREM JEFF
Abstract: Critical discussions of authenticity in
The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Manhave been curiously bounded by either the text’s complex provenance or the putative cultural (in)authenticity of the title character. The novel’s initial reception as a genuine autobiography has made the text a touchstone for debates about African American authorship, genre, and social change at the dawn of the twentieth century. Robert Stepto and William Andrews were among the first to note that Johnson’s text appears to join the historical tradition of African American self-authorship, only to break from it by constructing a “false” self and a “false” text in
The Futurity of Miscegenation: from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) PAULIN DIANA
Abstract: Although both Hopkins’s
Of One Blood(1902–3) and Johnson’sThe Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man(1912) are now considered canonical African American literary texts, they have been examined most extensively in terms of their contributions to African American literary representation, including their excavations of the undocumented past and their complex depictions of self-discovery, interiority, passing, and racial hybridity.¹ Interdisciplinary scholarship has added to current understandings of the interactivity of these texts with diverse forms of African American, black diasporic, and transnational cultural production, like Susan Gillman’s work on Hopkins and the occult and Siobhan Somerville’s queer readings of both
Blackness Written, Erased, Rewritten: from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) LAMOTHE DAPHNE
Abstract: One hundred years separate the publications of James Weldon Johnson’s
Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man(1912) and Teju Cole’sOpen City(2012), compelling me to ask if these novels can speak to each other across the span of time and, if so, what meanings they reveal to readers about the similarities and diff erences between the modernist New Negro era and the postmodern era of post-blackness.¹ I and other critics have argued that African American modernism is characterized by the eff orts of progressive artists, activists, and intellectuals to construct a pluralist cultural nationalism.² This thesis necessarily assumes that early
W. E. B. Du Bois, Barack Obama, and the Search for Race: from:
New Perspectives on James Weldon Johnson's "The Autobiography of an Ex-Colored Man"
Author(s) STEPTO ROBERT B.
Abstract: The schoolhouse episode is a staple event in African American narratives no doubt because it is remembered or imagined as a formative first scene of racial self-awareness. It is not a moment when race is adopted—that may come later; it is instead a moment when race is imposed. The episode may involve a graduation exercise, with all the attendant questions regarding what, exactly, is commencing. Though set in a hotel ballroom, the battle royal in the first chapter of Ralph Ellison’s Invisible Man is one such monumental episode. More likely, though, the episode is an earlier moment, perhaps the
1 RHETORIC AND POLITICS from:
Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Fernández Christian
Abstract: Contemporary criticism has underestimated the import of heraldry and has overlooked the fact
3 THE DISSEMINATION AND READING OF THE ROYAL COMMENTARIES IN THE PERUVIAN VICEROYALTY from:
Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Pérez Pedro M. Guibovich
Abstract: Read, glossed, cited, and paraphrased, Inca Garcilaso de la Vega’s
Royal Commentaries(1609) have enjoyed enormous acclaim from readers since their first appearance at the beginning of the seventeenth century.¹ The existence of numerous translations into most modern languages proves their success in Europe. Several factors explain this fact: the socioethnic background of the author, the literary quality of the work, the nature of the sources consulted for its composition, and the fact that until late into the nineteenth century it would remain the only published text solely dedicated to the topic of Incan history. The purpose of this chapter
10 SIGNIFYIN(G), DOUBLE CONSCIOUSNESS, AND COLONIALITY from:
Inca Garcilaso and Contemporary World-Making
Author(s) Lamana Gonzalo
Abstract: This chapter examines the production of discourses at the crossroads of domination and subversion in early colonial Peru. It presents an alternative interpretation of one of the main texts of the Amerindian intellectual production, the first part of Garcilaso’s
Royal Commentaries of the Incas. By reading it as a two-layered text, an expression of double consciousness, I argue that theRoyal Commentariescan be seen as a paradigmatic example of signifying in subaltern colonial texts that advance a theory of practice.
Book Title: Indebted-Capitalism and Religion in the Writings of S. Y. Agnon
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Sagiv Yonatan
Abstract: This is the first book to examine the oeuvre of Shmuel Yosef Agnon, 1966 Nobel laureate in literature, through a reading that combines perspectives from economic theory, semiotics, psychoanalysis, narrative theory, and Jewish and religious studies. Sagiv outlines the vital role economy plays in the construction of religion, subjectivity, language, and thought in Agnon's work, and, accordingly, explores his literary use of images of debt, money, and economy to examine how these themes illuminate other focal points in the canonical author's work, excavating the economic infrastructure of discourses that are commonly considered to reside beyond the economic sphere.Sagiv's analysis of Agnon's work, renowned for its paradoxical articulation of the impact of modernity on traditional Jewish society, exposes an overarching distrust regarding the sustainability of any economic structure. The concrete and symbolic economies surveyed in this project are prone to cyclical crises. Under what Sagiv terms Agnon's "law of permanent debt," the stability and profitability of economies are always temporary. Agnon's literary economy, transgressing traditional closures, together with his profound irony, make it impossible to determine if these economic crises are indeed the product of the break with tradition or, alternatively, if this theodicy is but a fantasy, marking permanent debt as the inherent economic infrastructure of human existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kmnj
A MONETARY PRELUDE: from:
Indebted
Abstract: Money was the rising star at the turn of the nineteenth century in Europe. Heralded by many contemporary economists as the symbol of economic rationality and the facilitator of a stable social order, money was considered one of the greatest institutional advances of humankind.¹ Yet in spite of such warm praises, money also gained a rather dubious reputation. Rumor had it that money was indeed something unimportant, at times even suspicious, a neutral “veil” that only obscures the “real” economic basis of society, namely, the good old practice of barter, the direct exchange of good and services.²
CHAPTER 4 THE INCOMPLETE TEXT AND THE INDEBTED AUTHOR from:
Indebted
Abstract: In the previous chapter, my reading of Agnon’s
A Simple Storyended with emphasis on the closing dialogue between Hirshl and Mina. While it is true that, in the narrator’s words, “Hirshl and Mina’s story is over,” the novel itself does not conclude with their dialogue. In fact, instead of granting the reader a sense of closure, the novel ends with the narrator’s statement that Bluma’s story isnotover. The narrator also promises the reader that “everything that happened to Bluma Nakht would fill another book.”¹ This promise, however, was never fulfilled. Subsequently, it only adds to the reader’s
CONCLUSION from:
Indebted
Abstract: The Book of Proverbs informs us that “those who trust in their riches will wither, but the righteous will flourish like green leaves.”¹ Many of Shmuel Yosef Agnon’s pious narrators and characters would happily endorse this warning. The trust in divine agency, they would say, is the only true determinant of a person’s fate, including his or her economic and material pursuits. However, the relationship between economy and religion is not such a simple story after all. If we indeed accept Nietzsche’s argument that “Setting prices, measuring values, thinking up equivalents, exchanging, this preoccupied the very first thinking of human
6 The Problem of Choice: from:
Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Davidson Scott
Abstract: One of the reasons Alexandre Koyré, Henri-Charles Puech, and Albert Spaier founded the journal
Recherches Philosophiquesin 1931 was because, at the time, more established journals like theRevue de Métaphysique et de Moralewere reluctant to publish articles characteristic of what Jean Wahl aptly named, in the lead article of the inaugural issue ofRecherches Philosophiques, the turn “toward the concrete.” It accordingly gave aspiring philosophers the opportunity to discuss and advance movements such as phenomenology and the philosophy of existence.¹ While Wahl did publish extensively inRecherches Philosophiques(see Chapters 2 and 5 in this volume), he was
8 Nietzsche and the Death of God: from:
Transcendence and the Concrete
Author(s) Schrift Alan D.
Abstract: In 1936, Georges Bataille (1897–1962) and others organized a group of avant-garde intellectuals under the name Acéphale. Included among the members of this group were Pierre Klossowski (1905–2001), Georges Ambrosino (1912–84), Roger Caillois (1913–78), Jules Monnerot (1874–1942), and Jean Wahl. While the activities of this group were, to a large extent, secret, its public face was the journal of the same name:
Acéphale.¹ Under Bataille’s leadership, the journal published four issues between June 1936 and June 1939. A fifth issue, titled “La folie de Nietz sche” (Nietz sche’s madness) was prepared but never published.² After
Book Title: The Quest for Meaning-Friends of Wisdom from Plato to Levinas
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: One of our most distinguished thinkers, Adriaan Peperzak has masterfully explored the connections between philosophy, ethics, religion, and the social and historical contexts of human experience. He offers a personal gathering of influences on his own work as guides to the uses of philosophy in our search for sense and meaning. In concise, direct, and deeply felt chapters, Peperzak moves from Plato, Plotinus, and the Early Christian theologians to Anselm, Bonaventure, Descartes, Pascal, Leibniz, Hegel, and Levinas. Throughout these carefully linked essays, he touches on the fundamental ideas-from reason and faith to freedom and tradition-that inform the questions his work has consistently addressed, most specifically those concerning philosophy as a practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g2kn48
3 Platonic and Christian Hope from:
The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: Even a superficial reading of the Gospels will suffice to convince the reader that incarnation is the alpha and—as resurrection of the flesh—the omega of Christian faith. And with the body, involvement in the human world and its history is part of God’s self-revelation in his Word through the Spirit. The Christian community, whose faith is corporeal, communicative, communitarian, and sacramental, participates in this involvement. None of its activities is possible in the ether of incorporeal ghosts or spirits. All prophecies and fulfillments are facts of language; the entire liturgy is visible, tactile, and resounding; rituals have the
7 Bonaventure’s Contribution to the Twentieth-Century Debate on Apophatic Theology from:
The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: God has died, at least in science and philosophy. He is agonizing in religious study, perhaps even in some divinity schools. Atheism and a careful sequestration of God from current business are the two main forms in which academia deals with the long history of religion, which, notwithstanding academic reservations, goes on. For scholarship, faith, God, and religion have become curiosa. The theoretical intention has separated itself from religious commitments; it abhors edifying language and has forgotten or rejected the long history of its association with contemplation.
Curiositasis the word Bonaventure would use to characterize the study of religion
8 Life, Science, and Wisdom According to Descartes from:
The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: In a letter sent to Elizabeth along with the
Principles of Philosophy, Rene Descartes defines wisdom as the “firm and powerful resolve to use reason as well as one can and, in all actions, to do whatever one judges to be best.”¹ Wisdom grounds and encompasses “all the virtues” insofar as it is the foundation of the other three cardinal virtues, justice, courage, and temperance (successors
12 The Significance of Levinas for Christian Thought from:
The Quest for Meaning
Abstract: It is a fact that gives one pause for consideration that in Holland, Belgium, France, Italy, South America, and the United States the work of Emmanuel Levinas has found its greatest readership among Christian philosophers and theologians. Although this work is supported by a long Jewish tradition—even in its strictly philosophical elements—it has impressed many Christians by its orientation, which, despite its great originality, seems familiar to them.¹
11 Continental Philosophy, Catholicism, and the Exigencies of Responsibility: from:
Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Sadler Gregory B.
Abstract: A question that confronts practicing Roman Catholics engaged in Continental philosophy is the relationship between the practices, tradition, and intellectual resources of the Catholic Church and the boundaries of what is called Continental philosophy. Often the discourses that allow a renewed philosophical boldness in speaking about Christianity are marked by an equally liberating and corrosive temerity that, claiming to speak for none, or perhaps only for the other or the guest, seems to easily to aim to speak for all, to judge for all, to legislate for all. We must ask whether it is true that orthodoxy, one’s self-location within
15 Politics and Experience: from:
Rethinking Philosophy of Religion
Author(s) Goodchild Philip
Abstract: This paper assumes a political vision that, not being widely shared, requires explicit statement. The fundamental human relations that determine the shape of ecological, social, and personal worlds are not governed by legal, contractual, or institutional principles, but by constitutive practices. At present, the dominant constitutive practice of contemporary social relations is the global market. Production, distribution, and consumption are constituted for the purposes either of making money or of providing “value for money”—that is, a value subject to public measurement. These economic principles, by giving a public and social representation of diverse needs and impulses, usurp the place
Book Title: How John Works-Storytelling in the Fourth Gospel
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Sheridan Ruth
Abstract: In this book, a group of international scholars go in detail to explain how the author of the Gospel of John uses a variety of narrative strategies to best tell his story. More than a commentary, this book offers a glimpse at the way an ancient author created and used narrative features such as genre, character, style, persuasion, and even time and space to shape a dramatic story of the life of Jesus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1g69w8s
Introduction from:
How John Works
Author(s) Estes Douglas
Abstract: The Gospel of John is arguably the most read book of the New Testament. So prominent is this gospel that it would be difficult to overstate its impact on world culture. We only need to consider a particular snippet of Jesus’s speech in John—what we today refer to as John 3:16—to see how great an impact the
wordsof John have had on our world. Yet below these words exists a powerfulstorythat has had a similar, incalculable impact. Just saying the phrase “water into wine” draws all hearers within range of Western tradition to reference the
3 Time from:
How John Works
Author(s) Estes Douglas
Abstract: Narratives need time to tell their stories. In fact, without time, a narrative is not a narrative. This is because in order to tell a story, the storyteller must relay to the hearer or reader at least one process or event. For example, “Everett” is not a narrative. “Everett walks” is not much of a narrative, though the present tense “walks” in English implies a motion that occurs in time. A better narrative would be, “Everett drove the car to the store, picked up groceries, and came home.” This is the beginning of a “real” narrative because it entails multiple
4 Space from:
How John Works
Author(s) Luther Susanne
Abstract: Space in the Gospel of John denotes narrative space, which is all the topographical and topological information given in the text that serves to create the setting for the narrative action as well as a narrative world in the reader’s mind.¹ Narrative space can be created through reference to geographical spaces like “Jerusalem” or “Galilee”; through the naming of concrete spaces like “synagogue,” “praetorium,” or “Jacob’s well”; or through descriptive (“inside,” “outside”) or deictic (“here,” “there”) expressions. However, only fragments of the narrated world are provided through the words of the narrator and the characters of the story. The reader
5 Point of View from:
How John Works
Author(s) Resseguie James L.
Abstract: Point of view “signifies the way a story gets told.”¹ It elaborates the relationship between the storyteller and the story and the reception of the story by developing the way the author or narrator presents the reader with the characters, dialogue, actions, setting, and events of the story.² It is a multifaceted concept that biblical critics avoid—perhaps because it seems confusing or even irrelevant to the text’s meaning—yet nothing could be more important to the study of a biblical narrative text than the way the story gets told and the mode or modes by which the reader receives
7 Characterization from:
How John Works
Author(s) Skinner Christopher W.
Abstract: Understanding John’s characters and the ways the Fourth Gospel employs characterization is crucial to appreciating both its story and Christology.¹ Studies of Johannine characterization have proliferated in recent years, and the result is that much helpful light has been shed on a previously overlooked topic.² This chapter is devoted to helping the reader come to terms with the function and significance of Johannine characters other than Jesus. Since Jesus is the protagonist of the story, we are given access to a tremendous amount of information about his background and identity (1:1–18), and we are occasionally told what he thinks,
8 Protagonist from:
How John Works
Author(s) Stibbe Mark W. G.
Abstract: In my earlier years writing about John’s narrative art, I emphasized the elusiveness of John’s Jesus.¹ I pointed out that John portrays Jesus as evasive both in his speech and his actions. At both levels—
9 Imagery from:
How John Works
Author(s) Lee Dorothy A.
Abstract: Images in literary works are words that appeal to the senses to conjure up a corresponding picture in the mind of the reader. By definition, such images appeal to the reader’s imagination, which has the capacity both to visualize and to interpret. The Gospel of John uses a remarkable number of sensory images to tell its story and express its unique perspective on faith. Many of these images, through the course of the Johannine narrative, take on the character of religious symbols: vehicles of the divine world. Appealing to the imagination, image and symbol make it possible for the implied
11 Rhetoric from:
How John Works
Author(s) Myers Alicia D.
Abstract: That the Gospel of John is rhetorical is not debated among recent narrative and literary-minded interpreters. Pointing to the gospel’s thesis statement at 20:30–31, these readers often argue that the gospel’s rhetorical goal is to affirm that Jesus is the Christ and the Son of God.¹ Beginning with the acknowledgement of the gospel’s rhetorical nature enables us to ask more questions about the types of rhetoric the gospel uses as well as their potential impact on the gospel audience. The present chapter will focus primarily on John’s relationship to classical rhetoric, meaning the tools of rhetoric used by speakers
15 Culture from:
How John Works
Author(s) Hill Charles E.
Abstract: As even the casual reader knows, there is something different about John’s Gospel. No, there are lots of things about it that are different. Many of the literary traits that help make John’s Gospel what it is and which serve to differentiate it from other books and even from other gospels have been identified and explored in the present volume. Genre, style, time and space, imagery, characterization, protagonist, plot, point of view, use of Scripture, rhetoric, persuasion, closure, audience: each plays a part in shaping the story of the gospel, helping to reveal “how John works.”
Introduction from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: “To say and mean ‘God,’” writes David Tracy, “is what must drive all theology, whenever, wherever and whoever speaks.”¹ But as driving theology, to so
sayandmeanrouses and draws not a disciplined, abstract, faith-seeking understanding but theologians. God is neither said nor meant by “theology,” as such, but by particular women and men who find themselves in the middle of life’s way, responding to this restless drive that is itself a response to an always already given gift. Whenever and wherever we say “God,” we hope to mean not the idea, image, or model of God, butGod
2 Books 1–4: from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: Arising from christological roots and “designed to preserve faith in Christ, the Son of God, and to direct the Christian hope toward full salvation in the divine fellowship,”¹ the doctrine of the Trinity was forged by the blows struck in the heat of contentious intellectual and ecclesiastical negotiations about the language with which we might talk about, and more importantly address, God. Speculation about the nature of the God and the Nicene priority placed on the same substance of the Father, Son, and Spirit has its historical roots in practical and polemical formulations intended to respond to threats against both
8 A Love that Bears All Things from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: If the
adonnéis a gifted self, in what sense is it devoted? This discourse on the impossible rests significantly upon a phenomenology of saturation rooted in an openness to otherness appearing in excess of my finitude and perspective and allowing the other to show themselves or Godself, truly. To allow the other to appear to me as particular and “unsubstitutable”²—to appear just as the other gives themselves—rather than appear as an instance of essence, a manifestation of some further reality; to allow the other to impact me, appear in me, and thereby form me from a depth
Conclusion to Part Two from:
The Gift of Love
Abstract: Marion’s phenomenology is characterized by its attention to excessive givenness, to that which saturates our intentionality and concepts and therefore appears to us in the only way that it can—as impossible (according to the rules of metaphysics) or invisible (as that which can never be conceived by our minds or fully grasped within our hearts). Marion’s exploration of the gift sharpens the impact of this excess as something always first received and to which I am called to respond sacrificially by acknowledging its arrival from an elsewhere that precedes me and is other than me. But this phenomenology of
Book Title: Acting for Others-Trinitarian Communion and Christological Agency
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Hinlicky Paul R.
Abstract: This book explores why the metaphor of the church as a family is insufficient. Taking up Arendt’s notions of action and her criticism of privatization, the author examines community, relation, and human subjects through the work of Bonhoeffer and Stăniloae. Synthesizing Bonhoeffer and Stăniloae, Christian calling is unfolded not only as acting for others, but also with others as Trinitarian participatory response—response to the words and deeds of the three divine Persons acting in communion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjhd0
Introduction from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: After the dissolution of Christendom in Europe, churches in the West lost their political power, authority, and sometimes, their voice. Bonhoeffer characterized this development as a part of a breakdown of the unity of the West, accompanied by the loss of structures, authority, and orientation in the world. He thought it was a time with no future and no past.³ In Arendt’s view, this situation places us
1 The Church as a Family in Arendt from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: Hannah Arendt discusses the church often in connection with its space in the world and its specific activity. Both of these motives are found together in her explication of the familial imagery of the church that centers on Early Christianity’s attempt to express the uniqueness of its community consisting in love as the bond between its members over against the public-political space.
3 Christian Acting in Bonhoeffer from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: Bonhoeffer’s¹ theology of Christian agency is shaped by his notion of “being for others,” formulated also as living or existing for others. In this chapter, the interpersonal dimensions of action will be put into the foreground. With that aim, the following questions will be raised: what moves Christians to act? Does such acting necessarily entail fatherly and obedient approach of a dependent within and outside of the church? How is Christian acting interconnected with Christian freedom and equality? Since Christian acting is to find its fullest expression in the church, is there a connection between his understanding of Christian acting
4 Christian Acting in Stăniloae from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: First, acting of the immanent as well
5 A Place of Acting: from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: As I concluded in the previous chapters, all of the three thinkers from this conversation—Arendt, Bonhoeffer, and Stăniloae—think that some aspect of acting remains invisible, and thus, unworldly. According to Bonhoeffer, equality between human beings should not be realized in the world because
Conclusion: from:
Acting for Others
Abstract: Up until this point, I have concentrated on the church’s familial metaphor separately from reflecting on Christian action, which is embodied in it, and its challenges. In this final chapter, I will place the church’s understanding expressed in the family metaphor within the context of its calling to a specific kind of action—in terms of communal and common action. What is reflected in it? Is the church compared to a family still pertinent or does Christian acting of equals delineate another metaphor of the church?
Introduction. from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Robb John
Abstract: One of the most amazing objects in any European museum is a painted clay statue on display in Nicosia which shows a woman with a baby emerging upside down from her vagina. It is probably the only representation in all of European prehistory which shows a woman actually giving birth — a mind-boggling fact when one considers, as Mark Twain remarked, that being born is one of the few universal human experiences. And this thought-provoking find is not alone. From the golden face masks of Mycenae to the unparalleled youths and processing women in the Akrotiri frescoes — so unlike anything in
5 Figurines and Complex Identities in Late Bronze Age Cyprus from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Knox Daisy
Abstract: Figurines provide enticing images through which to imagine otherwise remote and faceless prehistoric communities. Early examples from Cyprus feature recurrently on the covers of monographs, excavation reports and conference posters (
e.g.Colemanet al.1996; Tatton-Brown 1997; Knapp 2008); a Chalcolithic figurine was even deemed an apposite image for the one euro coin. Although for modern audiences, figurines have become convenient symbols, embodying and displaying Cyprus’s past identities, researchers are well aware that these complex objects encompass far more than simply passive reflections of past realities. Prehistoric figurines were symbolically-charged objects with clear, active roles in shaping the socio-political landscape
6 Handlers and Viewers: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Zeman-Wiśniewska Katarzyna
Abstract: Coroplastic studies concerning figures and figurines have developed as a distinct, very vibrant and dynamic field of archaeological research.¹ Terracotta figures and figurines, especially anthropomorphic ones, are fascinating in the way they bring us
face to facewith the past, and have provoked numerous discussions concerning social structures, ancient religions, and even prehistoric models of beauty. Scholars have suggested that artefacts, including figures and figurines, should not be studied, as they are still often presented in museums, standing alone, extracted from their environment, visible only en-face and untouchable (Brumfiel 1996; Hamiltonet al.1996; Bailey 2005; Zonou-Herbst 2009). We can
7 Re-Making the Self: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Bolger Diane
Abstract: In this paper I explore some of the ways that changes in multiple aspects of bodily practice during the Chalcolithic period of Cyprus — human burials, figurative art, personal ornamentation and other forms of material culture — can be linked to one another through the concept of the “fractal self”, a term first used by social anthropologists in the early 1990s but applied more recently in archaeological studies by Lucas (1996), Tilley (1996), Chapman (2000), Fowler (2002; 2004; 2008) and Brück (2006) (see also Borić and Robb 2008). I argue that a fundamental transformation of personal and social identity was brought about
8 Pots and People: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Webb Jennifer M.
Abstract: Archaeologists routinely consider artefacts in relation to other artefacts and use relationships of similarity and difference to create typologies and organise material culture into chronological or geographical entities (Jones 2007, 143). In this paper I propose instead to focus on the relationship between artefacts and people and ask whether different material assemblages reflect differently embodied lives in Early Bronze Age Cyprus (EBA hereafter) (on the existence of embodied individuals in prehistory and a review of the literature, see Knapp and van Dommelen 2008 and Knapp 2010).
10 Placed with Care: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Aulsebrook Stephanie
Abstract: Vessels manufactured from metal appear in a geographically-wide distribution of Late Bronze Age deposits across the southern Greek mainland,
c.1700–1200 BC, although they remain relatively rare in the archaeological record. Their decoration required additional crafting time, labour and skill, altering their appearance and changing the interactions between the individual user, the vessel, and other participants within their context of use. Much emphasis has been placed within the discipline of archaeology on the communicative aspects of material culture (cf. Shanks and Tilley 1987, 97, 117; Kenoyer 2000, 91; for a more nuanced approach Meskell 2005, 2), but less attention
12 “It’s War, not a Dance”: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Mikrakis Manolis
Abstract: After the epochal collapse of state-level societies at the end of the Bronze Age, most of the eastern Mediterranean experienced new forms of statehood for which new social identities were essential. The old system’s failure to prevent disaster would have discredited earlier ideologies defining personal achievement and social status through reference to the supernatural (for the Aegean, see Mikrakis 2013, 229–30, with references). Practices revolving around the human body, the handiest tool for survival in periods of hardship such as in the so-called Dark Age that followed the collapse, would have increased sharply, causing tensions and conflicts.
15 Lithics and Identity at the Middle Palaeolithic site of Lakonis Cave I, Southern Peloponnese, Greece from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Panagopoulou Eleni
Abstract: Recent developments in the study of Palaeolithic society have emphasised the need to adopt a more comprehensive approach to the interpretation of human behaviour by taking into consideration various scales of analysis, encompassing both time and space. These scales of analysis can include individuals interacting for only a few hours in the course of a brief encounter, to larger groups and for longer periods, in the context of complex social networks within extended spatial units (Gamble 1999, 67–8). The study of individuals in particular, has generally been regarded as beyond the resolution of the Palaeolithic record (Clark 1992, 107),
16 Picrolite and Other Stone Beads and Pendants: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Georgiou Giorgos
Abstract: This paper focuses on the fact that picrolite, an indigenous stone that was extensively used during the Chalcolithic period (4000/3900–2500/2400 BC) for the manufacture of small figurines and other symbolic artefacts, was used in the Early and Middle Cypriot periods (2400–1700 BC) for the production of pendants in new forms. Although the relatively limited number and contextual information available for Bronze Age objects leaves little opportunity to consider in detail how they were perceived by their makers and wearers, they can nevertheless be used to give insights into their significance and the way in which they embodied identity
17 The Embodiment of Land Ownership in the Aegean Early Bronze Age from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Kouka Ourania
Abstract: Following the aforementioned definition, which corresponds also to theoretical approaches of embodiment and its perception (Merleau-Ponty 1964, 159–90; Lesure 2005), it is argued that the built environment demonstrates from prehistoric times an anthropogenic system of closed and open spaces for hosting every-day life, economic, social and symbolic activities. It represents, therefore, an agent through which the needs, abilities and habits of humans are embodied, but also the field for economic and social interaction. Moreover, built environment — domestic, funeral, and sacred — displays the existential ground of culture that allows the identification of its cognitive creator and owner.
18 From Potter’s Mark to the Potter Who Marks from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Christakis Kostis
Abstract: The application of marks on pottery during the manufacture and before the firing of a pot is a widespread practice in both the archaeological and ethnographic records of a range of different cultural milieus. Given that the mark was applied before the firing process, it is generally agreed that it is the potter who was responsible for marking the pot. Discussions so far have focused exclusively on the function and meaning of these marks. Most scholars relate them to potters and/or workshops (
e.g.Bikaki 1984, 9, 22, 42; Papadopoulos 1994; Hirschfeld 1999, 33; Lindblom 2001, 132–3; Ditze 2007, 279
19 Grasping Identity: from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Lorentz Kirsi O.
Abstract: Archaeologists have attempted to study identity through several different avenues and varied archaeological remains (see
e.g.Insoll 2007), including employing data derived from analyses of human remains. More recently, some bioarchaeologists have begun to attempt social interpretations of the physical anthropological and palaeopathological data they produce (Agarwal and Glencross 2011; Gowland and Knüsel 2006), focusing on identity issues. Grasping for identity through archaeological human remains is a challenging endeavour as, for example, papers in the edited volume by Gowland and Knüsel illustrate (2006, see specifically Le Hurayet al.2006; Montgomery and Evans 2006). Only some differential practices relating to
22 Secondary Burials and the Construction of Group Identities in Crete between the Second Half of the 4th and 2nd Millennia BC from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Todaro Simona
Abstract: Secondary mortuary practices entail the primary inhumation of the individual and the subsequent manipulation of its skeletal remains with actions of disarticulation, collection and relocation of selected bones from one location to another. It is, therefore, not easily identifiable in communal tombs,
i.e.in those funerary structures that were used for successive multiple burials that required the partial or total relocation of the previous inhumations in order to allow the re-use of the burial ground. It is therefore hardly surprising that secondary mortuary practices have only recently been recognised in the communal tombs of the central and western Mediterranean from
24 Fire, Fragmentation and the Body in the Late Bronze Age Aegean from:
An Archaeology of Prehistoric Bodies and Embodied Identities in the Eastern Mediterranean
Author(s) Galanakis Yannis
Abstract: Although mortuary data is one of the primary sources for studying the Late Bronze Age (LBA) in the Aegean, it is often studied in isolation from the complex, multi-staged processes and performances that made up the funeral and everything that followed it. The depositional sequence of these actions is most frequently overlooked, not least because of practical difficulties in reconstructing these events and the ephemeral and often ambiguous nature of the evidence. Despite these limitations, however, there are many clues, both direct — in the form of residual remains — and indirect — in the form of purposefully destroyed things¹ — that hint at
Book Title: Marxism and Form-20th-Century Dialectical Theories of Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): SARTRE JEAN-PAUL
Abstract: For more than thirty years, Fredric Jameson has been one of the most productive, wide-ranging, and distinctive literary theorists in the United States and the Anglophone world. Marxism and Form provided a pioneering account of the work of the major European Marxist theorists--T. W. Adorno, Walter Benjamin, Herbert Marcuse, Ernst Bloch, Georg Lukács, and Jean-Paul Sartre--work that was, at the time, largely neglected in the English-speaking world. Through penetrating readings of each theorist, Jameson developed a critical mode of engagement that has had tremendous in.uence. He provided a framework for analyzing the connection between art and the historical circumstances of its making--in particular, how cultural artifacts distort, repress, or transform their circumstances through the abstractions of aesthetic form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ggjkw6
CHAPTER THREE THE CASE FOR GEORG LUKÁCS from:
Marxism and Form
Abstract: For Western readers the idea of Georg Lukács has often seemed more interesting than the reality. It is as though, in some world of Platonic forms and methodological archetypes, a place were waiting for the Marxist literary critic which (after Plekhanov) only Lukács has seriously tried to fill. Yet in the long run even his more sympathetic Western critics turn away from him in varying degrees of disillusionment: they came prepared to contemplate the abstract idea, but in practice they find themselves asked to sacrifice too much. They pay lip service to Lukács as a figure, but the texts themselves
CHAPTER FIVE TOWARDS DIALECTICAL CRITICISM from:
Marxism and Form
Abstract: A phenomenological description of dialectical criticism? The contradiction is not so great as it might at first glance appear. The peculiar difficulty of dialectical writing lies indeed in its holistic, “totalizing” character: as though you could not say any one thing until you had first said everything; as though with each new idea you were bound to recapitulate the entire system. So it is that the attempt to do justice to the most random observation of Hegel ends up drawing the whole tangled, dripping mass of the Hegelian sequence of forms out into the light with it. So it is
Freud, Adorno, and the Ban on Images from:
Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Boer Roland
Abstract: It is less recognized than it should be that Theodor Adorno’s key noncategory of the
Bilderverbot, or ban on images, owes as much to overturning sigmund Freud’s argument concerning idolatry as it does to the biblical ban on images. Of course, both bounce their thoughts off the second commandment of Exod 20 (and Deut 5). Yet Freud’s interpretation runs the risk of replicating precisely what the ban seeks to overcome, for the abstraction he espies in the ban is precisely the move that reinstalls idolatry. For this reason, Adorno seeks to deploy the ban on images in a way that
Psychoapocalypse: from:
Psychoanalytic Mediations between Marxist and Postcolonial Readings of the Bible
Author(s) Pippin Tina
Abstract: In the ticket line to see
2012with my “The Politics of Apocalypse” class one semester, we met a woman who was returning for a second viewing of the film because she found it so believable. “This is the way it’s really going to happen,” she shared. “This movie shows exactly how the world is going to end; I have to see it again to catch all the details. after you see it you just want to be nice to people.” This viewer had crossed over into the film’s fantastic vision of the end; in fact, she was an enthusiastic
Book Title: The Chatter of the Visible-Montage and Narrative in Weimar Germany
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): McBride Patrizia C.
Abstract: The Chatter of the Visible examines the paradoxical narrative features of the photomontage aesthetics of artists associated with Dada, Constructivism, and the New Objectivity. While montage strategies have commonly been associated with the purposeful interruption of and challenge to narrative consistency and continuity, McBride offers an historicized reappraisal of 1920s and 1930s German photomontage work to show that its peculiar mimicry was less a rejection of narrative and more an extension or permutation of it—a means for thinking in narrative textures exceeding constraints imposed by “flat" print media (especially the novel and other literary genres). McBride’s contribution to the conversation around Weimar-era montage is in her situation of the form of the work as a discursive practice in its own right, which affords humans a new way to negotiate temporality, as a particular mode of thinking that productively relates the particular to the universal, or as a culturally specific form of cognition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gk08k8
1 Weimar-Era Montage: from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: The terms
montageandcollagehave become synonymous with the radical experimentation that altered the status and physiognomy of art in early twentieth-century Europe. They encompass a wide array of practices premised on quoting, combining, and juxtaposing materials that straddle the bounds of old and new media—from literature and stage drama to painting, sculpture, photography, film, and radio. Common to these practices is the exuberant transgression of the canons of normative aesthetics, coupled with an often belligerent contempt for the institutions of academic art and an optimistic willingness to draw inspiration from the world of consumer culture, advertisement, and
3 Storytelling in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility: from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: “The Work of Art in the Age of Its Technological Reproducibility” (1935–39) and “The Storyteller” share much common ground. Both texts seize on the transformed status of art and aesthetic experience as a privileged point of entry for reflecting on the modern condition. Each essay examines the changes wrought by a watershed event in the development of technology—in “The Storyteller,” the propagation of movable print and a book culture that displaces the oral practice of storytelling, marking the dislocation of the collective wisdom of tradition by the putative objectivity of information; in the artwork essay, the advent of
4 Narrating in Three Dimensions: from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: This passage wraps up an essay László Moholy-Nagy published in 1923, the year he was appointed to the Bauhaus, where he helped liquidate the romantic existentialism of the Expressionist masters that had shaped the school’s aesthetic agenda and usher its orientation toward technology and massproducible design. Casting a belief shared by many contemporaries in the language of Constructivism, Moholy announces that photography and film are poised to displace literature as a medium of communication in virtue of their superior clarity, simplicity, and exactness. Photography’s exactness, in particular, is the source of its striking narrative power, which dispenses with the vagaries
5 Narrative Resemblance and the Modernist Photobook from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: It would be difficult to overstate the impact of technologies of mechanical reproduction on the visual culture of Weimar Germany, as a flood of images from photography and film upended conventional models of cultural literacy following the media boom of the early 1920s. Within this context film has attracted far greater attention than photography because of its explosive potential as a mimetic medium that can convey a sense of unfolding time and engender fresh modes of collective reception. Yet the photographic image was an even more ubiquitous and flexible instrument of visual dissemination because of the unprecedented proliferation of newspapers
6 Abstraction and Montage in the Work of Kurt Schwitters from:
The Chatter of the Visible
Abstract: Perhaps no other artist has offered as comprehensive and layered an exploration of montage as Kurt Schwitters, whose imaginative engagement with strategies of disarticulation and assemblage over four decades casts a long shadow on the art of the twentieth century.¹ Working in a variety of media, Schwitters pushed the bounds of montage with a single-mindedness that is only matched by the doggedness with which he interrogated the enabling conditions of his artistic practice. Yet precisely his reflection on montage as a fundamental aesthetic principle has presented a formidable stumbling block for Schwitters scholars ever since the rediscovery of his oeuvre
Book Title: The Muses on Their Lunch Hour- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Garber Marjorie
Abstract: As a break from their ordained labors, what might the Muses today do on their lunch hour? This collection of witty, shrewd, and imaginative essays addresses interdisciplinary topics that range widely from Shakespeare, to psychoanalysis, to the practice of higher education today. With the ease born of deep knowledge, Marjorie Garber moves from comical journalistic quirks (GÇ£Fig LeavesGÇ¥) to the curious return of myth and ritual in the theories of evolutionary psychologists (GÇ£Ovid, Now and ThenGÇ¥)._x000D_ Two themes emerge consistently in GarberGÇÖs latest exploration of symptoms of culture. The first is that to predict the GÇ£next big thingGÇ¥ in literary studies we should look back at ideas and practices set aside by a previous generation of critics. In the past several decades we have seen the reemergence ofGÇöfor exampleGÇötextual editing, biography, character criticism, aesthetics, and philology as GÇ£hotGÇ¥ new areas for critical intervention. The second theme expands on this observation, making the case for GÇ£cultural forgettingGÇ¥ as the way the arts and humanities renew themselves, both within fields and across them. Although she is never represented in traditional paintings or poetry, a missing MuseGÇöwe can call her AmnesiaGÇöturns out to be a key figure for the creation of theory and criticism in the arts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6bb4
CHAPTER 1 Asking Literary Questions from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: English studies held the comfortable middle-ground of the humanities in U. S. and Anglophile/Anglophone universities through the middle part of the twentieth century. The combined heritage of belletrism and the “little magazines” imparted a certain gloss of creativity and artiness to the practice of reading and writing about poems, novels, plays, and what was then
CHAPTER 5 Baggage Screening from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: By situating four of her digital media installations among the permanent artifacts of the Freud Museum, Renate Ferro ensures that her work interceded with, interrupted, and blended in with the collections and ephemera of the two Freuds: Sigmund and Anna. An installation in Anna Freud’s study on the second floor of the Hampstead house is called “This Suitcase Has No
CHAPTER 7 Czech Mates: from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: Shakespeare and Kafka. At first glance it might seem as if no two writers could be less alike. One a playwright, an actor, an entrepreneur, a Christian; the other a novelist, a fabulist, an aphorist, a Jew. One supremely gifted in the creation of memorable dramatic characters, the other skilled in free indirect discourse, and in the first person narrative. One expansive, making the world a stage and the stage a world, the other a visionary claustrophobe, master of minimal spaces, the trial, the burrow, the animal-slave ship, the hunger artist’s cage. And yet they have been often, even insistently,
CHAPTER 8 Occupy Shakespeare from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: In 2011, the American Dialect Society voted to make “occupy” the 2011 Word of the Year, defeating contenders such as “tebowing,” “99%,” and the acronym FOMO, for “fear of missing out” (anxiety over being inundated by the information on social media). The chair of the Dialect Society’s New Words Committee was quick to acknowledge that “occupy” was, in fact, “a very old word,” but noted that “over the course of just a few months it took on another life and moved in new and unexpected directions.”³ When a column on this topic appeared in
The Guardian, written by an after-dinner
CHAPTER 9 Shakespeare 451 from:
The Muses on Their Lunch Hour
Abstract: Despite the best efforts of humanities deans and English department chairs, and the resourceful invention by instructors of new courses designed to attract undergraduates to the humanities and the arts, today’s college students are more and more choosing the STEM fields (science, technology, engineering, and math) for reasons both practical and intellectual. English and history used to be among the largest undergraduate majors; now the preferred fields are often computer science, economics, and finance. It is not just that students
CHAPTER TWO War, Memory and Postcoloniality from:
Assia Djebar
Abstract: After completing
Les Alouettes naïves, Djebar temporarily stopped writing and remained silent for ten years, before publishing one of her most famous collections,Femmes d’Alger dans leur appartement. The reasons for this silence are evidently manifold and testify to the difficulties associated with locating and describing a position in the aftermath of the upheavals of the war. Having struggled to create a meaningful narrative reconstructing her characters’ experiences in the maquis inLes Alouettes, Djebar temporarily abandoned the use of written language as a means of making sense of colonial violence and instead experimented with film. After battling with the
Conclusion from:
Assia Djebar
Abstract: Djebar’s trajectory and development as a writer can be conceived as a gradual movement away from any specific form of identification with Algeria towards a new configuration of her native land as severed, diverse and haunted by its past. The lingering traces of a search for the specific in the earlier works give way, by the time of
La Femme sans sépultureandLa Disparition, to a depiction of Algeria’s culture, language and history as intractable or spectral – present but impossible to grasp. It is in this sense that her writing constitutes a hesitant ‘expatriation’, a movement outside the
Book Title: Science Fiction Double Feature-The Science Fiction Film as Cult Text
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DUCHOVNAY GERALD
Abstract: Critical discussion of cult cinema has often noted its tendency to straddle or ignore boundaries, to pull together different sets of conventions, narrative formulas, or character types for the almost surreal pleasure to be found in their sudden juxtapositions or narrative combination. With its own boundary-blurring nature—as both science and fiction, reality and fantasy—science fiction has played a key role in such cinematic cult formation. This volume examines that largely unexplored relationship, looking at how the sf film’s own double nature neatly matches up with a persistent double vision common to the cult film. It does so by bringing together an international array of scholars to address key questions about the intersections of sf and cult cinema: how different genre elements, directors, and stars contribute to cult formation; what role fan activities, including “con" participation, play in cult development; and how the occulted or “bad" sf cult film works. The volume pursues these questions by addressing a variety of such sf cult works, including Robot Monster (1953), Zardoz (1974), A Boy and His Dog (1975), Tetsuo: The Iron Man (1989), Space Truckers (1996), Ghost in the Shell 2 (2004), and Iron Sky (2012). What these essays afford is a revealing vision of both the sf aspects of much cult film activity and the cultish aspects of the whole sf genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6btc
Introduction: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Telotte J. P.
Abstract: The most well-known, and certainly the most frequently discussed cult film,
The Rocky Horror Picture Show(1975), opens with an arresting image, a close-up of bright red lips mouthing the film’s theme song, “Science Fiction Double Feature.” Both image and song have become practically iconic—emblems of the cult film, signs of its generally transgressive, sometimes campy nature, celebrations of the way such films, in contrast to most traditional Hollywood cinema, seem to directly address their audience, even, as Timothy Corrigan allusively puts it, placing them “oddly inscribed” within the film text (34). WhileRocky Horror—the film—no longer
2. The Coy Cult Text: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Bould Mark
Abstract: Many attempts to define cult movies and to describe their appeal are characterized by notions of doubleness, contradiction, and introjection. For example, J. P. Telotte finds in the “etymological underpinnings of ‘cult’” (14) a complex of potential meanings pointing to a dialectical impulse to possess and to be possessed, to express selfhood through surrendering to an external other. Thus, he suggests, the cult movie transgresses norms, enabling the cultist “to fashion a statement of difference” (14), even as it establishes “a stable ground from which to make that assertion, a ground
withinthe very boundaries” that are being transgressed (15).
4. Sean Connery Reconfigured: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Duchovnay Gerald
Abstract: While histories of cinema, especially US cinema, typically discuss the development of the star system, only in recent decades has much attention been paid to actors as performers, and still less attention is given to actors as cult performers. As Wade Jennings observes, compared to regular stardom, “Cult stardom is a relatively recent phenomenon,” and one that, “over time … can emerge as a quite different phenomenon” (90). Exploring the discourses related to this “different phenomenon,” Matt Hills notes how, “across their lifetime, some cult stars become hemmed in by their most famous roles (where a specific character has taken
7. Iron Sky’s War Bonds: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Tryon Chuck
Abstract: In February 2012, after six years of planning, fundraising, and production, the sf film
Iron Skypremiered at the Berlin Film Festival. AlthoughIron Skyfeatured a provocative plot—one in which Nazis who had been hiding on the dark side of the moon return to earth in the year 2018—along with a couple of familiar international stars, including German actor Udo Kier, and a soundtrack by the Slovenian avant-garde band Laibach, the film was discussed most frequently because of its unusual production history, which involved the contributions of thousands of fans and followers who donated time and money
8. Transnational Interactions: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Tatsumi Takayuki
Abstract: In 2009, several friends recommended that I see
District 9, a new film produced by Peter Jackson and directed by the hitherto unknown Neill Blomkamp. They knew that since I was something of a missionary for cyberpunk and avant-pop texts, I would appreciate this film, an unlikely export from South Africa that had quickly attracted a cult following. They were right. Blomkamp’s ideas and shocking images immediately reminded me of Shinya Tsukamoto’s cyberpunk Tetsuo films (Tetsuo: The Iron Man, 1988, andTetsuo II: Body Hammer, 1992) which had inspired me to write my first book,Full Metal Apache(2006). However,
9. A Donut for Tom Paris: from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Lamerichs Nicolle
Abstract: Decades ago, fans were usually adults who had the economic and social liberty of going to conventions or clubs. Recently, the discourse on fandom has become entwined with that on new media audiences, who are not only portrayed as younger, but also seen as especially exemplary of fandom in terms of their online activity. As a result of the increase in online participatory culture, criticism has followed suit, often focusing more on the “online” than the “offline” dimensions of fandom. However, concerts, conventions, movie theaters, and fan clubs remain relevant sites where media fandom is performed today, and these venues
15. Bubba Ho-tep and the Seriously Silly Cult Film from:
Science Fiction Double Feature
Author(s) Weinstock Jeffrey Andrew
Abstract: By looking at the example of Don Coscarelli’s unapologetically silly 2002 film,
Bubba Ho-tep, I want to propose that we consider sf, fantasy, and indeed cult films of all stripes as both literal and figurative “strange attractors.” Excluding perhaps what J. P. Telotte refers to as “classical” cult films inThe Cult Film Experience—mainstream Hollywood films such asCasablanca(Michael Curtiz, 1942) that have inspired fiercely loyal fan followings—cult films typically are works that foreground their thematic, structural, and/or aesthetic deviation from loosely defined Hollywood norms. Theyliterallyattract due to their strangeness. Borrowing from chaos theory, however,
CHAPTER 5 Flesh Made Word: from:
Patrick Chamoiseau
Abstract: This study began with a reading of Chamoiseau’s first novel,
Chronique des sept misères, and reaches its end with his most recent, and most ambitious, to date,Biblique des derniers gestes(2002).¹ The striking similarity in the very titles of the two texts gestures towards a continuity of thematic preoccupation, and indeed of structure, across theœuvreas a whole. This coherence can be seen for example in the fact thatBiblique, likeTexacoandSolibo, opens in the debased contemporary present, and then projects back in time, uncovering a more vital, if painful, Creole past. The novel’s hero, Balthazar
Afterword from:
Patrick Chamoiseau
Abstract: In the transition that has been traced in this monograph, from an æsthetics of re-collection and transcription to a poetics of materiality, the body has emerged as a primary site of both fictional and autobiographical memory, an archive and an active witness. It is appropriate that this study should end with further consideration of
Bibliquebecause, as we have seen, this novel focuses on the body to an unprecedented degree, and because the text exemplifies many of the tensions which have lain at the heart of my analysis more generally, such as the fraught borderline between nostalgia and ‘authentic’ memory,
Book Title: Patrick Modiano-Second Edition
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: Conceived as a second edition to Kawakami's acclaimed A Self-Conscious Art, which was the first full-length study in English of Patrick Modiano’s work, this book has been comprehensively updated with two new chapters, notably discussing the author's recent work and his Nobel Prize win. Kawakami shows how by parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, Modiano's narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This welcome update on the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists will be essential reading for scholars working on contemporary French writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gn6dst
CHAPTER THREE Unreal Stories: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: It is often assumed that Modiano is a ‘realist’. One reason for this is that his prose is representational, full of small and precise details in the manner of the Barthesian ‘effet de réel’. Many of these facts, moreover, have been discovered to be real; they are precise locations in Paris, or a particular brand of cigarette commonly smoked in France. Their authenticity has convinced some readers that the narrative which contains them must be a mimetic one. Another commonly held reason for considering Modiano a ‘realist’ is the combination of readability and alleged non-experimentation which characterises his novels; in
CHAPTER FOUR Being Serious: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: Modiano is still best known for writing novels set in the Occupation. His apparent obsession, especially in his earlier works, with this dark period of French history has been the main concern of his critics and reviewers. It is certainly a controversial subject: it was one of the main causes for the impact that Modiano’s first novels had on the public, instantly creating a reputation for the young author.¹ We may wonder, however, whether there was more to this reaction than that of simple choice of subject matter. What is the nature of Modiano’s treatment of the subject? Is it
CHAPTER FIVE Being Playful: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: We have now seen numerous instances of Modiano at his most subversive. The apparently unremarkable first-person narrator, chronological narrative and realist representation have all turned out to be playful subversions of these familiar narrative tropes. So too has his use of historical facts: far from adding up to a historical novel, they result in an uneasy mixture of fact and fiction which has a morally disturbing effect on the reader. This leads us to a question of classification. Modiano’s novels are not what they seem, so we know what they are not: but what exactly are they? To what subgenre
CHAPTER SEVEN Being a Woman: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: In Modiano’s novels of the seventies, eighties and early nineties, the young female characters tended not to be very developed, broadly speaking: they were fairly generic ‘mystery women’ who attracted the young male narrator, often leading him to make undesirable acquaintances, and then disappearing without explanation, breaking his heart and giving him a reason to write about the experience. They were often a little, at times much, older than him, and their lives subordinate to that of the male narrator, both in narrative terms—that is to say, they were never narrators—and in terms of sheer content. But this
CHAPTER EIGHT Being Eternal: from:
Patrick Modiano
Abstract: As I discussed in Chapter 6 of this book, the ‘sameness’ of Modiano’s novels is a characteristic that seems to stem from a variety of reasons, with equally various effects. Sometimes seen as a result of certain autobiographical compulsions,¹ it is a quality of which the author himself cannot be unaware, and which indeed he has been seen to parody in an arguably postmodern acknowledgement of both the ‘Modiano novel’ and correspondingly typical ‘Modiano criticism’.² On the levels of structure, themes, tone and atmosphere, his most recent books have remained eminently recognisable as ‘Modiano novels’, so much so that a
Book Title: At the Limits of Memory-Legacies of Slavery in the Francophone World
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Recent years have seen a growing body of literature dedicated to memories of slavery in the Anglophone world, yet little has been done to approach this subject from Francophone perspectives. This collection responds to the urgent need to contribute to current research on slavery and memory studies by focusing specifically on the Francophone world. Featuring the scholarship of leading academics in France, Britain, the United States and Canada, the collection reflects upon contemporary commemorative practices that relate to the history of slavery and the slave trade, and questions how they function in relationship to other, less memorialized histories of exploitation, such as indentured and forced labour. The volume is set against the context of France’s growing body of memory legislation, as well as its close cultural and political connections to its former empire, all of which make it an influential player in how slavery continues to be memorialized and conceptualized in the public sphere. Contributors retrace and redraw the narrative map of slavery and its legacies in the Francophone world through a comparative understanding of how these different, but interconnected forms of labour exploitation have been remembered and/or forgotten from European, West African, Indian Ocean and Caribbean perspectives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gpcb4p
Representing the Slave Past: from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Chivallon Christine
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with the development of new patrimonial and museographical practices relating to transatlantic slavery in France and its far-flung overseas departments in the Caribbean.² From the outset, it is worth recalling that these departments consist of micro-societies that were born out of slavery and whose historical trajectory has yet to find its rightful place within that of the French nation. What follows may therefore appear surprising since the proposed analysis chimes a dissonant note amid the increasing clamour for action at a museal level for the creation of places to collect, remember and honour the memory of
Haiti and the Memorial Discourses of Slavery after 1804 from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Hodgson Kate
Abstract: Of all of the countries of the Americas, the people of Haiti have to go the furthest back in time to access collectively the ‘souvenirs amers’ [‘bitter memories’] of colonial slavery. The beginning of the end of plantation slavery in the Americas occurred there, in August 1791, when a mass revolt broke out across the northern plain of what was then the French colony of Saint Domingue. Hundreds of sugar and coffee plantations were razed to the ground, and the de facto end of slavery began, as the former slaves-turned-revolutionaries deserted the ruins, forming rebel camps in the hills. By
Speaking of Slavery: from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Omuku Sotonye
Abstract: The institution of slavery and the practice of slave trading in Africa have been the subject of increasing debate over the past few decades, with historians and anthropologists considering the relationship between domestic slavery and the trans-Saharan and transatlantic slave trades, as well as the impact of these external trades on the traffic of slaves within Africa. Forced migration patterns across the Atlantic form the majority of the commemorative discourses on slavery in West Africa. Conversely, domestic slavery, which not only pre-dated and co-existed with the transatlantic and trans-Saharan trades, but has also outlived both, is often relegated to the
Imaging the Present: from:
At the Limits of Memory
Author(s) Griffiths Claire
Abstract: As memories of slavery re-emerge in recent historiographies of the transatlantic slave trade, contemporary visual culture from Francophone Africa is participating in this reassessment of the past as part of an on-going discussion of ‘development’ in present-day Africa. By engaging with the history of the slave trade and exploring its connections with the use of African labour in contemporary modes of production in West Africa, recent art works from the region that once formed the heartland of the French slave trade can be seen to offer a discursive platform on which to foreground ‘alternative memorial practices and forms of memory-making’
Book Title: Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction-Explorations in Readers' Engagement with Characters
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): CARACCIOLO MARCO
Abstract: A storyteller's craft can often be judged by how convincingly the narrative captures the identity and personality of its characters. In this book, the characters who take center stage are "strange" first-person narrators: they are fascinating because of how they are at odds with what the reader would wish or expect to hear-while remaining reassuringly familiar in voice, interactions, and conversations. Combining literary analysis with research in cognitive and social psychology, Marco Caracciolo focuses on readers' encounters with the "strange" narrators of ten contemporary novels, including Bret Easton Ellis's
American Psycho, Haruki Murakami'sHard-Boiled Wonderland and the End of the World, and Mark Haddon'sThe Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time. Caracciolo explores readers' responses to narrators who suffer from neurocognitive or developmental disorders, who are mentally disturbed due to multiple personality disorder or psychopathy, whose consciousness is split between two parallel dimensions or is disembodied, who are animals, or who lose their sanity.A foray into current work on reception, reader-response, cognitive literary study, and narratology,Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fictionillustrates why any encounter with a fictional text is a complex negotiation of interlaced feelings, thoughts, experiences, and interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gr7dkd
Spiders on Drugs: from:
Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: In 1995 three nasa researchers published a scientific report illustrating the effects of psychoactive drugs on the webs spun by
Araneus diadematus, commonly known as the European garden spider (Noever, Cronise, and Relwani 1995). Building on pharmacologist P. N. Witt’s research from the 1940s, the authors demonstrate that spiderwebs can be used to test the toxicity of chemicals such as mescaline, amphetamine, or even caffeine.¹ Indeed, the webs woven by spiders exposed to these substances display distinctive alterations when compared to spiders in the control condition, as evidenced by the drawings included in the report: the healthy compactness of drug-free
2 Two Child Narrators from:
Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: Homing in on two contemporary novels featuring “strange” narrators, Mark Haddon’s
The Curious Incident of the Dog in the Night-Time(2004) and Emma Donoghue’sRoom(2010), this chapter begins illustrating the theoretical arguments discussed over the previous pages. It fleshes out my model of defamiliarization in readers’ interactions with characters, giving a degree of empirical reality to concepts such as character-centered illusion, cognitive strangeness, and the oscillation between empathy and imaginative resistance.
4 A Strange Mood from:
Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: I stressed in the prologue that defamiliarization is far from being a purely cognitive process of belief change, since it is always accompanied by an emotional “feel,” which may span a wide affective gamut of curiosity, puzzlement, hesitation, and unease. This chapter focuses on the feelings of strangeness that underlie readers’ engagements with characters by using as case studies two novels, Haruki Murakami’s
Hard-Boiled Wonderland and the End of the World(2011; originally published in Japanese in 1985) and Martin Amis’sTime’s Arrow(2003; first edition 1991). Both texts play on a triangulation between the reader and two narrators (Murakami)
Coda: from:
Strange Narrators in Contemporary Fiction
Abstract: In the concluding lines of
Why We Read Fiction, Lisa Zunshine writes, “I can say that I personally read fiction because it offers a pleasurable and intensive workout for my Theory of Mind” (2006, 164). Zunshine’s argument is well known: we feel attracted to fiction because it affords opportunities for exercising our “theory of mind” (our capacity to attribute mental states to other subjects), thus functioning as some sort of cognitive “weightlifting” (124–25). In discussing this gymnastic metaphor, Zunshine is careful to uncouple the pleasure provided by reading fictional characters’ minds from its real-world consequences, adding that “[just] as
The Dark Side of the Truth. from:
Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Matteucci Giovanni
Abstract: The title of this paper refers to the peculiar and indeed special role played by the concepts of nature, in general, and natural beauty, in particular, in Adorno’s philosophy. In fact, since Adorno’s early works of the 1930s up to his mature works of the 1960s, nature seems to represent what has been systematically repressed in the course of civilization. Hence, if observed from a dialectical point of view and expressed in somehow Pinkfloydian terms, nature appears as something like “the dark side of the truth” (or, in a more Springsteenian fashion, the “darkness” that lies “at the edge of
Tell Me Lies, and Show Me Invisible Images! Adorno’s Criticism on Film – Revisited from:
Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Früchtl Josef
Abstract: “Enlightenment as Mass Deception”. This is the subtitle of the chapter “The Culture Industry” in Adorno and Horkheimer’s
Dialectic of Enlightenment. Their theory is as follows: while culture in bourgeois society cannot be free from the contradictions which characterise this society in accordance with Hegel and Marx, nevertheless at the same time, capturing the moment of the negative and critical in its “affirmative character”, as Hork-heimer and then Herbert Marcuse put it, industrially produced culture loses even this last element of the critical and becomes completely affirmative. Thus, culture industry loses its immanent dialectic. However, the culture industry still claims
The Enigma of Experience; Art and Truth Content from:
Theodor W. Adorno: Truth and Dialectical Experience / Verità ed esperienza dialettica
Author(s) Huhn Tom
Abstract: The enigma of the work of modern art is also the name for its constitutive character. The character of this self-contradicting existence is what makes the work of art into the occasion for a baffling and befuddling encounter. The complement to enigma in the work of art is its truth content. Key to engaging the work of art’s enigma and truth content is the mimetic relation between experience and the work of art. The misalignment between the work of art and human experience is an opportunity for encountering what exists as objective contradiction. The ongoing dance between the mimetic misalignments
Introduction from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) O’Donnell Mike
Abstract: The title of this collection may prompt two types of reaction. For some, it is inappropriate to talk about the resurgence of phenomena that have become established and ‘mainstream’. Personal freedoms in sexual relations, artistic expression and ongoing campaigns for equal rights have all become institutionalised in the past 40 years. However for other readers, familiar with the extravagant mission of the counter-culture and the shrivelling of revolutionary – or pseudo-revolutionary – politicking, the ‘spirit of the 60s’ may be thought of as beyond resuscitation. As one seasoned political journalist recently opined: ‘1968 was not a beginning – it was
Chapter 1 ALL ALONG THE WATERSHED: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Jones Bryn
Abstract: There is an influential historical consensus that 1960s radicalism in Britain had no significant or lasting impact on the social and political order. In this view, the longer-term effects of the ideas and movements, often associated with the climactic year of 1968, have been confined to popular culture, life-styles and inter-personal relations. It is said that political institutions remained unperturbed and almost unaffected by the intellectual and ideological ferment occurring in the arts, media, universities, street politics and youth cultures. From this historical-empiricist perspective the significance of ’68 in Britain was apolitical and confined to the personal and cultural sphere
Chapter 2 MAY’S TENSIONS TODAY: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) McDonald Kevin
Abstract: On 15 March 1968 France’s most important newspaper,
Le Monde, published an editorial by Pierre Viansson-Ponté, its chief political writer, entitled ‘France is bored’ (Viansson-Ponté 1968). The author, a former member of the Resistance and one of the country’s most respected political commentators, bemoaned the fact that France was ‘removed from the convulsions reshaping the world’, a place where ‘nothing is happening’. He observed in passing that a few students were demonstrating at Nanterre University for the right of female students to enter the male dormitories, dismissing this as ‘despite everything, a limited conception of human rights’. Anyone familiar with
Chapter 3 THE WAR AGAINST THE WAR: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Cardina Miguel
Abstract: If the slogan ‘make love, not war’ became a constantly evoked symbol of the kind of protest generated in the ‘long sixties’ (Jameson 1984; Marwick 1998, 16–20), the fact is that the attitudes and discourses that originated in this period have not always corresponded to this pacifist image, at times understood retrospectively as parodic, individualistic and carefree. In different times and places, at a gradually more intense pace, the new youth culture introduced profound changes in the fields of customs, taste and morality, and set in motion modes of daring and resistance which often evolved towards open confrontation with
Chapter 4 FROM SARTRE TO STEVEDORES: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Lunn Helen
Abstract: Two major discourses of change in the 1960s, student revolt and black consciousness, were introduced to South Africa primarily through, literature, music, and individual agency. The knowledge transfer helped to define and transform resistance to apartheid from liberal expressions and values to ideologically informed New Left activism. The impact of this shift and the forms it took had highly significant long term outcomes for South Africa, but the perception of South Africa as an isolated place disconnected from early forms of globalization has become a self reflective trope and the significance of links with global changes are not recognized.
Chapter 6 NINETEEN SIXTIES RADICALISM IN THE UNITED STATES: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) O’Donnell Mike
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to explain the rise, character and trajectory of radicalism in the United States during ‘the long nineteen sixties’ and to comment on its significance to some of today’s related issues. For comparative purposes, I will also refer to nineteen sixties radicalism in Britain. My already smouldering interest in American radicalism was ignited in 1968 when as a student I attended the ‘alternative’ democratic convention in Chicago, if ‘attended’ is the right word to describe the heavily policed gatherings of assorted radicals in the parks and streets outside the official Convention Hall. Since then I
Chapter 7 STUDENTS, ARTISTS AND THE ICA: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Cranfield Ben
Abstract: As the highpoint of sixties radicalism, 1968 was a year of action. This was certainly true for London’s Institute of Contemporary Arts which moved that year from its small premises in Dover Street to its current grander location on the Mall. However, Roland Barthes comments that, ‘every national shock produces a sudden flowering of written commentary’ (1968, 149) and 1968 was also a year of prolific written documentation. The immediacy of 1968’s historicization not only reveals its importance, but also its compromises and failures, as writers struggled to make sense of its disparate aims and ideological absences. America may have
Chapter 9 HABERMAS ON SIXTIES STUDENT PROTESTS: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Driver James
Abstract: As one of the greatest sociologists and social philosophers of the latter part of the twentieth century, Jürgen Habermas’s interactions with, and theorising of the problems confronted by the sixties student movement are of both major historical and contemporary significance. Other chapters in this book (McDonald chapter 2; O’Donnell chapter 6, Cranfield chapter 7) describe the movements for protest and greater freedom of expression amongst the student generations in Europe and North America. More specific to inter-generational conflict in Germany was the awakening of the baby boomer generation to the country’s National Socialist past. The
Wirtschaftwunderhad provided the country
Chapter 10 SIXTIES MOVEMENTS, EDUCATIONAL EXPANSION AND COGNITIVE MOBILISATION: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Schlapbach Florian
Abstract: This chapter will focus, from a quantitative and longitudinal perspective, on the cohorts who experienced and were involved in those sixties events often symbolized by reference to the climactic year 1968. It looks in particular at the connection between education and values and unconventional political participation. As education has been a major characteristic of the active sixties generation, educational level and educational expansion will be theorised to analyse social mechanisms behind the sixties movement and its development. We will compare the sixties generation – the birth cohorts 1946–53 at the core – to other earlier and later cohorts regarding
Chapter 11 CARRYING THE FLAME FORWARD: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) McKechnie Rosemary
Abstract: Where have the revolutions gone? What happens with the passion of the day once movements are no longer publicly visible – what does it transform into? And what are the lessons learned? Our concern in this chapter is to critically examine the idealism of political movements following the moment of 1968, by listening to the voices of adults who have been engaged in a range of activist projects over their lifetime. Our discussion is founded on in-depth life story interviews with adults in the UK, however to contextualize and analyse this material we draw on theories about new social movements
Chapter 12 WHEN THE PERSONAL BECAME POLITICAL: from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) Freely Maureen
Abstract: It began with a memo. Its original title (‘Some Thoughts in Response to Dottie’s Thoughts on a Women’s Liberation Movement’) suggests the spirit in which it was written. Carol Hanisch, a community organiser for the Southern Conference Educational Fund, was responding to a memo by another staff member. Like so many other activists in the civil rights movement, the antiwar movement, and the New Left, this colleague did not view the fledgling women’s liberation movement as truly political. Dottie Zellner had been particularly scathing about the new vogue for consciousness-raising, which she dismissed as therapy.
Conclusion from:
Sixties Radicalism and Social Movement Activism
Author(s) O’Donnell Mike
Abstract: This book began by contrasting polarised interpretations of the longer term impact of sixties radicalism. One cluster sees cultural, social and political rebellion as ephemeral, politically inconsequential or absorbed into the mainstream. Others see legacies and practices from sixties radicalism as established and still influential in contemporary radical protest. This divergence is illustrated by the views of two Americans: Noam Chomsky (2009) and Gerard DeGroot (2008). On the BBC world news programme
Hardtalk(November 3 2009) Chomsky consistently attributed what he sees as an increase in freedom of expression in American public life to the long-term impact of the radical
Chapter 1 HUBRIS AND GUILT: from:
Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) IBSEN HENRIK
Abstract: Chamberlain Alving and Oswald Alving, the true tragic characters in the play, are like a diptych, a Janus
bifrons, with one looking back at the nineteenth century and the other forward to thefin de sièclecrisis that ushered in the new century. Chamberlain Alving’s gaze is fixed on the idea of the omnipotence of the self and he acts accordingly, in keeping with an irrepressible, culpable hubris, whose self-destructive and otherdestructive consequences fall
Chapter 7 THE ARROGANCE OF REASON AND THE ‘DISAPPEARANCE OF THE FIREFLIES’: from:
Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) PASOLINI PIER PAOLO
Abstract: In Pasolini it is not so much philosophical culture as literary (in this case ancient Greek drama) and anthropological culture that constitute the matrix of the work in consideration and provide the basic ideas with which the universal experiences of the limit and necessity are reinterpreted.¹ The tragic action is presented as an arrogant and
Chapter 8 THE APOCALYPSE OF A CIVILIZATION: from:
Modern European Tragedy
Author(s) GROTOWSKI JERZY
Abstract: A radical transformation in the theatrical representation of the tragic occurred in the late twentieth century, beginning in the sixties and growing out of the performance scene and avant-garde experiments. It launched a new course of the “living art” that characterized the last decades of the century and pioneered performative theatre, the modern version of the
ars unaby which the current emergence of the tragic consciousness will have to be explored.
FOREWORD from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Author(s) Clammer John
Abstract: This valuable volume brings together in one place for the first time a number of essays by one of India’s (and indeed international sociology’s) most innovative thinkers, and one moreover who is committed to erasing the boundaries between social theory and practice. Essentially what is suggested in the following pages is an approach to social knowledge and to positive social transformation that transcends the normal boundaries that so commonly separate sociology from philosophy and both from religion and spirituality. To a great extent the social sciences have failed to deliver on their Enlightenment promises. Perhaps this was too much to
Introduction from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: In the Bible we read about a woman who is wailing in the streets and her name is Wisdom.¹ She is weeping because despite her knocking we are not opening our doors. But in the human journey as well as in our contemporary world it is not only wisdom which is weeping. Knowledge is also weeping, as it has become imprisoned within a variety of structures of domination, commodification, illusion and isolation. But to know is not only to know of but to know with – a practice of knowing with which involves both self-knowledge and knowledge of the world (see
Chapter Two BEYOND WEST AND EAST: from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Evolution was once a dividing mark between the “developed us” and the “underdeveloped or primitive them,” but there have been certain foundational transformations in the theory and normative quest of evolution which challenge us to overcome both anthropocentrism and ethnocentrism. Developments in both the discourse and practice of socio-cultural evolution as well as biological and cosmic evolution point to the need for cultivating a new enlightenment and non-duality going beyond the dualism of environment and the organism, ontogenesis and socio-genesis and “us” and “them.” Evolutionary thinking as part of spencerian social darwinsim was used to rank societies in the scale
Chapter Eight RULE OF LAW AND THE CALLING OF DHARMA: from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: The classical indian traditions had a different conception of both rule and law as compared to modern western traditions. While the constraining power of legality is central to modern western traditions, in India it is moral authority which is at the core of the rule of law (lingat 1973). The classical law of india is characterized not by positive law and legality but by moral authority and duty which is called
dharma.Dharmarefers to the totality of duties which are incumbent on individuals. It also signifies eternal rules which maintain the world. The rule of law entailed in the
Chapter Ten RETHINKING PLURALISM AND RIGHTS: from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Pluralism and human rights are epochal challenges now, and they challenge established modes of discourse and practice including our conceptions of the normative. both of these face challenges of multi-dimensional transformations in self and society. A key challenge here is to broaden our conceptions and realizations of law and rights. In his critical reflection on law and society in India, Andre Béteille writes, “individual rights do not have the same depth and firmness in india, the same anchorage in its social structure, than they do in the United States” (1997, 198). But this relativization of individual right in contemporary indian
Chapter Twelve RETHINKING THE POLITICS AND ETHICS OF CONSUMPTION: from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Consumption provides us with many important challenges now. The contemporary facts of consumption urge us to rethink the ethics and politics of it.² Concern with political consumerism tends to argue how appropriate consumption linked to life-style politics can have a politically significant critical function. But there are two related problems with such a contemporary approach to consumption. First, it is concerned with consumption without relating it to production, and second, the politics of consumption in the practice of political consumerism is not accompanied by a project of ethics. The present chapter seeks to rethink the politics and ethics of consumption
Chapter Sixteen SPIRITUAL CULTIVATION FOR A SECULAR SOCIETY from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Abstract: Much water has flown down the Jordan, Jhelum, ganges, Cauvery, Mahanadi, thames, rhines and Mississippi rivers since the dawn of humanity and the independence of india, and in recent years much discussion has taken place over the nature of secularism in india, including its uses and abuses. Broadly speaking, we can classify the various contending positions on secularism in india into three approaches: a) those who defend the secular character of the Indian Republic as enshrined in the Constitution of India; b) those who oppose it on the grounds that the practice of Indian state-led secularism has been a pseudo-secularism;
Afterword from:
Knowledge and Human Liberation
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: A transformative sociology? A transformative and transforming “knowledge” of social life? These phrases are signature notions of Ananta Kumar Giri. In a string of earlier publications, he has provided sketches adumbrating these notions. Now, in the present volume, he finally has enlisted all his rich intellectual resources in order to flesh out the meaning of an active kind of “knowledge” capable of promoting human “liberation” or emancipation. As one should note, liberation for Giri does not just denote deliverance from oppressive social and political structures, but also the overcoming of inner compulsions and addictions standing in the way of genuine
Book Title: Philosophy and Anthropology-Border Crossing and Transformations
Publisher: Anthem Press
Author(s): Clammer John
Abstract: Philosophy and Anthropology: Border Crossings and Transformations is an innovative and original collection of essays exploring the relationships between philosophy and anthropology – historically and presently – and the theoretical and practical issues concerning their dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1gxpchs
Chapter 1 THE PROJECT OF PHILOSOPHICAL ANTHROPOLOGY from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Clammer John
Abstract: The notion of a philosophical anthropology has almost entirely dropped out of contemporary intellectual discourse, both in philosophy and in anthropology. Among the few places where it is alive as an active concept or form of intellectual inquiry is in Christian (mainly Roman Catholic) theology. There are reasons for this absence, which we will shortly elaborate on, but the virtual disappearance of the idea of a philosophical anthropology is an unfortunate one, as it is potentially a notion that can not only provide a bridge between anthropology and philosophy – linked as we shall see by many common concerns – but also
Chapter 5 THE ENGAGEMENT OF PHILOSOPHY AND ANTHROPOLOGY IN THE INTERPRETIVE TURN AND BEYOND: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kämpf Heike
Abstract: One of the most interesting and fruitful anthropological discussions of philosophy occurred within the so-called ‘interpretive turn’ in anthropology. This turn was inspired by philosophy and initiated a reconsideration of philosophical concepts. In particular, the reconsideration of the hermeneutic notion of ‘ understanding’ led to new anthropological readings of the works of Martin Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer and Paul Ricoeur. At the same time this anthropological discussion had its impact on philosophy. On the one hand, hermeneutic and analytic philosophy came closer together while questioning the possibilities of understanding alien cultures: Peter Winch and Richard Rorty dealt with the problem of
Chapter 7 PHILOSOPHY AS ANTHROPOCENTRISM: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Biswas Prasenjit
Abstract: The Cartesian-Kantian anthropomorphic subject represents a state of continual immanence in terms of its indefinite and infinite possibilities. The linguistic turn takes an anthropocentric form that has been embedded in the Cartesian-Kantian metaphysics of presence. Wittgenstein, especially, takes language as an enactable rule-governed activity, thereby making it immanent to the ‘lived experiences’ of the users of language. Heidegger introduces a comprehensive embeddedness of being in language and viceversa, thereby assigning it a hermeneutical closure. In such anthropomorphic and anthropocentric moves, what is lost is the very ground of reality on which language must act. A project of recovery of the
Chapter 9 DILTHEY’S THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE AND ITS POTENTIAL FOR ANTHROPOLOGICAL THEORY from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Šuber Daniel
Abstract: With some considerable delay, the German philosopher Wilhelm Dilthey (1833–1911) was, in 1986, declared the ‘new anthropological ancestor’ (Bruner 1986, 4). Although he had been acknowledged as having exerted some influence on major figures of anthropology, like Boas and Benedict well before, the recent turn to Dilthey was meant to go far beyond the historical concern. This move contrasts sharply with the result of an examination of the indexes of relevant textbooks on basic anthropological theory, where Dilthey’s name hardly ever appears. What then are the common points of contact between late twentieth-century anthropology and turn-of-the-century German philosophy? In
Chapter 14 BAKHTIN’S HERITAGE IN ANTHROPOLOGY: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Brocki Marcin
Abstract: For over thirty years, the development of theory in anthropology has been under heavy influence from literary theory, serving mostly as an inspiration in solving certain problems in the research practice of ethnography. This influence first started with the assimilation of structuralism and semiotics into anthropology, with their concept of culture as a collection of texts interacting with one another. The real interdisciplinary dialogue, however, originated with the discovery, received in the field of ethnography with much suspicion and astonishment, that the practice of anthropology is not only collecting and analysing data, but also ‘producing texts’, and that the textualization
Chapter 17 ‘ANTHROPOLOGY OF PHILOSOPHY’ IN AFRICA: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Kresse Kai
Abstract: An anthropological investigation into philosophy can provide us with insights and information about traditions of knowledge and intellectual practice elsewhere in the world, in social contexts very different from our own. The project needs to engage with – and first of all be able to identify – philosophy as part of social discourse, and as a social practice, within any given region. Here, I am carving out one particular approach about how this could work, in relation to the Swahili context and against the background of discussions in African philosophy. Philosophy, as socialized discourse and practice, overlaps with other (more established) areas
Chapter 18 ALBINOS DO NOT DIE: from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) de Pina-Cabral João
Abstract: In Mozambique one is often told things about albinos that can hardly be interpreted at face value.¹ These are not, properly speaking, fictionalized narratives of a connected series of events, but rather they are evidence of propositional attitudes pertaining to refer to statements of fact, that is, they are ‘beliefs’. Although they are not told to you as ‘lies’, the fact is that the people who narrate them are often uncertain as to whether they are true. Upon hearing them, I was immediately challenged by the following question: if these beliefs do not meet up with the test of disbelief,
Chapter 20 NOTIONS OF FRIENDSHIP IN PHILOSOPHICAL AND ANTHROPOLOGICAL THOUGHT from:
Philosophy and Anthropology
Author(s) Friese Heidrun
Abstract: Within the Western philosophical tradition, the notion of friendship indicates relations to the
self, anotherand the politicalcommunity. It is a practice constituting subjectivity, personal, partial and particularistic bonds, and at the same time it articulates specific moral/ethical expectations of behaviour and universalistic demands.¹ Friendship fosters goodness, reciprocity and generosity, entails mutual trust, solidarity and cooperation. Thus, it creates both social ties and is related to the political order of a community, its ethical prerequisites and the ways in which common matters are negotiated.
Luc Boltanski: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Luc Boltanski is widely regarded as one of the most influential French sociologists of the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries. He is one of the leading figures of the ‘pragmatic’ tradition within contemporary social and political thought. More specifically, he is – along with Laurent Thévenot – one of the founding figures of an approach that he himself characterizes as the ‘pragmatic sociology of critique’.
CHAPTER 2 Did You Say ‘Pragmatic’? from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Terzi Cédric
Abstract: Luc Boltanski’s sociology has been labelled ‘pragmatic’, and the author now uses this label to characterize his research endeavour.¹ What does this designation mean? In this chapter, we shall examine what exactly such a qualification is about, and we shall do so from a pragmatist point of view. Let us say straightaway that we do not see what is truly ‘pragmatic’ in Boltanski’s sociology.² From a pragmatist perspective, it appears as a continuation of the classical dualisms of European thought, and the critique it proposes seems to make the same mistakes as the wholesale generalizations of social theory. After having
CHAPTER 4 The Moral Idealism of Ordinary People as a Sociological Challenge: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Lemieux Cyril
Abstract: In 1987, a theoretical book that had been co-written by the sociologist Luc Boltanski and the economist and statistician Laurent Thévenot appeared in an obscure, poorly distributed collection of the Presses Universitaires de France. At first sight, its title may have sounded rather strange:
Les économies de la grandeur (Economies of Worth). What was even more disconcerting, however, was the apparent disproportion between the ordinariness of the main issues in question (that is, disputing processes in the workplace, the family, the neighbourhood, etc.) and the ambitious nature of the theoretical framework. In fact, the authors put forward a whole set
CHAPTER 5 Is There Such a Thing as a ‘Pragmatic Sociology of Critique’? from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: In the contemporary sociological literature, not only in the Francophone² world but also in Germanophone³ and Anglophone⁴ contexts, the work of Luc Boltanski is widely recognized as a major contribution to the social sciences. The value and influence of Boltanski’s writings manifest themselves in the emergence of a new paradigm: the
sociology of critiqueor, as it has been recently characterized not only by sympathetic and unsympathetic critics alike but also by the author himself, thepragmatic sociology of critique.⁵ It is true that the concept of critique plays a pivotal role in most of Boltanski’s writings.⁶ His recent book
CHAPTER 6 Strengths and Limitations of Luc Boltanski’s On Critique from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Stones Rob
Abstract: On Critiqueis an important book that deserves to be influential. In this chapter, I want to highlight the reasons for this, whilst also pointing to some limitations, and providing suggestions as to how these shortcomings might be addressed in ways that strengthen the overall project. In highlighting limitations as well as strengths I must be fair to Luc Boltanski, as he warns readers very early on that they should not expect a polished, carefully finished, product fromOn Critique. The chapters should just be read as if they were six talks, their actual genesis being even less than this
CHAPTER 7 A Renewal of Social Theory That Remains Necessary: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Wagner Peter
Abstract: Luc Boltanski and Laurent Thévenot’s
De la justification(1991) and the subsequent research programme inspired by it, now known alternatively as ‘pragmatic sociology’ or the ‘sociology of critical capacity’ (Boltanski and Thévenot, 1999), have provided a radically new approach to sociological theory and research. The programme promised to break a deadlock in theoretical debate and open new avenues in key areas of sociological inquiry, not least historical and comparative sociology. Today, in my view, some of the potential has in fact been realized, but the renewal in social theory that should have been expected to follow has not, or hardly,
CHAPTER 9 Pierre Bourdieu and the Early Luc Boltanski (1960–1975): from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Robbins Derek
Abstract: In his Foreword to Richard Nice’s translation into English of Bourdieu and Passeron’s
La Reproduction as Reproduction in Education, Society and Culture(Bourdieu and Passeron, 1977 [1970]), Tom Bottomore noted that the book expounded ‘the theoretical ideas which have guided the research on cultural reproduction over the past decade or so’ (Bourdieu and Passeron, 1977 [1970]: v) of the Centre de Sociologie Européenne (CSE) in Paris. He recognized that the book was the product of the collective activity of a group of researchers and that it demonstrated ‘the continuous interplay between theory and research’ (Bourdieu and Passeron, 1977 [1970]:
CHAPTER 10 Beyond Pragmatic Sociology: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Nachi Mohamed
Abstract: The 1980s witnessed a remarkable change in the social sciences, a significant renewal of sociological theory. In France it was an occasion to discover and appreciate, albeit with significant delay, the contribution of Anglo-Saxon sociological currents which had earlier been dismissed or underestimated, such as symbolic interactionism, ethno-methodology, and phenomenological sociology. Through the 1960s and 1970s, French sociology was limited mainly to four major currents, which Alain Touraine proposed to call ‘the four corners of sociology’, represented by Raymond Boudon, Pierre Bourdieu, Michel Crozier, and Alain Touraine himself. The debates in the social sciences during this period significantly turned around
CHAPTER 12 The Promise of Pragmatic Sociology, Human Rights, and the State from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Nash Kate
Abstract: As a sociologist working in the emerging area of the sociology of human rights, I find the approach that Luc Boltanski and his various collaborators take to cultural, moral, and political questions inspiring. There is an urgent need to develop theoretical concepts and methodologies to study human rights, which have been growing in importance as a result of the activities of transnational advocacy networks, digital communication, and the codification and enactment of international law since the end of the Cold War (see Nash, 2012). What resources do human rights offer for the critique of injustices? Are human rights contributing to
CHAPTER 14 Axel Honneth and Luc Boltanski at the Epicentre of Politics from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Basaure Mauro
Abstract: The
moral-sociological-explicative axisrepresents the conceptual effort to provide an explanation for the moral motives of subjective actions at the root of social struggles. In this theory, Honneth begins from a re-reading of Hegel and Mead and focuses on a non-utilitarian moral-sociological explanation of social conflicts, according to which the motivations for initiating, or committing to, social struggles can be
CHAPTER 17 Reflections on the Indignation of the Disprivileged and the Underprivileged from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Turner Bryan S.
Abstract: One persistent theoretical and practical problem in Marxism was to explain the failures of working-class opposition to capitalist exploitation. Karl Marx had assumed that the organized working class would eventually engage in a successful political struggle against the ruling class alongside a background of systematic crises in the economic system. A wide range of explanations as to why this transformation did not take place has been developed over the decades after Marx’s death in 1883. At the end of the nineteenth century, it appeared that the condition of the German working class had improved, suggesting that capitalism could be reformed.
CHAPTER 18 Arranging the Irreversible: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Hamilton Peter
Abstract: If Luc Boltanski’s
La condition foetale:Une sociologie de l’engendrement et de l’avortement(2004)² is a fearsome book, it is definitely not for the reasons one might expect given the subject matter. It is rather because of the simple fact that it restores a broken link: that between abortion and what it has just denied. A sociology of abortion depends on a sociology of procreation. More exactly, it means understanding abortion as a certain position in the problem opened up by procreation, as twofold natural and social processes: production of the living by the living, reproduction in the biological sense,
CHAPTER 19 Luc Boltanski and the Gift: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Silber Ilana F.
Abstract: The first section elucidates Boltanski’s understanding of the gift on the basis of his writings on this topic. Concentrated in
Love and Justice as Competences(Boltanski, 2012 [1990]), these rather brief statements mainly discuss the gift from the point of view of his conceptions of ‘competences’ and ‘regimes of social action’, as
CHAPTER 24 Sociology of Critique or Critical Theory? from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: The ‘sociology of critique’ and ‘critical theory’ offer different perspectives on the phenomenon of critique. The former approach has been developed by Luc Boltanski, as well as by other members of the Groupe de Sociologie Politique et Morale (GSPM), with the aim of providing an alternative to Pierre Bourdieu’s ‘critical sociology’. The latter approach has been developed further by Axel Honneth, who proposes a ‘theory of recognition’, and whose work descends from the tradition of the Frankfurt School. Is critique, first and foremost, an achievement of ‘ordinary’ actors or a task of theory? What is the relationship between theory and
CHAPTER 25 The Fragility of Reality: from:
The Spirit of Luc Boltanski
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Luc Boltanski is a sociologist and Directeur d’études at the École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales. Born in 1940, he is the author of 15 books, which are based on various field studies and transcend disciplinary boundaries: nursing, reproduction, abortion, the professional world of cadres, humanitarian issues, and management – to mention only a few of the topics covered in his works. His sociology focuses on the analysis of normative orders and resources mobilized by human actors in order to preserve, or challenge, particular sets of social arrangements. As reflected in the debates sparked by his ‘pragmatic turn’, the conceptual
CHAPTER ONE Between Structuralism and Theory of Practice: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Skinner Alex
Abstract: Bourdieu’s work was deeply moulded by the national intellectual milieu in which it developed, that of France in the late 1940s and 1950s, a milieu characterised by disputes between phenomenologists and structuralists. But it is not this national and cultural dimension that distinguishes Bourdieu’s writings from those of other ‘grand theorists’. Habermas and Giddens, for example, owed as much to the academic or political context of their home countries. What set Bourdieu’s approach apart from that of his German and British ‘rivals’ was a significantly stronger linkage of theoretical and empirical knowledge. Bourdieu was first and foremost an empirical sociologist,
CHAPTER THREE From Marx to Bourdieu: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Men can be distinguished from animals by consciousness, by religion, or anything else you like. They themselves begin to distinguish themselves from animals as soon as they begin to produce their means of subsistence, a step which is conditioned by their physical organization. By producing their means of subsistence men are indirectly producing their actual material life. (Marx and Engels, 2000/1977 [1846]: 177)
CHAPTER SIX Bourdieu and Nietzsche: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Rahkonen Keijo
Abstract: This chapter makes a comparison, which from a sociological perspective might appear a little surprising: it is between Pierre Bourdieu’s and Friedrich Nietzsche’s respective conceptions of ‘power’ and ‘taste’. The aim is to show that there is an interesting resemblance between the two with regard to these conceptions in general, and to ‘struggle for power’, ‘ressentiment’ and ‘will to power’ in particular, and thus to shed light on some key aspects of Bourdieu’s thinking. The order of the
dramatis personaein this analysis is no accident: Bourdieu and Nietzsche. This alludes to the fact that the discussion that follows is
CHAPTER ELEVEN Bourdieu’s Sociological Fiction: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Frère Bruno
Abstract: For nearly thirty years now, the critical sociology of Pierre Bourdieu has been used in an increasingly large number of studies in the social sciences. It is remarkable, however, that it has had a rather weak impact on my own field of research: the study of new social movements. This chapter argues that the reason for this anomaly lies with Bourdieu’s theory of habitus (a central element of Bourdieusian thought) and the particular problems that this theory poses for researchers of new social movements. As original and powerful as it can be, the theory of habitus is, first and foremost,
CHAPTER TWELVE Overcoming Semiotic Structuralism: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Kögler Hans-Herbert
Abstract: Pierre Bourdieu’s conception of habitus marks a theoretical step which no adequate understanding of social reality can ignore. By introducing habitus, Bourdieu is able both to integrate and to transcend major insights of the linguistic turn in philosophy, most prominently the idea that conscious intentional understanding necessarily relies on a host of implicit, practical, and holistic background assumptions which constitute meaning while being themselves unrepresented (Searle, 1989). The concept of habitus incorporates this idea since it shows that individual agency and its self-understanding are constituted by relying on an acquired social sense, the cognitive habitus, which defines how an agent
CHAPTER FOURTEEN Intellectual Critique and the Public Sphere: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Corcoran Steven
Abstract: In the French edition of
The Weight of the World, Bourdieu contends that the goal of his critical sociology is to ‘open up possibilities for rational action to unmake or remake what history has made’ (1999 [1993]: 187).¹ But what is ‘rational action’ in politics? And what potential contribution can intellectuals make to it? This last question is the one that I would like to address here, taking Bourdieu’s own answers to it as my starting point. The aim will not be to analyse the concrete orientation of his public interventions, but instead to understand the type of articulation between
CHAPTER FIFTEEN Practice as Temporalisation: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Adkins Lisa
Abstract: This chapter will examine the question of whether Bourdieu’s social theory can be mobilised to understand our recent and ongoing global economic crisis. This may seem an odd question to pose on many fronts, not least because – and with the exception of markets for normatively defined cultural goods¹ – Bourdieu’s corpus is rarely, if ever, called upon to engage with strictly economic processes and formations.² And this is the case despite the fact that Bourdieu (2005 [2000]) dedicated a whole volume to the study of the social structures of the economy and despite the fact that in his later,
AFTERWORD: from:
The Legacy of Pierre Bourdieu
Author(s) Susen Simon
Abstract: Those who are unfamiliar, or barely familiar, with the writings of Pierre Bourdieu will find a useful and comprehensive introduction to his work in the opening chapter, entitled ‘Between Structuralism and Theory of Practice: The Cultural Sociology of Pierre Bourdieu’. In it, Hans Joas and Wolfgang Knöbl provide us with a clear and accessible overview of some of the main philosophical and sociological themes that run through Bourdieu’s writings. Joas and Knöbl centre their analysis on five interrelated concepts that play a pivotal role in Bourdieu’s work: the concepts of (1)
practice, (2)action, (3)the social, (4)cultural sociology,
INTRODUCTION from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: What makes abstract historical interpretations authentic? This theoretical question troubled Communist Party leaders and propaganda historians in Hungary during the years that followed the restoration of dictatorship after the suppression of the anti-Stalinist uprising in October–November 1956. János Kádár’s government, which had been established only by the military might of the Soviet Union, attempted to obtain legitimacy on the basis of a curious historical argument. Meanwhile, the new Communist leadership justified the suppression of democratic and independent aspirations by claiming to protect Hungarians against the peril of counterrevolution. It built the image of October 1956 on its alleged historical
Chapter 3 LIVES: from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: The Hungarian ruling class developed the first European fascism by applying old and new means of oppression, thereby showing – for the first time – what fascism, which would wildly ravage Europe two decades later and drive millions of people to war, looked like. One can hardly find a characteristic feature of Hitler’s and Mussolini’s dictatorships which cannot immediately be found in the Hungarian fascism. The fear of Bolshevism, the ruthless oppression
Chapter 4 FUNERAL: from:
Fabricating Authenticity in Soviet Hungary
Abstract: For many decades, the Pantheon of the Labour Movement situated in the Kerepesi Cemetery of Budapest was regarded by the then ruling Hungarian Communist Party as one of its principal commemorative constructions. Nowadays, the building stands abandoned. On the one hand, while the era of the Communist politics of history seems to be over forever, this is precisely why the monument’s megalomaniac attempt to reinterpret the national past may seem familiar to us. On the other hand, this monumentality is exactly what renders the story of the pantheon distant and unfamiliar: what could be the origins of this obsession towards
1 Introduction from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: It is generally agreed that it is relatively easy to distinguish Priestly material (P)¹ from non-Priestly material (non-P) in Genesis–Numbers (Joshua).² However, when it comes to identifying the overall theology of the Priestly material, or what it might be primarily about, there is much more contention. A range of views have been proposed, primarily in articles³ and sections in books whose primary concern is mostly with one section of P⁴ or with source/redactional issues or with defining the extent or possible levels within P.⁵ Philip Jenson’s statement that “there have been surprisingly few full-scale theological studies of P in
2 The Structure of Pg from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: Various views regarding the structure of P as a whole have been proposed. All have a certain merit, not least because the P narrative material seems to contain a number of structural markers or characteristics that do not necessarily all point in the same direction or indicate the same structure.¹ These will become clear in the following selective survey of attempts at structuring P, as will the way in which each view gives importance to selective characteristic(s). In exploring these various views, it must be kept in mind that the delineation of Pg by the various scholars may not coincide
3 The Genre and Hermeneutics of Pg from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: A vital factor in any attempt to interpret Pg as a whole is the question of its nature or genre.¹ However, how exactly to describe the nature of the Priestly material (Pg) has proven to be an elusive task. The Priestly material has been described in various ways; it has been described as “
Geschichte,” and specific nuances of this such as “Geschichtserzählung” or “Ursprungsgeschichte,” as “historiography,” and as “history viewed in ritual categories.”² It has also been described in terms of “paradigm,” whether as comprising “fundamental paradigmatic constellations” or being described as “paradigmatic” narrative, “paradigmatic history,” or “myth.”³
6 Conclusion: from:
The Vision of the Priestly Narrative
Abstract: The task of this chapter is primarily to explore what the impact of Pg as a whole might have been on its original audience of the exilic/early postexilic period. However, this chapter has a double function. It also presents an integrated summary of the conclusions reached throughout this monograph concerning the meaning of Pg as a whole, interpreted in light of its genre and hermeneutics of time, as this is an integral part of unfolding how Pg might have functioned for its original audience (and indeed perhaps its ongoing readership). Exploring the possible effect Pg might have had on its
No Words: from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Poser Ruth
Abstract: The book of Ezekiel strikes us as strange. Readers find the enormous amount of violence contained in the text disturbing or even shy away from reading it altogether. The characters in the narrative appear only as people wounded, tortured, or devastated by acts of war; the catastrophe seems to have broken them all: the prophet himself, the people of Israel, the populations of surrounding nations. Even YHWH is portrayed as affected by the violence and brutality.
Fragmented Voices: from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Boase Elizabeth
Abstract: So begins the book of Lamentations (1:1), written following the Babylonian destruction of Jerusalem (586 BCE) and arguably one of the clearest expressions of trauma literature in the Hebrew Bible. The image of the isolated and bereaved woman, violated, degraded, lacking anyone to comfort her, represents well the traumatic impact of war and devastation. Metaphorically rich, this personification of the city as woman—Daughter Zion—holds in tension both the personal, individual reality of suffering and a recognition of communal suffering.
Daughter Babylon Raped and Bereaved (Isaiah 47): from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Frechette Christopher G.
Abstract: In Isa 47 YHWH declares that violence shall befall Babylon, which is characterized as “virgin Daughter Babylon” and “daughter Chaldea”¹ and referred to in this essay simply as “Daughter Babylon.” In the Hebrew Bible, cities are in many cases anthropomorphized as female within discourse that represents interaction between the city and YHWH, and such interaction may be either favorable or unfavorable for the city.² In Isa 47:3 YHWH declares to Daughter Babylon, “Your nakedness shall be uncovered, and your shame shall be seen. I will take vengeance”; 47:9 adds, “both these things shall come upon you in a moment, in
Reflections on the Prose Sermons in the Book of Jeremiah: from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Stulman Louis
Abstract: At the same time, biblical scholars have long studied literary artifacts riddled with intimate and collective
Toward a Pastoral Reading of 2 Corinthians as a Memoir of PTSD and Healing from:
Bible through the Lens of Trauma
Author(s) Clark Peter Yuichi
Abstract: When people endure times of crisis or trauma, they often search for meaning and hope by engaging in a bidirectional reading of texts. One direction involves hearing, reading, or witnessing the stories of others in analogous circumstances. Doing so can help people to know that they are not alone in their suffering, thus fulfilling Donne’s axiom that “no man is an island, entire of itself.”¹ The other direction points toward texts and rituals in one’s religious faith and spiritual practices, seeking a linkage between one’s own story and a larger, transcendent story: one that recounts what is sacred or ultimate.
CHAPTER 1 “The Body of This Death”: from:
Light and Death
Abstract: In Romans 7:24, Saint Paul, lamenting the conflict between his enlightened mind and his sinful flesh, utters a cry that has echoed down the centuries: “O wretched man that I am! Who shall deliver me from the body of this death?” Almost predictably, Paul’s moving outcry attracted the sustained attention of the poets of early modern England, conspicuous among them Spenser, Donne, and Milton—predictably, not only because of Paul’s anguish but also because of its unusual phrasing and figuration. Popular English translations of the Bible, such as Geneva and King James, in accord with the Latin Vulgate and the
CHAPTER 4 Connecting the Cultural Dots: from:
Light and Death
Abstract: Changing focus, this chapter engages the history and structure of analogy. The change is pronounced—from sin and death to rhetoric, from poetry and belief to science and methodology. In manner, the chapter is historical, analytical, and abstract, in effect a further shift. These changes threaten to confirm the very chasm between science and the humanities against which I argue. Yet my first three chapters have treated matters that relevantly recur in this one, such as physical and intellectual vision, body and mind, imagination, knowledge, figurative illumination, and Neoplatonism. More importantly, the argument of this chapter enables a theorized broadening
CHAPTER 6 Analogy, Proportion, and Death in Donne’s Anniversaries from:
Light and Death
Abstract: Ample evidence exists that Donne read at least one, and possibly two, of Kepler’s earlier writings on astronomy, that he actually met Kepler, and that he probably knew, or heard, at some point about Kepler’s experiments concerning vision. Eventually, he was at least aware of Kepler’s
Harmonice mundi. My Introduction has treated these observations in greater detail. I reemphasize here, however, that my present concern is with the larger cultural pertinence for Donne’sAnniversariesof Kepler’s thinking, which is broadly representative of a large body of thought “at the dawn of modern science,” rather than with the direct influence of
Book Title: New Thinking in Islam-The Jihad for Democracy, Freedom and Women’s Rights
Publisher: The Gingko Library
Author(s): Ormsby Eric
Abstract: In
Rethinking Islam, Katajun Amirpur argues that the West's impression of Islam as a backward-looking faith, resistant to post-Enlightenment thinking, is misleading and-due to its effects on political discourse-damaging. Introducing readers to key thinkers and activists-such as Abu Zaid, a free-thinking Egyptian Qur'an scholar; Abdolkarim Soroush, an academic and former member of Khomeini's Cultural Revolution Committee; and Amina Wadud, an American feminist who was the first woman to lead the faithful in Friday Prayer-Amirpur reveals a powerful yet lesser-known tradition of inquiry and dissent within Islam, one that is committed to democracy and human rights. By examining these and many other similar figures' ideas, she reveals the many ways they reject fundamentalist assertions and instead call for a diversity of opinion, greater freedom, and equality of the sexes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h4mh5h
2 Islamic Reformers Today from:
New Thinking in Islam
Abstract: Kadivar’s main thesis, which identifies him as a post-Islamist intellectual, can be summarized as follows: people expect that religion will put principles and values within their grasp while practical matters belong more properly to the realm of so-called human experience – a formulation that may be code for secular norms.
CHAPITRE 1 KANTISME ET COMMUNICATION: from:
Perspectives critiques en communication
Author(s) Kane Oumar
Abstract: Pour étudier Kant, il faut d’abord se rappeler que le philosophe de Königsberg a été un des philosophes les plus importants du XVIII
esiècle, le siècle des Lumières, caractérisé par d’importants bouleversements tant sur le plan politique ou scientifique que dans le domaine du symbolique, celui des représentations que les acteurs sociaux
CHAPITRE 6 AXEL HONNETH ET LA THÉORIE DE LA RECONNAISSANCE SOCIALE from:
Perspectives critiques en communication
Author(s) Rueff Julien
Abstract: Les chapitres précédents, en offrant un aperçu des recherches de Max Horkheimer, de Theodor Adorno, de Walter Benjamin et de Jürgen Habermas, constituent une introduction à ce que d’aucuns appellent « la première et la deuxième génération » de l’École de Francfort. Dans la continuité de ce mouvement argumentatif, nous entendons à notre tour apporter des éclaircissements sur ladite « troisième génération » de l’École de Francfort, en nous concentrant particulièrement sur la philosophie sociale de l’actuel directeur de l’Institut de Recherche Sociale de Francfort : Axel Honneth. Ce chapitre ne prétend donc aucunement dresser un portrait d’ensemble de la
Book Title: Enjeux et défis de la formation à l'enseignement professionnel- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): COULOMBE SANDRA
Abstract: Depuis plusieurs années, les milieux politique et éducatif ont mis en œuvre différentes avenues pour valoriser la formation professionnelle au Québec. À l’automne 2003, le baccalauréat en enseignement professionnel devient un programme de 120 crédits et la seule voie d’accès au brevet d’enseignement. Contrairement aux autres secteurs de formation à l’enseignement, les étudiants de ce secteur occupent déjà, à 81 %, un poste d’enseignant dans un centre de formation professionnelle, où ils ont été recrutés sur la base de leur expertise de métier ; ce n’est qu’une fois en poste qu’ils amorcent leur formation universitaire. Cette réalité et les changements politico-éducatifs ont représenté des défis pour l’implantation du baccalauréat en enseignement professionnel pour toutes les universités offrant le programme et pour tous les acteurs impliqués dans cette réforme. Ce collectif est le fruit d’une rencontre entre les auteurs et des chercheurs préoccupés par les défis de la formation à l’enseignement professionnel. Les perspectives multiples et les regards variés proposés par les chercheurs dans cet ouvrage soulèvent des enjeux émanant de la complexe réalité vécue par ces enseignants-étudiants.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1h64m82
CHAPITRE 1 La formation professionnelle from:
Enjeux et défis de la formation à l'enseignement professionnel
Author(s) Gagnon Richard
Abstract: La formation professionnelle a-t-elle pour but de promouvoir la culture du domaine de formation, de la transmettre ? Et laquelle, le cas échéant ? Celle-ci s’accorde-t-elle aux milieux de pratique bien variés ? Yen a-t-il plus d’une ? Met-elle en valeur le travail humain comme elle le devrait ? Pour tenter de répondre à ces questions, un cadre conceptuel visant à établir une typologie des métiers dans une perspective épistémologique (Gagnon, 2013) a été utilisé pour définir et caractériser ce que nous avons appelé des « cultures-types » (Lavoie, 2013), et ce, à partir du sens et des diverses connotations
CHAPITRE 4 Une communauté de pratique en ligne pour soutenir les nouveaux enseignants en formation professionnelle from:
Enjeux et défis de la formation à l'enseignement professionnel
Author(s) Zourhlal Ahmed
Abstract: Au Québec, depuis quelques années, les travaux de recherche et les réflexions scientifiques sur les conditions d’entrée dans la profession enseignante en FP et la transition professionnelle, vécue par les nouveaux ensei gnants de ce secteur de formation, progressent. Des recherches de type explo ratoire ont décrit les portraits de ces enseignants (Balleux, 2006, 2011) et leur cheminement professionnel (Boucher, 2004). D’autres recherches qualitatives ont mis en lumière les facteurs d’attrition des enseignants en FP (Loignon, 2006), le processus de construction d’une double identité professionnelle (Gaudreault, 2011) et le rôle des valeurs dans cette construction identitaire (Gagné, 2015). Finalement, des
CHAPITRE 5 Le processus didactique en enseignement professionnel from:
Enjeux et défis de la formation à l'enseignement professionnel
Author(s) Alexandre Marie
Abstract: Au cours des 10 prochaines années, il y aura près de 1,4 million d’emplois à pourvoir au Québec (Ministère de l’Emploi et de la Solidarité sociale [MESS], 2013). Les programmes d’études de la formation professionnelle au secondaire et ceux de la formation technique au collégial sont axés sur une recherche constante « d’adéquation entre les compétences acquises et les compétences recherchées sur le marché du travail » (Ministère de l’Éducation, du Loisir et du Sport [MELS], 2010, p. 2). La formation professionnelle et technique se distingue par ses finalités, la spécificité des contenus en jeu ainsi que par les caractéristiques
CHAPITRE 10 Une enquête sur la formation à l’enseignement professionnel from:
Enjeux et défis de la formation à l'enseignement professionnel
Author(s) Tardif Marc
Abstract: Le baccalauréat de 120 crédits de formation à l’enseignement professionnel est implanté dans 6 universités québécoises depuis septembre 2003. La Table MELS-universités souhaitait faire le bilan de l’implantation de ce programme. À cet effet, elle a formé un groupe de réflexion sur la formation à l’enseignement professionnel (appelé le Groupe de réflexion ci-après), qui a mené une vaste enquête au printemps 2011 auprès de 5 groupes de répondants que nous nommons les actifs, les diplômés, les abandons, les directions et les intervenants. En tout, plus de 1350 personnes ont participé à cet te enquête.
Book Title: The Resounding Soul-Reflections on the Metaphysics and Vivacity of the Human Person
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Kimbriel Samuel
Abstract: It is surely not coincidental that the term “soul" should mean not only the centre of a creature’s life and consciousness, but also a thing or action characterized by intense vivacity (“that bike’s got soul!"). It also seems far from coincidental that the same contemporary academic discussions that have largely cast aside the language of “soul" in their quest to define the character of human mental life should themselves be so – how to say it? – bloodless, so lacking in soul. This volume arises from the opposite premise, namely that the task of understanding human nature is bound up with and in important respects dependent upon the more critical task of learning to be fully human, of learning to have soul. The papers collected here are derived from a conference in Oxford sponsored by the Centre of Theology and Philosophy and together explore the often surprising landscape that emerges when human consciousness is approached from this angle. Drawing upon literary, philosophical, theological, historical, and musical modes of analysis, the essays of this volume vividly remind the reader of the power of the ancient language of soul over against contemporary impulses to reduce, fragment, and overly determine human selfhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hd17z7
Introduction from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Lee Eric Austin
Abstract: Such language is one of many indications hidden within modern life that, whatever one may think in the clamorous halls of the academy
abouthuman nature, there are certain practices of humanity with which we are intertwined in daily existence. When faced with one another,
4 The Psychology of Cosmopolitics from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Milbank John
Abstract: But I would argue that this is a mistaken strategy. Outside a theological or a metaphysical purview, mind is actually indefensible and the human properly evaporates. Instead, the theologian needs to go for broke at the outset: soul is far more arguable than mind,
7 Transcending the Body/Soul Distinction through the Perspective of Maximus the Confessor’s Anthropology from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Mitralexis Sotiris
Abstract: Does the question of the soul
alwaysandnecessarilyentail the dualistic dichotomy so characteristic of the body/soul discourse? And, if we do accept the existence of immortal souls and the prevalence of free will, how can these two coincide? How can the soul of a human person possessing a truly free will becompulsorilyeternal? In this article I will address these two different but interconnected questions through examination of selected passages from Maximus the Confessor’s writings, in an attempt to trace possible answers.
8 Nous (Energeia) and Kardia (Dynamis) in the Holistic Anthropology of St. Gregory Palamas from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Tănase Nichifor
Abstract: Athonite spirituality of the fourteenth century is situated at the confluence of a theology of divine names already present in the Old Testament and of the ancient practice of monastic traditions, and is also illustrated by the writings of Evagrius and Ps.-Macarius. Hesychasm provides a deep, spiritual theological meaning by grafting the uncreated energies and a single word of prayer onto a theological conception of divine glory. Hesychastic spirituality is “able to assimilate and integrate creatively, as in the case of Evagrius, for whom the mystical tendencies are colored by Neoplatonism and Stoicism.”¹
9 Souls, Minds, Bodies, and Planets from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Midgley Mary
Abstract: “Mind” and “matter,” conceived as separate in this way, are extreme abstractions. These
11 Difficult Conversion: from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Baker Anthony D.
Abstract: When the character Prologue comes to the stage in Ben Jonson’s
Staple of News, he delivers an injunction at the bidding, he claims, of the playwright, that the audience mark “a difference ‘twixt Poetique elves, and Poets,” as something like the difference between imitators and the real thing:
12 Both, Between, and Beyond: from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Wilson L. C.
Abstract: Separated by centuries, but united by their faith, and a certain kind of idiosyncratic genius, both Evagrius of Pontus and Søren Kierkegaard developed the traditional concept of “the soul” within anthropologies grounded in their dynamic metaphysics. Each posited a tripartite composition of the human being, consisting of body, mind/soul, and soul/spirit. Despite the variable terminology used by the thinkers (and their translators), both employed a “third term” to designate the relation between the person’s corporeal and incorporeal aspects: a relation that is, itself, constitutive of the character of one’s being and a litmus test for one’s moral and spiritual health.
15 Music and Liminal Ethics: from:
The Resounding Soul
Author(s) Stone-Davis Ferdia J.
Abstract: This article takes as its starting-point the conception of the soul as “the medium in which we dwell as human beings.” It also acknowledges that this dwelling occurs relationally, since it is only in response to and in dialogue with an environment that a “soulful reality” can emerge. It is on this basis that a consideration of music is undertaken. Music operates by means of thresholds, encouraging a certain porosity that mediates notions of “inner” and “outer” in a unique way, and facilitating the development of the subject as both “interior” and “exterior,” both “active” and “passive,” as both “giver”
“I am because we are”: from:
I Am Because We Are
Abstract: The volume you hold in your hands offers itself as a highly selective overview of a central tradition of black philosophy, a tradition extending over more than five thousand years and stretching geographically from Africa to the Caribbean and North America.¹ This tradition includes a rich diversity of texts, including the Egyptian
Book of Coming Forth by Day;essays on negritude by Léopold Sédar Senghor and Wole Soyinka; practical reflections on revolution, political reform, and the relation between culture and identity in texts by Julius nyerere, Amilcar Cabral, Malcolm X, and Frantz Fanon; and sophisticated proposals for the transformation of
Consciencism (1964) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) NKRUMAH KWAME
Abstract: Practice without thought is blind; thought without practice is empty. The three segments of African society which I specified in the last chapter, the traditional, the Western, and the Islamic, coexist uneasily; the principles ani mating them are often in conflict with one another. I have in illustration tried to show how the principles which inform capitalism are in conflict with the socialist egalitarianism of the traditional African society.
Identity and Dignity in the Context of the National Liberation Struggle (1972) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) CABRAL AMILCAR
Abstract: An objective analysis of imperialism insofar as it is a fact or a “natural” historical phenomenon, indeed “necessary” in the context of the type of economic political evolution of an important part of humanity, reveals that imperialist rule, with all its train of wretchedness, of pillage, of crime and of destruction of human and cultural values, was not just a negative reality. The vast accumulation of capital in half-a-dozen
White Racism and Black Consciousness (1971) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) BIKO STEVE
Abstract: “No race possesses the monopoly of beauty, intelligence, force, and there is room for all of us at the rendezvous of victory.” I do not think Aimé Césaire was thinking about South Africa when he said these words. The whites in this country have placed themselves on a path of no return. So blatantly exploitative in terms of the mind and body is the practice of white racism that one wonders if the interests of blacks and whites in this country have not become so mutually exclusive as to exclude the possibility of there being “room for all of us
from Myth, Literature, and the African World (1976) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) SOYINKA WOLE
Abstract: The question must now be confronted: How comes it then that, despite the extolled self-apprehending virtues of these and other works, it is possible to entertain a hostile attitude towards the programmatic summation in the secular vision of negritude? There is none of these works whose ideals may not be interpreted as the realization of the principles of race-retrieval which are embodied in the concept of negritude, yet negritude continues to arouse more than a mere semantic impatience among the later generation of African writers and intellectuals, in addition to—let this be remembered—serious qualifications of or tactical withdrawal
Person and Community: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) GYEKYE KWAME
Abstract: The most appropriate type of relation that should exist between the individual and society has been an intractable problem for social and political philosophy. The problem arises because we believe, on one hand, that the individual human being has autonomy, freedom, and dignity—values that are considered most worthwhile and ought therefore to be respected by the society; we believe, on the other hand, that the individual not only is a natural member of the human society but needs society and all that it makes available for the realization of the individual’s potential, and for living a life that is
(Re) constituting the Cosmology and Sociocultural Institutions of Òyò-Yorùbá: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) OYĔWÙMÍ OYÈRÓNKÉ
Abstract: Indisputably, gender has been a fundamental organizing principle in Western societies.¹ Intrinsic to the conceptualization of gender is a dichotomy in which male and female, man and woman, are constantly and binarily ranked, both in relationship to and against each other. It has been well documented that the categories of male and female in Western social practice are not free of hierarchical associations and binary oppositions in which the male implies privilege and the female subordination. It is a duality based on a perception of human sexual dimorphism inherent in the definition of gender. Yorùbá society, like many other societies
Introduction from:
I Am Because We Are
Abstract: In the texts from the caribbean included here, the generative themes of African philosophy find expression in the context of the black diaspora forced by the Atlantic slave trade. The ontological emphasis on a relational con ception of reality plays a particularly important role in helping define the black community as something distinct from the European community of slaveholders. In turn, the Caribbean philosophical tradition presented here devotes much attention to the issues of constructing notions both of identity and self-determination and of culture and ethos within the framework of the black community. Thus the relational humanism so characteristic of
from Discourse on Colonialism (1955) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) CÉSAIRE AIMÉ
Abstract: The fact is that the so-called european civilization—“Western” civilization—as it has been shaped by two centuries of bourgeois rule, is incapable of solving the two major problems to which its existence has given rise: the problem of the proletariat and the colonial problem; that europe is unable to justify itself either before
Black Power, a Basic Understanding (1969) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) RODNEY WALTER
Abstract: Black Power is a doctrine about black people, for black people, preached by black people. I’m putting it to my black brothers and sisters that the color of our skins is the most fundamental thing about us. I could have chosen to talk about people of the same island, or the same religion, or the same class—but instead I have chosen skin color as essentially the most binding factor in our world. In so doing, I am not saying that is the way things ought to be. I am simply recognizing the real world—that is the way things
The Shadow of the Whip: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) HODGE MERLE
Abstract: The man-woman relationship is nowhere a straightforward, uncomplicated one—it is always perhaps the most vulnerable, the most brittle of human relationships. And in the caribbean this relationship has been adversely affected by certain factors of our historical development, notably, I think, by the legacy of violence and disruption with which our society has never adequately come to terms.
from The Racial Contract (1997) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) MILLS CHARLES W.
Abstract: If the epistemology of the signatories, the agents, of the racial contract requires evasion and denial of the realities of race, the epistemology of the victims, the objects, of the racial contract is, unsurprisingly, focused on these realities themselves. (so there is a reciprocal relationship, the racial contract tracking white moral/political consciousness, the reaction to the racial contract tracking nonwhite moral/political consciousness and stimulating a puzzled investigation of that white moral/political consciousness.) The term “standpoint theory” is now routinely used to signify the notion that in understanding the workings of a system of oppression, a perspective from the bottom up
The General Character of Afro-Caribbean Philosophy (2000) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) HENRY PAGET
Abstract: There are idealist views of philosophy that see it as an affirmation of the autonomy of a thinking subject. As the primary instrument of this absolute subject, philosophy shares in its autonomy and therefore is a discipline that rises above the determinations of history and everyday life. The distinguishing characteristics of Afro-Caribbean philosophy do not support this view. Here we find a tradition of philosophy so indelibly marked by the forces of an imperial history, and by its intertextual relations with neighboring discourses, that it is necessary to begin with a general characterization of philosophy that is more appropriate to
On How We Mistook the Map for the Territory, and Reimprisoned Ourselves In Our Unbearable Wrongness Of Being, Of Desêtre: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) WYNTER SYLVIA
Abstract: The emergence of the Black studies movement in its original thrust, before its later cooption into the mainstream of the very order of knowledge whose “truth” in “some abstract universal sense” it had arisen to contest, was inseparable from the parallel emergence of the Black Aesthetic /Black Arts movements and the central reinforcing relationship that had come to exist between them. like the latter two movements, the struggle to institute Black studies programs and departments in mainstream academia had also owed its momentum to the eruption of the separatist “Black Power” thrust of the civil rights movement. It, too, had
Does Race Antipathy Serve Any Good Purpose? (1914) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) DU BOIS W. E. B.
Abstract: The difficulty with this theory is that it does not square with the facts: race antipathy is not instinctive but a matter of careful education. Black and white children play together gladly and know no prejudice until it is implanted precept upon precept and by strong social pressure; and when it is so implanted it is just as strong in cases where there is no physical difference as it
Feminism: from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) HOOKS BELL
Abstract: We live in a world in crisis—a world governed by politics of domination, one in which the belief in a notion of superior and inferior and its concomitant ideology—that the superior should rule over the inferior—affects the lives of all people everywhere, whether poor or privileged, literate or illiterate. Systematic dehumanization, worldwide famine, ecological devastation, industrial contamination, and the possibility of nuclear destruction are realities which remind us daily that we are in crisis. Contemporary feminist thinkers often cite sexual politics as the origin of this crisis. They point to the insistence on difference as that factor
Learning to Talk of Race (1992) from:
I Am Because We Are
Author(s) WEST CORNEL
Abstract: What happened in Los Angeles this past April was neither a race riot nor a class rebellion. Rather, this monumental upheaval was a multiracial, trans class, and largely male display of justified social rage. For all its ugly, xeno phobic resentment, its air of adolescent carnival, and its downright barbaric behavior, it signified the sense of powerlessness in American society. Glib attempts to reduce its meaning to the pathologies of the black underclass, the criminal actions of hoodlums, or the political revolt of the oppressed urban masses miss the mark. Of those arrested, only 36 percent were black, more than
Book Title: Fueling Culture-101 Words for Energy and Environment
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Yaeger Patricia
Abstract: How has our relation to energy changed over time? What differences do particular energy sources make to human values, politics, and imagination? How have transitions from one energy source to another—from wood to coal, or from oil to solar to whatever comes next—transformed culture and society? What are the implications of uneven access to energy in the past, present, and future? Which concepts and theories clarify our relation to energy, and which just get in the way? Fueling Culture offers a compendium of keywords written by scholars and practitioners from around the world and across the humanities and social sciences. These keywords offer new ways of thinking about energy as both the source and the limit of how we inhabit culture, with the aim of opening up new ways of understanding the seemingly irresolvable contradictions of dependence upon unsustainable energy forms. Fueling Culture brings together writing that is risk-taking and interdisciplinary, drawing on insights from literary and cultural studies, environmental history and ecocriticism, political economy and political ecology, postcolonial and globalization studies, and materialisms old and new. Keywords in this volume include: Aboriginal, Accumulation, Addiction, Affect, America, Animal, Anthropocene, Architecture, Arctic, Automobile, Boom, Canada, Catastrophe, Change, Charcoal, China, Coal, Community, Corporation, Crisis, Dams, Demand, Detritus, Disaster, Ecology, Electricity, Embodiment, Ethics, Evolution, Exhaust, Fallout, Fiction, Fracking, Future, Gender, Green, Grids, Guilt, Identity, Image, Infrastructure, Innervation, Kerosene, Lebenskraft, Limits, Media, Metabolism, Middle East, Nature, Necessity, Networks, Nigeria, Nuclear, Petroviolence, Photography, Pipelines, Plastics, Renewable, Resilience, Risk, Roads, Rubber, Rural, Russia, Servers, Shame, Solar, Spill, Spiritual, Statistics, Surveillance, Sustainability, Tallow, Texas, Textiles, Utopia, Venezuela, Whaling, Wood, Work For a full list of keywords in and contributors to this volume, please go to: http://ow.ly/4mZZxV
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1hfr0s3
Introduction from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Wenzel Jennifer
Abstract: One of the first acts of armed struggle undertaken by Umkhonto we Sizwe (MK), the military wing of the African National Congress (ANC) that launched on December 16, 1961, was the dynamiting of an electrical pylon in Durban and a power station near Port Elizabeth.¹ Launched with a series of coordinated attacks, the sabotage campaign of 1961–63—whose targets included major infrastructure as well as pass offices and other government buildings—resulted in the arrest of Nelson Mandela and other ANC leaders, who were charged with sabotage and treason and sentenced to life in prison. When the anti-apartheid struggle
Aboriginal from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Cariou Warren
Abstract: When we think of Aboriginal people in the context of fuel, one common image is of Aboriginal protestors voicing resistance to energy projects like PIPELINES, DAMS, and uranium mines. One reason for the prevalence and the visibility of such protests is that Aboriginal people are disproportionately affected by energy megaprojects—in fact, it is difficult to find a megaproject that has
notdisplaced indigenous people or in some way threatened their cultural and physical survival. This situation can hardly be accidental. Low population densities, ongoing histories of colonial disempowerment, and the existence of alternate (noncapitalist) value systems within Aboriginal communities
Affect from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Schneider-Mayerson Matthew
Abstract: We must internalize the externalities. By this I mean not that we must reform neoliberal capitalism so that global markets account for pesky “externalities” like a functional biosphere but that we must internalize and embody the consequences of our heretofore disastrous ENERGY choices. Not as theater or exercise but as a step toward action.
Anthropocene 1 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: The International Union of Geological Sciences (IUGS) names the current epoch the Holocene (“entirely recent”), which began about 11,700 years ago, after the last major ice age (Stromberg 2013). Many students of the Earth’s climate argue that, in view of human effects on the biosphere, this name is no longer adequate. They suggest that we may have entered a new geological epoch when humanity acts on the planet as a geophysical force: the Anthropocene. The first statement in this regard was made jointly by Paul J. Crutzen, a Nobel Prize–winning chemist from the Max Planck Institute, and Eugene F.
Anthropocene 2 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Nixon Rob
Abstract: For a growing chorus of scientists, the Holocene is history. Through our collective actions we have jolted the planet into a new, unprecedented epoch, the Anthropocene, which, according to one influential view, dates back to the late-eighteenth-century beginnings of the Industrial Revolution. The ecologist Eugene Stoermer coined the term
Anthropocene(age of humans) in 2000, and the Nobel Prize–winning atmospheric chemist Paul Crutzen quickly popularized its core assertion that for the first time in Earth’s history, a sentient species,Homo sapiens, has become not just a biomorphic but a geomorphic force. The grand species narrative that drives the Anthropocene
Canada from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dobson Kit
Abstract: Canada offers a case study in what it means to quite literally fuel culture. Since its colonization by European settlers, Canada has built an economy around the extraction of resources destined to feed colonial capitals. In its early days, Canada simply exported whatever was wanted in Europe (furs, mostly). Economist and historian Harold Innis’s now-classic articulation of the staples thesis holds that Canada developed as it did because of its grounding in the export of staple goods like fur, fish, and other raw materials. Innis maintains in
The Fur Trade in Canada(1930) that “energy in the colony” of early
Catastrophe from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Aradau Claudia
Abstract: Invocations of fear, attacks, and adversaries have long been characterized as security imaginaries. More recently, the prospect of catastrophic disruption has led security professionals across the Western world to draw up new scenarios of the worst still to come and to prepare exercises for inhabiting the catastrophic futures they have imagined. More established threats insidiously morph into unexpected, unknowable, and unpredictable catastrophic events that can erupt anytime, anywhere. Over the past few decades, security has come to be appended to almost everything: human security, food security, water security, energy security, climate security, GENDER security, cyber security, data security, and so
Charcoal from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Irr Caren
Abstract: While grilling outdoors is a nostalgic leisure activity pursued by many Westerners, WOOD is the primary fuel of the poor throughout the developing world—especially in sub-Saharan Africa where it is mainly used for cooking. The World Future Council estimates that 80 percent of Africans rely on biomass (wood and charcoal) for their energy needs. The bulk of biomass energy involves combustion of unprocessed fuelwood, but a significant and growing percentage results from charcoal burning in urban settings. Producing charcoal requires burning several times as much per unit of energy as one uses when burning fuelwood directly; charcoal is inefficient
China 2 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Zhang Amy
Abstract: Demand for ENERGY requires a constant search for new territories of extraction. China’s ever-expanding economy has turned to refuse and debris as energy sources. Waste-toenergy (WTE) incineration, which burns garbage to generate energy, carries the promise of transforming trash, previously a constant reminder of the crisis of consumption, into a new power source. What WTE has produced, however, is less an alternative ENERGY RE GIME than a new rationale for current consumptive practices.
Coal from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dawson Ashley
Abstract: Coal is the big dirty secret of our time. Although coal-fired power plants generate more than 50 percent of ELECTRICITY in the United States, few Americans think about coal when they stop to reflect on where their power comes from (Bob Johnson 2010). The tense geopolitics of oil attracts many more headlines than coal, yet 35 percent of the world’s electricity is currently generated by coal power, and developing nations such as CHINA and India bring hundreds of pollution-belching, coal-fired power plants online each year. When we turn on our sleek iPads and MacBooks, we seldom consider that the ENERGY
Corporation from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Pendakis Andrew
Abstract: An ambiguity has clouded our understanding of the corporation ever since Stewart Kyd’s 1793 treatise distinguished between the corporation as a stable juridico-material entity and the process (of incorporation) by which the corporation gains its unique legal prerogative. Incorporation, however, is never mechanically anterior to the corporate form, per se, but instead its very essence: a dynamic, precarious activity characterized by a desire for what Kyd called “perpetual succession,” an existence projected aggressively onto a temporal horizon limited only by the criterion of profit (Kyd 1793, 6). The corporation is a “living being” that combines Spinoza’s
conatus—the impulse to
Demand from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Walker Gordon
Abstract: In borrowing the physicists’ definition in order to understand the historic and ongoing dynamics of energy demand, we need a broad interpretation of
work—one that includes practices of sociability, having fun, growing up and growing old, and eating and sleeping, along with work in the more conventional sense of production, employment, and labor. Most social practices generate
Detritus from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Chari Sharad
Abstract: Oil is literally rot. As biomass decomposing over millions of years, oil is the rot of ages, and yet it has become the fuel we cannot yet do without. This dialectic of protracted ruination and fatal promise crystallizes the ethos of our time. If the late-nineteenth and early-twentieth-century moment that inaugurated the age of oil was also, at least in some places, a time of modernist hope for human liberation against the specter of annihilation, the present appears more obviously marked by proliferating decay, desperate walling-in from inequality, political discourse utterly disengaged from arts of survival, and painful archiving of
Disaster from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Colebrook Claire
Abstract: Disaster films frame life and death situations in such a way as to sharpen the meaning of life. In small-scale films such as
The Poseidon Adventure(1972),The Towering Inferno(1974), or evenJaws(1975), a local threat drives characters into familial or tribal collectives, all focused on an exit strategy, with key characters playing out both romance and villain plots. In more recent end-of-the-world films like the viral pandemics 28Days Later(2002), 28Weeks Later(2007), orContagion(2011), the very survival of humanity and civilization is at stake. Today, in a world of widespread CATASTROPHE, disaster provides
Ecology from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Morton Timothy
Abstract: When we divide the world into the categories
natureandculture, we perform the quintessential gesture of modernity. But modernity is predicated on the ecological emergency that has given rise to a new geological epoch: the A NTHROPOCENE. “Modernity” is how the Anthropocene has appeared to us historically thus far. Dividing the world into NATURE and culture is precisely anti-ecological insofar as it participates in the logistics that enabled humans to act as a geophysical force on a planetary scale. The Anthropocene is the moment when Western philosophy restricted itself to the (human) subject-world correlate (Meillassoux 2008, 5). This self-imposed
Embodiment from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Johnson Bob
Abstract: Hot yoga emblematizes who we are as a people—it is both metonym and exaggeration of the modern condition. The wild excess of steam heat, the span of vinyl-wood flooring, the plate glass walls and mirrors, and the textures of spandex, polyester, and PVC mats immerse the modern body in a festival of tactile and visual sensations that trace back to the pleasures of combusted carbon. Here, as
Energopolitics from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Boyer Dominic
Abstract: In Iceland, in the dead of winter, you can hike across barren fractal plains of volcanic rock, covered with crusts of ice and lashed with snow. But go with a guide. Because beneath these plains churns water-wishing-to-become-steam, containing ENERGY enough to power an entire country, with plenty heat left over to scald an errant traveler. The whole landscape simmers and plumes. A geothermal spring in the wilderness is one of life’s miracles. Lush moss thrives improbably in the space where bubbling water ends and ice begins.
Energy from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: In Aristotle’s unusual and tragic sense of motion, as the “actuality of a potential, as such” (Kosman 1969, 57; see also Sachs n. d.), we are on the way to our own destruction, even if in slow motion beyond a human scale of time. The hope that animates Patricia Yaeger’s urgent injunction to examine our “energy unconscious” (2011, 306) is that, by bringing energy into cultural awareness, we might be able to fashion forms of collective life and patterns of energy consumption that avert this calamity.
Evolution from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Wald Priscilla
Abstract: Debates surrounding biological theories of evolution are evident in the multiple meanings of the word itself, with its etymology haunting its subsequent meanings.
The Oxford English Dictionaryoffers its etymology in the “action of unrolling a scroll,” a “lapse of time,” and a “tactical manoeuver to effect a change of formation.”¹ Revelation and deliberation survive in its earliest incarnations. Darwin did not useevolutionin the first edition ofOn the Origin of Species, yet as James T. Costa points out in his introduction, he gave it the last word—literally—when he concluded that edition with a poetic meditation
Exhaustion from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Berardi Franco
Abstract: Modern culture valorizes ENERGY, vitality, and expansive potency. In biopolitical terms, we may say that
energolatria—the worship of energy—is another name for modernity. The defining characteristic of modern bourgeois economy is the imperative of growth, which shapes aesthetics, ethics, and political strategies. Expansion is the immanent dynamic of modern capitalism. The lack of growth, by contrast, is associated with exhaustion and all of its negative connotations.
Fallout from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Masco Joseph
Abstract: In his 1964 film, Red Desert, Michelangelo Antonioni depicts a terrifying conundrum of late modernity: a world of technological marvels, whose price is local culture and the environment. The film is set in an Italian industrial town, where Monica Vitti plays the increasingly distraught wife of a petrochemical executive. The film veers from an examination of Italian industrial design—the beautiful sculptural forms enabled by PLASTICS, steel, and glass that constitute a radical break with local craft traditions grounded in organic materials—to the natural landscape destroyed by industrial production. The characters inhabit spectacular high modernist living spaces but traverse
Fiction from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Macdonald Graeme
Abstract: Like the first law of thermodynamics, literary fiction requires momentum. Fiction relies on propulsive devices: basic units of charge that power action, event, and consciousness, calibrated by laws of narrative motion and physical, material impressions of kinetic and potential energy transference. (These need not involve tales of actual motion or much, if any, movement—consider Beckett’s minimalism or the generic predicates for entropy in naturalist writing.) Fiction requires and is measured through potential—what fuels its psychosocial dynamics, the impetus of plot and character development, and its chronotopic ability to traverse multiple times and spaces. Fiction absorbs, exudes, circulates, conserves,
Fracking from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Szeman Imre
Abstract: As conventional sources of oil and gas become depleted, nations have turned increasingly to “unconventional” (i. e., expensive and difficult to access) forms of ENERGY. Shale gas—natural gas trapped in the rock of black shale—has quickly become one of most important of these. The process known as hydraulic fracturing, or “fracking,” combined with an increased capacity to undertake horizontal (as opposed to vertical) drilling, has transformed a handful of countries into surprise energy superpowers in the past decade. It cannot help but appear as a cruel historical irony that these same countries launched the hydrocarbon era: instead of
Future from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dufresne Todd
Abstract: 2. Capitalism’s success can be measured by how effectively it has erased the myriad possibilities of the future, how well its a version of the future is accepted as natural, given, inevitable. In extremis, the capitalist narrative blots out all alternative futures. De facto, it must contend with alternative futures proposed by social and political opposition, science fiction, and utopic literature. However, the de facto experiences of toothless alternatives only work to reinforce
Metabolism from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Dickinson Adam
Abstract: In all living things, ENERGY is consumed in specific physical and chemical reactions. Respiration, reproduction, digestion, blood circulation, and waste removal are functions of these metabolic processes. One driver of metabolism is the endocrine system, which regulates the flow of hormones through the body. Hormones act as a complex exchange of messages among different states and locations. The thyroid gland secretes instructions that increase the rate at which cells utilize energy from food. Human reproduction is similarly governed by sensitivity to chemical messengers like estrogen and testosterone. But the conventional energy sources that power economies and give rise to myriad
Middle East from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Cole Juan
Abstract: Solar power could be a game changer in the Israel-Palestine conflict. Big Carbon is nowhere more problematic than in Israel and Palestine. These areas have little COAL or oil, and their richest natural gas reserves are offshore in the Mediterranean Sea. That location makes gas expensive to extract at a time when the American technique of hydraulic FRACKING is driving down global prices. Ownership of the fields is contested among Israelis, Palestinians, and the Lebanese, promising more conflict.
Necessity from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Kaposy Timothy
Abstract: By now the protagonists of the world’s ENERGY economy are widely recognizable. Over the last two centuries, the energy industry has produced iconic figures whose biographies are studied by entrepreneurs, whose opinions about the market shape economies beyond the energy sector, and whose decisions channel a violent flow of petrodollars from extraction sites to private firms. From Standard Oil’s John D. Rockefeller to ExxonMobil’s Lee Raymond and Yukos’s former CEO Mikhail Khodorkovsky, owners of the energy sector have consolidated corporate power to the detriment of an incalculable number of the earth’s inhabitants (human and otherwise).¹ The iconic One versus the
Nuclear 2 from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hecht Gabrielle
Abstract: Fukushima: from the coasts of Tamil Nadu to the halls of the German Bundestag, the word now stands for danger and deception, contamination and vulnerability. Every day brings new distress. Cesium-137 clings tenaciously to the soil and buildings of northeastern Japan. Radioactive fish promenade across the Pacific. Over 40 percent of children examined by the Fukushima Health Management Survey have thyroid abnormalities; no one really knows yet what that means for their health. Contractors hired for cleanup operations rely on yakuza networks for a steady stream of disposable workers and toss contaminated debris into forest glens and mountain streams when
Petro-violence from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Watts Michael
Abstract: There is something unsettling about the world of Big Oil, not least the overwhelming intellectual vertigo it produces. Secrecy, guardedness, defensiveness, and corporate ventriloquism are hallmarks of the industry. Despite its technical expertise and scientific sophistication—drilling in deep water is like putting someone on the moon, oil mavens like to say—there is a startling degree of inexactitude, empirical disagreement, and lack of (or lack of confidence in) basic data. Why are the simplest facts of the oil world so vague, opaque, and elastic? Epistemological murkiness greets seemingly mundane, banal questions of how much oil there actually is and
Renewable from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Hofer Werner
Abstract: Two news items in 2013 should have alerted every CEO or senior manager of an energy utility company, every politician with responsibility for the economy of a country, and every leader of a large manufacturer to recent changes in how the public imagines ENERGY, specifically the place of renewable energy in the mix of fuels we burn through on a daily basis.
Resource Curse from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Stewart Janet
Abstract: We might expect that countries where significant oil reserves are discovered would experience unfettered socioeconomic progress. Yet in many parts of the world, oil wealth is no guarantor of prosperity. Instead, as is documented, for example, in Michael Watts and Ed Kashi’s photo-essay book
Curse of the Black Gold(2008), oil wealth often seems to herald political instability and economic CRISIS. The title of Watts and Kashi’s book on oil extraction in the Niger Delta alludes to a phenomenon described by some economists as the “resource curse,” a key analytic tool in numerous studies of countries rich in natural resources.
Risk from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Pinkus Karen
Abstract: Risk, as I have written elsewhere, is a risky term.¹ We do not know exactly where or when the term originated—in early maritime law, perhaps. More significantly, we do not know quite how to use it properly.Riskin its most general sense (Webster’s: “the chance of injury, damage or loss”) contrasts significantly with its meaning in the context of investment: price volatility. In common speech,riskhas a primarily negative connotation, as something to be avoided. But in the market,riskhas a positive, aspirational sense so long as prices move upward, even if in fits and starts
Solar from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Boetzkes Amanda
Abstract: The history of solar power invites us to consider the difference between a form of ENERGY that shapes cultural exchange and a resource that merely fuels production. In the past century, solar power has been touted as a clean alternative to oil and COAL. It has also inspired visions of new social, ecological, and economic systems it might generate. Solar energy is imagined as fundamentally heterogeneous, characterized by how it precipitates complex transactions and conversions that nonetheless preserve homeostatic LIMITS. Indeed, this aspect of solar energy is often touted by critics of the industrial capitalist model that seeks to accumulate
Spills from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) LeMenager Stephanie
Abstract: As a noun,
spilldenotes a downpour of liquid, with early usages tending toward blood and rain, while the termoil spilldates from the era of industrial modernity, after the gushers of the 1890s and the manufacture of the Ford Model T. The Lumière Brothers’ short filmOil Wells of Baku: Close View(1896) documents an Azerbaijani oil field fire that could be euphemistically described as a spill. Gushers have been described as spills insofar as they involve uncontained spillage of oil that blankets miles of surrounding land, destroying plants, crops, and soils. The Cerro Azul No. 4 gusher
Texas from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Worden Daniel
Abstract: Texas looms large in contemporary oil culture. The state’s first major oil well, Spindletop, came in in 1901 and led to the formation of Gulf Oil and Texaco. Since then, Texas has figured in oil culture as a site of extraction and refining, a center for the multinational corporate oil industry, and an anchor for the oil industry’s ideological construction as an innately heroic, individualistic, and deeply American enterprise. This prominence is somewhat odd, considering that Pennsylvania was the site of the modern oil industry’s origin in the United States. Alaska, California, Louisiana, and Oklahoma, not to mention the Dakotas,
Urban Ecology from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Stoekl Allan
Abstract: Urban ecology proposes the study of
alllife in cities, considered not as supremely autonomous human artifacts but rather as ecologies: sites of the interdependence of living things, flora and fauna of all types (Douglas et al. 2011). Urban life is the aggregate lives of all beings and their modes of survival and flourishing. Human life is certainly a function of urban ecology, but so is rodent life, bird life, earthworm life, canine life, and bedbug life.
Utopia from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Lehmann Philipp
Abstract: Whether as optimally employed labor or an infinite supply of power, ENERGY is often central to utopian designs for FUTURE societies. Conversely, utopian impulses have been particularly strong during times of actual or predicted energy transitions, inspiring designs for reorganizing socioeconomic, political, and environmental conditions with the help of new sources and unprecedented quantities of energy.
Whaling from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Burnett D. Graham
Abstract: Animal fats have served human beings as sources of ENERGY ever since humans merited the name. Crammed in the gullet, a little marbling or caul afforded early hominids the same kilocalories that such comestibles afforded any other creature equipped to function as a carnivore. And we can assume that whenever those restless hominids mastered the runaway oxidation reaction known as fire, they likely noticed that the white bits of their roasted meat flamed up impressively. Control over these little grease fires presumably followed, in the form of TALLOW lamps and candles.
Wood from:
Fueling Culture
Author(s) Nardizzi Vin
Abstract: “There’s wood enough within”: projected from offstage, this response to Prospero’s summoning in
The Tempestlaunches Caliban into literary history (Shakespeare 1999, 1.2.315). Its emphasis on adequacy indicates that the slave has completed his work. Stemming from this sense of closure, its disgruntled tone suggests an insubordination later elaborated in Caliban’s plan to murder Prospero and burn his books. Such acts of defiance have made Caliban, as Jonathan Goldberg says, “a byword for anticolonial riposte” (2004, ix). But what of the wood? This question may seem slight when weighed against empire and resistance to it, but Caliban uncovers the indispensability
THREE Marriage, Feminism, Theology, and the New Social History: from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: Is it true that the ancient practice of spiritual marriage, the mutual and voluntary giving up of sexual intercourse in marriage for reasons of piety, “engages the contradictions of the Christian theory of marriage that were already in place by the end of the fourth century”? Is it true that for St. Paul “the reproductive function of marriage is … obliterated and marriage is narrowly defined as a prophylactic measure against incontinence”? Is it true that the post-Pauline biblical writers, having set the seal on female submission and reproductive capacity, mark “the beginning of the end of orthodox Christianity as
FIVE Setting Boundaries: from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: The history of toleration has no beginning. Tolerance and intolerance, the instincts to welcome and to exclude, have been practiced by each individual and every people. From its beginnings Judaism regarded itself as the religion of a chosen people that drew lines of separation between itself and others (especially in the matter of purity) while also welcoming the stranger. Christianity and Islam acted similarly. This chapter explores particular ways in which Judaism’s approach to the problem of tolerating those with whom it could not comfortably live a shared life influenced its daughter faiths, especially Christianity.
SIX The Middle Ages in the History of Toleration: from:
Supper at Emmaus
Abstract: Though the Whig grand narrative of history on which most of us were brought up has been under attack for some time—witness the writings of Herbert Butterfield (1900–1979)—it continues to permeate our culture. Essentially at first a narrative to explain the gloriousness of the Glorious Revolution of 1688—that is, the triumph of Protestantism and parliamentarianism over Catholicism and monarchy—the narrative has been quite adaptive and has been a carrier of a tale of progress built around the desirability of commerce, money-making, science, technology, and democracy. The Middle Ages, because not exactly characterized by any of
INTRODUCTION from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: This treatise on theological anthropology works off of five presuppositions. The first is that
it is based on a search for unity and integrity. As we inquire into human identity, we commonly experience a wearying sense of complexity and incertitude. However, this does not mean that our explanation of human nature and of the human person need be involved or complicated. In fact, anthropology seeks above all a once-off, simple, unitary, integrated explanation of human identity. The search for truth, in fact, is always a search for unity, for simplicity, for harmony, for coherence. In other words, in order to
1 SITUATING ANTHROPOLOGY AMONG SCIENCE, PHILOSOPHY, AND THEOLOGY from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: Humans inevitably want to know themselves, they want to know about the meaning of their life, they want to know their identity, their inner truth, their destiny. On the basis of this knowledge they desire and attempt to achieve their ultimate identity, to realize themselves. I have used the terms “to know” and “to achieve” because all persons, as they know themselves and act, experience a discrepancy between the concrete situation they are in (their present identity or situation, concrete, finite, and mundane) and an ultimate ideal to which they aspire (a fullness of identity that is definitive, ideal, or,
4 THE HUMAN BEING ACCORDING TO SCRIPTURE: from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: Scripture does not have a developed and systematic anthropology. Yet both Testaments speak of the human being in a wide variety of ways.³ This is especially so in the first book of the Bible, Genesis, which recounts the creation of the universe, the first stage of the Covenant that God established with his people and with humanity as a whole regarding its origin, its life, its Fall, and the promise of salvation. The fact that these texts are situated at the very beginning of scripture, though they are not the earliest ones of the Old Testament, is not without significance.
6 GRACE AS “ETERNAL LIFE” IN JOHN from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: The letters of John speak of divine grace in a variety of ways. On the one hand, the evangelist seldom uses the term “grace”; he does so only on three occasions, in fact.¹ The first is in John 1:14: “And the Word became flesh and dwelt among us, full of grace and truth.” It is interesting to note how “grace” and “truth” are closely associated in this passage.² The second is as follows: “From his fullness we have all received, grace upon grace” (Jn 1:16): what the Word possesses in fullness, grace, he communicates generously to humanity. And on the
9 “CREATED GRACE” IN THE MEDIEVAL PERIOD from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: Three aspects of Augustine’s understanding of the workings of Christian grace may be noted: the priority of divine action (what would later be designated as “uncreated grace”), the human experience of grace (Augustine speaks of the
suavitas amoris), and human ethical action that derives from grace. According to Augustine, anterior divine action—grace—produces adelectatio, a pleasing spiritual inclination in the soul, and divinizes believerssuaviter et fortiter(gently and firmly), moving them through love to carry out good works. Not only that: it isgrace itselfthat carries out the divine actions in humans.
13 CHILDREN OF GOD IN THE HOLY SPIRIT: from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: Of course Christian grace, which is the result of God’s action, enters into a
14 DIVINE LIFE IN HUMANS: from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: Still, scripture speaks of grace as present and active in humans using a wide variety of expressions, mainly Biblical in origin, that refer openly
15 GRACE AND CHRISTIAN LIFE: from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: We have just considered what might be called the “objective-metaphysical” side of grace: humans, through the gift of God, are transformed, ontologically elevated, renewed to the depths of their being and faculties by divine grace. On the basis of this elevation we shall now consider the “psychological-moral” side of the life of grace, that is, the renewal that God brings about within the faculties and actions of the human person. In effect, with grace God infuses truly divine powers into the soul, usually called “infused virtues,” powers with which Christians act as God’s children in a truly Christ-like and pneumatological
16 GRACE AND HUMAN FREEDOM: from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: In the preceding chapters we considered God’s love for us in terms of “uncreated grace” and God as one who gives himself to humans, adopting them as his children in the Holy Spirit. Then we looked into the dynamics of the supernatural organism, fruit of God’s action, which remains stably present and active in believers; this is often referred to as “created grace.” But another important issue still needs to be considered, an articulated and complex one that refers to the relationship between divine grace and free human response, what we have called the personal-existential aspect of the life of
20 THE GIFT OF GOD AND HUMAN FREEDOM from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: God made humans in his image and likeness (Gn 1:27). The first consequence of God’s act is the imperative invitation humans receive to exercise dominion over the earth as he blesses them. Under God’s sovereign power, though as his children, they receive the capacity and responsibility of administering the entire material universe.⁶ That is to say, humans live before God as responsible beings in that they respond to what they have received. According to scripture, the task and mission humans receive to exercise dominion over the earth is not of a merely external or transitory kind because they are also
22 MAN CREATED IN THE IMAGE OF GOD, A SOCIAL BEING from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: That humans are social beings who relate closely to those of their own species is more than obvious. That human sociality has been considered throughout the history of anthropology as something deeply ambivalent, however, is undeniable. In this chapter we shall attempt to describe certain moments of this history of the reality and ambivalence of the social condition. Then we shall consider how the fact of human sociality and its dynamism may be interpreted in the light of faith in order to understand its origin, purpose, and inner meaning. Finally we shall attempt to clarify the notion of human sociality
23 HUMANS CREATED IN THE IMAGE OF GOD AS MAN AND WOMAN from:
Children of God in the World
Abstract: One of the most obvious distinctions between persons is the sexual one, between man and woman, between male and female. Sexual difference manifests itself not only physiologically, but also psychologically and with differentiating features in the areas of affectivity and cognition.⁴ In this chapter, however, we cannot consider in depth the complex issues that refer to the psychological, sociological, and human differences between men and women and the corresponding myriad social implications, but rather we shall consider the theological statute of the difference, considering it on the basis of the creation of human persons, of their present action, of their
GRAMÁTICA Y DISCURSO(S) from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Molina Jesús F. Vázquez
Abstract: Resulta imposible, por evidente falta de espacio, hacer una introducción acerca de lo que se entiende por
discurso, y de sus relaciones con otras nociones como elenunciadoo eltexto. Remito al lector al apartadodiscoursdel diccionario de Charaudeau y Maingueneau (2002), para una clarificación metodológica de este concepto¹. Digamos, eso sí, que hablar de una lingüística del discurso actualmente es, sobre todo, hacer referencia a un modo de ver la lengua que obviamente no es ajeno a la influencia de las corrientes pragmáticas que tanto han influido en la lingüística francesa contemporánea. A partir de esta premisa
L’INTERPRÉTARIAT EN MILIEU SOCIAL COMME NOUVEAU GENRE DE MÉDIATION INTERCULTURELLE : from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Salcedo Juan Jiménez
Abstract: Le travail développé par la Banque interrégionale d’interprètes (BII) dans la région de Montréal s’inscrit dans le multiculturalisme propre au Canada. Ce multiculturalisme a été institutionnalisé en 1988 par la Loi sur le multiculturalisme ou
Multiculturalism Act. Cette loi établit que la politique du gouvernement fédéral « consiste à reconnaître le fait que le multiculturalisme est une caractéristique fondamentale de l’identité et du patrimoine canadiens et constitue une ressource inestimable pour l’avenir du pays » (3.1.b). Vingt ans après la promulgation de cette loi, nous retrouvons deux critiques sur lesquelles reviennent les chercheurs qui se sont penchés sur la question
DÉNOMINATION, DÉFINITION ET TRADUCTION EN CONTEXTE INTERCULTUREL : from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Galin Danielle Dubroca
Abstract: Puisque loisir m’est donné de t’écrire quelques lignes et que la rédaction d’une lettre ne m’a jamais fait reculer², je t’en envoie une de ma composition pour te souhaiter une heureuse retraite, bien méritée certes, puisque tu as courageusement mené jusqu’au bout toutes tes activités académiques.
ON DEMANDE TRADUCTEUR SACHANT REPASSER : from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Hellín Norma Ribelles
Abstract: Lisez attentivement
cette offre d’emploiNo 595453L actuellement en ligne sur le site de l’ANPE, proposant 13 euros de l’heure pour traduire un roman du français en arabe, effectuer les tâches ménagères sans oublier de faire les courses, et vous comprendrez pourquoi Olivier Mannoni,
CRITERIOS PARA LA ADQUISICIÓN DE LA COMPETENCIA FRASEOLÓGICA EN FLE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Hernández Ana Teresa González
Abstract: Del interés que desde hace algunos años despierta el ámbito de la fraseología, dan cuenta los numerosos congresos internacionales celebrados en las distintas Universidades y los estudios publicados tanto desde una perspectiva intralingüística como desde una óptica interlingüística¹. El lugar destacado que dentro de los estudios lingüísticos ocupa en la actualidad la fraseología, bien sea como una disciplina autónoma, bien como una rama de la lexicología, viene motivado por factores de distinta índole sobre los cuales no vamos a incidir en esta ocasión². Centraremos nuestra atención en una de las muchas vertientes de estudio que suscita el tema, como es
LE DISCOURS COMME AIDE À LA PROGRESSION DE L’APPRENANT DANS SES RAPPORTS À LA PAROLE ÉTRANGÈRE : from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Delahaie Jacky Verrier
Abstract: Les rapports de l’apprenant à la parole étrangère font partie de la question générale des rapports au savoir. En éducation, la recherche est attestée par les travaux de Lenoir (1993), Develay (1996), Charlot (1997, 1999), Maury et Caillot (2003), Hatchuel (2005), Meirieu (1987), Perrenoud (1994, 1997). L’entrée du rapport à la parole qui a été retenue ici est celle de la didactique, autrement dit, des stratégies de mise en rapport de l’apprenant à la parole par l’interface de l’inférence des énoncés.
REFLEXIONES SOBRE LAS APLICACIONES PEDAGÓGICAS DE LAS NUEVAS TECNOLOGÍAS EN LA ENSEÑANZA-APRENDIZAJE DEL FLE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Velasco Juan Manuel Pérez
Abstract: Al hablar de nuevas tecnologías la radicalización de posturas suele ser la tónica común. Por un lado, sus defensores aluden a sus múltiples utilidades y, por otro, sus detractores encuentran argumentos suficientemente persuasivos para satanizarlas. En efecto, a la rapidez, comodidad y agilidad en sus métodos de presentación, a la organización más flexible de la materia y a la nueva estructuración más completa de los contenidos se opone un mayor tiempo de trabajo, un mayor esfuerzo proporcional al volumen de información ofrecido.
EDUBLOGS: from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Santiago Mercedes López
Abstract: El fenómeno de los weblogs, llamados también blogs o bitácoras, es relativamente reciente ya que el primer blog¹ apareció en 1993. Quince años más tarde, directorios como Technorati² registran más de 120 millones de blogs en todo el mundo. En esta comunicación, describiremos las características y la tipología de los blogs, así como su uso en la enseñanza de lenguas extranjeras. Nuestro análisis confirmará que los edublogs constituyen una valiosa ayuda en la enseñanza-aprendizaje de la lengua francesa extranjera (FLE).
PROPUESTA DE ACTIVIDADES EN LA CLASE DE LENGUAS EXTRANJERAS DESDE INTERNET from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) González Severina Álvarez
Abstract: Internet puede ser un excelente recurso que transforme la clase de francés en un aula abierta para aprender y compartir conocimientos y más aún en el terreno de las lenguas extranjeras. Ciertamente ya son muchas las actividades que se plantean en este campo, con y desde Internet.
MISE EN PLACE D’UN DISPOSITIF DE FORMATION EN FLE/ FLS SUR UNE PLATEFORME D’ENSEIGNEMENT INSTITUTIONNELLE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Cazevieille Françoise Olmo
Abstract: Il est un fait désormais acquis: la conception classique d’un cours de français a été profondément bouleversée depuis l’apparition des TICE. En effet, cellesci ont ouvert une voie royale à de nombreuses et de fructueuses expériences. À l’heure actuelle, la prolifération d’espaces créatifs pour l’enseignement des langues ou de plateformes du même type, témoigne de cette vague déferlante. Les systèmes mis en place sont difficiles à cerner dans leur intégralité même par les spécialistes concepteurs d’outils TICE du fait de leur multiplicité, de leur nature propre, de leurs objectifs spécifiques.
L’UTILISATION DE L’HYPERTEXTE DANS L’ENSEIGNEMENT DE LA LITTÉRATURE D’ENFANCE ET DE JEUNESSE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Espejo María José Sueza
Abstract: Nous sommes persuadées que ces outils peuvent être de véritables atouts pour la découverte du langage écrit. C’est la raison pour laquelle s’interroger sur l’impact de la lecture sur nos étudiants est très intéressant, étant donné que l’arrivée massive des hypertextes et hypermédias remet en question nos repères de lecture et notre rapport à l’écrit, ce qui implique des réflexions sur de nouvelles stratégies.
LA RUTA JACOBEA COMO ESPACIO BÉLICO: from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Heras Ignacio Iñarrea Las
Abstract: De Francia, Flandes e Inglaterra nos llegan principalmente telas, y nosotros exportamos lanas, pieles, caballos y trigo. Según Finot, ya desde el siglo XII o antes se establecieron activas relaciones comerciales entre
LO FANTÁSTICO A PARTIR DE UN TEXTO INAUGURAL: from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Feijóo María Dolores Rajoy
Abstract: En este artículo pretendo fijar las características temáticas del género fantástico a partir de uno de los textos que contribuyeron a fijarlo,
Vathekde Beckford, relato muy significativo por su carácter fronterizo entre lo maravilloso y lo fantástico, y entre la literatura anglosajona y la francesa.
DEL POEMA AL RELATO POÉTICO EN JULES SUPERVIELLE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) López Lourdes Carriedo
Abstract: Personal e independiente, la obra de Jules Supervielle (1884-1960) se sitúa a mitad de camino entre los deslumbrantes hallazgos de la imagen surrealista en su libre desarrollo textual, y el rigor estilístico y compositivo de la Poesía Pura; entre la modernidad de André Breton y el clasicismo de Paul Valéry, ambos sus coetáneos. Esta postura de voluntario equilibrio y armonización de tendencias contrarias caracteriza una obra que, como veremos, recurrió a diferentes modalidades genéricas para expresar un universo de gran coherencia temática.
YASMINA REZA Y EL TEATRO “INVISIBLE”. from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) López Stéphanie
Abstract: Es una obra concebida siguiendo el principio de las muñecas rusas: sobre el papel los actores interpretan una obra española, pero en esta obra española figura que representan una pieza búlgara que, a su vez… en fin, todo desemboca en esa obra teatral invisible a la que aspiro¹.
LES LETTRES CHINOISES DE YING CHEN: from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Dopazo Olaya González
Abstract: La literatura migrante se ha convertido en un vástago de la literatura de los últimos años, muy especialmente en Quebec. Como indica Daniel Chartier (2002: 303), a lo largo de los dos últimos siglos más de quinientos escritores han emigrado a Quebec en circunstancias variadas, y en la actualidad el porcentaje de inmigrantes entre los escritores parece duplicar la proporción existente entre la población general¹. Cifras tan significativas marcan sin duda un periodo que se caracteriza por la diversificación. Escritores francófonos originarios de Argelia, Marruecos o Túnez se unen a los procedentes de Europa o Haití; también los hay oriundos
LAS DIGRESIONES DE LOS “GRIOTS” EN LAS EPOPEYAS SUBSAHARIANAS from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Nogales Vicente Enrique Montes
Abstract: Lilyan Kesteloot y Bassirou Dieng no dudan en defender a ultranza la evidente existencia de una vasta producción épica en África. El privilegio de estos relatos radica en que son textos “vivos” puesto que aún en la actualidad gozamos de la fortuna de poder asistir a sesiones narrativas en las que un “griot” recita las aventuras de un personaje épico que permiten analizar al mismo tiempo las particularidades del texto oral, la reacción de un público que escucha ensimismado cómo se han desarrollado los acontecimientos del pasado que han condicionado su presente y, en tercer lugar, la actitud del narrador.
EL PASO DEL NATURALISMO AL ESPIRITUALISMO EN LA REVISTA LA ILUSTRACIÓN ESPAÑOLA Y AMERICANA (1891-1899) from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) de Dios Àngels Ribes
Abstract: La Ilustración Española y Americana², continuadora delMuseo Universal(1857-1869), fue una publicación madrileña semanal desde 1869 a 1921, según el modelo de prestigiosas revistas europeas. Como su nombre indica, la revista se caracterizaba por la profusión de sus excelentes ilustraciones –muy del gusto del público burgués– que representaban gran cantidad de aspectos de la vida cotidiana de España y de Hispanoamérica, donde también tenía difusión la publicación. Hoy resulta una delicia recorrer sus páginas y descubrir en ellas, con extraordinaria calidad, la vida de la época de la Restauración. Desde el punto de vista de Palenque «La Ilustración Española
LE TRANSFERT DE GENRES. from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Goya José Manuel Losada
Abstract: Pour les romantiques européens, si l’Espagne souffrait encore d’un retard culturel, politique et social, l’imaginaire hispanique était synonyme de liberté dans l’art, d’individualisme foncier et de récits légendaires ; c’est sous ce jour que peut être éclairée l’abondante présence hispanique dans le premier recueil hugolien. Même si les
Odesrespectent la poétique du genre classique, leur remaniement selon les « événements contemporains » ou selon l’« impression personnelle » du poète (Préface de 1826) les actualise et les affranchit par moments de l’influence antique. La coloration espagnole n’est pas étrangère à ce renouveau du genre.
IRONIE, PRATIQUE RÉFLEXIVE ET JEU INTERTEXTUEL DANS LE PAUVRE CHEMISIER DE VALERY LARBAUD from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Saéz Maribel Corbí
Abstract: A l’heure actuelle Valery Larbaud commence déjà à être connu dans les cercles universitaires. Grâce aux efforts de la Société des Amis de Valery Larbaud et des chercheurs larbaldiens de plus en plus nombreux, notre auteur a repris un peu de ce « règne »¹ qu’il exerça aux côtés d’André Gide. Un règne qui pendant trop longtemps lui fut contesté puisque seul était salué son dévouement impénitent à la critique et à la traduction au détriment de sa création personnelle, à l’exception de quelques œuvres telles que
Le journal intime de Barnabooth(Larbaud, 1913), certaines de sesEnfantines(Larbaud, 1918)
EL REFLEJO DE LA SOCIEDAD QUEBEQUESA A TRAVÉS DE LAS PELÍCULAS DE DENYS ARCAND from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Tonda Mª Ángeles Llorca
Abstract: La particular configuración social de Quebec responde a varios factores. En primer lugar, por su situación geográfica y económica, como provincia de Canadá, Quebec es una región americana. En segundo lugar, su historia y sus orígenes la vinculan a Francia, desde un punto de vista cultural y lingüístico. En tercer lugar, su sistema parlamentario responde al modelo británico. Y por último, Quebec es una región cosmopolita, debido a los continuos flujos migratorios.
EL GÉNERO DEL SUCESO MEDIÁTICO («FAIT DIVERS») Y LAS CARACTERÍSTICAS DE LA NARRACIÓN DEL ACONTECIMIENTO EN LOS TEXTOS DE LA PRENSA FRANCESA: from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Cecilia Juan Herrero
Abstract: El género informativo del discurso de la prensa que en francés se designa con el nombre de «fait divers», corresponde a lo que en español se llama «suceso» o «caso», es decir un relato que se caracteriza desde el punto de vista temático por dar a conocer al gran público un hecho excepcional o extraordinario de la actualidad que ha producido una transformación inesperada de un estado de cosas. Esa transformación implica una trasgresión o una ruptura de la normalidad de la vida. El texto del «suceso» informa, en efecto, sobre crímenes, raptos, desapariciones, atracos, accidentes fatales, incendios, catástrofes de
LE MESSAGE PUBLICITAIRE EN FRANÇAIS ET EN ESPAGNOL D’EUROPE CHEZ DANONE. from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Larminaux Caroline
Abstract: De prime abord, il semblerait que ce Colloque, qui invite à s’interroger simultanément ou non sur les trois concepts « Texte, genre, discours », ne se prête pas spécialement à l’étude de la langue de la publicité. Mais pourtant, même s’ils ne passent pas à la postérité, une masse importante de textes est produite par la publicité et forme un ensemble reconnaissable. D’ailleurs, de nombreux auteurs s’accordent à dire que le genre publicitaire n’existe que par l’imitation d’autres genres ou d’autres discours. C’est pourquoi ce bref exposé s’efforcera de mettre en lumière cette tendance au mimétisme qui caractérise la langue
AVATARES CASTELLANOS DE LA CARMAGNOLE (II) from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Muñiz Elías Martínez
Abstract: La tradición castellana, tal como ha llegado al siglo pasado y se mantiene en la actualidad en escasas localidades, nos remite a un contexto procesional religioso, de danzas masculinas², realizadas al aire libre, ejecutadas entrechocando unos bastones cortos de madera³, y con una indumentaria muy repetida en toda la península⁴. Esta particular indumentaria tiene predominio del color blanco sobre el que adornan distintas cintas de colores vivos, a la cintura y cruzadas en pecho y
LES LUMIÈRES EN POLITIQUE from:
Texto, género y discurso en el ámbito francófono
Author(s) Goulemot Jean-Marie
Abstract: Je voudrais d’abord remercier ceux qui ont pensé à moi pour remplacer un collègue parisien défaillant. Cette invitation me comble. Elle satisfait mon attachement aux études consacrées à la littérature française dans des universités non-francophones. J’ai servi cette cause en enseignant aux USA, au Canada, au Brésil et en Espagne à Santiago de Compostela, en établissant des contacts de travail et d’amitié avec nos collègues de Vitoria, de Montréal et de Johns Hopkins. On me permettra de dédier ce texte à Lydia Vazquez, retenue loin de nous. Ces nombreux semestres passés à l’étranger m’ont beaucoup appris et permis, je crois,
1. La obsesión participante. from:
La experiencia como hecho social
Author(s) Gobato Federico
Abstract: La dificultad más elocuente, de todas las que afronta este capítulo, reside en las escurridizas propiedades de la noción de “experiencia”. Esta implica enfrentar lo inédito, y a veces mediante el mismo acto, con la recuperación —inexcusablemente crítica— de aquello que ha sucedido y sucede. Al mismo tiempo, posee una virtud transformadora. Nos cambia, en tanto que al asignar al suceso experimentado una novedad propia de lo inexplorado exige la actualización de nuestros esquemas interpretativos en un sentido imposible de determinar a priori. Nos transforma, en tanto que por el mismo acto selectivo lo distinguido en el continuo experiencial ya
2. Ocultamiento, privacidad y experiencia from:
La experiencia como hecho social
Author(s) García Jorge Lavín
Abstract: En este capítulo se discute una cuestión ético-metodológica en la investigación social que se relaciona con los grados de participación posibles en la llamada observación participante; esta cuestión se torna ineludible cuando el tema que se investiga involucra informantes con “identidad herida” (De Gaulejac, 2008). La pregunta central es: ¿qué ocurre cuando tanto el investigador como el actor o sujeto de estudio ocultan estratégicamente las intenciones de su discurso al momento de encontrarse/entrevistarse? Más aún, ¿qué ocurre cuando, de manera anticipada, se atribuyen estrategias de ocultamiento al sujeto de estudio y se piensa en formas de investigación para el despiste,
Book Title: Memory Ireland-The Famine and the Troubles, Volume 3
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: Volume 3 focuses on the impact of the Famine and the Troubles on theformation and study of Irish cultural memory. Topics considered includehunger strikes, monuments to the Famine, trauma and the politics of memoryin the Irish peace process, and Ulster Loyalist battles in the twenty-firstcentury. Gathering the work of leading scholars such as Margaret Kelleher,Joseph Lennon, David Lloyd, Joseph Valente, and Gerald Dawe, this collectionis an essential contribution to the field of Irish studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1ns3x
1 The Indigent Sublime: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) LLOYD DAVID
Abstract: The problem is, surely, how to address redress with adequate justice. Redress assumes, not a saving intervention that might prevent acts of violence and expropriation in the present, but an address to the past from which we are disjoined by the very history of which effective violence is a constitutive part. In relation to the violence of the past, we seem helpless, impotent to set right the injustice that has so forcefully shaped the very times that we inhabit. Suspended between the call to vengeance and the commitment to memory, redress is charged neither with the repetition of the cycles
4 Photography and the Visual Legacy of Famine from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) MARK-FITZGERALD EMILY
Abstract: The question “Why are there no photographs of the Famine?” appears, at the outset, to be one easily answered. With photography in its infancy in Ireland (invented only in 1839 and in limited practice by the mid-1840s, primarily by wealthy Anglo-Irish hobbyists and a small handful of enthusiasts and budding entrepreneurs¹), very few of the extant images dating to the Famine period deal in any way with social subjects, and no contemporaneous image of the Famine has been identified.² Yet there are several reasons why photography’s relationship to the Famine persists in significance despite this historical absence. In the first
5 Memory in Irish Culture: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) KEARNEY RICHARD
Abstract: One of Ireland’s earliest texts is the
Book of Invasions, which records a genealogy of incursion and settlement for early Ireland. Already present is a mixing of history—telling itas it happened—and fiction—telling itas if it happened: for in those ancient times the boundary between empirical fact and cultural imagination was often blurred. When a manuscript begins with the words “In Illo tempore,” “In the Old days,” “Fado Fado,” one is already encountering a particular narrative take on the legacy of the past. Historical remembrance in Irish national culture is, from the outset, a matter of
8 Life-Stories, Survivor Memory, and Trauma in the Irish Troubles: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) DAWSON GRAHAM
Abstract: Since the 1994 paramilitary ceasefires, the Irish peace process has stimulated a flowering of practices of history-making, remembrance, and commemoration concerned with the legacy of the Troubles in “post-conflict” Northern Ireland.¹ Much of this work has taken the form of oral-history and life-history narrative that enables personal reflection on the significance of violent conflict in the recent past and reassessment of its impact upon individuals, families, and local areas. Such memory-work has intersected with wider public debate over, and engagement with, the question of the victims of violence, including the formation of numbers of local victims’ support groups addressing the
9 Vestiges: from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) DAWE GERALD
Abstract: “At certain periods of history,” writes the Russian poet Joseph Brodsky, “it is only poetry that is capable of dealing with reality by condensing it into something graspable, something that otherwise couldn’t be retained by the mind” (Brodsky 1986, 52). The word that sparks this essay is “retained” rather than the inherently grander claims of Brodsky’s statement, claims that one can only fully understand and relate to the traditions of Russian poetry, instead of the slightly more moderate preoccupations of contemporary poetry in English. For “retained” read “memory,” the bulwark of the individual mind, or poetic imagination, in the act
14 Noncombatants and Memorialization in Post-Conflict Northern Ireland from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) BROWN KRIS
Abstract: Studies broadly examining post-Troubles memorialization (Brown and MacGinty 2003; Viggiani 2006) or specifically homing in on the commemoration of Republican and Loyalist casualties are starting to emerge (Rolston 2003; Jarman 1999; Brown and Viggiani 2010; Brown 2007; McDowell 2007; Graham and Whelan 2007), as is, to a lesser degree, the remembrance of the security force dead (Switzer 2006). The attention given to political or paramilitary commemoration reflects the fact that Republican and Loyalist commemoration extends beyond mourning, and into the projection of overtly political messages and charged communal narratives via the media of ritual display and highly graphic murals. Studies
Book Title: Memory Ireland-Diaspora and Memory Practices, Volume 2
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: In the second volume of a series that will ultimately include four, the authors consider Irish diasporic memory and memory practices. While the Irish diaspora has become the subject of a wide range of scholarship, there has been little work focused on its relationship to memory. The first half of the volume asks how diasporic memory functions in different places and times, and what forms it takes on. As an island nation with a history of emigration, Ireland has developed a rich diasporic cultural memory, one that draws on multiple traditions and historiographies of both "home" and "away." Native traditions are not imported wholesale, but instead develop their own curious hybridity, reflecting the nature of emigrant memory that absorbs new ways of thinking about home. How do immigrants remember their homeland? How do descendants of immigrants "remember" a land they rarely visit? How does diasporic memory pass through families, and how is it represented in cultural forms such as literature, festivals, and souvenirs?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nv2c
Introduction from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: A striking aspect of Irish studies has been its success beyond Ireland’s geographical boundaries. Indeed, much of the initial impetus for Irish studies as a field seemed to come from outside of Ireland, and it is now usual to hear of Irish studies not only at an array of Irish and American universities, not only in English-speaking countries such as Canada, Australia, and New Zealand, but also in places where it might seem more unexpected: in Japan, Brazil, France. Part of the attraction of Irish studies is undoubtedly the list of world-class Irish writers on whom thousands of theses and
6 The Kitsch of the Dispossessed from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) THOMPSON SPURGEON
Abstract: Since the mid–nineteenth century at least, Ireland has appeared in American culture somewhat as it does on “The Surrealist Map of the World”—larger than life and severely distorted. Most imported Irish cultural elements have, historically, been systematically mediated through mass cultural forms; that is, they have entered into American consciousness as artifacts of commodity culture. That this has been occurring for at least 150 years is clear from recent research into the tourism industry in Ireland, which has been promoting itself actively since the end of the Great Famine. Less researched, however, is what lies behind or motivates
Introduction from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: Cultural memory, as the project
Memory Irelanddemonstrates, has an array of milieus. Irish cultural memory can be located at heritage sites, embodied by memorials and museums, found in landscapes inscribed with place names that have changed over time. Cultural memory is also located, though, in cultural forms that remain unattached to a geographical space. Instead, such cultural forms function as containers of specific indexes of memory and reflect a range of what I term “memory practices,” which are ways of cultural remembering that result from and are shaped by particular cultural forms. Many of these cultural forms embody memory
14 Reconfiguring the Traveller Self from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) OHAODHA MICHAEL
Abstract: That Travellers and other “outsiders” have never felt “at home” in the literature and visual culture of the Irish mainstream is, by now, an acknowledged truism. The long-established quintessential “outsider,” the figure of the Traveller has held a fascination for Irish writers, a fascination that flourished in English from the nineteenth century onward. Writers as well-known and diverse as J. M. Synge, W. B. Yeats, Pádraic Ó Conaire, James Stephens, Liam O’Flaherty, John B. Keane, Bryan MacMahon, Jennifer Johnston, and Richard Murphy have employed Traveller characters and Traveller tropes, the vast majority of which have been made to fit generic
Book Title: Memory Ireland-James Joyce and Cultural Memory, Volume 4
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): O’Callaghan Katherine
Abstract: In the fourth and final volume of the Memory Ireland series, Frawley andO'Callaghan explore the manifestations and values of cultural memory inJoyce's Ireland, both real and imagined. An exemplary author to considerin relation to questions of how it is that history is remembered and recycled,Joyce creates characters that confront particularly the fraught relationshipbetween the individual and the historical past; the crisis of colonial historyin relation to the colonized state; and the relationship between the individual'smemory of his or her own past and the past of the broader culture.The collection includes leading Joyce scholars including Luke Gibbons,Vincent Cheng, and Declan Kiberd and considers such topics as Jewishmemory in Ulysses, history and memory in Finnegans Wake, and Joyceand the Bible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nvx9
1 Amnesia, Forgetting, and the Nation in James Joyceʹs Ulysses from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) CHENG VINCENT J.
Abstract: Let me begin on a personal note. Although I am known among my family and friends for having a good memory, I have long been aware, since childhood, of the attractions, even the desirability, of forgetting. Indeed, in my teens and twenties, I used to regularly experience what I grew to call “amnesia fantasies”: wish-fulfillment fantasies in which I imagined myself suffering from amnesia and having no idea who I was. In that condition, I could be unburdened of my own troubles and free to move on. I suspect I am not alone in having had such fantasies: after all,
8 Ghosts through Absence from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) JONES ELLEN CAROL
Abstract: Borrowing and disjoining the language of the past, James Joyce’s work both parodies that past and bears witness to its truth.¹ To bear witness to the past is to comprehend its spectral repetition in the present. Indeed, even if acts of historical retrieval are intended to serve also as gestures of psychic restitution, the net effect of such reiterative reworkings of history is a repetition of the same in nightmarish, spectral,
unheimlich, returns (Leerssen 2001, 220): “history repeating itself with a difference” (U616). Homi Bhabha delineates how the “mimesis of memorialization—the restitution of record, date, time, name—anxiously
Book Title: Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker-A Study of the Prose
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): MacKillop James
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s unexpected death in August 2013 brought to completion his body of work, and scholars are only now coming to understand the full scale and importance of this extraordinary career. The Nobel Prize–winning poet, translator, and playwright from the North of Ireland is considered the most important Irish poet after Yeats and, at the time of his death, arguably the most famous living poet. For this reason, much of the scholarship to date on Heaney has understandably focused on his poetry. O’Brien’s new work, however, focuses on Heaney’s essays, book chapters, and lectures as it seeks to understand how Heaney explored the poet’s role in the world. By examining Heaney’s prose, O’Brien teases out a clearer understanding of Heaney’s sense of the function of poetry as an act of public intellectual and ethical inquiry. In doing so, O’Brien reads Heaney as an aesthetic thinker in the European tradition, considering him alongside Heidegger, Derrida, Lacan, and Adorno. Studying Heaney within this theoretical and philosophical tradition sheds new and useful light on one of the greatest creative minds of the twentieth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1nw0t
1 The Poet as Thinker—the Thinker as Poet from:
Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: That this is only the second sustained study of Heaney’s prose is surprising, but it is an issue that needs to be addressed at this stage. Generally, he is seen as a poet who gives occasional lectures, writes occasional pieces, and gives interviews; he is not generally seen as an aesthetic thinker, but this point is what I will be arguing, and I think some basics facts about Heaney’s academic career will underline the relevance of my position. Seamus Heaney’s intellectual career began not so much as a poet per se, but as someone who thinks, writes, and teaches about
6 Translations: from:
Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: In keeping with his view of poetry as encouraging complex and dialectical transformations of the actual, this chapter will discuss how Heaney grants both the effectiveness and the plurality of identifications of Irishness through a further structure, translation. Heaney has spoken a lot about complex structures of meaning and identity, and he has stressed the importance of plurality and influence in his thinking, and in his writing. We have seen his political amphibiousness as well as his displacement and dislocation of foundational attachments to place. We have also seen that he is keen to use the aesthetic as a tool
Conclusion: from:
Seamus Heaney as Aesthetic Thinker
Abstract: Seamus Heaney’s fame derives primarily from his poetry, and this book does not attempt to gainsay that reputation. Heaney’s poetry is a resonant enunciation of the aesthetic in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries and will be a lasting legacy in times to come. What this book has attempted to do is to demonstrate that, as well as being a practitioner, Heaney is a philosophical thinker on the aesthetic and on its value in defining knowledge and influencing critique, both internally in terms of individual self-knowledge and also in terms of issues in the broader public sphere. I see
5 Out of Siberia from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: Magda Trocmé’s independent spirit and her habit of practical response to human needs came straight out of her Siberian heritage. Her ancestors on both the Italian and the Russian side were aristocratic people born to wealth and privilege, but the Russians in her family tree were notable for not allowing privilege to blind them to the human misery at the bottom of society, a misery endured by the moujiks (slaves) to serve the interests of the rich. Not so her Italian ancestors. They were much more inclined to assume that privilege was their birthright and poverty was other people’s fate.
7 The Military Misadventure from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André knew he was a renegade, but it wasn’t a status he aspired to. He was at home as a member of the haute bourgeoisie Protestante. While the Protestant upper class was bourgeois and not noble, it was a sort of nonroyal aristocracy, exemplifying the meaning of the original Greek term: the morally and intellectually best who act in the interest of all. At the same time he was deeply conflicted about many things that came with upper class standing. His issue was straightforward: could he continue to enjoy his social status without running afoul of the religious and ethical
8 The Turnaround Year from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: André was on his way to New York because he had won a scholarship to Union Theological Seminary. He took it, but without great enthusiasm. It was actually a third choice. His first was archeological study in the Near East, but he lost out on that scholarship when
11 Understanding Catastrophe: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: The years from 1939 to 1944 are sometimes referred to as the heroic period in the story of Le Chambon-sur-Lignon and its surrounding towns. Yet the very word “heroic” is one that local people would never use to describe their own actions in creating a city of refuge. It goes against the grain of their Huguenot heritage.
12 The War Worsens: from:
A Portrait of Pacifists
Abstract: In the opening months of 1942, Marshal Pétain was still popular in sectors of this new French State. Church authorities were still willing to regard some of the more odious actions the government took (e.g., the Jewish Statute of October 3) as necessary compromises made in exchange for the Vichy government’s independent status. Pétain’s emphasis on the three virtues of work, family, and fatherland was accepted as a commonplace template for the moral reform of the French nation. Church publications made repeated favorable comment on this celebrated triptych. The president of the ÉRF, Pastor Boegner, was still in support of
Book Title: Memory Ireland-History and Modernity, Volume 1
Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Frawley Oona
Abstract: Despite the ease with which scholars have used the term "memory" in recent decades, its definition remains enigmatic. Does cultural memory rely on the memories of individuals, or does it take shape beyond the borders of the individual mind? Cultural memory has garnered particular attention within Irish studies. With its trauma-filled history and sizable global diaspora, Ireland presents an ideal subject for work in this vein. What do stereotypes of Irish memory—as extensive, unforgiving, begrudging, but also blank on particular, usually traumatic, subjects—reveal about the ways in which cultural remembrance works in contemporary Irish culture and in Irish diasporic culture? How do icons of Irishness—from the harp to the cottage, from the Celtic cross to a figure like James Joyce—function in cultural memory? This collection seeks to address these questions as it maps a landscape of cultural memory in Ireland through theoretical, historical, literary, and cultural explorations by top scholars in the field of Irish studies. In a series that will ultimately include four volumes, the sixteen essays in this first volume explore remembrance and forgetting throughout history, from early modern Ireland to contemporary multicultural Ireland. Among the many subjects addressed: Guy Beiner disentangles "collective" from "folk" memory in "Remembering and Forgetting the Irish Rebellion of 1798," and Anne Dolan looks at local memory of the civil war in "Embodying the Memory of War and Civil War." The volume concludes with Alan Titley’s "The Great Forgetting," a compelling argument for viewing modern Irish culture as an artifact of the Europeanization of Ireland and for bringing into focus the urgent need for further, wide-ranging Irishlanguage scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j1w050
Introduction from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) FRAWLEY OONA
Abstract: The field of “memory studies” has been growing steadily in recent decades, fueled by multidisciplinary interest in the ways in which a variety of social groups remember. Among humanities-based scholars, those with a stake in this area include sociologists, historians, literary critics, art historians, and anthropologists, while outside of the humanities, psychologists, neuroscientists and biologists all have the potential to contribute valuably to the field. The net cast by memory studies is so wide, in fact, that in forums like the journal
Memory Studies(established in 2008), attention is often paid to describing the useful limits of a field that
1 Memory and History from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) MISZTAL BARBARA A.
Abstract: Paradoxically, despite the fact that contemporary society is commonly conceptualized as “terminally ill with amnesia” (Huyssen 1995, 1), memory has established itself as a major discourse; interest in memory in the last thirty years has been unprecedented. This interest accounts for the discovery of ethnic and local roots as well as for the construction of common pasts to bind communities and give meaning to their collective fates. The intensification of a memory discourse can be illustrated by the epidemics of public commemoration, the growing recognition of memory as both a constitutive component of political culture and an important base of
4 The Harp as a Palimpsest of Cultural Memory from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) THUENTE MARY HELEN
Abstract: The harp image encompasses distinct and sometimes conflicting iconographical histories and cultural “memories” that influenced the complex formation of Irish identity. Long recognized as an iconic site of Irish identity, the harp is also a palimpsest of cultural memory. The origins of the harp icon’s meanings extend well beyond Ireland and can be traced to a variety of ancient and modern sources, in fact and in cultural memory. The broad range of historical periods and subjects outside of Irish tradition in Edward Bunting’s extensive commentary on the history of harp music and harp iconography in his three influential collections of
8 “In a Landlord’s Garden” from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) MATHEWS P. J.
Abstract: It is curious that the subject of “Synge and Parnell” has received very little critical attention, despite the many compelling reasons for throwing these two giants of Irish culture and politics into relief. Among these one could list the shared experience of being prominently unconventional Anglo-Irish gentlemen at pivotal moments in Irish history; their courting of international controversy over matters of sexual morality; the divisive nature of the legacies of both men; and the Wicklow connection. Of further significance is the fact that both of them loom large in the cultural memory of the Irish Revival as expressed in the
10 De Valera’s Historical Memory from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) DALY MARY E.
Abstract: Eamon de Valera is the most important political figure of twentiethcentury Ireland. His political career is unprecedented in terms of a longevity unlikely to be exceeded by any future Irish politician. The only surviving commandant in the Easter Rising of 1916, he was still active in public life as president when Ireland celebrated the Golden Jubilee of the Rising in 1966 and the fiftieth anniversary of the founding of Dáil Éireann in 1969. His personal papers, now held in University College Dublin Archives,¹ testify to an abiding interest in history. His correspondence is peppered with letters from fellow-veterans of the
13 Remembering to Forget from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) CREGAN DAVID
Abstract: Mainstream public memory is traditionally understood as an intentional recollection of quantifiable facts of the historical past that then constitute collective identity. Because of its suppressed nature, queer memory is flimsier: while mainstream public memory is solidly supported institutionally by politics and history, queer memory is more symbolic, derived from what is implied by exclusion rather than inclusion. By uncovering previously hidden gay and lesbian experiences, queer historians have initiated a type of cultural rebellion, juxtaposing queer memory with hetero-normative histories. The production of this alternative history has evoked a renewed engagement with memory because more traditional methodological approaches to
15 Multiculturalization and Irish National Memory from:
Memory Ireland
Author(s) RYAN LORRAINE
Abstract: Irish cultural memory was, until recently, a monolithic entity, constituted of exclusively “Irish” experiences such as the Famine, the war of independence, emigration, and the symbiotic relationship of church and state, while its
lieux de mémoireconsisted of the churches and shrines that dotted the Irish landscape and the ballads that extolled the bravery of heroes such as Sean Treacy and Dan Breen. Despite the fact of significant minority populations in Ireland,¹ this “national” memory centered on white Catholics and was thus a highly biased narrative that implicitly ignored minority experience. However, Ireland’s recent multiculturalism and the iconoclasm of the
Book Title: Disability Rhetoric- Publisher: Syracuse University Press
Author(s): Dolmage Jay Timothy
Abstract: Disability Rhetoric is the first book to view rhetorical theory and history through the lens of disability studies. Traditionally, the body has been seen as, at best, a rhetorical distraction; at worst, those whose bodies do not conform to a narrow range of norms are disqualified from speaking. Yet, Dolmage argues that communication has always been obsessed with the meaning of the body and that bodily difference is always highly rhetorical. Following from this rewriting of rhetorical history, he outlines the development of a new theory, affirming the ideas that all communication is embodied, that the body plays a central role in all expression, and that greater attention to a range of bodies is therefore essential to a better understanding of rhetorical histories, theories, and possibilities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j2n73m
2 Rhetorical Histories of Disability from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: To begin this chapter, I will offer a compressed overview of disability in antiquity. This overview is important historically and for the “narrative” of this book. But my hope is not just to start telling a story here, but instead to establish, through this quick scan of the role of the body in antiquity, a lexicon and a critical repertoire that is much more far-reaching. This compression is intended to simplify, to make a vast expanse of time accessible, but also to create density and force. My hope is to explain and illustrate the ubiquity and impact of normativity as
4 Mētis from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: So far I have offered a brief guided tour through rhetorical history, a moving through and with the bodies of this history. I have suggested that we can read embodied rhetoric and bodied rhetorical history as powered by tension around normativity. I have also explored disability myths and disability rhetorics. My argument is that disability has myriad meanings, many of them positive and generative.
Mētis, I will show, is the craft of forging something practical out of these possibilities, practicing an embodied rhetoric, changing the world as we move through it. The key examplar ofmētisis the disabled Greek
5 Eating Rhetorical Bodies from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: The celebration of Hephaestus, his craft, his cunning, his ability, as well as the deification of his disability are means of challenging held perceptions about the mythical character, but also about all of us—defined as we all are by concepts of ability, by rhetorics of normalcy. An epideictic and forensic exploration of his myths does not just martial praise or blame through his body or question the truth or falsity of rhetorical history; this rhetorical work should shift body values and roles, becoming a deliberation on embodied possibilities.
6 “I Did It on Purpose” from:
Disability Rhetoric
Abstract: The recent Oscar-winning film
The King’s Speech,because it focuses on public speaking, on pedagogy, and on the body, is a movie about rhetoric. More specifically, the film is about disability rhetoric. Therefore, it is an excellent space in which to try out many of the questions and ideas of this book—and to thus argue that the questions have real, contemporary significance. My method in this final chapter will be to employmētisas I explore not just how the film was actually made, or how it was popularly received, but also how it has been argued over. In
Book Title: Placing Aesthetics-Reflections on the Philosophic Tradition
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): Wood Robert E.
Abstract: Examining select high points in the speculative tradition from Plato and Aristotle through the Middle Ages and German tradition to Dewey and Heidegger,
Placing Aestheticsseeks to locate the aesthetic concern within the larger framework of each thinker's philosophy.In Professor Robert Wood's study, aesthetics is not peripheral but rather central to the speculative tradition and to human existence as such. In Dewey's terms, aesthetics is "experience in its integrity." Its personal ground is in "the heart," which is the dispositional ground formed by genetic, cultural , and personal historical factors by which we are spontaneously moved and, in turn, are inclined to move, both practically and theoretically, in certain directions.Prepared for use by the student as well as the philosopher,Placing Aestheticsaims to recover the fullness of humanness within a sense of the fullness of encompassing Being. It attempts to overcome the splitting of thought, even in philosophy, into exclusive specializations and the fracturing of life itself into theoretical, practical, and emotive dimensions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x66b
I INTRODUCTION: from:
Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: There is surely sense to the notion that one ought to approach every study in terms of empirical acquaintance with the objects of the study. In fact, how else could one begin? Thus in approaching matters aesthetic, one should have firsthand acquaintance with art objects as well as with the beauties of nature and, if possible, with artistic practice. We are surely not exempt from that requirement. However, every study except philosophy begins with certain presuppositions which it is not the task of that study to analyze. Thus Euclidean geometry takes its point of departure from the possibility of beginning
IV PLOTINUS AND THE LATIN MIDDLE AGES from:
Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Though the artistic practice of the Middle Ages was unparalleled, especially in the construction of the cathedrals that housed magnificent sculptural and pictorial works and were filled with the haunting sounds of Gregorian chant, it might not be too far off the mark to claim that, from the point of view of aesthetics (i.e., reflection on the nature of art and beauty), the thought of the Middle Ages was essentially derivative. Indeed, among the major thinkers, the great philosopher-theologians, besides citation and paraphrase of traditional sources, one finds very little sustained treatment of aesthetic matters, and almost nothing of any
V KANT from:
Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: Once on immanuel kant’s tombstone stood the words, “The starry skies above, the moral law within.”¹ They are taken from the closing paragraphs of his
Critique of Practical Reason, the second work in his critical project. The beginning of the quotation reads: “Two things fill the heart with ever new and increasing admiration and awe[Bewunderung und Ehrfurcht]….”² The starry skies above are the object and model for mechanistic science. In Newtonian mechanics the laws that govern the stars govern all terrestrial motions as well. It was such knowing that furnished the exemplar of knowing analyzed in the first part
X HEIDEGGER from:
Placing Aesthetics
Abstract: From martin heidegger’s first major work,
Being and Time, his thought has focused on the notion of Being, but the method of his approach was phenomenology, the method characterizing my own introduction. Heidegger’s approach falls in the line of his teacher, Edmund Husserl, the founder of Phenomenology. Husserl understood Phenomenology to be comprehensive philosophy; it is at least permanent prolegomenon, acknowledged or not, to any philosophy. Phenomenology comes from two Greek terms,phainomenon, appearance, andlogos, essence. Phenomenology is a comprehensive descriptive inventory of all the essential ways in which appearance—that is, presence to consciousness—occurs: direct evidence in
Book Title: Prophetic Politics-Emmanuel Levinas and the Sanctification of Suffering
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): HAROLD PHILIP J.
Abstract: In
Prophetic Politics,Philip J. Haroldoffers an original interpretation of the political dimension of Emmanuel Levinas's thought. Harold argues that Levinas's mature position inOtherwise Than Beingbreaks radically with the dialogical inclinations of his earlierTotality and Infinityand that transformation manifests itself most clearly in the peculiar nature of Levinas's relationship to politics.Levinas's philosophy is concerned not with the ethical per se, in either its applied or its transcendent forms, but with the source of ethics. Once this source is revealed to be an anarchic interruption of our efforts to think the ethical, Levinas's political claims cannot be read as straightforward ideological positions or principles for political action. They are instead to be understood "prophetically," a position that Harold finds comparable to the communitarian critique of liberalism offered by such writers as Alasdair MacIntyre and Charles Taylor. In developing this interpretation, which runs counter to formative influences from the phenomenological tradition, Harold traces Levinas's debt to phenomenological descriptions of such experiences as empathy and playfulness.Prophetic Politicswill highlight the relevance of the phenomenological tradition to contemporary ethical and political thought-a long-standing goal of the series-while also making a significant and original contribution to Levinas scholarship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1j7x78v
CHAPTER 2 PLAY AND RESPONSIBILITY from:
Prophetic Politics
Abstract: Levinas’s use of the term
ethicsis a novel one. Ethics is the study of morality, an answer to the question “What are we to do?” In the vulgar sense of the term, when I am concerned for how my actions affect others—when I am put in question, as Levinas says—I have an ethical attitude. I can of course have a variety of other attitudes: professional, profit-maximizing, theoretical, and intimate all come to mind. As a discipline, ethics takes all of these into consideration, and is incomplete without the study of politics, as Aristotle taught. Ethics, and ultimately
CHAPTER 5 TRADITION AND FINITE FREEDOM from:
Prophetic Politics
Abstract: In his book
The Parallax ViewSlavoj Žižek brings up a common refrain in the lament for a too-permissive age: that children lack firm limits and this lack of stability leads to license and excess. The reaction of a conservative desire for the imposition of strict standards on the young might not only be counterproductive, he writes, but also a manifestation of a desire to maintain an illusion and avoid the real paradox of freedom—the paradox that an absence of limits causes the loss of an illusion of freedom found in the violation of those very limits.¹ There is
CHAPTER TWO Magical Capture in a Landscape of Terror: from:
Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: One afternoon while young Olaudah Equiano’s parents worked in the fields, he spied an intruder kidnap the “stout” children of his neighbors two yards over. He shouted out to his friends, who caught the assailants and bound them, and together they waited for their parents to return home and punish the crime. This was no uncommon occurrence: attackers from other regions frequently raided Equiano’s village to “carry off as many [children] as they could seize,”¹ a practice that was especially acute in times of famine. So common were these raids and other attacks on his village that Equiano’s family and
CHAPTER FIVE Childless Mothers and Dead Husbands: from:
Metaphor and the Slave Trade in West African Literature
Abstract: Though the transatlantic slave trade was outlawed in Denmark in 1802, in England in 1807 , in the United States in 1808, in Sweden and Norway in 1813, in the Netherlands in 1814, and in France both in 1794 and again in 1817 (after Napoleon reinstated the trade in 1802 ), the illicit trade in human lives was still a lucrative enterprise on the west coast of Africa by the 1830 s and ’40s. Historians of West Africa disagree on the degree of impact that abolition had on the sale of slaves, both domestic and transatlantic, but all agree that
Book Title: Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries-Volume 9 of Religion & Society
Publisher: Berkshire Publishing Group LLC
Author(s): Bonk Jonathan J.
Abstract: The Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries is the ninth and final volume of the acclaimed Religion and Society series, focusing on the historical impact of missions over the centuries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jd94tp
D from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: The term
developmentin missionary activity has normally referred to the process by which the physical and social needs of persons and groups are given attention along with their spiritual needs. The goals have been to raise people from poverty, alleviate suffering, and improve the social situation of the oppressed. The motive has been twofold. First was the desire to follow the mandate of the Old Testament prophets, who called on Israel to care for the poor, the widow, and the orphan, and to follow Jesus Christ, who healed the sick and reached out to the marginalized. Second came the
F from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Many Evangelical Protestant missions, including many of the largest and most influential, have their roots in the faith-mission tradition. Examples of such missions include the China Inland Mission (now the Overseas Missionary Fellowship), Africa Inland Mission, Christian and Missionary Alliance, Wycliffe Bible Translators, and New Tribes. The founding principle, which remained the most distinctive characteristic of faith missions, was that they permitted no overt fundraising but relied on quiet faith in God to meet financial needs.
H from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Missiologists who study the history of mission share many overlapping concerns with their colleagues in other disciplines, not the least of which is the requirement to practice good historical technique. Some common aims
I from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: The term “inculturation” or “enculturation” was originally coined by sociocultural anthropologists to refer to the process by which individuals acquire their culture as members of a human society. Subsequently, “inculturation” was appropriated by mission theologians to refer to the evangelization of culture, the process by which the Gospel illuminates and transforms culture, while culture reexpresses and even—to a certain extent—reinterprets the Gospel. Joseph Masson, SJ, first used the term in this way in 1962, but it came into current usage in the 1970s, after the earlier terms “adaptation” and “incarnation” were deemed missiologically unsatisfactory. The most important influence
J from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: As late as the 1970s sociologists like James Beckford were able to characterize the Jehovah’s Witnesses as a working-class phenomenon
L from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: From the late fifteenth century to the present, Latin America has been the recipient of continuous missionary activity. Sometimes myopic and sometimes farsighted, this activity has played a major role in shaping the culture of the southern half of the Western Hemisphere.
M from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: A martyr is defined as “one who voluntarily suffers death as the penalty of witness to and refusing to renounce his religion” (
Webster’s Third New International Dictionary of the English Language). For purposes of quantification, Christian martyrs are “believers in Christ who have lost their lives prematurely, in situations of witness, as a result of human hostility.” This definition can be expounded as follows: “Believers in Christ” are individuals from the entire Christian community of Roman Catholics, Orthodox, Protestants, Anglicans, Marginal Christians, and Independents. “‘Lost their lives” restricts it to Christians actually put to death, for whatever reason. “Prematurely” means
P from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Pacifism is a philosophy whose adherents reject violence, particularly war. The root meaning of the word comes from the Latin
pax(peace) andfacere(to make); i.e., to make peace. Pacifism is found from ancient times to the present, among both secular and religious persons, in simple societies as well as in advanced technological states. Pacifism is not to be confused with passivity. Making peace is active—adherents are committed to building a peaceful world.
T from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Technology refers to the material elements of human culture—including artifacts, tools, machines, and computers—that help facilitate the pursuit of goals. Although technology predates science, today it commonly relates to applied science, including engineering, modes of transport, communication, medicine, warfare, print and visual media, electronics, and the digitization of information. Christian mission has learned to use technology to pursue its own goals.
W from:
Encyclopedia of Missions and Missionaries
Abstract: Whether viewed as the breakdown of civilization, as its ultimate and most ennobling expression, or as something in between, war has always been fraught with possibility and peril for religious leaders, activists, and people of faith. War amplifies passions and exposes societal rifts even as it generates calls for unity and narratives of common experience. War offers the hope of transforming hostile nations and peoples politically, culturally, and religiously, but also threatens to poison relations between victor and vanquished, liberator and liberated. War creates mission fields and troubles those very same fields.
1 Interpreting the Love Commands in Social Context: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) OGLETREE THOMAS W.
Abstract: Biblical portrayals of the love commands are interwoven with presentations of more comprehensive bodies of commandments, laws, and ordinances that order human affairs in particular social settings. The love commands provide a substantive foundation for these more complex resources, undergirding their authority and informing efforts to observe them faithfully in ongoing life practices. This essay focuses on distinctive yet overlapping treatments of the love commands contained in the book of Deuteronomy and in Matthew’s presentation of Jesus’s Sermon on the Mount, with selective references to related materials in other biblical texts. Deuteronomy ventures a comprehensive yet realistic vision of a
3 “Repellent Text”: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) O’DONOVAN OLIVER
Abstract: James O’Donnell has characterized Book 10 of the
Confessions, with a measure of irony perhaps, as a “repellent and frustrating text.”¹ The reason has to do with the book’s structure: “bright mystical vision, culminating in luminous and often-quoted words … is suddenly derailed by an obsessive and meticulous examination of conscience.” The structural difficulty is, however, also a material one. The whole character of Augustine’s ethics as presented in this book is put in question for O’Donnell by the sudden transition from the luminous to the meticulous. To understand the ethics ofConfessions10 then (which means, as with everything
5 Kant on Practical and Pathological Love from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) HARE JOHN
Abstract: Immanuel Kant says, in a section of his second critique called “Of the Drives of Pure Practical Reason,” that we are subjects, not sovereigns, in the moral realm. He interprets the love command in light of this.
8 Empathy, Compassion, and Love of Neighbor from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) REEDER JOHN P.
Abstract: Arthur Schopenhauer asks, “How is it possible for
another’sweal and woe to move my will immediately, that is, in exactly the same way in which it is usually moved only by my own weal and woe?”¹ He answers that this is possible “only through that other man’s becomingthe ultimate objectof my will in the same way as I myself otherwise am.” This in turn “necessarily presupposes that, in the case of hiswoeas such, I suffer directly with him, I feelhiswoe just as I ordinarily feel only my own; and, likewise, I directly desire
9 Forgiveness in the Service of Love from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) FARLEY MARGARET A.
Abstract: In a volume that aims to expand our understandings of Christian love by clarifying love’s meaning in theory and practice, a chapter devoted to “forgiveness” may appear marginal to the task. Yet the opposite is the case. There is no genuine Christian forgiveness without love, and love is sometimes tested in its ultimate possibility and imperative by the forgiveness it generates. Moreover, the construals of forgiveness that are central to much of Christian theology slip into caricature unless they include love in their foundation, framework, and movement. Christians believe that God’s love for humans is revealed—perhaps centrally—in God’s
10 Agape as Self-Sacrifice: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) SANTURRI EDMUND N.
Abstract: Here I offer a contentious proposal: Christian love is essentially
self-sacrifice, however else that love must be described. More particularly, Christian love—agapein the most frequently employed New Testament designation—marks a quality of character, a theological virtue, one incorporating precisely an agent’s disposition to sacrifice the interests of the self for the good of the neighbor, whatever else such love may say about the identity of the neighbor or the nature of the good in question.¹ Note especially that in this account, the relation between agape and self-sacrifice isessentialrather than accidental,necessaryrather than contingent,intrinsic
11 Eudaimonism and Christian Love from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) SIMMONS FREDERICK V.
Abstract: The relationship between eudaimonism and Christian love is a vast and vexing topic, in part because both notions have been taken to mean so many things. Of course, eudaimonia itself has been variously understood.¹ Indeed, as the transliteration of the term from Greek into English suggests, eudaimonia is notoriously difficult to translate, reflecting long-standing disagreements about the content of this abstract idea.² Furthermore, apart from controversy regarding the nature of eudaimonia, eudaimonism has signified several positions in its own right. Eudaimonism often denotes theories describing the connection between eudaimonia and morality, although not always.³ Moreover, there is considerable diversity among
13 Evolution, Agape, and the Image of God: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) JACKSON TIMOTHY P.
Abstract: In chapter 4 of
On the Origin of Species, Charles Darwin briefly discusses why birds sing. It is often, he notes, a function of “the severest rivalry between the males of many species to attract by singing the females.”¹ A particularly strong or melodious song will contribute to reproductive success both by inducing females to mate and by announcing territoriality to other males. Darwin was unaware of modern genetics, but neo-Darwinians would say that a strikingly robust or appealing song makes it more likely that the male will be able to get his genes into the next generation and, over
15 Global Health Justice: from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) CAHILL LISA SOWLE
Abstract: Global health care is a subset of the problems of global justice and global poverty as well as of gender justice worldwide. Problems of global justice, including health-care access, demand a practical and political response from all Christians. This requires that Christians develop the significance of Christian love beyond personal virtue and beneficence and beyond the cultivation of a distinctive communal way of life. These meanings of love are biblically attested, have been central in Christian tradition, and remain vital to Christian ethics today. Yet Christian social ethics for a global era must also show why a personal and ecclesial
20 Neighbor Love in the Jewish Tradition from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) GREEN RONALD M.
Abstract: In fact, the love commandment is not out of place. As a part of the “Holiness Code” detailed in Leviticus, it belongs to the effort to create a holy
Afterword from:
Love and Christian Ethics
Author(s) WERPEHOWSKI WILLIAM
Abstract: Love and Christian Ethicsaddresses significant authors, texts, and topics dealing with the interlaced meanings of divine love, love for God, neighbor love, and love for oneself. A recurring question is whether and how the Christian moral life amounts to a kind of eudaimonism. The book also offers insights and arguments that develop alternative accounts of the normative content of the command to love the neighbor as oneself. Beyond these concerns, the collection practically reframes an ethic of agape regarding (and this is a partial list) love’s motivational effectiveness, sexual life, the moral repair of communities, and interreligious exchange.
Book Title: The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church-Laws about Life, Death and the Family in So-called Catholic Countries
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): PÉREZ-AGOTE ALFONSO
Abstract: The waning influence of the Catholic church in the ethical and political debate. For centuries the Catholic Church was able to impose her ethical rules in matters related to the intimate, that is, questions concerning life (from its beginning until its end) and the family, in the so-called Catholic countries in Western Europe. When the polity started to introduce legislation that was in opposition to the Catholic ethic, the ecclesiastical authorities and part of the population reacted. The media reported massive manifestations in France against same-sex marriages and in Spain against the de-penalization of abortion. In Italy the Episcopal conference entered the political field in opposition to the relaxation of several restrictive legal rules concerning medically assisted procreation and exhorted the voters to abstain from voting so that the referendum did not obtain the necessary quorum. In Portugal, to the contrary, the Church made a “pact" with the prime minister so that the law on same-sex marriages did not include the possibility of adoption. And in Belgium the Episcopal conference limited its actions to clearly expressing with religious, legal, and anthropological arguments its opposition to such laws, which all other Episcopal conferences did also. In this book, the authors analyse the full spectrum of the issue, including the emergence of such laws; the political discussions; the standpoints defended in the media by professionals, ethicists, and politicians; the votes in the parliaments; the political interventions of the Episcopal conferences; and the attitude of professionals. As a result the reader understands what was at stake and the differences in actions of the various Episcopal conferences. The authors also analyse the pro and con evaluations among the civil population of such actions by the Church. Finally, in a comparative synthesis, they discuss the public positions taken by Pope Francis to evaluate if a change in Church policy might be possible in the near future. Research by GERICR (Groupe européen de recherche interdisciplinaire sur le changement religieux), a European interdisciplinary research group studying religious changes coordinated by Alfonso Pérez-Agote. Contributors Céline Béraud (Université de Caen), Karel Dobbelaere (KU Leuven/University of Antwerp), Annalisa Frisina (Università degli Studi di Padova), Franco Garelli (Università degli Studi di Torino), Antonio Montañés (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Maria João Oliveira (University of Porto), Enzo Pace (Università degli Studi di Padova), Alfonso Pérez-Agote (University Complutense of Madrid), Philippe Portier (École pratique des hautes études, Paris-Sorbonne), Jose Santiago (Universidad Complutense de Madrid), Roberto Francesco Scalon (Università degli Studi di Torino), Helena Vilaça (University of Porto), Liliane Voyé (Université Catholique de Louvain)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jkts6b
INTRODUCTION from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) PÉREZ-AGOTE ALFONSO
Abstract: Most studies concerning the evolution of Catholicism in Western Europe underscore in general the clear decrease in church practices and, sometimes also, the decline or even the erosion of the orthodox beliefs. However, the loss of the impact of Catholicism on these societies manifests itself also in the changes in certain laws in the domain of ethics, which until very recently, were profoundly marked by the Christian vision. This indicates the diminishing ascendancy of Catholicism over our societies, an ‘exculturation’ that testifies to a further step in the secularization process.¹ Indeed, in the last quarter of the 20 th and
“MARIAGE POUR TOUS” from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) PORTIER PHILIPPE
Abstract: Making marriage open to same-sex couples is one of the “new public issues”¹ that are controversial. In France, the passing of the marriage for everyone act gave rise to the expression of and confrontation between very divergent views. Among the opponents of the bill, the Catholics appeared as key players. From August 2012 onwards, some bishops aimed at acting as “whistleblowers”.² In the months that followed, up to the adoption of the bill by the French parliament and even beyond, some Catholics conducted a moral re-armament campaign against
le mariage pour tous(marriage for everyone), with the aim of challenging
THE ITALIAN CATHOLIC CHURCH AND THE ARTIFICIAL-INSEMINATION REFERENDUM from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) SCALON ROBERTO
Abstract: The Italian biotechnological sector has become a battlefield between the Catholic Church and the various actors who disagree with its positions. They represent various power and knowledge subsystems in a society which has become complex. The conflict also grows out of the paradox of a society – like the Italian – which is partly secularized but can still portray itself as majority Catholic. From the social point of view, Catholicism continues to be the
basso continuoof collective conscience, although among the Italian population many attitudes and behaviours in the field of faith and religious practice have deviated – either discreetly or decisively
ETHICAL CHALLENGES OF THE CATHOLIC CHURCH IN PORTUGAL from:
The Intimate. Polity and the Catholic Church
Author(s) OLIVEIRA MARIA JOÃO
Abstract: There is no public debate on euthanasia and there is serious penalization for this practice. These changes were not exactly peaceful and originated more or less enlarged debates, sometimes in a moderate way and sometimes leading to the radicalization of
Book Title: Sémiotique et vécu musical-Du sens à l'expérience, de l'expérience au sens
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Reybrouck Mark
Abstract: Nouvelles perspectives en sémiotique. Tout est musique, et la musique nous accompagne partout : ces lieux communs n’ont jamais été si vrais qu’aujourd’hui, au temps de l’arrosage musical continuel. Cette ubiquité, loin d’être simplement une mode, nous oblige à repenser sémiotiquement la fonction et le fonctionnement de la musique. Les essais composant Sémiotique et vécu musical montrent dans quelle direction se dirigent les recherches de nos jours. L’analyse de l’expérience musicale, par exemple, détermine la réception affective, peut provoquer l’ébranlement intérieur, transformer le temps vécu, changer et déterminer les structures de l’expérience ainsi que l’expérientialité. L’expérience musicale est profondément liée à l’incarnation et à la corporalité. Elle peut redéfinir l’horizon de compréhension, moduler les attentes, déterminer et délimiter les contenus phénoménaux. Elle est fondamentalement conditionnée par l’interaction physique avec un instrument ou encore modelée par le studio d’enregistrement. L’intelligence artificielle et l’usage de robots dans des spectacles commencent à remettre en cause nos conceptions de l’expérience musicale. Ces nouvelles perspectives développées en sémiotique s’ouvrent nécessairement et impérativement aux sciences cognitives, aux nouvelles approches de la musicologie, à la transdisciplinarité et au transmédial. Le caractère innovant du présent ouvrage qui touche la théorie, la méthodologie et l’empirisme, témoigne de la vivacité, de l’inventivité et du dynamisme qui caractérisent la sémiotique toujours jeune, curieuse et surprenante. Contributors Sylvain Brétéché (Aix-Marseille Université), Guillaume Deveney (Aix-Marseille Université), Carole Egger (Université de Strasbourg), Christine Esclapez (Aix-Marseille Université ), Márta Grabócz (Université de Strasbourg), Michel Imberty (Université de Paris X, Nanterre), Thomas Le Colleter (Université Paris-IV Sorbonne), Gabriel Manzaneque (Aix-Marseille Université), Zaven Paré (Universidade Federal do Rio de Janeiro), Isabelle Reck (Université de Strasbourg), Mathias Rousselot (Aix-Marseille Université)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1jkts7v
La protonarrativité, un concept entre neurosciences et musique from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Imberty Michel
Abstract: Le concept de
narrativitéfait aujourd’hui fureur dans les sciences humaines, et la musicologie et la sémiologie musicale n’échappent pas à son influence. Ce concept peut cependant paraître polémique parce qu’il vient plutôt d’une tradition de l’analyse des textes littéraires, et que son utilisation dans le domaine de la musique relance la vieille question posée jadis par J.-J. Nattiez et réactualisée de façon admirable par son ouvrage récent,La musique, les images et les mots(2010). Mais plus encore, le concept de narrativité fait problème, eu égard à la tradition narratologique, lorsqu’il est théorisé par la psychologie cognitive et par
L’incontournabilité du préjugé: from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Rousselot Mathias
Abstract: Chacun écoute le monde avec ses propres oreilles, et
entendplus favorablement un sens, le sien. Ce sens que je fais mien, ce sens que jeprivatise, si évident pour-soi et si secret pour les autres, configurepour-soiles possibilités de compréhension du monde sonore musical, cette configuration ayant toutefois « le caractère relatif-restreint que la contingence de notre Être-au-Monde historique et culturel prescrit » (Salanskis, 1999, p. 2). Lesens pour-soise réduit donc à mon horizon de compréhension possible du monde, monde au fondement duquel règne ce que je préjuge du monde. Heidegger (1986) a très bien montré
Perspective haptique et expérience du musicien: from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Manzaneque Gabriel
Abstract: Dans le cadre d’une activité musicale, le recours à un objet intermédiaire, un « outil » (Schaeffner, [1968] 1994, p. 370), caractérise la notion d’acte instrumental. L’objet-instrument est pourvu d’une zone fonctionnelle où l’instrumentiste intervient afin d’émettre des sons et de produire du musical par la mise en vibration du corps instrumental et le jeu par agencement des sons et des intervalles. Cette zone, généralement
haptique¹, permet un processus de translation, d’encodage et d’interaction des corps, instrumentiste et instrumental. Ce processus tend à s’affiner au fil de l’évolution musicienne et musicale de l’individu. En effet, chaque occurrence de quelque activité
Le studio d’enregistrement comme laboratoire du son from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Deveney Guillaume
Abstract: Dans le cadre des productions de musiques actuelles, le studio d’enregistrement est un lieu d’un intérêt capital dans l’élaboration du projet artistique. Comme le fait remarquer Simon Frith dans la citation d’introduction, il est un espace de coopération, de coaction entre différents acteurs de la réalisation, qu’ils soient interprètes, compositeurs, arrangeurs ou encore ingénieurs du son. Il s’agit du creuset où les perspectives de ces acteurs se rencontrent pour élaborer un produit sonore singulier. C’est à cet endroit que l’oeuvre trouve sa
mise en matière sonore(Deveney, 2014) avant sa présentation à un public. L’importance de la coopération des acteurs
Angélica Liddell ou un théâtre sur le fil grinçant du rasoir from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Reck Isabelle
Abstract: Angélica est une artiste complète : auteure, actrice, performeuse et metteur en scène de ses propres pièces écrites pour la compagnie
Atra Bilisqu’elle crée en 1993 avec Gumersindo Puche. Touche-à-tout de l’écriture, on lui doit une quinzaine de pièces, des poèmes, des textes de théorisation (articles, introductions de ses pièces, digressions théoriques glissées dans ses textes dramatiques). Après un parcours essentiellement limité aux petites salles alternatives de Madrid dans les années quatre-vingt-dix, la consécration arrive d’abord en 2007 lorsquePerro muerto en tintorería. Los fuerteest montée au Centro Dramático Nacional par Gerardo Vera, puis en 2010 avecEl
La virtuosité artificielle des robots from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Author(s) Paré Zaven
Abstract: Le plus souvent, les démonstrations d’intelligence artificielle consistent à comparer les performances de différents programmes. Lorsque celle-ci est incarnée dans des robots, on remarque que les démonstrations technologiques de ces machines opèrent parfois selon des registres de contorsions artistiques pour séduire un public. Placer un instrument de musique dans les mains d’un robot n’est pas anodin et constitue un véritable défi technique. Des robots qui simulent aux robots qui imitent puis à ceux qui interprètent, les robots musiciens constituent une étape de développement technologique importante. L’action de vouloir démontrer un certain talent peut rendre évidente la vérité d’un savoir-faire, comme
Épilogue from:
Sémiotique et vécu musical
Abstract: Il est exagéré de prétendre que ce volume apporte une contribution innovatrice au développement de la sémiotique musicale. Celle-ci possède une longue tradition de distanciation par rapport à une insistance sur l’analyse traditionnelle et sur l’approche structurelle de la musique en faveur d’approches qui tiennent compte des processus de signification mise en acte par les auditeurs et les spectateurs. Nous sommes pourtant persuadés que ce volume et ces articles démontrent dans quelle direction la sémiotique musicale est en train de se diriger. La plupart des contributions dépassent le niveau structurel. La quête du sens et des conditions qui permettent la
Book Title: El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Zubía Teresa Oñate y
Abstract: La madre Tierra está preñada: algo está sucediendo. Se alumbran nuevos caminos, senderos más justos. A pesar de la crisis mundial y local podemos anunciar con optimismo que se observan señales. Rastreemos esos retazos, futuros ya presentes, posibles diversos, a pie de calle que apuntan hacia una democracia mucho más plural y participativa, más bella, donde nadie quede fuera del precioso (no contaminado) cielo estrellado. Los perdedores de la globalización, señores, están gritando con voz plural y unísona: ¡conectémonos! El Papa Francisco, Vattimo, Oñate, el Concilio Vaticano II o las Teologías de la liberación, las nuevas plataformas sociales… Hay señales: ¡investiguémoslas! Unamos todos estos horizontes: los bíblicos, los teológicos y los políticos que asisten nuestro mundo actual y postmoderno. Si logramos acompañarnos, conseguiremos interpretar, «dejar hablar lo no dicho del pasado, el bien que no está dado, el que tiene que poder venir si encuentra algún lugar adecuado donde poder acontecer». Si es así, podremos disfrutar, aún con límites, de un genial tapiz. Todas las piezas del puzle están sobre el terreno. La tierra prometida es esta…aquí y ahora, y es una tierra solidaria con entrañas de misericordia. La política, la religión y la razón siguen vivas, pero tienen un límite… ¡Sólo el amor podrá salvarnos! Jesús Lozano Pino es malagueño, Doctor en Filosofía y Magíster Universitario en Filosofía teórica y práctica por la UNED (especialidad en Historia de la fi losofía y pensamiento contemporáneo). Su investigación gira en torno a las líneas fronterizas entre fi losofía y teología, y cuya tesis titulada Más allá del infi nito, el límite: el amor. El oxímoron de lo divino (Refl ejos bíblicos, teológicos y políticos del debolismo kenótico-caritativo de Gianni Vattimo en la postmodernidad) pone en conexión al nuevo Papa Francisco y a la teología de la liberación con el pensamiento Oñate-Vattimo. Ex trabajador de Cáritas Diocesana y ex misionero en Latinoamérica. Allí realizó labores sociales y religiosas, entre otras, ministro extraordinario de la Palabra y los Sacramentos, director de la pastoral juvenil y profesor del seminario arquidiocesano de Cd. Bolívar. Actualmente es profesor ordinario del Seminario Diocesano de Málaga, encargándose de las asignaturas de Historia de la Filosofía Moderna y Contemporánea, compaginando dicha labor con la de profesor en el CES San José de Málaga (“Fundación Loyola" de la Compañía de Jesús).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k231pq
3. EL NUEVO PAPA FRANCISCO: from:
El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Jorge Bergoglio, deslumbró al mundo desde que apareció en el balcón de la Plaza de San Pedro. Pero lo que realmente dejó estupefacto a todos fue su petición pública al pueblo de Dios, de ayuda y oración. Él, que había sido elegido por
4. CONFLUENCIAS KENÓTICO-DEBOLISTAS CON LA TEOLOGÍA DE LA LIBERACIÓN from:
El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Al hilo de este compleja cuestión que plantea Vattimo con el debolismo kenóticocaritativo, desde su profundo conocimiento teológico y filosófico y, a pesar de considerarse más habermasiano que vattimiano, J. A. Estrada apoya la idea base de la kénosis, observando que la salvación no está referida simplemente al más allá, sino que se traduce en el más acá de la historia. Genera un proyecto de vida con sentido, sólo posible a partir de Jesús, como sugiere a lo largo de su libro
De la salvación a un proyecto de sentido. Por una cristología actual.
5. LA CARITAS: from:
El amor es el límite. Reflexiones sobre el cristianismo hermenéutico de G. Vattimo y sus consecuencias teológico-políticas
Abstract: Una persona (al igual que una religión y una sociedad) con actitudes democráticas: tolerante y respetuosa. El ser humano nuevo ha de ser un demócrata convencido. Comprometido con la democracia real, se esfuerza por desarrollar la actitud de la tolerancia
Book Title: Translatio y Cultura- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Silván Alfonso
Abstract: El presente volumen Translatio y Cultura forma parte de un ambicioso proyecto de investigación, Translatio, promovido por los responsables de la facultad de Lingüística Aplicada de la Universidad de Varsovia. Se trata, tomando un concepto muy amplio y poliédrico de traducción, de afrontar sucesivamente aspectos relevantes de su posibilidad múltiple y miscelánea. El diseño viene también a recuperar así un modo convincente de la tradicional miscelánea filológica dentro de los límites de un cierto monografismo liberalmente abierta a las inclinaciones y actividades diversas de los estudiosos. Esto, que define una metodología como actuación, también constituye un modo de encuesta y representación de la que hay y es imprescindible sondear y tomar en cuenta. El fenómeno de la traducción es, sin duda, clave portentosa de la cultura y la humanidad pues encierra la entidad y el saber mistérico de los esencial al ser humano que es el lenguaje, a lo cual se añade de prodigio traslaticio de su asimilación, intromisión multiplicadora o sobreposición entre las diversas manifestaciones concretas del mismo, las lenguas naturales, próximas y lejanas... El hecho es que la cuestión del ser del lenguaje se halla ahí comprometida, al igual que en consecuencia la cuestión bíblica o religiosa, la cuestión artística y literaria, la cuestión filológica como tantas otras pero que en ningún momento han de hacer olvidar a esas esenciales. Sea como fuere, el concepto de Cultura así lo exige.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k2325f
Introducción from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) de Haro Pedro Aullón
Abstract: Es
Translatio y Culturael segundo momento y volumen de un ambicioso proyecto de investigación, Translatio, de la Universidad de Varsovia, promovido por la Profesora Anna Kukulka-Wojtasik. Se trata, tomando un concepto muy amplio y poliédrico de traducción, de afrontar sucesivamente aspectos relevantes de su posibilidad múltiple y miscelánea. El diseño viene también a recuperar así un modo convincente de la tradicional miscelánea filológica dentro de los límites de un cierto monografismo liberalmente abierto a las inclinaciones y actividades diversas de los estudiosos. Esto, que define una metodología como actuación, también constituye un modo de encuesta y representación de lo
5. Conceptualización estética y traducción: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Marco María Rosario Martí
Abstract: La característica alemana de poseer una doble posibilidad de conceptualización gracias al general establecimiento dualista entre léxico germánico y léxico grecolatino en la lengua teórica y filosófica, con todas las posibilidades semánticas y terminológicas que esto posibilita, constituye un aspecto técnico traductológico de primer orden. Aquí estudiaré el aspecto de constitución germánica del par
AnmutyWürde, ejercido en su plenitud terminológica frente a los correspondientes latinos y sus posibilidades a partir del indoeuropeo. Sin duda es el texto schilleriano el centro en lengua alemana de este par esencial de la terminología estética. Nos aproximaremos pues a la dificultad y
9. El dinero revolvedor y la evolución del tópico del mundo al revés from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) de Tejerina Magdalena Dobrowolska
Abstract: Creo que en las numerosas teorías de lo grotesco y también en las diversas manifestaciones de esta estética puede señalarse un denominador común. La característica fundamental de lo grotesco es la unión de elementos
10. Traducir el balneario: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Lozano Carlos Sánchez
Abstract: Voy a tratar de ciertas palabras muy relevantes vinculadas a la hidroterapia y el problema traductográfico que revelan. Ciertamente el término ‘SPA’ es aquel que actualmente se presenta con mayor frecuencia y complejidad léxica al tiempo que describe un fenómeno extraordinariamente singular tanto en sentido lingüístico como finalmente traductológico. La era del turismo representa un nuevo y tercer gran universo tras el mundo termal creado por la cultura romana, evolucionado en la generalidad europea a partir de las prácticas balnearias, desarrolladas en establecimientos y complejos urbanísticos situados en torno a las fuentes mineromedicinales, y en determinados espacios del litoral, como
11. Alusiones culturales en la prensa española from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Madyjewska Katarzyna
Abstract: Los textos de prensa son por antonomasia obras efímeras y por eso raras veces son objeto de análisis desde el punto de vista de los estudios de traducción, normalmente interesados por obras más extensas. De hecho, en muy contadas ocasiones a un traductor se le encarga trabajar con un texto periodístico, porque en la mayoría de los casos son los propios periodistas quienes buscan recursos y traducen, con menor o mayor éxito, las noticias necesarias. Sin embargo, ese tipo de textos refleja el estado actual de un idioma. Da muestras de fenómenos lingüísticos que un traductor puede luego encontrar en
13. El problema de la traducibilidad de la realidad: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Jackiewicz Aleksandra
Abstract: El renombre de la poesía de Julian Tuwim, uno de los mayores poetas polacos del período de entreguerras, comenzó en 1918 junto con el fin de la Primera Guerra Mundial y la proclamación de la independencia de Polonia. El autor, considerado por otros artistas como el “príncipe de la poesía” (Urbanek, 2013: 5), fue uno de los primeros poetas capaces de dar la bienvenida a la Polonia independiente, ya que realizaba un modelo poético muy específico y basado en el elogio de la cotidianidad de los años veinte y treinta del siglo pasado. Otra característica que subraya lo extraordinario de
14. Sobre la fidelidad en la traducción de poesía. from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Farré Xavier
Abstract: ¿Cómo es la construcción de un poema? ¿Cuáles son los elementos que se ponen en combinación, en juego, para conseguir un tipo de artefacto literario dentro de unos cánones o no de lo que termina siendo considerado como texto poético? Es evidente que la teoría no ha terminado de dar una respuesta satisfactoria a estas preguntas. Además, las tendencias que se han ido sucediendo a lo largo de todo el siglo XX en la poesía occidental han ido rompiendo la posibilidad de poder llegar a un consenso sobre el hecho poético.
17. La percepción de la identidad israelí y palestina de las traducciones a través de la literatura hebrea: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Bejarano Ana María
Abstract: Uno de los mayores retos a los que se tiene que enfrentar un traductor de literatura hebrea contemporánea es el de hacer llegar al lector el complejo mapa identitario del Israel actual. No en vano el afamado escritor A. B. Yehoshua (Jerusalén, 1936) afirma que “se diría que no existe otro pueblo tan ocupado en autodefinirse y determinar su identidad como el pueblo judío” (2008: 16). Si la cuestión identitaria resulta siempre un asunto ya de por sí delicado, enmarañado y difícil de trasladar de una cultura a otra y de una lengua a otra, el caso del Israel actual
20. La adaptación del contenido en los diccionarios médicos traducidos y publicados en España en el siglo XIX from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Diez Carmen Quijada
Abstract: El traductor actual de obras científicas tiene clara conciencia de que debe ser totalmente fiel al documento original. Busca la fidelidad de tal manera, que a veces lo que consigue es que el texto traducido no se entienda; o lo que es casi peor, que carezca de pertinencia para el lector al que supuestamente se dirige. Pero, por mucho que esto sea así ahora, la historia de la traducción científica nos muestra que a lo largo de los siglos los traductores han intervenido activamente en la forma final del “producto” conseguido, modificando su forma y su contenido de acuerdo con
24. Le roman de Tristan et ses traductions en Europe au Moyen Age from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Buchinger Danielle
Abstract: Tous les critiques sont d’accord pour penser que l’histoire de Tristan et Iseut est d’origine celtique. En effet toutes les versions conservées contiennent des motifs et des épisodes qui se retrouvent dans certains récits irlandais du Moyen Age ; on peut donc supposer que parmi les influences qui se sont exercées sur le développement de la légende de Tristan, il en est d’irlandaises. Les lieux de l’action sont répartis sur l’Irlande, le pays de Galles, la Cornouailles et la Bretagne. Pour le reste on notera aussi que les noms des principaux protagonistes sont d’origine celtique : par exemple Marc, qui
32. La traduction de la culture dans le domaine judiciaire from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Veglia Arlette
Abstract: Je me propose aujourd’hui d’analyser l’impact de la «
translatio» de la culture dans le domaine judiciaire, en particulier en ce qui concerne la formation des juges et des traducteurs juridiques ; notre objectif est double : pédagogique d’une part (comment le formateur peut-il améliorer la traduction de la culture, en d’autres termes la compétence culturelle, des apprenants)
33. Le miroir du sourd: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Burgat Sandrine
Abstract: L’interprétation est une activité professionnelle qui consiste à réexprimer fidèlement ce qui est dit dans une langue donnée (langue de départ) dans une autre langue (langue d’arrivée).
37. Concept et image du lecteur de littérature de jeunesse en traduction: from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Balatchi Raluca-Nicoleta
Abstract: Les domaines récents d’analyse de la traduction – l’histoire et la critique des traductions – permettent une compréhension complexe du phénomène du traduire par la relation du texte traduit au contexte de sa production et de sa parution : coordonnées spatio-temporelles, normes traductives valables pour une époque, profil du traducteur, de l’éditeur. L’image du récepteur du texte traduit ne saurait être analysée que dans un cadre théorique plurifactoriel de la traduction.
41. Etholinguistics expecting from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Zaliwska-Okrutna Urszula
Abstract: One such source is the intuitive, though regularly reaffirmed, impression that any translation is ultimately dependent on the identity of the translator. In practice, it means going beyond the analysis of texts and processes involved in rendering the original text in the target language, it means supplementing these analyses with being inquisitive about an individual mint mark
44. How to cope with word plays, puns and cultural references in translation. from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Tęcza Agata
Abstract: The Simpsons is an American animated sitcom created by Matt Groening and broadcasted by FOX Broadcasting Company. The plot revolves around a dysfunctional family of five, living in a fictional town of Springfield. At the beginning, the creators of the show planned the Simpsons to be the protagonists of short episodes shown during The Tracy Ullman Show. That form lasted only for three seasons, between its debut on 19 th April 1987 till 1989, as the popularity of the show made the producers rethink the whole idea, redesign slightly the characters and expand the universe by introducing many supporting characters.
45. POLITENESS AND VALUES IN POLISH, DUTCH AND FLEMISH FINANCIAL DIRECT MAIL LETTERS from:
Translatio y Cultura
Author(s) Waterlot Muriel
Abstract: In her book
Cross-cultural Pragmatics(1991) Anna Wierzbicka claims that values affect the system of speech acts. She demonstrates this on the basis of a comparative study between English and Polish requests. Using a series of examples she shows that the interaction between an Englishman and a Pole does not always go smoothly, because of the fact that differences in the formulation and interpretation of requests can lead to misunderstandings. According to Wierzbicka, two cultural values held by Poles seem to motivate certain lexico-syntactic phenomena in this type of speech acts namely cordiality and courtesy.
DEFINICIONES DE DERECHO: from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) de la Torre Ángel Sánchez
Abstract: El alcance de las definiciones puede ser más o menos exacto. Por ello se han de tener en cuenta incidencias externas sobre la realidad definida (
Tópica,67,70) y que han de ser incluidas en el proceso racional de toda investigación, dentro del parámetro general de que “el conocimiento de las causas hace asequible conocer sus consecuencias”.
¿ES POSIBLE UNA DEFINICIÓN INTEGRAL DEL DERECHO? from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Aleix Cristina Fuertes-Planas
Abstract: En efecto, a lo largo de la historia se han producido múltiples definiciones. Casi todas ellas tienen en común que no dan una respuesta satisfactoria de manera unitaria. Algunas sólo se refieren a su aspecto valorativo, dejando a un lado otras perspectivas o considerando que un Derecho que no corresponda con esa faceta valorativa no es auténticamentejurídico. Otros destacan que lo único importante en el Derecho es su positividad, su vigencia formal, con independencia de cualesquiera otras consideraciones éticas, sociológicas,
EL PAPEL DE LOS PRINCIPIOS EN LA TEORÍA DEL DERECHO DE RONALD DWORKIN from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Fontanillo José Antonio Pinto
Abstract: “El filósofo del derecho más importante de su generación” al decir de Richard Revesz decano de la NYU Law School y el segundo autor norteamericano del siglo XX más citado en el campo del Derecho según
The Journal of Legal Studies,Ronald Myles Dworkin (Worcester, Estados Unidos, 11 de diciembre de 1931; Londresl4 de febrero de 2013) ha dejado sin duda una importante estela de su paso por el universo jurídico. Ya sea en el ámbito académico: Harvard, Yale, Oxford, London (University College) y Nueva York, ya sea en las tribunas de opinión de actualidad (especialmente desde su atalaya del
DEFINICIÓN DEL DERECHO FINANCIERO, FISCAL Y TRIBUTARIO. from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Angosto Pilar Cascales
Abstract: Comenzaremos por definir una serie de instituciones comprendidas en el Derecho Público y que regulan la actividad financiera del stado, desde la más amplia a la más especifica. Asi tenemos: Rama del Derecho público que trata de la ordenaciónjuridica de la actividad financiera del Estado, considerada en su conjunto. Se regula asi toda la actividad de la hacienda pública, tanto la referida a la consecución de los recursos, cualquiera que sea su origen (ingresos), como a la de gestión y distribución de los mismos (gastos).
LA TRANSPARENCIA PRESUPUESTARIA COMO PRINCIPIO DE RESPONSABILIDAD ADMINISTRATIVA from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) Angosto Pilar Cascales
Abstract: Para el Profesor Rodríguez Bereijo, el Presupuesto del Estado es el acto legislativo mediante el cual se autoriza el montante máximo de los gastos que el Gobierno puede realizar durante un período de tiempo determinado en las atenciones que detalladamente se especifican y se prevén los ingresos necesarios para cubrirlos. También lo define como Presupuesto es la institución en que históricamente se han plasmado las luchas políticas de las representaciones populares por conseguir el derecho a fiscalizar y controlar el ejercicio del poder financiero.
EL PRINCIPIO DE IMAGEN FIEL Y LA DEFINICIÓN DEL CONCEPTO DE DERECHO from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del Derecho II
Author(s) López Manuel Santaella
Abstract: Toda definición implica un concepto. El concepto puede ser verdadero o falso, completo o incompleto, exacto o confuso. Pero todo concepto hace posible una definición que permite identificar, mediante alguna forma de fijación de límites, en relación con conceptos análogos, el objeto al que nos referimos. Por supuesto, el modo más seguro de transmitir o comunicar un concepto es el método deíctico, es decir, que para formular el concepto de mesa, lo más adecuado es señalar una mesa. Pero esto sólo se puede llevar a cabo cuando nos referimos a cosas corporales. Con las cosas incorporales no podemos utilizar ese
Book Title: Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): MARÍ JOSÉ MIGUEL PIQUER
Abstract: Nuestra experiencia docente y las lecturas que hemos recogido a lo largo de los paseos que hemos dado por ciertas áreas del conocimiento, y que ahora nos gustaría compartir con quienes se acercan a estas páginas, nos han mostrado que toda una corriente de pensamiento, que se extiende desde la Antigüedad hasta nuestra más reciente actualidad, ha venido formulando un modelo de formación intelectual que bien pudiera ser la base para resolver los problemas a los que se enfrenta la cultura contemporánea. Es la deuda infinita que hemos contraído con aquellos pensadores cuya larga sombra se cierne sobre el horizonte de quienes han tratado de prolongar, en la modernidad, esa práctica perversa de la palabra escrita, de esa palabra que Platón llamó Filosofía, y que nosotros, en nuestro espejo imaginario, llamamos saber.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k232t8
III. LA PAIDEIA GRIEGA: from:
Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Seguramente el recordado apotegma de Eugenio D’Ors: “Lo que no es tradición es plagio”
43es, cuando menos, algo exagerado, pero la postergación y el olvido, cuando no el menosprecio de lo clásico por nuestras autoridades políticas y educativas es el reflejo de una sociedad que reniega de un saber y de una cultura que han conformado los pilares de nuestra civilización, de nuestra forma de ser y de actuar; de una cultura que es recordada y memorizada en un memorable pasaje deFahrenheit 451, aquél que narra cómo un grupo de hombres y mujeres, a contracorriente de una sociedad que
VI. LOS STUDIA HUMANITATIS: from:
Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: Tradicionalmente, una parte de la historiografía ha venido reivindicando la idea que sostiene que el Renacimiento supuso un cambio o una ruptura con el ideal del medievo. Un ejemplo de esta concepción de la Historia la hallamos en la clásica obra de Jacob Burckhardt,
La cultura del Renacimiento en Italia, donde, ante la oscuridad, la barbarie y la superstición que ha caracterizado la era anterior452, el Renacimiento se concibe como una nueva etapa de esplendor del pensamiento clásico, como “una nueva luz” que lleva al hombre a convertirse en el centro de las miradas de la ciencia y de la
VIII. EL SABER EN LA UNIVERSIDAD DEL SIGLO XXI: from:
Repensar la Universidad. Reflexión histórica de un problema actual
Abstract: La escuela de la Teoría Crítica de la sociedad tuvo como baluarte el texto
Dialéctica de la Ilustración, escrito por Max Horkheimer y Teodoro Adorno durante sus primeros años de exilio en Estados Unidos. En el Prólogo de 1944-47, los autores se lamentaban del lastimoso estado de la tradición científica occidental, hasta el punto de afirmar “que pese a ver observado desde hacía muchos años, que en la actividad científica moderna, las grandes invenciones se pagan con una creciente decadencia de la cultura teórica, creímos, no obstante, poder seguir esa actividad hasta tal punto que nuestra contribución se limitase preferentemente
Book Title: Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): García José Antonio López
Abstract: El respaldo a la teoría de los derechos humanos, así como a las declaraciones y tratados internacionales, es un hecho geo-político de la mayor relevancia, al cual se han sumado por razones de convicción o conveniencia la mayoría de los países delo que llamamos “el mundo civilizado". Tales instrumentos se han convertido entonces en un punto de referencia obligado para cualquier estudio y discusión de carácter moral, jurídico y político, y en un paradigma para los valores humanos y criterios de legitimidad del ejercicio del poder público. La ciencia jurídica actual ha considerado que la dignidad humana es cualidad principalísima de todo ser humano, que debe ser respetada bajo cualquier circunstancia y bajo ese sustrato que fundamenta la convivencia social, la tendencia real es lograr su adecuada protección, encontrarla idea de que todos estamos involucrados en una tarea común; la tarea de conocer cuál es el vínculo que nos une en cuanto seres humanos o humanidad para llegar al cumplimiento de una responsabilidad de todas y todos; la preservación de la dignidad humana como núcleo esencial de los derechos humanos. El propósito de este libro es presentar, con una virtud de orientación teórica y sistémica, la más amplia información sobre las propuestas que los grandes tratadistas en la materia han formulado en los últimos años, haciendo énfasis en las expresiones que delimitan su concepción; tales como derechos naturales, derechos fundamentales, derechos subjetivos o derechos morales. Se resaltan también los aciertos y debilidades de sus distintas definiciones y de todo el elenco de categorías jurídicas relacionadas, para intentar ofrecernos un extenso panorama de lo que son o se consideran los derechos humanos y la forma en que su estudio se ha desarrollado desde el análisis de gabinete hasta la práctica. Para todo lo anterior, se abordan, entre otras, las teorías de los iusfilósofos recientes más reconocidos como Gregorio Peces-Barba, Luigi Ferrajoli, Angelo Papacchini, Robert Alexy, Ronald Dworkin, John Rawls, Francisco Laporta, Antonio E. Pérez Luño, LiborioHierro, y Elías Díaz; con lo que esta obra pretende convertirse en referencia ineludible para todos aquellos que se dediquen al estudio, investigación y aplicación de los temas que aborda, lo mismo que para quienes sólo deseen introducirse con bases firmes a la teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. GEOFREDO ANGULO LOPEZ. Es doctor en derechos fundamentales por la Universidad de Jaén, Andalucía (España), asesor ejecutivo de la Comisión de Derechos Humanos del Estado de Yucatán (México) y profesor e investigador del Centro de Investigaciones Jurídicas de la Facultad de Derecho de la Universidad Autónoma de Yucatán (México). Ha recibido el Primer lugar del Concurso estatal de Ensayo Jurídico La impartición de Justicia en el Nuevo Contexto Constitucional del Poder Judicial del Estado de Yucatán, 2012. Dentro de sus publicaciones destacan: “La ductilidad como núcleo esencial del Derecho: La reforma al artículo 1° de la Constitución mexicana", Revista de Estudios Jurídicos, Segunda Época n° 14, 2014. Colabora en la formación y capacitación especializada de funcionarios públicos en materia de derechos humanos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k232zb
Introducción from:
Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: El tema de los Derechos Humanos constituye en la actualidad un gran fenómeno social, político, jurídico y cultural actuando como código elemental de una ética universalmente aceptada, la ética del respeto a la dignidad de la persona humana. Los derechos humanos se estudian desde distintas perspectivas y, han adquirido una conciencia cada día más viva, no sólo de la existencia sino de la necesidad de respeto que implica cada uno de ellos. En los últimos años, al menos en México, se ha venido consolidando la tendencia, tanto de la sociedad civil organizada, como del ciudadano común víctima de la marginación
Capítulo I FUNDAMENTO Y LA NATURALEZA AMBIGUA DEL CONCEPTO DE DERECHOS HUMANOS from:
Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: Los Derechos Humanos es uno de los conceptos más utilizados y, actualmente, al parecer de carácter insoslayable en el actuar político y jurídico de las democracias modernas. La expresión « Derechos Humanos » apareció por primera vez en el derecho internacional, en el artículo 68 de la Carta de las Naciones Unidas, que autoriza al Consejo Económico y Social de la ONU a establecer comisiones para la promoción de los Derechos Humanos. Con el fin de la Segunda Guerra Mundial, pero sobre todo desde que las Naciones Unidas aprobaron la Declaración Universal de los Derechos Humanos el 10 de diciembre
Capítulo II DIGNIDAD, ORDENAMIENTO JURÍDICO Y VALORES: from:
Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: Entender los Derechos Humanos como valores supone llevar al nivel de la conciencia general las características históricas y sociales que identifican nuestro ser. Con los valores, además, nos encontramos con una dificultad importante; para lograr su identificación será preciso que el valor sea apreciado positivamente por el sujeto, lo cual conduce a cierto relativismo por depender de un acto estimativo. Por eso, pretendemos destacar aquí que, los valores, no pueden depender del provecho personal que logremos con ellos, porque, de ser así, todo valor cae en un puro subjetivismo. Para desplazar la mera noción individual, no tenernos obligatoriamente que entender
Capítulo VII TEORÍAS DE LOS DERECHOS HUMANOS (II): from:
Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: El pensamiento del autor italiano, Luigi Ferrajoli, está enfocado al análisis de la naturaleza de los derechos fundamentales y a la problemática relación que existe entre ellos y sus garantías. En estos dos elementos de los derechos, naturaleza y garantía, se encontraría también la principal aportación de este autor a la
teoría del derecho. La teoría jurídica de los derechos, que Ferrajoli ha expuesto a lo largo de su obra,³⁷⁸ supo1/11/2017ne una actualización de la discusión sobre los derechos fundamentales y, asimismo, otro importante progreso en la teoría de los Derechos Humanos, de proyección teórica en Latinoamérica también importante como
Capítulo VIII TEORÍAS DE LOS DERECHOS HUMANOS (III): from:
Teoría contemporánea de los derechos humanos. Elementos para una reconstrucción sistémica
Abstract: Para la comprensión de la teoría de los Derechos Humanos del iusfilósofo español, Francisco Laporta, partiremos de una doble crítica a dos características muy compartidas en la actualidad, que, en principio, son incompatibles con su idea de Derechos Humanos.
Primero, la tendencia a dotarles de un carácter progresivo, que se ve reflejado en los grados de concreción de las libertades individuales, en las exigencias de justiciabilidad de los derechos de contenido social y económico y, además, con el nacimiento de nuevas generaciones de derechos relacionados con temas tales como las nuevas tecnologías, la conservación del medio ambiente, la paz, o
Book Title: Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Seifert Josef
Abstract: Tomando por guía la acción, el presente libro analiza en sus dos primeras partes las vertientes fenomenológico- eidética, hermenéutica y ética de la acción en diálogo con los autores clásicos y contemporáneos que más representativamente las han abordado (Tomás de Aquino, Ricoeur, Polo, Scheler, Wojtyla..). El autor muestra que no son estadios superpuestos, sino que se puede transitar del análisis eidético al hermenéutico a través del agente motivado en sus actos voluntarios y de las mediaciones cultural e histórica de su actuación y se desemboca al fi n en el nivel ético cuando se repara en la exigencia de universalización que reivindica la acción en tanto que humana. La tercera parte aborda las dos fuentes éticas de la donación y la obligación, resaltando la convergencia de ambas desde el primado de la donación. Para ello Urbano Ferrer cuenta con los relevantes estudios sobre el don procedentes del área francesa (Mauss, Marion, Derrida, Bruaire..) y termina enmarcándolo constitutivamente en la persona. No pretende una síntesis de diferentes planteamientos, sino dejarse llevar por las cosas mismas en sus conexiones de esencia y traer a colación a propósito de ellas las averiguaciones de los autores aludidos, ejerciendo la crítica desde el contraste con las evidencias de esencia. Urbano FERRER SANTOS es Catedrático de Filosofía Moral de la Universidad de Murcia y Profesor Visitante de las Universidades de Dresde y Lublin. Su producción filosófica se centra en la fenomenología (con especial atención a Husserl, Scheler, Edith Stein, von Hildebrand, Reinach..), en Teoría de la Acción y en distintos estudios sobre la persona. Ha colaborado en varios Proyectos investigadores sobre cuestiones de Bioética. Es miembro de la SEFE (Sociedad Española de Fenomenología), miembro fundador de AEP (Asociación Española de Personalismo) y pertenece a la Sociedad Española de Bioética (AEBI).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k2337z
CAPÍTULO 1. EL PASO DEL QUERER ORGÁNICONATURAL AL QUERER-YO A TRAVÉS DE LA SINDÉ-RESIS: from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Clásicamente se diferencia entre la
voluntas ut naturay la voluntas ut ratio.³ A cada una le corresponde un modo propio de querer. Para los fines de esta investigación basta consignar que hay un querer ligado a la naturaleza corporal del hombre, en el que inicialmente no hay mediación explícita del “yo quiero”, y hay otro querer que depende expresamente del yo para constituirse como acto. Es la diferencia entre, por un lado, querer la salud, querer alimentarse cuando se tienen ganas, querer la felicidad… como algo meramente natural y, por otro lado, querer en particular este o aquel bien
CAPÍTULO 3. LO INVOLUNTARIO EN LA ACCIÓN: from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: En una primera fase Ricoeur, en ejercicio de la reducción eidética, esbozó un análisis pretendidamente exhaustivo de los componentes de la acción, así como puso de relieve las implicaciones relativas a sus límites como acción y las que se refieren a los límites en la voluntariedad del agente que se la autoatribuye. A ambos aspectos dedicó los dos volúmenes de su
Philosophie de la volonté. Pero la empresa no estaba exenta de dificultades: entre otras, el entremezclarse de la actividad con la pasividad en el mismo agente que se responsabiliza de ella a lo que hemos dedicado las últimas de
CAPÍTULO 1. DE LAS DIMENSIONES CULTURAL E HISTÓRICA DE LA ACCIÓN AL SUJETO ÉTICO from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Uno de los aspectos de la acción es el cultural. Pero antes que nada vamos a delimitarlo respecto de otros aspectos colindantes. En primer lugar, si tomamos la acción en sentido predicamental, en correlación con un
pati(padecer), entonces acaba residiendo esta en el paciente sobre el que recae, quedando reducido el agente a lugar de paso; así, la acción de abrir una puerta no está lograda hasta que la puerta no queda abierta, o elusus activustomista de la voluntad no se cumple sin elusus passivusde las potencias movidas por ella. En segundo lugar, tampoco nos
CAPÍTULO 1. INTRODUCCIÓN AL ANÁLISIS FILOSÓFICO DEL DAR EN LOS AUTORES FRANCESES CONTEMPORÁNEOS from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Puede decirse que a partir de la segunda mitad del siglo XX la filosofía del don ha experimentado un sorprendente despegue, primeramente en el área francesa. Para su tratamiento hay que empezar por tener en cuenta la compleja familia semántica que se congrega en torno al don: dar, donación, darse, dato, lo dado, el donante, el donatario… Pero ciertamente pronto se bifurcan dos direcciones de diversa procedencia: junto a la acción de dar que tiene a la actividad del espíritu en su origen está lo dado en un sentido fenomenológico– descriptivo, tal como lo aplicamos en las expresiones “darse tal
CAPÍTULO 2. CONCILIACIÓN DEL DAR CON LAS OBLIGACIONES DE JUSTICIA from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: Entre los autores contemporáneos ciertamente Ricoeur ha llevado a cabo una detenida indagación acerca de las mediaciones entre la gratuidad del dar y el carácter imperativo de los deberes. Estos – en particular, cuando se los entiende como exigencias de justicia– se presentan, primero, como término de un proceso de deliberación hasta determinar lo debido
in actuo lo correcto, más allá de los deberes evidentes generaleso prima facie(según la distinción de D. W. Ross), y, posteriormente, como dictámenes o preceptos particulares a poner en práctica. Lo cual se patentiza en los dos símbolos impersonales con los cuales se
CAPÍTULO 3. EL AMOR DONAL COMO TRASCENDENTAL ANTROPOLÓGICO from:
Acción, deber, donación. Dos dimensiones éticas inseparables de la acción
Abstract: El enigma del don acaba siendo el enigma de la persona. Por ello, abordamos a continuación su esclarecimiento desde los trascendentales personales. Vamos a tratar de inscribir la donación en la persona, basándonos en la propuesta de ampliación antropológica de los trascendentales debida a Leonardo Polo.¹⁷² Partimos de que la diferencia entre las personas y las cosas es la diferencia entre el quién y el qué, no referida a los entes objetivables, sino al acto de ser (
esse) que les da su respectiva consistencia.
Book Title: Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Summers Lucía
Abstract: Estamos en un magnífico momento del estudio del delito, y hay razones para pensar que no es el mejor. Estamos al borde de una nueva revolución científica por varios motivos: tenemos nuevas y vastas bases de datos, nuevo software, matemáticas avanzadas que nos ayudarán a construir mapas y mejorar los modelos para determinar cómo actúan los delincuentes y las víctimas. Los teléfonos móviles, el posicionamiento geográfico, y los datos sobre el tráfico, también nos ayudarán en estos análisis. Y esta transformación va más allá de los datos. La Criminología en particular y las ciencias sociales en general van alejándose del individuo puro como centro del universo. Ahora sabemos que los individuos responden de maneras muy distintas al cambiar sus ambientes y sus situaciones durante un día normal. El trabajo de Roger Barker en el año 1950 sobre los marcos del comportamiento se aplica ahora a datos reales. Pues esa es la clave de este progreso: una teoría más práctica, enfocada y de análisis de datos y patrones para determinar qué se puede hacer. Estamos asistiendo a una acumulación de conocimiento y comprensión del delito, y avanzaremos más si prestamos mayor atención al delito, si lo relacionamos con las actividades no delictivas, si usamos análisis espacio- temporales sencillos, y otros análisis más avanzados para sintetizar los datos, y especialmente si prestamos menos atención a las grandes teorías y más a las de alcance medio. Prof. Dr. Marcus FELSON
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k234hk
MARCUS FELSON Y SU INFLUENCIA TRANSNACIONAL EN ESPAÑA from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Barberet Rosemary
Abstract: En esta breve aportación mi objetivo es reflexionar sobre la influencia de Marcus Felson en la criminología española. En mis estudios de doctorado en la Universidad de Maryland (EE.UU.), me familiaricé con la obra de Marcus Felson como parte de nuestra asignatura obligatoria de teoría criminológica. En los temidos exámenes de reválida de la Universidad de Maryland, para superar los cursos de doctorado, nos preguntaron por la teoría más influyente en la criminología actual, y elegí la teoría de las actividades cotidianas para mi respuesta. No pude imaginarme que más tarde, durante mis años en España (1990-2005), llegaría a conocer
LA PERTINENCIA DE LA TEORÍA DE LAS ACTIVIDADES COTIDIANAS A TRAVÉS DEL TIEMPO Y EL ESPACIO: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Aebi Marcelo F.
Abstract: El objeto de este artículo es analizar hasta qué punto la teoría de las actividades cotidianas de Cohen y Felson (1979) puede explicar la evolución de la delincuencia en Europa Occidental durante las décadas de 1990 y 2000. La exposición comienza con algunas aclaraciones terminológicas y un breve análisis de la dimensión macrosocial de esta teoría. Se resumen luego los resultados de investigaciones recientes sobre las tendencias de la delincuencia en el conjunto de esa región europea, y se intenta explicar esas tendencias a través de las principales teorías criminológicas. Seguidamente proponemos un modelo multifactorial explicativo basado en la teoría
EL CONCEPTO CRIMINOLÓGICO DE OPORTUNIDAD: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Martínez-Catena Ana
Abstract: El debate persona-situación (P-S) es tan antiguo como la propia reflexión y el pensamiento humanos. En sus términos más amplios y abstractos podría formularse a partir de la siguiente gran cuestión: ¿Qué es lo que hace conducirse a los hombres como lo hacen? ¿Su propia naturaleza y modo de ser o las circunstancias del momento? En este gran dilema, las posturas han sido diversas, a veces extremas, y, más frecuentemente, mixtas y conciliadoras. Es posible que la conducta humana no dependa, con carácter general, ni en exclusiva de los propios individuos, ni tan sólo de las situaciones ambientales que influyen
APLICACIONES PRÁCTICAS DE LA TEORÍA DE LAS ACTIVIDADES RUTINARIAS A LA INVESTIGACIÓN CRIMINAL from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Rossmo Kim
Abstract: La teoría de las actividades rutinarias enfatiza el rol de las acciones cotidianas en la formación de los patrones espaciales y temporales del delito (Clarke y Felson, 1993). A pesar de que esta teoría se utiliza principalmente para explicar tendencias y comportamientos a nivel agregado, también es posible emplearla para analizar comportamientos al nivel del individuo en investigaciones policiales. En un modo similar al perfilado criminal, tomamos la ubicación temporal y geográfica de un delito como pistas, dentro del contexto de toda la información sobre la víctima y el infractor que tengamos a nuestra disposición; es decir, en vez de
CUANDO EL ENEMIGO ESTÁ EN CASA: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Hidalgo Patricia Hernández
Abstract: La aportación más reconocida de Marcus Felson ha sido la tesis que vincula la victimización con las actividades rutinarias. Su contribución supuso un giro relevante en la orientación de la teoría criminológica, pues a partir de ella el centro de atención ya no está en la conducta del delincuente, ni en la pura interacción entre éste y la víctima o en los factores de riesgo derivados de las características o el estilo de vida de ésta, sino en un tercer elemento, la oportunidad, entendida especialmente como la ausencia de guardián o su falta de competencia o disponibilidad. El éxito de
ELECCIÓN RACIONAL, OPORTUNIDAD PARA DELINQUIR Y PREVENCIÓN SITUACIONAL: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Bermejo Mateo G.
Abstract: Marcus Felson ha logrado, a través de algunos de sus
papersmás influyentes, aportar ideas esenciales para el estado del arte de la criminología contemporánea en general¹ y, en particular, para la conformación de uno de los enfoques más ricos para analizar el comportamiento delictivo: la teoría de la elección racional. Además, desde esta aproximación ha influido también en las técnicas de prevención situacional, como instrumento de política criminal relacionado con las oportunidades para delinquir que son aprovechadas por los infractores racionales.
LA PREVENCIÓN SITUACIONAL Y LA CRIMINALIDAD ORGANIZADA: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Framis Andrea Giménez-Salinas
Abstract: La prevención situacional ha demostrado a lo largo del tiempo una utilidad extraordinaria como estrategia de prevención del delito, preferentemente para los delitos contra la propiedad. Posiblemente, constituye uno de los enfoques criminológicos con mayor influencia e impacto en el desarrollo de estrategias públicas y privadas de prevención del delito a escala internacional. Sin embargo, ha sido una perspectiva cuestionada para determinados delitos de mayor complejidad, como son los delitos cometidos en grupo, especialmente los relacionados con la criminalidad organizada (Lampe, 2011; Cornish, 1994; Miller, 2012; Ekblom, 2003). En estos supuestos, la simplicidad y aplicabilidad de los postulados situacionales se
NO IMPORTA EL QUIÉN, SINO EL CÓMO: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Solans Nerea Marteache
Abstract: Mi tesis doctoral, que consistía en el estudio de hurtos de objetos o dinero de dentro del equipaje facturado de los pasajeros cometido por los
ACTIVIDADES COTIDIANAS Y SEGURIDAD VIAL. from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Sarmiento José E. Medina
Abstract: El enfoque de las actividades cotidianas (Cohen y Felson, 1979) ha tenido un considerable impacto en la investigación criminológica y en la prevención del delito. En síntesis, sus autores hipotetizaron que el aumento de las tasas delictivas tras la II Guerra Mundial, podía ser atribuido a los cambios en los patrones de comportamiento cotidiano de las personas, los cuales habían propiciado la confluencia en el espacio y el tiempo de los posibles delincuentes con sus objetivos, sin que un guardián o vigilante con posibilidades de intervenir, estuviera en condiciones de evitar con su presencia que el delito se llevase a
EL INICIO DE LA CARRERA CRIMINAL EN MENORES INFRACTORES CON TRASTORNO POR DÉFICIT DE ATENCIÓN E HIPERACTIVIDAD (TDAH) from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Cárceles Marta María Aguilar
Abstract: Partiendo de la delimitación conceptual de la Psicopatología sobre la definición establecida por la Sociedad de Psiquiatría Americana (APA) en la Quinta Edición del Manual Diagnóstico y Estadístico de los Trastornos Mentales (DSM-5)¹, el diagnóstico de TDAH se establece sobre la corroboración de la existencia de diversas alteraciones a nivel del Sistema Nervioso, concretamente las concernientes al déficit atencional, hiperactividad e impulsividad². Así pues, el TDAH se configura como el Trastorno del Neurodesarrollo de mayor prevalencia a escala mundial, cuya sintomatología nuclear se asienta sobre niveles de deterioro a nivel atencional, organizacional, y/o presencia de hiperactividad-impulsividad, y que interfiere en
TOO MUCH OF A GOOD THING? from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) de Urbina Gimeno Íñigo Ortiz
Abstract: Durante mucho tiempo, las teorías criminológicas han parecido poco útiles a quienes tienen que tratar con delincuentes en el mundo real. Esta falta de relevancia tiene su origen, en parte, en la atribución de las causas del delito a factores distantes tales como las prácticas educativas en la infancia, la configuración genética y los procesos psicológicos o sociales. Tales factores se encuentran, en general, fuera del alcance
LA PERSPECTIVA DE GÉNERO EN EL TRATAMIENTO Y PREVENCIÓN DE LA DELINCUENCIA FEMENINA from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Ripollés José Luís Díez
Abstract: La segunda parte de este trabajo consiste en describir la actual situación de las mujeres recluidas en nuestros centros penitenciarios, colectivo
APORTACIONES PROFESIONALES DE LAS PERSONAS FORMADAS EN CRIMINOLOGÍA EN RELACIÓN CON EL ESTATUTO DE LAS VÍCTIMAS from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Martínez Gema Varona
Abstract: Desde los años ochenta, al menos en el ámbito anglosajón, el estudio de las víctimas constituye una parte esencial de la Criminología (Beristain 1994)¹. De esta forma se facilita un entendimiento interrelacionado de los procesos de delincuencia, victimización y control social (Fattah s.f.). Un ejemplo particular de ello, en el cual nos volveremos a detener en el último apartado, es la teoría de las actividades rutinarias (Cohen y Felson 1979)².
INFRACTORES ESPAÑOLES EN LA CONDUCCIÓN DE VEHÍCULOS A MOTOR: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Maíllo Alfonso Serrano
Abstract: La Criminología cuenta con una relativamente larga serie de hechos conocidos sobre el delito con un fuerte respaldo empírico. Nuestro homenajeado, Marcus Felson, contribuye a esta tradición con sus bien conocidas
falacias sobre el delito(Felson y Boba, 2010, pp. 1-24). Aunque los más importantes son los relativos a la relación entre sexo y delincuencia por un lado y entre edad y delincuencia por otro; existen otros igualmente relevantes como lageneralidadde la desviación (Gottfredson y Hirschi, 1990). Al respecto, Marcus Felson, aunque refiriéndose más bien a la versatilidad, mantiene que «Los delincuentes activos tienden a ser generalistas más
OPINIÓN PÚBLICA Y CASTIGO: from:
Crimen, Oportunidad y Vida Diaria. Libro homenaje al Profesor Dr. Marcus Felson
Author(s) Gómez Daniel Varona
Abstract: Puede afirmarse sin riesgo de exagerar que una de las modernas tendencias en la investigación criminológica, tanto a nivel comparado como en nuestro país, es la relativa al amplio campo que abarca la opinión pública sobre la justicia penal y el castigo, o más concretamente las denominadas «actitudes punitivas» de los ciudadanos. Así, por ejemplo, Roberts y Hough (2005, p. 3) aluden a un «aumento muy importante del volumen de investigación sobre las actitudes ciudadanas hacia el sistema penal» a partir del comienzo de los años 90 del siglo pasado. Ciertamente, como es habitual en nuestro país, ese interés por
Book Title: Diversidad de género, minorías sexuales y teorías feministas. Superposiciones entre las teorías de lesbianas, gays, bisexuales y transexuales y el feminismo en la reformulación de conceptos y estrategias político-jurídicas- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): ATIENZA CRISTINA MONEREO
Abstract: De manera bastante reciente los textos político-jurídicos sobre orientación sexual e identidad de género han empezado a proliferar significativamente. Las reivindicaciones del colectivo de lesbianas, gays, bisexuales y transexuales (a partir de ahora LGBT) se atendieron de forma más o menos anecdótica en sus inicios, pero actualmente este grupo se está considerando con más atención. Además, el oportuno interés por la igualdad y los derechos del colectivo de LGBT ha trasladado a la esfera de la Política y el Derecho un intenso debate filosófico sobre la condición individual y social de las personas integrantes de este grupo, que a su vez ha retomado conceptos complejos también analizados y discutidos en otros colectivos como el feminista. Como sucede en el caso del feminismo, la tarea de delimitar las nociones implicadas es espinosa por la heterogeneidad existente entre sus miembros y por la propia organización social del sistema social. Sin embargo, es una labor primordial para entender y atender a sus proposiciones. Esta investigación va dirigida a aclarar este mapa conceptual complejo con el fin de promover la igualdad real y la eficacia de los derechos, no tan nuevos ni emergentes, del colectivo de LGBT.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k235jk
1. INTRODUCCIÓN. from:
Diversidad de género, minorías sexuales y teorías feministas. Superposiciones entre las teorías de lesbianas, gays, bisexuales y transexuales y el feminismo en la reformulación de conceptos y estrategias político-jurídicas
Abstract: De manera bastante reciente los textos político-jurídicos sobre orientación sexual e identidad de género han empezado a proliferar significativamente. las reivindicaciones del colectivo de lesbianas, gays, bisexuales y transexua les (a partir de ahora LGBT) se atendieron de forma más o menos anecdótica en sus inicios, pero actualmente este grupo se está considerando con más atención.
Book Title: Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Zarzo Esther
Abstract: La Historiografía ha sido sometida en el curso de la época moderna tanto a su confirmación inicial de mayor rango humanístico como a su depauperación en el siglo XX por negligencia regional en sectores tan decisorios por su objeto como la literatura, la filosofía o el arte. El gran dominio contemporáneo estructural-formalista significó por principio la destrucción de los conceptos de tiempo e historia en el ámbito operacional de las ciencias humanas. Ya de la Ilustración cabe interpretar que desempeñó una función ambivalente en este sentido. Aún cabría argüir que nos hallamos ante una deficiencia o depauperación solidaria respecto del proceso conducente al nuevo estado de cosas actual, es decir la aminoración generalizada de los estudios humanísticos serios en favor de las simples prácticas profesionales; la aminoración de los criterios críticos y su relegación a los intervenidos medios de opinión pública; la imposición permanente de las ciencias sociales so pretexto de convergencia sobre las humanas propiamente dichas; la doble y paralela liquidación de las artes de la lectura y la memoria; y por último, digamos, el abocamiento a un resituado momento “final" de la Historia y la progresión confirmada de la Globalización… En cualquier caso, todo ello no exime sino que exige, cuando menos, un análisis de los hechos y el intento de establecimiento de un diagnóstico bien fundado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1k235x8
5. Historia, memoria y tiempo from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Zarzo Esther
Abstract: La pregunta por el método en Historia es crucial, sobre todo desde el momento en que, superado el cientificismo metodológico del positivismo, se reconoce la mutua determinación del objeto y el método como característica definitoria de las ciencias humanas. La
technehistórica debe dar respuesta a una serie de problemáticas fundamentales de orden ontológico, gnoseológico, epistemológico y axiológico¹. ¿Cuál es la naturaleza de lo histórico?, ¿es el pasado un objeto sustantivo o un constructo siempre contemporáneo?, ¿cómo se relacionan las tres dimensiones clásicas del tiempo?, ¿existe algún tipo de motor o finalidad que guie el devenir histórico?, ¿es posible esbozar
6. Verdad y Tiempo en la historiografía de la Historia de la Filosofía: from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) González Ángel Poncela
Abstract: La historiografía de la Historia de la Filosofía ha de enfrentarse desde un principio al problema de la relación entre verdad y tiempo. La Filosofía es comprendida como ciencia de la verdad que introduce el
lógoscon la pretensión de ordenar la diversidad de los hechos humanos acaecidos en el tiempo; actos caóticos, contingentes que son sujetos a la medida universal de la razón. La Historia de la Filosofía está contenida en un corpus de textos que recoge la verdad, pero que a su vez es producto del pensamiento de autores sometidos a la contingencia histórica de escuelas o épocas.
8. La evolución de la historiografía literaria clásica from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Caerols José Joaquín
Abstract: Cierto afán enciclopédico y ese gusto por el detalle y la noticia recóndita que caracterizan al filólogo clásico (también a los especialistas de otras lenguas, supongo) hacen a éste particularmente proclive a considerar el género de las Historias de las literaturas griega y latina instrumento no ya útil, sino imprescindible en su biblioteca, aunque, paradójicamente, se resista a consultarlos con la frecuencia que sería esperable, salvo en casos de absoluta necesidad*. Esta contradictoria actitud tiene que ver, en buena medida, con esa otra paradoja que entraña el término “clásico” aplicado a las literaturas en lengua griega y latina: al hacer
14. La historiografía artística: from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Portús Javier
Abstract: La Historia del Arte como disciplina según la entendemos hoy en día no nace hasta que en el siglo XVIII Winckelmann elige como tema de investigación un periodo cronológicamente alejado, la Grecia clásica, y centra su interés en el estudio de las obras en sí y su contexto, de sus características formales y las leyes internas de su evolución, independientemente de su contenido iconográfico o de la personalidad de sus autores¹.
15. Historiografía y cine: from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Laffond José Carlos Rueda
Abstract: Está fuera de toda duda el alcance del cine como discurso recreador de la realidad y como estrategia de información, persuasión y entretenimiento. Su impacto sociocultural constituye el eje vertebral para numerosos estudios centrados en la historia del medio desde su nacimiento oficial en Europa (1895) y Estados Unidos (1896). Por supuesto, resulta imposible hacerse eco de todos ellos. Las siguientes páginas proponen únicamente un esbozo, una cartografía selectiva, sobre diversos planos: la naturaleza dual del cine como suma de relatos documentales o de ficción; algunas cuestiones sobre periodización, estilo y análisis del film, o sobre las relaciones entre género,
17. Una historiografía difícil: from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Agud Ana
Abstract: Los occidentales aprendimos pronto a hacer “historia”. Desde que los humanistas del Renacimiento europeo decidieron retrotraer la cultura europea a la Grecia clásica que recién empezaba a redescubrirse, los historiógrafos griegos y romanos fueron aceptados como maestros en una actividad que aprendimos de ellos y se hizo “obligatoria”: estudiar el propio pasado para aprender de sus errores y aciertos. La cultura occidental fue así desde muy pronto una cultura historiográfica, empeñada en construir y habitar un relato coherente de su propio devenir histórico. Nuestra historiografía es de calidad y significación muy variables a lo largo de los siglos y sus
22. La evolución de la historiografía literaria eslava from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Gabaldón Jesús García
Abstract: El estudio de la historia literaria eslava o, más apropiadamente, de las literaturas eslavas, constituye en gran medida una de las tareas pendientes de la Filología Eslava, así como de otras disciplinas humanísticas afines a ella. En el presente trabajo, concebido como aproximación sintética y personal, esbozaremos las tendencias fundamentales de la evolución de la historiografía literaria eslava desde el siglo XVIII a su situación actual; expondremos los principales problemas de investigación que se plantean en la historia literaria existente, centrándonos en los conceptos críticos, períodos y movimientos literarios; y, por último, intentaremos atalayar una perspectiva integrada para la investigación
23. Introducción a la historiografía literaria rusa from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Kuznetsova Natalia Timoshenko
Abstract: La historiografía literaria rusa puede ser conceptuada en seis giros metodológicos: 1) el Historicismo monumental dinámico de la época medieval de la Rus de Kiev, en el que los hechos y el concepto de la literatura se entendían en sentido bíblico; 2) la recopilación y la manipulación historiográfica propia de la política del Gran Ducado Moscovita como Estado centralizado en los siglos XVI-XVII; 3) primeros planteamientos teórico-historiográficos y elaboración de índices bibliográficos en la época de la Ilustración; 4) el siglo XIX hasta la segunda década del XX, caracterizado por la aparición de las primeras Historias literarias y la consolidación
27. Historiografía árabe islámica (siglos xviii-xx). from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Nava Antonio Constán
Abstract: El corpus de documentos correspondiente, que exige un acercamiento desde uno o varios prismas de observación², es relativo a una historiografía árabe caracterizable no ya como disciplina de una cultura y lengua sino que por necesidad a atiende varios campos entrecruzadamente históricos, ya etnográfico, genealógico, geográfico, o
28. La historiografía de la literatura africana from:
Historiografía y Teoría de la Historia del Pensamiento, la Literatura y el Arte
Author(s) Fandos José Manuel Mora
Abstract: Salvadas algunas obras precedentes aisladas, un esbozo de la historiografía de la literatura africana se refiere principalmente a una tradición de trabajos académicos realizados a partir de los años 60 del siglo XX, hasta nuestra actualidad: media centuria en la que se ha podido observar una evolución constructiva en cuanto a criterios de diverso tipo, una peculiar evolución marcada en buena medida por factores históricos, políticos, culturales y académicos. Así, presentar un panorama historiográfico de la literatura africana de un modo inteligible, supone primeramente una breve contextualización histórica que permita entender mínimamente las motivaciones y los condicionantes generales de dichas
2. Anotaciones sobre literatura y violencia en Colombia from:
La literatura testimonial como memoria de las guerras en Colombia
Abstract: Iniciaremos con una premisa que es determinante en este trabajo. De acuerdo con María Teresa Uribe, en Colombia la guerra “es una experiencia histórica de la que todo parece derivar […] un eje de pervivencia histórica y un hilo imaginario que atraviesa a la nación colombiana a lo largo de toda su historia”.¹ Este fenómeno se ha nombrado de diversas formas: “cronicidad” de la guerra,² “endemia colombiana”,³ “omnipresencia de la guerra”,⁴ “gravitación de la violencia en la cultura política”,⁵ entre otras denominaciones. Muchos factores inciden en este “rasgo nacional”, cuya discusión sobrepasa los intereses de este trabajo.
3. Análisis de libros from:
La literatura testimonial como memoria de las guerras en Colombia
Abstract: Parafraseando a Edith Negrín, se puede afirmar que la literatura testimonial no es suficiente para comprender los fenómenos violentos, pero tampoco puede hacerse sin ella. Esto es válido, de acuerdo con el sociólogo Orlando Fals Borda, “en aquellas circunstancias en las que no hay documentación escrita ni fuentes secundarias accesibles; todo ello con el fin de rescatar la historia olvidada”.¹ En estas “circunstancias” y con estas características, surge
Siguiendo el corte, del periodista, sociólogo y escritor colombiano Alfredo Molano Bravo.
Chapitre 1 IDENTITÉ ET PATRIMOINE from:
Éveil et enracinement
Author(s) Poyet Julia
Abstract: Le texte qui suit relate une étude qui s’interroge notamment sur le rôle que peut ou pourrait jouer le patrimoine culturel dans l’enseignement de l’histoire, sur la nature même de ce patrimoine et sur les principaux bénéfices que pourraient retirer les apprenants et les formateurs de sa découverte ou de son étude. Nous témoignons ici de l’expérience d’une pratique originale en didactique des sciences humaines au primaire permettant à des élèves montréalais de construire leur « identité sociale » et d’offrir du « sens » à leurs apprentissages en étudiant l’histoire de leur quartier et son patrimoine. Notre intention est
Chapitre 2 LES BÂTISSEURS DE MONTMAGNY from:
Éveil et enracinement
Author(s) Forest Michelle
Abstract: Dans son livre intitulé Pour
l’école. Lettres à un enseignant sur la réforme des programmes, Paul Inchauspé rapporte des propos qu’il a tenus en 1995. Dans son allocution devant une cinquantaine de cadres et de professionnels au sujet des relations entre l’école et la culture, il avait alors affirmé: « Pour qu’il puisse y avoir partenariat entre l’école et les milieux de la culture, l’école devrait être elle-même unbouillon de culture» (Inchauspé, 2007, p. 33). Cette approche culturelle souhaitée par les programmes actuels peine à prendre forme dans les écoles pour plusieurs raisons, dont la plus criante est
Chapitre 4 INTERPRÉTER LE PATRIMOINE ET L’ESPACE URBAIN POUR INITIER LES ÉLÈVES À LA PENSÉE HISTORIQUE from:
Éveil et enracinement
Author(s) Lefrançois David
Abstract: Ce chapitre propose d’explorer le potentiel de quelques approches visant à développer la compétence à interpréter les repères temporels et causaux issus des éléments du patrimoine et de l’espace urbain. Les résultats d’expériences d’apprentissage de l’histoire locale réalisées avec des enseignants auprès d’élèves du primaire et du secondaire en adaptation scolaire et d’étudiants en formation initiale à l’enseignement des sciences humaines au secondaire seront également présentés dans le but d’alimenter une réflexion sur les avantages et les enjeux d’une telle activité pour l’apprentissage et la formation des enseignants à l’exploitation du patrimoine local.
Chapitre 9 LE PATRIMOINE INVESTI PAR L’ARCHÉOLOGIE from:
Éveil et enracinement
Author(s) Beaudry Nicolas
Abstract: La formation pratique sur le terrain est une composante importante d’une formation en archéologie. Elle permet l’acquisition des compétences théoriques et pratiques nécessaires dans l’exercice professionnel ou universitaire de l’archéologie de terrain, compétences qui peuvent être utiles également dans divers autres domaines de la culture, du patrimoine, de l’aménagement, de la gestion du territoire et des ressources, etc. Bien que l’acquisition de ces compétences soit l’objectif essentiel d’une formation de terrain, cette dernière ne peut faire abstraction du contexte dans lequel elle s’inscrit, des raisons qui motivent et entretiennent l’activité archéologique, ni des attentes qu’elle suscite. Au contraire, cette formation
Chapitre 12 PATRIMOINE, ENSEIGNEMENT ET RECHERCHE (PATER) from:
Éveil et enracinement
Author(s) Vignola Kurt
Abstract: Héritier d’une histoire séculaire, l’Est-du-Québec dispose d’une richesse patrimoniale remarquable. Les régions qui le composent ayant longtemps été la porte d’entrée de la vallée du Saint-Laurent, on y trouve des traces de toutes les époques de l’aventure humaine du Québec, de la préhistoire jusqu’à nos jours. Ce patrimoine contribue à donner forme aux identités régionales, à les matérialiser et à les transmettre. Il constitue désormais une composante importante d’une offre culturelle essentielle au dynamisme de la vie en région et favorise l’ancrage territorial des populations. C’est aussi un élément incontournable d’une offre touristique qui contribue à diversifier les activités économiques.
PRÓLOGO. from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Abstract: Sobre la condición de Paul Ricœur como extraordinario profesor y maestro no cabe hoy la menor duda a partir del testimonio de sus numerosos discípulos y la influencia ejercida por su obra, en especial en el ámbito de la Hermenéutica Crítica. A ello se une que Paul Ricoeur sea uno de los más destacados lectores del Aristóteles Griego y uno de los más eficaces agentes de su reproposición actual; contándose entre los más relevantes re-fundadores de la Fenomenología y de su tránsito a la Hermenéutica Contemporánea (junto con Martín Heidegger, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Hannah Arendt, Gianni Vattimo y nosotros/as, entre otros
HERMENÉUTICA DE LO JUSTO EN LA FILOSOFÍA DE PAUL RICŒUR from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Villaverde Marcelino Agís
Abstract: Durante el curso académico 1995-96 se celebró en la Universidad de Santiago de Compostela un ciclo de conferencias denominado “Foro Universitario”. Era una de las actividades programadas para conmemorar el quinto centenario de la Universidad y el Rector Darío Villanueva quiso traer a Santiago a los intelectuales y científicos más relevantes de los distintos ámbitos del saber. Entre ellos figuró Paul Ricœur que pronunció el 27 de febrero de 1996 la conferencia “Justicia y Verdad” en el salón de actos de la Facultad de Medicina, el más grande entonces del que disponía la USC. Al día siguiente se celebró el
DEL DAÑO AL SILENCIO. from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Aranzueque Gabriel
Abstract: Los procesos de justicia transicional presuponen un vínculo entre historia y verdad no siempre explícito en sus protocolos de actuación. Son muchas las ocasiones en las que se presume, sin mayor reflexión, que el acto de volver a narrar lo sucedido, en un marco jurídico-político que supuestamente vele por su esclarecimiento efectivo, puede desembocar en el reconocimiento y en la reparación del daño infligido, e incluso en la reconciliación, el perdón o la garantía de no repetición de los abusos. Pero, ¿es realmente de ese modo?, ¿tienen el relato histórico o el literario el poder de restañar ese tipo de
EL SER QUE EQUIVALE A SER INTERPRETADO from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Bonet Ángel
Abstract: La identidad del yo es desvelada a partir de la interpretación de los signos y los símbolos, en definitiva, del lenguaje con el que han sido escritos los documentos culturales y prácticos en los que el yo consigue objetivarse. De este modo,
el diseño ontológico del ser queda pendiente del desarrollo mismo de la interpretación, y por tanto, tanto el yo como el ser no serán más que el resultado de la actividad reflexiva y no su punto de partida tal como sucedía en elcogitocartesiano. Por tanto, aquello mismo que en Descartes constituía el fundamento gnoseológico del sujeto,
LAS “HORCAS CAUDINAS” DE LA HERMENÉUTICA. from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Moratalla Tomás Domingo
Abstract: En estas páginas quisiera presentar brevemente, aunque sea a modo de esbozo y con un talante programático y prospectivo, lo que podríamos llamar las líneas fundamentales de la filosofía de la religión de Paul Ricoeur. No ofrezco el sistema, pero sí quiero presentar al menos algunos de sus elementos vertebradores y, sobre todo, dar cuenta de su actitud, de su gesto filosófico básico; gesto que no es otro que el hermenéutico. La filosofía de la religión no es en el pensador francés una simple “aplicación” de un cuerpo filosófico desarrollado en otro sitio y aplicado al tema de la religión;
EL LADO RAZONABLE DEL ESTADO from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Álvarez Natalia Pais
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur se convertirá, en la medida en que no fue una figura mediática de resistencia, en uno de esos detractores silenciosos
EDEDUCAR COMO ACTO POLÍTICO: from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Méndez Pedro Perera
Abstract: Afirmar que no es un acto político es decir que tanto los beneficios como los efectos variopintos de la educación, tienen más que ver con el ejecutante del proceso de enseñanza y aprendizaje que con el destinatario del mismo. La producción de nuevos ciudadanos es resultado de esta acción mecánica y
HERMENÉUTICA Y NIHILISMO: from:
Con Paul Ricoeur. Espacios de Interpelación: Tiempo. Dolor. Justicia. Relatos
Author(s) Šerpytytė Rita
Abstract: El discurso sobre la hermenéutica de Vattimo y el nihilismo hoy podría ser desarrollado en varias direcciones. Lo que está ocurriendo en la filosofía actual, sin embargo, requiere, como parece, tomar en consideración, en primer lugar, el renovado debate sobre la realidad /sobre lo verdadero. Como sabemos este debate ha puesto claramente de relieve las contradicciones incompatibles entre las posiciones de Gianni Vattimo y Maurizio Ferraris. Aquí me gustaría considerar los momentos teóricos relevantes para la hermenéutica que el debate evidencia.
INTRODUCCIÓN. from:
El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: En la actualidad — y desde la Alta Ilustración de la primera mitad del siglo XVIII — se viene cultivando intensamente la idea de que existe una dinámica interna en la
cultura. Se trata de una apelación que se encuentra asentada en concebir la realidad del objeto histórico como parte de una característica principal o rasgo distintivo que « evoluciona desde dentro » (naturalmente, como parte de su movimiento original) y que no es sino la forma ideológica bajo la que se ha encapsulado todo aquello que nosotros mismos (y los que nos antecedieron) hemos ido construyendo, aprendiendo y reproduciendo. En efecto,
CAPÍTULO SEGUNDO MÁS ALLÁ DE LA ESTÉTICA. from:
El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: El análisis de la ideología, el psicoanálisis y la narrativa son las coordenadas estratégicas que Jameson ha tratado de conjurar para realizar un análisis original de obras culturales del siglo XX : abrir un espacio crítico, indudablemente creativo, en el cual pudiera desarrollar cómodamente la hermenéutica marxista, la dialéctica hegeliana y la estética. Es pertinente resaltar, en este momento de la investigación, el impacto y la infl uencia que tuvo para Jameson, entre finales de los años sesenta y principios de los años setenta, el la estudio y la interpretación de obras clave del pensamiento filosófico y político la
CAPÍTULO QUINTO LA DEFENSA DEL ESLABÓN MÁS DÉBIL: from:
El pensamiento político de Fredric Jameson. Discurso utópico para la transformación de la sociedad y la defensa del débil
Abstract: El marxismo debe hacer valer todas las posibilidades extremas de la libertad creativa, de la experiencia crítica, arriesgarse en la experimentación para provocar que el público tome consciencia y partido de que es posible una libertad que no existe en ningún lugar todavía¹. Como hizo Lukács² cuando recurrió a la
tasa de desarrollo desigualpara explicar la evolución de la historia contemporánea, hay quepracticarla misma ambición para aprehender a comparar cómo es nuestra situación, en el siglo XXI , con respecto a la que vivieron Fourier en 1808, Marx en 1848 o Marcuse y Sartre en 1968; desde
O JURISPRUDENCIALISMO. from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Neves Antonio Castanheira
Abstract: Observarei ainda –a convocar uma atitude que tenho por essencial– que os nossos esforços serão superfluamente académicos se ignorarem os problemas fundamentais da nossa actual
EL DERECHO (ENTREVISTO) A TRAVÉS DE LOS PREFIJOS from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Ochoa Luis Bueno
Abstract: En efecto, un título como el que antecede en el que el paréntesis fractura en tres las partes de qué se compone exige una explicación que pasa a ofrecerse en los tres párrafos siguientes.
ACERCA DE LA RELACIÓN ENTRE “LO POLÍTICO” Y LOS DERECHOS HUMANOS from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Guerrero Pedro Francisco Gago
Abstract: De los derechos humanos tendrá que surgir una jurídicidad, a la que la Política le dará el necesario grado de previsibilidad. El Derecho deberá también situarse en la vía del progreso, al igual que la moral. “Los derechos del hombre sujetan a cada individuo a la moralidad, escribe Nicolás Tenzer, pues le obligan a considerar al otro como un fin y no como un medio”¹. Se deduce que son los derechos de la eticidad, con fuerza suficiente para determinar un tipo de actividad política, exigiendo ser llevados a cabo en una sociedad democrática². En verdad, deberá ser el Estado el
LA COACCIÓN EN EL DERECHO from:
Principios jurídicos en la definición del derecho. Principios del derecho III
Author(s) Ferríz José L. J. Martínez
Abstract: El análisis del derecho como fenómeno social muestra no sólo su naturaleza imperativa, sino también su carácter coactivo. El derecho no es un mandato cualquiera, sino un mandato radical en cuanto amenaza con la fuerza –a veces incluso con la muerte–, en caso de su incumplimiento. El carácter coactivo del derecho, no se ha discutido ni se discute, pero su reconocimiento puede ser de diversa índole y alcance hasta el punto de comprometer el mismo concepto del derecho. Por consiguiente conviene preguntarse: ¿qué significa la coacción del derecho?, ¿qué sentido y alcance tiene su carácter coactivo?
5. INTERVENCIÓN CON MENORES EN ZONAS MARGINALES. from:
La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Delgado Sara Tornero
Abstract: El capítulo que se presenta a continuación recoge, por tanto, datos de la intervención socioeducativa con menores así como las características específicas dentro del trabajo con éstos en el asentamiento chabolista a través de un recorrido por los referentes históricos de la etnia gitana, el perfil de su población en España, la educación como forma
7. INTERVENCIÓN SOCIAL CON MENORES EN SITUACIÓN DE DESAMPARO DESDE LOS SERVICIOS DE PROTECCIÓN DE MENORES from:
La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Galván Mª Luisa Wic
Abstract: La protección de los menores es una labor básica en todo Estado social y democrático de derecho. La protección de la sociedad en aras a la evolución de las futuras generaciones y consiguientemente de la propia nación es uno de los basamentos de las sociedades actuales. Por ello, ante situaciones de desprotección en los que los menores se hallan privados de los necesarios elementos que contribuyen a su desarrollo global, físico, psíquico, y moral, las Administraciones Públicas tienen la labor de subvenir a mitigar esas situaciones, adoptar las medidas de intervención ineludibles en el seno del ambiente familiar, y como
15. INTERVENCIÓN CON MENORES DESDE LA MEDIDA JUDICIAL DE GRUPO DE CONVIVENCIA from:
La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) García Jesús Luna
Abstract: La Asociación para la Gestión de la Integración Social, GINSO, tiene subscrito en la actualidad varios Convenios de Colaboración en materia de Menores Infractores en con la Consejería de Justicia e Interior de la Junta de Andalucía. El desarrollo de dichos convenios se realiza de forma coordinada con la Dirección General de Justicia Juvenil y Cooperación y las Delegaciones Provinciales de Justicia e Interior.
16. INTERVENCIÓN CON MENORES MALTRATADOS FÍSICAMENTE EN EL ÁMBITO INTRAFAMILIAR DESDE UNA MIRADA SOCIO JURÍDICA. from:
La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Rodríguez Manuela Romero
Abstract: En primer lugar, señalar que esta problemática ha sido definida por muchos profesionales, por lo que es frecuente encontrar distintas definiciones del maltrato infantil. La ambigüedad e imprecisión del concepto de maltrato, la ausencia de criterios claros y operacionales, la diversidad de criterios ideológicos-culturales y otros factores provocan la aparición de esa multiplicidad de definiciones, que hacen que un mismo caso pueda ser considerado como maltrato o no, en función de quien lo detecte o investigue, o dónde se detecte o investigue (ADIMA, 1995:18). De ahí que algún que otro autor hable de “la ambigüedad del concepto de maltrato” (Gómez
19. LOS CENTROS DE VALORACION DE DISCAPACIDAD from:
La intervención social con menores. Promocionando la práctica profesional. España
Author(s) Fernández Macarena Acosta
Abstract: Desde la celebración del Foro de vida independiente del año 2005 que se celebró en Madrid, se acuerda sustituir los términos discapacidad y minusvalía por el termino de diversidad funcional debido a que podría considerarse discriminatorio y peyorativo, considerándose que es un término integrador y que resaltaría aspectos positivos y disminuiría los negativos; considerando que es conveniente sustituir términos que se venían utilizando con el objetivo de no discriminar como son déficit en el funcionamiento por el de deficiencia y limitación en la actividad por el de discapacidad y el termino minusvalía es sustituido por el de restricción en la
CAPÍTULO II EL EMBRIÓN HUMANO EN LA FASE DE PREIMPLANTACIÓN from:
Bioética. Vulnerabilidad y responsabilidad en el comienzo de la vida
Abstract: Leon Kass ha diferenciado como el antiguo Israel impresionado con el fenómeno de la transmisión de la vida de padres a hijos usó la palabra “engendrado”. Los griegos impresionados por los ciclos de generación y decaimiento (degeneración) lo llamarón “génesis” desde una raíz de significado “venir a ser”. El mundo premoderno cristiano de habla inglesa impresonado con el mundo como dado por el Creador usaron la palabra “procreación”. Nosotros impresionados con las máquinas utilizamos la métafora de la factoría: “reproducción”
117. Ser engendrado, génesis, procreación o reproducción son palabras semejantes pero con tonos muy distintos sobre lo que supone la entrada
CAPÍTULO III EL ABORTO from:
Bioética. Vulnerabilidad y responsabilidad en el comienzo de la vida
Abstract: El primer dato para establecer nuestra actitud ante el aborto es el reconocimiento de nuestra cercanía o lejanía a esta realidad. El aborto no
CAPÍTULO V MANIPULACIÓN GENÉTICA Y DIAGNÓSTICO GENÉTICO from:
Bioética. Vulnerabilidad y responsabilidad en el comienzo de la vida
Abstract: 1901. Johansen, danés, dio el nombre de genes a estos factores hereditarios.
Introducción from:
Memoria retórica y experiencia estética. Retórica, Estética y Educación
Abstract: La presente investigación se propone el estudio de dos importantes objetos humanísticos, no en el sentido paralelo y restrictivo de una doble constitución monográfica sino con el propósito último de alcanzar a determinar sus mutuas relaciones. El primero de ellos, la memoria retórica, es propio de la mentalidad clásica. El segundo, el concepto de experiencia, eminentemente moderno. La historia del arte de la memoria desfallece cuando emerge la historia de la experiencia. Sin embargo ambos elementos parecen estar en crisis en la actualidad. El arte de la memoria, en proceso de aminoración desde el siglo pasado, raya la extinción. La
Capítulo 1 Experiencia de la memoria y el tiempo. from:
Memoria retórica y experiencia estética. Retórica, Estética y Educación
Abstract: A lo largo de la investigación se han ido revelando, por relaciones de comparación entre la situación actual y el pensamiento clásico reconstruido, las notables reducciones que hoy constriñen la experiencia de la memoria y el tiempo. El arte de la memoria, como se ha visto, ofrecía una técnica para visualizar de manera humanística lo no visualizable, a fin de elaborar y dis-poner el conocimiento para su empleo en situaciones futuras, y así orientarse en un tiempo propio erigido sobre las distinciones entre recuerdo, deseo y esperanza. La pregunta que se plantea es si existe algún lugar en la sociedad
1 Introducing African American Interpretation from:
Insights from African American Interpretation
Abstract: Biblical interpretation is political. And as African Americans well know, biblical interpretation has always been political. The political is inherently hierarchal, in that some people are considered as superior to others who are constructed as inferior and subordinated. The political is concerned with the control of and access to resources, knowledge, and power. The power attributed to the Bible is profoundly demonstrated in the 2010 American postapocalyptic film
The Book of Eli. Denzel Washington’s character, Eli, has in his possession a powerful, sought-after book that his adversary and local warlord, Carnegie (played by Gary Oldman), will stop at nothing to
3 African American Biblical Interpretation in the Early Twenty-First Century from:
Insights from African American Interpretation
Abstract: As more African American scholars have entered the academy, African American biblical interpretation as an interdisciplinary approach to biblical studies is expanding in terms of sheer numbers and of diverse methods and methodologies employed. Nevertheless, what W. E. B. Du Bois declared to be the problem of the twentieth century continues to be an overarching issue in this century: “the problem of the color line.”¹ Race/ethnicity and its mutually impacting social divisions continue to be primary categories of analyses for scholars of color. If it were not for African American interpretation, little, if any, sustained critical engagement about race would
2 The True Face of God: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The goal of this as well as the following four chapters is to establish that the revelation of God in the crucified Christ is not merely the greatest of all revelations in Scripture; it is the supreme revelation to which all others are intended to point and the culminating revelation through which all others are to be interpreted.⁴ The reason I feel the need to spend five chapters on this material prior to examining the OT’s problematic portraits of God is that I believe it is only by becoming convinced that the cross is the full revelation of God’s character
5 The Cruciform Center, Part 2: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: The most obvious indication of the thematic centrality of the cross in the Synoptic Gospels is the fact
Introduction: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: To set the stage for what I will be attempting to accomplish in this volume, I would like us to imagine a story. Suppose I am walking downtown and happen to spot my lovely wife, Shelley, on the other side of a busy and noisy street.¹ I am absolutely certain the woman I see is my wife because I have a clear view of her, and she not only looks exactly like my wife, she is even wearing the distinctive-looking coat and hat that I recently gave her as a birthday present. I shout out her name and wave my
17 Doing and Allowing: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: In this chapter I will address a widespread feature of narratives in the OT that I believe further confirms not only of the Principle of Redemptive Withdrawal but also of the previously discussed Principle of Cruciform Accommodation. It concerns the curious fact that biblical authors frequently depict God engaging in acts of violence that their own narratives and/or the broader canon make clear God merely allowed. I will refer to this as Scripture’s “dual speech pattern.” I will argue that by acknowledging that God merely allowed the actions they elsewhere ascribe directly to God, these OT authors confirm both that
24 The Dragon-Swallowing Dragon: from:
The Crucifixion of the Warrior God
Abstract: Because of my commitment to treat all Scripture as “God-breathed” as well as my commitment to the Conservative Hermeneutical Principle, it is not enough for me to demonstrate how violent depictions of God bear witness to the cross. Since the cross leads me to deny that God acted violently in any biblical narrative of divine judgment, I must offer some alternative account of who brought about the violence that is attributed to God in these narratives. We have seen that this is unproblematic in narratives in which violently inclined people function as instruments of God’s judgments (vol. 2, chs. 16
Book Title: Memories of Asaph-Mnemohistory and the Psalms of Asaph
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Jacobson Karl N.
Abstract: Although the Psalms of Asaph (Pss. 50, 73‒83) contain a concentration of historical referents unparalleled in the Psalter, they have rarely attracted sustained historical interest. Karl N. Jacobson identifies these Psalms as containing cultic historiography, historical narratives written for recitation in worship, and explores them through mnemohistory, attending to how the past is remembered and to the rhetorical function of recitation in the cultic setting. Asaph “remembers" the past as a movement from henotheism to Yahwism as the core memory that informs a new historical situation for worship participants.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kgqv1h
4 How Asaph Remembers from:
Memories of Asaph
Abstract: To reiterate one of the tenets of this study, when historical references are employed in and with the language of memory, there is a rhetorical function and impact of the psalm that is different than it would otherwise be if the mnemohistorical referent were either absent or if some other
Erinnerungsfigurwere employed. Within the Asaphite corpus of the Psalter, there are two forms in which a historical referent is found.¹ The Psalms of Asaph offer both clear, intentional historical referents (explicit mnemohistory) and unintentional holdovers or reflections of older traditions and practices (residual mnemohistory).
8 Conclusions: from:
Memories of Asaph
Abstract: It has been shown that the Asaphite Psalms (50 and 73–83) exhibit the most concentrated collection of historical referents in the Psalter. This material is distinctive both in terms of its content (when compared to other Levitical collections and other individual psalms) and in its function. In the cultic poetry of the Asaphite material in particular, there is a ritualization of the act of shared remembering, engendered through recourse to the record of historical subjects or moments. The historical referents embodied in the Asaphite collection serve to preserve and pass on Israel’s historical memory and to establish a cultic
3 Unnatural Spaces and Narrative Worlds from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) ALBER JAN
Abstract: MANFRED JAHN and Sabine Buchholz define narrative space in terms of “the environment in which story-internal characters move about and live” (552). Similarly, in my usage, the term denotes the WHERE of narrative, that is, the demarcated space of the represented storyworld, including objects (such as houses, tables, chairs) or other entities (such as fog) that are part of the setting and that do not belong to one of the characters.
6 ‘Unnatural’ Metalepsis and Immersion: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) WOLF WERNER
Abstract: Imagine the following two reception situations and narrative scenarios: one—you are watching a film that is set during the Great Depression in the United States. It starts out as the realistically described predicament of a frustrated woman who is unhappily married and has an uninteresting job. Her only relief from drab reality is to watch Hollywood films in the local cinema. In spite of several
mises en abymeof films within the film that you are watching (which, given the story, are perfectly plausible and natural) you are gripped by the film. In fact it elicits in you a
8 Implausibilities, Crossovers, and Impossibilities: from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) PHELAN JAMES
Abstract: CHARACTER NARRATION is a fertile spawning ground for unnatural or antimimetic narration, especially for sporadic outbreaks of the antimimetic within narration whose dominant code is mimetic—that is, one that respects the normal human limitations of knowledge, temporal and spatial mobility, and so on.¹ Character narration generates these breaks from the mimetic code because, as an art of indirection, it places significant constraints on the (implied) author’s² freedom to communicate with her audience—and sometimes the author feels the need to operate outside those constraints. In employing either mimetic or antimimetic character narration, an author must use one text to
10 The Unnaturalness of Narrative Poetry from:
A Poetics of Unnatural Narrative
Author(s) McHALE BRIAN
Abstract: THE UNDERLYING working hypothesis of all cognitive approaches to narrative, as I understand it, is that narrative is natural, in the sense that it arises spontaneously among all human groups, across eras and cultures, and that wherever and whenever it occurs it displays similar features. Its ubiquity and longevity are explained by the fact that it reflects fundamental categories and processes of human cognition and experience. The baseline form of all narrative is spontaneously occurring conversational narratives of personal experience, and according to the “natural narrative” hypothesis, the cognitive parameters of natural conversational narrative remain in force even in the
1 Person, Level, Voice: from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) WALSH RICHARD
Abstract: My purpose in this essay is to critique the concept of narrative voice from the vantage point of a rhetorical model of fictive representation. In its core sense, narrative voice is concerned with the narrating instance, the various manifestations of which are usually categorized in terms of person and level. These distinctions provide for a typology of narrating instances which is conventionally understood within a communicative model of narration—a model in which the narrating instance is situated within the structure of narrative representation, as a literal communicative act (that is, as a discursive event that forms part of a
2 Mise en cadre—A Neglected Counterpart to Mise en abyme: from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) WOLF WERNER
Abstract: Part of the present “state of the art” of contemporary narratology seems to be a paradox, for rather than presenting a static profile, this “state” of the art is characterized by a highly dynamic situation. Indeed, narratology currently appears to be undergoing a major paradigm shift: most narratologists have recently announced the demise of classical, structuralist narratology and proclaimed the emergence of a “post-classical” era.¹ The manifold alleged or genuinely new developments in this post-classical narratology fall into three categories. There is firstly, as the most radical and also most questionable development, the deconstruction of narratology as a logocentric enterprise,
4 Mediacy, Mediation, and Focalization: from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) FLUDERNIK MONIKA
Abstract: The issue to be discussed in this essay concerns narratological terminology, but involves different conceptualizations of theoretical design as well. The essay will be concerned with the relationship between Stanzel’s fundamental defining feature of narrative, its
mediacy, on the one hand, and the discussions of narrativemediationortransmission(Chatman) on the other. While Stanzel’smediacyfocuses on the mediateness of narrative, on the fact that the story (histoire) is mediated through the narrative report (Erzählerbericht) of a narrator figure, Chatman’stransmissionand what has recently come to be calledmediationconcern the process of (re) medialization of onehistoire
5 Directions in Cognitive Narratology: from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) HERMAN DAVID
Abstract: I propose that what the profession lacks is a concept of language and literature as acts of
8 Narrators, Narratees, and Mimetic Desire from:
Postclassical Narratology
Author(s) MARCUS AMIT
Abstract: Girard’s thesis of mimetic desire (also called “triangular” or “metaphysical” desire)¹ has aroused much theoretical interest among literary scholars, who have expanded and expounded his theory, while at the same time criticizing its universal pretensions and its blurring of differences between different types of desire (e.g., male vs. female, heterosexual vs. homosexual).² Literary interpretations that apply Girard’s ideas from his work
Deceit, Desire, and the Novel(1965) to fictional narratives focus on the dynamics of mimetic desire and rivalry between two (or more) characters on the story level: the desiring subject, the mediator (or rival), and the desired object.
CHAPTER 4 Hell Hath Its Flâneurs: from:
The IMAGINATION OF CLASS
Abstract: Gissing’s response to East End poverty was, like Hardy’s to rural poverty, to associate energy with antisocial behavior and enervation with the requirements of goodness. There was a type of active energy that writers could deploy, however: the energy required by social investigation and reporting. The combination of culturalist critique, moral judgment, and risk-taking that these activities required and called forth signifies a change in the conceptualization of working and lower class life among male intellectuals in the 1890s, especially among those we associate with what we are calling the “discourse of the abyss.” If the model of the earnest
CHAPTER 5 THE MORPHOLOGY OF MARTYRDOM: from:
The REVEREND MARK TWAIN
Abstract: DESPITE HIS LATER practice of referring to himself as “Saint Mark,” in a mock canonization, Twain was not inclined to view saints positively. In
The Innocents Abroad(1869), for example, Twain summarily dismisses saints and their relics as “Jesuit humbuggery” (45). Relics of the saints trigger comedy rather than reverence, with Twain chiding, “as for the bones of St. Denis, I feel certain we have seen enough of them to duplicate him, if necessary” (131). Twain complains less about the idea of sainthood than about relics and the depictions of them, labeling them “rude” (103), “coarse” (187, 237), and “grotesque”
1 History’s Difference from:
The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: “Admirers of
Pickwick Papers,” John Bowen tells us, “have often seen it as a beginning like no other . . . an inaugurative creative act” (2000, 49). In a hyperbolic gesture recalling the opening sentence of Dickens’The Posthumous Papers of the Pickwick Club,Steven Marcus avers thatPickwick“dramatizes the fundamental activity of the Logos” (1987, 133). What, though, if anything, wasinventive,if not exactlynew,or say insteadnovel,aboutPickwick? How do we situate ourselves with regard toThe Pickwick Papersso as to perceive, however indirectly, its difference? In the current chapter, I shall attempt
3 Illuminating Difference from:
The OLD STORY, WITH A DIFFERENCE
Abstract: That prosopopoeic synecdoche for spectral legions of amateur researchers of independent means, the “elderly gentleman of scientific attainments” with whom we concluded the previous chapter, is associated with light and with illumination, in several ways. The first association has to do with literal light. As we have seen, the empirical fact of its appearance is separated from the misinterpretation that arises from it. This separation leads to a moment of epistemological enlightenment, however dubious or risible this may appear to the reader through the focus offered by Boz. This in turn survives beyond the event to become a scientific “paper”
CHAPTER 1 Revelation in History: from:
Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Schloesser Stephen
Abstract: Although it has been twenty-five years since Linda Schlafer investigated the seminal importance of Flannery O’Connor’s encounter with the work of Léon Bloy (1846–1917), scholars have been slow to follow her lead.² Yet Bloy’s literary style, indelibly marked by rhetorical violence and vitriolic humor, sounds much like characterizations of O’Connor’s own “language of apocalypse” and “imagination of extremity.”³ Moreover, Bloy’s privileging of “suffering” as redemption apparently responded to O’Connor’s felt need for what Ralph Wood has called a “darker reading of human misery, a more startling revelation of transcendent hope.”⁴ Perhaps most important, Bloy’s symbolist vision of history—the
CHAPTER 2 Breaking Bodies: from:
Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Murphy Michael P.
Abstract: George Bernanos, the great French writer (or “scribbler,” as he called himself) of the twentieth-century French Catholic literary revival, wrote in the “Sermon from an Agnostic on the Feast of St. Therese of Lisieux” episode from his 1938 work
The Great Cemeteries under the Moonthe following: “Because you do not live your faith, your faith has ceased to be a living thing. It has become abstract—bodiless. Perhaps we shall find that the disincarnation of the Word of God is the real cause of all our misfortune.”¹ This propensity—the tendency to idealize experience and “disincarnate” theological phenomena from
CHAPTER 6 The “All-Demanding Eyes”: from:
Revelation and Convergence
Author(s) Garavel Andrew J.
Abstract: “Parker’s Back,” which Flannery O’Connor wrote as she was dying at the age of thirty-nine, is a story of conversion in which God’s grace overwhelms the title character, O. E. Parker, after years of wandering, denial, and dissatisfaction. The present reading points out significant affinities between this narrative and the conversion of St. Augustine of Hippo (354–430) recounted in his
Confessions, a text that exerts a considerable influence on O’Connor’s story.¹ “Parker’s Back,” in its author’s words, “dramatiz[es] a heresy” that figures importantly in Augustine’s work.² In addition, the theory of illumination set forth inThe Confessionscan help
Book Title: The Algerian New Novel-The Poetics of a Modern Nation, 1950-1979
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): ORLANDO VALÉRIE K.
Abstract: Disputing the claim that Algerian writing during the struggle against French colonial rule dealt almost exclusively with revolutionary themes,
The Algerian New Novelshows how Algerian authors writing in French actively contributed to the experimental forms of the period, expressing a new age literarily as well as politically and culturally. Looking at canonical Algerian literature as part of the larger literary production in French during decolonization, Valérie K. Orlando considers how novels by Rachid Boudjedra, Mohammed Dib, Assia Djebar, Nabile Farès, Yamina Mechakra, and Kateb Yacine both influenced and were reflectors of the sociopolitical and cultural transformation that took place during this period in Algeria. Although their themes were rooted in Algeria, the avant-garde writing styles of these authors were influenced by early twentieth-century American modernists, the New Novelists of 1940s-50s France, and African American authors of the 1950s-60s. This complex mix of influences led Algerian writers to develop a unique modern literary aesthetic to express their world, a tradition of experimentation and fragmentation that still characterizes the work of contemporary Algerian francophone writers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1kk66x9
4 CLAUDE OLLIER’S LE MAINTIEN DE L’ORDRE AND KATEB YACINE’S LE POLYGONE ÉTOILÉ: from:
The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: Through labyrinths of eternal returns, flashbacks and flash-forwards, anonymous characters, and places with no designations, Claude Ollier and Kateb Yacine stand on either side of a narrative abyss that is fragile and dark, offering few answers to the unsettling questions that were associated with Algeria during the revolutionary period. Claude Ollier’s novel
Le Maintien de l’ordre(Law and Order), published in 1961, and Kateb Yacine’s final novel in what he vaguely described as the concluding work to theNedjmatrilogy,Le Polygone étoilé(The starred polygon, 1966), are the bookends to a chapter in Algerian his tory that is as
6 RACHID BOUDJEDRA’S TOPOGRAPHIE IDÉALE POUR UNE AGRESSION CARACTÉRISÉE: from:
The Algerian New Novel
Abstract: In a 1994 interview, Rachid Boudjedra overtly proclaimed his allegiance to the New Novel: “J’ai été très influencé par le roman français, surtout le nouveau roman et le grand écrivain Claude Simon” (I’ve been very influenced by the French novel, most certainly the
nouveau romanand the great writer Claude Simon).¹ However, Boudjedra, like most of the Maghrebi authors of his generation, was interested in actively contributing not so much to the oeuvre of writers included in the genre, but rather to “the renewal of the novel . . . through the appropriation of modern techniques of composition.” These techniques
Book Title: Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Keeler Ward
Abstract: As with many performing arts in Asia, neither the highly stylized images of the Javanese shadow play nor its musical complexity detracts from its wide popularity. By a context-sensitive analysis of shadow-play performances, Ward Keeler shows that they fascinate so many people in Java because they dramatize consistent Javanese concerns about potency, status, and speech.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1m3221q
INTRODUCTION: from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: N
dhrog-dhog-dhog. The puppeteer rapped a heavy wooden mallet against the side of the puppet box to his left, starting a performance of the Javanese shadow play (wayang kulit). The great gong sounded and the Javanese orchestra arranged behind him began to play. A man in his early sixties, with the wide-set eyes and wide jaw characteristic of lowland Javanese, the puppeteer (dhalang) sat cross-legged in front of a long white screen with a red border, a bright light suspended above his head. Banana-tree trunks, held by supports about a foot off the ground, ran along the base of the screen.
2. FAMILY RELATIONS from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: Assumptions about the self, power, and interaction inform two kinds of action—interpersonal encounter and ascetic practices—that stand as complementary opposites in Java These assumptions do not simply suffuse the atmosphere, however, they must be learned and acted upon. They are never systematically taught, nor are they often explicitly articulated. Instead, they are learned and applied in specific contexts, and in diverse ways My purpose in this chapter is to show how young Javanese become familiar with these assumptions in the workings of Javanese families In the following three chapters, I will consider how people draw upon such understandings
4. POTENCY, POSSESSION, AND SPEECH from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: A powerful figure in Java suggests the possibility of protection, wellbeing, and prosperity. He thereby invites voluntary submission. In return for the style and, to some degree, the services indicative of deference, an individual wins some assurance of the powerful person’s material and/or mystical support. However, ideological precepts and practical patterns of avoidance show distrust of the impulse to compromise one’s own sovereignty m dependence upon or submission to a powerful figure. At the same time, such figures may resist people’s attempts to put claims upon them. I have discussed the nature and workings of such ambivalence in relations between
5. RITUAL CELEBRATIONS from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: The dissimulation of exertion at the center, whether of kingdoms, of villages, or even of families, is necessary to maintain impressions of a respected figure’s potency and prestige. It is in terms of this conception (of what might be called the dissembled center), that I wish to discuss the roles of the sponsors and the dhalang at a ritual celebration. The important and problematic fact about these events is that they are occasions in which “the center” is occupied by two such different kinds of central figures: the ritual’s sponsors and the dhalang. Their simultaneous presence is made possible by
6. THE STATUS OF DHALANG AND RITUAL SPONSORS from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: When sponsors invite a dhalang and his troupe to perform at a ritual celebration, the guests’ attention is further distracted away from the sponsors. The performance once again dissembles and enhances the sponsors’ aura of authority, as the sponsors seek to make the dhalang’s voice an extension of their own. In particular, they hope his voice will win the guests’ voluntary, yet total, submission. Relations between the sponsors of a wayang and the dhalang who performs it, however, are complicated. Is their authority shared, or are they instead locked in competition? The status of dhalang in Javanese society has long
7. THE DHALANG, THE TROUPE, AND THE TRADITION from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: The dhalang becomes the central figure at a ritual celebration from the time he starts performing until he stops eight or nine hours later. During this time, the sponsors recede discreetly into the background as an unseen though crucial force. Yet if the dhalang appears in some respects obvious, even flamboyant, in his performance, the active agent of an evasive authority, much about the dhalang himself repeats the play of power both constraining and restrained, pervasive yet dissembled. Actually, more diversely and dynamically than in relations between dhalang and sponsors, the links between the dhalang and his troupe, the dhalang
8. THE PLEASURES OF THE PERFORMANCE from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: Javanese accounts of submission to a king exaggerate the notion of his beneficent berkah to the point of seeing m it a deeply satisfying influence. It is still threatening, however, in fact all the more so, and both the pleasure and the threat can be described as a kind of forgetfulness. Pak Cerma related that his father, Mbah Mardi, was offered the opportunity to become a dhalang at the court (abdi-dalem dhalang) at the Susuhunan in Solo.
9. ON JAVANESE INTERPRETATION from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: People’s relations with signs in Java, the degree to which they are master of or subject to them, at once indicate and determine their potency. This assumption about the relationship between self and Signs has important consequences for Javanese epistemology. Exegesis of wayang exemplifies these consequences, and I will take it as a starting point for a more general discussion of Javanese interpretation. My point is that, like speech, the signs that are an art form, a tract of ngèlmu, or a dream, all pose a challenge to a person’s autonomy, a challenge to which modes of interpretation are the
10. CONCLUSION from:
Javanese Shadow Plays, Javanese Selves
Abstract: In contemporary anthropology, much is made of the ways in which meaning is constructed by a culture’s members. The interpretive act by which sense is asserted, such as in the interpretation of art or dreams or language, is a moment m which such constructions of meaning become particularly clear. It seems therefore a particularly vital point at which to observe a culture’s workings. The meeting of individuals and events that interpretation implies is a reapplication of principles, occasionally a revision, rarely, in Java at least, a radical reconsideration of them. But in interpreting phenomena of whatever sort, people act upon
INTRODUCTION from:
Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: Any account of the relation between myth and literature has a responsibility first to define “myth.” And there, with historical stubbornness, lies not merely a problem, but perhaps the entire subject of myth studies. On the one hand, there is a question as to what myths actually refer to, since they have come to mean many things, from primitive and sacred ritual to propaganda and ideological statements. On the other, there is a good deal of confusion and conflicting argument over how to define the significance of myth. Is it primarily a matter of thematics, or form, or function—or
CHAPTER 1 ON THE ESSENTIAL IN MYTH: from:
Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: The archetypalist position is a very familiar one in literary studies, where it has sanctioned a long history of interpretation as the art of translating symbols into universal archetypes. From this we learn, according to Jung, that the creative process “consists in the unconscious activation of an archetypal image, and in elaborating and shaping this image into the finished work. By giving it shape, the artist translates it into the language of the present, and so makes it possible for us to find our way back to the deepest springs of life.”³ Jung is clearly the most influential figure in
CHAPTER 3 MYTHIC INVERSION AND ABSTRACTION: from:
Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: In the last two chapters, we have seen that there is a progression from the ontological conditions of myth as language to more functional terms for its existence. Mythicity may be revealed in the play of language, but it is also a systematic attempt to grasp the world as fact and metaphor, as a synchronic and diachronic whole. We can see the relevance to a theory of myth of Saussure, Gadamer, and Lacan, on the one hand, and Levi-Strauss and Barthes on the other. The theory of myth and mythicity embodies a necessary link between interpretation theory and Structuralism. But
CHAPTER 4 THE MYTHIC AND THE NUMINOUS from:
Mythical Intentions in Modern Literature
Abstract: We cannot answer the question of what makes mythology so attractive to writers and readers of modern literature if we remain with structure and semiotics alone and ignore myth’s talent for arguing for the numinous signifier and the validity of the supernatural. But, not surprisingly, that has been a much avoided question in modern literary criticism. The safest way of showing the relationship between the sacred and art, for example, has long been to emphasize art’s reference to or use of religious and mythological (meaning archetypal) motifs. Art becomes the transition between the numinous and the everyday. But as I
INTRODUCTION from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: Flannery O’Connor chose to keep within the boundaries of fiction, even as she “seemed to contemplate,” like her character Mrs. Shortley, “the tremendous frontiers of her true country.” Although some apologists have written as if her fiction is theology in disguise, her stories a series of illustrations of Grace, O’Connor continually stressed that she was writing fiction, not religious tracts. Some other commentators have attempted to explain her narratives in terms of her “real” Southern world, but by now the writer’s rejection of “realism” has become well-known. In either case, the aim has been to strip her of her various
III SEEING INTO MYSTERY from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: O’Connor’s metaphors, particularly her characteristic
as if, release a power, often violent and threatening, that demands the death of the understanding before the reader can begin to evolve a new consciousness. The power exists in man and in external nature, but it remains hidden to those who seeasand notas if. Onnie Jay Holy, inWise Blood, could represent all those literalists who cling to the assurance of the understanding: “You don’t have to believe nothing you don’t understand and approve of. If you don’t understand it, it ain’t true, and that’s all there is to it. Nojokers
AFTERWORD from:
Flannery O'Connor and the Language of Apocalypse
Abstract: In company with other Southern writers, notably the Agrarians, who aspire to embrace a lost tradition and look on history as a repository of value, Flannery O’Connor seems a curious anomaly. She wrote of herself: “I am a Catholic peculiarly possessed of the modern consciousness, that Jung describes as unhistorical, solitary, and guilty.” Likewise her characters comprise a gallery of misfits isolated in a present and sentenced to a lifetime of exile from the human community. In O’Connor’s fiction, the past neither justifies nor even explains what is happening. If she believed, for example, in the importance of the past
III The Universal Principle from:
Coleridge on the Language of Verse
Abstract: Of Wordsworth’s declarationsthat the language of good poetry is ideally derived from rustic speech, and that there is no essential difference between the languages of poetry and prose, Coleridge provided the readers of theBiographia Literariawith a bi-level refutation. On the first level, which has received the bulk of critical attention since, are several more or less direct denials of these assertions themselves or of assumptions they seem to entail. Thus he retorts that the best part of any language comes not from the countryman’s daily communion with nature but from the intellectual and imaginative activity of educated
ONE Language and the Unconscious: from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: Consciousness does not cover the entire field of our mental life. There is another area of mental activity that we glimpse in what we recall of dreams, in slips of the tongue, and more dramatically in behavior under hypnosis. This area, the unconscious, resists being known or spoken; and to bring it to consciousness we encounter resistance or repugnance and feel a sense of exertion.¹ Because of its resistance to becoming conscious knowledge, the unconscious has a paradoxical nature. It is both there and not there, both known and not known. “The unconscious, Lacan says, is knowledge; but it is
TWO Imagery and the Landscape of Desire from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: In all of Seneca’s plays the psychological atmosphere depends heavily on imagery. In the Phaedra images of fire, enclosure, and heaviness and the contrasting imagery of interior and exterior space depict the stifling emotional world in which the characters seem entrapped. Against this mood of constriction, however, Seneca sets elaborate rhetorical descriptions of sky, forest, or sea. The concentrated energy of such descriptions sets into sharp relief the protagonists’ ineffectiveness or helplessness in the face of the emotional violence within and around them.
THREE The Forest World from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: Phaedrais the only Senecan tragedy to begin with a lyrical solo part.² Although formally detached from the action of the play, this passage, Hippolytus’ hunting song, has an important function. It is not merely a pretext for an
SIX Parental Models: from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: The dramatist has to convince us that there is an iceberg of coherent human reality beneath the tip of character that we see on the stage.
Nihil ex nihilo fitapplies to effective drama as well as to physics. If a character is to interest us, the events for which he is responsible have to appear as more than arbitrary, detached, isolated gestures. They must in some way express what the novelist George Eliot called “that inexorable law of human souls, that we prepare ourselves for sudden deeds by the reiterated choice of good and evil which gradually determines character.”¹
EIGHT Desire, Silence, and the Speech of the Sword from:
Language and Desire in Seneca's "Phaedra"
Abstract: For Seneca’s Phaedra, as for Euripides’ and Racine’s, the crossing of the barrier between silence and speech is the critical event. Once these words of desire are spoken, the relation between the speakers is irrevocably changed. Neither the lover who confesses the love nor the beloved who receives the message can ever be quite the same toward one another again. This climactic point of decisive speaking lies at the heart of dramatic representation: the art of converting the exchange of words and feelings into theatrical situation. Communication becomes surrounded with a suspenseful direction that draws us inevitably toward an overwhelming
Pourquoi écrire dans une langue qui n’est pas la mienne ? from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Mizubayashi Akira
Abstract: Je suis né deux fois. Ma fiche d’identité personnelle se caractérise par une double naissance. Je suis d’abord né au Japon, de parents japonais ; j’ai grandi au Japon ; j’ai été scolarisé au Japon ; j’ai fait mes études supérieures au Japon. J’ai toujours vécu dans ce pays sauf pendant quelques années que j’ai passées en France pour faire des études. Maintenant, je vis à Tokyo et j’y travaille pour vivre.
L’incohérence narrative, ou les étonnantes tribulations d’un inconscient au travail from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Josse Gaëlle
Abstract: Allons, disons-le, ce terme d’incohérence me perturbait. Tout d’abord parce que je lui trouvais, au premier abord, une connotation négative, comme l’aveu d’un défaut de fabrique, d’une tache sur la robe qu’on tenterait de faire croire voulue, une fois le dégât constaté. Quelque chose à rapprocher des grandes inventions involontaires, comme la pomme de Newton, l’Amérique de Christophe Colomb, la pénicilline ou la radioactivité.
L’incohérence : from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Jacquet Marie Thérèse
Abstract: On le sait, un texte définissable comme littéraire se constitue en tant que système remis en mouvement à chaque lecture et se chargeant à chaque fois d’une signification spécifique, ponctuelle et inévitablement subjective. Si l’écrivain règne en maître incontesté dans son périmètre, il revient à chaque lecteur de se faire (ou non) complice de la représentation proposée : c’est le pacte auteur-lecteur.
Le monde n’existe pas : from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Gefen Alexandre
Abstract: Je commencerai par deux constats simples pour éviter les malentendus : d’une part, il faut souligner le fait qu’il n’y a incohérence que par rapport à un modèle de cohérence critiqué et attaqué et que l’incohérence critique est nécessairement réactionnelle si ce n’est polémique ; d’autre part que, si le mot revient fréquemment pour caractériser la production littéraire contemporaine, il existe sur la longue durée : je renvoie, par exemple, au bel essai de Pierre Jourde,
Empailler le toréador. L’incongru dans la littérature française de Charles Nodier à Éric Chevillard¹ qui fait la liste des attentats aux modèles de cohérence
Caprices de la narration. from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Termite Marinella
Abstract: L’incohérence secoue les préoccupations fictionnelles qui agitent les oeuvres d’Emmanuel Carrère. À partir des inquiétudes qui soutiennent les choix variables des postures de l’écrivain ou de ses personnages, un cadre mobile s’impose produisant des insignifiances actives. Comme l’auteur le reconnaît à propos de son travail de ressassement dans
La moustache¹, bien qu’improvisé, ce livre a été très construit autour de bribes narratives complexes tout aussi incohérentes que l’intrigue. L’insistance sur l’acquis de la linéarité de l’infraordinaire devient, alors, incontournable dans l’exploration de procédés en déroute qui vont à la recherche de l’événement et de ses témoins.
Julia Deck, incohérence psychique et logique textuelle from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Houppermans Sjef
Abstract: Le premier roman de Julia Deck¹ prend l’allure d’un roman policier classique dans lequel l’échange des rôles installe la perversion. La piste d’Echenoz en dessine le canevas sans toutefois nuire à son originalité. Le personnage principal fortement troublée par le fait que son mari la quitte cherche l’aide de son psy. Les paroles de celui-ci l’enfermant plutôt dans un rituel psychanalytique sclérosé, elle passe à l’acte et le tue à coups de couteau. Elle fera tout pour effacer les traces du crime et pour le revendiquer d’une certaine manière à la fois. D’interrogatoire en errance, de prise en filière à
« Bill l’imposteur » ? : from:
L’incoerenza creativa nella narrativa francese contemporanea
Author(s) Schoentjes Pierre
Abstract: En surface, deux trames narratives organisent
Tristesse de la terre¹ : le récit des dernières guerres indiennes est rappelé parallèlement à l’histoire du Wild West Show. Pendant trente ans en effet, Buffalo Bill, qui fut un acteur de ces guerres, s’est transformé en metteur en scène de la conquête de l’Ouest. Il a su donner une forme d’autant plus solide à la légende américaine que son spectacle conviait volontiers les acteurs historiques et des objets matériels emblématiques. En quelques décennies, et qui suivaient de près les événements évoqués, la réécriture qu’il met en place devant les yeux du public a
Introduction from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Laroui Rakia
Abstract: Dans toutes les sphères d’activité de la société, la recherche s’est imposée avec le temps. Les questions liées aux enjeux méthodologiques constituent des préoccupations d’actualité qui se révèlent d’une importance capitale. Le projet du présent ouvrage collectif, intitulé
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche : freins et leviers, est une initiative du Groupe de recherche sur l’apprentissage et la socialisation (APPSO) de l’Université du Québec à Rimouski (UQAR), campus de Lévis et de Rimouski.
CHAPITRE 1 La distance, la proximité et le défi de l’objectivité du chercheur from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Lévesque Jean-Yves
Abstract: Le concept d’« objectivité » a trait au caractère de ce qui constitue un objet de pensée valable pour tous. Dans l’usage courant, il est employé pour signifier la qualité de ce qui est conforme à la réalité, l’absence de
CHAPITRE 2 La participation d’enseignants à la recherche en éducation from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Bélanger Michel
Abstract: Dans ce chapitre, nous aborderons schématiquement trois de ces facteurs : les représentations que se font les enseignants (perceptions) au sujet de la
CHAPITRE 3 La recherche-action en administration scolaire from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Bernatchez Jean
Abstract: Agir pour changer le monde! Cette idée motive plusieurs personnes dans leurs univers professionnels respectifs, entre autres dans celui de l’éducation. La recherche-action traduit ce principe et le rend opératoire. Dans cette perspective, le chercheur oeuvre en partenariat avec les gens du milieu afin d’orienter l’action vers un changement visant à combler un écart entre une situation vécue et une situation souhaitée. Le modèle de l’université de service public (Whitehead, 1929) inspire les professeurs-chercheurs. Il traduit la volonté d’instrumentaliser le savoir afin de comprendre le monde, certes, mais surtout de le transformer. La recherche y est contextualisée (Gibbons
et al.,
CHAPITRE 4 Les leviers et les freins méthodologiques relatifs à une recherche-action-formation en ce qui concerne la supervision pédagogique menée en communauté de pratique professionnelle from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Giguère Marc
Abstract: Ce chapitre décrit et analyse les freins et les leviers relatifs au parcours d’une recherche-action-formation (R-A-F) qui, durant la première année d’un projet de trois ans encore en cours, a consisté à accompagner les directions d’établissements scolaires afin de les former, par l’intermédiaire d’une communauté de praticiens professionnels, à la supervision pédagogique. Dans le cas de notre recherche, nous sommes partis du principe selon lequel la R-A-F permet de répondre aux besoins de la recherche, notamment en proposant une solution au problème des formations limitées offertes aux directions d’établissement, lequel mine leur pouvoir-agir (Bernatchez, 2011). Dans la première section, nous
CHAPITRE 11 La recherche qualitative incorporant un point de vue philosophique from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Michaud Olivier
Abstract: Différentes démarches en méthodologie qualitative se sont développées au cours des dernières décennies : la méthodologie mixte, qui combine des méthodes qualitatives et des méthodes quantitatives, ainsi que la recherche-action en sont quelques exemples. Or, la philosophie, en tant que discipline particulière pour comprendre la réalité, n’a pas été utilisée pour compléter les méthodologies qualitatives plus traditionnelles (Denzin et Lincoln, 2005; Merriam et Tisdell, 2015). Cette absence de théorisation sur ce qu’est une méthodologie qualitative incorporant une perspective philosophique constitue un problème méthodologique et un frein pour les chercheurs qui s’intéresseraient à l’utilisation de cette dernière. Le but du présent
CHAPITRE 12 La collecte de données auprès de participants ayant des incapacités intellectuelles from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) Ruel Julie
Abstract: Les participants ayant des incapacités intellectuelles présentent certaines caractéristiques associées à leur état. Afin d’en tenir compte, il faut adapter les processus de collecte des données habituellement utilisés en recherche dans le but
CHAPITRE 13 L’entretien semi-dirigé et ses principaux défis from:
Le chercheur face aux défis méthodologiques de la recherche
Author(s) de la Garde Roger
Abstract: Entrevue, entretien, interview… que de termes polysémiques pour faire référence à des interactions verbales dans des contextes bien particuliers (embauche, thérapie, recherche, journalisme). C’est à l’entretien individuel semi-dirigé en tant qu’outil de collecte des données dans une perspective de recherche que le présent chapitre est consacré. Nous allons, dans un premier temps, situer cet outil méthodologique de recherche dans un cadre plus général. Dans un deuxième temps, nous présenterons les acquis relatifs à cet outil. Une troisième section sera réservée aux défis que rencontre le chercheur utilisant cet outil méthodologique : soit les défis liés à la collecte des données
Book Title: Literary visions of multicultural Ireland-The immigrant in contemporary Irish literature
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Villar-Argáiz Pilar
Abstract: The first full-length monograph to address the impact that Celtic-Tiger immigration has exerted on the poetry, drama and fiction of contemporary Irish writersNow available in paperback, this pioneering collection of essays deals with the topic of how Irish literature responds to the presence of non-Irish immigrants in Celtic-Tiger and post-Celtic-Tiger Ireland. The book assembles an international group of 18 leading and prestigious academics in the field of Irish studies from both sides of the Atlantic, including Declan Kiberd, Anne Fogarty and Maureen T. Reddy, amongst others. Key areas of discussion are: what does it mean to be ‘multicultural’ and what are the implications of this condition for contemporary Irish writers? How has literature in Ireland responded to inward migration? Have Irish writers reflected in their work (either explicitly or implicitly) the existence of migrant communities in Ireland? If so, are elements of Irish traditional culture and community maintained or transformed? What is the social and political efficacy of these intercultural artistic visions?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mf6zgx
3 Strangers in a strange land?: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Tucker Amanda
Abstract: In his seminal essay ‘Imaginary Homelands’, Salman Rushdie describes how, at a conference on modern writing, novelists struggled to articulate the purpose of their artform. After these (unnamed) fiction writers outlined the need for ‘new ways of describing the world’, another participant suggested that this objective might be limited. Rushdie argues that description is in fact political and, moreover, that ‘redescribing the world is the necessary first step in changing it’ (Rushdie, 1991: 13). He is particularly interested in how fictional representations might lead to systemic change and sets creative perspectives against official, government-sanctioned points of view: ‘at times when
4 ‘A nation of Others’: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Villar-Argáiz Pilar
Abstract: The changing face of Irish society and the new influx of immigration during the economic boom of the country have compelled Irish poets to rethink nationhood intersectionally, as modulated by race and ethnicity. Depictions of ethnic migrant communities in Ireland have appeared in the work of poets since the early 1990s. Eithne Strong, for instance, dealt with this topic in her poems ‘Let Live’, about the emotional impact the Indian community has on the native Irish population with its ‘oddness’ and ‘alternative culture’ (1993: 75–6), and ‘Woad and Olive’, which reflects on the difficulty of ‘harmonious coexistence’ among different
10 ‘Marooned men in foreign cities’: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Murphy Paula
Abstract: In
The Townlands of Brazil, the second play in Dermot Bolger’sThe Ballymun Trilogy, multiculturalism in Ireland is explored by focusing on the small community of Ballymun, in Dublin city. The first act takes place in the 1960s and explores the fate of an unmarried pregnant woman, Eileen, who escapes having to give up her baby for adoption by fleeing to England. Her experience of being an emigrant in a foreign city echoes that of her baby’s father, Michael. Eileen and he met and conceived their child while he was at home in Ireland on holiday from his job in
11 ‘Like a foreigner / in my native land’: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Schrage-Früh Michaela
Abstract: Ireland in the Celtic Tiger years saw an unprecedented influx of ethnically diverse migrants to a nation formerly perceived as comparatively monocultural. Sketching the two dominant representations of post-Celtic Tiger multiculturalism, Amanda Tucker notes that the first of these ‘emphasizes that fear and hostility continue to characterize Irish responses to inward migration since the Gaelic Catholic monolith remains’ at the heart of twenty-first-century Irish identity, thus reinforcing ‘the idea of Ireland as a monocultural rather than multicultural society’ (Tucker, 2010: 107).¹ The second type of response claims that, despite the legal situation of immigrants, Ireland is a country traditionally open
13 The Parts: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) O’Donnell Katherine
Abstract: There is a history of Irish empathy for black people. It can be argued that a key component in the construction of Irish political and cultural identity is the practice of emotion of ‘feeling with’ and standing in the same place with black Others. From the end of the eighteenth century we can see the articulation of Irish national identity being formulated (at least partially if not centrally) in terms of an ability to share in and hence represent the political and cultural sufferings and triumphs of the racialised Other. The location and ethnic identity of these Others fluctuates over
14 Hospitality and hauteur: from:
Literary visions of multicultural Ireland
Author(s) Armstrong Charles I.
Abstract: Tourism tends to be observed as an indispensable but regrettable epiphenomenon. For many states it provides a major source of income, facilitating commerce and jobs that make up an important part of the national economy. At the same time, there is a tendency to see tourism as involving a pernicious commodification of space, culture, and people’s lives in general. Common conceptions of tourism tend to circle around cliché and stereotype. In an increasingly globalised economy, tourism is seen as bringing with it particularly reductive and restrictive forms of interaction across national and cultural borders. Relatedly, it is interpreted as being
6 The transformation of the humanities in Ireland from:
The humanities and the Irish university
Abstract: Implicit in what humanities learning represents is a willingness to overcome disparate national interests so as to embody a civic, ethical and cultural ethos that can speak across boundaries and uncover a common regard for enquiry. It speaks for a common good, or
sensus communis, which, as Hans-Georg Gadamer explains, ‘founds community’ and gives the ‘human will its direction’ not through the ‘abstract universality of reason’ but through the ‘concrete universality represented by the community of a group, a people, a nation, or the whole human race’ (1995: 21). However, because a respect for difference is also implicit in what
Book Title: Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain- Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): BERNAU ANKE
Abstract: Explores how sanctity and questions of literariness are intertwined across a range of medieval genres.This collection explores some of the many ways in which sanctity was closely intertwined with the development of literary strategies across a range of writings in late medieval Britain. Rather than looking for clues in religious practices in order to explain such changes, or reading literature for information about sanctity, these essays consider the ways in which sanctity - as concept and as theme - allowed writers to articulate and to develop further their 'craft' in specific ways. While scholars in recent years have turned once more to questions of literary form and technique, the kinds of writings considered in this collection - writings that were immensely popular in their own time - have not attracted the same amount of attention as more secular forms. The collection as a whole offers new insights for scholars interested in form, style, poetics, literary history and aesthetics, by considering sanctity first and foremost as literature
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mf7103
2 Good knights and holy men: from:
Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) Lynch Andrew
Abstract: Hagiography and romance have long been understood to have some important elements in common, such as narrative patterns of edification and exemplarity, an overlapping repertoire of incidents and motifs, and a penchant for valuing strenuous affectivity, especially bodily suffering. It is not surprising that these literary genres quite frequently occur in the same manuscript miscellanies, or that their heroes can sometimes switch genres.¹ Nor is it surprising that actual knights claimed for themselves a form of religious virtue on the grounds of their bodily trials.² Yet secular knighthood and Christian sanctity are by no means a perfect match. Although soldier
7 Reading classical authors in Capgrave’s Life of St Katherine from:
Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) James Sarah
Abstract: To characterise John Capgrave as a writer of ‘literature’ has been, until recently, to court controversy, if not outright dissent. In his foreword to the Early English Text Society’s edition of Capgrave’s
Life of St Katherine, Frederick Furnivall spares no time to consider what, if any, literary merit might attach to the work, being instead concerned to provide a rather patronising author portrait before launching into an embittered attack upon Carl Horstmann’s editorial decision-making; the text, it seems, is of no more than antiquarian concern.¹ More recently M. C. Seymour dismisses Capgrave’s literary credentials; hisLife of St Norbertis
9 Narrating vernacular sanctity: from:
Sanctity as literature in late medieval Britain
Author(s) von Contzen Eva
Abstract: In the fifteenth century, it has been argued, hagiography underwent a ‘turn to more “literary” saints’ lives’.¹ This turn, which is characterised by a new depiction of saintly exemplarity and a new self-understanding among the authors of hagiographic writings, is said to have inaugurated the saint’s life as a literary genre.² Chaucer’s
Second Nun’s Talemarks the turning point, although the change is fully realised half a century later only, in the saints’ legends composed by John Lydgate, Osbern Bokenham, John Capgrave, and others. That there are discernible differences between a compilation such as the South English Legendary or the
CHAPTER 2 The Rise of Prophecy: from:
Sodomscapes
Abstract: There’s no getting around it. The route connecting Maître François’s illuminated rendering of the flight from Sodom to Blanchot’s and Levinas’s guarded turns to the Sodom archive has no historical warranty. Blanchot and Levinas’s mutual interest in the question of art charted a wide-ranging interrogation of the enigmatic fact of the artwork’s existence and the unquiet character of art’s aesthetic and ethical open-endedness, conducted across several genres and historical environments.² Their expedition, however, did not pause at the late-medieval scene of manuscript illumination.
CHAPTER 6 The Face of the Contemporary: from:
Sodomscapes
Abstract: The digital photographs before you belong to Sodomscape in more ways than one (fig. 14, plate 10). Most obviously, they conform to the genre of tourist photography commonly found in the postcards and guidebooks designed to satisfy interest in well-known landmarks of the Dead Sea region. To this end, the photographs also display a characteristic negotiation of the documentary impulse and the taste for the picturesque’s “accidental beauty.”² No more than the illuminated image from Maître François’s studio do the photographs pretend to supply historically accurate information about the destroyed city of Sodom, though the reasons for the photographs’ agnosticism
Book Title: New Romantic Cyborgs-Romanticism, Information Technology, and the End of the Machine
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Coeckelbergh Mark
Abstract: Romanticism and technology are widely assumed to be opposed to each other. Romanticism -- understood as a reaction against rationalism and objectivity -- is perhaps the last thing users and developers of information and communication technology (ICT) think about when they engage with computer programs and electronic devices. And yet, as Mark Coeckelbergh argues in this book, this way of thinking about technology is itself shaped by romanticism and obscures a better and deeper understanding of our relationship to technology. Coeckelbergh describes the complex relationship between technology and romanticism that links nineteenth-century monsters, automata, and mesmerism with twenty-first-century technology's magic devices and romantic cyborgs.Coeckelbergh argues that current uses of ICT can be interpreted as attempting a marriage of Enlightenment rationalism and romanticism. He describes the "romantic dialectic," when this new kind of material romanticism, particularly in the form of the cyborg as romantic figure, seems to turn into its opposite. He shows that both material romanticism and the objections to it are still part of modern thinking, and part of the romantic dialectic. Reflecting on what he calls "the end of the machine," Coeckelbergh argues that to achieve a more profound critique of contemporary technologies and culture, we need to explore not only different ways of thinking but also different technologies -- and that to accomplish the former we require the latter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1mtz81z
1 Introduction: from:
New Romantic Cyborgs
Abstract: Romanticism is usually seen as a historical artistic and cultural movement, starting at the end of the eighteenth century and—at most—reaching far into the nineteenth century: from Jean-Jacques Rousseau’s return to nature to William Morris’s medievalism and beyond. As a reaction against mainstream classicism, Enlightenment rationalism, scientific objectivism, disenchantment, and attempts to crush religion, Romanticism¹ attempted to revive and liberate subjective feeling and emotion, passion, horror, and melancholy. It tried to reenchant the world and unite what was divided. It searched for personal liberation and freedom from convention and tradition, experimented with drugs and various forms of sexual
2 Romanticism from:
New Romantic Cyborgs
Abstract: Making a connection between romanticism and technology is not a very obvious thing to do; the two terms do not seem to live together comfortably. The main reason for this has to do with the fact that we are romantics to the bone: most romantics think that there is an unbridgeable gap between both. So what is romanticism, and what does it mean for our relation to technology? In this chapter I outline some key features of Romanticism as a cultural-historical movement (hence the capital
R), and argue that today we are still very romantic in a broad sense (without
3 Romanticism against the Machine? from:
New Romantic Cyborgs
Abstract: Romanticism and technology are usually assumed to be incompatible. Romanticism is associated with feeling, imagination, and nostalgia. It is seen as backward looking and conservative. It is also seen as religious. It is supposed to be dreamy and otherworldly. It is about subjects, spirits, and ghosts. It is about magic. Technology, by contrast, is associated with objectivity, rationality, and an orientation toward the future. It is seen as nonreligious or even antireligious. It is seen as practical and realistic, quite the opposite of dreamy. It is concerned with this world—if the concept of another world is taken to make
7 Beyond Romanticism and beyond Modernity: from:
New Romantic Cyborgs
Abstract: In the previous chapters I have employed the phrase “the end of the machine.” But what, exactly, does
endmean? I have used the term in at least two senses, meanings that can be clarified by looking briefly at Heidegger’s discussion of ending and death inBeing and Time(1927). In section 48, Heidegger distinguishes between, on the one hand, ending as stopping and disappearance, and on the other hand, ending as ripening and fulfillment (227). Whereas the former meaning is about termination, the latter concerns end as a telos, a purpose. It is about completion and fulfillment. Now whatever
Book Title: Las Fuerzas Militares del posacuerdo-Contribuciones en torno a sus retos y posibilidades
Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): LANDAZÁBAL JUAN FELIPE RIAÑO
Abstract: Los diálogos de paz entre el Gobierno Nacional y las farc permiten hablar de los posibles retos y transformaciones que están enfrentando y enfrentarán en el posacuerdo las Fuerzas Militares de Colombia. Este libro tiene por objetivo contribuir a esto a través de un análisis crítico de los documentos académicos y no-académicos sobre las FFMM en torno a la Memoria Histórica Militar, el proceso actual de transformación de las FFMM, la opinión y controversias públicas que construyen la percepción sobre las FFMM, y la Comisión de la verdad en relación con las FFMM. Para ello se presentan los aportes de las fuerzas militares al posacuerdo, las nuevas amenazas y oportunidades de mejora de las FFMM, las diferentes percepciones sobre estas, la importancia de su papel en la comisión de la verdad como una oportunidad para construir la paz y por último, unas reflexiones finales sobre los resultados de cada uno de los temas expuestos. Este libro además de ser un aporte que brinda elementos y herramientas para las FFMM y los estudios militares, contribuye a que a los diferentes agentes internacionales y sectores de la sociedad colombiana conozcan y reconozcan rol que juegan las FFMM en la construcción de paz.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1n7qhcq
Memoria histórica militar. from:
Las Fuerzas Militares del posacuerdo
Abstract: Los procesos de producción de memoria histórica en Colombia han aparecido en los últimos años motivados por la necesidad del Estado colombiano de generar iniciativas y procesos que permitan conocer la verdad sobre las causas y hechos del conflicto, que faciliten la reconciliación y el perdón por las acciones realizadas de los diferentes actores armados en el marco del conflicto armado colombiano.
Nuevas amenazas y oportunidades de mejora: from:
Las Fuerzas Militares del posacuerdo
Abstract: El siguiente capítulo busca reflexionar sobre el proceso de transformación que deben enfrentar las FFMM en el escenario que se firme el acuerdo final y definitivo con las Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia (Farc). En este capítulo se busca recoger las principales propuestas que se han generado en el país con respecto a lo que podrían ser las ffmm del futuro, así como presentar una serie de reflexiones de los autores sobre las diferentes transformaciones de las ffmm en la historia reciente de Colombia, con algunos casos emblemáticos de América Latina, contrastado con las propuestas actuales.
Reflexiones finales from:
Las Fuerzas Militares del posacuerdo
Abstract: La firma de los acuerdos con la guerrilla de las Farc será un acto que encapsulará narrativas, transformaciones y expectativas frente a la paz, un escenario percibido durante muchos años como inalcanzable. Para el filósofo esloveno Slavoj Žižek, el concepto de acto constituye la imposibilidad que es liberada de las restricciones impuestas por las condiciones actuales (Camargo, 2010). En ese sentido, la firma de los acuerdos de paz constituye un acto radical por la forma como simbólicamente ha venido redefiniendo lo que se considera como posible: ha cambiado las condiciones de un contexto donde lo posible ya estaba preestablecido, creando
Book Title: Sin and Evil-Moral Values in Literature
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): PAULSON RONALD
Abstract: The confusion of sin and evil, or religious and moral transgression, is the subject of Ronald Paulson's latest book. He calls attention to the important distinction between sin and Evil (with a capital E) that in our times is largely ignored, and to the further confusion caused by the term "moral values." Ranging widely through the history of Western literature, Paulson focuses particularly on American and English works of the eighteenth through twentieth centuries to discover how questions of evil and sin-and evil and sinful behavior-have been discussed and represented.The breadth of Paulson's discussion is enormous, taking the reader from Greek and Roman tragedy, to Christian satire in the work of Swift and Hogarth, to Hawthorne's and Melville's novels, and finally to twentieth-century studies of good and evil by such authors as James, Conrad, Faulkner, Greene, Heller, Vonnegut, and O'Brien. Where does evil come from? What are "moral values"? If evil is a cultural construct, what does that imply? Paulson's literary tour of sin and evil over the past two hundred years provides not only a historical perspective but also new ways of thinking about important issues that characterize our own era of violence, intolerance, and war.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1njjx9
CHAPTER TWO Classical and Christian Equivalents of Sin and Evil from:
Sin and Evil
Abstract: The Greek word used to translate the Hebrew
chattat(sin) was, we saw,hamartia,referring to the missing of a mark with bow and arrow: a lack of skill, not a morally culpable act. One scholar writes, “Hamartia(error) and its concrete equivalentharmartema(an erroneous act) and the cognate verbhamartaneinseem to connote an area of senses shading in from a periphery of vice and passion to a center of rash and culpable negligence,” and notes “a passage inOedipus at Colonus,ll. 966ff., wherehamartiaandhamartaneinshift in successive lines from the connotation of the voluntary
CHAPTER SIX Demonic and Banal Evil from:
Sin and Evil
Abstract: How do possession, demonism, and vampires relate to haunting? Le Fanu’s characteristic plot, as in “Green Tea” or even “Carmilla,” is “one in which the protagonist, whether deliberately or otherwise, opens his mind in such a way as to become subject to haunting by a figure which is unmistakably part of his own self.”¹ In contemporary terms, Stephen King’s
The Shining(1977) tells the story of Jack Torrance, whose “beast within,” in the setting of the Overlook Hotel, breaks out and turns him into the croquet mallet–wielding monster in lethal pursuit of his own son. Again, King’s good-natured dog
CHAPTER 2 Deep Continuities from:
Time and the Shape of History
Abstract: Persistence or continuity in history is an underrated and often overlooked factor. It lacks the high drama of mutability, and it is at variance with the everyday awareness of diurnal changes – from day to night, and on to day again. In the phraseology of Henri Bergson, the fertile French philosopher—psychologist who probed the human sense of temporal flux: ‘Being is always Becoming’ and ‘Becoming is infinitely varied.’¹ Yet to be able to measure change, whether at macro-or micro-level, there must be some constant factors to act as benchmarks.
Book Title: Contesting Democracy- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): MÜLLER JAN-WERNER
Abstract: This book is the first major account of political thought in twentieth-century Europe, both West and East, to appear since the end of the Cold War. Skillfully blending intellectual, political, and cultural history, Jan-Werner Müller elucidates the ideas that shaped the period of ideological extremes before 1945 and the liberalization of West European politics after the Second World War. He also offers vivid portraits of famous as well as unjustly forgotten political thinkers and the movements and institutions they inspired.Müller pays particular attention to ideas advanced to justify fascism and how they relate to the special kind of liberal democracy that was created in postwar Western Europe. He also explains the impact of the 1960s and neoliberalism, ending with a critical assessment of today's self-consciously post-ideological age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1np9jh
CHAPTER 1 The Molten Mass from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: At Christmas 1918 Max Weber had recently returned from Berlin to Munich, only to find himself in the midst of a ‘bloody carnival’. In the capital he had played a prominent role in deliberations about a new German constitution. This was somewhat surprising: for almost twenty years, the Heidelberg professor had suffered from various illnesses and was hardly seen in public. In the last two years of the First World War, however, he had written a series of polemical articles and tried desperately to act as a political educator of the German nation. He had also hoped to stand for
CHAPTER 3 Fascist Subjects: from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: Many decades after the fall of Hitler’s and Mussolini’s regimes a generally agreed theoretical account of fascism – or just a definition – has remained elusive. There is not even consensus about whether fascism is a strictly limited historical term, something that happened to Italians (or rather was perpetrated by Italians) between 1922 and 1945, or a universal phenomenon. The disputes surrounding fascism are not just a result of academic nitpicking; they point to what appear to be characteristics of the thing itself. At least rhetorically, fascism was opposed to ‘reason’; it glorified will, intuition and sentiment. One could feel
CHAPTER 4 Reconstruction Thought: from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: Post-war reconstruction in Europe presented formidable, in fact unprecedented, tasks. They were, above all, material. But the challenges were also moral and symbolic. While the Holocaust was to remain marginal to thinking about the war at least until the 1960s, the meaning of mass violence and atrocity was immediately debated by political thinkers across the continent. After all, from the late 1930s to the late 1940s more people had been ‘killed by their fellow human beings than ever before in the history of humankind’.¹
CHAPTER 5 The New Time of Contestation: from:
Contesting Democracy
Abstract: The twentieth century demonstrated that Europe was no longer central to world politics. It had done so brutally in the First and Second World Wars; in a less obvious – and, of course, less brutal – way the 1960s were also to drive home this point. The decade seemed to synchronize political and cultural dissatisfaction around the globe – what the CIA at the time referred to as a ‘world-wide phenomenon of restless youth’ (another American institution,
Timemagazine, would actually declare youth the ‘Man of the Year’ in 1967). Outside Western Europe, the political stakes were clearly very high:
Book Title: The Event of Literature- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): EAGLETON TERRY
Abstract: In this characteristically concise, witty, and lucid book, Terry Eagleton turns his attention to the questions we should ask about literature, but rarely do. What is literature? Can we even speak of "literature" at all? What do different literary theories tell us about what texts mean and do? In throwing new light on these and other questions he has raised in previous best-sellers, Eagleton offers a new theory of what we mean by literature. He also shows what it is that a great many different literary theories have in common.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npb45
CHAPTER 2 What is Literature? from:
The Event of Literature
Abstract: We may now descend from the Supreme Being to the more profane question of whether something called literature actually exists. The point of this brief excursus has been to demonstrate just how much is at stake, intellectually and politically, in the apparently arcane question of whether there really are such things as common natures in the world.
CHAPTER 4 The Nature of Fiction from:
The Event of Literature
Abstract: The theory of fiction is perhaps the most difficult aspect of the philosophy of literature, as well as the one that has attracted the most sustained scholarly attention. For some curious reason, commentary on the subject has produced not only some penetrating insights but also more than its fair share of embarrassing banalities. Gregory Currie, for example, informs us that ‘we say that an inference is reasonable when it has a relatively high degree of reasonableness, unreasonable when its degree of reasonableness is very low’.¹ Peter Lamarque impresses on us the fact that ‘fictional characters, like Mr. Allworthy or Miss
II Writing and Difference and Of Grammatology from:
Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: In this chapter I devote extensive attention to two books that Derrida published in 1967,
Writing and DifferenceandOf Grammatology. In both works, Derrida insists on the skeptical position he had established in his studies of Husserl. Yet, more important, he also moves beyond the battle between metaphysics and deconstructive skepticism. The real story ofWriting and DifferenceandOf Grammatology, especially the former, is Derrida’s desire for a new, even revolutionary, truth. This truth cannot be found through the mere act of debunking metaphysical assertions. Derrida seeks something more, an empirically present reality: the encounter with the face
V Politics, Marx, Judaism from:
Who Was Jacques Derrida?
Abstract: In the 1990s, as he neared the close of his life and his academic career, Derrida again sought an arena outside philosophy: a wider and more consequential place than arguments about the coherence of metaphysical texts could provide. His chosen term, increasingly, was politics. And the accent of Derrida’s political writings was a prophetic one, full of commanding ethical import. He relied more than before on a Lévinasian view of our responsibility toward others. Derrida was no doubt reacting to his own role in the de Man and Heidegger scandals, when he failed to confront the political commitments of these
Book Title: The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): DUPRÉ LOUIS
Abstract: The Enlightenment's critique of tradition was a necessary consequence of the fundamental modern principle that we humans are solely responsible for the course of history. Hence we can accept no belief, no authority, no institutions that are not in some way justified. This foundation, for better or for worse, determined the course of the following centuries. Despite contemporary reactions against it, the Enlightenment continues to shape our own time and still distinguishes Western culture from any other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npfbd
2 A Different Cosmos from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: During the Enlightenment the concept of power that had dominated ancient and medieval physics underwent a profound transformation. Previously thought to derive from a source beyond the physical world, it came to be viewed as immanent in that world and eventually as coinciding with the very nature of bodiliness. Aristotle’s theory that all motion originated from an unmoved mover had continued to influence Scholastic theories throughout the Middle Ages. For Jewish, Muslim, and Christian thinkers, the impact of divine power went beyond motion and extended to the very existence of finite beings. According to the doctrine of creation, the dependence
6 The Origin of Modern Social Theories from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The Enlightenment may have made its most lasting impact on the way we live and think today through its social theory. Our institutions and laws, our conception of the state, and our political sensitivity all stem from Enlightenment ideas. This, of course, is particularly true in the United States, where the founding fathers transformed those ideas into an unsurpassed system of balanced government. Remarkably enough, at the center of these ideas stands the age-old concept of natural law. Much of the Enlightenment’s innovation in political theory may be traced to a change in the interpretation of that concept. Originally it
8 The Religious Crisis from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The impact of the Enlightenment was undoubtedly felt most deeply in the area of religion, either as loss or as liberation. It was particularly severe in France and in England, where for a long time skeptical philosophies had undermined the foundations of Christian beliefs. By the end of the eighteenth century, the French masses, pressed by economic hardship, felt abandoned by a Church closely linked to a political regime indifferent to their suffering. In England, after two centuries of religious turmoil, the willingness of the Church to adapt its doctrine to the will of the sovereign had drained common people
10 Spiritual Continuity and Renewal from:
The Enlightenment and the Intellectual Foundations of Modern Culture
Abstract: The ideas discussed in this chapter differ considerably from the ones we have come to consider characteristic of the Enlightenment. Not only do they fall outside the rationalist trends of the age, but they contrast just as much with those that opposed that rationalism. Some of the most prominent and influential thinkers of the time appear to have bypassed the dominant controversies altogether. Unlike the so-called anti-Enlightenment thinkers, the ones presented here do not seek, or do not seek in the first place, alternatives to the prevailing ideologies. They mostly ignore them. Their ideas remain largely continuous with those of
Book Title: Simplexity-Simplifying Principles for a Complex World'
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Weiss Giselle
Abstract: In a sense, the history of living organisms may be summed up by their remarkable ability to find solutions that avoid the world's complexity by imposing on it their own rules and functions. Evolution has resolved the problem of complexity not by simplifying but by finding solutions whose processes-though they can sometimes be complex-allow us to act in the midst of complexity and of uncertainty. Nature can inspire us by making us realize that simplification is never simple and requires instead that we choose, refuse, connect, and imagine, in order to act in the best possible manner. Such solutions are already being applied in design and engineering and are significant in biology, medicine, economics, and the behavioral sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nph7v
1. Making the Complex Simplex from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Why propose the neologism
simplexityto describe the properties of life when the termsimplicityalready exists? It is more than just a play on words. The word connotes the remarkable fact that biological devices, or processes, appeared in the course of evolution to allow animals and people to survive on our planet. Given the complexity of natural processes, the developing and growing brain must find solutions based on simplifying principles. These solutions make it possible to process complex situations very rapidly, elegantly, and efficiently, taking past experience into account and anticipating the future. They also enable us—by means
3. Gaze and Empathy from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Throughout evolution, solutions have been devised to permit living organisms to act rapidly and efficiently. My hypothesis is that incredibly numerous and varied solutions—the diversity of life—are found in very different organisms. Simplexity responds to the same rules as language or culture: It encompasses both diversity and universality, as is evident in the opposing ideas of American linguist Noam Chomsky (who stresses the universality of grammar)¹ and his French contemporary Claude Hagège (who emphasizes the diversity of language).² The problem is present as well in the work of the late anthropologist Claude Lévi-Strauss, who based his structural anthropology
4. Attention from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Ticks care only about butyric acid and temperature. Their
Umweltis very limited! This is a primitive form of selective attention. In humans, attentional mechanisms are numerous and much subtler and also involve memory and context. But attention does not only depend on cognitive factors. Emotion, sexual desire, and motivations play very important roles in determining the focus of attention and its general properties. Finally, attention is inextricably linked to the problem of intersubjectivity, that is, our relationships with others. Already in animals attention can follow rules that are deeply embedded in social relations. One spectacular example is “imprinting,” described
5. The Brain as Emulator and Creator of Worlds from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Our analysis of simplexity is guided by the central idea that not only action but also the
act(a much broader concept, which I have discussed in several previous books) must be at the center of all analysis of the functioning of living organisms. To act, the perceiving brain relies on simplifying principles. Psychology and the neurosciences have now established profound links between perception and action. For this reason, I have introduced the termpercactionin my courses at the Collège de France. The simplifying principles, too, link perception to action. Of course, it is impossible to describe all the
8. The Simplex Gesture from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Animal and human gestures are used for action but also as signposts, symbols, and to indicate intention. They are neither simple nor complex. They are simplex because, in a very global and immediate way, they enable the brain to grasp a reality, an emotion, a thought, or a complex social relationship. Gesture is a fundamental mark of culture and art, which are always simplex expressions. Gesture is essential to them. Drawing, painting, music, mime, acting, sculpture, and dance are always expressed in gestures. For this reason, we must not be content with a physiology (or a philosophy) of action. We
9. Walking: from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Walking has played a fundamental role in all animal species throughout evolution. When aquatic life gave way to terrestrial life, a whole set of problems had to be resolved, beginning with integrating the four elements of walking: posture, locomotor rhythm, gaze, and gesture. To the reader who might think that we are about to launch into a question of restricted and basic motor physiology, that is, far removed from cognitive function, I would say that posture is none other than “preparation to act,”¹ and locomotion is not only about making successive steps but also navigating in space. Indeed, some clinicians
10. Simplex Space from:
Simplexity
Abstract: Let us now quickly review the neural basis of spatial processing in the brain. The goal here is not to present a course on physiology but to show how the spatialization of perception, action, memory, and decision making reduces complexity, sometimes by way of detours that, in turn, engender simplexity This theory has been revisited several times since neuroscientist and, later, Nobel Laureate Santiago Ramón y Cajal revealed the remarkable diversity of neuronal morphology. It seems obvious when we recall that the body, or even the outside world, is represented in the brain by neural maps organized by “topies,” which
3 The Scarlet Letter from:
The American Classics
Abstract: When I first read
The Scarlet Letter,I found it bewildering. That impression has not entirely receded, but I think I understand how it came about and why it has to some extent persisted. The title of the book implied a story about sin—a scarlet woman—and indeed the book often refers to sin and sinfulness; but none of the characters has a convinced sense of sin. Hawthorne seems to equivocate among the values he brings forward. I acknowledge, without regarding the acknowledgment as a major concession, that my understanding of sin is the one I was taught in
4 Walden from:
The American Classics
Abstract: It speaks well for American education that children are encouraged to read, from an early age, a book as abrasive as
Walden‚or at least the few charming parts of it—“The Pond in Spring,” “Former Inhabitants,” and “Spring.” Thoreau was not an especially likable man. Emerson spoke of him, at the funeral service, as if he were a phenomenon, a fact of nature rather than of human life. He remarked that his admirers called him “that terrible Thoreau,” “as if he spoke when silent, and was still present when he had departed.” One of his friends said, according to
Book Title: Clueless in Academe-How Schooling Obscures the Life of the Mind
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): GRAFF GERALD
Abstract: Gerald Graff argues that our schools and colleges make the intellectual life seem more opaque, narrowly specialized, and beyond normal learning capacities than it is or needs to be. Left clueless in the academic world, many students view the life of the mind as a secret society for which only an elite few qualify.In a refreshing departure from standard diatribes against academia, Graff shows how academic unintelligibility is unwittingly reinforced not only by academic jargon and obscure writing, but by the disconnection of the curriculum and the failure to exploit the many connections between academia and popular culture. Finally, Graff offers a wealth of practical suggestions for making the culture of ideas and arguments more accessible to students, showing how students can enter the public debates that permeate their lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npkd5
2 The Problem Problem and Other Oddities of Academic Discourse from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: AS TEACHERS WE OFTEN PROCEED as if the rationale of our most basic academic practices is understood and shared by our students, even though we get plenty of signs that it is not. We take for granted, for example, that reflecting in a self-conscious way about experience— “intellectualizing”—is something our students naturally see the point of and want to learn to do better. If they don’t, after all, why are they in school? At the same time, we cannot help noticing that many students are skeptical about the value of such intellectualizing. When students do poorly, the reasons often
4 Two Cheers for the Argument Culture from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: IN THE PREVIOUS CHAPTERS, I have discussed confusions that can be traced to academia’s ways of fogging over its conversations. Some observers, however, complain that what characterizes the academic scene is not “conversation” so much as smash-mouth combat. I have taken flak myself for arguing that conflict and controversy should be made more central in the curriculum. My critics object that today’s academia, like today’s popular media, is all too rife with conflict of a distinctly ugly and unedifying kind. The critics point to talk-show violence, political attack ads, and other signs of a pervasive “Gotcha!” spirit that aims at
7 Scholars and Sound Bites: from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: CALL IT WISHFUL THINKING, but I have argued in this book that it is possible to do justice to the complexity of academic subjects while communicating clearly to nonspecialist audiences. I was reminded that this is a minority view, however, by the reaction of students in a recent graduate class. They were incredulous when I claimed that they did not have to write obscurely in order to make a positive impression on professional audiences. One or two firmly insisted that a certain amount of obfuscation is a prerequisite for professional success. I suspect that when students write ponderously and evasively,
11 Hidden Intellectualism from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: IN THIS BOOK SO FAR, I have been looking at factors that make academic intellectual culture opaque or alienating to many students: seemingly counterintuitive problems and argumentative practices that are rarely explained; curricular mixed messages that further muddy those practices; phobias about adversarial debate and intellectual analysis; obfuscating habits of academic writing; the tendency to withhold the critical conversations that students are expected to enter. In this chapter, I shift the emphasis by examining some ways in which academic and student cultures are closer to each other than they seem and how teachers can take advantage of this convergence.
EPILOGUE: from:
Clueless in Academe
Abstract: 2. Make a claim, the sooner the better, preferably flagged for the reader by a phrase like “My claim here is that. . . .” You don’t actually have to use this exact phrase, but if you couldn’t do so you’re in trouble.
CHAPTER 1 Introduction: from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: The word “theory” has a complicated etymological history that I won’t linger over except to point out what can make its meaning confusing. The way the word has actually been used at certain periods has made it mean something like what we call “practice,” whereas at other periods it has meant something very different from practice: a concept to which practice can appeal. This
CHAPTER 2 Introduction Continued: from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: In the first lecture we discussed the reasons why literary theory in the twentieth century is shadowed by skepticism, but as we were talking about that we actually introduced another issue that isn’t quite the same as skepticism—namely,
determinism. In the course of intellectual history, we said, first you encounter concern about the distance between the perceiver and the perceived, a concern that gives rise to skepticism about whether we can know things as they really are. But then as an outgrowth of this concern in figures like Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud, you get the further question, not just
CHAPTER 3 Ways In and Out of the Hermeneutic Circle from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: Despite the intimidating sound of the word, “hermeneutics” is easily defined as the science of interpretation. You would think hermeneutics had always been a matter of interest, but in fact it’s of continuous interest only fairly recently. Aristotle did write a treatise called
De Interpretatione, and the Middle Ages were much concerned with interpretation, so I suppose what I’m saying in part is that the word “hermeneutics” wasn’t then available; but it’s also true that at many times the idea that there ought to be a systematic study of how we interpret things wasn’t a matter of pressing concern.
CHAPTER 7 Russian Formalism from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: We now start a sequence that takes us through deconstruction, a sequence that has genuine continuity. I don’t have to stretch to point out similarities and divergences because the ensuing series of theorists are themselves retrospectively working with all the interconnections I could see fit to mention. Nevertheless, for later developments, the relationship between the foundational Russian formalists and the foundational work of the linguist Ferdinand de Saussure is a rather complex matter that I’m going to postpone summing up for some time. Much will become clearer when we actually get into what’s called “structuralism” and you read the essay
CHAPTER 15 The Postmodern Psyche from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: In this lecture, we’re still focused on individual consciousness, even though the authors you read are known for their political engagements. We shall still be considering the psychological genesis of the text or film as the site, or model, for the symbolic patterning of a text, undoubtedly in the case of Žižek, to some extent also in that of Deleuze. This is actually our farewell to the psychological emphasis, and it is so arranged—with the consequence of separating Žižek from Lacan—because today’s authors make sure we understand that there are political stakes in art and interpretation.
CHAPTER 20 The Classical Feminist Tradition from:
Theory of Literature
Abstract: First, let it be said that in entering upon the phase of this course that concerns particular human identities as theoretical focal points, we shall find ourselves engaged with critical approaches that are, in practical terms, remarkably rich and productive. It is simply amazing how, as Jonathan Culler once put it, “reading as a woman,” or reading as an African American, or reading in any other “subject
EQUAL TO GOD from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: John 5:18 says that the plot to have Jesus killed began because Jesus was “making himself equal to God.” This assertion can hardly be historical, so we must seek an explanation for it in the history of the Johannine circle. It was not only the Johannine Christians who made such connections, of course. Already in Mark hostility against Jesus is first aroused by his claim to exercise a prerogative—to forgive sins—that is God’s alone (Mark 2:7), and the actual plot against his life springs, as in John, from a Sabbath healing (3:6). Christians prior to John had appropriated
“AND ROSE UP TO PLAY”: from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: The logic of Paul’s counsel to the Corinthian Christians about “meat offered to idols” has long troubled interpreters. A particularly difficult problem has been the relation of 1 Corinthians 10:1–22 to the rest of chapters 8–10. In these verses Paul appears to adopt an absolute prohibition of contact with pagan cults, but that accords ill with his more lenient stand in chapter 8 and in 10:23–31. Moreover, the sequence of thought in 10:1–22 has not been completely clear, either. How are the scriptural examples connected with the paraenetic warnings? How is the consoling statement about temptation
THE CIRCLE OF REFERENCE IN PAULINE MORALITY from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: For Aristotle, the context in which character is formed and the arena in which virtue is exercised is the
polis.¹ For the sect or cult of early Christianity, obviously thepolisdoes not have the same force, but what precisely took its place? The first groups that emerge clearly into what little light is cast by our surviving sources are the communities to which Paul wrote his letters. Because those letters are primarily instruments intended for moral instruction and formation, they are particularly precious sources for questions about the scope of moral perceptions and obligations in the Christian movement, at
A HERMENEUTICS OF SOCIAL EMBODIMENT from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: When Krister Stendahl’s article “Biblical Theology” appeared in the
Interpreter’s Dictionary of the Biblein 1962, it caused no little consternation in some circles. He insisted that the primary intellectual task of the biblical scholar was to make a clear distinction between what the textmeantin its original setting and what itmeans.That ran directly counter to the practical aims of the dominant interpretive schools of the day, which wanted, as Karl Barth had once said, to dissolve “the differences between then and now.”¹ Today the distinction for which Stendahl argued so lucidly is taken for granted in
ON TRUSTING AN UNPREDICTABLE GOD: from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Abstract: One of Paul Meyer’s colleagues has shown us how important is the issue of finding a “coherent” Paul among the Apostle’s varied responses to the “contingencies” of his situation.² Yet, for anyone who still hopes to find some guidance from the Bible in trying to form a Christian life today, there is a more urgent question: not whether Paul is consistent, but whether God is. This question is at the center of Romans 9–11, and Paul Meyer has clearly articulated it: If God’s action in Christ was as radical as Paul (and subsequent Christian faith) claims, “what then becomes
AFTERWORD from:
In Search of the Early Christians
Author(s) Meeks Wayne A.
Abstract: The essays collected here illustrate some of the tasks that my generation of New Testament scholars have found before us: the retrieval of the ordinary out of the silence imposed by centuries, exploring the dialectic between surviving fragments of ancient language and the other social forms in which they were once embedded, discovering the ways by which emerging communities invented moral practice and moral intuition, understanding the multifaceted Jewishness of the early Christian movement. The New Testament scholar’s vocation thus came to intersect with a variety of exploratory and revisionist movements in the humanities, embracing social theory, history, anthropology, and
Book Title: Absorbing Perfections-Kabbalah and Interpretation
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Bloom Harold
Abstract: In this wide-ranging discussion of Kabbalah-from the mystical trends of medieval Judaism to modern Hasidism-one of the world's foremost scholars considers different visions of the nature of the sacred text and of the methods to interpret it. Moshe Idel takes as a starting point the fact that the postbiblical Jewish world lost its geographical center with the destruction of the temple and so was left with a textual center, the Holy Book. Idel argues that a text-oriented religion produced language-centered forms of mysticism.Against this background, the author demonstrates how various Jewish mystics amplified the content of the Scriptures so as to include everything: the world, or God, for example. Thus the text becomes a major realm for contemplation, and the interpretation of the text frequently becomes an encounter with the deepest realms of reality. Idel delineates the particular hermeneutics belonging to Jewish mysticism, investigates the progressive filling of the text with secrets and hidden levels of meaning, and considers in detail the various interpretive strategies needed to decodify the arcane dimensions of the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npn1r
3 TEXT AND INTERPRETATION INFINITIES IN KABBALAH from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: The suppression of some conceptual elements and forms of discourse already found in ancient Jewish circles is characteristic of the rather homogeneous type of rabbinic discourse. Though allowing divergences of opinion and, one may even claim, encouraging, preserving, and studying them for generations, the ancient rabbis nevertheless controlled the nature of the topics on which divergences are allowed. No allegorical or symbolic interpretations of the Bible, abundant as they were in Alexandrian Judaism (especially Philo), were given access to the exegetical methods characteristic of rabbinic literature. Alchemy, astrology, philosophy, and physical sciences remained at the margin of rabbinic discourse. A
7 SECRECY, BINAH, AND DERISHAH from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: In its biblical forms, Judaism is a rather exoteric and democratic type of religiosity. The emphasis on making the teaching of the revealed instructions open to all classes of Israelites and the paramount importance of making religious actions open, in most cases, to all members of the nation, marginalize during the biblical phase of Judaism the surfacing and privileging of mysteries and secrets. Some of the subsequent phases of Judaism can, however, be described as part of an ongoing process of arcanization, to use a term I adopt from Jan Assmann,¹ which means that the common texts and actions become
13 TRADITION, TRANSMISSION, AND TECHNIQUES from:
Absorbing Perfections
Abstract: So far we have examined the different ways in which the worlds of the sacred texts were imagined by various Jewish mystical thinkers and how they interpreted those books. In the past few chapters the emphasis has been on explicating the exegetical techniques, which offered the strong exegetes the possibility of discovering, in fact rediscovering, religious worlds that had previously been adopted by the Kabbalists, or sometimes by their philosophical sources, from a variety of relatively late intellectual and literary corpora—mostly Greek thought as translated and adapted in Arabic and, less frequently, Latin. We should be aware, however, that
Book Title: The Good, the True, and the Beautiful-A Neuronal Approach
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Garey Laurence
Abstract: Changeux's book draws on Plato's notion that the Good, the True, and the Beautiful are celestial essences or ideas, independent but so intertwined as to be inseparable. Placing these essences within the characteristic features of the human brain's neuronal organization, the author addresses unsolved questions in neuroscience today. With imagination and deep insight, Changeux illuminates the evolution of the brain and deciphers what new developments in neuroscience may portend for the future of humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1npn3q
II The Good: from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Since David Hume (1711–1776), philosophy, as well as common sense, has differentiated science from morality. Science establishes facts (“what is”), whereas morality decides “what should be,” but many admit that we cannot distinguish what should be from what is. I shall consider whether it is plausible to take an opposite, although perhaps rather surprising, approach and ask whether we can favor what should be from our knowledge about what is. In fact, such a question belongs to a long philosophical tradition, including Hume, Henri de Saint-Simon (1760–1825), Auguste Comte, Charles Darwin, and contemporary ethologists. My idea is to
V Molecules and the Mind from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Since ancient times we have accepted the concept of active chemical substances in the human body. In 1877 Emil du Bois-Reymond suggested two possible mechanisms: “At the boundary of the contractile substance, either there exists a
VI Where Do We Stand Today? from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Since my first lectures at the Collège de France more than thirty years ago, my aim has been clear: to take up the challenge of molecular biology and apply its paradigms and methods to a study of the brain and its most highly integrated functions, such as consciousness and thought. So where do we stand all these years later? Let us try to establish some new facts and some research perspectives for the decades to come.
VII Epilogue from:
The Good, the True, and the Beautiful
Abstract: Recent progress in neuroscience and its integration in dynamic evolutionary processes, which include culture and its history, prompt us to rethink certain central philosophical questions, such as the significance of death. Death is an essential biological phenomenon directly related to the evolution of species. It has taken on a special dimension in the history of humanity. Buff on rightly said that “death is as natural as life.” Many philosophical and religious fundamentals, which emphasize the sacred character of life, maintain the balance by doing the same for its interruption by death. I feel it is opportune today more than ever
Introduction from:
The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION is inescapably ritualistic (one is received into the church by a solemn washing with water), uncompromisingly moral (“be ye perfect as your Father in heaven is perfect,” said Jesus), and unapologetically intellectual (be ready to give a “reason for the hope that is in you,” in the words of I Peter). Like all the major religions of the world, Christianity is more than a set of devotional practices and a moral code: it is also a way of thinking about God, about human beings, about the world and history. For Christians, thinking is part of believing. Augustine
Chapter 10 Making This Thing Other from:
The Spirit of Early Christian Thought
Abstract: ONE OF THE practices most despised by ancient critics of Christianity was devotion to the dead, particularly veneration of the bones of martyrs and saints. A zealous foe of the church, Julian, Roman emperor from 361 to 363, complained that Christians had “filled the whole world with tombs and memorials to the dead,” even though nowhere in the Scriptures is it said one should “haunt tombs or show them reverence.”¹ By the end of the fourth century the cities of the Roman world were sprinkled with shrines housing relics, that is, the bones of holy men and women, and pious
Book Title: Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink-Beginnings and Ends in Phenomenology, 1928–1938
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): BRUZINA RONALD
Abstract: Eugen Fink was Edmund Husserl's research assistant during the last decade of the renowned phenomenologist's life, a period in which Husserl's philosophical ideas were radically recast. In this landmark book, Ronald Bruzina shows that Fink was actually a collaborator with Husserl, contributing indispensable elements to their common enterprise.Drawing on hundreds of hitherto unknown notes and drafts by Fink, Bruzina highlights the scope and depth of his theories and critiques. He places these philosophical formulations in their historical setting, organizes them around such key themes as the world, time, life, and the concept and methodological place of the "meontic," and demonstrates that they were a pivotal impetus for the renewing of "regress to the origins" in transcendental-constitutive phenomenology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nppmd
7 Critical-Systematic Core: from:
Edmund Husserl and Eugen Fink
Abstract: Someone once wrote of Beethoven: “His string quartets do not grow from or reflect specific experiences; they summarize; they are his personality abstracted into absolute music.”⁴ If only it were so simple: that thought about the Absolute could indeed be wrested out of the stuff of experienced creation through some wonderful process that would distill from it the pure form by which its being is manifest. On the other hand, perhaps it does get done precisely
in music!Perhaps music is the Play of Being in its closest coming to that Absolute of Transcendent Form, the Absolute that lies originative
Five COMMITMENT from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: If we think candidly about how we live, how we modern Western men and women exercise the tremendous degree of autonomy so many of us undeservedly possess, we will find that we do not “live in the present” at all. Much of our time we spend working out the possibilities and requirements of projects and attachments—to persons, places, purposes—to which we engaged ourselves some time in the past. We decide what to do
giventhese temporally extended projects and attachments. In other words, we constantly act now on the basis of decisions, relations, and intentions formed in the
Six REASON OVER TIME from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: The first time Arrow’s name appeared in this book, the subject was the reappearance, within contemporary economic thought, of Jefferson’s proposition that the earth belongs to the living. (Rational economic policy, Arrow suggests, would take into account the interests of future citizens only to the extent that there is a present preference among living individuals to do so.)¹ A similar observation applies to Arrow’s famous Impossibility Theorem. It relies on an understanding of rationality that, while characteristic of modern economic thought and much analytic philosophy, is untenably compressed in its temporality—compressed into the present.
Ten READING THE CONSTITUTION AS WRITTEN: from:
Freedom and Time
Abstract: A strange fact about contemporary constitutional law: it has no account of how to interpret the Constitution.
Introduction: from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: The first volume of this narrative began with the conceit of these two faces, those of Herodotus and Thucydides—cultural history and political history, anachronistically speaking—and added a third, a Livian (or Eusebian) national (or confessional) and by imperial extension universal history from a European and ethnocentric center; and these forebears still haunt historiographical practice. What Momigliano suggests is that Herodotus, in a world still being explored and charted, would have continued going about satisfying his curiosity and seeking local meanings, while Thucydides would have thrown up his hands at the unanalyzable chaos which his posterity has brought. As
5 After the Good War from:
Frontiers of History
Abstract: Historians have always, though not always ostensibly, sought a “usable past”; and reviewing historiographical practice around the world and back over two and a half millennia, one cannot be surprised that ideas of objectivity, a single “big story,” and other “noble dreams” have given way to even older notions of history as the product of social creation or authorial imagination. “Representation” has become a watchword of contemporary historical writing; and the upshot, Foucauldian warnings about the tyranny of the subject notwithstanding, is to restore the “point of view” as sovereign, whether or not the historical viewer is in full command
Foreword from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Author(s) Wilson George M.
Abstract: I suppose that Noël Carroll is best known within film studies as the unremitting arch nemesis of Big Theory, and certainly his 1988 book
Mystifying Moviesis a devastating systematic attack on the sweeping pretensions of the film theory that dominated the 1970s and 1980s. Potentially enhancing his grim reputation is the fact that Carroll introduced the philosophy of horror as a systematic topic in contemporary aesthetics. Anyone who knows Carroll personally, however, will have trouble sustaining an image of him derived from Dr. Mabuse or the Creeper or some other monster of mayhem and subversion. Carroll is a funny,
Introduction from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: This volume is a collection of my essays, written in the second half of the 1990s, on the topic of the
moving image—the label that I prefer to use for the category comprising film, video, broadcast television, moving computer-generated imagery, and, in short, any mass-produced moving image technologically within our reach now and in times to come.¹ My reasons for speaking of the moving image rather than of film, video, or computer-generated images (CGI) revolve around the fact that those ways of speaking are too wedded to reference to particular media, whereas the moving image, as it has come
Chapter 2 Film, Attention, and Communication: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Although there are disputes about when to date the beginning of film, one traditional opinion favors 1895. On December 28 of that year, Louis and Auguste Lumière staged the first
publicscreening of a series of their films, includingWorkers Leaving the Factory,in a room of the Grand Café in Paris. This event had been preceded by a series ofprivatescreenings for selected scientific and business audiences. On December 28, the public had the opportunity to see the product.
Chapter 6 Film Form: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: As with other artforms, the initial problem of talking about style or form in film is complicated by the fact that the concept of style can be applied to so many different kinds of things and at so many different levels of generality.¹ One might use “style” to refer to whole periods of filmmaking, speaking, for example, of the German Expressionist style, or Hollywood studio style in the thirties. Or one might apply the concept of style to the work of a particular filmmaker’s oeuvre, referring, for instance, to the style of Stanley Donen or Yvonne Rainer or Theo Angelopoulos.
Chapter 9 Fiction, Nonfiction, and the Film of Presumptive Assertion: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: In both film studies and the culture at large, there is an area of practice which is typically labelled ‘the documentary’, or perhaps less frequently, ‘nonfiction film’. These labels are roughly serviceable for practical purposes, but they are not always as theoretically precise as they might be. Therefore, in this chapter, I will propose another label for the field—namely, ‘films of presumptive assertion’—and I will attempt to define it.¹ In response to this statement of intent, some may worry that my new label and its accompanying definition are stipulative and revisionist. However, I will argue that they track
Chapter 10 Photographic Traces and Documentary Films: from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: In his characteristically stimulating and carefully crafted article “Visible Traces: Documentary Film and the Contents of Photographs,” Gregory Currie introduces a sophisticated theory of the documentary film.¹ For Currie, a documentary film is one comprised of a preponderance of photographic images that function in the context of the relevant film as traces of the objects and events that causally produced them. An image of Gregory Peck in a documentary film is a representation of Gregory Peck, a photographic trace of the actor at a certain time and place. And a documentary about Gregory Peck is constructed mostly of such images.
Chapter 11 Toward a Definition of Moving-Picture Dance from:
Engaging the Moving Image
Abstract: Almost since the inception of moving pictures, those pictures have often featured dance. The obvious reason for this is that the natural subject of moving pictures is movement. And dances—along with hurtling locomotives, car chases, cattle stampedes, tennis matches, intergalactic dog-fights, and the like—move. Thus, a significant portion of the history of moving pictures involves dance movement. Many moving-picture makers have devoted admirable amounts of effort and imagination to portraying dance in or through media as diverse as film, video, and computer animation. The purpose of this essay is to attempt to offer a philosophical characterization of this
11 Transcendental Logic I from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: Husserl’s researches into transcendental logic, it appears, had their origin in the 1920s, as he came to develop the ideas of passive synthesis and genetic constitution. The lectures of the winter semester of 1920–21 were called “Transzendentale Logik,” now published as a supplementary volume (Hua XXXI) to the
Analyzen zur passiven Synthesis. These lectures develop the contrast between activity and passivity (as we saw in the preceding chapter), and then turn toward “active objectification” and to theory of judgment. Eventually, the researches will culminate in the two worksFormale und transzendentale Logik(1929) andErfahrung und Urteil, written about
21 A Theory of Intentionality: from:
Edmund Husserl's Freiburg Years
Abstract: P₃: With the bracketing of the object intended, the intentional act is discovered to be a correlation between noesis
Book Title: Abraham's Children-Liberty and Tolerance in an Age of Religious Conflict
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): CLARK KELLY JAMES
Abstract: In this vitally important book, fifteen influential practitioners of the Abrahamic religions address religious liberty and tolerance from the perspectives of their own faith traditions. Former President Jimmy Carter, Rabbi Arik Ascherman, Indonesia's first democratically elected president, Abdurrahman Wahid, and the other writers draw on their personal experiences and on the sacred writings that are central in their own religious lives. Rather than relying on "pure reason," as secularists might prefer, the contributors celebrate religious traditions and find within them a way toward mutual peace, uncompromised liberty, and principled tolerance. Offering a counterbalance to incendiary religious leaders who cite Holy Writ to justify intolerance and violence, the contributors reveal how tolerance and respect for believers in other faiths stands at the core of the Abrahamic traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq07j
8 Religious Intolerance and the Wounds of God from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) WOLTERSTORFF NICHOLAS
Abstract: This was my first contact with Palestinians. It happened at a conference on Palestinian rights on the west side of Chicago in May 1978. About 150 Palestinians were in attendance. The reason these evils had befallen them
13 The Middle Way from:
Abraham's Children
Author(s) MIRAHMADI HEDIEH
Abstract: The Prophet Abraham never liked to eat alone. He felt that food was a divine blessing and, as such, should be shared with others, particularly those in need. Therefore, he made it his constant practice that before a meal he would invite someone to eat with him. One day, Abraham invited a
Book Title: Sin-A History
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): anderson gary a.
Abstract: Broad in scope while still exceptionally attentive to detail, this ambitious and profound book unveils one of the most seismic shifts that occurred in religious belief and practice, deepening our understanding of one of the most fundamental aspects of human experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq1r7
10 salvation by works? from:
Sin
Abstract: Many readers will find something unsettling about the matter-of-fact way I have interpreted Daniel’s advice to King Nebuchadnezzar. Is the act of giving alms simply a financial exchange between the debtor and his God? If so, it would seem that human beings can “buy” their way out of their sinful state and that the critique of the Protestant reformers applies: humans save themselves by their good works.¹
11 a treasury in heaven from:
Sin
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I noted that one of the principal characteristics of the treasury in heaven is its outstanding rate of return. As St. Augustine exclaimed: “Give a little and receive on a grand scale. Look how your interest is mounting up! Give temporal wealth and claim eternal interest, give earth and gain heaven.” In this chapter I pursue this theme more deeply. One of the most distinguishing features of almsgiving is the way it dramatically alters the balance between one’s debits and credits. For every unit of debt we take on, owing to various forms of wrongdoing, we
Book Title: On Evil- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): EAGLETON TERRY
Abstract: In this witty, accessible study, the prominent Marxist thinker Terry Eagleton launches a surprising defense of the reality of evil, drawing on literary, theological, and psychoanalytic sources to suggest that evil, no mere medieval artifact, is a real phenomenon with palpable force in our contemporary world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq3bb
CHAPTER ONE Fictions of Evil from:
On Evil
Abstract: There aren’t many novels in which the main character dies in the first few paragraphs. There are even fewer in which this is the only character in the book. We would be bemused if Jane Austen’s Emma Woodhouse were to break her neck in the first chapter of
Emma, or Henry Fielding’s Tom Jones were to be stillborn in the novel’s opening sentences. Something like this, however, is what happens in William Golding’s novelPincher Martin, which begins with a man drowning:
CHAPTER THREE Job’s Comforters from:
On Evil
Abstract: Whenever some tragedy or natural disaster takes place these days, one can be sure to find a group of men and women holding homemade placards inscribed with the pregnant word “Why?” These people are not looking for factual explanations. They know very well that the earthquake was the result of a fissure deep in the earth, or that the murder was the work of a serial killer released too soon from custody. “Why?” does not mean, “What was the cause of this?” It is more of a lament than a query. It is a protest against some profound lack of
Book Title: Whose Freud?-The Place of Psychoanalysis in Contemporary Culture
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Woloch Alex
Abstract: One hundred years after the publication of
The Interpretation of Dreams,Freud remains the most frequently cited author of our culture-and one of the most controversial. To some he is the presiding genius of modernity, to others the author of its symptomatic illnesses. The current position of psychoanalysis is very much at issue. Is it still valid as a theory of the mind? Have its therapeutic applications been rendered obsolete by drugs? Why does it still figure in debates about sexual identity, despite its rejection by many feminists? How does it contribute to cultural analysis?This book offers a new assessment of the status of psychoanalysis as a discipline and a discourse in contemporary culture. It brings together an exceptional group of theorists and practitioners, such partisans and critics of Freud as Frederic Crews, Judith Butler, Leo Bersani, Juliet Mitchell, Robert Jay Lifton, Richard Wollheim, Jonathan Lear, and others.These contributors, who are active in literature, philosophy, film, history, cultural studies, neuroscience, psychotherapy, and other disciplines, debate how psychoanalysis has enriched-and been enriched by-these fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1nq728
Psychoanalysis and Its Discontents from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Michels Robert
Abstract: Many people are discontented with psychoanalysis. Four broad groups have made their discontents widely known—philosophers and scientists; psychiatrists; patients; and practicing psychoanalysts—and I shall explore those discontents here.
The Vortex Beneath the Story from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Mitchell Juliet
Abstract: The widespread diffusion of psychoanalysis into myriad therapies coincides with the relative weakening of its own center as a clinical practice and theory that emanates therefrom. Psychoanalysis is a discipline that demands the hard work of fifty minutes of daily free association from the patient and the suspension of consciousness from the analyst in order to listen to unconscious effects that, despite all their differences, somewhere as humans (as analyst and analysand) they share.
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Judith Butler: I have just a couple of comments. I was interested in my colleague Frederick Crews’s remarks, and I appreciate his bravery in coming here and letting us know his views. I suppose I’m just going to take up the position of the adversary of a certain kind—and I hope of a friendly kind. I thought it might be useful—my Freud–your Freud, you know—to make a distinction between questions about Freud the man: was he a person of character? did he lie? did he cover up? did he not? was he doing the best he
The Pain in the Patient’s Knee from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Jacobus Mary
Abstract: What is the place of a psychoanalysis that exists “between” therapy (considered both as a theory and a practice, but also as a theory
ofpractice) and hermeneutics, or the theory of interpretation and understanding? How do we understand “understanding” itself, considered as a mental process involving both analyst and analysand? I want to approach these questions by way of the writing of the British post-Kleinian psychoanalyst Wilfred Bion (1897–1979) . Bion is best known outside psychoanalytic circles as a proponent of the leaderless group and as a theorist of group process.¹ But his collected theoretical and clinical oeuvre
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Esther de Costa Meyer, Moderator: Professor Loewenberg, you were talking about Robert Jan van Pelt, who was the first architectural historian to work on Auschwitz seriously. It struck me that the first man to publish the fact that Bauhaus architects were involved in the actual building of the concentration camps was in fact a negationist. It was Jean-Claude Pressac: a man who went to Auschwitz for other purposes, and there discovered all these boxes of documents, and in this aboutface—which in itself calls out for psychoanalytic interpretation—then turns around, has this conversion, and begins to publish all this
Speaking Psychoanalysis from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Bersani Leo
Abstract: What exactly is psychoanalytic thought, and how might answering this question help us to define what might be called the psychoanalytically constituted subject? One of the most curious aspects of
Civilization and Its Discontentsis Freud’s reiterated self-reproach to the effect that he is not speaking psychoanalytically. The work was written in 1929, late in Freud’s career, so it’s not as if he hadn’t had time to develop a distinctively psychoanalytic language. You would think that by now Freud would be “speaking psychoanalysis” fluently. But the complaints start in Chapter 3, where he laments that “so far we have discovered
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Paul Robinson: I have a question for Kaja Silverman. I was struck, unless I misunderstood, by the fact that she and Judith Butler [see Part I] were saying very similar things about what I would call “denaturalizing” the family. They both suggest that “mother” and “father” are culturally contingent categories and that we should be open to other ways of thinking beside the traditional, biological one that we have in the West, which I find a very attractive idea. I’m wondering whether Professor Silverman thinks Freud himself is open to this kind of culturally relative or culturally contingent way of
States of Emergency: from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Santner Eric L.
Abstract: In my most recent book, which focused on the case of Daniel Paul Schreber, made famous by Freud’s 1911 study of Judge Schreber’s
Memoirs,I argued that one area where psychoanalytic thought can deepen our understanding of modernity concerns the processes and procedures of symbolic investiture.¹ By symbolic investiture I mean those social acts, often involving a ritualized transferal of a title and mandate, whereby an individual is endowed with a new social status and role within a shared linguistic universe. It’s how one comes into being as, comes to enjoy the predicate of, husband, professor, judge, psychoanalyst, and so
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: This section continues to emphasize the fruitfulness of psychoanalysis’s methodological
displacement, its position betwixt and between other disciplines. All four contributors—coming from a spectrum of different medical and scientific backgrounds—are interested in the potential interaction,across differences,between psychoanalysis and cognitive science. Morton Reiser thus carefully distinguishes between conflating these two disciplines and finding productive parallels, or isomorphisms, between the two.
Discussion from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: David Forrest: The imaging technology is progressing so fast it’s practically every trimester they have to revise what they have. I have a report from
Scienceof 20 March 98 which lists all these brand-new, super-fast, ultra-fast MRI, EPI, RARE, SPIRAL, BURST, GRASS, all acronymic techniques, ecoplanner techniques. The point is that the resolution, the speed, and the penetrance into mental process is so great. Don’t you think that this enormous wave
Introduction from:
Whose Freud?
Abstract: Panel Six places philosophical models of truthfulness face to face with the psychoanalytic session. Whereas psychoanalytic theory relies on a horizon of truthfulness, psychoanalytic praxis revolves around an alert attention to the probable fictiveness of the analysand’s truth (intentional statements, recovered memories) and the probable truthfulness of his or her fictions (performative acting-out, symbolic transferences). As a comment in the discussion section puts it: “the manifest, apparent story or truth sometimes is only a communication about a hidden more interesting truth”; or as John Forrester more dramatically claims, in psychoanalysis “a ‘no’ may mean ‘yes’, and a ‘yes’ almost certainly
Psychoanalytical Theory and Kinds of Truth from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Wollheim Richard
Abstract: I attribute the strange title of this section to the historical fact that people who have become pessimistic about how to connect psychoanalysis with truth, or how to confirm or disconfirm psychoanalytic propositions, whether of a theoretical or an applied kind, have nevertheless continued to hold psychoanalysis in high esteem, and they have thought to resolve the issue by inventing a new value, or virtue, which they still call “truth,” but then append to it a qualifier, like “metaphoric,” or “narrative.” Thus they take away with one hand what they bestow with the other.
On Truth from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Davidson Donald
Abstract: Much that we are tempted to say about truth is false. We think we can explain the truth of the sentences we utter or of what we think by saying they correspond to the facts—we call on the
relationof correspondence (or, in the case of the early Wittgenstein, the relation of picturing) to explain thepropertyof truth. But as an explanation of truth this is empty, not only because if there were such a relation we could never perceive that it holds, but because no one has ever succeeded in giving a viable account of the entities
What Kind of Truth? from:
Whose Freud?
Author(s) Forrester John
Abstract: Mention the word
truth,and it looks as if one should call in the philosophers. And philosophers themselves do include truth among the standard topics their discipline addresses, along with time, the good, knowledge, and beauty. Yettruthis an ordinary word in ordinary use, so it will always be an open question who is in a position to adjudicate on its application and its accomplishment, just astableis a word that belongs to all as well as to carpenters, industrial designers, and actuaries. When philosophers are asked to address the question of the kind of truth we can
1 Closing the Books: from:
Agitations
Abstract: Several years ago, a man I knew, an assistant professor of English at an Ivy League university, decided to scrap his library—a gesture that at the time did not properly impress me. What interested me were the books themselves, as I was one of those invited to plunder the novels, biographies, anthologies of plays and poetry, works of criticism, short-story collections, a sampling of history and philosophy—exactly what you’d expect from a lifetime of liberal-arts collecting. The reason he gave them away, and the reason I didn’t catch on to what was really happening, is that he had
6 Why Smart People Believe in God from:
Agitations
Abstract: Lately, I have been mulling over my relationship with God. Well, not mine exactly, but other people’s. And, to be honest, I wouldn’t be doing any mulling at all if these were not subtitled films–PBS–
New York Review of Bookspeople (they may not have read Darwin, but they’ve read Stephen Jay Gould on Darwin); people who routinely vote the liberal or progressive ticket, scoff at evangelical preachers, cast an ironic eye on conceptual art, and, all the same, can look me in the eye and say, “I am not alone.” And when they do, I wonder what trick
10 Certitudes from:
Agitations
Abstract: Certainty can be exhilarating; uncertainty, never. There is something fundamentally disquieting about not knowing the truth of things, the real as opposed to the unreal, the facts as opposed to the theories. Admittedly, artists and intellectuals occasionally celebrate uncertainty as if it were a liberating cause, but in the end uncertainty holds no thrill for me. Pliny’s maxim that ‘‘There is nothing certain but uncertainty, and nothing more miserable and arrogant than man’’ possesses the very quality the statement means to disparage. I reserve judgment about uncertainty, just as I would about anything that cannot be demonstrated without fear of
11 What Happened? from:
Agitations
Abstract: Not so long ago, though it may seem that way, literary criticism was practiced by people for whom literature was essential to thinking about life. Such people wrote about books in order to write about art, politics, religion, and the interaction of society and culture—in short, what men and women of letters have always brought to the table. Although the same can be said of current literary practitioners, something else can be said as well: Unlike those who interpret books today, earlier critics possessed an implicit belief in literature’s significance, not simply because literature espoused a point of view,
14 Just Imagine: from:
Agitations
Abstract: Language, an entomological etymologist might say, is a hive of activity, aswarm in competing fictions. Words fly in and out of the mind, and the hum and buzz of implication rises and subsides as the world grows older. New words are coined, old words are lost, others survive only at the expense of their former authority. “Taste” for example, or “temperament”—words that once summoned a complicated set of notions about the world and human nature—retain today only an echo of the intellectual resonance that other centuries took for granted. Another case in point—one that may surprise—is
Book Title: The God of All Flesh-and Other Essays
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Hanson K.C.
Abstract: Biblical faith is passionately and relentlessly material in its emphasis. This claim is rooted in the conviction that the creator God loves the creation and summons creation to be in sync with the will of the creator God. This collection of essays is focussed on the bodily life of the world as it ordered in all of its problematic political and economic forms. The phrase of the title “all flesh" in the flood narrative of Genesis 9 refers to all living creatures who are in covenant with God – human beings, animals, birds, and fish – as recipients of God’s grace, as dependent upon God’s generosity, and as destined for praise and obedience to God. The insistence on the materiality of life as the subject of the Bible means that the difficult issues of economics and the demanding questions of politics are front and centre in the text. So the Pentateuch pivots around the Exodus narrative and the emancipation from an unbearable context of abusive labour practices. In a similar manner, the prophets endlessly address such questions of social policy and the wisdom teachers reflect on how to manage the material things of life and social relationships for the well-being of the community. This emphasis, pervasive in these essays, is a powerful alternative and a strong resistance against all of the contemporary efforts to transcend (escape!) the material into some form of the “spiritual". All around us are efforts to find an easier, more harmonious faith. This may be evoked simply because of a desire to shield economic, political advantage from the inescapable critique of biblical faith. Such a temptation is a serious misreading of the Bible and a critical misjudgment about the nature of human existence. Thus the Bible addressed the most urgent issues of our day, and refuses the “religious temptation" that avoids lived reality where the power of God is a work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f1q3
two THE CREATURES KNOW from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: It is by now a truism that “wisdom thinks resolutely within the framework of a theology of creation.”¹ That now common assumption among interpreters, however, has not always been obvious. It is, rather, a hard-won consensus that emerged in a season of scholarship preoccupied with “history,” in which theological interpretation of the Old Testament was dominated by the programmatic slogan “God acts in history.” The connection between wisdom and creation has permitted interpretation to move outside “history” and to challenge the fear of “natural theology” that pertained in Barthian circles of interpretation. Once that consensus judgment was reached about creation
five IMAGINATION AS A MODE OF FIDELITY from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: 1. In relation to literalists, some of whom practice “papal ecclesiasticism”;
seven PSALM 37: from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: In two decades of energetic activity, wisdom studies have reached something of a plateau.¹ As a result of the work of Professor Whybray, along with Gerhard von Rad, James L. Crenshaw, and Roland E. Murphy (to name the most prominent), we are now able to take as a consensus a great deal concerning Israelite wisdom literature, e. g. its modes of disclosure, its assumptions about authority, its probable social contexts, its general theological intentionality, its tensions with more dominant modes of faith, and its paradoxical relation to broader wisdom traditions in the Near East.² The dominant wisdom literature, which functions
eight THE “US” OF PSALM 67 from:
The God of All Flesh
Abstract: Old Testament traditions are, of course, dominated by the self-conscious, intentional self-presentation of Israel as a peculiar people in the midst of many other peoples, the existence of which is also acknowledged. That self-presentation as a peculiar people is said to have a theological grounding as the chosen people of Yahweh (as in Deut 7:6–7; 9:4–5; 14:2), an affirmation variously articulated but assumed and traded upon widely in the tradition. That theological claim, moreover, is at the same time to be understood as an instrument of social construction, no doubt fostered and enhanced through intentional social practice.¹
Book Title: Becoming Human Again-The Theological Life of Gustaf Wingren
Publisher: James Clarke & Co
Author(s): Olson Daniel M.
Abstract: One of the most influential Swedish theologians of the twentieth century, Gustaf Wingren’s career spanned more than forty years of upheaval both in his field and around the globe. Provocative and challenging, Wingren revelled in a good argument and this attitude set the tone for much of his scholarship. A Swedish Lutheran, he made his name through his research into the theology of Martin Luther, breaking away from both traditional interpretations of Luther and the theology of his famous teachers, Karl Barth and Anders Nygren, before shifting his focus onto systematic theology. In a fresh take, Bengt Kristensson Uggla delves into the influence of Wingren’s second wife, Greta Hofsten, on the direction of his theology. Hofsten, a left-wing political activist who was searching for a new language of faith, wove Wingren’s work together with her own political philosophy to create an unusual kind of Christian socialism. Her thinking had a profound effect on Wingren, causing him to recontextualise his older work entirely. In Becoming Human Again, Uggla examines how Wingren’s combative nature often served him well as a theologian, driving him to engage with innovations in the field and re-examine his older views.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f1x6
2 The First Confrontation from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: However, the fact that
4 The Practical Turn from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In his book
Cosmopolis: The Hidden Agenda of Modernity, Anglo-American philosopher of science Stephen Toulmin outlines a perspective on how the Western concept of knowledge has throughout the ages swung like a pendulum between theoretical-minded Platonists and practical-minded Aristotelians. This tension betweentheoryandpracticewas also evident when the new interest in practical wisdom (phronesis), which occurred in the carnival-like scientific atmosphere of the sixteenth century, with its focus on concrete, practical life and time-bound local practices, was supplanted around 1630 by an abstract and universalistic scientific paradigm, which instead took as its point of departure theoretical understanding (episteme).
Postscript to the English Edition from:
Becoming Human Again
Abstract: In association with the English edition of this book, I have resisted the temptation to rewrite the text, thus transforming it into a new book. Of course, some few corrections and explanations have been necessary to add in order to make the presentation accessible for non-Swedish readers. Besides the fact that I have included information about the posthumously published
Homilies: Gustaf Wingren Preaches(Postilla: Gustaf Wingren predikar, 2010), I have refrained from investigating the English-speaking reception of Wingren’s theology—and limited myself to the intention to further contribute to a broader picture of this work in future research. In general,
Fully Human from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Last night i watched—mesmerized, despite its near three-hour length—Andrei Tarkovsky’s film
Stalker, a minimalist science fiction epic set in a dreary, bombed-out industrial wasteland. The title does not derive from the contemporary connotation of the sexual predator, but goes back to the sort of guide who leads hunters to where game can be found. In fact, the script deliberately associates its stalker with the James Fenimore Cooper character Natty Bumppo, who is known as “Deerstalker.”
Thirty Seconds Away from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: By all accounts, Saint Irenaeus of Lyons, a bishop of the early church, didn’t have it easy. For one thing, he’d left the thriving, well-established Christian community in Asia Minor for what was, in essence, missionary territory. Lyons was hardly the back of the beyond—it was, in fact, a thriving commercial center in southern Gaul that did a lot of trade with the East, which was why Christianity could slip in so easily. But if the bourgeois cosmopolitanism of the city offered opportunities for the fledgling church, it also posed its own set of challenges.
Poetic Justice from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: Before I came down here to deliver this talk on how art and social justice should—and shouldn’t—mix, I posted on Facebook that I was preparing by reading the works of various writers. One commentator singled out Gustave Flaubert from my list and responded with a skeptical “Hmm.” I understood the reaction: after all, Flaubert was known as a writer who cared more for style than social justice (“One never tires of what is well-written, style is life!”). In contrast to the two other great social realists of nineteenth-century French fiction—Honoré de Balzac and Émile Zola—Flaubert rarely
Scenes from an Editorial Life from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: The publication of the fiftieth issue of a journal doesn’t constitute an anniversary, but it does have the feel of a milestone. The impulse, especially for someone who was present at the creation, is to engage in a little fond reminiscence. Yet I find myself resisting that impulse. In fact, as the years have passed, I’ve found myself reflecting less on the role I’ve played in shaping this enterprise than on what it has done to shape me.
The Four Cultures from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: An old Albert Brooks film has been rattling around in my head of late:
Defending Your Life. Divorced advertising exec fiddles with the CD player in his brand new BMW and plows into a city bus, only to find himself in Judgment City, where he has to account for himself in a jury trial where the evidence consists of episodes from his life. The worst possible result isn’t exactly hell; it’s being sent back to earth for another attempt, rather than moving forward, to a better planet and a better life.
Mugg, Hitch, and Me from:
The Operation of Grace
Abstract: When I was growing up, I wanted to be Christopher Hitchens. In a manner of speaking. I didn’t, in fact, learn who he was until I was in my thirties, but I can see in retrospect that Hitchens was the epitome of everything I hoped to be as a writer. My passions were political, philosophical, and literary, and it seemed to me that there could be no better life than as a prolific cultural critic who wrote bluntly and even prophetically about the follies of the age. I imagined writing long review essays of contemporary novels and biographies, laced with
Book Title: The Only Mind Worth Having-Thomas Merton and the Child Mind
Publisher: The Lutterworth Press
Author(s): Williams Rowan
Abstract: In The Only Mind Worth Having, Fiona Gardner takes Thomas Merton’s belief that the child mind is “the only mind worth having" and explores it in the context of Jesus’ challenging, paradoxical, and enigmatic command to become like small children. She demonstrates how Merton’s belief and Jesus’ command can be understood as part of contemporary spirituality and spiritual practice. To follow Christ’s command requires a great leap of the imagination. Gardner examines what it might mean to make this leap when one is an adult without it becoming sentimental and mawkish, or regressive and pathological. Using both psychological and spiritual insights, and drawing on the experiences of Thomas Merton and others, Gardner suggests that in some mysterious and paradoxical way recovering a sense of childhood spirituality is the path towards spiritual maturity. The move from childhood spirituality to adulthood and on to a spiritual maturity through the child mind is a move from innocence to experience to organised innocence, or from dependence to independence to a state of being in-dependence with God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1p5f2w5
Foreword from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Author(s) Williams Rowan
Abstract: Becoming a child again: the first reaction may be a feeling that this would be wonderful—no responsibility, no battling with expectations, no long memories of failure and ambiguity. But when Jesus of Nazareth tells us to become like children, and when spiritual masters urge us to connect with the “child mind,” they are not being nostalgic or sentimental. They are drawing our attention to something we all instinctively recognise. There is something that our habitual adult consciousness has lost or buried, and it must be found, not as a comforting reinstatement of half-forgotten happiness but as a breakthrough to
1 Introduction to Jesus’ Command, to Thomas Merton, and to Ideas about the Spirit of the Child from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Truly I tell you, whoever does not receive the kingdom of heaven as a little child will never enter it. (Mark 10:15; the exact same words are repeated in Luke 18:17)
5 Child’s Mind is Buddha’s Mind from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Eastern thought has long understood the value of the child mind in the adult seeker for spiritual maturity. The child mind is seen as a place of surrender, alertness, and nakedness. It is seen as a space where there is little if any self-consciousness; there is no judgment of others. It is a time of humility. It involves an awareness of the person’s nothingness—where the person is no -thing. The child mind recognizes the person’s smallness and yet connection in the scheme of things, and in Eastern practices it is seen as a state that can be developed through
6 The Shadow and the Disguise: from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: From both the Western and Eastern traditions it is acknowledged that characteristics of childhood are seen as essential for the spiritual life. So what goes wrong as we get older and why is it so hard to hold on to the promise of childhood spirituality? One helpful way to begin to think about it is to understand that as we grow as children we become increasingly compliant and then turn away from the vivid feelings we knew as children. As we learn to fit in and pick and choose certain words and phrases to describe what is happening and what
12 Poetry: from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: Poets and poetry have been drawn on already throughout this book for certain poets seem able to articulate so well aspects of the child mind. This chapter explores why this might be and focuses on the characteristics of the language of poetry. For as a form of expression poetry usually communicates authenticity. Poets speak and write of a way of looking at the everyday with a sensitivity that can take the hearer and reader beyond that everyday into another level of consciousness. Perhaps there are ways that some poetry can tap directly into the unconscious of the reader or hearer
13 The Divine Play of God: from:
The Only Mind Worth Having
Abstract: This contemporary tale (origin unknown) contains the care worn adult whose vision and senses are blunted. As all these are stripped away the light begins to return and the image of God returns as a small child ready to play. Play, creativity, and the imagination are not only aspects of childhood but are characteristics of the spirit of the child that remain still potentially available in the adult. In absorbed play and concentrated creativity self-consciousness can be forgotten and the disguise or the false self is left behind. Play can also be a way to integrate the shadow and all
L’ambivalenza delle Weltanschauungen tra ragione ed esistenza from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Cantillo Giuseppe
Abstract: This paper aims to understand the meaning and role that Jaspers attributes to worldviews. By analysing the nature of the
Weltanschauungen, the paper shows how Jaspers, inspired by Dilthey, alludes to a fundamental stratum of the Weltanschauung that goes beyond every objective construction, every shell (Gehäuse) and every doctrine, and which is identified with the process of the existential experience. The antinomicity of the lived process and the ambiguity that characterises the worldviews becomes clearer where Jaspers introduces the notion of limit situation. By analysing the relationship between theWeltanschauungenand the philosophical faith, the paper shows that theWeltanschauungen
Heideggers Stellungnahme zur „Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ als Wegmarke der Jaspers’schen Existenzphilosophie from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Immel Oliver
Abstract: This paper focuses on the genesis of Karl Jaspers’ concept of existential philosophy by discussing the intention of Jaspers’
Psychologie der Weltanschauungenand the impact of Martin Heidegger’s review „ Anmerkungen zu Karl Jaspers’ Psychologie der Weltanschauungen“ on Jaspers’ later works. By analyzing personal statements, letters and the consequences of Heidegger’s critique for Jaspers’ subsequent philosophical publications, particularlyDie geistige Situationder Zeit and the three-volumedPhilosophie, I want so show in which respect Heidegger’s review made thePsychologie der Weltanschauungenretrospectively appear as historically „ the earliest work of the later so-called modern existential philosophy“, as Jaspers put it
Wertung und Wertwiderstand. Selbsterfahrung und die antinomische Struktur der Existenz bei Jaspers und Heidegger from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Steinmann Michael
Abstract: The essay discusses Karl Jaspers’ concept of limit situations in his
Psychology of Worldviews. In limit situations, individuals experience their finite existence in an essential way. The essay shows that the concept had great influence on Martin Heidegger, who gives two of the situations, death and guilt, a decisive role in the phenomenological analysis of human existence inBeing and Time. For Jaspers’Psychology, the main emphasis lies on the individual’s spiritual counter-reaction to the experience of limit situations, which leaves the overall status of the situations unclear. The essay also shows that for Jaspers limit situations are devastating because
Naturalism as Weltanschauung from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Staiti Andrea
Abstract: In this paper I discuss Jaspers’ theory of worldviews with regard to the contemporary problem of naturalism. In particular, I consider the frequent characterization of naturalism as a worldview. First, I situate Jaspers’ conception of worldviews in the context of the philosophical debate of his time. I then turn to Jaspers’ distinction between substantial worldviews and derivative shapes of worldviews and present his construal of naturalism as a derivative shape of what he calls the sensoryspatial
Weltbild. I then argue that contemporary naturalism still fits Jaspers’ description and can thus be considered a derivative shape, rather than a genuine worldview
Praktiken des Verstehens und Weltanschauungsanalyse from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schulz Reinhard
Abstract: This paper focuses on the relationship between Karl Jaspers’ early work and practice theories of Foucault and Bourdieu. Compared with the hermeneutical tradition (Dilthey, Gadamer, Merleau-Ponty) world views seem outdated after the end of a normative understanding of hermeneutics. As a consequence we need to turn to plural practices of understanding instead. Looking on Jaspers’
Psychopathology and Psychology of Worldviewsa change of perspective from and beyond Jaspers leads to a future-oriented conception of psychopathology. Practices of understanding enable an emancipatory-practical potential of therapeutic practices as well as of hermeneutic understanding in the sense of “a realization of freedom unburdened
Multiple Orientations within the Worldviews in Psychosis and Mysticism: from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Ciglenečki Jan
Abstract: Prodromal and pre-psychotic states are characterized by pervasive instabilities on all levels of experience and could lead to what Karl Jaspers calls limit-situations (
Grenzsituationen). In the process of defending against such existential instabilities or limit-situations, different strategies and mechanisms are employed to provide a shelter or enclosure (Gehäuse). In this article, we explore the transition from the limitsituations to enclosures in psychotic and mystical states. In both we can differentiate multiple orientations. Many individuals, who experience psychotic and mystical states, have in fact experiences of both, at least to some extent. Together with everyday, common-sense level of experience we can
Wahnsinns-Erzählungen. from:
Karl Jaspers e la molteplicità delle visioni del mondo
Author(s) Schlimme Jann E.
Abstract: Living with ongoing psychotic experiences requires a constant reflective alignment between the parallel psychotic reality (para-actuality,
Nebenwirklichkeit) and the socially shared reality (sozial geteilte Wirklichkeit). A fine-grained phenomenological analysis of this manner of living describes the required amount of reflective activity in combination with a loss of certain common-sensical habitualities, the often missing option to communicate one‘s experiences and the necessity to reframe the metaphysical insights as world-view (Weltanschauung), besides the psychotic experiences themselves, as major pitfalls and challenges of ongoing psychotic experiences. In this sense, persons with ongoing psychotic experiences are just like everybody else persons in an adventurous
3. DE LA INFORMACIÓN A LA CULTURA: from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: No hace falta señalar que el papel más evidente de los diccionarios en las sociedades modernas es el de la información. Informan sobre el aspecto más sobresaliente de las lenguas para los seres humanos: el léxico, en donde la estructura interna de un idioma entra en contacto con el mundo exterior, con la experiencia humana y con sus sentimientos. Informan acerca de la unidad formal de la palabra, de su escritura y ortografía, de la manera en que se flexiona, se declina o se deriva, de la manera en que entra en contacto con partículas gramaticales o sobre el régimen
4. EL SENTIDO DE LA DEFINICIÓN LEXICOGRÁFICA from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: Hay voces y términos técnicos cuyo empleo, además de caracterizar la orientación de un autor acerca de cierto tema, en ocasiones crean dificultades iniciales para tomar en consideración sus pensamientos. Me parece que eso sucede con la expresión “definición lexicográfica”, tanto por el sustantivo “definición” como por su adjetivo “lexicográfica”. En cuanto al primero, a causa de la idea, muy extendida, de que la única ciencia que sabe realmente lo que es una definición es la filosofía, en particular la lógica y la filosofía de la ciencia¹. En cuanto al segundo, a causa de la heterogeneidad de los elementos textuales
9. LA DEFINICIÓN FALSIFICADA from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: La definición lexicográfica es una construcción interpretativa, no una determinación positiva y definitiva del significado de una palabra. Como tal, está sujeta siempre al error que la falsifique. Por el contrario, para el lector de un diccionario, toda definición es verdadera, como he argumentado en mi libro
Teoría del diccionario monolingüe(1997), pues como el diccionario es el depósito de la memoria social del léxico que garantiza la inteligibilidad de la comunicación, las condiciones de los actos verbales que lo fundan presuponen la verdad de su información. De ahí que un error del lexicógrafo al construir su definición incida directamente
10. LA DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SIGNIFICADO DEL VOCABULARIO NO-ESTÁNDAR from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: Debemos al Círculo Lingüístico de Praga la definición más reflexionada y adecuada que se haya podido hacer de la
lengua literaria. Obra de varios de los integrantes del Círculo, como Bohuslav Havránek, Josef Vachek o Karel Horálek¹, la definición no obedece a una especulación apriorística acerca de lo que pueden ser sus características, y menos a una posición ideológica en cuanto a la lengua, sino al resultado de sus investigaciones acerca de la historia de las lenguas eslavas y la manera en que se construyeron sus lenguas literarias. Cuando uno estudia la formación de otras lenguas literarias, como la del
12. EL EJEMPLO EN EL ARTÍCULO LEXICOGRÁFICO from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: El ejemplo en el artículo lexicográfico tiene dos características centrales: a) consiste de un enunciado que contiene el vocablo
mencionadoen la entrada y b) introduce ese enunciado para devolver el vocablo de la entrada aluso; es decir, recupera el vocablo tal como aparece en la práctica social de la lengua¹.
14. HACIA UNA TIPOLOGÍA DE LAS TRADICIONES VERBALES POPULARES from:
Teoría semántica y método lexicográfico
Abstract: La lingüística de la actividad verbal, de la
energeia, como la proponía Guillermo de Humboldt y la expuso magistralmente Eugenio Coseriu en su clásicoSincronía, diacronía e historia(1973), es una disciplina difícil de concebir y más aún de practicar, en cuanto que los aparatos conceptuales comunes en la lingüística corresponden, no a la consideración de la actividad, laenergeia, sino al estudio delergon, al estudio de la lengua en cuanto producto. Se recogen datos, se elaboran catálogos y clasificaciones, se operan sobre ellos cálculos, tanto cualitativos —el análisis de pares mínimos, los soñados algoritmos de la lingüística formal
Book Title: The Cruft of Fiction-Mega-Novels and the Science of Paying Attention
Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): LETZLER DAVID
Abstract: While mega-novel text is often intricately meaningful or experimental, sometimes it is just excessive and pointless. On the other hand, mega-novels also contain text that, though appearing to be cruft, turns out to be quite important. Letzler posits that this cruft requires readers to develop a sophisticated method of attentional modulation, allowing one to subtly distinguish between text requiring focused attention and text that must be skimmed or even skipped to avoid processing failures.
The Cruft of Fictionshows how the attentional maturation prompted by reading mega-novels can help manage the information overload that increasingly characterizes contemporary life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pc5fzd
1 The Dictionary from:
The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: Unique among the generic categories structuring this book, the term
dictionary novelhas not, to my knowledge, been generally used to describe mega-novels.¹ This, I believe, is an oversight, because at least one strain of mega-novel shares with the dictionary its most distinctive characteristic: the desire to expand the boundaries of language. Dictionaries, after all, especially those in English, have long been used to increase their users’ linguistic aptitudes. The original English dictionaries were bilingual translating references, and the first ones written entirely in English were designed mainly to enlarge readers’ vocabularies with “hard” words, a function that can still
4 The Menippean Satire from:
The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: Though the previous chapters have used mega-novels’ relationships to several nonfictional genres to examine how their detailed accumulation of the facts of real life can overload readers’ attention capacities and subsequently prompt them to modulate their methods of text processing, cruft is not limited to the small-scale cases of the incoherent word, the irrelevant datum, the passing moment of consciousness. The following three chapters will examine how mega-novels’ incorporation of elements from other literary genres produces more extensive but equally pointless cruft, inducing the same characteristic frustration and boredom to provoke a similar reorientation of attention. We will begin by
5 Episodic Narrative from:
The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: Since the beginning of the twentieth century, one common complaint about western literary fiction has been that its overabsorption with artistry prevents it from “telling a good story.” Summarizing this view in his “Reader’s Manifesto,” critic B. R. Myers groused that “any accessible, fast-moving story written in unaffected prose is deemed to be ‘genre fiction’ [. . . ] never literature with a capital L.”¹ Given that several touchstone twentieth-century theories of the novel significantly deemphasized story in favor of character or language—think of E. M. Forster’s mournful, “Yes—oh dear, yes—the novel tells a story”—this criticism
6 The Epic and the Allegory from:
The Cruft of Fiction
Abstract: If, say, a character is introduced in London, call him Toby Awknotuby (that is, “To be or not to be”—ha!) then we will be swiftly told that he has a twin in Delhi (called Boyt, which is an anagram of Toby, of course), who, like Toby, has the same very
Book Title: The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East-Northern Lebanon from al-Qaeda to ISIS
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rougier Bernard
Abstract: Bernard Rougier introduces us to men with links to the mujahidin in Afghanistan, the Sunni resistance in Iraq, al-Qaeda, and ISIS. He describes how they aspire to replace North Lebanon's Sunni elites, who have been attacked and discredited by neighboring powers and jihadists alike, and explains how they have successfully positioned themselves as the local Sunni population's most credible defender against powerful external enemies-such as Iran and the Shi'a militia group Hezbollah. He sheds new light on the methods and actions of the jihadists, their internal debates, and their evolving political agenda over the past decade.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pk86v9
CHAPTER 1 North Lebanon in Bilad al-Sham from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: The city of Tripoli began to decline in the mid-nineteenth century.¹ In less than a hundred years, it had become the “always less” city—less economic activity due to the growth of the port of Beirut, less prestige with the loss of its status as an Ottoman provincial capital, and less regional influence following the creation of Greater Lebanon in 1920. With the French mandate, Tripoli experienced the same phenomenon as did
Bilad al-Shamin general—a weakening of power through territorial amputation and a loss of influence. Its marginalization was complete when its hinterland was appended to Syria and
CHAPTER 3 The Anti-Syrian Movement: from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: Former prime Minister Rafiq al-Hariri’s assassination on February 14, 2005, sparked both international pressure and local pro-sovereignty protests, forcing Syrian troops from Lebanon in April. This series of events profoundly transformed Sunni Islamism in North Lebanon.¹ For the first time, the Future Movement (Rafiq al-Hariri’s political party) could extend its political influence to the north of the country, a move that was not possible under the Syrian occupation. Salafi sheikhs with much to gain from the Syrian forces’ scheduled departure also threw their support behind the Future Movement. They hoped in particular to benefit electorally from public reaction to the
CHAPTER 5 Jihad and Resistance in North Lebanon: from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: As the Lebanese civil war was drawing to a close, various Salafi groups began incorporating the country’s Palestinian camps into their religious networks. That they were so quickly successful bears witness to the failure of the PLO’s political socialization tools within the camp. Several factors explain this dynamic. First, Salafism offered a new intellectual horizon to its partisans, allowing those who had not personally experienced the Palestinian nationalist struggle to look beyond their geographical, legal, and political restrictions as “Palestinian refugees” in Lebanon. Salafism offered a new religious identity and new possibilities for action severed from a Palestinian cause that
Epilogue from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: With the fall of al-Qusayr in June 2013 and the Syrian regime’s reconquest of Homs, the Syrian region of Qalamoun, to the northeast of the Anti-Lebanon Mountain Range, has taken on strategic importance for belligerents in both camps. For the regime, “pacification” of Qalamoun is a prerequisite to securing the highway between Damascus and Homs and destroying any form of threat coming from Lebanon. Hezbollah also considers that groups active in the region planned the attacks that struck the southern suburb. After losing the battle of al-Qusayr, thousands of Syrian rebels defending Homs withdrew into this mountainous area, seeking to
Conclusion from:
The Sunni Tragedy in the Middle East
Abstract: This book has examined why it was so difficult to build a Sunni political community in this part of the Middle East. According to John Dewey, building a political community requires setting up mechanisms for deliberation that allow its members to identify collective interests and define a shared response to a number of threats. It cannot emerge without freedom of access to data that directly concerns its political affairs: “inquiry” moves a group from apathy to political action.
New Testament Texts, Visual Material Culture, and Earliest Christian Art from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Robbins Vernon K.
Abstract: This essay addresses the interpretation of New Testament texts in the context of visual material culture. Especially during the last two decades, interpreters have begun to produce explicit exegesis of New Testament texts in the context of statues, frescoes, archaeological structures, inscriptions, pottery, coins, paintings, and other artifacts that existed in the Mediterranean world during first-century emerging Christianity. A major question is how the presence of a display of visual material culture in the context of interpretation of a text may be legitimately persuasive. is the presence of the visual display simply a tour de force that has no scholarly
Methodology Underlying the Presentation of Visual Texture in the Gospel of John from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Bloomquist L. Gregory
Abstract: specialists in rhetoric—especially those who deliver addresses, even more than those who analyze them—have long recognized the power of the image to get a point across. One of the first extant examples of sophistic practice, gorgias’s
Encomium of Helen, uses words to set beautiful Helen before the audience’s eyes, but also her case.¹ Aristotle’s second book of hisRhetoricis devoted to the means of picturing and presenting character, primarily that of the speaker.² Examples of the power of imagery in contemporary rhetorical practice also abound, especially in the realm of advertising and preaching.³ Preaching is especially interesting
Paul, Imperial Situation, and Visualization in the Epistle to the Colossians from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Maier Harry O.
Abstract: Throughout the past decade, scholars of Christian origins have turned their attention increasingly to the relationship of emergent Christianity to the roman empire.¹ The themes taken up in fact echo ideas presented by new Testament exegetes over a hundred years ago, when German archaeologists made new discoveries about the imperial cult in Asia Minor. Adolf Deissmann, Adolf von Harnack, Ernst Lohmeyer, Paul Wendland, and Karl Bornhäuser, for example, recognizing New Testament echoes of imperial language, argued that biblical authors used political terms and images drawn from the imperial cult to oppose persecuting emperors and a hostile empire.² Contemporary exegetes largely
The Galatian Suicide and the Transbinary Semiotics of Christ Crucified (Galatians 3:1): from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Kahl Brigitte
Abstract: The room was dimly lit and evoked a sanctuary-like feeling. Artifacts of the Pergamene kings and their deities in dignified poses stood watching from the side wings behind pillars draped in crimson. On a long table running down the central aisle, four human bodies were on display, the whiteness of their marble flesh in stark contrast to the bright red of the countertop that carried their collapsed shapes as if they were floating on a stream of blood. Bleeding they were, profusely, in petrified gushes from gaping wounds in their chests, bellies, backs— a
Dead Giant, aDying Gaul, a
“Exactitude and Fidelity”? from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Clifton James
Abstract: In a lecture of January 7, 1668, to the Académie Royale de Peinture et de Sculpture, Philippe de Champaigne famously criticized Nicolas Poussin for his failure to adhere faithfully to sacred history in his painting of
Rebecca and Eliezerof ca. 1648 (in the Louvre), specifically for not including the camels mentioned in the biblical text, which deserved to be shown, he said, in order to prove the exactitude and the fidelity of the painter in a true subject.¹ Champaigne might well have attended Sebastien Bourdon’s lecture on Poussin’sChrist Healing the Blindof 1650 (also in the Louvre; see
Topos versus Topia: from:
The Art of Visual Exegesis
Author(s) Weemans Michel
Abstract: The emergence and development of landscape painting in Flanders during the sixteenth century, far from coinciding with a secularization of art and the rise of a purely aesthetic appreciation of nature—according to a late modern conception of landscape that has long been applied to these early works—actively participated in the “visual piety” that characterizes the early modern period.¹ “The pleasure of contemplating landscape paintings is as great as that experienced in the contemplation of nature itself,” stated Cardinal Borromeo, patron and friend of Jan Brueghel and Paul Bril and himself a famous collector of Flemish landscapes. He added:
Book Title: Faces of Displacement-The Writings of Volodymyr Vynnychenko
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SOROKA MYKOLA
Abstract: "Whom do our people read? Vynnychenko. Whom do people talk about if it concerns literature? Vynnychenko. Whom do they buy? Again, Vynnychenko." So wrote Mykhailo Kotsiubynsky about the young Volodymyr Vynnychenko. An innovative and provocative writer, Vynnychenko was also a charismatic revolutionary and politician who responded to the dramatic upheavals of the first half of the twentieth century by challenging old values and bringing forward new ideas about human relationships. Despite his inseparable association with Ukraine, what is often overlooked is the fact that Vynnychenko wrote the majority of his works outside his native land following his flight from Tsarist and Soviet tyranny. In this ground-breaking study, Mykola Soroka draws on contemporary theories of displacement to show how Vynnychenko's expatriate status determined his worldview, his choice of literary devices, and his attitudes toward his homeland and hostlands. Soroka considers concepts of identity to study the intertwined experiences of the writer - as an exile, émigré, expatriate, traveler, and nomad - and to demonstrate how these experiences invigorated his art and left a lasting impact on his work. The first book-length study in English on Volodymyr Vynnychenko, Faces of Displacement is an insightful examination of an exiled writer that sheds new light on the challenges faced by the displaced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq15d
Introduction: from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The principal point of this study is that all forms of displacement – exile, émigré, expatriate, travel, nomadism, emigration, and diaspora – are not isolated and may overlap. This pluralistic approach may reveal the dominance of one form of displacement over another or their collisions in shaping the identity of displaced writers, alongside other undercurrents of influence such as historical time, geographical place, and the writer’s own personal characteristics. Viewing different forms of displacement in the historical continuum, we can see how they change with the social progress of civilization. “A hundred years ago,” says Czeslaw Milosz, “average people not familiar with
1 Émigré from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: Vynnychenko was born to a poor peasant family on 28 July 1880 in the city of Yelysavethrad (Kirovohrad today) in the steppe region of south-central Ukraine (at that time part of the Russian Empire). After graduating from the gymnasium in 1899, he wandered through the country, a common practice of the revolutionary intelligentsia in the Russian Empire. The goal of “khodinnia v narod” [going to the people] was to observe the life of various strata of the population. Their efforts were also connected with the socialist ideals of the intelligentsia, which aimed to enlighten the illiterate peasantry and improve social
3 Exile from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The practice of exile has its beginnings with the advent of settled and socially organized societies. The first known human experience of exile, the story of Sinuhe (documented on an Egyptian papyrus), dates back to 2000 BC (Tabori, 43). The limited social mobility, settled way of life, and minimal knowledge of the “other” in geographical and cultural terms in early societies meant that physical expulsion from the homeland was one of the most severe forms of punishment, almost equivalent to death.¹ Exile is connected to a range of other important signifiers: separation, loss, alienation, loneliness, and nostalgia. Having undergone “a
4 Utopist, 1920–1925 from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: In 1920, Vynnychenko found himself in a new displacement, which would last for more than thirty years until his death in 1951. The writer had plunged actively into politics after his illegal return to Ukraine in 1914, and from 1917 to 1920 he was one of the leaders of the Ukrainian revolution. He was the first Chair of the Ukrainian government, 1917–18, and head of the revolutionary Directory, 1918–19. After the collapse of the Ukrainian People’s Republic (UNR), Vynnychenko left the country and resided briefly in Semmering, Budapest, Lienz, Vienna, and Prague. In the Czech capital of Prague
5 Universalist, 1925–1941 from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: The reactions of displaced writers who remain outside their homelands for a considerable period of time generally range between two extreme groups – isolationism and universalism. According to Rubchak, for writers who belong to the first group, writing becomes either “a vehicle for memories and hopes or a totally self-enclosed shell” (101). Thomas Mann speaks about another extreme which he experienced personally: “Exile has become something quite different from what it once was; it is no longer a condition of waiting programmed for an ultimate return, but rather [it] hints of the dissolution of nations and the unification of the world”
Conclusions from:
Faces of Displacement
Abstract: In order to substantiate displacement as a relevant concept for this study it was necessary to start with a theoretical discussion of the issue of displaced writing in literary discourse. A historical and comparative overview of related terms – exile, émigré, expatriation, travel, emigration/immigration, diaspora, and nomadism – helps us understand displacement as a dynamic migrant experience that may range from being totally negative to very positive. Exiles are reconciled to their present predicament and have nostalgic feelings for the past; émigrés are actively involved in the contemporary literary process in the homeland and seek to return; emigrants/immigrants integrate and adapt themselves
Book Title: Bearing Witness-Perspectives on War and Peace from the Arts and Humanities
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Johnstone Tiffany
Abstract: As the centenary of the Great War approaches, citizens worldwide are reflecting on the history, trauma, and losses of a war-torn twentieth century. It is in remembering past wars that we are at once confronted with the profound horror and suffering of armed conflict and the increasing elusiveness of peace. The contributors to Bearing Witness do not presume to resolve these troubling questions, but provoke new kinds of reflection. They explore literature, the arts, history, language, and popular culture to move beyond the language of rhetoric and commemoration provided by politicians and the military. Adding nuance to discussions of war and peace, this collection probes the understanding and insight created in the works of musicians, dramatists, poets, painters, photographers, and novelists, to provide a complex view of the ways in which war is waged, witnessed, and remembered. A compelling and informative collection, Bearing Witness sheds new light on the impact of war and the power of suffering, heroism and memory, to expose the human roots of violence and compassion. Contributors include Heribert Adam (Simon Fraser University), Laura Brandon (Carleton University), Mireille Calle-Gruber (Université La Sorbonne Nouvelle), Janet Danielson (Simon Fraser University), Sandra Djwa (emeritus, Simon Fraser University), Alan Filewod (University of Guelph), Sherrill Grace (University of British Columbia), Patrick Imbert (University of Ottawa), Tiffany Johnstone (PhD Candidate, University of British Columbia), Martin Löschnigg (Graz University), Lauren Lydic (PhD, University of Toronto), Conny Steenman Marcusse (Netherlands), Jonathan Vance (University of Western Ontario), Aritha van Herk (University of Calgary), Peter C. van Wyck (Concordia University), Christl Verduyn (Mount Allison University), and Anne Wheeler (filmmaker).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq1ds
For What? from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) GRACE SHERRILL
Abstract: The inspiration guiding this volume is twofold. In a practical sense, these essays emerged from the 2008 annual symposium of the Royal Society of Canada; in a creative sense, they represent a selection of responses to issues surrounding war and peace as these activities are perceived – and challenged – by scholars in the humanities and by artists. The 2008 symposium, called “The Cultures of War and Peace/Les cultures de la guerre et de la paix,” was organized by Academy I of the RSC, the Academy devoted to Arts and Humanities, and the theme was chosen both for its urgent
5 The Georgics of War and Peace: from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) CALLE-GRUBER MIREILLE
Abstract: I entitle this intervention “The Georgics of War and Peace” because I want to inscribe myself from the very start in the direction pointed out by the wording of the Symposium
The Cultures of War and Peace, and take all the consequences. Namely, considering war as one cultural form of that which action is, and not some uncontrolled or uncivilized act; considering also that there are – we know it, idioms show it to us – the art of war,
7 Above or Below Ground? from:
Bearing Witness
Author(s) BRANDON LAURA
Abstract: More than 60,000 Canadians died during the First World War (1914–18), ten per cent of those who enlisted. More than 150,000 were injured. Over one million Canadians served between 1939 and 1945; 45,000 of them died, and 55,000 suffered injuries in a conflict marked by unprecedented violence on both sides. While a significant number of Canadian artworks from these wars depict the destruction meted out on the built, manufactured, and natural environments, the subject of physical violence is rare. Nonetheless, whether the soldiers, airmen, or sailors were from the allied or combatant sides of the conflicts, a survey of
Book Title: Precarious Visualities-New Perspectives on Identification in Contemporary Art and Visual Culture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Ross Christine
Abstract: Through the study of exemplary media works and practices - photography, film, video, performance, installations, web cams - scholars from various disciplines call attention to the unsettling of identification and the disablement of vision in contemporary aesthetics. To look at an image that prevents the stabilization of identification, identity and place; to perceive a representation that oscillates between visibility and invisibility; to relate to an image which entails a rebalancing of sight through the valorization of other senses; to be exposed, through surveillance devices, to the gaze of new figures of authority - the aesthetic experiences examined here concern a spectator whose perception lacks in certainty, identification, and opticality what it gains in fallibility, complexity, and interrelatedness. Precarious Visualities provides a new understanding of spectatorship as a relation that is at once corporeal and imaginary, and persistently prolific in its cultural, social, and political effects. Contributors include Raymond Bellour (École des hautes études en sciences sociales), Monika Kin Gagnon (Concordia University), Beate Ochsner (University of Mannheim -Universität Mannheim), Claudette Lauzon (McGill University), David Tomas (Université du Québec à Montréal), Slavoj Zizek (Ljubljiana University and University of London), Marie Fraser (Université du Québec à Montréal), Alice Ming Wai Jim (Concordia University), Julie Lavigne (Université du Québec à Montréal), Amelia Jones (University of Manchester), Eric Michaud (École des hautes études en sciences sociales), Hélène Samson (McCord Museum), and Thierry Bardini (Université de Montréal).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pq1zh
Introduction: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) ROSS CHRISTINE
Abstract: Since its emergence in the field of art history in the 1980s, visuality – a notion that refers to the visible condition of art, to the fact that art is, partially at least, a matter of vision (in its production, exhibition, circulation, and reception) – has been key to the decentring of both the artist and the viewing subject in its relation to the image. Vision came to be systematically understood as an act conditioned by culture, social class, gender, ethnicity, sexuality, and geography. The fruitfulness of poststructuralist art historical research in this area of study is clearly noticeable in its manifold
5 What the Body Remembers: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) LAUZON CLAUDETTE
Abstract: Rebecca Belmore’s
Vigil appears to proceed according to the conventions associated with public ceremonies of remembrance. At a nondescript urban intersection, the performance begins with a ritualistic cleansing of the sidewalk, followed by the lighting of candles, the distribution of red roses, and the calling out of names. But this is not any street corner, and Vigil is not a customary vigil. The names that Belmore calls out – cries out, actually, with a palpable sense of anguish – are inscribed on her arms in thick black ink, scarring her skin like hastily made tattoos. After each name is called, Belmore drags
7 The Star and the Prisoner: from:
Precarious Visualities
Author(s) Barnard Timothy
Abstract: Autobiography, self-portraiture, auto-fiction are in fashion. Self-representation flourishes in the so-called fine arts, in literature and contemporary art in particular, but also, more than ever, in so-called popular or amateur practices.¹ Narratives and images of the self circulate in both public and private spaces, in books, newspapers and magazines, on radio and television but also on the internet, with the growth in personal web pages. Over the past decade another form of self-representation has appeared on the Net, radically transforming if not revealing the underlying structure of the genre: the personal webcam. Since their appearance in the mid-1990s, the number
Introduction from:
Precarious Visualities
Abstract: Despite the proliferation of discursive sites and “fictional” selves, the phantom of a site as an actual place remains, and our psychic, habitual attachments to places regularly return as they continue to inform
Book Title: The Wind From the East-French Intellectuals, the Cultural Revolution, and the Legacy of the 1960s
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wolin Richard
Abstract: Wolin's riveting narrative reveals that Maoism's allure among France's best and brightest actually had little to do with a real understanding of Chinese politics. Instead, it paradoxically served as a vehicle for an emancipatory transformation of French society. Recounting the cultural and political odyssey of French students and intellectuals in the 1960s,
The Wind from the Eastillustrates how the Maoist phenomenon unexpectedly sparked a democratic political sea change in France.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pv895q
Prologue from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: According to an oft-cited maxim, all history is the history of the present. Try as they might, historians are incapable of abstracting from contemporary issues and concerns. In fact, were they to do so, their work would surely reek of antiquarian sterility. At best, historians can make their biases clear to ensure they do not exercise an overtly disfiguring influence on their presentations and findings.
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: It is a remarkable fact that some forty years later, the year 1968 remains an obligatory point of reference for contemporary politics. During the 2008 presidential election, one of Barack Obama’s campaign pledges was that he would elevate American politics to a plateau of unity beyond the divisiveness of the 1960s. The John McCain campaign, for its part, tried repeatedly to tarnish Obama’s luster by dramatizing his association during the early days of his political career with former 1960s radical William Ayers. Similarly, during the 2007 French presidential campaign, both main candidates felt compelled to take a stance on the
CHAPTER 1 Showdown at Bruay-en-Artois from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: April 6, 1972. The scene was a mining town in provincial Normandy, Bruay-en-Artois. A young working-class girl, Brigitte Dewevre, had been sadistically murdered, her mutilated, unclothed corpse left in a vacant field. The crime scene bespoke a level of brutality to which France was entirely unaccustomed. Adding to the event’s macabre nature was the fact that Brigitte’s body was discovered the next day by her younger brother in the course of a pickup soccer match.
CHAPTER 6 Tel Quel in Cultural-Political Hell from:
The Wind From the East
Abstract: During the 1960s
Tel Quel, led by consummate literary entrepreneur Philippe Sollers, rode to notoriety the crest of nearly every passing intellectual trend: the nouveau roman, structuralism, and poststructuralism. Unsurprisingly, the journal’s political loyalties were equally mercurial. After cultivating a studious apoliticism, it lurched from the most rigid Stalinist orthodoxy to an equally fervent embrace of Cultural Revolutionary China—an instance of revolutionary romanticism that culminated in a celebrated 1974 trip to Beijing. As Communist Party loyalists, the Telquelians “missed out” on May 1968. In a now-legendary episode, Sollers—whose father, incidentally, was a leading Bordeaux industrialist—actively denounced the
FIVE What Dante Means to Us from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: In our day, we tend to shrug off discussion of metaphysics, as if no knowledge were to be gained from learning what it means
to be. The distinction between the practical and the speculative has come to appear as the divide between proof and make believe. We are concerned with facts; facts are real; but, as to what makes a fact a fact, we think the matter beyond discussion and perhaps even beneath contempt.
TWELVE Mnemosyne: from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: So successful was the advent of modernist poetic, musical, and visual art in disrupting the critical vocabulary by which we describe them that we have all but lost the means to account for how art actually works. So blinding was its revolutionary blast that we have sometimes failed to distinguish the various courses these arts took during the modernist period; moreover, we have often assumed modern art effected more radical changes than it did, as if it put the aesthetic upon an entirely new basis. Abstraction in painting, dissonance and atonality in music, and free verse in poetry stand of
THIRTEEN Novel, Myth, Reality: from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: In the last chapter, I contended that all art depends upon narrative. Even those modernist works, such as nonrepresentational painting, that seem most to escape the gravity of story-telling end up simply rendering the narrative exogenous but no less essential. I concluded by urging artists and writers to appreciate what such modernist experiments help reveal about the nature of art, but also to return to formal practices that better respect Mnemosyne as the mother of the arts and, in turn, better respect the form of the story as an essential means to understanding the human condition. In this recommendation, I
FIFTEEN The Consequences of Our Forgetting from:
The Vision of the Soul
Abstract: Let us begin with a distillation of the long argument we have been pursuing. I have contended that modern thought routinely sets
logos(reason) in opposition tomythos(story-telling), and favorslogosas authoritative and true. This habit breeds an unhappy myth of its own: mankind was once subject to the vague powers of hearsay, superstition, and old wives’ tales, but has emerged triumphant from such antiquated miasma into the knowing precisions of a rational age. While such a myth gained traction in the modern age, particularly during the Enlightenment, its basic form dates back to Plato. Or rather, it
Book Title: In/visible War-The Culture of War in Twenty-first-Century America
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): LUCAITES JOHN LOUIS
Abstract: In/Visible Waraddresses a paradox of twenty-first century American warfare. The contemporary visual American experience of war is ubiquitous, and yet war is simultaneously invisible or absent; we lack a lived sense that "America" is at war. This paradox of in/visibility concerns the gap between the experiences of war zones and the visual, mediated experience of war in public, popular culture, which absents and renders invisible the former. Large portions of the domestic public experience war only at a distance. For these citizens, war seems abstract, or may even seem to have disappeared altogether due to a relative absence of visual images of casualties. Perhaps even more significantly, wars can be fought without sacrifice by the vast majority of Americans.Yet, the normalization of twenty-first century war also renders it highly visible. War is made visible through popular, commercial, mediated culture. The spectacle of war occupies the contemporary public sphere in the forms of celebrations at athletic events and in films, video games, and other media, coming together as MIME, the Military-Industrial-Media-Entertainment Network.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pv89fv
1 HOW PHOTOJOURNALISM HAS FRAMED THE WAR IN AFGHANISTAN from:
In/visible War
Author(s) CAMPBELL DAVID
Abstract: In this essay I consider how one set of pictorial artifacts—the contemporary war images of photojournalism—were produced in Afghanistan during U.S. military operations there. In
8 DIFFERENTIAL CONFIGURATIONS: from:
In/visible War
Author(s) BREGER CLAUDIA
Abstract: The critical reception of Kathryn Bigelow’s
The Hurt Locker(2008) presents a puzzle. Although Bigelow’s more recentZero Dark Thirty(2011) stirred significant controversy for its representation of torture during the “Wars on Terror,”The Hurt Locker, which focuses on a three-man bomb defusal team in Iraq, was almost exclusively greeted with praise.¹ Not only did the film earn six Academy Awards, including those for Best Director and Best Picture, along with many other accolades, it also was an overwhelming critical success—although most commentators agreed that the film’s visceral images of a series of dangerous bomb deactivation operations do
10 THE IN/VISIBILITY OF LIBERAL PEACE: from:
In/visible War
Author(s) SIMONS JON
Abstract: In Episode 7 of the first season of
The Newsroom, a TV drama created by Aaron Sorkin, the news breaks that Osama bin Laden has been killed.¹The Newsroomis an enactment of the American liberal imaginary showing an idealized version of television journalism fit for liberal democracy.² The opening credits for Season 1 are “a montage of great moments in the history of TV journalism” that evokes a past, golden age.³ Sorkin admits to portraying “a romanticized, idealized newsroom” in his script that delivers a message that “corporate concerns and ratings-chasings have left the US with an embarrassingly skewed,
3 Constructive Theology as Interdisciplinary Theology from:
Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: The Workgroup on Constructive Theology gave constructive theology a sense of legitimacy within the theological academy. Yet the conversation for constructive theology doesn’t end within the sphere of theology. Starting with its emphasis on philosophy, social sciences, and culture, constructive theology has been in conversation with other academic disciplines throughout its history. That is to say constructive theology is inherently interdisciplinary. In its effort to be an actionable, relevant form of theology, it has always, from the proto-constructive theologies of Ten Broeke and Meland, through the Workgroup’s textbooks and today, maintained the importance of incorporating insights from other disciplines into
4 Constructive Theology as Activist Theology from:
Constructing Constructive Theology
Abstract: Constructive theology took a decided turn with the publication of
Reconstructing Christian Theologyin 1994. Intent on taking account of liberation theologies, the Workgroup on Constructive Theology decided once again to try to reimagine theology for the contemporary world. Once again, the traditional formulation of doctrinal loci was favored despite its seeming obsolescence.¹ The method of constructive theology didn’t change. Instead, the apparent need amidst world crises for a theology that acts for the mission of justice was incorporated into a project that had already distinguished itself.
Book Title: The Priority of Injustice-Locating Democracy in Critical Theory
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): Doshi Sapana
Abstract: Debates about radical democracy, Barnett argues, have become trapped around a set of oppositions between deliberative and agonistic theories-contrasting thinkers who promote the possibility of rational agreement and those who seek to unmask the role of power or violence or difference in shaping human affairs. While these debates are often framed in terms of consensus versus contestation, Barnett unpacks the assumptions about space and time that underlie different understandings of the sources of political conflict and shows how these differences reflect deeper philosophical commitments to theories of creative action or revived ontologies of "the political." Rather than developing ideal theories of democracy or models of proper politics, he argues that attention should turn toward the practices of claims-making through which political movements express experiences of injustice and make demands for recognition, redress, and re pair. By rethinking the spatial grammar of discussions of public space, democratic inclusion, and globalization, Barnett develops a conceptual framework for analyzing the crucial roles played by geographical processes in generating and processing contentious politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwt43v
CHAPTER 2 Criteria for Democratic Inquiry from:
The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: In this chapter I want to elaborate further on why thinking about democracy in an ordinary way, as suggested at the end of the previous chapter, should lead us away from supposing that there is a particular form of politics that is properly political, as if grasping this form would allow lesser forms to be characterized as postpolitical. In particular, I want to consider how best to understand the problem of deriving “context-transcending” principles from the specific situations in which the meanings of democratic politics are articulated. I take it for granted that this possibility can no longer be premised
CHAPTER 3 The Ontological Need from:
The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: Over the next three chapters I critically engage with a set of intellectual traditions that present strongly ontological interpretations of the concept of the political. I argue that ontologies of the political often define democracy in a rather one-sided way, reserving authentic democratic action for the disruption of identities, hegemonies, and settled formations. This one-sidedness derives from the splitting of politics into two aspects and then arranging the world into two layers with a clear order of priority. Obvious and routine understandings of politics are contrasted to a more difficult to discern but more fundamental layer—the site and source
CHAPTER 5 The Significance of Conflict from:
The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: The ascendency of ontological interpretations of political life discussed in the previous two chapters is part of a more broadly shared agreement that liberal political thought has a tendency to displace the disruptions of politics in favor of procedures for efficient administration or for reaching binding agreements.¹ In this chapter I develop the argument that the contrast found in political theory, which is in turn echoed in critical ontologies of space and spatiality, between deliberative approaches to democracy apparently oriented to consensus and agonist approaches that are open to the rigors of intractable struggle is better thought of as a
CONCLUSION from:
The Priority of Injustice
Abstract: I have sought in this book to trace divergent ways of conceptualizing the sources of transformative political action in radical thought. In so doing, I have tried to draw into view how radical theorists’ interest in democracy is not simply driven by a concern with substantive or procedural questions of governance, participation, resistance, or rule. Democracy arises in a broad range of Left theory as a worry about the status, the legitimacy even, of the vocation of critique itself. What is at stake in assessing different theories is not simply whether they successfully identify the possibility of social transformation, perhaps
Book Title: Textual Silence-Unreadability and the Holocaust
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): LANG JESSICA
Abstract: There are thousands of books that represent the Holocaust, but can, and should, the act of reading these works convey the events of genocide to those who did not experience it? In
Textual Silence, literary scholar Jessica Lang asserts that language itself is a barrier between the author and the reader in Holocaust texts-and that this barrier is not a lack of substance, but a defining characteristic of the genre.Holocaust texts, which encompass works as diverse as memoirs, novels, poems, and diaries, are traditionally characterized by silences the authors place throughout the text, both deliberately and unconsciously. While a reader may have the desire and will to comprehend the Holocaust, the presence of "textual silence" is a force that removes the experience of genocide from the reader's analysis and imaginative recourse. Lang defines silences as omissions that take many forms, including the use of italics and quotation marks, ellipses and blank pages in poetry, and the presence of unreliable narrators in fiction. While this limits the reader's ability to read in any conventional sense, these silences are not flaws. They are instead a critical presence that forces readers to acknowledge how words and meaning can diverge in the face of events as unimaginable as those of the Holocaust.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1pwtdjf
INTRODUCTION from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: Reading Holocaust texts is difficult, nearly impossible in fact.¹ Such a statement seems a contradiction in terms for, once the skills behind reading are mastered, reading becomes almost instinctual or automatic. It is difficult
notto read when faced with a text—an aspect of reading (and audience) that has long been recognized and assumed, as evidenced by the multitude of public texts all around us. Moreover, given the sheer number of texts that invoke the Holocaust, texts that position the Holocaust as either primary or secondary, the claim that wecannotread these works when precisely that task—reading—
1 READABILITY AND UNREADABILITY: from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: The two opening images of Primo Levi’s
La Tregua—The Truce(published in the United States asThe Reawakening), which describes his liberation from Auschwitz and his long journey home, shift between his own act of reading and ours.¹ I use these images here as a means to introduce the concept of readability and unreadability—in contrast to postwar and ongoing discussions around the process of reading itself, including theories that investigate how meaning and interpretation emerge from reading. After Auschwitz was liberated by the Russians, Levi is ill and weak and is hoisted into a cart along with other
6 RECEDING INTO THE DISTANCE: from:
Textual Silence
Abstract: Holocaust fiction written by authors who are themselves distanced from the authority of survivor testimony and its inheritance lead readers to question the very value and meaning of the term “Holocaust literature.”¹ In his defense of Holocaust fiction more generally, Lawrence Langer notes that its significance can be found in “its ability to evoke the atmosphere of monstrous fantasy that strikes any student of the Holocaust, and simultaneously to suggest the exact details of the experience in a way that forces the reader to fuse and reassess the importance of both. The result is exempted from the claims of literal
Book Title: Divination and Human Nature-A Cognitive History of Intuition in Classical Antiquity
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Struck Peter T.
Abstract: Recovering a lost piece of an ancient tradition,
Divination and Human Natureillustrates how philosophers of the classical era interpreted the phenomena of divination as a practice closer to intuition and instinct than magic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q1xs0v
INTRODUCTION. from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: From all corners of the ancient Mediterranean, people that had run up against the limits of their own knowledge brought their remaining questions to a frail, illiterate woman housed in a massive stone temple at Delphi. She was Apollo’s human embodiment on earth and the most revered source of wisdom in the classical world. As they prepared for their consultation with the mysterious Pythia, seekers would have read an enigmatic, deceptively simple two-word sentence cut into the temple wall, “Know yourself.”¹ No one could remember where the saying came from or what exactly it was supposed to mean, but this
CHAPTER 1 Plato on Divination and Nondiscursive Knowing from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: In his most vivid narrative of his hero’s life story, Plato has Socrates center his autobiography on an act of divination. The
Apologyshows a man driven by a provocative pronouncement from the Delphic oracle to devote his life to solving its riddle. Pleading his own defense before an Athenian jury, Socrates presents a carefully constructed speech, rich in mythological allusions. He compares himself to Achilles (28c) and likens his life’s work to a Herculean labor (22a).¹ A more subtle and also more powerful point of reference is another figure, the Theban hero Oedipus, whose life was as profoundly shaped
CHAPTER 3 Posidonius and Other Stoics on Extra-Sensory Knowledge from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: As we have seen, Plato and Aristotle treat divinatory insight as a curiosity, an epiphenomenon of human anatomy and cognition. For them, building a theory of it means proposing an alternative system of information-processing, paratactic to the everyday rational system. They revert to the lower orders of the soul by a process of elimination. Since divination seems not to have a place in the normal modes of thinking, they propose that some other form of insight dwells in the soul’s other parts, situated closely to our creaturely selves. In Plato’s case, we have the appetitive soul on occasion finding its
CHAPTER 4 Iamblichus on Divine Divination and Human Intuition from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: One may enter the world of the Neoplatonists expecting that traditional divinatory thinking will find fertile ground. This ancient school, after all, advanced ideas on union with the divine, spiritual ascent through contemplative
askêsis, and the practice of theurgy. But the expectation is not exactly met. It is something of a enigma, which the prior work allows us to understand better. The most serious Neoplatonic thinker on the question, Iamblichus, will advance restrained views toward traditional divination, and will even be ready to toss aside the whole practice. He expresses these nuances while vigorously embracing a newly configured notion of
CONCLUSION. from:
Divination and Human Nature
Abstract: Though they have different ideas on how exactly it works and how to value it, the Greek philosophers considered here show a consistent understanding of traditional divinatory insight as the result of an ancillary form of cognition that takes place outside our self-conscious, purposive thinking. It enters into our awareness and offers incremental insight into what is around the corner. They construe it as a feature of human nature, as embedded in physiological processes that have to do with our status as embodied organisms situated in a surrounding atmosphere of stimuli. It relies on mechanisms buried deep in our natural
2 “Tangled in a Golden Mesh”: from:
Restless Secularism
Abstract: For Wallace Stevens, the most dangerous residue of religion for aesthetics lay in the tendency of poetic language to generate religious metaphors and anthropomorphisms. The fiction of Virginia Woolf discloses another danger for aesthetics: the propensity of modern experiences of beauty and sublimity to engender religious modes of thought and desire that are no longer intelligible within a secular conception of the world. For Woolf’s characters, the beautiful (and its modern cousin, the sublime) is suspended in the uncertain space between religious and secular ontologies. The intensity of experiences of beauty
amongher characters is matched only by the suspicion
Book Title: Saints Alive-Word, Image, and Enactment in the Lives of the Saints
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): WILLIAMS DAVID
Abstract: David Williams shows that images associated with saints are not simply illustrations of written accounts, nor are the gestures, prayers, and liturgical practices of devotees of saints' cults simply derivative of them. Rather, images and enactments expand and complete the text, adding visual and dramatic dimensions. Williams demonstrates his ideas through discussion and case studies of three saints: the biblical figure of Saint Anne, mother of the Virgin; the medieval English martyr Saint Thomas Becket; and Saint Maximillian Mary Kolbe, who gave his life to save that of another in the Auschwitz concentration camp. A remarkable study of text, image, and enactment, Saints Alive presents a complete study of the depiction of saints that will change the way they are understood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q5zsz
INTRODUCTION from:
Saints Alive
Abstract: The etymology of the word “text,” like all etymology, reveals buried connotations that haunt the contemporary meaning beneath the level of active memory. For most of us, “text” means the written document, and even in the more nuanced semiological concept, texts are “sign-systems, linguistic or non-linguistic” (
Concise Oxford Dictionary of Literary Terms), the plural “systems” suggesting the disintegration of the unified concept of “text” into texts of different kinds: verbal, visual, aural, gestural, and so on. The etymology of the word, however, seems to resist divisions, indicating integration and unification: the participle of the verb, textus, from which we get
Chapter One WORDS, IMAGES, AND ENACTMENTS from:
Saints Alive
Abstract: The great power of words consists in their ability to represent thought as language, enabling the speaker to communicate complicated intellectual processes and extensive discursive descriptions. No other sign system achieves this. The image, although more effective than the word in presenting in a solitary, contained way what it represents, cannot comment on its object or analyze its own method of representation as language can. Similarly, gesture, or enactment, while performing what it represents and, in this sense, closer to its object, cannot reflect upon itself or the nature of its own operation. Words can talk about words; images and
Chapter Three SAINT THOMAS BECKET from:
Saints Alive
Abstract: Few Lives of mediaeval saints are more voluminously documented than that of the twelfth-century Archbishop of Canterbury, murdered in his cathedral by four knights acting on the wishes of King Henry II. The force of the historical in Thomas’s
Vita is assured by the fact that the principal authors of his first biographies were men who knew him and were present at his martyrdom. There are many accounts of the murder as well as of other aspects of Thomas Becket’s life, most of which are available in James Craigie Robertson’s Materials for the History of Thomas Becket, Archbishop of Canterbury.
2 Magic Realism, Social Protest, and the Irrepressibility of Language from:
Stories of the Middle Space
Author(s) URQUHART JANE
Abstract: If looking at
Midnight’s Childrenas historiographic metafiction brings into focus the complex relationship between history, textuality, and authorial location, looking atMidnight’s Childrenas magic realism produces a quasi-religious comic novel in which the nature of language itself is problematized in the service of readerly responsibility. The presence of nonrational, magical elements in an otherwise apparently realistic, rational world serves as a rejection of the overwhelmingly scientific, rational approach to life which has been characterized as the dominant Western post-Enlightenment view (Harrison,Rushdie55). Rushdie himself, interviewed in 1985, made very clear why he considered a turn away from
Book Title: A World Growing Old-The Coming Health Care Challenges
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Topinková Eva
Abstract: In consideration of the difficult moral and practical issues involved, the editors conclude the volume with a special report containing policy recommendations from representatives of eight countries (the United States, Belgium, the Czech Republic, Germany, Hungary, the Netherlands, Sweden, and the United Kingdom). This important volume will be of interest to policymakers and a broad spectrum of health care professionals, as well as to anyone interested in the fate of the elderly or in coming health care challenges.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1q8jj8k
Life Extension and the Meaning of Life from:
A World Growing Old
Author(s) van Tongeren Paul
Abstract: I will ask whether people really desire to extend their life and why exactly we think they do. For this purpose I will first distinguish between different kinds of desire; second, I will reflect upon the concept of a natural life span; and third, I will
Will There Be a Scarcity of Resources? from:
A World Growing Old
Author(s) Thorslund Mats
Abstract: What factors—demographic, cultural, economic—will shape the future use of
Effects of Population Aging on Health Care Expenditure and Financing: from:
A World Growing Old
Author(s) Leidl Reiner
Abstract: In Europe the impact of population aging has become a popular threat to the health care systems. Recently, 2,700 European “opinion leaders” working in the health field were asked to identify the most significant problem contributing to the growth of health care expenditure. The survey reported population aging to be the number one issue.¹ Much of the popularity of this response may be related to the fact that it is hard to blame someone in the health field for this problem.² But in contrast to this broad agreement on the significance of the population aging issue in the health field,
Caring for the Elderly: from:
A World Growing Old
Author(s) Parker Marti G.
Abstract: Another factor is advances in technology that provide new possibilities for
Book Title: The Goals of Medicine-The Forgotten Issues in Health Care Reform
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Callahan Daniel
Abstract: Debates over health care have focused for so long on economics that the proper goals for medicine seem to be taken for granted; yet problems in health care stem as much from a lack of agreement about the goals and priorities of medicine as from the way systems function. This book asks basic questions about the purposes and ends of medicine and shows that the answers have practical implications for future health care delivery, medical research, and the education of medical students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qd8zdh
The Goals and Ends of Medicine: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Pellegrino Edmund D.
Abstract: Medicine today is in an unprecedented state of confusion about its identity, about its role and the role of physicians in contemporary society. Philosophers and judicial opinions are disassembling the Hippocratic Oath and ethic; medical care has become a commodity transacted as a business and organized as an industry; insurance companies see in medicine an investment opportunity; scientists and engineers see it as the subject of technical prestidigitation.
On Medicine and Other Means of Health Enhancement: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Nordenfelt Lennart
Abstract: Between these extremes are various other health-enhancing human activities, some of them situated in an institution of health care such as a clinic, others performed in a public office or in a medium
What Kind of Values? from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Gracia Diego
Abstract: Medicine has not been a unique or homogeneous task throughout history. What we call medicine is a diverse set of ideas, methods, procedures, and practices that has been changing continuously from the beginning of human culture until now. The only point in common throughout history has been the goal of helping people overcome disease and promote health. But if we try to analyze the contents proper of those two terms, “health” and “disease,” we realize that over time their meaning has changed; a canonical or paradigmatic concept cannot be found for them. In other words, health and disease are not,
Old Age: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Boyd Kenneth
Abstract: “Grandfather was not a problem but a solver of problems.”¹ That may be too optimistic a picture of old age in the past. In preliterate societies, the old were valued as “the libraries of the people.” But once societies became literate and devised more efficient means of information retrieval, the elderly no longer had a secure cultural niche. Individuals who retained control of significant resources—active politicians and intellectuals, for example—might be treated with respect. But the common lot of the elderly, in agricultural and industrial societies, was sometimes closer to the cruel marginalization depicted, for example, in Zola’s
Genetic Medicine: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Allert Gerhard
Abstract: In the last two decades human genetics has developed into an extensive scientific field of enormous range, a dynamism that previously didn’t exist. New molecular genetic techniques have enabled far-reaching changes to take place in medicine, with new knowledge and new techniques in prevention, diagnosis, and treatment. New models of health and disease are superseding old ones. Scientists predict that these developments will lead to a deeper understanding of disease and health. The individual propensities of each person for mono-and multifactorial diseases and disorders can be recognized and foreseen.
Rethinking DoctorThink: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Fox Ellen
Abstract: On a fundamental level, the goals of medical education are necessarily derivative of the goals of medicine. Although overall, education is certainly a worthy end in its own right, the quintessential purpose of medical education is to provide society with professionals to fill a vital social need. Therefore, medical education’s specific goals depend entirely on a prior question: What sort of medical practitioners should our society aim to produce?
Traditional Chinese Medicine and the Goals of Medicine from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Weibo Lu
Abstract: Traditional Chinese medicine (TCM) has much in common with other forms of so-called traditional medicine, but it is also unique. It has its own theoretical system and terminology. It can also guide clinical practice effectively. The development of modern science and technology is the primary cause for the evolution from ancient Greco-Roman forms of traditional medicine to modern medicine. Most traditional medicine could not accommodate science and technology, and were largely overcome by it. Only TCM met this challenge, arming itself to prove its efficacy and the validity of its philosophy.¹ Over time, hundreds of modern doctors and professors who
The Future of Medicine: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Gyarmati Gabriel
Abstract: The future is unpredictable. But one thing we can do is examine the factors that are likely to steer the development of specific institutions: in this case, medicine. That is what I will do in this essay. To identify those factors, however, it is first necessary to define the situation in which medicine currently finds itself and examine the events that forged that situation. I suggest that the current state of medicine is shaped by three circumstances.
On the Goals of Medicine: from:
The Goals of Medicine
Author(s) Lolas Fernando
Abstract: Defining medicine as a discipline and as a profession, requires a recognition that it comprises theory, and not merely practice.¹ The conceptualization of suffering and disease in secular terms, for example, has been one of the most pervasive theoretical aims of medicine throughout history. In addition, as a proto-paradigmatic discipline, medicine has been influenced by the science of the positivistic era, which may be said to have the inherent goal of reproducing itself and achieving autonomy as a techno-scientific enterprise. Therefore, as a scientific discipline, modern medicine shares with the sciences the goals of innovation and invention, aside from its
Introduction from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Crawford Barry S.
Abstract: This is the third of a three-volume series of studies by members of the society of biblical literature’s consultation (1995–1997), then seminar (1998–2003), on ancient Myths and Modern Theories of christian origins, both concerned with redescribing the beginnings of christianity as religion, that is, with theories and methods developed in the social sciences and related areas for studying religious phenomena of various sorts and geographical locations, not just the specific literature, beliefs, and practices of early christians. The work of the consultation and seminar did not end, however, with the completion of the seminar’s term in 2003. Its
Conjectures on Conjunctures and Other Matters: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: Fieldwork, the distinctive procedural hallmark of the anthropological enterprise, became an unquestioned professional requirement during the decades of sociocultural anthropology’s “classical period,” roughly 1925 to 1960. for our purposes, the major consequence of this is a presentism characteristic of much ethnographic reporting: the society as observed at the time of the fieldworker’s interaction with it. While this presentism raises large conceptual questions,¹ its practical result with respect to theory was a strong bias against the historical in dominant approaches, whether the latter was functionalism or structuralism (to name but two, all but opposite options). in addition to reflecting contemporary practice,
Mark, War, and Creative Imagination from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Arnal William E.
Abstract: The Gospel according to Mark, arguably, laid the framework for most subsequent understandings of Jesus and of the “movement” he allegedly instigated.¹ The predominant “ancient myth” with which our “modern theories” are struggling is thus precisely the one laid down by Mark. It receives fuller elaboration and extension forward in time in Luke-Acts, which in its turn offers a basis for Eusebius’s even more ambitious conceptualization.² But the narrative
modeand the substantive implications of that mode—the view, in short, that Jesus is understood best in terms of his activity and particularly in terms of a series of sequential
Q and the “Big Bang” Theory of Christian Origins from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Walsh Robyn Faith
Abstract: Our earliest writings about Jesus are artifacts not only of the ancient Mediterranean but also of eighteenth-, nineteenth-, and twentieth-century thought.¹ Others, such as Wilfred Cantwell Smith, have made similar claims, noting that scholars of (so-called) Christian origins should approach their source material “not merely as a set of ancient documents or even as a first-and second-century product but as a third-century and twelfth-century and nineteenth-century and contemporary agent.”² This call for attention to hermeneutics and the inheritances of reception history presents a conceptual paradox. We are trained in the field to position these writings in their “original” context, that
Ancient Myths and Modern Theories of Christian Origins: from:
Redescribing the Gospel of Mark
Author(s) Miller Merrill P.
Abstract: In the introduction to
Redescribing Christian Origins, the editors of the volume stated that the purpose of the project was both historical and theoretical: to redescribe the beginnings of christianity and contribute to the construction of a social theory of religion.¹ At the outset of these be inseparable from challenging the theory of religion, which continues to be presupposed and to support the dominant historical paradigm, characterized in short as the lukan-eusebian model of christian origins.²
The Physician-Patient Relationship from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Donovan G. Kevin
Abstract: The relationship between a physician and his or her patient is the heart and the soul of medicine. This relationship is the mundane stuff of daily practice as well as the transcendent spirit of the medical profession. It is rightly the object of insight and analysis, for by seeing this relationship in its best light, we see medicine at its best. Conversely, if we believe medicine is somehow going awry, we should not blame scientific or societal influences but look at their influence on the ideal healing interaction that occurs in the coming together of a virtuous healer and an
The Dentist as Healer and Friend from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Welie Jos V. M.
Abstract: The dentist as healer and friend: This notion is likely to evoke cynical disbelief among many readers. Surely this must be a jest or mistake. The title of this volume itself—
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer—is itself a bit implausible, but not beyond belief. The imaginative reader can probably picture an amicable, old-style family practitioner who knows inside-and-out the members of the families for whom he or she cares. If a child is ill, the physician hops in the car in the middle of the night and drives out to the farm. If grandpa has died,
Learning through Experience and Expression: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benner Patricia
Abstract: Nursing practice is a public extension of the ordinary care of family and self in everyday life.¹ When people are critically and gravely ill, family members can become overwhelmed by the emotional and physical labor of caregiving, and nurses can support and extend the caregiving resources of the family. During times of transition such as birth or the care of an elderly parent or ill partner, nurses can assist with the new adaptations to caregiving required.
Internal and External Sources of Morality for Medicine from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Veatch Robert M.
Abstract: Edmund D. Pellegrino’s call for integrity in the professional practice of medicine has been powerful and prophetic. Among physicians of the second half of the twentieth century, none has more clearly challenged practitioners to eschew roles assigned to physicians that have the potential to corrupt the practice. Pellegrino has challenged the use of the physician as economic gatekeeper,¹ mercy killer,² illicit accomplice in nuclear war,³ tool of state ideology,⁴ and reliever of unwanted pregnancy.⁵ He has reminded his physician colleagues—as well as persons who practice medicine in one of the other health professions or only as lay people—that
The Six Transformations of American Health Care from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Harvey John Collins
Abstract: Originally, American medical practice was British medicine transported to the colonies and incorporated into the life of the new nation. This incorporation was modified, to be sure, to fit the needs of pioneering people living in a vastly different environment and culture than that which prevailed in the home
The Principle of Dominion from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Thomasma David C.
Abstract: This essay examines a principle proposed as fundamental to health care ethics and environmental ethics. The principle of dominion establishes responsibility for every act of intervention into natural processes. This principle may be stated simply as follows:
For every act of intervention into natural processes there is a corresponding requirement to manage and respect the vulnerabilities that occur from the intervention, now and in the foreseeable future.As we shall see, this initial formulation will need further refinement as additional considerations and objections are met.
Organizational Ethics and the Medical Professional: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Khushf George
Abstract: The idea of an individual who serves as healer and friend has a strong hold on our psyche. It responds to a basic need we all have. When we are confronted with illness, we need a person who has the knowledge and skills required to effectively intervene (the healer). Yet we also require a person who appreciates our personal experience and responds in a personal way (the friend). Although our need calls for an intimate link between these two roles, in practice there has been tension between them. The challenge for the physician-humanist has been to integrate, the roles: simultaneously
Reproductive Technologies: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) McCormick Richard A.
Abstract: The birth of Louise Brown on July 25, 1978, in Oldham, England, was greeted with enormous fanfare. She was the first baby born from
in vitrofertilization (IVF) and embryo transfer (ET), the crowning work of the late Patrick Steptoe and Robert Edwards. The fanfare included questions, accusations, expressions of fears and doubts, warnings, hopes, and joyful congratulations (including that of Pope John Paul I)—in short, just about every human reaction that greets a medical breakthrough that touches human life. People wondered whether Louise would suffer the effects of being a medical freak. They expressed misgivings about the embryos
The Search for the Meaning of the Human Body from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Kissell Judith Lee
Abstract: Emerging biotechnology is producing a genre of cases that question, in an unprecedented way, the ethical meaning and significance of the human body in the practice of medicine. These cases span clinical practice and research, laboratory experimentation and public policy. Examples include the cultivation of human embryonic stem cells for various research purposes, including the generation of substitute body tissues and organs; l the selling of human tissue by not-for-profit research institutions to for-profit health product and pharmaceutical companies; the use of bone from a hip replacement for dental procedures; the accessing, for experimental purposes, of stored pathology specimens;² the
Healing the Dying: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Sulmasy Daniel P.
Abstract: In the final analysis, every dying person who retains the capacity to hear and to understand the call of death faces two important sets of questions: questions of
valueand questions ofmeaning.Whether the dying individual addresses or ignores these questions is totally up to the individual in his or her own freedom. The fact that some persons freely choose to ignore these questions does not vitiate their importance. Even if all persons freely chose to ignore these questions, they would remain important. Regardless of whether people confront these questions, they always present themselves as obvious questions for the
The Contribution of Philosophical Hermeneutics to Clinical Ethics from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Benaroyo Lazare
Abstract: My assumption is that healing is oriented toward restoring or improving the patient’s good. On this view, medical morality is grounded in the patient’s desire to be delivered from the burden of suffering. According to Pellegrino and Thomasma,¹ the ethical core of this encounter is an alliance, a caring pact, based on mutual trust. Physician and patient are united to fight against disease and to relieve suffering:
Reflections on the Humanities and Medical Education: from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) McElhinney Thomas K.
Abstract: Physician education is an interweaving of the three common themes of all professional education: theory, practice, and history.¹ In medicine, the role of history has been the least understood of this triad. For musicians, history is the story of the music that helps in the understanding of theory and the interpretation that guides performance. For a lawyer, history primarily means precedents: prior rulings upon which a new case can be constructed. Neither law nor music, however, shares with medicine the constant pressure of a rapidly developing scientific knowledge base that requires doctors to maintain an awareness of the most current
Religious Elements in Healing from:
The Health Care Professional as Friend and Healer
Author(s) Smith Bradford R.
Abstract: Morris Payne is a forty-three-year-old truck driver who is hospitalized with a back injury. The injury occurred when Morris fell from a ladder while he was painting a classroom in the education building of the church his family regularly attends. Morris himself is not a regular churchgoer. He typically visits only a few Sundays a year, and he does not take much interest in the activities or needs of the church. He was helping with the painting project only at his wife's insistence. The fall occurred when another painter bumped into the ladder on which Morris was standing.
Las víctimas en la jurisprudencia de la Corte Interamericana de Derechos Humanos from:
La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Malarino Ezequiel
Abstract: Sin lugar a dudas, la Corte Interamericana de Derechos Humanos (Corte IDH) ha hecho mucho por posicionar a la víctima como un actor central del Derecho internacional. A través de su jurisprudencia, ella la ha reconocido como un verdadero sujeto del Derecho internacional, dotándola de amplios poderes de intervención procesal como parte demandante del proceso internacional¹, ha ampliado el concepto de víctima, concediendo legitimación sustantiva y procesal por derecho propio también a los familiares de la víctima directa de la violación del derecho², y ha reconocido nuevos derechos de la víctima más allá de lo previsto en la propia Convención
Fines de la pena y del proceso penal en contextos de transición from:
La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Maculan Elena
Abstract: La justicia en tiempos de transición abre nuevos escenarios para el Derecho penal, enfrentándole, por un lado, a los retos planteados por la naturaleza masiva y sistemática de los crímenes cuya superación se busca y, por el otro, a las exigencias específicas del momento transicional. Estos factores conllevan una modificación, al menos parcial, de los fines y del alcance de la justicia penal.
El acuerdo de paz y el modelo transicional colombiano: from:
La influencia de las víctimas en el tratamiento jurídico de la violencia colectiva.
Author(s) Cardona Alejandro Aponte
Abstract: El día 2 de octubre del año en curso, por muy estrecho margen y de manera sorpresiva, con una abstención enorme del 40 por ciento, y en Bogotá del 60, el país votó no al plebiscito de refrendación de los acuerdos de paz entre el Gobierno y las guerrillas de las FARC. El presente trabajo se actualizó en su momento, en los meses de julio a septiembre de 2016, para presentarlo a la discusión general que tuvo lugar en Madrid en la semana del 7 de noviembre. El trabajo se relaciona con el conjunto mismo de los acuerdos. En él
Book Title: Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.- Publisher: Dykinson
Author(s): Fuentes Juan Luis
Abstract: El último informe sobre la educación editado por la UNESCO en 2015 se titula Replantear la educación y comienza señalando la necesidad de oponerse al discurso dominante del desarrollo" al abordar la cuestión de los objetivos y las finalidades de la educación.Naturalmente no se trata de descalificar el esfuerzo por aumentar los recursos económicos de la sociedad, que eviten que la dignidad humana quede oscurecida por la falta de medios. De lo que se trata, precisamente, es de proporcionar a la dignidad los medios que necesita para llevar a plenitud el más profundo desarrollo de todas sus capacidades. Esto exige –a menos que usemos de modo vacío y estéril las palabras− conocer qué significa la dignidad humana y cuáles son las capacidades básicas de la persona que debemos promover. Ello permitirá conocer las características concretas que haya de tener una sociedad preocupada por el verdadero bien común y las grandes líneas que deben caracterizar a los sistemas educativos para colaborar en la gran tarea de una educación realmente plenificante.La Filosofía de la Educación debe estudiar estas cuestiones tratándolas desde el razonamiento público, en el respeto a las libertades y a las diversas particularidades de todas las personas.Tal es el objetivo de este libro, donde se agrupan trabajos originales de veintidós autores que, desde cuatro países distintos y trabajando en doce universidades diversas, proporcionan pistas y criterios que faciliten, usando una clásica terminología de la UNESCO, aprender a vivir juntos, pero, primeramente, aprender que la dignidad humana tiene una base ética, que mueve a cultivar las capacidades propias de la inteligencia, del carácter, y de la virtud, así como a prestar una especial atención al cuidado de esas capacidades en situaciones cuando nos encontramos ante situaciones de vulnerabilidad, señalando la misión que tiene la institución universitaria en el cultivo de todo ese conjunto de capacidades. José Antonio Ibáñez-Martín ejerció durante muchos años como Catedrático de Filosofía de la Educación de la Universidad Complutense de Madrid. Inició su carrera docente e investigadora en la enseñanza secundaria, tras obtener una cátedra de Instituto. Por su amplia actividad investigadora, ha recibido numerosos premios, como el Premio Nacional de Literatura para obras de Ensayo, el Premio “Menéndez Pelayo", del CSIC, y el Premio “Marqués de la Vega de Armijo", de la Real Academia de Ciencias Morales y Políticas, entre otros. Es Director de la Revista Española de Pedagogía y Vice-Rector de Ordenación Docente y Doctorado de la Universidad Internacional de La Rioja (UNIR). El Rey Juan Carlos I le concedió la Gran Cruz de la Orden Civil de Alfonso X el Sabio.Juan Luis Fuentes es Doctor Europeo en Pedagogía con Premio Extraordinario de Doctorado por la Universidad Complutense, Premio Extraordinario y Nacional de Licenciatura. Cuenta con un sexenio de investigación reconocido por la CNEAI. Ha realizado estancias en Eastern Washington University (EEUU), Roehampton University (Reino Unido) y Freie Universität (Alemania). Ha recibido el “Premio Antonio Millán-Puelles" a la Investigación Educativa, el “Premio Joven Investigador" en el Congreso Nacional de Pedagogía y el Diploma por Evaluación Excelente en el Programa Docentia. Es Secretario de la Revista Española de Pedagogía (JCR) y Editor Asociado de Educación XX1 (JCR). Sus líneas de investigación se sitúan en torno a la educación del carácter, la pedagogía social, la educación intercultural y la utilización de las TIC en el ámbito educativo desde una perspectiva ético-cívica."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1qqhfd4
La capacidad de vivir con y para los otros, superando el hechizo del odio from:
Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.
Author(s) Ibáñez-Martín José Antonio
Abstract: Hemos enterrado a Platón. En
Las Leyesse declara¹ que no es digna de llamarse educación “la que tiende al dinero o a cualquier otra destreza”. Hoy todavía quedan algunos irreductibles que consideran acertadas estas palabras, como Steven Schwartz, antiguo Decano de Medicina de una universidad australiana, quien insiste en que “necesitamos ir más allá de la formación profesional”². Pero es indudable que el lenguaje economicista ha adquirido una clara preponderancia en amplios ámbitos de la cultura actual, hasta el punto de que durante muchos años se medía la calidad de vida de los países según el Producto Interior Bruto
El Brexit y la alteridad: from:
Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.
Author(s) Fuentes Juan Luis
Abstract: Si el electorado británico –o la parte de la ciudadanía que acudió a votar– hubiera tomado una decisión diferente de abandonar la Unión Europea, el lector encontraría en estas páginas un texto muy distinto del que leerá a continuación. Sin embargo, los acontecimientos ocurridos en junio del 2016 y en los años anteriores, que culminaron en el referéndum sobre el
Brexit, reclaman una reflexión a todo aquel que aspire a decir algo relevante sobre la actualidad.
La educación como capacidad fértil from:
Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.
Author(s) Guerrero Antonio Bernal
Abstract: En los últimos años ha ido adquiriendo solidez un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo, conocido como
enfoque de la capacidad o de las capacidades, que aspira a que el desarrollo sea realmentehumano, suscitando una nueva manera de comprender y de abordar el desarrollo, no ceñida al mero crecimiento económico. En este nuevo enfoque, la educación adquiere un renovado protagonismo, como medio y como fin del desarrollo, porque la persona tiene necesidades, pero también tiene valores y, particularmente, como ha afirmado Amartya Sen, valora la capacidad de razonar, de evaluar, de actuar y de participar. Tratando de conciliar sociedad y sujeto,
Educación y desarrollo de capacidades en prisión from:
Educación y capacidades: hacia un nuevo enfoque del desarrollo humano.
Author(s) Cantero Fernando Gil
Abstract: A diferencia de lo que suele pensarse, el problema de la educación en prisión en nuestro país no es la
ausenciade los referentes legales necesarios para llevar a cabo acciones educativas. Muy al contrario, nuestro actual marco legislativo penitenciario posibilita todo tipo de actividades educativas y aun innovadoras². El problema es que, por diversas razones, no se llevan a cabo. Apenas existen limitaciones legislativas para poner en marcha cualquier tipo de actividad que los diversos responsables penitenciarios consideren que puede favorecer el desarrollo de las capacidades de los presos. Un educador puede emprender así cualquier iniciativa que considere interesante
Introduction from:
Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Wacker Marie-Theres
Abstract: The phrase
early Jewish writingswill be used in our volume to designate books/scriptures sharing three characteristics: they originate from the period after the arrival of alexander the great in Palestine (ca. 330 BCE) until the decades following the destruction of the second temple in Jerusalem (70 CE); they are, in modern research, considered as Jewish;
The Sins of the First Woman: from:
Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Wacker Marie-Theres
Abstract: The figures of Adam and Eve both frequently appear in early Jewish writings from Hellenistic-Roman times but with different significance and characteristics. While Adam emerges in numerous passages (2 En. 30–32; 42; 58; 4 Ezra 3.4–27; 4.30–32; 7; 2 Bar. 4.17–19; 23; 48.42–50; 54; 56; 3 Bar. 9; sib. or. 3.24–28; apoc. sedr. 4–8), Eve appears mainly in association with her companion (Jub. 2–4; 1 En. 32; 2 En. 31; 2 Bar. 48.42–43; apoc. ab. 23–24; 3 Bar. 4; apoc. Sedr. 7.6–7), or she comes on the scene to
Between Social Context and Individual Ideology: from:
Early Jewish Writings
Author(s) Niehoff Maren R.
Abstract: Scholars with a feminist awareness have often been intrigued by Philo of Alexandria, who stands at one of the most important watersheds of Western civilization, namely, at the juncture between Judaism and Hellenism in the first century CE, just before Christianity emerged and adopted many of his ideas. Philo’s views of women have regularly been seen as uniformly negative. The only open question has pertained to the origin of his views, whether they derived from Jewish or Greek sources.¹ In this context an important factor has regularly been overlooked, namely, Philo’s dramatic intellectual development as a result of his visit
ONE IDENTITIES SEEK CONTROL from:
Identity and Control
Author(s) Godart Frederic
Abstract: An identity emerges for each of us only out of efforts at control amid contingencies and contentions in interaction. These control efforts need not have anything to do with domination over other identities. Before anything else, control is about finding footings among other identities. Such footing is
SEVEN GETTING ACTION from:
Identity and Control
Author(s) Lietz Haiko
Abstract: The other face cuts open the Sargasso Sea of social obligation and context to achieve openness sufficient for getting action. Any changes must originate from countering the
Book Title: Documental (es)-Voces… Ideas
Publisher: Programa Editorial Universidad del Valle
Author(s): Kuéllar Diana
Abstract: Este libro ofrece un panorama actual de conceptos y de voces en torno al cine documental. La primera parte corresponde al escrito: "Algunas ideas sobre el (lo) documental". Este texto propone una aproximación a algunos modelos cómo el documental ha sido entendido en el seno de la institución: un intento por relacionar el campo del documental con algunos deseos colectivos y cambios culturales que se conceptualizan desde la filosofía del arte y la estética. Recoge también 21 entrevistas realizadas con directores, productores, analistas y otros profesionales vinculados al cine documental.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rfsq6j
Presentación from:
Documental (es)
Abstract: El libro que usted tiene en las manos busca un propósito: ofrecer un panorama actual de conceptos y de voces en torno al cine documental. Para cumplir este objetivo está estructurado en dos partes: una aproximación teórica al cine documental y un conjunto de entrevistas con gente del cine que, desde distintas prácticas y profesiones, tiene qué decir sobre el tema.
Una mirada desde la universidad from:
Documental (es)
Author(s) Correa Ernesto
Abstract: MANUEL SILVA: En vista de tu rol como profesor y actual director del Programa de Comunicación Audiovisual y Multimedial de la Universidad de Antioquia, de la que además eres egresado, comencemos por establecer una relación entre tu proceso de formación en la década de 1990 y la oferta formativa del presente.
El sonido en el documental from:
Documental (es)
Author(s) Salazar César
Abstract: CÉSAR SALAZAR: En el sonido para documental tenemos las fases anteriores al inicio del sonido en la historia del cine. En la narrativa de Nanook el esquimal (1922) son característicos los intertítulos. No había sonidos, si acaso habría sonido por un acompañamiento durante la proyección como en la ficción. En los años 30-40, y en adelante cuando se tiene sonido, se trata de remplazar los intertítulos con la voz del narrador registrada posteriormente
El Cineclub de Cali: from:
Documental (es)
Author(s) Arbeláez Ramiro
Abstract: RAMIRO ARBELÁEZ: Para dar coherencia a la cantidad posible de temáticas propongo verlo desde mi experiencia: cómo lo viví, a lo que me vinculé en la actividad cultural y cómo vi que fueron apareciendo cambios. Yo he vivido unas etapas claves de la historia del audiovisual de Cali y del Valle, de las que puedo dar cuenta a partir de los años 70. Me parece que inicialmente todo está muy signado por
Capítulo 1 ENCUENTRO CON UN SEMBRADOR DE CEIBAS from:
Raíces de la memoria
Abstract: Una mañana de agosto de 2007 llegó a mis manos un paquete con cinco novelas que serían presentadas en la Feria del Libro Pacífico. Debía escribir un artículo para el periódico La Palabra anunciando sus lanzamientos y, adicionalmente, reseñar una de las obras. Toda selección es por naturaleza un acto de exclusión, debía escoger la novela que por sus calidades literarias mereciera el destaque especial.
PRESENTACIÓN from:
Transculturación narrativa: La clave Wayuu en Gabriel García Márquez
Abstract: Las mencionadas publicaciones tuvieron lugar a lo largo de quince años en el curso de mi actividad como docenteinvestigador de la Universidad del Valle.
Capítulo 1 CARTOGRAFÍAS DE LA CRÍTICA from:
Transculturación narrativa: La clave Wayuu en Gabriel García Márquez
Abstract: El universo literario de todo escritor es percibido a través de perspectivas o rejillas de interpretación que lo han juzgado e, inevitablemente, clasificado. Siendo la existencia de tal dispositivo crítico una realidad previa para la llegada de todo texto literario ante la comunidad de lec tores, esto permite afirmar que un texto literario no llega a las manos del lector sino que se le hace llegar. De hecho, al entrar en contacto con
la bibliotecade los libros escritos por un autor, el lector accede a un terreno que ya no es « virgen »; no accede directamente a los
Capítulo 7 EL GESTO, LA MIRADA, LA VOZ, EL AGENCIAMIENTO Y LA ACTIVIDAD SIMBÓLICA COMO EXPRESIÓN DE: from:
Construcción psicológica y desarrollo temprano del sujeto.
Abstract: En el itinerario que he tratado de seguir hasta el momento, me parece conveniente no dejar de lado
el gesto, la mirada, la voz, el agenciamiento y la actividad simbólica⁹⁶ (Villalobos, 2003), elementos que están presentes en las interacciones y por lo tanto impregnan la experiencia constructiva del sujeto; los podemos reconocer en el comportamiento del bebé a lo largo de sus experiencias vitales, pues hacen parte de la conducta como tal, y considero que ellos portan las expresiones primigenias más significativas de la constitución subjetiva; estas cinco formas expresivas que unifican la estesis , la ética vital y la
Book Title: Ciencia y modulación del pensamiento poético-percepción, emoción y metáfora en la escritura de Lorand Gaspar
Publisher: Ediciones Universidad de Salamanca
Author(s): BERMÚDEZ VÍCTOR RAMÓN ESCOBEDO
Abstract: La presente Tesis estudia las relaciones entre la ciencia y la poesía. Nuestro trabajo aborda el modo en que el conocimiento científico modula la creación literaria, así como algunos de los procedimientos del pensamiento literario. Las hipótesis de investigación reposan sobre dos niveles de la escritura de Lorand Gaspar: la dimensión epistemológica del discurso poético y su valor cognitivo. A partir del análisis de un corpus literario se propone una metodología de estudio que atiende a la complejidad epistemológica y cognitiva de la enunciación poética. Tres apartados teóricos organizan la investigación de algunos de los procesos del pensamiento poético: percepción, emoción y metáfora. Lo anterior se enmarca en una argumentación que favorece la transdisciplinariedad mediante estrategias de análisis literario que integran consideraciones de carácter interdisciplinar.This thesis studies the relations between Science and Poetry. The research approaches the way in which the scientific knowledge modulates the literary creation, as well as some of the procedures of the literary thought. The hypotheses of investigation rest on two levels of Lorand Gaspar’s writing: the epistemological dimension and the cognitive value of the poetic discourse. Based on the analysis of a literary corpus this research proposes a methodology of study that attends to the epistemological and cognitive complexity of the lyrical enunciation. Three theoretical chapters organize the investigation of some of the processes of the poetical thought: Perception, Emotion and Metaphor. This research takes place in an argumentation that favors transdisciplinarity by means of literary analysis strategies, which integrate several considerations of interdisciplinary nature.Cette Thèse s’articule autour des relations entre la poésie et la science. Notre travail aborde la manière dont la connaissance scientifique module la création littéraire, ainsi que certaines des procédures de la pensée littéraire. Les hypothèses de cette recherche reposent sur deux niveaux d’étude de l’écriture de Lorand Gaspar : la dimension épistémologique du discours poétique et sa valeur cognitive. Ce travail propose une méthode d’analyse littéraire qui s’attarde à la complexité épistémologique et cognitive de l’énonciation poétique. Trois chapitres organisent l’étude de certains des processus de la pensée poétique : Perception, Émotion et Métaphore. Notre recherche favorise la transdisciplinarité grâce à des stratégies d’analyse littéraire qui intègrent des considérations à caractère interdisciplinaire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rfzxjv
The Elusive Dancing Mother: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) FROESE EDNA
Abstract: My first reading of Darcie Friesen Hossack’s superbly written
MennonitesDon’tDancedid not evoke any wish to dance. In fact, I needed long breaks between stories, sometimes within stories, just to ease the emotional upheaval of seeing and feeling again so much of what I have often willed into invisibility. While all fiction requires of us some emotional involvement in the characters’ lives, Hossack’s short stories “identify me to myself”¹ as if her fictional mothers are my mother and her fictional daughters are my sister and I. When identification is that strong, it seems foolish and cowardly to refuse
Eking Out a Discursive Space: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) LOEWEN MARY ANN
Abstract: In many ways, my mother was a non-conformist. In the late 1940s in Morden, Manitoba, when most Mennonite women her age were getting married, she was away from home teaching school in remote northern Manitoba communities. When these same women were having babies, she was pursuing a theological degree from Mennonite Brethren Bible College (mbbc) in Winnipeg, Manitoba. She did eventually get married at the ripe old age of twenty-five. And she did have children, a respectable half dozen to be exact. But she never really did follow the gendered conventions of her time. She died in August of 2010
“Home” Schooling from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) CROCKER WENDY A.
Abstract: It would be fair to ask why a researcher who is neither a Mennonite nor a mother would be interested in the topic of Old Colony Mennonite¹ mothering, and what she could contribute to the discussion. In this essay, I write from the privileged position of an educated white woman who is known within the community where I live and work as someone who holds a position of authority and trust within the education sector. As a school principal, I have interacted extensively with Old Colony Mennonite children and their families. My vantage point as an “Outsider” provides a unique
(In)fertile Encounters: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) CROUSE-DICK CHRISTINE E.
Abstract: In the privacy of the guest bedroom I once envisioned as a nursery, I take a deep breath and click “send” on the email. “There it goes,” I sigh. “No turning back.” Conflicting emotions swirl in my chest as I push aside my laptop, flop back on the bed, cover my face with a pillow, and repeat to myself in a mantra-like fashion, “This is purely for the purpose of making a point.” My point is in the form of an abstract sent to the editors of this volume on Mennonite mothering. Several months earlier, they circulated a call for
“Tirelessly Working to Dispense Her Own Wisdom”: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) DOWDESWELL TRACEY LEIGH
Abstract: The ideology of scientific motherhood began to gain ground in Canada in the late nineteenth century, and came to rationalize mothering for Mennonite women along expert and scientific lines. Scientific motherhood was a widespread cultural movement that sought to reproduce the conditions of industrialization and regulate the modes of women’s labour inside the “factory” home. Scientific motherhood is closely associated with urbanization, industrialization, the medicalization of childbirth, and the increasing popularity of artificial formula that characterized its rise during the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries (see Apple), a time of significant Mennonite resettlement in Canada. For Canadian mothers, including
An Evangelical Reorientation: from:
Mothering Mennonite
Author(s) ANDERSON CORY
Abstract: When the beachy amish-mennonites withdrew from the Old Order Amish,¹ they not only loosened restrictions on dress and technology usage, but adopted evangelical Christian theology, that is, a preoccupation with the sudden, dramatic salvation of individual souls (Cronk; Geiger). Yet, Beachy Amish-Mennonites have sought to retain Amish characteristics, including an emphasis on lifelong redemption through separatist community life, defined gender roles, and distinct practices. This hybridization of evangelical and Old Order reorganized their society in nuanced ways, including how women contributed to community and family formation. Among the Amish, women are responsible for having and raising children, that is, perpetuating
Book Title: Natal Signs-Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting
Publisher: Demeter Press
Author(s): BURTON NADYA
Abstract: Natal Signs: Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting explores some of the ways in which reproductive experiences are taken up in the rich arena of cultural production. The chapters in this collection pose questions, unsettle assumptions, and generate broad imaginative spaces for thinking about representation of pregnancy, birth, and parenting. They demonstrate the ways in which practices of consuming and using representations carry within them the productive forces of creation. Bringing together an eclectic and vibrant range of perspectives, this collection offers readers the possibility to rethink and reimagine the diverse meanings and practices of representations of these significant life events. Engaging theoretical reflection and creative image making, the contributors explore a broad range of cultural signs with a focus on challenging authoritative representations in a manner that seeks to reveal rather than conceal the insistently problematic and contestable nature of image culture. Natal Signs gathers an exciting set of critically engaged voices to reflect on some of life’s most meaningful moments in ways that affirm natality as the renewed promise of possibility.Natal Signs: Cultural Representations of Pregnancy, Birth and Parenting explores some of the ways in which reproductive experiences are taken up in the rich arena of cultural production. The chapters in this collection pose questions, unsettle assumptions, and generate broad imaginative spaces for thinking about representation of pregnancy, birth, and parenting. They demonstrate the ways in which practices of consuming and using representations carry within them the productive forces of creation. Bringing together an eclectic and vibrant range of perspectives, this collection offers readers the possibility to rethink and reimagine the diverse meanings and practices of representations of these significant life events. Engaging theoretical reflection and creative image making, the contributors explore a broad range of cultural signs with a focus on challenging authoritative representations in a manner that seeks to reveal rather than conceal the insistently problematic and contestable nature of image culture. Natal Signs gathers an exciting set of critically engaged voices to reflect on some of life’s most meaningful moments in ways that affirm natality as the renewed promise of possibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1rrd8tc
Gay Men’s Narratives of Pregnancy in the Context of Commercial Surrogacy from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) DEMPSEY DEBORAH
Abstract: Historically, gay men have primarily become fathers in the context of heterosexual relationships, or for some men through foster care, adoption, or co-parenting arrangements as sperm donors (Riggs and Due). Since the beginning of the twenty-first century, however, gay men living in western countries have increasingly made use of commercial surrogacy services (Everingham, Stafford-Bell, and Hammarberg). The increased use of these services has become possible as a result of legislative change in countries such as the U.S. (in which many states now allow for the contracting of surrogacy services), in addition to the provision of services in countries where the
Imminent from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) LONG JENNIFER
Abstract: For over fifteen years, my artistic practice has explored issues of doubt, vulnerability, perceived ideals, and communication within the context of interpersonal relationships. Working with constructed narratives and a feminist lens, I describe the emotions and quiet moments of everyday life. Touch, gesture, and gaze all play significant roles as conduits of conscious and unconscious modes of communication. My artwork parallels my life experiences and has recently concentrated on pregnancy and mothering through the series
Swallowing Ice,Fold, andImminent.Imminentbegan as a series of self-portraits that visually articulated my reflections of being pregnant and the primary caregiver to
Resistance and Submission: from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) EINION ALYS
Abstract: This paper emerged from my work for a Ph.D. in Creative Writing. Motivated by a desire to analyse women’s life stories, and informed by many years as a midwife, I took on the task of retelling a life story revolving around the centrality of the character’s bodily experience of womanhood, manifested through her experiences of rape, intimate violence, birth, and mothering. This enterprise opened the door to a critical understanding of the nature of subjectivity as represented and re-presented in fiction and non-fiction in the form of birth narratives. As a midwife and a feminist, I had long been aware
Representations of Birth and Motherhood as Contemporary Forms of the Sacred from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) HENNESSEY ANNA
Abstract: This paper examines ways in which images of birth and the maternal body are contemporary forms of the sacred, and, controversially, how their production represents a renewed interest in birth and mothering as primary sources of empowerment for many women. Through research in art history, religious studies, philosophy, medical anthropology, and feminism, I first show how members of an international movement devoted to birth and art are actively using religious, secular, and re-sacralized art imagery in the visualization of labour and birth and as a ritualistic part of birth as a rite of passage. While this process of ritualizing art
Split Open from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) PARKER ARA
Abstract: The very act of birthing forced me to completely surrender to the throws of labour and natural delivery. There was no sidestepping the inevitable birthing. Why had I not been told more about this initiation into being? Not my child’s, but my own!
Birth Shock: from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) WATTS LISA
Abstract: The birth project is funded research by the Arts and Humanities Research Council, UK. New mothers are being given the opportunity to explore their experiences of pregnancy, birth, and post-natal readjustments using different art forms: phototherapy, photo-diaries, and participatory arts. In The Birth Project, the arts are being used to interrogate this complex topic. We situate this endeavour in the context of an emerging practice of health humanities (Crawford et al.) art as social action (Levine and Levine) and visual research methodologies (Pink,
Advances, The Future). This chapter will focus on the participatory arts work already undertaken to date with
Making Meaning of Stillbirth from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) FARRALES LYNN
Abstract: Sensitive language, remembrance photography, and mementos have become integrated into stillbirth care practices in North American health care institutions for parents and families who have experienced the death of an infant. While representations reflect how families, caregivers, and society understand stillbirth, they also help shape our relationship with birth, death, and both as they occur together. From both subjective and objective points of view, this chapter will explore how words, images, and artifacts come to represent multiple meanings of stillbirth in a way that can both challenge and contribute to the silence, stigma, and emancipation of bereaved parents from ambiguity
Paternal Loss and Anticipation: from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) BULLER RACHEL EPP
Abstract: Maternity is becoming a visible presence on the contemporary art scene. Around the world, artists like Rineke Dijkstra, Katharina Bosse, Maru Ituarte, Mariángeles Soto-Díaz, Zorka Project, Kate Kretz, Gail Rebhan, and Jess Dobkin address pregnancy, lactation, the postpartum body, the mother-child relationship, and societal expectations of mothers. Some creative practitioners use their maternal position as a point of activist departure, turning to social and political engagement to effect cultural change for parents and children.¹ While many artist-mothers have confronted cultural taboos to speak more fully to their own lived experiences and to challenge heteronormative, raced, and classed expectations of motherhood,
Two Mums and Some Babies: from:
Natal Signs
Author(s) DWYER ANGELA
Abstract: Gay and lesbian parents are a new front in parenting research. Coining the term
lesbian baby boom, Morris, Balsam and Rothblum indicate the numbers of lesbian mothers has increased rapidly over the last two decades. Following that paper, there has been a good deal of research that explores the experience of lesbians as parents. Much of this research (see Lubbe; Tasker and Patterson) has focused primarily on family identity. In one study, Lubbe found that the children of lesbian parents were aware of their non-standard familial identity and its impact on society. These children were aware that the reactions from
Intersectional Interventions in Global Cinema: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SAYED ASMA
Abstract: Since the advent of silent film, motherhood has been represented on the big screen across the globe. Mother characters populating the backdrops of cinematic narratives are noteworthy both for what they reflect about culture and for the ways that they affect cultural attitudes and ideas about the roles, relationships, and potentialities of women and mothers. The screen often echoes unrealistic expectations that too often become the model to which women hold themselves and to which their societies likewise measure them. Films are both a product and replication of socio-cultural and political shifts. Examining films from a range of countries and
1. Obāchan’s Garden: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) WILSON SHEENA
Abstract: Mothers and the experience of motherhood have been historically overwritten by patriarchal practices that accord some lives and certain life stories greater value. Fiction and non-fiction stories by and about mothers—particularly the stories of poor women, working women, and women of colour—have gone largely unrecorded. What remains are patriarchal daughter-centred stories of young women who move from one male protector to another: father to husband to son. As a response to this history of literary and cultural production, the telling of mother-stories can be reclaimed as an act of resistance, whether mothers are telling their own stories, or
6. Disrupting and Containing Motherhood: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) DAVIDSON RACHEL D.
Abstract: Instead of feeling excitement or joy upon hearing she is pregnant, Jenna Hunterson, the protagonist of Adrienne Shelly’s 2007 independent film,
Waitress, resents her unborn child. In the above internal narration, Jenna expresses anger towards her child after her abusive husband finds the pile of cash that she had hoped to use to run away and start a new life; he uses it to purchase a crib. Jenna’s character inWaitressstands in stark contrast to the prevailing cultural ideal of “the good mother” stereotype because she is unapologetically anti-motherhood. Similarly, Ray, the leading figure in Courtney Hunt’s 2008 independent
7. Mother as Failed Communist Muttirepublik in Wolfgang Becker’s Good Bye Lenin! from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) WANSINK SUSAN
Abstract: The berlin wall and life behind the iron curtain remain popular topics for German filmmakers. Communist East Germany actually only came into existence after the end of World War II, when Germany was divided into four separate zones, each occupied by Great Britain, France, the United States, and the Soviet Union. In 1949, the Soviets declared the Soviet zone its own country, and the German Democratic Republic (GDR) was born, becoming a satellite country of the Soviet Union. The communist government was a dictatorship, in which the people were denied rights such as the freedom of speech, assembly, and press.
8. “Mother-Subjects” in Canadian Film: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) HAWKES TERRI
Abstract: From my standpoint as an academic, cinema and theatre practitioner, and mother, I am disturbed by what I perceive to be a lack of representation of mothers as central characters in cinema and theatre. In “The Invisibility of Motherhood in Toronto Theatre: The Triple Threat,” I looked at the employment experiences of seven “mother-actors” in the Greater Toronto Area and identified their uniquely inherent challenges in maintaining acting careers within the patriarchal institutions of motherhood (Rich 13), theatre, film, and television (Hawkes 247-269). I examined current maternal theories that can explain what may have contributed to this mother invisibility: shift
9. Fortune Favours the Brave: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) MARTINEZ MELISSA DEMI
Abstract: The 2012 pixar-animated film
Braveexplores the struggles mothers often experience in raising daughters while attempting to negotiate competing interests and societal demands. The mother, Queen Elinor is determined to teach her eldest child Merida the skills that she needs to survive and succeed in the patriarchal culture of tenth-century Scotland. Elinor’s attempts to train her sixteen-year-old daughter to think and act “like a lady” conflict with Merida’s athleticism, youthful exuberance, and liberated visions of self-determination and independence. Brave focuses on the conflicts that Elinor and Merida experience in acting on their divergent worldviews. The female-centred storyline—with a primary
14. Maligned Mothers: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) SANTOS CRISTINA
Abstract: In her book
the monster within:The Hidden Side of Motherhood, practising psychoanalyst Barbara Almond explores the idea of “maternal ambivalence” as the “monster within.” She takes an interdisciplinary approach, pulling from her own medical cases, personal experiences, and literary examples to discuss the “darkside to womanhood” (xiii), when mothering and/or motherhood is not automatically self-fulfilling for a woman (3). Socio-cultural conditions create what Paul Ricoeur might call¹ a “prefiguration” and idealization of the self-sacrificing mother figure that lives (and dies) for her children. But what happens when women are unwilling or unable to fulfill this unobtainable ideal of the
16. Indian Cine-maa: from:
Screening Motherhood in Contemporary World Cinema
Author(s) JHAMTANI RAMITA
Abstract: For over a hundred years, Bollywood—India’s Hindi language cinema—has cradled and nurtured the dreams, hopes, and fantasies of its growing audiences. Amid the glorious, larger than life portrayals of human relationships, mighty heroes, complex plots, perfect endings, myriad of traditions, and the glitter and glamour, stands the quintessential
maa—the venerated mother figure, who has come a long way in the past hundred years. While the mother figure has indeed undergone many transformations in popular Bollywood films from the 1950s to the present day, a critical analysis of the celebrated mother characters reveals that regardless of the characterization,
Book Title: Red Legacies in China-Cultural Afterlives of the Communist Revolution
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Zhang Enhua
Abstract: What has contemporary China inherited from its revolutionary past? How do the realities and memories, aesthetics and practices of the Mao era still reverberate in the post-Mao cultural landscape? The essays in this volume propose “red legacies" as a new critical framework from which to examine the profusion of cultural productions and afterlives of the communist revolution in order to understand China’s continuities and transformations from socialism to postsocialism. Organized into five parts—red foundations, red icons, red classics, red bodies, and red shadows—the book’s interdisciplinary contributions focus on visual and performing arts, literature and film, language and thought, architecture, museums, and memorials. Mediating at once unfulfilled ideals and unmourned ghosts across generations, red cultural legacies suggest both inheritance and debt, and can be mobilized to support as well as to critique the status quo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1sq5t95
INTRODUCTION: from:
Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Li Jie
Abstract: As Chinese schoolchildren continue to sing the revolutionary anthem “Song of the Young Pioneers,” what
arethe legacies of the Communist Revolution in today’s China?¹ The celebrations of the sixtieth anniversary of the founding of the People’s Republic of China (PRC) in 2009 and the ninetieth anniversary of the founding of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) in 2011 seemed to be culminations of a recent official and popular revival of so-called red culture, wherein cultural artifacts associated with the Communist Revolution received makeovers as “red classics,” “red songs,” “red art,” “red collections,” “red restaurants,” and “red tourism.” Yet after nearly
SEVEN POST–SOCIALIST REALISM IN CHINESE CINEMA from:
Red Legacies in China
Author(s) McGrath Jason
Abstract: In the climactic moment of the 1955 film
Dong Cunrui董存瑞, a classic war film from Mao-era China, the eponymous hero commits a suicide bombing to destroy an enemy machine gun nest that threatens a wave of attacking Communist troops. The scene brings to the fore two notable aspects of Chinese socialist realist cinema: its melodramatic romanticism and its propensity to indulge in formalist techniques during moments of maximum emotional and ideological impact.¹ In this scene, editing is particularly foregrounded; the seven shots preceding the explosion take approximately sixteen seconds in all, for a quick editing rate of just over
NINE “HUMAN WAVE TACTICS”: from:
Red Legacies in China
Author(s) Rodekohr Andy
Abstract: Under the creative direction of master filmmaker Zhang Yimou 张艺谋, the 2008 Beijing Olympic Games Opening Ceremony drew on China’s rich cultural resources and seemingly unlimited assets in capital and manpower to exhibit an unprecedented visual and technological extravaganza. Though it won high praise and commendations for its spectacular achievement, the huge crowd formations that structured the narrative of the exhibition unsettled many observers. Zhang’s use of such “human wave tactics” (
renhai zhanshu人海战术) not only partakes of the global imaginary of masses and multitudes made emblematic during the twentieth century’s “era of crowds” but also evokes the powerful and
2. What, Where? from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: A few remarks on textual selection, then. To continue a theme from the preceding discussion of scientism and
On Beauty, a central anxiety for academic literary studies in the contemporary era of scientific dominance pertains to the extent to which groupings, taxonomies, and classifications are methodologically derived and how far they help us to understand literary production. How sound are our methods of textual selection? Are there a set of scientific methods that could aid us in the selection of texts? These questions are important because, regardless of the fact that many defences of the humanities resist the language of
5. Sincerity and Truth from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: Although slightly older than the commonly-supposed professionalising Arnoldian origin, the discipline of English studies is relatively young, having come into being as “English language and literature” in 1828 at the University of London (now UCL rather than the federated research university that currently takes the name University of London).¹ Over the course of the discipline’s short history, however, a range of aspects has remained ever-present and unsatisfactorily resolved under the heading of ‘value’. As John Hartley traces it, these debates can be subdivided into three phases (simplifying for reasons of comprehensibility). The first is to chart the lineage of Matthew
7. Genre and Class from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: In the preceding parts of this book, I have demonstrated several reasons why contemporary fiction may choose to represent the academy, mostly focusing on the fact that in contemporary metafiction, the critical space is shared by the academy and fiction. This results in a struggle for the right to express critique and then a legitimation battle. Beginning with Tom McCarthy’s oblique engagement with the academy through his public intellectualism and canny understanding of generic conventions, I suggested that C, although not a work that directly depicts academia, is a novel tightly bound to formalist criticism and canon formation and a
8. Discipline and Publish from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: As mentioned in the opening to the final part of this book, succinct critiques of teleology find their apex in Theodor Adorno’s well-known opening to
Negative Dialecticswhere he writes that philosophy lives on because the moment of its realisation was missed.¹ This statement — a clear reference to Marx’s proclamation in theTheses on Feuerbach(1845/1888) that philosophers have so far only interpreted the world, but that the point is to change it — came at a time when it seemed that the potential for revolutionary action was past. In his perpetual pessimism, Adorno advocates for a return to
9. Conclusion from:
Literature Against Criticism
Abstract: Throughout this book I have demonstrated a variety of ways in which the university — and specifically university English — is used and abused in works of contemporary fiction. While far from a conclusive study, the representative range of texts here examined leads to several conclusions about the interaction between the novel and the academy. Roughly speaking, these findings can be schematised into aesthetic and political critique, legitimation, and disciplinary feedback loops.
2. Channeled, Reformulated, and Controlled: from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Interpretation […] presupposes a discrepancy between the clear meaning of the text and the demands of (later) readers. It seeks to resolve that discrepancy. The situation is that for some reason a text has become unacceptable; yet it cannot be discarded. Interpretation is a radical strategy for conserving an old text, which is thought too precious to repudiate, by revamping it. The interpreter, without actually erasing or rewriting the text, is altering
Epilogue. from:
Love and its Critics
Abstract: Over fifty years ago, Susan Sontag described “the project of interpretation” as “largely reactionary, stifling”, and placed it in the context of “a culture whose […] dilemma is the hypertrophy of the intellect at the expense of energy and sensual capacity”, before concluding that “interpretation is the revenge of the intellect upon art”.¹ The situation does not seem to have improved in the intervening half-century. As Martin Paul Eve has very recently observed, “traditional literary criticism
always coercestexts into new narrative forms”, as “its practitioners [read] to seek case studies suited for exegetic purpose”.² To come back to the
GENOCIDIO, CIENCIA, ETNO-SUICIDIO: from:
Historia / Fin de siglo
Author(s) Rabasa José
Abstract: Historias de indios (siempre un grupo específico) que participan en campañas genocidas de otros indios (siempre un grupo diferente) abundan en la colonización de las Américas.¹ Mencionamos este hecho para deshacernos de entrada de señalamientos que establecen que los españoles no deben tener el título exclusivo de la conquista de las Américas. Sin la participación activa de los indios la conquista hubiera sido una empresa ilusiva. Y no existe razón alguna por la que deberíamos esperar que los indios (de nuevo, siempre un grupo específico) fueran solidarios con otros indios. Nuestro objetivo no es diluir la culpabilidad, sino plantear la
CAPÍTULO I REALIDAD Y AMBIGÜEDAD from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Otros trabajos han propuesto los recursos de integración, desintegración e intensificación como los instrumentos idóneos para caracterizar el mundo de
Pedro Páramo, y tienen razón; solo que a la hora de aplicarlos vemos que lo que se integra son elementos que
CAPÍTULO III PROCEDIMIENTOS EXPRESIVOS Y AMBIGÜEDAD from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Una novela como
Pedro Páramo, por las características de lo que contiene (entrevero de mito y realidad y el alto coeficiente de ambigüedad que esto desprende), necesariamente ha de operar con numerosos cambios semánticos para aprehender y encarnar la forma de su contenido. No es extraño, entonces, que en sus procedimientos expresivos abunden las transcodificaciones estructuradas desde asociaciones de sentido que operan por semejanza (metáfora) y por contigüidad (metonimia).
CAPÍTULO III DEL LADO DE ACÁ: from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: En esta parte se acentúan los rasgos que caracterizan a este personaje en «el lado de allá». Hay una curva descendente que lleva al protagonista «cuesta abajo en la rodada», o para trabajar con textos de la novela, podemos decir que Oliveira reconoce, como el vals: «mi diagnóstico es sencillo: sé que no tengo remedio». En efecto, vemos que en Buenos Aires no ha remediado su egocentrismo, su unilateralidad dialéctica, su búsqueda sin norte y sin sur, y su desarraigo y que, poco a poco,
la no-vía lo acerca a la solución de la no-solución de su problema (como no
CAPÍTULO II PRECARIEDAD Y ESTRUCTURA SOCIAL from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: En esta novela, en sentir de Harss, los personajes son colectivos, representan clases y no individuos. Tanto es así que a veces piensan algunos que se estropea su consistencia de personajes concretos y se pasa a la calidad casi de personaje-tipo, abstracto, con perjuicio de la raigambre existencial que debe originar su fuerza.
CAPÍTULO III PRECARIEDAD Y PERSONAJES from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Examinadas las clases o grupos sociales representados en la novela, nos interesa practicar una cala en los personajes a la luz de la teoría del encuentro como factor determinante de la densidad humana, partiendo de la base de que en las interferencias de ámbitos se produce la decantación de la persona, su perfeccionamiento, o, en el caso del desencuentro, su vaciamiento o destrucción.
CAPÍTULO IV HISPANOAMÉRICA Y LA INSULARIDAD from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: El abrirse y cerrarse es un movimiento pendular característico de nuestra realidad hispanoamericana. El desmerecerse ante sí mismo y ante los demás lleva a desorbitar las dimensiones de los otros, los que son lejanos, y quienes se presienten extraños. No ante los suyos, sus iguales, a los que desmerece mediante la envidia y el menosprecio, sino ante los que no son como él, ante los que presume superiores. Mentalidad adolescente, el hispanoamericano siente compulsivamente la necesidad de autoafirmación y elige modelos inalcanzables que desde arriba lo conformen.
CAPÍTULO III EL ACONTECER Y LO FABULANTE from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: El espacio reactualiza un paisaje arquetípico sobre el que la tradicionalidad oral ha impreso apenas modificaciones. El espacio de
Cien años de soledadreedita los relatos de infancia, reeditando a su vez el itinerario que hubo de hacer en el tiempo primordial el héroe al emprender el camino que lo llevaría a la plenitud, a la felicidad. Así
CAPÍTULO IV AMÉRICA from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Una segunda característica detectable en las clases populares es una
VI PARTE Perspectivas Complementarias from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: El gesto es simbólico de la actitud frente al cosmos, a la civilización, a sí mismo y, en él, al mexicano. Está presente en la novela el sentimiento de inferioridad del que hablara Samuel Ramos (1976: 111). Coincidente en esto con, José Donoso dice:
VII PARTE Conclusiones from:
Hispanoamérica en diez novelas
Abstract: Una fuerza la protagoniza lo racional y sus expresiones positivistas y neopositivistas que intenta estructurar aquella realidad mediante la aplicación más o menos ceñida de visiones foráneas. La otra fuerza actúa desde un trasfondo mítico y está constituida por un saber tradicional al que concurren vertientes occidentales y orientales que se encabalgan con la cosmovisión indígena.
THREE Morality from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: According to the British criminologist Anthony Bottoms (2002: 24), ‘if they are true to their calling, all criminologists have to be interested in morality’. Moral philosophy, or ethics, is concerned with how we live and how we ought to live with one another. It considers what is good or bad, as well as deontic judgements of rightness, wrongness, obligation, requirement, reason for doing and what
oughtto be. Such concerns should be central criminological concerns. Criminologists assert that crime – or harm or deviancy – is a social construction and ask what it is about such actions (or inactions) that makes them
FOUR Aesthetics and crime from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: There is a picnic bench on the shore of Loch Morlich in Scotland with a panoramic view of the wild Cairngorm mountains, one of the most beautiful views that I know. I may even go so far as to say that the landscape is sublime. But when I say the view is beautiful or sublime, what do I mean? Similarly, what makes something stand out as good art, or what characteristics make an everyday object or encounter a beautiful contribution to contemporary life? These are the concerns of aesthetics. In this chapter the relevance of aesthetics to criminology is explored.
FIVE Order and disorder from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: In 2002 an episode of
The Simpsonswas broadcast in which Bart Simpson had an infectious illness forcing him to live in a clear plastic bubble. In one scene Bart was told off for slurping his soup. Bart’s reply was a simple, “My bubble, my rules”. His response neatly encapsulated the ethical egoism of late modern individualism, where the self is supreme and often blind to its impact on others. According to Michael Hechter and Christine Horne (2009) the basic problem of social order is how this individualism can be reconciled with the necessities of living a social existence: The
SIX Rules from:
Philosophical criminology
Abstract: In political and policy rhetoric there is much talk of ‘playing by the rules’. For instance, in the US Barak Obama declared in his 2010 State of the Union address that, ‘we should … enforce our laws, and ensure that everyone who plays by the rules can contribute to our economy and enrich our nation’. Similarly, in the UK during his successful 2010 election campaign David Cameron claimed, ‘We’re fighting the fact that people who do the right thing, who work hard, who save, who play by the rules get hit by the system’. Six years earlier Tony Blair (2004)
Book Title: Researching the lifecourse-Critical reflections from the social sciences
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Hardill Irene
Abstract: Researching the Lifecourse features methods linking time, space and mobilities and provides practitioners with practical detail in each chapter. It covers the full lifecourse and includes innovative methods and case study examples from different European and North American contexts.The lifecourse perspective continues to be an important subject in the social sciences. Researching the Lifecourse offers a distinctive approach in that it truly covers the lifecourse (childhood, adulthood and older age), focusing on innovative methods and case study examples from a variety of European and North American contexts. This original approach connects theory and practice from across the social sciences by situating methodology and research design within relevant conceptual frameworks. This diverse collection features methods that are linked to questions of time, space and mobilities while providing practitioners with practical detail in each chapter.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89635
ONE Introduction from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Hardill Irene
Abstract: Lifecourse research is undertaken by researchers from across the social sciences, often working in a multidisciplinary context, using the lifecourse as an underpinning concept and/or a method of study. In this book we aim to represent the diversity of lifecourse methodologies employed in the social sciences, as well as having a concern for epistemology – how different knowledge claims are connected to our research practices. Moreover, the contributors in this edited book emphasise how different theoretical frameworks and positionality affect the research process – each contributor examines the challenges of their research design and how they worked through methodological issues
TWO Time and the lifecourse: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Neale Bren
Abstract: For groups, as well as for individuals, life itself means to separate and to be re-united, to change form and condition, to die and to be reborn. It is to act and to cease, to wait and rest, and then to begin acting again but in a different way. And there are always new thresholds to cross… (van Gennep, 1960 [1909], p 189)
FOUR A restudy of young workers from the 1960s: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) O’Connor Henrietta
Abstract: Since 2000 we have been undertaking a detailed restudy of Norbert Elias’s previously lost ‘Adjustment of Young Workers to Work Situations and Adult Roles’ (1962–4) project.¹ This project was not only important because of its links to Norbert Elias or because it was one of the largest studies of school to work transition at that time (see Goodwin and O’Connor, 2005a), but also because there are very few ‘classic’ studies from the post war period that focused on the English East Midlands and a key centre of engineering, textiles and clothing and footwear manufacture. As part of the restudy
SIX Life geohistories: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Falola Bisola
Abstract: One day I followed Stephen around school as he rushed to get his teachers to sign a permission form for a field trip to a nearby college. As we hustled from classroom to classroom, he started to narrate his actions:
EIGHT Keeping in touch: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Bowlby Sophie
Abstract: This chapter is about a research project on the friendship afforded to women in their fifties by members of their ‘personal communities’ and their interactions with information and communication technologies (ICT). The research examined the informal social interactions of women in ‘midlife’ in the context of their lifecourse trajectory to date and their anticipations of the future. It focused, in particular, on the time–space context of these interactions, exploring the time–space scheduling of ‘keeping in touch’ and the real and virtual spaces within which these social interactions took place. The empirical research was carried out in the summer
NINE Triangulation with softGIS in lifecourse research: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Schmidt-Thomé Kaisa
Abstract: In this chapter I focus on the possibilities that embodied knowledge opens up when undertaking research on the lifecourse. Shotter (2009) argues that social theorists often overlook embodied knowledge as they evaluate human action through causes (emphasising structures) or reasons (emphasising agency). In my work on ‘geobiographies’ I connect the highly contextual and unique with lifecourse information, specifically relating current everyday life (especially outdoor activities) with the habitualities developed over a participant’s lifecourse. I examine embodied knowledge as a joint outcome of the lifecourse and its geographical context – space and place. In this chapter I use geo-coordinates as a
TEN Using a life history approach within transnational ethnography: from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Lee Jane Yeonjae
Abstract: Since early the 2000s, the number of long-term immigrants to New Zealand deciding to return to their homelands has increased. Simultaneously, Korea has made changes to its residency policy in an attempt to attract ‘global talent’ back to its shores. The result has been an increase in the number of overseas Koreans returning from their emigration destinations. The processes driving this movement and the experience(s) of returnees on resettlement have received little attention in research.
TWELVE Event history approach to life spaces in French-speaking research from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Imbert Christophe
Abstract: The study of spatial mobility in European social sciences suffers from institutional and thematic segmentation (daily mobility, tourism, residential mobility, migration). However, a growing number of studies have shown that a comprehensive, linked approach to mobility is an effective way of capturing hybrid practices that fall between residential and daily mobility (such as multiple residences and long-distance commuting: Dupont and Dureau, 1994; Lévy and Dureau, 2002; Kaufmann and Vincent-Geslin, 2012). This approach can be used to focus more on the multi-local dimension of individuals’ spatial practices across the lifecourse. Living in more than one place at once is a topic
THIRTEEN Using an intersectional lifecourse approach to understand the migration of the highly skilled from:
Researching the lifecourse
Author(s) Kelly Melissa
Abstract: Understanding why people decide to move is a complicated enterprise (Bertaux-Wiame, 1979; Ni Laoire, 2000). Although migration may be a straightforward demographic event, the context in which it occurs and the mechanisms underlying it are often highly complex, and require careful study. To begin with, it is important to consider the individual role of the migrant. To what extent do people move freely from one place to another, and to what extent are their movements impacted by structural forces and constraints? Traditional models used for understanding migration decision making have typically emphasised
eitheragencyorstructure but seldom both; moreover,
ONE Retiring to the Costas: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: This book focuses on the lives of a group of women from the UK who moved to the Costa Blanca¹ in Spain in retirement. We follow their journeys as they seek ‘community’ and belonging in a world characterised by rapid social change. Imbued with nostalgic yearning, community is hailed as a panacea to the ills of modernity and as a representation of social continuity. Nostalgia denotes the mourning of a lost home or place and a lost time – and in this way – the search for community and belonging can also be understood as a quest for another epoch.
FOUR Boundary spanning and reconstitution: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: Arguably, all migration is about improving one’s life in some way and the women featured here moved to Spain to enjoy a new lifestyle in retirement. For them, a ‘better life’ involved regaining community and a sense of belonging which had been lost in the UK. Community has been identified as a factor that influences the quality of later life (Conway, 2003) and lamenting the loss of community is a key theme underpinning
SIX Living in Spain: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: In the previous chapter I focused on how my research participants felt dislocated from and in the UK and how their sense of belonging was fractured. Women experienced disengagement from the UK as a place, or space, and also as temporal disjuncture since they also rejected the UK in the present. Age and ethnic positionalities, too, shaped feelings of disruption regarding being on the margins through retirement and the presence of ‘others’ through immigration to the UK. I unravelled the multiple motivations for women’s migration, taking account of structural forces, their unique biographies and agency and positionalities through structurally analysing
NINE Locating ‘home’ and community: from:
Retiring to Spain
Abstract: Throughout this book we have followed women’s migration journeys across space and time as they spanned and reconstituted boundaries. Beginning with their pre-migration lives – characterised for many by fractured belonging in the UK – upper and more proximate structures enabled and facilitated their agency in moving to Spain in retirement. We have also seen that women’s positionalities and unique biographies are also significant in shaping migration choices, decision-making processes and their post-migration lives. I framed divergent migration trajectories in relation to two plot typologies: the quest and voyage and return. Those women who ultimately chose to remain in Spain
Book Title: Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Gilleard Chris
Abstract: How do we sustain agency and identity amidst the frailty of advanced old age? What role does care play in this process? Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by age and infirmity. It begins with a theoretical examination of the fourth age, interrogating notions of agency, identity and personhood, as well as the impact of frailty, abjection and ‘othering’. It then applies this analysis to issues of care. Exploring our collective hopes and fears concerning old age and the ends of people’s lives, this is essential reading on one of the biggest social issues of our time.Pushing forward new sociological theory, this book explores the theoretical and practical issues raised by ageing, and the associated problems of mental and physical frailty in later life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89766
FIVE Understanding abjection from:
Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: If frailty has come to signify the vulnerability of older people, abjection reveals the distaste associated with such frailty. In the past, as long as charity was in part a matter of conferring spiritual benefits onto potential donors, the cause and character of the recipients’ impoverishment was largely irrelevant. When poverty and dependency represented the collective fate of so many of the common population, the presence of so many poor provided a ready means by which elites could add spiritual value to their existing material resources (Himmelfarb, 1984; Fraser and Gordon, 1994; Jütte, 1994). This pre-modern ‘sacral’ view of poverty
SEVEN Care work from:
Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: In the previous chapter we explored care and its generic realisation in a variety of social relations. Although care can be viewed through the lens of moral philosophy – as a moral duty that is realised through a set of practices embodying distinct virtues – care itself, we argued, can only ever be socially realised within particular forms of relationship. Questions such as who should receive and who should provide care, how and where care should be delivered, and what care means to those who are carers and to those who are cared for will elicit different answers at different
EIGHT Care without limits from:
Personhood, identity and care in advanced old age
Abstract: In the previous two chapters we addressed the nature of care, conceptualised variously as a labour of love, a contractual relationship, a professional practice or as a moral and material imperative. While we have represented the person being cared for as already old, frail and potentially abject, we have recognised that the degree of any person’s ‘frailure’ can be magnified or minimised by the narratives and practices of care within which their frailty is embedded. While pervasively present within any care relationship, the social imaginary of the fourth age can be challenged, kept at bay or actively resisted, just as
Book Title: Biography and social exclusion in Europe-Experiences and life journeys
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Torrabadella Laura
Abstract: Throughout Europe, standardised approaches to social policy and practice are being radically questioned and modified. Beginning from the narrative detail of individual lives, this book re-thinks welfare predicaments, emphasising gender, generation, ethnic and class implications of economic and social deregulation.Based on 250 life-story interviews in seven European Union countries, Biography and social exclusion in Europe: analyses personal struggles against social exclusion to illuminate local milieus and changing welfare regimes and contexts; points to challenging new agendas for European politics and welfare, beyond the rhetoric of communitarianism and the New Deal; vividly illustrates the lived experience and environmental complexity working for and against structural processes of social exclusion; refashions the interpretive tradition as a teaching and research tool linking macro and micro realities. · · Students, academic teachers and professional trainers, practitioners, politicians, policy makers and researchers in applied and comparative welfare fields will all benefit from reading this book.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t8982m
TWO Suffering the fall of the Berlin Wall: from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Torrabadella Laura
Abstract: The research work carried out by Sostris was based on the shared assumption that our subjects were active and resourceful individuals dealing with all kinds of challenges. This chapter puts this basic assumption to the test. Nicolás from Catalonia and Heike from eastern Germany, two well-educated young adults who, geographically speaking, happen to live at opposite ends of the EU, have both come to a dead end in their life journeys – a ‘biographical blockage’. Although we found it demanding enough to try to understand the processes that brought these two young people to this point, we also wanted to
EIGHT Love and emancipation from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Thorsell Birgitta
Abstract: In this chapter, women’s identities are conceptualised in terms of two poles – love and emancipation. In the Sostris case studies of women from varied backgrounds, these polarities were frequently seen to interact in the women’s lives, to the point of cross-fertilisation, leading to new orientations. We have chosen the cases of three women whose circumstances are in some respects strikingly similar and in others notably different. Together these cases indicate new patterns in contemporary European societies: the crossing of cultural, social and geographical borders, as well as the growing importance of emancipation for providing a sense of security relative
NINE Female identities in late modernity from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Spanò Antonella
Abstract: The condition of women has undergone impressive changes since the late 1960s. A series of interconnected changes have made possible a new way of being a woman: the new consumer culture, television, the technological transformation of domestic activities, mass schooling, the new youth culture, the political and cultural environment around 1968, and the feminist struggle that brought abortion, contraception and divorce to the forefront of public debate.
THIRTEEN Second-generation transcultural lives from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Chamberlayne Prue
Abstract: Djamillah’s extract may lead you to
FOURTEEN Biographical work and agency innovation: from:
Biography and social exclusion in Europe
Author(s) Wengraf Tom
Abstract: A colleague once recalled his satisfaction when, after weeks of painstaking advocacy for a recently bereaved woman, he had helped her to resolve her housing problems. But then, on the eve of gaining her new tenancy, she killed herself. (Froggett, 2002, pp 9-10)
Book Title: Biographical methods and professional practice-An international perspective
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Apitzsch Ursula
Abstract: The turn to biographical methods in social science is invigorating the relationship between policy and practice. This book shows how biographical methods can improve theoretical understanding of professional practice, as well as enrich the development of professionals, and promote more meaningful practitioner - service user relationships.This book uses a range of interpretive approaches to reveal the dynamics of service users' and professionals' individual experiences and life-worlds. From their research the contributors show how biographical methods can improve theoretical understanding of professional practice, as well as enrich the learning and development of professionals, and promote more meaningful and creative practitioner - service user relationships. The book: · reviews applications of biographical methods in both policy and practice in a range of professional contexts, from health and social care to education and employment; · explores the impact of social change in three main arenas - transformation from Eastern to Western types of society in Europe, major shifts in social and welfare principles, experiences of immigration and of new cultural diversities - on professional practice; · critically evaluates subjective and reflexive processes in interactions between researchers, practitioners and users of services; · considers the institutional arrangements and cultural contexts which support effective and sensitive interventions; · draws on actual projects and tracks reflection, progress and outcomes. With contributions from leading international experts, it provides a valuable comparative perspective. Researchers, policy analysts and practitioners, postgraduate students, teachers and trainers will find this book a stimulating read.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89d2j
ONE Introduction from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Chamberlayne Prue
Abstract: This volume is concerned with the relevance of biographical methods and the contextualised understanding of human agency, as keys in professional interventions. Its interest lies in the usefulness of biographical methods in investigating and generating new forms of social practice and in gaining fresh insights into institutional processes. The contributions to this volume portray ways in which biographical methods have been (or are starting to be) applied in various aspects of professional training as well as in partnership with users of services. The volume evaluates biographical practice against a mapping of practitioner and user positioning and experience. It also does
THREE Balancing precarious work, entrepreneurship and a new gendered professionalism in migrant self-employment from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Apitzsch Ursula
Abstract: The structural crisis experienced generally in post-industrial society since the last third of the 20th century has been characterised by the continuous dismantling of jobs and workplaces, with no compensation in sight. This has prompted some intellectuals and policy makers to speak in terms of the ‘economically redundant’, in much the same way that industrialisation discourse of the 19th century spoke of a ‘surplus population’¹.
EIGHT Professional choices between private and state positions in Russia’s transformation from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Semenova Victoria
Abstract: The impact of organisational structures is a much-discussed issue in Russia and elsewhere today; for example, state-run organisations, international companies, or small private firms on professional hierarchies¹. Positions are often ranked in relation to salary levels, social functions (such as service orientation and responsibility), issues of autonomy and control, type of management (such as degrees of hierarchy), and systems of social security (such as sickness and pension benefits) (Parsons, 1964; Balzer, 1996).
TEN Biographical reflections on the problem of changing violent men from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Gadd David
Abstract: After a lengthy period of neglect within criminology, the study of men’s violence towards female partners gained a high profile during the 1980s as a consequence of feminist activism and feminist research with victims and survivors. Attention was drawn to the pervasive and extensive nature of violence against women, the greater danger posed by men that women know (as opposed to male strangers), the continuous relationship between physical and sexual assaults and emotional abuse, and the criminal, sometimes fatal, consequences of this abuse (Dobash and Dobash, 1980; Kelly, 1988; Hester et al, 1995). Yet, it was not until the mid-
TWELVE Ethical aspects of biographical interviewing and analysis from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kaźmierska Kaja
Abstract: It may seem obvious to say that biographical research differs from all other sociological research. The differences apply to research techniques, procedures of analysing biographical material and something that can be called a ‘style of work’, which covers the very time-consuming research stages of material collection and analysis. These and many other specific features of biographical research are grounded in theoretical and methodological assumptions which vary for particular types of biographical work. However, the outstanding characteristic of this kind of work is that the research material is biography.
FOURTEEN ‘Bucking and kicking’: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Gunaratnam Yasmin
Abstract: Concerns about how to work with and across differences of ethnicity, culture, language and religion are central to discussions on policy and practice development in the health and social care services in Britain (Alexander, 1999), where references to the need for cultural ‘awareness’, ‘sensitivity’ and ‘competence’ are commonplace. These concerns have taken on further meaning with the renewed attention to ‘institutional racism’ (Macpherson, 1999) in public sector services, and with the extension of race relations legislation (2000 Race Relations [Amendment] Act) to these services. However, despite the increasing attention being given to the need for culturally sensitive and anti-discriminatory professional
SIXTEEN ‘It’s in the way that you use it’: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Kyllönen Riitta
Abstract: How do social workers use biographies in designing social welfare intervention? How can biographies be useful in analyses of the ideological dimensions of welfare practices? These are questions that I will elucidate in this chapter. My discussion is based on a study that I conducted of how Venetian social welfare services interpret their lone mother recipients’ needs and respond to them¹. First, I locate social welfare services in the feminine subsystem of welfare programmes and discuss how the feminine subtext defines the status of its beneficiaries. I then go on to delineate the analytical framework adopted to examine discursive and
SEVENTEEN Interpreting the needs of homeless men: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Schlücker Karin
Abstract: Staff members of an advice centre for homeless men were seeking to improve the effectiveness of their service by investigating the ‘needs’ of service users, actual or potential¹. I was approached by one of my students to see if I could help set up and conduct a project without incurring high financial cost, and so the study was initiated within the framework of a university training programme in qualitative research². Exceptionally, the research was set up as a supervised students’ project. In weekly meetings, students planned each step of their research design with their two lecturers and reflected on their
NINETEEN Narratives, community organisations and pedagogy from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Mortlock Belinda
Abstract: This chapter engages with three categories of narrative: stories about teaching a social research course; students’ stories about their practice as researchers; and the stories of 42 women and men working for community organisations in a city in New Zealand. These stories emerge from a teaching programme in which final-year sociology students are involved in biographical research. Students write a life-story narrative drawn from multiple interviews with a single narrator, as well as a research journal, in which they offer an autobiographical account of their research process. They also submit an analytical essay; that is, a sociological commentary that locates
TWENTY Doctors on an edge: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) West Linden
Abstract: This chapter derives from in-depth, longitudinal, collaborative and what is termed auto/biographical research among 25 general practitioners (GPs), or family physicians, working in demanding inner-city contexts, including inner London (West, 2001). The research focuses on the learning, role and wellbeing of such GPs during a time of changing roles and expectations, including within the management of healthcare in Britain, and a period of growing criticism over performance and levels of accountability. The serial killer Dr Harold Shipman has replaced, at least in part, the heroic Dr Kildare in the popular mind, and stories of doctors’ mistakes far outweigh the triumphs
TWENTY ONE Intercultural perspectives and professional practice in the university: from:
Biographical methods and professional practice
Author(s) Herrschaft Felicia
Abstract: Attracting students from other countries and world regions has been an objective for German universities for some time, and more recent policies have facilitated the admission of foreign students. Their attendance is understood as contributing towards internationally recognised standards of education. It was always expected that graduates would act as multipliers upon their return to their countries of origin, although currently there is also a perceived need that for a competitive economy, highly qualified graduates should stay on in Germany to work. At the universities, new study courses and credit point systems have been established towards internationally comparable academic degrees.
Book Title: Localism and neighbourhood planning-Power to the people?
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Bradley Quintin
Abstract: A critical analysis of neighbourhood planning. Setting empirical evidence from the UK against international examples, the Editors engage in broader debates on the purposes of planning and the devolution of power to localities.Governments around the world are seeing the locality as a key arena for effecting changes in governance, restructuring state/civil society relations and achieving sustainable growth. This is the first book to critically analyse this shift towards localism in planning through exploring neighbourhood planning; one of the fastest growing, most popular and most contentious contemporary planning initiatives. Bringing together original empirical research with critical perspectives on governance and planning, the book engages with broader debates on the purposes of planning, the construction of active citizenship, the uneven geographies of localism and the extent to which power is actually being devolved. Setting this within an international context with cases from the US, Australia and France the book reflects on the possibilities for the emergence of a more progressive form of localism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1t89h5j
TWO Neighbourhood planning and the purposes and practices of localism from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Brownill Sue
Abstract: This chapter situates neighbourhood planning within the context of the evolution of community-led planning, citizen engagement and the shifting scales of spatial planning at the national and international levels. It critically examines neighbourhood planning as a key element of the localism that has evolved in England since 2010, outlining the contradictory propositions and powers at its heart. The chapter is in three parts. The first explores international trends in planning policy and governance and ways of characterising and understanding these, arguing that we have to move away from dichotomies to look at the complexities of the social, spatial and political
THREE Neighbourhoods, communities and the local scale from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Bradley Quintin
Abstract: This chapter situates international debates on participation and the widening of democratic engagement in the context of initiatives in the English planning system. It discusses the devolution of neighbourhood planning powers to local communities from 2011 and draws parallels with traditions of citizens’ control and direct action in land-use planning. It asks whether neighbourhood planning can be said to devolve some kind of ‘power to the people’. In doing so, the chapter argues for an understanding of participation not as a process of inclusion, but as a political practice founded on the inevitability of antagonism and conflict. It begins by
FIVE The uneven geographies of neighbourhood planning in England from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Parker Gavin
Abstract: While neighbourhood planning is still emerging as an active component of planning practice and as part of the wider project of planning reform taken up by the UK government since 2010, it is revealing to narrate how it has been designed and responded to. The political and theoretical implications of neighbourhood planning are clearly important to understand and reflect upon (see Bradley, 2015; Davoudi and Madanipour, 2015; Parker et al, 2015; see also Chapters Two and Nine), but this chapter focuses on how, where and on what basis this non-mandatory, voluntary approach to statutory planning has been taken up by
[Part Two: Introduction] from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Abstract: In Part Two, we explore the everyday practices of neighbourhood planning and the experiences of participants, and through these emerging histories, we investigate the key themes of power and empowerment, democratic renewal, and the remaking of planning and place. In the first three chapters, the emphasis is on the lived realities of neighbourhood planning, and the challenges, compromises and frustrations encountered in navigating the conflicting rationales of localism. These chapters introduce the range of actors engaged at the neighbourhood level and present divergent views and interpretations of the democratic practices of the locality, and the empowering potential of citizen planning.
SIX Developing a neighbourhood plan: from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Ludwig Carol
Abstract: This chapter provides empirical data from two of the earliest neighbourhood planning pathfinders in England: Upper Eden in rural Cumbria and North Shields on the Tyneside coast. It critically explores how each neighbourhood navigated the plan-making process and provides first-hand insights into the challenges faced by the first wave of pathfinder neighbourhoods to embark on the neighbourhood planning process. The unfolding experiences of the two areas reveal some important questions about the impact of the initial lack of clear policy guidance about neighbourhood planning, whether communities have the capacity to develop robust neighbourhood plans without the direct assistance of professional
SEVEN Voices from the neighbourhood: from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Brownill Sue
Abstract: In this chapter, we convey the everyday experiences of neighbourhood planning by bringing together the voices of a range of different actors involved in a variety of plans. We have presented these accounts as narratives without comment or interpretation as we believe they give a unique and powerful insight not only into the practical and emotional aspects of ‘doing’ neighbourhood planning, but also into the wider issues that this book is engaged with. Readers will be able to make connections between these accounts and the themes raised so far. The voices also give different perspectives reflecting the different interests engaged
EIGHT Participation and conflict in the formation of neighbourhood areas and forums in ‘super-diverse’ cities from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Colomb Claire
Abstract: Political philosophies and practices of ‘localism’ can lead to both progressive and regressive outcomes (Davoudi and Madanipour, 2013; Madanipour and Davoudi, 2015). This chapter discusses whether neighbourhood planning has the potential to bring about more inclusive forms of public participation in, and engagement with, planning (and thus potentially more progressive and socially equitable forms of urban development), or, on the contrary, to stir up social conflict. The social and spatial imaginary that underpins parish and neighbourhood planning entails the idea of a relatively homogeneous, stable, identifiable and self-conscious ‘local community’ that possesses a sense of neighbourhood belonging and attachment and
[Part Three: Introduction] from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Abstract: Part three provides an international perspective on the English experience of neighbourhood planning to amplify its themes and to place it in the context of debates about global shifts in the spatial scale of governance and empowerment. It discusses the concept of locality, identifies the further potential of community planning beyond land use and explores the impact of different state and governance structures on ideas of localism and devolution. This section reminds us that planning at the neighbourhood level can be assembled differently in different places and at different times. The need to avoid easy readings of universalised shifts towards
ELEVEN Community-based planning and localism in the devolved UK from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Pemberton Simon
Abstract: This chapter explores how community-based planning and localism are evolving differentially in the devolved UK. Devolution in the UK has been seen as integral to the government’s attempts to modernise the ways in which the public sector is organised and managed (Peel and Lloyd, 2007). However, it has been introduced in a relatively piecemeal manner, with reforms addressed to different purposes in separate parts of the UK, and with a subsequent differentiation in institutional governance arrangements (and associated executive, legislative and financial powers) that drew upon distinctive administrative practices that had previously accumulated in each territory (Pemberton and Lloyd, 2008).
TWELVE Citizen participation: from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Zetlaoui-Léger Jodelle
Abstract: Planning in France has always been a state affair. In the 17th century, a territorial administration was created to implement the rational organisation of space through centralised infrastructure as the cornerstone of the new-born nation state and, from the late 18th century, a vector for republican values (Foucault, 1975). In the late 20th century, despite a shift towards decentralisation that saw private actors taking a central role in urban planning, things remained fundamentally unchanged. By defining and implementing urban laws, including the process for the declaration of public utility, national and local government remain responsible for orchestrating spatial planning.¹ This
FOURTEEN The many lives of neighbourhood planning in the US: from:
Localism and neighbourhood planning
Author(s) Bennett Larry
Abstract: Neighbourhood planning in the US can be traced to the settlement house movement at the turn of the 20th century. Over the course of subsequent decades, the aims of and mechanisms to further neighbourhood planning have shifted substantially. Indeed, in the last quarter-century, new forms of local political and civic action have seemed to supplant neighbourhood
planningas a principal means of linking citizens and local government officials.
Book Title: Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Daruvala Susan
Abstract: This book explores the issues of nation and modernity in China by focusing on the work of Zhou Zuoren (1885-1967), one of the most controversial of modern Chinese intellectuals and brother of the writer Lu Xun. Zhou was radically at odds with many of his contemporaries and opposed their nation-building and modernization projects. Through his literary and aesthetic practice as an essayist, Zhou espoused a way of constructing the individual and affirming the individual’s importance in opposition to the normative national subject of most May Fourth reformers. Zhou’s work presents an alternative vision of the nation and questions the monolithic claims of modernity by promoting traditional aesthetic categories, the locality rather than the nation, and a literary history that values openness and individualism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj8w7
TWO Constructions of Culture from:
Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: On a late autumn evening in 1906, when dusk had already fallen over the city, Zhou Zuoren arrived at a modest boarding house in the hilly Yushima ni-chome section of Hongo district in Tokyo. Lu Xun had moved to Tokyo six months earlier, after deciding to abandon his medical studies and pursue a career in literature. He was now returning, this time with his brother, from a two-month trip home to Shaoxing. Zhou Zuoren, for whom everything was new, felt a mounting sense of anticipation as they entered the building. Like others of his generation he was attracted by Japan’s
FOUR Zhou Zuoren’s Humanism, the Self and the Essay Form from:
Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: Feng Wenbing, a close associate of Zhou and a practitioner of Chan meditation, is a good example. Zhou’s preface to Fengs
The Tale
FIVE The Construction of the Nation from:
Zhou Zuoren and an Alternative Chinese Response to Modernity
Abstract: The mistrust of didacticism that runs through Zhou’s writing can be read as a commentary on the ideological construction of the modern nation-state. Zhou’s attack on Han Yu and the
daotong systemtakes us to the heart of his criticism, for Han Yu was a pivotal figure in the attempt to construct a single foundation for sociopolitical action and individual cultural production in the wake of the An Lushan (d. 757) rebellion.¹ Han Yu’s radical innovations in guwen as a literary form redefined learning in terms of the Confucian “way of the sage,” and he particularly attacked Daoist and Buddhist
Book Title: The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time- Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Struve Lynn A.
Abstract: For many years, the Ming and Qing dynasties have been grouped as “late imperial China," a temporal framework that allows scholars to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of Ming rule that imparted a particular character to state and society throughout the Qing and into the twentieth century. This paradigm asserts the autonomous character of social change in China and has allowed historians to create a “China-centered history." Recently, however, many scholars have begun emphasizing the singular qualities of the Qing. Among the eight contributors to this volume on the formation of the Qing, those who emphasize the Manchu ethos of the Qing tend to see it as part of an early modernity and stress parallel and sometimes mutually reinforcing patterns of political consolidation and cultural integration across Eurasia. Other contributors who examine the Qing formation from the perspective of those who lived through the dynastic transition see the advent of Qing rule as prompting attempts by the Chinese subjects of the new empire to make sense of what they perceived as a historical disjuncture and to rework these understandings into an accommodation to foreign rule. In contrast to the late imperial paradigm, the new ways of configuring the Qing in historical time in both groups of essays assert the singular qualities of the Qing formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tfj908
Foreword from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) von Glahn Richard
Abstract: For three decades, historians of China have situated the Qing dynasty within a “late-imperial” epoch of Chinese history stretching from the midsixteenth to the early twentieth century. The late-imperial paradigm was conceived in reaction to the long-dominant characterization of China before the Opium War as caught in a repetitive “dynastic cycle” that reproduced an essentially inert “traditional” society until China was fully exposed to the forces of modernization issuing from the Western world. The late-imperial framework instead sought to identify and evaluate indigenous patterns of social, economic, and cultural change initiated in the last century of the Ming dynasty that
CHAPTER I The Qing Empire in Eurasian Time and Space: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Perdue Peter C.
Abstract: How can we place the first century of the Qing dynasty in worldhistorical time? Earlier generations of historians could not even conceive of this question. For Hegel and Marx, China until the nineteenth century was the land of eternal stagnation, embalmed in an airless coffin, never an active participant in the formation of the only progressive civilization, that of the West. Later historians, supporting nationalist and modernization movements, altered the vision slightly to include “change within tradition,” but they still cut off nearly all of imperial China’s history from the modern world. Today, no one can ignore the spectacular rise
CHAPTER 4 Contingent Connections: from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Wills John E.
Abstract: In the study of world and comparative history for early-modern times, we have come to a new appreciation of the importance of different shapes of state-building. The European pattern of territoriality, citizenship, and multiple centers of competitive, mobilizing state-building activity, sometimes called “mercantilist,” is seen as building on continuities in political culture reaching back to the ancient Mediterranean. In the “gunpowder empires” of the Islamic world, which figure along with the Ming and Qing as the great early-modern “agrarian empires,” growth of trade and population can be seen openir.. g the way to inchoate regional state-building efforts that challenged the
CHAPTER 5 The Qing Formation and the Early-Modern Period from:
The Qing Formation in World-Historical Time
Author(s) Rawski Evelyn S.
Abstract: In this chapter I cite studies of the early Qing period to argue that what might called the “Qing formation” bears many of the hallmarks of the early-modern paradigm used to characterize European history in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries. In outlining my reasons for taking this stance, I place this work in the context of the others in this “Early Modern?” part of the volume.
Book Title: Muslim Chinese-Ethnic Nationalism in the People’s Republic
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Gladney Dru C.
Abstract: This second edition of Dru Gladney’s critically acclaimed study of the Muslim population in China includes a new preface by the author, as well as a valuable addendum to the bibliography, already hailed as one of the most extensive listing of modern sources on the Sino-Muslims. China's ten million Hui are one of the Muslim national minorities recognized by the Chinese government. Dru Gladney's fieldwork among these people has enabled him to identify diverse patterns of interaction between their rising nationalism and state policy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5gkz
SEVEN Conclusion: from:
Muslim Chinese
Abstract: The Salman Rushdie protest in China in May 1989 brought Hui together from all corners of the country: There have been many Hui students at the Central Institute for Nationalities, where the protest began, from Ningxia, Quanzhou, and Changying, and many of the residents of Beijing’s Oxen Street community joined in the procession. Representatives from each of the four communities I have described in the preceding chapters may actually have come together in the protest march through the streets of Beijing. There were certainly a wide mixture of Muslims represented: Hui, Uigur, Kazak, and Kirghiz, all crying out for justice,
The Making of the Everyday World: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Wei Shang
Abstract: Unlike such earlier novels as
Sanguo yanyi三國演義 (The romance of the Three Kingdoms),Shuihu zhuan水滸傳 (The water margin), andXiyou ji西遊記 (The journey to the west), which were concerned with dynastic cycles, military affairs, heroic adventures, and religious journeys,Jin Ping Mei cihua金瓶梅詞話 (The plum in the golden vase, preface dated 1617 or 1618; hereafter,Jin Ping Mei) offers a comprehensive and meticulous representation of daily life.¹ It is distinctive in using streets, brothels, and a merchant household as the main stages for its characters, who are by no means historical personages or larger-than-life heroes. From
Women as Emblems of Dynastic Fall in Qing Literature from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Li Wai-yee
Abstract: Literary representations of momentous historical events often focus on the experiences, emotions, perceptions, and understanding of individuals; perhaps only thus can empathy be realized in acts of writing and reading. The individual’s perspective also allows one to ponder the margins of agency and responsibility. In the context of the fall of the Ming dynasty, the images of women proposed in this chapter—the femme fatale, the victim, the hero—represent a spectrum of attitudes on the relationship between the individual and larger historical processes. The femme fatale whose beauty and seductive wiles lure the ruler from his duties and spell
The Return of the Palace Lady: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Zeitlin Judith T.
Abstract: This chapter deals with a specific type of ghost story, “the historical ghost tale.” By historical ghost tale, I mean a ghost story about a traumatic historical event rather than a problem of individual mortality. The event is usually of a political nature, especially dynastic fall and conquest. I am inspired here by Paul Ricoeur’s concept of “historical time,” which mediates between the lived time of the individual and the cosmic time of the universe.¹ Although the ghost story about history is most effective when it centers on one or more individualized ghost characters as “sufferers” or victims of history,²
The Narrator’s Voice Before the “Fiction Revolution” from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hanan Patrick
Abstract: The crises at the end of the Ming and Qing dynasties, crises caused by dynastic weakness and the threat of foreign domination, had obvious effects on the writing of vernacular fiction, drawing in new authors and giving rise to new themes and new techniques.¹ Of the two crises, the late Qing was the more complex, with economic and cultural challenges superimposed on the military and political threats. Moreover, two additional factors were at work in this period: the new media of newspapers and journals, and foreign fiction, available in translation for the first time.
Women’s Poetic Witnessing: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Chang Kang-i Sun
Abstract: In traditional Chinese poetry, the task of witnessing-especially on the subject of war and other political issues-was generally assumed to be male territory. But, in fact, the earliest important work of political witnessing in Chinese poetry was attributed to a woman. In a poem written at the end of the Han dynasty (late second century BeE) and entitled “Beifen shi” 悲憤詩 (Poem of lament and indignation), Cai Yan 蔡琰 narrated her unfortunate experiences during the upheavals of the Dong Zhuo rebellion, including her capture by “barbarian” Xiongnu and her many subsequent dilemmas, experiences over which she had little or no
Conclusions: from:
Dynastic Crisis and Cultural Innovation
Author(s) Hegel Robert E.
Abstract: Although the focus of this chapter is the literary representations of and reactions to the fall of the Ming in the seventeenth century, I will refer to two later ends of time(s) by way of contrast: when read against the fall of real dynasties, unconventional conclusions in Ming and Qing works of historical fiction reveal levels of political engagement and significance often overlooked by other readings. I begin by examining the beginnings of two novels.
CHAPTER 4 The Philosophical Character of Elucidation of the Meaning from:
Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: Freed from the constraints imposed by the “closed system” that had been both the sustainer and the stifler of much Han classical scholarship, thinkers increasingly used the commentary as a vehicle for expressing individual thought from the early third century on. Although all interpretation can be considered a creative act,¹ when a commentary introduces a philosophical platform or series of platforms that are foreign to or undeveloped in the original text, it becomes more than an appendage to another body of writing and a work in its own right. Some of the more prominent examples of this written in the
CHAPTER 6 Zhu Xi, Commentary and the Analects from:
Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: This part introduces and analyzes the philosophical import of Zhu Xi’s
Collected Annotations on the Analects(hereafter,Collected Annotations). This opening chapter provides some social, institutional, and historical contexts for Zhu Xi and his commentary. The main topics are thedaoxue(learning of the way) fraternity; the new textual hermeneutics developed in the Song dynasty; Zhu’s concept ofdaotong(interconnecting thread of the way); the Four Books as an alternative canon and the place of the Analects within that canon; Zhu’s attitude toward earlier commentaries; and his tactics for overcoming historical distance. Chapter 7 examines Zhu Xi’s hermeneutics of reading,
Epilogue from:
Transmitters and Creators
Abstract: It has often been observed that tradition exists only in the repeated play of its own interpretation.¹ There is, however, more to tradition than its mere reception and appropriation; something must be transmitted. According to Edward Shils, “In its barest most elementary sense, it simply means
traditum;it is anything which is transmitted or handed down from the past to the present.”² Yet, tradition is also more than mere custom. To quote David Gross: “It is not the assumption that an act was previously formed that makes it tradition; rather it becomes traditional when it is replicated precisely because it
Book Title: A Patterned Past-Form and Thought in Early Chinese Historiography
Publisher: Harvard University Asia Center
Author(s): Schaberg David
Abstract: In this comprehensive study of the rhetoric, narrative patterns, and intellectual content of the Zuozhuan and Guoyu, David Schaberg reads these two collections of historical anecdotes as traces of a historiographical practice that flourished around the fourth century BCE among the followers of Confucius. He contends that the coherent view of early China found in these texts is an effect of their origins and the habits of reading they impose. Rather than being totally accurate accounts, they represent the efforts of a group of officials and ministers to argue for a moralizing interpretation of the events of early Chinese history and for their own value as skilled interpreters of events and advisers to the rulers of the day.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tg5npx
ONE The Rhetoric of Good Order from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: The Zhou, observing the two previous dynasties, was refined in its cultural practice. Ministers and envoys especially stressed the language of protocol; their speeches were subtle yet to the point, while their words were flowing and beautiful yet never in excess. The
Chunqiu’s accounts of Lü Xiang’s break with Qin, of Zichan’s presentation of the prisoners, of Zangsun’s remonstrance with the duke over the installation of
TWO Wen and the Meaning of Verbal Art from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: The term
wen, which has a pre-eminent place both in Confucian philosophy and among the virtues named in theZuozhuanandGuoyu, is notorious for the complexity of its semantic range. In oracle bone and bronze inscriptions, it functions largely as an epithet for deceased ancestors and rulers and appears to mean something like “accomplished.”¹ In references to artifacts, it denotes stripes of the sort found on cowry shells or patterns woven into cloth.² It is the preferred pre-Qin word for “logograph.”³ In the writings of certain philosophers, most notably Xunzi, it becomes a more abstract sort of “pattern,” the
FIVE The Anecdotal History from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: Historical knowledge can take many forms, but historical understanding always requires narration.¹ A text such as the
Chunqiu, with its dates and facts, does not so much convey understanding as assume it. TheZuozhuanand theGuoyu, in contrast, explain known or alleged facts of the Spring and Autumn period by recording them in the context of narratives. Although premodern critics of theZuozhuanas a commentary on theChunqiusometimes ranked it behind theGongyangandGuliangcommentaries, with their more direct articulations of the sage’s judgments, there have always been readers who recognized that without the narratives of
SIX Narrative and Recompense from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: The anecdote cannot easily accommodate multiple plot lines. It is well adapted for the narration of events involving a limited cast of characters and a single set of consequences, but when a narrative involves many characters or groups, with varying motivations, acting in different times and places, the anecdote falls short. For more complex chains of events, the historiographers of the
ZuozhuanandGuoyucombined anecdotes into series, building largescale narratives that are nonetheless fundamentally anecdotal in character. The anecdote series merits study for its role as a shaper of historical memory: it is the narrative genre in which the
EIGHT Writing and the Ends of History from:
A Patterned Past
Abstract: To narrate is to encode an ideology. Fredric Jameson, applying an insight of Levi-Strauss to the study of narrative, has written that “ideology is not something which informs or invests symbolic production; rather the aesthetic act is itself ideological, and the production of aesthetic or narrative form is to be seen as an ideological act in its own right, with the function of inventing imaginary or formal ‘solutions’ to unresolvable social contradictions.”¹ Both in selecting material and in setting the terms of its intelligibility, narrators uphold certain views on the workings of the world while rejecting others as wrong or
1. Divine Simplicity in Contemporary Theology from:
Divine Simplicity
Abstract: Contemporary theological treatments of the doctrine of God and his perfections often neglect the doctrine of divine simplicity.¹ Discussions of simplicity are more often found in philosophical literature,² and the theologians who do address it usually express concerns instead of its importance. Chapter 2 will detail how the doctrine of divine simplicity has always had critics. However, reactions to the doctrine in the latter half of the twentieth century were of a different kind and greater degree. Although criticisms of divine simplicity are nothing new, modern theology developed a new narrative of the origins and content of divine simplicity that
1. Pedagogy and Anagogy in Twentieth-Century Readings of Genesis 22 from:
Faith in a Hidden God
Abstract: In the story of Isaac, it is not only God’s intervention at the beginning and the end, but even the factual and psychological elements which come between, that are mysterious, merely touched upon, fraught with background;
3. A Critical Reading of Panikkar’s Cosmotheandric Christology from:
"Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) RANSTROM ERIK
Abstract: This chapter features a systematization of Panikkar’s later Christology, which is characterized by an escalation of the incipient pluralist trends found in the first edition of the
Unknown Christ of Hinduism. It is also marked by an utter departure from the conviction that Jesus’s person and work is constitutively key to the relationship between God and the world. The chapter will also evaluate Panikkar’s later christological development based upon priorities and principles earlier drawn from “Meditaciόn sobre Melquisedec” andLe mystère du culte, as well as various systematic theologians. I will also set Panikkar’s later theology within a wider personal
4. A Constructive Protestant Appreciation and Interaction from:
"Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Raimon Panikkar presents many non-Catholic readers with a set of challenging theological and inter-religious options. What follows in this chapter intends to affirm, to interact with and, in places, to complement and even expand aspects of Panikkar’s thought.¹ Apart from occasional hints, critical comment is reserved for the next chapter. There are, of course, Protestants who are wholly sympathetic with, for example, the radical pluralism advocated by Panikkar. But, on the whole, even academic Protestants who are concerned about interreligious issues are likely either to be unacquainted with his writings or unappreciative of his thought—despite his very considerable reputation
5. The Great Tradition Ruptured? from:
"Without Ceasing to be a Christian"
Author(s) ROBINSON BOB
Abstract: Before further engagement with Panikkar’s thought, it is important to note one problem presented by the reality that Panikkar’s large body of writing spans a period in excess of fifty years: any attempted summary or survey is difficult, given the evolving nature of his thought. The difficulty is compounded by one of the logically prior challenges of making sense of Panikkar: the idiosyncratic relationship between the publishing dates of Panikkar’s books and other writings and the actual genesis of their content. At times, this makes it difficult to understand the development of Panikkar’s thought, even about a single issue. Nonetheless,
Introduction: from:
Preaching Must Die!
Abstract: Unfortunately, in its quest for academic and ecclesial respectability, homiletics has made a pact with theology: contemporary homiletics presents itself to the world as “theology in the form of sermon preparation.”³ Homiletics has sold its birthright for a bowl of stew. Such is theology’s deviousness. Homiletics has failed to notice that
2 Crossing Over to the Other Side: from:
Preaching Must Die!
Abstract: Few shows engage the intersecting domains of identity and selfhood as poignantly—or as violently—as HBO’s
Game of Thrones. Nowhere is this confluence seen more clearly than in Arya Stark, who just so happens to be my favorite character in the series. For the uninitiated, Arya is the youngest daughter of Eddard Stark, the Lord of Winterfell.
4 Giving Up the Ghost: from:
Preaching Must Die!
Abstract: The film
Inceptioncenters on a man named Cobb, a thief-for-hire who infiltrates the unconscious minds of corporate magnates to extract valuable information. Following a botched assignment, Cobb is forced to accept a seemingly impossible mission:inception. Inception is the implantation of an idea into a target’s unconscious, thereby altering the target’s psyche. If he is able to achieve inception, Cobb’s criminal record will be expunged, and he will regain his freedom.
Book Title: World Christianity as Public Religion- Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): DA ROSA WANDERLEY P.
Abstract: This volume stresses world Christianity as a form of public religion, identifying areas for intercultural engagement. Divided into five sections, each formed by two chapters, this volume covers themes such as the reimagination of theology, doctrine, and ecumenical dialogue in the context of world Christianity; Global South perspectives on pluralism and intercultural communication; how epistemological shifts promoted by liberation theology and its dialogue with cultural critical studies have impacted discourses on religion, ethics, and politics; conversations on gender and church from Brazilian and German perspectives; and intercultural proposals for a migratory epistemology that recenters the experience of migration as a primary location for meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7hn1
2. Limits and Possibilities for the Ecumenical Movement Today from:
World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) DO NASCIMENTO CUNHA MAGALI
Abstract: The marks left on the contemporary history of Christianity by the international ecumenical movement of the twentieth century are undeniable. Among the marks deserving to be remembered and celebrated are, first, the search for an answer to the demands of unity in the missionary movement, striving “so that the world may believe”; second, the articulations around “practical Christianity” that would overcome historical doctrinal divides; third, the doctrinal dialogue in efforts to produce “faith and order”; and fourth, the joint actions of Christian youth and educators from different churches, confessions, and regional Christian associations.
3. Pluralism, Ecumenism, and Intercultural Communication from:
World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) MÜLLER RETIEF
Abstract: In the contexts of the Cold War, neocolonialism, and colonialism of a special type (as apartheid in South Africa had been described),¹ the WCC made important and decisive statements and contributions to actively promote the
5. Theology, Ethics, and Society from:
World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) RIVERA-PAGÁN LUIS N.
Abstract: Latin American liberation theology was the unforeseen enfant terrible in the academic and ecclesial realms of theological production during the last decades of the twentieth century. It brought to the conversation not only a new theme—liberation—but also a new perspective on doing theology and a novel way of referring to God’s being and action in history. Its project to reconfigure the interplay between religious studies, ethics, and politics became a meaningful topic of analysis and dialogue in the general theological discourse. Many scholars perceive in its emergence a drastic epistemological rupture, a radical change in paradigm, a significant
8. Women and Academic Theological Education from:
World Christianity as Public Religion
Author(s) ULRICH CLAUDETE BEISE
Abstract: In this essay, I aim to offer a reflection on women and academic theological education based on the experience of female students from the Faculdade Unida de Vitória, in the state of Espírito Santo, Brazil. Academic theological education is an important step for women to achieve ecclesial agency. My reflection is based on narrative interviews conducted with female students concerning the impact of theological studies in their own life experiences. Academic theological training enhances the self-esteem of women, empowers them, and provides them with tools for reflection-action-reflection in their Christian communities or in other organizational spaces, and it is fundamental
Book Title: Principalities in Particular-A Practical Theology of the Powers That Be
Publisher: Fortress Press
Author(s): Berger Rose Marie
Abstract: Activist pastor Bill Wylie-Kellermann gives an urgent specificity to the theology of the powers, relating biblical concepts to contemporary struggles for civil rights, clean air, fair housing, safe affordable water, public education, and more, highlighting throughout the vital importance of a community of struggle connected through time and across space. The book‘s uniqueness lies in its practicality, as biblical and theological analyses arise from, and are addressed to, particular historical moments and given ecclesial and movement struggles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1tm7htm
Introduction: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The fiftieth anniversary of Martin Luther King’s speech breaking his silence on the war in Vietnam and naming the reigning “triplets,” the dominating powers, of U.S. culture—racism, militarism, and extreme materialism—is upon us (April 4, 1967). And so it will shortly be fifty years since his assassination in Memphis, exactly one year later.
1 William Stringfellow: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: William Stringfellow was my mentor in the practical theology of principalities. I’ve spent the three decades since his death, if not thinking like he did, at least framing my work in the outlines of this thought on the powers.
2 A Personal and Activist Appreciation: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: I speak not so much as a scholar but more personally, as a friend and mentee, as pastor and nonviolent community activist. Also, as a white hetero male professional with a place-based vocation in and to Detroit.
3 Death Shall Have No Dominion: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: We were talking late into the night at the Block Island hermitage that William Stringfellow and Anthony Towne had built for him while he was two years in Danbury Federal Prison, in consequence of the 1968 Catonsville draft board action. He had by then foresworn Scotch, on doctor’s orders, so I was being introduced to Manhattans, dry, which were somehow allowed. The place was fitting for the topic. On the wall above us was an exorcism poem that he had hand-lettered in a style familiar to
5 Barbed Wire and Beyond: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Author’s Note: Nuclear weapons may be thought the preeminent principality. They are the final word in escalation dominance—and so the current emblem of the domination system, the very power of death targeting the planet as creation. My own practical understanding of the principalities and powers was worked out, book-length, precisely in their guise.¹ Given that account, they are actually under-represented in this volume, yet they are the place to begin. When I wrote the following about them in 1983,² I was preparing with friends for an Easter morning liturgical action at a Strategic Air Command Base in Michigan. Because
11 Spiritual Warfare and Economic Justice (1994) from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Among the most important (and most neglected) biblical resources for Christian economic thinking is the theology of principalities and powers. William Stringfellow, who must be credited with the theological and political discernment that awakened much of the recent practical interest in the powers, first began to speak on the topic in the early ‘60s. Slated to give two identical presentations in Boston—one at the Harvard Business School and another at
12 The Powers in Healing and Hospital Ministry (1996) from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: How many times have pastors read this passage at a hospital bedside where the extremities of pain and fear and death hover? Here is compressed a seminal confession of faith that often serves in those moments as the preeminent word of pastoral care. Yet one may be struck how it actually names the principalities and powers (not to mention their main methods of operation) in a personal and presumably private word of comfort. What gives? Is this a mere quaint circumlocution or do the scriptures offer the serum of truth,
14 Readers before Profits: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: The situation is this: Last July, six unions representing 2,600 workers were forced to strike when the company demanded another round of deep job cuts and refused to operate under the old contracts while bargaining new. Almost immediately it announced the hiring of “permanent replacement workers.”
16 Exorcising an American Demon: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: It is commonly understood that racism is more than individual attitude. It is prejudice with power behind it. Yet looked upon with a biblical and theological eye, white racism may be recognized to be even more than that: it is itself an active and aggressive principality, a “power” that appears to move, adapt, and grow with a life of its own.¹
18 Global Economy: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: When Walter Wink was writing
Engaging the Powers, the practical magnum opus of his book series on the biblical concept of principalities and powers, he stumbled over economics.¹ One long chapter turned into two and then was withdrawn altogether over doubts that he’d sufficiently treated the mushrooming complexity of the commercial powers. Ironically, nowhere is the “domination system” that Wink identified in his series more prominent or pertinent than in corporate globalization.
19 Unholy Alliance: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: These two texts which, apart from certain archaisms, ring like copy for a passionate leaflet at a Pentagon or a WTO direct action, are actually remarkable utterances of prophetic ire by John Wesley, founder of Methodism in the eighteenth century.³ What may indeed be most striking is that both concern economic violence, though in their similarity the first is directed to the distillers and the second to slavers.
26 Her Name Was Charity: from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: Think of Charity Hicks as the Rosa Parks of the Detroit Water Struggle.¹ She was arrested in Detroit early on May 16 for resisting the shut-off of her own water. The private contractor came early in the morning, but she was up. Since he was hitting a bunch of people on her block, she went door to door rousing people to say: He’s coming; fill your tub, fill pots and pans! Then, because she still had two more days to settle her bill, she demanded to see the shut-off order. He had none, only a list of addresses. When the
27 Church and the Powers (Church as a Power) (2016) from:
Principalities in Particular
Abstract: In fact, Wink found the insights from Revelation 2 (the letters to the angels of the churches) to be useful in understanding the “angels of the nations” as having both personality and vocation1 and it has been used similarly as a
6. God’s Domination-Free Order: from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The irreducible fact about Jesus is that he was executed. Yet he did not represent an armed threat to the existing order. He broke no civil or criminal laws. He violated religious laws and customs regarding the Sabbath, hand-washing, and holiness, but in every case the issue hung on interpretation, and no doubt some rabbis would have supported him; at least they would not have condemned him to death. He mainly taught, healed, and exorcised. Why then was he such a threat that he had to be killed?
9. Jesus’ Third Way: from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: Human evolution has provided the species with two deeply instinctual responses to violence: flight or fight. Jesus offers a third way: nonviolent direct action.² The classic text is Matt. 5:38-42:
10. On Not Becoming What We Hate from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: In the previous chapter I suggested that “Resist not evil” is better rendered “Do not return evil for evil,” “Do not mirror evil,” “Do not respond to evil in kind.” This refusal of reactive opposition is one of the most profound and difficult truths in Scripture. We become what we hate. The very act of hating something draws it to us. Since our hate is usually a direct response to an evil done to us, our hate almost invariably causes us to respond in the terms already laid down by the enemy. Unaware of what is happening, we turn into
11. Beyond Just War and Pacifism from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: The new reality Jesus proclaimed was nonviolent. That much is clear, not just from the Sermon on the Mount, but from his entire life and teaching and, above all, the way he faced his death. His was not merely a tactical or pragmatic nonviolence seized upon because nothing else would have “worked” against the Roman Empire’s near monopoly on violence. Rather, he saw nonviolence as a direct corollary of the nature of God and of the new reality emerging in the world from God. In a verse quoted more than any other from the New Testament during the church’s first
13. Re-Visioning History: from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: History has been written by the victors. What young people learn in schools is largely a chronicle of kings and dynasties, wars and empires. Androcratic systems teach androcratic history. Even where nonviolent resistance was successfully used, it tends to be neglected. A people kept ignorant of the existence of the history of nonviolence will naturally believe that it is impractical and unrealistic. In those cases where it is known, as in Gandhi’s struggle for independence in India or the civil rights movement in the United States, it is regarded as an unrepeatable oddity. The Powers know all too well that
15. Monitoring Our Inner Violence from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: I am not a very nonviolent person. I have a sharp temper that I have learned to control fairly well, and find myself indulging at times in violent fantasies. I am trying to discover how a person as deeply schooled in violence as I was can begin to practice nonviolence. As I indicated earlier, one could characterize the approach I have been developing in this book as nonviolence for the violent.
16. Prayer and the Powers from:
Engaging the Powers
Abstract: We are not easily reduced to prayer. We who grope toward praying today are like a city gutted by fire. The struggle against injustice has exacted from us an awful cost. In a similar period with similar smuggles, Camus wrote, “There is merely bad luck in not being loved; there is tragedy in not loving. All of us, today, are dying of this tragedy. For violence and hatred dry up the heart itself; the long fight for justice exhausts the love that nevertheless gave birth to it. In the clamor in which we live, love is impossible and justice does
2. The Discourses of Jesus as Rhetoric from:
The Rhetoric of Jesus in the Gospel of Mark
Abstract: The goal of this study is to hear the discourses of Jesus in the Gospel of Mark as first-century audiences would have heard them. Though attempting to read the Gospel in terms of its own cultural/literary milieu, we are, of course, nonetheless employing a contemporary reading model that we find compatible with our goals and with the text under consideration.¹ We assume a reading model similar to that generally proposed by the reader-response critics, especially by Wolfgang Iser in his seminal
The Act of Reading.² In this model, understanding, or as Iser calls it, “actualization” or “meaning effect,” occurs at
Conclusion from:
The Rhetoric of Jesus in the Gospel of Mark
Abstract: The Gospel of Mark (or, for that matter, any text) may be read from different locations. Our attempt has been to enter imaginatively into the world in which the Gospel was composed and to hear its discourses as a first-century audience might have heard them. Twentieth-century historical critics brought questions to Mark that required that the discourses be fragmented to uncover their pre-Markan sources or traditions. Having fragmented the discourses, historical critics were then unable to read them as coherent speech acts. Our reading has sought to hear the discourses themselves, their distinct patterns and strategies, in terms of the
Book Title: Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations- Publisher: UNP - Nebraska
Author(s): GLEACH FREDERIC W.
Abstract: The Histories of Anthropology Annual presents diverse perspectives on the discipline's history within a global context, with a goal of increasing awareness and use of historical approaches in teaching, learning, and conducting anthropology. The series includes critical, comparative, analytical, and narrative studies involving all aspects and subfields of anthropology.Volume 11,
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations, examines the work and influence of scholars, including Franz Boas, Ruth Benedict, John Dewey, Randolph Bourne, A. Irving Hallowell, and Edward Westermarck, and anthropological practices and theories in Vietnam and Ukraine as well as the United States. Contributions also focus on the influence of Western thought and practice on anthropological traditions, as well as issues of relativism, physical anthropology, language, epistemology, ethnography, and social synergy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1trkjsq
1 Franz Boas as Theorist: from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) DARNELL REGNA
Abstract: Franz Boas is uniformly credited as the dominant figure of American anthropology from the late nineteenth century to the Second World War. His stature as a public intellectual is acknowledged to have extended far beyond the borders of the discipline he established. Nonetheless, few contemporary anthropologists actually read Boas or have a clear sense of what he wrote or thought. Sadly, little of the enormous Boas scholarship is based on historicist engagement with his work. In the seven decades since his death, the theoretical preoccupations of anthropologists have shifted more than once. Furthermore, the world itself has changed such that
2 “We Are Also One in Our Concept of Freedom” from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) HARKIN MICHAEL E.
Abstract: Franz Boas is known for his political activism, which both shaped his anthropology and was informed by it. In “Anthropology as Kulturkampf,” George Stocking (1992: 92–113) argues for understanding Boasian anthropology within the framework of progressive and reformist politics, which shifted during various phases of Boas’s life. As I have argued elsewhere, I believe that this trajectory continued beyond Boas’s lifetime and that American anthropology of the late twentieth and twenty-first centuries has become identified with a particular political worldview: what Richard Rorty (1983) called “postmodernist bourgeois liberalism.” It is important to note that while Rorty claims Dewey as
3 What Would Franz Boas Have Thought about 9/11? from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) HARKIN MICHAEL E.
Abstract: To ask what Franz Boas would have thought of 9/11 is obviously to engage in an act of historical and biographical imagination, but also one of self-examination. I would argue that we anthropologists, especially those of us trained in the great Americanist tradition of cultural anthropology and historical ethnography, feel that we know Boas. Indeed, we have internalized him in some way, like a beloved dead relative, and so, in some sense, his reaction is our reaction. As in any time of crisis, the crisis of the past decade that was ushered in on that bright September morning and that
13 Arthur Nole (1940–2015): from:
Historicizing Theories, Identities, and Nations
Author(s) MCILWRAITH THOMAS
Abstract: Arthur Nole, Tahltan Indigenous elder and storyteller, died on January 3, 2015, after breaking his leg while chopping wood. He lived a life indicative of the complexities of Indigenous lives and, particularly, the meshing of traditional activities and wage work. He was a dedicated moose hunter and passionate hunting guide, and he was tremendously interested in the telling and recording of Tahltan history. His later life was dominated by family activities and motivated by teaching young people the traditional skills of camping, hunting, and life on the land.
INTRODUCTION from:
God's Creativity and Human Action
Abstract: This book presents the proceedings of the fourteenth annual Building Bridges Seminar, convened at the Georgetown University School of Foreign Service in Doha, Qatar, May 3–6, 2015, with university president John J. DeGioia present as host and participant. Launched in 2002 as an initiative of the Archbishop of Canterbury—and with the stewardship of Georgetown University since 2013, this gathering of scholar-practitioners of Islam and Christianity convenes annually, alternating between Muslim- majority and Christian-majority contexts, for deep study of selected texts pertaining to a carefully chosen theme. The circle of participants is always diverse ethnically and geographically, and balanced
Human Action within Divine Creation: from:
God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) KADIVAR MOHSEN
Abstract: Human action within divine creation has been the subject of long and controversial discussions among Muslims since the eighth century, first as the subject of study and debate in commentaries on the Qurʾān and Ḥadīth and then continuing as one of the first problems of Islamic theology. The Muslim philosophers and mystics engaged deeply in the subject and enriched its literature from their specific perspectives.
Human Action within the Sovereignty of God: from:
God's Creativity and Human Action
Author(s) KÄRKKÄINEN VELI-MATTI
Abstract: To make my discussion of human action within the sovereignty of God manageable and useful for this particular occasion, I limit its scope in significant ways. I do not seek to respond to the denial of human freedom by those natural scientists to whom world processes are deterministic to the point of eliminating any true notion of freedom. Nor do I take up the equally strong rejection of human freedom by neuroscientists and philosophers of mind who argue that everything humans do is caused by our “neurons”—that is, neuroscientific determinism. I have discussed and defeated these forms of determinism
Scripture Dialogue 3: from:
God's Creativity and Human Action
Abstract: Everyone acts according to his [particular] character (
shakila).
Book Title: The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography-The Case of the Nederlands Filmmuseum (1946-2000)
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): LAMERIS BREGT
Abstract: Rich in detail, this is a study of the interrelationships between film historical discourse and archival practices. Exploring the history of several important collections from the EYE Film Museum in Amsterdam, Bregt Lameris shows how archival films and collections always carry the historical traces of selection policies, restoration philosophies, and exhibition strategies. The result is a compelling argument that film archives can never be viewed simply as innocent or neutral sources of film history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1v2xssp
[Part I Introduction] from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur explains in
Memory, History, Forgettingthat the interpretation of history does not begin with the historian but with the archivist. The decisions made by archivists on what should and should not be included in a collection are the first step in the process of interpreting historical facts; all the succeeding choices the historian makes depend on the composition and structure of the archive. As a consequence, the archive is not only the ‘starting point’ of historical research, it is also part of the historiographical discourse.¹ Furthermore, the act of collecting documents and objects always implies a change in
[Part II Introduction] from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Museums and archives share an inherent objective: to keep memories alive for the future by preserving objects from the past (Pearce, 1995: 249). To realise this goal, they endeavour to prevent the decay – or further decay – of their artefacts by, first, treating these objects with extreme caution and trying, as much as possible, to limit the destructive impact of environmental factors (Pomian, 1988: 14); and, second, cleaning and restoring them, repairing the damage that inevitably accrues over time. Both of these activities can be categorised as part of the ‘preservation process’.
CHAPTER 4 Passive Preservation: from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: Three different views on nitrate material are apparent during the period under investigation: the nitrate copy was seen as a functional item, as a perishable, fragile object, or as a unique print. These varying attitudes not only directly determined how film museums and institutions coped with the active and passive preservation of the nitrate films in their archives, but were also closely related to the positions film historians adopted towards this material and the value they attached to ‘original prints’. Hence, the most interesting question is how ideas about the value of this material as a historical source were synchronised
CHAPTER 6 Reconstructions from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: ‘ The current discourse of film restorers is a model for history making because it makes transparent the ways that a history is spliced together’ (Jones, 2012: 138). This comment clearly summarises the focus of this chapter: the reconstruction of films and the consolidation of a film museum editing structure, literally ‘ splicing’ the fragments of film history together. As with the activities of acquisition and collection, reconstruction is a matter of selection: the curator chooses which film clips will end up in the final restoration print. As a result, the reconstruction is generally aimed at ‘ completing’ a film,
Coda: from:
The Film Museum Practice and Film Historiography
Abstract: The 2012 celebration of Unesco’s annual World Day for Audiovisual Heritage, held by EYE Filmmuseum in its newly opened venue on the banks of the IJ in Amsterdam, was a remarkable event. The celebration consisted of a programme of newly restored films, dating from exactly 100 years earlier. Before the screening started, however, a dazzling display of pink, green, and blue light was projected onto the walls of the institute, suffusing them with colour. Then, a strange pattern began to appear, which slowly resolved itself into a full-colour projection of an art-deco interior, complete with lacquered wood panelling. This was
PRÓLOGO from:
Trópicos de Gutenberg
Author(s) Katz Alejandro
Abstract: La
edición–y el editor– como «género literario» tiene ya una larga trayectoria. Una trayectoria que lo ha convertido en un género con varias subespecies: memorias de editores, conversaciones con editores; manifiestos, proclamas (y melancólicos lamentos) de editores; ensayos de editores, libros prácticos, textos con pretensiones teóricas… Sin considerar los libros sobre los editores y la edición que provienen de la academia –sociológicos, históricos, de crítica cultural e incluso de teoría económica–, la bibliografía que los mismos protagonistas de la actividad editorial han puesto a disposición de los lectores (o de sus colegas) constituye un corpus amplio y variado,
EL PODER DE LA CONVERSACIÓN from:
Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Cada libro es como una cita, una promesa de cohabitación mental y convivencia, una conversación, un proyecto de vida, una promesa, un adorno mental. Las actas del simposio sobre
La mitología del cerdo. Las figuras de la biblioteca en la imaginación del siglo de oro español, losPoemas completosde D. H. Lawrence, losDiariosde M. F. K. Fisher –la ensayista usamericana que escribe sobre cocina y vida cotidiana–, el libro sobreEuropade Lucien Febvre, los ensayos de Germán Arciniegas o la prosa de Paul Celan. El comprador de libros no sólo los adquiere para leerlos sino, por
DE LA LECTURA CONSIDERADA COMO UNA OBRA DE ARTE from:
Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: El título de esta intervención, a pesar de su aparente atractivo, resulta enigmático. ¿En qué sentido puede ser artística o poética la lectura? Se habla mucho y por todas partes de la necesidad de promover la lectura, de fomentarla y auspiciarla, de las virtudes sociales e intelectuales de la alfabetización.
ENTRE VOCES from:
Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: Suele identificarse a la literatura con los libros y con la palabra impresa, pero se olvida que en los albores de la humanidad y aun en la práctica misma de la expresión la voz precede a la palabra escrita, el relato contado de viva voz antecede a la narración redactada, el diálogo vivo a la filosofía. De los celtas y druidas devotos de
La Diosa Blancaevocada por Robert Graves, a los poetas griegos y prehispánicos, la lírica y la épica se manifiestan comocanciones. Más aún, las artes de la palabra se dan en función de una sabiduría vocal.
LA CUESTIÓN DE LAS ANTOLOGÍAS from:
Trópicos de Gutenberg
Abstract: La cuestión de las antologías literarias y en particular poéticas es uno de esos casos limítrofes de la teoría literaria donde colindan y se confunden lo puramente literario, lo abiertamente editorial y aun, subrepticio y agazapado, el ejercicio político. ¿Qué es una antología? Es –según expresa Manuel Seco en su
Diccionario del español actual– «un libro constituido por una colección de fragmentos u obras seleccionadas de varios escritores o, más raramente, de uno solo». En una segunda acepción es una «selección de obras o de fragmentos» [musicales o de otras artes]. Y en una tercera: «una selección de lo más
The Joys and Sorrows of Literary Theory from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: I call this essay “The Joys and Sorrows of Literary Theory” because literary theory is a deliberate form of human action, of writing, and all such actions have consequences that range from joy to sorrow for the actors and the audience. My allusion to
The Joy of SexandThe Sorrows of Young Wertheris neither accidental nor arbitrary. The pleasures of the text and the anxiety of deconstruction are but two aspects of modern theory, but they do serve to indicate the passion with which theorists write theory. Roland Barthes has described the different pleasures of a text, including
History and Genre from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: I call this paper “History and Genre” though history is a genre and genre has a history. It is this interweaving between history and genre that I seek to describe. In
The Political UnconsciousFredric Jameson wrote that genre criticism has been “thoroughly discredited by modern literary theory and practice.”¹ There are at least three reasons for this. First, the very notion that texts compose classes has been questioned. Secondly, the assumption that members of a genre share a common trait or traits has been questioned, and thirdly, the function of a genre as an interpretative guide has been questioned.
Do Postmodern Genres Exist? from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Critics and theorists who write about postmodern texts often refer to “genres” as a term inappropriate for characterizing postmodernist writing. The process of suppression results from the claim that postmodern writing blurs genres, transgresses them, or unfixes boundaries that conceal domination or authority, and that “genre” is an anachronistic term and concept. When critics offer examples of postmodern novels, for example, they cite omniscient authors who are parodied or undermined. They point to selfconscious addresses to the reader in
If on a Winter’s Nightand note the selfconscious foregrounding of literary artifice that undermines the generic assumption that a novel
Materialities of Communication: from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: I begin by positioning myself within this colloquium on “Materialities of Communication.” I use the term “positioning” to note the physical presence of the speaker’s table and the obvious fact that now I am observed as yesterday I was an observer. Let us say that I am a conscious instrumentality of transmitting and receiving communications. I am prepared to accept the notion that I and each of us is a complex system, but clearly systems that are complexly intertwined with other systems.
What Are Genres? from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Genres exist in nonverbal activities no less than in verbal. There are history paintings, portrait paintings, abstract paintings, as there are kinds of architecture and music genres. But if we wish to describe or explain or interpret these genres we use language—descriptive explanations and interpretation are themselves genres. I make this acknowledgment in order to indicate the range of this paper: I limit myself to our statements about speech and written genres. Since this is the first paper to be presented at this conference on genre, I want to assess the situation of genre criticism and theory as the
Historical Knowledge and Literary Understanding from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: My argument shall be that the historical study of literature is a necessary condition for any literary analysis. As critics and scholars, we invoke historical assumptions in our practice, our methods, and our theory. The problem, therefore, is to present a conception of historical knowledge and literary understanding that will acknowledge this phenomenon and make practice consonant with it. And to do this, one must begin by recognizing the historical nature of literary study. In this essay I shall be using examples from my own work in progress—a study of literary change from Milton to Keats—and although I
A Propaedeutic for Literary Change from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: I wish in this short paper to touch on three aspects of literary change: (1) the nature of change; (2) the kinds of change; (3) explanations of change. I do not wish to debate the meanings of the term “literary,” and I shall, therefore, assume that what is “literary” is what authors, critics, theorists have identified at the same time or at different times as “literary.” The fact that such authorities may disagree about the significance of “literary” will in no way affect the inquiry I propose. My aim is to offer a propaedeutic for a study of literary change.
Generic History as New Literary History from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: It gives me great pleasure to return to the University of Konstanz because it is here that Hans Robert Jauss elaborated his theories of aesthetic reception and hermeneutical analysis, and it is here that Wolfgang Iser propounded his theories of the act and process of reading and of functional history. For more than a decade the three of us have collaborated in presenting to scholars the values of literary theory and its importance for the study of literature. I take this occasion to acknowledge their important contributions not only to
New Literary Historybut to the study of literature in
The Generation of Conceptual Changes in Literary Study from:
Genre Theory and Historical Change
Abstract: Since a centennial is an opportunity to look backward and forward, I have chosen a subject that I feel is appropriate to the occasion: the generation of conceptual changes in literary study. The kind of changes I refer to are what Foucault called epistemic changes, what Meyer Abrams has characterized as a change from a pragmatic to an organic orientation, what the anthropologist Clifford Geertz calls “an alteration of the principles of mapping. Something is happening to the way we think about the way we think.”¹ The conceptual change I refer to is what Brian McHale and other postmodern critics
Introduction. from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: This ambition is not quite as straightforward as it might seem. First, ‘discourse’ and ‘practice’ cannot always be neatly distinguished. Certainly, by discourse – or, more accurately, discourses – we partly mean what Morag Shiach (1989: 1) in her analysis of British popular-cultural discourse
1 Politics and pleasure: from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: This first chapter focuses on political conceptualisations of popular culture in France, by which I mean conceptualisations developed by governments, parties, national institutions and the kind of public intellectuals who, as Ahearne (2010: 2) puts it, ‘have moved in and out of positions within public policy processes’. Other chapters in this volume will be concerned with popular-cultural artefacts themselves. My focus here is on how such artefacts have been institutionally represented over time. For if, as Kuisel claims, France itself is an invention, a conceptualisation, this is in part due to the way its popular culture has represented it and
3 The mimetic prejudice: from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: As earlier chapters have pointed out, ‘popular’ is a capacious and slippery word. On the one hand, popular novels are simply the novels read and appreciated by a very large number of readers, as opposed to those that are canonised by critics and by literary histories but actually read by a relatively small élite. On the other hand, the ‘popular’ novel conjures up – if somewhat vaguely – a particular kind of fiction, raising the question of the aesthetic and philosophical specificity of the popular: do ‘popular’ novels conform to particular models of narrative? Do they deploy specifically ‘popular’ strategies?
5 French television: from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Mazdon Lucy
Abstract: As has been argued in previous chapters, discourses relating to what constitutes popular culture in France have experienced a sweeping paradigm shift in the last fifty or so years. This has been witnessed across a range of cultural practices and philosophical and political debates. This period of change and negotiation coincides to a great extent with the development and gradual entrenchment of television in French cultural life, from its early days as a little-watched curiosity to its current incarnation as an ever-present and highly influential medium. To attempt to analyse the construction of the popular without addressing the role of
Conclusion from:
Imagining the popular in contemporary French culture
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: The ambition of this study has been to explore the diversity of ways in which the popular has been conceptualised and materialised in France. Whereas domestic and external accounts of French culture have spontaneously identified it with élite culture, we have argued that any rigorous analysis of it must integrate and engage with majority cultural practices. The relationship between state, national institutions and cultural production takes very particular forms in France, closely enmeshed as this relationship has been with a specific political history, and with the exceptionally strong presence of linguistic and literary tradition as a prized element of national
Not Doing from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Of more interest, perhaps are two other kinds of cases. One is the not doing what one has been asked to do, or what one has indeed promised to do, so that the act itself perseveres, along with its undoing. Here I am thinking of Rainer Maria Rilke, asked, invited, to edit the letters and journal entries of the great German painter Paula Modersohn-Becker, and refusing, alleging that it would do her reputation no good:
Obliterations and Deviations from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: And then, of course, there are acts of disowning, refusal and obliteration perpetrated by artists upon the works of other artists. Among these, the success story of erasure poetics deserves our attention, if only because it has been ignored or relegated to the margins of literary and art history. Erasurism is rooted as much in contemporary philosophy’s deconstructionist turn as in Duchampian found objects and Situationist détournements, of which many of the examples examined below constitute both an extension and a critique. Recent and current developments in erasure art are closely associated with visual artists and writers (many of
Pseudonyms and De/Retitlings from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Among the varied coverups, the art of the pseudonym works a kind of subterfuge. Blaise Pascal wrote as five different persons, depending what he was writing: mathematics, imagined letters, and so on, and the major othering writer is without any doubt Fernando Pessoa, who had at least seventy-five other characters, known as «heteronyms»: among them Alberto Caeiro, and Ricardo Reis, each of which had a different character, history, and style.
Clinamen from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Walker’s installation is about how art seeks to remediate history’s tragic flaws by revisiting some of its cardinal sins and canonical objects. Likewise, the canonical status enjoyed by Mallarmé and Proust looms large in Broodthaers’s and Bennequin’s erasure experiments. Like Broodthaers’s «IMAGE»,
Ommagesuggests that such acts of undoing - whether affectionate, ironic or both - often originate in an attempt to deal with the pressure of influence. InThe Anxiety of Influence, Harold Bloom famously argued that poets since Milton have sought to escape from their predecessors’ haunting importance. In view of the examples seen so far the
Slashes and Burnings from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: As for harmings and undoings of the other, Antonin Artaud really took the cookie. In his celebrated spell-castings, he outdid every performative act in his visual leavings, with the destruction of multiple readable traces. When we read Stephen Barber’s remarkable
Antonin Artaud: Terminal Curses: The Notebooks 1945-1948, we see how obsession never had it so good. Terminal. Absolutely terminal. We call this apocalyptic erasure, conflagration, tearing up, a destruction willed by a genius of a madman. Artaud-le-Momo, that other, the late other of Antonin Artaud the actor, whose face as the priest holding up the bible for that other
Turnarounds from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: What a wonderful turnaround, fooling everyone in sight, because that is exactly where it isn’t, in sight! In the Florence Griswold Museum, in Lyme, Connecticut, there is a painting you might know about, but no way can you see it unless you ask. Robert Fullonton’s painting in the dining room? Oh, well, it is on the back of another panel, because the Lyme Colony artists flipped over his panel when he left and didn’t pay his room and board. It sounds grand, but I didn’t see it: it is, evidently, a «Rocky Seacoast», with dabs of green paint for
Ex-humings from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.D.: Despite the exponential popularity of erasure techniques amongst contemporary experimental artists, the most important and successful avatar of overpainting erasurism to this day remains Tom Phillips’s ongoing
A Humument: A Treated Victorian Novel(1966-). By «ex-huming» the corpse of an obscure late 19thcentury novel (W.H. Mallock’s now forgotten three-deckerA Human Document[1892])A Humumenteludes Bloom’s logic of influence and constitutes a singular case of a rewriting whose achievements clearly outdo those of its (non-canonical) predecessor. For Phillips erasure is as much about covering and adding as it is about canceling and subtracting: the book is filled
And How About Meta-Stuff? from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: «Katz, a détournement of Maus, has opened to a new interpretation of Art Spiegelman’s work, basically by changing every animal-faced character into a cat-faced one. Then, as Spiegelman published MetaMaus, METAKATZ was realised as a collective essai about copyright and his exceptions, like detournement, collage and sampling»
58.
Self-Undoing Performed from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: The artist’s emaciated body was born out of a strict vegetarian diet consisting exclusively of small quantities of boiled or raw vegetables. Nebreda’s early artistic career began with a period of total silence which marked his first psychiatric internment at the age of eighteen, a period during which he began to develop his art of the self-portrait, a genre he has been practicing exclusively to this day. Typically, silence and starvation, verbal and alimentary abstinence participate in a movement
Undoings of the Other from:
Undoing Art
Abstract: M.A.C.: Madeleine Gide, André Gide’s deservedly angry, disappointed and deeply frustrated wife, given his well-documented and self-documented affection for others, such as Marc Allégret, destroyed his letters, which sent him into major anger. How not, to both reactions? We are talking major jealousy, for major-good reasons.
AVANT-PROPOS ET REMERCIEMENTS from:
Fiction, propagande, témoignage, réalité
Abstract: Il s’agit d’un ensemble de micro-essais relativement proches les uns des autres. En effet, bien que lisibles d’une façon autonome, ces cinq réflexions isolées entretiennent des liens importants. Nourries de redites et de recommencements, elles dessinent un espace critique caractérisé par une cohésion qui n’est pas nécessairement continue. Cet espace critique a d’ailleurs l’ambition de constituer — par le biais d’une série d’approximations successives — un véritable
work in
Book Title: A Political Companion to James Baldwin- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Deneen Patrick J.
Abstract: In
A Political Companion to James Baldwin, a group of prominent scholars assess the prolific author's relevance to present-day political challenges. Together, they address Baldwin as a democratic theorist, activist, and citizen, examining his writings on the civil rights movement, religion, homosexuality, and women's rights. They investigate the ways in which his work speaks to and galvanizes a collective American polity, and explore his views on the political implications of individual experience in relation to race and gender.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1vxm8w9
3 James Baldwin and the Politics of Disconnection from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) McWilliams Susan J.
Abstract: Giovanni’s Roombegins with its protagonist, a young, white American named David, staring out the window of a house in the south of France. There, brooding on the events that he is about to recount, David emphasizes that they “were acted out under a foreign sky.” He suggests that this fact undergirds all others in the narrative, that if you didn’t know he was an American abroad, you wouldn’t be able to understand the nature of what has transpired. To understand David, and David’s story, you must understand that he is an American who has traveled outside of America. “There
4 What William F. Buckley Jr. Did Not Understand about James Baldwin: from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Buccola Nicholas
Abstract: “The American Dream is at the expense of the American Negro.” This was the motion up for debate when the Cambridge Union Society hosted James Baldwin and William F. Buckley Jr. in February 1965. Baldwin, who was by then an internationally acclaimed novelist, playwright, essayist, and activist, was invited to argue on behalf of the motion, and Buckley, who, as editor of the
National Reviewmagazine and author of the booksGod and Man at YaleandUp from Liberalism, was fast emerging as a leading voice of American conservatism, was invited to argue against the motion. The scene of
7 Go Tell It on the Mountain: from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) McWilliams Wilson Carey
Abstract: Baldwin’s direct involvement in political affairs, however, was relatively slight, skeptical, and infrequent, confined almost entirely to the edge of movements, parties, and events.¹ He practiced a version of what Neal Riemer
9 Crossing Identitarian Lines: from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Norman Brian
Abstract: In 1970, celebrated black writer and political spokesperson James Baldwin met with renowned anthropologist Margaret Mead for “A Rap on Race.” The following year, Baldwin sat down for “A Dialogue” with young activist poet Nikki Giovanni on the television show
Soul!In each meeting, Baldwin doggedly maintained that the nation and all its divided groups must address their shared past of disenfranchisement and discrimination if the nation stood a chance at achieving its promises of full inclusion for all. The very public conversations evidence the tensions between white liberalism, integration projects, and a newly militant generation calling for self-determination and
10 “Where the People Can Sing, the Poet Can Live”: from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Schulenberg Ulf
Abstract: What is the legacy of James Baldwin? From today’s perspective, there are numerous possibilities for answering this question. One could, for instance, consider his impact on black studies, cultural studies, gay and lesbian studies, diaspora studies, and American studies. Or one might feel inclined to contend that his version of a radical humanism is particularly useful for postidentity politics at the beginning of the twenty-first century. Another possibility for confronting the question of Baldwin’s legacy would be to call attention to his understanding of the function of the writer as a public intellectual. According to Baldwin, the poet’s responsibility “is
12 James Baldwin on Violence and Disavowal from:
A Political Companion to James Baldwin
Author(s) Beard Lisa
Abstract: It is fitting that in national discourse surrounding police killings and related Black Lives Matter protests, so many reporters and activists have turned to James Baldwin to interpret contemporary racial politics and summon people toward political action. Baldwin, so relentless at confronting “white innocence” in his time, offers a vocabulary about violence and disavowal that aligns with and enunciates Black Lives Matter interventions in important ways.
Book Title: Negative Cosmopolitanism-Cultures and Politics of World Citizenship after Globalization
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): TOMSKY TERRI
Abstract: From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).From climate change, debt, and refugee crises to energy security, environmental disasters, and terrorism, the events that lead nightly newscasts and drive public policy demand a global perspective. In the twentieth century the world sought solutions through formal institutions of international governance such as the United Nations, the International Criminal Court, and the World Bank, but present-day responses to global realities are often more provisional, improvisational, and contingent. Tracing this uneven history in order to identify principal actors, contesting ideologies, and competing rhetoric, Negative Cosmopolitanism challenges the Kantian ideal of cosmopolitanism as the precondition for a perpetual global peace. Uniting literary scholars with researchers working on contemporary problems and those studying related issues of the past – including slavery, industrial capitalism, and corporate imperialism – essays in this volume scrutinize the entanglement of cosmopolitanism within expanding networks of trade and global capital from the eighteenth century to the present. By doing so, the contributors pinpoint the ways in which whole populations have been unwillingly caught up in a capitalist reality that has little in common with the earlier ideals of cosmopolitanism. A model for provoking new and necessary questions about neoliberalism, biopolitics, colonialism, citizenship, and xenophobia, Negative Cosmopolitanism establishes a fresh take on the representation of globalization and modern life in history and literature. Contributors Include Timothy Brennan (University of Minnesota), Juliane Collard (University of British Columbia), Mike Dillon (California State University, Fullerton), Sneja Gunew (University of British Columbia), Dina Gusejnova (University of Sheffield), Heather Latimer (University of British Columbia), Pamela McCallum (University of Calgary), Geordie Miller (Dalhousie University), Dennis Mischke (Universität Stuttgart), Peter Nyers (McMaster University), Liam O’Loughlin (Pacific Lutheran University), Crystal Parikh (New York University), Mark Simpson (University of Alberta), Melissa Stephens (Vancouver Island University), and Paul Ugor (Illinois State University).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1w0ddq5
Introduction: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Tomsky Terri
Abstract: Perhaps no contemporary discourse more fully expresses the character and ideals of cosmopolitanism than that of modern human rights. This essay describes a duality in our conception of the subject of human rights, and the critical opportunity inherent in that duality for recognizing and elaborating a negative cosmopolitanism that is, in Walter Mignolo’s terms, “critical and dialogic, emerging from the various spatial and historical locations of the colonial difference.”¹ In order to do so, it traces the historical development of human rights discourses and instruments, especially in relation to the institution of the United Nations and the decolonizing movements after
1 American Good Life, the Bandung Spirit, and a Human Rights Record from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Parikh Crystal
Abstract: Perhaps no contemporary discourse more fully expresses the character and ideals of cosmopolitanism than that of modern human rights. This essay describes a duality in our conception of the subject of human rights, and the critical opportunity inherent in that duality for recognizing and elaborating a negative cosmopolitanism that is, in Walter Mignolo’s terms, “critical and dialogic, emerging from the various spatial and historical locations of the colonial difference.”¹ In order to do so, it traces the historical development of human rights discourses and instruments, especially in relation to the institution of the United Nations and the decolonizing movements after
2 Sui Generous: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Miller Geordie
Abstract: Modern forms of philanthropy have close ties to cosmopolitanism. Both putatively reject the hierarchies of race, class, gender, language, religion, and nation in favour of a more fundamental understanding of human equality. Yet, as with cosmopolitanism, critics have linked philanthropy to the expansion of capital and the spread of exploitation. The correlation between capitalist and philanthropic expansion is clearest in the age of Empire. In fact, the
Oxford English Dictionarynotes that the word “humanitarian,” in the sense of a person committed to human welfare as the supreme good, first came into usage in 1843. The boom in philanthropic associations
3 Underwriting Cosmopolitanism: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Mischke Dennis
Abstract: In the middle of the Atlantic, on a day in September 1781, the captain of the British slave ship
Zongran out of water supplies for the 440 slaves that were penned and crowded below deck. Calculating that the sick or weak among them would very likely not generate the expected profit on the market, the captain decided to jettison 133 men, women, and children in order to file an insurance claim for a contract that had been underwritten in Liverpool, some thousand miles away. In a ruthless economic risk assessment predicated on pure probabilistic expectation, the £ 30 assigned
5 Disaster Cosmopolitanism: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) O’Loughlin Liam
Abstract: Mohsin Hamid’s noir novel
Moth Smoke(2000), set in Lahore amidst the South Asian nuclear tests of 1998, features a scene in which news of the successful Pakistani tests at the Chagai Hills reaches the novel’s protagonist, Daru. An otherwise disaffected character – recently fired from his a banking job and spiralling into drug addiction and crime – Daru unexpectedly discovers in himself “a strange excitement, the posture-correcting force of pride.”¹ In Daru’s upright stance, evoking a soldier standing at attention, Hamid isolates the intended impact of the Pakistani government’s nuclear tests: the establishment of a militarized ideological formation which scholars and
10 Standing Outside the Law: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Collard Juliane
Abstract: following months, headlines like this celebrated the passing of Portland’s prostitution-free zone ordinance as a crucial tool for the police to take back their neighbourhoods and business districts, and rid the city of illegalized prostitution.¹ The ordinance was encoded in the Portland City Code and Charter in the wake of longstanding conflict over the rapid expansion and lax regulation of adult businesses within the city limits. Frustrated in their attempts to enact tighter controls on the legal sex industry, neighbourhood activists turned to
12 Embedded Cosmopolitanism: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Gusejnova Dina
Abstract: In light of the human tragedies of the twentieth century, any historically sensitive engagement with the notion of cosmopolitanism today must to some extent begin
ex negativo. It is not just the case that international institutions such as the League of Nations were “lights” of Enlightenment that failed to provide lasting peace.¹ Cosmopolitan ideals had themselves become instruments of inhuman practice. Leading thinkers of each generation used cosmopolitan ideas of humanity to formulate rival conceptions of cultural hegemony, serving the aims of the Axis powers and the Allies, the states behind the Iron Curtain and those in front of it,
13 At Home in the World of the Wound: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Simpson Mark
Abstract: In an essay from 2001 on “Cosmopolitanism and Internationalism,” Timothy Brennan ventures to probe the contemporary significance of cosmopolitan desire for capitalist common sense. Reflecting critically on recent “calls for extra-statist forms of political community,” Brennan wonders whether it “would … not be more realistic to think of contemporary neo-liberal orthodoxy as a form of unofficial party organization across national frontiers.”¹ The evidence, he continues, is considerable: Far from puncturing dreams of cosmopolitan futurity, contemporary capitalist practice is – at least from Brennan’s devastating perspective – crucial to them. The blistering rigours of neoliberal doctrine – deregulation, monetarism, indebtedness, “the financialization of everything”³–
Afterword: from:
Negative Cosmopolitanism
Author(s) Nyers Peter
Abstract: Today, cosmopolitanism has become much more than an idea. It has become the meaningful political horizon for how subjectivity is enacted. I will have to return more fully to this formulation in a moment because the cosmopolitanisms presented in this volume are not, at first blush at least, the happy universalism celebrated by advocates of world citizenship and global democratic governance. The negative cosmopolitanisms of this book have little resemblance to the form envisioned by the Enlightenment tradition. The halcyon days of a cosmopolitanism focused on building universal institutions in order to enable world citizenship have run their course. In
Does persuasion really come at “the end of reasons”? from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Salis Pietro
Abstract: Persuasion is a special aspect of our social and linguistic practices – one where an interlocutor, or an audience, is induced, to perform a certain action or to endorse a certain belief, and these episodes are not due to the force of the better reason. When we come near persuasion, it seems that, in general, we are somehow giving up factual discourse (and perhaps the principles of logic), since persuading must be understood as almost different from convincing rationally¹. Sometimes, for example, we can find persuasion a political speech that relies on our feelings, emotions and values, but we can also
Writing, trace, image. from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Borutti Silvana
Abstract: The writing of history is a fundamental theme in Michel de Certeau. However, it is not solely a methodological and epistemological issue. Indeed, we cannot understand Certeau’s contribution to the epistemology of history if we do not link it to the most original aspects of his perspective, which are to be found in what I would call the field of historical ontology. I will therefore first deal with his conception of historiography as a writing practice which produces ontological and political effects. I will then consider Certeau’s analysis of some images, which he interprets as traces and, as such, as
Seeing a picture in an individual from:
Verità Immagine Normatività / Truth, Image, and Normativity
Author(s) Voltolini Alberto
Abstract: In this paper, I want to show, first, that seeing a picture in an individual is the same as seeing a picture in its metasculpture. This idea is grounded in the fact that an individual and the picture seen in it share some of their grouping properties, the properties for the elements of a certain array to be arranged along a certain direction in a dimension. Second, I will try to draw from this account a moral to hold in general as to a seeing-in as a distinctive twofold perceptual experience whose recognitional fold depends not only existentially, but also
1 Mourning the Loss of Wild Soundscapes: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) KRAUSE BERNIE
Abstract: Historically, natural soundscapes have been recorded in fragmented, decontextualized formats, the emphasis focused on the abstraction of single species’ animal voices intentionally removed from their more holistic and informative acoustic fabric. This older model, first expressed in the late nineteenth century when recording technologies were in their infancy, became an act of faith by the 1930s when ornithologists first applied the parabolic dish primarily to the capture of bird song and calls. The 1935 recording of the ivory-billed woodpecker in a Georgia swamp by Arthur Allen and Peter Kellogg from Cornell’s Macaulay Library of Natural Sound fixed a course that
2 Environmental Mourning and the Religious Imagination from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) MENNING NANCY
Abstract: We don’t grieve abstractly; we mourn particular losses of people, places, animals, objects, and ideas to whom and to which we are attached. These losses range from the most direct to those grasped only in the historical imagination. The death of a pet, the paving over of a favourite childhood playsite, the roadside body of the deer we just hit with our car, river gorges obliterated by dam-building projects, mountaintops removed by mining, once-familiar landscapes permanently transformed by nuclear contamination, night stars obscured by light pollution, and the absence of buffalo moving freely across the Great Plains are all grievable
3 Mourning Ourselves and/as Our Relatives: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) BRAUN SEBASTIAN F.
Abstract: I want to begin this exploration with three statements about mourning and the environment. The first two are related to the longstanding discussion about buffalo in Yellowstone National Park. Because they are suspected of being exposed to brucellosis, the state of Montana has engaged in a variety of plans and strategies to kill these buffalo upon entering its territory. Activists, both Native and non-Native, have long protested these practices. As part of their argument for better treatment of the buffalo, they have been portraying the buffalo in ways that show similarities in these animals to human behaviour. One buffalo behaviour
9 Making Loss the Centre: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) DI BATTISTA AMANDA
Abstract: As members of a large interdisciplinary environmental studies faculty at York University, we are continually confronted by the devastating effects of environmental loss and by the inability of our community of scholars, students, and activists to grieve for these losses in meaningful ways. In our teaching practices, we uncover systemic forms of violence against both humans and the more-than-human world and risk encouraging abject despair as we struggle to resist hegemonic Western capitalist narratives of progress. While the extinction of species across the globe, the violence of resource extraction, and the consequences of our daily consumptive practices are inscribed on
10 Emotional Solidarity: from:
Mourning Nature
Author(s) KRETZ LISA
Abstract: The ecological crisis provides no shortage of evidence for justified mourning. For a non-exhaustive list, consider the following: overpopulation (more than 200,000 people added every day); global warming (global ice cap melting, sea level rise, increasing catastrophic natural disasters); deforestation (32 million acres annually); unsustainable agriculture¹ (the abominable treatment of non-human animals aside, current farming practices are responsible for 70 per cent of the pollution of United States rivers and streams); unsustainable transportation (a single car emits 12,000 pounds of carbon dioxide every year in the form of exhaust; in the United States cars emit roughly the same amount of
Capítulo 3 El poder en la solidificación del relato histórico from:
Santa Bárbara, el barrio que no soportó las tempestades
Abstract: La relectura del pasado de Bogotá propuesta por los emprendedores de la memoria, en la que otorgaban al barrio Santa Bárbara un papel protagonista en diferentes ámbitos de la vida urbana santafereña, tuvo un logro importante: consiguieron un espacio de discusión en la esfera pública y obtuvieron legitimación por parte de las organizaciones estatales encargadas. El siguiente reto consistía en dar cumplimiento a los acuerdos alcanzados por el CMMNN. Es decir, estos actores debían lograr fijar su producción de historia, y así mantener su “capacidad de narrar”¹ en el relato histórico de la ciudad, incluyendo la participación que, principalmente, el
Book Title: Nietzsche's Great Politics- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): DROCHON HUGO
Abstract: Nietzsche's impact on the world of culture, philosophy, and the arts is uncontested, but his political thought remains mired in controversy. By placing Nietzsche back in his late-nineteenth-century German context,
Nietzsche's Great Politicsmoves away from the disputes surrounding Nietzsche's appropriation by the Nazis and challenges the use of the philosopher in postmodern democratic thought. Rather than starting with contemporary democratic theory or continental philosophy, Hugo Drochon argues that Nietzsche's political ideas must first be understood in light of Bismarck's policies, in particular his "Great Politics," which transformed the international politics of the late nineteenth century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wf4chc
INTRODUCTION from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche’s impact on the world of culture, philosophy, and the arts is uncontested, but his contribution to political thought remains mired in controversy. The source of that controversy resides in his political misappropriation by the Nazis during World War II, and we are still counting the cost of that appropriation for contemporary scholarship today. So the price that Walter Kaufmann—in his seminal
Nietzsche: Philosopher, Psychologist, Antichrist, first published in 1950, now in its fourth edition—paid to rescue Nietzsche from the philosophical abyss he had fallen into after the war was to deny him any interest in politics.¹
CHAPTER 6 GREAT POLITICS from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: Nietzsche’s productive life almost exactly spans Bismarck’s era. He was a medical orderly in the Franco-Prussian War (1870–71), but fell ill and only served for two months. Serving as a medical orderly was quite a common experience for many of the more “spiritual” types of Nietzsche’s generation. Most, however, were not as fortunate as he was to have actually survived, being decimated by various diseases contracted on the battlefield—illness already being a greater harvester of souls than war itself.¹ Nietzsche had previously volunteered as a cavalry officer in his local town, Naumburg, but after a self-described promising start,
CONCLUSION: from:
Nietzsche's Great Politics
Abstract: one effect of Nietzsche’s work, as that of others, may be to make us question how far the criteria we think we have are actually expressed in anything that actually happens. What we have to do, rather, is to take up those elements of Nietzsche’s thought that seem to make most sense to us in terms of such things as our ethical understanding, our understanding of history, and the relations of
Book Title: Class in the Composition Classroom-Pedagogy and the Working Class
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): THELIN WILLIAM H.
Abstract: The real college experiences of veterans, rural Midwesterners, and trade unionists show that what it means to be working class is not obvious or easily definable. Resisting outdated characterizations of these students as underprepared and dispensing with a one-size-fits-all pedagogical approach, contributors address how region and education impact students, explore working-class pedagogy and the ways in which it can reify social class in teaching settings, and give voice to students' lived experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1whm918
INTRODUCTION from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Carter Genesea M.
Abstract: Travis, eighteen, had just started his first year at the University of Wisconsin–Stout. An undeclared major at Wisconsin’s only polytechnic, he came to UW–Stout hoping to major in something practical. He chose Stout because it is a few hours’ drive from home, the people were friendly during his campus visit, the college town was small, and his application was accepted. Travis, like many of the students at UW–Stout, is from a small rural farming community and does not know what he wants to do yet. He is pretty sure he wants to stay in Wisconsin and maybe
6 CHANGING DEFINITIONS OF WORK AND CLASS IN THE INFORMATION ECONOMY from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Edwards Mike
Abstract: Class changes. As coauthors, our own attitudes toward class differ in some ways and overlap in others. Edie-Marie worked as an undergraduate with federally funded TRIO programs for disadvantaged students but does not identify as working class, despite her dad having worked in a factory all her life and having worked in one herself. Mike served for four years as an enlisted soldier driving tractor trailers for the United States Army but does not claim a working-class identity despite that experience. As contributors to this volume, we have both been interested in the differences between our own experiences of class
12 SOCIAL ECONOMIES OF LITERACY IN RURAL OREGON: from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Brewster Cori
Abstract: Drawing on a subset of interviews conducted with fifty-two students from rural Oregon attending eleven public two-and four-year colleges across the state, I focus in this chapter on the diverse sponsorship histories of seven rural, working-class students and the social economies of literacy in which these students participate.¹ I include occasions in which students have been sponsored as well as occasions in which they have served as self-sponsors and actively sponsored the literacies of others. As Kim Donehower, Charlotte Hogg, and Eileen Schell have argued, the “rhetoric of lack” through which rural experience is so often read in public discourse
13 RETHINKING CLASS: from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Toth Christie
Abstract: The educational impact of poverty on working-class students often goes unexamined in disciplinary conversations about composition pedagogy and theory. This elision reflects a long-standing national rhetoric that simplifies interactions between social classes and hails a middle-class identity so persuasively that most Americans self-identify as middle class, regardless of their economic bracket, material affordances, or social interests.² As a result, narratives about education and social uplift tend to obscure many of the lived realities of students experiencing poverty.³ In first-year composition courses, where many students first encounter the linguistic and cultural expectations of a middle-class professoriate, examining the relationships between class
16 LITERACY DEVELOPMENT AS SOCIAL PRACTICE IN THE LIVES OF FOUR WORKING-CLASS WOMEN from:
Class in the Composition Classroom
Author(s) Ebsworth Miriam Eisenstein
Abstract: Literacy, in a traditional sense, is the ability to decode written texts and to encode oral language into writing. Yet many researchers and theorists argue that learning to read and write involves social activities influenced by interactions¹ and mediated by class affiliations.² In addition, gender, race, and ethnicity impact how individuals compose internal narratives driving motivation and academic performance.³ Therefore, the narratives we construct through our exchanges with families, teachers, and peers frame our literate identities. The recent focus on the achievement of academic literacy by all learners has underscored the challenges that must be addressed by individuals from different
Book Title: The History Problem-The Politics of War Commemoration in East Asia
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press
Author(s): Saito Hiro
Abstract: Seventy years have passed since the end of the Asia-Pacific War, yet Japan remains embroiled in controversy with its neighbors over the war’s commemoration. Among the many points of contention between Japan, China, and South Korea are interpretations of the Tokyo War Crimes Trial, apologies and compensation for foreign victims of Japanese aggression, prime ministerial visits to the Yasukuni Shrine, and the war’s portrayal in textbooks. Collectively, these controversies have come to be called the “history problem." But why has the problem become so intractable? Can it ever be resolved, and if so, how? To answer these questions, Hiro Saito mobilizes the sociology of collective memory and social movements, political theories of apology and reconciliation, psychological research on intergroup conflict, and philosophical reflections on memory and history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0r56
CHAPTER 4 The Coexistence of Nationalism and Cosmopolitanism, 1997–2015 from:
The History Problem
Abstract: The Japanese Society for History Textbook Reform (JSHTR), launched in January 1997, attacked postwar history education for forcing Japanese citizens to lose national pride: “Especially the modern historiography treats the Japanese people as if they were criminals who must continue to atone and apologize forever. This masochistic tendency became even stronger after the Cold War ended. Right now, history textbooks in Japan present the propagandas of the former enemy countries as historical facts.”¹ JSHTR members also met with Minister of Education Kosugi Takashi, trying to persuade him to reject masochistic tendencies— the increased descriptions of Japan’s past wrongdoings—in history
CHAPTER 5 The Legacy of the Tokyo Trial from:
The History Problem
Abstract: The preceding chapters have analyzed how East Asia’s history problem evolved through continuous struggles among relevant political actors competing for the legitimate commemoration of the Asia-Pacific War. These actors included the government, political parties, and NGOs in Japan; the governments, NGOs, and victims of Japan’s past wrongdoings in South Korea and China; and historians and educators from the three countries. They defined their commemorative positions by drawing differently on nationalism and cosmopolitanism and tried to influence Japan’s official commemoration by exploiting available mobilizing structures and political opportunities. I argue that one of the most important findings of this field analysis
Book Title: Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature- Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Mäkikalli Aino
Abstract: This collection of essays studies the encounter between allegedly ahistorical concepts of narratology and eighteenth-century literature. It questions whether the general concepts of narratology are as such applicable to historically specific fields, or whether they need further specification. Furthermore, at issue is the question whether the theoretical concepts actually are, despite their appearance of ahistorical generality, derived from the historical study of a particular period and type of literature. In the essays such concepts as genre, plot, character, event, tellability, perspective, temporality, description, reading, metadiegetic narration, and paratext are scrutinized in the context of eighteenth-century texts. The writers include some of the leading theorists of both narratology and eighteenth-century literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0r6q
Formalism and Historicity Reconciled in Henry Fielding’s Tom Jones from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Richetti John
Abstract: Every student of Henry Fielding’s
Tom Jonesquotes Samuel Taylor Coleridge’s remark in hisTable Talk: ‘What a master of composition Fielding was! Upon my word, I think theOedipus Tyrannus, theAlchemist, andTom Jones, the three most perfect plots ever planned’ (Coleridge, 1856, p. 521). The novel’s justly-celebrated plot with its twists and turns and surprises seems to involve for readers a series of uncertainties about the ultimate fates of its characters. And yet Fielding’s plot is distinct from what we now think of as ‘plot’. For one thing, the narrative unfolds in a supremely leisurely and digressive
Authorial Narration Reconsidered from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Birke Dorothee
Abstract: From a narratological point of view, one of the most controversial legacies the eighteenth-century novel has bestowed onto its inheritors is the technique of authorial narration. Described by Franz K. Stanzel as one of three typical narrative situations, authorial narration as defined in the
Routledge Encyclopedia of Narrative Theoryis ‘characterized by a highly audible and visible narrator’ who ‘sees the story from the ontological position of an outsider, that is, a position of absolute authority which allows her/him to know everything about events and characters, including their thoughts and unconscious motives’ (Jahn, 2005, p. 364). This association of authorial
Immediacy from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Nitschke Claudia
Abstract: Systematic narratological classification helps identify ‘trans-historical’ phenomena which share defining characteristics, but can still change over time in terms of form or function. In the eighteenth century, seminal, longterm social and political shifts (even before the French Revolution) became widely tangible. With society undergoing massive structural changes, literature formed no exception: writers began taking stock and started rigorously to probe and investigate the semantic potential of emergent genres such as the novel, but also the narrative medium itself.
The Tension between Idea and Narrative Form from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Waldschmidt Christine
Abstract: For the literature of the eighteenth century, particularly for those works that are seen as part of the Enlightenment, critics have foregrounded the moral, didactic interest of these texts. In the Enlightenment view, literature is supposed to serve a purpose (cf. Pizer, 2005, p. 91), and literary texts are always understood in terms of their function as serving moral goals. This penchant for the usefulness of literature is not very surprising: The Enlightenment defines itself as a movement towards greater intellectual independence and moral instruction – leading mankind out of its ‘selfinflicted immaturity’.² Hence the Enlightenment tends to explain the (ever-noticeable)
‘Speaking Well of the Dead’ from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Pritchard Penny
Abstract: In depicting the character and personality of their deceased subject, English Protestant ministers in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries employ features of writing strikingly comparable to contemporary works of fictional narrative. Such features include not only the selective inclusion of biographical details from the subject’s life and death, but a spectrum of seemingly ‘literary’ devices such as the portrayal of multiple points of view through eyewitness ‘testimonials’, direct quotation of correspondence, poetry, diary entries, and vividly-realized deathbed scenes (some of which include dialogue).
The Use of Paratext in Popular Eighteenth-Century Biography from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Rogers Pat
Abstract: Why Curll, of all people? A natural reaction to the title of this essay might be to wonder what the rascally publisher Edmund Curll has to do with narratology, the theme of this volume. It might be thought that Curll (1683-1747) was an interesting fellow, no doubt, but scarcely a pioneer of writerly innovation. The case I shall try to make here is that Curll’s most characteristic productions, above all the instant biographies he brought out in the late 1720s and early 1730s, do tell us something about paratext – specifically on the way it constitutes a type of narrative statement
Peritextual Disposition in French Eighteenth-Century Narratives from:
Narrative Concepts in the Study of Eighteenth-Century Literature
Author(s) Ikonen Teemu
Abstract: The study of the so-called transnational novel has demonstrated the variety of practices of rewriting inside and across linguistic borders in the eighteenth century Europe (see e.g. Montandon, 1999; Stewart, 2009). Original works from the period are hard to distinguish from translations, translations of translations, pseudo-translations, authorial revisions, free adaptations, impostures, crudely abridged editions and other versions (Stewart, 2009, pp. 164-65). According to Coulet (1992), French authors were particularly busy revising their own works. Significant changes in narration and plot were common. Well-known is marquis de Sade’s transposition from first-person narration in
Justine(1791) to third person inLa Nouvelle
Chapter Four FOUNDING MOTHERS from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The Seven Caves of heaven are the point of departure for an intriguing story about the events of a remote past recorded in the Ñuu Dzaui manuscripts (Codex Tonindeye, 14–21). Heaven, we now understand, is both the general sacred living space of the Gods and an actual sanctuary on a mountaintop near Yuta Tnoho. The seven caves (Chicomoztoc) are a metaphor for earthly origin. At the same time, they may refer to actual caves in the area with ceremonial functions. In this case, a pair emerges: Lady 3 Flint ‘Shell Quechquemitl, Plumed Serpent’ (“Power and Strength of the Plumed
Chapter Six LORD of the TOLTECS from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: On the day 13 Flower, the seventh day of the year after the death of his father, 6 Reed (1083), Lord 8 Deer ‘Jaguar Claw’ went hunting on the Mountain of the Temple of Heaven, where offerings of knotted grass and shells—spondylus and strombus—had been made in preparation for this act. With his arrows he shot a coyote.¹ Lord 8 Deer and his elder half-brother, Lord 12 Movement, both painted black with the hallucinogenic ointments of priests, sacrificed the coyote and a deer for a celestial spirit, Lord 13 Reed, who spoke to them from Heaven. Codex Iya
Chapter Eight FLUTE of the DIVINE from:
Encounter with the Plumed Serpent
Abstract: The pictorial manuscripts of Ñuu Dzaui give Detailed and important information on the nature of rulership in the ancient society that produced them. In general, political agency involves different sources of power: “
Objectivesources include wealth and factors of production, whilesymbolicsources include elements of a cognitive code, including religion and ritual” (Blanton et al. 1996: 3).
Book Title: Irish Literature Since 1990-Diverse Voices
Publisher: Manchester University Press
Author(s): Parker Michael
Abstract: This volume explores the meaning of republicanism in contemporary Ireland. While this has often been identified simply with nationalism, the book examines the connections, comparisons and contrasts between Irish republicanism and other strands of republican politics: the ideology and practice of official French republicanism, the broader European and American civic republican tradition and the contemporary revival of this tradition of citizenship.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wn0rxk
10 Neither here nor there: from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Parker Michael
Abstract: Confirmation that a new generation of talented poets is beginning to re-shape the face of Irish and Northern Irish literature can be found in two recent anthologies: Selima Guinness’s
The New Irish Poets(2004) and John Brown’sMagnetic North: The Emerging Poets (2005).³ Amongst the defining characteristics of the new poetry, according to Guinness, are a postmodernist distrust of grand narratives, an alertness to wider geopolitical concerns, and a preoccupation with domestic and family, rather than national history. For Brown, whose focus is exclusively on Northern poetry, the coming poetic generation displays a high degree of mobility and disparity in
11 ‘Tomorrow we will change our names, invent ourselves again’: from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Harte Liam
Abstract: It is simply not possible to write purposefully, let alone comprehensively, about the swirling abundance of themes and trends in contemporary Irish fiction and autobiography in the space allotted to me here. Every
tour d’horizonmust be hedged about with qualifications and hesitations, every typological gesture thwarted by the fact of thematic and stylistic diversity.² In short, the closer one looks for continuities and correspondences, the more one becomes aware of kaleidoscopic variety. Indeed, the motifs of fragmentation and incompletion are themselves among the most recurrent in recent Irish writing, being especially marked in the contemporary short story, a genre
12 Anne Enright and postnationalism in the contemporary Irish novel from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Hansson Heidi
Abstract: Anne Enright has been hailed as one of the most exciting contemporary Irish writers, praised for her lyrical, evocative language and her original style. Her collection of stories,
The Portable Virgin(1991), was shortlisted for the Irish Times/Aer Lingus Irish Literature Prize and won the Rooney Prize in 1991, her first novel,The Wig My Father Wore(1995), met with widespread critical acclaim and her subsequent novels,What Are You Like?(2000) andThe Pleasure of Eliza Lynch(2002), have attracted much interest, as attested by reviews in theTimes Literary Supplement, theLondon Review of Booksandthe New
14 Secret gardens: from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Lynch Vivian Valvano
Abstract: The publication of Patrick O’Keeffe’s 2005 collection of four novellas,
The Hill Road, marked the arrival of a significant new voice in Irish fiction. Born in Ireland in 1963, O’Keeffe grew up on a dairy farm in Limerick near the Tipperary border. At the age of twenty-three he emigrated to the United States, but only became legally resident there in 1989, after winning his green card in a lottery. His stories clearly reflect his own diasporic status, since his characters are frequently haunted by the culture they cannot quite leave behind. While the recurring motifs of buried secrets in an
15 ‘What’s it like being Irish?’ from:
Irish Literature Since 1990
Author(s) Jeffers Jennifer M.
Abstract: In a recent, brief essay, ‘Green Yodel No. 1’, Roddy Doyle stresses that Irish identity is in an exciting period of transformation because of the influx of immigrants from such places as Nigeria, Latvia and China. Instead of a reactive response to preserve Irish homogeneity, Doyle welcomes the chance for the Irish ‘to invent new stories, new art, new voices, new music. . . . New love stories, family sagas, new jealousies, rivalries, new beginning and new endings. We live in exciting times, if we want them.’³ Doyle himself has begun to celebrate these new beginnings in what he calls
CHAPTER 1 The Issue of Hope as the Starting Point from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: The sociologist Peter Berger highlights one of the major differences between premodern and modern societies. In the former, one could find a great measure of fate, inasmuch as the possibilities of changing practices and conducts were restricted. In medicine, in nonscientific techniques, in methods of education, and so forth, there was little room for maneuvering. By contrast, “the modern individual … lives in a world of choice…. He must choose in innumerable situations of everyday life; but this necessity of choosing reaches into the areas of beliefs, values, and worldviews.”¹ This necessity of choosing he calls “the heretical imperative,” from
CHAPTER 3 Thomas Aquinas on the Word Embodied in Christ from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: This chapter introduces a medieval thinker, Thomas Aquinas, and investigates how he understands several central aspects of the act of faith. Since it is very important to take account of the affective side of faith, we shall begin with his views on the interaction between faith and love. Thereafter, I shall vindicate the centrality of the First Truth, which intellectually grounds faith in a God whose presence, self-revelation, and self-communication are real. Next, we shall ponder the way Aquinas assesses the role and compass of human reason in the faith experience. We shall end with a description of what he
CHAPTER 5 Bernard Lonergan: from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan (1904–84) was, in my estimation, the premier Roman Catholic theologian of the twentieth century. Basically a Thomist, he nevertheless displayed remarkable creativity in the areas of epistemology, method, and historical consciousness.¹ His contribution to a theology of faith hinges upon two conversions: religious and intellectual. Accordingly, after briefly characterizing a third kind of conversion, the moral one, which is less important here for a theology of faith, this chapter shows the impact of religious and intellectual conversion.² The first two sections discuss the interaction between
religiousconversion and the role of the word and of belief; the
CHAPTER 6 Three Structuring Dynamisms from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: We have listened to reflections on the drama of hope, to the Bible, to exegetes, and to a good number of philosophers and theologians, principally Thomas Aquinas, John Henry Newman, and Bernard Lonergan. So I assume my readers are ready for an actualization of Christian faith in accordance with the concerns, hesitancies, worries, and questions about affective fulfillment, the meaning of human life, and truth, which were described in the introduction and in chapter 1. With respect to Lonergan’s levels of intentionality, I situate affective fulfillment on the fourth level, meaning on the second, and truth on the third.
CHAPTER 7 Confirming the Tripartite Structure from:
The Three Dynamisms of Faith
Abstract: The first section of this chapter will explain the importance of the distinctive roles that meaning and truth play in the attraction to God. Second, stages will be differentiated in the process of coming to believe. Third, some light will be thrown upon the complementarity of feelings and insights. Fourth, we shall ask whether religious experience is the main criterion of
Book Title: Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity-The Ethics of Theatricality in Kant, Kierkegaard, and Levinas
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): PICKETT HOWARD
Abstract: Drawing on the writings of Immanuel Kant, Søren Kierkegaard, and Emmanuel Levinas, Howard Pickett presents a vivid defense of "virtuous hypocrisy." Our fetish for transparency tends to allow us to forget that the self may not be worthy of expression, and may become unethically narcissistic in the act of expression. Alert to this ambivalence, these great thinkers advocate incongruent ways of being.
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticityoffers an engaging new appraisal not only of the ethics of theatricality but of the theatricality of ethics, contending that pursuit of one's ideal self entails a relational and ironic performance of identity that lies beyond the pure notion of expressive individualism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1wvwdtb
INTRODUCTION: from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: “All the world’s a stage, / And all the men and women merely players” is a sentiment that neither debuts nor disappears with Shakespeare.¹ Plato, Seneca, and Saint Paul, among others, adopt the
theatrum mundi(theater of the world) analogy to highlight resemblances between human existence and theatrical performance.² More recently, dramaturgical sociologists (Erving Goffman) have analyzed social roles and interactions using theatrical metaphors.³ Psychologists and advocates of drama therapy (Jean Piaget) have af-firmed imitation’s formative role in cognitive and moral development.⁴And philosophers (Judith Butler) have emphasized the performative aspects of identity.⁵Clearly, whatever their differences, these examples (modern, premodern, and postmodern) reveal
[PART I Introduction] from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: What Cosby’s joke reveals, if crassly, is that there is a problem with self-congruence.¹ As I come to argue, there are three main problems with making an unqualified virtue of the agreement between what I seem to be and what I actually am. The first, considered in this opening study of Immanuel Kant, is the ”Problem of Imperfection.” Modernity’s esteem for self-congruence—especially, but not exclusively, between inner thought and outer expression—assumes that the inner self is worthy of congruence and the externalization of ”Sincerity” in particular. What we too often forget, however, is that the self may be
1. THE TROUBLE WITH LYING: from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Immanuel Kant’s preoccupation with self-congruence reveals itself most famously—or infamously, depending on your point of view—in his absolute prohibition against lying. However, as this first chapter demonstrates, Kant mounts a passionate, repeated, and multidimensional endorsement of self-congruence that encompasses more than the conformity between what I think and what I say. Reading through Kant’s practical philosophy—from the early ethics lectures (1762) through
The Metaphysics of Morals(1797) and beyond—one finds Kant’s repeated affirmation of (1) truthfulness, (2) sincerity, (3) autonomy, and (4) character.¹ To clarify Kant’s views, the following discussion focuses on these specific forms of
2. VIRTUOUS HYPOCRISY: from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Immanuel Kant’s commitment to the self-congruence of character, with its pervasive impact on his moral thought in particular, may surprise some readers. Much more surprising, however, is his belief that the cultivation of character also requires incongruence. Despite his well-known prohibition against lying and a related distaste for hypocrisy, Kant often recommends something strikingly similar to both. Specifically, he recommends both
dissimulation(concealing one’s thoughts and feelings) andsimulation(pretending to be something one is not). Just as surprising—and just as revealing of his ambivalence toward self-congruence—is the subject of this chapter’s latter half: Kant’s occasional recommendation of
3. INEVITABLE INSINCERITY: from:
Rethinking Sincerity and Authenticity
Abstract: Like Immanuel Kant before him, Søren Kier kegaard exhibits modernity’s acute ambivalence toward self-congruence. Kierkegaard’s opposition to incongruence reveals itself in his career-long indictment of hypocrisy. Caught in the crosshairs of much of Kierkegaard’s work are the pretentious ambitions of Hegelian philosophy, whose practitioners claim to know more than they do,¹ and the insincere conformity of the Danish state church, whose members claim to believe more than they do.² Kierkegaard’s works (published and unpublished, pseudonymous and signed, philosophical and religious) exhort the reader to shun incongruence. Instead, they encourage the reader to be true to the actual, existing “single individual,”
Book Title: Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Marchessault Guy
Abstract: Cet ouvrage innovateur et unique cristallise l'état actuel de la réflexion sur le témoignage de foi chrétienne dans les médias. Les conférenciers provenant d'universités, de médias et de diverses sphères religieuses et professionnelles, donnent à l'ouvrage une dimension interreligieuse et multiculturelle très riche. Être témoin de foi chrétienne, qu'est-ce à dire ? Le livre explicite d'abord le témoignage tel que vécu par les chrétiens de la primitive Église et par les croyants et croyantes d'aujourd'hui. Puis, l'ouvrage tente de discerner la relation proprement dite entre le témoignage de foi chrétienne et les médias : qui sera témoin ? de quoi ? où ? quand ? comment ? à cause de quoi ? en vue de quoi ? et avec quelles conséquences pour les religions ? Somme toute, y a-t-il compatibilité ou incompatibilité entre médias et foi ? Certains intervenants remettent en cause des aspects de cette présence, d'autre l'acceptent conditionnellement, bon nombre y croient fermement, et même jusqu'à prôner le côté révolutionnaire de médias religieux parallèles dans le contexte mercantile actuel. Voilà un matériau de réflexion complètement neuf, qui ouvre des perspectives inédites sur la présence de la foi chrétienne en pleine culture médiatique du XXIe siècle.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1ww3whj
2. Témoigner de sa foi chrétienne par des histoires d’intensification from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Rigby Paul
Abstract: Des témoins, ça raconte des histoires. Dans ma tentative de déterminer quelques-unes des caractéristiques des histoires que les chrétiens ordinaires racontent, j’examinerai quelques cas choisis dans le ministère pastoral quotidien. Je vais commencer en présentant les idées qui guident ma recherche¹.
8. Les témoins de foi religieuse ont-ils une véritable influence sur les publics ? from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) De Guise Jacques
Abstract: Quels sont les effets sur le public de l’intervention du témoin de la foi religieuse dans les médias ? Si je prends la question au pied de la lettre, je ne suis pas sûr qu’on puisse y répondre dans l’état actuel des connaissances. Je suis professeur de communication depuis trop longtemps pour ne pas traiter ce type de question avec prudence. Ce dont je suis certain, c’est que la question des effets des médias n’est pas
14. Langage audiovisuel et sensibilité en pastorale : from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Coffey Francis D.
Abstract: Les adolescents vivent à la frontière de ce lieu où la foi rencontre les nouveaux médias. Une attention minutieuse au ministère pastoral auprès de ce groupe fournit, corrige et confirme les caractéristiques du témoignage approprié à ce contexte nouveau. Une écoute sensible de la foi et de sa force jusqu’à une telle frontière engage ainsi les agents pastoraux à entrer en territoire étranger. Pensons au
body piercing, au port des vêtements déstructurés, auxravespacifiques, pour ne nommer que quelques-uns des phénomènes de la jeunesse actuelle. Pour parler en termes thématiques de cette situation, il semblerait que de nouvelles dimensions
16. Appel à témoins en information ! from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Longchamp Albert
Abstract: Même engagé par son opinion personnelle, par l’éthique professionnelle et pour les valeurs établies par la charte rédactionnelle de son employeur, le journaliste vise l’objectivité, l’impartialité et l’authenticité, ces contraintes « vertueuses », comme dit méchamment Bourdieu, qui incitent le journaliste à s’approcher de la vérité, tout en légitimant la liberté de la presse et l’indépendance du journaliste.
19. Le témoignage et l’imaginaire from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Bianchi Jean
Abstract: Je me propose à travers ces quelques réflexions d’envisager le témoin et le témoignage sous un angle particulier : celui de l’imaginaire. Pas seulement pour situer le témoin imaginaire (le personnage de fiction) par rapport au témoin réel (l’acteur historique). Pas uniquement pour détecter les mythes qui légitiment les discours, le halo imaginaire qui enveloppe tout témoignage (d’une croyance) exprimé dans l’espace médiatique. Mais aussi pour repérer les sources où s’alimentent et se rechargent les dynamiques du témoignage public, la force des témoins.
21. Le rôle des médias dans la croissance de la foi religieuse from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) White Robert A.
Abstract: Au long des années, j’ai été fasciné par de nombreux exemples de conversion par les médias de masse, spécialement par les médias apparemment séculiers. Le théologien John Shea affirme que les artistes populaires sont parmi les premiers à détecter les sensibilités religieuses qui émergent de la culture contemporaine¹. On ferait bien, propose Shea, de suivre la poésie, les romans, le théâtre, le cinéma et la télévision contemporains pour comprendre comment les gens font l’expérience du transcendant. De son côté, le théologien italien Pierangelo Sequeri croit que la clé pour croire, dans la vision fragmentée de la personne postmoderne actuelle, passe
27. Témoigner de sa foi en culture et médias électroniques, c’est faire le choix d’une narration qui échappe au mercantilisme from:
Témoigner de sa foi, dans les médias, aujourd'hui
Author(s) Boomershine Thomas E.
Abstract: La question : « comment être témoin de la foi chrétienne dans la communication médiatique électronique ? » est inextricablement liée à celle de l’établissement des conditions requises de la part d’un témoin de foi pour être authentique et signifiant dans la communication publique. Cette question est liée au mystère de savoir comment Dieu communique avec nous dans et à travers quels moyens de communication. Le casse-tête est d’autant plus stimulant qu’il y a beaucoup de réponses différentes données actuellement à cette question. Et un certain nombre de conservateurs évangéliques ou culturels, qui se croient les plus assurés de leurs
2 Modern Chivalry’s Defense of “the Few”: from:
The Illiberal Imagination
Abstract: “The imagination that has produced much of the best and most characteristic American fiction,” writes Richard Chase at the outset of
The American Novel and Its Tradition(1957), “has been shaped by the contradictions and not by the unities and harmonies of our culture.”. Though absent fromThe American Novel and Its Tradition,Hugh Henry Brackenridge’sModern Chivalry—a sprawling episodic travel novel published in seven volumes over the course of twenty-three years (1792, 1792, 1793, 1797, 1804, 1805, 1815)—has been described in terms that recall Chase’s account of how the American novel supposedly diverges from the European (and,
Book Title: Ottawa, lieu de vie français- Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): CHARBONNEAU François
Abstract: Issu du Chantier Ottawa, un projet collaboratif et interdisciplinaire, cet ouvrage magistral réunit des chercheurs qui s'intéressent à l'histoire des institutions francophones de la capitale, au profil de leurs dirigeants, à leurs réseaux. Il analyse la croissance et les caractéristiques de la population de langue française au fil du temps, sa diversification grandissante, et la transformation de ses milieux de vie.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76dxv
Chapitre 4 La mobilisation mémorielle de la communauté francophone d’Ottawa face à la densification urbaine from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) Ramirez Caroline
Abstract: Dans le contexte urbanistique actuel, particulièrement favorable au développement urbain durable, la densification du tissu bâti existant s’est imposée comme une solution parmi les plus adéquates pour contrecarrer l’étalement urbain et ses effets néfastes¹. Ce mode de planification vise à freiner le gaspillage des terres, à diminuer la pollution par l’intensification de la forme bâtie, tout en augmentant la densité de la population au coeur des villes². Il se décline généralement sous trois formes : 1) la réutilisation de bâtiments manufacturiers ; 2) l’ajout de logements dans les secteurs existants ; et 3) la reconversion des friches industrielles, espaces vacants
Chapitre 5 Immigration francophone à Ottawa, 1981-2011 : from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) COUTON Philippe
Abstract: La communauté francophone d’Ottawa a connu de nombreux changements au cours des cinquante dernières années et vit actuellement de nouvelles mutations importantes, résultant en grande partie de l’arrivée récente de nombreux immigrants francophones. Acteurs incontestables d’un renouveau social et démographique prometteur, ces nouveaux arrivants sont confrontés toutefois aux inévitables difficultés que connaissent presque tous les migrants ainsi qu’aux incertitudes liées à leur intégration dans une communauté linguistique minoritaire fragilisée. C’est sur cette réalité que porte notre chapitre, qui se veut un portrait général des principales dimensions sociales, démographiques et culturelles de cette nouvelle étape dans l’évolution de la francophonie ottavienne.
Chapitre 8 L’expansion de l’espace scolaire francophone à Ottawa (1967-1998) : from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) CROTEAU Jean-Philippe
Abstract: L’historiographie a reconnu très tôt l’importance des questions éducatives dans le parcours historique de la minorité franco-ontarienne. Celles-ci revêtent un caractère incontournable en raison du rôle prépondérant joué par l’école dans la constitution ou le renouvellement du tissu social et identitaire de la collectivité francophone¹. De plus, la résistance à l’assimilation linguistique et culturelle a constitué un thème central dans l’historiographie, qui a souvent présenté les luttes scolaires pour l’école catholique et de langue française comme un acte fondateur de l’identité franco-ontarienne².
Chapitre 10 Le Droit, le mouvement C’est l’temps et l’inscription de la problématique des services en français dans l’espace public ottavien (1975) from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) CARDINAL Linda
Abstract: Ce chapitre porte sur le quotidien
Le Droitet le mouvement C’est l’temps, un cas méconnu d’action collective francophone d’Ottawa. Fondé en 1975 par de jeunes Ottaviens, le mouvement a pour objectif de contester l’unilinguisme anglais de la province en organisant des actes de désobéissance civile au coeur de la ville. Ces jeunes, qui viennent en particulier de la Basse-Ville d’Ottawa et de l’Est ontarien, choisissent d’aller en prison pour s’opposer à l’émission de contraventions unilingues par la police locale. Ces contraventions, de quelques dizaines de dollars, sont écrites en anglais.
Chapitre 12 La question des services en français à la Ville d’Ottawa depuis les années 1980 from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) MÉVELLEC Anne
Abstract: La ville d’Ottawa est le siège de la capitale du Canada, mais elle est aussi une entité dont la légitimité vient du corps politique qui la dirige. À ce titre, la Ville est soumise au jeu de nombreux acteurs aux intérêts politiques divers, incluant les groupes francophones qui revendiquent des services en français. La communauté francophone représente 16,4 % de la population de la ville² et entretient des liens privilégiés avec les populations francophones de l’Est ontarien et de Gatineau, du côté québécois³. La présence historique ainsi que la situation particulière de ces populations font en sorte que la question
Chapitre 13 Ottawa officiellement bilingue : from:
Ottawa, lieu de vie français
Author(s) FOUCHER Pierre
Abstract: La vie française à Ottawa s’est déroulée en l’absence de tout encadrement juridique jusqu’à la décennie 1970. Pourtant, la reconnaissance d’un statut officiel à une langue minoritaire contribue à renforcer la légitimité de la communauté linguistique. Or il existe maintenant une politique de bilinguisme à la Ville d’Ottawa et des démarches sont en cours, au moment de la rédaction du présent texte, pour donner à celle-ci une valeur juridique plus forte¹.
Introduction from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The impact of monuments and related rituals upon collective memories of the Second World War is a source of recurrent political debate in all former Allied and Axis countries. The spate of fiftieth anniversary commemorations of this event served not only to reappraise national histories in light of the end of the balance of power sustained during the Cold War, but also to symbolically compensate the dwindling number of living witnesses and victims of the war period. In both cases, public representations acquired considerable political authority as means of sustaining social memories of this period. But do representations ensure that
1 Monuments in History from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: In his famous essay on ‘Monuments’ of 1927, the writer Robert Musil claims that there is nothing more invisible to the human eye than a monument. ‘The remarkable thing about monuments is that one does not notice them. There is nothing in the world so invisible as a monument.’¹ The suggestion that precisely those images, figures and events that people strive to represent in public should go unheeded provokes numerous questions about the relation of individuals and groups to symbols and their impact as focal points of political communication. If familiarity with everyday objects indeed erodes the curiosity of passers-by,
[Part II Introduction] from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The national monuments in memory of deportations and genocide carried out during the Second World War, known as the Vél’ d’Hiv’ and Holocaust Monument, arose from distinct political and cultural contexts and did not result from a policy of Franco-German reconciliation. Comparison of these monuments does not reveal direct interaction between the two memory cultures, therefore, but transnational analogies between local commemorative customs and discourses as well as local specificities.¹ It is precisely with such investigations of commemorations on the basis of analogies and specificities that it is possible to establish the degree to which the focal points, narrative structures
5 The Institutionalisation of Memory in Public Art and Rhetoric from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: This detailed examination of the evolution of the Vél d’Hiv’ and Holocaust Monument reveals discrepancies, but also analogies and overlaps between memory cultures in France and Germany. Memory cultures are not unique and confined in time and space, but are subject to what the sociologist Ulrich Beck calls ‘polycentric memory, in which non-state, transnational actors (such as social movements) also play a role’¹ – a model which he perceives to be a key to the constitution of a European memory culture. Beck dismisses Christianity, ethnicity or principles of the welfare state as foundations of either national or European heritages. A multinational
6 The National Memorial Paradigm from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The proliferation of monuments and commemorations and the social and political values invested in them since the 1970s are symptomatic of societies that have been actively seeking a symbolic reinforcement of collective memories. Public symbols are neither a cause nor a consequence of the present international preoccupation with memory, however, but the very language with which these societies transmit and negotiate their pasts. What are the historical and political origins and the social consequences of this phenomenon? And how do contemporary societies legitimate their existence on the basis of memory and historical representations? The rise of memory cultures, which is
7 The Postnational Memorial Paradigm from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The monumental historiographical projects on sites of memory in France and Germany,
Les Lieux de mémoireandDeutsche Erinnerungsorte, provide pedagogical models for understanding the historical foundations of contemporary memory cultures in these two countries. Both projects are highly informative, thorough in their treatment of historical facts, and theoretically innovative. The notions that collective symbols are today ‘patrimonial’ instead of partisan foci of collective memory, that we are subjects of ‘archival’ memory, that ‘present time’ is a historiographical category in which societies forge a cohesive self-understanding on the basis of shared symbols of the past, and that the mass media
8 Dialogic Monuments from:
Holocaust Monuments and National Memory
Abstract: The Vél’ d’Hiv’ and Holocaust Monument are examples of a new kind of war memorial. They commemorate neither military victory nor glorious defeat, customary following national campaigns of the nineteenth century and following the First World War, but war crimes. Consequently, there is no all-embracing notion that captures either the style or function of contemporary monuments. Several existent terms, such as ‘ephemeral’ or ‘objectless’ monuments, pinpoint essential formal features of monumental art, but are normative and partial (see Introduction). Other concepts have pinpointed the reactive function of monuments in relation to existing monuments and traditions, including ‘counter-monuments’ and monuments erected
Book Title: History-Narration, Interpretation, Orientation
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Without denying the importance of the postmodernist approach to the narrative form and rhetorical strategies of historiography, the author, one of Germany's most prominent cultural historians, argues here in favor of reason and methodical rationality in history. He presents a broad variety of aspects, factors and developments of historical thinking from the 18th century to the present, thus continuing, in exemplary fashion, the tradition of critical self-reflection in the humanities and looking at historical studies as an important factor of cultural orientation in practical life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fc2
Introduction: from:
History
Abstract: History is much more than only a matter of historical studies. It is an essential cultural factor in everybody’s life, since human life needs an orientation in the course of time which has to be brought about by remembering the past. Historical studies are a systematic way of performing this function of orientation. In order to understand what historians do one should start with this fundamental and general function.
Chapter 1 Historical Narration: from:
History
Abstract: Hayden White, with elaborate sagacity, labored to convince historians of this fact when he treated “the historical work as what it most manifestly is,” that is to say, “a verbal structure in the form of a narrative prose discourse.” But since he explicated this discourse
Chapter 3 Rhetoric and Aesthetics of History: from:
History
Abstract: Current discussions on the theory of history stress the poetical and rhetorical character of historiography; yet it is precisely this character that is generally neglected in the self-awareness and self-understanding of most professional historians. There is a good deal of postmodernism in the quest for rhetoric and aesthetics in modern historiography because the modernism of historiography is defined by it’s academic or, in a broader sense of the word, its scientific character. The widespread and deeply rooted opinion of academic historians, as well as of postmodernist theorists of history, is that this scientific character stands in opposition to rhetoric and
Chapter 4 Narrativity and Objectivity in Historical Studies from:
History
Abstract: “Narrativity” and “objectivity” seem to be contradictory characterizations of historical studies. The category of narrativity brings historical studies close to literature; it discloses the literary character of historiography, and the linguistic procedures and principles which constitute “history” as a meaningful and sensible representation of the past in the cultural practices of historical memory. Objectivity, on the other hand, is a category that discloses a certain kind of historical knowledge, gained through the methodically-ruled procedures of research and that has furnished it with a solid validity jutting over the field of arbitrary meaning.
Chapter 6 New History: from:
History
Abstract: We cannot say that the development of historical studies in the twentieth century has provided a canonically established use of theory in dealing with sources. There have been different procedures in the developing and use of theory in the methodical procedure of interpretation for historical research. “If” and “how” and “what type” of theories should be developed and used were open questions. Different paradigms for historical interpretation were developed according to different concepts of historical studies. In the following pages I want to characterize some of the more important of these disciplinary structures within historical studies of the twentieth century²,
Chapter 8 Loosening the Order of History: from:
History
Abstract: Historical studies as an academic discipline is under discussion, which treats its roots, functions and principles in a way that render them at the same time satisfactory and uncomfortable. The satisfaction may result from the new attention history has got in the realm of the humanities. One of the most dominating issues here is memory and its role in human culture. “Memory” covers the entire field of dealing with the past, thus including the realm of history as a subject matter and as a mode of recalling the past into life of its representation in the cultural framework of human
Chapter 9 Historical Thinking as Trauerarbeit: from:
History
Abstract: Some years ago the Getty Research Institute for the History of Art and the Humanities organized a conference at the Warburg Institute on “Memory, History, Narrative: A comparative inquiry into the representation of crisis.” At the end of this conference Saul Friedländer tried to summarize the main issues and the decisive points of view concerning the Western concept of history and the idea of its practical function today. He said that looking back at the catastrophes of the twentieth century one has to raise the question again: “What is the nature of human nature?”
Chapter 11 Holocaust-Memory and German Identity from:
History
Abstract: It has often been characterized as a “black hole” of meaning, that dissolves every concept of historical interpretation. It occludes construction of a meaningful narrative connection between the time before and after it. It is a “borderline-experience” of history, which doesn’t allow its integration into a coherent narrative. It makes every attempt to apply comprehensive concepts
Foreword from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Dettke Dieter
Abstract: Toward a Global Civil Societyis the first volume of a new series entitledInternational Political Currents, published by the Washington Office of the Friedrich Ebert Foundation. The series will address major international economic, political, and cultural issues. Publications in this series will try to contribute to a discourse on public policy issues with international dimensions. Based in Germany, the Friedrich Ebert Foundation, Germany’s oldest political foundation, is involved in programs in 89 countries in Asia, Africa, Latin America, Central America and the Caribbean, the U.S., and Europe. Our activities are increasingly global and international in character.
5. Civil Society, Hard Cases and the End of the Cold War from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Strong Tracy B.
Abstract: The passage that Michael Walzer quoted from
The German Ideologycontinues on from “doing just as one wishes to, hunting in the morning, fishing in the afternoon, and criticizing after dinner” by indicating that one will be able to undertake these activities “without ever thereby becoming a hunter, a fisherman, or a critical critic.” I mention this not to critique Walzer but to extend what I take to be one possible thrust of his comments. I take Marx’s continuation in this passage to be an expression of anxiety on Marx’s part. The danger with what one might call civil society,
12. Economic Policy and the Role of the State—The Invisible, the Visible and the Third Hand from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Altvater Elmar
Abstract: It is evident that, among other factors, the functioning of the welfare state as well as the institutional richness and democratic reach of the civil society depends heavily on the economic efficiency of a given society. Now, the question is: what does economic efficiency depend on? There are several different answers, each of them depending on their theoretical background. Neoliberals or neo-classical economists stress the meaning of the “invisible hand” of a free-market system as the crucial prerequisite for achieving the best distribution of productive factors, of finding the best path of innovation and evolution, and for realizing the highest
16. Civil Society and Social Justice from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Frankenberg Günter
Abstract: Solidarity as a voluntary act of recognizing others as deserving one’s esteem, care and support is possible in a secular society where the responsibility to help is not always already commanded by religion, tradition, or status (noblesse oblige). Yet, solidarity seems to be almost impossible in a society based on contractual relations governed (a) by the principle
pacta sunt servandaand (b) by the idea of liberty that establishes a system of limited irresponsibility (the limits being contracts and some obligations for “dependents”). That is why societies that we have come to regard as modern do not rely on social
18. East European Reform and West European Integration from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Glotz Peter
Abstract: The political world has been changing radically since the Central European revolution of 1989. Instead of traditional bi-polar conflict, we now have the potential for multi-polar political conflict. Small wars have once again become a real possibility. Ethnic and social conflicts in Central and Eastern Europe are brewing into equally revolutionary and explosive mixtures. Despite these changes, however, Western Europe’s political classes are still sitting impassively at yesterday’s gambling tables, placing their bets as though oblivious of the fact that “Rouge” and “Noir” have become almost indistinguishable after the historic downpour. They mutter strange codes under their breath (CSCE, CFE,
22. The Left in the Process of Democratization in Central and Eastern European Countries from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Hajek Milos
Abstract: Other than the time between the two World Wars, democracy has been a remarkable success after World War II. From 1918 through 1939, after the progression of democratic tendencies in the beginning of the 1920s, most countries in Europe gradually returned to autocratic, even fascist regimes. Today it is a fact that democracy is deeply rooted in Western European countries and all communist regimes in the eastern half of Europe have failed. Some countries, in that region, though, are on their way to democracy, and in other countries democratic governments are trying their first steps, which turn out to be
24. Pluralism and the Left Identity from:
Toward a Global Civil Society
Author(s) Mouffe Chantal
Abstract: If the project of the Left is to survive the discredit that the collapse of “actually existing socialism” has thrown over the very idea of socialism, it requires a new formulation. Even social democracy is presently suffering from the impact of the events in the East and the proclaimed triumph of liberal capitalism. Claims for social justice, economic democracy and struggles against inequalities are increasingly dismissed as relics of a foregone age dominated by the rhetoric of class struggle.
Book Title: The Imaginary Revolution-Parisian Students and Workers in 1968
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Seidman Michael
Abstract: The events of 1968 have been seen as a decisive turning point in the Western world. The author takes a critical look at "May 1968" and questions whether the events were in fact as "revolutionary" as French and foreign commentators have indicated. He concludes the student movement changed little that had not already been challenged and altered in the late fifties and early sixties. The workers' strikes led to fewer working hours and higher wages, but these reforms reflected the secular demands of the French labor movement. "May 1968" was remarkable not because of the actual transformations it wrought but rather by virtue of the revolutionary power that much of the media and most scholars have attributed to it and which turned it into a symbol of a youthful, renewed, and freer society in France and beyond.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fq7
Chapter One Sex, Drugs, and Revolution from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: The radical students who started the chain of events that led to the greatest strike wave in French history lashed out against capitalism, the state, and property. They extended their protests to what they considered the pleasure-denying restraints of bourgeois society and desired “to liberate man from all the repressions of social life.”¹ Repression meant not just police but a wide spectrum of social activities—wage labor, sexual restraint, industrial hierarchy, and academic discipline. As in other Western nations, universities became the launching pad of their assaults. The most liberal institution provided cover for adversaries of the dominant social/political order
Chapter Two Making Desires Reality from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: Contrary to Francis Fukuyama’s denigration of the Paris students of 1968 as “pampered offspring,” lacking any “rational reason to rebel,” they had real educational grievances.¹ Compared with other nations, the French universities were considerably overenrolled. In 1967 the number of students was between 700,000 and 750,000; whereas in Great Britain and also in Germany, whose economy was larger than the French, enrollment was between 300,000 and 350,000.² Moreover, there was a much less satisfactory instructor per student ratio in France than in other major Western European nations with the exception of Italy. Great Britain and Germany had, compared with France,
Chapter Four Workers Respond from:
The Imaginary Revolution
Abstract: Wage earners took advantage of the momentary weakness of state power in the middle of May to initiate the largest strike wave in French history. The fact that student radicals looked to workers to make the revolution was less important in sparking strikes than the divisions among political elites. What has been called the “political opportunity structure” encouraged the extension of the unrest to wage earners.¹ Even some members of the Gaullist majority wavered in support for the government. As in 1789, 1848, and 1871, cleavages within ruling groups promoted popular revolt. Both student and worker actions were parts of
Book Title: Ethnographica Moralia-Experiments in Interpretive Anthropology
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Marcus George E.
Abstract: Panourgia and Marcus bring together anthropologists working in various parts of the world (Greece, Bali, Taiwan, the United States) with classicists, historians, and scholars in cultural studies. The volume takes into account global realities such as 9/11 and the opening of the Cypriot Green Line and explores the different ways in which Geertz’s anthropology has shaped the pedagogy of their disciplines and enabled discussions among them. Focusing on place and time, locations and temporalities, the essays in this volume interrogate the fixity of interpretation and open new spaces of inquiry. The volume addresses a wide audience from the humanities and the social sciences—anyone interested in the development of a new humanism that will relocate the human as a subject of social action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1x76fs8
Contemporary Fieldwork Aesthetics in Art and Anthropology: from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Marcus George E.
Abstract: In recent years, Douglas Holmes and I have been working toward an articulation, and a refunctioning even, of ethnographic research practices so basic to the identity of anthropology.¹ It is remarkable to reflect on how much research in social and cultural anthropology, especially in the United States, has consisted of variations on a particular aesthetic of practice that can be condensed to a near-mythic scene of encounter—a Malinowskian one, or latterly, a Geertzian one (e.g., the famous opening of Geertz’s “Deep Play” essay²). Recall, for instance, these oft-quoted lines from the beginning of the
Argonauts of the Western Pacific,
Myth, Performance, Poetics—the Gaze from Classics from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Martin Richard P.
Abstract: the relation between Classics and Anthropology must be a relation of active debate. It is difficult, if not impossible, to gain an understanding of the methods and critical standards in argument of another discipline without personal contact and discussion. Up to the FirstWorldWar both classicists and anthropologists took it for granted that their relationship should be one of exchange of ideas and collaboration in developing theory; we have to try to recreate this situation.”¹
Anamneses of a Pestilent Infant: from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Athanasiou Athena
Abstract: The brash skeptic and the defunct hero, the abandoned infant and the triumphant sovereign, the autonomous and the dispossessed, the Hegelian inaugural philosopher, Nietzsche’s last human, the Freudian emblematic figure. How do the multiple figures of Oedipus enact and inflect the philosophical, anthropological, and psychoanalytic aporias of modern Western episteme? In this essay, I attempt to tackle this question by thinking through the cleavages of heteronomy and autonomy, belonging and errancy, sovereignty and liminality, the body of the sovereign and the future of the body politic. I suggest a (literally) symptomatic reading of Oedipus’s body, one that illustrates a corporeal
Carnal Hermeneutics: from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Papagaroufali Eleni
Abstract: To give my students a sense of the incomplete and elusive character of interpretive anthropology, I use two images drawn from Clifford Geertz’s
The Interpretation of Cultures.¹ One is the “Indian story,” which is “about an Englishman who, having been told that the world rested on a platform which rested on the back of an elephant which rested in turn on the back of a turtle, asked … what did the turtle rest on? Another turtle. And that turtle? ‘Ah, Sahib, after that is turtles all the way down.’”² The other comes from Geertz’s assertion that “the culture of a
AFTERWORD: from:
Ethnographica Moralia
Author(s) Kakavoulia Maria
Abstract: Since commentary seems to be both a questions-raising and an interpretive practice, I would like to bring into discussion an issue that I think relates in an immediate way to the preceding papers in this volume. We already have an overabundance of theoretical metalanguages informed by powerful interdisciplinary movements (semiotics, linguistics, textual theory, postcolonialism, etc.) that attempt to master issues concerning representational modes. Here, for reasons of terminological economy, I would like to bring into the discussion the verbal-visual distinction and its importance in cross-cultural research. Reminding us of Michel Foucault’s distinction between the seeable and the sayable, this semiotic
Book Title: Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History- Publisher: Hong Kong University Press, HKU
Author(s): Purtle Jennifer
Abstract: This is a provocative essay of reflections on traditional mainstream scholarship on Chinese art as done by towering figures in the field such as James Cahill and Wen Fong. James Elkins offers an engaging and accessible survey of his personal journey encountering and interpreting Chinese art through Western scholars' writings. He argues that the search for optimal comparisons is itself a modern, Western interest, and that art history as a discipline is inherently Western in several identifiable senses. Although he concentrates on art history in this book, and on Chinese painting in particular, these issues bear implications for Sinology in general, and for wider questions about humanistic inquiry and historical writing. Jennifer Purtle's Foreword provides a useful counterpoint from the perspective of a Chinese art specialist, anticipating and responding to other specialists’ likely reactions to Elkins's hypotheses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xcrn3
Foreword: from:
Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Author(s) Purtle Jennifer
Abstract: I read the manuscript for this book expecting to hate it. Rumors about the manuscript bemoaned a non-specialist author who presumed to tell specialists in the field of Chinese painting history working to recover traditional Chinese ideas about painting that and how they practiced Western art history. Moreover, the author allegedly did so in terms not interesting to many specialists in the field of Chinese painting history, nor fully intelligible to some. To propose the Westernness of the practice of art history in the field of Chinese painting history—which has, since the middle of the twentieth century, sought means
I A Brace of Comparisons from:
Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Abstract: To begin (if this is a beginning point), no one seems entirely sure what the problem might be. Some practices are manifestly pernicious—for instance, the orientalizing representations made famous by Edward Said; and others seem harmless and routine—for instance, writing in English about Chinese art.² It appears to be wrong, or at least inaccurate, to characterize a
IV The Endgame, and the Qing Eclipse from:
Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Abstract: There are histories with gaps, when centuries pass with no evidence of human activity. The European “dark ages” is the exemplary case, though its darkness is now widely contested and redistributed among a number of different cultures. The mid-third millennium BC in the Middle East, the founding centuries of Rome, and “Dynasty 0” in Egypt are also examples of periods whose sequences may always be inadequately known. Elsewhere and further back in history the gaps grow wider, and the known objects fewer and farther between. In Paleolithic Europe there are so few artifacts dispersed through so many years that it
V Postscripts from:
Chinese Landscape Painting as Western Art History
Abstract: Something about Chinese landscape painting stirs my interest in questions of art and art history, rather than the other way around. What is said about the paintings raises questions, and those questions return to the paintings as if for nourishment. Because of the nature of this inquiry I have not had the opportunity to say much about what attracts me to individual paintings—their visual force, their geographic contexts, their consumers, their painters’ lives—and it may often have seemed that I would rather talk about what art history is, rather than what the paintings suggest it should be. I
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Arthur Paul Longley
Abstract: As a former colony of Great Britain, Australia has faced the dual challenge experienced by all settler colonies of forging an identity that allows it to distinguish itself from its ‘parent’ culture at the same time deal with its complicity in the colonization of the new land and the treatment of its original inhabitants. In the case of Australia, this situation has been further complicated by the fact that the land was simply taken – without a war, without a treaty and without negotiation. Throughout its European history, Australia has needed to perpetuate its founding myth of being a previously
Chapter 3 FILES AND ABORIGINAL LIVES: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Haebich Anna
Abstract: Anthropologist and historian Ann Stoler (2009, 1) describes archives as ‘active, generative substances with histories[, …] documents with itineraries of their own’. She urges scholars to engage with them as ‘cultural artifacts of fact production, of taxonomies in the making, and of disparate notions of what made up colonial authority’ (Stoler 2002, 91).
Chapter 4 WRITING, FEMININITY AND COLONIALISM: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Ravenscroft Alison
Abstract: How to write of a white feminine
Iso as not to tell – once more – the story of the woman we already know, the woman we take ourselves to be? The answer might lie in a kind of writing that gives a formal place to uncertainty. This would be a writing practice that aims at a writer’s doubts about herself and others, rather than closing them over, and which works with anaestheticsof uncertainty and not just avocabulary. Such a writing practice would also aim at the production of doubt in a reader. If aesthetics is
Chapter 5 THE STAGING OF SOCIAL POLICY: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Ely-Harper Kerreen
Abstract: A large number of photographs were taken in the late 1940s and 1950s by the Department of Information (later Australian News and Information Bureau) to promote post-war migration to Australia. These photos were of new arrivals, family groups, single adults and sponsored child migrants from the United Kingdom. With the increase in unaccompanied minors coming to Australia, the federal government enacted the Immigration Guardianship of Children Act of 1946, which ensured that the Minister for Immigration and Citizenship (then Arthur Calwell) would assume legal guardianship of unaccompanied children under 21 years of age. The child migration schemes were operated by
Chapter 10 BETWEEN UTOPIA AND AUTOBIOGRAPHY: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Williams Katarzyna Kwapisz
Abstract: The genres of autobiographical writing and utopian writing have little in common. While an autobiography is an account of the life of an individual written by that individual, utopian narrative offers a vision of an ideal place and social system for a collective. In fact, according to Robert F. Sayre, autobiography and utopia indicate polarities: between experience and prophecy, self and society, private and public or emotional unity and rational order (Sayre 1972, 21, 23). Both forms have firmly marked their presence in the culture and history of Australia. Autobiography, as Joy Hooton writes, has always been a prolific genre
Chapter 11 VIETNAMESE–AUSTRALIAN LIFE WRITING AND INTEGRATION: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Jacklin Michael
Abstract: Vietnamese–Australian stories have attracted significant public interest in the last few years, particularly with the success of Anh Do’s
The Happiest Refugee(2010). When this book won a raft of Australian literary awards in 2011, it quickly became a bestseller and was selected for book-group discussions across the country. By the end of 2011 Do had been engaged by the Australian government’s Department of Immigration to deliver a motivational speech to selected detention centre staff – with the view that his family’s story of escape from Vietnam, their subsequent adaptation to migrant life and their eventual making good in
Chapter 12 HEROES, LEGENDS AND DIVAS: from:
Migrant Nation
Author(s) Fox Karen
Abstract: Stories of shady characters are among the most popular biographies on the
Australian Dictionary of Biography (ADB)website.¹ Between 1 July and 3 November 2011, the biographies of brothel-keeper Tilly Devine and fellow underworld figure Kate Leigh were the most frequently viewed on ADB Online, with a total of 85,983 page views between them. Gangster Squizzy Taylor was the second most popular in the 1 April to 30 September 2013 period, reaching 47,444 page views. It may be that these statistics reflect a temporary high point of visibility for these early-twentieth-century criminals, attributable to the popular television seriesUnderbelly, but
Book Title: Questions of Phenomenology-Language, Alterity, Temporality, Finitude
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Caputo John D.
Abstract: Through her critical and productive dialogue with multiple phenomenological thinkers, Dastur concisely shows each thinker's debts to and departures from others, as well as each thinker's innovations and limitations. She does this judiciously, without choosing sides because, for her, phenomenology is above all a way of thinking through a problem and practicing a method. The fecundity of the movement is appreciated only by participating in it-phenomenology has always thought of itself as philosophical research undertaken by and through a community of thinkers who share certain fundamental questions and ways of approaching those questions, even if their responses to these questions often differ. In this regard, Dastur is both one of the clearest guides to phenomenology and one of its ablest practitioners.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5sw
1 The Logic of “Validity” (Husserl, Heidegger, Lotze) from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: If the name of Lotze is known to us, it is largely because he is mentioned in the
Prolegomenon to Pure Logicalongside those great thinkers under whose authority Husserl placed himself—namely, Leibniz, Kant, and Herbart.¹ Husserl even dedicates a paragraph to explaining his connections to Herbart and Lotze, but in fact, with the exception of the last few lines, the paragraph is devoted entirely to Herbart’s merits and errors. Lotze is credited only with the merit of having the great perspicacity to deepen some of Herbart’s suggestions and for developing them in an original manner; but like Herbart,
10 Phenomenology of the Event: from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: Is philosophy ready to take account of the sudden emergence and factuality of the event, which since Plato has been defined as a thought of the generality and invariance of essence? Such is the very general question with which I would like to begin. As Husserl recalls at the very beginning of his lectures on the phenomenology of internal time-consciousness, the question of time and its contingency has always constituted the most crucial challenge for philosophy, marking the limits of its enterprise to intellectually possess the world because, as the very stuff of things, time seems to escape radically from
13 Phenomenology and the Question of Man (Patočka and Heidegger) from:
Questions of Phenomenology
Abstract: In one of his last texts, dedicated to “Heidegger, thinker of humanity,”¹ Jan Patočka claims that Heidegger is the thinker who realized Dilthey’s idea of “understanding the human on the basis of the human” by starting from what separates the human from all other beings, without recourse to anything foreign to humanity.² For Heidegger, the human is the only being capable of truth, which at first sight has the air of a truism, but in fact refers to an entirely new manner of posing the problem of truth. It is no longer a matter of the traditional view of judgment
4 The Alterity of the Stranger and the Experience of the Alien from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Bernasconi Robert
Abstract: The account that Levinas gives in
Totality and Infinityof the face-to-face relation with the Other (in the sense of the other human being) has now achieved classic status. Its basic characteristics are familiar. First, the face-to-face is not a relation, if that means that it forms a totality. Hence Levinas prefers to use the word “relation” only with some qualification, as when he calls the face-to-face a relationsui generisor a “relation without relation” (Tel52 and 271/TI80 and 295). The terms of the face-to-face absolve themselves from the relation insofar as they are both absolute within
5 Sensibility, Trauma, and the Trace: from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Newman Michael
Abstract: Even if the relation with the Other is supposed to be unmediated, and thereby to have a traumatic character, as Emmanuel Levinas claims (
AE179–85/OB141–45), that would not by itself be enough to derive from it an ethical responsibility.¹ There are many kinds of trauma which do not make any kind of ethical claim, which therefore cannot be derived from the structure per se of trauma, unless one were to suppose that the only real trauma were the trauma of the otherperson, of a personal Other rather than a non-personal alterity. If this is not the
6 Ethics as First Philosophy and Religion from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Bloechl Jeffrey
Abstract: Following the definition established by Aristotle, ethics examines the relationship between our capacity to mark and repeat certain actions, which includes recognizing rules and giving them to oneself, and the passivity denoted in the fact that experiences and ideas impress themselves on us. The good life consists in managing this activity and passivity on the complex field of economic, social and political life. The primary occasion in which we feel this challenge is the encounter with someone in need, where a face alone is often enough to call forth a response visibly guided by prior education and experience. As many
7 The Bible Gives to Thought: from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Burggraeve Roger
Abstract: Faith is mature or fully developed only if it is reflective, that is, only if it involves a thinking interaction with the Scriptures which orient and inspire it. This is not only a crucial element in Levinas’s conception of Judaism, but also says much about how Levinas relates to his own Judaism. I will say more about this in the first part of this essay, sketching his specifically
mitnaggedJewish background. This, in turn, will explain much of why he argues for what can be called an intellectual lay Judaism.
8 The Significance of Levinas’s Work for Christian Thought from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: It is a fact which gives one pause for consideration that in Holland, Belgium, France, the United States, Italy, and South America the work of Emmanuel Levinas has found its greatest readership among Christian philosophers and theologians. Although this work is supported by a long Jewish tradition—even in its strictly philosophical elements—it has impressed many Christians by its orientation, which, despite its great originality, seems familiar to them.
10 The Voice without Name: from:
The Face of the Other and the Trace of God
Author(s) Marion Jean-Luc
Abstract: Among the many radical innovations that Emmanuel Levinas has introduced into phenomenology, or imposed on it, there is one which seems most important: that of the appeal. In effect, the appeal has achieved the rank of a concept, or more precisely, to speak the language of the early Husserl, it is a founding phenomenological act (and thus is itself not founded). This imposition became virtually inevitable as soon as Levinas had accomplished two prior revolutions. First was a reversal of centrifugal intentionality, which moves from the ego to the object, into a counter-intentionality moving back toward the ego. Next was
Book Title: How to Do Comparative Theology- Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): VON STOSCH KLAUS
Abstract: For a generation and more, the contribution of Christian theology to interreligious understanding has been a subject of debate. Some think of theological perspectives are of themselves inherently too narrow to support interreligious learning, and argue for an approach that is neutral or, on a more popular level, grounded simply open-minded direct experience. In response, comparative theology argues that theology, as faith seeking understanding, offers a vital perspective and a way of advancing interreligious dialogue, aided rather than hindered by commitments; theological perspectives can both complement and step beyond the study of religions by methods detached and merely neutral. Thus comparative theology has been successful in persuading many that interreligious learning from one faith perspective to another is both possible and worthwhile, and so the work of comparative theology has become more recognized and established globally. With this success there has come to the fore new challenges regarding method: How does one do comparative theological work in a way that is theologically grounded, genuinely open to learning from the other, sophisticated in pursuing comparisons, and fruitful on both the academic and practical levels?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr5zg
Introduction from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) von Stosch Klaus
Abstract: The fifteen essays collected in
How to Do Comparative Theologyare the fruits of an August 2014 conference in Paderborn, Germany, which itself was part of a larger conversation involving senior and junior scholars in the field over the five years before that. The conference brought together scholars in the field of comparative theology in the United States and Eu rope to share their work in this emerging field, and to reflect together on the nature and best methods current today by listening to how each of us actually does it.
1 The Problem of Choice in Comparative Theology from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Cornille Catherine
Abstract: The discipline of comparative theology is steadily growing and diversifying. While it is often seen as originating within Christian, and predominantly Roman Catholic, theological circles, it is increasingly practiced by Christians of other denominations and by other religious traditions. And comparative theologians of any one tradition are presented with a seemingly endless possibility of choice in terms of which tradition, which text, or which aspect of that tradition to engage in comparative work. Once other religions are recognized as possible resources for constructive religious reflection and insight, there is no limit to where such truth or insight might manifest itself
4 Rhetorics of Theological One-Upsmanship in Christianity and Buddhism: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: The name of our discipline contains a methodologically significant ambiguity. As David Tracy remarked a number of years ago in his encyclopedia article on “Comparative Theology,” “theology” in this designation can refer either to the object or the subject of the activity of comparison.¹ To the extent that theology forms the
objectof comparison, Comparative Theology represents a subfield or a specific focus within Comparative Religion or the History of Religions (for my present purposes, I consider these two designations to be roughly equivalent). That is, Comparative Theology in this sense denotes the study of the intellectual or doctrinal dimension
6 On Some Suspicions Regarding Comparative Theology from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Willis Glenn R.
Abstract: If theological comparisons do not connect themselves to the concerns of actual religious communities, it is not clear how comparison can be theological at all, given that theologies must implicate the writer in some community of practice. This essay addresses several quiet but sustained suspicions about theological comparison as a religiously relevant project. There seems little reason to deny that comparisons are often subject to an “ingrained resistance,”¹ particularly among theologians.² In what follows, I first deepen several fundamental critiques of comparison, emphasizing that theologies must offer more than virtuoso interreligious vision, before suggesting some ways in which comparison can
7 Embodiment, Anthropology, and Comparison: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Roberts Michelle Voss
Abstract: Imagine the constructive theologian as a beachcomber. She attentively picks her way through the landscape of the Christian theological heritage, salvaging treasures that sparkle unexpectedly in the sun of the contemporary moment. From this or that angle, a dusty practice or neglected doctrine takes on new beauty. The theologian’s tools of detection sound the alert: There is something relevant here, something useful, something true! The detectors include sensors for scriptural soundness, doctrinal fidelity, rational coherence, and con temporary resonance. Many different tools can be used to look and to dig.
10 Difficult Remainders: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Clooney Francis X.
Abstract: The Christian comparative theological engagement with other faith traditions is most often driven by attention to select themes, images, and practices already somewhat familiar, even if inexactly, in Christian tradition. This approach makes sense and is fruitful. The preference for the familiar risks an evasion of the more difficult realm of the unfamiliar, and reducing the great texts of other traditions to compendia of ideas available for selective consideration as desired. Comparisons are often asymmetrical, too. Christian comparativists at their best work with a rich sense of the completeness of Christian faith, and of the organic coherence of Christian doctrine
12 Methodological Considerations on the Role of Experience in Comparative Theology from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) O’Donnell Emma
Abstract: It is not a stretch to argue that comparative theology has defined itself as a practice of the
14 Living Interreligiously: from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Barnes Michael
Abstract: Comparative Theology commends an imaginative entry into another religious world. In so doing it raises some difficult questions about what it means to live and act “interreligiously.” How to recognize continuities, acknowledge discontinuities, build creative analogies, without getting stuck into some sort of self-serving colonizing of the other? How to ensure that the complex business of mediating across religious borders does not ignore the demands of truth—and justice? How to keep alive the discipline of obedience that arises from the hearing of the Word while yet taking seriously the myriad words that are inseparable from life in a thoroughly
15 Theologizing for the Yoga Community? from:
How to Do Comparative Theology
Author(s) Corigliano Stephanie
Abstract: Comparative theology is a transformative academic pursuit. To name but a few examples, James Fredericks, Paul Knitter, Catherine Cornille, and Francis X. Clooney all argue in different ways that comparative theology is a study that begins with a theologian who is rooted in a particular faith tradition. In this way, the learning about and from another tradition, as Knitter describes, is an act of passing over, which necessarily entails a passing back, or return to one’s home tradition.¹
Book Title: The Forgiveness to Come-The Holocaust and the Hyper-Ethical
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Berkowitz Roger
Abstract: This book is concerned with the aporias, or impasses, of forgiveness, especially in relation to the legacy of the crimes against humanity perpetrated by the Nazis and their collaborators during World War II. Banki argues that, while forgiveness of the Holocaust is and will remain impossible, we cannot rest upon that impossibility. Rather, the impossibility of forgiveness must be thought in another way. In an epoch of "worldwidization," we may not be able simply to escape the violence of scenes and rhetoric that repeatedly portray apology, reconciliation, and forgiveness as accomplishable acts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr62h
Conclusion: from:
The Forgiveness to Come
Abstract: It is no doubt significant that on the sole occasion (to my knowledge) where Derrida provides an affirmative characterization of what forgiveness is or might be, it is by means of the interpretation of a joke. Forgiveness is a joke perhaps: an object of ridicule and scepticism; or, following Freud’s famous argument, a mechanism by which repressed psychic energy, for example, aggressive or sexual urges, are discharged without fear of social sanction:
3. Phenomenology from:
The Rigor of Things
Abstract: You completed your great cycle on Descartes withOn Descartes’ Metaphysical Prismin 1986 [published in English in 1999]. In 1989 you publishedReduction and Givenness[published in English in 1998], which is a collection of essays on Husserl’s and Heidegger’s phenomenology.¹In a sense, this book has produced paradoxical results. Although it claimed to be an erudite study in the history of Husserl’s and Heidegger’s phenomenology, it gave rise to important reactions, as if you had hit upon something absolutely central that could not but elicit reservations from several phenomenologists. What led you to phenomenology after your work on
6. The World as It Runs—and as It Doesn’t from:
The Rigor of Things
Abstract: Did I stay discreet enough? At least I hope so, but hearing journalists or interviewers point this out to me at the start of every published or broadcast interview, I start to doubt it. If there was discretion, it was in fact voluntary because I had the luck (if one can call it that) to engage the media very early, on the occasion of the publication
Book Title: The Origin of the Political-Hannah Arendt or Simone Weil?
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Williams Gareth
Abstract: Drawing actively and extensively on Arendt's and Weil's voluminous writings, but also sparring with thinkers from Marx to Heidegger, The Origin of the Political traverses the relation between polemos and polis, between Greece, Rome, God, force, technicity, evil, and the extension of the Christian imperial tradition, while at the same time delineating the conceptual and hermeneutic ground for the development of Esposito's notion and practice of "the impolitical."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xhr6c5
1 PARTITIONS from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The relation between Hannah Arendt and Simone Weil can be viewed through the sign of a double paradox. First of all, theirs is the sign of a missed encounter: Two of the most important thinkers of the century, both Jewish and both deeply touched by the experience of persecution and exile, never had the chance to meet, each one generating their thought in distinct and distant circles. Nevertheless—and this is the second paradox—it is precisely this conceptual distance that appears to constitute an imperceptible zone of contact, an invisible tangent, a form of mysterious convergence that is increasingly
3 PRINCIPIUM AND INITIUM from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The emphasis falls once again on origin. It is precisely Homer’s originarity—the fact that he precedes even the beginnings of historiography—that attracts the attention of both philosophers in relation to the event that he translates into verse. The reason is clear: The poem does not deal with just one event in Western history, though this is indeed remarkable in itself. Rather, it deals with the
firstevent, as Hegel had already underlined forcefully: “The highest form that floated before Greek imagination was Achilles, the Son of the Poet, the Homeric Youth of the Trojan War. Homer is the
4 BEGINN, ANFANG, URSPRUNG from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: The complexity underlying the relation between object and interpretation is grounded in the fact that in Arendt there are two distinct and even contradictory readings of origin that lie in pursuit of each other, alternating and intertwining throughout the entirety of her work. The first is of a deconstructive nature, while the second is constitutive. In order to identify them separately—and before turning to the antonymic point at which they converge—we need to return to two authors who were both very much present in Arendt’s formative years. The first is Nietzsche and, more specifically, the “genealogist” Nietzsche, who
6 THE THIRD ORIGIN from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: It might seem that the path traced thus far in Arendt’s thought can best be characterized as the squaring of a circle, as the forging of a lineal solution for the antinomic relation between originality and duration, deconstruction and constitution, violence and power. But things are more complex than they appear to be at first sight. If we take a closer look at the hinge that conjoins and absorbs the “before” and the “after,” we can see that it does not develop without gaps or remainders. As such, in order to guarantee the success of a differential translation of war
7 NOTHINGNESS from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: With Simone Weil, we confront a different scenario. For her, origin does not collapse under the weight of historical catastrophe. But this is not so because history—in particular, modern history—is conceived in more positive terms. On the contrary, we could say that in many ways Weil emphasizes origin’s negative characteristics. It is merely that, unlike Arendt, the negative in Weil does not affect origin from the outside principally because it is already embroiled in it. The modern therefore is not ailing because it betrays origin, but precisely because it fulfills it in all its unbearably antinomic features. Origin
9 IN COMMON from:
The Origin of the Political
Abstract: As already observed, the void is the place of force’s deployment and, as such, of the implacable conflict that divides and locates men in their opposition. However—and this is the analytical shift that moves in a direction unexplored by Alain—the fact that force deploys in an originary void is not the same as saying that it is the origin of the universe. If things were so, that is, if origin were once again self-coincidental on the side of force, then its plenitude alone would exist rather than the emptiness throughout which it extends. In other words, emptiness is
How Soon Is (This Apocalypse) Now? from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) MARCHAL JOSEPH A.
Abstract: These times justify impatience. Is it the end? Or was
thatthe end? Well, when exactly do you mean?¹ Has it already taken too long? If so, in which ways and in what directions have these ends or these pauses turned us, even dragged us? Ultimately, why should those of us who want (at least some) things to change care? One way to address such questions, suchfeelings, about time is to attend to a range of strange temporalities bubbling up out of an ancient letter and more recent missives in queer studies. The downright eschatological mood of late in
The Futures Outside: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) THOMAS ERIC A.
Abstract: This essay examines the epilogue of Revelation (22:8–21)¹ as an intervention for new imaginations of, and actions toward, a new heaven and a new earth that can be realized now in the present. It names the ways that Revelation (and therefore the Bible) is used as a means to make outsiders of queer people and proposes that the author/narrator John is not the only one who can be filled with the spirit on the Lord(e)’s day
Excess and the Enactment of Queer Time: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) DANIELS BRANDY
Abstract: The Anglican theologian Sarah Coakley is a particularly notable, if provocative, figure in feminist theology, a discourse often at odds with traditional systematic theology—either in perception or by its own avowal. A central endeavor in Coakley’s scholarship has been to rethink this complicated, often fraught, relationship between feminism and systematics via a turn to contemplative prayer.¹ In her acclaimed collection of essays titled
Powers and Submissions, for instance, Coakley challenges feminist theologians to rethink their skepticism toward submission and proposes a Christian feminism grounded on a “fundamental and practiced dependencyon God,” arguing this dependency as a “fulcrum from
The Entrepreneur and the Big Drag: from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) TONSTAD LINN MARIE
Abstract: The current socioeconomic order exerts immense pressure to convince us that significant change is impossible: We can practice amelioration—but not desired transformation—as we participate in the forced march toward willing acquiescence to the logic of economic rationality. Not a contradiction—this order is particularly insidious in its ability to orient our desires from the inside, as it were, so that our experiences of risk and futility turn into opportunities for self-realization, as we’ll see.
Afterword from:
Sexual Disorientations
Author(s) FREEMAN ELIZABETH
Abstract: In the Episcopal Church, there is a Sunday school curriculum called Godly Play. Based on Montessori principles, the curriculum involves an adult telling a Bible story, parable, or “liturgical action” story, using small fi gurines and symbolic objects to make the story pictorial and compelling to children ages three through ten. The very first story the children hear, “The Circle of the Church Year,” is about time.¹
Book Title: Piaget's Theory of Knowledge-Genetic Epistemology and Scientific Reason
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KITCHENER RICHARD F.
Abstract: Best known as a child psychologist, Jean Piaget considered himself primarily an epistemologist who was engaged in empirical research on the development of knowledge. In this book, philosopher and psychologist Richard F. Kitchener provides the first comprehensive study in English of Piaget's genetic epistemology, or his theory of knowledge. Drawing largely on a careful perusal of Piaget's untranslated works, Kitchener presents little-known aspects of Piaget's thought and argues that, in fact, Piagest has been misunderstood and was completely justified in his claim to be an epistemologist rather than a psychologist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sbd
1. Introduction from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: If one were to name the most significant psychologists of the twentieth century, Sigmund Freud would surely head the list. But who would come after him in importance? Opinions would probably differ here, with serious consideration begin given to B. F. Skinner and Ivan Pavlov. But Jean Piaget would also most assuredly be mentioned. By universal consensus Piaget is counted as one of the two or three most significant figures in twentieth-century psychology. In fact, he is generally taken to be the most significant child or developmental psychologist in the history of psychology. He has studied scores of children busily
2. Piaget’s Theory of Cognitive Development from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: Although Piaget is a genetic epistemologist, he is more widely known for his theory of cognitive development—his epistemological psychological theory concerning the development of epistemic cognition in the individual. This theory is often taken to be a pure psychological theory about child development, a scientific theory of psychological development that makes factual claims about what happens in the course of development, claims backed to some degree by scientific evidence.
3. Piaget’s Theory of Knowledge: from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: In discussing Piaget’s epistemology, a very natural starting point is the question, what is Piaget’s basic epistemological outlook, and how does it differ from traditional philosophical epistemology? Philosophers from the Greeks-to the twentieth century have advanced numerous theories of knowledge—for example, that knowledge comes from the senses and is reducible to a collection of sense impressions, or that knowledge comes from the creative activity of the rational mind. Traditionally they have also discussed questions of a more abstract, reflective kind: What problems should epistemology investigate? What are the limits of our knowledge? What method(s) should one employ in epistemology?
4. Piaget’s Epistemological Constructivism from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: Piaget’s theory of knowledge is fundamentally concerned with the question, how (developmentally) is a certain epistemic fact or property possible? How is it possible, for example, for the necessary truths contained in logic and mathematics to result from the contingent ones the child first encounters?¹ How is it possible for the epistemic objectivity of adulthood to develop from the subjectivity and egocentrism of childhood? How is it possible for objective social structures, containing properties ofjustice, fairness, and reciprocity, to develop from individual behavior patterns lacking these features? How is it possible for scientific knowledge to have developed from earlier modes
5. Piaget’s Theory of Epistemology from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: We know things, Piaget claims, because we construct epistemic structures, which function as necessary conditions for knowledge. In this process our epistemic structures become progressively more adequate. This constructivism, whatever conceptual flaws it may have, lies at the heart of Piaget’s theory of knowledge. An attempt to provide such a theory of knowledge we labelled “epistemology proper” or “normative epistemology.” Piaget’s constructivism, I suggested, is a theory about how we actually know. Constructivism can be viewed as an answer to the earlier (transcendental) question; how is it possible (developmentally) for us to have the knowledge we have? Piaget answers that
6. The Nature and Scope of Genetic Epistemology from:
Piaget's Theory of Knowledge
Abstract: Epistemology, according to Piaget, must take a dynamic turn and become a genetic epistemology. At least three different (but overlapping) characterizations of genetic genetic epistemology can be found
Chapter Two T. S. Eliot and the Archaeology of Poetry from:
American Poetry
Abstract: In a lecture presented at the Library of Congress in 1948, T. S. Eliot acknowledges so early an acquaintance with Poe that he cannot be sure whether his own work has been influenced by him. He then distances himself from his predecessor by focusing on Poe’s relation to the French Symbolists Baudelaire, Mallarmé, and Valéry.¹ This detour through another country and another language is the standard reading of the Eliot-Poe connection: Poe’s insistence on the poem as a formal artifact, as well as his critical self-consciousness, influenced the French Symbolists, who in turn influenced Eliot. Clearly, Eliot shares the Symbolists’
Chapter Six The Re-Verses of Elizabeth Bishop from:
American Poetry
Abstract: Elizabeth Bishop extends Stevens’s revision of Emerson and his bipartite career by engaging in a process of “constant re-adjustment” between subject and object, mind and nature, rhetoric and meters. The seemingly contradictory commentary that her work sustains proves her success in “con-fusing” romantic and modernist oppositions: she has been read as an autobiographical poet with an impersonal touch, as a surrealist given to meticulous observations of natural facts, and as a formalist whose poems are open-ended accumulations of detail.¹ Her distinction is to have developed the kind of diction and formal flexibility that enable her to be at home on
Chapter Seven The Coinciding Leaves of Walt Whitman from:
American Poetry
Abstract: Have you practis’d so long to learn to read?
CHAPTER 2 Further Antinomies of Dreams, Dreaming, and Dream Research from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Having set out the superordinate dimensions of our analysiscognitive science versus organismic—holistic cognition, Freud versus Jung, representational versus presentational symbolism, and causal process versus meaning—we complete our review of the literature by considering the more specific antinomies of current dream research. Each side of these contrasting dimensions is supported by important research findings and consistent theory. This in itself may illustrate the actual multiplicity of the processes of dreaming. It is equally important to locate whatever syntheses are afforded by this material and to understand them as necessarily provisional and temporary-both because of the open-ended and indeterminate nature
CHAPTER 3 Pax Memoria: from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: It is fascinating how often ostensibly empirical debates in the human sciences actually rest on largely unarticulated philosophical antinomies. So it is that within cognitive approaches to dreaming we find intimations of a hidden and very old agenda. Does an empirically based account of dreaming require a theory of constructive imagination—with its roots in the idealist/romanticist tradition of Western thought? Or rather does it afford yet another opportunity to demonstrate that all imagination is really just a complex form of memory and learning-an extension of the rationalist and reductionist attempt, now computerized, to understand the complex in terms of
CHAPTER 4 Problems in the Definition of Dreaming from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Since Hughlings-Jackson, neurologists and psychiatrists have attempted to distinguish between
positive symptoms—anomalous behavior and experience that seem to define a syndrome or condition—and the more fundamentalnegativeorloss of capacity symptoms.The latter constitute the core dissolution, for which the positive and more obvious signs compensate as the essentially normal capacities still left intact. Freud (191 1, 1919a) was influenced by this tradition: he understood hallucinations and delusions as spontaneous attempts to recover interest in the world in the face of a more primary narcissistic withdrawal. Generally it is assumed that the negative core is harder to
CHAPTER 5 The Multiplicity of Dreaming in Anthropology, the Ancient World, and the Nineteenth Century from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Nineteenth-century dream studies, prior to Freud, continue to fascinate, in part because they are based on careful observations by single individuals (and their like-minded friends) of their own often distinctive and unusually developed dreams. Precisely because long, sustained self-reflection on dreams seemed to change their dreams in mulitple but characteristic directions, these writers also cast a unique light on normative dreaming (at least within our own tradition). William James, Sigmund Freud, and A. R. Luria all held that only the selective exaggeration of the average allows us to see its normally masked dimensions and processes. On this approach exaggeration, excess,
CHAPTER 7 Specific Imaginative-Intuitive Faculties as Forms of Dreaming from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Evidence of creative imagistic activity in dream formation does not encourage us to assimilate all dreaming to representational language. Still, the difficulty in evaluating when dream imagery goes beyond prior verbal understanding suggests that imagery and language must continuously interact anyway. The linguistic processes that enter dreams most readily are more presentational than representational—in that “the whole domain of verbal wit is put at the disposal of the dreamwork” (Freud, 1900, p. 376). Certainly, in many of Freud’s own dreams ordinary language has been spontaneously rearranged in the form of rebuslike wordplay, visual hieroglyphics based on special turns of
CHAPTER 8 Lucid Dreams and Nightmares: from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Because lucid dreams (and related subtypes) violate all traditional attempts to define an essence of dreaming, their study is especially useful in highlighting the dangers of such a monolithic approach. This in turn helps to explain the defensive hostility with which current research on lucidity has been greeted. Several attempts at a logicophilosophical account of dreaming (Sartre, Boss, Malcolm) have been predicated on the impossibility of what we now term fully lucid dreaming. Indeed, the analytical philosopher Norman Malcolm insists that at best we can only
dreamthat we dream; we cannot know it as we know facts when awake.
CHAPTER 11 Narrative Structures: from:
The Multiplicity of Dreams
Abstract: Any cognitive psychology of dreaming must encounter and reconcile two statements: “the dream is a story” and “the dream is imagery.” Neither statement is as obvious as it initially appears, I I because there is no agreement in contemporary cognitive psychology on the ultimate relation between visual-spatial imagery and language. Much evidence and theory supports both the view that a visual-spatial imagistic intelligence rests directly on and creatively reorganizes the processes of perception and the view that mental imagery is a surface paraphrase of abstract propositional knowledge, whose deep structure is accordingly far closer to verbal syntax than visual imagery.
Chapter Two The Step Back: from:
Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: In Plato’s
Euthyphro(11b-e) Socrates compares words to the statues of Daedalus, which were said to be so lifelike that they had to be restrained like slaves, because they kept trying to escape. Untethered words wander around aimlessly, whence we get our concept of ambiguity or the waywardness of discourse. However, the tying down of one’s words is not easy. In fact, sometimes Socrates makes it sound like the question is all that can be justifiably put into words. For the rest one should keep silent, or speak only in the most guarded fashion, darkly, and then perhaps only of
Chapter Four The Poetic Experience with Language from:
Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: One therapeutic effect of Heidegger’s first essay on language is that it disconnects us—estranges or alienates us—from the very idea of language, especially as this comes down to us in idealist and analytic philosophies of language, linguistics, semiotics, various criticisms, and so on; and this also means alienation from what we might call the social theory of language, where the idea is not to retrieve the deep grammatical, semantic, or propositional structure of human expression, but just to study how people talk, what they say when, their language games, their discursive practices and institutions, their forms of life.
Chapter Five Words and Sounds in Heidegger from:
Heidegger's Estrangements
Abstract: I said at the end of the last chapter that “thinking needs to link itself up with poetry,” but obviously this is a careless way of talking — and misleading in the bargain, especially if we go on to imagine that if language cannot avail itself to us logically, then it must do so preconceptually, intuitively, practically, or by some primordial process of knowing that logic might subsequently come along to verify; but this isn’t what Heidegger is talking about at all. It is not that there are, for example, two categories of mental operation, one primitive and one enlightened, one
Book Title: Norms of Rhetorical Culture- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Farrell Thomas B.
Abstract: Rhetoric is widely regarded by both its detractors and advocates as a kind of antithesis to reason. In this book Thomas B. Farrell restores rhetoric as an art of practical reason and enlightened civic participation, grounding it in its classical tradition-particularly in the rhetoric of Aristotle. And, because prevailing modernist world views bear principal responsibility for the disparagement of rhetorical tradition, Farrell also offers a critique of the dominant currents of modern humanist thought.Farrell argues that rhetoric is not antithetical to reason but is a manner of posing and answering questions that is distinct from the approaches of analytic and dialectical reason. He develops this position in a number of ways: through a series of bold reinterpretations of Aristotle's
Rhetoric; through a detailed appraisal of traditional rhetorical concepts as seen in modern texts from the Army-McCarthy hearings to Edward Kennedy's memorial for his brother, Mario Cuomo's address on abortion, Betty Friedan'sFeminine Mystique, and Vaclav Havel's inaugural address; and through a fresh appraisal of theories on the character of language and discourse found in contemporary philosophy, literary criticism, anthropology, deconstructionism, Marxism, and especially in Habermas's critical theory of communicative action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3sn2
Introduction from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: A rhetorical culture is an institutional formation in which motives of competing parties are intelligible, audiences available, expressions reciprocal, norms translatable, and silences noticeable. It may seem odd, even confounding, to introduce certain norms or “goods” where the notoriously crafty business of rhetoric is concerned. Today we have spin doctors and image consultants, audience-manipulators of every ideological stripe—hence the much discussed flight of audiences from the public arena. But this is not really so surprising. Rhetoric has always been a practiced imperfection, the worst fear of idealized reason and the best hope for whatever remains of civic life. This
2 Rhetorical Reflection: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Even earlier in the twentieth century, the public agenda seemed lost or abandoned. In an atmosphere of crisis, civic institutions could only repeat empty symbolic reassurances. The symbols were in fact empty, because there appeared to be no learned experience except failure for them to rest on. Resignation, cynicism, and hopelessness had become the order of the day. In the midst of this material and symbolic dispossession it seems almost fanciful to imagine a creative ethical option for speech. Around the world oratory flourished; but it was hardly the sort to revive hopes for participatory democracy. Imagine now a public
4 After Rhetorical Culture: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: It is a fact that not all stories are told. And if they could all be told, there is no imaginable forum that could encompass all the needs, themes, and moral concerns which deserve expression. Even if, as some of us once thought, the whole world is watching, its attention span seems limited to one thing at a time. This is, in less humble language, the modernist dilemma. It is all too easy to universalize wants, needs, interests, and norms. In a world of unequal chances, such categories exist only as a fragile language of development begging for yet another
5 Universal Pragmatics and Practical Reason: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Proclamations of reason’s eclipse, like many a categorical dismissal, have shown themselves to be a bit hasty. Perhaps the life of practical reason, as a mode of reflection open to the collectivity, may be thought of as a generational phenomenon.¹ In any historical period, there are likely to be cultures in which reason and rhetoric have been poisoned. But it seems premature to pronounce any state of affairs, however extreme, as having eliminated forever the prospects for recovery. In the retrospection of dark times, utopian thought can appear foolish. But some such thought may be necessary if possibilities for reflection
6 Rhetorical Coherence: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Nobody admits to liking rhetoric very much. But almost everyone admits to having occasionally been seized and transported by a discourse which changed or influenced their life and priorities. It is a commonplace that such discourse is rare, the exception that proves our (usually untested) rule. But all practices need to have outstanding exemplars, touchstones of accomplishment. And virtually by definition, such outstanding cases will be rare. It is probably not possible to determine whether great or eloquent rhetoric is rarer now than it was in the various golden ages of the past. Nor do I think that the determination,
7 Criticism, Disturbance, and Rhetorical Community: from:
Norms of Rhetorical Culture
Abstract: Eloquence deepens and distinguishes the contours of a practice, as do all noble exceptions, the few showing the many what might be accomplished. But for the pedestrian art of rhetoric, these “many” are more than also-rans in the parade; they are also the constitutive stuff of the art. Ours has been the century of Mahler and Shostakovich and of Elvis, Janis, and Chuck Berry as well. Rhetoric works its magic inconspicuously, in small successes as well as noble failures. Above all, it works
bothsides of the street. In this chapter, I address a problem which haunts contemporary practice: namely,
Conclusion: from:
Trials of Desire
Abstract: Tue prospect of ending a piece of work, like the prospect of beginning one, so frequently generates defensive discourse that one is led to speculate, a bit nostalgically, about the medieval convention of the retraction. As a version of the Augustinian confession, with its drama of a conversion from secular words to sacred ones, the retraction served psychological and aesthetic, as well as religious, aims by providing a formal channel for the apologetic impulse that perennially besets authors preparing to take leave of their books.¹ Although the retraction may seem a dead convention today, its ghost lives on in the
TWO A MODEL OF HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE from:
The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The mention of hierarchical pitch structure immediately and appropriately calls forth the imposing figure of Heinrich Schenker. His immensely important (if not universally accepted) theories of the structure of tonal music are the inescapable source for any subsequent inquiry into this general area. Unfortunately for those who wish to apply his ideas to newer music, the prolongational model does not seem to travel well outside the common-practice literature for which it was designed. The introduction alluded to efforts by Felix Salzer and Roy Travis to employ that model in Bartok’s music and in other music of the twentieth century.
SIX THE SONATA FOR TWO PIANOS AND PERCUSSION, I AND II from:
The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The most important issues for the analysis are three: the explicit presence and use of octatonic sets and subsets to provide harmonic structures in several different ways; the interaction, especially in movement 11, of these sets with the chromatic
SEVEN THE CONCERTO FOR ORCHESTRA, I from:
The Music of Béla Bartók
Abstract: The final analysis in the book returns to a work on a very large scale. In the Concerto for Orchestra we find an obvious increase in the stability and clarity of tonal function at several levels of structure. Some functions appear in almost traditional common-practice form. Whether the clarity of function supports an equally increased clarity of structural overlay remains to be seen.
Book Title: Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil-Exiles, Returnees and Their Impact in the Humanities and Social Sciences in Austria and Central Europe
Publisher: Verlag der österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften
Author(s): PRISCHING MANFRED
Abstract: The tremendous loss to the humanities and social sciences in the 20th century resulting from the expulsion of thousands of scholars and artists from Austria and Central Europe has been well documented. The present collection of articles deals with a related but under-researched aspect – it combines analyses of the complex bureaucratic and the ideological obstacles which exiled scholars from a wide range of disciplines in the humanities and social sciences and creative artists faced when they were willing to return and specific essays documenting the varying opportunities for individual returnees to influence the development of their different disciplines after the end of the Nazi tyranny. The 27 essays highlight the roles of a number of returnees as generous mentors for younger scholars and their encouragement of modernization and internationalization in an atmosphere of stagnation and provincialism in the universities. Eminent experts in history, philosophy or political science who had returned were hampered by the denial of full academic appointments despite their highly stimulating initiatives, while theatre directors had a relatively strong impact on the programs in the theaters and the other media. The volume also illustrates personal factors, including the understandable hesitation of prominent intellectuals such as Oskar Morgenstern or Ernst Krenek to give up the advantages of US American citizenship for academic positions, especially in a country exposed to political threats in the Cold War; but the essays also bring out the fact that quite a few of the émigrés remained exiles on both sides of the Atlantic. A particular strength of the volume is the detailed consideration of the fortunes and the influence of the impressive array of exiled Austrian economists. Many of them returned from Britain, helping to shape economic theory and Austrian economic policy, even though necessarily mainly from outside the universities, while transatlantic exiles largely remained in the USA.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3w37
Introduction from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) ZACHARASIEWICZ WALDEMAR
Abstract: Seventy years after the end of the Nazi regime seemed a suitable moment to examine the insufficiently studied question of the impact of that minority of those driven from Austria and Central Europe into exile who returned after World War Two. It is meanwhile well-known that it was not until the 1960s that the awareness of the tremendous cost of the expulsion and persecution of intellectuals and artists who belonged to the cultural and ethnic Jewish group in Central Europe, or who held views incompatible with the Nazi ideology, found expression in systematic scholarly investigations.¹ The catastrophic brain drain in
Remigration reconsidered. from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) FEICHTINGER JOHANNES
Abstract: In der Zeit des Nationalsozialismus wurden 130.000 bis 150.000 ÖsterreicherInnen aus „rassischen“ oder politischen Gründen zur Emigration gezwungen, die überwiegende Mehrheit davon Juden (Stadler, „Emigration“ 17). Schon lange vor der Machtübernahme des Nationalsozialismus hatten viele junge ForscherInnen jüdischer Herkunft und/oder linker politischer Gesinnung Österreich verlassen, da ihnen seit Anfang der 1920er Jahre Berufslaufbahnen an den Universitäten zusehends verwehrt wurden (Feichtinger, „Braindrain“ 286-98; Taschwer 99-132). Auswanderung und Vertreibung zerstörten nicht nur die lebendige Wissenschaftskultur Österreichs zur Jahrhundertwende, sie hinterließen auch eine gravierende personelle Lücke in der Zweiten Republik: „A noticeable characteristic of Austrian science is the great shortage of scientific workers
[2. Introduction] from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Abstract: Among the hundreds of writers and individuals active in the performing arts who had fled after the accession of power of the Nazis and after the
Anschlussand had crossed the Atlantic the debate about the possibility of a return to a re-constituted Austria evolved and the balance only very gradually shifted in favor of such an act, as Primus-Heinz Kucher’s essay shows. In his detailed analysis of the contributions of exiles to the journalAufbau, published by the German Jewish Club in the USA, which had prominent exiled Austrian writers in its advisory board, the focus long remained on
[3. Introduction] from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Abstract: The selective discussion of the impact of experts in the field of music in this section of the volume is opened by an essay by Bruno Nettl on his father Paul Nettl, the music historian from the German University of Prague. Bruno Nettel relates the ambivalent attitude towards his adopted land of his father, who in his exile from his native region retained his interest in and approach to classical music, associating with German-speaking colleagues and cultivating his ties to his peers in Europe, to which he returned in spirit and emotion, while never fully integrating into the different academic
[4. Introduction] from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Abstract: This section considers the experience of emigration of a distinguished historian, several prominent political scientists and a sociologist, and discusses the direct and indirect impact these individuals had as returnees to Austria or other parts of Central Europe, where they left their mark on the map of scholarship as mentors of students who themselves later achieved academic positions and where they contributed significantly to the evolution and progress of the disciplines they represented.
Ernst Fraenkel and Franz Neumann: from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) KETTLER DAVID
Abstract: As indicated by the title, I shall not be dealing with returns to Vienna, but to Berlin. Indeed, one of my two subjects always denied that he had in fact “returned” during his twenty-five years back in Berlin, and the question about the final plans of the other are unanswerable, although there are indications that he was expecting to remain in Berlin, at least for some years, when he died in an automobile accident at the age of fifty-four. When I was asked to contribute to this publication, I offered the Berlin cases not only because I had no Viennese
Some Reflections on how the Remigrant K.R. Fischer influenced Vienna’s Academic Discourses from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) NAGL LUDWIG
Abstract: After reflecting briefly on what Stanley Cavell has called Kurt R. Fischer’s ‘living between’, the following report will first address Fischer’s activities in Pennsylvania and their connections with Austria, and then present seven examples of the stimulus and enrichment that Fischer gave to academic life in Vienna (and Kassel).
[6. Introduction] from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Abstract: The cluster of five essays – two in German and three in English on the impressive array of prominent economists who as members of intellectual circles extant in Vienna in the 1920s and 1930s went into exile or as young talented students acquired excellent credentials abroad as refugees, and either considered a return to Austria after the war or should have been called back – though only a minority of them actually returned – is opened by an essay by Herbert Matis.
Two Austrian Émigré Economists: from:
Return from Exile - Rückkehr aus dem Exil
Author(s) KURZ HEINZ D.
Abstract: This contribution will be devoted to the academic careers and works of two eminent Austrian economists: Josef Steindl and Kurt Wilhelm Rothschild. Both scholars had to leave Austria after the
Anschlussand found exile in Great Britain. They returned to Austria after World War II and had a considerable impact on Austrian economics. Both were scholars of international reputation who published highly influential books and essays with major publishers and in leading academic journals. Alas, only one of them, Rothschild, eventually received the official recognition he deserved and was appointed to a chair in economics in Austria, whereas Steindl was
Book Title: Vatican II and Beyond-The Changing Mission and Identity of Canadian Women Religious
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the end of the Second Vatican Council, which aimed to align the Church with the modern world. Over the last five decades, women religious have engaged with the council’s reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeding the expectations of the Church. Addressing how Canadian women religious envisioned and lived out the changes in religious life brought on by a pluralistic and secularizing world, Vatican II and Beyond analyzes the national organization of female and male congregations, the Canadian Religious Conference, and the lives of two individual sisters: visionary congregational leader Alice Trudeau and social justice activist Mary Alban. This book focuses on the new transnational networks, feminist concepts, professionalization of religious life, and complex political landscapes that emerged during this period of drastic transition as women religious sought to reconstruct identities, redefine roles, and signify vision and mission at both the personal and collective levels. Following women religious as they encountered new meanings of faith in their congregations, the Church, and society at large, Vatican II and Beyond demonstrates that the search for a renewed vision was not just a response to secularization, but a way to be reborn as Catholic women.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xp3w79
INTRODUCTION from:
Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: The year 2015 marked the fiftieth anniversary of the closure of the Second Vatican Council (Vatican II). The council, which broadly aimed at aligning the Church with the modern world, is considered the most significant event in the history of contemporary Roman Catholicism. The impact of the council on women religious, who engaged with the reforms with unprecedented enthusiasm, far exceeded the changes expected by the hierarchy of the Church. The decline of religious life is often blamed on the Second Vatican Council, but this book documents and demonstrates the greater complexity of the issues involved.
2 The Missionary Oblate Sisters: from:
Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) Bruno-Jofré Rosa
Abstract: The Missionary Oblate Sisters of the Sacred Heart and Mary Immaculate (mo), a bilingual (French and English) teaching congregation, was founded by Archbishop Adélard Langevin in 1904, in Manitoba, Canada. The foundation was Langevin’s practical way of expressing his commitment to a culturally dual French-English vision of Canada, and of addressing his fears of Anglicization, which were heightened after the Manitoba government withdrew financial support for confessional schools in 1890. It was also a way to respond to the needs of the Oblate Fathers of Mary Immaculate in relation to the process of colonization of the Aboriginal peoples, mainly through
Conclusion from:
Vatican II and Beyond
Author(s) Smyth Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This book focuses on women congregations’ encounter with modernity during the 1960s, 1970s, and 1980s. These three decades represent an era when social contentions revealed that paradigms no longer held and that new responses to both historical and emerging problems were required. The Western world was entering postmodernity, characterized by its fractured and liquid quality,¹ aptly characterized as an age of fracture, with the construct of woman being profoundly affected. A notion of identity common to all women was quickly problematized to a conception of womanhood that disaggregated along lines of race, gender, and sexuality. At the same time, the
Book Title: The Ambiguous Allure of the West-Traces of the Colonial in Thailand
Publisher: Hong Kong University Press, HKU
Author(s): Chakrabarty Dipesh
Abstract: The book brings studies of modern Thai history and culture into dialogue with debates in comparative intellectual history, Asian cultural studies, and postcolonial studies. It takes Thai Studies in new directions through case studies of the cultural hybridity and ambivalences that have emerged from the manifold interactions between Siam/Thailand and the West from 1850 to the present day. Central aims of The Ambiguous Allure of the West are to critique notions of Thai "uniqueness" or "exceptionalism" and locate Thai Studies in a broader, comparative perspective by arguing that modern Siam/Thailand needs to be understood as a semicolonial society. In contrast to conservative nationalist and royalist accounts of Thai history and culture, which resist comparing the country to its once-colonized Asian neighbours, this book's contributors highlight the value of postcolonial analysis in understanding the complexly ambiguous, interstitial, liminal and hybrid character of Thai/Western cultural interrelationships. At the same time, by pointing to the distinctive position of semicolonial societies in the Western-dominated world order, the chapters in this book make significant contributions to developing the critical theoretical perspectives of international cultural studies. The contributors demonstrate how the disciplines of history, anthropology, political science, film and cultural studies all enhance these contestations in intersecting ways, and across different historical moments. Each of the chapters raises manifold themes and questions regarding the nature of intercultural exchange, interrogated through theoretically critical lenses. This book directs its discussions at those studying not only in the fields of Thai and Southeast Asian studies but also in colonial and postcolonial studies, Asian cultural studies, film studies and comparative critical theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xwbmf
3 Competitive Colonialisms: from:
The Ambiguous Allure of the West
Author(s) Loos Tamara
Abstract: From the nineteenth century until the mid-twentieth, European imperial powers imposed legal and economic restrictions on Siam, as Thailand was called until 1939. These restrictions limited Siam’s sovereignty in ways that made it comparable to a European colony. Siam, from this angle, appears colonized. However, this comparison uncritically locates Siam as a victim of the West without questioning the aggrandizing activities engaged in by Siam’s rulers or challenging the conformist historiography that it produces. Below I compare Siam to imperial Britain to reveal their arresting similarities. Siam most closely approximates patterns of British imperialism in its decision to create Islamic
Book Title: Liturgical Theology after Schmemann-An Orthodox Reading of Paul Ricoeur
Publisher: Fordham University Press
Author(s): Louth Andrew
Abstract: The book examines two fundamental questions: 1) what are the implications of the philosopher's oeuvre for liturgical theology at large? And 2)how does the adoption of a Ricoeurian hermeneutic shape the study of a particular rite? Taking the seminal legacy of Orthodox theologian Alexander Schmemann (1921-1983) as its point of departure, Butcher contributes to the renewal of contemporary Eastern Christian thought and ritual practice by engaging a spectrum of current theological and philosophical conversations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xzh13v
Foreword from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Author(s) Louth Andrew
Abstract: It is generally recognized that “liturgical theology,” as a notion or a discipline, owes its existence to the great Orthodox theologian of the last century, Fr. Alexander Schmemann. Liturgical theology, as Fr. Alexander understood it, is distinct from liturgiology, the study of the history and development of liturgical rites through (primarily) liturgical texts, and from a theology of liturgy, understood as a fundamental dimension of theology of worship. Both these disciplines are impor tant—indeed liturgical theology depends upon them—but liturgical theology, as Fr. Alexander understood it, is theology derived from, or validated by, the liturgical practice of the
CHAPTER 4 At the Intersection of the Via Positiva and the Via Negativa from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter we extend the preceding discussion of metaphor by focusing on the question of the kind of
truthcommunicated in metaphorical utterance. Given the primacy of metaphor in liturgical speech, this question is of particular importance. Dialogue with several interlocutors will set up our concluding consideration of how Byzantine worship characteristically combines kataphatic and apophatic forms of discourse—resulting in a peculiar approach to naming (and experiencing) God.
CHAPTER 7 Liturgical Time, Narrative, Memory, and History from:
Liturgical Theology after Schmemann
Abstract: In this chapter I propose a Ricoeurian approach to the mnemonic operations animating the ritual process—implicit though they may be. Specifically, through an investigation of several key sections of his magisterial antepenultimate work,
Memory, History, Forgetting(henceforth,MHF), we will come to apprehend the complexity of the liturgical act construed as a quintessential form of “remembering.” In order to bring into relief certain elements ofMHFthat will prove germane to our intended liturgical application, we will first enter into a recent debate concerning the role of history (and historiography) in liturgical theology: The resolution of this debate (or
Book Title: Points of Departure-Rethinking Student Source Use and Writing Studies Research Methods
Publisher: Utah State University Press
Author(s): JAMIESON SANDRA
Abstract: Points of Departureencourages a return to empirical research about writing, presenting a wealth of transparent, reproducible studies of student sources. The volume shows how to develop methods for coding and characterizing student texts, their choice of source material, and the resources used to teach information literacy. In so doing, the volume advances our understanding of how students actually write.The contributors offer methodologies, techniques, and suggestions for research that move beyond decontextualized guides to grapple with the messiness of research-in-process, as well as design, development, and expansion. Serviss and Jamieson's model of RAD writing studies research is transcontextual and based on hybridized or mixed methods. Among these methods are citation context analysis, research-aloud protocols, textual and genre analysis, surveys, interviews, and focus groups, with an emphasis on process and knowledge as contingent. Chapters report on research projects at different stages and across institution types-from pilot to multi-site, from community college to research university-focusing on the methods and artifacts employed.A rich mosaic of research about research,Points of Departureadvances knowledge about student writing and serves as a guide for both new and experienced researchers in writing studies.Contributors: Crystal Benedicks, Katt Blackwell-Starnes, Lee-Ann Kastman Breuch, Kristi Murray Costello, Anne Diekema, Rebecca Moore Howard, Sandra Jamieson, Elizabeth Kleinfeld, Brian N. Larson, Karen J. Lunsford, M. Whitney Olsen, Tricia Serviss, Janice R. Walker
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1xzh15w
Interchapter 2: from:
Points of Departure
Abstract: One of the great challenges and opportunities of educational research is rectifying predictions about how learning theoretically works with how learning
actuallyworks in—and across—different contexts. Those of us who study writing and literacy are uniquely aware of these tensions. In fact, writing studies research traditionally inquires into how beautifully divergent and surprising learning can be in practice. Conversations about writing processes in 1960s writing-pedagogy research embody this tension; theoretical understandings oftypicalprocesses of developing writers became dangerously calcified intothewriting process quite quickly. What began as inquiry about how writing happens (Cooper 1986; Emig 1971;
Chapter 3 THE THINGS THEY CARRY: from:
Points of Departure
Author(s) Serviss Tricia
Abstract: For writing studies scholars like me who focus on teacher preparation, terms like
teaching practicumandgraduate-student orientationstir up deep and pressing disciplinary tensions. We return to the same theoretical and practical questions as we do in the work of professionalizing ourselves as teachers:How can we best prepare writing teachers, both novice and veteran? When and how should programming support their professionalization? How do we simultaneously prepare them both as emerging writers and writing teachers?As we embrace digital writing, reading, and research tools even more fully, the cracks in our knowledge and strategies for preparing new writing
Chapter 8 JUST READ THE ASSIGNMENT: from:
Points of Departure
Author(s) Kleinfeld Elizabeth
Abstract: In 2009, the Metropolitan State University of Denver’s (MSU Denver) English department volunteered to become one of sixteen institutions that contributed first-year composition (FYC) students’ research papers to the Citation Project’s data pool. The preliminary findings of the Citation Project resonated with the composition program’s leadership, and as an emerging Hispanic-serving institution (HSI) with modified open enrollment that attracts many first-generation college students and nontraditional students, we were eager to learn how our students’ writing compared with the writing of students at other institutions.
CHAPTER 3 SCRIPTURE from:
Fundamental Theology
Abstract: It is hard to imagine a long transmission and therefore a long ecclesial tradition of the word of God without writing, and so without the Writings, the Scriptures.¹ Revelation consists in words and deeds. Deeds, or facts, are difficult to fix in permanent form without writing, and difficult to arrange in some ordered sequence without writing.² As for the New Testament, the necessity of recording in some stable form both eyewitness testimony to the events of Jesus’ life, as well as an accurate remembrance of his words, plays an important role here, as we shall see in more detail in
CHAPTER 4 CHURCH AND DOGMA from:
Fundamental Theology
Abstract: Revelation occurs only if the one addressed, the Church, hears it. But hearing is an active reception of what is heard. When the Church hears the word of God, revelation overflows Scripture itself and passes into the Church’s liturgy, practice, and dogma.¹ When the word is heard the first response is praise (liturgy). The second response is enacting the mission of charity that those who hear the word obediently embrace: first, there is sharing the truth, evangelizing those who have not heard; second, there is enacting the truth in the bodily works of love for the hungry and the naked.
CHAPTER 6 CREDIBILITY from:
Fundamental Theology
Abstract: The credibility or believability of divine revelation is a property that follows from its nature. God does not speak unless he can be heard, and he does not command unless he can be obeyed. The actuality of hearing what God says is the topic of the chapter on faith. Between the speaking and the hearing, however, there is this third thing, the credibility of what is said: the ability of revelation to be heard as what it really is, its capacity to be taken as true by the hearer.
CHAPTER 8 THEOLOGY from:
Fundamental Theology
Abstract: God speaks to us, and his speaking demands an answer; he accomplishes our salvation in history, and that accomplishment commands a response. The first answer is the prayer of the Church in praise and thanksgiving, in words first taught to us by God in the Psalms; the first response is a re-actualization of the work of salvation in the liturgy, especially in Baptism and the Eucharist. A second response is the repetition of the word of God in evangelizing and catechesis and preaching, and the extension of God’s salvation of us in the works of love we do for others.
Book Title: Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?- Publisher: Presses de l'Université du Québec
Author(s): Lefèvre Sylvain
Abstract: Ouvrage clé permettant de comprendre le rôle politique des fondations subventionnaires, le présent collectif est la première grande synthèse de l’histoire de la philanthropie canadienne et québécoise. Dès le début du XXe siècle, la dimension sociopolitique des organisations philanthropiques a été remise en question : quelle légitimité d’action pouvaient avoir des acteurs privés fortunés dans le domaine de l’entraide ? Cet ouvrage répond à cette question en se basant sur une variété de travaux dirigés par différentes équipes de recherche. Plusieurs thèmes centraux sont abordés : survol historique et comparatif du rôle des fondations, au Québec, au Canada et ailleurs ; proposition de classification théorique et empirique des fondations ; caractérisation des relations entre les différents acteurs de l’écosystème philanthropique ; identification des stratégies mobilisées par ces différents acteurs ; réflexions sur le rôle des fondations dans la création de politiques publiques… Ce livre propose une vue d’ensemble éclairante du secteur de la philanthropie subventionnaire qui, malgré son champ d’action restreint, demeure fondamental dans les reconfigurations sociales en cours.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1z27hnx
INTRODUCTION from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Lefèvre Sylvain
Abstract: Les fondations subventionnaires, de nouveaux acteurs politiques? Telle est la question à laquelle nous tenterons de répondre par la production de cet ouvrage collectif. Les différents auteurs qui ont contribué à sa réalisation apportent, chacun à leur façon, des éléments de réponse à cette question. Rappelons que cette interrogation date. Dès le début du XX
esiècle, avec le développement des premières fondations subventionnaires étatsuniennes de l’ère moderne, la dimension sociopolitique de ces organisations a été fortement questionnée. Ce questionnement critique a d’ailleurs donné lieu à des relations tendues entre des dirigeants de ces nouvelles organisations et la présidence de l’État
1 LES FONDATIONS EN PERSPECTIVE COMPARÉE HISTORIQUE (EUROPE, ÉTATS-UNIS, CANADA, QUÉBEC) from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Rigillo Nicole
Abstract: L’action philanthropique s’enracine dans une histoire longue. On l’observe dès l’Antiquité grecque, notamment sous la forme de l’évergétisme (Veyne, 1976). De façon générale, ce type d’action permet une redistribution de ressources auprès de personnes démunies ainsi que l’allocation de fonds pour l’accomplissement de grands travaux dits d’intérêt public. Les ressources mobilisées pour la bienfaisance sont principalement financières. Elles proviennent de surplus engendrés par diverses activités économiques ou sont le fruit d’activités consacrées à la production d’un capital qui est réservé en totalité à des activités de bienfaisance. Cette histoire de la philanthropie se compose de différentes phases, où certaines périodes
2 UNE CHARITÉ EN MUTATION, MODERNITÉ ET PHILANTHROPIE AU QUÉBEC ENTRE 1840 ET 1917: from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Champagne David
Abstract: Dans leurs travaux sur la philanthropie canadienne, Fontan, Lévesque et Charbonneau (2011) constatent la méconnaissance du monde de la recherche de ce secteur d’activité. Leurs observations ont notamment rappelé maintes lacunes quant à la compréhension de la périodisation du don au Canada. En réponse à ces manquements, Charbonneau (2012a, 2012b) et Mauduit (2011) ont amorcé un cycle de recherche. Charbonneau en est ainsi arrivé à une première périodisation inspirée des « âges d’or » de la philanthropie de Bishop et Green (2008). Sous cet angle, la naissance de la philanthropie moderne canadienne est marquée par l’adoption de l’
Income War Tax
5 L’INFORMATION ET LES OUTILS POUR LA RECHERCHE AUPRÈS DES FONDATIONS SUBVENTIONNAIRES CANADIENNES from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Brouard François
Abstract: La culture philanthropique présente plusieurs visages qui, selon les expressions qu’ils arborent, influencent la société québécoise et canadienne (Institut Mallet, 2014). Cette culture est ainsi le véhicule de certaines façons de faire le bénévolat, de s’engager dans une cause sociale ou de consentir des dons financiers. Cette influence, et les pratiques qu’elles entraînent, soulève des enjeux. Celui des ressources consacrées par nos gouvernements par le système fiscal et par des partenariats privilégiant et orientant certaines actions gouvernementales est particulièrement préoccupant. On estime, par exemple, que les dépenses fiscales fédérales se situent pour 2013 à 2 530 millions de dollars pour
7 LE PORTRAIT DES DONS OCTROYÉS PAR DES FONDATIONS PRIVÉES ET PUBLIQUES AUX ORGANISMES COMMUNAUTAIRES DE LA RÉGION DE MONTRÉAL (2005 ET 2011) from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Auger Gabrièle Laliberté
Abstract: Le principal bailleur de fonds des organismes communautaires à Montréal et dans l’ensemble du Québec est l’État, principalement le gouvernement du Québec. Or l’apparition, dans la seconde moitié des années 1990, de la Fondation Lucie et André Chagnon dans le paysage du financement des organismes communautaires avec des programmes cofinancés en partenariat avec le gouvernement du Québec, comme Québec en forme et Avenir d’enfants, a suscité un débat sur la place des fondations privées dans le financement des organismes communautaires, débat largement centré sur les actions de la Fondation Lucie et André Chagnon ellemême. Or, avant la création de cette
8 LES RAPPORTS ENTRE ORGANISMES COMMUNAUTAIRES ET FONDATIONS SUBVENTIONNAIRES from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Mokrani Sofiane
Abstract: Les fondations privées dont l’action en matière de développement social remonte à plus d’un siècle aux ÉtatsUnis (Karl et Katz, 1981; Pearson, 2003) sont de plus en plus présentes au Québec sur le terrain du financement des organismes communautaires. Depuis une vingtaine d’années, on voit notamment s’implanter de nouvelles fondations privées familiales francophones telles la Fondation Marcelle et Jean Coutu et la Fondation Lucie et André Chagnon, mises respectivement sur pied en 1985 et en 2000, qui octroient des dons à divers organismes communautaires. Leurs contributions financières à l’action communautaire s’ajoutent à celles de fondations privées familiales anglophones déjà établies
9 LA STRATÉGIE DES FONDATIONS: from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Harrisson Denis
Abstract: Dans ce chapitre, nous décrivons la nature des activités des fondations et discutons de leurs stratégies. Comme les fondations forment un regroupement hétéroclite avec des activités et des préoccupations qui peuvent être totalement différentes, ce qui est valable en matière de stratégie pour un type de fondation, par exemple la fondation du CHU SainteJustine, est très différent de ce qui peut l’être pour un autre type, par exemple les fondations à vocation d’aide internationale. Pour résoudre cette difficulté, et sans entrer dans le détail de la classification des fondations, nous nous concentrons dans cet article sur les fondations dont la
11 LE PORTRAIT ET L’ANALYSE DE L’ENGAGEMENT DES FONDATIONS SUBVENTIONNAIRES CANADIENNES DANS LES POLITIQUES PUBLIQUES from:
Les fondations philanthropiques:de nouveaux acteurs politiques?
Author(s) Hall Sara
Abstract: Nous pourrions considérer que les politiques publiques représentent une reconnaissance institutionnelle et une volonté de produire du bien public. Du point de vue des actions posées par des fondations canadiennes voulant engendrer un changement sociétal, nous considérons que l’énoncé politique permet de combler l’incertitude relative à la possibilité ou à la nécessité de changement, représente une forme d’engagement collectif à aller dans cette direction et à travailler à changer les choses. Au Canada, les fondations subventionnaires occupent une position singulière, car, contrairement aux autres organismes sans but lucratif et de bienfaisance canadiens, nombre de fondations disposent d’actifs considérables qui les
Dickinson|Whitman: from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) WOLOSKY SHIRA
Abstract: Despite their pronounced differences, dickinson and Whitman are looking-glass reflections of each other and of America; although, as in facing mirrors, each one’s work is also the inverse of the other. One crux of this mutual reflection is their shared figural traditions of American culture. These originate in the biblical typologies that promised to align not only spiritual and mundane worlds, but the extensions of these into self, community, history, and God. Each practices and also tests this habit of figural alignment. The poetry of each is figurally complex, in ways often overlooked in Whitman (who can seem like the
Phenomenological Approaches to Human Contact in Whitman and Dickinson from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) NOBLE MARIANNE
Abstract: Antebellum american literature is permeated by a yearning for human contact. Ralph Waldo Emerson, for example, despairs that relationships are superficial, indeed that all of our experiences are superficial. Our encounters with people and the things of life never satisfy our hunger for the real. In his 1844 essay “Experience,” he writes:
Queer Contingencies of Canonicity: from:
Whitman & Dickinson
Author(s) GROSSMAN JAY
Abstract: The actual scheme of the course, between
La lexicografía perceptiva y la perspectiva del destinatario del diccionario (una aproximación al estudio de las actitudes lingüísticas de los periodistas) from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Hernández Humberto Hernández
Abstract: Fue por los años ochenta cuando realicé mis primeras investigaciones sobre el uso del diccionario, su función en el aula, la idea que se tenía de él y las valoraciones que hacían alumnos y profesores. Las inicié a través de una serie de cuestionarios elaborados
ad hoc, y, sin tener plena conciencia de ello, estaba realizando un estudio sobre las actitudes lingüísticas de los distintos sectores implicados en el proceso de enseñanza- aprendizaje. Trataba de averiguar, más concretamente, la opinión que tenían ciertos grupos de usuarios (profesionales no lingüistas) sobre el diccionario, cómo y por qué se han ido conformando
Los caminos de la retórica from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Mayordomo Tomás Albaladejo
Abstract: La Retórica ha encontrado algunas dificultades en los últimos tiempos para recuperar y para hacer valer su sistematización histórica¹; ha sido necesario volver a entender la Retórica como construcción activa y dinámica y no como acumulación inerte de materiales². Las reducciones y los descentramientos de los que fue objeto la Retórica³ la condujeron a una situación de gran precariedad en la determinación de su objeto y en su constitución metodológica, de la que solo podía salir gracias a la solidez de sus componentes y a la coherencia de su sistema históricamente configurado y mantenido desde la Antigüedad⁴, aunque con algunas
Las enfermedades transmisibles continúan siendo un problema de salud pública en el siglo XXI from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) de Miguel Ángel Gil
Abstract: Para ello, me centraré en la situación actual de las enfermedades transmisibles, ya que, aunque estamos en la era de la Cronicidad y de las enfermedades que denominamos crónicas, sin embargo, seguimos teniendo una gran incidencia de las enfermedades
Ramón Sarmiento y los libros de estilo from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Beaumont José Fernández
Abstract: Si Ramón Sarmiento tuviera que actualizar al día de hoy su dilatado y destacado trabajo en materia de libros de estilo seguramente incluiría en su análisis y propuestas el término «posverdad» tan recurrente, especialmente entre los políticos, de una sociedad globalizada y fascinada por la información instantánea, acosada por alquimias diversas como
big data, «internet de las cosas», «información en la nube» y otra infinidad de conceptos —neologismos la mayoría— que alfombran el lenguaje de los medios de comunicación, de los personajes que trabajan para las instituciones públicas y empresas privadas y de otras capas menos especializadas de la sociedad.
El valor de los lenguajes y el poder de la persuasión from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Fernández Antonio Baraybar
Abstract: «
Júzguense nuestros actos por la intención», tituló Michel
Lenguaje y estilo de la noticia científica from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) García-Cervigón Alberto Hernando
Abstract: La noticia, «la esencia del periodismo, la materia prima» (Grijelmo, 2014: 29), definida por Gonzalo Martín Vivaldi como el «género periodístico por excelencia que da cuenta, de un modo sucinto pero completo, de un hecho actual o actualizado, digno de ser conocido y divulgado, y de innegable repercusión humana» (1998: 369), es el tipo de discurso periodístico que con mayor precisión se ciñe al hecho o acontecimiento que se desea transmitir y, en consecuencia, el más rigurosamente objetivo en su propósito teórico y en la apariencia formal del lenguaje utilizado (Martínez Albertos, 2007: 288).
La retórica y el teatro from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Sanz y Simón Laura
Abstract: La retórica es el arte de hablar bien; es una sistematización del sentido común que hace que nos expresemos eficazmente. Su origen se establece en la Grecia clásica, donde se entiende como un conjunto de reglas y recursos que actúan en diferentes niveles en la construcción de un discurso.
Al hilo de las fotos: from:
Filología, comunicación y otros estudios
Author(s) Gómez Emilio Blanco
Abstract: «El hombre lucha desesperadamente por encontrar su imagen, primero, y por imponerla, después», escribía Umbral en 1976,¹ tan solo un año más tarde de haber dado a estampa
Mortal y rosa. Creo que hay pocas palabras, en la totalidad de su amplia obra, que resuman y expliquen mejor su trayectoria personal y su actitud como escritor. De hecho, de la lectura de los textos memorialísticos se desprende la visión de un joven que, en los primeros momentos, duda entre varias vocaciones artísticas (contempla incluso la posibilidad de dedicarse a la reflexión filosófica) para terminar eligiendo finalmente la prosa de arte
Epílogo from:
40 ideas para la práctica de la justicia restaurativa en la jurisdicción penal
Author(s) García-Longoria María Paz
Abstract: Desde el trabajo social se destaca la participación activa, a partir de la narración de historias vividas desde perspectivas constructivistas; potenciar las fortalezas de las personas, que pone el foco no en los problemas sino en los aspectos positivos para la construcción de un mundo mejor, así como
[PART ONE Introduction] from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: This piece, a requested summary of
I Believe in the Holy Spirit, offers a compact, contemporary defense of the claim that “God is present and active in our lives by a non-coercive Power” and of the Church’s teaching about the Holy Spirit. Its value is indicated by the frequency with which it is cited by scholars,¹ as well as by the fact that it was re-issued in French in 1998 and remains in print in several languages.
1 Evidence of the “Holy Spirit” in the Past and Today from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: In the Christian branch of religion, itself an off shoot of Judaism, a claim pervades all times and places. Its unanimity is impressive, considering the diversity of sources from which it comes. The claim is this: God is present and active in our lives by a non-coercive Power that we call the Holy Spirit. The following examples, chosen from among the hundreds available, attest to this.
3 The Spirit Is the Source of Life in Us Personally and in the Church from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: Having recalled the fact of an uncritical but constant claim that the Spirit
of Godis at work in us and in the world, I have highlighted the main difficulties to which this claim gives rise. This sequence is well known to believers: after a time of peaceful possession of the faith, they become aware of challenges to it. If not doubt, at least an ongoing questioning—what St. Thomas called thecogitatio—is a part of the faith. It is the passport into what Paul Ricoeur calls the second naiveté,¹ which is more or less the state of a
[PART TWO Introduction] from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: “Pneumatologie dogmatique” was one of Congar’s contributions to a five-volume set,
Initiation à la pratique de la théologie, edited by Bernard Lauret and François Refoulé in 1982. The book’s title might be rendered in English as “Beginning to Do Theology.” Still in print, the volumes—entitled Introduction, Dogmatics 1, Dogmatics 2, Ethics, and Practice—are meant for an academic setting, especially for the Catholic seminary context in which most of Congar’s teaching career was spent. Although an apologetic character is not absent from this presentation, Congar is here working more as a dogmatician than as an apologist, giving primacy to
1 Testimony about the Holy Spirit from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: The Third Person is not revealed to us in the way that the Son is revealed in Jesus Christ. However, the Spirit¹ has been and is made manifest by what the Spirit brings about. That is why we must examine the evidence—whether of Scripture, liturgical celebrations, or personal Christian experience. I have organized the testimonies in this section with an emphasis above all on the
practical. One cannot say everything all at once, even about matters that are simultaneous and connected.The Spirit inspires people to pursue God’s work.
2 The Spirit in the Personal Prayer and in the Personal Lives of Christians from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: It is a fact that prayers to the Holy Spirit begin with the cry, “Come!” Thus begin the hymn
Veni Creator(ninth century), the antiphon and sequenceVeni, Sancte Spiritus(twelfth century, with a sequence attributed to Stephen Langton), the great lyric prayer of Symeon the New Theologian that is placed at the beginning of his hymns, or a prayer of Jean de Fécamp, from 1060 (ES2:147 and 148, n. 2 [HS2:112]).¹ It is not that the Spirit is not already there, but the Spirit is implored to bring, by a new coming, what we lack. These prayers
[PART THREE Introduction] from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: Although the three articles that form Part Three were written and published before the works in Parts One and Two, they represent well the biblical, historical, sacramental, and pneumatological character of Congar’s mature thought. All three come from the last period of Congar’s scholarly life, 1969 to 1991, according to the periodday ization of Cornelis Van Vliet.¹ The climax of this part is arguably Congar’s most important article on the Holy Spirit, “Pneumatology or ‘Christomonism’ in the Latin Tradition?” We have included two additional writings, “Theology of the Holy Spirit and Theology of History” and “The Holy Spirit in the
ARTICLE 1 Theology of the Holy Spirit and Theology of History from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: First of all, I must clarify the meaning of some terms. “Pneumatology” designates the ensemble of actions proper to the Holy Spirit (or appropriated to the Holy Spirit) in the life of the Church and of the world. It is obvious that what I will say on this subject makes sense only if one presupposes the traditional Christian faith. But that is true, too, for “theology of history.” This expression designates, in the most general way, a consideration of history from God’s point of view in so far as we know it, that is, in the light not only of
ARTICLE 2 The Holy Spirit in the Thomistic Theology of Moral Action from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: I will first present the Holy Spirit’s role in moral action according to St. Thomas, relying primarily on the thorough treatment in the
Summa. I will then ask what these views can contribute to [the resolution of] certain problems of our own time in this field.
ARTICLE 5 Christological and Pneumatological Implications of Vatican II’s Ecclesiology from:
The Spirit of God
Abstract: I agreed to treat this subject without giving it very much thought. When I began to write, I wondered exactly what it might include, what was expected of me in the overall context of this colloquium. So I sketched out for myself an outline that unfolded, it seemed to me, from the very statement of the theme, and then I re-read all the conciliar documents, pencil in hand.² Here is what, as a result, I propose to consider: (1) what Christ did, as far as the Church is concerned, while he was on the earth; (2) what the glorified Christ
Polina and Lady Luck in Dostoevsky’s The Gambler from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: In a letter written to the literary critic and philosopher Nikolai N. Strakhov (1828–1898) from Rome in September 1863, Dostoevsky projected the idea of a story that was to evolve later into the novel,
The Gambler(From the Notes of a Young Man) (1866). The story, he wrote, would reflect the “contemporary moment (as far as possible, of course) of our inner life.” The central character would be “a certain type of Russian abroad”: Dostoevsky’s comparison of this story with hisNotes from theHouse of the Deadis of particular interest. The link betweenThe Gamblerand the earlier
Two Kinds of Beauty from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: “Beauty will save the world. Two kinds of beauty,” Dostoevsky observes without further explanation in one of his notebooks to
The Idiot.² This condensed set of idea-signals points not only to the problem content ofThe Idiot, but to the complex dialectic of Dostoevsky’s esthetic thought. The first phrase, “Beauty will save the world,” is a model of syntactic precision and order; it promises direct, unimpeded action. But the second phrase is disruptive; it shatters the integrity of the beauty-savior and bogs down the action in ambiguity and enigma. “Is it true, Prince, that you once said that ‘beauty will
The Making of a Russian Icon: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: Alexander Solzhenitsyn’s tale “Matryona’s Home” (“Matrenin dvor,” 1963),² consisting of three little chapters, begins with a prologue that is brief, factual, yet tense with significant drama.
Dostoevsky’s Concept of Reality and Its Representation in Art from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: “By the word reality we understand everything that is,” observed Belinsky in 1840, “the visible world and the spiritual world, the world of facts and the world of ideas.”² Belinsky’s definition—which belongs to his middle or so-called Hegelian period of rationalization of reality— comes close to characterizing Dostoevsky’s omnibus view of reality. We shall not encounter a single binding concept of reality in Dostoevsky’s thought; rather, his notion of reality is a syncretism.³ Reality for him embraces concrete, historical reality with its classes, its immediate problems and conflicts, and its social and national types which give expression to the
Intimations of Mortality: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: “Here are some bad verses expressing something even worse,” Fyodor I. Tyutchev (1803–1873) wrote to his wife with reference to his poem of August 6, 1851.² The poem is in no sense a bad one; on the contrary, it is a masterpiece in miniature. Whether it expresses something on the somber or pessimistic side is a question. In any case, Tyutchev’s subjective reaction to his poem does not alter the poem’s independence or its rich poetic and philosophical texture.
The Poetry of Memory and the Memory of Poetry: from:
Close Encounters
Abstract: Igor Severyanin’s poem consists of a title, “Ne Bolee Chem Son” (“No More Than a Dream”), and two quatrains, each one numbering twenty-four words. In the first quatrain, the narrator-dreamer relates that he has dreamed a “remarkable” dream. He lists five discrete dream sequences beginning with the scene of his riding in a carriage with a girl who is reading Blok.³ In the second quatrain, the narrator dwells on the profound impact the dream has had on him and how increasingly moved he was by the thought that the “the strange girl had not forgotten Blok.” “No More Than a
Chapter 3 Mythopoesis and Biography: from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Schools in the “human sciences” are bound virtually by their own phylogenetic principles to undermine and supersede their predecessors rather than disinterestedly, patiently, build on them. A prior school has to be razed and then a new one erected on the same spot, with the “school board” quickly forgetting the attractions and the still usable space of the now nonexistent building. Students get bussed to the new school without any knowledge (un less some teachers tell them so) that they are walking the halls of a place that once looked much different. The prior school is precisely not “refurbished” or
Chapter 5 Relativity and Reality: from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Given his interest in complex semiotic structures and in a “semiosphere” whose ever ramifying interactions model the vast physical cosmos, it is not surprising that Yury Lotman paused in his writings to discuss the most elaborate of all texts, the worlds within worlds of Dante’s
La Divina Commedia.Indeed, these two authors seem almost made for each other, for their passion for meaning (and meaning making) against a moving backdrop of epistemology and geo-and astrophysics are uncannily similar. InUniverse of the MindLotman juxtaposes the vertical journey of Dante the pilgrim and the horizontal journey of the curious, courageous,
Chapter 8 Pushkin’s Biography from:
The Superstitious Muse
Author(s) Davydov Sergei
Abstract: As one considers any biographical treatment of Alexander Pushkin it is prudent to bear in mind the words of the eminent cultural historian, literary theorist, and biographer of the poet Yury Lotman. In his biography Lotman “wanted to show how, like the mythological King Midas who turned everything he touched to gold, Pushkin turned everything he touched into creativity, art. [But] Midas starved to death — his food became gold.”² This metaphor is strikingly apropos when it comes to the facts of Pushkin’s life. Let us take for an example the seemingly straightforward case of the poet’s hair color. In the
Chapter 12 Slavic Gift-Giving, The Poet in History, and Pushkin’s The Captain’s Daughter from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: Like the bread and salt that are their folk embodiments, the values of generosity and hospitality are very old in the Russian mentality. And no writer is considered more “Russian” in this sense of spiritual generosity and inexhaustible “giftedness” than Alexander Pushkin. But what exactly does this mean, once one leaves the porous level of cultural myth? “There should not be any free gifts,” writes the social anthropologist Mary Douglas, since each gift and each personality donating and receiving each gift belongs to a larger system of ongoing and mutually implicating relations. “Gift cycles engage persons in permanent commitments that
Chapter 16 Sologub, Nabokov, and the Limits of Decadent Aesthetics from:
The Superstitious Muse
Abstract: One of the more fascinating aspects of Nabokov’s artistic method is the way he “covers his tracks” when referring to potential intertextual sources or “ influences.” He prefers his readers to believe that each work has emerged fully formed from the broad forehead (as opposed to dark loins) of his Zeuslike consciousness. Or so the prefaces to his novels, with their disclaimers as to matters of genealogy and their repeated references to the “Viennese delegation,” would have us think. It is not that Nabokov hesitates to engage in intertextual punning or name-dropping, which practice clearly enriches the links within his
Book Title: The Translator’s Doubts-Vladimir Nabokov and the Ambiguity of Translation
Publisher: Academic Studies Press
Author(s): TRUBIKHINA JULIA
Abstract: Using Vladimir Nabokov as its “case study," this volume approaches translation as a crucial avenue into literary history and theory, philosophy and interpretation. It attempts to bring together issues in translation and the shift in Nabokov studies from its earlier emphasis on the “metaliterary" to the more recent “metaphysical" approach. Addressing specific texts (both literary and cinematic), the book investigates Nabokov’s deeply ambivalent relationship to translation as a hermeneutic oscillation on his part between the relative stability of meaning, which expresses itself philosophically as a faith in the beyond, and deep metaphysical uncertainty. While Nabokov’s practice of translation changed profoundly over the course of his career, his adherence to the Romantic notion of a “true" but ultimately elusive metaphysical language remained paradoxically constant.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsjwj
Introduction from:
The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: This book singles out translation as a way of talking about literary history and theory, philosophy, and interpretation. Vladimir Nabokov is its case study. The advantage of making Nabokov a case study for an investigation of questions of translation is obvious. It is hard to separate Vladimir Nabokov from the act of translation, in all senses of the word—ranging from “moving across” geographical borders and cultural and linguistic boundaries to the transposing of the split between “here” and “there” and “then” and “now” (the essential elements of exile, components of every émigré experience) onto a metaphysical plane sometimes suggested
Conclusion from:
The Translator’s Doubts
Abstract: In this conclusion, I would like to provide an overview that situates Nabokov vis-à-vis the Russian and Western traditions of translation, and to bring together in this context the central issues of Nabokov’s ambivalent relationship to translation. These issues include his origin—his own “secret stem,” leading back to Russian Romanticism—as well as translation as a vehicle for expressing Nabokov’s own strongly held ideas about art. While Nabokov’s practice of translation undergoes significant changes in the course of his career, his adherence to the idea of some “true,” “metaphysical” language—ever elusive and ever present—remains surprisingly constant.
Book Title: Los silencios de la guerra- Publisher: Editorial Universidad del Rosario
Author(s): Uribe María Victoria
Abstract: Esta obra presenta un estudio teórico-práctico de las normas de procedimiento aplicables ante cinco mecanismos de solución de controversias internacionales, seleccionados como aquellos que representan los diferentes ámbitos de la justicia internacional. En ese sentido, el texto desarrolla el litigio y procedimiento ante: la Corte Internacional de Justicia (cij); el Sistema Interamericano de Protección de los Derechos Humanos (sidh) en su conjunto —que incluye a la Corte Interamericana de Derechos Humanos (IDH) y a la Comisión Interamericana de Derechos Humanos (CIDH)—; la Corte Penal Internacional (CPI; el Centro Internacional de Arreglo de Diferencias Relativas a Inversiones (CIADI) y el Órgano de Solución de Diferencias de la Organización Mundial del Comercio (OMC). A partir del estudio de documentos primarios se presenta el procedimiento seguido ante cada tribunal o mecanismo internacional, de manera tal que constituya para el lector un estudio integral, coherente y sistemático de los métodos judiciales y cuasi-judiciales a nivel internacional, en lo relativo al procedimiento, competencia, jurisdicción y demás aspectos procesales y probatorios, a partir del cual los operadores jurídicos podrán guiar sus labores ante cada mecanismo de justicia internacional. Además de la parte orgánica y operativa esta obra identifica los principales problemas jurídicos que se presentan en la práctica del litigio internacional y analiza, desde una perspectiva crítica, el funcionamiento y desarrollo de las actividades jurisdiccionales de los tribunales internacionales objeto de estudio. De forma transversal, se da una respuesta al problema jurídico planteado a partir del marco teórico que proponen los estudios sobre la fragmentación del derecho internacional, particularmente a partir de aquellos que ha realizado la Comisión de Derecho Internacional de la onu, así como los diferentes pronunciamientos de los tribunales y mecanismos internacionales. de los tribunales y mecanismos internacionales.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxsksg
2. RECONTEXTUALIZATION: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: William Desmond describes Westphal’s style of appropriation as similar to the Israelites’ despoilment of the Egyptians. However, Westphal’s is a gentle despoilment: the fidelity he shows superficially to sources appears to be an agreement between him and his source, but he is actually enacting a piecemeal acquisition of certain key ideas within that source.¹ It is not a hostile takeover—it is not a takeover at all—rather, it is a form of retrieval; he takes parts of an author’s idea while also diligently critiquing the idea as a whole.
4. HEGELIANS IN HEAVEN, BUT ON EARTH . . .: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: Westphal is attempting to craft a prophetic line of philosophy he finds sorely lacking, particularly with Hegel. This is also the case for Husserlian phenomenology, which he sees as replicating Hegel by being purely descriptive, never prescriptive.¹ At this point, it is clear that Westphal aims to push philosophy into the realm of action: to not just reasonably argue but to move those arguments toward helping the widow, orphan, and stranger. Westphal sees in Kierkegaard a possible way to adapt this preferential option for the poor into a postmodern framework; with Kierkegaard, Westphal finds a Christian response to a society
5. RELIGIOUSNESS: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: The previous chapter partially answered the question of the type of faith Westphal holds by finding it to be Kierkegaardian and wholly dependent on revelation, and thus resists any reasonable foundation to ground itself. However, this was only a partial answer since it merely addresses how one assents to, or otherwise accepts, faith. Holding or enacting that faith through discipleship is the decisive step and what follows will continue our investigation by describing how, exactly, faith is opposed to sin and how this opposition, once enacted and lived, becomes an ideology critique.
7. INTERMEDIARY CONCLUSIONS: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: My attempt thus far has been to craft Westphal’s intellectual narrative, and what I have found is that Westphal’s narrative is heavily theological. In fact, Westphal is so theological that I argue he is best read within this discourse, which is perhaps his proper home. The previous chapters have focused on how Westphal shapes his thinking and how it tacitly develops into a theology that appropriates philosophical reasoning to minister and guide the life of faith. Furthermore, his articulation of faith as a task of a lifetime, which compels the believing soul to continually enact the love commandment, has convinced
CONCLUSION: from:
Reasoning from Faith
Abstract: As I mentioned in the introduction, when researching this book and speaking at both philosophical and theological conferences (mostly in Europe, but also in North America), I got mainly two reactions to Westphal’s thinking: those who thought his work truly embraced Protestant Christianity and provided a pathway for Christians to seriously consider mostly secular critiques of religion (similar to his opening statements in
Overcoming Onto-Theology), and those who found that his work did not pass the standard for rigorous philosophical thinking. Those in the latter camp, especially phenomenologists, charged that his appropriations did not adequately consider the original context and
4 A WALK THROUGH THE RUINS: from:
The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: A dialogical interaction between body and space; an unfolding of the built environment through bodily motion; the body’s becoming like space: These are the visual tropes that have dominated our discussion of the films in the previous two chapters. In their radical portrayals of the body– space relations, Mikhail Kalatozov’s
The Unsent LetterandI Am Cubaand Georgii Danelia’sI Walk the Streets of Moscowdisplayed a certain level of utopian imagining, in which participants functioned less as specific, psychologically nuanced characters than as poetic, and in that way abstract, figures. We can remember once more the critique of
CONCLUSION: from:
The Cinema of the Soviet Thaw
Abstract: The cinematic scrutiny of space in Soviet culture of the 1950s and 1960s was rooted in an urgency to find new forms of social engagement. It was also propelled by a need to redefine the role of cinema in the wake of Stalin’s death. Rethinking the language of cinema, Soviet filmmakers began to emphasize the production of the environment as a social and filmic problem, creating spatial experiences within theatrical walls that differed significantly from those of established socialist practices. These filmmakers reorganized the spaces of familiar cities, landscapes, and public and private interiors, opening them up to dialogical interactions
Book Title: Sonata Fragments-Romantic Narratives in Chopin, Schumann, and Brahms
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Davis Andrew
Abstract: In
Sonata Fragments, Andrew Davis argues that the Romantic sonata is firmly rooted, both formally and expressively, in its Classical forebears, using Classical conventions in order to convey a broad constellation of Romantic aesthetic values. This claim runs contrary to conventional theories of the Romantic sonata that place this nineteenth-century musical form squarely outside inherited Classical sonata procedures. Building on Sonata Theory, Davis examines moments of fracture and fragmentation that disrupt the cohesive and linear temporality in piano sonatas by Chopin, Brahms, and Schumann. These disruptions in the sonata form are a narrative technique that signify temporal shifts during which we move from the outer action to the inner thoughts of a musical agent, or we move from the story as it unfolds to a flashback or flash-forward. Through an interpretation of Romantic sonatas as temporally multi-dimensional works in which portions of the music in any given piece can lie inside or outside of what Sonata Theory would define as the sonata-space proper, Davis reads into these ruptures a narrative of expressive features that mark these sonatas as uniquely Romantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0jw
2 Atemporality in Narrative and Music from:
Sonata Fragments
Abstract: This chapter sets out to construct a theory of structure and expressive meaning in the nineteenth-century Romantic sonata, within the view of Romanticism articulated in chapter 1.¹ The theory will focus particularly on the problematized moments of formal and expressive ambiguity characteristic of that genre. I first consider what we might mean by
narrativeornarrative formsin music, continue by examining issues related to time and temporality within those narrative forms, and finish by proposing ways that some of these (mainly literary) concepts might map onto music.
7 Treatment of the Development and Recapitulation from:
Sonata Fragments
Abstract: Romantic development sections engage in their own characteristic ways with the aesthetics of fragmentation. Perhaps the most important among several common strategies is that in which the development is treated as a privileged, idealized space in which to explore, or propose new solutions to, structural and expressive problems facing the exposition.
Book Title: Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SCHOTT ROBIN MAY
Abstract: Any glance at the contemporary history of the world shows that the problem of evil is a central concern for people everywhere. In the last few years, terrorist attacks, suicide bombings, and ethnic and religious wars have only emphasized humanity's seemingly insatiable capacity for violence. In Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil, Robin May Schott brings an international group of contemporary feminist philosophers into debates on evil and terrorism. The invaluable essays collected here consider gender-specific evils such as the Salem witch trials, women's suffering during the Holocaust, mass rape in Bosnia, and repression under the Taliban, as well as more generalized acts of violence such as the 9/11 bombings, the Madrid train station bombings, and violence against political prisoners. Readers of this sobering volume will find resources for understanding the vulnerability of human existence and what is at stake in the problem of evil.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz0w2
12 Naming Terrorism as Evil from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Jaggar Alison M.
Abstract: Within days of the dramatic attacks that occurred on September 11, 2001, the editors of
Hypatiainvited several feminist philosophers to consider whether those attacks, and terrorism more generally, should be described as evil (Schott 2003, 5).¹ In the intervening four years, marked by further terrorist attacks on Western countries, references to terrorism as evil have become commonplace in the political discourse of the United States. The present discussion offers some reasons for resisting this characterization. I do not attempt to justify terrorism, but I suggest that the language of evil, because of its theological and absolutist associations, is distinctly
13 The Vertigo of Secularization: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Lara María Pía
Abstract: Those who hurried to write something about September 11, 2001, were prone to make errors of judgment because the events of that day were so difficult to comprehend. A few years have passed, and this act of terrorism still haunts us. The legacy of terror is something that will reverberate in our global era until we are capable of properly analyzing this new type of terrorism that worships death and destruction, disguising itself behind the excuse of fundamentalist “religious views.” If we are to believe the terrorist’s claims of righteousness, their means and their ends were disproportionate. Clearly, their ultimate
14 Willing the Freedom of Others after 9/11: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Murphy Julien S.
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre has said that hell is other people, referring to the other’s freedom as the greatest threat to our own freedom (1976, 45). The terrorist attacks on September 11, 2001, which turned lower Manhattan into a roaring inferno, represent a profound experience of evil. In less than ninety minutes, nineteen young al-Qaeda hijackers on a suicide mission killed more than three thousand people. In the aftermath of that fateful day, our nation struggled to comprehend the enormity of evil in their horrific acts. We quickly learned that the attacks were linked to a notorious Saudi terrorist named Osama bin
16 Those Who “Witness the Evil”: from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Razack Sherene H.
Abstract: It is said that a Canadian speechwriter in the Bush administration coined the phrase “axis of evil” that has been so much a part of American political vocabulary since the September 11, 2001, terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon (Walker 2002). If this is true, it is fitting. For the better part of the 1990s, Canadian peacekeepers have described their activities in Somalia, Rwanda, Haiti, Bosnia, Kosovo, and Croatia as encounters with “absolute evil.” The American president and the Canadian peacekeeper quoted above¹ both imagine the international as a space where civilized peoples from the North
18 Feminist Reactions to the Contemporary Security Regime from:
Feminist Philosophy and the Problem of Evil
Author(s) Young Iris Marion
Abstract: The American and European women’s movement of the late 1970s and early 1980s contained a large segment organizing around issues of weapons, war, and peace. By the early 1990s, the humor and heroism of women’s peace actions had been all but forgotten. Prompted by events in the United States and the world since September 2001, and by the rhetoric of U.S. leaders justifying some of their actions, I do think that there are urgent reasons to reopen the question of whether looking at war and security issues through a gendered lens can teach us all lessons that might further the
2.1 The Open Work in Theory and Practice from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Seed David
Abstract: Reviewing the early works of George Eliot in 1866 Henry James reflected on the possibility of foreshadowing later events in narratives without every describing them. This possibility leads James to make the following statement about the composition of novels: “In every novel the work is divided between the writer and the reader; but the writer makes the reader very much as he makes his characters. When he makes him ill, that is, makes him different, he does no work; the writer does all. When he makes him well, that is, makes him interested, then the reader does quite half the
2.4 Toward Interpretation Semiotics from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Petrilli Susan
Abstract: The mid 1970s onward have been decisive years in Italian semiotics considering both the development in general sign theory as well as the flourishing of the various specific semiotics. In fact, these years mark a transition from decodification semiotics, which was influenced either directly or indirectly by Saussurean linguistics, to interpretation semiotics, largely a derivation of the Peircean-Morrisian tradition. Two books by Umberto Eco–A
Theory of Semioticsof 1975 andSemiotics and the Philosophy of Languageof 1984–may be viewed as expressions of this transition. Indeed, Eco’sA Theory of Semioticsmay be taken as the point of
2.6 Eco, Peirce, and the Necessity of Interpretation from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Tejera Victorino
Abstract: At a time when the lines between literary theory, literary criticism, and literature have been deliberately blurred by so many critics and theorists–it is good to have a book on the problems of contemporary text theory from the learned littérateur and semeiotician Umberto Eco¹. The essays that make up his book, he tells us, “study … the dialectics between the rights of texts and the rights of their interpreters;” they also seek to “stress the limits of the act of interpretation.” He finds that, having “advocated an active role of the interpreter in the reading of texts … with
2.9 On Truth and Lying: from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Debbèche Patrick
Abstract: Fellow travelers and long term acquaintances, Umberto Eco and Algirdas Julien Greimas’ friendship and collaboration date from the beginning of the 1960s. Indeed, they both published a chapter in the seminal volume,
Communications 8, L’analyse structurale du récit, edited by Roland Barthes, along with Claude Bremond, Christian Metz, Tzvetan Todorov and Gérard Genette, to name but the most prominent of the contributors who were to have a major impact on the shaping of theory and methodology in the social sciences and the humanities. Greimas’ contribution, “Eléments pour une théorie de l’interprétation mythique,” consisted in working out the descriptive procedures for
2.10 Eco and Dramatology from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Kevelson Roberta
Abstract: That Eco makes frequent recourse to narrative fiction is not surprising since the semiotician and the author of fictive narrative are two of the most public faces he presents to us who adore and admire him from whatever portion of himself he gives freely and with great gusto. But what is a surprising fact, to use Peirce’s notable term for that which comes to us from experience and shakes us out of old habit into new play, is Eco’s occasional mention of the dramatic text as representing through the work of so me twentieth-century playwrights a prototype of the indeterminacy,
3.5 Bellydancing: from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Coletti Theresa
Abstract: Shortly after the European puhlication of Umherto Eco’s second novel, the noted historian Jacques Le Goff wrote an essay in which he argued that
Foucault’s Pendulum, despite the modernity of its historical setting, was as profoundly anchored in the Middle Ages as its predecessor,The Name of the Rose.¹ Detailing the many ways that Eco’s novels represent their complicated debts to medieval discourses, ideas, and social practices, Le Goff observed a decisively medieval quality in their respective figurations of gender: “The Middle Ages was an epoch of men … the novels of Umberto Eco are men’s novels. This is clear
3.10 Intertextuality, Metaphors, and Metafiction as Cognitive Strategies in The Island of the Day Before from:
Reading Eco
Author(s) Capozzi Rocco
Abstract: The Island of the Day Before(1995) is Umberto Eco’s third encyclopedic postmodern collage and essay-novel which focuses, among many other things, on the practice of semiosis, on palimpsests, on meta-narrativity, and on the connection between “knowledge and power.”¹ Capitalizing on three most significant heterogeneous historical eras, the XIVth and XVIIth Centuries (two extraordinary periods of history marked by revolutionary transformations in all sectors of society),² and the XXth Century (an era exemplified by frequent changes and by so called postmodern pastiches and recyclings of every cultural phenomenon from the past) Eco’s trilogy³ illustrates how man’s eternal quest for knowledge
Book Title: Trauma in First Person-Diary Writing during the Holocaust
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): GREENBERG AVNER
Abstract: What are the effects of radical oppression on the human psyche? What happens to the inner self of the powerless and traumatized victim, especially during times of widespread horror? In this bold and deeply penetrating book, Amos Goldberg addresses diary writing by Jews under Nazi persecution. Throughout Europe, in towns, villages, ghettos, forests, hideouts, concentration and labor camps, and even in extermination camps, Jews of all ages and of all cultural backgrounds described in writing what befell them. Goldberg claims that diary and memoir writing was perhaps the most important literary genre for Jews during World War II. Goldberg considers the act of writing in radical situations as he looks at diaries from little-known victims as well as from brilliant diarists such as Chaim Kaplan and Victor Klemperer. Goldberg contends that only against the background of powerlessness and inner destruction can Jewish responses and resistance during the Holocaust gain their proper meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz15p
INTRODUCTION from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: We said the following on the holy Sabbath: [Before the holiday] I thought that with trou bles such as these, when Rosh Hashanah [the Jewish new year] would come, the sound of our prayers would be tumultuous and that our hearts would pour out to God like a stream of water. . . . Nevertheless our eyes are witness to the fact that before the
2 READING THE DIARIES AS A CRITIQUE OF HOLOCAUST HISTORIOGRAPHY from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: In the introduction, we saw that Leni Yahil (1964), as well as other historians and thinkers, considered the “ image of man” during the Holocaust the central question with which scholarship of the period must contend. As noted, Yahil claimed, “the main thing that prompts us to study history—even of the distant past, but certainly in the case of the Holocaust—is the problem of the figure of man. . . . It is, therefore, inconceivable that research of the Holocaust period would not focus primarily on man, evaluating human actions and be havior.”¹ In reality, however, historical research
4 THE LIFE STORY OF VICTOR KLEMPERER from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: Part II is dedicated to the reading of the diaries kept by Victor Klemperer in Dresden during the Nazi years focusing on the temporal experience, as reflected during the course of the protracted traumatic event. As we shall see, the autobiographical structure of time that underlies these diaries underwent a fundamental disruption but was reorganized in a very different way in the context of documentary writing. In order to understand the disruptions in Victor Klemperer’s life story during the Nazi period, and the way in which the story took shape in his diaries, we must first devote a few words
6 FROM AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL TO DOCUMENTARY DIARY from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: In this chapter, I will suggest that in the wake of the breakdown of autobiographical temporality, as described in the previous chapter, a new temporal order emerged, deeply connected to the documentary character of the Naziera diary. Before reaching this conclusion, however, the chapter will take a rather long detour. The first parts of the chapter are dedicated to depicting the radical transformation that Klemperer’s diaries underwent—from the personal-autobiographical to the documentary—the far-reaching ramifications of which will be described at length. Only in the last part of the chapter will I return to the issue of temporality, to
9 BETWEEN PERPETRATORS AND VICTIMS: from:
Trauma in First Person
Abstract: On 18 May 1941, Chaim Kaplan wrote in his diary: “Nazism came to annihilate us. It is the enemy of Judaism in its spirit and in its practice. We fight it and await its defeat. However—the human spirit is inexplicable.
Unconsciously, we accept its ideology and follow in its ways. Nazism has conquered our entire world.It severely damages our public life. And yet we do not cease to declare day and night that it is ugliness and that one ought to distance oneself from it.”¹ This startling passage deserves close examination. As perhaps the keenest observer of ghetto
Book Title: In Praise of Heteronomy-Making Room for Revelation
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Recognizing the essential heteronomy of postmodern philosophy of religion, Merold Westphal argues against the assumption that human reason is universal, neutral, and devoid of presupposition. Instead, Westphal contends that any philosophy is a matter of faith and the philosophical encounter with theology arises from the very act of thinking. Relying on the work of Spinoza, Kant, and Hegel, Westphal discovers that their theologies render them mutually incompatible and their claims to be the voice of autonomous and universal reason look dubious. Westphal grapples with this plural nature of human thought in the philosophy of religion and he forwards the idea that any appeal to the divine must rest on a historical and phenomenological analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt1zxz1pf
3 SPINOZA’S HERMENEUTICS from:
In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: When we turn to the
Theological-Political Treatisewe find the theological part, primarily the theory and practice of interpreting the Bible, sandwiched between political bookends. At the heart of the theological argument is a plea for the autonomy of philosophy from theology, and, indeed, the hegemony of the former over the latter, relocating religion within the limits of reason alone. At the heart of the political part is a plea for the autonomy of the state from religion (religious authorities), and, indeed, the hegemony over the former over the latter. For Spinoza felt unjustly oppressed by the theocratic form of
6 KANT’S HERMENEUTICS II from:
In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: Kant’s hermeneutics can be summarized in terms of five theses: hegemony, means/end, dispensability, recollection, and harmony. Utterly fundamental is the
hegemony thesis, the claim that the pure, that is the a priori and presuppositionless religion of practical reason is the norm or criterion for interpreting biblical texts and ecclesiastical traditions governing both beliefs and practices, doctrine and devotion—the whole of “revealed” or “learned” religion. Thus “ECCLESIASTICAL FAITH HAS THE PURE FAITH OF RELIGION FOR ITS SUPREME INTERPRETER” (R , 142, 6.109).¹ Scripture is the norm for ecclesiastical faith, but Scripture itself, in turn, has “no other expositor . .
10 THE INEVITABILITY OF HETERONOMY from:
In Praise of Heteronomy
Abstract: In its original, modern mode, religion within the limits of reason alone regularly presents itself as the voice of a single, universally operative reason. The actual, substantial differences among various versions of this project undermine this claim and show human reason to speak with a variety of quite particular voices, each one relative to the paradigm that it presupposes. In the absence of any evidently universal reason, even the criteria for choosing among alternatives appear to be more nearly internal to the different theologies than “neutral” or “objective.” Epistemically speaking, we are operating within one of many possible hermeneutical circles.
Book Title: Signs and Society-Further Studies in Semiotic Anthropology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Parmentier Richard J.
Abstract: Brilliantly articulating the potent intersections of semiotic and linguistic anthropology, Signs and Society demonstrates how a keen appreciation of signs helps us better understand human agency, meaning, and creativity. Inspired by the foundational contributions of C. S. Peirce and Ferdinand de Saussure, and drawing upon key insights from neighboring scholarly fields, noted anthropologist Richard J. Parmentier develops an array of innovative conceptual tools for ethnographic, historical, and literary research. His concepts of "transactional value," "metapragmatic interpretant," and "circle of semiosis," for example, illuminate the foundations and effects of such diverse cultural forms and practices as economic exchanges on the Pacific island of Palau, Pindar's Victory Odes in ancient Greece, and material representations of transcendence in ancient Egypt and medieval Christianity. Other studies complicate the separation of emic and etic analytical models for such cultural domains as religion, economic value, and semiotic ideology. Provocative and absorbing, these fifteen pioneering essays blaze a trail into anthropology's future while remaining firmly rooted in its celebrated past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005sns
2 Charles S. Peirce from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: One of the puzzles of the intellectual history of the “pragmatic” turn in contemporary linguistics is the fact that the American mathematician and philosopher Charles S. Peirce (1839–1914), who developed a graphic formalism for evaluating the logical precision of scientific concepts, continues to be an important inspiration for the development of approaches to language that move beyond the synchronic, descriptive, and generative perspectives characteristic of the mainstream of linguistics scholarship. Many students of language first encountered Peirce’s semiotic ideas in the early 1920s in the ten pages of excerpts printed as an appendix to Ogden and Richards’s
The Meaning
3 Representation, Symbol, and Semiosis: from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: It would seem that there is a lot of representation going on! In fact, representation lies at the heart of the
5 Troubles with Trichotomies: from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: According to the editors at the Peirce Edition Project, in 1903 Peirce composed a detailed “syllabus” in several sections for the eight lectures he delivered at the Lowell Institute in Boston. The fifth section of that syllabus, titled “Nomenclature and Divisions of Triadic Relations, as Far as They Are Determined” (
EP2, 289–99;CP2.233–72), presents a detailed and systematic account of the 10 classes of signs generated by the intersection of three trichotomies and contains the famous (if perplexing) triangular table exhibiting the relations among these sign classes depending on the degree of shared characteristics. As Peirce
10 It’s About Time: from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: The invitation to comment on this set of papers in linguistic anthropology dealing with temporalities and texts (first presented at the American Anthropological Association’s 2005 meetings in Washington, DC) has prompted a moment of personal reflection, since it was exactly twenty years ago, in 1985, that I published my first application of semiotic categories to the ethnographic analysis of time and history. My paper, “Times of the Signs: Modalities of History and Levels of Social Structure in Belau” (Parmentier 1985b), tried to synthesize Fernand Braudel, Meyer Fortes, and Marshall Sahlins by using Charles S. Peirce’s sign theory to argue that
13 Money Walks, People Talk: from:
Signs and Society
Abstract: In political life, every occasion for intercourse between two tribes is based on an exchange of certain money, the value and the amount of which is determined by custom. In social life, everyone is bound by custom to make certain carefully regulated expenditures in relation to his position in the community. Everyone is responsible for his cousins, his children, and his household, and must pay for them. Every act performed for a
Book Title: A Theory of Musical Narrative- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): ALMÉN BYRON
Abstract: Byron Almén proposes an original synthesis of approaches to musical narrative from literary criticism, semiotics, historiography, musicology, and music theory, resulting in a significant critical reorientation of the field. This volume includes an extensive survey of traditional approaches to musical narrative illustrated by a wide variety of musical examples that highlight the range and applicability of the theoretical apparatus. Almén provides a careful delineation of the essential elements and preconditions of musical narrative organization, an eclectic analytical model applicable to a wide range of musical styles and repertoires, a classification scheme of narrative types and subtypes reflecting conceptually distinct narrative strategies, a wide array of interpretive categories, and a sensitivity to the dependence of narrative interpretation on the cultural milieu of the work, its various audiences, and the analyst.
A Theory of Musical Narrativeprovides both an excellent introduction to an increasingly important conceptual domain and a complex reassessment of its possibilities and characteristics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005szf
3 A Theory of Musical Narrative: from:
A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: Musical narrative resists simple formulation, its complex identity emerging through a confluence of factors. First, the essential characteristics of narrative are partly obscured by the distinct inflections given it by the different media through which it manifests itself. Dramatic narrative is phenomenally immediate, realized by characters and settings both visually and audibly present. Literary narrative is likewise relatively specific with respect to character and setting, but is constructed through verbal description and dialogue. Mythic narrative invokes characters, settings, and/or themes with numinous cultural significance, situating these elements in an idealized, hyper-real manner. Historical narrative ostensibly employs real events and characters
4 A Theory of Musical Narrative: from:
A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: In defining a procedure for the analysis of mythic narrative, Liszka characterizes the agential level as uncovering the “general features of
5 Narrative and Topic from:
A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: Consider the employment of musical topic in three short examples. In my narrative analysis of Chopin’s Prelude in G major, given in chapter 1, I highlighted the topical qualities of the gently undulating left-hand ostinato figure that both generates and accompanies a slow, meandering melody embellished by sixths and thirds (measures 1–6 of this piece are shown in example 5.1). The pervasive and tonally stable “harmony-within-nature” figure, redolent of murmuring streams and gentle breezes, creates a benign, peaceful background environment that strongly influences how a listener might interpret the piece as narrative. The semantic impact of its musical elements
7 Tragic Narratives: from:
A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: Musical representations of tragedy are sites of potential confusion between narrative and topical signification. This is largely due to the relative ubiquity of tragic
topoiin music literature, in combination with a degree of familiarity on the part of the scholarly community about what characterizes a tragictopos. Certain stylistic and paradigmatic conventions of various historical durations—minor mode, slow tempo, sigh figures, descending gestures, chromaticism, expressive dissonances, funeral march, low register, exact repetition—easily call to our minds pieces that are tragic in a topical sense: the “Crucifixus” in Bach’s Mass in B minor, the first movement of Beethoven’s
8 Ironic Narratives: from:
A Theory of Musical Narrative
Abstract: The merging of inductive analytical levels—the agential and actantial—with a quartet of overarching, culturally significant categories—the narrative archetypes—is an important feature of the theory of musical narrative found in this volume. The former ensure that the musical details themselves determine the narrative trajectory, while the latter situates that trajectory within the network of social and personal value. The archetypes, as we have seen, model the distinct outcomes resulting from the interactions between alternative structures of power—interactions that are constantly being played out in our intrapsychic, interpersonal, and communal relationships. Given the pervasiveness and importance of
1 The 1948 Palestine War on the Small Screen: from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Garami Bosmat
Abstract: Televised history has become the focus of growing academic research, which examines its uniqueness compared to the tradition of written history, and emphasizes its significant role in shaping collective memory. Film and television became central mechanisms of memory construction during the second half of the twentieth century and Western scholarship has long been emphasizing the power of fictional as well as documentary film in the representation of history¹ and defending television’s capabilities to “mediate” history successfully against those who doubt it.² According to Edgerton, televisual characteristics such as immediacy, dramatization, personalization, and intimacy, all shape the medium’s interaction with the
2 Israel’s Publications Agency and the 1948 Palestinian Refugees from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Nets-Zehngut Rafi
Abstract: Israel’s intractable conflict with the Palestinians and the Arab states is by no means exceptional in Israel’s quest
3 The War of Independence Exhibited: from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Boord Ofer
Abstract: In the past three decades, Israel’s history museums have gradually started to gain an important role within the public arena. Museums have attempted to compete with the teaching of history in schools, with the textbooks, as well as with TV programs and contents obtained through the Internet, by including short and focused captions, historic photographs, original items, reconstruction of buildings, and films. Many museums are currently successful in illustrating “boring” and distant historic issues in a captivating manner, and are thus a factor to be taken into consideration. The large number of museums as well as the scope of their
4 Contested Urban Memoryscape Strategies and Tactics in Post-1948 Haifa from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Kolodney Ziva
Abstract: Haifa’s Memorial Garden (Gan ha-Zikkaron) was the subject of an architectural competition immediately after the 1948 War. It was a main urban open space, situated at the heart of the city’s current municipal center along the confrontation seam between the pre-1948 Arab quarter of Haifa’s downtown area and the Jewish neighborhood of Hadar ha-Carmel. Today, the garden overlooks the long-gone Old City area of Haifa, which was demolished during the Shikmona Operation in 1948–49. Along with concrete and imagery landscape memory production practices (memoryscape) of street re-naming, war monuments and memorials construction in the urban fabric in the early
6 Descending the Khazooq: from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Peled Assaf
Abstract: Many Palestinian intellectuals have written about the harsh realities of their people following the
Nakba, but only a few of them have critically dealt with the traumatic facets of the event and their present repercussions. Literature on theNakbarepresents a salient effort to serve the Palestinian people’s struggle for their natural rights. While this focus on the injustices perpetrated against the Palestinians and the need for restitution is tempting, it leaves little room for critical reflection on the experience itself. As its point of reference is external, it dooms the writer to act out¹ the past.² In recent years
7 Wa-Ma Nasayna (We Have Not Forgotten): from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Ben-Zvi Tal
Abstract: Palestinian art created within Israel’s 1948 borders possesses unique characteristics deriving from its being part of the visual culture of the Palestinian minority in Israel. In this artistic-national construct, artist, graphic designer, and printmaker Abed Abdi played a leading role as a consequence of his work over the decade between 1972 and 1982 as graphics editor of the publications of the Communist Party and its successor, the Democratic Front for Peace and Equality, the Arabic language journal
Al-Ittihad, and theAl-Jadidliterary journal. Additionally, many of his works were also published in the Communist Party’s Hebrew language paper,Zo Haderekh
Epilogue: from:
The War of 1948
Author(s) Caplan Neil
Abstract: These in-depth studies underline the rigid nature of collective memory and identity, especially in intractable ethno-national conflicts such as the Israeli-Palestinian one. At the same time, however, they also demonstrate the dynamic
Introduction from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Abstract: We live in an increasingly interconnected world. it is a world of global manufacturing and trade, international travel and almost instant communication, shared climate change and epidemics, and far-flung wars and campaigns of terror. and it is a world of different languages, different narratives, different standards of living. nations and their borders and boundaries mark us differently as citizens or tourists or immigrants or refugees or homeless.
Introduction from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Wahman Jessica
Abstract: The chapters in this first part confront key topics to be addressed by a contemporary cosmopolitanism. All suggest that cosmopolitanism is an orientation worth considering, and some argue explicitly in favor of the position. Many of the authors draw our attention to an increasingly globalized world and suggest this is a prominent reason for taking cosmopolitanism seriously. Our growing access to and consistent impact on one another, they argue, increase our awareness of human connectedness, rendering the possibility of entirely localized commitments both rationally untenable and ethically irresponsible. At the same time, each author claims that a feasible cosmopolitanism, despite
3 Cultural Heritages and Universal Principles from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Failache Juan Carlos Pereda
Abstract: Socialization processes normally imply that we stimulate and praise—or discourage and scorn—some of our desires. And something comparable happens to our beliefs, emotions, interests, and, of course, to our actions. A tradition or cultural heritage is not just something out there; it entails a complex, and usually implicit, social normativity. However, communities also make explicit, in a fragmentary way, that normativity by means of codes, regulations, exhortations, suggestions, prohibitions, historical narratives, monuments, songs—all in a more or less vague and inconsistent manner. Is this how a public normativity becomes rooted in every person’s life?
5 Pragmatism and the Challenge of a Cosmopolitan Aesthetics: from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Innis Robert E.
Abstract: In his
Art Without Borders: A Philosophical Exploration of Art and Humanity, Ben-Ami Scharfstein, writing against the background of his deeply pragmaticThe Dilemma of Context, contends, “Art is not a single problem, nor does it have a single solution, rational or mystical.”¹ Art’s multiple contexts, and types of contexts, are, he argues, the sources of this radical plurality, which characterizes thought itself. In this, art mirrors life itself. Nevertheless, in spite of the admitted plurality, he issues a call for an “open aesthetics” and an “aesthetic pluralism” and asks, “Is there really an aesthetics that cuts across all human
6 Toward a Politics of Cohabitation: from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Colapietro Vincent
Abstract: This chapter is first and foremost a reflection on place, precisely as a verb—that is, not as an antecedently fixed container or enclosure, but as a historically evolved and evolving set of processes and practices. While unavoidably abstract in some respects, it is pointedly political and, to a less extent, polemical. For I am taking this occasion to urge a shift from a politics of occupation (including dwelling) to one of cohabitation, based on a reconstructed self-understanding of ourselves as
wayfarersin a sense to be defined later. I am also urging a shift in focus from the cosmos
7 Cosmopolitan Ignorance and “Not Knowing Your Place” from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Medina José
Abstract: As Vincent Colapietro urges us to do,
placeshould be thought of a verb, as referring to activities, and more specifically shared activities or social practices. As Colapietro puts it: “Whatever else places are, they are sites of activity, loci for dramas, above all, those improvised scenes in which the unintended consequences of our most careful deliberations quickly acquire (no matter how slow our acknowledgement) their fateful significance” (Chapter 6, pages 88–89). Whereas in traditionalviews placewas conceived as “a fixed container or enclosure,” Colapietro proposes a pragmatic reconceptualization of place as “a historically evolved and evolving set
8 America and Cosmopolitan Responsibility: from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Edmonds Jeff
Abstract: The conversations on cosmopolitanism rise out of the practical problems of a world that is increasingly mobile, changing, and intimate. Cosmopolitanism is a lived condition—the name of a problem that perhaps cannot
9 Loss of Place from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Craig Megan
Abstract: Each of us has a place we presently occupy, a place from whence we came, and an ambiguous place toward which we are heading. Even if the present place is makeshift or temporary, if one is a refugee or homeless, being in the world entails occupying, however minimally, some shred of ground. Heidegger underscored this fact of existence by the term
Dasein: “being-there.” One is always emplaced one way or another in the wider world. Levinas responded to Heidegger by noting that wherever one finds oneself, the “there” of “being-there” entails the usurpation of someone else’s place.¹ Quoting Pascal at
10 The Loss of Confidence in the World from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Corbí Josep E.
Abstract: In this chapter, I focus on the experience of torture and, more specifically, on Jean Améry’s account of it in his book
At the Mind’s Limits.¹ There he claims thatthe loss of confidence in the worldis the most devastating effect he experienced as a victim of torture. I thus explore what cosmopolitan aspiration may be revealed by this loss and also discuss whether it is to be discredited as an irrational reaction on the victim’s side or instead as proportional to the facts and, consequently, as relevant to the conditions under which a certain cosmopolitan aspiration could be
11 Climate Change and Place: from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Tuana Nancy
Abstract: The most significant human impact on the climate results from fossil-fuel burning, which increases the atmospheric concentrations of greenhouse gases. This leads to a warming of the lower
Introduction from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Stuhr John J.
Abstract: To consider seriously cosmopolitan ideals (in Part I of this volume) is to engage universalism of one or more sorts—moral, political, economic, religious, and cultural. It is to take up notions of universal and equal intrinsic worth, the dignity of all persons, and border-blind, history-blind, color-blind, money-blind, gender-blind (and so on) rights and responsibilities. And it is to entertain worldviews in which tribal, local, regional, national, and other differences are mere artifacts of time, inessential contingencies, instances of good luck or bad fortune, and facts that cannot serve as bases for reason-based values and actions.
13 Cosmopolitan Hope from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Hansen Jennifer L.
Abstract: Presumably, there are many cosmopolitans: the well-traveled, sophisticated, polyglot; the stoic serenely navigating heterogeneous (and fractious) cultural spaces; the migrant following new capital flows; the hospitable host; the religious seeker; or, the peace builder appealing to our shared earth. Cosmopolitans—whatever motive—are mapmakers redrawing the boundaries of the familiar in order to seek what is better.¹ And, it is this broadly shared goal—seeking what is better—that occupies me here because it is often motivated by hope. To seek what is better might be a way to describe what Gabriel Marcel calls “the fundamental situation to which it
15 On Cosmopolitan Publics and Online Communities from:
Cosmopolitanism and Place
Author(s) Tarver Erin C.
Abstract: It is no secret that life in the twenty-first century happens, for many of us, in a “place” that defies traditional conceptions of place, community, and communication—namely, in the nebulous and Heraclitean world of the internet. Not only information but socialization and political life exist online; for many people, in fact, those relationships and conversations accessed via electronic mediums constitute the majority of all such interactions. And despite the hand-wringing that this fact might inspire in those nostalgic for pre-internet days, these interactions are
real: they are lived by flesh-and-blood people who not only inhabit traditionally physical communities but
4 Meister Eckhart and the Later Heidegger: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: In the introduction to his habilitation dissertation at Freiburg,
The Doctrine of Categories and of Meaning in Duns Scotus(1916), the young Martin Heidegger praised the “objective” orientation of medieval philosophy: “Scholastic psychology, precisely inasmuch as it is not focused upon the dynamic and flowing reality of the psychical remains in its fundamental problems oriented toward the objective and noematic, a circumstance which greatly favors setting one’s sight on the phenomenon of intentionality” (DS, 15).¹ While modern philosophy is characterized by a keen sense of subjective experience, the Scholastic thinker is concerned primarily with the object of knowledge, with “being.”
11 Beyond Aestheticism: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Deconstruction is sometimes accused of being a version of aestheticism. It appears to be frivolous and playful, to abdicate its duty to read literary and philosophical texts responsibly, and perversely to prefer arbitrary misreadings to serious interpretation. Viewed thus, Derrida sounds like the aesthete in Kierkegaard’s Either/Or who advises us to situate ourselves at a point prior to the principle of contradiction, anterior to its field of force, so that, exempted from the harshness of having to choose between its terms, we will be free to frolic in a world without consequences. On this rendering, deconstruction practices its own version
14 The Good News about Alterity: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: Derrida’s work is often mistakenly criticized as a kind of linguistic subjective idealism which traps us inside a chain of linguistic signifiers, unable to do anything but play vainly with linguistic strings. In fact, Derrida’s thought is through and through a philosophy of “alterity,” of openness to the other, which provides a rich and vigorous catalyst for religious thought. After demonstrating the wrongheadedness of the subjectivist reading of Derrida, I go on to show the richness of this philosophy of alterity for theology: first, in terms of the negative theology, where alterity refers to God as the absolutely Other; and
18 Sacred Anarchy: from:
The Essential Caputo
Abstract: “Postmodernism,” on my reading, is the issue of a crisis in hermeneutics. It is a radicalization of the problem of
hermeneusisthat faces up to the fact that hermeneutics has no metaphysical backup, no Hegelian assurances that the truth is inevitably working itself out, continually being reappropriated again and again. It is a more merciless hermeneutics that does not so much deny “tradition,” as its critics charge, as redefine tradition as a highly factical, fortuitous, and almost hopelessly complex accumulation of competing subtraditions, power plays, and incommensurable language games, along with a dash of wisdom here and there. (Whose wisdom?
A FEMINIST PHENOMENOLOGY MANIFESTO from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: In this volume we situate the future directions of feminist phenomenology in the here and now. We contend that in this moment feminist phenomenology is well positioned to take a leading role, not simply in terms of consolidating existing feminist methodologies but also in engaging the difficult task of thinking through the actual in the fullness of its relational, agential, ontological, experiential, and fleshly being, thereby opening up future possibilities. We also think there is some urgency to this claim. For many, faith in the rational human subject has been shattered by the events of the twentieth and twenty-first centuries’
INTRODUCTION from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: “The future is now.” Google this phrase and you might be surprised to see at least 854 million results, many of which seem to announce advances in technology, although there are some song titles high in the rankings. Yet in scrolling through them, it appears that none of the results define or explain what this phrase means. The philosopher Ludwig Feuerbach did not address the future as now, but he did write about “the philosophy of the future” in a critique of G.W.F. Hegel that proposes to look at being, not as an abstraction, but as sensuous, a being involved
4 CRAFTING CONTINGENCY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) McCANN RACHEL
Abstract: Thirteen years into the twenty-first century, much of the promise of the postmodern era has begun to materialize for the field of architecture. Technology has caught up with imagination, and our tolerance for evanescence, contingency, and multiplicity has found consonances in a world of informatics and bioengineering that transgress old boundaries of form, order, and identity. In the field of architecture, the chaotic character of earlier decades (when we drew sharp angles with dissonant relationships to show that we were no longer seeking a singular truth) is morphing into an appreciation and understanding of deep pattern. In contrast to the
5 OPEN FUTURE, REGAINING POSSIBILITY from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FIELDING HELEN A.
Abstract: Openness to the world and to the future belongs to personal time intertwined with impersonal or natural time, which is at the heart of phenomenology. Humans, as phenomenal subjects, make sense of the world they encounter, and in so doing they have the potential to enact change. However, as embodied, they also have the ability to be shaped by it—and in this age the world that shapes humans is largely indifferent to this phenomenal potential. They gear into a world that too often does not connect personal and impersonal time with the processes or systems in which they are
7 UNHAPPY SPEECH AND HEARING WELL: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STAWARSKA BEATA
Abstract: This essay is an attempt to grapple with an experience I had upon entering the academic profession about a decade ago and teaching a large undergraduate lecture class at a state university for the first time in my career. I often felt that my speech during my lectures sounded hollow, that it lacked resonance with my audience (composed in part of students with a strong sense of white male entitlement, compounded with commitment to stereotypical gender norms, ageism, and expectations of a familiar “native” accent), despite the fact that I enunciated well and occupied an official position of authority in
9 THE MURMURATION OF BIRDS: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) MANNING DOLLEEN TISAWII’ASHII
Abstract: This chapter sketches out precursory notes on the entangled ontology of the North American Algonquian language family, particularly regarding
mnidoo(spirit/mystery, “potency, potential”),¹ animacy, and other-than-human persons.² Since this concept mnidoo is difficult to translate linguistically with all of its intricacies intact, I conduct here a phenomenological—that is, an experientially embodied—translation, which, in my view, is more in keeping with everyday lived-indigeneities.³ We begin with a schematic drawing and a perplexing annotation on presence and consciousness to be investigated from a number of approaches throughout. These range from the navigational acuity of flocks of birds, to the poetics
11 THE “NORMAL ABNORMALITIES” OF DISABILITY AND AGING: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) Weiss Gail
Abstract: Two of the most slippery yet well-established divisions that have traditionally distinguished human beings from one another are age and disability, respectively. With respect to the former, even a cursory examination of different cultures and different historical time periods reveals how widely societies vary in their identifications of youth, middle age, and old age, much less in the roles and responsibilities that are deemed appropriate for each period of life. This cultural and historical variability is clearly due to many complex factors, chief among them being the average life expectancy for a particular group of people and the specific habitus
14 HANNAH ARENDT AND PREGNANCY IN THE PUBLIC SPHERE from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) FULFER KATY
Abstract: Although reproduction was once thought to be a paradigmatic private activity, it seems common now to accept that it is part of the public realm. Pregnancy often takes place in public institutions of hospitals or other medical facilities. Public policy may regulate reproduction and infertility services in places where health care is provided by the state, or in places that seek through legislation to restrict or protect women’s access to reproductive and sexual health services. Further, as Amy Mullin has emphasized, pregnant people not only make physical adjustments to their changing bodies, but they also must make accommodations within the
15 IS DIRECT PERCEPTION ARROGANT PERCEPTION?: from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) APRIL FLAKNE N.
Abstract: Feminist phenomenology promises numerous futures. In this essay, I will consider what emerging interactionist approaches to embodied social cognition might offer to feminist phenomenologists. For the sake of convenience, I will refer to a group of related, phenomenologically inspired approaches to embodied social cognition as “direct perception” (DP).¹ I use this overarching term not to ignore significant differences between the various strands, but to focus on their central, shared claim—namely, that our perception is “smart” enough to perceive “directly” that there are other minds as well as a great deal of what supposedly goes on “in” those other minds.²
16 LEADERSHIP IN THE WORLD THROUGH AN ARENDTIAN LENS from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) GARDINER RITA A.
Abstract: As more women move into leadership roles within the public sphere, there is a need for feminist phenomenologists to investigate how current leadership research fails to account sufficiently for gender and for the myriad ways we live and lead in the world. Instead, many leadership scholars focus on developing abstract models. One such model I explore here is that of authentic leadership. Specifically, in placing authentic leadership scholars in conversation with Hannah Arendt, I show how her more expansive view of leadership offers insight into the complexities regarding what it might mean to lead authentically. My main contention is that
18 WHAT IS FEMINIST PHENOMENOLOGY? from:
Feminist Phenomenology Futures
Author(s) STOLLER SILVIA
Abstract: The question “What is feminist phenomenology?” is not as easily answered as it might first seem. To some extent, this has to do with the term itself, since in the academic field two different terms are regularly used to designate more or less the same area: “feminist phenomenology” and “phenomenological feminism.” Strictly speaking, feminist phenomenology is a feminist-oriented phenomenology, whereas phenomenological feminism can be characterized as a phenomenologically oriented feminism. In her early essay “Sexual Ideology and Phenomenological Description,” Judith Butler speaks of “phenomenological feminism,” whereas in her encyclopedia article Dorothea Olkowski speaks of “phenomenologically-oriented feminists” and of “feminist phenomenologists”
Book Title: Self-Understanding and Lifeworld-Basic Traits of a Phenomenological Hermeneutics
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): RAYMAN JOSHUA
Abstract: What are the foundations of human self-understanding and the value of responsible philosophical questioning? Focusing on Heidegger's early work on facticity, historicity, and the phenomenological hermeneutics of factical-historical life, Hans-Helmuth Gander develops an idea of understanding that reflects our connection with the world and other, and thus invites deep consideration of phenomenology, hermeneutics, and deconstruction. He draws usefully on Husserl's phenomenology and provides grounds for exchange with Descartes, Dilthey, Nietzsche, Gadamer, Ricoeur, and Foucault. On the way to developing a contemporary hermeneutical philosophy, Gander clarifies the human relation to self in and through conversation with Heidegger's early hermeneutics. Questions about reading and writing then follow as these are the very actions that structure human self-understanding and world understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005w6h
CHAPTER TWO THE EXPERIENTIAL STRUCTURE OF THE SELF: from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: To gain the philosophical attitude that appears necessary from out of the hermeneutical turn of phenomenology for an analysis of determinate human life as facticity means, to begin with, as Pöggeler puts it, “to break away from or shut off the machinery of Husserl’s phenomenological reductions.”¹ Instead of wanting to penetrate into a deep layer of the immutable ideal “I” on the path of reductions, phenomenological hermeneutics forms its approach by recurring to
pretheoretical experiences,from which it works on its ontological analysis of structure by means of the interpretation of concrete appearances. In the context of discussions of the
CHAPTER THREE APPLICATION—DESTRUKTION—HISTORY: from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: As a hermeneutical problem of utilization [
Anwendung], the application [Applikation] forms its own ontological sense of contribution of historical hermeneutics. Hans-Georg Gadamer in particular has stressed this with a view to the task of textual interpretation in this sense and he has exemplarily developed it in regard to its function in legal hermeneutics.¹ In the given context, to introduce this application structure in the discussion of the hermeneutics of facticity does not mean simply wanting to interpret Heidegger by way of Gadamer. Rather, as we shall see, a structural comportment is explicated, which, even though it is not made explicit
OPEN END from:
Self-Understanding and Lifeworld
Abstract: With the hermeneutical demonstration that our never other than life worldly situated self-understanding is always already historical at the origin of its self-worldly significance, the factual analysis of Heidegger’s early work comes to an end, in that for one thing, it makes explicit the point of departure of phenomenological hermeneutics of factical historical life in the wealth of its structures. For another, beyond the fact of placing the starting point in life, the central question of his early work illuminates at the same time how “factical life-experience belongs in a wholly originary sense to the problematic of philosophy,”¹ in that
Book Title: The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard-Time, Ritual, and Sexual Commerce in London
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Hausner Sondra L.
Abstract: Every month, a ragtag group of Londoners gather in the site known as Crossbones Graveyard to commemorate the souls of medieval prostitutes believed to be buried there-the "Winchester Geese," women who were under the protection of the Church but denied Christian burial. In the Borough of Southwark, not far from Shakespeare's Globe, is a pilgrimage site for self-identified misfits, nonconformists, and contemporary sex workers who leave memorials to the outcast dead. Ceremonies combining raucous humor and eclectic spirituality are led by a local playwright, John Constable, also known as John Crow. His interpretation of the history of the site has struck a chord with many who feel alienated in present-day London. Sondra L. Hausner offers a nuanced ethnography of Crossbones that tacks between past and present to look at the historical practices of sex work, the relation of the Church to these professions, and their representation in the present. She draws on anthropological approaches to ritual and time to understand the forms of spiritual healing conveyed by the Crossbones rites. She shows that ritual is a way of creating the present by mobilizing the stories of the past for contemporary purposes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wdm
Introduction from:
The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: On November 23, 1996, a London playwright and performer by the name of John Constable had a shamanic vision. In it, a totemic Goose appeared to tell him her tale. She was the spirit of a particular Goose, one who hailed from the jurisdiction of Winchester. In fact, she identified as a Winchester Goose, argot for a medieval prostitute. She and her fellow Winchester Geese had been sex workers in what were called “stews” (or “stewes”) or brothels—or, in later colloquial accounts, “nunneries”¹—on London’s South Bank, in what is now the Borough of Southwark, a mere five hundred
5 Southwark, Then and Now from:
The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: All politics, it is said, are local: the manipulation of time, too, must be enacted somewhere. In the story at hand, our ritual takes place in Southwark, a borough that is 300,000 strong in a twenty-first-century London that is vibrantly expanding. Formally incorporated into the City of London in its present form as late as 1965 (Johnson 1969:385), Southwark is one of the densest boroughs in the contemporary capital: the 2011 census lists almost 10,000 residents per square kilometer, double the average for London (and twenty times the average for England, which has always had a large rural population).¹ Some
Epilogue from:
The Spirits of Crossbones Graveyard
Abstract: Ten years of activism do not go unnoticed when they touch a cultural chord. In the spring of 2015, one of John’s lobbying goals—to open a garden for Crossbones—came to fruition. Some years earlier, Bankside Open Spaces Trust, a neighborhood charity that works to create “precious patches of green amongst the concrete and glass of Bankside”¹ had been easily won over to the campaign to create a memorial garden. That it would be dedicated to the sex workers of old was less important, perhaps, than that it would offer another grassy corner in the steely metropolis. And with
Book Title: Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment-Ancillae Vitae
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: As one of the most respected voices of Continental philosophy today, Rodolphe Gasché pulls together Aristotle's conception of rhetoric, Martin Heidegger's debate with theory, and Hannah Arendt's conception of judgment in a single work on the centrality of these themes as fundamental to human flourishing in public and political life. Gasché's readings address the distinctively human space of the public square and the actions that occur there, and his valorization of persuasion, reflection, and judgment reveals new insight into how the philosophical tradition distinguishes thinking from other faculties of the human mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2005wvb
INTRODUCTION from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: Each of the three sections of this book—on persuasion in Aristotle, reflection (
Besinnung) in Martin Heidegger, and judgment in Hannah Arendt—comes with its own introduction. Each section can, thus, be read on its own and without regard for the order in which it is presented. Yet, apart from the fact that the order in which these studies follow one another is chronological, the essays, though they do not explicitly build upon or derive from one another, are interrelated in many ways and, ultimately, pursue one question, one major concern. These prefatory remarks, which I keep to a minimum,
5 THE GENESIS OF THE THEORETICAL from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Author(s) Collins David B.
Abstract: IN HEIDEGGER’S EARLY Freiburg lecture series from the summer semester of 1923,
Ontology: The Hermeneutics of Facticity, there is the following parenthetical remark: “(The genesis of the theoretical, what is prior here: ‘curiosity.’)”¹ This problem of the genesis of the theoretical will be investigated in the following with special consideration of the role that it plays inBeing and Time(1927). First of all, however, it may be appropriate to pose again the question of the importance of the subject of “theory” to Heidegger’s thinking in general. At first glance it might appear as if his critical encounter with the
8 THE WIND OF THOUGHT from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: THE CONCERN WITH the power of judgment arises in Hannah Arendt’s work in response to critical events in modernity. As a result of the impotence of familiar standards and categories to provide answers and orientation, this power has become undone. It is a question not only of the impotence of the common standards regarding certain events of modernity but also of the fact that these events have been so terrifying that they have altogether destroyed all our habitual categories of thought and standards of judgment. Yet, as Arendt remarks in 1953 in “Understanding and Politics (The Difficulties of Understanding),” that
9 A SENSE OF THE WORLD from:
Persuasion, Reflection, Judgment
Abstract: FROM WHAT WE have seen so far, Arendt’s theory of judgment sketches out a novel conception of a kind of mental activity that she holds Kant to have unwittingly discovered when he came across the judgment of taste. This kind of judgment, which lies behind the reflective judgment of taste and is not identical with it, concerns appearances. What Arendt calls appearances can be retraced to Kant’s transcendental aesthetics, in which he elaborated on the a priori forms constitutive of phenomena of nature that are to be subsequently subsumed by the determinant judgment under the discursive conditions of cognition, that
Book Title: The Colonial Legacy in France-Fracture, Rupture, and Apartheid
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Pernsteiner Alexis
Abstract: Debates about the legacy of colonialism in France are not new, but they have taken on new urgency in the wake of recent terrorist attacks. Responding to acts of religious and racial violence in 2005, 2010, and 2015 and beyond, the essays in this volume pit French ideals against government-sponsored revisionist decrees that have exacerbated tensions, complicated the process of establishing and recording national memory, and triggered divisive debates on what it means to identify as French. As they document the checkered legacy of French colonialism, the contributors raise questions about France and the contemporary role of Islam, the banlieues, immigration, race, history, pedagogy, and the future of the Republic. This innovative volume reconsiders the cultural, economic, political, and social realities facing global French citizens today and includes contributions by Achille Mbembe, Benjamin Stora, Françoise Vergès, Alec Hargreaves,Elsa Dorlin,and Alain Mabanckou, among others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20060bg
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Thomas Dominic
Abstract: Paris, November 13, 2015 . . . one hundred and thirty dead and almost four hundred injured . . . Earlier, in January 2015, French prime minister Manuel Valls had used the word
war, a word he has since repeated on multiple occasions along with French president François Hollande as a way of describing the November attacks: “What I want to say to the French people, is that France is at war. What happened was a systematically organized act of war.”² A few days later, on November 16, speaking in Versailles before a joint session of parliament, François Hollande declared
1 THE REPUBLICAN ORIGINS OF THE COLONIAL FRACTURE from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: The links between colonization and the Republic remain of utmost importance and relevance to contemporary debates in French society. Might colonization, in fact, represent the inevitable reverse side of what stands as a universal utopia, one that invariably becomes less and less “pure” as one moves away from the center (the metropole), and as the color of the people who are theoretically placed under its “protection” becomes darker? Such complex questions are no doubt impossible to answer definitively. However, they do have the merit of clearly setting out an issue that has, until now, often been avoided or, at times,
5 COLONIZATION AND IMMIGRATION: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Lemaire Sandrine
Abstract: Listening to what students say, following the news, and reviewing the results of a survey conducted in 2003, one could easily conclude that the topic of colonial history and immigration in French schools was severely underrepresented. The survey we took does indeed show a lack of understanding—or at best a very vague understanding—of colonial and immigration history, despite the fact that a real need to learn about these topics, particularly in order to better understand current events, has been expressed.
7 THE ENEMY WITHIN: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Rigouste Mathieu
Abstract: An analysis of print and televised media in France is key to understanding dominant representations of the figure of the “Arab” in France today. The term is used inconsistently, grounded as it is in a series of confused ideas and ambivalent attitudes surrounding a range of often interchangeable symbolic categories that include
immigrant,foreigner,Muslim,Islamist,banlieue youth, andterrorist. In order to grasp the function and functioning of this semantic fog, one must look more carefully at how the “Arab” has been constructed (and reformulated through various discursive practices), beginning in the 1980s.
8 ISLAM AND THE REPUBLIC: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Bozzo Anna
Abstract: The centennial of the law separating church and state, which was passed in 1905, triggered numerous debates, highlighting not only the fact that this law only partially applied to Islam, but also that the integration of France’s second religion into republican society was still far from accomplished. As things stand today, the situation does not seem to be improving: on the contrary, the list of grievances within the Muslim community continues to grow. Indeed, in 1998, the “
Commission Islam et Laïcité” (Commission on Islam and Secularism), a group composed of Christians, Muslims, Jews, and nonreligious civilians founded in conjunction with
11 THE BANLIEUES AS A COLONIAL THEATER, OR THE COLONIAL FRACTURE IN DISADVANTAGED NEIGHBORHOODS from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Lapeyronnie Didier
Abstract: Over the past twenty years, life in disadvantaged neighborhoods or
banlieueshousing projects has under gone a number of changes. These have included the implementation of protectionist, but isolationist, measures and efforts aimed at restoring “social order” through a process of group segmentation. Communication across gender lines in these neighborhoods has diminished, identities have become increasingly ethnicized, and the importance of religion has been amplified. Today’s France is witnessing the creation of ghettos, neighborhoods populated by what are effectively second-class citizens, and who have become increasingly withdrawn into their own communities as a reaction to their lack of integration.
12 THE PITFALLS OF COLONIAL MEMORY from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Blanchard Pascal
Abstract: Speaking about memory in France is to touch upon a crucial civic value,¹ one that is marked by a bad conscience, commemorations, and even manipulations.² A perfect history does not in fact exist,³ and nor does a perfect memory. If writing history is a process—it can be corrected, recontextualized, reformulated—memory is, at the moment it is articulated, a source of imagination, newfound awareness, and conflict. Its impact—both socially and politically—is immediate and indelible. It leaves its mark on the social imaginary.⁴ Memory is therefore an issue that should be considered with much precaution and distance. But
14 RETHINKING POLITICS IN THE FRENCH OVERSEAS DEPARTMENTS from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Dahomay Jacky
Abstract: In 2009, the four French overseas Départements et régions d’outre mer (Overseas departments and regions, DROMs)—Martinique, Guadeloupe, Guiana, and Réunion—were shaken by protests initiated by various social movements. Guadeloupe was particularly affected. A fifth DROM was added during the same period: Mayotte. The news brought images of the tumult coursing through these small French territories scattered in the Americas and Indian Ocean to audiences in mainland France. How can we begin to explain the fact that conflicts that began in Guadeloupe eventually spread to other overseas departments? What gave rise to them? Does France have a prob lem
16 FROM THE EMPIRE TO THE REPUBLIC: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Amiraux Valérie
Abstract: After years of comparing the different ways in which the European Union’s member states treat their Muslim minorities, a kind of convergence has begun to emerge around various hot button issues.¹ The issue that has been the greatest source of disagreement concerns the Islamic head scarf in schools and in the public space in a more general manner.² A few additional details can help bring nuance to these situations. What has long set France apart from other European countries is the almost visceral character that these debates have taken over what has now been almost thirty years.³ The evolution of
22 THE GREAT STRIP SHOW: from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Dorlin Elsa
Abstract: In a speech delivered on June 22, 2009, at the Chateau de Versailles in a joint session of parliament, the first time a French president had addressed that body in over one hundred years, Nicolas Sarkozy made the following pronouncement: “The burqa is not welcome on French soil.” Seizing the opportunity to capitalize on yet another “head scarf affair,” this declaration was made in spite of the fact that a parliamentary factgathering mission initiated by André Gérin (Communist Party) was already underway in response to an obscure report released by the French internal security police (the sousdirection de l’information générale,
24 FROM THE DAKAR SPEECH TO THE TAUBIRA AFFAIR from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) d’Appollonia Ariane Chebel
Abstract: General Recommendation No. 35, which was adopted by the United Nations Committee on the Elimination of Racial Discrimination (CERD) in 2013, introduced the notion of “racist hate speech” in order to improve prevention and aid in the fight against various forms of discrimination.¹ Indeed, CERD mentions “racism” only in the context of “racist doctrines and practices” in direct relationship to Article 4 pertaining to the condemnation of the dissemination of ideas based on racial superiority.² The committee’s position was that the traditional definition of racism only allowed for sanctions with re spect to the dissemination of ideas founded on a
26 THE BLACK QUESTION AND THE EXHIBIT B CONTROVERSY from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Thomas Dominic
Abstract: When it comes to the question of colonialism in France, more often than not, the tendency is to conjure a range of “philanthropic” or “humanist” measures. This is somehow deemed necessary in the process of extracting populations residing is farflung places out of the heart of darkness, and thereby justifying overseas colonial expansion. As a consequence, there has been no real debate on these and related questions, even though formerly colonized peoples and their descendants continue to be the object of racial prejudice and subjected to humiliation. Nevertheless, efforts have been made to alleviate tensions and to encourage the authorities
28 FACES OF THE FRONT NATIONAL (1972–2015) from:
The Colonial Legacy in France
Author(s) Crépon Sylvain
Abstract: After forty years at the head of the Front National, Jean-Marie Le Pen (finally) passed the baton on January 11, 2011. The eighty-three-year-old leader, who had participated in just about every shift on the French farright since the 1950s, entrusted his party to his youngest daughter, Marine. Beyond the fact the she bore her father’s name (not irrelevant in a party where the leader had always embodied its very essence), Marine received massive support during an internal primary—67.65 percent—anunprece dented level of support in the FN, in a race which had pitted her against Bruno Gollnisch.
Book Title: The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): SCHREIER BENJAMIN
Abstract: What happens when math nerds, band and theater geeks, goths, sci-fi fanatics, Young Republican debate poindexters, techies, Trekkies, D&D players, wallflowers, bookworms, and RPG players grow up? And what can they tell us about the life of the mind in the contemporary United States? With #GamerGate in the national news, shows like The Big Bang Theory on ever-increasing numbers of screens, and Peter Orzsag and Paul Ryan on magazine covers, it is clear that nerds, policy wonks, and neoconservatives play a major role in today's popular culture in America. The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons delves into subcultures of intellectual history to explore their influence on contemporary American intellectual life. Not limiting themselves to describing how individuals are depicted, the authors consider the intellectual endeavors these depictions have come to represent, exploring many models and practices of learnedness, reflection, knowledge production, and opinion in the contemporary world. As teachers, researchers, and university scholars continue to struggle for mainstream visibility, this book illuminates the other forms of intellectual excitement that have emerged alongside them and found ways to survive and even thrive in the face of dismissal or contempt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20060h2
2 SURFACE WORSHIP, SUPER-PUBLIC INTELLECTUALS, AND THE SUSPICIOUSLY COMMON READER from:
The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) MAXWELL WILLIAM J.
Abstract: Young nerds may rule at last, as the title of this book implies, but their public intellectual moms and dads have never felt less regal. By this I don’t mean, Richard A. Posner–style, that it’s all been downhill for such intellectuals practically since Wilhelm von Humboldt forced seminars, laboratories, and departments on the learned gentlemen of Prussia. At the start of his millennial plaint
Public Intellectuals: A Study of Decline(2001), Posner defines his subject as “academics’ writing outside their field,” and attributes the regular failures of professors courting a general readership to the successes of academic freedom and
6 CONSERVATIVE AND INTERNATIONALIST: from:
The Year's Work in Nerds, Wonks, and Neocons
Author(s) MARZIOLI SARA
Abstract: On the eve of the Italian invasion of the Kingdom of Ethiopia in 1935, the journalist and novelist George Schuyler poked fun at the tendency for African Americans to become passionately concerned with the fate of the last independent African nation. In his weekly “Views and Reviews” column for the Pittsburgh
Courier, he depicts this passion for a faraway land as both ridiculous and unbelievable, its motives both striking and performative—a gesture of disdain that epitomizes Schuyler’s own complex relationship to black internationalism and anticolonialism. Schuyler was, in fact, one of the most famous black conservative intellectuals of his
CHAPTER 1 Paris—St. Petersburg: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Musekamp Jan
Abstract: IN 1789, THE AUTHOR of this account, famous Russian writer and historian Nikolai Mikhailovich Karamzin, went on an extended study tour of Western Europe.² Starting at Tver’ in the Russian Empire, he traveled first to St. Petersburg, then to Königsberg (Kaliningrad) in East Prussia, then to Berlin and France, and, finally, to England. In 1791–1792, he published his
Letters of a Russian Traveler(Pis’ma russkogo puteshestvennika) . Karamzin did not base his literary work on actual letters but rather on notes taken during his trip.³ While scholars widely regard these “letters” as a model for contemporary Russian travel accounts
CHAPTER 3 Walking with a Tolstoyan Dancer: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Svobodny Nicole
Abstract: ON JANUARY 19, 1919, Vaslav Nijinsky, the Polish-Russian internationally acclaimed dancer, gave a solo recital for about two hundred people at the Suvretta House Hotel in St. Moritz, Switzerland. His wife, Romola, recalls how Nijinsky came out in plain practice clothes, picked up a chair, and sat down in front of the audience. The audience waited, ill at ease but full of expectation, while Nijinsky sat perfectly still. Everyone waited like this for about half an hour. Eventually Nijinsky took out a few rolls of black and white velvet cloth and made a big cross the length of the room.
CHAPTER 5 Dynamic Bohemians: from:
Migration and Mobility in the Modern Age
Author(s) Winestein Anna
Abstract: THE PERIOD FROM 1870 to 1930 was the heyday of visual artistic exchange between France and Russia, during which countless Russian and later Soviet artists traveled to Paris to visit, study, create, advance their careers, and simply live. They naturally gravitated toward creative compatriots—other artists, poets and writers, musicians, scholars and scientists—but sometimes also turned to political émigrés, revolutionaries, or alternatively diplomats and other representatives of Russian officialdom. The informal networks and structured organizations that emerged not only connected the artists with other Russians in Paris but helped them interact and even integrate into the broader French art
Book Title: Music and Embodied Cognition-Listening, Moving, Feeling, and Thinking
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): COX ARNIE
Abstract: Taking a cognitive approach to musical meaning, Arnie Cox explores embodied experiences of hearing music as those that move us both consciously and unconsciously. In this pioneering study that draws on neuroscience and music theory, phenomenology and cognitive science, Cox advances his theory of the "mimetic hypothesis," the notion that a large part of our experience and understanding of music involves an embodied imitation in the listener of bodily motions and exertions that are involved in producing music. Through an often unconscious imitation of action and sound, we feel the music as it moves and grows. With applications to tonal and post-tonal Western classical music, to Western vernacular music, and to non-Western music, Cox's work stands to expand the range of phenomena that can be explained by the role of sensory, motor, and affective aspects of human experience and cognition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt200610s
Introduction from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: Like many music students, I spent a good deal of my undergraduate and graduate coursework in music theory focusing on musical structure and making more or less factual observations about how the various elements of music fit together in particular works and styles. Since I enjoyed this kind of study, for my doctoral thesis I planned to take the same approach in analyzing the music of Debussy. But then one day the stove in my apartment stopped working, the repairman came over, and we started chatting. He asked if I was a student up at the college, and I said
1 Mimetic Comprehension from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: If music cognition is embodied in a musically meaningful way, in the flesh of experience, then we ought to be able to specify just how this occurs. One way begins in imitation of musical sounds and of the physical exertions that produce them. This bodily comprehension of sounds and of sound-producing actions is one of the bases of embodied cognition of music, and it is the central basis that we will be exploring in the following chapters.
6 Perspectives on Musical Motion from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: The other day I reached a milestone—several of them in fact. Near my home is a former railroad line that has been converted to a bike trail, and along this path are milestones: mile markers, made of stone, indicating the distance to the next large city. When used metaphorically to conceptualize significant events in one’s life,
milestoneis an expression of the conceptual metaphor states are locations and its corollaries, as arecurriculum vita(life course), the “verge” of a scientific “break-through,” the concept of “eccentricity,” and the difficulty of “bringing oneself to believe,” for example, that temporal and
8 Musical Affect from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: The analyses in chapters 4–7 help to show how our musical concepts are conceptualizations of experiences that are seldom if ever simply a matter of what is heard. Musical experience in general also includes what we see, do, and feel, whether we are actually performing or whether we are listening to, recalling, or otherwise thinking about music. In what we have considered so far, the
feelingcomponent includes the following: the feelings of overt and covert exertions (actual and imagined actions), in both mimetic and nonmimetic forms; the feelings of the anticipation-presence-memory dynamic; the feelings of exerting (actually and
10 Review and Implications from:
Music and Embodied Cognition
Abstract: I have described what I take to be some fundamental processes in musical experience and conceptualization. In addition to specific processes, this includes an essential variability in how these play out in different musical practices, among different individuals, and even for a given individual at different points in one’s life. Specialists might rightly note the many sources I have excluded and the avenues I have only pointed toward or overlooked, but I have attempted to offer a coherent story of the relationship among metaphor, embodiment, and affect—or among concept, flesh, and feeling. I want to close by reviewing a
Book Title: Novelas españolas ambientadas en Italia-Fra Filippo Lippi de Emilio Castelar; Bomarzo de Manuel Mujica Lainez
Publisher: Ediciones Universidad de Salamanca
Author(s): SANTOS M.ª ALMUDENA MATEOS
Abstract: Las fuentes en las que se fundamenta la novela histórica proporcionan, además de una ambientación correcta de la acción, la veracidad necesaria para que el lector reconozca el trabajo llevado a cabo por el autor. Este estudio se centra en descubrir las fuentes históricas, literarias, artísticas, religiosas y culturales de dos novelas muy diferentes que comparten un marco común, el Renacimiento Italiano. Mientras que en Fra Filippo Lippi de Emilio Castelar (1877-1879) la exactitud histórica se presenta sólo en determinados capítulos que parecen ralentizar la acción, en Bomarzo de Manuel Mujica Lainez (1962), lo histórico está tan integrado que es difícil detectar qué parte se corresponde con la historia y cuál con la ficción. Las fuentes consultadas por los autores e incorporadas al texto narrativo proporcionan laexhaustividad necesaria para que el ambiente histórico recreado sea preciso. Al confrontar dichas fuentes con el texto literario se observa cómo, además, el marco creado ayuda a delimitarla psicología de los protagonistas, pues, aunque son personajes históricos, los autores crean una vida de ficción a partir de los hechos históricos. Por otro lado, las referencias literarias (correspondientes a un periodo que va desde los siglos XV y XVI hasta el presente de los autores) aportan el marco necesario para que los protagonistas sean portadores de una nueva inmortalidad. La exactitud de las descripciones, la configuración de los caracteres tanto renacentistas como contemporáneos, las perspectivas artísticas o religiosas, configuran estas dos obras en una serie de coincidencias difíciles de obviar.The sources, which the historical novel is based on, provide the correct setting of the action and the necessary truthfulness for the reader to recognise the work carried out by the author. This research focuses on discovering the historical, literary, artistic, religious and cultural sources of two very different novels that share common framework of the Italian Renaissance. In Fra Filippo Lippi by Emilio Catelar (1877-1879) the historical accuracy is presented only incertain chapters, and slow down the action, whereas in Bomarzo by Manuel Mujica Lainez (1962), historical facts are integrated in such a way that it is difficult to detect which parts belong to fiction or non-fiction. The sources consulted by the authors and which are incorporated into the narrative text provide the necessary detail for the recreated historical environment to be accurate. Additionally, when comparing these historical sources with the literary text, it is obvious how the historical facts help to demonstrate the psychology of the main characters because, although they are historical characters, the authors create a living fiction based on historical events. The literary references, belonging to a period that covers the fifteenth and sixteenth century to the present of authors contribute the necessary details so that the main characters are bearers o fa new immortality. The accuracy of descriptions, the representation of both Renaissance and Contemporary characters and artistic and religious perspectives present us with a series of coincidences too obvious to ignore.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt201mp18
I. INTRODUCCIÓN from:
Novelas españolas ambientadas en Italia
Abstract: La deuda que la cultura y la literatura occidental tiene con la Italia del Renacimiento se deja sentir en todos los ámbitos. La literatura, las artes plásticas, la nueva forma de pensar y de actuar de los siglos XV y XVI inunda Europa, hasta el punto que las principales potencias europeas se disputan la primacía sobre los territorios italianos. La política interna de las ciudades y regiones italianas se convierte en temas de política exterior en España, Francia o Inglaterra. El poder de los Estados Pontificios, la situación de corrupción de la Iglesia que origina el nacimiento del protestantismo en
II. ACERCAMIENTO A LA NOVELA HISTÓRICA from:
Novelas españolas ambientadas en Italia
Abstract: En la Antigüedad era difícil separarlos, y los poemas homéricos entre otros, fueron referencia histórica durante siglos. No se puede caer en el error de traer ese concepto de Historia y ficción a la actualidad, especialmente después de siglos de reflexión,
Chapter One HOW SOCIALIST REALISM WAS EXPORTED TO EASTERN EUROPEAN COUNTRIES AND HOW THEY GOT RID OF IT from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Günther Hans
Abstract: This chapter concerns debates that took place in Eastern Europe during the 1950s and 1960s that, as I believe, played a crucial role in the cultural development of the region after the war. More specifically, this is a story about how Eastern European writers tried to come to terms with socialist realism and how they strove to get rid of it. For purposes of practical convenience, ‘Eastern Europe’ refers here to all the countries that were under Soviet hegemony after the war, including the German Democratic Republic and Czechoslovakia; discussion on the issue of Central Europe is beyond the scope
Chapter Five THE DEMISE OF ‘SOCIALIST REALISM FOR EXPORT’ IN 1947: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Zubok Vladislav M.
Abstract: For the cultural and intellectual elites of the Soviet Union, the Cold War with the West started a whole year after the domestic one, usually known as
zhdanovshchina: the xenophobic campaign that praised Russo-centric cultural isolationism and denounced Western ‘decadent’ influences. This sequence had fatal implications for the staff of the Soviet institutions of cultural propaganda and their ‘intelligentsia’ – established writers, experts on foreign literature, and others. They entered the Cold War with the recent wartime allies without any strategy or techniques, while already in the process of fighting for their lives against domestic crackdown and reaction. Another structural
Chapter Six THE SOVIET FACTOR AND THE INSTITUTIONALIZATION OF BULGARIAN LITERATURE AFTER WORLD WAR II from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Volokitina Tatiana V.
Abstract: The history of introducing Soviet-type political regimes in countries along the European border of the USSR has long been the subject of vehement scholarly and journalistic discussions. Historians still cannot agree on what plan exactly Stalin had in mind for Eastern Europe immediately after the war. Remarkably, Soviet and Western assessments of the post-war situation in the region coincided almost completely. The American diplomat George Kennan compared Eastern Europe in the transitional period between war and peace to a ‘malleable and pliant mass’, while Soviet Foreign Minister Viacheslav Molotov spoke of it being in ‘a liquid state’.¹ There was nothing
Chapter Nine STALINISM’S IMPERIAL FIGURE: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Robinson Benjamin
Abstract: The Ara Pacis Augustae, the great altar consecrated to the Augustan Pax Romana, bears a fresco of the goddess Pax with Plutos, the child god of wealth, nursing on her arm, the fruit of plenty on her lap, a sheep and cow grazing at her feet and sprays of wheat and poppies behind her. Her sisters, Justice and Good Order, sit mounted on animals to either side of her.¹ Originally, the Latin
paxdid not signify peace, as personified by the Greek Eirene, but a pact or treaty without any special cultic standing.² After defeating Antony at Actium in 31
Chapter Eleven THE SHORT LIFE OF SOCIALIST REALISM IN CROATIAN LITERATURE, 1945–55 from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Peruško Ivana
Abstract: However, when it comes to the history of literature, the situation is much more complicated. Today we have studies that examine the impact of the Communist Party on literature and publication policies, blaming the Soviet model of socialism for low-quality literary
Chapter Thirteen ‘YESTERDAY AND TOMORROW’: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Bílik René
Abstract: The first ideas about how literature and literary life in Slovakia should look after the end of World War II were formulated by their protagonists as early as 1945. In the short period between 1945 and 1948, a part of modern domestic policy and of the ideological and literary traditions was actualized in programme-guided discussions and debates, but also in legally binding documents. The first line of this actualization movement reached back to the depth of the nineteenth century – to the Romantic concept of mighty Slavdom and pan-Slavic reciprocity. This line had a politically and ideologically declarative form, which
Chapter Sixteen WHEN WRITERS TURN AGAINST THEMSELVES: from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Doinov Plamen
Abstract: As in most other socialist countries, in Bulgaria the introduction of the socialist regime was accompanied by an imperative to engage in active criticism and, more importantly, self-criticism, often regardless of one’s professional affiliations, status and true political sympathies. The campaign for criticism and self-criticism, initiated almost immediately after the coup d’état in September 1944, continued until the 1960s, with varying degrees of intensity. At first it was ‘alien elements’ who were required to make public self-critical statements – people who had either actively opposed the Bulgarian Communist Party or else refused to cooperate with it. A few years later
Chapter Nineteen WILL FREEDOM SING AS BEAUTIFULLY AS CAPTIVES SANG ABOUT IT? from:
Socialist Realism in Central and Eastern European Literatures under Stalin
Author(s) Ivić Nenad
Abstract: Ljudevit Galic was an actor, with no formal education. Mobilized in 1941, he struggled through the war acting in provincial theatres. He joined the partisans in Bosnia. When the war was almost over, in 1945, he was 26. Freedom was near, and he was anxious: ‘My worries […] were great. What will become of us when this disaster is over? Everything is a menace and mostly the thought that “time will overtake us” unless we educate ourselves. Endless discussions in last few months discovered many gaps in our general and professional education. We have sunk very low,’ he wrote in
Book Title: Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania- Publisher: Indiana University Press
Author(s): Florian Alexandru
Abstract: How is the Holocaust remembered in Romania since the fall of communism? Alexandru Florian and an international group of contributors unveil how and why Romania, a place where large segments of the Jewish and Roma populations perished, still fails to address its recent past. These essays focus on the roles of government and public actors that choose to promote, construct, defend, or contest the memory of the Holocaust, as well as the tools-the press, the media, monuments, and commemorations-that create public memory. Coming from a variety of perspectives, these essays provide a compelling view of what memories exist, how they are sustained, how they can be distorted, and how public remembrance of the Holocaust can be encouraged in Romanian society today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2050vp3
Memory under Construction: from:
Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Florian Alexandru
Abstract: To answer this question we should first examine the clear differences between the prevailing practices in public memory in
Chapter Two POSTCOMMUNIST ROMANIA’S LEADING PUBLIC INTELLECTUALS AND THE HOLOCAUST from:
Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Voicu Alexandru
Abstract: How do Romania’s most influential intellectuals after 1989 relate to the Holocaust in general and to its Romanian chapter in particular? Given the powerful impact of their views on the public opinion in the country, one could say that the answer to such a question unveils to a great extent the very foundation of the social perception of the catastrophe experienced by the European Jews during the Second World War. Undeniably, this preliminary assumption does not simply imply a cause-effect relationship between those who articulate the mainstream public discourse and the larger society to which they belong; in many respects,
Chapter Three LAW, JUSTICE, AND HOLOCAUST MEMORY IN ROMANIA from:
Holocaust Public Memory in Postcommunist Romania
Author(s) Climescu Alexandru
Abstract: After 1989, historiographical works, political discourses, and commemoration activities meant to rehabilitate the Antonescu regime were complemented
CHAPTER ONE Hebrew Bible Accounts from:
Eve and Adam
Abstract: No other text has affected women in the Western world as much as that found in the opening chapters of Genesis. The biblical story of the first man and woman became for many readers a blueprint for relationships between all men and women. Yet in spite of the wide-ranging influence of Genesis 1-3, there is surprisingly little agreement among readers concerning what these chapters actually say about such relationships. Do they present a message of subordination
CHAPTER FIVE Medieval Readings: from:
Eve and Adam
Abstract: It is no accident that discussions of the character and activity of women play a significant role in Islam. Islam emphasizes the need for persons
4 Between Theodicy and Despair from:
Levinas and the Trauma of Responsibility
Abstract: Levinas’s critique of narrative and the conception of the narrating subject that underlies it leads him to the issue of how time is synchronized in the philosophy of history, where the process of abstraction from the singular other is most prominent. By interpreting the significance of disparate events and integrating them into a coherent account, the disciplinary approaches of history typically assume a formal conception of time, in which a linear chronology can be represented by consciousness. In other words, past events are treated as intentional objects. This synchronization of time entails generalizing from people’s experiences, selectively emphasizing certain elements
Book Title: Celebrar la nación-Conmemoraciones oficiales y festejos durante la Segunda República
Publisher: Marcial Pons, Ediciones de Historia
Author(s): PÉREZ LARA CAMPOS
Abstract: Este libro propone explorar las relaciones entre las políticas conmemorativas oficiales de la Segunda República y los discursos del nacionalismo español a fin de arrojar luz sobre el tema de la existencia y los posibles elementos constitutivos de una ciudadanía española republicana, entendida ésta como uno de los fundamentos del régimen y de la nación en ese momento. A partir de la demostración de que sí hubo una política conmemorativa durante este periodo —más o menos orquestada según las circunstancias y el lugar de ejecución—, se analiza qué papel y qué significados se le fueron asignando a la idea de nación en estos actos rituales de la política, si la nación actuó o no como vehículo cohesionador entre los diferentes republicanismos de aquellos años y en qué medida este mecanismo cultural de la política pudo haber contribuido a la formación y socialización de esa idea de España como nación republicana.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt20fw6xh
Capítulo 7 LA FIESTA HISTÓRICA DEL REPUBLICANISMO ESPAÑOL, EL 11 DE FEBRERO from:
Celebrar la nación
Abstract: Aunque no fue el único lugar de la memoria del calendario republicano decimonónico, el 11 de febrero, día en que había sido proclamada la República en 1873, se acabó convirtiendo —hasta que no tuvo lugar el 14 de abril de 1931— en el principal activo simbólico del republicanismo, con el que se identificaban todos los simpatizantes de este régimen de gobierno, independientemente de clasificaciones generacionales o de signo ideológico. Su cristalización simbólica, al contrario de lo que vimos que había ocurrido con el Primero de Mayo, fue lenta y contradictoria, y estuvo sujeta a los vaivenes históricos propios en este
1. In the Beginning, Myths from:
Numinous Subjects
Abstract: Myths. Stories that reveal and establish, simultaneously, the ‘what’ and the ‘why’ of everything that matters. Stories that tell of creation: the creation of the world, if it is the world that matters, or the creation of the heavens, if the heavens matter, the creation of this particular mountain, this specific stream, this exact rock, this kind of herb – if they are what matters to those keeping the myth alive. Myths do not explain, exactly, but they establish and reveal, simultaneously, the what and the why of it all, including the what and why of different human beings. Myths
4. The Femininity of the Sacred from:
Numinous Subjects
Abstract: The sacred, the holy, the numinous: already I have characterized it as ‘the vexingly gendered conjunction of immanence and transcendence,’ yet such a description lacks specificity, cries out for explanation. In response then … It seems to me that the numinous, expressed more fully as the
mysterium tremendum et fascinans, both embodies and posits the terrifying convergence of immanence and transcendence, or, the coming together of feminine extremes. And now to explain. The mythic femininity of immanence, its tremendously excessive materiality, physicality and corporeality, is blatant.¹ In all its blatancy, however, I think the femininity of immanence has served to
Book Title: Echoes of the Tambaran-Masculinity, history and the subject in the work of Donald F. Tuzin
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Roscoe Paul
Abstract: In the Sepik Basin of Papua New Guinea, ritual culture was dominated by the Tambaran —a male tutelary spirit that acted as a social and intellectual guardian or patron to those under its aegis as they made their way through life. To Melanesian scholarship, the cultural and psychological anthropologist, Donald F. Tuzin, was something of a Tambaran, a figure whose brilliant and fine-grained ethnographic project in the Arapesh village of Ilahita was immensely influential within and beyond New Guinea anthropology. Tuzin died in 2007, at the age of 61. In his memory, the editors of this collection commissioned a set of original and thought provoking essays from eminent and accomplished anthropologists who knew and were influenced by his work. They are echoes of the Tambaran. The anthology begins with a biographical sketch of Tuzin's life and scholarship. It is divided into four sections, each of which focuses loosely around one of his preoccupations. The first concerns warfare history, the male cult and changing masculinity, all in Melanesia. The second addresses the relationship between actor and structure. Here, the ethnographic focus momentarily shifts to the Caribbean before turning back to Papua New Guinea in essays that examine uncanny phenomena, narratives about childhood and messianic promises. The third part goes on to offer comparative and psychoanalytic perspectives on the subject in Fiji, Bali, the Amazon as well as Melanesia. Appropriately, the last section concludes with essays on Tuzin's fieldwork style and his distinctive authorial voice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hbjj
3. ʹSkirts–Money–Masksʹ, and Other Chains of Masculine Signification in Post-Colonial Papua New Guinea from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Lipset David
Abstract: With revision, the Lacanian phallus—
qua concept of the subject in culture as based on a void of meaning—might also serve as a starting point for this chapter. Here, however, I do not intend to theorise the emptiness of the subject in an abstract, psychoanalytic sense. Instead, my conceptual and empirical focus is on a particular group of rural, post-colonial men. Specifically, this chapter concerns shifting signifiers of masculinity in the Sepik region in Melanesia, this being the issue and region that so vexed Tuzin (1997) in his magisterial account of the demise of the male cult in Ilahita
6. Comparison, Individualism and ʹInteractionalismʹ in the Work of Donald F. Tuzin from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Gardner Don
Abstract: Don Tuzin left a magnificent corpus of work on the Ilahita Arapesh, one that presents a compelling analysis of two remarkable transitions in the history of a people. His work is also striking because of the sheer range of issues on which he focused his fine analytical eye; his work might focus on the emotions, dispositions and moral conflicts of particular persons or categories thereof (specific elders, initiands, or Christians, men, women) as readily as on the structural or historically contingent circumstances within which agents must act, and which tend to produce grand historical transformations. There are also significant essays
9. Klein in Bali and Ilahita: from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Stephen Michele
Abstract: Although many anthropologists would not even accept the existence of a deep unconscious such as outlined by psychoanalytic theory of various persuasions, the ethnographic data often provide examples of cultural constructs that seem such vivid realisations of themes described in psychoanalytic practice that one can only stand amazed. If there is no ʹunconsciousʹ, from whence do these extraordinary visions emerge and how is it they have such constancy across cultures? In this chapter, I employ Melanie Kleinʹs work on gender, fantasy and psychosocial development as a framework for comparing Balinese and Ilahita imaginings of the feminine and the maternal.
11. The Torments of Initiation and the Question of Resistance from:
Echoes of the Tambaran
Author(s) Gregor Thomas A.
Abstract: In 1982 Donald Tuzin published a short but trenchant article titled, ʹRitual Violence Among the Arapesh: The Dynamics of Moral and Religious Uncertaintyʹ. The work probes a question of broad human significance. The Ilahita Arapesh, in the course of their long initiatory cycles, terrorised their children and subjected them to excruciating ordeals. Tuzin self-consciously ascribes the word ʹbrutalʹ to these acts, partly because many of the Ilahita themselves so saw them, but also because we, if we are honest with ourselves, do so as well. Ilahita ritual (which no longer takes place) was particularly disturbing in that it was at
INTRODUCTION from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) PÉREZ-GÓMEZ ALBERTO
Abstract: Why is it that, in the last decade of our millennium, the design professions have suddenly decided to focus on the question of ethics and to devote numerous conferences to this topic? To state that the common good must a primary concern in architecture may sound hollow in the context of a contemporary practice determined by economic or political forces. It may even be deemed downright problematic by some of the poststructuralist philosophers who claim that the old humanist values must be deconstructed – a position that has had a significant impact on North American architecture.
QUE PEUT ÊTRE OU FAIRE L’ÉTHIQUE EN ARCHITECTURE? from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) SOSOE LUKAS K.
Abstract: « Que peut être la religion d’un peuple éclairé? », se demandait Hegel. On peut actualiser la question et se demander: que peut être l’éthique et, surtout, que peut être l’éthique appliquée dans une société moderne à l’âge post-moderne? Plus précisément, que peut être une éthique appliquée à un domaine tel que l’architecture, quelle qu’en soit la définition. Selon Melvin Charney, l’architecture est une réalité imaginaire qui dit et quelquefois suggère le non-dit, dont les racines théoriques se retrouvent aussi bien dans les sciences sociales que dans les sciences économiques, mais qui demeure également un art dont la longue histoire
ETHICS AND ARCHITECTS: from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) SOMERVILLE MARGARET A.
Abstract: It is often interesting to free-associate about the titles chosen for conferences. My free association about the title of this conference – “Architecture, Ethics and Technology: An Interdisciplinary Symposium” – led me to wonder whether ethics was perhaps the ham in the sandwich, squeezed perfectly flat by architecture, on the one side, and technology, on the other. This image, in turn, brought to mind what has been called a “thin” or minimalist concept of ethics. According to this concept, persons act ethically as long as they do not breach the law, and the law should enshrine only those requirements on
MASTER PLAN FOR THE OLD PORT OF MONTREAL from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) ROSE PETER
Abstract: In this paper I will present the thoughts, the ideas, of a practising architect rather than those of a theoretician or an architectural historian, concerning a project on which I have worked for several years – the design of a master plan for the Vieux Port de Montréal.¹
POUR QUE LA VIE AIT LIEU (FRAGMENTS) from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) MADEC PHILIPPE
Abstract: Nos pères, eux, étaient persuadés de trouver les fondements de l’architecture dans l’activité de l’architecte, dans le projet et ses effets: les textes, les dessins et les bâtiments.
ARCHITECTURE VIRTUELLE ET INFOGRAPHIE – QUELQUES QUESTIONS POSÉES À L’ARCHITECTURE from:
Architecture, Ethics, and Technology
Author(s) HARDENNE JEAN-PIERRE
Abstract: Cette évolution a débuté, voilà bientôt vingt ans, par la prise en charge des différents actes techniques du chantier, tels le tracé des plans d’exécution,
Book Title: Comics and Narration- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Miller Ann
Abstract: This book is the follow-up to Thierry Groensteen's ground-breaking
The System of Comics, in which the leading French-language comics theorist set out to investigate how the medium functions, introducing the principle of iconic solidarity, and showing the systems that underlie the articulation between panels at three levels: page layout, linear sequence, and nonsequential links woven through the comic book as a whole. He now develops that analysis further, using examples from a very wide range of comics, including the work of American artists such as Chris Ware and Robert Crumb. He tests out his theoretical framework by bringing it up against cases that challenge it, such as abstract comics, digital comics and sh?jo manga, and offers insightful reflections on these innovations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvcv
TRANSLATOR’S FOREWORD from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: Bande dessinée et narration: Système de la bande dessinée 2,¹ published in the original French in 2011, is the long-awaited follow-up to Thierry Groensteen’s seminalSystème de la bande dessinée, written in 1999,² in which he embarked on the project of defining the fundamental resources deployed by comics for the production of meaning and aesthetic effects. By making underlying systems visible, Groensteen was able to shed light on the spatial operations of layout and articulation that conditioned the activity of the reader. He now builds on and expands that analysis, refining the concepts set out inSystème 1by bringing
CHAPTER ONE Comics and the Test of Abstraction from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: In that first volume, I did in fact refuse to give a complete and analytical definition of comics, confining myself to the observation that a comic consists necessarily of a finite collection of separate and interdependent iconic elements. In more recent texts, I have taken to quoting
CHAPTER TWO New Insights into Sequentiality from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: Several authors who have tried to apply the concepts defined in
System 1to a particular comic or to a larger corpus have taken me to task for the fact that they could not find in it adequate tools to describe certain specific mechanisms that had caught their attention. This does not surprise me asSystem 1was never intended to be a textbook offering a ready-to-use analytical grid. And neither did it offer a research methodology. Its goal was to interrogate the basic principles of the language of the medium, to identify its functions, to study its articulations, at
CHAPTER FOUR An Extension of Some Theoretical Propositions from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: In
System 1, I devoted myself at some length to the description and examination of the basic units of comics language: the balloon, the panel, the strip, and the page, analyzing how they are deployed and interact with each other; the actualization of these units in the spaces, frames and sites of the album makes up what I have proposed to call a spatio-topical system. When I drew out those observations, I claimed only that they applied to comics, more specifically to Western comics, and to comics appearing in the sole format that we were familiar with at that time,
CHAPTER SIX The Subjectivity of the Character from:
Comics and Narration
Abstract: We usually describe as “behaviorist” a narrative in which the knowledge that we can have of characters is limited to their actions and their words and in which we are denied access to their thoughts and feelings. As the Finnish researcher Mikkonen has observed, this is still the most common type of narrative in comics—and he cites
TintinandCorto Malteseas examples.¹ We should not forget, though, that words (in the form of direct speech) emphasized by the expressivity of the body are already, in themselves, a privileged means of access to the subjectivity of a character, be
Book Title: Desi Divas-Political Activism in South Asian American Cultural Performances
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Garlough Christine L.
Abstract: Case study chapters address the relatively unknown history of South Asian American rhetorical performances from the early 1800s to the present. Avant-garde feminist performances by the Post Natyam dance collective appropriate women's folk practices and Hindu goddess figures make rhetorical claims about hate crimes against South Asian Americans after 9/11. In
Yoni ki Bat(a South Asian American version ofThe Vagina Monologues) a progressive performer transforms aspects of the Mahabharata narrative to address issues of sexual violence, such as incest and rape. Throughout the volume, Garlough argues that these performers rely on calls for acknowledgment that intertwine calls for justice and care. That is, they embed their testimony in traditional cultural forms to invite interest, reflection, and connection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt24hvm7
Chapter Two Performing South Asian American Histories from:
Desi Divas
Abstract: One hundred years separate these evocations of flags and founding fathers in the name of minority exclusion.¹ Taken together, however, they reveal a good deal about the central dilemmas facing South Asian American community members today. In both moments, South Asian Americans have found themselves characterized as perpetual strangers at the door of American democracy. By raising the specter of the Other and promising protection from their fearsome “foreignness,” these appeals to the majority do not recognize the legitimacy of South Asians as citizens or neighbors. This long history of discrimination against South Asian Americans, firmly rooted in colonialism and
Chapter Four A Future in Relation to the Other from:
Desi Divas
Abstract: As I write this, the tenth anniversary of 9/11 is upon us. In the decade following the terrorist attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon, much has changed in the United States, particularly for South Asian Americans. As Divakaruni’s quote suggests, while South Asian American community members mourned the terrible events, for many their horror was mixed with fear. In this crisis, an unfortunate number of South Asian Americans became the target of verbal insults and physical threats from both strangers and neighbors, sometimes despite lifetimes spent participating in civic activities, building local relationships, or creating community connections.
Chapter Five Cultural Activism and Sexuality in Feminist Performance from:
Desi Divas
Abstract: In the United States today, consumer culture often fuels the multicultural attraction to everyday “ethnic” performances. Nose rings, mendhi tattoos, belly chains, and bindis—these traditional fashions associated with South Asian American women can now be found in most mainstream shopping centers as stylish accessories. Over the years, traditional styles from Asia have become popular in international fashion. Most recently, in large public venues, celebrities like Madonna or Katy Perry showcase these appropriated ethnic markers of identity to position themselves as “citizens of the world.”
Chapter Six Intertwining Folklore and Rhetoric: from:
Desi Divas
Abstract: As part of the human condition, innumerable manifestations of violence challenge us during the course of our lives. Around the world, people struggle daily to respond with dignity as they are subjected to terrorist acts, war crimes, racist speeches in public forums, physical and sexual abuse in the home, or deafening silence in response to requests for acknowledgment. Diverse as they are, these forms are undeniably interrelated. As I argued in the initial chapters of this book, hate speech performed in everyday contexts has often made exceptional violence—like religious genocide—appear reasoned or just (Das 2007). At the same
Book Title: Postmodernism and Cultural Identities-Conflicts and Coexistence
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Nemoianu Virgil
Abstract: Virgil Nemoianu's book starts from the assumption that, whether we like it or not, we live in a postmodern environment, one characterized by turbulence, fluidity, relativity, commotion, uncertainty, and lightning-fast communication and change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284vhr
III Leibniz, Vico, and Alternative Modernities from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: The present chapter begins the longer series of actual, concrete examples of
continuity and of stability (potential or real) in recent historical evolution. Together, these chapters will, it is to be hoped, convince the reader that the postmodernist existential mode is (1) not absolute and (2) able to function and survive precisely thanks to the counteracting forces that arise (again: potentially or in actuality) inside and alongside it. Reading the Enlightenment project as a broad and generous range of options, some chosen, some not, is a very useful procedure. It provides us with a better perspective and with a more
XVI The Argument from Defeat from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: I will now introduce another relevant fact, one that will sometimes overlap with, but, I am sure, also strengthen the points I have already made. To repeat, aesthetic imagination and literature especially have been regarded with doubt, in fact with hostility, by all kinds of regimes and systems over the centuries, from Mediterranean antiquity and the Middle Ages to “bourgeois” and democratic states, not excluding self-censorship and “political correctness,” and certainly the great totalitarian systems of the twentieth century. All were severe in their attempt to eradicate or at least to marginalize aesthetic imagination and to rein in literature. Why
XVIII Reinventing Romanticism or Nineteenth-Century Kitsch? from:
Postmodernism and Cultural Identities
Abstract: Already in several of my writings¹ I have pointed out that the only reasonable way in which we can understand romanticism is a
dynamic one, that is, romanticism as a succession of waves. Romanticism per se, seen strictly and narrowly, was a brief, explosive, and unstable movement. However, its subsequent impact has been nothing short of
Book Title: Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics-Issues and Challenges for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): Verstraeten Johan
Abstract: Can writings of the church fathers related to the field of social ethics be of value to contemporary discussions on the topic? In addressing this question, the authors of this book discuss the exciting challenges that scholars of both early Christianity and contemporary Catholic social thought face regarding the interaction of historical sources and present issues.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt284w7b
2. Challenges in Approaching Patristic Texts from the Perspective of Contemporary Catholic Social Teaching from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Allen Pauline
Abstract: From a twenty-first century perspective, whether one reads patristic socioethical texts in the original or in translation, there are difficulties, pitfalls, and caveats. One of the most important facets to take into consideration when reading these texts is their genre. A homily delivered live in the ancient Church, for example, would be a public event, often taking account of audience reaction and of the circumstances behind its delivery (the presence of catechumens, newly baptized, imperial family; commemoration of local saints; recent natural disasters, and so on). Typically homilies on socio-ethical themes were delivered during the periods of fasting and in
6. Out of the Fitting Room: from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Holman Susan R.
Abstract: Unlike the heterogeneity of Protestant social action rhetoric and the intentional mystery of Orthodox theologies, Catholic social teaching is very systematic. It may not be amiss, therefore, in
9. Social Justice in Lactantius’s from:
Reading Patristic Texts on Social Ethics
Author(s) Hughson Thomas
Abstract: This inquiry interprets a fourth-century Church Father’s main work in reference to social justice, a characteristic theme in Catholic social thought and Catholic social teaching.¹ The overall perspective is postcritical in the sense of probing for a relation between an ancient text and a modern or postmodern context in Church and world. That approach does not derogate from critical study, on which it relies, though a postcritical purpose inherently assumes that readers from later contexts can bring new questions to the text as well as submit to its otherness. Moving from critical exegesis of a biblical passage to preaching an
2 THE PURPOSE OF COMEDY from:
Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: A tragedy is a mimesis of action that is serious, complete, and has magnitude; in language with pleasurable accessories, each brought in in various parts; in a dramatic, not narrative form; with incidents
3 THE EXEMPLARY COMIC FICTION: from:
Love Song for the Life of the Mind
Abstract: Having provided an answer to the question of
what comedy does, we may now attempt a more exacting answer to the question of how comedy effects a catharsis of desire (eros) and sympathy. Aristotle is clear in the extant Poetics that plot is that through which the play does its work—it is the play’s archē and psuchē. It is particularly through recognitions and peripeties that tragic plots are made most emotionally effective, and this is especially so when they occur together (1450a32–34). Since all drama is a mimesis of action, and plot is the unitary action of the
Chapter One Rhetoric before “Rhetoric” from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: From the time of the Homeric poems, which are the first literary Greek texts, the spoken word and persuasion occupy an important place. I. J. F. de Jong has calculated that in the
Iliad, speeches in direct discourse, by number of verses, represent 45 percent of the entire length of the poem. The epic, therefore, joins narrative and speech in an almost equal partnership by having the characters whose adventures it relates speak in a direct manner. Even in the midst of battles and dangers, the “winged words,” as a formulaic expression calls them, constitute an essential dimension of Homeric
Chapter Two The Sophistic Revolution from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: Antiquity typically had recourse to the idea of “first inventor”
(prōtos heuretēs) to describe the birth of different activities, arts, and techniques, in order to rationalize in some way their emergence, by attributing them to one individual’s decisive action, whether a mortal’s, a god’s, or a hero’s. Thus the invention of rhetoric was attributed either to Hermes—the god of crossroads and highways, of movement, passage, of communication in all senses of the term—or, as we have seen, to Homer, and finally to three men of the fifth century b.c., Empedokles, Korax, and Tisias.
Chapter Three The Athenian Moment from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: Very many situations, but first and foremost judicial and political settings, provided opportunities for the practice of oratory at Athens. In the courts, the parties had to plead
Chapter Four The Hellenistic Globalization from:
Rhetoric in Antiquity
Abstract: The period from the death of Alexander the Great until the emperor Augustus’s consolidation of power (323–27 b.c.) radically differs from what preceded. After the relatively brief period of Classical Greece, an expanse of three centuries unfolds, rife with sudden shifts and witness to the creation of the great Hellenistic monarchies and to Rome’s conquest of the entire Mediterranean region. After a phase of relative geographic concentration, Hellenism spreads completely throughout the ancient world and makes contact with other civilizations. States meet and confront one another, and in particular the Greek world meets Rome. All these upheavals had political,
III The Interdisciplinary from:
The Humanities in the Age of Technology
Abstract: “Interdisciplinary” is an ambiguous notion that designates an intellectual style open to serious risks, the first one being excessive or premature generalization. Knowledge advances for the most part in short steps that bring new precision to old questions. And secondly, if interdisciplinary research digs at the borders of various disciplines, chances are the practitioner will not be sufficiently competent in all of them.
VI Reading from:
The Humanities in the Age of Technology
Abstract: The questions on the criteria of rigor in the humanities can be grouped around three words: reading, understanding, and knowing, and those that refer to their practical import, around two: usefulness and value. In the analysis of reading we shall take literary texts as examples, because the literary text is more complex than those in linguistics, history, philosophy, or theology. Reading Calderón’s
La vida es sueño (Life is a Dream) we discover nuances of the phenomenon of reading that would not shine through in reading Ortega y Gasset’s essay The Dehumanization of Art. On the other hand, the conclusions about
VII Understanding from:
The Humanities in the Age of Technology
Abstract: In the preceding chapter we have tried to practice and describe the mysterious leap that leads from the first reading, which confronts the text as an ambiguous signifier, into the meaning of that text. Now we need to analyze how that outburst of meaning takes place. The observation that to read is to translate a text into its own language might come across as a joke. But to read is literally to translate a discourse that is more or less obscure (the text as a complex signifier) into one’s own discourse, in which the signifieds or meanings of the text
Introduction from:
Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: Although suffering and challenge demoralize some human beings, others cope and construct instead. Rather than grinding to a halt, certain people hurdle the obstacles or creatively maneuver around them. They even make something positive out of the negative situation. In the face of crisis, they not only survive but also thrive. Resilience capacities involve coping well with difficulty, actively resisting destructive pressures, and rebuilding positively after adversity. However, people do not exercise these capacities in equal measure. Human beings faced with similar situations end up in diverse spots. Some manage destructive life events more efficaciously. Others lose a sense of
2 Resilience Input for a Virtue-Based Philosophical Anthropology from:
Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In this chapter, I investigate further the research on protective and risk processes.¹ I interpret the insights within a classic anthropological schema (temperament and emotion, cognitional and volitional processes, and familial and social contexts).² At the same time, I employ an overlapping division that differentiates natural characteristics from religious and spiritual ones. This meta-analysis of the resilience findings inductively identifies resources that make some difference in resilience outcomes. It offers elements for a renewed philosophy of nature and philosophical anthropology.
3 Renewing Moral Theology: from:
Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: In order to contribute to the renewal of moral theology,¹ I shall critically assess, contrast, and integrate two levels of observation and reflection concerning human agency: a psychosocial resilience perspective, on the one hand, and St. Thomas Aquinas’ virtue theory and theology of character, on the other. Previously, we saw that resilience research offers anthropological insights about extreme cases of adversity, as well as more typical challenges to growth. In this chapter, I widen the focus, by addressing how these studies relate to ethical principles and moral reflection. Aquinas’ virtue anthropology and moral theology offer a qualitative vision of human
10 Conclusions: from:
Resilience and the virtue of fortitude
Abstract: The existential bridge that allows us to relate the psychosocial sciences and St. Thomas’s virtue theory is not only the reality of difficulty, but also the resourcefulness needed to overcome it, that is, the individual and social capacities to cope with difficulty, to resist destruction under hardship, and to construct something positive out of an otherwise negative situation. Both the virtue of fortitude (with its associated virtues of initiative and endurance) and resilience (as concept, phenomenon, and practice) relate to difficulty. Both fortitude and resilience contribute to a fundamentally positive perspective that counters an excessive focus on brokenness, vice, and
THREE Humanae Vitae: from:
Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: On july 29, 1968, Pope Paul VI issued his long-awaited encyclical on the question of moral means for limiting family size.¹ Humanae Vitae is a succinct text that does not offer much elaboration of the claims that it makes. Such elaboration is the work of this chapter and the next. This chapter will establish some of the foundational perspectives of natural law theory; it will consider the claim of the Church to be a teacher on moral matters and will provide an explanation of the claim that organs and their related acts have purposes. We will clear the way for
FOUR Natural Law Arguments against Contraception from:
Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: The text of Humanae Vitae provides the foundations for several arguments against contraception constructed along the lines of a natural law analysis.¹ Most of them (with the exception of version E) depend on a recognition that organs have purposes and one purpose of the genital organs is reproduction. None of the arguments considers this feature sufficient to render contraception intrinsically wrong; all develop an understanding of the conjugal act that transcends defining it as ordained simply to reproduction. The final argument given here, version F, draws greatly on what have come to be known as “personalist” values; it nonetheless remains
SEVEN Premoral Evil and Other Variations on a Theme from:
Humanae vitae, a generation later
Abstract: A generation after the issuance of Humanae Vitae, dissatisfaction with the conclusions and method of the tradition has not abated among many theologians. The focus of the debate has become fairly well defined; for the most part, theologians have concentrated their efforts on justifying a rejection of the traditional claim that some kinds of actions, apart from specifying circumstances, are intrinsically wrong, that some kinds of actions should never be freely chosen by human agents no matter what good is intended or foreseen.¹ They prefer instead to speak of “premoral,” “ontic,” or “physical” evils that cannot be morally defined apart
3. “PRAISE THE WORLD TO THE ANGEL”: from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Crooks James
Abstract: In the realm of abstract speculation that seems now to encompass all the discursive spaces of the academy—from the university senate to the faculty/student barbecue—one tends to imagine the future of philosophy either as a response to economic, technological, and ideological forces external to it or as the steadfast resistance of those forces.
4. COMING-TO-KNOW AS A WAY OF COMING-TO-BE: from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Baur Michael
Abstract: In book III, chapter 5 of the
De Anima, Aristotle introduces the distinction between poetikos nous and pathetikos nous. The former term was not used by Aristotle himself, but gained currency later among his Greek commentators.¹ In my own treatment of book III, chapter 5, I shall employ the conventional English terms for the two forms of nous—active intellect and passive intellect, respectively. I believe that it is possible to make use of such terminology without adopting as a result any distorting views concerning the nature of the two forms of nous. While Aristotle does not consider nous to
9. PERFORMING HEGEL from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Donougho Martin
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno remarks of Hegel that “for a contemporary of Humboldt it is striking how little he is concerned with language.”¹ The same could hardly be said of Adorno, who in stark contrast presents himself as the self-conscious stylist, ever alert to the subtleties of form and attitude. Yet his own practice was often to set language
against itself, to push the envelope of intelligibility, the opposite of transparent communication. And this, oddly enough, was the trait he admired above all in Hegel. For example, a few pages after the above we read: “The dialectic’s protest against language cannot
10. BEAUTY AND THE GOOD IN HEGEL’S from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Shannon Daniel E.
Abstract: Kenneth Schmitz has written on a great number of philosophical subjects, often dealing with questions of humanity and its relation to the transcendentals: being, truth, unity, beauty, and goodness. In some of his writings he has focused not just on the metaphysics, but also on the aesthetics of this relationship. For instance, in a recent essay, “The Lustrous Power of Beauty,” he holds that “To claim that being is itself beautiful is a statement about the fundamental character of reality. It is an affirmation of the positive character of existence” (“Lustrous,” 237).¹ Later in the same lecture, he ties the
12. SCIENCE AND THE SHAPING OF MODERNITY: from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Dougherty Jude P.
Abstract: Cultural historians necessarily deal in broad generalizations. Whatever is affirmed of a period, a people, or a nation, no matter how well-grounded by factual study and reflection, is subject to qualification. Exceptions to broad characterizations may always be found without mitigating the value of the broader insight. We grasp something when an author refers to the Greeks, to Roman civilization, to the Hellenic period, to Christendom, to the Benedictines, to the Renaissance, or to the Enlightenment. These designations, all generalizations formed by an examination of a host of particulars, indeed refer to something intelligible, something quite apart from the mind.¹
13. SCHELER ON THE ESSENCE OF CHRISTIAN RELIGIOUS CONSCIOUSNESS from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Dahlstrom Daniel O.
Abstract: One of Kenneth Schmitz’s major and undoubtedly lasting accomplishments is his demonstration of the distinctive contribution made by Karol Wojtyla to philosophy. In Schmitz’s masterful expositions, Wojtyla’s philosophical project comes alive as an effort to understand action phenomenologically and realistically, as something that proceeds from and reveals, not consciousness, but the whole person “as a being among other beings.”¹ In this connection, among other things, Schmitz corrects a common misunderstanding of the extent of Wojtyla’s philosophical debt to Scheler’s thought. To be sure, Wojtyla plainly acknowledges the importance to him of both Scheler’s critique of Kant’s ethics and its basis
18. HUMAN NATURE, CULTURE, AND THE DIALOGICAL IMPERATIVE from:
Person, Being, and History
Author(s) Wood Robert E.
Abstract: Kenneth Schmitz is my teacher. His courses on existentialism, on modern philosophy, and on Hegel and Nietzsche had a decisive impact on my own subsequent approach to philosophy. Existentialism and its background in phenomenology, as well as both Nietzsche and Hegel, continue to be focal points in my own studies. His interest in Paul Weiss led me to Weiss’s systematic approach to philosophy; his interest in the aesthetics of Hans Urs von Balthasar led me to a comprehensive review of
The Glory of the Lord that was linked to my own writings on aesthetics.¹
GREGORY OF NAZIANZUS: from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Beeley Christopher A.
Abstract: The past forty years have seen nothing short of a revolution in the study of St. Gregory of Nazianzus. Long honored with the title “the Theologian,” conferred by the Council of Chalcedon in 451, Gregory is now widely recognized as the veritable architect of Eastern Orthodox Christianity, a source of great importance for the historiography of late antique and early medieval Christianity, a reservoir of information about classical antiquity, and a major theologian and literary figure in his own right. As he attracts new scholarship in several academic disciplines, Gregory Nazianzen is rapidly emerging as a subject of historical and
2. Illumined from All Sides by the Trinity: from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Harrison Verna E. F.
Abstract: In recent studies Michel Barnes and Lewis Ayres have drawn attention to a broad consensus among fourth-century defenders of Nicaea, in particular the Cappadocians and Augustine. They have highlighted how these theologians argue for the full divinity of the Son and the Holy Spirit and their equality with the Father on the grounds that the activity of the three persons in the created world is one, and hence their nature is one. Thus, when Scripture speaks of one of them acting, the other two must be present and active, too, and together they produce a single activity.¹ Ayres concludes from
3. Gregory of Nazianzus and Biblical Interpretation from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Fulford Ben
Abstract: Although sought after as a teacher of Scripture in his own day, Gregory of Nazianzus does not conform to our expectations of patristic exegesis and has attracted relatively little sustained attention as a biblical interpreter.¹ We have no formal hermeneutical treatise, no commentaries, and no proper exegetical homilies extant from him.² In what sense, then, if any might Gregory merit attention as a biblical interpreter? In what follows I do not attempt to examine every angle of Gregory’s work as a biblical interpreter, but focus on three in particular to help answer this question.³ First, Gregory carried forward an Origenian
6. Gregory of Nazianzus, Montanism, and the Holy Spirit from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Tabbernee William
Abstract: As is well known, Gregory of Nazianzus (ca. 329–390) arrived in Constantinople in September 379 to commence a theological preaching and teaching mission. His mission had as its aim the advancement of Nicene orthodoxy in the city and the establishment of a viable unity among the members of the then current theological factions, who strongly disagreed about various aspects of the way in which the Trinity should be defined and understood. What is not so well known is that Gregory, as part of his rhetorical strategy, made use of polemical references to Montanus (d. ca. 175) and Montanists.¹ Gregory
12. On the “Play” of Divine Providence in Gregory Nazianzen and Maximus the Confessor from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Blowers Paul M.
Abstract: Maximus the Confessor’s
Ambigua ad Joannem, addressed to Bishop John of Cyzicus (Anatolia), broaches perplexing passages in the writings of Gregory Nazianzen that Maximus clarifies in extensive expositions, often by giving Gregory’s words fresh nuances. The vulnerability of Gregory to misinterpretation raises the stakes all the more, as observable in Maximus’ vigorous attack on Origenists in the Ambigua ad Joannem.¹ But for Maximus, as bad a fate would be that Gregory’s words and images would fail to register their full impact and richness.
13. Gregory the Theologian, Constantine the Philosopher, and Byzantine Missions to the Slavs from:
Re-Reading Gregory of Nazianzus
Author(s) Sterk Andrea
Abstract: As a young pupil in Thessalonica, Constantine the Philosopher, better known as St. Cyril, apostle to the Slavs, drew the sign of the cross on his wall and penned this eulogy to his lifelong patron and mentor. Gregory Nazianzen’s influence in Byzantine literature is well attested,¹ and the translation and importance of his writings in the Slavic world have also received attention.² Less explored and more puzzling in light of Gregory’s own career, however, is the connection in the latter half of the ninth century between Gregory and the fresh burst of missionary activity in this era. On several levels
CHAPTER 3 Absolute’s Freedom from:
Spirit's Gift
Abstract: To enter into the question of man’s existence is to immerse oneself in the mystery of the absolute itself. Every step of Bruaire’s systematic anthropology reveals the impossibility of giving a satisfactory account of who man is if one’s understanding of the absolute is inadequate.¹ Although from his very first works Bruaire contends that only a determinate absolute is able to make reason out of man’s existence, his explication of what it means for God to be both “absolute” and “determinate” undergoes a remarkable evolution. Up until the publication of For Metaphysics in 1980, Bruaire’s concept of God as determinate
CHAPTER 6 Altogether Gift: from:
Spirit's Gift
Abstract: The ontological examination of being as gift undertaken so far appears to be too anthropologically burdened to allow for a concept of absolute gift. In fact, if being-gift is being-given and being-in-debt, then it does not seem possible to formulate a concept of gift which, while remaining one, is nonetheless able to embrace the similarities and the differences between the being-given proper, on the one hand, to the human spirit and, on the other, to absolute spirit. Nevertheless, only if the latter is gift can Bruaire validly argue that gift is the metaphysical name for being—and not merely its
[PART ONE Introduction] from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Abstract: (1) While many wars can and should be stopped, preferably before their inception, war is and remains an inescapable fact in the world. The option of using armed force can never be disregarded once and for all.
1 Thinking Morally about War in the Middle Ages and Today from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) JOHNSON JAMES TURNER
Abstract: Do medieval views of war have any relevance today? There are clearly enormous differences between life in the Middle Ages and life today, differences in social relationships, forms of political order, assumptions about the natural and supernatural world, available technology, and so on, which shaped warfare as they did every other aspect of everyday life. Since historical distance tends to present a somewhat abstracted and idealized picture of medieval warfare, the differences may loom as even more distinctive, with an image of knights in armor colliding on the field of battle contrasted to various models of contemporary warfare: ethnically or
2 Taming Warriors in Classical and Early Medieval Political Theory from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) VON HEYKING JOHN
Abstract: Medieval political theory is often accused of being arcane and incapable of speaking to contemporary political problems. This appearance seems especially true when it comes to contemporary thinking on war: what do the likes of Tertullian, Origen, Ambrose, and others have to say about nuclear weapons, apocalyptic terrorists, dictators, and tribal genocide in postcolonial Africa? In fact, medieval political theory has a lot to say about these issues, and its voice is actually being heard in public discourse. For example, one can see the pacifistic tradition of Tertullian and Origen in the stance against war articulated by the American Catholic
4 Just War, Schism, and Peace in St. Augustine from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) GRAY PHILLIP W.
Abstract: In the scholarly literature on Augustine’s writings, few topics have instigated more discussion or debate than his belief about the use of coercion against schismatics and heretics. Many scholars see his choice to use coercion against the Donatists as a deviation from his usual way of thinking. For instance, as Ernest Fortin wrote about the matter: “The peculiar intractability of Donatists, their continued agitating, and the methods of terrorism to which they frequently resorted, had made of them a persistent threat not only to the religious unity but to the social stability of the North African provinces. Reluctantly and only
6 Poets and Politics: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) FORHAN KATE L.
Abstract: During the Middle Ages, traditions of blood feud, desires for conquest and power, and even the chivalric code of honor intensified the frequency and legitimacy of war. Yet war as an inescapable fact of life does not diminish the desire for peace; in fact it may intensify our human sense of its value. Because conflict was so terribly damaging to land and lives in medieval Europe, ensuring peace often meant controlling war, or at least some of the negative and destructive by-products of the seemingly interminable hostilities. Consequently, the desire for peace in the Middle Ages was intimately related to
[PART TWO Introduction] from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Abstract: THE TERRORIST ATTACKS of september 11, 2001, have given rise to much speculation about their implications for the ethics of war. Surely, the political map as well as the rhetoric about armed force seem to have undergone a radical transformation since the day when the Twin Towers fell and the Pentagon was attacked. The long-term implications of 9/11 are, however, much harder to measure. In this respect, we would do well to remember the words of former Chinese premier Zhou Enlai who, when asked about the impact of the French Revolution, answered, “It is too soon to say.”
9 Protecting the Natural Environment in Wartime: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) SYSE HENRIK
Abstract: What protection does the natural environment merit in wartime? It was in the aftermath of the Vietnam War of 1961–75 that this question came into focus. Wars have always brought destruction in their wake; and the twentieth century was by no means the first to show concern for the effects of armed conflict on our natural surroundings. However, the Vietnam War does “stand out in modern history as one in which intentional anti-environmental actions were a major component of the strategy and tactics of one of the adversaries, one in which such actions were systematically carried out for many
11 Ethical Uncertainties of Nationalism from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) SMITH DAN
Abstract: The nature of nationalist movements and how to address them became key issues of world politics with the end of the cold war in the three-year period 1989 to 1991, and have remained so through the 1990s and into the new century. They are important issues both for social science theory and for practical politics. Among the variety of themes encompassed by the term
nationalism, one that continues to require discussion is the ethical dimension. The language of nationalism is a language of rights and duties, which is an ethical discourse, yet it is often used to justify and encourage
13 Defining and Delivering Justice: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) MEERNIK JAMES
Abstract: Paradoxically, the twentieth century witnessed both the bloodiest and most horrific carnage in the history of humankind and the first global attempts to hold those responsible for the violence accountable. From these unjust wars came a dawning sense that a just peace was necessary to prevent their recurrence and right the scales of injustice. But whereas in the past the victors would apportion blame to other states to redress wrongs and balance the scales of power, now their leaders came to realize that neither governments as abstract entities nor the “people” in whose name they committed such atrocities should be
15 Genocide: from:
Ethics, Nationalism, and Just War
Author(s) VETLESEN ARNE JOHAN
Abstract: After affirming that genocide is a crime under international law whether committed in time of peace or war, the 1948 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide defines genocide as “any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnic, racial or religious group, as such: killing members of the group; causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group; deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part; imposing measures intended to prevent births
CHAPTER TWO Kant’s Conception of General Logic from:
Necessity and Possibility
Abstract: Given his preoccupation with logic in the
Critique of Pure Reason, it is an understandable hope that Kant might use the term “logic” in a clear-cut, univocal fashion throughout the text. Unfortunately, such a hope is mere fantasy; Kant uses the term in a bewildering variety of ways, at times making it close to impossible to determine whether he is referring to (among others) general logic, transcendental logic, transcendental analytic, a “special” logic relative to a specific science, a “natural” logic, a logic intended for the “learned” (Gelehrter), some hybrid of these logics, or even some still more abstract notion
CHAPTER 5 Conclusion from:
The One, the Many, and the Trinity
Abstract: Process thought appeared as a reconstruction of the perennial task of systematically addressing the ever-present ultimate limit questions of the great philosophical and religious traditions, but in a way that seriously reckons with the significant theoretical and practical developments
Book Title: A Sacred Kingdom-bishops and the rise of Frankish kingship, 300-850
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Author(s): MOORE MICHAEL EDWARD
Abstract: Drawing on the records of nearly 100 bishops' councils spanning the centuries, alongside royal law, edicts, and capitularies of the same period, this study details how royal law and the very character of kingship among the Franks were profoundly affected by episcopal traditions of law and social order.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2851kc
INTRODUCTION from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: This book is an examination of the interaction between bishops and kings from the Gallic period of the fourth century to the breakup of the Carolingian Empire in about 850. We will see that kings and bishops powerfully influenced one another, and that the character of kingship was transformed in the course of the creation of the Carolingian Empire by the ideas, law, and ritual activities of bishops. Indeed, the building of the Empire and the sense of religious mission that inspired it can, to a significant extent, be attributed to the royal adoption of an episcopal platform. Royal power
1 GOVERNING THE PEOPLE OF GOD from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: The ensuing chapter comprises an overview of key aspects of episcopal public life, legal activity, and governance. The social stature of bishops and the social doctrine of episcopal councils in Gaul were crafted during the fourth century, a period corresponding to what is customarily termed the Gallican period of episcopal law (314–506 AD). During this period, the political world of Gaul was transformed as the late imperial world of Rome gave way to newly dominant tribal kingdoms, most notably the Visigoths, Ostrogoths, Franks, and Burgundians. In the late Roman world, bishops served in the important role of mediating between
2 THE SPIRIT OF THE GALLICAN COUNCILS from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: Delicate, ancient patterns of life, thought, and public activity took enduring form in the opalescent, hard shell of law. The meaning and function of ecclesiastical law and the legal authority of bishops were developed in councils of the fourth century and afterward. This chapter offers an approach to the Gallic councils, with their ancient legacy of law and aristocratic activity. The legal activity of bishops of the late Roman Empire contained new elements, but in other regards connected the bishops to ancient structures of law and aristocratic cultural values. The lives of these bishops in the cities of southern imperial
5 OCCUPATION OF THE CENTER from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: This chapter offers an interpretation of Frankish liturgy in the Merovingian and early Carolingian period as a poetical and religious achievement coherent with the legal and political activities of bishops. The history of liturgy moves at a glacial pace, with changes of rituals or garments recorded only seldom and subtly over the centuries. Like episcopal law, liturgy also provided a deep connection of the Frankish bishops to the ancient past of the church. Liturgy involved bishops in a unique theatre of rituals and gestures repeated over many centuries. As in episcopal law, emphasis was laid on the duplication of antiquity.
6 MISSIONARY WAR AND REFORM OF KINGSHIP from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: This chapter describes the mobilization of episcopal power and ideology in the Carolingian seizure of power. Episcopal social doctrines embedded in law and liturgy were developed in a missionary theory of power that called for the use of force in pagan regions, especially to the east. The missionary bishop Boniface, and bishops established and influenced by him, shaped a new ideology of royal power based around the theme of a conflict with paganism. Boniface’s mission and the letters recording his activities served as the preamble for ambitious programs of reform. The most highly placed bishops were seemingly aware of the
8 A KINGDOM OF THE FAITHFUL from:
A Sacred Kingdom
Abstract: With the reign of Louis the Pious, the religious ideal of kingship and the vision of the Frankish empire as a sacred kingdom reached a radical high point—with ambiguous results, however, in the period of civil wars that clouded the last years of Louis’s rule. The governing elites, both the warrior nobility and the bishops themselves, accepted the hieratic vision of a sacred kingdom and the holy purposes of the Carolingian state, a fact that embittered every conflict. Just as “mirrors of bishops” had long ago devised the model of an ideal bishop, so now “mirrors of princes” were
2 Josef Pieper in the Context of Modern Philosophy from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Malsbary Gerald
Abstract: Josef pieper belongs to that small class of modern philosophers who took the political and moral catastrophe of the past century as a challenge for their own thought and action. Although until now his work has left only a few traces in the theoretical discourse of academic circles, its effect on the life and thought of countless students and readers has been much greater.¹ While Pieper rather extensively described the historical context of his career in his autobiographical works, he let fall only a few hints here and there about the more technical philosophical context of his writing.² The following
8 The Twofold Discipleship of the Philosopher: from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Schumacher Michele M.
Abstract: At the time of his first
doctor honoris causa, conferred by the theology faculty of the University of Munich in 1964, Josef Pieper strongly objected to the “error invicibilis” of those who recognized him as a theologian under the pretext that he considered pre-philosophical data in his philosophical act. Declaring his intention to “attack a notion of philosophy which rejects the grandeur of its own origin,”¹ he proposed a rediscovery of the concept of philosophy as presented by the Western tradition. His reflection in the aftermath of the Second World War is radically opposed to Barthian thought, for which the
9 Josef Pieper on the Truth of All things and the World’s True Face from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Cuddeback Matthew
Abstract: The subject of the “truth of things” had continued to ferment within me all this time [during World War II]. Above all, it gradually became clear to me that the old saying
omne ens est verum is by no means a merely abstract doctrine of scholastic metaphysics but an utterly real and relevant statement about the nature of man.²
10 The Platonic Inspiration of Pieper’s Philosophy from:
A cosmopolitan hermit
Author(s) Franck Juan F.
Abstract: Together with Aristotle, Augustine, and Thomas, Plato is for Josef Pieper one of the four greatest Western thinkers. Reference to the Athenian philosopher becomes more frequent in his mature works. Whereas in his first four volumes on the virtues—which date from 1934 through 1939 and are mainly conceived as a philosophical actualization of Aquinas’s thought—Plato is not quoted,¹ the other three—dating from the fifties, sixties, and seventies—show an increasing assimilation of basic Platonic theses.² This constitutes an important enrichment in Pieper’s philosophical itinerary. Without abandoning Thomas, Pieper sees in Plato a source of insights for illuminating
Introduction from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: The origins of the
sensus fidelium lie in the origins of the church. The first disciples’ encounters with Jesus begin a process of interpreting his teaching, his actions, and his identity, but there is nevertheless a certain misunderstanding of him during his pre-Easter ministry. However, after his death and resurrection, and with the coming of the Holy Spirit, full Christian faith in him begins. Now, from the new perspective of Easter, and with a sense of being guided in their understanding and interpretation by a special gift from the Holy Spirit, the believing disciples of the Crucified and Risen One
CHAPTER 6 The Inspiration of Scripture from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose, as an explanatory model, that the continuous interpretative and evaluative activity of the
sensus fidei/fidelium throughout the production, canonical selection, and ongoing reception/traditioning of the set canonical text constitutes its inspiration by the Holy Spirit. We have already seen how “inspiration” was not necessarily an explicit reason/criterion for inclusion of works in the canon, and that, in patristic times, there was a presumption regarding the inspiration of many writings circulating in local communities. Once works achieve canonical status, it is then that the notion of inspiration emerges, later in church history, as one way of
CHAPTER 9
from:
The Eyes of Faith
Abstract: Having explored the
sensus fidei fidelis, we can now move to an exploration of the sensus fidei fidelium, or, more succinctly, the sensus fidelium. The twofold definition of sensus fidei fidelis likewise applies when speaking of the sensus fidei fidelium. The term can refer both to (1) a sensus or organon for the understanding, interpretation, and application of revelation, but here referring to a sensus or organon that is possessed by the whole people and is thus a corporate or ecclesial capacity, and (2) the interpretations that are the result of the interpretative activity of that organon, but here referring
2 Roman Tribunals in the Early Modern Period from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: Life, honor, and our capacity to act are all in the hands of judges: for, given that honorable conduct and charity are in short supply, violence is on the increase, as is the cupidity of men of ill will; and if judges do not defend us against them, our affairs will go badly . . . and what is more important, justice these days is never done without the help of hard cash.
4 The Theater of Justice from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: Inquisitorial procedure took firm hold, we know well, as the late Middle Ages shaded into early modern times.¹ It represented the triumph of an asymmetric model of procedure, hard on the defendant, where the judge himself, also an inquisitor, played an active role. He could start proceedings on mere shreds of evidence: a “notice of a crime” sufficed to launch a case
ex officio, that is, on the court’s initiative, in the absence of a public complaint. To start rolling, the machinery of justice relied on the reports of the police and the “reports of barber surgeons” (relationes barbitonsorum), and
6 Collaboration and Conflicts: from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: From the second half of the Cinquecento, via the confessional and other devices, the Holy Office continued to extend its surveillance over illicit activities and overt or covert “bad” practices like magic, witchcraft, and divination.¹ This oversight had a tight-knit network of officials with internal synergies, or so Rome intended and hoped. In the pope’s domains in Italy, between the sixteenth century and the eighteenth, the Inquisitions were nine in number: Bologna, Ferrara, Faenza, Rimini, Ancona, Fermo, Gubbio, Perugia, and Spoleto. Some of these went back to the Middle Ages; others had been set up later to ease surveillance over
7 Sins and Crimes from:
Papal Justice
Abstract: I have been holding those women, Pontiana and Leontia, in jail for their love magic and witchcraft—a matter of deaths, abortions, inflictions of illness, breakings of peace pacts, and impediments of sexual intercourse—and for their adoration of demons and carnal commerce with them (and also with many banished men under capital sentence) and for their other enormous excesses, as you have already seen in their abjuration before Monsignore Cefalotto. This morning they were put to death and burned. Now that it is done, justice has been served, as I hope will be understood by Our Lord [the pope]
2 Christian and Jewish Hermeneutics from:
Reading the Underthought
Abstract: How can mainstream Jewish hermeneutics make a significant contribution to the reading of Christian religious poetry? In examining this question, we will need to differentiate classical Jewish hermeneutics from the dominant hermeneutics of Western interpretive practice that has developed from its base in Christian hermeneutics. Limiting ourselves to the rabbinic and patristic periods in Judaism and Christianity (the first six centuries of the Common Era) will enable us to concentrate on the formative era of the hermeneutic approaches familiar to us today. Although our aim is to distinguish between these traditions, it is helpful, initially, to note some important similarities.
5 Reorderings from:
Reading the Underthought
Abstract: Two sonnet cycles define themselves sharply within the slim volume of Gerard Manley Hopkins’s mature poetry. The first group, the nature sonnets, was composed swiftly in Wales in 1877, immediately after “The Wreck of the Deutschland” and just before Hopkins’s ordination as a Jesuit priest. The second, labeled “the terrible sonnets” by Robert Bridges, are harder to date individually, but appear to have been written in Dublin shortly before, during, or after 1887.¹ Critics of these sonnets have nearly always adopted a diachronic reading in which sequence is an essential factor in interpretation. Rarely has any motivation other than the
Afterword, or Another Word from:
Reading the Underthought
Abstract: Throughout this book, we have been employing a notion of the performative that the work we have done enables us to further clarify. Unlike Austin, we have not assumed that a particular linguistic formulation can itself perform a specific action or determine a certain interpretation. We do not wish to imply that the language of the poems of Hopkins and Eliot, in and of itself, makes our (or anyone else’s) readings happen. Our interest has been, rather, in situating whatever transpires in the middle ground between poem and reader. Thus, our notion of the performative has more in common with
Chapter One INTRODUCTION from:
The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: In January 1944 the English Catholic historian Christopher Dawson posed what he called “the basic sociological problem of our time,” the relation of religion and mass culture.³ Writing in the midst of World War II, Dawson saw the choice facing the West as between spiritual renewal, on the one hand, and technocracy and totalitarianism, on the other: “Unless we find a way to restore the contact between the life of society and the life of the spirit our civilization will be destroyed by the forces which it has had the knowledge to create but not wisdom to control.”⁴ Dawson was
Chapter Six ALTERNATIVES from:
The Turn to Transcendence
Abstract: The previous two chapters traced the history of the practice and expression of a sense of transcendence, and the diminishment of an orientation to transcendence in recent centuries. Earlier, the third chapter gave some idea of the role of the arts in both fostering and diminishing the place of transcendence in life. This final chapter considers thinkers and movements outside the arts who have rebelled against the diminishment of transcendence and have proposed various alternatives as to how the transcendent dimension of life might be expressed today.
CHAPTER 1 Prologue from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: popular book and his unpopular diplomacy … share one philosophical core: “It always goes back to the sanctity of the human being.” … In a year when so many people lamented the decline in moral values or made excuses for bad behavior, Pope John Paul II forcefully set forth his vision of the good life and urged the world to follow it. For such rectitude—or recklessness, as his detractors would have it—he is
CHAPTER 4 Consciousness and Efficacy from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The phenomenon of human efficient causality reveals itself most completely in the conscious act of the person.¹ Thus, in
The Acting Person, Wojtyła’s analysis of human causality is preceded by his theory of consciousness. Wojtyła’s treatment of human consciousness clearly manifests his methodological and epistemological assumptions that result in his philosophical differences from classic phenomenology and modern idealism, as well as from twentieth-century neo-Thomism. But before giving a detailed account of Wojtyła’s mature theory of human efficacy, it is necessary to present the main principles of his theory of consciousness.
CHAPTER 5 Transcendence and Integration from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: Wojtyła begins his theory of self-determination with some reflections about human freedom.² The subject’s freedom is most visible in human actions
(agere) by which the person becomes morally good or morally evil. The
CHAPTER 6 Conclusions from:
Destined for Liberty
Abstract: The subject of this book, the human person as the efficient cause of his own action, locates the very center of Wojtyła’s philosophy. One reason for this is the intrinsic unity and constant interrelation of anthropology and ethics in the thought of Wojtyła. In his anthropological publications, he always analyzes the ethical implications of the anthropological theses. Correspondingly, when he writes about ethics, he is always interested in the question: “What concept of man underlies a particular ethical theory?” I have been able, therefore, to explore the fundamental themes of Wojtyła’s anthropology and ethics while at the same time safeguarding
CHAPTER TWO HEIDEGGER’S RELIGIOUS-PHILOSOPHICAL from:
The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: Heidegger began his career at Freiburg University in 1915 as an interpreter of the Catholic Middle Ages and as, to all appearances, a devout Roman Catholic: former seminarian and son of the sexton in Meßkirch. As his views on facticity and historicity developed, he became increasingly critical of “the system of Catholicism.” He came to believe that Catholicism inured itself from life through an architectonic of Scholastic concepts, a “pseudo-philosophy” with “police power” (GA60 313). Scholasticism (not identical to Catholicism in Heidegger’s mind but nonetheless inseparable from it) distorted Aristotle and compounded the forgetfulness of being already underway in antiquity
CHAPTER FIVE MYSTICISM from:
The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: “
The most extreme sharpness and depth of thought belong to genuine and great mysticism,” Heidegger wrote in 1955.¹ The insight came to him far earlier. Joseph Sauer’s course in the history of medieval mysticism, which Heidegger took in 1910–11, was the beginning of a lifelong interest in Meister Eckhart.² In the Habilitationsschrift, Heidegger spoke of mysticism as the other side of the Middle Ages, “the living heart of medieval Scholasticism” (GA1 205–6). The fragments published in GA60 under the erroneous title “The Philosophical Foundations of Medieval Mysticism [Outlines and Sketches for a Lecture, Not Held, 1918–1919]” actually
CHAPTER SIX LUTHER from:
The Early Heidegger and Medieval Philosophy
Abstract: The year 1917 was a turning point for Heidegger. Prior to 1917, he never openly questioned the Roman Catholic/Scholastic appropriation of philosophical methods into theology. After 1917, Heidegger began to regard Scholasticism as the site of the hegemony of theoretical speculative-aesthetic concepts in Christianity and the consequent forgetting of factical Christian life. The catalyst in this reversal was Heidegger’s discovery of Protestantism, Schleiermacher, Dilthey, and above all, Luther. We know Heidegger was reading Luther as early as 1909, although evidence of an intensive study of Luther only appears ten years later.¹ Heidegger came to believe that Luther had correctly identified
Chapter 1 METAPHYSICS: from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Metaphysics is the most controversial and controverted of the philosophical disciplines. I want to argue, nevertheless, that if it did not already exist in some form, then it would be necessary to invent it. For the need to think fundamentally is not incidental to the inquiring energy of the human mind. That energy has taken form as myth, meditation, and reflection among a variety of peoples of diverse cultures. In our rather abstract and articulate culture, however, fundamental thinking has taken the rational, argumentative, and conceptual form of discourse.
Chapter 7 CREATED RECEPTIVITY AND THE PHILOSOPHY OF THE CONCRETE from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel gave his phenomenological inquiries the name “Philosophy of the Concrete,”¹ and he made no bones about the distance between his philosophy and that of Thomism.² Between these philosophies there can be no question of an
approchement of tone, nor even of manner, but at most a convergence of truths shared differently. Moreover, there can be no doubt that the two philosophies differ in their relation to experience. Within the broad sense of “Christian experience,” Thomas drew upon experientia (empiria) in the narrower sense in order to derive by way of conceptual abstraction the principles of his philosophy, including
Chapter 10 IMMATERIALITY PAST AND PRESENT from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: The medieval conception of immateriality was prominent in discussions of God, man, and nature, of causality, activity, and order, of knowledge, freedom, and immortality. Yet this once noble conception seems absent from most present-day discussions of similar topics. Terms such as consciousness, subjectivity,
Existenz and Dasein, temporality, historicity, and language have taken its place, and even current talk about spirituality does not seem quite the same.
Chapter 12 PURITY OF SOUL AND IMMORTALITY from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: It is said of St. Thomas Aquinas’ teacher, St. Albert the Great, that he grew forgetful towards the end of his life and began to say mass for himself as though he were dead:
quasi defunctus est. The fact that he was one of the most learned persons of Western Europe during his lifetime did not save him from a pathetic loss of memory. The story illustrates a bitter knowledge known from time immemorial: that age may steal away one’s innermost possessions. Of course, it has always been known too that a blow upon the head in the prime of
Chapter 14 THEOLOGICAL CLEARANCES: from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: Near the beginning of the
Summa theologiae St. Thomas Aquinas presents the well-known “five ways.”¹ The quinque viae make up a single proof of the existence of God by way of five approaches: from motion concluding to the First Mover; from causative action concluding to the First Cause or Source; from contingent beings to Something that is absolutely necessary; from degrees of actual perfections in things to the Original Source of their existence and goodness; and, finally, from the regularity of processes in the world to a Creative Intelligence that implants tendencies towards order in things. At the end of
Chapter 15 GOD, BEING, AND LOVE: from:
The Texture of Being
Abstract: In keeping with the theme of
Fides et ratio, I am impelled to complete the subtitle: “New Ontological Perspectives Coming from Philosophy,” with the following: “Coming from Philosophy in its Encounter with the Proposals of Faith.” For the strict substance of the argument in the encyclical insists that nothing truly and profoundly new—it speaks of the “radicality and newness of being”—will come to philosophy except through its encounter with faith. On the contrary, it insists that reason acting as though independent from, indifferent to, or hostile to faith is not stimulated to seek ad novitatem et radicalitatem ipsius
Book Title: Mirages and Mad Beliefs-Proust the Skeptic
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Prendergast Christopher
Abstract: Marcel Proust was long the object of a cult in which the main point of reading his great novel
In Search of Lost Timewas to find, with its narrator, a redemptive epiphany in a pastry and a cup of lime-blossom tea. We now live in less confident times, in ways that place great strain on the assumptions and beliefs that made those earlier readings possible. This has led to a new manner of reading Proust, against the grain. InMirages and Mad Beliefs, Christopher Prendergast argues the case differently, with the grain, on the basis that Proust himself was prey to self-doubt and found numerous, if indirect, ways of letting us know. Prendergast traces in detail the locations and forms of a quietly nondogmatic yet insistently skeptical voice that questions the redemptive aesthetic the novel is so often taken to celebrate, bringing the reader to wonder whether that aesthetic is but another instance of the mirage or the mad belief that, in other guises, figures prominently inIn Search of Lost Time. In tracing the modalities of this self-pressuring voice, Prendergast ranges far and wide, across a multiplicity of ideas, themes, sources, and stylistic registers in Proust's literary thought and writing practice, attentive at every point to inflections of detail, in a sustained account of Proust the skeptic for the contemporary reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2854m6
Book Title: Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Gregor Shirley D.
Abstract: This volume contains the papers presented at the second biennial Information Systems Foundations ('Constructing and Criticising') Workshop, held at The Australian National University in Canberra from 16-17 July 2004. The focus of the workshop was, as for the first in the series, the foundations of Information Systems as an academic discipline. The particular emphasis was on the adequacy and completeness of theoretical underpinnings and the research methods employed. At the same time the practical nature of the applications and phenomena with which the discipline deals were kept firmly in view. The papers in this volume range from the unashamedly theoretical ('The Struggle Towards an Understanding of Theory in Information Systems') to the much more practically oriented ('A Procedural Model for Ontological Analyses'). The contents of this volume will be of interest and relevance to academics and advanced students as well as thoughtful and reflective practitioners in the Information Systems field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbj4x
1. The struggle towards an understanding of theory in information systems from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Gregor Shirley
Abstract: This paper is, logically, a precursor to an earlier paper that sets out the different interrelated types of theory that can be employed in information systems research, namely: (i) descriptive theory, (ii) theory for understanding, (iii) theory for predicting, (iv) theory for explanation and prediction, and (v) theory for design and action (Gregor, 2002). What that paper failed to do was show clearly why the distinctive nature of the information systems discipline requires a perspective on theorising all of its own. The aim of this current paper is to show clearly how ideas can be combined from some views of
2. Information systems theory as cultural capital: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hamilton Douglas
Abstract: The proposal in this paper is that the development of a prestigious grand theory in the information systems (IS) field is possible, opportune, and would be of considerable benefit to the field. ʹPrestigiousʹ is taken in this context to mean achieving a degree of renown, ideally with the public at large, but at least within the academy. While significant benefits could derive from the application of such a theory in research and practice, its primary value to the discipline would be as a resource contributing to its public image. An influential theory is a statement that its originating discipline is
5. The grounded theory method and case study data in IS research: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Fernández Walter D.
Abstract: Martin and Turner (1986, p. 141) defined grounded theory as an ʹinductive theory discovery methodology that allows the researcher to develop a theoretical account of the general features of the topic while simultaneously grounding the account in empirical observations of data.ʹ¹ In grounded theory everything is integrated; it is an extensive and systematic general methodology (independent of research paradigm) where actions and concepts can be interrelated with other actions and concepts – in grounded theory nothing happens in a vacuum (Glaser, 1978; Glaser and Strauss, 1967).
6. A hermeneutic analysis of the Denver International Airport Baggage Handling System from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Cybulski Jacob
Abstract: Although there are several reports of information systems projects that have applied hermeneutics (Boland, 1991; Klein and Myers, 1999; Myers, 1994a), there are very few publications that explain the actual hermeneutic process taken by IS (and in fact, also non-IS) researchers. What this paper strives to do is close the methodological gap and to present one potential framework for the adoption of hermeneutics in the study of information systems.
10. Strategic knowledge sharing: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Metcalfe Mike
Abstract: Centralised governance of effective knowledge sharing is very difficult in times of rapid change, especially for purposeful, information rich, socio-technical wicked systems. The lines of communication quickly become clogged, leaders suffer information overload and are unable to fully appreciate problems at the local level. Decentralisation of knowledge sharing runs the risk of causing local overload, with key information not being prioritised or depending on actors who only have experience at processing local problems. Alternatives such as ʹmiddle-outʹ (Keen, 1999) have been suggested, where strategically informed middle level actors play a coordination role between the top and bottom level actors. This
11. A unified open systems model for explaining organisational change from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hasan Helen
Abstract: We currently dwell in a turbulent environment, one in which change constantly occurs and elements in the environment are increasingly interrelated (Emery and Trist, 1971; Terreberry; 1971; Robbins, 1990). The nature of change has recently tended to be revolutionary rather than evolutionary. One possible explanation is that the progress in information and telecommunication technologies, together with the inception of the Internet as a global computer network, has made the world substantially more interconnected than ever before. This acts as a catalyst in fostering further change so that change is now the norm rather than an occasional occurrence. This poses an
12. Research as an information systems domain from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) McDonald Craig
Abstract: Information systems is a discipline that interests itself in the interaction of information technologies with human activity systems. The purpose of this paper is to examine some aspects of
research as a human activity system and the role information systems might play in it.
13. A procedural model for ontological analyses from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Indulska Marta
Abstract: As techniques for conceptual modelling, enterprise modelling, and business process modelling have proliferated over the years (e.g. Olle et al., 1991), researchers and practitioners alike have attempted to determine objective bases on which to compare, evaluate, and determine when to use these different techniques (e.g. Karam and Casselman, 1993; Gorla et al., 1995) . However, throughout the 1980s, 1990s, and into the new millennium, it has become increasingly apparent to many researchers that without a theoretical foundation on which to base the specification for these various modelling techniques, incomplete evaluative frameworks of factors, features, and facets will continue to proliferate.
14. Lessons learned from manual systems: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Lederman Reeva M.
Abstract: Theories of agency discuss the possible ways of designing complex systems that display purposeful activity. Theories of agency have been researched in several disciplines (Brooks, 1986; Agre and Chapman, 1987; Suchman, 1987; Hendriks-Jansen, 1996; Johnston and Brennan, 1996; Agre and Horswill, 1997; Clancey, 1997), where two main positions are found – which we will call the ʹdeliberativeʹ and the ʹsituationalʹ theories of agency. The two theories have quite different modes of representation and action selection. In previous papers (Johnston and Milton, 2001; Johnston and Milton, 2002a; Lederman et al., 2003; Lederman et al., 2004) we have argued that information systems
15. Conversations at the electronic frontier: from:
Information Systems Foundations: Constructing and Criticising
Author(s) Hamilton Douglas
Abstract: A new language, referred to for the purposes of this paper as the information systems business language or ISBL, is being born in the world of business. It is an artificial language (Lotman, 1990), designed to eliminate possibilities for misunderstandings in the conduct of standardised business transactions. Its primary source language is English but it incorporates information systems (IS) concepts, definitions, symbols and gestures and is therefore not a subset of English. The language has a sphere of operation restricted to interactions involving at least one autonomous IS, and is still in the very early stages of development. The development
Book Title: Negotiating the Sacred-Blasphemy and Sacrilege in a Multicultural Society
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): WHITE KEVIN
Abstract: This cross-disciplinary exploration of the role of the sacred, blasphemy and sacrilege in a multicultural society brings together philosophers, theologians, lawyers, historians, curators, anthropologists and sociologists, as well as Christian, Jewish and Islamic and secular perspectives. In bringing together different disciplinary and cultural approaches, the book provides a way of broadening our conceptions of what might count as sacred, sacrilegious and blasphemous, in moral and political terms. In addition, it provides original research data on blasphemy, sacrilege and religious tolerance from a range of disciplines. The book is presented in four sections: Section I: Religion Sacrilege and Blasphemy in Australia. Section II: Sacrilege and the Sacred Section III: The State, Religion and Tolerance Section IV: The Future: Openness and Dogmatism. The book will appeal to both those actively involved in religious negotiation and to scholars and students of religion in history, philosophy, anthropology, sociology and political science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbjjq
5. The paradox of Islam and the challenges of modernity from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Seyit Kuranda
Abstract: Islam today, it would seem, has become inflexible and intolerant towards the teachings and ideologies of the West. When in fact, its history shows that it has always been accommodating to other peoples and beliefs, especially Christianity and Judaism. Most people know something of Islam. For instance, that it is one of the three monotheisms or the Abrahamic faiths and that it has much in common with Christianity and Judaism. Yet, there is so much that we do not understand about Islam and its overall world view. Islam is centred on the notion of peace, justice and community, yet when
9. The bourgeois sacred: from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Dee Liam
Abstract: Debates over Globalisation and The War on Terror often accept that shifting agglomeration called The West as the bastion of secularism. Whether this is a progressive force of freedom and enlightenment or a profane, cold sweatshop machine, this secularism is established against an exotic Other of primal passionate faith or feudal, superstitious zealotry, depending on your position. My talk aims to examine this image of the West and to propose that the arationality associated with the sacred is not a feudal left-over, or even just a tolerated ′personal choice′. In fact I hope to show that the sacred is an
10. Sacrilege: from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Hunter Ian
Abstract: In this chapter I will be looking at sacrilege in the context of Western European religion and politics in the early modern period. I will be adopting an historical-anthropological approach, with a view to making this discussion of sacrilege comparable with those of people working in other religious and cultural settings. Moreover, there is an important sense in which the societies of early modern Western Europe were themselves multicultural, not just because most contained diverse ethnic ′nations′, but more importantly because they contained mutually hostile religious communities. In fact, ′religious cleansing′ in early modern Europe provided the prototype for later
12. Negotiating the sacred in law: from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Ridge Pauline
Abstract: Many people would be surprised to learn that they do not have unlimited power to give away their property as they choose. In fact, legal restrictions on gift giving operate upon gifts that take effect during the donor′s lifetime (
inter vivos gifts) as well as upon gifts that operate only upon the donor′s death (testamentary gifts). Some of these constraints are readily comprehensible; for example, it makes sense that the law would seek to protect donors against improper exploitation by would-be donees. Other legal constraints upon gift giving, however, are more difficult to explain. Why is it, for example, the
16. Resolving disputes over Aboriginal sacred sites: from:
Negotiating the Sacred
Author(s) Wootten Hal
Abstract: The material in this chapter arises out of some practical experiences of the way the Australian state has negotiated claims for the protection of Indigenous ′sacred′ places that were threatened by private or public claims to exploit or remake the landscape in pursuit of wealth or public safety or amenity. For many readers this topic will bring to mind the unhappy experience of the Hindmarsh Bridge affair, where such a conflict dragged out through inquiries and litigation over some seven years and left behind bitter recrimination about the genuineness of Indigenous claims, the appropriateness of processes for evaluating them, and
Chapter 11. Fataluku Forest Tenures and the Conis Santana National Park in East Timor from:
Sharing the Earth, Dividing the Land
Author(s) McWilliam Andrew
Abstract: Fataluku society of Lautem, the most easterly district of East Timor, has attracted comparatively little detailed ethnographic research. ² This paper aims to contribute to a better understanding of this region by exploring Fataluku customary tenures and cultural land management practices in the context of emergent land administration policy in East Timor. Fataluku land and forest tenures will be examined from a comparative perspective, placing them within the wider context of eastern Indonesian ethnology.
Chapter 7. Knowing Your Place: from:
The Poetic Power of Place
Author(s) Grimes Barbara Dix
Abstract: Another strategy is to name places after some characteristic feature.
Book Title: Origins, Ancestry and Alliance-Explorations in Austronesian Ethnography
Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Sather Clifford
Abstract: This collection of papers, the third in a series of volumes on the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project, explores indigenous Austronesian ideas of origin, ancestry and alliance and considers the comparative significance of these ideas in social practice. The papers examine social practice in a diverse range of societies extending from insular Southeast Asia to the islands of the Pacific.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbjs3
Chapter 1. Introduction from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Fox James J.
Abstract: This is the third in a series of volumes produced in the Departme of Anthropology from the work of the Comparative Austronesian Project.¹ The first of these volumes examined the comparative design of Austronesian houses and related these spatial forms to the social and ritual practices of their resident groups. The second volume provided a general survey of the Austronesians focusing on their common origins and historical transformations. This third volume explores indigenous Austronesian ideas of origin, ancestry and alliance and considers the comparative significance of these ideas in social practice. As a collection, these papers offer a variety of
Chapter 2. Hierarchy, Founder Ideology and Austronesian Expansion from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Bellwood Peter
Abstract: Is it possible to correlate the earliest colonizing movements of Austronesian-speaking peoples into Taiwan, the Philippines, Vietnam, Malaysia, Indonesia and the myriad islands of Oceania² with the existence of a hereditary élite stratum of society? How far back in time can such élites be traced and can their genesis be related in any way to the colonization process itself? And how were the social systems of the earliest Austronesian groups, especially in Melanesia, affected by contact with pre-existing societies, perhaps similar in terms of economy and technology but fundamentally different in terms of social ideology?
Chapter 4. Rank, Hierarchy and Routes of Migration: from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Sudo Ken-ichi
Abstract: The traditional political communities of the central Caroline Islands, from Ulithi to Namonuito Atoll, are characteristically small. A politically autonomous community may consist of a single village, a district or a small island, each composed of matrilineal descent groups. The total population of an island or an atoll is, on average, less than 800 persons and its land area is at most five square kilometres in extent. Some scholars have suggested that institutionalized chieftainship in Micronesia, as a form of suprafamilial authority, is directly related to surplus food production (e.g. Mason 1968). Therefore, due to their meagre resource base, the
Chapter 5. ʺAll Threads Are Whiteʺ: from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Sather Clifford
Abstract: The characterization of societies as ʺegalitarianʺ — in Borneo as elsewhere in the non-Western world — has come under increasing scrutiny in recent years (Boehm 1993; Flanagan and Rayner 1988; Flanagan 1989; Woodburn 1982). Even so, despite this newfound interest, compared to ʺhierarchyʺ, notions of equality have been far less explored in the anthropological literature. Part of the reason is almost certainly as Flanagan (1989:261) suggests: that equality tends to be ʺnaturalizedʺ in the social sciences and so regarded as the proto-cultural condition out of which structures of inequality are presumed to have developed by evolutionary differentiation (cf. Fried 1967).
Chapter 6. Origin, Hierarchy and Egalitarianism Among the Mandaya of Southeast Mindanao, Philippines from:
Origins, Ancestry and Alliance
Author(s) Yengoyan Aram A.
Abstract: This paper develops two major themes of Mandaya social structure which operate at different levels of social and political activity. One of these principles or themes is the structure of hierarchy or precedence which operates primarily at the political level of leadership and warfare as it articulates the domination of the centre or points of origin to the periphery of social life. In this context the dominant expression of precedence is based on the political role of the
bagani (the warrior class) and the various sub-units of political authority which traditionally inhabited the lands of the Mandaya. The second theme
1 The Axial Age Debate as Religious Discourse from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) JOAS HANS
Abstract: It is an undisputed fact that Karl Jaspers invented the term “Axial Age” in his 1949 book
Vom Ursprung und Ziel der Geschichte,but it is also uncontested that the basic idea behind the new term is much older and was not first developed by Jaspers himself. While these facts seem to be clear, the same cannot be said about the exact meaning of the concept of an Axial Age, the origins of the term, and the origins of the idea behind it. In the following, I will offer some material that could help to clarify these three matters, but
3 An Evolutionary Approach to Culture: from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) DONALD MERLIN
Abstract: One of my early heroes was the great literary theorist Northrop Frye. His book
Anatomy of Criticismtook my young undergraduate imagination by storm. Frye was a system builder, and I saw in his approach the possibility of exploring the deepest interactions between the flow of cultural change, and the reactions of creative minds to their situated historical contexts. Great writers obviously held a high place in the governance of ideas and beliefs in the cultures he examined. Yet their minds were also, unavoidably, creatures of the cultural moment. The deep structure of their minds—the shifts in cultural contexts
6 The Buddha’s Meditative Trance: from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) OBEYESEKERE GANANATH
Abstract: Discussions of the great historical religions that developed during the Axial Age centered on their preoccupation with universal transcendental religious soteriologies and ethics that spilled over the confines of earlier smallscale societies. They also entailed a preoccupation with theoretical or conceptual thinking, an attempt to understand the world through the mediation of abstract concepts. I do not know how far these issues are relevant for all Axial Age religions, but they are perhaps true of most of them. However, it is also the case that
ourtheoretical discussions could ill afford to neglect what I think is true of most
7 The Idea of Transcendence from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) DALFERTH INGOLF U.
Abstract: The idea of an Axial Age has many facets. However, in Karl Jaspers’ thought its decisive feature “is man’s reaching out beyond himself by growing aware of himself within the whole of Being.”¹ “In some way or other man becomes certain of transcendence,” and thereby becomes human in a new and decisive sense: “It is impossible for man to lose transcendence, without ceasing to be man.”² Reference to transcendence is the defining characteristic of Axial man.³ Its correlate in human life is “faith”—not the faith of a particular religious tradition but what Jaspers calls “philosophic faith,”⁴ a faith that
12 Axial Religions and the Problem of Violence from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) MARTIN DAVID
Abstract: Axial religion has many different characteristics. Whereas pre-Axial religion is often bound in with the powers of Nature, its temporal rhythms and cycles, Axial religion either abandons such cycles for timelessness or creates
15 Cultural Memory and the Myth of the Axial Age from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) ASSMANN JAN
Abstract: The theory of the Axial Age is the creation of philosophers and sociologists, not of historians and philologists on whose research the theory is based. It is the answer to the question for the roots of modernity. When and where did the modern world begin as we know and inhabit it? The historian investigates the past for the sake of the past. The quest for the roots of modernity, however, is not interested in the past as such but only as the beginning of something held to be characteristic of the present. These are two categorically different approaches that must
17 The Future of Transcendence: from:
The Axial Age and Its Consequences
Author(s) MADSEN RICHARD
Abstract: “A total metamorphosis of history has taken place,” wrote Karl Jaspers sixty years ago in the immediate aftermath of World War II. “The essential fact is: There is no longer anything outside. The world is closed. The unity of the earth has arrived. New perils and new opportunities are revealed. All the crucial problems have become world problems, the situation a situation of mankind.”¹ But it was a spiritually empty unity. There was a universal economic and political interdependence, based on the universal permeation of technologies of dominance, but it did not rest on any common ethical foundation.“[S]omething manifestly quite
1 Religion and Reality from:
Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Many scholars ask whether the very word “religion” is too culture-bound to be used in historical and cross-cultural comparison today. I cannot avoid the question, but for practical purposes I will use the term, because for the philosophical and sociological traditions upon which this book draws, the idea of religion has been central. The justification for its use will depend more on the persuasiveness of the argument of the book as a whole than on a definition; nonetheless definitions help to get things started. In the Preface I offered a simplified version of Geertz’s definition; here I will begin again
3 Tribal Religion: from:
Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: In Chapter 1 I offered a typology of religious representation—unitive, enactive, symbolic, and conceptual—to describe the ways in which religions have understood reality. The concepts of enactive, symbolic, and conceptual representation were adapted from the work of Jerome Bruner on child development. According to Bruner, who is in turn adapting his categories from Piaget, the child first learns about the world by acting on it. It is by holding, throwing, reaching for, that the children come to know the objects that surround them. In early language learning the symbol and the object are fused—the sun and the
6 The Axial Age I: from:
Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: Ritual in tribal societies involves the participation of all or most of the members of the group—in classic Durkheimian fashion, if the ritual goes well, it leaves the group filled with energy and solidarity.¹ Some are more active than others, but many are involved, and even when, as in the case of the Navajo, the ritual centers around someone who is being cured, the whole network of people with whom that person is involved participates in and benefits from the ritual. In stark contrast, ritual in archaic societies focuses above all on one person, the divine or quasi-divine king,
8 The Axial Age III: from:
Religion in Human Evolution
Abstract: One of the more remarkable things about classical Greece is that it seemed to go from a tribal society (actually a retribalized society) to something on the verge of modernity within a matter of generations. The sheer rapidity of the change has been seen as having something to do with the vigor of the ultimate flowering. There had, of course, been a Bronze Age palace society, the Mycenaean, in second-millennium bce Greece, with powerful rulers, monumental buildings, and a written script. All that had been largely forgotten during the Greek Dark Age from roughly 1200 to 800 bce, with only
4 TOWARDS AN ALL-INDIA SETTLEMENT from:
Changing Homelands
Abstract: Chapters 1–3 reveal how Punjabis forged a consensus on questions as critical as the rights of political prisoners, laws that would govern them at a time of peace, and the right to proselytise. On what questions, then, did they disagree? The later-day fact of Partition has made religious differences appear wholly intransigent. But was this how contemporaries understood politics? On the various safeguards for religiously defined minorities in formal political arenas—including joint/separate electorates; appropriate weightages in legislatures and other local bodies; reservation in the services; and reservation for Muslims in a federal, all-India center—Punjabis belonging to different
6 MEMORY AND THE SEARCH FOR MEANING IN POST-PARTITION DELHI from:
Changing Homelands
Abstract: My journey to grapple with Partition began when my grandfather remarked that despite the fact of Partition, he would gladly have continued to work in Lahore. I sat there stunned, not sure if he was serious. Why, he asked, don’t people work in Dubai? And wasn’t Lahore far closer than Dubai? In post-Partition India, Lahore felt a million miles further than Dubai. His vivid memory of the desire to stay on in Lahore, despite the high politicking that had resulted in Partition and despite the long years since Partition, formed an unanalysed silence. This chapter uses oral history to think
Book Title: Stranger Magic- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Warner Marina
Abstract: Our foremost theorist of myth, fairytale, and folktale explores the magical realm of the imagination where carpets fly and genies grant prophetic wishes. Stranger Magic examines the profound impact of the Arabian Nights on the West, the progressive exoticization of magic, and the growing acceptance of myth and magic in contemporary experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbtr6
CHAPTER TWO Riding the Wind: from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: Shahrazad begins to relate ‘The Tale of the City of Brass’ on the 567th night, past the centre of the vortex of her stories; it is a slow, magnificent, melancholy tale of a quest within a quest, a sober elegy to human littleness and mortality, condensing major themes of the
Nights. The critic Andras Hamori has called it, a little unkindly, ‘the gloomiest of travelogues’, but its protracted, incantatory melancholy creates a lull – aberceusemotif in the midst of a vast symphony.
CHAPTER THREE A Tapestry of Great Price: from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: The magic carpet does not attract special attention from the storyteller; it simply features as one of three magical gifts obtained by the brothers. Yet, just as the glass extends the faculty of sight,
CHAPTER SIX Magians and Dervishes from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: The
Arabian Nightsconjured an enchanted virtual world that could be safely entered and explored, accepted and naturalised by the Enlightenment and modern reader and writer precisely because they often unfold in an elsewhere that is different from the native habitat of Judaeo-Christian demons and eschatological visions. A home-grown practice of, and belief in, magic was set aside to be replaced by foreign magic – stranger magic, much easier to disown, or otherwise hold in intellectual and political quarantine.
CHAPTER EIGHT ‘Everything You Desire to Know about the East …’ from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: Interactions between the Sublime Porte and the capitals of Western powers did not become very frequent – or indeed any friendlier – but the degree of acquaintance grew. From assuming difference and observing it with curiosity, travellers began to point to the differences in order to keep a distance and exculpate themselves by association, as we saw in relation to the whirling dervishes. When the
Arabian Nightsappeared in French and English, the book was received as a Baedeker, as it were, an encyclopaedia, a social handbook and a costume album. It was seen as a far superior substitute to
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN Why Aladdin? from:
Stranger Magic
Abstract: On 26 October 1831, in the exquisite Regency Theatre at Bury St Edmunds, Suffolk, England, ‘under the patronage of Lieut.-Col. and Mrs Rushbrooke’, the
Grand Spectacular Tale of Enchantment, (interspersed with Music) called Aladdin or, The Wonderful Lampwas staged as the climax of a varied bill of entertainments. The evening began with a comedy, calledUps and Downs, or the Ladder of Life; this was followed by ‘the popular Farce ofMy Wife! What Wife!’,and then ‘A Comic Song, sung by Mr Burton’, as the curtain-raiser to the main attraction. ThisAladdinwas only one in a spate
Book Title: Working Knowledge- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Isaac Joel
Abstract: Isaac explores how influential thinkers in the mid-twentieth century understood the relations among science, knowledge, and the empirical study of human affairs. He places special emphasis on the practical, local manifestations of their complex theoretical ideas, particularly the institutional milieu of Harvard University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jbvgs
6 Lessons of the Revolution: from:
Working Knowledge
Abstract: The failure of the Carnegie Project on Theory revealed an important limitation of the Harvard complex. Parsons and his fellow Levellers had assumed that the protocols guiding seminar discussion and informal interchange in the interstitial academy would offer a suitable foundation for a general theory that could unite the Department of Social Relations. The blending of epistemology, pedagogy, and research practice seemed natural to the alumni of Henderson’s Pareto seminar. But the ambitions of the DSR’s leaders proved too grand. Harvard’s interstitial networks were too diverse and amorphous to provide the basis for a coherent independent department or an integrated
Introduction: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: The debate between philosophy and literature begins over the question of desire. In Plato’s
Republic,Socrates’ main charge against Homer is that his poetry leaves us in the grip of the desire for mortal life.¹ The dramatic pathos in theIliadis generated when the heroes cling to what they will lose and cannot accept the death that awaits them. Even the bravest heroes, such as Hector and Achilles, lament the fact that their lives will have been so short. When this pathos is transferred to the audience, it opens a channel that allows the spectators to come into contact
CHAPTER 2 Trauma: from:
Dying for Time
Abstract: On a winter afternoon in the alpine region of Norway, a man begins to read Virginia Woolf’s novel
To the Lighthouse.He is seized by how she manages to convey the smallest movements of thought, sensation, and everyday life. Woolf’s writing makes him think about the very activity of thinking, sense the very texture of sensation, and his life opens itself to him with a new depth. As he proceeds to the second part ofTo the Lighthouse,however, everything changes. A major character such as Mrs. Ramsay, whose life he previously could follow second by second over the space
4 The Triumph of the Word from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: The Mongols descended upon the world like a sudden thunder, a storm, a tsunami—and took the sedentary, sedate, civilized, and corrupted empires of the Seljuqids and the Abbasids, and beyond them the known and the unknowing world, by their throats. The Mongols hit like a vengeance—and in the fertile soil of blood and booty they shed and plundered and the ruins and fears they left behind, grew flowers—colorful, aromatic, deeply rooted, robust, and plentiful—of life and love and liberty and revolt and a renewed pact with humanity all before they had descended from their horses.
Amadand
7 The Dawn of New Empires from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: In the eighteenth and the nineteenth centuries, Persian literary humanism perforce exited its habitual home at royal courts and found its bearing in the context of a new imperial setting—something that it had always done, from its very conception during the Saffarid and Samanid periods in the eighth and ninth centuries down to its spread over four adjacent empires in the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries. The only significant and traumatizing difference this time around, which turned out to be the liberating ordeal of Persian literary humanism, was the fact that Persian literati were now facing an
aterritorialempire that
8 The Final Frontiers from:
The World of Persian Literary Humanism
Abstract: The cosmopolitan worldliness of Persian literary humanism commenced in a confrontation with the alienating imperium of Arab domination soon after the Muslim conquest of the Sassanid empire. Phase after phase this worldliness has planted itself in the context of multiple and successive global empires. The retrieving of these successive global worldings of Persian literary humanism from the sixteenth century forward narratively confronts its systematic de-worlding by both European Orientalism and its twin peak of colonially manufactured ethnic nationalism. Our understanding of Persian literary humanism has as a result been subjected to systematic appropriation and dispossession with every learned word that
Book Title: Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Tattam Helen
Abstract: Gabriel Marcel (1889–1973) stands outside the traditional canon of twentieth-century French philosophers. Where he is not simply forgotten or overlooked, he is dismissed as a ‘relentlessly unsystematic’ thinker, or, following Jean-Paul Sartre’s lead, labelled a ‘Christian existentialist’ — a label that avoids consideration of Marcel’s work on its own terms. How is one to appreciate Marcel’s contribution, especially when his oeuvre appears to be at odds with philosophical convention? Helen Tattam proposes a range of readings, as opposed to one single interpretation: a series of departures or explorations that bring Marcel’s work into contact with critical partners such as Henri Bergson, Paul Ricoeur and Emmanuel Lévinas and other insights into a host of twentieth-century philosophical shifts concerning time, the subject, the other, ethics, and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc857
CHAPTER 1 Being and Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: It is in reaction to Bergson, perhaps more than any other philosopher, that Marcel came to establish his own philosophical position: ‘sans l’aventure bergsonienne et l’admirable courage dont elle témoigne, il est probable que je n’aurais jamais eu ni la vaillance, ni même simplement le pouvoir de m’engager dans ma propre recherche’ (
EM: 79), he confesses in the 1952 article ‘Méditation sur la musique’. Marcel’s encounter with Bergson’s thought can therefore be understood as the catalyst behind his entire philosophical project.¹ ‘[Bergson] a joué pour moi un rôle de libérateur même s’il n’est pas extrêmement facile de dire ce que
CHAPTER 2 Phenomenological Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Chapter 1 introduced Marcel’s and Bergson’s shared desire to engage with the time of lived experience as opposed to thinking in abstraction. However, Marcel’s philosophy emerged as very different from that of Bergson and, as such, was suggested to be problematic: it appeared to subordinate time to an eternal present, and this seemed at odds with his assertions concerning (temporal) existence’s dynamic, dialectical nature. This potentially problematic relation between time and eternity was identified in the first part of Marcel’s
Journal(January–May 1914), before his thought evolved in reaction against his idealist leanings; but strangely, in spite of his
CONCLUSION TO PART I from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: If, as a result of his attempt to draw ontological conclusions from phenomenology, one is tempted to accuse Marcel of philosophical inconsistency, it should be noted that this is not in fact so unusual; phenomenology in general has been criticized for this. Wood explains: ‘Phenomenology could never have had any interest unless its descriptions of the structures of consciousness had a value that went beyond their being an accurate account of subjective phenomena. That value lay in what was always assumed to be the epistemological and ultimately ontological significance of consciousness’ (1989: 324–25).¹ Indeed, in theory, phenomenology was to
CHAPTER 3 Narrative Time from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: Part I suggested the theory of time which underwrites Marcel’s philosophy to be problematic, for although he plainly declares his lack of interest in its ontology, he nevertheless is concerned with human Being. Owing to the temporal character of human existence, time is thus necessarily bound up with Marcel’s ontological investigations. The conclusions he draws from his phenomenological
approches concrètes, which make reference to both an experience of finitude and of eternity, therefore (indirectly) reify what Marcel only intended to be a phenomenological distinction between time and eternity. As such, Marcel’s philosophy of time emerges as paradoxically concerned, and unconcerned,
CONCLUSION TO PART II from:
Time in the Philosophy of Gabriel Marcel
Abstract: According to Richard Cohen, ‘what Levinas wants to account for [...] is not the relation
betweenself and other, but the encounter with alterity as transcendence [itself], as the outside, the other’ (2000: 141). While Marcel’s theatre — and indeed some of his philosophical writings — have been shown to engage with this aspect of alterity, his philosophical project cannot simply be confined to this because, as Marcel’s narrations of his plays reinforce, he is also concerned with the self in action — that is, with the basis on which the self might make decisions, and in what light (‘authentic’ or otherwise) these
Book Title: The Signifying Self-Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Henry Melanie
Abstract: The Signifying Self: Cervantine Drama as Counter-Perspective Aesthetic offers a comprehensive analysis of all eight of Cervantes's Ocho comedias (published 1615), moving beyond conventional anti-Lope approaches to Cervantine dramatic practise in order to identify what, indeed, his theatre promotes. Considered on its own aesthetic terms, but also taking into account ontological and socio-cultural concerns, this study compels a re-assessment of Cervantes's drama and conflates any monolithic interpretations which do not allow for the textual interplay of contradictory and conflicting discourses which inform it. Cervantes's complex and polyvalent representation of freedom underpins such an approach; a concept which is considered to be a leitmotif of Cervantes's work but which has received scant attention with regards to his theatre. Investigation of this topic reveals not only Cervantes's rejection of established theatrical convention, but his preoccupation with the difficult relationship between the individual and the early modern Spanish world. Cervantes's comedias emerge as a counter-perspective to dominant contemporary Spanish ideologies and more orthodox artistic imaginings. Ultimately, The Signifying Self seeks to recuperate the Ocho comedias as a significant part of the Cervantine, and Golden-Age, canon and will be of interest and benefit to those scholars who work on Cervantes and indeed on early modern Spanish theatre in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jc86q
CHAPTER 1 Encuentro con Lope en el Camino: from:
The Signifying Self
Abstract: Canavaggio has commented that: ‘No se puede hablar de Cervantes sin encontrar a Lope en el camino’, a view substantiated by the fact that critical attention concerning Cervantes’s
Ocho comediashas prioritised the playwright’s unease with Lope’s highly popular theatre.¹ Canavaggio’s observation, however, is particularly reflective of studies ofLa entretenida,El laberinto de amorandLa casa de los celos. Each of these plays has been identified as a Cervantine reaction to dominant contemporary theatrical practise and all have been subject to analysis vis-à-vis Lope to varying degrees. This is especially true ofEl laberinto de amorandLa
CHAPTER 2 Staging Libertad in Cervantes’s Comedias de Cautivos from:
The Signifying Self
Abstract: Cervantes’s
comedias de cautivoshave been considered by one critic as ‘el resultado literario de una experiencia vital insoslayable, imposible de olvidar, que había marcado para siempre su biografía y su quehacer literario’.¹ Herein lie the two areas of investigation which have so concerned Cervantistas: the events of Cervantes’s 1575–80 North African imprisonment and the impact that such a traumatic experience has exerted on his literary production. Critical interest has resulted in copious biographies and articles and the general consensus that Cervantes’s experience as captive left an indelible mark on his work. Nonetheless, as George Camamis has noted, there
CHAPTER 3 Shaping the Self in El rufián dichoso and Pedro de Urdemalas from:
The Signifying Self
Abstract: Cervantes’s
El rufián dichosoandPedro de Urdemalasarecomediaswhich ‘sit outside’ easy categorisation.El rufiánhas traditionally been perceived as acomedia de santosandPedro de Urdemalasas a pseudo-picaresque play. Nonetheless, as this chapter will elucidate, they have more in common than has been realised. What connects these plays, in particular, is their proteanpícaroprotagonists. Despite the fact that scholarship has conventionally viewed Cervantes and the picaresque as incongruous, something with which I will engage more fully in the analysis which follows, it is in the characterisation of the plays’ protagonists thatEl rufián dichoso
CONCLUSION from:
The Signifying Self
Abstract: In this study I have aimed, via an analysis of freedom, to draw conclusions regarding Cervantes’s
Ocho comediasas a counter-perspective to contemporary Golden-Age drama. Despite the fact that the dramatist’s writings for the stage clearly flout conventional Lopean parameters, it is not indicative of a theatre which is deficient or inferior. Rather, Cervantes constructs an aesthetic which permits free expression of seditious voices and an alternative stage for those discourses normally quashed by prevailing dramatic monopoly. It is precisely because of the restrictive nature of seventeenth-century Spanish theatre that Cervantes advocates a strategy of authorial liberty. For instance, in
L’imaginaire féministe de la théorie from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Lessard Rosalie
Abstract: « [L]es poètes de ma génération, si l’on peut dire, sont des savants [qui] n’ont pas craint de lire tous les livres sans pour autant que la chair des poèmes en fût triste¹ », affirme Madeleine Gagnon dans
La poésie québécoise actuelle. Sur le mode métaphorique, cette pirouette mallarméenne témoigne de certaines préoccupations des poètes québécois des années 1970 et 1980 et, plus spécifiquement, des poètes féministes. Au cœur de leur programme littéraire se trouvent, en effet, la fondation d’une nouvelle alliance entre théorie et texte de fiction de même qu’une mise en procès des rapports unissant texte et corps.
Une symphonie concertante : from:
Nouveaux territoires de la poésie francophone au Canada 1970-2000
Author(s) Bélanger Louis
Abstract: La fixation des origines de la littérature franco-ontarienne à une époque particulière rend compte d’écarts historiques d’envergure, selon que l’on vise à refléter l’exhaustivité caractéristique de l’approche « des origines à nos jours » ou une perspective plus ciblée de son développement littéraire, à l’enseigne d’événements plus récents et perçus comme points de rupture d’une tradition donnée. Comme le décrit Johanne Melançon¹ dans une rétrospective éclairante sur la question, des récits de voyages de Samuel de Champlain et d’Étienne Brûlé aux États généraux du Canada français en 1967, de la fondation de la Coopérative des artistes du Nouvel-Ontario (CANO) en
4. Postsecular Faith: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: Somewhere in the middle of his life, John Dewey penned a short tract titled “A Common Faith” in which he distinguished between organized “religion” and religiosity or a “religious” disposition. Whereas the former denotes a formal institution wedded to official doctrines and rituals, the latter involves practical conduct, an ethically and perhaps spiritually informed manner of leading one’s life.¹ Dewey does not reject religion per se but rather its tendency to sideline lived experience or to privilege orthodoxy over “orthopraxis.” Despite changed circumstances, his tract on the whole has stood the test of time. Recent decades have seen the renewed
6. Hermeneutics and Cross-Cultural Encounters: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As customarily defined,
hermeneuticsmeans the theory, or rather the practice or art, of interpretation. In its primary and traditional sense,interpretationmeans textual interpretation, that is, the encounter between a reader and a text. In this encounter, something has to happen, some work has to be done: the reader needs to discover the meaning of the text, which is usually far from self-evident. The difficulty of the work is increased in the case of temporal or spatial distance: when the reader wishes to understand a text from another age or in a different language. Yet to some extent, the
7. A Man for All Seasons: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: As the saying goes: the center does not hold. If one were to highlight a central feature of the modern age, one could plausibly point to its centrifugal momentum, its tendency toward fragmentation. In the intellectual domain, the tendency is patently evident in the process of specialization, the relentless segregation of fields of knowledge. However, the trend exceeds the knowledge domain. Together with other thinkers of his time, the philosopher Hegel saw modernity marked by radical “diremptions” or divisions (
Entzweiungen)—divisions between knowledge and action, thinking and feeling, private self-interest and the common good—with the prospects of reconciliation growing
8. Reason and Lifeworld: from:
Integral Pluralism
Abstract: It was with great sadness that I learned of the passing of two leading Indian philosophers: Daya Krishna and Ramchandra Gandhi. What renders the loss particularly grievous is the fact that they were not just ordinary academics but exemplary and even iconic Indian thinkers. In a way, during much of their lives they represented two different possibilities of Indian thought, two alternative conceptions of the meaning of philosophy. On the whole, Daya Krishna identified philosophy with critical analysis and the striving for exact knowledge, whereas Ramchandra Gandhi placed himself in the tradition of the great Indian seers, the teachings of
Book Title: Blood in the Sand-Imperial Fantasies, Right-Wing Ambitions, and the Erosion of American Democracy
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Bronner Stephen Eric
Abstract: Following the attacks of September 11, 2001, clouds of ash blackened the skies over New York City, Washington, D.C., and rural Pennsylvania. In the wake of the destruction, the United States seemingly entered a new era marked by radical changes in the nation's discourse and in the policies of the Bush administration. With the toppling of the Taliban in Afghanistan, the invasion of Iraq, and saber rattling elsewhere, America's global war on terror began to take shape. Lofty rhetoric about expanding democracy and defending freedom filled the halls of elite power and dominated mainstream media coverage of American politics. Blood in the Sand offers both an incisive analysis and a confrontational critique of America's recent international pursuits and its dominant political culture. Stephen Eric Bronner challenges the notion that everything changed in the aftermath of 9/11. He shows instead how a criminal act served to legitimize political manipulation and invigorate traditional nationalistic enthusiasms for militarism and imperial expansion. Employing his own experiences in the Middle East, Bronner acknowledges -- but refuses to overstate -- recent progressive developments in the region. He criticizes the neo-conservative penchant for unilateral military aggression and debunks the dubious notion of fostering democracy at gunpoint. While Bronner analyzes authoritarian repression, human rights violations, shrinking civil liberties, and severe socioeconomic inequalities, Blood in the Sand is neither a narrow political diatribe nor a futile exercise in anti-American negativism. The author honors America by condemning the betrayal of the nation's finest ideals by so many of those who, hypocritically or naively, invoke those ideals the most. Bronner sheds new light on those who insist on publicly waving the flag while privately subverting that for which it stands. Blood in the Sand sounds a clarion call for revitalizing the American polity and reshaping foreign policy along democratic lines. Committed to a political renewal, Bronner urges the American people to recall what is best about their national heritage and the genuine beacon of hope it might offer other countries and other cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcf9d
3 Baghdad Memories from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: We arrived in the middle of the night, smuggled into Iraq via the Jordanian city of Amman, and the cameras were already waiting. So were the president of Baghdad University, his entourage, some bodyguards, a few agents of the regime, and the organizers of what would become four days of activities in the land of Ali Baba. Half asleep in an empty airport lounge with postmodern arches, some of us talked among ourselves, and others talked with any reporter willing to listen. More than thirty of us constituted U.S. Academicians against War, an independent group of intellectuals from twenty-eight universities
4 American Landscape: from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Lying has always been part of politics. Traditionally, however, the lie was seen as a necessary evil that those in power should keep from their subjects. Even totalitarians tried to hide the brutal truths on which their regimes rested. This disparity gave critics and reformers their sense of purpose: to illuminate for citizens the difference between the way the world appeared and the way it actually functioned. Following the proclamation of victory in the Iraqi war, however, that sense of purpose became imperiled, along with the trust necessary for maintaining a democratic discourse. The Bush administration boldly proclaimed the legitimacy
8 Constructing Neoconservatism from:
Blood in the Sand
Abstract: Neoconservatismhas become a code word for reactionary thinking in our time and a badge of unity for those in the Bush administration advocating a new imperialist foreign policy, an assault on the welfare state, and a return to “family values.” Its members are directly culpable for the disintegration of American prestige abroad, the erosion of a huge budget surplus, and the debasement of democracy at home. Iraq has turned into a disaster, and much of the American citizenry has been revolted by the arrogance, lies, and incompetence of leading neoconservatives within the administration. But their agenda remains fixed; the
“Do Not Forsake Me, Oh, My Darling”: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Biderman Shai
Abstract: One of the common attributes of western films is the “lone hero.” Whether it’s in the final scene, where he takes that inevitable “lone ride” off into the sunset or in his heroic acts throughout the film, where he saves the town folk from danger, the lone hero keeps to himself. He is the quintessential “strong silent type” traditionally prized in the American psyche. He is strong in the sense that he is powerful in his physical, intellectual, and moral capacities. He is silent in the sense that, despite the social benefits earned by his outward actions, he remains secluded
Civilization and Its Discontents: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Den Uyl Douglas J.
Abstract: Perhaps no image is more symptomatic of the American western than the lone hero, abandoned by all, skillfully performing some act of courage in the cause of justice.¹ In this respect, a movie like
High Noon(1952) comes immediately to mind: Marshal Will Kane (Gary Cooper) is forsaken even by his fiancée as he faces a deadly opponent. However allegorical the film may be, it is perhaps paradigmatic of the majority of western films—namely, it showcases a hero possessed of extraordinary self-sufficiency facing problems that ordinary men would be either unable or too fearful to handle.² The western hero
Mommas, Don’t Let Your Babies Grow Up to Be Pragmatists from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Csaki B. Steve
Abstract: There is no reasonable argument against the (true) assertion that the ultimate American cinematic cowboy was, and remains, John Wayne. The questions of exactly why and how he and his films so captured the American psyche remain somewhat open. In fact, there are myriad aspects to this question, but I believe that there is one overarching explanation as to why John Wayne was so clearly special: he was an excellent pragmatist. I shall argue that any cowboy hero must act pragmatically and that John Wayne so embodied the true sense of the classical American pragmatist that this was one of
Two Ways to Yuma: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Mexal Stephen J.
Abstract: At one of the climactic moments of the 1957 film
3:10 to Yuma, rancher Dan Evans (Van Heflin) realizes, in the timeless tradition of countless devil-may-care western heroes, that his task has become all but hopeless. Dan has agreed to bring outlaw Ben Wade (Glenn Ford) to justice for the price of $200, money he desperately needs to pay his land debts. His job is to put Wade on the 3:10 p.m. train to Yuma, Arizona, where Wade will be imprisoned.
“Order Out of the Mud”: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Cantor Paul A.
Abstract: “John Locke” sounds like a good name for a frontier marshal in a Hollywood movie, but we do not usually associate the English philosopher with the Wild West. Yet in his
Second Treatise of Government, Locke speaks of “the wild woods and uncultivated waste of America.”¹ In fact, he makes over a dozen references in this book to America, many of them specifically to Indians (if not cowboys). Locke (1632–1704) is carrying on a debate about the important philosophical concept of the state of nature, a debate inaugurated by Thomas Hobbes (1588–1679) in hisLeviathan, where he also
From Dollars to Iron: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) McNaron David L.
Abstract: Expansive in scope, geographically, historically, and thematically,
The Outlaw Josey Wales(1976) is a unique western. It has some of the best gunplay, most poignant dialogue, most colorfully vile minor villains, and most fully developed Indian characters in the genre. A film about vengeance, reconciliation, and community,Josey Walesextends Eastwood’s western character and resolves problems in the adult western concerning the individual and the community even as it raises others. It is Eastwood’sculminatingwestern: to appreciate it, we must become acquainted with his others and tease out their themes.
The Cost of the Code: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Hada Ken
Abstract: A common perception associated with the classic western suggests characters welded to their notions of right judgment, characters who will not deviate from their code of honor, regardless of consequences. The honor implied in such deliberate devotion to duty is characteristically celebrated, at least on the surface, in the acts and speeches of typical heroes. It follows that the unyielding posture of the hero suggests a certain understanding of ethics. A strong hero is committed to his course of action because he sees the necessity to choose in a particular way, as the right thing to do, regardless of public
“Back Off to What?” from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Gaughran Richard
Abstract: Much has been written and said about Sam Peckinpah’s
The Wild Bunch(1969) and the way it departs from the western genre in its violence and in its disruption of expectations concerning the moral stature of its heroes. The most sympathetic characters in the film, to be sure, are outlaws who do their share of killing and more, to paraphrase a line from the film. In fact, they doa lotmore than their share. However, the disturbing aspects ofThe Wild Bunchshould not cause viewers to dismiss the film as dishing up gore for its own sake, labeling
No Country for Old Men: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) Devlin William J.
Abstract: The “Wild West,” as depicted in the cinematic genre of the western, is “wild” not only in the sense that it is portrayed as an untamed land of lawlessness, but also in the sense that the films present us with a variety of “wild” but colorful characters, some of whom are considered notorious, while others are treated as role models. From charismatic individuals and brave groups of pioneers who sharply depict moral dispositions in their pursuit of law and order to villains, bandits, and gangs of outlaws who seek to challenge such order, the western ethos is built on stories
Beating a Live Horse: from:
The Philosophy of the Western
Author(s) McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: When one thinks of western films, certain stock characters come to mind. Cowboys, Indians, gunslingers, and homesteaders are some of the obvious examples. However, there is a character that is as—perhaps even more—elemental to the western: the horse. Horses are everywhere in westerns. Our heroes ride in—and out—on them. And yet, who thinks about them? In recent decades, increased scholarly attention has been paid to marginalized figures in literature and mainstream media. Studies on otherness have served to bring recognition to individuals and groups whose voices and value have been suppressed or distorted because of their
Book Title: In Search of the Good Life-A Pedogogy for Troubled Times
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): DALLMAYR FRED
Abstract: The great German novelist Thomas Mann implored readers to resist the persistent and growing militarism of the mid-twentieth century. To whom should we turn for guidance during this current era of global violence, political corruption, economic inequality, and environmental degradation? For more than two millennia, the world's great thinkers have held that the ethically "good life" is the highest purpose of human existence. Renowned political philosopher Fred Dallmayr traces the development of this notion, finding surprising connections among Aristotelian ethics, Abrahamic and Eastern religious traditions, German idealism, and postindustrial social criticism. In Search of the Good Life does not offer a blueprint but rather invites readers on a cross-cultural quest. Along the way, the author discusses the teachings of Aristotle, Confucius, Nicolaus of Cusa, Leibniz, and Schiller, in addition invoking more recent writings of Gadamer and Ricoeur, as guideposts and sources of hope during our troubled times. Among contemporary themes Dallmayr discusses are the role of the classics in education, proper and improper ways of spreading democracy globally, the possibility of transnational citizenship, the problem of politicized evil, and the role of religion in our predominantly secular culture. Dallmayr restores the notion of the good life as a hallmark of personal conduct, civic virtue, and political engagement, and as the road map to enduring peace. In Search of the Good Life seeks to arouse complacent and dispirited citizens, guiding them out of the distractions of shallow amusements and perilous resentments in the direction of mutual learning and civic pedagogy -- a direction that will enable them to impose accountability on political leaders who stray from fundamental ethical standards.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcp7k
1. A Pedagogy of the Heart: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Some eight hundred years ago, a young man in Italy received a summons to rejuvenate religious practices through a life of poverty and humble devotion. The young man’s name was Giovanni Francesco Bernardone, and he lived in the town of Assisi in Umbria. Following this summons, he divested himself of all worldly possessions and founded a religious order that spread rapidly throughout Europe.¹ Two years after his death (in 1226), he was canonized and became revered as Saint Francis. However, in his own lifetime, he was known simply as the
poverello,a poor, humble mendicant following in the footsteps of
2. Walking Humbly with Your God: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: Coming from the West, the contemporary traveler to India often has the sense of visiting another planet. Many customs and practices seem alien or remote, as do the underlying beliefs and motives. If this is true of contemporary India, how much greater would this sense of distance be if visiting medieval India? That place, with its philosophy, literature, and religion, would seem like a lost city, surrounded by nearly impenetrable underbrush. How would one approach such a place, from our modern angle, without disrupting or violating its intrinsic order? Clearly, if such a visit were attempted, one would have to
5. Montesquieu’s Persian Letters: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: The age of Enlightenment is often portrayed as the upsurge of an abstractly rational universalism completely oblivious of, and even hostile to, historical tradition and especially the rich welter of regional and local ways of life. In its home country, the age of
lumièreseventually led to a complete break with and attempted eradication of the past—a rupture that stood in sharp contrast to developments in the English-speaking world. Latter-day devotees of the Enlightenment often propagate a bland universalism on the Jacobin model, but that outlook ignores the fact that the rays oflumièresare necessarily refracted in the
7. Why the Classics Today? from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: We live in a fast-paced age; in fact, the pace of change—at least in the so-called advanced societies—seems to be constantly increasing. Technological innovations that were unheard of just a few decades ago are briskly overturned and rendered obsolete by newer inventions of still more staggering magnitude. Using the parlance of videotapes, some observers have described our age as moving in “fast-forward.” The question that remains to be pondered, however, is whether speed is an adequate gauge for the quality of human life. Clearly, no matter how germane it is to certain technical developments, fastness by itself does
8. Canons or Cannons? from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: “Mobilizing democracy” is a stirring catchphrase, and it was a well-chosen theme for the 2005 meeting of one of the largest social science associations in the United States.¹ In choosing that theme, the organizers obviously wanted to establish a broad agenda, both nationally and globally. In fact, although couched as an ongoing process, the motto can readily be translated into a directive or even an imperative that postulates “mobilize democracy” or “spread democracy everywhere” or simply “democratize the world.” The directive is stirring and captivating—but also disorienting, given the serious malaise afflicting contemporary democracy both at home and abroad.
10. Transnational Citizenship: from:
In Search of the Good Life
Abstract: At the dawn of Western civilization (so called), we find two conceptions of citizenship: one Greek, arising in Athens, and the other Christian, inspired by Jerusalem. The first conception of citizenship, usually associated with Aristotle, is that of membership in a polis, or city-state (with Aristotle holding that such membership is “natural” for, or constitutive of, human beings). The second conception, most prominently formulated by Saint Augustine, assumes a duality of membership: that is, membership in the earthly city (
civitas terrena) and the heavenly city (civitas Dei). The two conceptions clearly do not coincide. In fact, as has often been
An Introduction to the Philosophy of Science Fiction Film from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Sanders Steven M.
Abstract: Over the last decade there has been a significant shift in the attitudes of philosophers as they have become increasingly receptive to the opportunity to apply methods of philosophical inquiry to film, television, and other areas of popular culture. In fact,
receptiveis far too mild a word to describe the enthusiasm with which many philosophers now embrace popular culture. The authors of the essays included in this volume have genuine affection for science fiction feature films and the expertise to describe, explain, analyze, and evaluate the story lines, conflicts, and philosophically salient themes in them. Their contributions are designed
Picturing Paranoia: from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Sanders Steven M.
Abstract: To all appearances,
Invasion of the Body Snatchers(Don Siegel, 1956) is a paean to individuality and a warning of its imminent loss. Human-size pods appear in the California town of Santa Mira and begin duplicating the bodies of the residents, absorbing their minds while they sleep. Rushing into action with his growing realization that Santa Mira is being taken over by the pods, Dr. Miles Bennell (Kevin McCarthy) shows a resilient defiance in his perseverance against all odds. Evidently, we are meant to understand what it means to believe in something and fight for a cause.
Some Paradoxes of Time Travel in The Terminator and 12 Monkeys from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Devlin William J.
Abstract: Suppose you had a time machine. Where exactly would you like to go throughout all the possibilities of temporal locations? Would you want to go back to the Jurassic period to learn more about the dinosaurs? Maybe you would like to go back to ancient Greece to finally know whether or not the Battle of Troy really took place. Perhaps the past bores you, and you’re really a future adventurer instead. If so, would you fast-forward to 3050 to see if human beings are riding in flying cars and living on the moon? Maybe you’d like to go even further,
2001: from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Stoehr Kevin L.
Abstract: In
2001: A Space Odyssey(1968) we are invited by director Stanley Kubrick to experience a mesmerizing yet also alienating form of sensory liberation, as paradoxical as such an experience may at first sound. His landmark science fiction film does not attempt to free us somehow from our five senses, certainly. In fact, the film tends to enhance an appreciation of our perceptual faculties, particularly those of vision and hearing, as well as to encourage reflection on what we have experienced through our senses while watching the film. But Kubrick’s masterwork leads us beyond the borders of our conventional world
Imagining the Future, Contemplating the Past: from:
The Philosophy of Science Fiction Film
Author(s) Palmer R. Barton
Abstract: A defining feature of science fiction is that such works of imaginative realism (a potent stylistic brew of perhaps irreconcilable elements) speculate about some future age or alternative, extraterrestrial world. That imagined place and time is characterized essentially by “advancements” in science that plausibly explore the consequences of what is now known and actively researched (in such areas as artificial intelligence, genetic manipulation, space travel, pharmacology, and so forth). The difference between the reader’s implied present and the postulated alternative results from the technological manipulation of the natural environment and human experience that such acquired knowledge makes possible.
Book Title: The Philosophy of Neo-Noir- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Conard Mark T.
Abstract: Film noir is a classic genre characterized by visual elements such as tilted camera angles, skewed scene compositions, and an interplay between darkness and light. Common motifs include crime and punishment, the upheaval of traditional moral values, and a pessimistic stance on the meaning of life and on the place of humankind in the universe. Spanning the 1940s and 1950s, the classic film noir era saw the release of many of Hollywood's best-loved studies of shady characters and shadowy underworlds, including Double Indemnity, The Big Sleep, Touch of Evil, and The Maltese Falcon. Neo-noir is a somewhat loosely defined genre of films produced after the classic noir era that display the visual or thematic hallmarks of the noir sensibility. The essays collected in The Philosophy of Neo-Noir explore the philosophical implications of neo-noir touchstones such as Blade Runner, Chinatown, Reservoir Dogs, Memento, and the films of the Coen brothers. Through the lens of philosophy, Mark T. Conard and the contributors examine previously obscure layers of meaning in these challenging films. The contributors also consider these neo-noir films as a means of addressing philosophical questions about guilt, redemption, the essence of human nature, and problems of knowledge, memory and identity. In the neo-noir universe, the lines between right and wrong and good and evil are blurred, and the detective and the criminal frequently mirror each other's most debilitating personality traits. The neo-noir detective -- more antihero than hero -- is frequently a morally compromised and spiritually shaken individual whose pursuit of a criminal masks the search for lost or unattainable aspects of the self. Conard argues that the films discussed in The Philosophy of Neo-Noir convey ambiguity, disillusionment, and disorientation more effectively than even the most iconic films of the classic noir era. Able to self-consciously draw upon noir conventions and simultaneously subvert them, neo-noir directors push beyond the earlier genre's limitations and open new paths of cinematic and philosophical exploration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2jcts3
Blade Runner and Sartre: from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Barad Judith
Abstract: Blade Runner(Ridley Scott, 1982) combines film noir and science fiction to tell a story that questions what it means to be human, a question as old as Methuselah.¹ However, this ancient question still arises in 2019 A.D. within a setting that pits humans against androids. The humans consider the androids, which they callreplicants,to be nothing more than multifaceted machines. Created on an assembly line by the Tyrell Corporation’s genetic engineers, they are organisms manufactured to serve as slave labor for exploring and colonizing other planets. As manufactured artifacts, they are thought of as expendable substitutes for their
Problems of Memory and Identity in Neo-Noir’s Existentialist Antihero from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Spicer Andrew
Abstract: One of the most arresting traits of film noir is its depiction of male protagonists who lack the qualities (courage, incorruptibility, tenacity, and dynamism) that characterize the archetypal American hero and who therefore function as antiheroes. Typical noir male protagonists are weak, confused, unstable, and ineffectual, damaged men who suffer from a range of psychological neuroses and who are unable to resolve the problems they face. Noir’s depiction of its male protagonists—what Frank Krutnik calls its “pervasive problematising of masculine identity”—is expressive of a fundamentally existentialist view of life.¹ As Robert Porfirio argues, noir’s “nonheroic hero” is such
“Saint” Sydney: from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Hirsch Foster
Abstract: In
Hard Eight(1996), the first-time writer-director Paul Thomas Anderson offers a distinctly modern interpretation of a character type familiar from the original era of noir. In his contemporary rendering, which is neither reverential homage nor postmodern deconstruction, Anderson offers an elegant, rigorous character study as well as a provocative reexamination of some of noir’s central philosophical, thematic, and visual motifs. Confronting universal moral issues—guilt and innocence, crime and punishment—raised by earlier crime dramas, the film investigates the possibilities of salvation within a traditionally treacherous cinematic realm.
The Human Comedy Perpetuates Itself: from:
The Philosophy of Neo-Noir
Author(s) Hibbs Thomas S.
Abstract: From their inaugural film, the 1984
Blood Simple,through the film blanc of the 1996Fargo,to the 2001The Man Who Wasn’t There,the Coen brothers have exhibited a preoccupation with the themes, characters, and stylistic techniques of film noir. By the time they madeBlood Simplein 1984, neo-noir was already established as a recognized category of film.¹ Prior to Quentin Tarantino’s darkly comedic unraveling of noir motifs inReservoir Dogs(1992) andPulp Fiction(1994), the Coens were already making consciously comic use of noir plots and stylistic techniques. Without Tarantino’s penchant for hyperactive and culturally claustrophobic
The Symbolism of Blood in Clockers from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) McFarland Douglas
Abstract: Spike Lee dramatically announces the tone and perspective of his adaptation of Richard Price’s novel of urban decay,
Clockers(1995), in the opening credits of the film. Since the silent era, opening credits have served a variety of functions. As David Bordwell points out, they are “highly self-conscious and explicitly addressed to the audience.”¹ Not only do titles and names provide a context for the narrative, but still and moving images oft en “anticipate a motif” or “establish the space of upcoming action.” Credits, Bordewell argues, accumulate significance as “memory is amplified by the ongoing story.”² InClockers, Lee goes
We Can’t Get Off the Bus: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Beckles-Raymond Gabriella
Abstract: On October 16, 1995, a million black men marched on Washington, D.C.,¹ answering Louis Farrakhan’s call for reconciliation and atonement.² Not since the 1963 march for civil rights had so many Americans descended on Capitol Hill. Although the mainstream contemporary historical narrative suggests otherwise, Martin Luther King Jr., like Farrakhan, was a controversial figure in his time. Nevertheless, in spite of the varied perspectives within the African American community about Farrakhan’s beliefs and methods,³ his call to action was answered by thousands of African American men across the country.
Feminists and “Freaks”: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Hoffman Karen D.
Abstract: Shortly after the release of
She’s Gotta Have It(1986), Spike Lee’s first full-length feature film, feminists began discussing the lead character, Nola Darling (Tracy Camilla Johns), and questioning the extent to which she embodies a liberatory ideal of African American female sexuality.¹ Involved with three different men without being committed to any of them, Nola initially appears to be a woman who knows what she wants and how to get it. But, upon deeper inspection, she is also revealed to be a rather superficial woman who embodies problematic gender stereotypes, has very few female friends, and is ultimately punished
Bamboozled: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Flory Dan
Abstract: Spike Lee is no stranger to controversy. Since the beginning of his career the director has used his films to confront audiences with difficult issues that need to be understood and thought about—for example, the genesis of riots (
Do the Right Thing[1989]), the politics of interracial relationships (Jungle Fever[1991]), reasons for the existence of drug cultures (Clockers[1995]), xenophobia (Summer of Sam[1999]), and the importance of taking responsibility for one’s actions (25th Hour[2002],Inside Man[2006]). Through his work, then, Lee seeks to compel viewers to face up to and reflect on matters of urgent
Transcendence and Sublimity in Spike Lee’s Signature Shot from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) Abrams Jerold J.
Abstract: In most of his films, Spike Lee includes a shot of an individual silently floating forward toward the viewer. Lee calls this his “signature shot.”¹ Before the signature shot, the on-screen world appears interconnected and real. But then suddenly realism fades and the character enters a different mode of space-time as if temporarily removed from gravity and the present. The character appears to leave the film and traverse the boundary between screen and viewer like an object in a 3-D movie or like the viewer’s imagination itself, which also traverses this boundary to immerse itself in the film. In this
Rethinking the First Person: from:
The Philosophy of Spike Lee
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: Can someone else write my autobiography? The question challenges the conventional meaning of autobiography. And since writing an autobiography—in America, after Benjamin Franklin—often occurs with an awareness that the status of the work is bound up with the authority of its author, the notion of authorship also becomes troubled.¹ For instance, because an autobiography appears to be direct communication from its author, the very conditions of its presentation may suggest we are reading a true story, a mere record of what happened. Yet, like the life it aims to account for, autobiography is fashioned, a literary artifact, necessarily
1 Changing forms of communal tenure from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Ward R. Gerard
Abstract: It is also necessary to question whether we are dealing with common property at all in Pacific island land tenure. We might also consider whether customary land tenure, especially as often practised, is necessarily the inhibiting factor for development which it
4 Customary land tenure and common/public rights to minerals in Papua New Guinea from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Lakau Andrew A.L.
Abstract: for pre-colonial trade, significant sub-surface substances were extracted for use in the manufacture of items for trade, or for trade in their original form. These included mineral pigments
10 Cooperative approaches to marine resource management in the South Pacific from:
The Governance of Common Property in the Pacific Region
Author(s) Hunt Colin
Abstract: New cooperative approaches to the management of marine resources are imperative in the delivery of sustainable incomes and livelihoods in the South Pacific. While recent international agreements have strengthened the sovereignty of states over their adjacent ocean resources, the actual development and implementation of management regimes for tuna, arguably the region’s most important renewable resource in terms of income-generating potential, will require a much more concerted approach by Pacific island states. This will need to be matched by a willingness on the part of the non-coastal states that traditionally harvest the bulk of the region’s oceanic resources to cooperate in
Book Title: Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): DeCrane Susanne M.
Abstract: To dismiss the work of philosophers and theologians of the past because of their limited perceptions of the whole of humankind is tantamount to tossing the tot out with the tub water. Such is the case when feminist scholars of religion and ethics confront Thomas Aquinas, whose views of women can only be described as misogynistic. Rather than dispense with him, Susanne DeCrane seeks to engage Aquinas and reflect his otherwise compelling thought through the prism of feminist theology, hermeneutics, and ethics. Focusing on one of Aquinas's great intellectual contributions, the fundamental notion of "the common good"-in short, the human will toward peace and justice-DeCrane demonstrates the currency of that notion through a contemporary social issue: women's health care in the United States and, specifically, black women and breast cancer. In her skillful re-engagement with Aquinas, DeCrane shows that certain aspects of religious traditions heretofore understood as oppressive to women and minority groups can actually be parsed, "retrieved," and used to rectify social ills.
Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Goodis a bold and intellectually rigorous feminist retrieval of an important text by a Catholic scholar seeking to remain in the tradition, while demanding that the tradition live up to its emphasis on human equity and justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt3q4
Introduction from:
Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: It is widely recognized that postmodernism has shaped contemporary approaches to theology and ethics.¹ Given this fact, a writer must make clear at the outset the ways in which she responds to the postmodern challenge regarding the use of classic texts and universal claims. However, the issue is not as simple as responding to a
singular postmodern challenge.² Rather, the postmodern critique of modern, liberal, Enlightenment-based convictions holds within it a range of orientations toward purported universal truths. This book is a response to these postmodern positions. At the same time, it offers a constructive method for retrieving a classic
CHAPTER 4 The Retrieved Principle of the Common Good and Health Care in the United States from:
Aquinas, Feminism, and the Common Good
Abstract: Now that we have retrieved Aquinas’s principle of the common good through the proposed feminist hermeneutics, we should inquire about its significance for the community. What is this retrieved principle capable of? What does it offer the human community? On the one hand, the distinction between fundamental ethics and applied ethics ought to be left intact; certainly the two moments in ethics are distinct and should not be blurred into one another, nor should one be reduced to the other. On the other hand, from several quarters we find an expectation if not a demand that theoretical considerations be extended
CHAPTER 11 The Hunting and the Haunting from:
In Search of the Whole
Author(s) Steele Peter
Abstract: I have written well over a hundred poems that are to one degree or another after works of art—usually paintings. When I was asked recently about the attraction of such a topic, it occurred to me that the attraction lies in part in the fact that those works are finished things: whether or not they sport actual frames, they are all in some sense framed. Another way of saying this is that they are the polar opposite of the chaotic; and for reasons in part instinctive and in part educational, I do love the manifestly coherent—a brick wall
Book Title: Christianity in Evolution-An Exploration
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): MAHONEY JACK
Abstract: Evolution has provided a new understanding of reality, with revolutionary consequences for Christianity. In an evolutionary perspective the incarnation involved God entering the evolving human species to help it imitate the trinitarian altruism in whose image it was created and counter its tendency to self-absorption. Primarily, however, the evolutionary achievement of Jesus was to confront and overcome death in an act of cosmic significance, ushering humanity into the culminating stage of its evolutionary destiny, the full sharing of God's inner life. Previously such doctrines as original sin, the fall, sacrifice, and atonement stemmed from viewing death as the penalty for sin and are shown not only to have serious difficulties in themselves, but also to emerge from a Jewish culture preoccupied with sin and sacrifice that could not otherwise account for death. The death of Jesus on the cross is now seen as saving humanity, not from sin, but from individual extinction and meaninglessness. Death is now seen as a normal process that affect all living things and the religious doctrines connected with explaining it in humans are no longer required or justified. Similar evolutionary implications are explored affecting other subjects of Christian belief, including the Church, the Eucharist, priesthood, and moral behavior.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt49s
CHAPTER THREE The Evolutionary Achievement of Jesus from:
Christianity in Evolution
Abstract: In the previous chapter I offered a response to a question that Pope John Paul II once addressed to evolutionary science, whether an evolutionary perspective would throw any light on Christian beliefs, specifically on the significance of the human person as created in the image of God. In answer, I proposed that human altruism, which puzzles many evolutionary scientists, can provide a theological link between God and his human creature in that altruism originates in the life of the divine Trinity of persons as they interact in self-donation to each other and are operative in the work of creation, and
Chapter 1 Believers and Citizens from:
Building a Better Bridge
Author(s) Ipgrave Michael
Abstract: How do two senses of belonging relate—to a universal religion and to a particular society? How do two senses of allegiance relate—to God and to a state? How do two senses of identity relate—as believers and as citizens? These questions have been posed throughout both Christian and Muslim history, and a variety of answers have been given to them. Context has been a critically important factor in shaping not only the answers but also, prior to that, the very way in which the questions are shaped, as the following essays and presentations demonstrate.
Chapter 3 Caring Together for the World We Share from:
Building a Better Bridge
Author(s) Nayed Aref Ali
Abstract: The four essays presented in this chapter all address, in light of the Christian and Muslim faiths, the interaction of human communities with the world all share. While rooted in the distinctive affirmations of their respective religious traditions, all four can be described as being in the broad sense ecumenical in that their field of vision is the whole inhabited world, the
oikoumene. Moreover, they focus on two particularly urgent areas of concern that arise from humans’ dwelling together in the shared home, the oikos, which is the world. Thus Rowan Williams and Tim Winter both tackle the theological challenge
Book Title: Power and the Past-Collective Memory and International Relations
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Shain Yossi
Abstract: Only recently have international relations scholars started to seriously examine the influence of collective memory on foreign policy formation and relations between states and peoples. The ways in which the memories of past events are interpreted, misinterpreted, or even manipulated in public discourse create the context that shapes international relations.
Power and the Pastbrings together leading history and international relations scholars to provide a groundbreaking examination of the impact of collective memory. This timely study makes a contribution to developing a theory of memory and international relations and also examines specific cases of collective memory's influence resulting from the legacies of World War II, the Holocaust, and September 11. Addressing concerns shared by world leaders and international institutions as well as scholars of international studies, this volume illustrates clearly how the memory of past events alters the ways countries interact in the present, how memory shapes public debate and policymaking, and how memory may aid or more frequently impede conflict resolution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt597
Introduction: from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Shain Yossi
Abstract: Collective memories have long influenced domestic politics and especially international affairs—a fact most recently exemplified by the terrorist attacks on the United States on September 11, 2001. The events and the memories resulting from them became powerful motivating forces for Americans almost overnight. At home, an infrastructure of commemoration quickly arose—in films like
United 93 (2006); memorials including one unveiled at the Pentagon in September 2008 and the Tribute World Trade Center Visitor Center opened in 2006; and even in political campaign discourse, as at the 2008 Republican National Convention.¹ Yet, as with other collective memories worldwide, there
Chapter 5 Memory, Tradition, and Revival: from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Soltes Ori Z.
Abstract: After the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001, as at many other moments in history, a specifically “Jewish” dimension has arisen. Beyond the shockingly persistent rumors of some kind of Israeli–Jewish conspiracy behind the attacks in the first place, the policy aftermath—especially the global war on terror and the invasion of Iraq—was widely perceived as being pushed by “Jewish interests and actors.”¹ These most recent examples once again raise the question of who speaks on behalf of “Jewish political interests”—and once again generates interest in the complex interrelationship among various diasporas and Israel, as well as
Chapter 6 September 11 in the Rearview Mirror: from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Bartov Omer
Abstract: At the end of the last century several books were published reviewing the past hundred years and making predictions about the future. Historians naturally participated both in the summing up and in the more tentative forecasts. Not surprisingly, historians are much better qualified to analyze the events of yesteryear than to predict what might happen tomorrow. But they—or I should say we—do work under the assumption that by detecting some trends, undercurrents, structures, evolutionary predilections, or revolutionary preconditions, which characterized past events, we might be better prepared for them in the future as well. In other words, we
Chapter 7 The Eventful Dates 12/12 and 9/11: from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Kazin Michael
Abstract: The title of this chapter may puzzle the reader. My purpose is to juxtapose the historical impact of events that took place on two highly significant dates in the recent past. Then I raise what I hope will be a few provocative suggestions about what we might think about what occurred—especially with regard to American identity and foreign affairs.
Conclusion: from:
Power and the Past
Author(s) Shain Yossi
Abstract: Second, complex interactions between
Introduction from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: The discourse of human rights has emerged as the dominant moral discourse of our time. Reflecting on this often contentious discourse, with both its enthusiasts and detractors, led me to consider the following questions: What constitutes an intelligible definition of human rights? What place should this discourse occupy within ethics? Can theology acknowledge human rights discourse? How is theological engagement with human rights justified? What are the implications of the convergence of what are two potentially universalizable discourses?
Chapter One A Dialectical Boundary Discourse: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: Has this child no share in human dignity? Has he or she no appeal to human rights, the dominant moral discourse of our time? Richard Rorty describes the contemporary moral landscape as one primarily inhabited by “Kantians” or “Hegelians.” Those who hold that there are such things as intrinsic human dignity and universal human rights are Kantians. They also uphold an ahistorical distinction between the demands of morality and those of prudence. Rorty identifies a particular type of contemporary Hegelian as one who seeks to uphold the institutions and practices of liberal democracies without an appeal to their foundations in
Chapter Three Human Rights in Time: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: This chapter situates human rights as a “realist” discourse in time, located between the memory of suffering and hope for the future. It begins with a brief exploration of the concept of memory, particularly the efforts to develop what Paul Ricoeur calls a culture of
just memory. The contribution of Recuperación de la Memoría Historica, produced by the Human Rights Office of the Catholic Archdiocese of Guatemala, to our understanding of the impact of human rights violations, not just on individuals—damaging thereby both victims and perpetrators—but also on the fabric of community, will be examined. The “interruption” of
Chapter Four Liberation Theology and Human Rights: from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: This chapter is neither an overview of liberation theology nor an exposition of particular liberation theologians but an exploration of the engagement of liberation theology with human rights discourse and the contribution it makes to this discourse through its focus on the preferential option for the poor and the historical realization of the rights of the poor.¹ My approach to liberation theology is both sympathetic and critical, conscious of the poles of idealization and dismissal that often characterize responses to this theology.
Chapter Five Rights-Holders or Beggars? from:
Theology and the Boundary Discourse of Human Rights
Abstract: This book has explored the engagement between theology and the discourse of human rights, a dialectical boundary discourse of human flourishing, positioned in ethics as “protective marginality.” As a dialectical language, human rights holds in tension the universal and the particular, the individual and the community, the religious and the secular, theory and practice. It draws attention to suffering and sets conditions and guidelines for the exercise of responsibility in response to the awareness of suffering.
Book Title: Telling Stories-Language, Narrative, and Social Life
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Nylund Anastasia
Abstract: Narratives are fundamental to our lives: we dream, plan, complain, endorse, entertain, teach, learn, and reminisce through telling stories. They provide hopes, enhance or mitigate disappointments, challenge or support moral order and test out theories of the world at both personal and communal levels. It is because of this deep embedding of narrative in everyday life that its study has become a wide research field including disciplines as diverse as linguistics, literary theory, folklore, clinical psychology, cognitive and developmental psychology, anthropology, sociology, and history. In
Telling Storiesleading scholars illustrate how narratives build bridges among language, identity, interaction, society, and culture; and they investigate various settings such as therapeutic and medical encounters, educational environments, politics, media, marketing, and public relations. They analyze a variety of topics from the narrative construction of self and identity to the telling of stories in different media and the roles that small and big life stories play in everyday social interactions and institutions. These new reflections on the theory and analysis of narrative offer the latest tools to researchers in the fields of discourse analysis and sociolinguistics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt629
4 Positioning as a Metagrammar for Discursive Story Lines from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) HARRÉ ROM
Abstract: POSITIONING THEORY is the most recent in a long-running sequence of efforts to try to make social psychology more scientifically respectable—that is, to make methods of inquiry and theoretical models conform to the nature of the phenomena of interest, namely,
meanings. In carrying through this program, one of the first and most prominent casualties is the concept of “causation.” The explanation of the succession between two social acts, a1 and a2, is not to be looked for in some causal law that a1s cause a2s to occur. Rather, it is to be found in the meaning relations between the
5 “Ay Ay Vienen Estos Juareños”: from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) RAZO ELIANA
Abstract: IN THIS CHAPTER we examine what appears to be a perfect storm related to identity work in social interaction: the use of language alternation in quoting others’ speech in the course of telling conversational, or “small,” stories. Central to language alternation is laying claim to, putting off, or otherwise constructing and negotiating social identities (Torras and Gafaranga 2002). Similarly, identity formation and construction are based in narrative forms and functions (Georgakopoulou 2006; Taylor 2006). Last, identity work is at the core of reported speech (Clift 2006; Stokoe and Edwards 2007). Here we analyze two conversational stories from group interview sessions
6 A Tripartite Self-Construction Model of Identity from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) COHEN LEOR
Abstract: THE PURPOSE of this study is to explore how people negotiate their place in the world through the discursive manipulations of identity. A social constructionist perspective is assumed, where identity is constructed online through discourse in social interaction. Constructionism views identity as a dynamic, fluid, multiplicitous construct able to adjust to the demands of the almost infinite array of contexts. Interactional sociolinguistics emerged out of a constructionist framework (De Fina, Schiffrin, and Bamberg 2006, 1–6), where the microanalysis of discourse affords diverse opportunities to uncover that which would otherwise be rationally invisible (Garfinkel 1967, vii; Shotter 1993, 102). This
9 Blank Check for Biography?: from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) BAMBERG MICHAEL
Abstract: IN RECENT PUBLICATIONS, Alexandra Georgakopoulou and I (Bamberg 2007; Bamberg and Georgakopoulou 2008; Georgakopoulou 2007a, 2007b) have put forth the argument that life stories—that is, stories in which tellers cover their personal past from early on, leading up to the “here and now” of the telling situation—are extremely rare. People never really tell the true details of their lives, unless for very particular circumstance—as, for example, in life story interviews, and occasionally in therapeutic interviews. Of course, this is not entirely true. There indeed are occasions, although these cannot be characterized as typical everyday and mundane situations
11 Negotiating Deviance: from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) MILDORF JARMILA
Abstract: LIFE NARRATIVE RESEARCH in personality psychology has focused on narrative trajectories and on how dispositional traits (what your personality is
usually or typically like) and characteristic adaptations (i.e., more particularized and context-sensitive aspects of one’s personality) are combined to form integrative life stories (McAdams 1985). However, life stories can also go awry. This calls for revisions of assumptions such as continuity. Mishler (2006, 41) argues that the conception of a plurality of subidentities “points to another problem with temporal-order models of progressive change: the tendency to treat identity development as a unitary process, as if each life could be defined
14 Truth and Authorship in Textual Trajectories from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) CARRANZA ISOLDA E.
Abstract: THE TWO TERMS in the title of this chapter, “truth” and “authorship,” have long been central topics in narrative research. They remain ineludible because they are not only core elements of narrativity but also raise key questions about the roles of narrative in social life. The chapter seeks to show how truth and authorship are shaped by the path taken by witnesses’ depositions within the institutional meanders of the justice system. It does so by focusing on the multilateral character of storytelling in institutions and the complex processes of entextualization, decontextualization, and recontextualization.
16 Multimodal Storytelling and Identity Construction in Graphic Narratives from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) HERMAN DAVID
Abstract: WHEN THEY FOUNDED the field of narratology in the middle to late 1960s, structuralist theorists of narrative failed to come to terms with two dimensions of narrative that constitute focal concerns of this chapter: on the one hand, the referential or world-creating potential of stories; on the other hand, the issue of medium-specificity, or the way storytelling practices, including those bearing on world creation, might be shaped by the expressive capacities of a given semiotic environment. Exploration of both of these dimensions of narrative has played a major role in the advent of “postclassical” approaches to the study of stories
17 The Role of Style Shifting in the Functions and Purposes of Storytelling: from:
Telling Stories
Author(s) NAZIKIAN FUMIKO
Abstract: ANIME IS A STYLE OF ANIMATION, commonly referred to as Japanese animation, that is popular not only in Japan but around the world. This popularity is in part due to the intriguing stories and the interesting roles played by anime characters. Using a discourse-based microanalysis, this chapter examines the role of speech styles in the context of storytelling, especially focusing on the role of style shifting in Japanese. Using anime as data, I attempt to show how people choose certain linguistic resources to present various images of themselves or others to fulfill various communicative goals. More specifically, I investigate a
Book Title: The Sexual Person-Toward a Renewed Catholic Anthropology
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Lawler Michael G.
Abstract: Two principles capture the essence of the official Catholic position on the morality of sexuality: first, that any human genital act must occur within the framework of heterosexual marriage; second, each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life. In this comprehensive overview of Catholicism and sexuality, theologians Todd A. Salzman and Michael G. Lawler examine and challenge these principles. Remaining firmly within the Catholic tradition, they contend that the church is being inconsistent in its teaching by adopting a dynamic, historically conscious anthropology and worldview on social ethics and the interpretation of scripture while adopting a static, classicist anthropology and worldview on sexual ethics. While some documents from Vatican II, like
Gaudium et spes("the marital act promotes self-giving by which spouses enrich each other"), gave hope for a renewed understanding of sexuality, the church has not carried out the full implications of this approach. In short, say Salzman and Lawler: emphasize relationships, not acts, and recognize Christianity's historically and culturally conditioned understanding of human sexuality.The Sexual Persondraws historically, methodologically, and anthropologically from the best of Catholic tradition and provides a context for current theological debates between traditionalists and revisionists regarding marriage, cohabitation, homosexuality, reproductive technologies, and what it means to be human. This daring and potentially revolutionary book will be sure to provoke constructive dialogue among theologians, and between theologians and the Magisterium.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt69p
Prologue from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Two magisterial principles capture the essence of the Catholic moral, sexual tradition. The first principle comes from the Congregation for the Doctrine of the Faith: “Any human genital act whatsoever may be placed only within the framework of marriage.”¹ The second received its modern articulation in Pope Paul VI’s
Humanae vitae: “Each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life.”² In the Catholic tradition sexual activity is institutionalized within the confines of marriage and procreation, and sexual morality is marital morality.
Chapter One Sexual Morality in the Catholic Tradition: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Human sexual activity and the sexual ethics that seeks to order it are both sociohistorical realities and are, therefore, subject to historicity, the quality of the human animal that follows inevitably from his and her situation in real time and space and “provides him with a [human] world that he must accept in freedom.”¹ Before we embark on a presentation of contemporary Catholic sexual anthropology and ethics, therefore, it behooves us to look at their past history. In this chapter we do that in two stages. First, and briefly because it is already well known and well documented, we consider
Chapter Two Natural Law and Sexual Anthropology: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: “Traditionalist” is the general label given to moral theologians who support and defend absolute magisterial norms prohibiting certain types of sexual acts such as premarital sex, artificial birth control, artificial reproductive technologies, masturbation, and homosexual acts. The traditionalist school is contrasted with the revisionist school. “Revisionist” is the general label given to moral theologians who question many of these absolute norms. These two groups disagree on many specific sexual norms because they disagree, more fundamentally, on method and the sexual anthropology that either supports these norms or questions their legitimacy and credibility. After defining the complex term “nature,” which is
Chapter Three Natural Law and Sexual Anthropology: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Catholic traditionalist sexual anthropology emphasizes classicism, the universality of basic goods and human “nature,” absolute norms, and an act-centered morality. Catholic revisionist sexual anthropology emphasizes historical consciousness, the particularity of basic goods and the human person, norms that reflect this particularity, and a relational-centered morality. In this chapter, we present a revisionist critique of traditionalist sexual anthropology. We then explore various dimensions of revisionist, including feminist, sexual anthropologies.
Chapter Four Unitive Sexual Morality: from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Theologians who espouse the
Gaudium et spes tradition find in the document a foundational principle for judging all human activity, including human sexual activity, namely, the criterion of the human person adequately considered. A reasonable question immediately arises: What does it mean to consider the human sexual person adequately in order to respond to complex moral issues surrounding human sexuality? In response to this question we first formulate a foundational principle of human sexuality; we then expand on the morally significant dimensions of that principle; and finally we draw insight from these dimensions in our reconstructed definition of complementarity, a
Chapter Five Marital Morality from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: In the previous chapter we advanced a theoretical foundational principle for making judgments about the morality of sexual actions. This principle was articulated as follows: Sexual actions within marriage by which a couple is united intimately and chastely are noble and worthy. If expressed in a manner that is truly human and justly loving, these actions signify and promote that mutual self-giving whereby spouses enrich each other, their family, and their community with a joyful and thankful will. We also introduced into the discussion of complementarity, initiated by Pope John Paul II, a definition, the notion of orientation complementarity and,
Epilogue from:
The Sexual Person
Abstract: Throughout this book we have argued that Catholic sexual morality is institutionalized within the confines of marriage and procreation, and we have examined the foundations of two principles that articulate the essence of that Catholic morality. The first principle states that “any human genital act whatsoever may be placed only within the confines of marriage”;¹ the second states that “each and every marriage act must remain open to the transmission of life.”² In contemporary Catholic moral theology, two approaches to understanding these principles demarcate two schools of Catholic moral theology. First, the classicist approach holds the principles as universal, permanent,
Book Title: Ethics in Light of Childhood- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Childhood faces humanity with its own deepest and most perplexing questions. An ethics that truly includes the world's childhoods would transcend pre-modern traditional communities and modern rational autonomy with a postmodern aim of growing responsibility. It would understand human relations in a poetic rather than universalistic sense as openly and interdependently creative. As a consequence, it would produce new understandings of moral being, time, and otherness, as well as of religion, rights, narrative, families, obligation, and power.
Ethics in Light of Childhoodfundamentally reimagines ethical thought and practice in light of the experiences of the third of humanity who are children. Much like humanism, feminism, womanism, and environmentalism, Wall argues, a new childism is required that transforms moral thinking, relations, and societies in fundamental ways. Wall explores childhood's varied impacts on ethical thinking throughout history, advances the emerging interdisciplinary field of childhood studies, and reexamines basic assumptions in contemporary moral theory and practice. In the process, he does not just apply ethics to childhood but applies childhood to ethics-in order to imagine a more expansive humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt6ww
Chapter 2 What Is Human Being? from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: IT MAY SEEM OBVIOUS to say that children are full human beings. But as the history sketched in the previous chapter shows, it is not easy to explain what exactly this means. Leading thinkers’ efforts to describe children’s full humanity have resulted in one or another form of oversimplification. Of course, such is the case for any person or group. It is to some extent inevitable that talk about humanity is dehumanizing. But for children in particular, the problem is complicated by the fact that they cannot, on the whole—nor should they—be held as responsible as adults for
Chapter 3 What Is the Ethical Aim? from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: SO FAR, we have only considered the abstract question of the nature of human being. Childhood has a surprising amount to teach on this score. However, ethics is not just about being but also about doing, especially by and for children.
Chapter 5 Human Rights in Light of Childhood from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: I start in this chapter with the practice of human rights. I do so because despite being intended to unite humanity, “human”
Chapter 6 The Generative Family from:
Ethics in Light of Childhood
Abstract: A SECOND WAY TO consider some of the practical implications of childism is to think about the ethical dimensions of life in families. Of course, discussion of children has historically included families centrally. From the point of view of childhood, it is clearly important for human beings to take part in close kin networks. The birth of each new person in the world is, in a way, the rebirth of family: a bodily bond to a mother and father, an emotional and economic bond to a household, a genetic bond to a larger ancestry, and a cultural bond to a
Book Title: Overcoming Our Evil-Human Nature and Spiritual Exercises in Xunzi and Augustine
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Stalnaker Aaron
Abstract: Can people ever really change? Do they ever become more ethical, and if so, how?
Overcoming Our Evilfocuses on the way ethical and religious commitments are conceived and nurtured through the methodical practices that Pierre Hadot has called "spiritual exercises." These practices engage thought, imagination, and sensibility, and have a significant ethical component, yet aim for a broader transformation of the whole personality. Going beyond recent philosophical and historical work that has focused on ancient Greco-Roman philosophy, Stalnaker broadens ethical inquiry into spiritual exercises by examining East Asian as well as classical Christian sources, and taking religious and seemingly "aesthetic" practices such as prayer, ritual, and music more seriously as objects of study. More specifically,Overcoming Our Evilexamines and compares the thought and practice of the early Christian Augustine of Hippo, and the early Confucian Xunzi. Both have sophisticated and insightful accounts of spiritual exercises, and both make such ethical work central to their religious thought and practice. Yet to understand the two thinkers' recommendations for cultivating virtue we must first understand some important differences. Here Stalnaker disentangles the competing aspects of Augustine and Xunxi's ideas of "human nature." His groundbreaking comparison of their ethical vocabularies also drives a substantive analysis of fundamental issues in moral psychology, especially regarding emotion and the complex idea of "the will," to examine how our dispositions to feel, think, and act might be slowly transformed over time. The comparison meticulously constructs vivid portraits of both thinkers demonstrating where they connect and where they diverge, making the case that both have been misunderstood and misinterpreted. In throwing light on these seemingly disparate ancient figures in unexpected ways, Stalnaker redirects recent debate regarding practices of personal formation, and more clearly exposes the intellectual and political issues involved in the retrieval of "classic" ethical sources in diverse contemporary societies, illuminating a path toward a contemporary understanding of difference.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt78n
Introduction: from:
Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Does anyone ever really change?¹ Religions tend to answer this question with an emphatic yes. And it does seem that religions can transform people: Some believers become selfless servants of the poor, or even suicide bombers. But how and why might this happen? Similar circumstances push people in quite different ways; “good intentions” alone are not sufficient for real conversion to some demanding new form of life. This book focuses on how ethical and religious commitments are conceived, articulated, and nurtured through methodical practices that guide aspirants through alternative territories of sin and salvation, ignorance and wisdom, or suffering and
CHAPTER FIVE Comparing Human “Natures” from:
Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: Bridge concepts aim to provoke accounts of widely separated figures in terms of a common set of topics that highlight particular points of similarity and difference. By creating more precise points of contact, the comparativist can provide the basis for an imaginary dialogue between the two positions thus articulated and thereby pursue more substantive investigations of the general topic the bridge concept specifies. Thus a bridge concept like “human nature” can serve to generate what might be called a
problématique for inquiry. The process works as follows: Comparison provokes conceptual analysis of what at first seemed to be a straightforward
CHAPTER SIX Artifice Is the Way from:
Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: In this chapter, I outline Xunzi’s understanding of human ethical and religious development. The first section sets the stage by considering Xunzi’s general conception of the Confucian Way. Here I explore and analyze his various evocative metaphors for personal formation, and the theories into which they are interwoven. The second section begins by relating the bridge concept of spiritual exercises to the early Chinese problematic of
xiu shen 修身, usually translated as “self-cultivation.” The bulk of this section, and of the chapter as a whole, examines Xunzi’s general account of the exercises he advocates most strongly: study, ritual practice, and
CHAPTER NINE Understanding and Neighborliness from:
Overcoming Our Evil
Abstract: It should be clear by now that I am practicing a form of intellectual self-restraint in these pages, one with roots in the phenomenological tradition of religious studies.¹ By deferring global judgments of truth or superiority in favor of one or the other figure (although not eschewing specific criticisms and evaluative choices), I have built up detailed accounts of Xunzi’s and Augustine’s views of personal formation, articulated in relation to each other and to some modern ethical theory. The interpretations offered suggest that despite both their broad apparent similarities regarding the ethical dangers of human nature and the need for
CHAPTER II The Problem of the Reality of the Unconscious from:
Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: Freud has often been credited, if not with an actual “discovery” of the unconscious (which he had the wisdom not to claim entirely for himself), at least with the introduction of a revolutionary idea of its nature and function. It is less frequently noticed, however, that his vision of consciousness remained utterly traditional and bound to the idea of consciousness as the internal perception of “objects” of a certain type—the paradigm of clear and immediate perception. Ernest Tugendhat, among others, has rightly insisted on this fact, which is not inconsequential;¹ and indeed Freud’s conception of the nature of consciousness
CHAPTER IV Reasons and Causes from:
Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: The proposition that your action has such and such a cause, is a hypothesis. The hypothesis is well-founded if one has had a number of experiences which, roughly speaking, agree in showing that your action is the regular sequel of certain conditions which we then call causes of the action. In order to
CHAPTER V The Mechanics of the Mind from:
Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: Freud’s colossal prejudices, in Wittgenstein’s view, all stem from three underlying assumptions of Freudian theory which he implicitly or explicitly contests. The first of these is psychic determinism, which Freud himself regularly presented as a constitutive preconception that could not be questioned. As Sulloway writes: “Freud’s entire life’s work in science was characterized by an abiding faith in the notion that all vital phenomena, including psychical ones, are rigidly and lawfully determined by the principle of cause and effect” (
Freud, Biologist of the Mind, p. 94). In thePsychopathology of Everyday Life, Freud explains what distinguishes his basic convictions from
CHAPTER VII The “Message” of the Dream from:
Wittgenstein Reads Freud: The Myth of the Unconscious
Abstract: For in what follows “speech” must be understood not merely to mean the expression of thought in words but to include the speech of gesture and every other method, such, for instance, as writing, by which mental activity can be expressed. That being so, it may be pointed out that the interpretations made by psycho-analysis are first and foremost translations from an alien method of expression into one which is familiar to us. When we interpret a dream
Book Title: The Furies-Violence and Terror in the French and Russian Revolutions
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): MAYER ARNO J.
Abstract: Although these two upheavals arose in different environments, they followed similar courses. The thought and language of Enlightenment France were the glories of western civilization; those of tsarist Russia's intelligentsia were on its margins. Both revolutions began as revolts vowed to fight unreason, injustice, and inequality; both swept away old regimes and defied established religions in societies that were 85% peasant and illiterate; both entailed the terrifying return of repressed vengeance. Contrary to prevalent belief, Mayer argues, ideologies and personalities did not control events. Rather, the tide of violence overwhelmed the political actors who assumed power and were rudderless. Even the best plans could not stem the chaos that at once benefited and swallowed them. Mayer argues that we have ignored an essential part of all revolutions: the resistances to revolution, both domestic and foreign, which help fuel the spiral of terror.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tt8x8
CHAPTER 2 Counterrevolution from:
The Furies
Abstract: There can be no revolution without counterrevolution; both as phenomenon and process, they are inseparable, like truth and falsehood. They are bound to each other “as reaction is bound to action,” making for a “historical motion, which is at once dialectical and driven by necessity.”¹ The struggle between the ideas and forces of revolution and counterrevolution was a prime mover of the spiraling violence inherent to the French and Russian revolutions.
CHAPTER 8 In the Eye of a “Time of Troubles”: from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1917 the overexertions of a protracted and failing war gravely unsettled Russia: the imperial army was on the verge of disintegration; famine stalked the major cities; the economy and exchequer were wasted; and industry was paralyzed. Twice before, in the time of the CrimeanWar and Russo-Japanese War, military defeat had shaken the tsarist regime and called forth prophylactic reforms. But in scale and intensity these earlier upheavals were nothing like the deep crisis brought on and fueled by the inordinate material and human sacrifices of the Very Great War. In February–March 1917, between the fall of the Peter-Paul
CHAPTER 9 Peasant War in France: from:
The Furies
Abstract: The Vendée was in essence a civil war, and it is this fact of civil war which accounts for its singular fury. If war is hell, then civil war belongs to hell’s deepest and most infernal regions. Except for the two world wars of the twentieth century, which were partly civil wars, Montaigne’s lapidary formulation stands: “foreign war is a much milder evil than civil war.”¹ Of course, this axiom is counterbalanced by Montesquieu’s reflection that “unrest within a country is preferable to the calm of despotism.”² In any case, in a long-term and universal perspective, civil war is “the
CHAPTER 10 Peasant War in Russia: from:
The Furies
Abstract: In considering the eruption of peasant resistance in the Russian Revolution from 1917 to 1921–22, two points need to be stressed at the outset. The first is the bare fact that in 1917 Russia was even more rural and agricultural than France in 1789. Close to 85 percent of the population lived in the countryside and made its living on or from the land. Even large sectors of the urban population were first-generation ex-peasants, with strong attachments to their native villages. Perforce the imperial army was a peasant army. In social, cultural, and religious terms, the world of the
CHAPTER 11 Engaging the Gallican Church and the Vatican from:
The Furies
Abstract: In 1789 france was 85 percent rural. Twenty-two million out of 28 million French men and women lived in the countryside, the overwhelming majority engaged in agriculture and agriculture-related work. At least one-third of them were poor or destitute. Their households and communities were trapped in inertia and were untouched by the
lumiéres. Illiteracy was very much the norm. Peasant traditions and attitudes were inseparable from religious beliefs and practices in which magic at once reinforced and alleviated the fear of famine and plague, as well as of the Last Judgment. The houses and representatives of God were as omnipresent
CHAPTER 13 Perils of Emancipation: from:
The Furies
Abstract: Although in the long run revolutionary situations benefit oppressed and persecuted religious minorities, in the short run they put them in peril. In 1789 the Protestants and in 1791 the Jews of France gained full emancipation; in 1917 the Jews of Russia. Each time, however, there was a price to be paid. In terms of lives, the cost of religious liberation was, of course, infinitely greater during the Russian than the French Revolution. But while adverse reactions against emancipation were very different in scale, their causes and dynamics were uncommonly alike. During both revolutions, antirevolutionaries and counterrevolutionaries were the chief
CHAPTER 14 Externalization of the French Revolution: from:
The Furies
Abstract: In fact, revolution and foreign war are inseparably linked. Although there can, of course, be war
Book Title: Being in the World-Dialogue and Cosmopolis
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: It is commonly agreed that we live in an age of globalization, but the profound consequences of this development are rarely understood. Usually, globalization is equated with the expansion of economic and financial markets and the proliferation of global networks of communication. In truth, much more is at stake: Traditional concepts of individual and national identity as well as perceived relationships between the self and others are undergoing profound change. Every town has become a potential cosmopolis -- an international city -- affecting the way that people conceptualize the relationship between public order and political practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv6pd
2. Cosmopolitanism: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: The legacy of Western “modernity” is ambivalent. On the one hand, it has bequeathed to us the inspiring ideas of global brotherhood and universal justice. On the other hand, in the aftermath of the Peace of Westphalia, it has launched the agenda of a compact, exclusivist nationalism or nation-state, an agenda often copied or supplemented by equally self-contained subnationalities. During the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, the nationalist agenda was steadily on the upsurge, engendering first a series of interstate wars and then the violent paroxysm of two World Wars. In the midst of these conflagrations, the broader civilizational vision was
5. Ethics and International Politics: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: It is a privilege and a pleasure to respond to my colleagues and friends.¹ It is a privilege because my colleagues are distinguished practitioners in their respective disciplines. It is a pleasure because reading their papers has broadened my horizons and responding to them enhances my critical self-understanding. My colleagues pose to me different questions and approach my work from different angles. However, if I am not mistaken, I perceive in their papers a common theme or thematic fabric that links them together: the theme of “ethics and international politics” (broadly construed). What leads me to this assumption or perception
7. The Body Politic: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: Looking at contemporary humanity, one can hardly avoid the impression of a huge body or organism ravaged by multiple diseases and even catastrophes.¹ Even without detailed diagnosis, it is not hard to trace these ailments to a set of underlying factors or causes: political oppression or domination; radical inequality between rich and poor; xenophobia sometimes resulting in genocide; terrorist violence; and the abuse of religions and ideologies. If such ailments occurred on a small scale or in a limited group of people, efforts would quickly be made to find remedies to combat the existing ills. However, if they happen on
8. A Secular Age? from:
Being in the World
Abstract: At least in the Western context, our age is commonly referred to as that of “modernity”—a term sometimes qualified as “late modernity” or “post-modernity.” Taken by itself, the term is nondescript; in its literal sense, it simply means a time of novelty or innovation. Hence, something needs to be added to capture the kind of novelty involved. To pinpoint this innovation, modernity is also referred to as the “age of reason” or the age of enlightenment and science—in order to demarcate the period from a prior age presumably characterized by unreason, metaphysical speculation, and intellectual obscurantism or darkness.
11. Radical Changes in the Muslim World: from:
Being in the World
Abstract: History defies linearity. In a time when, at least in the Western world, major issues appeared to be settled and some even predicted the “end of history,” drama has suddenly erupted elsewhere—and especially in the Muslim world. A political arena that in many respects seemed relatively stagnant has unexpectedly been gripped by radical turmoil and revolutionary fervor. This does not mean that such turmoil is ever completely unprepared or unmotivated. Contrary to their portrayal (by some academics) as near-apocalyptic interruptions beyond intelligibility, revolutions have precursors or conditioning factors; usually they are the product of a deep social malaise, of
Book Title: Covering for the Bosses-Labor and the Southern Press
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): ARONOWITZ STANLEY
Abstract: Joseph B. Atkins is a widely published journalist, professor of journalism at the University of Mississippi, and editor of
The Mission: Journalism, Ethics, and the World. Stanley Aronowitz is professor of sociology and cultural studies at the Graduate Center of the City University of New York. He is the author, most recently, ofLeft Turn: Forging a New Political Future;The Knowledge Factory; andHow Class Works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tv941
Chapter 4 LABOR, CIVIL RIGHTS, AND MEMPHIS from:
Covering for the Bosses
Abstract: The seeds of the civil rights movement that rocked the South in the 1950s and 1960s were planted long before by workers and labor organizers in the Southern textile mills and coal mines, by labor leaders like John L. Lewis and Walter Reuther of the CIO, and, of course, A. Phillip Randolph of the Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters. Also planting those seeds were the activists who participated in Highlander, the Southern Tenant Farmers’ Union, the Southern Conference for Human Welfare, and the CIO’s Operation Dixie.
Book Title: Faulkner-Masks and Metaphors
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Hönnighausen Lothar
Abstract: that Faulkner was a "liar" not just in his writing but also in his life has troubled many critics. They have explained his numerous "false stories," particularly those about military honors he actually never earned and war wounds he never sustained, with psychopathological imposture-theories. The drawback of this approach is that it reduces and oversimplifies the complex psychological and aesthetic phenomenon of Faulkner's role-playing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvc5d
THREE The Artist as Visionary and as “Craftsman”: from:
Faulkner
Abstract: The yearning for pagan sensuality shyly announcing itself in the context of Hawthorne’s Puritan culture emerges with Walter Pater and young Faulkner’s literary idol, Swinburne, as a dominant cultural force. Sensuous fauns and naked Pans side by side with attractive female and male bodies in emancipatory bathing scenes are among the chief inspirations of the international art nouveau movement.¹ It is, therefore, not surprising that fauns constitute a major motif in Aubrey Beardsley’s art nouveau drawings, whose impact is visible in Faulkner’s
Marionettesillustrations as well as by his references to Beardsley not only inSoldiers’ Paybut also in
FIVE New Modes of Metaphor: from:
Faulkner
Abstract: In chapters 3 and 4, images of the artist have confirmed the profound affinity between masks and metaphors suggested by the introductory chapters on role-playing in photographs, letters, and interviews and also posited by the theoretical chapter. The analogy between the role-playing artist and the reader, who participates in the metaphorizing process, lies in the fact that both engage in an act of the imagination whose object is nothing less than to negotiate the tension between identity and difference.
SEVEN Faulkner and the Regionalist Context from:
Faulkner
Abstract: In the past, the term
regionalism, particularly in literary studies, has often been understood as denoting a short-lived, reactionary movement of the thirties. However, the study of a wider range of contemporary texts shows thatregionalis closely interrelated with the termnationaland occurs in a central debate (not just inThe Nationbut also inThe New Republicand in the African AmericanThe Messenger) on American identity and values at a time of fundamental crisis. The complexity of regionalism can be seen from the fact that it appears as often in the political and economic context of
EIGHT Regionalism and Beyond: from:
Faulkner
Abstract: One of the most bewildering perspectives thrown open by the new
receptionaesthetics is the complexity of the metaphoric experience in reading Faulkner’s novels. While this new approach leads to a better understanding of Faulkner’s fusion of regionalism and modernism, readers still have to be as flexible in their reactions to the widely varying metaphoric forms as the role-playing author. In addition to identifying with the artist as “countryman” and sharing with him the metaphoric implications of eyes “the color of a new axe blade” (756) and of a “sagging broken-backed cabin” (746), one should be able to catch the
Book Title: Faulkner and His Contemporaries- Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): URGO JOSEPH R.
Abstract: Joseph R. Urgo is chair of the English department at the University of Mississippi. His many books include
In the Age of Distraction, from the University Press of Mississippi.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvgm1
Cather’s War and Faulkner’s Peace: from:
Faulkner and His Contemporaries
Author(s) Skaggs Merrill Maguire
Abstract: After Judith Wittenberg first published the facts about Faulkner’s several acknowledgments of Willa Cather,¹ I myself analyzed specific literary loans she made to him. For example, Faulkner’s second novel,
Mosquitoes, recycles numerous items from Cather’sThe Professor’s House,² while details fromMyÁntoniareappear many times in Faulkner’s major fiction,³ andDeath Comes for the Archbishopenjoys a resurrection almost immediately inThe Sound and the Fury.⁴ Cather, in turn, seemed to address Faulkner directly in her last published story.⁵ In this essay, however, I want to confront the much more challenging question of where it all started. Granted that
Book Title: Charles Johnson-The Novelist as Philosopher
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): Whalen-Bridge John
Abstract: Johnson (b. 1948)--author of
Dreamer,Oxherding Tale, and the National Book Award-winningMiddle Passage--draws upon influences as diverse as Richard Wright, Herman Melville, Thomas Aquinas, Franz Kafka, W. E. B. Du Bois, and Ralph Waldo Emerson. He combines rigorous training in western philosophy with a lifelong practice in eastern religious and philosophical traditions. He has repeatedly told interviewers that he became a writer specifically to strengthen the interplay between philosophy and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvkpb
BONDAGE AND DISCIPLINE from:
Charles Johnson
Author(s) BEAVERS HERMAN
Abstract: Reading
The Sorcerer’s Apprenticeprompted me to revisit Paolo Friere’sPedagogy of the Oppressed, in part because the question of failed pedagogy frames the opening and closing stories in the collection. But I also decided a turn to Friere was appropriate because reading Johnson’s stories and discovering in them the investment in Eastern philosophical tenets characteristic of his other works of fiction, I determined that if pedagogy was at issue in these stories, it is best described as apedagogy of discomfort.In light of the ways that we find aspiration and desire working in each of these stories, I’m
PRAGMATIC ETHICS IN CHARLES JOHNSON’S FICTION from:
Charles Johnson
Author(s) STORHOFF GARY
Abstract: Charles Johnson is an extraordinarily innovative American writer whose work revolves around profound ethical issues. Because his ethics emerge from the philosophy he studied in graduate school, his ethical outlook is complex and difficult to discern—primarily because his is a dissenting voice from current philosophical schools of ethics.¹ Contemporary Western philosophy usually treats ethics as primarily the moral evaluation of specific actions.² However, such an approach is insufficient for a novelist with Johnson’s convictions. Johnson’s philosophical inclination is the evaluation of the whole person, in evaluating character traits that make an individual good and that lead to a worthwhile
INVISIBLE THREADS from:
Charles Johnson
Author(s) WHALEN-BRIDGE JOHN
Abstract: In this essay I would like to make the case for a kind of feminism in Johnson’s work, a feminism that makes visible foundational feminine virtues within African American culture in part by revealing the effects of strong women and in part by rendering the misogynism against which this feminism defines itself. My argument runs against the grain of most though not all work on Johnson. While critics focusing on racial hybridity in Johnson’s work have celebrated his integrationalist aesthetic (Little and Storhoff), those who have focused on gender have more often found Johnson’s fiction unsatisfactory.¹ Some even draw on
Book Title: West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities-An Ethnomusicological Perspective
Publisher: University Press of Mississippi
Author(s): DOR GEORGE WORLASI KWASI
Abstract: In the first-ever ethnographic study of West African drumming and dance in North American universities the author documents and acknowledges ethnomusicologists, ensemble directors, students, administrators, and academic institutions for their key roles in the histories of their respective ensembles. Dor collates and shares perspectives including debates on pedagogical approaches that may be instructive as models for both current and future ensemble directors and reveals the multiple impacts that participation in an ensemble or class offers students. He also examines the interplay among historically situated structures and systems, discourse, and practice, and explores the multiple meanings that individuals and various groups of people construct from this campus activity. The study will be of value to students, directors, and scholars as an ethnographic study and as a text for teaching relevant courses in African music, African studies, ethnomusicology/world music, African diaspora studies, and other related disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt2tvppp
1 HISTORICAL OVERVIEW OF WEST AFRICAN DRUMMING AND DANCE IN NORTH AMERICA from:
West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: This book explores the strong presence of West African drumming and dance at North American universities, an ongoing process since 1964 that I describe as a resurrection. To offer a better understanding and appreciation of the reasons for calling West African drumming in the American academy a novelty, presence, and resurrection of a genre, it is crucial to situate this discussion by first evoking the broader a priori historical context that characterized the absence, disruption, and suppression of a symbolic musical tradition. Accordingly, I subsume this chapter under two historical phases: (1) Slavery (1619–1863), and (2) After Slavery until
4 THE IMPACT OF WEST AFRICAN DRUMMING AND DANCE ON THE PARTICIPATING STUDENT from:
West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: Students are the primary target beneficiaries of West African drumming programs. In addition to Mantle Hood’s multi-musicality, other ends that the course or participation in ensemble offers include the acquisition of pre-compositional resources, team skills, new performance skills and perspectives, relational avenues, professional career development, and practical understanding of theoretical concepts associated with Sub-Saharan African drumming. DjeDje recalls how UCLA granted students’ request to make drumming an end or a performance subject (Interview, July 2007). Most students who take courses in West African drumming and dance are primarily motivated by their desire to learn about another culture and the opportunity
5 PATH-FINDING AGENCY OF ADMINISTRATORS AND ENSEMBLE DIRECTORS from:
West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: In the previous chapters I have implicitly shown that the phenomenal changes that characterized the transformation of a genre from a state of neglect to that of serious embrace in the universities cannot be attributed to happenstance or only to broad changes in cultural landscapes and policies of American universities. Certainly, collective actions by groups toward change in any social, cultural, and academic context need to be acknowledged. However, this chapter provides an explicit discussion of categories of individuals who have significantly contributed and continue to contribute in establishing the presence of West African drumming and dance in their respective
7 WORLD MUSIC AND GLOBALIZATION from:
West African Drumming and Dance in North American Universities
Abstract: Economic and political ideology stubbornly assume center-stage thematic positions in discourse on globalization. Accordingly, it is not surprising when a student who walks into my world music class after leaving a class discussion on the global economy at an International Studies Institute, for example, challenges his world music teacher (myself) for “falsely claiming” globalization for the domain of music cultures. Certainly, such may not be the reaction of students from cultural studies, diaspora studies, ethnomusicology, anthropology, and other culture-related cognate disciplines. Yet, the lesson I learned from this classroom scenario is not to take the understanding of popularly used concepts
FOUR What Does the Spirit Have to Do? from:
Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Marshall Bruce D.
Abstract: From the West as well as the East, among Roman Catholics as well as Protestants, Christian theologians now regularly suggest that western theology suffers from a “pneumatological deficit.” The Western theological tradition accounts for the temporal actions of the triune God, so these critics worry, without giving the Holy Spirit anything to do. In contrast to the Father and especially the Son, the Spirit has no action of his own, and no property, effect, or relationship to us that is unique to him. As a result, the Spirit himself tends to vanish.¹ Where we should expect traditional theology to speak
TWELVE “Come and See” from:
Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Smith Janet E.
Abstract: Why is it that some people accept Christ as the Son of God and their Savior and others do not? Why is it that some respond to evangelization and others do not? Certainly, sometimes inadequate knowledge or unpersuasive arguments make an evangelizer ineffective. Perhaps the evangelizer’s own life is not a model of what he is preaching and thus his teaching is unattractive. But when Christ is the evangelizer, none of these negatives could possibly apply. Is there any explanation why some recognize Christ for who he is when they are invited to “Come and see” and others do not?
EIGHTEEN “And They Shall All Be Taught by God” from:
Reading John with St. Thomas Aquinas
Author(s) Dauphinais Michael
Abstract: John 6 offers a unique view of Jesus Christ. It begins with a miracle of the loaves and fishes, continues with a miracle of Jesus walking on water, and then culminates with the bread of life discourse. Almost all biblical scholars and theologians recognize some connection between the miraculous multiplication of physical bread and the subsequent discourse on the bread of life. But what is the character of that living bread come down from heaven? Is the bread of life simply equivalent to Jesus’ wisdom from on high, or is it the Eucharistic flesh of Jesus? Although some contemporary biblical
INTRODUCTION from:
The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: My favorite chapter of Bernard Lonergan’s
Method in Theology begins with this wonderful line: “The facts of good and evil, of progress and decline, raise questions about the character of our universe.”¹
6 Bias from:
The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Sin and evil are categories traditional to Catholic theology, even if Lonergan’s analysis of them is his own. Bias, an inauthentic orientation caused by and causal of inauthentic actions, decisions, judgments, ideas, and experiences, is a concept more original to Lonergan. It is both the result of sin and a cause of further sin.¹ As such, bias functions in a way I find similar to Aristotle’s bad habits, or vices.² However, while Aristotle discusses vice as an extreme on either side of a golden mean, Lonergan analyzes bias in terms of conscious intentionality, social dynamics, and history. Sinful personal judgments
7 Decline from:
The Quest for God and the Good Life
Abstract: Egoists do not turn into altruists overnight. Hostile groups do not easily forget their grievances, drop their resentments, overcome their fears and suspicions. Common sense commonly feels itself omnicompetent in practical affairs, is commonly blinded to long-term consequences of policies and courses of action, is commonly unaware of the admixture of common nonsense in its more cherished convictions and slogans.¹
Tradition from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) SOSKICE JANET
Abstract: It may be helpful, before specifically discussing “tradition” in Christian thought, to consider how much in human life is “passed on” by others. Here are two musical examples. The first is from my own workplace—the choristers of the Jesus College chapel. I want to draw attention not to the antiquity of the particular pieces of music they sing (for they sing works both ancient and modern) but to the practice of choral singing itself. The choir is composed
Freedoms of Speech and Religion in the Islamic Context from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) AN-NAʿIM ABDULLAHI AHMED
Abstract: One premise of this essay is that freedoms of speech and religion are necessary means for each human person to pursue what she holds as the ultimate purpose and meaning of her life. In other words, people tend to link the value of rights such as freedoms of speech and religion to the purpose for which they are asserting those rights rather than to affirm them for their independent abstract value. This does not mean that entitlement to the right should be made conditional upon satisfying some commonly preconceived purpose of free speech or authoritatively sanctioned meaning of the religion
Muḥammad ʿAbduh (1849–1905) from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) ʿAbduh Muḥammad
Abstract: The europeans believe that there is no difference between the doctrine of destiny and fate (
al-qaḍāʾ wa al-qadar) and the doctrine of the theological school of the Predestinarians (al-Jabrīyya), who say that the human being is compelled absolutely in all of his acts. They imagine that with the doctrine of destiny (al-qaḍāʾ) Muslims see themselves as a feather floating in the air and buffeted by the wind wherever it goes. Indeed, if it were to occur to the minds of people that they have no choice in word or deed or in motion or rest, and that all of this
Alasdair MacIntyre (1929– ) from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) MacIntyre Alasdair
Abstract: It is now possible to return to the question from which this enquiry into the nature of human action and identity started: In what does the unity of an individual life consist? The answer is that its unity is the unity of a narrative embodied in a single life. To ask “What is the good for me?” is to ask how best I might live out that unity and bring it to completion. To ask “What is the good for man?” is to ask what all answers to the former question must have in common. But now it is important
Tariq Ramadan’s Tryst with Modernity: from:
Tradition and Modernity
Author(s) RIZVI SAJJAD
Abstract: “Religion” may—or may not—be here to stay. As a “concept” (but which or whose exactly?), from one perspective it might seem to be losing its received reference (the transcendent, the world beyond, and the life hereafter) and its shared relevance (a unified view of the cosmos and all beings in it; a doctrine of the origin, purpose and end of all things; an alert, enlightened or redeemed sense of self; a practice and way of life), if it had
2 Therapeutic Modernism: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) NGUYEN VINH-KIM
Abstract: I trained under Margaret Lock in the years after she published her seminal work
Encounters with Aging(1993). After three years of practising full-time as an emergency and HIV physician, the grind of medical practice had left me longing for an approach that went beyond the clinical or epidemiological sciences. Neither helped me make sense of what I saw in the clinic. As I began working in West Africa as a community organizer with HIV groups, most of the anthropological work I encountered viewed the epidemic through the lens of either culture or political economy. The realities I encountered were
3 Rational Sex at the Margins of the State: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) BUTT LESLIE
Abstract: Gaps between global ideals of HIV/AIDS prevention and the reality of local initiatives have been widely noted. Globally sanctioned interventions such as promoting rational decision making around sex, and the ABC model (Abstinence, Be faithful, and use Condoms), draw from behaviour models that regard sexual behaviour as risky when it deviates from narrowly defined norms. Assumptions about reasoned sexual practice are rooted in conceptions of human behaviour that assume individuals can and do routinely assess risks from a narrow rationalistic point of view, and modify their behaviour accordingly. When rational sex is put into practice, cracks show up almost immediately,
4 The Gendering of Depression in Japan from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) Kitanaka Junko
Abstract: Depression has long been represented in the West as a quintessential female malady, where women are said to be twice as likely as men to become depressed. This gender ratio has been used by some feminists to argue that depression epitomizes women’s suffering (Jack 1991). Japan poses a challenge to this characterization, however, because, until recently, rates of male depression had been as high as – sometimes even higher than – those of women. Throughout the twentieth century, numerous Japanese psychiatrists have commented on this statistical anomaly (e.g., Hirasawa 1966; Naka 1932; Nakane et al. 2004). As Margaret Lock called to our
5 From Spasmophilia to Social Phobia: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) LLOYD STEPHANIE
Abstract: In the 1940s, a disabling syndrome was identified in France. This disorder, spasmophilia, which literally means “to like spasms,” was characterized by a range of symptoms including muscular spasms and hyperventilation, as well as cramps, convulsions, loss of memory, insomnia, migraines, stress, anxiety, the “neurotic triad” of hypochondriasis, depression, and hysteria, and other personalized symptoms (Durlach and Bara 2000, 98–9 and 129). The condition was believed to be linked to a magnesium deficiency and sometimes to a calcium imbalance, depending on the specialist consulted.
6 Unconventional Psychiatric Medico-Politicization: from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) BÉHAGUE DOMINIQUE P.
Abstract: Over the past two to three decades, the use of child-and adolescent-specific psychiatric diagnoses such as conduct disorder and attention deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD) has grown rapidly in North American and Western (particularly Anglo) European psychiatry.
7 Cases and Narratives in Private Medical Providers’ Accounts of Managing HIV in Urban India from:
Troubling Natural Categories
Author(s) KIELMANN KARINA
Abstract: While medical pluralism in India has been of longstanding interest to medical anthropologists (see Leslie, 1976; Leslie and Young, 1992), it is only more recently that pluralism, under the guise of privatization in Indian health care, has attracted comparable interest among public health specialists. Accompanying nationwide economic reforms toward a market-based economy (Purohit 2001; Sen 2003), India’s private medical sector rapidly expanded throughout the 1990s, encompassing a wide range of formal and informal medical providers with varying degrees of institutional legitimacy. Operating alongside the government health services, private medical practitioners represent the first pattern of resort for a majority of
Book Title: Genuine Multiculturalism-The Tragedy and Comedy of Diversity
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): FOSTER CECIL
Abstract: While many modern societies are noted for their diversity, the resulting challenge is to determine how citizens from different backgrounds and cultures can see themselves and each other as equals, and be treated equally. In Genuine Multiculturalism, Cecil Foster shows that a society's failure to bridge these differences is the tragedy of modern living and that pretending it is possible to mechanically develop fraternity and solidarity among diverse groups is akin to seeking out comedy. Arguing that genuine multiculturalism is the search for social justice by individuals who have been trapped by ascribed identities or newcomers who have been shut out of perceived ethnic homelands, Foster details how this process, in essence, is the story of the Americas. Reconceptionalizing the terms of multiculturalism, he offers an intervention into Canada's claim that its definition and practice are based on recognizing equality of citizenship. Identifying genuine multiculturalism as an ongoing work in progress, rather than a tightly defined policy position, Foster challenges readers to imagine a greater and more harmonious ideal. A necessary theoretical reconsideration of diversity within society, Genuine Multiculturalism refocuses the debate about ideals and practices in modern societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b7ds
Introduction: from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: But just imagining this process actually happening is pure idealism. People as persons or citizens and as social actors always come
2 Dramatis personae from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: When I was growing up in the Caribbean paradise of Barbados, there was always a specific character of special note in our society. We called him “Bad John.” Bad Johns were fixtures not only in my native land but, if I can judge from the blues, calypso, mento, reggae, or soca songs that provided our daily carnival, were present in every Caribbean island, and apparently went by the same name everywhere, too. In Jamaica, they are also the Badman, Don, or Rude Boy to name a few of these apocryphal beings in what people generally call “badmanism.” And the blues
4 Multiculturalism in the Americas from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: Genuine multiculturalism, then, is more than mere formalism and its seeming common-sense opposites, conformity and coercion – both sides of which I am presenting as twins of the same dialectic, as faces of freedom and slavery. Both have the same beginning, and at times the same genealogy of historical experiences. Their early separation into one or the other occurs as acts of diremption, akin to a biblical fall or to a tumble like a Humpty Dumpty – an apparent degeneration from freedom to slavery.
5 Canada’s Second Covenant: from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: Tragedies often confront us in our daily lives. This is a staple of the human experience or condition, and learning from them is what allows us to come up with theories and rules of life. Perhaps the most philosophical attitude we can take to these trials and tribulations appears in aphorisms such as “What doesn’t kill me strengthens me” and “What evil there is must be for some greater good” – sayings that depict our resignation to the unchanging nature of some things in life and our need to somehow manage. And one social fact of life seems to be always
6 When Tragedy Becomes Comedy from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: In a common-sense way, the maxims at the start of the previous chapter capture a contradiction immanent to life. Their irony gives them a generalized truth that is not always the case, while they remind us that we always face the certainty of despair and hope – often from the same source. Despair and hope are dialectical, for they can be opposing, and at times even complementary, parts of the same whole. The sayings also speak to the possibility of change for the better or the worse and to how every thought and act appear pregnant with the possibility of producing
10 Crisis 2001: from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: Immigration, including the role of immigrants in Canadian culture, became a national issue by the summer of 2001, when Statistics Canada reported an ethnic and demographic makeover under way. The impact was analogous to the point in Hegelian analysis when Eve had to teach the facts of life to a rationalist and self-centred Adam, an archetypal Bad John. Just like the exemplary Adam, Canada was coming to know itself as a tragic hero: it was ageing and dying but wanted to live forever. As a self-consciousness, it had to realize that it was ultimately a
desire, which has led it
11 Massey and Culture: from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: There is then perceptually a problem with Canada as a practical and pragmatic entity, and there are problems in the way that we as citizens and critics imagined multiculturalism and its achievements. A being or consciousness is – in Hegel’s sense – in need of a tragic ending that offers an escape. The classical strain of thought in Western philosophy privileges acts and forbearances that are moral and ethical, qualities that we associate with the supersensible and with God, the absolute, the unchangeable, reason, and rationalism in a world that we thus treat as if it is the product of dual systems
13 Rawls and Trudeau’s Just Society from:
Genuine Multiculturalism
Abstract: Beginning in the 1970s, the government of Canada became officially multicultural, constructing a modern, pluralist nation-state. Canadians renewed their social contract to make it more inclusive and less a fragment of Europe.² Pierre Trudeau’s leadership (prime minister 1968–80, 1981–4) featured repatriation of the constitution with, at last, an amending formula, and entrenchment of the Charter of Rights and Freedoms. Trudeau spoke of a new beginning for Canada, with negotiations among individuals, not groups: “The liberal philosophy sets the highest value on the freedom of the individual, by which we mean the total individual, the individual as a member
Introduction from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) KLAASSEN MATTHEW J .
Abstract: Goodness, justice, knowledge, existence, reality, experience, truth – philosophers have struggled with these concepts for generations. What do they mean? How do they affect human life? Can we understand them, or are they unknowable? Defining such concepts is difficult and has practical consequences. These challenges set high stakes for ensuring theory and practice are well matched and oriented toward social flourishing. Our ideas of goodness and justice directly impact how we treat each other and the laws we set up to govern our societies. Our theories of knowledge and existence affect how we teach, learn, and develop new technologies. Conceptions of
2 Radical Constructivism, Education, and Truth as Life-Giving Disclosure from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) JOLDERSMA CLARENCE W.
Abstract: Constructivism in education, an approach that depicts learners as actively constructing their own knowledge, continues to influence content areas such as math and science education as well foundation areas such as educational psychology.² It is a contested view, with advocates suggesting that it is a better framework for effective education and critics countering that it is relativistic with respect to truth.
3 The Jelly and the Shot: from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) WALHOUT MATTHEW
Abstract: Bertrand Russell is reported to have said that there are two kinds of philosopher: one who sees the world as a bowl of jelly and another who sees it as a bucket of shot. Russell considered himself to have undergone a conversion from the former view to the latter in 1898, when he parted ways with his Hegelian friends and began to focus on quantificational logic.¹ He came to believe that in Hegel’s jelly-like world, philosophical analysis did not stand a chance, because things and facts and language were so holistically interconnected and susceptible to dialectical change that no one
5 Exposure and Disclosure: from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) WALHOF DARREN R.
Abstract: Writing in the wake of the furor over her account of the Eichmann trial, Hannah Arendt reflects on why truth and politics are, in her words, “on rather bad terms.”¹ Her analysis rests on dividing truth into two different types. The first type, rational truth, is the subject of mathematics and philosophy. It has a long history of tension with politics, going back at least to Plato, who worried about the displacement of rational truth by mere opinion. In the modern age, Arendt says, opinion has generally won the day, rendering rational truth politically irrelevant.² The second type, factual truth,
7 A Comparative Ethics Approach to the Concept of Bearing Witness: from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) RICHARDS AMY D.
Abstract: Bearing witness is an ethical act. Whether a person bears truthful witness or false witness, the act involves moral agency. Choosing to testify to an experience or event that others, or the established narrative of a culture, may contest may alter the rest of a person’s life. Witnessing is not without cost to both the agent bearing witness and also possibly to the audiences, the secondary witnesses hearing or observing the testimony. Therefore, deciding to bear or not bear witness has moral and cultural significance. Consider the example of two British journalists working in Soviet Russia and the moral and
8 Narrative Truth in Canadian Historical Fiction: from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) VAN RYS JOHN
Abstract: Of all literary genres, historical fiction is perhaps the most problematic and the most promising in relation to difficult questions of truth. Ostensibly rooted in some form of historical veracity in the traces of actual events or people, its fictional dimensions (from invented narrative to poetic qualities) nevertheless impress upon readers an imaginative truthfulness. In this way, historical fiction becomes a site of contention over truth; in its modern and postmodern manifestations, the genre becomes an exploration of the nature of truth itself.
10 Does Truth Matter to Ethics? from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) GUPTA JAY A.
Abstract: Does truth matter to ethics? Ethical truth is a highly vexed notion. In addition to a virtual chaos of views concerning right versus wrong courses of action in applied issues, philosophers have encountered perennial difficulties in the attempt to theoretically specify what ethical truth could be. As James Rachels notes, whatever it is, it is not like planets, trees, or spoons; ethical truth is not “out there” in the usual sense.¹ But then, perhaps it is inappropriate to talk about ethical truth at all.
12 Educating for Truthfulness from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) BLOMBERG DOUG
Abstract: The challenge of the Truth Matters conference call to “reclaim truthfulness for the academic enterprise” underscores that a commitment to truth is not an abstract principle but a concrete action. As Plato recognizes, philosopher-rulers need not only “the ability to grasp eternal and immutable truth” but also certain “qualities of character”; in describing these, he begins with “love of the knowledge that reveals eternal reality” and follows immediately with “truthfulness” – for how could “a love of wisdom and a love of falsehood” possibly coexist in one person?¹ Character thus connotes integrity, because virtuous traits are complementary and coherent.
16 A Concept of Artistic Truth Prompted by Biblical Wisdom Literature from:
Truth Matters
Author(s) SEERVELD CALVIN
Abstract: I propose to take a biblically led orientation on the matter of truth, and from that perspective try to elucidate the particular glory of imaginative, literary, and artistic historical truth telling in God’s world. I am self-consciously not presuming to present a universal approach, and I realize my tack as an octogenarian academic is shaped by a certain earthy, philosophical faith-thought tradition called
reformationalthat, with relaxed seriousness, takes the Ruling ordering of God (Bασιλε̃ιατο͂υ θεο͂υ) as a driving focus for communal reflection and action.¹
INTRODUCTION from:
Configuring Community
Abstract: In sharp reversal of the monolithic imagination of national identity projected for so long by the culturally levelling discourses of Francoism, Spanishness, for the past two decades, has been actively constructed in terms of multiplicity and synchronicity. Any location of identity thus rests on the historically contingent axes of temporal and spatial parts. In this scattered and fragmented cultural landscape, the modern imagination of nation necessarily cedes to a more ambivalent vision of collective identity, one that allows for a more adept navigation through the disjuncture of postmodernity. Ironically, therefore, this has meant the return to the concept of community.
CHAPTER 5 THE CÓRDOBA PRISON PROJECT: from:
Configuring Community
Abstract: This chapter problematizes the practice of flamenco as rehabilitation amongst
gitano convicts in Córdoba prison.¹ The idea for this project, which seeks out a disciplinary overlap between cultural studies and ethnography, arose from an article in the Independent on Sunday (6 October 1996) which reported that flamenco was being practised in the penitentiary of Córdoba as a form of rehabilitation for long-term prisoners; the fieldwork during which much of the material for this chapter was collected took place in June 1998. In its course, this project is an attempt to question concepts of ethnicity and community identity within the enclosed
CHAPTER 6 MOVING PICTURES: from:
Configuring Community
Abstract: This chapter focuses upon photographic representations of the Moroccan immigrant community living in the Barcelona locality of Ciutat Vella.¹ The photographs aim both to record current social and ethnic practices among the Moroccans and to construct a sense of community through shared ethnicity. Given the racial and ethnic diversity of Ciutat Vella — home not just to Moroccans, but also to Pakistanis, Turks, Chinese, Philippinos, Catalans, and several other ‘nationals’, as the many arrows on a street corner off Plaça San Agustí which point diversely to cities such as Karachi, Shanghai, Manila, Marrakesh, etc. will attest — the construction of such community
AFTERWORD: from:
Configuring Community
Abstract: As the preceding chapters show, this study of community must remain in the interrogative. Attempts to draw clear-cut conclusions on community would result in a discursive stasis, whereby the larger context of modernity and postmodernity—as late modernity or an intensification of the tensions between discourse and practice that characterise modernity—would be lost. The notion of community in postmodern Spain can be seen to be foregrounded in political and cultural contexts over emphases on nation or state. Nevertheless, community is itself a problematic concept: necessarily fluid in order to survive in current contexts, yet loaded with the fixed structures
Book Title: Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Schonfield Ernest
Abstract: The turn of the twentieth century was a time of identity crisis for the upper and middle classes, one in which increased social mobility caused the blurring of traditional boundaries and created a need for reference works such as the British Who's Who (1897). At the same time, the rise of a new leisure industry and an increase in international travel led to a boom period for confidence men, who frequently operated in hotels and holiday resorts. Thomas Mann's "Felix Krull", written between 1910-13 and continued (though never completed) in 1951-54, uses contemporary accounts of these figures as a starting-point from which to explore the aesthetics of society. The early Krull marks an important stage in Mann's development in a number of respects.In writing it, Mann acquired a more flexible conception of identity and a new understanding of the relation between artist and public. Krull also signals a deeper engagement with Goethe and a shift in Mann's work towards a more open treatment of sexuality. The novel presents art as being central to the development of the individual and to social interaction. While Krull is nominally a confidence man, he is more of a performance artist, a purveyor of beauty who relies upon the complicity of his audience. The later Krull takes up where Mann left off and continues the justification of art as an essential human activity. This study draws upon unpublished material in order to provide a comprehensive reading of "Felix Krull". It examines the novel within the context of Mann's work as a whole, and, in doing so, it seeks to demonstrate the remarkable continuity of Mann's creative achievement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32b997
CHAPTER 1 Art and the Notation of Identity from:
Art and Its Uses in Thomas Mann's 'Felix Krull'
Abstract: In this chapter I will argue that the early work on
Felix Krull represents a creative watershed in Mann’s career. It marks the moment when Mann realized that he could imaginatively expand his identity to the extent that he could identify with persons and characters far removed from his own experience and disposition. I will seek to show that Felix Krull offers a creatively adaptable model of identity, and that it presents art and aesthetics as being central to the development of the individual subject.
Introduction: from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Hyde Michael J.
Abstract: Our purpose in this introduction is twofold. On the one hand we propose several ways in which rhetoric and hermeneutics might support each other—that is, contribute to thinking about the philosophic character as well as the practical strategies involved in both interpretation and persuasion. On the other hand we seek to set forth general lines of inquiry and argument that are explored in the chapters that follow and that we hope will stimulate readers of this book to further questions and inquiries of their own.
6 Hermeneutical Circles, Rhetorical Triangles, and Transversal Diagonals from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Schrag Calvin O.
Abstract: Hermeneutics as theory and practice of interpretation stimulates an economy of meanings, latent as well as manifest, that is at play in texts and actions, in text analogues and action analogues, while it addresses both actual and potential misunderstandings. Hermeneutics constitutes its operating matrix as a part-whole relationship and finds its
8 Rhetoric, Hermeneutics, and Prudence in the Interpretation of the Constitution from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Garver Eugene
Abstract: As a practical argument becomes more philosophical, technical, or
9 Hermeneutical Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Leff Michael
Abstract: “Hermeneutical rhetoric” is the counterpart of Steven Mailloux’s “rhetorical hermeneutics.” In an article bearing that title and more extensively in his book
Rhetorical Power, Mailloux offers an “anti-theory theory” of interpretation that situates literary hermeneutics within the context of rhetorical exchange.¹ Traditional literary theory, Mailloux argues, relies upon a general conception of interpretation as the basis for justifying particular interpretative acts. Such “theory” takes two forms—“textual realism,” where meaning is found in the text, and “readerly idealism,” where meaning is made through intersubjective agreements among a community of interpreters. As theories, these positions are diametrically opposed, but, Mailloux maintains
10 Subtilitas Applicandi in Rhetorical Hermeneutics: from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Struever Nancy S.
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer begins the chapter in
Truth and Methodentitled “The Rediscovery of the Hermeneutical Problematic” with a significant tactic: he cites the eighteenth-century Pietist J. J. Rambach’s definition of hermeneutics as tripartite, as asubtilitas intelligendi, explicandi, applicandi, or subtlety in knowing, interpreting, and applying. What is essential in this stipulation of application as faculty are the recognition of the interpreter as agent and the focus on the activity of inquiry: not only does the sense of the object text find its full and concrete form only in interpretation but the interpreter of the text is part of the
11 The Uses of Rhetoric: from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Olmsted Wendy
Abstract: Interpretive theory has been unsuccessful in finding a system of rules that can be applied in legal reasoning or in the interpretation of literature. Theorists’ aspiration toward such a system of rules and their skepticism that such rules are possible have given rise to much controversy.¹ Rhetoric offers a way out of this impasse because it is an art of reasoning adapted to the particularities of situation and action. This art is reasonable but does not presuppose that, in order to be used intelligently, rules and terms must be determinate (specifiable precisely, repeatable in different situations, and univocal). In fact,
12 Charity, Obscurity, Clarity: from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Tracy David
Abstract: Rhetoric and hermeneutics have rediscovered each other in our postmodern period. In classical modernity both had seen their range narrowed and their importance as intellectual disciplines denied. Modern rationality felt free to diminish, even dismiss, both rhetoric and hermeneutics because each resisted the famous separations enforced by modernity: thought from feeling (dissociation of sensibility); content from form; theory from practice. Rhetoric could be reduced to issues understood as separate from and unimportant to modern theory: first, practical reason and its topical thinking; second, the forms of thought and the tropes informing all reason; third, the reasonableness of emotions, feelings, moods,
16 Rhetoric and the Politics of the Literal Sense in Medieval Literary Theory: from:
Rhetoric and Hermeneutics in Our Time
Author(s) Copeland Rita
Abstract: It is well known that late medieval literary theory owes much to Aquinas’s reconciliation of human rhetoric with the divine revelation of truth in the text of Scripture. Aquinas and those theorists who followed his method accomplished this rapprochement by redrawing the boundaries between the literal and the spiritual senses of Scripture and assimilating rhetorical language to the literal sense. Aquinas’s critical move has been much studied for its impact on the exegetical theory and practice of the thirteenth and fourteenth centuries, especially for its new emphasis on the contributions of human authors to Scriptural discourse. But at what cost
Book Title: Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World-Language, Culture, and Pedagogy
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Glejzer Richard R.
Abstract: In this brilliant collection, literary scholars, philosophers, and teachers inquire into the connections between antifoundational philosophy and the rhetorical tradition. What happens to literary studies and theory when traditional philosophical foundations are disavowed? What happens to the study of teaching and writing when antifoundationalism is accepted? What strategies for human understanding are possible when the weaknesses of antifoundationalism are identified? This volume offers answers in classic essays by such thinkers as Richard Rorty, Terry Eagleton, and Stanley Fish, and in many new essays never published before.The contributors to this book explore the nexus of antifoundationalism and rhetoric, critique that nexus, and suggest a number of pedagogical and theoretical alternatives. The editors place these statements into a context that is both critical and evaluative, and they provide for voices that dissent from the antifoundational perspective and that connect specific, practical pedagogies to the broader philosophical statements. For those with an interest in rhetoric, philosophy, comparative literature, or the teaching of composition, this book sets forth a wealth of thought-provoking ideas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bdzr
Introduction from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Glejzer Richard R.
Abstract: In an essay on antifoundationalism and the teaching of writing, Stanley Fish defined the term
antifoundationalismas the assertion “that matters [of fact, truth, correctness, validity, and clarity] are intelligible and debatable only within the precincts of the contexts and situations or paradigms or communities that give them their local and changeable shape” (Fish 344). The foundations that had previously been assumed to be objective or neutral or value-free—for Fish, in this essay, the idea that language communicates real situations; for others, that we can have unmediated knowledge of historical events, or that we can move unproblematically between written
1 Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Fish Stanley
Abstract: For Milton’s seventeenth-century readers this passage, introducing one of the more prominent of the fallen angels, would have been immediately recognizable as a brief but trenchant essay on the art and character of the rhetorician. Indeed in these few lines Milton has managed to gather and restate with great rhetorical force (a paradox of which more later) all of the traditional arguments against rhetoric. Even Belial’s gesture of rising is to the (negative) point: he catches the eye even before he begins to speak, just as Satan will in Book IX when he too raises himself and moves so that
3 A Short History of Rhetoric from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Eagleton Terry
Abstract: A political literary criticism is not the invention of marxists. On the contrary, it is one of the oldest, most venerable forms of literary criticism we know. The most widespread early criticism on historical record was not, in our sense, “aesthetic”: it was a mode of what we would now call “discourse theory,” devoted to analyzing the material effects of particular uses of language in particular social conjunctures. It was a highly elaborate theory of specific signifying practices—above all, of the discursive practices of the juridical, political, and religious apparatuses of the state. Its intention, quite consciously, was systematically
6 The Decentered Subject of Feminism: from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Frost Linda
Abstract: In an end-of-the-year summary for 1991,
U.S. News and World Reportcommented on the media debate surrounding that summer’s hitThelma and Louise, noting that the film “may not have appealed to as many people as the producers hoped. In 1991, 36 percent of American women called themselves feminists, compared with 56 percent five years ago” (“Year” 100). Many film fans and commentators on popular culture, though, did not agree with this journalist’s description of the film as feminist. In fact, the polarized responses to the question, IsThelma and Louisea feminist film? and the reports of those responses
7 Habermas’s Rational-Critical Sphere and the Problem of Criteria from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Roberts Patricia
Abstract: A recurrent issue in the study of public discourse is whether a public sphere might be so constituted as to be both free and liberatory: free in the sense that it would be perfectly inclusive; liberatory in that it would enable participants to identify and critique coercion in institutions. Jürgen Habermas’s lifelong project might best be understood as an attempt to define the characteristics of a sphere with both such qualities, as well as to argue the feasibility of attaining it. The recent translation of Habermas’s early book,
The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere, is particularly important in this
13 The Royal Road: from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Sprinker Michael
Abstract: What is a consequent marxist view of the history and philosophy of science? Reference to Marx’s and Engels’s (or even Lenin’s) work will not yield a satisfactory answer, although certain signposts are evident. For example, there is the famous observation on method in the introduction to the
Grundrisse, which argues that, contrary to the procedures adopted in classical economy, where the starting point for investigation is apparently concrete phenomena from which abstract theoretical descriptions are then derived, “the method of rising from the abstract to the concrete is the only way in which thought appropriates the concrete, reproduces it as
15 Composition Studies and Cultural Studies: from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Berlin James A.
Abstract: Calls for situating cultural studies, a radically different set of research and teaching practices, at the center of English studies have been frequent of late. These projects range from the liberal formulations of Jonathan Culler, Gerald Graff, and Robert Scholes to the frankly leftist proposals of Gayatri Spivak, Frank Lentricchia, Edward Said, and Fredric Jameson. Their common contention, admittedly within a dizzying range of differences, is that texts, both poetic and rhetorical, must be considered within the (variously defined) social context that produced them. Responses to texts, furthermore, must include the means for critiquing both text and context. For those
17 Teaching as a Test of Knowledge: from:
Rhetoric in an Antifoundational World
Author(s) Metzger David
Abstract: At the end of the
Protagoras, Socrates discovers that insofar as what we teach is knowledge we cannot teach it. The essential thrust of theProtagoras, as well as theMeno, is that if knowledge is particular, teaching cannot be and if teaching is particular, knowledge cannot be. In theMeno, Socrates asks what virtue is, and Meno insists on teaching him about virtue by examples. Socrates tells him that such teaching will not do; Socrates wishes to know what virtue is. Then Meno tells him how to be virtuous by acting virtuously. Socrates insists that Meno has not yet
Book Title: The Uncertain Sciences- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Mazlish Bruce
Abstract: In this wide-ranging book one of the most esteemed cultural historians of our time turns his attention to major questions about human experience and the attempts to understand it "scientifically." Bruce Mazlish considers the achievements, failings, and possibilities of the human sciences-a domain that he broadly defines to include the social sciences, literature, psychology, and hermeneutic studies. In a rich and original synthesis built upon the work of earlier philosophers and historians, Mazlish constructs a new view of the nature and meaning of the human sciences.Starting with the remote human past and moving through the Age of Discovery to the present day, the author discusses what sort of knowledge the human sciences claim to offer. He looks closely at the positivistic aspirations of the human sciences, which are modeled after the natural sciences, and at their interpretive tendencies. In an analysis of scientific method and scientific community, he explores the roles they can or should assume in the human sciences. Mazlish's approach is genuinely interdisciplinary, and he draws on an array of topics, from civil society to globalization to the interactions of humans and machines, to inform his thought-provoking discussion of historical consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bf4m
2 Positivism from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: In our search for an understanding of the human sciences, we shall not be interested in an abstract, philosophical
4 Hermeneutics from:
The Uncertain Sciences
Abstract: Culture is the key concept in much (though not all) of human science. Yet it is more useful to think of humans first as symbolic animals, rather than cultural animals, for symbolic abilities underlie the existence of both cultures and societies. The species, at the same time that its brain physically evolved, adding a cerebral cortex to its limbic core, increasingly replaced immediate, instinctual responses with delayed, thoughtful actions, mediated through symbols. We need not examine in detail the familiar findings of recent research that tell us of the development of symbolic language, with denotative and connotative characteristics, especially as
Book Title: Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): WEINSHEIMER JOEL
Abstract: In this wide-ranging historical introduction to philosophical hermeneutics, Jean Grondin discusses the major figures from Philo to Habermas, analyzes conflicts between various interpretive schools, and provides a persuasive critique of Gadamer's view of hermeneutic history, though in other ways Gadamer's
Truth and Methodserves as a model for Grondin's approach.Grondin begins with brief overviews of the pre-nineteenth-century thinkers Philo, Origen, Augustine, Luther, Flacius, Dannhauer, Chladenius, Meier, Rambach, Ast, and Schlegel. Next he provides more extensive treatments of such major nineteenth-century figures as Schleiermacher, Böckh, Droysen, and Dilthey. There are full chapters devoted to Heidegger and Gadamer as well as shorter discussions of Betti, Habermas, and Derrida. Because he is the first to pay close attention to pre-Romantic figures, Grondin is able to show that the history of hermeneutics cannot be viewed as a gradual, steady progression in the direction of complete universalization. His book makes it clear that even in the early period, hermeneutic thinkers acknowledged a universal aspect in interpretation-that long before Schleiermacher, hermeneutics was philosophical and not merely practical. In revising and correcting the standard account, Grondin's book is not merely introductory but revisionary, suitable for beginners as well as advanced students in the field.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bfxq
III Romantic Hermeneutics and Schleiermacher from:
Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: The transition from the Enlightenment to Romanticism is characterized, above all, by a great discontinuity. Even at first glance this is already manifested by the fact that Schleiermacher seems oblivious
VII Hermeneutics in Dialogue from:
Introduction to Philosophical Hermeneutics
Abstract: If anything is universal in philosophical hermeneutics, it is probably the recognition of one’s own finitude, the consciousness that actual speech does not suffice to exhaust the inner conversation that impels us toward understanding. Gadamer ties the universality of the hermeneutic process to the fact that understanding depends on this ongoing conversation: “That a conversation occurs, no matter when or where or with whom, wherever something comes to language, whether this is another person, a thing, a word, a flame (Gottfried Benn)—this is what constitutes the universality of hermeneutic experience.”¹ Only in conversation, only in confrontation with another’s thought
Book Title: Reading Abstract Expressionism-Context and Critique
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Landau Ellen G.
Abstract: Abstract Expressionism is arguably the most important art movement in postwar America. Many of its creators and critics became celebrities, participating in heated public debates that were published in newspapers, magazines, and exhibition catalogues. This up-to-date anthology is the first comprehensive collection of key critical writings about Abstract Expressionism from its inception in the 1940s to the present day. Ellen G. Landau's masterful introduction presents and analyzes the major arguments and crucial points of view that have surrounded the movement decade by decade. She then offers a selection of readings, also organized by decade, including influential statements by such artists as Mark Rothko, Robert Motherwell, Jackson Pollock, and Barnett Newman as well as the commentary of diverse critics. Offering new insights into the development of Abstract Expressionism, this rich anthology also demonstrates the ongoing impact of this revolutionary and controversial movement. Reading Abstract Expressionism is essential for the library of any curator, scholar, or student of twentieth-century art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bk1z
Introduction from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Abstract: Despite continuing references in the scholarly and the popular press to the lasting artistic and cultural relevance of Abstract Expressionism, no comprehensive collection of essays related to this movement has been published since David and Cecile Shapiro’s
Abstract Expressionism: A Critical Record and Clifford Ross’s Abstract Expressionism: Creators and Critics appeared in 1990. Francis Frascina’s Pollock and After: The Critical Debate (second edition) and Pepe Karmel’s Jackson Pollock: New Approaches are the only anthologies with any direct relation to art of the New York School produced after 1995. Each is a specialized endeavor that does not aim to reflect the
Excerpt from ʺArt in New Yorkʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROTHKO MARK
Abstract: “The portrait has always been linked in my mind with a picture of a person. I was therefore surprised to see your paintings of mythological characters with their abstract rendition, in a portrait show, and would therefore be very much interested in your answers to the following— …”
The Ideographic Picture from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) NEWMAN BARNETT
Abstract: The Kwakiutl artist painting on a hide did not concern himself with the inconsequentials that made up the opulent social rivalries of the Northwest Coast Indian scene; nor did he, in the name of a higher purity, renounce the living world for the meaningless materialism of design. The abstract shape he used, his entire plastic language, was directed by a ritualistic will toward metaphysical understanding. The everyday realities he left to the toymakers; the pleasant play of nonobjective pattern, to the women basket weavers. To him a shape was a living thing, a vehicle for an abstract thought-complex, a carrier
The Romantics Were Prompted from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROTHKO MARK
Abstract: The unfriendliness of society to his activity is difficult for the artist to accept. Yet this very hostility can act as a lever for true liberation. Freed from a false sense of security and community, the artist can abandon his plastic bankbook, just as he has abandoned other forms of security. Both the sense of community and security depend on the familiar. Free of
Excerpt from ʺWhither Goes Abstract and Surrealist Art?ʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) RILEY MAUDE
Abstract: Two exhibitions and a book on Abstract and Surrealist Art in America focus attention during December upon these long-surviving forms in 20th century art. The book is by Sidney Janis (Reynal & Hitchock, $6.50); the exhibitions are his, too, for they are composed of the paintings illustrated in the publication, which will be released December 4. The Nierendorf Galleries will show (starting Dec. 5)
American and European Pioneers of 20th Century Art. The Mortimer Brandt Galleries opened the “young” American section of the study on Nov. 28 with an exhibition of 50 paintings which bears the same title as the book,
Editorial Preface from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROSENBERG HAROLD
Abstract: Such practice implies the belief that through conversion of energy something valid may come out, whatever situation one is forced to begin with.
The Intrasubjectives from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROSENBERG HAROLD
Abstract: We have had many fine artists who have been able to arrive at Abstraction through Cubism: Marin, Stuart Davis, Demuth, among others. They have been the pioneers in a revolt from the American tradition of Nationalism and of subservience to the object. Theirs has, in the main, been an objective act as differentiated from the new painters’ inwardness.
Excerpts from Artistsʹ Sessions at Studio 35 from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) GOODNOUGH ROBERT
Abstract: Sterne: We need a common vocabulary. Abstract should really mean abstract, and modern should really mean modern. We don’t mean the same things with the same words.
Statement from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) STILL CLYFFORD
Abstract: That pigment on canvas has a way of initiating conventional reactions for most people needs no reminder. Behind these reactions is a body of history matured into dogma, authority, tradition. The totalitarian hegemony of this tradition I despise, its presumptions I reject. Its security is an illusion, banal, and without courage. Its substance is but dust and filing cabinets. The homage paid to it is a celebration of death. We all bear the burden of this tradition on our backs but I cannot hold it a privilege to be a pallbearer of my spirit in its name.
de Kooning Paints a Picture from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HESS THOMAS B.
Abstract: In the first days of June, 1950, Willem de Kooning tacked a 7-foot-high canvas to his painting frame and began intensive work on
Woman—a picture of a seated figure, and a theme which had preoccupied him for over two decades. He decided to concentrate on this single major effort until it was finished to his satisfaction.
ʺAmerican-Typeʺ Painting from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) GREENBERG CLEMENT
Abstract: The latest abstract painting offends many people, among whom are more than a few who accept the abstract in art in principle. New painting (sculpture is a different question) still provokes scandal when little that is new in literature or even music appears to do so any longer. This may be explained by the very slowness of painting’s evolution as a modernist art. Though it started on its “modernization” earlier perhaps than the other arts, it has turned out to have a greater number of
expendable conventions imbedded in it, or these at least have proven harder to isolate and
Excerpt from ʺThe Liberating Quality of Avant-Garde Artʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SCHAPIRO MEYER
Abstract: In discussing the place of painting and sculpture in the culture of our time, I shall refer only to those kinds which, whether abstract or not, have a fresh inventive character, that art which is called “modern” not simply because it is of our century, but because it is the work of artists who take seriously the challenge of new possibilities and wish to introduce into their work perceptions, ideas and experiences which have come about only within our time.
The Unwanted Title: Abstract Expressionism from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) PAVIA P. G.
Abstract: If we temporarily shelve the over-powering personalities in the
avant-garde, we can reach down to underground ideas that are foundations of the American Abstract Art movement. Subtle but strong essences of its beginnings are buried in seven very special panels given at “the club” in a series entitled “Abstract Expressionism.” Some of the ideas and the element of chance that went into making this “handy” title can be traced, ironically and philosophically, through these seven panels. The American movement of abstract art is not the fireworks of one or two artist personalities but is a deeply-rooted idea clawing the only
Excerpt from from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ARNASON H. H.
Abstract: […] As the title indicates, the present exhibition is really a double exhibition which not only surveys the present state of the Abstract Expressionists but follows in some detail the direction to which the name “Abstract Imagists” has been applied. It is a fact that from the late Forties to the present day certain painters, loosely grouped with the Abstract Expressionists, have rather been concerned through extreme simplification of their canvases—frequently to the dominant assertion of a single overpowering element—in presenting an all-encompassing presence. This “presence” could be described as an “image” in the sense of an abstract
The Biomorphic ʹ40s from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ALLOWAY LAWRENCE
Abstract: The movements of 20th-century art, to the extent that they began with artists’ acts of self-identification, in opposition either to another group of artists or against a public made grandiose and threatening as the Philistines, tend to stay monolithic. Efforts are made to unify these discrete movements, like different shaped beads on a string of “the classical spirit” or “the expressionist temperament,” but obviously this delivers very little, except an illusion of mastery to the users of cliché. More is needed than the revival of the exhausted classical/romantic antithesis, which leaves the movements to be united sequentially undisturbed. Modern art
Jackson Pollock from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) FRIED MICHAEL
Abstract: The almost complete failure of contemporary art criticism to come to grips with Pollock’s accomplishment is striking. This failure has been due to several factors. First and least important, the tendency of art writers such as Harold Rosenberg and Thomas Hess to regard Pollock as a kind of natural existentialist has served to obscure the simple truth that Pollock was, on the contrary, a painter whose work is always inhabited by a subtle, questing formal intelligence of the highest order, and whose concern in his art was not with any fashionable metaphysics of despair but with making the best paintings
Concerning the Beginnings of the New York School, 1939–1943: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) Busa Peter
Abstract: Matta: In New York, I lived rather poorly at first. Julian Levy was our natural contact
Concerning the Beginnings of the New York School, 1939–1943: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) Motherwell Robert
Abstract: Motherwell: To give some idea of what must have taken place, I will have to emphasize the fact that my background up to 1940 had little to do with painting. Until then, I had known only one obscure American artist. My grown-up life had been spent in prep school and universities, involving various scholarly pursuits.
Residual Sign Systems in Abstract Expressionism from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ALLOWAY LAWRENCE
Abstract: A problem that reciprocally involved both subject matter and formality engaged the Abstract Expressionist painters of the middle and late forties. It was how to make paintings that would be powerful signifiers, and this led to decisions as to what signifiers could be properly referred to without compromising (too much) the flatness of the picture plane. The desire for a momentous content was constricted by the spatial requirement of flatness and by the historically influenced need to avoid direct citation of objects. Something of this train of thought can be seen in Barnett Newman’s reflections on the role of the
Robert Motherwellʹs from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) HOBBS ROBERT C.
Abstract: The practice of grafting literary titles
Excerpt from ʺAbstract Expressionism: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SHAPIRO CECILE
Abstract: Abstract Expressionism, of course, can in no way be equated with McCarthyism, although the conformism that pervaded the decade goes a long way toward explaining the power of each. But while McCarthyism was the expression of a vicious political authoritarianism, Abstract Expressionism might better be described as anarchist
Symbolic Pregnance in Mark Rothko and Clyfford Still from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) KUSPIT DONALD B.
Abstract: Yes, we can continue to ask, for it is the core epistemological question about abstract art, sharply and freshly raised by the works of Rothko and Still, which generate intense sensations and unpredictable meanings and the question of their interrelation. As Michel Conil-Lacoste wrote of the late Rothko, there are “deux lectures de Rothko: non pas seulement celle du technicien de la coleur, mais aussi celle de l’âme éprise de mysticisme.”¹ The technician of color supplies the raw material of sensation, and the mystic communicates ideal meanings. But how much can the two be said to interweave, when the sensory
James Joyce and the First Generation New York School from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) FIRESTONE EVAN R.
Abstract: The artists of the first generation New York School, most of whom are known collectively as Abstract Expressionists, were as a group generally well-read or well-informed and in touch with the literary currents of their time. Non-fiction works by Nietzsche, Freud, Jung, and James Frazer combined on their reading lists with the writings of Baudelaire, the French Symbolist poets (especially Rimbaud), Herman Melville, André Breton and Garcia Lorca, among others. Although scholars have examined the connections between this group of artists and literature rather carefully, except in the case of David Smith there has been relatively little mention of James
The Market for Abstract Expressionism: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ROBSON A. DIERDRE
Abstract: The immediate post–World War II years are taken to be those that mark the emergence not only of the United States as a major world power but also of new American artistic avant-garde, aggressively different in style and aesthetic from previous European modernism. Recently some attention has focused on how Abstract Expressionism came to critical prominence and on the political and cultural implications of this new avant-garde, due to the apparent congruence between an aesthetic that stressed individuality and vigour and the Cold War liberal ideology of the postwar Truman era, which equated these two characteristics with Western (American)
The Impact of Nietzsche and Northwest Coast Indian Art on Barnett Newmanʹs Idea of Redemption in the Abstract Sublime from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) RUSHING W. JACKSON
Abstract: In the late 1930s and early 1940s the “myth-makers” of the New York avant-garde, including Adolph Gottlieb, Jackson Pollock, Richard Pousette-Dart, and Mark Rothko, made paintings that referred to atavistic myth, primordial origins, and primitive rituals and symbols, especially those of Native American cultures.¹ Barnett Newman began to work in a similar fashion about 1944 and was influential as a theorist and indefatigable promoter of this new art. The “myth-makers” shared a tendency to depict ritual violence or inherently violent myths as well as an archaism exemplified by biomorphic forms and, often, coarse surfaces. This self-conscious primitivism of early Abstract
The Rhetoric of Abstract Expressionism from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) GIBSON ANN
Abstract: The idea of Abstract Expressionism having a rhetoric—of artists such as Jackson Pollock or Mark Rothko having recourse to a set of verbal skills—will appear to most as a contradiction in terms. Abstract Expressionism has become synonymous with a reluctance to explain, and that reluctance has become associated with the assumption that it is irrelevant to discuss meaning as the relation between form and subject matter. The idea that explication is antithetical to Abstract Expressionist art was generated in part by critics who took artists at their word. When Clement Greenberg told an interviewer: “I don’t think I
ʺIntroduction,ʺ ʺAbstract Expressionism and Afro-American Marginalisation,ʺ and ʺDissent During the McCarthy Periodʺ from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) CRAVEN DAVID
Abstract: In many parts of the world, Abstract Expressionism signifies the ascendancy to cultural pre-eminence of United States art. Yet it is also viewed with disfavour or indifference by the majority of the people in the U.S. whose culture this art presumably represents.⁴ Equally paradoxical is the relation of Abstract Expressionism to contemporary Latin American art. At a time when U.S. intervention throughout the Americas has intensified, the receptivity of progressive Latin American artists to
certain aspects of post-war U.S. art (even as these same artists vigorously oppose U.S. hegemony) raises new questions about the nature of art produced in the
In Defense of Abstract Expressionism from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) CLARK T. J.
Abstract: We are forty years away from Abstract Expressionism, and the question of how we should understand our relationship to the movement starts to be interesting again. Awe at its triumphs is long gone; but so is laughter at its cheap philosophy, or distaste for its heavy breathing, or boredom with its sublimity, or even resentment at the part it played in the Cold War. Not that any of those feelings has dissipated, or ever should, but that it begins to be clear that none of them—not even the sum of them—amounts to an attitude to the painting in
Reconsidering the Stain: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) SALTZMAN LISA
Abstract: Consider, for just one moment Jackson Pollock’s
Cut-Out of 1948–1950. Don’t flip to look at a reproduction. Instead, and perhaps more appropriately, conjure it in your mind. For though Pollock’s Cut-Out is a painting, it is a work from which the center, the figure, has quite literally been excised, extinguished, a work with nothing more at its core than a ghostly trace, figuration as corpse. Emptied of its bodily fullness, its corporeality, its life, Cut-Out leaves us with nothing other than figuration as a hollow shell, a specter which can only haunt abstraction. Framed by the marginal remains of
ʺOf the Earth, the Damned, and of the Recreatedʺ: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) ANFAM DAVID
Abstract: Despite its importance, Clyfford Stillʼs work poses greater problems for scholarship than that of any other artist associated with Abstract Expressionism. Secondary sources remain either scarce or obscure, while the complete corpus of his works has neither been shown nor published.¹ What is known stems largely from Still himself, who thereby sought to pre-empt the mosaic of art-historical interpretation. He replaced it with a canon whose main agents are the gifts totalling sixty-nine paintings, together with their catalogues, made to three North American institutions: the Albright-Knox Art Gallery in Buffalo, the San Francisco Museum of Modern Art and New York’s
Arcadian Nightmares: from:
Reading Abstract Expressionism
Author(s) MARTER JOAN M.
Abstract: David Smith and Dorothy Dehner and their years together at Bolton Landing rival the dramatic accounts of many artist-couples, given the volatile temperament of Smith, the physicality of his work, Dehner’s determination to survive, and her vital imagery.¹ Marriages far less tumultuous have been fodder for books on the Abstract Expressionists. The De Koonings have been discussed in several publications: their drinking habits and romantic liaisons exposed, while no attempt was made to explore the relevance of their personal lives to their artistic achievements.² In Andrea Gabor’s
Einstein’s Wife, Lee Krasner’s physiognomy and Jackson Pollock’s alcoholism and psychological problems are
CHAPTER 2 The Shadows from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: Hannah Arendt’s university years, from 1924 to 1929, were exactly the years of greatest stability for the troubled Weimar Republic. By the summer of 1924 the government’s program of economic stabilization had brought to a temporary end the worst period of inflation, and a change of government in financially troubled France had reduced the Germans’ feeling of being surrounded by vindictive extortionists. But just as this feeling was abating, the provisions of the Dawes Plan were made known. The plan provided an Allied loan for the continuation of the German economic recovery and a scheme for reparations payments intended to
[PART 2: Introduction] from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: FOR EIGHTEEN YEARS, HANNAH ARENDT WAS A “STATEless person.” But this period when she had no political rights—between her flight from Nazi Germany in 1933 and her receipt of American citizenship in 1951—was her most active politically. In Paris, where she worked for organizations that helped Jewish refugees emigrate to Palestine and supplied legal aid to anti-Fascists, she left behind the apolitical intellectuality of her university circles. She found a peer group that included artists and workers, Jews and non-Jews, activists and pariahs; German was their language, but they were cosmopolitan in vision. With this group, which included
CHAPTER 4 Stateless Persons from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: After arranging for her mother’s safe return to Königsberg, Hannah Arendt went to Paris in the fall of 1933 and rejoined Günther Stern. They lived together, had common friends and activities, but their marriage was never restored. Companionship and the difficult practical business of securing food and lodging continued to bind them; and such bonds, between people who hardly knew what to expect from one day to the next at the hands of “that old trickster, World-History,” were important to them both. To friends like Hans Jonas, who visited them shortly after the Stavisky scandals of 1934, they still presented
CHAPTER 9 America in Dark Times from:
Hannah Arendt
Abstract: While Hannah Arendt was trying to think her way toward a “political morals,” her adopted country entered years of political and moral confusion as drastic as any in the postwar period. Many Americans in and around the New Left thought they were witnessing a reenactment of the decline of the Weimar Republic or France between the wars. Arendt resisted the analogy. In the mid-1960s, she thought that the American military presence in Vietnam would remain limited; she expected early withdrawal of troops, assuming that informed public opinion, which she viewed as solidly against the war, would prevail. In April 1965,
Book Title: Passage to Modernity-An Essay on the Hermeneutics of Nature and Culture
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Dupré Louis
Abstract: Did modernity begin with the Renaissance and end with post-modernity? In this book a distinguished scholar challenges both these assumptions. Louis Dupré discusses the roots, development, and impact of modern thought, tracing the fundamental principles of modernity to the late fourteenth century and affirming that modernity is still an influential force in contemporary culture.The combination of late medieval theology and early Italian humanism shattered the traditional synthesis that had united cosmic, human, and transcendent components in a comprehensive idea of nature. Early Italian humanism transformed the traditional worldview by its unprecedented emphasis on human creativity. The person emerged as the sole source of meaning while nature was reduced to an object and transcendence withdrew into a "supernatural" realm. Dupré analyzes this fragmentation as well as the writings of those who reacted against it-philosophers like Cusanus and Bruno, humanists like Ficino and Erasmus, theologians like Baius and Jansenius, mystics like Ignatius Loyola and Francis de Sales, and theosophists like Weigel and Boehme.Baroque culture briefly reunited the human, cosmic, and transcendent components, but since that time the disintegrating forces have increased in strength. Despite post-modern criticism, the principles of early modernity continue to dominate the climate of our time.
Passage to Modernityis not so much a critique as a search for the philosophical meaning of the epochal change achieved by those principles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bm6t
Introduction from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The idea of modernity has long attracted critical attention. Many hold its principles responsible for various ills that threaten to drain our culture of meaning and purpose. Those charges presuppose that we know how to distinguish the
modernfrom thepremodern. Most critics, however, finding it unnecessary to be precise on this issue, remain satisfied with reversing the praise that earlier generations showered upon an allegedly modern mode of thinking and acting. While they exalted rational objectivity, moral tolerance, and individual choice as cultural absolutes, we now regard these principles with some suspicion. Undoubtedly there are good reasons to distrust
Chapter 1 Classical and Medieval Antecedents from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In Greek myths as well as in early philosophy,
physisappears simultaneously as a primordial, formative event and as the all-inclusive, informed reality that results from this event.To beconsists in partaking in an aboriginal act of expression. Nothing
Chapter 2 Nature and Form from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: Any periodization of the early modern age remains controversial. The similarities that link its culture with what we assume to be a previous epoch are as many as the differences that separate them. Moreover, the lines of similarity and difference in one area of culture do not run parallel with those in another. Art and literature may develop differently than theology. The problem is particularly acute with respect to the complex idea or cluster of ideas of nature. While artists, humanists, and spiritual theologians of the fifteenth century stressed a divine presence in nature, school theology actually widened the distance
Chapter 5 The New Meaning of Freedom from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: The modern concept of subjectivity rests solidly on the idea of freedom, so much so that many consider autonomy
thecharacteristic of the new age. But a concern with freedom already marks the earliest period of our culture. The ideal of self-governing citizenship guided the development of the Greek city and survived its decline. That early ideal, however, had been political rather than individual. It aimed at enabling a select group of citizens to live in conditions of communal equality andautarkeia. Neither in theory nor in practice did those allowed to pursue it trouble themselves much about individual rights.
Chapter 7 The Fateful Separation from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: Early Greek philosophy defined the terms in which Western thought was to formulate transcendence. The Ionian search for a ground of nature beyond its appearance as well as the Pythagorean distinction between a principle of intelligibility and the reality it renders intelligible made the relation from the more fundamental to the less fundamental an unavoidable issue. Classical Greek philosophy eventually resolved it by means of the form principle. The form resided within the appearing objects of which it constituted the intelligible essence, yet as determining factor it also surpassed them. In his dialogue
ParmenidesPlato presents the great metaphysician laying
Chapter 8 The Attempted Reunion from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: In this chapter I will review three major attempts to overcome the theological dualism modern culture inherited from late medieval thought, namely, those of humanist religion, the early Reformation, and Jansenist theology. According to such Christian humanists as Valla, Erasmus, and Ficino, a universal divine attraction sanctifies the natural order and draws it back to its source. Archaic religion, ancient philosophy, Hebrew and Christian revelation—in an order of increasing intensity—all responded to the same divine impulse. Generally speaking, humanism offered more an alternative than an answer to the questions raised by fifteenth-century School theology. Humanists, even when acquainted
Conclusion from:
Passage to Modernity
Abstract: Modernity is an
eventthat has transformed the relation between the cosmos, its transcendent source, and its human interpreter. To explain this as the outcome of historical precedents is to ignore its most significant quality—namely, its success in rendering all rival views of the real obsolete. Its innovative power made modernity, which began as a local Western phenomenon, a universal project capable of forcing its theoretical and practical principles on all but the most isolated civilizations. “Modern” has become the predicate of a unified world culture.
four History in the Service and Disservice of Life: from:
Pushkin's Historical Imagination
Abstract: As brief as it may be, Pushkin’s lyric poem “The Hero” (“Geroi”), written in 1830, constitutes one of his poetical manifestos.¹ This short poem encapsulates Pushkin’s response to the cultural and historical polemics of his day. Moreover, it is both a metapoetical and metahistorical poem, constituting one of Pushkin’s most controversial statements on the relationship between art and history, the nature of truth, and the status of historical fact. The poem needs to be quoted in full.
Book Title: Interpreting Interpretation-The Limits of Hermeneutic Psychoanalysis
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Saks Elyn R.
Abstract: Psychoanalytic interpretation, according to the hermeneutic view, is concerned with meaning rather than facts or causes. In this provocative book, Elyn R. Saks focuses closely on what hermeneutic psychoanalysis is and how the approaches of hermeneutic psychoanalysts differ. She finds that although these psychoanalysts use the same words, concepts, images, and analogies, they hold to at least five different positions on the truth of psychoanalytic interpretations. Saks locates within these five models the thought of such prominent analysts as Roy Schafer, Donald Spence, and George Klein. Then, approaching each model from the patient's point of view, the author reaches important conclusions about treatments that patients not only will-but should-reject.If patients understood the true nature of the various models of hermeneutic psychoanalysis, Saks argues, they would spurn the story model, which asks patients to believe interpretations that do not purport to be true; that is, the psychoanalyst simply tells stories that give meaning to patients' lives, the truth of which is not considered relevant. And patients would question the metaphor and the interpretations-as-literary-criticism models, which propose views of psychoanalysis that may be unsatisfying. In addition to discussing which hermeneutic models of treatment are plausible, Saks discusses the nature of metaphorical truth. She arrives at some penetrating insights into the theory of psychoanalysis itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bpmh
2 The Hermeneutic Analytic Thinkers from:
Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: I have selected eight representative thinkers who have written about hermeneutic psychoanalysis for consideration in this chapter. They are a disparate group in many ways: some are practicing psychoanalysts, some are not; some have written extensively about hermeneutic psychoanalysis, some have not; some have written at one time, some at another; some have one clinical view, some another. Indeed, several of these thinkers might reject the idea of being grouped with the others. But that is part of the point: these people sound quite a lot like each other but are actually very different. I select these eight thinkers, then,
7 Implications for Theoretical Psychoanalysis and Other Concluding Thoughts from:
Interpreting Interpretation
Abstract: In this concluding chapter I make a foray beyond the realms hitherto occupied. Thus far I have confined myself to the viability of psychoanalysis as a
practiceon the hermeneutic views. But these views also have consequences for how we are to think of psychoanalysis as atheoryof psychology. I want now to consider these implications, raise other issues that deserve further research, and summarize my findings in this work.
Book Title: Care of the Psyche-A History of Psychological Healing
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): JACKSON STANLEY W.
Abstract: In this book, a distinguished historian of medicine surveys the basic elements that have constituted psychological healing over the centuries. Dr. Stanley W. Jackson shows that healing practices, whether they come from the worlds of medicine, religion, or philosophy, share certain elements that transcend space and time.Drawing on medical writings from classical Greece and Rome to the present, as well as on philosophical and religious writings, Dr. Jackson shows that the basic ingredients of psychological healing-which have survived changes of name, the fall of their theoretical contexts, and the waning of social support in different historical eras-are essential factors in our modern psychotherapies and in healing contexts in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bpqz
1 Introduction from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Several decades of study and teaching in the history of medicine have left me significantly impressed by the recurrent indications of psychological healing endeavors over many centuries. And many years as a practitioner and teacher of psychotherapy have sensitized me to the problems inherent in comparing and contrasting the various approaches to psychotherapy. Why were there such suggestive similarities between
thisapproach andthatapproach, and yet why did they still seem so different?
2 Psychological Healing in Ancient Greece and Rome from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The ancients believed the world to be inhabited by demons, spirits, evil forces, and gods who were potentially malevolent or potentially benevolent factors in the life of a person and a culture. And
3 The Healer-Sufferer Relationship from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The ultimate basis for the practice of medicine, or healing by any other name, is the suffering of the patients and their explicit or implicit calls for help. Thus it is reasonable to assert that the primary function of a healer is to ease a patient’s suffering, while striving to cure a disease or ameliorate its effects. And the healer-sufferer relationship has long been recognized as a crucial factor in healing—for better or for worse, depending on the extent to which it has been characterized by trust and confidence on the sufferer’s part and a concerned, sympathetic, and humane
5 The Talking Cures from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: In psychological healing, as in much of human interaction in general,
talkingis of the essence. It is one of psychological healing’s basic elements, serving the sufferer in conveying vital information about his or her ailments and general state to the healer and playing a crucial role in most of the healer’s therapeutic interactions.
7 Confession and Confiding from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The term
confessionis defined as “the disclosing of something the knowledge of which by others is considered humiliating or prejudicial to the person confessing: a making known or acknowledging of one’s fault, wrong, crime, weakness, etc.” Although this definition encompasses matters of special importance in the traditions of both law and religion, it is the religious association that is relevant to the history of psychological healing. In that tradition, it has been considered “a religious act: the acknowledging of sin or sinfulness.” More specifically, it became “auricular confession”: that is, “addressed to the ear; told privately in the ear.”¹
8 Consolation and Comfort from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Consolation—“the act of consoling, cheering, or comforting... alleviation of sorrow or mental distress”¹—would seem to be one of the oldest among the modes of psychological healing. With its verb,to console,defined as “to comfort in mental distress or depression; to alleviate the sorrow of (any one); ‘to free from the sense of misery,’ ” we are discussing a rich tradition of ministering to troubled persons. Distress in response to misfortune has been part of the human story since time immemorial. And one’s fellows’ inclination to respond to that distress with some effort to comfort or console seems
10 The Use of the Imagination from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: The imagination served for many centuries as a key element in certain modes of psychological healing of insane and otherwise severely troubled persons. Often enough, this role was extended to a broader range of ailments in a way reminiscent of a modern psychosomatic orientation. Considerable evidence indicates that healing images have been commonly used in shamanistic healing practices across a wide range of cultures¹ and in healing endeavors associated with many religious traditions—in Judaism, Christianity, Islam, and Far Eastern religions.² And as the background to their place in Western psychological therapeutics, the imagination and its images have a long
11 Animal Magnetism, Mesmerism, and Hypnosis from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: In the 1770s, certain activities of Franz Anton Mesmer initiated the development of a complex of healing activities that came to be known as animal magnetism or mesmerism and that eventually evolved into hypnosis. Swiss born, Mesmer earned doctoral degrees in both philosophy and medicine, the latter in Vienna in 1766, where he then settled and practiced medicine.
13 Persuasion from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Persuasion is another element in psychological healing that has a long and significant history. With the emergence of the “persuasionists” as significant among the psychotherapeutists of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, it has seemed to some that persuasion was primarily a mode of psychological treatment that had arisen as a challenge to the “suggestionists” of the day. But persuasion as a method long antedated the mesmerists, the hypnotists, and those who practiced suggestive therapeutics. Like suggestion, persuasion was far from a latter-day addition to psychological healing.
14 Conditioning and Reward or Punishment from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: “Learning is the process by which an activity originates or is changed through reacting to an encountered situation, provided that the characteristics of the change in activity cannot be explained on the basis of native response tendencies, maturation, or temporary states of the organism (e.g., fatigue, drugs, etc.).”¹ Among the many theories of learning, one of the most prominent—and widely used as a basis for therapeutic techniques—has been that based on conditioning principles. In addition to its prominent place in animal studies on learning, conditioning is a particularly significant mode of human learning and an integral factor in
15 Explanation and Interpretation from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Among the meanings of
interpretationin the English language two definitional traditions are of particular importance for our purposes: one relating explanation or the act of explaining, and the other to translation or the act translating. Further, interpretation is the act of offering meaning, signification, or understanding—or the meaning, signification, or understanding offered—whether to another or to oneself.
16 Self-Understanding and Insight from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: 2. The fact of penetrating with the eyes of the understanding into the inner character or hidden nature of things; a glimpse or view beneath the surface; the faculty or power of thus seeing.¹
17 Self-Observation and Introspection from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Human beings have long observed the operations of their own minds or inspected the flow of their own mental events, whether in an effort to know more about themselves or for the grander purpose of increasing their knowledge of “mind.” The mental activities that came to be known as consciousness—sensations,
18 Overview and Afterthoughts from:
Care of the Psyche
Abstract: Much has been made of the culture-bound nature of certain psychological healing practices, on the grounds that they are not easily transferable to another cultural setting, not easily understood by healers in another culture, and not easily compared with its healing practices. The same problems have also been raised in the “cross-cultural” situation of various subcultures within the same larger society; each subculture’s healing practices may well differ in that they cohere around alternative ethnic customs, religious beliefs, or medical views. Similar difficulties can easily arise if one compares psychological healing practices over time. Cultural influences have admittedly shaped practices
2 Kenneth Burke’s Religious Rhetoric: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) BOOTH WAYNE C.
Abstract: Speculation about Kenneth Burke’s actual religion, in the face of his claims to be an unbeliever, has increased over recent decades.¹ Almost everyone who digs into his
Rhetoric of Religionemerges with some sense that it is a work exhibiting genuine religious inquiry. But we all are plagued by Burke’s repeated and aggressive claims that his “religious” interest is only in logology, the study of language, and not in theology: in the word “God” and not in God himself. Thus as I pursue the claim of this essay — that Burke is best thought of as a theologian, or even a
3 The Philosophical Foundations of Sacred Rhetoric from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) SHUGER DEBORA K.
Abstract: In a 1990 essay, Stanley Fish suggested that the history of Western thought from Plato through postmodernism could best be understood as a protracted debate between those who seek the truth and the sophists, or as what he terms the “quarrel between philosophy and rhetoric” (“Rhetoric,” 206, 209).¹ According to Fish, rhetoric is thus sophistic discourse, at once partisan and playful, and hence doubly “unconstrained by any sense of responsibility either to the Truth or to the Good”; it appeals to the emotions rather than the intellect and strives for victory rather than understanding. Philosophy, conversely, pursues “what is absolutely
10 Apophatic Analogy: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) CARLSON THOMAS A.
Abstract: The rhetorical modes of “negative” or “apophatic” theology — and of its twin, “mystical” theology — have since the 1970s attracted serious inquiry and extended discussion not only among theologians but also among literary theorists, and philosophers, who tend to share three interconnected concerns: the human subject’s finitude, its situation in language, and its desire. Among post-Heideggerian thinkers in particular, the fascination with textual and discursive traditions deriving from the negative theology of Pseudo-Dionysius (flourished ca. 500) almost always involves a fascination as well with the radically finite, desiring subject of language—to the point that one might suspect contemporary interest in
[PART III Introduction] from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Abstract: According to Victoria Kahn’s reading of Milton’s
Paradise Lost,what appears to be sublime could instead be a “satanic, parodic version of the Word.” Linguistic mediation requires an interpretive act to distinguish the true from the false. Kahn argues that Milton’s representation of Satan’s refusal to interpret the divine prohibition against eating enacts the fixity of a mind that refuses to acknowledge limitations
12 Rhetoric, Ideology, and Idolatry in the Writings of Emmanuel Levinas from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) SHAPIRO SUSAN E.
Abstract: As the audience for Emmanuel Levinas’s philosophical and Jewish thought has grown, his claim that ethics rather than ontology is first philosophy has become a more familiar — if resisted — view. This claim is central to Levinas’s thought and indeed, as will be made clear, figures importantly in relation to problems of rhetoric, ideology, and idolatry within discourse. For without the priority of ethics, a critique of these functionings would, for Levinas, be impossible. In order to demonstrate the importance, relations among, and shifting character of the problems of rhetoric, ideology, and idolatry in Levinas’s writings, I shall first briefly trace
[PART IV Introduction] from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Abstract: The close connection between rhetoric and religion has profound consequences for the possibility of unity within social and religious communities. Earlier Marjorie O’Rourke Boyle noted that the Renaissance humanists appreciated the “unitive power” of religion and rhetoric, “the bond of society, the integration of self, and communion with God,” drawing on the classical orators for whom speech was a socializing and civilizing act. In a similar way, Kathy Eden’s thoughtful study links adages, commonly held formulations of belief that unify both discursive practice and social relationships, to secular and Christian conceptions and practices of friendship, love, and community. She understands
15 Picturing God: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAPPEL STEPHEN
Abstract: The revitalization of rhetoric as an integral dimension of religious discourse has paralleled the rediscovery of the role of rhetoric in the social and natural sciences.¹ In Christian theology, discussions about rhetoric never quite ceased, owing to the practice of preaching and theories of homiletics. Current concerns in theology, however, focus on rhetoric in a different fashion. Attention to “what is communicated, how it is communicated, what happens when it is communicated, how to communicate it better,” how to understand the variables that create audiences, and how to assess the truth of communication have become crucial issues in the human
17 Performing Faith: from:
Rhetorical Invention and Religious Inquiry
Author(s) HAUERWAS STANLEY
Abstract: Christian faith evokes diverse and sometimes competing images and associations. For some, it conjures up a fairly coherent, albeit complexly interrelated array of experiences, dispositions, attitudes, and beliefs. For others, faith names not so much the defining subjective features of religious consciousness as the objective content of Christian religion. Faith is thus construed as a set of doctrines, a peculiar body of teaching and instruction. In short, faith is a divine “deposit” — with the church or the Bible acting as its repository.
Book Title: Faces of History-Historical Inquiry from Herodotus to Herder
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): KELLEY DONALD R.
Abstract: In this book, one of the world's leading intellectual historians offers a critical survey of Western historical thought and writing from the pre-classical era to the late eighteenth century. Donald R. Kelley focuses on persistent themes and methodology, including questions of myth, national origins, chronology, language, literary forms, rhetoric, translation, historical method and criticism, theory and practice of interpretation, cultural studies, philosophy of history, and "historicism."Kelley begins by analyzing the dual tradition established by the foundational works of Greek historiography-Herodotus's broad cultural and antiquarian inquiry and the contrasting model of Thucydides' contemporary political and analytical narrative. He then examines the many variations on and departures from these themes produced in writings from Greek, Roman, Jewish, and Christian antiquity, in medieval chronicles, in national histories and revisions of history during the Renaissance and Reformation, and in the rise of erudite and enlightened history in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Throughout, Kelley discusses how later historians viewed their predecessors, including both supporters and detractors of the authors in question.The book, which is a companion volume to Kelley's highly praised anthology
Versions of History from Antiquity to the Enlightenment,will be a valuable resource for scholars and students interested in interpretations of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bs9h
10 Modern Historiography from:
Faces of History
Abstract: By the end of the eighteenth century, the study of history had achieved the status not only of a literary genre, discipline, and “science,” with its own complex history, but also of a profession. There were established chairs of history in the universities of Europe, especially in England, France, and Germany, as well as official historiographers, official collections of documents, and other kinds of private and public support for practitioners of history.¹ What was new in the Enlightenment was the encounters between history and philosophy, which had likewise, and even earlier, emerged as a professional field with an academic base.
Chapter 4 The Golden Apple from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: Almost fifty years ago, as a young student at the University of Chicago, I received my preliminary initiation into the erotic mysteries of the Platonic dialogues from an ambiguous foreign prophet named Leo Strauss. As I was no Socrates and Strauss no Diotima, this initiation could not be entirely satisfactory. I had no difficulty in accepting Strauss’s central hermeneutical principle that the key to Plato’s teaching is the dialogue-form itself. What could be more self-evident than that Plato wrote dramas rather than treatises (albeit somewhat eccentric, not to say occasionally boring dramas like the
ParmenidesandTimaeus) and so that
Chapter 10 Freedom and Reason from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: I begin with an informal statement of three different theses concerning the relation between freedom and reason. According to the first thesis, freedom is a consequence of the subordination of the intellect to independent formal structure. One finds a version of this thesis, for example, in Plato’s
Sophistat 253c6ff, where dialectic, or the science of the combination and separation of forms—also referred to as division in accordance with kinds—is identified by the Eleatic Stranger and the young mathematician Theaetetus as the science that characterizes the free man.
Chapter 13 Philosophy and Ordinary Experience from:
Metaphysics in Ordinary Language
Abstract: I propose to deal with the question of the relation between philosophy and ordinary experience. This sounds quite straightforward, but I am afraid that it is actually an unusually difficult problem. It is a striking fact of our century that philosophy has become increasingly concerned with ordinary experience, ordinary language, everyday life, or the life-world, to cite four often-used expressions. This concern is evident in both wings of the two major contemporary philosophical movements, which are popularly if inaccurately designated as the analytical and the continental or phenomenological schools. Interest in everyday or ordinary language has clearly been stimulated by
4 NARRATION AND NARRATIVITY IN FILM AND FICTION from:
Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: Let us assume that there is something called narrative that can exist apart from any particular method of narration or any particular narrative utterance, as we assume that there is something called the English language that exists apart from any particular form of discourse or any individual speech act in English. Narration is, first of all, a kind of human behavior. It is specifically a mimetic or representative behavior, through which human beings communicate certain kinds of message. The modes of narration may vary extraordinarily. (In passing, I should say that I am aware of our customary distinction between what
6 SEMIOTIC APPROACHES TO JOYCE’S “EVELINE” from:
Semiotics and Interpretation
Author(s) Joyce James
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is a simple one. I wish to argue, and to demonstrate as well as possible, that certain semiotic approaches to fictional texts, each incomplete in itself, can be combined in a manner that facilitates the practical criticism of fiction. The three approaches I wish to combine into a single methodology are the following:
8 UNCODING MAMA: from:
Semiotics and Interpretation
Abstract: It is a tenet of semiotic studies—and one to which I fully subscribe—that much of what we take to be natural is in fact cultural. Part of the critical enterprise of this discipline is a continual process of defamiliarization: the exposing of conventions, the discovering of codes that have become so ingrained we do not notice them but believe ourselves to behold through their transparency the real itself. Nowhere is this process more important or more powerful than in our perceptions of our own bodies. We think we know ourselves directly, but both the “we” that know and
Book Title: Types of Christian Theology- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Placher William C.
Abstract: In the book Frei proposes classifying theologians according to whether they see Christian theology primarily as an academic discipline or as an internal activity of Christian communities. He describes fie different variations of these views. the first, represented by Immanuel Kant and Gordon represented, regards theology as a philosophical discipline within the academy. The second, represented by theologians as diverse as represented represented, David Tracy, and Carl Henry, correlates specifically Christian with general cultural structures of meaning. The third type, represetned by represented represented and Paul represented, occupies the middle of the spectrum. The fourth type, represetned by Karl Barth, emphasizes the internal descriptive task of theology but remains open to ad hoc correlations with concerns of the wider culture. the fifth, which includes D. Z. Phillips and other Wittgensteinian fideists, opts for pure self-description though this group defends its position with philosophical arguments that, oddly enough connect it with the other end of the spectrum. Frei argues in favor of the third and fourth options. In his view, theologians like Schleiermacher and, even more, Barth, although often seen as polar opposites, enable theology to remain most faithful to the priority of the ecumenically attested literal sense in biblical interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bt4j
Editorial Introduction from:
Types of Christian Theology
Author(s) PLACHER WILLIAM C.
Abstract: When we undertook the task of assembling for publication Hans Frei’s typology of modern Christian theology, we were acutely aware that the book Frei wished to write could no longer be written; we have thus decided to make available some obviously fragmentary manuscripts without disguising their unfinished character.
4 Five Types of Theology from:
Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: In the first type that I am proposing,
theology as a philosophical disciplinein the academy takes complete priority over Christian self-description within the religious community called the Church, and Christian selfdescription, in its subordinate place, tends to emulate the philosophical character of academic theology by being as general as possible or as little specific about Christianity as it can be, and the distinction between external and internal description is basically unimportant. In Gordon Kaufman’s monograph,An Essay on Theological Method, the task of the theologian is to search out the rules governing the use of the word or concept
6 Ad Hoc Correlation from:
Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: Schleiermacher is a controversial case because many writers have consigned him to the second type; Professor Brian Gerrish of Chicago tends in that direction. But Professor Stephen Sykes tends to agree with me. The point here is that Schleiermacher identifies theology in two ways: as a practical discipline whose unity lies in its aim, the training of people in the conceptual skills necessary for ministry in the community defined by specific Christian life and language use; and as a historical and philosophical inquiry into the “essence” of Christianity, that is, as an academic discipline grounded in a unitary theory of
7 The End of Academic Theology? from:
Types of Christian Theology
Abstract: It is necessary to refer again to Karl Barth at this point. He proposed that Christian hermeneutics is a procedure whose taxonomy or phenomenology may be very simply set forth in three logically distinct but in fact united elements:
explicatio, meditatio, applicatio. Applicatio, the last of these, is for him the transition from the sense to the use of scriptural texts. In his “rules” for using philosophical schemes or some subjective modality in reading, he was talking aboutmeditatio. The proponents of type 5 may be described as saying thatat best, understanding the Bible—and Christian language more generally
1 The Most Fundamental of Empirical Questions or the Most Misguided—What Is Consciousness? from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: Our immediate awareness is as clearly present as it is resistant to definite characterization. Consciousness — and not coincidentally, as we will see — is much as Augustine said of time in his
Confessions: we seem to understand it quite well until we are asked about it, and precisely then do we find ourselves confused. While our own consciousness has
2 Cognition and Consciousness from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: Cognitive psychologists and neuropsychologists like Marcel (1983ab), Humphrey (1983), Baars (1988), Weiskrantz (1988), and Schacter (1989) now understand consciousness as a formal system or capacity involving the direction, choice, and synthesis of nonconscious processes. This movement, however, has also been answered with renewed versions of the traditional functionalist and behaviorist rejections of the study of consciousness as anything other than an incidental by-product of computational capacity (Dennett, 1991). Consciousness is seen as private and hence outside scientific scrutiny, confabulated and deluded in its pretended access to cognitive process, and ultimately nonfunctional. Such a rejection is in fact central to the
5 Animal Consciousness: from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: If consciousness is always enacted behaviorally in a world and neuronal connectivity instantiates consciousness but does not necessarily explain it, there is every reason to hope that we might come to understand both self-referential consciousness and the primary sentience it reorganizes by studying their likely points of evolutionary emergence. Any attempt, however, to infer forms and levels of consciousness in the activities and sensitive attunements of organisms simpler than ourselves runs immediately into one of the most fundamental debates of modern science. The issue of animal consciousness clearly pits the basic criteria of theoretical parsimony and availability of methodological verification
7 Synesthesia: from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: The idea that synesthesias show the inner side of a cross-modal translation capacity at the base of symbolic cognition offers a solution to one of the oldest disagreements in cognitive psychology — the Würzburg controversy over the underlying nature of thought. The debate is still very much with us in the contrast between those who understand thought as a propositional logic (Pylyshyn, 1984) and those who posit its basis in abstract visual-spatial imagery (Shepard, 1978; Lakoff, 1987; Johnson, 1987).
10 A Cognitive Psychology of Transpersonal States from:
On the Nature of Consciousness
Abstract: We can now undertake a more formal cognitive psychology of the developed forms of transpersonal experience — for the ancient Greeks, the vertical axis of
psycheaion, in contrast to what I have termed the horizontal sensus communis. Just as psyche-aion was described in terms of the same processes of fluidic dynamics as the “thought of the heart,” it also seems entirely plausible from a contemporary cognitive perspective to understand the range of experiences emerging with deep meditation and psychedelic drugs as cross-modal synesthetic translations across the more abstract or formal stages of perceptual microgenesis. In other words, these states manifest
[PART I Introduction] from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Despite the extensive advances in psychotherapy research during the past quarter-century (Garfield and Bergin, 1994; Roth and Fonagy, 1996), there have been few systematic efforts to address questions about psychoanalysis as therapy. Psychotherapy research, as a distinct and largely independent discipline, not to be confused with the practice of psychotherapy, involves systematic and empirical studies of psychotherapy process and outcome. It has gradually moved from fledgling attempts at empirical investigation, through a period of attempts to approximate a model of then-current medical research, to an increasing focus on interactive, subjective, and humanistic aspects of study (Orlinsky and Russel, 1994). Psychoanalysts
1 What Is Psychoanalysis? from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: A first step in studying whether psychoanalysis is effective is to delimit the treatments that will be called psychoanalysis. Freud (1904) defined psychoanalysis as the
interrelated methods of observation, a conceptual system, and a therapeutic procedure. But the details of this interrelation are unclear. What boundaries of technique and theory usefully set off psychoanalytic ideas and processes from other activities? How are various ways of thinking about psychoanalysis interrelated? The question of what activities and theory are legitimately called psychoanalytic pervades the history of the field, often resulting in discord (see, e.g., Freud, 1914b, 1924; Oberndorf, 1953; Roustang, 1976; Turkle,
6 The Columbia Psychoanalytic Center Research from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: In 1959 the Columbia University Psychoanalytic Clinic launched a research effort under the chairmanship of John Weber. Extensive data were collected, coded, and stored on computer tape about the characteristics and outcomes of 700 cases of psychoanalysis and 885 cases of psychotherapy conducted from 1945 to 1971. This was the first systematic study of an extensive sample of psychoanalytic patients.
7 The Boston Psychoanalytic Institute Prediction Studies from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: A third major group of studies of the outcome of psychoanalysis began in the 1950s and continues to this day. The project asks what factors observable during the diagnostic evaluation predict satisfactory analytic progress. In 1960 Peter Knapp and his coworkers reported a project designed to investigate the suitability for analysis of 100 supervised analytic cases. The investigation was limited because the cases were studied only through the first year of treatment. Inspired by Knapp’s work, Sashin, Eldred, and Van Amerongen (1975) studied 130 low-fee control cases that were treated by 66 student-analysts between 1959 and 1966. The patients ranged
9 Studies of Child and Adolescent Analysis from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: The study of child and adolescent analysis has always been placed somewhat apart from work with adults. Freud’s (1909) pessimism that children could be analyzed in ways that approximated analytic work with adults was echoed in Anna Freud’s (1927) early recommendations about child psychoanalysis. Melaine Klein (1921, 1961) consistently recommended a technique in working with children that was essentially identical to her recommendation for working with adults, except that the free association of adults was replaced by play in children. For many years Klein’s ideas had little impact on the clinical work of any but her followers, but by the
11 Clinical Follow-Up Studies and Case Studies from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Readers of the earlier chapters in this section will be understandably disappointed that, despite the enormous efforts of investigators, systematic research seems to have addressed few questions that are germane to clinical psychoanalytic practice. Either the population studied is too different from the patients ordinarily taken into psychoanalysis, or the measures of outcome and process are too crude to answer the questions that most interest analysts. The analyst wishes for investigative methods that are closer to the methods customarily used in psychoanalysis, addressing issues that confront her in daily work. The follow-up methods first introduced by Arnold Pfeffer meet many
12 Summary and Commentary on Systematic Studies from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: We have examined seven systematic, clinical-quantitative studies of terminated psychoanalyses involving approximately seventeen hundred patients experiencing a broad range of psychopathology, treated by approximately 450 students and graduate analysts at five different psychoanalytic training centers. Two provisional clinical-quantitative studies (Erle, 1979; Erle and Goldberg, 1984) have also been reported, involving 139 completed analyses conducted by 23 experienced psychoanalysts with primarily psychoanalytic practices. Seventy-one (mostly candidate) cases have also been studied with Pfeffer’s clinical methodology at three psychoanalytic centers. Here are the principal findings:
14 Collecting Data About Psychoanalysis from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Systematic psychoanalytic research requires a body of data to investigate. Unfortunately, data about analyses adequate for research purposes are difficult to obtain, and much of the data that are available have been so transformed in the process of reduction that investigators cannot be sure of their meaning. The very fact that the data were collected may so affect the analytic process that the data do not adequately represent ordinary psychoanalytic work. Analysts who are willing to collect detailed data about their work may be highly atypical in other ways. Data that appear in published reports are usually chosen because they
16 Data About Psychoanalytic Processes from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: In studying psychoanalytic processes or any other complex phenomenon, enough data must be collected to be meaningful, the data must be reduced to a tractable form without undue loss of significance, and the extent to which particular findings can be generalized must be described. Not only is the analytic process complex, but it varies from one analysis to another. It is therefore important that many detailed instances of psychoanalytic practice be available for close study. During the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, the painstaking collection of information in chemistry, descriptive biology, geology, and many other fields led to the generalizations that
17 Strategies for Exploring Psychoanalytic Processes from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: The Core Conflictual Relationship Theme method was developed by Lester Luborsky, based on repeated examples that he found in psychotherapies that could be characterized in terms of what
19 Studies of Populations of Patients from:
Does Psychoanalysis Work?
Abstract: Many of the questions we would like to have answered about psychoanalysis involve comparing groups of people. Do introspective people do better in analysis than action-oriented people? Do patients seen five times weekly develop more analyzable transferences than those seen less frequently? Are people who have been analyzed better off than unanalyzed people? Do analysts with character structures similar to the patient’s analyze those defenses that patient and analyst share less well than analysts whose defenses are dissimilar to the patient’s (Baudry, 1991)?
Book Title: Paul and Scripture-Extending the Conversation
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Stanley Christopher D.
Abstract: This book, which grew out of the Society of Biblical Literature’s Paul and Scripture Seminar, explores some of the methodological problems that have arisen during the last few decades of scholarly research on the apostle Paul’s engagement with his ancestral Scriptures. Essays explore the historical backgrounds of Paul’s interpretive practices, the question of Paul’s “faithfulness" to the context of his biblical references, the presence of Scripture in letters other than the Hauptbriefe, and the role of Scripture in Paul’s theology. All of the essays look at old questions through new lenses in an effort to break through scholarly impasses and advance the debate in new directions. The contributors are Matthew W. Bates, Linda L. Belleville, Roy E. Ciampa, Bruce N. Fisk, Stephen E. Fowl, Leonard Greenspoon, E. Elizabeth Johnson, Mitchell M. Kim, Steve Moyise, Jeremy Punt, Christopher D. Stanley, and Jerry L. Sumney.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bzfp
Latency and Respect for Context: from:
Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Moyise Steve
Abstract: Much of the discussion about the apostle Paul’s “respect for context” has assumed that the meaning of the Old Testament text is relatively clear. In this model, the task of the scholar is to evaluate the proximity or lack of proximity between Paul’s interpretations and the original meaning of the texts. By drawing on the concept of latent meaning, Mitchell Kim has drawn our attention to the fact that the original meanings are far from clear. It is a common experience that people “say more than they know,” so that hindsight can lead to an acknowledgment of “that’s what I
Scripture and Other Voices in Paul’s Theology from:
Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Belleville Linda L.
Abstract: This essay will explore “other voices” that shed light on Pauline texts that have commonly been labeled as theologically abstruse or the products of an overactive imagination.¹ Specifically, the voice
Beyond Hays’s Echoes of Scripture in the Letters of Paul: from:
Paul and Scripture
Author(s) Bates Matthew W.
Abstract: The vocabulary and cadences of Scripture—particularly of the LXX—are imprinted deeply on Paul’s mind, and the great stories of Israel continue to serve for him as a fund of symbols and metaphors that condition his perception of the world, of God’s promised deliverance of his people, and of his own identity and calling. His faith, in short, is one whose articulation is inevitably intertextual in character, and Israel’s Scripture is the “determinate subtext that plays a constitutive role” in shaping his literary production.¹
1 A Philosophical Approach to Ancient Israelite Religion from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Interdisciplinary research in the study of the Hebrew Bible is nothing novel.² In fact, it is impossible to do any other kind. All forms of biblical criticism have recourse to at least one auxiliary subject, be it linguistics, literary criticism, history, archaeology, anthropology, sociology, psychology, theology, philosophy, or another. In a pluralist hermeneutical context where different methodologies offer different insights, none of these auxiliary fields can lay claim to be
thehandmaid of biblical interpretation. All are equally useful aids in their own right, depending on what one wants to achieve in the reading of the text. The only essence
5 Descriptive Currents in Philosophy of Religion for Hebrew Bible Studies from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Biblical scholarship is for the most part a historical and descriptive enterprise. Stereotypically, philosophy is thought to be evaluative. However, descriptive varieties of philosophy of religion do exist and some of their methods can be used for the clarification of concepts, beliefs, and practices in ancient nonphilosophical religions. In other words, there are subcurrents on both sides of the analytic-Continental divide that, when adopted and adapted through a shrewd bit of “theological engineering,” offer the biblical scholar hermeneutically legitimate forms of philosophical analysis. In this chapter we take a closer look at those philosophical traditions.
6 Possible Analogies for a Philosophy of Ancient Israelite Religion from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: In the previous chapter we looked at three descriptive philosophical currents that offer tools for the clarifying of concepts, beliefs, and practices in religion. The objective was to get biblical scholars’ heads around the idea that we engage in descriptive philosophy of religion that limits itself to the elucidation of meaning. Now we go one step further than theorizing about a philosophical perspective
onIsraelite religion (the objective genitive) by imagining the presence of philosophical assumptionsinIsraelite religion (the subjective genitive). In order to do this we shall be broadening the very concept of “philosophy” via possible analogies to
8 Toward a Descriptive Philosophy of Ancient Israelite Religion from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: Philosophical criticism as discussed in the previous chapter is therefore the precursor to what I discuss in this chapter as the philosophy of Israelite religion. By this latter concept I mean the philosophical clarification of larger clusters of folk philosophies of religion (plural) in books, sources, traditions, and redactions within the Hebrew Bible. We are no longer simply doing exegesis of a particular passage;
9 The Nature of Religious Language in the Hebrew Bible from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The words “religious language” (henceforth RL) do not occur in the Hebrew Bible. In philosophy of religion, the concept refers to statements or claims made about divine beings. In that sense the RL of the Hebrew Bible denotes the god-talk of ancient Israelite religion. Most approaches to biblical god-talk in contemporary philosophy of religion have tended to be evaluative, either trying to make biblical god-talk seem philosophically credible or attempting to prove it nonsensical. Few philosophical inquiries are actually interested in the provisioning of a purely descriptive analysis of the RL of the Hebrew Bible for its own sake. This
12 Natural A/theologies in Ancient Israel from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: In biblical theology, it is commonplace to suggest that the Hebrew Bible does not attempt to argue for or prove the existence of Yhwh.² Scholarly literature on the subject simply points to the biblical dictum that only fools doubt Yhwh’s reality and insists that the nature of “atheism” in ancient Israel was at best practical, not theoretical (e.g., Ps 10:4; 14:1; 53:1; Zeph 1:12). The following example may be taken as typical:
14 Religion and Morality in Ancient Israel from:
The Hebrew Bible and Philosophy of Religion
Abstract: The word “ethics” does not appear in biblical Hebrew. Of course, this does not mean that there were no assumptions about the nature of morality in ancient Israel. This fact has been recognized, yet up to now, scholarly discussions on ethics in the Hebrew Bible have been primarily concerned with what philosophers call
substantivetheories of morality. These includedescriptiveethics, which provides a supposedly unbiased account of the Hebrew Bible’s moral beliefs; andnormativeethics, which classifies the contents of moral beliefs in the Hebrew Bible viaethical theoryand discerning the intricate operations of itsapplied ethicsin
Book Title: The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes- Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Sneed Mark R.
Abstract: Scholars attempt to resolve the problem of the book of Ecclesiastes’ heterodox character in one of two ways, either explaining away the book’s disturbing qualities or radicalizing and championing it as a precursor of modern existentialism. This volume offers an interpretation of Ecclesiastes that both acknowledges the unorthodox nature of Qoheleth’s words and accounts for its acceptance among the canonical books of the Hebrew Bible. It argues that, instead of being the most secular and modern of biblical books, Ecclesiastes is perhaps one of the most religious and primitive. Bringing a Weberian approach to Ecclesiastes, it represents a paradigm of the application of a social-science methodology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt32bzwz
1 Qohelet’s Heterodox Character: from:
The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: What one can call ideational approaches typically explain Qohelet’s heterodox character as a strictly mental accomplishment or natural development of ideas, without much attention to sociohistorical factors. This way of explaining Qohelet’s dissidence has certainly been the dominant one throughout the centuries. It represents the typically theological approach of an older generation of scholars, before the advent of the now popular sociological approach.¹ With the ideational perspective, the book is often depicted as a polemic against traditional wisdom (as represented by Proverbs and the friends of Job) and its unwarranted optimism and dogmatism, without considering the sociological dimensions to these
2 Explaining Qohelet’s Heterodox Character: from:
The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: The following are more sophisticated analyses of Qohelet’s heterodox character that incorporate social theory and insights from the social sciences into the interpretation. Marxist approaches will be discussed first. As will be seen, almost all biblical scholars who have taken a Marxist approach to Qohelet are rather “vulgar,” seeing his worldview as merely a direct reflection of his social position, the superstructure merely mirroring the infrastructure.
8 The Positive Power of Qohelet’s Pessimism from:
The Politics of Pessimism in Ecclesiastes
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to demonstrate how being honest about Qohelet’s pessimism or, more properly, his use of the pessimistic genre does not mean a negative verdict on the book’s relevance either within the canon or for the world today.¹ In other words, this chapter will show that a respect for Qohelet’s pessimism is certainly compatible with a positive assessment of the book’s theological value and potential. Pessimism, certainly a negative emotion, does not necessarily detract from the book’s positive function within the society for which it was created or for later religious communities. In this chapter, the
3 Dealing (with) the Past and Future of Biblical Studies: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Punt Jeremy
Abstract: This contribution proceeds from the southern African context as its specific social location for reflecting on some aspects of the future of the biblical studies enterprise in light of its past. Cognizant of important changes in the region since the dawn of the post-Apartheid era, the study takes its point of departure from and interacts with the complex settings and legacies of South Africa, given its rich human diversity as a former Dutch settlement, a British colony, and an Apartheid state. In so doing, it attempts to understand the future of biblical studies while recognizing that it does so amid
4 Unleashing the Power Within: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Melanchthon Monica Jyotsna
Abstract: India can legitimately be described as one of the earliest recipients of the Bible (Sugirtharajah 2001, 15–22), and yet Indian biblical scholarship has had little impact if any on biblical studies worldwide. I thus welcome this opportunity to participate in
The Future of the Biblical Past, while aware of the problematic roles that are thrust upon the nonWestern individual when she and her work enter the orbit of certain kinds of academic concerns and discursive practices pursued supposedly and predominantly only in the West. However, biblical study and interpretation are not a project of the West alone. Third World
5 For A Better Future in Korean Biblical Studies: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Ahn Yong-Sung
Abstract: Korean Christianity has been marked by two features in particular: on the one hand, astonishing church growth, especially among Protestant churches, which has generated megachurches of more than ten thousand members; on the other hand, minjung theology and the active participation of theologians in politics. Both aspects can be understood as responses to the same social phenomenon—miraculous economic growth alongside political suppression, or what has often been referred to as “the tyranny of development.” The majority of Korean churches have supported the side of “development,” strengthening the significance of economic success with their Christian teachings of blessings, while a
10 Paper Is Patient, History Is Not: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Pereira Nancy Cardoso
Abstract: The Bible in Latin America is many things at once.¹ As a “book” of a historically imposed religion, the Bible participates in the religious and cultural polyphony of Latin America in a way that is conflictive and marked by ambiguities. As a religion imposed, Christianity has no positive contribution to make. There is no way to change such an assessment without compromising facts as well as historical interpretations well known to all.
11 Liberating the Bible: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Pixley Jorge
Abstract: For Catholic groups, the use of the Bible is more or less a novelty. Pastoral practice has not usually focused on the
13 Drifting Homes from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Havea Jione
Abstract: First of all, to write about the future is a foreign practice to the oral cultures of islanders, whose lived world and worldviews are fluid and slippery, drifting and laid-back. Our ancestors, male and female, practiced different forms of writing, like the
tatau(tattoo),¹ which inscribed their roots and routes on their faces and bodies. The ones who could not bear the cuts of tatau chisels, and who were
16 Reading the Bible in “Our Home and Native Land”: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Black Fiona C.
Abstract: In Canada, it appears that biblical scholars do not often avail themselves of the opportunity to reflect on how their political, historical, and social contexts impact their work on the Bible.¹ This does not mean that Canadian biblical scholarship is not “engaged”; rather, I suspect that it has more to do with a perception that there is not much about biblical studies in this country that marks it as distinct—as any different, say, from American biblical studies in general.² In fact, the reluctance to think about what makes biblical studies in this country
Canadiancould look a little like
21 Signifying on the Fetish: from:
The Future of the Biblical Past
Author(s) Wimbush Vincent L.
Abstract: This essay makes the case for a new critical orientation that has as its focus not historical criticism and its ever increasing razzle-dazzle offshoots, but a critical history (Nora 1994, 300) involving engagement and fathoming of forms of representations and expressivity (including artifacts), modes of performativity, structures of social-cultural-psychological dynamics and power relations—in effect, the phenomenon most often referred to with the English shorthand “Scriptures.” In this essay about the future of a discourse about Scriptures that has been complexly oriented to the study of the past, I arrogate to myself the right and privilege to think with that
2 Aquinas the Augustinian? from:
Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Marshall Bruce D.
Abstract: Deep in the
Summa theologiae’s questions on the Trinity, St. Thomas Aquinas detects a problem in the Trinitarian theology of St. Augustine. The issue, very extensively discussed in medieval Trinitarian theology from the twelfth century on, is whether the divine essence generates, or is generated—whether the essence itself, and not merely one or another of the divine Persons, can rightly be said to generate or beget anything, or to be generated or begotten by anything. The answer is an emphatic no: “The essence does not generate the essence.”¹ Generating and being generated are each characteristics which are proper or
3 Theology and Theory of the Word in Aquinas: from:
Aquinas the Augustinian
Author(s) Goris Harm
Abstract: In contemporary discussions, Aquinas’s theory of the word plays a role mainly in certain philosophical issues, in particular the semantic and epistemological status of the inner word
(verbum interius) or concept and the question whether Aquinas represents some form of direct realism or representationalism.¹ Generally, however, little attention is paid to the fact that Aquinas’s theory of the word evolved over the course of his career. This neglect can have serious consequences for the interpretation of Aquinas’s position.²
Book Title: A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations-From the Origins to the Present Day
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Smith Michael B.
Abstract: This is the first encyclopedic guide to the history of relations between Jews and Muslims around the world from the birth of Islam to today. Richly illustrated and beautifully produced, the book features more than 150 authoritative and accessible articles by an international team of leading experts in history, politics, literature, anthropology, and philosophy. Organized thematically and chronologically, this indispensable reference provides critical facts and balanced context for greater historical understanding and a more informed dialogue between Jews and Muslims.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fgz64
Introduction from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Stora Benjamin
Abstract: “I grew up in a traditional religious household in the section of Tunis near al-Zaytuna Mosque, a hive of Qurʾanic activity. My grandfather and my father, ulema and
mudarri, promulgated their doctrinal authority from their pulpit at the Great Mosque, built in the mid-ninth century. Itsmihrabwas redone in the Hispano-Moorish style by an Andalusian architect expelled from Spain in 1609, along with the rest of the Moriscos. Like so many others, he found refuge and a new home in Tunis. My father’s colleagues met at our home for seminars to study the hadith and thetafsīr. From my
Jews and Muslims in the Eastern Islamic World from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Rustow Marina
Abstract: The Islamic world housed the majority of the world’s Jews for most of the medieval period, and the Jewish communities of the Islamic world were responsible for many of the institutions, texts, and practices that would define Judaism well into the modern era. Islamic rule remade the very conditions—intellectual, demographic, economic—in which Jewish communities lived, and created a civilization that enabled them to thrive. But just as much of medieval Jewish history is about Jews under Islamic rule, so, too, is much of the history of the early Islamic world about non-Muslims.
The Conversion of Jews to Islam from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Hatimi Mohammed
Abstract: The Islamic scholarly literature granted little place to the conversion of the Jews to Islam. Although Christians did so more often for many reasons, many Jews did convert and contributed toward shaping Muslim civilization. The absence of Jewish converts in the collective memory is linked in many cases to Islamic resentment at not having been successful in gathering the Jews, despite the fact that, early on, Muhammad had hoped to find in them an ally on which to build the new religion he was professing. It is therefore the refusal to convert that became a major theme in the Arabic
The Jews in Iran from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Moreen Vera Basch
Abstract: The long and complex history of the Jews in Iran dates as far back as 586 B.C.E., when Nebuchadnezzar exiled thousands of Jews from Judea to Babylonia. The late medieval and premodern period of this sojourn, dating approximately between the fifteenth and nineteenth centuries, occurred during formative centuries in Iranian history, characterized primarily by the struggle to define and consolidate the borders and character of the future state of Iran. Part of the Abbasid caliphate until the rise of the Buyid dynasty (945–1055 C.E.), vand a substantial kingdom in the realm of the Mongols and their descendants (1258–1388),
The Crémieux Decree from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Stora Benjamin
Abstract: In the late nineteenth century, the fate of the Jews of Algeria, inscribed within the vast history of Mediterranean Judaism, hinged on the relations between Jews and Muslims during the colonial period of the Maghreb, a situation that had consequences in the following century. When the first French soldiers landed in the bay of Sidi Ferruch, the Jews of Algeria constituted an organized “nation,” or
millet, of the Ottoman administration. In 1830 the Jewish community of Algeria was 25,000 strong, and most of its members were poor. The reactions of the Jews to colonial development varied a great deal by
Zionism and the Arab Question from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: In 1920, the British government obtained authorization from the League of Nations to administer a mandate over Palestine in order to foster the development of a Jewish national home by virtue of the Balfour Declaration, which it had promulgated three years earlier. The convergence between its strategic interests and the furtherance of historical justice for the Jewish people of the Bible, scattered and persecuted through the centuries, would be disrupted by an element that, excluded from the arrangement, would stridently voice its opposition: the Arab population of Palestine. Jewish and Muslim communities thus became actors not just in the religious
The Diverse Reactions to Nazism by Leaders in the Muslim Countries from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Abitbol Michel
Abstract: Nazi anti-Semitism is alien to Muslim cultures. That said, it would be an offense to history to overlook the fact that during World War II a number of authorities in Islamic territories hoped for the victory of the Axis powers. Apart from a few isolated cases we will discuss, these positions were not reached out of ideological sympathy with Nazism, the substance of which was generally unknown to the population. Rather, these authorities hoped that the defeat of France and England at the hands of Nazi Germany and Fascist Italy would precipitate the end of Western colonialism, which the two
The Case of Lebanon: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Schulze Kirsten E.
Abstract: Jewish-Muslim relations in Lebanon before the twentieth century on the whole were characterized by amicability. Jews lived among Sunnis, Shi‘a, and Druze, and had well-functioning trade and communal relations with all of them. The nature of Jewish-Muslim relations, however, changed with the emergence of the Palestine conflict. The first strains in Sunni-Jewish relations appeared with the 1936–39 Arab Revolt. This set the pattern for sporadic violence against Lebanon’s Jews, which was motivated by solidarity with the Palestinians from the 1930s onward. The rise of pan-Arabism further underlined these sentiments, particularly among Sunni politicians. Shi‘a-Jewish relations did not become strained
The Arabs in Israel from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Louër Laurence
Abstract: The State of Israel has an Arab minority that represents 20 percent of its total population, which is to say, 1,500,000 people. It is composed of the Palestinians who did not leave the territory of what became Israel in 1948, and of their descendants. The vast majority are Sunni Muslim: 84 percent, versus 8 percent Christian of various denominations and 8 percent Druze. At the institutional and legal levels, Arab citizens of Israel have never enjoyed recognition as a collective entity. To discourage any form of political action on the basis of a national Arab and Palestinian identity, the state
Judeo-Arab Associations in Israel from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Charbit Denis
Abstract: Within the context of a long-lasting Israeli-Arab conflict, and given the country’s identity as a “Jewish and democratic state,” Judeo-Arab associations play a crucial role in the struggle against inequality and prejudice. Since 1967, some have been involved in the defense of the Palestinians’ rights in the occupied territories. Perceived as an indispensable tool of democratic society, they are also the target of nationalist groups. Community networks are very dense in Israel. Inspired by practices of sociability tested in the Diaspora, and with the recent development of civil society and of the “third sector” to complement the political and economic
Iranian Paradoxes from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Amirpur Katajun
Abstract: Iran is a country that eludes any simple explanatory model. This is equally true for the relations that the state and the society maintain with the Jewish minority. Although the positions that President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad has taken are violently anti-Zionist and openly negationist, Iran remains one of the only countries in the Muslim world to be inhabited by a substantial Jewish community, estimated at about 25,000. That remnant is most certainly linked to the antiquity of the Jewish settlement in Persia, which dates to the sixth century B.C.E., and to the Jews’ active social and cultural involvement and participation. As
Perceptions of the Holocaust in the Arab World: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Webman Esther
Abstract: The collapse of the Soviet Bloc in the early 1990s and its impact on world affairs, including the Middle East; the emergence of the notion of a new world order; the signing of the Israeli-Palestinian Accords; and the 1994 Israeli-Jordanian peace agreement served as pretext for a revision of the traditional Arab approach toward the Jewish Holocaust among liberal Arab intellectuals. Criticizing the prevalent Arab perceptions of the Holocaust, they called for the unequivocal recognition of the suffering of the Jewish people, which eventually led to the recognition of the Palestinian tragedy by the Israelis and facilitated reconciliation and coexistence
Qurʾan and Torah: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Gobillot Geneviève
Abstract: For a long time, the historical precedence of the Bible vis-à-vis the Qurʾan polarized the question of their interrelationship, reducing it solely to influence and borrowing, or even, in the case of extreme polemics, to plagiarism and parody. And yet, a simple shift in perspective allows us to view the question in a completely different light. In fact, the Qurʾanic text elaborates a discourse on its own status as scripture and on its relation to previous revelations. By starting with what the Qurʾan says about scriptural context, we find a whole universe of thought opening up to us, one that
Semitism: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Bergounioux Gabriel
Abstract: The term “Semite” gained scientific justification in the nineteenth century, in the opposition between a different family of languages and the one that comparative grammar had brought to light and circumscribed under the name “Indo-European.” This name, developed outside of the people it designated, and after it had been extended to an anthropological characterization in terms of races, was exploited in order to justify colonial domination by the European powers in the Mediterranean region. The exacerbation of nationalism and the biologization of politics led to its application against European Jewish communities at the very moment when the works of Saussure
Comparison between the Halakha and Shariʿa from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Ackerman-Lieberman Phillip
Abstract: Despite many differences in detail, Judaism and Islam have much in common in their reliance on law as an organizing framework. Both legal systems turn to canonical textual sources (both scriptural and nonscriptural), as well as the interpretation of these texts, for the foundations of practice. Questions of legal method animated much early debate within each tradition; in Islamic law, distinctive legal schools persist to this day, which maintain such debate. Over time, narrative codes emerged in each tradition that established communal norms; these codes negotiated and at times vindicated local customary practice. As Judaism and Islam encountered modernity, both
Rituals: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Firestone Reuven
Abstract: Judaism and Islam are mutually recognized as genuine monotheisms. Despite this general recognition, Muslim and Jewish religious scholars have critiqued each others’ religion over the centuries by calling into question both the authenticity of the other’s scripture and the efficacy of its religious practice. This basic critique is quite similar on both sides, yet despite significant and sometimes severe disapproval, each party recognizes the essential theological and moral- ethical soundness of the other. This basic respect, though sometimes reluctant, does not apply equally to other religions, certainly not to the Oriental traditions, and for the most part, not even Christianity.¹
Prayer in Judaism and Islam from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Hawary Mohamed
Abstract: Prayer holds a central place in both Judaism and Islam. It is at once an eminently spiritual and a very codified rite that places the emphasis on the proclamation of divine unity and the glorification of God. It has its source in the Holy Scriptures and represents an important point of reference for the Jewish and Muslim communities and a factor of unity for believers throughout the world. As is often the case in the two religions, the proximity between the discourses and prescriptions is striking, though major differences also exist. For example, there are parallels in the phases of
From Arabic to Hebrew: from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Freudenthal Gad
Abstract: Science and philosophy did not develop spontaneously within Judaism. The intellectual activities of traditional Jewish cultures generally focused on the canonical texts of the tradition: the Bible, the Mishnah, the Talmud. Any other type of knowledge, that is, any knowledge not vested with the authority of the canonical texts and of revelation, was considered “foreign.” This point, fundamental for understanding Jewish intellectual history, was forcefully stated in 1933 by the great historian Julius Guttmann: “The history of Jewish philosophy is a history of the successive absorption of foreign ideas.”¹
Jews, Islamic Mysticism, and the Devil from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Barry Michael
Abstract: Texts by Islam’s greatest mystics dealing with Jews, directly or through allusion, generally dismay—at least at first glance. Contrary to usual perceptions of medieval Sufism as somehow more “tolerant,” Jewish figures in actual Classical Sufi texts appear no less devilishly caricatural as any in medieval Christian literature or art. In fact, prevailing views of Jews in either dominant medieval culture—Christian or Islamic—appear luridly similar, with Jews depicted as spiritually blind creatures who rejected Divine Truth’s light as revealed through Jesus or Muhammad. Scorn and sarcasm characterize allegorical depictions of Jews by medieval Muslim poets and also manuscript
James Sanua’s Ideological Contribution to Pan-Islamism from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Ettmueller Eliane Ursula
Abstract: Born in Cairo in 1839, James Sanua was a playwright, teacher, satirical journalist, and one of the most active Freemasons in his native city until 1878, the year he added yet another occupation, that of publishing caricatures in magazines. He lived at a time generally considered the golden age of the Jewish community in Egypt. The Muslim, Christian, and Jewish residents of that semiautonomous Ottoman province of the Nile Valley, not content to convey their ideas and promote their political convictions in secret societies such as the Masonic lodges, also published reviews that favored equality and mutual respect. Here I
Judeo-Persian Literature from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Moreen Vera Basch
Abstract: Jews have lived in Iran for almost three millennia and became profoundly acculturated to many aspects of Iranian life. This phenomenon is particularly manifest in the literary sphere, defined here broadly to include belles lettres, as well as nonbelletristic (i.e., historical, philosophical, and polemical) writings. Although Iranian Jews spoke many local dialects and some peculiar Jewish dialects, such as the hybrid lo- Torah[i] (Heb. + Pers. suffix of abstraction), meaning “non-Torahic” (a dialect that combines both Semitic [Hebrew and Aramaic] and Persian elements), their written, literary language was Judeo-Persian (Farsi in Hebrew script), which was close to the
dari(Pers.,
Jewish Pilgrimages in Egypt from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Youssef Suzan
Abstract: Cults of saints are a fundamental phenomenon in Egyptian popular culture. They attest to the preservation of a large share of archaic beliefs associated with magical and totemic practices and with agrarian mythologies. The cult of “saints” (
awliyaʾfor Muslims,qaddissinfor Christians,siddiqinortsaddiqimfor Jews) manifests that continuity in everyday practices, most often orally but sometimes in written form. What is being played out is the relation between human beings and their environment but also the relation to their humanity itself, to the mental and symbolic universe reflected in language, religion, and art, all within an extreme
Aspects of Family Life among Jews in Muslim Societies from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Kailani Wasfi
Abstract: Family life, among Jews and Muslims, carried forward many cultural features that were widespread in the Middle East since antiquity. The specifics of each society also reflected the impact of the two religions as these evolved over time. The norms and practice of family life entailed ongoing adjustment among taken-for-granted lifestyles, explicit values, and canonized written sources. A systematic comparison between biblical and Qurʾanic prescriptions, or between
fiqhandhalakha, would far exceed the boundaries of this article. We will thus limit ourselves to an anthropological outlook on the shared cultural values between Jews and Muslims concerning family life, as
Citizenship, Gender, and Feminism in the Contemporary Arab Muslim and Jewish Worlds from:
A History of Jewish-Muslim Relations
Author(s) Pouzol Valérie
Abstract: The question of gender and women’s roles in the Arab Muslim and Jewish worlds is linked primarily to the multiplicity of social, economic, political, and geographical situations in which they have lived and continue to live in the contemporary period. Given the extreme diversity of groups and situations, we have chosen to focus our comparison on the collective and political formulations of religion inherent in gender issues and, in turn, in women’s activism. Women’s roles and the particular way they have been defined by religious affiliation, whether Muslim or Jewish, are bound to contexts that have dictated specific possibilities for
[PART ONE Introduction] from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Abstract: In the very last note of
Minima Moralia, Adorno suggests that the only responsible philosophical answer to despair is “to contemplate all things as they would present themselves from the standpoint of redemption.”¹ The essays in the first section of this book all situate themselves at some distance from despair, but they do consistently register difficulty, and they do have redemption firmly in mind. The essays concern the role of the intellectual as translator of what gets forgotten in the contemporary world, the possibility of translating law from culture to culture, the actual practice of simultaneous translation, the translatability and
The Public Role of Writers and Intellectuals from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) SAID EDWARD
Abstract: Twenty-one years ago,
The Nation magazine convened a congress of writers in New York by putting out notices for the event and, as I understood the tactic, leaving open the question of who was a writer and why he or she qualified to attend. The result was that literally hundreds of people showed up, crowding the main ballroom of a midtown Manhattan hotel almost to the ceiling. The occasion itself was intended as a response by the intellectual and artistic communities to the immediate onset of the Reagan era. As I recall the proceedings, a debate raged for a long
Issues in the Translatability of Law from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) LEGRAND PIERRE
Abstract: Consider statutes and judicial decisions, two of the most common legal artifacts. If one accepts that statutes are not enacted by legislatures and that judicial decisions are not made by courts with a view to applying to foreign legal cultures, then legal borrowing across legal cultures is the practice of interrupting intention, which is a form of epistemic violence.¹ Statutes and judicial decisions nonetheless regularly find themselves being imported across legal cultures—that is, across cultures and languages—in order to underwrite local reforming agendas. In the process, these texts pass into new semiotic constellations. However, just as there cannot
[PART TWO Introduction] from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Abstract: Though all the essays in this volume deal with the ethics of translation, those included in this section make it their primary theoretical focus. Several address the ethical double bind in any act of translation—the impossibility of fully rendering another’s voice or meaning, and yet the necessity of making the attempt. Other essays focus on the question of the “original,” a topic raised by Weber in part I, that returns as a leitmotif throughout the volume.
Comparative Literature: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) CORNGOLD STANLEY
Abstract: It is often claimed today that comparative literature is a kind of translation and, being a practice less transparent than translation, should take translation as its model. This claim feels avant-garde: it resonates with the “linguistic turn” that informed most of the humanistic disciplines during the last quarter of the last century and vividly survives today in neighboring disciplines, like English, foreign languages, history, and anthropology, with their concerns for globalization, the media, and the mentalities of postcolonialism. But whether the translation model for comparative literature is to be a step forward, a step back, or the source of a
Local Contingencies: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) VENUTI LAWRENCE
Abstract: Translation can be described as an act of
Nationum Origo from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) LEZRA JACQUES
Abstract: Globalization has taken our tongues from us—local, autochthonous, idiomatic, ancestral tongues. Its clamorous internationalism hangs critics on a mute peg, with no common voice or general vocabulary on which to string alternative inter- or transnational forms of work, thought, and organization. And so the disarmed, heteroglot opposition takes shelter in various weak utopianisms, in weakly regulative images generally and understandably drawn from increasingly abstract domains (from reinvigorated notions of the “human” and of “humanism,” for instance or, most recently, from the sketchy descriptions of an antihegemonic
Europe that Jürgen Habermas and Derrida erect against the depredations of the United
Metrical Translation: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) PRINS YOPIE
Abstract: The question of metrical translation—its history, theory, and practice—is not often posed in current translation studies, except perhaps by translators who confront “a choice between rhyme and reason,” as Nabokov asked himself in translating Pushkin: “Can a translation while rendering with absolute fidelity the whole text, and nothing but the text, keep the form of the original, its rhythm and its rhyme?”¹ Like swearing an oath to tell the whole truth and nothing but the truth before going on trial, the translator who vows to be true to “the whole text, and nothing but the text” must be
Translating History from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) BERMANN SANDRA
Abstract: René Char’s “Feuillets d’Hypnos” brings before us the lived history of the French resistance, joining traumatic memory with hopes for a future of freedom and human dialogue. Closely intertwined with Char’s own actions as captain on the maquis, the collection of prose poems offers a rare engagement with historical experience in poetic form, both a tragic affirmation of life and, in its own right, a means of resistance. But I also argue here that this example of historical poetry illustrates some important connections between the writing of lived historical event and translation. Both are linguistic acts dedicated to the “survival”
German Academic Exiles in Istanbul: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) SEYHAN AZADE
Abstract: Alexander Rüstow, a classicist by training and a Socialist by calling who was the administrative director of the German Machine Manufacturing Association (
Verein deutscher Maschinenbauanstalten) and Dozent at the Berlin Trade Institute (Berliner Handelshochschule) made a narrow escape to Istanbul, when his efforts to form a coalition government to keep Hitler out of power failed. Political activist, cultural sociologist, economist, and philosopher, Rüstow taught economics, economic geography, and philosophy at the University of Istanbul between 1933 and 1949. He was also active in the anti-Nazi movement of the German refugees in Istanbul and acted as liaison between the OSS (Office
DeLillo in Greece Eluding the Name from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) GOURGOURIS STATHIS
Abstract: “I think fiction rescues history from its confusions.” This tentative assertion in one of the rare interviews with Don DeLillo could draw a hail of objections from historians, as it insinuates, with confident and serious nonchalance (DeLillo’s characteristic style), that history is confused. Elaborating, the novelist goes on to attribute to the writing of fiction a capacity of historical insight that the writing of history cannot possibly possess, a clarity of perception into history’s own
things: “[Fiction] can operate in a deeper way: providing the balance and rhythm we don’t experience in our daily lives, in our real lives. So
[PART FOUR Introduction] from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Abstract: Looking to the twentieth and twenty-first centuries, the essays in this section examine the role of translation in an increasingly interwoven, globalizing world. Here, translations become exemplary “traveling texts,” capable of highlighting the complex interactions between still vital nationalisms on the one hand, and growing local and international cultures on the other. Four of these essays explore colonial and postcolonial issues in texts from francophone Africa, India, South Africa, and Latin America, while the fifth and final essay takes its literary example from the war-torn Balkans. As each “thick description” suggests, though in very different ways, translations today demand an
National Literature in Transnational Times: from:
Nation, Language, and the Ethics of Translation
Author(s) COOPPAN VILASHINI
Abstract: Among the many changes we credit globalization with—including the increasing interconnection of nations, cultures, and economies, the rapid and widespread flows of persons, goods, information, and capital across national borders, and the production of new forms of identity and community—we may add the reconfiguration of academic disciplines from national to global frameworks. As a practice of critical thought, intellectual globalization is marked, as Anthony D. King notes, by “the rejection of the nationally-constituted society as the appropriate object of discourse, or unit of social and cultural analysis, and to varying degrees, a commitment to conceptualising ‘the world as
Book Title: Shattered Voices-Language, Violence, and the Work of Truth Commissions
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Phelps Teresa Godwin
Abstract: Following periods of mass atrocity and oppression, states are faced with a question of critical importance in the transition to democracy: how to offer redress to victims of the old regime without perpetuating cycles of revenge. Traditionally, balance has been restored through arrests, trials, and punishment, but in the last three decades, more than twenty countries have opted to have a truth commission investigate the crimes of the prior regime and publish a report about the investigation, often incorporating accounts from victims. Although many praise the work of truth commissions for empowering and healing through words rather than violence, some condemn the practice as a poor substitute for traditional justice, achieved through trials and punishment. There has been until now little analysis of the unarticulated claim that underlies the truth commissions' very existence: that language-in this case narrative stories-can substitute for violence. Acknowledging revenge as a real and deep human need,
Shattered Voicesexplores the benefits and problems inherent when a fragile country seeks to heal its victims without risking its own future. In developing a theory about the role of language in retribution, Teresa Godwin Phelps takes an interdisciplinary approach, delving into sources from Greek tragedy toHamlet, from Kant to contemporary theories about retribution, from the Babylonian law codes to the South African Truth and Reconciliation Report. She argues that, given the historical and psychological evidence about revenge, starting afresh by drawing a bright line between past crimes and a new government is both unrealistic and unwise. When grievous harm happens, a rebalancing is bound to occur, whether it is orderly and lawful or disorderly and unlawful.Shattered Voicescontends that language is requisite to any adequate balancing, and that a solution is viable only if it provides an atmosphere in which storytelling and subsequent dialogue can flourish. In the developing culture of ubiquitous truth reports, Phelps argues that we must become attentive to the form these reports take-the narrative structure, the use of victims' stories, and the way a political message is conveyed to the citizens of the emerging democracy. By looking concretely at the work and responsibilities of truth commissions,Shattered Voicesoffers an important and thoughtful analysis of the efficacy of the ways human rights abuses are addressed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fh8vr
Chapter One The Demise of Paulina’s Good: from:
Shattered Voices
Abstract: “What about
my good?” Paulina’s question embarrasses Gerardo, and it embarrasses most of us. If we or our loved ones are harmed, we call the police and thereafter depend upon the state to investigate, judge, and punish for us. As good citizens and emotionally stable individuals, we are taught to become procedurally and emotionally distanced from both the harm and its perpetrator. Victims who make a fuss about their own needs are treated as emotionally suspect.¹ Feeling and acting have collapsed into one impulse so that even when the state acts in our behalf, we are expected to relinquish an
Chapter Four What Can Stories Do? from:
Shattered Voices
Abstract: If a state cannot enact traditional retribution for its citizens who were victimized by the former government, is there any point in the gathering and publishing of these victims’ stories? While the story of the evolution from revenge to retribution shows us that a state must do something, must take responsibility to effect a rebalancing for the victims or risk a reversion to personal revenge, our collective imagination has given us little in the way of alternatives to state violence. The pendulum of possible responses swings without pausing from the extreme of traditional retributive justice—requiring investigations, trials, and punishment
Chapter Five Telling Stories in a Search for Justice: from:
Shattered Voices
Abstract: The rapid emergence of truth commissions and their collection and creation of narratives reflects, in part, the “return to narrative” that is prominent in diverse disciplines. Historians, philosophers, theologians, moralists, anthropologists, sociologists, psychologists, psychoanalysts, artists, and even legal scholars¹ have newly and increasingly embraced narrative as a valid and powerful mode of explanation and representation of reality.² This change is characterized as a “return to narrative” because narrative, once the primary mode of discourse, has been long devalued. From the time of the classical Greeks until recently, narrative was regarded as an inferior mode of discourse, frivolous and fanciful compared
Chapter Seven The Truth Must Dazzle Gradually from:
Shattered Voices
Abstract: My ongoing project is to explore the question as to whether there is any reason to think, indeed hope, that the collecting and publishing of victims’ stories—the activities that surround writing a truth report—can bring an end to the cycle of revenge that threatens the stability of an emerging democracy. Is it sensible to suppose that language can carry such a burden? By examining some of the history of revenge and our troubled and ambivalent relationship to it, the early chapters have provided, I hope, a clearer understanding of what a victim such as Paulina might mean when
1 Making Connections from:
Homo Narrans
Abstract: Oral narrative, or what we call storytelling in everyday speech, is as much around us as the air we breathe, although we often take its casual forms so much for granted that we are scarcely aware of them. It is also an ancient practice. The early Greeks called it
mûthos, a word that we often translate “myth” but that encompassed storytelling in many forms. To judge from the cuneiform records of ancient Sumeria, the papyri of early Egypt, the earliest bamboo and bronze inscriptions of ancient China, and other records that have come down to us from the dawn of
3 Poetry as Social Praxis from:
Homo Narrans
Abstract: The art of poetry has not always been practiced at the margins of society,
4 Oral Poetry Acts from:
Homo Narrans
Abstract: People have speculated a good deal about who Homer, the
Beowulf poet, the author of the Chanson de Roland or the Nibelungenlied, and similar shadowy persons from the past were and when and where they lived. Such questions have an obvious bearing on our understanding of texts that reveal key aspects of earlier modes of thought and cast light on many aspects of mythology, legendry, and popular belief, at the same time as they put the art of poetry on magnificent display. Although some curiously exact opinions about the authorship, audience, date, and provenance of such narratives have been expressed,¹
Rethinking Experience from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Explorations of “experience” are never straightforward, however, for once we begin to clarify its nature, we run into a host of problems. The intimate, experiential side of homelessness or any other abjection is just as mythic and just as cultural as the public, horrific side. There are also questions of how one goes about knowing what other people experience and the rhetorical uses to which expressions of experience are put. In turn, any attempt to build effective theories of experience is complicated by the fact that people’s lives can entail very different ways of being. The category of experience is
Beautiful Ruins from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: For Kant, the “emotional satisfaction” produced by the sublime derives from the realization of the powers of Reason. For Burke, the pain and terror brought by the sublime achieve a catharsis; they “clear the parts, whether fine, or gross, of a dangerous and troublesome incumbrance.”¹ Yet it strikes me that any satisfaction achieved with a more modern sublime relates to the pleasure felt when standing in the midst of ruin. Meaning can tumble like a house of cards, the loss of a solid perceptual footing can undermine one’s identity, a building can fall apart. While one can witness or facilitate
Sensory (Dis)Orientations from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Since people’s feelings could become part of the State Service Center when they touched, looked at, or breathed onto it, the building felt different and meant different things for different people, at different times, and from different vantage points. The building could not be read like a book, with a single meaning: its uses and meanings tied into one’s position in space and one’s place in society. While many of the residents of the building, more familiar with its nuances than most, found the unusual architecture to be dangerous and “distracting,” they also knew the structure as a place of
The Walls from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: The architects, “brutalist” by trade, designed the walls so that light would be “fractured in a thousand ways” and the sense of “depth” would be increased. To achieve this effect, most
Smoking and Eating and Talking from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: The nature of these routines suggested that the construction of time in the shelter was akin to the makings of space, such that a distinct “chronotope” or time-space configuration (to use Bakhtin’s word) governed life on the basketball court.¹ The chronotope, promoted by the staff in myriad ways, involved a span of finite, clearly defined, habitual, and reasonable activities.
Secondness to Firstness from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: In the long run, the uncouth, isolating, reductive, and bodily aspects of the street patterned how veterans knew of, spoke of, and remembered that terrain. They also led many to seek out a refuge like the shelter. The street’s distractions, contingencies, and potential violence amplified fears and anxieties. People oriented themselves on the sensory range between “nervousness” and “staying calm,” with many bedding down in the shelter in hopes of finding more of the latter. “I’m okay. I feel safe as long as I’m in the building,” Joey said when asked how he was doing one day. Greg said that
ʺWho?—Whatʹs Your Name?ʺ from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Although the shelter was very much founded in a conversation-based reality, the social life there was such that people enjoyed contact and quick exchanges with others but tended not to sit down and participate in extensive conversations. To “sit with” someone was to engage in a long and stationary conversation, usually while seated at a table in the common room or television room. More incidental socioeconomic exchanges typically took place on foot, which enabled one to “stand away,” if necessary, when asking for things. Some preferred not to sit with others: “I don’t sit with anyone,” Peter said; “I don’t
Reasonable Reasonableness from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Staff members like Lisa, Bill, Peggy, and Ray needed to act on several fronts at once in order to carry out their duties and serve the best interests of their guests. In working for an agency of the state, they were responsible for the proper care of those staying in the shelter and so could be held accountable for any
Epistemologies of the Real from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Questions such as Carla’s and Sylvia’s pointed to another side of many utterances in the shelter. This was a tendency to bemoan some aspect of one’s life. The larger realities of many shelter lives, which were spent in and out of hospitals, psychiatrists’ offices, and halfway houses, help to explain the use-value of complaints. Complaints typically rode on the first person singular: the “I” was plaintive. They often alluded to some private feeling or personal trouble, but primarily for practical reasons: by noting a pain or oppression, the complaints could effect a reality to which one’s audience might feel compelled
Reactivity from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: Residents also interpreted events and actions, and tried to recast them in their own image. But the force of the staff’s modality of interpretation made it the more potent and lasting one. Matters were not one-sided, however. Residents did not necessarily follow the staff’s advice or readily conform to their view of things, nor did they take everything at face value (“They tell me I have cancer,” Barbara whispered to me one day, “but the Good Savior told me I don’t, so who you gonna believe?!”). In general there were different wants and competing pragmatics. Staff members tried to advance
The Office of Reason from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: So, too, is reason. In the shelter at least, ideas of truth, reason, sincerity, and responsibility were not foundational in any sense. They owed their strength to political concerns and pragmatic effects, and served as tropes in the lives of staff and residents alike. Paul Rabinow notes that sociologies of scientific practices “have sought (with some success) to lower-case the abstractions of Science, Reason, Truth and Society.”¹ Reflections on a commonplace but perhaps less well understood kind of reasoning—reasoning that takes form in everyday life—might enable us to similarly lower-case reason, intimate its cultural and political features, and
Figure, Character, Person from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: The doubly pragmatic approach to reason and madness sketched above, in which words did things on their own in the pragmatics of everyday discourse as much as practically minded people did things with words, applies equally to the makings of self and personhood in the shelter, for residents and staff alike drew on different genres of human identity and agency in their dealings with others.
How to Do Things with Feeling from:
Shelter Blues
Abstract: In the State Service Center, feeling was ensconced in rhetoric. The shelter was a place for all things psychological. A great deal of talk involved comments on or indications of states of feeling—such as when Carla said, “I just feel wretched. I really do,” at a group meeting. Although I did not keep count, overt references to feelings seemed more numerous in the shelter than in most other contexts. The high frequency of glossings had a lot to do with the fact that shelter life evolved around therapeutic care. Niko Besnier points out that “in probably all speech communities,
The Detective and the Author: from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Sorapure Madeleine
Abstract: Readers of detective fiction typically admire the interpretive skill of the detective, who, in the midst of mysterious, misleading, and disparate clues, is able to discern logical and necessary connections leading invariably to the solution of the mystery. Part of the strong appeal of detective fiction, critics have suggested, is that readers can identify with the detective and achieve interpretive victory alongside him, or closely on his heels. Glenn W. Most, for example, comments that the detective serves as “the figure for the reader within the text, the one character whose activities most closely parallel the reader’s own” (348). In
Leviathan: from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Saltzman Arthur
Abstract: The detective novel provides some of literature’s most durable endowments. Its sureties constitute a method and a message: mystery condenses then lifts like the day’s weather; seemingly encouraged by the very conventions of his context, the hero patiently debrides whatever wound to propriety summons him; cases wind up tight and smooth as spools. Gordian plots are only, are always, temporary distractions at worst, or prods to appetite, and thanks to logic’s stacked deck, these regularly succumb to investigation. As the detective whittles raw circumstance into habitable sense, he is secure in the conviction that at the core all incidents and
Being Paul Auster’s Ghost from:
Beyond the Red Notebook
Author(s) Shibata Motoyuki
Abstract: He sits at his desk reading the book in French and then picks up his pen and writes the same book in English. It is both the same book and not the same book, and the strangeness of this activity has never failed to impress him. Every book is an image of solitude .... A
Introduction from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Here speaks the storyteller, telling by voice what was learned by ear. Here speaks a poet who did not learn language structure from one teacher and language meaning from another, nor plot structure from one and characterization from another, nor even an art of storytelling from one and an art of hermeneutics from another, but always heard all these things working together in the stories of other storytellers. And this poet, or mythopoet, not only narrates what characters do, but speaks when they speak, chants when they chant, and sings when they sing. A story is not a genre like
2 The Girl and the Protector: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: The moment has arrived to put into practice the idea that a translation of an oral narrative should be presented as a performable script. But if I were to follow the normal practice of anthropologists, linguists, and folklorists, I would now send you, dear reader, to an appendix or else to a separate volume—a memoir, a monograph, or the annual report of some institution. That kind of separation may be appropriate when stories are treated as raw products, as ores to be mined for motifs, archetypes, social charters, or mythemes, rather than as events that might be reexperienced through
3 Learning to Listen: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Beyond the question of how to score oral performances lies the further question of how to talk
about such performances. Might it not be that such talk, when published, should itself escape the prose format, arguing its case not only in its words and sentences but also in its graphic design? David Antin and myself, at a time when he had begun publishing the talks that were later gathered in Talking at the Boundaries and I had begun publishing scripts of Zuni stories, made a pact that we would never again allow our own words—even our critical discourse—to
8 The Forms of Mayan Verse from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: What happens when our notions about what a poetics might be are held within the orbit of linguistics is well illustrated by the work of Roman Jakobson. In a statement meant to be a general pronouncement on poetics, he argues that the “poetic function” of language is actualized as a “focus on the message for its own sake,” specifically the structure of the message, and “since linguistics is the global science of verbal structure, poetics may be regarded as an integral part of linguistics.”¹ And just as his phonology involves a repression of the continuous and material nature of speech
11 Creation and the Popol Vuh: from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: Generations of Americanists, including such figures as Brinton and Morley, have held the Popol Vuh to be the most important single native-language text in all the New World, and much emphasis has been laid on the pre-Columbian character of its contents. But the Popol Vuh also has contents that reflect the fact that it was written after the Conquest, contents that have long been a source of embarrassment for Americanists. Bandelier wrote a century ago that the Popol Vuh “appears to be, for the first chapters, an evident fabrication, or at least an accommodation (of Indian mythology to Christian notions
15 Reading the Popol Vuh over the shoulder of a diviner and finding out what’s so funny from:
The Spoken Word and the Work of Interpretation
Abstract: One day several years ago—it was Uucub Ahmac or “Seven Sinner” on the Mayan calendar—I found myself looking at the Quiché text of the Popol Vuh, a text written some centuries ago, over the shoulder of a Quiché who was not only very much alive, but who was laughing about something he had just read there. This was a man named Andrés Xiloj, reading the story of the encounter between Zipacna, self-styled as “the maker of mountains,” and the hero twins, Hunahpu and Xbalanque. Aside from the broad humor contained in the fact that the twins defeat Zipacna
Book Title: Dreams of Fiery Stars-The Transformations of Native American Fiction
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Rainwater Catherine
Abstract: Selected by
Choicemagazine as an Outstanding Academic Book for 1999 Since the 1968 publication of N. Scott Momaday'sHouse Made of Dawn, a new generation of Native American storytellers has chosen writing over oral traditions. While their works have found an audience by observing many of the conventions of the mainstream novel, Native American written narrative has emerged as something distinct from the postmodern novel with which it is often compared. InDreams of Fiery Stars, Catherine Rainwater examines the novels of writers such as Momaday, Linda Hogan, Leslie Marmon Silko, Gerald Vizenor, and Louise Erdrich and contends that the very act of writing narrative imposes constraints upon these authors that are foreign to Native American tradition. Their works amount to a break with-and a transformation of-American Indian storytelling. The book focuses on the agenda of social and cultural regeneration encoded in contemporary Native American narrative, and addresses key questions about how these works achieve their overtly stated political and revisionary aims. Rainwater explores the ways in which the writers "create" readers who understand the connection between storytelling and personal and social transformation; considers how contemporary Native American narrative rewrites Western notions of space and time; examines the existence of intertextual connections between Native American works; and looks at the vital role of Native American literature in mainstream society today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhrv1
Prologue: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: In Linda Hogan’s novel,
Mean Spirit (1990), a character dreams of “fiery stars” that fall to earth and terminate more than five hundred years of Euro-American domination. Other contemporary Indian authors, perhaps most notably Leslie Marmon Silko in Almanac of the Dead (1991), refer frequently to various tribal prophecies predicting the restoration of the “old world.”² I borrow Hogan’s phrase for the title of this study—Dreams of Fiery Stars: The Transformations of Native American Fiction—because it concerns the counter-colonial, world-transformative efforts of writers such as Hogan. Over the past three decades, an ever-increasing number of American Indian authors
Chapter One Acts of Deliverance: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: In his study of the European conquest of America, Tzvetan Todorov asks how we are “to account for the fact that Cortés, leading a few hundred men, managed to seize the kingdom of Montezuma, who commanded several hundred thousand.”² According to Todorov, a sizeable European advantage lay in their ability to impose their own versions of truth on people who were epistemologically naive and who thus quickly “lost control of communication” to the invaders (61). Whereas indigenous Americans understood primarily a ritual use of language to maintain the status quo within a cyclic cosmological order, the European invaders were imperialists
Chapter Two Imagining the Stories: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: As we have seen in Chapter One, narrative management exploiting power may frustrate narrativity, the process by which a reader constructs a story based upon expectations and textual cues. Such experience, in turn, might generate in the reader an expanded repertoire of semiotic practices pertaining to texts and world. We have also seen how highly resistant narrative such as Momaday’s
House Made of Dawn might drive the reader’s effort to decode the work beyond the margins of the text to extratextual references. Momaday’s is a useful technique for transforming the actual reader as thoroughly as possible into a projected, biculturally
Chapter Three Re-Signing the Self: from:
Dreams of Fiery Stars
Abstract: Contemporary fiction by Native Americans frequently traces crises of self-transformation.² Unique complications in the transformational process arise for Indian characters, sometimes on account of their half-blood or mixed-blood status, sometimes owing to their efforts to sustain tribal values in a white world, and other times due to their attempts to live by the rules of the dominant society. In the end, such characters usually shape themselves less according to traditional models drawn exclusively from a particular culture than to models that they half-invent and half-discover through bicultural experience. Thus, in their patterns of character development, American Indian narratives emphasize flexibility
Book Title: Gender on the Market-Moroccan Women and the Revoicing of Tradition
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Kapchan Deborah A.
Abstract: Selected by
Choicemagazine as an Outstanding Academic Book for 1996Gender on the Marketis a study of Moroccan women's expressive culture and the ways in which it both determines and responds to current transformations in gender roles. Beginning with women's emergence into what has been defined as the most paradigmatic of Moroccan male institutions-the marketplace-the book elucidates how gender and commodity relations are experienced and interpreted in women's aesthetic practices. Deborah Kapchan compellingly demonstrates that Moroccan women challenge some of the most basic cultural assumptions of their society-especially ones concerning power and authority.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhw2q
5. Reporting the New, Revoicing the Past: from:
Gender on the Market
Abstract: In 1935, Roman Jakobson noted that all art is influenced by an overarching principle, what the Russian Formalists called the “dominant” (1971 : 82), a structuring orientation characterizing a work or even an entire epoch. Although a narrative may have many functions and embody several forms, an internal hierarchy exists which determines the relative value of its components. The dominant of poetic language is the aesthetic function—its form. Poetry is oriented toward the sign, while prose narrative is directed toward the referent.¹ “Poetic evolution,” says Jakobson, “is a shift in this hierarchy.”
7. Catering to the Sexual Market: from:
Gender on the Market
Abstract: Nothing illustrates the recent changes in the relative status of women and men in Moroccan society so fully as the altered position of the shikha, the female performer. As women who commoditize their voices and bodies in contexts of public celebration (both outdoors at saint’s festivals, and indoors at wedding celebrations) shikhat (pl.) are often associated with the marketplace. In fact, women without moral scruples may be compared to shikhat who are “lost in the suq.”
Book Title: Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)-With a Translation of the Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Heath Peter
Abstract: Islamic allegory is the product of a cohesive literary tradition to which few contributed as significantly as Ibn Sina (Avicenna), the eleventh-century Muslim philosopher. Peter Heath here offers a detailed examination of Avicenna's contribution, paying special attention to Avicenna's psychology and poetics and to the ways in which they influenced strains of theological, mystical, and literary thought in subsequent Islamic-and Western-intellectual and religious history. Heath begins by showing how Avicenna's writings fit into the context and general history of Islamic allegory and explores the interaction among allegory, allegoresis, and philosophy in Avicenna's thought. He then provides a brief introduction to Avicenna as an historical figure. From there, he examines the ways in which Avicenna's cosmological, psychological, and epistemological theories find parallel, if diverse, expression in the disparate formats of philosophical and allegorical narration. Included in this book is an illustration of Avicenna's allegorical practice. This takes the form of a translation of the Mi'raj Nama (The Book of the Prophet Muhammad's Ascent to Heaven), a short treatise in Persian generally attributed to Avicenna. The text concludes with an investigation of the literary dimension Avicenna's allegorical theory and practice by examining his use of description metaphor. Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna is an original and important work that breaks new ground by applying the techniques of modern literary criticism to the study of Medieval Islamic philosophy. It will be of interest to scholars and students of medieval Islamic and Western literature and philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhz90
2. Avicenna: from:
Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna lived in a world rich in opportunity. After enjoying a brief era of strong central authority and cultural florescence in the first part of the 3rd/9th century, the ‘Abbâsid empire had begun to experience political decentralization. Given the enormous expanse of the empire, central control from Baghdad was unwieldy at best, and it was not long before it became politically unfeasible as well. The governing families of provinces far from the capital (Aghlabids in Ifrîqiya, Ṭûlûnids in Egypt, Ṭâhirids in Khurâsân) naturally wished to achieve the greatest possible freedom of action, and they strove toward a state in which
3. The Structure and Representation of the Cosmos from:
Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna possessed an extraordinarily systematic vision of the structure of the cosmos—and of how it should be studied. Appreciating this fact is crucial if we are to understand his intellectual accomplishments; but it must also be kept in perspective. His passion for cohesiveness and completion led to the preoccupation with detail and demonstration that characterizes his logos writings: everything must fit, everything must hang together logically.¹ This being the case, it is not surprising that many later students of Avicenna, attracted by these very attributes of system, detail, and logical coherence, tend to view his philosophy through the prism
4. Avicenna’s Theory of the Soul from:
Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Psychology, the study of the soul, held a particular fascination for Avicenna. That the subject clearly lies near the heart of his concern for philosophy is indicated by the fact that he devoted numerous major and minor tracts to the subject and returned repeatedly to its elaboration throughout his life.¹ Avicenna’s psychological doctrines are stable in their general parameters, but his individual presentations of them differ according to considerations of philosophical intent, generic format, and audience of address.² Like any psychology aspiring to comprehensiveness, Avicenna’s theory addresses four considerations:
5. Avicenna’s Theory of Knowledge from:
Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: For the most part, Avicenna’s psychology is structured according to levels of epistemological apprehension. The vegetable and animal souls manage natural, nonperceptual activities: nutrition, growth, and reproduction in the case of the
7. The Interpretation and Function of Allegory from:
Allegory and Philosophy in Avicenna (Ibn Sina)
Abstract: Avicenna’s theory of allegory is straightforward, easily summarized, and, obviously, highly pertinent to an understanding of the rhetorical dimension of his allegories and philosophical writings. As with any theory of literary creation or interpretation, however, Avicenna’s hermeneutics must be taken with a grain of salt. Authorial theories of composition and reading are indeed relevant, but they should not be accepted so literally that they overly determine our understanding of the workings of the texts themselves. Writers often valorize rules of composition or endorse methods of interpretation that they themselves do not completely follow in practice.¹ Avicenna’s theory of interpretation is
Book Title: Clan Cleansing in Somalia-The Ruinous Legacy of 1991
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Kapteijns Lidwien
Abstract: In 1991, certain political and military leaders in Somalia, wishing to gain exclusive control over the state, mobilized their followers to use terror-wounding, raping, and killing-to expel a vast number of Somalis from the capital city of Mogadishu and south-central and southern Somalia. Manipulating clan sentiment, they succeeded in turning ordinary civilians against neighbors, friends, and coworkers. Although this episode of organized communal violence is common knowledge among Somalis, its real nature has not been publicly acknowledged and has been ignored, concealed, or misrepresented in scholarly works and political memoirs-until now. Marshaling a vast amount of source material, including Somali poetry and survivor accounts,
Clan Cleansing in Somaliaanalyzes this campaign of clan cleansing against the historical background of a violent and divisive military dictatorship, in the contemporary context of regime collapse, and in relationship to the rampant militia warfare that followed in its wake.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaalso reflects on the relationship between history, truth, and postconflict reconstruction in Somalia. Documenting the organization and intent behind the campaign of clan cleansing, Lidwien Kapteijns traces the emergence of the hate narratives and code words that came to serve as rationales and triggers for the violence. However, it was not clans that killed, she insists, but people who killed in the name of clan. Kapteijns argues that the mutual forgiveness for which politicians often so lightly call is not a feasible proposition as long as the violent acts for which Somalis should forgive each other remain suppressed and undiscussed.Clan Cleansing in Somaliaestablishes that public acknowledgment of the ruinous turn to communal violence is indispensable to social and moral repair, and can provide a gateway for the critical memory work required from Somalis on all sides of this multifaceted conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fhzvq
Introduction from:
Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: This book deals with the changing use of clan- based violence against civilians as a technology of power in the Somali civil war (1978–present). At its center is what I consider the violence of the “key shift,”¹ activated by politico-military leaders in the course of the armed uprising that culminated in the expulsion of President Maxamed Siyaad Barre on January 26, 1991. This study argues that the violence that accompanied and followed the moment of regime and state collapse was analytically, politically, and discursively something new, a transformative turning point and key shift that has remained largely unaddressed (and
Chapter 2 Historical Background to the Violence of State Collapse from:
Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: Scholarly analyses of violence, including this study, also constitute a type of mediation and a genre with its own rules, expectations, and pitfalls. Many scholars who have taken violence as their subject of study have been keenly aware that violence is an especially challenging, perhaps even distinctive subject matter (see Nordstrom and Robben 1995; Donham 2006; Lubkemann 2008). Thus Donald Donham argues in his essay “Staring at Suffering”: “violence is a different kind of representational object than market systems or kinship. . . . Violence is red. There is a kind of excess, an ambivalence of both attraction and repulsion
Chapter 3 Clan Cleansing in Mogadishu and Beyond from:
Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: From mid-December 1990 on, the number of foreigners who remained in Mogadishu dwindled.¹ The U.S. embassy, where foreign nationals of many backgrounds toward the end had taken refuge, was evacuated on January 5, 1991, the Italian embassy on January 12. Both evacuations involved dramatic rescue actions by land, sea, and air.² Groups of stragglers, especially Italians who worked in the city or the agricultural areas of Jubba and Jannaale, also managed to arrange for escape but had to leave all their possessions behind.³ By January 10 even most humanitarian workers had left the country to escape the violence. A rare
Chapter 4 The Why and How of Clan Cleansing: from:
Clan Cleansing in Somalia
Abstract: The chapters above have traced the changing use of large- scale clan- based violence against civilians as a political tool in the hands of politico- military leaders at three historical moments, namely during the Barre regime, at the moment of its collapse, and during the factional militia warfare in its wake. They have outlined the historical background and contemporary circumstances of what I have called the violence of the key shift, that is to say, a campaign of clan cleansing that turned ordinary civilians, outside any mediating state institutions, into both perpetrators and victims of communal violence. Since this key
Book Title: Beyond Objectivism and Relativism-Science, Hermeneutics, and Praxis
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): BERNSTEIN RICHARD J.
Abstract: Drawing freely and expertly from Continental and analytic traditions, Richard Bernstein examines a number of debates and controversies exemplified in the works of Gadamer, Habermas, Rorty, and Arendt. He argues that a "new conversation" is emerging about human rationality-a new understanding that emphasizes its practical character and has important ramifications both for thought and action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj0g8
PART TWO SCIENCE, RATIONALITY, AND INCOMMENSURABILITY from:
Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: With elegant conciseness William James described “the classic stages of a theory’s career. First, you know, a new theory is attacked as absurd; then it is admitted to be true, but obvious and insignificant; finally it is seen to be so important that its adversaries claim that they themselves discovered it.”¹ Something like this has already occurred with the theory advanced by Thomas Kuhn in the twenty years since the publication of
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions. The reaction to the book by its critics was immediate and sharp: Kuhn’s leading ideas were absurd, contradictory; and wrong.² It was even
PART FOUR PRAXIS, from:
Beyond Objectivism and Relativism
Abstract: At this stage of our inquiry, we have opened up the play—the to-and-fro movement—of science, hermeneutics, and
praxis. In exploring the new image of science that has been developing in the postempiricist philosophy and history of science, we have witnessed the recovery of the hermeneutical dimension of science in both the natural and the social sciences. In the philosophy of the natural sciences, this development has been characterized as having begun with an obsession with the meaning and reference of single terms (logically proper names and ostensive definition), moved to the search for a rigorous criterion for discriminating
Book Title: Sensuous Scholarship- Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): STOLLER PAUL
Abstract: Among the Songhay of Mali and Niger, who consider the stomach the seat of personality, learning is understood not in terms of mental activity but in bodily terms. Songhay bards study history by "eating the words of the ancestors," and sorcerers learn their art by ingesting particular substances, by testing their flesh with knives, by mastering pain and illness. In
Sensuous ScholarshipPaul Stoller challenges contemporary social theorists and cultural critics who-using the notion of embodiment to critique Eurocentric and phallocentric predispositions in scholarly thought-consider the body primarily as a text that can be read and analyzed. Stoller argues that this attitude is in itself Eurocentric and is particularly inappropriate for anthropologists, who often work in societies in which the notion of text, and textual interpretation, is foreign. ThroughoutSensuous ScholarshipStoller argues for the importance of understanding the "sensuous epistemologies" of many non-Western societies so that we can better understand the societies themselves and what their epistemologies have to teach us about human experience in general.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj1pm
Introduction: from:
Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: In his monumental
Philosophy and the Mirror of Nature (1979) Richard Rorty painstakingly deconstructed the logical edifice of Western epistemology, leaving in its wake the dust of a thousand rarefied conversations. In later writings Rorty, among others, espoused a new pragmatism that emphasized local truths, community cohesion and civil conversation. Rorty and others did not claim that epistemology did not exist, but rather that epistemologies formulated and reformulated themselves in the interactional instabilities of local community life—all in a myriad of conversations that would edify the public.¹
Introduction: from:
Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: In Part One we saw how sensuous localized epistemologies shape cultural practices among the Songhay people of the Republic of Niger. Songhay sorcerers eat power—in the form of what they call
kusu—which can both empower and overpower their bodies. Songhay griots eat history and as a consequence are “owned” by the “old words” they have ingested. In Part Two, the chapters suggest that embodied processes—the construction and reconstruction of local epistemologies—spark cultural memories.
Introduction: from:
Sensuous Scholarship
Abstract: Usually not, for academic grammars tend to be rather entrenched, so entrenched, in fact, that the goal of many scholars—scientists
Chapter 1 The Geopolitics of the Great Lakes Region from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: In common usage the Great Lakes region refers to Central Africa’s Great Rift valley, stretching on a north-south axis along the Congo-Nile crest, from Lake Tanganyika in the south to Lake Edward and the legendary Mountains of the Moon in the north. But where exactly does it begin, and where does it end? Should it include western Tanzania and southwestern Sudan? Should the Maniema and north Katanga be factored in as well? The answers are anything but straightforward. There is general agreement, however, that a minimal definition should include Rwanda, Burundi, eastern Congo, and southwestern Uganda as the core area
Chapter 2 The Road to Hell from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: If the fate of the African continent evokes hopelessness, nowhere is this sense of despair more evident than in former Belgian Africa. No other region has experienced a more deadly combination of external aggression, foreign-linked factionalism, interstate violence, factional strife, and ethnic rivalries. Nowhere else in Africa has genocide exacted a more horrendous price in human lives lost, economic and financial resources squandered, and developmental opportunities wasted. The scale of the disaster is in sharp contrast with the polite indifference of the international community in the face of this unprecedented human tragedy. What has been called Africa’s first world war
Chapter 3 Ethnicity as Myth from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Ethnicity is never what it seems. What some see as ancestral atavism, others see as a typically modern phenomenon, anchored in colonial rule. Where neo-Marxists detect class interests parading in traditional garb, mainstream scholars unveil imagined communities. And whereas many see ethnicity as the bane of the African continent, others think that it could provide the basis for a moral social contract and that it contains within itself the seeds of openness and accountability.
Chapter 4 Genocide in the Great Lakes: from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The title of this chapter is deliberately provocative. Can there be any doubt about the responsibility of the government of the late President Juvénal Habyarimana of Rwanda for what has been described as the biggest genocide of the end of the century? Can one seriously question the active involvement of high-ranking officials, the presidential guard, the local authorities, and the militias in the planning and execution of a carnage that took the lives of an estimated 800,000 people, three fourths of them Tutsi? Would anyone deny the critical role played by the Hutu-controlled media in providing incitements to genocide? The
Chapter 5 The Rationality of Genocide from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: The image of Rwanda conveyed by the media is that of a society gone amok. How else to explain the collective insanity that led to the butchering of half a million civilians: men, women, and children? As much as the scale of the killings, the visual impact of the atrocities numbs the mind and makes the quest for rational motives singularly irrelevant. Tribal savagery suggests itself as the most plausible subtext for the scenes of apocalypse captured by television crews and photojournalists.
Chapter 12 A Blocked Transition: from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Zaire is the only country in the world to claim two prime ministers, two governments, two parliaments, two constitutions, and two transitional constitutional acts. The phenomenon—euphemistically referred to in Zaire as
dédoublement—bears testimony to the total impasse currently facing the country.
Chapter 13 Ethnic Violence, Public Policies, and Social Capital in North Kivu from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Few works of political science have received a more universal acclaim than Robert Putnam’s trailblazing inquest into the roots of democracy in contemporary Italy, appropriately titled
Making Democracy Work: Civic Traditions in Modern Italy. Judging from the theme of this conference, the impact of his contribution is not limited to the American academic community. Although one may not agree with all of his ideas, their boldness is undeniable: more than an elegantly crafted case study of modern-day Italy, Making Democracy Work holds profoundly important implications for anyone trying to elucidate the conditions of successful democracy.
Chapter 16 From Kabila to Kabila: from:
The Dynamics of Violence in Central Africa
Abstract: Reflecting on the merits of electoral democracy in the Congo, one of the least memorable characters in John Le Carré’s novel
The Mission Song makes his point with characteristic bluntness: “Elections won’t bring democracy, they’ll bring chaos. The winners will scoop the pool and tell the losers to go fuck themselves. The losers will say the game was fixed and take to the bush. And since everyone voted on ethnic lines anyway, they’ll be back to where they started and worse.”¹ Expletive aside, Skipper’s assessment encapsulates many of the concerns of the international community in the aftermath of the Congo’s
Book Title: Aliens and Sojourners-Self as Other in Early Christianity
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): DUNNING BENJAMIN H.
Abstract: Early Christians spoke about themselves as resident aliens, strangers, and sojourners, asserting that otherness is a fundamental part of being Christian. But why did they do so and to what ends? How did Christians' claims to foreign status situate them with respect to each other and to the larger Roman world as the new movement grew and struggled to make sense of its own boundaries?
Aliens and Sojournersargues that the claim to alien status is not a transparent one. Instead, Benjamin Dunning contends, it shaped a rich, pervasive, variegated discourse of identity in early Christianity. Resident aliens and foreigners had long occupied a conflicted space of both repulsion and desire in ancient thinking. Dunning demonstrates how Christians and others in antiquity capitalized on this tension, refiguring the resident alien as being of a compelling doubleness, simultaneously marginal and potent. Early Christians, he argues, used this refiguration to render Christian identity legible, distinct, and even desirable among the vast range of social and religious identities and practices that proliferated in the ancient Mediterranean. Through close readings of ancient Christian texts such as Hebrews, 1 Peter, theShepherd of Hermas, and theEpistle to Diognetus, Dunning examines the markedly different ways that Christians used the language of their own marginality, articulating a range of options for what it means to be Christian in relation to the Roman social order. His conclusions have implications not only for the study of late antiquity but also for understanding the rhetorics of religious alienation more broadly, both in the ancient world and today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt3fj38q
Introduction: from:
Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: At the close of the first century C.E., the early Christian text
1 Clement (c.93–97) opens with a greeting from one group of Christian aliens to another: “The church of God residing as aliens (paroikousa) in Rome to the church of God residing as aliens (paroikousē) in Corinth.”¹ This was not the first text to characterize Christians in terms of their status as aliens or sojourners. But as the first century came to a close and the second century progressed, the trope proved to be an increasingly useful one. Other Christian writers made use of it in epistolary prescripts
Chapter Five Strangers and Soteriology in the from:
Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: Not all early Christians thought that speaking about themselves as aliens was a good thing. While numerous texts of the first and second centuries were making exactly this move (as evidenced by our analysis thus far), this was not the only conceptual option available to Christians as they thought about their identity and what its legitimate relationship ought to be to the rhetoric of alienation. Thus there were (perhaps not surprisingly) voices of protest to the increasingly common strategy of constructing the Christian self as other. These voices were not separate or outside the contested discourse of formative Christian identity,
Conclusion from:
Aliens and Sojourners
Abstract: In an important article, Rowan Greer characterizes early Christianity in terms of what he calls “the marvelous paradox of Christians as alien citizens.”¹ That is, Christians are paradoxically “both involved in and disengaged from society.”² Greer surveys the practical outworking of this paradox in both pre-Nicene writers (
Diognetus, Tertullian of Carthage, Clement of Alexandria) and later authors of the fourth-century imperial church (Eusebius of Caesarea, Lactantius, John Chrysostom, Augustine). His conclusion is that, in each instance, “the paradox of alien citizenship can never be put into practice on a social scale. All the figures I have discussed state the paradox
Chapter 2 Borgesʹs Library of Forking Paths from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Chibka Robert L.
Abstract: I begin this essay about Jorge Luis Borges’s “The Garden of Forking Paths” (1942), appropriately enough, with a small confession. I am here engaged in a practice of which I generally disapprove: writing professionally on a text in whose language of composition I am illiterate. That a trivial discrepancy between two English translations of “El Jardín de senderos que se bifurcan” started me down this path is a paltry excuse.² Yu Tsun, whose sworn confession constitutes all but the first paragraph of “The Garden of Forking Paths,” has this advice for the “soldiers and bandits” he sees inheriting the world:
Chapter 3 (De)feats of Detection: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Black Joel
Abstract: It’s customary to credit Poe with elaborating all the conventions of detective fiction that subsequent practitioners of the genre have followed to a greater or lesser degree.¹ Yet Poe’s privileged role as founder or father of a literary genre—a role perhaps unique in literary history—has obscured the fact that he marks what can now be recognized as a first phase of the genre’s development. Key works of detective fiction in the twentieth century, especially in its latter half, represent a distinct departure from Poe’s “tales of ratiocination” and, indeed, from traditional hermeneutics.² Before we can delineate this later
Chapter 7 Reader-Investigators in the Post- from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Sirvent Michel
Abstract: A trend that I will characterize as the “post-
nouveau roman detective novel” may be distinguished in the current French literary scene.¹ A new narrative hybrid form is being developed which partakes of both the mystery story and the early nouveau roman. Novels of the first phase of the nouveau roman, particularly Alain Robbe-Grillet’s The Erasers (Les Gommes, 1953), Michel Butor’s L’Emploi du temps (1957), and Claude Ollier’s La Mise en scène (1958), as well as a nouveau nouveau roman like Jean Ricardou’s Les Lieux-dits (1969), used detective-story structures.² Although they played with some traits of mystery fiction, they did not
Chapter 9 Postmodernism and the Monstrous Criminal: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Ramsay Raylene
Abstract: Since the early 1950s, Alain Robbe-Grillet’s writings and films have influenced that body of French literary investigative work which reflects the “suspicion” (in Nathalie Sarraute’s sense) that the real world and natural language might be arbitrary constructions. Despite the metafictional character of his de-naturing of traditional narratives, his ex-posing of the ideologies concealed behind Western myths, and his interrogation of the hidden structures of thought and feeling (Logos and Eros) in which writer and reader are enmeshed, Robbe-Grillet’s detecting project can itself be generated only from within the traditional frames of language, myth, and feeling.
Chapter 10 Detecting Identity in Time and Space: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Botta Anna
Abstract: Among contemporary novelists concerned with a problematics of time, the names of Patrick Modiano and Antonio Tabucchi figure prominently. They have made their reputation on the French and Italian literary scenes as authors of a distinctive and consistent body of work, characterized by unfathomable pasts and irretrievable identities. As a consequence, their protagonists are often detective-philosophers hot on the trail of existential and metaphysical conundrums, new Sherlock Holmeses who have turned the magnifying lens on themselves.
Chapter 11 ʺPremeditated Crimesʺ: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Berressem Hanjo
Abstract: In the following essay, I will trace elements of the metaphysical detective story in the works of Witold Gombrowicz and align them within a psychoanalytic (in particular, Lacanian) framework. For this project, I will draw on the elective affinity between detective fiction and psychoanalysis, which is based—at least partly—on the fact that, like the criminal case, the psychoanalytic case is a knotty problem with death at its center. Jacques Lacan, in fact, defines human reality in general as “The Case of the Borromean Knot,” the structure he draws upon to describe the interrelated realms of the symbolic, the
Chapter 12 ʺSubject-Casesʺ and ʺBook-Casesʺ: from:
Detecting Texts
Author(s) Sweeney Susan Elizabeth
Abstract: What does it mean, in Thoreau’s terms, to “suppose a case”? “To suppose,” as Stein suggests, is to substitute some faraway, remotely possible “instance” for one’s real position. (“Suppose” derives, in fact, from the roots of
substitute and position.) A “case” is a set of circumstances or conditions. Supposing a case, then, must mean thinking in the subjunctive mood: imagining scenarios, developing hypotheses, speculating that “if this were the case,” or “in that case,” or even “in any case….” But “case” also has another meaning: a crime that requires investigation.¹ Indeed, the best way to solve such a case, according
Book Title: Performing the Past-Memory, History, and Identity in Modern Europe
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Winter Jay
Abstract: Special EURO 10,- discount for our ABG readers: now EURO 24,50 instead of EURO 34,50Performing the Past is an investigation of the multiple social and culture practices through which Europeans have negotiated the space between their history and their memory over the past 200 years. In museums, in opera houses, in the streets, in the schools, in theatres, in films, on the internet and beyond, narratives about the past circulate today at a dizzying speed. Producing and selling them is big business; if the past is indeed a foreign country, there are tens of thousands of tourist agents, guides, and pundits around to help us on our way, for a fee, to be sure.This collection of essays by renowned scholars from, among others, Yale, Columbia, Amsterdam Oxford, Cambridge, New York University and the European University Institute in Florence, is essential reading for anyone interested in today's memory boom. Drawing on different national and disciplinary traditions, the authors ultimately engage us with the ways in which Europeans continue a venerable tradition of finding out who they are, and where they are going, by performing the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kdkt
CHAPTER 5 Co-memorations. from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) BURKE PETER
Abstract: This exploration starts from the crossroads where two popular recent approaches to cultural history meet: the study of memory and the study of performance.¹ It may be useful to distinguish at the start of this essay on the performance of memory between different kinds or genres of performance. At one extreme, we find historical plays from Shakespeare to Strindberg and beyond or the historical operas of Verdi, say, or Glinka; in other words, performances that are tightly organized, fully scripted, and carefully rehearsed. At the other extreme, there are loosely organized, unscripted, and unrehearsed attempts to re-enact past events in
CHAPTER 6 ‘Indelible memories’: from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) CAPLAN JANE
Abstract: In 2003 the Staten Island Historical Society (SIHS) in New York mounted a photographic exhibition, ‘Indelible Memories: September 11 Memorial Tattoos’, commemorating the 9/11 attack on the World Trade Center. The tattoos on display had for the most part been acquired by firefighters and police officers who had been involved in the rescue effort, or by family members of those who had perished when the towers collapsed. The fact that this exhibition took place on Staten Island was not coincidental. The Island, one of the five boroughs of New York City, is home to a largely white working-class, Catholic population
CHAPTER 10 The many afterlives of Ivanhoe from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) RIGNEY ANN
Abstract: Despite poor health foreshadowing his death later that year, Walter Scott spent the spring of 1832 with his son and daughter in Naples. He was fêted by all and sundry, among others by the Austrian minister who organized a masquerade ball in his honour on the theme of the Waverley novels. The invitations to this literary masquerade apparently led to some commotion, Scott’s son Charles describing how ‘one beautiful Italian woman has been in tears for the last week because her family are too Catholic to allow her to take the character of Rebecca the Jewess’.² Refusing a Catholic permission
CHAPTER 11 Novels and their readers, memories and their social frameworks from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) LEERSSEN JOEP
Abstract: This chapter focuses on literature and the reading act as a nodal point, a relay station, in the dissemination (in space) and transmission (across generations) of cultural memory. In doing so, it draws attention to three interrelated problem areas: 1) the currency of literature is principally shaped by the language of its expression, whereas the currency of memories is principally shaped in societal or political frameworks; 2) the social and political frameworks (i.e. states and institutions) in which cultural memories are current can be less durable and more fluid than the canonicity of certain literary texts; 3) the literary evocation
CHAPTER 15 European identity and the politics of remembrance from:
Performing the Past
Author(s) BOTTICI CHIARA
Abstract: Many authors have noticed the symbolic deficit that affects the European institutions. European citizens do not feel attached to them. For some this is the inevitable result of a process of integration that is the spill-over effect of economic integration, while for others it is the consequence of the quasisupranational character of the European Union. The current European context is a very interesting case for the study of memory building, both because it is characterized by a complex process of pooling and sharing of sovereignty between nation-states and supranational institutions and because it is a process
in fieri. The European
Book Title: Sound Souvenirs-Audio Technologies, Memory and Cultural Practices
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): van Dijck José
Abstract: In recent decades, the importance of sound for remembering the past and for creating a sense of belonging has been increasingly acknowledged. We keep "sound souvenirs" such as cassette tapes and long play albums in our attics because we want to be able to recreate the music and everyday sounds we once cherished. Artists and ordinary listeners deploy the newest digital audio technologies to recycle past sounds into present tunes. Sound and memory are inextricably intertwined, not just through the commercially exploited nostalgia on oldies radio stations, but through the exchange of valued songs by means of pristine recordings and cultural practices such as collecting, archiving and listing. This book explores several types of cultural practices involving the remembrance and restoration of past sounds. At the same time, it theorizes the cultural meaning of collecting, recycling, reciting, and remembering sound and music. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt45kf7f
Chapter Three The Preservation Paradox in Digital Audio from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Sterne Jonathan
Abstract: Perhaps it is historians’ special way of shaking a fist at the image of their own mortality, but every generation must lament that its artifacts, its milieu, will largely be lost to history. One can find countless laments in the early days of recording about what might have been had we just been able to get Lincoln’s voice on a cylinder, or the speeches of some other great leader. But one can just as easily turn to one’s own professional journals, such as the
Historical Journal of Film, Radio and Television. Here is Phillip M. Taylor, a historian at Leeds,
Chapter Four Taking Your Favorite Sound Along: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Weber Heike
Abstract: In the second half of the twentieth century, portability became a significant design feature in consumer electronics.¹ Manufacturers promoted portable electronics for use anytime and anywhere in contrast to domestic appliances that still depended on a fixed power supply. The rise of portable electronics coincided with an increase in travel and transportation. Mobile technologies that addressed the aural rather than the visual sense came to be seen as the perfect companions for people on the move.
Chapter Twelve All the Names: from:
Sound Souvenirs
Author(s) Benschop Ruth
Abstract: It was a glorious summer’s day when I visited the Netherlands American Cemetery and Memorial for World War II in the gently sloping hills in the south of the Netherlands. The grass at the cemetery was green and, as always, perfectly trimmed. The long curves of the headstones shone white in the sunlight, attracting hundreds of harvest spiders to dance among them. I had come to listen to
Alle Namen[All the Names],² a soundscape made by the sound and music studio Intro | in situ.³ In the leaflet announcing the work,Alle Namenwas described as “a sound field
2 Jews in the Netherlands and their various ties with Judaism from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) de Vries Marlene
Abstract: As a consequence of granting full civil rights to Jews in the European nation-states around the beginning of the nineteenth century, a difference between Jewish religion and Jewish culture could start to develop. In the Netherlands, or rather, the Batavian Republic as it was known at that time, civil emancipation became a fact in 1796. Once promoted to Dutch citizenship (or French or whatever), Jews no longer had to rely on the
kehillah, the Jewish denomination, that previously not only served as the religious, but also as the social and cultural home base for every Jew. Membership in a denomination
4 Discrepant perceptions on health and education issues in the Basque Country: from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Ibarrola-Armendariz Aitor
Abstract: Although immigration in the Basque Country has grown exponentially during the past twenty years, it is still insignificant (2.33 per cent of the region’s population in 2003) in comparison with other areas of the EU. Between 1996 and 2003, the immigrant contingent quadrupled to nearly 50,000 people, and the trend seems to point towards an even faster increase in years to come. Still, almost as important as this substantial increase in the numbers of immigrants is the fact that a vast majority of Basque people (88 per cent) have the impression that the foreign population has ‘skyrocketed’ in the last
5 Are you who you know? from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Dahinden Janine
Abstract: The proverb ‘You are who you know’ is the title of a scientific article on social networks (Smith-Lovin & McPherson 1993) that concisely illustrates the worldview of network researchers. The basic premise of network analysts is that the social embeddedness of actors in a web of specific relationships says a lot about their position in society. In contrast to current approaches, especially in sociology, which concentrate primarily on examining certain categorical variables like age, gender or level of educational, network researchers do not regard social systems as a collection of isolated actors with certain characteristics. Their attention is instead directed towards
6 From local inter-ethnicities to the dynamics of the world-system: from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Bastos Susana
Abstract: The preference for an anthropological reflection upon identity processes as a means to overcome the micro-macro dichotomy that has hampered the development of the social sciences (Calhoun 1996) immediately faces a number of obstacles. A strategy of total subjective and relative social research, reduced to micro-dimensions (limited to the construction of the self and interaction), may impede an analysis of the relationships between socio-historical groups. Similarly, a strategy of conceptual and theoretical babelisation of the concept of identity (and its derivatives) may lead to the loss of its analytical function in understanding historical dynamics.
8 Frontier identity in Portugal and Russia: from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Machaqueiro Mário Artur
Abstract: Postmodern and post-colonial discourses have praised hybridity and ambivalence as enriching traces of identity-building in our age of multidirectional migrations as if only travelling between and across cultures through transnational dislocations could provide the experience of developing diasporic, hyphenated or deterritorialised identities. But some authors are beginning to challenge what may be too narrow a perspective of the social conditions from which such identities can spring. The Portuguese sociologist Santos recently highlighted the fact that since its inception Portuguese colonialism has always been an experience of ambivalence and hybridity in the relationship it promoted between the coloniser and the colonised.
10 Identity, integration and associations: from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Sardinha João
Abstract: As one of the longest-standing immigrant communities, Cape Verdeans have made their presence felt in Portugal for more than three decades and across three generations. Despite their long domicile the association movements made by Cape Verdeans have attracted very little academic attention, leaving fundamental
12 Different children of different gods: from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Bastos José
Abstract: The methodological hypotheses supporting our objectives are: 1) that micro-family dynamics are a strategic unit of analysis in the study of the impact of different types of religion in the process of differentiated social insertion (DIS)² – a concept we prefer to integration, as it is free from ideological motivation; 2) that
13 What are we talking about when we talk about identities? from:
Identity Processes and Dynamics in Multi-Ethnic Europe
Author(s) Bastos Susana
Abstract: In two texts written 50 years apart, Erikson (1972: 274) and Bauman (2003) both attribute the relatively recent preoccupation with identity processes to the great economic and social transformations which destroyed community life, made subjects and families culturally vulnerable and created mounting internal and international migratory fluxes which temporarily increased tolerance to uncertainties (Appadurai 1998). Erikson developed his cluster of identity concepts within a relatively closed community, based on intergenerational recognition, and characterised by an antagonistic exteriority that conveniently sanctioned its relative closure. On the other hand, Bauman (2003: 16) theorises on community fixation, in line with Fromm (1941), less
Book Title: The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded- Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Strauven Wanda
Abstract: What have Lumière in common with Wachowski? More than one hundred years separate these two pairs of brothers who astonished, quite similarly, the film spectator of their respective time with special effects of movement: a train rushing into the audience and a bullet flying in slow motion. Do they belong to the same family of "cinema of attractions"? Twenty years ago Tom Gunning introduced the phrase "cinema of attractions" to define the essence of the earliest films made between 1895 and 1906. His term scored an immediate success, even outside the field of early cinema. The present anthology questions the attractiveness and usefulness of the term for both pre-classical and post-classical cinema. With contributions by the most prominent scholars of this discipline (such as Tom Gunning, André Gaudreault, Thomas Elsaesser, Charles Musser, Scott Bukatman and Vivian Sobchack) this volume offers a kaleidoscopic overview of an important historiographical debate. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n09s
Introduction to an Attractive Concept from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Strauven Wanda
Abstract: Die Grosse Attraktion (Max Reichmann, 1931), Nie yuan (Keqing Chen & Kuang-chi Tu, 1952), Novyy attraktsion (Boris Dolin, 1957), L’Attrazione (Mario Gariazzo, 1987), Fatal Attraction (Adrian Lyne, 1987), Atração Satânica (Fauzi Mansur, 1990), Attrazione pericolosa (Bruno Mattei, 1993), Family Attraction (Brian Hecker, 1998), The Last Big Attraction (Hopwood DePree, 1999), The Rules of Attraction (Roger Avary, 2002), Animal Attraction (Keith Hooker, 2004), Futile Attraction (Mark Prebble, 2004), Laws of Attraction (Peter Howitt, 2004). This is just a selection of movie titles that over the last seventy-five years have ensured the film spectator diegetic attractions; from shorts to feature length films; from
Attractions: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: Someone once said (it might even have been me) that historians begin by studying history and end by becoming part of it. Bearing in mind that oblivion remains the ultimate fate of most writing (and even publishing), and hopefully avoiding a hubristic perspective, I would like to embed my concept of the cinema of attractions, or at least the writing of the essays that launched it, in a historical context, largely based on personal memory. That, rather than a defense or further explanation of the term, forms the modest ambition of this essay, which will hopefully provide an additional context
A Rational Reconstruction of “The Cinema of Attractions” from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Buckland Warren
Abstract: In this chapter I aim to rationally reconstruct (in the sense defined by Sklar above) the conceptual structure of, and assumptions underlying, Tom Gunning’s essay “The Cinema of Attractions.” I use Rudolf Botha’s philosophical study into the conduct of inquiry to analyze the way Gunning formulates conceptual and empirical problems and how he deproblematizes them.² In terms of my reconstruction strategies, I shall rearrange the parts of Gunning’s essay according to the four central activities Botha identifies in the formulation of theoretical problems: (1) Analyzing the problematic state of affairs; (2) Describing the problematic state of affairs; (3) Constructing problems;
The Cinema of Attractions as Dispositif from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Kessler Frank
Abstract: Raymond Bellour once characterized Christian Metz’s
Grande Syntagmatiqueas an “opérateur théorique,” a theoretical operator, because to him this widely discussed model of a cinematic code actualized the possibility of a semiotics of cinema “by bringing its virtualness onto a material level.”¹ In a similar, though obviously different manner, the concept of “cinema of attractions” has become such a theoretical operator by creating a framework thanks to which early cinema could be seen as an object different from classical narrative cinema, as something which was not justearlycinema, that is an earlier form of what cinema was to become,
Spectacle, Attractions and Visual Pleasure from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Bukatman Scott
Abstract: The impact of Laura Mulvey’s “Visual Pleasure and Narrative Cinema” continues to be widely felt, well beyond the parameters of film studies. Debates around its premises and methods continue; and it remains a fundament of film theory. Since it appeared in 1975,¹ the only essay that has come to rival it in the breadth and depth of its influence, has been Tom Gunning’s “The Cinema of Attraction(s): Early Film, Its Spectator and the Avant-Garde.”² The rise to prominence of Gunning’s essay mirrored (and helped instigate) the shift in film studies away from a theoretical model grounded in the analysis of
The Attraction of the Intelligent Eye: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Paci Viva
Abstract: One of the key elements of the “new film history” which arose in the wake of the Brighton conference in 1978 was that it put forth a
model of attractions, one both heuristic and quite real at the same time; the tenets of this model and where it has led us today are the subjects of the present volume. This simultaneously theoretical and archaeological concept has produced another way of thinking about the relationship between viewer and film, taking as its starting point precisely the web of relationships found in early cinema and its connection to the era’s popular entertainments
A Cinema of Contemplation, A Cinema of Discernment: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Musser Charles
Abstract: This present anthology confirms what has been obvious for some time: the turn of phrase “cinema of attractions” has captured the enthusiastic attention of the film studies community as well as a wide range of scholars working in visual culture. It has not only provided a powerful means of gaining insight into important aspects of early cinema but served as a gloss for those seeking a quick, up-to-date understanding of its cultural gestalt. In his many articles on the topic, Tom Gunning has counterposed the cinema of attractions to narrative, arguing that before 1903-04 or perhaps 1907-08, cinema has been
The Lecturer and the Attraction from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Lacasse Germain
Abstract: “Come here! Come here! Ladies and gentlemen, come to see the most surprising and exciting fairground attraction, the cinematograph.” Such was the commentary of dozens, if not of hundreds of barkers (
bonisseurs¹) in front of theaters where the first “animated photographs” were presented all over the globe circa 1895. They invited passers-by to come to experience a “state of shock.” This expression is appropriate to portray the first film spectator because the views represented the quintessence of what art historians have named the distraction, which characterized modernity, and that cinema historians have named “cinema of attractions.”
Integrated Attractions: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Keil Charlie
Abstract: In the twenty years since “the cinema of attractions” introduced a compelling periodization schema predicated on an attentiveness to early cinema’s formal norms, the exact nature of the attraction’s relationship to narrative remains open to debate. Linda Williams has suggested that “[Tom] Gunning’s notions of attraction and astonishment have caught on […] because, in addition to being apt descriptions of early cinema, they describe aspects of all cinema that have also been undervalued in the classical paradigm”³; according to this account, attractions stand as a refutation of classicism’s reliance on causality and its appeal to a viewer’s problem-solving capabilities. But
Circularity and Repetition at the Heart of the Attraction: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gaudreault André
Abstract: For nearly 200 years the term “attraction” has seen a host of semantic and theoretical shifts, becoming today one of the key concepts in cinema studies. According to the
Oxford English Dictionary, the meaning of “attraction” as a “thing or feature which draws people by appealing to their desires, tastes, etc.,esp. any interesting or amusing exhibition which ‘draws’ crowds” dates from as early as 1829 (“These performances, although possessing much novelty, did not prove sterling attractions”). This sense of attraction as something which “draws crowds” had by the 1860s come to mean both an “interesting and amusing exhibition” and
The Associational Attractions of the Musical from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Jaques Pierre-Emmanuel
Abstract: In use again in the 1980s, the concept of attraction first provided a way to analyze the discourse features of early cinema. However, since his first article on this concept, Tom Gunning has not failed to note that attractions, far from disappearing with the development of integrated narrative cinema, continue to exist within certain genres: “In fact the cinema of attraction does not disappear with the dominance of narrative, but rather goes underground, both into certain avant-garde practices and as a component of narrative films, more evident in some genres (e.g. the musical) than in others.”¹ In the same article,
Chez le Photographe c’est chez moi: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) McMahan Alison
Abstract: In the original formulation of the cinema of attractions theory, Tom Gunning and André Gaudreault conceived of the attractions phase as a mode of film practice discernible before the development of classical cinematic editing and narration. In
Alice Guy Blaché, Lost Visionary of the CinemaI argued, building on work by Charles Musser,¹ that attractions represent only one possible approach to filmmaking in the earliest phase of cinema. Another approach, characterized by a sophisticated use of on- and off-screen space, was in full use at the same time – most notably in some of the earliest one-shot films produced at
The Hollywood Cobweb: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Tomasovic Dick
Abstract: The metaphor is not new: the cinema, like a cobweb, traps the spectator’s gaze. This quasi-hypnotic preoccupation of the image rules nowadays contemporary Hollywood production, and more specifically what forms today a type of film as precise as large, the blockbuster. If the analysis of these extremely popular, very big budget entertainment films, produced in the heart of new intermediality, can be based mainly on questions of intertextuality,¹ it can also, far from any definitive definition, be fuelled by a rich and complex network of notions which carries along in its modern rush the term of attraction.
“Cutting to the Quick”: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Sobchack Vivian
Abstract: In “Re-Newing Old Technologies: Astonishment, Second Nature, and the Uncanny in Technology from the Previous Turn-of-the-Century,” a remarkable essay that furthers his investigation of “attraction” and “astonishment,” Tom Gunning asks two related questions: first, “What happens in modernity to the initial wonder at a new technology or device when the novelty has faded into the banality of the everyday?”³; and second, “Once understood, does technology ever recover something of its original strangeness?”⁴ Although it has attracted and astonished us since the beginnings of cinema, in what follows I want to explore the particular appeal of “slow motion” cinematography as it
Early Cinema as a Challenge to Film History from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: In 1927, Boris Eichenbaum claimed for theory the right to become history.³ In 1969, in this very same room here in Cerisy, Gérard Genette affirmed it was more a necessity than a right: “a necessity,” he said, “that originates from the movement itself and from the needs of the theoretical work.”⁴ In his paper, Genette tried to explain why what he calls the “history of forms” took so long to establish itself. Along with a number of circumstantial factors, Genette stressed two causes that we would like to take into consideration. Let’s let him speak: “The first of these causes
The Cinema of Attraction[s]: from:
The Cinema of Attractions Reloaded
Author(s) Gunning Tom
Abstract: Writing in 1922, flushed with the excitement of seeing Abel Gance’s La Roue, Fernand Léger tried to define something of the radical possibilities of the cinema. The potential of the new art did not lie in “imitating the movements of nature” or in “the mistaken path” of its resemblance to theater. Its unique power was a “matter of
making images seen.”¹ It is precisely this harnessing of visibility, this act of showing and exhibition, which I feel cinema before 1906 displays most intensely. [Its] inspiration for the avant-garde of the early decades of this century needs to be re-explored.
Chapter 4 Family Portrait: from:
Shooting the Family
Author(s) Kooijman Jaap
Abstract: The opening scene of François Ozon’s first feature film Sitcom (1998) shows a mansion in the sunny French countryside, the idyllic home of the bourgeois family. Arriving home from work, the father (François Marthouret) is greeted by his family singing “Joyeux Anniversaire”. Before the birthday song is over, the father shoots each family member dead. All the action takes place inside the home, outside of the audience’s view. Not until nearly the end of the film, after a long sequence of flashbacks explaining the events leading up to the killings, do we actually see the father shooting the family, with
Chapter 5 Radicalism Begins at Home: from:
Shooting the Family
Author(s) Copier Laura
Abstract: On December 22, 2001, a Paris-to-Miami flight made an emergency landing in Boston after a passenger tried to detonate bombs hidden in his sneakers. The terrorist, British citizen Richard Reid, was arrested. In a US court Reid, dubbed the “shoe bomber,” pleaded guilty and declared: “I know what I’ve done... At the end of the day, I know I done the actions.”¹ Even though Reid apparently was fully aware of his actions and the reasons for his actions, the media turned their attention to Reid’s family history for a possible explanation for his behavior. Reid was born in England, the
Chapter 8 Eurydice’s Diasporic Voice: from:
Shooting the Family
Author(s) Lord Catherine M.
Abstract: In
Revolution in Poetic LanguageJulia Kristeva psychoanalytically understands the myth of Orpheus to be indicative of the perilous journey of the poet in danger of losing his or her subjectivity in the process of writing.² While Kristeva’s approach may offer a beginning to reading poetic practice, I will use an additional ally in my underworld journey of critique. Not entrenched in the psychoanalytic paradigm, Benedict Anderson’s influentialImagined Communitiesexamines how writing, in the form of print, newspapers, and novels, produces an imaginary, a set of fictional mechanisms by which community can be imagined.³ Curiously, he focuses on prose
Chapter 11 Unfamiliar Film: from:
Shooting the Family
Author(s) Staat Wim
Abstract: This chapter will take its cue from the recent debate on the renewed attention being paid to political engagement in contemporary art. In a reaction to fragmentary, self-reflexive, self-involved art,
Documenta 11(2002), the international contemporary art exhibition in Kassel,¹ has replaced “post-modern” art with political art from Latin America, Asia, and Africa.Documenta 11showed a special interest in the audiovisual arts, referring explicitly to Hamid Naficy’s work on “Accented Cinema”, i.e., exilic and diasporic filmmaking. However, according to theDocumenta 11curators and to Hamid Naficy, contemporary political art has not put politics back into art by making
Book Title: The Making of the Humanities-Volume 1- Early Modern Europe
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Weststeijn Thijs
Abstract: This book is the first step towards the development of a comparative history of the humanities. Specialists in philology, musicology, art history, linguistics, literary theory, and other disciplines highlight the intertwining of the various fields and their impact on the sciences. This first volume in the series The Making of the Humanities focuses on the early modern period. Different perspectives reveal how the humanities developed from the 'liberal arts', via the curriculum of humanistic schools, to modern disciplines. The authors show in particular how discoveries in the humanities contributed to a secular world view, pointing up connections with the scientific revolution. The main themes are: the humanities versus the sciences; the visual arts as liberal arts; humanism and heresy; language and poetics; linguists and logicians; philology and philosophy; the history of history. Contributions come from a selection of internationally renowned European and American scholars, including Floris Cohen, David Cram, and Ingrid Rowland. The book offers a wealth of insights for specialists, students, and those interested in the humanities in a broad sense. This title is available in the OAPEN Library - http://www.oapen.org.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n1vz
How Comparative Should a Comparative History of the Humanities Be? from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Leezenberg Michiel
Abstract: The history of the humanities, or
Geisteswissenschaften, lags far behind the historiography of the exact or natural sciences. Therefore, one may fruitfully look for models or examples in the history of the natural sciences in order to avoid reinventing the wheel, or running into difficulties that have already been encountered elsewhere, and perhaps even solved. There are also more principled reasons, however, for thematizing the rise of a strict disciplinary opposition between the humanities and the natural sciences, an opposition which is more recent and less stable than one might think. A strict distinction between them (e.g. as concerned with
Representing the World from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Rowland Ingrid
Abstract: On the face of it, a world of difference separates the official photograph of the Solvay Conference of 1911 (Fig. 2) from Raphael’s
School of Athens(Fig. 3), completed exactly four hundred years earlier. At the Solvay Conference, a conclave of Nobel laureates and other distinguished scientists actually talked to one another, with an enthusiasm we can see in the photograph itself; indeed, Marie Curie, the lone woman in the foreground, is so absorbed in a conversation with Henri Poincaré that neither of them pays attention to the camera that records their presence.¹ We may also recognize a very young
Giordano Bruno and Metaphor from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Gatti Hilary
Abstract: Giordano Bruno was born in Nola, near Naples, in 1548, and died in Rome in 1600, burnt at the stake as a heretic. That means he was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s
De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. During the second half of the sixteenth century, in a lifetime of wandering through the cultural capitals of an often blood-stained Europe, Bruno was able to witness first hand, as few of his contemporaries could do,
Humanism in the Classroom, a Reassessment from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Groenland Juliette A.
Abstract: Starting from a single case-study into a virtual historical nonperson, Joannes Murmellius (ca.1480-1517), this paper purports to draw attention to a basic tenet of Renaissance humanism and of the humanities, both pedagogical movements in origin: the classroom practice. A most characteristic profile sketch of the pioneer northern humanist school teacher is to be found in his own account of his pedagogic standpoint:
Transitional Texts and Emerging Linguistic Self-Awareness. from:
The Making of the Humanities
Author(s) Mehtonen P.M.
Abstract: There is probably no
post factumdisagreement about the claim that the so-called linguistic turn was a significant scientific event in the twentieth century. However, the pre-history of such a turn – the turn itself consisting of a host of simultaneous intellectual processes rather than an abrupt moment of revolution – is a vaguer and largely unwritten story.¹ This vagueness in itself may be challenging and a key to such slow processes that cannot easily be detected in scientific manifestos, axioms or groundbreaking innovations. One unmistakable element of the twentieth-century linguistic turn was a claim for the linguistic framework of
Book Title: The Children's Table-Childhood Studies and the Humanities
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): DUANE ANNA MAE
Abstract: Like the occupants of the children's table at a family dinner, scholars working in childhood studies can seem sidelined from the "adult" labor of humanities scholarship. The Children's Table brings together scholars from architecture, philosophy, law, and literary and cultural criticism to provide an overview of the innovative work being done in childhood studies-a transcript of what is being said at the children's table. Together, these scholars argue for rethinking the academic seating arrangement in a way that acknowledges the centrality of childhood to the work of the humanities. The figure we now recognize as a child was created in tandem with forms of modernity that the Enlightenment generated and that the humanities are now working to rethink. Thus the growth of childhood studies allows for new approaches to some of the most important and provocative issues in humanities scholarship: the viability of the social contract, the definition of agency, the performance of identity, and the construction of gender, sexuality, and race. Because defining childhood is a means of defining and distributing power and obligation, studying childhood requires a radically altered approach to what constitutes knowledge about the human subject. The diverse essays in The Children's Table share a unifying premise: to include the child in any field of study realigns the shape of that field, changing the terms of inquiry and forcing a different set of questions. Taken as a whole, the essays argue that, at this key moment in the state of the humanities, rethinking the child is both necessary and revolutionary. Contributors: Annette Ruth Appell, Sophie Bell, Robin Bernstein, Sarah Chinn, Lesley Ginsberg, Lucia Hodgson, Susan Honeyman, Roy Kozlovsky, James Marten, Karen Sánchez-Eppler, Carol Singley, Lynne Vallone, John Wall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46n4rv
[Part 1. Introduction] from:
The Children's Table
Abstract: Childhood studies, a field designed to dismantle inaccurate and often destructive definitions of childhood, has yet to come up with a consensus on what we mean when we say “child” in the first place. If the child is socially constructed, as Philippe Ariès has argued, and as many of our contributors take as a given, how can we possibly hope to work through those constructions to extract an authentic person? As the conversation moves between the humanities and the social sciences, between archivists and activists, childhood studies struggles with the question of how to bridge the relationship between the rhetorical
Childhood of the Race: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Hodgson Lucia
Abstract: The popular defense of processing children under eighteen in the adult criminal justice system instead of the juvenile justice system turns on the nature of the offense: children who commit adult crimes should do adult time. This position highlights the ways in which American cultural constructions of the child are not exclusively child based. That is to say, adult constructions of the child often do not correspond to what children themselves say and do. Paradoxically, children can lose their child status when they do not act
like children. The definitions of the child that inform academic inquiry and social policy
Childism: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Wall John
Abstract: If the humanities focus in some way on “the human,” including its meanings, diversities, constructions, and possibilities, then it would be curious to neglect the third of human beings who happen to be under the age of eighteen. This situation would appear all the more peculiar if the humanities are charged, as many argue, with challenging normative assumptions and investigating historically marginalized voices. Yet to a large extent children and youth do in fact occupy the periphery in contemporary humanities scholarship, arguably more so than any other social group. The oddness of this situation is compounded by the fact that
“I Was a Lesbian Child”: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Chinn Sarah
Abstract: On September 9, 1992, about a dozen members of the newly formed Lesbian Avengers, a “direct action group focused on issues vital to lesbian survival and visibility,” gathered outside the entrance to an elementary school in Queens, New York, School District 24. Over the course of that summer debate had raged about the proposed “Rainbow curriculum” for New York City schools, a curriculum plan that discussed and praised the diversity of New York, including the contributions of the city’s large and active lesbian and gay communities. District 24 leader Mary Cummins had spearheaded opposition to the Rainbow curriculum, based almost
Trans(cending)gender through Childhood from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Honeyman Susan
Abstract: If one is not born a woman, as Simone de Beauvoir and Monique Wittig so famously argue, then one is not really born a girl or boy either.¹ In fact, one is not necessarily born a child. Ever since Philippe Ariès posited childhood as an invention of modernity, childhood studies has argued for recognizing the state of prolonged protection (and sometimes fetishization) generally ascribed to Western youth as relatively constructed, class bound, and historically varied. Most of the world’s young can’t afford what many in affluent nations take for granted as universal: early years of total dependence, security, innocence, extended
Childhood as Performance from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Bernstein Robin
Abstract: The relationship between young people (“children”) and the cultural construct of “childhood” constitutes a central problem in the field of childhood studies.¹ Is childhood a category of historical analysis that produces and manages adult power, as Caroline Levander, Lee Edelman, Kathryn Bond Stockton, Jacqueline Rose, James Kincaid, Anne Higonnet, Carolyn Steedman, and many others have argued? Or do the complicated lives of young people constantly deconstruct and reconstruct the abstract idealizations of childhood, as is suggested by the work of Karin Calvert, Howard P. Chudacoff, and Steven Mintz, among others?² Literary scholars who study “the child” conjured in texts as
In the Archives of Childhood from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Sánchez-Eppler Karen
Abstract: In this chapter I argue that the ideas, practices, and institutions of historical preservation reverberate with conceptions of childhood. I find these connections to be mutually illuminating, productive not only for the comparatively new field of childhood studies but also for the many disciplinary and institutional structures through which we have tried to locate origins and to access, understand, preserve, and recall a time that is gone. For scholarship in the humanities the “archival turn” proves to have much in common with the study of childhood: both elaborate the repositories of our cultural and personal pasts. In many ways, for
Doing Childhood Studies: from:
The Children's Table
Author(s) Vallone Lynne
Abstract: After seventeen years at a university in central Texas, I accepted a position in southern New Jersey. This fact is not so very surprising or even particularly interesting; academics relocate frequently and for a host of reasons. Two things, however, made this move somewhat unusual: I left a conventional, well-established discipline at the center of liberal arts curricula—English—to join a nascent multidisciplinary department in an emergent field, childhood studies. In what follows, I reflect on what this move has meant for me as a scholar of children’s literature. I also outline the creation of the Department of Childhood
Book Title: Poetry as Survival- Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ORR GREGORY
Abstract: Intended for general readers and for students and scholars of poetry, Poetry as Survival is a complex and lucid analysis of the powerful role poetry can play in confronting, surviving, and transcending pain and suffering. Gregory Orr draws from a generous array of sources. He weaves discussions of work by Keats, Dickinson, and Whitman with quotes from three-thousand-year-old Egyptian poems, Inuit songs, and Japanese love poems to show that writing personal lyric has helped poets throughout history to process emotional and experiential turmoil, from individual stress to collective grief. More specifically, he considers how the acts of writing, reading, and listening to lyric bring ordering powers to the chaos that surrounds us. Moving into more contemporary work, Orr looks at the poetry of Sylvia Plath, Stanley Kunitz, and Theodore Roethke, poets who relied on their own work to get through painful psychological experiences. As a poet who has experienced considerable trauma--especially as a child--Orr refers to the damaging experiences of his past and to the role poetry played in his ability to recover and survive. His personal narrative makes all the more poignant and vivid Orr's claims for lyric poetry's power as a tool for healing. Poetry as Survival is a memorable and inspiring introduction to lyric poetry's capacity to help us find safety and comfort in a threatening world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nc68
INTRODUCTION from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: As a poet, I’ve always hated the fact that poetry often intimidates people. Many people I know feel that poetry is a test they can only pass if they are smart enough or sensitive enough, and most fear they will fail. Many refuse the test altogether—never read poetry—for fear of failure. Somehow something has gone wrong with poetry in our culture. We have lost touch with its value and purpose, and in doing so, we have lost contact with essential aspects of our own emotional and spiritual lives.
CHAPTER FOUR The Edge as Threshold from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: In the ceaseless interplay of disorder and order in our daily lives, it is possible (and important) to imagine that there are certain situations where this unstable interaction can be held for a moment in steady state. One such suspended moment is the poem, which freeze-frames the interplay as language so that we can contemplate it, feel it, and concentrate on it. Robert Frost once characterized poetry as “a momentary stay against confusion,” and his phrase articulates with eloquent simplicity a poem’s power to lift moments of clarified drama out of the ceaseless, discombobulating flow of experience and, by doing
CHAPTER FIVE Bags Full of Havoc from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: We could do worse than to begin by noting that most commentators since the dawn of history have felt that the great themes of the personal lyric are love and death. Once we move past the governing abstraction “love” into its multitudinous manifestations, it’s as if we snorkeled above a tropical coral reef
CHAPTER SEVEN The Powers of Poetry from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: Each culture has its own preferences or rules as to what constitutes the formal orderings of a lyric. For much of the sixteenth through the nineteenth centuries, poetry in English was felt to be most properly constituted by accentual syllabic meter and rhyme. On the other hand, Chinese lyric poetry of the T’ang dynasty (700–950 A.D.) was defined by a whole different set of formal concepts. It not only had to have a set number of characters per line and a set number of lines (eight), but also had to exhibit an elaborate syntactical patterning: the four lines in the
CHAPTER TWELVE Whitman and the Habit of Dazzle from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: It might seem odd to include Walt Whitman (1819–1892) among my hero-poets who have transformed trauma into visions of human possibility, because Whitman is so insistently and ecstatically affirmative. Where is the trauma in his work? Indeed, the philosopher and psychologist William James muttered aloud skeptically that Whitman was almost pathologically “healthy-minded” and optimistic. Can such an exuberant poet actually fit our scheme?
CHAPTER FIFTEEN The Quest and the Dangerous Path from:
Poetry as Survival
Abstract: As we approach our final trio of poets, we enter the contemporary world. These poets have read Freud and Jung and others. They know that the spiritual and emotional quests for meaning that began with such naive force in Romanticism have now been eroded by the skepticism and insights of psychoanalysis. The imagination of these three poets persists in mining what can seem at first like little more than a ribbon of neurotic themes crossing the rock face of an individual life. But as it digs down into the dark, unpromising rock, it still manages to extract what will become
Reconstructing Men in Savannah, Georgia, 1865–1876 from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Taylor Karen
Abstract: If Tunis G. Campbell looked for friends and supporters among the people who witnessed his progress along the streets of Savannah, Georgia, or glared into the faces of enemies, he left no record of it. It was 12 January 1876, and Savannah’s populace was as divided over issues of race as it was about most everything else. Even many African American Savannahns found men like Campbell embarrassing, if not frightening. Although he attracted as many people as he frightened, there Campbell was, at age sixty-three, on his way to Colonel Jack Smith’s Washington County plantation, where men were measured by
The Price of Eternal Honor: from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Creech Joe
Abstract: It is easy to imagine American evangelical Christianity and the ideals of southern manhood in opposition. Nineteenth-century evangelicalism, in the North and the South, has typically been portrayed as women’s domain: women were more in attendance at congregational activities, and pastors bent over backward to accommodate theological ideals to feminine sentimentality even as the culture at large considered women more naturally inclined to spiritual and moral matters than men. Men, in contrast, and especially in the South, were beholden to a code of honor that, among other things, encouraged violence—martial, retributive, or vigilant—gambling, blood sports, sowing wild oats,
The Cosmopolitanism of William Alexander Percy from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Wise Benjamin E.
Abstract: On 5 December 1910, William Alexander Percy toiled unhappily all day in his law office in Greenville, Mississippi. Twenty-five years old and a recent graduate of Harvard Law School, he had returned home to practice law with his father and write poetry. Greenville was a prosperous port city on the Mississippi River with its own opera house and a new four-story grand hotel. For a small southern town it was bustling and diverse. Russian and Greek and Chinese immigrants ran many of the storefronts downtown. Steamboats docked at the landing and offloaded whiskey and burlap and dry goods from New
Memory and Masculinity: from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Barbee Matthew Mace
Abstract: On 6 February 1993, Arthur Ashe died due to complications from HIV/AIDS. The tennis champion, activist, writer, and Richmond, Virginia, native was forty-nine years old. National newspapers reported his passing with pronounced mourning and loss. Along with a standard obituary, the
Washington Post recalled Ashe in an editorial as “a legendary figure in modern American history.” The Post’s Tony Kornheiser lauded Ashe as “my hero. He was a man of grace, of intellect, of moral purpose, of courage and integrity.” Kornheiser’s fellow sports columnist Michael Wilbon wrote that “nobody brought more dignity or honor than Arthur Ashe” and defined his
Southern Sodomy; or, What the Coppers Saw from:
Southern Masculinity
Author(s) Howard John
Abstract: With voyeuristic delight, I ask you to picture, dear readers, two sexual acts that American legal officials have zealously attempted to suppress and that liberal reformers have consistently tried to obscure: oral and anal sex between men. Let’s look together, if you will, at two particular instances: a gay Atlantan giving a blowjob to a friend and a gay suburban Houston couple having intercourse. These are two particularly important instances, for each resulted in a United States Supreme Court ruling of sweeping significance. The first,
Bowers v. Hardwick (1986), upheld the constitutionality of state sodomy laws. The second, Lawrence v.
Book Title: The Bioregional Imagination-Literature, Ecology, and Place
Publisher: University of Georgia Press
Author(s): ZEITLER EZRA
Abstract: Bioregionalism is an innovative way of thinking about place and planet from an ecological perspective. Although bioregional ideas occur regularly in ecocritical writing, until now no systematic effort has been made to outline the principles of bioregional literary criticism and to use it as a way to read, write, understand, and teach literature. The twenty-four original essays here are written by an outstanding selection of international scholars. The range of bioregions covered is global and includes such diverse places as British Columbia's Meldrum Creek and Italy's Po River Valley, the Arctic and the Outback. There are even forays into cyberspace and outer space. In their comprehensive introduction, the editors map the terrain of the bioregional movement, including its history and potential to inspire and invigorate place-based and environmental literary criticism. Responding to bioregional tenets, this volume is divided into four sections. The essays in the "Reinhabiting" section narrate experiments in living-in-place and restoring damaged environments. The "Rereading" essays practice bioregional literary criticism, both by examining texts with strong ties to bioregional paradigms and by opening other, less-obvious texts to bioregional analysis. In "Reimagining," the essays push bioregionalism to evolve-by expanding its corpus of texts, coupling its perspectives with other approaches, or challenging its core constructs. Essays in the "Renewal" section address bioregional pedagogy, beginning with local habitat studies and concluding with musings about the Internet. In response to the environmental crisis, we must reimagine our relationship to the places we inhabit. This volume shows how literature and literary studies are fundamental tools to such a reimagining.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nnf7
Representing Chicago Wilderness from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) WEST RINDA
Abstract: Many city dwellers have virtually no contact with wild nature or anything much beyond boxwoods and petunias—or weeds and vacant lots. To transform this alienation into a bioregional vision requires organizers to create the motive,
The Nature of Region: from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) RYDEN KENT C.
Abstract: The line between the idea of cultural region, generally delineated according to human criteria, and ecological region and bioregion, defined by natural factors, would seem to be fairly sharp and clear. Sometimes, though, that line becomes blurred in ways that force closer examination of these spatial concepts and the ways that they relate to each other. For example, northern New England can be seen as a distinct literary subregion distinguished by the differences that writers more or less self-consciously draw between dominant tropes of New England regional identity as a whole and the ways of life that they feel characterize
Critical Utopianism and Bioregional Ecocriticism from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) BARNHILL DAVID LANDIS
Abstract: In his important study of bioregional literary criticism, David Robertson discusses some of the key components of bioregionalism: a delineation of place in terms of a bioregion, which reflects properties of the natural world rather than human artifice; a holistic integration of the individual person with that bioregion; and the interconnectedness of physical world, human psychology, and spirituality. Bioregional literary criticism, Robertson continues, is characterized by the drive “to identify and understand the niche of writers in their bioregional habitat” (1017).
Critical Bioregionalist Method in from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) ANDERSON DANIEL GUSTAV
Abstract: A disclosure: in proposing “critical bioregionalism,” I assume that diverse bioregions are
functionally homogenous. In other words, claims about the cultural life of bioregion X must be significant and meaningful to those who live in bioregion Y. As Pavel Cenkl observes in his essay in this collection, productive labor is one such function common to all bioregions; he argues that the qualities of that labor make the North both distinct from and comparable to any other bioregion. Absent the assumption of functional commonalities, one could only speak responsibly of a bioregional culture by celebrating its cultural artifacts and practices without
“Los campos extraños de esta ciudad”/“The strange fields of this city”: from:
The Bioregional Imagination
Author(s) GATLIN JILL
Abstract: Bioregional practice begins with understanding place and, correspondingly, self. Most bioregionalists emphasize that cultivating sustainable dwelling requires not simply acquiring technical knowledge about the natural possibilities and limitations of one’s geologic, biotic, or climatic region but also reconnecting to place through personal experience and rediscovering, in the words of Gary Snyder, “the ‘where’ of our ‘who are we?’” (
A Place 184). The movement’s most prolific poet and essayist,Snyder posits that although place and personhood are mutually constitutive,many people ignore their interrelations: “There are tens of millions of people in North America who were physically born here but who are not
ʺThey Talked of the Land with Respectʺ: from:
When Our Words Return
Author(s) Drozda Robert M.
Abstract: Although the land entitlement under this section of the act is relatively small—less than one-tenth of 1 percent of the entire forty-million-acre land settlement (Bureau of Indian Affairs ANCSA Office n.d.)—historic and
Lessons from Alaska Natives about Oral Tradition and Recordings from:
When Our Words Return
Author(s) Schneider William
Abstract: Years ago, Alan Dundes (1964) pointed out that stories contain at least three elements: text—what the story is about; texture—the way the story is told; and context—the circumstances surrounding the telling. These three elements are not always obvious and clear-cut, but the categories point to the fact that storytelling and comprehending its meaning depend upon an appreciation of what is said, the way it is expressed, and the particular setting that prompted the telling. These considerations have become basic to our understanding of
oral literatureand theverbal arts, terms which are often used interchangeably but carry
Book Title: The Archaeology of Class War-The Colorado Coalfield Strike of 1913-1914
Publisher: University Press of Colorado
Author(s): McGuire Randall H.
Abstract: The Archaeology of the Colorado Coalfield War Project has conducted archaeological investigations at the site of the Ludlow Massacre in Ludlow, Colorado, since 1996. With the help of the United Mine Workers of America and funds from the Colorado State Historical Society and the Colorado Endowment for the Humanities, the scholars involved have integrated archaeological finds with archival evidence to show how the everyday experiences of miners and their families shaped the strike and its outcome.The Archaeology of Class War weaves together material culture, documents, oral histories, landscapes, and photographs to reveal aspects of the strike and life in early twentieth-century Colorado coalfields unlike any standard documentary history. Excavations at the site of the massacre and the nearby town of Berwind exposed tent platforms, latrines, trash dumps, and the cellars in which families huddled during the attack. Myriad artifacts—from canning jars to a doll’s head—reveal the details of daily existence and bring the community to life.The Archaeology of Class War will be of interest to archaeologists, historians, and general readers interested in mining and labor history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt46nv52
1 Unearthing Class War from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) LARKIN KARIN
Abstract: At Ludlow, a granite coal miner gazes resolutely across the windswept plains of Colorado. Beside him, a woman in classical drapery clutches her baby with one hand and rests her head on her other hand in grief (Figure 1.1). Once they gazed up into mountain valleys teeming with activity. Great coal tipples loomed over miners’ homes shrouded in the acid smoke of coke ovens. In recent times they have stared up at crumbling foundations, sealed mine shafts, and red mounds of bricks that were once coke ovens. For eighty-five years the couple stood sentinel in their grief over the site
4 Building the Corporate Family: from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) WOOD MARGARET
Abstract: A year and a half after the tragic events at Ludlow, John D. Rockefeller Jr. embarked on a tour of the coal camps of southern Colorado. Donning overalls, the young Rockefeller visited nearly every camp in the Trinidad area (Figure 4.1). At Berwind he ate with a group of miners in the boardinghouse, visited prisoners in the local jail, and attended a party at which he danced with miners’ wives and daughters (Hogle 1995:93). Rockefeller intended to do more than improve his reputation, which had been sullied by the bloody massacre in 1914. Through close contact with the miners and
5 From Shacks to Shanties: from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) CHICONE SARAH J.
Abstract: Framed as a measurable outcome and objectified as a generalized condition, poverty in the United States has relied on a consistent recycling of prejudices, characterized by shifting blame and ensuing responsibility. Whose fault is it, and who
7 Material Culture of the Marginalized from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) GRAY AMIE
Abstract: The history of the southern Colorado coalfields is a complex one involving social interactions among established residents, Anglo-Americans, Hispanos, African Americans, Asians, and newly arriving immigrants from Europe and Mexico. By studying the material culture of immigrants and “in-between peoples,” we can begin to examine their experiences in America and the cultural negotiations that occurred in their lives. The negotiation of culture through the use of the objects of daily life is of interest in this study. Analysis of the use of objects in “facilitating judgment, classification, and self-expression” provides insight into the construction of an individual’s cultural identity (Beaudry,
12 Why We Dig: from:
The Archaeology of Class War
Author(s) SAITTA DEAN
Abstract: From its inception, the Colorado Coalfield War Archaeology Project was committed to developing a serious and focused public outreach component. We hoped we could go beyond the public lecture and other traditional forms of information sharing—important though these outlets are—to involving the public actively in our work and to a continuing conversation about its relevance to local and wider communities. We were fortunate to have archaeology as a medium to engage the public in a dialogue about Ludlow, labor wars, and class struggle. Archaeology is popular at many levels of society, as evidenced by the number of local
Book Title: The Sacredness of the Person-A New Genealogy of Human Rights
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Skinner Alex
Abstract: According to Joas, every single human being has increasingly been viewed as sacred. He discusses the abolition of torture and slavery, once common practice in the pre-18th century west, as two milestones in modern human history. The author concludes by portraying the emergence of the UN Declaration of Human Rights of 1948 as a successful process of value generalization. Joas demonstrates that the history of human rights cannot adequately be described as a history of ideas or as legal history, but as a complex transformation in which diverse cultural traditions had to be articulated, legally codified, and assimilated into practices of everyday life. The sacralization of the person and universal human rights will only be secure in the future, warns Joas, through continued support by institutions and society, vigorous discourse in their defense, and their incarnation in everyday life and practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cg8vx
INTRODUCTION from:
The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: This book deals with the history of human rights and the problem of their justification. But it provides neither a comprehensive intellectual or legal history nor a new philosophical justification for the idea of universal human dignity and the human rights based upon it. Anyone harboring such expectations will be disappointed. This is not for essentially trivial reasons, such as the fact that—despite all the impressive preparatory work that has been done—further in-depth research is needed for any comprehensive history of human rights. Nor is it because any of the existing philosophical justifications, those put forward by Kant,
3 VIOLENCE AND HUMAN DIGNITY from:
The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: A commitment to values may stem from experiences that fill us with enthusiasm. When we have a sense of having clearly recognized what is good, we feel the urge to bestow this knowledge on others, to get them to rethink or change how they act; we also wish to translate our ardent belief into actions. But it is not just galvanizing experiences that give rise to value commitments. Experiences of powerlessness also shape us profoundly. When we come up against our limits and experience how little we can steer our fate or that of others, or when we become radically
6 VALUE GENERALIZATION from:
The Sacredness of the Person
Abstract: So far in my attempt to construct an affirmative genealogy of human rights I have placed great emphasis on the importance of subjective certainty, the sense of self-evidence and affective intensity of the kind characteristic of the sacred. I have portrayed the genesis and development of human rights as a history of the relocating of such self-evidence, a process that straddles the spheres of practices, values, and institutions. So experiences are an important driving force in this history—everyday experiences, but above all experiences that transcend the everyday, that fill actors with enthusiasm or affect them profoundly as their horror
Chapter 2 CONTEXTS from:
Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: Reflecting on my own, initially unreflective practice as historian of the Leroux case—on how, after transcribing a bundle of densely inscribed manuscript pages, I tried to make sense of them—I realized that my first impulse had been to identify the relevant contexts of the strange narrative that confronted me and to try to fill them in with detailed empirical research. That knee-jerk response was, I now think, basically sound. At the outset I knew the title of the manuscript and, thanks to an archival inventory, the name of its author; everything else about it remained shrouded in mystery.
Chapter 3 MAKING SENSE OF THE CASE from:
Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: The striking fact is the agreement of all the participants about the cause of Nanette’s illness. The case study mentions the prurient actions of the garde champêtre at least five times. A fresh glimpse of the offender or an overheard account of the offense suffices to provoke a relapse in Nanette. Even after her recovery in
Observations of Nanette Leroux: from:
Hysteria Complicated by Ecstasy
Abstract: The patient had, moreover, always led an active life. Except for the pallor that she exhibited before the appearance
Book Title: Seasons of Misery-Catastrophe and Colonial Settlement in Early America
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): DONEGAN KATHLEEN
Abstract: The stories we tell of American beginnings typically emphasize colonial triumph in the face of adversity. But the early years of English settlement in America were characterized by catastrophe: starvation, disease, extreme violence, ruinous ignorance, and serial abandonment.
Seasons of Miseryoffers a provocative reexamination of the British colonies' chaotic and profoundly unstable early days, placing crisis-both experiential and existential-at the center of the story. At the outposts of a fledgling empire and disconnected from the social order of their home society, English settlers were both physically and psychologically estranged from their European identities. They could not control, or often even survive, the world they had intended to possess. According to Kathleen Donegan, it was in this cauldron of uncertainty that colonial identity was formed. Studying the English settlements at Roanoke, Jamestown, Plymouth, and Barbados, Donegan argues that catastrophe marked the threshold between an old European identity and a new colonial identity, a state of instability in which only fragments of Englishness could survive amid the upheavals of the New World. This constant state of crisis also produced the first distinctively colonial literature as settlers attempted to process events that they could neither fully absorb nor understand. Bringing a critical eye to settlers' first-person accounts, Donegan applies a unique combination of narrative history and literary analysis to trace how settlers used a language of catastrophe to describe unprecedented circumstances, witness unrecognizable selves, and report unaccountable events.Seasons of Miseryaddresses both the stories that colonists told about themselves and the stories that we have constructed in hindsight about them. In doing so, it offers a new account of the meaning of settlement history and the creation of colonial identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt4cggz2
CHAPTER 4 Barbados: from:
Seasons of Misery
Abstract: For English people in the seventeenth century, the West Indies existed as a place of astonishing but intractable extremes. The strange climate that produced a fruit as wondrous as the pineapple also brought hurricanes that could wipe out a settlement in a day. Sugar was the source of unimaginable wealth, but planters drank themselves to death with the rum thrown off by its manufacture. Barbados was the jewel of the English empire; it was also “the dunghill whereon England doth cast forth its rubbish.”¹ It was, to use a phrase from the colonial literature, a place of serious “Commodities and
AFTERWORD: from:
Seasons of Misery
Abstract: Given the devastating impact that English colonialism had on African and Native American peoples and cultures, we might ask why we should listen to the laments of Englishmen at all. They believed themselves to be the rightful masters of all they encountered, beholden only to a God who set them above others and to a program of empire that would bring them global power. Through their words and through their actions, they insisted on this superiority in countless ways and assumed its prerogatives without question and without apology. Surely what colonists suffered in the early seasons of settlement compares in
The Deeper Necessity: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: His call for unity clarified and perfected old tendencies in folkloristic thought. He locates two essential aspects of human action: the godlike
The Folk Speak: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: One of my first introductions to folklore studies was attending the Fife Folklore Conference at Utah State University (USU) as an impressionable undergraduate student. I had been told by one of my professors at Brigham Young University (BYU) that I needed to introduce myself to Bert Wilson, who at that time was director of the folklore program at USU. I made the introduction, and during lunch, Bert sat down with me and talked about folklore and the fact that he was going to move to Provo to become chair of the English department at BYU. I became excited to know
The Seriousness of Mormon Humor from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: My first foray into humor studies occurred when I tried to make sense of the humorous repertoire of a particular group that—not unlike the Mormons—was shaped by dramatic historical events and possessed a distinct ideology. In that and subsequent studies, I came to understand that while humor served to entertain and to lubricate social interaction, it was also a significant form of expression. Important messages were conveyed through jokes, wisecracks, and anecdotes. Humorous expressions offered insights into the concepts, concerns, and values of individuals and groups. For more than three decades now, I have heeded Bert Wilson’s admonition
Freeways, Parking Lots, and Ice Cream Stands: from:
Marrow of Human Experience, The
Abstract: Part of Bert Wilson’s appeal as a human being, scholar, and friend lies in his character as a no-nonsense
homo religiosus; Bert is down-to-earth, objective, and not given to unbridled fantasy. It is his very reasonableness in writing about religious folklore that makes him trustworthy for the outsider and a fair representative of the insider. His voice has opened not only Mormon religious folklore but religious folklore in general to many readers and suggested research possibilities and fresh kinds of knowledge to new generations of scholars.
Book Title: Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry- Publisher: ANU E Press
Author(s): Selgelid Michael J.
Abstract: Professionalism is arguably more important in some occupations than in others. It is vital in some because of the life and death decisions that must be made, for example in medicine. In others the rapidly changing nature of the occupation makes efficient regulation difficult and so the professional behaviour of the practitioners is central to the good functioning of that occupation. The core idea behind this book is that Information and Communication Technology (ICT) is changing so quickly that professional behaviour of its practitioners is vital because regulation will always lag behind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hgxws
Introduction from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: Professionalism, in the sense described in the quotation above, is arguably more important in some occupations than others. It is vital in some because of the life and death decisions that must be made, for example, in medicine. In others, the rapidly changing nature of the occupation makes efficient regulation difficult and so the professional behaviour of the practitioners is central to the functioning of that occupation. The central idea behind this book is that this process of rapid change is relevant to information and communicatxions
On the need for professionalism in the ICT industry from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: If information and communications technology (ICT) is to fulfil its potential in improving the lives of all, then the importance of the professionalism of its practitioners cannot be overemphasised. This is, of course, true of all occupations; but, there is an additional reason to highlight this in the case of ICT and other new technologies. In his paper, the Hon Michael Kirby says that Justice Windeyer, one of his predecessors in the High Court of Australia, ʹonce declared of the relationship between law and medical technology, that the law generally marches in the rear and limping a littleʹ. Assuming that
An initiation into ICT professionalism from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: The previous section emphasised problems in adequately regulating new technologies, particularly in the information and communications technology (ICT) industry, and the demands that this places on ICT practitioners to behave professionally. The three papers in this section are all based on the industry experiences of ICT practitioners and contain important reflections on the industry. As such, they are not typical academic papers. Rather, they give insights into how a number of thoughtful practitioners view their work and professionalism in the industry. In many occupations a common way of learning, or being initiated into that occupation, is through apprenticeship or an
4. The uncertainty of ethics in IT from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Haughey Mark
Abstract: This paper² focuses on ethical issues that are unique to Information Technology (IT) practice, not ʹethics in the workplaceʹ issues or ʹsales ethicsʹ issues. These latter areas, while very relevant to IT (for example monitoring the workplace or promoting a product), are generic and existed before IT. As a discipline or profession, IT derives from engineering to a degree (the common job title of hardware engineer or the software engineering concept) and, therefore, some of the ethical issues faced by engineering will translate to IT. This is particularly the case with the development of projects and there will be many
Professions, professionals, and professionalism from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: Someone can be a professional in one or both of two different senses, one broad and the other narrow. Likewise, ʹprofessionʹ can have a broad or a narrow sense. In the broad sense, a profession is anything that is done for a living: a professional golfer or carpenter is one who makes a living out of playing golf or doing carpentry, as distinct from the amateur, who seeks no such reward but pursues the activity just for the love of it. In the narrow
7. Being a good computer professional: from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Volkman Richard
Abstract: When smart and well-educated professionals misbehave, ethicists have to wonder if we could have done anything to prevent it. After all, while it may be morally satisfying to simply assign full blame for the woes of Enron, Tyco, Worldcom, and others, to corrupt corporate leaders, such an analysis begs the further questions: Why did morally deficient actors rise to such prominent positions in the first place? Why were the prevailing standards, policies, and practices of professional ethics — embodied in implicit and explicit ethical controls — so unable to regulate conduct that in hindsight seems obviously beyond the pale? One
10. The decision disconnect from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Ridgley Cecilia
Abstract: In this paper I will begin by establishing the need for understanding these relationships. I will then address how we come to (mis)understand these relationships and concepts through extant definitions, and the implications for design and practice of governance.
11. Educating for professionalism in ICT: from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Wilkinson Kim
Abstract: This paper considers professionalism as the product of a process; a status that can be achieved and justified by completing a series of activities. It does not attempt to explain what professionalism is, rather, it explains what the Australian Computer Society (ACS) deems professionals should know and be capable of doing.
Are codes of ethics useful? from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Abstract: Despite the fact that codes of ethics are commonplace, controversy surrounds their usefulness and this is evident in the two contributions of this section. Both argue for the value of codes, but such arguments
16. Ethical issue determination, normativity and contextual blindness: from:
Professionalism in the Information and Communication Technology Industry
Author(s) Flick Catherine
Abstract: The impact of techno-scientific developments on societal evolution and lifestyles no longer needs to be demonstrated. In particular, the last half of the twentieth century has witnessed a considerable acceleration of the integration of technological elements into the means of economic production and social life in general. The profound transformations that have taken place in the last few decades equally involve energy, transportation, construction, telecommunications, administration, medicine, pharmacy and agricultural sectors. These transformations are closely linked to techno-scientific developments and particularly to stunning developments in information and communications technologies (ICTs). The information society emerging in the contemporary period, however, can
Book Title: Moral Evil- Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Author(s): Flescher Andrew Michael
Abstract: The idea of moral evil has always held a special place in philosophy and theology because the existence of evil has implications for the dignity of the human and the limits of human action. Andrew M. Flescher proposes four interpretations of evil, drawing on philosophical and theological sources and using them to trace through history the moral traditions that are associated with them.The first model, evil as the presence of badness, offers a traditional dualistic model represented by Manicheanism. The second, evil leading to goodness through suffering, presents a theological interpretation known as theodicy. Absence of badness-that is, evil as a social construction-is the third model. The fourth, evil as the absence of goodness, describes when evil exists in lieu of the good-the "privation" thesis staked out nearly two millennia ago by Christian theologian St. Augustine. Flescher extends this fourth model-evil as privation-into a fifth, which incorporates a virtue ethic. Drawing original connections between Augustine and Aristotle, Flescher's fifth model emphasizes the formation of altruistic habits that can lead us to better moral choices throughout our lives.Flescher eschews the temptation to think of human agents who commit evil as outside the norm of human experience. Instead, through the honing of moral skills and the practice of attending to the needs of others to a greater degree than we currently do, Flescher offers a plausible and hopeful approach to the reality of moral evil.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hh3bq
CHAPTER ONE Evil versus Goodness: from:
Moral Evil
Abstract: The idea of moral evil has always held a special place in philosophical and theological systems of thought because the existence of evil has implications for the dignity with which and the limits within which we act. Moral culpability is made possible by our ability to choose to do terrible things or to refrain from doing good things. Philosophically, the categories of moral praiseworthiness and blameworthiness depend on the prospect of our being able to act or not act one way when we have the capacity to act otherwise. Theologically, the whole point to being humans made in God’s image
1 Of ʺThisʺ Communication from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Chang Briankle G.
Abstract: I shall speak about communication.¹ With the statement “I shall speak about communication,” I have just made known what I am about to do. However, in saying this, by saying, “I shall speak about communication,” am I not communicating? In this instance, the act of my saying and what is thus said appear to stand in happy agreement, the latter being little more than a self-reflective report on the former, thereby saying nothing but affirming that this saying, this report, is taking place. Indeed, I begin by making a promise presaging what I shall speak about, and yet this making,
2 Phaedrus from:
Philosophy of Communication
Abstract: Ph. What I have actually heard about this, Socrates, my friend, is that it is not necessary for the intending orator to learn what is really just, but only what will seem just to the crowd who will act as judges.
3 New System of the Nature of the Communication of Substances from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Leibniz Gottfried Wilhelm
Abstract: The system of occasional causes must be partly accepted and partly rejected. Each substance is the true and real cause of its own immanent actions, and has the power of acting, and although it is sustained by the divine concourse nevertheless it cannot happen that it is merely passive, and this is true both in the case of corporeal substances and incorporeal ones. But on the other hand, each substance (excepting God alone) is nothing except the occasional cause of its transeunt actions towards another substance. Therefore the true reason of the union between soul and body, and the reason
6 The Conditions of the Question: from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Deleuze Gilles
Abstract: Perhaps the question “What is philosophy?” can only be posed late in life, when old age has come, and with it the time to speak in concrete terms. It is a question one poses when one no longer has anything to ask for, but its consequences can be considerable. One was asking the question before, one never ceased asking it, but it was too artificial, too abstract; one expounded and dominated the question, more than being grabbed by it. There are cases in which old age bestows not an eternal youth, but on the contrary a sovereign freedom, a pure
16 Philosophical Investigations from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Wittgenstein Ludwig
Abstract: 1. “Cum ipsi (majores homines) appellabant rem aliquam, et cum secundum eam vocem corpus ad aliquid movebant, videbam, et tenebam hoc ab eis vocari rem illam, quod sonabant, cum eam vellent ostendere. Hoc autem eos velle ex motu corporis aperiebatur: tamquam verbis naturalibus omnium gentium, quae fiunt vultu et nutu oculorum, ceterorumque membrorum actu, et sonitu vocis indicante affectionem animi in petendis, habendis, rejiciendis, fugiendisve rebus. Ita verba in variis sententiis locis suis posita, et crebro audita, quarum rerum signa essent, paulatim colligebam, measque jam voluntates, edomito in eis signis ore, per haec enuntiabam.” (Augustine,
Confessions, I. 8.)¹
21 Subjectivity in Language from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Benveniste Emile
Abstract: If language is, as they say, the instrument of communication, to what does it owe this property? The question may cause surprise, as does everything that seems to challenge an obvious fact, but it is sometimes useful to require proof of the obvious. Two answers come to mind. The one would be that language is
in factemployed as the instrument of communication, probably because men have not found a better or more effective way in which to communicate. This amounts to stating what one wishes to understand. One might also think of replying that language has such qualities as
22 Formula of Communication from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Lacan Jacques
Abstract: It is certainly a language that is at stake in the symbolism brought to light in analysis. This language, corresponding to the playful wish found in one of Lichtenberg’s aphorisms, has the universal character of a tongue that
23 The Instance of the Letter in the Unconscious, or Reason since Freud from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Lacan Jacques
Abstract: Writing is in fact distinguished by a prevalence of the
textin the sense that we will see this factor of discourse take on here—which allows for the kind of tightening up that must, to my taste, leave the reader no other way out than the way in, which I prefer to be difficult. This, then, will
24 Differance from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Derrida Jacques
Abstract: The verb “to differ” [
différer] seems to differ from itself. On the one hand, it indicates difference as distinction, inequality, or discernibility; on the other, it expresses the interposition of delay, the interval of aspacingandtemporalizingthat puts off until “later” what is presently denied, the possible that is presently impossible. Sometimes thedifferentand sometimes thedeferredcorrespond [in French] to the verb “to differ.” This correlation, however, is not simply one between act and object, cause and effect, or primordial and derived.
25 The Fetishism of the Commodity and Its Secret | The Process of Exchange from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Marx Karl
Abstract: A commodity appears at first sight an extremely obvious, trivial thing. But its analysis brings out that it is a very strange thing, abounding in metaphysical subtleties and theological niceties. So far as it is a use-value, there is nothing mysterious about it, whether we consider it from the point of view that by its properties it satisfies human needs, or that it first takes on these properties as the product of human labour. It is absolutely clear that, by his activity, man changes the forms of the materials of nature in such a way as to make them useful
29 Of Being Singular Plural from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Nancy Jean-Luc
Abstract: We say “people are strange.”¹ This phrase is one of our most constant and rudimentary ontological attestations. In fact, it says a great deal. “People” indicates everyone else, designated as the indeterminate ensemble of populations, lineages, or races [
gentes] from which the speaker removes himself. (Nevertheless, he removes himself in a very particular sort of way, because the designation is so general—and this is exactly the point—that it inevitably turns back around on the speaker. Since I say that “people are strange,” I include myself in a certain way in this strangeness.)
30 The Paradox of Sovereignty | Form of Law | The Ban and the Wolf from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Agamben Giorgio
Abstract: 1.1. The paradox of sovereignty consists in the fact the sovereign is, at the same time, outside and inside the juridical order. If the sovereign is truly the one to whom the juridical order grants the power of proclaiming a state of exception and, therefore, of suspending the order’s own validity, then “the sovereign stands outside the juridical order and, nevertheless, belongs to it, since it is up to him to decide if the constitution is to be suspended
in toto” (Schmitt,Politische Theologie, p. 13). The specification that the sovereign is “at the same timeoutside and inside the
31 Becoming-Media: from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Vogl Joseph
Abstract: Mediummeans middle and in the middle, mediation and mediator; it calls for a closer questioning of the role, workings, and materials of this “in-between.” Media studies’ field of inquiry is quite rightly a broad one, stretching from prehistoric registers of the tides and stars to the ubiquitous contemporary mass media, encompassing physical transmitters (such as air and light), as well as schemes of notation, whether hieroglyphic, phonetic, or alphanumeric. It includes technologies and artifacts like electrification, the telescope, or the gramophone alongside symbolic forms and spatial representations such as perspective, theater, or literature as a whole. However, the very
32 Actio in Distans: from:
Philosophy of Communication
Author(s) Sloterdijk Peter
Abstract: The crisis of the philosophical
epochéis the defining characteristic of the present age. Orientation in complex realities has become extremely difficult; in the turbulence of contemporary life, it is hard to perform Husserl’s basic philosophical operation—stepping back from the image of reality while bracketing one’s own existential intentions—with any degree of conviction. This experience is not entirely new: inOne-Way Street, written between the two world wars, Walter Benjamin already bade farewell to illusions of adequate distance:
Book Title: The Machine Question-Critical Perspectives on AI, Robots, and Ethics
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Gunkel David J.
Abstract: One of the enduring concerns of moral philosophy is deciding who or what is deserving of ethical consideration. Much recent attention has been devoted to the "animal question" -- consideration of the moral status of nonhuman animals. In this book, David Gunkel takes up the "machine question": whether and to what extent intelligent and autonomous machines of our own making can be considered to have legitimate moral responsibilities and any legitimate claim to moral consideration. The machine question poses a fundamental challenge to moral thinking, questioning the traditional philosophical conceptualization of technology as a tool or instrument to be used by human agents. Gunkel begins by addressing the question of machine moral agency: whether a machine might be considered a legitimate moral agent that could be held responsible for decisions and actions. He then approaches the machine question from the other side, considering whether a machine might be a moral patient due legitimate moral consideration. Finally, Gunkel considers some recent innovations in moral philosophy and critical theory that complicate the machine question, deconstructing the binary agent--patient opposition itself. Technological advances may prompt us to wonder if the science fiction of computers and robots whose actions affect their human companions (think of HAL in 2001: A Space Odyssey) could become science fact. Gunkel's argument promises to influence future considerations of ethics, ourselves, and the other entities who inhabit this world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhks8
Introduction from:
The Machine Question
Abstract: One of the enduring concerns of moral philosophy is deciding who or what is deserving of ethical consideration. Although initially limited to “other men,” the practice of ethics has developed in such a way that it continually challenges its own restrictions and comes to encompass what had been previously excluded individuals and groups—foreigners, women, animals, and even the environment. Currently, we stand on the verge of another fundamental challenge to moral thinking. This challenge comes from the autonomous, intelligent machines of our own making, and it puts in question many deep-seated assumptions about who or what constitutes a moral
1 Moral Agency from:
The Machine Question
Abstract: The question concerning machine moral agency is one of the staples of science fiction, and the proverbial example is the HAL 9000 computer from Stanley Kubrick’s
2001: A Space Odyssey(1968). HAL, arguably the film’s principal antagonist, is an advanced AI that oversees and manages every operational aspect of theDiscoveryspacecraft. AsDiscoverymakes its way to Jupiter, HAL begins to manifest what appears to be mistakes or errors, despite that fact that, as HAL is quick to point out, no 9000 computer has ever made a mistake. In particular, “he” (as the character of the computer is already
3 Thinking Otherwise from:
The Machine Question
Abstract: Moral philosophy has typically, in one way or another, made exclusive decisions about who is and who is not a legitimate moral agent and/or patient. We have, in effect, sought to determine the line dividing who or what is considered a member of the community of moral subjects from who or what remains outside. And we have done so by, as Thomas Birch (1993, 315) explains, assuming “that we can and ought to find, formulate, establish, institute in our practices, a criterion for (a proof schema of) membership in the class of beings that are moral
consideranda.” It is, for
Book Title: Dictionary of Untranslatables-A Philosophical Lexicon
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: This is an encyclopedic dictionary of close to 400 important philosophical, literary, and political terms and concepts that defy easy--or any--translation from one language and culture to another. Drawn from more than a dozen languages, terms such as
Dasein(German),pravda(Russian),saudade(Portuguese), andstato(Italian) are thoroughly examined in all their cross-linguistic and cross-cultural complexities. Spanning the classical, medieval, early modern, modern, and contemporary periods, these are terms that influence thinking across the humanities. The entries, written by more than 150 distinguished scholars, describe the origins and meanings of each term, the history and context of its usage, its translations into other languages, and its use in notable texts. The dictionary also includes essays on the special characteristics of particular languages--English, French, German, Greek, Italian, Portuguese, Russian, and Spanish.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hhntn
Book Title: Translating Childhoods-Immigrant Youth, Language, and Culture
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): ORELLANA MARJORIE FAULSTICH
Abstract: Though the dynamics of immigrant family life has gained attention from scholars, little is known about the younger generation, often considered "invisible."
Translating Childhoods, a unique contribution to the study of immigrant youth, brings children to the forefront by exploring the "work" they perform as language and culture brokers, and the impact of this largely unseen contribution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hj1hn
Introduction from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: For more than a decade, I have been documenting the work that the children of immigrants do as they use their skills in two languages to read, write, listen, speak, and do things for their families.¹ I refer to a practice that has variously been called Natural Translation, family interpreting, language brokering, and
para-phrasing–terms I discuss further in chapter 1. Placing phone calls, taking and leaving messages, scheduling appointments, filling out credit card applications, negotiating sales purchases, soliciting social services, and communicating for their parents with teachers, medical personnel, and other authority figures are part of everyday life for
Chapter 4 Public Para-Phrasing from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Like home-based translation work, public
para-phrasing involved a myriad of activities involving an array of institutional domains, set in distinct relationships, and directed toward assorted problems. Children developed and used a wide array of what Luis Moll calls “funds of knowledge,”¹ as they engaged in tasks that ranged from relatively simple things such as asking where items were located in a store or for directions on the street to much more complex negotiations with doctors, lawyers, and social service providers. Translations were provided mostly for family members, as when children read signs, labels, maps, and directions; often, publicpara-phrasing acts
Chapter 5 Transculturations from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: Because parent-teacher conferences offer particularly rich insights into the complexities of child language brokering on social, psychological, cultural, cognitive, and linguistic dimensions, I examine this activity setting in detail. The transactions also reveal adults’ assumptions about children and childhood, learning and development, and suggest how these beliefs influence children’s pathways.¹ They illuminate some challenges that interpreters face when they engage in interactions that would normally involve only two people. Cecilia Wadensjö,² in her extension of Erving Goffman’s concepts of participant frameworks,³ points out that the presence of translators makes dyadic exchanges into multiparty ones, but participants often continue to act
Chapter 6 Transformations from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: “Marjorie!” I looked up from my lunch in this restaurant frequented by university faculty on this first day of a return visit to the Midwest, startled to see “Nova” standing straight and tall in a waiter’s white pressed shirt and red tie, looking and sounding professional, confident, mature, and at home in this position and setting. After I registered my surprise to see him here, Nova told me of his activities: working as a waiter; designing web pages for cyberspace clients who paid for his services (with a business partner from Mexico); playing on the volleyball team (despite his father’s
Chapter 7 Translating Childhoods from:
Translating Childhoods
Abstract: There are many ways to understand children’s work as translators and interpreters for their families. We can focus on the burdens it sometimes places on youth and on how stress affects children’s growth and development. Turning this perspective around, we can highlight the cognitive, social, emotional, and linguistic benefits these experiences may offer to youth. We can either reject children’s involvement as a form of youth exploitation or applaud youths’ contributions to homes, schools, communities and society. We can talk about character formation, skills acquisition, and the pathways that are opened or closed through engagement in these activities, or we
Introduction: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) WIMBUSH VINCENT L.
Abstract: I aim in this essay to press the case for our reconsideration of a complex phenomenon—what in freighted, masking English shorthand is often called “scriptures.” It is a call for a re-consideration if not rejection of the conventional academic-intellectual-political and socio-religious-political orientations and practices long associated with “scriptures.” It is a challenge to take up “scriptures” and with such to engage in a different type of social-cultural-critical-interpretive practice—a fathoming, an “excavation.” This differently oriented interpretive practice has as its focus not the exegesis of texts but the fathoming of human striving and behaviors and orientations, with their fears,
2 Signifying Revelation in Islam from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) KASSAM TAZIM R.
Abstract: The wider context of this essay is to bring about an epistemic shift in theorizing about “scriptures” by making transparent the signifying process and by calling into question the methods and activities by which (scriptural) meaning is made and legitimated. This involves looking from the margins to the center where dominant discourses and frames of reference have established the hermeneutical norms and epistemic regimes for understanding and relating to “scripture(s).” Such a venture invokes the broader question of how to relate to scriptural language given the sacred status that it enjoys. What questions might one ask of “scriptures” and their
Talking Back from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Abstract: These essays provoke our thinking about what “scriptures” are, why they are invented, the work we make them do for us. Whatever else scriptures may be made to be for us, whatever else they may be made to do for us, we seem to make them a centering force.¹ We allow them to locate us, help define us, orient us—always, of course, in obvious relationships to some circle or framework. This means that no matter the passionate rhetorical claims and arguments, no matter the long-standing and widely held assumptions, no matter the entrenched practices and rituals in relationship to
8 Signifying Scriptures from an African Perspective from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) OLAJUBU OYERONKE
Abstract: Indigenous religions are often characterized by plurality, but the term “plurality” is an inadequate descriptor of people’s lived experience. Rather than plurality, in this essay, I emphasize mutuality, accommodation, and balance. The Yoruba religion is one of such indigenous religions that prioritize balance and mutuality in relationships between God and humans, humans and nature, and in interpersonal relationships. Dividends of this stance can be discerned in power relations, gender relations, and power utilization among adherents of Yoruba religion.
9 Transforming Identities, De-textualizing Interpretation, and Re-modalizing Representation: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) CLARKE SATHIANATHAN
Abstract: The methodology presented in Vincent Wimbush’s theorizing of “scriptures” introduction to this volume is both complexly situated and conspicuously vested. The methodology of investigating “scriptures” is decidedly embedded in the multiplex and pluriform world of concrete power exchanges within which the phenomena operate. “Scriptures” become powerful agents of discursive practice in a complex of worlds entrenched in power. “Scriptures” are thus stripped of their exclusive transcendental wrappings, which have been historically utilized to save them from critical interrogation. Rather “scriptures” have been reassembled as subjects/objects of immanental influence in the messy and concrete world of interconnected power generators and power
11 Conjuring Scriptures and Engendering Healing Traditions from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) CHIREAU YVONNE P.
Abstract: The traditions on which I will focus form a locus of beliefs and practices that have been identified as “black folk religions.” The religion scholar Theophus Smith has characterized these traditions
16 Texture, Text, and Testament: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) KING-HAMMOND LESLIE
Abstract: Reading sacred symbols and signifying imagery in American visual culture is still one of the most under-explored aspects of visual expression in modern and postmodern art of the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. Global history has provided the artist with a wealth of examples in the expression and creation of objects, artifacts, and monuments inspired by personal motivation and religious belief systems. Modernity has posed challenges to the artist’s need to connect with a spiritual core fundamental to living a meaningful life in a world of global conflicts and civil wars. Encoded meanings have mandated that the elements represented in contemporary
17 Differences at Play in the Fields of the Lord from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) HARDING SUSAN F.
Abstract: The televangelical preachers of the 1980s each emerged out of, embodied, and performed particular lineages within the American evangelical Protestant tradition. Their particular lineages were visible in their attire, audible in their voices and sermons, and legible in their actions and writings.
20 Orality, Memory, and Power: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) OLIVELLE PATRICK
Abstract: Over the past several decades we have seen a shift in the academic study of religion from phenomenological descriptions and analyses of beliefs and rituals to the investigations of the social, political, and economic underpinnings and ramifications of religious practices and institutions. The new Institute for Signifying Scriptures (ISS) at the Claremont Graduate University is directed at investigating precisely such sociopolitical dimensions of “scriptures” cross-culturally. This essay focuses on how social prestige and political power are related to the production, transmission, and preservation of scriptures in India within the priestly class of Brahmins. Although limited in scope, I hope some
22 Taniwha and Serpent: from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) DIAMOND JO
Abstract: This essay is the written form of a verbal presentation containing a two-part riff inspired by Vincent Wimbush’s introductory essay to this volume. Not attempting to own the knowledge, practical familiarity, let alone complexities, of riff production by any means, I hope to contribute to the spirit of this conference from a Trans-Tasman (Aotearoa New Zealand and Australia) perspective. It occurs to me that the concept of a riff is particularly suited to this perspective given that indigenous peoples in Aotearoa New Zealand and Australia have oral, not written, traditions. Writing came with a “Western” colonizer early in the eighteenth
27 Who Needs the Subaltern? from:
Theorizing Scriptures
Author(s) SAMANTRAI RANU
Abstract: I read the call for an Institute for Signifying Scriptures primarily as a methodological statement, one that resonates well with my own research affiliations and inclinations. Vincent Wimbush proposes an approach to “scriptures” that shifts attention from the correct interpretation of canonical texts to the use of scriptural material in practice. Understood as phenomena, “scriptures” derives their meaning not from authorial intent but from their activation in everyday life in often unintended and surprising uses. Shifting from “
what ‘scriptures’ mean” to “how ‘scriptures’ mean,” Wimbush also directs our attention to the range of scriptural materials evident in the meaning-making, or
Book Title: After Representation?-The Holocaust, Literature, and Culture
Publisher: Rutgers University Press
Author(s): EHRENREICH ROBERT M.
Abstract: After Representation?explores one of the major issues in Holocaust studiesùthe intersection of memory and ethics in artistic expression, particularly within literature.As experts in the study of literature and culture, the scholars in this collection examine the shifting cultural contexts for Holocaust representation and reveal how writersùwhether they write as witnesses to the Holocaust or at an imaginative distance from the Nazi genocideùarticulate the shadowy borderline between fact and fiction, between event and expression, and between the condition of life endured in atrocity and the hope of a meaningful existence. What imaginative literature brings to the study of the Holocaust is an ability to test the limits of language and its conventions.After Representation?moves beyond the suspicion of representation and explores the changing meaning of the Holocaust for different generations, audiences, and contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hj9pn
Introduction: from:
After Representation?
Author(s) SPARGO R. CLIFTON
Abstract: A Holocaust literature that took its imperatives from the existential conditions of the camps would begin always as at the end of culture, in a world of dying, degradation, and atrocity wherein all books and learning exist but as a faint memory of what it meant to be human in some other time, some other place. For Elie Wiesel, there is in fact no other condition from which a literature about the Holocaust might begin, which is to say, there is no way of speaking about the Holocaust in books except from within a state of historically conditioned anxiety about
1 The Holocaust, History Writing, and the Role of Fiction from:
After Representation?
Author(s) HARTMAN GEOFFREY
Abstract: We cannot get back to a hypothetical original version of the historic or mythic events. Nor can we know exactly what harmonizing of sources occurred during the process of transmission and canonization. The events described by the main narrative line—the generic Jewish biography, as
5 Nazi Aesthetics in Historical Context from:
After Representation?
Author(s) YOUNG JAMES E.
Abstract: As is clear from the abundant literary and historical study of the victims’ diaries and memoirs, it is impossible to separate what might be called these works’ “aesthetic logic” from the victims’ very real historical and practical understanding of events as they unfolded. That is, the victims’ responses to contemporaneous events in the ghettos and camps were often shaped by how they may have literarily cast similar events the day before in letters, diaries, or chronicles. As the best new historical work on the Holocaust also makes clear, we can no longer divorce the Nazi-perpetrators’ representations of their victims from
10 Reading Heart of Darkness after the Holocaust from:
After Representation?
Author(s) EAGLESTONE ROBERT
Abstract: There is an unavoidable
Nachträglichkeit(indignity) in reading after the Holocaust. As Omer Bartov writes, the Holocaust has “projected its impact both forward and backward in time, an explosion of destructive energy at the heart of Western civilization that compels us to rethink our assumptions about the nature of humanity and culture, history and progress, politics and morality.”¹ Bartov’s insight about the temporality of our reflections on the Holocaust has been realized by a number of contemporary historians who have taken concepts from the well-developed historiography of the Holocaust and, with due caution, used them to illuminate genocides, atrocities, and
4 Diagnosing Dementia: from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) GRAHAM JANICE E.
Abstract: What meanings are hidden in the plaques and tangles of an atrophying brain, in the artifacts of diagnostic clinical history, in the bioinformatic matrices of an epidemiological database? Or in the lived experiences of a still-active mind trying to express a voice, to perform an action, but unable to find the means to do so? How do seemingly disparate bits and pieces of pathology, clinical history, social relationships, and specialist training come together? How do these fractured components form interpretable constellations that help us better understand the science; the sufferers; the relationships between dementia, data, and the diagnostic process?
5 The Biomedical Deconstruction of Senility and the Persistent Stigmatization of Old Age in the United States from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) BALLENGER JESSE F.
Abstract: This oft-quoted characterization of the seventh and final stage of a person’s life has usually been taken as a commonplace of old age: this period has always been stigmatized. In particular, the mental losses associated with age, “second childishness and mere oblivion,” have been among the most deeply stigmatized conditions. In its frightening totality—effacing the memories and abilities that are widely seen as the very essence of personhood—senile dementia seems to taint the entire experience of aging. In its relentless inevitability, deeply associated with aging and the mere passage of time, it makes a mockery of the achievement
8 Creative Storytelling and Self-Expression among People with Dementia from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) BASTING ANNE DAVIS
Abstract: When memory fades and one’s grasp on the factual building blocks of one’s life loosens, what remains? Is a person still capable of growth and creative expression even when dementia strikes? To answer these questions, I relay the story of the Time
SlipsProject, a research and public-arts storytelling project aimed at nurturing creative expression among people with Alzheimer’s disease and related dementia (ADRD) and at sharing the stories that emerged in TimeSlipsworkshops with the public at large to increase awareness of the creative potential of people with ADRD. I will (1) outline the storytelling method and my study of
9 Embodied Selfhood: from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) KONTOS PIA C.
Abstract: Alzheimer’s disease is regarded as the most bewildering and frightening condition facing the aging population in the twenty-first century (Schroeder et al. 1990) and represents a much feared stigmatizing label that carries with it the force of a sentence of social death (Robertson 1991). As Herskovitz notes, senility is characterized as “monstrosity” by the lay media with “clichéd metaphors and representations in which Alzheimer’s is characteristically drawn in colourfully dramatic terms that paint vividly disturbing images” (1995, 152–153). Alzheimer’s is described as a living death, a never ending funeral, and a private hell of devastation.
12 Being a Good Rōjin: from:
Thinking About Dementia
Author(s) TRAPHAGAN JOHN W.
Abstract: During the summer of 2000, six women and three men gathered at about ten o’clock in the morning at the Furiai Puraza (Contact Plaza), a senior center located in the town of Yonegawa in northern Japan. The group assembled for the first day of a cooking class that would meet six times over the following three months. As the participants, all of whom were in their late sixties and early seventies, waited for the class to commence, the director of the center spoke briefly about his hopes that all the students would learn not only to cook, but also about
Book Title: The King James Version at 400-Assessing Its Genius as Bible Translation and Its Literary Influence
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Towner Philip H.
Abstract: In this collection of essays, thirty scholars from diverse disciplines offer their unique perspectives on the genius of the King James Version, a translation whose 400th anniversary was recently celebrated throughout the English-speaking world. While avoiding nostalgia and hagiography, each author clearly appreciates the monumental, formative role the KJV has had on religious and civil life on both sides of the Atlantic (and beyond) as well as on the English language itself. In part 1 the essayists look at the KJV in its historical contexts—the politics and rapid language growth of the era, the emerging printing and travel industries, and the way women are depicted in the text (and later feminist responses to such depictions). Part 2 takes a closer look at the KJV as a translation and the powerful precedents it set for all translations to follow, with the essayists exploring the translators’ principles and processes (with close examinations of “Bancroft’s Rules" and the Prefaces), assessing later revisions of the text, and reviewing the translation’s influence on the English language, textual criticism, and the practice of translation in Jewish and Chinese contexts. Part 3 looks at the various ways the KJV has impacted the English language and literature, the practice of religion (including within the African American and Eastern Orthodox churches), and the broader culture. The contributors are Robert Alter, C. Clifton Black, David G. Burke, Richard A. Burridge, David J. A. Clines, Simon Crisp, David J. Davis, James D. G. Dunn, Lori Anne Ferrell, Leonard J. Greenspoon, Robin Griffith-Jones, Malcolm Guite, Andrew E. Hill, John F. Kutsko, Seth Lerer, Barbara K. Lewalski, Jacobus A. Naudé, David Norton, Jon Pahl, Kuo-Wei Peng, Deborah W. Rooke, Rodney Sadler Jr., Katharine Doob Sakenfeld, Harold Scanlin, Naomi Seidman, Christopher Southgate, R. S. Sugirtharajah, Joan Taylor, Graham Tomlin, Philip H. Towner, David Trobisch, and N. T. Wright.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjgtt
English Printing before the King James Bible: from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Davis David J.
Abstract: English printing in the sixteenth and early seventeenth centuries is of immense importance to the King James Bible and is perhaps one of the most overlooked or oversimplified aspects of the Bible’s origin. Of course, it is not difficult to understand why this is the case. When compared to the Bible itself or its impact on Western society, the nature of English printing does not present nearly as riveting a subject.¹ When we gaze upon the monumental title page that introduced readers to what would become the most widely read English book, the printing industry fades like a dwindling shadow.
The KJV New Testament: from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Dunn James D. G.
Abstract: Part of the reason for taking on this subject, I guess, was the memory of teenage irritation, more than fifty years ago, when I found myself increasingly frustrated at the many occurrences of “thou,” “thee,” and “ye”; the suffixes “-eth” and “-est”; and “hath,” “spake,” “wist,” “wax,” and “brethren.” It was all so old-fashioned, out of date, not language I would use in any other context than reading the Bible. So I suppose I wanted an opportunity to say how I came to find the KJV less and less satisfactory and satisfying as a translation. Not simply for me in
The King James Bible Apocrypha: from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Hill Andrew E.
Abstract: In this paper I will first set the English Bible translation context for the King James Bible (KJB); review the making and early publication history of the KJB with respect to the Old Testament Apocrypha; examine the reactions to the KJB by the English Puritans and Scottish Presbyterians; survey the publication history of the later editions of the KJB with respect
The Word and the Words: from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Guite Malcolm
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to explore a little of the theological framework that lies behind the effort of translation and also to show the way in which the act of translation itself became a key theological metaphor, a way of understanding and unpacking the truth that the translators believed was at the heart of the words with which they were working. In particular I want to look at what Lancelot Andrewes, whose name headed the list of translators, was thinking and saying about translation in the midst of his work on the KJV, and also at the way
African Americans and the King James Version of the Bible from:
The King James Version at 400
Author(s) Sadler Rodney
Abstract: The King James Version of the Bible has been a prominent factor influencing the course of Western history for the past four hundred years. You need look no further than the African American community to find evidence for this claim. As a people, African Americans were not easy converts to Christianity. In fact, it took more than a century, two Great Awakenings, and the typically more egalitarian evangelistic tactics of the Baptists and Methodists for Christianity to begin to make significant inroads into African American communities. But more than these sociological factors, it took the stories from the pages of
A Fragile Dignity: from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Tamez Elsa
Abstract: After reading the three essays with your respective responses, my head was whirling with ideas. The diversity of approaches to the topic of dignity, family, and violence, to using the Bible, literature, and the complex problem of Assisted Reproductive Technologies as study resources indicate that we are experiencing a true intercultural dialogue. Intercultural and interdisciplinary dialogues are effective ways to become aware of the problems in other contexts, to learn from them, and to reflect on the facts in a critical and self-critical manner. In this regard, the objective has been achieved. However, you have asked for a third voice,
Dignity in the Family? from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Vosloo Robert
Abstract: In the present late liberal, Western context, family and human dignity do not exactly make an ideal pair.¹ It is not unusual to find suggestions that the family is precisely a setting in which human dignity is under threat. This idea is illustrative of current general distrust of the family. At present, the family seems to stand for things that are at odds with central late liberal values: family favors its own members; it provides people with fixed roles that hinder equality and free self-development; and it is in a sense a closed phenomenon, and may as such foster values
Honor in the Bible and the Qur’an from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Waghid Yusef
Abstract: On June 22, 2002, a Pakistani woman from the Punjab, Mukhtaran (or Mukhtar) Bibi, was gang-raped. The deed was the result of a conflict between her family and another family in her village, belonging to the Mastoi clan. The Mastoi accused Mukhtaran’s twelve-year-old brother of assaulting a woman of their clan (in fact, it seems he had been seen talking to the woman in a field). The boy was therefore kept under lock and key by the Mastoi. In such cases, of conflict between families, Pakistani villagers often have recourse to a local tribal law council, a Panchayat. One possible
Reflections on Reflections: from:
Fragile Dignity
Author(s) Brenner Athalya
Abstract: This collection is a many-layered conversation on conversations. As the introduction states, it originated in a series of research meetings. The introduction provides pointers to the context and to the main issues discussed; every essay has a response attached to it; groups of essays have their own responses; and I have been asked to reflect on the collection as a whole. In my view the volume’s editors as well as its contributors should be commended for this manner of presenting their deliberations. It is the closest possible structure to the actual performance of research events, imitating spoken discourse with comments
Book Title: Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory-Collected Essays of Werner H. Kelber
Publisher: SBL Press
Author(s): Kelber Werner H.
Abstract: Jesus and his followers defined their allegiances and expressed their identities in a communications culture that manifested itself in voice and chirographic practices, in oral-scribal interfaces, and in performative activities rooted in memory. In the sixteen essays gathered in Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory, Werner Kelber explores the verbal arts of early Christian word processing operative in a media world that was separated by two millennia from our contemporary media history. The title articulates the fact that the ancient culture of voiced texts, hand-copying, and remembering is chiefly accessible to us in print format and predominantly assimilated from print perspectives. The oral-scribal-memorial-performative paradigm developed in these essays challenges the reigning historical-critical model in biblical scholarship. Notions of tradition, the fixation on the single original saying, the dominant methodology of form criticism, and the heroic labors of the Quest—stalwart features of the historical, documentary paradigm—are all subject to a critical review. A number of essays reach beyond New Testament texts, ranging from the pre-Socratic Gorgias through medieval manuscript culture on to print’s triumphant apotheosis in Gutenberg’s Vulgate, product of the high tech of the fifteenth century, all the way to conflicting commemorations of Auschwitz—taking tentative steps toward a history of media technologies, culture, and cognition of the Christian tradition in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjh34
Foreword from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Author(s) Rhoads David
Abstract: It is difficult to overestimate the significance of the work of Werner Kelber for biblical studies. His groundbreaking 1983 monograph,
The Oral and the Written Gospel, challenged the core foundations of biblical scholarship by offering a paradigm shift of sweeping proportions. Over the last three decades he has affirmed, revised, refined, and expanded his work in conversation with others who work in the same field and who are interacting with his scholarchip. The articles and papers arranged in chronological order in this volume chart that pioneering course. Every essay makes an original contribution, even when Kelber is reviewing the work
1 Apostolic Tradition and the Form of the Gospel (1985) from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: For some time now, the theme of discipleship in Mark has attracted my attention, for nowhere in the canon does a text generate in readers as much alienation from the disciples as in this Gospel (Kelber 1972; 1974; 1979; 1983). I continue to view it as a puzzle that admits of no simple or general answer. The very oddness of the theme ought to have inspired creative explorations, whereas, in fact, it has often given rise to evasive maneuvers. The elaboration of admittedly positive features of the disciples is, of course, very much to the point. But it has not
12 Orality and Biblical Scholarship: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: In keeping with developments in the human and social sciences, we have for some time now experienced a recovery and reconsideration of the oral factor in biblical studies. Negatively speaking what is at stake is a challenge to what Foley has called “the textualist bias of our scholarship, with its easy assimilation of all forms of verbal art to the literary-textual model” (1995, 87). This text-centered perspective has involved a sense of textual autonomy, textualization as an end in itself, texts’ localization in intertextual networks, and a dominantly textual hermeneutics—all notions closely allied with the historical and literary paradigm.
13 Memory and Violence, or: from:
Imprints, Voiceprints, and Footprints of Memory
Abstract: Three interrelated features may be said to characterize the work of Edith Wyschogrod. There is first an interdisciplinary drive to rise above institutionally sanctioned boundaries and to retrieve intellectual categories from their disciplinary captivity so as to reconfigure them in novel contexts. It is this desire and the ability to bring widely differing genres, discourses, and traditionally separate intellectual orbits into productive coalitions that has increasingly distinguished her writings. This interfacing of philosophy and theology, psychoanalysis and science, literary criticism and linguistics, architecture and the arts, media studies and above all ethics is carried off with a high degree of
Book Title: Political Creativity-Reconfiguring Institutional Order and Change
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press, Inc.
Author(s): Hattam Victoria
Abstract: Drawing on the rich cache of antidualist theoretical traditions, from poststructuralism and ecological theory to constructivism and pragmatism, a diverse group of scholars probes acts of social innovation in many locations: land boards in Botswana, Russian labor relations, international statistics, global supply chains, Islamic economics in Algeria, Islamic sects and state authority in Senegal, and civil rights reform, colonization, industrial policy, and political consulting in the United States. These political scientists reconceptualize
agencyas a relational process that continually reorders the nature and meaning of people and things,orderas an assemblage that necessitates creative tinkering and interpretation, andchangeas the unruly politics of time that confounds the conventional ordering of past, present, and future.Political Creativityoffers analytical tools for reimagining order and change as entangled processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjkqq
Introduction: from:
Political Creativity
Abstract: The game’s afoot in institutionalist research. As institutionalists grapple with change, diversity, innovation, indeterminacy, creativity, and surprising assemblages of institutional artifacts, some have come to question the implicit structuralist foundations of their research and turned elsewhere for help. The catalog is big and growing. Among other traditions, institutionalists have turned to social studies of science, action theory, ecology, narrative knowing, poststructuralism, constructivism, postcolonialism, pragmatism, theories of entrepreneurship, religious studies, and economic anthropology. This volume assembles a group of political scientists, whose only obvious commonality is their restlessness with structuralism and their commitment to alternative intellectual traditions to animate their research.
Chapter 3 Governance Architectures for Learning and Self-Recomposition in Chinese Industrial Upgrading from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Voskamp Ulrich
Abstract: For most of its post-1992 rapid industrialization, Chinese manufacturing excelled in global markets as a platform for high-volume and low-cost, export-oriented production.¹ Since China’s accession to the World Trade Organization in 2001, however, the fruits of rapid industrialization have been creating home market conditions for very different manufacturing strategies. Successful export-led industrialization has created more sophisticated domestic Chinese demand for a broad array of manufactured goods. In an effort to capture this emergent demand, Chinese producers are shifting their focus toward more advanced production and away from what was traditionally needed (or possible) within the framework of export processing relationships.
Chapter 4 Reconfiguring Industry Structure: from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Amberg Stephen
Abstract: The federal government’s rescue of General Motors and Chrysler in 2008–2009 was a dramatic reminder that a liberal state can exert plenary powers to stem a public crisis by controlling the primary agents. Yet federal action came at a moment when social science debates about how institutions shape change had reached a point where government intervention is less significant than the ways that agents are able to innovate from institutional routines.¹ The successful auto bailout raised questions about the evolution of government-market relationships and the capacity of government to improve on market outcomes. The U.S. auto crisis began in
Chapter 6 Creating Political Strategy, Controlling Political Work: from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Sheingate Adam
Abstract: A central theme guiding this volume is that politics is marked by everyday forms of innovation, what Gerald Berk and Dennis Galvan refer to as creative syncretism.¹ Focusing on this creativity, they argue, offers key insights into the nature and conduct of politics. What at first may appear to be fixed and rigid structures, such as rules and roles, interests and institutions, are in fact multiple and malleable elements of political life. This diversity allows actors to combine and recombine elements in pursuit of their political goals. The payoff from such an analytical move is twofold. First, attention to the
Chapter 10 The Trouble with Amnesia: from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Bruyneel Kevin
Abstract: In politics, time is a structuring force that shapes collective and individual identities, subjectivities, and imaginaries. We can see the role of political temporality in sweeping historical narratives, such as those a nation tells itself about its founding moment and subsequent arc of development, an arc that almost always legitimizes the status of the contemporary social and political order. We can see it in more quotidian forms such as the calendars that organize people’s lives and in so doing habituate citizens into annual practices of remembrance, memorialization, and obligation. These examples point to the fact that political time is a
Chapter 11 Interest in the Absence of Articulation: from:
Political Creativity
Author(s) Harrold Deborah
Abstract: Several authoritarian regimes in the Middle East and North Africa were taken down in 2011, but this wave of challenges to strong states missed Algeria. In Algeria, large demonstrations in January 2011 and new efforts at political mobilization were overwhelmed by state security and could not continue. What Algeria lacked were the alliances built in other nations. Algeria’s civil war (1993–2000) left deep rifts and mistrust between groups.¹ Profound dissatisfaction with the state and desire for change could not take the place of the political work, underground or in open, of bridging interests and shaping alliances among democratic forces,
Book Title: How Does Social Science Work?-Reflections on Practice
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): DIESING PAUL
Abstract: This profound and sometimes witty book will appeal to students and practitioners in the social sciences who are ready to take a fresh look at their field. An extensive bibliography provides a wealth of references across an array of social science disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjpmm
INTRODUCTION from:
How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: THIS BOOK is intended for the practicing social scientist or social science student. It is concerned with actual research, and focuses on three main questions: (1) What are the actual goals of the various current research methods? Call the goals “truth” or “knowledge”; then what characteristics does achieved truth have in the various methods? (2) What social, cognitive, and personality processes occur or should occur during research, and how do they contribute to the outcome? (3) What persistent weaknesses and dangers appear in research, and what can we do about them?
4 Pragmatism from:
How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: PRAGMATISTS TREAT SCIENCE as a process of inquiry or search for truth. The emphasis is on process, method, correction, change, not definitive and permanent results. Inquiry begins with a question or a problem, and is directed to answering the question or solving the problem. Problems are initially practical ones: How can we resolve or tone down family quarrels? How can we reduce the inflation rate, or compensate for its more harmful effects without causing trouble elsewhere? However, the search for solutions brings up more abstract problems: What is a good measure of inflation? What is the relation between the quantity
9 Cognitive Processes in Social Science from:
How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: “ANYONE ATTEMPTING to come to grips with the booming [
sic], buzzing confusion that is contemporary cognitive psychology is likely to be left with an actual or metaphorical headache .... Cognitive psychology often seems to resemble the messenger inAlice in Wonderlandwho went in all directions at once” (Eysenck, 1984, p. 1). “We are like the inhabitants of thousands of little islands, all in the same part of the ocean, yet totally out of touch with each other. Each has evolved a different culture, different ways of doing things, different languages to talk about what they do. Occasionally inhabitants of
10 Personality Influences in Social Science from:
How Does Social Science Work?
Abstract: DO SOCIAL SCIENTISTS’ personalities find expression in their work? Yes, they do. Personality effects are a class of experimenter effects, and appear in all methods involving direct contact with people-experimentation, interviewing, survey research, clinical research, and ethnography (Rosenthal, 1966). “Experimenters who differ in anxiety, need for approval, hostility, authoritarianism, status, and warmth tend to obtain different responses from their experimental subjects” (Rosenthal, 1983, p. 91).
Book Title: Dancing Identity-Metaphysics In Motion
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: Fraleigh's brilliantly inventive fusions of philosophy and movement clarify often complex philosophical issues and apply them to dance history and aesthetics. She illustrates her discussions with photographs, dance descriptions, and stories from her own past in order to bridge dance with everyday movement. Seeking to recombine the fractured and bifurcated conceptions of the body and of the senses that dominate much Western discourse, she reveals how metaphysical concepts are embodied and presented in dance, both on stage and in therapeutic settings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjq68
Introduction from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: Traditionally, metaphysics searches for essences, but the post-metaphysical quest leans more toward potentials. Martin Heidegger puts it this way: “Higher than actuality lies
possibility.” Metaphysics as a branch of philosophy studies the nature of being and beings, existence, time, space, movement, and causality. It also involves underlying principles and theories that form the basis of a particular field of knowledge. Heidegger conceived the primary task of metaphysics as the clarification ofbeingin his book on phenomenological metaphysics,Being and Time. In the analysis of being, he holds that phenomenology and ontology characterize philosophy itself, and that we can best
3 Thickening Ambiguity from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: If existence is indeterminate, open-ended and not predictable, then we dance as unfinished metaphysical artifacts in much the same way as phenomenology and evolutionary science explain how life is ongoing.
We are works in progress, in other words, and like works of art we live between content and process. Our living metaphysical reality does not mount to heaven, but spreads into our everyday dances—of auspicious being and indeterminate becoming.
5 A Dance of Time Beings from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: As a metaphysical artifact, dancing springs from our embodied state, our embodied sexuality, for instance, but overflows the body even as it contains it. This is
7 Messy Beauty and Butoh Invalids from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: My experience tells me something quite different from the texts and dances of classicism and metaphysical dualism—that our transcendence is not won at the expense of flesh and body, nor is mind higher than matter: mater, matron, matrix, mother, the land. Rather, we pierce reality through the body, and we transcend downward as well as upward. The “descendental,” a word we do not use as much as its “transcendental” opposite, is that which descends to the matter-of-fact.¹
8 Existential Haircut from:
Dancing Identity
Abstract: In their drawing apart, they are balanced by forces of cohesion that hold them together.¹ In the abstract, this connection is aesthetic tension. In the human body, this connection is dance. Tension, rhythm, vibration, and energy ignite “dance”—in Sanskrit,
tan(tension, sound, and rhythm) and Old High Germandanson(to stretch). The German wordtanz(dance) also partakes of the sacred language of Sanskrit.
INTRODUCTION: from:
A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Composition has been haunted by an unseen ghost. Since the 1970s, its disciplinary discourse has been operating on assumptions that have gone unquestioned. Coded under the umbrella of romanticism—a category often used in the discipline for identifying and excluding particular rhetorical practices—vitalism has been mischaracterized and left out of most scholarship in the field. So in order to bring vitalism as a distinct theoretical body to light, this book literally begins from the margins, from two footnotes in Paul Kameen’s “Rewording the Rhetoric of Composition” and one footnote in Victor Vitanza’s “Three Countertheses.” Kameen points out that Richard
3 REMAPPING METHOD from:
A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: Because he was teaching at the University of Pittsburgh at the time, Paul Kameen was a part of the academic milieu surrounding Richard Young’s NEH seminar at Carnegie Mellon University in 1978. William Coles and Otis Walter, also from the University of Pittsburgh, were guests at the seminar, and Kameen was very much aware of their work regarding the composing process and rhetorical invention. Like James Berlin, Kameen was wary of the dubious connection between Coleridge and the characterization of vitalism that Young was putting forward in the seminar. Kameen also published a key article in 1980 that put forward
5 TECHNOLOGY-COMPLEXITY-METHODOLOGY from:
A Counter-History of Composition
Abstract: A key development in the 1990s changed the way rhetoric and compositionists look at the concepts of technê, rhetoric, and heuristics. Neither Richard Young nor James Berlin could have anticipated the emergence of digital technologies in the mid-nineties and their cultural dominance in the first decade of the twenty-first century. Young’s understanding of technê operates on a more strict definition that ultimately nudges technê toward rigid, formalist practices. And Berlin’s heuristic opens pedagogical practices to the dialectical procedures that Young aspires to achieve but cannot attain because his definitions of rhetoric and technê hold him back. But even so, Berlin’s
Book Title: Illness as Narrative- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Jurecic Ann
Abstract: For most of literary history, personal confessions about illness were considered too intimate to share publicly. By the mid-twentieth century, however, a series of events set the stage for the emergence of the illness narrative. The increase of chronic disease, the transformation of medicine into big business, the women's health movement, the AIDS/HIV pandemic, the advent of inexpensive paperbacks, and the rise of self-publishing all contributed to the proliferation of narratives about encounters with medicine and mortality.While the illness narrative is now a staple of the publishing industry, the genre itself has posed a problem for literary studies. What is the role of criticism in relation to personal accounts of suffering? Can these narratives be judged on aesthetic grounds? Are they a collective expression of the lost intimacy of the patient-doctor relationship? Is their function thus instrumental-to elicit the reader's empathy?To answer these questions, Ann Jurecic turns to major works on pain and suffering by Susan Sontag, Elaine Scarry, and Eve Sedgwick and reads these alongside illness narratives by Jean-Dominique Bauby, Reynolds Price, and Anne Fadiman, among others. In the process, she defines the subgenres of risk and pain narratives and explores a range of critical responses guided, alternately, by narrative empathy, the hermeneutics of suspicion, and the practice of reparative reading.
Illness as Narrativeseeks to draw wider attention to this form of life writing and to argue for new approaches to both literary criticism and teaching narrative. Jurecic calls for a practice that's both compassionate and critical. She asks that we consider why writers compose stories of illness, how readers receive them, and how both use these narratives to make meaning of human fragility and mortality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5hjr8p
Two Life Narratives in the Risk Society from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: As we have seen, there are many explanations for why and how illness memoirs evolved into a thriving genre in the late twentieth and early twenty-first centuries. When science developed better explanations for disease and more effective treatments, personal stories of illness were displaced from clinical settings in the United States and surfaced elsewhere. With the growth of the publishing industry, changed attitudes toward personal disclosure, patient activism about women’s health and AIDS, and the rise of the Internet, more people turned to the
writtenword to give illness meaning. At least one more factor that motivated the emergence and
Five Theory’s Aging Body from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: To ask about the function of criticism at the present time is to invite nearly as many answers as there are critics. The profession has traveled a long way from Matthew Arnold’s confident declaration in 1865 that the only rule a critic must follow is “disinterestedness” in order “to know the best that is known and thought in the world, irrespectively of practice, politics, and everything of the kind” (“Function,” 17). While a good number of today’s critics might define their work as motivated by “interest,” rather than disinterest, there is no consensus on what the focus of that interest
Six Reparative Reading from:
Illness as Narrative
Abstract: In previous chapters, I discussed the challenges to expression posed by experiences of risk, pain, suffering, and even sympathy, and examined how personal narratives about illness present problems for dominant literary critical practices that are based in hermeneutics of suspicion. In her final book,
Touching Feeling, Eve Kosofsky Sedgwick labels interpretive approaches that seek to expose secrets, errors, and manipulation “paranoid practices.” She points out a truth that is hard to see from within the world of criticism: “paranoia knows some things well and others poorly” (130). Among the things that paranoia does not know well are personal accounts of
4 DANCE AND THE OTHER from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: The affective in dance grows out of its lived ground, a ground that is present in all forms of dance, regardless of whether the dance is performed for others or not. The aesthetically affective arises (in any dance) when the lived ground, the full body consciousness, is vitalized. It is thus that I may actualize the aesthetic when I take pleasure in my dance for myself, but I am not engaged in dance as art until my dance is expressed for others and its aesthetic values are realized between us.
5 DANCE TENSION from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In part 2, we are still moving away from those futile existentialist views that fail to see meaning in life because they emphasize lifeʹs contingency rather than its cohesion, and fail to see the impossibility of erasing (even in our thoughts, let alone our actions) the compelling connectedness of self, body, earth, and world – a universe (a single verse), rendering both unity and diversity possible. Disconnection is possible only if connection is assumed. Likewise, irrationality stands in relation to rationality, nonbeing to being, negative to positive, and contingent properties must be contingent upon something. In short, all oppositions stand
6 POINT COUNTERPOINT from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Let us begin to consider that dance evolves by means of aesthetic-historic oppositions, and that it does so in relation to defining constants, which are points of departure and return. The purpose of this chapter is twofold, then, and concerned with tensional factors of definition. In view of this, let us first reject the notion that dance can be redefined, as it is often claimed. Rather, we might see that there are constant points of reference in our understanding of what dance is; sometimes these points are even stated, as we name the aesthetic essence of a particular dance and
7 EXPRESSIONIST-FORMALIST TENSION from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Plato succinctly states two areas of interwoven aesthetic values realized through dance: ʺOne department of dancing is the presentation of works of poetical inspiration with the care for the preservation of dignity and decorum; the other, which aims at physical fitness, nobility, and beauty, ensures an appropriate flexure and tension in the actual bodily limbs and members, and endows them all with a grace of movement which is incidentally extended to every form of the dance and pervades all intimately.ʺ¹ Thus he sees that poetic expressiveness as well as beauty and grace of form are the purposes of dance.²
8 MYTHIC POLARITY from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: The new abstract and new expressive dance of the late seventies and continuing in the eighties accounts for the past and uses it. It owes a lot to the postmodern attempt to see dance anew. In its technical
10 MOVING TIME-SPACE from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Martin Heidegger, and Jean-Paul Sartre take a particular perspective on time, describing its lived character – its metaphoric and poetic dimension in experience, rather than its objective measure. Space, inseparable from time, is similarly conceived in its poetics by Gaston Bachelard.¹ Preceding their writings was Henri Bergsonʹs exposition of our intuitive grasp of time.² These philosophers are interested in explaining time and space as experienced or perceived in subjective life. As I continue to describe the lived essence of dance in these last chapters, this will also be my concern. Here, I deal with time and space as
12 DANCE IMAGES from:
Dance And Lived Body
Abstract: In order to consider various forms that dance imagery may take and to underscore the lived essence of all dance, I will describe specific imagery in dance master works from different historical periods, which illustrate highly contrasting styles of modern dance. First I describe abstract formalist imagery in early modern dance in one of Doris Humphreyʹs works, then symbolic expressionist imagery in a well-known work by Anna Sokolow,
Book Title: The Reparative in Narratives-Works of Mourning in Progress
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): ROSELLO MIREILLE
Abstract: The authors studied in this book can be visualized as the islands that constitute an unknown, fragile and trembling literary and cultural Francophone archipelago. The archipelago does not appear on any map, in the middle of an ocean whose name we already know. No Francophone anthology would put these authors together as a matter of course because what connects them is a narrative grammar rather than a national origin or even a language. Yet, their writing techniques and their apprehension of the real (the ways in which they know and name the world) both reflect and actively participate in our evolving perception of what Gayatri Spivak calls the “planet”. The Reparative in Narratives argues that argue that they repair trauma through writing. One description of these awe-inspiring, tender and sometimes horrifying tales is that their narrators are survivors who have experienced and sometimes inflicted unspeakable acts of violence. And yet, ultimately, despair, nihilism, cynicism or silence are never the consequences of their encounter with what some quickly call evil. The traumatic event has not killed them and has not killed their desire to write or perform, although the decidedly altered life that they live in the aftermath of the disaster forces them to become different types of storytellers. They are the first-person narrators of their story, and their narration reinvents them as speaking subjects. In turn, this requires that we accept new reading pacts. That pact is a temporal and geographical signature: the reparative narrative needs readers prepared to accept that healing belongs to the realm of possibilities and that exposure and denunciation do not exhaust the victim’s range of possibilities. Rosello contends that this context-specific yet repeating pattern constitutes a response to the contemporary figuration of both globalized and extremely localized types of traumatic memories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9bm
CONCLUSION: from:
The Reparative in Narratives
Abstract: In January 2008, after the evening national news, France 2 network showed an episode of the popular
P.J. Saint Martindetective series called ‘Erreurs de jeunesse’ [Mistakes of Youth].¹ I remember following the plot with a growing sense of astonishment as it slowly became apparent that the puzzle the investigators were slowly putting back together was telling a story about France’s colonial past or more importantly about its impact on the immediate present. The episode made three assumptions that I thought were remarkably revealing about the recent thematic and generic norms that govern memorial narratives (even if they remain invisible).
Book Title: A Self-Conscious Art-Patrick Modiano’s Postmodern Fictions
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): KAWAKAMI AKANE
Abstract: A Self-Conscious Art is the first full-length study in English to attempt to deal with the formal complexities of Modiano’s work, by reading ‘against the grain’ of his self-professed ingenuousness. A detailed examination of his narratives shows the deeply postmodern nature of his writing. Parodying precursors such as Proust or the nouveau romanciers, his narratives are built around a profound lack of faith in the ability of writing to retrieve the past through memory, and this failure is acknowledged in the discreet playfulness that characterises his novels. This book is a timely introduction to the work of one of the most successful modern French novelists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vj9nz
Introduction from:
A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: In 1975, after four successful novels at only just thirty, Patrick Modiano was already sufficiently famous to be asked about his reactions to celebrity:
CHAPTER THREE Unreal Stories: from:
A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: It is often assumed that Modiano is a ‘realist’. One reason for this is that his prose is representational, full of small and precise details in the manner of the Barthesian ‘effet de réel’. Many of these facts, moreover, have been discovered to be real; they are precise locations in Paris, or a particular brand of cigarette commonly smoked in France. Their authenticity has convinced some readers that the narrative which contains them must be a mimetic one. Another commonly held reason for considering Modiano a ‘realist’ is the combination of readability and alleged non-experimentation which characterises his novels; in
CHAPTER FOUR Being Serious: from:
A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: Modiano is still best known for writing novels set in the Occupation. His apparent obsession, especially in his earlier works, with this dark period of French history has been the main concern of his critics and reviewers. It is certainly a controversial subject: it was probably one of the main causes for the impact that Modiano’s first novels had on the public, instantly creating a reputation for the young author.¹ We may wonder, however, whether there was more to this reaction than that of simple choice of subject matter. What is the nature of Modiano’s treatment of the subject? Is
CHAPTER FIVE Being Playful: from:
A Self-Conscious Art
Abstract: We have now seen numerous instances of Modiano at his most subversive. The apparently unremarkable first-person narrator, chronological narrative and realist representation have all turned out to be postmodern subversions of these familiar narrative tropes. So too has his use of historical facts: far from adding up to a historical novel, they result in an uneasy mixture of fact and fiction which has a morally disturbing effect on the reader. This leads us to a question of classification. Modiano’s novels are not what they seem, so we know what they are not: but what exactly are they? To what subgenre
CHAPTER ONE Perspectives on Metaphor and Literary Fiction from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: Metaphor used to belong to poetry. As a trope or figure, its scope in prose narrative is traditionally limited to an aspect of style. In a recent empirical study Gerard Steen sets out to prove that this commonly-held perception is misguided. In one of the tests devised by Steen a team of language experts were presented with a 25-line extract from Norman Mailer’s
Miami and the Siege of Chicagoand asked to identify and isolate examples of metaphor. They agreed on nineteen cases.¹ That there should be such a concentration of metaphors in any small text, let alone one written
CHAPTER THREE The Drive for Reference from:
Michel Tournier and the Metaphor of Fiction
Abstract: In the 1970s two well-known French philosophers clashed swords. Their
querelleconcerned the seemingly arcane issue of metaphoric reference. As we have seen, Paul Ricoeur argues convincingly inLa Métaphore vivethat metaphor is a cognitive tool, that it helps in certain circumstances to articulate our experience of the world. Ricoeur’s analysis is anchored to the established phenomenological precepts of Kant and Husserl, for in order that metaphor may refer, its transgressive character must ultimately be tamed by the master discourse of philosophy. However, according to Jacques Derrida’s deconstructive practice, the philosopher’s discourse is itself shot through with metaphor. It
Foreword from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Wiegandt Klaus
Abstract: The foundation’s future activities will also focus on
The Cultural Values of Europe: from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Joas Hans
Abstract: In Joseph Roth’s novel
Die Flucht ohne Ende (Flight without End), the main character Franz Tunda ends up in Berlin in the 1920s, in the aftermath of the unspeakable turmoil of the First World War and the Russian Revolution. Here, he gains entry into the high society of the leading lights from the fields of industry and diplomacy. As it has a direct bearing on our topic, let us eavesdrop on a conversation that takes place during one of their get-togethers:
1 The Axial Age in World History from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Eisenstadt Shmuel N.
Abstract: I shall first analyse some of the common characteristics of these civilizations and then proceed to analyse some of the major differences between them – indicating how both these common characteristics, as well as the differences, have greatly influenced, to a high degree, indeed, shaped, many of the common characteristics of modernity.
2 The Judeo-Christian Tradition from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Huber Wolfgang
Abstract: Europe is not a ‘Christian club’, countered Turkish Prime Minister Recep Tayyip Erdogan, when Angela Merkel, chair of the German CDU at the time, brought Europe’s Christian character into play as one of the objections to Turkish membership of the European Union. The Turkish politician’s disparaging reference to a ‘Christian club’ was certainly somewhat unfortunate; and the chair of the former Central Council of Muslims in Germany, Nadeem Elyas, was also rather careless when he adopted the same term. But it is true that it is impossible to account for the cultural character of Europe, during any era of its
4 How Europe Became Diverse: from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Borgolte Michael
Abstract: The editors of this volume have commissioned contributions extending from the axial age in the sixth century b c to the present day. This is the first to mention Europe by name in its title.¹ This volume has been conceived in such a way that the question of how Europe became diverse is to be answered by a medieval historian. It is in fact possible to take the view that Europe, as the historical entity familiar to us, first emerged in the Middle Ages; on this view, despite the fundamental achievements of Greco-Roman Antiquity and the ongoing impact of the
7 Rationality – A Specifically European Characteristic? from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Schluchter Wolfgang
Abstract: The title of my discussion comes with a question mark. I suspect that the conference organizers chose it deliberately. Is not rationality, understood at a first approximation as the ability to think in a reasoned and consistent fashion (theoretical rationality) and to act in accordance with certain rules in a reasoned and consistent fashion (practical rationality) what we ascribe to the human being qua human being? Is not the human being the
animal rationale, the creature that reasons, as, for example, Immanuel Kant thought? Further, have not processes of rationalization occurred in a number of civilizations, above all in those
8 The Affirmation of Ordinary Life from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Reinhard Wolfgang
Abstract: When I consider all the unsolicited emails I receive every day, it seems to me that there are two main values for our contemporaries, money and sex, both quite everyday things. Now the world does not, of course, consist solely of spam, but on a somewhat higher level, in the case of professional and economic success measured in monetary terms, and in the case of love, we are in fact dealing with core values of Western culture and society. But they are so normal and everyday that they are scarcely perceived as values that function as guides to action.
10 The Status of the Enlightenment in German History from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Koselleck Reinhart
Abstract: Allow me to add a second dictum now quoted just as readily to characterize the self-determination of the
12 Value Change in Europe from the Perspective of Empirical Social Research from:
The Cultural Values of Europe
Author(s) Thome Helmut
Abstract: When studying values empirically, social researchers apply a methodological perspective which differs substantially from that characteristic of philosophers, social anthropologists, or historians of ideas. In empirical research, values are treated as something ‘measurable’, measurable, above all, with the instrument of systematic surveys. This is a persistent source of irritation, and not just among non-sociologists; I shall therefore deal briefly with this methodology by way of introduction. The first thing to bear in mind is that we constantly produce rough-and-ready ‘measurements’ of values in everyday conversation. Referring to a colleague, for example, we say that he values his work more than
Book Title: Black Intersectionalities-A Critique for the 21st Century
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Rocchi Jean-Paul
Abstract: Black Intersectionalities: A Critique for the 21st Century explores the complex interrelationships between race, gender, and sex as these are conceptualised within contemporary thought. Markers of identity are too often isolated and presented as definitive, then examined and theorised, a process that further naturalises their absoluteness; thus socially generated constructs become socialising categories that assume coercive power. The resulting set of oppositions isolate and delimit: male or female, black or white, straight or gay. A new kind of intervention is needed, an intervention that recognises the validity of the researcher’s own self-reflexivity. Focusing on the way identity is both constructed and constructive, the collection examines the frameworks and practices that deny transgressive possibilities. It seeks to engage in a consciousness raising exercise that documents the damaging nature of assigned social positions and either/or identity constructions. It seeks to progress beyond the socially prescribed categories of race, gender and sex, recognising the need to combine intellectualization and feeling, rationality and affectivity, abstraction and emotion, consciousness and desire. It seeks to develop new types of transdisciplinary frameworks where subjective and political spaces can be universalized while remaining particular, leaving texts open so that identity remains imagined, plural, and continuously shifting. Such an approach restores the complexity of what it means to be human.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjbrv
1 Introduction: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Rocchi Jean-Paul
Abstract: In the Spring of 2011, the Collegium for African American Research (CAAR) placed the emphasis of its ninth international conference, “Black States of Desire: Dispossession, Circulation, Transformation,” which was held in Paris, on the conditions of social transformation in the black world.¹ It insisted on the intersection of a socioeconomic approach with a multicultural and identity-focused perspective; on the relation between theorizing processes and social transformation, between intellectual activity and political action; and on the cross-cutting relations between different communities with specific emancipatory agendas. The call for papers further explained that
6 Benjamin Franklin’s Ethnic Drag – Notes on Abolition, Satire, and Affect from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Junker Carsten
Abstract: In the English-speaking transatlantic sphere, all legal involvement in the slave trade was officially abandoned between 1807 (Great Britain) and 1808 (the United States);
slaverywould eventually be abolished in the British Caribbean in 1833–34 and in the United States in 1865. The struggle to ban the trade in people of African origin and, by extension, their “thingification” (Césaire, 1950) was fought by many – by enslaved blacks and by white abolitionists – and it was fought in many different forms. Forms of resistance on the part of the enslaved ranged from survival tactics of fugitive slaves organizing in so-called maroon
7 “Weh eye nuh see heart nuh leap”: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Brown Jarrett H.
Abstract: Caribbean and Harlem Renaissance writer Claude McKay locates his third novel,
Banana Bottom(1933), in his native home, Jamaica. Set between the country town of Jubilee and the rural village of the same name,Banana Bottomexamines turn of the century Jamaican cultural and social value systems through its female protagonist Bita Plant and can be read as an autobiographical novel in which the protagonist Bita Plant is really McKay in drag. Where in life McKay could not return in actuality, he takes a literary journey through the body of his protagonist to repair his relationship with his father and
8 The Souls of Black Gay Folk: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Nero Charles
Abstract: This chapter explores the influence and impact of the Black Arts Movement on the Black Gay Generation of 1986. The year 1986 refers to the publication of Joseph Beam’s pioneering
In the Life: A Black Gay Anthology, the first collective expression of African American gay identity. That anthology was followed five years later by a sequel,Brother to Brother: New Writings by Black Gay Men, co-edited by Beam and Essex Hemphill. Together the two anthologies defined a generation of black gay writing. Some of the notable writers and culture workers in the two anthologies, in addition to Beam and Hemphill,
10 Cultures of Melancholia: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Sarnelli Laura
Abstract: The theoretical concept of melancholia has recently received heightened critical attention in the field of race and postcolonial studies. As an emotional reaction to the denial of the loss of a loved object, be it a person, a place, or an ideal, melancholia gives shape to a “constellation of affect” or a “structure of feeling” encompassing the individual and the collective, the psychic and the social (Eng and Kazanjian, 2003: 3). As such, it has emerged as a crucial touchstone for subjective as well as political formations. In particular, melancholia has been deployed to unravel the complex mechanisms of national
11 Richard Wright’s Poetics of Black Being: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Fisher Rebecka Rutledge
Abstract: In this chapter, I examine how Richard Wright, in
The Man Who Lived Underground(1944), puts into practice what Paul Ricoeur describes as metaphor’s knowledge of its relation to being.¹ The poetics I describe are evident not in this novella alone; they appear in many familiar works of African American literature throughout the modern period.² While this chapter cannot, of course, lay claim to a comprehensive study that presents an exhaustive overview of all the texts that constitute this literary tradition; my hope is that my analysis will suggest a theory of metaphor alive in Wright’s work, a theory that
14 The Challenge of Black Feminist Desire: from:
Black Intersectionalities
Author(s) Broeck Sabine
Abstract: For scholars and activists of the
CHAPTER THREE Deviations from the Known Route: from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: Given his desire to know the street map with his feet, it is unsurprising that the act of walking should play such a prominent role in Carson’s writing. Indeed, his is a distinctively peripatetic aesthetic. Time and again walking serves not only as a means of registering urban experience, the medium through which all manner of encounters, associations, and sidelong observations are made; it also functions as a figure for the meandering, digressive nature of Carson’s narratives, in which ‘one thing leads to another’ (
FFA, 152) much as the pedestrian wends her way through the divagating and interconnecting streets of
CHAPTER FOUR Revised Versions: from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: The importance and complexity of memory in Carson’s aesthetic is apparent when, as in ‘Ambition’, time is conceived as a road that rarely runs straight, its course marked by manifold obstructions and convolutions. After all, the action of taking one step forward, two steps back can be understood in temporal as well as spatial terms, and in Carson’s writing the past typically manifests itself as ‘a trail of moments/Dislocated, then located’ (
IFN, 58) that precludes a commanding overview. This much is clear in the opening lines of ‘Ambition’, where the narrator and his father have climbed Black Mountain in order
CHAPTER FIVE Spatial Stories: from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: At the end of Volume VI of
The Life and Opinions of Tristram Shandy, GentlemanLaurence Sterne’s eponymous author-narrator pauses to review his progress so far, presenting the reader with a series of visual diagrams representing the course taken by his narrative in the preceding volumes. In each of these a series of turns and detours, loops and spirals indicate the various digressions, whimsical flourishes, and redundant elaborations he has made along his meandering and pointedly non-linear way from beginning to middle to end. Moreover, in a characteristically Sternean irony, it is during this digression upon his tendency to digress
CHAPTER SIX Babel-babble: from:
Ciaran Carson
Abstract: Translation is a longstanding and recurrent component of Ciaran Carson’s work, not only as practice, process, and artefact – as his recent book-length versions of Dante’s
Inferno, Brian Merriman’sThe Midnight Court, and the Old Irish epic,The Táin, attest – but also as a theme or trope that relates to the multifarious effects of language itself. In this regard ‘translation’ concerns itself with the ways in which transactions between words, idioms, discourses, and languages reveal the difference that is internal to all language. Or, as Walter Benjamin expresses it, ‘all translation is only a somewhat provisional way of coming to terms
Book Title: American Creoles-The Francophone Caribbean and the American South
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Britton Celia
Abstract: The Francophone Caribbean and the American South are sites born of the plantation, the common matrix for the diverse nations and territories of the circum-Caribbean. This book takes as its premise that the basic configuration of the plantation, in terms of its physical layout and the social relations it created, was largely the same in the Caribbean and the American South. Essays written by leading authorities in the field examine the cultural, social, and historical affinities between the Francophone Caribbean and the American South, including Louisiana, which among the Southern states has had a quite particular attachment to France and the Francophone world. The essays focus on issues of history, language, politics and culture in various forms, notably literature, music and theatre. Considering figures as diverse as Barack Obama, Frantz Fanon, Miles Davis, James Brown, Edouard Glissant, William Faulkner, Maryse Condé and Lafcadio Hearn, the essays explore in innovative ways the notions of creole culture and creolization, terms rooted in and indicative of contact between European and African people and cultures in the Americas, and which are promoted here as some of the most productive ways for conceiving of the circum-Caribbean as a cultural and historical entity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjd80
Auguste Lussan’s La Famille créole: from:
American Creoles
Author(s) Leservot Typhaine
Abstract: The 1791 slave uprising in Saint-Domingue, followed by the revolution and Haiti’s independence in 1804, had a profound impact on Louisiana. Soon after the uprising began, hundreds of refugees from the island trickled into New Orleans. Around 1803, thousands more arrived. Six years later, in a few months between 1809 and 1810, 10,000 of them poured into the region when they were no longer welcome in Cuba, where they had first settled after fleeing Saint-Domingue. The sheer number of refugees doubled the population of New Orleans, which reached 25,000 by 1810, turning it into the seventh largest city in the
Creolizing Barack Obama from:
American Creoles
Author(s) Loichot Valérie
Abstract: While the French, during Barack Obama’s presidential campaign, overwhelmingly responded in a survey that they would be willing to elect a black president, the French language paradoxically does not have a proper epithet to name the American president.² On 4 June 2008,
Figarojournalist Pierre Rousselin described the then winner of the Democratic nomination as ‘a 46-year-oldmétis’. Métis, a word embedded in the French history of slavery and colonialism, and today synonymous with either denigration or praise of racial and cultural mixing, has acted as Obama’s default epithet in the French mainstream media. Through a reflection on the naming
The Sorcerer and the Quimboiseur: from:
American Creoles
Author(s) Tamby Jean-Luc
Abstract: Édouard Glissant’s writing is deeply rooted in a strategy that challenges a hegemonic form of language use,¹ as described in detail by Celia Britton, with particular reference to his essays and novels (Britton, 1999). Miles Davis’s music, too, can be interpreted as a counter-discourse. The literature of the Caribbean and jazz music in the United States belong in fact to areas of cultural activity which have comparable histories despite their dissimilarities. A comparative approach to Glissant’s writing and the trumpet player’s improvisations can therefore allow us to reflect on the connections between strategies of resistance and, on the other hand,
Book Title: Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Murphy David
Abstract: In the late 1990’s, Postcolonial Studies risked imploding as a credible area of academic enquiry. Repeated anthologization and an overemphasis on the English-language literatures led to sustained critiques of the field and to an active search for alternative approaches to the globalized and transnational formations of the post-colonial world. In the early twenty-first century, however, postcolonial began to reveal a new openness to its comparative dimensions. French-language contributors to postcolonial debate (such as Edouard Glissant and Abdelkebir Khatibi) have recently risen to greater prominence in the English-speaking world, and there have also appeared an increasing number of important critical and theoretical texts on postcolonial issues, written by scholars working principally on French-language material. It is to such a context that this book responds. Acknowledging these shifts, this volume provides an essential tool for students and scholars outside French departments seeking a way into the study of Francophone colonial postcolonial debates. At the same time, it supplies scholars in French with a comprehensive overview of essential ideas and key intellectuals in this area.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjgn6
CHAPTER 2 Maryse Condé: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Leservot Typhaine
Abstract: How does one introduce Maryse Condé to the uninitiated reader? Condé’s centrality to Francophone studies and her popularity outside academic circles make this question more than merely rhetorical. Indeed, her fame has spread beyond the academic circle of scholars and students in Francophone studies – far beyond, in fact. English, German, Dutch, Italian, Japanese, Portuguese and Spanish translations of her work testify to her growing global audience. Her oeuvre has earned her a number of accolades that reflect her widespread appeal: the French government named her Commandeur de l’Ordre des Arts et des Lettres in 2001 and Chevalier de la
CHAPTER 8 Translating Plurality: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Rice Alison
Abstract: Born in El Jadida, Morocco in 1938, Abdelkébir Khatibi is the author of a diverse and complex oeuvre that creatively engages with the thought of European philosophers to address the specific challenges facing postcolonial subjects from the French-speaking world. After receiving a French education in his native country while it was still a protectorate of France,¹ Khatibi pursued university studies in sociology at the Sorbonne in Paris. When questioned about this period, the writer affirmed that the years he spent in the French capital, from 1958 to 1964, were characterized by ‘great intellectual and political effervescence’ (1999: 74). Unlike other
CHAPTER 9 Albert Memmi: from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Crowley Patrick
Abstract: Since the publication of his first novel,
The Pillar of Salt(1953), Albert Memmi has offered textual portraits that bring the discomforting perspective of hisvécu[lived experience] to bear upon discourses, practices and legacies of domination. In particular, and not surprisingly, Memmi’s name often appears alongside those of critics of colonization such as Aimé Césaire, Frantz Fanon and Jean-Paul Sartre (for discussion of these writers, see Chapters 1, 5 and 11 of this volume). Jean-Marc Moura provides a typical example of this when he writes that the work of Memmi, Césaire and Fanon constitute ‘les essais de combat’ [the
CHAPTER 10 V. Y. Mudimbe’s ‘long nineteenth century’ from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Fraiture Pierre-Philippe
Abstract: The concept of cultural conversion, understood in terms of its multifaceted intellectual significance but also in its concrete manifestations, lies at the heart of Valentin Yves (or Vumbi Yoka) Mudimbe’s oeuvre. Whether as a novelist, a poet, or an essayist (see Coulon, 2003), Mudimbe has dedicated a major part of his creative energy to tracing the emergence of Western modernity in sub-Saharan Africa and to the factors, epistemological and otherwise, responsible for the gradual transformation of the Congo where he was born on 8 December 1941 (in Jadotville, which became Likasi after independence). His critical reflection, conducted in French and
CHAPTER 13 Postcolonial Anthropology in the French-speaking World from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Richards David
Abstract: It is a foolish commentator indeed who would attempt to claim a precise moment in history when anthropology in the French-speaking world
becamepostcolonial – that point in time when predominantly French anthropological thought turned on its own history of involvement in the imperial enterprise and began to challenge anthropological theories and practices grounded in the discourses and assumptions of colonialism. That anthropology was one of the handmaidens of colonialism, a science of empire, is indisputable and well documented. For many, the postcolonial turn has yet to occur and anthropology is still irredeemably and fatally tainted by its colonial origins.
CHAPTER 21 Diversity and Difference in Postcolonial France from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Stovall Tyler
Abstract: Questions of immigration, diversity and race have dominated the social, cultural and political life of France since the late twentieth century. Even before the widespread uprisings in the
banlieues(France’s deprived suburbs) in the autumn of 2005, the question of how the French might conceive of themselves as a nation that could (or could not) embrace peoples of different origins and traditions fuelled seemingly endless debates among intellectuals, politicians and people of all walks of life. The riots themselves focused attention as never before upon the fact that large numbers of French citizens not only resented police harassment and lack
CHAPTER 22 Colonialism, Postcolonialism and the Cultures of Commemoration from:
Postcolonial Thought in the French Speaking World
Author(s) Forsdick Charles
Abstract: The Bicentenary of the French Revolution in 1989 heralded the series of commemorations by which late twentieth-century France now appears to have been increasingly characterized. In the 1990s, literature, cinema and intellectual debate all began to reflect an increasing focus on memory, a tendency also apparent in popular culture and public life. The historian Pierre Nora, inaugurating in 1984
Les Lieux de mémoire, a monumental collection of essays on key ‘sites’ of the French historical experience understood as having had an impact on national self-identity, presented the lack of shared post-war national memory as a rationale for alternative manifestations of
Introduction from:
Sympathetic Ink
Abstract: In its terrible state o’chassis, does Northern Ireland’s history interweave with or overwhelm the poetic imagination? When it comes to a ‘chronic sovereignty neurosis’² the cultural spin doctors are always ready with their diagnoses, but what about the creative writers? The dilemma involves not only the writer’s perception of how
poiesisintersects with politics, but also his or her relation to tradition(s), literary or otherwise: does he or she embrace the community with all its intimate biases or become a solitary figure, abstracted, seeking objectivity? InTransitions, Richard Kearney uncovers an apparent transitional crisis at the core of modern Irish
Book Title: The Poetry of Saying-British Poetry and its Discontents, 1950-2000
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): SHEPPARD ROBERT
Abstract: In The Poetry of Saying Robert Sheppard explores an array of ‘experimental’ writers and styles of writing many of which have never secured a large audience in Britain, but which are often fascinatingly innovative. As a published poet in this tradition, Sheppard provides a detailed and thought provoking account of the development of the British poetry movement from the 1950s. As well as analysing the work of individual poets such as Roy Fisher, Lee Harwood and Tom Raworth The Poetry of Saying also examines the influence of the Poetry Society and poetry magazines on the evolution of British poetry throughout this period. The overriding virtue of the poetry of this period is its diversity, a fact that Sheppard has not ignored. As well as providing a fascinating into the work of these poets, The Poetry of Saying offers an ‘insider’s’ commentary on the social, political and historical background during this exciting period in British poetry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjh2f
2 The British Poetry Revival 1960–1978 from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: As various reviewers have pointed out, the 1960s and 1970s actually witnessed an explosion of poetic activity, which was in itself a reaction against the full commonsense politeness of the ‘Movement’ poets of the 1950s. After a period dominated by such figures as Philip
5 The Persistence of the Movement Orthodoxy in the 1980s and 1990s from:
The Poetry of Saying
Abstract: The anthology which claimed to succeed Alvarez’s
The New PoetrywasThe Penguin Book of Contemporary British Poetryof 1982, edited by the criticpoets Blake Morrison and Andrew Motion. Despite the bland inclusiveness of the title, it admits to being self-consciously ‘didactic’, and claims to exemplify the work and literary taste of a particular ‘poetic generation’.¹ Older writers, and those included in Alvarez’s collection, have been excluded. Its introduction several times draws comparisons withThe New Poetry, which is characterized as ‘the last serious anthology of British poetry’ (CBP, p. 11). Taking over Alvarez’s notion, but not his metaphor, of
Book Title: Translating Life-Studies in Transpositional Aesthetics
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): STEAD ALISTAIR
Abstract: This volume brings together eighteen substantial essays by distinguished scholars, critics and translators, and two interviews with eminent figures of British theatre, to explore the idea and practice of translation. The individual, but conceptually related, contributions examine topics from the Renaissance to the present in the context of apt exploration of the translation process, invoking both restricted and extended senses of translation. The endeavour is to study in detail the theory, workings and implications of what might be called the art of creative transposition, effective at the level of interlingual transcoding, dynamic rewriting, theatrical and cinematic adaptation, intersemiotic or intermedial translation, and cultural exchange. Many of the essays focus on aspects of intertextuality, the dialogue with text, past and present, as they bear on the issue of translation, attending to the historical, political or cultural dimensions of the practice, whether it illuminates a gendered reading of a text or a staging of cultural difference. The historic and generic range of the discussions is wide, encompassing the Elizabethan epyllion, Sensibility fiction, Victorian poetry and prose, modern and postmodern novels, but the book is dominated by dramatic or performance-related applications, with major representation of fresh investigations into Shakespeare (from A Midsummer Night’s Dream to The Tempest) and foregrounding of acts of self-translation on stage, in the dramatic monologue and in fiction. Contributions from theatre practitioners such as Sir Peter Hall, John Barton and Peter Lichtenfels underscore the immense practical importance of the translator on the stage and the business of both acting and directing as a species of translation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjj6t
Introduction from:
Translating Life
Author(s) STEAD ALISTAIR
Abstract: This volume, comprising many individual but conceptually interrelated studies, sets out to multiply perspectives on the concept of translation, making it intellectually generative, an invaluable prompter to reinterpretation of texts and fresh theoretical reflections on pertinent critical issues. Mindful that the ideally singular light radiating from translation as conceived by the translators of the King James Bible might actually be refracted through manifold interpretations, our twenty-two collaborators read and reread through what we would call the prism of translation, shedding on the concept and the texts, to bend one of Philip Larkin’s luminous epithets, a ‘many-angled light’.
Elizabethan Translation: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) BATE JONATHAN
Abstract: The Elizabethans seem to have had a peculiar interest in hybrids, in the crossing of boundaries and the mixture of opposites. Shakespearean comedy celebrates the quasi-hermaphroditic boy actor playing the part of a girl who then dresses as a boy (Rosalind, Viola). The first published version of
The Faerie Queeneends with the coupling of Amoret and her beloved Sir Scudamour: fused together in ‘long embracement’, they are ‘growne together quite’, so that
From Stage to Page: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) LICHTENFELS PETER
Abstract: The question that we would like to open up in this essay is how can we talk about ‘character’. Working together on an edition of
Romeo and Juliet, one of us being a theatre director and the other a literary critic, we have found that an area where vocabularies clash most often is that of attributing motivation to the characters’ roles. This emerges most clearly in the translation of these roles from the page to the stage but attribution of motives can be informed by a reversed translation from stage practice to reading strategy. Such attribution immediately calls into play
(Post) colonial Translations in V. S. Naipaul’s The Enigma of Arrival from:
Translating Life
Author(s) CHEW SHIRLEY
Abstract: Joseph Conrad was the first modern writer V. S. Naipaul encountered at the age of ten; and Conrad, seaman turned author, was also someone who ‘had been everywhere before me’ and who ‘sixty to seventy years ago meditated on my world’ (
CD, p. 210). Indeed, Conrad’s vision of this world, as some critics have remarked,² is one which Naipaul seems bound to repeat in his own work: ‘half-made societies ... where there was no goal, and where always “something inherent in the necessities of successful action ... carried with it the moral degradation of the idea”’ (CD, p. 208). This
William Morris and Translations of Iceland from:
Translating Life
Author(s) WAWN ANDREW
Abstract: On 7 September 1871, a middle-aged Englishman stood on the railway station in Edinburgh. He was short, fat, red-faced, bull-necked, bush-bearded and ‘quite bewildered’.¹ He had been away from Britain for the whole summer; everything now looked very strange and he hardly knew where to buy a ticket for. He had been to Iceland and enjoyed it. The last words of his journal account of that visit leave us in no doubt about this: ‘Iceland is a marvellous, beautiful and solemn place ... where I had been in fact very happy.’ He was still happy enough when he arrived home
Aestheticism in Translation: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) SALMON RICHARD
Abstract: Schiller’s celebrated defence of the redemptive social value of art as autonomous aesthetic illusion (
Täuschung, translated as ‘fiction’ by Carlyle)¹ offers a suggestive proleptic commentary on the close relationship between late nineteenth-century aestheticism and a certain logic of translatability. Whilst this defence alludes to a familiar mimetic conception of the relationship between art and life—between the ‘copy’ and its ‘original’—it also enacts a striking defamiliarization of this paradigm by claiming for aesthetic illusion a truth which is lacking from its ostensibly reflected source. Art, Schiller would seem to say, offers a truth which is lacking from truth; only
Helena Faucit: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) MARSHALL GAIL
Abstract: Any artistic production inevitably involves an act of translation, a transference of a form, commodity, or idea across a boundary, be that boundary one of time, space, language, or cultural medium. Shakespeare and his works are among the most durable and flexible of translated media, and seem unlikely to be easily exhausted. Particularly interesting are the ways in which ‘Shakespeare’ operates both as an enabling medium and as an object who is himself translated. Within the economy of translation, the facilitating medium is a common point of reference, a shared experience which first makes conceivable the possibility and desirability of
Translation in the Theatre II: from:
Translating Life
Author(s) Batty Mark
Abstract: Mark Batty You’ve done a great deal of work in the theatre that has involved intricate reworking of texts. You have worked in collaboration with Inga-Stina Ewbank on a number of Ibsen’s plays, for example. How do you see the work you have done on adapting and translating texts in relation to your primary role as a director? Are these activities extensions of that role or separate interests?
Book Title: Social Theory after the Holocaust- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): TURNER CHARLES
Abstract: This collection of essays explores the character and quality of the Holocaust’s impact and the abiding legacy it has left for social theory. The premise which informs the contributions is that, ten years after its publication, Zygmunt Bauman’s claim that social theory has either failed to address the Holocaust or protected itself from its implications remains true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjjs1
CHAPTER 3 Whither the Broken Middle? from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) GORMAN ANTHONY
Abstract: Emil Fackenheim cites with approval Elie Wiesel’s statement that the ‘Holocaust destroyed not only human beings but also the idea of humanity’.¹ The evaluation of this claim, which raises the question of the very possibility of ethics after Auschwitz, rests upon a prior assessment of the relation of the Holocaust to modernity. In a nutshell, does the Holocaust represent an appalling ‘hiatus’ in the ongoing progress of modernity, or the disclosure of its essential nihilism? Do we still dwell in the shadow of Auschwitz or is it now possible to ‘actively forget’ and move on? My aim in this paper
CHAPTER 5 ‘After Auschwitz’: from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) BERNSTEIN J.M.
Abstract: The name ‘Auschwitz’ stands for what was without question one of the most traumatic events of the century. Equally, it names an event which emphatically dissolves moral scepticism; we feel morally certain that there evil of an unspeakable kind occurred. Perhaps, then, it is the utter proximity of these two thoughts, the
traumatic insistenceof the event of the Holocaust and our moralcertaintyabout its evil character, that lies behind and is the genealogical origin of recent attempts to identify trauma with ethicality as such. For example, in Emmanuel Levinas’Otherwise than Beingwe read:
CHAPTER 6 Lyotard: from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) SEYMOUR DAVID
Abstract: Beginning with Marx’s
On the Jewish Question² and continuing to the present day, social theory has reflected upon the causes of modern anti-Jewish hostility. However, despite the many varied ways in which social theory has approached the issue of anti-semitism, one theme constantly re-appears. Drawing on the fact that the term ‘anti-semitism’ first gained popular acceptance in 1879,³
CHAPTER 12 Open Behind: from:
Social Theory after the Holocaust
Author(s) TURNER CHARLES
Abstract: ... every culture that has lost myth has lost, by the same token, its natural, healthy creativity. Only a horizon ringed about by myths can unify a culture. The forces of imagination and of Appollonian dream are saved only by myth from indiscriminate rambling. Nor does the commonwealth know any more potent unwritten law than the mythic foundation which guarantees its union with religion and its basis in mythic conceptions. Over against this, let us consider abstract man stripped of myth, abstract education, abstract mores, abstract law, abstract government; the random vagaries of the artistic imagination unchanneled by myth; a
Chapter Four ‘Exotic strangers’: from:
Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: The appendix of Whiffen’s
The North-West Amazons: Notes of Some Months Spent Among Cannibal Tribestabulates the physical characteristics of the principal indigenous communities of the Putumayo in minute detail. Categories include the colour-analysis of hair and of exposed and unexposed parts of the body, depilation, and stature. Some twenty individual measurements of the body are given, with particular attention to the head (including the nose, chin, and ears). Whiffen’s resulting anatomical descriptions range from the scientific (‘prognathism […] very slight’) to the less-scientific (‘plump’, ‘fat’, ‘very plump’).² Although he would be called upon by the Foreign Office to answer
Chapter Seven ‘Fragments of things’: from:
Colombia’s Forgotten Frontier
Abstract: Ayahuasca, caapi, dápa, mihi, kahi, natema, pindéare all vernacular names for a powerful hallucinogen known in the Putumayo asyagé.² Used throughout the Amazon, it is traditionally employed by indigenous people for the purposes of divination, healing, and sorcery.³Yagéis a drink which consists of the vinebanisteriopsis caapicombined with one of a number of psychoactive plants, especiallypsychotria viridis.⁴ In combination, they lead to gastrointestinal purging and intoxication and produce spectacular visions which have been a fundamental part of indigenous Amazonian visual and oral expression for around 8,000 years.⁵ The first detailed account of the drink
Book Title: Commemorating the Irish Famine-Memory and the Monument
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): MARK-FITZGERALD EMILY
Abstract: Commemorating the Irish Famine: Memory and the Monument presents for the first time a visual cultural history of the 1840s Irish Famine, tracing its representation and commemoration from the 19th century up to its 150th anniversary in the 1990s and beyond. As the watershed event of 19th century Ireland, the Famine’s political and social impacts profoundly shaped modern Ireland and the nations of its diaspora. Yet up until the 1990s, the memory of the Famine remained relatively muted and neglected, attracting little public attention. Thus the Famine commemorative boom of the mid-1990s was unprecedented in scale and output, with close to one hundred monuments newly constructed across Ireland, Britain, the United States, Canada and Australia. Drawing on an extensive global survey of recent community and national responses to the Famine’s anniversary, and by outlining why these memories matter and to whom, this book argues how the phenomenon of Famine commemoration may be understood in the context of a growing memorial culture worldwide. It offers an innovative look at a well-known migration history whilst exploring how a now-global ethnic community redefines itself through acts of public memory and representation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjkfn
1 Introduction from:
Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: The events of 1845–52 in Ireland known as the ‘Great Famine’ constituted a cataclysm unequalled in Irish history. With more than a million dead from starvation and disease, and more than a million in exodus from Ireland to Britain, North America and Australia, today Ireland remains one of the only European nations whose population is smaller than during the nineteenth century. Precipitated by the potato blight, the Famine was exacerbated by a colonial administration whose failure to alleviate the crisis proved disastrous: the impact of the Famine devastated Irish culture, language, and social demographics, formed the basis for the massive
2 Visualizing the Famine: from:
Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: If twentieth-century attempts to give visual form to Famine memory are to be understood within a tradition of Famine image-making, the obvious antecedents lie in the visual representations of the Irish Famine from the nineteenth century. How was the Famine visually represented and interpreted in its own time, and what meanings do such images communicate? The evolution of the visual culture and representational history of ‘the Famine’ has yet to be satisfactorily mapped, and the relationship of its nineteenth-century iconography to latter-day visualizations both troubles and intrigues. This central question of how ‘famine’ (conceptually and historically) might be represented in
5 Community Famine Commemoration in Northern Ireland and the Diaspora from:
Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: As with the monuments of the previous chapter, most community commemorations in Northern Ireland and the diaspora represent vernacular counterparts to officially sanctioned and nationally scaled monumental projects, screened through local concerns, histories and places. Though the rallying cry ‘remember the Famine’ unites these memorials, the outcomes of more than three dozen projects in Northern Ireland, Britain, Canada and the United States constructed since 1990 indicate that key questions of what Famine memory actually
isandwhyit should be remembered remain far from consensual.¹ From the outset there were concerns voiced in the Irish media that diasporic, particularly American,
6 Major Famine Memorials from:
Commemorating the Irish Famine
Abstract: Monuments to the Irish Famine can be found in communities across three continents; while the majority remain relatively unseen, unknown affairs, a small proportion has attained widespread recognition and attention. These memorials are the products of sustained, well-funded, and organized commemorative efforts, usually supported by an infrastructure of official and/or national bodies, and present an embodiment of Famine memory explicitly intended for wider viewership. As a consequence, many bear the scars of protracted civic negotiation and politicized appropriation, of artistic vision and compromise, and of struggles between competing versions of Irish history and identity. They are, in every sense, ‘monumental’
Book Title: French Studies in and for the 21st Century- Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): Worton Michael
Abstract: French Studies in and for the 21st Century draws together a range of key scholars to examine the current state of French Studies in the UK, taking account of the variety of factors which have made the discipline what it is. The book looks ahead to the place of French Studies in a world that is increasingly interdisciplinary, and where student demands, new technologies and transnational education are changing the ways in which we learn, teach, research and assess. Required reading for all UK French Studies scholars, the book will also be an essential text for the French Studies community worldwide as it grapples with current demands and plans for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjkzw
Foreword from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Coussins Baroness Jean
Abstract: It is self-evident that the place of languages in schools will have a critical impact on their presence in higher education (HE), but the opposite is also true. University modern language departments should be much more closely attuned to the ways in
3 The exception anglo-saxonne? from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Armstrong Adrian
Abstract: In March 2009, the Ministère des affaires étrangères et européennes held an international seminar in Sèvres, in collaboration with the Centre International d’Études Pédagogiques.¹ It emerged clearly from discussions at the seminar that French provision in UK universities contrasts with that in most other EU countries in three important respects.² First, UK French departments are relatively unusual in delivering a curriculum that includes a high volume and a wide variety of ‘content courses’, as practitioners often term them, alongside core language provision. Second, innovation in the delivery of that curriculum appears to be more widespread in UK universities. Increasing use
4 Why French Studies Matters: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Forsdick Charles
Abstract: Two dominant assumptions underpinning Michael Worton’s 2009 report for the Higher Education Foundation Council for England (HEFCE) on ‘Modern Foreign Languages provision in higher education in England’ are: (i) that the field is characterised by a set of persistent uncertainties regarding its present and future; and (ii) that the anxiogenic effects of this unstable context risk becoming detrimental to the sustainability of this essential area of academic activity and enquiry. Modern languages is often seen as divided between, on the one hand, the nurturing of linguistic proficiency among a broad range of students, and, on the other, the development of
5 Learning from France: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Kelly Michael
Abstract: ‘L’intellectuel est quelqu’un qui se mêle de ce qui ne le regarde pas.’¹ Sartre’s canonical definition of the intellectual suggests a basic question about the public impact of French scholars. To what extent have they intervened in British society, and how far have they stepped outside their areas of expertise to do so? In attempting to answer this question, the following discussion examines how scholars of French have engaged in activities that have shaped different aspects of life in the UK beyond the world of French Studies. Examining the current debate around the question of public impact, it will look
8 French Studies and Discourses of Sexuality from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Wilson Emma
Abstract: The asking of questions about Albertine – has she had lesbian relationships in the past? is she having, or contriving to have, such relationships now? how can truth be distinguished from falsehood in Albertine’s reports on her actions and feelings? – is presented as one of the narrator’s inescapable emotional needs. His mind comes to specialise ever
9 Integrated Learning: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Harrison Nicholas
Abstract: Initially we were to contribute separate chapters to this collection, one on pre-modern French Studies, another on the place of literature in French Studies today. We decided, however, to write this piece together in the belief that the two questions are intimately related, on several levels (at least for UK universities, on which we shall focus). In practice, pre-modern studies in university French programmes are to a significant extent literary studies; and such pressures as exist to move away from pre-modern areas are closely linked to wider pressures to move away from literature of any era. Much of this chapter
15 Popular Culture, the Final Frontier: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Looseley David
Abstract: This chapter is about the place of contemporary popular culture in French Studies.¹ Both ‘
populaire’ and ‘popular’ are of course problematic epithets, but I do not wish to encumber this particular discussion with matters of definition, important as they are at an epistemological level.² I therefore use ‘popular culture’ in its common English sense, referring to contemporary industrialised forms and practices such as pop music, television, commercial cinema, pulp fiction, and so on, which reach a large, sociologically diverse audience. In French, such forms and practices have often been pejoratively referred to asla culture de masse, though this is
18 The Development of War and Culture Studies in the UK: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Kelly Debra
Abstract: France provides a particularly complex and fascinating object of analysis for any investigation into the impact of war on modern and contemporary cultural production and cultural history, having been at war for almost fifty years of the twentieth century. This impact is characterised by radically different experiences and memories of the two world wars, and further complicated by enduring legacies of those wars, and of subsequent, brutal colonial wars. An understanding of the impact that the experiences of these different types of war have made on French cultural, social and political identity is essential for the broader analysis of developments
19 French Studies at the Open University: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Vialleton Elodie
Abstract: At the Open University, French is taught by the largest but least conventional department of languages in the UK. Numbers of language students are now approaching 10,000 a year, which translates into over 3,000 full-time equivalent student (FTEs) numbers. In terms of recruitment, whether actual students or FTEs, the Open University is also the largest French department in the UK. This chapter describes our distinctive and innovative approach to teaching French, and our related research activities. It opens by setting language learning in the context of supported distance education, and concludes by proposing wider inter-university collaboration in the context of
20 Opportunities and Challenges of Technologically Enhanced Programmes: from:
French Studies in and for the 21st Century
Author(s) Borel Dominique
Abstract: Blended learning, a mix of face-to-face and virtual interactions, and online courses have been developed at the Modern Language Centre (MLC) at King’s since 2004. They are a key component of the department’s strategy for fostering autonomous learning both within credit-bearing language courses, and for students enrolled on non degree-language programmes, while adhering to Quality Assurance Agency (QAA) criteria and promoting academic excellence. Incorporating an e-learning dimension into existing face-to-face programmes, and designing specific online material and courses has been a deliberate policy choice, both in support of the college’s own strategic plan, and in the desire to enhance the
4 Escape and its Discontents from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Edna O’Brien is regarded today as one of Ireland’s most eminent writers. Declan Kiberd, for instance, has referred to her prose style as one of ‘surpassing beauty and exactitude’.¹ Such accolades, however, are a relatively recent phenomenon. It is only in the last ten to fifteen years that substantial critical attention has been paid to her work, largely due to the endeavours of feminist scholars.² Most criticism of O’Brien’s work has been from the perspective of gender and sexuality, something which is not surprising given the subject-matter of her early work.³ For critics who read her through psychoanalytical theory, it
7 Gendered Entanglements from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: Margaret Mulvihill is one of the few Irish women writers to have written consistently about the experiences of the post-war Irish in Britain. Her three novels are all period pieces set in London in the 1980s and early 1990s and her characterizations of young Irish migrants from this time mirror some of the satirical observations in earlier work by Anthony Cronin and Donall Mac Amhlaigh. However, for Mulvihill, who was born in Dublin in 1954 and came to London in her twenties, her perspective on the subject of migration was also imbued with a pronounced feminist sensibility. Apart from being
8 Ex-Pat Pastiche from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: In the economic and political circumstances of 1980s’ Ireland, emigration presented an attractive option – and in some cases the only option – for young people north and south of the border. The two key protagonists of the works I examine in this chapter, the first from Dublin and the second from Belfast, are representative of these changes. Their authors, Joseph O’Connor and Robert McLiam Wilson respectively, were typical of a new generation of Irish authors at the time who brought a renewed youthful iconoclasm to the pages of Irish fiction. Here, familiar locations of Irish London (the building site;
12 Conclusion from:
London Irish Fictions
Abstract: The novels, short stories and auto/biographical texts I have examined in this book are written and peopled by men and women who, as well as making journeys from one country to another, have embarked upon narrative journeys of the mind. Unlike the geographical journey of migration, however, narrative is not a linear process. Instead, it possesses an inherent temporal elasticity that often enables writers to deploy inventive methods and modes of storytelling and characterization. Rather than simply providing a series of period snapshots, these texts reveal how identities are configured over time as well as space. In other words, they
Chapter 3 Burghers, common folk and books from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: As there is no easy road to popular culture and mentality, one must take the byways: speeches of welcome, for example, books in the estates left by the poor, broadsheets, biographies and the odd diary. Or, basically, through eyewitness accounts, mementoes and various literary artefacts.
Epilogue: from:
Back to Modern Reason
Abstract: One reason is that Enlightenment had a very strong presence in the social debate of the Gustavian period, and that many of its ideas also experienced a breakthrough as a practical reform programme, within the spheres of, for example, the administration of justice and legislation on freedom of the press. Another reason is that Hjerpe could not side-step the notions of Enlightenment however much he disliked them: they challenged him as obviously and permanently as
Negativity and Affirmation in Rochester’s Lyric Poetry from:
Reading Rochester
Author(s) DENTITH SIMON
Abstract: In the following essay I seek to provide some context for the particular twists and inversions that characterize Rochester’s lyric poetry. The context I suggest is not biographical, but social and therefore, ultimately, historical; that is, I seek to locate the various affirmations and debunkings that characterize these poems in the wider, class-marked discursive economy of the Restoration. But I attempt this act of location by attention to the tone of voice and shifts of register within the poetry, and to its differing rhetorical appeals. In this, my enterprise has a generally Bakhtinian inspiration; not so much the Bakhtin of
CHAPTER 4 Europe, America, China: from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Davis Michael C.
Abstract: The operative paradigm of the current world order reflected in the UN Charter has proved a troubled one in the post-Cold War era. Differences over principles of sovereignty and military intervention have divided the world, especially the three critical strategic actors addressed in this essay: the United States, China and Europe. I characterize their competing notions of sovereignty as ‘new sovereigntism’, ‘old sovereigntism’ and ‘transnationalism’, respectively.¹ These three views, while clearly colliding with each other, are also in many respects mutually constitutive. In the shrinking world addressed in the Introduction and various chapters of this book, the challenge for international
CHAPTER 9 The Making and the Unmaking of Europe in its Encounter with Islam: from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Göle Nilüfer
Abstract: The point of departure for this chapter is that Islam is an active agent in the alteration of European space, necessitating a new frame for thinking about the relationship between the political and the religious bond, and the ways in which this relationship reinforces or transforms the meaning of a polity such as the French Republic or a religious community such as European Islam. Rethinking the relations between Islam and Europe requires a new conceptual space, a new frame that introduces an intercultural perspective to our readings of European modernity. It requires a sensitivity to the duality of certain key
CHAPTER 14 Global Governance and the Emergence of a ‘World Society’ from:
Varieties of World Making
Author(s) Kratochwil Friedrich
Abstract: That nations dwell in eternal anarchy has been one of the defining assumptions that have shaped the socialization of several generations of students of international relations. While political struggle inside the state takes place in the shadow of the law (conceived as the sovereign’s command), this mediation was thought to be absent in the international arena. However, the demise of the Soviet Union and the increase in the volume, scope and speed of transnational interactions challenged this traditional assumption of anarchy and non-co-operation. Departing from the presumption that war was now a less plausible defining characteristic of the international arena,
Book Title: Spanish Spaces-Landscape, Space and Place in Contemporary Spanish Culture
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Author(s): DAVIES ANN
Abstract: Spanish Spaces is a pioneering study that marries contemporary cultural geography with contemporary Spanish culture. The field of cultural geography has grown both extensively and rapidly, as has the field of cultural analysis and debate on Spanish cultural texts; yet despite a convergence in study between cultural geography (and cultural studies more widely) and cultural texts themselves, this has made little impact to date within the area of contemporary Spanish cultural studies. Yet Spain’s varied terrain, with complex negotiations between rural, urban and coastal (negotiations that have on occasion spilled over into political and violent conflict), and perhaps its very lack of a contemporary landscape tradition familiar to British and German cultural studies, offer the opportunity for fresh insights into questions of landscape, space and place. Drawing on case studies from contemporary Spanish film and literature, Davies explores the themes of memory and forgetting, nationalism and terrorism, crime and detection, gender, tourism and immigration, investigating what it means to think of space and places in specifically Spanish terms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjmtd
CHAPTER TWO Memory: from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: This and the next chapter emphasise one of the key contemporary political and cultural issues in Spain today, that of the recuperation of memories of the Spanish Civil War and its aftermath. Spain’s transition from dictatorship to democracy in the late 70s and early 80s was assumed to be based on a
pacto de olvido(pact of forgetting) that did not call to account those who played a leading role in the previous Franco regime. In particular, those on Franco’s side who committed atrocities against their opponents benefited from an implicit amnesty for their crimes. However, as democracy consolidated itself,
CHAPTER THREE Forgetting: from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: In Gonzalo Torrente Ballester’s novel
Yo no soy yo, evidentemente(I Am Clearly Not Myself), a German character makes the following remark:
CHAPTER FIVE Crime scene: from:
Spanish Spaces
Abstract: This chapter and the next consider the links between the law and national identity, as further examples of the ways in which a notion of nation can trace itself through space and place. Space is one of the ideas listed by Tim Edensor in his discussion of the imbrications of legal frameworks, national identities and everyday life. ‘In a very practical sense, national identity is facilitated by the state’s legislative framework, which delimits and regulates the practices in which people can partake, the spaces in which they are permitted to move, and in many other ways provides a framework for
1 ‘Mission Impossible?’ from:
V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: V. Y. Mudimbe famously referred to Jean-Paul Sartre as ‘an African philosopher’ (
IoA, 83) and a ‘philosophe nègre’ (CB, 69). This unilateral africanisation of the Paris-born phenomenologist compels the reader to pause and think about the many fault lines but also intellectual and imaginary overlaps between Africa and Europe. Where does the former start and where does the latter stop? There are of course objective geographical facts and undeniable ethnic markers to corroborate the idea that Africa and Europe are distinct entities with neatly defined boundaries. Mudimbe has, however, shown that human exchanges have the ability to upset the patient
2 ‘The Invention of Otherness’ from:
V. Y. Mudimbe
Abstract: This chapter will explore Mudimbe’s literary and scholarly activities in the early 1970s in Congo-Zaire and pay particular attention to the hitherto little-studied collection of essays,
Autour de la ‘Nation’(1972),² in which the author reflects on the newly introduced ideology of Zairianisation, a process whereby the former name of the country was changed to Zaire in the wake of the Mobutu-led politics of authenticity.³ In the maturation of the author, and in the process that eventually led to his international recognition and prominence, this period is of the utmost significance. In many ways, the corpus that resulted from this
Introduction from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Over the last thirty years or so, critics and cultural commentators in France and elsewhere have regularly – often with irritation, sometimes with gloomy defeatism and occasionally with a touch of
Schadenfreude– drawn attention to what they believe to be the current ‘crisis’ or even decline of the French novel. These comments are, of course, part of a much more general context in which France has seen its cultural influence in the world undermined by among other factors: competition from the New York and London art markets, the impact of American cinema on French box-office receipts, the popularity of
CHAPTER ONE At death’s door: from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: In recent years the concepts of rite of passage and, in particular, of liminality have figured prominently in medical and medical-related research, providing useful ways of analysing a range of experiences of illness and disability. With the expansion of the medical humanities and the development of ‘narrative medicine’, medical practitioners have looked to other disciplines – literary analysis, philosophy, history and anthropology – for models and metaphors by which to express the experiences of patients, carers and clinicians. The attraction of the notion of rite of passage is obvious, offering a versatile means of expressing a range of phenomena including:
CHAPTER TWO Suicide and saving face in Bon, Mauvignier and Bergounioux from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Among acts by individuals that challenge social and religious norms, suicide ranks among the most transgressive. The part played by religion and, in particular, Christianity in the stigmatisation of the act of self-destruction and the individual who kills or attempts to kill himself/herself has, of course, been rehearsed on countless occasions. As Georges Minois points out in his overview of the history of suicide, the early Christian Church seemed to give out mixed messages on the question: the earthly life is a vale of tears and the Christian should aspire to death so that he/she can be united with God
CHAPTER THREE Commemoration, monument and identity in Bergounioux, Darrieussecq and Rouaud from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: Over the last thirty years, memory and commemoration studies have become one of the fastest developing interdisciplinary fields in the humanities, attracting the attention of, among others, historians, anthropologists, sociologists, literary critics and art-historians. This growth and the dizzying array of publications produced not only reflect what has been variously described as a memory boom, a memory industry, an addiction to memory and, perhaps most graphically, an ‘immersion in memory and its sites [that] may at times have the quality of junk-Proustian
Schwärmerei’ (LaCapra, 1998, 8).¹ They also attest to the dynamic, if at times confusing and confused, dialogues taking
CHAPTER FOUR Retouching the past: from:
Thresholds of Meaning
Abstract: In the first hundred and twenty years following photography’s invention, analysis of the new medium was dominated by discussion of three central issues: its relationship with art and its impact on and implications for painting; the photograph’s status as objective trace and its potential as a means of recording and, indeed, knowing the world; the technological advances that constantly refined the camera’s capacity to replicate reality and democratised access to photographic practice. With the exception of a few sceptical voices, for most commentators, the documentary, indexical status of photography was a given. If Dadaist and Surrealist experimentation – the photomontages,
Book Title: Heidegger and the Thinking of Place-Explorations in the Topology of Being
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Malpas Jeff
Abstract: The idea of place--topos--runs through Martin Heidegger's thinking almost from the very start. It can be seen not only in his attachment to the famous hut in Todtnauberg but in his constant deployment of topological terms and images and in the situated, "placed" character of his thought and of its major themes and motifs. Heidegger's work, argues Jeff Malpas, exemplifies the practice of "philosophical topology." In Heidegger and the Thinking of Place, Malpas examines the topological aspects of Heidegger's thought and offers a broader elaboration of the philosophical significance of place. Doing so, he provides a distinct and productive approach to Heidegger as well as a new reading of other key figures--notably Kant, Aristotle, Gadamer, and Davidson, but also Benjamin, Arendt, and Camus. Malpas, expanding arguments he made in his earlier book Heidegger's Topology (MIT Press, 2007), discusses such topics as the role of place in philosophical thinking, the topological character of the transcendental, the convergence of Heideggerian topology with Davidsonian triangulation, the necessity of mortality in the possibility of human life, the role of materiality in the working of art, the significance of nostalgia, and the nature of philosophy as beginning in wonder. Philosophy, Malpas argues, begins in wonder and begins in place and the experience of place. The place of wonder, of philosophy, of questioning, he writes, is the very topos of thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vjp35
Introduction: from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The idea of place—of
topos—runs through the thinking of Martin Heidegger almost from the very start. Although not always directly thematized—sometimes apparently obscured, displaced even, by other concepts—and expressed through many different terms (Ort, Ortschaft, Stätte, Gegend, Dasein, Lichtung, Ereignis),¹ it is impossible to think with Heidegger unless one attunes oneself to Heidegger’s own attunement to place. This is something not only to be observed in Heidegger’s attachment to the famous hut at Todtnauberg;² it is also found, more significantly, in his constant deployment of topological terms and images, and in the situated, “placed,” character of
1 The Topos of Thinking from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: If Heidegger’s thinking is, as he himself says, a “topology of being” (
Topologie des Seyns)¹—a saying of the place of being—then what is the place that appears here? What is the place of being, and in what place does this thinking take place? These questions direct our attention not only to the role oftoposor place as that which is the object of Heidegger’s thinking, and so as that toward which it is directed, but to the verytoposor place within which Heidegger’s thinking emerges, and the character of that thinking as itself determined bytopos,
2 The Turning to/of Place from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: In T. H. White’s magnificent retelling of Malory,
The Once and Future King, the character of Merlin has one especially peculiar characteristic: he lives his life backward, from future to past.¹ It has always seemed to me that a similarly backward trajectory is particularly suited to the reading of philosophers—at least those whose work is sustained by a significant unity of vision—and especially to the reading of a philosopher such as Heidegger (who himself tells us that in essential history the beginning comes last²). Much of my own reading of Heidegger (and not only Heidegger, but Davidson too)
5 Nihilism, Place, and ʺPositionʺ from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: According to late Heidegger, the contemporary world is suffering from an “oblivion of being”—we live, he says, in a “desolate time,” a time of destitution, a time of the “world’s night.”¹ He sees this desolation and destitution as most accurately diagnosed by two key thinkers, one of whom is the poet Friedrich Hölderlin and the other the philosopher Friedrich Nietzsche. It is Nietzsche who provides Heidegger with much that is foundational to his analysis of the nihilism that he takes to be characteristic of modernity, yet it is Hölderlin who provides him with a way of thinking that is
6 Place, Space, and World from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: The way in which the question of world is implicated with the question of space is already indicated by Heidegger’s very characterization, in
Being and Time, of the essence of human being,Dasein, as being-in-the-world. Here the nature of “being in” is as much at issue as is the nature of “world,” and although Heidegger himself moves fairly quickly to assert, in §12 ofBeing and Time, that “being in” as it figures in relation to world is not a matter of spatialcontainment, but of activeinvolvement,¹ the analysis that follows constantly invokes the spatial at the same time
7 Geography, Biology, and Politics from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: To what extent are those forms of contemporary thinking that adopt a holistic or ecological conception of the relation between human being and the environing world associated, even if only implicitly, with a conservative and reactionary politics? That there is such an association is often claimed in relation to a number of thinkers, but most notably perhaps in relation to Heidegger.¹ Sometimes the claim is extended to encompass broader movements in contemporary thought, with environmental thinking being the most common, but by no means the only target here.² Seldom, however, is much consideration given to the way such a claim
8 Philosophyʹs Nostalgia from:
Heidegger and the Thinking of Place
Abstract: What is wrong with nostalgia? How and why has it come to be the case, as it surely has, that to say of a philosophical position that it is “nostalgic” is already to indicate its inadequacy?¹ In this chapter I want to examine nostalgia both as a mood or disposition in general, and as a mood or disposition that is characteristic of philosophical reflection. Part of this inquiry will involve a rethinking of the mood of nostalgia and what that mood encompasses. Rather than understand the nostalgic as characterized solely by the desire to return to a halcyon past, I
Self-Defense and Identity Formation in the Depiction of Battles in Joshua and Esther from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Kissling Paul J.
Abstract: Although most traditional scholarship, situated as it has been in militaristic societies, describes the battles depicted in Joshua as a “conquest,” in fact the two major phases of that “conquest” are self-defense, first against an attack by a coalition of kings from the south of Canaan against the Gibeonites, who had recently joined Israel, and then defense against an attack on all of Israel by a coalition of kings from the north. The absorption of outsiders preceding an anticipated battle, the hyperbolic language of total destruction, the rules regarding the spoils of war, the extraordinary (divine) interventions, and the self-defensive
Egypt-Watching: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Lipton Diana
Abstract: In
Orientalism,¹ Edward Said set out his influential account of the way that the West views the East, a perspective characterized by fantasies of licentiousness and rampant sexuality, heightened human fecundity and agricultural abundance, dubious moral values, wealthy despotic rulers, and practitioners of the unnatural arts. Later on, inCulture and Imperialism,² Said joined his critics in nuancing some aspects of his work. Most significantly, he broke down the East-West dichotomy that lay at the heart of his earlier manifesto. Orientalism was not after all a matter of geographic direction—the way the West regards the East—but of differentiation,
Reading Back and Forth: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Maier Christl M.
Abstract: The scholarly interests of David Clines are varied and cover a wide range of methods, starting from philological and text-critical analyses, source and redaction-critical studies, literary inquiries, to ideological criticism. His two-volume anthology
On the Way to the Postmodernimpressively demonstrates David’s exegetical and hermeneutical competence.¹ In order to cover that range of approaches, the editors of this Festschrift sought to classify its contributions under six different rubrics. Interestingly, all colleagues whom we asked to write a “historical” piece either had to decline due to their overcommitment to other tasks or in the end decided to deliver an essay that
“What You See Is What You Get”: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Talstra Eep
Abstract: What do biblical scholars mean when they say that the Old Testament speaks of Yhwh as a God of pathos or passion?¹ What does this imply when God is simultaneously considered a character in the plot of a religious classic, that is, the Bible? In the studies of biblical theology by Walter Brueggemann and Jack Miles,² the God of pathos belongs to the writer’s religious dictionary. Brueggemann strongly emphasizes the idiom that the Bible is “speech about God.” In his view this means that “Yahweh lives in, with, and under this speech”; and we, its readers, should feel urged to
Occupy Central: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Chia Philip P.
Abstract: Sixteen years down the road, in the battle for democracy since Hong Kong’s return to China, church leaders in Hong Kong clashed publicly in 2013, arguing “for” and “against” the “Occupy Central (2014)” Movement,¹ a civil disobedience or a civil nonviolent resistance action, first initiated in January 2013 by a law academic at the University of Hong Kong, Benny Tai Yiu-ting,² a professed Christian, who launched the campaign with an intention to paralyze the financial and administration district of Hong Kong, the Central District, in order to force the (central) government (of China) to fulfill its promise to implement “genuine”
Deploying the Literary Detail of a Biblical Text (2 Samuel 13:1–22) in Search of Redemptive Masculinities from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) West Gerald O.
Abstract: Until recently African biblical hermeneutics was characterized as a comparative project.¹ Analysis was done of both the biblical text and the African context, and the two sets of analysis were then “compared,” in a range of different ways.² What has become more evident on closer scrutiny,³ however, is that this “comparison” of text and context is a mediated process, involving a third pole, that of forms of ideological/theological appropriation.⁴
The Invention of Language in the Poetry of Job from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Greenstein Edward L.
Abstract: The book of Job, particularly its poetic core, appears to contain more unique words and linguistic usages than any comparable work from the ancient Near East. The distinctive language of Job has been attributed to a number of literary factors. For one thing, the characters and events are set in a much earlier, legendary period—the time of the patriarchs.¹ Not only does Job enjoy a lifestyle that is reminiscent of the rural, sheep-and-goat-herding Hebrew patriarchs, but the description of Job and his situation in the narrative framework of the book features language and allusions to the stories of Genesis.²
Speaker, Addressee, and Positioning: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Polak Frank H.
Abstract: How does the narrator indicate speaker and addressee in the dialogue? This issue may look like a mere technicality, of no interest for exegesis, history of religion, and literary criticism, but actually it is of highest importance, for it relates to the status of the speaking characters. On the face of it, the matter seems rather trivial: when the participants in the dialogue are unknown to the reader, they are to be mentioned by name and/or title, for the sake of clarity; but when it is clear whose move it is, no explicit indication is necessary. But, as indicated at
Nineteenth-Century British Job Oratorios from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Dell Katharine J.
Abstract: In this paper I am interested in the way Job is treated in the nineteenth-century oratorio tradition in Britain. Sacred oratorio¹ took off in the nineteenth-century and had two primary forms—one of a more meditative nature (e.g., Handel’s
Messiah) and the other of a more dramatic character (e.g., Mendelssohn’sElijah).² Old Testament narratives were particularly suited to the dramatic variety, although the book of Job, unusually, provided both—action from the dramatic events recounted in the prologue and epilogue, and meditation from the dialogue, notably Job’s own speeches and God’s reply. Three oratorios based on Job represent well the
From London to Amsterdam: from:
Interested Readers
Author(s) Rooke Deborah W.
Abstract: G. F. Handel’s oratorios were a development of the later years of his career, being written during the period 1732–1752. Most of the oratorios were “sacred dramas,” that is, operatic versions of Old Testament narratives, and they often had political as well as theological resonances. The oratorios were a chance development, having their origin in a piece written initially by Handel in 1718 or thereabouts for private performance at Cannons, the country seat of James Brydges (later duke of Chandos). The piece in question was
Esther, a short, three-act musical drama, which tells a much-truncated version of the story
Book Title: Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II-The Pontigny Encounters at Mount Holyoke College, 19421944
Publisher: University of Massachusetts Press
Author(s): Remmler Karen
Abstract: Sixty years ago, at the height of World War II, an extraordinary series of gatherings took place at Mount Holyoke College in western Massachusetts. During the summers of 1942–1944, leading Europeanfigures in the arts and sciences met at the college with their American counterparts for urgent conversations about the future of human civilization in a precarious world. Two Sorbonne professors, the distinguished medievalist Gustave Cohen and the existentialist philosopher Jean Wahl, organized these “Pontigny” sessions, named after an abbey in Burgundy where similar symposia had been held in the decades before the war. Among the participants—many of whom were Jewish or had Jewish backgrounds—were the philosophers Hannah Arendt and Rachel Bespaloff, the poets Marianne Moore and Wallace Stevens, the anthropologist Claude LéviStrauss and the linguist Roman Jakobson, and the painters Marc Chagall and Robert Motherwell. In this collection of original essays, Stanley Cavell and Jacques Derrida lead an international group of scholars—including Jed Perl, Mary Ann Caws, Jeffrey Mehlman, and Elisabeth YoungBruehl—in assessing the lasting impact and contemporary significance of Pontignyen Amérique. Rachel Bespaloff, a tragicfigure who wrote a major work on the Iliad, is restored to her rightful place beside Arendt and Simone Weil. Anyone interested in the “intellectual resistance” of Francophone intellectuals and artists, and the inspiring support from such Americanfigures as Stevens and Moore, will want to read this pioneering work of scholarship and historical recreation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vk4c8
The OSS Pays a Visit from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Hewitt Leah D.
Abstract: In rethinking France’s identities through the memory of its interactions with its various “others,” inside and outside of France, I note that the Mount Holyoke celebration calls attention to the interplay between margin and center, of French intellectuals and artists decentered or marginalized by the war striving to make Mount Holyoke, between 1942 and 1944, a new “marginal center,” if you will. I am not sure, however, who is the center and who the margin, the French or the Americans, in this context. I think that while all were discussing emerging trends, new forms of creativity, new forms of art,
Reflections on Wallace Stevens at Mount Holyoke from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Cavell Stanley
Abstract: I counted on the fact that by the time it fell to me to present these remarks, we would have had sketched more of the texture and the details of the event sixty years ago that we are gathered to commemorate than I have learned in the course of my preparation, on and off these past months, for composing them. It went almost without saying in Christopher Benfey’s invitation to me, and in our exchanges about how I might think of my contribution, that I would include reflections on what might have been expected in 1943, from the still moving,
Postscript: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Cavell Stanley
Abstract: I do not doubt that Jeffrey Mehlman, in his elegant and exuberant response to my remarks, has successfully demonstrated “the
Phèdreintertext” in Stevens’s “Figure of the Youth as Virile Poet” text. When I said that I assumed the obvious candidates—Ariadne and Phaedra—for Stevens’s provision to the young poet of a successor to a “mystic muse,” one characterized by the poet as “a kind of sister of the Minotaur,” were ruled out, I did not regard myself as taking the playPhèdreas a whole to be ruled out as bearing upon Stevens’s text. I gladly accept Mehlman’s
Robert Motherwell and the Modern Painter’s World from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Caws Mary Ann
Abstract: Robert Motherwell is my topic here: I knew him, loved him, and discussed at length with him his relation to the painting and poetry of France and of America, to other arts such as music, and, most particularly, his relation to literary Symbolism—especially to the ur-Symbolist Stéphane Mallarmé, whom I have spent so much time translating—and to Surrealism, a far more difficult issue. I had first been in contact with him through running the journal
Dada/Surrealism, for which he was the art adviser, and then, through his asking me to translate a book about him, and subsequent to
The Tiger Leaps: from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Author(s) Mehlman Jeffrey
Abstract: Surely Walter Benjamin, who had been at Pontigny in 1938, would have been at the Mount Holyoke Pontigny colloquia of the war years, and the pathos of those gatherings owes not a little to his absence. Benjamin called one of his protracted meditations preliminary to the Arcades Project “Zentralpark”—largely because he no doubt imagined himself working out the Baudelairean issues those pages deal with while strolling through Central Park in Manhattan. What would the final format of the Arcades Project have been? And might there not have been a Mount Holyoke
Konvolut—a folder of citations and observations assembled
[Part V: Introduction] from:
Artists, Intellectuals, and World War II
Abstract: As many of the contributors to this volume have argued, the face-to-face encounters at Pontigny-en-Amérique engendered fruitful, if subtle, shifts in the poetic, philosophical, and artistic exchanges between American and European culture. The formal and informal conversations that took place then may not have led to immediate or discernible outcomes. Nevertheless, more than sixty years later, their afterlife continues to occupy us. The contributions in this section embody the very essence of conversation as a form of action and of response to injustice and to imagining a world not prone to war and violence.
Book Title: Tours et détours-Le mythe de Babel dans la littérature contemporaine
Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Khordoc Catherine
Abstract: Tours et détoursexamine l'inscription du mythe de Babel dans la littérature contemporaine de langue française. Le mythe s'avère une source d'inspiration pour les auteurs examinés qui évoquent justement des phénomènes sociaux actuels, tels que le multiculturalisme, l'immigration, l'exil, la pluralité des langues, la traduction et l'identité. Les ouvrages étudiés, tous écrits en français mais issus de différents contextes linguistiques et culturels, mettent en lumière de nouvelles interprétations du mythe de Babel. Pendant longtemps le mythe de Babel et la pluralité linguistique et culturelle qui s'ensuivent ont été considérés une malédiction pour l'humanité, mais les romans à l'étude remettent en question cette vision négative. Sans exalter les bienfaits de la multiplicité, ils considèrent comment la pluralité linguistique et culturelle enrichit et façonne la production littéraire ainsi que le monde contemporain.Les auteurs et œuvres étudiés sont• Monique Bosco,Babel-Opéra• Hédi Bouraoui,Ainsi parle la tour CN• Francine Noël,Babel, prise deux ou Nous avons tous découvert l'Amérique• Ernest Pépin,Tambour-Babel• Jorge Semprun,L'Algarabie
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc3j
Introduction from:
Tours et détours
Abstract: Les artistes-peintres hollandais du xvi
esiècle n’étaient pas les seuls à s’inspirer du mythe de Babel. Si cette période constitue un âge d’or babélien dans la sphère des arts visuels, c’est notre époque actuelle qui fait foisonner ce mythe dans le domaine littéraire. Car, mis à part quelques autres périodes dans l’histoire littéraire pendant lesquelles il y a eu un intérêt pour Babel, on ne peut s’empêcher de constater que la littérature contemporaine fait appel au mythe de Babel avec une fréquence notable afin d’évoquer certaines préoccupations actuelles. Cela n’a rien d’étonnant lorsqu’on se rappelle que ce mythe biblique évoque
CHAPITRE II L’Algarabie ou « La tour de Babel » de Jorge Semprún from:
Tours et détours
Abstract: Le mythe de Babel serait-il le symbole par excellence du postmodernisme? Si ce mouvement culturel se caractérise avant tout par l’hétérogénéité, la multiplicité, la remise en question de l’autorité et l’absence de l’unicité et du consensus¹, Babel peut être considéré non seulement comme étant à la source du postmodernisme, mais aussi comme son symbole. Dans un roman incontestablement postmoderne, les liens entre Babel et l’esthétique postmoderne sont mis en scène au moyen de discours sur la problématique de la dualité linguistique, par la construction littéraire d’un Paris fictif et par la structure romanesque. Publié en 1981,
L’Algarabiede Jorge Semprún
CHAPITRE III Reconstruire Babel à Montréal : from:
Tours et détours
Abstract: Si le titre du roman de Jorge Semprún,
L’Algarabie, ne fait allusion à Babel que de manière oblique, c’est le contraire pour le titre du roman de Francine Noël, qui met Babel en vedette. Dans ce texte, Babel ne se limite pas à une référence mythique ornementale : le mythe constitue un réseau de significations sur tous les plans du texte. Il s’agit d’un thème dominant qui est une source de fascination pour la narratrice ; les personnages sont caractérisés en fonction des éléments constitutifs de Babel ; la représentation de l’espace est modelée sur une Babel imaginaire ; la
IV Réflexions sur le bonheur from:
Questions ultimes
Abstract: Comment donner tort à Pascal lorsqu’il écrit : « Tous les hommes recherchent d’être heureux ; cela est sans exception ; quelques différents moyens qu’ils y emploient, ils tendent tous à ce but. (…) C’est le motif de toutes les actions de tous les hommes, jusqu’à ceux qui vont se pendre » (
Pensées, Brunschvicg, 425 ; Lafuma, 148).
Book Title: Médée protéiforme- Publisher: Les Presses de l'Université d'Ottawa
Author(s): Carrière Marie
Abstract: Le mythe de l'infanticide Médée a toujours connu une fortune littéraire et la littérature féminine contemporaine ne fait pas exception. L'analyse comparée de huit textes de femmes de divers horizons tente de cerner les enjeux de cette figure irréductible pour une pensée féministe actuelle sur la maternité, le sujet et l'écriture mythique.En s'interrogeant sur la pertinence particulière de la tragédie d'Euripide aux reprises médéennes, explicites ou sous-entendues, des femmes, cette étude comparée se penche sur des textes du théâtre de Marie Cardinal, de Deborah Porter, de Franca Rame et de Cherríe Moraga, et des romans de Monique Bosco, de Christa Wolf, de Bessora et de Marie-Célie Agnant. À travers ses incarnations transculturelles, le mythe de Médée éclaire les affres de l'exil et de l'exclusion, ainsi que certaines visions du maternel qui préféreraient peut-être rester dans l'ombre de nos présuppositions et de nos règles sociales. Bien qu'il n'y ait pas plus monstrueux ou fou que l'acte infanticide, Médée, elle, n'est pas monstre, pas folle, mais lucide, humaine à part entière, comme la voulait Euripide, alors qu'elle s'en prend à ses enfants, à la culture défectueuse, à l'histoire des hommes. La réécriture au féminin de Médée force aussi une conception du sujet qui ne revêt pas facilement sa cohérence. Mais la poétique même de cette Médée retranscrite au féminin fait preuve de sa flexibilité, son indétermination, son pouvoir de transcender la simple répétition de son mythe, vu ici autrement et différemment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkc8z
Conclusion from:
Médée protéiforme
Abstract: Qu’elle soit d’ordre révisionnel, factieux ou postcolonial, une ouverture littéraire et foncièrement contemporaine sur le
sujetMédée a guidé cet essai. Bien qu’il n’en soit pas le seul motif d’importance, l’infanticide se trouve au cœur des réécritures examinées dans les chapitres précédents. Malgré les spécificités formelles, thématiques et
Chapter 4 British Idealism as a Migrating Tradition from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Sweet William
Abstract: It has long been recognized that the philosophy of late-19
th- and early-20th-century British Idealism had a significant influence in Britain, not only on the philosophical thought of the time, but also on religion, politics and social and public policy.¹ Its impact, however, was felt not only in Britain but throughout much of its empire and even beyond. Recent studies have noted the presence of the work of the British idealists in Canada, Australia and South Africa, and also in the United States, India, Japan and China.² Nevertheless, relatively little has been written concerning precisely how and how far the presence
Chapter 10 Sharing Insights: from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Mason Sheila
Abstract: In the last few decades we have seen increasing turmoil in the world and an increasing concern about the weakening of moral bonds within the Western societies.¹ At the same time we have seen a great outpouring of writings on Buddhism in North America. Buddhist masters have founded centres for the study and practice of meditation, many North American men and women have become practitioners and teachers of Buddhism, some taking vows and becoming monks or nuns, while the Dalai Lama has become a public figure of great renown. Anyone with the inclination can easily find books, websites and courses
Chapter 11 Process Concepts of Text, Practice, and No Self in Buddhism from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Hoffman Frank J.
Abstract: Wittgenstein is said (by the editors of his
Lectures and Conversations)¹ to have noticed that the religious believer may say that a religious belief—for example, belief in the Last Judgment—is well-established. Such beliefs may be held to be so because they regulate one’s life without being the result of a process of deliberation and decision. It is a matter of adopting a certain picture of how things are. By contrast, an ordinary question about a factual matter, such as whether there is a German airplane overhead (uttered in ambiguous circumstances), is one in which there is a clear
Chapter 12 On Being Enabled to Say What Is “Truly Real” from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) McCormick Peter J.
Abstract: Many reflective persons today continue to investigate the deceptive nature of language. In the particular case of philosophy’s perennial struggles with religion, language continues to be at the centre of much critical attention. For without sustained and careful attention to the vagaries of language, taking the critical measure of the sense and significance of the dynamic relations between religious experience and its quite various reflective articulations cannot be satisfactory.²
Chapter 13 The Philosophers of Al Andalus and European Modernity from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Lea David
Abstract: This chapter explores the development of the concept of autonomous reason within the Islamic tradition, with special emphasis on the philosophers of Al Andalus—those of the Iberian peninsula and the region of the Languedoc, following the Omayyad Muslim conquest from the 8
thcentury. The chapter draws attention to important parallels that may show instances of the influence of their thinking during the European Renaissance and the Enlightenment as seen in the philosophical works of Descartes, Rousseau and Kant. After pointing out a number of similarities and possible influences, I also note the fact that Western philosophy after the Renaissance
Chapter 14 Radhakrishnan and the Construction of Philosophical Dialogue across Cultural Traditions from:
Migrating Texts and Traditions
Author(s) Leighton Denys P.
Abstract: Many humanities and social science scholars today are committed to, or at any rate, pay lip service to ideals of interdisciplinarity and methodological cross-fertilization. In light of this fact, it is remarkable that there should be so little dialogue between historians of philosophy (including those who study political and religious philosophy) and intellectual historians, particularly with respect to study of ‘non-Western’ thought systems or world views. A common tendency among intellectual historians today is to reduce history of philosophy to a minor province of philosophical hermeneutics. The increasingly ahistorical philosophical hermeneuticists, in turn, usually prioritize exposition and internal analysis of
1 FAMILY RESEMBLANCE from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) Fraleigh Sondra Horton
Abstract: Anything (material or nonmaterial) can be the object of our awareness, attention, or questioning mind. Whenever we ask “what is this?” we enter into an inquiring frame of mind. When we research something, we formalize this intuitive process to establish a definition for qualitative discourse or quantitative testing. We define the thing we seek to know more about. Then we have a basis for communicating the findings. The results of the research will rest on our basic understanding and definition of the thing we are investigating. The activity of defining underlies all other aspects of research.
2 FROM IDEA TO RESEARCH PROPOSAL: from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: Research is a confusing term; it has so many meanings and applications that it is difficult to understand precisely what we mean when we speak about research in a scholarly sense. We all have done research of one sort or another—looked up the date of the first performance of a favored dance work, sought pedagogical information by asking several experienced teachers about the best way to present material in a choreography class, or consulted
Consumer Reportsto select the best VCR to purchase. All of these activities do indeed involve research, but are they research as scholarship?
6 DANCE IN THE HERMENEUTIC CIRCLE from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) McNamara Joann
Abstract: Talking in the dressing room after a contact improvisation performance, dancers are struck by the diverse
8 THE SENSE OF THE PAST: from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) Berg Shelley C.
Abstract: In her novel,
To the Lighthouse, Virginia Woolf allows her character, Mrs. Ramsey, a flash of unusual insight and illumination; the past is shaped by the present and the present is reshaped by the past. At any given instant, we both live history and live in history. For the dance historian, struggling with questions of historiography, the relationship of past and present is doubly complex. Theories of writing about history become more problematic in light of the ephemeral nature of what theater historian Joseph Roach calls the “transcendental signified”; the act of performance.¹ Because dance history is both enacted and
9 DANCE ETHNOGRAPHY: from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) Frosch Joan D.
Abstract: Historically, the very concept of dance has been a thorny theoretical patch in the practice of dance ethnography. What do we mean when we call a movement behavior “dance”? How do the researcher’s assumptions embedded in “dance” help or hinder ethnographic studies?
UNIFIED FIELD POSTSCRIPT from:
Researching Dance
Author(s) Hanstein Penelope
Abstract: Swing from the rope that hangs from the grid, holding the loop at the end. Since we first began to understand it as more than taps and steps or swinging from ropes, more than glitter and goo, more than skipping or running in the breeze (holding our mothers’ curtains aloft), more than leaping in splits or tangling ourselves around other bodies, more than contact or giving and taking weight, even more than pulsing with drumming or floating with butoh-white shadow bodies, dance has become a field, more than its descriptive parts, yet all of them, still more.
Book Title: Mindscapes-Philosophy, Science, and the Mind
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Machamer Peter K.
Abstract: Leading scholars in the fields of philosophy and the sciences of the mind have contributed to this newest volume in the prestigious Pittsburgh-Konstanz series. Among the problem areas discussed are folk psychology, meanings as conceptual structures, functional and qualitative properties of colors, the role of conscious mental states, representation and mental content, the impact of connectionism on the philosophy of the mind, and supervenience, emergence, and realization. Most of the essays are followed by commentaries that reflect ongoing debates in the philosophy of the mind and often develop a counterpoint to the claims of the essayists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkgzz
Introduction from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Machamer Peter
Abstract: One of the chief characteristics of contemporary philosophy of mind consists in the orientation toward the sciences of the mind. This feature stands in marked contrast to traditional philosophy of mind whose primary allegiance was to philosophy of language. Linguistic analysis was supposed to clarify what could sensibly be meant by the ascription of mental states. The issue was what sort of talk about the mental has a clear meaning and what, by contrast, is to be considered meaningless. This type of philosophical approach to the mind has now gone out of fashion. It was replaced by a science-based approach
1 Folk Psychology and Its Liabilities from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Lycan William G.
Abstract: The first such issue, or rather a pre-issue, is that of what exactly is comprehended under the term of art, “folk psychology.”¹ Remarkably little attention has been given to that question. I shall list a number of distinct but actual characterizations, in ascending order of strength or tendentiousness.
2.1 Philosophy and Folk Psychology from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Haugeland John
Abstract: People, as rational or intelligent animals, are distinctive not only in their understanding of the events and things around them, but also in their understanding of one another—specifically, their understanding of one another as rational or intelligent. This latter understanding, in its general character, is what Paul Churchland once called “folk psychology,” and the name has stuck. The principal aim of Von Eckardt’s paper is to argue that philosophical discussions of folk psychology—including, but certainly not limited to Churchland’s—suffer from being empirically underinformed. In particular, by neglecting a substantial research tradition within what is sometimes called “social
5 Is the Naturalization of Qualitative Experience Possible or Sensible? from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Nida-Rümelin Martine
Abstract: According to some philosophers qualitative experience cannot be naturalized in the following sense: There are facts to be known about experiences that can only be expressed in phenomenal terminology. One candidate is the fact expressed by “the sky appears blue to Peter” or the fact expressed by “the pig feels pain.” Let us call a fact that can only be expressed in phenomenal terminology and that thus cannot be expressed in physical terminology a non-physical fact.² There has been a controversy about whether there are such non-physical facts. I am convinced that there are such non-physical facts, but, unfortunately, any
6 Explaining Voluntary Action: from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Prinz Wolfgang
Abstract: There is a common and widespread belief that the way we perceive the physical world is fundamentally different from the way we are aware of our own mental world. In order to perceive events in the outer world, it is held, the mind has to get into contact with matter. For this purpose it relies on a complex machinery (sense organs, nerves, central processing modules, etc.), and the working of that machinery yields results that may be more or less adequate representations of the events to be represented.
8.1 Fitting the Frame to the Picture: from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) Wilson Bradley E.
Abstract: When choosing a frame for a picture, it is important to consider carefully both the picture that you want to frame and the frame itself. Not just any frame will go with any picture. A wellchosen frame can add to a picture; a poorly-chosen frame can detract from it. The picture that Millikan wants to frame here is an externalist picture of the semantic content of thought, or more simply, an externalist theory of meaning. What does this picture look like?
10 Connectionism, Dynamics, and the Philosophy of Mind from:
Mindscapes
Author(s) van Gelder Tim
Abstract: After connectionism burst into prominence in cognitive science in mid-1980s, one of the most popular questions among philosophers of cognitive science was: what implications does it have for the philosophy of mind? (See, e.g., Horgan and Tienson 1991; Ramsey, Stich, and Rumelhart, 1991). Ten years later, it seems that the verdict is in. If we suppose that the term
connectionismrefers to some reasonably coherent research program standing as an alternative to mainstream computational cognitive science, then connectionism hasnointeresting implications for cognitive science. This is because there is, in fact,no suchthing. There are lots of connectionist
Book Title: The Philosophy of Tim Burton- Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: Director and producer Tim Burton impresses audiences with stunning visuals, sinister fantasy worlds, and characters whose personalities are strange and yet familiar. Drawing inspiration from sources as varied as Lewis Carroll, Salvador Dalí, Washington Irving, and Dr. Seuss, Burton's creations frequently elicit both alarm and wonder. Whether crafting an offbeat animated feature, a box-office hit, a collection of short fiction, or an art exhibition, Burton pushes the envelope, and he has emerged as a powerful force in contemporary popular culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkkxt
Introduction from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Abstract: No contemporary director-producer has as deliciously macabre a signature as Tim Burton. Known for his quirky characters and delightfully sinister settings, Burton displays an undeniable knack for the fantastic. Alluding to sources as varied as Lewis Carroll, Mary Shelley, Washington Irving, Edward Gorey, Salvador Dali, and Dr. Seuss, Burton’s creations fascinate audiences by virtue of their ability to elicit both alarm and wonder. And Burton’s influence extends beyond the screen. After over a decade spent establishing a reputation primarily in the cinematic arts, in 2007 Burton released
The Melancholy Death of Oyster Boy and Other Stories,a collection of short
Catwoman and Subjectivity: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Weldon Ryan
Abstract: Tim Burton’s films always contain a cast of interesting characters. Primarily, his character construction and interaction with the plot revolve around a critique of the normal. Normalcy, by whatever yardstick the viewer measures it, never goes unconsidered in a Tim Burton film. We see this in movies as diverse in setting and storytelling as
Edward Scissorhands(1990) andSleepy Hollow(1999). Often Burton portrays the normal people, the powerful people, and the conventionally beautiful people as possessing deep character flaws, and the entrenched systems of discourse in which they participate as pervasively corrupt. This corruption is a study in inauthenticity
Johnny Depp Is a Big Baby! from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Walling Mark
Abstract: Ed Wood (Johnny Depp) is directing a scene in Tim Burton’s biopic (
Ed Wood,1994) of the man voted the worst film director of all time. The film isBride of the Atom,which was released asBride of the Monster(1955), one of Wood’s more infamous works. As he enters a room, Tor Johnson (George “The Animal” Steele), a bald-headed, hairy-shouldered professional wrestler turned actor, receives instructions from Wood to act upset. Tor grasps his rock of a head with massive hands. Wood corrects, “No, no, you’re not that upset. You want to keep moving. You’ve got to get
Mars Attacks!: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Cantor Paul A.
Abstract: Tim Burton’s wacky sci-fi film
Mars Attacks!(1996) is not considered one of the highpoints of his career. Although the movie took in over $100 million worldwide in its initial release, it was judged a box-office failure, given the fact that it was budgeted for roughly the same amount and its backers were hoping for another blockbuster from the director ofBatman(1989). Moreover, critics generally did not reviewMars Attacks!favorably. Speaking for many of his colleagues, Kenneth Turan of theLos Angeles Timeswrote, “Mars Attacks!is not as much fun as it should be. Few of its
“Pinioned by a Chain of Reasoning”? from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Benton Steve
Abstract: In his classic study
Love and Death in the American Novel(1960), literary critic Leslie Fiedler famously describes Washington Irving’s “Rip Van Winkle” (1819) as the foundational text of American literature because the civilization-shunning character it celebrates is the “typical male protagonist of our fiction.” That protagonist, Fiedler claims, is typically “a man on the run, harried into the forest and out to sea, down the river or into combat—anywhere to avoid ‘civilization.’ ”¹ As Fiedler points out, civilization-scorners like Irving’s Rip have long evoked sympathy in American readers because we are suspicious of intellectuals and other fancy-pants civilizers.
A Symphony of Horror: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) Jenkins Jennifer L.
Abstract: Sweeney Todd(2007) marks a significant deviation for Tim Burton in terms of his prior work and practice.¹ While he had already worked on musicals (The Nightmare Before Christmas[1993],Corpse Bride[2005]) and literary adaptations (Sleepy Hollow[1999],Planet of the Apes[2001],Big Fish[2004],Charlie and the Chocolate Factory[2005]),Sweeneydiffers by being an adaptation of an existing stage musical with a long provenance. Nor is it scored by Burton’s longtime collaborator Danny Elfman. It shares with his other adapted works a firm grounding in the American literary canon, Stephen Sondheim being the touted scion of
It’s Uncanny: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) McMahon Jennifer L.
Abstract: For a quarter of a century, Tim Burton has captivated audiences with his offbeat creations. Known for his macabre style and predisposition for the fantastic, Burton consistently delights viewers with his strange settings and peculiar characters. As anyone acquainted with Burton’s corpus is aware, his work is often characterized as macabre because it features death so prominently. Whether blatantly, through the presence of characters that personify death, or merely through a character’s encounter with mortality, Burton consistently reminds audiences of their finitude. Indeed, he reinstates the long-standing artistic tradition of memento mori, the tradition of incorporating explicit symbols of mortality
Affect without Illusion: from:
The Philosophy of Tim Burton
Author(s) LaRocca David
Abstract: The director Edward D. Wood Jr. is derided for the films he made in the 1950s and otherwise notorious as the “worst director of all time”—a sort of patron saint of the B movie.¹ Part of the pleasure audiences derive from proclaiming Wood the worst practitioner of filmmaking seems linked with an expression of resentment: hidden in the criticism of his work lies a belief and expectation (perhaps unacknowledged or unarticulated) that filmmakers are supposed to show us our world by taking us out of it. To outer space if need be. Science fiction, for example, is a film
CHAPTER ONE from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: IOSIF ALEKSANDROVICH BRODSKY was born on May 24, 1940, in Leningrad, at Professor Tur’s clinic on the Vyborg Side.¹ This is a saint’s day in the Russian Orthodox calendar, the holy day of Cyril and Methodius, creators of the Cyrillic alphabet—a fact that the poet, who grew up in an assimilated Jewish family, learned only as an adult, long after he had bound his fate to “sweet Cyrillic.” While in his poems he would occasionally note that he’d been born under the sign of Gemini (which, according to astrologers, presages an inborn tendency to “profound dualism and harmonious ambiguity”),
CHAPTER TWO from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: BRODSKY’S APPLICATION to the submarine school of the Second Baltic Naval Academy was rejected, and he always assumed that he’d been turned down because he was Jewish. When he dropped out of school just short of sixteen years of age, he first found work as an apprentice machinist at Factory No. 671, better known in the city by its older and more revealing name, the Arsenal. He worked there for roughly six months.
CHAPTER THREE from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: BY THE AGE OF TWENTY-TWO, when his more privileged peers were just barely graduating from university and embarking on adult life, Brodsky had already traveled the country, lived among ordinary people, and survived political persecution. He had learned to separate fact from fantasy and to cast a critical eye on his fellows.
CHAPTER FOUR from:
Joseph Brodsky
Abstract: THE FALL AND WINTER of 1963 and the first six weeks of 1964 were extremely hard for Brodsky, but not for the political reasons that those writing about him in hindsight assume. His relationship with Marina Basmanova was coming to a disastrous end; he was thinking of nothing else. But as it happened, at this most vulnerable moment, he became a convenient target for three different interest groups: he fell victim to Nikita Khrushchev’s ideological policy, to the zeal and ambition of the Leningrad police and reactionaries within the Leningrad Writers’ Union, and to the machinations of one Yakov Lerner
2 An Author of Absence from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: All authors confront an empty page that needs to be filled with words, just as all struggle from paragraph to paragraph in deciding how much information the reader requires to understand settings, plots, and characters. Tolstoy was different from most in his extensive use of that which cannot be said or written as the negative space against which his fiction takes shape. For example, in
War and Peacehe asserts so often and so fervently that one can neither plan a battle nor describe it accurately that one wonders how the story grew to the length of four or five
5 Family Histories from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Tolstoy intended Natasha Rostova to be an authentic character. She was unique for Tolstoy, and represents a turning point. “Natasha, in her freshness and vitality, is absolutely unprecedented in previous writings,” as Kathryn Feuer puts it, “which makes it all the more astonishing that Tolstoy seems to have created her so effortlessly.”¹ Whereas Nikolai and Andrei dramatize the metafictional debate about boundaries between fiction and reality, the novel and history, Natasha lives along the boundary of art and life. Readers might at first assume that no such boundary can be distinguished in Natasha’s life, since she is, of all characters,
6 The Recovery of Childhood from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Tolstoy’s early stories use misdirection, diversion, in order to create the experience of real presentness for the reader, who, happily distracted, passes into a world of fiction perhaps without realizing it. The late stories, on the contrary, often feign the simplicity of pure readerly experience, while alienating that experience through complex narrative structures. In the former, Tolstoy struggles against the alibi of narrative, continually collapsing the distance between “elsewhere” and the present “here.” In the latter, however, Tolstoy raises a narrative barrier to purely present meaning; and though his stories often contain what should be a simple moral meaning, they
8 Anna Incommunicada from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: Most readers of Tolstoy will recognize the tragic and angry meditation here as characteristic of Anna’s final hours. Everything seems “dreadful” and “incomprehensible” to her as she loses herself in feelings of loneliness and estrangement. Anna’s thoughts reveal her isolation from the rest of the world and lead her to believe that “to tell another what one feels,” to foster genuine communication would be a sort of miracle.¹
12 On Tolstoy’s Authorship from:
Leo Tolstoy and the Alibi of Narrative
Abstract: For the conclusion of this book, I would like to treat Tolstoy’s narrative alibi within the tradition of primarily western theories of authorial intent and identity. Narrative alibi is the term I have been using throughout this study to describe, first, Tolstoy’s exculpatory fictions, works like “Father Sergius,” where the author looks back at his previous sinful life and creates a narrative arc that leads toward conversion and repentance. I have also used the term
narrative alibito characterize the gaps or absences that Tolstoy incribed into his early works. Although all literary texts have gaps, Tolstoy especially worked to
Book Title: Utopia-Second Edition
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): HARP JERRY
Abstract: Saint Thomas More's
Utopiais one of the most important works of European humanism and serves as a key text in survey courses on Western intellectual history, the Renaissance, political theory, and many other subjects. Preeminent More scholar Clarence H. Miller does justice to the full range of More's rhetoric in this masterful translation. In a new afterword to this edition, Jerry Harp contextualizes More's life andUtopiawithin the wider frames of European humanism and the Renaissance."Clarence H. Miller's fine translation tracks the supple variations of More's Latin with unmatched precision, and his Introduction and notes are masterly. Jerry Harp's new Afterword adroitly places More's wonderful little book into its broader contexts in intellectual history."-George M. Logan, author ofThe Meaning of More's "Utopia""Sir Thomas More'sUtopiais not merely one of the foundational texts of western culture, but also a book whose most fundamental concerns are as urgent now as they were in 1516 when it was written. Clarence H. Miller's wonderful translation of More's classic is now happily once again available to readers. This is the English edition that best captures the tone and texture of More's original Latin, and its notes and introduction, along with the lively afterward by Jerry Harp, graciously supply exactly the kinds of help a modern reader might desire."-David Scott Kastan, Yale University
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vkxkg
INTRODUCTION from:
Utopia
Abstract: The circumstances under which More composed
Utopia,as he recounts them in the opening of the book, give us some clues about one of its central issues: public service versus contemplative withdrawal. More was a busy London lawyer in the service of Henry VIII on a trade commission negotiating in the spring and early summer of 1515 in Bruges. In the midst of this activity came three months of leisure from late July to late October; the negotiations were interrupted because the Flemish ambassadors had to return to consult with their prince. Released from business and public service, More had
BOOK 1 from:
Utopia
Abstract: Recently the invincible king of England,²¹ Henry the eighth of that name, who is lavishly endowed with all skills necessary for an outstanding ruler, had some matters of no small moment²² which had to be worked out with Charles, the most serene prince of Castile.²³ To discuss and resolve these differences he sent me to Flanders as his ambassador; I was the companion and colleague of the incomparable Cuthbert Tunstall, whom he recently appointed to be Master of the Rolls, to the enormous satisfaction of everyone.²⁴ I will say nothing in his praise, not because I am afraid that my
AFTERWORD from:
Utopia
Author(s) HARP JERRY
Abstract: Poet, translator, lawyer, statesman, social philosopher, martyr, and (as of 1935) canonized saint, Thomas More remains—in his friend Erasmus’s phrase—a “man for all seasons,” one who in his integrity is suited to all occasions.¹ He was formed to no small degree by the cultural movement known as Renaissance humanism, with its emphases on the study of ancient texts, the deepening of a historical sense, the cultivation of the art of rhetoric, and devotion to active service in the world. The terms “Renaissance” and “humanism” come trailing clouds of ambiguity, so some sorting of their meaning is in order.
Book Title: Captured by Evil-The Idea of Corruption in Law
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): UNDERKUFFLER LAURA S.
Abstract: "Underkuffler challenges the traditional rational and logical characterizations of corruption and defends a highly original and insightul proposal. In her view corruption is an emotional concept grounded in religious ideas defying traditional criminal law doctrines. This book is a fantastic contribution to the study of corruption as well as more generally to the study of law and culture."-Alon Harel, Hebrew University Law School
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm38s
INTRODUCTION from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: ʺCorruptionʺ is one of the most powerful words in the English language. When (for instance) we think of corruption of food, human bodies, or other physical objects, we think of something that is fundamentally or revoltingly altered, impure, rotten, or worse. When we think of corruption in government—the subject of this book—the impact of this word is equally powerful. Charges of corruption in public life have condemned men, destroyed the lives of women, and accelerated the decline and fall of governments. Corruption is something that human beings instinctively loathe, and that
1 EXPLORING CORRUPTION: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: Corruption, as an idea in politics and government, has been the subject of extensive academic analysis and commentary. For many years, political scientists, sociologists, and legal academicians—those groups that dominated the field—generally assumed a particular understanding of corruption and proceeded to study its causes, effects, and methods of prevention. Corruption, for instance, was assumed to be bribery and like acts, with little attention given to the precise contours of the idea or what the use of this idea added to the simple list of prohibited acts.
2 THE IDEA OF CORRUPTION: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: In this chapter, I establish why this is true. I argue that the common idea of corruption is, in fact, far deeper and more complex than traditional academic theories acknowledge. First, corruption is an explicitly moral notion—
4 AN EVIL DISPOSITION: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: There are, of course, many possible shades of bad character. Those who are lazy, shirkers, boastful, liars, cheats, or exploitative of others might all be deemed persons of bad character, although some might be considerably more morally reprehensible than others. In the case of corruption, there
5 CORRUPTION AS CAPTURE-BY-EVIL: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: The idea of corruption as capture-by-evil captures many of our intuitions. Its use in law, however, is fraught with problems. As a dispositional concept, the idea of corruption as capture-by-evil potentially contravenes the idea that we should punish
acts, notpersons. In addition, invitations to decision makers to implement subjective ideas of evil are arguably invitations toward standardlessness, emotionally driven prosecutions, and other violations of basic guarantees of the rule of law. As Robert Brooks so well stated, ʺPublic anger at some exposed villainy of this sort is apt to be both blind and exacting.ʺ¹ This idea of corruption might
6 COSTS AND BENEFITS EXAMINED: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: There is no shortage of recent tales of corrupt politicians who were claimed to be captured by evil. We shall examine the cases of four individuals whose actions cover a spectrum of allegedly corrupt conduct: Diane M. Gordon, former state assemblywoman from Brooklyn, New York; Rod R. Blagojevich, former governor of the state of Illinois; Don Siegelman, former governor of the state of Alabama; and Eliot Spitzer, former governor of the state of New York.
7 CORRUPTION AND MORAL VALUES: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: This chapter explores the implications of this idea of corruption in various practical contexts of government. The strength of this idea of corruption is its recognition that corruption operates—inherently—as an alternative moral system, which thrives when the previously existing normative system is weakened or discarded. This explains why an increase in corruption has so often
8 CODA: from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: The idea of the rule of law is of unquestioned importance in the liberal democratic political tradition. Indeed, it is—in some form—essential to human interaction. The idea of the rule of law is the centuries-old solution for mediating interhuman conflict over applicable moral principles and for controlling the despotism of rulers.¹ The law, as conceptualized by this idea, is an articulated set of rules, objectively enforced. The importance of the rule of law in Western jurisprudence has been expressed in ringing terms: ʺ[L]aw becomes necessary to make life in society tolerable…. Given the [contentious] nature of man, law
CONCLUSION from:
Captured by Evil
Abstract: It is fair to say, after our examination, that corruption is a troubled concept in law. The traditional understandings of corruption, used in law—corruption as the breach of duty, corruption as the quid pro quo transaction, corruption as illegality or inequality, and so on—capture parts of this idea, but not all. Animating these technical and rational understandings in spirit and practice is another, quite incommensurable concept. Corruption, under this deeper (and popular) understanding, is a raw moral idea. It invokes ideas of ʺdepravityʺ and ʺevil,ʺ human frailty and temptation. It is the capture of individuals and political systems
Book Title: The Allure of the Archives- Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Davis Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Arlette Farge's
Le Goût de l'archiveis widely regarded as a historiographical classic. While combing through two-hundred-year-old judicial records from the Archives of the Bastille, historian Farge was struck by the extraordinarily intimate portrayal they provided of the lives of the poor in pre-Revolutionary France, especially women. She was seduced by the sensuality of old manuscripts and by the revelatory power of voices otherwise lost. InThe Allure of the Archives, she conveys the exhilaration of uncovering hidden secrets and the thrill of venturing into new dimensions of the past.Originally published in 1989, Farge's classic work communicates the tactile, interpretive, and emotional experience of archival research while sharing astonishing details about life under the Old Regime in France. At once a practical guide to research methodology and an elegant literary reflection on the challenges of writing history, this uniquely rich volume demonstrates how surrendering to the archive's allure can forever change how we understand the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm50t
On the Front Door from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: On the front door there is a sign listing the library’s hours. There is no way for the uninitiated to know that they do not necessarily coincide with the hours the documents are available for consultation. Lower down on the sign, one can find a list of holidays, as well as the accompanying days the library will be closed before and after weekends. It’s a long text, unostentatiously typed on plain paper bearing the letterhead of the Ministry of Culture, posted so discreetly that one rarely notices it at first glance. Which is exactly what happens to our reader. Pushing
Gathering and Handling the Documents from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: For some, what I’ve written so far might represent a naive and outmoded view of archival research. Assembling a narrative by building relationships to the documents and the people they reveal might seem today like a vestige of outdated scholarly practices. This technique appears to have no place in an intellectual period that is both more traditional—perhaps even more conservative—and less attached to descriptions of daily life. What appeal can the archives retain when others have already said everything, or almost everything, about the beauty of research for its own sake, the dialogue we carry out with the
Writing from:
The Allure of the Archives
Abstract: A taste for these ragged tatters of words and actions will always shape the way you write about them. Grounded in fragments, this style of writing builds on sequences of what was
Book Title: The Religion and Science Debate-Why Does It Continue?
Publisher: Yale University Press
Author(s): Wuthnow Robert
Abstract: Why does the tension between science and religion continue? How have those tensions changed during the past one hundred years? How have those tensions impacted the public debate about so-called "intelligent design" as a scientific alternative to evolution? With wit and wisdom the authors address the conflict from its philosophical roots to its manifestations within American culture. In doing so, they take an important step toward creating a society that reconciles scientific inquiry with the human spirit. This book, which marks the one hundredth anniversary of The Terry Lecture Series, offers a unique perspective for anyone interested in the debate between science and religion in America.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt5vm5wc
Aggressors, Victims, and Peacemakers: from:
The Religion and Science Debate
Author(s) NUMBERS RONALD L.
Abstract: Talk of the relations between “science” and “religion” first became audible in the early 1800s, about the time that students of nature began referring to their work as science rather than natural philosophy (or natural history). Because natural philosophy allowed its practitioners, in the words of Isaac Newton, to discourse about God “from the appearances of things,” one searches almost in vain for references to “natural philosophy and religion.” Some writers expressed concern about tension between faith and reason, but they never pitted religion against science.¹
Introduction from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) KROIS JOHN MICHAEL
Abstract: The term “cultural studies” and its basic methodological orientation derive from the activities of the Centre of Contemporary Cultural Studies in Birmingham, England. Beginning in the 1960s, the study of literature at that institution was expanded to include nontraditional depositories of culture, such as film
6 The Subject of Culture from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) LOFTS STEVE
Abstract: It is often forgotten that Cassirer’s “critique of culture” entails a “critique of the subject” of culture: for culture exists only insofar as an individual subject actively engages with other subjects in its continual construction and reconstruction. For the most part, however, Cassirer speaks about the subject of culture in the most general and abstract of terms: it is the anonymous force of the “energy of
Geist” that constitutes the cultural world. The task of the philosophy of symbolic forms, as a “critique of culture,” as a philosophy of Geist, is to establish the structure of the different forms of
10 Speaking of Symbols: from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) BISHOP PAUL
Abstract: At first glance, the differences between the philosophy of Ernst Cassirer and the psychology of C. G. Jung would seem to outweigh any affinities.¹ To begin with, the one was a philosopher who taught in university departments, the other a psychologist with no philosophical training and a practice to run. (One of the most important philosophical sources for Jung was the second edition of the
Allgemeines Handwörterbuch der philosophischen Wissenschaften[1832] by Wilhelm Traugott Krug [1770–1842], a distinctly popular, if famous, work.) As far as personal background and education are concerned, Cassirer was born of factory-owning, Jewish parents in
15 Why Did Cassirer and Heidegger Not Debate in Davos? from:
Symbolic Forms and Cultural Studies
Author(s) KROIS JOHN MICHAEL
Abstract: In March 1929, when Martin Heidegger and Ernst Cassirer met to debate at academic conferences held in the Swiss mountain resort of Davos, the situation had the potential for a dramatic confrontation.¹ Here were two philosophers with reputedly antithetical views, separated by a generation gap (Cassirer was fifteen years older), one came from a modest background in provincial Germany (and intentionally stayed away from the city) while the other stemmed from a wealthy family whose name was synonymous with modernism in the arts and the metropolis of Berlin, where he had lived so long.² Eyewitnesses called attention to the fact
Book Title: Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art-Challenges and Perspectives
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): HEDIGER VINZENZ
Abstract: This vibrantly illustrated introduction to the emerging field of the preservation and presentation of media art brings together the contributions of authors from all over Europe and the United States. This volume can serve as a textbook for students in advanced degree programs in media art and museum studies, as well as an invaluable introduction for general readers. A potent combination of incisive scholarly articles and focused case studies,
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Artoffers a comprehensive overview of the history, theory, and practical skills of preserving media art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wp6f3
Introduction from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Noordegraaf Julia
Abstract: Since their emergence, time-based media such as film, video, and digital media have been used by artists who experimented with the potential of these media. In the 1920s, visual artists like Marcel Duchamp and Fernand Léger tested the aesthetic possibilities of film – a practice that continues into the 21st century in the oeuvre of artists such as Tacita Dean and Stan Douglas. The introduction of the first portable video recording system in the 1960s inspired artists like Nam June Paik and Andy Warhol to explore its application in sculptures, projection-based works, and multimedia events, initiating a wave in video
INTRODUCTION from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Hediger Vinzenz
Abstract: What is media art? Providing a working definition of its object is critical to any emerging new field of study, but particularly to the field of media art. The product of practices that often involve rapidly changing technologies and ephemeral performance elements, media art is difficult for critics, curators, and archivists to pin down in terms of the established taxonomies of art history or film and media studies. Laying the groundwork for the following parts of the book, this part offers four different approaches to the methodological, theoretical, and practical challenges involved in developing a taxonomy of media art that
CHAPTER 2 Media Archaeology: from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Strauven Wanda
Abstract: For a long time, talking to oneself on the street or in any other public place was considered abnormal, deviant from the expected social norm. Singing on your own was okay, but talking on your own, without having any interlocutor, was simply weird. When taken unawares by a fellow citizen in such an odd situation, a possible and often-spontaneous reaction (which I have indeed caught myself in several times) was to quickly shift from talking to singing, as if to imply: don’t worry, I was not talking to myself, I was just singing. Today people talk, or even shout, to
CHAPTER 3 Media Aesthetics from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: Aesthetics as a philosophical discipline arose in the middle of the 18th century, when art came to be defined as an autonomous field of rules, social practices, and institutions (like museums). For that historical reason, aesthetics is not just “art theory,” as it articulates both more general and more particular issues, for instance: perception through the senses, the definition of beauty, judgment of taste, the truth content of an artwork and its relationship to (physical, psychological, economic etc.) reality, the questions of originality and newness; eventually, the definition and the very possibility of “art” itself, which becomes a serious matter
INTRODUCTION from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Noordegraaf Julia
Abstract: After having discussed various historical and theoretical approaches to understanding the complexities of media art in part one, the second part of this book focuses in more detail on analyzing, documenting, and archiving media art. Before being able to identify appropriate strategies for preserving and restoring film-, video-, or computer-based artworks – the topic of part three – or determining suitable exhibition modes – discussed in part four – it is necessary to first capture the exact nature and appearance of the original work.
CHAPTER 5 The Analysis of the Artwork from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Marchiori Dario
Abstract: While the Greek etymology of analysis means “dis-solution,” analysis as a thinking practice (which has been theorized since the ancient times, initially in the realm of geometry¹) involves the related idea of a “breaking up”²: the first experience of it may be considered that of a child breaking a toy to understand its internal structure, and the way it works. Modern thought has reinforced this “decompositional” conception of analysis, which “found its classic statement in the work of Kant at the end of the eighteenth century” and “set the methodological agenda for philosophical approaches and debates in the (late) modern
CHAPTER 6 Methodologies of Multimedial Documentation and Archiving from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: Documentation is the process of gathering and organizing information about a work, including its condition, its content, its context, and the actions taken to preserve it. For the writing of art history one used to be able to rely on the art objects. When artworks become prone to obsolescence or are only meant to exist for a short period, documentation is the only thing people can fall back on. The traditional documentation strategy for the conservation of art is focused on describing the object, in the best objective way possible. But conservation as a practice is not as fixed as
INTRODUCTION from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Saba Cosetta G.
Abstract: Within a framework of the system of relations between “technology” and “culture,” the third part of this book is dedicated to preservation and restoration theories and practices, and has two sides. On one hand (in chapter 7), the history of research and technological innovation in the media area is highlighted, also in the case of “low cost” examples, emphasizing the deconstruction and reinvention processes produced by artistic practices with respect to the industrial structures of cinema (7.1), television (7.2), and information technology (7.3). On the other hand (in chapter 8), epistemological frameworks are introduced, as well as working methodologies, projects,
CHAPTER 8 Theories, Techniques, Decision-making Models: from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Abstract: The operating practices of preservation and restoration raise complex questions of a methodological and theoretical nature. However, there are basically three questions that we must answer in order to work correctly: a) What is the identity of the material that we are analyzing? b) What are its conditions? c) How can we look after it? The first two questions are of a diagnostic nature, whilst the last one concerns the issues of prognosis.
CHAPTER 10 On Curating New Media Art from:
Preserving and Exhibiting Media Art
Author(s) Cook Sarah
Abstract: An untested observation about the existing scholarship of curatorial practice suggests that the majority of articles about curating and the curatorial profession (considering those mostly published in the mainstream contemporary art press but also those found in the academic press) concerns the work of freelancers and what their large-scale temporary shows mean for the state of contemporary art (O’Neill, 2007). In
Book Title: Contemporary Culture-New Directions in Art and Humanities Research
Publisher: Amsterdam University Press
Author(s): Zijlmans Kitty
Abstract: Are the humanities still relevant in the twenty-first century? In the context of pervasive economic liberalism and shrinking budgets, the importance of humanities research for society is increasingly put into question. This volume claims that the humanities do indeed matter by offering empirically grounded critical reflections on contemporary cultural practices, thereby opening up new ways of understanding social life and new directions in humanities scholarship. The contributors argue that the humanities can regain their relevance for society, pose new questions and provide fresh answers, while maintaining their core values: critical reflection, historical consciousness and analytical distance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wp6n0
Chapter One Mediacity: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Boomkens René
Abstract: Generally, cities, urban culture and the urban public sphere have often been taken to represent the source or centre of modern social and cultural life, which then is said to differ radically from social and cultural life in pre-modern, feudal or medieval times and from life in the countryside. The sociological opposition between the face-to-face culture of pre-modern villages and the abstract, mediated and complex culture of modern cities as an opposition between
GemeinschaftandGesellschaft,introduced by Ferdinand Tönnies, has becomethecommonplace of more than hundred years of urban sociology and theory. His sociological contemporary, Georg Simmel, described
Chapter Four Body Movies: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) de Waal Martijn
Abstract: The city would not exist as a modern urban society without the urban public domain. This is the central claim of a large number of theories of urban culture.¹ After all, urban life is defined by the fact that we are forced to share the city with a multitude of strangers from disparate backgrounds and with diverse identities and interests. For this reason it is of great importance that there are public spaces where we encounter these “others”, are confronted by them and must relate to them. In each of these theories, the urban public domain in which people negotiate
Chapter Five Homo Ludens 2.0: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Raessens Joost
Abstract: A spectre is haunting the world – the spectre of playfulness. We are witnessing a global “ludification of culture”. Since the 1960s, in which the word “ludic” became popular in Europe and the United States to designate playful behaviour and artefacts, playfulness has increasingly become a mainstream characteristic of our culture. Perhaps the first thing that comes to mind in this context is the immense popularity of computer games, which, as far as global sales are concerned, have already outstripped Hollywood. According to a recent study in the United States, 8 to 18 year olds play computer games on average
Chapter Seven From Gengsi to Gaul: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) de Lange Michiel
Abstract: How do mobile media technologies shape identities? Identity – what it is to be and have a self, and to belong to social and cultural groups – is always mediated. People understand themselves, others and their world in terms of the media they know and use. According to philosopher Paul Ricoeur, narrative is the privileged medium for self-understanding and social/cultural identifications.¹ The quick and widespread adoption of mobile media technologies prompts us to revisit this claim. In this window I look at the context of Jakarta, Indonesia, to show how urban mobile media practices shape identities in playful ways.
Chapter Ten Sound Technologies and Cultural Practices: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: Since World War II, an impressive series of new sound technologies has entered the scene: the reel-to-reel recorder, the cassette recorder, the compact disk, the mp3 player, sampling software on personal computers and music-sharing facilities on the Internet. How did such sound technologies affect transformations in the cultural practices of listening to and making music in Western Europe? Which shifts did they trigger in the traditional boundaries between active and passive participation in music culture? What was, for instance, the impact of the tape recorder on the boundaries between producing and consuming music, listening and creating, copying and editing music?
Chapter Eleven The Case of ccMixter: from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Jansen Bas
Abstract: The opening decade of the new millennium, especially the later part, saw a surge of enthusiasm for new digital technologies and the ways in which these enable formerly passive consumers to activate themselves and engage creatively with the culture surrounding them. Music technologies played a substantial role in this phenomenon. Nowadays, any enthusiast can home-record. Sampling and manipulating pre-existing music have become much simpler. Likewise, the distribution of music is no longer difficult and expensive. It is easy and costs next to nothing. As a consequence of these developments, the question how pop music production works no longer has a
Chapter Twelve On the Need for Cooperation between Art and Science from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Over the last two decades there has been an increasing tendency for artists to seek partnerships with academics and vice versa.¹ Exchange projects like artist-in-residency programmes at universities have become common practice and there are many organizations that initiate and actively promote collaboration between artists and academics.² To stimulate theoretical reflection on this development, the Netherlands Organisation for Scientific Research (NWO) launched in 2006 the CO-OPs programme. CO-OPs focused on the processes of knowledge production that take place when artists and academics work together on a common research question. On the one hand, it aimed at the formation of new
Introduction from:
Contemporary Culture
Abstract: In 2002, the Netherlands Organisation for Scientific Research (NWO) launched a large-scale research programme to explore recent transformations in the cultural field and develop new theoretical concepts and frameworks for the humanities.
Transformations in Arts and Cultureran for almost a decade and consisted of seven sub-programmes involving over 30 senior and junior scholars at different universities in the Netherlands. In addition, an art-science programme CO-OPs was set up in which artists and academics explored how art and academe could mutually benefit from each other’s practices and ideas.
Interview with José van Dijck and Robert Zwijnenberg from:
Contemporary Culture
Author(s) Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: The irony is that this act of holding on to a scan, intended to tease romantics, can also be viewed as an
CHAPTER 1 Introduction from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This book is the result of my reflections on the deepening crisis of multiculturalism that has been developing across the Euro-Atlantic region, in European countries in particular since the turn of the millennium. I critically evaluate multiculturalism’s contemporary alternatives in terms of secularism, assimilation and (civic) integration, while also tracing the interconnections between these. I furthermore examine why these alternatives are problematic, not only from the standpoint of the migrants and minorities concerned, but also because these notions stem from, and will increasingly lead to, nationalist, Eurocentric and insufficiently democratic conceptions and practices of citizenship. This book, finally, sketches the
CHAPTER 2 Assimilation in the French sociology of incorporation from a multicultural perspective from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: Assimilation is a rather unfriendly concept when used in a social context. In French, it generally means an act of the mind that considers (something) as similar (to something else). A relevant secondary meaning is the action of making (something) similar (to something else) by integration or absorption. This meaning has existed in physiology since 1495. Around 1840, the concept was related to social processes for the first time, as the act of assimilating persons and peoples; the process through which these persons, these peoples, assimilate (themselves). This connotation incorporates terms like ‘Americanisation’ and ‘Frenchisation’. The older physiological connotation shines
TRANSIT I Proust as a witness of assimilation in 19th-century France from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: The following chapters are founded on the idea that a critical rethinking of Jewish assimilation in 19th-century France – or the process which has been interpreted as such – is important for an assessment of the moral legitimacy and practical wisdom of (re)introducing liberal-assimilationist discourses and practices in the European context. Rethinking Jewish assimilation will also help us trace assimilation’s connections to secularisation in the France of the Third Republic. This will facilitate our understanding of the connections between secularism and assimilationism today. I try to contribute to such a rethinking of assimilation by scrutinising the ways in which assimilation’s practical and
CHAPTER 7 Secularism, sociology and security from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: This chapter first examines the Stasi report (2003), which imparted to the French government the crucial recommendation to issue a law prohibiting the wearing of conspicuous religious signs in public schools. The report provides a lengthy analysis of the actuality of
laïcité. The final recommendation about the conspicuous religious signs forms only a small part of this document, which redefineslaïcitéin several regards. I relate my reading of the report to the views of multiculturalists who have concentrated on secularism such as Brahm Levey and Bader, focusing especially on the report’s reiteration of the modernist dichotomies discussed in the
CHAPTER 8 The highly precarious structure of assimilation from:
Secularism, Assimilation and the Crisis of Multiculturalism
Abstract: The previous two chapters have argued that a critique of
laïcitéinvites a critique of the underlying concept of secularisation, and of the ways in which this is related to lingering traces of modernist concepts of the subject, of citizenship, and of modernity. I raised critical questions about the expectation that the conceptual separation of religion from visible, plural, polysemic cultural practices that are suffused with habit, custom,ethos, and, in addition, withothersand power, will prove capable of contributing much to stability, fairness or democracy in multicultural societies. Moreover, I argued that the paradoxes of assimilation as they
3 Memory: from:
A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Just about a hundred years before Lyotard and the Paris VIII philosophy department tried to reform both the theory and practice of humanities education and knowledge research, a famous controversy broke out in Germany around the same issues. The publication of Nietzsche’s
The Birth of Tragedy(1872) provoked Ulrich von Wilamowitz-Moellendorff to a sharp attack—at once witty, trenchant, and ad hominem. Nearly everyone agrees that Wilamowitz largely swept the field. In a confident if nasty peroration, he called for Nietzsche’s resignation as professor of philology at the University of Basel. Six years later Nietzsche did just that, shaking dryasdust
Conclusion: from:
A New Republic of Letters
Abstract: Since all the cultural materials discussed in this book are resolutely Occidental, I should perhaps say something about how I’ve tried to engage with the global issues facing anyone interested in these things. For my argument holds that digital technology has realized the idea of a new Library of Alexandria. That institution’s dark reciprocal, however, is the global character of the threat to memory, epitomized in the crisis of our languages. Linguists expect that by the end of this century some half of the 7,000 currently recognized languages will be extinct. In a narrow Western view, those losses occur at
[II Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Multiplicityis a narrative structure characterized by the presentation of conflicting views within a given community about an event, an object, or a person. Corresponding to a “both/and” rhetoric that precludes an objective truth, multiplicity presents several acts of interpretation, but no one view is privileged as correct. Literary multiplicity is widespread and, according to the Russian narrative theorist Mikhail Bakhtin, it derives from the multiplicity endemic to all language, which describes a world that is “overlain with qualifications, open to dispute, charged with value, already enveloped in an obscuring mist—or, on the contrary, by the ‘light’ of alien
[III Introduction] from:
Seven Modes of Uncertainty
Abstract: Repetitionis a necessary feature of narrative. A repeated name, for example, permits us to track a single character across a novel. Repetition’s operation ofsimilitudeurges consistency over time, emphasizing the reality of things and of persons, as when we speak of habits, customs, conventions. While some repetition is necessary for narrative stability, it can also afford uncertainty because every iteration can seem to bear more—or different—meaning in its new context. William Empson describes the effect of Sidney’sArcadia:“in tracing their lovelorn pastoral tedium through thirteen repetitions, with something of the aimless multitudinousness of the sea
Introduction from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Labor is a familiar subject for study in the social sciences. The literature is replete with studies of occupations, careers, labor markets, contractual relations in employment, unemployment, the relations between training and professionalization, and various aspects of remuneration, including its distribution, its relation to investments in training, and its evolution in individuals’ careers. When the labor in question is artistic, however, such analysis is somewhat harder to find. This no doubt reflects the unusual nature of artistic labor.
CHAPTER ONE Time, Causes, and Reasons in Action from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Action analysis in both sociology and economics faces a persistent tension. To understand how individuals differ in their behavior, we may need to define each individual’s characteristics, preferences, and resources at the onset of the course of action. This essentially leads to a long-term, propelling view of the causal determination of individual action. However, as action unfolds sequentially, within an environment of interactions, people learn from each other and about themselves in ways that cannot be fully anticipated. Can we, simultaneously, fully define the identities of social actors and the situations that bring those actors together? My view is that
CHAPTER TWO Is Working to Achieve Self-Fulfillment Rational? from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: In classical economic analysis, labor is generally treated as a negative magnitude. It is described restrictively as a “disutility,” an expense of individual energy in exchange for a salary and the consumer goods to which that salary provides access. Leisure and consumer goods are the only sources of satisfaction and individual well-being. Thus labor is reduced to “negative consumption.” When labor is described this way, involvement in the labor market becomes a case of rational behavior and maximization under constraint: The choice to engage in a remunerated activity can be understood entirely as a choice balancing the sacrifice of well-being
CHAPTER FOUR Talent and Reputation: from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: In this chapter, I will examine how differences in remuneration and reputation are analyzed in the social sciences, and investigate why artists attain such widely varying degrees of success. The commonsense view is that the main cause of differences in artists’ success levels is talent. But how can talent be defined and to what source can it be traced? Theoretical frameworks surrounding giftedness and vocation provide a stereotypical answer: Talent is the expression of abilities that seem to originate in the genetic lottery (especially if they manifest themselves early in the artist’s life) as well as in the interaction between
CHAPTER FIVE How Can Artistic Greatness Be Analyzed? from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: Analyzing the career and the work of a great artist assumes that it is possible to describe a fragment of the history of the world subject to the laws of causality, and at the same time to endow the artist with the power to act: The artist’s greatness can then be characterized by his ability to change the predictable course of things (in the artistic world and beyond it, directly or indirectly, in the world in general)—an ability to which causes and reasons must be assigned. That is why works on artistic greatness or genius hesitate between several formulas.
CHAPTER SIX Profiles of the Unfinished: from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: An artwork is usually conceived in the fine arts as a finished, lasting reality, complete, never changing—a candidate for material and cultural eternity. What happens to it later is separate, something completely formed being pulled into a turbulent future. Diverse viewpoints, readings, and incompatible interpretations give it multiple meanings. Diverse formats of exhibition, “publishing,” and diffusion create new connections, putting the artwork into changeable contexts where its meanings will be seen from new perspectives. Reproduction, in media which may not transmit all its original characteristics, or restoration, will subject it to an unforeseeable flow of uses and manipulations. The
Conclusion from:
The Economics of Creativity
Abstract: The general arc of the analysis structuring this book led me to lay the basis for a conception of action, and then to extract from
Book Title: Metaphor- Publisher: Harvard University Press
Author(s): Donoghue Denis
Abstract: Metaphor supposes that an ordinary word could have been used, but instead something unexpected appears. The point of a metaphor is to enrich experience by bringing different associations to mind, by giving something a different life. The prophetic character of metaphor, Denis Donoghue says, changes the world by changing our sense of it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wps2d
The Motive for Metaphor from:
Metaphor
Abstract: [Metaphor] is both a gift which Nature herself confers on us, and which is therefore used even by uneducated persons and unconsciously, and at the same time so attractive and elegant that it shines by its own light however splendid its context. So long as it is correctly employed, it cannot be vulgar or mean or unpleasing. It also adds to the resources of language by exchanges or borrowings to supply its deficiencies, and (hardest task of all) it ensures that nothing goes without
Book Title: Sobre el viejo humanismo-Exposición y defensa de una tradición
Publisher: Marcial Pons, Ediciones de Historia
Author(s): GIBERT JAVIER GARCÍA
Abstract: Como reza su subtítulo, este libro se presenta como una «exposición» histórica de la tradición humanística y repasa los nombres y aportaciones más significativos que, desde la antigüedad clásica hasta la actualidad, han contribuido a construir, fijar o interpretar los rasgos esenciales del «viejo humanismo», una categoría que conviene distinguir de las concepciones más modernas o recientes, derivadas todas ellas del humanitarismo ilustrado. El lector encontrará una «defensa» de aquellos principios, tanto frente a los permanentes ataques anti-humanísticos que ha recibido a lo largo de la historia, como frente a los falsos amigos o malas interpretaciones que la tradición humanística —y el propio concepto de «humanismo»— soportan en la actualidad. Se trata, en definitiva, de un ensayo de amplio recorrido y no exento de interpretación, un texto que pretende levantar un análisis objetivo, aunque apasionado, de los hitos y los postulados que han ido conformando, no sólo filosófica y literariamente, sino también emocional y simbólicamente, aquella tradición.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpsg6
Capítulo 5 PETRARCA Y SUS ENEMIGOS from:
Sobre el viejo humanismo
Abstract: No vamos a referirnos en este capítulo al Petrarca poeta en lengua toscana, que tan enorme influencia iba a tener en la historia de la literatura occidental, sino al autor de una serie de obras latinas que lo han hecho ser considerado, con toda justicia, como el primer humanista moderno. Esta atribución no sólo se debe, como trataremos de ver en las páginas que siguen, al contenido formal de su obra sino, sobre todo, a una actitud emocional y una vocación existencial plenamente humanísticas, a una defensa sin cuartel de esta tradición (que él mismo contribuyó a implantar en la
Capítulo 9 LAS MODERNAS ESCISIONES: from:
Sobre el viejo humanismo
Abstract: Con todos los peligros y las deficiencias de las grandes ideaciones sobre la Historia,
La decadencia de Occidente(1918-1922) del alemán Oswald Spengler tuvo también grandes virtudes, y puede además servirnos para situar la caracterización global del siglo XIX en la relación a la cultura humanística. Ya en el largo capítulo introductorio Spengler diferenciaba entre «civilización» y «cultura», considerando que la civilización es el final —o el destino— inevitable de toda cultura y también el síntoma mismo de su acabamiento. Las culturas tienen una dimensión sagrada y simbólica y apuntan siempre a una unidad integradora, mientras que las civilizaciones a
2 EN TRANSICIÓN, O CUANDO LA MEMORIA LLEVÓ A LA AMNISTÍA from:
Elogio de historia en tiempo de memoria
Abstract: Recuerdo bien que de regreso en Madrid, al término de la única prórroga posible de mi beca, me sorprendió la celebración, en abril de 1976, de un congreso de la unión General de Trabajadores: decididamente, la España que había dejado en el verano de 1974 entraba en la primavera de 1976 en un rápido proceso de cambio político, perceptible en la calle, en la conquista de espacios públicos por grupos, asociaciones y partidos hasta entonces clandestinos, en mítines y encuentros de plataformas políticas ilegales pero que ahora actuaban a cara descubierta, en manifestaciones y carreras por la libertad, la amnistía
4 EL MEJOR MOMENTO DE LA HISTORIA SOCIAL from:
Elogio de historia en tiempo de memoria
Abstract: En aquellos años, la historia social, la que se preguntaba por estructuras y procesos sociales y a la que, como había escrito en 1959 Jaume Vicens Vives, nada era ajeno: modas y gustos, ceremonias y diversiones, actitudes culturales y artísticas, estructuras económicas y sociales, presión demográfica, una historia total, con nuevos horizontes para todos, pasaba en el ámbito internacional por su mejor momento, aunque en España fuera todavía «un campo de investigación relativamente nuevo», según comentaba José María Jover, y hasta no faltaba alguna voz que juzgaba a los historiadores sociales como una secta formada por una gente que no
14 EL HISTORIADOR, ARTESANO EN SU TALLER from:
Elogio de historia en tiempo de memoria
Abstract: Durante los treinta y cinco años —hoy, exactamente y por un nuevo azar, la mitad de mi vida— que llevo dedicado a este oficio, primero como una afición, luego como una profesión, he sido muy afortunado, debo reconocerlo y lo hago sin ninguna necesidad de pedir excusas. He dispuesto de ese preciado bien que es el tiempo para dedicarme a lo que me interesa y divierte, y de ese mayor tesoro que es la libertad para emplear el tiempo según mi buen saber y entender. En el ejercicio diario del trabajo de un profesor de universidad, al menos desde que
Book Title: Homo viator, homo scribens-Cultura gráfica, información y gobierno en la expansión atlántica (siglos XV-XVII)
Publisher: Marcial Pons, Ediciones de Historia
Author(s): SÁNCHEZ CARLOS ALBERTO GONZÁLEZ
Abstract: Escribir lo vivido en los nuevos mundos, además de una decisión personal, fue una obligación impuesta desde el principio por los gobernantes a quienes participaron en las empresas descubridoras. Ante unos acontecimientos demasiado distantes y fuera de su control, las autoridades de la vieja Europa comprendieron el valor de la escritura como una vía de información sistemática e indispensable para un ejercicio del poder más eficaz y centralizado. Por eso exigieron puntuales relaciones o memorias escritas, contrastadas y verificadas, de cuanto acaeciere, vieren u oyeren durante el desarrollo de sus misiones. Éste fue el inicio de una suerte de incipiente globalización capaz de menguar las incertidumbres y la distancia. De todo ello se trata en este libro, cuyo objetivo no es otro que intentar desvelar el protagonismo y el decisivo impacto de la cultura escrita en la expansión atlántica europea de la alta modernidad
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wpvww
INTRODUCCIÓN from:
Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: El descubrimiento y conquista de nuevos mundos fue uno de los grandes acontecimientos del Renacimiento, una época de cambios impactantes, entusiasmada con sus invenciones, deseosa de novedades y de saber más sobre el universo¹. Aquella promoción de Occidente, una ofensiva frente al Oriente, desencadenó una inusitada curiosidad hacia lo alejado, exótico y desconocido, los móviles que hicieron posible la ruptura de unas fronteras geográficas, hasta entonces insalvables, en las que los antiguos proyectaron un cúmulo de anhelos, esperanzas y miedos. Descubrir era viajar, un proceso vital que ofrecía a su artífice la posibilidad de presenciar y conocer el mundo exterior,
Capítulo I EXPERIENCIA Y COMUNICACIÓN from:
Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Una de las inquietudes primordiales de los hombres ha sido la comunicación de sus vivencias. Siempre ha prevalecido en ellos una imperiosa necesidad de detener el tiempo, representarse a sí mismos y perpetuar en la memoria de la comunidad las experiencias y noticias consideradas dignas de recordar y de ser guardadas en instancias imperecederas; para que sean objeto de admiración, encomio y reverencia, o, simplemente, puedan estar al alcance de curiosos e interesados. Ya los clásicos, según advierte M. Foucault, relacionaron el conocimiento y cuidado de sí con una constante actividad literaria, uno mismo era tema primordial de la literatura,
Capítulo V VIAJE, IMAGINARIO Y ESCRITURA from:
Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Acabamos de ver una variopinta casuística en torno a los móviles y otras circunstancias que intervienen en la escritura de las relaciones del descubrimiento y conquista de los nuevos mundos, un ámbito de indudable interés y decisivo en la comprensión del fenómeno en estudio. Si bien, ahora prestaremos atención a un muestrario de usos, funciones y representaciones del escrito presente en los relatos manejados, un imaginario que nos ha deparado el rastreo minucioso de los textos y que va a dar luz sobre la implantación social de las prácticas alfabéticas y diversas actitudes frente a ellas; en última instancia, y
COLOFÓN from:
Homo viator, homo scribens
Abstract: Escritos y libros, en definitiva, conformaron un canal de información, a escala planetaria, vital para la Europa del Renacimiento, sobre todo para el mundo ibérico que inició la que, a la zaga de S. Gruzinski, podríamos llamar la primera globalización o mundialización. Una movilización universal que, partiendo de una fantástica, distante y sin precedentes empresa guerrera, económica y religiosa, empezó a modificar muchas escalas de valores, hábitos y formas de pensar en la cultura occidental. Sus actores, consciente e inconscientemente, hicieron un grato servicio a los distintos poderes y a unas gentes ávidas de conocimientos; a un orbe, en suma,
Book Title: Signs of Science-Literature, Science, and spa Modernity since 1868
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Pratt Dale J.
Abstract: Signs of Science: Literature, Science, and spa Modernity since 1868 traces how spa culture represented scientific activity from the mid-nineteenth century onward. The book combines the global perspective afforded by historical narrative with detailed rhetorical analyses of images of science in specific literary and scientific texts. As literary criticism it seeks to illuminate similarities and differences in how science and scientists are pictured; as cultural history it follows the course of a centuries-long dialogue about Spain and science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq1rm
Chapter Four “Perspectivas tan vastas”: from:
Signs of Science
Abstract: In
La feandCuentos de vacaciones,science serves mainly to signify one extreme of the bipolar cultural debate of faith ver: sus modernity, though the latter text expresses far more faith in the powers of empiricism. and reason. The signscienceinCuentosalso fulfills a function beyond evoking utopian possibilities for the future: it steps past the raw empiricism of Comtean positivism to couple “fact” with the creative imagination of the individual scientist. In late-nineteenth-century Spain, even the most scientifically enlightened defenders of the Catholic faith saw empirical science as at best presenting only an incomplete view of
Chapter Five The Tragicomedy of Science in 1898 from:
Signs of Science
Abstract: Cajal’s studies of the nervous system trace the limits of scientific realism. The workings of the cellular world obviously have global effects on the body, but the greater the detail of Cajal’s descriptions, the more difficult it becomes for him to explain human behavior in terms of cells. What is it about the branches of neurons that makes individuals think the way they do? Literary realism has similar limits. It may be obvious that environmental factors like alcoholism or poverty have dramatic effects on a person’s (and a character’s) identity, but the realist process of amassing minute observations is often
Chapter Six “Muy Siglo XX”: from:
Signs of Science
Abstract: From the later Unamuno’s perspective, science holds a position of primacy in European culture, a fact that permanently distances Spain from Europe. The “tragic feeling of life” results from the most difficult question ever to face philosophy: how to justify its pursuit of reason as a worthy facet of a life well lived. For Unamuno, reason alone can provide only intellectual, not emotive or spiritual, fulfillment: “el más trágico problema de la filosofía es el de conciliar las necesidades intelectuales con las necesidades afectivas y con las volitivas”
(Del sentimiento trdgico119). Not only does reality present more facets than
Book Title: A Jesuit Garden in Beijing and Early Modern Chinese Culture- Publisher: Purdue University Press
Author(s): Zou Hui
Abstract: In this volume, Hui Zou analyzes historical, architectural, visual, literary, and philosophical perspectives on the Western-styled garden that formed part of the great Yuanming Yuan complex in Beijing, constructed during the Qing dynasty. Designed and built in the late eighteenth century by Italian and French Jesuits, the garden described in this book was a wonderland of multistoried buildings, fountains, labyrinths, and geometrical hills. It even included an open-air theater. Through detailed examination of historical literature and representations, Zou analyzes the ways in which the Jesuits accommodated their design within the Chinese cultural context. He shows how an especially important element of their approach was the application of a linear perspective—the “line-method”—to create the jing, the Chinese concept of the bounded bright view of a garden scene. Hui Zou’s book demonstrates how Jesuit metaphysics fused with Chinese cosmology and broadens our understanding of cultural and religious encounters in early Chinese modernity. It presents an intriguing reflection on the interaction between Western metaphysics and the poetical tradition of Chinese culture. The volume will be of interest to scholars and students in a variety of fields, including literature, philosophy, architecture, landscape and urban studies, and East-West comparative cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wq26b
Chapter Four The Chinese Garden and Western Linear Perspective from:
A Jesuit Garden in Beijing and Early Modern Chinese Culture
Abstract: The Yuanming Yuan integrated the virtue of Round Brightness and the vision of
jing. How was this unity applied to the Western portion of the garden? The fact that the Chinese portion enclosed the Western garden has demonstrated that the Round Brightness acted as the immediate context of this exotic garden. In the Chinese portion, the embodiment of the Round Brightness is the multiplejing, which can be analyzed through their representations. The representation of thejingof the Western garden is a set of twenty copperplates, which were composed with the technique of line method (xianfa), the Chinese translation
Floating Letters from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Gruber Mayer I.
Abstract: The story is told in the Babylonian Talmud, Tractate Abodah Zarah 18a, that when Rabbi Hanina son of Teradyon was set afire by the Romans along with the Torah scroll held to his chest, his students asked him, “What do you see?” He responded, “Leaves of parchment are burning while letters are floating.”¹
Creation and Mortalization: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Mandell Sara R.
Abstract: It is an honor and privilege to write for a
Festschriftpaying tribute to Zev Garber. He is an exceptional scholar; but, more importantly, he is a kind and considerate man, who shows a depth of feeling for those with whom he interacts.
Jeremiah, the Shoah, and the Restoration of Israel from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Sweeney Marvin
Abstract: The Book of Jeremiah is unique among the prophetic books insofar as it presents the oracles and activities of the only one of the prophets to live through the Babylonian siege and destruction of Jerusalem. Other prophets may have lived through such catastrophe, for example, Ezekiel received the news of Jerusalem’s fall while living in Babylonian exile, and Isaiah lived at the time of Samaria’s fall to the Assyrian empire, but Jeremiah is the only prophetic book to give its readers a glimpse of life in the doomed city and the struggles in which its inhabitants engaged as they faced
Jewish-Christian Relations: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Fisher Eugene
Abstract: I have been in active dialogue, both personally and in print, with Professor Zev Garber for over fifteen very satisfying and enriching (certainly for me) years. In the process I have been constructively challenged by and learned much from him. I hope that he has, at least on some occasions, picked up a useful insight or two from me. I consider Garber to be one of the most thoughtful scholars on either “side” of the contemporary and historic Jewish-Christian dialogue. So if the following summary of some of our exchanges, along with some related follow-up points, reveals that he has
The Story of Shofar: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Haberer Joseph
Abstract: This is a
personalaccount, depending to a considerable extent on memory, flawed and partial as it may be.¹ I will describe the challenges, hurdles, frustrations, and satisfactions that have gone into the creation of what is now, perhaps, a premier journal of Jewish studies. I will frame the narrative in the context of the institutions in which this journal
The Scroll of the Shoah: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Edelman Samuel M.
Abstract: This essay is written with Zev Garber in the forefront of my mind. He has always been a whirlwind of energy and activity. For the amount of teaching he does, his level of scholarly productivity is mind-boggling. Not only that, but Zev has been the mentor of many younger scholars. He inspires, he encourages, and he finds ways to get their work published. In short, Zev is an inspiration for scholarly achievement and passion. In the area of interfaith dialogue, Zev has been a pioneer with the Scholars Conference on the Holocaust and the Churches Post-Shoah Midrash Reading Group. In
Once More to the Jabbok: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Knight Henry F.
Abstract: Do midrash.¹ Work dialogically.² Attend to the missing faces.³ These three simple sentences guide my work as a post-Holocaust theologian, educator, and religious professional. Indeed, if by midrash I mean not simply the formal interpretive work of rabbinic tradition but the hermeneutic practice of reading sacred texts and other important documents with an interruptive logic that kindles what the rabbis call the “white fire” of the texts, then these three admonitions describe my understanding of public responsibility in a post-Shoah world.
No Vindication to Venomous Verdict: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Mazor Yair
Abstract: The most powerful components that protrude in this poem by Ronny Someck are the following two: stupendously scorching, scalding emotions and admirably aesthetic intricacy. That tempestuous “quarry” of emotions may be plausibly considered as the reservoir of the “raw materials” that feed the aesthetic mechanism and enable it to propel and operate its complex “engine.” Thus the poem’s erupting emotions act in capacity of a bedrock, on which the aesthetic mechanism is set.
Holocaust or Shoah: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Patterson David
Abstract: During my attendance at the 2001 Scholars’ Conference on the Holocaust and the Churches a survivor told me that she had come to a horrifying realization about the relation between Holocaust scholars and Holocaust survivors. Speaking in a whisper, as though afraid of her own words, she said to me, “I know now what they want us to do: they want us to die.” My initial reaction was shock. For reasons I did not immediately grasp, her words brought to mind one of the conference sessions on Holocaust education. At one point the discussion in that session revolved around the
Hebrew Literature, Academic Politics, and Feminist Criticism: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Fuchs Esther
Abstract: To what extent can we draw on our personal and professional narratives as a valid source of knowledge in order to substantiate a critique of our respective academic fields? How can we possibly crosscut from a subjective to a critical discourse, from emotion to fact and back? The following attempt to account for the unusual relationship between “my self” and “my work,” and between “my work” and “my field” will be partial both epistemologically and chronologically. The possessive pronoun in “my life” suggests ownership and control; yet, it is precisely the relinquishment of this control that I would like to
On Three Early Incidences of Hebrew Script in Western Art from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Lenowitz Harris
Abstract: Though some have theorized that the Hebrew script in the trilingual titulus of the fourteenth-century
Crucifixionby Giotto is the first appearance of Hebrew in Western art, the script in fact began to appear in that circumstance at least two centuries earlier, at the beginning of the twelfth century. Major changes in the Church’s relationship with the Jews occurred between these earliest appearances. For purposes of understanding the significance of the earlier date, the most important change was the renewal (following Jerome [347–420]) of Hebrew study among Christians. At about the same time, with Peter of Cluny (1092–1156)
The Literary Quest for National Revival: from:
Maven in Blue Jeans
Author(s) Morahg Gilead
Abstract: From the earliest settlement period, mainstream Zionist writers have expressed concern that the psychological and ideological deformations that shaped Jewish life in the Diaspora will continue to define Israeli identity and pervert the relationship of the people of Israel to the Land of Israel. This concern, which has its canonical literary expression in Haim Hazaz’s story, “The Sermon” (1942), is still very much in evidence in A. B. Yehoshua’s masterful novel,
Mr. Mani(1990). The fact that two works separated by half a century of enormous change in Israeli life share this particular concern is intriguing enough to invite critical
Chapter Five Javier Marías: from:
Genre Fusion
Abstract: The Spanish daily newspaper
El Paíspublished an editorial by Javier Marías one day after the terrorist attacks at Madrid’s Atocha train station in 2004. Marías located this brutal act in the context of a well-worn routine:
Afterword from:
Genre Fusion
Abstract: In his influential examination of the social and historical conditions that gave rise to the historical novel, Georg Lukács describes the power of a “real mass movement” to influence the way people view and lend importance to history. “The appeal to national independence and national character,” Lukács writes, “is necessarily connected with a re-awakening of national history, with memories of the past, of past greatness, of moments of national dishonour, whether this results in a progressive or reactionary ideology” (25). Although Lukács’s observations are trained on early nineteenth-century movements in Europe, they are equally applicable to the re-emergence of the
Chapter One Sentimental Postmodernism, Identification, and the Feeling Audience from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Postmodern literature and film have often been characterized by a thematic obsession with the disintegration of families, communities, and larger socio-political ties. Rather than painting such dark themes with the brush of tragedy, postmodern texts often adopt a tone of mocking irony or disaffected nihilism. Kathy Acker’s parodic avant-garde fiction, for example, is a complex meditation on contemporary nihilism, on the “nothingness everybody now seems to want” (
In Memoriam to Identity263). The hipness of postmodern disaffection was cemented with the popularity of Quentin Tarantino’s filmPulp Fiction(1994), which turns an absence of morality into fodder for black comedy.
Chapter Three The Piano and Feminist Political Identification from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: One of the most “talked about” feminist films of the 1990s, Jane Campion’s
The Pianoprovoked vehement debate among both film critics and female viewers. At one otherwise tame New Year’s Eve party in 1996, as I described my research to a woman I had just met, she launched into a violent diatribe against the film, which soon attracted five or six others, who began shouting out their own reviews. The fiery conversation ended when another woman stormed off, declaring that she couldn’t bear to see her favorite film so maligned, to see Ada “dragged through the mud” once again.
Chapter Four Northern Exposure and Postmodern Utopian Communities from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Once one of the most popular programs on television and winner of an Emmy for Best Drama in 1991–92,
Northern Exposurewas unusually highbrow television fare, offering viewers weekly philosophical ruminations about cultural pluralism, democracy, gender and sexuality, and the meaning of artistic production. Many television critics have commented thatExposure’s demise after six seasons (1990–95) was less surprising than the fact that this intellectual show ever commanded such a large following. Ranked in the Nielsen top-15 for three seasons, the program spawned several fanclubs, including an Internet newsgroup (alt.tv.northern-exp). While “quality” television programs aimed at affluent and
Chapter Five Kiss of the Spider Woman and the Politics of Camp from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: With its thematic focus on identification and leftist politics, Manuel Puig’s
Kiss of the Spider Womanis a paradigmatic text of sentimental postmodernism. Since the text is also centrally concerned with the politics of mass culture and of homosexuality, it bears some relationship to the critical practice called “camp.” Many critics have analyzedKiss of the Spider Womanas a work of “gay fiction,” but none has attempted to situate Puig’s text or its film and musical adaptations in relation to camp as a gay or queer critique of heterosexual mass culture and its value systems. Any academic discussion of
Conclusion from:
Postmodern Texts and Emotional Audiences
Abstract: Without these detailed case studies of the impact of sentimental postmodernism upon readers and viewers, an analysis of the politics of this hybrid style would be incomplete and highly speculative. My contextual and empirical work with audiences is crucial to the conclusion that much of the political power of sentimental postmodernism can be found in the intense identifications that it fosters both within and across sexual identities, genders, and ethnicities. Much of the current critical work about identification has been produced by textual scholars writing from psychoanalytic perspectives. While these textual theorists have given us valuable insights concerning the ambivalent
Introduction from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Garber Zev
Abstract: Though many articles, reviews, and books are not of one opinion on the life and time of Jesus, there is a general understanding in the dogma of the church and in the quests of the academy that the incarnate Christ of Christian belief lived and died a faithful Jew,¹ and what this says to contemporary Jews and Christians is the focus of this volume depicting Jesus in the context of Judaism and its impact on Jewish and Christian traditional and contemporary views of the other.
2 The Kabbalah of Rabbi Jesus from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Chilton Bruce
Abstract: Why speak of Kabbalah, and then link that to Jesus? The “Kabbalah,” as that term in commonly used, refers to a movement of Jewish mysticism from the twelfth century through the Renaissance (in its initial flowering).¹ Its focus was on the mystical union with God, in a way analogous to the paths advocated by Christian mystics such as Julian of Norwich and Johannes Eckhart. Its character included an intellectual discipline, literary focus on the precise wording of the Torah, and even an academic rigor in the description of the divine spheres into which the initiate was to enter with great
Jesus Stories, Jewish Liturgy, and Some Evolving Theologies until circa 200 CE: from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Zevit Ziony
Abstract: People tell stories, stories about friends, enemies, heroes, and whatnot. Stories play social roles. They can connect people or separate them. Well-told stories can compel people to think about their implications. In societies not given to abstract thinking, stories convey implicit philosophies, theologies, and worldviews. They are also the embryonic source of explicit philosophies, theologies, and worldviews
9 The Jewish and Greek Jesus from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Kerem Yitzchak
Abstract: The purpose of this article is to contrast the actual Jewish Jesus with a Hellenized Greek-speaking Eastern Orthodox Jesus as he is perceived, reinterpreted, and reconceived from the writings of the apostles and early Christianity. While little is known about the actual Jewish Jesus, a lot is known about the portrayal of Jesus in early Christian literature. Unique will be the presentation of Jesus as an icon of Hellenization and a Greek-speaking Christian (Eastern) Orthodox perspective.
13 How Credible Is Jewish Scholarship on Jesus? from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Cook Michael J.
Abstract: I am often asked by Christian scholars why Jews overly accept the Gospels’ basic historical “facts” about Jesus. They ask also in writing—for example, Donald Hagner: “modern Jewish scholars .
16 Before Whom Do We Stand? from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Knight Henry F.
Abstract: Before whom do we stand?¹ After the Holocaust that question, echoing the instructions of Rabbi Eliezer to his disciples, that they know the One before whom they stand when they pray, calls Jews and Christians to reexamine their understandings of each other and of their own grounding traditions. In the reflections that follow, I explore this question, particularly as it is refracted through artist Samuel Bak’s iconic image of the Warsaw Ghetto Boy² and Elie Wiesel’s character, Michael, from
Town Beyond the Wall.Bak has captured with his brush the image of his murdered friend’s face and, in multiple renderings,
17 Edith Stein’s Jewish Husband Jesus from:
The Jewish Jesus
Author(s) Silverman Emily Leah
Abstract: Edith Stein (1891-1942), a philosopher, mystic, and Jewish Carmelite nun, had a queer relationship to Jesus in that her personal religious framework was simultaneously Jewish and Roman Catholic. Her relationship to Jesus was unusual and out of line within the context of Carmelite spiritual practice. She saw Jesus as a Jew before Christian theologians took this fact seriously, but her mystical marriage to him reveals that she advanced in her interior life an unambiguous supersessionism that demands the replacement of Judaism with Christianity. For Stein, this interior devotion to her husband, Jesus the Jew, was a form of spiritual resistance
Chapter Four Writing from:
On the Cultures of Exile,Translation and Writing
Abstract: Writing simultaneously celebrates and questions the metaphysical foundations of Western thought. It asserts the tangibility of the subject that performs the act of writing but it also exposes the limitations of this very subjectivity. When we talk about writing we speak of a corporality mediated through ideas and inscribed in language. We do not see the author who writes, we only hear and listen to the language resonating on the page. The concrete meeting we experience as readers is with the author's language. It is indeed instructive that recent critical trends in literary study—in particular in the study of
Gustav Shpet's Influence on Psychology from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Wertsch James V.
Abstract: Gustav Gustavovich Shpet is re-emerging as a major figure in twentieth-century intellectual history. As the person who introduced Russia to phenomenology, he has had a powerful impact on a wide range of intellectual debates in Russia and beyond. This impact, however, was ignored or consciously downplayed in the USSR. Starting in the 1930s, Shpet became largely invisible in official Soviet scholarly discourse, a tendency that was only exacerbated during the decades after his execution in 1937. This tendency is one of the factors that contributed to Shpet's being so little known in the West today.
Shpet's Departure from Husserl from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Nemeth Thomas
Abstract: Already in the early 1900s, we find references to Husserl in Russian philosophical literature. N.O. Losskii mentioned him in his 1906 work
Obosnovanie intuitivizma, where in the context of a discussion of the structure of judgmental acts Losskii quoted from the former'sLogical Investigations. Shpet's mentor in Kiev and later Moscow, G.I. Chelpanov, a keen observer of contemporary developments abroad in philosophy and psychology, had already presented in 1900 a relatively brief synopsis of Husserl's 1891 treatisePhilosophy of Arithmetic. Translations were soon to follow: the original first volume of theLogical Investigations, the "Prolegomena to Pure Logic," appeared in
The Objective Sense of History: from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Schmid Ulrich
Abstract: Gustav Shpet is well known for his strong opinions. He relentlessly searches for objective truth—and truth is only acceptable to him if it represents life (Shpet,
Istoriia kak problema53). Mere formalistic thinking is highly suspicious to him (Eismann 219). For all his inclination towards rigorous scientific categorization Shpet always ties theory to practice. Even pure logic is in his view not without subject matter: the laws of logic are applicable to logical thinking itself. His philosophy is never autotelic; he unremittingly strives to explain the objective phenomena of the world. In hisOutline of the Development of Russian
Semiotics in Voloshinov and Shpet from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Radunović Dušan
Abstract: The conceptual foundations of Gustav Shpet's general semasiology and Valentin Voloshinov's principle of dialogic speech interaction have rarely been considered from a comparative perspective. This article purports to draw critical attention to the partly convergent, partly divergent trajectories that these two thinkers followed in their approach to language. Whereas the two methodologies and discursive practices may not appear commensurable on the surface, there emerge beneath important philosophical convergences between Shpet and Voloshinov. Notwithstanding the fact that the two thinkers developed their views on language in different directions, coextensive philosophical concerns and common intellectual backgrounds provide a certain justification for a
Excerpts from "Germenevtika i ee problemy" ("Hermeneutics and Its Problems") from:
Gustav Shpet's Contribution to Philosophy and Cutlural Theory
Author(s) Kline George L.
Abstract: St. Augustine in his
De doctrina christiana(397 A.D.) andDe Magistro(389 A.D.) provides us with a kind of textbook of Biblical hermeneutics, organized like a textbook of rhetoric,¹ and although, as befits a textbook, there are no analyses or justifications, but only what might be called results, nevertheless it can be seen from Augustine's divisions and definitions that he saw clearly and thought through a significant number of questions connected with the problems of sign, meaning, sense, understanding, and interpretation. But the same strong interest in the practical role of interpretation which hindered the Alexandrians also prevented Augustine
The Holocaust as a Paradigm for Ethical Thinking and Representation from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Kisantal Tamás
Abstract: Representations of the Holocaust in literature raise some problems that do not emerge when dealing with other historical events—at least not so obviously. On the one hand, we are faced with problems of methods and the cultural consequences of historical representation; on the other hand, there are questions related to certain claims made by scholars of contemporary philosophy of history, asserting the relative character of historical representation. According to this relativist perspective—expressed most clearly in Hayden White's "metahistory"—any kind of historical narrative is legitimate, or more precisely, there is no external viewpoint from which any of these
About Antisemitism in Post-1989 Hungary from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Hargitai Peter
Abstract: What is antisemitism in post-1989 Hungary? I begin with a taxonomical definition: following Fabian Virchow, I use the term "antisemitism" instead of "anti-Semitism" in order to avoid the notion that there is any kind of given "Semitism" with certain characteristics against which the antisemite holds his or her beliefs or acts. Instead, it is the antisemite who constructs the notion of the "Jew" and "Semitism" in a contingent manner (Virchow 162). The standard understanding of the notion is that of "being against Jews." If, however, we regard those definitions by which antisemitism is a "cultural code" (see Volkov), a "worldview"
Mapping the Lines of Fact and Fiction in Holocaust Testimonial Novels from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Richardson Anna
Abstract: In the case of an event as extreme as the Holocaust, one could be forgiven for presupposing that the boundary between factual and fictional modes of representation is sacred in its rigidity. However, it is often the case with survivor narratives that this expectation is far too proscriptive in its division of the realms of fact and fiction; as James E. Young comments, "If there is a line between fact and fiction, it may by necessity be a winding border that tends to bind these two categories as much as it separates them, allowing each side to dissolve occasionally into
Rescue Narratives by Central European Holocaust Survivors from Carpatho-Russia from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Rosen Ilana
Abstract: Although in recent decades scholarly interest in Holocaust narratives is ever growing, the narrative of so-called ordinary people—interviewees of research and documentation authorities, participants in communal memorial books, and authors of singular Holocaust memoirs—have not yet received due attention in this research. Here, I present an analysis of what might be called the central theme of all Holocaust narratives, namely, the narration of rescue acts or events. I analyze twelve narratives told by six survivor-narrators of Carpatho-Russian origins in terms of the relationship they maintain among these elements: dangerous or challenging predicament, narrator's response or nonresponse, degree of
Polyphony in Kertész's Kaddish for an Unborn Child (Kaddish a meg nem született gyermekért) from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Chen Julianna Horváth
Abstract: Imre Kertész's
Kaddish a meg nem született gyermekért(Kaddish for an Unborn Child) is structured as one long monologue on a theme expressed in the book's title and provoked by the seemingly innocent question as to whether the protagonist of the text had children. The answer of the protagonist of the fictional text—a resolute no, also the first word of the novel—is not only a statement of fact but also its transfiguration into an existential decision. In addition to the major theme of this "no"—the "no" of the unborn and unwanted child—Kertész develops a number of
Arendt and Kertész on the Banality of Evil from:
Comparative Central European Holocaust Studies
Author(s) Szilágyi-Gál Mihály
Abstract: In his novel
Fatelessness, Imre Kertész shares a fundamental idea elaborated by Hannah Arendt in herEichmann in Jerusalem: A Report on the Banality of Evil. Arendt defined a particular moral phenomenon as the "banality of evil," which she illustrated with Eichmann's own words and deeds during World War II. Kertész created a fictional character in a novel of autofiction and had his protagonist, as well as other characters in the novel, talk and act in a ways similar to those described by Arendt about Eichmann. Arendt's text is a mixture of journalistic report and philosophical essay. Kertész's text is
Book Title: Mediating Across Difference-Oceanic and Asian Approaches to Conflict Resolution
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: To address the ensuing challenges, this book introduces and explores some of the rich insights into conflict resolution emanating from Asia and Oceania. Although often overlooked, these local traditions offer a range of useful ways of thinking about and dealing with difference and conflict in a globalizing world. To bring these traditions into exchange with mainstream Western conflict resolution, the editors present the results of collaborative work between experienced scholars and culturally knowledgeable practitioners from numerous parts of Asia and Oceania. The result is a series of interventions that challenge conventional Western notions of conflict resolution and provide academics, policy makers, diplomats, mediators, and local conflict workers with new possibilities to approach, prevent, and resolve conflict.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqfzw
Chapter 2 Silence in Western Models of Conflict Resolution from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Väyrynen Tarja
Abstract: Western models of conflict resolution tend to privilege speech over nonverbal means of communication. Speech is thought to be vital for dialogue and, therefore, for conflict resolution and peacebuilding after a violent conflict. A large domain of silent interaction is thus left unnoticed and unexamined by the dominant Western forms of conflict resolution. The complex and underexamined
problématiqueof silence in conflict resolution can be approached by understanding silence as a nonverbal means of communication and as a form of social and political action. Silence relates intimately to reconstructing and narrating a community after violent conflict. Some issues are narrated
Chapter 3 Local Conflict Resolution in the Shadows of Liberal International Peacebuilding from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Richmond Oliver P.
Abstract: Scholars and policy makers concerned with conflict resolution and peacebuilding have recently turned their attention to the importance of local community participation in efforts to generate sustainable peace. But the Western frameworks through which local engagement is promoted displays very specific cultural biases. The dominant form of international engagement with local practices of conflict resolution is strongly shaped by liberal approaches to peacebuilding. Such approaches revolve around a top-down approach that prescribes and then enforces particular understandings of governance. Traditional liberalism seeks to establish a contract between ruler and ruled that enables the preservation of life, liberty, and property. The
Chapter 5 Conflict Resolution and Decolonisation: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Rose Deborah Bird
Abstract: Australian Aboriginal people manage conflict and seek resolution in ways that challenge mainstream Western practice and worldview. Attentiveness to place, relatedness, violence, emotions, and the inclusion of ancestral and nonhuman others are in many respects incompatible with key Western institutions that dominate Aboriginal and Settler people’s lives as a result of colonisation. And yet mutual accommodation between Australian Aboriginal and Western institutions and practices is possible. Globalised commitments to Indigenous people’s rights and the flexibility of institutions—when they are committed to fairness—help generate mutual accommodations across difference. Some Western institutions, particularly the law, have shown a willingness to
Chapter 6 Māori Dispute Resolution: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Jones Carwyn
Abstract: One of the key questions debated in Aotearoa/New Zealand today is how well the Crown has met its obligations under the terms of the Treaty of Waitangi. The treaty requires the Crown to protect Māori interests, including land, natural resources, and cultural interests such as the Māori language. As a result of mounting Māori activism and protest in relation to these issues, a commission of inquiry, the Waitangi Tribunal, was established in 1975 to hear Māori claims. The tribunal, an independent body made up of judges, historians, Māori elders, and other experts, makes recommendations to the government. A separate arm
Chapter 8 Bougainville: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Garasu Lorraine
Abstract: After almost a decade of war (1989–1998) and the bloodiest violent conflict in the South Pacific since the end of the Second World War, Bougainville has gone through a comprehensive peacebuilding process. This process is a rare success story in contemporary postconflict peacebuilding. Because the conflict occurred during a time of statelessness in Bougainville, space was opened for a renaissance of nonstate customary institutions and processes. In the absence of state institutions, local practices resumed their central role in the life of the communities. In many places elders and chiefs, assisted particularly by women and local church people, became
Chapter 9 Crossing Borders: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Sugiono Muhadi
Abstract: Several centuries of interaction across ethnic and religious difference in the Indonesian archipelago have been accompanied by the evolution of local ways of resolving communal disputes and violence. We term the resulting norms and practices ‘local conflict resolution’. The development of these ways of mediating across difference has itself sometimes been violent, yet the accompanying local conflict resolution processes are dynamic and pluralist. They are open to revision and adaptation, including to the input of outside and new forces and actors. For this reason our use of the term ‘local’ does not connote a bounded space that excludes outsiders. Rather,
Chapter 10 Mediating Difference in Uchi Space: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Namatame Norifumi
Abstract: In Japan, the term
uchi(内) is used to denote ‘inside’ or ‘us’ space, as opposed to soto (外), which is ‘outside’ or ‘them’ space. Japan’s relatively recent conflict-prone colonial past revolved around the tension betweenuchiandsoto,between inside and outside. As a result, scholars and practitioners have largely forgotten, or at least neglected, that Japan also possesses a long, unique, and potentially very useful cultural tradition designed to manage conflict withinuchispace. In this chapter we explore the ensuing insights and ask: what might be the broader value ofuchifor rethinking our approaches to managing
Chapter 11 Shu and the Chinese Quest for Harmony: from:
Mediating Across Difference
Author(s) Pan Chengxin
Abstract: In traditional Chinese culture, conflict is often resolved through mediation. Labelled by some scholars as “the most heavily mediated nation on earth”, China has a long and rich tradition of community mediation that can be traced back to Confucianism.¹ Best represented by the sayings and teachings of Confucius (551–479 BC) and Mencius (c. 372–289 BC), Confucianism argues that “harmony is most precious”
(he wei gui)and believes in “harmony with difference”(he er bu tong).While this Confucian emphasis on harmony has long informed China’s community mediation tradition in the past, it has now attracted a renewed interest
Framework from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: The idea that people of different cultures actually think differently has been slow to find its way into the heart of western philosophy. Over the past century or so, anthropologists, sociologists, psychologists, and cognitive scientists have often examined this issue and compared results. But until recently, the majority of philosophers in the West have exempted themselves from the debate, often assuming that philosophy’s kind of thinking is universal and transcultural. Others have claimed to the contrary that philosophy is so distinctively western an enterprise that there is little point to look for it elsewhere. In either case, “nonwestern philosophy” is
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Of the three streams of ethico-religious culture shaping Japanese philosophy over the past fourteen centuries—Shinto, Confucianism, and Buddhism—Buddhism has been the most influential in shaping how the Japanese have thought about the most difficult and universal questions of human existence. This is partly because of the harmonious relationship among the three systems during the ancient and medieval periods. At that time, Japan’s Shinto-related
kamiworship addressed such practical issues as protection and fertility while Confucianism formed the basis of ethics, political theory, and education, with little debate aboutwhichform of Confucianism should be normative. By contrast, during
Kūkai 空海 (774–835) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Likely the most famous Buddhist figure in Japan, Kūkai founded the Japanese ⌜Shingon⌝ (“Truth Word” or “Mantra”) School of Esoteric (⌜Vajrayana⌝) Buddhism. Famed for his calligraphy, his Chinese literary criticism, and his systematic dictionary of Chinese characters, Kūkai was a ritual master par excellence, the subject of innumerable legends, and an influential figure in the emerging polity of Heian Japan. He was posthumously awarded the imperial title Kōbō Daishi (“Great teacher who spread the dharma”). Born to a lower-tier aristocratic family on the island of Shikoku far from the country’s cultural centers, in 791 he enrolled in the imperial college
Kakuban 覚鑁 (1095–1143) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Kakuban was the most creative and influential ⌜Shingon⌝ philosophical thinker after Kūkai*. Born in Kyushu, he became a monk in Kyoto at Ninna-ji. Rising through the ranks to become abbot of the Shingon monastic center on Mt Kōya, he encountered increasing resistance to his institutional, doctrinal, and practical reforms. This led to schism, his lineage eventually becoming known as Shingi (New Interpretation) Shingon.
Myōe 明恵 (1173–1232) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: A Japanese monk ordained in both the ⌜Shingon⌝ and ⌜Kegon⌝ heritages, Myōe was an original and restive thinker who straddled the borders of traditional Buddhism and new directions of his age. His theory of universal salvation supported efforts to recognize the disinherited and marginalized members of society at the same time as he criticized the moral laxity of popular
⌜nenbutsu⌝practices and what he saw as the distortions of the “heretical” ⌜Pure Land⌝ thinker Hōnen.* In its place, he championed a restoration of monastic discipline and advocated a “mantra of light” that focused on rebirth in the ⌜Pure Land⌝ rather
Nakamura Hajime 中村 元 (1912–1999) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hajime Nakamura
Abstract: Nakamura Hajime was one of the leading representatives of twentieth-century scholarship in Buddhology and Indian philosophy. After completing undergraduate studies at Tokyo Imperial University in 1936, he went on to doctoral studies with a 1943 dissertation on
A History of Early Vedānta Philosophyand subsequently took up a teaching post at the same university. After retiring from active teaching in 1973 he served for two years as Japan’s Minister of Culture. Although holding subsequent administrative posts, he devoted the rest of his life to Buddhist scholarship. Never known to be caught in a narrow specialization, Nakamura’s writings range across the
Musō Soseki 夢窻疎石 (1275–1351) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Soseki Musō
Abstract: Musō Soseki was one of the central figures in the extraordinary first generation of native-born and native-trained Japanese Zen masters who oversaw Zen’s emergence as a widespread spiritual and cultural force in fourteenth-century Japan. Born in 1275 to an aristocratic family, he was placed at the age of eight in the nearby Tendai temple of Heien-ji, where he soon displayed the deep interest in sacred literature and profound love of nature that was to characterize his entire life. He received ordination in Nara, but after the difficult death of his ⌜Shingon⌝ master, the course of his life changed drastically. Convinced
Ikkyū Sōjun 一休宗純 (1394–1481) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sōjun Ikkyū
Abstract: Ikkyū lived at a time marked by social unrest, a struggle for power, and large-scale destruction of Kyoto’s treasured monuments. It was also a time of an overturning of traditional values and of great creativity in classical arts and literature. A Rinzai Zen master and poet, he threw himself into the maelstrom of this world of change, emerging as one of the most colorful and unconventional, if also controversial, figures in Japanese Buddhist history. Like his poetry, his life was a mixture of abstract philosophical ideas and earthy sensuality. His life is so covered in legend, due in no small
Takuan Sōhō 沢庵宗彭 (1573–1645) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sōhō Takuan
Abstract: Beginning as a nine-year-old novice monk of poor farmer-warrior origins, by the age of thirty-six Takuan Sōhō had risen to become abbot of Daitoku-ji, the imperial Rinzai Zen monastic complex in Kyoto. Takuan’s Zen was extraordinarily wide-reaching. It covered monastic theory and practice (extensive literary ⌜kōan⌝ practice, dharma talks, popular sermons, temple regulations), literature (poetry, literary criticism, travel diaries, essays, extensive correspondence), martial and cultural arts (swordsmanship, tea ceremony, calligraphy, ink-wash painting, Nō drama criticism), ethics (Daoist and Confucian), Chinese science (metaphysical reflections on the
Book of Changes), and Chinese folk medicine and hygiene.
Bankei Yōtaku 盤珪永琢 (1622–1693) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Yōtaku Bankei
Abstract: Bankei was a Zen monk of the Rinzai School who, after studying with both Japanese and immigrant Chinese Zen masters, initially settled into a quiet life away from the major cities, tending to the spiritual needs of his local community. But in his fifties he was invited to preside over major teaching monasteries in Kyoto and Edo (later Tokyo) and quickly became a famed master of many in both metropolitan areas. Bankei is famous for his teaching of what he called the unborn mind. Humans determine or significantly impact the nature of their own reality by their attention. This principle
Hakuin Ekaku 白隠慧鶴 (1685–1768) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Ekaku Hakuin
Abstract: Born into a working class family, Hakuin Ekaku was attracted to Buddhism at an early age, studying its literature before dedicating himself to Zen practice at the age of twenty-two. Confident of his “awakening” two years later, he went to see the reclusive Zen master Shōju Rōjin who at first ridiculed him, but under whose direction he achieved his spiritual breakthrough. Hakuin eventually returned to his hometown where he had a long career as a Zen master in a small, rundown temple, attracting students from throughout Japan. In his later years, he began to make drawings of himself and of
Suzuki Daisetsu 鈴木大拙 (1870–1966) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Daisetsu Suzuki
Abstract: Suzuki Daisetsu (Teitarō) enjoyed an extraordinarily productive career bringing Zen Buddhist ideas to the West. Born in Kanazawa, he grew up with Nishida Kitarō*, Japan’s most famous modern philosopher. While taking classes at Tokyo Imperial University, Suzuki began a life of practice as a Zen layman under Zen Master Shaku Sōen from Engaku-ji in Kamakura, who attended the World’s Parliament of Religions in Chicago in 1893, where he met Paul Carus, the editor of
The Monist. He then introduced Carus to Suzuki, who later served as his collaborator and translator for several years. Returning to Japan, he eventually settled permanently
Hisamatsu Shin’ichi 久松真一 (1889–1980) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Shin’ichi Hisamatsu
Abstract: Born into a Pure Land Buddhist family and raised in Gifu Prefecture, already as a child Hisamatsu intended to become a ⌜Pure Land⌝ priest. As he came into contact with scientific knowledge and critical reasoning, however, he found his naïve beliefs shattered and decided to pursue the study of philosophy under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University. In 1915, despairing of the limits of rational thought, Hisamatsu took Nishida’s advice and began to practice Zen under Ike gami Shōzan at the Rinzai training monastery of Myōshin-ji in Kyoto. During his first intense retreat there, as he was to recount later in
Karaki Junzō 唐木順三 (1904–1980) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Junzō Karaki
Abstract: Karaki Junzō was active throughout the Shōwa period more as a critic than a philosopher professionally trained in western sources. He studied under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University and remained indebted to the thinking of Kyoto School philosophers throughout his life. At the same time, the religious ideas of Dōgen’s* Zen and Shinran’s* ⌜Pure Land⌝ teachings are also reflected in the development of his thought. Beginning with early works on modern and contemporary literary criticism, in later years he turned to medieval literature and to figures like the haiku poet, Bashō. Throughout his career, his abiding concern was with aesthetics
Hōnen 法然 (1133–1212) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Often referred to as the founder of a movement scholars call “Kamakura Buddhism” and revered by the ⌜Pure Land⌝ sect of Buddhism as its founder, Hōnen in fact spent his entire adult life as a traditional monk in the Tendai School, understanding his ideas to be consistent with that intellectual tradition. Hōnen was thoroughly familiar with the exoteric-esoteric mix of Tendai beliefs and practices, and while some have argued that this way of thinking was so pervasive that no one would have been able to conceptualize outside this paradigm, there is much to suggest that Hōnen did indeed offer his
Kiyozawa Manshi 清沢満之 (1863–1903) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Manshi Kiyozawa
Abstract: Kiyozawa Manshi, who lived and wrote in the last decades of the nineteenth century, left an impression on generations of philosophers after him, including Nishida Kitarō*. As one of the first generation studying western philosophy at Tokyo University, he published on questions and thinkers at the core of philosophy, writing at a time when the Japanese philosophical vocabulary had not yet been settled. At the same time he was a devoted practitioner of ⌜Pure Land⌝ Buddhism, and cut short his graduate studies in philosophy to work for the Ōtani branch of the ⌜Shin⌝ sect, which entrusted him with setting up
Nakae Tōju 中江藤樹 (1608–1648) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Tōju Nakae
Abstract: Though born in a peasant village in Ōmi province, Nakae Tōju was adopted by his grandfather, a samurai living on the island of Shikoku, where Tōju was trained in Confucian thought for service to the local daimyō. He has the distinction of being the first major Japanese proponent of the mind-centered, intuitive philosophy of Wang Yangming (1472–1529). Unlike Yangming’s more secular epistemology advocating the exercise of “innate ethical knowledge,” Tōju affirmed along more spiritual lines that our ability to know what is good and act on that knowledge is due to “the divine light of heaven,” one of his
Kumazawa Banzan 熊沢蕃山 (1619–1691) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Banzan Kumazawa
Abstract: A major Japanese advocate of the neo-Confucian philosophy of Wang Yangming, Kumazawa Banzan gravitated from the metaphysical toward more practical, sociopolitical, and economic applications of that intuitive, mind-centered system. Rather than the doctrinal innovations, often very spiritual in nature, advanced by his teacher, Nakae Tōju*, Banzan’s major works,
Questions and Answers on the Great Learning and Japanese Writings on Accumulating Righteousness, spell out his conviction that a true philosophy is one that can be applied to the real and pressing issues of the day. Banzan took his philosophical commitment to practical political concerns seriously and continued to speak out even
Arai Hakuseki 新井白石 (1657–1725) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakuseki Arai
Abstract: When the Italian priest Giovanni Battista Sidotti arrived in Japan to revive Christian missionary activities, he was
Ogyū Sorai 荻生徂徠 (1666–1728) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Sorai Ogyū
Abstract: Ogyū Sorai formulated one of the most politically oriented, authoritarian statements of Confucian philosophy to emerge from Japan. While claiming to do little more than offer a systematic exposition of the meanings of philosophical terms in the Six Classics, texts that he purportedly took as an absolute standard for all sociopolitical discourse, he in fact set forth a philosophical vision that would be highly useful to a ruling elite eager to have its policies accepted by all as sacred. At every turn, we see Sorai extolling the “early kings” of ancient China as sages who formulated a ⌜Way⌝ that later
Teshima Toan 手島堵庵 (1718–1786) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Toan Teshima
Abstract: Born into a prosperous merchant family of Kyoto, Teshima Toan became a follower of Ishida Baigan* in early adulthood and eventually inherited the leadership of the
⌜Shingaku⌝movement as a whole. After Toan began teaching in 1760 he initiated a regular program of lectures on key Confucian texts and Japanese literary classics. In addition, he published several moral tracts in the Japanese vernacular, some of which were targeted specifically at women and children. Baigan’s successor also established the practice of traveling lectures, which ultimately led to the popularization of Shingaku ethical ideas throughout both rural and urban Japan.
Miura Baien 三浦梅園 (1723–1789) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Baien Miura
Abstract: Miura Baien lived in the small village of Tominaga (present-day Oita prefecture) on the island of Kyushu, where he taught and developed his philosophical ideas. In the meantime, he maintained contacts with neo-Confucian scholars, one of whom was his good friend the astronomer Asada Gōryū (1734–1799), who independently discovered the relationship of the length of a planet’s orbit to its distance from the sun. Baien’s major writings comprise a work on ethics called
Daring Words, an exposition of his own metaphysics,Deep Words, and a companion volume,Additional Words.
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Four elements of ancient Japanese culture formed the basis for a series of philosophical reflections and analyses that culminated in the eighteenth century with a movement called Native Studies. The first was
⌜kami⌝worship, the ritual reverence shown to awe-inspiring loci of spiritual presence, whether celestial deities, natural phenomena, ghosts or spirits, or even human artifacts associated with a person of great charisma. The term “Shinto” or “kami no michi” means literally the “Way of thekami.” The second element was the valorization of the ancient Japanese language in the writing and appreciation of⌜waka⌝poetry. The third element was
Motoori Norinaga 本居宣長 (1730–1801) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Norinaga Motoori
Abstract: Motoori Norinaga, the preeminent scholar of the early modern nativist movement known as
Kokugaku,was born to a cotton wholesaler in the town of Matsusaka. In 1852, he went to Kyoto to study medicine, where he also enrolled in the school of the Confucian scholar Hori Keizan (1689–1757). Through the course of his studies, which included native poetic and prose traditions, Norinaga was informed by two hermeneutical approaches. The first was that of Ogyū Sorai*, who advocated a return to the study of the original, primary texts of Chinese Confucianism in order to ascertain the “true facts” of the
Fujitani Mitsue 富士谷御杖 (1768–1823) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Fujitani Mitsue
Abstract: Fujitani Mitsue, or Narimoto as he was also known, was born into a prominent family of intellectuals in Kyoto. His father, Fujitani Nariakira was an erudite and imaginative scholar who authored several works analyzing Japanese poetic language in the light of new grammatical categories of his own device. His uncle, Minagawa Kien, was a well-known Confucian scholar who also had a strong interest in linguistic theory. The Fujitani family served as hereditary retainers of the Yanagawa domain, a position that provided them with a comfortable living. As a youth, Mitsue was schooled in the most important cultural practices of his
Hirata Atsutane 平田篤胤 (1776–1843) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Atsutane Hirata
Abstract: Hirata Atsutane, one of the most influential religious and political figures of the first half of the nineteenth century, was active in establishing what would later come to be known as restoration Shinto. Born the fourth son of a samurai retainer, he later moved to Edo, where he was adopted by Hirata Tōbei, the head of a small academy that propagated the teachings of Yamaga Sokō*, an advocate of ancient Confucian learning. He styled himself a student of Motoori Norinaga*, whose academy he entered three years after the latter’s death. Thus began his involvement in the movement for Native Studies
Nakae Chōmin 中江兆民 (1847–1901) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Chōmin Nakae
Abstract: Nakae Chōmin (Nakae Tokusuke) was a journalist, an advocate of natural rights, free thinker, and politician. From 1862, he began to study “Western Learning” and the French language. As part of a government mission to Europe, he lived in France from 1871 to 1874, during which time he studied law, philosophy, history, and literature. After returning to Japan he opened his own school for French language studies, and undertook a translation of Rousseau’s
Social Contract. Through articles and editorials for a number of newspapers, Chōmin made an important intellectual contribution to the popular rights movement of the 1870s and early
Inoue Tetsujirō 井上哲次郎 (1855–1944) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Tetsujirō Inoue
Abstract: Inoue Tetsujirō was one of the most important figures in the formation of philosophy as an academic discipline in Japan. His concern with the confusion surrounding philosophical concepts and categories in the Meiji period prompted him to compile several dictionaries of philosophy. He studied in Germany from 1884 to 1890 under Eduard von Hartmann, after which he assumed a post at Tokyo University, which he held until retirement in 1923. During those years he was active in philosophical discussions, served as president of the Philosophical Society, and exerted a powerful role as ideologue for the Meiji government.
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Because of the important place it is recognized to have in the intellectual history of Japan, the Kyoto School has been extracted from the rest of twentieth-century philosophy for special treatment. Nishida Kitarō* and the circle of thinkers he inspired at the University of Kyoto are often considered Japan’s first original philosophers in the modern sense of the term, and have become known as a bridge between East and West. While their originality and their faithfulness to disparate traditions remain matters of dispute, their impact on philosophical discussions within Japan and outside the country is unquestioned. Kyoto School thought most
Nishida Kitarō 西田幾多郎 (1870–1945) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kitarō Nishida
Abstract: Nishida Kitarō, generally considered Japan’s greatest academic philosopher, made it his lifelong task to wed the spiritual awareness cultivated through a decade of Zen practice with modern philosophy. From Zen he had come to appreciate the living unity of experience that precedes dichotomies of mind and body, subject and object; in western philosophy he recognized the importance of logical thinking, the critical examination of preconceptions, and a comprehensive vision of the world. Beginning with the experiment of his maiden work,
An Inquiry into the Good, to see all of reality as “pure experience,” each step of Nishida’s way posed new
Tanabe Hajime 田辺 元 (1885–1962) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hajime Tanabe
Abstract: Tanabe Hajime was first drawn to philosophy through his study of mathematics and the natural sciences. His early work on the philosophy of science brought him into contact with the neo-Kantians, which inspired him to rethink Kant’s transcendental logic in the light of Husserl’s phenomenology, Bergson’s vitalism, and the original philosophy of Nishida Kitaro*. After Nishida invited him to join the faculty at Kyoto University, he was able to fulfill his dream of studying in Europe. Although quickly disillusioned with Husserl, he was befriended by the young Heidegger.
Mutai Risaku 務台理作 (1890–1974) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Risaku Mutai
Abstract: Mutai Risaku, a peripheral figure of the Kyoto School, was first attracted to psychology, but during his time under Nishida Kitarō* at Kyoto University he was persuaded to secure a solid basis in philosophy from Kant to the present day. In 1923 he took a post at Ōtani University, leaving three years later for studies in France and Germany, where he worked for a time directly under Husserl. He later taught at Taipei Imperial University before assuming a post at the Tokyo University of Education in 1932. During these years, under the direction of Tanabe Hajime*, he continued his studies
Miki Kiyoshi 三木 清 (1897–1945) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kiyoshi Miki
Abstract: Miki Kiyoshi is a tragic figure among the Kyoto School philosophers. He studied under Nishida Kitarō* and Tanabe Hajime* in Kyoto and then under Martin Heidegger in Freiburg. He was gifted with both keen philosophical insight and superior writing skills. In 1930 he lost his job as a lecturer at Hōsei University and was imprisoned on the trumped-up charge that he actively supported the Communist party. Shortly after his release in the same year, his wife passed away. Unable to resume his teaching duties, he began to work as a journalist. In 1942, he was sent against his will to
Nishitani Keiji 西谷啓治 (1900–1990) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Keiji Nishitani
Abstract: Nishitani Keiji was born 27 February 1900 in a small town on the Japan Sea. He was fourteen when his father died of tuberculosis, a disease from which Nishitani himself suffered as a young man. As a high-school student, Nishitani was attracted to Zen through the writings of D.T. Suzuki* and at the same time read widely in western sources out side the curriculum. Drawn to philosophy by a volume of Nishida Kitarō’s* essays, he enrolled in the department of philosophy at Kyoto University where he studied under Nishida and Tanabe Hajime*, graduating with a thesis on Schelling. In the
Tsujimura Kōichi 辻村公一 (1922–2010) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kōichi Tsujimura
Abstract: Tsujimura Kōichi studied philosophy at Kyoto University under Tanabe Hajime,* and went on to assume his teacher’s chair from 1948 until retiring in 1982. More formative for his thinking, however, was the Zen he practiced with Hisamatsu Shin’ichi,* coupled with the thought of Martin Heidegger, whom he knew personally from travels in Germany. His translations and essays often elucidated Zen texts and Heidegger’s thought in the light of one another to introduce novel interpretations of both. For example, Tsujimura translated Heidegger’s term
Gelassenheit, and the book based on it, using a Buddhist term for liberation. In addition to translations of
Ueda Shizuteru 上田閑照 (1926– ) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Shizuteru Ueda
Abstract: Ueda Shizuteru is the central figure of the third generation of the Kyoto School. A student and successor of Nishitani Keiji* and a foremost interpreter of Nishida Kitarō*, Ueda inherited their commitment to bringing western philosophy and religion into dialogue with the practice and thought of ⌜Mahayana⌝ Buddhism. The son of a ⌜Shingon⌝ Buddhist scholar, Ueda himself, like Nishida and Nishitani, has engaged in an intense and prolonged practice of Zen. His involvement in a group for lay practitioners at Shokoku-ji monastery in Kyoto continues to this day with the monthly talks he gives on the classical texts of the
Watsuji Tetsurō 和辻哲郎 (1889–1960) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Tetsurō Watsuji
Abstract: Watsuji Tetsurō was not only Japan’s premier ethical theorist and historian of ethics in the first half of the twentieth century, but also an astute philosopher of culture and interpreter of religious traditions and practices. Born the son of a country physician in a village near the Inland Sea, at age sixteen he ventured out to the metropolis of Tokyo to study at its First Higher School and then the Imperial University, graduating in 1912 with a thesis on Schopenhauer’s pessimism. Forty years later he published a memoir of his philosophy professor there, Raphael von Koeber. In his student years
Ichikawa Hakugen 市川白弦 (1902–1986) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Hakugen Ichikawa
Abstract: Ichikawa Hakugen was a Rinzai Zen priest, professor at Hanazono University, and political activist who made his mark as the foremost scholar of “Imperial-Way Zen.” In his writings he chronicled Zen support for Japanese imperialism in the first half of the twentieth century and pushed the issue of Zen’s war responsibility. He analyzed the Zen approach to religious liberation and society, political ramifications of Buddhist metaphysical and logical constructs, limitations of Buddhist ethics, traditional relations between Buddhism and the Japanese government, and the philosophical system of Nishida Kitarō*.
Imanishi Kinji 今西錦司 (1902–1992) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kinji Imanishi
Abstract: In 1941, within a year of completing his doctorate at Kyoto Imperial University with a specialization in entomology and ecology, Imanishi Kinji published perhaps his best-known and lasting contribution in the form of a philosophy of nature,
The World of Living Things.In it he argued that since all things arise together, the “life” of the organic and inorganic should be considered as part of a single interactive world. Living subjects and the environment were part of each other, flowed into each other, and created a particular world over which each organism had some control, which he termed its “autonomy.”
Ienaga Saburō 家永三郎 (1913–2002) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Saburō Ienaga
Abstract: Historian and philosophical critic, Ienaga Saburō is one of those modern thinkers who defies classification. He is especially well known for his open criticisms of Japanese narratives of World War II. In 1953 he wrote a Japanese history textbook, which was censored by the Ministry of Education due to “factual errors,” and Ienaga filed a lawsuit against the Ministry in a well-publicized case. The selection below focuses on another side of Ienaga and offers in translation an excerpt from the second chapter of his ambitious first book,
The Development of the Logic of Negation in Japanese Thought, which was published
Maruyama Masao 丸山真男 (1914–1996) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Masao Maruyama
Abstract: Few intellectuals in Japan have left such a conspicuous mark on postwar intellectual discourse as Maruyama Masao. He is known for his active political stance in the postwar period as well as for his academic accomplishments. During the first part of his academic career, he focused on an analysis of early-modern and modern Japanese thought, inspired by the methods of Marx, Mannheim, and Weber. Later on, he devoted more energy to an elucidation of the particularities of Japanese intellectual history as a whole. Throughout his lifetime, he remained an opinion-leader of the liberal left.
Kimura Bin 木村 敏 (1931– ) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Bin Kimura
Abstract: Perhaps no thinker in twentieth-century Japan better represents the interface between psychology and philosophy than Kimura Bin. While maintaining his psychiatric practice and publishing widely on abnormal psychology, particularly on schizophrenia and depersonalization, his wider philosophical interests are evident from his early works. In foray after foray into the mysteries of the self—its construction and its breakdown, its awareness and its scotosis—Kimura is not an armchair philosopher but a doctor engaged in the experiences of his patients. If there is one constant theme running through his reading of twentieth-century philosophers, it is the conviction that a true phenomenology
Overview from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: Ever since Socrates accepted the Delphic oracle’s challenge to “know thyself,” the issue of personal identity has been part of the western philosophical repertoire. That issue typically broke down into two fundamental questions. The first was one of individual identity: who am I? The second was one of universal identity: what characterizes our humanity? Only in recent history has the West added questions of cultural, linguistic, and ethnic identity: for example, what does it mean to be French Canadian? Three circumstances have supported this rather new enterprise. The first is the rise of the social sciences, especially cultural anthropology, sociology,
Overcoming Modernity: from:
Japanese Philosophy
Abstract: A trio of literary critics from the magazine
Literary World—Kawakami Tetsutarō, Kobayashi Hideo, and Kamei Katsuichirō—organized a symposium in 1942 to discuss “Overcoming Modernity.” In July, they gathered a group of thirteen leading intellectuals from various fields including literary criticism, history, physics, music, and philosophy. They had no clear agenda, either political or intellectual. Mainly, they wanted to explore what “modernity” means: its roots in Europe, its impact on Japan, and its meaning for the future. They did not come to the meeting nor leave it with any consensus on how, or even whether Japan should “overcome” or
Karatani Kōjin 柄谷行人 (1941– ) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kōjin Karatani
Abstract: The writings of Karatani Kōjin, like those of many other literary critics today, cross disciplinary boundaries and challenge the presuppositions of academic philosophy. Educated in economics and English literature at Tokyo University, Karatani has exerted an influence far beyond his native land and original fields of training. At Yale University in the mid-1970s he worked alongside Paul de Man and Fredric Jameson on problems associated with formalism and structuralism. His
Transcritique: On Kant and Marx(2003) was a seminal work for thinkers like Slavoj Zizek who practice philosophy as cultural criticism. Teaching at Columbia University since 1990 and occasionally at
Hiratsuka Raichō 平塚らいてう (1886–1971) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Raichō Hiratsuka
Abstract: Hiratsuka Raichō (née Hiratsuka Haru) is Japan’s most celebrated feminist activist of modern times. She began her public career in 1911 with the organization of Seitō (The Bluestocking Society), a literary movement that announced the birth of the women’s liberation movement in Japan. A fierce individualism coupled with the self-effacing practice of Zen meditation combined to sustain her engagement in women’s questions throughout her adult life. During the first decade of the twentieth century, she stood up for women’s right to genuine romantic love. She herself fell in love with Okumura Hiroshi, a painter five years her junior, and, in
Yamakawa Kikue 山川菊栄 (1890–1980) from:
Japanese Philosophy
Author(s) Kikue Yamakawa
Abstract: Yamakawa Kikue (née Morita Kikue), a committed socialist, was one of the most influential opinion leaders and social activists of the twentieth century. Stimulated by firsthand experience of the conditions of the “mill girls,” she strived both in her writings and through participation in social movements to improve the position of women and to heighten awareness of social injustices. Yamakawa is also known for her publication of an oral history of women from lower-class samurai in late Tokugawa Japan. An open debate with Itō Noe, a member of the Bluestocking Society, concerning the abolition of legalized prostitution launched her into
LIFE WRITING AND THE MAKING OF COMPANIONABLE OBJECTS: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) GEORGE KENNETH M.
Abstract: This essay explores some of the cultural, political, and ethical work of life writing that goes on in national and transnational art worlds. We commonly think of life writing as forms or fragments of discourse that depict the lives of human actors, and that give actors’ experiences intelligibility, purpose, and recognition. But life writing also plays a part in the making of what I call “companionable objects”—those things with which we have ethical and affective ties. Things, too, can be actors, and mingle with us in our everyday lifeworlds and publics. They, too, gain intelligibility and purpose from life
“THESE PEOPLE ARE MY PEOPLE, THESE PLACES ARE MY PLACES”: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) SLABBERT MATHILDA
Abstract: In the introduction to
Free-Lancers and Literary Biography in South Africa,Stephen Gray notes that “The practice of literary biography in South Africa is poorly developed, often because uncomplicated nostalgia has to us become inhibited, even taboo. . . . The appalling past has phased into our liberated future” (xii). Published post-apartheid in 1999, Gray’s comment was relevant to most forms of biographical writing in South Africa. A decade later, the local publishing industry bears witness to a marked increase in biographical (and autobiographical) publications. Writings about and by subjects from every arena of life range from glossy, sensationalized celebrity
UNDER NEW MANAGEMENT: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) SILVA TONY SIMOES DA
Abstract: Alfred J. Lopez begins his introduction to
Postcolonial Whiteness: A Critical Reader on Race and Empireby stating “Whiteness is not, yet we continue for many reasons to act as though it is” (1). He is especially interested in “what happens to whiteness after empire,” and proposes that it be understood as a dynamic relation of power. Despite the critical scrutiny it has attracted from whiteness studies, the racial category retains much of its ideological force. “The concept of whiteness as a cultural hegemon,” Lopez argues, is manifest in “its lingering, if somewhat latent, hegemonic influence over much of the
MARTIN AMIS, MIMETIC CONTRACTS, AND LIFE WRITING PACTS: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) HOWES CRAIG
Abstract: My memory was actually of a story by Martin Amis called “The Last Days of Muhammad Atta,” which had appeared in
“DON’T WRITE THIS”: from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) VAN KLINKEN GERRY
Abstract: In the dim coolness of his lounge room he had talked animatedly about many interesting topics in Kupang’s modern history—Chinese shops in the 1950s, schools, newspapers, social rankings in town, civil servants, the Japanese occupation. As I stood up to leave and put away my notebook, the conversation suddenly turned to February and March 1966, the months when the military suppression of the Indonesian Communist Party (Partai Komunis Indonesia, PKI) reached its height all over Indonesia. “Don’t write this,” he said. Then he told me: “I was forced to witness five mass executions. PKI members and activists were taken
THE JIWEN OF SHEN CHENG FOR HIS DAUGHTER AZHEN from:
Locating Life Stories
Author(s) WU PEI-YI
Abstract: The practice of jiwen, or libation addresses, was probably universal; when emperors visited sacred mountains, for example, no ceremony would be complete without a jiwen, in which the sovereign paid compliment to the spirit of the sacred place. But a subgroup of jiwen—affective jiwen—are written by a close relative of the dead. Only in these do we see a narrative of the two entwined lives. Affective jiwen can be read as autobiography for the addresser, the speaker, and as biography for the addressee.
Introduction from:
Great Fool
Abstract: Generations have called this beggar-monk of the early nineteenth century “Ryōkan-san,” the informal suffix “
san” expressing affectionate respect. Only two other eminent Buddhist figures in Japanese history have received this particular honor: “Kōbō-san” or “Daishi-san,” Kūkai, the ninth-century founder of Shingon Buddhism, who is remembered in popular legends as a savior–miracle worker; and “Ikkyū-san,” the fifteenth-century Zen monk whose eccentric life-style has inspired numerous folk stories in which he is depicted as a marvelously quick-witted child novice. Ryōkan is a singularly attractive figure. Minakami Tsutomu, the celebrated contemporary novelist, explains why, despite countless earlier works examining the minutest details
Curious Accounts of the Zen Master Ryōkan from:
Great Fool
Author(s) Yoshishige Kera
Abstract: Despite Ryōkan’s enduring reputation as a poet and calligrapher, it is above all the character of his daily life, its essential naturalness and simplicity, that earned him the affection of the men, women, and children of his native Echigo and continues to attract Japanese of all ages and backgrounds. Our principal firsthand source for Ryōkan’s day-to-day existence is
Ryōkan zenji kiwa(Curious Accounts of the Zen Master Ryōkan), a short document composed around 1845 or 1846 by Kera Yoshishige (1810–1859), the son of Ryōkan’s friend and supporter Kera Shukumon (1765–1819). Ryōkan was a frequent guest in the Kera
Letters from:
Great Fool
Abstract: Numerous letters by Ryōkan have survived. The majority of these are “thank you” notes for an assortment of foodstuffs, clothes, and household articles, as well as tobacco and medicine supplied by Ryōkan’s many friends and patrons. The following selection focuses on those letters that reveal the character of Ryōkan’s daily life and of his social relations. Certain letters note the name and village of the recipient, others only the month and day (never the year) on which they were composed. Bracketed numbers refer to numbers in Tōgō Toyoharu,
Ryōkan zenshū2, pp. 321–392; sources for letters not included in
Reflections on Buddhism from:
Great Fool
Abstract: Ryōkan was critical of the Buddhist temple establishment of his day, regarding it as degraded. Yet, as the following works reveal, he remained committed to Buddhism itself and to the monk’s vocation. “Invitation to the Way” (Tōgō Toyoharu,
Ryōkan zenshū1, no. 1) is a summary of the history of Buddhism, and Zen in particular, in which Ryōkan assesses the current situation of Buddhism in Japan. “The Priesthood” (Zenshū1, no. 2) presents Ryōkan’s criticism of the contemporary Buddhist clergy. “On Begging One’s Food” (Zenshū1, no. 102) explains Ryōkan’s views on the importance of the monk’s begging practice. Ryōkan
Book Title: Relative Histories-Mediating History in Asian American Family Memoirs
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Davis Rocío G.
Abstract: Relative Histories focuses on the Asian American memoir that specifically recounts the story of at least three generations of the same family. This form of auto/biography concentrates as much on other members of one’s family as on oneself, generally collapses the boundaries conventionally established between biography and autobiography, and in many cases—as Rocío G. Davis proposes for the auto/biographies of ethnic writers—crosses the frontier into history, promoting collective memory. Davis centers on how Asian American family memoirs expand the limits and function of life writing by reclaiming history and promoting community cohesion. She argues that identity is shaped by not only the stories we have been told, but also the stories we tell, making these narratives important examples of the ways we remember our family’s past and tell our community’s story. In the context of auto/biographical writing or filmmaking that explores specific ethnic experiences of diaspora, assimilation, and integration, this work considers two important aspects: These texts re-imagine the past by creating a work that exists both in history and as a historical document, making the creative process a form of re-enactment of the past itself. Each chapter centers on a thematic concern germane to the Asian American experience: the narrative of twentieth-century Asian wars and revolutions, which has become the subtext of a significant number of Asian American family memoirs (Pang-Mei Natasha Chang’s Bound Feet and Western Dress, May-lee and Winberg Chai’s The Girl from Purple Mountain, K. Connie Kang’s Home Was The Land of Morning Calm, Doung Van Mai Elliott’s The Sacred Willow); family experiences of travel and displacement within Asia in the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, which unveil a history of multiple diasporas that are often elided after families immigrate to the United States (Helie Lee’s Still Life With Rice, Jael Silliman’s Jewish Portraits, Indian Frames, Mira Kamdar’s Motiba’s Tattoos); and the development of Chinatowns as family spaces (Maxine Hong Kingston’s China Men, Lisa See’s On Gold Mountain, Bruce Edward Hall’s Tea that Burns). The final chapter analyzes the discursive possibilities of the filmed family memoir ("family portrait documentary"), examining Lise Yasui’s A Family Gathering, Ruth Ozeki Lounsbury’s Halving the Bones, and Ann Marie Fleming’s The Magical Life of Long Tack Sam. Davis concludes the work with a metaliterary engagement with the history of her own Asian diasporic family as she demonstrates the profound interconnection between forms of life writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmkt
Chapter 5 The Chinese in America: from:
Relative Histories
Abstract: In his book,
Margins and Mainstreams: Asian American History and Culture(1994), Gary Okihiro explains that “Asian American history is more than an assemblage of dates, acts, names; it is more than an accounting of the deeds of the famous and wealthy; it is more than an abstraction from the realm of the senses to the reaches of theory and discourse. To be sure, Asian American history is all that, and more” (93). He then describes the kind of history that connects with the practice of family memoirs, what he calls “family album history”, which is “inspired by the strands
Book Title: On Diary- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): DURNIN KATHERINE
Abstract: On Diary is the second collection in English of the groundbreaking and profoundly influential work of one of the best-known and provocative theorists of autobiography and diary. Ranging from the diary’s historical origins to its pervasive presence on the Internet, from the spiritual journey of the sixteenth century to the diary of Anne Frank, and from the materials and methods of diary writing to the question of how diaries end, these essays display Philippe Lejeune’s expertise, eloquence, passion, and humor as a commentator on the functions, practices, and significance of keeping or reading a diary. Lejeune is a leading European critic and theorist of diary and autobiography. His landmark essay, "The Autobiographical Pact," has shaped life writing studies for more than thirty years, and his many books and essays have repeatedly opened up new vistas for scholarship. As Michael Riffaterre notes, "Lejeune’s work on autobiography is the most original, powerful, effective approach to a difficult subject. . . . His style is very personal, lively. It grabs the reader as scholarship rarely does. Lejeune’s erudition and methodology are impeccable." Two substantial introductory essays by Jeremy Popkin and Julie Rak place Lejeune’s work within its critical and theoretical traditions and comment on his central importance within the fields of life writing, literary genetic studies, and cultural studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqmvp
COUNTING AND MANAGING from:
On Diary
Abstract: In business, it is important to keep track of transactions and to know the status of your inventory. Which means making a record and dating it. Accounting serves two purposes: an internal purpose (business management based on full and accurate information) and an external purpose (to stand as evidence in the event of a dispute). This function remains unchanged through history, from the earliest known accounting systems in Chaldea or ancient Egypt right up until today, when our banks obligingly send us regular statements of credits
SPIRITUAL JOURNALS IN FRANCE FROM THE SIXTEENTH TO THE EIGHTEENTH CENTURIES from:
On Diary
Abstract: 1) the “journal” or “diary” form, defined as a
series of dated traces; that is, a practice of making notations extended over time: a single notation, such as Blaise Pascal’sMémorialdated 23 November 1654 “from about ten o’clock until about midnight” is not, properly speaking, a journal;
O MY PAPER! from:
On Diary
Abstract: I stress the idea of “beginnings” because it touches on something complex and obscure: the birth of the personal journal (Pachet). Autobiography, a public act, has a solid history based on events
MARC-ANTOINE JULLIEN: from:
On Diary
Abstract: What use have you made of the last twenty-four hours? Could you say how long you have spent on each of your activities? Try hard to remember and give a precise figure for each of them, with the help of an analytical classification of the various types of activities. Write down those figures today, tomorrow, and the next few days on the columns of a table that will enable you to record daily variations and calculate averages. Then examine the results and ask yourself whether you have put your time to good use, and whether you have got the balance
HOW DO DIARIES END? from:
On Diary
Abstract: The question occurred to me in 1997 as I was preparing an exhibit called
Un Journal à soi[A diary of one’s own], created by the Association pour l’Autobiographie at the Lyon public library (Lejeune and Bogaert). My approach was didactic: I wanted to construct a story where the spectator would follow the different phases in the life of a diary, just as in the good old days, in primary school, they used to show us the workings of the digestive system, beginning with a mouthful of bread. A story, Aristotle will tell you, must have a beginning, a middle,
AUTO-GENESIS: from:
On Diary
Abstract: How does one become a “geneticist?” Why didn’t I become one earlier? And have I really become one? It is a fact that for nearly five years I have been working on the avant-textes of contemporary autobiographies: Sartre’s
Les Mots(1964), Perec’sW ou le souvenir d’enfance(1975), Nathalie Sarraute’sEnfance(1983), and, more recently, theDiaryof Anne Frank. I did not begin these studies with any overall plan—it was a series of chance occasions: an invitation to be part of a Sartre team at the Institut des Textes et Manuscrits Modernes, a seminar on Perec, hearing a
Book Title: Making Transcendents-Ascetics and Social Memory in Early Medieval China
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Campany Robert Ford
Abstract: By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. By the middle of the third century B.C.E. in China there were individuals who sought to become transcendents (xian)—deathless, godlike beings endowed with supernormal powers. This quest for transcendence became a major form of religious expression and helped lay the foundation on which the first Daoist religion was built. Both xian and those who aspired to this exalted status in the centuries leading up to 350 C.E. have traditionally been portrayed as secretive and hermit-like figures. This groundbreaking study offers a very different view of xian-seekers in late classical and early medieval China. It suggests that transcendence did not involve a withdrawal from society but rather should be seen as a religious role situated among other social roles and conceived in contrast to them. Robert Campany argues that the much-discussed secrecy surrounding ascetic disciplines was actually one important way in which practitioners presented themselves to others. He contends, moreover, that many adepts were not socially isolated at all but were much sought after for their power to heal the sick, divine the future, and narrate their exotic experiences. The book moves from a description of the roles of xian and xian-seekers to an account of how individuals filled these roles, whether by their own agency or by others’—or, often, by both. Campany summarizes the repertoire of features that constituted xian roles and presents a detailed example of what analyses of those cultural repertoires look like. He charts the functions of a basic dialectic in the self-presentations of adepts and examines their narratives and relations with others, including family members and officials. Finally, he looks at hagiographies as attempts to persuade readers as to the identities and reputations of past individuals. His interpretation of these stories allows us to see how reputations were shaped and even co-opted—sometimes quite surprisingly—into the ranks of xian. Making Transcendents provides a nuanced discussion that draws on a sophisticated grasp of diverse theoretical sources while being thoroughly grounded in traditional Chinese hagiographical, historiographical, and scriptural texts. The picture it presents of the quest for transcendence as a social phenomenon in early medieval China is original and provocative, as is the paradigm it offers for understanding the roles of holy persons in other societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqqwh
Introduction from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: In China, before there was any such thing as a Daoist¹ priest or Daoist scripture, before Buddhist scriptures and images were brought in along the Silk Road or the coast, before there were monasteries where religious practitioners from either of these traditions gathered, there existed an only loosely cohesive tradition, a body of ideas and practices that I will call the quest for transcendence. Its main elements were already in place by the late third century B.C.E., well established by the turn of the first millennium, and increasingly well documented in sources dating from the second, third, and early fourth
CHAPTER 5 Verbal Self-Presentation and Audience Response from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: We have examined the socially interactive, collectively fashioned nature of narrative (even of first-person narrative). We have also noted the real-life effects of narration on
CHAPTER 6 Adepts and Their Communities from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: Scholars have long portrayed
xianand would-bexianas socially withdrawn. When they have commented at all on the social contexts of the quest for transcendence, it has usually been to point out that histories record a keen interest on the part of certain rulers in esoteric arts, or to note that adepts shunned ordinary society and lived as hermits on mountains, or that in their training they were subject to certain poorly documented ethical rules, or that the only communities they formed were master-disciple lineages.¹ These characterizations (with the exception of the blanket statement that adepts shunned society) are
CHAPTER 7 Adepts, Their Families, and the Imperium from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: The stereotype holds that practitioners abandoned society to pursue their esoteric arts, but as we have seen their relations with local communities were, in fact, exponentially more complex than that. They functioned in society as a type of holy person, in part by absenting themselves from normal patterns of social interaction and taking up instead the behaviors identified with the role of
xian-hood-seeker, but these behaviors included many relations with others. We now turn to the social relations of practitioners with their own families and with representatives of the imperial bureaucracy.
Epilogue from:
Making Transcendents
Abstract: In late classical and early medieval China, individuals became transcendents not solely by their own efforts but by those of many other people as well. They came to be recognized as transcendents in the course of their multifaceted interactions with others, and, as a result of people’s responses to them, during and after their active presence in communities. Their reputations were formed by social and conversational processes that occurred mostly outside the texts that survive for us to read today. But these are processes to which our texts bear considerable witness, if we read them with the right questions in
1 INTRODUCTION: from:
The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: Although they necessarily fall at the beginnings of books, introductions strike me as foremost betwixt and between. With one arm they coax the readers, imploring them to read on, promising treasures in the pages that stretch ahead. With the other arm, they pull back, warning that the offerings are frail, that they falter here or there. Hubris makes her claims, just as humility softens, or even retracts, them. And ethnography, with its often resolutely local lens—focused, in the case of this book, on the talk of not even a dozen middle-aged South Korean women—similarly straddles diverse claims: at
6 PERSONALITY SPEAKING from:
The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: In chapter 5 we left off on the difficulties of assessing social mobility—on the Laundress’s various accounts of educating her three sons: various for the extent to which she appreciates her extended family’s contributions, and various for her account of the meaning of that education in South Korea. In both senses, we observed how her view of her own role, or agency, varied. I argued in chapter 5 that the tension between structural constraints and her own contribution to things reflects larger social debates on the course and character of South Korea’s rapid social change or “development.” Similarly, in
7 GENDERING DISPLACEMENT: from:
The Melodrama of Mobility
Abstract: This chapter focuses on a prevailing national and historical narrative: that of male subjectivity (
chuch’esŏng). I consider how male subjectivity—particularly its loss or displacement—works as an actor in the narratives of the women in this book, and in South Korea more generally (see Em 1995; Jager 1996a; and Schmid 1997 on Korean gendered narratives of nation and history). Beginning with a discussion of male displacement, I then introduce three films in order to elaborate and illustrate the popular and public narration of the loss or displacement of male subjectivity. Next, we will consider gender in national narratives more
Book Title: The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Cai Rong
Abstract: Post-Mao China produced two parallel discourses on the human subject in the New Era (1976–1989). One was an autonomous, Enlightenment humanist self aimed at replacing the revolutionary paragon that had dominated under Mao. The other was a more problematic subject suffering from either a symbolic physical deformity or some kind of spiritual paralysis that undermines its apparent normalcy. How do we explain the stubborn presence, in the literature of the 1980s and 1990s, of this crippled agent who fails to realize the humanist autonomy envisioned by post-Mao theorists? What are the anxieties and tensions embedded in this incongruity and what do they reveal? This illuminating and original critical study of the crippled subject in post-Mao literature offers a detailed textual analysis of the work of five well-known contemporary writers: Han Shaogong, Can Xue, Yu Hua, Mo Yan, and Jia Pingwa. The author investigates not only the literary characters within the texts, but also their creators—real subjects in history, Chinese writers whose own agency was being tested and established in the search for a new subjectivity. She argues that, reenacting the Maoist legacy, the literary search failed to provide a viable model for a postrevolutionary China. In addition, the deficiency and inadequacy of the subject cannot always be contained in the Communist past—a history to be transcended in the design of modernity after Mao. The representation of the problematic subject thus punctured post-Mao optimism and foreshadowed the eventual abandonment of the move to rethink subjectivity in the 1990s. By diving beneath the euphoria of the 1980s and the confusion and frustration of the 1990s, these critical readings offer a unique perspective with which to gauge the complexity of China’s quest for modernity and a fuller understanding of the self’s multifaceted experience in the post-Mao era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqw1p
2 In Search of a New Subject from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: In this chapter, I contextualize the search for a new subject in post- Mao literature. I approach the task by concentrating on two areas pivotal to the unfolding of the historical project: theory and literary practice. First, I discuss the efforts made on the theoretical front, focusing in greater detail on the aesthetic theory of what China’s well-known literary theorist in the 1980s Liu Zaifu called “subjectivity in literature.” Second, I give an overview of post-Mao representation of the subject in the New Era, examining the literary, cultural, and ideological characteristics of three models of the subject: as a sociopolitical
3 The Spoken Subject: from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: Despite the changing perspectives in the theorization and representation of the subject in the 1980s, and despite the multifarious roles the subject was called upon to perform in the post-Mao era, one thing remained constant: the emerging new subject was expected to be an empowered being fully competent to exercise its formerly inhibited agency. Anticlimactic to the eager anticipation and passionate theoretical pleas for the autonomous subject, however, postrevolutionary literature produced an unprecedented contingent of deformed beings, as David Wang notes.¹ That a problematic subject should dominate the cathartic “literature of the wounded” and “literature of self-reflection” in the wake
7 Appropriation and Representation: from:
The Subject in Crisis in Contemporary Chinese Literature
Abstract: The fictional characters’ lack of subjective powers I have discussed so far unquestionably contradicts the humanist model of individual worth, rationality, and self-autonomy. But this should not lead to a simplistic denial of the recovery of the writers’ own creative agency. As Lacan would tell us, the attempt to represent absence is the first step toward replacing the void, opening up possibilities for signification. The breadth and depth of the postrevolutionary inquiry into the Chinese soul in literature attest to the autonomy the writers have reclaimed from Mao’s dictatorial cultural policy. Behind the variegated representations of the subject, there is
Book Title: The Phantom Heroine-Ghosts and Gender in Seventeenth-Century Chinese Literature
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): ZEITLIN JUDITH T.
Abstract: The "phantom heroine"—in particular the fantasy of her resurrection through sex with a living man—is one of the most striking features of traditional Chinese literature. Even today the hypersexual female ghost continues to be a source of fascination in East Asian media, much like the sexually predatory vampire in American and European movies, TV, and novels. But while vampires can be of either gender, erotic Chinese ghosts are almost exclusively female. The significance of this gender asymmetry in Chinese literary history is the subject of Judith Zeitlin’s elegantly written and meticulously researched new book. Zeitlin’s study centers on the seventeenth century, one of the most interesting and creative periods of Chinese literature and politically one of the most traumatic, witnessing the overthrow of the Ming, the Manchu conquest, and the subsequent founding of the Qing. Drawing on fiction, drama, poetry, medical cases, and visual culture, the author departs from more traditional literary studies, which tend to focus on a single genre or author. Ranging widely across disciplines, she integrates detailed analyses of great literary works with insights drawn from the history of medicine, art history, comparative literature, anthropology, religion, and performance studies. The Phantom Heroine probes the complex literary and cultural roots of the Chinese ghost tradition. Zeitlin is the first to address its most remarkable feature: the phenomenon of verse attributed to phantom writers—that is, authors actually reputed to be spirits of the deceased. She also makes the case for the importance of lyric poetry in developing a ghostly aesthetics and image code. Most strikingly, Zeitlin shows that the representation of female ghosts, far from being a marginal preoccupation, expresses cultural concerns of central importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqx52
2 The Ghost’s Voice from:
The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: “
Perhaps the most obvious thing about death,” write Sarah Goodwin and Elisabeth Bronfen, “is that it is always only represented.”¹ We can never truly know first hand what it would be like to be dead; we can only imagine it. This chapter is about a fantasy inside view of death. It is not an exposé of the topography or organization or activities of the afterlife, (although there are many Chinese stories that do this), but rather what it means to inhabit the subjective viewpoint of the dead. In contrast to the previous chapter, which was about imagining the Other’s dead
4 Ghosts and Theatricality from:
The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: The years from 1580 to 1700 witnessed an explosion of ghosts in writings for the stage. In part, this increase stemmed from a general proliferation of new plays, for this was the heyday of the southern drama(chuanqi). As the playwright Yuan Yuling (1592–1674) declared: “There’s never been such a superabundance of plays as nowadays.”¹ This surge had as much to do with the late Ming boom in publishing as with the passion of literary men for the theater. The lengthiness of southern drama play texts—thirty or forty acts was average, but fifty acts was not uncommon—meant
Coda: from:
The Phantom Heroine
Abstract: Hong sheng’s masterpiece,Palace of Lasting Life, has long been acknowledged as one of the two last great works of the southern drama, representing both the culmination and the virtual endpoint of the literary playwright’s creative engagement with this form of theater.¹ Begun in 1679 and completed around 1688, after nearly ten years of work, this fifty-act play is also important as one of several early Qing plays to reflect upon the fall of the Ming in 1644 and the memory of its loss.² This occurs on several planes inPalace of Lasting Life. On the narrative level, the play
Book Title: Justice and Democracy-Cross-Cultural Perspectives
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Stepaniants Marietta
Abstract: Today democracy is increasingly recognized around the world as the only form of government with moral legitimacy. The problems of establishing and preserving truly democratic institutions, however, vary dramatically from culture to culture. Justice and Democracy explores these problems from a wide range of perspectives, theoretical and practical. It addresses problems related to the distortion of democratic decision-making by the gross disparities in wealth that arise in capitalist economies, and, in particular, focuses on the problems relating to the reconciliation of democratic values with the indigenous religious and social values of a culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wqxhw
LAW AS POLITICIANSʹ MORALITY from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Solovyov Erikh
Abstract: Everywhere the process of formation of democratic institutions is accompanied by a severe and demanding moral criticism of political practice.¹ Such was the case in Western Europe in the eighteenth century, such is the case today in those countries that develop a model of a
democratic constitutional state. The historic experience of modern Russia is of great (and maybe, exclusive) interest in this respect.
EQUALITY AND DIFFERENCE IN DEMOCRATIC THEORY from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Baynes Kenneth
Abstract: Critics of liberal equality have traditionally argued (somewhat paradoxically) either that the idea of equality is empty and has no independent value apart from its relation to other ideals or that its unchecked pursuit conflicts with other political values, such as liberty.¹ Recently, these (generally “conservative”) critics of equality have been joined by more “progressive” feminists and “multiculturalists.” Liberal equality, for these critics, is a wholly formal and abstract idea that in practice perpetuates inequalities by privileging those who conform to the underlying (and for the most part unspoken) norms in light of which judgments of equality and difference are
CAN WE DO JUSTICE TO ALL THEORIES OF JUSTICE? from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Cheng Chung-Ying
Abstract: Despite the many discussions on the subject, the problem of justice has always retained a freshness and incisiveness that challenges our understanding. This is because, in our search for a theoretical explanation of a theory of justice and a rational account of its applicability, we always start from an immediate and concrete sense of justice or injustice. Thus consider the recent problem of socialized medicine and healthcare in America: Which theoretical approach among the proprietarians, communitarians, utilitarians, and contractarians¹ will most fully satisfy our demand for (which is to say, our concrete sense of) justice? Or consider the rival claims
DEMOCRACY AND JUSTICE: from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Iqbal Javid
Abstract: The political message of Islam is reflected in the Quran and the “Practice (
sunnah) of the Prophet of Islam.” The Prophet migrated from his ancestral home, Mecca, because the Meccans were not willing to accept the new faith. Arriving at Medina, and with the support of the citizenry, he founded a state there. Thus the state is an integral part of Islam from its inception.
WESTERN AND ISLAMIC VIEWS OF DEMOCRACY AND JUSTICE: from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Fakhry Majid
Abstract: We will have occasion later on in this study to refer to the cultural interactions of Greece with the Middle East, of which the Islamic world was, and continues to be, an integral part. In
FREEDOM: from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Loy David
Abstract: The growth of freedom has been the central theme of history, Lord Acton believed, because it represents God’s plan for humanity. One does not need such a Whiggish view of history to notice that the history of the West, at least, has indeed been a story of the development of freedom (whether actualized or idealized). We trace the origins of Western civilization back to the Greek “emancipation” of reason from myth. Since the Renaissance, there has been a progressive emphasis, first on religious freedom, then political freedom, followed by economic freedom, colonial and racial freedom, and most recently sexual and
SUBJECT OF POLITICS, POLITICS OF THE SUBJECT from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Laclau Ernesto
Abstract: The question of the relationship (complementarity? tension? mutual exclusion?) between universalism and particularism occupies a central place in the current political and theoretical agenda. Universal values are seen either as dead or—at the very least—as threatened. What is more important, the positive character of those values is no longer taken for granted. On the one hand, under the banner of multiculturalism, the classical values of the Enlightenment are under fire and considered little more than the cultural preserve of Western imperialism. On the other hand, the whole debate concerning the end of modernity, the assault on foundationalism in
THE IDEAL OF JUSTICE IN THE CONTEXT OF CULTURAL DIALOGUE from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Stepaniants Marietta
Abstract: The great integrative processes characterizing the twentieth century lead some people to forecast radical quantitative changes in the life of the world community, up to and including the emergence of a single planetary civilization with a new system of human values. Others, whose projections strike me as more probable, forecast the rise of a metacivilization that will become a kind of a cultural “common denominator,” and which, instead of absorbing or pushing aside national, regional civilizations, will rather stand above all of them. Under any scenario of future developments, it is quite evident that the expansion of contacts and cultural
WORLD CHANGE AND THE CULTURAL SYNTHESIS OF THE WEST from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Kim Yersu
Abstract: As a century and, indeed, a millennium draw to a close, we stand today perhaps at the most open moment in the history of humankind. The cultural synthesis that it has taken the West well over four hundred years of the departing millennium to forge and which brought power and wealth to the West, but also a pervasive improvement in the material condition of humankind at large during the waning century is losing its once matter-of-fact validity and persuasiveness. The world a hundred years ago was in a very fundamental sense one. The world was ruled by the West—which
JUSTICE AND GLOBAL DEMOCRACY from:
Justice and Democracy
Author(s) Dallmayr Fred
Abstract: Ours is a time of perplexing cross-currents. As we approach the end of the second millennium, we seem to enter the stage of a new
pax Romana—but now on an unprecedented scale: a world order or world civilization, basically of Western design, encircling the globe with a network of universal/ uniform ideas and practices. Among these ideas, easily the most prominent and influential is that of liberal democracy, a regime founded on popular self-determination and equal citizenship rights. Thus the near-providential advance of liberal democracy, apprehended dimly by Tocqueville over a century ago, seems to have reached in our
CHAPTER 1 Step-by-Step: from:
Dark Writing
Abstract: As imperial designs on the world expanded their scope in the latter half of the eighteenth century, and more of the earth’s surface was subjected to scientific description, so geographical knowledge also spread. This enlarged field of facts did not, though, exercise any great influence over the way geographers conceived of the foundations of their discipline. Their aim remained much the same: to use the tools of inductive reasoning to reduce the variety of the earth’s natural features to certain universal principles. Movement was a prerequisite of geographical knowledge. But it formed no part of geography’s representation of the world.
CHAPTER 3 Drawing the Line: from:
Dark Writing
Abstract: The lines that the artist Paul Klee was drawing in 1906–1907 were “my most personal possession,” yet he lamented, “The trouble was that I just couldn’t make them come out. And I could not see them around me, the accord between inside and outside was so hard to achieve.”¹ As the history of coastlines showed, scientists as well as artists have found it hard to connect the ideal lines they carry around in their heads with the actual appearance of the world. In geography this discrepancy has practical, real-world consequences: in the gap opened up by reason’s detachment from
CHAPTER 5 Making Tracks: from:
Dark Writing
Abstract: In 1839, surveyor-general William Light laid out the city of Adelaide, capital of South Australia, on either side of the River Torrens. In
The Lie of the LandI argued that Light’s plan departed from the conventional colonial grid. His four incomplete and irregular grids showed an awareness of the lie of the land (Figure 20). They also uncannily recalled the character of archaeological sites he had visited and sketched in Italy.¹ The ground plan of Adelaide was not a “self-evident production” in Husserl’s sense—an ideal form created and imposedex nihilo.In its awareness of a heritage of
CHAPTER 7 Trace: from:
Dark Writing
Abstract: Both
TracksandSolutiontried to reintegrate the two elements ofplace making.Instead of separating the design of public space from the activities of the public, they identified public space design with the choreography of everyday life. Place making, they argued, was an art of placing and timing. Coherence and stability arise in this situation because public spaces are constitutionally discursive, sites incubating a primary sociality characterized by a desire to meet. The relationship of the movement form (De Quincey’s “undistinguishable blot”) to design is the same one occupied by rhythmic geography in the field of cartography. Notating what
CHAPTER 8 Dark Writing: from:
Dark Writing
Abstract: What is “dark writing”? In the first three chapters it referred to the trace of movement that is arrested in spatial representations. A history of journeys, encounters, inclinations, and leaps of faith can be shown to survive in maps and plans once their symbolic character is recognized, and it is these supplementary inscriptions that constitute dark writing. Dark writing alludes to the bodies that go missing in the action of representation. But it does not seek to replace them—to represent them. Aligned to their passage, it registers their passage graphically, as a pattern of traces. In the last three
Book Title: Out of the Margins-The Rise of Chinese Vernacular Fiction
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Ge Liangyan
Abstract: The novel Water Margin (Shuihu zhuan), China's earliest full-length narrative in vernacular prose, first appeared in print in the sixteenth century. The tale of one hundred and eight bandit heroes evolved from a long oral tradition; in its novelized form, it played a pivotal role in the rise of Chinese vernacular fiction, which flourished during the late Ming (1368-1644) and Qing (1644-1911) periods. Liangyan Ge's multidimensional study considers the evolution of Water Margin and the rise of vernacular fiction against the background of the vernacularization of premodern Chinese literature as a whole. This gradual and arduous process, as the book convincingly shows, was driven by sustained contact and interaction between written culture and popular orality. Ge examines the stylistic and linguistic features of the novel against those of other works of early Chinese vernacular literature (stories, in particular), revealing an accretion of features typical of different historical periods and a prolonged and cumulative process of textualization. In addition to providing a meticulous philological study, his work offers a new reading of the novel that interprets some of its salient characteristics in terms of the interplay between audience, storytellers, and men of letters associated with popular orality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr0tj
1 Vernacularization before Shuihu zhuan from:
Out of the Margins
Abstract: It is extremely difficult to determine exactly when the writing script of ancient China began to diverge from speech. Bernhard Karlgren estimated that Chinese writing and speech started to part ways at the beginning of the Christian era, which was roughly equivalent to the end of the Western Han period (206 b.c.–a.d. 22): “In the written language from the pre-Christian era right down to our own day, people have continued to use the original short and concise word material; in other words, the authors have continued to write classical Chinese, regardless of the fact that the spoken language had
4 From Voice to Text: from:
Out of the Margins
Abstract: In the previous chapter, the narrative discourse of
Shuihu zhuanis discussed in terms of the oral mode of composition and story making. The discussion, I hope, helps elucidate the fact that much of the narrative discourse indeed took shape in an oral milieu, with many elements characteristic of oral literature intact or discernible in its present textual form. Of course, the voice of the storyteller is gone forever, and it is only in the form of the printed text that the narrative exists today. The current chapter addresses the issue of the textualization of the work. My argument here
5 The Engine of Narrative Making: from:
Out of the Margins
Abstract: In the foregoing chapter, the results of the philological analyses of the
fanbentext demonstrate a continuous deposition of stylistic and linguistic features from different periods. While we remain still ignorant of many things about the evolution of theShuihucomplex, we can now say one thing with a reasonable amount of certainty: Thefanbentext ofShuihu zhuan, which presents full-fledged vernacular prose, was “written” and repeatedly “rewritten” amid constant contacts with orality over a long time historically. Yet while the results of such analyses are obviously historicist in nature, the approach to the study of the stylistic and
6 Literary Vernacular and Novelistic Discourse from:
Out of the Margins
Abstract: The rise of written vernacular as a new literary language, in China as in the West, was inevitably the result of a long process of the interaction and interpenetration between the forces of written culture and those of orality and of a gradual confluence of literary consciousness with oral sensibilities.¹ In the cultural context of early premodern China, the persistent transmission and textualization of the
Shuihustory cycles was a major part of the interface between oral and written traditions. With modern knowledge on the nature of oral culture and the relationship between orality and writing, we can now pay
Chapter 1 A Quarter-Millennium of Christianity in Korea from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Grayson James Huntley
Abstract: We cannot reduce the story of Korean Christians down to simple social, economic, and political motivations. Profound beliefs motivated their actions. The twentieth-century German theologian Paul Tillich, who came to intellectual maturity in the aftermath of the First World War and later became an American
Chapter 2 Human Relations as Expressed in Vernacular Catholic Writings of the Late Chosŏn Dynasty from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Lee Timothy S.
Abstract: Catholicism began to be disseminated in earnest in East Asia with the arrival of Francis Xavier in Japan in 1549 and especially with the arrival of Matteo Ricci in Beijing in 1601. In Beijing, Catholic missionaries published tracts and other doctrinal literature in Chinese to promote their religion, and these Sinitic writings made their way into Korea via Korean envoys.¹ From these writings, many Koreans discovered a new worldview, one that posed an alternative to the Neo-Confucian orthodoxy of late Chosŏn society. And, as is well known, it is through the study of these writings that a group of Koreans
Chapter 4 Chinese Protestant Literature and Early Korean Protestantism from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Oak Sung-Deuk
Abstract: Since the 1870s when Chinese Protestant literature began making inroads into Korea and especially since the 1880s when missionaries from the United States began arriving in the peninsula, Protestantism made rapid progress in Korea. By the end of the twentieth century, as Donald Baker and Timothy S. Lee discuss in this volume, every fifth South Korean was a Protestant. Many a factor—ranging from the sociopolitical to the religious—has been proffered to explain this rapid growth. This is all good and proper: no relevant factor should be neglected if we are fully to appreciate the complexity and richness of
Chapter 5 Church and State Relations in the Japanese Colonial Period from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Kang Wi Jo
Abstract: In the early years of Japanese annexation, many foreign missionaries and Korean church leaders applauded Japanese rule and sought cooperative, cordial relations with Japanese government officials. As the Japanese state enacted
Chapter 8 Mothers, Daughters, Biblewomen, and Sisters: from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Clark Donald N.
Abstract: In 1984, the publication of Jane Hunter’s study of women missionaries in China opened a new window of scholarly inquiry about the work and interactions of Western and Chinese Christian women, particularly single women, in the promotion of Christian institutions and opportunities for “native” women.¹ Especially notable is the field of women’s education. Less familiar is the work of evangelistic missionaries and their local counterparts. The contributions and achievements of the “agents and actors” in these areas are not in doubt. However, the practitioners remain objects for study rather than people to identify with, and missionaries—and again this seems
Chapter 11 Korean Protestants and the Reunification Movement from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Lee Timothy S.
Abstract: Historically, Korean Protestants have taken active roles in national issues akin to the reunification movement. In their early history, for example, they led efforts to reform the feudalistic practices
Chapter 14 Modernization and the Explosive Growth and Decline of Korean Protestant Religiosity from:
Christianity in Korea
Author(s) Kim Byong-suh
Abstract: Sociological studies have often found that institutional disorganization and the loss of the social function of religion may occur when society becomes modernized. Peter Berger summed it up thus: “The impact of modernity on religion is commonly seen in terms of the process of secularization, which can be described as one in which religion loses its hold on the level both of institutions and of human consciousness.”¹ Berger’s harsh assessment may well describe the state of the Korean Protestant church today. For the last forty years, a startling wave of modernization accompanied by industrialization, urbanization, and rapid social mobility have
3 Contending Narratives in Classical Voices from:
Cult, Culture and Authority
Abstract: Once Liễu Hạnh’s cult was established as a visible aspect of popular culture, educated people found ways to make use of it. From being a dynamic aspect of village life, a focus of religious practices and community events, it was given literary form and philosophical significance, thereby becoming a figure of contention among intellectuals, who made it represent their preferred visions of social authority.
5 From Superstition to Cultural Tradition from:
Cult, Culture and Authority
Abstract: I saw this slogan in front of the building of the people’s committee of Vụ Bản district, Nam Ðịnh province, during the Phủ Dầy festival of Princess Liễu Hạnh:
Phát huy thuần phong mỹ tục của lễ hội truyền thống, kiên quyết bài trừ mê tín dị đoạn và hủ tục(Bring into play good customs of traditional festivals, resolutely eradicate superstitions and outdated practices). Each year on the third day of the third lunar month, the anniversary of Liễu Hạnh’s death, tens of thousands of people visit Phủ Dầy. In 2001, so did I. It was not my first
Book Title: Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries- Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): MATSUMOTO STACIE
Abstract: The first three centuries of the Heian period (794–1086) saw some of its most fertile innovations and epochal achievements in Japanese literature and the arts. It was also a time of important transitions in the spheres of religion and politics, as aristocratic authority was consolidated in Kyoto, powerful court factions and religious institutions emerged, and adjustments were made in the Chinese-style system of ruler-ship. At the same time, the era’s leaders faced serious challenges from the provinces that called into question the primacy and efficiency of the governmental system and tested the social/cultural status quo. Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries, the first book of its kind to examine the early Heian from a wide variety of multidisciplinary perspectives, offers a fresh look at these seemingly contradictory trends. Essays by fourteen leading American, European, and Japanese scholars of art history, history, literature, and religions take up core texts and iconic images, cultural achievements and social crises, and the ever-fascinating patterns and puzzles of the time. The authors tackle some of Heian Japan’s most enduring paradigms as well as hitherto unexplored problems in search of new ways of understanding the currents of change as well as the processes of institutionalization that shaped the Heian scene, defined the contours of its legacies, and make it one of the most intensely studied periods of the Japanese past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr3b4
4 Kugyō and Zuryō: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) HURST G. CAMERON
Abstract: Considerations of center and periphery in Heian Japan involve at the highest level the relationship between the central political apparatus and the hinterlands, the sixty-six provinces and two islands (Iki and Tsushima) that constituted the conceptualized polity. Indeed, the very existence of a state presupposes control over the human and material resources of the space thought to constitute the geographical area of that conceptualized state. This was never an easy task for Japanese rulers, despite the insular character of Japan that seems to lend itself to simple mapping of a discrete geopolitical entity. Recall, for example, the court’s hard-fought campaigns
7 The Buddhist Transformation of Japan in the Ninth Century: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) MORSE SAMUEL C.
Abstract: The significance of the Shingon and Tendai traditions in the history of Japanese Buddhist art during the early Heian period is indisputable. Yet it is important to acknowledge that those teachings were available only to a culturally privileged, literate male minority with close connections to the court. Temple histories and inventories as well as texts from the period describing popular Buddhist beliefs and practices, such as the
Nihon koku genpō zen’aku ryōiki (Miraculous Stories from the Japanese Buddhist Tradition)and theTōdaiji fuju monkō (Text of Buddhist Recitations from Tōdaiji),attest to the vitality of a Buddhism far different from
8 Scholasticism, Exegesis, and Ritual Practice: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) ABÉ RYŪICHI
Abstract: There was an epistemic shift in the production of Japanese Buddhist texts in the early Heian period, a shift that enabled Buddhists to incorporate the elements of meditation, ritual, and religious practice in general within the science of scriptural exegesis. Until the early ninth century, the exegetic texts written by Japanese Buddhist scholars were concerned entirely with doctrinal issues. By contrast, by the mid-tenth century, the great majority of Buddhist commentarial texts had their focus on ritual practices, especially on the rituals of esoteric Buddhism, the ritual practices that became integral within the management of the Heian court and the
9 Institutional Diversity and Religious Integration: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) ADOLPHSON MIKAEL
Abstract: The cultural accomplishments of the Heian age, most notably in literature and arts, have been admired, reproduced, and reinterpreted for centuries. Although not quite as enduring, political and religious institutions as well as ideologies created and developed in the ninth and tenth centuries similarly lasted much beyond the Heian age itself, some even until the late sixteenth century. For example, warriors vied for court titles in the fourteenth century, and legitimacy from the imperial court was still of tremendous importance to sixteenth-century
daimyō.¹ Granted, while the imperial court did not wield much actual power in national politics during these centuries,
10 The Archeology of Anxiety: from:
Heian Japan, Centers and Peripheries
Author(s) MOERMAN D. MAX
Abstract: The Heian period has often been characterized as a golden age of Japanese religious culture, one in which the Buddhist literature, painting, sculpture, and architecture produced at court are considered to have reached unprecedented heights. It is thus all the more surprising that in this time of cultural florescence many Buddhists, monastics and aristocrats alike, understood themselves to be living in an age of decay. According to their interpretation of Buddhist chronologies, the eleventh century marked the beginning of the end: the onset of
mappō,the final degenerate age of the Dharma, or Buddhist Law, in which both the availability
Book Title: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains-Culture and Society in the Highlands of Bali
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Author(s): Reuter Thomas A.
Abstract: Custodians of the Sacred Mountains is the first comprehensive ethnography of the Bali Aga, a large ethnic minority that occupies the island's central highlands. The Bali Aga are popularly viewed as the indigenous counterparts to other Balinese who trace their origin to invaders from the Javanese kingdom of Majapait, who have ruled Bali from the fourteenth century A.D. Although Bali remains one of the most intensely researched localities in the world, the Bali Aga have long been overshadowed by the more exotic courtly culture of the south. A closer analysis of the changing position of the Bali Aga within Balinese society provides a key to understanding the politics and social process of cultural representation in Bali and beyond. The process is marked by a blend of representational competition and cooperation among the Bali Aga themselves, among the Bali Aga and southern Balinese, and later among the island's aristocratic elites and foreign colonizers or scholars, and state authorities. The study of this process raises important issues about the establishment and maintenance of status and power structures at regional, national, and global levels. Custodians of the Sacred Mountains explores the marginalization of the Bali Aga in light of a critical theory of cultural representation and calls for a morally engaged approach to ethnographic research. It proposes an intersubjective and communicative model of human interaction as the foundation for understanding the relative significance of cooperation and competition in the cultural production of knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr474
Chapter 1 THE BANUA AS A CATEGORY AND A SOCIAL PROCESS from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: The social landscape of highland Bali is patterned by regional networks of ritual alliance among groups of villages. Such networks are locally referred to as
banua,or “ritual domains.” How these regional associations are conceptualized and maintained, and how they generate a sense of shared identity among the mountain people and set the stage for a regional status economy will be explored in the following chapters. The study of regional social interaction among the Bali Aga leads to a magical world where human beings, ancestors, spirits, and gods share a sacred landscape and timescape, brought to life in an intricate
Chapter 4 THE RITUAL PROCESS OF A DOMAIN from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: By far the most graphic and impressive display of Pura Pucak Penulisan’s role as the regional ritual center of a domain is the celebration of up to eleven days that marks its annual festival. This festival is the most complex synchronized activity involving the entire
gebog domasand wider membership of the domain. It is a ritual performance in celebration of the domain’s sacred unity. It is also a stage for the enactment of internal distinctions of status in orientation to a common origin.
Chapter 7 THE STATUS ECONOMY OF HIGHLAND BALI: from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: Exploring the lifeworld of the Mountain Balinese from the perspective of their regional alliances within ritual domains (
banua) has relegated to the background the more immediate community and family settings that form the stage for many of their mundane and ritual activities. This chapter is concerned first with the internal social organization of Bali Aga communities, so far referred to by the gloss “village” or by the popular local term of Sanskrit origin “desa” (village or place).Desa, in turn, include even smaller and denser spheres of social interaction, among kin and affines, defined by their common worship at private
Chapter 11 REPRESENTATION AND SOCIETY: from:
Custodians of the Sacred Mountains
Abstract: This final chapter asks what people generally and social scientists in particular can learn from the highland Balinese and from their approach to representation. We all have a practical interest in representational models insofar as they have a tangible effect on all of our lives, for better or worse, as models for living. Social scientists also have a theoretical interest in representational models, as they struggle to gain a general understanding of particular societies and of society in general. The Bali Aga, likewise, approach representation from these two inseparable perspectives as they negotiate practical conflicts among self-interested subjects and simultaneously
Book Title: The Hermes Complex-Philosophical Reflections on Translation
Publisher: University of Ottawa Press
Author(s): Folkart Barbara
Abstract: When Hermes handed over to Apollo his finest invention, the lyre, in exchange for promotion to the status of messenger of the gods, he relinquished the creativity that gave life to his words.The trade-off proved frustrating: Hermes chafed under the obligation to deliver the ideas and words of others and resorted to all manner of ruses in order to assert his presence in the messages he transmitted. His theorizing descendants, too, allow their pretentions to creatorship to interfere with the actual business of reinventing originals in another language.Just as the Hermes of old delighted in leading the traveller astray, so his descendants lead their acolytes, through thickets of jargon, into labyrinths of eloquence without substance.Charles Le Blanc possesses the philosophical tools to dismantle this empty eloquence: he exposes the inconsistencies, internal contradictions, misreadings, and misunderstandings rife in so much of the current academic discourse en translation, and traces the failings of this discourse back to its roots in the anguish of having traded authentic creativity for mere status.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr8cv
Pour une grammaire du concept de « transfert » appliqué au culturel from:
Transfert
Author(s) Moser Walter
Abstract: Michel de Certeau nous l’a rappelé dans
L’Invention du quotidien, nos « manières de faire quotidiennes » (1990, p. xxxv) comportent des actes, des gestes, des rituels, des ruses, etc., d’une remarquable complexité et diversité. Et elles ne viennent pas nécessairement avec les discours et les concepts qui nous permettraient d’en faire l’objet d’une réflexion, d’une analyse, d’un savoir sémantisé. Il en est ainsi des transferts. Ils habitent et structurent le quotidien d’un sujet doué d’unecultural literacymoyennne sans que, pour autant, ce sujet puisse en rendre compte ni analytiquement ni théoriquement. Ainsi, nous savons faire un transfert dans
IN MEMORIAM DANIEL SIMEONI (1948-2007) from:
Transfert
Abstract: Fort de sa double formation, il a promu le rapprochement et l’interaction entre les sciences sociales et les sciences humaines, en faveur d’une approche socioculturelle à la traduction. Cela lui a permis de jeter un regard critique sur l’institutionnalisation des études en traduction, tout en y participant activement. Son œuvre a tracé des
Dans le jeu de l’adresse, une parole hantée from:
Transfert
Author(s) Corin Ellen
Abstract: Dans leur dictionnaire de la psychanalyse, Jean Laplanche et Jean-Bertrand Pontalis (1971) notent que la notion de transfert a pris en psychanalyse une acception très large et qu’elle véhicule, plus que toute autre, l’ensemble des conceptions que chaque analyste se fait de la cure, de son objet, de sa dynamique, de sa tactique, de ses visées. Ce n’est donc pas du « transfert en psychanalyse » qu’il peut être question ici mais de manières partielles, relatives, de l’approcher et d’en saisir la dynamique.
Transfert généalogique et transfert migratoire: from:
Transfert
Author(s) Goyer Nicolas
Abstract: 1) Roland Cahn écrit que « la mise en évidence du transfert fait surgir
de l’ailleurs, de l’autrefois, en contrepoint de l’ici et maintenant du face-à-face et permet la reconnaissance et l’appropriation de cette “réalité psychique” » (Cahn 2002, p. 124¹). Cela indique bien les deux premiers « attracteurs » du déplacement et de l’élargissement du concept de transfert ici proposés, l’ailleurs et l’autrefois, à partir de nouveaux paramètres et matériaux anthropologiques. Il s’agira d’envisager, par-delà cette différenciation en deux, latiercéité des transferts, c’est-à-dire (plutôt que de les limiter à trois) leur singularisation non binaire, leur capacité de forme
Le transfert culturel, une fonction médiatique: from:
Transfert
Author(s) Ernst Wolfgang
Abstract: Ma thèse de départ est la suivante : on peut comprendre le transfert culturel à partir de notions tirées de la théorie des médias. Dans le langage des télécommunications, un médium se caractérise par les opérations suivantes : la collecte, le traitement et la transmission de données (Shannon et Weaver 1949). Or, lorsqu’on la considère dans sa dimension physique et non métaphysique, la tradition culturelle se caractérise de la même façon. Sur le plan de l’archéologie des médias, la coïncidence entre l’arrivée en Amérique de Christophe Colomb et l’invention de l’imprimerie par Gutenberg (dont l’objectif était d’abord, grâce à la
Book Title: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance-Word Medicine, Word Magic
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Stromberg Ernest
Abstract: American Indian Rhetorics of Survivancepresents an original critical and theoretical analysis of American Indian rhetorical practices in both canonical and previously overlooked texts: autobiographies, memoirs, prophecies, and oral storytelling traditions. Ernest Stromberg assembles essays from a range of academic disciplines that investigate the rhetorical strategies of Native American orators, writers, activists, leaders, and intellectuals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wr9rm
(NATIVE) AMERICAN JEREMIAD from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Bizzell Patricia
Abstract: WILLIAM APESS identified himself in his writings as an Indian.¹ He was perhaps the most successful activist on behalf of Indian rights in the antebellum United States. At the same time, he adopted the European religion of Christianity, and used the European language of English for all of his published works and public addresses.² Thus he can be described as what literary historian Bernd Peyer calls a ʺtranscultural individualʺ (17), incorporating elements from different cultures into his identity. Peyer emphasizes that this internal integration process can be empowering: ʺRather than being incapacitated by a disturbed personality, the transcultural individual can,
SUN DANCE BEHIND BARS from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Knittel Janna
Abstract: LEONARD PELTIER has been in prison for just under thirty years. Accused of killing two FBI agents during a confrontation at Wounded Knee, South Dakota, in 1973, Peltier has argued for his innocence. His supporters say that he is a political prisoner, held for upholding Native rights. Conversely, more recent researchers into the American Indian Movement (AIM) and the death of activist Anna Mae Pictou Aquash have sketched AIMʹs own politics as self-aggrandizing and masculinist,¹ and some historians suggest that Peltierʹs importance as a political figure has been exaggerated.² Amid these conflicting views, Peltier has published
Prison Writings: My Life
COMMUNICATING HISTORY from:
American Indian Rhetorics of Survivance
Author(s) Murphy Anthony G.
Abstract: IN 1990, Blackfeet poet and novelist James Welch was asked by filmmaker Paul Stekler to join with him in co-writing a screenplay for a documentary on the Battle of the Little Bighorn, also known as Custerʹs Last Stand. Welch agreed, and in 1992 the film, called
Last Stand at Little Bighorn,was broadcast as a successful, highly rated part of the PBSAmerican Experienceseries. The documentary project led to a contract for Welch to write a more detailed account of the battle, which appeared in 1994 asKilling Custer: The Battle of the Little Bighorn and the Fate of
Book Title: Traces Of A Stream-Literacy and Social Change Among African American Women
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Royster Jacqueline Jones
Abstract: Traces of a Streamis a showcase for nineteenth-century African American women, and particularly elite women, as a group of writers who are currently underrepresented in rhetorical scholarship. Royster has formulated both an analytical theory and an ideological perspective that are useful in gaining a more generative understanding of literate practices as a whole and the practices of African American women in particular. Royster tells a tale of rhetorical prowess, calling for alternative ways of seeing, reading, and rendering scholarship as she seeks to establish a more suitable place for the contributions and achievements of African American women writers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrb9s
Introduction: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: As the subtitle indicates,this book is about literacy, social change, and African American women. I chose the title because of reactions I have consistently received over the years when I have presented papers on early generations of African American women writers and their achievements. Without exception, after a presentation, at least one person—sometimes from surprise, or with an awareness of deprivation, or with indignation or embarrassment, or sometimes with a sense of what I have come to call deep disbelief¹—at least one person will say to me, “I’ve never heard of these women.” I have been compelled
Chapter 2 Toward an Analytical Model for Literacy and Sociopolitical Action from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: My imperativein theorizing literacy in the lives of African American women is to account for how, within this group, literacy has been practiced and made usable, with emphasis on the essay as a particularly instructive literate form. I acknowledge that there are many variables in African American women’s lives and work, which make their stories of literacy far from monothematic. Vibrant among these practices, however, is the use of literacy as an instrument for producing spiraling effects in both sociopolitical thought and sociopolitical action. Literacy has enabled African American women to create whirlpools in the pond of public discourse,
Chapter 3 The Genesis of Authority: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: I begin this chapterwith a statement of the obvious. African American women write. We also speak, often in public. We are, in fact, talented users of language who have demonstrated expertise across multiple measures of performance and achievement. However, for African American women the obvious has not always been treated as such. My intent in this chapter is to suggest that it has only been through the shifting paradigms of the past three decades that researchers and scholars in literacy studies and in other disciplines have been able to see more clearly that the uses of literate resources by
Chapter 4 Going Against the Grain: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: Maria W. Stewartwas the first African American woman known to have written essays.¹ The passage above, written in 1831, suggests that African American women have understood with great clarity two things: the power of language and learning and the inherent hostility of the context within which people of African descent must live in the United States. It is useful to our discussion to view this understanding of condition and instruments of power in light of Harvey J. Graff’s assertion concerning literacy acquisition: “the environment in which students acquire their literacy has a major impact on the cognitive consequences of
Chapter 6 A View from a Bridge: from:
Traces Of A Stream
Abstract: In resonance with this epigraph,my goal here is to share knowledge and experience, not about the literate practices of African American women as in the previous chapters but about my own standpoint as a researcher and scholar in the process of completing this book. The first and most consistent challenges have come hand in hand with the very choosing of the work itself, that is, with identifying myself as a researcher who focuses on a multiply marginalized group; whose interests in this group center on topics not typically associated with the group, such as nonfiction and public discourse rather
Book Title: Literature and Subjection-The Economy of Writing and Marginality in Latin America
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Legrás Horacio
Abstract: Through theoretical, philosophical, cultural, political, and historical analysis, Horacio Legras views the myriad factors that have both formed and stifled the integration of peripheral experiences into Latin American literature. Despite these barriers, Legras reveals a handful of contemporary authors who have attempted in earnest to present marginalized voices to the Western world. His deep and insightful analysis of key works by novelists Juan José Saer
(The Witness),Nellie Campobello(Cartucho),Roa Bastos(Son of Man),and Jose María Arguedas(The Fox from Up Above and the Fox from Down Below),among others, provides a theoretical basis for understanding the plight of the author, the peripheral voice and the confines of the literary medium. What emerges is an intricate discussion of the clash and subjugation of cultures and the tragedy of a lost worldview.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrbr2
Three Coloniality and the Empire of the Letter from:
Literature and Subjection
Abstract: Among certain “primitive” peoples (those whose society knows no State), the chief must prove his dominion over words: silence is forbidden to him. Yet it is not required that anyone listen to him. Indeed, no one pays attention to the chief’s word … and he, in fact, says nothing…. The discourse of the chief is empty precisely because he is separated from power. The chief must move in the element of the word, which is to say, at the opposite pole
Four Literature as Presentation of the Subject from:
Literature and Subjection
Abstract: A fundamental mutation in the question of agency takes place between two movements, in a space that we can label the Enlightenment/post-Enlightenment divide. Literature is one of the cultural sites that embodies the consequences of this mutation. As Peter Bürger notes, there is a point at which the activity of the philosophes needs to slide from philosophical inquiry into aesthetic production to carry out the project of the autonomy of reason (1992, 8–11). Through this movement, aesthetics in general and the literary domain in particular become the site of absolute freedom in modern societies, that is, a site where
Seven The End of Recognition from:
Literature and Subjection
Abstract: On the back cover of the English edition of
The Fox from Up Above and the Fox from Down Below(2000), Alberto Moreiras characterizes Jose María Arguedas’s novel as “epochal” and “intense enough to arrest our world, and any world.” Today few critical readers would object to that description, but when the novel was published in 1971, reactions were mixed. The novel’s form and content, the wild proliferation of unpredictable characters, and what was perceived as a deep-seated pessimism were all difficult to reconcile with the image of Arguedas as a major cultural icon of progressive Peruvian culture. Martin Lienhard
1 Marxism as Eschatology from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: IN THE FOLLOWING PAGES, I would like to outline the basic features of Marxist historical mythology, linking it with the Western religious and philosophical concern with human salvation. My core argument is that the attempt to provide scientific principles of historical analysis and to break away from the messianic interpretation of history sponsored by the Church was in fact in many ways unsuccessful: underneath the seemingly new Marxist methodology were concealed older concerns with historical time and redemption. Marxists would doubtless have renounced notions such as good, evil, messiah, and salvation as baseless religious superstitions that had nothing to do
2 The Janus-Faced Messiah from:
From Darkness To Light
Abstract: IT IS TIME to move from the discussion of Marxist eschatology as such to an examination of the ways in which Russian revolutionary discourse activated this eschatological potential. The messianic characteristics of Marxism came into sharp relief in Russia, not in Western Europe where Marx did most of his preaching. Was Marxism adapted to Russian conditions, that is, was it “Russified”? Or did the new ideology actually function as a means to modernize Russia and instill post-Reformation values? There might be elements in the religious tradition in Russia (Orthodoxy and sectarianism) and in Bolshevism’s roots in nineteenth-century Russian intellectual tradition
Book Title: Interpretation-Ways of Thinking about the Sciences and the Arts
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Wolters Gereon
Abstract: The act of interpretation occurs in nearly every area of the arts and sciences. That ubiquity serves as the inspiration for the fourteen essays of this volume, covering many of the domains in which interpretive practices are found. Individual topics include: the general nature of interpretation and its forms; comparing and contrasting interpretation and hermeneutics; culture as interpretation seen through Hegel's aesthetics; interpreting philosophical texts; methodologies for interpreting human action; interpretation in medical practice focusing on manifestations as indicators of disease; the brain and its interpretative, structured, learning and storage processes; interpreting hybrid wines and cognitive preconceptions of novel objects; and the importance of sensory perception as means of interpreting in the case of dry German Rieslings.In an interesting turn, Nicholas Rescher writes on the interpretation of philosophical texts. Then Catherine Wilson and Andreas Blank explicate and critique Rescher's theories through analysis of the mill passage from Leibniz's
Monadology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrd67
1 Some Cogitations on Interpretations from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Machamer Peter
Abstract: The use of the word
interpretationitself carries an ambiguity between the process of interpreting, the activity, and the product, an interpretation that results from that
2 The Logic of Interpretation from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Lorand Ruth
Abstract: It is traditionally held that interpretation is the method of the humanities, while explanation is the method of the sciences. At the same time, it is widely accepted that interpretation is an all-embracing activity and thus all cognitions are modes of interpretation, and moreover, as Gadamer declared, “Alles Verstehen ist Auslegen” [All understanding is interpretation] (Gadamer 1965, 366). It is clear that both views cannot coexist. If explanation is distinct from interpretation, and thereby distinguishes the sciences from the humanities, interpretation cannot be the umbrella concept that covers all understanding.
3 Interpretation as Cultural Orientation: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Gethmann-Siefert Annemarie
Abstract: If we treat the question of to what extent art can be an interpretation of our world, self-concept, and historical forms of life by referring to Hegel, it seems that we come to a dead end. The authoritative and original place for a connection between art and interpretation in the traditional philosophy of aesthetics is at best the aesthetics of reception. Its traditional version relies on the basic assumption that a piece of art is constituted each time in its reception, that is, in the multiple, historically varying interpretations of its meaning and sense.¹ Even a discussion of the impact
9 How to Interpret Human Actions (Including Moral Actions) from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Lumer Christoph
Abstract: In this article an instrumentalist conception of action interpretation will be developed. This conception shall be suitable for interpreting moral actions as well as other actions. The approach’s instrumentalism consists in the fact that interpretations here are conceived as means for fulfilling a certain function, in particular for providing a certain type of information about the action. After these preliminary remarks it will be explained which kind of information we expect from action interpretations (section 1). In the subsequent section it will be discussed which model of action and action interpretation in principle could provide this information (section 2). In
10 Interpretive Practices in Medicine from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Schaffner Kenneth F.
Abstract: This article develops some examples of interpretation in medical practice. I begin with medical data, but need to first provide some definitions to pave the way for more explicit development. Some of these defined terms have nontechnical meanings, but for our purposes they need to be clarified further. Examples will include manifestations (symptoms, signs, and laboratory results) as well as “disease.” I then explore the problem of noticing and interpreting a manifestation as “abnormal.” This will raise valuational issues for the interpretation, as well as allow us to briefly survey several approaches to the notion of disease in medicine. From
11 Interpreting Medicine: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Borck Cornelius
Abstract: Ars longa vita brevis—Hippocrates’ famous aphorism once acquired a surprising new meaning in the hands of a freshman at the University of Heidelberg’s Medical School.¹ Taking the compulsoryIntroduction to Medical Terminologyclass, the student translated: “The difficult art to shorten life.” Apparently, the student was lost in translation, proposing an audacious interpretation where the proper meaning had escaped him. Beyond the pun, the mistaken interpretation may offer a suitable starting point, a first hypothesis for entering a discussion about forms of interpretation in clinical practice: in the more than two thousand years since Hippocrates, the art of healing
12 Concept Formation via Hebbian Learning: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Churchland Paul M.
Abstract: How does the brain manage to generate roughly accurate maps of the universe’s four-dimensional background structure? What is the process by which such abstract maps of
possible-causal-processesare actually constructed?
13 Interpreting Novel Objects: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Gale George
Abstract: Russ Hanson famously said, “All seeing is
seeing as.” While Hanson’s focus was upon the interaction between scientific theories and their corresponding observations, his dictum clearly applies in everyday contexts as well. As he noted, “seeing a bird in the sky involves seeing that it will not suddenly dovertical snap rolls” (Hanson 1965, 20; emphasis added).¹ To see an object in the skyas a birdis to see the object knowingly, to see it as potentially flapping its wings, but not as potentially maneuvering like a fighter plane. His point is completely general: we do notseepatches
14 Classifying Dry German Riesling Wines: from:
Interpretation
Author(s) Sautter Ulrich
Abstract: Reflection on olfactory and gustatory perceptions and their epistemological status has not been playing a major role in the philosophical tradition. Most classical philosophers deal with the senses of smell and taste rather parenthetically and with a sense of flippancy—if at all.¹ Sometimes philosophical texts cite phenomena of smell and taste where exemplification in factually unrelated, particularly abstract contexts is needed²—as if the difficulties of abstraction might be evened out by choosing examples from an area of life that is surrounded by a sense of light-heartedness and concreteness. But almost no classical text of philosophy has dealt with
Book Title: Listening Long and Late- Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Everwine Peter
Abstract: "What a rich array of music lies within
Listening Long and Late.With refreshing authenticity, Everwine weds playfulness to practice, lyricism to narrative, pathos to the ordinary. Indeed, he has listened 'long and late' to the music of such venerable masters as Tu Fu, the hidden genius on the street, and the anonymous Aztec poets of the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries. Everwine writes with the same 'deified heart' that divines the mystery of his quotidian subjects in a language that is at once plain and poetic. His own work seamlessly segues into his translations from the Hebrew and Nahuatl, as if all the poems belonged to the same poet, which they in fact do, as the glorious multitudes of Peter Everwine, one of the masters of our age."-Chard deNiord
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrdd4
Book Title: Ecocritical Theory-New European Approaches
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Rigby Kate
Abstract: One of the more frequently lodged, serious, and justifiable complaints about ecocritical work is that it is insufficiently theorized.
Ecocritical Theoryputs such claims decisively to rest by offering readers a comprehensive collection of sophisticated but accessible essays that productively investigate the relationship between European theory and ecocritique. With its international roster of contributors and subjects, it also militates against the parochialism of ecocritics who work within the limited canon of the American West. Bringing together approaches and orientations based on the work of European philosophers and cultural theorists, this volume is designed to open new pathways for ecocritical theory and practice in the twenty-first century.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrhdg
Sense of Place and Lieu de Mémoire: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) GOODBODY AXEL
Abstract: It is striking how often literary representations of nature appear within recollections of childhood, or more broadly in the context of acts of remembering. At the same time, memories of the past, in literature as in life, are commonly anchored in places, landscapes, or buildings. As approaches to the study of culture, ecocriticism and cultural memory studies differ in their principal concerns: while the former relates to nature and space, and examines cultural constructions of the natural environment, the latter is oriented toward history and time, and principally preoccupied with representations and understandings of the social, in formulations relating the
The Social Theory of Norbert Elias and the Question of the Nonhuman World from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WILLIAMS LINDA
Abstract: The ecological damage that has led to an emerging sixth world extinction event may not be derived entirely from Western modernity. It could, however, be argued that in spite of more general causal factors such as the exponential growth in human populations, the androgenic causes of this environmental crisis have many of their sociogenetic roots in the emergence of modernity in Europe. It was, after all, European modernity that gave rise to the Industrial Revolution, and to the heightened instrumentalization of nature that serves the vast engines of a Western capitalist system now global in its reach. Hence, in the
From the Modern to the Ecological: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WALLS LAURA DASSOW
Abstract: So long as ecocritics are trapped in the “two cultures” ideology that polarizes literature from science and human society from nonhuman nature, we will find it difficult to define a middle ground from which literature and science can be seen as partners, and humans and nonhumans as agents, all cooperating to form the world we share. To locate this middle ground we need to think not of a monolithic “Science” but of the various practices and disciplines of the sciences, and in this quest our natural allies will be our colleagues in science studies. Bruno Latour has spent a lifetime
Martin Heidegger, D. H. Lawrence, and Poetic Attention to Being from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) NORRIS TREVOR
Abstract: The thought of the German philosopher Martin Heidegger (1889–1976) is a challenge to thinking because it asks us to imagine being differently. His works are not straightforward and do not set out an explicit program for social change but rather invite a shift in attention and conception of self in relation to world, time, and the nature of knowledge. This shift involves refusing a major aspect of our late modernity, that is, the ubiquity and dominance of forms of abstract and theoretical knowledge. Heidegger wishes to return this knowledge to its proper place, grounded in pragmatic relationships that respond
Dialoguing with Bakhtin over Our Ethical Responsibility to Anothers from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) MURPHY PATRICK D.
Abstract: The Russian theorist Mikhail Bakhtin (1895–1975) provides a valuable set of tools for ecocritical analysis and a method of approaching literary works and their interrelationship with the material world. Bakhtin’s attitude toward language positions him in opposition to Ferdinand de Saussure and Saussurean linguistics. Instead, he can be aligned with his contemporary, Émile Benveniste, as well as current linguists such as George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, who have emphasized discourse over language. This emphasis leads to seeing speaking and writing as individual acts undertaken at particular moments in specific configurations of the world. That recognition of immersion leads to
The Matter of Texts: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) ELVEY ANNE
Abstract: Very early, Christian usage moved from papyrus scrolls, to papyrus codices, to the codex manufactured from parchment. Thomas
There Can Be No Democracy without a Culture of Difference from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) IRIGARAY LUCE
Abstract: What we call democracy, in fact, was born in ancient Greece and had as its more or less explicit stakes the differentiation
Affinity Studies and Open Systems: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) SULLIVAN HEATHER I.
Abstract: Ecocriticism’s contributions to the current rejection of dualistic thinking are noteworthy, particularly when this interdisciplinary field concentrates on hybridity and “relations” that preexist essences. In this mode, ecocriticism participates in a broader development of “affnity studies” that encompass the many efforts across the disciplines toward reconfiguring our “intraactions” with the world in terms that avoid dichotomies and Newtonian linearity and that utilize instead nonlinear, nondualistic forms of “hybridity.” Hybrids, in Steve Hinchliffe’s words, are “more or less durable bodies made up of similarly hybrid and impermanent relations. Things are, to use another commonly used term, configured, or drawn together, in
Blake, Deleuze, and the Emergence of Ecological Consciousness from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) LUSSIER MARK
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze (often in collaboration with Félix Guattari) sought to move analytic philosophy and theoretical psychoanalysis beyond “abstraction” and toward a “transcendental empiricism” already present in earlier philosophic work. This remarkable combination of traditionalism and innovation describes a state elusively beyond any linguistic epistemology—yet resident in any experiential event—and offers a method to capture individual experience of “pure immanence.”¹ The emphasis Deleuze placed on event and experience stimulated the energetic analysis of their interrelations by Alain Badiou, turning philosophy away from cognitive mapping through Kantian categorical imperatives and re/turning it to the world. Rereading “the role of rhythm
The Biosemiotic Turn: from:
Ecocritical Theory
Author(s) WHEELER WENDY
Abstract: In this essay I explore an ecocritical theory of cultural, and thus also literary, creativity from a biosemiotic point of view. While what follows might be thought broadly to fall within what is sometimes called the “post” humanities, in fact biosemiotics is a thoroughly interdisciplinary proto-discipline; it seeks not only to change how humanists think about culture, the arts, and the biological sciences but also to change how scientists and social scientists think about biological science and the arts and humanities.
INTRODUCTION from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: Intimacy arises in autobiographies because readers are led by such texts to levels of disclosure that lie beyond what can be expected both in other kinds of texts and in conventional live interactions. Indeed, autobiography generates appeal precisely
1 TELLING YOU WHO I AM from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: Autobiography arises from and is supported by everyday acts of self-disclosure. I often tell other people who I am, and I usually do so readily. However, when I perform these acts I often feel uneasy about and even unsatisfied with what I am doing. On reflection, my ambivalence, rather than resolved, increases. I frequently fault what I say and think it should be amended or corrected.
2 NARRATIVE AND SELF-ACCOUNTS from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: A further question about self-accounts that is worth raising concerns the importance of narrative discourse for self-accounts. This question takes two forms. The first and more particular form is whether or not giving a self-account requires narrative. Does the act of telling you who I am and narrative discourse have a natural or necessary interdependence? The second form of the question, which arises from the first, is the cultural standing of narrated self-accounts. Are they, for example, specific to our own culture, or can they be thought of as constituting a more general human phenomenon?
3 DISCLOSING A RELIGIOUS IDENTITY from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: We should not be surprised, while reading the autobiographies of fellow Americans, to encounter religious self-disclosures. After all, roughly 85 percent of Americans self-identify as religious. In addition, religion is so pervasive in our society that the life of any American is likely to include references to religion in some form and degree or other. American autobiographies that include religious disclosures are not exceptional, then. Conversely, autobiographies that include religious self-disclosures are potentially engaging to American readers because they themselves are likely to have had to deal with religion as part of their pasts, their current interactions, or their thoughts
6 RELIGIOUS DIVINERS from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: Religious Diviners noticeably seek a religious identity that confirms their particularity, and that characteristic could make this kind of religious identity seem more self-centered than the other two. In fact, I was tempted at first to refer to texts of this kind as by Religious Designers, people who fashion religion to suit their
7 MOVING OUT: from:
Textual Intimacy
Abstract: I wouldn’t have thought of attempting a self-account of my own if it were not for the fact that, having attended to those of others, it would be unseemly simply to walk away. These nine people have proffered generous and intimate acts of self-disclosure, and, having heard them out and having commented on them, it seems a bit like the room has grown quiet and at least some eyes now turn toward me, as though, going around the circle, it is my turn. Isn’t it unseemly to receive the confidences of others without responding in kind?
INTRODUCTION from:
Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: It is arguably the case that no two figures have had more influence on the course of Western introspective thought than Freud and Augustine. As they wrote centuries apart, we might assume that it would be Freud, the more contemporary of the two, who would have the last say. But the primordial wisdom contained in Augustine’s substantial written corpus and the unpredictable nature of cultural eddies have ensured the continuation of numerous long and protracted debates revolving around the very different perspectives on human nature each bequeathed to culture.
four THERAPEIA from:
Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: In exploring how the academic term
mysticismcan be profitably utilized to probe the history of Christian mysticism, Bernard McGinn is adamant that its interpretation and meaning cannot be divorced from the total matrix of Christian ideation, practice, and accoutrements. Moreover, McGinn is careful to distinguish between mysticism rendered in terms of an episodic experience and what he refers to as “a process or a way of life.”¹ Although a distinction can be drawn between mysticism as experience and mysticism as process, McGinn holds that ultimately, the two are inseparable:
CONCLUSION from:
Freud and Augustine in Dialogue
Abstract: The discussion to this point has been directed toward establishing a new chapter in the ongoing psychoanalytic reception history of Augustine’s
Confessions. In laying out the argument, I have had occasion to touch on multiple issues germane to the broader academic study of mysticism, the place of psychoanalysis in it, and what seems to be the widespread emergence of a psychologically informed culture invested in mysticism and spirituality. It is this latter, wider and socially relevant fact that, in this concluding chapter, I take up in greater depth. The discussion proceeds by way of something assumed throughout this book, namely,
Book Title: Doing Justice to Mercy-Religion, Law, and Criminal Justice
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Jung Kevin
Abstract: Authored by legal practitioners, activists, and theorists in addition to theologians and ethicists, the essays collected here are informed by timeless principles, and yet they could not be timelier. The trend in sentencing moves toward an increased severity, and the number of incarcerated people in the United States is at an all-time high. In the half-decade since 9/11, moreover, homeland security has established itself as a permanent fixture in our lives. In this atmosphere, the current volume seeks initially to clarify how justice and mercy intertwine in relation to a number of issues, such as rehabilitation, the death penalty, domestic violence, and war crimes. Exploring the legal, philosophical, and theological grounds for mercy in our courts, the discussion then moves to the practical ways in which mercy may be implemented.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm3g
Introduction from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Abstract: Breaches of law and the challenges of administering justice pervade and inform everyday human life. From domestic violence to corporate corruption, senseless hate crimes to the carnage of ethnic cleansing, a local homicide to an act of international terrorism—issues of crime and punishment deeply touch the lives of victims, off enders, and the rest of society.
Recapturing the Good, Not Merely Measuring Harms: from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) ROTHCHILD JONATHAN
Abstract: As the essays in this book demonstrate, the current criminal justice system faces significant challenges: overcrowding, racial disparities, financial shortfalls, increases in juvenile inmates, and the collapse of families and communities of those incarcerated. These challenges impel critical reflections on the basic purposes of criminal punishment on both a theoretical and practical level. According to the
United States Commission Guidelines Manual(November 2000), the four basic purposes of criminal punishment are deterrence, incapacitation, just punishment, and rehabilitation.¹ Each of these purposes has garnered extensive support, and debates among the different proponents have been polemical at times. Within the last decade,
A Place for Mercy from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) ALSCHULER ALBERT W.
Abstract: To make room for mercy as a supererogatory act is to make room for inequality. If individuals and governments are morally obliged to treat like cases alike, supererogatory acts have no place. This essay considers whether the concept of justice is so expansive that it leaves no room for
Critical Response to David Scheffer from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) LITTLE DAVID
Abstract: First, he calls attention to experiments like South Africa’s Truth and Reconciliation Commission, which are efforts to find “nonjudicial” means, as Scheffer refers to them, for handling crimes related to societies with an authoritarian past. Incidentally, of the various arguments usually given in support of such arrangements, which also include political and practical considerations, two of them illuminate with particular clarity the connection to the justice/mercy discussion.
The Way of the Cross as Theatric of Counterterror from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) TAYLOR MARK LEWIS
Abstract: Since writing about systems of criminal justice and injustice in
The Executed God,one of that volume’s major notions, organized terror, has become more pertinent than I could have anticipated at that time. The book argued that U.S. practices of policing, imprisonment, and the death penalty form a system that disseminates terror among poor communities, and further, that this system often functions to reinforce exploitative patterns of political, economic, and social power. This terrorizing function, and its importance to U.S. public order, is hidden, for many people, behind the claims of moral legitimacy that police and other criminal justice officials
Critical Response to Mark Lewis Taylor from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) COAKLEY SARAH
Abstract: Mark Taylor writes a very powerful and passionate essay, in which he has gone significantly beyond the central themes of his recent book
The Executed God¹ by bringing the notion of “organized terror” in the American prison system into relation now to other forms of (so-called) “imperial” terror and reactions thereto. In what follows I shall be raising four specific questions about theadvisabilityof his particular strategies for critical response to the current prison system in the United States; as I do so, however, I hope it will be clear that I share with utter conviction Taylor’s horror at
Justice and Mercy: from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) PARIS PETER J.
Abstract: The moral relationship between justice and mercy is analogous to the relationship between a morally good state and a morally good person. That is to say, justice is prior to mercy in the realm of practice. A morally good state is determined by morally good laws, which in turn provide the necessary conditions for the moral development of its citizens and, most important, the practice of justice by both individual citizens and the state. Of course, morally good laws are determined in large part by the moral quality of those who make the laws. In brief, justice pertains to objective
Criminal Justice and the Law of Love: from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) GILPIN W. CLARK
Abstract: In a penetrating inquiry into the history of modern prison reform, the late Norval Morris, a legal scholar at the University of Chicago, asked us to confront the question of why prison conditions merit a society’s most serious consideration. Part of the answer, said Morris, “is to be found in the fact that the criminal justice system exercises the greatest power that a state can legally use against its citizens.” Consequently, the treatment of convicted criminals discloses the functioning norms of human decency and fairness, the protections of citizenship, and the restraints on the exercise of force that pervade the
Postscript from:
Doing Justice to Mercy
Author(s) SCHWEIKER WILLIAM
Abstract: How can one possibly and properly conclude such a book? By the nature of the case, anything I write will not be enough. The contributors’ ideas, theories, arguments, facts, and figures would all need to be clarified, debated,
Book Title: Locating the Destitute-Space and Identity in Caribbean Fiction
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): Radović Stanka
Abstract: Radović ultimately argues for the power of literary imagination to contest the limitations of geopolitical boundaries by emphasizing space and place as fundamental to our understanding of social and political identity. The physical places described in these texts crystallize the protagonists' ambiguous and complex relationship to the New World. Space is, then, as the author shows, both a political fact and a powerful metaphor whose imaginary potential continually challenges its material limitations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrm9c
Introduction from:
Locating the Destitute
Abstract: This book engages questions of space and spatial imagination in Caribbean fiction. Through the lens of contemporary spatial theory, I offer a comparative and interdisciplinary view of Caribbean postcolonial discourse. This discourse, in its inherently spatial orientation, contributes to and even anticipates the growing interest in space and place as critical categories fundamental for our understanding of social and political identity. Many Caribbean writers emphasize not only the cultural and linguistic legacy of colonialism but also its impact on space and spatial hierarchy. This question of spatial hierarchy has an even broader relevance: How are ordinary people, whom the Marxist
1 Caribbean Spatial Metaphors from:
Locating the Destitute
Abstract: Caribbean discourse and literature open a unique possibility for an innovative rereading of spatial and postcolonial theories in conjunction. The Caribbean has always been contested space, historically fought over and swapped among various colonial powers while conceptually cast as either the abyss of the slave plantation or the garden of worldly paradise. Engaging with various discursive representations of this ambiguity of Caribbean space, I address in this chapter the polarized visions of Caribbean postcoloniality between brutal colonial facts and powerful images of their contestation. These gestures of creative resistance, often formulated through spatial metaphors, offer deliberately provisional “third” solutions against
3 “No Admittance”: from:
Locating the Destitute
Abstract: The approach to identity as an outcome of spatial practice constitutes one of the most important aspects of V. S. Naipaul’s semi-autobiographical novel
A House for Mr. Biswas(1961). This novel is a prime example of the correlation between spatial theory and Caribbean postcolonial discourse and draws into sharper focus a number of questions that I have been raising. The novel consists of a central triad—space, self, and writing—that, in its triple orientation, allows me to examine the material significance of the house, its impact on identity, and its symbolic relevance in the protagonist’s quest for autonomy and
6 Upper and Lower Stories: from:
Locating the Destitute
Abstract: In Raphaël Confiant’s
L’Hôtel du Bon Plaisir(2009), the spatial approach to multiple (post) colonial histories, both personal and cultural, shapes the way we interpret the intersecting destinies of his protagonists. As a matter of fact the titular hotel turns out to be the most important protagonist of all, showing that shared space creates community and shelters its evolving history. Although Confiant’s novel shares with Chamoiseau’sTexacoa profound thematic and methodological kinship centered on exploring through the category of space the nonhierarchical multiplicity of Créolité, the intertwined narratives inL’Hôtel du Bon Plaisiremerge as part of a vertical
Book Title: Essays from the Edge-Parerga and Paralipomena
Publisher: University of Virginia Press
Author(s): JAY MARTIN
Abstract: Over his distinguished career as a European intellectual historian and cultural critic, Martin Jay has explored a variety of major themes: the Frankfurt School, the exile of German intellectuals in America during the Nazi era, Western Marxism, the denigration of vision in twentieth-century French thought, the discourse of experience in modern Europe and America, and lying in politics.
Essays from the Edgeassembles Jay's writings from the intersections of this intellectual journey. Several essays focus on methodological debates in the humanities and social sciences: the limits of interdisciplinarity, the issue of national or universal philosophy, cultural relativism and visuality, and the implications of periodization in historical narrative. Others examine the concept of "scopic regime" and the metaphors of revolution and the gardening impulse. Among the theorists treated at length are Theodor Adorno, Hannah Arendt, Jacques Derrida, and Michel Foucault. The essays also include several of Jay'sSalmagundicolumns, dealing with subjects as varied as the new Museum of Modern Art in New York, the impact of Colin Wilson's The Outsider, and the demise of thePartisan Review.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt6wrp5b
Scopic Regimes of Modernity Revisited from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: “What are scopic regimes?” recently asked a curious, unnamed Internet questioner on
Photherel,an official European e-learning website dedicated to the “conservation and dissemination of photographic heritage.”¹ Although noting that the now widely adopted term was first coined by the French film theorist Christian Metz, the no less anonymous site respondent ducked answering the question head-on. He nonetheless could claim that “the advantage of the concept of ‘scopic regime’ is that it supersedes the traditional distinction between technological determinism . . . and social construction. . . . In the case of scopic regimes, culture and technology interact.” And then,
The Kremlin of Modernism from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: At odd intervals in the main galleries of the renovated Museum of Modern Art, there are textual supplements to paintings, rarely more than a paragraph, providing snippets of information about the artist, the context of the work’s production, or the place it holds in the narrative of modern art. What makes these random exceptions to the more frequent practice of labeling the artwork only by artist, title, and date so intriguing is that they seem to follow no obvious pattern that might justify the choices made by the curators to arrest the process of pure looking. Perhaps more text will
Aesthetic Experience and Historical Experience from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Ever since Homer—or the gaggle of bards who have come down to us under that name—sat down to commemorate in epic poetry the Greek siege of Troy, artists have been inspired to find in historical events the stuff of literature. Indeed, until Heinrich Schliemann’s excavations in Asia Minor in the 1870s, the
Iliadwas generally assumed to be only fictional, with scant basis in historical fact. We now know it to be a mixture of myth, legend, and semireliable memory of real events, with the precise balance still a source of scholarly conjecture. Even when the first acknowledged
Still Waiting to Hear from Derrida from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: The death of Jacques Derrida in October 2004, at the age of seventy-four, should not be seen as the end of an epoch, the demise of an intellectual movement, or even the final act in the life of the man with that proper name. For if Derrida left any legacy at all, it was a radical suspicion about closure and completion, the inexorable linearity of before and after, indeed any “straightforward” temporality not haunted by the specters of a past it imagines it has left behind or pregnant with a future
(avenir)still to come(à venir).His many critics
The Menace of Consilience from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: Over the years, I have been given many opportunities to present my research to audiences across the waters in a number of different institutional settings. Invariably, two responses have been forthcoming—in addition, that is, to whatever howls of disbelief greeted the arguments of the talks themselves. First, someone would express surprise at how much younger I was than they imagined, and second, someone else would profess bafflement at my being a historian. Of late, I have noticed, alas, for not very mysterious reasons, a palpable decline in the frequency of the first of these reactions; the second, however, remains
Intellectual Family Values from:
Essays from the Edge
Abstract: With the death on September 12, 2002, of William Phillips and the subsequent suspension of the
Partisan Review,the publication he had edited since its founding in 1934, an era in American intellectual life, it has widely been acknowledged, came to a close. The quintessential engaged “little magazine,” whose circulation never passed fifteen thousand, was no longer viable in today’s cultural marketplace, where cutting-edge ideas are more likely to be expressed in the specialized jargon of esoteric academics than in the conversational prose of public intellectuals. The face-to-face interaction of friends and former friends, often entangled in webs of personal
CHAPTER ONE Hampâté Bâ: from:
Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: Unlike the many Francophone African autobiographers who practiced autobiography at a relatively early age, Amadou Hampâté Bâ came to first-person narrative at the last stage of his career as a writer. Bâ was well known as a “traditionalist” for his endeavor to preserve African culture and traditions through his writings. He published many folktales and essays about identity in the African context, defining himself as a “man of culture.”
Amkoullel, l’enfant peul(1991) is the first of his two autobiographical writings, the second beingOui, mon commandant!(1994). In this chapter, I show that even when attempting to practice the
CONCLUSION: from:
Postcolonial Francophone Autobiographies
Abstract: My book concentrates on autobiographies written by authors from two geographically different areas, Africa and its diaspora, with French as the common linguistic connection. This study shows that Francophone autobiographers’ adoption of a canonical genre does not necessarily result in complete imitation and can allow for a spectrum of creativity and modification. My analysis of these texts serves as a theoretical and practical reflection on the differences and similarities among Francophone African and Caribbean literary productions in the postcolonial era. The relationship between autobiographical writing and the various audiences implied by each narrative problematizes the issues of authenticity for autobiographies
Book Title: Religion after Religion-Gershom Scholem, Mircea Eliade, and Henry Corbin at Eranos
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wasserstrom Steven M.
Abstract: By the end of World War II, religion appeared to be on the decline throughout the United States and Europe. Recent world events had cast doubt on the relevance of religious belief, and modernizing trends made religious rituals look out of place. It was in this atmosphere that the careers of Scholem, Eliade, and Corbin--the twentieth century's legendary scholars in the respective fields of Judaism, History of Religions, and Islam--converged and ultimately revolutionized how people thought about religion. Between 1949 and 1978, all three lectured to Carl Jung's famous Eranos circle in Ascona, Switzerland, where each in his own way came to identify the symbolism of mystical experience as a central element of his monotheistic tradition. In this, the first book ever to compare the paths taken by these thinkers, Steven Wasserstrom explores how they overturned traditional approaches to studying religion by de-emphasizing law, ritual, and social history and by extolling the role of myth and mysticism. The most controversial aspect of their theory of religion, Wasserstrom argues, is that it minimized the binding character of moral law associated with monotheism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7pds6
Introduction from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: The greatest scholars require the closest study. During the postwar period, the critical study of religion in North America was significantly altered under the impact of the discipline known as History of Religions, especially as it was formulated by Romanian emigré comparativist Mircea Eliade (1907–1986). Eliade was one of a group of scholars of religion who met regularly at a chateau in Ascona, Switzerland. Beginning in 1933 these annual meetings, inspired by the Swiss psychotherapist Carl G. Jung, were held under the designation of
Eranos.The papers presented in Ascona (often two hours or more in length) were published
CHAPTER 2 Toward the Origins of History of Religions: from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: “In my book
Mitul Reintegrării (The Myth of Reintegration)I traced the opposites that are found together in primitive rites, myths, and metaphysics. We shall have to return to these problems later on.”¹ Eliade described the background to his writingMitul Reintegrăriiin an essay eventually published in English under the title “Mephistopheles and the Androgyne.”² In another essay extracted fromThe Myth of Reintegration, he spoke directly to the concept of “reintegration.”
CHAPTER 4 Coincidentia Oppositorum: from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: Mircea Eliade showcased the
coincidentia oppositorum(coincidence of opposites) as both the title (Two and the One) and alternate title (Mephistopheles and the Androgyne) he assigned to one of his most popular essay collections. This collection was then reprinted under a title taken from the essay forming its core, “Mephistopheles and the Androgyneorthe Mystery of the Whole.” Eliade, in fact, claimed thecoincidentia oppositorumto be so central to his understanding of the sacred and the profane, and evoked it so often, that his conception of it has drawn ample study. It hardly seems necessary, therefore, to recapitulate
CHAPTER 7 A Rustling in the Woods: from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: The most influential and brilliant students of Hermann Cohen (1842—1918), the neo-Kantian Jewish philosopher of Marburg, largely rejected one of his fundamental views on Judaism. Opposing his characterization of Judaism as the religion definitively opposed to myth—Judaism as virtually identical with a demythologized Enlightenment rationality—these post-Cohenian thinkers turned to a view of myth as a creative and living force. At least three Cohen students, Franz Rosenzweig, Ernst Bloch, and Ernst Cassirer, wrote revolutionary works that innovatively reassessed the relations between myth, the History of Religions, and Judaism. These figures were joined by a much larger cohort in
CHAPTER 10 Mystic Historicities from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: A stumbling block often encountered by new readers of Mircea Eliade is the discovery that the History of Religions oddly is defined by its opposition to history. Gershom Scholem’s version of History of Religions seemed to obviate this dilemma, inasmuch as he championed historical research and the historical method. Henry Corbin used a variety of terms, such as “imaginal” and “prophetic,” to characterize his stridently antihistoricist Islamic studies. But all three shared a developed interest in metahistory. Both Scholem and Corbin thus spoke of “historiosophy.” They also spoke of their own work in terms of a kind of “counter-history.”¹ Corbin
CHAPTER 13 Uses of the Androgyne in the History of Religions from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: The most striking (and the most uncharacteristic) title of the many books published by Mircea Eliade was
Méphistophélès et l’androgyne.¹ This title had a long history.² It was the title of the longest essay in the collection; this article in turn had been his lecture at the Eranos meeting in Ascona, Switzerland, in 1958. Before that, this same material had originally constituted his studies in the late 1930s; they were published during the war, in Romanian, asThe Myth of Reintegration.³ The essay itself, in its final English version, alludes to this protracted history in its opening lines. “About twenty
CHAPTER 14 Defeating Evil from Within: from:
Religion after Religion
Abstract: The greatest scholarship requires the closest study. Gershom Scholem’s classic essay “Redemption through Sin” remains one of the most influential essays written not only in Jewish Studies but in the History of Religions more generally.¹ It was a tour de force, serving at once as programmatic seed, historiographic manifesto, research agenda, and transvaluational breakthrough. Even after many translations and republications, this essay remains positioned in Scholem’s corpus as a vital synthesis of his innovative creativity. But the paradoxical morality articulated by Scholem in “Redemption through Sin” only appears to be utterly novel. In fact, it emerges more and more clearly
Book Title: Liberal Languages-Ideological Imaginations and Twentieth-Century Progressive Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Freeden Michael
Abstract: Michael Freeden argues that liberalism's collectivist and holistic aspirations, and its sense of change, its self-defined mission as an agent of developing civilization--and not only its deep appreciation of liberty--are central to understanding its arguments. He examines the profound political impact liberalism has made on welfare theory, on conceptions of poverty, on standards of legitimacy, and on democratic practices in the twentieth century. Through a combination of essays, historical case studies, and more theoretical chapters, Freeden investigates the transformations of liberal thought as well as the ideological boundaries they have traversed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rh6k
CHAPTER FOUR Layers of Legitimacy: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: The concept of legitimacy is part of the belief system of a political entity. There are no empirical indicators for when a state of legitimacy has been reached; nor are there practices that, when observed or described, lead us to assert unequivocally: this is legitimate. There is nothing in a street demonstration against cutbacks in state pensions that, had I just parachuted onto this planet, will signal to me whether marching down a road, waving banners, and shouting aggressive slogans is a legitimate act, unless I am pre-equipped with a map instructing me on whether populist and chaotic expressions of
CHAPTER FIVE J. A. Hobson as a Political Theorist from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: J. A. Hobson was one of the half-dozen most influential political thinkers in late-nineteenth—early-twentieth-century Britain, a fact that even the partial revival of his fortunes has infrequently brought to light. The main reason for this oversight has two complementary facets: Hobson’s contribution lay chiefly in his formulation of a liberal version of British welfare thought, an ideological genre that until recently was accorded insufficient recognition; and, conversely, recourse to conventional modes of political theorising, utilising existing traditions, or referring to the constructs of leading individuals, was not paramount in his work. It is symptomatic that in the various reading
CHAPTER SIX Hobson’s Evolving Conceptions of Human Nature from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: It is a truism to suggest that every social and political theory is rooted in a conception of human nature. Hobson was no exception to that rule, but his interpretation of human nature was novel and wide-ranging. It did not merely refer to an abstract model, artificially—even cunningly—employed to explain or justify this or that social practice. Rather, it was grounded in concrete, commonsense, empirical observations; it encompassed a broad openness to different aspects of human behaviour; and it attempted to incorporate insights from new developments in philosophy, psychology, sociology, and physiology as well as relate to older
INTERMEZZO from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: Ideologies are ubiquitous forms of political thinking. Let’s put this more forcefully: the access we have to the actual political thought of a society is always through its ideologies, that is, through the configurations and clusters of interdependent political concepts and ideas that circulate in that society at different levels of articulation. It is not attained through individual concepts or through individual thinkers, because neither language nor societies host these elements in isolation. The raw material of political thought at the disposal of any society is immense, and the meanings and semantic structures of political language are necessarily indeterminate. That
CHAPTER EIGHT True Blood or False Genealogy: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: When tony blair traced some of the ideational roots of New Labour back to early-and mid-twentieth-century liberals, as well as when he put out organisational feelers of cooperation toward the Liberal Democrats, he dared make explicit a central feature of British progressivism. In contrast to the overt politics of confrontation and the tactics of exclusion that have typified the public face of British political culture, with its assumption of a one-to-one association between party and political values, the ideology of social and political reform has cut across party boundaries ever since Labour was formed. Although liberalism and social democracy have
CHAPTER NINE The Ideology of New Labour from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: What is lamentable about Blair’s reported view is not the “fact” that it ostensibly announces but the illusion it promotes. Marx held ideology to be dissimulative, a distortion of the relations of the material world. Now, however, we
CHAPTER ELEVEN Political Theory and the Environment: from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: Consider sitting on a tree. Every year in Oxford hundreds of human beings sit on trees. Most of them are children, often in their backgardens, scrambling over branches, hiding in their tree houses. Some are adults, out for a walk, looking for a view, or a place to rest for a while when the ground is wet. Sitting on trees is a recreational activity, and has been so since time immemorial. Not long ago, one group of adults chose to sit on trees on the site of the Oxford-Business-School-to-be. Was that a recreational activity? I doubt it. The act was
CHAPTER TWELVE Practising Ideology and Ideological Practices from:
Liberal Languages
Abstract: Although among the categories informing the study of politics there are few as fundamental as those demarcating theory and practice, that distinction is highly problematic when applied to the analysis of ideologies. Many traditional as well as current approaches regard political thought as the area in which issues of moral philosophy pertaining to political entities are aired, with the objective of setting defining ethical and validating criteria that are then to be applied to political practice. A grounding of this view may be found in Kant, for whom individuals were subjected to clear and unequivocal moral duties and were
therefore
2 BEGINNINGS TO 300 B.C.E.: from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: When porphyry refers (repeatedly) to Homer’s cave of the nymphs as a σύμβολου of certain hidden meanings, he is using the term in a sense that appears only in the postclassical period in ancient Greece. The early Greek term meant something quite different—so different, in fact, that we will be forced to wonder just how it developed a literary sense at all. These earliest manifestations of the Greek symbol provide insights into the trajectories the notion later follows. Of course, they do not and cannot be asked to provide some authentic glimpse of the “true” or “real” symbol, as
4 SWALLOWED CHILDREN AND BOUND GODS: from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: In the first and second centuries c.e. we have abundant evidence of a broad diffusion of an allegorical approach to reading the poets. Writers as diverse as Pausanias, Maximus of Tyre, and Dio Chrysostom show that an allegorical understanding of the ancient tales was simply ready at hand during this period,¹ and several contemporary allegorical tracts survive as well. Cornutus, Heraclitus the Allegorist, and Pseudo-Plutarch (the
Life of Homerauthor) show that different fields of inquiry were putting allegorical tools to use. They also all attest that the literary symbol, of which Chrysippus gives us our first direct testimony, has
5 300 B.C.E.–200 C.E.: from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: As we saw earlier, beginning in the third century b.c.e., about the time of Philochorus’s
On Symbolsand sometime before Chrysippus forwards his reading of the swallowing of Metis, the term “symbol” takes on a new life. It expands from being a narrow term for a contract marker, with specialized senses in Pythagoreanism, the mysteries, and divination, to being an important category of literary commentary. As we have seen, the Stoics and their allegorical followers present the first definitive evidence of this shift, though it was likely in place before them. During the Hellenistic and Roman periods the “symbol” appears
6 IAMBLICHUS AND THE DEFENSE OF RITUAL: from:
Birth of the Symbol
Abstract: The followers of Pythagoras introduced us to a sacramental dimension of the ancient concept of the symbol. The secretive tradition that grew up around the Presocratic philosopher’s legend employed his “symbols,” the short epigrammatic sayings attributed to him, as tokens of true identity and as a kind of catechism in a ritualized ascent to knowledge. They also made comparisons between Pythagoras’s symbols and the efficacious speech used in magical practices. But after the third century c.e., the idea that symbols have the power to
dothings and not justsaythem reaches a new and determining prominence with the Neoplatonists.
Book Title: Available Light-Anthropological Reflections on Philosophical Topics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, one of the most influential thinkers of our time, here discusses some of the most urgent issues facing intellectuals today. In this collection of personal and revealing essays, he explores the nature of his anthropological work in relation to a broader public, serving as the foremost spokesperson of his generation of scholars, those who came of age after World War II. His reflections are written in a style that both entertains and disconcerts, as they engage us in topics ranging from moral relativism to the relationship between cultural and psychological differences, from the diversity and tension among activist faiths to "ethnic conflict" in today's politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rkn7
II Thinking as a Moral Act: from:
Available Light
Abstract: When I try to sum up what, above all else, I have learned from grappling with the sprawling prolixities of John Dewey’s work, what I come up with is the succinct and chilling doctrine that thought is conduct and is to be morally judged as such. It is not the notion that thinking is a serious matter that seems to be distinctive of this last of the New England philosophers; all intellectuals regard mental productions with some esteem. It is the argument that the reason thinking is serious is that it is a social act, and that one is therefore
III Anti Anti-Relativism from:
Available Light
Abstract: A scholar can hardly be better employed than in destroying a fear. The one I want to go after is cultural relativism. Not the thing itself, which I think merely there, like Transylvania, but the dread of it, which I think unfounded. It is unfounded because the moral and intellectual consequences that are commonly supposed to flow from relativism—subjectivism, nihilism, incoherence, Machiavellianism, ethical idiocy, esthetic blindness, and so on—do not in fact do so and the promised rewards of escaping its clutches, mostly having to do with pasteurized knowledge, are illusory.
IV The Uses of Diversity from:
Available Light
Abstract: Anthropology, my
fröhliche Wissenschaft, has been fatally involved over the whole course of its history (a long one, if you start it with Herodotus; rather short, if you start it with Tylor) with the vast variety of ways in which men and women have tried to live their lives. At some points, it has sought to deal with that variety by capturing it in some universalizing net of theory: evolutionary stages, pan-human ideas or practices, or transcendental forms (structures, archetypes, subterranean grammars). At others, it has stressed particularity, idiosyncrasy, incommensurability—cabbages and kings. But recently it has found itself faced
V The State of the Art from:
Available Light
Abstract: One of the advantages of anthropology as a scholarly enterprise is that no one, including its practitioners, quite knows exactly what it is. People who watch baboons copulate, people who rewrite myths in algebraic formulas, people who dig up Pleistocene skeletons, people who work out decimal point correlations between toilet training practices and theories of disease, people who decode Maya hieroglyphics, and people who classify kinship systems into typologies in which our own comes out as “Eskimo” all call themselves anthropologists. So do people who analyze African drum rhythms, arrange the whole of human history into evolutionary phases culminating in
VII The Legacy of Thomas Kuhn: from:
Available Light
Abstract: The death of Thomas Kuhn—“Tom” to all who knew him, and considering his principled refusal to play the role of the intellectual celebrity he clearly was, an extraordinary number of people did— seems, like his professional life in general, on the way to being seen, in these days of pomos and culture wars, as but another appendix, footnote, or afterthought to his
The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, written in the fifties and published in 1962.¹ Despite the fact that he produced a number of other important works, including the at least as original and rather more carefulThe Essential
XI The World in Pieces: from:
Available Light
Abstract: Political theory, which presents itself as addressing universal and abiding matters concerning power, obligation, justice, and government in general and unconditioned terms, the truth about things as at bottom they always and everywhere necessarily are, is in fact, and inevitably, a specific response to immediate circumstances. However cosmopolitan it may be in intent, it is, like religion, literature, historiography, or law, driven and animated by the demands of the moment: a guide to perplexities particular, pressing, local, and at hand.
Book Title: Essays on Giordano Bruno- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): GATTI HILARY
Abstract: The book is divided into sections that address three broad subjects: the relationship between Bruno and the new science, the history of his reception in English culture, and the principal characteristics of his natural philosophy. A final essay examines why this advocate of a "tranquil universal philosophy" ended up being burned at the stake as a heretic by the Roman Inquisition. While the essays take many different approaches, they are united by a number of assumptions: that, although well versed in magic, Bruno cannot be defined primarily as a Renaissance Magus; that his aim was to articulate a new philosophy of nature; and that his thought, while based on ancient and medieval sources, represented a radical rupture with the philosophical schools of the past, helping forge a path toward a new modernity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rmc2
6 THE SENSE OF AN ENDING IN BRUNO’S HEROICI FURORI from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: An undeniable characteristic of books is that they come to an end. This was the aspect of books investigated by Frank Kermode in his
The Sense of an Ending, which has given me the title for this chapter. Kermode—nowadays Sir Frank, and Britain’s most prestigious living literary critic—is not concerned at all with Bruno. HisSense of an Ending, however, was considered by a distinguished colleague, on publication in 1966, to be “a very beautiful book”—a judgment with which I can only agree. As well as my title, it has given me many of the ideas about
7 BRUNO AND SHAKESPEARE: from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Hamlet’scentral position as a moment of transition between the early period of Shakespeare’s more brilliant and happy mood toward the years of his mature tragic art can be considered as an acquired fact in almost any modern reading of his best known and most celebrated play. Those who wish to underline Shakespeare’s position in the course of British history between the end of the sixteenth century and the beginning of the seventeenth, whenHamletwas written and acted for the first time (1600–1601), often explain this dramatic change of mood by pointing to the final years of the
8 BRUNO’S CANDELAIO AND BEN JONSON’S THE ALCHEMIST from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: In this passage from the ninth earl of Northumberland’s
Instructionsto his son, written in the Tower of London, where he was imprisoned in the early years of the seventeenth century, we find the expression of a deeply ambiguous attitude toward alchemy.¹ In the context of the impetuous developments in the new sciences that characterize the early seventeenth century, alchemy was rapidly assuming the role of an outworn discipline, pervaded by ritualistic and linguistic practices of antique origin. Furthermore, it appeared surrounded by mystery due to its obscure and occult symbolism, partly derived from magical and Hermetical influences, and partly
9 BRUNO AND THE STUART COURT MASQUES from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: It has long been known that Bruno’s fourth Italian dialogue,
Lo spaccio della bestia trionfante, written and published in London in 1584, was used as a source by Thomas Carew for his masqueCoelum britannicum.¹ This was Carew’s only masque but it was by no means a minor event within the Stuart calendar of court entertainments. However, in spite of general agreement on the quality ofCoelum britannicumas one of the major entertainments of the Stuart Court, the use by Carew of Bruno’s dialogue has never been extensively or satisfactorily commented on. Both Bruno and Carew scholars have clearly
11 BRUNO AND THE VICTORIANS from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: When j. c. shairp published his
Studies in Poetry and Philosophyin 1868, he included a section on Coleridge emphasizing the break that, under his influence, separated the Romantic and idealistic period of the beginning of the century from the culture of the Enlightenment. From the point of view of Shairp, which is also that of Coleridge, the Enlightenment was based on a utilitarian attitude that denoted an active but restricted and unimaginative intelligence, notably deprived of fantasy, profound sentiment, a sense of reverence, or spiritual sensibility. Shairp added that, in the Victorian England in which he was writing, there
15 BRUNO AND METAPHOR from:
Essays on Giordano Bruno
Abstract: Giordano bruno was born only five years after the first publication of Copernicus’s
De revolutionibusin 1543, and only thirty-odd years after Martin Luther’s excommunication from the Catholic Church had divided Europe and its culture into two militantly hostile factions. Bruno’s lifetime in the second half of the sixteenth century thus covers a vital if often turbulent moment of cultural transition, which would radically affect the history of both science and the humanities. This chapter will primarily be concerned with his thinking about language, and especially with his thoughts about metaphor, thus aligning itself with an interpretative model of early
Chapter Five Inside and Outside the Work of Art: from:
The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The understanding of Aristotelian mimesis has suffered almost as much at the hands of its ostensible friends as at those of its avowed opponents. While the philosopher’s concept of mimesis has played a vital role in the long story of Western attitudes to artistic representation, that role has often been mediated through the reworking and misinterpretation of his ideas, especially those found in the
Poetics. The critical balance of the treatise has been prejudicially weighted down, at different times, either on the side of a doctrinal didacticism or, equally distortingly, on that of a formalist creed of pure artistic autonomy.
Chapter Seven Tragic Pity: from:
The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: For Aristotle as for Plato, the deepest, most significant and most philosophically interesting of all mimetic artforms was tragic poetry.² That tragedy should attract such attention from both philosophers was a reflection not only of the genre’s cultural prestige in classical Athens, but also, and more fundamentally, of the scope of its ethical and psychological engagement with extremes of human experience and suffering. Plato, as I argued in chapter 3, counted tragedy as a kind of embryonic (though profoundly mistaken) philosophy: the vehicle of a set of attitudes and values capable of being translated into a worldview that, if taken
Chapter Eight Music and the Limits of Mimesis: from:
The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: The nature of music is perhaps the most intractable, as well as one of the most fascinating, of all problems in aesthetics. It has been debated voluminously and often polemically since antiquity, and far from becoming worn out the subject has in recent years seen a spate of publications from contemporary philosophers, especially in the English-speaking world.¹ However intellectualized the questions that cluster around the topic may have become, their roots are unmistakably “anthropological.” Every known human culture not only possesses music but develops ways of using it that consistently manifest both an association with special categories of events and
Chapter Nine Truth or Delusion? from:
The Aesthetics of Mimesis
Abstract: In the domain of aesthetics, moving on from the writings of Plato and Aristotle to the rather patchily preserved evidence for Hellenistic attitudes to mimetic art is somewhat like descending from a mountain range into a large but indefinitely sprawling plain. It is appropriate to begin this journey, however, by observing that extensive areas of the plain are irrigated by waters that run down from the peaks above. One aspect of the impact of both Plato and Aristotle—an aspect given little attention by historians of philosophy but an immensely important one in the long run of the history of
Book Title: A Theory of the Trial- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Burns Robert P.
Abstract: Burns explores the rich narrative structure of the trial, beginning with the lawyers' opening statements, which establish opposing moral frameworks in which to interpret the evidence. In the succession of witnesses, stories compete and are held in tension. At some point during the performance, a sense of the right thing to do arises among the jurors. How this happens is at the core of Burns's investigation, which draws on careful descriptions of what trial lawyers do, the rules governing their actions, interpretations of actual trial material, social science findings, and a broad philosophical and political appreciation of the trial as a unique vehicle of American self-government.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rnt9
Introduction from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: This book grew out of a long attempt to understand an epiphany, one I have experienced and that seems often to occur in American trial courts. In the course of trial there emerges an understanding of the people and events being tried that has a kind of austere clarity and power. This experience surprises and “elevates” the participants, including the jury. The grasp of what has occurred and what should be done seems to have a kind of comprehensiveness, almost self-evidence, of which it is extremely difficult to give an account. It involves factual and normative determinations of very different
I The Received View of the Trial from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: What is a trial? The simplicity of the question is deceptive. Since Socrates began posing such “What is . . .” questions about human practices, we have learned that these apparently straightforward factual questions quickly open out into an ideal realm whose limits are always indeterminate. We do not really
understandwhat a trial is unless we understand the interrelation between what we may only provisionally call “what a trial is” and “what a trial can aspire to be.” For us, “factual” questions become practical questions, such as, “How should we shape our public life?”
II The Trial’s Linguistic Practices from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: One of the fixed points of the social scientific study of the trial is that the juror makes his or her decision after an intense encounter with the evidence, and it is the evidence in the case, more than any other factor, that determines the outcome.³ The juror performs his or her task only after this highly structured language-centered event: the trial itself. The trial is usually over immediately after this encounter, since jury deliberation “changes” the result in fewer than one in ten cases. The initial majority almost always prevails.⁴ Before we focus in greater detail on the
kinds
IV An Interpretation from One Trial from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: The trial makes possible different levels of normative judgment. Some are closely connected to factual accuracy, though not in the way that the Received View suggests. Other levels of judgment recognize that the trial is a public event, and that its task is not only to do justice but to preserve the conditions for the doing of justice. Thus the key task in most trials is to identify what is most
importantabout the case and thus to determine what form of social ordering is appropriate, both of which require “metalevel” judgments.
V The Trial’s Most Basic Features and Some Observed Consequences from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: We have seen that the Received View is beset with anomalies which cast doubt on its understanding of the trial. I have reviewed the practices and constitutive rules that make the trial what it is. I have interpreted a relatively simple trial performance and found it to put into play levels of questions well beyond the “issues of fact” envisioned by the Received View. In this chapter, I begin the task of constructing a more adequate understanding of the contemporary trial, one that both is more accurate and can hold its ground normatively. I begin in a phenomenological or descriptive
VI Thinking What We Do from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: I began by recounting the Received View of the trial, an understanding with deep roots in our allegiance to the Rule of Law and one that seems to explain some of the most striking and distinctive features of the actual conduct of American trials. We saw that even the trial’s legal infrastructure, where we ought to see a high level of consistency with the Received View, presented significant anomalies. This led us to a more searching description of the actual linguistic practices that constitute the trial, largely written from the perspective of the lawyers who perform those practices. I then
VII The Two Sides of the Trial Event from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: We are beginning to see that trial languages and practices reflect the multiplicity of normative spheres. I suggest throughout the rest of this book that, for precisely this reason, the trial has evolved into an institution peculiarly appropriate for the conditions of modern life: to varying degrees, modern trials “are emblems of the simultaneous creation of justice and of the enabling conventions of justice” and are thus a response to the modernist predicament of our needing our conventions while simultaneously knowing that we have created them and can criticize them.¹ The trial is the “law’s self-criticism” specifically because the elements
VIII The Truth of Verdicts from:
A Theory of the Trial
Abstract: The sense in which a verdict can be said to be correct under the Received View seems relatively straightforward:¹ a verdict will be correct if it is based on accurate fact-finding followed by legal categorization that respects the meanings of the key terms in the instructions. From that perspective, it is difficult even to think of a verdict as “true.”² “Justified” or perhaps “correct,” but never quite “true.” I have proposed another understanding of what, concretely, the trial has become for us that I argue is fair to the different sources of evidence, and have invoked “the mutual support of
Chapter One The Challenge (and Stigma) of Philosophy from:
Freud, the Reluctant Philosopher
Abstract: What are the philosophical antecedents of Freud’s attempt to establish a science of the mind? As already briefly mentioned, during his early university days Freud explicitly rejected philosophy, because of its “speculative” character. He struggled with balancing the intellectual appeal of philosophy with the “certainty” he hoped to find in positivist science. That move heralded the series of clinical studies that would eventually emerge in the therapeutic system of psychoanalysis, a psychiatry he would consistently call a “science.” Freud never abandoned his commitment to scientific knowledge and perhaps more importantly, scientific reason. As he wrote late in his life, “Our
Chapter Five The Odd Triangle: from:
Freud, the Reluctant Philosopher
Abstract: From Augustine to our own era, introspection is inextricable from “self-consciousness,” which in turn is integral to and, in some sense, coincident with various understandings of selfhood. Simply, self-consciousness is enacted through self-reflexivity, and in this process of self-awareness, identity emerges. But the word “reflexivity” has a more circumscribed history. Reflexivity appears as a paradigm of understanding the self during the early modern period, coincident with the preoccupation with optics and the birth of a new physics of light. “Reflexivity” was first applied to cognitive introspection, in referring to “thought as bending back upon itself,” in the 1640s, when theologians,
CHAPTER FIVE Exegetical and Rhetorical Strategies for Ascetic Reading from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: In this chapter, I survey the various ways in which the church fathers produce ascetic meaning from Scriptural texts, especially those of the Old Testament. As will become evident, the degree of exegetical work needed to render these texts as messages of sexual renunciation varied considerably: in some cases, passages stood ready-to-hand for appropriation, while in others, textual displacement, or even textual violence, was necessary to extract an ascetic meaning. I here identify eleven modes of reading, some closely related, that were frequently used by ascetically inclined church fathers. Although these modes of reading often have recourse to figurative interpretations,
CHAPTER EIGHT From Ritual to Askēsis from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: In some quarters, the study of ritual has shifted emphasis in recent decades. Scholars have gradually abandoned the functionalist view that ritual serves to create social unity,¹ stressing instead its marking of social difference. In part, this shift signals a dissatisfaction with functionalism’s inherently conservative emphasis on “societal balance,” on the preservation of the
status quo.² Informed by a more sharply critical analysis, theoreticians now note the gaps, the distinctions, the discrepancies of a society that ritual, far from healing, instead underscores and maintains. Differentiation is here seen as an activity that can be examined through a focus on ritual.³
CHAPTER TEN I Corinthians 7 in Early Christian Exegesis from:
Reading Renunciation
Abstract: How did patristic authors “read” I Corinthians 7 in a later Christian setting that pressured the Bible to ratify an escalating ascetic theory and practice? This famous chapter, containing Paul’s most detailed teaching on marriage and sexual abstinence, proved sufficiently elastic to enable exegetes to express their varied ascetic preferences while expounding a text that they considered immutable and eternally valid. To be sure, almost all patristic writers rate sexual abstinence (if properly motivated) as “higher” on the scale of Christian values than marriage; nonetheless, they diverge considerably from each other in the weight they lend to this preference.
Book Title: The Sense of Music-Semiotic Essays
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Hatten Robert
Abstract: Based on the assumption that music cannot be described without reference to its meaning, Raymond Monelle proposes that works of the Western classical tradition be analyzed in terms of temporality, subjectivity, and topic theory. Critical of the abstract analysis of musical scores, Monelle argues that the score does not reveal music's
sense.That sense--what a piece of music says and signifies--can be understood only with reference to history, culture, and the other arts. Thus, music is meaningful in that it signifies cultural temporalities and themes, from the traditional manly heroism of the hunt to military power to postmodern "polyvocality."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rszr
1 THE WORDLESS SONG from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It was to be the climax of his career. Dr. Strabismus of Utrecht (whom God preserve) had spent a lifetime writing about music theory—not only about musical syntax and analysis, but also about meaning, sense, interpretation, heuristics. Now, he intended to write a comprehensive theory of music, to replace those great enterprises of the past, the treatises of Zarlino, Rameau, Marx. But unlike his great predecessors, he would embrace semantics as well as syntactics. He would describe how music comes to signify things to its listeners; how it participates in the whole signifying life of a culture, echoing the
3 TOPIC AND LEITMOTIV from:
The Sense of Music
Abstract: It is strange to find leitmotivs listed as though they were purely musical ideas or given numbers instead of names, conveying the impression that the operas are abstract symphonic works. This is the policy of William Mann in his translations of the libretti; he avoids naming the leitmotivs because “no
Chapter 4 NARRATIVE AND STYLE IN LOWER HELL from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: Introduced by the complex transition of cantos 16 and 17,
Inferno18 constitutes an emphatic new beginning situated at the canticle’s midpoint, at its narrative “mezzo del cammin.” “Luogo è in inferno detto Malebolge” (“There is a place in hell called Malebolge”) begins the canto, with a verse that is crisply informative, explicitly introductory, and patently devoted to differentiation:¹ this is a new place, a new locus. Following thedescriptio lociheralded by the opening “Luogo è,”² the narrator’s focus shifts to the travelers. In two apparently very simple tercets, he activates the poetics of the new, founded on the
Chapter 5 PURGATORY AS PARADIGM: from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: The narrative of the
Commediais a line intersected by other lines; it is a “vedere interciso da novo obietto,” a seeing interrupted by new things, thenovi obietti or cose novethat do not trouble angels. It is a voyage intersected by other voyages; each time the pilgrim meets a soul, his lifeline intersects another lifeline. In hell he encounters failed voyages, journeys that have ended in failure. Ulysses’ special stature within the poem derives in no small measure from the fact that his lifeline concludes with a literal voyage that has literally failed, so that he, alone among
Chapter 8 PROBLEMS IN PARADISE: from:
The Undivine Comedy
Abstract: We turn now to the
Paradisoand to the problems of recounting the unrecountable. Due to our habit of conflating theCommedia’sform with its content, the exegetical tradition has produced a theologized reading of the third canticle that portrays it as cloyingly serene (no doubt a factor in its undeserved reputation as boring). In recent years, the old critical commonplace of a serene and problem-free third canticle has been given a metapoetic twist; we hear now about the difficulties of writing theInferno, difficulties that presumably lessen as the poem proceeds. As indicated earlier, such readings unacceptably theologize the
Book Title: The Satanic Epic- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): FORSYTH NEIL
Abstract: Satan emerges as the main challenge to Christian belief. It is Satan who questions and wonders and denounces. He is the great doubter who gives voice to many of the arguments that Christianity has provoked from within and without. And by rooting his Satanic reading of
Paradise Lostin Biblical and other sources, Forsyth retrieves not only an attractive and heroic Satan but a Milton whose heretical energies are embodied in a Satanic character with a life of his own.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rwjm
FIVE SATAN’S REBELLION from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: In this respect it recalls the ritual practice of certain shamans reported by Mircea Eliade. When someone falls sick, the
SIX The Language of “Evil” from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: The ambivalence of Satan’s relation to evil is important for the meaning of the poem. As we have seen, he explicitly rejects Michael’s term “evil” for the War in Heaven, which “wee style / The strife of Glorie” (6.289–90). And when, for the only time, he is called “the Evil one,” it is at the very moment when he stands “Stupidly good” (9.465) abstracted “From his own evil.”¹ Nonetheless the poem is about the origin of evil, and in this chapter I shall investigate the scrupulous ways in which Milton deploys what he knew to be the various sources
EIGHT HOMER IN MILTON: from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: In this chapter we turn the coin, from “disgrace” back to “grace.” Milton draws various parallels between Eve and Homer’s graceful heroines. Helen, for example, refers to herself as the cause of the Trojan War and wishes she had preferred death to Paris (e.g.,
Iliad3.173). In her regret at what has happened, Eve, too, wishes for death, indeed proposes a suicide pact (PL 10.1001). She also refers to herself as a “snare” for Adam, and goes on to wonder at the irony in her name: “That I who first brought Death on all, am grac’t / The sourse of
ELEVEN AT THE SIGN OF THE DOVE AND SERPENT from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: We have just been exploring the contrasting but related activity of the poem’s two protagonists, Son and Satan, in Book 10. This opposition, which is essential to the combat myth Milton is retelling, is actually signalled very early in the poem and pervades it from then on. But so many things are happening in the first few lines of
Paradise Lostthat we are in danger of missing the wood for the trees. Thus we may miss the fact, obvious enough when we think about it, that the narration places two symbolic animals close to the beginning. First, as the
Conclusion: from:
The Satanic Epic
Abstract: When the comet Hale-Bopp made its graceful way across our skies in 1998, most informed people were impressed by its beauty and curious about the science. But a few people were driven by religious fanatics to various tragic episodes of mass-suicide. They read the comet as a message, which they interpreted in the conventional way as a sign of the Apocalypse. The contrast between these two kinds of reaction to astronomical phenomena is discernible already in the seventeenth century. But the proportions would have been quite different: a majority would have taken the religious view, even some members of the
Book Title: Brahms and His World-(Revised Edition)
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Since its first publication in 1990,
Brahms and His Worldhas become a key text for listeners, performers, and scholars interested in the life, work, and times of one of the nineteenth century's most celebrated composers. In this substantially revised and enlarged edition, the editors remain close to the vision behind the original book while updating its contents to reflect new perspectives on Brahms that have developed over the past two decades. To this end, the original essays by leading experts are retained and revised, and supplemented by contributions from a new generation of Brahms scholars. Together, they consider such topics as Brahms's relationship with Clara and Robert Schumann, his musical interactions with the "New German School" of Wagner and Liszt, his influence upon Arnold Schoenberg and other young composers, his approach to performing his own music, and his productive interactions with visual artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7rxmx
Time and Memory: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) BOTSTEIN LEON
Abstract: How can one grasp the nature and impact of Brahms’s musical language and communication in his own time? In the first instance one has to guard against an uncritical sense of the stability of musical texts, their meaning, and how they can be read and heard. The acoustic, cultural, and temporal habits of life of the late nineteenth century in which Brahms’s music functioned demand reconsideration if the listener in the early twentyfirst century wishes to gain a historical perspective on Brahms’s music and its significance. A biographical strategy and the history of critical reception themselves are insufficient.
Discovering Brahms (1862–72) from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Johannes Brahms has now presented himself as composer and virtuoso before the public in a concert of his own.⁶ Brahms’s compositions do not number among those immediately understandable and captivating works that carry one along in their flight. Their esoteric character, nobly disavowing every sort of popular effect, combined with their significant technical difficulties, assures that a broad embrace of these works will be much longer in coming than Schumann delightedly prophesized for his darling as a parting blessing.ᦍ In Vienna, none of Brahms’s larger compositions had previously been performed, and among his smaller works we had heard only a
Johannes Brahms: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) KARNES KEVIN C.
Abstract: Alas, we have lost him, too, the true, great master and loyal friend! He, who until recently was able to vaunt the fact that he had never been sick in his entire life, not even for a single day! That had continued to be the case until the end of the summer, when he suddenly became sick without realizing it himself. In Ischl, some friends pointed out to him that his face had acquired a sickly yellow hue. With the explanation that he never looked at himself in the mirror, he cut the conversation short, since it irritated him. Brahms,
Remembering Johannes Brahms: from:
Brahms and His World
Author(s) AVINS STYRA
Abstract: On the morning of a lovely, sunny day in the early spring of the year 1885, an animated, chatty group of people wandered through the countryside of the Lower Rhine. The high-spirited company had traveled by train from Krefeld to the village of Grefrath, which is situated on the main train line to Holland. In those days Grefrath was one of many settlements in the vicinity of Krefeld in whose houses chattered the looms of the Krefeld silk manufacturers. The villages were all spotlessly clean and friendly. To the west of Grefrath the view is limited by the range of
CHAPTER TWO “Dreams Really Have a Secret Meaning” from:
Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: Instead of fighting the dream book or being mystified by it, we can speculate usefully about what its author was hoping to do. What were the advantages of writing on dream interpretation? What is attractive about the theory chosen? Why should dreams have a secret meaning? What use is the search for motives? What is to be gained from basing narratives on the slightest evidence? There are no fixed answers to such questions, needless to say: one can merely interpret Freud’s
Interpretation. But wish fulfillment—that is, in story, not reality—is an excellent guide to understanding narrative, including the
CHAPTER THREE “So Far as I Knew, I Was Not an Ambitious Man” from:
Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: Though trained psychoanalysts often say that chapter 7 delivers the important lessons of
The Interpretation of Dreams, far more readers respond positively to Freud’s attractive self-presentation. One of the ways Freud most pleases—however testily he complained about supposed indiscretions—is by confession of his own dreams. These dreams, with the background and analysis he provides, are absorbing in themselves and partially linked up as autobiography. Only the naive or the doctrinaire, however, can suppose that the success of this broken narrative is due to its honesty per se. Confessions are by definition formally honest, since unless they reveal what
CHAPTER FIVE “The Only Villain among the Crowd of Noble Characters” from:
Freud's Wishful Dream Book
Abstract: The last two stories embedded in the dream book certainly pose something of a puzzle. They are not about dreams, they feature the censorship, and—as I trust I have shown—they are spurious. The first is blatantly anecdotal, a joke on women clearly meant to amuse; the second is part fiction, part autobiography, and finally neither one nor the other. Yet the pair of stories, supposedly about actual consultations involving a careless girl and naughty boy, offer the last evidence in the book for Freud’s theory as well as the last bit of humor. Except for the humor, they
INTRODUCTION from:
Performing Africa
Abstract: Performance!—a ubiquitous term that currently is mapped onto disparate social worlds as if it were transcendent, its meaning immediately apparent. Yet the social life of performance as a concept is worth unraveling to track its significance in creating distinctive regions and different subjects. There is no better place to explore the contours of performance as an idea and as practice than in the context of
Africa, which has been made into an object through a number of performative tropes. This work examines the ways performance becomes a frame ofenactment, creating moments of “Africa” not justinAfrica but,
PART THREE Culture as Commodity from:
Performing Africa
Abstract: Many contemporary social analysts have suggested that the distinctive feature of late capitalism is consumption. These analysts have traced how consumerism surrounds us, marketing our identities, lifestyles, and sense of belonging through consumption. One key feature of this globalized consumption is tourism: tourists, particularly from the global North, want to travel everywhere to consume the heterogeneity and richness of culture. In The Gambia, tourism is important; it shapes local articulations of culture both within and beyond the practices of jali.
CODA from:
Performing Africa
Abstract: September 26, 2000. Protestors stage another action aimed against the agenda of globalization as promoted through the policies of wealthy Northern countries and corporations. The scene: the World Economic summit held in Prague, Czechoslovakia. With their persistent outcries and violent confrontations, demonstrators capture the attention of the powerful leaders and global financiers and the world spectatorship. They express their outrage. Among the protestors, Bono, the lead singer of the prominent Irish rock band U2, manages to gain the ear of The World Bank’s president, James Wolfensohn. He requests a meeting with Wolfensohn for the purpose of stressing the urgent need
1 Introduction from:
Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: The words of the eighteenth-century German Romantic poet Novalis (Friedrich von Hardenberg) resonate beyond the boundaries of their history and geography and are poignantly rearticulated by a contemporary master of the arts of memory. Salman Rushdie’s critical sentiment stands as a testimony to the labor of remembrance that reclaims the lost experience of another time and place in language and imagination. The work of commemoration is often the only means of releasing our (hi)stories from subjugation to official or institutionalized regimes of forgetting. Remembering is an act of lending coherence and integrity to a history interrupted, divided, or compromised by
4 At Different Borders/On Common Grounds from:
Writing Outside the Nation
Abstract: An active European site of fiery debates, where stakes in labor migration, immigration, patriation, and national and ethnic identity politics are very high, is the reunified German state. At this historical juncture, over six million foreigners, including Gastarbeiter (guest workers), refugees, asylum seekers, writers, artists, and professionals are permanently settled in Germany. In the embattled Europe of the post-cold-war era, Germany, with its economic power, political stability, generous welfare system, and what until recently were very flexible asylum laws, has become, perhaps quite unwittingly and unwillingly, the destination for a growing body of dis- placed peoples. This unprecedented presence of
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION from:
Plato's Fable
Abstract: The prevailing opinion about the character of reason renders this Platonic paradox quite unthinkable today. Philosophers, we learn in Plato’s fable, are ruled by reason; yet in what sense could it possibly be true that reason is necessary to
save us? As a fantastic arti-fice we may perhaps be entertained by this bald assertion, but to understand it as something more useful requires resources that we scarcely possess. Why this is so, and what those resources might be, is the question that concerns me here.
Chapter 3 CONCLUSION from:
Plato's Fable
Abstract: In order to begin educating our young, Socrates informs us, we must “tell tales and recount fables.”³ Let us rehearse, here, the fable of liberalism, or at least the more generous rendition of its ascent that began to emerge in the eighteenth century and that was brought to completion in the nineteenth century by Tocqueville.⁴ We do so not with a view to corroborating it as factually accurate—for the facts bear only a shadowy resemblance to Truth⁵—but rather with a view to establishing
whatrules in the souls that are depicted by this fable and whether the typography
Book Title: William Faulkner-An Economy of Complex Words
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Godden Richard
Abstract: In
William Faulkner, Richard Godden traces how the novelist's late fiction echoes the economic and racial traumas of the South's delayed modernization in the mid-twentieth century. As the New Deal rapidly accelerated the long-term shift from tenant farming to modern agriculture, many African Americans were driven from the land and forced to migrate north. At the same time, white landowners exchanged dependency on black labor for dependency on northern capital. Combining powerful close readings ofThe Hamlet, Go Down, Moses, andA Fablewith an examination of southern economic history from the 1930s to the 1950s, Godden shows how the novels' literary complexities--from their narrative structures down to their smallest verbal emphases--reflect and refract the period's economic complexities. By demonstrating the interrelation of literary forms and economic systems, the book describes, in effect, the poetics of an economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sb40
INTRODUCTION from:
William Faulkner
Abstract: MY TITLE intends no metaphor in its linking of language and economy. Words, as social instruments, exemplifying what Marx calls “practical consciousness,”¹ act upon a reality which they make as much as find. If the real is in a real sense made through words, those words needs must tend to complexity, not least because speakers inherit a language always “already occupied”² by prior and unknown users and usage. Since verbal instrumentalists work with a partially known instrument, and in circumstances not of their own design, they, to adapt Marx, are practically unconscious concerning large portions of their practice. Yet that
CHAPTER ONE Earthing The Hamlet from:
William Faulkner
Abstract: A PRELUDE: regarding leisured New Yorkers of the 1870s from the perspective of 1920, Edith Wharton is much preoccupied with social transition as registered in mannered artifacts, hence her attention to “Worth dresses,” in
The Age of Innocence. Whether it is “vulgar” to wear Parisian fashions bought at Worth in the year of their purchase, or whether custom requires that such garments be “put away” for two years prior to display, concerns those gathered at Mrs Archer’s Thanksgiving dinner. One guest, Miss Jackson, blames the banker Beaufort for starting “the new fashion by making his wife clap her new clothes
CHAPTER FOUR “Pantaloon in Black” and “The Old People”: from:
William Faulkner
Abstract: IN the plantation South, by 1942 historical conditions existed for the extraction of black from white. For two decades, whiteness had whitened by way of steady out-migration. With the decline of tenantry and the relaxation of the structure enforcing dependency, white, in the last instance, had less reason to be black. The first three stories of
Go Down, Moses, usefully described by John Matthews as the “plantation trilogy,”¹ feature black movement, much of it away from whites. “Was” (set in 1859) concerns Turl’s annual runaway. Buck and Buddy McCaslin catch their slave, but not before black motion has disrupted two
Book Title: Contesting Spirit-Nietzsche, Affirmation, Religion
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS TYLER T.
Abstract: Nietzsche criticizes the ascetic hatred of the body and this-worldly life, yet engages in rigorous practices of self-denial--he sees philosophy as such a practice--and affirms the need of imposing suffering on oneself in order to enhance the spirit. He dismisses the "intoxication" of mysticism, yet links mysticism, power, and creativity, and describes his own self-transcending experiences. The tensions in his relation to religion are closely related to that between negation and affirmation in his thinking in general. In Roberts's view, Nietzsche's transfigurations of religion offer resources for a postmodern religious imagination. Though as a "master of suspicion," Nietzsche, with Freud and Marx, is an integral part of modern antireligion, he has the power to take us beyond the flat, modern distinction between the secular and the religious--a distinction that, at the end of modernity, begs to be reexamined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sjd2
Introduction from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: In 1886, at the height of his powers as writer and thinker, Friedrich Nietzsche wrote a series of prefaces for new editions of his early works.¹ As autobiography, they embellish the plain facts of his life; as philosophy, they say more about what Nietzsche was thinking in 1886 than about the early texts with which they are concerned. Still, they disclose a vibrant and paradoxical vision of Nietzsche as a thinker. Read together, the new prefaces narrate the trajectory of Nietzsche’s writing and thinking as a life that transpired between hopeless disillusion and the joy of love’s recovery. In the
Chapter Five ECSTATIC PHILOSOPHY from:
Contesting Spirit
Abstract: It is one thing to claim that
Zarathustracontains writing that one might describe as mystical or ecstatic poetry, it is another to claim that there is a mystical element pervading Nietzsche’s thought in general. What is the relevance ofZarathustrafor Nietzsche’s later work? One might argue that the ecstatic poetry of Nietzsche’s enigmatic “gift” is actually a parody of mystical affirmations, or an ironic warning against overexuberant hopes and loves. Given Nietzsche’s attack on ascetic practices and mystical states in theGenealogy, such an interpretation cannot be dismissed. Yet, Nietzsche’s later writing, viewed with a discerning eye, also
Book Title: The Wind from the East-French Intellectuals, the Cultural Revolution, and the Legacy of the 1960s
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wolin Richard
Abstract: Wolin's riveting narrative reveals that Maoism's allure among France's best and brightest actually had little to do with a real understanding of Chinese politics. Instead, it paradoxically served as a vehicle for an emancipatory transformation of French society. French student leftists took up the trope of "cultural revolution," applying it to their criticisms of everyday life. Wolin examines how Maoism captured the imaginations of France's leading cultural figures, influencing Sartre's "perfect Maoist moment"; Foucault's conception of power; Sollers's chic, leftist intellectual journal
Tel Quel; as well as Kristeva's book on Chinese women--which included a vigorous defense of foot-binding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sjjv
Prologue from:
The Wind from the East
Abstract: According to an oft-cited maxim, all history is the history of the present. Try as they might, historians are incapable of abstracting from contemporary issues and concerns. In fact, were they to do so, their work would surely reek of antiquarian sterility. At best, historians can make their biases clear to ensure they do not exercise an overtly disfiguring influence on their presentations and findings.
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Wind from the East
Abstract: It is a remarkable fact that some forty years later, the year 1968 remains an obligatory point of reference for contemporary politics. During the 2008 presidential election, one of Barack Obama’s campaign pledges was that he would elevate American politics to a plateau of unity beyond the divisiveness of the 1960s. The John McCain campaign, for its part, tried repeatedly to tarnish Obama’s luster by dramatizing his association during the early days of his political career with former 1960s radical William Ayers. Similarly, during the 2007 French presidential campaign, both main candidates felt compelled to take a stance on the
CHAPTER 1 Showdown at Bruay-en-Artois from:
The Wind from the East
Abstract: April 6, 1972. The scene was a mining town in provincial Normandy, Bruay-en-Artois. A young working-class girl, Brigitte Dewevre, had been sadistically murdered, her mutilated, unclothed corpse left in a vacant field. The crime scene bespoke a level of brutality to which France was entirely unaccustomed. Adding to the event’s macabre nature was the fact that Brigitte’s body was discovered the next day by her younger brother in the course of a pickup soccer match.
CHAPTER 6 Tel Quel in Cultural-Political Hell from:
The Wind from the East
Abstract: During the 1960s
Tel Quel, led by consummate literary entrepreneur Philippe Sollers, rode to notoriety the crest of nearly every passing intellectual trend: the nouveau roman, structuralism, and poststructuralism. Unsurprisingly, the journal’s political loyalties were equally mercurial. After cultivating a studious apoliticism, it lurched from the most rigid Stalinist orthodoxy to an equally fervent embrace of Cultural Revolutionary China—an instance of revolutionary romanticism that culminated in a celebrated 1974 trip to Beijing. As Communist Party loyalists, the Telquelians “missed out” on May 1968. In a now-legendary episode, Sollers—whose father, incidentally, was a leading Bordeaux industrialist—actively denounced the
Introduction: from:
Through Other Continents
Abstract: On April 14, 2003, the Iraqi National Library and the Islamic library in the Religious Ministry were burned to the ground. For months before this happened, archaeologists had been warning the United States government that an invasion of Iraq would pose the gravest threat to legacies from the Sumerian, Babylonian, and Assyrian civilizations, going back ten thousand years. After the invasion, the same archaeologists urged the U.S.-led coalition to observe the “international law of belligerent occupation” and protect the artifacts and archives left vulnerable by the conduct of war.¹ The coalition forces had in fact been protecting a number of
CHAPTER SEVEN African, Caribbean, American: from:
Through Other Continents
Abstract: The “practice of diaspora” is emerging as a pivotal question in African-American literature.¹ In
Book Title: Modernity's Wager-Authority, the Self, and Transcendence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Seligman Adam B.
Abstract: Through its denial of an authority rooted in an experience of transcendence, modernity fails to account for individual and collective moral action. First, deprived of a sacred source of the self, depictions of moral action are reduced to motives of self interest. Second, dismissing the sacred leaves the resurgence of religious movements unexplained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sp0b
INTRODUCTION from:
Modernity's Wager
Abstract: From ancient Babylon to contemporary Indonesia, from China to Canada, and from the Inuit to the Parisian, all peoples and societies have experienced power and its differential distribution. Defined by Max Weber as “the probability that one actor within a social relationship will be in a position to carry out his own will despite resistance,” power has been a fact of social life from time out of mind.¹
Chapter One THE SELF IN THE SOCIAL SCIENCES from:
Modernity's Wager
Abstract: One of the more intractable problems in the social sciences is the problem of explaining human agency, or what is often termed the structure/action debate. The problem seems to crop up anew with each generation of practitioners, who have generated a small library on this problem alone. The very triumph of sociology, anthropology, and political science as disciplinary specialties has, however, been marked by a loss of certain categories of thought and by an ever increasing difficulty in expressing human existence in the world in terms of words and concepts that had, in a presociological era, stood at the core
Chapter Two AUTHORITY AND THE SELF from:
Modernity's Wager
Abstract: As I hope has been made clear in chapter one, attempts at solving the problem of social order all turn ultimately on one’s view of what constitutes (or does not) the individual social actor. Rational and social choice theories—like their economistic prototype—all hark back to a more or less Hobbesian view of the individual as a self-contained actor who is director of his or her own passions and interests, chief among which is, for Hobbes, the fear of death and the corresponding right to flee its approach.
Chapter Four THE SELF INTERNALIZED from:
Modernity's Wager
Abstract: The previous chapter ended with three themes linked in a somewhat unanticipated manner:
recognition,authority, andextended self. It was very much the need for recognition, as noted by philosophers from Adam Ferguson and Adam Smith to G.W.F. Hegel, that formed the basis of what we are calling here the extended, or nonautonomous, self. Ferguson points to this need for approbation in noting that “what comes from a fellow-creature is received with peculiar emotion; and every language abounds with terms that express somewhat in the transactions of men different from success and disappointment.”¹ He continues: “The bosom kindles in company,
Book Title: Charred Lullabies-Chapters in an Anthropography of Violence
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Daniel E. Valentine
Abstract: How does an ethnographer write about violence? How can he make sense of violent acts, for himself and for his readers, without compromising its sheer excess and its meaning-defying core? How can he remain a scholarly observer when the country of his birth is engulfed by terror? These are some of the questions that engage Valentine Daniel in this exploration of life and death in contemporary Sri Lanka. In 1983 Daniel "walked into the ashes and mortal residue" of the violence that had occurred in his homeland. His planned project--the study of women's folk songs as ethnohistory--was immediately displaced by the responsibility that he felt had been given to him, by surviving family members and friends of victims, to recount beyond Sri Lanka what he had seen and heard there. Trained to do fieldwork by staying in one place and educated to look for coherence and meaning in human behavior, what does an anthropologist do when he is forced by circumstances to keep moving, searching for reasons he never finds? How does he write an ethnography (or an anthropography, to use the author's term) without transforming it into a pornography of violence? In avoiding fattening the anthropography into prurience, how does he avoid flattening it with theory? The ways in which Daniel grapples with these questions, and their answers, instill this groundbreaking book with a rare sense of passion, purpose, and intellect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7srks
INTRODUCTION from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: Many have died. To say more is to simplify, but to fathom the statement is also to make the fact bearable. Tellipalai, Nilaveli, Manippay, Boosa, Dollar Farm, Kokkadicholai—mere place-names of another time—have been transformed into names of places spattered with blood and mortal residue. Kelani Ganga and Kalu Ganga, Sri Lankan rivers of exquisite beauty, for a shudderingly brief period in 1989, were clogged with bodies and foamed with blood. Many have died. How to give an account of these shocking events without giving in to a desire to shock? And more important, what does it mean to
1 OF HERITAGE AND HISTORY from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: Essentialism has come to be the bad word of late modernity. The human sciences have rushed to embrace and expound upon the doctrine of the constructedness of practically everything. Among these, gender, race, ethnicity, culture, and nation are the best known. These are not essential identities but constructed ones, we are told. Much good has come out of these constructivist exercises, some so brilliant as to deserve the adulation of generations to come. The scholarship that most obviously merits such adulation is of course that of Michel Foucault and a few who have followed (and preceded) his example by showing,
3 VIOLENT MEASURES, MEASURED VIOLENCE from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: Our examination of violence continues. By returning to the Estate Tamils, we return from a different direction to the questions of history and heritage, knowing and being, theory and myth; we arrive at the question of the historicity of history itself. We shall see that “ there is a structuring power in the living practices of a people that structures the effective aptitudes of every nascent generation, which exercised in its turn, ‘restructures’ the structuring power of that same people” (Margolis 1993: 18). The enabling and disabling structures that we shall consider in this chapter will be located in something
5 EMBODIED TERROR from:
Charred Lullabies
Abstract: In their attempts to account for the aesthetic in culture, three semeiotically inclined anthropologists understand the aesthetic as something located in signs that are difficult, if not impossible, to re-present. For this reason, Roy Wagner (1985) writes of “symbols that stand for themselves”; Steven Feld (1982), of “autoreferentiality”; and Nancy Munn (1986), borrowing from Peirce (2.244, 248, 254), of “ qualisigns”—that is, of signs that are mere qualitative possibilities in contradistinction to signs that are actualized and/or generalized. Even though all three cultural aesthetes then go on to find ways of representing the unrepresentable in apparent contradiction of their
INTRODUCTION from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Frank Stephen P.
Abstract: Paradoxically, as our knowledge of postemancipation Russian society and culture has grown, we have produced a historical portrait that is increasingly rough, fractured, and blurred. The coexistence of the traditional and the new, of inertia and vibrancy, is increasingly familiar to students of late imperial Russia—and, indeed, of Soviet Russia as well. But these simple dichotomies only begin to convey the complex dynamism and fluidity of Russian society and culture as social relationships, values, and structures were battered and reconstructed. Russia’s emerging public sphere—the civic space that, for many contemporaries and historians, constitutes the essential foundation for a
1 DEATH RITUAL AMONG RUSSIAN AND UKRAINIAN PEASANTS: from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Worobec Christine D.
Abstract: Religious beliefs and the enactment of elaborate death rituals that provided linkages between the living and the dead fhelped the bereaved
3 PEASANT POPULAR CULTURE AND THE ORIGINS OF SOVIET AUTHORITARIANISM from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Morrison Rebecca
Abstract: This article offers several preliminary views on the sources of Soviet authoritarianism, which I seek to locate within the popular culture of the prerevolutionary peasantry. The essence of my hypothesis rests on a fundamental reality of life in the prerevolutionary Russian countryside: authoritarian relations served as the basic model for all interpersonal relations among peasants, including social relations. This was a result of the fact that the peasantry’s primary social institutions—the family and the commune—were authoritarian, cultivating, through socialization, authoritarian personalities. The Russian peasantry (which accounted for more than 80 percent of Russia’s population in 1917) and Russian
5 DEATH OF THE FOLK SONG? from:
Cultures in Flux
Author(s) Rothstein Robert A.
Abstract: It is an unquestionable fact,” wrote an anonymous American observer in 1893, “that in Russia all the principal outward adjuncts of modern civilization—large towns, factories, railroads, hotels, etc.—exercise a blighting effect on the beautiful old folk-song. This disappears at the sound of the steam whistle, and is gradually superseded by commonplace melodies with stupid words, not seldom of doubtful propriety.”¹ Similar expressions of concern at the alleged demise of traditional folk music were being voiced at the same time in Russia itself in the course of an extended public discussion that lasted from the 1870s until the early
INTRODUCTION from:
Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: For us, the primary characteristic of a democratic regime is the anointment by the people of those who govern. The idea that the people are the sole legitimate source of power has come to be taken for granted. No one would dream of contesting or even questioning it. “Sovereignty cannot be divided,” as a great French republican of the nineteenth century put it. “One must choose between the elective principle and the hereditary principle. Authority must be legitimated either by the freely expressed will of all or by the supposed will of God. The people or the Pope! Choose.”¹ To
CHAPTER THREE The Great Transformation from:
Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: The dual legitimacy on which democratic institutions depended collapsed in the 1980s. The collapse revealed itself in numerous ways, and its symptoms have drawn abundant commentary. Some pointed to citizens’ loss of confidence in their leaders, others to a decline in the state’s ability to act effectively. Observations such as these are merely descriptive, however. They describe effects without explaining their causes and thus cry out for explanation.
CHAPTER FOUR Independent Authorities: from:
Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: Although quite diverse in character, all of these organizations share a certain hybrid quality: they have an executive dimension even though they also exercise normative and judicial functions. The traditional concept
CHAPTER FIVE The Democracy of Impartiality from:
Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: How can we characterize the legitimacy of independent authorities as
political forms, abstracting from the specific nature of each such authority and the specific issues they are intended to treat?¹ These authorities are created by law and consequently enjoy what might be called a derivative legitimacy. But that legitimacy does not flow directly from the citizens of the state, because these are not elective bodies. Nevertheless, a different type of relation exists between them, having to do with the importance and quality of the services they render. Hence one can speak of alegitimacy of efficacy, acknowledged by citizens as
CHAPTER SEVEN Reflexive Democracy from:
Democratic Legitimacy
Abstract: Electoral-representative democracy is based on the axiom that the general will is fully and directly expressed through the electoral process. The ballot is supposed to express the will of the voters, the voters are supposed to be the sole “subject” of politics, and the moment of the vote is supposed to determine the temporality of the political process. This conception of democracy rests on three basic assumptions: the voters’ choice is equated with the general will; the voters are equated with the people; and all subsequent political and legislative activity is assumed to flow continuously from the moment of the
Book Title: Slavery and the Culture of Taste- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Gikandi Simon
Abstract: Through a close look at the eighteenth century's many remarkable documents and artworks,
Slavery and the Culture of Tastesets forth the tensions and contradictions entangling a brutal practice and the distinctions of civility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7svr8
Book Title: The Harmony of Illusions-Inventing Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Young Allan
Abstract: As far back as we know, there have been individuals incapacitated by memories that have filled them with sadness and remorse, fright and horror, or a sense of irreparable loss. Only recently, however, have people tormented with such recollections been diagnosed as suffering from "post-traumatic stress disorder." Here Allan Young traces this malady, particularly as it is suffered by Vietnam veterans, to its beginnings in the emergence of ideas about the unconscious mind and to earlier manifestations of traumatic memory like shell shock or traumatic hysteria. In Young's view, PTSD is not a timeless or universal phenomenon newly discovered. Rather, it is a "harmony of illusions," a cultural product gradually put together by the practices, technologies, and narratives with which it is diagnosed, studied, and treated and by the various interests, institutions, and moral arguments mobilizing these efforts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7swhj
Three The DSM-III Revolution from:
The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: A flurry of publications on traumatic neuroses followed the armistice in 1918. Over the next two decades, however, these disorders attracted little attention, until in 1941, just prior to American entry into the Second World War, a monograph titled
The Traumatic Neuroses of Warwas published under the auspices of the National Research Council, a private American foundation (Kardiner 1941; Kardiner and Siegel 1947). This book, by Abram Kardiner, is the first systematic account of the symptomatology and psychodynamics of the war neuroses published in the United States. It is now routinely cited as a landmark in the history of
Seven Talking about PTSD from:
The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: In Alfred Hitchcock’s film,
Spellbound(1944), Gregory Peck plays the victim of a traumatic neurosis similar to PTSD. He is tormented by a memory he cannot recall but is certain that it concerns an act of terrible violence. He also suffers from a mysterious phobic horror of objects decorated with parallel lines. By the film’s end, it is discovered that the phobia mirrors a visual element of his traumatic experience, which involved attempted homicide and accidental death on a downhill ski slope. Like many of the patients who speak on the following pages, the Gregory Peck character is chronically angry
Eight The Biology of Traumatic Memory from:
The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: The birth of PTSD followed a historical transformation in psychiatric knowledge making. Out of these changes emerged an invigorated psychiatric science that identified progress with the accumulation of facts by means of testable hypotheses: “Hypotheses prove themselves superior … by surviving strenuous attempts at disconfirmation. Science advances by the replacement of falsified theories by yet to be falsified ones” (Wallace 1988:140). Psychiatric writers associate “testability” with Karl Popper’s epistemology of falsificationism (Faust and Miner 1986). There are important differences between Popperian falsificationism and knowledge making in psychiatric science, though, and I will use the term “fallibilism” when I refer to
Conclusion from:
The Harmony of Illusions
Abstract: In 1994, the American Psychiatric Association published a fourth edition of its official nosology. The new manual,
DSM-IV, perpetuates the Kraepelinian framework established byDSM-III. Disorders are generally represented as monothetic categories, each one bounded by a distinctive list of criterial features. The manual’s most obvious departure from the previous editions is rhetorical and concerns the definition of its eponymic subject, “mental disorders.” InDSM-IIIandDSM-III-R, the term is defined in a way that includes all of the factions and orientations that were then represented in the American Psychiatric Association:
Book Title: Anthropos Today-Reflections on Modern Equipment
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Rabinow Paul
Abstract: Drawing richly on Foucault and many other thinkers including Weber and Dewey, Rabinow concludes that a "contingent practice" must be developed that focuses on "events of problematization." Brilliantly synthesizing insights from American, French, and German traditions, he offers a lucid, deeply learned, original discussion of how one might best think about anthropos today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7sz2j
Introduction from:
Anthropos Today
Abstract: This book is proposed as a meditation on Michel Foucault’s claim that “equipment is the medium of transformation of logos into ethos.” A good deal of work is required, however, to grasp what such a claim might mean. The difficulty in part lies in the fact that the terms “equipment” and “meditation” are used in a distinctive technical sense. Furthermore, why one would want to transform “logos” into “ethos” equally requires explanation. Hence the reader is alerted that reading this book will require a certain patience. Additionally, and unexpectedly, the book addresses the reader as a friend. Initially this appellation
Chapter 2 Method from:
Anthropos Today
Abstract: Max Weber’s classic essay “Objectivity in Social Science and Social Policy” has received much critical attention in the Weber literature, as it is one of his few sustained statements about conceptual and methodological issues. It was drafted as Weber was writing the first version of
The Protestant Ethic, after recovering, in the winter of 1902, from one of his severe breakdowns, which had lasted four years. The critical literature generally ignores the fact that the essay was in part collectively written and was intended as a broad policy statement. In the summer of 1903, Werner Sombart, Edgar Jaffé, and Max
Chapter 5 Form from:
Anthropos Today
Abstract: The anthropology that concerns me is one that is practically and essentially mediated by a form of actual experience. There have been different names given to the practice that grounds anthropology in empirical work. The names from the past—fieldwork, participant observation—are no longer adequate to the practice I am seeking to conceptualize. Regardless of how one might best characterize this practice (a topic to which I return below), it eventually passes through one or another form of figuration, especially writing. The traditional name for that practice of figuration is ethnography, but that term is inadequate and misleading, at
Book Title: Forbidden Fruit-Counterfactuals and International Relations
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Lebow Richard Ned
Abstract: Could World War I have been averted if Franz Ferdinand and his wife hadn't been murdered by Serbian nationalists in 1914? What if Ronald Reagan had been killed by Hinckley's bullet? Would the Cold War have ended as it did? In
Forbidden Fruit, Richard Ned Lebow develops protocols for conducting robust counterfactual thought experiments and uses them to probe the causes and contingency of transformative international developments like World War I and the end of the Cold War. He uses experiments, surveys, and a short story to explore why policymakers, historians, and international relations scholars are so resistant to the contingency and indeterminism inherent in open-ended, nonlinear systems. Most controversially, Lebow argues that the difference between counterfactual and so-called factual arguments is misleading, as both can be evidence-rich and logically persuasive. A must-read for social scientists,Forbidden Fruitalso examines the binary between fact and fiction and the use of counterfactuals in fictional works like Philip Roth'sThe Plot Against Americato understand complex causation and its implications for who we are and what we think makes the social world work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t05p
CHAPTER ONE Making Sense of the World from:
Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: Forbidden Fruitis an avowedly provocative but also inviting title. The two, as Eve knew, are often reinforcing. Her offer of the apple to Adam is an invitation to eat from the Tree of Knowledge and possibly transcend their human condition. It is a provocation because it involved violating the one proscription laid down by their creator.¹ Eating from the Tree of Knowledge, the couple soon discover, entails expulsion from the Garden of Eden, hard work to survive, pain in childbirth, and mortality.² Counterfactuals can be considered an analog to the apple, and the invitation to engage with them a
CHAPTER TWO Counterfactual Thought Experiments from:
Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: The ability to imagine alternative scenarios is a ubiquitous, if not essential, part of human mental life.¹ It is a universal phenomenon, not a practice restricted to or more pronounced in Western culture.² Counterfactuals are routinely used by ordinary people and policymakers to work their way through problems, reach decisions, cope with anxiety, and make normative judgments. They are readily inspired by disconfirmed expectations and failed actions and the regrets they evoke.³ In these circumstances, counterfactual scenarios can empower us by making us believe that we could have brought about better outcomes.⁴ When people invent counterfactuals for any of these
CHAPTER FOUR Leadership and the End of the Cold War: from:
Forbidden Fruit
Author(s) Breslauer George W.
Abstract: If the news reports above had been real, there might have been no “Gorbachev phenomenon,” and glasnost and perestroika might not have become households words. Led by a cautious and conservative general secretary, Grishin, the Soviet Union might have pursued a variant of Brezhnevism. The United States, led by an equally cautious and conservative president, Bush, might not have sponsored dramatic initiatives to break through the stalemate in superpower relations. The Berlin Wall might still be in place and communist parties still in power in Moscow and eastern Europe. The Warsaw Pact and NATO might be preparing to deploy a
CHAPTER FIVE Scholars and Causation 1 from:
Forbidden Fruit
Author(s) Tetlock Philip E.
Abstract: First, all causal inference from history ultimately rests on counterfactual claims about what would or could have happened in hypothetical worlds to which scholars have no direct empirical access.¹ This is not to say that evidence is irrelevant. Chapter 2 described counterfactuals where historical evidence could be brought to
CHAPTER SIX Scholars and Causation 2 from:
Forbidden Fruit
Abstract: Chapter 5 revealed a strong correlation between worldviews and openness to contingency. Across diverse contexts, the more credence foreign policy experts, historians and international relations scholars place in the ability of laws and generalizations to describe the social world, the stronger their cognitive-stylistic preference for explanatory closure. In making judgments about contingency, they are more likely to be guided by what they believe to be valid laws and generalizations than information provided to them on a case-by-case basis. Experts with a preference for lawlike understandings of history tend to resist counterfactuals that “undo” events or outcomes on which their preferred
4 Christian Attitudes toward Boundaries: from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) MILLER RICHARD B.
Abstract: Christians began to think systematically about the ethics of land, territory, and boundaries within a specific set of historical circumstances. European claims to dominion in the New World during the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries generated a new range of questions in moral theology for Catholics and Protestants alike, theology developed most notably by Cajetan, Vitoria, Soto, Suarez, Molina, Las Casas, Gentili, and Grotius. Yet these authors did not generate normative principles for addressing questions of dominion and boundaries
de novo; they drew on a tradition of categories, distinctions, and concrete practices that give substance to the Christian imagination regarding political
6 Conscientious Individualism: from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) LITTLE DAVID
Abstract: There are several conceptual ambiguities about the term ʺpluralismʺ that need to be clarified. According to the dictionary, it is both a descriptive term, ʺthe quality or state of being plural,ʺ and a theoretical or normative term, ʺthe doctrine that there are more than one or two kinds of being or independent centers of causationʺ; ʺopposed to
monism, or dualism.ʺ¹ Accordingly, the phrase ʺethical pluralismʺ might designate the simple existence of a diversity or plurality of ethical positions, or it might refer to a doctrine holding that ethics, as the systematic evaluation of human action, isin its natureincapable
8 Christianity and the Prospects for a New Global Order from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) STACKHOUSE MAX L.
Abstract: It is no accident that the issue of reconstituting international society appears before us today, at a moment when the economic, medical, cultural, and communication structures that play such a critical role in modern society are changing rapidly. Although civil society in the past largely coincided with the boundaries of the state, it is now being reconstructed internationally in ways that strain the capacity of any government to order, guide, or control. In fact, some observers foresee little but chaos since societies are no longer confined within a single legal system and no one seems to be in control.¹ Even
12 Christian Nonviolence: from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) KOONTZ THEODORE J.
Abstract: I have four aims in this chapter. The first is to describe briefly something of the range of views that may fit under the heading ʺChristian nonviolence.ʺ The second is to give an account of the context out of which it makes sense to be committed to a certain kind of Christian nonviolence (ʺpacifismʺ). The third is to note how, from this pacifist perspective, the questions posed to just war theorists and realists are not the central questions about peace and war, and how focusing on them in fact distorts our thinking. The fourth is to attempt, nevertheless, to deal
13 Conflicting Interpretations of Christian Pacifism from:
Christian Political Ethics
Author(s) CARTWRIGHT MICHAEL G.
Abstract: Though he discusses Christian nonviolence with scholarly care, Ted Koontz remains a passionately committed Christian. By insisting that the questions nonviolent Christians ask about the ethics of war and peace are different from the questions asked by those who approach the topic from other directions, he reminds us of the importance of religious convictions, or the absence of such convictions, in shaping how we understand war/peace ethics.¹ Moreover, his forthrightness in articulating the conceptions of truth and power that arise from the tradition of Christian pacifism, and especially from the practices of Christian worship, opens the way for a fuller
Book Title: Touching the World-Reference in Autobiography
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): EAKIN PAUL JOHN
Abstract: Paul John Eakin's earlier work Fictions in Autobiography is a key text in autobiography studies. In it he proposed that the self that finds expression in autobiography is in fundamental ways a kind of fictive construct, a fiction articulated in a fiction. In this new book Eakin turns his attention to what he sees as the defining assumption of autobiography: that the story of the self does refer to a world of biographical and historical fact. Here he shows that people write autobiography not in some private realm of the autonomous self but rather in strenuous engagement with the pressures that life in culture entails. In so demonstrating, he offers fresh readings of autobiographies by Roland Barthes, Nathalie Sarraute, William Maxwell, Henry James, Ronald Fraser, Richard Rodriguez, Henry Adams, Patricia Hampl, John Updike, James McConkey, and Lillian Hellman. In the introduction Eakin makes a case for reopening the file on reference in autobiography, and in the first chapter he establishes the complexity of the referential aesthetic of the genre, the intricate interplay of fact and fiction in such texts. In subsequent chapters he explores some of the major contexts of reference in autobiography: the biographical, the social and cultural, the historical, and finally, underlying all the rest, the somatic and temporal dimensions of the lived experience of identity. In his discussion of contemporary theories of the self, Eakin draws especially on cultural anthropology and developmental psychology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t2zt
CHAPTER ONE The Referential Aesthetic of Autobiography from:
Touching the World
Abstract: THIS INQUIRY into the referential aesthetic of autobiography attempts to answer a question that has haunted me for a long time: why should it make a difference to me that autobiographies are presumably based in biographical fact? This is really another way of asking why people read autobiographies, a question intimately linked to the question of why people write them. There seems to be no doubt that readers do read autobiographies differently from other kinds of texts, especially from works they take to be “fictions.” All who have studied the reading of autobiography agree that reference lies at the heart
CHAPTER TWO Henry James’s “Obscure Hurt”: from:
Touching the World
Abstract: THE SYSTEM of classification long in place in our libraries and bibliographies posits the kinship of autobiography and biography, ranging them both under the aegis of history as categories of the literature of reference, kinds of writing determined by their presumed basis in verifiable fact. Yet it is precisely with regard to this central identifying feature of reference to a world beyond the text that theory of autobiography today differs from the practice of biography. Thus it has become commonplace for students of autobiography to assert that the past, the ostensible primary reference of such texts, is a fiction. As
CHAPTER FIVE Autobiography and the Structures of Experience from:
Touching the World
Abstract: IN THE PRECEDING chapters I have been investigating various dimensions of the world of fact to which autobiographies characteristically refer: biographical (chapter 2), social and cultural (chapter 3), and historical (chapter 4). At the same time, following the paradox intrinsic to the very nature of autobiographical discourse, I have had occasion to emphasize the fictive dimension of autobiography, especially in my analyses of William Maxwell in chapter 1 and Patricia Hampl in chapter 4. There I presented the making of metaphor as a response to the otherwise unacceptable testimony of the facts of experience: the death of the mother, the
Chapter 1 FRONTIERS: WALLS AND WINDOWS from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: In a globalized world grown smaller by progressively dizzying flows of people, knowledge, and information, ʺtravelʺ seems to have become the image of the age. Porous borders, portable allegiances, virtual networks, and elastic identities now more than ever evoke the language of mobility, contingency, fluidity, provisionality, and process rather than that of stability, permanence, and fixity.¹ Scholars who traffic in the lingo of deterritorialization and nomadism increasingly traverse disciplines and regions, mining disparate experiences of displacement such as tourism, diaspora, exile, cyberculture, and migration as ʺcontact zones,ʺ sites that articulate the preconditions and implications of cross-cultural encounters.²
Chapter 2 TRAVELING THEORISTS AND TRANSLATING PRACTICES from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: In his monumental history of India (1817), British philosopher James Mill devotes more than two-thirds of the preface to refuting the charge that a man who has never visited the subcontinent or learned its languages is unsuited to the task of writing Indian history. Mill insists that what some might regard as parochialism is in fact a virtue, for his critical faculties and judiciousness require insulation from the ʺpartial impressionsʺ and distortions characteristic of firsthand sense perception. He writes:
Chapter 3 LIARS, TRAVELERS, THEORISTS: from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: This is a chapter about liars. Or at least about two travelers, Herodotus and Ibn Battuta, consistently accused of lying. Cicero may have dubbed Herodotus the Father of History, but Thucydides repudiated entirely Herodotusʹs approach to the past, accusing him of fabrication and telling tall tales.² In the wake of Thucydidesʹ damning verdict, impugning Herodotusʹs reliability became, for a time, a veritable cottage industry. Some characterized him as ignorant or overly credulous; others would accuse him of malicious intent. Plutarch, for example, charged Herodotus with undue partiality to both the non-Greeks (
philobarbaros—lover/friend of barbarians) and Athens, along with an
Chapter 5 GENDER, GENRE, AND TRAVEL: from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: Odysseus may be the hero ʺwho has traveled a great deal . . . see[ing] the cities of men and learn[ing] their minds,ʺ¹ but it is the immobility and fidelity of his wife Penelope that frame his voyage. And it is Penelope who, literally and figuratively, reproduces this masculine journey when, in Fénelonʹs
Telemachus, her son departs in search of Odysseus, leaving her behind once again to endlessly reenact her virtue by refusing a phalanx of suitors. So thoroughly is travel materially and symbolically masculinized that Eric Leed terms it the ʺspermatic journey,ʺ opposing it to the feminization of ʺsessility,ʺ
Chapter 6 COSMOPOLITANISMS PAST AND PRESENT, ISLAMIC AND WESTERN from:
Journeys to the Other Shore
Abstract: An exploration of cross-cultural travels of the past from the perspective of the present is a comparison across history. As such, it offers a vantage from which to reflect critically on characterizations of the contemporary age in terms of mobilities and displacements said to be unprecedented both in scope and kind. We are all now said to live in a world in which ʺborders have stopped marking the limits where politics ends because the community ends,ʺ our identities not only shaped by particular places and spaces such as nation and domicile but subject to the multiple cross-currents and exposures created
INTERLUDE from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: Understanding war. This book has been asking what war meant to a population whose experience and memory were shaped by warfare, a population whose armies and navies were almost constantly engaged in military conflict across the globe, though rarely, if ever, on home ground. It has asked how war was understood by those who were, at least as subjects of a sovereign state, often at war, though never actually in battle. But it has not yet asked what it meant to make war an object of understanding.
CODA from:
War at a Distance
Abstract: This book began with the problem of modern wartime, that is, the problem of coordinating an awareness of violence elsewhere with everyday movements here, at a distance from the fighting. The book ends with the problem of cosmopolitanism. Another way of characterizing this trajectory would be to say it looks from the familiar scene at hearth and home to the more foreign scene of a suspension bridge set in a distant land—then looks back again. Holding together these two scenes is difficult: in one you might sit as a violent world comes to you; in the other you might
INTRODUCTION from:
Mappings
Abstract: Border talk is everywhere—literal and figural, material and symbolic. The “cartographies of silence” pioneered by feminists like Adrienne Rich in the 1970s have morphed into the spatial practices of third wave feminism as national boundaries and personal borders become ever more permeable in the face of rapidly changing cultural terrains and global landscapes. Borders have a way of insisting on separation at the same time as they acknowledge connection. Like bridges. Bridges signify the possibility of passing over. They also mark the fact of separation and the distance that has to be crossed. Borders between individuals, genders, groups, and
CHAPTER 6 “Routes/Roots”: from:
Mappings
Abstract: Thinking geopolitically about identity is a “spatial practice,” to echo Michel de Certeau in
The Practice of Everyday Life. It involves maps and mapping, routes and routing, borders and bordercrossings. As a form of relational spatialization, however, it incorporates the opposing dimensions of the homonym routes/roots. Traveling is a concept that depends upon the notion of stasis to be comprehensible. Routes are pathways between here and there, two points of rootedness. Identity often requires some form of displacement—literal or figurative—to come to consciousness. Leaving home brings into being the idea of “home,” the perception of its identity as
CHAPTER 7 Negotiating the Transatlantic Divide: from:
Mappings
Abstract: When I first wrote this chapter, we were on the cusp of the nineties, and I sense the winds of change circulating in the universities and colleges, as well the streets of the world—a longing for the nineties to be different, a looking ahead to the twenty-first century. The eighties, dominated in the United States by the Reagan presidency, bottled up the active commitment for social justice, marginalized those who refused to forget, and drove the wedge ever more deeply between those in the mainstream and society’s outsiders. Of course, there continued to be critical voices—engaged, political voices
CHAPTER 8 Making History: from:
Mappings
Abstract: My reflections begin with the contradictory desires within contemporary American feminism revolving around the question of history, particularly what is involved when feminists write histories of feminism. On the one hand, a pressing urgency to reclaim and hold on to a newly reconstituted history of women has fueled the development of the field of women’s history as well as the archaeological, archival, and oral history activities of feminists in other areas of women’s studies outside the discipline of history, inside and outside the academy. On the other hand, there has been a palpable anxiety within the feminist movement about the
Book Title: Politics and the Imagination- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Geuss Raymond
Abstract: In politics, utopians do not have a monopoly on imagination. Even the most conservative defenses of the status quo, Raymond Geuss argues, require imaginative acts of some kind. In this collection of recent essays, including his most overtly political writing yet, Geuss explores the role of imagination in politics, particularly how imaginative constructs interact with political reality. He uses decisions about the war in Iraq to explore the peculiar ways in which politicians can be deluded and citizens can misunderstand their leaders. He also examines critically what he sees as one of the most serious delusions of western political thinking--the idea that a human society is always best conceived as a closed system obeying fixed rules. And, in essays on
Don Quixote, museums, Celan's poetry, Heidegger's brother Fritz, Richard Rorty, and bourgeois philosophy, Geuss reflects on how cultural artifacts can lead us to embrace or reject conventional assumptions about the world. While paying particular attention to the relative political roles played by rule-following, utilitarian calculations of interest, and aspirations to lead a collective life of a certain kind, Geuss discusses a wide range of related issues, including the distance critics need from their political systems, the extent to which history can enlighten politics, and the possibility of utopian thinking in a world in which action retains its urgency.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7t8mt
II The Politics of Managing Decline from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: The last twenty years have seen very significant changes in the pattern of economic activity around the world, including major increases in the manufacturing capacity of various countries in Asia. In addition, the collapse of the Soviet Union initiated a process of political restructuring in Europe which has not perhaps yet reached its final stage. For citizens of the European Union it might seem timely to think again about what attitudes we wish to adopt toward some of the new political constellations that seem to be emerging in the world. For those of us who live in the UK, two
III Moralism and Realpolitik from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: Philosophers are at a serious disadvantage when it comes to understanding politics, and it is a disadvantage that results from the very peculiarity of their special vocation and training. From almost the very beginning of its existence as a distinct activity, Western philosophy has been committed to certain principles of at least minimal self-awareness, clarity, coherence, and consistency of thought, speech, valuation, and action. Socrates, who notoriously took no part in city politics beyond what was strictly required of him by his obligations as a citizen, also started philosophy down the path of exhortation to
individualsas the focus of
VI Culture as Ideal and as Boundary from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: Nietzsche, as is well known, was trained as a classical philologist, but it is, I think, often insufficiently appreciated that he remained intellectually true to this original choice of professions, albeit in his own highly idiosyncratic way, to the very end of his life. To be sure, from very early on Nietzsche understood “philology” as a discipline that was distinctively “philosophical” both in its method and in its content. The philologist cultivates an art of interpreting ancient monuments of civilization through the exact and subtle reading of obscure and difficult texts, and such practice is the best possible preparation for
VII On Museums from:
Politics and the Imagination
Abstract: The collecting and exhibiting of natural objects and of artifacts has a long history. There are different kinds of collections, and they have varying origins, and serve a wide variety of different human purposes. Thus, for instance, in the ancient world temples sometimes served as repositories of various offerings, some of which were durable objects, such as the bloody armor of successively defeated opponents. The reasons the victors had for depositing these trophies are probably very complicated; the desire to thank a divine patron and commemorate a signal success may have played an important role, but also perhaps the desire
Book Title: Acts of Compassion-Caring for Others and Helping Ourselves
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Wuthnow Robert
Abstract: Robert Wuthnow finds that those who are most involved in acts of compassion are no less individualistic than anyone else--and that those who are the most intensely individualistic are no less involved in caring for others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7tb9m
CHAPTER NINE Envisioning a Better Society from:
Acts of Compassion
Abstract: Jane addams’s decision to become a volunteer also forced her to become an advocate of social justice. The girl from rural Illinois moved to Chicago with the hope of helping disadvantaged individuals. She quickly discovered that caring for individuals could go only so far. To improve the conditions of poor people in Chicago would take the help of city hall and eventually even the federal government. With the help of labor unions and social-reform organizations, she was able to institute juvenile-court laws, the first “mother’s pension” law, tenement-house regulations, an eight-hour workday law for women, factory-inspection laws, and workers’ compensation.
Book Title: Circles Disturbed-The Interplay of Mathematics and Narrative
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): MAZUR BARRY
Abstract: Circles Disturbedbrings together important thinkers in mathematics, history, and philosophy to explore the relationship between mathematics and narrative. The book's title recalls the last words of the great Greek mathematician Archimedes before he was slain by a Roman soldier--"Don't disturb my circles"--words that seem to refer to two radically different concerns: that of the practical person living in the concrete world of reality, and that of the theoretician lost in a world of abstraction. Stories and theorems are, in a sense, the natural languages of these two worlds--stories representing the way we act and interact, and theorems giving us pure thought, distilled from the hustle and bustle of reality. Yet, though the voices of stories and theorems seem totally different, they share profound connections and similarities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7tbz4
CHAPTER 3 Deductive Narrative and the Epistemological Function of Belief in Mathematics: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) LA NAVE FEDERICA
Abstract: The story of a mathematical discovery is often presented as a linear succession of events corresponding to a series of logical steps leading up to the moment of discovery by proof. The discovery itself takes on the character of a “truth revelation.” Such an accounting is cathartic. It makes us feel good about ourselves; it gives us confidence in the power of our mind. But is a sequence of logical steps all there is behind proving something in mathematics? When telling a story, one naturally lapses into a linear mode. But when trying to locate the history of a discovery,
CHAPTER 4 Hilbert on Theology and Its Discontents: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MCLARTY COLIN
Abstract: It is a fact and no myth at all that one small puzzling proof by David Hilbert in 1888 became the paradigm of modern axiomatic mathematics. Hilbert knew it was that important. He wrote a series of papers on applications and, as we now know, vastly underestimated them: a preliminary series of three went to the
Göttinger Nachrichtenand a longer, polished version went to the maximally prestigiousMathematische Annalen. He consciously made it his emblem as he became “the Director General” of twentieth-century mathematics, in the very practical image offered by his friend Hermann Minkowski (1973, 130). With time,
CHAPTER 7 Vividness in Mathematics and Narrative from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) GOWERS TIMOTHY
Abstract: Is there any interesting connection between mathematics and narrative? The answer is not obviously yes, and until one thinks about the question for a while, one might even be tempted to say that it is obviously no, since the two activities seem so different. But on further reflection, one starts to see that there are some points of contact. For example, to write out the proof of a complicated theorem one must take several interrelated ideas and present them in a linear fashion. The same could be said of writing a novel. If the novel is describing a series of
CHAPTER 9 Narrative and the Rationality of Mathematical Practice from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) CORFIELD DAVID
Abstract: How is it to act rationally as a mathematician? For much of the Anglo-American philosophy of mathematics this question is answered in terms of what mathematicians most obviously produce—journal papers. From this perspective, the mathematician’s work is taken to be of interest solely insofar as in consists in deducing the consequences of various axioms and definitions. This view of the discipline, with its strong focus on aspects of mathematics that do not feature largely elsewhere—its use of deductive proof, its supposed capacity to be captured by some formal calculus, the abstractness of the objects it studies—isolates the
CHAPTER 12 Adventures of the Diagonal: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) PLOTNITSKY ARKADY
Abstract: Mathematics has been and still is commonly viewed as independent, at least essentially or constitutively independent, of narrative or other purportedly literary or rhetorical elements, such as metaphor.¹ Indeed, this independence has been deemed to be especially characteristic of mathematics as against other sciences or philosophy, which also aspire and claim to be able, sometimes on the model of mathematics, to dispense with the constitutive role of such elements. Their auxiliary, such as pedagogical, role has always been acknowledged and, more recently, investigated in historical and sociological studies of mathematics and science, for example, in considering how narrative is used
CHAPTER 13 Formal Models in Narrative Analysis from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) HERMAN DAVID
Abstract: In a discussion of the writing practices in mathematics and science versus the humanities, Brian Rotman (2000, 60) remarks that
CHAPTER 15 Tales of Contingency, Contingencies of Telling: from:
Circles Disturbed
Author(s) MEISTER JAN CHRISTOPH
Abstract: It is hard to imagine a world without narrative: In our individual lives as well as in the history of humankind, narratives and storytelling are omnipresent. None of the other modes of symbolic communication “feels” as innately human as the synthetic sequencing of causally related events along a time line. In fact, as the French literary theorist and philosopher Paul Ricoeur argued in his seminal three-volume
Time and Narrative(1984), the human experience of time itself seems to be bound to our ability to narrate.
Book Title: Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence-Selected Studies
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Lebrun Richard A.
Abstract: Joseph de Maistre (1753B1821) was an extraordinarily gifted and insightful commentator on foundational developments that have shaped our modern world. His reaction to the Enlightenment and the French Revolution, though hostile, was remarkably open and included innovative and still-valuable theorizing about such human phenomena as violence and unreason. The political and theoretical issues he addressed continue to challenge us today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7znxx
Introduction from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Leburn Richard A.
Abstract: The Counter-Enlightenment thinker Joseph de Maistre (1753-1821) was an extraordinarily intelligent, well educated, well read, and engaged observer and commentator on foundational developments that have shaped our modern world. His interaction with the Enlightenment and the French Revolution, although from the perspective of opposition to these landmarks of modernity, was remarkably open and creative. His reaction to these developments, though hostile, included quite innovative and still valuable theorizing about such human phenomena as the violence and unreason that so often flourish in human societies. The political and theoretical issues that Maistre addressed remain, unfortunately, issues that continue to challenge us
The Apprentice Years of a Counter-Revolutionary: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: The four years Joseph de Maistre spent in Lausanne during the French Revolution (13 April 1793 to 28 February 1797) are certainly the best known of his life. The period in Lausanne, which marked the entry of the Senator from Chambéry into political and literary life, has attracted biographers and historians who have had at their disposal abundant information, particularly precious when it throws light on the genesis of his works. This is equally the period when the author had been the least miserly with information about himself. His journal devotes ninety pages to these years, almost half of the
Joseph de Maistre and the House of Savoy: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Darcel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Among these objectives is our concern to provide light on the shadowy zones that rightly intrigue the critic and whose persistence detracts from an as exact as possible appreciation of the man, the writer, the philosopher, and the politician.
Joseph de Maistre and Edmund Burke: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Lebrun Richard A.
Abstract: When Joseph de Maistre read Edmund Burke’s
Reflections on the Revolution in Franceearly in 1791 (within a couple of months of its publication), his immediate reaction was to acclaim Burke’s assessment of events. In a letter to a close friend, Maistre wrote: “I’m delighted, and I don’t know how to tell you how he has reinforced my anti-democratic and anti-Gallican ideas.”² Although Joseph de Maistre (1753-1821) was almost a generation younger than Edmund Burke (1729-1797), their names are very often linked as exemplars of a conservative reaction against the Enlightenment and the French Revolution. Maistre's initial enthusiastic assessment of
Joseph de Maistre and Carl Schmitt from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Garrard Graeme
Abstract: Among those in the twentieth century who have taken Joseph de Maistre seriously are those who regard him as the quintessential political “realist,” someone whose clear-sighted perception of the harsh “realities” at the heart of political life was refreshingly unobscured by the wishful thinking and naïve assumptions of so much political thought since the Enlightenment The best known of Maistre’s twentieth century “realist” admirers is Carl Schmitt (1888 -1985), interest in whom has exploded over the last two decades.² Given this interest, and in light of the fact that Maistre occupied a privileged place in Schmitt’s pantheon of heroes, alongside
Joseph de Maistre’s Works in Russia: from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Miltchyna Vera
Abstract: The great subject of “Joseph de Maistre in Russia” can be treated in two different ways: on the one hand, one can concentrate on Joseph de Maistre’s relations with Russians during his stay in St. Petersburg as minister of the king of Sardinia, a stay that lasted fourteen years - from 1803 to 1817; on the other hand, one can speak of what one calls “the reception”-reactions (sometimes very unexpected) that Maistre’s works have provoked among Russian authors. The two subjects are equally interesting, however the first is - at least in broad terms - well enough known. Maistre’s biographers
The Persistence of Maistrian Thought from:
Joseph de Maistre's Life, Thought, and Influence
Author(s) Pranchère Jean-Yves
Abstract: For a long time it has been a commonplace of Maistrian studies - and a well-founded commonplace - to emphasize the paradoxical character of Maistre’s work. Almost all interpreters have recognized that this work is placed under the sign of paradox from a triple point of view: paradox surges especially in the contrast between a cruel and ferocious opus and an author whose correspondence shows him to be charitable and tolerant; it appears as well as the mark of the Maistrian style, which made great rhetorical use of the
oxymoron,of the association of contrary terms; and finally it characterizes
3 Possessed by Love: from:
Writing Lovers
Abstract: In her foreword to
By Grand Central Station I Sat Down and Wept,Brigid Brophy praises what she names Elizabeth Smart’s “poetic prose” (7), an apt designation since it accounts for both the narrative momentum of the text and its emphasis on metaphor, figurative language, and poetic rhythm.¹ In fact, Smart’s book-lengthcri de coeurconforms to the elements of poetry rather more than to those of prose, since the narrative does not exceed the geometry of a lover’s triangle and much of the so-called plot must be inferred from the narrator’s ecstatic lamentation.² As such, I feel justified in
6 On the Line: from:
Writing Lovers
Abstract: The narrative of the love story is traditionally structured as an ordeal of abandonment prolonged by the promise of return and resolved through metaphors of seduction, the configurations of language that release the particular from its burden of meaning. Amorous discourse is characterized by the variety of narratives that follow in the wake of this abandonment. As devotees of the genre may observe, the “story” is already over by the time Heloise composes her first passionate epistle to Abelard, or, in a more contemporary example, when the narrator of “The Tennessee Waltz” begins his plaintive hurting song. The romance is
Chapter One DISCOURSE ON METHOD from:
Gift and Communion
Abstract: Using the title of the first philosophical publication of René Descartes,
Discours de la méthodefrom 1637, as the name of this chapter is intentional.¹ It results from the conviction that the method of the theological anthropology of John Paul II is built in opposition to the Cartesian method, which has been considered paradigmatic for modern humanities and social sciences.² The papal reflections in the catecheses are theological; however, the fact that both thinkers intend to understand the real man living in history makes a comparison with Cartesian thought possible.
Chapter Two THE BODY THAT REVEALS from:
Gift and Communion
Abstract: In the Wednesday catecheses, John Paul II describes and analyzes the human body according to the principles of an adequate anthropology. As shown in the previous chapter, the pope explains the concept of an adequate anthropology as “an understanding and interpretation of man in what is essentially human.”¹ Through a phenomenological concentration on what is characteristic to man—subjectivity, an experience of self, and self-reflection—an adequate anthropology opposes empiricist anthropological reductionism that “reduces man to ‘the world’” and understands man only “with the categories taken from the ‘world,’ that is, from the visible totality of bodies.”²
FINAL REMARKS from:
Gift and Communion
Abstract: George Lindbeck’s book
The Nature of Doctrinemay well be regarded as one of the most important theological publications of the late twentieth century.¹ In the context of dialogue between religions, the Yale professor suggests a particular hermeneutics of sacred texts, that is, an intra-textual interpretation that is to enable dialogue among followers of different religions.² According to Lindbeck, a proper hermeneutics of religion should have a cultural and linguistic character so that truths of faith are interpreted not only cognitively, but also as aregula fideifor the whole of life of the community of believers.³ More important for
3 A New Old Country? from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: In the following pages, I probe Quebec’s cultural and national history on the central questions outlined in chapter 1. Like all new collectivities, Quebec had to ensure its survival and development on a continent yet to be discovered and tamed, alongside long established inhabitants, Aboriginal peoples with whom it invariably had to reckon. As elsewhere, the formation and transformations of the new collectivity occurred in a context of colonial dependency. In fact, in Quebec’s case, at least four types of dependency appeared simultaneously or successively between the seventeenth and the mid-twentieth centuries: political (France, Great Britain), religious (France, the Vatican),
4 The Growth of National Consciousness in Mexico and Latin America from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: After Quebec, our attention turns to Mexico and Latin America (Map 1). Considering the continent’s diversity, it might appear surprising that this inquiry starts with Mexico and then spills into the whole of Latin America.¹ Yet, beyond their important distinguishing features, I believe that the collectivities of this continent shared dreams, problems, and historical experiences that legitimize my approach. Moreover, the act of recognizing elements of a common narrative can, in turn, shed light on particular trajectories. In describing the process whereby European immigrants appropriated these new spaces between the sixteenth and twentieth centuries, I use the concept of “Americanization”
6 Other Pathways: from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: This chapter offers only a glimpse of three other new collectivities. It gives a bird’s-eye view of these three pathways so as to situate them in relation to the ones previously discussed. Needless to say, I sketch them with fairly broad strokes; my purpose is primarily to establish a few landmarks that suggest a course of action for future analyses. Once again, the inquiry presented in chapter 1 serves as a guide. However, I limit myself to some key questions.
Conclusion from:
The Making of the Nations and Cultures of the New World
Abstract: This essay in comparative history has led me to consider the collective imaginary as a social fact, the transformations of which are directly or indirectly linked to other social facts. In turn, the study of these changes themselves not only discloses the logic of discourse but also the social dynamic to which it belongs and of which it is an important driving force. In this sense, the cultural and social are two sides of a common history. I have chosen to give priority to the first because of the question that served as my point of departure: self-representations are constituted
1 Introduction from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: One reason for this change is my growing (and perhaps self-serving¹) consciousness of “significant form”² or “presentational meaning,”³ of the fact that “FORM COMMUNICATES”⁴ — largely the result of my being wrested from one discursive universe into another.
4 Interpretation from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: Any legal scholar oblivious to the claims that have been made recently for “interpretation” (or, as it is more popularly known, “hermeneutics”⁴) in law would have to have been in a state of anaesthesia for the past ten years.⁵ Thus, for example, Ronald Dworkin has written that “legal practice is an exercise in interpretation not only when lawyers interpret particular documents or statutes, but generally.”⁶ And Gerald Bruns asserts that “law is not only a
sortof hermeneutical discipline; rather, it can be taken as exemplary of what it means to understand and interpret anything at all,”⁷
6 Rhetoric: from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In preceding chapters, I have considered some of the problems inherent in what has been called “the formalist and essentially patriarchal myth of a determinate and univocal language of legal authority.”² That “myth” is said to involve among other things, characterizing legal reasoning as a kind of “demonstration”—that is, deducing from certain premises conclusions dictated by logical necessity.³ Among the problems sometimes said to inhere in such a model are the following. First, the data or premises of the law are not facts, which are supposedly capable of empirical verification, but values, which ostensibly are not. Thus, the basic
7 Legal Diction from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In Chapter 5, I outlined some general considerations that should be kept in mind in discussions of “legal language.” One of these was the “lexicogrammatical” or formal features of legal discourse. I promised, in that chapter, to go on to consider in greater detail what some of the formal features characterizing legal language might be. And, in Chapter 6, I referred to
elocutioas one of the elements in the classical rhetorical account of discourse, again promising to discuss in detail its two major aspects — diction and syntax. This takes us to what might be described as an inquiry into
8 “Syntax” from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In Chapter 7, I discussed aspects of selection in legal language: characteristics of what is commonly regarded as typically legal diction, possible motivations for this kind of selection, and its rhetorical consequences. I move now to the subject of combination, or “syntax,” which, as Bolinger notes, means, etymologically, “a putting together.”² As I have already mentioned, diction and syntax are not always readily separable. With reference to an expression like “His contention is . . . ,” a discussion of the word “contention” may be largely lexical: the word itself has various features (it is a noun, latinate, and polysyllabic);
11 Critical Evaluation of Texts from:
Word of the Law
Abstract: In his essay “Criticising the judges,”⁵ Robert Martin characterized the writing of the late justices of the Supreme Court of Canada Rand J. and Laskin C.J.C. as “abysmal,” On the other hand, he points to the “grace and felicity” of the judgments of such jurists as Lords Mansfield, Atkin, Reid, and Denning.⁶ And, in a reversal of the accustomed pattern of academics criticising judges, we find a judge commenting on the style of an academician’s writing in the Honourable Samuel Freedman’s observation that “every page” of a book introducing the Canadian legal system “is written in clear, simple, translucent prose.”⁷
Book Title: Russian Experimental Fiction-Resisting Ideology after Utopia
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Clowes Edith W.
Abstract: In the three decades following Stalin's death, major underground Russian writers have subverted Soviet ideology by using parody to draw attention to its basis in utopian thought. Referring to utopian writing as diverse as Defoe's
Robinson Crusoe, Dostoevsky'sNotes from Underground, and Orwell'sAnimal Farm, they have tested notions of truth, reality, and representation. They have gone beyond their precursors by experimenting with the tensions between ludic and didactic art. Edith Clowes explores these "meta-utopian" narratives, which address a wide range of attitudes toward utopia, to expose the challenge that literary play poses to dogmatism and to elucidate the sense of renewal it can bring to social imagination. Using both structural analysis and reception theory, she introduces readers outside Russia to a fascinating body of literature that includes Aleksandr Zinoviev'sThe Yawning Heights, Abram Terts'sLiubimov, Vladimir Voinovich'sMoscow 2042, and Liudmila Petrushevskaia's "The New Robinsons.".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztgwq
CHAPTER FOUR Science, Ideology, and the Structure of Meta-utopian Narrative from:
Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: The modern Western tradition of utopian writing, rooted in More’s
Utopia, is very much the product of a “scientific” mentality that has emerged over the last five hundred years. Although this mentality has been variously characterized, one of its firm bases is the epistemological concern for verifiable ways of knowing and measuring reality. Tracing the beginnings of this way of thinking in the late Middle Ages and early Renaissance, the comparatist Timothy J. Reiss defines an “analytico-referential” discourse founded on repeatable acts of mediated perception of the world, enabled by some invented instrument or mechanism.¹ Reiss draws particular attention to
CHAPTER FIVE The Meta-utopian Language Problem, or Utopia as a Bump on a -log- from:
Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: That language and consciousness are intimately bound up with one another is a commonplace. How they interact is harder to ascertain. Post-Saussurian literary theorists claim perhaps too much for the priority of language over consciousness.¹ Philosophers concerned with this issue, such as Nietzsche or Wittgenstein, also acknowledge the impact of language on consciousness but stress the restrictions that linguistic structures and functions put on thinking. For example, in
Tractatus Logico-PhilosophicusWittgenstein writes: “The limits of my languagemean the limits of my world.”² Perhaps these restrictions are best characterized by tautology, the ultimate, absurd limit of language, an indication of
CHAPTER SIX Meta-utopian Consciousness from:
Russian Experimental Fiction
Abstract: A consideration of consciousness provides an appropriate end point for understanding the interaction between aesthetic experiment and ideological critique in meta-utopian fiction. In its challenge to exclusivist modes of social imagination and practice there emerges in this art a different mentality characterized by an insistence on balancing public and private modes of discourse, a love of ideological play, and an acknowledgment of the thinking, discerning person. The meta-utopian consciousness is built on a distinction between apparent ideological differences (for example, the looking-glass war between modes of realism) and significant valuative oppositions and choices (for example, between didactic and ludic art,
Introduction from:
Sung Dynasty Uses of the I Ching
Abstract: In the course of the eleventh and twelfth centuries, China experienced one of the greatest transformations in its history. Sung dynasty thinkers laid the basis for later practices of moral philosophy, social organization, political theory and aesthetics. This book studies four men who had particular influence on Sung intellectual culture—Su Shih, Shao Yung, Ch’eng I and Chu Hsi. These men sought to define the relationship between the natural world of heaven-and-earth (
t’ien-ti) and the world of human values. Each, in varying ways, saw heaven, earth, and humanity as an integrated field, in which values existed naturally. Knowing this natural
CHAPTER THREE The Significant Group: from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: In 1818 Keats, in distinguishing the sort of “poetical Character” to which he belonged, contrasted it to “the wordsworthian or egotistical sublime; which is a thing per se and stands alone.”¹ The statement seems to define in an important way a certain irreducible attitude in Wordsworth's life and art. Benjamin Haydon, for instance, said that though Wordsworth was a “great Being,” he could use his intense feelings only “as referring to himself.”² Coleridge, indeed, observed as early as 1799 that “Wordsworth appears to me to have hurtfully segregated & isolated his Being/Doubtless, his delights are more deep and sublime;/but he
CHAPTER FIVE A Complex Dialogue: from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: Coleridge’s conception of genre is based upon the method of the reconciliation of opposites, which embodies the characteristic method of his thought. . . . The reconciliation of opposites, indeed, is the Archimedes lever of Coleridge’s criticism. His procedure and
CHAPTER SIX The Psychic Economy and Cultural Meaning of Coleridge’s Magnum Opus from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: In the E. J. Pratt Library of Victoria University in Toronto there are three clasped vellum manuscript volumes. They, along with a manuscript chapter in a commonplace book in the Huntington Library, and some data in the Berg Collection of the New York Public Library, are what remains of one of the most legendary works ever conceived: the
magnum opusof Samuel Taylor Coleridge—or as he sometimes called it, “my Great Work.” I say “legendary” advisedly, for by that adjective I mean to focus three aspects of the enterprise: first of all, its fame; secondly, its basis in fact;
SECOND LANDING PLACE. from:
Romanticism and the Forms of Ruin: Wordsworth, Coleridge, the Modalities of Fragmentation
Abstract: If the strivings of Coleridge and Wordsworth, as viewed from the shifting perspectives of the pre ceding chapters, all participate in that
ständige Unganzheit—that continuing incompleteness—seen by Heidegger as an unavoidable limitation of life itself, we might expect the form and purpose of those strivings to reveal themselves, under inspection, as an attempt to overcome or at least to compensate for such fragmentation. We might expect to find that the ceaseless effort discharged into philosophical formulation, interchangeably with the continuously pulsating transformations of spirit into poetic statement, was somehow prompted by the diasparactive condition of our existence.
Book Title: The Matrix of Modernism-Pound, Eliot, and Early Twentieth-Century Thought
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Schwartz Sanford
Abstract: Sanford Schwartz situates Modernist poetics in the intellectual ferment of the early twentieth century, which witnessed major developments in philosophy, science, and the arts. Beginning with the works of various philosophers--Bergson, James, Bradley, Nietzsche, and Husserl, among others--he establishes a matrix that brings together not only the principal characteristics of Modernist/New Critical poetics but also the affiliations between the Continental and the Anglo-American critical traditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqsd
INTRODUCTION from:
The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: The aim of this book is to explore the affiliations between Modernist poetics and contemporaneous developments in philosophy. That there are such affiliations is beyond dispute. The names of many philosophers—Bergson, James, Bradley, and Nietzsche among others—appear frequently in studies of the Modernist movement. But literary historians have for the most part adopted an atomistic approach to the subject: they generally confine themselves to individual influences or affinities, examining, for instance, the impact of Bradley on T. S. Eliot or that of Santayana on Wallace Stevens. These studies are often quite valuable, but they focus too narrowly on
CHAPTER III Ezra Pound: from:
The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: In this chapter and the next, the focus shifts from the articulation of a global structure to the examination of individual writers. While the dynamics of abstraction and experience will continue to guide the investigation, the turn from paradigm to person will bring to light distinctive features of the works of Pound and Eliot. The present chapter, devoted to Ezra Pound, begins with the poet’s tendency to think in terms of certain oppositions—form/flux, abstraction/experience, identity/difference, unity/multiplicity—and then to find constructs that hold together the antithetical terms. This attempt to integrate form and flux is typical of Pound’s approach
CONCLUSION from:
The Matrix of Modernism
Abstract: Throughout this book I have explored the modern tendency to think in terms of “surfaces” and “depths,” focusing particularly on the opposition between conceptual abstraction and concrete sensation. These terms have been used to conduct an investigation that might be extended well beyond the limits of this study. They inform the works of many writers of the early twentieth century, and Chapters III and IV merely suggest the kind of work to be done with Yeats, Stevens, and Williams, as well as the novelists of the period. In many respects these terms are still central to the human sciences, philosophy,
Book Title: Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): RADZINOWICZ MARY ANN
Abstract: The Psalms were of intense interest to Milton, who read them not only as impassioned voices conveying significant moments in life's journey, but also as examples of various genres, each containing rhetorical and poetical conventions appropriate to the expressive intent of the speaker. In this book Mary Ann Radzinowicz describes the pervasive influence of these biblical works on Paradise Lost and Paradise Regained. She shows that the dramatic moments when Milton's characters respond to the numinous are shaped by his appreciation of the lyricism of the Psalms and by his studies of their thematic relationships.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztqxb
INTRODUCTION from:
Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: Milton read the Book of Psalms as the record of a journey through life traversing all the tempers, moods, passions, and uneven reactions that mark the psalmist’s search for an adequate faith. Such a mode of reading was common to Englishmen in his day, guided by the Geneva Bible’s representation of Psalms as a course of life by which “at length [to] atteine to [an] incorruptible crowne of glorie.”¹ Since the journey is not a consistent progress toward enlightenment, individual psalms register backsliding, fear, self-deception, even inadequacy of response no less truly than nobility of spirit. Milton did not congratulate
THREE “Smit with the love of sacred Song”: from:
Milton's Epics and the Book of Psalms
Abstract: Hymns are sung across
Paradise Lostnot only by angelic choirs, praising both God’s nature and his specific acts, but also by the human pair, extemporizing occasional
Book Title: The Darwinian Heritage- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KOTTLER MALCOLM J.
Abstract: Representing the present rich state of historical work on Darwin and Darwinism, this volume of essays places the great theorist in the context of Victorian science. The book includes contributions by some of the most distinguished senior figures of Darwin scholarship and by leading younger scholars who have been transforming Darwinian studies. The result is the most comprehensive survey available of Darwin's impact on science and society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7ztrtb
2 The Wider British Context in Darwin’s Theorizing from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Schweber Silvan S.
Abstract: The
Origin of Specieswas the culmination of Darwin’s theorizing of the previous twenty years. Its unique role in delineating the subsequent debates over all aspects of evolution account for the enduring interest in the construction of theOriginand the intellectual and other factors that helped shape its final form. We know from Darwin’s correspondence that he saw himself as constantly engaged in “species-work” during the period from 1840 to 1854. It was “far-distant work” but he did indicate to several of his correspondents that he intended to write a book on the species question, though he would “not
8 Darwin’s Principle of Divergence as Internal Dialogue from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Kohn David
Abstract: However strongly we may see scientific ideas as socially and culturally contingent in their origin and expression, we must acknowledge that they are also the products of individuals. Hence even if we all consider scientific activity to be the reworking of prior scientific activity, the dynamics by which individual scientists develop their theories is a subject integral to the history of science. If we accept the proposition that knowledge grows by public and critical dialogue, we should not ignore the fact that important phases of the dialogue may occur within an individual. Such is the case for Charles Darwin, who
10 Speaking of Species: from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Beatty John
Abstract: There is a wealth of secondary literature on Darwin’s species concept, covering many different perspectives of the topic.¹ Of the various accounts available, I have always been particularly intrigued by Frank Sulloway’s suggestion that Darwin’s choice of species concept was guided by “tactical” considerations. Among those tactical considerations was the decision to employ his fellow naturalists’ species concept, in order to speak to them “in their own language” (Sulloway 1979, p. 37). Implicit in the suggestion is that Darwin was a member of a fairly clear-cut community of naturalists. In order to communicate with them about natural history, either to
11 The Ascent of Nature in Darwin’s Descent of Man from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Durant John R.
Abstract: It is a fact familiar to all historians of science that Darwin was extremely slow to put his most important ideas into print. Having become a convinced transmutationist in 1837, he made such rapid progress over the next few years that he soon foresaw the prospect of writing a work that would revolutionize natural history. Yet it was not until 1844 that he produced an essay that was suitable for publication by his family in the event of his death; and fourteen years later, the unexpected arrival of Wallace’s short paper “On the tendency of varieties to depart indefinitely from
13 Darwin on Animal Behavior and Evolution from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Burkhardt Richard W.
Abstract: In an obituary notice of 1882 examining the causes of Darwin’s success and the importance of Darwin’s works, the Genevan botanist and pioneer of the history of science Alphonse de Candolle identified two characteristics in particular that had made Darwin such an exceptional thinker. One was Darwin’s ability to occupy himself simultaneously with both the smallest details and the broadest theoretical considerations. The other was the extraordinary
rangeof Darwin’s researches and the way that each of Darwin’s separate studies, however specialized, contributed to the whole of Darwin’soeuvre(Candolle 1882).
17 Darwin and the World of Geology (Commentary) from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Rudwick Martin J. S.
Abstract: This note is a brief comment on Herbert’s interpretation of Darwin’s first chosen field of serious scientific research, the field in which he first earned respect as a highly competent “gentleman of science”. Herbert takes as her text a published comment of mine about what I termed the “dominant cognitive goal” of geologists at the period when Darwin joined their company (1979, pp. 10–11). I want to explain why this did not in fact imply a “narrow definition” of geology, and why there is therefore no paradox in identifying Darwin (and of course his older mentor Lyell) as central
18 Darwin and the Breeders: from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Secord James A.
Abstract: In 1898, sixteen years after the death of Charles Darwin and two years after that of his wife Emma, the fate of their famous residence at Down was highly uncertain. The aging botanist Joseph Hooker, writing to Darwin’s son George, suggested that the historic house might well be saved for future generations by turning it to practical use as an experimental station for the study of animal breeding (Atkins 1974, p. 101). Although never taken up, the idea was an appropriate one. Almost from the very beginning of his career as a transmutationist, Darwin looked to the work of animal
21 Darwinism Is Social from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Young Robert M.
Abstract: It strikes me that there should be little need for this paper. Only positivists believe that scientific facts and theories are separate from human meanings and values, and even they, inconsistently, set out to extrapolate human and social conclusions from putatively decontextualized facts. Only religious fundamentalists believe that a belief in God cannot be reconciled with science, and that true religion is based on the literal truth of Scripture. This is a sort of religious positivism, as is the notion of creation science, which the ultra-right is currently deploying in opposition to a vulnerable, neo-Darwinian scientific orthodoxy, as part of
22 Scientific Attitudes to Darwinism in Britain and America from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Bowler Peter J.
Abstract: Certain images spring immediately to mind whenever the scientific reaction to Darwinism is mentioned. For many, Thomas Henry Huxley’s response to Bishop Samuel Wilberforce at the Oxford BAAS meeting in 1860 symbolizes the scientists’ refusal to bow to outside pressure. Huxley’s debate with Richard Owen over man’s relationship to the apes illustrates the clash between the radical and conservative responses within science, as do the efforts of Asa Gray and William Barton Rogers to defend Darwinism against the attacks of Louis Agassiz in the United States. Many laymen no doubt assume that once the initial opposition was overcome, Darwinism soon
23 Darwinism in Germany, France, and Italy from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Weindling Paul J.
Abstract: The eleven-year interval since the conference on the reception of Darwinism organized by Thomas F. Glick (1974) has witnessed important changes in research on evolutionary ideas in Europe. More case studies on Germany have appeared; Professor Yvette Conry has published her large volume on French non-reactions to Darwin; and a new generation of Italian historians of science has undertaken to explore the immense and immensely under-researched territory of Italian reactions to Darwin. Yet at present, as in 1972, the task of offering a balanced comparative assessment of Darwinian debates within the major European countries proves daunting. For the most part,
25 Darwin’s Five Theories of Evolution from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Mayr Ernst
Abstract: In recent controversies on evolution one frequently finds references to “Darwin’s theory of evolution”, as though it were a unitary entity. In reality Darwin’s “theory” of evolution was a whole bundle of theories, and it is impossible to discuss Darwin’s evolutionary thought constructively if one does not distinguish the various components of which it consists. But quite aside from the fact that it helps understanding of the structure of evolutionary theory, to carry the analysis to the level of the subtheories Darwin adopted, it is important to call attention to the composite nature of the Darwinian theory for three very
26 Darwinism as a Historical Entity: from:
The Darwinian Heritage
Author(s) Hull David L.
Abstract: In a recent meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, several eminent scientists addressed the question: What happened to Darwinism between the two Darwinian Centennials, 1959–1982?¹ An unanticipated problem soon arose — none of the participants could agree on what Darwinism actually was. Each speaker was sure that Darwinism has an essence, a set of tenets that all and only Darwinians hold, but no two could agree about which tenets are actually essential. Is selectionism essential? Must nearly all traits and all adaptations arise through natural selection, or does the neutralist alternative also count as part
CHAPTER II The Anomalous Voice and the Impersonal Lyric from:
The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: In the preceding chapter, I argued that we can retain the broad genre-concepts as interpretive models, provided that we regard those concepts as reflexive. The concepts themselves are fully interpreted only in the act of interpreting particular works. It follows from the reflexivity of the genre-concepts that the concepts by themselves are insufficient to “prove” that some particular work is a lyric, an epic, or a drama. We
canshow, given some particular explicit interpretation, that the interpretationunderstandsthe work as lyric, as epic, or as drama. In an important sense, the genre-concepts do not refer to something that
CHAPTER III Standards of Interpretation and Evaluation from:
The Three Genres and the Interpretation of Lyric
Abstract: Adopting any model of literary interpretation plunges one at once into enormously involved philosophical problems. I have provisionally put forward a model on Heideggerian lines. But the model is Heideggerian
onlyin that it accepts Heidegger’s crucial notion that interpretation is a making-explicit of what is already grasped (“understood”), but not fully articulated, in our encounters with literary works. What concerns me here is something I have previously mentioned in passing—namely, the fact that a Heideggerian model might seem to lead inevitably to a strict relativism, and, therefore, to the conclusion that knowledge in the human studies is impossible.
CHAPTER I SAMSON AGONISTES AND THE STATE OF MILTON CRITICISM from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: No sooner had Raymond Waddington told us what we could all agree upon—that
Samson Agonistesis a drama of regeneration—than Irene Samuel declared she could not agree, and in such a way as to remind us of the Johnsonian proposition: “this is the tragedy which ignorance has admired, and bigotry applauded.”¹ It has been suggested that we will never know exactly what Johnson meant inasmuch as published commentary on Milton’s tragedy hardly existed at the time. Some commentary did exist, however, both visual and verbal, with illustrative criticism (a good index to any text’s status in the culture)
CHAPTER III THE JUDGES NARRATIVE AND THE ART OF SAMSON AGONISTES from:
Interpreting SAMSON AGONISTES
Abstract: The Samson story, it has been said, “demonstrates Israelite narrative art at its zenith.”¹ This claim should be made for the Book of Judges as a whole, for its meaning is located not in individual tales alone but spreads out through the entire structure. The salient features of this narrative are comprehended within the body of Renaissance exegesis but were not then the preoccupation they would become for later commentators. A prospect on history, a series of inset histories, another prospect on history that, this time, juxtaposes current actualities with earlier idealisms, the Book of Judges is also remarkable for
CHAPTER ONE Places, Common and Other: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevensis such a master of openings that we expect the first poems of
Harmoniumto entice us, and we are a little baffled when they do not. Stevens selected these poems to openHarmonium, choosing from work written between 1916 and 1921; he saw no reason to alter the order in 1931 for a second edition or in 1954 for hisCollected Poems. They are the entrance into his work and I propose to begin with the first six. Slight, pleasing poems, they lead into the powerful pair,Domination of BlackandThe Snow Man, but have themselves attracted little
CHAPTER THREE The Limits of Word-Play: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Word-play has no limits, yet in practice it must be limited. Argument, on the other hand, tries to set its own limits. Word-play tends to raise a question of limits, argument tends to mask the question of limits.
The Comedian as the Letter Cis about limits and possible evasions of limits. It is about Stevensʹ younger poetic self, and it first took the form of aBildungsroman, a form that itself provides a plot about overcoming limitations. Stevensʹ revisions changed this form and made the poem much more difficult, as he tried to evade expected plot lines, troping, closure,
CHAPTER FIVE Ways of Ending: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The Stevens of
Sunday Morningis the Stevens with whom most students begin, and rightly so, for it is the first major poem he wrote, and he continued to rewrite it all his life To open his volume, Stevens chose something in the plain style that Perry Miller associates with New World writing.¹ But in 1915, he actually began differently His first major poem was an elegiac type of poem, in the Miltonic tradition that Josephine Miles distinguishes as one dominant American style ²Sunday Morningand Stevensʹ antipietistic poems are also poems of place, in their way Or rather,
CHAPTER SEVEN Concerning the Nature of Things: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: The Man with the Blue Guitaris pivotal in Stevensʹ work, at once a review and a new direction, a refinding of vocation and a preliminary to the major long poems of the forties. The series has a certain austerity, and Stevens himself conceded some boring patches, but rightly judged the poemʹs overall strength: ʺthe man with the blue guitar … while it bores me in spots, is a very much better book than ideas of orderʺ (L338, April 27, 1939). Stevensʹ effects are sometimes abrupt or compacted; there is occasional bitterness and disgust, and the poem approaches desperation
CHAPTER EIGHT Against Synecdoche: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Stevens enjoyed himself more in this volume than in
Ideas of OrderorThe Man with the Blue Guitar, and he was disappointed when readers showed no corresponding enjoyment (L429–30, 433, 501) We can hear him indulging his old sense of fun from time to time, for example, in the casual, nudging asides on his own processes (ʺShucks,ʺ ʺPfttʺ) Or in a courtly bow to the reader after an unforgettable line and point ʺThe squirming facts exceed the squamous mind, / If one may say soʺ Or in the play with things that fall stones fall, night falls,
CHAPTER TWELVE Commonplace Apocalypse: from:
Poetry, Word-Play, and Word-War in Wallace Stevens
Abstract: Readers of Stevens have no quarrel with the eucalyptic-apocalytpic word-play (to which I shall come), but may find themselves frustrated by what seems a lack of contact with the common corporeal world (Of course, ʺthe corporeal
CHAPTER ONE The Holiness of Beauty and the Beauty of Holiness: from:
Beauty and Holiness
Abstract: It is inthe King James Version of the Bible that we encounter the Psalmist’s injunction to “worship the Lord in the beauty of holiness” (Psalm 29 2) It is significant, however, that other versions translate the passage “in the splendour of Holiness,” with the note “or holy vestments,”¹ and others render it “in holy array”² or “festival attire”³ Immediately we are made aware of the fact that the Biblical word translated “beauty” in the English of the King James Version does not designate a concept of beauty that is synonymous with that which originated in Greek thought, was absorbed
CHAPTER FOUR Aesthetics and Religion in Twentieth-Century Philosophy from:
Beauty and Holiness
Abstract: It issometimes said that modern philosophy began with Descartes’ turn to subjectivity and to mathematical clarity as the model of truth. It is also said that modern philosophy began with Kant’s critique of traditional metaphysics and his critical amalgam of empirical and rationalistic factors in his epistemology as a “prolegomenon to any future metaphysics.” We have seen that, in any event, it was in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries that conceptual specification of aesthetics and of religion emerged, as an aspect of the new critical philosophy and the enlarged senses of history and culture engendered by the Enlightenment
TWO PHENOMENOLOGY AS A PROLEGOMENON TO POLITICAL THEORY from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: In the mid-1930s the quality of results on the
agrégationexamination at the ENS had declined noticeably in relation to previous years. A meeting was called to discuss the problem, and Merleau-Ponty, then a tutor for candidates for the exam, gave an acute diagnosis. The variability in results was due, he maintained, to a shift in the focus and breadth of philosophical interests among the students. After explaining their almost unanimous rejection of empiricism, he described the direction of their research—in terms that applied equally well to his own. “Once the mind’s activity in constructing the sciences has been
THREE COLLECTIVE MEANING: from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: When Sartre first applied his existential ontology to political questions, the Marxist theorist Henri Lefebvre chided him for posing “the human problem” as “an individual question, abstract and theoretical.” This was in sorry contrast to Marxism, which sees man’s social condition as “a problem of action founded on objective knowledge.”¹ Merleau-Ponty, coming to Sartre’s defense, was suspicious of this Marxism that refused to “tarry over the task of describing being and of founding the existence of other people” (SNS 134, tr. 77). His use of “founding” suggests that political theory starts not by assuming that man’s nature is social, but
FOUR VALUES IN AN EXISTENTIAL PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: “We have learned history and we claim that we must not forget it” (SNS 265, tr. 150). This is the most profound lesson that war taught French philosophy. Its violence exposed the hidden dependency of every way of life—economic, religious, artistic, philosophical—on a political sphere whose practices and disorders accumulate meaning almost imperceptibly over generations. If violence is not to rule public life, each domain must become aware of this dependency and alter itself to accommodate “history.” Even philosophers must learn to
thinkdifferently—to become sensitive to the historicity of ideas, to foresee impending changes in political
FIVE MARXISM: from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: In his critique of Kantian-liberal politics Merleau-Ponty contends that there is a chronic divergence between the universal values that liberals preach and the self-interested values incarnated in the bourgeois way of life. Yet the precedence of lived values over verbal ones need not destroy all hopes for a more humanistic society. It is conceivable that a different class might exist whose incarnated values are not inherently self-serving. A class might exist that in its very existence stands a chance at actualizing the as yet only ideal claims of the liberal tradition. The symmetrical solution to the problem of a class
SEVEN THE COMMUNIST PROBLEM from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: Marxism is not only a philosophy
ofhistory; it is a philosophyinhistory. Marx’s assertion of the unity of theory and praxis means that theoretical knowledge and practical change are inseparable. Understanding the workings of reality initiates a process that alters it, as when the proletariat’s “awakening of consciousness” changes it into a force for its own emancipation.¹
EIGHT IN SEARCH OF MERLEAU-PONTY’S LATE POLITICS from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: Could we continue to think, with all necessary reservations concerning the Soviet solutions, that the Marxist dialectic remained valid negatively and that history should be put into perspective, if not according to the proletariat’s power, at least according to its lack of it? We do not want to present as a syllogism what became clear to us gradually, in contact with events. But an event
NINE POLITICS AND EXPRESSION from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: The argument cannot be made that, having become liberal, Merleau-Ponty suddenly forgot what it meant to think politically. In
The Adventures of the Dialectiche repeats once again the litany of requirements that he places on truly political thought: it begins with a probabilistic reading of events, it needs a philosophy of history, it treats people statistically, it aims at success (AD 239, 9, 226, 251, tr. 163, 3, 154, 172). Chastising Sartre for his notion of “pure action,” Merleau-Ponty reminds him that political actors cannot use the fact that history is “overflowing with meaning” to justify an arbitrary perspective
TEN CONCLUSION: from:
Merleau-Ponty and the Foundation of Existential Politics
Abstract: A convincing case for Merleau-Ponty’s importance to contemporary political theory could be made by documenting his direct impact on a variety of influential thinkers. Michel Foucault was his student at the Sorbonne and often used his teacher’s phenomenology as a foil in constructing his own archeology of the human sciences.¹ His inspiration is found in the social theories of Claude Lefort and Cornelius Castoriadis.² In the United States, a number of those interested in postbehavioral political inquiry gratefully acknowledge debts to Merleau-Ponty.³ And of course, Sartre’s understanding of history and class in the
Critique of Dialectical Reasonowes much to
3 Brotherhood from:
The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: Two metaphors govern nearly all of Blake’s formulations of social life: brotherhood and membership. Membership in a body is one of the most ancient images by which individuals have tried to grasp a sense of belonging to a group, and in various forms it is a central analogy in classical, Christian, and modern political thought. Brotherhood is probably an equally ancient notion—certainly brotherhoods are found in many traditional societies—but while the language of fraternity persists into our day, the idea has attracted only occasional scrutiny by Christian thinkers and virtually none by secular theorists. Of the great trinity
8 Blake’s Apocatastasis from:
The Social Vision of William Blake
Abstract: It will be in keeping with the theme of this chapter to begin it by doing what we can to redeem one of the most scandalously intractable passages of
Jerusalem.
Tactics from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The ruse of inserting a rival between lover and beloved is immediately effective, as Sappho’s poem shows, but there are more ways than one to triangulate desire. Not all look triangular in action, yet they share a common concern: to represent eros as deferred, defied, obstructed, hungry, organized around a radiant absence—to represent eros as lack.
Losing the Edge from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: The self forms at the edge of desire, and a science of self arises in the effort to leave that self behind. But more than one response is possible to the acute awareness of self that ensues from the reach of desire. Neville conceives it as a “contraction” of the self upon itself and finds it merely strange. “How curiously one is changed,” he muses. He does not appear to hate the change, nor to relish it. Nietzsche, on the other hand, is delighted: “One seems to oneself transfigured, stronger, richer, more complete; one
ismore complete…. It is not
Archilochos at the Edge from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Archilochos is the first lyric poet whose transmission to us benefited from the literate revolution. Although evidence for the chronology of both poet and alphabet is uncertain, it is most plausible that, educated in the oral tradition, he encountered the new technology of writing at some point in his career and adapted himself to it. At any rate someone, perhaps Archilochos himself, wrote down these early facts of what it feels like to be violated by Eros:
Symbolon from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: We began our investigation of bittersweet Eros by countenancing a mistranslation of Sappho’s
glukupikron. We assumed that Sappho putsgluku- first because Eros’ sweetness is obvious to everyone, his bitterness less so. We then turned our attention to the bitter side. These judgments were shallow, as we are now in a position to see. Eros’ sweetness is inseparable from his bitterness, and each participates, in a way not yet obvious at all, in our human will to knowledge. There would seem to be some resemblance between the way Eros acts in the mind of a lover and the way knowing
A Novel Sense from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Imagination is the core of desire. It acts at the core of metaphor. It is essential to the activity of reading and writing. In the archaic lyric poetry of Greece, these three trajectories intersected, perhaps fortuitously, and imagination transcribed on human desire an outline more beautiful (some people think) than any before or since. We have seen what shape that outline took. Writing about desire, the archaic poets made triangles with their words. Or, to put it less sharply, they represent situations that ought to involve two factors (lover, beloved) in terms of three (lover, beloved and the space between
Letters, Letters from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: ‘Letters’ (
grammata) can mean ‘letters of the alphabet’ and also ‘epistles’ in Greek as in English. Novels contain letters of both kinds, and offer two different perspectives on the blind point of desire. Letters in the broad sense, that is to say the floating ruse of the novel as a written text, provide erotic tension on the level of the reading experience. There is a triangular circuit running from the writer to the reader to the characters in the story; when its circuit-points connect, the difficult pleasure of paradox can be felt like an electrification. Letters in the narrower sense,
Damage to the Living from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Damage is the subject of this dialogue. Plato is concerned with two sorts of damage. One is the damage done by lovers in the name of desire. The other is the damage done by writing and reading in the name of communication. Why does he set these two sorts of damage beside one another? Plato appears to believe that they act on the soul in analogous ways and violate reality by the same kind of misapprehension. The action of eros does harm to the beloved when the lover takes a certain controlling attitude, an attitude whose most striking feature is
Takeover from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Plato presents Lysias as someone who thinks himself able to control all the risks, alarms and inebriations of eros by means of a prodigious emotional calculus. The Lysian strategy of life and love applies to real erotic events a set of tactics that are by now familiar to us. The Lysian nonlover steps aside from the moving current of his beloved’s life and places himself at a point of aesthetic distance. It is the vantage point of the writer. Lysias’ insights on eros are a writer’s insights, and the theory of control he expounds treats the experience of love as
Then Ends Where Now Begins from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: On the observable facts of erotic experience Sokrates and Lysias are in rough agreement, but there is a world of difference between the readings they give to those facts. The facts are that eros changes you so drastically you seem to become a different person. In conventional thinking, such changes are best categorized as madness. What is the best thing to do with a mad person? Write him out of your novel, is Lysias’ answer. It is an answer that would make some sense to his contemporaries, for his version of eros proceeds from thoroughly conventional premises. It conceives of
What a Difference a Wing Makes from:
Eros the Bittersweet
Abstract: Wings mark the difference between a mortal and an immortal story of love. Lysias abhors the beginning of eros because he thinks it is really an end; Sokrates rejoices in the beginning in his belief that, really, it can have no end. So too, the presence or absence of wings in a lover’s story determines his erotic strategy. That miserly and mortal
sōphrosynē(256e) by which Lysias measures out his erotic experience is a tactic of defense against the change of self that eros imposes. Change is risk. What makes the risk worthwhile?
CHAPTER ONE Benjamin Franklin and the Authority of Imitation from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: When Benjamin Franklin began Part Three of his
Autobiographyin August of 1788, he was, for the first time, writing from his own home. Whereas the earlier sections had been composed in England (in 1771) and France (in 1784), he now wrote in his own library on Market Street. But home meant not only the city of Philadelphia or America, which, after all, has always been more a conceptual space than an actual geographical location; home in late summer of 1788 also included the recently constituted and ratified United States of America. In fact, as Franklin looked back over his
CHAPTER TWO Hugh Henry Brackenridge and Representation from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: In the spring of 1781, Benjamin Franklin was minister to France and soon to act as commissioner to negotiate a peace settlement with England. On 12 March of this year, Franklin asked Congress to relieve him as minister, citing poor health: “I have been engag’d in publick Affairs, and enjoy’d public Confidence in some Shape or other, during the long term of fifty Years, an honour sufficient to satisfy any reasonable Ambition” (bf, 318). That same spring another Philadelphian, Hugh Henry Brackenridge, migrated from the most sophisticated city in America to the small frontier town of Pittsburgh. After having attempted
CHAPTER SIX Herman Melville: from:
Authority, Autonomy, and Representation in American Literature, 1776-1865
Abstract: It is perhaps only a literary critic’s wishful thinking that Herman Melville’s transcendentalist confidence-man, Mark Winsome, resembles a portrait of Emerson. Yet Melville’s character from
The Confidence-Manpoints out how easily the Emersonian rhetoric of power and self-reliance, a rhetoric that empties itself of practical meanings and references, could be taken up by the industrialists to justify their materialism.¹ Or we may want to see Ahab, glorying in his “inexorable self,” as another parodic echo of Emersonian idealism as he exclaims, “What things real are there but imponderable thoughts.”² My point is not that there is some recoverable line of
Book Title: Shakespeare-The Theater and the Book
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): KNAPP ROBERT S.
Abstract: This book explores the reasons for the lasting freshness and modernity of Shakespeare's plays, while revising the standard history of English medieval and Renaissance drama. Robert Knapp argues that changes in the authority of English monarchs, in the differentiation and integration of English society, in the realization of human figures on stage, and in the understanding of signs helped produce scripts that still compel us to the act of interpretation
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv1rc
TWO The Body of the Sign from:
Shakespeare
Abstract: All shifts in modern sympathies notwithstanding, the perplexing thing about late medieval theater is still its radical union of drama with doctrine. I do not mean that there is trouble believing in the orthodoxy of the nonliturgical religious stage: despite a resurgence of Marxist criticism, and our increasing awareness of the dialogic character of all texts, I would not want to claim that the plays embody a dialectical tension between official teaching and popular expression or entertainment.¹ The difficulty, rather, is the absence of such a contradiction, and of any other obvious opposition in these texts between earnest and game,
TWO Rewriting vraisemblance in La Princesse de Clèves from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: When
La Princesse de Clèveswas first published in March 1678, it gave rise to lively discussions. Of major interest in these first responses to the book was the behavior of its central character, the princess. A telling example is the poll organized byLe Mercure Galantthat asked its readers whether Mme. de Clèves was right to tell her husband about her love for the due de Nemours. The majority thought not. Her conduct seemed implausible, since according to social custom (the well-established code ofbienséance), such behavior was not sanctioned.¹ Readers of the time did not ask themselves
THREE Madame Bovary or the Dangers of Misreading from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: Though the novel’s title focuses the reader’s attention on what he may well expect to be its central subject, such expectations are frustrated from the start, since the opening chapters focus on Charles, not Emma. Nor is this narrative focus a stable one, as soon becomes evident when other disconcerting hurdles are encountered. Through jarring contrasts and shifting perspectives, Flaubert’s reader is soon drawn into a more active, hermeneutic reading; the central question is no longer “What will happen next?” but, rather, “Why are things told that way?” This heightened attention to narrative form takes us beyond the story world
FOUR Proust’s Palimpsest: from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: A striking similarity between
Madame BovaryandA la recherche du temps perduis the central importance given to the question of reading. Both novels include detailed descriptions of how their central characters read and respond to works of art. While the focus inMadame Bovaryis on negative versions of reading that warn us, through irony, about the dangers of misreading, Proust’s novel abounds in models of reading designed to show how the fictions of art and literature set in motion a process of reading that is creative, not destructive. Though Proust’s narrator also gives a few examples of
FIVE Toward a Reflexive Act of Reading: from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: Among Robbe-Grillet’s novels to date, none has received more attention or provoked stronger reactions than
Projet pour une révolution à New York. What captures our attention is not so much the author’s transgressive narrative practice, to which readers of thenouveau romanare accustomed by now,¹ but, rather, the novel’s insistent focus on sado-erotic scenes of aggression in which women are victimized. To help the startled reader naturalize the unnatural practices displayed in his novel, Robbe-Grillet, in the explanatory flyer inserted in the book, offers one model for reading by pointing out that the themes generating his text are modern
SIX Conclusion: from:
Poetics of Reading
Abstract: What is it to read novels? This is the question asked at the outset of this study. It is clear by now that there is no one simple answer. Readings differ depending on the kind of novel being read and the reader’s purpose, interests, and ideology. By opening the interpretive space between reader and text to include both text interpretation and self-interpretation, the frames of reference that come into play are multiplied. Moreover, the emphasis in recent theories of reading on emotional response—in particular the enjoyment readers get from taking an active part—opens up new directions for a
Book Title: The Princeton Handbook of Poetic Terms- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Brogan T. V. F.
Abstract: This compact volume makes available a selection of 402 entries from the widely praised Princeton Encyclopedia of Poetry and Poetics, with emphasis on prosodic and poetic terms likely to be encountered in many different areas of literary study. The book includes detailed discussions of poetic forms, prosody, rhetoric, genre, and topics such as theories of poetry and the relationship of linguistics to poetry
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv2s9
Book Title: The Reader in the Text-Essays on Audience and Interpretation
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Crosman Inge
Abstract: A reader may be in" a text as a character is in a novel, but also as one is in a train of thought--both possessing and being possessed by it. This paradox suggests the ambiguities inherent in the concept of audience. In these original essays, a group of international scholars raises fundamental questions about the status--be it rhetorical, semiotic and structuralist, phenomenological, subjective and psychoanalytic, sociological and historical, or hermeneutic--of the audience in relation to a literary or artistic text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv3jc
Prolegomena to a Theory of Reading from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Culler Jonathan
Abstract: The fact that people engaged in the study of literature are willing to read works of criticism or articles like this one tells us something important about the nature of our discipline. Few people, one imagines, open these pages in the belief that this is the most relaxing and entertaining way to spend an hour. We attend to criticism and discussions of criticism because we hope to hear worthwhile proposals, arguments, and discussions. We believe, it would seem, that what is said about literature can matter; that it can affect our own and other’s dealings with literature and thus help
Reading as Construction from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) August Marilyn A.
Abstract: In literary studies, the problem of reading has been posed from two opposite perspectives. The first concerns itself with readers, their social, historical, collective, or individual variability. The second deals with the image of the reader as it is represented in certain texts: the reader as character or as “narratee.” There is, however, an unexplored area situated between the two: the
The Reading of Fictional Texts from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Zachrau Thekla
Abstract: To understand how readers deal with fictional texts we must first consider the status of fiction as such.¹ Despite all potential references to reality, a fictional text is characterized by being a nonreferential composition. Thus references to reality in fiction have their function in a poetics of fiction that might aim at reality and the collective experience of reality to a greater or lesser degree. While a pragmatic referential text can be corrected by our knowledge of reality, a fictional text—in its potential deviation from facts—cannot be corrected but only interpreted or criticized.² However, this license, which distinguishes
Interaction between Text and Reader from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Iser Wolfgang
Abstract: Central to the reading of every literary work is the interaction between its structure and its recipient. This is why the phenomenological theory of art has emphatically drawn attention to the fact that the study of a literary work should concern not only the actual text but also, and in equal measure, the actions involved in responding to that text. The text itself simply offers “schematized aspects”¹ through which the aesthetic object of the work can be produced.
The Readerhood of Man from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Brooke-Rose Christine
Abstract: After a long period when the Real (I prefer Actual) Author had been enthroned by criticism, his every “laundry-list” (as Pound called biography) scrutinized, he was, in true carnivalesque fashion, unthroned, the wild and happy crowd of Actual Readers taking over—but, as is the way with carnival, only for a time. Extremes bring natural reactions, and the two polarities, called at the time the Intentional and the Affective Fallacies, seem to have compromised on a safe buffer state called The Text as Object, an apparently autonomous unit that encodes both its author (implied), or addresser, and its reader (implied),
Notes on the Text as Reader from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Prince Gerald
Abstract: Reading is an activity that presupposes a text (a set of visually presented linguistic symbols from which meaning can be extracted), a reader (an agent capable of extracting meaning from that text), and an interaction between the text and the reader such that the latter is able to answer correctly at least some questions about the meaning of the former. A text like
Montaigne’s Conception of Reading in the Context of Renaissance Poetics and Modern Criticism from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) M. Bauschatz Cathleen
Abstract: In “De l’ expérience,” Montaigne describes the process of verbal communication with an intriguing parallel from tennis: the listener (or person receiving the ball) must be as actively involved as the speaker (or person serving) if the message (or ball) is to be transmitted, and more importantly, to be returned:
Toward A Theory of Reading in the Visual Arts: from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Marin Louis
Abstract: This paper is an attempt at reading a single painting—Poussin’s
The Arcadian Shepherds(Louvre)¹—but such a tentative reading cannot be truly accomplished without being aware of the operations involved in the contemplative process, their implications on theoretical and practical levels, and the hypotheses which guide that process. My essay can thus be considered as an approach to a partial history of reading in the field of visual art. To put my undertaking in more general terms, I wish to test some notions and procedures elaborated in contemporary semiotic and semantic theories by using a specific painting as an
Exemplary Pornography: from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Beaujour Michel
Abstract: In order to avoid the kind of frivolity that holds ethical concerns to be irrelevant in a discussion of the reader in (of) texts, it may be wise to revisit briefly the Russian critical tradition. This tradition has entertained with high seriousness the notion—somewhat disreputable in the West—that literature, and particularly fiction, must be held accountable, since it encodes messages which affect not only the subjective world view of readers, but their attitudes and actions. Novels are presumed capable of endangering (or reinforcing) the structure of society and the legal order.¹ Rufus Mathewson’s analysis of Russian radical poetics
Re-Covering “The Purloined Letter”: from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Holland Norman N.
Abstract: Begin with the text, they say. For me, one central fact about the text is that I am reading this story in Pocketbook No. 39, the copy of Poe I had as a boy—one of the first paperbacks in America. “Kind to your Pocket and your Pocketbook.” Hardly a distinguished edition, yet I find myself agreeing with what the man I call Marcel says in the library of the Guermantes: “If I had been tempted to be a book collector, as the Prince de Guermantes was, I would have been one of a very peculiar sort. . . .
The Theory and Practice of Reading Nouveaux Romans: from:
The Reader in the Text
Author(s) Mistacco Vicki
Abstract: A critic interested in how we read nouveaux romans might very well be allergic to terms like
convention, naturalhation,andliterary competence.Being institutional, conventions rest upon a foundation that smacks uncomfortably of the “dominant ideology” so often decried by Ricardou and his disciples. Naturalization involves constructing “communicative circuits”¹ into which we can fit a literary text; the nouveau roman officially rejects the idea of literature as communication.² And although the reader’s intertext has been invoked as an important factor in processing a given text,³ the model of literary competence has been challenged by that of performance, presumably less
3 Imagined Nations: from:
Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) CASTIÑEIRA ÀNGEL
Abstract: Most studies in the philosophy of mind have arrived at the conclusion that personal identity is an interactive phenomenon that depends, at one level, on certain
6 British and French Nationalisms Facing the Challenges of European Integration and Globalization from:
Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) LOUGHLIN JOHN
Abstract: In her book
Nationalism: Five Paths to Modernity, Liah Greenfeld identifies five different “paths” towards modernity, each actualized by a unique conceptualization of “the nation.” The first path was followed by Britain, the second by France (and the successive ones by Germany, the United States, and Russia). The British and French paths became rivalling world views, with antagonistic conceptions of politics and the economy, state organization, the relationship between state and civil society, and, above all, the role of religion within the political system; and they will form the substance of the discussion here.
7 Janus Faces, Rocks, and Hard Places: from:
Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) BICKERTON JAMES
Abstract: In his renowned study of nationalism, Benedict Anderson begins by admitting that the subject matter of his book is notoriously hard to define. His interpretation is that a nation is
an imagined political community, one both inherently limited and sovereign. However, whereas Ernest Gellner said of nationalism that it is able to invent nations even where they do not exist, Anderson (1983, 6) asserts that the process of nation-creating is not so much one of false fabrication as it is one of active creation: in a sense there are no “true” communities that can be juxtaposed to “false,” or invented,
9 Autonomy and Multinationality in Spain: from:
Contemporary Majority Nationalism
Author(s) FOSSAS ENRIC
Abstract: It is not easy to summarize the twenty-five years of Spanish decentralization, because it was an exercise of great political and legal complexity that included several factors and many nuances. It is therefore a very difficult subject to deal with in a satisfying manner within the framework of a conference, where this chapter originated. Moreover, every assessment is always tainted by some subjectivity that is inevitably dependent on preconceived political ideas, as well as inescapable cultural sensibilities. Finally, the time when a study is conducted can influence the evaluation of a historical period, which is the case today, since Spain
Book Title: The Skeptic Disposition-Deconstruction, Ideology, and Other Matters
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Goodheart Eugene
Abstract: Eugene Goodheart examines the skeptic disposition that has informed advanced literary discourse over the past generation, arguing that the targets of deconstructive suspicion are fundamental humanistic values. "[This book] is a fair-minded, generous critique of the deconstructionist theories of Jacques Derrida, Paul de Man, and their followers. These writers have argued that language is so inherently slippery it can never express a speaker's intended meaning. The critic's role, in their view, is to explore the contradictions, subtexts, and metaphorical byways of works that may be most radically deceptive when they appear simple. Critics have castigated this language-centered skepticism as a form of nihilism geared to multiply numbingly similar readings of already familiar texts. Mr. Goodheart's objection is more subtle. He suggests that the philosophical orientation of deconstructive critics leads them to overemphasize the tricky propositional sense of words at the expense of the broader impact of literature--its power to wound, thrill, or transform us."--Morris Dickstein, The New York Times Book Review
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zv4x4
4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from:
The Skeptic Disposition
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of
CHAPTER 1 CENTRALIZED POWER AND CHRISTIAN POLITICAL REALISM: from:
Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: Politically and socially the most momentous change in the Renaissance is the growth of centralized power. Even in countries where this growth was not very successful, as in Italy and Germany, people acted as if it were. Machiavelli’s penetrating analysis of power in action is based on what he saw of Medici control in Florence, even though the Medicis ruled only a small territory and Italy would not become a unified nation for another four centuries. Machiavelli’s realism contrasts with the cultivated neo-Platonic idealism of the Medici court, but both are direct reflections of an emerging political model that emulated
CHAPTER 2 LIBIDO DOMINANDI AND POTENTIA HUMILITATIS: from:
Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: When one thinks of medieval attempts to stage political power, the first image that comes to mind is the ranting Herod, and it is instructive to realize that Shakespeare’s few overt references to medieval drama include two allusions to this character. True, Shakespeare’s portraits of tyranny far surpass their medieval forbear in complexity and psychological subtlety, and both his allusions to Herod are derisive—one in Hamlet’s advice to the players, the other in Mistress Page’s characterization of Falstaff’s rhetoric. Nonetheless, Herod’s impressive theatricality is what both allusions register, and if Shakespeare saw the Coventry mystery plays—as he could
CHAPTER 4 DECONSTRUCTIVE COMEDY from:
Shakespeare and the Dramaturgy of Power
Abstract: Shakespeare’s response to the Tudor separation of styles is deeply ambivalent. On one hand, as his career ripened, he perfected what Marlowe had begun, producing a supple and evocative blank verse after a remarkably short time and creating a decorous stratification of style that mirrors the social standing of its speakers, with particularly brilliant effect in
Midsummer Night’s Dream. The only play Shakespeare wrote that contains no audibly distinguishable low-life characters at all isTroilus and Cressida, which is his purest expression of satire in the innovative humanist manner. Thersites rails in prose in that play, but for all his
INTRODUCTION from:
Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: COMMENTARIES and commentarial modes of thinking dominated the intellectual history of most premodern civilizations, a fact often obscured by the “great ideas” approach to the history of thought and by modern scholars’ denigration of the works of mere exegetes and annotators. Until the seventeenth century in Europe, and even later in China, India, and the Near East, thought, especially within high intellectual traditions, was primarily exegetical in character and expression. As José Faur has observed, “The most peculiar aspect of the medieval thinker is that he developed his ideas around a text and expressed them as a commentary.”¹ Even those
Chapter 2 INTEGRATION, DEVELOPMENT, AND CLOSURE OF CANONS from:
Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: Councils and kings certainly played a significant role in the establishment of Confucian canons in the Han era. As early as 136 b.c., the Emperor Wu, acting on the advice of Tung Chung-shu (c. 179—c.104 b.c.) and other Confucian scholars,
Chapter 4 COMMENTARIAL ASSUMPTIONS from:
Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: THE MOST UNIVERSAL and widely expressed commentarial assumption regarding the character of almost any canon is that it is comprehensive and all-encompassing, that it contains all significant learning and truth. As Jonathan Z. Smith has written, “Where there is a canon we can predict the necessary occurrence of a hermeneute, of an interpreter whose task it is to continually extend the domain of the closed canon over everything that is known or everything that is.”¹ This is true not only of classical or scriptural canons, such as Homer, the Christian Bible, the Torah, the Qur’ān, the Veda, and the Confucian
Chapter 5 COMMENTARIAL STRATEGIES from:
Scripture, Canon and Commentary
Abstract: LIKE THE SIX OR SEVEN basic commentarial assumptions outlined in the preceding chapter, the strategies and arguments used by exegetes to support those assumptions are common to several classical and scriptural traditions. It is, after all, reasonable that similar sets of presuppositions regarding the character of the classics or scriptures should have called forth similar arguments for establishing the truth of those conceptions. But although such common commentarial strategies as allegory, the idea of accommodation, and scholastic or modal distinctions appear
somewherein most major traditions, these traditions differ significantly among themselves in the extent to which they employ particular
Introduction from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Great books are less written than they are read. That is, designations of qualitative status (good, bad, indifferent, classic, or a waste of trees) are less simple descriptions of the facts of authorial achievement than they are evocations of the expectations and criteria of judgment the reader brings to bear upon a text. These constitute what, I shall call
appraisive fields. On occasion we may find such fields specific to a discipline or activity in which we place a book—hence we do not read a viticultural treatise as we would a pastoral idyll. Commonly, however, our expectations are abridged
CHAPTER 1 Methodology: from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Arguably, we live in an age of methodology, and if Shelley was right in stating that each deifies its greatest sins, are we, when confronted with such terms as
methodology,metatheory,methodeutic, in the presence of a trinity—aspects of the god of rationalistic excess?¹ Possibly, but we are given to worse failings, for this has also been called the age of wastepaper and rubbish. For good or ill, few modern, major intellectual figures have not been concerned with problems of method. Moreover, we are prone to delineate intellectual activities, above all else, by their methods;² and the condition of
CHAPTER 3 Political Theory and the Faith in a Tradition of Classic Texts from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: In turning to consider the established tradition of political theory, we move from the rivers of discord into the oceans of controversy. The tradition has attracted more direct attack and defense than the problems of the issue-orthodoxy or the conventional structure of political theory on their own; it is, after all, a more stable phenomenon than either, providing a means through which they may easily be discussed.¹
CHAPTER 5 Contribution and Influence from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Aristotle, we might say, contributed to Greek civilization, Burke to the ferment following the French Revolution, both to our understanding of political theory, the human condition, or the political life. In so saying we use the term ‘contribution’ in rather different senses, the first two of which are, if trite, unexceptionable insofar as they refer to tangible quantitative phenomena. The third occasion of use is interesting and dubious. For it is not entirely clear how any thinker contributes, in any significant sense of the word, to an abstraction such as the political life. It is, however, by no means uncommon
Introduction from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: So far, although incomplete, my argument has shown sufficiently the difficulties of taking the major items of the received appraisive field of political theory seriously as a means of organizing the qualitative analysis of a text and of using the accepted virtues of this field as a means of explaining classic status. “A very wholesome and comfortable doctrine” perhaps, as Fielding wrote of something quite different, “and to which we have but one objection, namely, that it is not true.” Analytical categories easily become a pattern of historical expectation (see pp. 3–4), and it is as unsatisfactory to see
CHAPTER 8 Ambiguity: from:
The Status and Appraisal of Classic Texts
Abstract: Most simply, ambiguity may be purposive or circumstantial: the result of
virtừorfortuna—a tricky distinction in practice, but my intention here is only to refine a vocabulary of classification in the process of which I hope to cast some light on the illustrative texts. Purposive ambiguity refers to a family of specific communicative devices: deliberate attempts to control audience reaction through the structure of discourse. More precisely, purposive ambiguity is that for which reference to a hypothetical intention has explanatory force. Circumstantial ambiguity amounts to a residual classification for ruptured communication, for, that is, an audience’s room to
Introduction from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Woods Gurli A.
Abstract: Despite the fact that Dinesen herself insisted
Life as Fiction: from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Gunnars Kristjana
Abstract: [s]ituated between the discourses of history and myth, fact and fiction,prose and poetry; partaking generically of forms as diverse as pastoral elegy, classical tragedy, autobiography, memoir, and travel tale; compounded of narrative, philosophical speculation, aphorism, parabolic reflection and song. . . .¹
The Poetics of the Story: from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) JØrgensen Bo Hakon
Abstract: Unfortunately translations are unable to express the special mixture of humour and irony which characterizes Claussen's work. If this were not the case he
Isak Dinesen Among the Victorians: from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Stambaugh Sara
Abstract: In 1985 I participated in the Karen Blixen/Isak Dinesen InternationalConference hosted by Poul Houe at the University of Minnesota. As I recall, of the opening speakers (not listed on the program), three, including Robert Langbaum, emphasized that reading Dinesen had shifted their perceptions and changed their way of reading. Like Malli in Dinesen's “Tempests,” I was struck, because Isak Dinesen had done the same thing tome. In this paper, therefore, I want to explain how Dinesen illustrates the reading of British Victorian literature and vice versa. In fact, my paper could perhaps be subtitled “An Apologia for a Victorian Scholar's
Methods of Narratology and Rhetoric for Analyzing Isak Dinesen’s “The Blank Page” from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Halsall Albert W.
Abstract: The principal problem posed by Dinesen's story, “The Blank Page” is one of
ethos. Put very simply, and as Dinesen quite accurately foresaw, in my view, the story's credibility or plausibility is the problem most likely to trouble readers whose ideological presuppositions do not commit them to reading it as a tract, feminist or otherwise. To prove my thesis, I will have recourse to two critical methods which should, I hope, function as symbiotic agents of analysis. Formal narratology, of the sort developed by French Structuralists like Barthes, Genette and theÉcole de Paris, enables one to describe the text's
The Silent Tale: from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Kemp Mark A.
Abstract: In his analysis of a short narrative text which ends ambiguously,Umberto Eco concludes that the story being told is actually the story of the reader’s failure in reading the story.¹ This “naive” reader’s complacent acceptance of narrative conventions and ideological assumptions deliberately inscribed in the text leads to an impasse in interpretation. Instead of the expected denouement there is an impossible, or paradoxical, outcome. Only a critical reading, such as the one performed in “
Lector in Fabula,” can overcome the frustrated conventional reading and detect the “pragmatic strategy” in the text. By self-critical I mean both the text's criticism of
Isak Dinesen’s “The Pearls:” from:
Isak Dinesen and Narrativity
Author(s) Foshay Toby
Abstract: Most writers on Isak Dinesen's fiction point to its narrative traditionalism. The precisely described historical settings, the distinct characters with their clearly determined social identities, and the classical third person omniscient narration employed by Dinesen in her tales are cited in evidence. But, as Robert Langbaum observes, this surface traditionalism is principally dedicated not to the unfolding of a conventional diachronic plot, but to the construction of a synchronic thematic structure. As he describes it:
Book Title: The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Goodheart Eugene
Abstract: Eugene Goodheart's remarkably compact and penetrating analysis examines the skeptic disposition that has informed advanced literary discourse over the past generation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvcsb
4 READING WITH/OUT A TEXT from:
The Skeptic Disposition In Contemporary Criticism
Abstract: For Roland Barthes, the pleasure of the text is in the making of one’s own text at the expense of the text of another. “Thus begins at the heart of the critical work, the dialogue of two histories and two subjectivities, the author’s and the critic’s. But this dialogue is egoistically shifted toward the present: criticism is not an homage to the truth of the past or to the truth of ‘others’—it is a construction of the intelligibility of our own time.”¹ In shamelessly confessing the egoism of the critical act, Barthes casts doubt upon the objective existence of
Book Title: History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: Twelfth-century writers assimilated and transformed a tradition of the conceptual unity of all the arts and attributed that unity to the fact that art both conceals and discloses. Recovering that tradition, especially the methods and motives of concealment, provides extraordinary insights into twelfth-century ideas about the kingdom of God, the status of women, and the nature of time itself. It also identifies a strain in European thought that had striking affinities to methods of perception familiar in Oriental religions and that proved to be antithetic to later humanist traditions in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvdgf
Chapter 3 COGNITION AND CULT from:
History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: Thus far, we have asserted that digesting history employed ways of thinking common to the arts of imagination. We have identified some characteristics of those patterns of thought in the mutual reflection of verbal and visual images, an interplay that enabled readers to construct unity in the gaps between the fragments that made up the text. In this way, we have begun to recover some invisible “transitions” like those which John Scotus Eriugena considered as providing a hidden framing structure in some parables (see Preface, n. 2). We are now in a position to examine, more precisely, the acts of
Chapter 4 FROM ONE RENAISSANCE TO ANOTHER from:
History as a Visual Art in the Twelfth-Century Renaissance
Abstract: The premise that historical writing was an instrument of cognition depended on abstract ideas about cognition. Those ideas concerned the process of coming to know, rather than particular things that were known. The difference in literary form between historical texts of the twelfth century and those of the fifteenth and later indicates a profound change, not only in style, but also, at a far deeper level, in the ways in which the conditions, possibilities, and limits of cognition were conceived. I have two tasks in this chapter. The first is to trace some lines of continuity in modes of representation
Book Title: The Life of Roman Republicanism- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): CONNOLLY JOY
Abstract: With an original combination of close reading and political theory, Joy Connolly argues that Cicero, Sallust, and Horace inspire fresh thinking about central concerns of contemporary political thought and action. These include the role of conflict in the political community, especially as it emerges from class differences; the necessity of recognition for an equal and just society; the corporeal and passionate aspects of civic experience; citizens' interdependence on one another for senses of selfhood; and the uses and dangers of self-sovereignty and fantasy. Putting classicists and political theorists in dialogue, the book also addresses a range of modern thinkers, including Kant, Hannah Arendt, Stanley Cavell, and Philip Pettit. Together, Connolly's readings construct a new civic ethos of advocacy, self-criticism, embodied awareness, imagination, and irony.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvf23
2 JUSTICE IN THE WORLD: from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: Life requires us to make judgments. John Dewey calls those choices to act that affect others “public” judgments.¹ How can we evaluate such public judgments? We are free to use the scale of bad, good, better, best—but this language seems more suited to judgments of exclusively personal interest, where benefits and disadvantages are simpler to weigh. For public matters a scale based on “just” suits better than one based on “good,” for justice connotes the distribution of good(s) across the commonwealth. I have in mind here not only judgments made in juries and the voting box but in our
4 DIVIDUAL ADVOCACY from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: Classical political thought is often understood as hostile to the disruptions, irrationalities, and banalities of quotidian experience: unity and order are taken to be its goals. In a much-quoted passage in Plato’s
Republic, musical harmony is used as a metaphor to describe the self and the city (401d–e, 432a); Aristotle praises genteel moderation and confines political theory to the variegated but contained sphere of rule; Cicero wrote his ownRepublic, which had its own memorable musical metaphor for concord (2.69). But as we saw in chapter 1, Cicero also theorizes political action as a contest, seeing the republic as
5 IMAGINATION, FINITUDE, RESPONSIBILITY, IRONY: from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: Are the resources of premodern thought adequate to modernity? George Kateb argues that to understand the scale of modern horrors we must come to grips with the human imagination—specifically, the tremendous new capacity of the imagination of one or a few people to unleash itself on the world. Leaders construct society or law afresh in their minds with an energy that Kateb calls “hyperactive”; they go on to sway their followers to make the stuff of their imaginations real. In cases when change leads to atrocity, imagination is once again responsible—this time, the stunted imaginations of the followers,
CONCLUSION from:
The Life of Roman Republicanism
Abstract: At the core of most classical and contemporary approaches to politics—including the recently fashionable Carl Schmitt and his epigones—lies the commitment to the concept of sovereignty and the tendency, dominant since the nineteenth century emergence of sociology and economics, to treat human beings primarily as rational calculators or creatures of practical reason. But it is not clear that the Romans who think constructively about politics privilege either sovereignty or reason as starting or end points—or indeed that they believe that politics can yield much to systematic analysis.
One Democratization and Decline? from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) HUNT LYNN
Abstract: Teaching and research in the humanities are shaped by various factors, not all of which are immediately evident either to the public or to humanities scholars themselves. This essay examines the role of some of those silently acting but nonetheless effective agents in remaking the world of higher education. The focus will be on the intersection of two major structural trends: the ever-progressing democratization of higher education and the less certain but nonetheless potentially momentous decline in the status of the humanities. How are these trends connected to each other? More generally, what are the likely consequences of demographic changes
Three Ignorant Armies and Nighttime Clashes: from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) OAKLEY FRANCIS
Abstract: If the title of this essay suggests the presence of a measure of confusion in the debates of the past decade and more about the state of the humanities, it is intended to do so. It is intended also to signal the fact that a residual undertow of agnosticism still tugs away uneasily even at this rather modest attempt merely to identify the principal changes over the past twenty-five years in
whatis actually being taught in the undergraduate humanities classroom and inhowit is being taught. For that is my topic. And yet, to the degree to which
Six The Practice of Reading from:
What's Happened to the Humanities?
Author(s) DONOGHUE DENIS
Abstract: It may be well to speak to a text. I have chosen
Macbethfor reasons that hardly need to be explained. I will quote two or three passages of literary criticism, directed upon a few speeches from the play, to indicate what close, patient reading of the play has been deemed to entail. But I must approach these passages by a detour, to indicate why I am citing them in an essay on current practices of reading. I confine myself toMacbethand its attendant commentaries, but I assume that similar problems of reading are encountered in the humanities generally.
CHAPTER TWO AN ETERNAL STATE OF MIND from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: If the discussion at the end of the preceding chapter gradually began to emphasize a curious hybrid of traditionally discrete discourses—the historical and the eschatological—my reasons for yoking such unlikely categories was neither the example of Benjamin’s “Theses on the Philosophy of History,” nor the desire to provide an intermediate stage between a section devoted to
The Cantos’ historical codes and one centered on the poem’s religious beliefs. Rather,The Cantosthemselves enforce the abolition of any clear dividing-line, including a larger and more various group of cosmic principles, traditional deities, and religious philosophies among its “historical characters”
CHAPTER THREE THUS WAS IT IN TIME from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: “It may suit some of my friends to go about with their noses pointing skyward, decrying the age and comparing us un-favourably to the dead men of Hellas or of Hesperian Italy. . . . But I, for one, have no intention of decreasing my enjoyment of this vale of tears by under-estimating my own generation.”² These lines, so characteristic of Pound’s exuberance at its finest, record both the energy he derived from collaborating “with the most intelligent men of the period” (
GK:217), the “lordly companions” with whom he had struggled to modernize the arts of his day, and his
CHAPTER SIX THE ARTIST WHO DOES THE NEXT JOB from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: In 1971, the same year in which Hugh Kenner’s brilliantly partisan study,
The Pound Era, appeared, one of the most distinguished contemporary English poets published an equally partisan, although far more obviously pugnacious, account of modern verse. For this occasion, an introduction to John Betjeman’sCollected Poems, Philip Larkin adopted a distinctly belligerent posture: the tough-talking, anti-American, equally contemptuous of the “culture-mongering activities of the Americans Eliot and Pound” and of the “pompous, pseudo-military operation of literary warfare”³ which has secured their reputation.
CHAPTER SEVEN A LOCAL WAR? from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: To judge a poem, even in part, by the responses it helped to provoke in subsequent texts is obviously a dangerous practice. Not only may the responses be irrelevant to the actual accomplishment of the initial work, but the discussion of these other writings is bound to be one-sided in its emphasis. Yet if one acknowledges that Pound’s argument about “the artist who does the next job” suggests a valuable, if rarely used, critical method, then my own procedure in the following two sections will appear far from arbitrary. Not only did Williams and Olson offer many of the most
CHAPTER EIGHT A DELIRIUM OF SOLUTIONS from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: “Art is local.” As a slogan, these words ring more like “an identification and a plan for action” (Invocation:2) than a critical absolute. Even though the phrase was originally attributed to the Flemish painter Maurice Vlaminck, widely repeated in the circle gathered around Alfred Stieglitz, and quoted by Williams’ friend Marsden Hartley in his 1921 memoirs,
Adventures in the Arts,¹ today these words seem uniquely associated with the aesthetics of William Carlos Williams. Like John Dewey’s article, “Americanism and Localism,” which appeared inThe Dialin June 1920 (“We are discovering that the locality is the only universal”),² Vlaminck’s assertion
CHAPTER TWELVE POLIS IS THIS from:
The Tale of the Tribe
Abstract: Structurally,
The Maximus Poemsare constituted by the interaction between two types of “records,” two narratives which, during the course of the text, are meant to unite and validate a particular (even if, as we shall see, highly problematic) ethical imperative. Because history is presented through the subjective, fragmentary responses of Olson’s own daily reactions to Gloucester—“that tradition is / at least is where I find it, / how I got to / what I say” (“Letter 11”: 48)—as well as through the objective chronicle of the town’s past, the poem contains a double plot, an impersonal “outer
Book Title: Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth- Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Damrosch Leopold
Abstract: In a controversial examination of the conceptual bases of Blake's myth, Leopold Damrosch argues that his poems contain fundamental contradictions, but that this fact docs not imply philosophical or artistic failure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvh3g
FOUR The Zoas and the Self from:
Symbol and Truth in Blake's Myth
Abstract: Blake’s myth is above all else psychological. His cosmology, theology, and even epistemology are all transpositions of the central inquiry into the self. This is no disinterested quest. Like many in his age Blake was haunted, if not obsessed, by dividedness within the self and between self and world. As Hegel said in his first published work, division or discord
(Entzweiung)“is the source of the need for philosophy.” And both Hegel and Blake were convinced that harmony must be achieved by restoring the fruitful interaction of opposites, not by abolishing them. “When the power of unification disappears from the
Book Title: I Am You-The Hermeneutics of Empathy in Western Literature, Theology and Art
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Morrison Karl F.
Abstract: The author uses diverse sources: in theology ranging from Augustine to Schleiermacher, in art from the religious art of the Christian Empire to posty2DAbstractionism, and in literature from Donne to Joyce, Pirandello, and Mann. In this work he builds on the thought of two earlier books: Tradition and Authority in the Western Church: 300-1140 (Princeton, 1969) and The Mimetic Tradition of Reform in the West (Princeton, 1982). "I Am You" goes beyond their themes to the inward act that, according to tradition, consummated the change achieved by mimesis: namely, empathetic participation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvm0c
THREE Amorous Sympathy: from:
I Am You
Abstract: To demonstrate that those principles, and the supporting strategy of proof, actually served to organize a whole picture of the world, I shall have to go further, from the sentence to the patterns of understanding that made
FIVE Implications for Social Unity: from:
I Am You
Abstract: In previous chapters, it has become evident that, whether by amorous or malevolent sympathy, the empathetic identity of “I” and “you” did not exist from the start, except potentially. The dominant patterns of understanding required what was potential to be made actual by a process of transformation that narrowed the distance of relationship until it closed. Closure came through affective bonding in which love, conflict, and hatred could combine. In the present chapter, I explore the implications of the patterns of understanding empathy by which interpreters made the sentence make sense for social unity. To illustrate the continuity of ideas
INTRODUCTION from:
I Am You
Abstract: A small clue can sometimes unfold into a great mystery. We began with a short declarative sentence, a concrete, but microscopic, artifact of Western culture. After unpacking the rather dense contents of its three monosyllables, we considered the patterns of understanding that made the sentence possible. Now, we have seen that those patterns are not the end of the trail. We have been dealing with a nest of puzzles, and only now are we able to approach its center. The patterns of understanding, including strategies of proof, are mediators of the sentence, not its source. We must go further to
SEVEN Diagramming the Hermeneutic Circle: from:
I Am You
Abstract: The “strange hermeneutics” practiced by Augustine was a massive apparatus. Its power to convince derived, in part, from its comprehensiveness—that is, from its ability to encompass, digest and absorb the most disparate elements. All agreed that the cycle of understanding consisted of a vicious circle when understanding did not go beyond rhetorical demonstration. For then it became little more than a ventriloquist’s trick, the same person interrogating the text and responding for it. But, when the cycle produced authentic understanding, it was never self-reflective, because it depended on powers, insights, or visions that did not originate in the interrogator,
CONCLUSION from:
I Am You
Abstract: The doctrines of Augustine, Gerhoch, and Schleiermacher concerning interpretation elucidate two points: first, the complex frame of reference that was thought to verify the sentence, “I am you,” and, second, the continuity of that frame of reference in a Western hermeneutic tradition. The verifying structure can be briefly summarized. Beginning with a distinction between flesh and spirit, it was deduced, ultimately, from Plato, and, in various guises, it posited an ironic tension between archetype and image, on the participation of the image in the archetype, and on the actual presence of the archetype in the image of likeness. Further, the
TEN Participatory Bonding through Painting: from:
I Am You
Abstract: John Ruskin, who invented the term, believed that the pathetic fallacy was a characteristic of modern artistic expression, but not of ancient or medieval painters.¹ However, the task of the present chapter is to indicate the importance of the performance engendered by the pathetic and affective fallacies in a great controversy of late ancient, or early medieval, culture—namely, the Iconoclastic Dispute. That conflict arose in the eighth century, in Byzantium, and, inciting great political and military strife, eventually drew into the debate scholars and princes even in distant regions of the West. I hope, in the process, to locate
ELEVEN Art as Iconoclasm: from:
I Am You
Abstract: Silence, emptiness, darkness, and immobility are aspects of the holy. They also characterize the medium of painting. They were considered “deficiencies” of painting as long as art was regarded as a rival or correlate of nature, as it was throughout the Renaissance.
CONCLUSION from:
I Am You
Abstract: As literature and theology were pervaded by historical standards of judgment from the eighteenth century onward, the possibilities of esthetic bonding were seen to narrow. This constriction occurred because human existence itself, and with it human knowledge, came to be seen as creatures of finite historical situations that could not recur. Human actions and feelings, confined to nonrecurring situations, could not teach by example; they were inimitable; they could not be reexperienced or performed by spectators.
EPILOGUE ON DISCARDED ALTARPIECES from:
I Am You
Abstract: Almost at the very beginning of this book, we considered John Donne’s verses on the delight that painters take “not in made work, but whiles they make” (Chapter 3, n. 79). All that we have said locates the bonding of the “I” and the “you” in art in the creative act, but we have also seen that the creative act may occur, not once only, but many times. It may occur, as Donne wrote, when a painting is first made. Or it may occur repeatedly, as often as viewers imaginatively reexperience the creative instant when artist and painting both were
THE CALL FROM WITH IN THE WORDS from:
I Am You
Abstract: Only a few of the contents of the words, “I am you,” have been unpacked in this essay; many, perhaps very many and splendid ones, remain to be discovered. At any rate, I have considered some of the ideas contained in those three monosyllables—the simplest of words—and I have sketched, after a fashion, ways in which those ideas formed great enterprises in literature, theology, and art. Because the sentence is a riddle or a bafflement to many, I have tried to explain how it could be understood. The major part of my task, in fact, has been to
Book Title: Neverending Stories-Toward a Critical Narratology
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Tatar Maria
Abstract: In these compelling new essays, leading critics sharpen our understanding of the narrative structures that convey meaning in fiction, taking as their point of departure the narratological positions of Dorrit Cohn, Grard Genette, and Franz Stanzel. This collection demonstrates how narratology, with its attention to the modalities of presenting consciousness, offers a point of entry for scholars investigating the socio-cultural dimensions of literary representations. Drawing from a wide range of literary texts, the essays explore the borderline between fiction and history; explain how characters are constructed by both author and reader through the narration of consciousness; show how gender shapes narrative strategies ranging from the depiction of consciousness through intertextuality to the representation of the body; address issues of contingency in narrative; and present a debate on the crucial function of person in the literary text. The contributors are Stanley Corngold, Gail Finney, Kte Hamburger, Paul Michael Ltzeler, David Mickelsen, John Neubauer, Thomas Pavel, Jens Rieckmann, Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, Judith Ryan, Franz Stanzel, Susan Suleiman, Maria Tatar, David Wellbery, and Larry Wolff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvn6q
INTRODUCTION from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Hoesterey Ingeborg
Abstract: The analysis of narrative technique in fiction has generally been considered something of a craft, practiced at times with painstaking descriptive precision and analytic power, and predominandy used in the service of interpretation. Narratology has often been mentioned in the same breath with structuralism, for both aspire to systematic comprehensiveness and attempt to identify and classify mechanisms and structures that generate, respectively, cultural and textual meaning. To be sure, “low structuralism” (as Robert Scholes was to call Genettean narratology) could not have matured in the sixties and seventies without the tradition of close textual analysis inaugurated by New Criticism.¹ Structuralist
ONE BETWEEN HISTORY AND FICTION: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Pavel Thomas
Abstract: The distinction between history and fiction is once again stirring the interest of critics.¹ The question seemed settled in premodern times, when history was assumed to narrate the particular and poetry the general. True, until the nineteenth century, history was counted among the belles lettres, but that was a matter of stylistic kinship rather than of epistemological classification. Later, the practitioners of modern historiography became confident that their trade was more scientific than literary; therefore, the attempts to find new criteria for distinguishing history from poetry were welcomed. By then, fiction, or at least some of it, had ceased to
THREE FICTIONALITY, HISTORICITY, AND TEXTUAL AUTHORITY: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Ryan Judith
Abstract: Let it be fiction, one feels, or let it be fact. The imagination will not serve under two masters simultaneously.”¹ Dorrit Cohn quotes this dictum of Virginia Woolf in her paper “Fictional
versusHistorical Lives,” in which she studies—among other things—such borderline cases as “biographies that act like novels” and one extraordinary “novel that acts like a biography.”² As far as I can see, Dorrit Cohn is quite correct to regard the latter, Wolfgang Hildesheimer’sMarbot: Eine Biographie,³ as generically unique; nonetheless, it has its predecessors, not least in Virginia Woolfs own work. Indeed, Woolf is by no
FOUR MOCKING A MOCK-BIOGRAPHY: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Rieckmann Jens
Abstract: When steven millhauser’s first novel,
Edwin Mullhouse: The Life and Death of an American Writer (1943–1954), by Jeffrey Cartwrightwas published in 1972, several reviewers remarked on its Nabokovian qualities and pointed toPale Fireas the most likely model for Millhauser’s mock-biography.¹ The very tide of Millhauser’s novel, however, seems to point to another possible model: Thomas Mann’sDoctor Faustus: The Life of the German Composer Adrian Leverkühn, as Told by a Friend.In fact, a comparison of these two fictional witness biographies leads this reader to conclude that Millhauser’s novel, in some of its themes and motives
SEVEN INTERPRETIVE STRATEGIES, INTERIOR MONOLOGUES from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Rimmon-Kenan Shlomith
Abstract: The broadest conceptual framework for this paper is my belated realization that interpretation permeates many more analytic activities than was usually believed in the heyday of structuralist narratology. Todorov’s 1966 distinction between the “sense” of an element, “its capacity to enter into correlation with other elements of the same work and with the work as a whole,” and the “interpretation” of an element, its inclusion “in a system which is not that of the work but that of the critic,”¹ seems to me now to be much more problematic than it did when it was initially proposed. It seems problematic
EIGHT CONSONANT AND DISSONANT CLOSURE IN DEATH IN VENICE AND THE DEAD from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Stanzel Franz K.
Abstract: It is, of course, the king’s nonchalant presupposition that “the end” requires no further definition that encapsulates one of the most intractable problems of narrative theory: what is a proper ending of a story, and what does it do to the reader? Since Frank Kermode’s
Sense of an Ending(1967), the study of endings in novels and short stories has steadily grown in importance;
TEN PATTERNS OF JUSTIFICATION IN YOUNG TÖRLESS from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Corngold Stanley
Abstract: I am concerned with the logic of justification informing Robert Musil’s first novel,
Young Törless(1906).¹ The novel appears to do everything in its power to ward off moral criticism. It is doubly, triply insulated against it. I shall discuss the various strategies of narrative and persuasion by which the novel achieves a certain dandylike countenance of impassiveness and superiority. I do not believe that Musil consciously set about constructing fortifications around his work in order to defend against scandal, yet it is as ifYoung Törlesshad in fact been constructed that way. Pursuing its defensive design might throw
ELEVEN CROSSING THE GENDER WALL: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Finney Gail
Abstract: While the collection
Bolt from the Blue (Blitz aus heiterm Himmel)as a whole has not received great critical attention in the West, it aroused considerable interest and controversy in East Germany.¹ Published in 1975 as the result of Edith Anderson’s call to a number of GDR writers to create tales about sexual transformation, the anthology is a far cry from socialist realism. Indeed, if socialist realism can be somewhat simplistically characterized as “boy meets tractor” literature, as I have occasionally done in teaching it, the plot of these fantastic stories might whimsically be summarized as “boy meets self as
THIRTEEN TELLING DIFFERENCES: from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Tatar Maria
Abstract: The juniper tree” has long been recognized as one of the most powerful of all fairy tales. Its widespread dissemination across the map of European folklore—one monograph identifies several hundred versions of the tale—suggests that there must be something especially attractive or at least compelling about the tale. That it remains popular today, though not necessarily as a bedtime story told by adults to children, means that it must speak to more than one age and generation. Even the brutal and bloody events enacted in the tale did not keep an expert like P. L. Travers from referring
FIFTEEN CONTINGENCY from:
Neverending Stories
Author(s) Wellbery David E.
Abstract: What sorts of issues does the concept of contingency introduce into the enterprise of literacy criticism, in its broadest sense? Is there a sense in which the objects literary critics study are characterized by an element of contingency? And, if such is the case, are they indeed “objects” that could be constituted within a rigorous theoretical program? Or is contingency one of those points where the enterprise of literary criticism touches on its limits, where it takes shape, precisely, as a reflection on the limits of its own epistemological intention? Such are the questions that the following remarks, essayistically and
1 LANGUAGE PATTERNS AND THE LINGUIST’S VIEW from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: The language world of Bal1 is one of remarkable richness and diversity in all its spoken, written, sung, and chanted manifestations. So various are the different linguistic forms employed, so complex the interweaving of vocal styles and literary genres, that both language and literature seem a tangled confusion that escapes characterization and conceals both sources and structures. Yet this linguistic proliferation is indeed like a richly woven fabric, no matter how complex the design, a discemable warp and weft underlie its form and provide essential unity.
2 LANGUAGE FROM BIRTH TO DEATH from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: Language, even though a universal human attribute, may not always possess universal significance across cultures. That is to say, different language groups may view the place of language in the world, and in human experience, in different ways Beliefs about language in turn reflect as well as shape the techniques a culture uses for processing and communicating knowledge. The Balinese manifest complex beliefs about language consistent with their elaborate material and ritual culture, m surveying these beliefs we are brought into contact with an equally ornate system of metaphysical interpretations. These interpretations have important bearing on vocal traditions, literary forms,
5 SPEAKING THE PLAY: from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: Balinese language as used in wayang parwa is a separate realm from that of Kawi, both linguistically and rhetorically It is the particular province of the four
parekan‘court retainers’, characters so wellloved by Balinese audiences, so crucial to the play, and so important as general cultural symbols that their origins and role bear careful scrutiny. The different terms used to identify this group of characters reveal various aspects of its identity and function as perceived by the Balinese
6 SHAPING, SELECTING, AND SETTING THE PLAY from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: In Chapters 4 and 5, we considered fundamental linguistic patterns, all of which are part of the play’s structure below the level of “act” or “scene” We have thus posited a typology of language forms that constrain the play
7 CULTURAL CHANGE AND NOETIC CHANGE from:
The Language of Balinese Shadow Theater
Abstract: In describing the characteristics of the discourse of Balinese shadow theater, I have drawn on diverse information bearing on language in its cultural context. “Noetic” is a term for those aspects of language form and function that indicate how culturally valued information is shaped, stored, retrieved, and communicated. In Bali, the media of the voice and the written word are shaped in unique ways to produce creations of verbal art such as the wayang.
Book Title: Fabricating History-English Writers on the French Revolution
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Friedman Barton R.
Abstract: At the same time, this work explores questions about narrative strategies, as they are shaped by, or shape, events. Narratives incorporate the ideological and metaphysical preconceptions that the authors bring with them to their writing. "This is not to argue," Professor Friedman says, "that historical narratives are only about the mind manufacturing them or, more narrowly yet, about themselves as mere linguistic constructs. They illumine both the time and place they seek to re-create and, if by indirection, the time and place of the mind thinking them into being."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvq6m
ONE Fabricating History from:
Fabricating History
Abstract: “Reasons and opinions concerning acts, are,” Blake proclaims in the
Descriptive Catalogueto his exhibition of 1809, “not history Acts themselves alone are history “Thus he announces himself a partisan of the movement against Enlightenment historiography in the then budding (and still flourishing) debate over how, or whether, the past can be plausibly represented to those living in the present Acts, Blake adds, “are neither the exclusive property of Hume, Gibbon nor Voltaire, Echaid, Rapin, Plutarch nor Herodotus” (E, p 534) Reasoning historians all, they twist cause and consequence, and in separating acts from their explanations—proposing chains of cause
TWO Through Forests of Eternal Death: from:
Fabricating History
Abstract: In 1720, thirty-seven years before the magically Swedenborgian year of Blake’s birth, Charles Daubuz distinguished history from prophecy, arguing that “an Historian sets out the matters he relates in proper Words, such as we express our Conceptions by, and therefore shews the full Extent of the Things acted”, because his Words are adequate to our Notions But a Prophecy is a Picture or Representation of the Events in Symbols, which being fetched from Objects visible to one View, or Cast of the Eye, rather represents the Events in Miniature, than full Proportion, giving us more to understand than what we
THREE Lives of Napoleon: from:
Fabricating History
Abstract: In the weakness of one kind of authority, and in the fluctuation of all, the officers of an army will remain for some time mutinous and full of faction, until some popular general, who understands the art of conciliating the soldiery, and who possesses the true spirit of command, shall draw the eyes of all men upon himself Armies will obey him on his personal account There is no other way of securing military obedience in this state of things But the moment in which that event
Book Title: Fictions in Autobiography-Studies in the Art of Self-Invention
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): EAKIN PAUL JOHN
Abstract: Investigating autobiographical writing of Mary McCarthy, Henry James, Jean-Paul Sartre, Saul Friedlander, and Maxine Hong Kingston, this book argues that autobiographical truth is not a fixed but an evolving content in a process of self-creation. Further, Paul John Eakin contends, the self at the center of all autobiography is necessarily fictive. Professor Eakin shows that the autobiographical impulse is simply a special form of reflexive consciousness: from a developmental viewpoint, the autobiographical act is a mode of self-invention always practiced first in living and only eventually, and occasionally, in writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvs6h
CHAPTER ONE Fiction in Autobiography: from:
Fictions in Autobiography
Abstract: Most readers naturally assume that all autobiographies are based on the verifiable facts of a life history, and it is this referential dimension, imperfectly understood, that has checked the development of a poetics of autobiography. Historians and social scientists attempt to isolate the factual content of autobiography from its narrative matrix, while literary critics, seeking to promote the appreciation of autobiography as an imaginative art, have been willing to treat such texts as though they were indistinguishable from novels. Autobiographers themselves, of course, are responsible for the problematical reception of their work, for they perform willy-nilly both as artists and
7 Donald Davidson: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Ludwig Kirk
Abstract: Essay son Actions and Events(Davidson 2001a, henceforth EAE) brings together seminal papers by Donald Davidson, one of the most influential philosophers in the analytic tradition in the latter half of the twentieth century, in the areas of the philosophy of action, the metaphysics of events and the philosophy of psychology. Davidson’s central contributions to philosophy are presented in EAE and its companion volumeInquiries into Trnth and Interpretation(Davidson 2001b), which deals with issues in the theory of meaning and philosophy of language.¹ The fifteen essays collected in EAE² are divided into three groups: “Intention and Action”, “Event and
11 Thomas Nagel: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Avramides Anita
Abstract: Persons are subjects of thought and action; they live in a world that science has so successfully managed to understand. As subjects, persons have a very particular perspective on the world and their actions in it: call it the subjective perspective. Persons are also capable of transcending this subjective perspective and of thinking about the world and their behaviour in a detached manner. They are capable of viewing the world not just from
here, and from the point of view of humanity, but also of viewing itfrom nowhere in particular. The View From Nowhereis a philosophical exploration of
12 David Lewis: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Bricker Phillip
Abstract: The notion of a possible world is familiar from Leibniz's philosophy, especially the idea - parodied by Voltaire in
Candide- that the world we inhabit, theactualworld, is the best of all possible worlds. But it was primarily in the latter half of the twentieth century that possible worlds became a mainstay of philosophical theorizing. In areas as diverse as philosophy of language, philosophy of science, epistemology, logic, ethics and, of course, metaphysics itself, philosophers helped themselves to possible worlds in order to provide analyses of key concepts from their respective domains. David Lewis contributed analyses in all
13 Charles Taylor: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Abbey Ruth
Abstract: Since its publication in 1989, Charles Taylor's
Sources of the Selfhas commanded much attention and generated considerable controversy. It has attracted lavish praise and fierce criticism - sometimes from the same commentator!¹ Yet when one considers its scope and ambition, it is not surprising thatSources of the Selfshould have elicited, and should continue to elicit, such a range of reactions. This chapter provides an overview of the book by outlining what Taylor was attempting to do inSources of the Self;what conception of the self it adduces; what the sources of the modern self are and
14 John McDowell: from:
Central Works of Philosophy, Volume 5
Author(s) Thornton Tim
Abstract: First, it addresses what is perhaps the central question of modern philosophy since Descartes: what is the relation between mind and world? This large and rather abstract question is raised through a number of more specific, but still central, questions in philosophy. How is it possible for thoughts to be about the
Book Title: Between Muslim and Jew-The Problem of Symbiosis under Early Islam
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): WASSERSTROM STEVEN M.
Abstract: In Part I, "Trajectories," the author explores early Jewish-Muslim interactions, studying such areas as messianism, professions, authority, and class structure and showing how they were reshaped during the first centuries of Islam. Part II, "Constructions," looks at influences of Judaism on the development of the emerging Shi'ite community. This is tied to the wider issue of how early Muslims conceptualized "the Jew." In Part III, "Intimacies," the author tackles the complex "esoteric symbiosis" between Muslim and Jewish theologies. An investigation of the milieu in which Jews and Muslims interacted sheds new light on their shared religious imaginings. Throughout, Wasserstrom expands on the work of social and political historians to include symbolic and conceptual aspects of interreligious symbiosis. This book will interest scholars of Judaism and Islam, as well as those who are attracted by the larger issues exposed by its methodology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvsxn
INTRODUCTION from:
Between Muslim and Jew
Abstract: The late Shlomo Dov (Fritz) Goitcin (1900–1985) characterized the central relationship of Jews with Muslims in the first centuries of Islam as one of “creative symbiosis.” This usage has been institutionalized in the study of Judeo-Arabica, and shows no immediate signs of being dislodged from its preeminence.¹ The concept
symbiosiswas first transposed from biology to the study of Jewish history by German Jewish intellectuals. Its most salient usage was in reference to their own cultural situation.² Alex Bein’s influential study, “Discourse on the Term ‘German-Jewish Symbiosis,’” appeared at that time, as an appendix to his essay (revealingly enough)
CHAPTER FOUR Jewish Studies and Comparative Religion in the Islamicate Renaissance from:
Between Muslim and Jew
Abstract: The thinkers of early Islam faced extraordinary intellectual challenges. They routinely confronted a bewildering array of serious opponents whose doctrines were well established and carefully defended. Among these, Jews and Shi‛is were the closest in theory and in practice to the defenders of Sunni Islam. Indeed, the very closeness of these groups presented the gravest danger to the self-understanding of the people of the Sunna of Muhammad. And intimate intellectual intercourse between these three groups persisted despite doctrinal and social obstacles. In part because Jews, Shi‛is, and Sunnis were themselves not monolithic units, individuals from among various subgroups could find
CHAPTER SIX Conclusion: from:
Between Muslim and Jew
Abstract: At the beginning of this book I surveyed scholarly opinion concerning the obscurity of the early Islamic period in the historical study of Judaism. Having now investigated several dimensions of the symbiosis between Muslim and Jew, I find it remains remarkable how few personalities emerged from this study. It is not only that the preponderance of figures studied here (necessarily) remain anonymous. The impossibility of ascertaining the social location, much less the specific identity, of many of the actors in the social drama of symbiosis should not, however, incapacitate the student of symbiosis—for the symbiosis, on my conception, constituted
Book Title: Modernist Anthropology-From Fieldwork to Text
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Manganaro Marc
Abstract: Recent insights into the nature of representation and power relations have signaled an important shift in perspective on anthropology: from a fieldwork-based "science" of culture to an interpretive activity bound to the discursive and ideological process called "text-making." This collection of essays reflects the ongoing cross-fertilization between literary criticism and anthropology. Focusing on texts written or influenced by anthropologists between 1900 and 1945, the work relates current perspectives on anthropology's discursive nature to the literary period known as "Modernism.".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvt1j
Frazer and the Elegiac: from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) VICKERY JOHN B.
Abstract: Modernist literature has a deserved reputation for being radically experimental in theme, structure, and technique. And yet the more one ponders it and its successors in the century, the more its collective voice appears to speak elegiacally, that is, in accents reflective of one of the most traditional and conventional of literary modes. Recently Peter Sacks (1985, 2) has reminded us that “the myth of the vegetation deity” is one of the elegy’s central conventions all of which may be “not only aesthetically interesting forms but also the literary versions of specific social and psychological practices.” Both the presence and
Sir James Frazer’s The Golden Bough: from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) ROTH MARTY
Abstract: Reading James Frazer’s
Golden Boughas an imaginary construction is made easier by the fact that theGolden Boughhas long been invalidated as a work of anthropology. Frazer has been made the subject of anthropological “contempt and ridicule . . . abhorrence and denunciation”—his own estimate of the only acknowledgment that a “savage forefather” is likely to get from a modern (Frazer [1922], 307). This intention is further accommodated by the opening of the work itself, which is characterized, first, by particularly “fine” writing—a sudden access ofstyle;second, by the display of a work of fine
Anthropology and Modernism in France: from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) RICHMAN MICHÈLE
Abstract: In 1937, a group of writers, intellectuals, and university professors met as a “Collège de sociologie” to discuss a common interest in what their conveners, Georges Bataille, Roger Caillois, and Michel Leiris termed a “sacred sociology.” According to the Declaration issued at the time of their initial reunions, the goals of this essentially intellectual activity were the following: (1) to investigate the nature of social structures in such a way as to complete the overly cautious conclusions of scientific investigations. Usually restricted to the so-called primitive societies, social anthropology tends to be reticent when it comes to transferring its findings
Anthropology, Literary Theory, and the Traditions of Modernism from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) LORIGGIO FRANCESCO
Abstract: In the paragraph I am thinking of, Rorty is responding to Jurgen Habermas. He is targeting the claim that the functions knowledge has in universal contexts of practical life can be analyzed only
The Historical Materialist Critique of Surrealism and Postmodernist Ethnography from:
Modernist Anthropology
Author(s) WEBSTER STEVEN
Abstract: Form has become important in some contemporary ethnographic writing. However, the social theory implicit in the writing cannot be easily distinguished from its form. History is obscured in this merger, which is itself historic. In the social sciences, the long-established distinction between aesthetic criticism and social science, although often questioned, seems to have become blurred in practice and problematic in theory since about the 1960s. In aesthetics and literary criticism, on the other hand, the apparent convergence has long been implicit in the conceptual framework of modernism. Since the 1970s the perhaps related processes in some of the social sciences
Book Title: The Writer Writing-Philosophic Acts in Literature
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Thomas Francis-Noël
Abstract: In an age of authorless, contextless, deconstructed texts, Francis-Noël Thomas argues that it is time to re-examine a fundamental but neglected concept of literature: writing is an action whose agent is an individual. Addressing both general readers and scholars, Thomas offers two cases, Bernard Shaw's
Saint Joanand Marcel Proust'sA la recherche du temps perdu, read against the background of the authors' large, eccentric, and surprisingly similar claims about their texts as acts. He examines what happens when we take these claims seriously enough to find out why the authors made them in the first place and what bearing they have on the texts themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvvd9
Foreword from:
The Writer Writing
Author(s) BOOTH WAYNE C.
Abstract: In
An Appetite for Poetry,Frank Kermode tells of seeing on the door of a laboratory at UCLA a posted quotation from theCarnets d’un biologisteof Jean Rostand:“Les théories passent. Le grenouille reste.”Kermode comments, “There is a risk that in the less severe discipline of criticism the result may turn out to be different; the theories will remain but the frog may disappear.” In redefining the study of literature, recent theorists in the traditions of structuralism and post-structuralism have offered sophisticated abstract concepts intended to replace our pre-theoretical commonplace experience of literature. Often self-consciously “scientific,” these theories
CHAPTER TWO ‘Intentions’ and ‘Purposes’ from:
The Writer Writing
Abstract: This book began with an image of the writer writing, an icon for a concept of literature based on a commonplace concept of human action. It is a concept of literature that situates agency in an individual human being. Texts, in this perspective, are the actions of individual writers. They can be understood in the same way that we understand other human actions undertaken by individuals. Writing, looked upon in this way, is one of a range of things that people do. It is better documented than many other human activities, but it is not isolated from them. On the
CHAPTER THREE ‘Parody’ or the Imitation of Disciplines from:
The Writer Writing
Abstract: The books that I hope to understand at present, Shaw’s
Saint Joanand Proust’sA la recherche du temps perdu,each present a represented author in scientific or academic costume. Before I discuss how these authors use a special technique that helps them associate their work with knowledge of the sort that might affect the way their readers act, I shall identify that technique more thoroughly.
CHAPTER FOUR Explanations from:
The Writer Writing
Abstract: To this point I have considered a kind of interpretation based on the commonplace concept of texts as their writers’ actions. At this point, I turn to the act of
CHAPTER FIVE Bernard Shaw: from:
The Writer Writing
Abstract: Today Shaw is widely admired as a dramatic genius, a brilliant wit, and the master of a plain and energetic elegance that characterizes one of the great prose styles of his generation. His plays continue to enjoy unusual success in the
Book Title: The Semantics of Desire-Changing Models of Identity from Dickens to Joyce
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Author(s): Weinstein Philip M.
Abstract: This work examines the dialectic of desire and value, as it affects the protagonist's identity, in fiction from Dickens and George Eliot through Hardy and Conrad to Lawrence and Joyce. Philip Weinstein describes the growing sexualization of the imagined body--the transformation of the protagonistic self from a figure defined by semantics, signification, and cultural value to one characterized by desire, force, and natural impulse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zvwf7
Introduction from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: This study explores the changing relation between desire and value, as they affect the protagonists’ identity, in English novels between 1850 and 1928. I examine the imaginative predilections of two mid-Victorians, two late-Victorians, and two Modernists. Each chapter seeks to identify the novelist’s characteristic stance toward desire by interrogating in detail a pair of is novels.¹ The study moves from narratives of repression and disguise in Dickens and Eliot to narratives of release and celebration in Lawrence and Joyce.
[PART ONE Introduction] from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: The chapters on Dickens and Eliot move, in their respective ways, laterally and downward. They seek to convey the imaginative geography of each writer’s world—its norms of characterization, plot sequence, and setting—as well as to identify within each world, beneath the surface, a cluster of latent confusions. I attend to Dickens and Eliot in the measure that their work reveals an internal resistance to its own premises. Indeed, one formulation of Dickens’ more capacious achievement is that his work manages (as Eliot’s does not) to assimilate—by out-maneuvering, by disguising, by blinking—its own fissures.
Two George Eliot and the Idolatries of the Superego from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: Little Dorrit, by contrast, is abreast of its own transactions; yet these remain sharply conflicted. This novel is Dickens’ most
[PART THREE Introduction] from:
The Semantics of Desire
Abstract: Late-Victorian tragic encounters: the subject stymied or annihilated by the incompatible mix of nature and culture within his own identity. In Hardy and Conrad, “become who you are” is a calamitous and unwanted pronouncement. What these protagonists want is immaculate self-fulfillment, achieved in the idiom of their culture’s prescriptions. Tess would be pure, Jude would be learned, Jim would be a hero, Nostromo would be admired. They are unfree exactly in the measure that their incarnate propensities—the fears and desires that they carry into every activity—are anathema to the models of behavior and achievement they propose for themselves:
Introduction from:
Modernist Poetics of History
Abstract: She gives when our attention is distracted
INTRODUCTION from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) DAIGLE CHRISTINE
Abstract: This collection of essays presents an inquiry into the possibility of existentialist ethics. A variety of existentialist thinkers, both theistic and atheistic, are known to have been highly critical of the philosophical and ethical traditions they inherited. Their views, as diverse as they are, all strive to offer an alternative to the overtly rational and, what they like to coin, an “inhumane” philosophical approach. Their aim is to provide a better account of what it is to be a human being in this world. This phenomenological task necessarily offers some ethical developments regarding our being-in-the-world as acting, encountering, socially living
2 A Nietzschean Solution to Ethical Relativism from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) GOLDBERG DAVID W.
Abstract: We live in an age of ethical relativism gone rampant, an age in which adjudication between moral positions has been undermined and thrown into doubt. One of the repercussions of postmodern thinking has been the dissolution of that conceptual certainty that modern philosophy and its philosophic predecessors reveled in: an envisioned certainty that enabled previous generations to condone or condemn moral positions outright and with a certitude that bordered on arrogance.¹ But as our world grows rapidly smaller, our contemporary view (especially within the United States) is one that expects divergence of moral positionings and finds it instanced in actions
3 The Politics of Authentic Existence from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) LAVIN TODD
Abstract: The main thesis of this chapter is that only in and through collective social action can
Daseinwin its own self. I do not mean to distort or cover over the fundamentalJemeinigkeit, or “mineness,” ofDasein– that is, its having its being entrusted to it, to win or lose it, to choose or abandon it to the “They,” and I affirm with Heidegger that the being that we ourselves are “is alwaysmine.”¹ Yet, to win itself, to choose itself in its being, Dasein must complement its “individuation”² with collective action. I propose that the existential project of selfhood
4 Yes, She Is an Ethicist: from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) SCHULMAN STEPHEN
Abstract: Hannah Arendt is almost always considered a political thinker, and she is often considered a phenomenologist; she is rarely considered either an existentialist or an ethicist. This is not a surprise, because in some ways Arendt does not look like either one. Unlike most ethicists, for example, she is not primarily concerned with how human beings should act. Furthermore, unlike most existentialists, she is not concerned with death or anxiety, and she focuses on the “public,” as opposed to individuals outside of their relations with others.
CONCLUSION from:
Existentialist Thinkers and Ethics
Author(s) DAIGLE CHRISTINE
Abstract: The essays in this book have all demonstrated the genuine possibility of an existentialist ethics. Moreover, they have shown that there are various ways to approach ethics from an existentialist standpoint and that these ethical endeavours present viable programs. It has thus been established that the existentialist enterprise in practical matters is neither a nihilistic dead end nor a relativistic or purely individualistic project. Every contributor to this collection has in one way or another shown that existentialist ethics implies a fundamental concern with the Other.
2 Doing Transdisciplinarity from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) McMichael Anthony J
Abstract: There are no manuals or guidebooks on the practice of transdisciplinarity. Indeed, the manifest elasticity of the term “transdisciplinarity” precludes a “how-to” analysis. In the present volume, many examples of
4 Perspectives from Natural and Environmental Scientists from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Rapport David J
Abstract: EO Wilson, in his provocative essay “Back From Chaos” (
Atlantic Monthly,March 1998) argues for a fundamental unity that underlies all forms of knowledge. Wilson prophesies that the understanding of this fundamental unity is the key that may lead humankind away from the brink of self-destruction, not only of ourselves but of the myriad life forms with which we share our celestial home. His thesis is that ongoing fragmentations of knowledge are not reflections of the real world but “artifacts of scholarship.”
5 Perspectives from Physicians and Medical Scientists from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Benatar Solomon
Abstract: Within science, major advances have been made through inter- and transdisciplinary activities. The example of the progress made within the American Unity of Science movement that emerged after World War
6 Perspectives from Public Health Scientists from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Last John
Abstract: The
Oxford English Dictionarydefines transdisciplinarity as “pertaining to more than one discipline or branch of learning” and “the ultimate degree of coordination in the education/innovation system.” My perception of transdisciplinary is of collaboration and coalition-building among two or more people or groups from different disciplines for a specific purpose; with the aim of advancing knowledge and understanding on a broad front of scholarly activitity; or to solve a particular or general problem that is pertinent to the human situation. A good example is the explosive growth of computer-based technologies and communication systems in the past ten to twenty years.
Preamble from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Rapport David J
Abstract: The colloquium program was planned with aim of moving through a structured exploration of the theory and practice of transdisciplinarity with the objective of the further development of both of these aspects of the concept. Prior to the colloquium, we summarized our primary goal as being to advance the development of integrative methodologies that could be used to produce integrated knowledge, whether at the theoretical or practical level.
7 Exploring Transdisciplinarity from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Macdonald Roderick
Abstract: One of the crucial activities in any transdisciplinary endeavor is the process of clarifying assumptions, recognizing commonalities and differences, and formulating a working agreement in order to achieve a particular goal. Our assigned goal was to generate a definition of transdisciplinarity. The working group divided its time into three phases: initial exploratory discussion, a more focused effort to create a single definition, and preparation of an oral report to the colloquium.
8 Practicing Transdisciplinarity from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Benatar Solomon
Abstract: In making this presentation, I have drawn on the written submissions of John Last, Robert McMurtry, David Rapport, Margaret Somerville, and Solomon Benatar. I shall discuss successes and failures both in medical education and in medical practice. There have been several examples of success in the application of transdisciplinarity in medical education, and some of these are becoming impressive. First, I should like to address these successes in relation to three fields.
9 Looking to the Future from:
Transdisciplinarity
Author(s) Sage Andrew
Abstract: There are many illustrations of how disciplinary fragmentation has generally resulted in bodies of knowledge that are unable to resolve a number of contemporary problems that are of large scale and large scope. As a result of this fragmentation, the “spheres” of knowledge of the typical disciplines show virtually no overlap, as represented in Figure 1. A number of problem-solvers attempt to resolve this dilemma. Generally, this is accomplished by looking for more fundamental contexts for research into, and associated practices for, problem-solving. Two potential solutions emerge. One is associated with knowledge integration such that the formerly separated disciplines are,
Book Title: Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): SAUER ELIZABETH
Abstract: Sauer investigates the texts' discursive practices and the politics of their orchestration of voice exploring the ways in which Milton's multivocal poems interrogated dominant structures of authority in the seventeenth century and constructed in their place a community of voices characterized by dissonances. She incorporates different critical responses to Milton's texts into her argument as a way of contextualizing her own historically engaged approach.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt7zwn7
3 “I now must change Those notes to Tragic”: from:
Barbarous Dissonance and Images of Voice in Milton's Epics
Abstract: The act of narrating the Genesis story is constantly frustrated; even the angelic historian finds the task daunting:“Immediate are the Acts of God, more swift / Than time or motion, but to human ears / Cannot without process of speech be told” (7.176—8). As the subject of a critical and self-conscious text, the original account of earth’s creation is fragmented;¹ and because the account competes with creation stories presented by the different characters in the poem, it is also decentred. The official historical and epic narratives are constantly intercepted by the multiple narrators in
Paradise Lost, who all create
Introduction from:
Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: Over the last few decades, the term “experience” has persistently preoccupied certain strands in cultural, subaltern, and aesthetic inquiry concerned with issues of agency, identity formation or counterhegemonic resistance. This preoccupation with experience has also sparked a series of skirmishes since the 1970s between those who debunk experience as the stuff of an antiquated philosophy of consciousness and those who, on the contrary, seek its rehabilitation by resurrecting Dilthey or Dewey. Heated and protracted exchanges on experience take place to this day in such journals as the
New Left Review, Critical Inquiry, New Literary History, and theYale Journal of,
2 The Mediacy of Experience from:
Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: In their bid to preserve agency or at least a means of resistance against strong structural determination, strands in cultural and subaltern theory, then, have wagered on the perceived counterhegemonic immediacy of experience. As to why such a venture should find immediate experience so seductive, poststructuralist critiques of presence in general and of immediate experience in particular tell us little that has not already been told by Adorno, if not by Hegel: “In schools of philosophy that make emphatic use of the concept of experience, in the tradition of Hume, the character of immediacy – immediacy in relation to the
4 Experience and the Retrospective Glance to the Past from:
Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: The experiential process may well appear future-oriented insofar as it remains recalcitrant to seamless integration within prior expectations and insofar as it perturbs routinized perceptions, actions, and attitudes. Yet it also involves the
retrospective revision, and not the outright dismissal, of the earlier orientations it disrupts. Experience harbours two temporal maneuvers: an initial disruption of the given is followed by a retrospective revision of the past so as to accommodate the new and reestablish continuity. At hand in dialectical experience is what can be called – what has in fact already been called by Kristeva, Heidegger, Luhmann, and others –
6 Reassessing Experience from:
Subaltern Appeal to Experience
Abstract: At hand in the temporality of the last two to three decades is not, as Ricoeur would have it, the exacerbation of temporal divergence beyond the mediating capacities of narratives;¹ at hand instead is the contraction of temporality within the narrow horizons of an extended present where a culture of immediacy, not temporal extension, becomes the order of the day. It is just this apparent culture of immediacy that brings us back to our initial problem – the Thompson-inspired subaltern appeal to
immediateexperience.
Book Title: In Search of Elegance-Towards an Architecture of Satisfaction
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Beauprè-Lincourt Louise
Abstract: Michel Lincourt calls for a dignified architecture, centred around the concept of elegance, that will provide satisfaction to both its users and the surrounding society. Elegance, defined as the symbiosis of excellence and magnificence, is the ultimate attribute of any creative endeavour and achieving it is the architect's prime motivation. Using this concept, Lincourt develops a set of archetypes for designing a more satisfactory architecture and provides an in-depth analysis of three examples of architectural elegance: the Palais-Royal and the Fondation Rothchild Workers' Residence in Paris and the Municipality of Outremont in Montreal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8002k
1 INTRODUCTION: from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: The architect’s sine qua non undertaking is the architectural design practice, a multifaceted professional activity that seeks to meet people's habitation needs by supplying architectural products. Simply
2 A THEORY BASED ON PHENOMENOLOGY from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: In architecture, as in other problem-solving procedures, analysis always starts with observation. The architect observes the world and scrutinizes his own design activities within it. It does not take long for him to realize that the prime problem of architecture is how to fulfil a client’s needs properly. Every contract he obtains, every mandate he assumes, every proposal he makes, every design he creates, is an attempt to meet one or several of such human habitation needs. As a rule, the architect strives to solve the prescribed problem to the best of his ability.
3 UNVEILING ARCHITECTURE from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: The journey towards an enlarged awareness of the architectural phenomenon necessitates the conducting of two successive epochès. The first suspends all existing theoretical knowledge in order to uncover the architectural phenomenon as it presents itself to our consciousness. The second probes the architectural phenomenon through the removal of the successive veils that drape its factual reality, uncovering its eidos.
4 VALUES AND DESIGN CRITERIA from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Architectural design entails the conscious enactment of a comprehensive decision-making endeavour, which necessitates, on the part of the architect, a never-ending sequence of value judgements. In all cases, the formulation of judgements requires the explicit use of criteria. In this context, a criterion may be understood as a standard by which a thing is assessed. Whether explicitly expressed or not, the validity of the criteria depends upon how well they conform to corresponding human values, which, in turn, underpin judgements. A list of value-based criteria for evaluating places that have already been built and assessing the design of new buildings
8 REVEILING ARCHITECTURE from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: The preceding epochès and constitution were attempts to grasp the essence of architecture. Using three examples, we explored the symbiotic idea of high quality and great beauty as the necessary conditions for producing an architecture of satisfaction. But our inquiry is not yet finished. We have not taken the final step of the epochès. This step might involve a fuller formulation of the essence of architecture and lead to a respectful, successful design. And we have developed only one constitution; more are required.
9 ARCHETYPES OF ELEGANCE from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Artefacts that result from a design process buttressed by archetypes are simultaneously universal
10 CONCLUSION: from:
In Search of Elegance
Abstract: Harnessing the phenomenological method of inquiry, the theory undertakes to answer the first question by defining the architectural artefact: it is a physical object, time and
Foreword: from:
Living Prism
Author(s) KRYSINSKI WLADIMIR
Abstract: If the didactic and scholarly practice of comparative literature places Canada today among a few avant-garde countries in which this discipline gave rise to
7 Diachrony and Structure: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: There can be no doubt that literary history is and has been for several decades under a scrutiny so severe that only a thorough theoretical and epistemological re-examination can restore it to its place in literary scholarship, provided also that a renewed practice follows upon this re-examination. That the demand for it stems from the various “intrinsic” approaches to the study of literature is a well-known fact: Russian Formalism, the Prague Circle, New Criticism,
Nouvelle critique, as well as the structuralist and semiotic approaches have all tended to lead the literary scholar towards a close reading and analysis of the
8 From “Time Lost” to “Time Regained” in Literary History from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The Proustian origin of this title requires no explanation. It expresses a set of creative tensions: the time that is lost is that of life lived and spent in the instant – raw, yet infinitely rich and complex material for retrieval in memory. To live is forever to transform experience into memory; and even this statement oversimplifies, inasmuch as memory re-enters experience and adds to the given that is to be transformed. Proust’s characters reawaken, through reminiscence nourished by insistent sensorial signals, time, or life, that is past:
10 Comparative Literary History among the Human Sciences from:
Living Prism
Abstract: As is well known, in recent decades literary studies, and more particularly comparative literary studies, have undergone a process of reexamination, for reasons of their own as well as for reasons linked to the challenge of other disciplines, those designated today “the human sciences.” My title implies, in hope at least, a change of emphasis: the impact of such disciplines as linguistics, psychoanalysis, sociology, and cultural anthropology has often been perceived as potentially aggressive, and harmful, with respect to the specificity of literary studies. But literary studies have emerged from this test not only without loss of specificity but having
11 Comparative Literary History as Dialogue among Nations from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Along with other human sciences, literary studies have been undergoing a phase of intense self–legitimation and self-justification. According to Linda Hutcheon this is part of a postmodern situation in which no values are embodied a
prioriin any set of texts or in the study of any set of texts, and literary studies are, therefore, in a situation resembling exactly those of all other methodological and theoretical forms of discourse, trying to find their legitimacy in themselves. If that is so, literary scholars have reason to rejoice in the self-examination and autocriticism that is required of them, the need
12 History and the Power of Metaphor from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Literary theory has been functioning as the legitimating and validating mental activity alongside our discourse, the keystone, as it were, of reflection upon literary studies; but it can justify itself in this role only as long as it does not lose sight of its own historicity. The moment it begins to construct a monument in which to enshrine its own
13 Comparative Literary History in the Era of Difference from:
Living Prism
Abstract: How compatible is the intellectual project of a comparative literary history with a postmodern culture? My title signals a potential contradiction from which comparative literary history may, or may not, emerge as still a creative and stimulating area within literary studies and the humanities at large. The contradiction arises if, embracing difference not only as a
fait accomplibut as a value sustaining of cultural identities, we set up the comparative viewpoint and activity as, somehow, its philosophical opposite, because of its inevitably universalizing frame of mind (or perhaps merely its universalizing image). In a well-known article on the emergence
14 Distant Voices: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: How does the postmodern literary historian make contact with the premodern world? Much present-day theorization regarding literary history (and quite relevant to history in general) begins with that question. I use the expression postmodern not as a philosophical or aesthetic label but by way of recognizing that we live in postmodernity, remembering that the status of this concept is itself problematic in that it resists being regarded as a period comparable to previous ones, sees itself more as a set of conditions of variable temporal dimensions, weakening and dissolving the very fabric of comfortable generalization. Thus, more than ever before,
15 History and the Absent Self from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Despite the fact that collective identities (whether in terms of gender or culture or ethnicity) claim to exist, and to have the right to exist for the sake of the development of the individual self, that claim is often little more than window-dressing. Yet what can one hope to accomplish by showing that the subject of the subject has received insufficient attention or the wrong kind of attention? Even if it were only clarification, it would be time well spent. But humanists have more at stake in this questioning than just clear categories because it matters supremely – without any play
16 The Emergence of the Paradoxical Self from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Few actions, few pronouncements are as symbolical of their age as Luther’s, confronting the Diet of Worms. In attempting to understand – perhaps merely in concrete and individual terms at the outset – the situation of the early modern self, it is helpful to reflect upon the mental and emotional tension experienced by Luther as he faced that august, severe assembly and uttered his famous words of resistance. Often, one reads abridged versions of his statement. Let us consider it in its entirety:
19 In Search of the Obverse Side of Petrarchism from:
Living Prism
Abstract: The search I wish to describe is not directed, as the title might suggest, towards the anti-Petrarchan tradition, which has been a rich source of obverse images of the idealized Other – usually woman – so characteristic of Petrarchism itself. Where Petrarch and his followers idealize and even worship, anti-Petrarchism levels, satirizes, and ridicules. Where Petrarch and his followers create a myth, anti-Petrarchism demythologizes and demystifies. It is a trend that its idealistic counterpart almost seems to demand, and their duality seems omnipresent in European literature as part of the even more basic duality between idealistic and realistic traditions from classical times
20 Imagining the Renaissance Child from:
Living Prism
Abstract: To this vast subject I shall not attempt to bring answers but merely to raise questions and to devise, only programmatically, a conceptual framework. Many of the recent findings of social history contradict certain admittedly naïve expectations regarding the accomplishments of the Renaissance. Simplistically one might say that there has been a gap between theoretical visions of the Renaissance and its practices. I suspect there is much more to be said, and that pursuing the discrepancies is a necessary part of rewriting and rereading the Renaissance so as to uproot, destabilize, complexify our images of Renaissance children both in concept
22 Northrop Frye and the Historicity of Literature from:
Living Prism
Abstract: Pondering the legacy of Northrop Frye necessarily leads to recognizing its scope, which goes far beyond the study of the literary system alone; this in turn entails recognizing the philosophical status of his thought. In
Anatomy of Criticism, once he established the specificity of the critical activity among intellectual disciplines, Frye showed little interest in the labels others would apply to his sphere of activity: critic or historian or theorist or philosopher. In practice, however, he always dealt, explicitly or by implication, with the whole universe of human culture, emphasizing the role of works of imagination within it. The philosophical
24 Liberating Children’s Imagination from:
Living Prism
Abstract: It is now a commonly accepted fact that the development of feminist readings, by dint of providing different appropriations of literary texts than those that have long been taken for granted, have had a strong impact upon the theory of literature in general, since it became apparent that if reception and interpretation will vary with the
27 Victor Segalen and China: from:
Living Prism
Abstract: There is a type of topic that today is no longer considered truly to pertain to the discipline of comparative literature: the kind that probes the overall impact of a foreign country and its literature upon a given author. In this case, if I were to write about the “influence” of China upon the early twentieth-century French poet Victor Segalen, or the image of China in his poetry, I would simply be contributing to the history of French literature the study of the poetic transformations of Segalen’s experiences of Chinese culture and travel in China. In other words, there would
1 (Un)framing Genres from:
From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: In choosing to work with the lyric, the long poem, and the novel, I have invoked three of the most established – but also the vaguest – terms in literary criticism. The formal innovation that critics identify as a key aspect of the lyric also characterizes the long poem and the novel. Paul Ricoeur remarks that the novel “has, since its creation, presented itself as the protean genre par excellence ... Indeed, it has constituted for at least three centuries now a prodigious workshop for experiments in the domains of composition.”² My aim here is not to wrestle these shape-shifting genres into
5 Daphne Marlatt: from:
From Cohen to Carson
Abstract: In the ongoing cinerama of Marlatt’s poetry and prose, her first book, the long poem
Frames of a Story(1968), establishes a narrative framework that reappears in her novellaZócalo(1977) and her novelAna Historic(1988). These works perform variations on the heterosexual quest narrative that Marlatt finds in the source text forFrames of a Story,Hans Christian Andersen’sThe Snow Queen(1884). Taken together, the erotic plots ofFrames of a Story, Zócalo,andAna Historicmap a lesbian quest narrative, departing from a scene of heterosexual dissatisfaction and moving towards one of lesbian fulfillment. Although not
Introduction: from:
Distant Relation
Abstract: Writing, the exigency of writing: no longer the writing that has always ... been in the service of the speech or thought that is called idealist (that is to say, moralizing), but rather the writing that through its own slowly liberated force (the aleatory force of absence) seems to devote itself solely to itself as something that remains without identity, and little by little brings forth possibilities that are entirely other: an anonymous, distracted, deferred, and dispersed way of being in relation, by which everything is brought
Section 3 Return to Opacity from:
Distant Relation
Abstract: Carpentier discovers that writing, in fact, distills the authorial voice through the duplication and multiplication of voices opened by the repetition of texts that have preceded the author’s own. In this way, no text (indeed, no system of signification) can purport to be the one unique text, the text that could, through its own unity, lead us towards a unified totality. The notion of a unified literary tradition in which a singular voice could take on the value of the whole is therefore constantly dissolved in the multiplicity of voices that tradition is constituted by. What this finally discloses is
Section 5 Postponement: from:
Distant Relation
Abstract: It is a common conception, held generally by adults but also by some adolescents, that as we grow through our early years, we exhibit certain characteristics that somehow define us as children. This conception serves the impression that our growth brings us into contact with our elders because we learn to leave behind our childish ways and, for better or worse, become like our parents and teachers. But in reality we do not traverse the distance that separates us from these people. In reality, that distance is infinite. When, immersed in a self-reflective moment, we turn towards our youth and
Book Title: Patriotic Elaborations-Essays in Practical Philosophy
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BLATTBERG CHARLES
Abstract: Blattberg's is a genuinely original philosophical voice. The essays collected here discuss how to re-conceive the political spectrum, where "deliberative deomocrats" go wrong, why human rights language is tragically counterproductive, how nationalism is not really secular, how many nations should share a single state, a new approach to the Arab-Israeli conflict, and why Canada might have something to teach about the "war on terror." We also learn about the right way to deny a role to principles in ethics, how to distinguish between the good and the beautiful, the way humor works, the rabbinic nature of modernism, the difference between good, bad, great, and evil, why Plato's dialogues are not really dialogues, and why most philosophers are actually artists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt8054j
2 Patriotic, Not Deliberative, Democracy from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Both those who defend what I call a patriotic politics and those in favour of a deliberative conception of democracy call on us to try to respond to conflict with conversation rather than just negotiation or bargaining.² And since conversation aims for reconciliation, for realizing the common good, while the compromises of negotiation take us no further than accommodation, both patriots and deliberative democrats can claim an inheritance from the classical republican tradition.³ To classical republicans, negotiation is the mark of a corrupt polity dominated by factions, this being how they would conceive of the politics advocated by contemporary pluralist
9 What’s Wrong with Hypergoods from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Charles Taylor fails to distinguish enough between art and ethics. Whereas Kant sharply separates the two domains and Hegel brings them close together, subordinating both to his concept of unified philosophical knowledge,¹ Taylor treads an ambiguous path between their positions. Like them, he recognizes that creativity is a unique capacity, that “aesthetic excellence doesn’t just amount to spiritual or moral depth.”² Yet Kant would not be able to accept Taylor’s conception of interpretation as an activity central not only to art criticism but also to ethics, and Hegel would balk at Taylor’s implication that philosophy cannot be said to encompass
10 On the Minimal Global Ethic from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: Where do values come from? I’m tempted to say “the stork” and leave it at that, but perhaps a wiser tack would be to narrow the question somewhat and ask about the origins of those values or goods expressed by what I want to call the “minimal global ethic.” The ethic consists of a set of prohibitions, present in all of the world’s cultures, that speak against such utterly base acts as murder, torture, slavery, and other forms of gross cruelty. Those philosophers who have recognized the ethic have been careful to emphasize its minimalism, which is to say that
11 Good, Bad, Great, Evil from:
Patriotic Elaborations
Abstract: There is a diversity of goods in the world: the various kinds of liberty (political, national, and individual), equality, welfare, happiness, friendship, beauty, family, pleasure, and so on. We come to adopt these goods as we grow up, forming and reforming the unique wholes that constitute our identities. These we realize throughout our lives as we participate in practices, which are but the expression of our goods. More often than not, we carry those practices out prereflectively, habitually, expressing goods that are so closely integrated and harmonious with each other that we are barely aware that they are there. But
7 Alternatives of Voice: from:
Istvan Anhalt
Author(s) BENJAMIN WILLIAM E.
Abstract: Over the past half-century, Istvan Anhalt has produced a body of work as technically refined, as rich in meaning, and as fully engaged with musicality as any other from this period. There are reasons why it does not enjoy the wide recognition accorded other oeuvres, of which many have less potential to reward the discerning listener. The professional cost of reaching full production only after the age of fifty can be cited – if easily explained by way of thirty-five years of unstinting devotion to teaching – as can the fractured state of musical politics (like all politics) in Canada,
15 Three Songs of Love from:
Istvan Anhalt
Abstract: The terrain of these pieces is that of private lives in which fundamental intimate relationships take shape and are enacted. These appear to be universal and
Nihilism: from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Vattimo Gianni
Abstract: The chance of Nietzsche’s philosophy amounting to an
Überwindung der Metaphysik, an overcoming of Platonism, or an overcoming of thebisherige Menschand the subjection to morals, religion, and ideology, depends on the distinction between reactive (or passive) and active nihilism—a distinction that is neither clear-cut nor univocal in the notes of the late Nietzsche. As you know, Nietzsche calls himself the first accomplished nihilist (“der erste vollkommene Nihilist Europas”), precisely because he has pushed nihilism to its extreme consequences and therefore “ihn hinter sich, unter sich, auβer sich hat”, has left it behind, below, and outside (Schlechta 1954,
Minoritarian Deconstruction of the Rhetoric of Nihilism from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: Nietzsche’s influence upon deconstruction has been well-documented.¹ Yet, what has been left relatively unexamined, is the fact that his impact has often been responsible for the internal differentiation of the deconstructive paradigm into discordant theories and practices. We know of course that between the dominant, Derrida-inspired deconstruction and the “minoritarian deconstruction,”² led by G. Deleuze, F. Guattari, F. Laruelle, T. Negri and N. Bolz, there exist antagonistic and mutually displacing tendencies. But not much attention has been paid to the fact that these tendencies, at least in part, are motivated by different inscriptions of the “Nietzsche-effect” upon deconstructive palimpsests. Based
With the “Nightwatchman of Greek Philosophy”: from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Hutter Horst
Abstract: In the immense secondary literature on Nietzsche relatively little attention seems to have been paid to the influence of kynic motives and ideas on both the form and substance of his philosophy. This is the case despite the fact that Nietzsche explicitly associated himself with Kynism¹ in a number of aphorisms,² while at the same time adopting the literary style,³ the manner of philosophizing, as well as important concepts and figures⁴ of this school of antiquity. A close examination of the main philosophical project of Nietzsche, the transvaluation of values, moreover, reveals his kinship with the intention of Kynism to
“Nihilism: from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Brown Richard S.G.
Abstract: In
Thus Spoke Zarathustra, Nietzsche makes the rather categorical claim: “… the awakened and knowing say: body am I entirely, and nothing else; and soul is only a word for something about the body” (part one, 4). In a work which is replete with exaggeration couched in poetic, figurative, and metaphoric language, one fact might easily be overlooked. Nietzsche is making this claim literally and takes this claim very seriously: “Body am I entirely.” Within the context ofZarathustra, a book which is addressed to “all or no one,” Nietzsche attempts to persuade those few who are capable of actualizing
Nihilism and Technology from:
Nietzsche and the Rhetoric of Nihilism
Author(s) Cooper Barry
Abstract: George Grant, the only political philosopher this country has produced, once remarked that, during the century since Nietzsche wrote, “his opinions filtered down unrecognized through lesser minds to become the popular platitudes of the age, but also what he prophesied is now all around us to be easily seen” (Grant 1969, 25). The current level of vulgarization of Nietzsche’s thought is not perhaps as easily seen as what is all around us. What is all around us, in turn, is not so easy to characterize as to see. Heidegger considered Nietzsche’s the “final thought of Western metaphysics” (Heidegger 1984, 2:232).
Limited Government versus the State: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Nutbrown Richard
Abstract: “Politics,” Michael Oakeshott has argued, “is the activity of attending to the general arrangements of a set of people whom chance or choice have brought together” (1967:112). In light of the extraordinary political changes taking place in Eastern Europe and elsewhere, this view of politics seems rather staid and unspirited. But Oakeshott’s point is worth repeating: as a learning process deeply rooted in the particular historical circumstances of a people, ordinary politics is a matter of intimations. It is the activity of translating and inscribing the allusive fluctuations of everyday collective existence into familiar and routine terms of reference. Politics,
From the Constitution Act, 1982 to the Meech Lake Accord, 1987: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Behiels Michael D.
Abstract: The partisan and passionate debate surrounding the Meech Lake Accord of 1987 was due, in large measure, to the fact that it was dominated, in the words of Alan Cairns, by “special interest advocacy that is sustained by the driving ambitions of governments and by private interests with stakes in the constitution” (Cairns, 1989:32). The very structure of our Constitution ensures a conflict between competing vested interests. The amending formula, which is controlled exclusively by the first ministers, pits governments and their legislatures against one another. The
Canadian Charter of Rights and Freedoms,which provides protection for specific groups of citizens as
The Comparative Study of Clientelism and the Realities of Patronage in Modern Societies: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Roniger Luis
Abstract: The study of patronage and clientelism — which has burgeoned in the social sciences since the late 1960s — can be considered part of a broader reaction against evolutionary assumptions about the presumed generalized move of modern society towards Western liberal forms of political development and bureaucratic-universalism. From different vantage points, these assumptions were seriously questioned by the research of scholars who analyzed the actual operation of modern institutions. Thus, over and above their concrete contribution, works by Khayyam Paltiel on the financing of modern parties and studies on political machines by J. Scott, René Lemarchand and Keith Legg — among others —have
A Political Economy Approach to Interest Representation from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Jenson Jane
Abstract: Thinking about modes of interest representation has undergone several permutations in recent years, as major alterations in post-war electoral coalitions mark the emergence of new political actors, partisan strategies, and forms of state/society and global relations. The diversity of literatures analyzing neo-corporatism, new social movements, New Left and post-modern politics indicates that the theoretical perspectives on liberal democracy which dominated political science and sociology after 1945 required reconceptualization. Moreover, since the political events provoking new theory occurred in conjunction with a profound crisis and restructuring of economic relations, even political economy approaches began to reassess representation.
New Social Movements and Unequal Representation: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Phillips Susan D.
Abstract: As a scholar of Canadian politics, Khayyam Z. Paltiel was concerned with the appropriate and equitable representation of interests in the policy process. In particular, he addressed the issue of whether interest groups have displaced political parties as the fundamental agents of representation and democratic legitimation in the Canadian political system and he examined the impact of special interest groups on the Canadian state (1989, 1982). Because interest groups of all kinds have proliferated since the 1960s, they now are often in vigorous competition with each other, as well as with political parties, in the policy-making process. However, interest groups
Sustainable Development and the Challenges Facing Canadian Environmental Groups in the 1990s from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Conway Thomas
Abstract: The existence of an increased level of environmental consciousness, of the kind experienced in the 1980s, will create new opportunities for change. However, this situation in itself does not prefigure what the outcomes of that change will look like. Relations with our environment will not be set once and for all or encapsulated in one big “action plan,” but will arise out of much trial and error, changed individual behaviour, political dispute and compromise, and diverse policy initiatives developed over time and unique to specific circumstances.
Les associations patronales comme groupes de pression dans la révolution tranquille from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Sarra-Bournet Micheal
Abstract: Lors d’un colloque sur les groupes de pression tenu en 1981, le Professeur Paltiel avait entretenu les participants du rôle de l’État dans l’émergence de nouveaux groupes d’intérêts publics dans les années 1960, et de l’effet de l’arrivée de ces nouveaux groupes sur l’action des plus anciens (Paltiel, 1982). C’est ce qui a inspiré le sujet abordé dans ce chapitre.
Devenir “maîtres chez nous”: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Paltiel Khayyam Zev
Abstract: Les années 1980 ont été marquées au Québec par l’explosion des activités entrepreneuriales d’une nouvelle classe des affaires jeune, innovatrice et dynamique. L’augmentation fulgurante des inscriptions aux écoles de commerce du Québec — les séminaires des années 1980 — la hausse des investissements et la vigoureuse reprise de la Bourse de Montréal après une incartade vers le gouffre de l’oubli témoignent de pépanouissement de ce que K.Z. Paltiel appelle la bourgeoisie balzacienne, ou la bourgeoisie des affaires (Paltiel, 1985-86). Ce phénomène annonce d’ailleurs une réorientation plus profonde encore du milieu socio-culturel du Québec. Comme le note Graham Fraser: “[À partir de 1983]
Reflections on Political Marketing and Party “Decline” in Canada . . . or, A Funny Thing Happened on the Way to the 1988 Election from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Tanguay A. Brian
Abstract: Are Canada’s political parties in “decline” ? Do they matter less to voters and citizens now than they did during that mythical golden age of Macdonald, Laurier, Mackenzie King, and St. Laurent? Are they less successful now than they once were in mobilizing voters, structuring political choices, or generating policy ideas? These are the sorts of questions that Khayyam Paltiel addressed in one of his last published works (Paltiel, 1989), a wide-ranging survey of the impact of changing political technologies (polling, consulting, direct mail, and so on) on the health of party organizations in both Canada and the United States.
Selective Annotated Bibliography: from:
Democracy with Justice/La juste democratie
Author(s) Haire Jeff Allan
Abstract: From a very early time in his academic career Paltiel was concerned with the inequalities that party and campaign financing introduced into the Canadian political system. Paltiel was critical of the ever-growing distance between the supposed democratic principles of the system and the vast differences in group power and influence that characterized the environment in which party and campaign financing operated. This article is typical not
Introduction from:
Mind in Creation
Author(s) KNEALE J. DOUGLAS
Abstract: It is a moment characteristic of Wordsworth, a multiplying of interrogatives whose rhetorical structure both
Introduction from:
The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: A comparative study of Wallace Stevens and T.S. Eliot might be seen as an unpromising enterprise since one of the most notable things about the relationship between them is that it was virtually non-existent. When William Van O’Connor claimed in
The Shaping Spiritthat Stevens knew Eliot “only slightly and principally through correspondence,” Stevens took the trouble to write to him: “As a matter of fact, I don’t know him at all and have had no correspondence whatever with him ... All I knew about him in the days ofOtherswas the correspondence between him and the people who
5 Eliot, Stevens, and “Pale Ramon” Fernandez from:
The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: Like Eliot, Stevens flirted with Humanism as a response to the modern dilemma, and like him he found it wanting. As we have seen, poems like “Sunday Morning,” “Le Monocle de Mon Oncle,” and “The Comedian as the Letter C” express a disbelief characteristic of Humanism. The nearest thing to an admission that he was once attracted to Humanism is Stevens’ remark on his disaffection with Arnold in the letter of June 1953 to Barbara Church, cited above. Referring to Arnold’s Humanism, he remarked: “Anyhow, it may be that I don’t belong to that church anymore, or that I don’t
6 The Function of Poetry: from:
The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: A middle position between orthodox religious belief and the secular Humanism that Russell preached can be found in the now largely forgotten “pure poetry” movement, which had its brief
floruitat about the same time that Marianne Moore’sSelected Poemsand Stevens’Ideas of Orderwere published. Because it has had little influence on the practice or the reception of poetry in English, it has not attracted much attention in English and American literary studies. Nonetheless, Stevens scholars have taken due notice of Stevens’ declaration on the dust jacket for the second edition ofIdeas of Order(Knopf 1936) that it
Conclusion from:
The Modern Dilemma
Abstract: I was initially prompted to undertake this comparative study of Wallace Stevens and T.S. Eliot by the fact that two men of such similar background, and of comparable achievement in the field of letters, had avoided any sort of relationship, and even much comment on the work and accomplishments of one another. Given the considerable fame of both men, the avoidance had to be deliberate, and if deliberate, it must have had a discoverable motivation.
Alberti at Sea from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Emerson Michael
Abstract: The sea is traditionally the site for a wide range of practical, theoretical, and ethical investigations concerning motion and constructive spatial practices. The manner of their collation, like the sea itself, is not fixed and responds to time and place. Three nautical terms – water, navigation, ship – are the shifting objects of this essay’s investigation of spatial practice and fluidity in the early Renaissance works of Leon Battista Alberti (1404–72). This investigation poses the following questions: what sort of place was Alberti’s sea? what traditions informed his aquatic investigations? and what were the difficulties of constructive, spatial engagement
On the Renaissance Studioli Federico da Montefeltro and the Architecture of Memory from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Kirkbride Robert
Abstract: The
studioliof the ducal Palaces of Urbino and Gubbio offer elegant demonstrations of architecture’s capacity, as a discipline and medium, to transact between the mental and physical realms of human experience. Constructed in the late fifteenth century for the renowned military captain Federico da Montefeltro, Duke of Urbino, thestudiolimay be described as treasuries of emblems, since they contain not things but images of things. Over the past five centuries these chambers have themselves become emblems for the intellectual milieu at the Court of Urbino, crystallizing a unique humanism that bridged the mathematical and verbal arts, as well
Architecture, Mysticism, and Myth: from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Merwood Joanna
Abstract: For many years in the early part of this century, William Richard Lethaby, a respected teacher and architectural writer acknowledged as an authority on modern design, maintained a correspondence with Harry Hardy Peach, the owner of a Leicester basketware factory. In these letters the two men discussed the weather, the war, Lethaby’s “town-tidying” campaign, architectural competitions, recent publications about design, and, most of all, the shocking state of art in modern England. On a particular morning in February 1923, Lethaby sat down at his desk to answer a letter from Peach. He particularly wanted to comment on something his friend
Simplex sigillum veri: from:
Chora 4
Author(s) Theodore David
Abstract: (
Tractatus§5.47321:
Book Title: Tropes and Territories-Short Fiction, Postcolonial Readings, Canadian Writings in Context
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): NEW W.H.
Abstract: Tropes and Territories demonstrates how current debates in postcolonial criticism bear on the reading, writing, and status of short fiction. These debates, which hinge on competing definitions of "trope" (motif vs rhetorical turn) and "territory" (political or aesthetic), lead to studies of space, place, influence, and writing and reading practices across cultural divides. The essays also explore the character of diasporic writing, the cultural significance of oral tale-telling, and interconnections between socio/political issues and strategies of style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80b6h
Introduction,Troping the Territory from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) NEW W. H.
Abstract: This collection of essays looks at the narrative and discursive paradigms of short stories, tales, and short fictions that have been written in postcolonial societies, where the genre of short fiction has enjoyed an atypically forceful canonical role. The book brings together the work of over twenty scholars from Europe, North America, and the South Pacific so as to investigate the practices of production and reception in post-imperial spaces, and to theorize on the relations between genre and space when both are perceived as peripheral. The hybrid forms of Canadian, Australian, and New Zealand writing, for example, demonstrate among other
Between Fractals and Rainbows: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) MOSS LAURA
Abstract: I began my presentation at the “Tropes and Territories” short story conference with the admission that I had written two papers. The first was the one I said I would write – comparing portraits of the everyday in stories by Rohinton Mistry and Eden Robinson. The second – the one I actually presented – came out of my own discomfort with the first. When I read my initial paper, I felt as if I had read it before. I recognized the
pro formanature of my original argument. The more I worked through my ideas about critical expectation, the more I found that
“Crossroads of Circumstance”: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BENNETT BRUCE
Abstract: It is by the nature of itself that fiction is all bound up in the local. The internal reason for that is surely that
feelingsare bound up in place. The human mind is a mass of associations – associations more poetic even than actual. I say, “The Yorkshire Moors” and you will say, “Wuthering Heights‚” and I have only to murmur, “If Father were only alive” – for you to come back with “We could go to Moscow,” which is
La Dame Seule Meets the Angel of History: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) KEEFER JANICE KULYK
Abstract: In one of Mavis Gallant’s early stories, “Virus X,” the central characters, ladylike grad student Lottie, and bohemian drop-out Vera, Canadians temporarily resident in Paris, are fishing about for something to do.
Alistair MacLeod and the Gaelic Diaspora from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DAVIES GWENDOLYN
Abstract: The miners’ action – an act of resistance to threats of geographical and cultural erasure – assumes added
Reading Linnet Muir, Netta Asher, and Carol Frazier: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) BESNER NEIL
Abstract: Of what possible significance can it be to remember, in the first person, and then record, with the kind of assured and confident certainty that characters in Gallant’s stories most often misuse or misapprehend, that the first time I read a Mavis Gallant story was at the beginning of the summer of 1980, sitting on a short bench under a small window? It was a bright and sunny day, in the early afternoon, on the fourth floor of Buchanan Tower on the UBC campus in Vancouver, just outside of Bill New’s office. While I was waiting to talk to him,
Epistolary Traditions in Caribbean Diasporic Writing: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) SUÁREZ ISABEL CARRERA
Abstract: Caribbean literatures have a long history of using Creole in writing, and more markedly in orature, although the scope and reception of this use has varied, with acceptability and more confident practice growing in the final decades of the twentieth century. One of the pioneering and persistent subgenres associated with orality and the use of Creole is the epistolary exchange or series of epistolary monologues, where a persona, often female and using humour, writes home relating impressions of the new land to family or friends, or abroad to inform émigrés of the state of affairs “back home.” The literary form
“We Use Dah Membering”: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) CARIOU WARREN
Abstract: Métis stories are something like the Rigoureau, the shape-changing wolf-man character which often appears in those stories. The Rigoureau is an amalgam of European werewolf legendry and Oji-Cree shape-changer narratives, and perhaps because of this it is a creature of liminality, a dangerous passe-partout, a trickster, a traitor, a folk hero, an outsider. In other words, it is the perfect metaphor for the slipperiness of Métis identity itself. I grew up hearing Rigoureau stories, and I was even told once that my Uncle Vic
wasa Rigoureau, but I was never certain that I would know a Rigoureau if I
Myth in Patricia Grace’s “Sun’s Marbles” from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DURIX JEAN-PIERRE
Abstract: Among the tropes most frequently used in postcolonial fiction, the allegory looms large. According to Fredric Jameson in “Third-World Literature in the Era of Multinational Capitalism,” all Third-World cultural constructions are national allegories and serve to contest colonialist representations. Mythic elements have been used for allegorical purposes by major writers from Kenyan novelist Ngugi wa Thiong’o to Maori novelist Witi Ihimaera. In his novel
Weep Not Child(1964), Ngugi notably includes the story of Mumbi and Gikuyu, the primordial Gikuyu parents, anchoring his characters in a primordial setting where divine sanction guaranteed the people’s secure possession of their land (later
The Tropes and Territory of Childhood in by Janet Frame from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) LORRE CHRISTINE
Abstract: In an essay entitled “Beginnings,” Janet Frame explains how she opted for “this imaginary world whose characters were drawn from objects and people I met in my daily life, with occasional intrusion of characters from fiction” (44–45). It gradually appeared to her that “that world” – the world of the imagination, dreams, and words, the world of art – was the only possible alternative to her inability to cope with “this world” – the material world of real life, which to Frame also meant the isolating and imprisoning world of the mental hospital. She has described her writing as a way of
Roots and Routes in a Selection of Stories by Alistair MacLeod from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) OMHOVÈRE CLAIRE
Abstract: Central to Alistair MacLeod’s
Islandis the return to the original island or Highlands, phonetic closeness somehow reducing the geographical distance between the two referents. The motif is particularly prominent in four of the collection’s sixteen short stories: “The Return” (1971), “The Closing Down of Summer” (1976), “As Birds Bring Forth the Sun” (1985), and “Clearances” (1999).¹ Read in conjunction, these stories make up a corpus that roughly spans Alistair MacLeod’s writing life. Starting from W.H. New’s remark that “the English-language vocabulary for characterizing landscape (and people’s relationship with land) interconnects with the vocabulary for characterizing language
Fables of a Bricoleur: from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) DOBOZY TAMAS
Abstract: In examining the improvisatory aspect of Jarman’s writing, my argument owes much to Michel de Certeau’s
The Practice of Everyday Life‚ particularly the
The Botany of the Liar from:
Tropes and Territories
Author(s) RICOU LAURIE
Abstract: Short,that is, does not satisfactorily define the length of a story: it’s more tempting as an embedded metaphor of surprise. Readers, feeling happily accompanied, suddenly find themselves in the dark – and all around them crackles ambient electricity. The “short” story enacts this process: a break, a gap, and an interruption preceded and followed by a buzz and a hum. Evidence of the
Sounding the Path: from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Castro Ricardo L.
Abstract: Our life is marked by continuous movement through space. Standing upright, on two legs, and looking forward contributes to our mobility and has a significant influence on our existential condition. The act of moving is an everyday affair that acquires a poetic dimension in creative domains such as dance, theatre, literature, and architecture. Paths constitute the basic physical support for movement. As one of the first and most basic communal manifestations of humankind, they also link us to other species whose existential movements leave definite traces (paths) on the landscape.
Human and Divine Perspectives in the Works of Salomon de Caus from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Grillner Katja
Abstract: THESE LINES FROM WITTGENSTEIN’S
Tractatus logico-philosophicusacknowledge the human desire to step outside one’s world in order to find a neutral viewpoint which has always been impossible to attain. Wittgenstein valued the experience of art because it enabled man to contemplate the world as a limited whole - to see the world from the viewpoint of eternity,sub specie aeterni.²He considered the controlled experiment and the fictional proposition important to questions of ethical and aesthetic value. Through the experience of art, man might learn to live and act as an ethical being. Only by showing, and never through saying,
Origins and Ornaments: from:
Chora 3
Author(s) Trubiano Franca
Abstract: JEAN-JACQUES LEQUEU was a most meticulous and gifted architectural draughtsman. The briefest glance at any one of the hundreds of plates given in bequest to the Bibliothèque Royale will bear witness to his great skill. During a lifetime dedicated to the representation of architecture and its historical allegories, ornamental drawings were Lequeu’s principal means of expression. Many scholars have come to see, in the eyes and hands of this late-eighteenth/early-nineteenth-century
dessinateur,the profile of the modern architectural technician. His adoption of descriptive geometry for drawing the human head and his overly exacting and analytical precision undoubtedly have contributed to this
1 Kid on the Halls: from:
A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: “Barry Humphries” are the most appropriate words with which to begin a book on Australian artist, showman, and (especially) writer Barry Humphries. Certainly, they are the most evocative words in my own lexicon, conjuring up the attractive figure of a man of the theatre, a player of men and women not only on stage but also in the audience. Given his versatility as a stage performer, and his elusive personality as a biographical subject (who may reveal himself but only when he is not looking),¹ one might posit various persons named Barry Humphries, a whole company of Barry Humphries. The
5 Autobiography as Mockery,or Barry Humphries in a Mock-Turtle from:
A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: One consequence of Humphries’ first autobiography,
More Please(1992), was the 1993 J.R. Ackerley Prize for Autobiography. As Janet Frame says in her story “Prizes” (1963), “Life is hell, but at least there are prizes.”¹ She should know: winning the Hubert Church Award for her story collectionThe Lagoon(1951) saved her from a forced leucotomy. For Frame the prize had a consequence, whereas for Humphries the prize was a consequence, yet each prize was a take in an Aristotelian absurdity of cause and effect. Whether Humphries’ life is hell, only Humphries can say; but if Jean-Paul Sartre’s character Garcin
6 Barry Humphries: from:
A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: With the possible exception of his white-Beckett-fence little narrative “A Novel Called Tid” (1958),
Women in the Background(1995) is Barry Humphries’ first novel. It is also, along withMy Gorgeous Life: An Adventure(1989),More Please(1992), andMy Life as Me(2002), one of the very finest of his finery of books, a wonderfully comic narrative in which Humphries stands back of all his characters, even the backgrounded women. Humphries has said of the novel, “It is not a serious book. Everything I do is meant for comedy. But it has some serious subjects treated lightly.”¹ Rather than
7 Humphries’ Occasional Texts,or One Good Man’s Miscellany from:
A Portrait of the Artist as Australian
Abstract: In
More Please(1992) Humphries is candid (frank) andcandide(ingenuous) in recounting his adventures with alcohol in the 1960s and his misadventures with alcoholism in the late 1960s (Dr Lászlo Zadór, Harley Street specialist, London, 1967; Elm Hill Nursing Home, London, 1967) and the early 1970s (St Vincent’s Hospital, Melbourne, 1970; Alcoholics Anonymous, Melbourne, 1970; Delmont Hospital, Sydney, 1970). In contrast, Richard Ouzounian, in “An Audience with … Dame Edna and Barry Humphries,” has noted that “Humphries has been candid with other journalists up to this point [2000], but he has never discussed his actual recovery.”¹ Yet, in fact, Humphries has
Book Title: Violence and the Female Imagination-Quebec's Women Writers Re-frame Gender in North American Cultures
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): GILBERT PAULA RUTH
Abstract: Violence and the Female Imagination explores whether these imagined women are striking out at an external other or harming themselves through acts of self-destruction and depression. Gilbert examines the degree to which women are imitating men in the outward direction of their anger and hostility and suggests that such "tough" women may be mocking men in their "macho" exploits of sexuality and violence. She illustrates the ways in which Quebec female authors are "feminizing" violence or re-envisioning gender in North American culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80g9h
3 Who’s the Subject Now? from:
Violence and the Female Imagination
Abstract: “Re-vision,” says Adrienne Rich in a 1971 essay,¹ has revolutionary potential. Re-vision can be revolutionary when understood as “the act of looking back, of seeing with fresh eyes, of entering an old text from a new critical direction … an act of survival.” Enriching the term even more, Rich calls it a “drive to self-knowledge … more than a search for identity … part of our refusal of the self-destructiveness of male-dominated society … how we can begin to see and name – and therefore live – afresh” (“When We Dead Awaken: Writing as Re-Vision” 35). Linda Williams, borrowing a decade later
4 Public and Private Violence: from:
Violence and the Female Imagination
Abstract: Although it is common to refer to the killing of any child – newborn or older – by either parent as infanticide (as I shall do in this study), current legal definitions of infanticide and filicide are precisely defined and are quite country-specific. According to
Black’s Law Dictionaryas used in the United States legal system, infanticide is: “I. The act of killing a newborn child, esp. by the parents or with their consent. In archaic usage, the word referred also to the killing of an unborn child. – also termedchild destruction; neonaticide. 2. The practice of killing newborn children. 3. One
Book Title: Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Ilcan Suzan
Abstract: Writing across the disciplines of sociology, literature, film, anthropology, and museology, the contributors examine the way in which radical postmodern shifts around knowledge and value have mobilized new relations between ourselves and others and transformed a range of cultural practices. This volume includes philosophical reflections and essays on museums and memory, visual culture, and relations with the other. Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject examines the altered frameworks that simultaneously help us to meet the contemporary challenge and raise the ethical stakes of our historical moment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80grb
On Being “the Last Kantian in Nazi Germany”: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) CLARK DAVID L.
Abstract: “The last Kantian in Nazi Germany”: this is how Emmanuel Levinas (1990b, 153) describes “Bobby,” the dog who befriends him during his “long captivity” in a slave-labour camp. Thirty years after the fact, Levinas briefly tells the story of his terrible days in Camp 1492, days whose numbing inhumanity is momentarily relieved by the arrival of an animal that offers a semblance of respect. I say “semblance” because Levinas’s experience of Bobby is informed by conventional assumptions about animality that make it impossible for him straightforwardly to attribute dutifulness to a creature that is not human.
Mon semblable, mon frère:
Commemoration/(de)celebration: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) PHILLIPS RUTH B.
Abstract: The contrast with past practice is dramatic; until
Beyond the Frame: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) O’CONNOR DANIEL
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to analyze morality and ethics in cinema. This analysis is based on the assumption that morality and ethics are discourses of conduct and character. Moral discourse concerns itself with the appropriateness of conduct and action relative to situations. Rather than prevent changes in conduct and character, morality (at least in its cinematic forms) aims to control their flow and regulate their transformation (see Deleuze 1992 on control). The extent and effectiveness of these efforts can be recognized in the regularities of movement they produce. Ethics also involves movement and change, but it is concerned
The Marginal Other: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) ILCAN SUZAN
Abstract: Strangers have become the subjects and objects of intense social, cultural, and political exclusion. We need only recall the discontents of a stranger who is refused entry at a state border, or an exiled subject, a native denied cultural membership, a “foreigner” excluded from public service. These strangers, or marginal others, appear everywhere. It is not their image that is at stake here but, rather, the effect that this otherness implies in the development of specific social practices.
“A Network of Relations”: from:
Postmodernism and the Ethical Subject
Author(s) VELLINO BRENDA CARR
Abstract: At the heart of Bronwen Wallace’s poetics is a profound sense of the way our lives take shape in narrative relation to other people’s stories and their reciprocal responses to ours. As a result, she developed a poetic voice that was immediate, down-to-earth, and always caught in the act of offering up a good story. Her distinctive gesture is the direct address of the talking lyric, calling a community of readers into narrative filiation and response-ability. Significantly, she attributes her talking lyric to forms that, for her, constitute female popular knowledge and culture – gossip and storytelling.¹ In a number of
Book Title: Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Goldman Marlene
Abstract: Rewriting Apocalypse in Contemporary Canadian Fiction is the first book to explore the literary, psychological, political, and cultural repercussions of the apocalypse in the fiction of Timothy Finley, Michael Ondaatje, Margaret Atwood, Thomas King, and Joy Kogawa. While writers from diverse nations have adopted and adapted the biblical narrative, these Canadian authors introduce particular twists to the familiar myth of the end. Goldman demonstrates that they share a marked concern with purgation of the non-elect, the loss experienced by the non-elect, and the traumatic impact of apocalyptic violence. She also analyzes Canadian apocalyptic accounts as crisis literature written in the context of the Cold War - written against the fear of total destruction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80hzf
3 Margaret Atwood’s “Hair-ball”: from:
Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: The previous chapters explored the ways in which
HeadhunterandThe English Patientinvoke a host of characteristic apocalyptic features. Rather than mobilize these features to recreate a full-blown apocalypse, however, both fictions rely on familiar apocalyptic topoi to launch a critique of apocalyptic eschatology.Headhunterchallenges the apocalyptic narrative by blurring the boundary between the elect and the non-elect, thereby calling into question apocalyptic notions of perfection as well as the category of the Saints of God. WhileThe English Patientmaintains the latter category, it subverts the logic of apocalypse by adopting and adapting allegory, another of its key tropes.
4 Mapping and Dreaming: from:
Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: Contemporary Canadian writers take great pains to emphasize the trauma and devastation instigated by apocalyptic thinking and to demonstrate the necessity of challenging the apocalyptic paradigm, the visionary tool Western culture overtly and covertly uses to establish meaning. Whereas Findley’s
Headhunterand Ondaatje’sThe English Patientchampion prophetic eschatology as an alternative to apocalypse, Atwood’s “Hairball” offers no such alternative and, as a result, highlights the disaster that ensues when apocalyptic violence goes unchallenged. Owing to the emphasis on the figure of the Wendigo, Atwood’s story alludes to the fact that apocalyptic violence was used to pave the way for Canada’s
5 Broken Letters: from:
Rewriting Apocalypse in Canadian Fiction
Abstract: All of the works in this study interrogate the secular view of apocalypse as a fanciful biblical story that addresses the problem of evil by fabricating images of the violent destruction of the earthly world and the creation of a new and perfect heavenly world. As these fictions illustrate, apocalypse - far from being a quaint literary artifact that merely describes the categories of good and evil - functions as a vital, discursive mechanism for the
inscriptionof these categories. More important, rather than contain violence in the realm of art or imagination, these texts, owing to their emphasis on
5 War from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: Acknowledging Bishop’s complicated deference to the world around her is the first step towards qualifying my initial, toomasterful model of her poetics. From the strange way in which she both honours and devours the Fish, through the complex interplay of empirical and abstract knowledge in “At the Fishhouses,” Bishop is engaged repeatedly in the particular intellectual manoeuvre laid out in the Darwin Letter. The preceding three chapters show how this manoeuvre plays out in Bishop’s model of mind, looking particularly at the relationship between conscious and unconscious, observation and epiphany, empirical and abstract. In each context, Bishop maintains that, while
6 Narrative from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: As I hope to have made clear, this book is not only about description in the usual sense (or senses) but also about the role of scrutiny in a much larger intellectual pattern that dominates Bishop’s work. Chapters 2 through 4 lay this pattern out as it pertains to knowledge and the mind, showing how Bishop always emphasizes the study of smaller, more concrete things at least partially because she believes that study to be the only avenue to the larger, more abstract ones. The preceding chapter shifts gears somewhat, tracing this same pattern as it applies to the opposition
Conclusion from:
Elizabeth Bishop's Poetics of Description
Abstract: For all the deeper honesty of her poetry, Bishop was often rather disingenuous in her letters, and so it is with a grain of salt that we must take the famous line about a “perfectly useless concentration” (DL). There is a strange doubleness to it, a way in which it is both accurate and misleading. On the one hand Bishop is dedicated to a concentration so intense that it precludes conscious intention, and each individual act of observation is indeed perfectly useless in and of itself. But behind the (false) modesty of this statement is a more serious engagement: the
Introduction from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Rule-making is a twofold process of representation; there are rulers who act officially as warrants of the interests of the whole, and there are mediators who act in the name of more specific interests. In the contemporary world politics can be understood as the interplay of agents who claim to represent the interests of others. As societies grow more complex, people tend to delegate the task of promoting their interests to those who specialize in representation. These specialists may be lobbyists, pressure groups, or political parties. The highest and most encompassing level of representation is indeed that attained by legislators,
1 Catholic Ethics from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: There may be different ways of contrasting the Catholic and Protestant traditions. Discussing Catholic ethics first allows us to respect the chronological order in which the two appeared, and to underline the Protestant departure from orthodoxy. Since my purpose here is merely to demonstrate the opposing characteristics of the two traditions, I prefer to steer clear of any considerations of precedence. Instead I will emphasize the political consequences that can be derived from their contrary positions. I shall treat the Catholic perspective first in order to delineate a basic paradigm that will subsequently be used as a point of reference
3 The American Assessment of Natural Law from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: The revolutionary features of the American understanding of natural law are intimately linked to the colonies’ Protestant tradition, particularly that of Puritanism. Puritans conceived of salvation in individualistic and juridical terms. Their religious universe was one of law derived from God’s will, and the relationship of human beings to God was governed by a covenant or compact. Each individual stood alone in a direct relationship to God: the covenant of grace with God allowed no intermediaries. So it is not surprising that natural law was translated into individual rights.
4 From the Clerisy to a Sparse Intelligentsia from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Even if Enlightenment in Britain brought about the downfall of natural law and organic conceptions of governance in general, it nonetheless privileged an elite of thinkers who were expected to act as beacons for the “vulgars,” as Hume called them. The era was individualistic in its articulation of morality, but still depended upon philosophers to express them. The liberal democratic conception of ethics was to develop through the two following centuries before the need for a learned elite vanished entirely.
5 The Counter-Reformation and the Impact of Jesuit Pedagogy from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: With the mentality of a besieged city (Delumeau 1971, 44), the Council of Trent (1545-63) convened to counteract the growing influence of Protestant Reformers. Its sessions focused on doctrinal and administrative aspects of the growing Reformation. The Council first reiterated the teaching mission of the Church, which consisted of safeguarding the integrity of the two sources of faith, the Holy Scriptures and tradition. To this effect, the only version of the Bible that was to be recognized was the
Vulgate, written in Latin, and attributed to Saint Jerome. Soon after, reading of the Book in vernacular languages was prohibited. In
7 The Philosophe: from:
Ethics of Catholicism and the Consecration of the Intellectual
Abstract: Calling eighteenth-century French authors either
philosophesor moralists is a misnomer in both cases, for they were usually neither. They identified themselves asphilosophes, but they had little in common with philosophers like Hume or Kant. There was no intention to deceive on their part. By posing asphilosophesthey intended to stand in the name of reason, outside any considerations of religion or even of metaphysics. Unlike most of their predecessors, who usually stopped short of tackling revelation, thephilosophesopenly crossed this threshold and claimed total intellectual freedom. Abstract metaphysics was also put aside in favour of a
4 My Self: A Task from:
Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: It has been impossible, in this exposition of the “self” as a “task,” to trace the emergence of self-consciousness without constant reference to the topic of freedom. At the very begining, it was said that the transition from possibility to actuality occurs only as the “leap” of freedom. But before freedom could be described, it was necessary to analyse its precursors: angst, reflection, and consciousness. And a brief preliminary summary of some aspects of freedom was required in order to clarify the nature of angst. Now those aspects must be explored and exposited in detail. Kierkegaard's understanding of “freedom” is
5 My Self: A Task from:
Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: “The self is composed of infinitude and finitude. But this synthesis is a relation which, even though it is derived, relates to itself, which is freedom. The self is freedom. But
freedom is the dialectical [factor?] in the determinants possibility and necessity” (emphasis added).¹
6 My Self: A Task from:
Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: Throughout the entire foregoing text, the words “free” and “voluntary” have been used as if they indicate a simple, self-evident and irreducible act (or event) of “deciding” and “choosing.” Certainly Kierkegaard assumes and believes in such an event when he says that “the self is freedom.” While writing
Works of Love(1847), he confides to his journal, “That which has made my life so strenuous but also full of discoveries is that I ... have had to choose decision infinitely. ... In the decisions of the spirit, one can make up one’s mind freely. ... To ’be compelled” is the
7 My Self: A Task from:
Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: The distinction between lower and higher natures is especially important because it sets the location of and directs our attention to the functioning of what Kierkegaard calls “the will” or the act of “willing.”¹ In this crucial passage in
Sicknesshe is taking to task what he calls the
Interlude: from:
Kierkegaard as Humanist
Abstract: “Ontology” is not a widely used word or concept in contemporary philosophy. The dominance of the perspectives of formal logic and linguistic analysis in the schools of philosophy in the academic scene has largely relegated traditional metaphysics and its interest in ontology to a purely historical account of the past. But some scientists and philosophers of science have not been satisfied with the reduction of truth to matters of formal methodology and abstractions expressed in mathematical formulae. The two authors of
Principia Matkematicaseparated and took quite opposite paths. Bertrand Russell followed the route of logical science and ended in
Introduction: from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: Was there a “French fascism”? Once this would have been a lunatic fringe question, but recent monographs have suggested not only that there was a distinctive French fascism but that fascism itself, far from being a somewhat ephemeral Italian or German import, actually originated in France.¹ Beyond that, contemporary historians have been suggesting that French support for
Pétainisme, if not for outright fascism, though marginal according to the accepted view in France since the Liberation, was in fact widespread. Acceptance of the new view of France’s relationship with fascism/Pétainismerequires a rethinking of several aspects of the history of modern
CHAPTER THREE The Uriage Experience from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: During the second half of 1941 the École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage was, for its admirers, the flagship of the National Revolution, the first school in the land, the training centre of France’s new elites. But was Uriage during its heyday in fact the truly national institution its title implied? Who was studying and teaching there? What was their daily life, and their real relationship with the Vichy government? What was the actual agenda of Dunoyer de Segonzac and his staff — for example, with regard to Vichy’s youth movements, or toward modern women? How should history judge the Uriage experience?
CHAPTER FOUR Uriage Influence: from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: As the École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage prospered, some of the more senior military officers involved with Vichy’s youth training began to bristle at young Captain Pierre Dunoyer de Segonzac’s pretentions, his independence, and the centrality of his personality in the school. The Study Bureau had attracted other high-profile personalities to Uriage — lively, sometimes controversial, young Catholic intellectuals such as Mounier, Lacroix, Beuve-Méry, de Lubac, and Maydieu. It was becoming clearer that Uriage was the focal point of a collective effort to orient the National Revolution in a certain direction as the school tried to reach the country with publications
CHAPTER SIX The Struggle for Youth from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: By the second half of 1941, the Vichy government was beginning to split over the direction its “youth revolution” should take, as the tensions that followed Uriage’s upgrading into an institution began to come into the open. The École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage was dominated by devout and idealistic Catholics whom the “realists” around Admiral Darlan considered naive (patronizingly referring to them as “sacristy fleas”), while the hard-line proto-fascists at Vichy like Gaston Bergery or Pierre Pucheu made more and more disparaging remarks about “scoutish and churchy (
calotin)” youth leaders. But no one could ignore the fact that these Catholics
CHAPTER SEVEN Uriage under Attack (March 1942—January 1943) from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: The grandiose triumphalism of the Grande Fête at Uriage in the summer of 1942 masked the fact that the school, by that time, had serious difficulties with the government, fuelled by powerful rivals and critics. One sign of trouble had been the successful pressure exerted on the school the previous summer, apparently by Henri Massis, to do without the Abbé de Naurois and Emmanuel Mounier; another was the fact that Mounier was abruptly incarcerated in early 1942 on suspicion of Resistance activities. The government’s concern over the youth movements led to a summons to Vichy of their leaders, including Segonzac,
CHAPTER EIGHT Exile from the Castle, the Order, and the Flying Squads from:
Knight-Monks of Vichy France
Abstract: The closing of the École Nationale des Cadres d’Uriage at the end of 1942 marked the end of the golden age of a community that had brought together some of the best and the brightest people to create a new kind of France. It was succeeded by a period that many of the alumni, in retrospect, saw as the best, the most heroic, even the most important, period in their lives. The activities of the Uriage group during the disintegration of the Vichy regime and the liberation of France are interesting and instructive, if not the most important from our
3 (Es)Saying It Her Way: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) VERDUYN CHRISTL
Abstract: Carol Shields was widely recognized as a talented, imaginative, and accomplished novelist, playwright, and poet. It is not as well appreciated, however, that she was also an extremely competent and proficient essayist. What attracted her to this form of writing? What was she trying to accomplish in her essays such that she added the genre to her literary repertoire? What was the relationship between her essay-writing and the other genres she practised with so much success?
7 A Knowable Country: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) IRVINE LORNA
Abstract: In
The Republic of Love, Tom Avery, one of two central characters in a novel narrated in the third person, briefly addresses his body, observed, as always, by a narrator who mingles voice and perspective with those of Tom: “‘You wimp,’ he said to his dusky penis, but in a friendly tone. He dried carefully between his toes. It had been some time since he had regarded his toes closely. Years.”¹Larry’s Partyis also narrated in the third person. In it, we are presented with a series of questions by a narrator who likewise mingles voice and perspective with
8 Pioneering Interlaced Spaces: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) PAILLOT PATRICIA-LÉA
Abstract: Carol Shields opens
Larry’s Partywith a tweed jacket which her “futile,” “uneventful, average”² protagonist takes by mistake and which is subsequently used in a symbolical and instrumental way to tailor Larry’s psychological and social fabric. How does the repeatedly “mediocre” (113) Canadian become so extraordinary? This ordinary, “miserable adolescent” (165) would indeed remain as such without the construction of a spatialized identity, which renders the character exceptional and serves as the structural frame ofLarry’s Party. InL’expérience intérieure, Georges Bataille discusses the “labyrinthine construction of being,” which, he argues, takes the form of a “course we follow from
11 Eros in the Eye of the Mirror: from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) VENTURA HÉLIANE
Abstract: The rewriting of classical mythology seems to enjoy a special place in Canadian literature, be it in the field of poetry, the novel, drama, or the short story. Anne Carson’s
Autobiography of Red(1998) is one of the most recent and outstanding examples of such palimpsestic practice in verse. Robert Kroetsch’s Demeter, the male eponymous hero ofThe Studhorse Man(1970), might be regarded as best emblematizing the recontextualization of myths in Canadian fiction. “Let’s murder Clytemnestra according to the principles of Marshall McLuhan” (1969) by the playwright Wilfred Watson also embodies the hybridized form of the classic rewrite in
14 Mischiefs, Misfits, and Miracles from:
Carol Shields and the Extra-Ordinary
Author(s) HERK ARITHA VAN
Abstract: To perform any ficto-critical homage to the work of Carol Shields proposes beginning with an epigraph, a pithy frame, modest rather than forward, introductory in intent but with the gentle exertion of a raised eyebrow, an awning hiding a venerable umbrella shop or sheltering two characters walking arm in arm, enmeshed in a conversation so intense as to ripple with sedulous waves. The effect of Shields’s style and voice, her fictions generous as gestures and intricate as spiderwebs, is to arouse an ardour that can only culminate in another story, the
langue d’oïlof a glow-worm tale. A gesture of
Book Title: Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics-Foreword by Marguerite Mendell
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Baum Gregory
Abstract: Exploring Polanyi's lesser-known works as well as The Great Transformation, Baum provides a more complete and nuanced understanding of Polanyi's thought. He examines Polanyi's interpretation of modern economic and social history, clarifies the ethical presuppositions present in Polanyi's work, and addresses how Polanyi's understanding of the relation between ethics and economics touches on many issues relevant to the contemporary debate about the world's economic future. Baum argues that we should look to Polanyi's understanding of modern capitalism to reinstate the social discourse and, in political practice, the principles of reciprocity and solidarity. He points to examples, both in Canada and abroad, of attempts to formulate alternative models of economic development and to create new forms of institutional and cultural intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80wmh
Foreword from:
Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Author(s) Mendell Marguerite
Abstract: There is currently widespread interest in the work of Karl Polanyi among progressive thinkers, activists, and a growing community of heterodox social scientists. Although
The Great Transformation, published in 1944, is acclaimed in France as one of the ten classics of twentieth-century social thought and has been translated into eight languages, Polanyi's influence within North America was, until recently, largely within the discipline of anthropology. Those who acknowledged the broader significance of his writings to contemporary social thought were marginalized by the intellectual community.
1 Polanyi’s Theory of the Double Movement from:
Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: In
The Great Transformation, Karl Polanyi analyses the crisis of modern society. He does not claim that his idea is wholly original, for he finds aspects of it in the thought of the nineteenth-century social reformer Robert Owen. Owen argued that the new capitalism had caused not simply the material impoverishment of the workers but also the disruption of the ethical culture to which they belonged and through which they defined their identity. He was among the first to recognize that economic institutions have an impact on people’s cultural self-understanding. He advocated — and actually established - an alternative organization of
2 The Ethical Foundations of Polanyi’s Social Theory from:
Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: In this chapter I study Karl Polanyi’s reflection on the role of ethics in the making of society and in the social scientific understanding of it. Polanyi, who in his personal life was greatly inspired by Leo Tolstoy,¹ was not a philosopher in the strict sense. Yet he believed that as a social and political thinker he had to articulate his intuitions regarding the ethical foundation of human thought and action. He first did so as a young man in the Vienna of the 1920s while struggling against his depression over the useless killing of the Great War. As Polanyi
3 Polanyi’s Contemporary Relevance from:
Karl Polanyi on Ethics and Economics
Abstract: Since the 1960s, social ethics has assumed increasing importance in the theological education, pastoral practice, and ministry of the Christian churches. One of the reasons for this development is the recognition that in the past the churches tended to identify themselves, consciously or unconsciously, with the societies in which they lived and, more especially, with the ruling powers or dominant ideologies. Although individual Christians and critical Christian movements gave prophetic witness in their societies, the churches as a whole tended to remain silent in the face of the injustices practised by their societies. Today, their behaviour is much different.
Book Title: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): BELL MARK
Abstract: Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century includes critical readings of Terre des hommes by Antoine de Saint-Exupéry, Alexandre Chenevert by Gabrielle Roy, Gouverneurs de la rosée by Jacques Roumain, Pluie et vent sur Télumée miracle by Simone Schwarz-Bart, La route des Flandres by Claude Simon, Présence de la mort by C.F. Ramuz, and Neige noire by Hubert Aquin. Bell addresses the problems inherent in the term aphorism, the narrative and discourse function of aphorism within the genre of the novel, the interrelation between the structure of aphorism and the epistemological and hermeneutical functions this sub-genre may perform as a component part of the narrative fabric, the "national" character of aphoristics, and the problems that arise from "anthologizing" a novel's aphorisms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80wsr
1 Introduction from:
Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: This study explores how francophone authors use aphorism in seven novels published in the twentieth century. To be more exact, we will consider how writers conceive their own aphorisms and incorporate them into a novel’s narrated chain of events.
3 Terre des hommes from:
Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: It is not surprising that Antoine de Saint-Exupéry would demonstrate a penchant for aphoristic discourse, in light of his early attraction to Nietzsche and his lifelong admiration for Pascal. Whether it is a question of influence or simple affinity matters little for our purposes here; suffice it to say that we are often reminded of the sententiousaphoristic style of these two predecessors as we read Saint-Exupéry’s text. The most clear-cut manifestation of the style in question occurs in Saint-Exupéry’s highly aphoristic
Citadelle.Published after his death, the text in its formal structure effects something of a synthesis of Nietzsche’sZarathustra
6 Pluie et vent sur Télumée Miracle from:
Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: Of the seven novels under consideration in this study, Simone Schwarz-Bart’s
Pluie et venthas generated the smallest amount of secondary literature. For example, no thoroughgoing analysis exists of the novel’s lingual or narratological features. A recent introduction to five francophone Caribbean authors by Beverly Ormerod may contain the most complete piece of criticism published thus far onPluie et vent.However, like the few other extant studies, it sets out mainly to summarize the plot, introduce characters, and detect recurring themes and motifs in the novel.
7 La Route des Flandres from:
Aphorism in the Francophone Novel of the Twentieth Century
Abstract: The all too brief pages allotted here to Claude Simon’s best-known work will run counter to the critical mainstream, which posits the impracticability of establishing meaning from this novel’s narrative sequences. J.A.E. Loubère offers a tidy summary of the prevailing view of the secondary literature: “Far from bringing elucidation, the text [Simon] elaborates refuses to resolve itself in information. It demonstrates instead that it is the enemy of information, either because of its power to breed new texts ... or because of its tendency to peter out and vanish in the deserts of the imagination” (102). Immediately following this statement,
Book Title: Gender and Narrativity- Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): RUTLAND BARRY
Abstract: It is impossible to imagine a community that is not divided into at least two gender groups. It is equally impossible to imagine a community that does not tell or enact stories. The relationship between these universal aspects of human culture is the mainspring of Gender and Narrativity. From Genesis to Freud, the Western narrative tradition tells the same old story of masculine dominance/feminine subservience as a matter of divine will or natural truth. Here, nine Canadian scholars challenge and interpret this tradition, in effect "re-telling" the story of gender, and themselves intervening in the narrative process. Critical readings from a wide range of literary texts - medieval and modern, European and Canadian - replace abstract theory in these studies, while sociology, anthropology, psychoanalysis, deconstruction and new history are the axes of discussion. This book exemplifies the current range and diversity of Canadian critical writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80x53
INTRODUCTION: from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Rutland Barry
Abstract: Gender is a fundamental constitutive category of culture, narrative is a basic cultural practice. It is impossible to conceive of a human community that is not
ab initiodivided into two (at least) gender groups; it is equally impossible to imagine a human community that does not tell/enact stories. What is the relationship between the category and the practice? The nine essays that follow broach this question in terms of current theories of meaning and text.
1 TOWARD AN EPISTEMOLOGY OF GENDER from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Verdon John
Abstract: That higher life forms exist in the two physical categories of female and male is universally self-evident and is not of itself a problem. Beyond this basic understanding, however, the two sexes become associated with a vast panorama of cultural phenomena, including categorical ascriptions of social roles, behavioural expectations, and personality characteristics. How does the simple, incontrovertible, and universal fact of biological dimorphism generate the staggering complexity of cultural, social, and psychological dynamics of the human condition? It is the translation of the biological into social/cultural experience that is the heart of an epistemology of gender. An elaboration of the
2 READING THE FEMININE from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Richard Robert
Abstract: Discourse—all discourse—has forever been the object of surveillance. History is there to remind us that political or religious thought has never been totally free. And of course, esthetic discourses of all kinds (paintings, books, plays) have always been prey to censorship. Tintoretto, Molière, Voltaire, Rousseau, etc., all had dealings with the thought police of their day.¹ In the last ten years or so, the age-old practice of policing opinions has acquired a new name: political correctness, offspring of the American liberal left of the 1980s. For the purposes of this paper, I will single out two discourses that
3 SEX, LIES, AND PHOTOGRAPHY: from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Gabriel Barbara
Abstract: Though Timothy Findley’s
The Telling of Lies(1986) announces itself as a “mystery,” the preferred British term for detective fiction, it subverts as well as continues many of the classic characteristics of the genre. Following the established conventions of its predecessors, from Poe’s “Murders in the Rue Morgue” onward, it employs a sleuth outside the regulatory powers of the state, in pursuit of a murderer whose motive and means are out of the ordinary. There is a body, a setting which unites all the suspects under one roof, and an Aristotelian structure ofperipeteia(Porter 1983, 331). Like all detective
4 F(R)ICTIONS: from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Godard Barbara
Abstract: The border/play characteristic of contemporary women’s parodic re/- writing of fictional genres reveals engagement with narrative as a critical strategy designed to expose the positioning of woman as
silent other, on whose mutilated body narrative is constructed in dominant (patriarchal) discourse, and to posit alternate positionings for women as subjects producing themselves in/by language. What feminist theory has shown is that strategies of writing and reading are forms of cultural resistance. They work to turn dominant discourses inside out and challenge theory in its own terms, the terms of a semiotic space constructed in language. They do so by unfixing
5 THE (W)RITE OF PASSAGE: from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Woods G.A.
Abstract: The second volume of a series, especially if it deals with a very young girl, is the hardest for me to write—because the public and the publisher won’t allow me to write of a young girl as she really is. One can write of children as they always are; so my books of children are always good; but when you come to write of the “miss” you have to depict a sweet, insipid young thing—really a child grown older—to whom the basic realities of life and reactions to them are quite unknown.
Lovemust scarcely be hinted
8 ANDROGYNOUS REALISM IN HEINRICH VON KLEIST’S “DIE HEILIGE CÄCILIE ODER DIE GEWALT DER MUSIK (EINE LEGENDE)” from:
Gender and Narrativity
Author(s) Bohm Arnd
Abstract: Relatively neglected by critics in comparison to others of his works, Kleist’s story with the elaborate tripartite title, which can be approximately translated into English as “Saint Cecilia, or the Power of Music (A Legend),” has begun to attract increasing attention. To some extent, this is due to the fact that the other works have been examined and reexamined with such exhausting intensity that a turn to lesser-known texts is inevitable. But it is also the case that, among Kleist’s puzzling prose, this story stands out for its strangeness. What is it about? What is its “message”? In this case,
Book Title: Political Ecumenism-Catholics, Jews, and Protestants in De Gaulle’s Free France, 1940-1945
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): ADAMS GEOFFREY
Abstract: Adams examines the contributions of such major Français libres as René Cassin, Pierre Mendès France, and Jacques Soustelle and explores de Gaulle's troubled relations with Churchill and Roosevelt. The opportunity for Gaullists to offer full membership to the fourth religious family, Algeria's Muslim majority, following the liberation of French North Africa is also considered. In an epilogue, Adams reflects on the impact of Free France's political ecumenism in the postwar era.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt80x6j
CHAPTER FIVE Maurice Schumann: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Of all those who transmitted the Free French message of defiance, resistance, and hope to those living in Vichy France or in the German-occupied zone, none was more eloquent than the journalist-turned-broadcaster Maurice Schumann. Schumann was born in Paris on 10 April 1911 to upper-middle-class Jewish parents who were so thoroughly assimilated that they felt only the most nominal link to their ancestral faith.¹ Schumann
pèrewas a successful corset manufacturer; like his wife, he was devoted to the Republic and to the memory of the Revolution which had given it birth. Patriotism came naturally in this environment: Schumann tells
CHAPTER SEVEN Jacques Soustelle: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Born in Montpellier on 3 February 1912 to a working-class Catholic father and a Protestant mother, Jacques Soustelle was baptized in the Reformed communion. Although as an adult he drifted away from his childhood faith, Soustelle always saw himself as shaped by the Huguenot tradition. He never forgot early memories of itinerant lay preachers who travelled door-to-door throughout the Protestant heartland in the Cévennes distributing tracts with their message of eternal salvation. In writing about his wartime commitment to Free France, Soustelle recalls taking heart from these sometimes solitary pilgrims:
CHAPTER TWELVE André Philip and the Christian Left Commit to Free France from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: Given the longstanding devotion of the vast majority of French Protestants to the Republic and to democratic principles, it is not surprising that a substantial proportion of those who showed up to enrol in La France libre were linked to the Reformed communion.¹ None of these Protestants had a more significant role in shaping wartime Gaullist policy than André Philip, the only practicing Christian among the pre-war leaders of the SFIO.² Before arriving in London, Philip had been active in the internal Resistance. Through his initiative, two more Protestant
résistantsfamiliar with the French trade-union movement – Albert Guigui and Louis
CHAPTER THIRTEEN De Gaulle’s Protestant Emissaries: from:
Political Ecumenism
Abstract: In the aftermath of his 18 June 1940 appeal over the BBC, Charles de Gaulle expected to rally to his cause key members of France’s military and political elites. Nowhere was the reaction to the general’s challenge more disappointing than among France’s senior diplomats, whose responses ranged in tone from indifferent to openly hostile. As a result, at least during its first year, Free France’s external relations were entrusted to a variety of well-intentioned intellectuals and two men with a background in business.
4 Church‚ Society‚ and Mission from:
Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: IN CONTINUING the task of tracing a perspective of incarnation as the underlying pattern in Chenu’s theology, we now turn to the concrete situation of the Church in the modern world. Whenever a major stand is to be taken, a decision to be made, or a choice to be declared, the law of incarnation serves as a guide and a basic strategy. It thus offers a model for both theological understanding and pastoral action.
6 Incarnation and Christology from:
Contemplation and Incarnation
Abstract: After sketching the historical context of St. Jacques at the time of St. Albert, Chenu pointed out the two areas that had attracted the saint’s attention: nature, in
1 Horizons of Justice: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: Academic postcolonialism has generally neglected to address the politics of reconciliation, despite the recent emergence of reconciliation political programs and movements in a wide range of national and international contexts. However, one obligation of postcolonial work is to “fully recognize” what Gyan Prakash refers to as “another history of agency and knowledge alive in the dead weight of the colonial past.”¹ This task of recognition necessitates understanding acts of anti-colonial dissent not only as theorizable but as fully productive, conceptually constructive theoretical “events” in their own right. Prakash argues that we might begin to trace the emergence of postcolonial theory
3 Vigils amid Violence: from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: In their articulation of the hope that forgiveness and reconciliation are possible in the midst of overwhelming violence, the reflections above by Michael Ondaatje concerning the reception of
Anil’s Ghostmay at first seem radically at odds with the vision of the work. For in capturing the despondency surrounding a war to which there seems no foreseeable end, Ondaatje’s novel exposes the intractableness of a conflict that arguably rules out the possibility of a different, more peaceful future.
Conclusion from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: A few years after I completed an earlier version of this book in the form of a doctoral dissertation, I began to collect some of my thoughts about the relationship between truth and justice. This complex relationship is germane to my project – and has in fact formed its central ideas – but not in ways that I was able to fully articulate or acknowledge at the time of its beginning. A substantial amount of scholarship on the politics of reconciliation deals explicitly and quite polemically with the interplay between truth and transitive justice, and yet somehow I did not anticipate the
Epilogue from:
Imagining Justice
Abstract: This project originally unfolded in the context of the U.S.-led War on Iraq, and while that war has been peripheral to the explicit content of my study, it has shaped its driving ideas in immeasurable ways. Most obviously, it has confirmed my sense that the abandonment of the language of reconciliation for a discourse of enemy warfare and terrorism is a potentially fatal political decision. In making this move, the Bush administration orchestrated, wittingly or not, some of the most sordid acts of violence, some of the most tragic signs of the perverseness of a politics of revenge and retribution.
1 Socrates in the Agora from:
Chora 2
Author(s) Caicco Gregory Paul
Abstract: SACRIFICE IS THE OLDEST FORM of religious action.¹ If a person wished to draw near to the gods, as the priest Chryses did with Apollo or as Hektor and Odysseus did with Zeus, he could do so only after he had “burnt many thigh-pieces of bulls” (
Il. T.40, 22.170;Od. I.66). Ancient piety rested on a foundation of killing, death, and eating. The victim’s end coincided with a ritual scream at a point, between the knife and the altar, where the community and the Awesome were gathered.² By going through this “irreversible act,” life was affirmed through direct confrontation with
9 The Metaphoric Architecture of the Diorama from:
Chora 2
Author(s) Parcell Stephen
Abstract: This spectacle, however, is sustained by practices that verge on the grotesque and the incongruous. A diorama manipulates corpses and surrounds them with model materials and paint. Its execution employs forgery techniques, camouflage, and illusion. By combining relics and fabrications, it hovers somewhere between fact and fiction. Once these production practices are
2 Gallant’s Sad Stories from:
Figuring Grief
Abstract: Though Mavis Gallant’s fiction has received a great deal of critical attention in the last ten or twelve years, much of that criticism has been limited to noting Gallant’s main themes: W.J. Keith states that “the concept of abandonment or betrayal” is central,¹ and Janice Kulyk Keefer and Neil K. Besner focus on the role that memory plays in her characters’ and narrators’ worlds. But few have attempted to relate the form of Gallant’s fictions to their content. A special issue of
Essays on Canadian Writing— the “Mavis Gallant Issue” — was published recently, and therein several articles explore structural and
5 Munrovian Melancholy from:
Figuring Grief
Abstract: I have been arguing that Munro’s fiction, with its emphasis on loss and on the importance of story-telling as a method of gaining knowledge of the past, reveals and enacts a poetics of elegy. Munro, like Gallant, insists that the past must be evaluated and re-evaluated and that memory — though not equivalent to truth — is the most important source of knowledge, of a necessarily fictional truth. Gallant’s characters often learn very little of the lessons she urges her readers to learn; we acquire insights about memory, history, truth, and writing by interpreting the ironic narrative stance employed in her fiction.
6 Forms of Loss: from:
Figuring Grief
Abstract: In this study I have argued that Mavis Gallant and Alice Munro have adapted conventions of elegy within fictional frameworks, a practice refined by modernist fiction-elegists such as Virginia Woolf and James Joyce. A digressive structure, the focus on the self (on the narrator-elegist or character-elegist as survivor), and a tendency towards selfreflexivity are characteristics of both modern and late modern fiction-elegies. But where Woolf and Joyce employ self-reflexivity as a trope of consolation and suggest that the work of art is an immortal and idealized product achieved at the end of the work of mourning, Gallant and Munro use
CHAPTER TWO Smoke Signals from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: Infinitely layered echoes of past, present, and future phantoms, which reflect the interaction and transformations of internalized life and communal events within the self and society, take place within the crux of a multilevel framework that extends through time and space. Twins held the keys to one another’s lives, but their relationship also symbolically represents the communal reality. I look at communal twinship on a macro level, examining it via time and space. First, I look at political and socio-economic twinships and their demographic character. Then I map out the geographical context and spatial negotiations within which the interethnic dialogue
CHAPTER THREE Revenge of the Cradles from:
Ghost Brothers
Abstract: The most salient key to why an intercommunal dialogue took place between French and Native was the necessary interdependence of French and Native communities for survival.¹ Life together brought forth common partying, commercial negotiation, inveterate friendships, canoeing, diplomatic power tactics, romantic ties, common enemies, and competing educational systems. French members were referred to as uncle, aunt, and brother. This unusually intimate French-Native intercommunal interdependence owed its urgency to extremely sparse French immigration. Due to this anemic immigration, an incomplete society full of surplus young males matched nicely with Native societies suffering from a lack of males. The men suffered especially
11 On the Continuation of Philosophy: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) RISSER JAMES
Abstract: Gianni Vattimo wants philosophy to continue. This obvious statement appears at first sight to be vacuous, almost nonsensical, when employed to begin writing about a philosopher. After all, does not every philosopher by the act of philosophizing engage de facto in the continuation of philosophy? The apparent emptiness of this statement quickly disappears, though, when, as in the case of Vattimo’s philosophical project, there is an announcement of the end of philosophy such that there is indeed a question not actually of whether philosophy is to continue but of the way in which it is able to continue. The announcement
13 Looking Back on Gadamer’s Hermeneutics from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Scott Jim
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas occasionally characterized Hans-Georg Gadamer’s work with gentle irony as the “urbanization of Heideggerian parochialism.” As a student, I myself took a lively interest in this kind of controversy. The so-called Frankfurt School retreated from neo-Marxism to a Kantianizing theory of speech acts. On the other hand, the Heideggerian efforts on behalf of ontology merged into the universe of hermeneutic interpretation. I heard a lot of tales from inside the Heidegger School and met and fully admired the master himself on his sporadic visits to seminars that he held for his disciples in Heidelberg. Habermas participated in my PHD
15 Gianni Vattimo; or rather, Hermeneutics as the Primacy of Politics from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) T.Valgenti Robert
Abstract: But it is hardly ever pointed out how this way of thematizing Being makes the philosophy of Vattimo an
essentiallymoral philosophy, or more precisely, an ethico-politicalphilosophy. In fact, it is an antimetaphysical, antidogmatic and antiauthoritarian philosophy, where
16 Weakening Religious Belief: from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) FRANKENBERRY NANCY K .
Abstract: Notwithstanding Lyotard’s characterization of postmodernity’s incredulity toward grand metanarratives, the most interesting and provocative philosophy in our time is that being painted with meta broad brushes. When distinguished philosophers fashion overarching narratives, they help us hold things together in a synoptic vision; by painting forests for us, they make those of us who read too many books able at least to see more than just the trees. Gianni Vattimo and Richard Rorty, metanarrators both, and two of the most original philosophers writing today, invite comparison of their overlapping but distinct narratives on religion and secularization, which I will undertake in
17 Christianity as Religion and the Irreligion of the Future from:
Weakening Philosophy
Author(s) Szymanski Ileana
Abstract: A few years ago, a dialogue of more or less theological character between Umberto Eco and Cardinal Martini was published; as an annex, it included interventions by other important Italian thinkers. The title of the book surprised me:
Belief or Nonbelief?¹ Since the question in the title referred to the beliefs of those who do not believe in God or in religious dogmas, the answer was a fairly obvious one: they believe in the demonstrations of the natural phenomena established by science, in what is endorsed by historical or social studies, in the pertinence of moral values, and so on.
CHAPTER THREE Being-in-the-world from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Phenomenological philosophy, as Merleau-Ponty conceives it, “consists in re-learning to look at the world”.¹ We need to re-learn to look at the world because we are “held captive” (to use Wittgenstein's phrase) by a picture of the world derived from the impulses that give rise to science - an
objectivistpicture of the world (including even our own bodies) as existing entirely independent of ourselves and interacting with our experience in a merely causal fashion. There is nothing wrong with this picture in its own context; if we are to study the world scientifically, then we need to set aside
CHAPTER SIX Politics in Theory and Practice from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Even in his later years, when he had withdrawn from much of his former active involvement in political life, Merleau-Ponty continued to think about politics, in the sense both of general political theory and of the particular concrete problems of his day. Theory and practice were for him, as for many French intellectuals, ultimately inseparable: the position we take on particular practical problems (such as the relations of France and Europe as a whole with the USA) must be determined by a general theoretical view of the kind of society we want to create. In turn, his political theory can
CHAPTER SEVEN The Arts from:
Philosophy of Merleau-Ponty
Abstract: Phenomenological philosophy, in Merleau-Ponty's conception, consists as we have seen in “re-learning to look at the world”, attempting to get behind the theoretical constructions that we erect on the basis of our immediate experience of the world in order to describe that experience itself. In so doing, he says, we do not simply reflect a pre-existing truth: philosophy is, “like art, the act of bringing truth into being”.¹ The analogy between phenomenology and art, especially the visual arts, runs through Merleau-Ponty's writings, sometimes as asides to a general philosophical discussion, and sometimes in the form of extended essays on particular
Book Title: Diasporic Feminist Theology-Asia and Theopolitical Imagination
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kang Namsoon
Abstract: How do we navigate the question of identity in the fluid and pluralist conditions of postmodern society? Even more, how do we articulate identity as a defining particularity in the disappearance of borders, boundaries, and spaces in an increasingly globalist world? What constitutes identity and the formation of narratives under such conditions? How do these issues affect not only discursive practices, but theological and ethical construction and practice? This volumes explores these issues in depth. Diasporic Feminist Theology attempts to construct feminist theology by adopting diaspora as a theopolitical and ethical metaphor. Namsoon Kang here revisits and reexamines today’s significant issues such as identity politics, dislocation, postmodernism, postcolonialism, neoempire, Asian values, and constructs diasporic, transethnic, and glocal feminist theological discourses that create spaces of transformation, reconciliation, hospitality, worldliness, solidarity, and border-traversing. This work draws on diverse sources from contemporary critical discourses of diaspora studies, cultural studies, ethnic studies, postmodernism, postcolonialism, and feminism and feminist theology from a transterritorial space. This book is a landmark work, providing a comprehensive discourse for feminist theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0snb
10 Resurgence of Asian Values from:
Diasporic Feminist Theology
Abstract: The debate on Asian values has expanded considerably in the last couple of decades. At the core of Asian values lies Confucian familism, with its emphasis on human-relatedness. Feminists have exposed the oppressive potential of the resurgence of Confucian familism and challenged the Confucian concept of family. In this chapter, I first will juxtapose Confucian and Christian familism, and critically reevaluate them from a feminist perspective. In the process, I will explore the similarities and differences between the two concepts of familism. Second, I shall put Confucian familism under scrutiny, and show how people in Korea have practiced it in
Book Title: The Sense of the Universe-Philosophical Explication of Theological Commitment in Modern Cosmology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Nesteruk Alexei V.
Abstract: The Sense of the Universe deals with existential and phenomenological reflection upon modern cosmology with the aim to reveal hidden theological commitments in cosmology related to the mystery of human existence. The book proposes a new approach to the dialogue between science and theology based in a thorough philosophical analysis of acting forms of subjectivity involved in the study of the world and in religious experience. The uniqueness of this book is that it uses recent advances in phenomenological philosophy and philosophical theology in order to accentuate the existential meaning of cosmology as the discourse that ultimately explicates the human condition. The objective of the book is not to make a comparative analysis of the cosmological scientific narrative and that of the Bible, or the Fathers of the Church (in what concerns the structure of the universe), but to reveal the presence of a hidden theological dimension in cosmology originating in the God-given ability of humanity to discern and disclose the sense of creation. The book contributes to the synthesis of appropriation and incorporation of modern philosophical ideas in Christian theology, in particular its Eastern Orthodox form.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0sq9
1 The Universe and Humanity from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: Contemporary physical cosmology is a well-established and vast enterprise that includes astronomical observations, space programs, research institutions, and funding strategies. Cosmology develops fast: numerous conferences, workshops, and public lectures are held constantly, resulting in further publications of collective volumes, and numerous new studies, academic and popular, appear daily on the Internet and in bookstores. Apart from physical scientists, cosmology attracts historians and philosophers of science, as well as millions of those who adore science and trust its final word on the nature of things. This is a dynamic set of enquiries about the world around us that constitutes an integral
2 Cosmology and Existential Phenomenology from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: If cosmology, as a product of human activity, pretends to deal with the universe in its totality, assuming this totality in the natural attitude of mind as omni-spatiality and omni-temporality, it must exercise bravery in combination with a healthy skepticism in making pronouncements about the whole, by being only a tiny part of this whole. In spite of the fact that the philosophical mind, that is, a critical mind, accounts for its own incomprehensibility of this totality on the grounds of the finitude of humanity, this finitude is at the same time counterweighted by its alleged infinitude. For example, Kant,
3 Constituting the Universe from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: In this chapter we analyze the general epistemological conditions for knowability and explicability of the universe as a whole. Both knowability and explicability imply an anthropological dimension in cosmology, for both these requirements have human origin: to speculate about the universe one must experience its presence through the instantaneous synthesis associated with conscious life. It is argued that the cosmological principle acts as reduction of this synthesis to a mental spatial uniformity of the universe. However, the contingent facticity of the cosmological principle leads to the necessity of its explication in terms of generative steps required to grasp the sense
5 The Origin of the Universe and Event of Birth from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: It is a matter of common understanding nowadays that with all respect to the grandiose achievements of modern science and cosmology in particular, scientific discourse in general, being efficient in interpreting the most nonhuman aspects of reality, feels helpless in advancing the understanding of the mystery of human persons who are those agencies that make the universe palpable and act as its voice. This hidden predicament lies in the fact that cosmology is being constructed from within the
natural attitudethat alienates its subject matter, by making its object (the universe) devoid of any references to human subjectivity, thus removing
6 Cosmology and Teleology from:
The Sense of the Universe
Abstract: In this chapter we continue to investigate the delimiters in cosmological research that originate in the structure of the human knower—in particular, how the purposiveness of human actions cascades toward the purposiveness of cosmological research. Purposiveness of research is not purposiveness related to the alleged object of this research, that is, the universe. In this sense we are not dealing with a traditional teleology, which would imply the assertion in the purposiveness of the universe’s evolution. We rather deal, as we could say together with Kant, with a “formal” purposiveness of cosmology which, because of the specificity of its
2 Pagan Oratory from:
Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Augustine holds a foundational place in the development of the Christian sermon. This is partly due to the fact that he began life as a professional teacher of rhetoric. His conversion led to him being changed from a professor of rhetoric into a Christian preacher. His unique experiences put him in the position of being able to offer self-conscious reflection upon the nature of preaching and its relationship to oration. The fruit of this is seen in
De Doctrina Christiana, which will be considered in a subsequent chapter.
5 Case Study: from:
Augustine's Theology of Preaching
Abstract: Our three case study chapters aim to explore inductively themes which were of particular importance in Augustine’s preaching. It is hoped that these studies deepen the conclusions drawn in our book, and provide the reader with something of the experience of reading through Augustine’s
Sermones. This chapter shows that riches and money hold a position of particular importance in Augustine’s sermons. The use he makes of financial riches arises from his appreciation of interiority and temporality. After an inductive presentation of the ways in which Augustine handles the topic of finances throughout hisSermones, the act of almsgiving and two
Book Title: Hope in Action-Subversive Eschatology in the Theology of Edward Schillebeeckx and Johann Baptist Metz
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Rodenborn Steven M.
Abstract: This volume contends against a major lacuna in the story of eschatology in the twentieth century by offering a historical and comparative analysis of Edward Schillebeeckx’s prophetic eschatology and Johann Baptist Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology with the goal of identifying relative advantages and limitations of these divergent eschatological frameworks for rendering a Christian account of hope that prompts action in the public arena. Rodenborn provides a fresh angle on eschatologies of hope, bringing to the fore two Catholic theologians whose influences range from Vatican II to Latin American liberation theology. Hope in Action offers an innovative contribution to the theological account of the emergence of European political theologies and the role of eschatology as a practical and destabilizing theological category.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0t4j
2 Schillebeeckx's Response to Secularization: from:
Hope in Action
Abstract: In chapter 1, we saw that Metz’s eschatological project developed out of his theological analysis of the modern process of secularization, was unduly limited by his transcendental-linear theology of history, and gradually emerged as a practical-critical hope for the future. Now, turning to Edward Schillebeeckx’s efforts to address the apologetic consequences of secularization during the late 1950s through the mid-1960s, we will trace similar developments that unfold over significantly different terrain; Schillebeeckx offered a distinctive response to the same historical challenges, yet during this period the doctrine of eschatology also would move to the center of his theological project.
3 Schillebeeckx Contends with a History Marked by Suffering: from:
Hope in Action
Abstract: In the preceding two chapters, we examined the turn to eschatology in the writings of Metz and Schillebeeckx as they attempted to respond to the cultural pressures faced by the European church in the 1960s. Initially, their distinctly modern approaches to eschatology allowed both theologians to champion a practical eschatology that operated rather comfortably within the wider cultural context. As we observed, however, it was not long before both theologians grew increasingly sensitive to the subsequent overidentification of the hope of Christianity with the hope of modern culture. This sensitivity to the nonidentity of eschatological and societal hope only would
6 Metz’s Apocalyptic Theology of History: from:
Hope in Action
Abstract: As we have just seen, Metz turned to a practical fundamental theology developed through the categories of memory, narrative, and solidarity in search of the resources necessary to disrupt the conditions of modernity and to revivify an eschatological hope. It is to that central focus of this chapter—Metz’s apocalyptic eschatology—that we now turn. As we shall see, Metz located in the apocalyptic the fundamental temporal framework through which a subversive expectation for the future becomes possible within the historical context of modernity and, ultimately, postmodernity. He became convinced that in the face of persistent and intractable suffering, an
Book Title: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference-A Contribution to Feminist Systematic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): McRandal Janice
Abstract: Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference argues that the most potent and resourceful theological response to the challenging questions of gender and difference is to be found in a retrieval of a doctrinal framework for feminist theology. In particular, it is suggested that a doctrinal narrative of creation, fall, and redemption—underpinned by the doctrinal grammar of the Trinity—provides resources to resolve the theological impasse of difference in contemporary feminist theology. The divine economy reveals a God who enters into history and destabilizes fixed binaries and oppressive categories. The biblical narrative discloses a subtle yet potent fluidity to the Triune relationships. As created subjects—precisely in our difference—we are sustained, affirmed, and drawn back into the Triune life. The subtleties of divine transgression are already recognized in the patterns of the liturgy, in prayer, and in practices of contemplation. Here, bodies not only encounter the transgressive love of God but are enabled to inhabit their differentiated humanity with distinctiveness and grace. The grammar of Christian faith cannot ultimately be uncovered except in prayer, opened beyond itself to a source of life and giving.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tfw
3 From Twoness to Re-Creation from:
Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: In Christian doctrine, God’s creative act ex
nihilois held together with divine re-creation. This chapter will argue that one way of conceiving the re-creation is not merely as a secondary act to thecreatio ex nihilobut as the undoing of binary constructs. This divine transgression is seen most powerfully in the theology and practice of the Eucharist.
7 Struggled For and Not Possessed from:
Christian Doctrine and the Grammar of Difference
Abstract: Naming God has enormous discursive power. The implications of “masculine” terminology for God were foundational for second wave feminism. Understandably, feminist theologians have sought to destabilize the gender rigidity of language about God. And yet feminist rearticulations often bring with them the same discursive rules that are criticized in the use of masculine language. When women’s experience becomes the basis of language for God, feminists risk ascribing a fixed symbol upon the divine name. However, in practices of prayer and contemplation the sheer otherness of God draws us to the limits of language, and causes a blurring of all fixed
5 Social and Theological Aspects of Hunger in Sirach from:
By Bread Alone
Author(s) Gregory Bradley C.
Abstract: Ben Sira was a scribe who lived and worked in Jerusalem in the late third and early second centuries bce, when Judea was under the rule first of the Ptolemies and then the Seleucids. While his primary mode of instruction was oral, near the end of his life, perhaps around 180 bce, he set his teachings into written form.¹ Ben Sira’s work is characteristic of “traditional wisdom” and he was deeply influenced by the book of Proverbs in both form and content. While the focus here will be on the role of hunger in Ben Sira’s thought, it will be
Book Title: Liturgy as Revelation-Re-Sourcing a Theme in Twentieth-Century Catholic Theology
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Caldwell Philip
Abstract: A critical issue in modern Catholic theology has been the relationship between the doctrine of revelation and the church’s liturgical and sacramental practice. This volume argues that although in the twentieth century Catholic theology increasingly recognized the centrality of Christology—particularly the person of Christ—as the locus of revelation and drew out the crucial implications of Christ as the revelation of God, it was slow to connect this revelatory dynamic with the encounter that occurs within the sacramental space of the liturgy, most notably the Eucharist. Taking the decline of the neoscholastic enterprise in Catholic theology and the challenges posed by modernism as his point of departure, Philip Caldwell traces the evolution of the Catholic theology of revelation in the twentieth century and the vital role played by the liturgical and sacramental renewal movements in reimagining this pivotal theological category. Examining the specific contributions of René Latourelle, Avery Dulles, Salvatore Marsilli, and Gustave Martelet against a background of pre-conciliar ressourcement theology, this volume provides a comprehensive account of why a Trinitarian and Christological construal of liturgy and sacraments as revelation is key to the vision that informed Vatican II and offers constructive theological and ecclesial possibilities for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0tr7
2 René Latourelle from:
Liturgy as Revelation
Abstract: René Latourelle is a theologian typical of the focus phase¹ in the history of fundamental theology. Born in Montreal in 1918, he entered the Society of Jesus in 1938 and, after completing doctoral studies in both history and theology, he began in 1959 to teach theology at the Gregorian University, where he subsequently became dean of the faculty of theology.² Latourelle’s career as a student, theologian, and teacher spans the era of the development of fundamental theology through phases that he later calls “Reaction,” “Expansion,” and “Focusing.” Educated within the era of classical apologetics, he was involved with the development
Book Title: Reading Theologically- Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Barreto Eric D.
Abstract: Reading is one of the basic skills a student needs. But reading is not just an activity of the eyes and the brain. Reading Theologically, edited by Eric D. Barreto, brings together eight seminary educators from a variety of backgrounds to explore what it means to be a reader in a seminary context--to read theologically. Reading theologically involves a specific minset adn posture towards texts and ideas, people and communities alike. Reading theologically is not just about academic skill building but about the formation of a ministerial leader who can engage scholarship critically, interpret Scripture and tradition faithfully, welcome different perspectives, and help lead others to do the same. This brief, readable, edited volume emphasizes the vital skills, habits, practices, and values involved in reading theologically. Reading Theologically is a vital resource for students beginning the seminary process and professors of introductory level seminary courses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0v21
2 Reading Meaningfully from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Perkins Miriam Y.
Abstract: Meaningful understanding, often called “interpretation” in academic contexts, is vital throughout seminary education. Interpretation is deliberative exploration and creative expression of fruitful encounter. It is essential to understanding scripture texts, historical sources and artifacts, theological writers across time, and real-time conversations about ethical, spiritual, and pastoral matters. The finding and sharing of insight involved in interpretation is always shaped by encounters between ourselves and what we read, ourselves and other people, and our own life experiences and the presence of God.
3 Reading Biblically from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Peeler Amy L. B.
Abstract: As a champion of the Epistle to the Hebrews, I often find myself citing Hebrews 4:12, “Indeed, the Word of God is living and active,”¹ to affirm that God speaks
todaythrough the Scriptures. My colleagues who study other “texts”—Shakespeare, poetry, the events of history, or the movements of nature—would testify that they hear God speaking to them in their disciplines, a claim I readily affirm as a proponent of the liberal arts who believes that all truth—wherever it is discovered—is God’s truth. At the same time, they would also acknowledge that the Bible holds a
4 Reading Generously from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Liu Gerald C.
Abstract: Reading generously is a practice of love. In Matthew 22:34-40, when Jesus is asked what the greatest commandment is, he adapts a quotation attributed to Moses in Deuteronomy 6:5. Jesus responds: “You shall love the Lord your God with all your heart, and with all your soul, and with all your mind.” The adaptation of this quotation appears as Jesus ends his response with the word “mind.” In the source text of Deuteronomy, Moses uses the word “might.” A couple of verses later in Matthew, Jesus quotes the Hebrew scriptures again. This time Jesus points to Leviticus 19:18, where God
6 Reading Differently from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) McCarty James W.
Abstract: Context matters. We can understand the words and actions of others only with knowledge of the contexts in which those words were spoken and those actions taken. For example, whether someone thinks it is appropriate to wear shoes in one’s home depends on their historical and cultural context. An early-twenty-first-century American will probably hold a different view on this question from her Korean contemporary.
7 Reading Digitally from:
Reading Theologically
Author(s) Brubaker Sarah Morice
Abstract: Second Life, for those unfamiliar with it, is an online virtual world where those sixteen years old and older can buy real estate and clothes, socialize, attend a house of worship, find that special someone, have a wedding, converse with dragons, or scuba dive in a barrier reef (to give but a few examples). And because the virtual physics of Second Life need not correspond to the physics of this world, new combinations of activities
5 The Wicked Tenants (20:9-19) from:
Parables Unplugged
Abstract: There are at least eight factors that influence how the parable is currently understood, although these factors do not appear in the text:
7 The Parables as Persuasion from:
Parables Unplugged
Abstract: The most important challenge when interpreting any parable is recognizing its function: How is it intended to convince its audience? Only thus can its meaning or message can be accurately perceived. Together with the story line, contextual factors such as the speaker, the audience, and the exigency determine the function of a parable. The argumentative structure is just as important. This chapter presents a comprehensive unplugged analysis of every Lukan parable told by Jesus, focusing on these issues.
Book Title: Walking with the Mud Flower Collective-God's Fierce Whimsy and Dialogic Theological Method
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Jost Stina Busman
Abstract: Arguing for a retrieval of the landmark work, God’s Fierce Whimsy, Stina Busman Jost establishes the critical importance of this volume for the construction of a dialogic theological method. This is accomplished through a close reading of God’s Fierce Whimsy in which the author identifies key methodological characteristics informing the volume’s formation. Critical importance also is established through interviews with the volume’s authors, the Mud Flower Collective—which included Katie G. Cannon, Beverly W. Harrison, Carter Heyward, Ada María Isasi-Díaz, Bess B. Johnson (Delores Williams), Mary D. Pellauer, and Nancy D. Richardson. Undergirding this endeavor is a recognition of the theoretical importance of difference to the project of theological construction and the vital form of the dialogic as constitutive of theological practice; this is carried forward through engagement with the pivotal theorists Martin Buber and Mikhail Bakhtin, who helped pioneer the philosophical and literary critical importance of otherness, difference, and dialogue. Finally, the author constructively engages recent developments in feminist theologies and postcolonial theories—ultimately making the argument that a dialogic theological method is relevant for the doing of theology today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vfb
1 Framing a Methodological Approach to Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Before beginning an investigation of any historical text, the question “why” is warranted. Why delve deeply into an examination of
God’s Fierce Whimsy?Why give a careful reading to this text in particular? My answers to these questions—hinted at in the Introduction above—are twofold. First, there is historical significance toGod’s Fierce Whimsythat warrants attention. Second,God’s Fierce Whimsyis a methodological gem. Its profundity has been lost on many—maybe because of its initial lackluster reception or perhaps due to the fact that many theologians who do not self-identify as feminists have failed to understand that
2 Godʹs Fierce Whimsy in the Literature from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: The text under consideration here—
God’s Fierce Whimsy—was published almost thirty years ago. Therefore it has a historical context of its own that must be explored. What have others written about the text? How has it been utilized, critiqued, and engaged following its publication? This history of the text’s impact, which will be the focus of this chapter, is an interesting one, with features both surprising and expected. Up until this point, the text has not received a full analysis or treatment. In many ways, one gets the sense that it is a book that many reference but few
3 Foundational Dialogic Characteristics in Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Dialogue is a term used and affirmed frequently in theology published today. Yet such usage and affirmation do not always translate into actual evidence of dialogue in published work. Undeniably, dialogue may be the means by which a theological work comes into being as a published product,¹ but the emphasis and priority often lie not on this process but on the goal—the end result that entails distinct, definitive claims that can be accessed online or sent to press. In other words, as it concerns theological method, most theological work is primarily teleological in focus,² and while such an approach
4 Reflections on Godʹs Fierce Whimsy in the Words of Members of the Mud Flower Collective from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: In autumn of 2011 I interviewed six of the seven members of the Mud Flower Collective.¹ These women welcomed me into their homes and offices and spent significant time with me recalling and reflecting on the experiences of being a member of the collective. These interviews fundamentally changed my interaction with the text
God’s Fierce Whimsy. I anticipated that conducting these interviews would be important when I began this project, but by the time I was addressing the complexity of relationships and experiences depicted in the text, I realized this research was essential to my project. So too, I expected
5 Discerning the Relevance of Godʹs Fierce Whimsy from:
Walking with the Mud Flower Collective
Abstract: Throughout this project I have suggested that
God’s Fierce Whimsyis a relevant text for contemporary theology. Yet what does such a statement actually entail? While it may be laudable that the Mud Flower Collective wrote in a manner that prioritized dialogue, why should this matter today—and more specifically, why should one make an effort to theologize in a similar manner? To take this inquiry in another direction, a concomitant question would behow—how should one make an effort to theologize in this dialogic manner, especially in light of difference and compounding systemic injustices? These questions will be
Conclusion from:
The World in the Trinity
Abstract: In the Introduction to this book, I noted how Wentzel van Huyssteen has tried to bridge the current gap between scientifically oriented and religiously inspired worldviews in the postmodern Western world by proposing a new kind of interdisciplinary rational reflection, namely, what he calls “transversal rationality.”¹ This new type of rationality is not theory-based or purely cognitive but likewise a performative praxis: “the practice of responsible judgment, that is at the heart of a postfoundationalist notion of rationality, and that enables us to reach fragile and provisional forms of coherence in our interpersonal and interdisciplinary conversations.”² My counterargument was that,
1 Consider the Ostrich from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: She acts harshly against her sons,
2 Eco-Anthropologies of Wisdom in the Hebrew Bible from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: In ancient Israel, Egypt, and Mesopotamia the category of “wisdom” (Hebrew
ḥokmāh; ḥākām) could encompass many different activities and skill sets, exemplified through diverse sub-categories such as upstanding moral behavior, religious observance, expert craftsmanship, scribal prowess, esoteric abilities, political savvy, and storytelling powers.¹ Perhaps the most frequently discussed aspect of wisdom discourse with relation to ecological concerns is the category of creation, strikingly on display through the recitation of a creation narrative or isolated creation motifs.² Specifically, and related to the creation theme, wisdom activity could include compiling lists or delivering learned discourse on plants and animals, and we find
3 Eco-Anthropologies in the Joban Dialogues from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Job’s Friends are infamous for their attempts to comfort Job, and the broad strokes of their arguments are well known: righteous behavior produces a life of harmony and prosperity while wickedness causes sure ruin. In truth, however, the notion that the Friends represent a single viewpoint or argumentative strategy is not exactly borne out by a close reading of the text.¹ Rather, the Friends offer a storm of conflicting viewpoints. Here are two of them: First, there is the “Deuteronomistic,”² or “Proverbial” strategy—life is a type of cosmic math equation (framed as a covenant) in which excellent moral choice
4 Eco-Anthropologies in the Joban God-Speech from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: Since his own assent to the Adversary’s acts of torture in Job 2, God has not spoken—a haunting silence. As Paul Ricoeur explains, the process of narrativization can proceed with two distinct effects: (1) The narrative interprets by way of amplification or explanation, by providing a “why” (God did this
because…), or (2) the “inverse of amplification,” or “reticence.”¹ Opacity has its own power—the longer the Joban characters have argued about Job’s personal relationship to nature and wrongdoing, the longer God is silent, and the more intensely the characters must wonder about the divine perspective. After thirty-five
5 Natural Theologies of the Post-Exilic Self in Job from:
Consider Leviathan
Abstract: In this final chapter I turn to the intersection of ecology, politics, and the role of the specifically Joban “self” in the creation of new possibilities for Israel’s existence in the sixth to fifth centuries bce. In the previous two chapters I have argued that this Joban “self” is a rather insecure entity, torn among several competing fragments of ancient Israelite self-making projects. The Friends’ alluring nature-response covenant posited that Job’s suddenly stunted economic life and blistered body came by way of a morally disobedient self. Job had sinned, and the world reacted. They attempted to restore Job from the
Book Title: The Future of the Word-An Eschatology of Reading
Publisher: Augsburg Fortress Publishers
Author(s): Kriner Tiffany Eberle
Abstract: In scripture, Jesus promises a future that potentiall infuses all texts: "my words will not pass away" (Matt 24:28). This book argues that texts--even literary texts--, have an eschatology, too, a part of God's purpose for the cosmos. They, with all creation, moves toward participation in the new creation, in the Trinity's expanding, creative love. This eschatological future for texts impacts how we understand meaning making, from the level of semiology to that of hermeneutics. This book tells he story of how readers participate in the future of the word, the eschatology of texts. If texts have a future i the kingdom of God, then readers' engagement with them--everything from preservation and utterance to translation, criticism, and call and response--can cultivate those futures in the love of the Trinity. Kriner explores how the fallenness and failures of texts, alongside readers' own failures, while seeming to challenge the future of the word, ultimately point to reading as a posture of reconciliation, in which reader and text meet in the Maranatha of all text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9m0vx3
Literary Scrivenings 1: from:
The Future of the Word
Abstract: The three sections of this book headed
Scriveningsbring out literary texts to play with the theology. Engaging questions of how reading might participate in the becoming, meaning-making, and community-building futures of texts, these interpretations try out the activities of the scribe for the kingdom—in a gloriously messy way. They map the myriad and manifold paths that reading takes outside of philosophical or theological argument, sometimes kicking against the pricks and sometimes seeming to take a turn themselves in the dance of the healing of time.
Chapter 4 The Last Outpost of the Nuclear Family: from:
Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Teman Elly
Abstract: Surrogate motherhood,¹ a practice in which a woman agrees to carry a child to term for a couple who will then keep the child as their own, has emerged from the academic literature as an extreme case study for feminist, ethical, legal, and social concerns. With respect to matters of ethics, scholars have asked if there is not something intrinsically immoral about surrogacy (Brennan and Noggle 1997), and some have denounced the practice as depersonalizing or even dehumanizing of women’s reproductive labor and mutating it into a form of alienation (van Niekerk and van Zyl 1995). In the radical feminist
Chapter 5 Adoption and Assisted Reproduction Technologies: from:
Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Carmeli Yoram S.
Abstract: State policies construct and mold the behavior of individuals and formal bodies, licensing some practices as acceptable, labeling others as not. But they go deeper than that. Initially imposed
Chapter 13 Between Reproductive Citizenship and Consumerism: from:
Kin, Gene, Community
Author(s) Remennick Larissa
Abstract: Some recent sociological analyses of reproduction approached the relations between women as mothers and various social institutions (legal and medical systems, labor market, social welfare, mass media, etc.) within the continuum between reproductive citizenship, on one hand, and individualism/consumerism, on the other. Thus, Bryan Turner (2001) has defined the concept of reproductive citizenship as a route to active social participation through reproduction, all the more important in the times of general erosion of other traditional forms of citizenship (such as worker-citizen and warrior-citizen). Reproductive citizenship is a reflection of nationalism and demographic interests of the state, which has a stake
CHAPTER 2 Concepts of Time in Traditional Cultures from:
Time and History
Author(s) O’Donnell Joseph
Abstract: Time and life measure one another, by way of passage, “caesuras,” activities, and experiences. All this takes place within spaces, both concrete and imagined. Time, life, and space are indissolubly bound together, forming a complementary whole—an
experiencedspace-time.
CHAPTER 3 Time, Ritual, and Rhythm in Dimodonko from:
Time and History
Author(s) Cordero Anne D.
Abstract: Dimodonko was a small, de facto autonomous Nuba land west of the White Nile in the far south of the Nuba Mountains of the Sudan until 1992, when it became the target of a Muslim Jihad militia, as did the entire territory of the Nuba. The last years before this “ethnic cleansing” constitute the situation I describe here, using the “ethnographical present.” My information stems from a field study conducted in 1975 and 1987/88.¹ The structures I intend to describe existed in similar fashion in the wider area of the southern Nuba; I shall refer to them occasionally, but not
CHAPTER 5 Aspects of Zeitdenken in the Inscriptions in Premodern India from:
Time and History
Author(s) Berkemer Georg
Abstract: The present chapter is about the change of the
Zeitdenkenin premodern India in a single group of sources.¹ This group contains the epigraphical material that forms the most important textual base for the historian of premodern South Asia.² It comprises a large number of historical documents that—due to the material they are written on—are termed “inscriptions.” It is not exactly known how many of these texts have been found so far, or how many of them have been published or at least entered in one of the numerous catalogues and find-lists. Estimations are generally between 50,000 and
CHAPTER 7 Constructions of Time in the Literature of Modernity from:
Time and History
Author(s) Compton J. W.
Abstract: My reflections on constructions of time in the literature of modernity begin with an ironic quotation from Nietzsche that I myself do not quote without irony: “He who has once contracted Hegelism and Schleiermacherism, is never quite cured of them.”¹ After an introductory section I will start with “Hegelism”; by the end of the text I will turn to the “Schleiermacherism.”
CHAPTER 8 History, Culture and the Quest for Organism from:
Time and History
Author(s) Al-Azmeh Aziz
Abstract: Since the spread of modernity as a consequence of the French Revolution and the political forms and concepts, the ideologies, and the legal norms it exported, a succession of seekers have set out on a quest for organism, for notions of umbilical immediacy, that is thought to go beyond the arid snares and illusions of Reason, of Jacobinism, of Bonapartism. At the time of the French Revolution and in reaction to it, and after the revolutionary waves of the 1830s and of 1918–1920, no less than after the demise of Communism, voices have multiplied and achieved demotic hegemony, seeking
CHAPTER 9 Competing Visions of History in Internal Islamic Discourse and Islamic-Western Dialogue from:
Time and History
Author(s) An-Na’im Abdullahi A.
Abstract: This paper explores the prospects of a proactive approach to historical thinking in relation to the paradox of human difference and interdependence in a global context. The dual premise of my analysis is the reality and permanence of cultural (including religious) diversity of human societies, on the one hand, and the imperatives of peaceful and cooperative co-existence in an increasingly globalized environment, on the other. Competing visions of history, I suggest, have always been integral to conceptions of self-identity and relationship to the “other,” in individual and communal interactions. But the history of any society would have been mixed, containing
CHAPTER 11 Politics of Historical Sense Generation from:
Time and History
Author(s) Sheth D. L.
Abstract: It is a truism to say that sources of historical sense generation in a society are not confined to history.¹ The recognition that history’s own established procedures of making sense of the past cannot remain insulated from the influence of ideas and action moving the wider society is growing within the discipline of history itself. This has made the discipline pliable to modes of understanding the past developed in other disciplines such as arts, aesthetics, literary theory and criticism, ethnology, sociology, philosophy, linguistics, and so on.²
CHAPTER 1 Internal Rhetorics: from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Nienkamp Jean
Abstract: The ways that we consciously talk to ourselves mentioned above are oft en deliberately cultivated to affect our actions, attitudes and
CHAPTER 5 ‘As if Goya was on hand as a marksman’: from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Nerlich Brigitte
Abstract: Foot and mouth disease (FMD), a highly infectious animal disease, broke out in the U.K. in the spring of 2001 and swept through the countryside for seven months. It attracted long and intensive coverage in the press, on television and on the web. From the start the government declared war on the disease and implemented a slaughter, culling or killing policy, combined with a policy of shutting down the countryside to prevent the spread of the virus. Although this war frame might initially have been useful in rallying support for the slaughter policy and to create a feeling of acceptance,
CHAPTER 6 The Palaestral Aspect of Rhetoric from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Bailey F.G.
Abstract: All rhetoric is palaestral. The metaphor of the wrestling-school is a vehicle for the rhetorical struggle to pin down another person and make him or her accept a definition of the situation. This essay examines the tactics used to do that and the sociocultural context that makes it possible.
CHAPTER 7 Ordeals of Language from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Basso Ellen B.
Abstract: There is a kind of rhetorical functioning in the disorderly zones of human life, which sustains and transforms the persons involved. Linguistic operations at the edges of disorder appear as we engage our human deceptive and imaginative abilities, our abilities to produce alternatives, to resist what we learn is expected of us. In these zones, discomfort with the limits of our own cultures motivates tropological experiments, ‘the sleight of hand at the limit of a text’, as Voloshinov wrote. Here especially, the rhetorics of emotion work to transform socioemotional reality, having a critical and often unwitting impact on social life.
CHAPTER 9 Rhetoric in the Moral Order: from:
Culture, Rhetoric and the Vicissitudes of Life
Author(s) Fernandez James W.
Abstract: We begin argumentatively! There is hardly any other option given the ‘observer effects’ that characterize investigation and inquiry of any kind, and particularly in the human sciences, that intends to be offered up in the
agora.Life in such public culture, as the Sophists well understood, is argument,controversia,and especially figurative argument, argument by analogy,allegory. We argue that moral order should still be a productive interest in anthropology even as concern for ‘moral economy’ and ‘distributive justice’ is being replaced by the idioms of the commoditized market economy, the stimuli of individual choice therein, and bottom-line profitabilities. We
Introduction from:
Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Stone Dan
Abstract: There are several ways to characterize the new perspective on Arendt that we are trying to develop. First, we want to shift attention away from Arendt the
Chapter 6 The Refractory Legacy of Algerian Decolonization: from:
Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Curthoys Ned
Abstract: In this chapter I discuss Hannah Arendt’s critique of revolutionary and anticolonial violence in her essay
On Violence(1969), which makes a critical distinction between violence and legitimate political activity. It has often been assumed that Arendt’s disquisition on the political dangers of violence was written in response to the growing militancy of the student movement and the appropriation of a rhetoric of violent revolution by the New Left in the United States, France, Germany, and other Western countries by the late 1960s. The Paris barricades of May 1968, the riots of that same year at the Democratic National Convention
Chapter 8 Post-Totalitarian Elements and Eichmann’s Mentality in the Yugoslav War and Mass Killings from:
Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Jalušiě Vlasta
Abstract: In the large body of literature about the Holocaust and Nazi totalitarianism today, the extinction of the European Jewish population is treated as an unparalleled act that cannot and should not be repeated. “Never again” has become the motto of commemorations of the victims of Nazi terror in general and as such it represents the heart of the politics of memory, which, through awareness of the Holocaust’s warning, has attempted to create conditions in which the repetition of such an unparalleled crime would be impossible. However, in spite of the persistent claims in the genocide scholarship of its uniqueness and
Chapter 11 The “Subterranean Stream of Western History”: from:
Hannah Arendt and the Uses of History
Author(s) Eaglestone Robert
Abstract: What sort of a book is
The Origins of Totalitarianism?One of Arendt’s strongest defenders, Seyla Benhabib, writes that it is too “systematically ambitious and over-interpreted” to be strictly history, “too anecdotal, narrative and ideographic” for social science, and is “too philosophical” for political journalism.¹ In this chapter I will argue that the work is not only, as others have argued, an act of storytelling, but also an attempt to reframe the stories we tell. I use the word “reframe” precisely because of its Heideggerian echoes. As Arendt’s extraordinarily abstruse fable “Heidegger the Fox” suggests and as much scholarship has
1 Introduction: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Paletschek Sylvia
Abstract: At this point in time, popular presentations of history are booming – not only in the Western world, but worldwide. Recent allusions to history as the ‘new gardening’ by a BBC representative¹ or its characterization as the ‘new cooking’ by historian Justin Champion (2008a) suggest that in Britain history-related television programmes are on their way to outdoing the highly successful gardening or cooking formats in terms of popularity. While this may be a slight exaggeration, the fact is that there has been a rising interest in history since the 1980s. From the second half of the 1990s this interest has
4 Understanding the World around 1900: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Bergenthum Hartmut
Abstract: Why were so many people at that time interested in the history of the world? What factors caused this boom and what did this particular upsurge signify? What kind of stories do these universal histories tell and what do these reveal about Wilhelmine society? What are the functions of these popular historiographies? Why is it worthwhile analysing popular world history compendia in general? And what can be said about the relation between these popular historiographies and the academic mainstream?
5 History for Readers: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Hardtwig Wolfgang
Abstract: When addressing the public, the academic discipline of history has recently been facing unprecedented competition. Television broadcasts and series have been presenting the history of Nazi and post-war Germany in a manner appealing to a broader audience. Motion pictures tell stories from the Third Reich, the air raids and post-war life. Documentaries are in great demand. They offer an attractive combination of solid research, eyewitness interviews, a moving soundtrack and contemporary photographs and filmstrips (Benz 1986; Knopp and Quandt 1988; Bösch 1999: 204–18). As demonstrated by Steven Spielberg’s
Schindler’s List(1993) or by Bernd Eichinger’sThe Downfall(2004), the
7 Moving History: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Bösch Frank
Abstract: In summer 2007, the German public discussed the film
Valkyrie, about Claus Schenk Graf von Stauffenberg and the attempted assassination of Hitler in July 1944. Although filming had only just started, numerous newspapers carried out detailed debates about this piece of popular historiography. An investigative journalist of theSüddeutsche Zeitungeven managed to get access to the screenplay and compared its designated historical facts to academic books and previous films.¹ Famous historians, journalists and relatives of the historical characters explained Stauffenberg’s resistance to Hitler and discussed whether a Hollywood production and an actor like Tom Cruise would be adequate for
9 The Second World War in the Popular Culture of Memory in Norway from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Lenz Claudia
Abstract: As in all countries which were occupied by Germany during the Second World War, the German Occupation in Norway was met by resistance. This resistance was not only carried out by organized military groups but also by parts of the civilian population. Though it took very different forms and developed in different ways, resistance became an elementary component in the national self-image of Norway after 1945. Memory of the resistance in the post-war period was mostly shaped by the circulation of popular stories about ‘resistance heroes’ and their actions – such as in the extensive ‘experience’ literature. Individual participants in
10 Sissi: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Schraut Sylvia
Abstract: ‘Sissi lives!’ a book recently published declared (Webson 1998).¹ A recent Google search of the term ‘Elisabeth von Österreich’ yielded 56,300 hits; a search of the term ‘Sissi’ in combination with Romy Schneider, the actress who played Sissi in the successful film of the same name, yielded 151,000 hits; while 303,000 hits were obtained from a search with the single term ‘Sissi’.² The German
Books in print(Verzeichnis lieferbarer Bücher) recently listed fifty-five historical biographies, coffee-table books and novels on the subject of Elisabeth von Österreich. Keep-sakes and devotional objects are in as well. The ZVAB (a central catalogue of
11 Scientists as Heroes? from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Ceranski Beate
Abstract: In 2005, Germans encountered Albert Einstein virtually everywhere. The jubilee of his
annus mirabilis, 1905, when he published three epochal discoveries, among them the special theory of relativity, brought Einstein to the title pages of all major journals and magazines. A government campaign using the physicist’s quotations and portrait encouraged Germans to become actively involved in cultural, scientific and public life. People queued for hours at the entrance of an Einstein exhibition at the famous Kronprinzenpalais, Berlin, which was one of several important exhibitions about the scientist. Official activities like the Festakt of the German physics society (Deutsche Physikalische Gesellschaft)
12 Das Wunder von Bern: from:
Popular Historiographies in the 19th and 20th Centuries
Author(s) Brüggemeier Franz-Josef
Abstract: The reaction of the German public was quite extraordinary
Book Title: Constructing Charisma-Celebrity, Fame, and Power in Nineteenth-Century Europe
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): GILOI EVA
Abstract: Railroads, telegraphs, lithographs, photographs, and mass periodicals-the major technological advances of the 19th century seemed to diminish the space separating people from one another, creating new and apparently closer, albeit highly mediated, social relationships. Nowhere was this phenomenon more evident than in the relationship between celebrity and fan, leader and follower, the famous and the unknown. By mid-century, heroes and celebrities constituted a new and powerful social force, as innovations in print and visual media made it possible for ordinary people to identify with the famous; to feel they knew the hero, leader, or "star"; to imagine that public figures belonged to their private lives. This volume examines the origins and nature of modern mass media and the culture of celebrity and fame they helped to create. Crossing disciplines and national boundaries, the book focuses on arts celebrities (Sarah Bernhardt, Byron and Liszt); charismatic political figures (Napoleon and Wilhelm II); famous explorers (Stanley and Brazza); and celebrated fictional characters (Cyrano de Bergerac).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qckwq
Introduction from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) GILOI EVA
Abstract: Fame, charisma, celebrity—we use these three words commonly nowadays and often interchangeably. We grant celebrity status to prominent actors and actresses, sports figures, television personalities, and political leaders, some of whom we call famous and charismatic as well. As a former president of the United States, Bill Clinton is famous. He also enjoys celebrity status thanks to myriad magazine covers sporting his easily recognized face. And those with fond memories of his presidency tend to consider him charismatic as well. Princess Diana shared these attributes, only much more so, her apparent charisma enhanced by the whiff of royalty, the
CHAPTER 1 Charisma and the Making of Imperial Heroes in Britain and France, 1880–1914 from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) BERENSON EDWARD
Abstract: In 1874, an unknown French naval ensign, Pierre Savorgnan de Brazza, went to Africa to seek a water route from the Atlantic Ocean to the smooth lakelike reaches of the Upper Congo River. He hoped to bypass the 32 cataracts that forbid all navigation on the lower Congo up to what became known as Stanley Pool. In exploring the banks of the Congo, Brazza claimed a huge swathe of Equatorial Africa for France. It mattered little that this territory lacked economic or strategic value. Brazza’s extraordinary bravery, his apparent willingness to suffer to achieve a nearly impossible goal, made him
CHAPTER 6 Rethinking Female Celebrity: from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) ROBERTS MARY LOUISE
Abstract: Does female celebrity in the nineteenth century warrant our particular attention? Does it differ significantly from male celebrity or can it be deemed impervious to gender norms? In
The Frenzy of Renown, Leo Braudy left such questions aside, focusing his history of fame mostly on men. Though he never denies that societies could celebrate women, he does not examine what happens when they do. It is this question that interests the historian Lenard Berlanstein, who argues that celebrated women, and actresses in particular, evoked more attention than did their male counterparts. Because celebrity in the nineteenth century was defined as
CHAPTER 7 Byron, Death, and the Afterlife from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) MINTA STEPHEN
Abstract: “
Quand on nous a annoncé la mort de Byron, il nous a semblé qu’on nous enlevait une part de notre avenir.”¹ Victor Hugo’s anguished response to the death of Byron was echoed across Europe. Jane Welsh, the future wife of Thomas Carlyle, wrote of her own reaction: “My God, if they had said that the sun or the moon had gone out of the heavens, it could not have struck me with the idea of a more awful and dreary blank in the creation than the words ‘Byron is dead!’” While Carlyle himself felt “as if I had lost a
CHAPTER 9 Celebrity, Patriotism, and Sarah Bernhardt from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) SILVER KENNETH E.
Abstract: After Queen Victoria, Sarah Bernhardt (1844–1923) was probably the most celebrated woman of the nineteenth century and certainly the most famous Frenchwoman. Apart from the drawing power of her obvious talent (the opinions of her theatrical detractors notwithstanding), Bernhardt’s colossal celebrity was dependent upon and inextricably bound up with French prestige: its ancient and recent history, its real and imagined travails. The extent to which Bernhardt and France were the Gemini twins of the
fin-de-siècletheatrical firmament became clear to me when Carol Ockman and I organized the exhibition, “Sarah Bernhardt: The Art of High Drama,” for New York’s
CHAPTER 10 Heroes, Celebrity, and the Theater in Fin-de-Siècle France: from:
Constructing Charisma
Author(s) DATTA VENITA
Abstract: The author of these hyperbolic words is Rosemonde Rostand, describing the reactions to the dress rehearsal of her husband’s play
Cyrano de Bergerac.¹ First presented on the Parisian stage on 27 December 1897, just two weeks prior to the publication of Émile Zola’sJ’Accuse, Edmond Rostand’sCyrano de Bergerachas become one of the most beloved and most often staged plays in the history of the French theater.² Not only did the play mark the birth of Cyrano as a national figure, it also announced the arrival of Rostand as a worldwide celebrity. Almost immediately, Rostand received the Legion of
Book Title: The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Girke Felix
Abstract: "Just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric" - the first half of this central statement from the International Rhetoric Culture Project is abundantly evidenced. It is the latter half that this volume explores: how does culture emerge out of rhetorical action, out of seemingly dispersed individual actions and interactions? The contributors do not rely on rhetorical "text" alone but engage the situational, bodily, and often antagonistic character of cultural and communicative practices. The social situation itself is argued to be the fundamental site of cultural creation, as will-driven social processes are shaped by cognitive dispositions and shape them in turn. Drawing on expertise in a variety of disciplines and regions, the contributors critically engage dialogical approaches in their emphasis on how a view from rhetoric changes our perception of people's intersubjective and conjoint creation of culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcn3h
Introduction from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Meyer Christian
Abstract: The International Rhetoric Culture Project has stated in its theoretical outline that “just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric.” The first part of this chiasmus can readily be accepted, since cross-cultural research on speaker performance, memory techniques, social expression of emotion, practical reasoning, and the interrelation between speaking styles and political organization have provided abundant evidence that rhetoric is culture-specific. Extensive research in folklore studies, the ethnography of speaking, and linguistic anthropology have also proved this claim over and over again, the most spectacular cases being the use of parallelism and metaphor (e.g., Fox 1988,
CHAPTER 1 The Dance of Rhetoric: from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Shotter John
Abstract: A central theme of the Rhetoric Culture project is an exploration of the constitutive interplay occurring between culture and rhetoric—to retrieve, explore, and to make full use of “the ancient insight that
just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric” (Strecker, Meyer & Tyler 2003). I will attempt to do just that below, take this theme out of the seminar room and conference hall and resituate it—as is clearly required—out in the dynamic movements occurring in ordinary people’s everyday activities.
CHAPTER 2 Co-Opting Intersubjectivity: from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Du Bois John W.
Abstract: Just as the role of subjectivity in language is attracting increasing attention from an array of disciplines ranging across linguistics, communication, anthropology, history, philosophy, and others, the thrust of this interest appears to be headed in the opposite direction from an agenda that would place rhetoric at center stage. Rhetoric in its conventional guise has been deemed a quintessentially public enterprise, oriented to the marketplace of propositions projected to appeal to others. In the market square of civil discourse, sellers of ideas invite prospective buyers to critically test the proffered wares for plausibility and persuasiveness. In contrast, subjectivity as popularly
CHAPTER 8 Enhoused Speech: from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Weiner James F.
Abstract: A recent fruitful direction in anthropological linguistics has been the resurrection of interest in language’s deictic features, its constant function of anchoring itself in time and space by way of grammatical markers that “gesture” toward reference points in the world (see, for example, Hanks 1990; Senft 1997). We have ample evidence, especially from Papuan and Austronesian languages, of the high proportion of spatial indices in speech. In this chapter, however, I would like to argue from the opposite direction: that it is also spatial and architectural practices that themselves contour and elicit certain forms of speech; that, rather than language
CHAPTER 9 Transcultural Rhetoric and Cyberspace from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Sapienza Filipp
Abstract: In 1908, the most popular play on Broadway was Israel Zangwill’s “The Melting Pot.” This play portrayed America as a place where different ethnicities are mixed into one kind of “American person,” and when one considers the time period, one understands the source of the play’s popularity. Between the late 1800s and early 1900s, America welcomed more immigrants to its shores than at any other period in its history. As the nation incorporated the new groups, artists and writers responded in ways to help the nation address the changing character and identity of the country. To the present day, the
CHAPTER 13 Rhetoric, Anti-Structure, and the Social Formation of Authorship from:
The Rhetorical Emergence of Culture
Author(s) Zebroski James Thomas
Abstract: We live in an age of ambiguity. At one and the same time, the cultures that we inherit at the start of the twenty-first century in Western Europe and North America are committed to
andskeptical of Enlightenment discourses. The Enlightenment values of neutrality and objectivity in scholarship, of methodological rigor and purity, of scientific method, of disciplinarity, of professionalism, of progress narratives, of grand narrative and grand theory, but also of a static, clearly demarcated, and bounded subject, who acts as a kind of atom of a similarly static, clearly demarcated, and bounded nation-state—all are in question. But
Book Title: Stardom in Postwar France- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Holmes Diana
Abstract: The 1950s and 1960s were a key moment in the development of postwar France. The period was one of rapid change, derived from post-World War II economic and social modernization; yet many traditional characteristics were retained. By analyzing the eruption of the new postwar world in the context of a France that was both modern and traditional, we can see how these worlds met and interacted, and how they set the scene for the turbulent 1960s and 70s. The examination of the development of mass culture in post-war France, undertaken in this volume, offers a valuable insight into the shifts that took place. By exploring stardom from the domain of cinema and other fields, represented here by famous figures such as Brigitte Bardot, Johnny Hallyday or Jean-Luc Godard, and less conventionally treated areas of enquiry (politics [de Gaulle], literary [Francoise Sagan], and intellectual culture [Levi-Strauss]) the reader is provided with a broad understanding of the mechanisms of popularity and success, and their cultural, social, and political roles. The picture that emerges shows that many cultural articulations remained or became identifiably "French," in spite of the American mass-culture origins of these social, economic, and cultural transformations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcnmr
Introduction from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: The aim of this book is to examine the concept and the practice of stardom in the France of the 1950s and 1960s,¹ a period of French history that saw dramatic economic, social and cultural change. Our premise is that the ‘stars’ of a given historical period or moment capture their era for us in a range of ways: that the preoccupations, values, conflicts and contradictions of a particular culture, its ‘climate of feeling’, are vividly expressed through its celebrities. Stardom may be read as a symbolic portal into the nature of a culture, stars as that culture’s ultimate expression.
Chapter 3 ‘A Girl of Today’: from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: Brigitte Bardot – whose career as a film star ended in 1973 – has never completely ceased to command media attention. In the late 1990s, she was in a Parisian court facing a charge of ‘provoking racial discrimination and hatred’ for articles published in the French right-wing daily
Le Figaro.Writing as an animal rights campaigner, she had objected to Muslim slaughter practices, but in a style that reproduced the nationalist, exclusionary rhetoric of the far-rightFront Nationalwho supported her (Duval Smith 1996). In June 2004, she was back in court to be fined for inciting racial hatred in her best-selling
Chapter 5 Stardom on Wheels: from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Dine Philip
Abstract: The cycle road-racer Raymond Poulidor was France’s preeminent sports star of the 1960s and early 1970s. Not widely known outside his homeland, either at the height of his career or subsequently, Poulidor was, on the face of it, an unlikely figure for elevation to sporting stardom. At a time when France was beginning to make a significant impact in international sport, many other champions were perceived as distinctly more glamorous than him: from Olympic athletes like Guy Drut and Colette Besson, to dashing skiers and sailors such as Jean-Claude Killy and Eric Tabarly, and even a swimmer turned cover-girl, in
Chapter 8 ‘Starlette de la Littérature’: from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Lloyd Heather
Abstract: Françoise Sagan became a major celebrity in 1954 at the age of eighteen, when she won a literary prize, the
Prix des Critiques,with her best-selling first novelBonjour tristesse.No discussion of celebrity in postwar France would be complete without reference to her, for a number of reasons. Firstly, coming to fame when she did, Sagan was a very early arrival in the postwar firmament of stars, predating Bardot and Hallyday, for example. Secondly, she was truly an icon, in that she was extensively photographed and her image was widely diffused in what, practically speaking, was a pretelevisual age.¹
Conclusion from:
Stardom in Postwar France
Author(s) Holmes Diana
Abstract: For France, the quarter-century between the end of World War II and the early 1970s was a period of extremely rapid social change – economic, political and demographic – which informed the lived experience of millions of individuals. These years were characterised particularly by the strong pull of a new modernity, in difficult and often acute tension with the past. The new emerged, but strongly informed by the old, as well as by the progressive and oppressive possibilities of a new, fast-moving, consumerised culture that expanded in the context of a remarkable and sustained economic boom. In this fertile period of French
Book Title: Dark Traces of the Past-Psychoanalysis and Historical Thinking
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains an open debate that is full of tension, in both a positive and a negative sense. In particular, the following question has not been answered satisfactorily: what distinguishes a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities from a historical psychoanalysis? Skepticism and fear of collaboration dominate on both sides. Initiating a productive dialogue between historical studies and psychoanalysis seems to be plagued by ignorance and, at times, a sense of helplessness. Interdisciplinary collaborations are rare. Empirical research, formulation of theory, and the development of methods are essentially carried out within the conventional disciplinary boundaries. This volume undertakes to overcome these limitations by combining psychoanalytical and historical perspectives and thus exploring the underlying "unconscious" dimensions and by informing academic and nonacademic forms of historical memory. Moreover, it puts special emphasis on transgenerational forms of remembrance, on the notion of trauma as a key concept in this field, and on case studies that point the way to further research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpp5
I Psychoanalysis, History, and Historical Studies: from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Straub Jürgen
Abstract: The relationship between historical studies and psychoanalysis remains a concern that is open and full of tensions, in both a positive and negative sense. Particularly the question, what would distinguish a psychoanalytically oriented study of historical realities and the consciousness involved with these realities—that is a historical psychoanalysis—upon which this present volume focuses, has not been satisfactorily answered. Scepticism and fear of contact dominate on both sides. Here and there ignorance prevails, and at times there is a definite sense of helplessness concerning how a productive dialogue could even be initiated between historical studies and psychoanalysis, given the
CHAPTER 3 Identity, Overvaluation, and Representing Forgetting from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Emrich Hinderk M.
Abstract: The act of remembering does not necessarily relate to what has actually taken place; it has a peculiar, intrinsically metaphorical quality of “as if.” Remembering is a process of representing that does not merely involve calling up data as if playing back a tape recording or running a CD-ROM. Rather, representing something by remembering it creates an experiential context along the lines of “Things are just like they were back then.” Genuine remembering is a process of transporting oneself back, of retrieving a past emotional situation. We are what we are because of our past experience; our existence is always
CHAPTER 7 On Social and Psychological Foundations of Anti-Semitism from:
Dark Traces of the Past
Author(s) Brede Karola
Abstract: Hitler’s Willing Executioners, authored by Daniel J. Goldhagen and published in 1996, was not least a vehement criticism of conventional research. The German edition was released in the same year that the original English edition came out in the United States. In his book, Goldhagen posits that during the period of National Socialism, the Germans had held an active anti-Semitic attitude featuring eliminatory characteristics toward the Jews. This thesis, which provoked fierce reactions from both the German public and within specialist circles, notably among historians, was eventually rejected as untenable. Essentially, Goldhagen’s mistake was held to have been classifying the
Book Title: Human Nature as Capacity-Transcending Discourse and Classification
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Rapport Nigel
Abstract: What is it to be human? What are our specifically human attributes, our capacities and liabilities?Such questions gave birth to anthropology as an Enlightenment science. This book argues that it is again appropriate to bring "the human" to the fore, to reclaim the singularity of the word as central to the anthropological endeavor, not on the basis of thesubstanceof a human nature - "To be human is to act like this and react like this, to feel this and want this" - but in terms of species-widecapacities: capabilities for action and imagination, liabilities for suffering and cruelty. The contributors approach "the human" with an awareness of these complexities and particularities, rendering this volume unique in its ability to build on anthropology's ethnographic expertise.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcpw2
INTRODUCTION TO PART I from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part Idescribe human capacities that locate actors beyond the economy; both in the sense of providing an ethnographic fullness to individual lives that exceeds the narrow determinisms of
Homo oeconomicus, and in the sense of charting a course to individual lives that sees them escaping the logic of any one economic system or set of relations. Here are Mexican migrants in Canada (Chapter 1) and Canadian students working abroad (Chapter 2) whose ‘liminality’, alike, cannot be construed, conscripted, as serving purely economic calls, whether of nation, family, sector or even global marketplace. An understanding of these
Chapter 2 THE LIMITS OF LIMINALITY: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Amit Vered
Abstract: The topic of student travel readily evokes two long-standing tropes of transition and change. On the one hand, youth is commonly regarded as quintessentially ephemeral. On the other hand, since the Grand Tour of the sixteenthth and seventeenth centuries, travel has often been associated with processes of self-formation and transformation. Both youth and travel also call to mind the interaction between change as a modality of personal as well as broader social formation. Thus the Grand Tour through Continental Europe was intended to serve as the basis for the cultivation of elite tastes among young British aristocrats. The transitions identified
INTRODUCTION TO PART II from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part II look at human capacities that locate actors beyond the polity. In ethnographic detailing of the contemporary European Union (Chapter 3) and of a mid-century United States of America (Chapter 4) alike, an understanding of individual behaviour is to be gained only be setting the context of the polity against an awareness of kinds of social relations–duties, potential commitments, possible consociations – that lie beyond it. Actors have the capacity to deal flexibly, ironically, with the political institutions that seek to claim critical dues on their loyalty, their senses of belonging and compassion.
Chapter 4 MAKING THE COSMOPOLITAN PLEA: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Suski Laura
Abstract: Many commentators might agree with Ulrich Beck’s claim that the ‘human condition has itself become cosmopolitan’ (2006:2). There is, however, little agreement as to how this impacts upon the ethical relationship between cosmopolitan subjects. If there is an increase in the transnational flows of people, commodities, labour, and information, and if these trends are accompanied by the declining role of the state and the emergence of international institutions, what does this mean for our moral obligations to those beyond the traditional spaces of family, community, and particularly the nation? My interest in cosmopolitanism lies specifically at the intersection of what
INTRODUCTION TO PART III from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part III find human actors immersed in worlds of categories and things, of identities and relationships that take on classificatory forms. Indeed, in these chapters ethnographic attention is focused on the very thing-iness of human social existence: on our seeming modern fetish of inventing new things – ‘entifying’ – whereby life can become further specialized and commodified (Chapter 6); and on people treated as kinds of things, valued according to where they happen to have been born (Chapter 5). But it is also true to say that here are the human capacities to reflect on the
Chapter 5 MONEY, MATERIALITY AND IMAGINATION: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Irving Andrew
Abstract: From a distance it may seem that the dialogue between money and imagination is located in mind, consciousness and cognitive capacity rather than materiality and body. Indeed, the material body of money is seen as less important than the semiotic value attached to certain objects by way of the brain’s ability to invest substance with meaning and purpose. ‘Money’ – suggests Norman O. Brown – ‘is inorganic dead matter which has been made alive’ (1970 [1959]:245). The discarded bodies of different material substances, often with little practical utility, such as clay, shells, teeth, stones, paper and beads are brought to
INTRODUCTION TO PART IV from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Rapport Nigel
Abstract: The two essays in Part IV look at human capacities that take actors beyond the body, narrowly and conventionally defined. The body does not limit human activities and potentialities insofar as the imagination is transcendent (Chapter 8). One imagines one’s way into other bodies, into being-with and being-for other bodies – where ‘other bodies’ include both the individual’s own and those of other people. One can imagine bodily otherness that exceeds the limits both of one’s current physique and of current sociocultural definition. Likewise, the body is not a limit insofar as the skills it can learn and incorporate give
Chapter 8 ‘LIVE IN FRAGMENTS NO LONGER’: from:
Human Nature as Capacity
Author(s) Skinner Jonathan
Abstract: As a social science, it is characteristic of anthropology to examine the particularities of human cultures through detailed and nuanced ethnographic investigation (Crapanzano 2004; Abu Lughod 1993). In so doing, a choice is made by anthropologists as to whether or not to deploy etic distinctions between culture and nature and between human and animal – the former with the capacity ‘to produce’ in order to live (Godelier 1986) – or to work from emic constructions of like divisions and the ways in which people locally live by them, or to challenge and contest all such divisions as anthropocentric (Bateson 1999;
1 The Intellectual Pursuit of the Sacred from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: The central goal of this book is to map the emergence, trajectory, and influence of a very particular kind of intellectual project that I call
mystic Durkheimianism, which unites two seemingly very strange bedfellows: Durkheimian sociology and poststructuralism. An understanding of its existence and influence in the French intellectual world will contribute to a better understanding of some otherwise fairly mysterious facts in intellectual history. Moreover, there are to date no treatments of this important piece of the history of French social theory by a sociologist using sociological terms and tools, and I hope to contribute to the work of
3 The Scene of Durkheimian Sociology: from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: We can date the period during which the core activity of the Durkheimians takes place roughly from 1896 to 1914. The first date is the year of the founding of the
Annéeand Durkheim’s first meeting with Hubert through his nephew. The latter date marks the outbreak of World War I, and both Hertz and Durkheim died during the war, while Hubert had little more than half a decade to live following its conclusion. The period of the greatest influence of the Durkheimians, at least in terms of their presence and power in the university and publishing worlds and in
7 Being a Durkheimian Intellectual from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: We now have something of a macro-sociological image of the two fields in which our two groups of intellectuals put their ideas into play, as well as information on the masters of ceremonies for the two groups and the central political event that positioned both. However, the reconstruction of their
habitusrequires a closer examination of the ways in which the members of the two groups actively viewed and set about the process of constructing identities as intellectuals in the two periods from within more intimate micro-social networks of influences and collaborators and in response to the set of intellectual
8 The Sacred in Durkheimian Thought I from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: What is the definition of the sacred in the Durkheimian school? The text to which virtually everyone who is interested in responding to this question looks is
Les Formes élémentaires de la vie religieusewhere the term is a key to the definition of religion: “A religion is a solidary system of beliefs and practices relative to sacred things, that is, things that are separated and forbidden, beliefs and practices that unite in a single moral community, called a Church, all those who adhere to them” (Durkheim 1991 [1912]: 108–9). But what exactly is this thing, the sacred? What
9 The Sacred in Durkheimian Thought II: from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: In endeavoring to explain the fact that the Durkheimian religion cluster primarily wrote about primitive societies while other important members of the Durkheimian team, e.g., Maurice Halbwachs and François Simiand, concentrated on Western society, W. Paul Vogt argues that the religion cluster studied primitives in part because they had an attitude of “despair” regarding the modern world. They perceived something troubling about the contemporary situation in the West and attempted to use primitive societies as a means for pointing to what had been lost in the move to modernity (Vogt 1976: 43). According to this account, the religion cluster believed
10 The Line of Descent of the Mystics: from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: In Chapter 5, I looked at some of the reasons for the decline of Durkheimian thought in French academic institutions following Durkheim’s death in 1917. The goal there was to respond to a pressing question: why this near total abandonment of an intellectual and political position that was one of the more powerful and promising ones during the middle Third Republic? Although Terry Clark’s (1973) claim for a general shift in temperament in the Latin Quarter from cartesianism to spontaneism is less an explanation than a description of the effects of some other causal factors, it seems indisputable that a
11 Being a Poststructuralist Intellectual from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: One of the central ideas that emerged from the discussion of the development of the personal identities of the Durkheimians (in Chapter 7) has to do with what might be called their minoritarian
habitus. The Jewishness of Durkheim, Mauss, and Hertz is the most obvious element here. A related fact had to do with the manner in which the mystic Durkheimians Hertz and Mauss pursued a particular kind of transfigured political project that was fundamentally tied to their minoritarian identities. In this chapter, I will explore the ways in which the poststructuralist group is similarly operating from minoritarian positions, if
13 Godless Intellectuals, Then? from:
Godless Intellectuals?
Abstract: At the conclusion of
Formes élémentaires, Durkheim posed a question: What shape will religion take in the future, as secularization, already well underway in his time, continues its expansion? I have argued that he was posing this question for the intellectuals as much as for everyone else, and that the echoes of that fact resounded in some ways that have not been fully understood. Mystic Durkheimianism, in its incarnations among the youngAnnéemembers, in the Collège de Sociologie, or in some varieties of the poststructuralism that emerged in France in the 1960s, constitutes a fascinatingly nuanced intellectual response to
Book Title: Practicing the Faith-The Ritual Life of Pentecostal-Charismatic Christians
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Lindhardt Martin
Abstract: Over the past decades, Pentecostal-charismatic Christianity has arguably become the fastest growing religious movement in the world. Distinguishing features of this variant of Christianity include formal ritual activities as well as informal, experiential, and ecstatic forms of worship. This book examines Pentecostal-charismatic ritual practice in different parts of the world, highlighting, among other things, the crucial role of ritual in creating religious communities and identities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qcrsh
Introduction from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Lindhardt Martin
Abstract: Over the past thirty to forty years, Pentecostalism and charismatic revivalism within mainline Protestant churches and the Catholic church have proved to be the fastest growing religious movement in the world. This movement is characterized by an emphasis on the continuous manifestations and gifts of the Holy Spirit (the charismata),¹ on personal salvation, the immanent return of Christ, and not least by high degrees of ritual activity.
4 Ritualization of Life from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Csordas Thomas J.
Abstract: The most compelling aspect of Charismatic and Pentecostal ritual is not its repertoire of specific ritual practices such as speaking in tongues, laying on of hands, or resting in the Spirit. It is not the inventory of ritual events such as prayer meetings, healing services, or revival meetings. Neither is it the integrated system of ritual language genres including prophecy, prayer, teaching, and witnessing. What is most compelling is the manner in which ritual performance has the potential, for individuals and communities, to bring about the transformation of everyday life, to generate a new habitus, indeed to subsume quotidian practices
9 Quiet Deliverances from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Bialecki Jon
Abstract: In anthropological and sociological literature, charismatic Christianity is often thought through in experiential and embodied terms; this is particularly true of writing on the Vineyard, a Southern California–originated, worldwide denomination that sees itself as combining the best of both pentecostal and evangelical practice. Tracing its roots back to the “Jesus Movement” of the 1960s, the Vineyard is now a denomination that rejects its denominational status, presenting itself as a church-planting “movement.” The Vineyard, however, has effects that exceed its own body (denominational or otherwise): the Vineyard is seen as playing a vital role in the “Californianization” of American Protestantism
10 Imperfect Vessels: from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Pfeil Gretchen
Abstract: Attempts to discuss the central ritual forms of American Pentecostal and charismatic Christianity, among them conversion narrative and sermon, are troubled by a seeming conflict. They seem to be ritual forms, and at the same time, to be something more, even opposed to ritual action. The urgency and personal quality of these forms of devotional practice lead, sometimes, to readings of them as transparent statements of fact. Conversion narrative, for example, is both clearly a form of devotional practice and also “real,” compelling as autobiography and a source of information about practitioners’ lives. This chapter unpacks this paradoxical quality to
11 Public Rituals and Political Positioning: from:
Practicing the Faith
Author(s) Smilde David
Abstract: This chapter differs from the other chapters in this book insofar as it looks not at the way ritual forms part of charismatic Christian practice at the microlevel, in personal or interpersonal religiosity. Rather, it looks at the way ritual is utilized by evangelical organizations in Venezuela, in their efforts to publicly position themselves in a complex political field. Such an analysis of this ritual activity will help us not only understand evangelical churches and associations, it will also help us understand some key issues in the study of Latin American politics and popular movements.
Introduction. from:
Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: Around the end of the 1970s a private furniture manufacturer from Struga (a town in southwest Macedonia) began producing wood-carved furniture.A decade later, during the period of the postsocialist transition, the proprietor named his company
Barok.This name was launched to signify opulence, wealth, and style. At the outset, the main line of production consisted of custom, handmade, luxurious (luksuzni) pieces of carved wood that required lengthy manufacturing time and cost a significant amount of money. These were purchased mainly by the members of the newly rich who had become wealthy due to their dealings in the new market economy
CHAPTER 1 From past necessity to contemporary friction: from:
Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: This chapter provides background for the circumstances under which large numbers of Albanians were “encouraged” or forced to emigrate during the Yugoslav years. It further establishes this process as the basis that later made available the resources for this underprivileged minority to become socially mobile once Yugoslavia collapsed, and the postsocialist period was introduced. Outlining the necessary historical context of the migration policies during the Socialist Federal Republic of Yugoslavia (1943–91) and the “place” of Albanian minority during socialist times, I explore the effect of diasporic connections on consumption practices, the visibility and materiality of objects brought in by
CHAPTER 3 “Modern” masculinities: from:
Ethno-Baroque
Abstract: While conducting the household survey as part of my research, I received explicit proof of how important education has become for ethnic Albanians. It was a Friday afternoon on a hot summer day. I was in my top-floor apartment, working with my research assistant, Adnan, a twenty-eight-year-old ethnic Albanian man who had been helping me for the past year. I had become very close to him and his fiancé Mersiha, and his extended family was one of the most important contact base throughout my research. We had grown to be a well-synchronized team. It was his turn to dictate while
One Road to Autopia: from:
The French Road Movie
Abstract: This chapter will consider the road movie as a trans-contextual or parodic form, mainly through an analysis of
Les Valseuses. However, just as it is proved important to reconsider the road movie’s historical flow of influence, it will be equally important in this instance to consider the workings of parody. Parody, I suggest here, is positioned ambivalently between the thing it derides and a fascination with that same thing. The objects of desire that are the perennial targets of parody, in other words, may prove more significant than the act of parodying itself. As I argue in this chapter, this
Four Nowhere Men: from:
The French Road Movie
Abstract: It need not be stressed that, in film-historical terms, the road movie is predominantly a man’s genre. It also goes without saying that, because of this fact, the genre has come in for its fair share of criticism. Much of the discourse around the road genre that focuses on its notionally unreconstructed masculinity (and which gives rise to the generic inversions we witness in a number of road movies) can be seen as part of a wider questioning of the dominant fiction of patriarchy, and therefore also of mainstream cinematic narrative; the two of which come together as a target
Six Travel and the Transnational Road Movie in the Twenty-First Century from:
The French Road Movie
Abstract: If what we understand by ‘transnational cinema’ is to a large extent still a definition in progress, the connection between mobility and travel within the terms of the transnational has assumed critical currency. To suggest that this is a necessary connection is really to beg the question, in fact, of what transnational means, and more specifically what is at stake in the process of naming it. This is an important task, given that the recent topicality of transnational cinema, as far as its academic study is concerned, is based less on its status as a cinematic trend, than on the
Afterword from:
The French Road Movie
Abstract: The aim of this book has been to historicize and understand French cinema’s exploration of the road movie. As I suggested in my introduction, this is not a straightforward task. As the road movie is dif-fi cult to identify in culturally specific terms, and is therefore always a genre in search of its identity, a French road movie is engaged in a constant negotiation of its own physical and conceptual boundaries. In fact, as I hope to have shown, analysing the ‘French road movie’ ultimately begs the question of its ‘French-ness’. If the road movie, to an extent, resists being
INTRODUCTION: from:
A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: ‘History does not exist’, writes Susan Crane, ‘apart from our thinking it. Clearly, there are as many ways of experiencing history as there are histories to experience’.¹ Such an experience and understanding of history, however, was never a part of my growing up; history books meant an immersion in drudgery, a laborious saunter down a thick slush of facts and a wrestle with the imminent prospect of comeuppance in the event of forgetting some details while writing tests. History lessons meant an effort to fight back a yawn, a survival cry against a mounting stockpile of information that almost always
CHAPTER 2 Reality of Representation, Reality behind Representation: from:
A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: The two terms that form a contrasting pair are
effacement(forgetfulness) andconservation.Memory is, always and necessarily, an interaction between the two. The complete restitution of the past is terrifying and a clear impossibility (one, however, that Borges imagined in his story of ‘Funes, the Memorious’). Memory is essentially a selection: certain traits of an event are conserved, others immediately or progressively set aside and forgotten. Hence it is baffling that the ability Computers have to save information is termed memory, since they lack a basic feature of memory,
CHAPTER 3 Whose Mandir? Whose Masjid? from:
A Lover's Quarrel with the Past
Abstract: The fantasy, faith, fanaticism and furore over several cases involving the ‘romance’ and ‘representation’ of history drive the historian into the eye of the storm and, unavoidably, beg an interrogation into the politics of writing history, the ethics of reading and the impact that multiple discourses ranging across several disciplinary domains and contemporary existential aggravations can engineer on a historian’s
commitmentto his discipline. Doing history is inflected by the deeply invested milieu in which a historian finds him-or herself continually exposed to a farrago of conflicting propositions and positions. This gives rise to the need to grow a distinct
Book Title: Melanesian Odysseys-Negotiating the Self, Narrative, and Modernity
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Josephides Lisette
Abstract: In a series of epic self-narratives ranging from traditional cultural embodiments to picaresque adventures, Christian epiphanies and a host of interactive strategies and techniques for living, Kewa Highlanders (PNG) attempt to shape and control their selves and their relentlessly changing world. This lively account transcends ethnographic particularity and offers a wide-reaching perspective on the nature of being human. Inverting the analytic logic of her previous work, which sought to uncover what social structures concealed, Josephides focuses instead on the cultural understandings that people make explicit in their actions and speech. Using approaches from philosophy and anthropology, she examines elicitation (how people create their selves and their worlds in the act of making explicit) and mimesis (how anthropologists produce ethnographies), to arrive at an unexpected conclusion: that knowledge of self and other alike derives from self-externalization rather than self-introspection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd3fk
Chapter 3 Narrating the Self I: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The previous chapter provided a conceptual framework for understanding human interactions as operations that construct the self and the other in a reciprocal activity through forcefully eliciting practices. The same operations simultaneously negotiate understandings of cultural practices and social knowledge. Subsequent chapters will show how much of this activity is telescoped in the accounts that people give about themselves, their lives and their achievements. The importance of narrative, then, is from the outset analytically bound up with the human interactions that are central to this study. The present chapter does something different: it uses older people’s narratives to provide for
Chapter 4 Narrating the Self II: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The narratives in this chapter establish continuity with those in the previous one, by picking up the Kewa story from exactly the same place–in the midst of courtship, marriage and war. But immediately thereafter other features differentiate these narratives sharply from the earlier ones, both as biographical accounts and as philosophical views of the nature of the relationship of the self to its world. Four main features, expanded in the conclusion to this chapter, appear to follow sequentially and may themselves be stated as a narrative. The middle-aged people who tell their stories in this chapter straddle two worlds,
Chapter 5 Narrating the Self III: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The narratives in chapters 4 and 5 draw their vitality and very life from the landscape painted in the chapter preceding each of them. Then, sometimes tentatively but always inevitably, they proceed to paint over it, creating a palimpsest of culture, traditions, practices, ethics, persons. By now the landscape painted by the earliest narratives is completely written over, and the experiences of the narrators are based on a transformed reality. The younger adults in this chapter are all involved in the new spheres of life; instead of wars, spirit houses, courting and magic, they talk of roadbuilding work, plantation labour,
Chapter 6 Portraits and Minimal Narratives: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: It is one thing to tell a story and quite another to engage in theoretical debate. To imbue narrative with theory is always a small miracle, even when the theory was extracted from the narrative in a barely conscious process of distillation, until it emerged fully-formed, both explicans and explicandum.¹ But once theory has taken on that separate existence – clean, concise and economical, unencumbered by the messiness of multistranded life which nevertheless is congealed in it – it passes as pure understanding and wrong-foots narrative, as being excessive to its needs. In the following chapters as in previous ones I shall
Chapter 7 Love and All That: from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: The materials that make up this chapter include rehearsed talk, individual persons’ accounts of things that happened, and events I observed myself. I switch from one type of source to the other, and from one person’s narrative to another’s. My informants also switch codes in their narratives, from the collective ideal to the individuating, from apparently descriptive, uncontested rehearsed talk to the domain of fantasy. The section on polygyny and conflict zooms in on actual conflicts as they occur and the responses of those affected by them. In the concluding sections I proceed as in chapter 5, first summing up
Chapter 9 Mimesis, Ethnography and Knowledge from:
Melanesian Odysseys
Abstract: In an earlier ethnography (Josephides 1985) I traced a Kewa ‘master narrative’ as it attempted to account for the production of inequalities in so-called egalitarian societies. It presented a generalized picture of culture and dealt with the problems of a complex social reality by means of a theoretical stratagem that posited a contradiction between ideology and practice.¹ The present work complements that ethnography with a picture of everyday social interactions, including many-layered accounts, whose effect is to break up any putative master narrative about ‘Kewa culture’. People’s constant endeavours to shape their lives in complex negotiations within specific situations, drawing
Chapter 3 Between Commemoration and Social Activism: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Santino Jack
Abstract: The death of any individual strikes at the hearts of the living. Family and friends mourn a lost life; a community recognizes a permanent loss. If a death is thought to have been needless—or worse, politically motivated—mourning may well take on the trappings of public protest. Along with the official rituals of church and state, we often see, as the editors of this volume suggest, a kind of “grassroots memorialization,” in which individuals are mourned as a form of social action. When the causes of death are objectionable, foreseeable, or avoidable, people often mourn publicly in protest (Margry
Chapter 6 Ghost Bikes: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Dobler Robert Thomas
Abstract: In October 2003, the first “ghost bike” appeared in St. Louis, Missouri, to memorialize the death of a cyclist who had been hit by a car. A local bicycle shop owner witnessed the accident and placed a mangled bike, painted stark white, on the scene, with a sign proclaiming “Cyclist struck here.” The movement quickly spread beyond St. Louis, and similar memorials have since appeared in thirty other cities across North and South America, Europe, and Australia, creating a network of mourners and activists who are working to increase vehicular awareness of bicyclists. The sudden popularity of ghost bike memorials
Chapter 8 Remembering La Tragedia: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Revet Sandrine
Abstract: In societies that experience catastrophic events, numerous practices are aimed at endowing those events with meaning. The contingent nature of a catastrophe and the disorder it creates are inconsistent with the human sense of reason and provoke anxiety. To overcome the anxiety and limit the disorder, societies generally seek to reestablish order by explaining the catastrophe and by evaluating it, narrating it, commemorating it, and trying to prevent its repetition. All of these processes enable people to deal actively with the disorienting event and to convert disorder into order (Balandier 1988).
Chapter 9 Street Shrines and the Writing of Disaster: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Fraenkel Béatrice
Abstract: First, I would like to put forward a general hypothesis that is, I think, corroborated by the various recent scholarly studies on grassroots memorials and spontaneous shrines. This phenomenon can be called a “new culture of disaster,” and it is currently shared by large numbers of people around the world. Beyond the specificity of each society, history, and religion, when a catastrophe strikes, people seem to draw on the same repertory of actions. For centuries, we have shared a common political activism in the form of demonstrations and strikes (Tilly 1986). But the public culture of disaster seems different for
Chapter 10 The Madrid Train Bombings: from:
Grassroots Memorials
Author(s) Sánchez-Carretero Cristina
Abstract: For more than a hundred years, anthropologists and psychologists have dealt with the role of collective mourning and the analysis of the roots of emotions. Although emotions are central for the understanding of grassroots memorials, emotions themselves are rarely the focus of research on the topic. At the same time, there is a clear social demand for the interpretation of emotions in order to, for example, understand the instrumentalizations that emotions can be the subject of in times of conflict and social unrest. In the acts of mourning performed at grassroots memorials, the emotions at play cover a wide range,
Chapter 2 Resettlement: from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: In his article, “German Railroads/Jewish Souls,” Raul Hilberg asked: “How can railways be regarded as anything more than physical equipment that was used, when the time came, to transport the Jews from various cities to shooting grounds and gas chambers in Eastern Europe?”¹ The railroads were a formative scholarly preoccupation for Hilberg, who trawled the archives, “pondering the special trains, the assembly of their rolling stock, their special schedules, and their financing.”² He concluded that in the hands of bureaucrats and technocrats, the railroads metamorphosed, becoming a “live organism” that “acted in concert with Germany’s military, industry, or SS to
Chapter 3 Ghetto Departures: from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: The unmaking of the modern railway experience began before victims were forced to board the trains. Roundups, unannounced inspections, ruthless extractions from apartments, and beatings were all features of the forced relocation from ghettos, towns, and villages. Observing the deportation of Jews from Salonica, Greece, Rosa Miller wrote: “And the Jews emerge, weighed down by their rucksacks, their bundles, their bags, loaded with baskets containing food for the journey ahead. Children press close to their parents, uncomprehending, fearfully following their every move. Older people have difficulty in walking, they stumble and fall sometimes, but everybody must carry their burden. Young
Chapter 4 Immobilization in “Cattle Cars” from:
The Train Journey
Abstract: With this letter, Zalmen Gradowski, a worker in a Sonderkommando unit at Auschwitz, issued an invitation. Enter the “eternally traveling Jewish train,” he asked, a plea that is not limited to wartime trains if one looks at the image of the freight car housed in the permanent exhibition at the United States Holocaust Memorial Museum (USHMM) in Washington, DC (see Figure 4.1). The image of the freight car fuses historical space and contemporary memory practices. By looking at the platform of Auschwitz from the departure side of the rail car, the photo promises an Auschwitz arrival to the museum visitor.
Book Title: Culture and Rhetoric- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Tyler Stephen
Abstract: While some scholars have said that there is no such thing as culture and have urged to abandon the concept altogether, the contributors to this volume overcome this impasse by understanding cultures and their representations for what they ultimately are - rhetorical constructs. These senior, international scholars explore the complex relationships between culture and rhetoric arguing that just as rhetoric is founded in culture, culture is founded in rhetoric. This intersection constitutes the central theme of the first part of the book, while the second is dedicated to the study of figuration as a common ground of rhetoric and anthropology. The book offers a compelling range of theoretical reflections, historical vistas, and empirical investigations, which aim to show how people talk themselves and others into particular modalities of thought and action, and how rhetoric and culture, in this way, are co-emergent. It thus turns a new page in the history of academic discourse by bringing two disciplines - anthropology and rhetoric - together in a way that has never been done before.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qd5rt
Introduction from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Tyler Stephen
Abstract: Many factors contribute to the shaping of human action, but rhetoric, we argue, is the decisive factor in the emergence of cultural diversity past and present.
CHAPTER 1 The Rhetoric Culture Project from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Strecker Ivo
Abstract: The Rhetoric Culture¹ project arises from a fundamental chiasmus that leads us to explore the ways in which rhetoric structures culture and culture structures rhetoric. It calls for a program of research whose basic topics are the interrelationships between cultural forms of practice, passion, and reason; and it seeks to understand the culturally generated orders of discourse—and their technologies of production.
CHAPTER 5 Practice of Rhetoric, Rhetoric of Practice from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Bartoli Vincenzo Cannada
Abstract: The present essay grows out of this question: What is it that makes the chiasmus “practice of rhetoric, rhetoric of practice” at first so convincing but then, on second thought, so agonizingly difficult to understand? To answer, we need to reconsider the intersection of rhetoric and practice. Among the many authors dealing with this subject, Farrell (1999) has examined rhetoric in terms of practice, and practice in terms of rhetoric, and his questions are very close to those I pose below. However, we differ in our basic interests—philosophy for him, ethnography for me—and while Farrell examines the political
CHAPTER 6 Chiastic Thought and Culture: from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Wiseman Boris
Abstract: This chapter entertains a special relationship with the Rhetoric Culture project as a whole in as much as the dynamic at the heart of this project is itself chiastic. One of the characteristics of Rhetoric Culture theory is the reversibility of its “critical moments” (see the introduction to this volume). In as much as all social and cultural practices are linguistically mediated, they are at least in part tributary to rhetoric. One may therefore turn to rhetoric to make sense of these practices and shed light on the dynamics that underpin them. The need to interrelate anthropology and rhetoric arises,
CHAPTER 7 When Fair Is Foul and Foul Is Fair: from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Paul Anthony
Abstract: Shakespeare’s interest in the ways that rhetorical discourse and culture interact is expressed in his countless references to the similarity between living and acting, and in his fascination with the figures of the actor, the hypocrite, and the king, the man most conspicuously called upon to perform a part in the drama of life. The comparison of the world with the stage is of course an ancient one, and one that runs through all of English Renaissance drama from the mid-sixteenth century to 1642, the year the theaters were closed down, not to reopen until 1660. But it is a
CHAPTER 9 Figuration—a Common Ground of Rhetoric and Anthropology from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Salazar Philippe-Joseph
Abstract: Rhetoric has its own definitions for terms, not to say concepts, that often crop up, as if by themselves, in other disciplines. In fact, one of the enduring features of rhetoric is, as Aristotle would have it, that it is a “technique” that cannot aspire to be a science because it does not have an object of its own. Rhetoric is by essence latitudinarian and the price to be paid is that of being pillaged by the human sciences, which own their objects, or believe that they do. Rhetoric has many Others. It is a way to preserve what has
CHAPTER 10 Tropical Foundations and Foundational Tropes of Culture from:
Culture and Rhetoric
Author(s) Fernandez James W.
Abstract: We might first found the tropological point of view in social science inquiry in two ancient founding figures, the Pre-Socratic philosopher Heraclitus and the Roman Rhetorician Quintillian. As with all the contributors to our common Rhetoric Culture project, “social science inquiry” is understood as investigation into the rhetoric of culture creation and social interaction. Heraclitus may be regarded as foundational, not only in his doctrine of flux and constancy of change, but in his view that for the most part, acting under the requirements of social order, cultural constancy, and personal stability, people do not understand fully what is going
Transnational Approaches to Contentious Politics: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: Emerging from an international workshop, this volume examines a variety of different aspects of social mobilization since 1945, while the contributors constitute an equally heterogeneous group of young political scientists and historians, anthropologists, as well as researchers on social movement and the media. Their research poses numerous questions covering a broad range of issues across time and space, looking retrospectively at global interactions during the Cold War, as well as looking forward at reconfigurations of protest politics in the twenty-first century, both in Western and Eastern Europe. Blurring chronological and geographical boundaries of study and merging strictly defined methods and
Chapter 1 Extraparliamentary Entanglements: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Oppenheimer Andrew
Abstract: This chapter explores the role played by expressions of solidarity in the ethical and political economies of West German social movements.¹ Despite their prominence in postwar vocabularies of protest, expressions of solidarity have received little scholarly attention. What analysis there has been treats solidarity as a self-evident, stable term of analysis reflecting the common cause of activists internationally in supposedly related campaigns for liberation from structural forms of neocapitalist and neocolonial oppression.² Absent from this is any concern for the internal dynamics of these expressions—the claims they signify at given moments in time; the motivations that underlie them; and
Chapter 2 The Prague Spring and the “Gypsy Question”: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Donert Celia
Abstract: Few episodes in the postwar history of Czechoslovakia have received greater attention than the Prague Spring, when reformers in the Czechoslovak Communist Party (KSČ) attempted to create a democratic socialism in the heart of the Soviet bloc, creating unprecedented opportunities for political liberalization, social mobilization, and internationalism in a Stalinist regime that had previously been one of the most conservative in Eastern Europe. The subsequent invasion of Czechoslovakia by Warsaw Pact troops contributed to the commemoration of the Prague Spring as a national rebellion against Soviet hegemony, a myth that Czech and Slovak historians have been laboring to confront since
Chapter 4 Stairway to Heaven or Highway to Hell? from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Buzogány Aron
Abstract: The coming together of Europe has multiplied both opportunities and constraints for societal actors from the new member states to pursue their interests within the multi-level settings of the European Union (EU). On the one hand, European integration has been seen as an essential factor affecting the structures, strategies, and visibility of these actors by opening new opportunity structures and providing supplementary access points that can be used in complementary ways to the pre-existing national ones. At the same time, however, this process is also creating new constraints for participation and collective mobilization and is seen to favor some societal
Chapter 5 Communicating Dissent: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Teune Simon
Abstract: Just as its forerunners were, the Group of Eight (G8) summit in Heiligendamm, Germany, was challenged by protests emerging from the global justice movements (GJMs). The images of protest were complementing and at times eclipsing the images of the official summit.¹ When we recall the events in June 2007, we think of colorful marches with thousands and tens of thousands of participants, clowns poking fun at the security forces, protesters in black disguises throwing stones, discussions at the alternative summit, or activists roaming the fields near Heiligendamm to blockade the access to the venue.
Chapter 6 Digitalized Anti-Corporate Campaigns: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Niesyto Johanna
Abstract: As mass media-communicated corporate public relations and product advertising form conditions for the distribution of product and corporate images, the transformation into a multimedia society and, in particular, the introduction and widespread appropriation of the Internet, enable the sociotechnical possibility of converting political protest in favor of anti-corporate campaigns using a consumerist repertoire. Appealing to citizens as “netizen consumers” creates new options for a politicization of market sphere-related activities.¹ Protest actors promoting consumer resistance use the Internet as a site of contestation: they use digital communication tools to deconstruct brand images and re-contextualize them against the backdrop of global justice.
Chapter 7 From “British Rights for British Citizens” to “British Out”: from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Bosi Lorenzo
Abstract: The Northern Ireland Civil Rights Movement (hereafter, CRM) between the 1960s and early 1970s shifted from an inclusive, reformist movement to an exclusivist, ethnonationalist one.* What is the explanation for such a significant transformation? This chapter seeks to answer the question by looking at the complex interactions of political opportunities/threats and the internal dynamics and competitiveness between different organizations and groups within the movement. What I am suggesting in this work is that much of the process of social movement development is understandable only by looking at the broader political environment as well as by looking within the movement itself.
Chapter 10 The Role of Dissident-Intellectuals in the Formation of Civil Society in (Post-)Communist East-Central Europe from:
Protest Beyond Borders
Author(s) Ivancheva Mariya
Abstract: This chapter is not going to answer the question of
whatwas the role of intellectuals in the formation, transformation, or deformation of civil society in East-Central Europe in the transition from communism to post-communism. Instead, by avoiding unidirectional answers, I introduce the multiplicity of arguments voiced in the debate. I demonstrate how it split along the lines of civil society theory and practice, of pre– and post–1989 developments of civic activism in the region, and of divergent disciplinary approaches to the problem. On this basis, I suggest that the analysis of civil society as a frame of protest
Book Title: Narrating the Nation-Representations in History, Media and the Arts
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Mycock Andrew
Abstract: A sustained and systematic study of the construction, erosion and reconstruction of national histories across a wide variety of states is highly topical and extremely relevant in the context of the accelerating processes of Europeanization and globalization. However, as demonstrated in this volume, histories have not, of course, only been written by professional historians. Drawing on studies from a number of different European nation states, the contributors to this volume present a systematic exploration, of the representation of the national paradigm. In doing so, they contextualize the European experience in a more global framework by providing comparative perspectives on the national histories in the Far East and North America. As such, they expose the complex variables and diverse actors that lie behind the narration of a nation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdcbq
Chapter 3 National Histories: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Bevir Mark
Abstract: A classic national history narrates the formation and progress of a nation-state as a reflection of principles such as a national character, liberty, progress and statehood. Such histories present the state as both reflecting and moulding a national identity or consciousness. What are the prospects for national history today?
Chapter 4 Fiction as a Mediator in National Remembrance from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Rigney Ann
Abstract: Recent years have seen considerable advances in our understanding of the ways in which societies recollect their past. Where earlier discussions were often derived from psychological models, there has been a growing realisation in various fields that collective memory should be studied in the first instance as a cultural phenomenon: as the product of the historically variable cultural practices that bring images of the past into circulation. After all, communication in some form or other, even if this is only between parent and child, is a prerequisite for transferring recollections and making them social. The past can only be invested
Chapter 7 Families, Phantoms and the Discourse of ‘Generations’ as a Politics of the Past: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Weigel Sigrid
Abstract: The discourse of ‘generations’ has for some time dominated the German
Zeitgeist.Recently, however, the inception of a new era within this discourse has entered the culture pages of the newspapers, this most sensitive of seismographic instruments when it comes to registering even the tiniest shifts in collective states of mind. In the political sphere, the contract between the generations is becoming the object of negotiations that could possibly end up blowing apart the structures of the social welfare state altogether. At the same time, however, a whole series of films and literary publications are revealing the awakening amongst the
Chapter 8 Sold Globally – Remembered Locally: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Nations might exist in many forms but they certainly, perhaps even primarily, exist as narrative constructs. Nations share that characteristic with other identities with which they coexist, for instance, gender, regional or transnational identities.¹ All these forms of social identity can be further understood, according to the classic definition of Henri Tajfel, ‘as that part of the individual’s self-concept which derives from his knowledge of his membership of a social group (or groups) together with the value and emotional significance attached to that membership’.²
Chapter 10 From Discourse to Representation: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Uhl Heidemarie
Abstract: In the field of memory studies one can distinguish, within ideal-typical contexts, two dominant concepts that Aleida Assmann has vividly characterised as a relationship of tension between ‘solid’ and ‘liquid’:
Chapter 14 The Configuration of Orient and Occident in the Global Chain of National Histories: from:
Narrating the Nation
Author(s) Lim Jie-Hyun
Abstract: Modern historiography has often been a tool to legitimate the nation-state ‘objectively and scientifically’. Despite its proclamation of objectivity and scientific inquiry, modern historiography has promoted the political project of constructing national history. Its underlying logic was to find the course of historical development that led to the nation-state. Thus, national history has made the nation-state both the subject and the object of its own discipline. The ‘Prussian school’ provides a typical example. Not only was Ranke the official historiographer of the Prussian state, Droysen’s distinction between ‘History’ (
die Geschichte) and ‘private transactions’ (Geschäfte) also reveals the hidden politics that
Book Title: Young Men in Uncertain Times- Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Dyck Noel
Abstract: Anthropology is particularly well suited to explore the contemporary predicament in the coming of age of young men. Its grounded and comparative empiricism provides the opportunity to move beyond statistics, moral panics, or gender stereotypes in order to explore specific aspects of life course transitions, as well as the similar or divergent barriers or opportunities that young men in different parts of the world face. Yet, effective contextualization and comparison cannot be achieved by looking at male youths in isolation. This volume undertakes to contextualize male youths' circumstances and to learn about their lives, perspectives, and actions, and in turn illuminates the larger structures and processes that mediate the experiences entailed in becoming young men. The situation of male youths provides an important vantage point from which to consider broader social transformations and continuities. By paying careful attention to these contexts, we achieve a better understanding of the current influences encountered and acted upon by young people.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qddtx
Chapter 5 Gendered Modernities and Traditions: from:
Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Elliston Deborah A.
Abstract: In the now extensive body of scholarship on gender and nationalism, there is an odd lacuna that motivates this chapter’s project: although men, and particularly young men, have been central actors in most, and perhaps all, twentieth-century nationalist movements, this empirical phenomenon has rarely been made the focus of scholarly interrogation. Instead, the significant body of scholarship on gender and nationalism has focused almost exclusively on women.¹ And while that scholarship has produced vital questions and analyses—of the problematic figurations of women within nationalist imaginaries, of their sitings as subjects and objects of nation-building projects, and more—we are
Chapter 6 Good Hearts or Big Bellies: from:
Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Frederiksen Martin Demant
Abstract: It is around noon when Avto¹ bursts into the room. We are sitting in the living room of Temo’s parents where I am conducting an interview with Temo and his younger brother Mamuka. Temo was drinking with some friends last night to the dissatisfaction of his father and mother. As a result they have had an argument in the morning and it was questionable whether we would be able to meet. Temo looks tired. His thick black hair is messy and his voice rusty from cigarettes. The table is set with cakes, hazelnuts, and Turkish coffee. Vanya, my assistant and
Chapter 7 Being “Made” Through Conflict: from:
Young Men in Uncertain Times
Author(s) Roche Rosellen
Abstract: With few exceptions in academic literature concerning violence in Northern Ireland (Bell 1990; Jenkins 1983; Roche 2008; Roche 2007; Roche 2005a; Roche 2003), young people and their violent interplay have not held much appeal for social scientists. This is so even despite the fact that throughout urban, enclaved, and economically deprived working-class housing areas in Northern Ireland, young people, and particularly young men, are reported as consistently participating in “low-level” violent activities. While no formal definition of this notion of “low-level” violence exists, its use in the Northern Irish context is widespread. Thoughts vary on the origin of the expression
Book Title: Conflicted Memories-Europeanizing Contemporary Histories
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Author(s): Ramsbrock Annelie
Abstract: Despite the growing interest in general European history, the European dimension is surprisingly absent from the writing of contemporary history. In most countries, the historiography on the 20th century continues to be dominated by national perspectives. Although there is cross-national work on specific topics such as occupation or resistance, transnational conceptions and narratives of contemporary European history have yet to be worked out. This volume focuses on the development of a shared conception of recent European history that will be required as an underpinning for further economic and political integration so as to make lasting cooperation on the old continent possible. It tries to overcome the traditional national framing that ironically persists just at a time when organized efforts to transform Europe from an object of debate to an actual subject have some chance of succeeding in making it into a polity in its own right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdff2
Chapter 2 Communist Legacies in the ‘New Europe’: from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Petrescu Dragoş
Abstract: ‘Man is a complex animal who is tractable in some respects and intractable in others. Both the successes and the failures of our communist cases suggest that there is a pattern to this tractability-intractability behavior, that liberty once experienced is not quickly forgotten, and that equity and equality of some kind resonate in the human spirit.’ This is how Gabriel Almond concludes his study on communist political cultures focusing on the former Soviet Union, Czechoslovakia, and Yugoslavia, as well as on Cuba, Hungary, and Poland.¹ It may be argued that, apart from liberty, equity, and equality, the notions of social
Chapter 5 War and Conflict in Contemporary European History, 1914–2004 from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Horne John
Abstract: The first half of the twentieth century was the most violent period in modern European history. War, revolution, civil war, and the deliberate displacement or destruction of entire ethnic and cultural communities characterized much of the continent from 1914 to the early 1950s. Thereafter, conflict was frozen in less lethal and more institutionalized forms until the final decade of the century, when the end of the Cold War was followed by the extraordinarily peaceful integration of Europe—a process that continues today. The exception has been the violent implosion of Yugoslavia.
Chapter 8 Europe as Leisure Time Communication: from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Mergel Thomas
Abstract: Ideas of European integration are mostly shaped by the image of an increasing merger of distinct states. In this process differences are dissolved to be finally subsumed into one coherent social and political space with one homogenous public sphere inhabited by actors who perceive each other as similar. This idea derives from the common experience of the nation- building process and its homogenizing effects since the nineteenth century: diverse societies built a common new form, where differences were largely extinguished. This perspective has not remained unchallenged: disapproving skeptics highlight the value of European plurality, which should not be pressed into
Chapter 9 Integration from Below? from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Schönwälder Karen
Abstract: There is hardly any doubt that migration was a major factor that contributed to the reshaping of post-1945 European societies. Labour migration was a central component of the Fordist production system and a cornerstone of the ‘golden’ postwar decades, and migration was one factor that transformed social and demographic structures.¹ Furthermore, migration, flight, and expulsion constituted central experiences in many Europeans’ lives. For others, the denial of the opportunity to migrate across borders may have been a key experience. Nevertheless, in many general national histories migration is still largely neglected. Gérard Noiriel, referring to France, has attacked ‘collective amnesia’ and
Chapter 11 Economics of Western European Integration? from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Steiner André
Abstract: The Europeanization of economic life is not a new phenomenon in recent history. Traders have consistently been connected throughout the various parts of Europe, and the emergence of the modern nation-state did not bring transnational economic activities to an end. The first multinationals emerged in Europe in the second half of the nineteenth century, and their economic importance further increased in the twentieth century. But the attempt to create a transnational economic area with supranational institutions was successful for the first time only after the Second World War. Western European integration began as an economic process with the Marshall Plan,
Chapter 12 A European Civil Society? from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Kaelble Hartmut
Abstract: In recent years, the term ‘civil society’ has played an increasingly significant role in the language of the European Union. It is employed in speeches given by the president of the European Commission, in the much-discussed white paper on Governance in the European Union, and in debates about the European Constitution, as well as in the catalogue of research topics supported within the Sixth Framework Programme and in several hundred additional documents published by the EU. It is nevertheless still a matter of dispute whether a civil society has in fact emerged on the level of the European Union or
Chapter 13 International Socialist Attempts at Bridge-Building in the Early Postwar Period from:
Conflicted Memories
Author(s) Appelqvist Örjan
Abstract: It is all too easy for historians to allow the Cold War division process of 1947–1948 to retroactively overshadow the tentative character of the apprehensions, projects, and choices guiding different political actors during the postwar planning period that spanned from the final phase of the Second World War and the immediate transition to conditions of peace. It is all too easy to forget the weight of history felt by European postwar planners at that time, realized primarily as fear: of a repetition of the economic chaos after the First World War, and of renewed German aspirations to avenge and
Chapter 1 “By and By We Shall Have an Enlightened Populace”: from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Wangermann Ernst
Abstract: I have chosen as my theme that aspect of the Enlightenment mentality which has long seemed to me its most attractive side—its optimism concerning the prospects of the moral and material improvement of humankind. Insofar as this optimism was associated with a particular notion of the role that the fine arts could play in improving human and social relationships, my contribution might be considered a kind of Auftakt or overture to the discussion of musical and dramatic theater in Austria in the following chapters. The theme is a large one, and I shall confine myself to some basic aspects.
Chapter 2 Taming a Transgressive National Hero: from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Filipowicz Halina
Abstract: My starting point is a deceptively simple query. What happens when transgressors of cultural norms, which camouflage class and gender inequalities, prove themselves worthy of admission to a pantheon of national heroes? The cult of national heroes, of course, has been indispensable in promoting national unity and pride. Instilling the people with properly national characteristics, modeled after national heroes, has been a central preoccupation for educators, artists, and scholars. Transgressive candidates for national heroes make this task harder but not impossible. Hence it is necessary to rephrase the question. How does the admission of transgressors to a patriotic canon work
Chapter 3 Nestroy and His Naughty Children: from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Weber Carl
Abstract: When explaining, in 1955, that plays are to be written not merely “for” the stage but “with the stage,” Friedrich Dürrenmatt ranked the farces of the Austrian nineteenth-century actor-playwright Johann Nepomuk Nestroy alongside the comedies of Aristophanes as models of such a writing “with the stage.”¹
Chapter 4 Pantomime, Dance, Sprachskepsis, and Physical Culture in German and Austrian Modernism from:
The Great Tradition and Its Legacy
Author(s) Segel Harold B.
Abstract: The Russian writer Mikhail Kuzmin was an active participant in Saint Petersburg’s lively cabaret life in the early years of the twentieth century. Besides songs and dramatic skits, he also wrote pantomime. One of his pantomimes,
Dukhov den v Toledo(All Souls’ Day in Toledo), was staged apparently only once, on 23 March 1915, at the Moscow Kamerny Theater under the direction of Aleksandr Tairov. The pantomime had in fact been commissioned by Tairov so that the season in which it was performed would have at least one pantomime, given the contemporary interest in nonverbal drama. As Tairov himself declared:
3 Picturing the museum: from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Porto Nuno
Abstract: Photography and museum studies have recently entered into dialogue, as historians and anthropologists begin to deal with that peculiar class of museum artefacts: the photographic archives. Roughly three types of approach can be distinguished. First there is the approach that sees photographic collections as the basis for historical discourse on a specific social group at a specific point in time, such as Geary’s (1988) work on Bamum. Then there is the line that sets out from the transformation of views about a specific group, constructed through time by several different authors, who may or may not have known about each
4 On the pre-museum history of Baldwin Spencer’s collection of Tiwi artefacts from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Venbrux Eric
Abstract: In December 1994, the Tiwi Land Council, representing the ‘Traditional Owners’ of Melville and Bathurst Islands in northern Australia, paid a considerable amount of money for an old spear and club at a Sotheby’s auction. The Tiwi artefacts were purchased to be put on display in a local museum on the islands (Tiwi Land Council 1995: 10). The reappropriation of indigenous objects raises the question of how early collectors obtained them, and what they then meant in terms of cross-cultural exchange.
9 Unsettling the meaning: from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Shelton Anthony
Abstract: In
The conflict of interpretations(1974), Paul Ricoeur makes a distinction between three types of knowledge based on their different epistemological ascriptions. These distinctions provide a useful starting point for discussion about the variants of anthropological discourse and their relationship with what I have termed elsewhere, ‘the three museologies’ (Shelton 1995b: 7). Briefly, Ricoeur distinguishes between what we might call a culture’s operative discourses, disciplinary regimes of knowledge, and critical philosophy. This latter practice subjects the first two narrative forms to analytical scrutiny or, to use a postmodernist idiom, fields a sustained ‘incredulity to meta-narratives’ (Lyotard 1984: xxiv). It is clear
11 The art of exhibition-making as a problem of translation from:
Academic Anthropology and the Museum
Author(s) Bouquet Mary
Abstract: This chapter addresses what are often seen as the practical issues of exhibition-making as a theoretical problem of translation – with all the transformative effects of moving between languages¹ – and as a didactic device. It begins by invoking anthropological concern about recent developments in the museum world. It goes on to consider how (what are often thought of as) technical aspects the process of making a temporary exhibition at the University of Oslo Ethnographic Museum were used as a didactic device. Finally, there is a discussion of how these technical matters fit into the theoretical operation of translation that exhibition-making involves.
Book Title: Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad- Publisher: IEP
Author(s): Remy María Isabel
Abstract: Este libro recoge cinco trabajos de investigación que nos permitirán transitar entre historias vitales en las cuales personas e instituciones construyen y recrean sus identidades como estrategias de acción colectiva frente a las desigualdades sociales. En cada una de estas historias, la etnicidad se muestra como esa categoría política que busca subvertir un orden social que por razones políticas, culturales y económicas ha mantenido históricamente a un grupo de ciudadanos en los márgenes de la vida pública. De algún modo, estas historias son luchas por el reconocimiento en donde individuos y colectivos se constituyen como tales en función de la relación que establecen con los otros, en contextos delimitados por la valoración que cada sociedad le otorga a las particularidades socioculturales. Sobre todo, estas historias son estrategias para conseguir un espacio de actuación en la vida política.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdtst
Introducción: from:
Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) Cuenca Ricardo
Abstract: En una reciente publicación sobre la formación histórica del movimiento indígena-campesino en Bolivia, Huáscar Salazar Lohman¹ relata cómo el eminente triunfo de Evo Morales, en el año 2005, reanimó entre la población indígena la vieja idea de tener una nueva oportunidad para “conquistar el momento actual” y cambiar así los designios del futuro. Esta figura de apropiarse del tiempo es más que una forma literaria; es un poderoso enunciado político que significa la posibilidad de ejercer el poder para actuar colectivamente frente al Estado y también frente a otros grupos dominantes distintos; es apostar por la construcción de una nación
Población indígena y construcción de la democracia en el Perú from:
Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) Remy María Isabel
Abstract: El lector podría sorprenderse al encontrar en el presente artículo referencias al texto constitucional en debate y al censo que aún no proporciona resultados finales. Es que fue escrito en 1993 (cuando el censo de ese año aún no daba resultados y la Constitución actualmente vigente estaba en proceso de consulta) y he preferido mantener la versión original. Se elaboró a pedido de Diálogo Interamericano, que organizaba una sesión sobre Pueblos Indígenas, realizada en diciembre de 1993 en Washington D.C. , donde se discutieron ponencias de investigadores de Perú, Bolivia, Ecuador y Colombia.¹ No pretendo hacer una actualización completa de
Encuentros y desencuentros entre la población asháninka y su municipio: from:
Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) del Pilar Ego-Aguirre María
Abstract: En el Perú, la participación e inclusión política de los pueblos indígenas en la política estatal es un punto crítico cuando se abordan los procesos de ruptura de la exclusión y marginación que han caracterizado, histórica y estructuralmente, a estos grupos. Hoy en día, hay marcos procesuales, condiciones e iniciativas favorables en diversos países de América Latina que dan pie a la reconfiguración del alcance político de las poblaciones indígenas, promovidas tanto desde los Estados como desde la propia sociedad civil. Desde el plano internacional, los interlocutores indígenas han desplegado alianzas y rutas de incidencia para la obtención de apoyo
Entre lo regional y lo étnico: from:
Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) Asensio Raúl H.
Abstract: Este artículo analiza la transformación de los discursos de identidad colectiva en la costa norte del Perú desde finales de la década de 1980 hasta la actualidad. El foco está en el renacer de la identidad “mochica” y su significado social y político. Este es un tema que hasta el momento ha sido muy poco trabajado por las ciencias sociales peruanas.¹ Lo que nos interesa es analizar cómo este nuevo discurso de identidad colectiva se intersecta con los cambios políticos y sociales que afectan al país en las últimas décadas. Partimos de la idea de que la descentralización administrativa y
Historias, trayectorias y contextos: from:
Etnicidades en construcción. Identidad y acción social en contextos de desigualdad
Author(s) Cuenca Ricardo
Abstract: En los últimos años, las luchas por el reconocimiento y por el derecho a la diferencia han contribuido a consolidar las acciones de reivindicación de grupos tradicionalmente excluidos, desde una perspectiva en la que asuntos económicos, políticos y culturales se entrelazan.¹ Estas reflexiones han impactado en los movimientos indígenas latinoamericanos en un doble sentido: por un lado, han servido de marco de referencia para los giros que vienen dándose en las reflexiones conceptuales sobre
lo indígena;y, por otro lado, se constituyen en una plataforma universal que contribuye a legitimar las históricas reivindicaciones emprendidas por los pueblos indígenas latinoamericanos, ahora
Book Title: Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina- Publisher: IEP
Author(s): Sandoval Pablo
Abstract: El mundo transita hoy de un patrón de desarrollo industrial centrado en el modelo productivo en cadena o «fordista», a otro organizado en torno al conocimiento, cuyo núcleo se sustenta en la capacidad de producir, manejar y distribuir información a través de redes mundiales de comunicación. La noción de globalización fue acuñada para dar cuenta de estos cambios, y para nombrar un fenómeno: la formación de una economía mundial basada en la expansión a escala global de los mercados de bienes, servicios y capitales. Este volumen, reúne quince textos de renombrados expertos, que abordan el tema de la globalización y su impacto en la sociedad y cultura de América Latina desde diferentes perspectivas, que incluyen la del conocimiento de las ciencias sociales, el proceso histórico del capitalismo en el subcontinente, la identidad y el desarrollo cultural.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdv3m
Introducción from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Abstract: El mundo transita hoy de un patrón de desarrollo industrial centrado en el modelo productivo fordista a otro organizado en torno al conocimiento, cuyo núcleo se sustenta en la capacidad de producir, manejar y distribuir información a través de redes mundiales de comunicación. Este tránsito, impulsado por los cambios ocurridos en las tecnologías de comunicación, hizo de las capacidades informativas un elemento clave para insertarse en el actual modelo de desarrollo. Como la mayoría de regiones del mundo, América Latina vive también esta transición, desde su propia particularidad histórica y su desigual ubicación en el sistema-mundo capitalista; pero además desde
Una perspectiva cultural de las propuestas de la CEPAL from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Ottone Ernesto
Abstract: En este artículo se plantea que la propuesta de la CEPAL de transformación productiva con equidad debe considerar los rasgos culturales de las sociedades de la región. El artículo examina la propuesta de la CEPAL en una perspectiva cultural, con especial consideración del vínculo entre ciudadanía, desarrollo económico y modernidad. Analiza los procesos de internacionalización de la cultura, la relación entre identidad cultural y ciudadanía y el impacto de los procesos de internacionalización de la cultura en la región. Examina uno de los problemas más persistentes en el proyecto de modernidad en América Latina y el Caribe—la dialéctica de
Latinoamericanismo, modernidad, globalización. Prolegómenos a una crítica poscolonial de la razón from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Castro-Gómez Santiago
Abstract: Cuando Jürgen Habermas propuso en 1981 su concepto de «colonización del mundo de la vida», se encontraba señalando un hecho fundamental: las prácticas coloniales e imperialistas no desaparecieron una vez concluidos la segunda guerra mundial y los procesos emancipatorios del «Tercer Mundo ». Estas prácticas tan sólo cambiaron su naturaleza, su carácter, su modus operandi. Para Habermas, la colonización tardomoderna no es algo que tenga su locus en los intereses imperialistas del estado-nación, en la ocupación militar y el control del territorio de una nación por parte de otra. Son medios deslingüizados (el dinero y el poder) y sistemas abstractos
Des-fetichizar la «globalización»: from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Mato Daniel
Abstract: En estos días se habla y escribe demasiado sobre algo que se da en llamar «globalización». Pero en general se lo hace de maneras poco precisas, reduccionistas y fetichizadoras, que no sirven de mucho para orientar las acciones de los actores sociales. Dependiendo de quién habla o escribe, resulta que eso nombran «globalización» es señalado como causa de todos nuestros males o, alternativamente, como la panacea que resolverá todos nuestros problemas.
El desarrollo de las culturas andinas a partir de su inclusión al «Sistema Mundial Moderno» y de la Globalización from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Golte Jürgen
Abstract: La mayoría de la población andina en los últimos milenios ha vivido en sociedades organizadas alrededor de la producción agrícola y ganadera. Las ciudades que se han desarrollado a partir de estas sociedades de agricultores y ganaderos, y basándose en la apropiación de un plusproducto de ellas, han tenido características muy diversas. Ha habido centros de administración de poder político y religioso, nudos de intercambio, aglomeración de artesanos, de trabajadores mineros y fabriles, de residencia de terratenientes, de producción de servicios, etc.
Las transformaciones del mapa: from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Martín-Barbero Jesús
Abstract: Hasta hace pocos años, pensar la cultura era otear un mapa claro y sin arrugas: la antropología tenía a su cargo las culturas primitivas y la sociología se encargaba de las modernas. Lo que implicaba dos opuestas ideas de cultura. Para los antropólogos, «cultura» es todo, pues en el magma primordial que habitan los primitivos tan cultura es el hacha como el mito, la maloca como las relaciones de parentesco, el repertorio de las plantas medicinales o el de las danzas rituales. Mientras, para los sociólogos, cultura es sólo un especial tipo de actividades y de objetos, de productos y
Modernidad-mundo e identidad from:
Globalización y diversidad cultural: una mirada desde América Latina
Author(s) Ortiz Renato
Abstract: El tema de la identidad es rico y controvertido. Si en la actualidad, partir del proceso de globalización, resurge con fuerza en las discusiones políticas y académicas, se hace necesario, sin embargo, dimensionarlo correctamente. Por cierto, las transformaciones recientes replantean los movimientos identitarios en una nueva meseta. Pero antes de reflexionar acerca de su configuración, hay que reconsiderar el modo en que el propio concepto fue trabajado en las ciencias sociales. Tengo la impresión de que a menudo implica una lectura deificadora de la sociedad, lo que nos conduce a una comprensión equívoca de las relaciones sociales. En este sentido,
«En nombre del gobierno»: from:
Las formas del recuerdo: etnografías de la violencia política en el Perú
Abstract: Este artículo explora las memorias de la violencia en las comunidades altoandinas de Ayacucho, a las que enmarca en una larga memoria histórica y en el proceso de construcción del Estado entre las décadas de 1920 y 1960. Este trabajo sostiene que las memorias de la violencia de Sendero Luminoso forman un complejo artefacto político que condensa diferentes niveles de memorias, experiencias y temporalidades, que provienen del pasado lejano, el inmediato y el presente. El discurso y accionar de Sendero Luminoso, el movimiento maoísta que dio inicio a su lucha armada en Ayacucho en 1980, se interpretó dentro de una
Cantos de sirena: from:
Las formas del recuerdo: etnografías de la violencia política en el Perú
Abstract: En mayo de 1980, Sendero Luminoso (SL) declaró la guerra al Estado peruano con un acto de teatro político: el quemado de urnas en un pequeño pueblo andino en vísperas de las primeras elecciones democráticas del país desde hacía más de una década. En la euforia de lo que parecía un retorno exitoso a la democracia tras doce años de dictadura militar, la declaración de guerra del pequeño partido maoísta en un rincón remoto de Ayacucho fue descartada como irrelevante e, incluso, pasada por alto por la mayor parte de los observadores políticos. Incluso dentro de Ayacucho, el incidente no
Book Title: Between Educationalization and Appropriation-Selected Writings on the History of Modern Educational Systems
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Vervenne Marc
Abstract: Advanced reader on the history of education Developments in educational systems worldwide have largely contributed to the modernization and globalization of present-day society. However, in order to fully understand their impact, educational systems must be interpreted against a background of particular situations and contexts. This textbook brings together more than twenty (collaborative) contributions focusing on the two key themes in the work of Marc Depaepe: educationalization and appropriation. Compiled for his international master classes, these selected writings provide not only a thorough introduction to the history of modern educational systems, but also a twenty-five year overview of the work of a well-known pioneer in the field of history of education. Covering the modernization of schooling in Western history, the characteristics and origins of educationalization, the colonial experience in education and the process of appropriation, Between Educationalization and Appropriation will be of great interest to a larger audience of scholars in the social sciences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdwdd
6 Dealing with Paradoxes of Educationalization: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: Every scientific discipline – including the history of education – is continuously subject to change. This truism applies both to the knowledge generated within a particular field of research and to its didactic translation into a teaching subject. When the subject of
histoire de la pédagogieentered the curriculum of Belgian university teacher training in 1890, the legislators had completely different objectives and content in mind than the ones we proclaim today (Depaepe, 1997a). That we ourselves no longer speak of “historical pedagogy” but of “educational historiography” (or “history of education”)¹ manifests this. The preference for educational history over pedagogy
8 About Pedagogization: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Simon F.
Abstract: For history researchers, it is not a needless luxury to consider from time to time the content and the significance of the basic concepts they use, certainly if they have the ambition to interpret and/or explain history in addition to purely describing it. This self-reflection, compelled by the annually recurring dialogue with educational philosophers (cf. Smeyers & Depaepe, 2006),² need not necessarily place an emphasis on philosophical abstraction but can just as well start from an examination of the history of one’s own research. Such an approach need not succumb to navel-gazing. Instead, such historical self-reflection possibly points to the creeping
10 Sometimes a Little Distance is Needed to See What Really Happened: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: One of Jürgen Oelkers’ many merits is to have studied – as a generalist – the complex relationship between pedagogy, politics and practice in great detail, especially in relation to ›reform pedagogy‹ (or New Education) and its potential contribution to educational innovations (see, e.g., Oelkers 1991; Oelkers/Osterwalder 1999; Oelkers ³1996). Based on such a position, the ›relevance‹ of historical research in educational sciences, at first glance, does not seem very problematic. Scientific knowledge that is based on empirical analytical research as well as on philosophically and historically acquired insights is, from this point of view, essential for formulating the future
17 The Practical and Professional Relevance of Educational Research and Pedagogical Knowledge from the Perspective of History: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: Apart from the academic frustration of educational research of the first half of the twentieth century, this expectation betrays the social task that ‘modern’ science of education has assumed for itself in the course of history. Scientific research into education has to contribute to the solution of all sorts of concrete problems from the practice of education and thereby, indirectly, to
18 Struggling with the Historical Attractiveness of Psychology for Educational Research: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: A few years ago, when we determined the themes for the upcoming meetings of the Leuven
Research Community, I thought that there could be no easier task than that which lay before me at the moment: reporting on the history of the attractiveness of psychology for educational research. On the basis of my work in the history of educational science on the development of the empirical-analytical paradigm (Depaepe, 1993), it seemed that one could quite easily formulate a number of hypotheses with regard to
19 Demythologizing the Educational Past: from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: “My life in the history of education” – to borrow the title of a recent British series of scholarly autobiographies¹ – began with a lively interest in educational practice. I became interested in the organization of the subject-based grade-school system and wished to find its origins. This was an organizational form introduced for reasons not particularly educational, and it persisted chiefly because of the order and efficiency to which it gave rise.² My work was both a form of educational criticism and a demonstration of the relevance of the history of education to educational science, practice, and policy.
21 The Ten Commandments of Good Practices in History of Education Research from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: At the request of the editors, I am stating here briefly what are, for me, the most important rules of thumb of good practices in the history of education research. This I am doing on the basis of my many years of research experience as well as, on the basis of what I have published in several theoretical, methodological, and historiographical articles. I have called these guidelines, set down concisely in the form of propositions, somewhat provocatively «ten commandments» in the hope of stimulating a fruitful discussion. You can find these «commandments» as such at the beginning of the article.
22 After the Ten Commandments … the Sermon? from:
Between Educationalization and Appropriation
Author(s) Depaepe M.
Abstract: It was bound to happen. After some supposed authority boldly announces ten commandments for good research practices in his domain (Depaepe, 2010), another one suddenly pops up – in this case a ‘real’ authority – who cannot resist the urge to give a sermon on almost the same subject (Labaree, 2011). The historical but often repressed relationship between theology and pedagogy, repeatedly trumpeted by people like Fritz Osterwalder (2003), must have stuck in the subconscious of the historians of education. The religious metaphors prompted by the discussion about our opinion article (and which will undoubtedly resurface in comments on Labaree’s
Book Title: Islam & Europe-Challenges and Opportunities
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): TIBI Bassam
Abstract: Dedicated to increasing our knowledge and awareness of the ever-growing diversity and pluralism of global society, Forum A. & A. Leysen has initiated an annual debate/lecture series, beginning with a focus on Islam in today's world and in Europe in particular. Seven well-known influential authorities - each an active participant in the public debate on the global role of Islam past, present and future - recently presented papers at the first Intercultural Relations Conference sponsored by Forum A.& A. Leysen. These important contributions, on the topic Islam and Europe: Challenges and Opportunities, are reprinted in this volume. Although each contributor speaks from his own distinctive point of view, a common message emerges from all seven texts: only dialogue - on the one hand between the West (countries that manifest themselves as Western Democratic constitutional states) and Islam, and on the other hand within and among societies historically identified with Islam- will overcome entrenched confrontation and negative animosity, engender new possibilities and understandings, and, by encouraging free and critical thinking, pave the way to social equity and the scientific innovation that, potentially, can lead to more prosperity. In the course of the conference all seven talks led to fascinating debates. This book includes the most important questions asked and the speakers' responses. Although the question of how to actually construct the dialogue remains unsettled, this ground-breaking book takes a giant step toward an answer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdwsq
Introduction to The Anne & André Leysen Forum on ‘Intercultural relations’ from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Foblets Marie-Claire
Abstract: The Forum is an initiative of Mr and Mrs Anne and André Leysen and their children, who as donors made it possible for a series of activities to be organised under the aegis of the K.U.Leuven around the theme of
Intercultural relations.
Muslim Integration and Secularism from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Modood Tariq
Abstract: I believe there is an anti-Muslim wind blowing across the European continent. One factor is the perception that Muslims are making politically exceptional, culturally unreasonable or theologically alien demands upon European states. Against that, I wish to say, that the claims Muslims are making, in fact, parallel comparable arguments about gender or ethnic equality. Seeing the issue in that context shows how European and contemporary is the logic of mainstream Muslim identity politics. Additionally I shall argue that multicultural politics must embrace what I call a moderate secularism, and resist a radical secularism.
Islam, Muslims and the West: from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Abu Zayd Nasr
Abstract: Since the French president announced on December 16, 2003 the necessity to introduce a new law in order to prohibit religious symbols, such as the Jewish yarmulke, the big crosses and the female Muslim headscarf,
hijâb, to be shown in the national French schools, the reaction generated all over the Muslim World, especially in the Arab World, presents the model of the polemic controversy/dispute/debate/ discussion that has been overshadowing the relationship between the Muslim World and the Western World since the late eighteenth and the beginning of the nineteenth centuries. The issue at steak here, from the French view, is
Science and Religion, an Uneasy Relationship in the History of Judeo-Christian-Muslim Heritage from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) al-Azm Sadik J.
Abstract: Behind the
Satanic Verseslurks not just the novelist Salman Rushdie, but indeed, as the phrase literally indicates, the devil himself. That his verses had disappeared (or –horribile dictu– been cancelled) from Sura 53 ‘The Star’ of theQur’ândoes not take away from the fact that they had been ‘there’. Muhammad was their mental receiver and scribe, unaware of their being inspired by the devil and not, as usual, by Gibreel. Their actual absence only bears witness to their one-time presence. In this way, Iblis has had his negative share in the editing of theQur’ân.
Why we are so obsessed by Islam? from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Ali Tariq
Abstract: In his book
Islam: Past, Present and Future(2004), which is the final volume of a trilogy on the religions of the book – Judaism, Christianity and Islam – the German Catholic theologian and philosopher Hans Küng quotes Tariq Ali as an alternative voice on Islamic history and culture, as well as on the difficult interactions between today’s leading civilizations. Küng raises the question: “Why didn’t Islam, contrary to other world religions, such as Christianity and Judaism, witness a reformation? Why didn’t we have renewal at that time? This reformation would have taken place if Islamic culture in al-Andalus had
Book Title: Medieval Manuscripts in Transition-Tradition and Creative Recycling
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): VERBEKE Werner
Abstract: Manuscripts constitute the source material par excellence for diverse academic disciplines. Art historians, philologists, historians, theologians, philosophers, book historians and even jurists encounter one another around the codex. The fact that such an encounter can be extremely fertile was demonstrated, during an international congress in Brussels on November 5-9, 2002. A record of the discussions can be found in this volume of the Mediaevalia Lovaniensia. The editors selected those lectures that focused on the historical, literary-historical, philosophical and theological aspects of the congress theme as opposed to those with an explicit art-historical perspective. The common thread, however, is always the codicological aspect: what can the study of manuscripts contribute to the literary-historical interpretation or the insight into the functioning of a text in its original context. The various contributions testify to a fearless and unrestrained interdisciplinary approach to the material. The subjects broached cover a broad domain: from the development of classical themes to the transmission of lyrical models, from visual material giving evidence of the reception of literary texts to the artes-literature used as a vehicle for a love story.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdxv4
MEDIEVAL IRISH COMPILATION: from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) ARBUTHNOT Sharon
Abstract: ‘Compilation’ is a largely self-explanatory term. Used of a medieval literary activity, it refers to a recycling process whereby extracts culled from a variety of manuscript sources are cobbled together to create new texts. In a crude, although convenient, analogy, one might suggest that compiling is the textual equivalent of creating a mosaic – the fragments originally belong to very different contexts, a certain amount of compiler-provided ‘grout’ holds the entirety together, and the end product is a quite distinct artefact in itself. In the twelfth and thirteen centuries, learned Irishmen expended a great deal of energy in this direction,
RECYCLAGE DE CONTENUS ET RÉCUPÉRATION DE PIÈCES D’ARCHIVES DANS LE MACROLOGUS ENCYCLOPÉDIQUE DE SAINT-LAURENT DE LIÈGE, (CIRCA 1470-1480) from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) Van den Abeele Baudouin
Abstract: L’histoire de l’encyclopédisme médiéval est celle d’une chaîne de textes fortement soudés. Depuis Isidore de Séville au VII
esiècle, en passant par Raban Maur à l’époque carolingienne, puis aux grandes œuvres des XIIeet XIIIesiècles, on y suit le cheminement de contenus transmis par relais successifs, tout en y observant des glissements et des ouvertures multiples. Le genre encyclopédique tout entier – si tant est que l’on puisse parler à juste titre de genre¹ – a pour méthode la compilation, et pour élément de base la citation. Trouver pour chaque réalité à caractériser des passages pertinents dans les œuvres
FROM ARS TO AMOR: from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) CLAASSENS Geert H.M.
Abstract: Books make great gifts. In fact, a book is always a double gift: an object, and a text. These days such a gift is a relatively straightforward affair, in the sense that there are plenty of books on offer, which is evidently not to say that giving a book is always a cheap option. Beautifully bound volumes printed on high-quality paper can cost an arm and a leg, not to mention the time and brainspace that has to be invested in selecting a book whose worth the recipient will be able to properly appreciate.
RESPUN MELODIES FOR THE VIRGIN: from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) MAYER-MARTIN Donna
Abstract: Les Miracles de Nostre Dame,adapted by Gautier de Coinci in the early thirteenth century from now lost Latin sources, witnessed such immense popularity during the late Middle Ages that they are preserved today in almost eighty manuscripts. Carefully interpolated amongst the Marian narratives in several of these manuscripts are Gautier’s songs in praise of the Virgin – songs for which Gautier wrote the words but borrowed the melodies. The musical genres chosen by Gautier as models for his Marian chansons are extremely diverse, and they reveal an intimate knowledge of all of the major musical practices of the late
THE SECRET HISTORY OF THE FOX AND THE HARE IN TRINITY B.11.22 from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) MEUWESE Martine
Abstract: Whereas miniatures or historiated initials generally attempt to illustrate the relevant text, marginal images need not do so. The abundant marginal decorations in psalters and prayer books are often text-independent, for they usually do not illustrate the accompanying religious text. In the margins artists could indulge their imagination, reverse roles, and even mock the authority of Christian doctrine. Marginal themes may refer to the accompanying text, to works of ‘literature’ such as sermons, romances, fables and bestiaries, but also to the activities of daily life such as hunting or children’s play, or to a whole range of oral discourse, whether
LA PRODUCTION D’UN MANUSCRIT DU POÈME INTITULÉ LE CHEVALIER DÉLIBÉRÉ D’OLIVIER DE LA MARCHE from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) SPEAKMAN SUTCH Susie
Abstract: Le manuscrit 80-11 de la Collection de la Société des Manuscrits des Assureurs Français (S.M.A.F.) en dépôt à la Salle des Manuscrits de la Bibliothèque nationale de France comporte deux ouvrages de nature très différente. Le premier, un traité moral en prose que Ghillebert de Lannoy a écrit à l’intention du futur duc de Bourgogne, Charles le Téméraire, s’intitule l’
Instruction d’un jeune prince pour se bien gouverner envers Dieu et le monde(fol. 1r – 39r). Le second,Le Chevalier délibéré(fol. 39v – 100v) d’Olivier de La Marche, est une allégorie didactique en vers qui, sous la forme d’un
THE WRITER’S LOVE. LOVE AND THE ACT OF READING: from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) VERBAAL Wim
Abstract: When commencing his commentary on the Song of songs and pondering over its abrupt opening verse, its beginning without beginning, Bernard of Clairvaux stresses at first the attractiveness of a text opening on a kiss. ‘And it really is a pleasing communication, which takes its beginning from a kiss, and Scripture itself, as if with an attractive face, easily disposes and invites to its reading.’² The attractive face of Scripture, offering itself to the reader with a kiss: one cannot deny that Bernard makes use of a striking image when illustrating the intriguing character of the Song of songs. The
THE MANUSCRIPT OF THE ENSEIGNEMENT DE VRAIE NOBLESSE MADE FOR RICHARD NEVILLE, EARL OF WARWICK, IN 1464 from:
Medieval Manuscripts in Transition
Author(s) VISSER-FUCHS Livia
Abstract: In 1461 both France and England had a new king. Louis XI of France succeeded his father in July; Edward IV, of the house of York, had defeated his predecessor, of the house of Lancaster, in March and was crowned in June. The change of dynasty in England owed much to the greatest magnate in the country, Richard Neville, Earl of Warwick, who because of this and his later political activities is known today as ‘the Kingmaker’. During his lifetime the rest of Western Europe was well aware of Warwick’s position; indeed, continental princes may have had an almost exaggerated
Book Title: Origins and Ends of the Mind-Philosophical Essays on Psychoanalysis
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): Brassier Ray
Abstract: Psychoanalysis claims that the individual human mind is structured by its childhood relationships with its parents. But the theory of attachment, evolutionary psychology and contemporary philosophy of mind have all recently re-introduced new dimensions of innateness into mental development and pathology. If attachment is an instinct, then what is the psychological status of the child's relation to the mother? If the mind is in part a product of evolution, then how far down do the inhibitory mechanisms of the mind go? If the mind of the child is shaped by their encounter with a set of prohibitions, how, in the light of contemporary 'cognitive science' and philosophy of mind, can the child be conceived as 'taking on' a rule? How is the construction of the mind related to the normative ends of cognitive experience? Today, it is Lacanian psychoanalysis which most vigorously defends psychoanalytic theory and practice from the encroachment of the biological and 'cognitive' sciences. But a paradigm shift nevertheless appears to be underway, in which the classical psychoanalytic theories about the Oedipus complex, primary and secondary repression, sexual difference and psychosexuality, the role of symbols,etc, are being dismantled and reintegrated into a new synthesis of biological and psychological theories. In this collection of theoretical essays by philosophers and psychoanalysts, encounters are brought about between Freudian and Lacanian psychoanalysis on the one hand, and attachment theory, evolutionary psychology and philosophy of mind on the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qdz7w
Quasi-beliefs and Crazy Beliefs: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Garvey Brian
Abstract: This paper concerns what Freud called the ‘special characteristics’ of the unconscious. According to his metapsychological writings, unconscious mental states differ from conscious ones not just in not being conscious, but in having what he calls ‘systematic’ features, such as exemption from mutual contradiction, imperviousness to the influence of external reality, and so forth. Yet he still wants to characterise them as mental states. He is often explicit in his use of psychological language to describe them. Even when he is not, he makes it clear that the mechanistic-sounding language he sometimes uses is to be understood metaphorically. The movements
Lacan and Ethics: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Derbyshire Philip
Abstract: Towards the end of ‘The Function and Field of Speech and Language in Psychoanalysis’, the so-called ‘Rome Discourse’ published in
Écrits, Lacan gives an encomium to the practice of psychoanalysis: ‘Of all the undertakings that have been proposed in this century’, he says, ‘that of the psychoanalyst is the loftiest, because [his] undertaking acts in our time as the mediator between the man of care and the subject of absolute knowledge’ (Lacan 1953a: 106). I take this to mean that for the early Lacan, the psychoanalyst has a privileged position in mediating an emergent knowledge of the subject and a
The Ultimate Causes of Paranoia: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) de Block Andreas
Abstract: Griesinger and Kraepelin qualified paranoia as one of the three major psychotic disorders, together with schizophrenia and manic-depressive psychosis (Griesinger 1845, Kraepelin 1915). In psychoanalytic thinking, paranoia even became the paradigmatic form of psychosis. Freud’s only case-studies of psychotic patients, for instance, were devoted to paranoid individuals (Freud 1911, Freud 1915). Jacques Lacan (1988), and to a lesser degree Melanie Klein (1946), pursued this line of thinking by considering paranoia as the essence of the psychotic process (Roudinesco & Plon 1997). Contemporary psychiatric nosography, however, handles schizophrenia as the central taxon. In fact, schizophrenia has become a more or less generic
The Origins and Ends of ‘Sex’ from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Sandford Stella
Abstract: We have often heard it maintained that sciences should be built up on clear and sharply defined basic concepts. In actual fact no science, not even the most exact, begins with such definitions. The true beginning of scientific activity consists rather in describing the phenomena [
Erscheinungen] and then in proceeding to group, classify and correlate them. Even at the stage of description it is not possible to avoid applying certain abstract ideas to the material in
Love as Ontology: from:
Origins and Ends of the Mind
Author(s) Clemens Justin
Abstract: Psychoanalysis has, from its origins, remained indifferent to or suspicious towards ontology. More precisely, the practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy — and,
a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse seems to have been the case: it is philosophers who have had to respond, with some urgency, to the challenges offered by psychoanalysis. However
Foreword from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Author(s) Alen André
Abstract: In some respects, this book has characteristics which one could expect from a junior researcher: it tries to be innovative, explores issues from a (whole array of) different angle(s), and could be read as provocative. At the same time, the work radiates academic maturity in some other respects: the depth and width of the considerations taken into account are impressive, and even if some points might come across as provocative
2. Belgian federalism: from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: On the whole, Belgium’s federal structure must be understood as a ‘complex set of compromises that was the product of a series of protracted political negotiations’¹²⁶. These negotiations dealt primarily with Flemish aspirations for (cultural) autonomy, Flemish fear of ‘Frenchification’ of the Brussels periphery, Walloon aspirations for economic autonomy, and minority protections, both for the Francophones in Belgium as a whole, and for the Flemish inhabitants of the ‘Frenchified’ Brussels periphery¹²⁷.
3. The Belgian Constitutional Court and federalism from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: This general characterization of the first five years of Constitutional Court jurisprudence refers to three
toolsthe Court has used
Conclusion from:
Beyond Federal Dogmatics (pdf)
Abstract: The Belgian Constitutional Court holds an ambiguous position towards European law. Whereas, generally, it has recognized its power to review the conformity of a legislative act approving a treaty with the Constitution, it also deploys these treaties, and more broadly European law as enshrined in treaties and other instruments, to decide upon the constitutionality of other laws. Especially in reviews that rely upon the constitutional principle of non-discrimination, European law can play an important role, providing content to that principle.
Book Title: Islam & Europe-Crises are Challenges
Publisher: Leuven University Press
Author(s): SHAH Prakash
Abstract: Within the framework of the Forum A. & A Leysen, several experts from in and outside the Muslim world contributed to this book. In Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges they discuss how dialogues between Islam and the West, with a focus on Europe, can be achieved. The various authors (legal scholars, political theorists, social scientists, and psychologists) explore in these collected essays such interrelated questions as: How much diversity is permissible within a liberal pluralistic democratic society? How strong are the implications of citizenship? What are equitable accommodations of contested practices? They argue for an adequate understanding of how Western Muslim communities in Europe experience their minority position and what needs to be done to improve their participation in European society. The second part of this volume is a collection of papers written around the work of Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, who also makes his own contribution to the book. The Catholic University of Leuven awarded An-Na'im an honorary doctorate in 2009 on the theme of multiculturalism, intercultural relations and diversity. An-Na'im is recognized the world over as a leading expert in the area of religion and law, and as a human rights activist. Islam and Europe: Crises Are Challenges reinforces our sense that a better knowledge and awareness of the growing diversity of our society, and striving for harmonious relations between Islam and the West, are among the most important challenges of our time. With contributions by: Ahmed Aboutaleb, Durre S. Ahmed, Abdullahi Ahmed An-Na'im, Shaheen Sardar Ali, Mohamed Benzakour, Jean-Yves Carlier, Marie-Claire Foblets, Ziba Mir-Hosseini, Fouad Laroui, Bettina Leysen, Rashida Manjoo, Bhikhu Parekh, Mathias Rohe, Cedric Ryngaert, Prakash Shah. Other publication: Islam and Europe, Challenges and Opportunities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf1dm
Resurrecting Siyar Through Fatwas? from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Ali Shaheen Sardar
Abstract: This article seeks to explore the impact of the Iraq war on
siyaror ‘Islamic international law’ from a range of Muslim perspectives by raising some critical questions and addressing these through the lens of a selection offatwassolicited by Muslims from a range of countries and continents, on the Iraq war and its implications for popular understandings ofsiyarandjihad. This article suggests that the Iraq war presents an opportunity to revisit and potentially revive historicalsiyarpronouncements of a dichotomous world,i.e., dar-al-harb and dar-al-Islam. I argue that in so doing, this discourse has invigorated the
The Indian Dimension of An-Na ‘Im’s Islam and the Secular State from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Shah Prakash
Abstract: As a London LLM student in the early 1990s I recall An-Na ‘im’s writing (An-Na ‘im 1990a) as one of the few then available discussions of human rights not only within the Islamic world, but also more widely in non-Western contexts. At the time, the voice of non-Western jurisprudence, particularly in light of the universal claims of essentially Western concepts of human rights, was hardly heard and, even in the post-cold war period, this field is still not exactly replete with deeper reflections about the significance and relevance of human rights concepts and ideas for non-Western peoples. An-Na ‘im’s contributions
Compromising of Gender Equality Rights – Through the Recognition of Muslim Marriages in South Africa from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Manjoo Rashida
Abstract: South Africa’s history of colonisation and apartheid included discriminatory laws, policies and practices based on factors including race, sex, gender, culture and religion. the goal was to create a system of legal, social and economic separation of the people of the country. Since 1994, post-apartheid South Africa is a country where many diverse people coexist in harmony, despite differences based on culture, race, religion etc. the Constitution of South Africa Act 108 of 1996 (hereinafter the Constitution) is viewed by many as an ideal model for multicultural democratic contexts, wherein the right to equality exists with the right to culture,
Islam and the Democratic State under the Rule of Law – And Never the Twain Shall Meet? from:
Islam & Europe
Author(s) Rohe Mathias
Abstract: It goes without saying that neither secular democratic states nor Islam as a religion could be perceived to be homogeneous and immutable in time and space. this paper will firstly focus on misunderstandings relating to secularity and democracy: Contrary to the widespread understanding of secularity among Muslims, secular states open broad space not only for the private exercise of religion, but also for its public practice and appearance. As to democracy, Muslim traditionalists use to juxtapose its mechanisms to the ‘eternal provisions of God-given Sharia’. It will be briefly demonstrated that every norm, being derived from God or a human
Book Title: Subversion, Conversion, Development-Cross-Cultural Knowledge Exchange and the Politics of Design
Publisher: The MIT Press
Author(s): Wilson Lee
Abstract: This book explores alternative cultural encounters with and around information technologies. These encounters are alternative because they counter dominant, Western-oriented notions of media consumption; they include media practices as forms of cultural resistance and subversion, "DIY cultures," and other nonmainstream models of technology production. The contributors -- leading thinkers in science and technology studies, anthropology, and software design -- pay special attention to the specific inflections that different cultures and communities give to the value of knowledge. The richly detailed accounts presented here challenge the dominant view of knowledge as a neutral good -- information available for representation and encoding but separated from all social relations. The chapters examine specific cases in which the forms of knowledge and cross-cultural encounters are shaping technology use and development. They consider design, use, and reuse of technological tools, including databases, GPS devices, books, and computers, in locations that range from Australia and New Guinea to Germany and the United States.ContributorsPoline Bala, Alan Blackwell, Wade Chambers, Michael Christie, Hildegard Diemberger, Stephen Hugh-Jones, James Leach, Jerome Lewis, Dawn Nafus, Gregers Petersen, Marilyn Strathern, David Turnbull, Helen Verran, Laura Watts, Lee Wilson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qf5w5
1 Anthropology, Cross-Cultural Encounter, and the Politics of Design from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Wilson Lee
Abstract: This collection presents a set of empirical cases and theoretical examinations that focus on alternative cultural encounters with and around information technologies (alternative, that is, to the dominant notions of media consumption among Western audiences). Some of the examples refer to media practices as forms of cultural resistance and subversion, some to DIY cultures and alternative models of technology production and appropriation. Then there are considerations of representation and political participation, of entwined practices of knowledge production and encoding, and of information capture and preservation. The contributors are interested in possibility, and they are interested in constraint. They reveal how
3 Freifunk: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Petersen Gregers
Abstract: Freifunk is an assemblage of a friction–filled multiplicity of interests and effects of technology use in everyday life in the twenty–first century. It is a community that originates in Berlin, a particular form of social movement, and a specific technological approach to computer networking. The tale of Freifunk’s emergence and distillation tells of a process in which the everyday tactics of solving one’s own problems (in this case, a lack of Internet access) are integrated with a more general strategy of political subversion. Thus it is also a tale of how technical appropriation becomes a sociotechnical subversion. To
5 Sacred Books in a Digital Age: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Hugh-Jones Stephen
Abstract: The use of digital technologies in the reproduction of texts has profoundly transformed attitudes toward books and also the production and format of books themselves. Remarkably, at a time when it is often suggested that digital books may soon supersede conventional books, there has been a lot of rethinking about what a book is, as both object and artifact (Boutcher 2012, 59). In addition it is often assumed that digital technologies will lead inexorably to a universalization and standardization that will override cultural differences and local identities. The way in which digital technologies are used in relation to books appears,
7 Making the Invisible Visible: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Lewis Jerome
Abstract: Pygmy hunter-gatherers in the Congo Basin are reputed simply to vanish when danger is imminent. They are famous for supposedly using such skills when accomplishing seemingly impossible tasks such as single-handedly spearing a fierce forest elephant or vanishing suddenly into the forest and then reappearing just as suddenly when it suits them. Their fearfulness of incoming agriculturalists and fisher groups led them to avoid such newcomers, sometimes for many years, before tentatively making contact through practices such as silent trade.¹ One consequence of this is that non-Pygmy groups in the Congo Basin frequently call Pygmy hunter-gatherers “Twa,” “Tua,” or “Cwa”
12 Subversion, Conversion, Development: from:
Subversion, Conversion, Development
Author(s) Wilson Lee
Abstract: Lievrouw and Livingstone have defined (or redefined) new media as “information and communication technologies
and their social contexts” (see Lievrouw 2011, 7; our italics). In doing so, they emphasize that new media are interesting and important inasmuch as they combine three main elements: artifacts or devices, practices, and the arrangements and social forms built around practices. “Today, a lively and contentious cycle of capture, cooptation and subversion of information, content, personal interaction, and system architecture characterizes the relationship between the institutionalized, mainstream center and the increasingly interactive, participatory and expanding edges of media culture” (Lievrouw 2011, 2).
Introduction from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Murray Thomas H.
Abstract: In May 2010, as The Hastings Center was holding the last of three meetings in a project about the ethical issues of a new but still rather obscure branch of genetic technologies that had been dubbed synthetic biology, news began to trickle in that the field was about to break into the national consciousness. Researchers at the J. Craig Venter Institute (JCVI) had successfully managed to synthesize the genome of a bacterium,
Mycoplasma mycoides, insert it into a cell of a closely related species,Mycoplasma capricolum, from which the genome had been removed, and produce what was to all appearances
2 Creating Life: from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Boldt Joachim
Abstract: The invention and development of recombinant DNA techniques in the 1970s led to what is nowadays known as “genetic engineering” and to “genetically modified organisms” such as transgenic maize, insulin-producing bacteria, and the oncomouse. Synthetic biology is usually thought of as a more recent development. It may come as a surprise, then, that the term “synthetic biology” entered the scientific scene around the same time as “genetic engineering.”
4 Lessons from Environmental Ethics about the Intrinsic Value of Synthetic Life from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Larson Ben T.
Abstract: Synthetic biology is the attempt to “engineer complex artificial biological systems to investigate natural biological phenomena and for a variety of applications” (Andrianantoandro et al. 2006; see also Endy 2005). We will use the expression “synthetic life-forms” to refer to the different kinds of synthetic organisms produced in synthetic biology laboratories. These organisms today are typically various kinds of genetically modified bacteria. Even if most (or even all) of the material in a synthetic life-form comes from natural forms of life, we still consider it to be “synthetic” because it is produced through the intentional activity of laboratory scientists. Synthetic
5 Three Puzzles Regarding the Moral Status of Synthetic Organisms from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Sandler Ronald
Abstract: Minimally artifactual organisms are commonplace. Selective breeding, grafting, and intentional hybridization—processes that have been occurring since the beginning of agriculture—produce minimally artifactual organisms. But although traditional
6 Synthetic Bacteria, Natural Processes, and Intrinsic Value from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Preston Christopher J.
Abstract: Today’s synthetic biology, just like traditional biotechnology, raises important questions about the moral significance of its products; and questions about the “use” values and disvalues of synthetic organisms are especially prominent among these. It is, after all, the uses—and, by extension, the markets—for these new bacterial organisms that typically drive research into their production. Also significant, however, are questions about the intrinsic (or inherent) value of bacteria produced through synthetic means.¹ If the public’s reaction to older forms of biotechnology is any indication, sentiments about these intrinsic values and disvalues are widespread, wielding a greatly underestimated, popular power.
8 Biotechnology as Cultural Meaning: from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Jennings Bruce
Abstract: Perhaps the fundamental question before us in science policy today involves the extension of human power and artifice into the realm of life. The general question is not new. Shakespeare’s Prospero pondered it, as did Mary Shelley’s Frankenstein and H. G. Wells’s Dr. Moreau. But the gap between fantasy and actual technological capacity is closing, so that now the morality of power must speak to the governance of power; ethics must inform public policy. Synthetic biology constitutes a significant extension of the human capacity to manipulate the conditions of life at several levels—the molecular and cellular level, the level
9 “Teaching Humanness” Claims in Synthetic Biology and Public Policy Bioethics from:
Synthetic Biology and Morality
Author(s) Evans John H.
Abstract: The emergence of synthetic biology has led some commentators to raise some deep and abstract ethical issues. It has been repeatedly claimed, for example, that synthetic biology will teach people to accept a different notion of what it means to be human—a view I will call the teaching humanness (TH) claim. TH claims have been made about various scientific innovations over the centuries, as well as in more recent debates in public policy bioethics, where such claims are routinely made and then ignored. In this paper I first discuss why claims like this are ignored in public policy bioethics,
Book Title: Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal- Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Author(s): Vicedo Noelia Díaz
Abstract: This study focuses upon the work of the Catalan woman poet Maria-Mercè Marçal. It analyses the interaction between body and language in her first five books of poetry. Drawing on the Italian feminist thought of il pensiero della differenza sessuale, it examines the ways in which Marçal’s poetic images display her Catalan feminine subjectivity, including the function of the poet, the space of poetry and the representation of love. It also explores the potentiality of the space of poetry to reconstruct female identity and reconfigure reality. In addition, it unravels the way in which the poet uses poetry to express the love for the other whilst also extending the boundaries of the self. The central concern is to bridge the fissure between female experience and universal precepts on the art of poetry through the predominance of an embodied and natural iconography. This study presents Marçal’s poetic compositions within the international panorama of poetry and feminist studies and aims to open up new terrains of discussion in the field of language, body and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfbjk
CHAPTER 4 Love and Passion: from:
Constructing Feminine Poetics in the Works of a Late-20th-Century Catalan Woman Poet: Maria-Mercè Marçal
Abstract: In maintaining the character of Marçal’s poetry as praxis, in Chapter Three I examined poetry as the space where the process of the reconfiguration of reality takes place. Moving from myth to the various levels of reality, I have shown that Marçal concentrated her agency as a writer upon the action of
mettere al mondo il mondo. The results attestes to her emergence as a woman poet, and reveales the prevalence of poetic action upon the theme of birth as Marçal’s specific form of creating a novel iconographic female universe. As a writer, she reappropriates the female body and repositions
1 It’s All in the Timing: from:
Soul
Author(s) Scott Anna
Abstract: The “Afro” style of movement and performance began in Brazil in the seventies among radicalized sectors of the Black-mixtured community as a way to recuperate and politicize inherited African cultural practices that had been co-opted by the dictatorship as simply folklore, part of “our Brazilian Heritage.” Twenty years later, it appears that this particular style of dance has a fixed set of codes from which the dancer may construct/choreograph meaning into a performance. This position, however, reinstates the paradigm of the “folk” into a dynamic process of identification, communication, and insertion within transnational discourses about the various cultures of people
3 Notes of a Prodigal Son: from:
Soul
Author(s) Grant Nathan L.
Abstract: James Baldwin, as a developing essayist and thinker, sought to fashion the Black reaction to anti-Black racism by iterating and reiterating the risk of genuine freedom for whites who refused to relinquish their hatred. Baldwin desired to dissolve the horror of American racism in the crucible of love, and thus pass to his brothers and sisters the cup of understanding. This idea was at the heart of his first collection of essays,
Notes of a Native Son(1955), which was hailed by many as an enduring view on the Black condition in America. But perhaps the severest criticism was that
4 Fragmented Souls: from:
Soul
Author(s) White Artress Bethany
Abstract: The electric narrative structure of this interview reflects a desire to communicate the ways in which history constantly informs and is reinformed by contemporary life and art. When I first encountered the work of Renée Cox I found myself standing in front of a seven-foot framed photograph of a naked black woman in pumps holding a baby titledYo Mama.Here stood a woman daring the viewer to make her someone’s mammy, bed warmer, or doormat. Cox challenges viewers to leave historical stereotypes about black female sexuality by the wayside and to engage in the act of reinventing the black
INTRODUCTION: from:
Soul
Author(s) Morris Tracie
Abstract: I’m flowing with reflections of poetic sisterhood politics and its meaning to this book’s theme. Playing with my dense rhyme scheme a tagteam partner in an attempt to marry analysis, opinion, and art. Intense word play is the way we poet types try to understand how we feel. For this artisan, soul is the reflection of culturalists looking for the most alternatives and bearing the most diverse array of accouterments. From my vantage point I see nuanced implications for political direction in Afrofern’s literally abstract articulation. The crystallization of hip black culture in general and its connections to the nation’s
INTRODUCTION: from:
Soul
Author(s) Reed Ishmael
Abstract: Moreover, with the grim statistics confronting African Americans, what is there to take pleasure in? Why does this topic even come up? One thinks of those didactic cartoons, printed in
The Final Call,showing African Americans
17 The Stigmatization of “Blaxploitation” from:
Soul
Author(s) Simon Richard
Abstract: In May of 1996, after some antsy weeks of waiting, I got to see the movie
Original Gangstas,starring Fred Williamson, Jim Brown, and Pam Grier, with assists from Richard Roundtree and Ron O’Neal—stars respectively of the black action film classicsBlack Caesar, Slaughter, Coffy, Shaft,andSuperfly—theéminences brunesof blaxploitation.¹ From the first precredit notes of the soundtrack, the movie delivers a densely packed parcel for the viewer to unpack at top speed. At the level of basic narrative, it is almost a textbook example of the genre: cool civilian comes back to town, finds once-tolerable
18 Question of a “Soulful Style”: from:
Soul
Author(s) Gilroy Paul
Abstract: This interview with Paul Gilroy took place in the spring of 1996 in New York City, In recent years, scholars and writers have begun to investigate the international dimensions of soul as it emanates from the Caribbean, Great Britain, and other urban metropoles. Gilroy’s work has been crucial to our (and others’) critical (re)considerations of soul because it calls for a rigorous investigation of the impact that the exchange of ideas and commodities across various national borders has had on these global communities. Similarly, he calls upon us to interrogate both the differences and commonalities among black diasporic communities in
2 Resignation from:
A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: When we are bored, we allow ourselves a certain liberty that can take the form of a kind of self-conscious pause. This is a moment of loneliness that sometimes leads us to deep reflections concerning the human condition. Such an experience is democratically available to anyone who is willing and able to move past the distractions offered up as the fruits of the social contract, to resist the way our commodities come to establish themselves as the conditional terms through which we live together. The most democratic claim we may make in this regard is that we might all be
7 Wild Things from:
A Politics of the Ordinary
Abstract: In the spring of 1989, Jean Baudrillard attended a conference at the University of Montana in Missoula that was devoted to a wide-ranging exploration of his work and its cultural implications. After delivering the keynote lecture for the conference, he listened to a response by an American L-A-N-G-U-A-G-E poet and then editor of the
Socialist Review, Ron Silliman. Silliman allegorized Baudrillard as “the drag queen of theory.”¹ Misunderstanding Silliman’s comments; or taking the compliment as too little, too late; or deciphering a deep insult that some of us missed; or suffering from an uncharacteristic failure of imagination, for some reason
3. Violence, USA: from:
America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: Since 9/11, the war on terror and the campaign for homeland security have increasingly mimicked the tactics of the enemies they sought to crush. Violence and punishment as both a media spectacle and a bone-crushing reality have become prominent and influential forces shaping American society. As the boundaries between “the realms of war and civil life have collapsed,” social relations and the public services needed to make them viable have been increasingly privatized and militarized.¹ The logic of profitability works its magic in channeling the public funding of warfare and organized violence into universities, market-based service providers, Hollywood cinema, cable
9. Neoliberalism’s War against Teachers in Dark Times: from:
America's Education Deficit and the War on Youth
Abstract: The tragic deaths of twenty-six people shot and killed on December 14, 2012, at Sandy Hook Elementary School in Newtown, Connecticut, included twenty young children and six educators. All of the children were shot multiple times. Many more children might have been killed or injured had it not been for the brave and decisive actions of the teachers in the school. The mainstream media was quick to call them heroes, and there is little doubt that what they did under horrific circumstances reveals not only how important educators are in shielding children from imminent threat, but also how demanding their
Book Title: Negotiating Justice-Progressive Lawyering, Low-Income Clients, and the Quest for Social Change
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Shdaimah Corey S.
Abstract: While many young people become lawyers for the big bucks, others are motivated by the pursuit of social justice, seeking to help people for whom legal services are financially, socially, or politically inaccessible. These progressive lawyers often bring a considerable degree of idealism to their work, and many leave the field due to insurmountable red tape and spiraling disillusionment. But what about those who stay? And what do their clients think? Negotiating Justice explores how progressive lawyers and their clients negotiate the dissonance between personal idealism and the realities of a system that doesn't often champion the rights of the poor.Corey S. Shdaimah draws on over fifty interviews with urban legal service lawyers and their clients to provide readers with a compelling behind-the-scenes look at how different notions of practice can present significant barriers for both clients and lawyers working with limited resources, often within a legal system that many view as fundamentally unequal or hostile. Through consideration of the central themes of progressive lawyering - autonomy, collaboration, transformation, and social change - Shdaimah presents a subtle and complex tableau of the concessions both lawyers and clients often have to make as they navigate the murky and resistant terrains of the legal system and their wider pursuits of justice and power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qfs6k
2 Why Talk to Clients and Lawyers? from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Broadly generalized, there are two strains of literature on legal services lawyers. One strain takes an explicitly normative stance regarding what outcomes, relationships, or processes are “good.” Scholarship in this genre provides advice about how legal services lawyers should act in order to optimize the assistance they provide to their clients. They advise on everything from choosing cases and clients from disparate community interests to empowering clients and avoiding paternalism. Such literature is not purely instrumental, as much of it provides a rationale for the underlying values promoted. These authors share the espousal of value-based practice, even when they are
3 Working for Social Justice in an Unjust System from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: All of the lawyers in this study shared a commitment to social change. Many were troubled by how their commitment has played out in work with clients over the course of their careers, particularly in the conservative political climate of the 1990s and the early twenty-first century that is at best apathetic and at worst hostile to poor people’s claims. Clients were less direct in their discussion of social justice. While most felt dissatisfaction with the “system,” they (understandably) focused on their immediate needs. Although their narratives reveal visions of a more equitable legal system, these are often clouded by
4 Did Someone Say Autonomy? from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Autonomy is both a value and a goal espoused by most theories of progressive lawyering, which are rooted in the presumption that most clients are competent and entitled to make informed decisions. Progressive lawyering literature calls for attorneys to practice in ways that foster rather than impede client autonomy. Indeed, autonomy often is seen as a component of respect for clients. It is also an expression and affirmation of the belief that clients and lawyers are equals, a form of resistance that seeks to challenge dominant notions of the hierarchical relationship between lawyers and clients, particularly between low-income clients and
5 Collaboration from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: The previous chapter focused on the value of client autonomy. This chapter examines a technique of lawyering that has been called “collaborative lawyering,” which is in many ways closely tied to notions of autonomy. Collaborative lawyering models portray lawyers and clients as “co-eminent problem solvers.”¹ This term is rooted in a belief that both lawyers and clients can and should contribute knowledge and skills to the relationship, and that clients should make decisions and take actions. In this chapter, I briefly examine the basis for collaborative lawyering and advocate adoption of a broad definition of collaboration. Relying on that definition,
6 Lawyer and Client: from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Progressive lawyering literature stresses the importance of focusing on clients. The basis for client-centeredness is respect for clients, client autonomy, and decision making. Legal services lawyers and clients in this study reveal a complex foundation for a practice centered on the individual client: the often transformative nature of the client-lawyer relationship for both client and lawyer. This takes place when lawyer and client open themselves to each other, even within the limited context of their legal services relationship. Beyond the material assistance clients seek from NELS, empathy, respect, and a feeling of connection are deeply powerful and affirming for people
7 Progressive Lawyering and the Ethic of Risk from:
Negotiating Justice
Abstract: Theorists of progressive lawyering, critical and otherwise, tell lawyers how to act. They set out guidelines that assume client goals and desires and attempt to mold client behavior. Underlying such advice is the presumption that observers of public interest lawyering know better than lawyers and clients engaged in practice about everything from the nature of the client-professional relationship to the goals they should pursue and their chances of achieving them. Drawing on Paul Ricoeur’s hermeneutic of suspicion, Paul Schiff Berman has pointed to some of the dangers of the almost exclusively critical focus of sociolegal and critical scholarship about progressive
4 Cultures of Expression: from:
The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: The previous chapters analyze forms of identification and social solidarity created by members of the Lebanese diaspora. On the one hand, Lebanese immigrants are in a constant process of identifying with their homeland and host societies. Additionally, they identify with other members of the larger diaspora, which leads to their engagement in global communities. This chapter addresses the topic of diasporic cultural expression to illustrate ways in which the Lebanese diaspora engages in global and local cultural practices that parallel their multilayered forms of identification and community involvement. The definition of culture that I use encompasses culture as a way
5 Conclusion: from:
The Lebanese Diaspora
Abstract: I was introduced to Michel through other Lebanese friends. He is the first respondent I interviewed, and luckily he quickly became interested in my research project and offered much appreciated help. He lived in New York but knew others in Montreal and Paris and promised to introduce me to them. In the fall of 2001 I joined him on my first trip to Montreal as a researcher. I had visited the city before but had not established any contacts with possible informants. We arrived in the city after dinner time, on a Friday night, without any plan to meet specific
3 Legal History from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) HORWITZ MORTON
Abstract: HORWITZ: It would be the years 1955–1959—the late fifties. So one of the general points is I felt the fifties all around me. In general, there was an incredibly narrow set of conventional wisdom about politics and morality and so on. The only difference was, at City College, there was this small active left
5 Critical Race Theory/Law and Literature from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) WILLIAMS PATRICIA
Abstract: WILLIAMS: Actually I was cross-registered at Wellesley and MIT; that is to say, while I matriculated from Wellesley I spent nearly half of my undergraduate years at MIT. My major was urban studies and city planning, which wasn’t exactly a strength at Wellesley, with its leafy green environs, at least not back then. However, MIT had an outstanding urban studies program so I took most of my major classes there. It was an extremely interdisciplinary curriculum, and that had a big impact
7 Postmodern Legal Theory from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) CORNELL DRUCILLA
Abstract: CORNELL: I went to undergraduate school starting in 1968. By that time I’d already been a political radical, and had been involved in the civil rights movement from the time I was in high school. In fact, I volunteered to go to a black high school when I was fifteen. My first college was Scripps College and there was a struggle at that time to have a black studies program, so I quickly became involved in that. I became
9 Classical Liberal Constitutional Theory from:
Legal Intellectuals in Conversation
Author(s) FRIED CHARLES
Abstract: FRIED: I was very young when it happened. The impact is obviously conjecture and retrospective analysis. My parents were what I would describe as typical assimilated Jews from the Austro-Hungarian Empire. My mother was born in 1904; my father was born in 1899. Their adolescence and childhood was in the Austro-Hungarian Empire and then Czechoslovakia in their youth. My father was an engineer by
2 LIBERALISM, NEUTRALISM, AND RIGHTS from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) MACK ERIC
Abstract: In recent years the increased strength and assertiveness of socially conservative political movements have heightened public debate about the legitimate role of the state in enforcing moral prescriptions that are arguably the product of particular, sectarian, religious or moral perspectives. Social conservatives, motivated by components of their religious commitments, have not only condemned homosexual activity and abortion (to pick the two most prominent issues) but have also argued that these activities ought to be legally prohibited. In opposition to such proposals, there has been a reassertion of the liberal doctrines that political institutions must be neutral between competing conceptions of
3 COMMENT ON HOLMES, “JEAN BODIN: THE PARADOX OF SOVEREIGNTY AND THE PRIVATIZATION OF RELIGION” from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) MANSFIELD JOHN H.
Abstract: In 1641, a group of courageous or foolhardy persons set forth from the wintry, intolerant shores of Massachusetts to establish a tolerating state in the gentler clime of Providence Isle off the coast of Nicaragua. They probably had become fired up by events in England and talk of religious liberty coming from there, but having no opportunity to put their new beliefs into practice in Massachusetts, they looked elsewhere to establish them. To their libertarian beliefs, however, there was one limit: anyone who spoke against another’s religion would be put to death,¹ Thus like Jean Bodin, they agreed with the
4 BAYLE’S COMMONWEALTH OF ATHEISTS REVISITED from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) KELLY GEORGE A.
Abstract: In the triad law, morality, religion, it is distinctively the third term with which modern political theory feels least comfortable. Despite fierce debates over their nature, genesis, and relation, law and morality are the
sine quibus nonof the social experiment, unless one is an anarchist or an antinomian. It is broadly recognized that law is the central feature of the territorial state and its matrix of authority—nulla iustitia, hulla iniuria. Somewhat more imaginatively, we have “moral territories” as well, spaces of intention and action where we cooperate in ways that the laws do not prescribe and where, by
9 DIVINE SANCTION AND LEGAL AUTHORITY: from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) NEWTON LISA
Abstract: Is religion necessary for law? By implication, must a secular state that rules by the authority of law preserve the practice of religion within its boundaries in order to maintain its own authority? In a nation whose Constitutional foundations include the separation of church and state, must the state, ultimately, protect and support the church?
12 POLITICS AND RELIGION IN AMERICA: from:
Religion Morality & the Law
Author(s) LADD JOHN
Abstract: One of the central issues in the relationship of politics and religion is the status, scope, and limits of religious toleration. Although the principle of toleration is generally taken for granted by most Americans in an almost ritualistic fashion, they tend to ignore the controversial character of the principle itself: what it means, how it is to be applied, what its limitations are, and, in general, how it is grounded in moral and political philosophy. When asked about the moral basis of toleration the general answer is that toleration comes from pluralism, and ours is a pluralistic society. Q.E.D. It
Book Title: Postmodern Legal Movements-Law and Jurisprudence At Century's End
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Minda Gary
Abstract: In this wide-ranging and comprehensive volume, Gary Minda surveys the current state of legal scholarship and activism, providing an indispensable guide to the evolution of law in America.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg2gf
1. Origins of Modern Jurisprudence from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: Modern American jurisprudential studies began when the dean of Harvard University Law School, Christopher Columbus Langdell, published the first modern law school casebook, Selection of Cases on the Law of Contracts, in 1871. Langdell’s casebook ushered in the modern era because it offered a new methodology and pedagogy for law study that was nothing more than an expression of faith in the scientific method. He declared in the preface to his Contracts casebook: “It is indispensable to establish at least two things, first that law is a science; secondly that all the available materials of that science are contained in
3. Modern Normative Jurisprudence from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: During the 1960s, modern legal thinkers sought to be more
normative. They attempted to develop legal theories for instructing judges and lawyers on how to bring values of justice, fairness, social utility, etc., into their legal practices. Normative legal thought during the 1960s and 1970s was based on the conviction that legal theory and legal reason could make law more normative.¹ However, “despite its obvious desire to have worldly effects, worldly consequences, normative legal thought remains seemingly unconcerned that for all practical purposes, its only consumers are legal academics and perhaps a few law students—persons who are virtually never
5. Law and Economics from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: The sources responsible for the expansion and transformation of the law and economics movement of the 1970s and 1980s have never been adequately explained. One fact remains clear: this movement coincided with the rise of interdisciplinary legal studies and the growing disenchantment with the legal process and fundamental rights schools. In the midst of the disintegration of and disillusionment with mainstream jurisprudence, legal scholars looked outside law to economics for law’s missing authority and the autonomy of legal discourse. Of all the social sciences, economics was the most promising candidate offering “right answers” for law’s problems.
6. Critical Legal Studies from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: While law and economics attracted the attention of legal scholars, a distinct movement in legal studies established itself as a major critic of both traditional and law and economics scholarship. This new academic movement—critical legal studies (CLS—surfaced in 1976 when a group of legal scholars met at the University of Wisconsin Law School and formed a social and professional network called
The Conference on Critical Legal Studies.¹ The diverse intellectual projects of these writers established the thematic character of this movement. The intellectual component of this movement known as CLS continues to grow and expand, despite the fact
7. Feminist Legal Theory from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: In the late 1970s, a powerful new theory of jurisprudence also emerged offering a distinctively feminist perspective on law and adjudication. Feminist jurisprudence grew out of the feminist liberation movement of the 1960s, as feminists critiqued law and society from a woman’s perspective. There are a number of stereotypes and misconceptions about what it means to be a
feminist. As Leslie Bender explained: “Feminists are portrayed as bra-burners, man-haters, sexists, and castrators. . . . We are characterized as bitchy, demanding, aggressive, confrontational, and uncooperative, as well as overly sensitive and humorless. No wonder many women, particularly many career women,
8. Law and Literature from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: The
law and literaturemovement can be traced to the 1973 publication of James Boyd White's The legal imagination,¹ a book that advanced the idea that the study of literature should be part of legal education, because literary studies have something distinctive to say about law and adjudication. Law and literature was previously a marginal subject consisting mainly of the study of stories about law found in the great works of classical literature.² Law and literature practitioners, following the example of Dean Wigmore,³ explored the way law was used in the great literary classics of Dickens, Kafka, and Melville, and
9. Critical Race Theory from:
Postmodern Legal Movements
Abstract: As the 1980s came to a close, a new movement in legal thought emerged offering a new epistemological source for law derived from the “actual experience, history, culture, and intellectual tradition of people of color.”¹ This movement developed as racial-minority scholars within critical legal studies and other progressive networks established “an African American movement”² in legal studies to approach problems of race from the unique perspective of African Americans. Critical race theorists asserted that it was time for “different and blacker voices [to] speak new words and remake old legal doctrines.”³ The critical race theory movement emerged as minority scholars
3 Audience from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Clark Beverly Lyon
Abstract: The term “audience” has only relatively recently come to acquire its dominant modern meaning, referring to the viewers of an entertainment or readers of a book. The earliest such usage listed in the
Oxford English Dictionary(OED) dates to 1855 . Earlier meanings include “[t]he action of hearing” (dating from c. 1374) and a “[f]ormal hearing,” often with royalty or with a judge (from 1377 ). Derived from the Latinaudire, to hear, the term has a special resonance for children’s literature, for the youngest children are not readers but rather auditors of literature, truly an audience. Indeed the broad
7 Character from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Mechling Jay
Abstract: The concept of character has two uses in children’s literature discourse. One use belongs to literary criticism, as the critic and reader observe the people in a story or novel as “characters,” that is, as agents or actors (Burke 1973 ) whose actions move a story through time. The other use refers to the moral qualities of a person. These uses of “character” are related, as the root of the English word lies in a Greek word for a tool used to mark or engrave a material (
Oxford English Dictionary[OED]).
12 Crossover Literature from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Beckett Sandra L.
Abstract: In children’s literature scholarship, “crossover” refers to literature that crosses from child to adult or adult to child audiences. While crossover literature is not a new phenomenon, the term itself was not adopted until J. K. Rowling’s Harry Potter books gave this literature a high profile. Although the term was in use in the late 1990 s, it did not emerge as a common expression until the early years of the new millennium. While the crossover phenomenon actually began earlier in the visual media, with television shows (
Star Trek,The Simpsons), films (E.T.,Toy Story), comics (Charlie Brown), and video
15 Education from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Gruner Elisabeth Rose
Abstract: In both
Keywords(Williams 1983a) andNew KeywordsBennett, Grossberg, and Morris 2005), “education”Keywordshas “educate”) is primarily an institutional practice, which, after the late eighteenth century, is increasingly formalized and universalized in Western countries. Bearing the twin senses of “to lead forth” from the Latineducere) and “to bring up” (from the Latineducare), “education” appears chiefly as an action practiced by adults on children. TheOxford English Dictionarythus defines the term as “the systematic instruction, schooling, or training given to the young in preparation for the work of life.”
16 Empire from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Slemon Stephen
Abstract: A barrage of associated terminology attends the advance of empire, and none of it fires with exactitude.“Imperialism” usually refers to “the practice, the theory, and the attitudes of a dominating metropolitan centre ruling a distant territory” (Said 1993)—that is to say, the politics, the economics, and the enabling ideology behind the promulgation of empires. “Colonialism” is generally understood as the assemblage of ways by which one nation or people imposes direct rule over another nation or people. “Colonization” refers specifically to the establishment of settler colonies in foreign lands. “Neo-colonialism,” a term coined by kwame Nkrumah (the first president of
17 Fantasy from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Baker Deirdre
Abstract: The history of fantasy in the realm of children’s literature has been one of forceful contradictions: on the one hand, fantasy is criticized as being fraudulent, irrational, and overly imaginative; on the other, it is criticized for being formulaic, escapist, and not imaginative enough. The seeds of this debate lie in early uses of the word, which seem to have little to do with literature per se, but nevertheless powerfully influenced the activity of imagination over centuries. Fantasy’s potency in relation to children’s literature reflects its potency in relation to literature in general: it takes us into the heart of
23 Identity from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Coats Karen
Abstract: In the various branches of the natural, mathematical, and human sciences, “identity” has a range of uses related to the property of sameness or consistency of an element regardless of the influence of other variables. “Personal identity,” the subset most relevant to studies children’s literature, is defined in the
Oxford English Dictionary(OED) as “the sameness of a person or thing all times and in all circumstances; the condition or fact that a person or thing is itself and not something else.” This definition has a rigidity that most contemporary scholars of children’s literature will find objectionable. Rather than being
25 Image from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) de Beeck Nathalie op
Abstract: Depending on the speaker (children’s author, literary critic, art historian, advertising designer, painter) and the venue (bookstore, literature conference, gallery, marketing meeting), the term “image” implies an array of connotations, purposes, and audiences (Mitchell 1986). In the hybrid contexts of the twenty-first century—where visual culture, visual studies, and visual literacy are related but contested terms—“image” crosses disciplinary boundaries and characterizes multimodal activities in classrooms and communication. For children’s literature, an interdisciplinary field drawing upon many scholarly discourses, pedagogical approaches, and modes of creative expression, “image” is a complex and provisional term, always at play and in flux.
26 Innocence from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Gubar Marah
Abstract: Pondering the immense popularity of young starlets such as Deanna Durbin and Shirley Temple, Grahame Greene (1993) declared in 1939, “Innocence is a tricky subject: its appeal is not always so clean as a whistle.” While Temple’s charm ostensibly lay in her perfect purity, he argued, in fact she functioned as a highly eroticized figure. Indeed, Temple’s first films were a series of shorts known as “Baby Burlesks” that placed tiny children in compromising positions. “Boy, she’s hot stuff!” remarks one of Temple’s male admirers in one of these shorts (
War Babies[Lamont 1932]), and her later films likewise situate
27 Intention from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Pullman Philip
Abstract: Authors of novels, especially novels for children, know that questions such as these are not uncommon. This might be surprising, in view of the fact that more than sixty years have gone by since William K. Wimsatt and Monroe C. Beardsley published their famous essay “The Intentional Fallacy” (1946 ), except that somehow it isn’t surprising at all to find that
28 Latino/a from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Serrato Phillip
Abstract: As a proper noun, “Latino” designates a resident of United States who is of Latin American descent. an adjective, it renders the noun that it modifies somehow pertinent to or associated with such individuals. While the
Oxford English Dictionarytraces the use of the label back to the 1940s, it did not gain widespread currency until the 1980s. As Suzanne Oboler (1995) observes, “Latino” emerged as a counter to Hispanic,” an umbrella term resented by many who into its fold as “an artifact created and imposed by state administrative agencies.” Among other things, “Hispanic” implicitly cleaned up the genealogy of
31 Marketing from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Cummins June
Abstract: At its most basic level, the word “marketing” refers to the “action of buying or selling” (
Oxford English Dictionary[OED]) and always implies some sort of exchange, usually involving goods, services, or ideas—and money. A common usage of “marketing” that directly affects children’s literature is “the action, business, or process of promoting and selling a product” (OED). Since the advent of the printing press, literature has been intimately related to marketing. It is self-evident that developing technologies made widespread literacy possible; what may take some explaining is that marketing is as essential to the development and dissemination of children’s
35 Nonsense from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Shortsleeve Kevin
Abstract: In his introduction to
The Chatto Book of Nonsense, Hugh Haughton (1988) comments that “nonsense is a bit of a problem.” Haughton is alluding to a set of semantic and literary “difficulties” that have surrounded “nonsense” since the term came into common usage in the seventeenth century. At first the word was used mostly in its literal sense, meaning that which makes no sense, or that which is useless, but a new meaning emerged over the next two hundred years, referring to a particular literary phenomenon. The interactions between these senses of the word are at the heart of some
37 Popular from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Cassidy Julie A. S.
Abstract: While the definition of the term “popular” has remained relatively unchanged for over four hundred years, its connotation certainly takes on new meaning when applied to children’s literature. In
Keywords, Raymond Williams (1983a) reports that the term “popular” was “originally a legal and political term” that first came into the English language in the late fifteenth century. Within the domain of the legal system, an “action popular” was any suit that was open to or brought forth by anyone who was part of the general public. According to theOxford English Dictionary(OED), in the early sixteenth century the term
46 Theory from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Rudd David
Abstract: The word “theory” appears in Raymond Williams’s original
Keywords(1976). He traces its origins back to the Greektheoros, meaning “spectator,” with its root inthea, for “sight,” which also gave us “theater.” As more recent commentators put it, “[T]he literal sense of looking has then been metaphorized to that of contemplating or speculating” (Wolfreys et al. 2006). The term became increasingly opposed to “practice,” not only as something removed from the everyday, but also as something involved in attempts to explain and model the everyday. Although the title of Williams’s work—Keywords—implicitly underwrites the importance of language, his
47 Tomboy from:
Keywords for Childrens Literature
Author(s) Abate Michelle Ann
Abstract: Although the rise of feminism and the advent of queer theory make tomboyism seem like a relatively contemporary phenomenon, the concept originated in the sixteenth century. Interestingly, the term “tomboy” initially referred to rowdy gentlemen courtiers rather than boisterous young women. The first listing in the
Oxford English Dictionary(OED), from 1533, defines “tomboy” as a “rude, boisterous or forward boy.” Several decades later, in the 1570s, the term shifted from characterizing a spirited young man to a like-minded young woman. In so doing, it also acquired newfound sexual associations and age coordinates. “Tomboy” lost the innocently playful connotations it
Book Title: Transcendent in America-Hindu-Inspired Meditation Movements as New Religion
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Williamson Lola
Abstract: Yoga, karma, meditation, guru - these terms, once obscure, are now a part of the American lexicon. Combining Hinduism with Western concepts and values, a new hybrid form of religion has developed in the United States over the past century. In Transcendent in America, Lola Williamson traces the history of various Hindu-inspired movements in America, and argues that together they constitute a discrete category of religious practice, a distinct and identifiable form of new religion.Williamson provides an overview of the emergence of these movements through examining exchanges between Indian Hindus and American intellectuals such as Thomas Jefferson and Ralph Waldo Emerson, and illuminates how Protestant traditions of inner experience paved the way for Hindu-style movements' acceptance in the West.Williamson focuses on three movements - Self-Realization Fellowship, Transcendental Meditation, and Siddha Yoga - as representative of the larger of phenomenon of Hindu-inspired meditation movements. She provides a window into the beliefs and practices of followers of these movements by offering concrete examples from their words and experiences that shed light on their world view, lifestyle, and relationship with their gurus. Drawing on scholarly research, numerous interviews, and decades of personal experience with Hindu-style practices, Williamson makes a convincing case that Hindu-inspired meditation movements are distinct from both immigrant Hinduism and other forms of Asian-influenced or New Age groups.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg57d
6 The Guru-Disciple Relationship from:
Transcendent in America
Abstract: The guru-disciple relationship is a defining characteristic of HIMMs. Followers of HIMMs consider the guru to be an enlightened human being or even a manifestation of God. Some of those who practice TM do not enter into a guru-disciple relationship with Maharishi, but many do. With SRF and Siddha Yoga, the guru-disciple relationship is foundational. When I asked meditators about their first encounter with their guru, the responses revealed that it was a life-changing event and often took them by surprise. Bryan’s response was typical:
8 Worldview from:
Transcendent in America
Abstract: When these young people discovered meditation and the Hindu philosophy that accompanies its practice, they felt they had found purpose to their lives. Their newfound path seems to have satisfied their need to know their ultimate
Conclusion from:
Transcendent in America
Abstract: Let us end where we began—with three meditators who follow three different HIMMs. Since 1969 Walter has meditated twice a day under the auspices of SRF and has attended a weekly satsang at his local center for almost as many years. Aaron has been practicing Transcendental Meditation since 1970 and performs his TM-Sidhi program in the “Dome” twice a day. Jennifer began meditating using the TM technique, but later received shaktipat from Muktananda, and for almost thirty years has chanted and meditated in the early morning and attended satsang weekly.
Chapter 3 Concepts of Scripture in Rabbinic Judaism: from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Fraade Steven D.
Abstract: If at the center of Judaism is “the book,” meaning the Hebrew/Jewish Bible (TaNaKh),¹ at the core of the Jewish Bible is the Torah, the Five Books of Moses (Pentateuch/Humash), traditionally thought to have been revealed by God via Moses to the Israelites standing at the foot of Mt. Sinai. However, from the perspective of the ancient rabbis (ca. 70–500 CE, in the Land of Israel and in Babylonia), who came to define, even more than did the Hebrew Bible, the practice and meaning of Judaism in all of its subsequent varieties, Judaism is less based on the written
Chapter 4 Concepts of Scripture in the Schools of Rabbi Akiva and Rabbi Ishmael from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Yadin-Israel Azzan
Abstract: Once a year, Israel celebrates “Book Week,” a holiday devoted to the written word, consisting of book fairs in city centers, deep discounts on books, and various interviews and panels of authors, critics, and other literary figures. Alongside the mainstream celebrations, there is also “Torah Book Week,” during which ultraorthodox book vendors sell religious texts and artifacts. Years ago, I was perusing the booths of a “Torah Book Week” exhibitor, looking for rabbinic Torah commentaries, when I spotted a series of illustrated children’s books—age-appropriate retellings of Bible stories for young ultraorthodox readers. Curious, I leafed through the first volume,
Chapter 5 Concepts of Scriptural Language in Midrash from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Sommer Benjamin D.
Abstract: Virtually all Jewish conceptions of scripture since late antiquity grow up in the shadow of the rabbinic interpretations known as midrash. Whether by incorporating them, adapting them, or reacting to them, postrabbinic Jewish thinkers who studied the Bible lived in a conceptual world shaped by the midrash. To this day, the interpretations of the weekly biblical reading one hears from a
darshan(a rabbi, teacher, or preacher who gives the sermon) in the course of synagogue worship¹ is likely to consist of a paraphrase of a passage from a midrashic anthology that treats the weekly reading; alternatively (if thedarshan
Chapter 8 Concepts of Scripture in Maimonides from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Diamond James A.
Abstract: There is virtually no facet of present-day Judaism that does not bear the imprint of the formidable intellectual legacy of Moses ben Maimon (1138–1204), whether it be in Jewish law (
halakha), rabbinics, theology, philosophy, or biblical interpretation. Even the mystical tradition’s (kabbala) inventive re-readings of Scripture can be seen as a negative reaction to his overpowering rationalist approach. He was a first in many respects. No fundamental tenets of Judaism to which Jews must subscribe existed prior to his introduction of thirteen articles of faith, what have since been generally assented to as the Jewish creed. He pioneered the
Chapter 10 Concepts of Scripture in Jewish Mysticism from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Idel Moshe
Abstract: Biblical and midrashic theologies, in both legal and narrative texts, reflect a God who gives law and who directs the processes of history. Maimonides’s God is a much more abstract, philosophical deity, and his understanding of the Torah assumes the presence of philosophical concepts.
Chapter 12 The Pentateuch as Scripture and the Challenge of Biblical Criticism: from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Schwartz Baruch J.
Abstract: The study of the Pentateuch among Jews in the two centuries following the appearance of modern Pentateuchal criticism had no choice but to cope with the fact that the systematic study of the Torah had become an academic enterprise carried out exclusively by Christian scholars and that its results were diametrically opposed to the tradition of Jewish learning.¹ Severe challenges to traditional Judaism emerged especially from what ultimately came to be known as the “Higher” Criticism of the Pentateuch. Higher Criticism, recognizing that the Torah contains the work of more than one author and that it achieved its current form
Chapter 13 Concepts of Scripture in Yehezkel Kaufmann from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Jindo Job Y.
Abstract: The empirical conception of the Bible fostered during the Enlightenment advanced the notion that “the Bible is not the key to nature but a part of it; it must therefore be considered according to the same rules as hold for any kind of empirical knowledge.”¹ The notion of the Bible as artifact entails a paradigm shift for those who regard it as Scripture—it challenges them to reconsider their own understanding of this foundational text, which gives structure to their very mode of existence.² This conception of the Bible, which purports to be free of traditional, theological presumptions, puts in
Chapter 14 Concepts of Scripture in Moshe Greenberg from:
Jewish Concepts of Scripture
Author(s) Brettler Marc Zvi
Abstract: Moshe Greenberg was born on July 10, 1928, in Philadelphia to Rabbi Simon and Betty (Davis) Greenberg.¹ His parents were observant Jews who spoke Hebrew to their children, and he received private tutoring in Jewish texts in the early mornings, before attending public school. His father was the rabbi of a prominent Conservative synagogue, served as vice chancellor of the Jewish Theological Seminary, and was active in some progressive social causes. Greenberg studied as an undergraduate and completed his Ph.D. at the University of Pennsylvania. Greenberg’s dissertation, completed in 1954 and published one year later, was on the Ḫab/piru, an
Book Title: The Disarticulate-Language, Disability, and the Narratives of Modernity
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Berger James
Abstract: Language is integral to our social being. But what is the status of those who stand outside of language? The mentally disabled, wild children, people with autism and other neurological disorders, as well as animals, infants, angels, and artificial intelligences, have all engaged with language from a position at its borders. In the intricate verbal constructions of modern literature, the 'disarticulate' - those at the edges of language - have, paradoxically, played essential, defining roles.Drawing on the disarticulate figures in modern fictional works such asBilly Budd, The Sound and the Fury, Nightwood, White Noise,andThe Echo Maker,among others, James Berger shows in this intellectually bracing study how these characters mark sites at which aesthetic, philosophical, ethical, political, medical, and scientific discourses converge. It is also the place of the greatest ethical tension, as society confronts the needs and desires of the least of its brothers. Berger argues that the disarticulate is that which is unaccountable in the discourses of modernity and thus stands as an alternative to the prevailing social order. Using literary history and theory, as well as disability and trauma theory, he examines how these disarticulate figures reveal modernity's anxieties in terms of how it constructs its others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg6xh
1 The Bearing Across of Language: from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: The problem of how to speak with the non-speaking, with those in some sense outside the loop of language, has occupied users of language since at least some of the earliest documentations of language—the
Epic of Gilgameshand the Hebrew Bible. Since then, both in narrative and in the more abstract discourses of religion, philosophy, and, more recently, science and medicine, there has been a continuing dialogue, or an imagined dialogue, with those sited beyond, or just on the borders of language: with animals, infants, angels, the dead, the inanimate objects of nature, and the inanimate (or animate) constructions
5 Alterity Is Relative: from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: In chapter 2, I discussed how characters with cognitive and linguistic impairments in modernist fiction served as figures of radical alterity—both dys- and disarticulate—in relation to a modernity characterized as a totalizing social-symbolic system. Alternate, less extreme ways of thinking about language and social organization were available (e.g., James’s pluralism, Bahktin’s and Voloshinov’s analyses of language as a dialogic enactment of multiple social tensions), but we can speculate that the rapid, violent, traumatic character of social change—and, indeed, of many of the significant events of the twentieth century—and the extreme claims made by positivist thinkers in
Epilogue: from:
The Disarticulate
Abstract: Two very different texts occur to me as forming the end to this book. One, Roman Jakobson’s 1956 essay “Two Aspects of Language and Two Types of Aphasic Disturbances,” I return to, having read it many times over the past decade. The other, David Goode’s 1994
A World without Words: The Social Construction of Children Born Deaf and Blind, I’ve been reading for the first time. Jakobson’s essay is a classic of rhetoric, linguistics, poetics, and literary theory that is remarkable also for its attempt to serve as an intervention into clinical practice. Goode’s book consists of case studies of
Book Title: 22 Ideas to Fix the World-Conversations with the World's Foremost Thinkers
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Sakwa Richard
Abstract: The aftershocks of the 2008 financial crisis still reverberate throughout the globe. Markets are down, unemployment is up, and nations from Greece to Ireland find their very infrastructure on the brink of collapse. There is also a crisis in the management of global affairs, with the institutions of global governance challenged as never before, accompanied by conflicts ranging from Syria, to Iran, to Mali. Domestically, the bases for democratic legitimacy, social sustainability, and environmental adaptability are also changing. In this unique volume from the World Public Forum Dialogue of Civilizations and the Social Science Research Council, some of the world's greatest minds - from Nobel Prize winners to long-time activists - explore what the prolonged instability of the so-called Great Recession means for our traditional understanding of how governments can and should function. Through interviews that are sure to spark lively debate,22 Ideas to Fix the Worldpresents both analysis of past geopolitical events and possible solutions and predictions for the future.The book surveys issues relevant to the U.S., Europe, Asia, Africa, and the Middle East. Speaking from a variety of perspectives, including economic, social, developmental, and political, the discussions here increase our understanding of what's wrong with the world and how to get it right. Interviewees explore topics like the Arab Spring, the influence of international financial organizations, the possibilities for the growth of democracy, the acceleration of global warming, and how to develop enforceable standards for market and social regulation. These inspiring exchanges from some of our most sophisticated thinkers on world policy are honest, brief, and easily understood, presenting thought-provoking ideas in a clear and accessible manner that cuts through the academic jargon that too often obscures more than it reveals.22 Ideas to Fix the Worldis living history in the finest sense - a lasting chronicle of the state of the global community today.Interviews with: Zygmunt Bauman, Shimshon Bichler and Jonathan Nitzan, Craig Calhoun, Ha-Joon Chang, Fred Dallmayr, Mike Davis, Bob Deacon, Kemal Dervis, Jiemian Yang, Peter J. Katzenstein, Ivan Krastev, Will Kymlicka, Manuel F. Montes, Jose Antonio Ocampo, Vladimir Popov, Jospeh Stiglitz, Olzhas Suleimenov, Jomo Kwame Sundaram, Immanuel Wallerstein, Paul Watson, Vladimir Yakunin, Muhammad Yunus
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qg8m2
1 “All human beings have unlimited potential, unlimited capacity, unlimited creative energy” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Piotr
Abstract: Muhammad Yunus is famous as an economist and a philanthropist, but he takes issue with both labels and with the way that mainstream economics and philanthropy are practiced.* He sees poverty, an issue he has sought to tackle in his writing and through his business endeavors, as a systemic problem that robs individuals of their capacity for self-realization. He argues that only in a system that values money above all else and sees humans as atomized, selfish actors can ills like poverty and unemployment be seen as natural or even desirable. He argues that most economics excludes the possibility of
4 “If you make consistent, gradual changes, they can add up to something enormous” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Montes Manuel F.
Abstract: Always one to give frank opinions about all matters economic, Ha-Joon Chang offers a no-holds-barred assessment of the current state of economic practice and theory. The diagnosis: neither is in good shape. While the recession, contrary to popular belief, is over in many countries, the crisis is not. Chang argues that if any theory had failed as badly in practice as free market economics, it would have been discredited and even banned, and yet, even in the face of the crisis, this idea persists. Taking issue with the field of economics and the elites who benefit from free markets, he
6 “This is not Planet Earth; it’s Planet Ocean” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Jan
Abstract: Veteran environmental activist Paul Watson offers a provocative, counterintuitive, and iconoclastic view of the state of an environment in crisis. Basing his analysis on a long-term conception of ecological history as well as recent examples of environmental crises, his central premise is that the environmental movement is not about saving the planet itself but saving the planet as it is for future human generations. From this perspective, the planet will survive environmental degradation and eventually evolve new life, but it is the human race that may not adapt fast enough. This view clashes with our dominant approaches to protecting the
8 “We are all interdependent on this earth” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Zhangozha Rustem
Abstract: In this interview with one of Kazakhstan’s most renowned poets and public figures, Olzhas Suleimenov, Professor Rustem Zhangozha seeks insight from inside the Central Asian region into its recent social and political history. This conversation paints a dynamic picture of political and cultural contestation under Soviet rule and after the collapse of the Soviet Union. Spanning a wide range of topics, including perestroika, the European Union, antinuclear activism, and the potential for Central Asian unification, this conversation not only provides insight into this dynamic region but provides us with ideas on how lessons learned from its politics might be applied
9 “Think communally” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Kulikov Vladimir
Abstract: In a rare interview, the Russian businessman and philanthropist Vladimir Yakunin shares his unique worldview with Vladimir Kulikov. Yakunin argues that the current global paradigm of human relations (interpersonal, international, and relating to the world’s environment and resources) is a predatory one. Eschewing mainstream critiques of capitalism, he argues that such predation occurs in both the East and the West. He suggests that predominant ideologies based on rampant individual consumption and the satisfaction of self-interest not only undermines social stability but can be harmful to capitalism itself. In opposition to what he terms “wild capitalism,” Yakunin proposes a focus on
11 “Re-create the social state” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Sala Vincent Della
Abstract: In this challenging discussion with Vincent Della Sala, the sociologist Zygmunt Bauman focuses on the state of flux—the interregnum—in which the world finds itself. He suggests that we are seeing an increasing separation between politics and power, between the means available to enact change and the vastness of the problems that need to be addressed. In this new world, we are living through what he terms a
liquid modernity, where change is the only constant and uncertainty the only certainty. This is a world with no teleology but also one far from an end of history. In this
12 “Create global social policy” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Mahon Rianne
Abstract: In a frank conversation, Bob Deacon, a preeminent expert on global social policy, explains the history of the concept as theory, policy, and practice, focusing primarily on welfarist policies since the acceleration of globalization in the 1970s. He argues that some problems, like disease, migration, and trade, cannot be dealt with at the level of the state and require international cooperation between states, supranational organizations, and nongovernmental organizations, acting both locally and in the global arena. Calling on his own involvement in the development of such processes, he explains the difficulties of such initiatives and makes a number of concrete
13 “Understand that power is diffuse and change is constant” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Marchetti Raffaele
Abstract: A preeminent expert on international political economy, Peter Katzenstein offers a nuanced analysis of the current state of world power. Shying away from both misplaced optimism and economic apocalypticism, he argues that the main trend facing the modern, crisis-riddled world is a diffusion of power around the globe and among a range of actors on the international stage. Starting from such an actor-based approach, he argues that many of the woes facing the world today were not caused by concepts like “the market” or “the crisis” but rather by a set of interactions among actors. Indeed he suggests that the
14 “People want and need solidarity and social reproduction” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Krause Monika
Abstract: In this unique take on the nature of modern political economy, Craig Calhoun argues that the ongoing crisis is not simply a crisis of capitalism but is instead a crisis of the modern “package” that linked politics, economics, and social relations in a specific way. Bringing a sociologist’s sensibility to the issue, he claims that the most worrisome aspect of the crisis is the fact that it poses a grave threat to what he terms
social reproduction, namely the institutions and systems that support education, health care, and other goods underpinning social welfare and solidarity. He points out that different
19 “The best approach to economic development is pragmatism” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Popov Vladimir
Abstract: Few people understand as well as Jomo Kwame Sundaram the economics of development and the field of development economics and have his range of analytical experience in the field. In this historically rooted and policy-oriented interview, he delves into the characteristics of development and growth. He argues that in examining development we should look to difference, context, and history rather than to economic formulas or one-size-fits-all policies. He outlines the challenges and opportunities facing many developing countries, including their relationship to developed countries, existing power structures, and global financial and monetary mechanisms. Within this context, he suggests that commonly held
21 “Because the Chinese growth model became so successful in ensuring catch-up development it has become extremely appealing in the developing world” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Dutkiewicz Piotr
Abstract: Vladimir Popov brings decades of policymaking and analytical experience to bear on the current state of the global economy. He argues that while the global economy is highly unstable, capitalism itself is not in crisis. In fact he suggests that there have been periods in recent history when socioeconomic instability has been greater than today. On the other hand, he points to the dramatic decrease in the power of labor and growing social inequality in developed and developing world, as well as the continuing underregulation of finance, as worrisome aspects of the contemporary state of Western capitalism. Looking to the
22 “Developing countries are in an unprecedentedly strong position in the world economy” from:
22 Ideas to Fix the World
Author(s) Xin Li
Abstract: The rise of China is, for the most part, either overhyped or downplayed, depending on the context and the economic and political opinions of the commentator. Yet fairly infrequently are Chinese experts actually consulted. In this detailed interview, Jiemian Yang delves into the importance of China and other emerging developing economies in the contemporary global context. This is an assessment of China as a major global player, inexorably linked to developed states yet one that needs to modify its existing policies to become a true global player. Professor Yang also makes the bold claim that the current global crisis, rather
Book Title: Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker-A Reader in Documents and Essays
Publisher: NYU Press
Author(s): Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: More than one hundred years after her death, Elizabeth Cady Stanton still stands - along with her close friend Susan B. Anthony - as the major icon of the struggle for women's suffrage. In spite of this celebrity, Stanton's intellectual contributions have been largely overshadowed by the focus on her political activities, and she is yet to be recognized as one of the major thinkers of the nineteenth century.Here, at long last, is a single volume exploring and presenting Stanton's thoughtful, original, lifelong inquiries into the nature, origins, range, and solutions of women's subordination. Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker reintroduces, contextualizes, and critiques Stanton's numerous contributions to modern thought. It juxtaposes a selection of Stanton's own writings, many of them previously unavailable, with eight original essays by prominent historians and social theorists interrogating Stanton's views on such pressing social issues as religion, marriage, race, the self and community, and her place among leading nineteenth century feminist thinkers. Taken together, these essays and documents reveal the different facets, enduring insights, and fascinating contradictions of the work of one of the great thinkers of the feminist tradition.Contributors: Barbara Caine, Richard Candida Smith, Ellen Carol DuBois, Ann D. Gordon, Vivian Gornick, Kathi Kern, Michele Mitchell, and Christine Stansell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgf51
Introduction from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Smith Richard Cándida
Abstract: Although Elizabeth Cady Stanton (1815–1902) was a prolific writer who produced far-ranging explorations of the political, social, historical, and religious dimensions of women’s subordinate status, little of her writing has been easily available. She is an important figure in the development of intellectual life in the United States but known today for only a handful of pieces, most prominently “The Declaration of Sentiments” drafted for the 1848 Seneca Falls women’s rights convention and her 1892 address, “Solitude of Self.”¹ Historians of women’s rights have concentrated on Stanton’s role as activist and agitator in the earliest woman’s suffrage organizations,² but
Chapter 3 Elizabeth Cady Stanton, John Stuart Mill, and the Nature of Feminist Thought from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Author(s) Caine Barbara
Abstract: In what was ostensibly a letter of praise, the English writer H. G. Wells once wrote to Dora Russell (Bertrand Russell’s first wife) how much he admired her energy and initiative. “Bertie thinks,” he wrote, “and I write but you
do.”¹ As she was well aware, this praise contained a sting. Like Bertrand Russell, Wells often made clear his sense of women’s intellectual inadequacies—and he rarely went so far as to suggest that a capacity for action was to be rated more highly than writing or thought. Indeed, this letter illustrates very neatly the gendered division between thought and
Chapter 6 “National Protection for National Citizens, Address to the Senate Committee on Privileges and Elections, January 11, 1878, Washington, D.C.” from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Even as she pressed for a separate (“sixteenth”) amendment for woman suffrage, Stanton continued to advocate universal citizenship and universal suffrage. In “National Protection for National Citizens” Stanton built on the positive lessons of Reconstruction, especially that national government was under obligation to act affirmatively to protect and secure the rights of all those “anomalous classes” of Americans deprived of their natural rights. Stanton reiterated, point by point, the constitutional case for women already having the right to vote without the necessity of any further “enabling” legislation, which the U.S. Supreme Court had heard and dismissed three years
Chapter 8 “Has Christianity Benefited Woman?” (1885) from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: Stanton wrote this daring, breathtaking overview of women’s history before this was a subject in which scholars worked. Imagining women as important actors shaping the destiny of humanity was an act of faith, necessary for her to challenge historians to approach their work with an enlarged understanding of how societies advanced. She had to review books across a variety of fields to cull any references to women’s contributions in previous societies. Stanton’s methodology suggests her sympathy for new positivist trends in history that were concerned with reconstructing patterns of everyday life rather than narrating the stories of kings,
Chapter 9 “Divorce versus Domestic Warfare” (1890) from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: This article recalls Stanton’s 1860 position on divorce law liberalization, but now Stanton took a much more forceful—and provocative—position. The rise in numbers of divorces which others responded to with a kind of moral panic Stanton saw as wholly encouraging: a sign of the “new woman’s” higher aspirations for personal liberty and individual choice. Divorce law reform was once again a live political issue in the 1890s. Christian reformers, members of the Woman’s Christian Temperance Union prominent among them, were pushing for a more active role for the federal government in regulating morality. They proposed a
Chapter 13 “Our Proper Attitude toward Immigration” (1895) from:
Elizabeth Cady Stanton, Feminist as Thinker
Abstract: Editors’ Note: This brief essay discusses the challenge that a large immigrant population of poorly paid wage earners posed to American conceptions of republican democracy. In the first part of the article, Stanton developed her general position on immigration. She made it clear that she did not support efforts to limit immigration, but she did fear the transfer of European poverty and class distinctions into the United States. She recommended laws that would encourage immigrants to become farmers rather than factory workers. She placed the blame for growing extremes of wealth and poverty on American railroad monopolies, a position she
Book Title: Religious Imaginaries-The Liturgical and Poetic Practices of Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Christina Rossetti, and Adelaide Procter
Publisher: Ohio University Press
Author(s): DIELEMAN KAREN
Abstract: Religious Imaginariesexplores liturgical practice as formative for how three Victorian women poets imagined the world and their place in it and, consequently, for how they developed their creative and critical religious poetics. In doing so, this new study rethinks several assumptions in the field: that Victorian women's faith commitments tend to limit creativity; that the contours of church experiences matter little for understanding religious poetry; and that gender is more significant than liturgy in shaping women's religious poetry.Exploring the import of bodily experience for spiritual, emotional, and cognitive forms of knowing, Karen Dieleman explains and clarifies the deep orientations of different strands of nineteenth-century Christianity, such as Congregationalism's high regard for verbal proclamation, Anglicanism and Anglo-Catholicism's valuation of manifestation, and revivalist Roman Catholicism's recuperation of an affective aesthetic. Looking specifically at Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Christina Rossetti, and Adelaide Procter as astute participants in their chosen strands of Christianity, Dieleman reveals the subtle textures of these women's religious poetry: the different voices, genres, and aesthetics they create in response to their worship experiences. Part recuperation, part reinterpretation, Dieleman's readings highlight each poet's innovative religious poetics.Dieleman devotes two chapters to each of the three poets: the first chapter in each pair delineates the poet's denominational practices and commitments; the second reads the corresponding poetry.Religious Imaginarieshas appeal for scholars of Victorian literary criticism and scholars of Victorian religion, supporting its theoretical paradigm by digging deeply into primary sources associated with the actual churches in which the poets worshipped, detailing not only the liturgical practices but also the architectural environments that influenced the worshipper's formation. By going far beyond descriptions of various doctrinal positions, this research significantly deepens our critical understanding of Victorian Christianity and the culture it influenced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgk5t
INTRODUCTION from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: As Samuel Palmer recognized already in 1812, nineteenth-century Christianity in England was both united and divided.¹ Though Christian churches held most of the central teachings of Christianity in common, they diverged significantly in polity, theology, and liturgy. For the ordinary churchgoing Christian, denominational divergence emerged most obviously not in theological discussions, seminary debates, or circulated writings but in the public worship service, where communal worship practices shaped and bespoke religious principle. True, the basic elements of Christian liturgy—Scripture reading, singing, prayer, sermon, sacrament—appeared in almost all worship services, of whatever denomination; but as Palmer points out, how these
CHAPTER ONE TRUTH AND LOVE ANCHORED IN THE WORD from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: Because Barrett Browning’s connection to Congregationalism in her adult life has been under-recognized to date, this chapter necessarily begins with remapping the poet’s postmarriage religious commitments. Though somewhat preliminary to the main argument of the chapter, the opening pages resituate Barrett Browning within—or at least close to—a church group that has mistakenly been judged in its midcentury character by the theology and practice of an earlier time. The mistake matters for literary studies because it has marred our perception of the importance of religion to arguably the most important woman poet of the period. Certain of Barrett Browning’s
CHAPTER THREE “THE BELOVED ANGLICAN CHURCH OF MY BAPTISM” from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: To turn from nineteenth-century Congregationalism to Anglicanism, and especially Anglo-Catholicism, is in many ways to turn from what David Tracy, working from Paul Ricoeur, calls proclamation to what he calls manifestation, or from a dialectical toward an analogical imagination and language.¹ Congregationalism, we have seen, grounds the Christ-event as a Word-event, thus calling Christians to witness to that central experience in further, often dialectical, word and action. Anglicanism historically also values proclamation, with Scripture and sermon integral to its liturgy; as Tracy points out, the Christian faith has historically held that “Jesus Christ is both the decisive word and the
CHAPTER FIVE “THE ONE DIVINE INFLUENCE AT WORK IN THE WORLD” from:
Religious Imaginaries
Abstract: This chapter once again suggests that sustained practices have a powerful formative effect on how we imagine the world and our place in it and, consequently, on how we talk or write about it. As did Barrett Browning and Rossetti within their respective traditions, Adelaide Procter developed a poetic aesthetic and practice deeply informed by her worship. While the few critics to take up study of Procter’s poetry in recent years have noted Procter’s commitment to Roman Catholicism and its importance for her poetry, no one has thoroughly investigated the precise configurations of this Catholicism or considered it as generating
Book Title: Biography and turning points in Europe and America- Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Négroni Catherine
Abstract: This sociological collection advances the argument that the concept of a turning point expands our understanding of life experiences from a descriptive to a deeper and more abstract level of analysis. It addresses the conceptual issue of what distinguishes turning points from life transitions in general and raises crucial questions about the application of turning points as a biographical research method. Biography and turning points in Europe and America is all the more distinctive and significant due to its broad empirical database. The anthology includes authors from ten different countries, providing a number of contexts for thinking about how turning points relate to constructions of meaning shaped by globalization and by cultural and structural meanings unique to each country. The book will be useful across a wide range of social sciences and particularly valuable for researchers needing a stronger theoretical base for biographical work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgpjg
THREE Conjugal separation and immigration in the life course of immigrant single mothers in Québec from:
Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Saint-Jacques Marie-Christine
Abstract: Single parenthood over the past few decades has been a focus of family scholar research that has shown its characteristics as a family form, its risks and opportunities, as well as its coping mechanisms. Within this body of research, the situation of immigrant single parents is less documented, although specific conditions particularise this experience, as it will be demonstrated in this chapter. We intend to discuss whether or not immigration can initiate a turning point in the lives of parents experiencing a conjugal separation after settling in the receiving society. Examples are drawn from a research¹ based on biographic interviews
EIGHT Complicating actions and complicated lives: from:
Biography and turning points in Europe and America
Author(s) Ward Nicki
Abstract: In this chapter I present my own investigator’s story, my version of the stories gifted to me as part of a research study into lesbian experiences of social exclusion and mental well-being, and my interpretation of narrative analysis and the use of turning points in narrative. It is a story that, through the process of development, has been presented to different audiences in different formats, received and interpreted differently by each new audience and consequently reinterpreted. The aim here is two-fold: to demonstrate how turning points provide a useful focus of analysis in research that seeks to explore the interaction
ONE A problem-processing perspective on governance from:
The governance of problems
Abstract: People are problem-processing animals. Not that we are all worrywarts, of course. But people do tend to be concerned about conditions they feel uneasy about. They brood over situations they experience as uncomfortable or troublesome, especially if they see no obvious way out. One might call this the substantive logic of problem processing: experiencing an uncomfortable situation, diagnosing the nature of the problem and figuring out what to do to solve, or at least, alleviate the problem. Most problems have a personal character; they concern people as problem owners, their families, relatives, friends, colleagues, fellow members of sports clubs and
FIVE Problem types and types of policy politics from:
The governance of problems
Abstract: The previous chapter looked at translation and framing dynamics from the perspective of the distribution of cultures in society. It inquired into congruencies of citizens’ ways of life with policy makers’ styles and strategies in problem framing and structuring. This chapter will deal with
policy politicsin policy networks. If policy making is intertwined cogitation and interaction (Wildavsky, 1980 [1979]), then policy politics is the combination of types of cognitive processes and styles of interaction, characteristic for problem processing in an issue domain. Policy politics is the specific mode or style of policy making among the set of political actors,
SIX Problem-structuring dynamics and meta-governance from:
The governance of problems
Abstract: This chapter explores a theory of problem-structuring dynamics. It follows the structuration logic proposed by Giddens (1979), showing how policy actors can influence the nature of institutionalised systems of interaction while at the same time being constrained by them. On the one hand, problem-frame shifts and the possibilities for policy change depend on the structure of policy networks. A closed, institutionalised policy network differs from an open, emergent or decaying network. Part of the difference is in shaping different types of policy-making processes, with different capacities for problem processing, and, therefore, speed, scope and direction of policy change and innovation.
SEVEN Making policy analysis doable and reflexive from:
The governance of problems
Abstract: the
knowledge constructions of practitionerswith active roles in policy networks; and
Book Title: Re-imagining child protection-Towards humane social work with families
Publisher: Policy Press
Author(s): Morris Kate
Abstract: Why has the language of the child and of child protection become so hegemonic? What is lost and gained by such language? Who is being protected, and from what, in a risk society? Given that the focus is overwhelmingly on those families who are multiply deprived, do services reinforce or ameliorate such deprivations? And is it ethical to remove children from their parents in a society riven by inequalities? This timely book challenges a child protection culture that has become mired in muscular authoritarianism towards multiply deprived families. It calls for family-minded humane practice where children are understood as relational beings, parents are recognized as people with needs and hopes and families as carrying extraordinary capacities for care and protection. The authors, who have over three decades of experience as social workers, managers, educators and researchers in England, also identify the key ingredients of just organizational cultures where learning is celebrated. This important book will be required reading for students on qualifying and post-qualifying courses in child protection, social workers, managers, academics and policy makers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qgzfm
TWO Re-imagining child protection in the context of re-imagining welfare from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Current policy responses to the economic crisis are mobilising social forces, including social work, in a divisive and authoritarian project against those most vulnerable. In the field of child protection, as indeed in other areas of welfare, the roots of current policies are to be found in those of previous New Labour administrations, but the trends predate them. From the late 1970s onwards, the doctrines of Reagan and Thatcher became dominant, promoting the virtues of letting the market rule in a triumph of neoliberalism. Although we recognise the term neoliberal is not a satisfactory one, as it is reductive, lumping
THREE We need to talk about ethics from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: Written 30 years ago, this closing paragraph of a lucid ethnography of social work by sociologists Robert Dingwall and Topsy Murray and socio-legal scholar John Eekelaar underscores the moral and ethical aesthetic at the core of practice. Unfortunately, their wise counsel was not followed and social work has been mired in a series of technical fixes which have distracted us from, and masked, the moral nature of the work. Thus, the right debates have not taken place, or at least have not taken place in the right spaces.
FOUR Developing research mindedness in learning cultures from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: In the quotation above, Eileen Munro recommends a shift in professional cultures, so expertise is valued and organisational learning flourishes. We share these aspirations, but attempting to achieve them in the current context of child and family social work is likely to produce some vexing challenges. ‘Expertise’ is hydra headed, and each of its heads – research, evidence, intuition, practice wisdom – is two-faced. All are malleable and may be used both to open up and to delimit debate. Claims to expertise are often politicised and readily conscripted into moral missions. A learning culture should foster a rigorous scepticism about grand claims.
FIVE Towards a just culture: from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: That society demands accountability from public services is right and proper. That high standards of practice and service delivery should be expectable is uncontroversial. However, meeting these aspirations in social work services has proved a wicked issue. The quotations above are a stark reminder of the pervasiveness of a blaming culture in statutory children’s services which spreads beyond English social work and which has resulted from failed attempts to ensure consistent high standards. The term (and indeed the sensation of being) ‘inadequate’ is strongly correlated with shame – the primary social emotion (Scheff, 1997). That the inspectorate Ofsted should use this
SIX Getting on and getting by: from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: This chapter and the next two are informed by a growing social sciences literature on suffering, a literature that not only seeks to engage with people’s own experiences but also raises interesting and complicated questions about research practices (Ribbens McCarthy, 2013; Wilkinson, 2005). We would suggest that this literature offers important insights into how vocabularies of expertise have been used throughout modernity diverting attention from the human significance of what suffering does to people (Wilkinson, 2005). Such language is not only ill suited to conveying the existential trauma of human suffering but its tendency towards abstraction has promoted the treatment
EIGHT Tainted love: from:
Re-imagining child protection
Abstract: This chapter examines the ways in which families with complex needs have been understood and represented in policy discourses, and the implications for social work with families where there are care and protection needs. Family-minded practice has struggled to receive sustained attention in social work, and yet the notion of family as the context for the resolution of children’s needs extends the scope for supporting change and provides an accurate reflection of children’s lived experiences. The maintenance of connections for children with their birth family has been a focus of concern across the range of social work interventions, and the
Setting the Stage: from:
Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Culpepper R. Alan
Abstract: The title for this volume conveys an obvious double entendre:
Communities in Dispute. It signals both that the essays in this volume deal with the Johannine Epistles as artifacts of ancient communities in dispute, as some think, over the gospel tradition and that they represent the disputes in current scholarship over the interpretation of these short letters.
[Part 1: Introduction] from:
Communities in Dispute
Abstract: The relation between the Gospel and Epistles of John is fraught with perplexities. On one hand, much of the vocabulary and sentence construction between these two sets of writings are similar, while differences also abound. They certainly represent the same sector of the early Christian movement, but were they written around the same time, by the same person, to the same audience, or might there be a multiplicity of answers to each of these questions? Therefore, any attempt to ascertain the character of the Johannine situation, as well as the meaning of its writings’ content, must first begin with seeking
The Community that Raymond Brown Left Behind: from:
Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Anderson Paul N.
Abstract: Among the paradigm-making contributions in Johannine studies over the last half century, one of the most significant is the sketching of “the community of the Beloved Disciple” by Raymond E. Brown (1979). Extending beyond Johannine studies, Brown’s (1984) work on the history of early Christianity and “the churches the apostles left behind” is also among the most practical and interesting of his forty-seven books.² Here, Brown’s analysis of the unity and diversity of early Christian approaches to leadership and community organization³ have extensive implications, not only for historical and sociological understandings of the first-century Christian movement, but also for approaches
[Part 2: Introduction] from:
Communities in Dispute
Abstract: Central to interpreting the Johannine Epistles is garnering an understanding of their context: Who were their audiences? What sorts of issues were they facing? Were their adversaries internal or external to the Jesus movement (or both)? How do these texts address these issues with implications for later generations? These questions revolve around the character of the church-situation as reflected in the Johannine Epistles, and their relation to issues reflected in the Johannine Gospel, of course, are extremely relevant. Then again, what if constructions of larger overall theories—for all their glory and value—actually distort one’s understanding of the Johannine
The Missional Role of ὁ Πρεσβύτερος from:
Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Jones Peter Rhea
Abstract: Time and space have chastened me to limit my topic considerably from the ecclesial role of ὁ πρεσβύτερος to the missional role. This latter choice pressed upon me by the texts themselves, particularly in 1 and 2 John, is itself a rather large focus upon which I can only make a modest and introductory comment. When approaching either the presumably larger topic or the rather more restricted topic, two courses of action commend themselves: first, to do an analysis of the title itself and then, more promisingly, to do an inductive analysis of the actual action implied in the two
On Ethics in 1 John from:
Communities in Dispute
Author(s) van der Watt Jan G.
Abstract: First John is indeed “the letter of love,” and ethical issues are generally regarded as a core focus in this letter. As a topic, ethics are mentioned in virtually all commentaries on the Epistles,¹ with an obvious emphasis upon aspects like the commandment of love, the exemplary requirement to act according to the light, and some interesting references to sin. The pessimistic view of the presence of ethics in the Gospel of John² does not apply to the Epistles of John.
The Significance of 2:15–17 for Understanding the Ethics of 1 John from:
Communities in Dispute
Author(s) Loader William R. G.
Abstract: My initial reaction in returning to 1 John 2:15–17 after investigating attitudes towards sexuality in the New Testament and early Judaism was to see here a reflection of the view expressed in Mark 12:25 and, I believe, presupposed by Paul, that in the age to come there would be no place for sexual desire and sexual relations, for “the world and its desire are passing away” (ὁ κόσμος παράγεται καὶ ἡ ἐπιθυμία αὐτοῦ, 1 John 2:17).¹ This need not imply a negative stance towards sexual desire in itself as part of God’s creation. It is just that in the
Rethinking Latino Hermeneutics: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Avalos Hector
Abstract: I am not a Latino biblical scholar. I am a biblical scholar who happens to be Latino. I make this distinction for a number of subtle but significant reasons. While my upbringing as a Mexican American Pentecostal Protestant rendered me intimately acquainted with the Bible, my secularist stance has an even larger influence on the topics and approaches I use in biblical scholarship. In fact, I would say that my experience with a chronic illness (Wegener’s Granulomatosis) explains more of my publications as a biblical scholar than my Latino identity (Avalos 1995, 1999, 2007).
The Challenges of Latino/a Biblical Criticism from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Dupertuis Rubén R.
Abstract: The term
challengesin the title of this essay has a number of possible references, some of which are very personal. I was in graduate school working diligently to understand the Acts of the Apostles in the context of rhetorical training and education in the larger Greco-Roman world when I encountered an essay by Fernando Segovia (1995a) in which he critiques the methods that were at the very core of what had, up to that point, been my introduction to biblical and early Christian studies. My reaction was twofold.
Toward Latino/a Biblical Studies: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Lozada Francisco
Abstract: What does it mean to do Latino/a biblical studies? In this essay I shall attempt to address this question not by examining a history of the scholarship in the field, but by critically examining the meaning and implication of the three designations in question—Latino/a, biblical, and studies. It is not my intention here to merely define these terms. Rather, this is meant to be a discussion about how these three interlocking components interact to form the basis for how I see myself doing Latino/a biblical studies.
How Did You Get to Be a Latino Biblical Scholar? from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Sandoval Timothy J.
Abstract: The short answer to the question “How did you get to be a Latino biblical scholar?” is simple: I am a person of Mexican descent living in the United States with the last name Sandoval,
andI earned a PhD in Hebrew Bible. A genuine answer is, however, significantly more complex. It has to do, at least, with what it means in the early twenty-first century to be Latino(a) in the United States (can one really be “Latino” anywhere else?), what it means to be a biblical scholar and to do biblical scholarship, and, of course, exactly what being a
Advancing Latino/a Biblical Criticism: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Segovia Fernando F.
Abstract: Latino/a biblical criticism has from the beginning raised the question of critical task: the identity and role of the critic. This problematic it has pursued in recurrent fashion through the years, with greater intensity in recent times. Such focalization may be viewed as the result of various intersecting factors, social as well as cultural: the striking rise in population numbers within the country; the widening presence of points of origin from Latin America and the Caribbean; and the growing sophistication in matters of method and theory within the field of studies. With exploding demographics, multiplying backgrounds, and expanding discourses, the
Latino/a Biblical Interpretation: from:
Latino/a Biblical Hermeneutics
Author(s) Lozada Francisco
Abstract: This collection of essays on the question of what makes Latino/a biblical interpretation “Latino/a” raises a central and intriguing issue for critics and readers alike: Is identity a matter of being and/or practice? Is the “Latino/a-ness” of an interpretation defined by the personal identity (howsoever defined) of the interpreter? Or is it a matter of how Latino/a biblical interpretation is practiced—that is, are there certain principles, sources, methods (reading strategies), or aims that make some biblical interpretations Latino/a and others not? In this concluding reflection it is not my intention to define Latino/a biblical interpretation in a rigid way,
Book Title: Scientific Understanding-Philosophical Perspectives
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): Eigner Kai
Abstract: To most scientists, and to those interested in the sciences, understanding is the ultimate aim of scientific endeavor. In spite of this, understanding, and how it is achieved, has received little attention in recent philosophy of science.
Scientific Understandingseeks to reverse this trend by providing original and in-depth accounts of the concept of understanding and its essential role in the scientific process. To this end, the chapters in this volume explore and develop three key topics: understanding and explanation, understanding and models, and understanding in scientific practice.Earlier philosophers, such as Carl Hempel, dismissed understanding as subjective and pragmatic. They believed that the essence of science was to be found in scientific theories and explanations. In Scientific Understanding, the contributors maintain that we must also consider the relation between explanations and the scientists who construct and use them. They focus on understanding as the cognitive state that is a goal of explanation and on the understanding of theories and models as a means to this end.The chapters in this book highlight the multifaceted nature of the process of scientific research. The contributors examine current uses of theory, models, simulations, and experiments to evaluate the degree to which these elements contribute to understanding. Their analyses pay due attention to the roles of intelligibility, tacit knowledge, and feelings of understanding. Furthermore, they investigate how understanding is obtained within diverse scientific disciplines and examine how the acquisition of understanding depends on specific contexts, the objects of study, and the stated aims of research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qh59s
3 Understanding without Explanation from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LIPTON PETER
Abstract: Explaining why and understanding why are closely connected. Indeed, it is tempting to identify understanding with having an explanation. Explanations are answers to why questions, and understanding, it seems, is simply having those answers. Equating understanding with explanation is also attractive from an analytic point of view, since an explanation is understanding incarnate. The explanation is propositional and explicit. It is also conveniently argument shaped, if we take the premise to be the explanation proper and the conclusion a description of the phenomenon that is being explained. So we are on the way to specifying the logic of understanding.
4 Ontological Principles and the Intelligibility of Epistemic Activities from:
Scientific Understanding
Abstract: My main goal in this essay is to establish intelligibility as an epistemic virtue that is meaningful and desirable independently of any connection it might or might not have with truth.¹ In brief, my argument is that intelligibility consists of a kind of harmony between éour ontological conceptions and our epistemic activities. I will modify and broaden that formulation in the course of the discussion.
6 The Illusion of Depth of Understanding in Science from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) YLIKOSKI PETRI
Abstract: Philosophers of science have a long tradition of making a connection between explanation and understanding, but only lately have they started to give the latter notion a substantial role in their theories. The reason is because understanding is an even more difficult notion than explanation. To my mind, the recent interest in understanding (exemplified by this volume), springs from the fact that explanation is a cognitive activity, and for too long theories of explanation have dismissed the cognitive dimension with the weak excuse of its being a too “subjective” ingredient for a theory of
scientificexplanation. Explanation is connected with
7 Understanding in Physics and Biology: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) MORRISON MARGARET
Abstract: It is commonly thought that the greater the degree of abstraction used in describing phenomena the less understanding we have with respect to their concrete features. I want to challenge that myth by showing how mathematical abstraction—the characterization of phenomena using mathematical descriptions that seem to bear little or no relation to concrete physical entities/systems—can aid our understanding in ways that more empirically based investigations often cannot. What I mean here by “understanding” is simply having a theoretical account of how the system is constituted that enables us to solve problems, make predictions, and explain why the phenomena
8 Understanding by Modeling: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) MERZ MARTINA
Abstract: Scientific understanding has, so far, mainly been discussed in terms of the intelligibility of theories and the relation between understanding and explanation. In the course of this debate several theoretical virtues have been identified as being conducive to such understanding. Interestingly, the virtues addressed are the ones that have also occupied a prominent place in the discussion of models. The epistemic value of models, for example, has been ascribed to their providing us with visualizations (Nagel 1961; Griesemer 2004), specifying relevant causal mechanisms (Glennan 2005; Darden 2007), equipping us with mathematically tractable systems (Humphreys 2004), describing different kinds of phenomena
9 The Great Deluge: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LENHARD JOHANNES
Abstract: Recently, a friend went to see her general practitioner in order to give her thyroid gland a checkup. The doctor took a blood sample to test a few parameters in the laboratory, and she performed an ultrasound scan on the thyroid gland. The result was not completely clear, and the doctor referred my friend to a specialized radiologist with the necessary instruments for a reliable diagnosis. She said that while my friend could simply hand over the results of the blood tests, she thought the radiologist would have little use for the ultrasound printout. This was not because it was
10 Understanding in Biology: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) LEONELLI SABINA
Abstract: This chapter offers an analysis of understanding in biology based on characteristic biological
practices:ways in which biologists think and act when carrying out their research. De Regt and Dieks have forcefully claimed that a philosophical study of scientific understanding should “encompass the historical variation of specific intelligibility standards employed in scientific practice” (2005, 138). In line with this suggestion, I discuss the conditions under which contemporary biologists come to understand natural phenomena and I point to a number of ways in which the performance of specific research practices informs and shapes the quality of such understanding.
12 Understanding in Physics: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) DIEKS DENNIS
Abstract: Physics is the paradigmatic example of a successful science. One of its great successes is its impressive track record of giving explanations of natural phenomena, by which these phenomena are made understandable. This much is generally granted, but things become less clear when one asks what these physical explanations exactly consist in. Philosophers of science have proposed a variety of analyses of explanation (nomological-deductive, causal, unification, to mention but a few), and it is not immediately obvious which of these proposals best captures physical practice.
13 Understanding in the Engineering Sciences: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) BOON MIEKE
Abstract: My account of scientific understanding focuses on scientific practices, especially the intellectual activities and abilities of scientists. I will use engineering sciences—which I consider laboratory sciences (compare Hacking 1992)—as a case for illustrating how scientists gain scientific understanding of phenomena, and how they exercise their understanding of scientific theories. Although my account was developed through the perspective of the engineering sciences, it is appropriate to the “basic” laboratory sciences as well.
14 Understanding in Psychology: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) EIGNER KAI
Abstract: Since Thomas Kuhn’s characterization of science by means of a list of epistemic values that provide “
theshared basis for theory choice,” there is a debate in philosophy of science about what the epistemic values of science are (for example, Kuhn 1977; McMullin 1983; Longino 1990; Lacey 2005). Kuhn’s list comprised such values as empirical accuracy, consistency, scope, simplicity, and fruitfulness (Kuhn 1977, 321–22), which, as he argued, can be seen as constitutive of science. An enterprise could have different criteria for judging theories, but then it would not be science (331).
16 Understanding in Historical Science: from:
Scientific Understanding
Author(s) KOSTER EDWIN
Abstract: The sense of understanding would be epistemically idle phenomenology were it not so poisonous a combination of seduction and unreliability. It actually does harm, sometimes making us squeamish about accepting true claims that we don’t personally understand, and more often operating in the opposite direction, causing us to overconfidently accept false claims because they have a
Book Title: Liberalism at Its Limits-Crime and Terror in the Latin American Cultural Text
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Author(s): RODRÍGUEZ ILEANA
Abstract: In
Liberalism at Its Limits,Ileana Rodríguez considers several Latin American nations that govern under the name of liberalism yet display a shocking range of nondemocratic features. In her political, cultural, and philosophical analysis, she examines these environments in which liberalism seems to have reached its limits, as the universalizing project gives way to rampant nonstate violence, gross inequality, and neocolonialism.Focusing on Guatemala, Colombia, and Mexico, Rodríguez shows how standard liberal models fail to account for new forms of violence and exploitation, which in fact follow from specific clashes between liberal ideology and local practice. Looking at these tensions within the ostensibly well-ordered state, Rodríguez exposes how the misunderstanding and misuse of liberal principles are behind realities of political turmoil, and questions whether liberalism is in fact an ideology sufficient to empower populations and transition nation-states into democratic roles in the global order.In this way,Liberalism at Its Limitsoffers a critical examination of the forced fitting of liberal models to Latin American nations and reasserts cross-cultural communication as crucial to grasping the true link between varying systems of value and politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qh6vz
introduction. from:
Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: ON THE MORNING of September 11, 2001, the twin towers of the World Trade Center collapsed under the impact of two airplanes piloted by members of Al Qaeda, an Islamic organization. In disbelief, the whole world watched the images of these two planes that struck the U.S. security system at its real and symbolic financial heart in rapid succession—images that were transmitted relentlessly by CNN throughout that entire day and for days and years to come. Astonishment, fear, and outrage colored the most immediate reactions at home. Two simple words—terror and terrorism—covered the entire semantic field in
3 Indigenous Creencias, Millenarian Cultures, and Counterpublic Persuasion from:
Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: FEMINIST AND MULTICULTURAL texts inscribe the discussion of feminist and indigenous rights into an old and already occupied hermeneutical place. They write over the already-written script of public sphere and civil society, and by so doing feminism, at least, steps into the terrain of the prophetic. Richard Rorty’s reading of Catherine MacKinnon’s work illustrates this shift in the feminist text, which holds true for the indigenous text as well. MacKinnon states that “unless women [read also indigenous groups] fit into the logical space prepared for them by current linguistic and other practices, the law doesn’t know how to deal with
4 The Violent Text: from:
Liberalism at Its Limits
Abstract: I NOW MOVE FROM abstract liberal theories of the relationship between civil society and the state to the concrete workings of Colombian governance. This is a strategy to engage the propositions of social scientists in their efforts to come to terms with situations that bear little or no resemblance to the refined abstractions of liberalism, where the state represents the condensation of the relations of social forces, organizes the power bloc, and balances sectorial relations to construct a popular national will that displaces class struggle through the construction of a general interest and common sense. I am struck by the
Chapter 1 Breaking Boundaries: from:
Barcelona
Author(s) CAULFIELD CARLOTA
Abstract: The primary aim of this chapter is to provide an introduction to twentieth-century Catalan avant-garde movements and groups through a history of visual poetry. This has the advantage both of widening recognition of experimental aesthetic practices beyond Catalonia’s most famous names – Salvador Dalí (1904–89), Joan Miró (1893–1983) and Antoni Gaudí (1852–1926) – and of situating their work within the unique and complex fabric of contemporary Catalan culture. Just as a visual poem may be defined simply as an interdisciplinary artistic creation that blurs the distinction between art and text, so this chapter ranges across names associated
Chapter 3 The Lyrical Taboos of Guillem Viladot from:
Barcelona
Author(s) JOHNSON P. LOUISE
Abstract: Jaume Pont characterizes Guillem Viladot’s trajectory ‘against the grain of models and norms’, as triply touched by the periphery:
Chapter 4 Cafè Central: from:
Barcelona
Author(s) Caulfield Carlota
Abstract: Antoni Clapés was born in Sabadell in 1948. He is one of the most significant Catalan poets of today and the author of more than fifteen books of poetry; some of his most recent include
Un sol punt(2009),La llum i el no-res(2009) andLa lentitud, la durada(2010). Clapés writes regularly about poetry and experimental art for Catalan, Spanish, European and Latin American publications. In 1989, he founded Cafè Central, an independent publishing house known for its diffusion of experimental poetry. Clapés has many links to avant-garde artistic practices; in the 1970s, he was the promoter of
Chapter 5 The Case for Obsolescence: from:
Barcelona
Author(s) BALIBREA MARI PAZ
Abstract: In the final scene of Joaquim Jordà’s 1980 film,
Numax presenta, a documentary reflecting on the experience of self-management carried out between 1977 and 1979 by workers at Numax, a now-closed factory for the production of domestic appliances located in the Eixample (the district of Barcelona most associated with the middle classes), the protagonists throw a party to celebrate the end of their two-year experiment of life inside the factory.¹ As the group dance and drink within the space they have for so long inhabited for work and political struggle, surrounded by an atmosphere of joy and comradeship, Jordà goes
Chapter 9 Empowerment by Visualization: from:
Barcelona
Author(s) TUMMERS LIDEWIJ
Abstract: One of the characteristics of this process of empowerment, which I have called ‘journey into unfamiliar space’, is the use of various visualization and theatre techniques as a means for communication. The aim
Chapter 10 Tracing the City through the URBS Project from:
Barcelona
Author(s) MARGARIT ÀNGELS
Abstract: Àngels Margarit is one of the foremost practitioners of contemporary dance in Barcelona. Her career as a dancer and choreographer dates back to the late 1970s, when there began to be a proliferation of contemporary dance performers and companies in Barcelona (Noguero, 2008; Vendrell, 2008). Although Catalan contemporary dance has not had the same degree of international impact enjoyed by the more hybrid and spectacular performance groups such as La Fura dels Baus and Comediants, largely due to the relative absence of funding and infrastructure for dance in Catalonia and Spain, both she and the members of Mal Pelo (Maria
Chapter 14 Talking about Visual Poetry: from:
Barcelona
Author(s) Canals Xavier
Abstract: Three of the most remarkable contemporary visual poets who work in Barcelona are J. M. Calleja, Xavier Canals and Gustavo Vega. A long collaboration with them led to the orchestration of an interactive session with the artists, as part of the 2008 two-day international conference on
Contemporary Barcelona: Visual Cultures, Space and Powerat the Institute of Germanic and Romance Studies, organized by Margaret Andrews, Helena Buffery and Carlota Caulfield. Moderated by the Welsh actor David Summer and Carlota Caulfield, the session gave participants and public a unique opportunity to participate in J. M. Calleja’sEmpremtes/Traces/Prints (1976–2006), Gustavo Vega’s
Foreword: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) VERGÈS FRANÇOISE
Abstract: The notion of a ‘crime against humanity’ in international law after World War II led to a revision of the reading of genocides, massacres, mass deportations and dictatorships. The massive destruction of European Jews and other groups committed by Nazism opened the way to rethinking colonial slavery, colonial crimes and politics of segregation within the frame of that notion. There was an increased need for memorials which honoured the victims and their suffering, recognised that a crime had been committed and invited heightened civic awareness and action. The memorial acquired a new meaning in the public space. It was conceived
Chapter Three Conflicting Memories: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) MOSSMAN IAIN
Abstract: The events and actors of the Algerian war hold an ambiguous place in recent French history, particularly given the way in which the war was actively erased from national memory soon after Algerian independence.¹ However, since the early 1990s, narratives of the war have re-emerged in France, taking complex and often conflicting positions which have escalated to the level of ‘memory wars’.² The contrast between the recent, violent return of Algerian war memories and the long preceding period of societal amnesia has meant that the persistent memories of the metropolitan French populace generated during the conflict are often overlooked. This
Chapter Four Derrida’s Virtual Space of Spectrality: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) BARCLAY FIONA
Abstract: The inevitable media attention surrounding the fiftieth anniversary of Algerian independence resurrected the ghosts of a conflict that many would have preferred to lay to rest. For a time the carefully managed official commemorations replaced the silence which habitually covers one of the most painful episodes in France’s recent history, highlighting the contradictions which characterise the nation’s attitude towards this period. This chapter seeks to tease out some of these conflicts, arguing that the events of 1962 continue to resonate within France because they function as a nexus of continuity and rupture, one which marked a moment of watershed for
Chapter Seven Interrogating the Transnational Family: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) ASAVA ZÉLIE
Abstract: This chapter explores the legacy of French imperialism in
Sous la clarté de la lune(Under the Moon’s Light,2004), an African film by Burkinabé female director Apolline Traoré which was partly funded by a French government grant and made with a French cinematographer and leading actor. Centred around an interracial family unit, the film explores the effects of (neo-) colonialism on concepts of race, cultural memory and identity politics, proposing contemporary Africa as a borderland in which hybridity flourishes. By foregrounding the experiences of mixed-race women and their families, and examining personal and cultural histories and identities, the film
Chapter Eleven Crime and Penitence in Slavery Commemoration: from:
France’s Colonial Legacies
Author(s) FRITH NICOLA
Abstract: ‘10 May: Sarkozy’s words move Taubira to tears’ ran the headline for the French overseas newspaper,
France-Guyane.¹ The editorial was reporting on the reaction of the left-wing Guyanese deputy and author of the so-called Taubira law, Christiane Taubira, to a speech given in 2011 by the president of the Republic, Nicolas Sarkozy, in the symbolic Jardin du Luxembourg.² The occasion was to honour the sixth national day for remembering the slave trade, slavery and their abolitions (inaugurated under Chirac in 2006), and the tenth anniversary since the French Senate had, after numerous debates and delays, unanimously voted in the Taubira
1 Postcolonialism and Wales: from:
Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: A discussion of Emyr Humphreys as a postcolonial author involves a number of issues alongside an examination of his work, including whether postcolonial theories are in fact relevant in the study of Welsh literature. However, it is clear from international events in the early years of the twenty-first century that concepts of nation and national identity merit careful examination and are still a motivating force engendering significant repercussions. Throughout the twentieth century a variety of commentators from myriad backgrounds took part in the public discussion of what exactly Welsh identity comprises, alongside literary discussions concerning Welsh literature and its relationship
4 The Consolidation of Strategies in Outside the House of Baal from:
Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Outside the House of Baalbuilds on Humphreys’s achievement inA Toy Epicand is certainly the single text in which he best achieves his aims as a novelist-cum-Welsh nationalist. Whereas ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence will in its seven volumes cover a greater stretch of Welsh history and chart its effect on a wider range of characters, this single novel’s scope is both more specifically focused and in literary terms more adventurous. The novel has aWelsh setting and is a realistic portrayal of life in various areas of Wales, particularly the north, from the end of the nineteenth
5 Strategies of Resistance: from:
Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Using indigenous myth within a work of fiction is an established postcolonial strategy of resistance. The fact that Humphreys made a practice of using classical myth in a variety of narrative techniques in his fiction before he began to use Celtic myths predominantly does not prevent his use of indigenous myth being considered as a deliberately anti-imperial strategy. ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence is perhaps the best, certainly the most complex, example of his use of a variety of tales from
The Mabinogion, although the Blodeuwedd archetype has occurred in his fiction throughout his career.² Humphreys has written extensively
8 Monstering and Disabling: from:
Emyr Humphreys
Abstract: Throughout his long career as a novelist Emyr Humphreys has been inclined to reuse certain tropes, archetypes and paradigms, albeit in novels of a variety of types. We have seen in the earlier chapters that his protagonist is often a weak, over-sensitive male who is failing in some way in his familial or social life. From
A Man’s Estateonwards this character has increasingly dominated and particularly in those novels concerned with the matter of Wales. John Cilydd More, in ‘The Land of the Living’ sequence, is a prime example. This character may in certain ways epitomize for the author
2 Praise, lament and silence from:
Darogan
Abstract: In 1584, a historian looked back through three or four centuries to the origins of poetry as practised in Wales:
Chapter One Annie Ernaux and the Narrating of Time from:
French Fiction into the Twenty-First Century
Abstract: Since her first publication in 1974, Annie Ernaux (b.1940) has garnered increasing success and critical controversy with each stage of her oeuvre. To date she has published sixteen texts, which divide into four distinct categories. There are the three semiautobiographical novels with which she began her career,
Les Armoires vides(1974),Ce qu’ils disent ou rien(1977) andLa Femme gelée(1981), first-person narratives dealing with issues of class and gender as the characters become distanced from their working-class origins through education, and experience oppression in social and domestic spheres. There are then the seven non-fiction texts on which her
Introduction from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: Journeys and life on the road have fired the human imagination since time immemorial and inspired some of literature’s most enduringly popular narratives. Film did not escape this attraction, and the birth of cinema itself is tantalizingly associated with recording the experience of being on the move. Early cinema, as Giuliana Bruno has pointed out, ‘envisioned “panoramic views” that incorporated site-seeing journeys and the spatio-visual desire for circulation that had become fully embedded with modernity.’¹ Such connection between mobility and film is encoded in the very titles of some of the new medium’s earliest outputs, from the Lumière brothers’ landmark
Chapter Three Bye bye Brasil and the Quest for the Nation from:
The Brazilian Road Movie
Author(s) BRANDELLERO SARA
Abstract: Carlos Diegues’s 1979 road movie
Bye bye Brasil, nominated for the Palme d’Or at Cannes in 1980, ranks among Brazil’s most enduringly popular productions, having enjoyed national and international favour among public and critics alike. The film follows the adventures and misadventures of a group of travelling artists who go under the name of Caravana Rolidei, as they move around Brazil’s vast territory, struggling to make ends meet, in search of ever-dwindling audiences for their small-time circus act. They first step onto the scene in a modest town in the interior of the impoverished north-east of Brazil, moving on to
Book Title: Saul Bass-Anatomy of Film Design
Publisher: The University Press of Kentucky
Author(s): Horak Jan-Christopher
Abstract: The first book to examine the life and work of this fascinating figure, Saul Bass: Anatomy of Film Design explores the designer's revolutionary career and his lasting impact on the entertainment and advertising industries. Jan-Christopher Horak traces Bass from his humble beginnings as a self-taught artist to his professional peak, when auteur directors like Stanley Kubrick, Robert Aldrich, and Martin Scorsese sought him as a collaborator. He also discusses how Bass incorporated aesthetic concepts borrowed from modern art in his work, presenting them in a new way that made them easily recognizable to the public.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.ctt9qhm5p
Introduction: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: The Forty-First Academy Awards ceremony took place on 14 April 1969 at the Dorothy Chandler Pavilion, on what used to be Bunker Hill in downtown Los Angeles. It was the first Oscar ceremony to be broadcast worldwide and the first held at that location. As usual, it was a star-studded affair. Katharine Hepburn was nominated as best actress for the second year in a row, this time for
The Lion in Winter, an award she would have to share with Barbra Streisand forFunny Girl—the only time there has been a tie in this category. Saul and Elaine Bass,
1 Designer and Filmmaker from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: One of the most striking aspects of Saul Bass’s epically successful career as a designer was that he was essentially an autodidact without formal academic training. While his official biographies note that he studied with Howard Trafton and Gyorgy Kepes (the latter a superstar designer in his own right), the fact was that Bass’s “studies” were limited to a handful of night-school courses. Bass was always very modest on this point, reminding interviewers that there were few opportunities to study graphic design in America at that time because “commercial art” was considered a lowly profession.¹ Though it is true that
2 Film Titles: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: Having previously branded himself as the most innovative designer of modern Hollywood film titles, Saul Bass took a twenty-year hiatus. Between
Seconds(1966) andBroadcast News(1987), he designed only a couple of titles for Otto Preminger, as well asThat’s Entertainment II(1976).¹ He took his name off the credits forLooking for Mr. Goodbar(1977) after a monumental fight with director Richard Brooks, but by then, title work was no longer a factor in the Bass studio business. Apparently, title work on several films in the late 1960s fell through, including a planned prologue and title forHawaii
3 Creating a Mood: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: Bauhaus and Gestalt aesthetics influenced Saul Bass’s art, nowhere more visibly than in his film posters, which often reduced a film’s narrative content to a single iconic image. The designer’s later reputation as a creator of pithy corporate logos provides a clue to his method: Bass had an extreme talent for capturing the essence of a film’s narrative in a single abstract, highly iconographic image; this image, through its metonymic quality, would then become the central visual idea or logo for an advertising campaign. Most historians credit Bass as being the inventor of the film logo, which “is the figurative
6 Journeys of Discovery: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: A journey takes one to new places and allows one to see new things. Travel broadens horizons, changes perspectives, forces new points of view through the unavoidable confrontation with previously unknown geographies, environments, and peoples through the simple act of perception. Seeing is therefore a form of knowledge. Travel (whether actual or virtual) and acquisition of knowledge about the world are indelibly linked. We tend to forget that before the twentieth century, individuals who were not members of the ruling class rarely traveled and had few concepts of what the world looked like beyond their own horizon. The invention of
7 Civilization: from:
Saul Bass
Abstract: Saul Bass’s
Why Man Creates(1968) begins with an animated scene of “prehistoric” cave dwellers attempting to kill a steer-like animal more than twice their size. After the first attempt fails, because the animal is too big and they are afraid of it, they discuss the matter and decide that one of them will act as bait while the others spear the animal from behind as it chases the lone hunter. The dead steer’s image is then reproduced on the wall of a cave, like the cave paintings in Spain and France dating from the Aurignacian period onward. In this
CHAPTER 7 The scope and limits of content externalism from:
Externalism
Abstract: Chapter 6 examined the arguments for content externalism and an essentially defensive reaction to those arguments – a reaction that is Cartesian in spirit – based on the dual component theory, along with the associated idea of the mental state narrowly individuated. It was argued that this Cartesian reaction to the arguments for externalism faces serious difficulties. Nonetheless, we have not yet worked out the implications of the arguments themselves. If an essentially Cartesian strategy to limit their scope does not work, we have, as yet, done nothing to work out what that scope is. This is the task of this chapter.
CHAPTER 11 Externalist axiology from:
Externalism
Abstract: The Cartesian tradition yields a very definite conception of what
value– moral, aesthetic and so on – must be. Or, rather, it yields a specific framework of possibilities for the sort of thing value must be. The view of the mind as essentially an interiority – something located entirely inside the skins of mental subjects – presents us with a stark choice when trying to understand the nature of value. Either value must derive from the inside – from the activities of the mind – or it must exist on the outside, objectively present in the world independently of those activities. Broadly speaking, the former
CHAPTER 12 Conclusion: from:
Externalism
Abstract: Chapter 1 characterized the concept of Cartesian internalism in terms of two claims, one concerning the location of mental phenomena and the other concerning the possession of such phenomena by a subject.
Book Title: Tuberculosis Then and Now-Perspectives on the History of an Infectious Disease
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): WORBOYS MICHAEL
Abstract: In Tuberculosis Then and Now leading scholars and new researchers in the field reflect on the changing medical, social, and cultural understanding of the disease and engage in a wider debate about the role of narrative in the social history of medicine and how it informs current debates and issues surrounding the treatment of tuberculosis and other infectious diseases. Through a case study of the history of tuberculosis and its treatment, this collection examines medicine and health care from the perspectives of class, race, and gender, providing a challenging and refreshing addition to the field of bacteria-centred accounts of the history of medicine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq473x
4 Beyond the Total Institution: from:
Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) CONDRAU FLURIN
Abstract: When Erving Goffman published his seminal study
Asylumsin 1961 , few would have anticipated its far-reaching impact on social theory and, somewhat later, the historiography of medical institutions.¹ Such institutions had previously been regarded as loci of care. But with Michel Foucault and Thomas Szasz, Goffman popularised the view that they ought to be studied as social institutions that shaped medical knowledge. Szasz coined the terminstitutional pathologyto begin to understand what he called a misguided definition of (mental) illness. For him, institutions combined a general inability to usefully treat a mental illness with an explicit aim to
5 The Great White Plague Turns Alien: from:
Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) BASHFORD ALISON
Abstract: The historiography of modern nationalism has recently taken a distinct turn. A number of studies have shown how the public health management of populations through medico-legal border control has actively constituted national identities. And many of these studies have persuasively demonstrated the close connections between communicable-disease prevention, race-based exclusions and restrictions, and the formation of racialised nations.¹ Australian history is exemplary in this respect, in large part because of the stridency and efficacy of the white Australia policy. Initially implemented in each of the Australasian colonies in the late nineteenth century, the national Immigration Restriction Act (1901) was one version
6 Importation, Deprivation, and Susceptibility: from:
Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) WELSHMAN JOHN
Abstract: Tuberculosis is now acknowledged as a global health catastrophe. A third of the world’s population are infected with the bacillus, eight million people develop active tuberculosis every year, and some two million die. With co-infection with HIV and the emergence of drug-resistant strains that have led in turn to the adoption of the who Directly Observed Therapy, Shortcourse (dots) strategy, tuberculosis has “apparently made a resurgence almost everywhere in the world.”¹ This includes in sub-Saharan Africa, in the former Soviet Union and Eastern Europe, in South America, and in New York and London. In their study, Matthew Gandy and Alimuddin
7 Before McKeown: from:
Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) WORBOYS MICHAEL
Abstract: Since the 1950s, the views of Thomas McKeown on the causes of the decline of mortality from pulmonary tuberculosis (TB)¹ in Britain have become well known and vigorously debated.² McKeown’s claim that improved nutrition and standards of living were the principal factor in the halving of mortality from the 1830s to the 1900s continues to exercise medical historians, as well as historical demographers and epidemiologists. One reason for this is the corollary of his argument, namely, that the three other factors he identified – medical intervention, public health measures, and changes in the disease – were relatively minor causes in the overall
8 “The right not to suffer consumption”: from:
Tuberculosis Then and Now
Author(s) MOLERO - MESA JORGE
Abstract: One of the features most frequently mentioned to highlight the social impact of tuberculosis is that it was the main cause of mortality in every industrialised country in the nineteenth century. In Spain, tuberculosis contributed to around 7 percent of the general mortality rate between 1901 and 1930, which resulted in about thirty thousand deaths each year. Some contemporaries claimed that deficiencies in the data collection and analysis meant the actual figure was as high as seventy thousand; indeed, some estimates multiplied the official number of deaths from tuberculosis by ten. However, high mortality was not the only feature that
Book Title: Chora 1-Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Parcell Stephen
Abstract: Volume I in the new series Chora: Intervals in the Philosophy of Architecture explores fundamental questions concerning the practice of architecture and examines the potential of architecture. The essays in this collection explore architectural form and content in the hope of finding new and better alternatives to traditionally accepted practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq47xp
Chora: from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Pérez-Gémez Alberto
Abstract: What does architecture represent within the context of everyday life? Given its techno-political context, is it even conceivable that this well-proven instrument of power may represent something other than male, egocentric will or repressive political or economic forces? Could it be that despite its common origin with instrumental and technological forms of representation, it may nonetheless allow for participatory human action and an affirmation of life-towards-death through symbolization as “presencing” through the constructed work, rather than manifest the very denial of man’s capacity to recognize existential meaning in privileged artifacts such as works of art? Could it then embody values
Michelangelo: from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Klassen Helmut
Abstract: When the image of the human body first appeared in Greek art, it was as an anthropomorphic projection by which unknown and ambiguous powers in the world were identified and could be recognized. Form and gestures, joined with a name, delineated a physiognomy that made apparent a characteristic mode of action and behaviour in the world.² More than a representation or picture of man, the image of the body was thus a mask or figure with which something invisible and ultimately unknown was grasped and made familiar. It was a construction that represented the achievement of a certain understanding of
Architecture as a Site of Reception – Part I: from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Kunze Donald
Abstract: In
The Gastronomical Me,M.F.K. Fisher noted that our three basic needs for food, security, and love are so intermingled that we cannot think of one without encompassing the others.³ There are two important truths here. The first is that the human mind works so much through a logic of displacement, whereby concerns of one kind are written in the language of another, that in fact mind itself might be regarded as nothing more than the process of displacement.⁴ The second truth is that hunger, its object (food), and its functions (ingestion and digestion) figure prominently in that process.
Fictional Cities from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Livesey Graham
Abstract: The practice of architecture in the postindustrial city is both a difficult and an essential task, given the conversion of the public realm into an alien and endless world of ambient images.¹ Through a brief examination of literary works by Bruno Schulz and André Breton, and the architecture of Aldo Rossi, this essay discusses the role that fiction and, hence, narrative can play in the redefinition of the contemporary city. To frame this inquiry, I will propose that there exists a hidden fictional and dialectical counterpart to the real city. This suggests the often overlooked role that narrative plays in
Space and Image in Andrei Tarkovsky’s Nostalgia: from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Pallasmaa Juhani
Abstract: “Poets and painters are born phenomenologists,” wrote J.H. van den Berg.¹ A phenomenological approach to the artist implies a pure looking at the essence of things, unburdened by convention or intellectualized explanation. When a writer, a painter, or a film director presents a scene, he or she must define a setting for the act. But creating a place is the primal act of architecture, and consequently these artists unknowingly perform the task of an architect. Unaware of the professional rules of the discipline, they approach the mental dimensions of architectural experience and, hence, reveal the phenomenological basis of the art
The Building of a Horizon from:
Chora 1
Author(s) Pelletier Louise
Abstract: A total eclipse of the sun had been predicted in Mexico City, and I awaited the event with childish excitement. The previous day, I had climbed the Pyramid of the Sun at Teotihuacan to watch a descendant of the Aztecs re-enact an ancient ritual, and that seemed a fitting prelude to what must have seemed, five centuries earlier, a portentous event. A few minutes before daylight began to fade, I climbed to the roof to watch the transformation of the city. The sky was obscured by clouds and by a thick smog that bleached out everything. Imperceptibly, the light grew
Book Title: Common Ground-A Priest and a Rabbi Read Scripture Together
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): NEUSNER JACOB
Abstract: Judaism and Christianity meet in scripture, which they share and about which they contend. In Common Ground Father Andrew Greeley and Rabbi Jacob Neusner present their characteristically candid - and often provocative - interpretations of the history, context, and meaning of scripture. Written in alternating chapters, Common Ground reveals how a rabbi understands Christ, Mary, and St Paul, and how a priest views creation, Abraham and Sarah, and the prophets. Neusner calls upon the ancient Rabbinic approach to scripture - the conversational dialogue of "Midrash" - while Greeley creatively renews the narrative tradition of Christianity. Together they show that differences in responses to scripture enrich the possibilities of biblical renewal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq927j
9 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: All religions have creation myths, but the stories in the myths are different. The important fact about the stories of Adam and Eve contained in the first chapters of the Book of Genesis is not that there is some similarity between them and the other creation myths one can find in the ancient Middle East, but rather the striking differences between the Adam and Eve story and the other stories. It’s not the humans of Genesis who are different, but the God of Genesis.
13 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: The redactor of Genesis reads his own theology back into the accounts available to him in his remote sources. Yet the theme of promise is already available in the sources, early records of
17 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: How so secular an act as a supper party is turned into a highly charged occasion, rich in deeply felt meanings, we shall not find out if we simply review
19 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: The process can, perhaps, be compared to the phenomenon that we Americans tend to view George Washington, the founder of our country, through the lens of our view of the American history two centuries later. We know roughly the character and times of the man (less roughly than the Israelites who formulated the final redaction of the Torah knew Moses), but we are
20 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: Not a pleasant event. But thus was adultery punished in Israel. The crime was not so much one of sexual “impurity” as we would think of it. Rather, the faithless woman had sinned against the basic social structure of her people because she risked producing a child who might inherit the family property though not, in fact, of
30 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: The apostle Paul would do well in today’s Israeli parliament, the Knesset, because he understood the full weight and meaning of the word
Israel,whether state of . . . , land of . . . , people of . . . , or God of . . . And because of that fact, Paul will have put forth ferocious arguments in the angry debate, perennially at the head of the political agenda, concerning who is a Jew, which is to say who is Israel. That issue comes to the fore whenever the Israelis have to organize a new Knesset,
31 GREELEY: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: Mary, the mother of Jesus, defines the Catholic religious sensibility. She represents all that Catholics find attractive in their heritage and all that many Protestants find repellent. Despite the attempts of some naive Catholic ecumenicists to deemphasize Mary, Catholicism without Mary would no longer be Catholicism.
33 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: How does Scripture propose to settle the question of God’s gender? Israel achieves its authentic relationship to God when Israel is feminine to God’s masculine role; its proper virtue when it conforms to those traits of emotion and attitude that the system assigns to women. In chapter 7 I raised that question, but in the years since then, I have learned more about the subject. The main point that I have found out is simple: the Torah in fact portrays God as androgynous. Because our traits correspond to God’s, God too turns out to share in and value the gender
36 NEUSNER: from:
Common Ground
Abstract: Now we come to the nub of the matter. Religions can teach one another. These pages have shown that fact. But can they communicate with one another? That is another question, and it defines the single most important problem facing religion for the next hundred years, as for the last, as an intellectual one: how to think through difference, how to account, within one’s own faith and framework, for the outsider, indeed, for many outsiders.
Book Title: Reordering of Culture-Latin America, the Caribbean and Canada in the Hood
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): Taiana Cecilia
Abstract: Political, economic and social barriers among Latin America, the Caribbean and Canada are giving way to global forces and the "global dreams" they inspire. This collection of original articles and essays examines popular culture, literature, theatre, belief systems, indigenous practices and questions of identity, exile and alienation. The interconnectedness and distinction of cultural production throughout the Americas, "transplanted" interests, the mediation of African and European influences, and the expression of shifting identities, all reflect the development of a new American neighbourhood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq93rp
TELL OUT KING RASTA DOCTRINE AROUND THE WHOLE WORLD: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) D.Yawney Carole
Abstract: This paper discusses the implications for the Rastafari movement, of its spread worldwide in the last two decades. It suggests that further opportunities for Rastafari mobilization, which began in Jamaica in the early 1930s, exist outside the Caribbean, especially in North America and United Kingdom. On the other hand, Rastafari communities abroad have to deal with pressures such as racism, criminalization, and commodification in more intense ways than in the Caribbean. The author argues that all these factors influence the shape that Rastafari takes outside the Caribbean, as well as at its point of origin. It suggests that the impact
DE LA MARGINALISATION À LA DÉTERRITORIALISATION DU RASTAFARI from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Curtius Anny Dominique
Abstract: Mouvement révolutionnaire mais surtout religion antillaise née de diverses conjonctures socio-historiques, le Rastafari a subi, dés son émergence en Jamaïque en 1930, une grande marginalisation avant d’acquerir une certaine popularité. Celle-ci se caractérise, toutefois, par une déterritorialisation-recontextualisation aussi bien dans les autres îles des Antilles qu’en Amérique du Nord, en Europe et ailleurs. Il s’agit de réexaminer le Rastafari dans deux contextes : d’une part il s’agit de revoir ses caractéristiques fondamentales y compris sa marginalité en Jamaïque; d’autre part il s’agit détudier sa réappropriation en Grande Bretagne et en Martinique ou le Rastafari, ayant subi une forte érosion idéologique,
NOTES ON LATIN AMERICAN-CANADIAN LITERATURE from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Etcheverry Jorge
Abstract: LATIN AMERICAN-CANADIAN LITERATURE is currently undergoing rapid development. Practically nonexistent, until the second half of the 1970s except for the presence of certain writers, it is now laying claim to a well-defined space within the “Canadian mosaic.” Symptomatic of this trend is the fact that publishing houses such as Coach House, Wallace, Québec Amérique, and others,¹ are publishing Canadian-Latin American authors in English and French translation. Apart from this activity, there are also publishing efforts in the Latin American ethno-cultural sphere itself, characterized by editorial criteria that vary from publisher to publisher; however, all these publishers give priority to the
WRITING IN EXILE: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Urbina José Leandro
Abstract: COMPELLED TO THINK about my particular state of life as a Chilean-Canadian writer who came to this country as an exile, I have been literally overwhelmed by the number of different angles and levels from which it is possible to review such an experience. One could in fact write several books just on the most obvious problems encountered when writing in exile.
LE THÉÂTRE DE L’ATÉRITÉ DANS LA COMPAGNIE DES ARTS EXILO from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Gaucho Le guanaco
Abstract: The Company of Arts Exilio, the first Latin American company of theatre-performance was founded in 1981 as a scenic expression of exile, integrating the place of its birth, North America, into the multiple Latin American roots of its practitioners.
REDEFINING THE CENTRE: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Algoo-Baksh Stella
Abstract: This paper argues that West Indian Canadian Writers have contributed significantly to a redefinition of the
centre.Such writers have moved black characters from the periphery to centre stage, exploring the black experience from the inside rather than from a Eurocentric vantage point. Questioning the “hegemony of the centre,” they often examine the problems of their societies from a fresh perspective. In the process, they expose the insidious effects of colonialism on the colonized, who ultimately lose sight of their own history, heritage and at times even their identity. The author emphasizes the work of Austin Clarke, the pioneer among
POETIC DISCOURSE IN BABYLON: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Case Frederick Ivor
Abstract: THOUGH DIONNE BRAND is not a member of the Rastafari, her published collections of poetry¹ display characteristics of one who has lived the alienation of Babylon and has had to confront it with the arms at her disposal. While her poetry is essentially about the right to define and to determine one’s own being, it would be misleading to speak of the universal appeal of her work, since there are many who would react sharply to her unambiguous ideological perspectives.²
MAÎTRE OU MENTOR: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) N’Zengou-Tayo Marie-José
Abstract: DANS LES INTERVIEWS accordés á la presse, lors de l’obtention du Prix Goncourt 1992 pour son roman
Texaco,Patrick Chamoiseau reconnaissait le rôle déterminant joué par Edouard Glissant dans sa vie d’écrivain et d’homme antillais. Le romancier donnait ainsi acte de l’influence de Glissant surTexacocomme sur ses oeuvres précédentes. Cependant, cette reconnaissance, déjà présente dans divers textes ayant précédéTexaco
(Eloge de la Créolité,articles publiés dansAntillaet enfin la dédicace et les exergues deTexacomême), nous invite à nous interroger sur la véritable nature de la relation Glissant-Chamoiseau et à essayer de repérer/identifier les traces
BANISHED BETWEEN TWO WORLDS: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Perron Sylvie
Abstract: THE STUDY OF LATIN AMERICAN literature written outside the country of origin leads inevitably to the theme of exile. First treated during the Middle Ages, the problem of exile lends itself in various ways to literary study. One such way is provided by the exiled character him or herself, a source of insight into a wide sphere of social issues. Appearing periodically in Latin American literature to illustrate the various sociopolitical upheavals history, the exile in our own time figures prominently in Chilean writing in Canada, where writers are currently reworking this theme, each in their own style. Of particular
WOMEN’S WORD: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Rojas-Trempe Lady
Abstract: CONTEMPORARY LATIN AMERICAN literature in the past two decades—the 1970s and 1980’s—reliably proves that the written word of women has contributed to the outlining and definition of a culture which challenges male hegemony as well as androcentric power relations and knowledge.² The breach that certain feminist and nonfeminist writers opened in the patriarchal culture allowed them, as a point of departure, to underline the fact that they were different from men. At the same time, they emphasized the historical cost of marginalization and took up the struggle for fair treatment.³ Soon after, they established certain epistemological bases for
“L’AMÉRIQUE C’EST MOI”: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ruprecht Alvina
Abstract: THE WRITINGS OF DANY LAFERRlÈRE, and more specifically his three North American novels¹ centered on the adventures of a sexually insatiable black man, are examples of textual hybridity, characteristic of “Border Writing,” as defined, among others, by Emily Hicks (1991). This notion, inscribed in a geographical metaphor, is the nucleus of a multidisciplinary network of categories useful to the understanding of a writer like Laferriére, whose work paradoxically defies and encompasses borders of all kinds.
CULTURE AND EDUCATION IN POST-COLONIAL DEVELOPMENT: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Arratia Maria-Inés
Abstract: THIS PAPER DEALS PRIMARILY with the need to integrate local cultural dynamics into all activities related to community development, including education. It also deals with a particular positioning for social scientists committed to the defence of native cultures and to the promotion of a pluralistic and democratic attitude towards local development through the use of participatory methodologies (Fals Borda, 1979, 1980, 1987). Based on my field experience and understanding of development as cultural action, I am questioning previous categories of analysis and constructed theoretical positions affecting the various processes involved in community development.
ART AS A FORMATIVE FORCE IN LATIN AMERICA: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Craven David
Abstract: IN HIS BOOK OF 1983 entitled
Nicaragua tan violentamente dulce,the writer Julio Cortazar observed the following: “The fact is this, hardly had I arrived in Nicaragua, on the 19th of July of course, when the word ‘culture’ began to echo in my ears and to form part of an extremely varied thematic and sweeping program ... [Nicaraguan] culture did not appear to me to be an isolated component of social sustenance nor did it seem to be the salt or sugar that were added as mere flavor or seasoning to a plate of food” (Cortázar, 1983).
HAITIAN MUSIC IN THE GLOBAL SYSTEM from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Averill Gage
Abstract: FEW ISSUES HAVE GENERATED as much academic interest across disciplines in recent years as the process of globalization. The world’s economic, political, demographic, and socio-cultural geography has radically metamorphosed under the impact of technologies and media that shrink time and space in the quest for rapid turnover of capital (Giddens, 1990). Although the long-term effects of globalization on nation states, futures markets, and the drug trade, etc. are unclear at best, none of these approaches the complexities and the problematic status of cultural identity in the globalizing environment.
COME TO JAMAICA AND FEEL ALL RIGHT: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ford-Smith Honor
Abstract: I want to argue that representational practices within tourism recycle and adapt old images of colonial domination
CONSTRUCTING CARIBBEAN CULTURE IN TORONTO: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Gallaugher Annemarie
Abstract: CARIBANA, BEGUN IN 1967 as the Caribbean community’s contribution to Canada’s centennial celebrations, has become a major annual summer event in Toronto, attracting some one million people. Inspired primarily by Trinidad’s annual pre-Lenten Carnival, this two-week festival of the arts reflects the diverse expressive traditions of the Caribbean, bringing together a wide range of indigenous songs, dances, masquerade and oral traditions, and also various foods and folkways of the region.
ARGENTINE COMMERCIAL CINEMA: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Ciria Alberto
Abstract: L’auteur trace le parcours de I’industrie cinematographique en Argentine pendant la présidence de Raul Alfonsin (1983-1989). En faisant le bilan à la fois du développement économique et de I’activite artistique, il insiste sur le
HISTOIRE ET LITTÉRATURE : from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Pozo José Del
Abstract: LA PRODUCTION DES ÉCRIVAINS chiliens dans le domaine du roman historique, malgré L’heritage laissé par Blest Gana depuis la publication de
Durante la Reconquista(Pendant la reconquête) à la fin des années 1890² est assez mince. Ceci contraste avec la fécondité de ce courant dans d’autres pays latino-américains. Mis à part la guerre civile de 1891 qui donna lieu à la publication de plusieurs ouvrages, les autres faits historiques n’ont pas eu le même impact au niveau littéraire (Zamudio, 1973, p.20).
LA GUADELOUPE DANS L’IDÉARIUM ET LES STRATÉGIES DU DÉCOUVREUR: from:
Reordering of Culture
Author(s) Yacou Alain
Abstract: C’est trés exactement à I’embouchure de la rivière du Grand Carbet dans la partie Sud de I’actuelle commune de Capesterre Belle-Eau (Sudest de la Guadeloupe proprement díte) qu’eut lieu le tout premier débarquement des Espagnols dans l’île principale des Caraïbes.
Book Title: Everyone Says No-Public Service Broadcasting and the Failure of Translation
Publisher: MQUP
Author(s): CONWAY KYLE
Abstract: Quebec has never signed on to Canada's constitution. After both major attempts to win Quebec's approval - the Meech Lake and Charlottetown Accords - failed, Quebec came within a fraction of a percentage point of voting for independence. Everyone Says No examines how the failure of these accords was depicted in French and English media and the ways in which journalists' reporting failed to translate the differences between Quebec and the rest of Canada. Focusing on the English- and French-language networks of the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation, Kyle Conway draws on the CBC/Radio Canada rich print and video archive as well as journalists' accounts of their reporting to revisit the story of the accords and the furor they stirred in both French and English Canada. He shows that CBC/Radio Canada attempts to translate language and culture and encourage understanding among Canadians actually confirmed viewers' pre-existing assumptions rather than challenging them. The first book to examine translation in Canadian news, Everyone Says No also provides insight into Canada's constitutional history and the challenges faced by contemporary public service broadcasters in increasingly multilingual and multicultural communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/j.cttq93tk
3 Paradoxes of Translation in Television News from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: Journalists covering the Meech Lake and Charlottetown accords for the CBC’s
The Nationaland Radio-Canada’sLe Téléjournalfaced two important challenges when it came to explaining Canada’s linguistic and cultural groups to each other. The first arose from ongoing political debates about whether the national broadcaster should actively promote national unity. The second was that journalists had to translate between English and French so that their viewers could understand the many political actors involved, regardless of the language they spoke. The first challenge, however, complicated the second because the politics that shaped the debates about the proper role of the
6 The Charlottetown Accord and the Translation of Ambivalence from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: With the failure of the Meech Lake Accord in 1990, Canadians and their leaders were tired, frustrated, and increasingly bitter. Nothing was settled, and in fact, constitutional matters were now even more complicated than before. English Canadians were exasperated by what they took to be Quebec’s unwillingness to compromise, while many in Quebec felt that the failure of Meech Lake represented a callous repudiation of the province’s concerns. In addition, the First Nations had now asserted themselves on the constitutional stage. With Meech Lake, they had succeeded in doing something that had long been in the making, channelling years of
CONCLUSION: from:
Everyone Says No
Abstract: Nearly two decades after the defeat of the Charlottetown Accord, Canada’s public broadcaster faces a familiar set of challenges. The fragmentation characterizing the CBC/Radio-Canada’s audience has increased since 1992, and with it, so has a demand for the representation of different cultural groups. The desire for representation expressed by the country’s principal linguistic groups, by members of its different geographic regions, and by its Native peoples has been supplemented by a desire for representation expressed by members of Canada’s multicultural communities. At the same time, the Canadian Broadcasting Corporation has had to make do with progressively less funding – the cuts
Introduction from:
Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) ACKERMAN ALAN
Abstract: Why publish a collection of essays entitled
Reading Modern Drama? Individually, each of these words is apt to raise eyebrows. Yet “reading,” “modern,” and “drama” continue to play vital roles in organizing university curricula and defining activities of the broader culture. In the following pages, each of these words elicits new questions and definitions. This volume, moreover, is assembled from articles published in one journal,Modern Drama, and the title is also meant to suggest the value of reading this particular journal cohesively, in addition to the benefits of dipping into individual articles online (for pragmatic reasons, the articles were
3 “¡Silencio, he dicho!” Space, Language, and Characterization as Agents of Social Protest in Lorca’s Rural Tragedies from:
Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) BLUM BILHA
Abstract: “The art of our time,” said Susan Sontag, “is noisy with appeals for silence” (12). Although originally meant as an assessment of the cultural function of modern art, Sontag’s juxtaposition of such antithetical terms as “noise” and “silence” places the work of art at a stylistic and thematic crossroads where the explicit and the implicit, the visible and the invisible, text and subtext or, indeed, what is said, shown, or done (and therefore “noisy”) and what is not, can meet and interact. Each one of these levels constitutes an integral part of the work of art and, as such, it
5 The Space Stage and the Circus: from:
Reading Modern Drama
Author(s) CARRUTH ALLISON
Abstract: In 1926, two experimental theatre companies in Greenwich Village sponsored an international exposition to showcase avant-garde work in dramaturgy, stagecraft, and acting. In the exposition’s keynote address, Bauhaus-trained architect Frederick Kiesler, whose circus-inspired “space stage” had debuted two years previously in Vienna, called on New York theatre practitioners to develop an “agitator’s theatre” that would be radical in form and ideology and that would be rooted not in the conventions of the proscenium-arch stage but in the practices of popular subcultures. This essay argues that Kiesler’s polemic profoundly influenced modernist poet E.E. Cummings,³ who attended the exposition as a theatre
[PART I: Introduction] from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Habermas defined the problem. Or, rather, his book on the public sphere did. Jürgen Habermas matured in the Marxist tradition of western Europe, specifically that associated with the Frankfurt School of Critical Theory (he once referred to himself, a bit ruefully, as feeling like ‘the last Marxist’).² By then (1989), Habermas as philosopher had moved far away from any recognizable Marxism to articulate a vision of an egalitarian order that rested upon the act of speech. His heresy was apparent early on. He wrote a postdoctoral thesis, rejected by his Marxist supervisors, that became
The Structural Transformation of the Public
2 Restoring Order: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: In fact these were symptoms of a hegemony in trouble, a crisis but not a collapse of legitimacy (there never was a revolutionary moment), because the prevailing élites were no longer able to negotiate differences effectively
4 Healthy Bodies, or the New Paranoia from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Consider this litany of alarm. Smoking now kills more than ‘3 million people per year.’ Since 1950 cigarettes and the like have brought death to ‘more than 60 million people in developed countries alone.’ Tobacco use produces ‘a global net loss of U.S.$ 200 billion per year.’ In three or four decades the death rate should hit ‘10 million per year.’ These estimates came from a Web site of the World Health Organization (WHO) devoted to promoting World No-Tobacco Day, 31 May 1997. They justified the director’s declaring ‘a global public health emergency,’ and calling on governments and activists worldwide
5 Charitable Souls: from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: These are no ordinary children. You can find them looking out from posters and billboards, in the pages of newspapers and magazines, sometimes on movie screens and on television. They may be infants or teens, a boy or a girl, with different skin colours, and of any age up to about twenty. They can be forlorn, injured, starving, abused, neglected, frightened, disturbed, expectant, hopeful, happy, or sometimes thankful. They do share one characteristic: they are disadvantaged – by race, class, gender, health, situation, or other circumstances. They are meant as objects of pity. They plead with us – as caring
8 Technopia and Other Corporate Dreams from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: ‘Let’s Make Things Better.’ So announced Philips, the transnational electronics giant, in a new global ad campaign launched in September 1995. The company explained how the theme and slogan were a far better representation of its purposes than the more obvious brag, ‘We make better things.’¹ In fact, the statement was pathetic: bland, vague, and hackneyed. No wonder it fostered an initial flurry of boring ads which featured a smiling employee saying trite things to magazine readers. More interesting than Philips’s lack of inspiration was its commitment of time and funds to this kind of image campaign. Here it followed
[PART V: Introduction] from:
Endless Propaganda
Abstract: Discipline and Punishopened with a gripping discussion of premodern publicity, including ‘the spectacle of the scaffold’ (32)² where punishment was enacted on the body of the criminal to reaffirm the authority of the sovereign. This account was a gruesome exploration of the ways in which, as Jürgen Habermas argued, lordship represented its publicness in the
5 Mal’uocchiu in Everyday Experience from:
Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: During a telephone conversation, several weeks before I began to write this book, I revealed to my mother that I was concerned about how some community members might react to my publishing a book on
mal’uocchiu. My concern was, and still is, that certain individuals, people who have not participated in the study, will feel that I am presenting a negative image of Sicilian Canadians – that I am depicting community members as ‘superstitious’ people. This is not my intent, but I obviously have no control over how others will interpret my work. My mother’s response surprised me. She stated:
7 Conclusion from:
Mal'uocchiu
Abstract: I would like to begin the conclusion the same way I began the introduction – with an analogy. The analogy involves what is probably Pirandello’s (1952b) best-known play,
Six Characters in Search of an Author.¹ The work focuses on six partially developed characters who have been discarded by their creator. As the drama unfolds, the characters enter the stage and interrupt a theatre company about to rehearse a play. The characters are in search of an author who can give them a more definitive ‘form,’ and an opportunity to communicate their story. Although the drama presents the characters’ story (or
1962-2 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: What we had to say yesterday may be summed up under the five headings of object, operations, habits, subject, and the characteristic of the method as transcendental.
1962-3 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: We begin by summarizing what we said yesterday. The first and fundamental point was that the analysis of human development in terms of spontaneous operations that become differentiated, combinations of differentiated operations, the grouping of combinations of differentiated operations, and finally the grouping of groups, runs into a limit. The dynamism of consciousness leads to a differentiation between operations that regard the ultimate – religious acts, the activities we perform when we say Mass, meditate, recite the breviary – and on the other hand the activities of studying and teaching, of eating and recreation. They tend to form – and the more they
1962-5 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Yesterday we reached the problem of certitude of judgment that is raised when one attempts to integrate the modern notion or fact of science with the ancient ideal. And we had something to say about the nature of the act of judgment, the nature of sufficient evidence, the objectifications of intellectual light, of the light of intelligence, in logic and method, and the remainder that never succeeds in being objectified. In other words, intelligence is something more than simply what can be objectified in logic or a method, no matter how elaborate. Not all problems are the same, and yet
1962-6 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: We begin with a twofold point.² We can handle within the same science the necessary and the empirically intelligible, the universal and the imaginative scheme which approaches the singular, the changeable and the unchanging, the
per seand theper accidens, insofar as we go behind the conceptual order. Within the conceptual order those terms are contradictory. But prior to conceiving, there is the act of understanding, and prior to the act of understanding, there is the state of mind that is expressed in the question. When it is expressed in the question, one has concepts. But the prior state of
1962-7 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: The
terminus a quoand theterminus ad quemcan be compared as the implicit and the explicit, theactus exercitusand theactus signatus, thevécuand thethématique, VerstehenandErklären.Erklärenmeans explaining, that is, giving a scientifically formulated
1962-9 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: In general, exegesis is learned in practice, in a seminar. The four articles I wrote on
gratia operansinTheological Studiesin 1941–1942² represent the exegesis of an article in St Thomas,Summa theologiae, 1-2, q. 111, a. 2. What does this article mean? Well, you can easily write four articles and refer to all sorts of elements in St Thomas’s thought to set forth
1962 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Lonergan: We spoke this morning about the world of common sense, the visible universe, the world of community that everyone knows all about. It sooner or later brings about, or leads to, or heads into what Georg Simmel in his
Geschichtsphilosophiecallsdie Wendung zur Idee, the turn to the idea, the movement towards system, towards conceptualization.³ You not only have democracies but also people within democracies talking about what democracy is. This talk influences what in fact the democracy turns out to
1962 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Lonergan: With regard to the freedom of the act of faith, one can distinguish between a freedom
in causaand an essential freedom. The freedomin causa: a man chooses to go to a Catholic university instead of to a secular university, or vice versa; and implicit
1962 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Lonergan: Yes. In other words, there are all sorts of thematizations; every sermon is in fact a thematization of the gospel text that is preached on. It is only insofar as there are a whole series of thematizations involving similar topics that you start getting further questions: How do you reconcile this? The Middle Ages started off with a
glossaof the scriptures and collections of passages from the Fathers; and when they started to compare them they didn’t seem
1964-2 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Dynamic structure: Cf.
In Boethei de Trinitate, q.5 on abstraction. Thomas points out you can’t abstract foot from animal because its intelligibililty depends on its function – i.e., animal.
1964-3 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Horizon: ‘Founding circle’ – limit of field of visibility. Husserl generalized this notion. We shall use as variation on Aristotelian-Thomist notion offormal object. Defined by correlatives of pole and field. Pole is subject, field is totality of objects. Potency is defined by its formal object. Scholastic concept concentrates on object and commonly conceives this abstractly:ratio sub qua objectum
1968-2 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: The day before yesterday, I did most of the first chapter on method, and first of all I noted that there are three approaches to the notion of method: first, a purely empirical approach, where method is more an art than a science; secondly, a selective approach, where one picks the successful science and analyzes it and wishes all other sciences to be science insofar as they conform to it; that’s quite unsatisfactory for the less successful sciences that need more help really than anyone else; and consequently we were trying to work out a third approach through an analysis
1968-5 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: The appropriation of one’s social, cultural, religious heritage is largely a matter of belief. What we find out for ourselves is a very small fraction of what we know. We rely upon the experiences, the insights, the judgments of others; and this reliance is not merely on the experience, understanding, and judgment of our contemporaries, but also of our ancestors. The reason why man has progressed in the last 200,000 years (if that is
1968-6 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Distinguish sources, acts, and terms. Sources of meaning are all conscious acts and all intended contents, from the dream state right through the four levels of waking consciousness. The fundamental division is between transcendental and categorial meaning.
1968 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Question: I have a problem about the conversions and their meanings. How do I ever know that, when I accept something on the authority of God, this is an act of supernatural faith as distinct from a natural acceptance of something on the authority of God. If we’re going to reflect on our being Christian, how can I ever know that I’m authentically a Christian? I can accept the fact that I can be aware of my act of faith qua assent, but qua supernatural, qua activated by grace, how can I be sure? Can I experience an act of
1968 from:
Early Works on Theological Method 1
Abstract: Question: And so for all practical purposes the knowledge one gets from belief is just as good as what one has learned on one’s own.
Book Title: Fighting Words and Images-: Representing War Across the Disciplines
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): MULLER ADAM
Abstract: This collection creatively and insightfully explains the nature, origins, dynamics, structure, and impact of a wide variety of war representations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442686731
1 Representations of War and the Social Construction of Silence from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) WINTER JAY
Abstract: The wrenching experience of war has occasioned commemorative practices of many kinds all over the world. Every one of them is framed by representations of war. Some are heroic, some filled with tragedy, some triumphalist, some angry, some resigned. Every one of them is incomplete, in that the visceral experience of combat, what Tolstoy called ʹthe actual killing,ʹ the smell of it, the taste of it, is irreproduceable. This stark and unavoidable fact means that all commemoration is metaphoric, or metonymic, or in some sense at a considerable remove from the subject – war – and its bloody remains. Many
2 Not Writing about War from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) MCLOUGHLIN KATE
Abstract: The reasons not to write about war are myriad and compelling. They fall into two overlapping categories: war cannot be written about and war should not be written about. For a start, war cannot be written about because the logistical difficulties of doing so are insuperable (the sheer scale of armed conflict is prohibitive). This makes a synoptic view practically and politically problematic to obtain. Then there is a premium on first-hand experience (or ʹcombat gnosticismʹ)¹ that undermines the validity of non-combatant representations. Combatant representations are themselves suspect as they may lack the necessary distance and detachment; censorship and self-censorship
4 Historiographical Simulations of War from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) JAEGER STEPHAN
Abstract: The numerous narrative techniques available to represent war and violence must allow for the expression of an immense range of perspectives. It spans from the survey perspective of the historian to the personal experiences of participants in the war such as soldiers or civilians, from first-hand experiences to considering the impact on future generations. Representations oscillate between distance and proximity, between critical summary or analysis and personal experience. For historiography in its narrower meaning as historical writing within the scholarly field of history, representing war seems particularly difficult since historiography is traditionally seen as a secondary narrative discourse, one in
6 Slotting War Narratives into Cultureʹs Ready-Made from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) GOSCILO HELENA
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzscheʹs famous lapidary dictum ʹThere are no facts, only interpretationsʹ summarizes his vastly influential assertion that if an objective reality exists, the perspectival nature of human cognition renders that reality inaccessible. War, according to Lev Tolstoyʹs
War and Peace(1869), reveals that incapacity as deriving at least partly from the two extremes of proximity and remoteness: both Nikolai Rostovoʹs complete submersion in the immediacy of battle and Napoleonʹs distant, hence more abstract, viewpoint hamper their powers of perception. The two radically contrasting subject/ive positions are equally disabling for, in the complex, chaotic circumstances of war no such vantage point
7 Blessed Are the Warmakers: from:
Fighting Words and Images
Author(s) JAMES JENNIFER C.
Abstract: On 4 April 1967, at Riverside Church in New York City, Martin Luther King delivered his first public indictment of the Vietnam War. Standing before the Clergy and Laity Concerned about the Vietnam War, he praised fellow religious leaders for having the courage to ʹmove beyond the prophesying of smooth patriotismʹ to speak from the transcendent ʹmandates of conscience.ʹ¹ At the same time, he rebuked those in the civil rights movement who characterized his anti-war activism as a distraction from his primary mission: ʹ[T]hough I often understand the source of their concern, I am nevertheless greatly saddened, for such questions
Book Title: Civility-A Cultural History
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): DAVETIAN BENET
Abstract: Davetian's rich, multi-dimensional review of civility from 1200 to the present day provides an in-depth analysis of the social and personal psychology of human interaction and charts a new course for the study and understanding of civility and civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442687660
2 From Barbarism to Courtly Manners from:
Civility
Abstract: Our contemporary Western understanding of
courtesyandcivilityis founded on our experience of a democratic society in which all citizens are supposed to enjoy fair treatment before the law. The massive amount of literature that has recently appeared on the supposed waning of courtesy shows how much we have come to value democratic civility as a sign of civilized pro-social behaviour. Yet nostalgia for a supposedly more civil era distracts us from realizing that in a different time and place the outright disrespect, hatred, and exclusion of the ‘other’ was considered normal and vital for survival. Ironically, when Western
3 Secular Civility in the Renaissance from:
Civility
Abstract: The Renaissance was an important era in Western history because of its immense infl uence on the manner in which individuals conceived of their place in the universe and the way in which this conception facilitated the development of a civility tradition that was not as dependent on theological dogma. The subsequent Protestant Reformation and Enlightenment movements were facilitated by Renaissance interaction values because the Renaissance thinkers set the stage for a reversal in the ideologies that had kept absolutist monarchies in power. Although princes remained all-powerful in the Renaissance city-states, a new appreciation of individualism provided the rationale for
4 Shifts in Identity and Awareness: from:
Civility
Abstract: Thinkers of the Renaissance placed a certain amount of responsibility on the individual for his actions and moral behaviour. Many of the writings of Renaissance thinkers favoured a personal morality that was not dependent on religious edict. This was an important transformation in worldview and it facilitated the massive cultural changes that occurred as a result of the Protestant Reformation and then the Enlightenment. Both historical developments had the effect of weakening the religious foundations of courtesy and transforming it into a practice of responsible secular citizenship. Our understanding of these changes is important if we are to appreciate how
5 French Court Society, the French Revolution, and the Paradoxes of French Civility from:
Civility
Abstract: Although the Italians played a seminal role in the development of the Western civility tradition, it was during the reign of the French absolutist monarchs that civil etiquette became substantially associated with the preservation of privilege. The fact that egalitarian Protestantism was a minority movement in France allowed the French monarchs to adhere to an etiquette philosophy based on a social philosophy of distinction and superiority. In this chapter we would like to review the transition from etiquette to civility in France and discuss important aspects of French civil society prior to the twentieth century. This knowledge is crucial to
6 England and the Victorian Ethic from:
Civility
Abstract: Despite the fact that England’s history is a dizzying narrative of violence, riots, political plots, religious and international wars, and considerable exploitation of the poor (Tilly [1995] 2005), an outright English revolution was avoided due to steadily improving economic and judicial systems (Gilmour 1993). Although there were no less than 8,088 ‘contentious gatherings’ in southeast England alone
7 The American Experience: from:
Civility
Abstract: In previous chapters we have described how the development of centralized monarchies gave rise to a civility ethos that served to legitimize the privileges accorded to aristocrats. As we will argue in our comparison of contemporary civility practices in France and England (chapter 10), this background has had a salient influence on the manner in which individuals interact with one another. In this present chapter we will describe the formation of a civility tradition that was not the outcome of aristocratic society, but a reaction to it. The American experience not only shows us the roots of American civility, but
8 Conformity, Opposition, and Identity from:
Civility
Abstract: In Part I we tried to show how France, America, and England developed different civility preferences due to the manner in which each nation was affected by a variety of factors, including political philosophy and system of government, religion, intellectual history, geography, economy, familial norms, and the manner in which emotions were restrained and expressed. By the close of the nineteenth century each nation possessed its own civility and interaction ethos. The industrialization of the West did not have a substantial levelling effect over national identity or national ideology.
9 Towards a Cultural Sociology of Civility from:
Civility
Abstract: The study of the historical background of a culture is vital to one’s understanding of its civility practices as well as its ongoing present. Yet, there are other equally important factors that must be considered. Although they may in some measure be the outcomes of historical and moral forces, these factors need to be studied on their own merit because the manner in which they intersect makes for an ‘anatomy of civility’ that is sociological as well as psychological. In this part of the book we will discuss these various factors and show how a ‘cultural sociology of civility’ needs
11 Civilizing and Recivilizing Processes from:
Civility
Abstract: The study of civility is the study not only of the social history of a culture but of the human need for satisfactory social bonds and the problems that emerge when these bonds become too loose or too tight. When they are too tight, we are left with a collectivism that engulfs the individual, drowning out personal needs and aspirations. When they are too loose, the individual is deprived of the safety of communal norms and abandoned to a wasteland of freedom in which interactions between self and others lack meaning and depth. How a culture reacts to either extreme
2 The Demonology of Spenserian Discipline from:
Magical Imaginations
Abstract: In his 1590
Faerie Queene, Spenser represents demonic conjuration in terms that could well describe poetic creation. His diabolical magician Archimago, for instance, conjures malevolent spirits using ‘verses’ (1.1.27) from his magic books, and he fashions his spirits to make ‘false showes’ that ‘abuse [the] fantasy’ (1.1.46) of the Redcrosse knight.¹ Indeed, ever since A. Bartlett Giamatti first noticed that the demonic ‘false shewes’ conjured by Archimago’s verses are akin to the imaginative images invoked by Spenser’s poetry, it has become commonplace to read the magician as Spenser’s allegorical figure for the poet. Hence critics generally characterize Archimago and the
4 The End of Magic: from:
Magical Imaginations
Abstract: Twentieth-century Shakespeare criticism has bequeathed us a picture of
The Tempestas a document of early British imperialism.¹ Like the interpretations they serve to contest, postcolonial readings of the play usually view Prospero as an analogue of James or his colonial administrator.² Such readings, though, ignore the historical fact that in his political writings and his legislation James represented magicians as traitors who should be tortured and executed without pardon. In his 1597Daemonologie, and again in his 1603Basilikon Doron, James explicitly proclaimed that in using powers given to them by devils, magicians undermine the divine sovereignty of the
Epilogue: from:
Magical Imaginations
Abstract: The historical relationship between magical spells called ‘charms’ and literary texts meant to have instrumental effects has emerged repeatedly a leitmotif of this book. The Elizabethan parliament outlawed the practice of charming as a felony in 1563, yet in
The Defense of Poesy, Sidney characterized poetry’s efficacy as its ‘sweet, charming force.’² A figure for the court poet who attempts to seduce his married beloved with sonnets, Spenser’s Busirane deployed ‘a thousand charms’ to compel Amoret’s love ‘perforce.’³ The Protestants whose account of conjuration Marlowe appropriated forDoctor Faustusinsisted that any signs used to spiritual ends without scriptural authorization
Introduction from:
Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: This book is a conversation between the thought of Johann Gottfried Herder (1744–1803) and recent Anglo-American political theory. Since John Rawls’s critique of utilitarianism and the enormous influence of his
Theory of Justice(1971), liberal-communitarian critics have placed firmly on the agenda the notion that individual identity is partly constituted by the cultural community in which one is born and educated. Rawls subsequently came to contend that his once apparently universal principles are only applicable to modern, liberal-democratic states. Postmodernism, too, has had a significant impact with its critique of the one-sided universalism typically associated with ‘the Enlightenment,’ as
3 Culture, Identity, and Community from:
Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: The abstract study of language in the previous chapter takes on a concrete basis through Herder’s study of specific cultural communities. Both are central to his ontological position – that is, to those factors he takes as meaningful in accounting for social life.¹ Herder is now commonly credited as one of the first thinkers in the Western tradition to celebrate cultural diversity. Yet the erroneous idea that he fails to grasp sufficiently the diversity that exists
withincultures persists among some political theorists. The first section of this chapter begins the task of correcting this misperception by showing that Herder fully
6 Republicanism from:
Herder's Political Thought
Abstract: It is hardly surprising, given Herder’s views on the state, that he shows relatively little interest in government and administration. But the fact that Herder’s direct engagement with politics in this narrow sense forms only a small part of his extensive intellectual output has meant that it has often been thought that he ‘was not a political thinker in the true sense of the word.’¹ It should be clear that I reject the narrow conception of politics on which this assessment is based, but due to its pervasiveness and misleading nature it needs to be addressed directly.² Viroli in his
Book Title: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism- Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Author(s): Gallagher Lowell
Abstract: Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicismably demonstrates the profoundly experimental as well as recuperative character of early modern English Catholicism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3138/9781442695481
chapter one Introduction from:
Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) GALLAGHER LOWELL
Abstract: This book presents an itinerary of English Catholicism in the early modern period. Imagine you are looking at an interactive map depicting the fortunes of members of the ‘old faith’ – variously called ‘Romanist,’ ‘Romish,’ and ‘papist,’ as well as ‘Catholic’ – in Reformation-era England. Maps tell stories of one kind or another and this one would be in no way different, but the embedded graphs and visual icons would yield a tangle of information not easily reducible to a single story. The machinery of an epic tale would be on display, notably through the sense of heroic antagonism animating the sequence
chapter two In Defence of Idolatry: from:
Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) MAROTTI ARTHUR F.
Abstract: In an Italian-American parish in which I lived for part of my youth, many of the plaster statues of saints, the Virgin, and Christ had feet worn down, mainly by the devout old women who kissed and rubbed them as part of their religious ritual behaviour. Without such touching, their religious experience was impoverished – even if, to some ways of thinking, what they were doing was practising idolatry.
chapter four Motion Rhetoric in Serial Conversion Narratives: from:
Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) PICKETT HOLLY CRAWFORD
Abstract: As pervasive as it is, change is an exceptionally difficult concept to understand or to accept. We may never step in the same river twice, but life surely is easier both logistically and psychologically if we act as if we do.¹ Religious conversion, at its most fundamental, is change, whether from ‘irreligion to religion; or from one religion to another; or from one denomination to another; or from one theological position to another; or from a second hand to first hand experience of religion.’² A 1604 English dictionary defines the verb
convertsimply with the wordsturne,change.³ From the
chapter nine ‘Honest mirth & merriment’: from:
Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) JENSEN PHEBE
Abstract: In the absence of an institutional Catholic Church in England after the Reformation, lay piety loomed particularly large in the English recusant community’s efforts to sustain a sense of religious identity and culture. Though scholars of early modern Catholicism once disagreed about whether early modern Catholic culture was characterized by the survival of late medieval traditions or the influence of missionary priests, recent work on both English and Continental Catholicism has shown that it was in fact defined by complex interactions between the two, as the traditions of the past and the spiritual directives of the Counter-Reformation merged, clashed, and
chapter ten Uncommon Prayer? from:
Redrawing the Map of Early Modern English Catholicism
Author(s) MONTA SUSANNAH
Abstract: Are early modern English Catholic devotional practices and texts uncommon? That is, are they both unusual and comparatively private, outside the parameters of the national and nationalizing liturgy found in the
Book of Common Prayer, both too narrow and too foreign to appeal to broad reading and publishing communities, beyond the parameters of Englishness itself? From the perspective of those who drafted Elizabethan recusancy legislation, Catholics who refused participation in the rites of theBCPwere quite literally uncommon, and dangerously so: they were outside the newly drawn political and religious boundaries of the nation.¹ In some modern scholarship, a
Introduction from:
Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: In 1927, Europe and America’s avant-garde arrived in Toronto for a month-long exhibition of the strangest, most disturbing, most bizarre, and most exciting visual art being made anywhere in the Western world. The show included hundreds of works by 106 active, contemporary artists from twenty-three different countries, including work by cubists such as Pablo Picasso, Alexander Archipenko, Georges Braque, and Fernand Léger; Futurists like Wassily Kandinsky, Umberto Boccioni, and Joseph Stella; Dadaists like Marcel Duchamp, Kurt Schwitters, and Francis Picabia; Surrealists like Max Ernst, Hans Arp, and Joan Miró; and other avant-garde experimentalists like Joseph Albers, Paul Klee, and Piet
Chapter Two The Cosmic Canadians from:
Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: The first node of Canadian aesthetic avant-garde activity began in smalltown Ontario at the turn of the century – in a period and geography that too many scholars hasten over, tripping to reach the urban promontory of modernism. Though there were substantial precursors to the moment, and certainly diverse coexistent influences, the landmark publication that begat the Cosmic Canadians was Dr Richard Maurice Bucke’s 1901 treatise
Cosmic Consciousness: A Study in the Evolution of the Human Mind. In his book, Bucke – a distinguished psychologist (née alienist) in London, Ontario – unleashed a Futurist’s vision of human experience after a revolutionary transformation of
Chapter Three Canadian Surrealism: from:
Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: Situated somewhere between the Cosmic Canadian pursuit of a postcolonial Canadian art through spiritualized abstraction and the
TISHrealization of a postcolonial Canadian geopoetics is another group of artists who worked with the explicit ambition of liberating art and, by doing so, revolutionizing their society. The Automatists of Montreal are the most celebrated and recognizable avant-garde movement in Canada’s history. All of the hallmarks of canonical avant-garde behaviour are present: they self-identified as a group, performed or exhibited as representatives of the group, wrote manifestos that sought to articulate the aesthetic ambitions of the collective, and produced work with radically
L’Envoi: from:
Avant-Garde Canadian Literature
Abstract: The early avant-garde in Canada responded to the arrival of foreign cultural models at first by learning and imitating but eventually by translating cultural practices into the Canadian context. The Cosmic Canadians borrowed European models of idealism, occultism, and mysticism, as well as American models of transcendental idealism and poetic form, but developed these influences into a distinctly Canadian r/evolutionary node. The cultural products that emerged from this Anschauung remain marked by idealism, occultism, and mysticism, but became something else, something entirely new, as they colluded with the rising national spirit, the ideas of Richard Maurice Bucke, the general North
Chapter Two Temporality and Desire (Rvf 22–100) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: Fables rely on magical objects, more powerful than the characters; around these objects a force field exists that determines the narrative links of cause and effect. These events
Chapter Three The Language of Tears (Rvf 92–122) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: The language of tears seen in poem 92, “Piangete, donne, et con voi pianga Amore” (“O ladies weep, and may Love weep with you”), mourning the death of Cino da Pistoia, establishes the act of weeping not simply as a natural part of grief but as a means of prostrating oneself before God together with the community.¹ To weep openly is to break stoic apathy. In fact, the prominence of tears in Petrarch’s poetry is not unrelated to his practice of the Holy Offices and recitation of scripture (especially the Psalms): weeping is an ingredient of his prayers that finds
Chapter Five The Penitent Lover (Rvf 184–263) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: In chapter 4 we saw emerge a history of the subject who foregrounded the act of writing by documenting his past and affirming the ethically constructive nature of poetry. In the desire to narrate was discovered a source of the sacred, a spiritual quality intrinsic to the act of selfdisclosure. In my analysis of the poet’s use of antithesis, I showed how this trope belied the stereotype of psychological inertia and became a source of eurhythmic harmony. So, too, the use of parallelism was seen to bring into focus the problematic of desire and the will, mitigating the presence of
Chapter Six Songs of Grief and Lamentation (Rvf 264–318) from:
Petrarch's 'Fragmenta'
Abstract: Five blank pages in Vat. Lat. 3195 separate Part 1 and Part 2; the break comes between poems 263 and 264 and does not coincide with the death of Laura. If the poems of Part 1 immerse us in the story of the Petrarchan subject, whether in the fabulous mode of homodiegetic fiction or that of historical narrative, in Part 2 the voices of character, narrator, and author converge, consolidating the mode of spiritual autobiography.
A letter to my English-speaking friends from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Author(s) DUMONT FERNAND
Abstract: Different approaches, more objective or more neutral, are certainly legitimate. In my practice of philosophy or sociology I frequently have occasion to employ them. However, the questions I was asking in these essays suggested another
After the war: from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: When the war broke out in 1939 powerful forces of change were at work in our midst, but for a long time their activity was subterranean. We did not become really aware of them until the period from 1940 to 1960, and men in our society are still busy looking for the consequences of these changes.
Tasks before the nationalist from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Let us stop to consider some current criticism. At first sight, our nationalist associations have no future, and this is a statement one often hears made. Until fairly recently, so the claim goes, they did excellent work, but now they are out of date. For a long time they were active in the general area of social problems; however, in the past few years a number of new organizations with specific objectives have appeared. What purpose can a national association serve in a minor supporting role? Again, like many Québécois, these associations have come to the independentist choice. There is
The co-operative ideal from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Elites and planning: at first glance, these two terms suggest an irreconcilable opposition. In fact, planning implies co-ordinating activities and defining long-term projects on a basis of technical criteria. The latter should be more or less imposed on the multiplicity and incoherence of individual wants and goals. The elite, on the contrary, represents an authority delegated spontaneously by groups. The leader is not a ‘good talker’ or even necessarily a ‘learned man,’ but he who proposes a representation of his own milieu and objectives for action in which other men may recognize their own viewpoint and desire for change. While
Socialism for Quebec from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: We all know how the problem of economic power is traditionally looked at in our milieu. As we have never had a substantial bourgeoisie of our own, and control almost none of the big machinery of capitalist growth, our ideas on these lines could only sway between the contestation of the modern economy in the abstract, and claims launched in the name of the national collectivity. Inevitably the class struggle has escaped us, all the more so as the economic powers that could have been challenged by our working class were, because of the nationality of the holders of power,
Conflicts and futures from:
The Vigil of Quebec
Abstract: Despair is not a political motive. It requires that symbols, words, and acts fall into place in accordance with sudden confrontations. A society is threatened with death pangs when it is divided thus into armed camps, not only because political projections are replaced by physical or verbal violence, but because aspirations, words, conflicts are no longer understood, mobilized as they are in schemes that remove their significance and authenticity.
Introduction: from:
Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: This is a study of Maurice Merleau-Ponty’s politics. For one reason or another, students of Merleau-Ponty’s thought have only superficially examined its political dimension. Most scholars have sought to explain particular aspects of his philosophical work. Some have used his writings as a quarry of raw materials to be extracted and refined for their own constructions. A few have studied Merleau-Ponty’s writings sympathetically in order to think along with him and reason through new matters in a style they have learned from him. But this is to be a critical account. It treats his views of public affairs and political
1 The post-war context from:
Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: I have argued that humanism was the central term in Merleau-Ponty’s political vocabulary. It brought together the various interpretations of collective life to which human beings have committed themselves. The intellectual and spiritual change that Merleau-Ponty underwent has been described as cutting himself off from ‘vertical’ transcendence in the religious or philosophical sense, implying that the act was a mistake. It was motivated by his rejection of religious and philosophical dogma and the existential attractions of Hegel’s idea of commitment to humanism or a regime of mutual recognition.
2 Recognition and violence from:
Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty’s chief criticism of his contemporaries, as we have seen, was that they were wrong in refusing to acknowledge that intentions and consequences presented a problematic. One might also speak here of a dialectic of intentions and consequences, but in either case the connotation was of an unavoidable practical or pragmatic uncertainty. A problem can be solved, but a problematic must be coped with for better or for worse. To resolve a problematic into its analytically distinct constituent elements is to destroy its characteristic tension between (or among) those elements. Likewise, a dialectic contains its own internal dynamic, for example
5 A reappraisal of dialectic from:
Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty’s doubts about classical Marxism were nourished by his integrity and the seriousness of his commitment to humanism. Proletarian internationalism and proletarian spontaneity had ceased to be effective factors in politics, and proletarian control of the means of production was grotesquely distorted by the Stalinist regime. Nevertheless the pressure of events compelled him, not to abandon Marx’s teaching, but to reinterpret it. Sartre was right to note that Merleau-Ponty had returned to his inner life, but his refuge was no more than a strategic retreat. In his lectures at the Collège de France he was undertaking an intellectual overhaul that
Epilogue: from:
Merleau-Ponty and Marxism
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty’s earliest public writings showed him to be a young philosopher acutely sensitive to what I have called, perhaps a little crudely, the transcendent dimension to human existence. In his first phenomenological studies, which included Scheler and Marcel, he learned the importance and significance of commitment as being a constituent element of knowledge. On the one hand this insight led him to abandon the dogmatic philosophical and religious traditions in which he had been reared. On the other it led him to make new commitments with a more practical significance. The first of these, the personalism of Mounier and his
Dante’s Three Communities: from:
The World of Dante
Author(s) MAZZEO JOSEPH ANTHONY
Abstract: The divina commedia is a journey from misery to bliss, from illusion and ignorance to perfect love and knowledge, from clamour to peace, and from slavery to freedom. As a work of art, I think we have no other to compare with it in philosophic richness and perfection of execution, both in its grand design and its smallest detail. In a way, it is hard to think of it as having been written over many years. In spite of its epic proportions and encyclopaedic character, its astonishing union of massive erudition and poetic splendour and variety, the poem is so
The Twins of Latona from:
The World of Dante
Author(s) VON RICHTHOFEN ERICH
Abstract: Let me begin with a brief comment on the poet’s characteristic technique of contrasting geometrically two extreme poles. This is done in order to harmonize them, for instance papal and imperial power, or to oppose them as irreconcilable expressions of good and evil, as that of
veltroandlupa, the hound and the
3 Epic, or Making the Greater Flight: from:
Spenser's Famous Flight
Abstract: Spenserʹs immediate goal in writing
The Faerie Queeneis thus career-based. He aims to enact the authority he has acquired through writingThe Shepheardes Calender. His career-based goal implies that he defines epic poetry (or redefines it) in careeric terms – as a genre that contributes to a literary career. He understands epic as a genre in which the mature poet enacts vatic virtue for the benefit of the commonwealth. Spenserʹs careeric definition in turn implies a more self-reflexive allegory inThe
4 Love Lyric, or Sporting the Muse in Pleasant Mew: from:
Spenser's Famous Flight
Abstract: Spenser does not follow the Renaissance program of beginning a poetic career with pastoral and ending it with epic. In 1595, a year before publishing the second instalment of
The Faerie Queene, he publishes a volume of love lyrics titledAMORETTI AND Epithalamion. In the fiction ofAmoretti(again, we can only speculate about actual life), the New Poet completes his Virgilian epic while composing his Petrarchan sonnet sequence.
Introduction from:
The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: For some forty years now and since well before his premature death in an automobile accident in 1960, Albert Camus has been considered one of the most significant and influential writers of this century. Eloquent testimony to this fact is furnished by the several thousands of articles and books that have been devoted to the man and his work in countless countries on all five continents and in languages as diverse as Russian, Arabic, and Japanese.¹ That this status as one of the ‘classics’ of French literature would only be disputed precisely within the boundaries of his native land is
2 The Autoreferential Text: from:
The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: La Pesteis a text which often speaks of other texts. These other texts are, moreover, of all kinds, ranging from the very short to the very long and their status varies between the aesthetic and the practical. It could even be claimed that the real subject ofLa Pesteis none other than the text in all its various forms.
6 Just between Texts: from:
The Narcissistic Text
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have spoken of the way the Camusian text functions within itself, produces its own reflection, as well as the way it reproduces within itself its relationship to its reader. It remains to consider the manner in which the different texts relate to one another, for here too a mirroring effect can be seen to be at work. The intertextuality¹ in question is of a very special kind since no texts by other writers are concerned. In fact, if one were to consider the whole of Camus’ works as one single text, then one could more
Foreword from:
French Existentialism
Author(s) Mascall E. L.
Abstract: A GREAT DEAL has been written about Existentialism in recent years, but this work of Dr. Kingston’s seems to me to occupy a unique and important place, and this for two reasons. First, in my opinion he seems to raise those questions about the Existentialist movement which most immediately spring to the mind of any intelligent Christian who finds himself confronted with it. Is the movement a reaction against Christian orthodoxy as such, or is it an attempt to recover certain Christian insights which Christians themselves have largely forgotten? If it is the former, how are we to explain the
Introduction from:
French Existentialism
Abstract: In
Existence and Analogy(p. 64), E. L. Mascall suggests that it would be interesting to discuss the existentialism of St. Thomas Aquinas in relation to contemporary philosophies known by the same name. In the past, Catholic philosophy has been dominated and distorted by an essentialist, Cartesian interpretation of St. Thomas and many have come to regard him as a Christianized Aristotle and his philosophy as a completely idealist, rationalistic and closed system. The dominant place given to atheism and freedom in Sartre’s writings can only be fully understood as a reaction against this essentialist Thomism. In contrast to such
Chapter One THE WORLD SITUATION AND THE HUMAN CONDITION from:
French Existentialism
Abstract: Existentialism was first recognized as a valid and also a notorious school of philosophy during the Second World War, especially after the defeat of France. The fall of France was a matter of vital concern for every Frenchman and it would be difficult to overestimate the impact of France’s defeat in 1940 upon the French mind. To many, it was a blind force which had overcome them, for which they could discover no reason. To most, the defeat of France by its traditional enemy—Germany—was deeply humiliating. For almost every Frenchman, the sudden collapse of his country came as
Chapter Two TIME, SUICIDE AND DEATH from:
French Existentialism
Abstract: All the existentialists are united in their opposition to idealist philosophies which ignore space and time as necessary conditions of the human existence. In no way is the finiteness of the human creature more evident than in the fact that he must live an earthly existence, and, since things in time have a beginning and an end, that he must be subject to the mysteries of birth and death. Ignoring these fundamental facts, the idealists sought to transcend the time process by rational system and they imposed a rational pattern upon the course of historical events. In other words, they
Chapter Three LANGUAGE AND COMMUNION from:
French Existentialism
Abstract: One of the most noteworthy characteristics of the writings of Marcel, Sartre, Camus and Simone de Beauvoir is that their philosophy is expressed not only in traditional discursive form but also in plays and novels. A question that we must ask is why philosophy is expressed in this way? It would be absurd for rational philosophers such as Spinoza and Leibniz to express philosophy in imaginative works because the subjective idea which the word embodies is reality for them and this reality is beyond any temporal process.
Les conférences from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Martin Paul
Abstract: Comme on le sait sans doute de par le monde, l’Expo a pour thème Terre des Hommes. Autour de ce thème, on se propose d’envisager l’homme dans son milieu actuel, d’exalter ses réalisations dans les domaines de la culture et de la science, et de montrer comment il doit s’adapter aux idées nouvelles et aux nouveaux modes de vie communautaire, afin de favoriser l’harmonie
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Dupuy Pierre
Abstract: I MET M. PAUL-HENRI SPAAK a few days after he had accepted, for the first time, the office of Foreign Minister of Belgium. It was at the time of the Manchukuo crisis, when the Japanese invaded the northern part of West China. This invasion then appeared to most as a distant struggle, with practically little consequence for the rest of the world. But men like M. Spaak already appreciated the full meaning of events. He knew this was the gong starting a storm that was bound to reach the West sooner or later.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Robbins John
Abstract: DR. GUNNAR MYDRAL of Sweden has been a familiar and respected name among economists of the world for a generation. Indeed his name has been familiar to a very much wider circle of readers than just professional economists. The practical problems of men living together in a free society, in a peaceful world, have been foremost in his mind, and he has expressed himself concerning them in a way that the layman can understand.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Neatby Hilda
Abstract: IT IS DIFFICULT to do justice to Mr. Singh’s career and achievements in a short introduction. He was educated in Lahore, and at King’s College and the Inner Temple, London. After some years in legal practice in Lahore, he entered the service of the newly independent nation of India. As a member of the ministry of external affairs, he served as Press Attaché in Canada, and later as Public Relations Officer in Great Britain. Then after another period of service in India as Minister of Information and Broadcasting, he entered the Department of Mass Communications of Unesco.
Who is man? the perennial answer of Islam from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Nasr Seyyed Hussein
Abstract: IN A WORLD EXHIBITION whose theme is Man and His World, La Terre des hommes, and which is devoted to a display of the different aspects of man’s life and activities, it is perhaps not futile to pause for a moment and pose the question who is this man to whom the world is said to belong, the world or the “earth” which he has conquered, yet is on the verge of destroying at the very moment when his conquest seems most complete. Modern man feels at home on earth, or rather would like to feel at home completely in
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Gaudry Roger
Abstract: M. LEROI-GOURHAN est professeur à la Sorbonne, membre du Comité permanent de la Commission d’ethnologie-anthropologie-préhistoire au Centre national de la recherche scientifique, membre du Conseil national de la recherche archéologique, membre de la Commission des fouilles à l’étranger au Ministère des affaires extérieures et président honoraire de la Société préhistorique française. Parisien, originaire de Bretagne, il est par vocation et profession un anthropologue dans le sens le plus large du mot, c’est-à-dire un citoyen du monde. Son activité débordante, une fructueuse carrière de trente ans toute consacrée à la recherche et à l’enseignement, et toujours d’ailleurs en plein essor, me
Unité et développement from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Houphouët-Boigny Félix
Abstract: PARMI LES NATIONS les plus avancées, nombreux, peut-être, sont les responsables politiques, les chercheurs, les penseurs et les artistes qui se sentent si proches de cet avenir qu’ils éprouvent le besoin de l’organiser dès maintenant. Et les peuples de ces pays sentent que la transition se fera pour eux sans difficulté majeure, de la vie qu’ils connaissent à celle que leur prépare l’incessante activité créatrice de l’humanité.
Man and his government from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Friedrich Carl J.
Abstract: The problem of the drift toward universal anarchy is as a matter of fact the problem of man and his government today. But if one had
The role and conduct of public enterprise from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Robson William A.
Abstract: I WILL BEGIN by explaining what I understand by public enterprise. It comprises all those activities on the part of public authorities which plan, control, initiate and organize economic and social development. It is convenient to divide the functions of the State into three categories. There are the traditional functions such as the maintenance of law and order, foreign affairs, and defence. These have been provided by the governments of all civilized countries for many centuries. There are the social services, such as education, public health, welfare, public housing, social insurance, and public assistance. These are relatively modern hi their
La diffusion de la connaissance technique, impetus de progrès from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Armand Louis
Abstract: IL EST DEVENU un lieu commun de dire que notre époque est celle de l’accélération des transformations des sociétés humaines, et que les changements survenus dans les domaines les plus divers des activités des hommes -depuis la guerre jusqu’aux spectacles destinés à leur information ou à leur délassement -se sont modifiés en un siècle plus que pendant les dix ou même vingt siècles précédents. Cette constatation impose, cependant, des réflexions de type très différent, embrassant l’ensemble des disciplines intellectuelles.
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Charbonneau Real
Abstract: L’EXPANSION DES COMMUNICATIONS, le problème de la faim, les progrès des sciences et des techniques, le développement de la création artistique, les activités cosmiques, l’accès la liberté et à la participation démocratique : autant de réalités auxquelles auront à faire face les générations futures, et dans lesquelles nous sommes déjà engagés. A ce moment de l’histoire humaine, l’éducation est d’une importance critique.
New trends in education from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Petersen K. Helveg
Abstract: THE 1960s can be called the decade of education, because a great number of changes and reforms have taken place and are taking place all over the world, in order to meet the increasing demands from a society which itself is changing rapidly. This growing awareness of the role of education meets with increasing demands for well educated and specialized people. Governments realize that they have an obligation to provide the means for an efficient educational system. It is characteristic that parliaments and governments really begin to listen when shown that expansion in education provides for economic growth. Generally speaking,
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Affleck R. T.
Abstract: PEOPLE IN MONTREAL feel that the enormous impact and enormous success of Expo in many ways transcends architecture as such. Professor Bruno Zevi in his life and his work is an example of an architect who transcends architecture. This one can see in a moment when one examines his activities as a historian, a scholar, a professor, a writer, a journalist, and a practising architect, planner, and consultant. He has been involved in Expo as a consultant to the Italian pavilion. He has been involved in direct education in a very meaningful way at the University of Rome as professor
Science and the world of the future from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Pauling Linus
Abstract: I SHALL DISCUSS the subject “Science and the World of the Future” in several ways. I shall first talk about some aspects of the progress of science during recent years, especially during the last fifty years, while I have been watching what has been going on and have also been taking part in it. I shall then attempt to make some efforts at a forecast about the progress of science in the future, what the impact of science on the world has been during recent decades, and, finally, what the impact of science might be on the world of the
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Krotkov G.
Abstract: PROTEINS HAVE BEEN attracting the attention of biologists for many years. Being extremely varied, complex, and unstable, these substances could be studied from many different points of view and using different techniques. However, a Chinese proverb says : “There are many paths to the top of the mountain, but the view is always the same.”
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Penfield Wilder
Abstract: In 1926 Burnet studied bacteriophage at the Lister Institute in London under Charles Martin, and thus began his investigations in the field of virology, which were
Immunological tolerance: from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Burnet Frank Macfarlane
Abstract: EVERYONE, doctor and layman alike, is aware of the current interest in the transplantation of organs from one human being to another. For reasons which are fairly obvious, the kidney is of special importance in this respect. I can well remember a patient I had when I was an interne in the Melboure Hospital forty-four years ago. She was a married woman in her early thirties with two young children – a very attractive, intelligent person. The previous year she had had a kidney removed for multiple stones and now it was evident from the X-ray that the same process was
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Robertson H. Rocke
Abstract: MOST OF us are aware that bacteria are very small and very numerous. We know that they are to be found everywhere. Some idea of their size may be gained if one considers that the number of bacteria that would normally be found in a colony the size of a typewritten full stop is approximately equal to the number of people that attend Expo on a good day. People, by and large, are aware that bacteria are both useful and harmful; harmful insofar as they can produce a host of diseases – in earlier days the most dreaded diseases and nowadays
Report to Metchnikoff from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Wood William Barry
Abstract: MAN’S WORLD teems with potentially lethal bacteria. It is not inappropriate, therefore, to consider on this occasion how phagocytic cells defend man, and other animals, against bacterial diseases. Evidence that phagocytes might serve as protective cells was first provided by an experiment on starfish larvae performed in 1882 by the Russian zoologist Elie Metchnikoff (Fig. 1). Here is his own account of the experiment:¹ One day when the whole family had gone to a circus to see some extraordinary performing apes, I remained alone with my microscope, observing the life in the mobile cells of a transparent starfish larva, when
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Blain Emile
Abstract: DEPUIS 1935, le professeur Stanislas de Sèze oriente ses travaux, ses recherches et son enseignement hospitalier vers l’étude des affections rhumatologiques. En 1946, il devient professeur agrégé. En 1953, il prend la direction du Centre rhumatologique Viggo Petersen de l’hôpital Lariboisière. Après avoir été pendant quelques années professeur d’histoire de la médecine, il est maintenant professeur de clinique rhumatologique à la Faculté de médecine de Paris. Auteur d’une vingtaine de volumes et de huit cents publications dans sa discipline médicale, il participe activement au mouvement rhumatologique dans le monde contemporain. Il fait partie de l’Académie nationale de médecine, et il
Introduction from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Leduc André
Abstract: » Cette citation, à mon point de vue, ne peut définer plus exactement le rôle joué par chacune
Creative thinking in science from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Yukawa Hideki
Abstract: What we call environment today is not simply the part of nature which happens to surround man. Man builds houses, manufactures clothing,
Quantum electronics from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Basov N. G.
Abstract: IT WOULD BE INTERESTING to know the prospects for the development of quantum electronics, but I do not think they can yet be foretold. In spite of its rapid development and large practical contribution, quantum electronics is not yet a formed scientific trend. In most cases, where the action of quantum devices depends on certain physical limits, these limits are not yet fixed. We cannot yet distinctly answer the simplest questions: are there any limits to the monochromaticity and coherence of radiation, and how do they depend on energy and radiation frequency? How far can we go into the high-frequency
We and the sun from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Troitskaya Valerie
Abstract: I SHALL DISCUSS some of the main scientific concepts of the problems of solar terrestrial relationships (STR), which originated with the first man-made satellites, and have been studied by the united and co-ordinated efforts of nations in several international enterprises during the last decade. I shall also mention some of the newborn practices in the organization of research in geophysics. Then I shall stress that for the future use of cosmic space it is most important to combine a wealth of continuous geophysical surface observations with direct measurements in cosmic space carried out by space probes. In connection with geophysical
Cosmology, enduring and changing features from:
Man and His World/Terres des hommes
Author(s) Bondi Hermann
Abstract: MY SUBJECT in this lecture is perhaps more concerned with the human reaction to cosmology rather than with cosmology itself, since I have become more and more fascinated with the way the human muid responds to changes and advances in science. Cosmology excites particularly strong, varied and interesting responses, for the subject matter is the structure and history of the universe as a whole. It is therefore not in the least surprising that people have been fascinated by it for thousands of years. Nor is it surprising that it belongs among the most speculative and rapidly varying subjects in the
2 The Art of Longing and Belonging from:
The Unmaking of Home in Contemporary Art
Abstract: In New York in 2003, Polish-American artist Krzysztof Wodiczko exhibited
Dis-Armor, a high-tech wearable communications instrument equipped with video camera, microphone, speakers, and LCD screens broadcasting stories of alienation and cultural displacement, designed to facilitate public testimony and eventual (re)integration into the social body. The same year, Mexico City–based Spanish artist Santiago Sierra represented Spain at the 50th Venice Biennale withWall Enclosing a SpaceandCovered Word, an installation that saw the national pavilion bricked in and accessible only through the back entrance, and only to those who presented a Spanish passport. In their diverse art practices, both
5. ‘Proceeding Without a Map’: from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Wheatley David
Abstract: ‘Art proceeds without a map’, Kathleen Jamie has written of the act of finishing a book: ‘It seems to me that if you know precisely what you’ve done, or are going to do, then it’s a project. Projects are not art.’¹ For all her sceptical embargo, the cartographical metaphor remains a compelling way of approaching Jamie’s poetry. Also with cartography in mind, Elizabeth Bishop wrote: ‘More delicate than the historians’ are the map-makers’ colors’, suggesting ways in which the business of cartography, tied though it is to the business of nation-building, achieves a non-political surplus of aesthetic delight.² Access to
9. Repetition, Return and the Negotiation of Place in The Tree House from:
Kathleen Jamie
Author(s) Davidson Lynn
Abstract: The Tree Houseasks how we can live more interactively and less destructively with nature. It explores the concept of place with its confluence of political, historical, communal and familial elements, and raises questions around the mythologising and division of land. My interest is in how Jamie employs poetic technique to demonstrate new ways of thinking about place: specifically, her use of intertextual repetends and how these repetitions negotiate between a connection to place and the need to advance our stories of belonging.
Book Title: Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stokes Patrick
Abstract: Is each of us the main character in a story we tell about ourselves, or is this narrative understanding of selfhood misguided and possibly harmful? Are selves and persons the same thing? And what does the possibility of sudden death mean for our ability to understand the narrative of ourselves?For the first time, this collection brings together figures in contemporary philosophy and Kierkegaard studies to explore pressing questions like these in the philosophy of personal identity and moral psychology. These essays will both advance important ongoing discussions of selfhood and expand the light that, 200 years after his birth, Kierkegaard is still able to shed on contemporary problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hb2
1 The Moments of a Life: from:
Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) SCHECHTMAN MARYA
Abstract: Over the past several decades narrative accounts of personal identity have become increasingly popular (see, e.g. Davenport 2012, MacIntyre 1984, Ricoeur 1992, Rudd 2012, Schechtman 1996, Taylor 1989). As the narrative approach has become more prominent it has, predictably, attracted its share of criticism, and there has been a fairly strong reaction against the idea that our lives can profitably be understood in narrative terms. The most common and forceful objection to this approach is often formulated as a kind of dilemma: either narrative theories really mean to claim that our lives are significantly like literary narratives or these views
8 Forgiveness and the Rat Man: from:
Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) LIPPITT JOHN
Abstract: It is surprising to write a couple of articles and receive a book in response. Yet such has been the flattering reaction to my own modest contribution to the debate about whether or not Kierkegaard should be classed as a ‘narrativist’ in any interesting sense (Lippitt 2005, 2007). Both John J. Davenport (the author of the book in question) and Anthony Rudd have in recent work sought to clarify the conception of ‘narrative’ that they see as operative in Kierkegaard (Davenport 2011, 2012; Rudd 2007b, 2008a, 2012). In doing so, both have revised and qualified their positions in various respects,
12 The Senses of an Ending from:
Narrative, Identity and the Kierkegaardian Self
Author(s) BEHRENDT KATHY
Abstract: One might suppose that life’s end is of special importance to narrativist views of the self, even if the specific nature of that import is opaque. Many philosophical discussions of the narrative self touch upon the end of life.¹ End-related terms and concepts that occur in these discussions include finitude, completion, closure,
telos, retroactive meaning-conferral, life shape and a closed beginning-middle-and-end structure. Those who emphasise life’s end in non-philosophical narrative contexts are perhaps clearer on its significance. The end is thought to play a key role in the story of a life, securing or enhancing the life narrative’s meaning or
Book Title: Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Pernin Judith
Abstract: This new book provides graduate students, scholars and professionals with critical and detailed insights into recent, yet significant, independent documentary makers and their varied works, practices and uses. Writing from a variety of areas and perspectives, the contributors to this book introduce innovative interpretations of under-studied contemporary subject matters and styles, as well as production, distribution and exhibition strategies, to the growing fields of documentary film and cross-media studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt16r0hnq
Introduction from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Pernin Judith
Abstract: The documentary field is arguably one of the most vibrant, challenging and creative areas in moving images today. In countries with well-established film and television industries, documentary production has been considerably revitalised since the late 1980s. From this period onwards, new distribution opportunities through specialised TV channels and circulation in both international film festivals and theatres have steadily ensured the vitality of both documentary TV programmes and feature-length documentaries. Simultaneously, the globalisation and popularisation of video and digital technologies around the world, and the concomitant development of video practices outside conventional cinema, have transformed the documentary form into a common
CHAPTER 2 No Going Back: from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Hughes John
Abstract: Documentary dealing with immigration and the migrant experience in Australia is a continuous thread running through Australian cinema, more recently eclipsed by works equally complex in their articulation of politics and culture, responding in different ways to Australia’s reaction to refugees and the troublesome obsession in Australian domestic political discourse with ‘border protection’. In what follows, we make reference to state-sponsored documentary of the early 1950s supporting immigration in post-war reconstruction, and to a number of recent documentary projects across a spectrum of contemporary forms, projects that respond to public debate around asylum seekers and refugees. Questions of editorial and
CHAPTER 3 A Space in Between: from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Deprez Camille
Abstract: The first international wave of activist documentary cinema began around the late 1960s and the early 1970s, including in India. This was a time when filmmakers leaned towards more personal arguments about political and social issues, when documentaries moved away from observation and favoured intervention in society and when a new documentary practice and style developed, determined by low budgets and striking content. Later, in the 1990s to 2000s, the digital revolution brought further developments to this mode of filmmaking worldwide. In India, along with the market-driven satellite TV boom and privatisation of the sector of the early 1990s, it
CHAPTER 6 The Survivor–Perpetrator Encounter and the Truth Archive in Rithy Panh’s Documentaries from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Morag Raya
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose an analysis of Rithy Panh’s documentaries,
S21: The Khmer Rouge Death Machine(2003),Duch, Master of the Forges of Hell(2012) and, to a lesser degree,The Missing Picture(2013), as what I term ‘perpetrator documentaries’ – that is, documentaries that focus on the figure of the perpetrator, while unravelling the long-time enigma of the ‘ordinary man turned perpetrator’ (Browning [1992] 1998: 159–89). I suggest that the survivor– perpetrator encounter staged at the heart ofS21andDuchis a major characteristic of Panh’s perpetrator documentary cinema, aiming at undermining the perpetrator’s ideology of extermination
CHAPTER 8 ‘We All Invented Our Own Algeria’: from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Petty Sheila
Abstract: Filmmaking in the Maghreb is often considered to be a relatively recent phenomenon, having been virtually born alongside Maghrebi nations’ independence from France (Tunisia and Morocco in 1957; Algeria in 1962). And while each country’s film industry has a distinct history, there are some similarities, one of which is an auteur-style production context, where filmmakers are generally responsible for all aspects of production, including financing and creation (Armes 2009: 5). The predominant film style in the 1960s and 1970s following independence veered toward realism and didacticism alongside a total commitment to the liberation struggle in ‘
cinema moudjahidor “freedom-fighter cinema”’
CHAPTER 13 Autonomous Navigation? from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Luciano Bernadette
Abstract: In recent decades, many Italian filmmakers have been turning to the documentary medium in response to the lack of commitment by public and private broadcasters to the production of programmes of cultural significance (Bertozzi 2008: 305). Unfortunately, the contestable funding available for their production (mostly local, regional or special interest) is limited, as is documentary distribution beyond the festival circuit. The emergence and evolution of the web documentary has provided an opportunity for new channels of distribution and increasingly foregrounds the role of the user/viewer in their engagement, interaction and negotiation with the reality documented. The key distinction between linear
Conclusion from:
Post-1990 Documentary: Reconfiguring Independence
Author(s) Pernin Judith
Abstract: The variety of case studies included here should not give the impression that this volume was conceived as a comprehensive overview of the issue of independent documentary in contemporary times. Rather, it aimed at prompting new interest for, and innovative academic perspectives on, the manifold significations of independent documentary production today.¹ Besides demonstrating the complexity, variability, pragmatism and paradoxes that this notion of ‘independent’ documentary entails, this collection of case studies also endeavoured to reveal important similarities among different practitioners in the field. In fact, the book chapters may be reshuffled to highlight other significant connections between them.
Chapter 1 Learning to Forget from:
Forgetting Differences
Abstract: Focused on France in the period 1560–1630, this study examines the impact in France of the monarchical call to extinguish the memory of the Wars of Religion on post-war national historiography and on the elite sense of History more generally. This policy of
oublianceis no doubt best known through the 1598 Edict of Nantes’s call, in the first sentence of its opening article:
Chapter 3 History without Passion: from:
Forgetting Differences
Abstract: In the article on the city Mâcon in his 1697
Dictionnaire historique et critique, Pierre Bayle devotes a long, convolutedremarqueto the question of whether he should include material about the Wars of Religion in his work.² He begins by paraphrasing the sixteenth-century edicts of pacification that urged the French to extinguish memories of the conflicts: “it would be desirable that the memory of all of those inhuman acts had been abolished in the first place, and that all the books that spoke about it had been thrown into the fire.”³ Those who hold that memories of the conflicts
Chapter 4 Tragedy as History: from:
Forgetting Differences
Abstract: Pierre Matthieu was certainly not the first to characterize the French Wars of Religion in terms of tragedy. The intersection between history and tragedy was a commonplace in French writing about the wars from all sides, and in many different genres. An anonymous 1562 “Advertissement à la Royne mere du Roy” complains to Catherine de Médicis about the treatment of the Huguenots, using a theatrical metaphor to warn the queen mother that she risks becoming the main character in the tragedy represented by a France at civil war:
‘Into Unknown Country’: from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Harland Faye
Abstract: Between the mid-nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, a transition occurred in modern fiction as writers became increasingly reliant on the visual. In his study
Fiction and the Camera Eye, Alan Spiegel argues that this new visual consciousness in the novel was symptomatic of the shift from a theological to a scientific understanding of the world, meaning that, in modern fiction, ‘truth’ can only be revealed through sensory experience rather than authorial intervention.¹ In an uncertain modern world, Spiegel suggests, an author is no longer an authority; the common practice of pausing action in the novel to allow for exposition was
Foreign Languages and Mother Tongues: from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Lamy-Vialle Elisabeth
Abstract: Mansfield’s relationship with France is expressed in many different ways in her short stories, one of which is the fundamental role played by the French language. Mansfield confronts English-speaking readers with a foreign language that constantly interacts with their mother tongue, creating an intriguing tension between the two languages, both of which are unsettled as a result, and lose their familiarity. This tension puzzles native speakers, whether French or English, albeit through different processes; the title of one of her most famous stories, ‘Je ne parle pas français’, through its very paradoxical nature, epitomises the issue of the interaction between
An Invitation to Dinner from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Singh Parineeta
Abstract: Today when my wife announced that she had invited Miss Fulton to dinner a spark of joy electrocuted me. I was flipping through the letters which had arrived with the morning post when I was startled by my wife’s voice. She had a way of moving as if her feet didn’t touch the ground and could enter a room without sound. This was something I liked about her when we first met, but recently this characteristic had been making me cagey. ‘You don’t mind, do you? Having another guest?’ she asked. I shook my head and circled my arm about
‘The Night of the Zeppelin’ by Tennessee Williams from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Kimber Gerri
Abstract: There are four characters in the play: Katharine Mansfield [
sic], John Middleton Murry, D. H. Lawrence and his wife, Frieda Lawrence. Mansfield and Murry’s friendship with the Lawrences is well documented elsewhere, and
Dorothy Brett’s Umbrellas (1917) from:
Katherine Mansfield and Translation
Author(s) Spalding Frances
Abstract: Behind this playful, exuberant image,¹ celebrating Lady Ottoline Morrell and her court at Garsington, lie complex emotions. At an early age, Dorothy Brett had suffered from hearing problems. It first became noticeable while she was a student at the Slade School of Art, then, as now, part of University College, London. The Provost of this prestigious institution, horrified by the fact that Brett and two friends had chosen to picnic on the hallowed lawn inside the courtyard, delivered a severe reprimand. ‘I’m sorry, I’m deaf,’ Brett replied, ‘I haven’t been able to hear a word you said.’²
CHAPTER 1 Theo Angelopoulos as Film Critic from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Chalkou Maria
Abstract: Most of the prominent filmmakers of New Greek Cinema – a politicised, auterist and art-oriented trend which dominated the Greek filmscape of the 1970s and 1980s – started their careers as assistant directors and film practitioners in the studios of the Greek commercial film industry of the 1950s and 1960s. Theo Angelopoulos, one of New Greek Cinema’s leading directors, followed, however, a different path and entered the field professionally as a film intellectual. After studying filmmaking in Paris, he returned to Athens and, from 1964 to 1967, worked as a film critic for the newspaper Δημοκρατική Αλλαγή (
Democratic Change), while between 1969
CHAPTER 2 Two Short Essays on Angelopoulos’ Early Films from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Ross Julian
Abstract: People come up with all sorts of ideas. Some even think it might be interesting to make a film director meet another film director. How nice would it be for two people to meet who have such a thing in common! In fact, it would be quite burdensome for a filmmaker. This is because we have nothing to talk about. All filmmakers have their minds filled with their own thoughts. We are left with nothing else to talk about. Although we would speak to critics and newspaper journalists whose job it is to lend us an ear, talking to other
CHAPTER 3 Generative Apogee and Elegiac Expansion: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Ford Hamish
Abstract: Michelangelo Antonioni’s early 1960s cinema has long been recognised as one of the key influences on Theo Angelopoulos’ filmmaking. The director himself has often been quoted as describing Antonioni’s epochal
L’avventura(1960) as a seminal moment in his development, reportedly watching it thirteen times while a student in Paris during the early 1960s (cited in Archimandritis 2013: 26). What exactly is it about Antonioni’s work that was so formative for Angelopoulos, and how can we see its effects play out in his own subsequent films? More than simply illustrating authorial influence, by examining the connections between these two filmmakers as
CHAPTER 6 Angelopoulos and Collective Narrative from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Jameson Fredric
Abstract: The easier way to explain our failure to grant Theo Angelopoulos the position he deserves in modern cinema – that he is less theoretically experimental than Godard or less politically ostentatious than Pasolini we can grant, but why we fail to love seeing his films more than those of Antonioni or Fellini remains something of a mystery – clearly lies in the character of modern Greek history, which is far less familiar than that of the western European countries. Greece has gone through a collective experience of which most other modern nations have only known bits and pieces: revolution, fascism, occupation, civil
CHAPTER 8 Megalexandros: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Georgakas Dan
Abstract: In critical commentaries on the work of Theo Angelopoulos, Ο Μεγαλέξανδρος (
MegalexandrosorAlexander the Great, 1980) is usually omitted from extended discussion. The film does not relate directly to the themes of the historical films that preceded it or to the voyage and border films that followed. In many respects, however,Megalexandrosis a template for Angelopoulos’ approach to politics and offers insight into the aesthetic choices that characterised his entire career.Megalexandrosseeks to join history, myth and current events seamlessly with a healthy disrespect for all things authoritarian. In that sense, the film, for all its difficulties,
CHAPTER 10 Cinematography of the Group: from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Murphet Julian
Abstract: It would be arguable that the gold standard of commercial narrative film, the ‘affection image’ or facial close-up, is a fatal error for any cinema of the Left; that Griffith’s pioneering innovations in the conventions of close-up cinematography were nothing less than a capture of the fledgling discourse of narrative cinema for the forces of sentimental reaction, leaving a legacy of bourgeois individualism lodged within the very grammar of the form. The conventions of eye-line matching and shot-reverse-shot montage, and the anchoring of emotional catharsis in the fetishised face as such, have tended to predispose commercial film narrative towards an
CHAPTER 14 An ‘Untimely’ History from:
The Cinema of Theo Angelopoulos
Author(s) Brown Precious
Abstract: An essential (albeit controversial) point should immediately be made clear: the work of Angelopoulos is not ‘modernist’ in the sense that Anglo-Saxon critics have given to this term to qualify, in art history, a time past, but still belonging to modernity.¹ From end to end, Angelopoulos’ work is, in fact, traversed by history. Yet modernity is defined precisely by our awareness of unsurpassable historicity. In the words of Jacques Rancière, we have entered into the ‘ age of history’. He adds that it is also the ‘age of cinema’, as this late art possesses a singular power of ‘historicity and
1 ENTANGLING THE MEDICAL HUMANITIES from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Callard Felicity
Abstract: The medical humanities are at a critical juncture. On the one hand, practitioners of this field can bask in their recent successes: in the UK, at least, what was once a loose set of intuitions – broadly about animating the clinical and research spaces of biomedicine with concepts and methods from the humanities – has become a visible and coherent set of the interventions, with its own journals, conferences, centres, funding streams and students.¹ On the other hand, the growth, coherence and stratifi cation of this heterogeneous domain have raised the spectre of just what, exactly, the medical humanities is growing
into.²
5 GETTING THE MEASURE OF TWINS from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Viney William
Abstract: Stephen Jay Gould, the biologist and author of
The Mismeasure of Man, once joked that were he an identical twin raised separately from his brother they could ‘hire ourselves out to a host of social scientists and practically name our fee’.¹ In order to monetise Gould’s fantasy, one would want a form of twinship that could operate according to evidential, experimental, somatic and circumstantial ideals. And Gould admits that he and his brother would need to be viewed as ‘the only really adequate natural experiment for separating genetic from environmental effects in humans’.² With respect to Gould’s light-hearted intentions, this
6 PAPER TECHNOLOGIES, DIGITAL TECHNOLOGIES: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Kassell Lauren
Abstract: As the digital revolution takes hold, historians have begun to reflect on the ways in which paper technologies – the codex, notebook, printed book and their indexes, annotations and tools of ordering – have come into being and contributed to the production of knowledge. Objects that were once considered evidence for historical inquiry have become their subjects.¹ The same reflexivity applies to notions of evidence, observation and objectivity, often labelled as facts and data, which have themselves been historically studied.² This chapter is about what happens when historians use digital technologies to understand paper technologies. It draws on my work to digitise
8 AFTERWORD: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Waugh Patricia
Abstract: In styles that range from the performatively paratactic and experimental, to scholarly sobriety and sharp sociocultural critique, these chapters engage issues concerning the contemporary uses and forms of experiment and the building and distribution of kinds of evidence in relation to new concepts and practices of experimentation within the contemporary biomedical sciences. They explore some less obvious ways in which knowledges and practices forged in this new ‘megaphone’ science resonate far beyond conventional spaces of research and are deeply and reciprocally entangled with the embodied self-fashioning of individual selves and group identities.¹ Everywhere, not only in postmodern theory or art,
9 PICTURING PAIN from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Biernoff Suzannah
Abstract: In styles that range from the performatively paratactic and experimental, to scholarly sobriety and sharp sociocultural critique, these chapters engage issues concerning the contemporary uses and forms of experiment and the building and distribution of kinds of evidence in relation to new concepts and practices of experimentation within the contemporary biomedical sciences. They explore some less obvious ways in which knowledges and practices forged in this new ‘megaphone’ science resonate far beyond conventional spaces of research and are deeply and reciprocally entangled with the embodied self-fashioning of individual selves and group identities.¹ Everywhere, not only in postmodern theory or art,
11 TOUCH, TRUST AND COMPLIANCE IN EARLY MODERN MEDICAL PRACTICE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Klestinec Cynthia
Abstract: This scene appears just before the climax of the widely read playwright Ben Jonson’s
The Alchemist.¹ Although Face and Subtle have proven themselves to be cut-throats – the word play is evident – they are also engaged, along with a third character named Dol, in a joint venture, one brokered on an exceedingly precarious notion of trust (that will evaporate in the final scenes of the play). There are references to poxes and bloodletting elsewhere inThe Alchemist, but Jonson uses the ordinary experience of barbering, and the familiar relationship between barber and patient, to ponder the dangers of the razor. By
14 TOUCHING BLIND BODIES: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Olsén Jan Eric
Abstract: Changing ideas on the nature of and relationship between the senses in nineteenth-century Europe constructed blindness as a disability in often complex ways. The loss or absence of sight was disabling in this period, given vision’s celebrated status, and visually impaired people faced particular social and educational challenges as well as cultural stereotyping as poor, pitiable and intellectually impaired. However, the experience of blind people also came to challenge received ideas that the visual was the privileged mode of accessing information about the world, and contributed to an increasingly complex understanding of the tactile sense.
17 MORPHOLOGICAL FREEDOM AND MEDICINE: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Dolezal Luna
Abstract: The notion that the body can be changed at will in order to meet the desires and designs of its ‘owner’ is one that has captured the popular imagination and underpins contemporary medical practices such as cosmetic surgery and gender reassignment. In fact, describing the body as ‘malleable’ or ‘plastic’ has entered common parlance and dictates common-sense ideas of how we understand the human body in late-capitalist consumer societies in the wake of commercial biotechnologies that work to modify the body aesthetically and otherwise. If we are not satisfied with some one aspect of our physicality – in terms of health,
23 VOICES AND VISIONS: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Saunders Corinne
Abstract: A properly critical medical humanities is also a historically grounded medical humanities. Such historical grounding requires taking a long cultural perspective, going beyond traditional medical history – typically the history of disease, treatment and practice – to trace the origins and development of the ideas that underpin medicine in its broadest sense – ideas concerning the most fundamental aspects of human existence: health and illness, body and mind, gender and family, care and community.¹ Historical sources can only go so far in illuminating such topics; we must also look to other cultural texts, and in particular literary texts, which, through their imaginative worlds,
24 VICTORIAN LITERARY AESTHETICS AND MENTAL PATHOLOGY from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Garratt Peter
Abstract: In
What Good Are the Arts? (2005), a polemic aimed at shredding many longstanding conceptions of art and aesthetic judgement, the literary critic John Carey briefly discusses a bibliotherapy project established over a decade earlier in West Yorkshire by John Duffy. This was a project in which patients with depression, stress and anxiety disorders were given the opportunity to participate in reading groups, book advice surgeries and other literacy activities, having been referred to the service by mental health practitioners – an alternative to the anti-depressant medication commonly prescribed to such patients by GPs. The service users in question were ‘helped
26 TRANS-SPECIES ENTANGLEMENTS: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Herman David
Abstract: In Rupert Isaacson’s
The Horse Boy, a 2009 memoir about Isaacson’s and his spouse’s experiences raising their autistic son, Rowan, Isaacson suggests that Rowan has a special connection with animals. Thus, in his portrayal of an interaction between Rowan and Betsy, the horse Rowan rides on a neighbour’s farm, Isaacson recounts how
28 MEDICAL MIGRATION AND THE GLOBAL POLITICS OF EQUALITY from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Bradby Hannah
Abstract: Employing doctors and nurses who were trained overseas has been standard practice since the inception of the British National Health Service (NHS) in 1948. However, by the twenty-first century, recruitment of doctors from Africa was being compared with the slave trade in terms of its exploitative and damaging effects: ‘current policies of recruiting doctors from poor countries are a real cause of premature death and untreated disease in those countries and actively contribute to the sum of human misery.’² The assertion that employing foreign doctors was causing poor health in those doctors’ countries of origin was echoed in two reports
32 THE ROOTS AND RAMIFICATIONS OF NARRATIVE IN MODERN MEDICINE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Bates Victoria
Abstract: Narrative became a concept of great versatility and fluidity in the second half of the twentieth century, configuring multi-dimensional understandings and meanings in healthcare. The literary and social theorist Martin Kreiswirth speaks of ‘a massive and unprecedented eruption of interest in narrative and in theorizing about narrative’ in the period,³ which resulted in stories and fragments of stories gaining significant conceptual traction in many discourses and practices. Not until narrative began to be credited with such as multi-disciplinary capacities were claims for a pluripotential role in medicine explicitly formulated.⁴
35 CARE, KIDNEYS AND CLONES: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the Critical Medical Humanities
Author(s) Atkinson Sarah
Abstract: Care as a concept is central to any engagement with health, ill-health and the practices that aim to prevent, mitigate or cure, and the term itself is mobilised in a variety of different ways and at a variety of different scales. The vibrancy of the medical humanities as a relatively new field of inquiry has principally derived from the elaboration of experiential accounts of differential and dynamic conditions of health. Given this particular emphasis, attention to care and caring practices has predominantly concerned the nuanced and complex relations of care at an interpersonal and proximate scale. However, in contemporary landscapes
Chapter 3 Catherine Malabou: from:
French Philosophy Today
Abstract: In the first two chapters we saw that Badiou and Meillassoux each make a particular, determinate human capacity the gatekeeper of full-orbed humanity: for Badiou it is the capacity for affirmative thought and for Meillassoux it is the capacity to think the eternal principle of factiality. Such host capacity² accounts of the human struggle both with defining humanity so as not to exclude some of those least able to raise their voices in protest and also with the subtleties of an anthropocentrism from which they consider themselves freed. We also saw that, despite their claims to materialism, neither Badiou nor
2 Pre-Islamic ‘Arabless-ness’: from:
Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: The analysis thus far presents the spectre of an ‘Arabless’ pre-Islamic Arabia which may appear an extreme reaction to the familiar notion of Arabs in Antiquity, but we pose these radical challenges as there is a need to provoke critical questioning of the idea of Arabness and the timeworn practice of labelling peoples ‘Arab’ without considering how they related to senses of Arab community. An array of groups inhabited pre-Islamic Arabia and some of their descendants would come to identify themselves as Arabs, but outsiders’ evidence and anachronistic paradigms about ‘original Arab characteristics’ have not been able to give a
Imagining and Reimagining the Arabs: from:
Imagining the Arabs
Abstract: By unfastening Arab identity from conventional cultural stereotypes, Bedouinism and ancient pre-Islamic Arabian bloodlines, this book sought to reveal the complexities and changing nature of historic Arab identity. The book was intended as an invitation to begin rethinking Arabness afresh, and by highlighting the shortcomings inherent in the static, monolithic manner in which historical Arab communities have often been discussed, our analysis sought to reappraise historic Arabness as an ethnicity, tracking its evolution and contextualising its development with close attention to the sociopolitical and ‘cultural stuff’ factors that sustain ethnogenesis.
1 Introduction: from:
Levinas, Ethics and Law
Abstract: The truest violence of law is not attributable to its errors, but to its essence. As a structure of meaning and a source of norms, framed through general and abstract standards, law has an especial, inevitable capacity to misrecognise ‘the other’ at the precise moment that the other is in most need of its justice. The significance of the other, upon which Levinas speaks with unparalleled philosophical authority, is instead personal, unique, singular, and fundamental in informing our understanding of ourselves, our desires and our duties. This book addresses law’s difficult task of responding meaningfully to the type of ethical
2 Glory, Spectacle and Inoperativity: from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Abbott Mathew
Abstract: Agamben concludes his essay on Deleuze with a prediction that is also a demand. He writes: ‘
Theôriaand the contemplative life, which the philosophical tradition has identified as its highest goal for centuries, will have to be dislocated onto a new plane of immanence.’¹ He goes on to say that the dislocation of theoria – the root of which is the Greektheoros, meaning ‘spectator’, but which is often translated as ‘contemplation’ – will require us to rethink the status of political philosophy and its difference from ontology. Of course, such a rethinking is exactly what he was pursuing at
3 On Property and the Philosophy of Poverty: from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Bignall Simone
Abstract: Despite his interest in a non-sovereign and anomial politics, Agamben makes scant reference to thinkers in the anarchist tradition.¹ However, particularly with the turn to questions of government and economy in his latest works, he delves increasingly into themes at the heart of anarchist philosophy: the renunciation of property and the practice of poverty as a means of living outside of determination by law and state; the negative and positive moments of transformation variously associated with revolt or revolution; the ‘idea of communism’ and the figure of ‘the Ungovernable’. It is noteworthy how, at the point in
The Time That
6 An Alogical Space of Genetic Reintrication: from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Clemens Justin
Abstract: In an extraordinary recent encounter, the French thinkers Alain Badiou and Jean-Claude Milner divide strenuously over the sense of contemporary political action. For Milner, we must now recognise that ‘the heart of the question of politics’ is ‘the issue of bodies and their survival’.² Accepting this ‘hard kernel’ of the political entails that we adopt a sceptical position vis-à-vis political action, in which a certain kind of pragmatism should order our actions. For Badiou, by contrast, such a position is tantamount to an abandonment of political militancy as such. As is well known, he instead proposes a reconstruction of ‘the
11 Law and Life beyond Incorporation: from:
Agamben and Radical Politics
Author(s) Vatter Miguel
Abstract: One of the central concerns of Agamben’s
Homo Sacerproject is to identify the traits of a life that escapes being captured by law.¹The Highest Poverty: Monastic Rules and Form-of-Lifeprovides one of the most sustained treatments of this problem by arguing that the Franciscan movement offers the first exemplar of an extra-juridical ‘form-of-life’,² at once rejecting the connection between law and life that characterises sovereignty, and developing a radically anti-consumerist relation to the world. According to Agamben, the Franciscan ideal of giving up on all ownership (designated as ‘highest poverty’) radically calls into question the internal relation between
CHAPTER 6 “A Vicious Circle”: from:
Border Crossing
Author(s) Burry Alexander
Abstract: Anton Chekhov’s “Ward no. 6” (1892) has inspired a large and varied body of hypertexts in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. The story’s basic premise of a psychiatric doctor who is incarcerated in the same mental hospital he used to run proved extraordinarily generative for Russian writers in the following century, especially given the notorious Soviet practice of labeling political dissidents insane. Valerii Tarsis and Venedikt Erofeev, among others, reflect this aspect of the story in their works.¹ Other major themes of “Ward no. 6,” such as the unstable boundary between madness and sanity, psychological isolation from other people, and
CHAPTER 7 A Slap in the Face of American Taste: from:
Border Crossing
Author(s) White Frederick H.
Abstract: In 1915, the author and playwright Leonid Andreev debuted his play
He Who Gets Slappedat the Moscow Art Theater. In the following years, this dramatic work about a vanquished intellectual-turned-circus-clown, more than any of his twenty other plays, achieved spectacular success among American audiences, first as a play in English translation, then when adapted for the silver screen, then as a novel and, finally, as an opera. Andreev had argued in his “Letters on the Theater” that cinema would become the place for action and spectacle, diminishing the popularity of the realist theater. Not surprisingly then, a love affair,
CHAPTER 11 “The Soviet Abroad (That We Lost)”: from:
Border Crossing
Author(s) Boele Otto
Abstract: One piece of information with which we like to startle our students when teaching film and adaptation theory is that at least half of all films produced worldwide can trace their origin to some literary text. Statistically, one out of two movies we watch is not a “film,” but a “book-to-film adaptation.”¹ Usually, we like to add another piece of information that is equally revealing, namely that quite often successful and popular films are based on mediocre and forgotten novels. How many people are aware of the fact that it was a short story by Daphne du Maurier (1952) that
Chapter 4 Modernism and Theory from:
In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: In the last section of Chapter 3 I suggested that Sontag and modernism are two interconnected intellectual objects. From the perspective of her visual persona, melancholia transfigures Sontag into a beautiful modernist ruin. This chapter explores the connection from the vantage point of the archive. We shall see how, in the archive, Sontag’s fidelity to modernism becomes, in fact, her relation to theory, and she re-emerges as a mind among the theorists. The chapter illuminates the understudied role and place of Sontag in the critical movement called ‘theory’.
Chapter 6 Aura, Dread and the Amateur from:
In the Archive of Longing
Abstract: Sontag’s progression towards Benjamin is strange, fascinating. More than finding him, she finds herself. Encountering Benjamin translated into a clear sense of belonging to a theoretical tradition; above all, it gave her a more nuanced narrative of the critical act.
Chapter 5 Return: from:
Seamus Heaney
Abstract: Winner of the most prestigious prize for poetry in the United Kingdom, the T. S. Eliot Prize, along with the
Irish Times“Poetry Now” Award,District and Circleboth returns Heaney to his home district of Bellaghy in Northern Ireland and signifies his continued commitment to representing the suffering of others globally by incorporating the titles of two of London’s Underground lines in the wake of the bombings there in July, 2005. The title poem bespeaks his continuing interest in underground, subterranean spaces evinced from the beginning of his poetry by dwelling in the London Underground and interacting with actual
Chapter 1 About Time from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: The region it’s passing through seems equally unchanged by the passage of time; though in fact
Chapter 2 Abstract Form from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: For a poet, the notion that abstract form – not ‘meaning’, but pure
shape– can play a key role in what she writes is seductive. On the one hand, it implies the possibility of developing and experimenting with the kinds of sophisticated formal patterning that we traditionally associate with verse, such as the way stanzas ‘chunk’ a ballad’s story, or a rhyme scheme creates a network of meanings that crisscross and link up within a poem. On the other, it also appeals to something more primitive. For it suggests that poets can – and perhaps even should – do
Chapter 3 Drawing the Line from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Igor Stravinsky’s
Rite of Springopens with one of the most famous solos in the orchestral canon. In fact, it starts with just one note, itself instantly recognisable within the Western tradition: a single high C on the bassoon. This is of course a wind instrument and its reedy, wooden timbre evokes the wind, reeds and woods that make up the endless Russiantaiga(see Fig. 3.1).¹
Chapter 6 The Meaning of ‘Meaning’ from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: We resist new forms of meaning. We’re even resistant to the
ideaof them. It simplyisdifficult to conceptualise ways of understanding that we haven’t thought through before, or that differ from our usual ways of thinking. This is something we have toworkat: as all school pupils can attest. To ‘get your head round’ something: even the cliché conveys a sense of effortful rearrangement. From such practical difficulty flow the many religious, philosophical or ‘commonsensical’ beliefs – some of them notorious – which in turn reinforce these resistances.¹
Chapter 9 Closer Still: from:
Lyric Cousins
Abstract: Richard Wagner’s operas are often characterised by his own expression,
Gesamtkunstwerk, which English musicologists translate as ‘total artwork’. But Wagner himself only ever used the term in two essays, both published in 1849. ‘Art and Revolution’ and ‘The Artwork of the Future’ were both written from political exile; the first in Paris and the second in Zürich. The still young-ish Wagner (he was born in 1813) had supported the revolutions of 1848 and was an active, if not especially important, participant in the 1849 May Revolution in Dresden. As a result, he was to spend almost a decade in exile
Introduction: from:
From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Like Merleau-Ponty, we can speak of signs. There is one contemporary sign that we must consider: globalization. The expansion of globalization is limitless. The sign “globalization” signifies a will to establish control over the whole world and apparently other planets (“interplanetary tourism”). In other words, globalization wants to place the earth within a sphere with a determinate shape, within an enclosure called “the globe.” As it pursues its conquest of other cultures and lands, globalization acts in the name of peace. If globalization could speak and it would speak in English, it would say that “Capitalism has brought more people
1 A New Possibility of Life: from:
From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: As we announced in the Introduction, the problem of the worst violence is a limitless reaction to fundamental violence. However, as a limitless reaction, the worst violence arises from the essential nature of a limit. The essence of all limits is divisibility, which means, to say this immediately, that any attempt to reach a haven unscathed by violence, any attempt to reach a place behind an impervious wall, is impossible. Now, by means of the essential divisibility of any limit, we shall be able to present the formal structure of the problem. As we shall see in a moment, the
9 Three Ways of Speaking, or “Let Others be Free”: from:
From Violence to Speaking Out
Abstract: Foucault, Derrida, and Deleuze have recognized the originality of the idea of the performative (Austin 1962).¹ Chronologically, Foucault comes first. In his 1969
The Archaeology of Knowledge, he turns to the “speech act” as “one last possibility, and the most probable of all, of defining the statement [l’énoncé]” (Foucault 1972: 82).² After describing the performative, Foucault concludes that a “bi-univocal relation” between the statement and the performative cannot exist (Foucault 1972: 83). There is one primary reason, according to Foucault, why the performative cannot define the statement. Even if one says that an illocutionary act is complete, one has to
Chapter 6 Foucault’s Deleuzian Methodology of the Late 1970s from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Protevi John
Abstract: Now, the study of this micro-physics presupposes that the power exercised on the body is conceived not as a property, but as a strategy, that its effects of domination are attributed not to ‘appropriation,’ but to dispositions, maneuvers, tactics, techniques, functionings; that one
Chapter 7 Deleuze’s Foucault: from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Bankston Samantha
Abstract: Before all else, we need to acknowledge a previously held, reprehensible position: for a long time Deleuze’s book on Foucault² seemed to consist of a dogmatic rigidity that did not manage to break into the enthusiasm of what Foucault said. From cover to cover the book seemed
ridiculousto us. It seemed far, so far from Foucault’s actual work, and with a menacing sort of passion we thought aboutdemonstratingthat in his book Deleuze had committed nothing more than a work of fiction. The reception of Deleuze’s presentation at the conference, “Michel Foucault, Philosopher,”³ only reinforced these poorly conceived
Chapter 9 Deleuze and Foucault: from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Patton Paul
Abstract: This chapter sketches an account of the relationship between Deleuze and Foucault that seeks to delve beneath the superficial view that they were fellow travelers in philosophy as in politics. It is inspired by the view that the more closely one looks at their work the more one sees differences between them. Before turning to some of their differences, I note some of the essential facts about their relationship.¹
Chapter 15 Biopower and Control from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Nail Thomas
Abstract: What is the relationship between Foucault’s concept of biopower and Deleuze’s concept of control? Despite the similarities between these two concepts, there is not a single scholarly article that solely thematizes this question, nor a comparative survey of the answers given so far. This essay aims to fill this lacuna. Despite the lack of a full-length interrogation of this question, scholars have taken up several different positions on the relationship between these two concepts. While some distinguish the two concepts based on the content of what they act on (biopower on life vs control on economics), others distinguish them based
Chapter 18 Foucault and Prison from:
Between Deleuze and Foucault
Author(s) Rabinow Paul
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze:So you want to begin with the GIP. You will have to double-check what I tell you. I have no memory; it is like trying to describe a dream; it’s rather vague. After ’68, there were many groups, very different groups, but necessarily compact ones. It was post-68. They survived; they all had a past. Foucault insisted on the fact that ’68 had no importance for him. He already had a history as an important philosopher, but he was not burdened with a history from ’68. That is probably what allowed him to form such a new type
3 Sensational Realism: from:
Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: In its emphasis on verisimilitude and its depiction of social relations, Colson Whitehead’s
The Intuitionistis a realist novel and thus deviates substantially from the more experimental set-ups of Castillo’s and Ondaatje’s narratives discussed in Chapters 1 and 2. WhileThe Mixquiahuala Letters’ andThe Collected Works of Billy the Kid’s respective forms emphasise and enact incompleteness, processuality, and divergence (a series of disconnected narrative and poetic vignettes in Ondaatje’s case; a set of letters that present the reader with three divergent story variants in Castillo’s), nothing like that holds for Whitehead’s novel.The Intuitionistcan be described as a
Conclusion: from:
Narrative and Becoming
Abstract: To rehearse: what has been established under the heading of differential narratology is becoming as it pertains to narrative, narrativity in constant variation generating ever new variants of narrative; the virtual dance of narrative differentials producing actual, numerically differentiated narratives; the intensive sensations and forces of transcendental Narrative (affects, percepts, forces) bringing about the extensive states of affairs and networks of empirical narratives (events, existents, plots). In short, becoming, the dynamic and continuous process of selecting and gathering heterogeneous elements to be expressed, has been revealed as the ontologically primary virtual realm of any given actual narrative. But this has
[Part II: Introduction] from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Abstract: In Chapter 4, ‘A History of the Method: Examining Foucault’s Research Methodology’, Hardy provides a survey of the key research methodologies developed by Foucault across his life and work. For Hardy, it is important to distinguish between the particular methods that Foucault actually used for undertaking research (say, for example, collecting data through archival research) and what could be more broadly termed ‘Foucault’s methodology’ as such: namely, the particular theoretical frameworks he created to order and interrogate his collected data. To this end, Hardy focuses his attention mainly on the two innovative theoretical frameworks that Foucault is most famous for:
Chapter 4 A History of the Method: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Hardy Nick
Abstract: Since Foucault started publishing in the early 1960s much ink has been spilled by both his detractors and supporters alike.¹ An interesting point to note, however, is that each tends to assign to Foucault’s work a level of coherence and/or integration that is overall quite difficult to substantiate. One of the most famous of the supportive texts is by Dreyfus and Rabinow (1982), gained from their discussions and interviews with Foucault during his annual research trips to the University of California, Berkeley. Dreyfus and Rabinow appoint to Foucault’s work a definite methodological evolution that clearly separates his ‘archaeological’ and ‘genealogical’
Chapter 5 Derrida, Deconstruction and Method from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Phillips John W.
Abstract: The problem of the relationship between words and things and, within the word, the difference between word and idea, has exercised more than twenty-five centuries of thought. The problem in grasping what is at stake in these relations and the differences that animate them lies in the fact that the only way to approach them is through the inherited concepts themselves: word, thing, idea. Couplings like form and matter, form and meaning, syntax and semantics, signifier and signified all owe their senses (we must not I suppose exclude sense and reference) to this ancient framework. Words like ‘sense’ and ‘word’
Chapter 7 Schizoanalysis: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Buchanan Ian
Abstract: There is no straightforward way to say what schizoanalysis is. The problem is not so much that the question is not answered by Deleuze and Guattari or that it is somehow unanswerable; rather the problem is that it has several answers. Unwilling to provide any kind of ‘formula’ or ‘model’ that would enable us to simply ‘do’ schizoanalysis as a tick-box exercise in which everything relates inexorably to one single factor (e.g. the family), which is what they thought psychoanalysis had become, Deleuze and Guattari observe a quite deliberate strategy of providing multiple answers to the questions their work raises.
Chapter 10 Foucault: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Besley A. C. (Tina)
Abstract: Western philosophy has had a continuous engagement with the problem of subjectivity and with the self as a locus of both consciousness and experience – a question that is deemed to be open to understanding, analysis and philosophical reflection – ever since the first moments of institutional philosophy in Ancient Greece. The notion of the self has been an object of inquiry, a problem and a locus for posing questions concerning knowledge, action and ethics since Antiquity. Plato and Aristotle in different ways inquired of the self in terms that we understand today as personhood and personal identity, viewing the
Chapter 12 Hélène Cixous and the Play of Language from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Puri Tara
Abstract: For Hélène Cixous, words are powerful, mellifluous things capable not only of evoking memories and fantasies, but creating the world and the self. Her writing constantly plays with language, breaking it up and recomposing it, widening its gaps, showing its fractures, filling it up with puns, and inventing new portmanteau words. It is this irrepressible energy that makes so much of her writing epiphanic in its effect. Her formulation of
écriture féminine, as articulated inThe Newly Born Womanand ‘The laugh of the Medusa’, has everything to do with the potentiality that resides in words.
Chapter 15 Deleuze and the Image of Film Theory from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Holohan Conn
Abstract: In the two books he wrote on the cinematic image, Gilles Deleuze proposes a fundamental break in the history of film form. This break occurred, he declares, sometime around the end of the Second World War and finds its first expression in the work of Italian neorealist film-makers such as Roberto Rossellini. In Rossellini’s images of aimless characters wandering through the ruins of a bombed-out Europe, Deleuze uncovers a decisive rupture with the logic of classical cinema, a rejection of the possibility for action upon which classical narrative depends.
Cinema 1: The Movement-ImageandCinema 2: The Time-Imagewere published
Chapter 17 Institutions, Semiotics and the Politics of Subjectivity from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Peters Michael A.
Abstract: If I begin with Pierre-Félix Guattari it is because I believe he embodies some of the themes and motifs that define the intellectual movement that we name ‘poststructuralism’ and because in recent applications, developments and celebrations of the work of this group of intellectuals in the English-speaking world Guattari has been eclipsed by other more prominent thinkers and the radical nature of his work has been overlooked. Yet Guattari’s work illustrates and is emblematic of a number of distinctive aspects about the wider movement. He was consumed with the question of subjectivity, a political activist, strongly interventionist and his innovations
Chapter 18 ‘Here and Nowhere’: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Sotiropoulos George
Abstract: An apparently paradoxical fact in the reception that poststructuralism has met is that it has been simultaneously criticised for subverting liberal democracy and for being just another specimen of bourgeois thought, the only consensus being, it seems, in charges of ‘obscurantism’, ‘relativism’ and ‘nihilism’. There is of course also a kind of irony involved when poststructuralism is chided as ‘bourgeois’ by the vanguards of Marxist orthodoxy, who over the last decades have condemned every genuine insurrection against bourgeois order, from May ’68 to December 2008 in Greece. A revolutionary rhetoric does not make someone ‘revolutionary’ by default nor is critique
Chapter 20 Politics in-between Nihilism and History from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Enaudeau Jacques
Abstract: In ‘Energumen capitalism’, the review of
Anti-Oedipus, Lyotard (1977) hits three birds with one stone. First, he is looking for other dissident interlocutors than those ofSocialisme and Barbarie– the group with whom he shared the Marxist critique of Stalinism, Trotskism and Maoism, as well as militant activism, in particular during the Algerian war. Then, he sets out to guide the radicalism of Deleuze and Guattari back to a less simplistic conception of institutions (family, State, money), which supposedly immobilise the nomadism of flows. Finally, Lyotard starts to suspect his own ‘critical’ position. The history of revolutions and of
Chapter 21 The Receptions of Poststructuralism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: One of the most famous figures of poststructuralism, Jacques Derrida, died on 8 October 2004. Over the following days, weeks and months, newspapers and other media the world over contained reactions, responses, comments and obituaries to him. Many of these were surprisingly hostile; they were often irreverent and disrespectful; and often also mocking, joking and scornful. Some were starkly abusive and aggressive. In fact, many obituaries, reactions and responses to the news of Derrida’s death attacked or slandered not only his work but also cast aspersions on his character and personality. A large proportion made crass jokes about whether we
Chapter 22 From Liberation Theory to Postcolonial Theory: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Poststructuralism
Author(s) Rooney Caroline
Abstract: This chapter aims to address the ways in which the transition from liberation theory to postcolonial theory entails a historical intellectual encounter with poststructuralism, one that may be termed ‘the poststructuralist turn’. However, in broaching this question, the intention is not to propose that postcolonial theory is determined by its poststructuralist influences in a unilateral manner. That this constitutes a particular area of contention becomes apparent in a context where seminal postcolonial theorists attract attention in the light of their being highly influenced by European theory. For instance, Bart Moore-Gilbert, in discussing Homi Bhabha’s
The Location of Culturestates that
Ordinary Language Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Jolley Kelly Dean
Abstract: Ludwig Wittgenstein revered the work of Gottlob Frege and kept tabs on the location of obscure works of Frege in the Cambridge library. J. L. Austin translated Frege’s
Foundations of Arithmeticinto English and made it a part of the philosophy curriculum at Oxford. I mention these facts because the tradition of Ordinary Language Philosophy (OLP) began with Frege. Frege’s three essays in hisLogical Investigations, along with his ‘On Concept and Object,’ were the first essays of OLP. Beginning the story of OLP with Frege helps to bring certain features in the tradition rightly to the front: in particular,
Pragmatism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Rescher Nicholas
Abstract: Pragmatism as a philosophical doctrine traces back to the Academic skeptics in classical antiquity. Denying the possibility of achieving authentic knowledge (
epistēmē) regarding the real truth, they taught that we must make do withplausible information(to pithanon) adequate to the needs of practice. However, pragmatism as a determinate philosophical doctrine descends from the work of Charles Sanders Peirce. For him, pragmatism was primarily a theory of meaning, with the meaning of any concept that has application in the real world inhering in the relations that link experiential conditions of application with observable results. But by the ‘practical consequences’ of
Philosophy of Language: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Burge Tyler
Abstract: The last half of the twentieth century in philosophy of language has seen, I hazard to say, some of the most intense and intellectually powerful discussions in any academic field during the period.¹ Yet the achievements in these areas have not been widely appreciated by the general intellectual public. This is partly because they are abstract and difficult. But it is also partly a reflection of the lamentably weak lines of communication between philosophy and the rest of culture, especially in America. In my view, this situation developed during the professionalization of philosophy in the positivist period. Indeed, positivism’s harsh
Philosophy of Mathematics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Avigad Jeremy
Abstract: The philosophy of mathematics plays an important role in analytic philosophy, both as a subject of inquiry in its own right, and as an important landmark in the broader philosophical landscape. Mathematical knowledge has long been regarded as a paradigm of human knowledge with truths that are both necessary and certain, so giving an account of mathematical knowledge is an important part of
epistemology. Mathematical objects like numbers and sets are archetypical examples of abstracta, since we treat such objects in our discourse as though they are independent of time and space; finding a place for such objects in a
Philosophy of Logic from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Marion Mathieu
Abstract: Although it has sometimes been described since Frege as the pursuit of truth (Quine 1982: 1), logic is in fact the study
Philosophy of Religion from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Christopherson Erik S.
Abstract: Analytical philosophers in the twentieth century have produced a rich literature that includes the philosophy of religious language and practice, analyses of divine attributes, arguments for and against the existence of God, and arguments over the significance of religious diversity, religious experience, and religious values. Theists, atheists, agnostics, and adherents to both Christian and nonChristian religions have engaged in a fruitful exchange on these topics with all the hallmarks of analytical philosophy: an emphasis on conceptual clarity, the use of analyses with examples and counter-examples, concentrated arguments about whether concepts of what exists (God, the soul, the afterlife) may be
Hermeneutics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Grondin Jean
Abstract: Hermeneutics serves to characterize a broad current in contemporary Continental philosophy that deals with the issues of interpretation and stresses the historical and linguistic nature of our world-experience. In contemporary thought, it is mostly associated with the thinking of Hans-Georg Gadamer (1900–2002) and Paul Ricoeur (1913–2005), who situate themselves in the hermeneutic tradition of thinkers such as Wilhelm Dilthey (1833–1911) and Martin Heidegger (1889–1976). All these authors unfolded a distinct
philosophicalunderstanding of hermeneutics that drew on the more ancient tradition of hermeneutics, which was traditionally understood as an art of interpretation (ars hermeneutica, Auslegungslehre) that
Postmodernism from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Scott Charles E.
Abstract: As I begin this chapter, I confess to having reservations about the term, ‘postmodernism.’ My reservations have less to do with the philosophical irrelevance of the term that some scholars have alleged, and more with the suffix, -
ism; the ways of thinking and writing that ‘postmodern’ names are characterized by departures from thought that is governed by categories and their classifications. This tradition emerged in part as a critique of the ability of categorical thinking to recognize and address appropriately many of the perceptions, processes of thought, experiences, and things that we encounter. This chapter will discuss alternatives to such
Aesthetics from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Davey Nicholas
Abstract: Whitehead described Western philosophy as a footnote to Plato’s. As recent philosophical tradition has shown, some footnotes have established texts of their own. Aesthetics is one such footnote. Whereas Plato banished aesthetics to the realm of
doxa, Continental philosophy stands witness since the late nineteenth century to a renaissance of aesthetic thought. Now, not only has the discipline achieved a philosophical autonomy but aesthetics has come to haunt those philosophies that marginalize the apparent and the subjective. If earlier forms of aesthetics feted order, recent forms of twentieth-century Continental philosophy are attracted to the sublime and its disruptive power. The
Indian Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Dalvi Rohit
Abstract: At least since Hegel, Indian thought has been excluded from the proper domain of philosophy. Despite the vigorous affirmation by the German Romantics of the value of Sanskrit poetry and literature, and the celebration by philologists like Max Mueller of the cultural and linguistic proximity of Sanskritic civilization to Europe, the European philosophical tradition, with perhaps the exception of Schopenhauer, has rejected the idea of an Indian ‘philosophy.’ Classical Indian ‘philosophy’ was not regarded as at par, in terms of rigor and rationality, with the products of European civilization. Indian thinking was devalued as being thoroughly religious in character or
African Philosophy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Twentieth-Century Philosophies
Author(s) Janz Bruce B.
Abstract: African philosophy’s development in the twentieth century is both relatively recent, traceable to some seminal texts, and ancient, drawing on cultural forms that stretch back in time and space. This seeming contradiction can be understood if we realize that philosophy itself is ambiguous. It designates on one hand a set of reflective practices rooted in culture and reason, which rigorously and critically explicate a life-world, and on the other a discipline in the university, with a set of codes, standards, recognized practitioners, and customs. More than almost any other site of philosophy, African philosophy has struggled with the similarities and
Introduction: from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Stone Alison
Abstract: Nineteenth-century philosophy can be broadly characterised by several themes: the conflict between metaphysics and religious faith on the one hand and the empirical sciences on the other; a new focus on history, progress and evolution; new ideas of individuality, society and revolution; and ever-increasing concerns about nihilism.¹ This volume provides a re-examination of nineteenth-century philosophy in terms of these and other themes distinctive of the period.
4 The Hermeneutic Turn in Philosophy of Nature in the Nineteenth Century from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Huneman Philippe
Abstract: In the nineteenth century the natural sciences underwent a radical transformation. The paradigms of many of the disciplines that we know today, such as geology, chemistry, thermodynamics, cell biology or evolutionary biology, were established in this period. Prior to this period, knowledge of nature was a part of philosophy, as the examples of Leibniz or Descartes show. Moreover, the Kantian critique of metaphysics from the
Critique of Pure Reasononwards had a profound impact on philosophers, especially in Germany. Kant dismissed the traditional objects of philosophical inquiry such as God, the world and the soul, which for Kant were to
8 Philosophising History: from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Connelly James
Abstract: This chapter focuses on key themes, problems and concepts in the thinking of historians and philosophers about the nature and status of historical thought, practice and self understanding in the nineteenth century. It covers the concept of history in relation to Hegel and German idealism, the British idealists, the development of historicism and the issues surrounding the
Methodenstreit. This story is also that of the other disciplines, such as psychology, sociology, economics and theology, with which history stands in relation.
11 The Unconscious in the German Philosophy and Psychology of the Nineteenth Century from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Cronin Ciaran
Abstract: The adjective ‘unconscious’ designates a quality that can be found in psychical processes such as imagining, remembering, thinking, feeling, desiring, wishing and acting. The processes which exhibit this quality differ from those with the quality ‘conscious’ in that the former are not present in the current field of consciousness but nevertheless remain psychologically effective, indeed, often far more so than the processes which have the quality of being conscious. The substantive, the ‘unconscious’, expresses the fact that psychological phenomena are not confined in principle to conscious experiences but are profoundly shaped by unconscious forces. In psychoanalysis, this concept also designates
14 Theory and Practice of Revolution in the Nineteenth Century from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Blackledge Paul
Abstract: The word ‘revolution’ was first used in an unmistakably modern sense in the eighteenth century to describe the American and French Revolutions. And although it had begun to gravitate towards something like this modern meaning in England in the wake of her seventeenth-century revolutions (Williams 1976; Hill 1991; Hobsbawm 1962: 74–5), John Dunn is right that ‘in a few short months, in the year of 1789, the people of France set their stamp ineffaceably on a political idea which has loomed over the history of the world ever since’ (Dunn 2008: 17). In fact, as Krishan Kumar points out,
15 Nihilism in the Nineteenth Century: from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Gillespie Michael
Abstract: The term ‘nihilism’ has been used to denote a philosophical concept or position, a psychological or sociological state or mood, a doctrine or agenda for political action and a cultural condition or movement. Moreover, the connotations of the term within each of these areas are multiple, complicated and contested. It is thus not easy to define the term or to determine the nature of the phenomenon that the term describes. This difficulty is exacerbated by the fact that the term has been principally used as a pejorative by opponents to characterise a condition, doctrine, or movement that they fear, disagree
16 Repetition and Recurrence: from:
The Edinburgh Critical History of Nineteenth-Century Philosophy
Author(s) Carlisle Clare
Abstract: They want to put metaphysics in motion, in action. They want to make it act and make it carry out immediate acts. It is not enough, therefore, for them to propose a new representation of movement; representation is already mediation. Rather, it is a question of producing within the work a movement capable of affecting the mind outside of all representation; it is a question of making movement itself a work … (Deleuze [1968] 1994: 8)
1 Rancière and the Disciplines: from:
Rancière and Film
Author(s) Bowman Paul
Abstract: The question of the relation ‘Rancière and
film’quietly presupposes another relation: ‘Rancière and filmstudies’. This leads to a bifurcation: what is the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work onfilm, and – quietly – therefore also, the character, status and significance of Rancière’s work in relation to the discipline or disciplines of filmstudies? I say ‘disciplines’ because film studies both is and is notonediscipline. No discipline is univocal. No discipline is singular – other than in the eyes, or the fantasy, of the most reductive, taxonomical and exterior gaze – a gaze from outside of the field in
6 Aesthetic Irruptions: from:
Rancière and Film
Author(s) Lerma Mónica López
Abstract: Combining black humour, thriller and horror film, Alex de la Iglesia’s
La Comunidad (Common Wealth2000) tells the story of a gruesome community of neighbours who have signed a contract to share the money that another of their neighbours has won in thequiniela(football pools) after his death. However, their plans are frustrated when a new arrival, the estate agent Julia, finds the dead man’s money and decides to keep it for herself. From then on, the community will do anything (including murder) to retrieve the money, resulting in its own destruction. When asked about this bleak portrayal of
Book Title: Research Methods for Cultural Studies- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Pickering Michael
Abstract: This new textbook addresses the neglect of practical research methods in cultural studies. It provides readers with clearly written overviews of research methods in cultural studies, along with guidelines on how to put these methods into operation. It advocates a multi-method approach, with students drawing from a pool of techniques and approaches suitable for their own topics of investigation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b2nv
Introduction from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Pickering Michael
Abstract: There has long been a reluctance to bring any explicit discussion of methods and methodology into cultural studies. This can be explained in various ways. We can see it first of all as connected with the field’s renegade character, and its conscious dissociation from established academic disciplines. Developing and adhering to a particular set of methods was considered to be characteristic of those disciplines and somehow compromised by an unexamined notion of empirical enquiry. Cultural studies has preferred to borrow techniques and methods from established disciplines without subscribing to any disciplinary credentials itself. Empirical enquiry has been treated with suspicion
CHAPTER 1 Experience and the Social World from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Pickering Michael
Abstract: Experience is central to cultural studies. It is a key category of analysis within the field, and has been drawn on as concrete material for many of the issues which cultural studies has pursued. It has also become a recognised dimension of research practice itself. Its value has nevertheless been contested, both as a form of research data and as an analytical concept. This was particularly the case during the ascendancy of poststructuralism in cultural studies, but more broadly how it should be used as a resource and what place it has as evidence are questions that have generated considerable
CHAPTER 3 Investigating Cultural Producers from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Davis Aeron
Abstract: This chapter is in four parts. Each of the first three parts offers a brief overview of the more common research approaches used to investigate cultural production. These are broadly categorised here as political economy, textual analysis and sociological/ethnographic work. The fourth part then concentrates on the third of these and the practical considerations involved. In both parts the discussion and examples draw on my own experiences of researching cultural production in the news industry and within the subcultures of financial and political elite networks. At the time of writing I have interviewed over 250 professionals employed in journalism, public
CHAPTER 4 Investigating Cultural Consumers from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Meyer Anneke
Abstract: Consumption in its many forms is not a new phenomenon (Storey 1999), but since the end of the Second World War, consumption in industrialised countries has proliferated to such an extent that the phrase ‘consumer society’ was coined. Arguably,
culturalconsumption has especially increased because technological advances have led to the development and spread of new forms of media and information and communication technologies (ICTs). These have in turn generated new forms of cultural texts and made cultural consumption more accessible. The term ‘cultural consumer’ refers to those who consume cultural texts or engage in cultural practices involving consumption. Key
CHAPTER 6 Why Observing Matters from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Nightingale Virginia
Abstract: Observation-based research relies on interactions and exchanges between researcher and research participants, and it is this expanded vision of observation – observation that explicitly designs and accounts for the impact of the research process on the fieldwork experience and the data it produces – that the chapter explores. It is based on the premise that communication is a material process in the sense that it is something that can be observed, recorded, documented, analysed and written about. Fieldwork involves finding ways to transform the fleeting character of communication and social relations into durable analysable forms. Other research practices – for
CHAPTER 10 Engaging with History from:
Research Methods for Cultural Studies
Author(s) Pickering Michael
Abstract: Engaging with history is a popular experience. It is popular in the sense that it is widespread and has huge appeal. It involves a variety of activities that include visiting museums and heritage sites, watching history programmes on television, collecting antiques and compiling a family history. Over the past thirty years, the development of popular interest in the past, in these and many other ways, has grown up alongside the development in academic life of a sceptical questioning of the value of historical enquiry and a drastic suspicion about the very grounds on which history is represented. There is a
Book Title: François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference-A Critical Introduction and Guide
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): GANGLE ROCCO
Abstract: Critiques philosophical Difference as a whole and the 3 specific models treated by Laruelle: Nietzsche-Deleuze, Heidegger and DerridaSituates Philosophies of Difference within the rest of Laruelle's work and contemporary European thoughtExplains the key shift from philosophy to non-philosophy which makes Laruelle so intriguing to philosophers todayShows how Laruelle impacted on the work of Deleuze and Badiou and the Speculative Realism movement
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b3gr
4 The Heideggerean model of Difference: from:
François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: If for Laruelle Nietzsche establishes the standard model of philosophy as Difference, Heidegger marks the full taking-stock of Difference in relation to the Western tradition as such and draws out the consequences of its immanent critique as the culmination of metaphysics. Whereas Laruelle characterises the Nietzschean model of Difference as one of ‘Idealism’, he designates the Heideggerean model as that of ‘Finitude’. Laruelle’s reading of Heidegger follows the late Heidegger in treating the thought of the ontological difference of Being and beings as still determined and thus relatively constrained by the history of metaphysics. Thus for the late Heidegger, as
5 The Derridean model of Difference: from:
François Laruelle’s Philosophies of Difference
Abstract: Laruelle opens his chapter on Derrida with a quintessentially Nietzschean image, that of the tightrope-walker. Derrida is characterised by Laruelle as being perhaps the most trenchant critic of the Western decision for logocentrism and metaphysics, while nonetheless reinstating that decision despite himself, being unable ‘to take the final step’:
Book Title: Poetic Language-Theory and Practice from the Renaissance to the Present
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Jones Tom
Abstract: Surveys a variety of linguistic and philosophical approaches to poetic language: analytical, cognitive, post-structuralist, pragmaticProvides readings of complete poems and places those readings within the wider context of each poet's workCombines theory and practiceIncludes a Glossary of Terms, Biographical Notes on Poets and Suggested Further Reading and Further Reading (by Theoretical School)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b4vx
CHAPTER ONE Introduction from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The argument of this book is that poems encourage their readers to experience language as a dual-aspect phenomenon, as something known and understood in two different ways simultaneously. Poems make the language in which they are made appear contingent, and necessary, at once: they make their writers and readers feel a justness or truth in the poem’s language, at the same time as making those writers and readers question just how that part of the poem’s language (a rhyme, an image, the weight on a syllable, and so on) could produce the reactions it produces. The language in poems seems
CHAPTER THREE Selection: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The previous chapter suggested that some poetic choices of figure can question the boundary between figurative and literal meaning. This chapter will explore a comparable phenomenon within the vocabulary of poetry more broadly considered. Even when poets are not being metaphorical, they still make choices of vocabulary, they still engage in acts of selection. One of the great pleasures poetry sometimes offers is exhilarating correctness, the use of exactly the right form of words. There are also pleasures, or interesting effects, at least, associated with incorrect or peculiar or unsettling choices of words. This chapter will ask what such effects
CHAPTER FIVE Equivalence: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: Poetry can be a reflection upon what it is to be the kind of being that uses language, a reflection upon how humanity is characterised by being linguistic. This reflection, in the form it takes in several of the poems read in this book, is critical, in as much as it emanates from a crisis, a deeply unnerving realisation about the nature of being a language-using being. This unnerving realisation, I suggest, is the realisation that the language people use, and which can feel to its users so deeply intertwined with the natures of the objects it refers to, the
CHAPTER SEVEN Spirit: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: The tradition I sketched in the run-up to my discussion of ‘The Idea of Order at Key West’, that of identifying a spark or charge in poetic language, is sometimes manifested in psychologistic forms in the twentieth century: the energy expressing itself in poetic language is not that of a divine ordering spirit, nor the character of a people, nor a latent ‘chemical’ power in the language itself, but in the psyche of the poet concerned. The surrealist and poet André Breton thought this way. Adopting the language of the poet-critic Pierre Reverdy, who said that one ‘creates … a
CHAPTER TEN Figure: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: Metaphor, as will already be evident from ‘Figure: Walter Ralegh’, has been thought characteristic of poetic language. A recent book on the subject states that ‘metaphor has always been, and still is, the main device of poetry’.¹ Several important accounts of metaphor have been offered from diverse quarters in recent decades, and I want to engage with three of them in this chapter: the cognitive account of metaphor as conceptual mapping; Donald Davidson’s insistence that the meaning of a metaphor is just its literal meaning; Paul de Man’s argument that knowledge about the operations of the mind has the structure
CHAPTER TWELVE Equivalence: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: Thomas A. Clark’s
The Path to the Seacontains several poems, or sequences of poems, most of which were published separately as pamphlets. Clark’s poems reflect on and are also made by perceptions of an environment, one that is given scale and significance by the quotidian yet metaphysically rich act of walking. This interest in walking, in measuring the environment by human and poetic modes of perception, places Clark close to other poets who figure in this book, such as Wordsworth and Creeley. These are long-standing concerns for Clark: earlier sequences such as ‘Through White Villages’ and ‘From Sea to
CHAPTER THIRTEEN Epilogue: from:
Poetic Language
Abstract: Early in the introduction to this book I quoted the Czech structuralist Jan Mukařovský’s itemisation of the supposed distinguishing formal features of poetic language, which came to the conclusion that, ‘finally, not even
individuality, the emphasized uniqueness of linguistic expression, characterizes poetic language in general’.¹ Whilst originality or uniqueness might characterise some instances of poetic language, only function will identify all instances. But some kind of qualification may be made to Mukařovský’s assertion. It might not be the emphasised uniqueness of expression that makes the deployment of (for want of better terminology) a highly conventional phrase poetic, precisely because the
CHAPTER 3 Auto/biography as a Research Method from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Evans Mary
Abstract: The first question that should engage our attention is that of why we wish to do research. The issue is in no sense straightforward, since ‘doing research’ is a common mantra of academic life, and is, of course, an activity in which we are all expected to partake.
Not‘doing research’ is nowadays an unacceptable position for academics; to be described as ‘not research active’ implies (and indeed invokes) isolation in the distant steppes of the academic world, in which the only possible redemptive activity is teaching undergraduates. So let us not assume that ‘doing research’ is always, and simply,
CHAPTER 4 Oral History as a Research Method from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Summerfield Penny
Abstract: Oral history has a salience and familiarity at the beginning of the twenty-first century that is both popular and academic. The oral telling of public and personal histories is an everyday event on radio and television and in film, as well as occupying a recognised place within the scholarly practices of numerous academic disciplines, including anthropology, education, history, geography, political science and sociology.¹ Oral history offers several benefits to the discipline of English. Interviews with literary authors, as well as recordings of personal experiences of cultural phenomena such as theatre-going and reading, are available for study in collections in, for
CHAPTER 6 Discourse Analysis from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Griffin Gabriele
Abstract: Discourse analysis is concerned with the investigation of language,¹ both written and oral,² as it is actually used (as opposed to an abstract system or structure of language). It is different from textual analysis (see Chapter 9 in this volume) in that it assumes from the outset that language is
invested, meaning that language is not a neutral tool for transmitting a message but rather, that all ‘communicative events’ (van Dijk 2001: 98) – whether these be, for instance, readings of novels, plays, poetry, a notice on a billboard, a conversation, or an interview – constitute ‘a particular way of talking about
CHAPTER 9 Textual Analysis as a Research Method from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Belsey Catherine
Abstract: How important is textual analysis in research? What is it? How is it done? And what difference does it make? My contention will be that textual analysis is indispensable to research in cultural criticism, where cultural criticism includes English, cultural history and cultural studies, as well as any other discipline that focuses on texts, or seeks to understand the inscription of culture in its artefacts. And since textual analysis is in the end empirical, I shall set out to exemplify my methodological account with a single instance. The project is to imagine that Titian’s painting of
Tarquin and Lucretiaconstitutes
CHAPTER 12 English Research Methods and the Digital Humanities from:
Research Methods for English Studies
Author(s) Deegan Marilyn
Abstract: Since the first version of this volume appeared, much has changed in the uses of digital methods in the humanities, and what was previously known variously as humanities computing, digital scholarship, or ICT in the humanities has been broadly subsumed under the newer term, digital humanities. What digital humanities actually is has been the subject of intense discussion since it was pronounced as ‘the next big thing’ by William Pannapacker at the 2009 MLA conference, where ‘digital humanists (as they are often called) stole the spotlight’.²,³ Since then, the number of sessions at the MLA that treat of digital humanities
Book Title: A Glossary of Political Theory- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Faulks Keith
Abstract: The premise underlying the book is that politics cannot be studied without theory, in which case the more concrete and relevant the theory, the better. Presenting theory in an abstract fashion makes it daunting for students who can find it difficult to see the links between theory and practice. The definitions in this glossary therefore relate political ideas to political realities (i.e. everyday controversies) in an attempt to make them as lively, stimulating and accessible as possible. Terms are selected based upon the concepts most regularly used in teaching.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b52h
Introduction from:
A Glossary of Political Theory
Abstract: Why then are students of politics so nervous about theory? One reason has to be that political theory has traditionally been presented in an abstract fashion. By this I don’t mean that theory looks at concepts and movements in
generalterms. It is perfectly true that theory is not simply concerned, for example, with democracy in the UK in the 1990s, but with
Book Title: Christian Philosophy A–Z- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Rauser Randal D.
Abstract: This volume covers a broad historical sweep and takes into account those non-Christian philosophers that have had a great impact on the Christian tradition. However, it concentrates on the issues that perplex Christian philosophers as they seek to think through their faith in a philosophical way and their philosophical beliefs in the light of their faith. Examples of the topics discussed are the question of whether and how God knows the future, whether we actually know that God exists, and what Athens has to do with Jerusalem. The leaders of the recent revival of Christian analytic philosophy, especially Alvin Plantinga, Nicholas Wolterstorff, William Alston, and Robert Adams are also included.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b61g
Introduction from:
Christian Philosophy A–Z
Abstract: Fifty years ago a scan of bookshop shelves would have been as likely to find a dictionary of terms for alchemy as one for Christian philosophy. Indeed, one might well have thought that, though of course there were some Christian philosophers then, they were doomed to the same fate as the dodo. But, in a stunning reversal, today Christian philosophy is among the most vibrant areas of philosophy. While the story of that change is still being written, there are a few key factors. On the negative side, the last fifty years have seen the demise of some historically formidable
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy-From Pre-history to Future Possibilities
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: Part V: Contacts and Colonialisms
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b6rb
Introduction: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Isakhan Benjamin
Abstract: The twentieth century was a great success for democracy, but every victory was hard won. On the world stage, democracies had to fend off credible threats from various forms of fascism before 1945 and then communism until 1989. Inside each democracy, a myriad of civil society actors and peoples’ movements struggled for every gain of liberty, for every civil right and for an ever widening franchise. During the twentieth century, in countries all over the world, people took risks, pushed old laws and entrenched elites to their limits, and put their lives on the line in order to claim their
Chapter 4 Ancient China from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Hui Victoria Tin-bor
Abstract: Both Western and Chinese analysts often presume that democracy is unique to Western civilisation and alien to the Chinese. The roots of Western dynamism are, in turn, assumed to derive from the political complexity of Europe, whereas those of Chinese stagnation from political unity. However, as this chapter illustrates, China in fact experienced fluctuations between unification and division in history. Intense international competition in the classical era (770–221 BCE) gave rise to citizenship rights defined as state– society bargains over the means of war. Although the development of Chinese citizenship was aborted by Qin’s successful unification of the Warring
Chapter 5 Israel and Phoenicia from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Stockwell Stephen
Abstract: The Greeks made major contributions to the development of democracy not only as an idea, but even more significantly as a set of practical laws and pragmatic institutions that evolved over centuries to translate the sovereignty of the people into a relatively stable and effective system of government. However, while the Greek invention of democracy is often treated as an indisputable truth, recent work suggests that democracy may have antecedents. Martin Bernal stirred a major controversy with his book,
Black Athena, and its claims to establish the ‘Afro-Asiatic’ roots of classical Greek society (Bernal [1987] 1991). A later paper sought
Chapter 6 Early Greece from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Raaflaub Kurt A.
Abstract: Greek democracy emerged in either late sixth-or mid-fifth-century¹ Athens, with strong arguments supporting both dates (Raaflaub
et al. 2007). However,demokratia, ‘rule by the people’, was the result of a long evolution that affected other communities as well (Robinson 1997). This chapter has two purposes. One is to trace the beginnings of this evolution from the earliest extant evidence on Greek communities, institutions and political reflection (in Homer’s epics and early laws) to the enactment of the first knownpolisconstitution in Sparta and the breakthrough of political and constitutional thought in Solonian Athens. The other purpose is to explain
Chapter 7 Athens from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Phillips David J.
Abstract: The term
dēmokratiamost probably dates back to 508/7¹ (Ehrenberg 1950; Hansen 1986, 1991: 69–71; Sealey 1973). At that time in the Athenianpolis(city-state), the aristocratic Kleisthenes ‘took the people (demos) into his faction’ (Aristotle [332 BCE] 1984: 20.1; Herodotus [430 bce ] 1972: 5.66.2). He did so in order to gain the upper hand in his struggle for political power with the aristocratic and Spartan-backed Isagoras who had been elected as the eponymousarchonfor 508/7. These two men contested power in the aftermath of the tyranny of the Peisistratids (545– 511/10), which had curbed the opportunities
Chapter 8 Rome from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Matyszak Philip
Abstract: Although this chapter takes a broader view, democracy in Rome is generally considered in the context of the mid-to late Republic. The view that the oligarchy exercised
de factocontrol of the voting process in this latter period has been challenged from the 1990s onward (Millar 2002). The ensuing debate has exposed extensive deficiencies in what is known about the democratic process in Rome (Sandberg 2001). Recently the focus has shifted to the role of the army, a focus which will be retained in this chapter (Southern 2007). It will also be stressed that throughout the history of Rome, voting
Chapter 9 Islam from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Sadiki Larbi
Abstract: Nothing is more perilous than trying to wed Islam and democracy, or engaging in endless discussions on Islam’s compatibility with democracy via a framework designed within the Western episteme. This episteme assumes that Islam and democracy are two distinct and autonomous systems and, in its worst iterations, it asserts that they are antithetical to one another. Since the European Enlightenment, the scholarly discussion of Islam and democracy has been one-sided. Western intellectuals condemn religion to the margins and Enlightenment’s singular practice of rationality denounces religious foundationalism. Fixity, singularity and determinacy have all been attributed to religion, especially Islam, and cited
Chapter 12 The Christian Church from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Hittinger John P.
Abstract: In the classic account of democracy, rule by the majority formally establishes a regime as democratic. Any such organisation is characterised as allowing the rise of those who are neither rich nor distinguished, but who utilise their equality to bring together a numerical majority of supporters (Aristotle [350 BCE] 1980: 3.11; Simon 1951: 76). Democracy emerges as a cluster of concepts and practices sustained by a set of ideas about human equality and popular sovereignty. Participation in actual self-rule is also an aspirational standard of democratic movements. It is commonly acknowledged that many aspects of modern democracy arise from beliefs,
Chapter 16 The American Revolution from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Shankman Andrew
Abstract: To consensus era historians of the 1950s, democracy in late colonial British North America scarcely needed to be explained. Colonists were middle class, jealous of their liberties and determined to assert their rights in powerful colonial legislatures (Brown 1955; Greene 1963). Since the 1970s this story has been dismantled; it is now clear that democracy was not inevitable in the region that became the United States. Between 1720 and 1760, from Massachusetts to Georgia, the colonies became more British in their political practices, social relations and cultural tastes. Each colony produced ruling elites who wielded economic power and monopolised political
Chapter 19 Native Americans from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Johansen Bruce E.
Abstract: Europe did not discover America, but America was quite a discovery for Europe. For roughly three centuries before the American Revolution, the ideas that made the American Revolution possible were being discovered, nurtured and embellished in the growing English and French colonies of North America. America provided a counterpoint for European convention and assumption. It became, for Europeans in America, at once a dream and a reality, a fact and a fantasy, the real and the ideal. To appreciate the way in which European eyes opened on the ‘new world’, we must take the phrase literally, with the excitement
Chapter 26 1989: from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Volten Peter M. E.
Abstract: The transitions to democracy in Eastern and Central Europe from 1989 onwards not only came as a big surprise both inside and outside the region, they were also characterised by incredible speed and by a radical challenge to the prevailing political cultures during the pressing phase of consolidation. The two companion concepts and processes – transition and consolidation of democratic transformation – are clearly culture-bound and dependent on the historical and present context of the country or region involved. This was particularly the case in Central Europe, where cultural and contextual confusion sometimes led to misunderstanding and friction. Westerners who showed their
Chapter 28 Women’s Suffrage from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Sowerwine Charles
Abstract: Historians have often treated the introduction of women’s suffrage as a narrative of linear progress. In this view, women’s exclusion from the suffrage resulted from ageold prejudices, which, gradually and inevitably, gave way to modern egalitarian ideas. Recent scholarship, however, has complicated this story by emphasising the intractability of the issue. Enlightenment and republican discourse talked in universal terms, but constructed the citizen as public man in opposition to private woman, creating a feminine ‘other’ in order to create a ‘universal’, which was in fact gendered, masculine (Sowerwine 2010: 19). The idea of equal rights and the subordination
Chapter 36 China since Tiananmen Square from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) He Baogang
Abstract: In the wake of the 1989 Tiananmen Square event, the Chinese government has both tightened its authoritarian rule and introduced a wide variety of local mini-democratisation practices, including village elections, township elections, intra-party democracy, participatory and deliberative forums, and participatory budgeting. While these do not jeopardise the monopoly of the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) on political decision making, they illustrate major trends and characteristics of Chinese democratisation and highlight the Chinese hybrid model of democratisation. This chapter focuses on official democratic mechanisms and institutions initiated at the local level, rather than on more general aspects of democratisation, such as rights
Chapter 37 Islam since 9/11 from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Hashemi Nader
Abstract: In international affairs, 11 September 2001 was a watershed day. This day will forever be associated with the terrorist attacks in New York and Washington, DC that resulted in the deaths of 3,000 people. Over the course of the next decade more than 7,500 American, British and other allied troops would lose their lives in the wars and occupations of Afghanistan and Iraq. Civilians, too, have been killed and, while exact figures are unknown and often ignored, the widely accepted conservative estimate is that more than 130,000 Iraqi and Afghan citizens have lost their lives during this same time period
Chapter 39 Transnational Democracy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Anderson James
Abstract: Transnational democracy is an idea whose time has come, but it does not, as yet, have much substance. It is a thing of the future more than the present, but its future is far from assured. Such democracy as we presently enjoy it is mostly national, rather than transnational, and representative, rather than participatory. It is largely monopolised by elected ‘representatives’, rather than politically active citizens and almost entirely circumscribed by the territoriality of national state borders. The social communities, relations and processes beyond and across state borders that would constitute transnational democracy largely elude democracy’s remit. ‘Globalisation’ and
Chapter 40 Digital Democracy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Loader Brian
Abstract: Political communication and the means of its production and diffusion have always been a significant factor shaping the nature of democratic politics. From the oral tradition of the
Agora, through the pamphlets and newspapers of early modern Europe, to the prevalence of the mass broadcast media in the twentieth century, the communicative power of citizens has been influenced by their access to and use of the prevailing media technologies. It was no surprise, therefore, that the emergence of new information and communication technologies (ICTs), in the form of digital networks such as the Internet, once again raised the prospect of
Chapter 42 Deliberative Democracy from:
The Edinburgh Companion to the History of Democracy
Author(s) Rostbøll Christian F.
Abstract: Over the last twenty years deliberative democracy has become the most discussed theory of democracy. The term was coined by Joseph Bessette in 1980, but academic writing on deliberative democracy really picked up in the early 1990s (Bessette 1980; Hansen 2004). While the idea of giving deliberation a core role in democracy has roots throughout the history of democracy, the most important contemporary theoretical sources for deliberative democrats are the works of Jürgen Habermas and John Rawls (Habermas 1984, 1989, 1996; Rawls 1971, 1996). The theory of deliberative democracy is often directed at two related deficiencies of actual existing democracy,
Chapter II Objects and Events from:
Form and Object
Abstract: But the universe
is notmerely existent; it ispresent. Being (and comprehension) is not enough to account for the fact that things arethere.
Chapter IV Living Things from:
Form and Object
Abstract: A living thing is an event that intensifies something novel in the universe. The emergence and development of living organisms is not a rupture that
introducessomething novel into the universe, nor is it the mere continuation of physico-chemical novelties which occurred when there were no existent living things anywhere in the universe. Even though living things are local events, which are mere fractions of the objective universe, living things are also events that considerably intensify the universe. Living things augment the universe more than formally (by simply adding new things). Living thingsgive valueto the universe (by adding
Chapter VIII Arts and Rules from:
Form and Object
Abstract: What exactly is a
rule?
Chapter IX Culture from:
Form and Object
Abstract: In
Beyond Nature and Culture,¹ Philippe Descola claims that the idea of ‘culture’ arose from a tension between at least two of the 164 meanings of the term catalogued by Alfred Kroeber and Clyde Kluckhorn.² Culture, in the singular, is defined as a distinctive characteristic of humanity, in a sense close to ‘civilisation’. Cultures, in the plural, are defined as a plurality of human modes of organisation. In 1871, Edward Burnett Tylor stated that: Culture or Civilisation, taken in its wide ethnographic sense, is that complex whole, which includes knowledge, belief, art, morals, law, custom, and any other capabilities and
Chapter XI Economy of Objects from:
Form and Object
Abstract: Utilitarianism was a minority position in nineteenth-century English philosophy. After many twists and turns, it gradually spread across all branches of modern knowledge: economics, animal ethics, morality, political science, and law. This ‘consequentialist’ moral theory focuses on an action’s consequences, and not on an action’s intention or intrinsic value. The theory recommends acting so that every being’s well-being increases. It is not egoistic (since it does not
Chapter XII Values from:
Form and Object
Abstract: This is a world where nothing is more beautiful than another thing, where truth is no different from fiction, where fictions, illusions, and contradictions have some actual value, and where what is evil is not negative and subtracts nothing from the world. Each thing is
equallyin the world. This is clearly the formal world of Book I. Not only is this world possible, but it is the onlyworld. Nonetheless, this world is not the objective and evential universe in which we live together as objects exchangeable and replaceable with other objects. It is
Chapter XIII Classes from:
Form and Object
Abstract: The universe is both
valuedandclassified. Valuation and classification are the two fundamental actions which give order to the universe. By valuing objects and events, one intensifies things with either more or less of the Beautiful, the True, and the Good. By classifying objects and events, one does not consider the intensity of things, but their extension and the way they belong to other objects or events.
Chapter XIV Genders from:
Form and Object
Abstract: Genders are classes which have this particular characteristic: they are not divided and redivided on the same level, but they divide several different universal levels. Classes group together and exclude objects and events inside the same universe on the same plane. Genders group together and exclude objects and events inside the same universe from plane to plane.
Book Title: The Ethics of Deconstruction-Derrida and Levinas
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Critchley Simon
Abstract: The Ethics of Deconstruction, Simon Critchley's first book, was originally published to great acclaim in 1992. It was the first book to argue for the ethical turn in Derrida's work and to show as powerfully as possible how deconstruction has persuasive ethical consequences that are vital to our thinking through of questions of politics and democracy. Rather than being concerned with deconstruction in terms of the contradictions inherent in any text - an approach typical of the early Derrida and those in literary criticism aiming to extract a critical method for an application to literature - Critchley concerns himself with the philosophical context necessary for an understanding of the ethics of deconstructive reading. Far from being some sort of value-free nihilism or textual free-play, Critchley showed the ethical impetus that was driving Derrida's work. His claim was that Derrida's understanding of ethics has to be understood in relation to his engagement with the work of Levinas and the book lays out the details of their philosophical confrontation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1g0b76j
4 Clôtural Readings II: from:
The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: In this chapter, I follow the path of a dislocation. When Levinas reads Derrida, he renounces the ‘ridiculous ambition of “improving”’ (
NP89) a true philosopher. Levinas is content to cross Derrida’s path in order to engage him in a philosophical encounter. I shall report this encounter by following the reading that Levinas gives of Derrida, a reading which, while continually transgressing the order of commentary, remains faithful, I believe, to the ultimate ethical orientation of the thinking under discussion. At stake here is the perverse fidelity of a dislocation in the act of reading.
5 A Question of Politics: from:
The Ethics of Deconstruction
Abstract: If, as I have argued in this book, the pattern of reading that is found in deconstruction can be understood as an unconditional ethical demand in the Levinasian sense, then is this in itself an adequate response to the question of politics? If deconstruction can provide new resources for thinking about ethical responsibility, then does this also entail a satisfactory account of political responsibility? What is the political moment in deconstruction? Can deconstruction provide an account of justice and a just polity? More precisely, as I asked at the end of chapter 1, what is the relation between the rigorous
Chapter 2 A Sense of Place from:
Virginia Woolf and Being-in-the-world
Abstract: As emphasised in the previous chapter, it is the average everyday lived experience of Being-in-the-world that is a central concern and preoccupation throughout Woolf’s writings. Despite the incalculable variety of everyday experiences that any individual may encounter during his or her lifetime, each is always and inevitably located in a particular place, whether it be the home, the street, a city, the countryside, the workplace or an armchair. Place provides the setting and context for all experience.¹ The inherent connection between the individual, experience and place, and how each depends upon the other for definition and actuality, is a view
Chapter 2 Merleau-Ponty and the Fold of the Flesh from:
Immanence and Micropolitics
Abstract: Unlike Sartre, Merleau-Ponty moves towards a more direct ontological enquiry into the appearing of the visible-tactile field – the actual – itself, which results in an anti-humanist ontology (or
real humanismas he calls it) that locates perceiving bodies within a meaning-generatingfolded flesh; a folded fabric of univocal Being that is beyond any notion of a metaphysical outside or internal transcendent Other. Merleau-Ponty’s ‘fold’ signifies a necessary renewal of philosophical language that entirely bypasses dualism in vernacular form, and subsequently any evocation of transcendence – a limitation that plagues Sartre. This serves to both radicalise Sartre’s socio-political ethic of authenticity as an
Book Title: Evil in Contemporary Political Theory- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Sutch Peter
Abstract: Explores the actual and possible roles of evil in contemporary political theory
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1x42
Chapter 5 UNREASONABLE OR EVIL? from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Budde Kerstin
Abstract: In her book
Evil in Modern Thought, Susan Neiman argues that the root of the problem of evil can be found in the fact that the world is not as it ought to be.¹ Around us, we see needless suffering, callous and thoughtless cruelties, monstrous atrocities, unjust punishments and so much more which makes us cry out: This ought not to have happened! Once we utter this cry, Neiman thinks that we are ‘stepping onto a path that leads straight to the problem of evil’.² That is, once we admit that reality is not as it ought to be, that
Chapter 7 DOING EVIL JUSTLY? from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Evans Mark
Abstract: When faced with a choice between courses of action both or all of which have significant attendant costs or drawbacks – a scenario to which politics is, by its nature, especially prone – we are wont to call the choice on which we settle ‘the lesser of two evils’ (or the ‘least evil’ if the options were more numerous). We employ this phrase when we believe our choice has incurred the least cost compared with the alternatives and, to that extent, it is proffered in justification of the choice made. But it is also an acknowledgement that there is a cost which
Chapter 9 THE GLAMOUR OF EVIL: from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Horton John
Abstract: Probably the most famous contribution to the discussion of the nature of evil in the modern world over the last half-century, at least in the field of political theory, is that of Hannah Arendt. Her thesis regarding ‘the banality of evil’ set out in the course of her reflections on the Eichmann trial in
Eichmann in Jerusalem, first published in 1963,¹ is widely celebrated and much invoked, if not always unambiguously favourably. Exactly what she meant by this captivating but misleadingly simple phrase is less easily understood than is sometimes thought and has been the cause of heated debate.² One
Chapter 10 THE RHETORIC OF MORAL EQUIVALENCE from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Shorten Richard
Abstract: Evil in contemporary politics has an important rhetorical dimension. Whenever instances of wrongdoing are contested in the public realm, the relevant actors are liable to call upon a familiar store of resources for persuading audiences to respond in particular ways. These resources can be expected to consist in recognisable rhetorical tropes and figures, a predictable range of ‘commonplaces’, and the manipulation of definitions according to recurring patterns of argument. They can be envisaged to entail, too, the arousal of a characteristic series of emotions. The actors themselves, in the relevant sense, might also be variously composed. They may be perpetrators
Chapter 11 BANAL BUT NOT BENIGN: from:
Evil in Contemporary Political Theory
Author(s) Boucher David
Abstract: Hannah Arendt is one of the most revered and reviled philosophers of the twentieth century. Almost sixty years after the publication of
Eichmann in Jerusalem, her conclusions still have the power to provoke extreme reactions. For example, David Cesarani accuses Arendt of being deeply contemptuous of the Jews of Poland and Russia because of her bourgeois German Jewish background. Barry Gewen, reviewing the book in the New York Times, dismisses Cesarani as ‘a writer in control of neither his material nor himself’. Arendt could certainly be dismissive, contemptuous and excessively judgemental of those outside her circle, and yet her flashes
Book Title: The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): WRAY RAMONA
Abstract: This authoritative and innovative volume explores the place of Shakespeare in relation to a wide range of artistic practices and activities, past and present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r1z12
INTRODUCTION from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Wray Ramona
Abstract: In the courtyard of the “Casa di Giulietta” – and on the cover of this book – stands a striking embodiment of Shakespeare’s Juliet.¹ In the same way that Montague, in
Romeo and Juliet, memorializes Capulet’s daughter – “For I will raise her statue in pure gold” (5.3.298) – so has the city of Verona elected to honour and localize a character from the early modern English stage. The work of local artist, Nereo Costantini, the sculpture of Juliet was financed by the Lions’ Club of Verona, completed in 1968 and displayed, for the first time, in 1972. Dates are suggestive, and it was
2 SHAKESPEARE AND POETRY from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Holbrook Peter
Abstract: Of course Hotspur is speaking in character, as a bluff soldier – in a non-trivial sense these are his not Shakespeare’s words. Nevertheless it is always something of a shock to come across, in the greatest poet of the English language, such a memorable expression of the hatred of poetry. Glendower has been wittering on about his supernatural and poetic endowments, and Hotspur has had enough. The bombastic Welshman assures Hotspur he has “framèd to the harp / Many an English ditty lovely well, / And gave the tongue a helpful ornament – / A virtue that was never seen in you”
5 SHAKESPEARE ANTHOLOGIZED from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Rumbold Kate
Abstract: In the twenty-first century, “Shakespeare” is not only an English cultural icon but shares some of the characteristics of a powerful global brand. This chapter shows the surprising but important role that the many books of quotations and extracts from Shakespeare’s works, published from within his own lifetime to the present day, have played in establishing that status. It argues that these anthologies have not simply reflected Shakespeare’s growing status, but actively helped to construct it. The seemingly inherent qualities for which Shakespeare is now admired – the beauty of his language, his wise understanding of human nature, his Englishness – are
7 SHAKESPEARE AND EARLY MODERN MUSIC from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Wilson Christopher R.
Abstract: This essay examines the relationship between the music and songs of Shakespeare’s plays and early modern music and musical practice. Music for Shakespeare meant performed songs and instrumental cues, and musical terms used as symbolic reference and metaphor. Very little music survives that can be identified with a first or early production but dramatic context and descriptors usually provide sufficient information on the type of music required. In
Twelfth Night, for example, we know that a catch is performed by Sir Toby, Sir Andrew and Feste when Sir Toby asks: “Shall we rouse the night-owl in a catch that will
8 SHAKESPEARE AND OPERA from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Streete Adrian
Abstract: For the nineteenth-century French composer, Hector Berlioz, Shakespeare offered more than artistic inspiration. In fact, the playwright and his works acted as a prism through which the composer understood and rationalized his personal and professional successes and failures, indeed his very identity. Berlioz first discovered Shakespeare in 1827, an event he describes in his
Memoires (1870) with typically Romantic effusion: “This sudden and unexpected revelation of Shakespeare overwhelmed me. The lightening flash of his genius revealed the whole heaven of art to me, illuminating its remotest depths in a single flash” (Berlioz, 1932, 66; see Schmidgall, 1990, 272–9; Cairns,
9 SHAKESPEARE AND CLASSICAL MUSIC from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Sanders Julie
Abstract: But Henze’s version of this linguistically dextrous and challenging speech – for actor and audience alike – is utterly wordless. It is the opening movement in his paired sonatas on Shakespearean
12 SHAKESPEARE AND POPULAR MUSIC from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Hansen Adam
Abstract: This chapter addresses the following questions: how have Shakespearean characters, words, texts and iconography been represented and reworked through popular music; do all types of popular music represent Shakespeare in the same ways; if not, why not; and how do the links between Shakespeare and popular music develop what we think we know about Shakespeare, and what we think we know about popular music?
14 SHAKESPEARE AND THE RENAISSANCE STAGE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Lamb Edel
Abstract: The Renaissance stage, the artistic milieu in which Shakespeare’s dramatic works were originally produced, is fundamental to a consideration of the relationships between the playwright and the arts. Shakespeare’s plays were produced in the rapidly expanding institution of the theatre in late sixteenth- and early seventeenth-century London and the shifting practices of this establishment had a significant influence on his plays, and are also examined in them.
The Tempest, for instance, performed as part of the repertory of the King’s Men at the Blackfriars and Globe playhouses between 1611 and 1613 and at the Jacobean court in November 1611 and
17 SHAKESPEARE AND THE MODERN STAGE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Carson Christie
Abstract: In addressing Shakespeare on stage in the twentieth and twenty-first centuries I face the two opposing dangers of providing too much coherence, on the one hand, and too little, on the other. It seems sensible therefore to try to trace three narrative strands that have largely determined our current vision of events, outlining the engagement with a Shakespeare who, in his theatrical manifestations, has become subject to a bewildering spectrum of new interpretive practices. Rather than an exhaustive account of Shakespeare on stage during these two centuries, this essay will try to connect, question and extend existing partial pictures of
19 SHAKESPEARE FOR CHILDREN from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Scott-Douglass Amy
Abstract: Children’s Shakespeare is far from being young. In fact, it is more than 200 years old. From the first editions, printed in 1807, to current day adaptations, authors and illustrators have found in Shakespeare’s work ample material for retellings geared to youngsters.¹ This essay will look at the philosophies of children’s Shakespeare, and theories and practices of adaptation over the last two centuries. It will discuss several adaptations by the major figures of children’s Shakespeare: Henrietta and Thomas Bowdler, Mary and Charles Lamb, Edith Nesbit, Marchette Chutte, Leon Garfield, Lois Burdett, Marcia Williams and Tina Packer – along with other, non-canonical
24 SHAKESPEARE EXHIBITION AND FESTIVAL CULTURE from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Burnett Mark Thornton
Abstract: This chapter discusses the policies and ideologies underpinning Shakespeare exhibitions and festivals. Once enshrined as a crucial element of national celebrations in Britain, and now often financed globally by corporate sponsorship, festivals represent a development of the Shakespearean franchise, involving issues of internationalism, patronage and access. As this discussion reveals, particular anniversaries are often selected for celebration, supporting occasions that span, variously, the activities of galleries, the repertory choices of theatres and the cultural projections of educational institutions. The uses of Shakespeare in exhibitions and festivals throughout the world, as is argued here, are complementary and point up distinctive assumptions
26 SHAKESPEARE ON FILM, 1930–90 from:
The Edinburgh Companion to Shakespeare and the Arts
Author(s) Costantini-Cornède Anne-Marie
Abstract: From 1930 to 1990, the phenomenon of Shakespeare on film was characterized by a great variety of activity, from landmark “mainstream” films, deferential to textual authority, to a full range of innovative cinematic essays of all kinds, including modernizations, derivatives or non-English cinematic Shakespeares, and transcultural appropriations trading on radical time and space transpositions, such as Akira Kurosawa’s
Throne of Blood (1957) and Ran (1985), which shift Macbeth and Lear to Sengoku-Jidai (“wartroubled”) medieval Japan. Five main tendencies may be distinguished from the early days of sound movies to the beginning of the Shakespeare on screen revival marked by Kenneth
CHAPTER 4 POP VIDEO: MICHAEL JACKSON’S ‘THRILLER’ AND ‘RACE’ from:
Texts
Abstract: One of Michael Jackson’s hit singles has the consistent line in its chorus, ‘It Don’t Matter If You’re Black Or White’: the statement of an ideal rather than a social fact.³ In Western society, white has been generally portrayed as a norm against which blackness is positioned as aberrant threatening and perhaps even monstrous. As well as telling a mini-story familiar from teen horror, Michael Jackson’s music video for his song ‘Thriller’ invokes a number of discourses about ‘race’ and race relations in the US. Riffing on 1950s horror movies, it divides small-town America between respectable cinemagoers, fascinated and appalled
CHAPTER 7 NEWSPAPER ARTICLE: THE GULF WAR IN REAL TIME AND VIRTUAL SPACE from:
Texts
Abstract: The literary, however identified, may be said to include many examples of non-fiction, including works of journalism. Given the reporter’s quasi-objective relationship to history, the journalistic article was in some ways seen as a model for much literature in the 1930s, with a writer such as George Orwell specialising equally in fiction, essay-writing and reportage, and a novelist such as Christopher Isherwood fashioning himself in fiction as a news camera ‘recording, not thinking’.² Newspaper articles are, in fact, defined by their place of publication rather than their content, but there are certain likely formal characteristics or principles of journalistic writing
CHAPTER 9 POLITICAL SPEECH: MARGARET THATCHER’S HYMN AT THE SERMON ON THE MOUND from:
Texts
Abstract: In this chapter I want to consider the import of a political speech in the context of the relation between the ethical and the political, the spiritual and the material. To do this I want to play off the historical moment and its surrounding contextual discourses with the speech’s invocation of a transhistorical and universal set of values. New Historicism evolved in the 1980s as in some ways a reaction to structuralism and formalism. Indebted to political, poststructuralist and reader-response theory, it has focused on the intertextuality of literary and non-literary texts and the presence of diverse culturally specific discourses
Chapter 4 Temporality and Self-Distance from:
About Time
Abstract: One of the things that narrative theory can learn from philosophy is a proper sense of the importance of the future. I have suggested several times already that narrative theory shows a preoccupation with memory, retrospect and the archiving of past events, and has an undeveloped potential to address questions about the present and future. The significance of the notions of ‘anticipation’ and ‘prolepsis’ is that, in different ways, they refer to this relation between the present and actual or possible futures. With philosophy as its teacher, narrative theory can turn its attention to narrative not only in its function
Chapter 5 Inner and Outer Time from:
About Time
Abstract: The previous chapters open a set of questions about the relationship between time and self-consciousness, an axis which has received too little attention within literary studies.¹ This neglect is all the more surprising since the idea of self-consciousness itself has played such a central role in the characterisation not only of contemporary fiction but of the more general social and discursive condition of the contemporary world. In prolepsis, we find on one hand a kind of temporal self-distance – a form of reflection which involves looking back on the present, from one’s own point of view or that of another – and
CHAPTER 3 Jaspers’ Concepts of from:
Death, 'Deathlessness' and Existenz in Karl Jaspers' Philosophy
Abstract: In Chapter 2 we discussed Jaspers’ account of the notion of death and the distinction between death as an objective fact and death that gives rise to a boundary situation. We noted that one’s Dasein perishes at death.
Existenz, one’s true self, however, ‘knows no death’, that is to say, it is deathless.¹ We also noted that the ‘deathlessness’ of Existenz within the Jaspersian framework does not imply immortality in the traditional sense of the term. In other words, there is no continued existence for Existenz after death.
1 The Neuroscience of Consciousness from:
The Political Mind
Abstract: It has become a standard refrain of contemporary social theory that, as we begin the twenty-first century, our culture seems as incoherent and fractured as our mental life. Ideas exist in juxtaposition, contradicting each other at certain levels and complementing at others. The exploration of the interrelationship between these planes and layers of culture, as well as those of consciousness and selfhood, are what fuels art and literature and what occupies the psychiatrist’s couch. At the heart of our culture is still the irresistible promise of Enlightenment rationality: that the world is there to be explained and bettered. The raw
5 Psychological Revolt from:
The Political Mind
Abstract: Having constructed a conceptualisation of the mind and its connection to its surroundings as well as having painted a picture of the present environment it finds itself in, the psychological possibility of critique remains to be examined. It is easy to state that the mind is shaped wholly by a combination of neurophysical parameters and social experience, but the very fact that one feels so resistant to this idea shows the merits of deeper examination. Consciousness rebels against the notion that its limits can be so circumscribed and the artistic, cultural and philosophical labour of our species is a record
Introduction from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: In a recent TV drama one of the characters falls in love with another. ‘It’s only chemicals,’ his friend assures him, but when the friend finds himself in the same position he is unable to take the same view of his own situation. It would be a caricature to represent the dominant paradigm in contemporary Anglo-American philosophy of mind as holding of all our psychological states, ‘It’s only chemicals.’ Yet this paradigm – functionalism – does hold that each of them is, in fact, a physiological state, but one individuated in terms of its function in mediating between sensory inputs
1 The Character of Experience from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: For much of the last century philosophy of mind has been dominated by the attempt to give an account of mental states that does not have recourse to the Cartesian picture of them as essentially private, in the sense of being only providentially connected with the behaviour through which they are expressed. The states that have seemed particularly recalcitrant to such attempts are our experiences in perception and bodily sensation; for these paradigmatically have a subjective character – a something it is like to have them, as Thomas Nagel puts it¹ – that apparently eludes explanation in terms of the
2 The Constraints of Experience from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: Let us suppose that we reject the ‘myth of the given’ or the idea of ‘contents’ of consciousness whose character explains what it is like to have our experiences, and adopt instead an account in terms of the ways things can become intentional objects of experience through the manner of our bodily interactions with them. This may still leave us with the uneasy feeling that something the ‘given’ was meant to suggest has dropped out of our story, namely, the way in which our perceptions and especially our bodily sensations are not only what we
make of them – not
4 Desire from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: Within much contemporary analytic philosophy of mind desires are conceived of primarily as the inner states which provide us, together with beliefs, with reasons for forming intentions and consequently acting. When linked with beliefs, such desires then cause us to act in appropriate ways. Desires therefore have a role both in providing premises for practical reasoning and a causal, functional role in terms of the agent’s behaviour. Weaving these two roles together has been one of the challenges of contemporary materialism. Within standard accounts of practical reasoning the agent derives an intention or proceeds to action on the basis of
5 Emotions from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: By the time you have reached this point in the book you may be exasperated, excited, intrigued or merely bored. Whatever your reaction, if you have any reaction at all you will most likely be experiencing some emotion. But what are emotions, and why do we experience them? Could we be much the sort of creatures that we are, with all our other experiences, thoughts and desires, and yet be devoid of emotional feelings? And if we could not, is that because our emotions somehow derive from these other psychological states, or do they add some indispensable element to them?
6 Reason, Agency and Understanding from:
The World, the Flesh and the Subject
Abstract: In the previous chapter our discussion of emotion drew attention to an often made contrast between intentional engagements with the world, explicable in terms of reason, and emotional responses, themselves bodily, which apparently fall outside the sphere of purposive, intentional engagement. This contrast worked on a picture of intentional action which involved mental deliberation and the operation of impersonal standards of reasoning, and a picture of emotion as disruptive bodily eruptions of a personal kind which assail otherwise rational subjects. By the end of the chapter, however, this contrast had been undermined, by an account of our bodily emotional responses
Book Title: Death-Drive-Freudian Hauntings in Literature and Art
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Smith Robert Rowland
Abstract: Robert Rowland Smith takes Freud's work on the death-drive and compares it with other philosophies of death - Pascal, Heidegger and Derrida in particular. He also applies it in a new way to literature and art - to Shakespeare, Rothko and Katharina Fritsch, among others. He asks whether artworks are dead or alive, if artistic creativity isn't actually a form of destruction, and whether our ability to be seduced by fine words means we don't put our selves at risk of death. In doing so, he proposes a new theory of aesthetics in which artworks and literary texts have a death-drive of their own, not least by their defining ability to turn away from all that is real, and where the effects of the death-drive mean that we are constantly living in imaginary, rhetorical or 'artistic' worlds. The book also provides a valuable introduction to the rich tradition of work on the death-drive since Freud.Key Features* Includes a general introduction to the death-drive* Presents an original theory of aesthetics* Analyses both theoretical and clinical psychoanalysis* Offers in-depth treatment of Freud* Provides an overview of philosophies of death
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r23mg
Chapter 2 The Death-Drive Does Not Think from:
Death-Drive
Abstract: My title alludes to an essay by Jean-François Lyotard, ‘The Dream-Work Does Not Think’,¹ which in turn alludes to Freud’s
Interpretation of Dreams. The issue is whether the Freudian theory of psychoanalysis construes the individual psyche as having any capacity tothinkwhatsoever. It might be problematised thus: if the psychic mechanism is compelled to repeat, can any of its intellections be considered as thought or cogitation, as opposed to Pavlovian reaction? The compulsion to repeat is one – perhaps the arch – element making the psychic mechanism mechanical, hence the structural role it plays, and consequently its tolerance of
Chapter 7 The Rest of Radioactive Light from:
Death-Drive
Abstract: The persistence of an old thing, even a dead one, the continuance of light over time, the concept of the photograph, the ‘radioactivity’ of artworks,
Hamlet, Samuel Beckett and, again, Freud – these are the themes I want
Introduction: from:
Dissenting Histories
Abstract: This is a study of some eighteenth-century historical works. They are mostly by Dissenters, little known and less read: Edmund Calamy’s
Abridgment of Mr Baxter’s History of his Life and Times, Daniel Neal’s History of the Puritans, William Harris’s Historical and Critical Account of the Life of Oliver Cromwell, Samuel Palmer’s The Nonconformist’s Memorial and Joseph Cornish’s Brief and Impartial History of the Puritans, among others. Chapters are also devoted to David Hume’s History of England and Edmund Burke’s Reflections on the Revolution in France. The object of study is not, however, a series of texts, canonical or otherwise, abstracted
2 Protestant Liberty: from:
Dissenting Histories
Abstract: The most influential Dissenting history of the eighteenth century was
The History of the Puritans by Daniel Neal; or to give its full title: The History of the Puritans; or, Protestant Nonconformists; from the Reformation in 1517. To the Revolution in 1688: comprising an account of their principles; their attempts for a further reformation in the Church; their sufferings; and the lives and characters of their most considerable divines. Caroline Robbins called it ‘probably the most interesting revelation of Dissenting ideas in a secular work in the second quarter of the eighteenth century’.¹
5 Dissenting Histories in the 1770s and 1780s from:
Dissenting Histories
Abstract: Several factors converged in the 1770s to bolster interest among Dissenters in their own history. First, in 1767 the long, wearying legal battle between the City of London Corporation and the Protestant Dissenting Deputies came to end when six out of seven Law Lords decided in favour of the Dissenting position.¹ By Lord Mansfield’s judgment, Dissent was legally secured. Dissenting religious worship was, he said, ‘not only exempted from punishment, but rendered innocent and lawful: it is established, it is put under the protection, and is not merely under the connivance of the law’.²
Book Title: Language and Power in the Modern World- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Atkinson David
Abstract: This book explores key areas of modern society in which language is used to form power and social relations. These are presented in five sections:Language and the MediaLanguage and OrganisationsLanguage and GenderLanguage and YouthMultilingualism, Identity and EthnicityWith a unique combination of selected readings and student-centred tasks in a single volume, the book covers contemporary issues in language and power, ranging from the global to the interpersonal. Each area - and each reading chosen to explore it - is substantially contextualised and discussed through a detailed introduction and then followed up with related activities.Each section comprises:*a substantial, specific introduction which draws students’ attention to key themes and issues relevant to its topic; *a set of four or five selected readings which encourages students to locate critically these issues in context; *a task, or set of tasks, obliging students to undertake ‘hands-on’ linguistic analysis of data and engage in more sophisticated discussion of pertinent issues.*In-depth exploration of a variety of approaches to the study of language and power*Unique combination of advanced readings, student-centred tasks and editorial guidance*Hands-on activities at the end of each chapter
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r24nd
INTRODUCTION from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This book is about language and power. But what is power? How should we go about studying it in relation to language? And for that matter, why? These are not easy questions to answer. Our aim in writing this book is to get you thinking about them, and to get you thinking about the way power ‘works’ in the linguistic practices that people engage in. Power in language is certainly not just about what we might initially think of as ‘powerful language’ (drowning out the voices of others by shouting a lot, for instance). Consider the claim that:
1 LANGUAGE AND THE MEDIA from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This chapter considers the extent to which verbal interaction through the mass media differs from other kinds, such as the face-to-face interaction of individuals, and its consequences in terms of power relations. It examines the power of the media in its assertions of shared values and opinions and works through how such constructions of ‘common sense’ can be critically investigated, drawing for examples on work on racist discourse in the press. It then takes up issues specific to the mediated talk of television and radio, attending to the structuring of ‘live’ talk and to mediatised political language. This involves a
2 LANGUAGE AND ORGANISATIONS from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: This chapter explores the relationship between organisational discourse practices, power and resistance. It is concerned with the ways in which language is used to create and shape an organisation, to carve out an internal structure with circumscribed roles, responsibilities and rights for its different members, and for others with whom they interact. Covering institutional documentation, work discussions and routine talk, it also explores the discursive patterns of control and challenge as struggles for identity occur. We are interested in what has been defined as ‘institutional language’ (Thornborrow 2002; Drew and Heritage 1992) – talk that has pre-inscribed participant roles; is
3 LANGUAGE AND GENDER from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: In this section the focus is on patriarchal power. It attends to how patriarchal power relations are maintained in and through language. To begin, it examines the well-known claim that men and women tend to use interactional styles based on power and solidarity respectively. The section then goes on to maintain that, in order to explore patterns of male dominance effectively, we need to go beyond this polarised view and attend to discourses and practices in specific situations, institutions and genres which may establish men in positions from which they can dominate women. Studies of the dynamics of dinner-table talk
4 LANGUAGE AND YOUTH from:
Language and Power in the Modern World
Abstract: In advocating a change of direction for research on youth, Angela McRobbie (1994: 186) asks ‘what are the discourses within which “different, youthful, subjectivities” are constructed? How are they expressed?’ In exploring language, power and young people, this chapter maps some of the discursive constructions of self that articulate youth identities in everyday modern life. It examines the ways in which language is taken up and used as resistance to mainstream norms and values. It looks at the sorts of discourse practices drawn upon to constitute, shape and signal membership of particular youth cultures. And, as contemporary social change demands
Chapter 1 The Fictive Community: from:
George Mackay Brown and the Philosophy of Community
Abstract: In
A Calendar of Love and Other Stories, George Mackay Brown’s first collection, Brown writes of Orkney as ‘a small green world in itself’.¹ Orkney is depicted in these stories as a world and a community that is united by both location and shared religious practice. In ‘Witch’, Brown presents a vision of the ideal community: in a community ‘under God … society appears as an organism, a harmony, with each man performing his pre-ordained task to the glory of God and the health of the whole community’.² In these early stories, Brown adheres closely to the model of community
3 The Usual Suspects from:
The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: The engagement with texts outside the mainstream of analytic philosophy that has characterised my own work in philosophy has always involved an effort indirectly to intervene in the regular programming of analytic expectations about such texts. By rendering myself capable of reading these texts I have sought to encourage others to feel less well prepared for what they might encounter. My thought is that without such a disruption they will remain prepared only for the (for them, for everyone) depressing prospect of reading the Other.¹
5 The Continental Perspective on the Idea from:
The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: If what the postwar gulf-seekers in the analytic movement would have liked to have expelled from the midst of philosophy in the Englishspeaking world really had been fully expelled (
qua actuality as it were) the story of Continental philosophy would perhaps already be a piece of analytical philosophy’s mythological folklore (‘There used to be some people who read that kind of stuff, but not any more, not round here anyway’). Of course, the fundamental argument of the last chapter is that what answers to the idea of Continental philosophy (the risk of ‘sophistry and illusion’) is not something that can
6 The (B)end of the Idea from:
The Idea of Continental Philosophy
Abstract: John McCumber claims that there has been no success in construing the ‘split’ between analytic and Continental philosophy ‘in philosophical terms’.¹ In this book I have attempted to succeed where others have failed. However, I have not tried to do so by showing ‘how, after all, the analytic/Continental distinction [can] be drawn’² but, rather, by showing why, after all, it cannot. Yet so pervasive is the
de facto distinction, so serious the breakdown in communication, that we find it hard to resist the idea that there must be something to the distinction. This is where it gets hard to keep
CHAPTER 2 ORTHODOXY AND HETERODOXY: from:
Islam, Christianity and Tradition
Abstract: By this time the pressure of Muslim doctrine and practice had mastered most of the resistances that had, at an earlier time, sought an outlet in
heterodox and subversive movements. But this did not lead to stagnation. On the contrary, the devotional feeling of the townsmen, grinding a channel of its own, burst the bonds of the orthodox
CHAPTER 3 THE FLIGHT TO TRADITION: from:
Islam, Christianity and Tradition
Abstract: 1. Opinion or belief or custom handed down; handing down of these, from ancestors to posterity esp. orally or by practice.
Book Title: Media and Memory- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Garde-Hansen Joanne
Abstract: How do we rely on media for remembering? In exploring the complex ways that media converge to support our desire to capture, store and retrieve memories, this textbook offers analyses of representations of memorable events, media tools for remembering and forgetting, media technologies for archiving and the role of media producers in making memories.Theories of memory and media are covered alongside an accessible range of case studies focusing on memory in relation to radio, television, pop music, celebrity, digital media and mobile phones. Ethnographic and production culture research, including interviews with members of the public and industry professionals, is also included. Offering a comprehensive introduction to the connections and disconnections in the study of media and memory, this is the perfect textbook for media studies students.Key Features* Presents a thorough and detailed overview of key writers, theories and debates* Case studies enrich the text, offering innovative approaches and insights on methodology * Covers a range of 'old' and 'new' media including: from radio, television, film, photography, digital media, mobile phones and popular music* Explores discourses, forms and practices of media and memory with active learning exercises that engage readers
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r25r9
2 Personal, Collective, Mediated and New Memory Discourses from:
Media and Memory
Abstract: Before providing a critical overview of key theories of memory (personal, collective, mediated and new), let us take a well-known example that elicits the discourses on media and memory this chapter is concerned with. This will help us to understand the ways in which memory operates as extrapolated by Paul Connerton in
How Societies Remember (1989): through cognitive and performative modes. In the cognitive mode, the past is past and we retrieve events and experiences from the past into the present: through the act of remembering. In the performative, the past is brought into the present as a commemorative act
3 Using Media to Make Memories: from:
Media and Memory
Abstract: Media can represent lions or hunters. However, powerful media and cultural institutions whose business it is to record, archive and make accessible the everyday life, major events and social and cultural heritage of nations and communities, invariably write those narratives in ways that glorify not only themselves but the cultural hegemony of the societies they serve. They need to keep their customers, readers, audiences and users happy. They control their own archives even if they are actually only the custodians and not the full rightful owners of a nation’s heritage. This is the case with the publicly funded broadcaster in
Chapter 2 The Friend as Another Self from:
Philosophy and Friendship
Abstract: The taxonomies of friendship examined in Chapter 1 explain the development of relations between friends on the basis of their mutual need, advantage, tastes and pleasures, commitment to notions of the good or commitment to moral and intellectual principles. This chapter examines how we perceive the other as friend; the nature of the attraction between us; what we see ourselves as having in common. It considers the nature of the choice we make in befriending another person: whether we are helpless before the force of our desires and affinities; whether likes or opposites attract; and whether friendship is a form
Chapter 3 The Other Self as Friend from:
Philosophy and Friendship
Abstract: Cicero believed that human beings find it hard to make light of power and will cast friendship aside in the interests of attaining power and influence. His most scathing commentary on this tendency is that those who engage in this kind of defection from the duties of friendship assume that their behaviour will not be open to serious criticism; such men take it that others will assume that only an extremely important reason could have led them to cast friendship aside. Cicero presents power, influence, manipulation and weakness as factors both intimately related and antithetical to the practice of friendship.
Book Title: The Discursive Construction of National Identity- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Unger J. W.
Abstract: How do we construct national identities in discourse? Which topics, which discursive strategies and which linguistic devices are employed to construct national sameness and uniqueness on the one hand, and differences to other national collectives on the other hand? The Discursive Construction of National Identity analyses discourses of national identity in Europe with particular attention to Austria.In the tradition of critical discourse analysis, the authors analyse current and on-going transformations in the self-and other definition of national identities using an innovative interdisciplinary approach which combines discourse-historical theory and methodology and political science perspectives. Thus, the rhetorical promotion of national identification and the discursive construction and reproduction of national difference on public, semi-public and semi-private levels within a nation state are analysed in much detail and illustrated with a huge amount of examples taken from many genres (speeches, focus-groups, interviews, media, and so forth).In addition to the critical discourse analysis of multiple genres accompanying various commemorative and celebratory events in 1995, this extended and revised edition is able to draw comparisons with similar events in 2005. The impact of socio-political changes in Austria and in the European Union is also made transparent in the attempts of constructing hegemonic national identities. Key Features:*Discourse-historical approach.*Interdisciplinarity (cultural studies, discourse analysis, history, political science).*Multi-method, multi-genre.*Qualitative case studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r26kb
Chapter 2 The Discursive Construction of National Identity from:
The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: Since the 1970s, the term ‘discourse’ has become common currency in an everyday research sense in a variety of humanities and social science disciplines, including the applied branches of linguistics. Because of the wide-ranging use of this term, a variety of meanings have been attributed to it (see Ehlich 1993, p. 145, and Ehlich 1994), which has led to considerable semantic fuzziness and terminological flexibility. In the following we will briefly describe the concept of discourse as it is currently employed in the context of the research activities carried out at the University of Vienna, which have also informed the
Chapter 6 Semi-Private Opinions: from:
The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: As one of the aims of our study was to include ‘subjective’ aspects of the discursive construction of Austrian identity we carried out a number of topic-orientated qualitative interviews, to determine informants’ views, attitudes and levels of awareness. The interviews took place in a relatively relaxed and flexible setting, which enabled the interviewer to react to unanticipated turns in the conversation and provided ample opportunity for feedback and clarification of ambiguous points.
Chapter 8 The ‘Story’ Continues: from:
The Discursive Construction of National Identity
Abstract: In this chapter, we briefly discuss and summarise developments since 1995. We have selected three salient events and socio-political phenomena which characterise the period between 1995 and 2008 and which have had a strong impact on the construction of recent Austrian national identities.
2 CONTINUING UNCERTAINTY IN THE MAINSTREAM from:
Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: There is no consensus among International lawyers on a workable or operable concept of general customary law, supposed to be the fundamental source of an international law binding upon states. It is thought to represent an analytical framework within which one can assess whether states recognize a rule, principle, or practice as binding upon them as law. Jurists are to examine the same ‘raw material’ of international relations as diplomats, statesmen, historians, and political scientists. Yet according to the most orthodox view, expressed in the jurisprudence of the ICJ the jurists are to find that states have, in some sense,
8 FROM AN ORDER OF FEAR TO ONE OF RESPECT from:
Philosophy of International Law
Abstract: The predominant anthropology for the place of law in international relations, whether on the side of state sovereignty or international organization, or constitution, has been a radically subjectivist, individualist one. The state of nature, in which sovereign states still find themselves, is reinforced by predatory doctrines of pre-emption in the area of national security and of relentless expansion in the area of economic activity, itself continuously dominated by security interests.¹ This analysis may not be disputed by legal internationalists or constitutionalists. They continue to set themselves the task of harnessing the beast of the state, Aron’s ‘cold monsters,’ into a
Book Title: The Lacanian Left-Psychoanalysis, Theory, Politics
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Stavrakakis Yannis
Abstract: In recent years psychoanalysis – especially Lacanian theory – has been gradually acknowledged as a vital resource in the ongoing re-orientation of contemporary political theory and analysis. Of particular note is that the work of Jacques Lacan is increasingly being used by major political philosophers associated with the Left. This indicates the dynamic emergence of a new theoretico-political horizon: that of the ‘Lacanian Left’. However, this has yet to be properly conceived and structured as a field. The Lacanian Left is the first book to bring it into academic consciousness and to draw its implications for concrete political analysis in a systematic way. It offers:• An accessible mapping of its main contours. • A detailed examination of the points of convergence and divergence between the major figures active or at the periphery of this terrain, including Slavoj h the central Lacanian notion of ‘enjoyment’, The Lacanian Left puts forward innovative analyses of political power and authority, nationalism, European identity, consumerism and advertising culture, de-democratisation and post-democracy. It will be of value to everyone interested in exploring the potential of psychoanalysis to reinvigorate political theory, critical political analysis and democratic politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r288w
Introduction: from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Over the last ten to fifteen years, psychoanalysis, and especially Lacanian theory, has emerged as one of the most important resources in the ongoing re-orientation of contemporary political theory and critical analysis. So much so is now acknowledged even in mainstream political science fora. For example, in a critical review essay recently published in the
British Journal of Politics and International Relations – one of the journals of the UK Political Studies Association – and characteristically entitled ‘The Politics of Lack’, one reads that ‘an approach to politics drawn from Lacanian psychoanalysis is becoming increasingly popular of late among theorists . .
1 Antinomies of Creativity: from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Of all the theorists examined in this book, Cornelius Castoriadis is neither the most well-known nor the closest one to Lacan’s legacy. However, the decision to put this chapter first is not entirely arbitrary.¹ From a historical point of view, Castoriadis was one of the first major political and social theorists of the Left – a founding member of the famous
Socialisme ou barbarie group – to engage so closely with Lacanianism, and already in the 1960s.² More importantly, exactly because he was gradually led to a violent rejection of Lacanian theory, his work can function as an external frontier, helping us
3 Ž¡žekian ‘Perversions’: from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: My engagement with the work of Laclau has focused on the importance of combining a Lacan-inspired awareness of lack and of the limits of discourse (the Lacanian conceptualisation of negativity qua encounter with the real) with a more substantive dimension, crucial for understanding political life and especially the affective aspect of identification processes: the axis of enjoyment in its different modalities and in its continuous interaction with the discursive constitution of our social and political reality, with the materiality of the signifier. As we have seen, such an articulation requires a delicate balancing act between negativity and positivity. If the
Excursus on Badiou from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: As seen in the preceding chapter, Žiž¡ek’s act is conceptualised in a close dialogue with Alain Badiou’s theorisation of the event. Before bringing the first part of
The Lacanian Left to a close, it is thus important to deal more thoroughly with the relation between Žiž¡ek and Badiou, more precisely between Žiž¡ek’s act and Badiou’s event, and with the place Badiou’s ethics occupy within the Lacanian Left.¹ The exact parameters of this relation are greatly obscured not only by the complexity of the two theoretico-political projects and their various reorientations over time, but also by the often contradictory comments of
5 Enjoying the Nation: from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Although our contemporary world is marked throughout by the importance of questions of identity, something increasingly reflected in the directions of contemporary social–scientific research, in the general field of nationalism studies the issue of the attraction and salience of national identities has not been sufficiently examined. This is partly due to the hegemonic position of modernist and constructionist approaches in the relevant literature.² In opposition to the common doxa reproduced by nationalist myths, contemporary research on the nation tends to stress the constructed character of national identity: the nation is primarily understood as a modern social and political construction.
6 Lack of Passion: from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: I started the previous chapter with an observation regarding the importance that questions of identity have gradually acquired. It would be bizarre if the broad field of international relations were to stay untouched by this trend. In fact, no one is surprised any more by the fact that ‘the discipline of international relations (IR) is witnessing a surge of interest in identity and identity formation’ (Neumann 1999:1). The same applies to the sub-discipline of European Studies – affecting both marginal and mainstream approaches. As Anthony Smith has pointed out, one of the fundamental reasons for the current interest in ‘European unification’
7 The Consumerist ‘Politics of from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: The preceding explorations of nationalism and European identity reveal how much the fate and prospects of particular identifications and hegemonic projects rely on the affective dimension, on
jouissance in its different modalities and interactions with the world of signification and social practice. Obviously the emergence of the ‘new’ cannot succeed if it ignores this important parameter, but this is not to say that sedimented, libidinally invested identifications are in any way privileged to retain their hegemonic position indefinitely. Processes of dis-identification and affective re-investment are, on the contrary, part and parcel of social and political life. In capitalist – especially late
8 Democracy in Post-Democratic Times from:
The Lacanian Left
Abstract: Throughout this book, side by side with my critical explorations of the various theoretical projects associated with the Lacanian Left, side by side with the analyses of central socio-political phenomena undertaken from a Lacanian perspective, I have also been sketching – in an admittedly indirect way – some of the preconditions for a democratic ethics of the political, an orientation drawing on both Lacanian theory and theories of radical democracy. In fact, forging a link between the Lacanian ethics of psychoanalysis and radical democratic theory has already been one of the main aims of
Lacan and the Political.¹ Today, in the emerging
Afterword from:
Intending Scotland
Abstract: In the 1980s, when Hamilton Finlay’s garden was coming to maturity, another Scottish poet created an institution aimed at regaining poetry’s relationship with the natural world. The International Institute of Geopoetics in Paris was launched in 1989 by Glasgow-born Kenneth White, then Professor of Twentieth-Century Poetics at the Sorbonne. Geopoetics was a response to the fact that ‘it was becoming more and more obvious that the earth (the biosphere) was in danger and that ways, both deep and efficient, would have to be worked out in order to protect it’, and that what was required was a return to ‘the
Book Title: Phenomenology or Deconstruction?-The Question of Ontology in Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricoeur and Jean-Luc Nancy
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Watkin Christopher
Abstract: Phenomenology or Deconstruction? challenges traditional understandings of the relationship between phenomenology and deconstruction through new readings of the work of Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Paul Ricœur and Jean-Luc Nancy. A constant dialogue with Jacques Derrida's engagement with phenomenological themes provides the impetus to establishing a new understanding of 'being' and 'presence' that exposes significant blindspots inherent in traditional readings of both phenomenology and deconstruction.In reproducing neither a stock phenomenological reaction to deconstruction nor the routine deconstructive reading of phenomenology, Christopher Watkin provides a fresh assessment of the possibilities for the future of phenomenology, along with a new reading of the deconstructive legacy. Through detailed studies of the philosophy of Merleau-Ponty, Ricœur and Nancy, he shows how a phenomenological tradition much wider and richer than Husserlian or Heideggerean thought alone can take account of Derrida's critique of ontology and yet still hold a commitment to the ontological. This new reading of being and presence fundamentally re-draws our understanding of the relation of deconstruction and phenomenology, and provides the first sustained discussion of the possibilities and problems for any future 'deconstructive phenomenology'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r29kp
2. Maurice Merleau-Ponty: from:
Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In the first chapter we asked if, in the light of the questions Derrida raises in
Le Toucher, we can still speak, phenomenologically, about a worldly meaningfulness. We saw that, although Derrida’s worries about what Merleau-Ponty means by ‘presence’ and ‘intuitionism’ do provide cause for concern, there is ‘another’ Merleau-Ponty (to whom Derrida alludes but does not explore at any length) who is not prey to the same accusations. We also began to see that Derrida’s reading rests substantially on a particular understanding of the notion of ‘contact’ as immediate proximity, which it is by no means clear that Merleau-Ponty
4. Paul Ricoeur: from:
Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: In the previous chapter we explored the relationship between Ricoeur’s hermeneutic phenomenology and Derrida’s deconstruction by moving the ontological question from a focus on ‘what?’ to ‘who?’ While allowing us to make progress in understanding how the question of alterity in Derrida must be reconsidered when we are coming to grips with Ricoeur’s hermeneutics of the self and narrative identity, the investigation also opened, without satisfactorily resolving, the issue of coherence and multiplicity. In stating
that the various discourses of Ricoeur’s hermeneutics of the self cohere, we left hanging the question as to how they cohere, which is precisely what
5. Jean-Luc Nancy: from:
Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: A consideration of Paul Ricoeur’s hermeneutic phenomenology has allowed us to trace points of (more usually) proximity and (occasionally) divergence between Derrida and Ricoeur on questions of alterity and coherence. In terms of alterity, ‘life’ and ‘narrative’ for Ricoeur are inextricably intertwined, and the meaning of prefigured action is not posited but attested in the context of a hermeneutic wager: it is a ‘broken attestation’. Similarly, Derrida cannot justify the ‘good’ of alterity, but assumes it. As regards the question of coherence, Ricoeur’s thought deals with a constant tension between chaos and cosmos: narrative is a ‘discordant concordance’ and justice
6. Jean-Luc Nancy: from:
Phenomenology or Deconstruction?
Abstract: The previous chapter dealt with the question of alterity in Nancy’s work. Now we turn to the problem of commensurability. Chapter 5 considered the possibility of contact with a meaningful world, while this chapter pursues the issue of the conflict of meaning(s) in the world: what is to be done when a number of incommensurable values must be measured against each other or, in other words, how are we to calculate the incalculable? It is the problem we have been posing to Derrida’s deconstruction; it is also the question at the heart of the cosmological motif we have been tracing
2 THE MEDIA IN SOCIAL DEVELOPMENT IN CONTEMPORARY AFRICA from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Zeleza Paul Tiyambe
Abstract: If communication is the lifeblood of human interaction, the media constitute the veins through which it flows. The media have a multiplicity of forms, functions, and impacts. They exist in oral, literary and visual forms; they are transmitted through print, audiovisual, and digital technologies; and they play communicative, creative, and representational roles. As a whole, or in specific artifacts and genres, the media have varied social, economic and political effects that can promote democracy, development, nation building and inclusion as much as they can sustain authoritarianism, exploitation, conflict and exclusion. Media infrastructures, practices and policies are embedded in the prevailing
3 LANGUAGE AND THE MEDIA IN AFRICA: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Mazrui Alamin
Abstract: Language influences the way in which we perceive reality, evaluate it and conduct ourselves with respect to it. Speakers of different languages and cultures see the universe differently, evaluate it differently, and behave towards its reality differently. Language controls thought and action
7 MEDIA CONSUMERISM AND CULTURAL TRANSFORMATION from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Aseka Eric Masinde
Abstract: The so-called information and knowledge age has been characterized by the dominance of two related movements, which serve the age-old human preoccupation with capitalist accumulation. These movements are economic globalization and the revolution in information and communications technologies (ICT). These are movements that may be seen as the engines of the contemporary global economy. They drive the new information world order, in which most of the continent of Africa is not faring too well. The expansion of globalization and ICT is itself largely driven by the logic of the market (Etta and Parvyn-Wamahiu 2003).
11 REKINDLING EFFICACY: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Njogu Kimani
Abstract: Orality has been an important method for self-understanding, creating relationships, and establishing an equilibrium between body, soul and the environment. Through oral narratives, communities have been able to pass on values, attitudes, knowledge and modes of practice to generations. Because ‘story telling occupies a natural role in many African cultures’ (Pillay 2003: 109), it has the potential of functioning as a key strategy for the promotion of health and well-being. In many cases, therapeutic stories are transmitted through the mass media to be consumed by individuals in their homes or by groups in schools, orphanages, prisons, dispensaries, market places, and
12 THE MEDIA IN EDUCATION from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Ngome Charles
Abstract: The role of media in supporting and promoting education has been acknowledged globally and attracts a lot of documentation. The World Conference on Education for All (EFA), held in Jomtien, Thailand, in 1990 recognized this role and underscored the need for nations to involve the media in delivering and advocating for education. The World Forum on EFA held in Dakar, Senegal, in 2000 reaffirmed this position and reiterated the need for involving the media in education campaigns. These two world conferences, it is now acknowledged, gave birth to an expanded vision of education. No longer do we look at education
20 MUSEUMS IN AFRICA from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Wandibba Simiyu
Abstract: The word ‘museum’ is derived from the Greek word
mouseion. In ancient Greece, the mouseion was the temple of the muses, the goddesses of the arts and sciences, upon whom writers called for inspiration before beginning to work. Thus, as originally conceived, the mouseion implied an environment suited to creative inspiration. By about 300 BC, this word was used to designate a library and research area in Alexandria, Egypt. In other words, the earliest known museum in the modern sense of the term was actually built in Africa.
22 INNOVATING ‘ALTERNATIVE’ IDENTITIES: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Mungai Mbugua wa
Abstract: I am standing right inside the Old Nation roundabout, looking up along Tom Mboya Street. All round me there is a bustle of activity, as passengers dash from the roundabout into the circuit road . . . in the process, eliciting a stream of choice epithets and gestures from
matatu driver crews. ‘How utterly disorderly these matatu can be. No wonder they sport such fearsome names like Notorious and Nasty Boys!’ exclaims a neatly dressed man standing next to me. Above the din
23 BRINGING CHANGE THROUGH LAUGHTER: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Wanjau Mary Kabura
Abstract: Popular culture can both entertain and contribute to social change. Cartoons and comics constitute a pop-cultural tool of visual communication that is gaining in popularity and use. The modern daily newspaper strip and political cartoon participates in what is, in fact, an ancient art form and mode of expression.
24 DEMONIC TRADITION: from:
Media and Identity in Africa
Author(s) Ciekawy Diane M.
Abstract: During the last four months of 1997, the Coast Province of Kenya was under a state of national emergency. Collective and individual acts of violence occurred in both urban and rural areas, some of which were perpetrated by members of a loosely organized movement that did not have a consistent name or set of objectives. Throughout the following year, the investigations of the Kenya Human Rights Commission (KHRC) and the Judicial Commission of Inquiry led by Justus Akiwumi² convincingly showed that most of the initial collective acts of violence were planned and executed with the assistance of people loyal to
Chapter 1 What Difference does Deleuzeʹs Difference make? from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Boundas Constantin V.
Abstract: Philosophies of difference, where difference maintains its grounds from beginning to end without being eclipsed by identity, are exceedingly rare. In fact, if we subtract from their ranks those which, in their struggle to maintain the primacy of difference, succumb to the ineffable and turn their back on the creation of concepts, the number of philosophical heterologies turns out to be minuscule. And of course it is not by chance that the fortunes of philosophical heterologies are better served inside process philosophies. Although to be a process philosopher is not a guarantee that one will also be a philosopher of
Chapter 5 Counter-Actualisation and the Method of Intuition from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Egyed Bela
Abstract: In his article, ‘Un, multiple, multiplicité(s)’ (2000), Badiou reiterates his earlier objections to Deleuze: (1) Deleuze’s conception of ‘set’ is anachronistic because it is pre-Cantorian. It ignores the extraordinary immanent dialectic that mathematics has bestowed (
dotē) this concept since the end of the nineteenth century; (2) Deleuze’s concept of multiplicity remains inferior (because of its qualitative differentiation) to the concept ofmultipleemerging from the history of contemporary mathematics; and (3) the qualitative determination of multiplicities makes it impossible to subtract them from their equivocal re-absorption into the One (of classical ontology). In the same article, Badiou complains that those
Chapter 7 A Fourth Repetition from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Baross Zsuzsa
Abstract: My title gives right away the end toward which I am heading but which for lack of space will not be reaching in any satisfactory fashion: the cinema at once constitutes and performs or actualises a ‘fourth’ repetition. The ordinal designation is with reference to Deleuze, who as we know in
Difference and Repetitiondistinguishes three modalities (‘habit’, ‘memory’, and a third ‘royal repetition’) whose articulated and simultaneous replay by a conceptual apparatus (or the textDifference and Repetition) is constitutive of Time itself, in all its complex, mutating and discontinuous dimensions (Deleuze 1994). The analysis that follows borrows from
Chapter 8 Deleuze and the Meaning of Life from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Colebrook Claire
Abstract: In
The Order of ThingsFoucault makes the claim that until the eighteenth century ‘life did not exist’ (Foucault 1994: 128). The concept of life was not one concept among others but allowed for the construction of a new plane or ‘historical a priori’. If man had been, as Foucault notes, a political animal this was because his humanity was created through the social relations he established through speech and action. When ‘man’ becomes an epiphenomenon of life then his political being is no longer constitutive of who he is; rather his political being might now be explained by reference
Chapter 9 The Ethics of Becoming-Imperceptible from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Braidotti Rosi
Abstract: In this essay I will explore the eco-philosophical aspects of the ethics of becoming, with reference to the project of nomadic subjectivity and sustainability. The urge that prompts this investigation is not only abstract, but also very practical. Nomadic philosophy mobilises one’s affectivity and enacts the desire for in-depth transformations in the status of the kind of subjects we have become. Such in-depth changes, however, are at best demanding and at worst painful processes. My political generation, that of the baby-boomers, has had to come to terms with this harsh reality, which put a check on the intense and often
Chapter 10 The Limits of Intensity and the Mechanics of Death from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Olkowski Dorothea
Abstract: Imagine yourself in the midst of some milieu, some process of continuous
differenciation, characterised by rapidly changing events and personages, a sense of expectation – what if there is a glimpse, a shudder, a leap, something else? What if there emerges some evanescent darkness, some momentary shift invested with the misery of an onslaught of disturbing reverberations? Responding to this in confusion, perhaps you construct an Idea, a structure, a multiplicity, a system of multiple, nonlocalisable ideal connections which is then incarnated. It is incarnated in real (not ideal) relations and actual (physical) terms, each of which exists only in
Chapter 13 Fabulation, Narration and the People to Come from:
Deleuze and Philosophy
Author(s) Bogue Ronald
Abstract: In a 1990 interview, Deleuze addresses the question of the relationship of politics to art via a reflection on the modern problem of the ‘creation of a people’. The artists Deleuze admires (he names here Mallarmé, Rimbaud, Klee, Berg, Huillet and Straub) have a deep need of a people, but the collectivity they invoke does not yet exist – ‘the people are missing [
le peuple manque]’ (Deleuze 1990: 235/174). Artists cannot themselves create a people, and the people in their struggles cannot concern themselves directly with art, but when a people begins to take form, an interactive process emerges that
Chapter 6 Super Natural Science: from:
Scandalous Knowledge
Abstract: Evolutionary psychology, a recently constituted but already broadly extended programme in the study of human behaviour, is notable for, among other things, the unusually pre-emptive character of its claims. According to its major proponents, ‘reverse engineering’, the method that defines and distinguishes evolutionary psychology, permits identification of the underlying, innate mental mechanisms that govern all human behaviour, from incest-avoidance and femaleadolescent anorexia to past-tense formation and a taste for Victorian novels. In supplying these identifications, it is said, evolutionary psychologists provide genuinely scientific explanations for human behaviours and cultural practices that, up to now, have been improperly or inadequately explained
Book Title: Post-Foundational Political Thought-Political Difference in Nancy, Lefort, Badiou and Laclau
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Marchart Oliver
Abstract: A wide-ranging overview of the emergence of post-foundationalism and a survey of the work of its key contemporary exponents.This book presents the first systematic coverage of the conceptual difference between ‘politics’ (the practice of conventional politics: the political system or political forms of action) and ‘the political’ (a much more radical aspect which cannot be restricted to the realms of institutional politics). It is also the first introductory overview of post-foundationalism and the tradition of ‘left Heideggerianism’: the political thought of contemporary theorists who make frequent use of the idea of political difference: Jean-Luc Nancy, Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou and Ernesto Laclau.After an overview of current trends in social post-foundationalism and a genealogical chapter on the historical emergence of the difference between the concepts of ‘politics’ and ‘the political’, the work of individual theorists is presented and discussed at length. Individual chapters are presented on the political thought of Jean-Luc Nancy (including Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe), Claude Lefort, Alain Badiou, and Ernesto Laclau (including Chantal Mouffe).Overall the book offers an elaboration of the idea of a post-foundational conception of politics.Other titles in the Taking on the Political series: Valentine and Arditi/ Polemicisation 0 7486 1064 2Shapiro/ Cinematic Political Thought 0 7486 1289 0Chambers/ Language and the Politics of Untimeliness 0 7486 1766 3Bowman/ Post-Marxism Versus Cultural Studies 978 0 7486 1762 3Simons/ Critical Political Theory in the Media Age 0 7486 1583 0
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2bs1
Chapter 2 Politics and the Political: from:
Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: Politics, as Paul Ricœur once remarked, ‘only exists in great moments, in “crises”, in the climactic and turning points of history’ (1965: 255). In 1956, troops of the Warsaw pact states invaded Hungary and cracked down on the Hungarian revolution. This event had heavily dislocating effects on Western political thought – no matter whether Marxist or not. As a reaction, Paul Ricœur published one of his best-known essays, ‘The Political Paradox’, in which he seeks to come to terms philosophically with the exigency of the Hungarian events (1965). Counter to state-Marxism, his aim is to think what he perceives as the
Chapter 6 The Political and the Impossibility of Society: from:
Post-Foundational Political Thought
Abstract: In the above quotation, Ernesto Laclau indicates a large part of the aim of his theoretical enterprise, and, to some extent, of Chantal Mouffe’s theoretical enterprise. Their aim is to reverse the order of priority between the social and the political. The assumption that the political has been systematically ‘absorbed’ by the social places the Laclauian enterprise in the framework of theories that share Schmitt’s neutralization thesis and Arendt’s colonization thesis, as they were discussed in Chapter 2 respectively. However, contrary to Max Weber, who can be considered the actual source of the absorption thesis, no pessimistic or even fatalistic
Chapter 1 Scotland and the places of memory from:
The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: A fictional Scots detective gives fleeting pause for thought, stubs out his Silk Cut, moves on quickly to more pressing, practical matters, the conundrum lingering only as long as the pause in his conversation with a disagreeable colleague. The plot moves on. I finished the novel, but marked the page, wanting to dwell some more on the frisson where ‘loss and permanence had mingled and become some new entity’. What, quite, could this ‘something extraordinary’ be and what was new about that ‘new entity’? A momentary reverie points to a difficult issue: memories link people with places in enigmatic ways.
Chapter 5 Retrieving ‘that invisible leeway’: from:
The Scots Imagination and Modern Memory
Abstract: The conventional logic of landscape evaluation is that the Romantic Movement was a conservative response to the onset of modernity, emphasising the need to develop ‘culture’ as moral salvation against the instability of urbanisation and industrialisation. Its legacy has seen a supposedly preexisting Arcadia touted as ‘authentic’ for a public that misrecognises fabrication for historical fact. Arguably, alienated from their own acts of creation, cultural producers have reified their own constructions, believing likewise that these reflect a sacred essence of ‘natural beauty’. Icons abound. What more can be said about the social construction of the Scottish landscape?
Book Title: Memory and the Moving Image-French Film in the Digital Era
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): McNeill Isabelle
Abstract: A vital rethinking of memory and the moving image for the digital age, Isabelle McNeill investigates the role of the moving image in cultural memory, considering the impact of digital technologies on visual culture. Drawing on an interdisciplinary range of theoretical resources and an unusual body of films and moving image works, the author examines the ways in which recent French filmmaking conceptualises both the past and the workings of memory. Ultimately the author argues that memory is an intersubjective process, in which filmic forms continue to play a crucial role even as new media come to dominate our contemporary experience.Memory and the Moving Image:*Introduces new ways of thinking about the relation between film and memory, arising from a compelling, interdisciplinary study of theories and films*Subtly explores the French context while drawing theoretical conclusions with wider implications and applicability*Provides detailed and illuminating close readings of varied moving image works to aid theoretical explorations*Moves away from auteurist approaches, examining work by canonical directors including Jean-Luc Godard, Chris Marker and Agnès Varda alongside that of less well-known filmmakers such as Claire Simon and Yamina Benguigui*Brings together thinkers such as Bergson, Deleuze, Bazin and Barthes with, for example, Rodowick and Mulvey, in an engaging interweaving of theories.Works considered include Jean-Luc Godard's Histoire(s) du Cinéma (1989-98), Yamina Benguigui's Mémoires d'Immigrés (1997), Chris Marker's CD-ROM Immemory (1998), Claire Simon's Mimi (2003), Michael Haneke's Caché (2005) and Agnès Varda's multi-media exhibition, L'Île et Elle (2006).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt1r2cnj
2. VIRTUAL MUSEUMS AND MEMORY OBJECTS from:
Memory and the Moving Image
Abstract: In the previous chapter I suggested that certain films actively elicit a ‘transversal’ viewing, contrary to Metz’s suggestion that as soon as two images are juxtaposed a longitudinal narrativity is born, suppressing any such lateral movement. In this chapter I want to look at recent French films and moving image material that can be seen to summon transversal readings by drawing on an intertextual deployment of objects that resonate with personal and collective memory. To a certain extent all films can be seen to activate cultural memory in this way, especially in the age of DVD and other viewing technologies,
Chapter 2 Complexity, Democratisation and Conflict from:
Democratic Piety
Abstract: The idea of complexity outlined in the first chapter provides the theoretical backdrop to the rest of the argument in this book, in particular the position that ‘in a complex world there are no simple binaries’ (Mol and Law 2002: 20). This is a pivotal insight insofar as it unsettles and disrupts many prevalent ideas in democratic discourse, not the least of which is the assumption that democratisation and the inculcation of democratic practice around the world is the forerunner to a reduction in political conflict. Although binaries can help to reduce complexity and thus make it ‘readable’, the resulting
Chapter 5 Terrorism, Violence and the Ethics of Democracy from:
Democratic Piety
Abstract: One of the reasons why democratic piety has become so prevalent in contemporary politics is the changing social and political climate in this century. The fear of terrorism in Western societies was exacerbated by the attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon in 2001, alongside subsequent attacks such as those in Bali, Madrid and London. This has created a new phase in the conception of terrorism in political theory and, in particular, its implications for democratic theory and practice. Hitherto terrorism had been mainly conceived as a problem for specific societies grappling with social and political contexts that
Conclusion: from:
Democratic Piety
Abstract: The argument in this book has suggested that democratic theory and practice needs to be reconsidered in order to accommodate the shifting meanings of democracy in contemporary politics and the spaces that have opened up between democratic aspirations and the actual operation of democratic societies. In particular, the tendency to view democratic political organisation as a given whereby everyone understands and agrees upon the types of mechanisms that are required to enable democratic societies to function must be analysed. The first major contention here is that an approach powered by the insights of complexity theory acts to deepen understanding against
Chapter 1 A Flow of Unforeseeable Novelty from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: The problems, at first sight, mainly derive from the non-existence of the future: from the fact that thinking about what has not yet taken place differs from thinking
Chapter 6 Narrative Modality: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: In the previous two chapters we have encountered, in Mallarmé and Badiou, but also in Nietzsche and Grosz, a thematisation of action as a kind of wager or bet upon what will have happened. The idea of the future as a wager suggests probability as a more obvious mathematics of the future perfect than set theory. There can be no question that our cognitive control of the future must involve us in an assessment of the probability of events that we foresee, and it seems likely that the events that we do not foresee are the lowest probability events. The
Chapter 8 Maximum Peripeteia: from:
The Unexpected
Abstract: In
Fingersmith, by Sarah Waters, something very unexpected happens. It happens at the end of Part One, after six chapters, about one-third of the way through the novel, and it turns everything upside down. We had thought that Sue Trinder, our narrator, was part of a plot to cheat an heiress out of her fortune by having her committed to a mental asylum, but in fact the heiress, Maud, was also part of a plot, of which we knew nothing, to have Sue locked up in the madhouse. The scene in which Sue travels to the asylum with her partner
Book Title: Modernism and Magic-Experiments with Spiritualism, Theosophy and the Occult
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Wilson Leigh
Abstract: While modernism’s engagement with the occult has been approached by critics as the result of a loss of faith in representation, an attempt to draw on science as the primary discourse of modernity, or as a hidden history of ideas, Leigh Wilson argues that these discourses have at their heart a magical practice which remakes the relationship between world and representation. As Wilson demonstrates, the courses of the occult are based on a magical mimesis which transforms the nature of the copy, from inert to vital, from dead to alive, from static to animated, from powerless to powerful. Wilson explores the aesthetic and political implications of this relationship in the work of those writers, artists and filmmakers who were most self-consciously experimental, including James Joyce, Ezra Pound, Dziga Vertov and Sergei M. Eisenstein.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgs1g
INTRODUCTION from:
Modernism and Magic
Abstract: This book argues that the aesthetic experiments of the first half of the twentieth century that we call modernism drew on the discourses of the occult dominant during the period – in particular on spiritualism and theosophy – because in them it saw the possibilities for a reconceptualisation of the mimetic. While these discourses have been much investigated in critical works of the last few decades, what neither recent scholars nor many practitioners, or indeed critics, at the time have admitted is the extent to which they have magic at their heart. Yet these occult discourses provided possibilities for experiment for writers,
1 ‘BUT THE FACTS OF LIFE PERSIST’: from:
Modernism and Magic
Abstract: The engagement of experimental artistic practices with the contemporary occult in the first half of the twentieth century was not so much the result of personal credulity, or of a search for new forms per se, or a straightforward mimesis of the failure of language, but was instead an attempt to represent the world other than the way it was through a magical mimesis. As I have suggested in the Introduction, this is already to move away from some current accounts of what modernism does with the world. In other accounts, the varieties of modernist experiment are often formed into
4 ‘HERE IS WHERE THE MAGIC IS’: from:
Modernism and Magic
Abstract: The cultural history of film has often been rooted in the shifting conceptions of and metaphorical uses of light. Film produces life, movement and action from light, making it seem organic (as light produces life and growth in the natural world), but also uncanny (the creation of life and movement from nothing). That the world is reproduced through the effects of light in photography and film has led numerous critics recently to reassert the uncanny and occult status of the media (Gunning 1995). Indeed light has many occult resonances, from Emanuel Swedenborg, through theories of vitalism, to the metaphorical uses
5 ‘DISNEY AGAINST THE METAPHYSICALS’: from:
Modernism and Magic
Abstract: As we have seen in Chapter 4, the work of both Dziga Vertov and Sergei Eisenstein shows a tension between realism as faithfulness to the truth of the world on one hand and realism as reproducing the myths of bourgeois capitalism on the other. For Vertov, facts were central in overcoming this problematic of representation, as expressed in his rejection of actors, filmscripts, created scenarios, and so on. For Eisenstein, however, the relation between the facts of world and their reproduction on the screen was in some ways more complex. He criticised Vertov and kino-eye in general for misunderstanding this
Chapter 1 CIA HISTORY AS A COLD WAR BATTLEGROUND: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Aldrich Richard J.
Abstract: Where does the history of the history of intelligence begin? As a self-conscious academic subject, intelligence history is widely understood to have started in the 1980s. In Britain, Christopher Andrew and David Dilks proclaimed a deliberate manifesto for intelligence historians in 1984, urging scholars to explore the ‘missing dimension’. Broadly contemporaneous with this, the American historian Richard Immerman asserted that it was important to incorporate covert action into any sophisticated understanding of foreign policy. The mid-1980s also saw the creation of the journal
Intelligence and National Security, edited by Christopher Andrew and Michael Handel.¹ Since that time, we have enjoyed
Chapter 2 THE CULTURE OF FUNDING CULTURE: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Pullin Eric
Abstract: The Congress for Cultural Freedom (CCF) was the largest and longest of the covert operations run by the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA). Lasting from 1950 until 1967, the purpose of the CCF was to promote an international anti-communist consciousness among intellectual liberals and non-communist Leftists. The CCF established organisations throughout the non-communist world, sponsoring concerts, art exhibits and scholarly lectures to promote anti-communist activism among intellectuals and artists. From 1966 to 1967,
The New York TimesandRamparts– a New Left magazine that offered criticism of politics and culture – exposed the ‘secret’ that the CIA had covertly funded
Chapter 5 NARRATING COVERT ACTION: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Mistry Kaeten
Abstract: In the conduct of foreign relations, it represents the option laden with most risk and danger. For many policymakers, it is the least appealing choice. Its raison d’être is to be inconspicuous to the extent that its very occurrence is in doubt. Some even question whether it is a core intelligence activity.¹ Covert action nonetheless remains the most intriguing, controversial, intensely debated and headline-grabbing aspect of intelligence. Among the numerous agencies that make up the American intelligence community, none has been as closely associated with clandestine activities – historically and, moreover, in the popular imagination – than the Central Intelligence
Chapter 10 NO CLOAKS, NO DAGGERS: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Beach Jim
Abstract: Intelligence is indivisible. No area of activity – politics, economics, military affairs, science and technology – can be treated as a subject apart and treated in isolation.¹
Chapter 11 The Study of Interrogation: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Newbery Samantha
Abstract: Interrogation that aims to collect intelligence from the person being interrogated has received scholarly and public attention, largely as a result of its connection with torture.¹ The torture debate – as it is known – began when interrogators were unable to gain intelligence from ‘four suspect terrorists, among them Zacarias Moussaoui, being held in a New York prison following the September 11 attacks’.² Many media organisations then responded to official cues and came out in support of the use of torture for counterterrorism.³ This debate has intensified discussions about what interrogation practices might be permissible in the pursuit of intelligence.
Chapter 12 WHITEHALL, INTELLIGENCE AND OFFICIAL HISTORY: from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Murphy Christopher J.
Abstract: In the historiography of British intelligence, the publication of
SOE in France– an officially sponsored account of the activities of the Special Operations Executive (SOE) during the Second World War – stands out as a significant moment. While the existence of the organisation and its activities already constituted something of an open secret – a consequence of numerous memoirs and investigative works published since its dissolution in 1946 –SOE in Francewas an account of part of the wartime secret world, which was published by Her Majesty’s Stationery Office: an official history, based on access to SOE’s own
Chapter 13 A TALE OF TORTURE? ALEXANDER SCOTLAND, THE LONDON CAGE AND POST-WAR BRITISH SECRECY from:
Intelligence Studies in Britain and the US
Author(s) Lomas Daniel W. B.
Abstract: The immediate post-war period saw the publication of a number of secret service accounts recounting wartime exploits, giving the impression that, with the end of hostilities, these could now be revealed.¹ In fact, as has been clearly demonstrated by Richard J. Aldrich, officials in Whitehall attempted to manage the release of intelligence-related subject matter into the public domain, largely to protect the secrets of code-breaking and strategic deception.² While receiving the most attention, these were not the only wartime activities which were strictly off-limits to publishers, as far as the authorities were concerned. Efforts to publish details of prisoner interrogation
Book Title: Deleuze's Literary Clinic-Criticism and the Politics of Symptoms
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Tynan Aidan
Abstract: The first study of Deleuze's critical and clinical projectAidan Tynan addresses Deleuze's assertion that 'literature is an enterprise of health' and shows how a concern of health and illness was a characteristic of his philosophy as a whole, from his earliest works to his groundbreaking collaborations with Guattari, to his final, enigmatic statements on 'life'.He explains why alcoholism, anorexia, manic depression and schizophrenia are key concepts in Deleuze's literary theory, and shows how, with the turn to schizoanalysis, literature takes on a crucial political and ethical role in helping us to diagnose our present pathologies and articulate the possibilities of a health to come.Key FeaturesThe first book length study of Deleuze's critical and clinical project and the conceptualisations of health and illness he developed over the course of his careerUses the idea of the literary clinic to unify Deleuze's literary theory with the political critique he developed with Guattari, and argues in this way for a distinctively Deleuzian critical practiceDraws on Deleuze conceptualisations of health and illness to reassess his relationship to key thinkers such as Spinoza, Marx, Nietzsche, Freud and Melanie Klein and literary figures such as Melville F. Scott Fitzgerald, Kafka, Beckett and Artaud
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgstk
Introduction: from:
Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: This book centres on Deleuze’s understanding of literature as ‘an enterprise of health’ and of literary criticism’s links to aspects of pathology and clinical practice, especially as these latter come under scrutiny in Deleuze and Guattari’s ‘schizoanalysis’ project (CC 3). The relation between literature and health is argued for most explicitly by Deleuze in his last published book,
Essays Critical and Clinical. It is here that he lays out the principal hypothesis of a clinical criticism: certain authors have a weak health, but literature, by gaining a perspective on sickness, is capable of transforming this weakness into a creative power.
1 A Case of Thought from:
Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: For Deleuze, all thinking begins in a kind of pathos. This is because thinking must be distinguished from knowledge or mental activity in general: remembering, sensing, imagining and so on. These modes of cognition remain at the purely empirical level of recognisable objects. Thought, however, goes beyond the limits of the recognisable and thus needs to be grasped in a way which distinguishes it from our day-to-day cognition of the world.¹ In other words, thought goes beyond the given differences which allow us to recognise the objects of our experience, and in turn leads towards a realm in which differences
3 Symptoms, Repetition and the Productive Death Instinct from:
Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: The literary clinical procedure as a creative practice works via repetition, but there is always a chance that the procedure will fail and the repetition will remain unproductive. While failure and success are not to be judged from the point of view of conscious intent, as this would imply a transcendent judgment rather than an immanent evaluation, their effects are nevertheless quite real. The prospect of psychological disintegration, manifesting itself in the worst cases in schizophrenic illness, is, in Deleuze’s conception of writing, an ever-present threat. However, the very reality of this threat offers salvation from it. Failure and success
5 The People to Come from:
Deleuze's Literary Clinic
Abstract: From his early work on Masoch, Deleuze associated health with an engagement with issues of group subjectivity and collective life. The literary clinic grasps the author’s position not as a particular and personal case of a wider social and collective generality, but precisely as a
problematicintersection of the personal and the collective in which the author can be viewed as a singularity capturing both personal and collective forces at once. If Masoch or Kafka suffered their own conditions at some private or personal level, it was the procedures of their literary activity that allowed a transmutation – what we have
Book Title: Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy- Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Clemens Justin
Abstract: Psychoanalysis was the most important intellectual development of the twentieth century, which left no practice from psychiatry to philosophy to politics untouched. Yet it was also in many ways an untouchable project, caught between science and poetry, medicine and hermeneutics. This unsettled, unsettling status has recently induced the philosopher Alain Badiou to characterise psychoanalysis as an ‘antiphilosophy’, that is, as a practice that issues the strongest possible challenges to thought. Justin Clemens takes up the challenge of this denomination here, by re-examining a series of crucial psychoanalytic themes: addiction, fanaticism, love, slavery and torture. Drawing from the work of Freud, Lacan, Badiou, Agamben and others, 'Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy' offers a radical reconstruction of the operations and import of key psychoanalytic concepts and a renewed sense of the indispensable powers of psychoanalysis for today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt3fgt0f
Introduction: from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Psychoanalysis is an antiphilosophy. Despite the precision of this concept and this claim, their implications remain controversial. This book thus introduces the concept of antiphilosophy, speaks of its constitution and pertinence with respect to psychoanalysis, and examines the consequences of such a determination through a sequence of case-studies. Although the concept has some highly abstract aspects and a somewhat forbidding intellectual history, it is deployed here, first, as a kind of corrosive of received ideas, and, second, as an affirmative means of characterising psychoanalysis that captures something essential, if often elided, about the peculiar status of the practice.
1. Listening or Dispensing? from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: In this chapter, I will reread an overdetermined and complex event in the prehistory of psychoanalysis: Sigmund Freud’s so-called ‘cocaine episode’ from the 1880s, in which, prior to entering private practice as a psychiatrist, Freud attempted a kind of reputational ‘get-rich-quick’ scheme, staking his scientific credentials on what has appeared to many subsequent commentators as unethical drug experimentation. While I re-examine this event by drawing on the requisite historical facts and secondary literature, my aim is different from that of a standard revisionist account. In fine, I wish to show something quite counter-intuitive: how Freud came to imagine the possibility
2. Love as Ontology; or, Psychoanalysis against Philosophy from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Because it is an antiphilosophy, psychoanalysis has, from its beginnings, remained indifferent or suspicious towards that most philosophical of themes: ontology. One can see this indifference operating at a number of levels. The practice of psychoanalysis has not necessitated that clinical psychoanalysts intervene directly in ontological questioning, whether implicitly or explicitly. Even in the most volatile moments of its struggles to sustain itself as a singular practice, psychoanalysis has remained relatively unmoved in the face of the counter-claims, concepts and criticisms coming from philosophy – and, a fortiori, from philosophical ontologies. Indeed, the reverse is more the case: it is
5. The Slave, The Fable from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: Having established slavery as a key antiphilosophical theme – whether considered primarily as an essential possibility of the animal body or as a necessity of the political one – I turn here to one of the extant ancient practices of ‘slave-speech’, those texts commonly generically recognised as ‘Aesopic fables’. I will argue here that ‘the Aesopic’ is always intimately connected with the problem of slavery, ‘real’ slavery, slavery in a real political sense. But the Aesopic is not simply the discourse of the slave as such; it is rather a discourse that is at once the expression and evidence of
6. Torture, Psychoanalysis and Beyond from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I examined the problem of slave-speech under the heading of the ‘Aesopic’: how a slave, whose speech can only have public standing when it is extracted through legal torture, can nonetheless transform the obscenity of such restrictions into inventive utterance. I also argued that psychoanalysis was
thecontemporary discourse that affirms the speech of slaves, against the depredations of authoritarian dispensations. Yet, by this very affirmation, psychoanalysis should also alert us to the centrality of torture in the formation and maintenance of human polities. Torture is historically variable in its means and uses, and, if I
7. Man is a Swarm Animal from:
Psychoanalysis is an Antiphilosophy
Abstract: The previous chapter ended with a dilemma: if the human is that ‘living being’ which can actually be separated from what once was held to be its essence, that is, ‘language’, what possible effectivity – whether of diagnosis or treatment – is left to psychoanalysis? The ongoing psychiatric, pharmaceutical and philosophical assault against psychoanalysis is one thing; the loss of its very basis for being is quite another. The first, as I have shown throughout this book, is hardly the threat to psychoanalysis that it is often supposed to be; but the second would be fatal. The second, in fact,
Chapter 2 The Photo-text from:
Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: In the mid- to late 1930s, a new sub-genre of documentary developed in America. Magazine articles reporting the effects of the Depression were relying increasingly on the immediacy of visual impact, and the FSA’s photographic file soon became the primary source of images. In January 1936,
Survey Graphicwas the first non-governmental magazine to feature an extended article on the programmes of what was then the Resettlement Administration, publishing photographs of sharecroppers and tenant farmers in the South. By the end of 1936, other picture magazines, notably those of the Luce empire,Fortune,LifeandLook, had also featured RA
Chapter 5 Landscape, Navigation and Cartography from:
Muriel Rukeyser and Documentary
Abstract: Throughout the chapter, I refer to Rukeyser’s visualisation and utilisation of the landscape as site of ‘cultural practice’. In
Chapter 5 Virginia Woolf’s Idea of a Party from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Randall Bryony
Abstract: The rhythm of Virginia Woolf’s daily existence in early adulthood was largely dictated by the social obligations of a young English woman of her class, a round of activities including regular attendance at, and hosting of, a variety of different parties. Lunch- and tea-parties she often found simply dull; evening-parties, however, were much more difficult for both Woolf and her sister Vanessa. It was not only that the young women frequently felt awkward and out of place at such events (in a diary entry for 15 July 1903, Virginia claims that she and Vanessa frequently spoke to no-one for an
Chapter 6 Proustian Peristalsis: from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Ellison David R.
Abstract: The reader might wonder whether John Steinbeck’s amusing statement on ‘the nature of parties’ applies exclusively to the novel in which it appears, or whether it has a broader applicability.
Cannery Row(1945), set in Monterey, California, during the Great Depression, is a concatenation of short scenes tied together by two parties – one which takes place about halfway through the book, and which is disastrous in its results, and a second one, which is planned as an act of atonement for the first one. A group of unemployed or underemployed men usually referred to as ‘The Boys’ by the narrator
Chapter 10 The Party In Extremis in D. H. Lawrence’s Women in Love from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Norris Margot
Abstract: In
Women in Love,¹ D. H. Lawrence created some of the most intense representations of early twentieth-century English parties to be found. Published in 1920, the novel had been completed in 1917, and it was difficult for contemporaries not to read the party sequences as recreations of the author’s interactions with Lady Ottoline Morrell and her circle at her Oxfordshire country home, Garsington Manor.² Lawrence and his wife Frieda were among the very first guests invited to Garsington – to attend a small birthday-party for Morrell on 16 June 1915 – and they were frequent and sometimes contentious guests there in the
Chapter 11 Bohemian Retrospects: from:
The Modernist Party
Author(s) Waddell Nathan
Abstract: The English dramatist Ashley Dukes wrote in
The Scene Is Changed(1942) that immediately before the First World War he frequented the Café Royal on Regent Street in London, where, with such artists as Jacob Epstein, Henri Gaudier-Brzeska, Christopher Nevinson and Robert Bevan, among others, he would talk ‘about the world, the inevitability of war, Marinetti’s futurism or Ezra Pound’s verse, or the paper that Wyndham Lewis was bringing out calledBlast’.² This ‘lucky’ time, as Dukes put it, of intermingling artists and impresarios sharply contrasted with the world to come after 1918, a world ambivalently characterised by ‘deliverance and
Chapter 3 Forms of Recovery and Renewal: from:
Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: It might at first appear an irony: the peak in anxieties about the end of travel coincides, almost exactly, with what has been described as the ‘renaissance of the travel book’ (see for example, Graves 2003). But this convergence in the late 1970s and 1980s is more likely an expression of a broad literary and cultural engagement with questions of travel in a world increasingly on the move, increasingly interconnected. The publication of Bruce Chatwin’s
In Patagoniain 1977, alongside that of Patrick Leigh Fermor’sA Time of Gifts, is often given as the literary historical moment in which travel
Chapter 6 W. G. Sebald’s Travels through ‘das unentdeckte Land’: from:
Travellers' Tales of Wonder
Abstract: It seems fitting for a study in contemporary literary history to culminate in a reading of W. G. Sebald. The body of work he brought into expression from the late 1980s through to his death in a car accident in 2001, not far from his adopted home of some twenty years near Norwich, England, was itself a culmination, the harvest of a long personal apprenticeship: a German émigré, Sebald had been active as an academic in England since the 1960s, and was a professor of European literature at the University of East Anglia when his first major ‘non-academic’ work, the
Book Title: Material Inscriptions-Rhetorical Reading in Practice and Theory
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Warminski Andrzej
Abstract: This monograph provides readings of literary and philosophical texts that work through the rhetoric of tropes to the material inscription at the origin of these texts. The book focuses on the practice and pedagogical value of rhetorical reading. Its readings follow an itinerary from poetic texts (such as those by Wordsworth and Keats) through theoretical or philosophical texts (by Descartes and Nietzsche) to narrative fiction (by Henry James). The book also contains two essays on Paul de Man and literary theory and an interview on the topic of "Deconstruction at Yale." All three of these latter texts are explicitly about the inescapable function and importance of the rhetoric of tropes for any critical reading or literary study worthy of the name. As Andrzej Warminski demonstrates, ‘rhetorical reading’ is a species of ‘deconstructive reading’—in the full ‘de Manian’ sense—but one that, rather than harkening back to a past over and done with, would open the texts to a different future. Key Features: New readings of texts by Wordsworth, Keats, Descartes, Nietzsche, and Henry James Essays and an interview on Paul de Man and ‘Deconstruction at Yale’ Reflects on and exemplifies the pedagogical value of ‘de Manian’ rhetorical reading Attempts to open a future for 'deconstructive' or 'de Manian' reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt5hh2hp
Chapter 7 Ending Up/Taking Back (with Two Postscripts on Paul de Manʹs Historical Materialism) from:
Material Inscriptions
Abstract: Paul de Man’s work – his writing, his teaching – had and continues to have a way of getting under people’s skin.² (Indeed, as de Man himself said at one lecture occasion, this is the moment when things become interesting: “when one gets under people’s skin, when some resistance develops …”) Among the many statements and pronouncements that have succeeded in provoking this kind of response, perhaps one of the most notorious, one that seems to have rankled more intensely and for longer, is the well-known sentence toward the end of “Semiology and Rhetoric”: “This will in fact be the
Chapter 8 The Future Past of Literary Theory from:
Material Inscriptions
Abstract: In order to fulfill the didactic assignment and talk about the future of literary theory,¹ one might as well begin with the question of the
presentof literary theory: what is, what would or could be, “literary theory” today? If one can judge by the signs of the times, then the most direct answer to the question would be: “Not much.” Not much these days could qualify as “literary theory,” not much todayisliterary theory – at least in comparison to the fabled heyday of literary theory during the (late) 1960s and 1970s. In comparison to the various projects
Book Title: Happy Endings in Hollywood Cinema-Cliche, Convention and the Final Couple
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): MacDowell James
Abstract: The Hollywood ‘happy ending’ has long been considered among the most famous and standardised features in the whole of narrative filmmaking. Yet, while ceaselessly invoked, this notorious device has received barely any detailed attention from the field of film studies. This book is thus the first in-depth examination of one of the most overused and under-analysed concepts in discussions of popular cinema. What exactly is the 'happy ending'? Is it simply a cliché, as commonly supposed? Why has it earned such an unenviable reputation? What does it, or can it, mean? Concentrating especially on conclusions featuring an ultimate romantic union – the final couple – this wide-ranging investigation probes traditional associations between the 'happy ending' and homogeneity, closure, ‘unrealism’, and ideological conservatism, testing widespread assumptions against the evidence offered by a range of classical and contemporary films. Key Features: Defines key features of the Hollywood ‘happy ending’ through detailed textual analysis and theoretical debate. Traces the historical development of the scholarly approaches taken towards the cinematic ‘happy ending’ Reassesses the concept of cinematic closure and its relationship to genre, ideology and ‘unrealism’
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt5hh2m4
1. INTRODUCTION: from:
Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: In September 2010, Maghrebi-French filmmaker Rachid Bouchareb’s seventh feature film,
Hors-la-loi, a gangster film set against the backdrop of the Algerian war for independence, was released across cinemas in France. Made for a budget of €20m, released on more than 400 prints and starring Jamel Debbouze – a French-born actor of Moroccan immigrant parents and one of French cinema’s biggest stars –Hors-la-loienjoyed the kind of distribution and marketing conditions reserved for only the most high-profile French mainstream productions. The film aimed to capitalise on the success of Bouchareb’s Second World War epic,Indigènes(2006), which attracted over three
2. THE (MAGHREBI-)FRENCH CONNECTION: from:
Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: In many respects, and with few notable exceptions, Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmaking in France during the 1980s and 1990s has been characterised in both critical and academic discourse by notions of peripheral and auteur-led modes of production and limited exposure to niche audiences, not to mention struggles relating to funding, distribution and exhibition (Bluher 2001). The films have often been treated by academics and critics as a kind of socio-cultural document, rather than an entertainment ‘product’ aimed at mass audiences: a cinema more of interest to sociologists, journalists and academics as a reflection of contemporary socio-political realities facing
3. COLONIAL FRACTURE AND THE COUNTER-HERITAGE FILM from:
Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: As suggested in the previous chapter, the 2000s have been marked by a qualitative move towards the mainstream for a number of directors and actors of Maghrebi origin, a shift that has led to a greater variety of genres being used by these filmmakers in their work. At the heart of this chapter is an attempt to understand how what will be termed the counter-heritage cinema of Maghrebi-French directors in the 2000s engages with wider public debates around the memorialisation of France’s colonial past (see for example Chevènement 2001; Rousso 1998; Ricoeur 2004; Blanchard
et al. 2006). Writing in the
4. OF SPACES AND DIFFERENCE IN THE FILMS OF ABDELLATIF KECHICHE from:
Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: In previous chapters of this book, it has been argued that Maghrebi-French and North African émigré filmmaking has undergone a transformation in the 2000s that brought certain filmmakers firmly into the mainstream. In the case of actor, writer and director Abdellatif Kechiche, a different (but no less significant) kind of evolution has taken place.
5. HOME, DISPLACEMENT AND THE MYTH OF RETURN: from:
Post-beur Cinema
Abstract: Tony Gatlif’s award-winning feature film
Exils(2004) begins with darkness, followed by a shot of what initially appears to be the contours of an unidentified, barren landscape. As the camera pulls back, the image is in fact revealed to be the naked back of Zano (Romain Duris), the French son ofpied noirexiles. The opening scene reaches its chaotic crescendo: Zano surveys the view of thepéripheriquefrom the window of his high-rise apartment, before sending a glass of beer crashing to the street below; revolutionary slogans, delivered in Spanish and English to a strident rhythm, boom from the
5 Introduction to Madame Bovary (1965) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: Ever since its publication in 1857,
Madame Bovaryhas been one of the most discussed books in the history of world literature. Despite the distinction and importance of his other novels, Flaubert had to reconcile himself to the fact that he became known, once and forever, as the author ofMadame Bovary. The popularity of the novel has increased rather than diminished with time. Numberless translations exist in various languages; the word “bovarysme” has become part of the French language; the myth surrounding the figure of Emma Bovary is so powerful that, as in the case of Don Quixote, or
6 Introduction to The Portable Rousseau (1973) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The notion of textual allegory, as it derives from the
Social Contract,provides the generalizing principle which makes it possible to consider theotropical or ethical allegories as particularized versions of this generative model and thus to break down the significance of such thematic distinctions. It also implies that the terminology of generality, particularity, and generative power has a degree of referential undecidability which should exclude any simplified metaphorical use of these terms, while anticipating the failure to achieve such vigilance, or such immunity to rhetorical seduction. If, for example, we consider the introduction of a theological dimension into the political
11 Hommage à Georges Poulet (1982) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The first essay by Georges Poulet I ever read was in an ephemeral avant-garde review,
Sang Nouveau, published some years earlier in the 1930s at Charleroi. The piece was signed with a pseudonym, “Georges Thialet,” and dealt with what now appears a somewhat odd grouping of four contemporary English novelists: Huxley, Priestley, Lawrence, and Joyce. Never had I heard literature talked about in quite that way, with an inner intensity that went far beyond critical evaluation, historical narration, or formal description – although this description, especially in the case of Huxley and Joyce, was both tantalizing and exact. Later, at the
13 Reply to Raymond Geuss (1983) from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: The tenuous relationships between the disciplines of philosophy and literary theory have recently been strengthened by a development which, at least in this country and over the last fifty years, is somewhat unusual. Literary theorists never dispensed with a certain amount of philosophical readings and references, but this does not mean that there always was an active engagement between the two institutionalized academic fields. Students of philosophy, on the other hand, can legitimately and easily do without the critical investigation of literary theorists, past or present; it is certainly more important for a literary theorist to read Wittgenstein than for
23 Literature Z: from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Abstract: In the second part of the essay
Truth and Falsity(pp. 512–15), Nietzsche sets up what appears to be a contrast, a polarity, between the man of “science” and the man of “art.” By a close reading of this section, you are invited (1) to discuss the structure of this opposition and (2) to examine its implications with regard to the relative value of both activities, in themselves as well as with regard to history.
Introduction from:
The Paul de Man Notebooks
Author(s) McQuillan Martin
Abstract: The shape of the de Manian oeuvre has for the most part been determined by post hoc rationalisations. During his lifetime he published two editions of
Blindness and Insight(1971, revised edition 1983) andAllegories of Readingin 1979. These monographs, if that is what they are, bring cohesion to collections of essays by de Man in more or less satisfactory ways.The Rhetoric of Romanticism(1984) was planned for a similar purpose during de Man’s final years and he also agreed a structure with Lindsay Waters for the book that becameCritical Writings1953 to 1978 (published posthumously in
Book Title: Unfinished Worlds-Hermeneutics, Aesthetics and Gadamer
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Author(s): Davey Nicholas
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer's poetics completely overturns the European aesthetic tradition. By concentrating on the experience of meaning, Unfinished Worlds shows how Gadamer's philosophical hermeneutics transforms aesthetics into a mode of attentive practice. It has deep implications for all of the humanities, and how we can understand the meaning of poetry, art, literature, history and theology. His emphasis on participation promises an approach that will revolutionise aesthetic and hermeneutic practice, and gives us new ways to think about the cultural productivity and social legitimacy of the humanities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3366/j.ctt9qdrzb
Introduction: from:
Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: If art moves, understanding moves. Schleiermacher and Dilthey showed how within hermeneutics, understanding upholds itself by a constant, irresolvable and inconclusive movement between part and whole. The philosophy of Hans-Georg Gadamer uniquely transfers insights relating to the movement of understanding to the question of aesthetic attentiveness. In his thought, aesthetic contemplation no longer attends to changeless forms but participates in the movement of a work’s constitutive elements. Aesthetic contemplation is no longer passive but an active participant (
theoros) in the bringing forth what a work can disclose. Where Dilthey laments the inconclusiveness of understanding, Gadamer celebrates it. The ceaseless movement
1. Hermeneutics and Aesthetics: from:
Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Jan Faye’s book
After Postmodernism: A Naturalistic Reconstruction of the Humanitiesreworks the hermeneutical part–whole relationship within the following conceptual confi guration: all expressions of human communication fall into an ‘intention–context–dependency, persuasion’ nexus.¹ Leaving aside the question of the persuasiveness of aesthetical communications, which will be discussed later, the intellectual context of Gadamer’s reformation of aesthetics requires a preliminary mapping. The important claims that Gadamer makes about the cognitive content of art and the transformative character of aesthetic experience are not established by strict deductive reasoning or by a dialectic of assertion and counter-assertion. Gadamer’s is a
4. Theoros and Spectorial Participation from:
Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s reconstruction of aesthetic experience as a participatory act offers a new valence to the part–whole relationship within hermeneutics. The emphasis given to experiential movement and transformational understanding implies participation in a part–whole nexus. In traditional literary hermeneutics, the part–whole relationship is deployed by the knowing subject as a contextualising procedure of understanding: a section of a text is explained by being set into an exposition of the whole. For Gadamer, however, the part–whole structure is not a fixed epistemological device utilised by the interpreter to set a work into a given context but an ontological
5. Presentation, Appearance and Likeness from:
Unfinished Worlds
Abstract: Gadamer’s critique of aesthetic subjectivity insists that, phenomenologically speaking, an involvement with art demonstrates that the experience of meaning has primacy over the experience of aesthetic properties. If meaning results from the conveyance of significance within bodies of semantic relations (which Gadamer describes collectively as linguisticality), meaning’s mode of being, whether visual or literary, is
presentational. With characteristic restraint, this simple move in Gadamer’s aesthetics prompts a major ontological shift in thinking about the ancient but nonetheless continuingly contentious question of art’s relation to reality. The prominence of word and image in the experience of meaning attests to the ontological
Introduction: from:
Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Moran James
Abstract: Where did modernism happen? What were its important places and distinctive geographies? These are not new questions and, until relatively recently, might have been thought settled. A powerful and well-rehearsed narrative about modernism defines it as essentially metropolitan and internationalist in character, recalling that the majority of high-modernist writers and artists were exiles or émigrés, and that their texts are conspicuously polyglot, heteronomous, and fashioned from diverse cultural materials. Modernism, according to Malcolm Bradbury, was ‘an art of cities’ and the jolting energies of life in the major European capitals can be read in the fractured, discontinuous forms of modernist
Chapter 9 Between the Islands: from:
Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Brannigan John
Abstract: In June 1939,
The Timesreported the disappearance of the Cocos Islands in the Indian Ocean, when a flying boat called theGuba,which was seeking to establish a route from Britain to Australia that did not involve crossing the Mediterranean, failed to find the islands.¹ The islands were found again the following day, when theGubareported less cloud cover, but the momentary disappearance sparked an editorial and a string of letters in the following days about the peculiar tendencies of islands. ‘Continents at least stay, for practical purposes, where they are’, declared theTimeseditorial, ‘no matter with
Chapter 10 The Idea of North: from:
Regional Modernisms
Author(s) Alexander Neal
Abstract: There is no doubting the importance of ideas of place in Basil Bunting’s poetry, particularly in his major work,
Briggflatts(1966), where Northumbria emerges as a luminous and multi-faceted affective terrain. Bunting’s representations of place are also complex and multi-layered, issuing from a geographical imagination that thrives on contradictions. His regional modernism is characterised both by the imaginative centrality of northern landscapes and cultural paradigms to his writing, and by the refraction of such local and regional attachments through a self-consciously international modernist poetics.Briggflattsexplores its themes of dislocation and homecoming through an intense imaginative engagement with the landscapes,
Foretaste from:
Sensual Relations
Abstract: This book is about the life of the senses in society, and the challenges posed to both classical and contemporary social and cultural theory by reflecting on the ever-shifting construction of the sensorium in history and across cultures. The title, “Sensual Relations,” indicates that the focus will be on the interplay of the senses rather than on each sense in isolation. Too often studies of the senses will consider each of the five senses in turn, as though sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch each constituted a completely independent domain of experience, without exploring how the senses interact with each
CHAPTER 3 On the Pleasures of Fasting, Appearing, and Being Heard in the Massim World from:
Sensual Relations
Abstract: The Massim region of Papua New Guinea is known for the natural beauty of its volcanic islands, coral reefs, and emerald lagoons. It also has a reputation for being the site of the “Isles of Love”—a reputation based on Bronislaw Malinowski’s depiction of the erotic beliefs and practices of the Trobriand Islanders in
The Sexual Life of Savagesand the reprise of this motif in Paul Theroux’sThe Happy Isles of Oceania.
CHAPTER 6 Comparison of Massim and Middle Sepik Ways of Sensing the World from:
Sensual Relations
Abstract: The purpose of this chapter is to present a synthetic account of the ways in which the senses are customarily distinguished, characterized, and articulated to each other in the sensory orders of the Massim and Middle Sepik regions of Papua New Guinea. Comparison of the two sensory orders will in turn bring out how the manner in which the senses are socialized (or “enculturated”) mediates the ways in which society and the cosmos are sensed. In effect, the systematic relationships between sensations within and among different modalities provide the model in terms of which selves are constituted and the relationships
Book Title: Cops, Teachers, Counselors-Stories from the Front Lines of Public Service
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Musheno Michael
Abstract: Whether on a patrol beat, in social service offices, or in public school classrooms, street-level workers continually confront rules in relation to their own beliefs about the people they encounter. Cops, Teachers, Counselors is the first major study of street-level bureaucracy to rely on storytelling. Steven Maynard-Moody and Michael Musheno collect the stories told by these workers in order to analyze the ways that they ascribe identities to the people they encounter and use these identities to account for their own decisions and actions. The authors show us how the world of street-level work is defined by the competing tensions of law abidance and cultural abidance in a unique study that finally allows cops, teachers, and counselors to voice their own views of their work.Steven Maynard-Moody is Director of the Policy Research Institute and Professor of Public Administration at the University of Kansas.Michael Musheno is Professor of Justice and Policy Studies at Lycoming College and Professor Emeritus of Justice Studies, Arizona State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.11924
3. Story Worlds, Narratives, and Research from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: The purpose of our research is simple, even elemental: to collect and examine street-level workers’ everyday work stories to uncover their judgments as they see them. This simple goal belies the challenge of the interpretive task because these stories are often ambiguous and multilayered: they reference both rules and morality to defend decisions, reveal internalized as well as interactive conflicts, and document shifting positions over time. These stories are not philosophical discourses on law or fairness. They are pragmatic expressions about acts and identities and assertions of dominant yet jumbled societal views of good and bad behavior and worthy and
4. Physical and Emotional Spaces from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: [Joe] was a student I had for English two years ago. He had a very likeable personality but also a highly explosive temper, and he was very inclined to do as little as possible. Joe, like many of our students, had an unstable family life. He was living with his grandmother at the time he attended [urban middle school]. He had little contact with his father, and he only made vague references to having seen his mother.
[Part II. Introduction] from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Street-level workers care as much about who a person is as about what the person has done. Identity matters as much as acts. By identity, we mean how we come to recognize ourselves and each other through group belonging.¹ All of us belong to certain groups: this is to say that we occupy subject positions. For example, street-level workers belong to various occupational groups and are recognized for their belonging to racial, class, gender, and sexual groupings. Each of these group memberships (for example, working-class, white, female, heterosexual) represents what we call a subject position. Each subject position is filled
7. Putting a Fix on People: from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: I ran into a prostitute named [Angela], and she’s thirty-nine years old, she’s a white female, and she has no teeth. According to her, a black guy beat her up one time and knocked her teeth out. And she’s a chronic alcoholic, and not only that, she’s pregnant. I had contact with her once and I made the effort to calling a pilot program that we have here called Care Seven. It is part of a master’s program for psychologists and counselors. They came out and talked to her for a little bit and did no good. The very next
[Part III. Introduction] from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: Street-level decision making is complexly moral and contingent rather than narrowly rule bound and fixed. A fundamental dilemma—perhaps the defining characteristic—of street-level work is that the needs of individual citizen-clients exist in tension with the demands and limits of rules. This does not mean that rules do not permeate all aspects of street-level work (they do) or that most street-level actions are not consistent with law and policy (they are). The most common situation may be that the rules effectively fit the complexity of workers’ judgments about citizen-clients. When the rules and standard procedures fit the situation, street-level
10. Street-Level Worker Knows Best from:
Cops, Teachers, Counselors
Abstract: This story is kind of an example of—it reminded me of this yesterday because [the vocational rehabilitation counselors] were talking about how in some organizations some people are angry at us because they feel that we decide for the client what they are going to do and we don’t let them do what they want to, and our answer to that is, “Well, sometimes we don’t let them do what they want to because it would not be practical or it would not be feasible.”¹
Book Title: Utopia in Performance-Finding Hope at the Theater
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Dolan Jill
Abstract: "Jill Dolan is the theatre's most astute critic, and this new book is perhaps her most important. Utopia in Performance argues with eloquence and insight how theatre makes a difference, and in the process demonstrates that scholarship matters, too. It is a book that readers will cherish and hold close as a personal favorite, and that scholars will cite for years to come."---David Román, University of Southern CaliforniaWhat is it about performance that draws people to sit and listen attentively in a theater, hoping to be moved and provoked, challenged and comforted? In
Utopia in Performance, Jill Dolan traces the sense of visceral, emotional, and social connection that we experience at such times, connections that allow us to feel for a moment not what a better world might look like, but what it might feel like, and how that hopeful utopic sentiment might become motivation for social change.She traces these "utopian performatives" in a range of performances, including the solo performances of feminist artists Holly Hughes, Deb Margolin, and Peggy Shaw; multicharacter solo performances by Lily Tomlin, Danny Hoch, and Anna Deavere Smith; the slam poetry event Def Poetry Jam; The Laramie Project; Blanket, a performance by postmodern choreographer Ann Carlson; Metamorphoses by Mary Zimmerman; and Deborah Warner's production of Medea starring Fiona Shaw. While the book richly captures moments of "feeling utopia" found within specific performances, it also celebrates the broad potential that performance has to provide a forum for being human together; for feeling love, hope, and commonality in particular and historical (rather than universal and transcendent) ways.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.119520
chapter three Finding Our Feet in One Another’s Shoes: from:
Utopia in Performance
Abstract: Utopia can be a placeholder for social change, a no-place that the apparatus of theater—its liveness, the potential it holds for real social exchange, its mortality, its openness to human interactions that life outside this magical space prohibits—can model productively. In the last chapter, I found these feelings of utopia in Holly Hughes, Peggy Shaw, and Deb Margolin’s interactions with their audiences. Their stories directly addressed spectators and modeled an ephemeral but powerful intersubjectivity that let spectators experience affectively, if fleetingly, what utopia might feel like. This chapter considers multiple-character solo performances by comedienne and film and stage
chapter four Def Poetry Jam: from:
Utopia in Performance
Abstract: Performance, as I argued by discussing monopolylogue performers in the last chapter, offers a way to practice imagining new forms of social relationships. I believe in theater’s use value as a place to fantasize how peace and justice, equality and truly participatory democracy might take hold sometime in a near or distant future, as well as in theater’s value as a place in which to connect emotionally and spiritually with other people. Seeing performance requires that we listen attentively to the speech of others, that we hear people speak and feel their humanity and its connections with our own. Performance
Book Title: The Fate of Law- Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Kearns Thomas R.
Abstract: Assesses the impact of intellectual and political movements of the late twentieth century on law and legal theory
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.12976
Editorial Introduction from:
The Fate of Law
Author(s) Kearns Thomas R.
Abstract: Legal scholarship, and law itself, is undergoing one of those occasional periods of rupture in which traditional assumptions no longer seem adequate or satisfactory. Law is said to be “turning outward” in search of new grounding;¹ legal scholarship seems to be undergoing a rapid “rotation”² in which attempts are made to accommodate the contradictory and conflicting challenges of deontological liberalism, natural law, pragmatism, interpretive social science, economics, and several varieties of critical social theory.³ Some of those challenges are regarded as potent enough to II distort the purposes of law and threaten its very existence.”⁴ Others promise a way of
Disciplines, Subjectivity, and Law from:
The Fate of Law
Author(s) West Robin
Abstract: Professor Sarat has asked that I address this question: Given the modern and postmodern disillusionment with reason, how should we criticize or evaluate a law? How should we go about criticizing law, if not by reference to general principles derived from reason? What does it mean, given the “death of reason,” to ask whether a particular law-say, a statute outlawing “surrogacy contracts,” or a judicial decision requiring the busing of schoolchildren to achieve integrated schools, or a law criminalizing sexual sodomy, or a constitutional provision or constitutional interpretation invalidating state statutes that criminalize abortions on demand-is a good law or
A Journey Through Forgetting: from:
The Fate of Law
Author(s) Kearns Thomas R.
Abstract: Leviathan, a sea monster symbolizing evil in the Old Testament and in Christian literature generally,¹ was the figure famously chosen by Thomas Hobbes to symbolize the State. Still under Hobbes’s influence, we might today—perhaps in a fitful, nightmarish sleep—conjure up similar images of law as a frightening, bloodthirsty beast, but with this difference: the modern Leviathan would be as intent on concealing its bloodletting activities, on covering its bloody tracks, as on slaking its deadly thirst. That these images seem to apply to contemporary law, that law seems intent on (and is largely successful at) threatening violence while
Book Title: Staging Philosophy-Intersections of Theater, Performance, and Philosophy
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Saltz David Z.
Abstract: The fifteen original essays in
Staging Philosophymake useful connections between the discipline of philosophy and the fields of theater and performance and use these insights to develop new theories about theater. Each of the contributors-leading scholars in the fields of performance and philosophy-breaks new ground, presents new arguments, and offers new theories that will pave the way for future scholarship.Staging Philosophyraises issues of critical importance by providing case studies of various philosophical movements and schools of thought, including aesthetics, analytic philosophy, phenomenology, deconstruction, critical realism, and cognitive science. The essays, which are organized into three sections-history and method, presence, and reception-take up fundamental issues such as spectatorship, empathy, ethics, theater as literature, and the essence of live performance. While some essays challenge assertions made by critics and historians of theater and performance, others analyze the assumptions of manifestos that prescribe how practitioners should go about creating texts and performances. The first book to bridge the disciplines of theater and philosophy,Staging Philosophywill provoke, stimulate, engage, and ultimately bring theater to the foreground of intellectual inquiry while it inspires further philosophical investigation into theater and performance.David Krasneris Associate Professor of Theater Studies, African American Studies, and English at Yale University. His books includeA Beautiful Pageant: African American Theatre, Drama, and Performance in the Harlem Renaissance, 1910-1920andRenaissance, Parody, and Double Consciousness in African American Theatre, 1895-1910. He is co-editor of the series Theater: Theory/Text/Performance.David Z. Saltzis Associate Professor of Theatre Studies and Head of the Department of Theatre and Film Studies at the University of Georgia. He is coeditor ofTheater Journaland is the principal investigator of the innovative Virtual Vaudeville project at the University of Georgia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.147168
SIX Embodiment and Presence: from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Jaeger Suzanne M.
Abstract: The following discussion addresses recent contentions in performance theory about the concept of presence. Two conflicting viewpoints are evident. First there are those for whom the lived phenomenon of presence still makes sense and is borne out in practical experience.¹ Presence is thought of as “the
lingua franca” for many stage performers, acting teachers, critics, and audiences. Second are poststructuralist interpreters of performance art who reject the possibility of any singularly meaningful experience of self-presence. Experiences of presence are contested by solely linguistic explanations of the nature of meaning. The challenge, therefore, for a performance theory that aims to af‹
EIGHT Technique from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Lutterbie John
Abstract: When techniques are broadly defined—as process-oriented and involving any systematic and goal-directed human action—one finds them in every creative human activity: in sports, painting, dancing, playing musical instruments, and acting; in physics, chemistry, medicine, and astronomy; in education, administration, and sex. Joseph Agassi argues that magic consists of techniques, though unscientific ones.¹ The swing-era ballad “Oh, Look At Me Now” mentions “technique of kisses.” But techniques can also be much more narrowly defined to include only fully articulated and independently recognized practices that are specifically identified and studied as techniques (the “Alexander technique”).
NINE Presenting Objects, Presenting Things from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Rayner Alice
Abstract: Theater habitually situates abstractions in material realities. If the philosophical debates over the meanings and functions of presence initially draw from theater, practice returns them there, materializes and frames not only the qualitative sense of heightened being or charisma and the temporality of disappearance but the occasion of perception and the paradoxes of its partiality. All these elements have been carefully and well discussed in the essays in this anthology by Philip Auslander, Noël Carroll, Jon Erickson, and Suzanne Jaeger. Instead of duplicating their efforts, I want to consider one way in which theater presents—not so much to examine
TEN Infiction and Outfiction: from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Saltz David Z.
Abstract: According to the online art lexicon ArtLex, what distinguishes “performance art” from “theater” is that “ theatrical performances present illusions of events, while performance art presents actual events as art.”¹ This conception of theater has a long history, one that we can trace back at least as far as Plato. In particular, the assumption that theatrical performance presents illusory, as opposed to real, events was an orthodoxy in twentiethcentury theory, from the Prague structuralists through existentialism and phenomenology and, most emphatically, semiotics and poststructuralist theory. The standard view is that a theatrical performance is a kind of text whose primary
TWELVE Perception, Action, and Identification in the Theater from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Nanay Bence
Abstract: My endeavor in this chapter is to examine the ways in which the general structure of perception is modified in the case of the reception of theater performances. First, perception in general is examined. I will then argue that a basic characteristic of perception is that it is sometimes interdependent with action. Next I turn to the special case of the perception of a theatrical performance—what I call
theater perception—examining the role of perception for the possibility of action in the case of watching a performance. I contend that theater perception cannot be sufficiently analyzed without taking into
THIRTEEN Empathy and Theater from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Krasner David
Abstract: In this essay I examine “empathy” insofar as it is a possible audience response in live theater. In particular I attend to empathy not merely as an emotional response but as something possessing cognitive function as well. My main concern will be with the idea of a theatrical experience that evokes empathy, that makes use of empathetic responses as part of the mechanism of artistic comprehension, and that emphasizes emotional responses as a unique, as well as a rational, activity. The subject of emotion in fiction and art has been the central focus in several recent studies, but less has
FIFTEEN Theatricality, Convention, and the Principle of Charity from:
Staging Philosophy
Author(s) Quinn Michael L.
Abstract: One of the crucial words that remains in the vocabularies of both the practical theater and theater theory, though in a fairly unexamined state, is
convention. From the sociological standpoint of Elizabeth Burns the “theatrical metaphor” generated conventions that served as constitutive agreements for knowledge.¹ Yet this metaphor is also, for her, a “mode of perception,” a basic phenomenological category like those described by Ernst Cassirer or Susanne K. Langer, which produces the social concepts that make theater—and any other concomitant forms of analogical “theatricality” in other contexts—possible.² Theater for Burns, then, is not a kind of knowledge
Performance and Perils of Realism in the Study of International Politics from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Holsti K. J.
Abstract: A long tradition of research, interpretation, and speculation about international politics goes under the name of realism. Although some dispute the pedigree as simply a “construction” of contemporary analysts, in fact a number of writers whose roster includes Machiavelli, Rousseau, Meinecke, von Gentz, Morgenthau, and Waltz, to name just a few, share a number of common themes such as their images of the world, their understanding of historical processes, the dilemmas and paradoxes that are peculiar to states that exist in a condition of anarchy, and the normative primacy of security in such an environment. They each made unique contributions
Realism and the Democratic Peace: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Midlarsky Manus I.
Abstract: For all of the now vast amount of research done on the democratic peace, there is still a chasm in that research that has only been very partially filled. Simply put, it is the virtual absence of the international security setting. This is all the more surprising because of the growth of international security as a field and the rather obvious concern that scholars in the field should have for the
internationalin international relations. Perhaps it is a reaction to the emphasis on polarity during the long cold war period when structural relations dominated much of the thinking in
Alternative and Critical Perspectives from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Smith Steve
Abstract: This chapter is a rewritten version of the paper originally presented on one of the millennial reflections panels, but the basic argument and structure of the paper remain the same. I have kept the argument and structure largely because I was one of the few who wrote my paper in exactly the format requested by the organizers; that is, I wrote a paper that addressed each of the six questions the panel organizers asked. My fellow panelists interpreted the invitation in different, and equally legitimate, ways, but none of them answered the precise exam paper they had been sent! At
How We Learned to Escape Physics Envy and to Love Pluralism and Complexity from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Haas Peter M.
Abstract: Students of IR remain divided on the implications of international institutions for the understanding of contemporary international relations. This is largely due, we believe, to the incommensurate epistemological and ontological positions within the discipline of IR that characterize most studies and interpretations of international institutions. In this essay we try to frame a pragmatic-constructivist approach for the study of international institutions,
Alternative, Critical, Political from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Walker R. B. J.
Abstract: This paper offers a necessarily highly condensed argument about what it might mean to make judgments about the state of international relations or international studies as a scholarly discipline from some kind of alternative or critical perspective. I begin by sketching some tentative grounds on which I would presume to make judgments about judgments in this context. I then identify what I take to be four among many possible areas of convergence among the heterogeneous literatures that are currently identified, and disciplined, as alternative and critical. I then conclude by emphasizingmyoverall concern with practices of authorization, both in a specific
Feminist Theory and Gender Studies: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Tickner J. Ann
Abstract: A forty-year retrospect is a difficult challenge for feminist theory and gender studies. For thirty of those years there was almost total silence on gender issues in international relations (IR); women were barely visible as scholars and foreign policy practitioners, as well as in the subject matter of the discipline. The invisibility in the discipline was not because gender was, and for some still is, irrelevant but because international relations, in both its theory and practice, was so thoroughly gendered that, in Cynthia Enloe’s words, no one noticed that women were missing.¹ So clearly, feminist approaches to IR have come
Game Theory in Practice: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Brams Steven J.
Abstract: In the last twenty or so years, there has been a surge of interest in modeling both national security and international political economy issues using the tools of game theory.¹ I will not try to cite this now extensive literature here but instead will (1) outline four major theoretical problems that have bedeviled various attempts at game-theoretic modeling of international relations (IR) and (2) propose an alternative approach, called the “theory of moves,” that is grounded in game theory and that I and others have found attractive in modeling dynamic play. I argue that it captures the thinking of decision
Quantitative International Politics and Its Critics: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Leng Russell J.
Abstract: One way to provide an accounting of the state of quantitative international politics at the turn of the millennium is by evaluating its record against the skepticism of its early critics. Traditional international relations scholars, in fact, took a rather jaundiced view of the scientific study of world politics when the subfield was in its infancy at the beginning of the second half of the twentieth century. One of the most skeptical critiques came from the British classicist Hedley Bull who argued that the scientific approach was “likely to contribute very little to the theory of international relations, and in
Beliefs and Foreign Policy Analysis in the New Millennium from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Walker Stephen G.
Abstract: A main axis of intellectual tension in the area of foreign policy analysis over the past forty years is the issue of the importance of “beliefs”¹ in the explanation and prediction of foreign policy decisions and outcomes. The seminal decision-making approach to foreign policy articulated by Snyder, Bruck, and Sapin at midcentury was partly in reaction to a skewed emphasis by the realist tradition on external circumstances (e. g., the balance of power) and the omission of beliefs in explaining foreign policy decisions.² Snyder and his colleagues argued that this strategy of explanation came at the expense of neglecting the
Public Opinion and Foreign Policy Analysis: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Holsti Ole R.
Abstract: When the International Studies Association was founded in 1958, the cold war was a dominant fact of international relations. To
Security Theory: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kolodziej Edward A.
Abstract: This survey of security theory is divided into two parts. The first defines security as a political concept and phenomenon. This discussion provides a point of departure for reviewing prevailing security theories. The second, and longest, section briefly examines and evaluates the claims of six competing research programs concerned directly or indirectly with security. These include realism, neorealism, economic liberalism, liberal institutionalism, behaviorism, and constructivism. These research programs can be distinguished on the basis of their ontological, epistemological, methodological, and evidentiary assumptions about actors and their behavior. Given space constraints, the discussion will identify only the principal differences between these
Security and Peace: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Bobrow Davis B.
Abstract: The most attractive accomplishment of security and peace studies and policies would be for them to become historical curiosities akin to alchemy, Victorian-era plumbing, or vanquished diseases. A second best would be signs of progress on that road marked by improved understanding and early diagnosis, and—even better—more available and less costly means for prevention and treatment, containment and cure. To extend the medical metaphor, we would then see in the present or in confident prospect reductions in the incidence and severity of insecurity, destruction, casualties, and deaths, and in the opportunity costs of measures to achieve such reductions.
Convergences Between International Security Studies and Peace Studies from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kriesberg Louis
Abstract: International security studies and peace studies are not a single subfield of international relations. Analysts in security studies and those in peace studies have generally viewed themselves and been viewed by others as working in quite different domains. Some persons in each area have been critical or dismissive of the efforts of those in the other. Nevertheless, many persons across both areas actually share significant concerns and questions, such as how to avoid or to limit wars and other violent conflicts. Furthermore, the work being done in each of these domains is increasingly overlapping. To enhance the possibilities of beneficial
Some Thoughts on International Political Economy in the Context of Public Policy Education from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Kudrle Robert T.
Abstract: In the early 1980s I tried to develop an approach to international economic relations for Humphrey Institute public policy students that would combine parsimony with comprehensiveness; I was also serving on the editorial team of
International Studies Quarterly.Both activities led me to think more systematically about the connections between economics and politics than I had done before. I saw no advantage in abandoning the basic theory that seemed reasonably successful in my own discipline of economics, and I had to consider the students. Public policy students with an interest in international affairs care little about the disciplinary origin of
International Political Economy: from:
Millennial Reflections on International Studies
Author(s) Martin Lisa L.
Abstract: International political economy (IPE), perhaps in contrast to the field of international relations (IR) more broadly, is today characterized by growing consensus on theories, methods, analytical frameworks, and important questions. This is not
Book Title: The Chief Concern of Medicine-The Integration of the Medical Humanities and Narrative Knowledge into Medical Practices
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Vannatta Seth
Abstract: Unlike any existing studies of the medical humanities,
The Chief Concern of Medicinebrings to the examination of medical practices a thorough---and clearly articulated---exposition of the nature of narrative. The book builds on the work of linguistics, semiotics, narratology, and discourse theory and examines numerous literary works and narrative "vignettes" of medical problems, situations, and encounters. Throughout, the book presents usable expositions of the ways storytelling organizes itself to allow physicians and other healthcare workers (and even patients themselves) to be more attentive to and self-conscious about the information---the "narrative knowledge"---of the patient's story.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.3157169
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: For the past decade, we have been teaching a course on literature and medicine. Our purpose has been to make medical students and physicians more cognizant of the role of narrative in medical practice and to help them develop skills that make narrative knowledge a useful and important part of their engagement with patients. To this end, in class and elsewhere (see Vannatta, Schleifer, and Crow 2005, 2010), we have attempted to arrive at—or at least circumscribe—a working definition of knowledge in the “humanistic sciences” in relation to what we are (with others) calling “narrative knowledge.” Such knowledge
1 THE FUNCTIONAL REALISM OF MEDICINE from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: While efficacy of training for and utilizing “narrative knowledge” within the practices of medicine— something that Rita Charon has aptly called “ narrative medicine”—has grown and continues to grow in medical education and professional practice (see Charon 2006a for a thorough account), defending its method and aims to the medical establishment remains a difficult task. it seems that the burden of proof of its efficacy and scientific reliability still resides on the shoulders of the practitioners of narrative medicine. Those teaching physiology to first-year medical students seem relatively free of the similar onus of demonstrating in a decisive way
2 MODALITIES OF SCIENCE: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: the present inquiry does not aim at theoretical knowledge like the others (for we are inquiring not in order to know what virtue is, but in order to become good, since otherwise our inquiry would have been of no use), we must examine the nature of actions, namely how we ought to do them. . . . now, that we must act according to the right rule is a common principle
3 THE CHIEF CONCERN OF MEDICINE: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: In this chapter, we examine the concept and function of “narrative knowledge,” both in general and in the practice of medicine. We focus on narrative knowledge in terms of not only the knowledge that a physician-listener can glean from narrative—knowledge that Rita Charon richly describes in her presentation of part of medical practice she calls
narrative medicine—but also the knowledge of narrative itself and how a working understanding of the shape and features of narrative can contribute to successful medical practices (which Charon also describes). There is great controversy concerning the nature of narrative, its “salient” features, its
4 THE LOGIC OF DIAGNOSIS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: In chapters 2 and 3, we examined the practical wisdom of the physician in relation to narrative and, particularly, the chief concern of the narratives patients bring to their physicians. In this chapter, we will continue examining the role of narrative in the practices of medicine, but with particular focus on the ways narrative can contribute to diagnostic skills. Specifically, we will examine the logic of hypothesis formation that Charles Sanders Peirce articulated at the turn of the twentieth century, and we hope to demonstrate that his “logic of abduction,” as he called it, approximates the “practical syllogism” that aristotle
7 DOCTORS LISTENING AND ATTENDING TO PATIENTS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Listening to patients and the illness story is one of the most important skills (
technē) a physician uses during a lifetime of practice. Because the patient history is the most important diagnostic information, listening carefully is of enormous importance. Patients commonly complain that their doctor does not listen. But when patients are heard, they report that their doctor was empathetic. Listening carefully helps build rapport, increases diagnostic accuracy, and improves patient satisfaction. If a doctor has a broad and deep enough knowledge base, has the skills to listen carefully to what the patient has to say, and gets the information
8 NARRATIVE AND MEDICINE: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Throughout Part 2 of this book, we were concerned with storytelling and narrative—with the patient-physician relationship growing out of the encounter of storytelling, the patient’s narrative itself, and a doctor’s ability in listening to narrative. Many experienced physicians develop types of understanding—
phronesis,narrative knowledge, and logic of diagnosis—that, in their functional engagements with narrative and reality, are different from and complementary to the biomedical knowledge of scientific explanation. Such engagements with narrative are at the heart of humanistic understanding. This chapter reexamines the importance of narrative in the practice of medicine from the point of view of
9 NARRATIVE AND EVERYDAY MEDICAL ETHICS: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: Ethical practices—behaviors and relationships that necessarily encompass “good” (versus “bad”) actions—are woven into every aspect of medical practices precisely because health care always is vitally concerned with issues of the nature of well-being (the good life, Aristotle’s
eudaimonia), the nature of interpersonal care (responsibilities of behavior between people, especially in the face of suffering), the maintenance of health and well-being in the larger community (the public and professional roles of physicians and health care workers), and issues of life and death (measures of crucial values). Moreover, the ethics of attitude and action, like the meanings of narrative, is
AFTERWORD: from:
The Chief Concern of Medicine
Abstract: We began this book’s discussion with a philosophical argument that the objects of humanistic understanding obtained through narrative knowledge are real and that this reality is a result of narrative understanding and reflection. This reality is demonstrated in a pragmatic way by attending to the actions that spring from the apprehension of dramatic stories and by the outcomes or consequences resulting from exposure to their literary structure and content. We have demonstrated that the consequences of having studied and reflected on the features of narrative structure, character development and motives, time lines in narrative—in a word, the details and
Introduction: from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Johnson Jenell M.
Abstract: The application of neuroscience to fields beyond medicine¹ has been characterized as revolutionary, akin to the industrial and information revolutions (Lynch 2009, 10) and evidence of the birth of a “neurosociety” in which all domains of life and knowledge production are (or soon will be) under the sign of the “neuro.” Each day, it seems, the popular press reports new neuroscientific findings with breathless wonder. Recent headlines have claimed that neuroscience has the power to read our minds (Sample 2007), erase our memories (Carey 2009), predict our propensity for violence (Harrell 2010), and alter the neural fabric of our identities.
Chapter 3 The Neural Metaphor from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Gotman Kélina
Abstract: When Descartes complained that the Ancients had misunderstood the nature and quality of the passions of the soul, in his work of the same name (1649), he drew on the brain’s mechanisms, as well as the fibrous ligaments called nerves, to describe the motion of the body, soul, and passions. He argued that whereas it appeared that the soul moves the body to act, and injects it with animal spirits, in fact the body moves of its own accord, through various mechanical operations effected by the nerves, the muscles, and the brain; and that the soul, whose thoughts could be
Chapter 5 Neuroscience and the Quest for God from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) May Christopher J.
Abstract: Modern writers such as Will Durant have described the medieval period as an “age of faith” (1950, iii), and despite the danger of gross generalization, in its broad strokes it is difficult for a modern researcher to deny the characterization. In fact, for countless premodern Europeans during the Middle Ages and beyond, belief in God’s divine plan served as an organizing principle through which they understood themselves and their world. Considering the power of the Catholic Church during these centuries, this theistic focus should come as no surprise, nor should it surprise us that many people during this period desired
Chapter 7 Pragmatic Neuroethics and Neuroscience’s Potential to Radically Change Ethics from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Zimmerman Emma
Abstract: Neuroscience research is increasingly informing ethics scholarship and ethics practices under the impetus of the fields of the neuroscience of ethics and of social neuroscience. This neuroturn within the field of ethics promises to enhance understanding of ourselves and of our fellow human beings. It has been argued that this knowledge will be a route to foster happiness in individual lives and the foundation of brain-based ethical norms and behaviors that will lead to greater social well-being (Changeux 1996, 1981). For example, Gazzaniga states that neuroscience will bring radical changes to ethics: “Neuroethics is more than just bioethics for the
Chapter 9 Neuroeconomics: from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Rothschild Casey
Abstract: Neuroeconomicsis a term that has received significant media exposure over the past decade (Bonanno et al. 2008). It has been hailed as a discipline that can answer a number of fundamental questions in the area of economics, while it offers up a new set of findings that can augment and potentially alter standard economic practice (Camerer, Loewenstein, and Prelec 2005). It is, along with its close cousin behavioral economics, one of the fastest growing subdisciplines in the field and even has its own listing in theJournal of Economic Literatureclassification system.¹
Chapter 10 Functional Brain Imaging: from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Fitzpatrick Susan M.
Abstract: Research questions of interest to neuroscientists share a natural overlap with those pursued by scholars studying philosophy, art, music, history, or literature. The common ground is a shared desire to understand the workings of the human mind. What initially attracts someone to study neuroscience, regardless of what aspects of nervous system function an individual career may become focused on (e.g., basic functions of the synapse), is the allure of contributing knowledge that deepens our understanding of our minds. Many neuroscientists want to know how it is that the activities of the cells of the nervous system, individually and collectively, contribute
Afterword: from:
The Neuroscientific Turn
Author(s) Dumit Joseph
Abstract: This book indexes a new neuroscientific turn in what we probably should think of as the neurohelix. If the first twist was neuroscience, the second twist the critical analyses of neuroscience by science and technology studies, the third twist the turning to humanities topics by neuroscientists, and the fourth twist the appropriation of neuroscience results into humanities and social sciences relatively uncritically, then this fifth twist is the mutual engagement of these groups, trying to sort out what we actually have learned from all of these studies of brains as if they were persons, and studies of persons as if
Book Title: The Immaterial Book-Reading and Romance in Early Modern England
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Wall-Randell Sarah
Abstract: In romances-Renaissance England's version of the fantasy novel-characters often discover books that turn out to be magical or prophetic, and to offer insights into their readers' selves.
The Immaterial Bookexamines scenes of reading in important romance texts across genres: Spenser'sFaerie Queene,Shakespeare'sCymbelineandThe Tempest,Wroth'sUrania,and Cervantes'Don Quixote. It offers a response to "material book studies" by calling for a new focus on imaginary or "immaterial" books and argues that early modern romance authors, rather than replicating contemporary reading practices within their texts, are reviving ancient and medieval ideas of the book as a conceptual framework, which they use to investigate urgent, new ideas about the self and the self-conscious mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.4765277
CHAPTER 2 Dreaming of the Book in Cymbeline from:
The Immaterial Book
Abstract: Near the end of
Cymbeline, in a burst of thunder and lightning, the Roman god Jupiter descends, a literaldeus ex machina,to begin the turn of the play from tragedy to comedy.¹ He presents the despairing Posthumus, who is languishing in prison and wishing for death, with a book that offers a riddling prophecy of a happy ending for Posthumus himself and for the British nation. The giving of the book marks the pivotal moment between what one editor of the play has called “four and a half acts of bad faith, cruelty, violence, and revenge”² and a final
CHAPTER 3 “Volumes That I Prize”: from:
The Immaterial Book
Abstract: The Tempestis a play explicitly shaped by books but in which no book explicitly appears. As several critics have recently noticed, while Prospero’s book is central to the action of Shakespeare’s play, it remains a collection of references, an immaterial presence, not an object.The Tempestis “a play about the power of books that refuses to make a spectacle of the book,” as James Kearney puts it; in Paul Yachnin’s formulation, “there are no books in this most bookish of plays.”¹ It is not clear what conventions for the use of books as props were in operation on
Book Title: Strung Together-The Cultural Currency of String Theory as a Scientific Imaginary
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Miller Sean
Abstract: In
Strung Together: The Cultural Currency of String Theory as a Scientific Imaginary,Sean Miller examines the cultural currency of string theory, both as part of scientific discourse and beyond it. He demonstrates that the imaginative component of string theory is both integral and indispensable to it as a scientific discourse. While mathematical arguments provide precise prompts for physical intervention in the world, the imaginary that supplements mathematical argument within string theory technical discourse allows theorists to imagine themselves interacting with the cosmos as an abstract space in such a way that strings and branes as phenomena become substantiated and legitimized. And it is precisely this sort of imaginary-which Miller calls ascientific imaginary-duly substantiated and acculturated, that survives the move from string theory technical discourse to popularizations and ultimately to popular and literary discourses. In effect, a string theory imaginary legitimizes the science itself and helps to facilitate a virtual domestication of a cosmos that was heretofore remote, alien, and incomprehensible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.4999338
CHAPTER 1 Introduction from:
Strung Together
Abstract: String theory is reputed to have begun in 1968, when a postdoctoral fellow named Gabrielle Veneziano, working at CERN,¹ one of the world’s leading high energy physics laboratories, proposed a solution to a vexing problem concerning the interaction of subatomic particles in the nuclei of atoms. He accomplished this by using a formula he had found in an eighteenth-century mathematics text.² Two years later, three other theorists—Yoichiro Nambu, Leonard Susskind, and Holger Nielsen—independently suggested that Veneziano’s redeployment of this antique mathematical function implied that the particles that formed the nuclei of atoms were not actually zero-dimensional point-particles, but
CHAPTER 4 Accessibility and Authority from:
Strung Together
Abstract: The previous chapter surveyed the expository portion of certain representative texts in string theory technical discourse in their development of a scientific imaginary. The content of this exposition is best understood as an imaginary because it is primarily concerned with substantiating an abstract theoretical space as that which is natural. Theorists attempt to expose this abstract theoretical space as something physically coherent by means of a procedural space that intersects with the theoretical space. At the nexus of theoretical and procedural spaces, what the theorists construct gives way to an encounter with natural phenomena in the form of the strings
CHAPTER 5 The Cosmic and Domestic from:
Strung Together
Abstract: The previous chapter investigated the ways in which a selection of string theory popularizations makes an abstract theoretical space accessible through a pedagogical space. Within these string theory popularizations access becomes an imaginative mode that works to distinguish what theorists mark as novel in that space; in particular, images of strings and branes, from what the theorists frame as established yet incomplete knowledge of the cosmos. But on closer scrutiny, this novel string theoretical imaginary betrays, like the exposition within string theory technical discourse, its own incoherences. A radical heterogeneity arises from the way popularizations blend a multitude of string
Book Title: The Real and the Sacred-Picturing Jesus in Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): GATRALL JEFFERSON J. A.
Abstract: The figure of Jesus appears as a character in dozens of nineteenth-century novels, including works by Balzac, Flaubert, Dickens, Dostoevsky, and others.
The Real and the Sacredfocuses in particular on two fiction genres: the Jesus redivivus tale and the Jesus novel. In the former, Christ makes surprise visits to earth, from rural Flanders (Balzac) and Muscovy (Turgenev) to the bustling streets of Paris (Flaubert), Seville (Dostoevsky), Berlin, and Boston. In the latter, the historical Jesus wanders through the picturesque towns and plains of first-century Galilee and Judea, attracting followers and enemies. In short, authors subjected Christ, the second person of the Christian trinity, to the realist norms of secular fiction. Thus the Jesus of nineteenth-century fiction was both situated within a specific time and place, whether ancient or modern, and positioned before the gaze of increasingly daring literary portraitists. The highest artistic challenge for authors was to paint, using mere words, a faithful picture of Jesus in all his humanity. The incongruity of a sacred figure inhabiting secular literary forms nevertheless tested the limits of modern realist style no less than the doctrine of Christ's divinity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.5339783
CHAPTER 3 The Sublime Portrait from:
The Real and the Sacred
Abstract: Mid-nineteenth-century portraits of Jesus were not as controversial in fiction as they were in realist painting. Whereas John Everett Millais, Nikolai Ge, and Édouard Manet broke with long-standing iconographic traditions, portraits of Jesus in fiction from the same time period were innovative, in large part, by the fact of their existence. Extended literary portraits are not a common feature of premodern imaginative retellings of gospel narrative. The life of Jesus, as the canonical gospels suggest, need not accommodate descriptions of the Christ image. In the 1830s and 1840s, authors of fiction began hesitantly to describe the body of Jesus thanks
1 THEORY AS A HERMENEUTICAL MECHANISM: from:
Democratic Peace
Abstract: This chapter sets out the theoretical model for the book: a model explaining the conditioned power of theories. In order to establish my theory, I aim to use hermeneutics—though with a slight twist. Hermeneutics is usually understood as the art of reading and interpreting texts. I want to stress, however, the dual nature of hermeneutics. Although hermeneutics indeed interprets texts, it is also a more active intellectual endeavor of interpreting reality once reality is conceived as an unwritten text. That is not to say that reality is nothing but a text or even to claim it is a text
Book Title: Forging the World-Strategic Narratives and International Relations
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Roselle Laura
Abstract: Forging the Worldbrings together leading scholars in International Relations (IR) and Communication Studies to investigate how, when, and why strategic narratives shape the structure, politics, and policies of the global system. Put simply, strategic narratives are tools that political actors employ to promote their interests, values, and aspirations for the international order by managing expectations and altering the discursive environment. These narratives define "who we are" and "what kind of world order we want."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.6504652
2 Strategic Narratives: from:
Forging the World
Author(s) Roselle Laura
Abstract: We are on the cusp of being able to better understand questions in International Relations hitherto considered unanswerable due to methodological limitations of the discipline. Methodology is vital to the enterprise of studying strategic narrative because the right methods allow us to explain how strategic narratives are formed, projected, received, and interpreted. Only then can we build explanations of the roles narratives play in persuasion, influence, identity-formation, alliance-building, order-shaping, and other major concerns of IR. There is a sense today among those practicing international relations that the rapid transformation of global political communication has opened up new opportunities to manage
3 Strategic Narratives and Great Power Identity from:
Forging the World
Author(s) Roselle Laura
Abstract: After the dissolution of the Soviet Union, there was a moment for possible post–Cold War narrative alignment as some leaders on each side sought a new world order; a moment to move beyond the Cold War narrative of East versus West. George H. W. Bush set out a system narrative of international cooperation that important leaders in the former USSR shared. But in the years that immediately followed, short-term tactical conflicts on each side meant that this moment for alignment was squandered—visions of order reverted back to Cold War narrations—with the United States seeking to be leader
7 Public Diplomacy, Networks, and the Limits of Strategic Narratives from:
Forging the World
Author(s) Brown Robin
Abstract: The debate over strategic narrative revolves around three claims. The first claim is that some narratives are
strategicallysignificant, for instance the BRICS narrative of the “rise of the rest” or the Taliban’s account of the role of NATO forces in Afghanistan. These accounts of the world influence how people and organizations understand the world and act within it (Miskimmon, O’Loughlin, and Roselle 2013). The second claim is that an actor can successfully promote their own narrative tostrategicallyadvance their position in the world. A strategic narrative provides a simple and persuasive account of a strategy that helps to
8 Strategic Narratives of the Arab Spring and After from:
Forging the World
Author(s) Price Monroe E.
Abstract: Our quondam certainties about what occurred during the 2011 “Arab Spring” have faded.¹ What even to call the series of events in Tunisia, Egypt, and beyond is increasingly problematic, given the less than rosy aftermath to the initial protests (see for example, “Arab Spring” 2013). The struggle over nomenclature underscores the power of stories and their limitations in policy and political change. The uprisings were replete with projected narratives, narratives whose proponents sought to shape current and future events as protestors took to the streets and state actors dug in their heels to retain power. These strategic narratives were constructed
9 Narrative Wars: from:
Forging the World
Author(s) Archetti Cristina
Abstract: Both in terrorism research and counterterrorism practitioners’ circles “narratives” are
en vogue. Just to illustrate the extent of their ubiquity on both sides of the Atlantic, the U. K. government’s 2009 antiterrorism strategy identified the narrative of “oppression and victimhood” promoted by al Qaeda (Home Office 2009, 155)—which portrays Muslims around the world as victims of Western aggressors—as the fuel for homegrown extremism (141). The Dutch National Coordinator for Counterterrorism released a whole collection of contributions by academics and researchers about “Countering Violent Extremist Narratives” in 2010. A White House document about preventing violent extremism has more recently
Book Title: Traces of the Past-Classics between History and Archaeology
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Bassi Karen
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique places mean and, more specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? In short, how do visible remains and ruins in the present give meaning to the human past? Karen Bassi addresses these questions through detailed close readings of canonical works spanning the archaic to the classical periods of ancient Greek culture, showing how the past is constituted in descriptions of what narrators and characters see in their present context. She introduces the term protoarchaeological to refer to narratives that navigate the gap between linguistic representation and empirical observation-between words and things-in accessing and giving meaning to the past. Such narratives invite readers to view the past as a receding visual field and, in the process, to cross the disciplinary boundaries that divide literature, history, and archaeology.Aimed at classicists, literary scholars, ancient historians, cultural historians, and archaeological theorists, the book combines three areas of research: time as a feature of narrative structure in literary theory; the concept of "the past itself" in the philosophy of history; and the ontological status of material objects in archaeological theory. Each of five central chapters explores how specific protoarchaeological narratives-from the fate of Zeus' stone in Hesiod's Theogony to the contest between words and objects in Aristophanes' Frogs-both expose and attempt to bridge this gap. Throughout, the book serves as a response to Herodotus' task in writing the Histories, namely, to ensure that "the past deeds of men do not fade with time."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.8785930
Introduction: from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: What are we doing when we walk into an archaeological museum or onto an archaeological site? For what or at what are we looking? What do the objects and features we encounter in these unique spaces mean? More specifically, how do they convey to us something about the beliefs and activities of formerly living humans? The answers to these questions may seem all too obvious; they also depend on what “we” I am talking about. Professional archaeologists or art historians, for example, have very specific ways of looking at and talking about their objects of study. But the particulars of
Epilogue: from:
Traces of the Past
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have defined protoarchaeological narratives as those in which the past is conceptualized in a negotiation between empirical observation and linguistic representation in a variety of ancient Greek genres. I have also suggested that reading—both as a conceptual category and as a practice—functions within these narratives as an acknowledgment that the past is constituted in what can no longer be seen. To return again to Herodotus’ metaphor, reading refers to the past as a congeries of narrativized objects and events that fades with time. In this epilogue, I explore the ontological and epistemological implications
Book Title: Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory-Essays from the Sawyer Seminar
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Rosenberg William G.
Abstract: As sites of documentary preservation rooted in various national and social contexts, artifacts of culture, and places of uncovering, archives provide tangible evidence of memory for individuals, communities, and states, as well as defining memory institutionally within prevailing political systems and cultural norms. By assigning the prerogatives of record keeper to the archivist, whose acquisition policies, finding aids, and various institutionalized predilections mediate between scholarship and information, archives produce knowledge, legitimize political systems, and construct identities. Far from being mere repositories of data, archives actually embody the fragments of culture that endure as signifiers of who we are, and why. The essays in A
rchives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memoryconceive of archives not simply as historical repositories but as a complex of structures, processes, and epistemologies situated at a critical point of the intersection between scholarship, cultural practices, politics, and technologies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.93171
Not Dragon at the Gate but Research Partner: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Marquis Kathleen
Abstract: In a keynote address given to the Spring 2000 Midwest Archives Conference meeting (hereafter Sawyer Seminar), Francis Blouin set out the founding principles for this seminar as a dialogue between historians and other scholars, and the archivists who maintain documentary collections for research use. As became clear from the seminar conversations that ensued, the concept of “archive” has a broader range of definitions than those of us who are practitioners in the field might have imagined. What also became clear was that the archivist’s role in the maintenance of this documentation was not at all clear.
Archiving/Architecture from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Kleinman Kent
Abstract: It is conventional and useful for both architects and archivists to recognize that architecture exists in two distinct modes: first, the built artifact and, second, representations of that artifact. This division is useful precisely because it allows architecture in the second sense to be collected, cataloged, and protected by archival institutions without the necessity of dealing with the messy business of built work. The Le Corbusier Foundation in Paris does not collect buildings by the French master, although it is housed in one; the Mies van der Rohe archive at the Museum of Modern Art in New York contains not
“Records of Simple Truth and Precision”: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Schwartz Joan M.
Abstract: The caricature shows a crowd of people pushing into the enterprising establishment of Susse Frères, attracted by an enormous advertisement to buy daguerreotypes for New Year’s gifts. Over the entrance large notices proclaim that “Non-inverted pictures can be taken in 13 minutes without sunshine.” While one photographer is just aiming his camera up the skirts of a tight-rope dancer on the left, another tries to take the portrait of a child whose
Introduction from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Abstract: Whether even the most well-intentioned and neutral scholar could ever produce an objective, scientific history has long been the subject of fractious debate among historians, as many archivists are aware. That “noble dream,” as Peter Novick described this quest in an important volume some fifteen years ago, reflects for many historians a quaint legacy of romantic positivism, the failure to recognize how facts and historical truths are accessible only through creative acts of imagination.¹ The issues here are complicated. They range from whether the kinds of presuppositions historians bring to their research necessarily affect their determination of what is “factual,”
Out of the Closet and into the Archives? from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Grossmann Atina
Abstract: Frank Mecklenburg discusses the Leo Baeck Institute (LBI) Archives as an institution initially established for the preservation and generation of social memories among a group whose collective identity—as the much-mythologized German-speaking Jews of prewar central Europe—is rapidly fading, as well as a repository whose contents are increasingly relevant not only to scholarship but to the highly contested production of political culture for both Jews and Germans. The texts, photographs, and artifacts contained in the archives have long provided fodder for well-trodden academic debates about the fate of German Jewry: cultural symbiosis versus failed assimilation, proud legacy of cosmopolitan
Archival Representation from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Yakel Elizabeth
Abstract: The term “representation” is used to refer both to the process or activity of representing and to the object(s) produced by an instance of that activity. The process of representing seeks to establish systematic correspondence between the target domain and the modeling domain and
Creating a National Information System in a Federal Environment: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Millar Laura
Abstract: In late 2001, the Canadian Council on Archives, a publicly funded agency that oversees archival development in Canada, launched the Canadian Archival Information Network (CAIN), an online network of Web sites and databases designed to bring together intellectually the spectrum of activity taking place in archival repositories across the country. The network aims to provide electronic access to information about archives through searchable fonds-level archival descriptions, along with news and facts about archival programs. The developers of CAIN ultimately see the network as a tool for “communication, consultation, coordination, and cooperation” between archival stakeholders and the archival community. Its goal
Archives, Heritage, and History from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Lowenthal David
Abstract: Texts, like artifacts, have long been treasured in Western culture, both as historical data
How Privatization Turned Britain’s Red Telephone Kiosk into an Archive of the Welfare State from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Wright Patrick
Abstract: One day in July 1988, I stood on the concourse at London’s Waterloo Station thinking of the hopes once entertained by late politician Anthony Crosland. As a leading Labour Party intellectual in the mid-1950s, Crosland had dreamed of a less austere socialism where the uniformity of the reforming state would weigh less heavily on the life of the nation. As he wrote in
The Future of Socialism, it was a time for a “reaction against the Fabian tradition” with its reliance on state-led initiative. The mixed economy could be expected to deliver higher exports and old-age pensions, but only a
Lookin’ for a Home: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Portelli Alessandro
Abstract: In 1970, Italian activist historian and cultural organizer Gianni Bosio wrote, in his description of the work of the Istituto Ernesto de Martino, Italy’s first and most important sound archive and research center for people’s cultures,
Classified Federal Records and the End of the Cold War: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Joyce William L.
Abstract: In the fall of 1992, Congress passed the President John F. Kennedy Assassination Records Collection Act (PL-102-526, codiaed as 44 U.S.C. 2107) (ARCA) in an attempt to address the suspicion that the federal government had been involved in a cover-up of the November 1963 assassination of President John F. Kennedy. Soon after taking office and eager to reassure the public, President Lyndon B. Johnson appointed a commission to investigate the slaying of the president, the President’s Commission to Investigate the Assassination of President Kennedy, more commonly known as the Warren Commission. The commission concluded that Lee Harvey Oswald, acting alone,
“Just a Car”: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Endelman Judith E.
Abstract: Do all objects tell the truth? Are artifacts essential to the study of history? Can we understand the past by looking and examining the things people used and made, as Henry Ford believed? The study of material culture, which grew out of anthropology and the study of preliterate cultures, has had only a minor influence in the historical profession. Texts and, to a lesser degree, visual evidence have been the primary sources for the reconstruction of the historic past. What can the study of material culture offer the study of history?
Maroons in the Archives: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Dubois Laurent
Abstract: In the heart of Basse-Terre, the administrative capital of the island of Guadeloupe, sits a prison. It is notorious for its overcrowding and antiquated facilities and also because over the years a number of local activists who have fought for independence from France have been imprisoned there. The concrete walls of the prison, topped by barbed wire, run along one of the main boulevards of the town. Underneath the barbed wire is a mural, painted in the 1980s with the support of local cultural officials. It represents the slave trade: a line of slaves in chains and the famous Maison
Documenting South Africa’s Liberation Movements: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Wallach William K.
Abstract: As the machinery of apartheid was being dismantled, agreements were signed in 1992 designating the University of Fort Hare as the custodian of the “Liberation Archives.” The Liberation Archives was conceived as a symbolic union of the archival records from several of the political organizations that had helped bring about the overthrow of apartheid. Organizations agreeing to deposit records and artifacts at Fort Hare included the African National Congress (ANC), the Pan Africanist Congress (PAC), the Azanian People’s Organization (AZAPO), the Black Consciousness Movement of Azania, and the New Unity Movement. The process of locating and gathering archival material from
“The Gift of One Generation to Another”: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Wilson Ian E.
Abstract: Several months ago and before I was appointed the national archivist of Canada, I was invited to speak at a symposium to honor Terry Cook and to reflect on his career as an archivist at the National Archives. I used the occasion to place before members of our profession the key dividing point that has distinguished my approach to the archival endeavor over the past twenty-five years from that of Terry; it is a fundamental distinction, and its influence can be discerned in our various articles. Analysis of the full intellectual impact of our two perspectives should be left, I
Writing Home in the Archive: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Papailias Penelope
Abstract: The archive appears to have taken the place of historical narrative as a key locus for critical historical reflection. This shift from historiography to the archive has a number of implications. For one, it draws attention from the closed authoritative historiography to the multiplicity of texts involved in documenting the past and to their open potential for generating future histories.¹ Besides the historian-author, many other actors—archivists, informants, donors, and researchers of various kinds—are revealed to animate the archive. This sociality contrasts sharply with the stereotype of the archive as solitary and lifeless. The archive is also characterized by
Archives and Historical Writing: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Galili Ziva
Abstract: The agenda for the seminar on Archives, Documentation, and the Institutions of Social Memory, much like the questions being asked nowadays in so many academic discussions, reminds us of the uncertain place of archival records in historical writing and in social memory. We are asked to face the notion that the preservation and accessibility of such records are contingent on a wide array of political, cultural, and technological factors and that these factors as well as the ideological stance inherent in both historical writing and the practice of social memory affect every aspect of our usage of archival documentation. All
Archiving Heteroglossia: from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Yekelchyk Serhy
Abstract: Working quietly in private during 1934–35, as the Soviet people were toiling to meet the targets of the Second Five Year Plan, celebrating Stalin the Great Leader, and condemning “enemies of the people,” Mikhail Bakhtin was developing the concept of heteroglossia (
raznorechieorraznogolositsa). The Russian philosopher of language understood heteroglossia as a polyphony of social and discursive forces, a diversity of social speech types that occur in everyday life. According to him, the genre of the novel is best suited for delivering the realities of heteroglossia because it allows for a network of dialogic, interactive relations among multiple
Hesitations at the Door to an Archive Catalog from:
Archives, Documentation, and Institutions of Social Memory
Author(s) Lapin Vladimir
Abstract: Historians reflecting on their trade, and on their interactions with archivists, cannot ignore an obvious fact: the apparatus of scholarly reference is responsible to a certain extent for mapping out the course of their archival research. The reference apparatus imposes a different influence on a historian well guided in the ocean of archival materials than a person who tries to and an answer to
Book Title: Microdramas-Crucibles for Theater and Time
Publisher: University of Michigan Press
Author(s): Muse John H.
Abstract: In
Microdramas, John H. Muse argues that plays shorter than twenty minutes deserve sustained attention, and that brevity should be considered a distinct mode of theatrical practice. Focusing on artists for whom brevity became both a structural principle and a tool to investigate theater itself (August Strindberg, Maurice Maeterlinck, F. T. Marinetti, Samuel Beckett, Suzan-Lori Parks, and Caryl Churchill), the book explores four episodes in the history of very short theater, all characterized by the self-conscious embrace of brevity. The story moves from the birth of the modernist microdrama in French little theaters in the 1880s, to the explicit worship of speed in Italian Futurist synthetic theater, to Samuel Beckett's often-misunderstood short plays, and finally to a range of contemporary playwrights whose long compilations of shorts offer a new take on momentary theater.Subjecting short plays to extended scrutiny upends assumptions about brief or minimal art, and about theatrical experience. The book shows that short performances often demand greater attention from audiences than plays that unfold more predictably. Microdramas put pressure on preconceptions about which aspects of theater might be fundamental and about what might qualify as an event. In the process, they suggest answers to crucial questions about time, spectatorship, and significance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.3998/mpub.9380984
Book Title: American Night-The Literary Left in the Era of the Cold War
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): WALD ALAN M.
Abstract: American Night, the final volume of an unprecedented trilogy, brings Alan Wald's multigenerational history of Communist writers to a poignant climax. Using new research to explore the intimate lives of novelists, poets, and critics during the Cold War, Wald reveals a radical community longing for the rebirth of the social vision of the 1930s and struggling with a loss of moral certainty as the Communist worldview was being called into question. The resulting literature, Wald shows, is a haunting record of fracture and struggle linked by common structures of feeling, ones more suggestive of the "negative dialectics" of Theodor Adorno than the traditional social realism of the Left.Establishing new points of contact among Kenneth Fearing, Ann Petry, Alexander Saxton, Richard Wright, Jo Sinclair, Thomas McGrath, and Carlos Bulosan, Wald argues that these writers were in dialogue with psychoanalysis, existentialism, and postwar modernism, often generating moods of piercing emotional acuity and cosmic dissent. He also recounts the contributions of lesser known cultural workers, with a unique accent on gays and lesbians, secular Jews, and people of color. The vexing ambiguities of an era Wald labels "late antifascism" serve to frame an impressive collective biography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807837344_wald
Chapter Seven Jews without Judaism from:
American Night
Abstract: The record of Jewish American cultural achievement in the postwar decades is extensive and irregular. Many of the emerging writers in the era, now treated as fomenting a “Jewish American Renaissance,” had a background in Marxism, usually Communism, by personal or family association.¹ What is still visible of the left-wing reference points of this literary tradition resembles a disrupted itinerary, fractured but conveying information nonetheless. A few authors made open but laconic references to their political pasts in their writing, including Norman Mailer, Saul Bellow, Allen Ginsberg, Grace Paley, and Tillie Olsen. Others, such as Bernard Malamud, evaded the subject,
Book Title: The Science of the Soul in Colonial New England- Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Author(s): RIVETT SARAH
Abstract: The Science of the Soulchallenges long-standing notions of Puritan provincialism as antithetical to the Enlightenment. Sarah Rivett demonstrates that, instead, empiricism and natural philosophy combined with Puritanism to transform the scope of religious activity in colonial New England from the 1630s to the Great Awakening of the 1740s.In an unprecedented move, Puritan ministers from Thomas Shepard and John Eliot to Cotton Mather and Jonathan Edwards studied the human soul using the same systematic methods that philosophers applied to the study of nature. In particular, they considered the testimonies of tortured adolescent girls at the center of the Salem witch trials, Native American converts, and dying women as a source of material insight into the divine. Conversions and deathbed speeches were thus scrutinized for evidence of grace in a way that bridged the material and the spiritual, the visible and the invisible, the worldly and the divine.In this way, the "science of the soul" was as much a part of seventeenth- and eighteenth-century natural philosophy as it was part of post-Reformation theology. Rivett's account restores the unity of religion and science in the early modern world and highlights the role and importance of both to transatlantic circuits of knowledge formation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9780807838709_rivett
Introduction from:
The Science of the Soul in Colonial New England
Abstract: John Milton’s Eve in
Paradise Lost(1667) is not built on biblical precedent. She finds knowledge more seductive than flattery as the serpent tempts her through the power of speech and his capacity to rationalize. Listening to the serpent, Eve imagines how she too might possess greater knowledge, augmenting her own “inward powers.” She discovers the “virtues” of a fruit that makes her mind “capacious,” suddenly capable of discerning “things” erstwhile “visible” only “in heaven.” While recognizing how her actions violate God’s command, she nonetheless momentarily relishes the reward. From what seems a mixed motive—the desire to share her
6 Revivals from:
The Science of the Soul in Colonial New England
Abstract: The dangers of misapplied science, fully realized in the Salem witchcraft trials and the events’ larger context in Royal Society debates, put tremendous pressure on the science of the soul. By the late-seventeenth century, Harvard-trained ministers and Royal Society natural philosophers continued to advance their practices, though with renewed caution, aware both of mechanical philosophy’s limitations and the parameters surrounding empirical inquiry—especially interdictions against studying preternatural phenomena. Yet neither New England ministers nor London natural philosophers abandoned efforts to apply empirical methods to advance knowledge of God. Rather, such theologians as Samuel Clarke recuperated the goal of knowing the
Chapter One Craving Completion from:
Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: Springing from the heart of Islam’s spiritual reservoir,
Taṣwwuf, or Sufism, can be described as the process by which a believer embraces the full spiritual consequences of God’s oneness (tawḥīd).¹ The goal of the Sufi path is to enable a human being, through the cultivation of virtuous excellence (ihsān), to commune directly and experientially with her Creator. In the historical development of Sufism, one encounters varied and increasingly sophisticated notions of the mystical path, orṭarīqa. Such a path generally entails that the Sufi aspirant, under the guidance of a spiritual master, follows a practical method of purification and refinement
Chapter Two Charting Ibn ʿArabī’s Religious Anthropology from:
Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: It is a beautiful starlit night. Ibn ʿArabī, a Sufi teacher revered throughout Muslim lands, is within the sacred precincts of the Ka
ɔba, the cubelike focal point of Muslim prayers in Mecca.¹ This evening, the house of worship is characterized by a feeling of almost intense quiet despite the large number of devotees. Savoring the gentle breeze caressing his face, Ibn ʿArabī experiences a profound state of tranquility. Circling the outer perimeter of the holy sanctuary, he becomes increasingly oblivious of his surroundings, his state of contemplation simultaneously expanding and intensifying. Suddenly, a few lines of poetry leap to his
Chapter Four Reading Gender and Metaphor in Ibn ʿArabī’s Cosmos from:
Sufi Narratives of Intimacy
Abstract: In engaging the tension between perspectives that challenge traditional gender stereotypes and those that reiterate normative conventions, feminist readers encounter a set of more nuanced methodological and theoretical considerations. At the outset, it is imperative to situate Ibn ʿArabī’s teachings on gender within the assumptions of his worldview—that is, to take seriously the Sufi framework of his engagement with gender. As is characteristic of all Ibn ʿArabī’s works, paradox, ambivalence, and contradiction are part of his mystical methodology. Since reality “as it really is” or mystical experiences give a glimpse into that which cannot be understood or captured in
Introduction from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Buchbinder Mara
Abstract: Across the globe and within local communities, people suffer from disease, disability, and early mortality at vastly different rates from one another. Some of these differences, such as those that stem from impoverished environmental conditions or a lack of access to health care, strike many observers as unjust; others, such as those that reflect choices to engage in potentially dangerous elite sports, may seem to have little to do with justice. How we understand the relationship between health inequalities and justice is influenced by many factors, including notions of deservingness, choice, vulnerability, luck, cultural and familial practices, and social group
1 Health Difference, Disparity, Inequality, or Inequity—What Difference Does It Make What We Call It? from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Braveman Paula
Abstract: Over the past two and a half decades, distinct approaches have been taken to defining and measuring health inequalities or disparities and health equity. Some efforts have focused on technical issues in measurement, at times without addressing the implications for the concepts themselves and how that might influence action. Others have focused on the concepts, sometimes without adequately addressing the implications for measurement. This chapter contrasts a few different approaches, examining their conceptual bases and the implications for measurement and policy. It argues for an approach to defining health inequalities and health equity that centers explicitly on notions of justice
4 The Liberal Autonomous Subject and the Question of Health Inequalities from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) Kittay Eva Feder
Abstract: A
New York Timesarticle by Janny Scott, tellingly entitled “Life at the Top in America Isn’t Just Better, It’s Longer,” features three New York residents of different socioeconomic classes, each of whom suffered from heart disease (Scott 2005). The article chronicles their different health outcomes following a heart attack. Scott points out that “heart attack is a window on the effects of class on health. The risk factors—smoking, poor diet, inactivity, obesity, hypertension, high cholesterol and stress—are all more common among the less educated and less affluent, the same group that research has shown is less likely
8 Justice, Evidence, and Interdisciplinary Health Inequalities Research from:
Understanding Health Inequalities and Justice
Author(s) King Nicholas B.
Abstract: At the conclusion of their book
Social Justice: The Moral Foundations of Public Health and Health Policy, the bioethicists Madison Powers and Ruth Faden reflect on the interdisciplinary nature of work on justice and health inequalities: “Theories of justice without data regarding the way inequalities interact cannot result in just health or other social policies. Any plausible theory of justice needs … data provided by social and biomedical researchers who seek to understand how complex social and economic relationships affect health and other essential dimensions of well-being” (Powers and Faden 2006, 193). With respect to their own theory, they argue:
Capĺtulo 5 LA HISTORIA EN VOLUMEN: from:
Visiones de Estereoscopio
Abstract: Es el propósito de este capĺtulo mostrar las conexiones existentes entre la obra pictórica y literaria de dos artistas de la vanguardia española: Marĺa Ángeles Santos-en concreto, su cuadro
Un mundo(1929)-y Claudio de la Torre, autor deAlicia al pie de los laureles(1940), una de las ultimas manifestaciones lirico-ficcionales de la vanguardia histórica espanola.¹ Claudio de la Torre, fue-ra de lo que se suele considerar el periodo caracterĺstco de producción de la nueva novela -los años veinte y primeros años de los treinta-, escribe una novela que puede todavĺa considerarse vanguardista si atendemos a sus caracterfsticas form ales
Book Title: The Poetics of Inconstancy-Etienne Durand and the End of Renaissance Verse
Publisher: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Department of Romance Studies
Author(s): ROGERS HOYT
Abstract: The transformation of Late Petrarchism from earlier stages reflects a profound shift in cultural values--a 'crisis of the Renaissance' that generated new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. Broadly, this book identifies a distinctive 'poetics of inconstancy' that came to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century and pervaded the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, the book takes as its point of departure a single poet: Etienne Durand. Because of his frequently anthologized 'Stances a l'Inconstance,' Durand is often singled out as 'the poet of inconstancy.' This study, however, identifies the theme of universal change as a hallmark of Durand's contemporaries as well--a signal of a stylistic revolution that heralded the end of Renaissance verse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5149/9781469641676_rogers
Introduction: from:
The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: Late Petrarchism differs notably from its earlier stages. Its transformation reflects a profound shift in cultural values – a “crisis of the Renaissance”¹ which opens new perspectives in poetic theory and practice. On a broad level, this book will identify a distinctive “poetics of inconstancy” which comes to the fore at the end of the sixteenth century, and which pervades the love verse of the age. At the same time, as a study based on the inductive method, it will take a single poet as its point of departure: Etienne Durand, whose
Poésies complètesare now widely available for the
Chapter II THE RHETORIC OF REPETITION from:
The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: Petrarchism is not a monolith, but an endless series of refractions. The preceding analyses underline the fact that even within a well-established tradition, “content” is no stable quantity: thematic elements take on different meanings according to the context; more importantly, they vary with the tone. The
agencementof changing moods depends on the fundamental devices of literary discourse: in the end, the notion of theme resolves itself into a problem of rhetoric. The analogy between tropes andtopoiis close. Both sets of conventions maintain an essential identity from poem to poem, poet to poet, age to age – despite
Chapter IV THE POETICS OF INCONSTANCY from:
The Poetics of Inconstancy
Abstract: The inconstancy praised by Durand and his contemporaries transcends the bounds of simple infidelity: it represents a universal principle of instability and change. The rising popularity of this
topostoward the end of the sixteenth century reflects a shift, not only in literary poses, but also in literary practice. If the original tenets of Petrarchism are undermined by a new stance toward the beloved, the poetic technique of Durand and other Petrarchists of his time undergoes a parallel evolution. It is revealed, for example, in the treatment of religious motifs within an amorous context, where they function in an appreciably
2. Soberanía genérica. from:
José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: La conmoción experimentada por México, especialmente durante la segunda década del siglo XX, no cesa de producir efectos. Como todo sueño despierto y colectivo de un pueblo, hermoso y atroz al mismo tiempo, la Revolución Mexicana desató potencias y produjo sometimientos cuya génesis y sentido marcan la actualidad. Recientemente, ha sido definida por dos destacados especialistas en la materia, como “the long, bloody, chaotic struggle began on November 20, 1910, as a rebellion against President Porfirio Díaz, the nation’s authoritarian ruler since 1876” (Joseph y Buchenau 1).
3. 1968: from:
José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: José Revueltas es quizás la figura más destacada y polémica del 68 en México. Figuración ambigua que por supuesto se encuentra en su obra literaria y política: por un lado, diagnostica que el proletariado en México se encuentra sin cabeza, o lleva sobre los hombros una cabeza que no es suya, esto es, reclama una vanguardia o verdadero Partido Comunista Leninista. Por el otro, y retomando en su obra el impacto del anarquista Ricardo Flórez Magón (1874-1922), figura clave del replanteamiento de la cuestión obrera en México (de ahí en parte el interés de Revueltas en él),¹ postula nociones de
4. 1968: from:
José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: Periodizar los sesentas, y específicamente el 68, sigue siendo uno de los debates más prolíficos de la actualidad. Desde distintas posturas y objetos de estudios dispares, destacados teóricos como Alain Badiou, Fredric Jameson y Alessandro Russo, han intentado precisar la fisionomía de esa década a nivel global, y de ese año en particular en Europa, Estados Unidos y China respectivamente. Para el caso mexicano, la cuestión es igual de intrincada, y no es nueva. Ya las grandes revisiones historiográficas de la lucha independentista de 1810 y la Revolución Mexicana, de Eric Van Young a Alan Knight, han señalado con asombro
6. ¿Fascismo y sadismo en Chile? from:
José Revueltas y Roberto Bolaño
Abstract: “Todas las poetisas están muertas.” Esa es la frase que pronuncia Alberto Ruiz-Tagle, asesino en serie de mujeres en la novela
Estrella distantede Roberto Bolaño (1996). Ruiz-Tagle elegía sus víctimas en los talleres de literatura de la ciudad de Concepción en Chile en 1973 y 1974. Ruiz-Tagle, o Carlos Wieder como se le conocerá después, militar que escribe poemas en el aire, artista-asesino cuyas víctimas no logran reconocer la verdad que anuncia este “poeta autodidacta”: “está a punto de nacer la ‘nueva poesía chilena’” (Bolaño,Estrella distante30). A renglón seguido de esta frase, Wieder asesina precisamente a dos
INTRODUCTION from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Fallaize Elizabeth
Abstract: “In the same week we have heard Sartre’s lecture, been to the opening night of
Les bouches inutiles(The Useless Mouths) and read the first issue ofLes temps modernes(Modern Times).”¹ So wrote a mildly irritated critic, according to Beauvoir inLa force des choses(Force of Circumstance). It is not difficult to understand this reaction to the “existentialist offensive” in which Beauvoir and Sartre found themselves unwittingly engaged in the autumn of 1945. Beauvoir’s second novelLe sang des autres(The Blood of Others) was published in September, followed a few weeks later by the publication of the
IT’S SHAKESPEARE THEY DON’T LIKE from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) TIMMERMANN MARYBETH
Abstract: For a year now there have been some rather considerable changes in the French press. It is truly regrettable that in glancing through the newspaper columns devoted to theatrical critiques, one might think one has been transported back to the time when Alain Laubreaux and the like systematically strove to muddle values, destroying any strong and great work with their insults.¹ It seems they have, alas, created a tradition. This outrage is what one discovers when reading the articles written in reaction to the presentation of
King Lear.²
THE NOVEL AND THE THEATER from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) FEIGL JOE
Abstract: The novel and the theater are two forms of fiction: in both cases, it is a matter of creating an imaginary world, and making characters, whose story constitutes what is called the plot, enter into this world. In order for the impact of the work to surpass that of simple entertainment, the story must also have a signification. Through carefully constructed lies, the book, like the play, strives to communicate a general human truth, but they do not rely on the same devices, and they do not seek the same type of truth.
NEW HEROES FOR OLD from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) SIMONS MARGARET
Abstract: Today in France they frequently say that the novel is dying, that the novel is dead. That is one of the leitmotivs of postwar criticism. Nevertheless, if you loiter by the bookshop windows, or prowl among the editors’ offices, you cannot help being struck by the great number of books and manuscripts that flaunt the label “novel.” Nor are they dead works, for many of them are received by the public with enthusiasm. The critics cannot ignore this fact, but they nevertheless shake their heads and mutter, “These are not true novels. The novel is dead.” You might be tempted
INTRODUCTION from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) Gilbert Dennis A.
Abstract: One must admire today the extent to which the terrain of Simone de Beauvoir scholarship has changed over these last decades: the Beauvoir whose centennial we celebrated in 2008 is a very different public and private figure from the one whose death we mourned in 1986. Still, little critical attention continues to be paid to Beauvoir’s relationship to theater, admittedly a small portion of her creative activity with
Les bouches inutiles(The Useless Mouths) as her only play, and even less to her ideas on theater.¹ Until recently, Beauvoir’s theoretical interest in the genre as both a written and a
PREFACE TO LA BÂTARDE BY VIOLETTE LEDUC from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) MOY JANELLA D.
Abstract: When, early in 1945, I began to read Violette Leduc’s manuscript—“My mother never gave me her hand”— I was immediately taken by her temperament and her style.¹ Camus welcomed
L ’asphyxie[In the Prison of Her Skin] right away into hisEspoir[Hope] series.² Genet, Jouhandeau, and Sartre hailed the arrival of a writer.³ In the books that followed, her talent was confirmed. Exacting critics openly praised it. But the public did not respond. Despite a considerablesuccès d’estime, Violette Leduc has remained obscure.
WHAT CAN LITERATURE DO? from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) SIMONS MARGARET
Abstract: Well, I do not need to tell you that my conception of literature is not that of Ricardou.¹ For me, literature is an activity carried out by men, for men, in order to disclose the world to them, this disclosure being an action.²
FOREWORD TO HISTORY: from:
“The Useless Mouths” and Other Literary Writings
Author(s) MOY JANELLA D.
Abstract: The central character of this story—most of which takes place between 1941 and 1947— is Ida,
Book Title: Moving Consciously-Somatic Transformations through Dance, Yoga, and Touch
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: The popularity of yoga and Zen meditation has heightened awareness of somatic practices. Individuals develop the conscious embodiment central to somatics work via movement and dance, or through touch from a skilled teacher or therapist often called a somatic bodyworker. Methods of touch and movement foster generative processes of consciousness in order to create a fluid interconnection between sensation, thought, movement, and expression. In Moving Consciously , Sondra Fraleigh gathers essays that probe ideas surrounding embodied knowledge and the conscious embodiment of movement and dance. Using a variety of perspectives on movement and dance somatics, Fraleigh and other contributors draw on scholarship and personal practice to participate in a multifaceted investigation of a thriving worldwide phenomenon. Their goal: to present the mental and physical health benefits of experiencing one's inner world through sensory awareness and movement integration. A stimulating addition to a burgeoning field, Moving Consciously incorporates concepts from East and West into a timely look at life-changing, intertwined practices that involve dance, movement, performance studies, and education. Contributors: Richard Biehl, Robert Bingham, Hillel Braude, Alison East, Sondra Fraleigh, Kelly Ferris Lester, Karin Rugman, Catherine Schaeffer, Jeanne Schul, and Ruth Way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt1647csj
Introduction from:
Moving Consciously
Abstract: As editor, I have asked the coauthors and myself what we want to achieve in this anthology. In retrospect, I see that we study the term
somaticsand explain our discoveries in applying it to movement through dance, yoga, and touch. We hope to share our findings with a wide audience of somatic practitioners, dancers, yoginis, hands-on educators, and bodywork therapists. The text will also be of interest to those who
Prologue on Somatic Contexts from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: The uses of moving consciously in somatic contexts may have more applications than we have yet been able to see. As Heidegger said, “Greater than actuality stands possibility.”¹ The authors of this book hope to inspire others in somatic studies to a large vision of its possibilities. There has been much that seeks to revision the way we think about movement and the arts. Dance somatics had unsung beginnings in the Judson dance activities that ushered in the American postmodern dance. The idea that everyone can dance was expressed at Judson, where they also decelerated extant techniques. New dance techniques
CHAPTER 1 Why Consciousness Matters from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Fraleigh Sondra
Abstract: In 2006, on one of my trips to Japan, butoh teacher Nobuo Harada-sensei saw my somatics students practicing teaching through touch, our developmental and therapeutic technique that involves what we refer to as matching in pairs. One partner in the role of the teacher finds and guides the lines of least resistance in the other partner’s movement, matching emergent movement patterns with slow, gentle, somatically attuned touch—as in lifting an arm and holding it a few moments to feel the weight of flesh and bone, then waiting for release of held tension before letting the arm rest. This is
CHAPTER 4 Living Shin from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Schaeffer Catherine A.
Abstract: Shin is alive for me in several ways that I explore in this chapter. Living Shin has enriched my work as a university professor, professional dancer, choreographer, and human being. I first reflect on my history in somatic modalities, their relation to Shin Somatics, and how this work has benefitted me professionally and personally. Second, I consider my applications of somatic knowledge to dance pedagogy, creating choreography, and the teaching and practice of yoga, healing, and wellness. In the final section, I discuss personal transformative somatic experiences and share key findings and insights that ground me in living Shin.
CHAPTER 7 Radical Somatics from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Braude Hillel
Abstract: Somatics is a radical practice. It is radical in transforming set norms or habits in the body of individuals, and thereby it has the largely untapped potential to transform the social body politic. The positive transformative power of somatics contrasts with the great twentieth-century political movements of communism and fascism, whose numbing ideologies inflicted grave terror on countless individuals. Don Hanlon Johnson has written articulately about how the “simplicity of perception” and “modesty of goal” espoused by leading somatic pioneers in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, such as Moshe Feldenkrais, Elsa Gindler, and Charlotte Selver, stand against the mass manipulation
CHAPTER 8 Somatic Awakenings from:
Moving Consciously
Author(s) Way Ruth
Abstract: This chapter reflects on my own somatic journey informed by the Eastwest Somatics program and my experiential learning and research into somatic movement education. Drawing on influential practitioners, performers, and scholars such as Sondra Fraleigh, Pina Bausch, Thomas Hanna, and Anna Cooper Albright, the chapter also pursues connections between creativity in performance practice and guiding principles in somatic
CHAPTER 1 National Incompletion: from:
The Minor Intimacies of Race
Abstract: In this chapter, I interrogate Canadian perceptions of multiculturalism in order to contextualize the demands that two contemporary Asian Canadian texts, Cindy Mochizuki’s section of Vancouver-based theater company Theatre Replacement’s
Bioboxes(2007) and Joy Kogawa’s novelThe Rain Ascends(1995, 2003), levy on the multicultural nation. In this instance, multiculturalism as a regulatory matrix becomes recognizable through the subjects it simultaneously imagines and fails to recognize in practice. The first part of this chapter uses Theatre Replacement’s productionBioboxesto examine how an Asian Canadian insistence on social intimacy reshapes the ideals of multiculturalism. The second section of this discussion
CHAPTER 1 Epic Traditions, Performers, and Audiences from:
Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: An oral epic tradition composed of alternating sections of narrative poetry and song, olonkho demonstrates many of the characteristics common to other epic narrative traditions that recount at length the adventures of legendary, historical, or mythical heroes surmounting the challenges facing them or their people.¹ The oldest known epic poem, the Babylonian
Epic of Gilgamesh, dates back to 1700 bce (Abusch 2001, 614). Homer’sIliadandOdysseycontinue this tradition in a poetic recounting of the events surrounding the Trojan War.² Today, epic poetry can be found in many countries, including India, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Mongolia, and Tibet, as well as
CHAPTER 5 Elements of Resilience: from:
Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: The historical chapters of this work provide a narrative frame that informs this chapter’s discussion of continuity and change in olonkho performance. Measuring change for intangible cultural heritage remains a complicated process, but sociolinguists have found ways to address issues of language shift that may contribute helpful models for assessing music shift as well. Without drawing overly strict, problematic parallels between language and music (Tilley 2014, 487), sociolinguistic and other communication-based models can be modified effectively for measuring change in forms of artistic expression. In addition, these approaches highlight key factors related to resilience, thereby providing strategic insights into encouraging
CHAPTER 6 Epic Revitalization: from:
Storytelling in Siberia
Abstract: Attaining the Masterpiece award greatly affected the fate of olonkho, likely turning it back from the brink of permanent disappearance. Still, the future of olonkho remains unclear, and whether to implement ongoing plans for transmission and encourage further innovation in the genre is a decision that rests primarily in the hands of the Sakha people. While they seek to create additional strategies to achieve their goals for olonkho, various historical, global, and political forces have affected olonkho and the entire epic
sredafor more than a century. These forces will continue to exert pressure on performance practice by changing the
2 OFFENDER IDENTITIES, OFFENDER NARRATIVES from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: How do offenders identify themselves to investigators? What immediate, contextual factors affect their claims of being this or that sort of person? And what do sociological and criminological theories predict about offender identities and narratives and contextual effects on them?
3 THINKING ABOUT RESEARCH EFFECTS from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Are researchers ever really spectators to the activities that they study? The image of researchers on the outside looking in is prevalent in most literature on methodology for social research. But it troubled me because, trained to see the social all around me, I thought social influence should extend to my research interviews. The narrative data I “collected” should, to some extent at least, be a product of the interview and not a sole-authored work of the narrator.
6 STABILITY NARRATIVES: from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: Seven of the twenty-seven narrators told stability narratives. Whereas reform narratives are about desistance, stability narratives are about steady moral character. The protagonist was presented as a moral or good person, if not in the exact moment of offending then in one’s life generally. The protagonist had consistently abided by subcultural values—standards of behavior—and/or was dependably good in the conventional sense—or at least as good as other people.¹
7 ELASTIC NARRATIVES: from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: In characterizing the reform talk in elastic narratives as shallow, I mean two particular things. First, accounts of one’s crimes were contradictory, vague, or both. Quite often, one’s life, including but not limited to one’s reform, was broadly described (for example, one previously enjoyed a “fast” lifestyle that was condemned) but specific crimes were neutralized. Second, desistance, like offending, was attributed to vaguely stated factors. In addition, desistance was conceptualized
9 THE SITUATED CONSTRUCTION OF NARRATIVES from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: First, the fact
10 THE POWER OF STORIES from:
Been a Heavy Life
Abstract: My research has demonstrated that story
tellingimpacts stories. In this chapter I reconsider the impact of stories on violence, thus relating storytelling to violent behavior. The power of stories and storytelling leads me to recommend redirection for criminological research and for public policy and interventions, including correctional interventions. But first it is necessary to take another look at heroism as a key plot in the men’s stories. The gendered nature of the heroic tale and the gender gap in violence signal the importance of cultural constructions of power, agency, and autonomy, to violence, which in turn suggests that narratives
7. Back Again? from:
New German Dance Studies
Author(s) ELSWIT KATE
Abstract: Valeska Gert (1892–1978) claimed she once asked Bertolt Brecht to define epic theater, to which he replied: “What you do.”¹ While this apocryphal anecdote is often taken as shorthand for Gert’s artistic oeuvre, it risks flattening the multiple kinds of otherness that delineated her career. As Svetlana Boym points out, the actual experience of exile may sometimes function not as an extension, but rather as the ultimate test, of artistic metaphors and theories of estrangement.² Through Gert’s exile and her return to a homeland that had changed in the intervening years, her performance practices, which were based in a
12. Negotiating Choreography, Letter, and Law in William Forsythe from:
New German Dance Studies
Author(s) SIEGMUND GERALD
Abstract: Strange and unusual hammering and thumping sounds fill the air as one enters the performance space. What captures our attention is not what we see, but what we hear. Clang, clang clang: these insistent noises speak of a relentless activity whose nature, however, escapes us. They beckon us to come forward where we are met by a sea of identical tables neatly aligned in three rows that extend to the very back of the hall. The tabletops are covered in white sheets of paper. There were sixty of them in Zurich, Switzerland, where the performance piece premiered in October 2005
13. Engagements with the Past in Contemporary Dance from:
New German Dance Studies
Author(s) HARDT YVONNE
Abstract: Dance is usually considered the most ephemeral form of art in Western society. This transitory character of dance dominates both historical and contemporary discourse. Nonetheless, historical investigations trace not only the history of dance, but also demonstrate how dance embodies historic and cultural corporealities. Only in more recent years, however, has a focus on history and memory appeared in research on contemporary European concert dance. As Aleida Assmann states, “Today it is most prominently art, which discovers the crisis of memory as its topic and finds new modes in which the dynamic process of cultural memory and forgetting configures.”¹ For
15. Toward a Theory of Cultural Translation in Dance from:
New German Dance Studies
Author(s) KLEIN GABRIELE
Abstract: Looking at the history of dance in the modern West, and especially in Europe, where aesthetic modernism began around 1900, there are two characteristics of dance. Whether it is so-called popular dance or a more artistic form, from a sociological perspective, the history of dance is the history of globalization and transnationalism. It is also the record of how urban experiences have been expressed physically. The artistic avant-garde of the twentieth century thrived in large cities, and even folk dances rarely originated in the countryside.
introduction from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: The current project of retrieving the work of women philosophers is in many ways similar to earlier projects of recovery. In a sense, the work of women philosophers has been buried, literally and metaphorically, and its finding requires both actual excavation and careful archival search. Other such projects, including those having to do with persons of color or victims of societal transgression, remind us of the importance of salvaging work from the past.¹
one HILDEGARD OF BINGEN from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: In approaching Hildegard of Bingen (1098–1179) philosophically, one immediately runs into the oldest and most cherished conundrum with respect to female philosophers. It appears to be the case that many female thinkers whose work might be deemed to be philosophical wrote in styles that were somewhat nonstandard, even for their respective times. Thus, arguments have frequently been made that such women are absent from the canon because of the fact that their work was demonstrably nonphilosophical, rather than due to their sex. Counterarguments to the effect that at least some minor male thinkers normally found in any group of
eight SIMONE DE BEAUVOIR from:
Eight Women Philosophers
Abstract: There are several facts that go a long way toward explaining why it is
Education from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) DENZIN NORMAN K.
Abstract: Informed by James Carey’s theories of democracy and his ritual model of communication, I enter a conversation that interrogates the place of critical pedagogy in a free democratic society (Carey 1989, 1997j, 1997l; Rosen 1997). Critical pedagogy is a key component in Carey’s intellectual project. A master teacher, Carey taught us how to think critically, to think and act in ways that linked critical pedagogy with a politics of hope. With Carey I seek a democratic pedagogy crafted for life in America since September 11, 2001 (Denzin 2007).
Space from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) VALDIVIA ANGHARAD N.
Abstract: When I was asked to write on the keyword
spacein relation to Jim Carey’s work, I had two somewhat contradictory reactions. One was of flattery. The second was panic and insecurity. Do I know enough to write about Carey and space? I certainly have vivid memories of the courses I took with Professor Carey, who was no ordinary teacher or scholar. Coming straight out of undergraduate studies, I was mostly one of those lost souls barely making sense of what now seems perfectly obvious and, of course, totally brilliant. I envy those who took his courses with the full
Politics from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) WASSER FREDERICK
Abstract: James Carey once explained that when he decided to read the literature of communication, “a wise man” suggested he begin with John Dewey (Carey 1989, 13). He never named the wise man.¹ In my case the wise man was James Carey himself. As refracted by Carey, Jürgen Habermas, and others, Dewey is often in my thoughts during the contemporary crisis in American democracy. This crisis can be defined any number of ways and at any number of levels, so I cannot presume to touch on all its fundamentals or even exhaustively list the ways to analyze it. Instead I will
Ethics from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) CHRISTIANS CLIFFORD
Abstract: Ethical formalism has been the dominant paradigm in communication ethics. Formalist ethical systems are based on rules, principles, and doctrines that set standards for human behavior. Through reason the human species is distinctive, and through rationality moral canons are understood to be legitimate. Ethics is typically grounded in prescriptions, norms, and ideals external to society and culture. In mainstream professional ethics, an apparatus of neutral standards is constructed in terms of the major issues media practitioners face in their everyday routines.
The Public from:
Key Concepts in Critical Cultural Studies
Author(s) FORTNER ROBERT
Abstract: What is the public and what is its ordained or practical role in a free society? A variety of answers have been suggested for this question. On the ordination side, what did the framers of the U. S. Constitution have in mind when they guaranteed—in the appended Bill of Rights—freedom of press, assembly, petition, religion, and speech? On the practical side, what is meant by the public itself—and how one can know the mind of this public if its “opinion” is to be known on matters of “public policy” in a “republic”?
Book Title: Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture- Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): FEINTUCH BURT
Abstract: Group. Art. Text. Genre. Performance. Context. Tradition. Identity. _x000B_No matter where we are--in academic institutions, in cultural agencies, at home, or in a casual conversation--these are words we use when we talk about creative expression in its cultural contexts. Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture is a thoughtful, interdisciplinary examination of the keywords that are integral to the formulation of ideas about the diversity of human creativity, presented as a set of essays by leading folklorists. _x000B_Many of us use these eight words every day. We think with them. We teach with them. Much of contemporary scholarship rests on their meanings and implications. They form a significant part of a set of conversations extending through centuries of thought about creativity, meaning, beauty, local knowledge, values, and community. Their natural habitats range across scholarly disciplines from anthropology and folklore to literary and cultural studies and provide the framework for other fields of practice and performance as well. _x000B_Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture is a much-needed study of keywords that are frequently used but not easily explained. Anchored by Burt Feintuchs cogent introduction, the book features essays by Dorothy Noyes, Gerald L. Pocius, Jeff Todd Titon, Trudier Harris, Deborah A. Kapchan, Mary Hufford, Henry Glassie, and Roger D. Abrahams.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt2ttc8f
Introduction: from:
Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) FEINTUCH BURT
Abstract: Group, art, text, genre, performance, context, tradition, identity. No matter where we are—in academic institutions, in cultural agencies, surrendering to the lure of the local—these are words we use when we talk about creative expression in its social contexts. We think with them. We teach with them. Much scholarship rests on them. They form a significant part of a set of conversations extending through centuries of thought about creativity, meaning, beauty, local knowledge, values, and community. If words have natural habitats, the environments for these range across scholarly disciplines and other fields of practice. On their own and
2 Art from:
Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) POCIUS GERALD L.
Abstract: Perhaps of all the words that surround us in our daily life,
art is one of the most contentious, most controversial. In part, this is because art—like the term folklore—has a popular as well as academic parlance. While abstract concepts such as ʺtextʺ or ʺidentityʺ rarely enter common discourse, our daily lives frequently encounter popular notions of ʺartʺ: our cities are filled with establishments that sell ʺart,ʺ we take ʺart appreciationʺ courses, we buy the products of ʺrecording artists.ʺ We become disparaging when our governments fund certain varieties of ʺartʺ over others, and we lump different artworks together
5 Performance from:
Eight Words for the Study of Expressive Culture
Author(s) KAPCHAN DEBORAH A.
Abstract: To perform is a transitive verb. Grammatically, this means that the verb perform takes a direct object, relating one element or property to another. One performs something, a theater piece (a drama, a comedy, a farce, a tragedy), a musical score, a ritual, a critique, a sales spiel. And this piece, this work, is performed by someone—an actor, a man, a woman, an herbalist, a hermaphrodite, a queen, a slave. Relating subject to object, to perform is also to facilitate transition. There is an agentive quality to performance, a force, a playing out of identities and histories. ʺEverything in
CHAPTER 1 MODERN PATTERNS IN EMOTIONS HISTORY from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEARNS PETER N.
Abstract: Current indecision (at best) or neglect results from three factors. First, modernity itself is a contested notion. Most would agree that industrial, urban societies differ from agricultural ones, but how widely this spills over onto areas
CHAPTER 2 RECOVERING THE INVISIBLE: from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) MATT SUSAN J.
Abstract: From the very beginning, those who have studied the history of the emotions have realized the difficulties they faced. In 1941, Lucien Febvre, the first scholar to call for such investigations, wrote that the undertaking would be fraught with challenges. He observed, “Any attempt to reconstitute the emotional life of a given period is a task that is at one and the same time extremely attractive and frightfully difficult.”¹ Febvre suggested that emotions of other eras and societies were so very different from those of the present day that their recovery required the scholar to abandon preconceived ideas about the
CHAPTER 4 EMOTIONS HISTORY IN EASTERN EUROPE from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) STEINBERG MARK D.
Abstract: It would be unwise, even harmful, to approach a regional history of emotions looking for essential patterns of national or ethnic character. To be sure, many people have claimed defining emotional traits for their own culture. In the early 1900s, for example, it was common for Russians to speak of a “Russian soul” naturally inclined toward “brooding and melancholy.”¹ More deleterious have been claims about other cultures: Serbs are belligerent, Romanians are intensely emotional, “Gypsies” are impassioned but irresponsible, Germans desire order, Jews are avaricious. National and ethnic cultural stereotypes have histories and are worth studying as revealing constructions and
CHAPTER 6 ADVERTISING FOR LOVE: from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) EPSTEIN PAMELA
Abstract: In June 1864, a man signing himself “Bertram” printed a remarkable matrimonial advertisement. At forty-three lines long and three hundred and seventy-two words (but only three sentences), it took up nearly a quarter of a column in the
New York Times. Describing himself as a “young gentleman in all respects favorably situated in life,” with all the qualities a privileged man should have: “prepossessing appearance and manners . . . no ordinary capabilities and attainments, independent in thought and action, enlarged, liberal and charitable in views,” he nevertheless lamented that he was “still wanting the essential element of happiness,” a
CHAPTER 7 RELIGION AND EMOTIONS from:
Doing Emotions History
Author(s) CORRIGAN JOHN
Abstract: The practice of emotions history in the field of religious studies has developed apace with the flowering of scholarly interest in everyday practice, embodiment, locality, and the constructed self over the past several decades. Most previous religious history from the earlier twentieth century,¹ whether focused on western monotheisms or on Asian or indigenous religions, was inclined to illustrate its narratives about feeling with ideas collected from theological discourses, or, at the very least, with language sampled from Christian glossaries of belief and worship.² For much religious history, confessional perspectives supplied the basis for interpretation—including the preoccupation with meaning itself
Book Title: Covering Bin Laden-Global Media and the World's Most Wanted Man
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Author(s): AL-SUMAIT FAHED
Abstract: Starting in 2001, much of the world media used the image of Osama bin Laden as a shorthand for terrorism. Bin Laden himself considered media manipulation on a par with military, political, and ideological tools, and intentionally used interviews, taped speeches, and distributed statements to further al-Qaida's ends. In Covering Bin Laden , editors Susan Jeffords and Fahed Yahya Al-Sumait collect perspectives from global scholars exploring a startling premise: that media depictions of Bin Laden not only diverge but often contradict each other, depending on the media provider and format, the place in which the depiction is presented, and the viewer's political and cultural background. The contributors analyze the representations of the many Bin Ladens, ranging from Al Jazeera broadcasts to video games. They examine the media's dominant role in shaping our understanding of terrorists and why/how they should be feared, and they engage with the ways the mosaic of Bin Laden images and narratives have influenced policies and actions around the world. Contributors include Fahed Al-Sumait, Saranaz Barforoush, Aditi Bhatia, Purnima Bose, Ryan Croken, Simon Ferrari, Andrew Hill, Richard Jackson, Susan Jeffords, Joanna Margueritte-Giecewicz, Noha Mellor, Susan Moeller, Brigitte Nacos, Courtney C. Radsch, and Alexander Spencer.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/j.ctt6wr60n
5 Metaphorizing Terrorism: from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) SPENCER ALEXANDER
Abstract: The media are considered vital for a terrorist group because they provide the means of attracting attention and spreading the group’s message.¹ Considering the strategic communication aspect of terrorism, the media have often been considered the terrorist’s “accomplices” or even their “best friend” for providing the “oxygen of publicity.”² At the same time, it has been noted that terrorists provide media with emotional, exciting, and bloody news that helps them sell their product.³ Therefore there are mutual benefits for both, and the relationship could be described as “symbiotic.”⁴ To date, terrorism research has predominantly focused on this relationship and its
7 Images of Our Dead Enemies: from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) BARFOROUSH SARANAZ
Abstract: How do you know someone is dead unless you see the evidence? If the fact of a death really matters—politically, militarily, even emotionally—is it enough to take someone else’s word for it, to just simply hear (or read) a narrative account of that death?
10 Congratulations! You Have Killed Osama bin Laden!! from:
Covering Bin Laden
Author(s) FERRARI SIMON
Abstract: One of the easiest, and most common, ways to begin an academic essay on videogames is to start with an experiential point of view into a gameworld that the reading audience presumably knows little about beforehand. The language is often overwrought, it addresses the reader as if he or she were an interactor, and it exaggerates or omits many details about the game in question. Perhaps we do this because the medium still seems so new and strange to much of the academic community. Maybe it is a holdover from the era when writing about “computer games” could only mean
CHAPTER TWO EMPIRE THROUGH THE MAGIC LANTERN from:
Scenes of Projection
Abstract: Even as psychoanalysis developed its theories of projection and practices for casting out the demons of the psyche from the early modern demonstration lecture and its projective machinery for casting images in a darkened room, it also emerged in historical relation to European imperialism.¹ In
Imperial Leatherfeminist and postcolonial critic Anne McClintock uses the metaphor of the magic lantern to characterize the desiring dimensions of European imperialism in the early modern period, writing that, “long before the era of high Victorian imperialism, Africa and the Americas had become what can be called a pornotropics for the European imagination—a
CHAPTER THREE EMPIRE BITES BACK from:
Scenes of Projection
Abstract: The disciplinary pedagogical premise for the demonstration of image-casting devices—the camera obscura, the magic lantern, the solar microscope, and their variants—was to show and thereby train the spectator, in an idealized, ostensibly objectivizing, and instrumentalized version of how the eye works and, by extension, how the observer or witness of the experiment is supposed to see. As instrument imago of the spectator as subject of rational vision, however, projective apparatus did not actually resemble the witnessing body of the subject of rational vision.¹ This lack of corporeal resemblance is not incidental but rather the material form of a
CHAPTER FOUR ALONG ENLIGHTENMENT’S CAST SHADOWS from:
Scenes of Projection
Abstract: In the complex pedagogical scene of projection that endeavors to produce the subject as a disembodied witness who exercises rational vision, the action of shedding light to cast out or eliminate the shadows of superstition, false belief, the susceptibility of witness, and the spectator’s own bodily vulnerability is not only to illumine. Such shadow projecting is also to participate in a volatile but also potentially self-perpetuating motion machine, for to shed light upon is also to cast the very shadows the scene is to eliminate. Indeed, the scene of projection necessarily depends precariously on the fungible dynamics of the umbral
CHAPTER FIVE FOLLOWING THE RAINBOW from:
Scenes of Projection
Abstract: I open this chapter on the potentiality of the prism as an instrument of method with the figure of the prism deployed in Adorno’s and Dickinson’s techniques of negation as a tactic of production, a philosophical and poetic method for moving beyond oppositions (being and nonbeing, for instance, or, as in Dickinson’s opening query, “Which Is the best—the Moon or the Crescent?”) toward possibilities that extend between and also beyond such binaries, toward colors caught in and released by the possibilities of a refracting decomposition that also composes.¹ That method might be intrinsic to the instrument is not particular
Book Title: Cannibal Metaphysics- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Skafish Peter
Abstract: The iconoclastic Brazilian anthropologist and theoretician Eduardo Viveiros de Castro, well known in his discipline for helping initiate its "ontological turn," offers a vision of anthropology as "the practice of the permanent decolonization of thought." After showing that Amazonian and other Amerindian groups inhabit a radically different conceptual universe than ours-in which nature and culture, human and nonhuman, subject and object are conceived in terms that reverse our own-he presents the case for anthropology as the study of such "other" metaphysical schemes, and as the corresponding critique of the concepts imposed on them by the human sciences. Along the way, he spells out the consequences of this anthropology for thinking in general via a major reassessment of the work of Claude Lévi-Strauss, arguments for the continued relevance of Deleuze and Guattari, dialogues with the work of Philippe Descola, Bruno Latour, and Marilyn Strathern, and inventive treatments of problems of ontology, translation, and transformation. Bold, unexpected, and profound,
Cannibal Metaphysicsis one of the chief works marking anthropology's current return to the theoretical center stage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt17xr4vt
Chapter One A Remarkable Reversal from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: I once had the intention of writing a book that would have been something of a homage to Deleuze and Guattari from the point of view of my discipline; it would have been called
Anti-Narcissus: Anthropology as Minor Science. The idea was to characterize the conceptual tensions animating contemporary anthropology. From the moment I had the title, however, the problems began. I quickly realized that the project verged on complete contradiction, and the least misstep on my part could have resulted in a mess of not so anti-narcissistic provocations about the excellence of the positions to be professed.
Chapter Two Perspectivism from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: Such a requalification of the anthropological agenda was what Tânia Stolze Lima and I wanted to contribute to when we proposed the concept of Amerindian
perspectivismas the reconfiguration of a complex of ideas and practices whose power of intellectual disturbance has never been sufficiently appreciated (even if they found the word relevant) by Americanists, despite its vast diffusion in the New World.⁹ To this we added the synoptic concept ofmultinaturalism, which presented Amerindian thought as an unsuspected partner, a dark precursor if you will, of certain contemporary philosophical programs, like those developing around theories of possible worlds, others
Chapter Three Multinaturalism from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: “We moderns possess the concept but have lost sight of the plane of immanence….” (D. G. 1994: 104). All the foregoing is merely the development of the founding intuition, deductively effectuated by indigenous theoretical practice, of the mythology of the continent, which concerns a milieu that can rightly be called prehistorical (in the sense of the celebrated absolute past: the past that has never been present and which therefore is never past, while the present never ceases to pass), and that is defined by the ontological impenetrability of all the “insistents” populating and constituting this milieu—the templates and standards
Chapter Six An Anti-Sociology of Multiplicities from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: In
Anti-Oedipus, as is well known, Deleuze and Guattari overthrow the temple of psychoanalysis by knocking out its central pillar—the reactionary conception of desire as lack—and then replace it with the theory of desiring machines, sheer positive productivity that must be coded by the socius, the social production machine. This theory runs through a vast panorama of universal history, which is painted in the book’s central chapter in a quaintly archaic style that could make the anthropological reader wince. Not only does it employ the venerable savagery-barbarism-civilization triad, but the proliferating ethnographic references are treated in a seemingly
Chapter Seven Everything is Production: from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: If there is indeed an implicative asymmetry that could be taken as being primary in the Deleuzian conceptual system, it resides in the distinction between the intensive (or virtual) and the extensive (or actual). What interests me here is the bearing this distinction played in
Capitalism and Schizophrenia’s rereading of the two chief categories of classical kinship theory, alliance and filiation. The choice is justifiable in the first place because Deleuze and Guattari’s treatment of these two notions expresses with particular clarity an important displacement that takes place betweenAnti-OedipusandA Thousand Plateaus. Second, the choice also suggests the
Chapter Ten Production Is Not Everything: from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: It was emphasized above that the double author of
Anti-Oedipusargued that “nothing is changed” by the fact that the primordial energy is one of affiliation—in other words, it would just be a contingent fact. We then asked whether it would not be legitimate to conceive of another intensive order where the primary energy would be an “energy of alliance.” The problem, we concluded, was to determine the conditions for the construction of a concept of alliance qua disjunctive synthesis.
Chapter Thirteen Becomings of Structuralism from:
Cannibal Metaphysics
Abstract: This book’s question has often been the status of structuralism, and for good reason. Lévi-Strauss’ structuralism ought to be understood as a structural transformation of Amerindian thought—the result of an inflection sustained by the latter inasmuch as it was amenable to being filtered through problems and concepts characteristic of Occidental
logopoiesis(the same and the other, the continuous and the discrete, the sensible and the intelligible, nature and culture…), according to a movement of controlled equivocation and unstable equilibrium incessantly fertilized by corrupting translations. I will thus reprise my thesis from the first chapter concerning the intrinsically translational condition
Book Title: Becoming Past-History in Contemporary Art
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Blocker Jane
Abstract: Many books have sought to understand the key directions of contemporary art. In contrast,
Becoming Pastis concerned with the application of art history in the pursuit of such trends. Setting the idea of temporality decisively in the realm of art, Blocker's work is crucial for artists, art historians, curators, critics, and scholars of performance and cultural studies interested in the role of history in the practice of art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt18s3115
Four THE EMPTY STAGE: from:
Becoming Past
Abstract: I begin at the end. I begin in the melancholy and portentous mise-en-scène of the graveyard, the place where the dead lie among the living, where, as Joe Roach provocatively suggests, the tomb functions as a stage on which history is enacted. Roach, who argues that history is a theater of surrogates who stand in place of the dead, makes an intriguing comparison between the grave and performance. “A theatrical role,” he writes, “like a stone effigy on a tomb, has a certain longevity in time, but its special durability stems from the fact that it must be re-fleshed at
Book Title: Exchanging Clothes-Habits of Being II
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): RABINOWITZ PAULA
Abstract: Whether looking at Kate Chopin's silk stockings, Nellie Bly's capacious bag, Audrey Hepburn's cross-Atlantic travels, rings in James Merrill's poetry, or feminine ornaments in Algeria, these essays offer an ever-expanding vision of how fashion moves through culture and the economy, reflecting and determining identity at every stage and turn of the transaction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1b7x5h7
2 KRIZIA AND ACCESSORIES from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Mandelli (Krizia) Mariuccia
Abstract: In my opinion, accessories are small, portable talismans of our well-being. They make up that framework of meaning that we construct about ourselves; they are invaluable indicators of taste, character, style, and behavior. I can understand a lot more about people by looking at their shoes or their watch than the clothes they wear or the things they say. Walter Albini, one of my first assistants who went on to become an almost legendary name in fashion, used to say that accessories are ten times more important than clothes. I agreed then—and I agree now.
4 ORBITS OF POWER from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Mariani Andrea
Abstract: James Merrill agrees with Charles Baudelaire in considering dressing a deeply spiritual act that, through artifice (which opposes the banality of daily reality), demonstrates the soul’s immaterial dimension.¹ His texts abound in elegant skirts, fur coats, sandals, and sunglasses; the poetic “I” describes with morbid satisfaction scarves, pochettes, jewels (tissues, colors, textures) as signals of deeper truths (good or bad taste, tensions and intentions) that contribute to the overall message of the text. This is true even of tights (according to Umberto Eco, the only garment that “the thought abhors”), which can allow for an appreciation of the abstract, purely
11 A KNOT TO UNTIE from:
Exchanging Clothes
Author(s) Barile Nello
Abstract: If fashion is a language, albeit one marked by a low semantic level, then accessories can be taken as special indicators of the meaning of clothing. Idiosyncratically arranged, they are able to create both stable structures and variations on a theme. As a starting point I would like to use Mikhail Bakhtin’s concept of “multiaccentuality” and its appropriation by Stuart Hall, who adopts it as a benchmark for his encoding/decoding model.¹ His analysis of these modes of arrangement reveals decisive turning points in the social history of the tie.² Hidden within this accessory, in fact, is a symbolic potential that
INTRODUCTION. from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Herzogenrath Bernd
Abstract: Media and thinking are intimately related. Our memory, perception, and cognition are not just a given, as weightless, immaterial processes taking place purely mentally behind the walls of our skull, but also always already rest on a medial basis. As Nietzsche claims, “Our writing equipment takes part in the forming of our thoughts” (Unser Schreibzeug arbeitet mit an unseren Gedanken).¹ From here we can derive the media-philosophical insight that a new medium makes us think differently. Media thus reveal themselves as the body or, better, the different bodies of thought. It is important to note these bodies are not retroactive
1 Striking Poses: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Maoilearca John Ó
Abstract: According to Gilles Deleuze, “Cinema is Bergsonian.”¹ Despite the fact that Henri Bergson critiques the cinematographic mechanism in his magnum opus,
Creative Evolution(on account of its movement being oneappliedto still images rather than being immanent to them), Deleuze correctly realizes how central the moving image nonetheless is to Bergson’s philosophy. Yet this is clear in Bergson’s own testimonies: “When I first saw the cinematograph I realized it could offer something new to philosophy. Indeed we could almost say that cinema is a model of consciousness itself. Going to the cinema turns out to be a philosophical experience.”²
3 Different, Even Wholly Irrational Arguments: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Martin Adrian
Abstract: How do we actually define classical film theory? Is it really a unified, coherent body of texts that can be set against contemporary film theory? Are the theories of [Siegfried] Kracauer, [Walter] Benjamin, [Béla] Balázs, [Rudolf] Arnheim, and [André] Bazin “classical film theory”?¹
6 Montage Eisenstein: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Vassilieva Julia
Abstract: “The artist may be known rather by what he omits,” as Eisenstein quotes Schiller in a diary entry dated June 20, 1947, almost exactly six months before his death in February 1948.¹ The quotation might strike us as incongruous, coming from the master who was never shy to voice his opinion or illustrate his points—in both his directorial work and his theoretical commentaries. Yet at this late stage of his career, Eisenstein becomes preoccupied with the issue of what he termed “great nothingness”—the opposite, the emptiness, the nonidentity against which we can define what is present and given.
11 Thinking as Feast: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Brenez Nicole
Abstract: The literary and cinematic work of the French philosopher and filmmaker Raymonde Carasco-Hébraud (1939–2009) comprises a thorough analysis of the theoretical and practical circulations, intersections, and interrelations between verbal and audiovisual thinking. Author of sixty articles and three books, two published during her lifetime and one posthumously; editor of two collected volumes; and codirector, with her husband, Régis Hébraud, of sixteen films in both 16 mm and 35 mm, Carasco is perhaps the only professional philosopher to have created such an extensive literary and cinematic body of work. Some overlap between filmmakers and philosophers does exist. Jean-François Lyotard made
12 Rancière’s Film Theory as Deviation from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Conley Tom
Abstract: If it existed in French, the word that follows might be called a portmanteau fashioned from
cartographyanddeviation:écartographies. The neologism would designate a mix of theory and interpretive practice that could be described as a mapping of errant reflection. Steeped in Hegel and Marx and trained in dialectics, Jacques Rancière studies phenomena that an egalitarian ethic compels him to call into question or for which, in the interest of the ethics of investigation, he would wish that a critical distance or even dissentient position be taken. Disagreement, what he callsdissensus, prods the drive for equality: Where he
14 “Not Time’s Fool”: from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Wartenberg Thomas E.
Abstract: Amour(2012) is the latest in a series of films made by the Austrian director Michael Haneke that center on a couple whose partners are Georges and Anne. The films are not in any sense sequels, since despite sharing the same names, the characters in the different films are not different versions of the same people, a fact indicated, for example, by the different actors playing them, the different professions they have, and the very different circumstances in which they live. Nonetheless, it is fair to say that the films do exhibit a certain unity, for each film focuses on
15 Experience and Explanation in the Cinema from:
Film as Philosophy
Author(s) Smith Murray
Abstract: From the beginning, cinema has been held up as a unique medium partly by virtue of the kind of attention it seems to demand. Appreciating a film involves a special combination of perception, cognition, imagination, and emotion. Cinema engages us across a wider range of our embodied mental capacities than any other medium of representation, extending from low-level reflexes to abstract reflection. Cinema engages not only our visual and auditory senses, in a direct fashion, but also our senses of touch and balance and, perhaps, even those of taste and smell, in an indirect fashion. Films can physically startle and
Book Title: Making Things and Drawing Boundaries-Experiments in the Digital Humanities
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Sayers Jentery
Abstract: In
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries, critical theory and cultural practice meet creativity, collaboration, and experimentation with physical materials as never before. Foregrounding the interdisciplinary character of experimental methods and hands-on research, this collection asks what it means to "make" things in the humanities. How is humanities research manifested in hand and on screen alongside the essay and monograph? And, importantly, how does experimentation with physical materials correspond with social justice and responsibility? Comprising almost forty chapters from ninety practitioners across twenty disciplines,Making Things and Drawing Boundariesspeaks directly and extensively to how humanities research engages a growing interest in "maker" culture, however "making" may be defined.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt6wq
Chapter 1 The Boundary Work of Making in Digital Humanities from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KLEIN JULIE THOMPSON
Abstract: Debates on digital humanities are sites of boundary work in a history of arguments about the nature of the field. Boundary work is a composite label for the claims, activities, and structures by which individuals and groups create, maintain, break down, and reformulate boundaries between knowledge units (Fisher 13–14; Klein,
Crossing1–2). Thomas Gieryn coined the term in 1983 in a study of demarcating science from non-science. It is an ideological style that constructs boundaries rhetorically in three ways: by expanding authority or expertise into domains claimed by other professions or occupations, by monopolizing authority and resources, and
Chapter 3 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KRZYZANIAK MICHAEL
Abstract: The Living Netis one of several techno-textile projects created by the Vibrant Lives team. Using our Vibrant Lives app, we transform the network activity—or “data shed”—of event participants into a sound file that then plays through subsonic subwoofers, thereby causing the Living Net to vibrate at a variable rate depending on the amount of data being shed.
Chapter 4 A Literacy of Building: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ENDRES BILL
Abstract: In 2011, Steven Ramsay caused controversy when he gave his provocative talk at the Modern Language Association: “Who’s In and Who’s Out.” Ramsay claimed, “Digital Humanities is about building things.” While scholars criticized Ramsay for being exclusionary, they ironically ignored the fact that building has been generally excluded from tenure and promotion guidelines in the humanities.
Chapter 5 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) BURGESS HELEN J.
Abstract: MashBOT consists of a small thermal receipt printer connected to Twitter via an Arduino microcontroller. Love notes are generated using Markov chains from a corpus consisting of 90 lines from Roland Barthes’s
A Lover’s Discourse: Fragmentsand ten from Bruno Latour’sAramis, or the Love of Technology. They are then published to the @mashomatic Twitter account and printed as “receipts” for display. MashBOT asks us to think about the ways in which the written declaration of love (the “mash note”) is a document at once transactional and unfathomable.
Chapter 6 Making Humanities in the Digital: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SNEHA P. P.
Abstract: The humanities are traditionally text-based disciplines, domains of interpreting and representing human experience in its many forms and facets. The object of humanities inquiry is the cultural artifact, of which text is almost always a primary component. In the last decade or so, however, with the growth of predominantly digital environments in which the humanities now function, these objects and the approaches used to study them have changed significantly. Apart from texts (in the form of written material), images and audiovisual archival objects have added new dimensions to humanities research, creating potential for unique modes of inquiry while also imposing
Chapter 9 Looks Like We Made It, But Are We Sustaining Digital Scholarship? from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) TWETEN LISA
Abstract: The increasing amount of digital projects relating to the field of antiquity is especially promising for the future of traditionally archaic academic fields, including Ancient History, Classics, and Classical Archaeology. An enormous number of fragile, irreplaceable artifacts have survived from antiquity, but only a small number are accessible to the public. The vast majority are housed in storage rooms or isolated collections in museums and universities, as well as private collections around the world. For decades, this global scattering of antiquity resulted in widespread inaccessibility to ancient artifacts for both teaching and research. Through the process of digitization and the
Chapter 10 Full Stack DH: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SMITHIES JAMES
Abstract: Ian Hodder (2014) recently pointed to a “return to things” in the humanities and social sciences—a mode of analysis that explores the relationships between people and the objects we use to construct and make sense of the world (19). In digital humanities (DH), we see this turn in Matthew Kirschenbaum’s (2007) forensic analysis of computer hard disks; platform studies that investigate the relationship between computing culture, consoles, and other hardware (Monfort and Bogost 2009); and maker cultures that explore the humanities through practical experimentation (Dieter and Lovink 2014). A return to things suggests a desire to pay attention to
Chapter 17 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KRAUS KARI
Abstract: Bibliocircuitry and the Design of the Alien Everyday is a series of student projects that grew out of several book design labs conducted as part of a Fall 2012 course (ENGL 758B Book 2.0: The History of the Book and the Future of Reading) taught by Kari Kraus at the University of Maryland. Using physical books as springboards for computation and mixed media experiments, the student projects realize one of the larger aims of the course: to position bibliotextual scholarship and pedagogy as design-oriented practices that can be used to prototype and imagine the future of the book. The project
Chapter 18 Doing History by Reverse Engineering Electronic Devices from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) TURKEL WILLIAM J.
Abstract: In this chapter we describe three experiences of collaboratively reverse engineering historical electronic artifacts at the University of Western Ontario’s Lab for Humanistic Fabrication, a setting that supports hands-on fabrication and experimentation, programming and computer-aided design, and traditional historical research. Our first case study comes from Elliott’s work on the re-creation of wireless effects designed by early-twentieth-century magicians to simulate mind reading. These effects depended on electromagnetic induction, a technique that has recently come to prominence for its applications in radio-frequency ID tagging, wireless charging, and near-field and secure wireless communications, largely driven by interest in the Internet of Things.
Chapter 19 Electronic Music Hardware and Open Design Methodologies for Post-Optimal Objects from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) TEBOUL EZRA
Abstract: This chapter develops a brief historical and theoretical overview of hardware hacking within the context of electronic music instruments, suggesting how component-level analysis of some specific artifacts can help scholars to appreciate accelerating shifts in musical production as well as larger cultural trends. The chapter does not promote hardware hacking as an optimal solution for every musician. Rather, it recognizes hacking as a long-lasting and self-sustaining technocultural practice. This recognition is achieved in part by developing an adapted understanding of Anthony Dunne’s “post-optimal electronics” (2005). Such understanding investigates what makes electronic instrument design unique, how each artist bends the traditions
Chapter 20 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) BELOJEVIC NINA
Abstract: Glitch Console is a hacked or “circuit-bent” Nintendo Entertainment System that links the consumer culture of video game platforms to issues of labor, exploitation, and the environment. Player experience is interrupted by various types of glitches, which dramatically affect and “haunt” game play without crashing the system itself. Circuit bending, or the practice of serendipitously modifying the behavior of electronics by soldering new connection points on a circuit board, also encourages a creative, hands-on approach to media theory and platform studies. For both the player and the artist/hacker, the Glitch Console directs attention to materials and operations.
Chapter 21 Creative Curating: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) DIMMOCK NORA
Abstract: Re-Envisioning Japan: Japan as Destination in 20th Century Visual and Material Culture(REJ) conjoins a collaboratively built digital environment with the physical, personal collection of travel, tourism, and educational ephemera from which it evolved (Bernardi). Documenting changing images of Japan and its place in the world in the early to mid-twentieth century, the digital archive is comprised of artifacts but is in itself an artifact, a creatively curated representation of representations. Digital environments enable us to see things differently, and, asREJ’s title suggests, the project capitalizes on this virtue. Its direction has been shaped by the convergence between innovative
Chapter 24 Dialogic Objects in the Age of 3-D Printing: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) GARFINKEL SUSAN
Abstract: Smithsonian Now Allows Anyone To 3D Print (Some) Historic Artifacts,” declared a headline on the
Forbes Techblog page (Mack). “These New 3D Models Put the Smithsonian’s Most Renowned Items in Your Hands,” explained another, at the website ofSmithsonian Magazine(Stromberg). Both appeared in November 2013, when a simultaneous press release and conference announced the launch of “Smithsonian X 3D,” an initiative to scan significant museum artifacts and turn them into three-dimensional digital models to either view online or download and 3-D–print via a new portal website.¹ “The future has arrived,” tweeted Mythbusters host Adam Savage (2013). “Is
Chapter 25 Feminist Hackerspaces: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) ROSNER DANIELA K.
Abstract: In putting this zine together (see Figure 25.1), we wish to open a dialogue about the culture being made in and around feminist hackerspaces. Our research has started to reveal important connections between the work being done within these spaces and larger developments in corporate technology cultures. Members have reframed a concern for women’s access to technical industries as one of recognizing technical work already there, destabilizing the unmarked categories of technical labor. Our hope is that this zine can help spur a wider discussion of the practices and criticisms that are happening in these spaces. In doing so, we
Chapter 26 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) KNIGHT KIM A. BRILLANTE
Abstract: Fashioning Circuits uses wearable media as a lens to consider the social and cultural valences of bodies and identities in relation to fashion, technology, labor practices, and craft and maker cultures. A public humanities project, it combines scholarship, university coursework, and community partnerships.
Chapter 28 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SARGENT JACOB ALDEN
Abstract: Movable Party is a bicycle-powered system for participatory musical performance designed and built by Los Angeles-based maker collective, Movable Parts. Taking design inspirations from Taiwan’s street sound innovations, the collective made the system to instigate ad hoc, emplaced social interactions as a form of creative friction against urban sprawl. The system consists of three stationary bicycles, each equipped with rear-wheel hub motors that generate enough energy to power a medium-sized public address system. The bicycles are also equipped with sensors to track rear-wheel speed as well as rider position. Mapped to musical parameters in software, sensor data from riders’ gestures
Chapter 29 Disrupting Dichotomies: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) HUNT RYAN
Abstract: As demonstrated by the popularity of
Make: Magazine, Maker Faires, and maker-inspired curricula, makerspaces and maker culture have gathered significant attention in recent years. Although these concepts are increasingly familiar, many makerspaces (also known as fab labs, hackerspaces, and DIY centers) are often found in basements of university campuses or off the beaten path of popular downtown streets. As makerspaces gain traction, their role in supporting their local communities and acting as social spaces for their members has become clearer (Taylor, Connolly, and Hurley). For instance, many of them are becoming mobile, shifting from dark basements and hidden streets into
Chapter 32 Project Snapshot: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) WINET JON
Abstract: The AIDS Quilt Touch (AQT) Virtual Quilt Browser is one of several interactive experiences based on the AIDS Memorial Quilt. In free-browse mode, viewers can explore the Quilt by zooming and panning across the 25-gigapixel image. In Narrative Threads mode, they can follow pathways that present stories about individual panels and the cultural significance of the Quilt. Other AQT applications include a story-making platform, a digital guest book, and interactive timelines.
Chapter 34 Placeable: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) PAPAELIAS AMY
Abstract: As a four-year residential public university located in New Paltz, New York (a small college town in the Hudson Valley), SUNY New Paltz prides itself as a welcoming and inclusive community. With many academic programs rooted in social justice and political activism as well as student organizations committed to promoting cultural diversity, students and faculty openly engage in complex dialogue regarding issues of race, gender, ability, and identity politics. As Art Department faculty, we built curriculum in conversation with intersectional identities and initiated through a design process that augments the campus geography as a social space. We used intersectionality to
Chapter 35 Making the Model: from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) SNYDER LISA M.
Abstract: The workflow for traditional humanistic scholarship might be loosely described as follows: (1) identify a research question, (2) gather and critically analyze the materials (primary and secondary) that inform said question, and (3) write an interpretive analysis using selected elements from your materials to support and communicate an argument.¹ In evaluating the resulting scholarship, reviewers are asked to gauge the work and its potential impact on their field. Is the research question important? Did the author use the appropriate source materials (in terms of both quantity and quality)? Were the source materials harnessed to make a convincing argument? Did the
Chapter 37 Making It Matter from:
Making Things and Drawing Boundaries
Author(s) LINDBLAD J. K. PURDOM
Abstract: In the 2014 documentary
Tales of the GrimSleeper, Nick Broomfield investigates how Lonnie Franklin Jr. killed between ten and 180 working-class black women across three decades without being apprehended. The exact number of murders is unknown partly because some Los Angeles police officers used the code NHI, or “No Humans Involved,” when reporting on the crimes. Of course humans were involved, but the officers decided not to count murdered black women as humans. Following Saidiya Hartman (1997), such instances of institutional racism and oppression prompt “us to question whether the rights of man and citizen are realizable or whether
Book Title: Veer Ecology-A Companion for Environmental Thinking
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Royle Nicholas
Abstract: Some verbs are closely tied to natural processes: compost, saturate, seep, rain, shade, sediment, vegetate, environ. Many are vaguely unsettling: drown, unmoor, obsolesce, power down, haunt. Others are enigmatic or counterintuitive: curl, globalize, commodify, ape, whirl. And while several verbs pertain to human affect and action-love, represent, behold, wait, try, attune, play, remember, decorate, tend, hope-a primary goal of
Veer Ecologyis to decenter the human. Indeed, each of the essays speaks to a heightened sense of possibility, awakening our imaginations and inviting us to think the world anew from radically different perspectives. A groundbreaking guide for the twenty-first century,Veer Ecologyforegrounds the risks and potentialities of living on-and with-an alarmingly dynamic planet.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt1pwt70r
Foreword from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) GLOTFELTY CHERYLL
Abstract: If I ask you to brainstorm verbs that we commonly associate with the environmental movement, you might come up with
reduce, recycle, reuse, conserve, preserve, protect, save, clean up, bike, garden, regulate, legislate, andrestore. I would argue that these actions are still necessary but no longer sufficient. Most of these words describe work we can do to help the environment, but few of them tell us how to work on ourselves in a time of environmental upheaval. Taking a cue from Nicholas Royle’s recent bookVeering: A Theory of Literature(2011), let us unpack the nounenvironmentto discover
Introduction: from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) DUCKERT LOWELL
Abstract: We call this book a
companionin the hope of offering to its readers a ready partner and congenial fellow traveler, a vade mecum for fostering ecological attentiveness and encouraging further wandering. Through the transports of environmentally inclined verbs familiar and unexpected, this collaborative project aims not to provide encyclopedic overviews or definitive accounts of critical concepts (allconcepts are critical) but to forge a welcoming and heterogeneous fellowship, a colloquy for pondering possibilities for environmental thinking, ecological theory, and engaged humanities practice during a time of widespread crisis. Imagining futures by rethinking possibilities present and past,Veer Ecologyextends
Obsolesce from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) RONDA MARGARET
Abstract: “There should be more nouns / For objects put to sleep / Against their will,” begins “Phone Booth,” a recent poem by Brenda Hillman that meditates on the lost pleasures of the phone booth.¹ These opening lines rue the impoverishment of our vocabulary for describing what happens to objects and materials that have been “put to sleep” before they are worn out and what remains of their obdurate, even “will[ful]” presence as they are rendered inactive by market forces or consumer whim. This not-yet-created language must account, Hillman suggests, not only for the complex material changes these objects undergo as
Decorate from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) REMEIN DANIEL C.
Abstract: What decorates? And how? Why should the ecologically minded practitioner of the humanities concern herself with decorating—an activity of expenditure, of waste, an activity that resonates more with the theoretical invocations of
oikosthat mark an exclusively human household economy and the excesses of thedomus(the household, yes, but also the unsustainable extravagance of thedominus, the lord, whose decorating displays his sovereignty and ownership) than the invocations ofoikosin an ecological thinking that would mark the etymology ofeco-in order to better think the earth as a much larger and complex household?¹
Represent from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) YATES JULIAN
Abstract: On the face of it, it seems hard to imagine a less likely candidate for inclusion in a lexicon of verbs vital to ecological thinking than the word
represent, rubbished as it comes by a history of bad mediations, infidelities, ideological freighting, reduction, and redaction. The word sets in motion a string of approximating substitutions almost as if it concedes, from the beginning, that what matters, what it hopes to convey, shall simply slip through its fingers.
Compost from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) OPPERMANN SERPIL
Abstract: An essential process of biodegradation, composting occurs through the decomposition of nutrient-rich organic materials to enhance the soil properties. Since time immemorial nature’s invisible organic engineers have been composting to keep the soil alive, making it porous and aerated. If we zoom into this
living canvas(to use Dorian Sagan’s definition of soil),¹ we encounter a throng of organisms composting in an eccentric landscape of diffractive relations.² An epic of life is being played out in this extraordinary terrain of microentities internalizing one another from their own residues without completely eliminating the traces of their origins. Fraught with its own
Attune from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) MORTON TIMOTHY
Abstract: The ecological space of attunement is a space of veering, because rigid differences between active and passive, straight and curved, become impossible to maintain. Consider, for example, the phenomenon of adaptation, a complex and curious event. An evolving species is adapting to another evolving
Shade from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) THILL BRIAN
Abstract: The rich tradition of linking ecological thought to spectacle—to the practices of bearing witness, on film and through documentary photography, to visible instances of environmental degradation and destruction—is no longer sufficient for confronting the existential threats posed by contemporary ecological crises. Carbon levels, species extinction, the collapsing ice shelf, rising seas, and other indicators of humankind’s impacts on the environment exceed our capacity to witness and document the true scope of the damage directly. Because it grants special weight to ecological spectacle and tableau that evoke strong feelings in us, the ecological image can only offer us an
Drown from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) COHEN JEFFREY JEROME
Abstract: After four millennia of practice, narratives of worldly obliteration come easily. The
Epic of Gilgameshis “a text haunted by rising waters and disaster.”² The Book of Revelation promises sudden global warming, floods of flame. Millenarianism springs eternal, from the medieval “Fifteen Signs before Doomsday” tradition to the endless Left Behind novels, internet sites, and films.³ Never out of print since its publication in 1960, Walter M. Miller Jr.’sA Canticle for Leibowitzimagines the long aftermath of nuclear winter by arcing time round into a radioactive Middle Ages. A genre dubbed “cli-fi”
Ape from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) MAISANO SCOTT
Abstract: Film adaptations of
Romeo and Julietfrequently veer far from Shakespeare’s script. Both Franco Zeffirelli (1968) and Baz Luhrmann (1996), for example, eliminate the character of Paris from the final scene in the Capulet’s tomb.¹ But a more radical reimagining of the play’s end comes in Karina Holden’sRomeo & Juliet A Monkey’s Tale, a television documentary produced by Animal Planet in 2006 about Macaque monkeys in Lopburi, Thailand.² From the opening iambs of its modified prologue (“In Thailand’s town …”), Holden’s urban wildlife film pulls two seemingly far-removed worlds—Shakespeare’s Globe and Animal Planet—into a potentially catastrophic orbit with
Unmoor from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) ALAIMO STACY
Abstract: Steve Mentz begins “Toward a Blue Cultural Studies” by declaring that “the new millennium is bringing humanities scholarship back to the sea.” He suggests that looking “closely at the sea, rather than the just the land, challenges established habits of thought.”¹ Indeed, he contends that “the scholarly benefits of the sea for many fields hinge on its unfamiliarity, and on the shock of novelty that comes from jolting one’s habits and practices into a new structure.”² In
Shipwreck Modernity, Mentz discusses the marvelous 1627 woodcut of the Bookfish—a “codfish with a book in its belly”—a dramatic figuration of
Hope from:
Veer Ecology
Author(s) SHEWRY TERESA
Abstract: A poet calls for rain, hail, and floodwater to have a future, to “laugh again.”¹ The disturbing laughter of this work—Hone Tuwhare’s “Haiku (1),” first published in 1970—affirms the potential power and exuberance of marginalized water, but it also signals tensions that are bound up in hoping for a future involving floodwater.² The life jettisoned in floods—silt-choked grass; a drowned sheep, bent against a fence post—bears the marks of the extractive economy that settler farmers interwove with water in Aotearoa New Zealand, a landmass inundated by some 560 billion cubic meters of rain and snow every
CODA from:
Bioaesthetics
Abstract: “The enemy is the organism.”¹ The organism prevents the actualization of the body’s virtual power of becoming: “What a body can do is the nature and the limits of its power to be affected,” Deleuze famously stated in his book on Spinoza, and he added, “
We do not even know of what affections we are capable, nor the extent of our power.”² In order to unleash this power, the human body must shed its organs and its organization. It must transcend both the evolutionary history of its species (phylogenesis) and its acquired habits during life (ontogenesis). The mind that pertains
Book Title: Commemorating and Forgetting-Challenges for the New South Africa
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): MURRAY MARTIN J.
Abstract: When the past is painful, as riddled with violence and injustice as it is in postapartheid South Africa, remembrance presents a problem at once practical and ethical: how much of the past to preserve and recollect and how much to erase and forget if the new nation is to ever unify and move forward? The new South Africa's confrontation of this dilemma is Martin J. Murray's subject in
Commemorating and Forgetting. More broadly, this book explores how collective memory works-how framing events, persons, and places worthy of recognition and honor entails a selective appropriation of the past, not a mastery of history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt32bck0
Introduction: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The end of apartheid and the transition to parliamentary democracy brought to the surface a host of deeply entrenched tensions that were long suppressed under white minority rule. Yet as the “new nation” has struggled to establish a firm footing, the lingering ghosts of the past have continued to haunt the present. As retired South African constitutional court justice Albie Sachs once suggested, “We all know where South Africa is, but we do not yet know what it is.”¹ The dilemma—at once ethical and practical—confronting the creation of the “new South Africa” has revolved around how much of
7 Textual Memories: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: The birth of the “new South Africa” brought with it a proliferation of commentaries and essays, autobiographies, memoirs, personal reminiscences, and realist documentaries that explore the quandaries of social institutions and individuals as they attempt to deal honestly and forthrightly with the multiple legacies of tyranny, repression, and rebellion. As Athol Fugard argued, “[After 1994] I felt free to tell personal stories that I would have thought of as an indulgence during those years of apartheid.¹ As a kind of first-person narrative convention, these ”mementos” have entered the public discourse as fact-based stories that reflect their particular time and place
Epilogue: from:
Commemorating and Forgetting
Abstract: Heritage and history are like twins separated at birth: while their origins are identical, the trajectories of their distinct life-courses are quite dissimilar. As communicative devices, history and heritage rely on antithetical modes of persuasion. Heritage does not pretend to present a genuinely authentic, and reasonably plausible, account of some past but is a declaration of faith in that which came before.¹ While some observers celebrate heritage as a complementary or alternative way of mediating the past to popular audiences, critics dismiss it as little more than counterfeit history, packaged for commercial consumption.² “While it looks old, heritage is actually
Book Title: The Thought of Death and the Memory of War- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: War lays bare death and our relation to it. And in the wars-or more precisely the memories of war-of the twentieth century, images of the deaths of countless faceless or nameless others eclipse the singularity of each victim's death as well as the end of the world as such that each death signifies. Marc Crépon's The Thought of Death and the Memory of War is a call to resist such images in which death is no longer actual death since it happens to anonymous others, and to seek instead a world in which mourning the other whose mortality we always already share points us toward a cosmopolitics. Crépon pursues this path toward a cosmopolitics of mourning through readings of works by Freud, Heidegger, Sartre, Patocka, Levinas, Derrida, and Ricœur, and others. The movement among these writers, Crépon shows, marks a way through-and against-twentieth-century interpretation to argue that no war, genocide, or neglect of people is possible without suspending how one relates to the death of another human being. A history of a critical strain in contemporary thought, this book is, as Rodolphe Gasché says in the Foreword, "a profound meditation on what constitutes evil and a rigorous and illuminating reflection on death, community, and world." The translation of this work received financial support from the French Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt4cggnq
4 Unrelenting War from:
The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Author(s) Patočka Jan
Abstract: What should we remember of the wars of the twentieth century? How can the memory of the millions upon millions of lives sacrificed on all fronts, of the countless victims of organized famine, forced labor, deportation, and the extermination camps be inscribed in our thought? And what form should that memory assume? What is thought’s responsibility in opening itself to that memory? In all probability no great philosophy of the second half of the twentieth century has evaded these questions, no matter how implicitly or allusively they may have been treated. Such questions could not fail to have an impact
8 The Thought of Death and the Image of the Dead from:
The Thought of Death and the Memory of War
Abstract: We live day in and day out with images of death. They are foisted on us at regular hours of the day. We encounter them at newsstands, both in magazines and in the publicity for magazines. They continually invade the televised news. They participate in the coverage of events whose distinctive character, whose primary character is to
convey death [mortifère], to present, that is, to present us with (to bring to us) images of death. Whether they be images of war, of assassinations, of natural catastrophes, spectacular accidents, death makes news [actualité].¹ What is given to us as news (as
Book Title: Meeting Place-The Human Encounter and the Challenge of Coexistence
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Carter Paul
Abstract: The volume's central narrative-between Northern cultural philosophers and Australian societies-traverses the troubled history of misinterpretation that is characteristic of colonial cross-cultural encounter. As he brings the literature of Indigenous and non-Indigenous anthropological research into dialogue with Western approaches of conceptualizing sociability, Carter makes a startling discovery: that meeting may not be desirable and, if it is, its primary objective may be to negotiate a future of non-meeting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjjn9
Aside from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: It only remains in these opening remarks to say something about the structure of
Meeting Placeand the style. To call this an essay is not to be coy; all meetings proceed by way of trial and error, and if we could circumscribe and regulate them, they would hold little attraction. The short sections into which the arguments are organized are imagined like the rapid succession of graffitied walls, suburban streets in perspectives, sudden outfannings of rivers, and the loftier parallax of high-rise offices as one finalizes the journey. They conjoin different topics, perspectives, and speeds of approach. This can
Rendezvous from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Waiting for you, I flick through the poems of Nazim Hikmet—it’s the kind of casual literary encounter railway station bookshops specialize in—and come across the lines “statues of whoever invented airplanes / should grace the hotel rooms of all returns.”¹ Possibly it’s because the marble-floored lobbies behind me and the miscellaneous jigsaw of flatnesses in front of me could be the ruin of runways (if you extracted the street furniture and the horizon-hugging office blocks), but his strange thought captures my situation. A hotel room is booked for your return, the place of rencontre beyond the customs hall
Catching Up from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: I want to give two examples of practices that illustrate the poetic disposition needed to begin to discern the distinctive character of the meeting place. One is taken from psychiatry, the other from the human sciences of the central Australian Arrernte people. They would not normally be construed as related. Gaëtan Gatian de Clérambault, the
seul maitre en psychiatrieacknowledged by Jacques Lacan, was head of l’Infirmerie Spéciale des Aliénés de la Préfecture de Police de Paris between 1920 and his death in 1934. His fascination with drapery is well known but tends to be pathologized. The reciprocal obligations that
Over and Above from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Can we go back to the distinction made earlier between aesthetics and history? The Giacometti commission staged an encounter between two different understandings of the way the meeting place is designed. An urban design predicated on the erasure of gesture came up against a sculptural practice that brought to the representation of the human body an antithetical stance. Giacometti reduces the human figure to essential gestures that “communicate directly.” His is a very different aesthetic from the Art Nouveau appreciation of flowing robes and windswept ribbons found in de Clérambault; however, a comparable perception of public space exists. In a
Thirdings from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Suggesting a space of translation occupied by hybrid forms of communication, the improvised meeting place outlined here naturally suggests kinship with the well-known and roughly contemporary concepts of third space (Homi Bhabha) and ThirdSpace (Edward Soja); in fact, cultural studies texts and theses regularly bracket these ideas together. This is flattering, and in seeking to differentiate the dynamics of the meeting place from their larger theorizations of a politically emancipatory intercultural domain, the object is not to prove either priority or superiority. Quite the reverse, the description of colonial encounter that discloses a postcolonial potential is probably the concrete everyday
X Marks the Spot from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: There has been an uninvited guest at these discussions. It is the migrant. Of course, the migrant is an abstraction and stereotype, like the European philosopher or the Aboriginal elder. However, he and she represent a genuine historical vector in the afterlife of colonized countries; and it is a moot point where colonization ends and migration begins, or whether the latter is simply the aestheticization of history. Certainly migrants are notorious for thinking history begins (or, if escaping from the trauma zones of the Balkans, Afghanistan, Vietnam, or the Sudan, ends) with their arrival in the new country. However, reflective
In Passing from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Obviously, not everyone meets in the meeting place. Most people pass through remaining strangers to one another. The meeting place legitimates the social value of not meeting. It creates scope for solitude: not everyone is lonely in the crowd. Even in the meeting place meeting is exceptional. In fact, in a way, the intention of the informal choreographies that characterize the collective movement form of the public is to avoid a face-to-face encounter. If you watch the sea of heads bobbing up and down as people stalk into the distance, it resembles nothing so much as an undulating sheet of
Pigeonholes from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Here I want to stage a meeting between two terms. One of them,
hedra, is a Greek word that survives in our word polyhedron. The other is an Arrernte word,utyerre, whose connotations are explained in a recent book by Margaret Kemarre Turner. These are words about pigeonholes, the natural locations for things, but they are also terms that are pigeonholed, like their cultures, thought to be of merely local or anthropological interest. A discussion of them illuminates what might be meant by characterizing the meeting place as “a more convenient place.” At the same time, it also illuminates another
Erotic Zones from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Let’s try to enter the meeting place by another route. The meeting place is neither people nor place; it is some kind of algorithm of sociability, which from a material thinking point of view must be manifest in some palpable expression, whether fleeting glance, parallax of legs, or other unforeseen juxtaposition of formerly strange things. The meeting place is a matrix for the production of metaphors, figures of transport joining unlike things. When it incubates encounter, it not only facilitates and multiplies opportunities of exchange but also sets the exchange rates. Both stable and unstable, it can be characterized as
First Impressions from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: Circling round the erotope brings us to another topic: the writing of public space. Up until now the phenomenon of meeting has been imagined as emerging out of a primary pantomimicry, as an evolution of gestures informing a performance whose communication is increasingly verbal. The word
discoursemeans literally a running hither and thither, and this sense of meeting as a choreography of encounter has enabled us to define the meeting place in terms of the dynamics of meeting itself, as an event whose meaning is inscribed in the continuous present of the action. A tradition of such actions depends
Save the Wall from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: When I began this, I imagined that the erotic zone was a meeting place. I thought the divagations through the forest of other people’s ideas would eventually bring me to a place where these different testimonies met. The mythological stories would at last yield a common pattern or motivation. Writing the book would be an act of seducing the readers, but I would remain in control: the shape of the outcome would be veiled—the labyrinth we have had to pass through, the burden of being heir to millennia of interpretation, was a kind of initiation, a Dantean reminder that
Proxy from:
Meeting Place
Abstract: When I began
Meeting PlaceI thought it would end in a meeting. The failed rencontre with which it opened would be redeemed. The exacting work of understanding the environment of meeting would map all the possible paths of propinquity, in the process making the labyrinth of the passages transparent. The passages are all the possible approaches to meetings that surround a life like the skein of the spider’s web; when the walls containing them were no longer solid, I would see your fleeing figure, involved in its own blind destiny. From there it would be a simple matter of
Book Title: Prismatic Ecology-Ecotheory beyond Green
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Buell Lawrence
Abstract: In a series of linked essays that span place, time, and discipline, Jeffrey Jerome Cohen brings together writers who illustrate the vibrant worlds formed by colors. Organized by the structure of a prism, each chapter explores the coming into existence of nonanthropocentric ecologies. "Red" engages sites of animal violence, apocalyptic emergence, and activism; "Maroon" follows the aurora borealis to the far North and beholds in its shimmering alternative modes of world composition; "Chartreuse" is a meditation on postsustainability and possibility within sublime excess; "Grey" is the color of the undead; "Ultraviolet" is a potentially lethal force that opens vistas beyond humanly known nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt5hjk31
White from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) HERZOGENRATH BERND
Abstract: What is a white ecology? What does it look like, what does it contain? What is covered, what is left out? In a way, is not a white ecology—at least in the political, racial sense— what has been there, always, what is silently (or not so silently) practiced as the default mode of ecology? Is not green the new white, in such a way that ecology as we know it is firmly set and rooted in the Western Christian—white—tradition of Metaphysics?
Maroon from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) DUCKERT LOWELL
Abstract: From Aurora, the Roman goddess of the dawn, comes aurora borealis and aurora australis, winds of the north and south that speak of beginnings. I have never felt more attracted to a subject I have never seen. From a scientific standpoint, my desire makes sense: auroras are places where light and magnetism meet. Their colors are restless waves of charged particles; every flare catches something else and flickers anew. In a word, these are luminous storms that
beacon. “Beacon” comes from the Old Englishbéacn:a “sign” or “portent,” a fire set on high to serve as a warning, signal,
Orange from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) YATES JULIAN
Abstract: Waxing lyrical on the figure of the rainbow, bringing us back from the brink of an abstracting adulthood to a childhood in which color manifests as substance, Walter Benjamin posits something on the order of a prismatic materialism in these lines. Color morphs and moves. Insector angel-like, it “flits from one form to the next,” rendering each lively if not alive. This undifferentiated relation to color as substance radicalizes perception. It ties color to the objects that play host to it such that the visual becomes tactile. Color becomes transitive or transactional. Color happens. It happens to you, through you.
Gold from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) HARMAN GRAHAM
Abstract: In the late 1990s I coined the phrase “object-oriented philosophy.”¹ By the time of this writing (May 2012), the term had gained widespread international usage.² The two basic principles of my object-oriented approach are as follows: (1) objects have genuine reality at many different scales, not just the smallest, and (2) objects withdraw from all types of relation, whether those of human knowledge or of inanimate causal impact. In short, objects exist at many different levels of complexity, and they are always a hidden surplus deeper than any of the relations into which they might enter. The rest of object-oriented
Beige from:
Prismatic Ecology
Author(s) STOCKTON WILL
Abstract: Prompted by this astrophysical fact, but hardly limited to astrophysics or to astronomical systems, a beige ecocriticism
Book Title: Agitating Images-Photography against History in Indigenous Siberia
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Campbell Craig
Abstract: Agitating Imagesprovides a glimpse into the first moments of cultural engineering in remote areas of Soviet Siberia. The territories were perceived by outsiders to be on the margins of civilization, replete with shamanic rituals and inhabited by exiles, criminals, and "primitive" indigenous peoples. The Soviets hoped to permanently transform the mythologized landscape by establishing socialist utopian developments designed to incorporate minority cultures into the communist state. This book delves deep into photographic archives from these Soviet programs, but rather than using the photographs to complement an official history, Campbell presents them as anti-illustrations, or intrusions, that confound simple narratives of Soviet bureaucracy and power. Meant to agitate, these images offer critiques that cannot be explained in text alone and, in turn, put into question the nature of photographs as historical artifacts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctt7zw6wz
Dangerous Communications from:
Agitating Images
Abstract: Archival photographs are like any artifact consigned to a museum, archive, library, or collection—whether they are carefully wrapped, labeled, and placed in archival-grade boxes, or casually stacked in a corner amidst other historical debris. They lie mostly unknown and ignored until a day comes when they might be pressed into service. Archival photographs are brought into the light by someone preparing a monograph, research report, calendar illustration, slide show, exhibit, article, or argument, and then circulated and seen in ways that neither the camera operator nor the photograph’s subjects could ever have anticipated. Discrete histories of photographic encounter and
Conclusion: from:
Agitating Images
Abstract: Photography in the practice of history and cultural theory has consistently proven to confound interpretation as a generic category. It is apprehended along a spectrum of positions that see it alternately as a transparent reflection of the world and a fabricated cultural text. As I have shown in this book, whatever its ontological status, the photograph is implicated in historical discourses as a significant witness attesting to the everyday. As a resource in the production of historical narrative, it is much like any other document. A photograph, however, is an unstable element when reproduced as a component of historiography. I
4 Triangles of Life from:
The Road to Botany Bay
Abstract: Sturt and Leichhardt may have been good biographers of the journey, but when it came to
surveyingthe country they passed through, their journals were less satisfactory. Equipment failures aside, comparison with journals kept by other expedition members suggests that their estimates of latitude and longitude (where they are given) sometimes seem based on quite inadequate observations. There are discrepancies between the published and unpublished data. Sometimes curious lacunae appear in the journals - days go missing. Another explorer, Giles, candidly admits to losing track of time. Estimates of distance are impressionistic and, in many instances, insufficient angles seem to
2. Eyeing the Privates: from:
Murder Most Modern
Abstract: The tuxedo-clad emcee came on stage and delivered the prologue: “The next act is the most popular one of our troupe, a wondrous magic trick, something our leader learned while in Europe, the magic of taking apart a beauty (
bijin kaitai jutsu). Our leader will cut up a beautiful woman, her arms, legs, and neck, then put
chapter 1 The State of Nature: from:
The Tourist State
Abstract: They called it the netherworld. Situated in the isolated heart of the North Island of New Zealand, the spa town and ethnic tourism enclave of Rotorua was at once a wonderland and a hellhole. The tiny settler township and the adjoining Māori villages of Whakarewarewa and Ōhinemutu were built atop an active volcanic plateau, where sulfurous steam rose from gaping cracks in the ground and luminous pools of mineral-tinted water or mud bubbled away in residents’ backyards. To the late Victorian eye, it was a space in which nature was uncannily, violently present in its most elemental form, enfolded with
Variations on Authority: from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Bové Paul A.
Abstract: Jonn Brenkmann and Michael Sprinker, for example, both remark on the power of deconstructive discourse within the academy and account for this fact by seeing deconstruction as the mirror image of contemporary society. Sprinker specifically identifies the source of deconstruction’s power in the “technicality of [its] procedure.” For this
The Domestication of Derrida from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Godzich Wlad
Abstract: On July 17, 1976, H. M. Queen Elizabeth II. rose from her seat, approached the microphone, and, staring into the Canadian Broadcasting Company camera’s eye which re-transmitted the event simultaneously to over a hundred countries around the world, said, in heavily accented French: “Je déclare ouverts les dix-huitième Jeux Olympiques de 1'ère moderne, que nous célébrons dans la ville de Montréal.”¹ For the speech act theorist, even more than for the sports enthusiast, the moment was particularly savory:
Themost competent agent one could summon in all of one’s examples, the Queen herself, speaking as the Sovereign of Canada from
Error in Paul de Man from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Corngold Stanley
Abstract: Paul de Man was born in 1919.¹ This fact will come as a surprise, I think, to many of his readers. Many will have begun reading him about 1971, with the publication of
Blindness and Insightand his increasing conspicuousness in the new critical journalsDiacritics, New Literary History,andGlyph. They will have taken him to be a “strong” writer, perhaps in his thirties, on the basis of marked anomalies of his exposition: a drive toward the boldest and least cautious form of a position;² a taste for the jargon of foreign schools imported but not naturalized; an untroubled
Joining the Text: from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: In an article entitled “The
Retraitof Metaphor,” Jacques Derrida argues that within a certain context (but only in the limits of this context), the French wordretraitis “the most proper to capture the greatest quantity of energy and information in the Heideggerian text.”Retrait, having a variety of meanings in French like retrace, withdrawal, recess, retraction, retreat, etc., translates (without translating) Heidegger’s notion of a withdrawal of Being(Entziehung, Entzug).¹ If this word became indispensable to Derrida when trying to account for Martin Heidegger’s statements on metaphor, it becomes indispensable to me as well when trying to assess,
Afterword from:
The Yale Critics
Author(s) Arac Jonathan
Abstract: “Few facts about the life of our culture are more striking than the recent growth of literary criticism in both extent and prestige.” It is now “fiercely professional, an ‘institution’ as well as a discipline, a self-contained world as well as a secondary branch of humane letters.” When Irving Howe wrote this in 1958, the end seemed near to what Randall Jarrell had called “The Age of Criticism.” M. D. Zabel noted in 1962 “the effect of selfcancellation which a large part of contemporary critical writing conveys.” Yet to mark this effect, Zabel reached back to Mencken’s mockery of “criticism
Book Title: Neuropolitics-Thinking, Culture, Speed
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Connolly William E.
Abstract: By taking up recent research in neuroscience to explore the way brain activity is influenced by cultural conditions and stimuli such as film technique, Connolly is able to fashion a new perspective on our attempts to negotiate—and thrive—within a deeply pluralized society whose culture and economy continue to quicken.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttts8p6
ONE The Body/Brain/Culture Network from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: My first mission in this study is to explore the critical role that technique and discipline play in thinking, ethics, and politics, and to do so in a way that accentuates the creative and compositional dimensions of thinking. By the
creative dimensionI mean the opaque process by which new ideas, concepts, and judgments bubble into being; by thecompositional dimensionI mean the way in which thinking helps to shape and consolidate brain connections, corporeal dispositions, habits, and sensibilities. Some theories, themselves products of arduous thought, ironically depreciate the activity in which the theorists are invested: they reduce thinking
THREE Nature, Affect, Thinking . . . from:
Neuropolitics
Abstract: Every conception of culture, identity, ethics, or thinking contains an image of nature. And the relation goes the other way too. Even the most adamant realist in, say, engineering presupposes a cultural conception of how scientific cognition proceeds. To adopt the correspondence model of truth, for instance, is to act as if human capacities for cognition can be brought into close correspondence with the way of the world separate from those capacities. Nietzsche would say that such a realism preserves the remains of an old theology.¹ Its operational assumption, first, that the world
hasa deep, complete structure and, second,
Book Title: Heidegger and Criticism-Retrieving the Cultural Politics of Destruction
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Pease Donald E.
Abstract: In Heidegger and Criticism: Retrieving the Cultural Politics of Destruction, William Spanos examines the controversy, both in Europe and the United States, surrounding Heidegger and recent disclosures about his Nazi past. Not intended as a defense or apology for Heidegger’s thought, Spanos instead affirms the importance of Heidegger’s “antihumanist” interrogation of the modern age, its globalization of technology, and its neo-imperialist politics. The attack on Heidegger’s “antihumanist” discourse (by “liberal humanists” who have imported the European debated into the United States) aligns ideologically with the ongoing policing operations of William Bennett, Allan Bloom, E.D. Hirsch, Roger Kimball, Dinesh D”Souza, and others in the spheres of higher education and cultural production. Throughout his arguments, Spanos focuses not so much on Heidegger the historical subject as on the transformative cultural political discourses and practices, implicit in and enabled by Heidegger’s interrogations of Being and Time, that have led to the contemporary emergence of the multiplicity of resistant “Others” colonized by hegemonic discursive formations, all the while reminding us that Heidegger’s philosophic interrogations eventually generate a diverse body of transgressive writing and an oppositional intellectual climate in the West.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttts9rh
Chapter 1 On Heidegger’s Destruction and the Metaphorics of Following: from:
Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: The publication of Victor Farías’s
Heidegger and Nazismin France in 1987 reopened the question concerning the relationship between Heidegger’s thought and Nazi politics with the force of scandal. Farías’s book contributes little that was not already known about Heidegger’s personal affiliation with Nazism.¹ And his analytical effort to implicate Heidegger’s thought at large with Nazism is characterized by a superficiality so obvious that, as Philippe Lacoue-Labarthe has observed, it betrays a certain intellectual dishonesty,² a dishonesty, I would add, endemic to the future anterior perspective of anthropological inquiry. It suggests that Farias’s identification of Heidegger’s philosophical writing at large
Chapter 4 The Indifference of Difference: from:
Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: In an essay entitled “Nothing Fails Like Success,” Barbara Johnson, one of the ablest apologists for deconstruction, attempts to defend it against attacks from the literary right and left.¹ In the process, she betrays the “blindness of (over) sight” of most, if not all, of the American exponents and practitioners of this method of interpretation deriving more or less from the authority of Jacques Derrida.² Like them, she all too character– istically
overlooksthe fact that deconstruction as articulated and practiced by Derrida himself has its source in and constitutes a calculatedre-vision(as much as a deconstruction) of Martin
Chapter 5 Heidegger and Foucault: from:
Heidegger and Criticism
Abstract: In the preceding essays, I situated my destructive inquiry into the operations of humanist discursive practices at the site of ontology. My purpose in doing so was to suggest the underlying continuity between the various historically specific representations of reality in the onto-theological tradition, the tradition that has come to be called “the West” or “the Occident”: that these representations constitute, in Derrida's terms, “a series of substitutions of center for center, . . . a linked chain of determinations of the center.”¹ My limitation of inquiry to the site of ontology was intended to thematize the metaphysics informing the
Introduction from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: Jacques Aumont once suggested that any approach to cinema and temporality should involve an initial choice between two possible perspectives: (a) the created space-time of the image or (b) the time of film viewing. The latter corresponds to the fact that images are viewed during a certain period of time and that, to be appreciated, they require the spectator’s gaze. The temporal status of an image depends on a viewer’s attention and, therefore, on the duration of contemplation. Aumont argues that we have to distinguish between these two axes of image-time and experienced time.¹ The
ocular timespent watching a
1 The Phenomenology of Image and Time from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: In documentary theory the phenomenology of the image as imprint and record fuses with the classical index argument, which has commonly been associated with the ascribed veracity of documentary representation. Hence, the trace status of photography and film represents a crucial problem in the ongoing discussion on film and historical representation. More recently, various approaches to the aesthetics and experience of documentary film have dealt with classical issues of image and time, including an important recognition of the affective and psychological impact of documentary representation in film and media. In this context the phenomenology of image and time corresponds with
7 The Trace in Contemporary Media from:
Documentary Time
Abstract: This chapter considers some examples that radically question the phenomenology of the trace. I will acknowledge representations and media contexts beyond photography and film or narratives that involve a critical reflection on the production and reproduction of public memory in moving images. I stress the thematic persistence of the trace in documentary, while at the same time reflecting on the limitations of the phenomenological discourse in relation to contemporary media. At this point it is also relevant to acknowledge an important theme in Ricœur’s reassessment of the philosophy of memory: the possibility of the erroneous memory and the fact that
Introduction: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Modernity is an atavism. Its advent in Western culture led to and was given shape by political, social, and aesthetic developments that can be characterized by a recursive temporal subjectivity. This book provides a historical and theoretical account of that subjectivity by looking at late nineteenth- and early twentieth-century science, fition, and photography. Theories and expressions of atavism in these representational spheres reveal the way modern thought oriented itself around a paradigm of obsolescence and return that structured the experience of modern time. If “modernity” designates itself in terms of its eternal up-to-date-ness, atavism—a theory of biological reversion emerging
4. Atavistic Time: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: Our experience of everyday life is always an experience of time: hours, days, months, dates, schedules, but also habits, rituals, memories. What Kath Weston has called the “time claims” of our world-historical moment dictate, in part, our sense of self, and our own sense of time shapes those claims in turn.¹We act on time, and time acts on us. In Freud’s case studies, discussed in chapter 1, this temporal function takes the form of a psychic recurrence whereby childhood trauma expresses itself as delayed consciousness, requiring a period of latency before its eventual return. For Freud, the return of the
6. An Atavistic Embrace: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: In the final scene of Eugene O’Neill’s drama
The Hairy Ape(1921), the main character, Yank, encounters a gorilla at the zoo.¹ As the two stare “intently” at each other, Yank admires the gorilla’s body: “Some chest yuh got, and shoulders, and dem arms and mits!” (195). Inspired and awed by the strength of the figure before him, Yank breaks his new friend out of his cage, only to be repaid with “a murderous hug.” Lying near death on the floor of the cage, Yank utters his last words “in the strident tones of a circus barker”: “Ladies and gents,
Coda: from:
Atavistic Tendencies
Abstract: What if Robin Vote and Felix Volkbein met Yank? What if they all ran into Tarzan one day, or had coffee with Dr. Fu Manchu and asked Wolf Larsen to join them? And what about the Wolf Man and the Rat Man; they would have a lot to talk about, no? These aren’t academic questions, I know. But I pose them because this book, in part, has been about putting this cast of characters in the same room together. Meeting them, and having them meet each other, has meant asking and trying to answer all sorts of questions about history,
Book Title: On the Rim-Looking for the Grand Canyon
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): NEUMANN MARK
Abstract: Why do nearly five million people travel to the Grand Canyon each year? Mark Neumann answers this question with a book as compelling as the panoramic vistas of the canyon. In On the Rim, he describes how the Grand Canyon became an internationally renowned tourist attraction and cultural icon, and delves into the meanings the place holds for the individuals who live, work, and travel there. “In the chasm’s dizzying depths and flamboyant displacement of solid ground, as well as in the perceptions of those drawn there-explorers and day-trippers, employees and outlaws, artists and fast-buck artists-Neumann discovers a context in which to examine cultural and experimental fissures that separate leisure and work, home and away, religion and science, art and life. . . . A lively read.” Boston Globe
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttskbf
4 Spaces of (Re)Production from:
Telling Identities
Abstract: The spatialization of history evident in the Californio testimonials allows the narrators to position themselves as a collectivity, a caste or a faction within or outside given geographical sites (territory, department, region, nation, mission,
presidio, pueblo, rancho, hacienda, ranchería,wild ness [el monte], the coast, the inland area, “the frontier,” the capital and the “penal colony”) and in relation to particular social and political positions. Two sociospatial realms predominate during the Spanish period, one (the mission) viewed from the outside, and the other (thepresidio/pueblo) from within. From the vantage point of the latter site identity is generated and alterity
6 Profonationalism in Alta California from:
Telling Identities
Abstract: Nations, Hobsbawm insists, are the product of territorial states, nationalism, and particular stages of technological and economic development.¹ Before the formation of a state, the elite within a nationalist movement often produces constructs of “the nation-to-be” although in fact the “nation” produced afterward may be quite different. Nationalism as a mass movement, Hobsbawm indicates, is a final stage, coming after the formation of a state. To generate identification with this “imagined community,”² nationalist movements often call upon already existing constructs of community, what we can term “protonationalist” identities generated by discourses of religion, ethnicity, language, kinship, culture, and earlier “historical
Three Political Struggles for Memory from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: The past is gone, it is already de-termin(at)ed; it cannot be changed. The future, by contrast, is open, uncertain, and indeterminate. What can change about the past is its
meaning, which is subject to reinterpretations, anchored in intentions and expectations toward the future.¹ That meaning of the past is dynamic and is conveyed by social agents engaged in confrontations with opposite interpretations, other meanings, or against oblivion and silence. Actors and activists “use” the past, bringing their understandings and interpretations about it into the public sphere of debate. Their intention is to establish/convince/transmit their narrative, so that others will accept
Four History and Social Memory from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: The relationship between memory and history is nowadays a central preoccupation within several fields of the social sciences. Debates and reflection on the subject are most extensive and intensive within the discipline of history itself, particularly among those scholars who, recognizing that the historian’s craft extends beyond the mere “reconstruction” of what “actually” happened, deploy more complex modes of analysis in their work. An initial complexity emerges from the recognition that what “actually happened” includes the subjective perceptions and experiences of social actors. Furthermore, historical knowledge includes interpretive processes, the construction and selection of the “facts,” and the selection of
Five Trauma, Testimony, and “Truth” from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: What can people who lived through “unbearable” situations say or tell about them? What ethical, political, and more generally human issues are involved? Debates about testimony pervade practically every disciplinary field, from literary criticism to the broader area of cultural critique, from philosophy to history, from political studies to psychoanalysis, sociology, and anthropology.
Conclusion from:
State Repression and the Labors of Memory
Abstract: Many open questions remain. In these concluding remarks, I want to take up an issue that, although frequently mentioned throughout the text, merits further discussion. The issue is that in addition to cultural and symbolic considerations, it is important to incorporate the analysis of institutions and the issues related to the democratic construction of citizenship. These issues are significant for an academic perspective; they are crucial and central for a book that wants to contribute to civic responsibility and action orientations.
Book Title: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Cowie Elizabeth
Abstract: Recording Reality, Desiring the Real shows how documentary has been simultaneously understood as factual, as story, as art, and as political. Elizabeth Cowie stakes documentary’s central place in cinema as both an art form and a form of social engagement, addressing the seeming paradox between the pleasures of spectacle in the documentary and its project of informing and educating.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttsm8z
Introduction: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: Documentary, in presenting the sights and sounds of reality, enables reality to “speak” at the same time as it “speaks about” reality. It thus realizes the desire that cinematography inaugurated: of knowing reality through its images and sounds, that is—figuratively—of allowing reality to “speak for itself.” This book examines the documentary film as a cinematic project that seeks to enable the citizen-spectator to know and experience reality through recorded images and sounds of reality. Closely linked to the development of both modernity and modernism, documentary arises as a film genre characterized by a dual assertion of the objective
1 Narrating the Real: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: “How can we be sure that what we are seeing is true and not fiction?” is the question that haunts documentary. If documentary, as Grierson defined it, is “the creative treatment of actuality,”¹ Brian Winston asks what is “the nature of the ‘actuality,’ or reality left?”² And what is the nature of the fiction that Comolli argues arises from the “slightly falsifying” process of the re-presentation of recorded reality?³ The factual cinema that emerged in the 1920s and that, following John Grierson, came to be called documentary was characterized by two central concerns: firstly, an opposition to the dominant mass
2 Working Images: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: This chapter introduces two questions that are central to this book: First is the question of the representability of everyday life and the project of “voicing” the ordinary as not only subjective testimony but also art—that is, as a sensory experience that is emotional and aesthetic. Second is the question of how the sounds and images of work, workers, ordinary people, and their activities signify as facts and as historical information. How has documentary film produced such discursive definitions and thus such defining discoursing? The focus here will be images of work in 1930s documentaries for these raise the
3 Documentary Desire: from:
Recording Reality, Desiring the Real
Abstract: The identifications that, in the fiction film, are dismissed as vicarious, illusory, and ideologically dangerous are, in documentary, both permitted and proper to its project. Explored here are the ways in which the documentary film, no less than the fiction feature film, offers mise-enscènes of desire and of imagining that enable identification even while, or rather because, it asserts itself as real. As spectators of documentary, we bring with us not only an understanding of the conventions of the novelistic, as well as of the “factual,” but also a desire for reality represented and a desire to find that moment
3 Monstrosity, Illegibility, Denegation: from:
Monster Theory
Author(s) Clark David L.
Abstract: In a theoretical age often enamored of the “playfulness” of the sign and the “pleasure” of the text, Paul de Man’s last writings stand out as darkly sobering, driven as they are by an almost ascetic desire to bring thinking into proximity with what he calls, after Walter Benjamin,
“reine Sprache,”pure language (TT, 92),² or, in Carol Jacob’s terms, “that which is purely language—nothing but language.”³ From the stringent and selfcanceling perspective afforded by de Man’s late essays, the Nietzschean rhetoric of play and gaming often associated with postmodernist theory and literary practice registers the work of a
4 The Odd Couple: from:
Monster Theory
Author(s) Prescott Anne Lake
Abstract: Giants and pygmies are ambiguously monstrous: strange “here” but normal “there,” where their species is at home, whether Scythia, Africa, Brazil, Lilliput, or Brobdingnag. The fact of merely situational monstrosity was not lost on earlier writers, who could joke about spatial relativity (the thirty-foot Ascapart in
Bevis of Hamptonleaves home because he is too short) or more soberly deduce from it the value of ethnic humility (in the thirteenth century Jacques de Vitry wrote that “just as we consider Pygmies to be dwarfs, so they consider us giants And in the land of the Giants, who are larger than
5 America’s “United Siamese Brothers”: from:
Monster Theory
Author(s) Pingree Allison
Abstract: In the early 1830s, as spectators lined up in towns across the United States for the celebrated event, they found for sale a publicity pamphlet purporting to give “an historical account,” based on “actual observations,” of the human exhibit they were about to see. The cover and title page greeted them with a familiar sight: an eagle, sporting a banner reading “E Pluribus Unum” in its beak, with the motto “‘United We Stand’” inscribed below (see Figure 5.1). Such an image, of course, was unmistakably American: though the nation was only a few decades old, already these symbols circulated widely,
12 The Alien and Alienated as Unquiet Dead in the Sagas of the Icelanders from:
Monster Theory
Author(s) Sayers William
Abstract: In the medieval Icelandic culture of the supernatural, one who recrossed the boundary from death to life was called
aptrgangr(revenant) ordraugr,derived from the Indo-European rootdhreugh(harm, deceive). In thedraugr,spirit is not breathed into matter so much as material corporeality is retained by the restless spirit. The collected evidence, literary and folkloric, medieval and later, gives a consistent picture of physically active dead beings who bear the earth of the grave or the sodden clothing of death at sea. Not only are their bodies uncorrupted, but in the cases of the physically most active and
14 Dinosaurs-R-Us: from:
Monster Theory
Author(s) O’Neill John
Abstract: Americans love big things, including themselves. They even love things bigger than themselves, like America. Recently, Americans have demonstrated an extraordinary affection for carnivores larger than them selves—returning the earlier efforts by King Kong and other aliens such as ET to love Americans. Even when Americans love tiny creatures like Mickey Mouse what they love is their espousal of the cardinal American virtues of hardworking, asexual aggression tirelessly practiced by the little guys in totally controlled, aseptic environments such as that they have come to worship at Disneyland.¹ The Disney complex contains both a psychic and technocultural apparatus through
Chapter 1 Making Sense after Babel from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Talens Jenaro
Abstract: Translators occupy the smallest print in the history of literature. They are more than the impersonal, they are the anonymous. With few exceptions, the name of the translator appears in small type on the credits page; it rarely appears on the title page, and almost never on the cover. It is as if the act of reading a text in a language different from the original were a most shameful activity. “Good manners” are that institutionalized behavior that allows this shameful activity to be kept secret; everyone pretends not to see what everyone else knows (even the translator knows that
Chapter 3 Architectures of the Gaze from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) López Silvia L.
Abstract: I shall begin with something evident. Museums—in particular, fine arts museums—have become in modern societies, at least in those that became what they are under the revolutionary impulse of Enlightenment philosophy, an exemplary space in which unanimous commemoration can take place. They are a space where the secular ritual occurs, through which a community sanctions a number of cultural achievements. Although these achievements bring an individual character to the community, at the same time they are supposed to link it to the whole of humanity in the realm of the spirit. These spaces have been designed for the
Chapter 7 Reading in Process, the Antitext, and the Definition of Literature from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Giefer Laura
Abstract: In a previous work, dedicated to a
theoría¹ of reading, I investigated the paradoxical movement that characterizes the relationship between the language of literary theory and that of literature. One of the core chapters of that work noted the characteristics of identity and difference that mediate between text and metatext. In dealing specifically with the question of difference, the problem of defining language or the literary text was brought to the foreground, a classical problem that was not addressed at the time because the investigation wandered along other paths. Nevertheless, the way was prepared for understanding that the question about
Afterword from:
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spain
Author(s) Lewis Tom
Abstract: The selection of essays presented in
Critical Practices in Post-Franco Spainaccurately reflects the balance of forces within Spanish literary theory since 1975. Fairly specific absences and emphases help to map the terrain. Gender criticism of Spanish literature remains primarily the work of scholars residing in North America. Today, in contrast to the 1960s and 1970s, Marxist theory enjoys little purchase among Spanish literary theorists or social philosophers. And, having coaxed a turn toward concepts that treat incompleteness, openness, and pragmatics as opposed to wholeness, closure, and universals, a diffuse but hegemonic “postmodernism” now overlies earlier Spanish traditions of linguistic
CHAPTER FIVE Worlds in Transition and Utopias of Otherness from:
Utopias of Otherness
Abstract: The previous four chapters have traced the shift from the grand narratives of nationhood proposed by various currents of Portuguese and Brazilian intellectual thought to a proliferation of micronarratives of nationhood in the realms of literature, popular culture, and the political arena in contemporary Brazil and Portugal. Although this study has focused primarily on Portuguese and Brazilian national cultures, this epistemological shift has clearly been an international phenomenon due to a multiplicity of interrelated factors, namely (in varying order of intensity) globalization, the relative weakening of foundationalist thought structures (for example, nationalisms, Marxism, and Christianity); the affirmation of micro or
2. “In dreams begin responsibilities”: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Rabaté Jean-Michel
Abstract: In a dense passage of
Nadja, André Breton puzzles out a complex sequence of factors that account for his inexplicable fascination with a terrible play. Admitting that a bad melodrama entitled LesDétraquéeshad made a powerful impression on him, he narrates a disturbing dream he had at the time. The dream’s climax came when a moss-colored insect about twenty inches long slipped down into his throat until it was pulled out of his mouth by its huge hairy legs. Meditating on the nausea this still triggers in him, Breton tries to generalize, reflecting on the links between dreams and
3. The Dream in the Wake of the Freudian Rupture from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Mowitt John
Abstract: Even as he maintains remarkable rigor in his search for the validation of his clinical practice, Freud does not entirely subscribe to a certain conception of science—in particular, to the conception of experimental science. Nevertheless the knowledge (
le savoir,thus translated passim) of psychoanalysis Freud invents only presents itself in experience. With dreams Freud claims that a space other than the one defined by neuronal, synaptic, electrical, or chemical interconnections, and other than the imaginary, traverses, in both man and animal, the psychical apparatus regulating them. This is a space where, among other activities he will attempt to define,
5. Literature and Pathology: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Ronell Avital
Abstract: Ever resisting the temptation to be born again, even today, as we mark the one-hundredth anniversary of its initializing text, psychoanalysis was from the start just about the only one to confront human cruelty, the punishing aspects of the psyche, without a theological alibi—in fact, with no alibi or safety net. Psychoanalysis ventured forth without an alibi—with no excuse, as it were. This is one of Derrida’s recent themes: that psychoanalysis met head-on with unbearable examples of suffering, but took no recourse to theology. It may have scanned monotheism, or even served as witness for Dr. Schreber when
9. The Dream between Drive and Desire: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Verhaeghe Paul
Abstract: One of the major conclusions of Freud’s
The Interpretation of Dreamsis, of course, that every dream comes down to the fulfillment of a secret wish. This is the main message of Freud’s book, the one that has been kept intact for the last hundred years. The latent dream thoughts contain a forbidden unconscious desire, which finds its expression in the manifest dream content, albeit in a distorted way due to the dream-work. Every analysis has to follow the opposite road, meaning that the dream-work has to be countered by the analytic work. At the end of the analytic day,
11. Dream Model and Mirroring Anxiety: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Bay Amanda
Abstract: Freud’s
Interpretation of Dreamsis generally acknowledged to interrogate the very status of the sexual. Yet it is striking to observe that the psychoanalytic literature of the past fifty years virulently challenges the Freudian model—Vorbild—of the dream and the transference. We are actually witnessing a perplexing evolution characterized by the always more profound denial of the very essence of the Freudian discovery and its foundation—namely, the existence of the images created by autoerotic sexuality, i.e., the unconscious (infantile) images—Bild[er]—that shape the dream as well as the neurotic symptom, and even psychosis. Already in the preface
14. A Knock Made for the Eye: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Peng Yün
Abstract: This essay is part of a larger project in which I try to trace certain links in twentieth-century thought among thinkers such as Freud, Deleuze, Benjamin, Heidegger, and Blanchot. I introduce my theme by referring to Foucault’s 1970 essay on Deleuze, “Theatrum Philosophicum.” Here Foucault writes that the most important question for philosophy now, as Deleuze shows us, is the relation between thought and non-thought, or stupidity. Thinking is therefore an
actin the double sense of the word. It is first of all an act of giving birth to itself, fromandin relation to stupidity. The act of
16. Strange Intelligibility: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) Terada Rei
Abstract: “Most prominent among [the] formal characteristics, which cannot fail to impress us in dreams,” Freud asserts, are the “differences in intensity” within them (SE IV, 329). Freud notes that “differences in intensity between particular dream-images cover the whole range extending between a sharpness of definition which we feel inclined, no doubt unjustifiably, to regard as greater than that of reality and an irritating vagueness which we declare characteristic of dreams because it is not completely comparable to any degree of indistinctness which we ever perceive in real objects” (SE IV, 329). In Freud’s experience—and in our own, we would
19. Wondrous Objectivity: from:
The Dreams of Interpretation
Author(s) McNamara Andrew
Abstract: While outlining a philosophy of “fine art,” Hegel offered some advice to the nascent discipline of art history. It could be summed up, more or less, as “stick to the facts.” Of course philosophy would forge the aesthetic-theoretical hardwiring of the field. If there had been a sufficient number of art historians at that time to constitute a discipline, this intellectual division of labor might have been understood as a grievous insult. The subsequent formation of the discipline shows that many art historians have indeed treated this as exemplary advice, and thus an extensive arm of art history has concerned
Book Title: Philosophy Beside Itself-On Deconstruction and Modernism
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Marshall Donald
Abstract: The writings of French philosopher Jacques Derrida have been the single most powerful influence on critical theory and practice in the United States over the past decade. But with few exceptions American philosophers have taken little or no interest in Derrida’s work, and the task of reception, translation, and commentary has been left to literary critics. As a result, Derrida has appeared as a figure already defined by essentially literary critical activities and interests. Stephen Melville’s aim in Philosophy Beside Itself is to insist upon and clarify the distinctions between philosophy and criticism. He argues that until we grasp Derrida’s philosophical project as such, we remain fundamentally unable to see his significance for criticism. In terms derived from Stanley Cavell’s writings on modernism, Melville develops a case for Derrida as a modernist philosopher, working at once within and against that tradition and discipline. Melville first places Derrida in a Hegelian context, the structure of which he explores by examining the work of Heidegger, Lacan, and Bataille. With this foundation, he is able to reappraise the project of deconstructive criticism as developed in Paul de Man’s Blindness and Insight and further articulated by other Yale critics. Central to this critique is the ambivalent relationship between deconstructive criticism and Lacanian psychoanalysis. Criticism—radical self-criticism—is a central means through which the difficult facts of human community come to recognition, and Melville argues for criticism as an activity intimately bound to the ways in which we do and do not belong in time and in community. Derrida’s achievement has been to find a new and necessary way to assert that the task of philosophy is criticism; the task of literary criticism is to assume the burden of that achievement. Stephen Melville is an assistant professor of English at Syracuse University, and Donald Marshall is a professor of English at the University of Iowa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt44r
Foreword from:
Philosophy Beside Itself
Author(s) Marshall Donald
Abstract: In 1912, Arnold Schönberg composed
Pierrot Lunaire, a musical setting of “thrice seven” poems by the French poet Albert Guirard. The texts assemble a conventional symbolist environment, through which move characters from thecommedia dell’arteengaged in vaguely ritual actions of indeterminate import but with overtones of hostility to the order and monuments of ordinary bourgeois culture. They are, in short, “dated.” But Schönberg’s music remains irreducibly strange even after three-quarters of a century (this fact has seemed to some Schönberg’s chief excellence). And the “method of composing with twelve tones” goes even further. For that method can no longer
Chapter 4 Paul de Man: from:
Philosophy Beside Itself
Abstract: The burden of the argument to this point has been that philosophy, in response to needs generated within its “own” history, has come to be at necessary odds with its self, its history, and the proprietary self-presence implicit in such notions of self and history. In these straits, philosophy has turned increasingly to criticism for an understanding of its activity, and so has risked also its possible disappearance into literature. Literary criticism and theory thus find themselves in an odd position: a discipline that has a long-established habit of looking elsewhere—primarily to science or philosophy—for models of its
Book Title: Bodies and Biases-Sexualities in Hispanic Cultures and Literatures
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): REIS ROBERTO
Abstract: Looking at a wide range of cultural practices and artifacts, including television, popular music, and pornography, Bodies and Biases addresses representations of sexual behavior and collective identity, homosexuality, and ideologies of gender in historical and contemporary Hispanic culture. Contributors: Silvia Bermúdez, Dário Borim Jr., Herbert J. Brant, Lou Charnon-Deutsch, Ana García Chichester, Brad S. Epps, Gustavo Geirola, Mary S. Gossy, J. Eduardo Jaramillo-Zuluaga, Marina Pérez de Mendiola, Salvador A. Oropesa, James A. Parr, Javier Aparicio Maydeu, Claudia Schaefer-Rodríguez, Robert ter Horst.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt62p
Introduction from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Reis Roberto
Abstract: According to
Webster’s New World Dictionary,the wordintroduction,in strict usage, refers to the preliminary section of a book (often written by someone other than the author) that explains and leads into the subject proper.Introderives fromintero,which, akin tointer,denotes “inwardly.”Duce,coming fromducere,implies “to lead,” which, not surprisingly, will later becomedukeorprince,one who rules an independent duchy. Bearing in mind the etymology of the two terms that compose the wordintroductionitself, we suspect it is not exactly our role to introduceBodies and Biases: Sexualities in Hispanic Cultures
Chapter 1 The Sexual Economy of Miguel de Cervantes from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Horst Robert ter
Abstract: Chapter XXII of Part I of
Don Quijote,the episode in which the knight unwisely sets twelve galley slaves free, is justly celebrated for its indeterminacy. On the practical level, there seems to be no problem, for each condemned person more or less confirms his guilt, and once all are liberated they, taking their lead from Ginés de Pasamonte, refuse to reconstitute themselves as a small new society or state of freedmen that would obey Don Quijote’s injunction to seek out the city of Toboso and there present themselves collectively before Dulcinea. Instead, in fear of the Santa Hermandad, the
Chapter 3 Desire and Decorum in the Twentieth-Century Colombian Novel from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Vogt Eric W.
Abstract: There is one incessant history: the history of the body, the history of its adventures and misadventures. Throughout the life of their country, Colombian writers have narrated the history of the body, invoking different words and thus weaving this history in quite diverse ways. We propose here to narrate the history of these words, a more modest history, as are all those written in modern times.¹ This would have been impossible were it not for the extraordinary and sad atmosphere that has enveloped Colombia for many years. In fact, to attribute the debut of the body as an erotic object
Chapter 5 The Body in Context: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Parr James A.
Abstract: In an initial approximation, there could hardly be two more disparate works or two more dissimilar protagonists than Don Quixote and Don Juan. The differences in age, social class, self-assigned mission, attitudes toward women, and the Apollonian versus Dionysian worldview would seem to mitigate against any similarities of consequence. It will be my purpose, nevertheless, to seek out those similarities and to suggest that difference assumes a secondary role—one that could be equated with surface structure—in comparison to the commonalities of the deeper structure made manifest in the characters’ final disposition at the hands of their authors, but
Chapter 8 El Diario de José Toledo: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) de Mendiola Marina Pérez
Abstract: Judging from the homophobic response in 1991 disclosed by Mexican state officials to a gay conference to be held in Guadalajara, Mexican gay and lesbian groups such as GOHL (Grupo Orgullo de Liberatión Homosexual [Homosexual Liberation Pride Group]), Colectivo Sol (Sun Collective), and Patlatonalli still have a long way to go. This said, Mexico is also one of the first countries in Latin America to decriminalize homosexuality, and it boasts perhaps the longest history of gay and lesbian activism, as outlined by Matthews:
Chapter 12 The Case for Feminine Pornography in Latin America from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Foster David William
Abstract: There are few topics in contemporary cultural production that are more controversial, that more divide individuals into entrenched positions, than pornography. While pornography may be a central fact of human artistic expression, as archaeology and historical studies have amply demonstrated (cf.
The Invention of Pornographyfor its relationship to modern culture in general), there is yet no adequate resolution as to how to interpret its role in a global conception of cultural production. For some, typically today such implausible bedfellows as religious fundamentalists (Attorney General’s Commission on Pornography—the so-calledMeese Report)and politically correct, interventionist feminists (paradigmatically, Dworkin and Dworkin,
Chapter 14 Codifying Homosexuality as Grotesque: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Chichester Ana García
Abstract: More than a decade after his death in 1979, Virgilio Piñera’s literature is still relatively unknown compared to that of many of his contemporaries. His contribution to Latin American theater and to Cuban narrative is undeniably important. Similarly, he exercised great influence on a younger generation of writers with whom he came in contact during his years at the helm of
Ciclón(Cyclone; 1955-59), such as playwrights José Triana (1935) and Antón Arrufat (1935), and novelists such as Severo Sarduy (1937-93) and Reinaldo Arenas (1943-92) (González Echevarría 23). And yet, Piñera’s work remains elusive; perhaps more than any other Cuban
Chapter 15 Eroticism and Homoeroticism in Martín Fierro from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Lockhart Melissa A.
Abstract: José Hernández (1824-86), with his
Martín Fierro(1872 and 1879), is undoubtedly the emblematic author of Argentine identity. Critics and cultural essayists have been unable to resist constructing around him a series of supposedly national and spiritual values concerning what it means to be Argentine. At the same time, they have established the canonical character of a genre known as the gauchesque.² The theme of the gaucho has passed through various stages of transformation, even though not all works of the era are considered to be part of the gauchesque genre: from Hilario Ascasubi (1807-75) to Bartolomé Hidalgo (1788-1822) and
Chapter 17 The Ecstasy of Disease: from:
Bodies and Biases
Author(s) Epps Brad
Abstract: What is at stake when the ravages of the flesh nourish the ecstasy of the letter? What happens when the metaphorical condensation of love and death, so essential to the mystico-poetic tradition, is realized, actualized, literalized? How do readers and writers situate themselves with respect to texts that communicate sickness, especially when the texts engage the discourse of divinity? Despite their seemingly timeless appeal, these and other questions acquire immediacy and urgency in the crisis of representation (Simon Watney) and the brutality of idealization (Leo Bersani) that mark the age of AIDS. Brutally critical indeed: for even as AIDS has
Introduction: from:
Calibrations
Abstract: This book is about close reading. It is about a practice of close reading that oscillates rapidly between domains—the literary-aesthetic, the social, the cultural, and the political—in order to explore the mutually illuminating heterogeneity of these domains when taken together. It does this not to assert the often repeated postmodernist view that there is nothing outside the text, but to outline a reading practice I call
calibrations: a form of close reading of literature with what lies beyond it as a way of understanding structures of transformation, process, and contradiction that inform both literature and society. The method
1 Literature, Anthropology, and History in Ghosh′s In an Antique Land from:
Calibrations
Abstract: Consider the words of Grace Paley in her introduction to
Soulstorm(1974), a collection of short stories by Clarice Lispector: ″It is not unusual for writers to be children of foreigners. There′s something about the two languages engaging one another in the child′s ears that makes her want to write things down. She will want to say sentences over and over again, probably in the host or dominant tongue. There will also be a certain amount of syntactical confusion which, if not driven out of her head by heavy schooling, will free the writer to stand a sentence on its
2 Social Imaginaries in Transition: from:
Calibrations
Abstract: The number one problem of modern social science has from the beginning been modernity itself. I mean that historically unprecedented amalgam of new practices and institutional forms (science, technology, industrial production, urbanization); of new ways of living (individualism, secularization, instrumental rationality); and new forms of malaise (alienation, meaninglessness, a sense of impending social dissolution).
3 African Postcolonial Relations through a Prism of Tragedy from:
Calibrations
Abstract: As we saw from the previous chapter, there are various ways in which ordinary people attempt to convert the state for social use via an idiom of privatization. This involves an elaborate discursive ensemble that includes urban myths and legends about negotiation of the public sphere, and the various practices of gift exchange by which people attempt to coalesce the scale of kinship and social ties with that of the bureaucratic state apparatus. I also noted the degree to which politicians attempt to conceptually assimilate the state to their own persons by appropriating tropes of culture heroism that have notions
Book Title: Postcolonial Insecurities-India, Sri Lanka, and the Question of Nationhood
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): KRISHNA SANKARAN
Abstract: This ambitious work explores the vexed connections among nation building, ethnic identity, and regional conflict by focusing on a specific event: Indian political and military intervention in the ethnic conflict between the Sinhalese and Tamils in Sri Lanka. Postcolonial Insecurities counters the perception of “ethnicity” as an inferior and subversive principle compared with the progressive ideal of the “nation.” Krishna, in fact, shows ethnicity to be indispensable to the production and reproduction of the nation itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt8vt
Introduction from:
Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: This book is about the troubled and violent journey of postcolonial nationalism in South Asia. It examines the interaction between the modern enterprise of nation building and the emergence of ethnic conflict in this area by focusing on a specific event: Indian political and military involvement in the struggle between Sinhalese and Tamils in Sri Lanka. It argues that the attempt to construct nation-states on the basis of exclusionary narratives of the past and univocal visions for the future has reached an impasse. The fixation with producing a pulverized and uniform sense of national identity (usually along majoritarian lines) has
1 Mimetic Histories: from:
Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: In a sense, to speak of foreign policy presupposes the availability of a given spatialization of the world in terms of us and them. Conventionally, foreign policy is the set of actions by “us” out “there.” In the modern, post-Westphalian world of nation-states, foreign policy constitutes the actions of state elites who try to maintain, at minimum, something called “our national security” and to further at every opportunity something called “our national interest.” This discourse of foreign policy is amnesiac about the relative novelty of its central identities and the dialectical character of its antinomies. It exemplifies the Nietzschean dictum
3 Essentially Tamil: from:
Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: Ethnicity is not. Any more than the nation. I begin this chapter by evoking Frantz Fanon’s famous quote, “The Negro is not. Any more than the white man” (1967, 231), to indicate the dialectical and mutually constitutive character of ethnicity and nation under the regimes of modernity. Neither nation nor ethnicity is an immanent force, an essence within history, destined for eventual recuperation. Rather, they have to be understood in a relational framework, one that highlights their mutual indispensability and the hierarchizing effects of their interaction (Comaroff 1991). The intellectual and political privileging of the nation-state and its univocal discourse
4 Modulating Bangladesh: from:
Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: The preceding chapters examined the social constructions of India, Sri Lanka, and the two Tamil nationalist movements as contested narratives. Throughout, the focus was trained on the interaction between ethnicity/nation, self/other, minority/majority, inside/outside, and various other antinomies in the production and reproduction of these selfsame identities. Rather than proceeding from a standpoint of epistemic realism (the notion that “the world comprises objects the existence of which is independent of ideas or beliefs about them” [Campbell 1992, 4]) oriented toward discovering
theunderlying truth of the matter, I have argued for the following: a social and representational view of reality; the
7 Postcolonial Aporias: from:
Postcolonial Insecurities
Abstract: If an aporia is defined as a problem or difficulty arising from an awareness of opposing or incompatible views on the same theoretic matter, it seems to me that we have reached an aporetic stage in the postcolonial quest for nation building. The very practices that produce the nation are coeval with its simultaneous fragmentation or unraveling. Although the supposedly progressive and universal idea of the nation is expected to eventually triumph over the reactionary and particularist idea denoted as ethnicity, a close look at the practices of nation building reveal that both nation and ethnicity share a logic that
Book Title: Abolition’s Public Sphere- Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Fanuzzi Robert
Abstract: Robert Fanuzzi illustrates how the dissemination of abolitionist tracts served to create an “imaginary public” that promoted and provoked the discussion of slavery. He critically examines the writings of William Lloyd Garrison, Frederick Douglass, Henry David Thoreau, and Sarah and Angelina Grimke, and their massive abolition publicity campaign geared to an audience of white male citizens, free black noncitizens, women, and the enslaved.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttt9g9
CONCLUSION: from:
Abolition’s Public Sphere
Abstract: In his most forceful abolitionist speeches, Douglass foresaw little future for the antislavery struggle other than a face-to-face encounter with racism. He meant the rhetorical enactment of still more “agitation” within the abolitionists’ public sphere to signal the incompatibility of the present with a narrative construction of progress and of unseen continuity with the past. Garrison, on the other hand, was so determined to put time on the abolitionists’ side that he actually looked forward to this state of antagonism. In his first public appearance on behalf of the cause, he presented the inevitable outcome of antislavery agitation—the virulent
Introduction from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) NICHOLS BILL
Abstract: In 1964 the respected film scholar Jay Leyda published an invaluable little book,
Films Beget Films: A Study of the Compilation Film.¹ It was the first sustained effort to explore the effects of reusing footage originally intended to convey one meaning to convey a different meaning. In his foreword Leyda likens such films to H. G. Wells’sTime Machineas a way to return to and comment on the past: the “compilation machine,” as he termed this form of filmmaking, “offers itself for the communication of more abstract concepts than can be expected of the more habitual fiction film, more
[1] Péter Forgács: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) MACDONALD SCOTT
Abstract: In recent decades, some filmmakers have made remarkable films and videos that, in one way or another, retrieve films that are endangered, either because of their physical fragility or because of historical factors, and make them available to audiences in a new form. Instances of this approach include Alan Berliner’s
A Family Album(1987), made up of excerpts from American home movies recorded in the United States during the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s; Lynne Sachs’sSermons and Sacred Pictures(1989), which recycles excerpts of films made during the 1940s and 1950s by L. O. Taylor, an African American Baptist preacher
[2] The Memory of Loss: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) NICHOLS BILL
Abstract: What follows is the result of a series of exchanges conducted primarily at a distance by e-mail. I wanted to pursue a set of topics that revolved around what seemed to be nodal aspects of Péter Forgács’s overall work.These topics address the representation of historical events and the specific means by which Forgács sidesteps the conventions of both historical narratives (fiction) and traditional documentary (nonfiction). Like early documentarians in the 1920s, in that period before the practice of shaping films drawn from the practice of everyday life were commonly called documentaries, Forgács returns to the avant-garde, modernist tradition for much
[3] Toward a New Historiography: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) VAN ALPHEN ERNST
Abstract: Since the 1990s, the spread of memory practices in art and literature has been enormous. These memory practices manifest themselves not only around issues such as trauma, the Holocaust and other genocides, and migration but also in the increasing use of media and genres like photography, documentary film and video, the archive, and the family album. These memory practices form a specific aesthetics. The major question raised by this flourishing of memory practices is, should we see this as a celebration of memory, as a fin de siècle, and in the meantime a debut de siècle, as an expression of
[5] Historical Discourses of the Unimaginable: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) RENOV MICHAEL
Abstract: In 2000, the Foundation for Jewish Culture sponsored a “First Conference of American Jewish Film Festivals” in conjunction with the twentieth anniversary of the San Francisco Jewish Film Festival, the first of the American Jewish film festivals. One conference session devoted to “The Holocaust Film as Genre” was meant to grapple with the sometimes-uncomfortable fact that the Holocaust continues to be the source and subject of countless documentary films by Jewish makers. This obsessive return to the Shoah, generations after the event, is figured by some as an overinvestment in Jewish victimhood or an unwillingness to move on to other
[10] Reenvisioning the Documentary Fact: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) MILLER TYRUS
Abstract: In 1992, Péter Forgács made two films that utilize, like other of his Private Hungary films, amateur film footage but also stand out in his corpus for their explicitly reflexive, metapoetic treatment and their innovative, nonnarrative formal structure:
Wittgenstein TractatusandBourgeois Dictionary.Both films, in fact, share overlapping film materials, withBourgeois Dictionarygenerally presenting lengthier, contextualized versions of some passages that appear inWittgenstein Tractatusin more pontillistic, fragmentary form. Both films also, notably, explore linguistic and quasi- mathematical frameworks for organizing the found images and motivating their potential meanings. Image, voice-over, music, and text stand in a
[11] The World Rewound: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) DAVIS WHITNEY
Abstract: In his study of the “ontology of film,”
The World Viewed,Stanley Cavell writes that “Wittgenstein investigates the world (‘the possibilities of phenomena’) by investigating what we say, what we are inclined to say, what our pictures of phenomena are, in order to wrest the world from our possessions so that we may possess it again.”¹ Cavell takes Wittgenstein’s investigation to propose, perhaps to characterize, the deepest project of film conceived not only as art but also (and more important) as a mode of being in the world in which we inhabit a relation to the world—namely, viewing. Cavell’s
[12] Taking the Part for the Whole: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) Evans David Robert
Abstract: Péter Forgács and Tibor Szemzö first became acquainted through stage and concert productions in the 1980s, the time of
Snapshot from the Island (Pillanatfelvétel a szigetröl).This 1987 record also includes another of Szemzö’s compositions,Water-Wonder N2 (Vizicsoda),which Forgács had previously used in a 1984 video work,The Golden Age (Aranykor).This was, in fact, the first occasion on which he employed Szemzö’s music. They later met as part of the Group 180(180-as Csoport),of which Szemzö was a founding member. It was here that Forgács participated (as narrator) in the performance of Frederic Rzewski’s compositionComing Together
[14] Reorchestrating History: from:
Cinema’s Alchemist
Author(s) KINDER MARSHA
Abstract: In 2000, the Labyrinth Project (an art collective and research initiative on interactive narrative)¹ embarked on a collaboration with Hungarian media artist Péter Forgács to turn his sixty-minute, single-channel film,
The Danube Exodus,into a large scale, multiscreen immersive installation. Forgács’s film (which was aired on European television in 1997) provided intriguing narrative material: a network of compelling stories, a mysterious river captain whose motives remain unknown, a Central European setting full of rich historical associations, and a hypnotic musical score that created a mesmerizing tone.
2 The Persistence of Cold War Antagonisms from:
Divided Korea
Abstract: One would think that ideological antagonisms substantially subsided with the collapse of the Berlin Wall in 1989 and the subsequent disintegration of the Soviet Union. But in Korea it is striking how much remains the same. The peninsula has become an anachronism in international relations: a small but highly volatile Cold War enclave surrounded by a world that has long moved away from a dualistic ideological standoff. What Kihl Young Hwan noted two decades ago thus remains by and large true today: the level of ideological hostility in Korea is so intense that it leads to the perception, and actual
3 The Geopolitical Production of Danger from:
Divided Korea
Abstract: Constituting a natural link between the Asian mainland and Japan, the Korean peninsula has always been an important factor in the security policy of the surrounding powers. In the nineteenth century two major wars were fought for control of the peninsula, one between Japan and China (1894–1895) and the other between Japan and Russia (1904–1905). With the development of military technology and the increased globalization of the confrontation among the great powers in the twentieth century, the geopolitical importance of Korea increased. The arbitrary partition of Korea in 1945, and the subsequent transformation of this supposedly provisional settlement
5 Dilemmas of Engagement from:
Divided Korea
Abstract: Although underestimated by defense experts, the promotion of dialogue and face-to-face encounters is by no means a radical idea. Most state actors entangled in the Korean security situation display a preference for the so-called soft landing scenario, which foresees an incremental rapprochement between North and South. All but the most radical critics of engagement advocate policies that are geared toward avoiding either a direct military conflict with or a sudden collapse of North Korea. Since the late 1990s the South Korean government has been particularly active in promoting such a step-by-step approach toward normalizing political interactions on the peninsula. While
6 Toward an Ethics of Difference from:
Divided Korea
Abstract: Drawing attention to the contradictions and problems of normalization, as I did in chapters 4 and 5, is not to oppose engagement or to eschew democratic values. Quite the contrary. An active engagement policy is badly needed on the peninsula, but in order to overcome some of the most difficult existing security dilemmas, the policy must integrate an understanding and appreciation of difference. Democracy is crucial to this endeavor too, for in its essence a democratic ethos is all about finding ways of appreciating and redeeming difference. In this chapter I will outline the contours of an ethics of difference.
Book Title: Compelling Visuality-The Work of Art in and out of History
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Zwijnenberg Robert
Abstract: Takes up the commonly unexplored question of what is actually present in art—what aspects have survived the vicissitudes of time. International and interdisciplinary, this volume conducts readers into a discussion of the significance of personal response to works of art. Contributors: F. R. Ankersmit, Mieke Bal, Oskar Bätschmann, Georges Didi-Huberman, Michael Ann Holly, Donald Preziosi, Renée van de Vall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttc70
CHAPTER TWO Before the Image, Before Time: from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Mason Peter
Abstract: Whenever we are before the image, we are before time. Like the poor illiterate in Kafka’s story, we are before the image as
before the law: as before an open doorway. It hides nothing from us, all we need to do is enter, its light almost blinds us, holds us in submission. Its very opening—and I am not talking about the doorkeeper—holds us back: to look at it is to desire, to wait, to be before time. But what kind of time? What plasticities and fractures, what rhythms and jolts of time, can be at stake in this
CHAPTER THREE Aesthetics before Art: from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Farago Claire
Abstract: As anyone who has ever attempted to act on a mirror image’s spatial cues knows, the logic of the looking glass is counterintuitive. Walking through time’s looking glass, as it were, in the opposite direction from contemporary understandings of science, religion, and art as three distinct domains, toward their fluid intersection in the early modern period, the following essay attempts to recapture a decidedly unmodern aspect of our artistic heritage. The aspects of Leonardo’s paintings that will be of concern here pertain to that elusive and troubling designation known as “style.” Meyer Schapiro associated “style,” in an article published in
CHAPTER SEVEN Mourning and Method from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Holly Michael Ann
Abstract: My principal preoccupation as an art historian (actually as a historiographer, which means that I am a scholar of the intellectual history of the history of art) has always been a philosophical one: why do we write about works of visual art in the first place? Why do subjects (
us) need to talk about objects? What kind of a dialogue, even game, is taking place? In my book of 1996,Past Looking: Historical Imagination and the Rhetoric of the Image,¹ I tried to make a case for the variety of ways that works of art both literally and metaphorically prefigure
CHAPTER NINE Seeing Soane Seeing You from:
Compelling Visuality
Author(s) Preziosi Donald
Abstract: While it may be difficult to capture in words the complexities and nuances of architectonic artifice of an ordinary kind, those that characterize Sir John Soane’s Museum in London (1812–1837),¹ the object of the two conflicting observations in the epigraphs and the subject of this essay, present virtually insurmountable difficulties, and not only because of the restricted space available here. The few illustrations in the following text, then, must serve as synopses of the most salient portions of the following narrative; more complete discussions of the present subject may be found elsewhere.²
Book Title: Covert Gestures-Crypto-Islamic Literature as Cultural Practice in Early Modern Spain
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Barletta Vincent
Abstract: Covert Gestures reveals how the traditional Islamic narratives of the moriscos both shaped and encoded a wide range of covert social activity characterized by a profound and persistent concern with time and temporality. Using a unique blend of literary analysis, linguistic anthropology, and phenomenological philosophy, Vincent Barletta explores the narratives as testimonials of past human experiences and discovers in them evidence of community resistance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttgdg
2 Written Narrative and the Human Dimension of Time from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: This chapter will map out in some detail the activity-centered approach to traditional
aljamiado-morisconarratives from Castile and Aragon. This approach, based on the analysis of manuscript texts and what is known about the cultural world of Castilian and Aragonese crypto-Muslims, seeks to address the ways in which members of these communities used handwritten narrative texts in their efforts to make sense of their complex and precarious existence in Spain. In order to present the details of this approach, both from a theoretical and methodological perspective, I will be drawing connections between phenomenological philosophy, ethnographic research on oral narrative, and
3 Contexts of Rediscovery, Contexts of Use from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: “A true America waiting to be discovered.”¹ These are the words that Serafín Estébanez Calderón (1799–1867), a prominent nineteenth-century writer, political figure, book collector, and committed Arabist, uses in his address at the Ateneo de Madrid on November 12, 1848, to characterize the potential value of the
aljamiado-moriscotexts that had been turning up in private collections and in areas of rural Spain once inhabited by communities of crypto-Muslims.² Speaking at the ceremony inaugurating Pascual de Gayangos’s chair in Arabic at the Ateneo, Estébanez was likely unaware of the ominous associations that his America metaphor might engender, even prior
4 The Prophet Is Born, Muslims Are Made from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: In the previous chapters, I have mapped out a basic theoretical framework for an activity-centered approach to
aljamiado-moriscoliterature. Beginning with a discussion of the inherent interdisciplinarity of this mode of literary analysis, I concluded by defining what it means to place Morisco scribes and readers, as human agents, at the center of textual study. Rooted in what Gary Saul Morson has termed the “human dimension of time” (1994, 10), the activity-centered approach I am suggesting focuses on the uses to which Morisco readers and scribes putaljamiadotexts within their social world and the ways in which culturally embedded
5 A Morisco Philosophy of Suffering and Action from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: One of the first things that catches modern readers’ attention when looking at
aljamiado-morisconarratives in their manuscript context is that these narratives are frequently part of a large collection of texts bound within the same codex. Analogous in a very general way to modern literary anthologies or course readers used by university professors, the overwhelming majority ofaljamiado-moriscomanuscripts in fact contain a number of texts, many of which are not, strictly speaking, narrative in form. An example of such an anthology is Toledo, BCLM ms. 395, analjamiado-moriscomanuscript copied out near the end of the sixteenth century,
6 Language Ideologies and Poetic Form from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: One of the most perplexing questions in
aljamiado-moriscostudies is also one of the most fundamental: why did Moriscos produce texts inaljamiadoin the first place? Given the risks inherent in such an enterprise, it is easy to see the use of Arabic script for the production of narrative and devotional works as a practice that could backfire spectacularly, given the energetic practices of the Inquisition in Castile and Aragon. As an example of the dangers inherent in the production and possession of such texts, we may glance briefly at the case of Luis de Córdoba, a jeweler from
Conclusions from:
Covert Gestures
Abstract: When we study
aljamiado-moriscoliterature from the perspective of the human agents that engaged it, temporal frameworks, such as specific times in the Islamic calendar or hours of the day and the devotional practices that correspond to them, can take center stage. This feature is of course not limited toaljamiado-moriscoliterature; however, it is such a salient feature of the handwritten texts of the Moriscos of Castile and Aragon that I have chosen to focus upon it throughout the present book.
Book Title: American Prophecy-Race and Redemption in American Political Culture
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Shulman George
Abstract: Prophecy is the fundamental idiom of American politics—a biblical rhetoric about redeeming the crimes, suffering, and promise of a special people. Yet political theorists rarely analyze American prophecy and its great practitioners—from Frederick Douglass and Henry Thoreau to Martin Luther King and Toni Morrison. This paradox is at the heart of American Prophecy, a work in which George Shulman critiques the political and racial meaning of American prophetic rhetoric.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttm2n
1. Introducing Jeremiah’s Legacy: from:
American Prophecy
Abstract: This is an introductory chapter that sets the frame for my substantive readings of Thoreau, King, Baldwin, and Morrison. It briefly describes my method of interpreting prophecy as a social practice and rhetorical form open to revision. Then it introduces the instantiations of “prophecy” that guide subsequent chapters. First is the Hebrew voice of prophecy, to identify key markers of biblical prophecy as a genre. Second is prophecy as an American idiom, to identify the capaciousness and political contingency of the ways biblical prophecy is translated and used. Third is “prophecy” as an object in American studies, to identify the
Conclusion: from:
American Prophecy
Abstract: I have sought in this book to bring together political theory and a version of American studies by placing central concerns of the European canon into conversation with a politics organized by racial domination and biblical language. This has meant displacing philosophical modes of apprehending politics by rhetorical practices and literary genres. Bringing political theory into conversation with an American modernity shaped by race, religion, and genre, and not only by capital, normalization, and disenchantment, also expands the vocabulary of references and theories for analyzing politics. I then could trace how prophecy is reworked by critics of white supremacy to
Book Title: Narratives of Agency-Self-Making in China, India, and Japan
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: This multidisciplinary collection underlines the importance of understanding the operations of human agency-defined here as the ability to exert power, specifically in resistance to ideological pressure. In particular, the contributors emphasize the historical and cultural conditions that facilitate the production of agency in an effort to gain a deeper understanding of the cultures of China, India, and Japan. In Narratives of Agency, scholars from a variety of disciplines argue that traditional Western approaches to the study of these cultures have unduly focused on the pervasive influence of family and clan (China), caste and fatalism (India), and groupism (Japan). This tendency has been exacerbated by modern critical approaches, such as postmodernism and poststructuralism, that not only are increasingly popular in studying these cultures but also de-emphasize the role of the individual. The resultant undermining of the notion of human agency tends to give short shrift to the very real individual differences between groups and ignores questions of personal desire and intentionality. These essays remind us that members of a community have to make personal choices, struggle and interact with others, argue about positions, and confront new challenges, all of which involve intentionality and human agency. A new look at a topic central to cross-cultural understanding, Narratives of Agency will be essential reading for those interested in China, India, Japan, and the world beyond._x000B_ _x000B_Contributors: Richard G. Fox, Washington U; Lydia H. Liu, U of California, Berkeley; Owen M. Lynch, New York U; Vijay Mishra, Murdoch U, Australia; Marie Thorsten Morimoto; Emiko Ohnuki-Tierney, U of Wisconsin, Madison; Eugene Yuejin Wang, U of Chicago; Ming-Bao Yue, U of Hawaii, Manoa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttp11
Introduction / Agency and Cultural Understanding: from:
Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: The broad objective of the essays gathered in this volume is to focus on the concept of human agency and its importance in cultural understanding and cultural redescription. The word “agency,” like the words “selfhood,” “individuality,” “subjectivity,” and “personhood,” with which it is imbricated, does not admit of simple and clear definitions. All these words inhabit overlapping positions in a semantic field and conceptual cartography that are increasingly attracting the scholarly attention of both humanists and social scientists alike. In this introduction, and indeed in this book as a whole, no attempt will be made to affix immutable meanings to
8 Self, Agency, and Cultural Knowledge: from:
Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Dissanayake Wimal
Abstract: According to the conventional wisdom, the Japanese are so inextricably tied to the concept and practices of group loyalty and social obligations that the idea of human agency finds no place in Japanese culture. Groupism, according to this line of thinking, is the defining and foundational trait of Japanese social life. This idea finds repeated and emphatic articulation in most books on Japanese culture written for popular consumption. For example, the following observation from a popular book on Japanese culture is fairly representative of this mode of perception: “Modern Japan, as anyone who has ever watched a Japanese tourist group
9 The Nail That Came Out All the Way: from:
Narratives of Agency
Author(s) Morimoto Marie Thorsten
Abstract: In May 1985, a young high school student was on a school trip to the Tsukuba Expo, a world science exhibition. In violation of school regulations, he borrowed his friend’s hair dryer to style his hair. When his teacher caught him in the act, the boy apologized and began crying, but his remorse was in vain. The teacher forced him to kneel down while he beat and kicked the young student to his death.
CHAPTER 1 Temporality after the End of Time in Pulp Fiction from:
Out of Time
Abstract: With
Reservoir Dogs(1992) andPulp Fiction(1994), Quentin Tarantino began the contemporary wave of atemporal cinema. This position at the front of the trend might seem to suggest Tarantino’s radicality: as the first, he offers the most decisive step that later filmmakers modify and thereby dilute. But Tarantino’s innovation, though it opens up widespread acceptance of the atemporal mode, actually remains focused on temporality rather than the break from it. In this sense, Tarantino does not belong to the atemporal mode proper but instead remains within traditional cinema’s privileging of the forward movement of time. He is the bridge
Chapter 3 Escape from the Image: from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Schwab Martin
Abstract: In his two cinema books,
The Movement-ImageandThe Time-Image, Gilles Deleuze offers an aesthetic and historical account of the cinema based on an unfamiliar and intriguing ontology—an ontology of images. Objects, qualities, processes, actions, even the brain: all are images in a dynamic universe of images. In this ″image-world,″ art—specifically, the cinema—emerges as something not ontologically distinct from the rest of the world. Indeed, Deleuze′s theory amounts to the simultaneous dynamization and de-Platonization of the cinema. Deleuzian ″image-art″ is neither semblance (Schein), nor the coming to the fore of a separate and ″artificial″ world, nor the
Chapter 4 The Eye of Montage: from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) McMahon Melissa
Abstract: Perhaps we will teach, in two hundred years, that twentieth-century philosophy ended with two hieroglyphics:
The Movement-ImageandThe Time-Image. A misunderstanding surrounds these books: they rightly fascinate film lovers, even though they are expressly books of philosophy. As for philosophers, they find little interest in them, or else read them while leaving cinema aside, even though Deleuze considered that he could not have written them except through contact with cinema. What could have determined, in Deleuze′s work, such an encounter between philosophy and cinema?
Chapter 8 The Roots of the Nomadic: from:
The Brain Is the Screen
Author(s) Andrew Dudley
Abstract: If one were to take the Academy Awards and the Cannes film festival the way the newspapers do, one would believe that standard cinema is in good health. Global action pictures (
Independence Day), more artistic passion pictures (The English Patient), and their perfectly stewed combination (Titanic) have appeared on screens around the world, firing the universal imagination the way cinema has since Griffith. These two types of cinema, which might be termed first and second cinema, seem to defy predictions that the century′s end also spells the end of this century′s mass art. Still, those tracking aesthetic and social developments
Introduction from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Piotrowski Andrzej
Abstract: The disciplinary character of architecture is one of the most important, though under explored, issues that architects face today. Disciplinarity—the way that architecture defines, creates, disseminates, and applies the knowledge within its domain of influence—is increasingly central to the discussions about the present and future direction of the field. However, we rarely focus on how our seeing, thinking, and understanding of architecture or on how the social construction of our field can obstruct or advance our ability to create a built world viable and valuable for the next century.
1 Revisiting the Discipline of Architecture from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Fisher Thomas
Abstract: The professions in North America are under attack. Surveys reveal widespread public distrust of professions such as law and politics, and the bottom-line management of professions such as medicine and architecture has become equally pervasive, with the rise of entities such as health maintenance organizations and disciplines such as construction management. What has caused this public-and private-sector reaction to professionalism, and how has this affected the disciplines in these fields?
3 On the Practices of Representing and Knowing Architecture from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Piotrowski Andrzej
Abstract: Designing architecture is a unique epistemological practice, a unique way of knowing resulting from a complex process of conceptual negotiations. Architects not only solve technical problems and create aesthetic objects but facilitate a process in which visions of a building acquire a particular symbolic or cultural sense. While working on a project, a designer must develop multiple architectural proposals, understand the complexity of issues they manifest, and negotiate them with the parties involved in the project—clients, local authorities, planners, consultants, contractors, bankers, and many others. A designer produces these versions in order to understand what kind of a design
4 The Form and Structure of Architectural Knowledge: from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Robinson Julia Williams
Abstract: In the United States, the field of architecture is in the process of evolving from what has been a practice, informed by other disciplines, into a discipline with its own body of knowledge.¹ Since the nineteenth century, its locus of education has changed from the architecture firm to the higher education institution. Its instructional practices have shifted from a predominantly apprenticeship system to a system of classroom-based teaching supplemented by apprenticeship. The role of architectural instructors is changing from master architect, whose knowledge and theory of making buildings is personally held, implicit, practical, and integrated, and who instructs by demonstration,
5 Architecture Is Its Own Discipline from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Leatherbarrow David
Abstract: For architecture to remain significant in our time, it must redefine its basic subjects. That it is a discipline with its own subject matter can neither be assumed nor taken for granted because nowadays architecture is often seen as a practice that borrows methods and concepts from other fields, whether the natural or the social sciences, engineering, or the fine arts. This appropriation is neither by accident nor by fraudulent intent; for some time now, other professionals, engineers, landscape architects, and planners, have performed some of the skills that had traditionally defined the architect’s role, and have done so reliably.
8 Environment and Architecture from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Watson Donald
Abstract: When the term “environment” is used in architecture, it refers generally to the surrounding landscape and context of buildings. In both legal and professional architectural practice, “environment” may refer narrowly to health concerns, such as indoor air quality, or broadly to the ecological impacts that building may have on regional air and water quality and ultimately on global climate. Some of these impacts can be measured in terms of human health, energy consumption, and pollution, as well as other environmental indices, including biodiversity of local species and global warming. For the profession of architecture to respond to these issues of
10 Thinking “Indian” Architecture from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Menon A. G. Krishna
Abstract: Thinking the “Indian” in Indian architecture is the subject of this chapter. The architecture of India is probably on the periphery of concerns informing other contributions to this book, yet I suggest that there are many disciplinary affinities and areas of overlapping interest between them that could profitably be mined and examined, especially in an era of globalizing professional practice.
11 Interdisciplinary Visions of Architectural Education: from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Ahrentzen Sherry
Abstract: Architects frequently take great pride in pointing to architecture as the most interdisciplinary of professional pursuits. Indeed, for many, one of the great attractions of the field is its inherently interdisciplinary quality, the necessity of integrating widely divergent concerns—aesthetic choices, social implications, the highly technical issues of structural and mechanical calculations, as well as matters treated in other professional fields such as interior design and landscape architecture. In this respect, architecture might be characterized as “inherently interdisciplinary,” in the way that others have characterized academic fields such as geography, or professional fields such as public health (J. Klein 1990).
12 A Framework for Aligning Professional Education and Practice in Architecture from:
Discipline of Architecture
Author(s) Burns Carol
Abstract: Two factors animate this concern. First is the dynamic state of the profession. Architectural practices, after emerging from a devastating recession in the early 1990s, have been undergoing significant changes. Practitioners today must be highly inventive merely to survive, and many are experimenting with new types of practice, new partnerships, and new methods
The State and Public Spending from:
Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: IN THE major capitalist countries, public expenditures (by the State and the public sector) approach or surpass half of the gross national income. The increasing rate of growth of public spending with respect to the growth of national income is an irreversible trend. “Yet despite this, there have been only isolated studies by Marxists which systematically examine the causes and consequences of this unprecedented growth” (Ian Gough, “State Expenditure in Advanced Capitalism,” p. 53). When such studies do appear, in fact, they only rarely grasp the new specificity of the situation in general; instead they recast the explanation of the
Potentialities of a Constituent Power from:
Labor of Dionysus
Abstract: “REAL SOCIALISM”— that is, the socialism that actually existed in the Soviet Union and the other countries of Eastern Europe—did not constitute a form of government substantially different from the form invented by capitalism in the course of its development. Or more precisely, its form was different only insofar as it was applied to a phase of capitalist development different than that governed by the capitalist democracies. It was a form of government not very different from that known to many Third World countries, even though they were protected by the large Western democracies—a form typical of a
1 Their Secret Elect from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: “The philosopher, the one the animal does not look at” . . . When, for the first time, I heard Jacques Derrida speak at the Collège de philosophie, directed at the time by Jean Wahl, I reacted, all things being relative, as Malebranche did upon reading Descartes’s
Treatise on Man:“His beating heart sometimes forced him to stop his reading,” writes Fontenelle. From that moment on, I did not take leave of this work nor of this man, even if it would often cause me distress to place myself in certain of his footsteps.
2 The Improper from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: The philosopher who goes off in search of what is proper to man often stops short, too quickly satisfied with abstractions and entities—essence, nature, consciousness. Scientists from any discipline are all the more willing to make fun of his naïveté because his discourse makes claims to rigor. Either that or the philosopher simply abdicates in the face of scientific advances and reproduces in his own way the reductionist, even eliminationist naturalism that positivist knowledge makes available to him. In which case he can no longer even be a philosopher, for he is only vulgarizing by acquiescing to fatalistic determinism.
5 They Are Sleeping and We Are Watching over Them from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: For far too long, the animal question has been monopolized by the sole question of knowing whether or not animals benefit from those competencies related to the rational and reasonable norms men recognize as being within their capacity. At philosophical dramaturgy’s half-time, Descartes was the decisive agent for the excommunication of nonhuman living beings. In fact, for the majority of Greek and Latin authors, and then for Christians, the problematic of the
logoswas intimately tied to the problematic of justice. Animals,aloga,those who were not attributed withlogos,incapable of entering into a contract since they were lacking
6 The Pathetic Pranks of Bio-Art from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: There are certain artists that mean to mark the end of the avantgarde by setting up their studios in laboratories and working with geneticists so as to act on the mechanisms of life. Artistically modified organisms, writes Eduardo Kac, one of these artists to whose work I will be paying particular attention, “are going to become our familiar companions.”¹ He adds that “artists could usefully increase the planet’s biodiversity by inventing new forms of life.” For these artists, it is a question of replacing the representation of life with its modification and of exhibiting the results of these
détournementsin
7 The Ordinariness of Barbarity from:
Without Offending Humans
Abstract: In Latin,
crudelitasdesignated cruelty only when it coincided withcruor,spilled blood, whether coagulated or in a puddle, wounded flesh. As for noble blood, it was calledsanguis.This is why the consecrated phrase is “Hic est enim calix sanguinis mei.” This observation is less incongruous than it might at first appear, since this divine blood was in no way shed for any kind of redemption of the animals, and since this is precisely thecrucialcharacteristic of our Western Christian culture. This semantic remark must nonetheless not allow us to ignore the fact that one can act with
2 Medieval Conjugality and the Canterbury Tales from:
Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: In chapter 1 I argued that the
Miller’s Tale“begins” the Canterbury project by foregrounding subjectivity and identity as richly productive questions, rather than as stabilizing presumptions. In particular, theMiller’s Tale“loosens” the class and gender hierarchies anchoring the body in theKnight’s Taleenough to imagine through its masochistic contract a body in motion, fluid and powerfully unpredictable in its representational flexibility. The identity positions offered by such an embodiment, however, bring with them both the reassuring prospect of participation in the construction of a properly dominant masculinity and the uneasy recognition of the instabilities that such an
4 Queer Performativity in Fragment VI from:
Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: In
The Idea of the Canterbury Tales—still one of the most richly provocative readings of the Pardoner and his place in theTales—Donald Howard focuses on the perversity of Fragment VI as a whole: a fragment apparently uniquely isolated within the Canterbury project and curiously alienated from (or by) its ordering principles. Other tales and fragments fit together in spite of an admittedly unfinished “big picture” for theTalesas a whole. Characters introduce themselves and their tales from the frame (as with the Wife of Bath), tales are commissioned by the Host, estate and personal rivalries prompt
5 Desiring Machines from:
Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: Fragment VII returns to a number of the issues we have been considering in the previous chapters. The
Melibeeand theShipman’s Tale, and to a lesser extent, theNun’s Priest’s Tale, focus once again on the matter of woman and the relationship between conjugality and agency. As well, theMelibee, theMonk’s Tale, andNun’s Priest’s Taletake up issues relating to good government. Within the fragment, as with other moments in theTales, an unpredictable dynamic is created as the competing desires contained within the social order fictionalized in the pilgrimage frame come into contact with each other,
6 Post-ality and the “End” of the Canterbury Tales from:
Chaucer’s Queer Nation
Abstract: In this postscript to my discussion of the
Tales, I want to turn briefly to the question of their ending, and more specifically, to the common belief that in theParson’s TaleandChaucer’s Retractionwe find some kind of resolution to the Canterbury project itself. Certainly it seems fair to say that, despite the original tale-telling agreement the Host and pilgrims forged at the Tabard Inn—that each pilgrim “shal telle tales tweye /To Caunterbury-ward, . . . And homward he shal tellen othere two” (I.792–95)—theParson’s Prologue and Taleappear intent on radically reshaping the end
Introduction from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Although the
illusionof the literary text’s autonomy as well as that of the work of art in general arises from the Enlightenment’s emancipatory project (that is, the attempt to establish a science, morality, and art answerable respectively only to scientific, ethical, and aesthetic norms), literary criticism did not begin to isolate its object of study until very recently. Such has been, since the European Renaissance, the influence of historicism, in its various modalities, and the identification of philology with its objectives and methods. It was thus in the twentieth century—and under the impact exerted almost simultaneously by structural
Chapter 1 The Subversion of Ritual Discourse: from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Working with the hypothesis that only the existence of a discursive correlate in sixteenth-century Spain could explain the irruption in
Lazarilloof the autobiographical fiction characteristic of the narrative mode of the picaresque novel, and given that not only the communication circuit that frames this narration but also its lexical chart and narrative program point to the practice of confession (whose addressee is God, the confessor or spiritual director, or a tribunal—perhaps that of the Inquisition), I began searching a few years ago for autobiographical texts that might document such a practice.¹ My hypothesis was confirmed by the discovery
Chapter 2 Intertextuality, Interdiscursiveness, and Parody: from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: In his 1968 address to the Third Congress of the International Association of Hispanists in Mexico, Fernando Lázaro Carreter (1970, 1972) proposed a review of the concept of “picaresque novel” starting with the “processes of its creation and formation.” Only by carefully establishing (1) the distinctive features outlining the morphology of a literary genre from its very first historical manifestation and (2) its generative power, as manifested by the various transformations giving rise to subsequent imitations, can we actually reach a definition of the genre's dynamic structure—a definition that will in turn make possible the historical ordering of texts
Chapter 3 Autobiography and Ritual Discourse: from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: During the years of Franco’s dictatorship, an anecdote circulated in Spain that to mind both the intellectual training and the working methods of the Spanish Civil Guard. The post commander of a city receives this telegram from provincial authorities: “Impending seismic activity—epicenter in your town-take appropriate measures.” Three days later—after having had his men work unremittingly, we suppose—the post commander answers his chief’s communiqué, also telegram: “Seismic activity quelled—Epicenter and his men arrested.”
Chapter 4 Narration and Argumentation in Autobiographical Discourse from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: The inclusion of autobiography in the narrative genre is not as evident as it may seem. By establishing two systems or “two different levels of utterance” (“history” and “discourse”) that concurrently distribute the French verb tenses and grammatical persons, Emile Benveniste (1971) expressly classifies autobiography as discourse, along with “correspondence, memoirs, plays, didactic works, in short, all the genres in which someone addresses himself to someone, proclaims himself as the speaker, and organizes what he says in the category of a person” (209). Historical utterance, on the contrary, which was once defined as “narration of past events” and is presently
Chapter 6 Discourse Pragmatics and Reciprocity of Perspectives: from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: Perhaps their working on language and on the imaginary defines the specificity of literary practices, their social dimension (and social role) as well as the confluence of different discursive formations in the literary text. It does not follow, however, that the literary text organizes itself in a purely mechanistic way. On the contrary, it is located in dialogical interaction with a concrete sociohistorical conjuncture, is mediated by various ideological instances, and participates in the contradictory network of the discursive formations of its surroundings. Thus a contextual boundary must be established that might allow an understanding of the “grand dialogue” in
Chapter 10 The (Relative) Autonomy of Artistic Expression: from:
Discourse Analysis as Sociocriticism
Abstract: At the beginning of the century, the first attempts to go beyond traditional categories of literary research—creation (artistic or literary), originality, inventiveness (where the author is transformed into an epic hero of sorts, admirable and inimitable), influences (as sources or as effective history, the German
Wirkungsgeschichte) and the author’s subjective intentions—brought about a twofold empirical orientation. On one hand arose the study of aesthetic material, as advocated, for example, by schools of stylistics; on the other, the “abstract objectivism” (as Bakhtin judiciously put it) of Saussurean synchrony and its outgrowth, structuralism. Exploring the path forged in Germany by
1 Locational Hazards: from:
Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: In
Critique, Norm, and Utopia,Seyla Benhabib identifies the anticipatory/utopian pole within theories of social transformation as that which gives us our normative grounding and sense of a moral imperative, that which allows us to make qualitative judgments and to construct an orientation toward the good. In this way, Benhabib associates the Utopian impulse with what Ernst Bloch calls our “principle of hope”—our ability and desire to imagine something other and better than our existing conditions. At the same time, however, the Utopian impulse is characterized by a set of conservative logics and gestures that are increasingly seen as
2 Turning Inward: from:
Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Depending upon the point of view from which the ideal collective is conceived, the political effect of the narrative practices that support the traditional form of utopian literature can vary dramatically. In the first part of this chapter, I examine how utopian logic operates in traditional works of utopian literature that express a more or less socialist agenda; in the second part, I explore a novel in which this traditional utopian literary form has been adapted to reflect and support a contemporary feminist vision. My study of the utopian literary tradition in this chapter is not intended to be exhaustive;
4 Utopia and Technopolitics in Woman on the Edge of Time from:
Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: Traditional utopian literature relates to the novel’s contemporary historical circumstances through a process of negation—contemporary society is present only as a repressed subtext, and visible only in the conceptual “antinomies” that the utopian text attempts to neutralize or resolve. In the previous chapter, I explored the effects that occur when, instead of repressing the connection between contemporary society and imaginary society (a repression that is designed to preserve the absolute “elsewhere” of utopia), a text actively foregrounds and thematizes the interaction between utopia and contemporary society. This increased interaction funds an “ideologeme of activism” within the text, while the
Conclusion. from:
Notes on Nowhere
Abstract: In
Sources of the Self,Charles Taylor observes that our orientation in moral space is similar to our orientation in physical space; this observation also holds true for our orientation in social and political space. Contemporary critical discourse, in particular, tends to construct social forces in spatial relations such as “inside versus outside” or “margin versus center.” Given this characteristic of contemporary political discourse, my interest in combining an analysis of feminist theory with an analysis of utopian literature derives not just from the explicitly political and didactic nature of utopian literature, but also from the way that Utopian literature’s
Chapter 1 The Nature and Purpose of Narratology from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: In the Preface to his
Recent Theories of Narrative(1986), Wallace Martin does not hesitate to write: “When translations from French, German and Russian are added to the writings of English and American theorists, the only alternative to few books on narrative in general might appear to be none at all.”¹ And J.A. Berthoud, in his in-depth critique of Jameson, “Narrative and Ideology” (1985), states, “The attempt to construct a narrative grammar to account for our capacity to recognize and discuss plots or stories extractable from narrative texts has been thoroughly discredited.”² These two statements should certainly be qualified. Is
Chapter 5 Who’s Who and Who Does What in the Tale Told from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Narrative meaning is concretized through the production and comprehension of narrative units of discourse (transactive and/or nontransactive narratemes) which involve noun phrases (NPs) as well as verb phrases (VPs). Moreover, the text of a linguistic narrative is also made of all sorts of discursemes that have subjects. It is now time to raise some of the many questions involved and propose some methodological directions in a field that has so often been obscured by ideological interests alien or opposed to a science of discourse.
Chapter 8 Narrative Economy: from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: At this stage of our inquiry, should we see narrative as a living species, we know probably a bit better how it is built, its anatomy and its locomotion, as well as some aspects of its physiology, but we have formulated only some very general hypotheses about its goals and motivations, its processes of reproduction, and its relations with the environment —“passive” adaptation and “active” modification. In other words, we have left value, demand, work, investment, profit, and interest on our horizon. This does not mean that such notions and, consequently, the metabolism and ecology of the narrative species are
Chapter 9 Narrative within Genres and Media from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: Between the formation/cognition of narrative discourse and the construction of narrative significance, there is still one important mediation to consider: that of genre as technê and sociohistorical constraint. In fact, if we had not taken genre into account, implicitly at least, every time we studied individual examples of acts of narrative communication and their texts, we would have made an intolerable qualitative leap from the level of generality at which our method of analysis was situated to particular concrete situations. The purpose of this chapter is to put genre to work as efficiently as possible within the process of theorization
Chapter 10 What Tales Tell Us to Do and Think, and How (Narrative and Didactic Constructions of Meaning) from:
Narrative as Communication
Abstract: I have hitherto described textual structures and the artistic communication system, among others, essentially as sets of material data and networks that constitute the preconditions for the formation of “primary” messages, that is, for the mental elaboration of relatively autonomous possible worlds. Such worlds could be considered mutually interchangeable in the eyes of an ideal, abstract “subject,” since they were approached on the basis of their production rules, not from the viewpoint of their desirability. Similarly, a nation’s industrial equipment and infrastructure can be described as able to produce heavy machinery and high tech means of transportation, without taking into
Book Title: Bad Aboriginal Art-Tradition, Media, and Technological Horizons
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): Michaels Eric
Abstract: This is the account of the author‘s period of residence and work with the Walpiri Aborigines of western Central Australia, where he studied the impact of television on these remote communities. Sharp, exact, and unrelentingly honest, this volume records with an extraordinary combination of distance and immersion the intervention of technology into a remote Aboriginal community and that community’s forays into broadcasting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.cttttvck
Foreword from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Author(s) Hebdige Dick
Abstract: ERIC MICHAELS’s work with — to take a different example — the inventive, resilient, and varied Warlpiri Aborigines of western Central Australia effects the drastic transformation of perspective envisaged in this passage by James Clifford. Even so, the collection of essays, lectures, and book reviews assembled here hardly qualifies as ethnography pure and simple, still less as ethnography “proper.” Although he spent more than three years researching the impact of TV on this remote Aboriginal community at Yuendumu, Eric Michaels never stayed long enough in one place, figuratively speaking, to establish a career as a professional anthropologist. Prevented from joining the “academic
Aboriginal Content: from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: DURING A telephone conversation with an executive of a television company licensed to begin direct broadcasting to one of the remote satellite footprints next year, I was asked, somewhat plaintively, if I could help him to identify precisely what would constitute “Aboriginal Content” and if perhaps I might help get him some. This category is evolving as a criterion for judging the suitability of program services by the Australian Broadcasting Tribunal when evaluating applications where a significant component of the intended audience will be Aboriginal. The Tribunal may in fact be extending its criteria for suitability, within the policy context
Hollywood Iconography: from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: ISOLATED ABORIGINAL Australians in the Central Desert region, where traditional language and culture have survived a traumatic hundred-year contact period, began to view Hollywood videotapes in the early 1980s and are now beginning to receive television from the new national satellite, AUSSAT. This situation raises many issues for humanistic research, including questions about the ability of the traditional culture to survive this new electronic invasion. I spent three years living with Warlpiri Aborigines of the Yuendumu community undergoing this imposed transition, partly engaged in applied research and development leading to the birth of an indigenous community television station that challenged
If “All Anthropologists are Liars ...” [1987] from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: GEERTZ (1973) claimed ethnography is something “we do.” Others have suggested that it is something we write (see Clifford and Marcus 1986). Both writing and doing (inscription and practice) have received considerable critical attention in semiotics, aesthetics, and theoretical science in the last few decades. What happens when we apply some of these recent reflexive considerations that have emerged in philosophical theory to particular anthropological practices and ethnographic inscription? I want to examine a recent ethnography that, because it is new and means to be, because it attempts certain classical holisms while citing more contemporary equivocal theory, and because it
Bad Aboriginal Art [1988] from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: DURING 1987 the Australian press reported frequently that Aboriginal art, especially Western Desert¹ acrylic “dot paintings,” had become flavor of the month in New York, Paris, and Munich. “Flavor of the month” is an odd descriptor Australians overuse to resolve the incompatibility of such reports of Australian success overseas with a cherished and characteristic myth of the second-rate, sometimes labeled “cultural cringe.” Indeed, Australia now has a suspiciously elaborate terminology for identifying the contradictions of colonialism and creativity. The notion of radical unoriginality is claimed to privilege this discourse, so that Sydney, for example, now asserts itself as the most
Para-Ethnography [1988] from:
Bad Aboriginal Art
Abstract: THERE IS an unlabeled variation on the
roman à clefwhose plots revolve around communities reacting to the publication of research or stories about them. An insider (or an outsider—this is the major plot variation) “tells all” and exposes a certain institutional corruption or set of individual hypocrisies.The Kinsey Report(movie version),Harrison High,the Bob Hope vehicleBachelor in Paradise,“Harper Valley PTA” in some sense (the song itself serving as the “publication” and then the basis for a TV series), but most classically,Return to Peyton Place,were examples of this type. These narratives typically describe
EPILOGUE from:
Architecture's Historical Turn
Abstract: Architectural phenomenology radically transformed architectural historiography, expanding traditional theories of history beyond mere writing conventions to include a more ambiguous experiential intellectual realm expressed through photography, graphic design, camouflage studies, and in short, a wealth of visual techniques imported from architectural practice. Yet the intellectual history of architecture has once again become surprisingly text-centric. Contemporary textbooks and compendia on the history of architectural intellectuality invariably mention phenomenology as a major movement and include the writings of architectural phenomenologists.¹ What is transmitted in these reprints are the words, but not their visual context. A lot of information is lost through this
CHAPTER 3 Guittone d’Arezzo from:
Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: In passing from the Occitan troubadour Uc de Saint Circ to the Italian poet Guittone d’Arezzo, we find ourselves on firmer ground. Italian poetry was born under the sign of Latinity, and of writing; there is little evidence of its oral transmission or musical performance. Guittone flourished from around 1255 to 1280, in the period immediately following the one in which Uc was active and the earliest extant troubadour anthologies were compiled, and he had an enormous impact on the literary culture of his day (see Marti, “Ritratto e fortuna di Guittone d’Arezzo”). There are fifty
canzoni, about 250 sonnets,
CHAPTER 8 Petrarch’s “Canzoniere” from:
Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: When, in the second half of the fourteenth century, Francesco Petrarca assembled the work to which he gave the Latin title
Rerum vulgarium fragmenta—and to which I refer by its more informal (and much later) vernacular name, theCanzoniere—he was not primarily producing a script intended for subsequent vocal or musical realization (though the poems in it have frequently been performed musically), nor was he writing an abstract, “ideal” text designed to be reproduced in countless printed editions (though he produced that, too).¹ What Petrarch was chiefly concerned with creating was not a means, but an end: a
Conclusion from:
Assembling the Lyric Self
Abstract: According to Leonard Barkan, “It could be argued that all of Petrarch’s works amount to an extended act of introspection and autobiography,” and “Petrarch’s works probably represent the first sustained attempt at self-consciousness in Western writing” (206). He goes on to say that among the works, these remarks particularly apply to the
Rime sparse. I cite him not because such observations are exceptionally original or insightful, but because they are typical. Petrarch is frequently given credit for the invention of a subjective, personalized literature that paved the way for a “Renaissance” or “modern” conception of autonomous human identity.¹ Yet the
Introduction from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Lavezzo Kathy
Abstract: At least since Benedict Anderson breathed new life into the thought of Walter Benjamin, Ernst Renan, and Victor Turner, nationalism has constituted a prominent conceptual feature of contemporary literary and cultural studies. Following the lead of Perry Anderson, Anthony Giddens, and others, academics in English literary studies, by and large, have restricted their analyses to artifacts produced since the late eighteenth century, when the American and French revolutions launched the processes that gave rise to both a modern state founded on popular sovereignty and the appearance in the lexicon of the word “nationalism” (Anderson,
Imagined Communities, 116–19).¹ But, as
Pro Patria Mori from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Fradenburg L. O. Aranye
Abstract: Imagining community is a work of desire, as Benedict Anderson pointed out when referring to the love people feel for the nations they dream into being.¹ Communities—their social structures, architecture, marketing practices, secret places—are not only imagined but also made by desire (Deleuze and Guattari,
Anti-Oedipus, 6). They are our “territorializations,” our complex and shifting ecologies ofhabitusand habitation.² We participate in the histories of their enjoyment; we are there (where else?) when they assemble and fall apart, take (over) place and dwindle, in the course of their attempts to get as close tojouissance(impossible or
Latin England from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Galloway Andrew
Abstract: Thorlac Turville-Petre’s
England the Nation, linking English literary communities and anthologies with the emerging national status of the English language, calls out for a succession of appendices—or rather, in the spirit of his nondogmatic and open-ended work, with its provocatively pre-Ricardian stopping point, many further chapters, in what deserves to be a vast, collaborative project assessing the ideologies and contexts of national community in late medieval English-speaking areas.¹ A simple encompassing claim about nationalism in the period will not be satisfactory, but the time is long past when we can make a flat declaration that a pan-European Christian ideology
“As Englishe is comoun langage to oure puple”: from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Havens Jill C.
Abstract: In her article “Lollardy: The English Heresy?” Anne Hudson argues that Lollardy and its promotion of the English vernacular was not propelled by a “nationalistic” movement: “To attempt to show that the single major heresy known in medieval England arose from a concatenation of peculiarly insular factors would be, I think, a forlorn enterprise. Nor does it seem right to discern nationalism as a major force in the origin of lollardy or in its continuance” (143). Hudson defines “nationalism” here as a catalyst, not an end result. She is right in asserting that nationalism had little to do with the
Translating “Communitas” from:
Imagining a Medieval English Nation
Author(s) Staley Lynn
Abstract: Translatio, the act of transferring authority, significance, of transplanting, grafting, of transposing, was a concept that for the literate meant that ideas, meanings, words, or things would be moved from one sphere to another.¹ The very act of removal was intended to convey the carefully interlocked sets of meanings that had obtained in the original sphere to the new sphere, thus investing the new medium with the power of the old. Or, to use France as the prime example of the arts of translation, if the authority of the empire was to be transferred from a pagan and classical world
6 Making Nations: from:
Uses of the Other
Abstract: Whereas Chapters 2 and 3 dealt with the uses of the other in the collective identity formation of Europe and Chapters 4 and 5 with the uses of the other in the making of (other) regions, this chapter and the next will deal with the uses of the other in national identity formation. Recall that Chapter 4 took as its starting point the fact that a number of key theoretical insights have evolved out of the study of nation building and then proceeded to discuss the making of regions in terms of those insights. Since the making of regions has
Book Title: Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping-The United Nations and the Mobilization of Ideology
Publisher: University of Minnesota Press
Author(s): DEBRIX FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Time and again the United Nations has deployed peacekeeping missions in trouble spots around the globe: Iraq, Somalia, Bosnia, Rwanda. Has peace ensued? Have these missions, in fact, made any difference in the disorder and destruction they are purported to forestall? Or are they, as François Debrix contends in this critical revisiting of UN interventions, an illusion-more virtual peacekeeping than actual interventions in international affairs?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/j.ctttv30x
3 From a Hopeless Situation to Operation Restore Hope, and Beyond: from:
Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: The United Nations intervention in Somalia from January 1992 to April 1995 offers itself to us as a movie. Reading Somalia as a cinematographic fiction is not only made possible by the explosion of visual media that this post–cold war intervention triggered.¹ It is also influenced by the actors themselves, the level of reality at which their actions take place, and the staged scenarios that they try to follow. In fact, Somalia is one of the first locations where the United Nations has actually been given the opportunity to demonstrate its acting talents. Reinvested by George Bush’s post–Gulf
4 Visions of Otherness and Interventionism in Bosnia, or How the West Was Won Again from:
Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: Through this account of what the author feels is a particularly unarousing striptease scene (a businesslike, antiseptic, medical peepshow that does not fulfill the author’s desires), Miller intends to allegorize the entire Bosnian conflict. For the Western observer/voyeur that Miller claims to represent (during his trip to Bosnia in 1994), Bosnia has no attractive power anymore. Miller’s cultural and libidinal
décalage(gap) with the Bosnian reality is exemplified by his asking the “fatal” question: which nationality does the stripper belong to? A supposedly fatal question because, in Miller’s mind, and despite the overtly nationalistic and ethnic motivations of the Bosnian
6 Theorizing the Visual: from:
Re-Envisioning Peacekeeping
Abstract: Techniques and strategies of visual simulation are shaping the contemporary landscape of international politics. Placing the interpretive focus of critical/postmodern international relations theory on the UN and its peacekeeping operations allows one to realize that, in a post–cold war era, techniques such as panopticism, visual suture, clinical witnessing, or photojournalistic displays of the other’s gaze are crucial international mechanisms. It is through such visually and mediatically enhanced strategies that both reality and ideology (and reality as ideology) are accessed. In the current practice of international affairs, the strategy of simulation seeks to “fool the eye” of the international observer,
5. Democracy and Territoriality from:
The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Today, nostalgic realism and nostalgic idealism coexist within the compass of the state. While political movements, economic transactions, environmental dangers, security risks, cultural communications, tourist travel, and disease transmission increasingly acquire global dimensions, the state retains a tight grip over public definitions of danger, security, collective identification, and democratic accountability. Even when a fragment within the state
6. Tocqueville, Religiosity, and Pluralization from:
The Ethos of Pluralization
Abstract: Boundaries abound. Between humanity and the gods. Between human and animal. Between culture and nature. Between life and death. Between genders, nations, peoples, times, races, classes, and territories. But boundaries have also become problematic today, perhaps more so than before. In a world experienced by many to be without a natural design to which they might conform, the function of boundaries becomes highly ambiguous. Boundaries form indispensable protections against violation and violence; but the divisions they sustain also carry cruelty and violence. Boundaries provide preconditions of identity, individual agency, and collective action; but they also close off possibilities of being
2. Drawing and Transgressing Fictional Boundaries from:
Avatars of Story
Abstract: Fiction lies at the intersection of two fundamental modes of thinking. One is narrative, the set of cognitive operations that organizes and explains human agency and experience. Fiction does not necessarily fulfill all the conditions of narrativity that I have spelled out in chapter 1, but it must create a world by means of singular existential propositions, and it must offer, to the very least, an embryonic story.¹ The other mode of thinking is what we may variously call “off-line thinking,” “virtual thinking,” or “non factual thinking”: the ability to detach thought from what exists and to conduct mental experiments
5. Toward an Interactive Narratology from:
Avatars of Story
Abstract: In
Cybertext,a book whose contribution to digital textuality truly deserves to be called ground-breaking, Espen Aarseth attempts to analyze two types of digital texts, hypertext fiction and text-based adventure games (also known as interactive fiction) according to the parameters of what he calls the “communication model of classical narrative” (1997, 93): a transaction involving a real author, an implied author, a narrator, a narratee, an implied reader, and a real reader.¹ He suggests some adjustments, such as redefining the relations between the parameters for hypertext (the author no longer controls the narrator, the reader no longer identifies with the
7. Web-Based Narrative, Multimedia, and Interactive Drama from:
Avatars of Story
Abstract: In the early to mid-1990s, computer systems underwent two developments that deeply affected digital textuality: the ability to encode and transmit visual and aural data efficiently; and the ability to connect personal computers into a world-spanning network. The textual consequences of these new features are publicly posted on millions of Internet pages. Though Web pages implement the same hypertextual architecture as Storyspace fiction, they differ significantly from the latter in their linking philosophy and graphic appearance. From a visual point of view, the major design characteristic of Web pages is what Bolter and Grusin have called their “hypermediated structure”: the
8. Computer Games as Narrative from:
Avatars of Story
Abstract: In this chapter, I propose to revisit a question that has split, but also animated and energized, the young academic discipline of video game studies: is the concept of narrative applicable to computer games, or does the status of an artifact as game preclude its status as narrative? This dilemma has come to be known as the ludology versus narrativism (or narratology) controversy. But the terms are slightly misleading, because the ludology camp enrolls the support of some influential narratologists, while the so-called narratology camp includes both straw men constructed by the ludologists to promote their position and game designers
9. Metaleptic Machines from:
Avatars of Story
Abstract: Metalepsis, a rhetorical and narrative figure described as early as the seventeenth century,¹ has become one of the favorite conceptual toys of postmodern culture and contemporary critical discourse. In this chapter I propose to explore its special affinities with computers, as well as its multiple manifestations in digital culture. Before I get to computers, however, let me survey other areas of metaleptic activity, starting with its literary homeland.
INTRODUCTION from:
The Quay Brothers
Abstract: Years ago, while writing a master’s thesis on James Joyce’s cinematic language, I watched a screening of the Quay Brothers’
Street of Crocodiles(1986). I was immediately enthralled by the beauty of the images, but I could not pinpoint what was so striking and emotionally moving about the film. I was smitten by its complexity and poetry, but when I tried to describe what I thought was actually happening in the film’s convoluted narrative, I was stumped in my attempts to communicateexactlywhat it was. I found cold comfort in a text from Michael Atkinson: “It wouldn’t matter if
6. THE SECRET SCENARIO OF SOUNDSCAPES from:
The Quay Brothers
Abstract: Music permeates the Quay Brothers’ studio. The rafters and corners are imbued with compositions from Eastern European composers, madrigals, violin sonatas, avant-garde instrumentals, more contemporary minimalist jazz, and shortwave recordings from distant lands. There is so much music, in fact, that the small lavatory functions as a “musithek,” the walls lined with hundreds of music tapes whose replaced covers are embellished with the Quays’ calligraphy and illustrations. Music is convoluted in discussions, gestures, and replies. On the topic of music in a 1996 interview, the Quays regarded themselves as “failed composers. What we try to do is create a visualization
8. THESE THINGS NEVER HAPPEN BUT ARE ALWAYS from:
The Quay Brothers
Abstract: This chapter explores the Quay Brothers’ two completed feature films as both variations on and culminations of their other creative works. It also proffers a summary of their poetics in works completed when this book was finished. The chapter’s (and this book’s) conclusion is an open one; the Quays have projects currently in development and no doubt more will follow. In 1995, they completed their first full-length live-action film,
Institute Benjamenta, or This Dream People Call Human Life. TheStille Nachtshorts,The Comb, and the dance films had been a trying ground for the transition from animation to live-action
CONCLUSION from:
The Quay Brothers
Abstract: The Quay Brothers’ live-action and puppet animation films are informed by a conceptual dialectics rooted in profound knowledge of the histories and aesthetics of painting, illustration, performance, literature, and architecture, including the –isms of modernist art practice, poetry, and cinema. The eclectic iconography of the Quays’ cinematic world—its meandering narrative structures and unique cosmogony—hinders an assured or exclusive classification to a genre or a movement. If anything, their works belong to a hybrid category of poetic-experimental film that operates at a liminal threshold between live action and animation. In a discussion of the spectator’s sensual and emotional response,
Introduction: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Maxis’s 2008 computer game
Spore(Electronic Arts) offers a world of interactive play that tells us much about the world in which it jostles for position among competing digital entertainments. Designed by Will Wright, legendary designer of video game classicsSim City(Maxis, 1989) andThe Sims(Maxis, 2000), it is a game of many modes. Single-player play (including first-person, tactical, realtime, and turn-based strategy), asynchronous interactivity, user-generated content creation, and publishing are all built into the downloadable or packaged commodity. The player controls the development of a species from its beginnings as a single cell organism through stages of
1 From the Military-Industrial to the Military-Entertainment Complex from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: Mainstream media commentary on the carefully orchestrated “highlights packages” released daily to the international press during the U.S.-led 1991 Desert Storm campaign in Kuwait and Iraq registered the striking resemblance between the “missile cam” and spotter plane footage of targets being destroyed and the screens of contemporary combat-based video games. Media theorists typically responded in the wake of the war by exposing the highly selective and unrepresentative nature of U.S. military–controlled media briefings. The rhetoric of a war of precision weapons delivering surgical strikes obscured the fact that the vast majority of military ordnance was not precision guided; that
2 Select Gameplay Mode: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: By mapping a game over the real space of normal activity, alternative reality games virtualize reality for
4 Military Gametime: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: The perpetrators of the 9/11 terrorist attack included commercial and game flight simulation software systems in their training regimen for their suicide missions.¹ As one of the many facts to have emerged via mainstream media reporting to the American (and worldwide) audience in the weeks after the attacks, this contributed to the shocking sense that the world was not what it had seemed to be for people living in advanced Western democracies before September 11, 2001. The news about the simulation training amounted to a disturbing defamiliarization of flight simulator technology from useful or entertaining virtual reality system to dangerously
5 The Game of Life: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: This chapter examines the experience of information in first-person shooter computer games. At first glance, this might seem to refer to the rich layerings of textual and graphically presented information that accompany the perspectival animation of virtual space in these games. Elements of the screen interface, such as a compass heading graphic, a mini map, or a radar screen giving extra information about the player’s surrounds, avatar health level, and weapons selection indicators, are common informational supplements to the visual field of perception provided to the player. These elements are included as characteristic of the experience of first-person shooter play,
6 Other Players in Other Spaces: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: The American new media artist/activist Joseph DeLappe is waging an interventionist campaign in the U.S. military’s own multiplayer online game,
America’s Army(U.S. Department of Defense, from 2002). Having qualified for entry to the multiplayer mode of the game by completing the basic training (or “boot camp”) missions, he joins a game on one of the official game servers as a member of one of two teams involved in the squad-based tactical combat. This allows him to stage his intervention into the normal routines of gameplay. He does not participate actively in the combat play—a refusal to act that
7 Playing Through: from:
Gameplay Mode
Abstract: In this chapter, I will examine several alternative and critical new media projects taking computer game systems or practices as their major medium and/or theme. This will enable me to explore some instances of aesthetic and critical reproduction of mainstream computer game forms and technocultural practices for what they say about these, and for what they indicate of the future of aesthetically experimental and critical computer game projects. My examination of these works will initiate consideration of the question of critical simulation raised by several theorists, most notably in the arena of computer games by Gonzalo Frasca, who has called
Chapter 3 “The Reduction of Indication” from:
Strategies of Deconstruction
Abstract: Derrida’s short second chapter follows Husserl as he attempts to demonstrate that indication is not essential to expression. Indication must be “set aside, abstracted, and ’reduced’ ” (
SP, 28/29). Indication involves a unity of motivation, which Husserl defines as including logical demonstration as well as indication in the strict sense. This general account employs concepts (Sein, Bestand) broader than those appropriate to indication in the strict sense (Existenz, Dasein, Realität). The latter is distinguished from logical demonstration, which concerns not reality or real existence but idealities and ideal necessities.
Book Title: Striking Beauty-A Philosophical Look at the Asian Martial Arts
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ALLEN BARRY
Abstract: Striking Beautyexplains the relationship between Asian martial arts and the Chinese philosophical traditions of Confucianism, Buddhism, and Daoism, in addition to Sunzi'sArt of War. It connects martial arts practice to the Western concepts of mind-body dualism and materialism, sports aesthetics, and the ethics of violence. The work ameliorates Western philosophy's hostility toward the body, emphasizing the pleasure of watching and engaging in martial arts, along with their beauty and the ethical problem of their violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/alle17272
1 THE DAO OF ASIAN MARTIAL ARTS from:
Striking Beauty
Abstract: What the world knows as the Asian martial arts began in China. China is not the only civilization to have spiritualized combat arts; there are other, no less ancient, examples in India and Mesopotamia. Yet the Chinese, drawing on the resources of a mature civilization, merged their arts of armed and unarmed combat with Buddhist meditation and Daoist inner alchemy, two of the most dynamic currents of their postclassical culture. Creatively synthesizing combative arts with these prestigious teachings reinvented their practice as a way of self-cultivation. Indeed, scholars increasingly recognize that “without reliable research and informed commentary on the martial
3 POWER AND GRACE from:
Striking Beauty
Abstract: Martial arts practice is like sport but not sport and dancelike but not dance. It constantly refers to violence but refuses it a place in the training. The training is athletic, as it is in sport and professional dance, yet the competence that the martial arts teach stands apart from those of sport or dance by means of its external, instrumental value as a weapon. It is precisely this external, instrumental effectiveness, the weapons potential of martial arts, that accounts for the striking beauty of its movements.
4 WHAT A BODY CAN DO from:
Striking Beauty
Abstract: The techniques that the Asian martial arts teach are weapons. There is no other way to put it, which means that training in these arts is training in the use of weapons. They are special weapons, of course, and ineffective against many other weapons or against various threats. But what weapon is not specialized in some way and ineffectual in certain situations? People who train in martial arts might never actually use these weapons, just as many people who own a gun never fire it in self-defense. But they might, and unless they have prepared themselves, they might be disagreeably
EPILOGUE from:
Striking Beauty
Abstract: An aesthetic paradox of Asian martial arts is that something so warlike in conception should be beautiful to watch and joyful to perform. While designed for violence and visibly expressing that functionality, the martial arts are not practiced with a violent purpose and do no harm (although they certainly could). By suspending the dread of violence, the practice creates a theater in which to contemplate movements combining artful design with eloquent efficacy. But if you remove the training conventions and introduce unfeigned violence (as in boxing), the aesthetic serenity will vanish into the sometimes irrepressibly fascinating chaos of violence.
1 WORLD SOUVENIR from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: The above notice from the
Journal du Ciné-Club is one of the very few contemporary references in the French film press to the kilometers of nonfiction footage that make up the film component of Albert Kahn’s Archives de la Planète. The publication in which it appeared, the Journal du Ciné-Club (1920–21), was founded and edited by the most influential film critic of his generation, Louis Delluc, and it played a central role in the intellectual and creative blossoming of French film discourse and practice in the late teens and early twenties. Given the magazine’s position at the epicenter of
3 THE COUNTER-ARCHIVE OF CINEMATIC MEMORY from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: In the first decades of their emergence, photography and film inspired artists and intellectuals to debate their implications for a diverse range of aesthetic, scientific, and philosophical issues. Underlying many of these debates was the impact of these new recording devices upon conceptions of memory. Both Baudelaire’s infamous diatribe against photography and Bergson’s equally renowned denunciation of
photographie animée centered on the association of the new media with a debased if professionally useful form of memory. Proust’s related literary inquiry into photographic and cinematographic understandings of memory, whose first stirrings we find in the above fragment from his unfinished novel
7 ILLUMINATIONS FROM THE DARKENED “SANCTUARY” from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: No contemporary descriptions of the actual film screenings on Kahn’s Boulogne property have come to light. Nonetheless, the outlines of a typical screening can be reconstructed from the memoirs of Jean Brunhes’ daughter, Mariel Jean-Brunhes Delamarre, and from the extant projection register that provides the date, film titles, and names of audience members for every screening from March 18, 1921, to June 29, 1950. After having had a light lunch, a tour of the gardens and their color portrait taken, the personal guests of Kahn or the Société Autour du Monde, as described by Delamarre, would have “penetrated” the small
8 THE AERIAL VIEW from:
Counter-Archive
Abstract: If the microscopic view provided a privileged vantage point for rediscovering the everyday in early French film theory, then its opposite, the aerial view, held a similarly privileged role in the rediscovery of the earth for human geography. In the above passage from Jean Brunhes’ major work,
Géographie humaine (1910), he summons his readers like a latter-day Jules Verne to accompany him on an “imaginary” ride above the earth, where the “facts” of human geography will for the first time appear fully to the human eye, or “better still,” to the “photographic plate.” Much like the visual revolution announced by
4 AIMLESSNESS from:
Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: The drifting of Bolaño’s stories, discussed at the end of the previous chapter, is not a purely formal feature of his writing. If his stories often drift, it is partly because many of his characters are drifters by choice, by nature, or by force of circumstance. When the narrator in “Sensini” says that the eponymous writer’s stories are peopled by “brave and aimless characters” (LEE 5), he could be referring to the fiction of Bolaño. The characteristics of bravery and aimlessness are preeminently combined by Cesárea Tinajero in
The Savage Detectives.In the final section of the next chapter I
6 EVIL AGENCIES from:
Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: It would be hyperbolic to use the category of evil in discussing much contemporary fiction, but not in Bolaño’s case. His fictional universe accommodates ethical extremes: it is not full of heroes and villains, but as I argued in the previous chapter, it is home to at least one exemplar of heroism (Cesárea Tinajero). In this chapter I will be substantiating the unsurprising claim that it is also inhabited and haunted by a small number of genuinely villainous characters, intent not just on dominating the lives of others but also on destroying them. If we adopt Claudia Card’s definition of
7 A SENSE OF WHAT MATTERS from:
Roberto Bolaño's Fiction
Abstract: One of the reasons Bolaño’s fiction matters to so many readers is that it is underpinned by a strong, distinctive, and relatively simple sense of what matters in life. His characters live in ethically and politically oriented worlds. This does not go without saying. Since Western literatures began strongly to affirm and defend their autonomy with respect to political and religious institutions in the mid-nineteenth century, many critics and writers have campaigned to purge literature of didacticism, and some have gone further and argued that literature should be ethically and politically neutral. It is worth distinguishing these two objectives, because
Book Title: Modernist Commitments-Ethics, Politics, and Transnational Modernism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Berman Jessica
Abstract: Jessica Berman demonstrates how modernist narrative connects ethical attitudes and responsibilities to the active creation of political relationships and the way we imagine justice. She challenges divisions between "modernist" and "committed" writing, arguing that a continuum of political engagement undergirds modernisms worldwide and that it is strengthened rather than hindered by formal experimentation. In addition to making the case for a transnational model of modernism, Berman shows how modernism's play with formal matters, its challenge to the boundaries between fact and fiction, its incorporation of vernacular and folkways, and its engagement with embodied experience and intimacy offer not only an expanded account of modernist texts and commitments but a new way of thinking about what modernism is and can do.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/berm14950
Afterword from:
Modernist Commitments
Abstract: On December 10, 2009, Barack Obama delivered his much-anticipated speech accepting the Nobel Peace Prize. In it he created a complex argument, based on the theology of Reinhold Neibuhr, about the moral necessity of political action in a flawed and dangerous world. His remarks describe the fine line between just and unjust war, evoking the principle that warfare is justified “if it is waged as a last resort or in self-defense; if the force used is proportional; and if, whenever possible, civilians are spared from violence.” But the speech also asked its audience “to think in new ways about the
Book Title: Crossing Horizons-World, Self, and Language in Indian and Western Thought
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ROTEM ORNAN
Abstract: Biderman uses concrete examples from religion and literature to illustrate the formal aspects of the philosophical problems of transcendence, language, selfhood, and the external world and then demonstrates their plausibility in actual situations. Though his method of analysis is comparative, Biderman does not adopt the disinterested stance of an "ideal" spectator. Rather, Biderman approaches ancient Indian thought and culture from a Western philosophical standpoint to uncover cultural presuppositions that can be difficult to expose from within the culture in question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bide14024
ONE Far and Beyond: from:
Crossing Horizons
Abstract: The following verse, whose beauty is suffused by its simplicity, is the first line of an ancient Hebrew liturgical poem (
piyyut) describing the high priest’s rites on the Day of Atonement. Before the actual description itself, the poet turns to what he sees as the absolute beginning of all beginnings, namely, God:
TWO One Language, Many Things: from:
Crossing Horizons
Abstract: In the West the presupposition of transcendence has made the idea of exteriority—whether in the guise of abstract Platonic Forms or of a personal deity—the underlying conceptual scheme by which the world is understood, described, and evaluated. Evidently, the presence of this presupposition served as a conceptual bulwark preventing the intrusion of chance into the inner core of the Platonic or monotheistic worldview. Both Plato and his disciples, and the Western promulgators of monotheism, rejected out of hand any outlook that allowed capricious chance to assume an important role. Indeed, chance has been viewed as the archenemy of
FOUR No-Self: from:
Crossing Horizons
Abstract: The observer of the soul cannot penetrate into the soul, but there doubtless is a margin where he comes into contact with it. Recognition of this contact is the fact that even the soul does not know of itself. Hence it must remain unknown. That would be sad only if there were anything apart from the soul, but there
5 SEIZURES OF CHANCE: from:
A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: IN MANY WAYS AND NECESSARILY TO MULTIPLE ENDS, IT IS THE moment to seize upon an opportunity to (re)stage a work that the great Pasolini, by chance, could not himself fund. If so, our own putting into place of imaginary mises-en-scènes for a screenplay Pasolini left behind would immediately set in motion a complex comparative machinery, whirring away to effect an operational wonder about the now-time within which chance occasions and imaginary props afford a chance to bring a screenplay, not to mention an apostle, to life again. In fact, Pasolini wrote in his notes for a screenplay (written in
CONCLUSION: from:
A Materialism for the Masses
Abstract: READ SIMILARLY TO NIETZSCHE, FREUD FOR ME WAS CORRECT inasmuch as he understood Paulinism as a kind of counterpoint to the “religion” of the people of Moses. But Freud was still not sleuthing hard enough, not doing enough dreamwork on the force and forms of cultural memory, when he considered Paul himself as actually having instituted the operative break between Judaism and Christianity. For all his shrewd reflections on revolution, institutionalization, and its repressions, Freud still read Paul like Martin Luther, participating in an aged panoply of a triumphalistically anti-Jewish and implicitly pro-imperial tradition inasmuch as he finds in Paul
Book Title: Reclaiming the Enlightenment-Toward a Politics of Radical Engagement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BRONNER STEPHEN ERIC
Abstract: With its championing of democracy, equality, cosmopolitanism, and reason -- and its vociferous attacks on popular prejudice, religious superstition, and arbitrary abuses of power -- the Enlightenment was once hailed as the foundation of all modern, progressive politics. But in 1947, this perspective was dramatically undermined when Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno published their classic work,
Dialectic of Enlightenment, which claims that the Enlightenment was the source of totalitarianism and the worst excesses of modernity. Reclaiming the Enlightenment from purely philosophical and cultural interpretations, Bronner shows that its notion of political engagement keeps democracy fresh and alive by providing a practical foundation for fostering institutional accountability, opposing infringements on individual rights, instilling an enduring commitment to social reform, and building a cosmopolitan sensibility. This forceful and timely reinterpretation of the Enlightenment and its powerful influence on contemporary political life is a resounding wake-up call to critics on both the left and the right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/bron12608
1 INTERPRETING THE ENLIGHTENMENT: from:
Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: In the aftermath of the terrorist attacks of september 11, 2001, amid the intellectual retrenchment consonant with the unending “war against terror,” the Enlightenment legacy has become—more than ever before—a contested terrain. Human rights is often used as an ideological excuse for the exercise of arbitrary power; the security of western states has served as a justification for the constriction of personal freedom; and, with flags flying, Christian fundamentalists have called for the defense of western “values.” The best of them—political liberty, social justice, and cosmopolitanism—are rooted in the Enlightenment, and they retain their radical character.
2 IN PRAISE OF PROGRESS from:
Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: Max Weber already envisioned the spirit of enlightenment “irretrievably fading” and a world comprised of “specialists without spirit, sensualists without heart.”¹ But he was bitter about this development, which places him in marked contrast to much of contemporary opinion. The Enlightenment always had its critics. Beginning with the Restoration of 1815 and the new philosophical reaction to the French Revolution, however, they were almost exclusively political—if not necessarily cultural—adherents of the right: intelligent conservatives committed to organic notions of development like Edmund Burke, elitists seeking a return to the sword and the robe like Joseph de Maistre, racists
8 PATHWAYS TO FREEDOM: from:
Reclaiming the Enlightenment
Abstract: Human rights is the global expression of a demand for civil liberty. Its origins derive from natural law and the European Enlightenment. Opposition to “rights” from the
ancien régime was fierce, however, and it took a few hundred ideas for the idea to permeate the mainstream discourse. Human rights only gained currency after Auschwitz and Hiroshima and, in fact, it became popular in the United States only during the presidency of Jimmy Carter in the aftermath of the Vietnam War. Once again, using the famous phrase of Hegel, the Owl of Minerva spread its wings only at dusk: the Universal
Book Title: The Habermas Handbook- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas is one of the most influential philosophers of our time. His diagnoses of contemporary society and concepts such as the public sphere, communicative rationality, and cosmopolitanism have influenced virtually all academic disciplines, spurred political debates, and shaped intellectual life in Germany and beyond for more than fifty years. In
The
Habermas Handbook, leading Habermas scholars elucidate his thought, providing essential insight into his key concepts, the breadth of his work, and his influence across politics, law, the social sciences, and public life.This volume offers a comprehensive overview and an in-depth analysis of Habermas's work in its entirety. After examining his intellectual biography, it goes on to illuminate the social and intellectual context of Habermasian thought, such as the Frankfurt School, speech-act theory, and contending theories of democracy. TheHandbookprovides an extensive account of Habermas's texts, ranging from his dissertation on Schelling to his most recent writing about Europe. It illustrates the development of his thought and its frequently controversial reception while elaborating the central ideas of his work. The book also provides a glossary of key terms and concepts, making the complexity of Habermas's thought accessible to a broad readership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/brun16642
2 THE FRANKFURT SCHOOL AND SOCIAL THEORY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HONNETH AXEL
Abstract: In 1950, when the Institute for Social Research reopened in Frankfurt, its activities resumed without a direct connection to the way the organization had operated in the 1930s and 1940s. There was no continuity between the sociological studies that were now being conducted and the philosophical, cultural, and critical projects that Horkheimer, Adorno, and Marcuse (who remained in the United States) were continuing to pursue. Henceforth, critical theory ceased to be a “school” of unified endeavor, at least in terms of method.
4 PRAGMATISM AND ULTIMATE JUSTIFICATION from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KETTNER MATTHIAS
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas’s intellectual itinerary can hardly be understood without considering its critical and constructive interplay with the thought of Karl-Otto Apel—interactions between the two theorists have often marked significant turning points in Habermas’s project. Without the theoretical-architectonic alternatives that Apel’s reflections open, it would be impossible to evaluate the philosophical course Habermas has steered. Apel and Habermas are united by a lifelong professional friendship, which began when they studied together in Bonn in the early 1950s; since then, the liberating encounter with American pragmatism—of which Apel was one of the first German translators (1967, 1970)—has strengthened their
6 SPEECH ACTS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NIESEN PETER
Abstract: Systematic philosophical engagement with speech acts began when John Langshaw Austin corrected his original conception of performative utterances. Previously, Austin had maintained that philosophy of language had overvalued the declarative aspect of linguistic utterances and underestimated the acts one can perform/convey in making them. Whereas he initially held that constative utterances (which can be true or false) may be distinguished from performative utterances (which meet with success or failure but are neither true nor false), he found himself forced to admit, in the final installment of his William James Lectures, that some performative utterances claim to be true or false
12 EVOLUTIONARY THEORIES from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) EDER KLAUS
Abstract: The theory of social evolution plays a key role in the foundation of Habermas’s theory of communicative action. Since Marx, the evolutionary perspective has struggled with the fact that the position the observer occupies must necessarily be, at the same time, the endpoint of the process in question—and therefore a point of teleological narrowness restricting the scope of social theory. Over time, this problem has lost none of its actuality for projects that seek to address processes of societal development. Durkheim, for example, was wedded to the model of phase-specific progression as much as, more recently, Parsons, Luhmann, and
18 EUROPEAN CONSTITUTIONALIZATION from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) JOERGES CHRISTIAN
Abstract: For years now—across the continent, in all languages and lands—talk has been animated: Europe must determine what state it finds itself in, whether its legal system may be understood as a constitutional order, whether it can—indeed, should—be democratic, what democracy in a European union means, and what the chances of this really occurring are. The constitutionalization of Europe involves both the analysis of actual processes that make the phenomenon itself comprehensible and a normative framework offering tools of measurement—and specifying conditions necessary—for determining whether the emergent configurations “deserve recognition.” Yet analytical and empirical questions
19 THE THEORY OF JUSTICE from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KREIDE REGINA
Abstract: For Nietzsche and Sloterdijk, justice is the enemy of freedom. Justice restricts freedom, which they both understand—notwithstanding other differences of opinion—in terms of what affords the greatest possible space for action. For Jürgen Habermas, on the other hand, freedom can only be understood insofar as it is afforded by justice. Without just processes that permit us to determine freedom’s extent and limits, there exists only arbitrary freedom for individuals— but no freedom in the proper sense (freedom for all).
23 NEOPRAGMATISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BERNSTEIN RICHARD J.
Abstract: For over forty years Habermas has taken inspiration from and been deeply influenced by the classical American pragmatists, especially Charles S. Peirce, John Dewey, and George Herbert Mead. He has appropriated, reconstructed, and integrated many of the primary themes of these thinkers into his own comprehensive philosophic perspective: a radical critique of Cartesianism and the philosophy of consciousness; a focus on the primacy of social practices and action in understanding everyday life (the lifeworld); a thoroughgoing fallibilism that encompasses both knowledge of the world and moral reasoning; a development of an intersubjective dialogical understanding of action and rationality; and a
27 THE THEORY OF THE PUBLIC SPHERE: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FRASER NANCY
Abstract: The public sphere is the most influential of Jürgen Habermas’s signature concepts. Unlike “communicative action,” “discourse ethics,” and “the colonization of the lifeworld,” which are discussed principally by specialists, this concept has become a major focus of work in fields ranging from history, law, politics, and sociology to literature, philosophy, gender studies, and media studies. Designating a central institution of modern society, one that previously lacked a name, Habermas’s concept of the public sphere enjoys a status akin to that of a scientific discovery. Widely used throughout the humanities and social sciences, even by those who do not share his
32 HISTORY AND EVOLUTION: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MCCARTHY THOMAS
Abstract: The essays collected in
Zur Rekonstruktion des Historischen Materialismus(1976), all written in the mid-1970s, represent a major juncture in Habermas’s thought. They brought his reflections on historical materialism since the 1950s together with his work in the early 1970s on the theory of communicative action, on one side, and with the results of his recent exchange with Niklas Luhmann concerning social-systems theory, on the other side. Together they introduced the research program that would soon lead toThe Theory of Communicative Action(1985 [1981]).
35 THE THEORY OF SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) STRECKER DAVID
Abstract: Key to the social philosophy of Jürgen Habermas is his deeply held conviction that social evolution represents a history of progress in principle while at the same time—and as a matter of actual fact—being the cause of grave social ills. His project is shaped, then, by an awareness of suffering and crisis—matters that do not even occur to neoconservative and neoliberal modernizers, entranced as they are by technical and economic development. Simultaneously, he maintains critical distance from parties who, when faced with the catastrophes that modernity has produced, take flight for archaic utopias. In fleshing out this
37 DEFENSE OF MODERNITY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BENHABIB SEYLA
Abstract: Since Max Weber’s well-known theory that characterized the fate of modern societies in terms of the concept of “rationalization,” the relationship between the project of occidental rationalism and the structural problems and contradictions of modern capitalist societies has preoccupied thinkers of the Frankfurt School. The early Frankfurt School’s critique of “instrumental reason” continues the legacy of Weberian-Marxism (Lukács 1971 [1923], Löwith 1993, Merleau-Ponty 1968). They combined Weber’s theses about societal modernization with Marx’s analysis of the commodity form and predicted that in the major institutions of modern societies, such as the state, public and private bureaucracies, the capitalist firm, courts,
38 DEMOCRACY, LAW, AND SOCIETY: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) MÖLLERS CHRISTOPH
Abstract: Habermas’s legal theory must be understood as part of a much larger project that combines theoretical and practical philosophy in an uncommonly thorough way for the twentieth and twenty-first centuries. Habermas (in
Truth) has lamented the fact that, in a landscape increasingly distinguished by the division of academic labor, the two perspectives have grown more and more separate (for an expressly different view, see Rawls 2005, 372ff.). At the same time, his writings have proved that this need not be the case. Habermas was interested in matters of political theory from the first, even if he came to address them
40 RELIGION, METAPHYSICS, FREEDOM: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HØIBRAATEN HELGE
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas understands his thinking as postmetaphysical (see his eponymous book). The fact that he does not understand his thinking simply to be postreligious—even though he has referred to himself as “tone deaf” in matters of faith—met with interest long before his debate with the future Pope Benedict XVI (Habermas and Ratzinger 2006;
Naturalism). Discussion began with Habermas’s speech “Faith and Knowledge,” which he held when he was awarded the Peace Prize of the German Book Trade in 2001 (Future,Zeitdiagnosen; see Reder and Schmidt 2008, Langthaler and Nagl-Docekal 2007; on themes not addressed here, see especiallyAbsolute,
41 HUMAN NATURE AND GENETIC MANIPULATION: from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) SCHMIDT THOMAS M.
Abstract: Depending on one’s temperament and sensibilities, progress in the biological sciences occasions enthusiasm or misgivings. Either way, these advances have prompted calls—which are only growing in number—for points of normative orientation. Genetic technology and biotechnology have not only given rise to philosophical reactions along the lines of applied ethics (e.g., disputes about appropriate standards and codes of regulation). In addition, discussions concerning stem-cell research and changes to human genetic material have brought into focus a basic anthropological question about “the future of human nature.” As Habermas views things, the fundamental provocation represented by preimplantation genetic diagnosis (PGD) and
44 COLONIZATION from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ISER MATTIAS
Abstract: As early as
The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere, Habermas portrays the interventions of the welfare state as a reaction to the functional deficiencies of the economic order under capitalism. The means-end rationality that shapes economy and state undermines the
45 COMMUNICATIVE ACTION from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) LAFONT CRISTINA
Abstract: Communicative action” is
thecentral concept of Habermas’s oeuvre. The term does not refer simply to actions that require communication or instances of communication that perform actions. Instead, its key feature is that participants attempt to coordinate their different action plans on the basis of an understanding that has been mutually achieved. In the technical sense, “communicative action” refers only to those linguistically mediated interactions in which the “use of language oriented to reaching understanding” assumes a “coordinating role” (Truth, 110). Given that communicative action represents only one kind of social action among others, it is important to bear in
48 CONSTITUTIONS AND CONSTITUTIONAL PATRIOTISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NICKEL RAINER
Abstract: Constitutionality received a central position and a positive definition only in Habermas’s later writings, specifically in the context of his legal theory. In his early discussion of legitimation problems under late capitalism, the author voiced suspicion that “bourgeois constitutions” (Legitimation , 101) harbor ideology, but the matter appeared to be of secondary importance for the task at hand.
The Theory of Communicative Actionhinted at a changed interest in structures of (constitutional) law. Finally,Between Facts and Norms—Habermas’s main work of legal theory—presented a kind of idealizing phenomenology of the democratic and constitutional state and affirmed the equiprimordiality
50 COUNTERFACTUAL PRESUPPOSITIONS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) KOLLER ANDREAS
Abstract: The notion of unavoidable, idealizing presuppositions of a pragmatic nature that Habermas elaborates in his later works represents an effort to nuance—and, ultimately, to replace—the confusing concept of an “ideal speech situation” that he presented in the works of his middle period. Since
Between Facts and Norms, Habermas has understood “counterfactual presuppositions”—or, alternatively, the “vocabulary of the as-if”—as “the nerve of my entire theoretical undertaking” (1998, 418). The social sciences in particular have paid little attention to this conceptual move, however. Accordingly, the matter represents one of the most misunderstood elements of Habermasian theory.
51 DELIBERATION from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) DEITELHOFF NICOLE
Abstract: Habermas first employed the expression “deliberative politics” in
Between Facts and Norms(1992). Here, it stands at the center of his theory of democracy. In so doing, he adopted a political concept from a broad-scale American debate that had been prompted by his own
53 DISCOURSE ETHICS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) FORST RAINER
Abstract: The term “discourse ethics” refers to a conception of morality in the Kantian tradition, which J ü rgen Habermas developed in conjunction with Karl-Otto Apel (1980, 1988). Its most important feature is its replacement of the reflective evaluation of moral maxims—in accordance with the prescriptions of the Categorical Imperative—with the argumentative redemption of the validity claims of moral norms in practical discourse. The transcendental self-reflection of practical reason à la Kant yields to the pragmatic reconstruction of the normative implications of communicative rationality (
Naturalism, 24–76). This theory of morality offers numerous points of contact with Habermas’s philosophy
57 HISTORICAL MATERIALISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) HARTMANN MARTIN
Abstract: The theory of historical materialism developed by Marx and Engels understands social conditions as the result of a teleological historical process. The analysis of operative categories—forces of production, relations of production, and superstructure—permit the further course of history to be explained and even predicted. As outlined in Marx’s
Grundrisse(Marx 1993), the model of historical materialism is as follows: Forces of production (i.e., the labor of persons who are active in production, the specialized knowledge that manages/directs their efforts, the tools employed, and instruments/instances of certification and coordination) give rise to institutions and mechanisms that determine who has
63 LEGAL WARS VERSUS LEGITIMATE WARS from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) GEIS ANNA
Abstract: As a public intellectual, Jürgen Habermas has, from the beginning of his career, taken stands on current events. His political observations have not avoided an especially touchy matter in liberal and democratic public spaces: the justification of military intervention. Since the end of the Cold War, Habermas has—in essays, newspaper pieces, and interviews—articulated positions on three wars involving Western states: the first Gulf War (1991), Kosovo (1999), and Iraq (2003). He has said little, in contrast, about ongoing activities in Afghanistan (Habermas 1991, 1999; Habermas and Derrida 2003;
Divided West).
68 PRAGMATIC TURN from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) RIZVI ALI M.
Abstract: Robert Brandom (2002) describes pragmatism “as a movement centered on the primacy of the practical” (40). This primacy of practice over theory is manifested in Habermas’s writings in two ways. First, it emerges in his lifelong insistence on the primacy of “know how” (what he often calls intuitive knowledge) over “know that.” This is a key Heideggerian distinction, which Habermas uses in his theoretical analyses, in his formal pragmatics, and in developing his social theory. Second, it is manifested in Habermas’s rejection of what he calls the “spectator model” of knowledge and his insistence that action has “cognitive” significance—in
69 PUBLIC SPHERE from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NANZ PATRIZIA
Abstract: The works of Jürgen Habermas have shaped the way the public sphere (
Öffentlichkeit) is understood in Germany and the Anglo-American world.The Structural Transformation of the Public Sphere(1961) presented the key ideas that later were treated in systematic fashion inBetween Facts and Norms(1992), Habermas’s main work of legal and democratic theory. The “public sphere” forms a space of reasoned communicative interaction—the principal means of arriving at collective understanding (Selbstverständigung). Under modern conditions, the public sphere of politics in the democratic community (Gemeinwesen ) plays a central role in social integration. Public debates form the basis for
70 RADICAL REFORMISM from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) BRUNKHORST HAUKE
Abstract: Just as the label “the theory of communicative action” effectively covers all of Habermas’s work to date, the phrase “radical reformism” stands for the author’s view of political praxis— i.e., the practical implications of his theoretical reflections. In a lengthy introduction—written in the winter of 1969—to his first collection of essays, notes (
Denkschriften), and contributions to debates on university reform and student protest, Habermas addressed the objectives, theoretical justifications, achievements, reactions, and origins (which were the same across the globe) of the first international movement of this kind. The piece ends with Lenin’s famous question: “What is to
74 SOCIETY from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) ROSA HARTMUT
Abstract: Sociological concepts admit analysis along three lines of questioning (Rosa, Strecker, and Kottmann 2007): What
isa society? That is, how and by what means does it constitute itself—what forms its basis or fundamental unity? (Synthesis). Through what processes and in what manner does societychange? What factors serve as “motors” for transformation? Are there rules underlying its course of development? (Dynamis). Can the evolution of societies besteered, controlled—or, at very least, influenced by social actors? (Praxis).
75 SYSTEM AND LIFEWORLD from:
The Habermas Handbook
Author(s) NEVES MARCELO
Abstract: Habermas’s model presents the lifeworld “as the horizon within which communicative actions are ‘always already’ moving” (2: 119). In other words, it is conceived as the “background for communicative action” (
Vorstudien, 593) and represents
Book Title: Randall Jarrell and His Age- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Burt Stephen
Abstract: Burt's book examines all of Jarrell's work, incorporating new research based on previously undiscovered essays and poems. Other books have examined Jarrell's poetry in biographical or formal terms, but none have considered both his aesthetic choices and their social contexts. Beginning with an overview of Jarrell's life and loves, Burt argues that Jarrell's poetry responded to the political questions of the 1930s, the anxieties and social constraints of wartime America, and the apparent prosperity, domestic ideals, and professional ideology that characterized the 1950s. Jarrell's work is peopled by helpless soldiers, anxious suburban children, trapped housewives, and lonely consumers.
Randall Jarrell and His Agesituates the poet-critic among his peers -- including Bishop, Lowell, and Arendt -- in literature and cultural criticism. Burt considers the ways in which Jarrell's efforts and achievements encompassed the concerns of his time, from teen culture to World War II to the Cuban Missile Crisis; the book asks, too, how those efforts might speak to us now.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/burt12594
Chapter 2 INSTITUTIONS, PROFESSIONS, CRITICISM from:
Randall Jarrell and His Age
Abstract: Recent years have seen an impassioned debate about academic institutions and the profession of letters. Bruce Robbins has shown how some literary intellectuals “manufacture vocations for themselves … in speaking in public, of the public, to the public, and to some extent for the public” (21). Stanley Fish, however, has argued that “literary criticism is
only, today, an academic discipline [whose] specialized language … is the mark of its distinctiveness” (Professional 43). Responding to Robbins, to Fish, and to David Simpson, Timothy Peltason asks that contemporary critics learn from Victorian thinkers how to make “complex characterizations of the experiences …
Chapter 4 TIME AND MEMORY from:
Randall Jarrell and His Age
Abstract: “In order to have a sense of who we are,” writes Charles Taylor, “we have to have a notion of how we have become, and of where we are going” (47). The unconscious (in psychoanalytic terms) bears traces of early experience; clinical practice moves from present experience to its roots in the recent or distant past. For these reasons and others, Jarrell’s poems often seek a past self within present experience, or a child within an adult. With help from concepts central to psychoanalysis, and from literary sources such as Wordsworth and Proust, his characters try to understand themselves as
Conclusion: from:
Randall Jarrell and His Age
Abstract: We have seen in the “Lost World” poems and throughout Jarrell’s oeuvre how he took care to define and defend the self. We have seen how his lonely personae seek intersubjective confirmation and how his alienated characters resist the so-called social world. We have seen how Jarrell’s divided, conflicted selves depend on psychoanalytic ideas—both those of a familiar Freudianism and those of later object-relations theories. We have seen how concepts of work and play, and related ideas about childhood, adolescence, and adulthood, both inform and confine the ways Jarrell’s characters think about their lives. And we have seen how
Book Title: Political Uses of Utopia-New Marxist, Anarchist, and Radical Democratic Perspectives
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): INGRAM JAMES D.
Abstract: Utopia has long been banished from political theory, framed as an impossible-and possibly dangerous-political ideal, a flawed social blueprint, or a thought experiment without any practical import. Even the "realistic utopias" of liberal theory strike many as wishful thinking. Can politics think utopia otherwise? Can utopian thinking contribute to the renewal of politics?In
Political Uses of Utopia, an international cast of leading and emerging theorists agree that the uses of utopia for politics are multiple and nuanced and lie somewhere between-or, better yet, beyond-the mainstream caution against it and the conviction that another, better world ought to be possible. Representing a range of perspectives on the grand tradition of Western utopianism, which extends back half a millennium and perhaps as far as Plato, these essays are united in their interest in the relevance of utopianism to specific historical and contemporary political contexts. Featuring contributions from Miguel Abensour, Étienne Balibar, Raymond Geuss, and Jacques Rancière, among others,Political Uses of Utopiareopens the question of whether and how utopianism can inform political thinking and action today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/chro17958
2 IS THE CLASSIC CONCEPT OF UTOPIA READY FOR THE FUTURE? from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) SAAGE RICHARD
Abstract: The origins of the intentional conception go back to Gustav Landauer. In his study
Revolutionfrom 1907, Landauer interprets utopia as a decisive explosive charge of the revolutionary upheavals in Europe that have happened since the sixteenth century.¹ He seeks to isolate its mechanism in the fact that social development always swings between two “states of
5 GENERAL WISH OR GENERAL WILL? from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) HALLWARD PETER
Abstract: In well-run oligarchic societies, the best and simplest way to dismiss egalitarian challenges has long been to deride them as impracticable or “utopian”—and I use the word “utopian” here in the most banal sense, to mean an abstract notion or project that might be viable only in another place or time, or if undertaken by actors unlike ourselves.¹ A society without exploitation, hierarchy, or discrimination might be all very well in theory, but appropriately maintained ideological reflexes ensure that everyone knows that such fancies are not feasible in practice, here and now. Egalitarian ideals seem too demanding for selfish
7 A STRANGE FATE FOR POLITICS: from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) GRANT JOHN
Abstract: Must utopia remain utopian, or can it be achieved without at the same time announcing its own end? This question helps to orient an examination of Fredric Jameson’s engagement with utopia and the critical insights about society that come with it. In early work such as “Reification and Utopia in Mass Culture” (1979), Jameson articulates how cultural artifacts contain twin utopian and ideological components, with the latter never managing to preclude the former. In more recent work such as “The Politics of Utopia” (2004), Jameson claims that utopian thinking flourishes when we find politics has been suspended. This raises a
9 NEGATIVITY AND UTOPIA IN THE GLOBAL JUSTICE MOVEMENT from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) LÖWY MICHAEL
Abstract: The global justice movement is without a doubt the most important phenomenon of antisystemic resistance of the beginning of the twenty-first century. This vast, nebulous “movement of movements,” which has taken visible form since the regional or world social forums and the great protest demonstrations—against the WTO, the G8, or the imperial war in Iraq—does not correspond to the usual forms of social or political action. A large decentralized network, it is multiple, diverse, and heterogeneous, joining trade unions and peasant movements, NGOs and indigenous organizations, women’s movements, as well as ecological associations, intellectuals, and young activists. Far
10 UTOPIANISM AND PREFIGURATION from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) KINNA RUTH
Abstract: For anarchists, utopias are about action. As Uri Gordon argues, utopias are “umbilically connected to the idea of social revolution.”¹ The kind of action utopia describes is a matter of debate. This essay examines how utopian thinking shapes anarchist thought and highlights some recent shift s in the political uses of utopia. Utopianism is not treated as an abstract concept or method, or as a literary genre or place—because that is not how anarchists have understood the idea. Utopia, Gordon notes, “has always meant something more than a hypothetical exercise in designing a perfect society.” As a revolutionary idea,
13 DESIRE AND SHIPWRECK: from:
Political Uses of Utopia
Author(s) TASSIN ÉTIENNE
Abstract: “The world has long dreamed of possessing something of which it has only to be conscious in order to possess it in reality,” writes Marx in a letter to Ruge from September 1843.¹ For the dream to become reality, it is sufficient that, here and now, humanity be aware of its ancient desire in order to give it existence, to actualize and see the birth of a new society.”
Book Title: Neopoetics-The Evolution of the Literate Imagination
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Collins Christopher
Abstract: The quest to understand the evolution of the literary mind has become a fertile field of inquiry and speculation for scholars across literary studies and cognitive science. In
Paleopoetics, Christopher Collins's acclaimed earlier title, he described how language emerged both as a communicative tool and as a means of fashioning other communicative tools-stories, songs, and rituals. InNeopoetics, Collins turns his attention to the cognitive evolution of the writing-ready brain. Further integrating neuroscience into the popular field of cognitive poetics, he adds empirical depth to our study of literary texts and verbal imagination and offers a whole new way to look at reading, writing, and creative expression. Collins beginsNeopoeticswith the early use of visual signs, first as reminders of narrative episodes and then as conventional symbols representing actual speech sounds. Next he examines the implications of written texts for the play of the auditory and visual imagination. To exemplify this long transition from oral to literate artistry, Collins examines a wide array of classical texts-from Homer and Hesiod to Plato and Aristotle and from the lyric innovations of Augustan Rome to the inner dialogues of St. Augustine. In this work of "big history," Collins demonstrates how biological and cultural evolution collaborated to shape both literature and the brain we use to read it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/coll17686
One Innovating Ourselves from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: Since the evolution of speech, writing has arguably been our species’ most consequential innovation. By “innovation” I mean any successful, alternative way of doing something. Some of these changes were the result of gene mutation, the prime factor in natural selection, as over time alternative procedures aided their users to survive and reproduce and were thereby passed along to their descendants. Other innovations, learned by imitation, were transmitted through cultural evolution. Nonhuman animals show little or no capacity for innovation. Our nearest evolutionary cousins, the chimpanzees, for example, have the innate ability to hurl things, yet they cannot learn how
Four Visual Instruments of Memory from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: The final two mnemonics exist neither in narrative nor in the act of narration. Instead they are displacements of narrative
Five Poets’ Play and Plato’s Poetics from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: Singing is a universal human behavior combining words that awaken the memory, melodies that arouse the emotions, and rhythms that move the body. The singer, who might also play a drum or stringed instrument, therefore always occupied a prominent place in social and religious gatherings, which often would be held during times of leisure and feasting after other group activities, such as hunting, planting, harvesting, and herding.
Seven Writing and the Reading Mind from:
Neopoetics
Abstract: In the last chapter, I discussed writing as a means of reenacting speech events such as dialogues and monologues, either for others or for oneself. If for oneself, this performance could be a silent simulation of speech using the reader’s articulatory and auditory imagination. In this concluding chapter I will sketch out some of the unique ways in which writing also began to represent aspects of the mind that only writing could reveal. We have no reason to assume that the new model of the mind that literate culture introduced was the inevitable outcome of evolutionary forces. For Europe, it
CHAPTER ONE Of Memory and Time from:
On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: In the beginning was the body. At one end of the arc we find man as a species, at the other the
self, the person, the socialrole, society now definitively stratified: the history of humanity is the history of that journey. In animal species the self only exists, at most, as sexual preening. What they have is a primitive sympathetic reaction, which sometimes occurs in man too, but only episodically. In animals, however, it is a way of being, a deep empathy through which an individual communicates with another member of his species, and maybe even with members of
CHAPTER FIVE More About Traumas, Calamities, and Catastrophes from:
On the Difficulty of Living Together
Abstract: Human action has always been a mystery, even for those who perform it. Beyond the obvious train of events, the monotonous and predictable taking of decisions (which is often no more than assuming one’s own destiny, what is given to us and what we can accommodate only with decorum),¹ on a very few exceptional occasions the dull cadence of action is interrupted and, with a flash of proof, with an almost luminous character of revelation, the agent is shown the emptiness of his existence, the irreparable hollowness of his existential becoming.
Book Title: Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later-The Futures of Genealogy, Deconstruction, and Politics
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Haddad Samir
Abstract: Early in their careers, Michel Foucault and Jacques Derrida argued over madness, reason, and history in an exchange that profoundly influenced continental philosophy and critical theory. In this collection, Amy Allen, Geoffrey Bennington, Lynne Huffer, Colin Koopman, Pierre Macherey, Michael Naas, and Judith Revel, among others, trace this exchange in debates over the possibilities of genealogy and deconstruction, immanent and transcendent approaches to philosophy, and the practical and theoretical role of the archive.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/cust17194
5 “The Common Root of Meaning and Nonmeaning”: from:
Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) KHURANA THOMAS
Abstract: The transformation of the transcendental question is in fact a project that, in general, Foucault
7 Foucault, Derida: from:
Foucault/Derrida Fifty Years Later
Author(s) CUSTER OLIVIA
Abstract: A body of thought is too often reduced to a “silhouette” that one thinks is a summary. In thus personifying the work of philosophy, we take away its thickness. But this complexity does not exist in isolation, any more than it can be frozen in time in the form of an unchanging position. Bodies of thought enrich and transform each other through the play of interactions and reactions, strategies and exchanges, and conflicts and ruptures. One body of thought thus implicates others. This relation is not constructed simply by borrowing from, or subscribing to, other thoughts, any more than the
Introduction from:
The Force of the Example
Abstract: Diverse and far apart though our cultures might be, the world that you and I inhabit is shaped by three great forces. The first and most powerful of them is the force of
what exists, of what is already there, in place—the force of things. We experience this force in two fundamental ways. Sometimes we encounter it as the force of habit and routine, of tradition, of mores and custom, of culture, of convention, of usage, of established practice and received wisdom. Society as we know it would simply be impossible if we were to reinvent the terms of
1 Judgment as a Paradigm from:
The Force of the Example
Abstract: The conversation of philosophers unfolds over the ages with a continuity of themes and paradigms that only at infrequent junctures undergoes a significant reconfiguring. One of the most interesting among these turning points is constituted by the publication of Kant’s
Critique of the Power of Judgment. Kant’s work of 1790 inaugurates a new paradigm for thinking of validity and normativity—the judgment paradigm—that further modifies a philosophical horizon already reshaped in depth by the more often celebrated Critique of Pure Reasonand Critique of Practical Reason and whose full promise begins to be recognized, for reasons that I will try
7 Enforcing Human Rights Between Westphalia and Cosmopolis from:
The Force of the Example
Abstract: Let me start with the abused metaphor of the wade. At the present stage within the so-called global age we find ourselves at an indeterminate point in our wading between two shores that are conceptually quite clear and distinct: namely, the one constituted by a Westphalian system of sovereign states that relate to one another as if they were in a state of nature, only sporadically interrupted by alliances and pacts entered voluntarily and always rescindable, and the opposite shore constituted by a hypothetical cosmopolis where the different parts of the globe, be they traditional nation-states or postnational entities of
INTRODUCTION: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Fulton Rachel
Abstract: Some of the most enduring questions inspiring the modern study of medieval European cultures have concerned the relationship between person and community. How did medieval people relate to their communities, and what shaped or determined the nature of this relationship at certain moments and in particular places? To what extent can the self in the Middle Ages be understood as an autonomous individual or subject independent of the pressures of community, institution, and locality—as a “modern” subject, as some might characterize this species of individualism? Conversely, did the pressures of collectivity and commonality in medieval culture most often disallow
4 THOMAS OF CANTIMPRÉ AND FEMALE SANCTITY from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Coakley John
Abstract: The new religious currents of the thirteenth century produced a remarkable literature of female sanctity. Hagiographers, especially in the Low Countries and Italy, wrote vivid accounts of the new female saints, not only of their asceticism and devotion but also of their powers. Those powers typically took the form of intercessions and revelations for the spiritual benefit of persons living and dead, consistently with what was supposed at the time to be a female predisposition toward visions and contact with the other world.¹ Among the most prolific of the hagiographers of such women was Thomas of Cantimpré (1200/01–ca. 1270),
5 THE CHANGING FORTUNES OF ANGELA OF FOLIGNO, DAUGHTER, MOTHER, AND WIFE from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Mooney Catherine M.
Abstract: Angela of Foligno as daughter, mother, and wife has a chameleonlike character, to judge by the opinions of her many editors and commentators. She is variously adulterous spouse or mistreated wife, tender or detached mother, daughter overly devoted to her mother or one eager to break free. These multiple representations of Angela are striking because each is based on evidence from a single source, known as the
Liber.⁵ The text lavishly describes Angela’s interior mystical journey along a path of penitence, poverty, and suffering, yet is virtually bereft of the sort of biographical details required to reconstruct her family life.
12 UNDERSTANDING CONTAGION: from:
History in the Comic Mode
Author(s) Kramer Susan R.
Abstract: At the end of the twelfth century the Paris master and theologian Peter the Chanter devoted a chapter of his handbook on ethics to the contaminating effects of sin. Discussing the impact of contact with sinners, Peter raises the specter of collective guilt and damnation by recalling the erring Israeli tribes, who had dared to build an altar in honor of a pagan god, with a warning from the
Book of Joshua: “Because you erected an altar against God’s great and sacred word, tomorrow his anger will rage against all the people.” Peter’s own more prosaic words show that the
Book Title: The End of Cinema?-A Medium in Crisis in the Digital Age
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): BARNARD TIMOTHY
Abstract: The authors begin with an overview of the extreme positions held by opposing camps in the debate over cinema: the "digitalphobes" who lament the implosion of cinema and the "digitalphiles" who celebrate its new, vital incarnation. Throughout, they remind readers that cinema has never been a static medium but a series of processes and transformations powering a dynamic art. From their perspective, the digital revolution is the eighth major crisis in the history of motion pictures, with more disruptions to come. Brokering a peace among all sides, Gaudreault and Marion emphasize the cultural practice of cinema over rigid claims on its identity, moving toward a common conception of cinema to better understand where it is headed next.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gaud17356
Chapter One Cinema Is Not What It Used to Be from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: Some people see the crisis cinema finds itself in the midst of today as a mild foreshadowing of its death, visible on the horizon. The various heralds of the “death” of cinema do not generally believe in its true death, in any real cessation of its vital activity. In the context of the digital turn, the “death” foretold is indicative, rather, of the medium’s decline within the great chorus of media and also of the end of a situation in which cinema exercised an across-the-board hegemony. This is what is in the process of dying, not the medium itself. What
Chapter Four From Shooting to Filming: from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: We know that for Roland Barthes, as the first epigraph to this chapter demonstrates, the movie theater was a special, unchanging place. Today, however, the movie theater, the jewel case of filmic attractions, appears threatened by the
digital revolutionthat is turning our traditions upside down and putting our habits topsy-turvy and that just a short time ago precipitated a crisis. Yet the movie theater and celluloid, let us repeat, are the two major principles on which most definitions of cinema bequeathed to us by the twentieth century are based. For the champions of the cinephile tradition, it is hard
Chapter Six New Variants of the Moving Image from:
The End of Cinema?
Abstract: When it comes to cinema, things were once simpler than they are today. There is no need to belabor the fact that since sounds and images became relatively dematerialized and transformed into
cathodeornumericalsignals, the paradigm that we call the “classical model of cinematic proceedings” has been smashed to bits. Nor is there any need to belabor the fact that thecommercialrelation between theordinary film viewerand cinema is no longer what it was. Things are not as simple as they were before, starting with the fact that buying a ticket to a movie theater is
Book Title: Progress and Values in the Humanities-Comparing Culture and Science
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Gay Volney
Abstract: Gathering examples from literature, art, film, philosophy, religion, science, and psychoanalysis, Gay builds a new justification for the humanities. By revealing the unseen and making abstract ideas tangible, the arts create meaningful wholes, which itself is a form of progress.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/gay-14790
6. SEARCHING FOR ESSENCES: from:
Progress and Values in the Humanities
Abstract: Sigmund Freud, still the most cited person in psychology, began as a scientist looking intensely at the nervous system. The need to earn a living to support his family, and perhaps Viennese anti-Semitism, drove him out of the research university and into private medical practice. There, treating neurotic patients, he developed the discipline that was to become psychoanalysis. In doing so, Freud moved from the study of a natural object, the nervous system organized like all natural objects into hierarchies, to the study of the brain and the mind, the latter a natural object and a cultural object. To the
FLAGS OF THEIR from:
Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) ANDERSEN MARTIN EDWIN
Abstract: Ira Hayes, a Pima Indian from the hardscrabble Gila River reservation in Arizona, was a central character in
Flags of Our Fathers. Memorably portrayed by a Canadian-born member of the Ojibwa Indian Nation, Adam Beach, Hayes played a principal part both in the second – posed – raising of ‘Old Glory’ on the equally hardscrabble island of Iwo Jima, and in its aftermath. A second-class citizen in the land of his forefathers, Hayes thus participated as a main protagonist in an epochal event, one that spawned a national icon ‘owned and operated by various interests for particular cultural experiences …
CARE OR GLORY? from:
Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) GJELSVIK ANNE
Abstract: The state of war suspends morality; it divests the eternal institutions and obligations of their eternity and rescinds ad interim the unconditional imperatives. In advance its shadow falls over the actions of men. War is not only one of the ordeals – the greatest – of which morality lives; it renders morality derisory. (Levinas 1961: 21)
BANZAI! from:
Eastwood's Iwo Jima
Author(s) RASMUSSEN MIKKEL VEDBY
Abstract: The Allied forces called it ‘
banzai attacks’ when Japanese soldiers charged their positions with the cry ‘Long live the Emperor’. A frontal assault on the firepower of US Marines was little more than a well-ordered mass suicide; and exactly that element of the Pacific War gained a new meaning in the opening decade of the twenty-first century when the West again faced an enemy more concerned with death than with victory. In Letters from Iwo Jima (2006) director Clint Eastwood tells the story of the Japanese soldiers fighting Americans (the Americans’ story is told in Flags of Our Fathers, 2006),
Book Title: Broken Tablets-Levinas, Derrida, and the Literary Afterlife of Religion
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HAMMERSCHLAG SARAH
Abstract: Over a span of thirty years, twentieth-century French philosophers Emmanuel Levinas and Jacques Derrida held a conversation across texts. Sharing a Jewish heritage and a background in phenomenology, both came to situate their work at the margins of philosophy, articulating this placement through religion and literature. Chronicling the interactions between these thinkers, Sarah Hammerschlag argues that the stakes in their respective positions were more than philosophical. They were also political. Levinas's investments were born out in his writings on Judaism and ultimately in an evolving conviction that the young state of Israel held the best possibility for achieving such an ideal. For Derrida, the Jewish question was literary. The stakes of Jewish survival could only be approached through reflections on modern literature's religious legacy, a line of thinking that provided him the means to reconceive democracy. Hammerschlag's reexamination of Derrida and Levinas's textual exchange not only produces a new account of this friendship but also has significant ramifications for debates within Continental philosophy, the study of religion, and political theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hamm17058
3 BETWEEN THE JEW AND WRITING from:
Broken Tablets
Abstract: However we read the relationship between Derrida and Levinas, the lasting impact of Derrida’s first encounter with Levinas’s work is hard to dispute. Even in his final years, Derrida treated it as one of his life’s decisive turning points. In a letter written to Paul Ricoeur in January of 1996, less than two weeks after Emmanuel Levinas’s death, Derrida recalled its importance by reminding Ricoeur that it was he who first introduced Derrida to the thought of the Lithuanian phenomenologist.¹ It was 1961 or 1962, Derrida recalled, and they were walking in Ricoeur’s garden.
Totality and Infinityhad just been
2 FROM ODYSSEUS’S TEARS TO AUGUSTINE’S MEDITATIONS from:
Regimes of Historicity
Abstract: Anyone transported directly from the Pacific to the Aegean, from the world of royal kingship to the “world of Odysseus,” moving simultaneously through space and back in time, would have no difficulty recognizing in the Homeric hero certain characteristics of the heroic regime of history. But it would be a different type of heroic regime, one incarnated by Achilles and Odysseus, as Vico describes them. Anyway, I do not intend to compare Thakombau or Hone Heke with Agamemnon or Nestor, and list similarities and differences, but rather focus on one figure in particular, Odysseus. He who, to quote the Russian
Book Title: Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction-Environment and Affect
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): HOUSER HEATHER
Abstract: The 1970s brought a new understanding of the biological and intellectual impact of environmental crises on human beings, and as efforts to prevent ecological and human degradation aligned, a new literature of sickness emerged. "Ecosickness fiction" imaginatively rethinks the link between ecological and bodily endangerment and uses affect and the sick body to bring readers to environmental consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/hous16514
2 AIDS Memoirs Out of the City: from:
Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: If the 1970s seemed to confirm a narrative of biomedical progress due to an explosion of vaccines and novel procedures like in vitro fertilization, the next decade brought one of biomedicine’s most formidable obstacles. The first cases of HIV/AIDS were diagnosed in 1981, and their intractability shook the confidence of epidemiologists and pharmaceutical researchers. Technoscience could not invent the tools to curb, much less eradicate, this emerging infectious disease in time to prevent massive loss of life. Undaunted, countless scientists attempted to tackle all dimensions of HIV/AIDS, from its pathology and epidemiology to treatment and public health policy. One of
Conclusion: from:
Ecosickness in Contemporary U.S. Fiction
Abstract: My days start like those of many news-hungry “internauts,” with a peek at the headlines that Google Reader aggregates. There’s no front page here. Google collects, and I select. Do I first unlock the folders that hold stories of international climate aid, environmental policy analysis, and the latest medical breakthroughs and warnings? Or do I scan the items under “culture”: book reviews and miscellany from
TheMillions.com, essays fromLos Angeles Review of Books, and interviews fromThe Believer? The banality of this ordinary habit is deceptive. Seemingly about gaining quick information about the day’s events, it in fact unleashes a
Book Title: The Specter of Democracy-What Marx and Marxists Haven't Understood and Why
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Howard Dick
Abstract: Howard uses a critical rereading of Marx as a theorist of democracy to offer his audience a new way to think about this political ideal. He argues that it is democracy, rather than Marxism, that is radical and revolutionary, and that Marx could have seen this but did not. In Part I, Howard explores the attraction Marxism held for intellectuals, particularly French intellectuals, and he demonstrates how the critique of totalitarianism from a Marxist viewpoint allowed these intellectuals to see the radical nature of democracy. Part II examines two hundred years of democratic political life -- comparing America's experience as a democracy to that of France. Part III offers a rethinking of Marx's contribution to democratic politics. Howard concludes that Marx was attempting a "philosophy by other means," and that paradoxically, just because he was such an astute philosopher, Marx was unable to see the radical political implications of his own analyses. The philosophically justified "revolution" turns out to be the basis of an anti-politics whose end was foreshadowed by the fall of European communism in 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/howa12484
CHAPTER 2 Can French Intellectuals Escape Marxism? from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Although the title of this chapter poses a question, and its analysis will be descriptive, the conclusion is prescriptive. I will offer an argument that explains historically, sociologically, and philosophically the attraction of Marxism in France, the intellectual options that choice entails for those whom I broadly term “communist” (following Marx’s own description in
The Communist Manifesto), and the strength and weaknesses of their position.¹ Finally, I will point to some indices of the emergence of another intellectual style, one that I find more attractive and have labeled elsewhere a “politics of judgment,”² to which I will return later in
CHAPTER 3 The Frankfurt School and the Transformation of Critical Theory into Cultural Theory from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: The appeal of the Frankfurt School’s critical theory to a young leftist of the late 1960 s was based on a paradox expressed in the practice of both critical theory and the leftist. On the one hand, modern capitalist society seemed able to co-opt protest by integrating it into the dynamics of competitive business, creating a demand for the newest, most advanced, and most risqué products (a trend that continues today as cultural rebellion has became the motor of consumer society). On the other hand, that society was characterized by a spirit of revolt against its “one-dimensional” reduction of all
CHAPTER 11 Reading U.S. History as Political from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Historians correctly warn their political scientist friends against the danger of an overly present-centered reading of the stakes of politics. For example, the issues roiling French politics must be understood within the symbolic framework inaugurated by the rupture begun in 1789. Seemingly unrelated actions, whose motivation seems to depend only on simple self-interest, may acquire a meaning that their authors have not consciously intended. Similarly, German politics is framed by the symbolic context created by both Frederick the Great’s early legal codification of the Allgemeines Landgesetz and by the failure of the 1848 revolution to institute a liberal parliamentary regime
CHAPTER 12 Fundamentalism and the American Exception from:
The Specter of Democracy
Abstract: Despite the constitutional separation of church and state—which Jefferson considered his proudest achievement—religion has always played a role in American political life. And it has not always been the organized religious congregations that have been leaders in crossing the line that the Constitution tries to establish. Religion touches deeper; it affects the language through which people express themselves as well as their vision of the nation to which they belong. What is new in the last two decades is the rise of a religious right that has become an active voting bloc bringing into politics social and cultural
Book Title: Radical Cosmopolitics-The Ethics and Politics of Democratic Universalism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Ingram James D.
Abstract: In morality as in politics, theorists have generally focused first on discovering universal values and second on their implementation. Ingram argues that only by prioritizing the development and articulation of universal values through political action in the fight for freedom and equality can theorists do justice to these efforts and cosmopolitanism's universal vocation. Only by proceeding from the local to the global, from the bottom up rather than from the top down, on the basis of political practice rather than moral ideals, can we salvage moral and political universalism. In this book, Ingram provides the clearest, most systematic account yet of this schematic reversal and its radical possibilities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/ingr16110
CHAPTER ONE Universalism in History from:
Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: Cosmopolitanism is an attempt to realize the imperative of universalism—to grasp the human world as one and ourselves as, to at least some extent, connected to, and therefore at least to some degree responsible for, all of it.¹ Cosmopolitics, as I will use the term, is the attempt to act politically in the world on the basis of this understanding. Our present interest in cosmopolitanism derives from the renaissance it enjoyed in the 1990s, when, in a way only partially anticipated in the high Enlightenment or after the Second World War, it struck many observers as imperative to “re-imagine
CHAPTER TWO Cosmopolitanism in Ethics: from:
Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: At its classical origins, we saw in the last chapter, cosmopolitanism was first of all matter of consciousness and conviction. Even today, it belongs first and foremost to the field of ethics, especially if we take the latter in its etymological sense. As among the eighteenth-century
philosophes, the most common use of the term cosmopolitan today is to describe how people live (or aspire to live)—their ethos, culture, worldview, or way of life. The rise of cosmopolitanism in this sense was seized on in the 1990s as one of the most striking facts about the contemporary world, and the
CHAPTER THREE Cosmopolitanism in Politics: from:
Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: Cosmopolitanism, I have claimed, is, first of all, a moral-ethical matter—the idea that every person, wherever they live and whatever citizen ship they hold (or do not hold), commands our respect and moral concern. This imperative can be formulated in various ways, some of which I explored in the last chapter: that we should recognize the humanity of others as deserving of fully human lives, as having equal moral standing, or as if they had equal say in the rules and institutions that govern our interaction. All these formulations have the effect of expanding the scope of our moral
CHAPTER FOUR Rethinking Ethical Cosmopolitanism: from:
Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: To this point my discussion has been mainly negative, focusing on various ways in which the cosmopolitan commitment to egalitarian universalism goes astray. My survey of the history of Western cosmopolitanisms in chapter 1 showed how they have always reflected the conditions of their emergence, mirroring or reproducing the social, cultural, ideological, and political contexts from and against which they arose. In chapter 2 I depicted moral-ethical cosmopolitanisms as afflicted by a double bind. On the one hand, like Rawls’s theory of justice, they tend to lose their critical force by abstracting from existing social-political conditions and cultural values; yet,
Conclusion from:
Radical Cosmopolitics
Abstract: In this book I have argued that the dominant approach to cosmopolitanism in contemporary political philosophy is undermined by what could be described as a lack of realism. That approach proceeds as though, by developing the best moral arguments and normative visions, it will be able to persuade people—presumably those in a position to change things—to bring about a better world. This practical presupposition is seldom defended explicitly; rather, it is taken to be self-evident—simply what one does when one does political philosophy. Occasionally, it is true, cosmopolitan theorists ask whether the ends or schemes they develop
INTRODUCTION: from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: Today’s world is full of paradoxes, many of which could be summarized by the idea that it is a world belonging to everyone and to no one. There are many issues that are everyone’s (they affect all of us and demand coordinated actions), but at the same time, no one can or wants to be in charge of them (either there is no competent authority or no one shoulders the responsibility). What is the difference between something held in common and something that is ungovernable, between shared responsibility and generalized irresponsibility? How do we distinguish that which belongs to everyone
2 HUMANITY THREATENED from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: As Ulrich Beck says, unlike other previous civilizations, we cannot attribute everything that threatens us to external causes; societies are in conflict with themselves, with the production of that which they do not desire. Explaining this characteristic contrasts with our common sense, which tends to establish net causalities, distinguishes subjects from objects, thinks in terms of hierarchy, and explains the idea of defense in terms of spatial protection. To identify and understand the nature of threats in a world that belongs to everyone and to no one, we have no choice but to make a “metaphorological” effort. I am going
3 GLOBAL FEAR from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: When you want to understand a society, it is more useful to examine its fears than its desires. We could say: Tell me whom you are afraid of and I will tell you who you are. We can now register a fear with new characteristics in the fear taxonomy, and we could call it global fear, in other words, fear of the consequences of the process of globalization. It is a question of risks that have to be governed and from which we have the right to be protected. At the same time, unreasonable reactions to some of the concerns
7 CLIMATIC JUSTICE from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: The atmosphere is one of humanity’s common goods, and it carries a central value for life and the survival of human beings on planet Earth. The complex causes of climate change, the diverse impacts and different responsibilities of a variety of agents, the determination of what can be demanded of each individual agent place us squarely in the camp of what we could call “complex justice.” It cannot be resolved with allocations according to the rules of the market but requires specific political agreements. Among the institutions that share some type of responsibility in the fight against climate change and
8 A POLITICS OF HUMANITY from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: Reality has been
communistfor a few years now. The Cold War was won by capitalism, but current events are imposing problems that place care for thecommunalrather than care for the individual at the center of our concerns. Globalization is often associated with privatization (with economic liberalization or the movement of certain goods and services toward the marketplace), but it can also be understood as an increase in what is public, the fact that societies are more interdependent. The political agenda is now full of common problems, of universal public goods. I am not talking about a battle
EPILOGUE: from:
Governance in the New Global Disorder
Abstract: In a world like ours that belongs to everyone and to no one, a world of shared threats and common goods, where ownership should be reexamined, and demands for cooperation are stronger and stronger, a world that opens and protects itself, in which we are all equally exposed and which lacks outskirts, wrapped in interdependence and contagions, the most difficult and at the same time most demanding questions are: Who are we? How should we who live in this common world conceive of ourselves and how should we act? Making the distinction between us and them is crucial to determining
Book Title: Harmattan-A Philosophical Fiction
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): JACKSON MICHAEL
Abstract: Evoking the hot, dust-filled Harmattan winds that blow from the Sahara to the Gulf of Guinea, this book creatively explores what it means to be buffeted by the unforeseen and the unknown. Celebrating the life-giving potential of people, places, and powers that lie beyond our established worlds,
Harmattanconnects existential vitality to the act of resisting prescribed customs and questioning received notions of truth. At the book's heart is the fictional story of Tom Lannon, a graduate student from Cambridge University, who remains ambivalent about pursuing a conventional life. After traveling to Sierra Leone in the aftermath of its devastating civil war, Tom meets a writer who helps him explore the possibilities of renewal. Illustrating the fact that certain aspects of human existence are common to all people regardless of culture and history,Harmattanremakes the distinction between home and world and the relationship between knowledge and life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/jack17234
Part One Limitrophes from:
Harmattan
Abstract: For many years I was convinced that a clear line should be drawn between documentation and invention, particularly in ethnographic writing, where one’s first obligation is to do justice to the experience of those who welcomed or tolerated one’s presence in their communities. It is all very well borrowing narrative conventions, figurative language, and montage from fiction, poetry, and cinema in order to give life to a text and counteract the deadening effects of academic jargon and abstraction—something I had done in several ethnographic books written for a general rather than specifically academic readership.¹ But such experimentation, I believed,
2 German Existentialism and the Persistence of Metaphysics: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Gordon Peter E.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger was appointed to the chair in philosophy at Freiburg University in 1928 and delivered “What Is Metaphysics?” (his inaugural address) before the assembled faculty, in the main auditorium on Wednesday, July 24, 1929.¹ At once dense and abstract, the lecture was and will surely remain one of the truly classic statements in the canon of European existentialism. Grappling with its themes is an immense challenge, but the task is made all the more difficult thanks to Heidegger’s scrupulous avoidance of any concrete references to his philosophical contemporaries, let alone any explicit appeal to the various sources that inspired
4 Punching Through the Pasteboard Masks: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Cotkin George
Abstract: Norman Mailer’s essay “The White Negro” (1957) assaults its readers with existentially tinged racial fantasies of violence and liberation. In the piece, Mailer sought to celebrate a new figure—“the American existentialist,” otherwise referred to as “the hipster.” Pursuing his version of existential man, Mailer followed along a trail that Sartre had already blazed. Mailer intended by his bold embrace of criminal acts and a revolutionary cultural style to trump Sartre. Sartre had talked about the necessity of the novelist entering into a discourse with the era. Mailer proclaimed his desire to bring about “a revolution in the consciousness of
8 Jewish Co-Existentialism: from:
Situating Existentialism
Author(s) Flohr Paul Mendes-
Abstract: A distinctive Jewish school of existentialism is most widely associated with Martin Buber (1878–1965) and his philosophy of dialogue. Introduced in 1923 with the original German publication of
I and Thou (Ich und Du), his concept of dialogue or the I–Thou relation has exercised a seminal influence extending far beyond Jewish philosophical circles. Written with a nigh-musical cadence, evocative inflections, and aphoristic formulations, this relatively thin volume has with some justification been characterized as a philosophical poem. Indeed, Buber explicitly rejected the traditional form of philosophical discourse. He regarded the function of philosophical thinking to be that of
Book Title: Reimagining the Sacred-Richard Kearney Debates God with James Wood, Catherine Keller, Charles Taylor, Julia Kristeva, Gianni Vattimo, Simon Critchley, Jean-Luc Marion, John Caputo, David Tracey, Jens Zimmermann, and Merold Westphal
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Zimmermann Jens
Abstract: Richard Kearney explores these questions with a host of philosophers known for their inclusive, forward-thinking work on the intersection of secularism, politics, and religion. An interreligious dialogue that refuses to paper over religious difference, these conversations locate the sacred within secular society and affirm a positive role for religion in human reflection and action. Drawing on his own philosophical formulations, literary analysis, and personal interreligious experiences, Kearney develops through these engagements a basic gesture of hospitality for approaching the question of God. His work facilitates a fresh encounter with our best-known voices in continental philosophy and their views on issues of importance to all spiritually minded individuals and skeptics: how to reconcile God's goodness with human evil, how to believe in both God and natural science, how to talk about God without indulging in fundamentalist rhetoric, and how to balance God's sovereignty with God's love.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/kear16102
Introduction from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) ZIMMERMANN JENS
Abstract: Richard Kearney is one of the most creative and insightful voices of the so-called theological turn in continental philosophy. His imaginative and constructive application of hermeneutic philosophy to postmodern debates about religion and culture characterizes Kearney’s mature work, contained in the trilogy of publications titled Philosophy at the Limit: On Stories,
The God Who May Be, andStrangers, Gods and Monsters. With these works, Kearney established himself as one of the greatest contemporary philosophical mediators of traditional concepts that define our humanity, such as narrative identity, practical wisdom, hospitality, and perceptions of God. Unlike many postmodern treatments of religion that
2 Imagination, Anatheism, and the Sacred from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Wood James
Abstract: James Wood is a well-known English literary critic, essayist, and novelist. His career as an increasingly influential writer includes positions as the
Guardian’s chief literary critic (1991– 1994), senior editor of theNew Republic, staff writer at theNew Yorker, and professor at Harvard University. After publishing several volumes of essays, Wood has also written a theological novel,The Book Against God(2004). Not unlike his novel’s main character, who struggles with his religious background, Wood, an atheist convert from evangelicalism, finds in literature a middle ground between belief and unbelief. Good literature, he argues inThe Broken Estate, not
4 Transcendent Humanism in a Secular Age from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Taylor Charles
Abstract: The Canadian philosopher Charles Taylor, one of the finest intellectual commentators on Western culture and religion, has written widely on political philosophy, theories of social science, and the history of philosophy. He is best known for his narrative account of modernity’s cultural origins and potential futures in
Sources of the Self: The Making of Modern Identity(1989), and, most recently,A Secular Age(2007). Especially in the last book, Taylor has shown that modernity’s rejection of religion is itself based on an assumed logic of history, or what he calls a “subtraction narrative”—the story that human progress in any
9 Anatheism and Radical Hermeneutics from:
Reimagining the Sacred
Author(s) Caputo John
Abstract: John Caputo is an American philosopher of religion with particular expertise in phenomenology, hermeneutics, and deconstruction. He is widely known for developing Derrida’s deconstruction into “radical hermeneutics,” a philosophy that subverts any essentialist claims and resists arresting the play of interpretation.¹ This radical hermeneutics is closely aligned with Caputo’s interest in theopoetics, a term that is variously defined by practitioners but that entails the notion that both God and life are best described poetically rather than rationalistically. Theopoetics, at least in Caputo’s radical hermeneutics, and also in Kearney’s anatheism, has connotations of
poiein, of making or remaking God through our
Book Title: Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon-A History of the Internationalization of Communal Conflict
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Khalaf Samir
Abstract: Lebanon's fragmented political culture is a byproduct of two general features. First, it reflects the traditional forces and political conflicts caused by striking differences in religious beliefs and communal and sectarian loyalties that continue to split the society and reinforce its factional character. Second, and superimposed on these, are new forms of socioeconomic and cultural stress caused by Lebanon's role in the continuing international conflicts in the region.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/khal12476
1 On Proxy Wars and Surrogate Victims from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: The social and political history of Lebanon—despite occasional manifestations of consensus, balance and harmony—has always been characterized by successive outbursts of civil strife and political violence. The brutality and duration of almost two decades of senseless bloodletting might have obscured some of the earlier episodes. Consequently, observers are often unaware that much of Lebanon’s history is essentially a history of intermittent violence. Dramatic episodes such as the peasant uprisings of 1820, 1840, and 1857 and the repeated outbreaks of sectarian hostilities in 1841, 1845, 1860, 1958, and the protracted civil war of 1975–92, reveal, if anything, the
2 The Radicalization of Communal Loyalties from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: A defining element in Lebanon’s checkered sociopolitical history, one that has had substantive implications for the character and magnitude of collective strife, is the survival and reassertion of communal solidarities. In fact, the three overarching and persisting features—(1) foreign intervention, (2) the reawakening of primordial identities, and (3) the escalation of protracted violence—are all intimately related. This is, after all, what informs the major thrust of this study. We will, in subsequent chapters, identify and account for the various forms foreign intervention has assumed. More explicitly, an effort will be made to explore how the unresolved regional and
4 Peasants, Commoners and Clerics: from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: There has been reawakened interest in the forms that peasant resistance are likely to assume, particularly in historical situations where open defiance is either impossible or entails considerable hazards (Scott 1985; Colburn 1989). Under such circumstances, it is argued, peasant resistance is prone to remain in the “hidden realm of political conflict.” Hence, it is less likely to take the form of open collective acts of violence such as riots, rebellion, sedition, or revolutionary movements. Since peasant uprisings, anyway, are “few and far in between,” it is more meaningful, Scott and Colburn tell us, to shift analysis to the more
6 Lebanon’s Golden/Gilded Age: from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: The brief interlude between the relatively benign civil war of 1958 and the protracted cruelties of 1975 stands out as a perplexing often anomalous epoch in Lebanon’s eventful political history. It is a period marked by sustained political stability, economic prosperity, and swift societal transformations, the closest the country ever got to a “golden age” with all the outward manifestations of stupendous vitality, exuberance, and rising expectations. But these were also times of growing disparities, cleavages, neglect, portends perhaps of a more “gilded age” of misdirected and uneven growth, boisterous political culture, conspicuous consumption, and the trappings of frivolous life-style
7 From Playground to Battleground: from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: Throughout its checkered history, Lebanon’s enigmatic, Janus-like character has never ceased to baffle. It has been a source of bewilderment, as we have seen, to both its detractors and admirers. A few of those struck by its perplexities have been candid enough to caution against facile analysis and hasty inferences. Two veteran observers, separated by more than two decades of eventful history, advance almost the same sobering caveats. Writing in 1963, to account for the “seeming vitality and durability of the country’s confessional democracy,” J. C. Hurewitz prefaces his essay by stating that Lebanon by then was already an “oddity,
8 Scares and Scars of War from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: For almost two decades, Lebanon was besieged and beleaguered by every possible form of brutality and collective terror known to human history: from the cruelties of factional and religious bigotry to the massive devastations wrought by private militias and state-sponsored armies. They have all generated an endless carnage of innocent victims and an immeasurable toll in human suffering. Even by the most moderate of estimates, the magnitude of such damage to human life and property is staggering. About 170,000 people have perished; twice as many were wounded or disabled; close to two thirds of the population experienced some from of
9 From Shakib Efendi to Ta’if from:
Civil and Uncivil Violence in Lebanon
Abstract: This study is predicated on the overarching premise that much of the
displaced and protracted character of collective strife that has beleaguered Lebanon at various interludes could well be a reflection of two other constant features of its fractious political history; namely the radicalization of communal solidarities and the unsettling, often insidious, character of foreign intervention. By probing further into the nature of this interplay one, it is hoped, can better understand when, how and why social strife becomes more belligerent and assumes some of the menacing cruelties of uncivil violence.
Book Title: Narrating Evil-A Postmetaphysical Theory of Reflective Judgment
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Allen Amy
Abstract: Drawing on Immanuel Kant's and Hannah Arendt's ideas about reflective judgment, Lara argues that narrative plays a key role in helping societies acknowledge their pasts. Particular stories haunt our consciousness and lead to a kind of examination and dialogue that shape notions of morality. A powerful description of a crime can act as a filter, helping us to draw conclusions about what constitutes a moral wrong, and public debates over these narratives allow us to construct a more accurate picture of historical truth, leading to a better understanding of why such actions are possible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/lara14030
Introduction from:
Narrating Evil
Abstract: Why has evil become such a hot topic these days? Although there could be many reasons, it seems to me that the most important one—the most interesting—has to do with our growing concern with how this age-old problem has entered more and more into our consciousness. In other words, in spite of our failure to cope with human cruelty, we possess a clearer, more moral way to analyze what we call “atrocities.” Our last century was plagued by horrific actions of human cruelty; nevertheless, something about our understanding has been transformed. This book seeks to explore what has
CHAPTER 2 Storytelling: from:
Narrating Evil
Abstract: One of my previous books develops a narrative theory.¹ I would now like to focus on Arendt’s narrative perspective in order to show how she used narratives to understand evil. It is worth noting that Arendt believed storytelling provided her a better way to cope with crisis and with concrete problems than did the use of abstract and systematic theories of the political. Narratives provided her with an original method for political theory, which is why I wish to revisit some of her ideas on the subject.
CHAPTER 3 Reflective Judgment and the Moral Imagination from:
Narrating Evil
Abstract: Stories perform many functions for those who read them and those who write them. In this sense, we should first focus on what makes a story an important model for reflective judgment. I will argue that processes of aesthetic apprehension are created by the work of the productive imagination of some moral experiences. This makes stories important vehicles of reflective judgments. Through their written expression, moral stories have demonstrated that, in spite of many theorists’ skepticism, they capture the “ineffable” characteristics of evil actions.¹ In works of fiction as well as in historical stories about evil acts, the “ineffable” seems
CHAPTER 8 Death and the Maiden from:
Narrating Evil
Abstract: Throughout previous chapters, I have insisted on the idea that narratives—that is, stories about evil—presumably provide the best illustrations or descriptions of the problems of evil. I have not yet defined why this connection is conceptually so important. I would like to argue in this chapter that moral wrongdoing is best described in actions wherein the characters are revealed in the complexity of their interactions, which are crystallized in plots. I have argued before that moral wrongdoing is one of the basic conditions for understanding evil because the perpetrator of evil actions causes permanent damage—that is, moral
Book Title: The Disclosure of Politics-Struggles Over the Semantics of Secularization
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Lara María Pía
Abstract: For Lara, secularization means three things: the translation of religious semantics into politics; a transformation of religious notions into political ideas; and the reoccupation of a space left void by changing political actors that gives rise to new conceptions of political interaction. Conceptual innovation redefines politics as a horizontal relationship between governments and the governed and better enables societies (and individual political actors) to articulate meaning through action -- that is, through the emergence of new concepts. These actions, Lara proves, radically transform our understanding of politics and the role of political agents and are further enhanced by challenging the structural dependence of politics on religious phenomena.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/lara16280
Introduction from:
The Disclosure of Politics
Abstract: Recently, Charles Taylor, among others, has written about the different meanings that are attached to the concept of secularization.¹ It seems clear from his analysis that we have only just become aware of the difficulties and problems that the term
secularization suggests. The apparent separation of church and state and the ways we think about how religion and politics might interact are now open questions. Indeed, it is no longer unusual to see that political theorists from both the left and right are prepared to give up what we once took for granted, namely, the fact that, in modernity, religion
8 The Disclosure of Politics Revisited from:
The Disclosure of Politics
Abstract: All human action, all political and subjective agency, entails a conceptual framework within which actors make sense of their actions and projects. The concepts I have discussed in this book entailed the disclosure of a new way of thinking about politics during the eighteenth century, which transformed the way social agents saw themselves, their experiences, and their future.¹ This process allowed them to imagine concepts such as critique, emancipation, and the political role of civil society as part of negotiating the space between their expectations and their actual political experiences. After examining six different models of secularization, it is appropriate
TAIWAN UNDER JAPANESE COLONIAL RULE, 1895–1945: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) PING-HUI LIAO
Abstract: This volume represents a first attempt to discuss colonialism and modernity in East Asia from the perspective of subjects very different from those that continue to occupy the attention of postcolonial scholars—with the probable exceptions of Gayatri Spivak and of Prasenjit Duara, who have recently begun to map territories that did not attract European imperial forces.¹ For many reasons Taiwan should regularly be featured in comparative colonial and postcolonial studies, but, regrettably, it has managed only to catch the eye of social scientists, who have considered Taiwan alternately as a window on China, a cold war bastion of freedom
1 A PERSPECTIVE ON STUDIES OF TAIWANESE POLITICAL HISTORY: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) MASAHIRO WAKABAYASHI
Abstract: It is worth noting that prior to this, however, the Japanese colonial period received relatively little academic attention (Chang 1983:15–16). This was the result of both historical and political factors. Most historians of the subject have hurriedly explored merely the frequent shifts of political rulers and have come to the premature conclusion that Taiwanese
2 THE JAPANESE COLONIAL STATE AND ITS FORM OF KNOWLEDGE IN TAIWAN from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) JEN-TO YAO
Abstract: As alien rulers who hardly knew anything about Taiwan before they landed on the island at the end of the nineteenth century, the members of the Japanese colonial government inevitably encountered two fundamental difficulties, which can be encapsulated in the universal questions posed by Bruno Latour in another context: “how to be familiar with things, people and events which are distant,” and, in turn, “how to act at a distance on unfamiliar events, places, and people” (Latour 1987:220, 223). Latour’s answer to these questions is, of course, already well known: by appealing to “some mobile, stable and combinable means to
5 SHAPING ADMINISTRATION IN COLONIAL TAIWAN, 1895–1945 from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CAROLINE TS’AI HUI-YU
Abstract: This paper examines how the colonial administration was shaped in the specific context of Taiwan under Japanese rule. From the beginning of Japanese rule in Taiwan, the colonial government mapped, reworked, and created a series of organizations based on natural villages, and actively sought to integrate these colonial spaces, themselves structured and overlapping, into the hierarchy of the colonial administrative mechanism. The Japanese colonial bureaucracy imposed a discipline of order on Taiwan, and by the 1930s wartime concerns reshaped this order, thus turning Taiwan into not only a disciplined but also a disciplinary society.
6 THE STATE OF TAIWANESE CULTURE AND TAIWANESE NEW LITERATURE IN 1937: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) ISAO KAWAHARA
Abstract: The following four newspapers jointly announce that due to the current state of affairs we have decided to abolish the Chinese section. It has been over forty years since Japan took over Taiwan. In the light of the thoroughness of imperialization and the flourishing of cultural activities, we believe there is no hindrance to the complete abolition of the Chinese section. Beginning on April 1, the
Taiwan News, Tainan News, andTaiwan Daily Newswill drop their Chinese sections;Taiwan shinminpō台灣新民報 will cut
7 COLONIAL MODERNITY FOR AN ELITE TAIWANESE, LIM BO-SENG: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) TAKESHI KOMAGOME
Abstract: In the context of Taiwanese history it is important to analyze the concept of colonial modernity, understanding both the attraction and the oppression of modernity, without regarding it simply as evidence of historical progress. Like so many other fashionable terms, however, the term “colonial modernity” is ambiguous: its meaning depends on each writer. Before we proceed we must first make clear what is meant by the term here.
12 AN AUTHOR LISTENING TO VOICES FROM THE NETHERWORLD: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) CHIE TARUMI
Abstract: Lu Heruo 吕赫若¹ (1914–1950) is one of the Taiwanese authors who best represents prewar Taiwanese literature. In January 1935 Lu made his debut in the Japanese proletarian magazine
Bungaku hyōron文学评论 with “Gyūsha 牛車,” a tragedy set in colonial Taiwan and indicting modernization. Further, Lu enthusiastically helped lead the 1930s Taiwan New Literature movement as an influential writer and during the 1940s he was active as a singer in the Tōhō performance troop, which gained popular favor with their enterprising combination of Greater East Asian Co-Prosperity Sphere ideology and orientalism. When he returned to Taiwan, Lu played a leading
16 READING THE NUMBERS: from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) FIX DOUGLAS L.
Abstract: Contemporary and historical accounts provide various explanations for this unlawful activity. A leaflet distributed in September 1945 in mid-Taiwan (with the intent of curtailing this activity) stated:
17 THE NATURE OF MINZOKU TAIWAN AND THE CONTEXT IN WHICH IT WAS PUBLISHED from:
Taiwan Under Japanese Colonial Rule, 1895-1945
Author(s) MICHA WU
Abstract: Minzoku Taiwan民俗台湾, a journal in ethnology published during the war, has always enjoyed a positive response in both Taiwan and Japan. However, in July 1996, with the publication ofThe Fiction and Fact of “Greater East Asian Ethnology”『大東亞民俗學』の虛實, the Japanese literary critic Kawamura Minato 川村湊 contradicted this accepted opinion, generating controversy.
INTRODUCTION: from:
Prose of the World
Abstract: Just about two years before the December made famous by Virginia Woolf as the time of momentous change for “human character,”¹ her fellow Bloomsbury writer, Katherine Mansfield, wrote the following in her diary on December 21, 1908:
CHAPTER 4 Amit Chaudhuri and the Materiality of the Mundane from:
Prose of the World
Abstract: More than a quarter-century after its initial publication, Fredric Jameson’s controversial essay “Third World Literature in the Era of Multinational Capitalism” retains something of an unfortunate relevance to Anglophone fiction from India. The central claim in that essay—that all Third World cultures are characterized by a fusion of private and public lives and that this fusion ensures that all narratives (especially the novel) from such cultures are structured on the paradigm of the national allegory—still continues to resonate with an overarching trend of Indian English fiction. Ever since the publication of Salman Rushdie’s
Midnight’s Children, the novel many
1 Hegel, the Wound from:
The Highway of Despair
Abstract: Hegel did not describe his work as critique.¹ In the
Phenomenology of Spirit, he portrays his efforts not in terms of critical philosophy, which would have aligned him squarely with Kant, but as an attempt to unite the desire for knowledge with actual knowing.² What Hegel had in mind in this union of philosophy and science was not quite critique in the Kantian sense, but rather theconsummationof the love of knowledge (philosophy) with the historical and phenomenological experience of knowing (science).³ Hegel aimed to “complete” philosophy, not only by giving it a definitive reality in human history, but
2 Kierkegaard’s Diagnostics from:
The Highway of Despair
Abstract: The writings of Søren Kierkegaard present a notorious challenge to the reader in search of definitive answers to the questions they pose about despair, anxiety, and other “wounds of Spirit.” While Kierkegaard—under his own name or with his many pseudonyms—hoped to elucidate a Christian remedy to the seemingly intractable problem of modern despair, his reformulation of faith seems somewhat feeble in the face of it. Kierkegaard’s texts simply cannot be measured by the solutions he offers, which are consistently inadequate to the questions he raises. Some of his readers have looked to the upbuilding discourses (the “religious” writings
4 Georges Bataille: from:
The Highway of Despair
Abstract: If chance is, for Bataille, the richest of notions, this is for the havoc it wreaks on human projects, on being
as project, and on any philosophical system that posits the pursuit of a project as the highest expression of freedom. Even those thinkers from whom Bataille took philosophical nourishment—Hegel, Marx, and Nietzsche, to name the most important—failed to exploit the richness of chance to the extent that they pinned their fortunes to projects. Spirit, Communism, Will to Power—each of them variations on a more fundamental theme, of directing feverish passion toward specific and often practical ends,
Book Title: Contemporary Romanian Cinema-The History of an Unexpected Miracle
Publisher: Wallflower Press
Author(s): NASTA DOMINIQUE
Abstract: Over the last decade, audiences worldwide have become familiar with highly acclaimed films from the Romanian New Wave such as
4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days(2007),The Death of Mr. Lazarescu(2005), and12:08 East of Bucharest(2006). However, the hundred or so years of Romanian cinema leading to these accomplishments have been largely overlooked. This book is the first to provide in-depth analyses of essential works ranging from the silent period to contemporary productions. In addition to relevant information on historical and cultural factors influencing contemporary Romanian cinema, this volume covers the careers of daring filmmakers who approached various genres despite fifty years of Communist censorship. An important chapter is dedicated to Lucian Pintilie, whose seminal work,Reconstruction(1969), strongly inspired Romania's 21st-century innovative output. The book's second half closely examines both the 'minimalist' trend (Cristian Mungiu, Cristi Puiu, Corneliu Porumboiu, Radu Muntean) and the younger, but no less inspired, directors who have chosen to go beyond the 1989 revolution paradigm by dealing with the complexities of contemporary Romania.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/nast16744
CHAPTER 1 Difficult Beginnings from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Romaniaʹs history is related to its frontiers. Situated at the extreme frontier line of the Roman Empire, Romania borders the Byzantine Empire, close to the Ottoman invasion line, and finally acts as a frontier line
CHAPTER 2 Bright Intervals: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: For Dina Iordanova, the 1956–1968 period between two revolutions (in Hungary and Prague) coincides with Khrushchevʹs Thaw in Russia and corresponds to a process of liberalisation in terms of themes and style. The transition that ultimately led to the emergence of the 1968 Prague Spring, but was suppressed the same year by the invasion of Warsaw Pact forces, only occurred on a minor scale in Romanian cinema. The recognised and internationally acclaimed New Waves were Polish and Czechoslovak. Important isolated auteurs came from the Soviet Union, Yugoslavia, Bulgaria, Hungary and Romania (Iordanova 2003: 9).
CHAPTER 3 Romanian Cinema in the 1970s: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: The end of the Romanian Thaw – which lasted less than a decade – was characterised by two events. On the one hand it was specified in the 10
thParty Congress Report in August 1969 that the new society would be superior to capitalist societies from all perspectives, overtly criticising former established contacts with the Western world. On the other, after a trip to China and North Korea in May 1971, Ceaușescu was highly tempted to introduce methods of indoctrination used by Maoʹs Cultural Revolution. The politicised media thus initiated the publication of the famous July 1971 Theses. Liberalisation movements
CHAPTER 5 Mircea Daneliuc: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Mircea Daneliuc unquestionably stands as the most important Romanian director of the 1980s, while also proving relatively prolific and thought-provoking during the immediate post-Communist period (five films from 1991 to 1995). As was the case with other auteurs, his work has only been partially shown to non-domestic audiences and still needs to be reconsidered for a number of reasons. The first and most important one relates to the fact that despite enormous difficulties, Daneliucʹs films managed to escape Communist censorship, while bringing to the fore extremely authentic characters and situations, thus constituting an invaluable picture of Romanian society. The second
CHAPTER 7 Through a Glass, Darkly: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Part of the first generation of film school graduates from the late 1950s for whom cinephilia was a common practice, Lucian Pintilie made his debut as an assistant to veteran director Victor Iliu,² was briefly employed by Romanian national television and directed two important feature films in the late 1960s,
CHAPTER 8 The Films of Nae Caranfil: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: The filmmakers of the Romanian New Wave have acknowledged its huge debt to Pintilie, the only internationally acclaimed Romanian director who continued his oeuvre after a long exile into the post-Communist era, while maintaining the same high artistic standards. This debt is evident, first, in the young filmmakersʹ quite generalised, albeit economically conditioned, refusal to produce big-scale spectacular movies: action films unfolding in exotic locales studded with national and/or international stars and lots of special effects, ideally backed by a fashionable score, with lots of easily recognisable musical hits. It is evident second, and somewhat implicitly, in their artistic credo:
CHAPTER 11 The 4, 3, 2 Paradigm: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Cristian Mungiuʹs
4 Luni, 3 săptămâni si 2 zile(4 Months, 3 Weeks and 2 Days, 2007), the first Romanian Palme dʹOr winner, certainly confirmed the triumph of the minimalist model in terms of acting, cinematography, editing and highly original soundscapes. It also highlighted one of the most controversial subjects of the Ceauşescu regime, illegal abortion and its tragic consequences on numberless female destinies.
CHAPTER 12 Making Films for Wider Audiences: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Meanwhile, within the Romanian film industry, established auteurs previously discussed in more or less detail such as Dan Pița, Mircea Daneliuc, Mircea Mureşan, Dinu Tănase and Nicolae Mărgineanu continued to be active, but unfortunately did not always manage to keep the same high artistic standards as
CHAPTER 13 Romanian Exilic and Diasporic Cinema: from:
Contemporary Romanian Cinema
Abstract: Quite a few Romanian
émigréactors, directors, cinematographers and producers from the first decades of the twentieth century have left a national imprint on their subsequent careers abroad or decided to return home from their exile for a short or extended period of time. Renowned early cinema performers such as Elvira Popescu (a.k.a. Popesco) and Alexandru Mihalescu (a.k.a. Mihalesco) had some domestic film and theatre experiences before embarking on successful French careers. Other contemporaries born in Romania and having chosen France or Germany as their second homeland, such as innovativeKammerspielactor and director active in the early 1920s Lupu
INTRODUCTION: from:
The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: Genocide is not a fact because it is
4. TESTIMONY: from:
The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: WE HAVE SEEN THE HISTORICAL SENSITIVITY CARLO GINZBURG demonstrated vis-à-vis the transformation that has occurred in the status of testimony over the course of the twentieth century. Of course, his denegating position does not motivate him to name it or to seek after its characteristics. There is, after all, a largely public aspect to this transformation. The recent book written by Annette Wieviorka,
The Era of the Witness, traces the different stages through which the testimonies of Nazi camps survivors have had to go before being largely received and transformed into an object of reflection and a subject of study:
CONCLUSION: from:
The Historiographic Perversion
Abstract: As long as I remember myself, in fact, I have felt shame. The confession of shame has in itself something irrefutable. You can refute my arguments. You could cast doubt on
AGAINST HISTORY from:
The Historiographic Perversion
Author(s) ANIDJAR GIL
Abstract: Thus the inescapable conclusion toward which Marc Nichanian leads us.¹ At the provisional limit of the singular trajectory traced by his extended work (of which
The Historiographic Perversion constitutes a small, if remarkable, part), this formulation is hardly forced, nor does it appear to articulate a substantial departure from Theodor Adorno’s famous assertion (“to write poetry after Auschwitz is barbaric”), only an intensification of its claim, indeed, a version or translation of it.² Yet, the formulation practically engages with historical difference—“our historical differences actually make a difference”—in its claim to bridge
Book Title: The Awakened Ones-Phenomenology of Visionary Experience
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Obeyesekere Gananath
Abstract: Throughout his career, Obeyesekere has combined psychoanalysis and anthropology to illuminate the relationship between personal symbolism and religious experience. In this book, he begins with Buddha's visionary trances wherein, over the course of four hours, he witnesses hundreds of thousands of his past births and eons of world evolution, renewal, and disappearance. He then connects this fracturing of empirical and visionary time to the realm of space, considering the experience of a female Christian penitent, who stares devotedly at a tiny crucifix only to see the space around it expand to mirror Christ's suffering. Obeyesekere follows the unconscious motivations underlying rapture, the fantastical consumption of Christ's body and blood, and body mutilation and levitation, bridging medieval Catholicism and the movements of early modern thought as reflected in William Blake's artistic visions and poetic dreams. He develops the term "dream-ego" through a discussion of visionary journeys, Carl Jung's and Sigmund Freud's scientific dreaming, and the cosmic and erotic dream-visions of New Age virtuosos, and he defines the parameters of a visionary mode of knowledge that provides a more elastic understanding of truth. A career-culminating work, this volume translates the epistemology of Hindu and Buddhist thinkers for western audiences while revitalizing western philosophical and scientific inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/obey15362
Book 3 THE COSMIC “IT”: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: In my discussion of Mahāyāna Buddhism, I pointed out that the Buddhist doctrine of emptiness, in its very abstractness, shares that feature with many of the world’s great religions and with forms of the Absolute participating in a form of “secular spirituality.” That God exists “only philosophically,” attributed to Spinoza, expresses a larger truth of the world in the religious and secular traditions, wherein philosophers posit an abstract entity or Absolute or Being that exist outside the phenomenal world of becoming. However, while the God of Spinoza’s skeptical philosophy is based on the science and mathematics of his time, such
Book 6 THEOSOPHIES: from:
The Awakened Ones
Abstract: While the antinomian movements in England were central to our understanding of Blake, one may ask how influential they were for Blavatsky, who was born and raised in Russia in the Orthodox Church. The late nineteenth century did not make it easy to be an antirationalist as Blake was. It was not only the impact of science that began to erode the field of visionary religion but also a galaxy of philosophers and thinkers who questioned the intellectual legitimacy of the Christian faith. This was the era of Herbert Spencer and John Stuart Mill, of Auguste Comte and Ernest Renan,
Book Title: A Hedonist Manifesto-The Power to Exist
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): McClellan Joseph
Abstract: Onfray attacks Platonic idealism and its manifestation in Judaic, Christian, and Islamic belief. He warns of the lure of attachment to the purportedly eternal, immutable truths of idealism, which detracts from the immediacy of the world and our bodily existence. Insisting that philosophy is a practice that operates in a real, material space, Onfray enlists Epicurus and Democritus to undermine idealist and theological metaphysics; Nietzsche, Bentham, and Mill to dismantle idealist ethics; and Palante and Bourdieu to collapse crypto-fascist neoliberalism. In their place, he constructs a positive, hedonistic ethics that enlarges on the work of the New Atheists to promote a joyful approach to our lives in this, our only, world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/onfr17126
TRANSLATOR’S INTRODUCTION from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: I discovered Michel Onfray, as I suspect many have, by accident. In the summer of 2010, as an impecunious graduate student attending courses at the Sorbonne in Paris, one of the few activities I could afford was to browse bookstores. Tilting my head and crouching in the aisles, I would whittle away afternoons admiring, from A to Z, the names and titles of the remarkable French literary canon. During the course of these adventures, I lingered when I reached the Os, struck by the column of titles by this earnest-looking man named Onfray. Beyond the sheer volume of his writing—
ONE A Philosophical Side Path from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Classical historiography of philosophy is constructed by wishful thinking. Strangely, the apostles of pure reason and transcendental deduction all agree in the mythology that they create and that they perpetuate with a vengeance by teaching, compiling, lecturing, writing, and publishing fables. Through repetition, these become gospel truths. Scholarly looting, unmarked citation, conceptual regurgitation of other’s work—these are the happy practices of those who edit encyclopedias, conceive lexicons, and otherwise write the history of philosophy and the textbooks in which it is inscribed.
THREE A Philosophical Life from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: The idealist tradition manifests in an ad hoc way. Plato practiced a schizophrenic pedagogy: he had an oral esoteric discourse intended for elites, while offering an exoteric teaching to a greater number of people. This is an aristocratic practice of philosophy. The Academy professes that Plato is for everyone, that nothing prohibits us from taking a course on Plato. What we call his complete corpus comes from that one accessible, exoteric transmission.
NINE Carnal Hospitality from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Here, as elsewhere in ethics, as we have discussed, contracts define intellectual, civil,
TEN An Archipelagic Logic from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: The reactionaries
TWELVE A Playful Art from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: There is a vulgar cynicism in this religion of merchandise. However, if we put it up against Diogenes’s philosophical cynicism, we may be able to imagine an escape from nihilism, at least within the context of aesthetics. Against its negativity, we can contrapose the positivity of Diogenes’s
great cheerful health, transmission of codes,and thecommunicative acts. This tradition leads to arematerialization of the realand fights, at every turn, against pathology, autism, and the rarefaction of immanence.
FOURTEEN An Art of Artifice from:
A Hedonist Manifesto
Abstract: Ever since humans started humanizing themselves, they made themselves artificial, emancipating themselves from their natural condition. The first trepanations and cataract procedures proved that nature was not to be celebrated as a sweet and good provider of nothing but positivity, like some cornucopia. It also contains death, sadness, suffering, conflict, claws, beaks, and condemnation of the weak to death.
2 Blurred Identities: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: In 1877 a critic in
Le Télégraphe sketched, half jokingly, half prophetically, a scenario for the impressionist novel, according to which the identity of all its characters and actions would be undecidable. These of course are the distinctive tones of what we call modernity, and modernity, both as development in the later nineteenth century and as problem bequeathed to us (for whom the “undecidable” has assumed almost sacrosanct status), is the central concern of a most remarkable book, T.J. Clark’s The Painting of Modern Life.¹ Although its main focus is on nineteenth-century French painting of the period, it engages critically
3 Foundations and Beginnings: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: People have often commented on the quietly authoritative voice we so often hear in the writings of Raymond Williams. But alongside the directness and confidence of address, we should also remember the many hesitancies and uncertainties, along with the constant reaching for complexity. The endlessly backtracking and self-qualifying style (what Robin Blackburn has called Williams’s “characteristic mode of piling qualification upon complexity”) tells of a strategy not merely of ordinary intellectual scrupulousness but also of active unsettlement of terms and positions (from a man many of whose existential and political preferences were for settled forms of life against the huge
4 Circulating Representations: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: New Historicism, like all the other isms of our time, has rapidly become a catchword, a label, under which the heterogeneous is repackaged and marketed as the more or less homogeneous. The intellectual reality of New Historicisms in fact discloses a variety of sins or virtues or a mix of both depending on one’s point of view (the points of view themselves of course vary in that from its inception to the present New Historicism has been an object of fierce and continuing controversy). For example, in the very fine book by Graham Bradshaw on Shakespeare,¹ we find, convincingly demonstrated,
7 Representation or Embodiment? from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: “It is characteristic of philosophical writing that it must continually confront the question of
Darstellung.” This—the opening sentence of the “Epistemo-Critical Prologue” to The Origin of German Tragic Drama—is arguably the most important and philosophically freighted sentence in the entire Benjaminian oeuvre. In quoting it in English translation I have left the original Darstellung, because the way this particular word—with a long history in German philosophy and aesthetics—is translated at once raises and potentially begs many questions: is it better translated as “representation” or as “presentation”? The published translation has “representation,” which does indeed correspond to
10 Literature, Painting, Metaphor: from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: Proust famously defined literature as translation, in the sense of the representation of one set of terms by another.¹ Literary art as translation in Proust can be understood in a variety of contexts: extratextual (the privileged sensations of
A la recherche as signes that it is the task of the writer to decode); intertextual (A la recherche as the rivalrous rewriting of Balzac’s Comédie humaine or Saint-Simon’s Mémoires); and interartistic (the literary work sustaining complex transactional relations to the other arts, notably music, sculpture, and painting).
11 English Proust from:
The Triangle of Representation
Abstract: In this book in which there is not a single incident which is not fictitious, not a single character who is a real person in disguise … I owe it to the credit of my country to say that only the millionaire cousins of Françoise who came out
Book Title: Encountering Religion-Responsibility and Criticism After Secularism
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ROBERTS TYLER
Abstract: To respond to religion is to ask what religious behaviors and representations mean to us in our individual worlds, and scholars must confront questions of possibility and becoming that arise from testing their beliefs, imperatives, and practices. Roberts refers to the work of Hent de Vries, Eric Santner, and Stanley Cavell, each of whom exemplifies encounter and response in their writings as they traverse philosophy and religion to expose secular thinking to religious thought and practice. This approach highlights the resources religious discourse can offer to a fundamental reorientation of critical thought. In humanistic criticism after secularism, the lines separating the creative, the pious, and the critical themselves become the subject of question and experimentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/robe14752
7 CRITICISM AS CONDUCT OF GRATITUDE from:
Encountering Religion
Abstract: Kenneth Reinhard, commenting on Benjamin’s view of history, writes that “redemption is the not the final cause of history, but the interruption of the false totality of historical causality and contextualization by acts of
critical creation and constellation.”² Such “acts” are at the heart of a conception of humanistic cultural criticism that I find opened up by de Vries, Santner, and, as I will argue in this chapter, Stanley Cavell. Such criticism depends on a distinction between historicist views of causality and context that, in locativist fashion, put the events of the past in their place, and “remembrance” as a
Book Title: Reading the-The Literary Aims of a Theravada Buddhist History
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Scheible Kristin
Abstract: Reading the Mahavamsaadvocates a new, literary approach to this text by revealing its embedded reading advice (to experiencesamvegaandpasada) and affective work of metaphors (the Buddha's dharma as light) and salient characters (nagas). Kristin Scheible argues that theMahavamsarequires a particular kind of reading. In the text's proem, special instructions draw readers to the metaphor of light and thenagas, or salient snake-beings, of the first chapter.Nagasare both model worshippers and unworthy hoarders of Buddha's relics. As nonhuman agents, they challenge political and historicist readings of the text. Scheible sees these slippery characters and the narrative's potent and playful metaphors as techniques for refocusing the reader's attention on the text's emotional aims. Her work explains theMahavamsa's central motivational role in contemporary Sri Lankan Buddhist and nationalist circles. It also speaks broadly to strategies of reading religious texts and to the internal and external cues that give such works lives beyond the page.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/sche17138
1 INSTRUCTIONS, ADMONITIONS, AND ASPIRATIONS IN VAṂSA PROEMS from:
Reading the
Abstract: The proems (introductory verses) of both the
Dīpavaṃsaand theMahāvaṃsacall for their audience’s active participation through the act of reading or hearing the stories. TheDīpavaṃsaclearly aims for what I am calling “religious satisfaction” (pasāda)—namely, the feeling of confidence and inclusion in the Buddha’ssāsanathat results from the performed reading by “good people” (sujana).¹ The text suggests that the act of reading or hearing will be transformative for the right reader-hearer; the Dipavamsa’s proem constructs and anticipates a certain expected community of reception and transformation. TheMahāvaṃsa’sproem recapitulates this construction of a “textual community”
4 NĀGAS AND RELICS from:
Reading the
Abstract: As liminal characters, the betwixt and in-betweeners,
nāgasmediate the dark and the light. They are characters precisely poised to be interpreters for the outside reader-hearer through the text. As we have seen,nāgasoften act as attention getters within the text, functioning as red flags to denote important passages, but that is not all they do. In the previous chapter, we sawnāgasin close proximity with the living Buddha. In the case of Bhūridatta, this proximity is in fact a shared ontology of sorts and a window into the eventual soteriological aptitude of even the lowest born—the
5 HISTORICIZING (IN) THE PĀLI DĪPAVAṂSA AND MĀHAVAṂSA from:
Reading the
Abstract: As histories, the
vaṃsasare explicitly concerned with linking the “good people” of the textual community to the Buddha through both narratives and the actual presence of relics. The PaliMahāvaṃsais at once historical and literary—the former because it was written in a particular cultural and temporal moment about other events in the deep recesses of the collective imagination or inherited cultural memory of its community of production; the latter because it employs devices such as metaphor and plot development to tell that story to its audience. But the categories “history” and “the literary” are far from mutually
Book Title: Milton and the Rabbis-Hebraism, Hellenism, and Christianity
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Shoulson Jeffrey S.
Abstract: Shoulson is unconvinced of a direct link between a specific collection of rabbinic writings and Milton's works. He argues that many of Milton's poetic ideas that parallel midrash are likely to have entered Christian discourse not only through early modern Christian Hebraicists but also through Protestant writers and preachers without special knowledge of Hebrew. At the heart of Shoulson's inquiry lies a fundamental question: When is an idea, a theme, or an emphasis distinctively Judaic or Hebraic and when is it Christian? The difficulty in answering such questions reveals and highlights the fluid interaction between ostensibly Jewish, Hellenistic, and Christian modes of thought not only during the early modern period but also early in time when rabbinic Judaism and Christianity began.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/shou12328
2 “Taking Sanctuary Among the Jews”: from:
Milton and the Rabbis
Abstract: Of Reformation in England and the Cawses that Hitherto have Hindered it (May 1641), the first of Milton’s five pamphlets written against the prelacy, the hierarchical clergy of the Church of England, begins with a protracted lament over the decline of the Church since the time of the apostles. Charged with key terms from the debates over religious doctrine, not only between the Roman church and Protestants, or among diverse Protestant groupings, but also from the age-old debates between Judaism and Christianity, Milton’s account of this decline describes
Book Title: Winged Faith-Rethinking Globalization and Religious Pluralism through the Sathya Sai Movement
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Srinivas Tulasi
Abstract: This study considers a new kind of cosmopolitanism located in an alternate understanding of difference and contestation. It considers how acts of "sacred spectating" and illusion, "moral stakeholding" and the problems of community are debated and experienced. A thrilling study of a transcultural and transurban phenomenon that questions narratives of self and being, circuits of sacred mobility, and the politics of affect,
Winged Faithsuggests new methods for discussing religion in a globalizing world and introduces readers to an easily critiqued yet not fully understood community.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/srin14932
Introduction: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: When I arrived in my hometown of Bangalore, on a warm February night in 1998, my intention was to study the economic forces of globalization and their impact on Indian religion, particularly temple Hinduism. Globalization was at that time seen by theorists as the dominance of the culture of the West (Euro-America) upon the rest of the world (Appadurai 1996; Berger 1997), the “center upon the periphery” (Hannerz 1990:i–x) as cultural flows were thought to move from the hegemonic West to the peripheral rest of the world. India had tentatively opened its economy to global market forces in 1989,
1 Becoming God: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: August 14, 1999. 11.00 a.m. Brindavan, Whitefield ashram. Gokulam canteen dining hall. Shanti (forty-three) from Bombay, Teresa (sixty-two) from London, and Joule (fifty-five) from Amsterdam, all devotees of over twenty years, are shelling beans in the dining room in preparation for the evening meal for the many thousands of devotees in residence. Usually this activity is completed in meditative silence or with whispered bouts of conversation, as per the rules of the ashram, but they are known as devout, so they can talk to me as they work. We talk about the miracles attendant to Shri Sathya Sai Baba’s life
2 Deus Loci: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: India, I always wanted to go there. It was like a dream, a fantasy. One day I went to the Sai temple in Singapore. There was a sign, “A trip to Puttaparthi, India, is being organized from 8 to 16 Dec 1997. For trip details contact Brother Manoj” and a phone number. I was thinking of calling but I didn’t. That night I dreamt of Sai Baba. He was in front of me calling me by name. He said, “Frederyck, you must come to ’Parthi.” When I
3 Illusion, Play, and Work in a Moral Community: from:
Winged Faith
Abstract: Whitefield, Bangalore. February 20, 1998. Harini (forty-two) told me that she had heard (through the devotee’s grapevine) that Sathya Sai Baba had moved to Brindavan, his summer ashram some twelve miles outside Bangalore. She said she would accompany me for early-morning darshan. I was excited. This was the first time I would actually get to see Sathya Sai Baba in person. Darshan was between 6 a.m. and 7 a.m., and she said there would be huge crowds (which I did not believe). We left Bangalore at 3 a.m. and we arrived at 3:30 a.m. In spite of the total darkness
2 “Saying and the Said”: from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: As I showed earlier in
Critique de la représentation,¹ these two philosophical currents—both the most widely practiced and the most different in style—have as a common horizon a questioning of the concept of representation. But even if these two great movements of contemporary philosophy are both structured around this
3 The Antispeculative View: from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: Jürgen Habermas’s philosophy seems, across its different periods, to display the most salient trait of contemporary philosophy. This contemporary philosophy is characterized by what we can call its “antispeculative” habitus, a habitus that is entirely structured around a critique of classical metaphysics, generally characterized as a symbol of the hubris of a human thought that desires to subjugate the entirety of what there is under its almighty power. All the trends that I have already discussed could be united under this banner, as could just as easily Derridian deconstruction. Habermas has illustrated this vast genre, the veritable backbone of contemporary
5 A Definition of the Model: from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: Doctrines that variously express one of the three characteristics that I have delineated—(1) philosophy’s scientificity, (2) examination of the nature of pragmatic contradiction, and (3) the problem of the status of the philosopher’s discourse as a problem of self-reference—are legion throughout the history of philosophy. On this point, the first required trait (namely, the affirmation of philosophy as a science in the face of a devastating skepticism) is superbly embodied by the dispute between Plato and the Sophists. Similarly, many of Aristotle’s arguments could be taken up against contemporary skepticism. And again, the theme of philosophy as a
6 The Model of Self-reference’s Consistency from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: To demonstrate how the proposed model can still allow us to provide a remedy to the aporias diagnosed in part 1—gathered together under the general characterization of a “reflexive deficit”—requires that it confront today’s current theories of self-reference. By refining and specifying it, this confrontation should allow us to reinforce the theory of self-reference that was initially proposed by German idealism in order to cope with the critical project’s failure.
9 The “Race to Reference” from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: The twentieth century, particularly on its analytic side, was undeniably marked by what Jocelyn Benoist does not hesitate to call the “race to reference.”¹ Interest in the problem of reference would be a kind of reaction against Kantian idealism and, in general, against any form of representationalism. With Bernard Bolzano and Gottlob Frege, later with the early Husserl and of course Bertrand Russell, a desire was expressed to return to the object, against a too-exclusive concern for our representations of the object. In a word, the thematization of reference was presented as an offensive against the transcendental—which, by means
11 Helmholtz’s Choice as a Choice for Reference: from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: The return to Kant is in fact the choice of a single path that brings an end to the tension in the critical project. It is a matter of “returning” to the question of representation as an explication of the relation between a subject and an object. Let’s first of all recall that, from 1810 to 1850, Hegel and his disciples were the main figures on the philosophical scene. Henri Dussort points this out, “From 1800 to about 1840, speculative thought, its famous developers and their disciples occupied the center stage.”¹ Friedrich Engels himself noted that this enthusiasm for the
Conclusion from:
The Death of Philosophy
Abstract: All the arguments that I have put forward have had but one goal, to answer Jacques Bouveresse’s charge that “the first to wax indignant over Rorty’s proposals” (namely, “that there is no longer any reason to defend philosophy as an autonomous discipline”) would be well advised to find a “more serious justification than what the philosophers in question would agree to provide,”¹ in this case, either the simple practice of the history of philosophy or the development of a particular local investigation, both of which dodge the difficulties of the problem. I thus wanted to show how it is possible
Book Title: Left-Wing Melancholia-Marxism, History, and Memory
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): TRAVERSO ENZO
Abstract: The fall of the Berlin Wall marked the end of the Cold War but also the rise of a melancholic vision of history as a series of losses. For the political left, the cause lost was communism, and this trauma determined how leftists wrote the next chapter in their political struggle and how they have thought about their past since. Throughout the twentieth century, argues
Left-Wing Melancholy, from classical Marxism to psychoanalysis to the advent of critical theory, a culture of defeat and its emotional overlay of melancholy have characterized the leftist understanding of the political in history and in theoretical critique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/trav17942
INTRODUCTION: from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: In 1967, reconstructing the long trajectory of the uses of Cicero’s sentence
historia magistra vitae, Reinhart Koselleck stressed its exhaustion at the end of the eighteenth century, when the birth of the modern idea of progress replaced the old, cyclical vision of history. The past ceased to appear as an immense reservoir of experiences from which human beings could draw moral and political lessons. Since the French Revolution, the future had to be invented rather than extracted from bygone events. The human mind, Koselleck observed quoting Tocqueville, “wandered in obscurity” and the lessons of history became mysterious or useless.¹ The
6 ADORNO AND BENJAMIN: from:
Left-Wing Melancholia
Abstract: Deeply shaped by the presentiment of an impending catastrophe, the dialogue between Adorno and Benjamin depicts a melancholy constellation. In a previous chapter, we have already observed the ambivalent assessments of Benjamin on melancholy, as they appear in both his book on the German tragic drama and his strongly critical review of Erich Kästner’s novels. Now, it is important to emphasize the melancholic character of Benjamin himself. According to many witnesses, melancholy was his deepest disposition; it also explains his fascination with
Angelus Novus, the Paul Klee painting that he acquired in Munich at the beginning of the 1920s, which
Book Title: Flight Ways-Life and Loss at the Edge of Extinction
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): van Dooren Thom
Abstract: Each chapter of
Flight Waysfocuses on a different species or group of birds: North Pacific albatrosses, Indian vultures, an endangered colony of penguins in Australia, Hawaiian crows, and the iconic whooping cranes of North America. Written in eloquent and moving prose, the book takes stock of what is lost when a life form disappears from the world -- the wide-ranging ramifications that ripple out to implicate a number of human and more-than-human others. Van Dooren intimately explores what life is like for those who must live on the edge of extinction, balanced between life and oblivion, taking care of their young and grieving their dead. He bolsters his studies with real-life accounts from scientists and local communities at the forefront of these developments. No longer abstract entities with Latin names, these species become fully realized characters enmeshed in complex and precarious ways of life, sparking our sense of curiosity, concern, and accountability toward others in a rapidly changing world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/van-16618
Two CIRCLING VULTURES: from:
Flight Ways
Abstract: In conversations about vultures in India, people have often recounted to mehaving seen large numbers of these birds gathered along the banks of rivers, consuming the dead bodies of cattle and other animals, including sometimes people, as they float by or wash up on the water’s edge. When it meets a vulture’s beak, it matters very little if this flesh, this meat, was once a human or some other kind of animal. In fact, numerous human societies throughout history—including current-day Parsee communities in India and Buddhists in Tibet and elsewhere—utilize exposure to vultures as the most appropriate
Four BREEDING CRANES: from:
Flight Ways
Abstract: As we approached the enclosure, I could see several young birds moving aroundin the water on their long delicate legs. Standing about waist high and covered in the light brown plumage of their age, they looked very different from the much larger, mostly white, adult Whooping Cranes (Grus americana) that they would hopefully one day become. It was in the image of these adult birds that I was now dressed, wearing a long white costume with a hood and mask that almost completely obscured my human form. Joe Duff, my guide in this strange space of interaction, was dressed
Book Title: After Christianity- Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): D’Isanto Luca
Abstract: When Vattimo was asked by a former teacher if he still believed in God, his reply was, "Well, I believe that I believe." This paradoxical declaration of faith serves as the foundation for a brilliant exposition on Christianity in the new millennium -- an age characterized by a deep uncertainty of opinion -- and a personal account of how Vattimo himself recovered his faith through Nietzsche and Heidegger. He first argues that secularization is in fact the fulfillment of the central Christian message, and prepares us for a new mode of Christianity. He then explains that Nietzsche's thesis concerns only the "moral god" and leaves room for the emergence of "new gods." Third, Vattimo claims that the postmodern condition of fragmentation, anti-Eurocentrism, and postcolonialism can be usefully understood in light of Joachim of Fiore's thesis concerning the "Spiritual Age" of history. Finally, Vattimo argues for the idea of "weak thought." Because philosophy in the postmetaphysical age can only acknowledge that "all is interpretation," that the "real" is always relative and not the hard and fast "truth" we once thought it to be, contemporary thought must recognize itself and its claims as "weak" as opposed to "strong" foundationalist claims of the metaphysical past. Vattimo concludes that these factors make it possible for religion and God to become a serious topic for philosophy again, and that philosophy should now formally engage religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt10628
3 God the Ornament from:
After Christianity
Abstract: WHAT ARE THE consequences of the fact that philosophy has recovered its provenance from the Judeo-Christian tradition, interpreted in light of the ontology of the event rather than of a metaphysical conception of Being? In the two preceding chapters, I have tried to establish, or at least to suggest, that on the basis of these two premises it is possible to construe an image of postmodern religious experience. I do not renounce using the word
postmodern, because I am convinced that the history of salvation announced by the Bible realizes itself in world historical events—in this I remain faithful
5 The West or Christianity from:
After Christianity
Abstract: IT IS NOT too difficult to fill with meaning this title, whose intention stimulates curiosity and eventually provokes, because it evokes too many things often in conflict with each other. It is not so much a matter of filling the title with meaning as of emptying it, at least in part, by reducing it to a set of coherent and intelligible terms. The multiple meanings we immediately assign to this linked pair indicate at the very least that we take it as a natural, granted, and unquestionable fact, though we cannot spell out why this is the case, as always
6 The Death or Transfiguration of Religion from:
After Christianity
Abstract: TWO SETS OF facts seem obvious in contemporary culture, and they do not have the same meaning. Indeed, as I hope to demonstrate, the task of critical thought is elaborating the difference between them. Let me begin with the most visible phenomena surrounding the renewal of religion, which are also the most vaguely defined. This is what we might call, following the title of a book published in France a few years ago, the triumph of God. The current Catholic pope has an extraordinary audience among non-Catholics and nonbelievers, in part because of his contribution to the collapse of the
Book Title: Not Being God-A Collaborative Autobiography
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): MCCUAIG WILLIAM
Abstract: Gianni Vattimo, a leading philosopher of the continental school, has always resisted autobiography. But in this intimate memoir, the voice of Vattimo as thinker, political activist, and human being finds its expression on the page. With Piergiorgio Paterlini, a noted Italian writer and journalist, Vattimo reflects on a lifetime of politics, sexual radicalism, and philosophical exuberance in postwar Italy. Turin, the city where he was born and one of the intellectual capitals of Europe (also the city in which Nietzsche went mad), forms the core of his reminiscences, enhanced by fascinating vignettes of studying under Hans Georg Gadamer, teaching in the United States, serving as a public intellectual and interlocutor of Habermas and Derrida, and working within the European Parliament to unite Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vatt14720
5 RORSCHACH TEST from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I, however, had my own personal master. Apart from school. A Thomist, an ultra-Thomist: Monsignor Pietro Caramello. A man who thought it was too progressive even to call himself a neo-Thomist. He used to protest that he was a Thomist period, forget the “neo.” He edited the works of Saint Thomas for the publisher Marietti, and he was the chaplain of the Sindone (the Shroud of Turin), practically a retainer of
8 EPOCHS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: At a certain point I began to read Michel Foucault (but you know, when you read Foucault, more than anything else you invent what you think he meant to say, because you grasp little or nothing) —anyway, I was reading Foucault and thinking about Theodor Adorno’s “epochs,” the fact that he often speaks of “constellations.”
11 ON THE BANKS OF THE NECKAR from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I haven’t yet told you why and in what sense and in what way I was a Catholic, from age twelve to age twenty-four or twenty-five. But I know that I stopped being one when I no longer read the Italian newspapers. My religious commitment was so much interwoven with my philosophical and political commitment that, when I lost contact with Italian politics, boom, it was all over, painlessly, just like it began. Even if a lot of passion was consumed in the interval.
12 “MAD, UTTERLY DESPERATE STUDY” from:
Not Being God
Abstract: In 1967 my book
Ipotesi su Nietzsche (Hypothesis on Nietzsche) came out; I was dumped by a girl I was very seriously engaged to; Palazzo Campana, the heart of the University of Turin, was occupied at the end of November, and I was initially unsure what to think about the student movement; Michele Pellegrino became archbishop of Turin and this had a picaresque impact on my public/private life (it
14 PARADIGMS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: It’s the end of metaphysics and the end of Thomism, but it’s also the swansong of positivism: truth cannot be the objective mirroring of factual data.
20 DEMONIC POSSESSION from:
Not Being God
Abstract: Why did the Fratelli delle Scuole Cristiane decide to get rid of me when I was twenty-three? Because I had started to frequent trade unionists, take part in worker strikes, picket factory gates. I picketed with the guys from the labor organization CISL at the Avigliana ironworks, for example.
34 REVOLUTIONARY MORALISM from:
Not Being God
Abstract: One of my students went to jail for terrorism, too, found on some list, I believe. I don’t think he’d pulled a trigger yet, but he was certainly one of the many who were semiclandestine, one of those pretending to be a worker: he would leave the house at 6:00 AM with his lunch pail, to make people think he was headed to the factory, but he didn’t go there; I don’t know exactly where he went.
36 ROOTS from:
Not Being God
Abstract: He was a policeman. One lasting memory I have—I don’t know how, it must have been a phrase I heard in the house later—is that some evenings Papa “
era di cinta” (“had perimeter duty”). I heard it as “incinta” (pregnant) and didn’t understand it at all. It meant he was on duty outside the jail. I practically never knew him. I didn’t have time; he died of pulmonitis (like my sister later) when I
45 OBITUARIES from:
Not Being God
Abstract: I practically never knew my father; he died when I was sixteen months old.
INTRODUCTION from:
Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Antonello Pierpaolo
Abstract: Among the numerous “conflicts” that characterize contemporary philosophical and intellectual discourse, the one between laicism¹ and religion—between the need for democratic states to promote confessional pluralism and substantial relativism, and the supposedly peremptory, authoritarian, and hegemonic culture of the religions—is emerging as one of the most crucial and important. The debate on the laicity of the state in France or in Turkey, the theologization of politics in the United States, the discussion of so-called postsecular society in Germany, the ongoing debate in Italy about the relation between relativism and faith, and the polemical fury over the clash of
1 CHRISTIANITY AND MODERNITY from:
Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: Pierpaolo antonello: I would like to begin our dialogue with the two terms that supply the framework for this encounter: Christianity and modernity. Your conceptual instruments are different—anthropological for Girard, philosophical for Vattimo—but you wind up saying more or less the same thing: that modernity, as constructed and understood by the European West, is substantially an invention of Christianity. Your research has led you to the apparently paradoxical result that Christianity is responsible for the secularization of the world. The end of the religions was brought about by a religion. In a recent book, Girard actually informs us
5 NOT JUST INTERPRETATIONS, THERE ARE FACTS, TOO from:
Christianity, Truth, and Weakening Faith
Author(s) Girard René
Abstract: From the standpoint of “deconstructive nihilism,” modern atheism is only one “metaphysical” creed among many others. The reassurance provided by its supposedly scientific grounding is as illusory as the reassurance of religions, philosophies, and ideologies. A complete liberation from false certainties demands that atheism be deconstructed too, along with other metaphysical illusions. Once this task is accomplished, Christianity should become attractive once again. In a genuinely “nihilistic” world, the religion of the cross should fare better than all the creeds and ideologies that imprudently relied on false scientific “objectivity.” This is what Gianni Vattimo suggests in his recent works, notably
Book Title: Political Responsibility-Responding to Predicaments of Power
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): VÁZQUEZ-ARROYO ANTONIO Y.
Abstract: Sounding the alarm for those who care about robust forms of civic engagement, this book fights for a new conception of political responsibility that meets the challenges of today's democratic practice. Antonio Y. Vázquez-Arroyo forcefully argues against the notion that modern predicaments of power can only be addressed ethically or philosophically through pristine concepts that operate outside of the political realm. By returning to the political, the individual is reintroduced to the binding principles of participatory democracy and the burdens of acting and thinking as a member of a collective. Vázquez-Arroyo historicizes the ethical turn to better understand its ascendence and reworks Adorno's dialectic of responsibility to reassert the political in contemporary thought and theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/vazq17484
INTRODUCTION from:
Political Responsibility
Abstract: Today, academic political theory is at the very least equally vulnerable to the charge of “avoiding that dangerous subject politics.” A less political cast of mind than that of many a practitioner of political theory in the Anglo-American academy is hard to fathom. Even if the salience of an academic and hyperprofessionalized cast of mind has
1 HISTORICIZING THE ETHICAL TURN from:
Political Responsibility
Abstract: In spite of the prevalence of ethical tropes in theoretical discussions in North Atlantic scholarly circles, an explicit embrace of the ethical turn in the humanities and social sciences has not been as prominent as that afforded to other so-called turns—including the cultural, linguistic, theological, psychoanalytic, and affective turns—of the past thirty years. Indeed, in contrast with previous turns, the ethical turn displays an almost apologetic reluctance about its self-identity: uneasiness and ambiguity define the attitude of many theoretical proponents of the turn, even if its political practitioners—humanitarians and human and animal rights advocates, among others—are
2 RESPONSIBILITY IN HISTORY from:
Political Responsibility
Abstract: Responsibility is now a fashionable concept in political theory, philosophy, and critical theory, and,
ceteris paribus, that is a good reason not to write about it. Large bodies of work exist expounding its various connotations and meanings, ranging from questions of accountability and guilt to the need to respond to alterity. And yet there is something rather elusive about the political connotations of contemporary invocations of responsibility within the context of the turn to ethics in the humanities and social sciences, an elusiveness that at first glance seems largely due to hyperindividualized, abstract, and unhistorical thematizations of responsibility. Indeed, recent
3 AUTONOMY, ETHICS, INTRASUBJECTIVITY from:
Political Responsibility
Abstract: One upshot of the contemporary ethical turn is the proliferation of solipsistic philosophical accounts of responsibility. If discussions of political and ethical responsibility historically emphasized social and intersubjective relations, the dominant philosophical formulations of responsibility privilege autonomy and
intrasubjectivity, even when abstract invocations ofintersubjectivity are adduced. Modalities of solipsism that engage in Platonic soul-crafting and dwell on the inner life of the subject, her mental reality, over consideration of the predicaments of power she inhabits, or how these are historically constituted, politically sanctioned, and socially reproduced situations that thoroughly mediate that subjectivity. But these modalities of solipsism suggest something
Book Title: Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia-The Formation and Transformation of the Chinese Buddhist Canon
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Yü Chün-fang
Abstract: The collection undertakes extensive readings of major scriptural catalogs from the early manuscript era as well as major printed editions, including the Kaibao Canon, Qisha Canon, Goryeo Canon, and Taisho Canon. Contributors add fascinating depth to such understudied issues as the historical process of compilation, textual manipulation, physical production and management, sponsorship, the dissemination of various editions, cultic activities surrounding the canon, and the canon's reception in different East Asian societies. The Chinese Buddhist canon is one of the most enduring textual traditions in East Asian religion and culture, and through this exhaustive, multifaceted effort, an essential body of work becomes part of a new, versatile narrative of East Asian Buddhism that has far-reaching implications for world history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/wu--17160
2. From the “Cult of the Book” to the “Cult of the Canon”: from:
Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Wu Jiang
Abstract: Despite the importance of the canon in Chinese Buddhism, it is still unclear how the making and remaking of a canon initiated new social, cultural, and religious transformations in Buddhist communities. Previous studies have overwhelmingly concentrated on the canon as a collection of sacred texts, without adequate attention to its actual use. It is often neglected that the canon as a whole has become a sacred object, allowing believers to form an intimate relationship through participating in a series of cultic practices.
3. Notions and Visions of the Canon in Early Chinese Buddhism from:
Spreading Buddha's Word in East Asia
Author(s) Zacchetti Stefano
Abstract: All the various bodies of scriptures evoked by the name “Buddhist canon”—such as the Pali canon, the Tibetan canon, the Mongolian canon, and the Chinese canon, just to mention those surviving in a more or less complete form—are in fact very different things from the viewpoint of their internal structure and formative principles. They were shaped by different historical forces, in response to different cultural and political conditions. All these differences are partly masked by the use of unifying terms such as “canon,” “Tripitaka,” etc., to refer to these collections. If taken uncritically, all these designations are potentially
Book Title: Comparative Journeys-Essays on Literature and Religion East and West
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Yu Anthony C.
Abstract: "In virtually every high-cultural system," Yu writes, "be it the Indic, the Islamic, the Sino-Japanese, or the Judeo-Christian, the literary tradition has developed in intimate-indeed, often intertwining-relation to religious thought, practice, institution, and symbolism."
Comparative Journeysis a major step toward unraveling this complexity, revealing through the skilled observation of texts the extraordinary intimacy between two supposedly disparate languages and cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--14326
1 LITERATURE AND RELIGION from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: The most apparent and apposite justification for the inclusion of literary materials in the study of religion is the historical one. What is most obvious, however, is often overlooked, and thus even the familiar in this case bears rehearsal. In virtually every high-cultural system, be it the Indic, the Islamic, the Sino-Japanese, or the Judeo-Christian, the literary tradition has, though in vastly different forms and guises, developed in intimate—indeed, often intertwining—relation to religious thought, practice, institution, and symbolism. Without paying due heed to Greek myth and thought, to Hebrew saga and wisdom, and to Christian symbolism and piety,
3 LIFE IN THE GARDEN: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: In his particular effort to justify the ways of God to man, Milton knows full well that it is not sufficient merely to demonstrate the proper origin of evil, though a satisfactory treatment of the subject that has so exercised some of the best minds throughout Christian history is itself no mean or easy accomplishment. In order to magnify the seriousness of the Fall and its terrible consequences, Milton, like most Christian apologists since Ambrose, realizes the value of emphasizing the original perfection of the first couple. Though Milton chooses to use the theme of the Fortunate Fall later in
4 THE ORDER OF TEMPTATIONS IN from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: The story of the temptations of Jesus has been variously treated in the New Testament. Mark, in its characteristic terseness, devotes only two verses to the subject (1:12–13) that amount to no more than a summary. Providing a much lengthier account, the other two of the Synoptic Gospels agree on all essential features but diverge partially in the order of presentation. Both Matthew (4:1–11) and Luke (4:1–13) begin with the temptation of changing stones to bread; thereafter Matthew follows with the temptations of Jerusalem’s temple and of empire, whereas Luke reverses the order and ends the account
7 TWO LITERARY EXAMPLES OF RELIGIOUS PILGRIMAGE: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Although the definition may vary among scholars of religion, there is fairly widespread agreement that certain fundamental characteristics are common to all true religious pilgrimages. In the words of one study, at least three elements must be present: “L’existence d’un lieu consacré où l’on se rend spécialement, le déplacement collectif ou individual vers ce lieu, et enfin le but de ce déplacement, qui est l’obtention d’un certain bien matérial ou spirituel.”¹ Not every protracted journey of adventures or one in which the traveler or travelers engage in various heroic or dangerous exploits will perforce qualify to be called a pilgrimage.
8 RELIGION AND LITERATURE IN CHINA: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: I begin by quoting at some length a statement made by an acclaimed scholar and translator, David Hawkes, about the distinctive character of Chinese literature:
15 ENDURING CHANGE: from:
Comparative Journeys
Abstract: Whether there is such a thing as the “essence” or “soul” of China and whether it can change over time are hardly idle questions, questions that I’d like to examine on this occasion. Even for a single individual, the questions of the subject and personal identity-who am I and in what sense the I of today is the same as the I of yesterday-are questions of great complexity and much discussion.¹ To note the difficulty inherent in my project does not mean that students of China have been reluctant to debate the peculiar or distinctive characteristics of that civilization. Indeed,
Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Sixth Century B.C.E. to Seventeenth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: From Yü Ying-shih's perspective, the Dao, or the Way, constitutes the inner core of Chinese civilization. His work explores the unique dynamics between Chinese intellectuals' discourse on the
Dao, or moral principles for a symbolized ideal world order, and their criticism of contemporary reality throughout Chinese history. Volume 1 ofChinese History and Cultureexplores how theDaowas reformulated, expanded, defended, and preserved by Chinese intellectuals up to the seventeenth century, guiding them through history's darkest turns. Essays incorporate the evolving conception of the soul and the afterlife in pre- and post-Buddhist China, the significance of eating practices and social etiquette, the move toward greater individualism, the rise of the Neo-Daoist movement, the spread of Confucian ethics, and the growth of merchant culture and capitalism. A true panorama of Chinese culture's continuities and transition, Yü Ying-shih's two-volume Chinese History and Culture gives readers of all backgrounds a unique education in the meaning of Chinese civilization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17858
1. Between the Heavenly and the Human from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The idea of the “unity of Heaven and man” (
tian ren heyi天人合一) has been generally regarded as a feature uniquely characteristic of Chinese religious and philosophical imagination. Thetian-renpolarity as a category of thinking was already essential to Chinese philosophical analy sis in classical antiquity. Thus, in theZhuangzi, the question of where the fine line is to be drawn between “the heavenly” and “the human” is often asked. Zhuangzi’s emphasis on the notion oftianwas later sharply criticized by Xunzi (ca. 312–230 B.C.E.) as being blinded by the heavenly and insensitive to the human. For
7. Individualism and the Neo-Daoist Movement in Wei-Jin China from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Both “individualism” and “holism” are Western concepts whose introduction into Chinese intellectual discourse is a matter of only recent historical development.¹ This does not mean, however, that as categories of analy sis these two concepts are totally inapplicable to the study of early Chinese thought. As a matter of fact, we find in the long history of Chinese political and social thought a wide range of views that can be legitimately characterized as either holistic or individualistic. In this study, the Neo-Daoist movement since the end of the Han dynasty will be explored as an example of one type of
13. The Intellectual World of Jiao Hong Revisited from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Jiao Hong 焦竑 (1540–1620) was an important figure in late Ming intellectual history. In his own day, he was praised for his accomplishments in prose writing as much as for his active interest in Neo-Confucian and Buddhist metaphysics. Since the eighteenth century, however, he has been remembered as a bibliophile and as a pioneer of “evidential research” (
kaozheng考證). He lived in an age of transition that witnessed many new developments in Chinese society, religion, and in elite as well as popular culture, but he was by no means merely a passive product of this transition. On the contrary, through
Book Title: Chinese History and Culture-Seventeenth Century Through Twentieth Century
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): Duke Michael S.
Abstract: From Ying-shih Yü's perspective, the
Dao, or the Way, constitutes the inner core of Chinese civilization. His work explores the unique dynamics between Chinese intellectuals' discourse on theDao, or moral principles for a symbolized ideal world order, and their criticism of contemporary reality throughout Chinese history. Volume 2 ofChinese History and Culturecompletes Ying-shih Yü's systematic reconstruction and exploration of Chinese thought over two millennia and its impact on Chinese identity. Essays address the rise of Qing Confucianism, the development of the Dai Zhen and Zhu Xi traditions, and the response of the historian Zhang Xuecheng to the Dai Zhen approach. They take stock of the thematic importance of Cao Xueqin's eighteenth-century masterpieceHonglou meng(Dream of the Red Chamber) and the influence of Sun Yat-sen'sThree Principles of the People, as well as the radicalization of China in the twentieth century and the fundamental upheavals of modernization and revolution. Ying-shih Yü also discusses the decline of elite culture in modern China, the relationships among democracy, human rights, and Confucianism, and changing conceptions of national history. He reflects on the Chinese approach to history in general and the larger political and cultural function of chronological biographies. By situating China's modern encounter with the West in a wider historical frame, this second volume ofChinese History and Cultureclarifies its more curious turns and contemplates the importance of a renewed interest in the traditional Chinese values recognizing common humanity and human dignity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/yu--17860
1. Some Preliminary Observations on the Rise of Qing Confucian Intellectualism from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: This is a thoroughly revised and much expanded version of a paper first drafted in 1971. Since it was originally intended to serve as an introduction to my book-length study, tentatively entitled
The Rise of Confucian Intellectualism in the Qing, with it, I tried to cover rather than dig the ground. In rewriting this paper, I have still followed my original plan by avoiding, as much as possible, factual details. The central task I set for myself was to formulate certain conceptual schemes in light of which the internal development of Neo-Confucianism from the Song to the Qing may be
5. Qing Confucianism from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: The best way to characterize Confucianism in the Qing dynasty (hereafter Qing Confucianism) is to contrast it with what is called Song-Ming Neo-Confucianism. Song-Ming Neo-Confucians were primarily moral philosophers debating among themselves endlessly on metaphysical questions such as whether “moral princi ples” (
li理) are inherent in “human nature” (xing性) or in “human mind” (xin心). By contrast, Qing Confucians were, first and foremost, scholars devoting themselves painstakingly to philological explication of classical and historical texts. As a result, the Song-Ming Period witnessed the emergence and development of the rivalry between two major philosophical systems represented,respectively, by the Cheng-Zhu
7. Sun Yat-sen’s Doctrine and Traditional Chinese Culture from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: In an autobiographical sketch written in 1923, Sun Yat-sen 孫逸仙 said about his own thought: “Among the various revolutionary ideas I hold, some are adapted from traditional Chinese thought, others are appropriated from theories and practices developed in Europe, and still others are original insights grown out of my own critical reflections.”¹ On the whole, I believe, this self-analysis can be easily borne out by a thorough investigation of his writings. That would lie beyond the scope of this study, however. The aim of the present chapter is rather a modest one. I shall confine my analysis to the first
8. The Radicalization of China in the Twentieth Century from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Since the turn of the century, a radical mode of thinking has dominated the Chinese mind. The history of Chinese thought in the twentieth century may be interpreted as a process of rapid radicalization. As a matter of fact, never in its long intellectual tradition of over 2.5 millennia had China been as thoroughly radicalized as in modern times.
10. Modernization Versus Fetishism of Revolution in Twentieth-Century China from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: Nowadays the term “modernization” has lost much of the popularity it once enjoyed during the 1950s in the heyday of American modernization theory. In recent academic discourse, the place of “modernization” has been taken over by a number of “posts” beginning with “postmodern.” It is significant to note, however, that as early as the 1970s, some of the leading modernization theorists already found it necessary to reformulate the original thesis by way of clarification or modification. As a response to a widespread dissatisfaction with many of the assumptions of initial modernization studies, Daedalus devoted a whole special issue in 1973
13. Democracy, Human Rights, and Confucian Culture from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: As concepts, both “democracy” and “human rights” are of distinctly Western origins, the former being traceable to ancient Greece and the latter to theories of “Natural Law” and “Natural Rights” developed between the Renaissance and the Enlightenment.¹ Since the end of the nineteenth century, however, Chinese intellectuals have become so fascinated with them, together with a host of other related Western concepts or values such as liberty, equality, social contract, etc., that they have made every effort to transplant them to China. It is true that during the entire Mao Zedong era (1949–1976), Chinese intellectuals under the Communist regime
15. Reflections on Chinese Historical Thinking from:
Chinese History and Culture
Abstract: With a historiographical tradition as long and variegated as China’s, any attempt at a sweeping generalization of Chinese historical thought with a view to clearly distinguishing it from its Western counterpart is hazardous. To suggest that there are essential determinate characteristics in Chinese historiography that are wholly absent in the West is to lapse into a false essentialism. The more I know about the history of Western historiography, the less I am sure about the possibility of drawing a sharp distinction between the two traditions. As far as the individual component parts of Chinese and Western historiographies are concerned, they
Book Title: Why Only Art Can Save Us-Aesthetics and the Absence of Emergency
Publisher: Columbia University Press
Author(s): ZABALA SANTIAGO
Abstract: The state of emergency, according to thinkers such as Carl Schmidt, Walter Benjamin, and Giorgio Agamben, is at the heart of any theory of politics. But today the problem is not the crises that we do confront, which are often used by governments to legitimize themselves, but the ones that political realism stops us from recognizing as emergencies, from widespread surveillance to climate change to the systemic shocks of neoliberalism. We need a way of disrupting the existing order that can energize radical democratic action rather than reinforcing the status quo. In this provocative book, Santiago Zabala declares that in an age where the greatest emergency is the absence of emergency, only contemporary art's capacity to alter reality can save us.
Why Only Art Can Save Usadvances a new aesthetics centered on the nature of the emergency that characterizes the twenty-first century. Zabala draws on Martin Heidegger's distinction between works of art that rescue us from emergency and those that are rescuersintoemergency. The former are a means of cultural politics, conservers of the status quo that conceal emergencies; the latter are disruptive events that thrust us into emergencies. Building on Arthur Danto, Jacques Rancière, and Gianni Vattimo, who made aesthetics more responsive to contemporary art, Zabala argues that works of art are not simply a means of elevating consumerism or contemplating beauty but are points of departure to change the world. Radical artists create works that disclose and demand active intervention in ongoing crises. Interpreting works of art that aim to propel us into absent emergencies, Zabala shows how art's ability to create new realities is fundamental to the politics of radical democracy in the state of emergency that is the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7312/zaba18348
INTRODUCTION from:
Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: Since Martin Heidegger said that “only a God can still save us” in a legendary interview with
Der Spiegel, many have interpreted the word “God” too literally.¹ They have ignored that to Heidegger “God” was simply another realm where Being takes place, as he had explained thirty years earlier in “The Origin of the Work of Art.”² In that famous essay he indicates not only how art embodies an ontological struggle between the self-concealing earth and the illuminating world but also that the event of truth can happen in different acts, such as the “essential sacrifice,” “founding a state,” or
AFTERWORD from:
Why Only Art Can Save Us
Abstract: Attentive readers may have noticed how the three epigraphs of this book, from Arthur C. Danto, Jacques Rancière, and Gianni Vattimo, relate to the text. The first pointed out how Martin Heidegger liberated aesthetics from “beauty’s traditional limitation to calm detachment” and situated “beauty as part of the ontology of being human,”¹ the second presented works of art that aim to “produce a new perception of the world” and “create a commitment to its transformation,”² and the third recovered art’s claim to truth and its “theoretical and practical bearing”³ through hermeneutics.
Introducción from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Vargas Julio César
Abstract: ¿Por qué se ha vuelto tan frecuente oír hablar de Hannah Arendt? ¿Por qué incluso se insiste en esta pregunta intentando descifrar la actualidad de un pensamiento que para muchos ya parece inactual? ¿Qué podría decirle a un mundo postotalitario globalizado, que se enfrenta a otras formas de violencias y de conflictos, una autora que habría centrado sus reflexiones en la experiencia del totalitarismo? Los temas explorados en las tres partes de este libro (“Una política de la contingencia”, “El pensar y la responsabilidad personal”; “Memorias, perdón y conflictos”) son en gran medida una respuesta a estas preguntas. Se trata
1 La manifestación política: from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Tassin Etienne
Abstract: En las notas que siguen me gustaría proponer una lectura de la obra de Hannah Arendt que dé testimonio no solamente de la actualidad política de su pensamiento, sino también de su fecunda capacidad para renovar los términos de la filosofía política contemporánea. Sean cuales sean los debates que trazan las grandes líneas de investigación en la actualidad —por ejemplo, la controversia entre liberales y comunitaristas sobre la justicia y el bien; o la cuestión de la organización de una política mundial en el contexto de una globalización económica neoliberal; o el conflicto de interpretaciones sobre las formas efectivas de
2 Política y coraje cívico from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Heuer Wolfgang
Abstract: Después de la experiencia totalitaria, Hannah Arendt consideró necesaria una redefinición fundamental de lo que entendemos por
política. Constató que el actuar político exige coraje en su despliegue porque, en la medida en que entendemos la política como un actuar libre, nos encontramos con los riesgos de la libertad. Teniendo esto a la vista, la autora se refiere así a la comprensión antigua de la política:
4 Pensamiento y violencia from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Quintana Laura
Abstract: Que el fenómeno de la violencia sea un problema que atraviesa el pensamiento de Hannah Arendt puede ser algo más que evidente en todos aquellos textos en los que la autora insiste en trazar una serie de articulaciones para evidenciar la especificidad de ese fenómeno, teniendo a la vista su interés por pensar una política no signada por la dominación y cuyo contenido principal no tuviera que ser la coacción o la fuerza. Pero no es tan evidente que la violencia sea una preocupación fundamental en las reflexiones tardías de Arendt sobre las actividades mentales. En particular ¿qué tiene que
6 Memorias en conflicto en sociedades postotalitarias from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Sánchez Cristina
Abstract: En este ensayo quiero exponer, utilizando un marco de análisis arendtiano, algunas reflexiones en torno a la memoria y su papel en las sociedades democráticas, así como las dificultades y paradojas con las que nos encontramos al tratar el tema. La actual discusión en España acerca de la represión durante el franquismo y de las memorias enfrentadas sobre el mismo tema guían sin duda estas páginas, en un intento de esclarecer alguna de las perplejidades que provoca esa memoria, aún sesenta años después de acaecidos los hechos.
8 Perdón y libertad from:
Hannah Arendt
Author(s) Correa Bernardo
Abstract: Cuando, un poco antes de terminar el capítulo consagrado a la acción, aparece en
La condición humanael breve apartado sobre la “irreversibilidad y el poder de perdonar”, el lector se ve sorprendido por la aparente incongruencia entre la tesis que allí se va a defender y todos los desarrollos anteriores en los que Hannah Arendt ha demostrado, con rigor y en detalle, por qué es imposible deshacer un acto o prever sus consecuencias. Leamos a Arendt:
Introducción from:
Los setenta convulsionan el mundo. Irrumpe el presente histórico
Abstract: Varios factores me han llevado a interesarme por este tema. Uno de ellos se encuentra
3 Inflexión de la Guerra Fría y cambios en el mapa político from:
Los setenta convulsionan el mundo. Irrumpe el presente histórico
Abstract: Si en las esferas económicas y sociales las transformaciones de los setenta fueron estructurales y dieron origen a nuevas configuraciones y formas de organización, sin las cuales resulta casi imposible comprender el desarrollo subsiguiente del presente histórico y de la actualidad mundial más inmediata, se tiene que en el ámbito político –doméstico e internacional– los cambios resultaron ser igualmente significativos, pero situados en un registro menor en cuanto a su alcance sistémico. Ello, en buena parte, obedecía a que las modificaciones políticas y geopolíticas se desplegaban en una cadencia más lenta, debido a que la raigambre de la institucionalidad de
Conclusiones from:
Los setenta convulsionan el mundo. Irrumpe el presente histórico
Abstract: La de los setenta fue una década con características propias. Unas pocas palabras sirven para captar claramente su esencia:
shock, estanflación, o malestar, como ha sostenido Charles S. Maier, desasosiego que, en ocasiones, se confunde con desengaño y desilusión. Malestar tanto mayor cuando se compara con el de los sesenta: “La generación que nos precedió, la de los 60, de tanto desilusionarse ha terminado por abrazar el pragmatismo. En cambio, a nosotros, no habiendo abrigado ilusiones, no nos ha cabido desilusionarnos”²²⁷, concluía lapidariamente Alfredo Jocelyn-Holt.
Book Title: En busca del lugar de la teoría- Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Escobar Luis Javier Orjuela
Abstract: En busca del lugar de la teoría es un ejercicio de reflexión del Grupo de Teoría, de la Universidad de los Andes, sobre la naturaleza, el alcance, los límites, las manifestaciones y el lugar de la teoría en las ciencias sociales, y de su relación con la práctica. En esta experiencia resultó evidente que para quien se interese en la teoría, más allá de la razón por la que lo haga, practicar la crítica y la vigilancia teórica son ejercicios simulténeos y complementarios en el desarrollo mismo de la teoría. Por medio de estos ejercicios hemos visto que no hay diferencia cualitativa entre teoría y práctica, pues tanto investigadores teóricos como empíricos hablan sobre el mundo. La teoría de la teoría no es un proceso de aislamento, sino de aproximación cautelosa e informada no solo al mundo de las ideas, sino también a la realidad. El mayor anhelo del Grupo de Teoría es provocar una intensa y fructífera descusión sobre el lugar y la pertinencia de la teoría en las ciencias sociales. Se daría por satisfecho como colectivo si este trabajo conduce al debate y a la producción de más textos de este tipo. Pero, fundamentalmente, aspira a contagiar en los más jóvenes eso que uno de nuestros miembros llama una "actitud teorizante".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18d83mm
Introducción from:
En busca del lugar de la teoría
Abstract: Los autores de este libro conformamos el llamado Grupo de Teoría. Es la denominación con la que nos identificamos, nos comunicamos y con la que nos hemos hecho conocer. Esta expresión coloquial recoge, por supuesto, solo parte de los intereses que mueven al grupo y que nos han mantenido unidos a lo largo de más de dos años (abril del 2008). El libro que presentamos tiene sentido en la breve pero profunda historia de este colectivo, de manera que conviene adentrarse algo más en su naturaleza y propósitos. En la actualidad contamos con siete miembros, todos ligados a la Universidad
Revelaciones sobre las posibilidades del juego esclarecedor de la teoría en ciencias sociales from:
En busca del lugar de la teoría
Author(s) Núñez Rodolfo Masías
Abstract: El juego esclarecedor del concepto de teoría se aparece en la actualidad como un rompecabezas perverso. Uno que reconfigura las piezas cada vez que el jugador se halla cerca de completarlo. Este juego se revela como un juego punzante y desgarrador, pero también vitalmente desafiante. Si juego pensando que el juego tiene fin, esperando que el objeto-teoría, completo y distinto, aparezca ante mis ávidos ojos, me llevaré una irremediable decepción. El juego propone—eso es lo que colijo después haberlo jugado bastante—cambiar la mentalidad de jugador convencional por una que se satisface no con el resultado, sino con el
La naturaleza de la teoría social y política: from:
En busca del lugar de la teoría
Author(s) Escobar Luis Javier Orjuela
Abstract: En la actividad docente e investigativa de las ciencias sociales, en general, y de la ciencia política, en particular, existen dos grandes tradiciones contrapuestas: la empírico-analítica o positivista y la histórico-hermenéutica. A pesar de que todos los programas de formación en la disciplina incluyen las asignaturas de teoría y filosofía políticas y de que se reconoce la necesidad de que los estudiantes adquieran un buena formación teórica y conceptual, la verdad es que estas dos grandes tradiciones se encuentran divorciadas, como si fueran perspectivas incompatibles y, en la práctica, prevalece un sesgo a favor de la tradición empirista, pues se
Tesis filosóficas para acoger la teoría from:
En busca del lugar de la teoría
Author(s) de Zubiría Samper Sergio
Abstract: El
Diccionario de la Academia de la Lengua Españoladestaca cuatro sentidos etimológicos del términoteoría. El primero, su condición de conocimiento especulativo con independencia de toda aplicación. El segundo, una serie de leyes que sirven para relacionar determinado orden de fenómenos. El tercero, tipos de hipótesis cuyas consecuencias se aplican a toda una ciencia o a una parte importante de esta. Y, el cuarto, entre los antiguos griegos la nominación para algunas procesiones religiosas. En estas acepciones existen ciertos acentos que contiene la noción actual de teoría. La teoría independiente de la práctica; la teoría como cierta legalidad que
En defensa de una actitud teorizante en educación from:
En busca del lugar de la teoría
Author(s) Delgadillo Andrés Mejía
Abstract: Dentro de la literatura en educación y en investigación en educación se ha discutido con frecuencia acerca de la teoría: acerca de su utilidad o inutilidad, de los mecanismos más apropiados para generarla o ponerla a prueba, e incluso de la posibilidad o imposibilidad de construirla. En parte, esta discusión ha tenido como telón de fondo las actuales tendencias que fomentan una profesionalización de la docencia, uno de cuyos aspectos definitorios está relacionado con la adopción de cuerpos teóricos de conocimiento.
Book Title: La arqueología social latinoamericana.-De la teoría a la praxis
Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Aguilar Miguel
Abstract: La arqueología social latinoamericana. De la teoría a la praxis, es una compilación de artículos escritos por arqueólogos, antropólogos e historiadores de la arqueología marxista de viejas y nuevas generaciones de toda América y España. Por primera vez se reúne un conjunto de textos que explora las diferentes formas en que los autores, inspirados en el materialismo histórico, han pensado, reflexionado y actuado en la sociedad desde la disciplina antropológica y arqueológica, a partir no sólo de la propuesta teórica que tuvo un fuerte auge en la arqueología latinoamericana de los años setenta, sino de las experiencias de investigación y la manera de llevarla a la praxis, Este libro es el resultado del simposio Arqueología Social Latinoamericana, llevado a cabo en julio de 2009 en la ciudad de México, en el Congreso de Americanistas y en la Escuela Nacional de Antropología e Historia, y espera mostrar que la arqueología social latinoamericana sigue aún vigente y que, más que nunca, se postula como una importante propuesta teórico-práctica para entender política y científicamente el pasado, actuar críticamente en el presente y, consecuentemente, tener propuestas de modelos sociales alternativos en el futuro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18gzdps
LA ARQUEOLOGÍA SOCIAL LATINOAMERICANA: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Aguilar Miguel
Abstract: Estas palabras que Karl Marx escribió tempranamente, y que también se pueden leer como epitafio en su actual tumba en Londres, pueden ser tomadas como una llamada de atención a la academia y encierran una crítica a la actitud parsimoniosa de su práctica. La razón de ser de este libro puede encontrarse en esa frase; por ese motivo nos sentimos muy complacidos y orgullosos de presentar este volumen sobre la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL), la cual no es otra que una arqueología marxista que, por razones geográfico-nacionales, terminó etiquetándose de esa manera. Sin lugar a dudas, este es un libro
EL ARQUEÓLOGO MILITANTE: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Tantaleán Henry
Abstract: Thomas Patterson ha sido y es una gran inspiración para arqueólogos y arqueólogas de varias partes del mundo pero, sobre todo, para nuestra tan golpeada Latinoamérica. En los momentos actuales, cuando reflexionar sobre nuestra práctica termina en la contemplación y la autocomplacencia, Patterson nos ha recordado y se ha recordado a sí mismo que debemos tener presente de dónde procedemos y hacia dónde debemos dirigirnos. Su producción intelectual originada e inspirada por su consecuencia con la realidad social trasciende las fronteras del idioma inglés, y nos provee de importantes documentos y testimonios de una manera de hacer arqueología comprometida.
¿EL FIN DE LA ARQUEOLOGÍA SOCIAL LATINOAMERICANA? from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Navarrete Rodrigo
Abstract: Mucho se ha debatido sobre el impacto, la trascendencia, la continuidad, las limitaciones y posibilidades de la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL) como bloque consolidado epistémica y políticamente en las últimas casi cuatro décadas (Fournier 1992, 1997, 1999; Gándara 1985, 1993; McGuire 1992; McGuire y Navarrete 1999; Meneses 1991; Navarrete 1995, 2006; Oyuela-Caycedo 1994; Oyuela-Caycedo
et al. 1997; Patterson 1994; Politis 1995). Sin embargo, pocos han sido los trabajos que han colocado sus particularidades dentro del contexto de la geopolítica del conocimiento global y local bajo una perspectiva histórica interactiva y dialógica entre comunidades nacionales y agentes sociales que, en primer
¿ESTRUCTURA OCULTA O NARRATIVA CAUSAL?: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Gándara Manuel
Abstract: Una de las características que distingue a la arqueología social de otras posiciones teóricas en arqueología, desde los padres fundadores como Childe, hasta los avances más recientes, es su énfasis en la explicación. A diferencia de la arqueología tradicional, a la que reaccionaron los primeros arqueólogos sociales, para nosotros no es suficiente decir solamente qué pasó en la historia, sino por qué. He sostenido en otro lado (Gándara 1995) que el objetivo cognitivo central de la posición, es decir, el tipo de conocimiento que nos interesa producir, es de corte explicativo. Ello no implica que otros objetivos cognitivos, como la
LA DIGNIDAD DEL PASADO: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Monterroso Diego Vásquez
Abstract: Como prolongación de la modernidad y del pensamiento ilustrado, la arqueología ha buscado acceder al pasado de la forma lo más objetiva posible. Desde los primeros intentos por una sistematización metodológica en el siglo XIX, pasando por la enajenación en el método y la pérdida de su cualidad como ciencia social, hasta las propuestas más enfocadas en responder a los contextos sociales actuales e incluso como herramienta de emancipación política y social, la arqueología ha mantenido la base de su razón de ser: el acceder de una forma positiva¹ a la realidad, anulando todo aquello que oliera a subjetividad o,
FILOSOFÍA DE LA CIENCIA EN LA PRAXIS ARQUEOLÓGICA: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Bonilla Bernardo Flores
Abstract: En los círculos académicos y en el ámbito de la filosofía de la ciencia predomina el posmodernismo o posmodernidad (PM) como la “vanguardia” teórica que ha venido a redimir e iluminar a la subjetiva e ingenua ciencia “pre-posmoderna”. El posmodernismo trajo consigo conceptos como teoría del caos, teoría de la complejidad, efecto mariposa, y términos como dialogía, democracia de factores, atractores extraños, etcétera, que se propusieron para salvar a la ciencia de su estancamiento empírico-positivista. Quienes introdujeron esta corriente por alguna razón ignoraron que el positivismo empírico ya había sido superado mucho tiempo atrás por una concepción filosófica (aplicada a
BALANCE CRÍTICO DE LA PARTE II: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Abstract: En esta sección se presentaron una serie de textos que plantearon una discusión teórica y que enfatizaron los aspectos ontológicos y epistemológicos utilizados y reactualizados de la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL). Como el lector o lectora pudo apreciar, se presentaron una serie de planteamientos teóricos que sobresalieron por su construcción cognitiva y conceptual pero, también, por una no tan consensuada diversidad dentro de la unidad de la ASL. Esta diversidad, como señaló Navarrete en este volumen (ver parte I), proviene de las diferentes posiciones teóricas que manejan cada uno de sus proponentes y que están acordes con su contexto nacional
TEORÍA Y PRAXIS DE UNA GEOARQUEOLOGÍA DIALÉCTICA PARA EL SIGLO XXI from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Roos Anna-María
Abstract: En la presente síntesis los autores firmantes exponemos de una manera resumida los cometidos y resultados geoarqueológicos que vienen compartiendo con otros colegas como geólogos, geógrafos, antropólogos e historiadores de las universidades de Sevilla y Cádiz (España), de Bremen, Kiel y Bochum (Alemania), y de Nantes (Francia). Todos nosotros colaboramos dedicando nuestro esfuerzo mancomunado a conseguir los objetivos de una investigación centrada en el estudio de los cambios ocurridos en las antiguas líneas de costa del ámbito atlántico-mediterráneo de Andalucía. A su vez, analizamos este proceso en relación con los impactos antrópicos (sociohistóricos) que durante el Holoceno han coadyuvado de
BALANCE CRÍTICO DE LA PARTE III: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Abstract: En esta parte del libro se abordó uno de los componentes más esperados de la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL): las practicas teórico-metodológicas de la ASL. Este conjunto de textos representan un intento por llevar a cabo muchos de los presupuestos teóricos de esta tendencia, por medio del uso de metodologías comunes a las metodologías arqueológicas tradicionales (
v.gr. reconocimiento sistemático, prospección, excavación y técnicas complementarias), pero tratando de hacerlas suyas con mayor o menor éxito, con el objetivo de entender, explicar e incluso interpretar en clave marxista los materiales arqueológicos.
ARQUEOLOGÍA Y REIVINDICACIONES POLITÍCO-SOCIALES: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Prouve Manuel Aguirre-Morales
Abstract: En las circunstancias actuales que vive Perú –donde siguen creciendo la extrema pobreza y la malnutrición– es indispensable que los conocimientos sobre el manejo productivo y sostenible de su territorio, así como la explotación integral y racional de sus recursos naturales, aparentemente lograda durante el pasado precolombino, sean debida y científicamente estudiados, bajo la premisa y posibilidad de que pudieran ser la clave para la seguridad alimentaria de la mayor parte de su población en un futuro no muy lejano.
HACIA UNA ARQUEOLOGÍA MILITANTE: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) Aguilar Miguel
Abstract: Cuando la sociedad se convirtió en un espacio donde confluían las contradicciones sociales y las desigualdades del pasado material y la realidad actual; cuando esa contradicción concentró el poder económico, político y social de millones de seres humanos, quizá de todo el mundo, en manos de un grupo reducido de personas de manera gradual desde los orígenes de las organizaciones humanas hasta nuestros días, fue cuando esas mismas condiciones materiales de subsistencia desiguales nos obligaron a los científicos sociales a hacer de las aulas universitarias escenarios de discusión de soluciones y alternativas a las consecuencias del sistema que parece condenar
BALANCE CRÍTICO DE LA PARTE IV: from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Abstract: El conjunto de textos de esta parte del libro quiere recordar que la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL), como lo ha proclamado desde sus inicios, ha tenido una vocación por mantener los vínculos con la realidad social de la que nunca debió haberse alejado. De esta manera podría, entre otras cuestiones, recuperar la sustancia de la cual se originaron primordialmente muchos de los conceptos que operan actualmente y utilizamos muchos de nosotros. Al hacer esto, también pueden compartir sus deseos por un mundo mejor no sólo intelectual o académico sino, sobre todo, social, al integrarse y caminar en conjunto con la
UTILIZAR LA ARQUEOLOGÍA SOCIAL PARA HACER HABLAR AL PERRO from:
La arqueología social latinoamericana.
Author(s) McGuire Randall H.
Abstract: A menudo, la arqueología es como un perro que habla. Que el perro pueda hablar fascina a la gente, aunque ellos no tienen interés en lo que el perro diga. Desde la década de los setenta, la arqueología social latinoamericana (ASL) ha estado haciendo hablar al perro utilizando la teoría marxista para hacerle decir cosas importantes acerca del mundo moderno. La ASL ha dicho algunas cosas importantes aunque una cantidad de arqueólogos la han criticado rotundamente y desestimado por hacer demasiado hincapié en conceptos, definiciones y etiquetas, y no lo suficiente en la práctica de la arqueología. La actual crisis
Book Title: La arqueología: entre la historia y la prehistoria.-Estudio de una frontera conceptual
Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Suárez Carlo Emilio Piazzini
Abstract: Desde el siglo XIX la arqueología se ha concebido como una etnografía prehistórica o como una ciencia auxiliar de la historia, mientras que en las últimas décadas la certeza de que la disciplina no debe restringirse al pasado prehistórico explica el auge de las denominadas arqueologías históricas. De ahí que la diferencia entre historia y prehistoria no sólo sea cronológica, sino que, y más importante, constituya una actualización de las diferencias entre categorías más amplias como espíritu y materia, espacio y tiempo. Así, preguntarse por el concepto de prehistoria es cuestionarse por las huellas excluidas de la historia en virtud de una metafísica que acerca la escritura alfabética al espíritu, mientras condena las materialidades a una condición abyecta. Asimismo, la lejanía de la prehistoria respecto al presente histórico no es sólo una cuestión temporal, sino que remite al proceso por el cual la diferencia en el espacio fue ordenada en la modernidad como una diferencia en el tiempo. Mediante una espacialización crítica de la oposición historia-prehistoria tal como ha operado en Colombia, se plantea que, cuando la arqueología rompe los límites cronológicos de lo indígena precolombino, se produce una restitución de la diferencia espacial entre prehistoria e historia, y con ello emerge, en los márgenes e intersticios de los espacios sociales, lo no dicho, lo olvidado en el corazón mismo de la historia. Desde esta perspectiva, son las espacialidades y las materialidades las que constituyen el ámbito de referencia de una arqueología que no puede ser simplemente histórica si quiere transgredir el régimen del tiempo moderno.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18pkdks
Introducción from:
La arqueología: entre la historia y la prehistoria.
Abstract: Este estudio se dirige a comprender el proceso de formación de la diferencia entre dos campos de conocimiento, arqueología e historia, analizando el concepto de prehistoria. También quiere evaluar cómo esa diferencia fue apropiada desde una geografía situada en la frontera externa de los centros metropolitanos de producción de conocimiento arqueológico e histórico, como es Colombia. A partir de una definición de las características de los enunciados que constituyen el concepto de prehistoria y de una identificación de las principales rupturas o acercamientos efectuados entre los dos campos de conocimiento desde el siglo xix hasta finales del siglo xx, se
II Aperturas hacia la historia from:
La arqueología: entre la historia y la prehistoria.
Abstract: La nueva arqueología o arqueología procesual dominó el panorama de la arqueología norteamericana durante las décadas de los sesenta y ochenta; además, es muy frecuente que sus planteamientos básicos hayan seguido aplicándose hasta el presente. Su impacto fue importante en otras partes, como es el caso de Europa y Latinoamérica, donde muchos arqueólogos apropiaron sus conceptos para definir lo que era o no era arqueología, así como sus modelos y metodologías para aplicarlos a investigaciones específicas.
Book Title: Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia- Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Tickner Arlene B.
Abstract: El Centro de Estudios Internacionales (CEI), hoy parte activa del Departamento de Ciencia Política de la Universidad de los Andes, se consolidó como pionero en los estudios internacionales en Colombia. Desde allí se exploraron debates cruciales en la teoría de las relaciones internacionales y se produjeron algunas de las conclusiones más importantes sobre análisis de la política exterior colombiana. Algunas de éstas tuvieron que ver con el desarrollo de modelos analíticos y conceptuales para explicar la evolución histórica de la política exterior del país, siendo los más influyen¬tes las ideas del respice polum y respice similia, estrategias diferentes pero no necesariamente exclusivas o contradictorias de inserción en el sistema internacional. También, se elaboraron varias aproximaciones al estudio críti¬co y juicioso de la complejidad de las relaciones con los Estados Unidos, con la región y los países vecinos, y con el resto del mundo. En este contexto se construyeron aproximaciones a temas como el narcotráfico, la integración, los derechos humanos, el medio ambiente, la negociación internacional y la seguridad nacional, regional e internacional. Este libro recopila algunos de los trabajos más representativos que se produjeron en el CEI y el Departa¬mento de Ciencia Política y que hoy hacen parte del acervo académico sobre las relaciones internacionales y la política exterior del país. Aquí se recons¬truye parte importante del estado del debate en esta área y, por supuesto, se sugiere la necesidad de continuar alimentando la discusión.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18z4g6j
Formulando la política exterior colombiana from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Kornat Gerhard Drekonja
Abstract: Cuando empezaron a palparse los primeros resultados de la nueva política exterior latinoamericana, a fines de los años setenta, aparecieron algunos trabajos en los que se trataba de agrupar a los países del continente, tomando como criterio la actividad desarrollada en materia de política exterior. Brasil y Cuba despertaron el mayor interés; México y Venezuela pasaron a ocupar la categoría de potencias regionales; Argentina y Chile merecieron atención, aunque las rupturas en el comportamiento de su política exterior crearon desvíos.
Los desafíos de la política internacional colombiana en los noventa from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Tokatlian Juan Gabriel
Abstract: El inicio de una nueva década coincide, en el caso colombiano, con el comienzo de una nueva administración: la del presidente César Gaviria Trujillo (1990–1994). En medio de un sistema internacional en transición, marcado por la incertidumbre y la complejidad y un escenario interno caracterizado por la inestabilidad y la fragilidad, el nuevo mandatario liberal tomó posesión el 7 de agosto de 1990. Tanto durante la campaña electoral que lo condujo a la Casa de Nariño como en su discurso inaugural, Gaviria afirmó su intención e interés de otorgar permanencia y profundidad a las líneas generales de acción que
Militares y drogas. from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Tokatlian Juan Gabriel
Abstract: El tema de las drogas psicoactivas interpretado como un asunto de seguridad implica una aproximación distinta a un tratamiento de esta cuestión como un fenómeno de salud pública. Al menos, involucra la percepción de un compromiso decisivo del poderío nacional ante un desafío notable y significativo para los intereses y valores vitales y consensuales de un país determinado. Para Estados Unidos y Colombia, durante los ochenta, el fenómeno de las drogas psicoactivas se transformó en un problema central de las respectivas seguridades estatales. Sin embargo, en el caso colombiano —e independientemente de su identificación como tal por parte de las
Construcción de alternativas de autoridad en la periferia. from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Mason Ann C.
Abstract: La piedra angular del Estado es la autoridad exclusiva sobre su territorio (el monopolio legítimo de la autoridad). El reconocimiento mutuo entre actores soberanos de que no existe una autoridad superior a la del Estado divide el espacio político global entre dominios discretos y cerrados, y constituye el arreglo descentralizado del sistema internacional. Esta restricción compartida de fronteras “internas”, soberanas frente a autoridades “externas”, da soporte a las aspiraciones estatales de dominación política, al tiempo que deslegitima alternativas de dominación no soberanas (Kratochwil 1995; Walker 1993).
Derecho internacional y conflicto interno. from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Villa Alejandro Valencia
Abstract: Colombia vive una conflictiva situación de orden público, caracterizada por una agudización de las violencias. Todos anhelamos la paz. Sin embargo, el objetivo no es la paz, sino la democracia y la justicia, acompañadas de profundas reformas sociales y políticas, que nos conduzcan a la consolidación del estado de derecho. De todas formas, conociendo la incapacidad del Estado y de sus partidos políticos de apoyo, tales transformaciones se lograrán a muy largo plazo, siendo vanas ilusiones en el presente.
Cooperación internacional en ciencia y tecnología. from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) De Greiff Alexis
Abstract: Una de las causas de la inestabilidad económica de los países latinoamericanos es su gran dependencia de las exportaciones de productos agrícolas y de importaciones de productos manufacturados, así como una baja productividad per cápita. Desde la década de los sesenta se ha planteado, pues, la necesidad de una política de sustitución de importaciones a través del apoyo a industrias de productos manufacturados. Tal iniciativa tiene en el desarrollo de la actividad científico-tecnológica su ingrediente más importante. De hecho, no es casualidad el apoyo dado por parte de la Alianza para el Progreso y el Banco Interamericano de Desarrollo (BID)
La cooperación externa de la Unión Europea en materia de lucha contra la droga from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Laurent Muriel
Abstract: Los países de la Unión Europea son, después de Estados Unidos, los principales consumidores de estupefacientes. También son importantes centros de blanqueo de capitales ilícitos y fabricantes de precursores químicos necesarios en el procesamiento de las drogas. Debido a la actual política internacional en materia de drogas, tanto la producción como el consumo de estupefacientes tienen efectos nocivos en los ámbitos económico, político y social, además de la salud pública.
Elementos para un nuevo paradigma de las Relaciones Internacionales. from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Tickner Arlene B.
Abstract: La aparición, a finales del siglo XIX y comienzos del XX de diferentes interpretaciones sobre las Relaciones Internacionales, basadas en nociones distintas del quehacer mundial, marca el nacimiento de esta disciplina como ciencia o teoría. Sin embargo, desde 1948, cuando Hans Morgenthau escribió lo que sería una interpretación definitiva sobre la “política entre las naciones”, dicha teoría ha sido dominada, casi exclusivamente, por la escuela realista, y a su vez por Estados Unidos. El colapso de la Unión Soviética, junto con el fin de la Guerra Fría y de la bipolaridad que caracterizaba al mundo de la posguerra, han tendido
El pensamiento sobre las Relaciones Internacionales en América Latina from:
Relaciones Internacionales y Política Exterior de Colombia
Author(s) Tickner Arlene B.
Abstract: Pese al marcado silencio del Tercer Debate en lo que respecta a los países del Tercer Mundo, en el último decenio ha habido una serie de intentos por analizar aquellas características específicas que comparten los países periféricos, que obligan a una revaluación de los marcos teóricos tradicionales. Estos esfuerzos han surgido, en particular, como respuesta a la percepción generalizada de que la inmensa mayoría de los conflictos violentos en la era de la posguerra fría se concentra en el Tercer Mundo, y entrañan conflictos internos dentro de los Estados, en vez de guerras entre ellos¹. Un número considerable intenta explicar
Book Title: Conflicto armado-Seguridad y construcción de paz en Colombia
Publisher: Universidad de los Andes
Author(s): Rettberg Angelika
Abstract: Este volumen recoge una muestra de la producción sobre temas relacionados con el conflicto armado, la seguridad y la construcción y las negociaciones de paz en Colombia por parte de académicos que están o han estado vinculados al Departamento de Ciencia Política de la Universidad de los Andes. La producción es más reciente que la que el Departamento ha tenido en otros temas. Se explica por el desarrollo paralelo, a partir del 2002, de una estructura tanto curricular como de investigación para ahondar el conocimiento y el análisis de estos temas. Como resultado, las investigaciones y publicaciones sobre temas relacionados con el conflicto armado, la seguridad y la construcción de paz han aumentado significativamente en el Departamento. Los textos compilados aquí muestran la diversidad de las aproximaciones desarrolladas, que incluyen miradas a los procesos de paz, discusiones acerca de la internacionalización del conflicto armado, miradas a actores selectos —como los grupos guerrilleros y el sector privado—, análisis de los retos de la seguridad doméstica y regional y estudios referentes a la construcción de paz y la justicia transicional en Colombia. El libro constituye un recorrido histórico por los principales debates en los temas señalados y en ese sentido también es un aporte a la docencia universitaria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt18z4gf5
Conflicto prolongado, múltiples protagonistas y negociaciones escalonadas from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Bejarano Ana María
Abstract: Para empezar quisiera proponer una descripción del conflicto político colombiano que enfatiza tanto su dimensión política, como su duración a lo largo de un prolongado período. Ambas características, como se verá, tienen implicaciones para una eventual negociación.
Guerras de guerrillas, acuerdos de paz y regímenes políticos from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Nasi Carlo
Abstract: La interconexión entre guerras de guerrillas, acuerdos de paz y regímenes políticos es problemática y compleja. Las guerras de guerrillas y los acuerdos de paz, en parte, determinan la naturaleza de los regímenes políticos, al alterar la relación que existe entre el Estado y la sociedad. Abordar las relaciones entre estos tres factores es importante, porque considerarlos en forma independiente ha sido una fuente de confusiones analíticas. Cabe anotar que las transiciones democráticas en América Latina han tenido lugar con o sin guerras de guerrillas. Sin embargo, la firma de acuerdos de paz entre Estados y grupos rebeldes ha ocurrido
Saboteadores de los procesos de paz en Colombia from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Nasi Carlo
Abstract: Colombia ha padecido un conflicto armado interno prolongado. En décadas recientes cuatro gobiernos llevaron a cabo negociaciones de paz con los grupos guerrilleros en un intento por hallar una solución pacífica a la confrontación armada. A pesar de estos esfuerzos, no se logró la paz. En cada uno de los procesos de paz hubo saboteadores que intentaron torpedear las negociaciones, aunque sólo en ciertas ocasiones tuvieron éxito. La identidad de los saboteadores cambió en el transcurso de las negociaciones. Dependiendo del proceso de paz en cuestión, hubo actos de sabotaje por parte de algunos grupos rebeldes (o sus facciones), de
Bajo la mira de los actores armados from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Sánchez Miguel García
Abstract: El escándalo de la “parapolítica” puso en evidencia la cercana relación que ha existido en Colombia entre actores armados ilegales y élites políticas. Este vínculo, que tiene profundas repercusiones electorales, no es exclusivo de los grupos paramilitares de extrema derecha y los sectores políticos más reaccionarios del país; las guerrillas también han desarrollado relaciones con sectores políticos de izquierda, que les han permitido tener algún impacto sobre el sistema político colombiano. Dada la magnitud de la conexión entre autodefensas y políticos, la mayor parte de las investigaciones sobre el vínculo entre actores armados y política electoral se ha concentrado en
Renovarse para durar from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Ortiz Román D.
Abstract: Tradicionalmente, las Fuerzas Armadas Revolucionarias de Colombia (FARC) han sido consideradas como una organización insurgente excepcionalmente longeva, recibiendo sistemáticamente el calificativo de “la guerrilla más antigua de América Latina”. En favor de este argumento se ha planteado que el grupo ha permanecido activo al menos durante 38 años, si se establece su fundación en el momento en el que asumió su actual nombre, en 1966, y todavía más si se vincula su nacimiento a la actividad armada de las guerrillas comunistas y liberales durante la época de la Violencia (1948-1953). Sin embargo, lo cierto es que esta imagen no corresponde
Agentes de inseguridad en la región andina from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Tickner Arlene B.
Abstract: Los procesos actuales de globalización están transformando la geografía social y política del mundo. Muchos de los nuevos ordenamientos socioespaciales no coinciden con las jurisdicciones estatales y son cada vez más incompatibles con el principio de la soberanía territorial (Inayatullah y Blaney 2004; Mason 2005). Esta reconfiguración del espacio queda vívidamente ilustrada con la desterritorialización de la seguridad en la era de la posguerra Fría. Los dominios de la seguridad no se ubican únicamente por encima, por debajo y a los lados del Estado territorial: también se entrecruzan y se traslapan en otros espacios, presentando una matriz de seguridad global
Diseñar el futuro from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Rettberg Angelika
Abstract: Diez años después de la publicación del documento rector, la vigorosa actividad en
La barbarie horizontal from:
Conflicto armado
Author(s) Orozco Iván
Abstract: Dentro de la comunidad de académicos y profesionales que manejan de manera empírica el aún naciente campo de la “justicia transicional” hay actualmente un muy interesante debate sobre la relación que existe entre la verdad, la justicia y la reconciliación. En parte debido a la carencia de conocimiento confiable, este nuevo campo está infestado de “creencias” más que de afirmaciones científicamente respaldadas. Basándose no sólo en creencias tradicionales, sino también en los testimonios de víctimas individuales, algunos autores afirman que lo más probable es que el conocimiento de la verdad sobre la identidad de los perpetradores y las circunstancias de
INTRODUCCIÓN from:
La historia del tiempo presente:
Abstract: La proyección que en la actualidad se advierte en dirección de este nuevo campo del conocimiento, no constituye una cuestión baladí ni para la historia ni para las ciencias sociales en general, porque desde aquellas coyunturas decimonónicas en las que se dio inicio
3 CONSTRUYENDO LA HISTORIA DEL TIEMPO PRESENTE from:
La historia del tiempo presente:
Abstract: Si se quisiera agrupar a los historiadores que han expresado su posición frente a la historia del tiempo presente, se tendría que tres actitudes convocan a la amplia mayoría. Un primer grupo, entre los cuales podría citarse a Serge Bernstein y Pierre milza, ha argumentado que en cuanto a sus objetivos, métodos y fuentes, la historia del tiempo presente no difiere en lo fundamental de aquella historia que se viene practicando de manera profesional desde el siglo XIX.¹⁵⁵
4 EL LUGAR DE 1989 EN EL PRESENTE HISTÓRICO CONTEMPORÁNEO from:
La historia del tiempo presente:
Abstract: A inicios del 2009 la revista
Global Societyconvocó la recepción de artículos para un dosier sobre un tema de gran actualidad y evidente pertinencia: el impacto global de 1989. Apenas se leían los términos de la convocatoria, una serie de preguntas se venían a la mente: ¿cómo y desde qué perspectiva se debe abordar en las ciencias sociales el impacto de un acontecimiento?; ¿se trata de evaluar la significación de un año-acontecimiento, o por 1989 debe presumirse la “revolución pacífica” en la Europa centro-oriental?; ante los radicales cambios que ha experimentado el mundo en los inicios del nuevo siglo,
Capítulo iii Realidad y perspectiva from:
Ooyoriyasa
Abstract: El problema de la creencia, siguiendo a Mary Douglas, radica en cómo ser creída.¹ Su solución, lejos de encontrarse en el análisis de la conducta individual o las opiniones personales, reside en el examen de la forma en que el mundo ha sido socialmente construido.² Comprender una sociedad d iferente a la nuestra, entender por qué algunas personas piensan y actúan de una manera aparentemente extraña, implica, en un primer lugar, penetraren los supuestos culturales compartidos. Que los ette consideren que los sueños son interpretables y que le otorguen un lugar privilegiado a su desciframiento dentro de la vida diaria,
Capítulo iv La persona y el sueño from:
Ooyoriyasa
Abstract: ¿Minikima ooyoriga? ¿Minikima ooyoriga sijnaka?es una fórmula de saludo matutino ette cuya traducción puede ser “¿Cómo soñaste? ¿Cómo soñaste anoche?”. Para este pueblo la pregunta sobre la actividad onírica reemplaza a aquella que, siendo tan común en nuestra sociedad, versa sobre la calidad del reposo o el estado de ánimo de quien acaba de despertar. La explicación de este hecho radica en la singular valoración que se le ha otorgado a la experiencia de soñar. Lejos de ser pensados como simples elaboraciones fantasiosas, los ette conciben los sueños como eventos reales y significativos durante los cuales el soñante puede
El pensamiento heterárquico: from:
Más acá, o más allá.
Author(s) Jiménez John Alejandro Pérez
Abstract: Sobre el particular tema de indagación del presente artículo, señalado en el título, y partiendo de la premisa según la cual el proceso de investigación se orienta a la búsqueda y desarrollo del conocimiento con un sentido y con un significado “satisfactorio intelectualmente” (Braithwaite, 2000), se puede decir que conocemos algo.
Insumos para un diálogo sobre la alternatividad: from:
Más acá, o más allá.
Author(s) Arias Daniel Augusto Céspedes
Abstract: Hay en la actualidad varias propuestas en el ámbito de la teoría social y política para las cuales el proyecto de la modernidad es insuficiente y, por lo tanto, se presentan a sí mismas como sus “alternativas”. Su punto de convergencia es el convencimiento de que la modernidad, comprendida como la actual forma hegemónica de conocer y ser, no es ni la mejor ni debe ser la única posibilidad. Se levantan frente a su carácter excluyente y totalizador, a la vez que denuncian su incapacidad de ofrecer respuestas satisfactorias a problemas y preguntas fundamentales¹.
Book Title: Las letras de la Provincia en la República.-Educación, escuelas y libros de la patria en las provincias de la Costa Atlántica Colombiana, 1821-1886
Publisher: Universidad de Los Andes, Colombia
Author(s): Puello Rafael Enrique Acevedo
Abstract: El propósito central de este trabajo será estudiar las condiciones sociales de la difusión de las letras en Colombia, particularmente en las provincias de la costa Atlántica colombiana, fijando nuestra atención en el proceso de organización de la educación, la formación de las primeras escuelas republicanas, las enseñanzas particulares y la presencia de varios libros de la patria entre 1821-1886. Intentaré, a partir de una lectura menos “prevenida" y “dogmática" del siglo XIX, demostrar como detrás de los lugares comunes y las falsas oposiciones construidas entre el centralismo y el federalismo, los credos políticos liberales o conservadores de los caudillos que empuñaron las armas, de la Iglesia y sus difíciles relaciones con el Estado, existió un grupo de autoridades políticas, maestros, vecinos, ciudadanos, hombres, mujeres y gentes de diversa procedencia social, es decir, habitantes de las ciudades, las parroquias, los cantones o de otros lugares distantes de las capitales provinciales y del extranjero, interesadas por conformar y “reunirse" en pequeñas juntas y asociaciones de instrucción pública, en fundar establecimientos escolares, traer y publicar obras de educación, elaborar estados demostrativos acerca de las poblaciones y las escuelas, entre otras actividades políticas, cívicas y religiosas que fueron dando cuenta de la presencia paulatina de una inicial cultura letrada en las provincias de la costa Atlántica en la República de Colombia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7440/j.ctt1zw5th7
Capítulo 1 “La legislación de la República”. from:
Las letras de la Provincia en la República.
Abstract: La alfabetización de las comunidades locales fue una de las principales tareas y proyectos que debieron retomar y reconsiderar las sociedades hispanoamericanas después de la segunda década del siglo XIX, luego de la abdicación de Fernando vii, de la crisis diplomática de España entre 1808 y 1810 y de la proclamación de las diversas juntas de Gobierno en América¹. Decimos
retomar y reconsiderarporque, al menos para el caso del Virreinato del Nuevo Reino de Granada, desde mediados del siglo XVIII, más exactamente después de la expulsión de la Compañía de Jesús en 1767, la enseñanza de las primeras letras,
Capítulo 4 El funcionamiento de la cultura escolar en las provincias del Estado de Bolívar, 1857-1886 from:
Las letras de la Provincia en la República.
Abstract: El proceso de organización y el funcionamiento de
la cultura escolara partir del análisis de las iniciativas y las vivencias de las provincias del Estado de Bolívar en relación con la fundación de escuelas, entre 1857 y 1886, es el foco de atención en este capítulo. Por cultura escolar se entiende el conjunto de prácticas y actividades llevadas a cabo en las poblaciones de las provincias, especialmente, por los entusiastas de la educación, para fundar las escuelas del pueblo o para promocionar las enseñanzas en los colegios particulares. Estas prácticas y actividades tenían que ver con la llegada o
Capítulo 5 La casa de los libros. from:
Las letras de la Provincia en la República.
Abstract: Otra de las funciones primordiales de los entusiastas de la educación en las provincias fue la difusión de las letras por vía de la publicación, la comercialización y la circulación de una variedad de libros al servicio de la alfabetización y la instrucción pública en general, sobre todo después de la década de 1820 cuando se iba afirmando la libertad de imprenta, de pensamiento y de comercio en la República de Colombia¹. Después de ese año, cada vez más los hombres de letras en las provincias, caracterizados por su
extrema diversidad(en tanto no solo eran los autores consagrados sino
Síntesis y conclusiones from:
Las letras de la Provincia en la República.
Abstract: En este libro se ofreció una nueva mirada acerca del siglo XIX colombiano, al tratar de estudiar las condiciones sociales de la difusión de las letras en las provincias de la Costa Atlántica en la República de Colombia entre 1821 y 1886. Ello ha sido fundamental para mostrar las diversas actividades políticas, religiosas y culturales que favorecieron la propagación de la educación, pero también para caracterizar y registrar la presencia de una variedad de actores dedicados al ejercicio de la Ilustración, la fundación de escuelas, las enseñanzas particulares, el comercio, la venta y la producción de diversas obras educativas en
Introducción from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Cuéllar Alejandro Castillejo
Abstract: El título de este libro,
Lailusiónde la justicia transicional, plantea de entrada una ambivalencia incorporada en el términoilusión: parte de la etimología del sustantivoilusiónevoca un “engaño” (debido a un “plan fantástico” o “deseo”), una “apariencia” o “percepción falsa,” un “espejismo” o una “trampa o broma de los sentidos”, de ahí el términoilusionista, alguien que realiza trucos para engañar alotro, un mago o prestidigitador. La expresiónhacerse ilusionescapta este aspecto del origen de la palabra. Sin embargo, el verboilusionartambién evoca con más claridad el acto de “entretener” o “albergar” “esperanzas” o
Utopías revolucionarias e idearios democráticos en la Argentina posdictadura: from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Guglielmucci Ana
Abstract: Luego de varias dictaduras cívico-militares en el siglo xx, desde 1983, Argentina comenzó un proceso de transición hacia la democracia que supuso la reconfiguración de las utopías revolucionarias y la transformación de diversas prácticas autoritarias, institucionales y culturales. La apertura de un proceso de justicia transicional, en la década de los ochenta, implicó la consolidación de nuevos pactos sociales e imaginarios de nación fundados en los valores democráticos y en la doctrina de los derechos humanos (ddhh). Tales pactos, expresados en la consigna “nunca más”, implicaron revisar el lugar de la violencia en la resolución de los conflictos sociales internos
Más allá de consentimiento y coacción: from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Bueno-Hansen Pascha
Abstract: El procesamiento de casos de violencia sexual en un conflicto armado interno se ha convertido en parte de la agenda internacional de la justicia transicional. El campo de la justicia transicional ha ganado terreno en las últimas décadas en respuesta a las necesidades de las sociedades posconflicto que quedaron fuera del alcance de la ley penal y de los mecanismos oficiales de justicia. La expresión
justicia transicionalmarca un cambio en la aproximación a los contextos de transición política y a los problemas encontrados por defensores y activistas de derechos humanos para promover la reconciliación y la paz social. No
¿Qué le pueden decir las orientaciones sexuales y las identidades de género a la justicia transicional? from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Amaya José Fernando Serrano
Abstract: En la triada entre memoria, reparación y garantías de no repetición que da contenido a la idea de justicia transicional, la cuestión de la verdad ocupa un lugar central. Producida mediante una serie de tecnologías operadas por voces expertas, tal verdad es con frecuencia objeto de debates y disputas. Hablar de memorias y verdades en plural se ofrece como una forma de tranzar tales disputas y facilitar la aparición de un relato consensuado que permita el tránsito al nuevo pacto social que promete la justicia transicional. Sin embargo, la pluralización de las memorias y las verdades o la ilusión de
Comunidad de Paz de San José de Apartadó: from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Muñoz Federico Guillermo
Abstract: Cansado de ser un sociólogo del sillón y motivado por todo lo que implica una salida de campo, decidí gestionar la posibilidad de visitar la Comunidad de Paz de San José de Apartadó (Apartadó, Antioquia). Contacté al sacerdote jesuita Javier Giraldo y le comenté mi intención de viajar al Urabá antioqueño. Él ha acompañado a la comunidad desde hace mucho tiempo. El padre Javier rápidamente me respondió que la decisión no dependía de su aprobación, y que debía consultarla con el Consejo Interno de la Comunidad.
Un imaginario sin imágenes: from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Chavarría Rodrigo Alexis Ortega
Abstract: En 1980 una “inocente” fotografía del club deportivo San Francisco publicada en un popular periódico porteño de la región chilena de Valparaíso fue el objeto detonante de una dura reprimenda jerárquica para un entonces joven militante del Frente Patriótico Manuel Rodríguez (fpmr)¹ que gustaba de la práctica del fútbol en las ligas de aficionados de la región (Peña, 2006, 33). La reprimenda “superior” causó el efecto necesario; comprender que la militancia activa, armada y comprometida en tiempos de dictadura necesitaba de manera vital de la clandestinidad y del bajo perfil. Se supo nuevamente de las andanzas de este joven futbolista
Intérpretes públicos, teodiceas de la nación y la creación del futuro en la crisis de inicios del siglo XXI en Argentina from:
La ilusión de la justicia transicional:
Author(s) Visacovsky Sergio E.
Abstract: Entre diciembre del 2001 y parte del 2002, Argentina vivió uno de sus momentos más dramáticos. A un profundo desastre económico caracterizado por el desempleo y la pobreza, se le sumó la pérdida de legitimidad política tanto de quienes ocupaban el Gobierno como de la oposición. El 3 de diciembre del 2001 el Gobierno nacional de la Alianza impuso el famoso “corralito”, tal como se denominó a las duras restricciones sobre la extracción de los depósitos bancarios bajo el pretexto de impedir la fuga de capitales. En seguida se desencadenaron masivas protestas, especialmente en la ciudad de Buenos Aires, denominadas
6. Cenas da corte do Rio de Janeiro from:
Dramaturgia, ainda: reconfigurações e rasuras
Author(s) Hoisel Evelina
Abstract: Sem nenhuma exceção, as comédias de Martins Pena procuram construir e caracterizar a Corte do Rio de Janeiro. Através das rubricas que indicam a localização da cena, o espaço da geografia social do Rio de Janeiro é demarcado e se insere na superfície textual como um palco de múltiplas cenas. Todavia, enquanto espaço físico, é apenas referenciado. As várias alusões ao Rio de Janeiro não se fazem no sentido de uma descrição paisagística de seu cenário. Apenas algumas referências podem indicar a sua topografia, suas ruas, seus prédios: Catete, Jardim Botânico, Paineiras, Carioca, templo inglês na rua dos Borbonos, teatro
7. Cinema de desassossego: from:
Dramaturgia, ainda: reconfigurações e rasuras
Author(s) Maia Guilherme
Abstract: Definir com precisão a classe de filmes considerados merecedores da
griffe“noir” é tarefa bem complexa. Série, estilo, escola, gênero, movimento, ciclo ou tudo isso ao mesmo tempo? Alain Silver e Elizabeth Ward flagram muitas dificuldades na captura da natureza donoircinematográfico: “Parece claro para todos que existe uma ‘série’noirentre os filmes produzidos em Hollywood. É outra questão definir suas características essenciais.”² (SILVER, WARD, 1992, p. 398, tradução nossa) Em livro considerado uma das obras de referência de maior fôlego no campo dos estudos sobre ofilm noir³ – termo aplicado por críticos franceses em 1946 para
5 Teorias from:
Geografia e filosofia: contribuição para o ensino do pensamento geográfico
Abstract: Para este exercício, não nos ateremos apenas às características das teorias e seus “criadores”, mas vamos procurar contextualizálas historicamente para que sua compreensão seja, a nosso ver, mais facilitada. Assim, poderemos recorrer a vários elementos, como o nível tecnológico do período histórico, a doutrina que subjaz à teoria, as relações filosóficas do momento, por exemplo.
Book Title: A persistência dos deuses: religião, cultura e natureza- Publisher: SciELO - Editora UNESP
Author(s): CRUZ EDUARDO RODRIGUES DA
Abstract: PARADIDÁTICOS - SÉRIE: CULTURA Um dos traços culturais brasileiros que mais se destaca é o da pluralidade e vitalidade religiosas e o "jeitinho brasileiro" para lidar com a questão religiosa está presente nesta obra. Com um texto empolgante, o autor apresenta "as regras do jogo" no universo das religiões estabelecidas e põe em xeque o dito popular de que "religião, política e futebol não se discutem", ao abordar: a identidade nacional, a separação Igreja-Estado, a obrigatoriedade do ensino religioso no país e o entendimento moderno da religião como forma de cultura. Eduardo Rodrigues propõe uma reflexão sobre as características universais da religião ao debater a forma como ela produz deuses e seus mundos sobrenaturais.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7476/9788539303359
Book Title: Violência dói e não é direito- Publisher: SciELO - Editora UNESP
Author(s): DOS SANTOS FIGUEIREDO WAGNER
Abstract: O tema da violência contra a mulher é abordado neste livro de maneira franca e objetiva, analisando-o como uma questão social e de saúde pública. A violência contra a mulher pode ser verbal, física e sexual, praticada por familiares, conhecidos e até mesmo por instituições públicas. São discutidos casos reais de abusos e agressões, em especial no âmbito das relações domésticas, uma vez que sua característica familiar está na origem da dificuldade cultural em considerá-la um problema da sociedade. Os autores questionam as causas do problema, os limites dos serviços de saúde, as mudanças culturais necessárias para alterar esse quadro e o impacto da violência na saúde da mulher. Analisam os aspectos éticos e jurídicos da agressão e fornecem informações úteis a respeito da rede de assistência à mulher em situação de violência.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7476/9788539303472
2 “Ela me faz perder a cabeça”: from:
Violência dói e não é direito
Abstract: Vimos que as violências de que são acometidas as mulheres, na sua grande maioria, são perpetradas por parceiros ou ex-parceiros, caracterizando-se como uma violência que ocorre nas relações de afetividade e de intimidade, e no ambiente da casa/família. Comentamos, rapidamente, quão espantosa é essa ocorrência, sobretudo considerando o número muito grande de vezes que acontece. Surpreende que, para as mulheres, o ambiente doméstico não seja mais seguro que a rua ou a cidade. Causa espanto que rela ções construídas para serem de afeto e amor surjam, em tão grande escala, como relações violentas. Por isso uma pergunta não cala: “Por
4 Um tapinha não dói? from:
Violência dói e não é direito
Abstract: Neste capítulo abordaremos os impactos da violência na saúde das mulheres que a experimentam. Diversos estudos científicos mostram que esses impactos são de várias ordens, além de numerosos. Constituem danos, como adoecimentos, que acometem diferentes partes do corpo e também a mente, bem como agravos mais gerais, como sofrimentos, transtornos mentais variados ou dores inespecíficas, e também, por vezes, específicas. Por essa razão, em capítulo anterior, tratamos dessa violência como um contexto que traz adoecimentos, representando situações de alto risco e caracterizando as mulheres como uma população muito vulnerável nessa direção.
3 A parábola como forma literária from:
O gênero da parábola
Abstract: Da pesquisa sobre a conceituação da parábola como um gênero literário o que se pode declarar inicialmente é que, especialmente em língua portuguesa, o material bibliográfico é bastante limitado. Várias das obras de teoria literária em que buscamos um conceito sobre o gênero nem sequer traziam alistado o verbete.¹ Mesmo aquelas em que pudemos encontrar algo a respeito mostraram-se um tanto quanto lacônicas na apresentação do conteúdo pesquisado. Contudo, para o estabelecimento de um confronto, passaremos primeiramente a elencar as várias definições encontradas e, a partir daí, procuraremos analisar as características específicas da parábola, não mais como uma espécie desenvolvida
4 Considerações sobre a parábola e a fábula from:
O gênero da parábola
Abstract: Mesmo já tendo discorrido detalhadamente sobre a parábola como forma literária e também sobre suas características específicas, diante da constante falta de clareza entre os limites da parábola e da fábula, propomo-nos, com base em um confronto entre as duas modalidades, tentar uma delimitação mais precisa entre elas.
UMA PÓS-MODERNIDADE TRÁGICA: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) Bordonal Guilherme Cantieri
Abstract: O campo de uma historiografia moderna se caracterizaria:
O PROBLEMA DO SENTIDO HISTÓRICO EM HISTÓRIA DAS IDEIAS: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) Lopes Marcos Antônio
Abstract: Nos meados do século passado, o filósofo britânico Robin George Collingwood ironizou certo gênero de historiadores que, segundo ele, em busca de escrever boa História, acabavam por exibir em seus textos eruditos algumas notáveis singularidades, mormente as relacionadas a certas carências de sentido histórico. Com efeito, há um emprego muito difundido da expressão sentido histórico, utilizada comumente na acepção de teleologia, de preparação de um determinado presente por agentes históricos situados no passado ou mesmo de um determinado futuro por atores vivendo no tempo presente. Aqui, a expressão é empregada com conotação bem diversa. Em vez de caracterizar uma filosofia
QUESTÕES CONCEITUAIS NA HISTÓRIA AMBIENTAL from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) de Almeida Jozimar Paes
Abstract: Assim, por intermédio do reconhecimento desta dinâmica e amplitude de abordagem conceitual, como uma constelação expressando suas características, pretendemos apresentar nossa reflexão no campo do conhecimento da história ambiental.
A CRISE DOS PARADIGMAS NO CINEMA BRASIlEIRO: from:
Epistemologias da história
Author(s) Bueno Fábio M.
Abstract: A figura do bandido é tema comum no cinema, personagens “fora-da-lei” circularam e ainda circulam nas películas. Das primeiras experiências com o tema do Cangaço até as produções mais recentes ligadas ao banditismo urbano, seja ele o traficante ou delinquente, os filmes não passaram intactos aos influentes discursos que nortearam a produção artística de suas épocas. Assim, dentro dessa consideração, investigo como os filmes
Deus e o Diabo na Terra do Sol(1964) eBandido da Luz Vermelha(1968) interpretaram algumas ideias construídas em torno do tema darevolução culturalnoTerceiro Mundo.
A geografia cultural brasileira: from:
Geografia cultural: uma antologia, Vol. 1
Author(s) Rosendahl Zeny
Abstract: Quais foram as razões que levaram ao desenvolvimento tardio da geografia cultural no Brasil? Em que contexto esse subcampo emerge no Brasil? Como se caracteriza
Os santuários como lugares de construção do sagrado e de memória hierofânica: from:
Geografia cultural: uma antologia, Vol. 2
Author(s) Santos Maria da Graça Mouga Poças
Abstract: Os santuários são um tema de estudo com interesse geográfico e podem ser analisados em termos monográficos ou em uma escala que transcende o local, pressupondo uma intenção comparativa. Neste último caso, o esforço de investigação dirige-se mais à densidade e à distribuição desses lugares, características que, quando cartografadas, revelam as eventuais disparidades existentes entre diferentes regiões e países. Não é esse tipo de análise comparativa que desenvolvemos; optamos por dedicar nossa atenção, principalmente, a um único santuário.¹ No que toca ao catolicismo, classificam-se como santuários as igrejas ou outros lugares sagrados, sempre que neles concorram dois requisitos expressamente previstos
Relação entre violência urbana e práticas sociais em espaços públicos a partir da análise do discurso: from:
Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) de Santana de Souza Júnior Xisto Serafim
Abstract: Essa realidade se reproduz bem no contexto socioespacial de Campina Grande, na Paraíba, em virtude da complexidade de seu espaço urbano, que apresenta tanto as características estruturais de um espaço em processo de complexificação quanto
Complementaridade das técnicas quantitativas e qualitativas nos estudos ambientais: from:
Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Rosolen Vania
Abstract: O desenvolvimento de pesquisas em meio ambiente exige conceitos, métodos e aplicação de técnicas inter e multidisciplinares. O paradigma ambiental que ocupa o centro das discussões econômicas, políticas e sociais em todas as esferas de governo é um dos enfoques da geografia. Contudo, ao ampliar o foco sobre os objetos de estudo classificados como ambientais, inúmeras possibilidades existem dentro da geografia, permitindo a aplicação de métodos e técnicas por vezes mais quantitativos ou qualitativos em razão do caráter físico e humano que a caracteriza.
Abordagem qualitativa na identificação das competências e habilidades sociais dos agentes de saúde no município de Campina Grande/PB from:
Pesquisa qualitativa em geografia: reflexões teórico-conceituais e aplicadas
Author(s) Pereira Martha Priscila Bezerra
Abstract: A Vigilância Ambiental em Saúde (VAS) caracteriza-se como um conjunto de ações que, entre outras práticas, detecta qualquer mudança nos fatores determinantes e condicionantes ambientais, buscando viabilizar medidas de prevenção e controle dos fatores do ambiente que interferem na saúde
APRESENTAÇÃO from:
Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Simanke Richard Theisen
Abstract: Num trabalho dedicado a um inventário do “estado atual da arte” no campo daquilo que veio a ser conhecido como
filosofia da biologiadesde os anos 1960, Ruse (1988) a considerava como uma subdisciplina, dentro do campo mais amplo da filosofia da ciência. Essa reivindicação assinalava uma nova forma de relação entre os dois discursos (filosófico e biológico), à medida que, ao contrário das assim chamadas filosofias biológicas que a precederam – interrogações mais ou menos sistemáticas sobre a significação e as implicações filosóficas dos fenômenos vitais –, a forte institucionalização que muito cedo caracterizou o trabalho em filosofia da biologia
“Máquina de Lacan (Lacan Machine)” ou a audição do significante from:
Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Marques Rodrigo Vieira
Abstract: Quando se trata de definir a posição do pensamento lacaniano na história do pensamento ocidental, uma possibilidade seria a de situá-lo na linhagem do pensamento da existência que conduz a um longo retrocesso na história até o momento do contato da filosofia com a religião,² mas que conheceu uma exaltação de uma escala mundial no século 20, sob o impacto da filosofia heideggeriana. A originalidade da posição de Jacques Lacan nessa linhagem que conta com numerosos filósofos importantes, consiste, em primeiríssimo lugar, no fato de ter articulado a noção de “existência” em relação com uma função particular de
imagem. Se
Merleau-Ponty e Lacan: from:
Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Müller-Granzotto Marcos José
Abstract: O propósito deste artigo é discutir a interpretação de Jacques-Alain Miller sobre o “valor imaginário” das noções com as quais Merleau-Ponty tenta caracterizar a “familiaridade” entre o vidente, o semelhante e o mundo. Conforme nossa interpretação, a noção merleau-pontyana de “invisibilidade” salvaguarda, tal qual a noção lacaniana de “sujeito-falta-a-ser”, a presença de um “estranho”, de um excesso que impede a consumação da identificação imaginária entre o vidente e o semelhante. Isso não significa, entretanto, que possamos nivelar a ontologia merleau-pontyana e a descrição lacaniana da função do Outro na constituição do sujeito da psicanálise. Na vigésima lição do seminário “Silet:
A pulsão no pensamento mítico: from:
Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Álvares Cristina
Abstract: Para elaborar as duas componentes fundamentais da teoria narrativa, a componente sintática e a componente semântica, Greimas inspirou-se dos estudos de Propp sobre a forma do conto popular russo assim como dos estudos de Lévi-Strauss sobre a estrutura dos mitos. Por isso, o modelo da sintaxe actancial é a morfologia do conto e o da semântica profunda é o pensamento mítico. No pensamento mítico Greimas encontrou a dimensão paradigmática não manifesta que constrange o desenrolar sintagmático dos mitos e suporta a sua coerência lógica. De fato, a noção lévi-straussiana de ‘pensée mythique’, designa um plano para lá da diversi dade
Função paterna e máscaras da morte: from:
Filosofia da psicanálise: autores, diálogos, problemas
Author(s) Bairrão José Francisco Miguel Henriques
Abstract: Sob forte pressão da crítica antropológica, a geração de psicanalistas que sofreu o seu impacto, na qual avulta Lacan, viu-se instada a repensar o conceito. Sem abdicar
Jogando com leituras previsíveis: from:
Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) JUNIOR ARNALDO FRANCO
Abstract: Não se trata, aqui, de um preguiçoso à maneira esperta de um Macunaíma ou mesmo de um Pedro Malasartes nem de um inútil ou parasita machadiano, capaz de cinismo. Trata-se de outra natureza de incapacidade a desse anti-herói: uma inutilidade existencial. Essa sua característica, negativa para o senso comum, constrói-se por meio de sua recusa em participar da ordem produtiva na condição de unidade (re)
Fragmentos de uma paisagem urbana from:
Ficção brasileira no século XXI: terceiras leituras
Author(s) ATIK MARIA LUIZA GUARNIERI
Abstract: Em
Questões de literatura e de estética, Bakhtin (1998, p. 397) assinala que o estudo do romance como gênero “caracteriza-se por dificuldades particulares”, as quais são decorrentes da própria singularidade do objeto: “o romance é o único gênero por se constituir”. Assim, ao contrário de outros gêneros, o processo de evolução do romance não está concluído e, consequentemente, não podemos ainda prever todas as suas potencialidades artísticas.
Book Title: Healing Dramas- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): ROMBERG RAQUEL
Abstract: In this intimate ethnography, Raquel Romberg seeks to illuminate the performative significance of healing rituals and magic works, their embodied nature, and their effectiveness in transforming the states of participants by focusing on the visible, albeit mostly obscure, ways in which healing and magic rituals proceed. The questions posed by Romberg emerge directly from the particular pragmatics of Puerto Rican brujería (witch-healing), shaped by the eclecticism of its rituals, the heterogeneous character of its participants, and the heterodoxy of its moral economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/706583
Chapter Two DREAMS from:
Healing Dramas
Abstract: While dreaming is common to all human beings, not everyone makes the recording, telling, interpreting, and circulating of them an important part of the everyday experience of dreaming. As soon as I arrived in Puerto Rico in the summer of 1995 to conduct an exploratory research on the circulation of spiritual practices between the island and the U.S. mainland, I realized that describing one’s dreams and asking others to interpret them is a common practice, even among quasi-strangers, as I was for many. In various situations since my first days in Puerto Rico—at the university, in stores, and obviously
Chapter Four SPIRITUAL TIME from:
Healing Dramas
Abstract: The word “sense,” as any thesaurus shows, is synonymous with (a) meaning, significance, logic; (b) intelligence, wisdom, common sense; and (c) feeling, sensation, awareness. It is the same word, yet it carries very different, even opposing, meanings. Characterizing the history of anthropological theory as a quest for finding the sense of the behaviors of fellow human beings, Michael Herzfeld argues (2001) that theories were engaged first in “making sense” of the behaviors of “exotic others”; then in studying the “common sense” or taken-for-granted realities of different groups within a society (including those of the anthropologist); and now are focusing on
Chapter Five THE SENTIENT BODY from:
Healing Dramas
Abstract: As planned, I arrive at Mauro’s at one in the afternoon. We are going to a
toque de tambor(alsotoque de santo), a Santería drumming celebration in honor of the orishas. But we leave at two-thirty in the afternoon because we need to wait until Ronny (the other Cuban babalawo) arrives as well. While we wait Mauro tells me about his plans to start a spiritual spa in Miami with the help of some of his influential godchildren. He talks about his relationship and spiritual work with his wife, Lorena her demands, the fact that she is in charge of everything
Book Title: The Last Cannibals-A South American Oral History
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): BASSO ELLEN B.
Abstract: An especially comprehensive study of Brazilian Amazonian Indian history, The Last Cannibals is the first attempt to understand, through indigenous discourse, the emergence of Upper Xingú society. Drawing on oral documents recorded directly from the native language, Ellen Basso transcribes and analyzes nine traditional Kalapalo stories to offer important insights into Kalapalo historical knowledge and the performance of historical narratives within their nonliterate society. This engaging book challenges the familiar view of biography as a strictly Western literary form. Of special interest are biographies of powerful warriors whose actions led to the emergence of a more recent social order based on restrained behaviors from an earlier time when people were said to be fierce and violent. From these stories, Basso explores how the Kalapalo remember and understand their past and what specific linguistic, psychological, and ideological materials they employ to construct their historical consciousness. Her book will be important reading in anthropology, folklore, linguistics, and South American studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/708181
CHAPTER 8 Kudyu’s Story about Tamakafi from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: While still a young bow master, Tamakafi was asked by his uncle to guard him during a trip to cut arrow cane. In fact Tamakafi’s uncle (a man named Afiguata) is taking him to this very dangerous
CHAPTER 9 Kudyu’s Story of the Wanderers from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: There is no founding narrative of Upper Xingu society, nor should we expect any. Despite a strong conviction of shared values and practices, as well as certain mutual interests, people of the Alto Xingu see these as having been adopted piecemeal, and in some cases (most critically, peaceful behavior and maintaining a diet free of animal flesh) incompletely. Moreover, the idea of “society,” conceived in the abstract and independently of the actual ongoing relationships between people, is foreign to them. Kalapalo stories about ancestors associated particularly with present-day communities are very specific in describing relationships between individuals, the formation of
CHAPTER 11 Ugaki Tells of Afuseti, a Woman Stolen by Angikogo from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: Once the Alto Xingu communities recognized that they had come to share common values, they began to develop ways of dealing with outsiders that were peaceful rather than aggressive. This was sometimes even the case in situations where outsiders posed threats to them. In certain stories about events that took place long after the end of cannibalistic blood feuding, the warrior remains an important though more peaceful figure. But a more ominous practice is developing: the killing of known people, usually people living within a community, because of witchcraft accusations. The fear and anger directed formerly against enemies living elsewhere
CHAPTER 12 Tsangaku Tells of the Dyaguma from:
The Last Cannibals
Abstract: One afternoon in late January 1979, during the height of the rainy season when food was particularly scarce, Tsangaku, one of Kambe’s two elderly surviving wives, began to tell me stories of her father’s settlement, Kanugidyafïtï. Men had repeatedly gone out to fish and had returned with nothing, commenting upon how close the floodwaters had come to the settlement. The young men in Tsangaku’s household went out mainly for the form of demonstrating their affinal duties but without any hope of actually finding something to eat. We were all living off manioc soup and bread, yellow squash, corn, and the
Book Title: Why the Humanities Matter- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): ALDAMA FREDERICK LUIS
Abstract: Offering a lens of "new humanism," Frederick Aldama also provides a liberating examination of the current cultural repercussions of assertions by such revolutionary theorists as Said, Foucault, Lacan, and Derrida, as well as Latin Americanists such as Sommer and Mignolo. Emphasizing pedagogy and popular culture with equal verve, and writing in colloquial yet multifaceted prose, Aldama presents an enlightening way to explore what "culture" actually does-who generates it and how it shapes our identities-and the role of academia in sustaining it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/717985
INTRODUCTION from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: In
Enemies of the EnlightenmentDarrin McMahon details the witchhunt-like hysteria fanned by eighteenth-century French obscurantist clergy, aristocrats, Sorbonne-censoringpenseurs,and other representatives of the ancien régime challenged by a progressive generation of thinkers and writers (les philosophes) who argued that reason, truth, and knowledge are universal pursuits based on universal human faculties. My intellectual and political interests are not confined within the eighteenth-century French worldview or, more generally, within the European Enlightenment, a fascinating yet veritable mélange of progressive and reactionary figures and outlooks. However, McMahon’s scholarly reconstruction of the struggle of obscurantism against scientifically oriented thought in France
FOUR IMAGINARY EMPIRES, REAL NATIONS from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: Geopolitics, biopower, biopolitics, subnation, postnation, empire, and a string of other terms slip easily from my graduate students’ tongues and off the pages of scholarly tomes lining library bookshelves today. This chapter is in part a response to these terms deployed rapid-fire by my students and often appearing in Left identified scholarship. I seek to clarify and understand better what these buzzwords actually
meanin the face of our seemingly speedy spiral towards absolute barbarism: skyrocketing unemployment and homelessness rates, delirious dissipation of basic civil rights, and gaping genocidal wounds worldwide.
SIX MODERNITY, WHAT? from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: The Oxford English Dictionarydates the first appearance of the wordmodernityto 1635, when it was used to describe the condition of being modern (in character or style); and dates another appearance of the word to the turn of the twentieth century, when it was used to describe the “intellectual tendency or social perspective characterized by
ELEVEN PULLING UP STAKES IN LATIN/O AMERICAN THEORETICAL CLAIMS from:
Why the Humanities Matter
Abstract: Often the students in my courses on postcolonial (Latin American and otherwise) literature and film, one way or another, begin to question whether or not a given fictional narrative can open eyes to injustices in the world or act as anticolonial manual, especially when the characters they encounter are ethically twisted and contradictory. In some form or other, they ask how the study of a postcolonial phenomenon like Latin American literature can make visible past and present conditions of exploitation and oppression. They delve into questions of genre and style: Is realism or magicorealism more politically resistant or conformist to
TWO DEATH AND THE AFTERLIFE IN THE LOWLANDS from:
Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: As observed by Alfredo López Austin in his seminal work, The
Human Body and Ideology,¹ Central Mexican peoples of the Colonial Period saw mortality as an acquired attribute. It was a stigma procured during sex or maize consumption: ingesting maize and participating in sexual activity were ways of consuming death and incorporating it into the body. In eating maize, they brought what was born of the earth—of the realm of death—into their bodies and hence began participation in a larger life cycle.² Knowingin teuhtli, in tlazolli,“the dust, the filth,” of sex was likewise viewed as a
THREE ROYAL FUNERALS from:
Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: As can be expected, funerary rites are not generally depicted from start to finish. Perhaps the best encapsulation of behaviors associated with death, burial, and rebirth comes from the aforementioned Berlin vessel (Figure 31). On it, a deceased lord is wrapped within a bundle inside a funerary temple, with mourners outside crying and gesturing toward the pyramid. Although his burial is not shown, it is implied: his bones sit amid watery bands, indicating his entry into the Underworld. He reappears in two forms, as an anthropomorphic cacao tree and as an abstract lunar deity. Even this vessel, however, does not
FIVE ENTERING THE TOMBS OF THE CLASSIC MAYA KINGS from:
Death and the Classic Maya Kings
Abstract: Royal ancestors played a vital role in religious and political life, actively taking part in a variety of activities ranging from accessions to birthday celebrations. Dead kings occasionally “saw” or “witnessed” the activities of their descendants, overseeing events from celestial or similar positions in the manner of Classic Maya gods. Caracol Stela 6 (Figure 57), for example, mentions the scattering of incense by Knot Ajaw on the Period Ending date of 9.8.10.0.0 4 Ahau 13 Xul (July 4, 603). His actions at the Five Great Sky place are seen by his dead father, Yajaw Te’ K’inich II:
yilaj ux ?
Book Title: Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Fernández María
Abstract: Since the colonial era, Mexican art has emerged from an ongoing process of negotiation between the local and the global, which frequently involves invention, synthesis, and transformation of diverse discursive and artistic traditions. In this pathfinding book, María Fernández uses the concept of cosmopolitanism to explore this important aspect of Mexican art, in which visual culture and power relations unite the local and the global, the national and the international, the universal and the particular. She argues that in Mexico, as in other colonized regions, colonization constructed power dynamics and forms of violence that persisted in the independent nation-state. Accordingly, Fernández presents not only the visual qualities of objects, but also the discourses, ideas, desires, and practices that are fundamental to the very existence of visual objects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/745353
6 Visualizing the Future from:
Cosmopolitanism in Mexican Visual Culture
Abstract: In the twentieth century Mexico extended its reach toward modernity. Technologies such as telephones, electric lighting, automobiles, cinema, and radio; industrial materials such as glass, steel, and cement; modern building styles, air travel, and television were disseminated to a wider proportion of society than in the preceding century.¹ These technologies enabled flows actual and imaginary between Mexico and the outside and extensively shaped Mexico’s cosmopolitanism. As in the culture of the Porfiriato, the country’s modernity was inflected by omnipresent remnants of its ancient and colonial history and by the realities of underdevelopment. Hence representations of Mexico anchored in the cultural
Book Title: Wicked Cinema-Sex and Religion on Screen
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Cutrara Daniel S.
Abstract: From struggles over identity politics in the 1990s to current concerns about a clash of civilizations between Islam and Christianity, culture wars play a prominent role in the twenty-first century. Movies help to define and drive these conflicts by both reflecting and shaping cultural norms, as well as showing what violates those norms. In this pathfinding book, Daniel S. Cutrara employs queer theory, cultural studies, theological studies, and film studies to investigate how cinema represents and often denigrates religion and religious believers—an issue that has received little attention in film studies, despite the fact that faith in its varied manifestations is at the heart of so many cultural conflicts today.Wicked Cinema examines films from the United States, Europe, and the Middle East, including Crimes and Misdemeanors, The Circle, Breaking the Waves, Closed Doors, Agnes of God, Priest, The Last Temptation of Christ, and Dogma. Central to all of the films is their protagonists' struggles with sexual transgression and traditional belief systems within Christianity, Judaism, or Islam—a struggle, Cutrara argues, that positions believers as the Other and magnifies the abuses of religion while ignoring its positive aspects. Uncovering a hazardous web of ideological assumptions informed by patriarchy, the spirit/flesh dichotomy, and heteronormativity, Cutrara demonstrates that ultimately these films emphasize the "Otherness" of the faithful through a variety of strategies commonly used to denigrate the queer, from erasing their existence, to using feminization to make them appear weak, to presenting them as dangerous fanatics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/754720
CHAPTER ONE Sex and Religion: from:
Wicked Cinema
Abstract: When i was a jesuit novice, a group of us slipped out for a surreptitious outing to a midnight showing of
The Rocky Horror Picture Show. The number of transgressive audience members amazed me. Some dressed up as the main characters of the movie and lined up in front of the screen to perform the dance numbers. Others filled in gaps of dialogue with witty remarks and created special effects with popcorn and squirt guns. The movie had become a cult phenomenon with its own call-and-response ritual. In this film, Dr. Frank-N-Furter (Tim Curry) not only creates a beautiful man
CHAPTER TWO Faith: from:
Wicked Cinema
Abstract: Many films disparage or call into question the rationality of faith and with that, the character of the believer. This chapter begins to explore the disjuncture between cinematic representations and the religious beliefs of more than four billion followers of the Abrahamic religions. These onscreen depictions of faith, or the lack thereof, reveal much about the ideological divide fueling the culture wars.
CHAPTER SIX The Believer in Bondage from:
Wicked Cinema
Abstract: SISTER ALOYSIUS BEAUVIER: What exactly happened in the rectory?
INTRODUCTION from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) KULIĆ VLADIMIR
Abstract: During the two decades following World War II, various political entities across the world adopted modernist architecture in its different guises both for representational purposes and as an instrument of modernization. The period thus stood in contrast with the interwar years, when modernists struggled to attract official support, especially after the turbulent alliance between the avant-gardes and the varied central and local governments of the 1920s dissolved under the rising totalitarian forces. It was only in a few places such as Czechoslovakia and Turkey that architectural modernism before World War II was consistently accepted as the “official style” of political
2 THE SCOPE OF SOCIALIST MODERNISM: from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) KULIĆ VLADIMIR
Abstract: Apart from the fact that they were both prominent architects in socialist Yugoslavia, at first sight, Vjenceslav Richter (1917–2002) and Bogdan Bogdanović (1922–2010) do not seem to have much in common. The former was an avantgardist known for light, cool, geometricized structures that explored the limits of modernist tropes of abstraction, technology, and space. The latter created exuberant, allusive, symbolically charged monuments, often rustically hand-carved out of stone, which evoked a distant history rather than projecting the visions of a brave future. Even at a second look, there is not much that connects them, as they emerged out
4 SANCTIONING MODERNISM AND TRADITION: from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) SABATINO MICHELANGELO
Abstract: From the early 1920s to the late 1950s the dialectic of modernism and tradition, whether classical or vernacular, characterized the Italian state’s architectural patronage.¹ This essay investigates post–World War II state-sponsored building initiatives, mainly housing, and the architectural debates accompanying their design and realization. It sets them against the backdrop of Italian architectural discourse on identity that surfaced during the Fascist period (1922–1943) and continued to weigh heavily on the decisions of architects and urban designers in postwar democratic Italy. The essay focuses on the role that appropriation of extant vernacular building traditions and the abandonment of classicism
6 ʺHUMANLY SUBLIME TENSIONSʺ: from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) PARKER TIMOTHY
Abstract: In 1967, Luigi Moretti (1907–1973)¹ published in
Fede e Artea pointed essay, “Where two or three are gathered in my name … (Matthew 18:20),” concerning the “great perplexity” facing architects of new churches in the wake of the sea change that was the Second Vatican Council (1962–1965).² Observing the “dangerous, or at least incautious, vehemence” with which otherwise sincere architects prematurely produced “a flood of purely formalistic designs,” Moretti lamented the too-frequent consequence of “bare, denuded” churches.³ The verbal terms of this judgment and disparaging visual characterization echo a description Moretti had given a work of his
8 ʺTECHNOLOGICALLYʺ MODERN: from:
Sanctioning Modernism
Author(s) JUNG HYUN-TAE
Abstract: Mid-twentieth-century American architecture has been considered a degenerate outgrowth of modern European architecture. It is believed that the overwhelming influences of the era’s corporate and consumer culture impeded the proper transplant of modern architecture on American soil. One of the most influential architectural theoreticians in the twentieth century, Colin Rowe, argued that “purged of its ideological and societal content,” modern architecture in the United States was reduced to being either a “
décor de la viefor Greenwich, Connecticut,” or the “suitable veneer for the corporate activities of enlightened capitalism.”¹ Rowe contended that utopian visions of modern architecture in Europe became
Book Title: The Fate of Earthly Things-Aztec Gods and God-Bodies
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): Bassett Molly H.
Abstract: Following their first contact in 1519, accounts of Aztecs identifying Spaniards as gods proliferated. But what exactly did the Aztecs mean by a "god" (teotl), and how could human beings become gods or take on godlike properties? This sophisticated, interdisciplinary study analyzes three concepts that are foundational to Aztec religion—teotl (god), teixiptla (localized embodiment of a god), and tlaquimilolli (sacred bundles containing precious objects)—to shed new light on the Aztec understanding of how spiritual beings take on form and agency in the material world. In The Fate of Earthly Things, Molly Bassett draws on ethnographic fieldwork, linguistic analyses, visual culture, and ritual studies to explore what ritual practices such as human sacrifice and the manufacture of deity embodiments (including humans who became gods), material effigies, and sacred bundles meant to the Aztecs. She analyzes the Aztec belief that wearing the flayed skin of a sacrificial victim during a sacred rite could transform a priest into an embodiment of a god or goddess, as well as how figurines and sacred bundles could become localized embodiments of gods. Without arguing for unbroken continuity between the Aztecs and modern speakers of Nahuatl, Bassett also describes contemporary rituals in which indigenous Mexicans who preserve costumbres (traditions) incorporate totiotzin (gods) made from paper into their daily lives. This research allows us to understand a religious imagination that found life in death and believed that deity embodiments became animate through the ritual binding of blood, skin, and bone.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/760882
CHAPTER 1 Meeting the Gods from:
The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: These four episodes of apotheosis from the Encounter underscore the roles of religion, material culture, and embodiment in early exchanges between Mesoamericans and Europeans. According to these accounts (all redacted by Europeans), the Aztecs identified Hernán Cortés and his companions as
teteo(deities) andteixiptlahuan, their localized embodiments: first, in Francisco López de Gómara’s account, “the Mexicans”—a gathering of Amecamecan locals—associate the Spaniards with gods; second, the Tlaxcalans describe Cortés’s translator Marina/Malintzin as a goddess; third, thetlahtoani(speaker;ruler) Moteuczoma Xocoyotl (Lord Angry, Younger) identifies Cortés with Quetzalcoatl (Quetzal Feather Serpent); and fourth, Chimalpahin’s annotation reiterates and elaborates
CHAPTER 2 Ethnolinguistic Encounters: from:
The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: Understanding “the gods” concerned both the Aztecs and the Spaniards from the earliest moments of Contact. As the Aztecs observed the Spaniards, apprehension about the gods’ presence and absence plagued Moteuczoma and his priests. Accounts of the Encounter leave us with a mythohistorical mix of (re) actions ascribed to the
tlahtoani(speaker; leader): in the days leading up to the Spaniards’ arrival, Moteuczoma desperately attempted to read a series of eight omens; he sent messengers disguised as merchants to spy on the strangers; he gave Cortés deity costumes as an enticement to leave; he stopped eating and suffered from insomnia;
CHAPTER 3 Divining the Meaning of Teotl from:
The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: Aztec
teteo(gods) acted in the world: they spoke to devotees, they inhabited and oversaw elements of the landscape, and they appeared in localized embodiments constructed by priests and practitioners. Hearing Aztecs call mountain-shaped dough figurines, human god-bodies, and bodies of water—let alone Cortés and company—“teteo”must have perplexed the conquistadors, friars, and chroniclers who encountered them and their stories. We know this in part from the awe they expressed regarding the Aztec gods and their embodiment. Bernal Díaz del Castillo wrote of the dazzling impression deity statues covered in precious stones made upon him, and Bernardino de
CHAPTER 4 Gods in the Flesh: from:
The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: Teteo(gods) and theirteixiptlahuan(localized embodiments) frequently appear together in Nahuatl accounts of ritual activity, especially in those that describe devotees constructing and venerating a deity embodiment—whether human, dough, wood, or stone. Aztec rituals and devotional practices often involved multipleteixiptlahuanrepresenting severalteteo. This multiplicity has contributed to scholars’ tendency to fuse the two concepts—teotlandteixiptla(localized embodiment)—into a single more manageable one. A description of Painal’s appearance at the temple of Huitzilopochtli from theFlorentine Codexexemplifies ritual contexts in which devotees interacted with multipleteixiptlahuan:
CONCLUSION from:
The Fate of Earthly Things
Abstract: In the summer of 2007, the year aft er I first witnessed Chicomexochitl, the community and several of my colleagues performed the ceremony again. The
tepahtihquetl(ritual specialist) brought a new apprentice, and they changed the order of the ritual activities. He began the ritual at the pozo (well) where it usually concludes and arranged thealtepetl(mountain) altars differently than before. After the ceremony ended, the participants returned to their respective homes and most of the visitors left the community. Everyone who remained agreed that the new ritual sequence seemed askew.
Book Title: Narrative Threads- Publisher: University of Texas Press
Author(s): URTON GARY
Abstract: In this benchmark book, twelve international scholars tackle the most vexed question in khipu studies: how did the Inkas record and transmit narrative records by means of knotted strings? The authors approach the problem from a variety of angles. Several essays mine Spanish colonial sources for details about the kinds of narrative encoded in the khipu. Others look at the uses to which khipu were put before and after the Conquest, as well as their current use in some contemporary Andean communities. Still others analyze the formal characteristics of khipu and seek to explain how they encode various kinds of numerical and narrative data.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7560/769038
TWO Spinning a Yarn: from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Howard Rosaleen
Abstract: Can a study of the cognitive and discursive principles at work in the telling of oral traditional stories in Quechua contribute to our insights into how the transmission of messages through the khipu might have operated? During the conference proceedings upon which this volume is based, the verbal component of the khipu-reading performance and the role of memory in activating the knowledge stored in the knots and strings were much commented on. Doubtless both cognitive and structural similarities exist between oral narratives that have no ostensible origin in the khipu and khipu-generated oral discourses. If a khipu’s message was indeed
THREE A Khipu Information String Theory from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Conklin William J
Abstract: The chroniclers of the Spanish Conquest of Peru provided both eyewitness and word-of-mouth reports on the many uses of the plied and knotted-string information devices called khipu that the Inka used. Although these reports have varying degrees of credibility, the discovery, in the centuries since the conquest, of actual khipu from the Inka Empire provides material substance to those reports. In addition to these reports on the uses of khipu, Felipe Guaman Poma de Ayala, the ardent native chronicler of the woes of the conquest, provided many drawn images of khipu. A comparison of his depictions of khipu¹ with recovered
FOUR Reading Khipu: from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Ascher Marcia
Abstract: Beginning some thirty years ago, my collaborator (an anthropologist) and I (a mathematician) began an extensive investigation of Inka khipu. Our work included firsthand study of over 215 khipu spread throughout thirteen countries, in thirty-four museums and private collections. Recognizing the fragility and importance of the artifacts, we recorded and published detailed descriptions, including knot types and placement, cord and space measurements, and colors, for each khipu we studied (Ascher and Ascher 1978, 1988). We analyzed the khipu as a corpus, as well as analyzing them individually. Building on previous studies of khipu and on our own findings, we came
EIGHT Recording Signs in Narrative-Accounting Khipu from:
Narrative Threads
Author(s) Urton Gary
Abstract: Writing about writing is a particularly vexed example of the general relationship, experienced by humans in all cultures, between acting, on the one hand, and commenting on that action, on the other hand. There are not, in fact, many examples of the parallelism between “doing the thing that we are commenting on” in the performance of, and commentary on, most other forms of human activities. Another such example is the closely related activity of talking; that is, we
do(even commonly) “talk about talking.” There are certainly a few other areas of social life in which action and the commentary
Book Title: The Political Unconscious-Narrative as a Socially Symbolic Act
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): JAMESON FREDRIC
Abstract: The Political Unconsciousis a masterly introduction to both the method and the practice of Marxist criticism. Defining a mode of criticism and applying it successfully to individual works, it bridges the gap between theoretical speculation and textual analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1287f8w
3 REALISM AND DESIRE: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The novel is the end of genre in the sense in which it has been defined in the previous chapter: a narrative ideologeme whose outer form, secreted like a shell or exoskeleton, continues to emit its ideological message long after the extinction of its host. For the novel, as it explores its mature and original possibilities in the nineteenth century, is not an outer, conventional form of that kind. Rather, such forms, and their remains—inherited narrative paradigms, conventional actantial or proairetic schemata¹—are the raw material on which the novel works, transforming their “telling” into its “showing,” estranging com
5 ROMANCE AND REIFICATION: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: Nothing is more alien to the windless closure of high naturalism than the works of Joseph Conrad. Perhaps for that very reason, even after eighty years, his place is still unstable, undecidable, and his work unclassifiable, spilling out of high literature into light reading and romance, reclaiming great areas of diversion and distraction by the most demanding practice of style and
écriturealike, floating uncertainly somewhere in between Proust and Robert Louis Stevenson. Conrad marks, indeed, a strategic fault line in the emergence of contemporary narrative, a place from which the structure of twentieth-century literary and culturalinstitutionsbecomes visible
6 CONCLUSION: from:
The Political Unconscious
Abstract: The conception of the political unconscious developed in the preceding pages has tended to distance itself, at certain strategic moments, from those implacably polemic and demystifying procedures traditionally associated with the Marxist practice of ideological analysis. It is now time to confront the latter directly and to spell out such modifications in more detail. The most influential lesson of Marx—the one which ranges him alongside Freud and Nietzsche as one of the great negative diagnosticians of contemporary culture and social life—has, of course, rightly been taken to be the lesson of false consciousness, of class bias and ideological
[3] The Eighteenth-Century European Press from:
News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: The nature of Dutch society and the characteristics of the European state system made the appearance of such newspapers as Jean Luzac’s
Gazette de Leydepossible, but they did not guarantee the success of his particular publication. To assure its survival and prosperity, Jean Luzac had to find a special place for his journal in the highly competitive international commercial market for political news. In 1772, the prospectus for a new French-language newspaper promised readers that the editors would digest information from more than 200 other European periodicals.¹ Clearly, late-eighteenth-century readers had a wide choice of newspapers and journals; they
[5] Producing a Newspaper in the Eighteenth Century from:
News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: Once he had selected the news and documents destined for each issue of the paper, Jean Luzac’s personal role in the production of the
Gazette de Leydewas at an end. Unlike Benjamin Franklin in Philadelphia in the 1730s, most of the European newspaper editors of the eighteenth century were incapable of setting type or operating a printing press. Nor did they usually have much to do with the distribution of the printed copies or the management of their enterprise’s business affairs. Yet all these aspects of newspaper production vitally affected the content of newspapers and their impact. Jean Luzac
[8] Engagement and Disillusionment: from:
News and Politics in the Age of Revolution
Abstract: Even as Jean Luzac was accepting the praise of his fellow townsmen for his role in promoting the cause of American independence, affairs in Europe were moving in directions that posed new problems for him and for the
Gazette de Leyde. During the 1770s and early 1780s, movements for constitutional liberty in Europe and the New World had been gaining strength, and the paper had not hesitated to support the reaction against Maupeou’s reforms in France and the American Revolution. By 1782, however, theGazette de Leydefound itself questioning movements in Europe that seemed superficially similar to the American
5: “IMITATE ME AS I IMITATE CHRIST”: from:
Eating Beauty
Abstract: Depending on which virtue is brought to the fore, a different Christian form of life appears, and the beauty of the church as a whole is thus variegated and enhanced. The early Dominicans found in the book of the prophet Zachariah a metaphoric and allegorical verse that foretells the establishment of the mendicant orders and characterizes the difference between the Franciscans and the Dominicans. Speaking as a shepherd who guides his flock by means of sweetness and strictness, the Lord declares: "And I will feed the flock…. And I took unto me two rods; one I called Beauty, and the
8: TO (FAIL TO) CONCLUDE: from:
Eating Beauty
Abstract: When Simone Weil died in England in August 1943, Edith Stein (1891–1942) was already dead, a Jewish victim of the Nazis in Auschwitz. Stein, one of Edmund Husserl’s most brilliant students, had become Catholic in 1922. For ten years she had lived a devout life as a teacher and scholar, practicing an intense, eucharistic piety. In 1933 she entered the Carmelite cloister in Cologne, choosing for herself a name, “Sister Teresa Benedicta of the Cross,” that evoked the names of Carmel’s two great sixteenth-century reformers, Saints John of the Cross (1542–1591) and Teresa of Ávila (1515–1582), whose
Book Title: Mourning in America-Race and the Politics of Loss
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): McIvor David W.
Abstract: In
Mourning in America, McIvor addresses significant and urgent questions about how citizens can mourn traumatic events and enduring injustices in their communities. McIvor offers a framework for analyzing the politics of mourning, drawing from psychoanalysis, Greek tragedy, and scholarly discourses on truth and reconciliation.Mourning in Americaconnects these literatures to ongoing activism surrounding racial injustice, and it contextualizes Black Lives Matter in the broader politics of grief and recognition. McIvor also examines recent, grassroots-organized truth and reconciliation processes such as the Greensboro Truth and Reconciliation Commission (2004-2006), which provided a public examination of the Greensboro Massacre of 1979-a deadly incident involving local members of the Communist Workers Party and the Ku Klux Klan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1d2dmt4
2 TO JOIN IN HATE: from:
Mourning in America
Abstract: In scanning the history of mourning’s public expression and political appropriations, we see that the politics of mourning are both mobile—they move across the political spectrum and across cultural contexts—and historically variable.¹ Nevertheless, certain images and ideas are so frequently associated with the political expression of mourning that they have come to dominate the interpretive field. This field, in effect, is prepopulated by figures that shape expectations of what the politics of mourning looks like, the kinds of actions it involves, and the affective registers through which it is filtered. In this chapter and chapter 3, I explore
4 “THE IS TROUBLE HERE. THERE IS MORE TO COME”: from:
Mourning in America
Abstract: In this chapter, I begin to sketch out in more detail the constitutive aspects of what I am calling the democratic work of mourning. The democratic work of mourning involves the public spaces and practices by which the traumas of collective life are publicly worked through in ways that enliven social struggles for recognition while mitigating denial, disavowal, and distrust. In articulating this concept, I lean heavily on the work of object relations psychoanalysis and, in particular, the approach to mourning found in Melanie Klein and D. W. Winnicott. Klein’s concepts of the depressive position and the good object, supplemented
Book Title: The Deed of Reading-Literature * Writing * Language * Philosophy
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): STEWART GARRETT
Abstract: To take the measure of literary writing,
The Deed of Readingconvenes diverse philosophic commentary on the linguistics of literature, with stress on the complementary work of Stanley Cavell and Giorgio Agamben. Sympathetic to recent ventures in form-attentive analysis but resisting an emphasis on so-called surface reading, Stewart explores not some new formalism but the internal pressures of language in formation, registering the verbal infrastructure of literary prose as well as verse. In this mode of "contextual" reading, the context is language itself. Literary phrasing, tapping the speech act's own generative pulse, emerges as a latent philosophy of language in its own right, whereby human subjects, finding no secure place to situate themselves within language, settle for its taking place in, through, and between them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1h4mhkq
FORE WORD from:
The Deed of Reading
Abstract: Literary ethics or verbal ethic? There is of course no reason to choose. But many a distinction to be made. We have come to this: “It is not unusual in literary studies to treat language as transparent, and thus irrelevant.”¹ Thus writes a professional linguist, in the year 2012, from her institutional base in an English department at a major Canadian university. It is in fact very common lately not to “treat language” at all in the analysis of literature, as if it were no more than the readily legible conveyance of expressed ideas, whether urgently identitarian, ideologically suspect, or
4 IMP-AIRED WORDS from:
The Deed of Reading
Abstract: First Giorgio Agamben, now Stanley Cavell: on the “ends” of literary writing as performed language—or say, in Agamben’s genitive swivels, on “the idea of language” and “the thought of voice.” In the redoubtable line of Ludwig Wittgenstein and J. L. Austin, Cavell participates in an ordinary language philosophy bent on excavating, from within the prosaic cadences of everyday speech, their evidence of philosophical pressure points. In adapting this approach to a literary prosaics of formative reading, my effort is to extend his method in general (while following his example in certain specific cases) to the eccentric phonic and syntactic
AFTER WORDING from:
The Deed of Reading
Abstract: After the words are laid out, if no longer in cold type but in laser jet or backlight, how does reading revive them as immanent speech act? And what—this book has gone on to ask—is implied there, there in the deed of reading, for a philosophy of the subject as
homo loquens? Where, in fact, isthere, exactly? And how often does the phonetic aftermath of a given word seem to generate its own virtual alternative as part of the serial coming-to-be not just of a verbalized world elsewhere but of a newly channeled linguistic gesture? Phonetic aftermath
CHAPTER 2 Sources of Difference from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: Dilemmas of difference appear unresolvable. The risk of nonneutrality—the risk of discrimination—accompanies efforts both to ignore and to recognize difference in equal treatment and special treatment. Difference can he recreated in color or gender blindness and in affirmative action;¹ in governmental neutrality and in governmental preferences; and in discretionary decisions and in formal constraints on discretion. Why does difference seem to pose choices each of which undesirably revives difference or the stigma or disadvantage associated with it? In this last question lies a clue to the problem. The possibility of reiterating difference, whether by acknowledgment or non acknowledgment,
CHAPTER 3 Ways Out from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: The difference dilemma is a symptom of a particular way of looking at the world. The problem arises only in a culture that officially condemns the assigned status of inequalities and yet, in practice, perpetuates them. This ambivalence is itself sustained by a set of usually unstated assumptions. “Different” traits are regarded as intrinsic to the “different” person, and the norm used to identify difference is assumed to be obvious, needing neither statement nor exposure to challenge. Differences are presumed identified through an unsituated perspective that makes other perspectives irrelevant and sees prevailing social arrangements as natural, good, and uncoerced.
CHAPTER 5 Different Histories from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: Many observers have described Western intellectual and legal histories as moving from notions of fixed and assigned status to notions of individual freedom and rights. Sir Henry Maine’s famous dictum defined progress as the movement from status to contract.¹ Such broadly gauged summaries risk oversimplification and insensitivity to the variety and contestability of understandings of the past. Nonetheless, the contrast between legal orders premised upon status and those premised upon state-guaranteed rights helps to locate notions of abnormal persons and rights analysis as ways for dealing with differences. And as a historical matter, rights analysis in some ways is a
AFTERWORD: from:
Making All the Difference
Abstract: The use of anesthesia in surgery spread quickly once it had been discovered.¹ Nineteenth-century doctors who adopted anesthesia selected which patients needed it and which deserved it; they thought some people’s pain more serious than others; some people were thought to be hardy enough to withstand pain. Both the medical literature and actual medical practices during the nineteenth century distinguished people’s need for painkillers on the basis of race, gender, ethnicity, age, temperament, personal habits, and economic class. Women, for example, were thought to need painkillers more than men; the rich and educated more than the poor and uneducated. How
Book Title: Language as Hermeneutic-A Primer on the Word and Digitization
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): van den Berg Sara
Abstract: Language in all its modes-oral, written, print, electronic-claims the central role in Walter J. Ong's acclaimed speculations on human culture. After his death, his archives were found to contain unpublished drafts of a final book manuscript that Ong envisioned as a distillation of his life's work. This first publication of
Language as Hermeneutic, reconstructed from Ong's various drafts by Thomas D. Zlatic and Sara van den Berg, is more than a summation of his thinking. It develops new arguments around issues of cognition, interpretation, and language. Digitization, he writes, is inherent in all forms of "writing," from its early beginnings in clay tablets. As digitization increases in print and now electronic culture, there is a corresponding need to counter the fractioning of digitization with the unitive attempts of hermeneutics, particularly hermeneutics that are modeled on oral rather than written paradigms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt1w1vk5j
Prologue from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: A thesis of these reflections is that there are two encompassing and complementary movements significantly dominating the development of world culture today, digitization and hermeneutics—which is to say (as will be explained more fully throughout the work)—a fractioning movement and a holistic movement, and that these movements explain something of what has been going on in the development of human beings’ intellectual relationship and concomitant relationships to the world around them, chiefly in highly technologized societies but indirectly through all the world.
1 Orality, Writing, Presence from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: The historical origins of hermeneutics as a self-conscious discipline from the study of texts together with our typographical fixation on texts have occluded general awareness, even among scholars, that all use of language, not just textual use, is hermeneutic. This is the center point of this work. Hermeneutics, in the sense earlier described, the making clear to a given audience or milieu something in a manifestation that is not evident to this audience or milieu, was being practiced tens or even hundreds of thousands of years before writing was even thought of as a possibility. Speech, oral or textual, is
3 Affiliations of Hermeneutics with Text from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Words, both oral and textual, as has been seen, can call for interpretation with a certain special urgency. For words themselves are always efforts at explanation, yet insofar as words, spoken or written or printed or processed electronically, never provide total explanation, they invite further interpretation, the completion of the business they have left unfinished. Utterance of any sort is always in some sense un-finished business. One can conclude verbal exchange quite satisfactorily and arrive at truth when what is at stake in a given situation is cleared up. But one could also always ask one more question. This is
4 The Interpersonalism of Hermeneutics, Oral and Other from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: In interpreting verbal utterance, as already noted, we can be called on to interpret oral speech or to interpret text. The two activities are different, but not entirely different. One paradigmatic form of interpretation in oral performance is that of reciprocal discourse or conversation between two (or more) persons in which an utterance of one interlocutor gives rise to another utterance by the other interlocutor, that to another by the first, and so on. This person-to-person dialogue Mikhail M. Bakhtin rightly maintains lies at the ultimate base of all utterance, written as well as oral, scientific as well as casually
5 Hermeneutics, Print, and “Facts” from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Our text-centered mentality, and especially our print-centered mentality, can and does create special illusions about the nature of “facts” which affects concepts of interpretation or hermeneutics. By habituating us to visually fixed representations of spoken words texts can lead us to overvalue fixity itself. We tend to think of a “fact” as in some sense something fixed. Yet its fixity is paradoxical, for a fact can only be identified by the use of words. And words are not fixed, for they are events in time. Moreover, there is no one thing to say about anything—a fact which seems to
8 Hermeneutic and Communication in Oral Cultures from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: A hermeneutic of speech in oral cultures demands that we do not assume total likeness between oral speech events in primary oral cultures and oral speech events of literates. We must remind ourselves that in oral cultures verbalization is always tied to performance. The use of language is in no way associated with dictionaries or any other sort of inscription. Verbalization is human action—indeed, human action at its peak.
11 Language, Technology, and the Human from:
Language as Hermeneutic
Abstract: Gadamer’s point that all language is essentially writable and gains by being written is certainly well taken (
Truth and Method354). But by the same token all language is also essentially printable and electronically processible, and gains by being printed and electronically processed. The fact that certain losses are entailed in the gains thus achieved, as has been earlier suggested, does not make the gains less real. If writing is a technology that transforms thought (Ong,Orality;Presence; “Writing”) and if the technology of print further transforms thought (Ong,Orality; “Samuel Johnson”) and if electronic technology effects comparable transformations in
Prologue. from:
Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: A book including the word “ethics” on its cover invokes, for better or for worse, a certain professional affiliation with the field of philosophy and, more specifically, the philosophical branch of ethics. This book, however, is neither written
by a philosopher, nor is it, strictly speaking, written for philosophers. As a matter of fact, philosophers, especially those who professionally concern themselves with questions of ethics, will likely perceive this book to be a great disappointment. The book will disappoint professional philosophers because it conceives ethics in an extremely flexible sense as it arises out of the reading of individual texts
2 Why Does Hannah Arendt Lie? from:
Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: When explaining what she was doing, Hannah Arendt typically provided the term “storytelling.”¹ The storyteller, Arendt writes in the essay “Truth and Politics,” confronts the seeming arbitrariness of the facts presented, constructing certain configurations of “brutally elementary data” that eventually transcend the “meaning” of the chaos of sheer events; the task is to “tell…a story.”² The writer and the historian share this task of bestowing meaning—the art of interpretation: “The transformation of the given raw material of sheer happenings which the historian, like the fiction writer (a good novel is by no means a simple concoction or a figment
4 A Strike of Rhetoric: from:
Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: Before beginning, a few prefatory remarks appear necessary to maintain at least the hope for what Benjamin would have condemned: communication. Call it an act of violence, an act of communicative violence, if you will. But is not all language, that is, “impure” language, all language after the Fall, as Benjamin would say, violent? And does he himself not battle and ultimately fail in the face of language: fail either by instrumentalizing it as a tool for communication, or fail in failing to communicate, fail as a communicator, so to speak?
6 The Return of the Human: from:
Inconceivable Effects
Abstract: Terrorism in postwar West Germany culminated in a series of traumatic events during seven weeks in the autumn of 1977.¹ On September 5, Hanns-Martin Schleyer, chairman of the Daimler-Benz Company and president of the Federation of German Industries (Bundesverband der Deutschen Industrie) was kidnapped by members of the Red Army Faction (RAF) in a gun battle on the streets of Cologne.² His four companions were shot to death. In a videotaped statement, Schleyer was forced by his kidnappers to appeal to the chancellor, Helmut Schmidt, for his release in exchange for that of eleven imprisoned terrorists. In contrast to a
Book Title: Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Johnson Christopher D.
Abstract: While the nondiscursive, frequently digressive character of the
Mnemosyne-Atlascomplicates any linear narrative of its themes and contents, Christopher D. Johnson traces several thematic sequences in the panels. By drawing on Warburg's published and unpublished writings and by attending to Warburg's cardinal idea that "pathos formulas" structure the West's cultural memory, Johnson maps numerous tensions between word and image in theMnemosyne-Atlas. In addition to examining the work itself, he considers the literary, philosophical, and intellectual-historical implications of theMnemosyne-Atlas. As Johnson demonstrates, theMnemosyne-Atlasis not simply the culmination of Warburg's lifelong study of Renaissance culture but the ultimate expression of his now literal, now metaphoric search for syncretic solutions to the urgent problems posed by the history of art and culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2jbph1
4 Translating the Symbol: from:
Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: It bears repeating:
Mnemosyne is largely divorced from iconology as practiced by Warburg’s chief successors, who turn rather to his earlier work for their methodological inspiration.¹ Briefly put, iconology aims to explicate the significance of an individual artwork through the interpretation of the symbolic values attached to compositional or iconographic features. To decipher these contingent features, imbricated as they are in a medieval or humanist culture long since past, great erudition is usually demanded. Yet to grasp next the meaning of the work’s symbolic values, interpretation becomes mostly an intuitive act. This is because iconology tends to regard the individual
6 Exemplary Figures and Diagrammatic Thought from:
Memory, Metaphor, and Aby Warburg's Atlas of Images
Abstract: To illustrate better the motives, methods, and rhythms of
Mnemosyne, but especially to chart more exactly its metaphoric logic, I want to turn again to the period after Warburg emerged from the sanatorium. Besides reimmersing himself in the cosmographical material that yielded, just before his breakdown, the magisterial essay on sixteenth-century German astrological imagery, Warburg began work in 1924 on a new topic, which eventually became the lecture Italienische Antike im Zeitalter Rembrandts, given at the K.B.W. in May 1926.¹ While only a partial text of the lecture survives, it deserves attention, firstly, because it directly informs panels 70, 71,
Book Title: Condemned to Repeat?-The Paradox of Humanitarian Action
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Terry Fiona
Abstract: Terry was the head of the French section of Medecins sans frontieres (Doctors Without Borders) when it withdrew from the Rwandan refugee camps in Zaire because aid intended for refugees actually strengthened those responsible for perpetrating genocide. This book contains documents from the former Rwandan army and government that were found in the refugee camps after they were attacked in late 1996. This material illustrates how combatants manipulate humanitarian action to their benefit.
Condemned to Repeat?makes clear that the paradox of aid demands immediate attention by organizations and governments around the world. The author stresses that, if international agencies are to meet the needs of populations in crisis, their organizational behavior must adjust to the wider political and socioeconomic contexts in which aid occurs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt2tt2j8
1 Humanitarian Action and Responsibility from:
Condemned to Repeat?
Abstract: Concerned with preserving the dignity of humanity, the term “humanitarian” encompasses constraints, or things that individuals and governments must not do, and obligations, or things that they should do. International humanitarian law imposes limits on permissible behavior during war; human rights law sets the minimum standards to which individuals are entitled by virtue of their membership in humanity; and humanitarian action seeks to restore some of those rights when individuals are deprived of them by circumstance. Hence the “duty” to provide humanitarian assistance occurs only once the duty to avoid depriving and to protect from deprivation have failed to be
5 The Rwandan Refugee Camps in Zaire from:
Condemned to Repeat?
Abstract: Fifteen years after the first Cambodian peasants were marched across the Thai border by the Khmer Rouge, the same scenario was replayed with different actors on a different continent. In a small country in central Africa, the governing regime ordered the annihilation of a segment of the population, and was ousted from power by an invading force. To avoid defeat, the regime directed the exodus of two million of its compatriots to neighboring countries and settled among them, evading justice and rearming for future conflict. The analogy with the Khmer Rouge was immediately drawn: “Hurry to Prevent a Cambodian Epilogue
Book Title: The Light of Knowledge-Literacy Activism and the Politics of Writing in South India
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: The Light of Knowledgeis set primarily in the rural district of Pudukkottai in Tamil Nadu, and it is about activism among laboring women from marginalized castes who have been particularly active as learners and volunteers in the movement. In their endeavors to remake the Tamil countryside through literacy activism, workers in the movement found that their own understanding of the politics of writing and Enlightenment was often transformed as they encountered vastly different notions of language and imaginations of social order. Indeed, while activists of the movement successfully mobilized large numbers of rural women, they did so through logics that often pushed against the very Enlightenment rationality they hoped to foster. Offering a rare behind-the-scenes look at an increasingly important area of social and political activism,The Light of Knowledgebrings tools of linguistic anthropology to engage with critical social theories of the postcolonial state.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt32b5k9
1 On Being a “Thumbprint”: from:
The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: I first started to understand the extent to which literacy activism is really a form of cultural work, not simply a matter of teaching people how to read and write, one evening in a seaside village. It turns out that many villagers were taught to desire literacy and they learned a number of other things about themselves and their place in the world along the way. The occasion of my awareness was a street-theater performance by the Dawn Arts Group, a drama troupe that had been organized by Karuppiah and Neela to encourage people to join Arivoli classes and to
2 Feminizing Enlightenment: from:
The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: Like many efforts to remake the world, the Arivoli Iyakkam led to social changes that no one had expected. Over the course of the Total Literacy Campaigns, activists and bureaucrats were not only amazed at the scale of what the rural district of Pudukkottai had been able to achieve; they were equally surprised at who was participating and leading the way in many villages. Contrary to widespread fears among founders of the Arivoli Iyakkam that it would be very difficult to compel women to meet in public spaces for the purpose of holding literacy lessons, it was men who turned
5 Subject to Citizenship: from:
The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: Petitioning the state became an act of citizenship for Arivoli Iyakkam activists and their followers in a place where such appeals have long been understood in terms of subjection and even servitude. The literacy movement sought to democratize access to this mode of asserting citizenship by encouraging people who would previously have relied on others to write on their behalf to submit their own petitions at the district headquarters. Explaining the changes she had seen since the beginning of the Arivoli Iyakkam, for example, Sundari, a literacy-movement organizer in Pudukkottai, explained, “Before Arivoli, if village people wanted to give a
Epilogue: from:
The Light of Knowledge
Abstract: In subsequent visits to meet with the Katrampatti Arivoli Iyakkam literacy group, I learned that the Adi-Dravidar Welfare Office had sent someone to their village to inquire about a path to the cremation ground for Dalits. This was one concrete result of having submitted a petition. The official who was sent appears to have noted the survey number of some land that could potentially be used for the purpose of a path and even talked to some of the men in Katrampatti. The women who actually presented the petition at the collector’s office never talked to him. It was only
3 Straits of Appropriation from:
The Emergency of Being
Abstract: Our basic account of appropriation is in place, as is our investigation of Heidegger’s way of thinking. Our main findings can be recalled as follows. The
Contributions respond to the problem of how the being of beings is given to us. Heidegger consistently approaches this problem in terms of ways of belonging that precede theoretical abstraction. In the Contributions, his goal is to think in a way that participates in be-ing (the giving of the being of beings) as a unique, possible event of owning. To bethink be-ing is to take part in the founding of the there—the event
Book Title: Outlaw Rhetoric-Figuring Vernacular Eloquence in Shakespeare's England
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Mann Jenny C.
Abstract: A central feature of English Renaissance humanism was its reverence for classical Latin as the one true form of eloquent expression. Yet sixteenth-century writers increasingly came to believe that England needed an equally distinguished vernacular language to serve its burgeoning national community. Thus, one of the main cultural projects of Renaissance rhetoricians was that of producing a "common" vernacular eloquence, mindful of its classical origins yet self-consciously English in character. The process of vernacularization began during Henry VIII's reign and continued, with fits and starts, late into the seventeenth century. However, as Jenny C. Mann shows in
Outlaw Rhetoric, this project was beset with problems and conflicts from the start.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v6gk
INTRODUCTION from:
Overkill
Abstract: Less than half a year before Russia’s relations with the United States were soured by the 1999 NATO bombing of Yugoslavia, the Russian State Duma began a war of words about an issue of no apparent significance, although its subject was literally earth-shattering: the Hollywood blockbuster
Armageddon, whose depiction of a Russian cosmonaut wearing a fur hat as he frantically repaired the decrepit Mir space station was perceived as an unforgivable insult to Russian national pride. The fact that the movie was a runaway success in theaters throughout the Russian Federation only made matters worse, especially considering the sorry state
Chapter One ABOUT THAT: from:
Overkill
Abstract: Walk into any sex shop in Moscow, and with enough cash or the right credit card, you can buy a perfect plastic replica of international porn star Jeff Stryker’s erect penis. Clearly, the penetration of the Russian market has been a success. To make an analogy unlikely to grace the pages of a college entrance exam, Stryker’s member is to the Russian sex industry as Snickers is to snack foods: while both guarantee “satisfaction,” the organ is a naked demonstration of the barely hidden erotic connotations of post-Soviet Russia’s humiliating status as a weakened, passive importer of prepackaged cultural and
Chapter Three PIMPING THE MOTHERLAND: from:
Overkill
Abstract: As Western ships approached a port in Sevastopol, Ukraine, in late April of 1997, a group of prostitutes lined up to greet them. Given the long-standing connection between shore leave and sex for hire, this was hardly unusual in and of itself, but these women planned a welcome with pickets rather than open arms. The sailors were part of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization’s Operation Sea Breeze, a set of practice maneuvers in the Black Sea. NATO could not have picked a worse time or a more troubled spot: the Russian government was outraged over plans for the organization’s imminent
Chapter Four TO BE CONTINUED: from:
Overkill
Abstract: Violent crime in popular entertainment is first and foremost a question of storytelling. On the most basic level, violence demands more story than does sex. Consider, for example, the extreme cases in popular entertainment directed at roughly the same demographic (men): in pornography, storytelling is kept to a minimum, since anything that is not overtly sexual is simply a distraction, and thus sex scenes can be strung together with the flimsiest of narrative threads (“Is that the delivery boy?”). In stories of violence, there is no precise narrative equivalent to pornography, as graphic violence tends to be much more motivated
Chapter Six MEN OF ACTION: from:
Overkill
Abstract: Readers of the first volume of Viktor Dotsenko’s memoirs,
Mad Dog’s Father (2000), had to wait over four hundred pages for the author to describe the turning point in his life: the birth of his fictional son, Savelii Govorkov, better known as Beshenyi (“Mad Dog”).¹ Dotsenko’s paternal pride fits a common model of male authorship, but it is particularly noteworthy in Mad Dog’s case, for both specific and generic reasons. Dotsenko’s public proclamation of paternity is ironic and appropriate in that Savelii himself, like so many action heroes before and after him, is an orphan. A ward of the state
Book Title: Paradigms for a Metaphorology- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Savage Robert
Abstract: In
Paradigms for a Metaphorology, originally published in 1960 and here made available for the first time in English translation, Hans Blumenberg (1920-1996) approaches these questions by examining the relationship between metaphors and concepts. Blumenberg argues for the existence of "absolute metaphors" that cannot be translated back into conceptual language. These metaphors answer the supposedly naïve, theoretically unanswerable questions whose relevance lies quite simply in the fact that they cannot be brushed aside, since we do not pose them ourselves but find them already posed in the ground of our existence. They leap into a void that concepts are unable to fill.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v7cn
III A Terminological and Metaphorological Cross Section of the Idea of Truth from:
Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: In our investigations into truth metaphors, we have proceeded so far by placing
longitudinal sections, or rather—to emphasize the deficiency of our material (which of course can only be measured against the inevitable deficiency of all historical material)—we have provided a series of points through which a curve may be drawn. Even if we disregard the factual density of the material offered in evidence, this procedure is as contestable as it is indispensable for the development of a metaphorology. But we want to illustrate what makes it contestable by seeking to satisfy the ideal postulate of a complementary
IV Metaphorics of the ‘Naked’ Truth from:
Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: While discussing the relationship between truth and rhetoric in the passage, cited in the previous section, from the first chapter of book III of the “Divinae institutiones,” Lactantius comments on the ‘natural’
nakedness of truth. This divinely sanctioned nakedness is tarted up with rhetorical frippery in a manner that is characteristic precisely of the way in which lies manifest themselves: “But since God has willed this to be the nature of the case, that simple and undisguised truth should be more clear, because it has sufficient ornament of itself, and on this account it is corrupted when embellished with adornings
V Terra Incognita and ‘Incomplete Universe’ as Metaphors of the Modern Relationship to the World from:
Paradigms for a Metaphorology
Abstract: I would like now to provide further evidence of the pragmatic function of absolute metaphors in relation to two very specific examples, the
terra incognita metaphor and the metaphorics of the ‘incomplete universe’. It is characteristic of both that they originate in quite specific historical ‘experiences’: the first gives a metaphorical gloss to the age of discovery’s conclusion that the ‘known world’, which for millennia was relatively constant and appeared to have certain zones of unfamiliarity only at its edges, proves in retrospect to have taken up only a small corner of the earth’s surface; the other views the universe
Book Title: Artifice and Design-Art and Technology in Human Experience
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): ALLEN BARRY
Abstract: In an intriguing book about the aesthetics of technological objects and the relationship between technical and artistic accomplishment, Barry Allen develops the philosophical implications of a series of interrelated concepts-knowledge, artifact, design, tool, art, and technology-and uses them to explore parallel questions about artistry in technology and technics in art. This may be seen at the heart of
Artifice and Designin Allen's discussion of seven bridges: he focuses at length on two New York bridges-the Hell Gate Bridge and the Bayonne Bridge-and makes use of original sources for insight into the designers' ideas about the aesthetic dimensions of their work. Allen starts from the conviction that art and technology must be treated together, as two aspects of a common, technical human nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v967
INTRODUCTION: from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: There are many books about art, many about technology, but few about art
and technology—about their affinity and the relationship of both together to human experience.¹ It is this relationship that is my topic here. I develop philosophical concepts of art, artifact, knowledge, technology, and tool, which I use to explore parallel questions about artistry in technology and technics in art. The result is a work of interdisciplinary philosophical research, with concepts and arguments drawn from evolutionary biology, cognitive psychology, science studies, aesthetics, and the history, philosophy, and anthropology of art and technology.
2. THE TECHNICAL from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: The theory of tools and technical action is poorly developed in Western philosophy. There has been little advance over the ideas of Aristotle, which contain serious errors. Another source of misunderstanding is the “well-known fact” that lots of species use tools, especially chimpanzees. This chapter is partly a critique of prevailing ideas about tools and artifacts. I want to show the need for a new take on the basic concepts of technological civilization, including
artifact, artifice, technique, and tool. One topic I will not be discussing is “modern” or advanced, scientific technology. I leave that to chapter 4. This chapter
3. THE AESTHETIC from:
Artifice and Design
Abstract: Tools are not as simple as philosophers and behavioral scientists have supposed. Neither is aesthetic preference as subjective and undiscussable as its detractors assume. There is more to aesthetics than the private sentiments of people’s emotional side, and there’s little that is truly arbitrary in what people prefer or respond to. Differences are only to be expected, though they are ultimately constrained by our unshakable common evolution.
Book Title: The Total Work of Art in European Modernism- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Roberts David
Abstract: The history and theory of the total work of art pose a whole series of questions not only to aesthetic modernism and its utopias but also to the whole epoch from the French Revolution to the totalitarian revolutions of the twentieth century. The total work of art indicates the need to revisit key assumptions of modernism, such as the foregrounding of the autonomy and separation of the arts at the expense of the countertendencies to the reunion of the arts, and cuts across the neat equation of avant-gardism with progress and deconstructs the familiar left-right divide between revolution and reaction, the modern and the antimodern. Situated at the interface between art, religion, and politics, the total work of art invites us to rethink the relationship between art and religion and art and politics in European modernism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7v9cg
1 Refounding Society from:
The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: Rousseau stands at the beginning of what we might call the passage of modernity. In
Du contrat social ou Principes du droit politique(The Social Contract or Principles of Political Right) (1762) he constructs the imaginary history of the foundation of society through an act of association that effects “the passage from the state of nature to the civil state” (1.8). This founding act, through which the “Republicorbody politic” gains its unity, common identity, life, and will, points to a second act of self-institution: the recovery of the republic, of the sovereign body politic, through the refoundation of
2 The Destination of Art from:
The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: The birth of the total work of art from the spirit of revolution cannot be separated from the fundamental break in the function, purpose, and meaning of art brought to consciousness by the French Revolution. The will to create a new civil religion that directly challenged the hegemony of the Catholic Church found practical and symbolic expression in the expropriation and secularization of church property. The remodeling of Sainte-Geneviève in Paris into the Pantheon of the heroes of the Revolution went together with confiscation and collection of church treasures destined to form the core of the national patrimony. Jean Starobinski
10 Art and Revolution: from:
The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: Alexander Blok responded to the Bolshevik Revolution by delivering his own version of Nietzsche’s
Birth of Tragedyin a lecture in Petrograd in April 1919, entitled “The Decline of Humanism.” His musical theory of history recalls Saint-Simon’s alternation of organic and critical epochs but is much closer in mood to the basic topos of cultural pessimism, the decline of culture into civilization, elaborated in Oswald Spengler’sDecline of the West(1919): “Every movement has its birth in the spirit of music, through which it acts, but after a lapse of time it degenerates and begins to lose the musical, the
11 The Will to Power as Art: from:
The Total Work of Art in European Modernism
Abstract: For all that Rolland and d’Annunzio took opposite positions in relation to the French Revolution, they both claimed to speak in the name of the “people” or the “nation.” Moreover, they foreshadowed the ultimate expression of the new mass politics, inaugurated by the French Revolution, in the rival revolutionary movements that emerged from the chaos and carnage of the First World War. The Bolsheviks in Russia and the Fascists in Italy both recognized the importance of mobilizing the masses through the elaboration of a civil religion. This “aesthetics of politics,” pioneered in the French Revolution,¹ had a theatrical, performative character,
5 Playing in the Same Sandbox? from:
Habits of the Heartland
Abstract: What did the existence of these three groups of people and their distinctive styles of community making mean for life in Viroqua? How permeable were these group boundaries? Could members of these groups get along well enough to get things done together if they needed to? In this chapter I examine how Viroquans’ tastes for different cultures of community played out in their interactions with one another. In general, these cultures of community did not hamper forming cross-group ties as individuals, but it sometimes made it hard for Viroquans to get things done together as groups.
Book Title: Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation- Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Ankersmit Frank
Abstract: At the heart of Ankersmit's project is a sharp distinction between interpretation and representation. The historical text, he holds, is first and foremost a representation of some part of the past, not an interpretation. The book's central chapters address the concept of historical representation from the perspectives of reference, truth, and meaning. Ankersmit then goes on to discuss the possible role of experience in the history writing, which leads directly to a consideration of subjectivity and ethics in the historian's practice. Ankersmit concludes with a chapter on political history, which he maintains is the "basis and condition of all other variants of historical writing." Ankersmit's rehabilitation of historicism is a powerfully original and provocative contribution to the debate about the nature of historical writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z6r9
Chapter 3 Interpretation from:
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: In common parlance the terms “historical interpretation” and “historical representation” are often used interchangeably. The historical text can alternatively be described as an “interpretation” or as a “representation of the past.” Nevertheless, the two terms do not have quite the same meaning. This is clear from the fact that language, either spoken or written, is the prototypical object of interpretation, whereas the object of representation is reality. Texts are interpreted, and landscapes or still lives are represented in paintings made of them. It makes no sense to speak of the “interpretation” of the landscape we see through the windows of
Chapter 6 Truth from:
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: In the previous chapters it was argued that representation leaves no room for propositional truth. This raises the question whether this should be our last word about historical truth. Since historians themselves do not hesitate to apply the notion of truth to historical writing and since the practice of historical writing amply supports their confidence in historical truth, we cannot leave this issue undiscussed. Perhaps we can think of an alternative to propositional truth that agrees with the relevant facts about historical representation.¹
Chapter 7 Meaning from:
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: Truth, reference, and meaning have traditionally been the three central notions in philosophical semantics. In the preceding two chapters we dealt with the question of the role to be assigned to reference and truth in (historical) representation. We found that representations cannot be said to refer to the world in the way proper names and sentences do, though they can be characterized as self-referential. Similarly, the notion of truth can meaningfully be used in the context of representation, not in the sense of propositional truth but in the quasi-Heideggerian sense of truth as a revelation of a past reality. So
Chapter 10 Experience (II) from:
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation
Abstract: I began the previous chapter with a brief discussion of the constructivist account of historical writing. Most practicing historians will tend to be skeptical of it. They will protest that the constructivist’s claim that our knowledge of the past is a mere construction based on existing evidence is a most unjust caricature of their discipline. And the idea that the past itself is no ingredient in the process of the acquisition of historical knowledge they will condemn as simply preposterous. In contrast to such interpretations of their discipline, they ordinarily consider their journeys through the past with just as much
Book Title: Mourning Happiness-Narrative and the Politics of Modernity
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): Soni Vivasvan
Abstract: Soni explains that this puzzling phenomenon can only be comprehended by studying a structural transformation of the idea of happiness at the level of narrative form. Happiness is stripped of its ethical and political content, Soni demonstrates, when its intimate relation to narrative is destroyed. This occurs, paradoxically, in some of the most characteristic narratives of the period: eighteenth-century novels including
Pamela, The Vicar of Wakefield, andJulie; the pervasive sentimentalism of the time; Kant's ethics; and the political thought of Rousseau and Jefferson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7z7tm
Introduction: from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: “Happiness is a new idea in Europe,” boasted Robespierre’s colleague Saint-Just in 1794.¹ He believed that the new era in human history ushered in by the American and French revolutions in the eighteenth century was characterized by an unprecedented attention to secular happiness as a political project. For Saint-Just the promise of the Enlightenment and the goal of revolutionary aspiration was comprehended in the word “happiness.” Contemporary scholars have by and large concurred with Saint-Just’s assessment. The eighteenth century, they claim, conferred respectability on the pursuit of secular happiness as no other period before it. Indeed, eighteenth-century thinkers, not satisfied
Chapter 2 A Mourning Happiness: from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The Solonian judgment of happiness need not be restricted to a particular social context or sedimented into a formalized social ritual. Any such formalization of the judgment of happiness into a habitual practice, not arising from the initiative of the community but from the obligation of social custom, always risks undermining the very responsibility it seeks to instill, because it requires the performance of an action that is responsible only insofar as it is not compelled. There is no institution that escapes this aporia. Nevertheless, the existence of an institution also testifies to the social currency of particular practices. It
Chapter 3 Difficult Happiness: from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The audacity of Solon’s pronouncement is that it imagines a happiness that is possible for finite beings. Solon’s proverb simply requires that we judge a life’s narrative as we find it: is this life happy or unhappy? It does not specify any content to happiness in advance. Nor does it specify any criteria for happiness that would place it out of the reach of a finite being, such as the continuity of pleasure or satisfaction or the optimization of wealth. The hermeneutic of happiness is not a quest for perfection or a pure state, since there is nothing uncontaminated in
Chapter 5 The Trial Narrative in Richardson’s from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: In the world of the fifth-century polis, we speculated that the Solonian proverb on happiness was not an abstract philosophical proposition existing in isolation from social life. Through
Chapter 7 Marriage Plot from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The trial narrative produces a structural determination of happiness as reward. Though happiness may be described in a subsequent “narrative of happiness,” it is abstracted from narrative as something that exists apart and independently. The content of what constitutes happiness can be specified in advance, instead of being indeterminate. The determination of happiness as a reward granted and experienced at the end of the narrative dictates what concrete forms happiness can take in the aftermath of the trial narrative. There are only a limited number of ways in which happiness can be figured because it must satisfy strict new formal
Chapter 10 Happiness in Revolution: from:
Mourning Happiness
Abstract: The analysis of Kant has enabled us to understand the furthest expansion of the trial narrative paradigm—the replication of its logic in the discourses of ethics, politics, and history—and the most radical effects of the trial form. These effects are still visible in our lives today: the conception of happiness as an affect, the ambivalent attitude toward happiness, the structuring of our lives according to the alternation of desire/satisfaction or work/leisure, the ongoing legacy of utilitarianism’s reductive, mathematized conception of happiness. But the effects of the trial narrative are not always easy to discern: despite widespread criticism of
Book Title: The Aesthetics of Antichrist-From Christian Drama to Christopher Marlowe
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Author(s): PARKER JOHN
Abstract: The Antichrist myth in particular tells of an impostor turned prophet: performing Christ's life, he reduces the godhead to a special effect yet in so doing foretells the real second coming. Medieval audiences, as well as Marlowe's, could evidently enjoy the constant confusion between true Christianity and its empty look-alikes for that very reason: mimetic degradation anticipated some final, as yet deferred revelation. Mere theater was a necessary prelude to redemption. The versions of the myth we find in Marlowe and earlier drama actually approximate, John Parker argues, a premodern theory of the redemptive effect of dramatic representation itself. Crossing the divide between medieval and Renaissance theater while drawing heavily on New Testament scholarship, Patristics, and research into the apocrypha,
The Aesthetics of Antichristproposes a wholesale rereading of pre-Shakespearean drama.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7591/j.ctt7zk8k
CHAPTER 4 The Curious Sovereignty of Art: from:
The Aesthetics of Antichrist
Abstract: Two future adversaries and scholars of Antichrist overlapped at Cambridge, probably unknown to each other, in the 1580s. One attended Jesus College, the other Corpus Christi. As one was getting his bachelor’s, the other received a master’s. Afterwards they might both have taken the orders toward which their training inclined them, but only one did. The other was accused of nefarious activities and blasphemous opinions, of espionage, sodomy, and atheism. The accusations were eventually strengthened by his former schoolmate, now a minister and pedagogue, whose maiden publication included an account of his fellow graduate’s sacrilege, then murder, a few years
3 Media Transformation: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: When you talk about the media today, one question constantly recurs: Do the new media wipe out the old? Or, more particularly, has television wiped out books? Since no moderately alert person who notices bookstalls or the habits of persons around him could possibly believe that books have disappeared, the asking of the question becomes itself interesting. Something besides the facts is disturbing him. Television and the whole of electronics must be doing something, he feels. What is it that they are doing?
5 “I See What You Say”: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan’s philosophical investigations of man’s noetic activities are among the richest investigations of this vast subject that we have. Together with other work of his, they have warranted the calling of an international congress devoted to the discussion of what he has had to say on this and other matters. His best known work on the nature of knowledge and of knowing is the still seminal book
Insight (1957), but his other contributions on this subject are vast. In a little-known talk on “Consciousness and the Trinity” given in the late spring of 1963 at the North American College
8 The Poem as a Closed Field: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: The new criticism and the poetry which arose with it deserve to be examined in fuller perspectives than those in which they have commonly been viewed. Both are still too often described largely as ad hoc reactions to what went immediately before. The Hulme-Eliot-Pound-Leavis-Richards-Ransom kind of criticism is set against the impressionistic and often autobiographical performances of William Hazlitt, Walter Pater (“the presence that thus rose so strangely beside the waters”), or Oscar Wilde. The doctrine of clear, precise images which entered into the fiber of the New Criticism as well as into the more or less contemporaneous imagist poetry
9 Maranatha: from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: The Bible is an altogether special case in the history of textuality.* In its own history as a text it relates uniquely both to oral antecedents and, interiorly, to itself. The unusual problems it presents throw light on textuality as such, and the study of orality and textuality throws light on the Bible and the character of the message it proclaims.
11 Voice and the Opening of Closed Systems from:
Interfaces of the Word
Abstract: Studies in this book have treated the history of the word often, though not entirely, in tenus of sequestration, interposition, diaeresis or division, alienation, and closed fields or systems. The history of the word since its encounter and interaction with technology when the first writing systems were devised some six thousand years ago has been largely a matter of such separations and systems. By comparison with oral speech, writing is itself a closed system: a written text exists on its own, physically separate from any speaker or hearer, as no real spoken word can exist. Print creates a world even
Book Title: Studies in Medievalism XXIV-Medievalism on the Margins
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Montoya Alicia C.
Abstract: This volume not only defines medievalism's margins, as well as its role in marginalizing other fields, ideas, people, places, and events, but also provides tools and models for exploring those issues and indicates new subjects to which they might apply. The eight opening essays address the physical marginalizing of medievalism in annotated texts on medieval studies; the marginalism of oneself via medievalism; medievalism's dearth of ecotheory and religious studies; academia's paucity of pop medievalism; and the marginalization of races, ethnicities, genders, sexual orientations, and literary characters in contemporary medievalism. The seven subsequent articles build on this foundation while discussing: the distancing of oneself (and others) during imaginary visits to the Middle Ages; lessons from the margins of Brazilian medievalism; mutual marginalization among factions of Spanish medieval studies; and medievalism in the marginalization of lower socio-economic classes in late-eighteenth- and early nineteenth-century Spain, of modern gamers, of contemporary laborers, and of Alfred Austin, a late-nineteenth- and early twentieth-century poet also known as Alfred the Little. In thus investigating the margins of and marginalization via medievalism, the volume affirms their centrality to the field. Karl Fugelso is Professor of Art History at Towson University in Baltimore, Maryland. Contributors: Nadia R. Altschul, Megan Arnott, Jaume Aurell, Juan Gomis Coloma, Elizabeth Emery, Vincent Ferré, Valerie B. Johnson, Alexander L. Kaufman, Erin Felicia Labbie, Vickie Larsen, Kevin Moberly, Brent Moberly, Alicia C. Montoya, Serina Patterson, Jeff Rider, Lindsey Simon-Jones, Richard Utz, Helen Young.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt12879b0
Ecomedievalism: from:
Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Johnson Valerie B.
Abstract: This essay applies ecocriticism to the study of neomedieval texts, an approach that I term “ecomedievalism.” Ecomedievalism interlaces study of neomedievalisms through the bifurcated lens of ecocriticism and ecomaterialism.¹ Neomedieval texts continually deploy environmental descriptions and language to develop a sense of an authentic medieval setting, part of the worldbuilding process, yet little critical attention is devoted to analyzing these methods from an ecological perspective. Ecocriticism’s rapid theorization has allowed the field to move beyond the political activism that characterized its origins, and now offers an opportunity to begin academic study of the fictional environments in neomedievalisms.² Consequently, this essay
Women, Queerness, and Massive Chalice: from:
Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Patterson Serina
Abstract: On 30 May 2013, the game studio Double Fine launched a campaign on the crowdsourcing website Kickstarter in order to raise funds for their next project:
Massive Chalice, a neomedieval turn-based tactical strategy video game.¹ Unlike a number of other game campaigns on Kickstarter, which often call for pledges close to a project’s release date, Double Fine decided to launch its campaign forMassive Chalicein the pre-production phase of the game’s development, and thereby encourage feedback on the game’s design from the website’s community at large. Double Fine’s invitation to involve backers in shaping the game’s development not only
The Middle Ages Are within Your Grasp: from:
Studies in Medievalism XXIV
Author(s) Rider Jeff
Abstract: Today, the Middle Ages might be conveniently defined as the study of the events and artifacts in Europe (more or less) between 500 and 1500 (more or less) that still survive, and our interactions with them. Countless medieval acts of various kinds have been incorporated, and survive as what Bruno Latour has called “actants,” in our present institutions, artifacts, and gestures, but they are so combined with so many other actants that it is impossible to disentangle the medieval actants from the others, and meaningless to do so, since in these cases their value lies not in their historical difference,
4: Herder’s Concept of Humanität from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Adler Hans
Abstract: Johann Gottfried Herder has long been known for having developed groundbreaking concepts of thought as well as having modified those of others decisively.
Humanitätis—along with concepts such as origin, history, culture, Volk, and language—one of the core concepts of Herder’s works. As a matter of fact,Humanitätis Herder’s all-encompassing concept. All his thinking, writing, and actions were centered around it. In short: Herder was the philosopher ofHumanität.Not only has Herder often been called “the philosopher of humanity”; he has also been accused of being the proponent of a vague “philanthropy.”¹ The fact that scholars
6: Herder’s Aesthetics and Poetics from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Swisher Michael
Abstract: Herder’s importance for the development of thinking in the field of aesthetics and poetics has always been recognized, but it has been difficult to define the nature and extent of his contributions. They came during a crucial time of evolution leading into what is generally termed as European Romanticism. It seems to be necessary to define more precisely where exactly to locate Herder in this momentous shift of worldviews. In the second half of the eighteenth century, aesthetics established itself as a discipline of philosophy. In contrast to earlier rule-based poetics, the question of the nature of art now came
11: Herder’s Theology from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Kessler Martin
Abstract: Among the theologians of the late eighteenth century, Herder combines a unique variety of traditional elements with highly progressive and innovative components. His publications touch on most classical fields of academic education as well as the broad range of professional interests typical of the Protestant clergy. Herder expanded the frontiers of academic theology, exploring and interpreting results of contemporary debates in the humanities and sciences. Within the boundaries of a transitory period characterized by rationalist, empirical, and idealistic currents of thought, Herder investigated the various positions by addressing a wide range of fundamental questions. Striving for popularity and practical applications
12: Herder and Politics from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Bohm Arnd
Abstract: Herder’s views on political topics such as liberty and tyranny, sovereignty, the constitutions of states, statecraft, and international relations were largely theoretical, the product of wide-ranging studies in history, theology, philosophy, and the emerging discipline of comparative anthropology. Due to his vocation as a theologian and Protestant clergyman, Herder was virtually precluded from holding political office or commenting frankly on public affairs, except as mediated by the established church. Thus he stands in contrast to Goethe, whose training as a lawyer and long years of service managing the affairs of the Duchy of Saxe-Weimar-Eisenach gave him practical insight into the
13: Herder’s Poetic Works, His Translations, and His Views on Poetry from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Koepke Wulf
Abstract: In histories of German lyric poetry, Herder has no place. Also, his narrative and dramatic works are rarely mentioned in histories of German literature. It is true that he contributed in an extraordinary way to the evolution of a “new” poetry in the 1770s, but through theoretical stimulation rather than in his own creative practice. Herder started early to write poems, and cultivated the genre his entire life. The fact that he did not publish volumes of his own poetry seems to indicate his own doubts about its quality. Only toward the end of his life did he plan to
15: Herder as Critical Contemporary from:
A Companion to the Works of Johann Gottfried Herder
Author(s) Norton Robert E.
Abstract: To an extraordinary and perhaps even singular degree, Herder’s life and work are defined by the practice, function, and meaning of criticism. Despite the numerous other roles he occupied — and there were many: theologian, philosopher, linguist, historian, ethnographer, to name only a few — it was in his activity as a critic that Herder revealed his greatest strengths and arguably produced his most lasting achievements. Indeed, one might reasonably argue that Herder approached virtually everything he did
asa critic, that his thinking and expression as a whole are a reflection or product of a fundamentally critical habit of mind. It
Book Title: A Companion to Julian of Norwich- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): McAvoy Liz Herbert
Abstract: Julian of Norwich, the fourteenth/early fifteenth-century anchoress and mystic, is one of the most important and best-known figures of the Middle Ages. Her Revelations, intense visions of the divine, have been widely studied and read; the first known writings of an English woman, their influence extends over theology and literature. However, many aspects of both her life and thought remain enigmatic. This exciting new collection offers a comprehensive, accessible coverage of the key aspects of debate surrounding Julian. It places the author within a wide range of contemporary literary, social, historical and religious contexts, and also provides a wealth of new insights into manuscript traditions, perspectives on her writing and ways of interpreting it, building on the work of many of the most active and influential researchers within Julian studies, and including the fruits of the most recent, ground-breaking findings. It will therefore be a vital companion for all of Julian's readers in the twenty-first century. Dr LIZ HERBERT MCAVOY is Senior Lecturer in Gender in English and Medieval Studies at Swansea University. CONTRIBUTORS: KIM M. PHILLIPS, CATE GUNN, ALEXANDRA BARRATT, DENISE M. BAKER, DIANE WATT, E. A. JONES, ANNIE SUTHERLAND, BARRY WINDEATT, MARLEEN CRE, ELISABETH DUTTON, ELIZABETH ROBERTSON, LAURA SAETVEIT MILES, LIZ HERBERT MCAVOY, ENA JENKINS, VINCENT GILLESPIE, SARAH SALIH
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt14brrrs
Introduction: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) McAVOY LIZ HERBERT
Abstract: The above quotation, taken from a 1934 novel by Enid Dinnis, the main character of which is based loosely on the figure of Julian of Norwich, speaks volumes for the ‘industry’ of imaginative projection which Julian has become during the course of the last century or so. The very fact that this now obscure novel reached its sixth imprint in 1934 attests to its contemporary popularity and to a burgeoning fascination with Julian and the anchoritic life which she embraced. Since that time, Julian has become an increasingly familiar figure within both literary and non-literary circles, and both religious and
2 ‘A recluse atte Norwyche’: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) GUNN CATE
Abstract: We know nothing conclusive about Julian’s early life, but she indicates that she had been devout since her youth; if Julian’s childhood and youth had been spent in Norwich, how would the experiences of her early life have fed her devotional life and possibly informed her visions? Among the evidence that Norman tanner cites in support of his claim that Norwich may have been ‘Europe’s
most; religious city’¹ is the number of hermits and anchorites supported by the city in the high middle Ages. Pre-eminent among these anchorites is Julian herself, the ‘star attraction’² of the spiritual life of Norwich.
3 ‘No such sitting’: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) BARRATT ALEXANDRA
Abstract: Devotion to the Trinity was growing in the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries: ‘In 1334 Pope John XXII set aside the first Sunday after Pentecost as Trinity Sunday. Increasing devotion to the Trinity can also be seen in the many prayers addressed to the Trinity’.¹ Theology, however, did not necessarily keep pace. In his study of the doctrine of the Holy Trinity, Thomas Marsh has claimed: ‘In spite of the formal, notional acknowledgement of the doctrine, a real understanding of God as Trinity practically disappeared from the Christian consciousness of the Middle Ages’.² This sweeping condemnation, however, ignores the notable contribution
9 ‘This blessed beholdyng’: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) CRÉ MARLEEN
Abstract: Julian of Norwich’s writings have come down to us in a limited number of manuscripts, only two of which are medieval. London, British Library MS Additional 37790 (Amherst) was written around 1450, most likely in an English charterhouse. It is an anthology of five complete authorial texts in Middle English interspersed with shorter extracts and compilations.¹ In this manuscript Julian’s Short Text,
A Vision Showed to a Devout Woman, follows Richard Misyn’s Middle English translations of Richard Rolle’sEmendatio vitaeandIncendium amorisand is itself followed by the Middle English translation of Ruusbroec’sVanden blinkenden steenand M. N.’s
11 Julian of Norwich’s ‘Modernist Style’ and the Creation of Audience from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) ROBERTSON ELIZABETH
Abstract: Given the prominence of Julian of Norwich’s writing in the canon of English literature, it is surprising how little we know about her audience in general. Neither historical nor manuscript evidence reveals much about her contemporary audience. To determine who read or heard her work, either as a written or oral composition, we need to consider such questions as who Julian was, who wrote down her story in its short form and then in its longer and more considered version, for whom she intended these versions, and who actually received them. Despite the fact that these questions yield only fragmentary
14 Julian’s Revelation of Love: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) JENKINS ENA
Abstract: Influenced – perhaps unduly – by an early encounter with Julian in Eliot’s
Four Quartets, I have long read her as a poet, like Dante both a mystical poet and a theological mystic. Hinted at inA Vision Showed to a Devout Woman, this becomes a defining characteristic ofA Revelation of Love¹ and, in looking at both texts as a work in progress, I have perceived both poet and poetic in process of becoming, the growth of a poet’s mind as Julian seeks ways of communicating what can be told of the nature of her mystical awakening. To readA Revelation
15 ‘[S]he do the police in different voices’: from:
A Companion to Julian of Norwich
Author(s) GILLESPIE VINCENT
Abstract: Many scholars and readers of Julian have puzzled over the strangeness of her text’s structure and the curiously recursive and apparently involuted way that she expounds her showings. Right from the outset, she challenges standard interpretative strategies with her claim in the first chapter of the Long Text that the showing of the Crown of Thorns both ‘comprehended and specified the blessed Trinity’ in which ‘all the shewinges that foloweth be groundide and oned’.² This is typical of her dizzying changes of visual and intellectual perspective: both comprehensive and specific; effortlessly moving from image (crown) to abstraction (Trinity); grounding and
The Composite Nature of Eleventh-Century Homiliaries: from:
Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) CORRADINI ERIKA
Abstract: The production of English vernacular homilies in the eleventh century has often been studied with regard to textual transmission and adaptation. Much focus has been placed on the eleventh-century practices of adapting earlier sources to the needs of new users, and to studying the different purposes underlying the original production of, for instance, Ælfric and Wulfstan.¹ These studies provide invaluable evidence regarding the interests and concerns of those preachers who were interested in using Ælfric and Wulfstan’s homiletic texts in the eleventh and early twelfth centuries. However, the form in which such adaptations of earlier homilies were collected physically and
The Power and the Glory: from:
Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) CRICK JULIA
Abstract: Historians of the modern and pre-modern worlds have often sought to make connections between the boundaries of states and the shape of their respective historiographies; in recent years they have scrutinised archival processes and the preservation of artefacts of the past, and they and their literary peers have examined the historical narratives which imposed order on the past and gave meaning to its remains.¹ National historiographies are thus commonly ascribed active properties, as means by which elites might recognise and realise a collective future for their nation, stifle opposing views and assert a common will. If we accept the general
Vanishing Transliteracies in Beowulf and Samuel Pepys’s Diary from:
Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) TRETTIEN WHITNEY ANNE
Abstract: This essay explores how media history and the printed book’s place within it contribute to the institutional identity of literature, and how the institutional strategies by which these past documents became and maintain their authority as literary artefacts have resulted in various forms of the ‘strategic forgetting and recoding’ that Jane Newman notes in the quotation above. When we started this essay, we chose two disparate literary works from our respective periods of specialisation,
Beowulfand Samuel Pepys’sDiary, for the simple reason that they both were discovered as written documents, became literature through printed editions and scholarship, and now
Descriptive Bibliography and Electronic Publication from:
Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) GANTS DAVID L.
Abstract: As part of a session at the 1977 Annual Meeting of the Association of American University Presses, five scholarly publishers prepared business plans for an imagined work entitled
No Time for Houseplants, by Purvis Mulch. The University Presses at Chicago, MIT, North Carolina, Texas and Toronto each presented detailed procedures for the acquisition, editing, design, production and marketing of this made-up book. Published asOne Book / Five Waysa year later, the results of the experiment illustrate how the physical embodiment of a single verbal text can display quite different stylistic and bibliographical characteristics. Each press brought to the
Problematising Textual Authority in the York Register from:
Textual Cultures: Cultural Texts
Author(s) STANAVAGE LIBERTY
Abstract: Recent work on medieval textuality has disrupted the popular notion that books in the Middle Ages were universally treated with reverence as almost magical objects, although the notion remains disturbingly persistent.¹ The past two decades have seen an increasing interest in destabilised texts, in reified meanings and in marginalia and glosses as a component of the text, rather than a defacement. Critics such as Peter Diehl, Siân Echard, Ralph Hanna and Carol Braun Pasternack have suggested variant editorial practices that recognise the complexity of texts, rather than reducing them to a single ‘correct’ edition.² Other critics have argued the need
6: Absolution and Contradiction: from:
Aesthetic Vision and German Romanticism
Abstract: In order to critique the philosophical concept of the absolute subject — the subject posited by German idealist thought — one need not dismiss wholesale all prior Western metaphysics, as did Heidegger. For his part, Kleist made narratives of such critiques. Casting a critical eye upon contemporary philosophical systems, he relentlessly denied absolution to the characters in his texts. His explorations of the fundamentally fragmentary nature of subjectivity implicated him in the same Romantic philosophical dilemma that I have been describing throughout. If an abyss can be said to have opened around 1800, Kleist fell into it. In this chapter
Book Title: Cultural Performances in Medieval France-Essays in Honor of Nancy Freeman Regalado
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Burns E. Jane
Abstract: This collection of essays pays tribute to Nancy Freeman Regalado, a ground-breaking scholar in the field of medieval French literature whose research has always pushed beyond disciplinary boundaries. The articles in the volume reflect the depth and diversity of her scholarship, as well as her collaborations with literary critics, philologists, historians, art historians, musicologists, and vocalists - in France, England, and the United States. Inspired by her most recent work, these twenty-four essays are tied together by a single question, rich in ramifications: how does performance shape our understanding of medieval and pre-modern literature and culture, whether the nature of that performance is visual, linguistic, theatrical, musical, religious, didactic, socio-political, or editorial? The studies presented here invite us to look afresh at the interrelationship of audience, author, text, and artifact, to imagine new ways of conceptualizing the creation, transmission, and reception of medieval literature, music, and art. EGLAL DOSS-QUINBY is Professor of French at Smith College; ROBERTA L. KRUEGER is Professor of French at Hamilton College; E. JANE BURNS is Professor of Women's Studies and Adjunct Professor of Comparative Literature at the University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill. Contributors: ANNE AZÉMA, RENATE BLUMENFELD-KOSINSKI, CYNTHIA J. BROWN, ELIZABETH A. R. BROWN, MATILDA TOMARYN BRUCKNER, E. JANE BURNS, ARDIS BUTTERFIELD, KIMBERLEE CAMPBELL, ROBERT L. A. CLARK, MARK CRUSE, KATHRYN A. DUYS, ELIZABETH EMERY, SYLVIA HUOT, MARILYN LAWRENCE, KATHLEEN A. LOYSEN, LAURIE POSTLEWATE, EDWARD H. ROESNER, SAMUEL N. ROSENBERG, LUCY FREEMAN SANDLER, PAMELA SHEINGORN, HELEN SOLTERER, JANE H. M. TAYLOR, EVELYN BIRGE VITZ, LORI J. WALTERS, AND MICHEL ZINK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt169wfdd
A Cultural Performance in Silk: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Burns E. Jane
Abstract: If all of Proust’s world comes out of a teacup, the world of Sebelinne, a little-known heroine in the Old French
Dit de l’Empereur Constant, comes out of a silk purse. Indeed this thirteenth-century Byzantine romance about religious conversion and male dynastic succession actually turns on a small object fashioned from cloth: a richly decorated, heavily embroideredaumousniere.¹ Whether damask or velvet, decorated with silk or gold embroidery, Old Frenchaumousnieresdescribed in romance texts and trade accounts of the thirteenth century are fashioned typically from costly silk and hung from a belt, itself often made of rich silk fabric.
Acting Like a Man: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Campbell Kimberlee
Abstract: For scholars of the Middle Ages, the old
French chanson de gestehas traditionally served as the benchmark for one extreme of a continuum of representation, a genre expressing the distilled essence of the medieval masculine. This reading of the epic presumes a transparent equivalence of the masculine with the body and actions of the knight, constructing the “male” as a necessary element in an ideology of chivalric caste and power. Furthermore, this definition of the masculine is, in Simon Gaunt’s words, “monologic,” meaning that “in thechansons de gestemale characters are defined as individuals in relation to other
Amorous Performances: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Huot Sylvia
Abstract: The vast fourteenth-century prose
Roman de Perceforest, a fictional chronicle of pre-Arthurian Britain under Greek rule, offers a fascinating exposition of courtly ideologies.¹ In this essay I will examine a single episode, that of theAventure de l’espee vermeille, which is played out in the course of Book V.² In this adventure, young knights are offered an easy sexual encounter with a beautiful young maiden, and given to believe that it is only through sexual “performance” that they can prove their manhood. As the adventure progresses, however, it becomes increasingly clear that this kind of sexual adventuring is actually antithetical
Performing Vernacular Song in Monastic Culture: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Duys Kathryn A.
Abstract: Gautier de Coinci cast his
Miracles de Nostre Dameas a single long performance.¹ Most of his work calls for narrative recitation of miracle stories composed in octosyllabic rhymed couplets, while his songs, many of which are set to the melodies of thetrouvères’ “greatest-hits,” call for minstrel-like singing.² These performance practices are easily recognizable from secular literary models, romances and love songs, and they are well suited to the recreational purpose of theMiracles de Nostre Dame. As I have argued elsewhere, Gautier explicitly designed his work as a spiritual literary recreation for monks, nuns, and pious laypersons to
Performative Reading: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Sheingorn Pamela
Abstract: In the introduction to the ground-breaking collection of essays
Performing Medieval Narrative, edited by Evelyn Birge Vitz, Nancy Freeman Regalado, and Marilyn Lawrence, the editors describe the focus of their book as “performance in its more interpersonal, dramatic, and physical dimensions (visual, auditory, musical).”¹ The contents indicate a clear adherence to that focus, with sections on medieval performers of narrative, oral performance of books, performability, and the experiences of performers who enact medieval works today. The editors nonetheless provocatively observe that, “Any way in which a narrative is actualized can be said to be a performance. In this sense, even
Dramatic Troubles of Ecclesia: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Blumenfeld-Kosinski Renate
Abstract: The relationship between the Church and medieval theater was fruitful and complex but it was also contested. Was the medieval Church a facilitator of, or an impediment to, the development of the theatrical form? How, for example, can one define the relationship between the dramatic elements of the liturgy and religious theater? Long ago Karl Young studied the drama of the medieval Church and its relation to the liturgy and posited rather rigid boundaries between the two.¹ For him, any text that does not clearly indicate that human actors impersonate or perform specific characters is not a play. But as
Preaching the Sins of the Ladies: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Postlewate Laurie
Abstract: An important strategy in the method of early Franciscan preachers and poets was to evoke understanding of vice and virtue through concrete and visible examples. In sermons and catechetical texts, Franciscans used stories and poetry full of lively images to describe sin and show it in action; in this way, the Friars Minor provided literary performance of the vices and virtues for the purpose of correcting the sins of lay society.¹ Indeed our understanding today of what “sinful” behavior was for medieval people is greatly enhanced by the depiction and enactment of specific vices in Franciscan literature. The works of
Making Names, Breaking Lives: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Solterer Helen
Abstract: In the murky climate of Paris 1413, on a Mayday when king Charles VI had gone mad, noble factions were killing each other off, and the city in revolt, the major chroniclers focused on one episode. Each narrated the arrest of women attending the queen, Isabeau of Bavaria.¹ Jean Le Fèvre’s account presents a menacing break-in (75–79). A crowd of commoners, led by butchers known as the Cabochiens, penetrated the
Hôtel particulierof the dauphin demanding that he hand over all traitors in his residence. Next stop: the queen’s own Hôtel Saint-Pol where a roll-call of traitors was read
Variegated Performance of Aucassin et Nicolette from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Vitz Evelyn Birge
Abstract: The literary works that survive from the medieval period have come down to us in manuscripts. We are grateful for those manuscripts, as we are for the work of the scholars who edit and study them. But we also need to think beyond manuscripts, to the fact that few people in the Middle Ages actually read the words inscribed on those
Late Medieval Representations of Storytelling and Story-Performance from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Loysen Kathleen A.
Abstract: The decision to re-enact on the page a scene of oral storytelling is extraordinarily prevalent in late-medieval French literature, as it will continue to be throughout the sixteenth century. Texts such as the anonymous
Cent nouvelles nouvelles(1462) and the anonymousÉvangiles des quenouilles(ca. 1470–80)¹ experiment with the staging of oral storytelling in a range of ways, using embedded narratives, the structural device of the frame, and the depiction of storytelling circles. Scenes of oral storytelling are fertile ground for inquiry regarding late medieval practices of story transmission, especially the dynamic relation between performance and audience reception.²
The Pitfalls and Promise of Classroom Performance from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Bruckner Matilda Tomaryn
Abstract: During the medieval period, Arras was a major commercial and cultural center in northern France. This course explores the complex world of Arras by highlighting two of its major authors, Adam de la Halle and Jean Bodel, whose works run the gamut of literary forms practiced from the late twelfth through the thirteenth century: from epic
« Dunc chante haut et cler »: from:
Cultural Performances in Medieval France
Author(s) Azéma Anne
Abstract: Il convient de prime abord de rappeler que nos conventions actuelles concernant la création, la transmission et l’interprétation musicales
Book Title: Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): McKINSTRY JAMIE
Abstract: In Middle English romances many memories are created, stored, forgotten, and rediscovered by both the characters and audience; such memory work is not, however, either simple or obvious. This study examines the ways in which recollection is achieved and sustained through physical, cognitive, and interpretative challenges. It uses examples such as Sir Gawain and the Green Knight, Sir Orfeo, and Emaré, alongside romances by Chaucer and Malory, to investigate the genre's reliance on individual and collective memorial processes. The author argues that a tale's objects, places, dreams, discoveries, disguises, prophecies, and dramatic ironies influence that romance's essential memory work, which relies as much on creativity as it does accuracy. He also explores the imaginative crafts of memory that are employed by romances themselves. Dr Jamie McKinstry teaches in the Department of English Studies at Durham University, where he is a member of the Institute of Medieval and Early Modern Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt17mvhj3
1 Introduction: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: Why, indeed, is memory important in medieval romances? This question needs clarification given the many associations and definitions of such a complex cognitive faculty as memory, and the equally wide-ranging scope of this particular literary genre. We should begin by considering what exactly we mean by “memory,” which can be both individual, relating to the thought processes of a single remembering subject, and also collective. To take examples from the romance genre itself, a single knight might be trying desperately to maintain the memory of his love whilst away from home for many years. This is his individual memorial challenge.
2 Medieval Memories: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: We all use our memories everyday and although recent research in neuroscience and its related fields can be highly complex and technical, the subject of these investigations – memory itself – is essential to all human behaviour or existence and the way we interact with other people and the world. We use, and are exposed to, memory all the time and so, in fact, are already well versed in its abilities and limitations whether we recognise our inherent human understanding of the faculty or not. The human awareness of and aptitude for memory forms the basis for influential studies in
4 Past Rituals and Present “Forests”: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: In the previous chapter it was argued that romances frequently contain memories of other tales, even other versions of the same narrative, which are there for the audience to identify and then apply to the current tale. The process demands careful cognitive effort and also a great deal of creative freedom which is, as was explored in the discussion of classical and medieval theories, at the very centre of medieval
memoria. It is no surprise therefore that romances also rely upon and encourage the memorial skills of characters and audiences throughout a romance narrative as situations are stored in the
5 Trusting Memory in Romance from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: In the previous chapter it became clear that the characters and audience are expected to use their memories in imaginative ways in order to establish connections between past and present. The mental challenge was intensified by the drama of present “forests,” or the adverse effects that a perpetually present situation could have on the character’s reputation, loved one, and life. Likewise, the audience is placed under a similar pressure – they must protect the character they have been following and also, by remembering details of the plot, maintain the thematic and moral unity of that particular romance such as the
6 Failed Memories: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: In the previous chapter memory and recollection were instrumental in directing a character’s experience and in shaping the greater theme or moral developed during the course of a tale. Yet, given the creative freedom invited during the process of recollection, memory was never restrictive or overly controlling in the narrative. Rather, characters and the audience retained the free will inherent in voluntary intellection (as was discussed in Chapter 2) which allowed them to choose and recollect in their own way and, to a certain extent, at their own pace. Materials were presented which
couldbe used during the process of
7 The Memory of Change: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: Throughout this study two rules have emerged regarding the process of recollection: firstly, that the past is crucial in shaping responses to a present situation and, secondly, in order for any recollection to be successful,
thatpast must be crafted to fit with a current set of circumstances. Certain characters in the previous chapter deliberately denied any such opportunities by imposing boundaries between the present and “true” past or restricting the creative opportunities that were available to form a reconnection with the past. However, when we talk of adapting the present in line with the past, the silent understanding is
Conclusion: from:
Middle English Romance and the Craft of Memory
Abstract: This study has asserted that memory (and its associated cognitive and interpretative processes) is essential to a romance’s success as morally satisfying, entertaining, and challenging literature. Moreover, the role of memory can change according to the aesthetics and aims of a particular tale. Consequently, the faculty occupies a prominent role across the romance genre in narratives that are, variously, courtly and complex, metrical and local, or Arthurian and legendary. Memory, as had become abundantly clear, serves an essential, practical function in
episodicnarratives: the faculty allows a character to reaffirm and develop their identity whilst simultaneously maintaining the unity of
INTRODUCTION: from:
God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: The now well-established critical consensus that the four poems of British Library MS Cotton Nero A.x, Art.3 are the work of the same person is derived in part from the recurrence in them of particular motifs and preoccupations which to that extent draws them together. We shall go further, suggesting that what we call the
oeuvreof theGawain-poet presents us with a coherent religious vision, deliberately explicated according to a particular order and within a particular social context. In order to answer the questions that the Cotton poems have raised, and to account for our various reactions to them,
CHAPTER 2 The difficulty of Cleanness from:
God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: Although
Pearlis the first poem in its section of MS Cotton Nero, and the first to be discussed in this study, there is a general assumption thatCleannesswas actually the first of the four poems to be composed.¹ The main reason for this may be thatCleannessinitially strikes the reader as a less polished production than the others, uneven in its structure and inconsistent in its message.Cleannessis nevertheless a very powerful and impressive poem. It contains exciting scenes of cataclysmic disaster, vivid passages of descriptive chronicle, direct and earthy expressions of humorous contempt, a lovingly
CHAPTER 3 Patience and the Book of Jonah from:
God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: Patienceis the second of the Beatitude-poems in this collection and is on the face of it as different fromCleannessas could be. It is short, brisk and funny. InPatience, as inCleanness, God observes the wickedness of human beings and sends a prophet to rebuke them, but instead of destroying them in the whirlwind he has threatened, he relents and forgives the repentant Ninevites. It is not God who is stern and unforgiving, but the reluctant prophet, Jonah. The Biblical book of Jonah givesJonahthis character, but inPatienceit is shown to be ridiculous as
CHAPTER 4 Sir Gawain and the Green Knight: from:
God and the Gawain-Poet
Abstract: One knows, of course, exactly what he
Introduction from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Osborne Dora
Abstract: In 2009, the Historical Archive of the City of Cologne, regarded as the most significant north of the Alps, collapsed, seemingly as a result of negligence in the construction of an underground train line. As the vast majority of its valuable holdings plummeted into the mud below, the archive became visible in wholly unintended ways. Precisely at the point of the archive’s catastrophic malfunction, the public saw exactly what had been carefully stored behind the walls of the municipal building they had probably, in many cases, never noticed. Prior to the collapse, the archive had been known in particular for
Between Preservation and Destruction: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Basu Priyanka
Abstract: This essay examines the archival practices of German photographers Bernd and Hilla Becher, focusing on their first decade working together beginning in 1959, during which they produced the earliest iterations of and statements about their ongoing project photographing the industrial structures they termed “anonymous sculpture.” It considers what they meant to achieve in this production by systematically documenting these edifices—pit heads, cooling towers, blast furnaces, water towers, and others used in resource extraction and processing—of the Siegerland and Ruhr regions of central and western Germany. The Bechers keenly sensed that the industries of which these structures were emblems
Janos Frecot, Photographic Archives, and the Zero Hours of Berlin from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ward Simon
Abstract: Writing in 1982, the photographer and curator Janos Frecot claimed that “die Stunde Null in ihrer Offenheit scheint aktueller denn je” (the Zero Hour in its openness seems more urgently contemporary than ever).¹ If, given the manifold continuities in societal and political structures that followed the end of the war, particularly in West Germany, the caesura of the “Zero Hour” (or “Stunde Null”) is a myth rather than a historical fact, its value as the emblem of a missed opportunity was nevertheless something that was invoked, as here by Frecot, in attempting to imagine an alternative German society. Already in
Harun Farocki’s Critical Film Archive from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Ring Annie
Abstract: Harun Farocki died in Berlin in July 2014 at the height of an unmatched career in political filmmaking. The oeuvre of this graduate of the Deutsche Film und Fernsehakademie (German Film and Television Academy Berlin; dffb) is characterized by a technique of repurposing moving-image archives in a critical documentary mode crafted to reveal the hidden processes of preparation, acculturation, and training that pervasively constitute the present-day West and render its citizens unwittingly yet habitually complicit. In this chapter I focus on Farocki’s works that piece together found footage drawn from such diverse sources as classic Hollywood feature film, prison CCTV
Verbalizing Silence and Sorting Garbage: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 9
Author(s) Payne Charlton
Abstract: In the
Archeology of Knowledge, Michel Foucault identifies in the archive a “particular level” that “between tradition and oblivion, […] reveals the rules of a practice that enables statements both to survive and to undergo regular modification. It isthe general system of the formation and transformation of statements.”¹ Because statements emerge as meaningful discourse at a given time, their appearance is accompanied by the possibility that they might not appear. They thereby point to the ways in which language is an event, the possibility of something being said or not said, a matter of whether enunciations even take place
Book Title: Forgotten Dreams-Revisiting Romanticism in the Cinema of Werner Herzog
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Johnson Laurie Ruth
Abstract: Werner Herzog (b. 1942) is perhaps the most famous living German filmmaker, but his films have never been read in the context of German cultural history. And while there is a surfeit of film reviews, interviews, and scholarly articles on Herzog and his work, there are very few books devoted to his films, and none addressing his entire career to date. Until now. Forgotten Dreams offers not only an analytical study of Herzog's films but also a new reading of Romanticism's impact beyond the nineteenth century. It argues that his films re-envision and help us better understand a critical stream in Romanticism, and places the films in conversation with other filmmakers, authors, and philosophers in order to illuminate that critical stream. The result is a lively reconnection with Romantic themes and convictions that have been partly forgotten in the midst of Germany's postwar rejection of much of Romantic thought, yet are still operative in German culture today. The film analyses will interest scholars of film, German Studies, and Romanticism as well as a broader public interested in Herzog's films and contemporary German cultural debates. The book will also appeal to those interested in the ongoing renegotiation - by Western and other cultures - of relationships between reason and passion, civilization and wild nature, knowledge and belief. Laurie Ruth Johnson is Associate Professor of German, Comparative and World Literature, and Criticism and Interpretive Theory at the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt18kr6wj
Introduction: from:
Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: Writing in Lima on June 25, 1979, where he had arrived to work on preproduction for
Fitzcarraldo, Werner Herzog called Peru a “sleepy country at which God’s wrath has cooled.”¹ But two years later, after the arduous creation of a film in which a steamship was pulled over a mountain in the jungle, political controversy and financial catastrophe nearly ended production, and the indigenous extras threatened to kill the lead actor, the director described the weather as a heaven-sent curse: “Today (June 5, 1981) the rain came down at midday as God’s scourge strikes the impious.”² Despite his short-lived conversion
1: Image and Knowledge from:
Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: In the essay “Ruysdael als Dichter” (1816; Ruisdael as Poet), Johann Wolfgang Goethe argues that Jacob van Ruisdael’s images seem to move, and in fact to enact a narrative. Goethe notes that the seventeenth-century painter’s technique is impeccable, but the essay focuses on Ruisdael “as a thinking artist, even as a poet” (als denkenden Künstler, ja als Dichter).¹ “Ruysdael als Dichter” implicitly disputes the conclusions of Gotthold Ephraim Lessing’s
Laokoon(1766; Laocoon), which states that painting and sculpture can only imitate plots or narratives, not convey them.² Ruisdael, counters Goethe, indeed can portray movement through time in his painting: his
3: Beauty and Sublimity from:
Forgotten Dreams
Abstract: “I saw the home of a god” (Ich sah die Heimat eines Gottes), says the protagonist of Christoph Ransmayr’s
Atlas eines ängstlichen Mannes(2012). Another chapter of this novel structured as a travelogue opens with the words “I saw an open grave” (Ich sah ein offenes Grab), and yet another with “I saw a distant figure” (Ich sah eine ferne Gestalt).¹ Ransmayr’s fiction, like Herzog’s oeuvre, is filled with images of awesome, existentially terrifying, often violent nature in remote, extreme, dangerous locales. As extreme as Ransmayr’s characters’ experiences are, they are often based on historical events; and he repeatedly inserts
CHAPTER 4 Sonets & Pastoralls, III from:
Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: It is not uniquely postmodernist to contend that women can be magnificent and men can be chaste. Elizabethans believed this as well. The character Marinell of the
Faerie Queene, who avoids love out of fear, represents, for example, a virginal chaste man in Edmund Spenser’s epic poem.¹ Elizabeth Talbot, aka Bess of Hardwick, commissioned a full set of tapestries depicting women who exemplified a number of virtues.² In his epitaph for Mary Queen of Scots, which was mounted on her tomb, the Byrd patron Henry Howard, first Earl of Northampton, championed his subject above all for her magnanimity and chastised
CHAPTER 8 Songs of Five Parts from:
Verse and Voice in Byrd's Song Collections of 1588 and 1589
Abstract: Byrd uses similar tactics
Book Title: Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Whitehead Chris
Abstract: Across the global networks of heritage sites, museums, and galleries, the importance of communities to the interpretation and conservation of heritage is increasingly being recognised. Yet the very term "meaningful community engagement" betrays a myriad of contrary approaches and understandings. Who is a community? How can they engage with heritage and why would they want to? How do communities and heritage professionals perceive one another? What does it mean to "engage"? These questions unsettle the very foundations of community engagement and indicate a need to unpick this important but complex trend. Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities critically explores the latest debates and practices surrounding community collaboration. By examining the different ways in which communities participate in heritage projects, the book questions the benefits, costs and limitations of community engagement. Whether communities are engaging through innovative initiatives or in response to economic, political or social factors, there is a need to understand how such engagements are conceptualised, facilitated and experienced by both the organisations and the communities involved.BR> Bryony Onciul is Lecturer in History at the University of Exeter; Michelle Stefano is the Co-Director of Maryland Traditions, the folklife program for the state of Maryland and Visiting Assistant Professor in American Studies at the University of Maryland, Baltimore County; Stephanie Hawke is a project manager and fundraiser, working on a range of projects aiming to engage communities with cultural heritage. Contributors: Gregory Ashworth, Evita Busa, Helen Graham, Julian Hartley, Stephanie Hawke, Carl Hogsden, Shatha Abu Khafajah, Nicole King, Bernadette Lynch, Billie Lythberg, Conal McCarthy, Ashley Minner, Wayne Ngata, Bryony Onciul, Elizabeth Pishief, Gregory Ramshaw, Philipp Schorch, Justin Sikora, Michelle Stefano, Gemma Tully, John Tunbridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1kgqvrc
2 Assembling Communities: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Schorch Philipp
Abstract: Nations in the South Pacific face the dramatic dual pressures of local reinventions and global engagements over processes of political decolonisation (both external and internal), cultural revitalisation and economic development. However, we have a limited understanding of how cultural practices can embody these processes and illuminate the ways in which they are being negotiated. This chapter addresses this situation by laying the foundation for a documentation and analysis of the contribution of curatorial practices in museums to (re)negotiating identities, cultural revitalisation and economic development.
3 Interview – John Tunbridge from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Tunbridge John
Abstract: My research commitment to heritage began 40 years ago, when I realised that this then rather novel concept had important practical implications for differing valuations of places and was accordingly emerging as a very significant variable in geography, my home discipline. My first heritage publications concerned the geographical impact of conservation trusts, notably the British National Trusts, for which community engagement was implicitly at the national level – though in those days that meant primarily the white middle-class community. Before long, however, it became clear
5 Engaging with Māori and Archaeologists: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Pishief Elizabeth
Abstract: Understanding what heritage means to community groups is an essential prerequisite for active, creative and successful engagement with them. Heritage is a cultural construct comprising different ideological and material phenomena for diverse groups of people, which means there are innumerable possible heritages, each shaped for the specific user group. However, although there may be an infinite variety of possible heritages, in New Zealand, for example, the dominant Western discourse controls the development of independent heritages. This chapter provides evidence of two different ‘heritages’ and identifies key principles about heritage. A view of heritage has emerged since 2011 that reflects the
6 Horizontality: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Graham Helen
Abstract: This book is questioningly titled ‘Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities’. Let us think about some of the everyday meanings of ‘engagement’ for a moment.¹ If a toilet is engaged, then it means someone is using it and you cannot; you must wait your turn. If you are engaged to be married, you cannot marry anyone else, and you wear a ring to show this exclusiveness to others. An engaged person is not open to others, or other romantic or sexual possibilities. To want
to engagesomeone or something is not, therefore, a neutral act; it is claiming something totally. It is
12 Embattled Legacies: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Sikora Justin
Abstract: When considering community engagement at historic battlefields, there are no clear-cut, easily definable parameters as to who or which entities could be considered the sole ‘community’ at this kind of heritage site. One of the key reasons for this is that many battlefields do not have easily defined boundaries, resulting in confusion not only over who is responsible for their care and management but also over who values unidentified, and sometimes misidentified, spaces. Compounded by the fact that these are often empty fields devoid of even cursory manifestations of memorialisation, one could conclude that these are forgotten sites buried under
13 At the Community Level: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Stefano Michelle L.
Abstract: ‘Intangible cultural heritage’, as defined by the 2003
Convention for the Safeguarding of the Intangible Cultural Heritageof the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), continues to gain traction as a concept within the international heritage discourse. Despite the fact that a decade has now passed since the enforcement of the 2003 Convention, the issue ofeffectivelysafeguarding intangible cultural heritage (hereafter ICH) remains an important topic of debate at international, national and regional levels.¹ Most importantly, there exists a framework for the safeguarding of ICH that continues to gain international acceptance: the set of guidelines and suggestions
16 Relational Systems and Ancient Futures: from:
Engaging Heritage, Engaging Communities
Author(s) Ngata Wayne
Abstract: This chapter explores the complex engagements navigated by heritage professionals and a self-defined and genealogically connected community working together under the auspices of two separately funded but related projects: ‘Artefacts of Encounter’, funded by the UK’s Economic and Social Research Council and Arts and Humanities Research Council and based at the University of Cambridge Museum of Archaeology and Anthropology (MAA); and ‘Te Ataakura’, funded by the Māori Centre of Research Excellence Ngā Pae o te Māramatanga and based at the Eastern Institute of Technology, Aotearoa-New Zealand.¹ These brought together Toi Hauiti, the working arts group of Te Aitanga a Hauiti,
Introduction from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Petrescu Corina L.
Abstract: When the secret police services of the former Eastern bloc were dismantled at the end of the Cold War, they left an ambivalent legacy for successor governments. The extensive historical archives that were salvaged during the transition—the copious quantities of paper documents either left behind in the confusion of shifting relations of power or rescued by farsighted reformers—are damning evidence of the activities of the disproportionately large political police forces that mushroomed in Central and Eastern European countries under communist rule. Unlike many physical remains of these regimes that have been consigned to the dustbin of history, the
2: “You’ll Never Make a Spy Out of Me”: from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Glajar Valentina
Abstract: Like secret police files from other Eastern bloc countries, files of the Romanian secret police (or Securitate) present fragments of individual lives that consist of a collection of informers’ notes, officers’ reports and analyses, letters, photographs, and transcripts of interrogations and wiretapped private conversations. While these notes and reports resemble particular snapshots of a person’s life, often taken from different angles and through various lenses, confirmed and reconfirmed by numerous Securitate sources, they typically resist attempts to assemble them into a coherent plot. Yet they do offer relevant insights into the organization of the Securitate and its tactics. The selectively
5: Perpetrator as Victim in Jana Döhring’s Stasiratte from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Costabile-Heming Carol Anne
Abstract: This introductory comment in the foreword to Jana Döhring’s
Stasiratte(Stasi Rat, 2012) underscores the Janus-faced nature of memory. Nowhere has this been more evident than in the confrontations that East Germans have had with their secret police (Stasi) files. More than twenty-five years after the dissolution of the oppressive regime that ruled the German Democratic Republic for forty years, the legacy of the Stasi files continues to impact personal biographies in myriad ways. The peculiarity of the Stasi remains a source of fascination, and the Academy Award–winning filmDas Leben der Anderen(The Lives of Others, 2006) made
7: The Stasi Files on Center Stage: from:
Secret Police Files from the Eastern Bloc
Author(s) Garde Ulrike
Abstract: Approximately two decades after the fall of the Berlin Wall, a number of theater practitioners began to work with documents related to the German Democratic Republic’s Ministerium für Staatssicherheit (Ministry for State Security), the so-called Stasi files, in which the secret police service had gathered information on the lives of its fellow citizens. This chapter focuses on artistic engagements with this specific type of life writing in theater productions which encouraged individual performers who had been directly affected by the surveillance to engage, along with their audiences, with fragments of Stasi files in public performance spaces in and around Germany’s
Blind Spots as Projection Spaces in Die Wahlverwandtschaften from:
Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) HOLMES TOVE
Abstract: In the opening chapter of
Die Wahlverwandtschaften(Elective Affinities, 1809) Charlotte positions Eduard in her newly finished “Mooshütte” or summer-house in such a way “daß er durch Türe und Fenster die verschiedenen Bilder, welche die Landschaft gleichsam im Rahmen zeigten, auf einen Blick übersehen konnte”¹ (“so that through windows and door he could oversee at a glance the different views, in which the landscape appeared like a sequence of framed pictures”).² In expressing his admiration for the instantaneous overview, Eduard nevertheless includes the detractor: “Nur eines habe ich zu erinnern . . . die Hütte scheint mir etwas zu eng”
Disorientation in Novalis or “The Subterranean Homesick Blues” from:
Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) LYON JOHN B.
Abstract: German Romantic literature rests on unstable ground. For example, Friedrich Schlegel’s notion of Romantic irony as a “permanente Parekbase” (permanent parabasis)¹ denies the authority of a single vantage point. As parabasis—the Greek term for the chorus stepping out of the action of the play and addressing an ode to the audience—irony is the constant possibility of assuming another subject position, of viewing and representing the world from a different and even contradictory angle. Whether in Brentano’s
Godwi(1800/1801), where the narrator dies before the end of the novel and the protagonist completes the narration, or in Tieck’sDer
Spatial Mobilization: from:
Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) WEBER CHRISTIAN P.
Abstract: According to Carl von Clausewitz’s famous dictum, war is the continuation of politics by other means. Kleist’s
Berliner Abendblätter(BA), I argue, can be characterized similarly as the continuation of war by means of the printing press, which allows for the wide distribution of concealed, politically explosive messages in the medium of ambiguous news reports and anecdotes instead of weapons. Recent studies have explored how Kleist’s poetry reflects the profound practical and theoretical transformations of warfare during the Revolutionary and Napoleonic Wars and the guerilla counter-insurgences.¹ This article aims to complement these interpretations by showing how the geopolitical changes and
Form and Contention: from:
Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) GALASSO STEPHANIE
Abstract: In
Die Günderode, her fictionalized biography of the poet Karoline von Günderrode, 1 Bettine von Arnim conspicuously excludes her beloved friend’s suicide from the plot. In its place, she intersperses the novel with previously unpublished texts by Günderrode, and ends the novel with the image of a rose bush full of life—so much life, in fact, that the number of its blossoms corresponds to the years in Günderrode’s life: “mit siebenundzwanzig Knospen, das sind Deine Jahre, ich habe sie freudig gezählt und daß es grad Deine Jahre trifft das freut mich so” (with twenty-seven buds, exactly your years, I
Absolute Signification and Ontological Inconsistency in E. T. A. Hoffmann’s Der Sandmann from:
Goethe Yearbook 24
Author(s) TROP GABRIEL
Abstract: These words, written by Novalis, declare that philosophy begins in an act of self-destruction, or more precisely formulated: all properly philosophical acts aim to destroy the self. This demand is not as mysterious as it might seem. A self, by definition, is differentiated and limited, and thus represents one of the most palpable impediments to that which romantic philosophy seeks, namely, the absolute,
das Unbedingte, that which is without condition and without limit. A truly philosophical act must efface the horizon of limitations and differences that constitutes selfhood:Selbsttödtung, self-annihilation. The proper name for this act is not suicide,
Book Title: Nation as Grand Narrative-The Nigerian Press and the Politics of Meaning
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Adebanwi Wale
Abstract: Nation as Grand Narrative offers a methodical analysis of how relations of domination and subordination are conveyed through media narratives of nationhood. Using the typical postcolonial state of Nigeria as a template and engaging with disciplines ranging from media studies, political science, and social theory to historical sociology and hermeneutics, Wale Adebanwi examines how the nation as grand narrative provides a critical interpretive lens through which competition among ethnic, ethnoregional, and ethnoreligious groups can be analyzed. Adebanwi illustrates how meaning is connected to power through ideology in the struggles enacted on the pages of the print media over diverse issues including federalism, democracy and democratization, religion, majority-minority ethnic relations, space and territoriality, self-determination, and threat of secession. Nation as Grand Narrative will trigger further critical reflections on the articulation of relations of domination in the context of postcolonial grand narratives. Wale Adebanwi is associate professor of African American and African studies, University of California-Davis, and a visiting professor at the Institute of Social and Economic Research (ISER), Rhodes University, Grahamstown, South Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1r69zcb
1 Nation as Grand Narrative from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: In 1953 a political crisis threatened to break up colonial Nigeria and terminate the possibility of common political independence for the country. This crisis was partly instigated, elaborately reported, and, ultimately, profoundly shaped by newspaper narratives. Anthony Enahoro, the anticolonial activist and leading member of the Action Group, one of the major political parties in late colonial Nigeria, whose motion at the federal parliament provoked this crisis, had been a journalist most of his adult life. Enahoro became the editor of the
Southern Nigerian Defenderat age twenty-one in 1944. He was later the editor ofComet, associate editor of
2 Interpretive Theory, Narrative, and the Politics of Meaning from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: The social sciences have been concerned for many decades with fundamental questions concerning the nature of social life and its investigation. Whereas some of these concerns, and the debates they have generated, have been geared toward resolving ontological and epistemological dilemmas, others have focused on methodological challenges of the process of social enquiry.¹ This concern forms my examination of the hermeneutical analysis of social phenomenon such as the narratives about the idea and practices of the “nation.” Using interpretive theory, or hermeneutics, this chapter explores how interpreting ideology as “meaning in the service of power” illuminates the analysis of media
3 In Search of a Grand Narrative: from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: In the decade leading up to Nigeria’s independence, the three major ethno-regional blocs in the country, the eastern region, the northern region, and the western region, organized essentially around the three major political parties, the National Council for Nigeria and the Cameroons (NCNC) the Northern People’s Congress (NPC), and the Action Group (AG), respectively. The struggle to define the character and logic of the emergent state and imagined grand nation by the many ethnic nationalities of the regions, through the leveraging of group interests within the larger context, was evident in the major newspapers that represented each of these major
4 Hegemony and Ethno-Spatial Politics: from:
Nation as Grand Narrative
Abstract: This chapter examines the narratives surrounding the structure, nature, and dynamics of the spatial struggle for hegemony over a city that was seen by some “gladiators” as the social and political—perhaps also economic—equivalent of the whole of Nigeria. One of the leading nationalists of that era, H. O. Davies, captured this sentiment when he said that Lagos contained “the genius of the country.”¹ Obafemi Awolowo, also a leading activists of that era, but an Ibadan resident in the same Western region, accused the nationalists in Lagos of seeing the city as “the alpha and omega of political sagacity
Introduction from:
Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega
Abstract: Luis de Góngora y Argote and Lope de Vega y Carpio,
príncipe de las tinieblasandmonstruo de la naturaleza, respectively, are infrequently invoked together outside the realm of poetic belligerence. As the cultural landscape they inhabit bends and shapes to their gravity, these two literary forces collide in violent counteraction. This at least has been the prevailing view of criticism, bolstered by Emilio Orozco Díaz’s seminal workLope y Góngora frente a frente(1973), in which he illuminates the poets’ divergent poetic methodologies andethos.¹ Although Orozco admits a grudging admiration between Góngora and Lope,² my goal is to
5 Last Laughs from:
Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega
Abstract: The parodic poetry written by Luis de Góngora and Lope de Vega at the end of their professional careers and in the winter of their years unquestionably brings forth something new, built from the bricks of ancient and contemporary poetic monuments. These poets utilise parody as a process that, paradoxically, ends and begins simultaneously in order to engage with the literary past, question its legacy, and redirect future poetics. Góngora’s mytho-parodic trajectory and comic culmination, and Lope’s final theatrical extravaganza as Tomé de Burguillos, reveal a wealth of common practices. Primarily, against the traditional critical tendency to pit our authors
Book Title: Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain-The Imaginary Museum of Literature
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DAVIS STUART
Abstract: This is an innovative exploration of cultural heritage and the literary traditions that shape the contemporary literary scene in Spain. Through a coalescence of museum studies, metacriticism and traditional literary criticism the study interweaves discussion of museum spaces with literary analysis, exploring them as agents of memorialisation and a means for preserving and conveying heritage. Following introductory explorations of the development of museums and the literary canon, each chapter begins with a "visit" to a Spanish museum, establishing the framework for the subsequent discussion of critical practices and texts. Case studies include examination of the palimpsest and unconscious influence of canonical cores; the response to masculine traditions of poetry and art; counter-culture of the 1990s; and the ethical concerns of postmemory writing. STUART DAVIS is a Lecturer in Spanish, Girton College, and Newton Trust Lecturer in the Department of Spanish and Portuguese, University of Cambridge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x71n1
3 Working Models, Model (Re)Workings: from:
Writing and Heritage in Contemporary Spain
Abstract: Lying just over twenty miles north of Madrid, the city of Alcalá de Henares (motto: ‘Ciudad del saber’) attracts thousands of visitors every year who relish the World Heritage Site status of the city centre, the famous ancient university and its literary associations. Alcalá boasts of being the birthplace of several famous Spaniards, including royals (such as Henry VIII’s first wife, Catherine of Aragón), the painter Eugenio Lucas Velázquez and writers such as the Arcipreste de Hita (Juan Ruiz) and one Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra, after whom the tourist train from central Madrid is named. Although it is widely held
Book Title: Twenty Years On-Competing Memories of the GDR in Postunification German Culture
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Tate Dennis
Abstract: Twenty years on from the dramatic events that led to the opening of the Berlin Wall and the collapse of the GDR, the subjective dimension of German unification is still far from complete. The nature of the East German state remains a matter of cultural as well as political debate. This volume of new research focuses on competing memories of the GDR and the ways they have evolved in the mass media, literature, and film since 1989-90. Taking as its point of departure the impact of iconic visual images of the fall of the Wall on our understanding of the historical GDR, the volume first considers the decade of cultural conflict that followed unification and then the emergence of a more complex and diverse "textual memory" of the GDR since the Berlin Republic was established in 1999. It highlights competing generational perspectives on the GDR era and the unexpected "afterlife" of the GDR in recent publications. The volume as a whole shows the vitality of eastern German culture two decades after the demise of the GDR and the centrality of these memory debates to the success of Germany's unification process. Contributors: Daniel Argelès, Stephen Brockmann, Arne De Winde, Wolfgang Emmerich, Andrea Geier, Hilde Hoffmann, Astrid Köhler, Karen Leeder, Andrew Plowman, Gillian Pye, Benjamin Robinson, Catherine Smale, Rosemary Stott, Dennis Tate, Frederik Van Dam, Nadezda Zemaníková. Renate Rechtien is Lecturer in German Studies, and Dennis Tate is Emeritus Professor of German Studies, both at the University of Bath, UK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x72d3
1: Visual Re-Productions of the from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Hoffmann Hilde
Abstract: The fundamental changes in world politics in the early 1990s — the breakup of the Soviet bloc and the subsequent reconfiguration of eastern Europe as new constellations of power emerged — dominated television programming internationally for many months. Live news coverage shaped the way people perceived these events. Television as a medium was an important part of these processes and has determined how they are remembered today. West German television played a particularly crucial role during the weeks of political turmoil in the German Democratic Republic (GDR) in the fall of 1989. There was complex interaction between the political protagonists,
2: Remembering GDR Culture in Postunification Germany and Beyond from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Brockmann Stephen
Abstract: Twenty years after the fall of the Berlin Wall and the collapse of the German Democratic Republic (GDR), the culture of East Germany seems more remote than ever. Exactly what communism or Marxism or even socialism was is hard to even imagine now, let alone know in detail. Shortly after the fall of the Wall, the West German author Patrick Süskind, writing in the quintessential West German newsmagazine
Der Spiegel, declared that almost any other country in the world was closer to him and his generation of West Germans than the country on the other side of the German-German border:
4: “Der Schrei des Marsyas”: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Van Dam Frederik
Abstract: “Um ein Publikum am Lesen von Büchern, die des Lesens wert sind, festzuhalten, dazu bedarf es wahrlich eines Stein-Kopfes!”¹ This assessment of the reading public may well be considered a defining characteristic of Reinhard Jirgl’s writing. Not only does the expression “Stein-Kopf” refer to the eponymous peak in the Taunus mountain range, which Jirgl became acquainted with during his time as writer-in-residence in Bergen-Enkheim, it also captures the ethos of obstinacy that characterizes his poetics. It can of course be argued — as the satirist Gerhard Henschel has — that such self-positioning is pompous or elitist.² Those familiar with Jirgl’s
5: An Early Challenge to the Construction of Cross-Border Romance in Post-1989 Film: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Stott Rosemary
Abstract: Depictions of relationships between partners who lived on opposite sides of the German-German border before the events of 1989 have maintained an enduring appeal for producers of film and television feature films commemorating the
Wende and German unification. This is not surprising given that narratives involving cross-border romance have the potential to engage wide audiences from both the former East and West Germany. They therefore provide the scope to explore barriers to unification such as distinctive identities, values, and attitudes. At the same time they can act as metaphors for the dominant popular perception that unification was somehow natural and
6: Mediating Immediacy: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Geier Andrea
Abstract: The twentieth anniversary of the fall of the Berlin Wall in 2009 was marked to a much greater degree by a spirit of celebration than the tenth anniversary. Whereas shortly before the turn of the millennium the consequences of German unification were still judged critically, it was now the euphoric mood of the “peaceful revolution” that was commemorated. Indeed, the fact that the term “revolution” is now being used again is in itself an indication of a change of attitude: during the latter half of the 1990s it appeared as though the consequences of the fall of the Wall had
8: Matter Out of Place: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Pye Gillian
Abstract: As these opening quotations indicate, the questions of waste and discarding are central to the experience of transition in the former East Germany. The legacy of the destruction wrought in the Second World War and the infrastructural and material deficits of the GDR — the environmental impact of heavy industry and the rapid rate of obsolescence not only of material things, but also human skills and networks, in the turn from socialism to capitalism — mean that both physical and mental topographies have been profoundly affected by trash in the broadest sense of the term. It is hardly surprising, then,
9: Autobiographical Writing in Three Generations of a GDR Family: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Emmerich Wolfgang
Abstract: My point of departure is as follows: a large number of autobiographical texts (as opposed to formally conceived autobiographies) has been produced by three women from the former German Democratic Republic (GDR) who are related to one another as mother/daughter/granddaughter and who in terms of their years of birth (1929/1952/1972) represent three different generations from the forty-five years of the Soviet Occupation Zone/GDR. That must be rare. The oldest of the three, Christa Wolf, is a well-known writer; the one in the middle, Annette Simon, a committed activist in the citizens’ movement of 1989 and a psychotherapist, has published significant
14: One Iota of Difference: from:
Twenty Years On
Author(s) Robinson Benjamin
Abstract: Taking my cue from a few telling remarks in Franz Fühmann’s 1973 Hungarian travel diary
Zweiundzwanzig Tage, I want to examine the figure of the “iota of difference” in reference to really existing socialism.¹ I come to a discussion of Fühmann’s curious passage in the second half of this essay. To begin with, however, I explain why I find the iota so apt for characterizing the memory of GDR socialism now that so little socialism of any kind remains. In other than a mocking sense the iota might turn out to be indicative to me alone, so I cannot pretend
5: Kafka’s Racial Melancholy from:
Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Garloff Katja
Abstract: Kafka’s “A Report to an Academy” (“Ein Bericht für eine Akademie,” 1919) has often been read as a parody of Jewish assimilation into German culture, in part because it was first published in Martin Buber’s acclaimed Jewish monthly
Der Jude. In this reading, the text would suggest a problematic convergence between racial antisemitism and a Zionistinspired critique of assimilation. The parable of the African ape that becomes an almost-human European intimates that biological differences set the Jews apart despite all their efforts at acculturation. The fact that “A Report” ends by describing the ape’s nightly encounters with a creature of
9: Kafka in Virilio’s Teletopical City from:
Kafka for the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Goebel Rolf J.
Abstract: In a recent paper, Patrick Fortmann has shown how Kafka’s “Little Automobile Story” elucidates the interconnections between modern traffic, circulation, and communication and his own acts of writing.² Moreover, Kafka’s texts persistently respond to historic changes in technological media and their impact on
Chapter 2 Women and Identity: from:
The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: Since the nineteenth century, the role of women in society and women’s perception of themselves have dramatically altered. In
La enredadera, La Casa GrisandHermanas, Aldecoa charts the emergence and development of women’s self-awareness and position in both Spanish and British society. However, this progression is contrasted with the persistence of what Aldecoa has termed ‘the feminine condition’, namely motherhood, which continues to have an impact, both positively and negatively, on women’s lives. Each novel represents a very different period during Aldecoa’s literary career.La enredaderawas Aldecoa’s first published novel (1984) andLa Casa Gris(2005) her penultimate
Chapter 3 Love and Relationships: from:
The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: This chapter will explore the complex issue of love and relationships in contemporary Spain. In recent times, attitudes towards marriage and the rituals and customs governing relationships have profoundly altered. In the novels
Porque éramos jóvenes(1986),El vergel(1988), andEl enigma(2002), Aldecoa charts the evolution of love and relationships in mid- to late twentieth-century Spain. Each of the protagonists in the novels is engaged in an on-going quest for love and self-fulfilment. They experience at first hand the euphoric highs and soul-destroying lows of forbidden romance, unrequited love, and marriages of convenience. Moreover, these middle-aged characters are
Chapter 4 Memory and Civil War: from:
The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: This chapter will examine the issue of cultural memory and the impact of the Spanish Civil War as depicted in Aldecoa’s trilogy,
Historia de una maestra, Mujeres de negroandLa fuerza del destino. These novels tell the story of Gabriela López Pardo, her mother and her daughter Juana, who together bear witness to one of the most turbulent periods in Spain’s history. In order to pass them on to her daughter, Gabriela records her memories of the coming of the Second Republic, her dreams of educational reform, and the death of her husband at the outbreak of the Civil
Conclusion from:
The Novels of Josefina Aldecoa
Abstract: This study has demonstrated how Aldecoa’s narrative reconfigures women’s identity in contemporary Spain and confronts the memory of the Spanish Civil War and the years of the Francoist dictatorship, exploring its deep psychological impact on current and future generations. In examining the cultural and social myths surrounding women’s role in Spanish society, Aldecoa deconstructs traditional patriarchal paradigms and offers a new, more complex understanding of women’s identity, free from existing hierarchical and binary structures. This rejection of the patriarchal system that pervades the fabric of Western culture is further extended by Aldecoa in her depiction of the Civil War and
Book Title: Interconnections-Gender and Race in American History
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Parker Alison M.
Abstract: This collection builds on decades of interdisciplinary scholarship by African American women and gender historians and feminist scholars, bridging the gap between well-developed theories of race, gender, and power and the practice of historical research. It reveals the interdependent construction of racial and gender identity in individuals' lived experiences in specific historical contexts, such as westward expansion, civil rights movements, or economic depression as well as national and transnational debates over marriage, citizenship and sexual mores. All of these essays consider multiple aspects of identity, including sexuality, class, religion, and nationality, among others, but the volume emphasizes gender and race--the focus of our new book series--as principal bases of identity and locations of power and oppression in American history. Alison M. Parker is professor and chair of the history department at SUNY College at Brockport. Carol Faulkner is associate professor and chair of history at Syracuse University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt1x732q
Introduction from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Faulkner Carol
Abstract: The chapters in this volume, collected for a conference held at the University of Rochester, see the interconnections between gender and race as fundamental to American identity and central to American history. Organized by Carol Faulkner, Alison Parker, and Victoria Wolcott, the conference celebrated the launch of a new book series at the University of Rochester Press called Gender and Race in American History. Building on decades of interdisciplinary research by feminist scholars and historians of African American women and gender, these chapters bridge the gap between well-developed theories of race, gender, and power and the practice of historical research.
Chapter 1 Historicizing Intersectionality as a Critical Lens: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) May Vivian M.
Abstract: Scholars of intersectionality, historically and presently, start from the premise that both lived identities and structures of power and privilege should be understood as interwoven and not as additive factors or as separable dynamics. Intersectional approaches therefore entail a significant shift in epistemological, ontological, and methodological frames: fundamentally emphasizing simultaneity, scholars of intersectionality employ “tactics, strategies, and identities which historically have appeared to be mutually exclusive under modernist oppositional practices.” Because this alternative mode of reasoning can readily lead to charges of illogic, as Kimberlé Crenshaw has discussed at length, those who employ intersectionality frequently confront being misread or misunderstood.¹
Chapter 3 “There Are Two Great Oceans”: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Quanquin Hélène
Abstract: The anniversary of the American Equal Rights Association of May 12 and 13, 1869, was a watershed for American reformers. During the meeting, abolitionists and women’s rights activists severed personal ties already weakened by the debate over the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Amendments and divided into opposing camps. How did people who had been working side by side for several decades find themselves in the situation of choosing between the two causes—the rights of African Americans and those of women—they had previously fought for almost indiscriminately?¹ Trying to make sense of this rift, women’s rights activist Lucy Stone opted
Epilogue: from:
Interconnections
Author(s) Braun Carol Moseley
Abstract: In 2003 I stood for nomination by the Democratic Party for the presidency of the United States. That this is a little-known fact doesn’t bother me much: it was a very personal exercise that I hoped then and believe now helped shape attitudes about the proper place to be occupied by women and people of color in American society. From that experience, and many others in my personal odyssey, I can say without reservation that in America, gender is more of a cultural barrier than is race.
3: Word Magic from:
The World as Metaphor in Robert Musil's 'The Man without Qualities'
Abstract: In the Viennese
Kunsthistorisches Museum, where Robert Musil surely must have wandered during his years in the Austrian capital, the Egyptian rooms are dominated by the figures of the sibling lovers Isis and Osiris, and, as one would expect, by artifacts representing the Egyptian fascination with the themes of death and resurrection. One of the many depictions of the corn god Osiris¹ is accompanied by a tiny hunting arrow in the shape of a back bone, which, the inscription reads, was, in larger size, often affixed to the backs of mummies. This amulet is, on its own, the hieroglyph for
1 The Italian Appropriation of Sentimental Fiction from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: The great success of sentimental fiction during the first half of the sixteenth century indicates that, although these kinds of works may have originally been addressed to an exclusive readership pre-eminently preoccupied with the cultivation of courtly ideals and behaviors, they quickly attracted a much more heterogeneous public. This community was composed not only of noblemen intent on discovering the emblems of a longed-for world which was swiftly waning, but also of a bourgeois audience that found in these texts the elements of a behavioral code that could improve their status. From this perspective, the editorial fortune of the translations
Conclusion from:
Cultural Capital, Language and National Identity in Imperial Spain
Abstract: Throughout the sixteenth century, the majority of the Christian territories of Europe went through a political evolution towards authoritarian monarchies. At this time, the Iberian Peninsula became the nucleus of a political entity
sui generis, characterized by the consolidation of numerous kingdoms and territories under the power of one prince. This, along with the development of strong royal power, transformed it into one of the pre-eminent models of authoritarian monarchy, or the “Modern State.”
Book Title: Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid-Magical and Monstrous Realities
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): ROBINSON LORNA
Abstract: This book explores the ways in which Ovid's poem, Metamorphoses, and Gabriel García Márquez's novel, One Hundred Years of Solitude, use magical devices to construct their literary realities. The study examines in detail the similarities and differences of each author's style and investigates the impact of politics and culture upon the magical and frequently brutal realities the two authors create in their works. Ultimately the book is interested in the use of magical elements by authors in political climates where freedoms are being restricted, and by using magical realism to explore Ovid's Metamorphoses, it is able to illuminate aspects of the regime of emperor Augustus and the world of Ovid and demonstrate their closeness to that of García Márquez's Colombia.BR> Lorna Robinson holds a PhD in Classics from University College London. She is the author of Cave Canem: A Miscellany of Latin Words and Phrases and the essay 'The Golden Age in Metamorphoses' and 'One Hundred Years of Solitude' in A Companion to Magical Realism (Tamesis, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt24hfs8
1 Telling Tales from:
Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: The theorists and writers who have tried to define and categorise magical realism have been keen to distinguish the mode of writing from fairy tales and other well-known vehicles for the fantastic and miraculous. Flores (1995, 115–16) writes: ‘the practitioners of magical realism cling to reality as if to prevent ‘literature’ from getting in their way, as if to prevent their myth from flying off, as in fairy tale to supernatural realms’. Leal likewise strives to separate magical realism from the common fantastical genres: ‘magical realism cannot be identified either with fantastic literature or with psychological literature, or with
2 Points of View from:
Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: In the first chapter, I studied the various ways in which a narrator produces a magical realist effect in the text. One important point that emerged from the passages being analysed was the centrality of communal belief for adopting a perspective upon reality that is regarded as valid. Disbelievers are frowned upon while storytellers are seen to embellish and exaggerate their accounts on many occasions. The confusion that arises for the reader creates the impression that two points of view upon a given reality are battling with one another. In fact, there are frequent examples within both texts where events
4 More than Words Can Say from:
Gabriel García Márquez and Ovid
Abstract: In the previous chapter, I examined the claims of Latin Americanists that magical realism emerged from their continent due to its unique history, geography and racial mixing. It was demonstrated, by the analysis of key passages in García Márquez’s novel and Ovid’s poem, that there are many factors that can explain the use of magical realism, ranging from political and cultural to literary traditions. In this chapter, I continue to examine the claims of Latin Americanists, in this instance, focusing upon the aesthetic effect of magical realism, rather than the reasons for its appearance.
FOREWORD: from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) Deyermond Ruth
Abstract: One of my earliest memories of my father is of us both in his office in Westfield College. He is standing at the door, answering a knock from what sounds like a student, and I, aged probably about three and sitting in his chair, am taking advantage of his distraction to eat the bar of chocolate he keeps in his desk drawer.
1 Sanctity and Prejudice in Medieval Castilian Hagiography: from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) BERESFORD ANDREW M.
Abstract: The legend of the black saint, Moses the Ethiopian (
c. 330–405), offers a unique insight into the complexity not just of fourth-century asceticism, but of the evolution of popular attitudes towards questions of ethnic origin and somatic type in Christian tradition as a whole. Characterized by an overarching impression of duality, Moses stands partly as one of the many who followed in the footsteps of St Antony of Egypt, forsaking the corruption of society to lead a life of ascetic isolation in the desert, but partly also as an exception, remarkable not for his achievements in piety, but for
5 Advancing on ‘Álora’ from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) HOOK DAVID
Abstract: Alan Deyermond and I took different views over some points in the interpretation of the ballad of ‘Álora la bien cercada’, which occupied us on a number of train journeys into London in the early 1990s, although naturally we found common ground on some other aspects of it. The relevant paragraphs in his 1996 Kate Elder lecture at Queen Mary and Westfield College, as it then was, now constitute, alas, his final major contribution to the extensive commentary which this intriguing text has attracted, although brief observations also occur in later contexts (Deyermond 2001: 68).¹ In returning to ‘Álora’ (Smith
7 Gómez Manrique’s Exclamación e querella de la governación: from:
Medieval Hispanic Studies in Memory of Alan Deyermond
Author(s) ROUND NICHOLAS G.
Abstract: The collapse of Castilian royal authority in the 1460s challenged the wielders of power there to redefine in practice where, in relation to Enrique iv’s much-weakened monarchy, their interests and allegiances now lay. It also called in question the ethically and juridically grounded models of royal rule as sanctioned by providence, promoted among them by the secular court culture of Enrique’s father Juan ii. For most individuals, no doubt, this meant adjusting the theory to validate their newly identified interests – which was what happened collectively in the settlement eventually established by the Reyes Católicos. At the time, even so,
2 The Medievalist Rhetorics of Enlightenment from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: If the medieval did not function in the early eighteenth century, as it does in our own time, as a historical or chronological category, then how exactly did it work? I argued in the previous chapter that in actual linguistic usage, the term
moyen âge often served as a literary or linguistic term, as reflected also in the common use of the accompanying adjective barbare to describe the period. In this chapter, elaborating on this notion of the medieval as a non-historical concept, I argue that during the early eighteenth century, the medieval came to embody essentially a moral category
4 Continuities: from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: Despite a rhetorics of Enlightenment that habitually contrasted the medieval to the modern, a number of early Enlightenment authors seem to have perceived no fundamental historical break between the two periods. By his striking refusal to use the term “middle ages” (
moyen âge) in the Parallèle des Anciens et des Modernes, Perrault implicitly annexed the medieval period to modernity. Similarly, in his Esprit des Lois Montesquieu emphasized the continuity between the modern French spirit of gallantry (esprit de galanterie) and the medieval cultural practices illustrated by chivalric fiction. And even earlier, in his prescient dialogue on medieval romance, Chapelain had
5 Reconfigurations: from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: Desire was a defining element in early Enlightenment medievalisms, I have argued, because these medievalisms often expressed their longing for the past in an erotic or sexualized language. Embodied, performative forms of knowledge represented one response to the desire to physically touch the past. The
roman genre provided another response to this erotization of the past due to its association with illicit desire and its supposedly seductive, corrupting power. For late seventeenth- and early eighteenth-century authors, it was a cliché to think of the Middle Ages as a period characterized, above all, by the prominent place its literature assigned to
6 The Invention of Medieval Studies from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: This chapter examines how out of the
galant, aristocratic engagement with the medieval whose contours I have sketched in the previous chapters, there emerged during the first decades of the eighteenth century a new, scholarly approach to the Middle Ages. This new, academic medievalism had its institutional basis at the Académie royale des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Originally founded by Louis XIV to compose Latin commemorative inscriptions in his honour, during the eighteenth century the Academy evolved into a full-fledged scholarly body, focusing more exclusively on historical and philological activities, and shifting its emphasis from classical to medieval subjects. This process
Conclusion: from:
Medievalist Enlightenment
Abstract: In a provocative book about “the hidden agenda of modernity”, Stephen Toulmin has argued that modernity entailed a major philosophical shift. This was a shift from the oral to the written, from the particular to the universal, from the local to the general, from the timely to the timeless, and from humanism to rationalism.¹ The new modernity, whose rise Toulmin dates back to the major works of Descartes in the 1630s and 1640s, was marked by the “pursuit of mathematical exactitude and logical rigor, intellectual certainty and moral purity”.² While earlier thinkers had questioned the value of abstract theory for
Book Title: The Faustian Century-German Literature and Culture in the Age of Luther and Faustus
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Weeks Andrew
Abstract: The Reformation and Renaissance, though segregated into distinct disciplines today, interacted and clashed intimately in Faust, the great figure that attained European prominence in the anonymous 1587 'Historia von D. Johann Fausten'. The original Faust behind Goethe's great drama embodies a remote culture. In his century, Faust evolved from an obscure cipher to a universal symbol. The age explored here as "the Faustian century" invested the 'Faustbuch' and its theme with a symbolic significance still of exceptional relevance today. The new essays in this volume complement one another, providing insights into the tensions and forces that gave the century its distinct character. Several essays seek Faust's prototypes. Others elaborate the symbolic function of his figure and discern the resonance of his tale in conflicting allegiances. This volume focuses on the intersection of historical accounts and literary imaginings, on shared aspects of the work and its times, on concerns with obedience and transgression, obsessions with the devil and curiosity about magic, and quandaries created by shifting religious and worldly authorities. Contributors: Marguerite de Huszar Allen, Kresten Thue Andersen, Frank Baron, Günther Bonheim, Albrecht Classen, Urs Leo Gantenbein, Karl S. Guthke, Michael Keefer, Paul Ernst Meyer, J. M. van der Laan, Helen Watanabe-O'Kelly, Andrew Weeks. J. M. van der Laan is Professor of German and Andrew Weeks is Professor of German and Comparative Literature, both at Illinois State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt284t7f
Introduction: from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) van der Laan J. M.
Abstract: This volume investigates and illumines the German sixteenth century—the age of the Renaissance, Reformation,
and Faust. Bringing old and new research together, this book structures its study of that era around the figure of Faust. The stories about him address a number of definitive issues for his century, in particular, the intersection of Renaissance humanism and Reformation theology, the practice of magic and diabolism, the interplay of fact and fantasy, the juxtaposition of good and evil (or of the spirit and the world), and the submission to or transgression of the moral code. What is more, Faust forms a
2: Faustus of the Sixteenth Century: from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Baron Frank
Abstract: Only a few reliable sources corroborate the identity of the historical Faustus, the person behind the legend. Faustus was an astrologer, but he also gained a reputation for dabbling in magic. Renaissance magic seemed to be a magnet, which possessed an extraordinary power to draw into its orbit a whole range of associations. Many feared magic as a dangerous adventure of curiosity into the realm of the devil. Faustus’s bold claims in these areas made him sensational, provocative, and, in his lifetime, admired at certain times, condemned at others. The condemnation of Faustian curiosity in combination with the devil pact,
5: Faust from Cipher to Sign and Pious to Profane from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) van der Laan J. M.
Abstract: For many reasons, we can consider the sixteenth century a Faustian age. One way to define the era in Faustian terms, and probably the most obvious, involves a particular individual, part fact perhaps, but almost entirely fiction, who emerges full blown in the sixteenth century and has been with us ever since as a dynamic figure laden with meaning. That person or character is Faust himself, who embodies the zeitgeist or spirit of the age. If we survey the century, we find that Faust receives more and more attention as the years go by and transforms from a cipher, from
7: The Lutheran Faust: from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Andersen Kresten Thue
Abstract: Near the beginning of the sixteenth century, Martin Luther found new meaning in the Pauline expression
justification by faith through the hermeneutic concept sola scriptura. Luther’s theological discovery inspired others to articulate and invoke fundamental religious, political, and cultural changes within the European societies. At the same time, the Protestant Reformation gave rise to a tension between a religious and a humanistic outlook. Many solutions put forward to overcome this tension were informed by fear or fascination and appear to us as reactionary or progressive. Such figures as Paracelsus, Erasmus, Trithemius occupied a place between the strict confines of religion
11: The Devil in the Early Modern World and in Sixteenth-Century German Devil Literature from:
The Faustian Century
Author(s) Classen Albrecht
Abstract: While God has certainly been one of the most important subjects of Western literature, the devil matches that popularity in a Manichaean-like symmetry. Indeed, the good and evil they incorporate are among the fundamental issues of literature. A detailed probing of the ways individual writers in any particular period reflected those polar opposites would be an inexhaustible undertaking. Nevertheless, we can observe a remarkable increase in the interest in, fascination with, and fear of the devil during the late Middle Ages and the early modern period. The increase is parallel to the growth of widespread superstition.¹ In fact, the curious
1: Developing a Style, Experimenting with Form (1958–1967) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: John Updike had the distinction of being reviewed early and often.¹ It may be debated whether that was good or bad for a budding writer feeling his way through multiple genres to discover his voice and his message. It seems likely, however, that early notices of
The Poorhouse Fair and Rabbit, Run made Updike realize he had chosen the right profession. It may also have convinced Knopf to continue as his publisher—no mean feat, when so many aspiring writers who land a contract with a major publisher discover to their chagrin that poor sales of a first book ends
2: Making a Name on the National Scene (1968–1975) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: In retrospect, the period between 1968 and 1975 might be described as the “breakthrough years” during which Updike became a major novelist, introduced or returned to important recurring characters and themes into his fiction, and continued his exploration of the American scene. Of course, before 1968 Updike was well-known to a select group of readers and critics, many of whom had high regard for his work. While his audience among the general readership was considerable, it did not rival that of contemporary popular giants—writers like Leon Uris, Mary Renault, James Clavell, Irving Wallace, Mary Stewart, and Arthur Hailey. The
3: Launching New Ventures (1976–1980) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: During the second half of the 1970s, Updike carried out further exploration of familiar themes, especially in short stories and the 1976 novel
Marry Me. He also made what was for him a decidedly bold move. Although he had occasionally written of locales and people other than those from his native Pennsylvania and his adopted home in New England, his 1978 novel The Coup marked his first attempt to render an extended treatment of another region of the world and deal with characters whose creation tested his imaginative powers in ways his earlier fiction had not. Reviewers made much of
4: Pulitzer Prize Winner, Vilified Misogynist (1981–1985) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: While there may be no
annus mirabilis in Updike’s career, it seems fair to say that the decade of the 1980s was not only one of his most productive but also, perhaps, his most noteworthy. The first five years were ones of significant accomplishment. He began by publishing the third novel in the Rabbit series, following that highly acclaimed work with a sequel to his 1970 book on Henry Bech. A year later he issued a hefty collection of his nonfiction before making a bold foray into feminist literature with The Witches of Eastwick. Consistent with his publishing practice, in
5: Crowning Achievements (1986–1990) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: Updike managed to grab and hold the national spotlight with the publication of
Rabbit Is Rich in 1981 and The Witches of Eastwick in 1984. Viewed in hindsight, however, his work between 1981 and 1985 was prelude to what was arguably the most important five-year period in his life as a creative writer. In this period he completed his Scarlet Letter trilogy, released a collection of short stories that reinforced his reputation as one of the most skilled practitioners in that genre, and published a self-deprecating memoir that sparked lively commentary. The appearance of Rabbit at Rest in 1990 garnered
8: New Experiments in the New Century (2000–2004) from:
Becoming John Updike
Abstract: The continuing debate over Updike’s status at the beginning of the twenty-first century can be illustrated by the following three assessments. In his lengthy
History of American Literature (2004), Richard Gray describes Updike as a master craftsman whose novels deal with problems posed by the “entropic vision” that characterizes modern life (615). But Jay Prosser (2001b) insists that, whatever Updike’s supporters say about his talents, the decline in his reputation, though not “spectacular,” has been “significant.” Prosser believes this falling off is inevitable, because in his view Updike was never “America’s most representative contemporary author”; instead, if he “was ever
2 Residuos y memoria en el palimpsesto urbano del siglo XXI: from:
El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo
Abstract: Mientras redacto estas líneas está a punto de cumplirse el décimo aniversario de los atentados del 11 de septiembre en Washington DC, en Pensilvania y en Nueva York. Desde entonces existe un proyecto para construir un monumento de homenaje a las víctimas que se ha encontrado con numerosas trabas en diversos momentos por razones políticas y religiosas. Diez años después, se ha inaugurado el
National September 11 Memorial and Museum, pero queda por decidir quién estará a cargo de su mantenimiento. Determinar cómo recordar un momento tan traumático como la caída de las Torres Gemelas ha resultado ardua tarea por
CONCLUSIONES from:
El documental cinematográfico y televisivo contemporáneo
Abstract: El documental creativo de Isaki Lacuesta no parte de premisas políticas ni morales explícitas. Es cine de personajes y sus sentimientos. De hecho, la relación entre la realidad y la emoción se ha convertido en una de las espinas dorsales del arte contemporáneo y en especial del documental. La dualidad factum/pathos, omnipresente en mi argumentación, se inclina hacia el giro subjetivo como definitorio de la filosofía del arte. Josep M. Català, Director Académico del Programa de Máster Creativo de la Universidad Autónoma de Barcelona, explica que el ‘pensamiento melodramático’ constituye uno de los rasgos definitorios del documental contemporáneo.¹ El melodrama
Book Title: Christians and Jews in Angevin England-The York Massacre of 1190, Narratives and Contexts
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Watson Sethina
Abstract: The mass suicide and murder of the men, women and children of the Jewish community in York on 16 March 1190 is one of the most scarring events in the history of Anglo-Judaism, and an aspect of England's medieval past which is widely remembered around the world. However, the York massacre was in fact only one of a series of attacks on communities of Jews across England in 1189-90; they were violent expressions of wider new constructs of the nature of Christian and Jewish communities, and the targeted outcries of local townspeople, whose emerging urban politics were enmeshed within the swiftly developing structures of royal government. This new collection considers the massacre as central to the narrative of English and Jewish history around 1200. Its chapters broaden the contexts within which the narrative is usually considered and explore how a narrative of events in 1190 was built up, both at the time and in following years. They also focus on two main strands: the role of narrative in shaping events and their subsequent perception; and the degree of 'convivencia' between Jews and Christians and consideration of the circumstances and processes through which neighbours became enemies and victims. Sarah Rees Jones is Senior Lecturer in History, Sethina Watson Lecturer, at the University of York. Contributors: Sethina Watson, Sarah Rees Jones, Joe Hillaby, Nicholas Vincent, Alan Cooper, Robert C. Stacey, Paul Hyams, Robin R. Mundill, Thomas Roche, Eva de Visscher, Pinchas Roth, Ethan Zadoff, Anna Sapir Abulafia, Heather Blurton, Matthew Mesley, Carlee A. Bradbury, Hannah Johnson, Jeffrey J. Cohen, Anthony Bale
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2jbm1c
7 The ʹArchaʹ System and its Legacy after 1194 from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Mundill Robin R.
Abstract: On 17 March 1190, as the ash turned to dust at the top of the motte which is now known as Cliffordʹs Tower, the government knew that it had lost control and would have to react to the spoliation of the York Jewry.¹ In the first case a riot had taken place and this did not please the new king, Richard I, and could not go unnoticed or unpunished. In the second case, because of the profits the crown drew from Jewish money lending, the government needed to put a system in place to protect its income from Jewish lending,
8 Making agreements, with or without Jews, in Medieval England and Normandy from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Roche Thomas
Abstract: The abbey of Flaxley, or Dene, in Gloucestershire, was a small Cistercian house, founded between 1148 and 1154 by the earl of Hereford, on the exact place where his father had died while hunting. Its historian would be short on records: a handful of charters, a few references in royal records, and one cartulary, written in the early thirteenth century, peculiar in its form. It is a roll, measuring 0.18 by 6.3 metres, recording ninety-seven items. This document provides a list of books preserved in the abbeyʹs library, and it has been well studied.¹
13 ʹDe Judaea, muta et surdaʹ: from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Mesley Matthew
Abstract: Jews are confined to the periphery in twelfth- and thirteenth-century literature. When they do appear within Christian texts, their actions and behaviour are restricted and circumscribed. Viewed as living symbols of Christʹs suffering on the cross, and as actors within the wider Christian drama, their performance was interpreted through the Churchʹs teachings. Within a literary context, as Stephen Kruger has argued, ʹJews and Judaism can be quite easily rendered ʺvirtual,ʺ reduced to a non-presence, even a non-being that functions to reconfirm a real, present Christianityʹ.¹ In this way, representations of Jews were used to define the nature of Christianity, and
14 Dehumanizing the Jew at the Funeral of the Virgin Mary in the Thirteenth Century (c. 1170–c. 1350) from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Bradbury Carlee A.
Abstract: Before and after the expulsion of the Jews from England in 1290, artists made and audiences understood pictured Jews as embodiments of opposition to the Christian norm, as the quintessential other. Such visual dehumanization of the Jew has been widely considered elsewhere,¹ so this essay will focus on one topos that recurs at York: the Jew in visualizations of the Funeral of the Virgin. Both the textual and visual narratives of this tale depend on the moment when a Jew tries to overturn the platform on which Maryʹs body is being carried during her burial procession. Upon contact with the
16 The Future of the Jews of York from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Cohen Jeffrey
Abstract: William of Newburghʹs
History of English Affairs grants an access to the troubling events of 1190 unmatched by other sources. It is difficult to resist portal analogies when speaking of the world we glimpse in his vigorous Latin prose. Detailed and wide-ranging, Newburghʹs narrative enables the reader to feel a witness to unfolding incidents. He creates a sense of privileged access to a vivacious world of complicated human actors, of local and national forces on the move. Yet the story Newburgh tells is partial, framed by the doorway he constructs around its contours to give the tale coherence. His narrative
Afterword: from:
Christians and Jews in Angevin England
Author(s) Bale Anthony
Abstract: The events surrounding the violent death of the Jews of York in March 1190 continue to exert a strong fascination: accounts of these events demand a radical and troubling act of empathy and imagination. How could something so horrible, so bloody, and so resonant in its foreshadowing of future horrors, happen
in this place, at this sturdy bailey under grey northern skies? The setting is at once familiar, a corner of a beautiful small city, and obscene: a Yorkshire Masada, a place where a lethal combination of lucre, zeal and vengeance made a perfect deadly storm. Cliffordʹs Tower is a
Chapter Four Otakar Hostinský, the Musically Beautiful, and the from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Grimes Nicole
Abstract: Most of the reactions to Eduard Hanslick’s monograph
Vom Musikalisch-Schönen during the author’s lifetime have either a decidedly polemical or a flattering ring to them. The result is that Hanslick’s theories on musical aesthetics are often abbreviated to handy catch-phrases, a practice that attests to the ideological prejudice of many of his contemporaries, and that has subsequently prevented an objective and substantive dialogue with his aesthetic theory. Despite avoiding such a polemical tone, Das Musikalisch-Schöne und das Gesammtkunstwerk vom Standpunkte der formalen Ästhetik,¹ published by Otakar Hostinský (1847–1910) in 1877, was poorly received and is largely forgotten today. The
Chapter Seven “Poison-Flaming Flowers from the Orient and Nightingales from Bayreuth”: from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Brodbeck David
Abstract: On May 18, 1900, the Vienna Court Opera celebrated the seventieth birthday of Carl Goldmark with a performance of the composer’s
Die Königin von Saba (The Queen of Sheba), a grand opera in four acts on a libretto by Salomon Hermann Mosenthal. Although he would miss this celebratory performance, Eduard Hanslick, the semi-retired music critic for the Neue Freie Presse, made sure to mark the day with a feuilleton in which he paid friendly tribute to a composer whose works had long been a fixture in Vienna’s operatic and concert bills.¹ Hanslick had always harbored certain misgivings about Goldmark’s music,
Chapter Eleven Body and Soul, Content and Form: from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) Marx Wolfgang
Abstract: It has been common practice since the early nineteenth century to compare a musical work with a “living organism,” a metaphor that Eduard Hanslick—like Richard Wagner, Franz Brendel, and many others—also employed, both in his treatise
On the Musically Beautiful (1854) and in many of his reviews.¹ That he rarely reflects on this practice is revealing of the underlying assumptions of Hanslick’s aesthetic thinking, his musical preferences and antipathies. These unreflected, apparently self-evident paradigms are particularly relevant to the intellectual horizon of an author and his epoch. On the one hand, there is the tradition of German idealism
Chapter Twelve Hanslick and Hugo Wolf from:
Rethinking Hanslick
Author(s) McKinney Timothy R.
Abstract: Hugo Wolf spoke with the voice of both artist and critic. The reviews he wrote for the
Wiener Salonblatt in 1884–87 before achieving lasting success as a composer of lieder provide fascinating glimpses into the concert life and musical politics of contemporary Vienna; they also provide rich insight into the relationship between composer and critic. By promoting the music of the New German School, Wolf placed himself squarely in opposition to Eduard Hanslick and Viennese cultural conservatism, thus joining in a larger struggle between proponents of traditionalism who championed Brahms and a stridently progressive faction that elevated Wagner to
Book Title: The Civil Wars after 1660-Public Remembering in Late Stuart England
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Neufeld Matthew
Abstract: This book examines the conflicting ways in which the civil wars and Interregnum were remembered, constructed and represented in seventeenth- and eighteenth-century England. It argues that during the late Stuart period, public remembering of the English civil wars and Interregnum was not concerned with re-fighting the old struggle but rather with commending and justifying, or contesting and attacking, the Restoration settlements. After the return of King Charles II the political nation had to address the question of remembering and forgetting the recent conflict. The answer was to construct a polity grounded on remembering and scapegoating puritan politics and piety. The proscription of the puritan impulse enacted by the Restoration settlements was supported by a public memory of the 1640s and 1650s which was used to show that Dissenters could not, and should not, be trusted with power. Drawing upon the interdisciplinary field of social memory studies, this book offers a new perspective on the historical and political cultures of early modern England, and will be of significant interest to social, cultural and political historians as well as scholars working in memory studies. Matthew Neufeld is Lecturer in early modern British history at the University of Saskatchewan, Canada.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt2tt1n8
Introduction from:
The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: Emerging from a period of civil violence and political upheaval, the English in 1660 faced a critical question: what from the troubled past should be retained in memory and what ought to be consigned to oblivion? It is a question that many nations today with painful and tragic histories still struggle to answer.¹ At the turn of the millennium, Canadian journalist Erna Paris travelled to seven of them – Germany, France, Japan, the USA, Chile, Argentina and South Africa – determined to understand how their citizens remembered or did not remember past conflicts, and the impact that remembering and forgetting had on
4 Struggling over Settlements in Civil-War Historical Writing, 1696–1714 from:
The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: The Parliament that assembled to construct a settlement around the revolution of 1688 took a new approach to the question of remembering and forgetting the conflicted past. Several laws enacted by the Convention Parliament had profound implications for the cultural memory of the civil wars and Interregnum. Most significantly, under the Toleration Act of 1689, Trinitarian Protestant Dissenters could worship freely, subject to the granting of licences by local magistrates.¹ This meant that for the first time since the Reformation, the crown legally relinquished its role as promoter and enforcer of religious conformity. Moreover, religious toleration implied that the spiritual
6 Thanking God those Times are Past from:
The Civil Wars after 1660
Abstract: In the summer of 1660, the Convention Parliament unanimously enacted a statute making 29 May, the birthday of King Charles II, and the date on which he had arrived in London and Westminster, a national day of remembrance. According to the Act’s preamble, the peaceful restoration of monarchical government after years of the ‘most deplorable Confusions Divisions Warrs Devastations and Oppression’ was a miracle: a ‘signall Deliverance both of his Majestie and His People’. Henceforth the people of England were to use the day to offer up to Almighty God ‘their unfeigned hearty publique Thanks’ for all the ‘publique benefits
Book Title: Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945-Altruism and Moral Ambiguity
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Schönfeld Christiane
Abstract: In the aftermath of the Second World War, both the allied occupying powers and the nascent German authorities sought Germans whose record during the war and the Nazi period could serve as a counterpoint to the notion of Germans as evil. That search has never really stopped. In the past few years, we have witnessed a burgeoning of cultural representations of this "other" kind of Third Reich citizen - the "good German" - as opposed to the committed Nazi or genocidal maniac. Such representations have highlighted individuals' choices in favor of dissenting behavior, moral truth, or at the very least civil disobedience. The "good German's" counterhegemonic practice cannot negate or contradict the barbaric reality of Hitler's Germany, but reflects a value system based on humanity and an "other" ideal community. This volume of new essays explores postwar and recent representations of "good Germans" during the Third Reich, analyzing the logic of moral behavior, cultural and moral relativism, and social conformity found in them. It thus draws together discussions of the function and reception of "Good Germans" in Germany and abroad. Contributors: Eoin Bourke, Manuel Bragança, Maeve Cooke, Kevin De Ornellas, Sabine Egger, Joachim Fischer, Coman Hamilton, Jon Hughes, Karina von Lindeiner-Strásky, Alexandra Ludewig, Pól O Dochartaigh, Christiane Schönfeld, Matthias Uecker. Pól O Dochartaigh is Professor of German and Dean of the Faculty of Arts at the University of Ulster, Northern Ireland. Christiane Schönfeld is Senior Lecturer in German and Head of the Department of German Studies at Mary Immaculate College, University of Limerick.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nh0x
5: The “Good German” between Silence and Artistic Deconstruction of an Inhumane World: from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Egger Sabine
Abstract: It could be argued that the poetry of Johannes Bobrowski (1917–1965) tends towards absolute moral polarities, with Germans generally bad, and their Jewish, Polish, and other victims equally good, rather than exploring the complexities of individuals, ethnic communities, and their relations. This does not apply in the same way to the prose fiction he increasingly turned to in the 1960s. Several of his narrative texts show a German soldier with positive character traits, partly representing the author’s own experience, while pointing to the insufficiency of these traits in the historical context. This essay will explore the representation of such
7: Being Human: from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Schönfeld Christiane
Abstract: The focus of this chapter is on the cinematic representation of the “good German” in the immediate aftermath of the Second World War, and the reorientation of defeated, isolated, and morally devastated Germans, not only by addressing the country’s all-too-recent genocidal past, but especially by highlighting the possibility of moral truth, autonomous agency, and ethical action, and thereby, the possibility of a better future. Representations of humanity, decency, and the courage to disobey or change were projected during this early postwar period onto often makeshift cinema screens as seeds lying dormant under thousands of cubic feet of rubble. Provided with
9: Memories of Good and Evil in from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Hamilton Coman
Abstract: In the past six decades of German cultural memory, the figure of Sophie Scholl has undergone a series of metamorphoses. She has developed from being a traitor and a suicidal failure into a distant, legendary heroine. Today, her story of resistance against the Nazi regime and her iconic and tragically fatal act of scattering seditious leaflets in the University of Munich atrium is heroically retold in classrooms throughout Germany. Placing Scholl in the context of historiographical development since her execution in 1943, this essay intends to look at how director Marc Rothemund has further modified the shape of Sophie Scholl
10: Deconstructing the “Good German” in French Best Sellers Published in the Aftermath of the Second World War from:
Representing the "Good German" in Literature and Culture after 1945
Author(s) Bragança Manuel
Abstract: In the aftermath of the Second World War, it was through fiction that many French writers decided to reflect on the conflict. Unsurprisingly, the relationship between “occupiers” and “occupied” was often depicted quite simplistically: German soldiers were either robots or barbarians. Yet, many texts — including the best sellers
Education européenne by Romain Gary (Prix des Critiques winner 1945); Mon Village à l’heure allemande by Jean-Louis Bory (Goncourt winner 1945); and Les Forêts de la nuit by Jean-Louis Curtis (Goncourt winner 1947),¹ on which this article will focus — contain a “good German” character. I have suggested elsewhere² that the inclusion of
Book Title: Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DALGLISH CHRIS
Abstract: Heritage, memory, community archaeology and the politics of the past form the main strands running through the papers in this volume.The authors tackle these subjects from a range of different philosophical perspectives, with many drawing on the experience of recent community, commercial and other projects. Throughout, there is a strong emphasis on both the philosophy of engagement and with its enactment in specific contexts; the essays deal with an interest in the meaning, value and contested nature of the recent past and in the theory and practice of archaeological engagements with that past. Chris Dalglish is a lecturer in archaeology at the University of Glasgow. Contributors: Julia Beaumont, David Bowsher, Terry Brown, Jo Buckberry, Chris Dalglish, James Dixon, Audrey Horning, Robert Isherwood, Robert C Janaway, Melanie Johnson, Siân Jones, Catriona Mackie, Janet Montgomery, Harold Mytum, Michael Nevell, Natasha Powers, Biddy Simpson, Matt Town, Andrew Wilson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nhjn
Archaeologists, Power and the Recent Past from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Dalglish Chris
Abstract: This volume arises from the Society for Post-Medieval Archaeology conference
Engaging the Recent Past: Public, Political Post-Medieval Archaeology (Glasgow, September 2010). The focus of the conference was the contemporary context of post-medieval archaeology: the values, politics and ethics associated with the recent past, and the practices through which we engage with and construct that past. Contributors to the conference considered these issues in relation to the post-medieval and contemporary archaeologies of the U.K., Ireland and a number of other countries, and they promoted positions founded in a variety of philosophical, political and practice traditions.
Rediscovering, Preserving and Making Memories at Community Archaeology Projects from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Isherwood Robert
Abstract: Collective memory is a central component within the construction of community groups. Olick and Robbins¹ have argued that ‘collective memory is the active past that forms our identities’ and Samuel² has identified memory as being a dynamic, active, shaping force. Within individual community archaeology projects it is possible to identify the ‘rediscovery’ of memories as the motivating desire behind the instigation of the project in the first instance. Within my PhD thesis I proposed a relational view of community archaeology and argued that community archaeology concerns the relationship between communities and the materiality of their places.³ Interestingly, there appears to
Politics, Publics and Professional Pragmatics: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Horning Audrey
Abstract: Public and community archaeologies clearly have their deepest roots in places characterised by structural, societal inequities, and in situations where archaeologists have sought to be inclusive. As such, community archaeology has been generally theorised within a postcolonial, post-processual framework whereby we as scholars and trained professionals question our own position and our right to talk about the past of ‘other people’, often disenfranchised people. As characterised by Gemma Tully, the principal rationale for community archaeology is that ‘better archaeology can be achieved when more diverse voices are involved in the interpretation of the past.’¹ The best of these new inclusive
Archaeology, Politics and Politicians, or: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Dixon James
Abstract: The phrase ‘archaeology is a political act’¹ is oft repeated, but as with any such definitive phrase when used in academia each word of it has multiple meanings. For instance ‘is’. Well, it is not always. Archaeology
can be a political act and archaeology sometimes is a political act, but this is not a universal truth. Likewise, the word archaeology can be taken different ways itself. There is academic archaeology, private sector archaeology, public archaeology, uses of archaeology in the heritage industry and so on, all intrinsically connected, but each with nuances different enough to render universality meaningless.
‘No Certain Roof but the Coffin Lid’: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Janaway Robert C.
Abstract: Dramatic developments in manufacturing, mining and transportation precipitated by the Industrial Revolution brought irreversible cultural and socio-economic change to Britain. Thousands of ordinary people experienced profound changes, their life experiences and personal stories etched into their physical remains and threaded through the trappings of their death. The pressures of modern development mean that many recent burials are disinterred from their ‘final’ resting place and reburied elsewhere. The research value of post-medieval burial assemblages was recognised only relatively recently,² and this has undoubtedly influenced the strategic approach to planning and excavation. Harding³ identified the publication in English of Philippe Ariès’ work
Dialogues Between Past, Present and Future: from:
Archaeology, the Public and the Recent Past
Author(s) Jones Siân
Abstract: In his seminal work,
The Past is a Foreign Country, David Lowenthal not only captures the inseparable nature of past and present, but also advocates that we embrace the production of a useable past in a shifting present. Today, few archaeologists would dispute that our understandings of the past are a product of the present. Moreover, most accept that archaeology is a public concern with political, ethical and social implications in wider society. Indeed, as this volume demonstrates, they actively seek to produce an engaged and engaging past. Yet this has not always been the case. For much of the
Book Title: Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana-Campobello, Garro, Esquivel y Mastretta
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DE MORELOCK ELA MOLINA SEVILLA
Abstract: Este libro analiza la perspectiva de cuatro escritoras mexicanas -Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel y Ángeles Mastretta- acerca de la Revolución Mexicana y cómo estas escritoras recuperan la memoria popular, recreando y reincluyendo a las mujeres en la narrativa nacional respecto a su participación en la propia Revolución, más allá del conocido papel de soldaderas y Adelitas que acompañaban a los diferentes ejércitos revolucionarios. Este trabajo combina diferentes planteamientos críticos feministas, antropológicos y geográficos que además de las mujeres, incluyen a los indígenas y a otras minorías étnicas contemplando la interrelación de las categorías de género, espacio, raza y clase como un todo que define y redefine, permanentemente, identidades espacializadas en cambio permanente y constante. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock es un latinoamericanista actualmente con sede en los EE.UU. ENGLISH VERSION This book analyzes the perspective of four Mexican women writers regarding the Mexican Revolution---Nellie Campobello, Elena Garro, Laura Esquivel, and Angeles Mastretta. It examines how they recover popular memory to re-create and re-insert women in the national narrative with respect to their participation in the Revolution, which extended beyond the role of soldiers, camp followers, and soldiers' wives. The work combines cultural studies with feminist critical readings and an anthropological and geographical awareness of the roles of indigenous people and ethnic minorities, while paying attention to different categories such as gender, place, race, and class, as a wholeness of spatialized identities in permanent and constant flux. Ela Molina Sevilla de Morelock is a Latin Americanist currently based in the U.S.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nj1v
2 Elena Garro y Los recuerdos del porvenir: from:
Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana
Abstract: Como las demás escritoras que se incluyen en este trabajo, Elena Garro (1916–1998), también conocida como “La partícula revoltosa,”² reconstruye la memo ria de los marginados y olvidados en la Historia oficial de la Revolución, con lo cual más que inventar otra historia, a la manera de Cixous,³ recupera sus voces y recuerdos para completar dicha historia. Esta recuperación se realiza a través de la creación de espacios reales e imaginados en los que tanto los hechos como dichos actores marginados por la historia oficial encuentran la oportunidad de hacerse recordar y escuchar.
3 Laura Esquivel: from:
Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana
Abstract: En este capítulo mostraré cómo laura Esquivel (1950– ) en
Como agua para chocolate(1989) y enTan veloz como el deseo(2001), pone en práctica una (re) lectura que parodia, subvierte y desnuda tres de los mitos fundacionales de la mexicanidad: la Revolución Mexicana como hito histórico; el mestizo como figura representativa; y la familia nuclear como base de la sociedad. Este último mito se constituye a partir de los arquetipos patriarcales del machismo mexicano: una femineidad pasiva y sumisa y una masculinidad activa y agresiva.
4 Ángeles Mastretta y la Mujer Nueva en Mal de amores from:
Relecturas y narraciones femeninas de la Revolución Mexicana
Abstract: De acuerdo con Jean Franco la renuncia, abnegación y sacrificio de las mujeres ha sido uno de los temas recurrentes en la literatura y el cine mexicanos.¹ El tema forma parte del discurso oficial del México moderno, en el cual ocupa un lugar fundamental la construcción tanto del mito, como de la identidad, de la propia e idílica “abnegada mujercita mexicana.” La historia oficial de la Revolución, después de la activa y masiva participación de las mujeres en las dos etapas de la Revolución 1910–1920 y 1920–1940, reposiciona a las mujeres como acompañantes y responsables del cuidado de
Book Title: Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age-Eros, Eris and Empire
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): TORRES ISABEL
Abstract: This work engages with a broader evaluation of early modern poetics that foregrounds the processes rather than the products of thinking. The locus of the study is the Imperial 'home' space, where love poetry meets early modern empire at the inception of a very conflicted national consciousness, and where the vernacular language, Castilian, emerges in the encounter as a strategic site of national and imperial identity. The political is, therefore, a pervasive presence, teased out where relevant in recognition of the poet's sensitivity to the ideologies within which writing comes into being. But the primary commitment of the book is to lyric poetry, and to poets, individually and in their dynamic interconnectedness. Moving beyond a re-evaluation of critical responses to four major poets of the period (Garcilaso de la Vega, Herrera, Góngora and Quevedo), this study disengages respectfully with the substantial body of biographical research that continues to impact upon our understanding of the genre, and renegotiates the Foucauldian concept of the 'epistemic break', often associated with the anti-mimetic impulses of the Baroque. This more flexible model accommodates the multiperspectivism that interrogated Imperial ideology even in the earliest sixteenth-century poetry, and allows for the exploration of new horizons in interpretation. Isabel Torres is Professor of Spanish Golden Age Literature and Head of Spanish and Portuguese Studies at Queen's University, Belfast.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt31nj3t
6 Francisco de Quevedo Villegas (1580–1645): from:
Love Poetry in the Spanish Golden Age
Abstract: Francisco de Quevedo’s remarkable love poetry has finally begun to speak to us on its own terms: as poetry. For too long its voice struggled to be heard under the considerable weight of alternative critical displacement activity; that is, engagement with the still unresolved issues of chronology, dating, and corpus definition that are inevitably dominant when a poet does not publish his work in his own lifetime. However, there are some things that we do know for certain: the first posthumous edition of Quevedo’s poetry was compiled and edited by his friend, José Antonio González de Salas, in 1648, under
3 The Palimpsestuous (Re)writing of the Island as a Dialogic Practice: from:
Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: As we have seen, there has been a proliferation of the use of intertextuality in recent Cuban fiction, and the process of creation appears as a topic in all the novels studied in this book. This process of creation becomes a mechanism that the characters of the novels use to reach self–knowledge, as a way of creating a collective memory and of resisting established authority.
6 Language Unbound: from:
Dialogic Aspects in the Cuban Novel of the 1990s
Abstract: Zoé Valdés is one of the best-known Cuban writers of her generation. She was born in Havana in 1959 and left Cuba as an adult. She is well known internationally as an outspoken opponent of the Castros’ regime. As Catherine Davies pointed out shortly after Valdés settled in Europe, she ‘has made a reputation for herself by criticizing the Cuban government and writing novels that some would call erotic and others pornographic’ (1997: 223–4). Valdés is well known for the use of explicit sexual language in her novels. She is actually a pioneer in doing so, and opened
Book Title: Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): dos Santos Silvio J.
Abstract: Exploring the crossroads between autobiographical narrative and musical composition, this book examines Berg's transformation of Frank Wedekind's Erdgeist (1895) and Die Büchse der Pandora/ (1904) -- the plays used in the formation of the libretto for Lulu -- according to notions of gender identity, social customs, and the aesthetics of modernity in Vienna of the 1920s and 1930s. While Berg modernized several aspects of the plays by Wedekind and incorporated serial techniques of composition from Arnold Schoenberg, he never let go of the idealistic Wagnerian perspectives of his youth. In fact, he went as far as reconfiguring aspects of Richard Wagner's life as an ideal identity to be played out in the compositional process. In the process of composing the opera, Berg also reflected on the most important cultural figures in fin-de-siècle Vienna that affected his worldview, including Karl Kraus, Emil Lucka, Otto Weininger, and others. Adopting an approach that combines a systematic analysis of Berg's numerous sketches for Lulu, correspondence, and the finished work with interpretive models drawn from cultural studies and philosophy, this book elucidates the ways in which Berg grappled with his self-image as an "incorrigible romantic" (unverbesserliche Romantiker) at the end of his life, explaining aspects of his musical language that have been considered strange or anomalous in the scholarship. Silvio J. dos Santos is assistant professor of musicology at the University of Florida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt5vj797
Chapter Two Berg as Wagner: from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: By establishing a principle of identity between Berg and Wagner, this chapter is bound to cause suspicion, as it could rightly be argued that a person’s identity is formed by a multitude of factors—including the appropriation of historical or fictional narratives—by which the individual and collective identities are in a constant process of reconfiguration. To single out one element as
themost important factor in the formation of one’s identity would seem to establish a rather rigid category that overlooks other relational properties in identity formation. To be sure, as is well-known, Berg identified himself overtly with an
Chapter Three Refiguring Tristan from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: Berg’s fixation on constructing narratives of identity is reflected most overtly in his rendering of the character of Alwa, who is transformed into an opera composer, the “
WozzeckKomponist” (composer ofWozzeck),¹ from the original playwright in Wedekind’s play. This sort of self-identification was not unusual within his Viennese circle of friends; perhaps the closest model is Schoenberg’s identification with Moses in his operaMoses und Aron.² Yet Berg complicates his self-identification with Alwa because, as Patricia Hall has rightly argued, “many sketches for the Rondo suggest that on some level Berg associated the character of Alwa with Tristan from
Chapter Four The Bild Motif and Lulu’s Identity from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: As is well-known and has been discussed in previous chapters, Karl Kraus’s introductory lecture to the 1905 private performance of Frank Wedekind’s
Die Büchse der Pandorain Vienna left a lasting impression on Berg. This impression lay dormant until 1928, when he settled on Wedekind’sLuluplays,ErdgeistandDie Büchse der Pandora, for his second opera after considering and eventually rejecting Gerhart Hauptmann’sUnd Pippa tanzt!¹ Kraus’s lecture was extensive and addressed several issues, including the perception of womanhood and the typological roles of some characters, all of which he related to the moral message of the play. The
Chapter Five Marriage as Prostitution from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: When Berg explained his progress with composing
Luluin a letter to Schoenberg on August 7, 1930, he had already set his mind on one of the most important distinctions between his new opera and the plays by Frank Wedekind on which the libretto was based: namely, the return of Lulu’s “victims” (her husbands) as her clients in the final scene. After describing the role of the orchestral interlude between the first and second scenes of act 2 as the “focal point for the whole tragedy,” Berg added this parenthetical comment: “(Incidentally: the 4 men [actually three] who visit Lulu
Chapter Six Masculine, Feminine, and “In-between”: from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: In the conclusion of
Luluthe audience is left with the dying Geschwitz, a lesbian character whose devoted, self-sacrificing love for Lulu and eventual decision to pursue a law degree and fight for women’s rights is cut short by her fateful encounter with Jack the Ripper. Perhaps the most significant aspect of this ending is that Berg places Lulu’s death offstage; the only victim onstage, and therefore seen and heard by the audience, is Geschwitz. Berg even considered, at some point during the compositional process, leaving Lulu alive, making Geschwitz the only fatal victim of Jack the Ripper.¹ This subtle
Conclusion: from:
Narratives of Identity in Alban Berg's "Lulu"
Abstract: Berg’s fascination with Wagner,
Tristanin particular, complicates our understanding of his music because it underlies not only his creative identity and actions but also some principles behind his musical compositions. In his writings, Adorno often tries to draw a distinction between Berg and Wagner, but his explanations, while illuminating, only contribute to the problem. In his reevaluation of Berg, written about twenty years after Berg’s death, Adorno recognizes the “autonomy” of Berg’s works but points to a peculiar sort of metaphysics in which Berg’s music would emerge from underneath the music drama. In other words, Adorno draws a distinction
Acts of Vengeance, Acts of Love: from:
War and Literature
Author(s) THROOP SUSANNA A.
Abstract: In october 1099, following the conquest of Jerusalem, First Crusade forces led by Duke Godfrey of Bouillon laid siege to the city of Arsuf, about fifteen miles north of modern Tel Aviv. According to the early-twelfth-century chronicler Albert of Aachen, the city’s defenders attempted to distract Godfrey by crucifying one of Godfrey’s men, Gerard of Avesnes. They placed him on the city walls within sight of the siege forces. Dying yet still able to talk, Gerard begged Godfrey to avenge his suffering and death. Godfrey told Gerard that, unfortunately, he could not avenge him; diverting men to do so would
‘Is this War?’: from:
War and Literature
Author(s) PURDON JAMES
Abstract: Most writing about British Cold War culture has concentrated on nuclearism, pacifism, decolonisation, socialism, postmodernism, Americanisation – in short, on everything but war. One effect of the attention paid to these various narratives has been to obscure the fact that citizens of the USSR and those of Western capitalist democracies alike understood and feared the Cold War
as war, even if later accounts have tended to lose sight of what Holger Nehring has called the ‘war-like character’ of their experiences.² If the Cold War is to have any explanatory force as a context for literary works beyond serving as a
Proclaiming the War News: from:
War and Literature
Author(s) WRIGHT TOM F.
Abstract: How does the role of public speech evolve in an age of technological transformation? Two literary and visual artefacts from the wars of nineteenth-century America pose this question, and offer insights into a chapter of media history that is still poorly understood. In the first, Richard Caton Woodville’s
War News From Mexico(1848), the ambivalent place of wartime voice takes centre stage. This most iconic of genre paintings records a foundational scene of US imperialism, and captures the public drama of national expansion. Its broader subject, however, is the social life of information. Woodville’s image depicts news of Mexican surrender
Does Tolstoy’s War and Peace Make Modern War Literature Redundant? from:
War and Literature
Author(s) RAWLINSON MARK
Abstract: The concept of redundancy employed in this essay is the one used in mathematics and linguistics to designate symbols that do not add information to a sequence. One of the hazards of teaching twentieth-century war literature is the tacit inference of redundancy by readers, namely that the representational conventions as well as the facts and values represented are ‘predictable from … context’.
90The claim that twentieth-century war writing is made superfluous byWar and Peace(1869) is polemical, but it is also intended to do serious work: to draw attention to representations of war which are not predictable from context,
Book Title: Modern German Thought from Kant to Habermas-An Annotated German-Language Reader
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Large Duncan
Abstract: German-language thinkers such as Kant, Marx, Nietzsche, and Freud are central to modernity. Yet their reception in the English-speaking world has largely depended on translations, a situation that has often hampered full engagement with the rhetorical and philosophical complexity of the German history of ideas. The present volume, the first of its kind, is a response to this situation. After an introduction charting the remarkable flowering of German-language thought since the eighteenth century, it offers extracts -- in the original German -- from sixteen major philosophical texts, with extensive introductions and annotations in English. All extracts are carefully chosen to introduce the individual thinkers while allowing the reader to pursue broader themes such as the fate of reason or the history of modern selfhood. The book offers students and scholars of German a complement to linguistic, historical, and literary study by giving them access to the wealth of German-language philosophy. It represents a new way into the work of a succession of thinkers who have defined modern philosophy and thus remain of crucial relevance today. The philosophers: Immanuel Kant, G. W. F. Hegel, Ludwig Feuerbach, Karl Marx, Arthur Schopenhauer, Friedrich Nietzsche, Sigmund Freud, Martin Heidegger, Walter Benjamin, Georg Lukács, Max Horkheimer and Theodor Adorno, Jürgen Habermas. Henk de Berg is Professor of German at the University of Sheffield. Duncan Large is Professor of German at Swansea University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp91n
Book Title: El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)-alegoría y nostalgia
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): DUFAYS SOPHIE
Abstract: Este libro constituye la primera monografía dedicada al papel del niño en el cine latinoamericano. El análisis detallado de una decena de películas argentinas de la post-dictadura dirigidas entre 1983 y 2008, incluyendo tanto clásicas (La historia oficial, Un lugar en el mundo) como olvidadas (Amigomio, El rigor del destino), revela cómo la mirada y el lenguaje del niño son puestos al servicio de una alegoría nostálgica, estructurada en torno a la memoria o al lenguaje verbal y vinculada a la figura del padre ausente. Dufays combina los análisis fílmicos con una amplia reflexión teórica sobre las cuatro nociones clave de alegoría, melancolía, nostalgia y duelo y los articula con una genealogía de la figura alegórica del niño en las tradiciones narrativas latinoamericanas. Este recorrido permite al lector explorar las significaciones simbólicas y discursivas que el personaje infantil, la infancia y la familia han adquirido en el cine y en el contexto postdictatorial argentino. Sophie Dufays es investigadora postdoctoral del Fondo Nacional de Investigación Científica de Bélgica, en la Universidad de Louvain-la-Neuve. This book is the first monograph devoted to the role of the child in Latin American cinema. Through close analysis of about ten Argentine fiction films of the post-dictatorship period directed between 1983 and 2008, including both classic such as The Official Story and A Place in the World) and forgotten works such as Amigomío and El rigor del destino. Dufays shows how the child's gaze and language are a means of focusing a nostalgic form of allegory, structured around either memory or verbal language, and related to the figure of the absent father. In combining these analyses with a wide theoretical articulation of four key notions (allegory, melancholy, mourning and nostalgia) and with a genealogy of the allegorical child character in Latin American narrative traditions, Relatos de infancia allows the reader to explore the meanings that childhood and family have come to acquire in cinema, particularly in the Argentine post-dictatorial context. Sophie Dufays is a FNRS Postdoctoral Researcher (Belgian National Fund for Scientific Research) at the University of Louvain-la-Neuve.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt6wp9v7
4 La alegoría entre la melancolía y el duelo: from:
El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: La alegoría barroca, que había nacido de un conflicto de interpretación respecto del carácter enigmático de la naturaleza – esta se presentaba como una acumulación de fragmentos estáticos –, conoció un (nuevo) movimiento de interiorización en el siglo XIX, en el contexto de la desposesión de la experiencia subjetiva característica del hombre moderno,²¹ desposesión que la poesía de Baudelaire representa de manera ejemplar. Desde entonces, la alegoría representaría el resto ya no solo de la naturaleza y de la historia colectiva, sino también de una historia subjetiva.
2 El niño de la calle y la ciudad fragmentada en Buenos Aires viceversa from:
El niño en el cine argentino de la postdictadura (1983-2008)
Abstract: Desde los años cincuenta resulta llamativa la puesta en escena conjunta de la gran ciudad moderna y de la mirada infantil tanto en el neorrealismo italiano como en el cine latinoamericano.
30Las películasLos olvidados(1950, México) de Luis Buñuel,Rio, 40 graus(1955, Brasil)³¹ de Nelson Pereira dos Santos,Tire dié(1958–61, Argentina)³² de Fernando Birri,Largo viaje(Chile, 1967)³³ de Patricio Kaulen yValparaíso mi amor(Chile, 1969)34de Aldo Francia, todas precursoras o emblemáticas de los Nuevos Cines latinoamericanos, muestran la vida actual y “real” de la gran metrópoli latinoamericana (México, Río de Janeiro, Santa Fe,
1 La poesía mutante del Siglo de Oro from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Egido Aurora
Abstract: Para los lectores actuales, ‘Poesía en movimiento’ remite sin duda a la antología de signo vanguardista preparada en 1966 por Octavio Pazy José Emilio Pacheco en la que estos pretendían recoger los poemas de quienes hubieran contribuido a la transformación de la poesía mejicana desde el Modernismo.¹ El asunto no es baladí, si tenemos en cuenta lo que cl Barroco simbolizó, desde su invención, para los modernos, sobre todo a partir de los
Conceptos Fundamentales de la Historia del Arte(1915) de Heinrich Wölfflin, que lo caracterizó precisamente como búsqueda del movimiento.² El siglo XX asignó además con esa palabra
6 Upwards to Helicon: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Mascia Mark J.
Abstract: One of Lope de Vega’s (1562–1635) longest poetic works, the
Laurel de Apolo(1630), has received less critical attention than much of his other poetry due to its sheer length. This massive poem, composed of tensilvasand totalling nearly seven thousand lines, is sometimes viewed as a simple litany of praise for several hundred contemporary poets. However, one often overlooked element is the way in which Lope uses this text to engage in acts of judgement and even personal vendettas against his rivals. The purpose of this study is to examine how Lope moves his locus of enunciation
9 Jealousy in María de Zayas’s Intercalated Poetry: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Bultman Dana
Abstract: María de Zayas’s dynamic use of intercalated poetry in her
Novelas amorosas y ejemplares(1637) andParte segunda del Sarao y entretenimiento honesto(1647) provides us with a sustained example of ‘poetry in motion’ across hundreds of narrative pages. Over the course of these works, Zayas intersperses lyric forms in her narrative, creating generic contrasts that are integral to the structure of both books and offering evidence for the gradual transformation of her central character, Lisis.
12 Poesía popular en movimiento: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Peraita Carmen
Abstract: A mediados del siglo XVII, al igual que varias otras ciudades de la península, Valencia destaca por una producción ingente de poesía exhibida en celebraciones excéntricas y dispendiosas. En efecto, los acontecimientos festivos de índole variada son ocasiones que estimulan la escritura de poesía a la que es tan propensa la cultura de la edad moderna. Para momentos diversos de una celebración se escribe, pone en movimiento y hace circular géneros de poesía característicamente diferentes del poema pensado para un certamen poético. En efecto, la fiesta empapela la ciudad con una poesía de circunstancia,
muy propia al intento, de carácter
13 Responding to Góngora: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Holloway Anne
Abstract: Herrera, writing in 1580, underscores the challenge inherent in the responsive poetic utterance.
El Divino’s comments refer specifically to the performance of the amoeban song associated with pastoral poetry, which he presents as a model of emulative composition.¹ Philosophers of language in the twentieth century suggested that no utterance exists in isolation, indeed the need to respond and the desire to obtain response is enshrined in every communicative act:
14 Traveling in Place: from:
Spanish Golden Age Poetry in Motion
Author(s) Powell Amanda
Abstract: The title ‘Poetry in Motion’ suits the travel across language, culture, and time that constitutes literary translation. Across what bridge, by what mode, can a text arrive at the further shore – ‘[a] esotra parte, en la ribera’ – transformed to a new language and occupying a foreign literary context, yet with intangible spirit intact?¹ Does it best travel naked or robed, empty-handed or with baggage? In particular, how do we bring across Baroque lyric: rhymed, metered, allusive, with incisively doubled meaning or gorgeously encrusted figuration. Should highly ornate originals be simplified in translation, in order to make them understand able? The
Formalism, Naturalism, and the Elusive Socialist Realist Picture at the GDR’s Dritte deutsche Kunstausstellung, 1953 from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Mathews Heather E.
Abstract: Willy Colberg’s painting
Streikposten in Hamburg[Fig. 1] was one of a number of artworks by West Germans to be included in theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungin 1953, a major national event dedicated to showcasing emerging socialist realist art in the German Democratic Republic. In the following discussion, I will examine how the persistence of a naturalistic style, communicated in part by West German artworks like Colberg’s, helped to shape East Germans’ perceptions of their own progress towards socialist realism. As the case of theDritte deutsche Kunstausstellungdemonstrates, exhibitions are active, public narratives through which organizers are able to
“Cold, Clean, Meaningless”: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Pfützner Katharina
Abstract: This essay will focus on a conflict between two competing visions of socialist design in the GDR, which drew on different aspects of the German cultural heritage and were based on diverging, untested assumptions about what was suitable for the socialist consumer. Ideologues of the ruling SED championed the doctrine of socialist realism as a suitable starting point, while members of the GDR design community supported a modernist approach to industrial design. In the first fifteen years of the state’s existence this disagreement manifested itself in a considerable divergence between official rhetoric and design practice.
(Re)defining the Musical Heritage: from:
Edinburgh German Yearbook 3
Author(s) Silverberg Laura
Abstract: Nearly a decade ago, the Deutscher Musikrat began an ambitious project entitled “Musik in Deutschland, 1950–2000.” This recorded anthology of East and West German music would eventually include over one hundred compact discs covering themes such as electronic music, jazz, and musical theater. The series offers a comprehensive presentation of music from both Germanys; composers once physically separated by barbed wire and the Berlin Wall now reside together on the same CD. In some cases, “Musik in Deutschland” unearths striking similarities between East and West German composers, particularly among those who came of age prior to the Second World
Book Title: Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Quinn Thomas P.
Abstract: The many catastrophes of German history have often been described as tragic. Consequently, German literature, music, philosophy, painting, and even architecture are rich in tragic connotations. Yet exactly what "tragedy" and "the tragic" may mean requires clarification. The poet creates a certain artful shape and trajectory for raw experience by "putting it into words"; but does putting such experience into words (or paintings or music or any other form) betray suffering by turning it into mere art? Or is it art that first turns mere suffering into tragic experience by revealing and clarifying its deepest dimension? What are we talking about, exactly, when we talk about tragic experience and tragic art, especially in an age in which, according to Hannah Arendt, evil has become banal? Does banality muffle or even annul the tragic? Does tragedy take suffering and transform it into beauty, as Schiller thought? Is it in the interest of truth for suffering to be "beautiful"? Is it possible that poetry, music, and art are important because they in fact create the meaning of suffering? Or is suffering only suffering and not accessible to meaning, tragic or otherwise? This book comprises essays that seek to clarify the meaning of tragedy and the tragic in its many German contexts, art forms, and disciplines, from literature and philosophy to music, painting, and history. Contributors: Jeffrey A. Bernstein, Steve Dowden, Wolfram Ette, Jennifer Anna Gosetti-Ferencei, Karsten Harries, Joseph P. Lawrence, James McFarland, Karen Painter, Bruno Pieger, Robert Pirro, Thomas Quinn, Mark Roche, Helmut Walser Smith. Stephen D. Dowden is Professor of German at Brandeis University. Thomas Quinn is an independent scholar.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt7zstkf
2: Goethe’s Faust as the Tragedy of Modernity from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Lawrence Joseph P.
Abstract: The tragedy of modernity is that, turning its back on tragedy, it moves along with reckless abandon and in the process forgets the wisdom of the ages. Even its attempts to proceed with caution, entrusting history to the guidance of reason, all too often misfire, for what does reason have to say about where we should be headed? Are we to do what makes rational sense for each of us as isolated individuals? Should we act for this historical moment in which collectively we find ourselves? Or is the proper goal the ultimate good of humanity, as might be realized
5: Nietzsche, Büchner, and the Blues from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Dowden Stephen D.
Abstract: In The Birth of Tragedy Nietzsche links tragic art to folk songs. Following Schopenhauer, he takes music—and not literary genre, historical ideas, philosophical concepts, actual suffering, or even pure storytelling—to be what originates, shapes, and carries tragedy’s expressive force. According to Nietzsche, the spontaneous appeal of rhythm and melody evoke a primal sense of unity with life and with the greater whole in which life is imbedded. First the music and then the words, insofar as words too are musical, well up out of these depths as specific, merely individual instances of a deeper, never-quite-articulated knowledge and, generally,
7: The Death of Tragedy: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) McFarland James
Abstract: In 1915 young Walter Benjamin, at the time a prominent student activist with the German Youth Movement, broke publicly with his mentor and leader Gustav Wyneken over the latter’s support of the First World War. “Dear Herr Doctor Wyneken,” Benjamin’s open letter begins, “I ask you to accept the following lines with which I entirely and without reserve disassociate myself from you as a final demonstration of loyalty, and only as that.” The paradox is almost too cute, were its indignation not so passionately felt. “Loyalty,” Benjamin continues, “because I could not utter a word to the man who wrote
8: Rosenzweig’s Tragedy and the Spectacles of Strauss: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Bernstein Jeffrey A.
Abstract: Is there not something oppressive about raising, once again, the question of how to understand German-Jewish history (if, in fact, one assumes that non-Jewish and Jewish Germans actually participated in the
samehistory)? According to Gershom Scholem, the answer would have to be yes. In the context of speaking about German-Jewish dialogue, he states the following:
13: Atrocity and Agency: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Pirro Robert
Abstract: Relatively late in his career W. G. Sebald began attracting wide attention for his semi-autobiographical books written in a dense and digressive style and incorporating black-and-white photographs and postcard images. These images intimate some of the more profound costs of nineteenth-and twentieth-century European civilization. Evoking the aftermath of wars, genocides, and environmental devastation in such books as
Vertigo,The Rings of Saturn, andThe Emigrants, Sebald has attracted a growing body of scholarly criticism that tends increasingly to examine his literary engagement with traces of past suffering under the rubric of trauma. In discussing Sebald’sLuftkrieg und Literatur, his polemic
Afterword: from:
Tragedy and the Tragic in German Literature, Art, and Thought
Author(s) Quinn Thomas P.
Abstract: Imagine. Imagine the unimaginable. Negatively, not positively. And then realize, not just with your mind, but with your whole body and soul, that you did not imagine it. It really happened. Auschwitz. If utopia, oύ (“not”) and τόπoς (“place”), is a “no place,” a place that does not exist except as a vision of a better world, Auschwitz was a “no place” where a world ended, a place where existence was negated. More exactly: existences. Not exclusively, but overwhelmingly Jewish existences. One life after another. Again and again. We could name names, and add them all together only to arrive
Book Title: Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'-An Analysis
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Langbehn Volker Max
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914-1979) is considered one of the most daring and influential writers of postwar Germany; the Germanist Jeremy Adler has called him a "giant of postwar German literature." Schmidt was awarded the Fontane Prize in 1964 and the Goethe Prize in 1973, and his early fiction has been translated into English to high critical acclaim, but he is not a well-known figure in the English-speaking world, where his complex work remains at the margins of critical inquiry. Volker Langbehn's book introduces Schmidt to the English-speaking audience, with primary emphasis on his most famous novel, 'Zettel's Traum'. One reviewer called the book an "elephantine monster" because of its unconventional size (folio format), length (1334 pages and over 10 million characters), and unique presentation of text in the form of notes, typewritten pages, parallel columns, and collages. The novel narrates the life of the main characters, Daniel Pagenstecher, Paul Jacobi and his wife Wilma, and their teenage daughter Franziska. In discussing the life and works of Edgar Allan Poe, the four engage in the problems connected with a translation of Poe. Langbehn's study investigates how literary language can mediate or account for the world of experiences and for concepts. Schmidt's use of unconventional presentation formats challenges us to analyze how we think about reading and writing literary texts. Instead of viewing such texts as a representation of reality, Schmidt's novel destabilizes this unquestioned mode of representation, posing a radical challenge to what contemporary literary criticism defines as literature. No comprehensive study of 'Zettel's Traum' exists in English. Volker Langbehn is associate professor of German at San Francisco State University.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81f1w
Introduction from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: Arno Schmidt (1914–1979) is not a well-known figure in literary studies in this country. Although he has been recognized as probably the single most important experimental novelist in German since the Second World War, there is still little criticism on his work. Despite the increase in the amount of published Schmidt research over the past ten years in Germany, his works have never attracted a large readership. The linguistic density and the sophisticated cultural reflections of his texts seem to prohibit his writings from ever becoming popular. But Schmidt has at least finally gained recognition as a “giant of
1: The Art of Writing in Columns from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: According to Schmidt,
Zettel’s Traum borrows its “SpaltenTechnick” from Finnegans Wake. By structuring Zettel’s Traum into three columns or “TextSträhnen,” Schmidt expects that the reader will be able to follow the information provided in the columns.¹ To ease the reading process, Schmidt divides the three columns according to theme. The center column reflects the events of the years between 1965 and 1969, the time frame in which Zettel’s Traum was actually written. Daniel Pagenstecher, as the central narrator of the events, assists Paul and Wilma Jacobi, likewise writers and old school friends, in the translation of Poe’s works into German.
4: Tropes of Subversion from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: Schmidt’s play with non-phonetic signs and the etym theory illustrate his fragmentary style of writing and highlights his rejection of traditional logical chains of reasoning. Instead of presenting any dogmatic truths about language, Schmidt sought to animate the reader to create his or her language through self-conscious figuration. Although the etym language might suggest a rather confining way of reading and reflecting upon language and reality, the fact is that even Schmidt, as the self-proclaimed creator of such a mode of inquiry into oral and written language, remains inscribed in his own speaking and writing. It is the reader, who,
5: Schmidt’s Reading of Freud’s Ego-Development from:
Arno Schmidt's 'Zettel's Traum'
Abstract: An analysis of Schmidt’s dialectic of conscious and unconscious thought processes remains insufficient without a more thorough investigation of Schmidt’s understanding of subjectivity. An inquiry into what constitutes subjectivity seems even more necessary since Schmidt alludes to the androgynous character of our being. Schmidt’s stress on the unconscious as the prime determinant of our conscious mode of processing information unveils the central role the unconscious assumes in any reflection on subjectivity. Throughout the previous chapters, however, I emphasized that reading entails a process of decipherment, which in turn always leads to a process of construction and reconstruction. Since for Schmidt
Introduction from:
Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World
Abstract: For the Yoruba, the phrase
orunile captures the notion of home that one carries with oneself from birth.¹ The idea is that we leave heaven, our home, to embark on a journey into the world, a marketplace. The marketplace referred to here is a West African marketplace where almost any kind of transaction may occur. It is a public space full of possibilities, danger, and wonder. In the Yoruba oja, the key component is the negotiation of the value of something through verbal barter. It is a sphere of performance where there are winners and losers. Individuals are encouraged to
3 “Second Diasporas”: from:
Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World
Abstract: In recent years, a deeper awareness has emerged of the sustained historical relationships across Afro-Atlantic worlds, and of the fact that the diasporas involved may be rethought in many ways.¹ Necessarily, African and American societies, spaces, and relations are now being understood as extensions of each other. These understandings include refreshing ways of seeing how communities extending from the Bight of Benin to the Caribbean and the Americas are contiguous and integrated in their histories, thus forcing us to rethink our notions of discrete regions. Along with the reconsideration of region in exploring these transnational flows is the movement of
5 Creating Afrocubanos: from:
Afro-Cuban Diasporas in the Atlantic World
Abstract: In this poem, Cuban poet José Martí depicts the arrival of African slaves in Cuba in a tragic manner.¹ His characterization surrounds the violence done to Africans with metaphors of nature’s ferocity. The little boy in the last stanza foreshadows and represents the Cuban nation yet to be born out of this sordid past. The two tropes, of violence and nature, provide an entry point for a discussion of the development of the use of the idea of the African citizen in constructing national identity in Cuba. This idea of the emerging Afro-Cuban citizen was reformulated through re-remembering race and
Book Title: Love and Death in Goethe-`One and Double'
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Dye Ellis
Abstract: Goethe, in association with his younger Romantic compatriots the Schlegels, Novalis, Fichte, and Schelling, struggled with the subject-object dichotomy, and tried to bridge the gap between self and other, consciousness and nature. His theory and practice prefigured the Romantics' determination to display and interrogate the linguistic and cultural structures informing their own thinking and modes of representation--what Goethe calls one's "Vorstellungsart." His work exploits, subverts, and supplants inherited conventions and signs, demonstrating with virtuosic irony that literature is a system of texts, pre-texts, and pre-established but dynamic conceptual models. 'Love and Death in Goethe:"One and Double"' explores Goethe's use, in a wide range of his poetry and prose, of the theme of 'Liebestod' (love and death) and related embodiments of the paradox of unity in duality. Ellis Dye also examines Goethe's use of other themes related to love and death--the 'femme fatale', the 'vagina dentata, Frau Welt', the Lorelei, venereal disease, the 'Lustmord' --and considers issues of selfhood and individuation as well as the possibility that the love-death theme contains an implicit gender bias toward the existential fact of personal separateness. Poems, plays, and novels are dealt with, nevertheless, as works of art, not only as illustrations of an idea or as points of intersection in a system of rhetorical conventions, and are examined for intellectual cohesiveness, elegance, and integrity of design as well as special meanings and effects. ' Love and Death in Goethe:"One and Double" ' explores the meaning of the central theme of Romantic poetry in the works of the most important Romantic poet of all. Students of literary culture, both the lay reader and the Goethe specialist, will be enlightened by its approach and find pleasure and instruction in its revelations. Robert Ellis Dye is professor of German at Macalester College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81fsr
4: Die Leiden des jungen Werthers from:
Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Two of the works that Goethe wrote in 1774 end with a
Liebestod. Clavigo, an enduringly popular play, does not actually celebrate the blending of the lovers in a death-transcending union: Its horizon is more social than existential and revolves around Clavigo’s difficulty in choosing between love and ambition, between ascendancy in society and government on the one hand and marriage to the declassé Marie Beaumarchais on the other. The dilemma is resolved by the thrust of a dagger from Marie’s brother, the mortally wounded Clavigo falling on the coffin of the woman he has wronged. He grasps her cold
7: Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre: from:
Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Among the questions the novel takes up is whether an actor can, or should, try to identify with the character
10: Love and Death in from:
Love and Death in Goethe
Abstract: Goethe’s
Faust expresses Romanticism’s agony over the fact of individuation and the individual’s distance from its origin and destiny. Its action is propelled by a man’s desire to escape from selfhood into love. Faust does not end in a Liebestod, like Romeo and Juliet or Aida. Yet what is at stake is the continuation of Faust’s self-identity in time versus his dissolution, his Entgrenzung, in a timeless moment of bliss. The escape from selfhood into union with another, whether a lover, the world, or God, would be a Liebestod, and there are many echoes of the love-death theme in Faust,
3: Historical Background from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Laflèche Guy
Abstract: New France is a territory that once spread from Newfoundland to the Gulf of Mexico. As a French colony it included at least three main regions: Acadia, Canada, and Louisiana (not counting Brazil and Florida). In the context of Canadian history, the term refers to a period corresponding to that of the Ancien Régime in France, dating conventionally from 1534 (the first voyage of Jacques Cartier) to 1763 (the Treaty of Paris, which sanctioned the military conquest by Britain in 1760). New France was in fact the result of six major historical developments: first, the voyages of discovery, beginning officially
12: English-Canadian Poetry, 1920–1960 from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) York Lorraine
Abstract: Speaking of the period from 1920 to 1960, Margaret Atwood stated in her introduction to the
New Oxford Book of Canadian Verse (1982) that “this, for me, is the age that only the usual Canadian cautiousness and dislike of hyperbole prevents me from calling golden.” The years between 1920 and 1960 were indeed a period of prodigious activity and contention in English-Canadian poetry, and the contentiousness was as productive a force as was the energetic publishing of poems, collections, manifestos, and little magazines. These were also, of course, years that were overshadowed by two world wars; and those global events
20: French-Canadian Drama from the 1930s to the Révolution tranquille from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Scholl Dorothee
Abstract: The late development of French-Canadian theater is above all a result of its institutional framework: For a long time, secular drama was decried as amoral and was therefore prohibited. The clergy, in particular, who made a decisive contribution to the history of drama by encouraging the performance of plays in the collèges for the purpose of classical education, rhetorical training, and the moral edification of pupils, rejected the performance of “profane” texts. Beginning with the 1930s, however, the influence of European theater led to a modernization in the repertoire and the performance practice of clerical theater. Many clergymen also composed
21: Sociopolitical and Cultural Developments from 1967 to the Present from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Grace Sherrill
Abstract: In 1967, Canada celebrated its centenary, the hundredth anniversary of Confederation, but there are many other defining years and events which have come to be seen as foundational or transformative for the country’s history. The First World War marked Canada’s entry onto the world stage as a nation separate from Great Britain (while still part of the British Commonwealth); the Second World War consolidated Canada’s national stature and independence and paved the way for a number of significant cultural and social developments during the cold war years that would have their major impact after 1967. Vincent Massey, the country’s first
23: The English-Canadian Novel from Modernism to Postmodernism from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Kuester Martin
Abstract: In the last quarter of the twentieth century English-Canadian literature has firmly established itself on the international stage — above all in the novel and short-story genre. The production and reception of a national Canadian literature gained significant impetus during the 1960s and 1970s. The process of maturity for Canadian literature was greatly influenced by the cultural atmosphere surrounding the centenary of the Canadian Confederation in 1967, but the process itself had begun much earlier, as is indicated by the active support for Canadian literature by the Canada Council for the Arts from the late 1950s onwards. However, it was only
27: Canons of Diversity in Contemporary English-Canadian Literature from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Banita Georgiana
Abstract: Both in theory and ideally also in practice, Canada has adopted a constitutional policy of multiculturalism that comprises the layered, interrelated histories and cultures of all its constituent groups: English Canadians, French Canadians, First Nations, and other ethnic minorities alike. Before the passing of the 1947 Canadian Citizenship Act, all Canadians were counted as British subjects, but over the following two decades, mounting local and international tensions — such as Quebec nationalism, growing demands for compensation from members of the First Nations, and post-Second World War immigration policies — required a revision of the Canadian concept of nation. Canadian identity was thus
29: The Quebec Novel from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Eibl Doris G.
Abstract: In Quebec, the massive sociopolitical and cultural changes of the 1960s and the consolidation of the liberal État-providence in the 1970s saw a great overlap of culture and politics. The linkage was, in fact, so significant that in the 1980s, after the failure of the referendum for independence, many intellectuals and writers would reflect nostalgically on the previous two decades. They detected a general disengagement in the literature of the 1980s. The literary critic Gilles Marcotte even spoke of a “génération en deuil de ce qui la précède et de ce qui ne pourra pas advenir,” a “génération qui refuse
30: The French-Canadian Short Prose Narrative from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Eibl Doris G.
Abstract: For a long time Quebec short fiction did not rank highly in the hierarchy of genres. In the 1980s and 1990s, however, it experienced a boom in popularity, with the number of publications steadily rising: In the early 1970s only about ten short-story volumes had been published per annum, whereas the 1990s saw an average of thirty to thirty-five volumes published per year, not to mention publications in numerous journals and weekly as well as daily newspapers. From the mid-1970s onwards a great thematic and formal diversity could be found in French-Canadian short stories. This diversity, characterized by a seemingly
32: Orality and the French-Canadian Chanson from:
History of Literature in Canada
Author(s) Mathis-Moser Ursula
Abstract: Oralités-Polyphonix 16, a festival and symposium that took place in Quebec in June 1991, explored fundamental aspects of orality, its forms and functions as well as its specific Québécois character. Orality can operate both in a printed text and in the act of performing, whose most popular manifestation — next to theater and dance — is the chanson. One of the many facets of orality is the euphonic experiment with linguistic material, which has already been touched upon in connection with surrealist and postsurrealist sound effects and language practices (see ch. 17, Mathis-Moser), and which is especially prominent in the works of,
Book Title: Spanish American Poetry after 1950-Beyond the Vanguard
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): SHAW DONALD L.
Abstract: Providing a basis for understanding the main lines of development of poetry in Spanish America after Vanguardism, this volume begins with an overview of the situation at the mid-century: the later work of Neruda and Borges, the emergence of Paz. Consideration is then given to the decisive impact of Parra and the rise of colloquial poetry, politico-social poetry (Dalton, Cardenal) and representative figures such as Orozco, Pacheco and Cisneros. The aim is to establish a few paths through the largely unmapped jungle of Spanish American poetry in the time period. The author emphasises the persistence of a generally negative view of the human condition and the poets' exploration of different ways of responding to it. These vary from outright scepticism to the ideological, the religious or those derived from some degree of confidence in the creative imagination as cognitive. At the same time there is analysis of the evolving outlook on poetry of the writers in question, both in regard to its possible social role and in regard to diction. DONALD SHAW holds the Brown Forman Chair of Spanish American literature in the University of Virginia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81hxc
2 Neruda and Parra from:
Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: Three factors are traditionally taken into account in explaining Neruda’s shift from the Vanguardist thematics and diction of the first two
Residenciasto the more Americanist and populist poetry in and afterCanto general. One is the formulation of the doctrine of Socialist Realism in Russia at the Moscow Writers’ Conference of 1934, a doctrine which took on a new lease of life after World War II. The second is, of course, Neruda’s reaction to the Spanish Civil War which in his own view was the key to his poetic development thereafter. The third is the evolution of politics and
3 Borges and Cardenal from:
Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: I have attempted to show that the the mid-twentieth century constituted a watershed in Spanish American poetry. This is confirmed by two more important facts of literary history. The first is that Borges was now about to begin writing a significant amount of poetry again, after having all but abandoned the genre since 1929. The second is that in 1954, the year which saw the first volume of Neruda’s
Odasand the publication of Parra’sPoemas y antipoemas, Ernesto Cardenal began to write his first major poem,Hora O.
4 OROZCO AND DALTON from:
Spanish American Poetry after 1950
Abstract: What the foregoing account of the work of some of the major figures in Spanish American poetry around and immediately after the mid-twentieth century seems to illustrate is that two different attitudes towards the production of poetry faced each other. One emerges directly from Paz and has been admirably studied by Thorpe Running in
The Critical Poem(1996). The other connects with Neruda’sOdas elementales, the view of poetic language espoused by Parra, and the practice of Cardenal, explored by Alemany Bay inPoesía coloquial hispanoamericana(1997). To see the difference in a nutshell, all that is necessary is to
Introduction from:
Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: Over the last few decades, the concepts of “gender,” “identity,” and “narrative” have received growing attention in nearly every field of academic study. Gender has become an important analytical tool in many disciplines because of the insight it gives into the cultural orders underlying representations. Theories of subjectivity have illustrated that identity is not something we achieve and possess but something individuals must consistently reestablish in various social contexts and through a number of symbolic practices. One such symbolic practice is narrative. Through a coherent structure, and by drawing on familiar forms, narrative both constitutes and naturalizes concepts at the
2: “Alice Hoyle: from:
Narrative Deconstructions of Gender in Works by Audrey Thomas, Daphne Marlatt, and Louise Erdrich
Abstract: As the title
Intertidal Life suggests, Audrey Thomas’s 1984 novel depicts the story of a woman who is caught in-between the erratic tides of convention and difference. In an attempt to construct a new identity for herself after a severe rupture in her life story, Thomas’s protagonist, Alice Hoyle, oscillates between traditional, socially accepted positions for women and new identities she imagines for herself. The title not only points to the plot but also to the textual devices of Thomas’s narrative that moves back and forth between fixture and fluidity, fact and fiction.¹ The laws and features of the intertidal
Book Title: Goethe Yearbook 19- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): MacLeod Catriona
Abstract: The ‘Goethe Yearbook’ is a publication of the Goethe Society of North America, encouraging North American Goethe scholarship by publishing original English-language contributions to the understanding of Goethe and other authors of the ‘Goethezeit’ while also welcoming contributions from scholars around the world. Volume 19 of the ‘Goethe Yearbook’ continues to investigate the connection between Goethe's scientific theories and his aesthetics, with essays on his optics and his plant morphology. A special section examines the central role that Goethe philology has had in establishing practices that shaped the history of ‘Germanistik’ as a whole. The yearbook also includes essays on legal history and the novella, Goethe ‘Lieder’, esoteric mysticism in ‘Wilhelm Meisters Lehrjahre’, and Werther's sexual pathology. The volume also includes three essays re-examining Goethe's aesthetics in the context of the history of deconstruction, as well as the customary book review section. Contributors: Beate Allert, Frauke Berndt, Sean Franzel, Stefan Hajduk, Bernd Hamacher, Jeffrey L. High, Francien Markx, Lavinia Meier-Ewert, Ansgar Mohnkern, Rüdiger Nutt-Kofoth, Edward T. Potter, Chenxi Tang, Robert Walter. Daniel Purdy is Associate Professor of German at Pennsylvania State University. Book review editor Catriona MacLeod is Associate Professor of German at the University of Pennsylvania.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81ph2
“Trübe” as the Source of New Color Formation in Goethe’s Late Works from:
Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) ALLERT BEATE
Abstract: Much has been written about Goethe’s earlier didactic and polemical works on color.¹ However, little attention has been paid to his late essays titled
Entoptische Farben (1817–20) and Chromatik (1822), on which I shall focus in this essay.² Goethe’s experiments with colors and his writings on the visual occupied him almost for his entire life. Whereas one group of scholars argues for continuity and consistency in Goethe’s works, a second group argues that his oeuvre displays gaps and discontinuities, yet that these various parts represent different voices dialogically responding to each other while in the process also forming a
Hypochondria, Onanism, and Reading in Goethe’s from:
Goethe Yearbook 19
Author(s) POTTER EDWARD T.
Abstract: Johann Wolfgang von Goethe’s pathbreaking epistolary novel,
Die Leiden des jungen Werther (1774, 2nd [rev.] ed. 1787) has been the focus of an enormous amount of scholarly attention.¹ A recent analysis by Bruce Duncan of more than two centuries of Werther criticism, Goethe’s “Werther” and the Critics (2005), makes manifest the wide variety of critical approaches to this extremely rich text. Duncan discusses, among other things, contemporary late eighteenth-century reactions to Werther, biographical, religious, psychological, and political approaches to Goethe’s novel, as well as interpretations of Werther that focus on reading, writing, gender, and/or sexuality. The literary critic Michael Bell
Book Title: Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): MITCHELL J. ALLAN
Abstract: Why do medieval writers routinely make use of exemplary rhetoric? How does it work, and what are its ethical and poetical values? And if Chaucer and Gower must be seen as vigorously subverting it, then why do they persist in using it? Borrowing from recent developments in ethical criticism and theory, this book addresses such questions by reconstructing a late medieval rationale for the ethics of exemplary narrative. The author argues that Chaucer's ‘Canterbury Tales’ and Gower's ‘Confessio Amantis’ attest to the vitality of a narrative - rather than strictly normative - ethics that has roots in premodern traditions of practical reason and rhetoric. Chaucer and Gower are shown to be inheritors and respecters of an early and unexpected form of ethical pragmatism - which has profound implications for the orthodox history of ethics in the West. Recipient of the 2008 John H. Fisher Award for significant contribution to the field of Gower Studies. Dr J ALLAN MITCHELL is Lecturer in Medieval Literature, University of Kent, Canterbury.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81rhw
1 Reading for the Moral: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: My characterization of the ethical potentialities of exemplary rhetoric admittedly flies in the face of a commonplace critical presumption about the teleology of morals and the authoritarian nature of didactic literature. A composite sketch of the teleological account might take the following form: morality took an unfortunate turn in the Middle Ages when it assimilated itself to Church-dominated dogmatism, until moral rationalism found its feet again in the autonomous ethics of Enlightenment reason and Reformist spirituality. The assumption is that modern philosophy forever made ethics personal and appealingly complex again; and so in the vicissitudes of history, medieval morality stands
6 Pointing the Moral: from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: In his monumental study of preaching in the later Middle Ages, G. R. Owst argued that vernacular literary tradition effectively contracted the “germs” of literary realism, satire, and social consciousness from the pulpit. In a later chapter of his
Literature and Pulpit in Medieval England, entitled “Fiction and Instruction in the Sermon Exempla,” Owst was able to show that English poetry and drama were profoundly shaped by the pulpit rhetoric: travelogue, classical pagan tales, animal fables, ribald and satirical matter (anticlerical, antimatrimonial, antifeminist) all have precedents in sermon exempla.¹ Historians since have gone on to corroborate and refine his thesis,
7 Griselda and the Question of Ethical Monstrosity from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: From the standpoint of exemplary morality the
Clerk’s Tale can easily offend ordinary “prudence.”¹ The tale is emphatically a problem exemplum in which the most pressing practical question – for medievalists and medievals – is what to do with Griselda’s voluntary submission to the inhuman demands of Walter. What is it good to do with her example? Does Griselda epitomize wifely perfection in acting as she does; does she represent a spiritual ideal to which readers should aspire without acting as she does; or is she morally repugnant for doing what she does? At what level of generality or specificity, ultimately, are
Conclusion from:
Ethics and Exemplary Narrative in Chaucer and Gower
Abstract: If evil is a failure of the imagination, then from a practical point of view it becomes all-important that sufficient conditions for creative expression and reflection be established in and by culture. Imaginative literature in particular becomes indispensable for testing and expanding our moral intuitions; for showing what is entailed by living with timeless values in the contingencies of time and space; and for inspiring individuals to celebrate and seek after the right and the good. Ethical criticism and theory has in the last two decades been preoccupied with the nuances of literary expression in just this regard, urging that
Book Title: Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Arn Mary-Jo
Abstract: Charles, duc d'Orléans, prince and poet, was a captive in England for twenty-five years following the battle of Agincourt. The studies in this volume, by European and American scholars, focus on his life and actions during that time, and show him as a serious and learned reader, a cunning political figure (accomplished in the skills that would impress the English nobility around him), and a masterful poet, innovative, witty, and intensely self-aware. Discussion of his manuscripts, his social and political relationships, his extensive library, and his poetry in two languages reveal him as a shrewd observer of life, which in his poetry he describes in ways not seen again until the Renaissance. Contributors: MICHAEL K. JONES, WILLIAM ASKINS, GILBERT OUY, M. ARN, CLAUDIO GALDERISI, JOHN FOX, R.C. CHOLAKIAN, A.C. SPEARING, DEREK PEARSALL, JANET BACKHOUSE, JEAN-CLAUDE MUHLETHALER, A.E.B. COLDIRON.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt81xww
Charles d’Orléans and his Brother Jean d’Angoulême in England: from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) OUY GILBERT
Abstract: EVEN after being in daily contact with medieval manuscripts for more than half a century, one will never get tired of them. Actually, the more one studies them, the more exciting the study becomes. People who are not familiar with them may imagine that – with the exception, perhaps, of some lavishly illuminated books – they are just dead and dusty old things. Quite the contrary: there is life in them, like in the dried grains found in the Egyptian tombs which, they say, can still sprout. But codices will not be brought back to life unless one knows how
Two Manuscripts, One Mind: from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) ARN MARY-JO
Abstract: AS peace negotiations between the English and French intensified in the late 1430s, Charles d’Orléans’s hopes must have risen. In the final years of his English captivity (1436–1440), the duke was travelling back and forth between first Surrey, then Wiltshire, and London,¹ where he was working actively to nurture the peace process that would end the Hundred Years War. After more than twenty years in England, he must have sensed that the end of his long ordeal was at hand. One bit of evidence for this is that the duke had two manuscripts made, one in French, one in
Charles d’Orléans et l’‘autre’ langue: from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) GALDERISI CLAUDIO
Abstract: Pour beaucoup de poètes, rimer, au début du XV
e siècle, est aussi, sinon surtout, un ‘Passe Temps’. Comme l’a clairement mis en évidence Jean-Claude Mühlethaler,³ c’est dans cette perspective poétique en ton mineur que semble s’inscrire toute une branche de la production poétique de cette période, de Jean Regnier à Alain Chartier, de François Villon aux Grands Rhétoriqueurs. Par delà le rapprochement traditionnel et courtois aux activités de la chasse, de la pêche ou de l’amour, le mot Passe Temps paraît lié surtout
Le monde vivant from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) CHOLAKIAN ROUBEN C.
Abstract: Is the invented narrator in Charles of Orléans’s poetry a split personality? Are there two distinct poetic personae, the persona of the captivity years, introspective and forlorn, and a second post-captivity persona, more confidant, more happily attuned to the world around him? In short, is Charles in 1440 suddenly transformed into an active viewer of and participant in
le monde vivant? Such would appear to be the consensus among critics to date:
from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) MÜHLETHALER JEAN-CLAUDE
Abstract: AU passage du Moyen Age à la Renaissance, la prison et l’exil sont – faut-il le rappeler? – une expérience vécue pour bien des poètes:¹ Jean de Garencières, Jean Regnier, Charles d’Orléans, François Villon, l’anonyme prisonnier du château de Loches,² Clément Marot et François I
er sont parmi les exemples les plus célèbres. Malgré le poids des événements – la guerre surtout, puis les conflits religieux – et l’émergence, paralléle, d’une subjectivité susceptible d’exprimer une expérience individuelle,³ la prison reste un lieu emblématique de la littérature amoureuse et didactique. Le vécu s’y mêle avec l’allégorie dans des rapports, des proportions, qui
Translation, Canons, and Cultural Capital: from:
Charles d'Orléans in England, 1415-1440
Author(s) COLDIRON A. E. B.
Abstract: IN the autumn of 1415, in the bloody aftermath of Agincourt field, Charles, duc d’Orléans, was pulled from beneath a heap of bodies and armor into a twenty-five-year English captivity. The historical import of this fact is considerable: this Prince of the house of Valois, later to become father of Louis XII and uncle of François I, would figure largely in the settlements ending the Hundred Years’ War. However, the literary results of Charles’s long imprisonment have not been much studied, given their significance and interest.¹ Captive in several prominent English households, Charles composed more than 13,000 lines of verse
1: Language-Bodies: from:
German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Chronister Necia
Abstract: Unlike any other medium, literature has the ability to employ the reader’s imagination in the construction of bodies. When a narrator communicates information about a text’s characters, the reader completes the act of constructing bodies by imagining their contours, postures, and gestures. A character’s gender is thus dependent upon both the narrator’s speech—his/her use of nouns, pronouns, and adjectives—and the reader’s expectations regarding gender. If the narrator omits information about the character’s gender, the reader finds clues in the text—social cues, behaviors, and actions—to fill in that information and assign one. Such moments activate literature’s potential
2: Matrilineal Narrative and the Feminist Family Romance from:
German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Heffernan Valerie
Abstract: Recent years have seen the publication in Germany of a vast number and array of multigenerational family narratives that look back to the turbulent history of the twentieth century. They look in particular to the family stories that are passed on from one generation to the next as a way of understanding and representing the past, and they also explore those that are kept secret or hidden from view and yet contribute to shaping the present. These narratives use the family as a prism through which to explore the residual impact of the historical events of the twentieth century, and
7: The Awkward Politics of Popfeminist Literary Events: from:
German Women's Writing in the Twenty-First Century
Author(s) Stehle Maria
Abstract: Since the mid-2000s there has been a marked uptick across the Western world of discussions surrounding the validity and effectiveness of feminism today.¹ Terms such as “postfeminism” or “lifestyle feminism” are increasingly used to characterize a popular interest in making feminism palatable through depoliticization, even as political actions are publicly evaluated as successes or failures on the basis of criteria more appropriate for their second-wave forebears. These discussions either brand feminist cultural production as successful activism against a sexist, mainstream, and consumerist culture, or condemn it as mere media sensation that points to the failure or ineffectuality of feminism today.
Book Title: Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): WALSH ANNE L.
Abstract: The writings of Arturo Pérez-Reverte, one of Spain's most renowned contemporary authors, have been described as a minefield. This monograph examines the complexities behind the narrative technique employed in creating such a minefield, including an analysis of the role played by both male and female characters, the relevance of the past as a motif, and aspects of the role of storytelling in creating mystery where none should exist. Both Revertian novels and journalistic writing are seen to be part of an over-all game which is played between their author and his readers. Film, too, forms part of the material reviewed as, though Pérez-Reverte is not a script writer, many films have been based on his novels. The text-centred analysis concludes that the themes of interest in all Revertian output revolve around two main areas: the significance of the past, whether historical, cultural, or literary, and the role of the written word in communicating, in rescuing and in challenging versions of that past in order to combat what Pérez-Reverte terms 'dismemory'. ANNE L. WALSH lectures in Hispanic Studies at University College, Cork.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdn6c
INTRODUCTION from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: When a reader becomes aware of having been fooled by one of those tricks, traps or false leads, the natural reaction is to try to understand why. A possible response may be to blame oneself
2 Characterisation: from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: ‘Todos miran como miro yo’ [They all look on the world as I do].¹ So states Arturo Pérez-Reverte in an interview in 2002. In this one sentence, he creates a link between author and created character that, as will be seen, has ramifications for how his novels may be interpreted. The dilemma faced by critically-aware readers is, we are told, that character and narrator and real author are not to be confused. They are separate entities, only one of which, namely the author, has any existence in real life. What happens, then, when characters in fiction exhibit traits that are
CONCLUSION from:
Arturo Pérez-Reverte: Narrative Tricks and Narrative Strategies
Abstract: The six chapters of this study have undertaken to examine the writings of Arturo Pérez-Reverte from a number of perspectives. Chapter 1 looked at the context of this writer, the various links between his work and that of other contemporary writers in Spain, the role of narrative, its importance in telling the stories of the past and the cultural status of narrative as a link with that past. Chapter 2 considered how Pérez-Reverte’s characters could be interpreted in a variety of ways, particularly as representations of his readers. The binary male–female opposition in that context becomes not a feminist
Book Title: Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident- Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): de Menezes Alison Ribeiro
Abstract: This monograph offers two new perspectives on Spanish writer, Juan Goytisolo. First, under the themes of authorship and dissidence, it integrates his writing across several genres, providing a rounded assessment of his contribution to cultural debates in Spain since the sixties and arguing that resistance to repressive discourses characterizes his essays and autobiographies as much as his fiction. Second, it revises the prevailing critical interpretation of Goytisolo's fiction by building on four premises: that his novels are less clearly oppositional than prevailing interpretations imply; that, in order to engage with discourses of identity, he employs an idiom which, contrary to his own statements, is not a poststructuralist autonomous world of words; that a textual practice grounded in the recognizable experience of post-Civil War Spain, rather than one which seeks out the realm of pure textuality, is essential to Goytisolo's subversive political intentions; and that the autobiographical element of much of his work constitutes a more complex narrative aesthetic than has been appreciated. The book argues that if Goytisolo's work is interpreted as an ethical engagement with postmodernist theory, rather than as an illustration of it, then certain contradictions for which he has been criticized are seen in a new and valuable light. ALISON RIBEIRO DE MENEZES is a Senior Lecturer in Spanish at University College Dublin.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.ctt9qdps1
1 AUTHORING THE SELF: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: If, for twentieth-century writers, the question of authorship and its relationship to the authority of a ‘writing subject’ has posed considerable problems, then writing the life of the self – encapsulated perfectly, if in reverse order, in the very term auto-bio-graphy – makes these issues even more acute. The practice of autobiography necessarily confers on the autobiographical text an implied truth value upon which the weight of contemporary theory since existentialism and structuralism has cast considerable doubt. Unmoored from the Cartesian certainties of consciousness, contemporary autobiography stages an interplay between facts and imaginative creativity, replacing the original ‘confessional’ status of
2 CANONIZING DISSIDENCE: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: Essay-writing is a flexible and subjective art. It ranges from reasoned intellectual argument to the travel essay, specializing, as Philip Lopate puts it, in misadventure, to the personal essay, which constitutes, in Samuel Johnson’s felicitous phrase, ‘a loose sally of the mind’.² To essay is to test out a position, and the essayist, according to Theodor Adorno, writes in full consciousness of the fragmentary nature of his art, seeking a utopian illumination through its practice yet acutely aware that his gesture can only ever be provisional and incomplete.³ For Adorno, the essay’s incompleteness is a mark of subversive thought, a
5 THE AUTHOR AS VOYEUR: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: A turn to the pictoral seems to characterize contemporary literary studies.² The late twentieth-century privileging of discourse, with its trend to read pictures and images as texts, seems now to have turned back upon itself, seeking the visual in the verbal, as well as vice versa.³ The roots of this might be traced to Foucault’s work on the panoptic gaze, but that, for him, was purely a surveillance act, and thus more restricted than the broad view of the visual that I wish to adopt here.⁴ Vision implies both to see and to be seen, but not necessarily in an
6 THE AUTHOR AS MYSTIC: from:
Juan Goytisolo: The Author as Dissident
Abstract: When
Las virtudes del pájaro solitariofirst appeared in 1988 the novel caused a certain sensation, its mystical theme taking readers by surprise. Research by Javier Escudero Rodríguez has since shown that this reaction was somewhat misplaced, given that an obsession with death and an emergent interest in mysticism can be traced in Goytisolo’s fiction to at least the time ofMakbara.² Indeed, looking back even further, we might recall from the discussion above (pp. 94–5) thatJuan sin Tierraopens with an allusion to Eastern mysticism, though, admittedly, a pejorative one. The appearance of a religious theme is
1: Nietzsche’s Early Writings from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Brobjer Thomas H.
Abstract: There is much extant material from and about the young and early Nietzsche, including large numbers of early poems, school essays, school records, general notes, etc. In fact, Nietzsche seems, of all the great philosophers and of all important nineteenth-century intellectu- als, to be the one about whom we have the most early extant material.¹ The German critical edition of Nietzsche’s writings covering the period after he became professor in Basel in 1869, the
Kritische Studienausgabe (KSA), consists of thirteen volumes (as well as two volumes of philo-logical commentary and chronology),of which six contain his published texts (along with a
3: Untimely Meditations from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Large Duncan
Abstract: The untimely meditations (
Unzeitgemässe Betrachtungen, 1873–76) are some of Nietzsche’s most neglected works. They have attracted the attentions of translators less often than most of his other, more celebrated books — Walter Kaufmann, the doyen of postwar American Nietzsche translators, never got round to translating them, and he goes so far as to suggest that they merit translating last of all.¹ They have attracted relatively little scholarly interest, too, and are omitted from the canon established by Robert C. Solomon and Kathleen Higgins in their Reading Nietzsche,² while the term “untimeliness” has routinely been passed over in Nietzsche dictionaries.³
11: Twilight of the Idols from:
A Companion to Friedrich Nietzsche
Author(s) Diethe Carol
Abstract: The great tragedy of Nietzsche’s mental breakdown is compounded by the fact that, by the time of his last year of sanity, he had severed his connections with those formerly nearest to him (Wagner, his mother Franziska, and his sister Elisabeth): he was free at last to concentrate on what he intended to publish as his
magnum opus , The Will to Power (Der Wille zur Macht). His sister, with whom he had had a fraught relationship ever since her involvement in his attempt at a rapprochement with Lou Salomé in 1882, had married the anti-Semitic agitator and Wagnerian acolyte
1 A Show of Generosity: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Bodenstein Felicity
Abstract: Who were these benefactors, how
3 Sydney Pavière and the Harris Museum and Art Gallery, Preston from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Gray Laura
Abstract: It sometimes happens that the character, as well as the actions, of a particular curator casts a long shadow within a museum or gallery. In
5 Women, Museums and the Problem of Biography from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Whitelaw Anne
Abstract: In the opening pages of
Biography: A Very Short Introduction, Hermione Lee describes the genre of biography through the striking metaphors of the autopsy and the portrait. A biography is like an autopsy because it literally opens up the individual to ‘investigate, understand, describe, and explain what may have seemed obscure, strange, or inexplicable’ (Lee 2009, 1). Conversely, the metaphor of the portrait suggests that biographies can capture the character of a subject, bringing a person to life through ‘attention to detail and skill in representation’ (Lee 2009, 2). Taken together, these metaphors underscore both the analytical and representational operations
9 Personifying the Museum: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Abt Jeffrey
Abstract: The subtitle of Bayle St John’s 1855 book
The Louvre, or, Biography of a Museum, telegraphed the Englishman’s humanisation of the museum’s history and collections so that it would be ‘interesting even to readers who have never seen it’. Although he did not intend to treat the Louvre as a ‘personified institution’, St John hoped a biographical approach might prove more attractive to a potential readership (St John 1885, v–vi, 2). St John’s use of ‘biography’ to characterise his approach was novel and followed by just a year the earliest deployment of the word for writings about subjects other
10 Making an Exhibition of Ourselves from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Leahy Helen Rees
Abstract: In recent years, museums have staged a number of ‘exhibitions of exhibitions’. These experiments in institutional, curatorial and artistic revivalism have ranged from allusions to, and quotations from, past installations to full-scale re-enactments and reconstructions (Greenberg 2009). Some have reproduced assemblages that were first exhibited two centuries ago, while others have remounted exhibitions from the recent past. The motivations of the curators and artists responsible for these diverse projects have included the desire to mark famous anniversaries, to recuperate long-forgotten shows, to examine the effects of different modes of display and spectatorship, and to construct an archive of the immaterial
13 ‘Dressed like an Amazon’: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Françozo Mariana
Abstract: In 2000, the Brazilian Ministry of Culture prepared and organised an exhibition commemorating the 500th anniversary of the arrival of Europeans on the South American continent. Located at the Ibirapuera Park in the city of São Paulo, the exhibition was called ‘Mostra do Redescobrimento’ (‘Rediscovery Exhibit’) and aimed at showcasing a wide variety of examples of Brazilian art, including Portuguese–Brazilian, African–Brazilian, Amerindian, Baroque and Popular Art.² For this occasion, the Danish National Museum agreed to lend a particularly rare artefact that was produced during the first century of colonial contacts: a 1.2m-long, 60cm-wide red feather coat, most likely
14 Individual, Collective and Institutional Biographies: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Carreau Lucie
Abstract: Ethnographic collections housed in museums are, in theory, no different from any other collections of arts or crafts. They are made of objects assembled by a collector with a particular motive, in a particular historical and cultural context. In practice, however, ethnographic collections tell a very different story.
18 National History as Biography: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Stara Alexandra
Abstract: Alexandre Lenoir’s Museum of French Monuments in Paris (1795–1816) began life as a temporary depot during the French Revolution, sheltering artefacts salvaged from nationalised church, royal and aristocratic property. Following Lenoir’s dogged pursuit of his cause, the depot was eventually turned into a public museum that fused emerging ideas about art, history and personality, enhanced with the flair of Lenoir’s creative curation, to produce a unique representation of France. Unlike the model of the great museums, which was developing nearby in the high-profile Louvre and was to become the norm in the 19th century, the Museum of Monuments presented
19 Autobiographical Museums from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Nemec Belinda
Abstract: Although it can be argued that all personal collecting is an exercise in self-expression and identity-formation, not all personal collecting is autobiographical. Conversely, some highly personal collections, dwellings or environments arranged for the purpose of permanent public display were not dubbed ‘museums’ by their creators but can be characterised as autobiographical
21 Community Biographies: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Crooke Elizabeth
Abstract: This chapter is an exploration of community projects in which members have been engaged in writing their own histories. In the examples cited, oral history and photographs are used as building blocks to tell community stories and are eventually the basis of community collections, archives or exhibitions. In this chapter these initiatives are interpreted as acts of community autobiography – they are a means for groups to research, construct and disseminate their histories for themselves. The examples discussed in this chapter were developed with the assistance of local museums or other learning bodies, and the analysis is based upon discussions
Endpiece: from:
Museums and Biographies
Author(s) Preziosi Donald
Abstract: A clear awareness of the reality of our own finitude being a possibly unbearable source of anxiety, we may at times be tempted to actually believe in our own immortality. Autobiographic, biographic and museographic possibilities for after-lives seduce us into imagining the constraints of the real being eliminated if we keep a tense yet measured distance – a coy similitude or a pantographic relationship – toward our (self) image. As epistemological technologies of virtual space, museums and collections keep the real at a manageable distance in the face of anxieties. The ego’s habitation in museological space opened up by its
III Two Transitional Novels: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: El siglo(1983) is an unabashedly stylized novel. Its narrative technique (alternating chapters told in the first and third persons), its complicated sentence structure (largely baroque-like), and the slow pacing of its plot stand in marked contrast to Marías’s earlier novels,Los dominios del loboandTravesía del horizonte.¹ In the latter two works, as we have seen, Marías moves deftly but swiftly through multiple stories with sometimes tenuous connections. He rarely slows to allow for the development of complex characters, and he shapes the perspective of each novel largely through thirdperson narrators who may not possess sufficient information to
IV On Oxford, Redonda, and the Practice of Reading: from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: The two novels explored in this chapter,
Todas las almas(1989) (All Souls‚ 1992) andNegra espalda del tiempo(1998) (Dark Back of Time, 2001), are two of the most intimately linked of all of Marías’s works of fiction.¹ This intimacy obtains on many levels, even though nine years passed between the publication of the two works, and despite the fact that Marías wrote two other novels in the intervening period,Corazón tan blanco(1992) (A Heart So White, 1995) andMañana en la batalla piensa en mí(1994) (Tommorow in the Battle Think on Me, 1996). To a large
VI Tu rostro mañana from:
A Companion to Javier Marías
Abstract: Tu rostro mañanais best understood as a three-volume novel rather than three novels sutured together to form a trilogy.¹ Published over a period of five years (2002–2007), it tells the story of Jaime Deza, who first appears as narrator and main character of Marías’s 1989 novelTodas las almasand who narrates each of the three volumes ofRostro. Deza thus provides the “thread of continuity” in the narrative that Marías envisions as a critical part of lives and stories, an idea first asserted by the narrator ofMañana en la batalla piensa en míand echoed by
Book Title: Thomas King-Works and Impact
Publisher: Boydell & Brewer
Author(s): Gruber Eva
Abstract: Thomas King is one of North America's foremost Native writers, best known for his novels, including 'Green Grass, Running Water', for the 'DreadfulWater' mysteries, and for collections of short stories such as 'One Good Story, That One' and 'A Short History of Indians in Canada.' But King is also a poet, a literary and cultural critic, and a noted filmmaker, photographer, and scriptwriter and performer for radio. His career and oeuvre have been validated by literary awards and by the inclusion of his writing in college and university curricula. Critical responses to King's work have been abundant, yet most of this criticism consists of journal articles, and to date only one book-length study of his work exists. 'Thomas King: Works and Impact' fills this gap by providing an up-to-date, comprehensive overview of all major aspects of King's oeuvre as well as its reception and influence. It brings together expert scholars to discuss King's role in and impact on Native literature and to offer in-depth analyses of his multifaceted body of work. The volume will be of interest to students and scholars of literature, English, and Native American studies, and to King aficionados. Contributors: Jesse Rae Archibald-Barber, Julia Breitbach, Stuart Christie, James H. Cox, Marta Dvorak, Floyd Favel, Kathleen Flaherty, Aloys Fleischmann, Marlene Goldman, Eva Gruber, Helen Hoy, Renée Hulan and Linda Warley, Carter Meland, Reingard M. Nischik, Robin Ridington, Suzanne Rintoul, Katja Sarkowsky, Blanca Schorcht, Mark Shackleton, Martin Kuester and Marco Ulm, Doris Wolf. Eva Gruber is Assistant Professor in the Department of American Studies at the University of Constance, Germany.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7722/j.cttn34mb
3: “Turtles All the Way Down”: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Ridington Robin
Abstract: I first encountered thomas king at a conference he organized at the University of Lethbridge in 1985, the year his supervisory committee judged his PhD thesis to be “satisfactory.” The conference, “The Native in Literature,” was a lively gathering of First Nations scholars, creative artists, and assorted critics. Stories emanating from the ladies’ washrooms extolled the conference organizer’s good looks and charisma. “This man may be a professor of Native Studies at a Canadian university,” I thought, “but he’s also a wily and beguiling coyote.” Conference participants included critics Terry Goldie, Katherine Shanley (then Vangen), Jarold Ramsey, and Barbara Godard,
8: “Coyote Conquers the Campus”: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Archibald-Barber Jesse Rae
Abstract: King’s importance to indigenous literatures is well established throughout Canada and the United States, and he is one of the bestknown Cherokee authors outside of North America. In his essays and fiction, King often challenges Western stereotypes of Indigenous peoples and provides literary concepts, characters, symbols, and narratives that more accurately represent the complex context of Indigenous literatures. Indeed, King’s works have been groundbreaking for the study of Indigenous issues not only in Canadian society, but also as they relate to colonial histories in countries around the world. However, although King’s works are often taught in schools, it is difficult
13: Maps, Borders, and Cultural Citizenship: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Sarkowsky Katja
Abstract: As numerous critics have pointed out, literal and metaphorical maps and mapping “are dominant practices of colonial and postcolonial cultures” (Ashcroft, Griffith, and Tiffin 2007, 28). Maps are a form of representation (“representational space,” as W. H. New has called them in
Land Sliding), a construction of spatial relations and imagination, a form of control over space in the context of colonialism. But maps are also deployed as a strategy to counter hegemonic models of space. This is a central aspect for postcolonial societies, in which colonial inscriptions, for instance through cartography, are challenged and deconstructed in literary texts.
14: One Good Protest: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Cox James H.
Abstract: Thomas king published major works prior to and simultaneously with a shift in the primary focus of American Indian literary critical inquiry from issues of culture and identity to questions of history and politics. Much of the early scholarship on King’s fiction, therefore, approaches it with an interest in identities and storytelling strategies and assesses its cultural, multicultural, and crosscultural character. The attention to American Indian intellectual, activist, and tribal nation specific histories by Osage scholar Robert Warrior (1995), Cherokee scholar Jace Weaver (1997), and Muscogee Creek and Cherokee scholar Craig Womack (1999) shapes more recent critical work, for example,
15: “Sometimes It Works and Sometimes It Doesn’t”: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Rintoul Suzanne
Abstract: Much of the criticism on Thomas King’s fiction focuses on border crossing, and rightly so: national boundaries, town lines, bridges, rivers, and myriad other signs point to in-between spaces where King renegotiates hierarchical binaries. The role of gender in relation to this motif, though, remains underexplored. King’s texts are full of gender-ambiguous characters, some of whom harness the power to revise the dominant discourses of Empire, but discussions of gender have nevertheless taken the proverbial backseat to discussions of race.¹ This is surprising, given that the intersectionality of race and gender has been well established in feminist and postcolonial theory
16: Storytelling in Different Genres: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Gruber Eva
Abstract: TK: When they translated
Medicine River into French, there was a point when one character calls the other character a fruit, and basically it’s a slang term for queer,
21: Dead Dog Café: from:
Thomas King
Author(s) Favel Floyd
Abstract: Dead Dog Café. The success of this radio program is what could be called a cultural phenomenon, as it was an unexpected hit despite its low budget, a political climate where instead of the action of the Oka crisis we were numbed by the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, and the show’s content and style. The program seemed to connect to a common goodness and sensibility of the general Canadian population and to meet the tastes of listeners to CBC radio and some Native radio stations, in particular to CHON FM in the Yukon. This was a surprise to me,
Book Title: Fighting For Time-Shifting Boundaries of Work and Social Life
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Kalleberg Arne L.
Abstract: Though there are still just twenty-four hours in a day, society’s idea of who should be doing what and when has shifted. Time, the ultimate scarce resource, has become an increasingly contested battle zone in American life, with work, family, and personal obligations pulling individuals in conflicting directions. In Fighting for Time, editors Cynthia Fuchs Epstein and Arne Kalleberg bring together a team of distinguished sociologists and management analysts to examine the social construction of time and its importance in American culture. Fighting for Time opens with an exploration of changes in time spent at work—both when people are on the job and the number of hours they spend there—and the consequences of those changes for individuals and families. Contributors Jerry Jacobs and Kathleen Gerson find that the relative constancy of the average workweek in America over the last thirty years hides the fact that blue-collar workers are putting in fewer hours while more educated white-collar workers are putting in more. Rudy Fenwick and Mark Tausig look at the effect of nonstandard schedules on workers’ health and family life. They find that working unconventional hours can increase family stress, but that control over one’s work schedule improves family, social, and health outcomes for workers. The book then turns to an examination of how time influences the organization and control of work. The British insurance company studied by David Collinson and Margaret Collinson is an example of a culture where employees are judged on the number of hours they work rather than on their productivity. There, managers are under intense pressure not to take legally guaranteed parental leave, and clocks are banned from the office walls so that employees will work without regard to the time. In the book’s final section, the contributors examine how time can have different meanings for men and women. Cynthia Fuchs Epstein points out that professional women and stay-at-home fathers face social disapproval for spending too much time on activities that do not conform to socially prescribed gender roles—men are mocked by coworkers for taking paternity leave, while working mothers are chastised for leaving their children to the care of others. Fighting for Time challenges assumptions about the relationship between time and work, revealing that time is a fluid concept that derives its importance from cultural attitudes, social psychological processes, and the exercise of power. Its insight will be of interest to sociologists, economists, social psychologists, business leaders, and anyone interested in the work-life balance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610441872
Chapter 5 Temporal Depth, Age, and Organizational Performance from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Ferris Stephen P.
Abstract: The first author once toured a manufacturing plant in the United States that was owned and operated by a Japanese company. After guiding him on the tour, the facility’s Japanese manager said, “I have an advantage over my American counterparts: they are expected to show a profit every quarter, but I have years to develop this business before my company expects my operation to be profitable.” The comment could have come from the pages of William Ouchi’s best-seller,
Theory Z(1981), which proposed, as did this Japanese businessman, that a long-term perspective gives companies a competitive advantage. Indeed, John Kotter
Chapter 8 The Power of Time: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Collinson Margaret
Abstract: The analytical significance of time has long been recognized in the natural science writings of Galileo, Newton, and Einstein and in the philosophical tracts of Heidegger, Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche, among others. Indeed an awareness of a past, a present, and a future, and of the finiteness of life are central features of human existence (Berger and Luckmann 1967). Human beings find meaning and identity in the temporal character of existence (Urry 1991, Collinson 2003). Yet it is only relatively recently that the importance of time has been acknowledged in theories of society (Giddens 1979, 1984, 1987; Adam 1990; Harvey 1990;
Chapter 9 Gender, Work, and Time: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Levin Peter
Abstract: During a lull following an extremely busy morning of futures trading on the floor of the American Commodities Exchange (ACE),¹ Nancy, a woman clerk at a large international bank, approached the trading pit and, angrily but matter-of-factly, told Carl, a broker, that he’d “better watch out if you’re going to pick off my orders.” This was a suggestion that Carl had been watching the woman use hand signals to relay her orders into the trading pit, and then, knowing what the bank intended to do, had traded ahead of those orders. It is an unethical and potentially illegal practice.
Chapter 11 Border Crossings: from:
Fighting For Time
Author(s) Epstein Cynthia Fuchs
Abstract: How do we account for the constraints faced by women and men who wish to move beyond the boundaries of their traditional sex and gender roles in contemporary society? Despite the opportunities for change made possible by advocates for equality, liberating technological advances, and changes in the law, women find it difficult to move upward through glass ceilings and men find it difficult to moderate time commitments at work to take on childcare responsibilities in the home. Ideologies and institutionalized practices in the workplace and the community form obstacles to breaking down boundaries. Among them are time ideologies and the
Book Title: After Parsons-A Theory of Social Action for the Twenty-First Century
Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Rather than simply celebrating Parsons and his accomplishments, the contributors to
After Parsonsrethink and reformulate his ideas to place them on more solid foundations, extend their scope, and strengthen their empirical insights.After Parsonsconstitutes the work of a distinguished roster of American and European sociologists who find Parsons' theory of action a valuable resource for addressing contemporary issues in sociological theory. All of the essays in this volume take elements of Parsons' theory and critique, adapt, refine, or extend them to gain fresh purchase on problems that confront sociologists today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610442152
Chapter 2 Looming Catastrophe: from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Gould Mark
Abstract: The inability of scholars and practitioners in the field of law and economics to conceptualize the value commitments that characterize professional responsibility, their expectation that all actors will act opportunistically in situations of imperfect information, and their commitment to private ordering and the undermining of legal rules have weakened severely the duties of care and loyalty that ground corporate law. Should we be surprised that corporate officers fail to put shareholder and firm interests above their own (the duty of loyalty) and that they fail to adhere to transparent processes providing shareholders and other stakeholders sufficient information to make independent
Chapter 4 Affect in Social Life from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Bershady Harold J.
Abstract: Talcott Parsons conceived the idea of the generalized symbolic media of interchange in his later work. The very large question or set of questions this idea was designed to answer is this: What are the contributions each subsystem of society makes to the functioning of each of the other subsystems? A well-developed answer to this question, he believed, would provide action theory with an analysis of dynamic processes more comprehensive and rigorous than had so far been achieved.
Chapter 10 Rationalists, Fetishists, and Art Lovers: from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Tanner Jeremy
Abstract: This chapter deals with two key issues in the sociology of art, the social construction of the role of the artist and the nature of high culture. It poses the question of how they might be approached differently than they are in currently popular approaches, and attempts to answer it by using the comparative and evolutionary perspective advocated by Parsons as part of action theory. I will briefly sketch the state of play in contemporary sociology of the artist and high culture, and the set of concepts and models from within action theory that I will use to approach these
Chapter 14 What Do American Bioethics and Médecins Sans Frontières Have in Common? from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Fox Renée C.
Abstract: During the past ten years I have been involved in two major research projects. One of them is a study of the emergence of the young field of bioethics in the United States—its origins, ethos, and progressive institutionalization, and its civic as well as medical import in American society.¹ The other is a still-ongoing examination of medical humanitarian and human rights witnessing action—its underlying ideology and value commitments, the moral dilemmas it entails, and its (unintended as well as intended) consequences. This is being done chiefly through the medium of a sociological case study of Médecins Sans Frontières
Chapter 15 “Social Evolution” in the Light of the Human-Condition Paradigm from:
After Parsons
Author(s) Lidz Victor M.
Abstract: Talcott Parsons’s method of developing theory involved repeated revision of even basic concepts (Lidz 2000). His conception of the action frame of reference, for example, first formulated in
The Structure of Social Action(Parsons 1937), was revised in the manuscriptActor, Situation and Normative Patterntwo years later (Parsons 1939), and again inToward a General Theory of Action(Parsons and Shils 1951), resulting in the now familiar triad of the cognitive, cathectic, and moral-evaluative dimensions of action. The 1951 formulation was in turn revised with the introduction of the four-function paradigm in theWorking Papers in the Theory of
Book Title: Approaches to Social Theory- Publisher: Russell Sage Foundation
Author(s): NOWAK STEFAN
Abstract: The W. I. Thomas and Florian Znaniecki Memorial Conference on Social Theory, held at the University of Chicago, brought together an outstanding array of scholars representing a variety of contending approaches to social theory. In panels, presentations, and general discussions, these scholars confronted one another in the context of an entire range of approaches. But as readers of this deftly edited collection will discover, the conference was more than a forum for abstract theoretical debate. These papers and discussions represent original scholarly contributions that exemplify orientations to social theory by examining real problems in the functioning of society-from large-scale economic growth and decline to the dynamics of interpersonal interaction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7758/9781610443616
Prologue from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) ADAMS ROBERT McCORMICK
Abstract: Although it may be only an aspect of what Thomas Kuhn has suggested as the developmental path of any normal science, there is a worrisome drift in the social sciences away from an involvement with overarching issues and toward further specialization and progressively more detailed problem-solving. More disturbingly, a matter-of-fact acceptance of a limited and largely one-way relationship between producers of social science and their consumers, supporters, and observers is gradually taking root. Basic disciplinary premises and priorities are assumed to be fairly static rather than subject to active questioning and reshaping. Disciplinary boundaries that are best kept indefinite and
The Development of Scholasticism from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) STINCHCOMBE ARTHUR L.
Abstract: My general argument is that the development of sociology as a discipline led us systematically away from the study of humans acting in society. The higher the prestige of a piece of sociological work, the fewer people in it are sweaty, laughing, ugly or pretty, dull at parties, or have warts on their noses. Field work is the lowest status in methodology, because surprising humans keep popping out and bewildering us by doing things we do not understand; much better to have people answering closedended questions so that they fall neatly into cross-classifications to be analyzed by loglinear methods. Similarly,
Academic Market, Ideology, and the Growth of Scientific Knowledge: from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) BEN-DAVID JOSEPH
Abstract: Sociology of knowledge was very popular in continental European sociology during the 1920s and 1930s, went into almost complete oblivion during and after World War II, to reappear again with added force about 1970 (Curtis & Petras 1970; Fuhrman 1980; Hamilton 1974; Merton 1973; Remmling 1967; Stark 1958). This recent interest in the sociology of knowledge has been distinguished from prewar sociology of knowledge by three characteristics: (1) the field is now as popular in Britain as on the continent of Europe and has many adherents also in the United States; (2) it also claims as its domain science, a
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Harrison White:In describing the fierce competition of the new German university system, Ben-David spoke of the fact that one of the things going for the experimentalists was, after all, that they were doing lab work, and he seemed to take it for granted that lab work was more communicable. I found that a fascinating puzzle because in my own experience, lab work is one of the least communicable things in the world. It is not at all easy to replicate experimental work or lab work. I would argue that the advantage of experimentalists is a paradox. You have to
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) BURT RONALD S.
Abstract: Laumann and Knoke offer four interesting ideas or results. (1) They distinguish ways in which issues are linked through social structure. Issues can be perceived to be substantively similar and so be linked in content. Issues can involve the same participants and so be linked through the people active in them. Issues can have
The California Gold Rush: from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) OBERSCHALL ANTHONY
Abstract: This paper will provide an example of how to account for social structure by means of transaction costs. Transaction costs refer to the costs of interaction and of exchange itself, such as the costs of collecting information on interaction partners and on the commodity or action that is exchanged, the costs of negotiating an agreement or contract and of monitoring its implementation, and the actual enforcement costs of the agreement. Transaction costs exist because human beings’ rationality is bounded, not least by the time and effort of collecting and processing information; because some people are opportunists who violate trust and
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) BLAU PETER M.
Abstract: Oberschall starts his paper by emphasizing that recent developments in economics have overcome the limitations of the assumption of unbounded rationality of neoclassical economic theory. Specifically, by taking transaction costs into account, it is possible for economics—and by implication for sociology-to maintain the model of rational choice without ignoring or neglecting the external social conditions that restrain human action and that explain why it is not based on purely rational self-interest. The body of Oberschall’s paper uses a discussion of the California gold rush in the years around 1850 to illustrate this claim.
The Ecology of Organizations: from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) FREEMAN JOHN
Abstract: Human ecology seeks to explain the forms of human social systems and their development (Hawley 1968). It directs attention primarily to the ways in which environmental conditions interact with internal processes of development to shape the forms of social organizations. In so doing, it attempts to understand the forces that control the diversity of forms of social organization.
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) KITSUSE JOHN
Abstract: Having noted this theoretical solidarity, I would like to comment on some of the issues Gusfield touches upon in his characterization of what he refers to as “interpretive sociology.” It may be helpful to frame these comments with a quotation from Richard Zaner, a philosopher of the phenomenological persuasion. He says,
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Joseph Gusjield:Phenomenology has often been criticized for doing away with any kind of definitive statement that one can make about what is happening and consequently reducing the role of the observer to reporting on what he finds from his relationship to subjects. I am very reluctant to take away from sociologists the kind of activity that tries to give some sense of what are the consequences of actions. What I have been admonishing here (and I do find a link between the interpretive sociology, the phenomenologists, and the symbolic interactionists) is to get as close as we can to
Firm and Market Interfaces of Profit Center Control from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) WHITE HARRISON C.
Abstract: Large American manufacturing firms have widely adopted some form of decentralization or divisionalization in past decades (Chandler 1962; Vancil 1979; Haspeslagh 1983). Why? Our argument will be a crosssectional one; it explains, without depending on imitation or history, why decentralization makes sense here and now for current executives of large manufacturing firms. Our argument also is a structuralist one: For both the innovators and later adopters, divisionalization must be interpreted with special reference to the context of what the other firms in a sector of the economy were doing.
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) PADGEIT JOHN
Abstract: Ever since the pioneering empirical work of Alfred Chandler, the investigation of multidivisional firms has been transforming our understanding of what organizations are and of how they operate. Williamson began the theoretical task by undermining the classical Weberian dichotomy between markets and hierarchies. Through his transaction cost analysis of contracting systems, Williamson underlined the fact that current business management is a mixture of market and hierarchy principles. Hybrid organizational forms such as diversification, profit centers, performance evaluation, transfer pricing, subcontracting, joint ventures, and conglomerates all point to the pervasiveness both of profit-oriented exchange relations within economic units and of overtly
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: Robert Eccles:There are three different things we want to explain: the proliferation of divisionalized form, the existence of portfolio planning, and the transfer pricing practices that exist. In the classic way of thinking about it, firms really don’t need to divisionalize, and yet many do just that. The existence
Language Structure and Social Structure from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) LABOV WILLIAM
Abstract: The past three decades have witnessed a great deal of scholarly activity under the label of “sociolinguistics.”¹ Yet the barrier between sociology and linguistics remains as firm as ever. In their studies of speech communities, linguists have as often as not tried to create their own sociology, with curious results; and a vanishingly small number of sociologists have made use of the tools of linguistic analysis.² On the sociological side, this is not too severe a limitation. A great deal of important work has been done in the sociology of language where the data take the form “X speaks language
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) GRIMSHAW ALLEN
Abstract: William Labov has used a background which includes training in both “autonomous linguistics” and sociological methods and theory to contribute to our understanding of core issues in both disciplines. His past work has included both macro studies of phenomena of stratification (and mobility) and linguistic and social change; much of this research has employed analyses of results of extensive surveys of phonological production. He has also done micro studies of social interactional processes and rules; this research has attended to a variety of features of speech (phonological, syntactic, prosodic) in “comprehensive discourses analyses.” Labov started his paper by observing that
Modeling Symbolic Interaction from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) HEISE DAVID R.
Abstract: Symbolic interactionism (e.g., McCall & Simmons 1978; Stryker 1980) provides insights into how humans understand social events. Definitions of situations categorize settings and the people in them, narrowing a person’s attention to a constrained range of phenomena, a restricted set of identities and objects that guide understanding and anticipation of social events. Events are created and interpreted to confirm the situational meanings provided by the definition of the situation. People create events to establish identities, to maintain identities, and to restore damaged identities. Expectations for another’s behavior reflect his or her identity, and if an observed event does not confirm
Comment from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) STRODTBECK FRED L.
Abstract: My guess is that many of you have similar reactions to Heise’s micro social model. For this reason, a part of my task is to be sure
General Discussion from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Abstract: James Coleman:I want to reinforce a point that Michael Hechter made, because it seems to me so important, given you are the author of this piece. It has to do with the logic of collective action. Consider the sentence in your paper: “The only way a distributional coalition can retain its value over several generations is by restricting the children of members of marriages with one another or by disinheriting a large number of the children.” Or, “endogamy, which is necessary” to the guild’s continuation.” You are treating collectivities as actors. In other words, you have engaged in exactly
Micro Foundations and Macrosocial Theory from:
Approaches to Social Theory
Author(s) COLEMAN JAMES S.
Abstract: One of the few benefits that comes with organizing a conference is the freedom to break rules. like a policeman going through a red light, it’s not exactly right, but there’s no one to tell you it’s wrong.
Book Title: Promises of 1968-Crisis, Illusion and Utopia
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): TISMANEANU VLADIMIR
Abstract: This book is a state of the art reassessment of the significance and consequences of the events associated with the year 1968 in Europe and in North America. Since 1998, there hasn’t been any collective, comparative and interdisciplinary effort to discuss 1968 in the light of both contemporary headways of scholarship and new evidence on this historical period. A significant departure from earlier approaches lies in the fact that the manuscript is constructed in unitary fashion, as it goes beyond the East–West divide, trying to identify the common features of the sixties. The latter are analyzed as simultaneously global and local developments. The main problems addressed by the contributors of this volume are: the sixties as a generational clash; the redefinition of the political as a consequence of the ideological challenges posed to the status-quo by the sixty-eighters; the role of Utopia and the de-radicalization of intellectuals; the challenges to imperialism (Soviet/American); the cultural revolution of the sixties; the crisis of ‘really existing socialism’ and the failure of “socialism with a human face”; the gradual departure from the Yalta-system; the development of a culture of human rights and the project of a global civil society; the situation of 1968 within the general evolution of European history (esp. the relationship of 1968 with 1989). In contrast to existing books, the book provides a fundamental and unique synthesis of approaches on 1968: first, it contains critical (vs. nostalgic) re-evaluations of the events from the part of significant sixty-eighters; second, it includes historical analyses based on new archival research; third, it gathers important theoretical re-assessments of the intellectual history of the 1968; and fourth, it bridges 1968 with its aftermath and its pre-history, thus avoiding an over-contextualization of the topics in question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1281xt
In Search of a New Left from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Howard Dick
Abstract: Officially, I left the University of Texas for Paris in the summer of 1966 as a fulbright scholar. What I wanted in fact to learn was how to make a revolution—or at least to understand the Marxist theory that had been identified with this skill. I had taken part in the civil rights movement, and demonstrated against the war in Vietnam; but both of these movements seemed to be caught in the trap of using the language of liberalism against the liberal system. What was needed instead, it seemed, was a framework that would permit a radical transformation of
Thinking Politically: from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Craiutu Aurelian
Abstract: As raymond aron pointed out in his memoirs, his reflections on 1968 have made him, almost against his will, a political actor rather than merely a committed observer.¹ one of france’s most prominent public intellectuals, aron wrote a number of important articles on the events of may–June 1968 in france in Le Figaro and devoted an entire book to this issue entitled La Révolution introuvable.² although aron’s book had a rather narrow scope and focus, it elicited contradictory interpretations and, to use serge audier’s phrase, gave birth to many
“aronismes imaginaires.”³
The Prague Spring 1968: from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Pehe Jiři
Abstract: Various interpretations of the period of political and economic liberalization in communist Czechoslovakia in 1968, known as the Prague spring, often tell us more about the difficulties of today’s Czech Republic in dealing with its complicated past than about the Prague spring itself. When the fortieth anniversary of the Soviet-led invasion that ended the Prague spring was commemorated in the Czech Republic on August 21, 2008, politicians, analysts, and historians all struggled with explaining not only what actually happened in 1968, but what the legacy of the Prague spring should be today.
1968 Romania: from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Vasile Critsian
Abstract: My paper examines the relationship between Romanian intellectuals and Ceauşescu’s regime, with a particular emphasis on the late 1960s.It explores some of the reasons for the absence of a solid reform movement oriented towards a dissident Marxism, and capable of defying the neo-stalinist tendencies of the Romanian Communist Party (RCP) power-holders. With this purpose in mind, I will also analyze the 1968 political and ideological actions of some important figures of the romanian intelligentsia.
Betrayed Promises: from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Iacob Bogdan
Abstract: There are moments in history that indelibly mark the memories of their contemporaries. The balcony scene on August 21, 1968, when Nicolae Ceauşescu, general secretary of the RCP, addressed a crowd of over 100,000 from the Central Committee building in one of Bucharest’s main squares and vehemently condemned the invasion of Czechoslovakia a few hours after the Warsaw Pact intervention, a scene that became a national-communist legend, was eulogized by many as a gesture of heroic proportions: the Romanian david valiantly defying the Soviet Goliath. it was in fact nothing but a skillful masquerade, but it worked: a power-obsessed neo-Stalinist
1968 and the Terrorist Aftermath in West Germany from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Herf Jeffrey
Abstract: “1968,” like “1917” and “1945,” was one of the three key Hegelian moments in the history of twentieth-century Communism not only in Europe, but around the world.¹ That is, it was a moment in which parts of the international communist movement became convinced that the actual course of events was conforming to their understanding of a historical teleology pointing toward the fulfillment of revolutionary aspirations. The two previous Hegelian moments, the Bolshevik
coup d’état of October 1917 and the red Army’s role in the defeat of Nazi Germany in May 1945, convinced the radical left that history was progressing along
The Prague Spring: from:
Promises of 1968
Author(s) Zaslavsky Victor
Abstract: The Prague Spring represented a multilevel conflict between conservative and reformist groups that exploded simultaneously within both the soviet bloc and the international communist movement. Newly available documentation from the Russian State Archive of Contemporary History (hereafter referred to by the Russian acronym RGANI) as well as the archive of the Gramsci institute (Rome) makes it possible to analyze the conflict between the Communist Party of the Soviet Union (CPSU) and the Italian Communist Party (PCI) over the 1968 invasion of Czechoslovakia by the armed forces of five Warsaw Pact members, a conflict that subsequently led to the emergence of
[Part I Introduction] from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: It was in late December 1985 when my old friend Diana Gergova called me over the phone, and asked to meet her urgently. We had been inseparable since the 1960s in high school, and later as history students at the University of Sofia. At the time of the call, I was associate professor of Balkan history at the University of Sofia, and Diana was a research fellow at the Archeological Institute at the Bulgarian Academy of Sciences. She acted also as party secretary of the institute.¹ She immediately came to the point: my father, at that moment acting as vice
4. A Socialist Public Sphere? from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: At first glance, Khaitov’s geopolitical confabulations might serve to delegitimize his general credibility. But one shouldn’t apportion too much guilt by association. Khaitov’s general motivations and his onslaught on the archeologists should be taken apart. His whole worldview, his
de factoreligion and deepest personal attachments were centered around nationalism, and he had devoted himself to rectifying what he thought of as the assimilationist and de-nationalizing tendencies of communism, and after 1989, of globalization. The discussion with the archeologists was not his invention. He picked up an existing debate and turned it into a public event. That he succeeded in
5. “Professionals” and “Dilettantes” from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: When speaking of the BAN debates as Turner’s redressive phase, what is peculiar about the Bulgarian case is that the whole framework upon which the redressive mechanism was based was itself in a legitimacy crisis from the mid-1980s on. By the 1990s it had completely collapsed and this is probably the most salient explanation why the redressive machinery did not “fix” the problem. What the BAN debates did demonstrate, however, is that “it is in the redressive phase that both pragmatic techniques and symbolic action reach their fullest expression.”
218
[Part II Introduction] from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: In the summer of 1998, I visited the artist Todor Tsonev, who had become famous after 1989 with his exhibition of cartoons of Todor Zhivkov that he had painted during communism, one of the very few cases where the expectation of a “closet full of masterpieces” that were cached away from the forbidding eyes of censorship actually was vindicated. Maria Ovcharova, his close friend and collaborator and a scholar in her own right, had organized this exhibit after 1989, and it triggered enormous interest. For a brief period of time Tsonev became the hero of democracy, the notion which in
3. A Banner for All Causes: from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: The voluminous body of scholarly work on Vasil Levski, among which some genuine and masterly contributions stand out, is focused entirely on the historical figure and its activities. The first and only analysis of Levski’s posthumous fate is Genchev’s chapter on “Vasil Levski in the Bulgarian historical memory,” which he published in his 1987 book on Levski. In it, Genchev makes an attempt to explain the abrupt turn in the Levski discourse after the Balkan Wars and the First World War. He contends that history itself vindicated Levski’s ideas. The reason for this, according to Genchev, is the critical reassessment
5. The Literary and Visual Hypostases of the Hero from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: For a long time the “novelization” of Levski was resisted. Vazov’s
oeuvreintroduced the fictional genre in the treatment of Levski (both in his poetic ode as well as the short stories), but the latter somehow acquired the status of documentary evidence in public perception, although Vazov had never (and did not pretend) to have met and known Levski. Levski’s biographer Stoianov also had never met Levski and suffered profoundly from this “deficiency.” His first attempt at biography (moving away from the memoirist genre) was Levski, and he was adamant that it was true to facticity and resisted the temptations
1. The Split, or How a Bicephalous Organism Functions from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: The birthday of the split was May 25, 1992 when Metodi Spasov—the then director of the Office of Religious Affairs (ORA), an agency directly under the cabinet of ministers—issued decree No. 92 declaring Patriarch Maxim and his Holy Synod illegitimate, and appointing in its place a new Holy Synod under Metropolitan Pimen as its
pro temporepresident. This act legitimized the internal secession of five metropolitans a week earlier, who had announced the formation of a new Synod headed by Metropolitan Pimen of Nevrokop. Spasov’s decision rested on the argument that Maxim’s election in 1971, in the climate
2. The Canonization and Its Implications from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: This, then, is the background against which the elevation of Levski to a sanctified status has to be understood. To reverse the popular definition of historical background as the limbo inhabited by people who do not really interest us, it is precisely the inhabitants of this limbo who capture the attention in this story. For the clergy of the alternative Synod, the canonization was a move that, for the first time, propelled their activities out of the heretofore exclusively political field, and into the cultural field. Was this a deliberately calculated and carefully staged act intended to exploit a powerful
5. Commemoration, Ritual, and the Sacred from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: How do we begin to think about all of this? What is the proper framework of interpretation? One may be tempted to see the phenomenon of Levski’s present veneration and canonization fall under the rubric of what Katherine Verdery calls “the political lives of dead bodies” in post–socialist Eastern Europe or, more aptly and wittily, in the first version of her manuscript, as “post-socialist necrophilia.” Verdery tried to make sense of the hectic activity around dead bodies (reburials of famous persons returned from abroad, or of famous and anonymous ones at home, as well as the erection and tearing
6. Heroes and Saints: from:
Bones of Contention
Abstract: Of the different theorists of heroic myth, it is Lord Raglan who insisted most adamantly on the link between myth and ritual and became, as it were, the father and chief exponent of myth-ritualism.
290While one does not have to adopt his rejection of the historicity of heroes (particularly his insistence that historical heroes are fundamentally different from mythical heroes), and not even accept the particular way in which he established the connection between myth and ritual, it has been clearly demonstrated that, in the case of Levski, the link is there. What characterized all hero myth theorists in general,
Inter-texts of identity from:
Late Enlightenment
Abstract: The history of this ‘Reader’ goes back to a meeting of a group of young scholars at the Balkan Summer University in Plovdiv in 1999. The lively interaction and debates engendered by this occasion highlighted the necessity of creating a common regional framework of intercultural dialogue. A year later, meeting in the same place, the idea of a ‘Reader’ containing a representative collection of fundamental texts that had contributed to and/or reflected upon the formation of narratives of national identity in Central and Southeast Europe was conceived. We envisioned this ‘Reader’ as a new synthesis that could challenge the self-centered
CHAPTER IV. REFORM AND REVOLUTION: from:
Late Enlightenment
Abstract: Although it appeared as if the Emperor’s actions were directed against Catholicism as a religion, they rather illustrated Joseph II’s profound distrust
Chapter 2 Modernity and History from:
Measuring Time, Making History
Abstract: Modernity has two related definitions, according to the Oxford English Dictionary. It is “the quality or condition of being modern; modernness of character or style,” and “an intellectual tendency or social perspective characterized by departure from or repudiation of traditional ideas, doctrines, and cultural values in favor of contemporary or radical values and beliefs (chiefly those of scientific rationalism and liberalism).” The second definition with its emphasis on breaking from tradition has its roots in the European Enlightenment and French Revolution, though Enlightenment writers themselves did not use the specific term
modernity. The Oxford English Dictionary cites only one use
Book Title: Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics-Studies in Mediaeval and Early Modern History
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Österberg Eva
Abstract: Today, friendship, love and sexuality are mostly viewed as private, personal and informal relations. In the mediaeval and early modern period, just like in ancient times, this was different. The classical philosophy of friendship (Aristotle) included both friendship and love in the concept of philia. It was also linked to an argument about the virtues needed to become an excellent member of the city state. Thus, close relations were not only thought to be a matter of pleasant gatherings in privacy, but just as much a matter of ethics and politics. What, then, happened to the classical ideas of close relations when they were transmitted to philosophers, clerical and monastic thinkers, state officials or other people in the medieval and early modern period? To what extent did friendship transcend the distinctions between private and public that then existed? How were close relations shaped in practice? Did dialogues with close friends help to contribute to the process of subject-formation in the Renaissance and Enlightenment? To what degree did institutions of power or individual thinkers find it necessary to caution against friendship or love and sexuality?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1282g0
Chapter 2 Challenging the Private–Public Dichotomy from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: Acknowledgement of the historical relevance of the private–public dichotomy is often associated with Jürgen Habermas’s influential theory, focusing as it does on the bourgeois public sphere in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. In his view, this public sphere was characterized by open communication, rational argument, and reason. He also views it as something new, in stark contrast to the representative public sphere of premodern society, in which hierarchical power presented itself to the people in what was to all intents and purposes one-way communication.¹ In recent decades, however, Habermas’s ideas have been challenged, not least by historians studying popular
Chapter 5 Close Relationships—Then and Now from:
Friendship and Love, Ethics and Politics
Abstract: In the previous chapters I set out to show how premodern love and friendship, both as ideals and in the full diversity of reality, were not only important in private life, but also in public life. The focus of my analysis has been the ways that philosophers, writers, and State and Church thought and spoke about close relationships, and the great changes in these discourses over time. But I have also been able to shed light on specific variations in actual relationships by using diaries, correspondence, and autobiographical material. It goes without saying that I have only been able to
CHAPTER 1 Stambolov, the Russophiles, and the Russophobes in Bulgaria from:
Debating the Past
Abstract: On July 6, 1995, a monument of Bulgarian statesman Stefan Stambolov—representing only his head with a deep cut on it—was inaugurated in the garden in front of the Army Club in Sofia, on the spot where he was murdered 100 years before. Insofar as Stambolov had become a symbol of independent national policies, directed against Russia in particular, the newly restored democracy in Bulgaria marked its exit from the Soviet sphere of influence with this monument. The irony is that by vindicating Stambolov, in fact, by giving official sanction to a process that had begun already under communism,
Conclusion from:
Debating the Past
Abstract: In what follows, I will review the concepts of “objectivity” and “truth” in Bulgarian historical scholarship on the basis of my historiographical research and observations. As will be seen, there is a great difference between theoretical-methodological statements and historiographical practice. However, my purpose is not to blame the presumably “objective” historiography for “lack of objectivity” (especially since I do not believe in this ideal), but to see how things stand on particular issues of the “objectivity and truth” complex. Hence the account is somewhat fragmented. The question will also be posed: why were there, until recently, no relativizations of the
Book Title: Remembering Communism-Private and Public Recollections of Lived Experience in Southeast Europe
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Troebst Stefan
Abstract: Remembering Communism examines the formation and transformation of the memory of communism in the post-communist period. The majority of the articles focus on memory practices in the post-Stalinist era in Bulgaria and Romania, with occasional references to the cases of Poland and the GDR. Based on an interdisciplinary approach, including history, anthropology, cultural studies and sociology, the volume examines the mechanisms and processes that influence, determine and mint the private and public memory of communism in the post-1989 era. The common denominator to all essays is the emphasis on the process of remembering in the present, and the modalities by means of which the present perspective shapes processes of remembering, including practices of commemoration and representation of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1287c4v
2. Experts with a Cause: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Lindenberger Thomas
Abstract: The revolutions that swept Europe in 1989 were unexpected, not only for historians. Their commemoration twenty years later has prompted an enormous output of publications in all formats and genres: books, DVDs, TV features, and exhibitions covering all segments of culture, from highbrow to lowbrow, state-subsidized and commercial, in the capitals and in the provinces, from academic historiography to dilettante folk art. While the exact number is difficult to verify, up to 60,000 books dealing with the German division and East Germany’s past have been published in the last twenty years. The bulk of these publications is not scholarly literature,
11. “Loan Memory”: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Hranova Albena
Abstract: It was my everyday practice as a university professor that made me face the problem discussed in this volume, and it was the first decade of our century that made the problem entirely evident. Students born toward the end of communism (mid- to late 1980s) knew practically nothing about it. I had to hear innumerable egregious mistakes in my classes, for example, a student once saying that communism was “a medieval event or regime” (it was not a metaphorical statement). About five years ago another student wrote in a paper the following sentence: “Nowadays, as we enter the era of
13. Within (and Without) the “Stem Cell” of Socialist Society from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kirilova Anny
Abstract: Adoption is intrinsic to the Bulgarian cultural system both in memory and in its present form and represents a relatively autonomous module. Participants, enacting procedures, and consequences place adoption in
20. Daily Life and Surveillance in the 1970s and 1980s from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Percec Dana Chetrinescu
Abstract: I took an interest in the theme of Securitate surveillance of our lives a short while after this institution’s archives were opened to the public, in 2001, I believe. I saw my own file, which was started in January 1989, and I realized that the frequent out-of-order telephone lines at the time made sense now, and that the technician who would come to repair the device most likely replaced one microphone with another. Although it was not very bulky—it had only thirty-nine pages—the file told me something about the practices of surveillance and about the omissions and limitations
22. Theater Artists and the Bulgarian Authorities in the 1960s: from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Hristova Natalia
Abstract: For more than thirty years my research focus has been on Bulgarian culture in the second half of the twentieth century. In the last twenty years I branched out from the archive and literary works into the sprawling memoir literature, and I have been conducting interviews with Bulgarian intellectuals. I cannot recall whether my choice for interviews was based on the fact of my personal acquaintance with writers, or whether I was attracted to critical authors and their literature. Most likely, the two coincided.
28. Remembering the “Revival Process” in Post-1989 Bulgaria from:
Remembering Communism
Author(s) Kalinova Evgenia
Abstract: The euphemistically called “revival process,” that is, the policy of the Bulgarian Communist Party aiming at ethnic assimilation of the Turkish minority in Bulgaria in the second half of the 1980s, has been in the scope of my research interests as an important part of contemporary Bulgarian history which I teach at the University of Sofia. At the same time, I have always been aware that the “revival process,” even though it ended in December 1989, is still present as a painful memory. When discussing the problem with my students, I observed that their reactions most often were purely emotional
Why World War II Memories Remain So Troubled in Europe and East Asia from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Chirot Daniel
Abstract: German and Japanese attitudes toward the atrocities their nations committed during World War II are often contrasted as if they were completely different, but that is both too simple and somewhat misleading. Nevertheless, as I hope to show, one must start with the observation that the dichotomy has considerable merit. Then I will explain why, for the rest of Europe, recognition of what actually happened during that awful period has been quite similar to Japan’s evasiveness, at least until quite recently, and to a considerable degree, even now in parts of Eastern and Central Europe. This will lead me to
On the Relationship between Politics of Memory and the State’s Rapport with the Communist Past from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Gussi Alexandru
Abstract: Over the past twenty-five years, the debate about the communist past in Eastern Europe became largely a discussion about the debate itself. In this chapter, I will argue that, in the immediate aftermath of the events of 1989, the main concern of the public actors was not to clarify the nature of the old regime, but to assess its specific elements, to condemn and/or to forget them. Such processes were perceived to be the perquisites of embarking on the project of building a new democratic state.
Germany’s Two Processes of “Coming to Terms with the Past”—Failures, After all? from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Müller Jan-Werner
Abstract: Germany’s dealing with its two difficult pasts—the East German state socialist dictatorship and, much more important, Nazism and the Holocaust—has almost globally been considered a success, even a model for others to emulate.¹ Human rights activists and politicians from South Africa, for instance, closely studied what the Germans had done by way of trials, public commemoration and schoolbooks; and the Chinese would at one point admonish Japan that, in dealing with World War II, it should adopt the “German model.” Not surprisingly perhaps, this
Modell Deutschlandwas increasingly viewed with pride within Germany itself, especially, but not only,
The Romanian Revolution in Court: from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Ursachi Raluca
Abstract: Trials against former leaders of a dictatorial regime are symbolic moments in the founding of a new political order. Beyond the classic functions of criminal justice (punishing the guilty, preventing similar deeds in the future and reinforcing respect for the law), these trials can also play an epistemic role in societies in transition.¹ They constitute important processes of narrative construction, understood as “storytelling” (
mise en récit) about injustice. The selection of the relevant facts at the trial, their legal characterization, and the assignation of blame by sentencing may constitute public affirmations of an official and normative version of events,² which
Slobodan Milošević in the Hague: from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Petrović Vladimir
Abstract: The death of Slobodan Milošević, on March 11, 2006, in the detention unit of the International Criminal Tribunal for the former Yugoslavia (ICTY) put an abrupt end to yet another process dubbed as “the trial of the century.” Three days later the Trial Chamber took notice of the death of the accused, hence terminating the case IT-02-54 that dragged on for more than four years toward its anticlimactic end. Disappointment among the interested parties was as deep as the earlier feeling of success upon his bringing to justice. “I deeply regret the death of Slobodan Milošević. It deprives the victims
After Communism: from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Donskis Leonidas
Abstract: Eastern European countries seem locked mentally somewhere between the discovery of the intrinsic logic of capitalism characteristic of the nineteenth century and the post-Weimar Republic period. This is a period characterized by an incredibly fast economic growth and a passionate advocacy of the values of free enterprise and capitalism, accompanied by a good deal of anomie, fission of the body social, stark social contrasts, shocking degrees of corruption, a culture of poverty (to recall Oscar Lewis’s term which refers to low trust, self-victimization, disbelief in social ties and networks, contempt for institutions, and so on), and cynicism.
Past Intransient/Transiting Past: from:
Remembrance, History, and Justice
Author(s) Vukov Nikolai
Abstract: As in most other East European countries, commemorative attention to victims of totalitarian rule held a central place in the public discourses after 1989 in Bulgaria. In the stead of the grand narrative of antifascism and partisan resistance during World War II, which was sustained in the communist period, there came to the fore long suppressed testimonies about the crimes of the regime and facts whose disclosure called for ethical and historical justice. The terror of the socalled People’s Courts, the brutal treatment of the democratic opposition after 1944, the murders of political opponents, the purges and the terror of
Book Title: Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals-The Quest for an Eternal Identity
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Mylonas Christos
Abstract: This book is a comprehensive exposition of the interaction of a national (the Serbian people) and a religiou (the Orthodox Christian faith) content, in the formation of a distinctive national identity and a mode of being. Its interdisciplinary approach, drawing on sociology, social anthropology, theology, political theory, Balkan historiography, and Serbian folklore, is deployed to provide a powerful and original analysis of how Serbian Orthodoxy has resulted in the sacralisation of the Serbian nation by framing the parameters of its existence. Addresses the following questions: what 'makes' a Serb? Are meaningful assumptions possible by introducing Serbian Orthodoxy as the primal point of reference? Why does religion appear to have an especially strong appeal?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt1cgf87j
Chapter Three HOMO SERBICUS from:
Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: The Orthodox experience, as the primordial factor of Serbianhood, nurtures upon doctrinal and functional precepts, distinctive cultural and institutional patterns that provide a sense of “protection” and of national be longing to its members. This sense of protection pertains to divinely sanctioned exegeses, concerned with human origins and behaviour and in particular, with the Manichean distinction between good and evil, right and wrong. Orthodoxy as a signifier of collective representation, crystallises rules, symbols, behavioural inducements and consequences for actions, whose justification is also reflected in the internal necessities and functional core of the Serbian society. The creation of forms and
Chapter Six “TO LOVE YOUR NEIGHBOUR AS YOURSELF” “VIOLENCE AS ANTITHETICAL TO THE LIFE OF (ORTHODOX) CHRISTIANS AND VIOLENCE AS PART OF THE DYNAMIC PROCESS BY WHICH ‘JUSTICE IS ESTABLISHED AMID THE TENSIONS OF HISTORY’” from:
Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: The exercise of impetuosity, an instance of devastating and powerful force or an unjust and unwarranted display of physical intention for the purpose of intimidation, injury and destruction, are all aspects of violence, an elusive concept often applied in the description of a recognisable reality and an actual situation. Within the institutional confines and structures of a society, violence is roughly definable as “the illegal employment of methods of physical coercion”³ in the pursuit of individual and collective objectives. Étatist traditions are conterminal with the use of constitutionally sanctioned coercion⁴ in the defence and consolidation of state authority. All human
Chapter Seven THE BALKAN ORTHODOX COMMONWEALTH “I BELIEVE IN ONE GOD… THE CREATOR OF HEAVEN AND EARTH, OF ALL VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE ENTITIES… AND IN ONE HOLY, APOSTOLIC AND CATHOLIC CHURCH.” from:
Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: Orthodoxy, as already suggested, through the dialectical interaction of her religious content—doctrinal and functional—with the national substance of the Serbian being, sacralises the identity of the latter in the confines of the human–divine communion. Spatial, sacramental, historical, temporal, aesthetic, and spiritual signifiers or referents of faith contribute toward the constitution of a holistic and objectified experience that permeates the nature of the national collectivity. A genealogy of right belief, underlined by the “mediative” presence of venerated patriots and the autocephaly of ecclesiastical institutions, concretise the convergence of the catholic and universal character of Orthodoxy into a unique
Conclusion from:
Serbian Orthodox Fundamentals
Abstract: George Seferis’
Mythistorema—the colloquial meaning of the title is novel—connotes to the components of istoria—both history and tale—as an expression with some coherence of the circumstances that are independent of the reader—as the characters in a novel—andmythos, a certain mythology, clearly alluded to in the thematical substance of the verse. Beyond the etymological binary of a “heading”, Seferis’ work gradually reveals to its audience his enduring inspiration from the past, in the collective recollection of creation, war or destruction and as a personal reminder of loss and exile. The emergent image is seemingly
Conditions for European Solidarity from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) BÖCKENFÖRDE ERNST-WOLFGANG
Abstract: Related to this, solidarity signifies at the same time a form of assuming responsibility for one another, associated with positive action or services on behalf of others, whether individuals or a particular community or society as a whole. This is
Reflections on Solidarity from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) KATZNELSON IRA
Abstract: The central concept in the Europe Paper is ‘solidarity,’ with a focus on values that might integrate a diverse, often fractious, European continent. I believe the concept to be more inherently complex than the essay signifies, so it is about this intricacy and density that I wish to comment. For when we speak about solidarity, its content is not self-evident. Nor are the values on which it stands. Indeed, I have constructed a short-list of attractive normative possibilities of meaning for the term. Each, we will quickly see, is morally appealing. Yet each possesses internal contradictions, and, to some extent,
Turkey’s EU Membership as a Litmus Test of European Self-Confidence from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) LEGGEWIE CLAUS
Abstract: What sets the Europe Paper of the Reflection Group apart from many declarations on Europe is its clear rejection of an essentialist concept of culture—such as, for example, a (Christian) guiding culture—as the possible basis for both a collective establishment of identity and for practical integration policies. Europe is not some kind of cultural essence, but an open historical process and Europe’s identity has always been defined in de-centered and extra-territorial terms. If the religious factor is to be taken into account, then it should be so,
notby limiting and binding Europe to a Christian tradition (again
What Distinguishes Europe? from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) MERTES MICHAEL
Abstract: The powers of cohesion in an expanded European Union must “be looked for and found in Europe’s common culture” the Reflection Group’s Europe Paper emphasizes. Indeed: “As the old forces of integration—the desire for peace, the existence of external threats, and the potential for economic growth— lose their effectiveness, the role of Europe’s common culture—the spiritual factor of European integration—will inevitably grow in importance as a source of unity and cohesion.” Whether, as stated at the beginning of the paper, a radical re-definition of the EU really is on the agenda, appears to me rather doubtful—I
Solidarity and Freedom from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) MURPHY KENNETH
Abstract: It is a historical fact that the tendency towards amalgamation into larger political unions reached its climax between 1860 and 1870. During that decade, Germany and Italy united, the American Union was preserved, the Danubian Empire established itself in a form that lasted until 1918, Canada achieved a federal union, and the British Commonwealth came into
United Europe, Divided History from:
What Holds Europe Together?
Author(s) SNYDER TIMOTHY
Abstract: In this brief comment I would like to address a problem that arises from a juxtaposition of some of the main concepts of the Europe Paper: how to build and maintain a “common European European culture” despite “cultural differences” dating from the Cold War; how to reconcile the project of “expansion” with the deepening of “European solidarity”? The proposal takes the view that solidarity is a matter of moral positions and positive action, rather than simply a question of the correct redistribution of goods. In this spirit, I would like to suggest a problem and an opportunity for Europeans who
CHAPTER 2 Islam and the History of Civilizations from:
Times of History
Abstract: Fascination with the exotic, including the Muslim exotic, the distantly attractive or repellent, the self-enclosed and self-explanatory, ensnares the imagination and inhibits reason and the faculty of judgment; for fascination, sympathetic or hostile, is none other than beholding an object as if it were a marvel, and the spectacle of marvels suspends the normal operations of
CHAPTER 3 Chronophagous Discourse: from:
Times of History
Abstract: Amongst all religious traditions, Islamic civilization has produced what is perhaps the most deliberately sustained concern with, and profuse body of writing on, history. The concern with the past is manifest in all genres of Arabic
Schrifttum: poetry was classicized with the establishment of anterior texts and modes; pietistic and legal works established a knowledge of early Muslim practice asFürstenspiegeland valorized salutary and deleterious acts of kings and sages from many histories; Koranic exegesis required monumental knowledge of Muslim precedents and linguistic usages of yore; dynasties, times, and biographies were meticulously chronicled and recorded; universal histories were composed
CHAPTER 4 The Muslim Canon from Late Antiquity to the Era of Modernism from:
Times of History
Abstract: By referring to the Muslim Canon in Late Antiquity and the Middle Ages, it is my intention to underline the specific character of the perspective I wish to cast in this essay upon the Koran and the canonical texts that complement it. It is primarily an historical perspective, insensitive to the mythological accounts one normally encounters with respect to the histories of significant events and times—historical events, often construed as born virtually complete and pristine.
CHAPTER 6 Rhetoric for the Senses: from:
Times of History
Abstract: That sensual pleasure in this world is praised and, indeed, enjoined in Muslim tradition when it occurs within the bounds of legitimate union, requires no demonstration. Equally evident is the discouragement of serious forms of long-term asceticism and of carnal self-denial, over and above what some Sufis might adopt during periods of initiation and devotional isolation (
khalwa). The repudiation of pleasure characteristic of Christian traditions in general¹ is almost entirely absent, and monastic life with its various forms of physical self-immolation was frequently the object of derision by Muslim authors, who often regarded it as something contrary to what God
The Experiences of a Filmmaker. from:
Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Solomon Alexandru
Abstract: The results of a poll recently published in Romania indicated that 50% of the population is not interested in understanding the activities of the political police under the communist regime.¹ The poll also showed that 67% do not want to find out if somebody in their family worked for the
Securitate.² These figures only confirm what we already knew: there is an obvious refusal to take responsibility for the criminal activities of the regime. More than half of Romanian society wishes to forget the socialist past. One must admit that this is not very encouraging for a documentary filmmaker, working
Long Farewells. from:
Past for the Eyes
Author(s) Sarkisova Oksana
Abstract: From a growing temporal distance, the Soviet historical “episode” seems to entail an emphatic beginning and a somewhat less spectacular but equally distinguishable end. The present article sets out to review the films of the last twenty years dealing with the Soviet period. Despite the declared break with the past, characteristic of transitional societies, a closer look at the social and cultural fabric of “post-Communism” reveals that the simplistic opposition of “before” versus “after” is subverted by recurrent long-term intellectual frameworks, narrative devices, and visual imagery, employed to make sense of the world “here and now” as well as “there
Introduction: from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: This book is a revised and expanded version of the Natalie Davis lectures for 2013, delivered at the Central European University in Budapest. It presents the Renaissance in Italy, elsewhere in Europe and in the world beyond Europe as an example, or series of examples, of cultural hybridization. In this study, a wide range of the many products of the Renaissance will be examined as evidence of the processes of interaction from which they emerged.
Chapter 2 The Geography of Hybridity from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: Courts were magnets for talented people from a variety of countries. Italian humanist expatriates served as official historians to the rulers of Hungary, Spain, France, England and elsewhere. Some artists and musicians moved from court to court, like the lutenistcomposer Valentin Bakfark, who was active in his native Transylvania, Poland and Austria, or his English colleague John Dowland, who worked in Paris and Copenhagen as well as in London.
Chapter 5 Hybrid Languages from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: An alternative title for this chapter might be “polyglossia”, a term that the Russian literary theorist Mikhail Bakhtin employed to describe the coexistence and consequent “dialogue” between different languages (his more famous term “heteroglossia” described the interaction of varieties of the same language).² The languages of Europe in the Renaissance were enriched by borrowing or appropriation on a massive scale. For example, the period 1530-1660 “presents the fastest word growth in the history of English in proportion to the vocabulary size of the time”.³ In the history of language, as in the history of visual culture, the movement we call
Chapter 6 Hybrid Literatures from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: This chapter is concerned with hybrid writing and especially those forms of writing now known as “literature” and formerly as
belles-lettres, a term that is not easy to translate into English. It will include history alongside poetry, plays and the prose fiction we describe as “novels”, while contemporaries called them “romances”. In fact, writing was not the only medium in which these works circulated, since oral performances were commonplace. The circulation of texts in performance, manuscript and print suggests that we think in terms of hybrid media.
Chapter 9 Translating Gods from:
Hybrid Renaissance
Abstract: In the domain of religion, the evidence of interactions between different beliefs and practices in the long sixteenth century is inescapable. Whether or not these interactions are part of the Renaissance movement is a more difficult and controversial question. However, the revival of antiquity, especially the “patristic revival” (the renewed interest in Augustine, Jerome and other leading figures of the early Church), was important in the history of Christianity in this period. The writings of the Fathers, which exemplify the Hellenization of Christianity, were influential on Catholics and Protestants alike.
FOREWORD from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: As happens at times, this book grew out of my PhD dissertation, “Where the Currents Meet: Frontiers of Memory in the Post-Soviet Fiction of East Ukraine,” which was completed at the University of Cambridge in 2014. The last day of February was my chosen deadline for unloading its softbound copies at the Board of Graduate Studies in a partly triumphant and partly anticlimactic local ritual known as submission. The week before, Ukraine’s Maidan uprising claimed its largest number of victims yet. The bloodshed continued for several days. February 2014 saw the Maidan movement’s most fatal time.
Introduction from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: Lot’s wife may have faced a different fate today: these are exciting times for backward glances. As cultural, political, and social changes swept across the postsocialist regions of the world in recent decades, the study of how the past is remembered and forgotten acquired a particular relevance for those nations undergoing rapid transformation. In Ukraine, a new virtuoso generation of writers has been picking up the theme of their country’s complex twentieth-century legacy and transforming it into captivating—and often surreal—narratives. The city of Kharkiv,¹ Ukraine’s second-largest, is a major hub of this creative activity.
Chapter Four FRONTIERS OF TRAUMA from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: One wintry night, walking home from a knight-themed party, three merry young men with swords come across a white statue in a cold dark park. They dare each other to behead it, and after much effort, on the fifth blow, one succeeds. As his drunken friends celebrate the statue’s demise, the decapitator suddenly falls to his knees, vomiting violently. The dotingly picturesque description of this abrupt physical reaction, along with its sound effects (“He gagged, then rattled, and snowflakes melted in his hoarse breath”), constitutes the most vivid part of a tiny, 150-word story “Briug” (1996) by Kharkiv writer Yuri
Chapter Five FRONTIERS OF (IN)SANITY from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: The themes of these monologues can be divided into two broad groups. In one, protagonists engage in confessional recollections of traumatic events. But unlike the narrators introduced in chapter 4, these characters are relatively clear about what happened to them, ranging from a childhood blunder to a violent murder. To process
CONCLUSION from:
Where Currents Meet
Abstract: This study has examined how, in “a culture increasingly dominated by space and spatial logic,”¹ contemporary Ukrainian writers of the younger generation—doubletake writers—work their characters into a traumatized cultural landscape. In such a landscape, the language of categories and coordinates is subverted in favor of blurriness, uncertainty, and the supernatural. I call this cohort the doubletake generation, in reference to their coming of age at the time of the Soviet Union’s collapse. Upon reaching adulthood, they revisit the intense historical experience that coincided with their childhood or adolescence—a time when external changes fuse with internal ones, and
When Does Utopianism Produce Dystopia? from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Claeys Gregory
Abstract: Friedrich Hayek once observed that “Utopia, like ideology, is a bad word today.”¹ Yet like the Christian devil, bad words may indeed rule this world like some inescapable curse on humanity. Their joint sovereignty over us is usually associated with the twentieth-century regimes called totalitarian, and it is the relation between utopia and Nazism and Stalinism that is accordingly explored here. Writers like Hayek have assumed that the quest for utopia, usually conceived of as some form of near-perfect society, is causally linked to such regimes, and is practically synonymous with the excesses of Hitler and Stalin. My own perspective
Marxist Utopianism and Modern Irish Drama, 1884–1904: from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Remport Eglantina
Abstract: Karl Marx’s
Capitalwas the seminal work of nineteenth-century socioeconomic criticism, generating heated social and political debates in Britain and Ireland. There is a view according to which the social theories proposed by Marx and his friend, Friedrich Engels, were themselves utopian, although both social critics repeatedly emphasized their rejection of nineteenth-century utopian socialism—Marx himself claimed bluntly that it was simply “silly” and “stale” and “reactionary.”¹ During the second half of the nineteenth century, Marxism, in its various shapes and forms, emerged as a powerful movement, making its very palpable presence felt in late-Victorian economic, social, and political discourses
What They Were Going to Do About It: from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Farkas Ákos
Abstract: In 1936, two years after the establishment of the Peace Pledge Union (PPU), Britain’s largest pacifist organisation of the twentieth century, one of the organization’s founders, Aldous Huxley, undertook to write a pamphlet to promote the Union and its cause. In the thirty-one-page booklet, Huxley set out to persuade hard-headed opponents of pacifism that peace was not only a desirable, but also a practicable alternative to war. He pleaded that any kind of peace was preferable to any kind of war, even at the cost of rewarding the aggressor: Italy attacking Abyssinia, Japan devastating Manchuria and Germany bent on annexing
AFTERWORD from:
Utopian Horizons
Author(s) Czigányik Zsolt
Abstract: The present volume offers interdisciplinary analyses of utopian phenomena. The interdisciplinary nature of studies in utopianism (and also in other fields) is becoming more and more accepted, yet the cooperation of the various disciplines in interpretation is not automatic, and their emphases and approaches may differ substantially. As Balázs Trencsényi argues, “historians of political thought try to renegotiate the relationship between history, literary studies and the social sciences, pointing out that the understanding of a political interaction might necessitate the use of a variety of different interpretative techniques and approaches.”¹ Yet interdisciplinarity is not only a technical issue. Ernest Gellner
DEMONS IN KRAKOW, AND IMAGE MAGIC IN A MAGICAL HANDBOOK from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) LÁNG BENEDEK
Abstract: The curious genre of medieval magical handbooks has been researched for many decades. Already Lynn Thorndike, in his famous
History of Magic and Experimental Science, gave a typology and an exhaustive description of magical practices, including the relatively innocent methods connected with the secrets of the natural world, and the explicitly demonic or angelic procedures. Although Thorndike gave a thorough characterization of the sources, read and listed the most important Western manuscripts, it is still possible to go deeper into the topic, the field is left open for further investigations.
SERPENT-DAMSELS AND DRAGON-SLAYERS: from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) SMITH KAREN P.
Abstract: St. Margaret of Antioch, best known for defeating the dragon who tries to swallow her, is associated with later medieval fertility and childbirth beliefs in a set of cultic practices that emphasized her divine powers of protection. Contemporaneous narratives of maidens who change into serpents may have influenced the way this virgin saint’s legend was received by its audiences. The hagiographic accounts, the local legends and the fertility and healing traditions served as intertexts to each other in a way that contributed to the creation of a saintly virgin-hero who could intervene in women’s everyday lives.
JEWISH, NOBLE, GERMAN, OR PEASANT? from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) WYPORSKA WANDA
Abstract: This study will discuss a selection of the ideas and images of the devil prevalent in the Polish lands during the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, through the prism of Polish witchcraft trials in opposition to early modern Polish literature. The literature includes
belles-lettres, encyclopedias, legal treatises and other works, dominated by eighteenth century Polish clergy, of which a brief selection will be examined. In the first part, the ideas evinced by examples of printed sources representative of elite culture will be presented, whilst the second half of the study will be concerned with details extracted from witchcraft trial records
SEXUAL ENCOUNTERS WITH SPIRITS AND DEMONS IN EARLY MODERN SWEDEN: from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) LILIEQUIST JONAS
Abstract: The subject of this essay is the confrontation and interaction between popular traditions and learned doctrines in early modern sweden regarding the sexual activities of spirits and demons and how it evolved over time. Traditional notions were appropriated and redefined by representatives of elite culture, while learned doctrines were appropriated and used in various ways by members of the population at large. Differences in cultural uses and strategies are in focus here rather than different sets of beliefs (Chartier 1984).
CHURCH DEMONOLOGY AND POPULAR BELIEFS IN EARLY MODERN SWEDEN from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) OLLI SOILI-MARIA
Abstract: The witch-trials in Sweden reached their climax around the years 1660–1670. At this time the Devil was considered to be very active, which is reflected in legal sources and in measurements taken by the authorities. The aim of this paper is to discuss in what way different groups of society—the authorities, the elite and the popular classes in early modern Sweden—could have both similar and different images of the Devil and how the idea of the Devil could be used in different ways for different purposes. The intention is also to point out in what way the
MAGIC AS REFLECTED IN SLOVENIAN FOLK TRADITION AND POPULAR HEALING TODAY from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) KROPEJ MONIKA
Abstract: In Slovenia, folk traditions related to witchcraft are considerably rich and diverse. According to older sources, wizards and witches were mythological and demonic creatures just like the
kresnik, the vedomec/benandanti, the lamija, the fairies, etc.; other sources, on the other hand, stress that ordinary people could attain witchcraft as a profession. On the basis of our data on Slovenian folk tradition, we may draw the general conclusion that magic was practiced mainly sympathetically, based on analogy, by the rule “pars pro toto,” through apotropaic rites with water, medicinal herbs and potions. Sorcerers mastered spells and knew how to conjure and
CATEGORIES OF THE “EVIL DEAD” IN MACEDONIAN FOLK RELIGION from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) RISTESKI L’UPCHO S.
Abstract: In the traditional attitude of the community towards its deceased members of great importance, we can find the notion that they are divided depending on their personal characteristics into categories of
pure, suspicious and impure (Vaseva 1994, 3. pp. 154–55). The whole ritual and magic behavior of the community is structured and subordinated on the basis of this concept. The folk terminology distinguishes a fourth category for the period right after the death of members of the community, who are called “fresh” dead. This category of fresh deceased usually lasts one year, which is the necessary time period for
BALKAN DEMONS’ PROTECTING PLACES from:
Christian Demonology and Popular
Author(s) PLOTNIKOVA ANNA
Abstract: My paper is about folk beliefs reflecting images of the so-called “lower mythology.” Among various types of demons belonging to this “lower mythology,” I will focus on demons protecting places because of their specific character in the ethnocultural traditions of the Balkans. The demons to be discussed have various names, features and functions, but their main characteristic is linked with their protecting role. I will apply typological methods, so the topic
demons protecting places will be examined from linguistic (lexical), structural and functional aspects. The investigation is based on already published ethnographic sources as well as the field notes from
Book Title: Given World and Time-Temporalities in Context
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Miller Tyrus
Abstract: The interconnections of time with historical thought and knowledge have come powerfully to the fore since the 1970s. An international group of scholars, from a range of fields including literary theory, history of ideas, cultural anthropology, philosophy, intellectual history and theology, philology, and musicology, address the matter of time and temporalities. The volume’s essays, divided into four main topical groups question critically the key problem of context, connecting it to the problem of time. Contexts, the essays suggest, are not timeless. Time and its contexts are only partly “given” to us: to the primordial donations of time and world correspond our epistemic, moral, and practical modes of receiving what has been granted. The notion of context may have radically different parameters in different historical, cultural, and disciplinary situations. Topics include the deep antiquity, and the timeless time of eternity, as well as formal philosophies of history and the forms of histories implicit in individual and community experience. The medium specific use of time and history are examined with regard to song, image, film, oral narration, and legal discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbmxx
2. Epic Remains: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Bassi Karen
Abstract: When we think about the various visible objects that comprise the landscape of the ancient Greek epic, the first to come to mind are the Shield of Achilles, the scepter of the Achaians, and the bed shared by Penelope and Odysseus. These objects—whether unique or of a general class—are like snapshots in the epic narrative. Individually, they have been the focus of extensive scholarship on the poems, principally in terms of their metonymic relationship to the narrative at large (
ecphrasis), their expression of vividness (enargeia), or their function in the exposition of character and social status. But the
3. Fourier and the Saint-Simonians on the Shape of History from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Beecher Jonathan
Abstract: One of the main intellectual consequences of the French Revolution was to leave many Europeans with the sense that the optimistic, rationalistic and egalitarian ideology of the Enlightenment had exhausted itself and been discredited with the failure of the radical phase of the revolution. There was a sense on many sides that the Enlightenment had been “on trial” during the French Revolution and that the understanding of human nature and history offered by the Enlightenment had proved inadequate. The period that followed the French Revolution was therefore marked by an intellectual reaction leading in two directions. First, to the belief
8. Image-Times, Image-Histories, Image-Thinking from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Soussloff Catherine M.
Abstract: Derived from the Latin, i.e.,
imago (f. noun) and imagines (pl.), the terminology and the concepts adhering to “image” have both fascinated and perplexed scholars, most of them philosophers, psychoanalysts, and historians of religion, art, and film. To explore these etymologies today, however, seems superfluous since the term has an expanded significance in all media studies and practices, including computer technologies, digital and analog photography and film, television, and video. While the conceptual intricacies associated with the image and its cognates in the Western tradition stretch back to ancient Greece and have led to a wide discrepancy of views regarding
9. Documentary Re-enactments: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Nichols Bill
Abstract: Re-enactments, the more or less authentic recreation of prior events, provided a staple element of documentary representation until they were slain by the “verité boys” of the 1960s (Ricky Leacock, D.A. Pennebaker, David and Albert Maysles, Fred Wiseman and others) who proclaimed everything, except what took place in front of the camera without script, rehearsal or direction, to be a fabrication—inauthentic. Observational or direct cinema generated an honest record of what would have happened had the camera not been there, or what did happen as a result of recording what happens when people are filmed. Observational temporality possessed the
15. A Microscope for Time: from:
Given World and Time
Author(s) Clausberg Karl
Abstract: In today’s day and age, upheavals in human worlds of image and media are preferably traced back to technical achievements. The history of optical media—camera obscura, photography, the cinema, television, etc.—seems meanwhile firmly established as a prime example of such means of viewing. But how well do these perspectives of progress fit the “nature” of humankind, which has somehow struggled through the channels of anthropological predispositions, neurobiological influences,
et al. to the peaks of civilization? Using a short and anonymously published text from the mid-nineteenth century by a Berlin lay-astronomer, whose considerable impact is suggestively illustrated in the
CHAPTER 3 THE DIALECTIC OF LITERATURE AND HISTORY from:
Imperfection and Defeat
Abstract: The next step in this discussion ought to be the interaction between the writing of literature and the writing of history, and, almost inevitably, the contrastive role played by utopia. In a way, of course, utopia combines both of these, while also connecting them with the matter discussed in the previous chapter, namely religion, with or without religion’s occasional involvement with politics.
CHAPTER 5 LITERATURE AS ALLEGORY OF HUMAN PERSECUTION AND SURVIVAL from:
Imperfection and Defeat
Abstract: I will now introduce another relevant fact, which will strengthen the points I have already made. It is a fact that aesthetic imagination and literature in special have been regarded with doubt, in fact with hostility, by all kinds of regimes and systems over the centuries, as already alluded to in an earlier chapter. Even in Mediterranean Antiquity, attempts of this kind have been frequent, both theoretically and in political practice. In the Middle Ages, examples of massive pressure toward alignment and leveling are also abundant. The bourgeois and democratic states were more tolerant, but only apparently so: the lawsuits
Book Title: Constitutions, Courts, and History-Historical Narratives in Constitutional Adjudication
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Uitz Renáta
Abstract: Emphasizes the role history and historical narratives play in constitutional adjudication. Uitz provocatively draws attention to the often-tense relationship between the constitution and historical precedence highlighting the interpretive and normative nature of the law. Her work seeks to understand the conditions under which references to the past, history and traditions are attractive to lawyers, even when they have the potential of perpetuating indeterminacy in constitutional reasoning. Uitz conclusively argues that this constitutional indeterminacy is obscured by 'judicial rhetorical toolkits' of continuity and reconciliation that allow the court's reliance on the past to be unaccounted for. Uitz' rigorous analysis and extensive research makes this work an asset to legal scholars and practitioners alike.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt2jbnzv
Chapter Three The Constitutional Text in the Light of History from:
Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: As demonstrated in Chapter Two, although often the constitutional text itself offers no readily available solutions to particular problems, the quest for legitimacy in constitutional adjudication finds refuge in the constitutional text. Theories of constitutional interpretation resort to the text of a constitutional provision as a yardstick to evaluate or establish the appropriateness of a given construction of the constitution in a specific case. The constitutional text is believed to fulfill this legitimizing function, despite constitutionalists’ awareness of the open texture of constitutional provisions, the ghost of indeterminacy, and the admittedly extra-textual (contextual) characteristics of the overwhelming majority of arguments
Chapter Four Behind Historical Narratives: from:
Constitutions, Courts, and History
Abstract: The previous chapters sought to demonstrate that—despite lawyers’ intellectual reflexes—accounts of the past, history, and traditions are not hard facts to be taken at face value. Rather, accounts of the past (historical narratives) are the outcome of processes of interpretation. Lawyers’ accounts of the past as presented in constitutional cases are as interpretive as any other historical narrative. The last of these concerns relates closely to a court’s justification for selecting particular segments of the past for the purposes of settling a constitutional problem. When invoked in constitutional cases, arguments from history and traditions are presented as if
Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION from:
Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: Writing more than ten years hence, one cannot overstate the fact that 1989 represents a historical watershed of immense proportions. History either ended or began again. The defining twentieth-century struggle—between liberal democracies with their apparently superior market economies and authoritarian communist regimes with their ossifying and crumbling command economies—came to a sudden and unexpected demise. The former emperors of the Soviet Bloc were left shivering and cold in their newly-revealed nakedness; the vast political and security apparatus of the party-state crumbled like a house of cards. As if the speed of this revolutionary and transformative process was not
Chapter 2 POLAND: from:
Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: The frequency of protest and instability in authoritarian communist Poland can be explained according to three competing explanations. First, Polish experiences are seen unique in the region: peculiar factors such as an institutionally strong and independent Catholic Church; the survival of private ownership of land and de-collectivization of agriculture; a history replete with both anti-Russian, anti-Soviet and working class uprisings (in 1831, 1863, 1944, 1956, 1970, 1976, and 1980–1981); the relative power and prowess of intellectuals and the intelligentsia; and the weakness of party-state institutions and elites (Schöpflin, 1983; Ekiert and Kubic, 2001). Second, Poland shares with countries throughout
Chapter 7 THE DEMOCRATIC OPPOSITION IN HUNGARY from:
Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: It is impossible here to summarize the depth of this scholarly and personal interaction, but some generalizations can be made.¹ From Lukács’ early focus on aesthetics (for example, the Heidelberg manuscripts) through to
Chapter 8 THE DISSIDENT CONTRIBUTION TO POLITICAL THEORY from:
Dilemmas of Dissidence in East-Central Europe
Abstract: In the preceding chapters, I have argued that largely in response to the failure of “reform communism” and the various revisionist approaches taken in Poland, Czechoslovakia, and Hungary, a community of dissident intellectuals began to theorize about and organize against the political and economic stagnation of the 1970s and 1980s in each of their respective regimes. Separately, collectively and with great complementarity they developed an
oeuvre of political-theoretical approaches, tactical insights, and recommendations regarding not only the possibility but also the probability of political change. Taken as a whole, the most distinctive features of their thought and activism were: 1)
Book Title: Transition in Post-Soviet Art-The Collective Actions Group Before and After 1989
Publisher: Central European University Press
Author(s): Groys Boris
Abstract: The artistic tradition that emerged as a form of cultural resistance in the 1970s changed during the transition from socialism to capitalism. This volume presents the evolution of the Moscow-based conceptual artist group called Collective Actions, proposing it as a case-study for understanding the transformations that took place in Eastern European art after the fall of the Berlin Wall. Esanu introduces Moscow Conceptualism by performing a close examination of the Collective Actions group’s ten-volume publication Journeys Outside the City and of the Dictionary of Moscow Conceptualism. He analyzes above all the evolution of Collective Actions through ten consecutive phases, discussing changes that occur in each new volume of the Journeys. Compares the part of the Journeys produced in the Soviet period with those volumes assembled after the dissolution of the USSR. The concept of “transition” and the activities of Soros Centers for Contemporary Art are also analyzed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.7829/j.ctt5hgzpb
FOREWORD from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Author(s) GROYS BORIS
Abstract: Few are the reliable and well-written books that seek to tell the history of recent art in Eastern Europe—that is, the history of work by the artists who crossed the line in time that divided the old, communist era from the new postcommunist one. The communist past as experienced by those who lived it is largely a foreign concept to the majority of art historians in the West, who thus tread hesitantly over its uncanny terrain. As for the new generations of Eastern European art historians, they have already partially forgotten this past or even actively suppressed the memory
Chapter 1 A BIBLIOGRAPHIC OVERVIEW from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: The art and aesthetics of KD, and to some extent that of what is known as Moscow Conceptualism, are closely related to two fields, one physical and the other conceptual. The first, which KD's members christened "Kievogorskoe Pole" due to its proximity to the village Kievy Gorky, is close enough to Moscow to make for a manageable day trip. The second field, which I call the "discursive field" of Moscow Conceptualism, is more abstract, and spans the central concepts and ideas that emerged within this tradition. Over more than three decades both of these fields have undergone reorganization in numerous
Chapter 3 KD'S JOURNEYS BEFORE 1989 from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: It was during the Soviet period that the KD group gradually emerged with its own mythology, methodology, and terminology. From 1976 to 1989 its members sought unique ways to investigate the nature of art—this search for method comprising the group's main self-professed artistic program and affecting all aspects of its artistic and aesthetic practice. This Soviet or "before" period is the time in which the group created the model called "KD"—a model that, in spite of all changes since, has guided its aesthetic principles for almost three decades.
Chapter 4 "DURING": from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: In 1989 KD dissolved, reuniting again only in 1995 as [KD]. During this six-year transitional period, its members dispersed, acting and exhibiting individually at home and abroad. There is less information about this time, and even if Monastyrsky occasionally mentions events or texts that took place during these six years, most of them have been assembled within the post-1989
Journeyspost factum. In this respect the post-Soviet volumes ofJourneysbegan as in the Soviet period: most of the material has been ordered, and sometimes even produced, retrospectively and retroactively. As in their first phase (1976–1980) the group's members
Chapter 5 [KD]'S JOURNEYS AFTER 1989 from:
Transition in Post-Soviet Art
Abstract: The overall impact of transitology on Russian political and economic life cannot be compared with its effects in other postsocialist countries and republics of the former USSR. This country's former status as superpower and the suspicious attitudes of the "reformed" elites toward every foreign project or initiative, as well as the resistance to Westernization traditional for this culture are among many factors that have imposed limits both theoretical and practical (or policy-making) on the neoliberal paradigm of democratization and modernization. This is not to say, however, that Russian political elites or political scientists ignored or neglected the impact of the
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.1998.103.issue-4
Date: 01 1998
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: This is a fully coauthored article. Earlier drafts were presented at the Paul F. Lazars‐feld Center for the Social Sciences at Columbia University, the Workshop on Politics, Power, and Protest at New York University, the Colloquium on Culture and Politics at the New School for Social Research, the meeting of the American Sociological Association at Los Angeles, and various seminars at the New School for Social Research and Princeton University. We would like to thank the participants in those forums for their many useful comments. We would also like to thank Jeffrey Alexander, Bernard Barber, Richard Bernstein, Donald Black, Mary Blair‐Loy, David Gibson, Chad Goldberg, Jeff Goodwin, Michael Hanagan, Hans Joas, Michele Lamont, Edward Lehman, Calvin Morrill, Michael Muhlhaus, Shepley Orr, Margarita Palacios, Mimi Sheller, Charles Tilly, Diane Vaughan, Loi'c Wacquant, and Harrison White for their many illuminating insights, criticisms, and suggestions. Direct correspondence to Mustafa Emirbayer, Department of Sociology, New School for Social Research, 65 Fifth Avenue, New York, New York 10003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/231294
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2001.112.issue-1
Date: 10 2001
Author(s): Young, Jeffrey T.
Abstract: Young’s new book on Adam Smith provides a careful textual analysis of Smith’s two major works:
The Theory of Moral SentimentsandThe Wealth of Nations. Young argues, with good textual evidence, that Smith did not divide economics from moral theory and that, indeed, Smith thought of economics as a moral science. Young traces Smith’s economic and moral philosophy to Aristotle and Hume, and he points out, correctly, that “self‐interest itself had a significant moral dimension in Smith” (p. 173). Thus Smith’s alleged focus on self‐interest inThe Wealth of Nationshas normative dimensions not always recognized by all Smith scholars. Young uses Smith’s notions of the impartial spectator and benevolence as well as his theory of justice to link the two texts. This is a controversial conclusion since neither the impartial spectator nor benevolence is evident as an important concept inThe Wealth of Nations. Young also argues that Smith divides the economic sphere from the political sphere (see his matrix on p. 158), a questionable conclusion in light of Smith’s focus on political economy inThe Wealth of Nations. Young’s book also suffers from his apparently not having read Amartya Sen’s or my works on Smith, both of which make many of the same arguments Young develops. Still, Young has added further to the growing literature that reads Smith as a serious moral philosopher whose theory of self‐interest is far from libertarian and who neither divided economics from ethics nor politics from either.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/322762
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: et.2002.112.issue-2
Date: 01 2002
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: The necessity of both solidarity and proceduralism thus holds for both distributive and criminal justice. In the end, Ricoeur remains committed to notions that ground the just polity in community and mutual sharing without thinking that these notions require us to dispense with the formalism of procedures of justice. While the latter are not sufficient on their own to create or sustain a just society, while, indeed, formal procedures always presuppose some conception of the good, procedural conceptions allow us to recognize each other as subjects of rights. Although it is not always clear that Ricoeur succeeds in reconciling Rawls and Walzer or Habermas and Gadamer, he does provide a fresh perspective on current debates within his own interesting account of the structure of moral action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/324242
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2002.28.issue-4
Date: 06 2002
Author(s): Vidal Fernando
Abstract: For an illuminating discussion and critique, see Kathleen V. Wilkes,
Real People: Personal Identity without Thought Experiments(Oxford, 1988), esp. chap. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/341240
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2003.108.issue-4
Date: 01 2003
Author(s): Lichterman Paul
Abstract: Of course, researchers routinely pursue some of these questions, through different methods of research. Part of our methodological contribution is to bring them together in the concept of
group style.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/367920
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2003.44.issue-3
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Duranti Alessandro
Abstract: Ahearn, always a perceptive writer, brings out a fear that many linguistic anthropologists have but rarely expressthe fear of being assimilated to sociocultural anthropology and thus losing their identity through the forfeiting of their specificity. This is the flip side of William Labovs original wish that sociolinguistics might disappear once linguistics agreed to see language as a social phenomenon (that this has not happened is both an indictment of linguistics narrowmindedness and a validation of Labovs and other sociolinguists efforts to develop sociolinguistics into a vibrant independent field). The question then arises why we should worry about being assimilated. Shouldnt we, on the contrary, welcome such a possibility, to be seen as a validation of our work or as the mainstreaming of our concerns? The problem is not in the future, which cannot be predicted, but in the past. Everything we know from our earlier experiences warns us that an anthropology without a distinct group of language specialists is likely to be an anthropology with a nave understanding of communication. We have seen it happen already. When anthropology departments decide not to have a linguistic subfield, thinking that they dont need one, their students tend to take language for granted, identifying it with a vague notion of discourse. It is for this reason that we need to sharpen our historical, theoretical, and methodological understanding of what it means to study language as culture. We owe it first to our students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/368118
Journal Title: The Quarterly Review of Biology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: qrb.2002.77.issue-4
Date: 12 2000
Author(s): DeBevoise M B
Abstract: In the course of the book, no real convergence is achieved; each one ends where he started, asserting his own beliefs, visions, and concerns. Has anything been gained in the process? The intense and occasionally pointed dialogues bring forth an incremental, but substantial clarification of the issues at hand, the issues at stake, and their potential (but not actual) interaction. The fact of the matter is that neuroscience has no privileged bearing on human affairs simply because it deals with the brain. Why push it to realms in which it does not belong?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/374515
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ajs.2002.108.issue-1
Date: 07 2002
Author(s): Luhmann Niklas
Abstract: Theories are always, in some way, about their theorists. While Luhmann’s variant of mutant functionalism is not palatable to American tastes, his theories are as reflective of late‐20th‐century European sensibilities as Parsons’s were of mid‐20th‐century America or Bellah and Geertz’s of the upheaval of the 1960s and 1970s. Indeed, some art critics have warmed to Luhmann’s book as an exemplar of one of the newer “cool” theories of art; that is, those that challenge more subject‐centered and humanist theories and aim to accommodate the growth of new mediums such as digital art and cyberspace. But in any conception of art that includes culture, the medium is only as good as the meaning it conveys. And it is the meaning of art that is sorely lacking in Luhmann’s appraisal. Paul Ricoeur once wrote that “materialism is the truth of a world without truth.” It might then be said of Luhmann’s conception of the art system that it is the truth of art without meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/376294
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2003.29.issue-4
Date: 06 2003
Author(s): Mialet Hélène
Abstract: I would like to thank the participants of seminars and colloquia at the Max Planck Institute for the History of Science (Berlin), at the Department of Science and Technology Studies at Cornell, and at the ST&S and History of Medicine Colloquia at the University of Michigan for their helpful comments on earlier versions of this paper. I would also like to thank Robin Boast, Stephen Hirschauer, Michael Lynch, Michael Wintroub, and Skuli Sigurdsson for their suggestions, comments, and criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/377721
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ca.2004.45.issue-1
Date: 02 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Doctrine and method, theory and interpretation are not necessarily coordinate. Were such coordination possible, a metacritical stance would be required. By accepting uncritically the presuppositions that lie behind psychoanalytic metapsychology, Juillerat abrogates, in my view, ethnological responsibility, that is, the responsibility to measure in a receptive manner the presuppositions of ones hermeneutic against those of the culture one is studying. Though his attention to ethnographic detail leads Juillerat to refine psychoanalytic doctrine, it confirms the epistemological and hermeneutic assumptions of that doctrine (e.g., notions of the unconscious, id, ego, and superego, drives, repression, and, indeed, psychic space). Yafar myth and ritual as he presents them become allegories of that doctrineallegories, I would argue, of allegories. There would appear to be no escape, were it not for the Yafar voices that sound through Juillerats psychoanalytically predetermined presentations. (He offers us almost no contextualized verbatim texts in these essays, though he does in his monographs.) They remind us that, as LviStrauss demonstrated, myths are readily translated one into another, particularly when they are decontextualized. What is of ethnographic, indeed, psychoanalytic import is howand perhaps whytranslation is arrested and a particular myth (e.g., the Oedipal tale) becomes so authoritative that it has the power of promiscuous reduction. Though fascinated by the range of Yafar cultural expression, Juillerat fails to consider the implications of Yafars refusal to reduce their corpus of mythology and ritual to a single mytha singular ritual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/381011
Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jbs.2005.44.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Seed John
Abstract: See Timothy Larsen, “Victorian Nonconformity and the Memory of the Ejected Ministers: The Impact of the Bicentennial Commemorations of 1862,” in
The Church Retrospective: Papers Read at the 1995 Summer Meeting and 1996 Winter Meeting of the Ecclesiastical Society, ed. R. N. Swanson (Woodbridge, 1997), pp. 459–73. The centenary in 1762 was not apparently commemorated in any public way, though a few years later, 1688 was celebrated by Dissenters on a considerable scale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424945
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Marion Jean‐Luc
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, “Herméneutique de l’idée de Révélation,” in
La Révélation, ed. Daniel Coppieters de Gibson (Bruxelles: Facultés universitaires Saint‐Louis, 1977), p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/424974
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-3
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Marino John A.
Abstract: Braudel,
The Mediterranean,2d ed. (1972), 2:1243–44. Among many references to Machiavelli, see, e.g., Machiavelli,The Prince,chap. xxv, beginning of last paragraph: “I conclude, then, that so long as Fortune varies and men stand still, they will prosper while they suit the times, and fail when they do not.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/425442
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2004.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2004
Author(s): Guillory John
Abstract: On the question of the relation between writing and media, which is perhaps
thequestion of a larger inquiry beyond my own, I have benefited from exchanges with Alan Liu. See his “The Future Literary: Literature and the Culture of Information,” inTime and the Literary,ed. Karen Newman et al. (New York, 2002), pp. 61–100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427304
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: This idea of the deliberate recovery of theological tensions by crossing religious boundaries can be understood in terms of the ecumenical concept of the complementarity of conflicting doctrinal formulations. Opposing doctrinal formulations are regarded as complementary expressions of a theological truth so profound as to be irreducible to any single formulation. For the ecumenical use of the complementarity concept, see, e.g., Avery Dulles, “Paths to Doctrinal Agreement: Ten Theses,”
Theological Studies47 (1986): 44–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427313
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2004.76.issue-4
Date: 12 1997
Author(s): Woodall Christopher
Abstract: Scholars and their students interested in the field would do well to begin with these studies, despite some unevenness in period, place, and theme. Developments in the twentieth century, for example, are not well served, especially as their globalization bursts all traditional boundaries in the discipline, making a historical perspective essential to an understanding of ongoing transformations in literate life everywhere, not just in the West. Similarly, the absence of illustrations undermines the potential value of these books as introductions to the history of reading. Much of the work here depends on the material objects that readers actually had; without images of them, the reader develops less of a sense of the field. Finally, the exclusion of the essays on correspondence from the original collection is deeply regrettable; Chartier’s summary of their implications in the introduction hardly does justice to them, especially to the important study of the 1847 postal survey by Dauphin and two other colleagues. The translations are generally accurate, but the indexes are barely adequate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/427573
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Robbins, Jeffrey W.
Abstract: While sharing the aim of relating philosophy and theology, I do not think the project is best accomplished by thinking ontotheologically (at least, not in its Heideggerian sense). What is needed is to insist on a sharper distinction between ontotheological philosophy and religious theology so that we can better understand how they might relate. And here again, I agree with Robbins for different reasons: Ricoeur, Lévinas, and Marion are key sources in this project, for their work maintains the distinction that it calls into question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428537
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-1
Date: 01 2005
Author(s): Bourgeois, Patrick L.
Abstract: Ricoeur gets the relation of critique and reason right, in Bourgeois’s eyes, as a philosopher who sees imagination tied to thinking at the boundary (not limit) of reason. In a chapter examining Derrida’s views on “sign, time, and trace” (chap. 7), Bourgeois elaborates Derrida’s view that Edmund Husserl’s distinction between meaningful expression and sign depends on a stable borderline between primary and secondary memory (or retention and recollection) in his theory of “the living present” (or duration), which, Derrida asserts, is phenomenologically unavailable. In light of this analysis, Bourgeois draws an interesting contrast between Derrida’s insistence on a discrete closure of meaning and Ricoeur’s theory of language and imagination based in a view of the living present of meaning and experience that refuses such discrete closure. Once more, however, Bourgeois overreaches when he attempts to identify these accurately drawn contrasts with the limit/boundary distinction. In Bourgeois’s reading of Ricoeur, imagination does not produce reason from below (as in Heidegger); rather, “reason itself limits knowledge to experience from above, putting the imagination in a central position both in knowledge and thinking” (p. 131). A productive imagination of living metaphor takes place at the boundary of reason, allowing the living present in meaning and action to escape deconstruction’s critique while still incorporating a positive relation to alterity. Nevertheless, Bourgeois may be drawing the wrong conclusion about these contrasts, for it seems possible to read both Ricoeur and Derrida as seeking to work at the boundary (not limit) of reason and to think somehow the presentation of the Idea in the Kantian sense. Whereas Ricoeur’s theory of metaphor and narrative allows him to present the semantic content of the Ideas of Reason positively, these remain for Derrida (as for Kant) unrepresentable, or “the impossible.” This problem has been Derrida’s enduring concern since his 1962
Introduction to Husserl’s “The Origin of Geometry.”The real difference between the thought of Ricoeur and Derrida is the distinctive way each thinker supplements phenomenology to take into account the creativity of meaning at the boundary of reason. For Derrida, it is thedifféranceof deconstruction; for Ricoeur, the graft of hermeneutics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/428538
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.30.issue-4
Date: 06 2005
Author(s): McNay Lois
Abstract: See especially Diana Tietjens Meyers,
Self, Society, and Personal Choice(New York: Columbia University Press, 1989), and Diana Tietjens Meyers, ed.,Feminists Rethink the Self(Boulder, CO: Westview, 1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/429806
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Mandry, Christof
Abstract: This is an engaging book for specialists in theological ethics and especially for those interested in the contributions of hermeneutical thinking to ethics. One can only hope that Mandry will continue to develop this line of reflection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/430555
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2005.75.issue-2
Date: 04 2005
Author(s): Jones Bonna
Abstract: Hence, our choice of philosophies should not be limited to the two main philosophies identified by Budd but rather could take up ideas from process thinking, which is a quieter but nevertheless relevant philosophy to which LIS should attend. By valuing the processes and articulating this with better abstractions more congruent with our action, we not only further our own project; we also sustain a vital engagement with the projects of individuals. We more clearly articulate the library in the life of the user, to use the words of Wiegand [
2].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431329
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: signs.2005.31.issue-1
Date: 09 2005
Author(s): Johar Schueller Malini
Abstract: However, Somerville often uses strategies very similar to Butler's in seeing the primacy of the sexual. See, e.g., the analysis of Jean Toomer based on the term
queer(Somerville2000, 136) and the insistence that compulsory heterosexuality is “integral” to the logic of racial segregation (137).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431372
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Lee Hyo‐Dong
Abstract: For the notion of strategic essentialism, see Gayatri Chakravorty Spivak, “Subaltern Studies: Deconstructing Historiography,” in her
The Spivak Reader, 214–21. Serene Jones has drawn attention to the fact that the poststructuralist theoretical assumptions about the always oppressive nature of binarisms do not necessarily hold up under the pressures of concrete political struggles and that, in order to strengthen the bond of solidarity for a coalition of diverse social and cultural identities, what is called for is some kind of grand narrative that clearly defines the powers to be resisted and dismantled. I think this applies to a coalition of different religious identities as well. Serene Jones, “Cultural Labor and Theological Critique,” in Brown, Davaney, and Tanner, eds.,Converging on Culture, 166–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431810
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Maggi Armando
Abstract: 1 Cor. 13:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431811
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2005.85.issue-4
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Young III William W.
Abstract: Frei recognized the need for greater plurality within his own reading as well, particularly with regard to the “Gospel narrative” set forth in
The Identity of Jesus Christ. See Higton,Christ, Providence, and History, 200–201.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/431812
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2006.32.issue-2
Date: 01 2006
Author(s): Williams Jay
Abstract: Mitchell, “
Critical Inquiryand the Ideology of Pluralism,”Critical Inquiry8 (Summer 1982): 613.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500701
Journal Title: American Journal of Education
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: aje.2006.112.issue-3
Date: 05 2006
Author(s): Schweber Simone
Abstract: Brooks (
2001) reported, for example, that a Pentecostal minister in Franklin County, the location symbolizing Red America in his article, “regards such culture warriors as Jerry Falwell and Pat Robertson as loose cannons.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/500714
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): van der Ven Johannes A.
Abstract: Nevertheless, empiricism does not have the last word—it perhaps never has the last word, not even in what might be called “positivist empiricism,” and certainly not in practical theology, as this discipline is characterized by the interaction between empiricism and normativeness. We both share this conviction—the fifth characteristic. Therefore human rights—no matter how contested they are, which is neither surprising nor extraordinary—offer an important perspective, as the normative criteria they embody always require critical and constructive reflection. In the last part of the article I have even presented them as regulative principles of truth and justice, as a result of which they offer a kind of worldview‐related and morality‐related infrastructure for the social institutions that determine human actions in societal and personal life—the sixth characteristic. After all, for both Browning and me the ultimate issue is—the seventh characteristic—the vitality of the Christian tradition in terms of relevance and identity in the context of a multicivilization society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/503696
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-2
Date: 06 2006
Author(s): Todorova Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 260. It was only at the last stages of correction of this manuscript that I learned about the work of Nikolai Voukov on the destruction of Dimitrov's mausoleum. While I find it an excellent contribution, Voukov's take on the event and its meaning is somewhat different than my own. I would like to express my gratitude to the author for sending me his manuscript, whose shorter version was published as “The Destruction of Georgi Dimitrov's Mausoleum in Sofia: The ‘Incoincidence' between Memory and Its Referents,” in
Places of Memory,ed. Augustin Ioan, special issue ofOctogon(Bucharest, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505801
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jr.2006.86.issue-4
Date: 10 2006
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Whatever normative conclusions may be drawn in the end, theological ethicists ignore the unique situation of children and childhood at their own peril. Neglecting such marginalized groups as women and minorities weakened the voice of theological ethics in the past, both by silently playing into larger social wrongs and by failing to learn and grow from those silenced. Childhood in the United States and the world presents theological ethics today with a new and different but just as acute social challenge. Methodologically, since children cannot speak up as fully as can adults for themselves, theological ethicists should engage as deeply as possible with children’s actual social experiences, including through the sophisticated observational work of the human sciences, in order more creatively to understand and respond. Substantively, childhood demands at the very least renewed attention to the asymmetrical tensions of human moral responsibility, the senses in which others demand of those around them creative self‐transformation. This childist gesture of responsiveness and self‐critique has already begun to animate the human sciences. How much more, then, should it be welcomed and deepened further by Christian ethicists, who in one way or another trace a transformed world to the possibilities incarnated in an infant’s birth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/505893
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: isis.2006.97.issue-2
Date: 06 2004.
Author(s): Kern Stephen
Abstract: Kern’s analysis is lucid and his thesis is ultimately persuasive. He argues that “the novel is emphatically historical in capturing a new sense of the complexity and uncertainty of causal understanding” as he traces the “sensitivity” of contemporary authors like Don DeLillo to “the significance of the new technologies of transportation, communication and investigation that transformed causal understanding in modern society” (p. 369). This is an observation with which many literary critics would agree. There are resemblances here to the methodology deployed by Ronald Thomas in his seminal and startlingly successful work
Detective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science(Cambridge, 1999): narrative registers in its very construction the pressures of scientific and epistemological change. Yet a comparison with Thomas’s work reveals perhaps one of the few flaws of Kern’s study. IfA Cultural History of Causalityis directed toward the historian of science, one must question whether novels are ever really adequate source material for the construction of a hypothesis regarding nonfictional understandings of causality and probability. Paul Ricoeur reminds us inTime and Narrative(Chicago, 1984–1988) that literature has been seen since ancient times as “an ethical laboratory where the artist pursues through the mode of fiction experimentation with values” (Vol. 1, p. 59): fiction is thus both tethered to, yet at the same time distinct from, the world of the actual and the real. Kern acknowledges this to be so, yet his theory of mimesis, of realistic representation, seems to exclude any genuine engagement with tropes of playfulness, indeterminacy, symbolism, and ambiguity that mark literature just as deeply as any desire to replicate the real. Kern notes that he relies “primarily on novels by male authors about male murderers, because [his] method is comparative and requires controlling variables to focus on historical change” (p. 21). This seems to evade a broader question about the extent to which novels can be understood as “evidence” in any sense at all, or whether Kern should be focusing on trial reports rather than their fictionalized representations. This difficulty would be obviated if the focus of the work were an understanding of the impact of developments in scientific theory on narrative form, yet Kern seems reluctant to move fully in this direction. And indeed, if the ideal reader ofA Cultural History of Causalityis in fact a literary critic, he or she may be inclined to probe a number of Kern’s other assumptions as well—he is perhaps a little too inclined to assert that the Victorian novel is artistically “tidy,” that its patterns of closure are always neat and carefully wrought, as an expression of what Thomas Vargish has called “the providential aesthetic” in his study of the same name (Virginia, 1985). Scholars of nineteenth‐century fiction may perhaps feel that Kern’s descriptions of such neat closures sit uncomfortably with their readings ofBleak House(which is as much about the loss and destruction of evidence as it is about its recovery and careful explication) orOur Mutual FriendorDaniel DerondaorThe Brothers Karamazov(each of which problematizes our sense of a character’s relentless movement toward transgression, judgment, and punishment or acquittal). One is left with a sense that Kern occasionally deploys the term “Victorian” in a rather unsophisticated fashion: as Thomas has shown inDetective Fiction and the Rise of Forensic Science,even the most carefully crafted detective story of the nineteenth century can raise for readers and critics crucial questions about individual and national identity and the power of public surveillance. Yet these criticisms should not undermine a reader’s sense of Kern’s achievement in this book: it is a vast, ambitious attempt to effect a synthesis of scientific thought and literary experimentation, and on the whole it succeeds well.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/507355
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 508383
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: In this respect, my project has similarities with the “multidimensional hermeneutic” approach to religious ethical inquiry proposed by William Schweiker in “On the Future of Religious Ethics: Keeping Religious Ethics, Religious and Ethics,”
Journal of the American Academy of Religion74, no. 1 (March 2006): 135–51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/508386
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522257
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In a first reading of the book, I was critical of this emphasis on moral motivations, since it seemed to be overburdened by a psychological approach. But, on a second reading, I had to refrain from my critique. Ricoeur makes the point that he has no intention to “take the place of a resolution for the perplexities raised by the very concept of a struggle, still less of a resolution of the conflicts” (218). In other words, Ricoeur is proposing a well‐needed complement to the institutional design trend that has invaded contemporary political philosophy. Contrary to many, he stands before the most perplexing issue of recognition with eyes wide open: indeed, demands of recognition may never end and take the form of an “unhappy consciousness” (218). One can try to resolve this potential inflation of claims by sorting out political and substantive issues. But a solution that takes only this path could create vast areas of frustration that canny elites have learned to fuel, or come to neglect recognition claims on the grounds that they hide a Pandora's box waiting to be opened. I suspect that this neglect mechanism is one of the reasons why so many legitimate recognition claims still languish in limbo as we speak. The course taken by Ricoeur may be difficult to square with the mainstream approach in contemporary political philosophy—political liberalism, to name it—but it nonetheless deserves careful attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/510704
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: lq.2006.76.issue-3
Date: 07 2006
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Three general features of this method can be noted in advance. First, this method must be immanent or internal to its subject matter. Dialectical theorists reject outright the idea that the thinker can occupy some privileged Archimedean point outside the subject of investigation. … A second feature of dialectical method is its dialogical character. Theorizing is an activity taking place not simply within the mind but between minds. Thinking is dialogical because it always takes the form of an exchange or a conversation between ourselves, our contemporaries, and our predecessors. … Third, the dialogical element is related to the historical dimension of theory. [
40, pp. 167–68]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511140
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: jmh.2006.78.issue-4
Date: 12 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: Instructive as his book is, Popkin could also have explored in greater depth yet the relationship between historical scholarship and expressions of the self. By focusing on autobiographies alone, he misses an opportunity to examine how such texts and scholarly publications related to (and possibly affected) one another, most notably in their divergent or convergent patterns of self‐representation. The boundary between autobiographical and scholarly writings may be more porous than Popkin intimates. Paul Hollander’s recent study of academic acknowledgments arrives, for instance, at conclusions that mirror Popkin’s regarding self‐representation and professional norms (“Acknowledgments: An Academic Ritual,”
Academic Questions15, no. 1 [2001–2]: 63–76). Likewise, one could question why Popkin limited himself to the discursive analysis of published sources and “the motives that historian‐autobiographers acknowledge in their texts” (78). Autobiographies are also social practices that call for systematic research outside the text, in archival and published sources (and, perhaps, interviews as well). But Popkin is too good a historian not to know this. His book is by and about historians; it is dedicated to historians, but it is not only for historians. Its chief objective may well be to show how much the historian’s autobiography has contributed “to the literature of personal life writing” (8). In this respect as in many others,History, Historians, and Autobiographyis a success.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511206
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ci.2007.33.issue-2
Date: 01 2007
Author(s): Gasché Rodolphe
Abstract: See Derrida,
Passions(Paris, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/511505
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509553
Date: 04 2007
Author(s): Wall, John
Abstract: Wall has skillfully woven the exegetical, dialogical, and constructive parts of his project into a thought‐provoking and readable work.
Moral Creativitycould be profitably read by anyone familiar with contemporary debates in religious and philosophical ethics. It will both broaden the appeal of Ricoeur’s writings and advance the conversation about the relation of ethics to poetics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513233
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522064
Date: 03 2007
Author(s): Harootunian Harry
Abstract: I had the benefit of reading versions of this paper at a number of institutions, and I wish to record the help I received at the University of Chicago, the University of Michigan, the New School for Social Research, Waseda University (Tokyo), and the University of Washington. I also want to thank Kristin Ross, Carol Gluck, and Hyun Ok Park for commenting on earlier revisions of the manuscript.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/513523
Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: ssr.1999.73.issue-4
Date: 12 1999
Author(s): Kondrat Mary Ellen
Abstract: Professional self‐awareness is widely considered a necessary condition for competent social work practice. Alternate prescriptions for self‐awareness rely implicitly on varying definitions of what it means to be a “self” and what it means to be “aware.” I will review three approaches to professional self‐awareness conventionally adopted in the literature: (
a) simple conscious awareness (awareness of whatever is being experienced), (b) reflective awareness (awareness of a self who is experiencing something), and (c) reflexive awareness (the self's awareness of how his or her awareness is constituted in direct experience). Strengths and limitations of these three epistemological approaches are discussed. An alternate framework, based on Anthony Giddens's “structuration theory,” is developed and advanced as a more macro‐level and less exclusively psychological understanding of practitioner self‐awareness. The article concludes with illustrations from practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/514441
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: Bloom,
American Religion, 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519770
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509555
Date: 10 2007
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Hacker, “Distinctive Features,” 95 and passim; Michael A. Sells,
Mystical Languages of Unsaying(Chicago, 1994), 1–13, esp. 12. Note that Hacker acknowledges that Śaṅkara’s discourse on brahman is all the more alive (lebendiger) for its terminological imprecision (“Distinctive Features,” 95).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519771
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 509554
Date: 07 2007
Author(s): Browning, Don S.
Abstract: While this book will be of great interest to Christian ethicists as well as to religious and moral educators, it should also be read by social scientists, philosophers, and evolutionary psychologists. Browning’s view that nontheological disciplines depend on images of the human that play a guiding role for their research, as well as for the interpretation of their results, points to the continued need for more interdisciplinary work. According to this point of view, theology should play a public role in identifying such prescientific or preempirical images as well as in describing and advancing refined and responsible images based on the Christian tradition. The present volume goes a long way in either direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/519893
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 518276
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Plate Liedeke
Abstract: My encounter with this student suggests another way of thinking about the political value of rewriting. Countering all the more blasé signals my students were giving me that it was most naive to think the retelling of stories from another point of view could have any political impact, it is evidence that women’s rewritings of classic texts can still affect young women, still make them think and make them want to contribute to the discussions, the debates that shape the public sphere. Although we need, of course, to factor in serendipity—the student was on holiday and thought she had discovered a little‐known book when in fact it was a
New York Timesbest seller—there is definitely a sense in which her discovery marked a moment in her life and signals the development of a feminist consciousness (broadly defined as a certain awareness of gender identity combined with a critical position in respect to misogyny and patriarchy and a conviction that things can be changed). There is no denying that increasing individualization at all levels of society has caused the loss of a sense of collective action and political projects. This is equally true for ideas of improvement, emancipation, and modernization, the responsibility of which has largely been shifted to the individual, whose “human rights,” as Bauman argues, are redefined as “the right of individuals to stay different and to pick and choose at will their own models of happiness and fitting life‐style” (2000;2005, 29). In this deregulated and privatized sociopolitical context that knows no common cause, re‐vision can only fail to formulate enabling fictions for a better future for all. Yet in its capacity to speak to individuals, it can still draw them into visions of community and collectivity. Re‐vision may thus not be the lifeline that is to haul us out of patriarchy any more, but as a structure of address that engages readers into contemplating differences, it remains one of the ways in which we keep sane and critical and thinking, moved by the stories of long‐forgotten lives into participating in an open public sphere.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/521054
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527832
Date: 01 2008
Author(s): Scimeca Ross
Abstract: In this article, we have argued that the application of library practice requires a suspension of truth. We support this by introducing a new theory of truth that is rooted in historicism. One of the overarching missions of library practice is to acquire, manage, preserve, and make accessible human knowledge. While there are pragmatic and sociopolitical considerations that often constrict fulfillment of this mission, the public purpose of librarianship in a free and open society nonetheless dictates that materials be made accessible regardless of what the society at the current time or the majority of people within a culturally defined place consider as true.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/523909
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 526095
Date: 09 2007
Abstract: Zulawski, Ann.
Unequal Cures: Public Health and Political Change in Bolivia, 1900‐1950.Durham, North Carolina: Duke University Press, 2007. 253 pp. $21.95 (paper); $74.95 (cloth).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/526093
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Woolf Daniel
Abstract: [[START 06A00070]] Reviews of Books and Films neered research in this latter area in "A Feminine Past? Gender, Genre and Historical Knowledge in England, 1500-1800," American Historical Review 102:3 [June 1997]: 645-79). But these are ungenerous caveats: this is a meticulously researched study in which analysis is ably supported by a range of impres- sive statistical data and well-chosen (and sometimes entertaining) case studies of individual readers, pub- lishers, and publications. ROSEMARY MITCHELL University of Leeds J. G. A. POCocK. [[END 06A00070]] [[START 06A00080]] Barbarism and Religion: Volume Three, The First Decline and Fall. New York: Cam- bridge University Press. 2003. Pp. xiii, 527. $60.00. In reviewing for this journal the first two volumes of J. G. A. Pocock's Barbarism and Religion, the present reviewer observed that there is a symphonic quality to Pocock's writing, as polyphonic lines in the form of concepts are spun out, developed, inverted, and brought into counterpoint with others. This third movement offers a scherzo reminiscent of the author's 1975 book, The Machiavellian Moment, and it sounds some of the same chords (republicanism, political cycles, civic virtue, arms vs. commerce). The subtitle of volume three is deceptively simple: it refers to the first (and best-known) volume of Edward Gibbon's masterpiece, which he published in 1776. That book commenced (after a very brief account of the structure of the Augustan principate) with the "Five Good" Antonine emperors from Nerva to Mar- cus Aurelius, and concluded (narratively) with Con- stantine's defeat of Licinius and restoration of a unified rule-a temporary resolution immediately fol- lowed by two chapters on Christianity that seem jarringly out of place, given the fact that Christians are scarcely mentioned through the previous fourteen chapters. Gibbon's readers had to wait until 1781 for the story to pick up again. Exposition of this "first decline and fall" in fact occupies only the last hundred pages of Pocock's volume and therefore serves as both a climax to the Pocockian story so far, and a bridge to the next volume. Volume one of Barbarism and Religion situated Gibbon intellectually within a number of different European "Enlightenments"; volume two located him on a different axis, among the various writers of "narratives of civil government" in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. (We are still missing the parallel vector running through ecclesiastical histori- ography, although Eusebius, Augustine, Orosius, and Otto of Freising figure prominently here. Christianity only begins to signal its importance with chapter fifteen of Gibbon; where he used ecclesiastical author- ities, up to that point, it was to document civil rather than sacred history.) Volume three moves in a third, diachronic dimension, tracing the transformations of key themes, in particular the idea of "decline and fall" itself, from very ancient origins up to the Scot Adam Ferguson's Progress and Termination of the Roman Republic (which appeared seven years after Gibbon's first volume and is thus offered for comparison rather than direct influence). The flight of concepts and motifs is dizzying, the lengthy quotations apposite, and as with the previous volumes, one can scarcely miss a sentence without losing a nuance or a parenthetical qualification. The theme of decline and fall, which informs the conception and beginning of Gibbon's book, would eventually yield to "barbarism and reli- gion" as its principal causes in later volumes (along with over-taxation, which Gibbon mentions at the close of chapter fourteen). But behind that idea, which only gradually emerged from Polybian political cycles via medieval notions of the translatio imperii, lay much else, including sequential recognitions of crucial turn- ing points in Roman history going back to Gracchan land reforms in the late second century B.C.E. The core problem, historiographically, remains how to explain why Gibbon, committed from an early stage to a Tacitean narrative, chose to begin his account not with the Julio-Claudians but instead at the "Antonine moment" of imperial zenith achieved by Trajan. (As he once did with cinquecento Florence, Pocock inclines to define major turning points or episodes, both historical and intellectual, in terms of "moments"-a historical Constantinean and historiographical Zosiman moment lie ahead, and the Machiavellian version even puts in a cameo appearance when this volume reaches the early eighteenth century.) Gibbon knew intimately the char- acter of Augustan rule and the flaws of the late republic; he had read his Sallust as well as Tacitus. The later imperial historians, especially Appian of Alexan- dria and Ammianus Marcellinus, also figure in this account as historians of decline, but of a decline that takes a great deal of time-all the way to the "Illyrian" recovery of the late third century-really to become unmistakeable. The subjects confronted by Gibbon's nearly two millennia of predecessors include the military problem of restless troops settling in an empire that has con- quered all its rivals and closed itself off from further expansion; the civic conflict between virtue and cor- ruption (or rather, the way in which virtue leads to military conquest and empire, which in turn produce an oriental softness); the role of the soldiers in making emperors and especially the legions' realization, in the Year of Four Emperors (68/69 C.E.), that emperors could be made "elsewhere than Rome"; the place of the Augustinian-Orosian "two cities" view of history; the vicissitudes in republicanism (an issue revived in the fifteenth century by Leonardi Bruni, who as a non-Roman concerned mainly with Florence was able to see the empire's longue duree for the first time as declinatio rather than translatio and to initiate, though not complete, a gradual transition in historiography from the latter to the former); and the extension of citizenship to the provinces, along, soon, with the capacity of provincials to be proclaimed emperor. All of these streams converge, not entirely satisfactorily AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 470 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530341
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587019
Date: April 2004
Author(s): Dolan Anne
Abstract: [[START 06A00080]] Methods/Theory from either Gibbon's or Pocock's point of view, in the making of the first volume of the Decline and Fall. In Pocock's summary of Gibbon, the Augustan principate was a system that bumped along for a quarter millennium until, following fifty years of mili- tary anarchy, the Illyrian Diocletian divided the empire into two halves ruled by two senior and two junior emperors. Diocletian himself abandoned any remain- ing pretence that the emperor was merely princeps and imperator, openly assuming virtually an Asiatic despo- tism, styled dominus and secluded from public access. This set the stage for the establishment of an entirely new kind of regime under Constantine in the next generation. The very resilience of the Augustan-Anto- nine system up to that point posed narrative and explanatory challenges for Gibbon in itself, since it occurred despite runs of weak emperors, intermittent monsters (Caligula, Nero, Domitian, Commodus, Ca- racalla), the progressive emasculation of the senate (effectively completed by Septimius Severus early in the third century), and the growing independence of the military. Gibbon's flowing recit is bracketed by peintures (the gallicisms are Pocock's) of Antonine civilization at the start and of Christianity in chapter fifteen. In between the beginning and end of his volume, Gibbon appears to have realized that he had, in a way, painted himself into a corner, given that he had over a thousand years still to narrate, and a radical shift in priorities and design proved necessary. Future volumes of the Decline and Fall would give both the foreign tribes and the Christians much greater prom- inence, and before the last volume's conclusion, a Tacitean account of the decline and fall of western antiquity would evolve into an "enlightened narrative" of the triumph of barbarism and religion, recovery from which had only really begun in Gibbon's own age of civility. This volume is every bit as persuasive as its prede- cessors and, perhaps because it is as much recit as the others were peintures, it is also rather more compelling a read. More than the first two volumes of his work, volume three of Barbarism and Religion leaves one hanging; like Gibbon and his first readers, we are only at the Milvian Bridge, pondering what will follow with Constantine. One hopes that, unlike those readers, we will not have to wait five years for the next episode. DANIEL WOOLF University of Alberta [[END 06A00080]] [[START 06A00090]] LAWRENCE W. MCBRIDE, editor. Reading Irish Histories: Texts, Contexts, and Memory in Modem Ireland. Port- land, Oreg.: Four Courts Press. 2003. Pp. 233. $55.00. The final essay of this collection closes with the following sentiment from Sean Farrell Moran: "Like Socrates and Plato who stood firmly against the influ- ence of myth in Athenian democracy, academic histo- rians will step in to attempt to correct the misconcep- tions of Irish citizens" (p. 218). In the previous essay, one such "academic historian," Ben Novick, stepped into the breach in the following fashion: "Writing, as discussed throughout this book, is a primary means of disseminating information" (p. 211). Socrates and Plato have indeed met their match. It is perhaps unfortunate that this collection, edited by Lawrence W. McBride, closes with one of the most arrogant pieces of scholarship that I have ever had the displeasure of reading. The conceit of the comparison quoted above, and the condescension of statements such as "Perhaps we should pity the peasants. They made the mistake of remembering their past incor- rectly" and "The common Irish man and woman must then be re-educated about Ireland's past and abandon their memories" (p. 218), make it difficult to commend the essay as a fine conclusion to an exceptional book. One can only hope that Moran is trying to be ironic. But it would be unfair to condemn this book on the basis of one author's misguided faith in the powers of the "academic historian." Indeed, the book, although most worthy at times, has enough problems without that. The intention of the collection is clearly estab- lished in the editor's preface: to "examine how a variety of historical narratives were delivered through the written word, but with special attention paid to how readers might have reacted to these texts" (p. 13). The difficulty is that the reader is the one consistent absentee from the essays that follow. From Paul Townend's chapter on the reading rooms of the na- tional movements of the late nineteenth century to Novick's chapter on the newspaper of the Irish Volun- teers, the reader is little more than a shadowy figure. Even the most basic details are ignored; there is no attempt to estimate circulation figures for books or newspapers. Anne Kane's attempts at "reconstructing" (p. 46) what a newspaper reader during the land war might have felt amounts to little more than an essay in speculative sociology. Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz seem to get more attention than the actual people who "may have" (p. 46) and "could well have" (p. 56) responded to the newspapers examined. It also seems unlikely that any farmer facing eviction could have conceived of the land war as a "ritual process" (p. 45). But Kane's essay is not the only one at fault in this fashion. The extent of the readers' absence almost begs one to question why the editor made such a particular point of drawing "special attention" to the reader at all. This is not a fault particular to this book or to these essays. Beyond specific accounts by a reader reacting to a text, which in turn have all the inherent linguistic and interpretative pitfalls of any other text, there are very few ways to interpret the readers' response to any type of narrative. Timothy McMahon is one of the few authors in this collection who actually quotes from the men and women who attended the Gaelic Summer Colleges that he examines. His essay is one of the collection's most valuable as a result. Colin Barr's piece on university education, again valuable in its factual content, has nothing to say about the students or how the changes in the universities effected them AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 471 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00090]] Reviews of Books and Films and their learning. The academic career of one Galway student, H. Fitzwalter Kirker, is traced in its entirety, but only in a footnote. The reader gets at least something approximating a lifeline in the piece by McBride on the young reader and the teaching and learning of Irish history. That "young people are by nature curious" (p. 114), however, seems an inade- quate point on which to hang a conclusion. The book is at its strongest in the essays by Jose Lanters and Gregory Castle, which focus on the work of T. W. Rolleston and Standish O'Grady, respectively. Both historians are examined in the context of their contemporaries; both essays actually attempt to fulfill the claims they make for themselves in their opening pages. The same cannot be said, however, for Eileen Reilly's piece on J. A. Froude. Its bland rehearsal of his life is punctuated with references to his visits to Ireland and quotations from some of his more offen- sive diatribes on the Irish people. She offers little or no comment on the bigotry that billowed forth from his pen. For example, one is told of Froude's dislike for Daniel O'Connell but not the reason why. Novick's piece on the military education of the Irish Volunteers begins with an interesting description, but it is rather disappointing thereafter. Although the material is fascinating, the author's conclusions are not. At one point, he deduces that "The pattern of military education seen in the Irish Volunteer and the Workers' Republic lends weight to the idea of the Rising as blood sacrifice, since the key strategist, Joseph Plunkett, never wrote military columns for the Irish Volunteer" (p. 198). At no point does it occur to Novick that the rebels might not have printed their plans in the paper because letting the authorities in Dublin Castle know in advance was not really part of the plan. How useful, indeed, is an examination of the Irish Volunteer's role in the training of the rebels when even the author concedes that details of training on urban insurrection were "left to the writers of the Workers' Republic" (p. 210); when the author gives approximately nine lines of consideration to what he adjudges to be the more important source? Through- out there is little sense of the eye of Dublin Castle watching over what was published and curtailing what could be written. This is a worthy but a frustrating book. There is a lot of value in each essay in terms of the material that is brought to light, but there is also the crushing weight of the artificial framework under which the essays are forced to labor. Like Froude, it is perhaps this book's "portion in life to please no one faction" (p. 140). ANNE DOLAN Trinity College Dublin [[END 06A00090]] [[START 06A00100]] COLIN NEWBURY. Patrons, Clients, and Empire: Chief- taincy and Over-Rule in Asia, Africa, and the Pacific. New York: Oxford University Press. 2003. Pp. xii, 328. $72.00. It is a brave historian nowadays who admits that his or her current academic preoccupations began in the 1950s, but an unrepentant Colin Newbury tells us that imperial history at Oxford University is peculiarly marked by continuity. He says that literary theory has dominated the study of discourse for too long (al- though presumably not at Oxford), and it is time to get back to the study of political discourse using the time-honored model of patron-client relations. Drawing on his extensive knowledge of African and Pacific imperial history, with the addition of material on South and Southeast Asia, Newbury presents a well researched and cogently argued case for the persis- tence of precolonial clientage networks in certain British and French colonies. Patron-client modeling was refined by social scientists in the 1960s and 1970s, when it became a useful way of explaining why inde- pendence had brought relatively little change to the administrative systems of former colonies. That polit- ical and economic relations in some colonies can be analyzed effectively using this theory is clear; whether the exercise speaks to wider debates about empire is another question. The omission of colonies of settle- ment, along with almost all of the Portuguese, Dutch, and German empires, weakens the case considerably. Newbury draws on a wide, although extremely selec- tive, range of secondary literature to supplement his own research, wisely conceding that authors may not like the use he makes of their material. He feels no need to address the epistemological and methodolog- ical concerns raised by authors whose work he mines for empirical detail. He excludes pioneering cross- disciplinary studies, such as Jean and John Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution (1991) and Nicholas Thomas, Colonialism's Culture: Anthropology, Travel and Government (1994), which have done so much to shape current debates in postcolonial anthropology. Newbury calls for more interaction between social scientists and historians, but he does surprisingly little to encourage it. If patron-client brokerage really is the best model, Newbury should be able to tackle other theories with confidence, demonstrating their inade- quacies through constructive engagement. Instead he revives battles won long ago, such as the critique of "collaboration" and "indirect rule" analysis. There are still some historians who work with these terms, but far more interesting is the much larger number of scholars tackling more recent debates. This book's contribution to imperial historiography is therefore difficult to assess. Newbury hopes that it will help to determine whether imperial rule suc- ceeded or failed "in 'preparing' [its colonies] for the exigencies and responsibilities of devolved govern- ment" (p. viii). One wonders whether this is still a pressing question, however. It has been a long time since independence for many of the countries Newbury discusses. Scholars posing broader questions about colonialism's legacy will wonder about the cost of Newbury's ruthlessly exclusive approach. While dis- cussing the influence of indigenous networks, Newbury AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 472 APRIL 2004 [[END 06A00100]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/530342
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587009
Date: February 2002
Author(s): Bender Thomas
Abstract: [[START 02P0009T]] Review Essay Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History THOMAS BENDER [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] OVER THE PAST QUARTER CENTURY, a new American history has been written.1 This rewriting of American history has often been associated with the "triumph" of social history within the discipline, but in fact the transformation is much broader than that: the domain of the historical has been vastly extended, inherited narratives displaced, new subjects and narratives introduced. While at the monographic level, one sees similar developments in various national historiographies, national synthesis-and the idea of a national synthesis- seems to have been less troubled elsewhere than in the field of U.S. history. Admittedly, generalization is risky, especially if one reaches into historiographies with which one is barely familiar. Still, I think that a variety of outstanding national histories (or histories of a people sometimes treated as nations) have been more confident of established narrative strategies. With the exception of the historians of France that I will note, historians of other modern nations seem to have had fewer doubts about the basic framing of a narrative synthesis, and they have not felt compelled to develop new approaches, even though in many cases the other work of the authors involved has been strikingly innovative.2 Yet the social, intellectual, and political developments that have complicated American historiography are likely, I suspect, to make themselves felt in other national historiographies fairly soon, a point recently made by Jacques Revel, a leading French historian.3 And that circumstance may spawn a generation of controversy about the politics and strategies of synthesis. If so, the American case may be of more general import and interest. Beginning in the 1940s, intellectual history became the synthesizing subfield in U.S. history. reDlacing the political-economic narratives of Frederick Jackson [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] I wish to thank the editors of the AHR, first, for inviting me to consider the issues in this essay, second, for the helpful comments of Acting Editor Jeffrey Wasserstrom, and, third, for the quite stimulating commentary of several anonymous reviewers. 1 See Eric Foner, ed., The New American History (Philadelphia, 1990); Foner, ed., The New American History, rev. and expanded edn. (Philadelphia, 1997). 2 I have in mind Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation, 1707-1837 (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Jonathan D. Spence, The Search for Modem China (New York, 1990); Albert Hourani, A History of the Arab Peoples (Cambridge, Mass., 1991); Paul Ginsborg, A History of Contemporary Italy (Harmond- sworth, Eng., 1990); Theodore Zeldin, France, 1848-1945, 2 vols. (Oxford, 1979); Fernand Braudel, The Identity of France, Sian Reynolds, trans., 2 vols. (New York, 1988-90); Andre Burguiere and Jacques Revel, eds., Histoire de la France, 5 vols. (Paris, 1989-2000). 3 Jacques Revel, "Le fandeau de la memoire," paper presented at the conference "International- izing the Study of American History," Florence, Italy, July 5, 1999. Paper in possession of author. 129 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 130 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Turner and Charles A. Beard.4 But during the 1970s, the claims being made for a national mind or culture were challenged by social historians. Intellectual history was chastened and transformed by the confrontation with social history. Eschewing their former embrace of synthesis, intellectual historians pulled back to study more precisely defined themes and thinkers.5 Not only intellectual history but other subfields accommodated social history's provocation to rethink conventional gen- eralizations. In addition, a professional, even "social-scientific," concern for precision and specificity of reference collaborated-sometimes with forethought, often not-with a sharpened awareness of difference and conflict that came from social movements outside the academy to undermine older composite narratives. Neither the frame supplied by Charles and Mary Beard in The Rise of American Civilization (1927), with its dramatic narrative of conflict between the "people" and the "interests," nor the consensual pluralism that succeeded that interpretation in the 1950s survived.6 If the consensus historians underplayed conflict, the Beards' approach, for all of its sympathy for the dispossessed, was found to be inadequate as well. Their narrative revealed little feel for the diversity of Americans, and it paid scant attention to non-whites. Most important of all, while their narrative voice was sympathetic, one did not discover the quotidian life or hear the voices of those groups that have found voice in more recent historiography. Judged by newer historiographical expectations, The Rise of American Civilization seemed "thin," compared with the increasingly popular "thick" description that was built, in part, on the enormously influential anthropological work of Clifford Geertz.7 In the past quarter century, there has been a proliferation of exciting new research, much of it bringing previously overlooked or explicitly excluded groups and events into the light of history. The number and variety of American stories multiplied. Suddenly, there were histories where there had been none or where the available histories had not been attended to by professional historians: histories of African Americans in the era of slavery and beyond; of Native Americans; of workers at home in their communities, at work, and at play; of women at home and outside of the home and of gender relations more generally; of consumption as well as production; of ethnic minorities and "borderlands"; of popular culture and other "marginal" forms of cultural production; of objects and material culture; of whites and whiteness as historical subjects; of non-state international and intercultural relations; and much more. [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 4Frederick Jackson Turner never completed a major synthesis, but one can see how he might have done that work in his posthumously published The United States, 1830-1850 (New York, 1935); Charles A. Beard and Mary R. Beard, The Rise of American Civilization (1927; 2 volumes in 1, New York, 1930).. In fact, the Beards participated in this shift with the publication of The American Spirit: A Study of the Idea of Civilization in the United States (New York, 1942). 5 For an early anticipation of this development-from the point of view of intellectual history-see Lawrence Veysey, "Intellectual History and the New Social History," in Paul K. Conkin and John Higham, eds., New Directions in American Intellectual History (Baltimore, Md., 1979), 3-26. See also, in the same volume, David A. Hollinger, "Historians and the Discourse of Intellectuals," 42-63; and Thomas Bender, "The Cultures of Intellectual Life: The City and the Professions," 181-95. 6 For consensus history as synthesis, see especially Daniel J. Boorstin, The Americans, 3 vols. (New York, 1958-73); Louis Hartz, The Liberal Tradition in America: An Interpretation of American Political Thought since the Revolution (New York, 1955). 7 On the Beards and newer social histories, see Thomas Bender, "The New History-Then and Now," Reviews in American History 12 (1984): 612-22. For Clifford Geertz, see The Interpretation of Cultures: Selected Essays (New York, 1973). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 131 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] By the early 1980s, some commentators inside and outside the profession were wondering whether an American history had disappeared in the onslaught of highly particular studies, often about subgroups in the larger society of the United States. These developments were occurring at a moment when the number of American historians was expanding to an unprecedented degree. Disciplinary expansion both allowed and prompted increased specialization. And that worried some, who began to speak of hyperspecialization and fragmentation. The structure of specialization derived in large part from the impact of a social history that often fused the group-based particularity of focus with ideological commitments to class and identity-based social movements. This pattern of work discouraged the integration of particular histories into some kind of synthesis.8 Traditionalists, perhaps not surprisingly, were unnerved by these develop- ments.9 But even some proponents of the newer history worried. Early on, Herbert G. Gutman, one of the leading figures in the movement to write a history that included all Americans and that recognized differences-class, ethnic, racial, gender-was concerned that instead of enriching and enlarging the usable history of the United States, the new scholarship was failing to do that, perhaps making it in fact less usable. The "new social history," he wrote in the introduction to his collection of pioneering essays in the field, "suffers from a very limiting overspe- cialization." Take an Irish-born Catholic female textile worker and union organizer in Fall River involved in a disorderly strike in 1875. She might be the subject of nearly a dozen sub-specializations, which would, he feared, "wash out the wholeness that is essential to understanding human behavior."10 Later, in the wake of a national meeting of writers at which historians and history seemed to be largely ignored in discussions of the political and cultural situation in the aftermath of Richard Nixon, Gutman mused aloud in the pages of The Nation over whether the failure of historians to incorporate social history's findings into a new synthesis had seriously diminished, even evacuated, history's possible contribution to public debate."1 In the mid-1980s, in what turned out to be a controversial pair of articles, I raised a related question: how might one construct the (to my mind) needed synthesis of recent historiography on the United States.12 There was considerable negative reaction to those articles, coming from two different positions. One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 8 For an insightful and quite worrisome examination of recent scholarly practice and its trajectory, see Winfried Fluck, "The Modernity of America and the Practice of Scholarship," in Thomas Bender, ed., Rethinking American History in a Global Age (Berkeley, Calif., 2002). 9 See, for example, Gertrude Himmelfarb, The New History and the Old (Cambridge, Mass., 1987). This volume includes essays published by Himmelfarb between 1975 and 1984. 10 Herbert G. Gutman, Work, Culture and Society in Industrializing America: Essays in American Working-Class and Social History (New York, 1976), xii-xiii. Bernard Bailyn, who did not share Gutman's political or historiographical agenda, raised similar issues a few years later in his presidential address to the American Historical Association. Bailyn, "The Challenge of Modern Historiography," AHR 87 (February 1982): 1-24. 11 Herbert G. Gutman, "The Missing Synthesis: Whatever Happened to History," The Nation, November 21, 1981. See also, in a similar spirit, Eric Foner, "History in Crisis," Commonweal (December 18, 1981): 723-26. 12 Thomas Bender, "Making History Whole Again," New York Times Book Review (October 6, 1985): 1, 42-43; Bender, "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History 73 (1986): 120-36. See also the earlier and less commented on essay, Bender, "New History." AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 132 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] position worried about its critique of specialization and its call for addressing a larger public. These arguments were equated with a carelessness about scholarly rigor.13 The other, and more widespread position, focused on the risks of a national narrative itself. It was evidently feared that such a narrative would, by definition, re-exclude those groups and themes that had so recently been brought under the umbrella of history and would re-inscribe a "master narrative" dominated by white, elite males.14 By the end of the 1980s, however, the question of synthesis had become less controversial. The issue became more practical, more professional in some sense: how to do it and how to do it within the parameters of inclusion that had been central to the discussion from the beginning. It was on this note that Alice Kessler-Harris, the author of the chapter on social history in The New American History (1990 edition), addressed the question. In the last section of her essay, with the section title of "The Problem of Synthesis," she acknowledged the problem and explored various possible ways to overcome "fragmentation" and move toward synthesis.15 A different issue emerged in the 1990s. Poststructuralist literary and cultural theory, sometimes broadly and even more vaguely characterized as postmodernism, was and is suspicious of any aspiration toward a comprehensive narrative. It is to this body of theory that we owe the commonplace use and misuse of the epithet "master narrative."16 These theories have been rather slow to penetrate workaday historical practice among American historians. Levels and types of awareness of them vary: from shocked indignation at the whole idea, to vague awareness and thoughtless dismissal, to intellectual fascination largely in isolation from the making of one's own histories. In his recent book, Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (1995), Robert Berkhofer seeks to force more attention to these issues. Insistently, but not always consistently, he urges historians to recognize the dimensions of the postmodern crisis that surrounds them. He seems more interested in sounding the alarm about the quicksand before us than in guiding us [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 13 Eric H. Monkkonen, "The Dangers of Synthesis," AHR 91 (December 1986): 1146-57. 14 See the Round Table articles, Nell Irvin Painter, "Bias and Synthesis in History," Journal of American History 74 (June 1987): 109-12; Richard Wightman Fox, "Public Culture and the Problem of Synthesis," 113-16; Roy Rosenzweig, "What Is the Matter with History?" 117-22; and for my response, Thomas Bender, "Wholes and Parts: Continuing the Conversation," 123-30. For a more recent and more broadly argued critique, see Randolph Roth, "Is There a Democratic Alternative to Republi- canism? The Rhetoric and Politics of Recent Pleas for Synthesis," in Jeffrey Cox and Shelton Stromquist, eds., Contesting the Master Narrative: Essays in Social History (Iowa City, Iowa, 1998), 210-56. 15 Alice Kessler-Harris, "Social History," in Foner, New American History, 177-80. The closing chapters of Peter Novick's very influential social history of the profession worries this issue as well. Peter Novick, That Noble Dream: The "Objectivity Question" and the American Historical Profession (Cambridge, 1988), chaps. 14-16. The most recent public discussion is David Oshinsky, "The Humpty Dumpty of Scholarship: American History Has Broken in Pieces, Can It Be Put Together Again?" New York Times, August 26, 2000. 16 See Allen Megill, "Fragmentation and the Future of Historiography," AHR 96 (June 1991): 693-98. For a more general but very rich survey, see Dorothy Ross, "Grand Narrative in American Historical Writing: From Romance to Uncertainty," AHR 100 (June 1995): 651-77. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 133 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] around it or safely through. But either way, he intends to challenge the very possibility of narrative synthesis.17 While these worries, proposals, and polemics were being fashioned, the daily work of historians proceeded. Among the products of that work have been a good number of explicitly synthetic volumes. There is, of course, no clear or settled notion of what defines a work of synthesis. I have used a rather generous definition. Some of the books I am calling synthetic might alternatively be designated as monographs-archivally based but exceptionally ambitious books that tackle big questions and seek to frame a large field or to provide an interpretation for an audience well beyond specialists. Others are more obviously synthetic, relying heavily on secondary literature to establish the state of the art in a broad field for a wide audience, including, often, students and the general public. With this diversity of form, purpose, and audience in mind-as well as a concern for a reasonable distribution of fields and periods-I have, with the help of the editors of the American Historical Review, selected a few recent synthetic works for examina- tion.18 The very existence of these books mutes the question of whether we need synthetic works or whether, under the constraints of present historiographical practice, synthesis is possible. In fact, the seeming proliferation of syntheses at present-and their variousness-suggests that the field of American history is at a formative (or reformative) moment that invites synthesis: the quest for new understandings that has undermined established narratives has now, perhaps, prompted new efforts at crystallizing a very unstable body of historical writing into new syntheses. A different question, however, provides the focus of this essay. What strategies for narrative synthesis are available to historians today? How might we think about the relation between a particular structure of narrative synthesis and the author's purpose or interpretation? How do these different strategies relate to current historiography? What particular work do they do, within the profession and beyond it? And finally I want to ask some questions about the firmness of the boundaries (mostly geographical) that define what is and is not captured in synthetic narratives of U.S. history. These works do not, of course, cover the whole field of synthetic works. More and other books could have been chosen, but these eleven books (and several others mentioned along the way) at least represent different kinds of history, different [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 17 Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., Beyond the Great Story: History as Text and Discourse (Cambridge, Mass., 1995). See the "Forum" on the book in the American Quarterly: Michael C. Coleman, "Gut Reactions of a Historian to a Missionary Tract," American Quarterly 50 (June 1998): 340-48; Saul Cornell, "Moving Beyond the Great Story: Post Modern Possibilities, Postmodern Problems," 349-57; Betsy Erkkila, "Critical History," 358-64; and Robert F. Berkhofer, Jr., "Self-Reflections on Beyond the Great Story: The Ambivalent Author as Ironic Interlocutor," 365-75. See especially the exceptionally insightful and critical review essay by Thomas L. Haskell, "Farewell to Fallibilism: Robert Berkhofer's Beyond the Great Story and the Allure of the Postmodern," History and Theory 37 (October 1998): 347-69. 18 None, incidentally though importantly, present themselves as synthetic narratives of the nation, although some to be discussed below certainly reach toward that in practical effect, particularly those authored by Eric Foner (The Story of American Freedom) and by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher (TheAmerican West). In fact, I have recommended each to non-historians asking for a literate one-volume history of the United States. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 134 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] periods, and different themes. Together, the eleven total nearly 6,000 pages of outstanding historical writing. If nothing else, I can conclude that synthetic narrative invites long books. Because I cannot claim special knowledge in any of the fields being synthesized in these books, I do not propose to do the kind of analysis one would find in specialized reviews. Such criticisms that I have will be framed from the position of my interest in synthetic narrative. I say that in part to be honest about my own limitations in appraising these books but also for another, more positive reason. I want to insist that narrative synthesis is a form of knowledge, indeed, a particularly powerful form of creating, not simply summarizing, knowledge. I hope to get past or under the story enough to probe the implications of different modes of structuring a narrative synthesis. The way different narrative strategies construct that knowledge is important. While inclusion is one of the tests our generation will rightly ask of synthesis, there are other important historiographical issues that are embedded in the question of narrative synthesis.19 The more seriously we consider possible narratives of American history, the more we may be prepared to ask questions that press beyond inclusion. We may even be both bold enough and hopeful enough to worry a little about the language of inclusion, if not the principle. Is there perhaps more than a hint of dominant culture noblesse oblige in the language of inclusion? Might not a more sophisticated notion of the temporal and geographical boundaries of American history, including an awareness of the diasporic stories within American history, complicate and enrich the notion of inclusion?20 Can the historical and historiographical terrain be opened a bit more in a way that enables a deeper, denser, and more complex historiographical exploration of justice and difference at the center of American history? Might democracy be the word, the concept, the commitment that will move us in that direction? As I examine the stack of books before me, I propose to keep these issues in mind and to return to them at the end of this essay. JON BUTLER'S Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (2000) covers the whole mainland British colonial space and history, and it addresses a wide range of themes. In fact, themes, not time or chronology, organize his story. His brief, often one-word, chapter titles reveal a very distinctive type of synthesis, one immediately accessible to the reader, whether professional or lay: Peoples, Economy, Politics, Things Material, Things Spiritual. It is a reasonable progression, and in each case he brings together a good deal of material. Although his theme is transformation, Butler also claims (following recent historiography) a more inclusive geography, making more of the middle colonies than would have been the case a generation ago. In some ways, his manner of organizing the material topically bears a relation to [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 19 I do not propose to go into theories of narrative or even my own notions, but I will here indicate that my understanding has been greatly influenced by the work of Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer, trans., 3 vols. (Chicago, 1984-88). 20 Such thinking is not restricted to specialists in the profession exploring the theme of diaspora. The novelist Russell Banks has recently argued that the focus for a synthesis of American history ought to be the African diaspora. See "The Star-Spangled Novel," Los Angeles Times, July 2, 2000. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 135 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Richard Hofstadter's posthumously published America at 1750: A Social Portrait (1971).21 But what might have worked for Hofstadter, who was setting the scene for a three-volume narrative history of the United States, works less well for the purposes Butler has in his book. If Hofstadter's book was intended to provide a snapshot that would serve as a starting point, Butler's title ("Becoming America") and his stated intentions announce change as his theme. He means to persuade the reader of a broad pattern of transformation that produced a distinctive and modern society in advance of 1776 and that in turn spawned the first modern revolution. Such an argument demands more complex and careful attention to process and cause than his framing of the book seems to allow. While he has surely gathered together a considerable body of material (his notes run to fifty pages), he has not produced a synthetic narrative of change over time, one that sketches a develop- mental sequence that integrates disparate elements in the interest of a causal interpretation. By bounding each unit of synthesis, Butler is stuck with a structural isolation of topics that undercuts narrative explanation. Given that Butler's theme is transformation, this narrative structure is crippling. For reasons related to structure and style of argument, Butler's claims for American modernity are quite vulnerable. While there are doubtless some specific ways in which the British North American colonies became "modern" before independence, they were not uniformly modern-over space or in all aspects of life. Many historians would readily grant numerous anticipations of modernity by the middle of the eighteenth century, but few would insist, with Butler, that so much modernity had been achieved so soon, implying that only a few pre-modern anomalies remained on the eve of revolution.22 Most give a significant role to the revolution.23 But the most serious problem is not with the phenomena he notices or does not notice, even if there is some real unevenness on this point. Rather, it is Butler's teleology of the modern, combined with his exceedingly loose, elusive, and, as is so often said today, undertheorized definition of modernity. Add to this an unneces- sary but apparently irresistible tendency to claim American uniqueness and "firsts" for nearly everything he identifies as modern in America. He names a number of phenomena that he considers evidences of the modern-polyglot, slaves, cities, market economy, refined crafts and trades, religious pluralism, and "sophisticated politics." Without further historical specification and theoretical precision, one can indulge in reductio ad absurdum. With the exception of religious pluralism, all of these qualities probably described Athens in the age of Aristotle at least as well as the British colonies. In fact, I suspect that Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, relying on their recent book The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (2000), would argue that the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 21 Richard Hofstadter, America at 1750: A Social Portrait (New York, 1971). 22 Jon Butler, Becoming America: The Revolution before 1776 (Cambridge, Mass., 2000), 1. 23 See, for example, Gordon S. Wood, The Radicalism of the American Revolution (New York, 1992). Long before, Bernard Bailyn suggested certain developments that Butler would consider modern had developed in the eighteenth century, but he emphasized the unevenness and even paradoxical character of this proto-modernity. See "Political Experience and Enlightenment Ideas in Eighteenth-Century America," AHR 67 (January 1962): 339-51; and Bailyn, The Origins of American Politics (New York, 1968). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 136 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Atlantic world provides a better example of modernity on those terms than does the colonial mainland.24 He makes many claims for American distinctiveness. In the end, however, it is diversity, which he tends to equate with multiculturalism, that for Butler makes Americans modern. But if we look around, we cannot but wonder about his claims for a uniquely polyglot society. This assertion may be quite vulnerable from any sight line approaching a global perspective. Can he fairly claim that New York City harbored a level of diversity "never before gathered together"?25 Might not this be as plausibly said of Constantinople during the period covered by Butler's book? And did not the Ottoman Empire-of which Constantinople was the capital-far exceed the religious and ethnic diversity of the British colonies? My point here is partly one of fact, of care in making comparative statements without comparison. More important, however, are the criteria of the modern. Few, if any, major political bodies in the past half millennium more successfully accommodated diversity than the Ottomans, yet that achievement has never brought them recognition for a precocious modernity. One needs greater defini- tional and descriptive specificity to make the argument he claims. Because of the breadth and generality of synthetic narratives, it is especially important to be clear about key concepts. Similarly, he tends to claim the realization of "Americanness"-here equated with some vague notion of modernity-for events that, however interesting in themselves, hardly sustain his assertion that they designated "the American future."26 For example, writing of the French Huguenots, a group he knows well, he notes their assimilation, and he calls this "American."27 Well, of course it is, but so are the endogenous marriages that continue for various groups well into the twentieth century-sometimes because of racial difference and even legislation (as in the case of African Americans) or out of choice, as in the case of Scandinavians in the upper Midwest. Or to take a more ominous subject, it seems a bit fatalistic to say that colonial encroachment on Indian land "predicted" nineteenth-century relations with the Indians.28 Oddly, such a claim, while taking the moral high ground, nonetheless erases the postcolonial history of the United States by denying contingency and thus diminishing both the capacity and moral responsibility of all later actors or potential actors. The twin and linked teleologies of "modern" and "American" produce a distorting and de-historicizing synthesis. If there is a problem with the sort of synthesis Butler has written, what precisely is it? He makes historical claims about patterns and meanings of development on the basis of a narrative structure that effectively isolates and de-historicizes his themes. By not constructing a developmental narrative that integrates the various themes now separated in distinct chapters, the process and complexity of develop- ment is obscured. While his chapters are full of relevant and interesting details of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 24 Peter Linebaugh and Marcus Rediker, The Many-Headed Hydra: Sailors, Slaves, Commoners, and the Hidden History of the Revolutionary Atlantic (Boston, 2000). 25 Butler, Becoming America, 9. 26 Butler, Becoming America, 36. 27 Butler, Becoming America, 22. One of Butler's previous books is The Huguenots in America: A Refugee People in a New World Society (Cambridge, Mass., 1983). 28 Butler, Becoming America, 68. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 137 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] everyday life, they never get integrated in any individual, institution, or place. In the absence of a narrative of change to explain and interpret, he resorts for a theme to repeated assertions of "modernity." The issue is not so much the claim for an eighteenth-century American modernity-although I am myself drawn to much more complex, nuanced, and contradictory discussions of that theme-as it is the incapacity of the particular model of synthesis he deploys to advance that theme or argument. Philip D. Morgan's Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (1998) is at once similar to Butler's and quite different. Both focus tightly in each chapter on a particular topic or theme; there is little play among the different themes in both cases. While Butler's themes propose a reorganization of material, thus giving an impression of freshness, Morgan's quite important questions are phrased in well-established ways. While Butler's structure works against his theme of transformation, Morgan's similar structure better fits his goals for the book, partly because transformation plays a smaller role in his analysis than one might expect. Slave Counterpoint addresses nearly all the issues raised by a half century of vigorous scholarship on the beginnings of slavery, the practices of racial slavery as a labor and social system, and the nature of African-American culture in early America. It is a book of enviable learning: with a seeming total command of the historiography and an impressive knowledge of a substantial archival base, Morgan proceeds to pose (or re-pose) difficult historiographical issues. Again and again, he offers compelling answers. Want to know what scholarship has disclosed about slavery and African-American culture in the eighteenth-century Chesapeake and Lowcountry? Look to Morgan's synthesis of a generation of scholarship. To have done that is to have done a great deal, and he has done it magnificently. Yet one gets the sense of a summary volume, a volume driven by the past, by past questions. Synthesis can either cap a phase of scholarship or initiate another. I think Morgan's book falls into the former category, while Ira Berlin's new book, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (1998), which also relies on a generation of scholarship and addresses many of the same issues, has the potential to become a new starting point. Berlin has captured the shift to an Atlantic perspective that has increasingly characterized scholarship by early modern Europeanists, Africanists, Latin Americanists, and historians of British North America. In this sense, his work, at least the early parts that sketch out and populate the Atlantic littoral, points forward.29 In a dramatic opening section, Berlin, relying more on secondary literatures than does Morgan, locates his story in very broad understandings of time (periodization) and space (the Atlantic world), the dimensions of which are shadowy, almost invisible, in Morgan's account. He locates Africans in an Atlantic history connecting four continents and in a rich and growing historiography reaching out from Europe, Africa, Latin America, and North America.30 One [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 29 Ira Berlin, Many Thousands Gone: The First Two Centuries of Slavery in North America (Cambridge, Mass., 1998). 30 Berlin's powerful evocation of the Atlantic builds on many predecessors. At minimum, mention should be made of Philip D. Curtin's The Atlantic Slave Trade: A Census (Madison, Wis., 1969); and The AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 138 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] wishes Berlin had sustained this perspective in the later sections. But even if he narrows the story to the territory that later became the United States and loses the multiple histories implied by his portrait of the Atlantic world, the beginnings of stories, whether novels or histories, are heavy with intention and implication that can, I hope, be built upon.31 In fact, the four Atlantic continents remain an always changing aspect of American and African histories. Attending to, or at least recognizing, that larger and continuing extended terrain of American history would enrich the story of the making of African Americans and America, a historiography that is at present too much captured by an implicit and too simple assimilation or "Americanization" model. Nonetheless, Berlin has provided a powerful image of the creation of the Atlantic world and of the origin of modern slavery within it. Morgan has a quite different strategy. His domain is not the Atlantic but the South, or two regions of the South, which he is anxious to reveal as differentiated. Thus his is a comparative history, comparing two regions within the South. Suggesting a certain scientific aspiration, he refers to his delimited space as a kind of laboratory, a site for an "indirect experiment."32 This approach offers him much. He is able to focus tightly on his questions and generally achieves sharply phrased answers. Yet, like any good scientific laboratory, his field of inquiry is almost hermetically sealed. A two-hundred-page part of the book titled "The Black World" begins with a fifteen-page section on "Africans." Yet it is in only one paragraph at the beginning and a few other scattered references that one reads anything about Africa. His story rarely strays east (or south or north or west) of the Maryland/ Virginia and South Carolina boundaries. His comparative method has impressive rigor. Yet one senses that not only does his approach trap him within a particular place, he is also caught within a very confining net woven from the existing historiography. As Walter Johnson pointed out in a review of the book in this journal, his questions are smaller than the stories he has unearthed.33 Much like another important book on African-American history, Herbert G. Gutman's The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom (1976), this book, for all its synthetic aspirations, cannot capture some of its best material within the tightly bounded historiographical questions and issues that frame it.34 As in the case of Berlin's book, Morgan's is quite explicit about time and space. There is a well-thought-out chronology of change, and one of his major arguments is that the South, and thus the black as well as white experience, was not uniform over space. He shows real and important distinctions between the experience of [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Rise and Fall of the Plantation Complex (New York, 1990; 2d edn., 1998); and John K. Thornton's Africa and Africans in the Making of the Atlantic World, 1400-1680 (New York, 1992; 2d edn., 1400-1800, 1998). 31 On the importance of beginnings, see Edward W. Said, Beginnings: Intention and Method (Baltimore, Md., 1975). 32 Philip D. Morgan, Slave Counterpoint: Black Culture in the Eighteenth-Century Chesapeake and Lowcountry (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1998), xvii. 33 Walter Johnson, review of Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, AHR 105 (October 2000): 1295-97, esp. 1297. 34 See Herbert G. Gutman, The Black Family in Slavery and Freedom, 1750-1925 (New York, 1976), which loses more than it gains by focusing so tightly on refuting the assumptions of the Moynihan Report. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 139 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] slavery in the Chesapeake and in the Lowcountry. Yet by treating both the temporal and spatial aspects of the story as sites (and very limited ones) rather than as processes of historical making, he weakens the capacity of his local analyses to explain change over time and, to a lesser extent, space. His major explanatory claims appear in the introduction. They are not only brief but also separate from the rich stories he tells and the analyses he makes of historiographical questions.35 The expansiveness of Many Thousands Gone, by contrast, evokes a strong sense of change, of process. It achieves a narrative synthesis of the movement of Africans onto the Atlantic and into the Western hemisphere. The difference between this approach and the tightly controlled analysis crafted by Morgan is striking. Like Morgan's, Michael Schudson's book, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (1998), is organized around fairly established questions- especially one big question. Has American civic life deteriorated over the course of the past three centuries? Naturally, the question is of a different order than those driving Morgan's analysis. It has not been generated by disciplinary scholarship. It arose out of American public life. Schudson thus draws on history and other disciplines to address directly a public question, one endlessly repeated today and, as he shows, in the past. Schudson himself, we should note, is not a historian. He was trained as a sociologist, and he teaches in a Department of Communication. While he reveals an impressive command of the relevant historiography, historians are not his primary reference group or audience.36 Although I am sure specialists will find some of his formulations to be of considerable historiographical significance and likely to encourage new lines of research, his intention, again, is different: his audience is a general one, and he seeks to bring historical knowledge to bear on a civic issue. What he is doing points toward the most important work that one kind of successful narrative synthesis can do, for the profession and for the public. By openly declaring his address to a public issue and for a public audience, Schudson participates in a very important tradition of historical writing. Some of the very best professional historians of the United States in this century have done precisely that: Frederick Jackson Turner, W. E. B. Du Bois, Charles Beard, and Richard Hofstadter all focused on issues, worries, or preoccupations of fairly general interest to write synthetic works that importantly rephrased fundamental themes in American history. This mutual enrichment of public and professional discourse is perhaps the ideal cultural work of narrative synthesis. Let us hope that historians can do this more often and more effectively. Yet as I make this point, I realize that all of the historians just named, including Schudson himself, were either trained as social scientists or did not recognize a significant boundary between history and the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 35Morgan, Slave Counterpoint, xv-xxiv. I should note that my concerns about boundary setting in Morgan's book do not apply nearly so much to Philip D. Morgan, "The Black Experience in the British Empire, 1680-1810," in The Oxford History of the British Empire, Vol. 2: The Eighteenth Century, P. J. Marshall, ed. (Oxford, 1998), 465-86. 36 This command is at once impressive and sometimes puzzling. In discussing the Founding and the Constitution, he does not mention Gordon Wood's The Creation of the American Republic, 1776-1787 (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1969). Nor, in writing about the first decades of the nineteenth century, does he mention either of two key books by Robert H. Wiebe, The Opening of American Society: From the Adoption of the Constitution to the Eve of Disunion (New York, 1984); and Self-Rule: A Cultural History of American Democracy (Chicago, 1995). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 140 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] (other?) once more expansive social sciences. Is this a mere coincidence, or is it an issue to be addressed by the profession? While I would not place Schudson's book in the same class as the scholarship produced by the short list of great historians, he has written a fine book. It is a book about change over time, and he establishes three eras of citizenship and participa- tion, each clearly defined. He does not devote much attention to how each configuration changes into the next, but he effectively characterizes their differ- ences, even in some very brief summaries, as in the following paragraph from early in the book: Another way to characterize the past three hundred years of political change is to say that the type of authority by which society is governed shifted from personal authority (gentlemen) to interpersonal authority (parties, coalitions, and majorities), to impersonal authority (science, expertise, legal rights, and information) ... The geographical center of politics has shifted from the countryside to the cities to the suburbs and perhaps, today, to "technoburbs," "postsuburbs," or "edge cities," or whatever we name our newer habitations. Correspondingly, the kind of knowledge a good citizen requires has changed: in an age of gentlemen, the citizen's relatively rare entrances into public discussion or controversy could be guided by his knowledge of social position; in the era of rule by majorities, the citizen's voting could be led by the enthusiasm and rhetoric of parties and their most active partisans; in the era of expertise and bureaucracies, the citizens had increasingly to learn to trust their own canvass of newspapers, interest groups, parties, and other sources of knowledge, only occasionally supported by the immediacy of human contact; and in the emerging age of rights, citizens learn to catalog what entitlements they may have and what forms of victimization they may knowingly or unknowingly have experienced.37 This paragraph reveals the argument and the narrative strategy that Schudson uses to undercut the widespread notion of civic decline: rather than a story of decline, it is one of restructuring, one that recalibrates citizenship and civic practice in relation to changing values and social experiences. What some, including me, see as the erosion of our public life and the thinning of American political culture, he presents as a complex rearticulation of expectations and institutions. Whether one fully agrees with Schudson or not, the book and the point of view it ingeniously argues constitutes an important contribution of contemporary civic life. And a narrative strategy of restructuring (as opposed to the usual rise or fall scenarios) deserves a place in the historian's menu of narrative types. "Presentist" purposes may, however, carry the danger of anachronistic readings. Schudson is vulnerable on this score, especially in his consideration of the colonial period. He too easily asks how democratic any phase of political life was. A commitment to explore the fate of democracy in our past-something I endorse- surely includes recognizing when democracy is not an available concept. He might better have asked how the legitimation and exercise of power worked. Indeed, such a deeper historicism would complement his anti-anti-Whig approach. Similarly, while a then-and-now binary invites sometimes interesting questions and offers some illumination of past and present, it also invites problems. Again, one sees this risk in Schudson's work. False categories of judgment are explicitly or implicitly brought to bear. Speaking of the first generation to live under the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 37Michael Schudson, The Good Citizen: A History of American Civic Life (New York, 1998), 8. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 141 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Constitution, he observes that little political knowledge was expected of voters, "at least little of the sort of knowledge that today's civic moralists urge upon people." Voters then were expected to have "local knowledge-not of laws or principles, but of men."38 The binary obscures the role of principles in the past and knowledge of men in the present. Most important of all, it diverts our attention from the principles that it was thought would aid voters in judging character.39 Sometimes, by focusing so much on the party system that we worry about today, he overlooks those important issues that eluded the parties or that parties avoided. Substantive issues-the reason citizenship and civic life are important-are marginalized in his account of the different concepts and patterns of public life. The result, whether intended or not, is a form of consensus history.40 "Progress or decline is not the real question," Schudson concludes.41 He converts that question into one of restructuring that points to his core argument: there must be a fit between forms of citizenship and forms of everyday life, between values and institutions, between aspirations and commitments. It is that historically informed understanding that allows him in his conclusion to speculate in quite promising ways about an evolving pattern of citizenship that may yet serve our collective hopes and needs. Still, his conclusion leaves me uneasy. Like the journalistic coverage of politics today, the substance of political conflict is subordinated to discussion of the "health" of the system, of the institutions and practices. By contrast, the tensions, conflicts, and substantive issues that made politics so important in the development of the United States and in the lives of individuals are at the center of Eric Foner's The Story of American Freedom (1998). Foner's book has an uncanny resemblance to one that at first glance might seem utterly unrelated: Richard Hofstadter's The American Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It.42 Of course, Foner inverts the point Hofstadter sought to make. If Hofstadter famously played down conflict and (less remarked upon) paid little attention to the social making of political ideologies, Foner emphasizes conflict and the changing historical construction and reconstruction of the idea and ideology of freedom. Foner's work is much more explicitly sensitive to social history, even if it parallels Hofstadter's in its interest in ideology and the limits and possibilities of American political culture. While Hofstadter was alternately comic and ironic, bitterly so at times, in The American Political Tradition, Foner's Story of American Freedom is strikingly fair and straightforward. Yet the underlying hope is similar. As James Oakes has perceptively noted, Foner's narrative is undergirded by an unstated but firm liberal ideal of freedom- one that at once shares in an Enlightenment universalism and [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 38 Schudson, Good Citizen, 81. 39 See Joyce Appleby, Inheriting the Revolution: The First Generation of Americans (Cambridge, Mass., 2000). 40 See, for example, his summary judgment of the party system at Schudson, Good Citizen, 132. Put differently, it bears at least a formal relationship to the theories of pluralism popular in political science during the 1950s. 41 Schudson, Good Citizen, 313. 42 Richard Hofstadter, TheAmerican Political Tradition and the Men Who Made It (New York, 1948). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 142 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] accommodates current concerns for inclusion and regard for difference.43 I would even argue that Hofstadter's own liberal position was closer to Foner's than one might at first suspect. Both appraised American political culture and its prospects from the position of a richer, more textured liberalism than we usually recognize in current debates.44 In thinking about the core issue in Foner's narrative, therefore, it seems fair to consider it to be the quest for a democratic liberalism, insisting on the relevance and indispensability of the modifier inserted before liberalism. One might thus characterize Foner's as a democratic synthesis, which, as I suggested above, offers a stronger and more egalitarian standard of judgment than commonplace invoca- tions of inclusion. It offers as well the implication of voice and empowerment. To Foner, as he indicates in his introduction, "abstract definitions" of freedom are not the focus. His concern is "with the debates and struggles through which freedom acquires concrete meanings, and how understandings of freedom are shaped by, and in turn help to shape, social movements and political and economic events."45 The result is a narrative that is at once focused yet always open to an examination of larger issues, structures, and events that intersect with and often drive his story. It is a dynamic story, filled with actors, with agents making freedom and using freedom. He selects key events or controversies of different eras, events that are widely contested (slavery, labor and property, the role of the state, social movements). Of course, coverage is selective; the gain is the richness deriving from a series of concentrated focal points. In each case, he examines the conflict, the parties contending, and the stakes. He does not hesitate to declare justices and injustices, to name winners and losers, and he does so from a consistently democratic perspective. Foner thus achieves inclusion without the dilution conse- quent with the faux openness characteristic of talk radio and without the postmod- ern hesitations that undermine moral judgment.46 The American West: A New Interpretive History (2000) by Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher spans the whole of American history, from "the European invasion" until the present.47 The book is written in the spirit of Frederick Jackson Turner. Instead of lamenting the ambiguity of Turner's conception of the frontier, which after Turner got reduced by rigorous historians to a place, the West, Hine and Faragher embrace its fullness. For them, the frontier is both a place and a nrocess. and thev recognize that it is not onlv imnossible but limiting to senarate [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 43 James Oakes, "Radical Liberals, Liberal Radicals: The Dissenting Tradition in American Political Culture," Reviews in American History 27 (1999): 503-11. 44 For just such a contemporary theorization of liberalism, see Ira Katznelson, Liberalism's Crooked Circle: Letters to Adam Michnik (Princeton, N.J., 1996). Interestingly, this work also comes from a Columbia scholar, however much it is openly acknowledged to have derived largely from his experience at the New School for Social Research. Perhaps the relevant context for this liberalism is the city of New York, with its cosmopolitan character and free-for-all quality of political contestation. For a brief statement of Hofstadter's relation to liberalism, see Thomas Bender, "Richard Hofstadter," in American National Biography, John A. Garraty and Mark C. Carnes, gen. eds. (New York, 1999), 11: 1-4. 45 Eric Foner, The Story of American Freedom (New York, 1998), xvii. 46 In Eric Foner, Reconstruction: America's Unfinished Revolution, 1863-1877 (New York, 1988), where chronological compression allows for a richer analysis, one can see more fully the method and its achievements. 47 Robert V. Hine and John Mack Faragher, The American West: A New Interpretive History (New Haven, Conn., 2000), 9. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 143 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and sharply distinguish between the two aspects of the concept. That openness allows them to tell the history of the United States as a story of successive frontiers, including a fascinating rethinking of American regionalism as urban-centered at the end of the twentieth century.48 In fact, the chapter on the postwar era is a tour de force-imaginative, original, and quite compelling. In Turnerian fashion, they argue that "westering defined America's unique heritage."49 To a very impressive degree, they give substance to this claim, but recent historiography makes that claim, even for western history, problematic. As Hine and Faragher show, in the nineteenth century as well as today, the West (and the United States) was formed by migrations from west to east and south to north, and even in a limited way north to south, as well as east to west. The notion of westering is so strong in American and European history and culture, it is difficult to construct an alternative narrative structure, though no less important for the difficulty.50 This worry does not, however, undercut another summary point they make: the "frontier is our common past."51 The book is grounded in social history. Of all the books under consideration here, The American West is probably the most sensitive to the categories of experience and groups previously excluded from mainstream narratives of Ameri- can history. Their work goes well beyond mere representation of such groups and categories; previously invisible groups, whether Native Americans, migrating women, African-American settlers, working people, or the people of the border- lands, are actors who contributed to the shaping of history. But there are limits to this achievement. While there are multiple positions and voices represented in their narrative, only rarely does their narrative bring the reader inside group life. There is not much inquiry into the interior experience and subjective meanings shared by the various groups identified and recognized.52 While the story could have been situated in a wider context, one that revealed the global reach of the empires or, later, the importance of global markets, in its particular geographical focus the book consistently avoids privileging the English line of settlement. Other settler efforts are considered and sometimes compared. As is often the case with synthetic histories, however, there is a tendency to do the work of inclusion at a particular moment, and then lose the group at issue. For example, there is a good discussion of the origins of racial slavery, but the later [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 48 On the potential of the urban region model for historical analysis, see Jane Jacobs, Cities and the Wealth of Nations: Principles of Economic Life (New York, 1984). For an extremely stimulating extension of Turner's frontier to transnational dimensions, see Paul Sabin, "Home and Abroad: The Two 'Wests' of Twentieth-Century United States History," Pacific Historical Review 66, no. 3 (1997): 305-36. 49 Hine and Faragher, Amertican West, 531. 50 Loren Baritz, "The Idea of the West," AHR 66 (April 1961): 618-40. For three forays into alternative narrative strategies on this point, see Thomas Bender, "The Geography of Historical Memory and the Making of Public Culture," in Anna Maria Martellone, ed., Towards a New American Nation? Redefinitions and Reconstruction (Staffordshire, 1995), 174-87; Ian Tyrrell, "Beyond the View from Euro-America: Environment, Settler Societies, and Internationalization of American History," in Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; Dirk Hoerder, "From the Euro- and Afro- Atlantic to the Pacific Migration System in North American History," in Bender. 51 Hine and Faragher, American West, 560. 52 In fact, they concentrate this kind of analysis in one chapter, a fascinating one in "A Search for Community," but it is limited in its cases, and it segregates such analysis from the greater part of the narrative. Hine and Faragher, American West, chap. 12. AMERICAN HISTORIcAL REvIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 144 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] extension of the plantation system and internal slave market that was a part of the frontier movement is not adequately recognized. At times, the transnational themes they develop are extremely illuminating. They refer to what would later be characterized by theorists of the global cities as a "dual economy" in describing the role of foreign migrants, especially Chinese, in the nineteenth-century California agricultural economy.53 Likewise the interplay of national and international in their discussion of the Zimmerman telegram inviting Mexico to ally with Germany in World War I and in their discussion of San Francisco's "commercial hinterland."54 But, as in the case of Butler's book, there is a bit of parochialism in making claims of distinction. Perhaps such assertions can be demonstrated, but more rigorous definitions and empirical research than we have here are required to establish, for example, that the United States is today the world's most multicultural society.55 How would it compare with Indonesia, the world's fourth most populous nation, whose citizens speak more than 100 languages and live on almost numberless islands? The social-history approach, whatever its success in representing difference, has in this instance under-represented national political institutions and policies. The development of the West, as Richard White and other historians of the West have pointed out, was profoundly indebted to what western Republicans now call "big government," for water, transportation, Indian removal, and, more recently, direct investment, as in defense contracts and installations and aerospace industries.56 The political economy and the role of markets, as has already been suggested, do not get the attention they deserve. We often overlook how much industry was in the West, and how much western industries-from milling and meatpacking to mining-were integral to the industrial system of the United States. And we forget how much the astonishing productivity of western agriculture enabled the formation of a large urban industrial labor supply. More of these dimensions of western history might have been included if only in the interest in enabling the story better to tell the national experience. If Hine and Faragher encompass both the full geographical and temporal dimensions of western history, Linda Gordon's microhistory builds out from a very delimited western space, the Sonoran highlands of Arizona, to develop a highly innovative narrative synthesis that locates itself at the various and causally interrelated scales of town, region, nation, and the transnational. Her work reminds us that there is a difference between a mere local study and a microhistory. The local histories of villages, towns, and cities, so common in the 1970s, tended to use global concepts but within artificially bounded fields of inquiry. One of the most famous of them all, Kenneth Lockridge's study of Dedham, Massachusetts, offered an isolated inwardness as a principal finding, although it was a finding that derived [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 53Hine and Faragher, American West, 358-60. 54 Hine and Faragher, American West, 395-97, 414. This story could be greatly expanded. San Francisco was closer to Asia than to Europe, a simple geographical point that usually eludes us. For an outstanding study of this relationship, see Ian Tyrrell, True Gardens of the Gods: Californian-Australian Environmental Reform, 1860-1930 (Berkeley, Calif., 1999). 55 Hine and Faragher, American West, 514. 56 Richard White, "It's Your Misfortune and None of My Own": A History of the American West (Norman, Okla., 1991). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 145 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] mainly from a methodology not only local but firmly bounded.57 By contrast, Gordon's The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction exemplifies a microhistory that enables the historian to synthesize the threads of local life, many of which are translocal in origin and implication.58 Unlike Hine and Faragher, she gets inside the subjective experience of local life, even the experience of very ordinary people, without getting trapped inside that world and without implying that the larger world of the region, the nation, and even transnational economic and religious institutions were beyond the ken of her study of a seemingly local conflict. Mostly, her account is the story of the arrival and fate of Catholic orphans from New York who were to be placed in Catholic homes. The homes were Mexican as well as Catholic, and that was the problem and the focus of conflict. The conflict played out along class, ethnic, religious, and gender lines, and it eventually reached the Supreme Court. It is a compelling and very human narrative, but one that also addresses a whole range of analytical and interpretive issues of broader interest to historians. Bringing the issues of gender, class, and race into relation with each other allows for an appraisal of their relative importance in this particular historical explanation. I think that her story reveals class to be more important than her conclusion argues, but the real point to be made is that only a narrative synthesis that brings diverse threads together will enable the historian and the reader to make this kind of judgment. These complex ends are achieved in part by her adoption of an imaginative literary strategy. Gordon's book is constructed of two types of chapters. One is quite often a broad frame for local events. In these chapters, her perspective as narrator is exterior to the action. The issues addressed are frequently structural and, as often as not, extend beyond the community. Here, one gets an analytical explanation of the relation of local experience to larger national and international cultural, political, and economic developments. Between these chapters, she has crafted others that get inside the culture of the community, providing wonderfully rich, thick descriptions of daily life and the development of the conflict. With oral histories as well as fragmentary documentary evidence, she brings the reader very close to the experience and voices of the community. The play between these accounts and the more conventional chapters produces an unusual but powerful synthesis. Whether a microhistory qualifies as a synthesis, even by my generous definition, may be debated. But the singular relevance of this book for the discussion of synthesis concerns not scale but its literary ambition, the literary experiment that gives structure to the book. Those who would write other syntheses-at various scales-will, I hope, be encouraged, even inspired, to experiment with novel narrative strategies in the interest of more powerful representations of the past. Quintard Taylor presents a third version of western history, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (1998). He offers a broad synthetic account that characterizes the experiences of African Americans over a very long period of time. While the book does not ignore the [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 57Kenneth A. Lockridge, A New England Town: The First Hundred Years; Dedham, Massachusetts, 1636-1736 (New York, 1970). 58 Linda Gordon, The Great Arizona Orphan Abduction (Cambridge, Mass., 1999). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRuARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 146 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] relations among different groups in the West, particularly and inevitably between blacks and whites, but also between blacks and Native American, the contribution of the book is otherwise.59 He is mapping and making visible as a whole a history that has been largely unknown or studied in very specific instances and places. Drawing on a substantial body of scholarship, most of it published in the past quarter century, he aims to "reconstruct the history of African American women and men" in the West over five centuries, although mostly his focus is the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. Taylor's central themes are the quest for community by blacks and the relative degrees of freedom and opportunity they find in different times and places. The conjuncture of the map of African-American presence and the conventional history of the West that his story brings out compels rethinking of both African-American and western history. He makes the point, for example, that the issue of Texas independence in 1836 was not simply, as myth, even the more recent multicultural version, would have it: Anglos and Tejanos in Texas confronting a despotic government in Mexico. It was also an Anglo effort to preserve slavery.60 More broadly, the map literally reveals that African Americans in the West were overwhelmingly city and town dwellers, and it is that fact that unifies their experience. The kind of synthetic narrative that he has constructed provides an invaluable service at a particular moment, crystallizing a generation of scholarship, making generalization possible. His work not only informs the public of the dimensions of previously unrecognized histories, it also provides a base for the next generation of scholarship. In a similar way, another recent synthesis, one that focuses on a more narrowly defined but also more developed area of scholarship, reveals the harvest of recent scholarship on work and workers. American Work: Four Centuries of Black and Vhite Labor (1998) by Jacqueline Jones at once brings this rich scholarship to a wider audience and proffers a fresh way of framing the field.61 If The American West, In Search of the Racial Frontier, and American Work cover very long chronological spans, books by David M. Kennedy and Fred Anderson address short periods. Their focus is also quite different, since both concentrate on political and military history. Kennedy's Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (1999) addresses what might well be called "high politics," while Anderson's The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (2000) brings social history and high politics into fruitful play, finding in that interaction the terms of his central argument about the nature of power in the British Empire. At the outset, both books locate their stories in a broad international context. Kennedy's book begins at the close of World War I, and the first character introduced is Lance Corporal Adolf Hitler, who was in a military hospital recovering from a poison gas attack when he heard the news of Germany's surrender. The international context thus suggested is obviously central to the half [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 59He explicitly recognizes the issue of intergroup relations, but he equally explicitly indicates that such is not his aim here. See Quintard Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier: African Americans in the American West, 1528-1990 (New York, 1998), 18-19. 60 Taylor, In Search of the Racial Frontier, 39. 61 Jacqueline Jones, American Work: Four Centuries of Black and White Labor (New York, 1998). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 147 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] of the book devoted to World War II, but it is not nearly so much developed as it might be. The geography of Washington, D.C., even that of the White House, and the biographies of three men-Franklin D. Roosevelt, Winston Churchill, and Hitler-are more important to Kennedy's story than the world beyond the borders of the United States or, for that matter, than the American people of his subtitle. One of Kennedy's aims is evidently to urge upon Americans a greater attention to and sense of responsibility in the larger world, yet with the exception of the excellent discussion of the differing explanations of the economic crisis offered by Herbert Hoover and Roosevelt, there is surprisingly little incorporation of inter- national elements into the dynamic of the story. For all the importance of the larger world, for Kennedy, as for many Americans, whether professional historians or not, the international is a sort of "other," something "over there," if I may reverse the title of one of Kennedy's earlier books.62 Kennedy- also pays little attention to social history, not even to social histories that have sought to better explain the politics of the interwar years.63 Nor does the book address intellectual history, the history of science and technology (except briefly in connection with war production), the states, education, urban history, and much more. In fact, the book would have been more accurately described by the title of William E. Leuchtenburg's classic, F.D.R. and the New Deal, 1932-1940, which is here superseded and extended into the war years.64 So titled, adding the war to the New Deal, one could have no objection to this extraordinarily well-written, deeply researched, and compellingly argued book. But is it a history of "the American people"? Freedom from Fear is a masterful narrative on the terms it has assumed for itself. Yet having said that, historiographical questions remain. Kennedy apparently assumes that three voices are the important ones; not many other voices are heard, even though each of a small clutch of additional figures is presented very effectively as a full human being: Lorena Hickok, Eleanor Roosevelt, Harry Hopkins, Raymond Moley, Herbert Hoover, John L. Lewis, and A. Philip Randolph, among a few others. History for Kennedy, unlike for the other authors of these syntheses, is made by select leaders, not by ordinary people. What is remarkable, therefore, is the illusion of synthesis that is achieved. The book was published in a series that promises narrative syntheses of the defining periods of American national history. Most so far published accept traditional definitions of periods, and they are framed as political history, but none is so severely restricted as this one, which won the Pulitzer Prize in part because it was recognized as a work of grand synthesis. Dramatic changes in the historiography of the American field make it seem anachronistic. Yet its success makes the point that political history in the grand [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 62 David M. Kennedy, Over Here: The First World War and American Society (New York, 1980). The point Kennedy makes about Americans could be turned against his own book, which assumes the same divide he finds among Americans generally. He complains in the text that Americans held tight to "the dangerous illusion that they could choose whether and when [I would add how] to participate in the world." David M. Kennedy, Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression and War, 1929-1945 (New York, 1999), 386. 63 The only exception I spotted in the footnotes is Lizabeth Cohen, Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939 (New York, 1990). 64 William E. Leuchtenburg, F.D.R. and the New Deal: 1932-1940 (New York, 1963). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 148 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] style, focusing on a few elite figures, can still claim, at least for the general public, to be a narrative history of a people. Fred Anderson's Crucible of War again engages us with the question of elites and ordinary people, and it provides -a promising approach. While Kennedy seems quite confident of the importance of a few leaders, Anderson seems to be ambivalent, and that ambivalence enriches his history. Although I think the principal contribution of Crucible of War to our understanding of the British Empire is grounded in the social history of the political and military experience of ordinary Americans, the dramatic focus, as with Francis Parkman's great nineteenth-century narrative, is on two great leaders of the French and Indian War, the marquis de Montcalm and James Wolfe.65 Yet, as Alan Taylor has insightfully insisted, Anderson has rewritten the story of their confrontation in a way that diminishes these actors, especially Wolfe.66 To be sure, Anderson's book goes beyond Parkman in its respect for Native Americans, their agency, and their role in the empire (and the role of the empire and war for them). He also modifies Parkman on a point that is central to the book's contribution to imperial history: unlike Parkman, Anderson not only notices but makes much of the division between English colonials and English metropolitans. These differences in expectation and experience make the war in his view a "theatre of intercultural interaction."67 Like Butler, Anderson seeks to diminish the role of 1776 in understanding the development of what became the United States. Historians, he argues, will better understand the creation of the United States by closely examining the Seven Years' War and, more generally, by challenging the usual tendency to "take as our point of reference the thirteen rebelling colonies, not the empire as a whole."68 Yet, even as he argues the importance of getting behind the Revolution of 1776 so that one can discover the eighteenth century as it was experienced, the revolution remains a touchstone for him. More than anything else, he wants the reader to recognize that the shots fired in the Seven Years' War were the ones with implications around the world. But he keeps de-historicizing his story to use it to diminish the shot of lesser implication (in his view) heard 'round the world in 1775. When one begins the book, there is a sense of excitement. Here is a history of the United States ready to take the globe as its context. Before the narrative even begins, the reader is presented with a portfolio of maps. Only two of eight describe the British colonies; no more than four of them consider North America at all. The portfolio begins with a world map, revealing the global distribution of the battles that marked the Seven Years' War. There are also maps of the Indian subcontinent, Central Europe, and the Caribbean. The introduction promises a book that will make the world, or at least the full extent of the British Empire, its context and subject. We are told that "if viewed from Montreal or Vincennes, St. Augustine, Havana, Paris or Madrid-or, for that matter Calcutta or Berlin-the Seven Years' War was far more significant than the War of American Independence."69 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 65 Francis Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe, 6th edn., 2 vols. (Boston, 1885). 66 See Alan Taylor, "The Forgotten War," New Republic (August 14, 2000): 40-45. 67 Fred Anderson, The Crucible of War: The Seven Years' War and the Fate of Empire in British North America, 1754-1766 (New York, 2000), xvi. 68 Anderson, Crucible of War, xv. 69 Anderson, Crucible of War, xvi. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 149 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Yet once the narrative is begun, it immediately narrows. We get very little of Asia (although Manila makes a brief but important comparative appearance), the Caribbean, Africa, and continental Europe. Of course, other European powers are part of the narrative, but they only have walk-on roles. We learn little of them at home or about the ways leaders or ordinary citizens interpret events, while we are, by contrast, led through elaborate accounts of high British politics. The preface, presumably written last, sketches an extraordinary agenda for what would be a stunning book. Unfortunately, Anderson did not write the book he there described. Still, judged in terms of what it did rather than what it proposed to do, it is an outstanding work of craft. It will no doubt be our generation's account of the Seven Years' War. As military history, it is superb, and it contributes importantly-but not so grandly as some of the opening rhetoric promises-to the non-controversial but still unclear issue of the causal relations that connect the Seven Years' War to the coming of the revolution. Anderson in fact offers a rich Anglo-centric narrative that explores and explains the different meaning of the war both as strategic event and as experience for the British of the metropole and in the colonies. It is written with verve and confidence-and a seemingly complete command of the materials, primary and secondary. One of its themes is the misperception of events by political elites; with the exception of William Pitt, surely Anderson's hero in this story, they fail to understand the different meaning of the war and empire for ordinary soldiers and colonial subjects. He thus makes cultural issues the heart of the book. Military and political elites play a dramatic role in the narrative, but causation for Anderson- and here he points to important newer developments in military and diplomatic history-is to be found in the culture of everyday life.70 In making this point, he not only offers an important interpretation of the war (building in part on his previous book on Massachusetts soldiers), he also reveals the empire to be less solid, more a matter of continuous negotiation, than historians often consider such entities, whether empires or nations or states.71 MORE EFFECTIVELY THAN ANDERSON, Ira Berlin, referring to the earliest history of Afro-European North America, and Daniel T. Rodgers, addressing the early twentieth century, incorporate the Atlantic, or at least the North Atlantic, into their narratives of American history. Berlin and Rodgers write very different kinds of history and focus on different periods. Berlin's is a social history, while Rodgers has written an intellectual history, or, perhaps, a history of political culture. Yet both Berlin and Rodgers recognize the complex webs that route movements-of people, of ideas, of money, of things-in the Atlantic world. The transnational terrains that Berlin and Rodgers evoke establish larger and truer frames for national histories than do notions of bounded and self-contained regions or nations. The first section of Berlin's Many Thousands Gone, a portrait of the Atlantic littoral, describes a world framed by cities and the sea, little divided by national [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 70 Anderson, Crucible of War, 453-54. 71 See Fred Anderson, A Peoples' Army: Massachusetts Soldiers and Society in the Seven Years' War (Chapel Hill, N.C., 1984). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 150 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] boundaries, which did not yet organize any of the four Atlantic continents. Berlin's opening tableau describes the emergence of the Atlantic world as an ever- expanding historical terrain, where the African presence is pervasive on the sea and in the cities, including Lisbon, where they made up 10 percent of the population in the sixteenth century. He evokes a world defined by a network of cosmopolitan cities populated by creolized peoples. African people were not only omnipresent, they were often crucial cultural and economic brokers, helping to knit this new world together. Berlin lets go of this powerful frame and image in his later chapters, where he narrows the focus to regional difference within the bounds of British North America. Still, the book's protean beginning remains in the reader's mind, inviting others to realize its narrative logic and moral meaning.72 In Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (1998), Daniel T. Rodgers also achieves a richer historicism by expanding the space of analysis. One small indication is in the subtitle. He refers to "social politics," not the more usual "welfare state." His approach, examining relations in space as well as over time as fields of contingency, makes the welfare state a problematic common term. When he uses the more general and more mobile term "social politics," he effectively historicizes the concept, lineage, and practice of the welfare state. The development of a social politics has other possible paths and outcomes besides evolution into the national welfare state.73 The national welfare state thus becomes a historically and place-specific invention rather than a universal or, worse, the teleological endpoint of American liberal narratives-an endpoint surely upended by the politics of the last quarter of the twentieth century. Following the pioneering work of James T. Kloppenberg, who also assumed a Euro-American context for progressivism and social democracy, Rodgers ap- proaches this age of reform as at once a transnational and national issue.74 A variety of reforms-from urban planning to social insurance to regulation of capitalism- are examined as products both of general, transnational ideas and of particular, national political cultures. The complex narratives thus developed by Rodgers and Kloppenberg-ones that recognize, especially in the case of Rodgers, the historicity of the balance between national and transnational-are a major advance in the narrative synthesis of a national history. Both Rodgers and Kloppenberg impress on the reader that ideas could cross the Atlantic in either direction. This is salutary; American intellectual history is too often thought by Europeans and Americans as well to be either insignificant or derivative, not quite up to equal participation in an international world of ideas. This common point is handled differently in each book. While Kloppenberg notes [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 72 One hopes this extension of the historiographical terrain will continue and that connections as well as comparisons will be made between the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic and between the Atlantic slave trade and the slave trade that turned to the east, to the Muslim empires of the Mediterranean and today's Middle East. Big as it is, the Atlantic does not capture the logic and dimensions of slavery in this era. 73 See, for example, the argument (somewhat dependent on Rodgers's work) in Thomas Bender, "Cities, Intellectuals, and Citizenship in the United States: The 1890s and 1990s," Citizenship Studies 3 (1999): 203-20. 74 Daniel T. Rodgers, Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass., 1998); James T. Kloppenberg, Uncertain Victory: Social Democracy and Progressivism in European and American Thought, 1870-1920 (New York, 1986). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 151 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] direct interaction, he seems more interested in demonstrating a homological relation or a kind of convergence. Rodgers, by contrast, focuses on the specific transit of ideas and emphasizes the way intellectuals and reformers on either side of the Atlantic drew selectively on these ideas, depending on personal taste and local circumstance. The result is a fundamental and valuable reorientation of the way we might understand intellectual history. The conceptual opening they have created invites a yet more radical under- standing of the territory and movement of ideas. Let me go back to the title of Rodgers's book. I think that "Atlantic Crossings" projects too narrow an under- standing of the implications of the book. It emphasizes the movement of people and ideas back and forth across the Atlantic. To that extent, it recalls a much older Anglo-American historiography of "trans-Atlantic influences."75 Rodgers goes well beyond this historiography in showing that, in important respects, Europe was partly Americanized and the United States was partly Europeanized by the phenomena he describes. But his really important accomplishment is to get away from the "influence" model, to displace the linear A to B notion of intellectual history. But he could have gone farther yet. There is more to the circulation of ideas than this framing recognizes. It is more than an Atlantic crossing, more than a link between Western Europe and the United States. The whole Atlantic, South Atlantic as well as North Atlantic, and, indeed, increasingly, parts of the Pacific world better describe the extent of the intellectual network his book evokes. In regard to urban development and reform, an important theme in Rodgers's book, it is clear that there is a global conversation at work. Rather than the linearity of steamship crossings (the dustjacket illustration) between the port cities of Western Europe and New York, I imagine a Great Bazaar of urban ideas, technology, and aesthetics hovering over the Atlantic, with many traders and buyers. This exchange is not, of course, symmetrical, and that itself is an issue, but participation was nearly global in 1900. Progressive ideas, especially those dealing with urban reform and technologies, traveled through many circuits and with different voltage, but nearly the whole world was connected, not only Western Europe and the United States. Simply look at the cities of Eastern Europe, Latin America, parts of Africa, Central and East Asia. Surely, they were part of an international conception of urbanism-and of urban commercial culture. The remnants of the era make it clear that New York and Chicago, no less than Lyons, Cairo, Buenos Aires, or Shanghai, were local instances of a global process of city-making. THESE LAST COMMENTS SUGGEST what I take to be the next challenge of narrative synthesis. But before I conclude, let me briefly review what has been accomplished by the cohort of synthetic histories considered here. These books reveal, even verify, the capacity of narrative synthesis to achieve inclusion and to respect issues of identity. Moreover, it seems possible in synthetic narratives to combine structure [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 75 See Frank Thistlethwaite, The Anglo-American Connection in the Early Nineteenth Century (Philadelphia, 1959). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 152 Thomas Bender [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] and agency and to consider causal explanation without sacrificing the explication of subjective meaning-and vice versa. The volumes here examined reveal many narrative strategies and quite different relations to a wider reading public. There is no single model, and no one volume (yet) does all the things we might fairly expect in a realized synthesis. In addition, these books, both in what they do and do not do, suggest to me the value of embracing a narrative core that is a more explicit and deeper exploration of democracy and difference, freedom and empowerment, contest and justice. Such a focus promises a sharper analytical history, one more historical and less susceptible to teleology, whether of modernity or anything else. It seems plausible to propose that a wider canvas, a supranational context, may in fact enhance the examination of these issues. The work of Hine and Faragher, Berlin, Gordon, and Rodgers in particular enables one to imagine an even more radical synthesis of national history, one that operates on multiple geographical scales, from narratives smaller than the nation to supra-national ones-thus identifying the nation as a product of history as well as an object of historical inquiry. Such a framing of national history will increase awareness of the complexity of the multiple axes of historical interaction, causation, and identity formation. While I mean these concluding comments to suggest an ambitious new agenda for the discipline, we must not overlook an already existing and compelling example. Decades ago, David Brion Davis embarked on a multivolume history that considered all these issues. He brought them together in his majestic synthesis that explores slavery and freedom in the Atlantic world, a history of nearly global reach that is also-and I emphasize this fact-a history of the United States.76 My point, then, is that such histories can be written, have been written, and I trust that more will yet be written. The present moment seems especially propitious for such histories. The relation of the nation to both subnational and transnational solidarities is very much in question. It is a public concern as well as an object of interdisciplinary scholarly inquiry. Historians surely have an open invitation to rethink the boundaries of national histories.77 Colonial historians have been moving in this direction for some time, redefining their field as the Atlantic world long before the globalization talk. Likewise, Rodgers and Ian Tyrrell, both of whom work on the modern period, moved in this direction fairly early and for a different reason: their concern about the claims of American exceptionalism.78 With these various concerns at work, we may fairly expect a movement of American historians and other historians as well toward a wider sense of their fields. National histories will not be so firmly bounded, and the assumption of their national autarky will be softened by the recognition that national histories are [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] 76 David Brion Davis, The Problem of Slavery in Western Culture (Ithaca, N.Y., 1966); The Problem of Slavery in the Age of Revolution, 1770-1823 (Ithaca, 1975), with the final installment yet to come. 77 See Bender, Rethinking American History in a Global Age; and Thomas Bender, The La Pietra Report (Bloomington, Ind., 2000), also available on the World Wide Web at www.oah.org/activities/ lapietra/index.html. 78 Ian Tyrrell, "American Exceptionalism in an Age of International History," AHR 96 (October 1991): 1031-55; Daniel T. Rodgers, "Exceptionalism," in Anthony Molho and Gordon S. Wood, eds., Imagined Histories: American Historians Interpret the Past (Princeton, N.J., 1998), 21-40. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]] [[START 02P0009T]] Strategies of Narrative Synthesis in American History 153 embedded in yet larger histories. And all of this will demand yet more ambitious strategies of narrative synthesis. Thomas Bender is University Professor of the Humanities and Professor of History at New York University. His scholarship has been in the broad domain of cultural history, particularly studies of cities, intellectuals, and, most recently, the history of scholarly disciplines. His books on these themes include Toward an Urban Vision (1975), New York Intellect (1987), and Intellect and Public Life (1993), as well as The Unfinished City: New York and the Metropol- itan Idea (forthcoming). He has a longstanding interest in the larger framings of American history that dates from his Community and Social Change in America (1978) and continued in his article "Wholes and Parts: The Need for Synthesis in American History," Journal of American History (1986), which provides the starting point for this essay. His thinking on this topic also derives in part from his work on the OAH-NYU project that resulted in the La Pietra Report (2000), which he authored, and Rethinking American History in a Global Age (2002), which he edited. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW FEBRUARY 2002 [[END 02P0009T]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/532101
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: 587015
Date: April 2003
Author(s): Elbourne Elizabeth
Abstract: [[START 03X0760F]] Review Essays Word Made Flesh: Christianity, Modernity, and Cultural Colonialism in the Work of Jean and John Comaroff ELIZABETH ELBOURNE "IN THE BEGINNING WAS THE WORD, and the word was made flesh and dwelt among us," as the first chapter of the Book of John proclaims in a text often read at Christian Easter celebrations. The text might be taken as a something of a leitmotif of the first two volumes (of a projected three) of Jean and John Comaroff's brilliant and rightly influential series, Of Revelation and Revolution.1 The first two volumes, Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa and The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier, explore the nineteenth-century encounter between British Protestant Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana in a region that is now in the northern part of the Republic of South Africa. The Comaroffs attempt, however, to do far more than merely describe a series of relatively small-scale historical events. They are interested in missionaries above all because of their complex relationship to "modernity," which the Comaroffs see in turn as tightly linked to a particular phase of European colonialism. The title of the second volume, "The Dialectics of Modernity," suggests as much. Most European missionaries tried hard to function as agents of cultural change-of "civilization" in early nineteenth-century missionaries' own terms, implicitly casting the Tswana as "savage" and thereby laying out one of the key dialectical oppositions of colonial- ism, which would function as a justification for dispossession. Some Tswana interlocutors adapted some elements of "Christian behavior," the Comaroffs argue, but many others demonstrated resistance to the hegemony of British colonialism in part by resisting the colonization of their everyday lives. The nineteenth-century Protestant project to remake the world, of which the Nonconformist missionaries of southern Africa were important proponents, is thus linked by the Comaroffs forward to colonialism and to contemporary globalization, and backward in time to Part of this article was presented in a much earlier version at the Twentieth Anniversary Conference of the Journal of Southern African Studies, York, 1994; I would like to thank the participants as well as those who subsequently commented helpfully, including David Maxwell, Norman Etherington, Ed Wilmsen, and Paul Landau. For reading the current essay, my particular thanks to Catherine Desbarats, Eric Jabbari, James Ron, and Michael Wasser, as well as to Tim Rowse, Desley Deacon, Ann Curthoys, and John Docker for helpful suggestions. I am of course solely responsible for the content. The research for this essay was supported by the Social Sciences and Humanities Research Council of Canada. 1 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, Vol. 1: Christianity, Colonialism, and Consciousness in South Africa (Chicago, 1991), and Vol. 2: The Dialectics of Modernity on a South African Frontier (Chicago, 1997). 435 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne the emergence of capitalism. Missionaries were, in effect, agents of a first wave of globalization. The missionary movement was an early exemplar of a transnational global movement, while the intellectual claims of missionaries to universality paralleled the modernist claims of a globalizing colonialism. The struggles over the texture and composition of everyday life that took place on the frontiers of colonial society in nineteenth-century southern Africa therefore tell us something not only about the nature of colonialism but also about modernity and its considerable discontents, as well as about the resistance of the colonized to the European colonial project. In this sense, a quest for origins informs the narrative structure of both books.2 Indeed, one of the reasons that this seminal text engages us so closely is its concern with the narrative of dispossession and resistance, with a beginning and therefore, implicitly, some hope for an end-an only ambivalently postmodern narrative, in fact, despite some alarm in southern Africanist circles over Of Revelation and Revolution as a postmodern nail in the coffin of materialist history.3 This focus lends moral urgency to the Comaroffs' consideration of the distant initial encounters between white missionaries and the southern Tswana in the early nineteenth century. Volume 2, for example, opens with a striking vignette: Tswana soldiers refuse to defend the white regime in 1994, as Afrikaner patriots launch a last-ditch raid on Bophuthatswana. As homeland structures crumble around them as they write, the Comaroffs acknowledge that endings and beginnings are never entirely neat. "And yet in many respects, the narrative of Tswana colonization had completed itself, finally running its course from Revelation to Revolution."4 Doubtless the authors would now adopt a less utopian position, but their enthusiasm for revolution and for endings is important, and typical of South African historical writing from the decades before the end of apartheid.5 2 Catherine Desbarats, "Essais sur quelques elements de l'6criture de l'histoire am6rindienne," Revue d'histoire de l'Ameriquefranqaise 53, no. 4 (Spring 2000): 491-520, provides an interesting model, inspired among others by Paul Ricoeur, Hayden White, and Kerwin Lee Klein, for the reading of various historical approaches to the colonial encounter as forms of narrative romance, given the inescapable narrativity of the historical text. Susan Newton-King, also drawing on Ricoeur, similarly reflects on the inescapable imposition of an artificial order on colonial encounters by the historian of colonialism. Newton-King, "Introduction," Masters and Servants on the Cape Eastern Frontier, 1760- 1803 (Cambridge, 1999). See also Kerwin Lee Klein, Frontiers of Historical Imagination: Narrating the European Conquest of Native America, 1890-1990 (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); Hayden White, The Content of the Form: Narrative Discourse and Historical Representation (Baltimore, 1987); Paul Ricoeur, Temps et recit, 3 vols. (Paris, 1985-87). 3 Meghan Vaughan, "Colonial Discourse Theory and African History, or Has Postmodernism Passed Us By?" Social Dynamics 20, no. 2 (Summer 1994): 1-23; David Bunn, "The Insistence of Theory: Three Questions for Meghan Vaughan," Social Dynamics 20, no. 2: 24-34; Clifton Crais, "South Africa and the Pitfalls of Postmodern," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 274-79; Leon de Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs: Postmodernist Puffery and Competing Conceptions of the 'Archive,'" South African Historical Journal, no. 31: 280-89. These authors take a variety of positions on the issues of whether or not the Comaroffs are postmodern and whether or not the rise of postmodernism in post-apartheid South African academic historical scholarship has been a positive development in a field that was previously (and in many ways still is) passionately materialist in approach. 4 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: xiii. 5 The original title of the series was reportedly From Revelation to Revolution, planned at a time before the release of Nelson Mandela. In a recent conversation with Homi Bhabha, however, John Comaroff is considerably less sanguine about the end of apartheid in South Africa and popular enthusiasm for Mandela outside South Africa, which he sees as a last gasp of modernist optimism in AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 436 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh In a similar vein, at the heart of Volume 1 is a crucial chapter, "Through the Looking Glass: Heroic Journeys, First Encounters." This chapter sets out to explore "the initial meeting of two worlds, one imperial and expansive, the other local and defensive."6 In marvelously evocative detail, the authors describe the initial entry of envoys of the London Missionary Society (LMS) in 1816 into the Tswana capital, Dithakong (seen by the missionaries themselves as a sacred journey into the land of Satan), a subsequent meeting, and the complex negotiations that took place throughout over the terms of the mission. A key metaphor is furnished by the mirror that the LMS envoy John Campbell presented as a gift to the Tswana chief, Mothibi, symbolizing the Western effort to reconfigure Tswana consciousness and the Tswana notion of the self. These initial encounters prefigured the colonial encounter to come: "the square enclosure and all that 'took place' at the center of the most public of Tswana spaces was ominous, foreshadowing a methodical reconstruction of their symbolic map."7 The Christian missionary project, this chapter further suggests, was from the start central to the creation of the dialectical oppositions of colonialism, ironic in view of its claim to erase difference. For the Comaroffs, the colonization of the Tswana thus began (although it certainly did not end) with the word, in the sense both of Bible and of cultural text, with the advent of white Protestant missionaries and their claims to possess the revealed divine word-albeit a word made flesh, clothed in material power. The roots of colonization were in a series of knowledge claims and a set of hegemonic cultural discourses, which would bolster the later seizure of land and of labor. Many scholars have explored the linkage between knowledge claims and colonial power, an issue that has long lain at the heart of postcolonial scholarship and that occupies an increasingly central place in the study of imperialism from a diversity of perspectives.8 Nonetheless, Of Revelation and Revolution furnishes a particularly influential and important statement of the position, in part because it provides a great deal of flesh on the bones of a theoretical model of cultural colonialism. The work moves from the field of discourse alone to examine in great detail concrete material struggles over the remaking of everyday life, including Tswana efforts to resist cultural colonialism. More controversially, perhaps, Of Revelation and Revolution also attempts to make explicit the links in southern Africa between a postcolonial setting. Homi Bhabha and John Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality, in the Continuous Present: A Conversation," in David Theo Goldberg and Ato Quayson, eds., Relocating Postcolonialism (Oxford, 2002). 6 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 171. 7 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 182. 8 Among many recent discussions of colonialism and European knowledge claims, see Ato Quayson and David Theo Goldberg, "Introduction: Scale and Sensibility," and Benita Parry, "Directions and Dead Ends in Postcolonial Studies," in Goldberg and Quayson, Relocating Postcolo- nialism, xi-xxii and 66-81; Michael Adas, "From Settler Colony to Global Hegemon: Integrating the Exceptionalist Narrative of the American Experience into World History," AHR 106 (December 2001): 1692-1720; various essays in Catherine Hall, ed., Cultures of Empire: Colonizers in Britain and the Empire in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries (Manchester, 2000); Gyan Prakash, "Who's Afraid of Postcoloniality?" Social Text 49 (Winter 1996): 187-203; Prakash, "Subaltern Studies as Postcolonial Criticism," AHR 99 (December 1994): 1475-90. On the reconfiguration of African history, see Frederick Cooper, "Conflict and Connection: Rethinking Colonial African History," AHR 99: 1516-45. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 437 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne political, economic, and cultural colonialism-fields the authors argue are in any case impossible to disaggregate.9 The programmatic claims that lend Of Revelation and Revolution its force also, however, cause some interesting tensions in the book. The need to make linkages and the Comaroffs' explicit commitment to the exploration of large-scale processes lead the authors to oversimplify in places. Not only that, but the imperatives of a dialectical method push the Comaroffs at times (despite their parallel stress on indeterminacy and their very explicit engagement with the costs and benefits of a dialectical analysis, especially in Volume 2) into tighter methodological corners than they might themselves like. The links between early nineteenth-century cultural colonialism and late nineteenth-century political colonialism are not as direct or as ontologically indissoluble as the Comaroffs assume they are, while the relationship of "modernity" to colonialism furnishes matter for debate, with considerable contemporary implications. The very boldness of the Comaroffs' arguments has indeed contributed to a mixed reception among scholars of southern African history and of religion in Africa, with some enthusiastically welcoming the methodological innovation of the Comaroffs and others casting doubt in a number of ways. In the second volume of the series, the Comaroffs seem to me to have backed down somewhat from some of their bolder claims, despite their spirited engagement with the critics. This in itself provides an interesting case study of the evolution of ideas during a turbulent decade in South African history. In what follows, I would like to engage with this important work in several ways. First, I want to lay out my understanding of the theoretical guidelines in the opening volume, with particular attention to the issue of hegemony and power. Second, I want to provide an alternate reading of the opening encounters between Tswana and missionary, focusing on other intermediaries and on the fact that, even before the advent of European missionaries, the region was already affected by colonialism. I shall use this example to ask whether a dialectic model does not in some ways oversimplify complicated situations and make it hard to account for fudging across the fault lines. I shall further ask whether the result is not a rather muted account of individual agency and an attenuated depiction of the multiple uses of mission Christianity, both as language and as practice. This is not, however, to deny the latent authoritarian potential of much missionary activity, particularly in a colonial context. Third, I also want to gesture, albeit sketchily, toward some issues associated with narrative and chronology, suggesting that the schematic narrative about "modernity," industrialization, and globalization that undergirds both volumes, though provocative and important, also offers a number of hostages to fortune. These include an undue stress on the capacity of missionaries to induct converts into the global economy by changing their consciousness; rather, I see converts struggling to adapt to an overpowering global economy, among other things by trying to use Christianity in a variety of ways, with greater or lesser degrees of success. Having said all that, does this fact-mongering matter?-What are the Comaroffs doing that might go beyond reading the content of particular 9 Colonialism was simultaneously a "process in political economy and culture," and these dimensions were "indissoluble aspects of the same reality, whose fragmentation into discrete spheres hides their ontological unity." Comarofff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 19. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 438 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh archives? Throughout, I want to take up some concerns of African historians and anthropologists with questions of narrative, voice, and agency in Of Revelation and Revolution. THE INITIAL CHAPTER OF THE FIRST VOLUME is a careful theoretical exposition. Although the authors rather cheerfully direct those with little stomach for theoretical discussions to skip theirs and, en bon bricoleur, to pick up the narrative at a later point, the opening discussion of anthropological concepts is in fact crucial for an understanding of what both this book and its later companion seek to accomplish. I would accordingly like to pause upon it. The stated goal of the work is to present an anthropology of the "colonial encounter," in this case between British Nonconformist missionaries and the southern Tswana, with the larger implication that the missionaries acted as the cultural arm of colonialism, while the dilemmas of the Tswana in their confrontations with colonialism mirrored, if they obviously did not precisely reproduce, the experience of other colonized African groups in South Africa. The Comaroffs state that they hope that their discussion of this particular mission will accomplish three other things: to anticipate later modes of consciousness and struggle in South Africa; to look at an example of historical processes that were happening across Africa and indeed much of the non-Western world; and to examine analytic issues to do with the "nature of power and resistance." With reference to this latter objective: How, precisely, were structures of inequality fashioned during the colonial encounter, often in the absence of more conventional, more coercive tools of domination? How was consciousness made and remade in this process? ... How were new hegemonies established and the "ground prepared," in [Antonio] Gramsci's phrase, for formal European political control? ... Even more fundamentally, how are we to understand the dialectics of culture and power, ideology and consciousness that shape such historical processes?'1 From the vantage point of 1991, the Comaroffs placed their project into a historiographical framework that has since changed considerably, in no small part due to their own work."1 At the time, the Comaroffs castigated anthropologists for 10 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 6. 11 Among many possibilities, some works of particular importance to southern Africa include Paul Stuart Landau, The Realm of the Word: Language, Gender and Christianity in a Southern African Kingdom (London, 1995); Henry Bredekamp and Robert Ross, eds., Missions and Christianity in South African History (Johannesburg, 1995); Pier M. Larson, "'Capacities and Modes of Thinking': Intellectual Engagements and Subaltern Hegemony in the Early History of Malagasy Christianity," AHR 102 (October 1997): 969-1002; Richard Elphick and Rodney Davenport, eds., Christianity in South Africa: A Political, Social, and Cultural History (Berkeley, Calif., 1997); and many other works discussed in David Chidester, Judy Tobler, and Darrel Wratten, Christianity in South Africa: An Annotated Bibliography (Westport, Conn., 1997). The sheer diversity of recent approaches to the history of mission Christianity, a growth field, is impossible to capture in a footnote but is suggested by works such as David Maxwell and Ingrid Lawrie, eds., Christianity and the African Imagination: Essays in Honour of Adrian Hastings (Leiden, 2001); Nicholas Thomas, "Colonial Conversions: Difference, Hierarchy and History in Early Twentieth-Century Evangelical Propaganda," in Hall, Cultures of Empire; Susan Thorne, Congregational Missions and the Making of an Imperial Culture in Nineteenth- Century England (Stanford, Calif., 1999); Peter van der Veer, ed., Conversion to Moderities: The Globalization of Christianity (London, 1996); Robert W. Hefner, ed., Conversion to Christianity: Historical and Anthropological Perspectives on a Great Transformation (Berkeley, 1993); Lamin Sanneh, AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 439 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne neglecting both the study of colonialism and, more broadly, history itself. Historians paid more attention to missions but in the 1960s and 1970s often focused on the theoretically crude question of "whose side were the missionaries really on?" By the 1980s, mission history had been more fruitfully incorporated into work on such long-term processes as colonial conquest, capitalist expansion, state formation, and proletarianization. The methodological innovation of the Comaroffs in the early 1990s was, however, to underscore how much this new approach was itself limited by its "preoccupation with political economy at the expense of culture, symbolism, and ideology."12 They echoed the 1986 claim of Terence Ranger that most of the historiography of early missions to that point had overestimated the political and economic factors in its expansion-in a manner, according to the Comaroffs, stemming ultimately from oppositions between mind and matter at the ontological roots of our social thought.13 In rejecting a narrowly political-economic approach, the authors believed they could better answer the questions of why it was that missionaries succeeded in effecting broad social, political, and economic changes without substantial material resources (a question that, of course, assumes that this was accomplished by missionaries). What was needed, the Comaroffs claimed, was a study of consciousness: of why people articulated belief in certain things, why they took others for granted, how colonialism and consciousness were inextricably intertwined. It is in this sense that missionaries were most clearly colonial agents: they sought to remake the lifeworld of the Tswana, indeed, to colonize their consciousness. They did not necessarily seek directly and simplistically to incorpo- rate the Tswana into an unequal colonial world: they had dreamed instead of a "global democracy of material well-being and moral merit," in the Comaroffs' phrase.14 Nonetheless, their actions contributed to building an empire of inequality. This claim rests on the additional argument that the missionaries were the products of post-Enlightenment modernity, creations and agents of rationalization in the Weberian sense. Similarly, Tswana interlocutors made a variety of unexpected uses of the evangelical message, and of evangelical attempts to remake their world, again with unpredictable results. In sum, the encounter between colonial evangelism and the southern Tswana can best be described as a "long conversation," a continuing process in the course of which "signifiers were set afloat, fought over, and recaptured on both sides of the colonial encounter."15 Over the course of this conversation, the Tswana came to conceive of themselves as constituting a separate, Translating the Message: The Missionary Impact on Culture (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1989); and V. Y. Mudimbe, The Invention of Africa: Gnosis, Philosophy, and the Order of Knowledge (Bloomington, Ind., 1988). The Currents in World Christianity Project, at the University of Cambridge, has also since 1996 lent considerable impetus to the scholarly study of missions. A longstanding African literature reconsiders missions and the truth claims of missionaries, often from a theological perspective: for example, J. N. K. Mugambi, From Liberation to Reconstruction: African Christian Theology after the Cold War (Nairobi, 1996). Many works by African scholars are less well distributed in the West than they might be, given material constraints. From a wide variety of directions, missionary activity has become a newly invigorated area of research since the 1990s, although some of the more difficult underlying issues are perhaps not adequately discussed in all the literature. 12 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 8. 13 Terence Ranger, "Religious Movements and Politics in Sub-Saharan Africa," African Studies Review 29 (1986): 1-69. 14 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 12. 15 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17-18. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 440 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh reified entity, with a set of "Tswana" customs, or setswana. At the same time, the "forms" of the "European worldview" became inscribed on the "African land- scape": "not only did colonialism produce reified cultural orders, it gave rise to a new hegemony amidst-and despite-cultural contestation."16 Throughout this discussion, the Comaroffs reject the poststructuralist claim that all meanings are equally tenuous and open to contestation, regretting the episte- mological hypochondria and consequent intellectual immobility to which postmod- ern critiques have given rise in academia-even as the authors uphold some of the central insights of such critiques, notably their insistence that the indeterminacies of meaning and action be addressed by scholars.17 What poststructuralists cannot address is the basic question of how some meanings get widely accepted over significant periods of time by those against whose interest it is to believe them. This is the problem of hegemony, raised by Gramsci (however sketchy his discussion in the Prison Notebooks) and developed by many social theorists.18 The Comaroffs offer a solution, though over-schematic in the literal sense of the word. They see human consciousness as existing on a spectrum from "hegemony" to "ideology." At the hegemony end of the spectrum, one finds the taken-for-granted inscribed in everyday life-those beliefs that are not questioned because they are not even noticed as beliefs. At the other end, one finds articulated ideology, which is available for debate and which often tries to bring into consciousness the hegemonic beliefs of earlier stages. Culture in general is the "space of signifying practice, the semantic ground on which human beings seek to construct and represent themselves and others-and hence, society and history."l9 Somewhat oddly, hegemonic concepts are described as "constructs and conventions that have come to be shared and naturalized through a political community," while ideology is "the expression and ultimately the possession of a particular social group, although it may be widely peddled beyond."20 This psychological structure seems artificial and unwieldy; it is unclear why the province of the hegemonic idea should be the political community (a tricky concept to define in any case), while ideology is described not only as the product of communities (rather than at least sometimes of individuals) but as the province of the social rather than, say, political or even self-consciously intellectual groupings. The definition of the political is murky here, as it is throughout the book, despite (even sometimes because of) the painstaking effort of the authors to demonstrate the deeply political nature of the everyday stuff of life; what is lacking here and elsewhere is a willingness to limit and define the nature of the political in such a manner as to make it meaningful to call something political in the first place. Be that as it may, this construction of group political psychology permits the Comaroffs to draw conclusions that are critically important for their overall project. Indeed, the reconstruction of struggles over the stuff of everyday life that takes pride of place in the second volume depends ultimately on this theoretical 16 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 18. 17 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 17. 18 Antonio Gramsci, Selections from the Prison Notebooks of Antonio Gramsci, Quentin Hoare and Geoffrey Nowell-Smith, trans. (New York, 1991). 19 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 21. 20 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 24, my emphases. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 441 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume structure. Given the place of hegemony and ideology on an ever-changing spectrum, the two are constantly fluid; meanings are always being made and remade, as ideology challenges hegemony to reveal itself, and it is in the inchoate, fluid space between hegemony and ideology that human consciousness is at its most creative. Given that hegemony is constructed largely through the "assertion of control over various modes of symbolic production: over such things as educational and ritual processes, patterns of socialization, political and legal procedures, canons of style and self-representation, public communication, health and bodily discipline and so on," the realm of "symbolic production" is (presumably) political because it is a site for power struggles. This means both that the "symbolic production" is political and that resistance to modes of symbolic production that generate hegemony is political. Modes of resistance run across as wide a spectrum as modes of control, with at one end organized protest and other movements readily recognized as political by the West; at the other end are "gestures of tacit refusal and iconoclasms, gestures that sullenly and silently contest the forms of an existing hegemony."21 It is thus in this light that missions must be seen. They sought to extend hegemonic control over indigenous peoples by changing their worldviews to a point that new ways of behaving and seeing the world were completely internalized. Resistance to the specific forms of Christianity was also resistance to the message behind the signs. In the purest sense, resistance to Christian forms was resistance to the content of capitalism and to the global capitalist system; this is indeed a critical plank of Jean Comaroff's fascinating (if not uncontroversial) reading of African independent churches as quintessentially subversive because they appropriated and yet subverted Christian forms, in her important 1985 study Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance.22 Christian missions must also be re-read. Their gestures and ritual must be analyzed in order to see how missionaries were attempting to change far more than religious allegiance, acting as emissaries of modernity and economic transfor- mation. Finally, conversion was inextricably political, and as such a suitable site for political competition between colonizers and the colonized. The extremely rich remainder of this book and its successor volume work out the implications of these theoretical positions through a quite brilliant analysis of the nineteenth-century "colonial exchange" between the southern Tswana and the Nonconformist missions to them run first by the London Missionary Society (pioneers in the field) and then by their later-arriving brethren, the Wesleyan Methodist Missionary Society. An additional important project of the authors throughout this study is to demonstrate the importance of an imagined Africa to the British sense of themselves and more broadly to the construction of modernity. As the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2, as part of a series of seven propositions about colonialism, "colonialism was as much involved in making the metropole, and the identities and ideologies of colonizers, as it was in (re)making peripheries and colonial sub- 21 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 31. 22 Jean Comaroff, Body of Power, Spirit of Resistance: The Culture and History of a South African People (Chicago, 1985). Contrast J. M. Schoffeleers, "Ritual Healing and Political Acquiescence: The Case of the Zionist Churches in Southern Africa," Africa 61, no. 1 (1991): 1-25. Schoffeleers sees Zionist healing churches as not necessarily subversive of the established order and sometimes supportive of it. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 442 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh jects."23 In particular, in developing the theme of Africa as a "negative trope in the language of modernity" in Volume 1, the Comaroffs were among the most influential of scholars to introduce into the history of missionary activity in South Africa the postcolonialist concern with the construction of the colonial or minority "other" as a means for self-construction on the part of the person doing the defining.24 Despite their influence on many literary scholars, in Volume 2 the Comaroffs ironically confess themselves "uneasy with most literary critical ap- proaches to colonialism," eschew a vulgar Hegelian approach, and stress that they prefer to focus on "selves" and "others" in the plural; we shall return to this issue. A final critical point is that the authors see the interaction between missionary and Tswana as a form of dialectic between two key groups of interlocutors, dependent on the notion of difference. In the second volume, the Comaroffs acknowledge with more force than in Volume 1 the existence of overlap on the ground, and they reemphasize that the idea of difference was created by the dialectical process, despite some merging of lifeways on the ground and the mutual influence of Tswana and British. Note their comment that "neither 'the colonizer' nor 'the colonized' represented an undifferentiated sociological or political reality, save in exceptional circumstances."25 Since the end product of the colonial encounter was so clearly the production of difference and a series of deeply embedded dialectical oppositions, the Comaroffs nonetheless argue that this is the most productive optic through which to view the early nineteenth-century encounter between European mission- aries and Africans. This model is furthermore essential to their theoretical account of the formation of hegemony. ONE OF THE THINGS I HAVE FOUND MOST PERPLEXING about the work of the Comaroffs is, nevertheless, the question of the extent to which it is appropriate to describe the Tswana encounter with Christianity as a form of dialectic. This question implies the ancillary question of who the agents of the dialectic were at given moments. On the face of it, these are tendentious concerns, since colonialism was so clearly in many ways a dialectic between colonized and colonizer, just as colonialism clearly generated reified views of colonizer and colonized alike. Missionaries themselves usually understood their activities in dialectical terms. Yet I think one can ask whether a dialectical approach to the history of Christianity in colonial contexts 23 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 22. 24 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 86. Those influenced by the Comaroffs in this respect include David Chidester, Savage Systems: Colonialism and Comparative Religion in Southern Africa (Charlottesville, Va., 1996); Leon de Kock, Civilising Barbarians: Missionary Narrative and African Textual Response in Nineteenth-Century South Africa (Johannesburg, 1996); Doug Stuart, "'Of Savages and Heroes': Discourses of Race, Nation and Gender in the Evangelical Missions to Southern Africa in the Early Nineteenth Century" (PhD dissertation, Institute of Commonwealth Studies, University of London, 1994). This approach of course represents the concerns of many scholars of the British Empire and the related construction of British identity. Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York, 1978; 2d edn., 1996); Henry L. Gates, ed., Race, Writing and Difference (Chicago, 1986); Mary Louise Pratt, Imperial Eyes: Travel Writing and Transculturation (London, 1992); Linda Colley, Britons: Forging the Nation (New Haven, Conn., 1992); Ann Stoler and Frederick Cooper, eds., Tensions of Empire: Colonial Cultures in a Bourgeois World (Berkeley, Calif., 1997), including Stoler and Cooper, "Rethinking a Research Agenda." 25 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 24. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 443 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne does not fail to capture some aspects of social and political reality. This is above all because of the rapidity with which Christianity was out of the hands of the missionaries and settlers who brought it, the corresponding importance of non- Europeans in the spread of Christianity, the multiplicity of uses to which diverse interest groups of all ethnicities put Christianity as both a language and a practice, and the political and cultural complications of regions with multiple power players. These issues are brought out by a re-reading of the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana that occupy so key a role in the first volume of Of Revelation and Revolution. I should add that I made similar comments about the opening phases of the mission in an unpublished conference paper after the publication of Volume 1. The Comaroffs respond generously to this paper in Volume 2, as they do to a number of other critics, using the occasion to clarify and amplify their understanding of a dialectical approach. I do not want to beat a dead horse. Nonetheless, I think there are some useful differences of interpretation at stake, and so will abuse the Comaroffs' patience by briefly recapitulating a potential alternate reading of these opening gambits, before returning to the wider issue of different approaches to mission history.26 Let me first make a comment about regional issues. The lands of the southern Tswana were disrupted by colonialism, drought, hunger, and regional conflict well before the formal advent of missions. Furthermore, as Johannes du Bruyn has underscored, the lands inhabited by the southern Tswana were so profoundly affected by the Cape Colony to the south that it is problematic to frame a discussion of cultural colonialism primarily in terms of Europe and the Transvaal. In particular, the colonial firearms frontier moved with great speed, was highly destructive, and was arguably more important earlier than the Comaroffs suggest. Many different armed bands, some of them ethnically mixed, decimated peaceful groups in conflict situations exacerbated by hunger.27 Arguments about the regional context for evangelical missions to the Tswana are also implicit in a much wider body of literature about the so-called mfecane (or difaqane)-terms that have been much disputed by historians. Traditionally, the mfecane was a term given to the widespread wars, famines, and refugee movements that shook (and temporarily depopulated) much of the interior of southern Africa in the early nineteenth century, the impact of which on the Tswana the Comaroffs date from 1822. There is no space here to explore that debate, although it will be helpful to know that a 26 My re-reading of the opening encounter is based on my own work on LMS archives, which I consulted primarily with the aim of writing about contestation over the uses of Christianity within the Cape Colony and with a focus on Khoesan not Tswana uses of Christianity. It seems to me fruitful, however, to unite diverse perspectives on a very complex subject. Elizabeth Elbourne, Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (Montreal, 2002). There were four LMS delegations to the Tswana to establish a mission, not two as the Comaroffs have it. 27 Johannes du Bruyn, "Of Muffled Tswana and Overwhelming Missionaries: The Comaroffs and the Colonial Encounter," South African Historical Journal, no. 31 (1994): 294-309; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 1: 275-76. On Tswana views of the firearms frontier, see Robert Moffat to Richard Miles, Lattakoo [Kuruman], December 5, 1827, in Isaac Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman: Being the Journals and Letters of Robert and Mary Moffat, 1820-1828 (London, 1951), 274. Other letters in this collection describe frequent deadly raids throughout the 1820s, in which a wide variety of often ethnically mixed groups preyed on one another. On Cape influence, see also Johannes du Bruyn, "James Read en die Thlaping, 1816-1820," Historia 35 (1990). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 444 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh critical issue is whether or not covert slave trading from the Cape Colony and Portuguese territories was at the root of disruptions that have more traditionally been ascribed to the many conquests of the Zulu kingdom in the region of what is now Natal. The point I want to emphasize here is not only the great disruption in the region but also the plausibility of historian Neil Parsons's argument that Tswana territory had already been subject since the seventeenth century to political unrest and the large-scale movement of populations. Parsons in fact suggests that the roots of disruption and state formation in the area may well lie in destabilization that considerably antedated the 1820s and may in turn be linked in at least some way to eighteenth-century slave trading to the north and the rise of the predatory Cape Colony to the south.28 Scholars also tend to see later Afrikaner settler colonialism in the region as part of the same broad processes. All this calls into question the determinative impact of mission Christianity in an already destabilized region. Maybe political colonialism did precede cultural colonialism after all? How might we need to reconceptualize the Christian/Tswana encounter if we think of it as taking place in some sense in a frontier zone, or even a borderland, with multiple players, already characterized by cultural admixture, politically influenced uses of Christianity, and political turbulence? The Comaroffs are of course sensitive to these hugely important issues. I think nonetheless that they could emphasize regional complexity more and the power of missionary Christianity somewhat less in their discussion of the roots of material change (at both ends of the nineteenth century), as well as pay more attention to the implications for their overall theoretical argument of the fact that Africans tried to experiment in response to very difficult local conditions. It is also important that the missionaries entered as potential power brokers in a turbulent environment but were initially weak, able to manipulate power if and only if they could make the right alliances. With these types of broad issues in mind, the opening encounters between missionaries and Tswana, so well described by the Comaroffs, might be re-read as conversations between a number of actors. Four LMS delegations traveled between 1813 and 1817 to the southern Tswana settlement known to the missionaries as Lattakoo (later Dithakong) to try to persuade the Tswana to accept missionaries. It is perhaps symbolically appropriate that none of these delegations was exclusively white. In addition to the delegations' African members, even the missionaries themselves included a black West Indian man and a Welsh speaker. Neither, come to that, was the Tswana polity entirely "Tswana." The Thlaping polity was relatively multi-ethnic; the chief Mothibi, for example, was half !Kora (a Khoekhoe-speaking group) and (like others of the chiefly lineage) married a !Kora woman. More significantly, the Europeans were not the only, or even the most important, players promoting an evangelical mission. Key from a Tswana perspective were regional actors, the Griqua (as they 28 Julian Cobbing, "The Mfecane as Alibi: Thoughts on Dithakong and Mbolompo," Journal of African History 29, no. 3 (1988): 487-519; Caroline Hamilton, ed., Mfecane Aftermath (Johannesburg, 1996), including Neil Parsons, "Prelude to Difaqane in the Interior of Southern Africa c. 1600-1822," 323-49; Neil Parsons, "Kicking the Hornets' Nest: A Third View of the Cobbing Controversy on the Mfecane/Difaqane," address to the University of Botswana History Society, Gabarone, Botswana, March 16, 1999 (available online through the University of Botswana History Department web page, at http://ubh.tripod.com/ub/np.htm). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 445 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume eventually came to be known), some of whom acted as patrons of the early LMS mission to the Tswana. The Griqua were clusters of settlers in the region of Khoekhoe descent, some of whom had white fathers and Khoesan mothers, and many of whom had migrated from the Cape Colony, epitomizing the remaking of identity in the wake of colonialism. Groups spearheaded by Griqua had established regional hegemony through their access to arms and horses. They provided important trade links with the Cape Colony and were sources of trade goods for the Tswana. The Griqua were already using Christianity in a variety of complicated ways, as a token of equality with white settlers, as justification for what Robert Ross has termed "sub-imperialism" with regard to the unconverted Tswana, and indeed as a basis for their reconstituted polities. Alliances with missionaries gave these emergent polities potential access to diplomacy and markets, including the arms trade, in addition to spiritual concerns. Indeed, on the way to Mothibi's settlement, British LMS inspector Campbell had helped compose a formal written constitution for a Griqua group, reflecting the symbolic uses of the language of law. The language of Christianity was already on the loose in the interior, in other words, and subject to interpretation in Griqualand as much as in the seminaries of Europe.29 The (Khoekhoe) !Kora had also been exposed to Christianity and were also competing by the 1820s to obtain guns and horses from the Cape Colony. The decision of Mothibi and his counselors about whether to accept an LMS mission was thus complicated by the fact that the LMS came under the protection of the powerful Griqua Kok clan. During a second LMS delegation to the Tswana (overlooked by the Comaroffs), for example, Adam Kok presented newly arrived missionaries to Mothibi and acted as their translator. Mothibi was anxious not to offend the powerful Kok family, but worried because his own people had since turned against the mission. In fact, he eventually sent these missionaries away altogether. When two missionaries told Mothibi that one of them "wrought in wood, and one that was to come wrought in Iron, that we would do all the work for him in that way that he wanted," Mothibi was pleased and told Kok "he could not think of rejecting those that came with or through the medium of him." When the missionaries pursued the issue of teaching, however, Mothibi worriedly told Kok that "he would not be instructed, and if A. Kok should endeavour to press it sharply upon him, and his refusal cause a variance between them, he said that he would rather take the flight from Lattakoo, with people." Kok had to reassure Mothibi that the Griqua leader would not force the Tswana chief to relocate if the Thlaping 29 This discussion both here and below draws on Robert Ross, Adam Kok's Griquas: A Study in the Development of Stratification in South Africa (Cambridge, 1976); Elizabeth Elbourne and Robert Ross, "Combating Spiritual and Social Bondage: Early Missions in the Cape Colony," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa; Alan Barnard, Hunters and Herders of Southern Africa: A Comparative Ethnography of the Khoisan Peoples (Cambridge, 1992), 156-75, 193-94; Martin Legassick, "The Northern Frontier to c. 1840: The Rise and Decline of the Griqua People," in Richard Elphick and Hermann Giliomee, eds., The Shaping of South African Society, 1652-1840 (Middletown, Conn., 1988), 358-420; Nigel Penn, "The Orange River Frontier Zone, c. 1700-1805," in Andrew B. Smith, ed., Einiqualand: Studies of the Orange River Frontier (Cape Town, 1995); Karel Schoeman, ed., Griqua Records: The Philippolis Captaincy, 1825-1861 (Cape Town, 1996). Mary and Robert Moffat's letters and journals make the station's vulnerability and its reliance on Griqua protection abundantly clear. See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 446 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh refused missionaries.30 Once the Kuruman mission had been established, it depended for its survival on Griqua military protection for many years. If missionaries were initially dependent on Griqua intermediaries, they were also materially dependent for travel and translation on Khoesan hired in the colony. The Khoekhoe and San had long borne the brunt of brutal colonial subjugation and were in many cases more receptive to conversion than groups beyond the Cape Colony. The Comaroffs indeed have a wonderful discussion of the occlusion of such intermediary figures from missionary accounts of putatively solitary heroic jour- neys.31 I would go further than the Comaroffs, however, and suggest that at least some of these companions saw themselves as fellow missionaries. On the first delegation, Campbell was accompanied by a number of Khoesan Christians from the Cape. Their prayers and preaching had made a pilgrimage route of their journey through a country of which they saw themselves as taking spiritual possession. They were active in trying to persuade Tswana individuals to accept missionaries.32 In 1814, a synod of the southern African LMS missionaries had "set aside" in a religious ceremony several men of Khoesan descent to act as LMS agents in the interior, several of whom, including Griqua leader Andries Waterboer, subse- quently played important roles in the politics of Transorangia. Cupido Kakkerlak, a product of Eastern Cape mission schools whose letters reveal a passionate spirituality, also itinerated in the region, attempting, albeit with little success, to evangelize among the !Kora. These men were employed by the LMS. As the Comaroffs point out, the society would devote much energy to reining in and controlling "native agents" after the earliest years of the mission. Nonetheless, evidence from the Cape suggests that there was also considerable evangelical activity by converts who were not formally paid by missionary societies, including elephant hunters such as Hendrik Boesak or long-range wagon drivers. In addition, as mission stations became more like churches and congregations fought for independence from missionary control around the mid-century mark, congregations had more authority, not less. My point is that evidence from elsewhere in southern Africa suggests that Christianity was spread by people with long-range contacts other than missionaries, presumably not necessarily in orthodox form. The central- ity of Khoesan people (and later other Africans) to European-led missions to the Tswana suggests a wider oral evangelical culture that the written records would not completely reflect.33 Be that as it may, the importance of Khoesan agents to the Tswana mission is most clearly exemplified by the fourth delegation to Lattakoo, led by a former 30 Robert Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, April 28, 1816, London Missionary Society Papers, South Africa Correspondence-Incoming, 6/3/C, Council for World Mission Archives, School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London (hereafter, LMS-SA). See also LMS-SA, 6/3/C: J. Evans, R. Hamilton, and W. Corner to LMS Directors, Griquatown, May 27, 1816; LMS-SA, 6/3/C: R. Hamilton to LMS Directors, Griquatown, November 13, 1816. 31 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 78. 32 John Campbell, Travels in South Africa (London, 1815). The full extent of Khoesan missionary activity emerges most clearly from Campbell's unpublished journals, held at the National Library of South Africa, Cape Town. 33 LMS-SA, 5/2/F: "Minutes of the First Conference held by the African Missionaries at Graaff Reinet in August 1814"; V. C. Malherbe, "The Life and Times of Cupido Kakkerlak," Journal ofAfrican History 20 (1979): 365-79; Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 81, on Robert Moffat's campaign against Kakkerlak. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 447 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne carpenter from Essex, James Read, after Mothibi had finally capitulated. Read brought with him an unusually large group of people of varied ethnic origins, mostly Khoesan, including, more problematically, his own Khoekhoe wife, Elizabeth Valentyn, and his pregnant former mistress, a San woman, Sabina Pretorius, whom he claimed to have met by accident on the road. At least ten Khoesan men and six Khoesan women accompanied Read, all of whom were church members and some of whom were "zealous persons."34 It is indeed possible that the Khoesan of the Cape Colony saw this as a Khoesan mission to the Tswana, brokered by their kin among the Griqua. In any case, once Robert Moffat took over the Lattakoo station in 1821 from Read (disgraced for his adultery), he would fight successfully to diminish the influence of the Khoesan group from the Cape Colony, whom he then firmly wrote out of the history of the station. He dismissed several for immorality, despite the resistance, in which women played prominent roles, of members of the group. Moffat also found himself opposed by Griqua factions, many of whom resented his power-mongering presence.35 Before the late 1810s, the earliest LMS agents in southern Africa were not particularly good or even very enthusiastic apostles of capitalist cultural practices, mostly because they were so poor themselves and so looked-down-upon by many respectable members of colonial society. More than a few also tended to believe in dreams, to hear the personal voice of God, or to look for the imminent end of the world. Those missionaries who were closest in time to the Enlightenment, in sum, acted least like the bourgeois agents of respectability described by the Comaroffs as quintessential exemplars of the rationalizing project of modernity. The colonial unrespectability of early missionaries was compounded by the fact that perhaps a third of them married African women before 1817, while several were involved in sexual scandals. Others took high-profile political positions that were unpopular among settlers. The Comaroffs pick up the story as Moffat, in common with many of his fellows, was urgently trying to reclaim the moral high ground and to reinvent the mission as visibly respectable and as focused on "civilization." A lot of this is more about the internal history of the LMS than about African Christianity; we certainly in general need more of the latter and perhaps less of the former. Nonetheless, it argues for the importance of local detail, and for the centrality of fractures within as well as between groups. It also points forward to ways in which converts would later need to perform "civilization" and "respectability" in order to maneuver on the colonial stage, not solely because their consciousnesses had been colonized. From the start, tensions among evangelicals themselves were fueled by anxiety over the rapid removal of Christianity from the control of white missionaries. This tension was arguably innate to a type of evangelical Christianity based on textual interpretation and the notion of divine inspiration, as well as being the product of Tswana reconstruction of Christian forms. Certainly, missionaries soon lost control even of "orthodox" Christianity. Among the northern Tswana, Paul Landau has brilliantly documented the use of Christianity by junior royals to challenge existing authority in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, in ways that escaped 34 LMS-SA, 6/4/A: James Read to Joseph Hardcastle, Bethelsdorp, August 7, 1816. 35 See Schapera, ed., Apprenticeship at Kuruman. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 448 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh a series of rather peripheral white missionaries. Among the southern Tswana, Thlaping elites also exploited divisions among missionaries to their own political ends. In 1842, for example, Tswana elite men successfully appealed to LMS superintendent John Philip to fire missionary Holloway Helmore for excessive interference in congregational affairs, including deposing Mothibi's son as a deacon.36 Missionaries to the Tswana experienced other humiliations. The coherent Tswana group targeted by the mission decamped, to be replaced by a more motley group of refugees. The mission was battered by raids from various groups, could not protect its members, and was not successful at all until it started picking up displaced persons in the 1830s. A NUMBER OF QUESTIONS arise from this type of re-reading. At a macro level, the region was already turbulent and populations were mobile, so Christianity scarcely arrived as the harbinger of globalization in anything other than an ideological sense. This raises in turn the thorny and ultimately unanswerable question of whether Christianity would have had the capacity to colonize minds without the prior disruption of material conditions. We are back at the difficult issue of how determinative "culture" is by itself. Perhaps in the end, this rejigging of chronology strengthens the Comaroffs' fundamental argument about the inextricability of "culture" and material struggle. It does nonetheless pose all the more sharply the question of how Christianity-and religious innovation, more broadly defined- functioned in a frontier zone in a manner that was independent of the machinations of white missionaries.37 Also at the "macro" level, the Tswana were not entirely "local," nor were they unused to cultural difference. In a multi-lingual, multi-religious environment, were missionaries really needed to contextualize "Tswana custom"? Missionary papers record Mothibi making distinctions between !Kora, Tswana, and colonial Khoekhoe customs, for example. I would not want to deny the importance of local identity, or to exaggerate the degree of long-range contacts of the southern Tswana, in contrast to the remarkable global reach and global identity claims of the early missionary movement. There are issues of tremendous importance raised by that contrast. But it also seems important that there were other regional interlocutors who were of greater material importance initially to the Tswana than the Europeans, and with whom they already had the kind of cultural interchanges that might have permitted the type of self-consciousness about "Tswana" identity that the Comaroffs see as the fruit of the "long conversation." This is also a way of asking about what the southern African interior looked like before formal European colonialism and whether the communities of the region were really as settled as they appeared. There are echoes here of an older debate about whether the encounter with the "macrocosmic" claims of the "world religions" Christianity and Islam shattered the 36 Landau, Realm of the Word; Elbourne, Blood Ground. On Helmore's dismissal, see LMS-SA, 19/2/A: James Read to LMS Directors, Philipton, June 3, 1843. The LMS Directors overturned the dismissal and censured Philip. 37 An interesting point of contrast is provided by Janet Hodgson, "A Battle for Sacred Power: Christian Beginnings among the Xhosa," in Elphick and Davenport, Christianity in South Africa. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 449 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne "microcosm" of African localist religions, at a time when colonialism was shattering the microcosm of daily life. As Terence Ranger has argued, whatever the intellectual issues at stake, African societies, at least in the southern African interior, have to be recognized as also "macrocosmic" in the sense that they had long-range contacts, exchanged ideas over large swathes of territory (as the rapid spread of prophetic movements suggests), and rubbed up against a wide variety of different groups.38 The relative mobility of different communities was also a factor in breaking down localism. This type of approach, to my mind, decenters the European missionary-at least until the missionary came backed up by a colonial economy and a colonial army. The power exerted by the conditions of the "frontier zone" of the region is represented by the fact that even missionaries were compelled by material circumstances to take on features of African polities. The Comaroffs highlight the vision of Kuruman mission head and former gardener Robert Moffat, and his wife Mary, like that of many early nineteenth-century Nonconformist missionaries, as one of an unrealistic rural idyll, in which they sought to remake Africa in the image of a vanishing and imagined rural utopian Britain. One could, however, go further in considering the contradictions of Kuruman. Robert Moffat acted in many ways like an African leader as well as like a nostalgic Scot, and he needed to do so because of the material conditions of the frontier. In the 1820s, he proved unable to retain the allegiance of existing chiefs, for whom he was too clearly a competitor. As the refugee crisis accelerated, however, Moffat was able to gather together dispossessed people. The price of their admission was allegiance to the religion of the leader, since religion was used to rebuild communities. The currency of power was people. In similar ways, the control of women and their reproduction was important to the maintenance of the power of the patriarch, whether African chief or mission station head-Moffat even went so far, for example, as to attempt to discipline publicly Ann Hamilton, the wife of his colleague Robert Hamilton, for refusing to sleep with her husband.39 Moffat was more a part of the African frontier world than he might have liked to admit. A further critical point raised by this case study is that Africans transmitted Christianity more effectively than missionaries did. The centrality of Africans to the spread of Christianity means that much of the early history of the mission is unrecoverable. It is often unclear what kinds of Christianity were spread orally, for example. In other parts of southern Africa, prophetic figures emerged from time to time to use aspects of the Christian message in a context that suggests how quickly its language became unhinged from missionary guardianship. For example, Xhosa prophet and war hero Makanda Nxele (Makana), who led a Xhosa attack on the colony in 1819, had an earlier flirtation with the LMS; he was refused the right to work as a native agent when he insisted that there was a god for the white man and a god for the black man, and that he himself was related to Jesus Christ. The examples could be multiplied, as the Comaroffs would certainly agree. The lines 38 Terence Ranger, "The Local and the Global in Southern African Religious History," in Hefner, Conversion to Christianity, 65-98. 39 Karel Schoeman, A Thorn Bush That Grows in the Path: The Missionary Career of Ann Hamilton, 1815-1823 (Cape Town, 1995); LMS-SA, 8/3/B: Robert Moffat to LMS, Lattakoo, July 12, 1821. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 450 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh between orthodoxy as the missionaries perceived it and African prophetic innova- tion were fluid and could be crossed in both directions, explaining the anxiety of white missionaries to bring Christianity back under control. In contrast to the Comaroffs, who emphasize the orthodoxy of the Nonconformists (whom they see in rather stereotypical, indeed Victorianist, terms), I would contend that this anxiety was familiar from debates within the European churches as well; after all, Methodism had once been perceived from within the citadels of Anglican orthodoxy in ways similar to Nonconformist views of African ecstatic innovation.40 If in the early days of missionary activity, Christianity was never fully in the control of the white missionaries who had brought it and only became popular once it was spread mostly by Africans and then transformed in the process, what does this imply about how we might conceptualize the study of colonial missions? I have suggested in the past that the messy scenario I outline above, with its complications and its fudging across the fault lines, calls into question the utility at the micro level of a strict dialectical approach to the history of colonial Christianity. The ghost of French structuralist understandings of G. W. Hegel's master-slave dialectic seems to me to hover over and to constrain the first volume. In response, however, the Comaroffs argue in Volume 2 that I have too conventional an understanding of their view of dialectical processes. A dialectic is not a "formal, abstract, or strictly teleological movement through time and space," in a Hegelian sense. Rather, it is a "process of reciprocal determination; a process of material, social and cultural articulation-involving sentient human beings rather than abstract forces or structures."41 Colonialism is dialectical because it creates binary understandings of difference and depends on the idea of opposites; it is also presumably dialectical because colonial interaction shapes both the colonized and the colonizer in new ways. Returning to the issue at the end of Volume 2, the Comaroffs reiterate (although this seems to me a somewhat different take) that by "dialectics" they mean "the mutually transforming play of social forces whose outcome is neither linear nor simply overdetermined." Defined thus, they add, "it is hard to imagine how colonial history could be regarded as anything else."42 In a weak sense, this is undeniable. Furthermore, on this model, it may not matter that the early encounter between missionaries and Tswana was so much messier than a "dialectical" account would suggest. The Comaroffs' point is precisely that out of difference and mess colonialism created binary opposites. At the same time, the exact nature of this process is often hard to capture. It is interesting to hear John Comaroff raise, in a recently published transcribed conversation with Homi Bhabha, what he terms the question of theory related to "the old Manichean opposition between colonizer and colonized, those 'iteratively marked,' positionally conflated points of reference around which the human geography of empire is so widely imagined. How, other than purely by descriptive insistence, does one displace the crushing logic of binarism in terms of which 40 Among many possibilities, see Deborah Valenze, Prophetic Sons and Daughters: Female Preaching and Popular Religion in Industrial England (Princeton, N.J., 1985). 41 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 29. 42 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 410. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 451 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne colonial worlds are apprehended and narrated?"43 I think this is a genuine point of tension for the Comaroffs, and quite rightly for many others. Perhaps my own discomfort arises from the difficulty of defining who the agents of dialectic are. In the end, the Comaroffs are interested in doing a historical anthropology of colonialism, more than of religion in colonial contexts. In this optic, the fault line of interest is that between colonized and colonizer. Religious belief did not, however, adhere to that fault line, even though both colonized and colonizers mobilized religion to the ends of power struggle. Nor of course was Christianity itself static. At the same time, the very notion of ethnic difference was still in the process of being worked out more broadly well past the early era of industrialization; therefore it was incorporated differently into the views of colonial evangelists at different times. From the point of view of the Comaroffs' overall narrative structure, this leads us away from the Enlightenment and onto the terrain of more immediately nineteenth-century colonial concerns. On this model, colonial conquest and the need to maintain and justify white rule shaped the mid- nineteenth-century culture of white Christianity. The end was not contained in the beginning but formed by colonial processes. Be that as it may, it is instructive that the Khoesan themselves were not able indefinitely to maintain the interstitial status to which Christianity gave them some access. By the early 1850s, many living in the Cape Colony were forced to choose between the colonial binaries of "black" and "white," in the 1850-1853 frontier war in which many people of Khoesan descent rebelled to fight against the "white" colony, as "race" became the determinant of colonial identity.44 The example also underscores the importance of "black" and "white" as colonial binaries arguably of more importance than "English" and "Tswana." All this should not, however, lead us to read the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries in terms of the mid-nineteenth. There is a basic problem here that dogs the Comaroffs throughout the books. Christianity is both text and practice, and therefore difficult to pin down. Not only that, it also permits and contains a wide variety both of practices and of different interpretations of its central themes. As text, Christianity became a free-floating signifier. As a practice, it was fought over bitterly by those who wanted to benefit from it. It is therefore difficult to identify Christianity clearly with one side of a dialectical or even dialogic model. This is all the more problematic because it is hard to define Christianity clearly, other than by appeals to authority. There was considerable scope for Africans to reinvent Christianity even from the beginning of the mission described by the Comaroffs. In some ways, this is precisely the Comaroffs' point: the signs of Christianity were fought over by competing ethnic groups. The Comaroffs nonetheless cannot bring themselves to see acceptance of Christianity in its unadulterated mission form as anything other than a defeat for 43 Bhabha and Comaroff, "Speaking of Postcoloniality," 22. 44 Elbourne, Blood Ground, 345-76; Robert Ross, "The Kat River Rebellion and Khoikhoi Nationalism: The Fate of an Ethnic Identification," Kronos: Journal of Cape History/Tydskrif vir Kaaplandse Geskiedenis 24 (November 1997): 91-105. On the emergence of racial stratification more generally, see Clifton C. Crais, White Supremacy and Black Resistance in Pre-industrial South Africa: The Making of the Colonial Order in the Eastern Cape, 1770-1865 (Cambridge, 1992); Timothy Keegan, Colonial South Africa and the Origins of the Racial Order (Charlottesville, Va., 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 452 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh African converts, who were thereby surrendering positions in the struggles over the colonization of consciousness. This position ultimately obscures complexity. EVENTUALLY, ONE MUST CONFRONT the type of question raised by Leon de Kock, about disciplinary conventions and the fetishization of the archive.45 De Kock argues that historians have spent too much time in their reaction to this wonderful book looking for factual flaws. To put the question in its boldest form, are the details really that essential to the overall project? Perhaps less tendentiously, what are the Comaroffs doing that goes beyond the reading of the words of colonists? The Comaroffs are important precisely because they move beyond words to decipher the gestures of people in the past. They put an anthropologist's emphasis on ritual and performance. They add thereby a crucial dimension to our reading of culture-bound historical archives. The Comaroffs' understanding of performance goes well beyond the staged performances of religious rites (although they acknowledge at the same time that people used the framework of religious ritual as a springboard for their own acting out of emotions and ideas). The missionaries are described as performing civilization, in the hope of educating the Tswana to adopt Western cultural practices through the power of display. In response, the Tswana performed noncompliance or acted out cultural bricolage. The tangible display of the body interests the Comaroffs, just as the material suffering of the colonized body that we readers know is to come provides a moral template for our reading of the early nineteenth century. The authors are particularly interested in space and the disposition of the body in space: their analyses frequently return, like the apartheid state itself, to issues of the control of the movement of African bodies.46 The Comaroffs are in some ways mistrustful of the self-interested and one-sided colonial text and find more solidity in the unspoken exchanges of bodily perfor- mance. It is this approach that both furnishes the greatest richness of the books and yet at the same time has excited unease in some interlocutors. If the evidence that remains of Tswana actions is mostly accounts of their physical activity, does that not place the reporter (the anthropologist, the historian, or even the reader) in the privileged position of interpreting Tswana actions, leaving the Tswana themselves rarely free to speak directly in their own voice? Is this even an accurate assessment of the nature of the historical record, or are there more extensive Tswana records? J. D. Y. Peel and Terence Ranger have both queried the absence of Tswana 45 De Kock, "For and Against the Comaroffs." 46 For example, Volume 2 tellingly argues that integral to the late nineteenth-century struggle over African labor was a further struggle over the "distribution of people in space and, concomitantly, their passage across the social landscape." This is a typical discussion of space that appropriately reflects the struggle of the apartheid state to control the physical body, just as slavery had earlier lent mastery of the body to the slaveowner. Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 203. Rikk van Dijk and Peter Pels, "Contested Authorities and the Politics of Perception: Deconstructing the Study of Religion in Africa," in Richard Werbner and Terence Ranger, eds., Postcolonial Identities in Africa (London, 1996), 245-70; Celestin Monga, The Anthropology of Anger: Civil Society and Democracy in Africa, Linda Fleck and Celestin Monga, trans. (Boulder, Colo., 1996), 112-15, on the "subversive and silent" nature of many African forms of dissent. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 453 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elbourne narrative in Of Revelation and Revolution's first volume, for example.47 It seems unlikely that Christian converts did not leave a more extensive written record even in the early years of the mission or that community historical memory was not richer. The Comaroffs have responded that community historical narrative was not a genre espoused by the Tswana. They argue, furthermore, that the quest for "narrative" is elitist: it is "a short step from the stress on narrative to the history of elites, thence to elitist history."48 The issue remains uneasily unresolved. For Paul Landau, the Comaroffs themselves have a culturally constrained view of what constitutes "genuine narrative." They pay "little attention to genealogy, song, Tswana conversation, letters, political speech, tales, myth or church charters- because they are not 'genuine' narratives. Consequently Tswana people's ideas of fulfillment and transcendence do not show themselves in either volume."49 Even the Tswana intellectual and politician Sol Plaatje's great novel Mhudi, which draws on Tswana traditions about the difaqane, has been brought into the fray: for the Comaroffs, the fact that Plaatje himself claims that he could only gather material in fragments suggests that the southern Tswana indeed did not have a tradition of sustained historical narrative as late as the early twentieth century, even though Mhudi is more conventionally seen as a reflection at least to some extent of more sustained Tswana oral tradition.50 There is another critical debate at work in these discussions of agency and voice. The Comaroffs are very clear that missionary activity was part of the victimization of Africans. Much recent scholarship on southern African Christianity emphasizes instead the agency of Africans in using and reshaping Christianity to their own ends, as the focus has shifted away from missionaries and onto African Christians. In some ways, the Comaroffs want to restore a sense of moral indignation at the ways in which colonial missions did change the consciousness of Africans in a damaging fashion. Ironically, this may involve seeing people as victims who did not necessarily see themselves that way at the time-another issue of authorial voice. The Comaroffs' anger represents nonetheless an important strand of longstanding protest across the colonized world at the "colonization of the mind."51 It is impossible to deny that many Christian missionaries had a profoundly negative 47 J. D. Y. Peel, "For Who Hath Despised the Day of Small Things? Missionary Narratives and Historical Anthropology," Comparative Studies in Society and History 37, no. 3 (1995): 581-607; Terence Ranger, "No Missionary: No Exchange: No Story? Narrative in Southern Africa," unpublished paper read at All Souls College, Oxford, June 1992. 48 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 51. 49 Paul Landau, "Hegemony and History in Jean and John L. Comaroff's Of Revelation and Revolution," Africa 70, no. 3 (2000): 516. 50 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 46-47. 51 Steve Biko, I Write What I Like (1978), provides an eloquent locus classicus, as does Ezekiel Mphahlele, The African Image (London, 1962). Dickson A. Mungazi, The Mind of Black Africa (Westport, Conn., 1996), expresses typical anger, pp. 1-32. Greg Cuthbertson discusses Christian missions as a form of cultural violence in Charles Villa-Vicencio, ed., Theology and Violence: The South African Debate (Johannesburg, 1987). Sanneh, Translating the Message, emphasizes in contrast indigenous agency in the "translation" of Christianity from one culture to another. At a different end of the spectrum of debate might be those who see efforts to change the religious systems of indigenous peoples as a form (or as an element) of cultural genocide. A. Dirk Moses gives an eloquent overview of debates about genocide and cultural genocide: "Conceptual Blockages and Definitional Dilemmas in the 'Racial Century': Genocides of Indigenous Peoples and the Holocaust," Patterns of Prejudice 36, no. 4 (2002). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 454 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh impact in many areas of the world, not least when they gained (or were given) control of educational systems and thus had control over the formation of children.52 The fact that missionaries in various ways had such power was, however, almost invariably related to the expansion of the colonial state, not to the corrosive power of the message alone. Furthermore, as Peggy Brock has persuasively argued, missionary institutional structures affected the degree of control missionaries could exert over congregations, and these structures were affected by indigenous social arrangements as well as by state power.53 I would further contend, in ways there is not space to elaborate on fully here, that shame was a key element of colonial control. Mission education could and did reinforce this. At the same time, Christianity could also provide a language through which to reclaim dignity and deny the shaming process. I think it is important in sum to see Christianity as a language with many possible uses. Conversion, for example, fulfilled a wider and more flexible range of functions than is suggested by the Comaroffs' reduction of it to a symbolic field of struggle over capitalism. A reading that focuses too exclusively on Christianity as a language of cultural domination rather than a language with a multiplicity of possible meanings pays too much attention to the Western roots of Christianity and not enough to the multiple uses to which Africans very quickly put it. I make this comment in awareness of the extent to which the Comaroffs emphasize the need to explore African perspectives through every possible means, and the extent to which they clearly do this. However, conversion was even more of an empty signifier than the Comaroffs suggest, and some of these significations did not have a lot to do with rational capitalism. On the other hand, conversion was also an act, with attached rituals and beliefs, and this is important for understanding what the act meant in the immediate rather than long-term sense. Even if I am not completely at ease with a victimization model, I would want to add that these were and are enormously complicated processes. They had deep and often painful implications for many. This demands humility from any historian. Undergirding much of the above has been a historian's concern with chronology, which, while justified, cannot do full justice to the rich ferment of ideas in these remarkable books. The Comaroffs in fact comment on what they see as different disciplinary conventions and their inherent costs and benefits. They see real and longstanding differences, as they remark at the end of Volume 2, between the ideal type of a more conventional historian and the archetypal historical anthropologist: "differences between the ideographic and the nomothetic, between the effort to arrive at the fullest possible description of events in their infinite particularity and the desire to pick out general principles across time and space." The latter approach, they underscore, "demands a certain boldness of abstraction" and is "inherently risky."54 Although one would hope that historians are not as painstak- ingly antiquarian and abstraction-averse as this implies, there is some justice to the 52 A wonderfully instructive example of the ambiguities of Christian liberal control of the education system in South Africa, just before apartheid, is furnished by Shula Marks, ed., Not Either an Experimental Doll: The Separate Worlds of Three South African Women (London, 1985). 53 Peggy Brock, "Mission Encounters in the Colonial World: British Columbia and South-West Australia," Journal of Religious History 24, no. 2 (June 2000): 159-79. 54 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 411. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 455 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Elizabeth Elboume comment, at least as it pertains to the Comaroffs' own work. The very manner in which they offer up a multitude of bold ideas, fizzing with possibility, also ensures that they offer a number of hostages to fortune. The Comaroffs are, for example, probably the most influential of recent scholars to argue for tight linkage between missionary activity, "modernity," "Enlighten- ment," and globalization. As Brian Stanley points out, this is also a question that has been much debated in the past few years by Christian theologians and mission theorists, with theologians paying particular attention to the damage done by the universalist truth claims of mission Christianity.55 More broadly, the Comaroffs are participating in a vast debate about modernity and postmodernity among social, political, and cultural theorists that it would be foolhardy to venture upon here. Their contribution is both important and vexed: important because they show the culturally constrained nature of claims to "modernity," vexed because despite everything they reify the truth claims of modernity and have too neat a view of the "Enlightenment," despite substantial historical debate on the utility of the concept. In so doing, they exaggerate the long-term influence of mission Christianity on the material subjugation of the Tswana, particularly by minimizing the impact of illiberal forces and overemphasizing cultural change. This could be true, however, and the significance of the Comaroffs' analysis of practice still be undimmed. The Comaroffs see "modernity" as "always historically constructed." It is in their view "an ideological formation in terms of which societies valorize their own practices by contrast to the specter of barbarism and other marks of negation."56 The Comaroffs link modernity to a view of the self as a rights-bearing atomistic individual, ultimately the "fully fledged bourgeois subject." They further associate modernity with a wide-ranging series of cultural and economic practices, including but not limited to dependence on a worldwide market, industrialization, the use of money, the use of "advanced" agricultural practices, the promotion of individuated space, and a sense of the body as private.57 It is part of the great richness of the Comaroffs' approach that they so fruitfully link cultural and economic practices, refusing to prioritize one over the other. At the same time, this view of modernity is slippery-and this is both its richness and an occasional source of frustration. The Comaroffs move between presenting the truth claims of modernity-its "text," if one likes-and the concrete material practices that advocates saw as characterizing the modern. The authors' desire not to take the truth claims of missionaries at face value make it difficult for them to spell out what, if any, were the irreducible material practices that defined modernity. If there weren't any, however, what was the material force behind the cultural claims and practices of missionaries? Yet it is arguable that at least some of what the Comaroffs identify as the 55 Brian Stanley, "Christian Missions and the Enlightenment: A Reevaluation," in Stanley, ed., Christian Missions and the Enlightenment (Grand Rapids, Mich., 2001), 1-2. Stanley points to David Bosch's Transforming Mission: Paradigm Shifts in Theology of Mission (Maryknoll, N.Y., 1991) as a seminal text for Christian theologians of mission in a postmodern context. 56 Comaroff and Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2: 32. 57 A particularly influential figure for the Comaroffs' reading of the creation of the modern self in Volume 2 is Charles Taylor, whose Sources of the Self is a seminal text for their work. Taylor is of course a Christian Hegelian, whose view of the emergence of the modern self is certainly influenced by Hegelian dialectics, in however inexplicit a fashion. Sources of the Self: The Making of the Modem Identity (Cambridge, 1989). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 456 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh intellectual aspects of modernity are primarily identifiable with the truth claims of liberalism, and that the Comaroffs link these in turn to neoliberalism. There are echoes here of the great debates between radical and liberal historians in 1970s and 1980s South Africa, split over the origins of apartheid.58 For the "radical" school, liberalism, in both its ideological and economic sense, contributed to the economic domination that was at the root of apartheid. Radical historians argued that late nineteenth-century British capitalism precipitated and anticipated many features of South African society under apartheid, just as the Comaroffs here blame nine- teenth-century British liberal ideas about such things as money, markets, the individuated self, and the primacy of certain gender roles for the mental prepara- tion of the Tswana for labor oppression. Indeed, in their 2000 article "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," the Comaroffs explicitly link what they term the "Age of Revolution" (1789-1848) to the current "Age of Millennial Capitalism" with their similar anxieties and ontological challenges.59 This article makes explicit the magical, mystical elements of neoliberalism, and its culturally constrained forms, in contrast to neoliberals' claims to rationality and access to universal truth, just as Of Revelation and Revolution describes culturally constructed views of "modernity" and a "modern" economy. This is very helpful. Nonetheless, I think it would also be useful in Of Revelation and Revolution to be more explicit about actual intellectual debates among and between people: to have more ideology in places and less hegemony. The argument made by many, that early twentieth-century white liberals in practice came to support racist segregationist policies, while in ideological terms liberalism's support of the free market economy and nonviolent political action left it with little space to mobilize opposition to apartheid, all adds up to a trenchant and at least partially justified critique. By leaving out of the picture the intellectual shifts in liberalism (and among the opponents of liberalism) on the ground in the nineteenth century (and implicitly in the twentieth), however, the Comaroffs, like other authors, conflate several ills into one. Disciplinary specialists might want to throw further darts at the Comaroffs' narrative superstructure. Must industrialization and by implication modernity really begin in 1789? This is very French. What might be the impact of the questioning by economists of the linearity and suddenness of industrialization in Britain, which now looks more like an extended messy process than a "revolution" within neat chronological parameters? What difference does it make that the evangelical movement had many roots in seventeenth and eighteenth-century continental pietism? If Protestantism is the necessary condition of capitalism, where does this leave Catholic countries (not least France)? The point I want to close on is, however, that of tragedy. If there is, as I have suggested, an implicit narrative of origins that runs throughout Of Revelation and Revolution and lends the work its moral passion, this is not, for all that, a straightforward linear narrative of beginnings and ends. Rather, it is marked by 58 Christopher Saunders, The Making of the South African Past: Major Historians on Race and Class (Cape Town, 1988), describes the liberal/radical split. 59 Jean Comaroff and John L. Comaroff, "Millennial Capitalism: First Thoughts on a Second Coming," Public Culture 12, no. 2 (2000): 334. This issue has been reprinted as Comaroff and Comaroff, eds., Millennial Capitalism and the Culture of Neoliberalism (Durham, N.C., 2001). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 457 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] 458 Elizabeth Elbourne tragic irony and unexpected plot twists. The Nonconformist missionaries who labored so intensely to change the daily lives of Africans in order to induct them into the "modern" economy did not foresee the devastating consequences of that economy for the Tswana peasantry (as might be said of some of the missionaries' modern counterparts, development workers). At the same time, the Comaroffs write as though missionaries inducted the Tswana into the global market and colonized their consciousness in a way that made their engagement more likely. It seems to me just as possible that the global market and related economic coercion came crashing into the lives and consciousness of the Tswana in a way about which they could do little, particularly as their contact was frequently mediated by coercive legislation on the part of the colonial state.60 Missionaries reflected the efforts of other Westerners to moralize the market: to see it as a force for moral good. In this, they shared the ambiguities (and guilty conscience?) of nineteenth-century liberalism. It does not take a great leap of the imagination to find contemporary parallels in the neoliberal discourse, and of course the Comaroffs are right that this putatively universalist creed contains deeply embedded culturally specific assumptions, as did nineteenth-century Anglo- American liberalism itself.61 If nonetheless market expansion is relatively inevita- ble, then is it not appropriate to ask on what terms this expansion might be the most moral? Or is the most appropriate response full-fledged resistance? Must the global marketplace necessarily be bad, on average, for Africa? From a somewhat different point on the ideological spectrum, one might also ask whether in fact Africa is incorporated into the global market on the equal terms supposedly demanded by neoliberal economics. These are clearly issues beyond the scope of this article, but not without historical parallels. In late nineteenth and early twentieth-century terms, the Tswana, it could be argued, were crowded out of an agricultural market in which many were making profits and farming more effectively than whites, in fact, in order to favor white farmers artificially and in order to bolster labor for the mines, again through "artificial" restraints on movement, through the theft of land, through racially targeted taxation, and through coercive legislation. This antici- pated many of the later strategies of apartheid.62 It is not as clear to me as it is to the Comaroffs that the questions some missionaries and Africans were asking about the possibility of a just economy were not the right ones, even if the culturally constrained answers they gave were so obviously, hopelessly wrong. I do not have answers to these questions either-merely some sympathy with the misguided quest for certainty in a rapidly changing, brutal, and deeply uncertain economic universe. 60 This is a point also made by Landau, "Hegemony and History." 61 Uday Mehta, Liberalism and Empire: A Study in Nineteenth-Century British Liberal Thought (Chicago, 1999); Mehta, "Liberal Strategies of Exclusion," in Stoler and Cooper, Tensions of Empire, 59-86. 62 Ted Matsetela, "The Life Story of Mma-Pooe: Aspects of Sharecropping and Proletarianization in the Northern Orange Free State 1890-1930," in Shula Marks and Richard Rathbone, eds., Industrialization and Social Change in South Africa (New York, 1982), 212-37; Charles Van Onselen, The Seed Is Mine: The Life of Kas Maine, a South African Sharecropper, 1894-1985 (Cape Town, 1996). AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]] [[START 03X0760F]] Word Made Flesh I HAVE SUGGESTED THROUGHOUT THIS ESSAY that the Comaroffs present nineteenth- century missionaries as fairly powerful figures, able to effect changes in the consciousness of Tswana interlocutors, despite the resistance of many. In contrast, I see Christianity as important but, with some important exceptions, not necessarily white missionaries themselves. I also suggest that the linkages between political and cultural colonialism are often unclear in Of Revelation and Revolution, and that the role of "cultural colonialism" is overdetermined. If it is possible to guess about such counterfactuals, I suspect that at least some of the missionaries whose work has been scrutinized by the Comaroffs would ironically have preferred the Comaroffs' account of their activities to mine, however doubtless upset they would have been at the implication that their preaching laid the groundwork for the Tswana's entrapment within enslaving capitalist systems. But the Comaroffs do give the missionaries credit for a coherent, rationalizing, globalizing system that taught one universal truth. They also recognize the missionaries' own belief that they might instill into their converts the necessary principles of "civilization" to transform totally their supposedly primitive economies and to move them rapidly up the scale of human development toward settled commercial societies. My own interpretation, while recognizing the tremendous importance of the universalizing project as a mode of domination, calls into question the capacity of Christianity to convey as effectively as it would have liked a message of unifying orthodoxy, or indeed the overall ability of missionaries to accomplish their objectives. From the very beginning of the activity of Christians in Africa, as elsewhere in the world, Christianity was out of control, unorthodox, and an available subject for reinter- pretation in light of the needs of its interlocutors. Ironically, in sum, it is not always wise to take missionaries at their word. Elizabeth Elbourne is an associate professor in the Department of History at McGill University, where she teaches British and South African history. She is also currently a visiting fellow in the History Program of the Research School of Social Sciences, Australian National University. Her publications include Blood Ground: Colonialism, Missions and the Contest for Christianity in the Cape Colony and Britain, 1799-1853 (2002), as well as various articles, most recently "Domesticity and Disposession: British Ideologies of 'Home' and the Primitive at Work in the Early Nineteenth-Century Cape," in Wendy Woodward, Patricia Hayes, and Gary Minkley, eds., Deep Histories: Gender and Colonialism in Southern Africa (2002). She earned her D.Phil. in 1992 from the University of Oxford, under the supervision of Terence Ranger. Her major fields of interest include colonialism, gender, and religion, especially the early nineteenth- century British white settler empire and southern Africa. Her current work in progress explores the creation of networks around the idea of being "aborig- inal" in the early nineteenth-century British empire, and is focusing on links between New South Wales, the Cape Colony, New Zealand, and Canadian colonies as well as on activists in Great Britain. She is also writing on liberalism and Khoekhoe citizenship at the Cape. AMERICAN HISTORICAL REVIEW 459 APRIL 2003 [[END 03X0760F]]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/533242
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522214
Date: 04 2008
Author(s): Reynolds, Thomas E.
Abstract: Theorizing for theory’s sake certainly has its place, and not every book needs to be focused on practical issues. Nonetheless, even the most gymnastic theoretician needs some grounding connection to relevant cases. Reynolds is profoundly uninterested in this level of analysis. While he flies through the theoretical air with great speed in
The Broken Whole, it is unclear whether the book can make any sort of stable or decisive landing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/587599
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 589491
2008
Author(s): Stewart Garrett
Abstract: Ibid., p. 111. Even Riffaterre's approach to the structuring unsaid of textual writing can be seen to represent on its own terms a shift from the ontology of narrative toward its epistemology at the level of form rather than content. By the deliberate provocation of his title, his semiotic narratology is interested not just in the structural essence of fiction as art but in its specific
truth:a story's immanent signifying patterns in their subtextual disclosure.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589488
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Balsamo Gian
Abstract: Nussbaum,
Upheavals of Thought, 590.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/589948
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 592372
Date: 01 2009
Author(s): Miller Richard B.
Abstract: Anscombe, “The Justice of the Present War Examined,” 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592359
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 522216
Date: 10 2008
Author(s): Hall, W. David
Abstract: Hall sees that this argument as it develops across Ricoeur’s writings raises questions about the role of reciprocity in the Ricoeur texts he considers. He acknowledges that Ricoeur’s recognition that not all human relations are face‐to‐face leads him beyond a narrow call for solicitude and friendship at this level to a concern for the level of institutions as well. It is at this level of institutions that the question of justice really arises, and with it new questions regarding responsibility and possible reciprocity, particularly regarding our ability to respond to others who we may never meet face‐to‐face. As Hall says, “love often demands a dimension of self‐sacrifice, most notably in the form of renouncing a strict reciprocity” (150). His case could have been stronger here if he had incorporated Ricoeur’s discussions of the work of John Rawls and the antisacrificial notion of justice he saw there. Beyond this, Hall’s focal idea of a relation between love and justice marked by what he calls a poetic tension should also have included some discussion of what Ricoeur says in
The Course of Recognition(Institute for Human Sciences Vienna Lecture Series, trans. David Pellauer [Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 2005]; originally published asParcours de la reconnaissance[Paris: Éditions Stock, 2004]) about the limits of existing philosophies of recognition, which he saw as not getting any further than a notion of reciprocal recognition in just the sense Hall criticizes. Ricoeur’s own answer was to begin there to lay out the idea of mutual recognition beyond mere reciprocity, a higher form of recognition that stands closer, as Hall anticipates, to something like the reception of a gift that expects nothing in return but which may lead to a second gift given to others. Readers who wish to build on Hall’s argument will want also to look at this last major book from Ricoeur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/592470
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 596101
Date: 04 2009
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: I conclude, then, that the task of theological ethics and, more broadly, the humanities and, if I can be bold, more broadly still the university itself is to examine carefully and critically and from multiple perspectives—including the religions—what it means to be and to live as responsible human beings within the vulnerabilities and complexities of forms of life. When we within our several disciplines respond to this task with all the vitality and resources at our disposal, then, I believe, knowledge will indeed grow from more to more, and life will be increased without the illusions of power or servitude to the tyranny of idols.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/596069
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: 597753
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Zimmerman Virginia
Abstract: Excavating Victoriansbrings out very clearly the discomfort the newly discovered vast expanse of geological time gave the Victorians and examines some of the writings that helped shape responses to it. Though the book may not be of particular relevance to the historian focusing closely on Victorian geology or archaeology, for the historian of science who examines wider cultural or literary phenomena it is an important guide to the stimulus that the writings of geologists and archaeologists gave other mid-Victorian writers. Nevertheless, the specialist or narrowly focused historian of science will probably find it frustrating rather than helpful, since the overviews of Victorian geology and archaeology are brief and there are distracting errors, such as the attribution of theNinth Bridgewater Treatiseto William Buckland rather than to Charles Babbage (p. 18). The chapters on Tennyson and Dickens are both interesting and illuminating, although a reader accustomed to historical argument and with limited knowledge of the techniques of literary criticism may find them faintly bewildering in places. Nonetheless, it is in this part of the analysis that the work provides valuable guidance to the historian of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/597725
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: Éditions du Cerf
Issue: 598752
Date: 3 2006
Author(s): Eades Caroline
Abstract: Readers without solid background knowledge of French film and colonial history may have some difficulty navigating through Eades's tightly packed, allusive prose, especially since no index of any kind is provided. This absence is difficult to understand in a work of serious scholarship aimed at academic readers, as is the press's decision to invest in numerous glossy still‐frame illustrations that add nothing substantive to the analysis. However, the extensive, thematically organized filmographies and bibliographies that conclude the volume should prove very useful to all readers by providing a starting point for further reading and research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/598731
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598771
Date: 8 2009
Author(s): Andrew Dudley
Abstract: See Andrew, “Time Zones and Jetlag: The Flows and Phases of World Cinema,” in
World Cinemas,Transnational Perspectives, ed. Natasa Durovicová and Kathleen Newman (forthcoming).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/599587
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Ricoeur, Paul
Abstract: In providing clarification of previous works,
Reflections on the Justis exceptionally helpful. Of particular interest in this volume is the paradoxical nature of authority—What is authority? How is it legitimated? Is it claimed or granted?—the existence of vulnerability and passivity within autonomy and initiative, and the relationship between moral ideals and historical manifestation, questions that exist more on the margins ofOneself as Another. Those interested in Ricoeur’s religious thought will find little of direct interest here. Those who see a deep connection between his moral philosophy and his philosophy of religion will find some confirmation, but there are other places where the connections are more explicitly manifest.Reflections on the Justis best approached as a companion volume to earlier philosophical works, certainlyThe Justbut perhaps more importantlyOneself as Another. As such, it holds an important place in Ricoeur’s oeuvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600278
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 598689
Date: 07 2009
Author(s): Mrozik, Susanne
Abstract: This second, more normative dimension of Mrozik’s project opens up some challenging questions. If it is the case, as she suggests, that a sympathetic reading of the
Compendium of Trainingcan provide valuable intellectual resources for contemporary ethical reflection, it remains unclear to me how our engagement with this text should proceed, given the significant disparities in cosmological assumptions (e.g., karmic causation and rebirth) and forms of practice that separate Mrozik’s contemporary readers from the text’s original audience. The text, moreover, appears less concerned with advancing particular truth claims than with creating a distinctive kind of religious subjectivity through ascetic and ritualized practice. Can we assess the value of the text’s ethical ideals apart from the forms of discipline and practice with which they were linked in medieval India? IfVirtuous Bodiesleaves such questions open to further exploration and analysis, its nuanced reading of theCompendium of Trainingbrings into sharper focus the centrality of human embodiment in South Asian Buddhist religious discourses and encourages us to reflect deeply on its implications for our own ethical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600285
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 603531
Date: 10 2009
Author(s): Stokes Christopher
Abstract: Coleridge,
Shorter Works, 2:1118–19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/600876
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 644539
Date: 01 2010
Author(s): Franke, William
Abstract: Franke’s book has considerable merit, but I have a theoretical and a practical concern with his appropriation of negative theology. First, negative theology is never entirely negative, and while Franke recognizes that poetic language is both deconstructive and open, he nevertheless insists that our various theologies—literary or religious—finally have no positive content. Perhaps this is the postmodernism in his negative theology because this is not entirely consistent with the theological tradition. A good counterexample is Pseudo‐Dionysius, whose mystical theology seeks finally to overcome the limitations of both positive and negative speaking. Dionysius insists that God is love in a way that is both negative and positive. On this, Franke should consider the work of Jean‐Luc Marion and especially his response to Jacques Derrida on the subject of negative theology, and this omission is a considerable oversight. Second, many people of various faiths will never accept that their understanding of the transcendent has no positive content, and if this is a precondition for dialogue, then it is unlikely to occur. On this, the practical dimension of Franke’s study needs more development, as well as more traditional examples of poetic and theological openness from contemporary religious life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/649992
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 605587
Date: 6 2010
Author(s): Coleman Charly
Abstract: Ibid., 1:11–12, 2:443–49, quote on 1:12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651614
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651998
Date: 07 2010
Author(s): Kitts Margo
Abstract: Johann Huizinga,
Homo Ludens: A Study of the Play‐Element in Culture(Boston: Beacon, 1950); Adolf E. Jensen,Myth and Cult among Primitive Peoples, trans. Marianna Tax Choldin and Wolfgang Weissleder (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963); Pierre Smith, “Aspects of the Organization of Rites,” inBetween Belief and Transgression: Structuralist Essays in Religion, History and Myth, ed. Michael Izard and Pierre Smith and trans. John Leavitt (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979), 103–28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/651708
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 651999
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Walter Gregory
Abstract: For instance, Hans Urs von Balthasar’s provocative account of the Eucharist: Hans Urs von Balthasar,
Theodramatik(Einselden: Johannes, 1980), 3:363–78. Von Balthasar’s use of dramatic conceptuality seems to satisfy these demands by offering the Eucharist as a phenomenon that is surprising and free yet deeply imbedded within the economy of creation as a drama. Also of significance would be Bernd Wannenwetsch,Political Worship: Ethics for Christian Citizens, trans. Margaret Kohl (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/654823
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Michaël Lévinas refers here to Blanchot's political activities relating to the Algerian war. Unlike Lévinas who always considered De Gaulle a war hero, Blanchot saw in him the reappearance of fascist leadership. In September 1960 Blanchot was one of the initial drafters and signers of the “Manifeste de 121,” a document articulating its support of those who were being prosecuted for aiding and abbetting the FLN (Le Front de Libération Nationale).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655206
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 655202
Date: 8 2010
Author(s): Hammerschlag Sarah
Abstract: Thanks to Clark Gilpin for helping me to see this double displacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655207
Journal Title: Isis
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 652685
Date: 9 2010
Author(s): Bono James J.
Abstract: For an approach to the issues raised by this Focus section see James J. Bono, “Perception, Living Matter, Cognitive Systems, Immune Networks: A Whiteheadian Future for Science Studies,”
Configurations, 2005,13:135–181.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/655792
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 653501
Date: 08 2010
Author(s): Schildgen Brenda Deen
Abstract: Guy Guldentops, “The Sagacity of Bees: An Aristotelian Topos in Thirteenth-Century Philosophy,” in Steel, Guldentops, and Beullens,
Aristotle's Animals, 296.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656448
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Pranger Burcht
Abstract: Augustine,
Confessiones13.38.53; Chadwick, 305.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/656607
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 656725
Date: 01 01, 2011
Author(s): Thistleton Anthony C.
Abstract: These criticisms and oversights notwithstanding, there are many redeeming aspects to the book. Insofar as hermeneutics and exegesis are essential for any understanding of religious texts and traditions, Thistleton's work is a good way to be introduced to a complex history, the thorny debates, and the diverse approaches that have come to constitute its history and development. And the copious references that are made throughout and at the end of each chapter will enable readers to probe more deeply into a thinker, subject, or historical period of interest to them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659287
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 659348
Date: 4 2011
Author(s): Landy Joshua
Abstract: It is true, of course, that we have a much harder time postulating an author for
Adaptation—that is, working out what an “ideal” Kaufman would have wanted the overall effect of his film to be—than postulating an author for the average Hollywood movie. Still, it is surely not the case thatAdaptation“undermines the concept of the author as a unifying origin and legitimation,” as Karen Diehl claims (Karen Diehl, “Once upon an Adaptation: Traces of the Authorial on Film,” inBooks in Motion: Adaptation, Intertextuality, Authorship, ed. Mireia Aragay [Amsterdam, 2005], p. 100). It may be harder to know what Kaufman is up to than what James Cameron (say) is up to, but Kaufman is clearly up tosomething, and the film bears if anything a more powerful stamp of an original vision than that average movie we find easier to read. In fact,Adaptationhas only solidified Kaufman's reputation as a filmmaker with an idiosyncratic and internally consistent way of seeing the world. (Although cinema is a collaborative enterprise, it is reasonable to imagine Spike Jonze and company collectively seeking to realize Kaufman's design.) Far from putting inherited notions of authorship into question, then, it has comfortably positioned Kaufman as the “unifying origin” of his various works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/659355
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: 660269
Date: 08 2011
Author(s): Guenther Genevieve
Abstract: For the original argument that early modern drama evacuated spiritual forms of their content, see Stephen Greenblatt, “Shakespeare and the Exorcists,” in
Shakespearean Negotiations: The Circulation of Social Energy in Renaissance England(Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), 94–128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/662147
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662056
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Bowman Sharon
Abstract: In sum, this is one of the most important books on selves or the practical side of personhood in the last decade. It is also well written; the particular arguments are virtually always clear, and it is not too hard to keep track of their role within in the larger argument of the book. Some portions rise to an almost literary style and provide a rich survey of key ideas in twentieth-century French philosophy, while others engage quite originally with scholarship in moral psychology and theories of self-knowledge that will be more familiar to analytic readers. This work also complements the more detailed ethical theory on Larmore’s other books. Despite its relative inattention to volitional aspects of practical identity, and some questionable moves in the critique of authenticity, then, this work is still highly recommended.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663580
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: The Captivity of Innocencesuccessfully concludes an innovative study of primeval myth in J’s Genesis. Its argument about exilic authorship serves as a springboard for a free and erudite exploration of biblical concerns with name, exile, and the paradoxes of divine-human relations. Very few biblical scholars today can compass this range of biblical, literary, and philosophical literature with such finesse. At a time when biblical studies incorporate a wider range of methods than ever, LaCocque, like Roland Barthes (whom he cites), powerfully combines traditional and more contemporary intellectual paradigms. Advanced students and scholars will find inThe Captivity of Innocencea far-reaching and engaging reading of Genesis 11 by a virtuoso of biblical studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663737
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 662286
Date: 01 01, 2012
Author(s): Regan Ethna
Abstract: The text covers a lot of ground, delving into many of the touch points between theology and human rights and endeavoring to demonstrate how those points can be sources of mutual enrichment rather than conflict. At times the comprehensive scope of the text, which draws on the insights of so many, makes it a challenging read and leaves the reader wanting more development and illustration of the fruits of the author’s argument. Overall, the text is an important contribution to the constructive engagement between theology and human rights discourse and is a serious challenge to those in either camp who would peremptorily reject the insights of the other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/663745
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 665386
Date: 10 01, 2012
Author(s): Walton Heather,
Abstract: The cultural and social sciences are welcome to examine and critique theology and Christian practice, and theology can profitably learn from these studies, but the studies themselves are not theology. To be theology, even in an interdisciplinary sense, the work must become constructive and speak to the
religiousthought and practice of specific communities or faith traditions. In any given community, theology can become a displaced language in need of renewal, but theology can also uncover the displaced or implicit religion within the seemingly secular. To do this well, theology must remain in critical tension with the cultural sciences, including literature. The result may well be deconstructive, but such radical critique is necessary for any living tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/668266
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 669643
Date: 05 01, 2013
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: In sum: while it has it flaws, this book is one of the most comprehensive and up-to-date surveys of the field of theories of religion around. It is worth the cover price for that alone, which makes it definitely recommendable. Those who want to learn about the current state of theory, especially if they tend in the realist direction, will find this book very useful. Constructivists acquainted with theory will likely find it less so.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/669654
Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 671448
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Feder Yitzhaq
Abstract: For a different view on the function of conceptual blending, cf. E. G. Slingerland, “Conceptual Blending, Somatic Marking and Normativity: A Case Example from Ancient Chinese,”
Cognitive Linguistics16 (2005): 557–84.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/671434
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 668652
Date: 10 01, 2013
Author(s): Csordas Thomas
Abstract: Pablo Wright observes that while I leave behind Geertz’s concept of a cultural system with respect to morality, I retain the Geertzian concern with symbols and meaning. I would not dispute Wright’s statement that meaning is the master concept on a methodological level prior to the substantive issue of evil but would stress that in addition to idiom, code, practice, and symbol, experience must figure into a comprehensive account. Wright’s evocative references to “moral installation in the world” (one might consider terms like investment, suffusion, and tonality, as well as installation) and morality as a “practiced ontology in the micropolitics of social life” deserve further elaboration. Wright endorses a pluralized notion of moralities, but I reiterate that even more important is an adjectival sense of moral rather than the nominal morality. Like Parkin, Wright poses the question of how to reintroduce the ethnographically salient notions of cosmological and radical evil once evil is first construed as a human and intersubjective phenomenon. The answer is to ask how these dimensions come into play in the experiential immediacy of social life, for example, how a cosmological battle between angels and devils is experienced concretely on the human scale. Finally, he suggests that concepts of power from Otto and the shadow from Jung may be alternatives to the notion of evil, though I rejoin that they are just as much in need of critique with respect to Christian overtones. They may be valuable for the study of morality but are not suitable replacements for evil in the sense for which I have argued.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672210
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 670329
Date: 07 01, 2013
Author(s): Fisher Cass
Abstract: Despite these caveats,
Contemplative Nationis highly recommended for scholars of Jewish studies, religious studies, philosophy, and theology. The book is an excellent example of how to apply hermeneutical theories to the study of Judaism, how to bridge the gap between continental philosophy and analytic philosophy, and how to expand the scope of Jewish studies by appreciating the nature of theological discourse. While Judaica scholars could use the book in university-level courses, and rabbis could apply its approach to synagogue life, the claim that “Israel” is a “contemplative nation” will hardly resonate with most Jews today. It is very doubtful that the book could “guide the way for [the] future” of the Jewish people’s survival (226), precisely because Jews today are overwhelmingly secular, and the culture in which Jews live, both in Israel and in the Diaspora, is anti-intellectual and antitheological. Furthermore, if Fisher is so keen on Philo, he should have also reminded his readers of the fate of Philo’s enterprise: it was no coincidence that Philo became one of the Church Fathers and that his exegetical/hermeneutical project was not adopted by the tradition that became normative Judaism. When “Israel” denotes a nation of divine contemplators, “carnal Israel” (namely “Israel” as a historical, cultural, and ethnic entity) is marginalized, denigrated, and persecuted. It is true that Jewish religious life is theological, but being Jewish cannot be reduced to contemplating God.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/672230
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673367
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Lehnhof Kent R.
Abstract: Critchley uses the term in a discussion of Levinas and politics. Noting that government tends to become tyrannical when left to itself, Critchley commends the way Levinas’s ethical ideas can cultivate forms of “dissensual emancipatory praxis” that “work against the consensual idyll of the state, not in order to do away with the state or consensus, but to bring about its endless betterment” (“Five Problems in Levinas’s View of Politics,” 183).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/673478
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 674410
Date: 02 01, 2014
Author(s): Rüpke Jörg
Abstract: See the analysis of Metzger (
Religion, Geschichte, Nation). For the modern spread of the paradigm, see Leigh E. Schmidt, “A History of All Religions,”Journal of the Early Republic24 (2004): 327–34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/674241
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673750
Date: 08 01, 2014
Author(s): Hequembourg Stephen
Abstract: See George Herbert, “The Forerunners” and “Jordan (I),” in
George Herbert: The Complete English Poems, ed. John Tobin (New York: Penguin, 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/676498
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Urbaniak Jakub
Abstract: Depoortere,
Badiou and Theology, 123–24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677288
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673747
Date: 03 01, 2014
Abstract: Žižek, Slavoj.
Demanding the Impossible. Cambridge: Polity Press, 2013. $14.95 (paper). 160 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/677379
Journal Title: Renaissance Drama
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 673118
Date: 09 01, 2014
Author(s): Huth Kimberly
Abstract: Wayne C. Booth, “Metaphor as Rhetoric: The Problem of Evaluation,” in Sacks,
On Metaphor, 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/678121
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 677726
Date: 10 01, 2014
Author(s): Peperzak Adriaan T.
Abstract: Peperzak in this book also offers continental thinkers an appealing alternative to the theological turn of phenomenology as practiced by Jean-Luc Marion and others. While Peperzak takes seriously the idea that “God cannot be investigated or explained … because God is not given as a describable phenomenon,” this realization does not turn his phenomenology away from the investigation of rational thinking because for Peperzak reason itself has to be rethought in terms of the intersubjective encounters between nonthematizable—human and divine—sayers (121). Consequently, much more than some of the thinkers of the theological turn, Peperzak’s work maintains a broadly humanist sensibility and a conviction that theological thinking and philosophy can be integrated quite well, provided the latter does not close itself off in autarky. In his humanism, Peperzak echoes the best elements in the philosophical style both of his teacher Paul Ricoeur and the philosophical tradition of his own Catholic faith, although he implicitly critiques the former for insisting too vehemently on the autonomy of philosophy (128) and calls out the latter for separating “natural reason” from faith (182–86). For his own part, Peperzak hopes to maintain an open space between faith and reason: “I do not see any valid argument against the integration of philosophical insights into a faith-inspired theology … neither would I protest if an integrated reflection of the Christian community about its faith would call itself
philosophia” (160). For the many who share similar sentiments today,Thinking about Thinkingwill make a valuable guide to the conversation of philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/679208
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: 527516
Date: 4 2005
Author(s): Popkin Jeremy D.
Abstract: This book is a very original and important contribution to both the study of autobiography and that of historiography. In addition to his analysis of autobiographies of historians, Popkin gives new insights about the relationship between narrative and history. Maybe every historian should write an autobiography at some stage as an essential step in his or her professional development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.2.429
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Brill
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Mooij J. J. A.
Abstract: Closely related to the philosophical problem of consciousness of time was the question of the meaning of time and duration in psychology and in literature. Although Mooij mentions William James's notion of “specious present” in passing, he fails to explicate James's perception of time, which attempted to provide an empiricist account of our temporal concepts through the influence of John Locke (p. 197). Apart from this caveat, the book's strength lies in its perceptiveness and breadth of interpretation of the history of the concept of time. Mooij's accuracy in comprehending and in transmitting the essence of such difficult and complicated philosophies is remarkable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1130
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: Cornell University Press
Issue: 526084
Date: 10 2005
Author(s): Gutterman David S.
Abstract: Ultimately it is at times unclear what is gained in making these comparisons or if such analysis “enhances our understanding of the relationship between religious narratives and politics” (p. 92). What precisely is revealed in grouping these movements together, other than that political crisis invites prophetic criticism? Gutterman carefully unpacks the readings of shared Biblical texts, and he skillfully details contextual and interpretative differences. But one wishes he had gone beyond these descriptive endeavors to construct a more nuanced account of the relationship between religion and politics and, more importantly, of the specifically religious grounds of the activism he examines. While Gutterman can be theoretically deft—in exploring the relation between narrative and politics (p. 21) or garden/wilderness metaphors (p. 47)—he is not fully engaged with the literature on political religion, often citing unrepresentative figures like William Connolly or Stephen Carter. He is a sharp writer with an eye for interesting problems and material. I applaud his engagement with important issues and also the ambition of his thinking. But his central categories require further explication, and this book speaks to the need for more conversations across disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1086/ahr.111.4.1221
Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Missouri Press
Issue: jpolitics.68.issue-2
Date: 05 2004
Author(s): Eubanks Cecil
Abstract: Both
Faith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsilluminate and challenge the assumptions in Voegelin's philosophy and lead readers in new directions for Voegelinian scholarship. They are indispensable readings for students of political philosophy in their examination of transcendence, philosophy, and politics. By seeing Voegelin as a postmodern thinker and by showing his exchange with Strauss, both of these books provide us with a broader context to understand Voegelin's political philosophy. As part of the University of Missouri Press' new series, bothFaith and PhilosophyandEric Voegelin's Dialogues with the Postmodernsprovide intellectually provocative and serious-minded secondary works on Eric Voegelin and his ultimate place in political philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1111/j.1468-2508.2006.00420_20.x
Journal Title: Marvels & Tales: Journal of Fairy-Tale Studies
Publisher: Weidenfeld & Nicolson
Issue: marvelstales.28.issue-1
Date: 5 30, 1998
Author(s): Wood Christopher
Abstract: 3. Jessica Tiffin points out that “from the moment he enters the village, and despite his characterization both in heroic motif and active, masculine past tense, the cyclist's historical nature is subsumed into the unreal space of fairy tale and the Gothic” (85). The shift from the descriptions of the countess in the present tense to the narrative past begins with the words, “One hot, ripe summer day in the pubescent years of the present century, a young officer in the British army, blond, blue-eyed, heavy-muscled, visiting friends in Vienna, decided to spend the remainder of his furlough exploring the little-known uplands of Romania” (Carter, 97).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.13110/marvelstales.28.1.0142
Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Polity Press
Issue: crnewcentrevi.13.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: RON ESTES is a Ph.D. candidate in the Department of Comparative Literature at the State University of New York at Buffalo, where he is finishing a dissertation on Nostalgia and the Uncanny in the Nineteenth-Century British and American Gothic Novel. He has translated essays by Jean-Luc Nancy, Eva Geulen, Gerard Wajcman and Willy Apollon. He currently resides in Seville, Spain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.13.1.0137
Journal Title: CR: The New Centennial Review
Publisher: Galaxia-Gutemberg
Issue: crnewcentrevi.14.issue-3
Date: 12 2007
Author(s): Valéry Paul
Abstract: Benjamin also notes: “Every present day is determined by the images that are synchronic with it: each ‘now’ is the now of a particular recognizability. In it, truth is charged to the bursting point with time. (This point of explosion, and nothing else, is the death of the
intentio, which thus coincides with the birth of authentic historical time, the time of truth.) It is not that what is past casts its light on what is present, or what is present its light on what is past; rather, image is that wherein what has been comes together in a flash with the now to form a constellation” (2002, N3,1). The two great related demands made by T. S. Eliot in “Tradition and the Individual Talent” will also be recalled here: his call for the exercise of the “historical sense” as a juxtaposition of significant events from discontinuous times, which in turn produces an “impersonal” (nonintentional) effect. These demands define the representation of history in works such asThe Waste Landand Pound’s early cantos.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/crnewcentrevi.14.3.0001
Journal Title: QED: A Journal in GLBTQ Worldmaking
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: qed.1.issue-1
Date: 4 2014
Author(s): Wight Jules
Abstract: James Poniewozik, “When Did Chelsea Manning Become Chelsea Manning?”
Time, August 28, 2013,http://entertainment.time.com/2013/08/28/when-did-chelsea-manning-become-chelsea-manning/.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.14321/qed.1.1.0118
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2006.25.issue-1
Date: 4 2006
Author(s): Moatti Claudia
Abstract: AbstractThis paper isolates movement as a topic for analysis in Roman imperial history. Movement is regarded under three aspects: translation (of texts, practices, ideas), migration (of officials, merchants, students, etc.), and communication (i.e. the movement of written documents). Interrelationships among the three aspects of movement are identified and discussed, as are the shared impact of translation, migration, and communication on issues of cultural and social identity and political negotiation and control. The article argues that movement changes the role of the state as well as relations between individual and states, augments the use of writing in society, transforms identities, and gives impulse to internal and external regulations. The implications of movement are understood as both pragmatic and formal, altering relations to space and time and influencing ways of organizing and thinking. The author surveys current work in the field and identifies potential areas for future research. The paper draws heavily on both literary and documentary sources and discusses material from the late republic through late antiquity, paying particular attention to continuities and discontinuities between early and later periods of the Roman empire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2006.25.1.109
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ca.2013.32.issue-1
Date: 04 2013
Abstract: This article argues that the end of Tacitus's
Dialogus de Oratoribusis inconclusive in ways that draw attention to the difficulty of interpretation not onlyofthe dialogue, as by modern scholars, but alsointhe dialogue, as by its leading characters. The inconclusiveness is especially marked by a commonly noted, but little discussed, feature of the end: when the rest of the characters laugh at the point of departure, Tacitus himself does not. Arguing that this difference of affective response on the part of the characters prefigures differences in interpretive response on the part of readers, the article identifies different strains in recent scholarship: pessimistic and optimistic. Both forms of response entail an attribution of a “poetics of conspiracy” (Hinds) to the ultimate speaker of the dialogue, the author Tacitus, and a “hermeneutics of suspicion” (Ricoeur) to its reader. At the same time, the author's double-position, as character and author, between narrated event and narration of the event to the reader, suggests that the other characters in the dialogue may, like the author and reader, also exercise such poetics and hermeneutics on one another and themselves. The article ends with thecomparandumof the first satire of Tacitus's near contemporary, Juvenal, suggesting that, in the case of these works that can look with hindsight on the social and political past of the Early Empire, their modes of transmission and reception may be politically determined (e.g., as conspiratorial, suspicious) but may also demonstrate, within the restrictions of social and political determinations, a high degree of contingency, reflexivity, and autonomy. Such possibilities suggest that the text itself is part of a pragmatic and performative tradition of the kind enacted by its characters, in addition to a tradition of the production of (comparatively static and unfree) “literary” works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ca.2013.32.1.1
Journal Title: Film Quarterly
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: fq.2005.58.issue-4
Date: 06 2005
Author(s): Sobchack Vivian
Abstract: AbstractNine Dolby theatrical “trailers” were made from the mid-1990s to 2003 specifically to visualize and promote the audio capabilities of digital sound. Drawing on Bachelard'sThe Poetics of Spaceand Chion'sAudio-Vision, this essay explores the trailers' sound-driven imagery and suggests its implications for contemporary “mainstream” narrative cinema.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/fq.2005.58.4.2
Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2008.1.issue-1
Date: 05 2008
Abstract: Culture has been regarded as an anathema to psychology as an empiricist research tradition. Despite the explosive growth of research on culture and psychology over the last decade of the 20
thcentury and its importance in Asian social psychology, the ontological and epistemological tension between psychology as a science and psychology as a cultural/historical discipline introduced in the writings of the thinkers of the Enlightenment and counter-Enlightenment still lingers on in the contemporary discourse of psychology. Clifford Geertz once ominously suggested that cultural psychology may have chewed more than it can. In this paper, the interpretive turn in social science as exemplified by writings of Charles Taylor and Paul Ricoeur is reviewed and discussed how it may impinge on the practice of Asian social psychology as an empirical science in methodological, epistemological, and ontological respects. It is argued here that the current practice of Asian social psychology is largely, though not entirely, free of the challenges mounted by these theorists, and that Asian social psychology has an advantage of not encumbered by this traditional tension due to a monist ontology that is prevalent in Asia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2008.1.1.103
Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2008.1.issue-1
Date: 05 2008
Abstract: This paper puts the nature of scientificity on the feminist agenda. Sedgwick's reparative reading, Spivak's dislocating negotiation, Wilson's analytics of breaching and Lather's getting lost are unpacked via exemplars from recent feminist re-inscriptions of empirical work in order to begin to grasp what is on the horizon in terms of new analytics and practices of inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2008.1.1.55
Journal Title: International Review of Qualitative Research
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: irqr.2014.7.issue-2
Date: 8 2014
Author(s): Walther Joachim
Abstract: This paper explores visual response methods as a representation of student learning in a college-level interdisciplinary curriculum integrating art and engineering. The visual response methods, specifically visual journals and postcards, are examples of authentic assessment and alternative data collection methods embedded in a mixed-methods (qualitative dominant) practitioner research case study. In the paper, we focus on different means for analyzing these visual responses (e.g., through hermeneutic analysis, document analysis, and narrative analysis) and deliberate the contribution of diverse analysis methods to the researchers’ understanding of students’ experiences of interdisciplinarity in this course.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/irqr.2014.7.2.217
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2002.55.issue-3
Date: 12 2002
Author(s): Calcagno Mauro
Abstract: Conventional views of text/music relationships in early Italian opera focus on the imitation of affections. But by dealing exclusively with the referential meanings of texts (e.g., emotions, images, and concepts) these views overlook an important aspect of music's interaction with language. In opera, music also imitates language's contextual and communicative functions—i.e., discourse, as studied today by the subfield of linguistics called pragmatics. In his operas Monteverdi fully realized Peri's ideal of “imitating in song a person speaking” (“imitar col canto chi parla”) by musically emphasizing those context-dependent meanings that emerge especially in ordinary language and that are prominent in dramatic texts, as opposed to poetry and prose. Such meanings are manifest whenever words such as “I,” “here,” and “now” appear— words called “deictics”—with the function of situating the speaker/singer's utterances in a specific time and place. Monteverdi highlights deictics through melodic and rhythmic emphases, repetition, shifts of meter, style, and harmony, as part of a strategy to create a musical language suited to opera as a genre and to singers as actors. In
Il ritorno d'Ulisse in patriaandL'incoronazione di Poppea, this strategy serves large-scale dramaturgical aims with respect to the relationships among space, time, and character identity, highlighting issues also discussed within the contemporary intellectual context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2002.55.3.383
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jams.2012.65.issue-1
Date: April 2012
Abstract: In his 1986 essay on the intersections between music theory, phenomenology, and perception, David Lewin develops a heuristic model through which to come to terms with the constitution of multiple and heterogeneous perceptions of musical events. One of his principal vehicles for demonstrating this phenomenological turn is the well-known analysis of Schubert's “Morgengruß.” The present article considers the ramifications of Lewin's methodology, particularly with respect to the experience of time that emerges from Lewin's mobilization of the heuristic perception model, by approaching it from the perspective of Husserl's
Phenomenology of Internal Time Consciousness. This perspective reveals a superposition of temporalities as well as a superposition of languages as the underlying factors through which Lewin's analysis is produced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jams.2012.65.1.179
Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jm.2014.31.issue-4
Date: 10 2014
Author(s): Cochran Timothy B.
Abstract: In volume six of
Traité de rythme, de couleur, et d’ornithologie, Olivier Messiaen uses the phrase “the pebble in the water” to identify a class of especially stark rhythmic contrasts in Debussy’s music that feature long durations interrupted by rapid rhythms. He invests these contrasts with an expressive logic built around the concept of shock—that is, the sudden stimulation of a static context by an outside presence. Messiaen unites various images—both natural and psychological—around this expressive pattern via analogy, suggesting that its essence is transferrable within a network of associated metaphors. Although for the most part in volume six Messiaen refrains from linking interpretations of Debussy with his own music, many of his rhythmic contrasts manifest the same expressive logic that he ascribes to Debussy’s music, particularly durational events that signify the interjection of birdsong within serene environments and that signal the striking appearance of divine power on earth. In addition to stylistic and semiotic correlations, the logic of shock theorized for the pebble in the water recurs more abstractly in Messiaen’s idiomatic views on musical experience and spiritual encounter. His interpretation of rhythmic contrast bears the marks of his more general aesthetics of shock, which in turn can be read as a reorientation of a broader modernist hermeneutic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jm.2014.31.4.503
Journal Title: Journal of Palestine Studies
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: jps.2014.43.issue-3
Date: 5 1, 2014
Author(s): Mardam-Bey Farouk
Abstract: For a good description of this general atmosphere, see Denis Sieffert, “La ‘Sarkozye’ médiatique et intellectuelle,” in
Sarkozy au Proche-Orient, ed. Farouk Mardam-Bey (Paris: Sindbad/Actes Sud, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jps.2014.43.3.26
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jsah.2011.70.issue-1
Date: 03 2011
Author(s): Ortenberg Alexander
Abstract: Chapman, "Unrealized Designs," 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2011.70.1.38
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Architectural Historians
Publisher: University of Hawai’i Press
Issue: jsah.2012.71.issue-4
Date: 12 2010
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur,
Time and Narrative, trans. Kathleen Blamey and David Pellauer (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jsah.2012.71.4.564
Journal Title: The San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: jung.1.2005.24.issue-1
Date: 02 2005
Author(s): Marlan Stanton
Abstract: Stanton Marlan, “Hesitation and Slowness: Gateway to Psyche's Depth,” San Francisco Jung Institute Library Journal, 2005, 24:1, 17-27. This paper focuses on hesitation and slowness in the work of Jungian analysis. It emphasizes the importance of patience as a way of achieving depth and of avoiding facile and abstract formulations that lack respect for the true otherness of the analysand and for the fundamental enigmas of analytic work. Alongside the techniques of Freud and Jung, and drawing on Alchemy and on Renaissance and Eastern wisdom traditions, the author articulates a complex notion of hesitation. The paper deconstructs simple binary pairings of fast and slow and suggests an attitude of purposeless wandering as an important compensation to the overly technologically-oriented attitudes and fast-paced culture that have invaded our therapeutic sensibilities and consulting rooms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jung.1.2005.24.1.17
Journal Title: Jung Journal: Culture & Psyche
Publisher: Spring Journal Books
Issue: jung.2008.2.issue-2
Date: 05 2007
Author(s): Romanyshyn Robert D.
Abstract: Review of Robert D. Romanyshyn's The Wounded Researcher: Research with Soul in Mind, New Orleans, Louisiana: Spring Journal Books, 2007. Robert Romanyshyn has written a treatise on the question of understanding that brings together the fields of phenomenology and depth psychology. Following the thought of C. G. Jung, Romanyshyn has presented an archetypal view of the dilemma of psychological research that he sees as a story of loss, mourning, descent, re-search and homecoming expressed in the mythical image of Orpheus. Going deeper into the actual process of psychological research, Romanyshyn looks to the ancient art of alchemy as providing a model of the attitude and action of imagination that most closely suits psychological life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/jung.2008.2.2.101
Journal Title: Law and Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: lal.2003.15.issue-3
Date: 11 2003
Author(s): Gana Nouri
Abstract: Abstract.
Gadamer's pursuit inTruth and Methodof an applicative literary hermeneutics modeled on legal hermeneutics earns him the status of a precursor to the emergence of what is known in North America as the “literature and law movement.” Attentive to the debates and controversies surrounding this movement, this article seeks to explore an interpretive interzone in which the judge and the literary critic, if they apply themselves to a poetics of elasticity, might be of exemplary significance to each other. The notion of “exemplarity” does not, however, imply a mechanical appropriation of the practices of the one by the other, but a mutually nuanced and complicated approximation of the strengths of each by the other. In the light of this normative poetics of proximity and distance, Dworkin's model of the “chain novel” is assessed and supplemented by (an alternative) model grounded in Foucault's genealogy of authorship as expounded in his article “What Is an Author?”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/lal.2003.15.3.313
Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2003.25.issue-1
Date: 04 01, 2003
Author(s): Moreno Jairo
Abstract: In nearly thirty densely argued pages, Gottfried Weber (1832) analyzed four measures from Mozart's"Dissonance" Quartet; the "ear" subjects each note and chord to multiple possible interpretations. This paper examines Weber's interpretive practice in light of his theory of harmony, considering his cognitive teasing of potential meanings from the perspective of philosophical notions of consciousness (Kant and Fichte) and the poetics of self-reflective subjectivity proposed by the Early Romantics (F.Schlegel and Novalis) in their critiques of linguistic representation, temporality,and subject-object relations.The Early Romantic conception of irony and allegory brings the subject fully within the fold of linguistic representation, as does Weber,marking a key moment in the history of the representation of listening by music theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2003.25.1.99
Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: mts.2010.32.issue-2
Date: 10 2010
Author(s): Ivanovitch Roman
Abstract: At the heart of this essay is the suggestion that variation can be understood as a vital mode of Mozart's musical thinking, an impulse evident not merely in movements labeled "theme and variation," but in his output as a whole. Accordingly, I begin by sketching a more general theoretical context for the interaction of this variation impulse with the more teleological formal dynamics of sonata.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/mts.2010.32.2.145
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2003.57.issue-4
Date: 03 01, 2003
Author(s): Stern Rebecca F.
Abstract: Christina Rossetti's "Goblin Market" (1862) has garnered seemingly limitless critical interpretation — the goblins' remarkable fruit inviting allegorical readings of the poem that reference, most popularly, Christianity, sexuality, and capitalism. In this essay I read fruit simply as food, situating the poem within the context of food adulteration contemporary with its 1859 composition. Food adulteration was a widespread problem in Victorian England, as increasing numbers of merchants cut flour with alum, doctored curry with mercury, and enhanced the appearance of potted fruits and vegetables with copper and lead. Public alarm regarding this form of fraud reached its height in the 1850s, largely due to the work of an independent Analytical Sanitary Commission, which published its findings in
The Lancetbetween 1851 and 1854. While Parliament responded to these reports with the formation of a Select Committee in 1855, the popular press responded with articles, tracts, and ballads addressing this pandemic problem. Manuals that instructed consumers how to protect themselves by acquiring the accoutrements of home laboratories proliferated, as did references to adulteration in popular literature. In this essay I read Rossetti's poem as an example of this type of reference. The market of the poem's title, I argue, references a literally contaminated marketplace in which the numbers of people who ate ostensibly nutritious food, only to wither and die in consequence, provoked both governmental and popular alarm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2003.57.4.477
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: ncl.2012.67.issue-1
Date: 6 1, 2012
Abstract: This essay argues that Emily Dickinson’s poetry intervenes in the broad cultural assessment of epistemology provoked by the evolutionary debates of the 1860s. While scholars have begun to explore the thematic correspondences between Dickinson’s poetry and some aspects of this cultural conversation, this essay examines the ways in which her intervention occurs at the level of poetic form and is in fact profoundly dependent upon form. Specifically, it analyzes a set of her poems from the early 1860s through the early 1870s in which she uses the dual structure of metaphor to elicit a way of thinking about truth that is aligned with the empirical methods of research that were widely embraced in the mid nineteenth century; however, in the face of an increasingly contingent notion of truth, Dickinson’s way of thinking significantly revises cultural assumptions about what those methods might yield. The metaphors examined here amplify the distinctions between two material entities—lightning and fork, or sunset and lilac, for example—rather than merging them or leaping beyond them to stable, transcendent meaning. What Dickinson plays with is the possibility of a revised version of revelation or truth, one that is not only derived from the observation of material difference through the two parts of a metaphor, but that is more radically contingent on the perpetuity of such dual perception. Altogether, Dickinson’s metaphors are both critical and recuperative, as they contribute to the dismantling of fixed truth while embracing the limited revelations made possible by—
onlymade possible by—sustained process.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncl.2012.67.1.58
Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ncm.2012.36.issue-1
Date: July 2012
Abstract: Framed in such a way, the early movements of Mahler's Second Symphony—characterized by the alternation between halting sections that dissolve almost as soon as they begin and long-breathed melodies that seem to unfold effortlessly—suggest the melancholic subject's struggle between despair in the face of abject meaninglessness and a manic euphoria, neither of which addresses the loss. By contrast, the text in the symphony's final movement, adapted by Mahler from Friedrich Klopstock's chorale on the resurrection of the dead, encourages true remembrance of the deceased as a figure beyond death. Heard as a musical enactment of mourning, the final movement suggests that the dead who are mourned are resurrected through remembrance. Forcing us to acknowledge Mahler's death on some level, the final movement completes the work of mourning by engendering the composer's own resurrection in our memories as we witness each performance of his Second Symphony.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/ncm.2012.36.1.058
Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: nr.2003.7.issue-1
Date: 07 01, 2003
Author(s): Long Charles H.
Abstract: This essay addresses the problematical nature of the meaning of religion as it is related to the formation and destiny of peoples of African descent in the United States. Moving beyond a narrow understanding of the nature of religion as expressed in much of Black Theology, for example, this essay proposes a "thick" and complex depiction of religion in the African American context through a recognition of its relationship to the contact and conquest that marked the modern world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2003.7.1.11
Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: nr.2004.8.issue-2
Date: 11 2004
Author(s): Shuck Glenn W.
Abstract: The
Left Behindnovels by Tim LaHaye and Jerry Jenkins have become a major publishing phenomenon in recent years. The novels have succeeded in part because they address the anxieties of their readers, using apocalyptic language to depict a future world in which evildoers are punished, and the faithful reverse the tables on their cultural marginality. The novels, however, also speak to the "here and now," articulating in narrative form the beliefs and actions that place one among either the saved or the damned. The novels accomplish this through the issuance of marks. Both believers and the followers of Antichrist have distinctive marks, which prove less than reliable. At stake, ultimately, is an evangelicalism open to the ambiguity and uncertainty of contemporary life, and a reactive fundamentalism that insists, metaphorically, on the rigidity of marks—a quest for certainty ill-advised in a world characterized by relentless change.*
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2004.8.2.48
Journal Title: Nova Religio: The Journal of Alternative and Emergent Religions
Publisher: The University of California Press
Issue: nr.2012.16.issue-1
Date: 8 1, 2012
Abstract: Drawing on my own fieldwork experiences with the transnational Integral Yoga community, this essay offers some reflections on two possible approaches to bridging insider-outsider perspectives in the study of new religious movements. First, I consider Gerald Larson's suggestion of a “relationship of mutual reciprocity” between researcher and religious community. Second, I discuss the value of a participatory approach that attempts to integrate engaged participation with critical distance in the study of religion. I use my collaborative experience co-authoring an academic article on Sri Aurobindo and the contemporary yoga scene with an Integral Yoga practitioner to argue that while Larson's reciprocal enterprise risks either sacrificing critical concerns to apologetic agendas, or polarizing the insider as apologetic and the outsider as reductive, a participatory approach proposes a way to put insider-outsider perspectives into a more creative relation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/nr.2012.16.1.88
Journal Title: Religion and American Culture: A Journal of Interpretation
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rac.2003.13.issue-1
Date: 01 01, 2003
Author(s): Flake Kathleen
Abstract: The L.D.S Church's use of commemorative rituals and narrative history to simultaneously adapt and maintain identity is not unique, but it is uniquely available to analysis because of the immediacy of the change and the Saints' devotion to record-keeping. Thus, the drama of LDS survival during the Progressive Era illuminates age-old religious strategies for adaptation to social norms, which strategies preserve the faithful's confidence in the timelessness of their god's moral and ecclesiastical order. More narrowly, these events in American church history are critical for understanding how the civilly disobedient Saints finally accepted the rule of federal law without losing their religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rac.2003.13.1.69
Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2009.108.issue-1
Date: 11 2009
Author(s): Marcus Sharon
Abstract: In the text-based disciplines, psychoanalysis and Marxism have had a major influence on how we read, and this has been expressed most consistently in the practice of symptomatic reading, a mode of interpretation that assumes that a text's truest meaning lies in what it does not say, describes textual surfaces as superfluous, and seeks to unmask hidden meanings. For symptomatic readers, texts possess meanings that are veiled, latent, all but absent if it were not for their irrepressible and recurring symptoms. Noting the recent trend away from ideological demystification, this essay proposes various modes of "surface reading" that together strive to accurately depict the truth to which a text bears witness. Surface reading broadens the scope of critique to include the kinds of interpretive activity that seek to understand the complexity of literary surfaces---surfaces that have been rendered invisible by symptomatic reading.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2009.108.1.1
Journal Title: Representations
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rep.2013.121.issue-1
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Ferris Ina
Abstract: This essay reads the seminal historical fiction of Walter Scott in conjunction with the medical apparition discourse that flourished in the early nineteenth century. It argues that the tactics of the historical novel in this period are best understood through an “apparitional poetics” that attempts to solve the problem of the historical image.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rep.2013.121.1.60
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1993.11.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 1993
Author(s): Sharon-Zisser Shirley
Abstract: Abstract:The concem with progress and utility is shared by nineteenth-century scientists, philosophers, and rhetoricians, leading to significant correspondences among their discourses. This concern is manifest, for example, in the way in which several rhetorical treatises of the nineteenth century regard the distinction between a figure and a trope, which had been a common part of rhetorical theory since the time of Quintilian, as useless and anachronistic. By examining three nineteenth-century articulations of the justifications for erasing the trope/figure distinction from the cultural repertoire, this essay reveals structural and semantic parallels between these rhetorical treatises and the discourses of evolution and utilitarianism. Thus, the essay locates the source of the synonymity which the terms "trope" and "figure" have acquired in contemporary critical metalanguage in Victorian ideologies of progress and of the unprofitability and consequent discardability of the ancient.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1993.11.3.321
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1996.14.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 1996
Author(s): Gross Daniel M.
Abstract: Abstract: Vico's theory of metaphor is best understood as a monster in the tradition of classical rhetorical invention. It is the mutant offspring of metaphor characterized as "necessary" (an "ear" of com, for example) and metaphor characterized in terms of analogy. From the perspective of his method. Vico marries these apparently incompatible forms inherited from Aristotle and thereby identifies a third type of linguistic metaphor. I argue that the metaphor identifies a stipulatory definition taken out of context. In order to situate this claim, I outline Vico's genetic analysis and elaborate in general terms what metaphor and definition share. Most importantly. Vico insists that beings, actions, and events are linguistically identifiedin some particular diseursive context. Indeed, in many cases that context alone determines whether the expression can be called a definition or a metaphor. Like Cicero's ideal jurist, Vico's hero employs motivated words and realizes possibilities available to common sense. Henee Vico's theory of metaphor is both "constructivist"—language has the power to makes things—and "humartist"—it must do so in a form appropriate to history and culture. Vico's theory is consequently important to us because it challenges the proper/figurative distinction championed in the philosophy of language and adds a pragmatic dimension to contemporary views of metaphor at work in literary theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1996.14.4.359
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1998.16.issue-2
Date: 05 01, 1998
Author(s): Paxson James J.
Abstract: Abstract:The fact that classical and early medieval allegorical personifications were exclusively female has long perplexed literary scholars and rhetoricians. Although arguments have been made about this gendering using grammatical formalism for the most part, an examination of rhetoric's own deep structure—that is, the discursive metaphors it has always employed to talkabouttropes and figures—promises to better articulate the gendered bases of the figure. Using analytical tactics drawn from Paul de Man's discussions of prosopopeia, this essay re-examines some of the rhetorical record along with programmatic imagery from patristic writings in order to demonstrate how women theinselves could serve as the "figures of figuration."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1998.16.2.149
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.1999.17.issue-4
Date: 11 01, 1999
Author(s): Selby Gary S.
Abstract: Abstract:This essay argues that in 1 Thessalonians, Paul uses eschatological discourse—language about the end of hme—in order to evoke a symbolic world-view in which his readers become God's elect, living at the end of time and awaiting the sudden, imminent retum of Christ from heaven. This self-identification explains their present misfortunes, while at the sam.e time demanding that they fulfill the ethical and moral demands of the Christian faith. More broadly, this essay points to the role that eschatological discourse played within early Christianity in general, suggesting that it formed a central, paradigmatic drama which helped to define ontological and teleological reality for the movement's adherents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.1999.17.4.385
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2002.20.issue-1
Date: 02 01, 2002
Author(s): Newman Sara
Abstract: In the
Rhetoric, Aristotle identifies "bringing-before-the-eyes" as a capacity that is crucial to metaphors because it allows rhetors to actualize actions immediately before audiences, leading those audiences to insight. Because this description suggests that metaphors activate cognitive mechanisms on the part of their listeners, "bringing-before-the-eyes" has been considered a key element within Aristotle's theory and the nexus of that approach to metaphor and contemporary conceptual ones. Yet, no study has probed these claims to any degree. Accordingly, this paper examines Aristotle's references to "bringing-before-the-eyes" as well as to two associated concerns,energeia/actualization and sense perception. This examination demonstrates that "bringing-before-the-eyes" is not explicitly cognitive but instead a perceptive capacity. In this, Aristotle's theory anticipates recent approaches to language because it allows the audience to participate in the persuasive process at a level that extends its role beyond the traditional Aristotelian understanding that it is the target of emotional appeals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2002.20.1.1
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2005.23.issue-4
Date: 11 2005
Author(s): Graff Richard
Abstract: AbstractThe rise of prose in Greece has been linked to broader cultural and intellectual developments under way in the classical period. Prose has also been characterized as challenging poetry's traditional status as the privileged expression of the culture. Yet throughout the classical period and beyond, poetry was still regularly invoked as the yardstick by which innovation was measured. This paper investigates how poetry figures in the earliest accounts of prose style. Focusing on Isocrates, Alcidamas, and Aristotle, it argues that although each author distinguishes between the styles of prose and poetry, none is able to sustain the distinction consistently. The criteria for what constitutes an acceptable level of poeticality in prose were unstable. The diverse conceptions of poetic style were tied to intellectual polemics and professional rivalries of the early- to mid-fourth century bce and reflect competing aims and ideals for rhetorical performance in prose.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2005.23.4.303
Journal Title: Rhetorica: A Journal of the History of Rhetoric
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: rh.2006.24.issue-3
Date: 8 2006
Author(s): Abbott Don Paul
Abstract: AbstractBeginning with Roland Barthes' “The Old Rhetoric: an aide-mémoire” (1964–65), semioticians have shown a remarkable interest in the history of rhetoric. Writers like Barthes, Tzevtan Todorov, Gérard Genette, and Paul Ricoeur have offered accounts of rhetoric's past that invariably concluded with rhetoric's demise and its replacement with semiotics. These writers typically portray rhetoric's history as one of a brief rise followed by a very long decline, a pattern, says Todorov, of “splendor and misery.” This essay examines the semioticians' predictions of rhetoric's demise as well as semiotics' attempt to claim elements of rhetoric as its own. The essay concludes by considering the present state of semiotics' aspiration to supersede rhetoric as a theory of language and human affairs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/rh.2006.24.3.303
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1982.5.issue-1
Date: May 1982
Author(s): Ashley David
Abstract: This paper analyzes J. Habermas's theory of “universal pragmatics” and examines the extent to which Habermas's ideal speech community is predicted upon a specific type of relationship between the individual and society. The ability of the theory of universal pragmatics to overcome the form of domination institutionalized by modern societies is questioned, and the argument is made that Habermas's radical program of emancipation is vitiated (1) by Habermas's conflation of “transcendental” and “situationally engaged” enlightenment and (2) by Habermas's inability to reintegrate practical-emancipatory and technical forms of reason. Habermas's idea of “communicative competence” replicates, rather than displaces, the “modern” solution to the problem of the relationship between the individual and society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1982.5.1.79
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1984.7.issue-2
Date: November 1984
Author(s): Jorgensen Danny L.
Abstract: Using data from an ethnographic study of
tarot divination, occult claims to knowledge are analyzed and interpreted. Attention is focused on theproceduresparties to occult divination employ to claim and sustain what they regard as extraordinary knowledge. This view of occult knowledge stands opposed to efforts to discredit occult claims as unscientific or the result of psychosocial conditions like deprivation and marginality. Like knowledge in general, occult knowledge is a product of sociohistorical influences, interactional negotiation, and interpretation. The challenge for sociology therefore is the pursuit of the social interactional and historical processes whereby knowledge and interpretation are accomplished in everyday life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1984.7.2.135
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1986.9.issue-1
Date: May 1986
Author(s): Kleinman Sherryl
Abstract: Many sociologists have tried in vain to find the “true” meaning of the classic works in the discipline. An interactionist perspective suggests that this search is not a valid one for sociologists, especially symbolic interactionists. Although there can be no “true” meaning, some authors use conventions of writing that make their work more
orless clear. Using Mead'sMind, Self and Societyas an example, we discuss the dimensions of clarity. We then argue that the sociological classics should be read to (I) simulate new theories and research (pragmatic analysis), (2) determine how sociologists have used that classic to support or refute particular theories or perspectives (rhetorical analysis), and (3) provide information about the sociological concerns of the author and his/her contemporaries (historical analysis).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1986.9.1.129
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.1999.22.issue-3
Date: November 1999
Author(s): Mullaney Jamie L.
Abstract: Research on identity suggests that a critical factor in identity concerns presentation or the behaviors actors perform in order to convince others of their identity. Yet identity also involves the attributions others make on the basis of these behaviors. In this paper, I argue that all acts do not fare equally in the process of attribution. Rather, individuals making attributions engage in a process of mental weighing as a way to determine which acts “count” toward identity and to what extent. While various components of the act contribute to its social weight—its presence or absence, markedness, frequency, context, and the manner in which it is performed—the lens through which the attributer views the act also influences the weighing process.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.1999.22.3.269
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2000.23.issue-3
Date: November 2000
Author(s): !Manning Philip
Abstract: There are two ways of reading Goffman--as a theorist of trust and ritual accommodation, that is, as a theorist of the interaction order, or as a theorist of deception. I suggest a way of making these two readings compatible, by arguing that Goffman was interested in what I call the “production of credibility.” Credibility is the quality of being believable, and this quality is integral to both trust and deception. Viewed in this way, Goffman explored the ways in which people make their actions convincing to other people. Although Goffman's analysis of the interaction order did not need a theory of the self, his work actually contains two quite different theories of the self: one linked to role analysis, one to his analysis of mental illness. I argue for the latter at the expense of the former. I conclude that Goffman both initiated substantive work about the interaction order and contributed to a synthesis of a theory of the interaction order and a theory of the self.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2000.23.3.283
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2001.24.issue-3
Date: 08 01, 2001
Author(s): Järvinen Margaretha
Abstract: This article combines a narrative approach on life histories, inspired by Paul Ricoeur, with the symbolic interactionist approaches of George Herbert Mead and Erving Goffman. It focuses on "negotiations" in qualitative interviews with alcoholics, that is, narrative sequences in which the interviewee's line comes into conflict with the line of the interviewer. From a larger study of drinking careers among alcoholics in Copenhagen, two interviews are singled out for a more detailed analysis. The two interviewees did not live up to the (implicit) expectations of the study: the presumptions (a) that persons contacted at institutions for heavily addicted alcoholics do indeed identify themselves as alcoholics and (b) that alcoholics are interested in structuring their life histories according to the development of their drinking problems. By struggling to defend an alternative identity for themselves than the one the interviewer had in readiness for them, the interviewees laid bare the (problematic) therapeutic framework of the study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2001.24.3.263
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2003.26.issue-1
Date: 02 01, 2003
Author(s): Gusfield Joseph R.
Abstract: In this cranky and arrogant chapter I consider several aspects of my use of symbolic interactionist perspectives on my research and thinking. The following are the elements of the chapter: (1) the historical context of my initial encounter with symbolic interactionism (SI); (2) my interpretation of key ideas of SI; (3) its relation to specific research of mine; (4) the relation of other perspectives to my research; and (5) some critiques of SI. I conclude with a truncated discussion of my dissatisfaction with the overtheorizing and overscientizing of sociology. Seeking balance, I end with predictions of a grand and glorious future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2003.26.1.119
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2006.29.issue-1
Date: 02 2006
Author(s): Bakker T. R. A. (Theo)
Abstract: Drawing on observation and reflexive introspection, this article analyzes the practice of club DJing and reggae DJing in an attempt to shed light on the semiotic dynamics of music-making. To understand the historical, semiotic, and interactionist significance of the musical beat in the social world of club reggae DJing, empirical and analytical attention is paid to changes in technology, in aesthetic conventions, and in the meanings of subcultural practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2006.29.1.71
Journal Title: Symbolic Interaction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: si.2011.34.issue-1
Date: 02 2011
Author(s): Bernasconi Oriana
Abstract: Sociology and neighboring disciplines have produced different analytic tools to examine the dialogical relationship between individuals and society ("narrative work," "identity work," "moral career," "moral breakdown"). However, the question of how individuals negotiate the interpretation of personal experience over their lifetimes in a changing cultural context remains unexplored. This article introduces narrative elasticity as a feature of narrative work and as a time-sensitive analytic tool for conducting inquiries into processes of temporal retraction and expansion of what storytellers conceive as the normal order of significance. The application of this tool to the analysis of mature and elderly Chileans' life stories shows how cultural change occurs at the individual level, considers factors that motivate and inhibit processes of reinterpretation of personal experience, and identifies different levels at which it operates.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/si.2011.34.1.20
Journal Title: Social Problems
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: sp.2011.58.issue-2
Date: 5 2011
Author(s): Del Rosso Jared
Abstract: The rhetorical techniques by which governments deny, justify, and qualify alleged instances of torture have been well documented. Sociologists, however, have neglected the social contexts in which officials confront allegations of torture, as well as officials' use of evidence to strengthen their own or weaken competing claims about torture. Relying on findings from a qualitative content analysis of seven Senate Armed Services Committee hearings held in 2004 on “detainee abuse” at Abu Ghraib prison, this article examines the processes by which hearing participants portrayed the violence there as an isolated incident. Building on James A. Holstein and Jaber F. Gubrium's (2003) “constructionist analytics,” I examine the textual mediation of claims-making in the hearings, focusing on the interplay between textual realities of detainee abuse and the interpretive uses to which hearing participants put these realities. I show that developments in the textual environment of the hearings, particularly the development of a textually mediated vantage on events that “really occurred” throughout Afghanistan and Iraq, provided hearing participants with rich interpretive materials to downplay and rationalize instances of abuse that occurred in places other than Abu Ghraib prison. These findings suggest that official denial is sustained by diverse claims-making activities, including the production of a textual reality of human rights violations. The findings also extend the purview of social problems theory to account for the role of texts in the construction of social problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.1525/sp.2011.58.2.165
Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i243092
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Morris Robert J.
Abstract: Herbert Morris, "Shared Guilt," in
Morris, On Guilt and Innocence: Essays in Legal
Philosophy and Moral Psychology (Berkeley:
University of California Press, 1976), pp. 111-38
Morris
Shared Guilt
111
On Guilt and Innocence: Essays in Legal Philosophy and Moral Psychology
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1045998
Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i243245
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Zeichner Pádraig
Abstract: The numerous changes and improvements which have been wrought in teacher education courses in the last two decades have not, apparently, satisfied the critics. Ironically, the reverse seems to have occurred, as recent events on both sides of the Atlantic testify. This essay argues that the developments of the last two decades in educational research and teacher education, which have yielded a wealth of new ideas and procedures, have also yielded a confusing proliferation of educational ideologies. In short, it suggests that the ascendancy of a diffuse, unselfcritical, and often combative discourse within educational studies has effectively eclipsed the more important question which must first be tackled if educational studies are to have a coherent, robust focus. This question, which is pursued in the second section of the paper, asks: is the educational enterprise, properly conceived, a distinctive, autonomous or sui generis enterprise with purposes of its own which are universal, or is it essentially a subservient enterprise, a vehicle for one or other currently prevailing ideology (cultural, technological, political, religious, etc.)? In exploring this question the essay puts to work some enduring insights from contemporary European philosophy, arguing that education as a 'practical hermeneutic discipline' holds a singular promise. Some important consequences of this promise for educational studies and teacher education are then considered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1050455
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243306
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Burt Emily Fowler
Abstract: Cover, Obligation, supra note 200, at 74.
74
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051152
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243301
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Auerbach Harry P.
Abstract: E. AUERBACH, MIMESIS: THE REPRESENTATION OF REALITY IN WESTERN LITERA-
TURE 15 (1953).
Auerbach
15
Mimesis: The Representation of Reality in Western Literature
1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051217
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243325
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lonergan Patrick McKinley
Abstract: Bernard Lonergan, Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third
Collection 13, 21 (F. Crowe ed., Paulist Press 1985)
Lonergan
21
13
Method: Trend and Variations, in A Third Collection
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051496
Journal Title: Journal of Law and Religion
Publisher: Hamline University School of Law
Issue: i243320
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Gudorf Lisa Sowle
Abstract: Christine Gudorf, Life Without Anchors: Sex, Exchange, and Human Rights
in a Postmodern World 26 J Rel Ethics 300 (1998).
Gudorf
300
26
J Rel Ethics
1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1051776
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243702
Date: 5 1, 1979
Author(s): Gill Richard C.
Abstract: Andrew Rippin, chap. 8, in
Martin, ed. (n. 26 above)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062330
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243696
Date: 11 1, 1976
Author(s): Derrida Charles H.
Abstract: pt. 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062335
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243719
Date: 8 1, 1982
Author(s): Fenn Lawrence E.
Abstract: Richard Fenn, Liturgies and Trials (New York,
1982)
Fenn
Liturgies and Trials
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062385
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243712
Date: 11 1, 1967
Author(s): DeVries Peter
Abstract: SMD, p. 11.
11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062479
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243717
Date: 2 1, 1977
Author(s): Lévi-Strauss Hans H.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 117.
117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062514
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243723
Date: 8 1, 1998
Author(s): Yün-wen Judith A.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 319.
319
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062533
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243728
Date: 11 1, 1961
Author(s): Brown Ariel
Abstract: MS 7.23, 8.318
23
7
MS
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062545
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243710
Date: 5 1, 1963
Author(s): Durkheim Whalen
Abstract: Emile Durkheim and Marcel Mauss, Primitive Classifi-
cations [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1963]
Durkheim
Primitive Classifications
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062644
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243742
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Barrier Verne A.
Abstract: "Of Singh Sabhas, Siri Singh Sahibs, and Sikh Scholars,"
in The Sikh Diaspora, ed. N. Gerald Barrier and Verne A. Dusenbery (Columbia, Mo.:
South Asia Publications, 1989), pp. 90-119, esp. pp. 105-11
Barrier
Of Singh Sabhas, Siri Singh Sahibs, and Sikh Scholars
90
The Sikh Diaspora
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062801
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243741
Date: 2 1, 1963
Author(s): Barnes Steven
Abstract: White, chap. 7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062862
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i243741
Date: 2 1, 1972
Author(s): DeBernardi Jean
Abstract: Ibid., p. 13.
13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1062863
Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246901
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Trubeck William W.
Abstract: Trubeck, Where the Action Is: Critical
Legal Studies and Empiricism, 36Stan. L. Rev.575, 580 et passim (1984)
Trubeck
575
36
Stan. L. Rev.
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122603
Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246890
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Fiss Cass R.
Abstract: J. Mashaw, Due Process in the Administrative State (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122721
Journal Title: Columbia Law Review
Publisher: Columbia University School of Law
Issue: i246912
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brest William N.
Abstract: J. Ely, Democracy and Distrust: A Theory ofJudicial Review 135-70
(1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1122910
Journal Title: Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i249351
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Strayer James E.
Abstract: The cross-cultural program of research presented here is about matters of temporal persistence-personal persistence and cultural persistence-and about solution strategies for solving the paradox of "sameness-in-change." The crux of this paradox resides in the fact that, on threat of otherwise ceasing to be recognizable as a self, all of us must satisfy at least two constitutive conditions. The first of these is that selves are obliged to keep moving or die, and, so, must continually change. The second is that selves must also somehow remain the same, lest all notions of moral responsibility and any commitment to an as yet unrealized future become nonsensical. Although long understood as a problem demanding the attention of philosophers, we argue that this same paradox arises in the ordinary course of identity development and dictates the different developmental routes taken by culturally mainstream and Aboriginal youth in coming to the identity-preserving conclusion that they and others are somehow continuous through time. Findings from a set of five studies are presented. The first and second studies document the development and refinement of a method for parsing and coding what young people say on the topic of personal persistence or self-continuity. Both studies demonstrate that it is not only possible to seriously engage children as young as age 9 or 10 years in detailed and codable discussions about personal persistence, but that their reasoning concerning such matters typically proceeds in an orderly and increasingly sophisticated manner over the course of their early identity development. Our third study underscores the high personal costs of failing to sustain a workable sense of personal persistence by showing that failures to warrant self-continuity are strongly associated with increased suicide risk in adolescence. Study four documents this same relation between continuity and suicide, this time at the macrolevel of whole cultures, and shows that efforts by Aboriginal groups to preserve and promote their culture are associated with dramatic reductions in rates of youth suicide. In the final study we show that different default strategies for resolving the paradox of personal persistence and change-Narrative and Essentialist strategies-distinctly characterize Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal youth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1166217
Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i249760
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Young Aaron
Abstract: Postmodern theory is often seen as a realm either of totally free play--where anything goes and there are no rules at all--or of despair where all visions of equality and democracy are equated with totalitarianism. Coherent ways of talking about "actors" or "responsibility" can appear to be entirely repudiated. Further perceived as elitist, obscure, convoluted, and entirely removed from any kind of practical reality, postmodernism is often viewed as having nothing relevant to say to teachers or those interested in concretely improving education. This paper attempts to show that these visions are not entirely fair to the ways many "postmodern" theorists strive to explore carefully the myriad tensions invariably involved in politics and pedagogy or to the (perhaps surprising) egalitarian commitments that generally undergird their projects. Taking advantage of the fluid and ultimately undefinable character of the idea of the "postmodern," this paper draws from an eclectic group of thinkers, teasing out a range of different perspectives that might inform, complicate, and contest efforts to "teach freedom."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1170662
Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250180
Date: 7 1, 1986
Author(s): Yonemura D. Jean
Abstract: Although narrative inquiry has a long intellectual history both in and out of education, it is increasingly used in studies of educational experience. One theory in educational research holds that humans are storytelling organisms who, individually and socially, lead storied lives. Thus, the study of narrative is the study of the ways humans experience the world. This general concept is refined into the view that education and educational research is the construction and reconstruction of personal and social stories; learners, teachers, and researchers are storytellers and characters in their own and other's stories. In this paper we briefly survey forms of narrative inquiry in educational studies and outline certain criteria, methods, and writing forms, which we describe in terms of beginning the story, living the story, and selecting stories to construct and reconstruct narrative plots. Certain risks, dangers, and abuses possible in narrative studies are discussed. We conclude by describing a two-part research agenda for curriculum and teacher studies flowing from stories of experience and narrative inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176100
Journal Title: Educational Researcher
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i250213
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Willinsky Pamela A.
Abstract: Reliability has traditionally been taken for granted as a necessary but insufficient condition for validity in assessment use. My purpose in this article is to illuminate and challenge this presumption by exploring a dialectic between psychometric and hermeneutic approaches to drawing and warranting interpretations of human products or performances. Reliability, as it is typically defined and operationalized in the measurement literature (e.g., American Educational Research Association [AERA], American Psychological Association, & National Council on Measurement in Education, 1985; Feldt & Brennan, 1989), privileges standardized forms of assessment. By considering hermeneutic alternatives for serving the important epistemological and ethical purposes that reliability serves, we expand the range of viable high-stakes assessment practices to include those that honor the purposes that students bring to their work and the contextualized judgments of teachers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1176218
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: John Wiley & Sons
Issue: i250433
Date: 12 1, 1962
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Mark
Abstract: The study of teachers' personal practical knowledge is an emerging orientation that focuses on the way teachers' understanding of their world affects the way they structure classroom experience and interact with students, parents, colleagues, and administrators. I argue that several recent articles on this topic are developing greatly enriched models of cognition, meaning, understanding, and knowledge. These models emphasize nonpropositional, pre-reflective dimensions of meaning that arise in our spatio-temporal orientations, perceptual interactions, and bodily movements. To take these experiential dimensions seriously requires new models of cognition and thus marks out a new territory for curriculum inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179358
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: John Wiley & Sons
Issue: i250429
Date: 12 1, 1968
Author(s): Wittgenstein David
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur and Clifford Geertz have been concerned with the notion of human action as text. This text, like all texts, has manifest and hidden meanings. The hidden meanings indicate a "semantic" function of social activities, in the sense that they provide members of a society with readings of their experience, by telling them about themselves, their values, beliefs, and cultures. Ricoeur's and Geertz's ideas are used to examine the notion of "education as text". Because Ricoeur and Geertz stress hidden meaning, their ideas lead us to an analysis of the "hidden curriculum". The hidden curriculum is a reading of an educational text, normally performed by students. However, as Ricoeur argues, texts can be read by anyone. The question then arises: which sort of hidden curriculum is read not only by the students, but by all members of society? What sort of reading of society's experience is provided when education is a text read by all? I propose the hypothesis that education then becomes a text about society's myths and sacred beliefs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179387
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250458
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Yehoshua Dani
Abstract: The introduction of entrepreneurial education (EE) in the Israeli education system is discussed in this article as an example of the introduction of new curriculum. We argue that this introduction should be construed as a consequence of major ideological changes in Israel and its education system, a change from collectivist to individualistic values. We open with an analysis of a Ministry of Education publication that introduces the EE program and find that it is loaded with references to Zionist myths. We suggest that relying on references to these myths in promoting EE reflects a need to disguise the discontinuity between the social values behind the new curriculum and the traditional collectivist values of pioneering Zionism. We note that the Israeli programs exercise EE in groups, whereby the responsibility for the new ventures is shared by the group members. We suggest that adopting the group method indicates a compromise between a completely individualistic and competitive approach to entrepreneurship and a collectivist approach to coping with new tasks-which is more in line with traditional Zionist values. We argue that the change of atmosphere from collectivism to individualism is a result of demographic and economic processes that have occurred since the establishment of the Israeli state, and that these processes may be exposed through observing the Israeli youth movements and the public discourse. We believe that the gradual shift from collectivism to individualism is a central factor in explaining the timing of EE's introduction in Israel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179899
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250460
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Wilson Sigrun
Abstract: Narrative structures are readily available in our culture and people automatically draw on them in most meaning-making activities. The research interview is one of many such activities. Narrative structures influence how informants remember their experience and subsequently tell researchers about it in an interview. Researchers also draw upon narrative structures because they hear and understand in narratives. Informal or implicit interpretation as opposed to explicit interpretation are discussed. The "iceberg" metaphor is used to describe the two kinds of interpretation. The tip of the iceberg is explicit interpretation, which is what researchers write in their research reports. The biggest part, however, is informal interpretation. It is out of sight and usually unexamined because it is built into the strategies researchers employ to make sense of data.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1179962
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250443
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): Whorf Carola
Abstract: An assumed link between language and experience prompted the narrative collection and mutual interpretation of data between me and an immigrant from Iran whom I taught ESL. An underlying theme of the study was the quest for a helpful image of language. Realizing that dictionary meanings were inadequate in the meaning-making process, we concentrated on illustrative examples for the meaning of words. We exploited mininarratives implicit in such examples-incipient stories based on the speaker's past, present, and imaginatively projected experiences. As we expanded these "experiential narratives," the student's personal practical knowledge emerged and helped clarify troublesome words and sentences. Viewing language as experiential narrative demonstrated the importance of the context of acquisition. It increased opportunities for the negotiation of meaning and highlighted the notion of agency in the constitution of meanings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180031
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i250466
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): White Marcy Singer
Abstract: This article examines challenges to discourses of curriculum research and practice by the growing fascination with alternative forms of representation. The author takes as a starting point a cluster of exchanges with students that were situated in a study of a classroom in which music and image joined word and number as essential sources for learning about a context irreducibly distant from students' own: the past. In the study, what seemed to make painting, photography, film, and poetry potent sources of understanding was their capacity to bridge the gap between a remote, textbook past, and the sensory world of the students' present; these forms expressed to students not only the outline of events, but also what the events signified and felt like. Yet, in juxtaposing students' comments against discourses of historiography, philosophical aesthetics, and history teaching and learning, one soon recognizes that the very ability of the arts to communicate a sense of immediacy and human intention is what makes them problematic as sources of historical insight: in pushing out the boundaries of "acceptable" forms beyond discursive text, one also pushes up against assumptions about the nature and purposes of knowledge and inquiry. While the starting point of this article is historical inquiry, the author argues that the difficulties of representing experiences of persons in contexts removed in time or space, and of making sense of others' representations, are relevant to other forms of inquiry; the challenge of the arts to historical inquiry is paralleled in other fields, and no less in educational research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180164
Journal Title: Winterthur Portfolio
Publisher: University Press of Virginia
Issue: i250484
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Mead D. H.
Abstract: Sid-
ney E. Mead, The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of
Christianity in America (New York: Harper & Row, 1963),
pp. 90-102
Mead
go
The Lively Experiment: The Shaping of Christianity in America
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1180550
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251513
Date: 7 1, 1964
Author(s): Fuchs Norman
Abstract: "it is something which cannot be exhausted in any one event
but which every man experiences in his own time" (pp. 3-14, esp. 13)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201465
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251515
Date: 1 1, 1938
Author(s): Hopper Ted L.
Abstract: "Denis Devlin," Transition 27 (April-May 1938): 289.
April-May
289
27
Transition
1938
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1201506
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251516
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Gerhart Mary
Abstract: The Conflict of Interpretations, p. 389
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202088
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251505
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Crossan John Dominic
Abstract: Luke 15
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202136
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251552
Date: 4 1, 1977
Author(s): Washbourn Peter
Abstract: Penelope Wash-
bourn, Becoming Woman (New York: Harper & Row, 1977)
Washbourn
Becoming Woman
1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202206
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251555
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Crossan Gary
Abstract: n. 27 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202583
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251550
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Duling Erich
Abstract: Perrin, Rediscovering, p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202778
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251538
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Ricoeur Walter James
Abstract: Bourgeois, pp. 75-79, 99-102
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1202836
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251554
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Fried Lynn M.
Abstract: Brooks, pp. 17, 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203065
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251543
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Nietzsche John D.
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, Beyond Good and Evil, in Basic Writings of Nietzsche, trans. and ed. Walter
Kaufmann (New York: Modern Library, Inc., 1966), p. 327.
Nietzsche
327
Beyond Good and Evil, in Basic Writings of Nietzsche
1966
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203118
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251561
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): PutnamAbstract: Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History (New
York: Cambridge University Press, 1981), pp. 123-24.
Putnam
123
Hilary Putnam so interprets an argument of Wittgenstein's in Reason, Truth and History
1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203420
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251571
Date: 4 1, 1954
Author(s): Murray Gregory D.
Abstract: Murray, Early Greece. p. 49.
Murray
49
Early Greece
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1203885
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251578
Date: 1 1, 1868
Author(s): Newman Edward T.
Abstract: John Henry
Cardinal Newman, Fifteen Sermons Preached before the University of Oxford [London: Longmans,
Green, & Co., 1868-81], pp. 232-34
Newman
232
Fifteen Sermons Preached before the University of Oxford
1868
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204101
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251594
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): HoughAbstract: n. 42 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204287
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251574
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Fierro J. A.
Abstract: Ibid., p. 292.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1204816
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251568
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Tracy Charles W.
Abstract: David Tracy, "Practical Theology in the Sit-
uation of Global Pluralism," in Formation and Reflection, ed. Lewis S. Mudge and James N. Poling
[Philadelphia: Fortress, 1987], p. 140
Tracy
Practical Theology in the Situation of Global Pluralism
140
Formation and Reflection
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205007
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251587
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Hick James E.
Abstract: John Hick's most recent and brilliant effort at explicating a transcendent Real is found
esp. in pt. 1 of An Interpretation of Religion: Human Response to the Transcendent (New York:
Macmillan, 1989).
Hick
An Interpretation of Religion: Human Response to the Transcendent
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205277
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251612
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Reno Charles T.
Abstract: R. R. Reno, The Ordinary Transformed: Karl Rahner and the
Christian Vision of Transcendence (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1995)
Reno
The Ordinary Transformed: Karl Rahner and the Christian Vision of Transcendence
1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1205997
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251609
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Tracy M. A.
Abstract: Tracy, BRO (n. 40 above), p. xiii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206115
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251616
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Iser M. B.
Abstract: Wolfgang Iser, "The Pattern of Negativity in Beckett's Prose," in Prospecting: From Reader
Response to Literary Anthropology (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1989), pp. 140-
52
Iser
The Pattern of Negativity in Beckett's Prose
140
Prospecting: From Reader Response to Literary Anthropology
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206401
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251604
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): McCollough William A.
Abstract: Thomas
E. McCollough, The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question (Chatham,
N.J.: Chatham House, 1991
McCollough
The Moral Imagination and Public Life: Raising the Ethical Question
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206461
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251605
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Ornstein William B.
Abstract: The Enigma of the Oceanic Feeling: Revisioning the Psychoanalytic Theory of Mysti-
cism (New York: Oxford University Press, in press)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206572
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i251601
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Ricoeur Kyle A.
Abstract: pp. 347-57
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1206746
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Zakin Jonathan
Abstract: Buell's view in The Environmental Imagination can serve to epitomize the prevailing
consensus: "Thoreau is often thought of as Emerson's earthy opposite. But it would be
truer to imagine him as moving gradually, partially, and self-conflictedly beyond the pro-
gram Emerson outlined in Nature, which sacralized nature as humankind's mystic coun-
terpart .... Thoreau became increasingly interested in defining nature's structure, both
spiritual and material, for its own sake, as against how nature might subserve humanity,
which was Emerson's primary consideration" (117)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208760
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251779
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Williams Michael
Abstract: Caroline Brothers's clear discussion of the photo-
graph as a "constant dialogue between image and society" (23)
23
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208761
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251777
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Wirth-Nesher Timothy L.
Abstract: Shostak is right to say that this "association suggests that Smilesburger is connected to the
consummate Old-World Jewish storyteller, in a sense one of Roth's progenitors" (749n17)
749n17
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208795
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251760
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Yerushalmi Philip
Abstract: Yerushalmi
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208828
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251770
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): White A. K.
Abstract: Ramanujan describes his father's appearance and thinking in "Is There an Indian
Way of Thinking?" (42).
42
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208920
Journal Title: Contemporary Literature
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i251778
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Yeats Devin
Abstract: Peter Middleton has written regarding Blake,
"The recurrence of names is not a guarantee of an existing entity, successfully named and
located, able to unify the appearances of its names in the text. Instead this recurrence
marks redefinition, re-examination, as of the terms used in a long, complex process of rea-
soning. ... These characters are not, we might say, quite in the same play or on the same
stage or even quite all there" (41)
41
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1208965
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i252086
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Rich Stephen
Abstract: Linda Marie Brooks, "Alternative Identities: Stating the Problem,"
and David Roberts, "Suffocation and Vocation: History, Anti-History and the Self," in
Alternative Identities: The Self in Literature, History, and Theory, ed. Linda Marie Brooks
(New York: Garland, 1995), pp. 3-35 and 109-38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1215581
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i252087
Date: 11 1, 2000
Author(s): Foucault Marco
Abstract: De Man (see n. 3 above), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1215731
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252683
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Ball Lewis A.
Abstract: 15N.Y. JURIS. REV. DOM. REL. §§ 37-39 (1972).
15
N.Y. JURIS. REV. DOM. REL.
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228686
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): Fisch Thomas C.
Abstract: notes 335-339 supra
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228740
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Epstein Michael S.
Abstract: LAw's EMPIRE, supra note 66, at 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228741
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252711
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Zlotchew Susan
Abstract: POSTSCRIPT, supra note 19, at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228742
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252697
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bell Charles R.
Abstract: Bell, The Suipr-eme Court1, 1984 Termii-Forewt'ord:. The Civil Rights Chro?icles, 99
HARV. L. REV.4, 56-68 (1985)
Bell
4
99
HARV. L. REV.
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228797
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i252715
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Bernstein Philip P.
Abstract: Richard J. Bernstein, From Hermeneutics to Praxis, in HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS
273, 287-90 (R. Hollinger ed. 1985)
Bernstein
From Hermeneutics to Praxis
273
HERMENEUTICS AND PRAXIS
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1228963
Journal Title: World Archaeology
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i207277
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Hodder Ian
Abstract: Archaeological periodization constructs narratives with beginnings, middles and ends. But the material culture on which such narratives are built is also involved in narratives according to which past agents lived their lives. According to Ricoeur, such lived narratives are also related to agents' practical experience of time. As archaeologists we have to 'read' past narratives through the rhetoric by which they were expressed. While Hayden White's scheme for temporal cycles of rhetoric is rejected, the sequence of material culture at Sitagroi is examined in order to explore the relationships between the plots written by archacologists and those lived by past agents at the site. Past and present concepts of time are embedded in different narratives and expressed through different rhetorics, but some interaction between the two is possible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/124819
Journal Title: Michigan Law Review
Publisher: University of Michigan Law School
Issue: i255068
Date: 8 1, 1987
Author(s): Cass Edward L.
Abstract: Farber & Frickey, Practical Reason, supra note 122, at 1643-
47
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1289072
Journal Title: Michigan Law Review
Publisher: University of Michigan Law School
Issue: i255076
Date: 8 1, 1984
Author(s): Kennedy Steven L.
Abstract: Goodman, Metaphor as Moonlighting, in ON METAPHOR, supra note 15, at 180.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1289304
Journal Title: Dance Research: The Journal of the Society for Dance Research
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i255222
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Tomko Lynn Matluck
Abstract: History, like a vast river, propels logs, vegetation, rafts, and debris; it is full of live and dead things, some destined for resurrection; it mingles many waters and holds in solution invisible substances stolen from distant soils. Anything may become part of it; that is why it can be an image of the continuity of mankind. And it is also why some of its freight turns up again in the social sciences: they were constructed out of the contents of history in the same way as houses in medieval Rome were made out of stones taken from the Coliseum. But the special sciences based on sorted facts cannot be mistaken for rivers flowing in time and full of persons and events. They are systems fashioned with concepts, numbers, and abstract relations. For history, the reward of eluding method is to escape abstraction. (Barzun 1974, 95)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1290868
Journal Title: The Bulletin of the Midwest Modern Language Association
Publisher: Midwest Modern Language Association
Issue: i256298
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Petofi J. Dudley
Abstract: Janos Petofi, "The Syntactico-Semantic Organization of Text Structures," Poetics, 3
(1971) 56-99.
Petofi
The Syntactico-Semantic Organization of Text Structures
56
3
Poetics
1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1314848
Journal Title: The Journal of the Midwest Modern Language Association
Publisher: Midwest Modern Language Association
Issue: i256333
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Scott H. Aram
Abstract: Literary Criticism and the Southern Question": 99
99
Literary Criticism and the Southern Question
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1315021
Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256678
Date: 1 1, 1950
Author(s): Tucker Rachel
Abstract: Ricoeur's cosmic and oneiric elements by relating funda-
mental components in the structure of literature to symbolic action in ritual and wish fulfillment in dream
(1957, p. 106)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1319677
Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256677
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Schwaller De Lubicz William
Abstract: This paper follows two purposes: the first to unpack some of the artistic cargo of symbols as distinct from the more conventional aspects of them (e. g., their ability to refer to other things or events, and their ability to communicate ideas), and the second to show, by means of contrasts, the actual workings of Interpretation Theory as it could be applied to the analysis of art-making and art-viewing. For the first purpose, the author draws material from philosophy, dramatic writings, linguistic theory, and statements of artists in an analytic search for the often intractable character of the artistic image. For the second purpose, the author demonstrates, through the use of logic and the poetic metaphor, how a particular form of hermeneutic inquiry can be applied to assist an understanding of the assumptions upon which research is often built.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1319690
Journal Title: Studies in Art Education
Publisher: National Art Education Association
Issue: i256762
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Weber Karen
Abstract: Keifer-Boyd (1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1321020
Journal Title: Harvard Law Review
Publisher: Harvard Law Review Association
Issue: i257579
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Alters William W.
Abstract: supra pp. 1718-19, 1739.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1341435
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257709
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): Frye Paul
Abstract: Northrop Frye, The
Critical Path (Bloomington, Ind., 1972), esp. pp. 106-8 and 155-56
Frye
106
The Critical Path
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342895
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257716
Date: 10 1, 1962
Author(s): Joos Ted
Abstract: Martin
Joos' The Five Clocks (Indiana University Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and
Linguistics, publication no. 22 [Bloomington, Ind., 1962])
Joos
The Five Clocks
1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342974
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257716
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Sahlins Wayne C.
Abstract: Marshall Sahlins, Culture and Practical Reason (Chicago, 1976).
Sahlins
Culture and Practical Reason
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1342977
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257722
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): Bachelard W. J. T.
Abstract: Gaston Bachelard, The Poetics of Space, trans. Maria Jolas (1958; Boston, 1969), p.
xv.
Bachelard
xv
The Poetics of Space, trans. Maria Jolas
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343108
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257731
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Richards John Paul
Abstract: "An Interview," Complementarities, pp. 268-69.
An Interview
268
Complementarities
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343195
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257730
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Riffaterre James K.
Abstract: Riffaterre, The Semiotics of Poetry, p. 42.
Riffaterre
42
The Semiotics of Poetry
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343260
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257744
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Cohen Israel
Abstract: The Adventures of Don Quixote, trans. J. M. Cohen
(Harmondsworth, 1970), p. 338
Cohen
338
The Adventures of Don Quixote
1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343464
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257749
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Michels Sander L.
Abstract: New York Times, 19 May 1985, p. 20E.
19 May
20
New York Times
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343494
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257760
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Elias Jay
Abstract: Norbert Elias, The Civilizing Process, trans. Edmund Jephcott, 3 vols. (New
York, 1978-82).
Elias
The Civilizing Process
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343625
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257760
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Cohen Richard
Abstract: Languages of Art, pp. 225-41, esp. p. 234
225
Languages of Art
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343627
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257768
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Garfinkel Jerome
Abstract: Harold Garfinkel, Studies in Ethnomethodology (Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1967)
Garfinkel
Studies in Ethnomethodology
1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343711
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257772
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Rorty Walter Benn
Abstract: p. 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343760
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257763
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Conrad Johannes
Abstract: Joseph Conrad, "Karain: A Memory," Selected Tales from Conrad, ed. Nigel
Stewart (London, 1977), pp. 65-66.
Conrad
Karain: A Memory
65
Selected Tales from Conrad
1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343766
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257778
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): Meyerson Jerome
Abstract: Harold Meyerson, "Falling Down: L. A., City without Politics," The New Republic,
3 May 1993, p. 14
Meyerson
3 May
14
The New Republic
1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1343865
Journal Title: Critical Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i257809
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Veysey John
Abstract: Laurence Veysey, "The Plural Organized World of the Humani-
ties," in The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America, ed. Alexandra Oleson and John
Voss [Baltimore, Md., 1979], p. 57
Veysey
The Plural Organized World of the Humanities
57
The Organization of Knowledge in Modern America
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344279
Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257907
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Fowles Steven
Abstract: John Fowles, The French Lieutenant's Woman (New York: New American Library, 1970), p. 47
Fowles
47
The French Lieutenant's Woman
1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1344821
Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257920
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Suleiman Daniel R.
Abstract: "'I Was The
World in Which I Walked': The Transformation of the British Novel," The University of Toronto Quarterly 51:3 (Spring 1982),
279-97
3
279
51
The University of Toronto Quarterly
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1345485
Journal Title: NOVEL: A Forum on Fiction
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i257933
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Zwerdling Karen
Abstract: A Critical Reading 173
173
A Critical Reading
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1345605
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i258247
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): York ﻭﻟﻴﻢ
Abstract: This article discusses how T. S. Eliot's long poem, Four Quartets, employs the thematics of time, self, and history in an autobiographical work of literature. The article approaches autobiography primarily as an intellectual concern, rather than as a factual account of the author's life, in examining a work that is difficult to subsume under available interpretive paradigms. The first part of the article emphasizes how Augustine's Confessions, when considered as a meditation on time and religious experience, illuminates the hermeneutics of Four Quartets. The second and central part of the article provides close readings of key passages in this poem, which inscribes Greek cosmology and medieval epic in a narrative of literary development and spiritual change. The third and concluding part of the article explores how the author's later poetry and criticism highlight major tendencies in twentieth-century literature and anticipate the postmodern interpretation of history. / تعالج هذه المقالة قصيدة ﺇﻟﻴﻮﺕ الطويلة أربع رباعيات من منطلق جديد وبالرجوع إلى تيمات الزمن والذات والتاريخ في السيرة الذاتية الأدبية٠ وتتعامل المقالة مع السيرة الذاتية لا باعتبارها سجلاﹰ لما جرى في حياة صاحبها من أحداث، بل ابعتبارها سجلاﹰ مضمراﹰ للتطور الذهني لكاتبها٠ يقوم الجزء الأول من المقالة بتوظيف البعد ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻣﻠﻲ في الزمن وفي التجربة الدينية كما ورد عند القديس أوغسطين في سيرته الذاتية الاعترافات، لإضاءة المدار التأويلي لقصيدة أربع رباعيات٠ ويقوم الجزء الثاني بتحليل مقاطع رئيسية في القصيدة، مبرزاﹰ ما تتضمنه وما تلوّح به من معتقدات كونية إغريقية وملاحم وسيطية٠ أما الجزء الثالث والأخير فيتوصل إلى أن ذهنية إليوت، بالإضافة إلى كونها تعكس التوجه العام للأدب في القرن العشرين، تمهد للتفسير ما بعد الحداثي للتاريخ٠
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1350054
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258502
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Foucault Michael J.
Abstract: Michel Foucault, Discipline and Punish: The Birth ofthe Prison, trans. Alan Sheridan
(New York: Pantheon, 1977).
Foucault
Discipline and Punish: The Birth ofthe Prison
1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354206
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258508
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rose Vincent P.
Abstract: Gillian Rose, Dialectic of Nihilism (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1984), 207
Rose
207
Dialectic of Nihilism
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354216
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Society for Cultural Critique
Issue: i258501
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Johnson William V.
Abstract: "The End of Education:'The Harvard Core Curriculum Report'
and the Pedagogy of Reformation," boundary 2, Vol. X, 2 (Winter 1982), 1-33
2
1
X
boundary 2
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1354280
Journal Title: Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research
Publisher: American Schools of Oriental Research
Issue: i258778
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Zohary Lawrence E.
Abstract: Longterm trends are examined for the population mass that occupied the central highlands of Palestine during the Iron Age. After 1200 B. C. the landscape of this sparsely populated "frontier" changed as newcomers established hilltop villages, cultivated intermontane valleys, and terraced the slopes. Spatial patterning within villages and certain toponyms were influenced by patrilineal kinship. Heads of household and their lineage mates exercised rights over inheritance and succession in landholding. Inequalities developed within "tribal" Israel long before the monarchy, probably through a process of "lineage capture;" and clientship, with its dyadic relationships between superiors and inferiors, became more common. Tensions developed within Israelite society from the interactions of kinship, clientship, and kingship. As the population grew under the monarchy, the highland frontier was effectively closed, and opportunities for acquiring new land diminished. Thus, many unmarried males had to look elsewhere for patrons and positions. From the ranks of these noble "youths" came recruits for the military, the government, and the priesthood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1356862
Journal Title: Duke Law Journal
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i259836
Date: 11 1, 1992
Author(s): Collier Charles W.
Abstract: Charles W. Collier, Intellectual Authority
and Institutional Authority, 42 J. LEGAL EDUC. (forthcoming 1992)
Collier
42 J. Legal Educ.
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1372767
Journal Title: Duke Law Journal
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i259905
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Coons Morris B.
Abstract: Smith v. State, 479 S.W.2d 680, 681 (Tex.
Crim. App. 1972)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1373126
Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259940
Date: 9 1, 1966
Author(s): Wallace William C.
Abstract: 1972b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1384547
Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259974
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Wuthnow Robert
Abstract: Bainbridge and Stark's essay on "The Consciousness Reformation" illustrates conceptual and theoretical ambiguities characteristic of research in the scientific study of religion more generally. This paper traces these ambiguities to the presence of two competing, but poorly differentiated, epistemological traditions. An examination of the assumptions implicit within each of these traditions provides a basis for clarifying the distinction between religious symbolism and religious belief, the concept of meaning, the difference between consistency as an attribute of belief and coherence as an attribute of reality, and the role of interpersonal bonds in maintaining the plausibility of religious symbolism. An emerging third perspective that appears to circumvent some of the limitations of the two major epistemological traditions is also discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1385335
Journal Title: Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion
Publisher: Society for the Scientific Study of Religion
Issue: i259998
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Ricoeur Steven D.
Abstract: Methods of studying religion can be divided into those which help the investigator "understand" religion from the believer's standpoint and those which "explain" religion in the terms of the sciences. Yet despite the contemporary polemics, these methods need not be alienated from one another. Applying the hermeneutic theory of Paul Ricoeur we can see that the study of religion involves us in an act of interpretation which necessarily requires both methods of understanding and explanation. Ricoeur's theory is employed to show how these methods can be systematically used in tandem so that the most adequate interpretation of the religious world is produced.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1385914
Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Co.
Issue: i260414
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Woods Meenakshi
Abstract: An attempt is made in this paper to arrive at a typology of teachers within the specific context of two forms of discourse, ideological and educational, which constitute a particular school in India. It is suggested that the mode of recruitment, the teachers' perspectives on and adaptations to the particular ideology and the role, and their commitment to the same are significant factors contributing to the shaping of a teacher typology. In this particular context, the teacher is thus both defined by and perpetuates the two forms of discourse in the school. The data on which this paper is based was collected in 1981 through the use of questionnaires, interviews (both structured and unstructured) and observation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1392930
Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i260667
Date: 10 1, 1931
Author(s): Woolf Steph
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which women narrate a move from a 'working-class' position to a position marked (in however fragmentary and complex a way) as 'middle class'. While such a move might be seen in terms of a straightforward escape from a disadvantaged social position, I argue here that what has to be analysed is the pain and the sense of estrangement associated with this class movement. Drawing on the class narratives of a group of seven white British women, the article uses Bourdieu's concepts of symbolic capital and habitus to explore the cultural and symbolic configurations of class. These configurations may be inscribed into the self, so that the self, itself, is class marked. Since working-class selves are frequently marked in pathological terms, this raises particular difficulties for the idea of an 'escape' from such a position. Class in this sense is embedded in people's history and so cannot be so easily 'escaped'. The usual conventions of life-narratives - in which the self remains the same entity from birth to death and later events are a culmination of earlier ones - are also disrupted in this case. But if a working-class position is marked as pathological, so too is taking on the markers of middle-class existence. to do so is not only to risk 'getting it wrong', but it is also to risk the scorn attached to 'pretentiousness'. There is a particular jeopardy here for women, since it is women who have been especially associated with desires for artefacts associated with bourgeois existence. The article argues for a focus for classed desires and class envy, not in pathological terms, but in terms of a coherent response to political and social exclusions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1395585
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260804
Date: 10 1, 1963
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Hwa Yol
Abstract: Maurice Merleau-Ponty, Les Sciences de l'homme et la phenom-
tnologie (Paris: Centre de Documentation Universitaire, 1963), p. 2
Merleau-Ponty
2
Les Sciences de l'homme et la phenomtnologie
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1397539
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260915
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): VetterAbstract: Arguments by Utpaladeva and Abhinavagupta for evidence of a Self that is one and the same as the Great Lord Śiva are interpreted. The views of these authors are clarified and the contradictory relationship between the limited individual subject and the recognition of the true Self is shown. With the help of Utpaladeva's distinction between "seeing" and "noticing," a further interpretation is attempted. Some remarks are made concerning practical meditation and the theoretical presuppositions of this way of thinking in order to find starting points for a comparison with Western philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1399791
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i260927
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Zollschan David
Abstract: The use of theories of Sanskrit syntax by Utpaladeva and Abhinavagupta to explain the action of monistic Śaiva myth and ritual is examined. These thinkers develop a distinctive approach to syntax that reductionistically emphasizes the role of the true Self/Śiva as omnipotent agent, in opposition to the denigration of agency by the majority of Hindu as well as Buddhist philosophies. An analogy to the Indian discussions is seen in the typological effort of Kenneth Burke's "Grammar of Motives," and it is suggested that indigenous theories of action syntax would be a useful focus for comparative research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1400019
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261241
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Bourdet John T.
Abstract: Claude Bourdet, "Dulles contre la paix. Et Bidault?," L'Observateur,
April 30, 1953.
Bourdet
April 30
L'Observateur
1953
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1404795
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261306
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Maurice Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Semi-Sovereign People (New York, 1960)
The Semi-Sovereign People
1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406378
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261327
Date: 1 1, 1964
Author(s): McCleary Fred R.
Abstract: "The Philosopher and Sociology,"
in Signs, tran. Richard C. McCleary (Evanston, Ill., 1964), p. 109
McCleary
109
The Philosopher and Sociology
1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1406578
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261382
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Pangle Fred
Abstract: Recent literature on Heidegger concentrates heavily on his (temporary) involvement in or collusion with Nazi ideology and policies. Without belittling the gravity of the issue, this article shifts the focus somewhat by invoking a distinction which recently has emerged (or reemerged) in political thought: namely, the distinction between "politics" and "the political" or between politics viewed as partisan ideology or policy making, on the one hand, and politics seen as regime or paradigmatic framework, on the other. The main thesis of the article is that Heidegger's promising contributions to political theory are located on the level of ontology or paradigmatic framework rather than that of ideological partisanship. While not neglecting the dismal intrusions of the latter plane, the article probes Heideggerian cues for a "rethinking of the political" by placing the accent on four topical areas: first, the status of the subject or individual as political agent; second, the character of the political community, that is, of the polity or (in modern terms) the "state"; thirdly, the issue of cultural and political development or modernization; and finally, the problem of an emerging cosmopolis or world order beyond the confines of Western culture. In discussing these topics, an effort is made to disentangle Heidegger from possible misinterpretations and to indicate how, in each area, his thought pointed in the direction of an "overcoming" of Western political metaphysics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1407522
Journal Title: The Review of Politics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame
Issue: i261426
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Walzer William A.
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, "Discourse Ethics as a Response to
the Novel Challenges of Today's Reality to Coresponsibility," Journal of Religion 74
(1993): 496-513
10.2307/1204180
496
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1408857
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture, Inc.
Issue: i262141
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Tyler Daniel M.
Abstract: This paper proposes a theoretical foundation for extending our understanding of study drawings by bringing forward concepts from a number of disciplines that are concerned with the structure of knowledge. Study drawings are defined as the informal, private drawings that architectural designers use as a medium for graphic thinking in the exploratory stages of their work. Drawings from the work of Paxton through Picasso are analyzed to confirm the familiar characteristics of study drawings and to identify the properties which account for their role in the working process of design, including their use as a means of inquiry. This epistemological function is compared with certain features of written language in order to propose an internal structure for study drawings. The paper concludes that much of the origin and nature of knowledge in design can be explained in terms of the properties and processes of study drawings and that these terms should be used to evaluate proposals for new media in design.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1424832
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Association of Collegiate Schools of Architecture, Inc.
Issue: i262148
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Ito Botond
Abstract: This essay investigates the roots of a growing impass in contemporary architecture vis a vis the economic, technological, social and political developments of our advanced or late-capitalist society. It focuses upon architecture's apparently diminishing capacity to address our present human condition, yet argues that the problems responsible for the "crisis" of architectural thought and design in general have evolved as the result of historic processes, and therefore the impass can only partially be explained with the short-comings of modern architecture or the 'short sighted' attitude of the architects themselves. Nevertheless, it also argues that architecture, in spite of its now rather limited transformative capacity, should persistently attempt to reveal, rather than mask or otherwise escape, its fundamental relatedness to material processes; that is, to the modes of production and consumption on which social and political power relations are predicated. To be able to do so, and thus to foster a more liberating "form" of human environment, the profession needs first of all a strong political self consciousness, while aiming at a practice of critical inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1424982
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i262155
Date: 8 1, 1989
Author(s): Kramer Réjean
Abstract: Lloyd S. Kramer, "Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary
Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra," in Lynn Hunt, ed., The New
Cultural History (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1989), pp. 122-124
Kramer
Literature, Criticism and Historical Imagination: The Literary Challenge of Hayden White and Dominick LaCapra
122
The New Cultural History
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425141
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i262163
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Gadamer Stephen
Abstract: The title of this essay comes from contemporary hermeneutics, a branch of philosophy devoted to interpretation. It refers to the domain between a human artifact and a beholder. Brought to architecture, this worldly concept implicitly questions the conventional role of the individual amidst historical works. It also offers a common ground on which products of architectural interpretation (performances or fictions) may begin to engage our normally independent territories of history and design. This essay examines the concept of the world in front of the work and speculates on its implications for architectural education. The illustrations portray interpretive projects by the author's students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425217
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262176
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Bachelard Clive R.
Abstract: In a practice environment that unswervingly promotes the systematic tendencies of efficient architectural productivity, to the detriment of architectural creativity, it becomes increasingly important for studio pedagogy to recover and sustain an imaginative engagement with the richness and ambiguity of lived reality. Inhabiting the Chasm is a studio project that attempts to deny the urge to rationalize program and structure and any unchallenged participation in the prevailing apparatus of conventionalized graphic depiction. The project focuses on the simultaneously unfathomable yet familiar reality of two individuals in love. It encourages a perception of the architect as place maker, as interpreter of dynamic human events, and as creator of the settings for the unraveling of dramatic human action.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425285
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262169
Date: 11 1, 1985
Author(s): Ulmer David
Abstract: The study of metaphor provides valuable insights into the workings of thought and understanding. This article addresses the important question of what the study of metaphor has to say about the design process and design teaching. We include the findings of a series of studies involving architectural design students who were asked to report on their own design experience and that of colleagues in the context of specific projects. Our conclusions are that (1) there is a close relationship between design and metaphor that provides insights into effective design education; (2) metaphor operates through privilege, directing concern and the identification of difference; and (3) design involves the generation of action within a collaborative environment in which there is the free play of enabling metaphors.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425318
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262180
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Gadamer Eugenia Victoria
Abstract: This article investigates the perception of space through both visual and haptic systems of perception and examines the resultant impact on the process of spatial visualization. The development of technology from science as magic to science as information is used as a framework to (re)discover relationships between (1) the perception of space and the tools of visualization and (2) their effects on architectural education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425521
Journal Title: Journal of Architectural Education (1984-)
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i262199
Date: 5 1, 1958
Author(s): Frampton Keith L.
Abstract: Critical regionalism emerged as an architectural concept during the early 1980s. For leading theorists such as Kenneth Frampton, critical regionalism was an "architecture of resistance" seeking "to mediate the impact of universal civilization" and "to reflect and serve the limited constituencies" in which it was grounded. This paper examines critical regionalist rhetoric, particularly its emphasis on resistance, as a theoretical construct that inadvertently marginalized and conflated the diverse architectural tendencies it championed. The reception of Mexican architect Luis Barragán as a critical regionalist is highlighted to analyze some of critical regionalism's most problematic assumptions, implications, and effects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1425724
Journal Title: German Studies Review
Publisher: German Studies Association
Issue: i262423
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): Jens-Fietje Benjamin
Abstract: Hans Fallada has suffered from a poor political reputation affecting his position in the literary canon. Instead of straightening out this political and canonical maladjustment, the essay argues for Fallada's significance as a bad example for those looking for moral and political lessons in mid-century German letters. "Der Alpdruck", his 1947 novel about a Soviet-installed mayor, depicts his wrong-headedness, first, as the autobiographical protagonist fails to adopt a satisfactory affect toward postwar guilt and innocence, and second, as he eyes two would-be benefactors, fictional counterparts to Gottfried Benn and Johannes R. Becher, with a wily realism that serves as a foil to their cultural or political responsibility.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1433549
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263698
Date: 3 1, 1966
Author(s): Ferguson Christine
Abstract: Francis Ferguson, " 'Myth' and the Literary Scruple," in John B. Vickery, ed., Myth
and Literature (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1966), p. 140.
Ferguson
'Myth' and the Literary Scruple
140
Myth and Literature
1966
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1460730
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263690
Date: 3 1, 1972
Author(s): Holladay Phyllis
Abstract: William L. Holladay, "Jeremiah and Women's Liberation,"
Andover Newton Quarterly, March, 1972, pp. 213-223
Holladay
March
213
Andover Newton Quarterly
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461386
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263699
Date: 6 1, 1925
Author(s): Blackmur Giles
Abstract: Blackmur, Anni Mirabiles, 1921-1925 (Washington, D.C.: The Library of Congress,
1956), p. 54.
Blackmur
54
Anni Mirabiles
1925
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461617
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263682
Date: 3 1, 1956
Author(s): Weil Anthony C.
Abstract: Jiirgen Moltmann, "Resurrection as Hope," Harvard Theological Review, LXI
(1968), 146-47.
10.2307/1509274
146
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461678
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263686
Date: 3 1, 1964
Author(s): Christian Donald A.
Abstract: Paul Ramsey, "No Morality Without Immorality: Dostoevski and the Meaning of
Atheism," Journal of Religion, XXXVI (1956), 90-108, p. 95.
10.2307/1199955
90
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1461914
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263718
Date: 12 1, 1958
Author(s): Vergote Volney P.
Abstract: Many students of religion suggest that wholeness or the attainment of an integrated self is an especially valuable goal whose attainment marks a moment of religious insight. Theoreticians like Jung, Allport, and Maslow strongly support this belief. Freud does not. To reconcile the two camps one must either drop Freud altogether or confine his critique of religion to an attack upon neurotic religion, or more exactly, religion based upon superego functioning. One could then claim that healthy religion is a function of the ego, e.g., the ego's tendency towards integrated functioning and the attainment of 'wholeness'. I argue that this ploy, which is itself a function of an egosyntonic desire for wholeness, is altogether wrong. It misrepresents Freud's ego psychology and it therefore misrepresents his critique of the ego's role in religion as well. First, his theoretical, as opposed to his literary, critique of religion is also a critique of certain characteristics of the ego. Second, these characteristics, especially the ego-syntonic drive towards feelings of wholeness, are functions of the ego's obedience to repetition compulsion. Third, the later texts on religion cannot be understood apart from their roots in Freud's earliest theory of ego functioning, especially the physicalist program he developed in his "Project" of 1895. The ego creates and takes part in religious dramas which present an illusory world of wholeness and completion of self. But as the seat of reality testing it must pierce the veils as quickly and as repeatedly as it weaves them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462274
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263718
Date: 12 1, 1961
Author(s): Zaehner Donald A.
Abstract: The question raised in the title has been much debated by past and present interpreters of Zoroastrianism. In the first two parts of this paper we present some dualistic and monotheistic interpretations of the religion. The interpretations can be labeled as follows: 1. DUALISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks Omnipotence And Omniscience (Dhalla, Henning) 2. The View That Angra Mainyu Is Primordial But Lacks A Physical Nature (Shaked, Boyce) II. MONOTHEISTIC INTERPRETATIONS 1. The Created Spirits View (Zaehner, Fox, Gershevitch) 2. The Transformationist (Maskhiyya) View 3. The Zurvānite View 4. The View That Good And Evil Are Coeternal Only In A Logical Sense (Moulton, Bode and Nanavutty, Duchesne-Guillemin) We present each of these views and discuss it critically in light of the following criteria: (1) textual evidence; (2) the continuity of the religion throughout its history, including the present time; (3) philosophical cogency; and (4) religious satisfaction. Our conclusion is that each of the above positions, despite its elements of strength, falls seriously short of one or more of these criteria, and hence that there is need for a more adequate interpretation of Zoroastrianism than any of them can offer. Accordingly, we present another interpretation in order to provoke further discussion and, hopefully, to advance the cause of trying to gain a more precise grasp of the teachings of this remarkable religion. In brief, the interpretation we favor is that Zoroastrianism combines cosmogonic dualism and eschatological monotheism in a manner unique to itself among the major religions of the world. This combination results in a religious outlook which cannot be categorized as either straightforward dualism or straightforward monotheism, meaning that the question in the title of this paper poses a false dichotomy. The dichotomy arises, we contend, from a failure to take seriously enough the central role played by time in Zoroastrian theology. Zoroastrianism proclaims a movement through time from dualism toward monotheism, i.e., a dualism which is being made false by the dynamics of time, and a monotheism which is being made true by those same dynamics of time. The meaning of the eschaton in Zoroastrianism is thus the triumph of monotheism, the good God Ahura Mazdā having at last won his way through to complete and final ascendancy. But in the meantime there is vital truth to dualism, the neglect of which can only lead to a distortion of the religion's essential teachings. We develop this interpretation in the last part of our paper and argue for its satisfaction of the four criteria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462275
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263704
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): Ricoeur Robert
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Metaphor and the Main Problem of Hermeneutics," New Literary Histori,
6, 1 (Autumn, 1974), pp. 95-110.
Ricoeur
Autumn
95
6
New Literary Histori
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462336
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263711
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): Wilson Mark C.
Abstract: Despite the significant impact of the awareness of perspectival relativism on the religious imagination, recent philosophers and theologians have rarely subjected epistemological relativism to careful scrutiny. This paper attempts to overcome the current theological impasse by a careful exploration of the metaphysical implications of relativism. The central thesis of the essay is that truth is relative because meaning is contextual and being is relational. Contextualized meaning and relational being join to form relative truth disclosed through symbolic awareness. The roots of contemporary relativism lie deep within eighteenth and nineteenth century philosophical movements and are inseparably entangled with the psycho-social pluralization endemic to the process of modernization. The efforts of Neo-orthodoxy, polytheism, and the scientific study of religion to resolve dilemmas posed by epistemological relativism are inadequate. What has gone unnoticed is that the discovery of truth's relativity is the realization of its inherently dialectical character. This insight begins to emerge when it is recognized that meaning is contextual and context is semiophantic. Principles identified in Hegel's logic, in Merleau-Ponty's phenomenology of temporality, and in Ricoeur's and Gadamer's hermeneutics disclose that meaning assumes form through dialectical interrelationship in which co-implicates mutually constitute each other. The synchronic and diachronic dimensions of relationality reveal the inexhaustability and perpetual revisability of meaning. The problem of semantics, however, is inseparable from the question of ontology. Ontological reflection leads to the conclusion that being itself is dialectical-fundamentally social or essentially relational. Determinate identity is born of ontological intercourse with otherness. Relations are not external and accidental, but are internal and essential to being itself. Identity and difference, unity and plurality, oneness and manyness are thoroughly corelative, joined in a dialectical relation of reciprocal implication. This pluralized unity and unified plurality is the ontological matrix of truth's relativity. Symbolic awareness is the interface of contextual meaning and relational being. The density of constitutive relations and the nascence of concrete actuality engender a dissonance between manifest and latent content in the reflection of being in consciousness. The polysemy of symbols captures the polymorphism of being in a way that establishes the need for a constant process of decipherment in which we reformulate our notions in order more fully to penetrate synchronic and diachronic relations that are ontologically definitive. By maintaining the tension between the revealed and the concealed, symbolic awareness insures that knowledge always evolves through ceaseless reinterpretation. For symbolic consciousness, truth, as being itself, forever becomes. The essay concludes with the suggestion that the wedding of a relativistic epistemology and a relational ontology in a symbolics of the religious imagination reopens the possibility of constructive theological reflection in a pluralistic age.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1462753
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263714
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Rauschenbusch Walter
Abstract: Walter Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis, viewed by many as the masterpiece of the social gospel movement, has been confined to the dusty shelves of the library. Can we catch no glimpse of what astounded its massive reading public, no glimmer of Rauschenbusch's own sense of the work as a "dangerous book" written in fear and trembling? This article suggests that a generic analysis of Christianity and the Social Crisis might lead to surprising disclosures. Any generic analysis involves the discussion of a group of texts. Consequently this study proceeds via a comparison of the structure of Christianity and the Social Crisis with those of other works of a similar type which were produced between 1890 and 1915. The genre is isolated by utilizing the techniques of Tzvetan Todorov. Certain negative traits are specified which separate the genre from its neighbors. The positive leitmotif of a dual crisis-a crisis affecting society as a whole and the ramifications of that crisis within the Christian churches-is specified as the decisive trait of the genre. To deal with this leitmotif a specific structure was generated by the works under consideration. They provided-to pirate the words of Clifford Geertz in his landmark essay on modern ideologies-"maps of problematic reality" and "matrices for the creation of collective conscience." In designing their maps of problematic reality our authors worked along two separate but related vectors. The first of these vectors was constituted by a historical analysis of the origins of the present crisis, while the second consisted of a systemic analysis of the present social order. Each of these elements of the genre is examined in turn. The mapping of problematic reality by means of a historical and a structural analysis was geared towards provoking as well as defining the crisis. Crisis, once defined, demanded decision. Nevertheless the "permanent basis for action" which Rauschenbusch and others sought could not be grounded upon ideological conviction alone. It required both concrete guidelines for praxis and the creation of an institutional matrix to mobilize the moral forces of the society, to form public opinion. These works then as ideological matrices for the creation of collective conscience were also designed to precipitate the transformation of the Church into an agent of human emancipation. The art of the genre was also an act. But in an age noted for "writing-as-action" the exemplars of the genre laid a complexly interwoven, carefully stressed foundation for Christian involvement in social change. Rauschenbusch's Christianity and the Social Crisis appears at the end of this analysis as the unsurpassed formulation of this distinctive genre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463047
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263709
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Wiggins Mary
Abstract: In recent years, the need for a critique of "reader" as rigorous as that which has been developed for "text" and for "author" has become increasingly acute. Whether in the study of religion as story and biography or in interpretative reading in general, a critical notion of reader is essential if the act of reading is to be anything other than mere consumption of texts. Some new way of understanding the hermeneutical circle is required to avert the narcissism latent in the Anselmian model. The notion of "genre" as developed by four recent theorists is helpful in the task of constructing a critique of "reader." E. D. Hirsch, Hans-Georg Gadamer, Tzvetán Todorov, and Paul Ricoeur have each surpassed the idealist notion of genre as a classificatory device and developed in its place the notion of genre as a generative pinciple. Todorov, for example, illustrates how "form" is a theoretical, as distinct from a descriptive or explanatory, issue. According to both Hirsch and Todorov, somewhere between empirical details and metaphysical thematizations lie generic formulations which can assist the reader to organize his/her response to the text and to recognize the probable understanding toward which the conventions of the text are directed. In Gadamer's theory of interpretation, the notion of genre acquires historicity. After Gadamer, genres can no longer be regarded as timeless a priori categories. Rather, because they are constituted by historical reflections, their rise and decline are intrinsic to text-interpretation. Finally, in Ricoeur's theory that generic considerations are correlative principles of production and interpretation, we find a basis for understanding genre as praxis. If we understand reading to be isomorphic to authoring, it becomes clear that the reader can no longer be regarded as the self-evident recipient of text-signification. Genre, in Ricoeur's theory, transforms "speech" into a "work" and points toward a new notion of "reader" as one whose reconstruction of the text is the condition for the possibility of its being a story that "gives life." This notion of "reader" makes possible a new model of the hermeneutical circle-one which signifies the essential roles of critical thought which follows naive reading and of informed understanding which follows after thought.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463143
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263722
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Zahan William G.
Abstract: The very definition of myth is problematic today; here narrow, partial, "monomythic" definitions are rejected in favor of a complex, inclusive one, the seventeen items of which are then discussed. A mythological corpus consists of a network of myths, which are culturally-important imaginal stories conveying, by means of metaphor and symbol, graphic imagery, and emotional conviction and participation, the primal, foundational accounts of the real, experienced world, and humankind's roles and relative statuses within it. Mythologies may convey the political and moral values of a culture, and provide systems of interpreting individual experience within a universal perspective, which may include the intervention of suprahuman entities, as well as aspects of the natural and cultural orders. Myths may be enacted or reflected in rituals, ceremonies, and dramas, or provide materials for secondary elaborations. Only a polyphasic definition will provide appreciation of their manifold roles within a society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463445
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263706
Date: 12 1, 1951
Author(s): Makemson Laurence L.
Abstract: M. W. Makemson, The Book of the Jaguar Priest (New York: Henry Schuman, 1951)
Makemson
The Book of the Jaguar Priest
1951
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463490
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263719
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): Weiss Richard
Abstract: Anyone who wishes to understand the debate between Hegel and Schleiermacher is forced to confront not only the staggering complexity of their thought but also the disparate nature of the key texts which are available and the fact that many philosophers and theologians approach Hegel and Schleiermacher with misleading preconceptions. This article attempts to illuminate the conflict between the two thinkers by exploring the biographical and historical context in which it arose. The author argues that, while neither thinker depended upon the other in forming his own position, each man kept the other's position constantly in view as a foil for his own. After a consideration of some early indications of conflict, the debate between Hegel and Schleiermacher is traced through a series of events which begins with Hegel's call to Berlin. While Schleiermacher was apparently quite willing to have Hegel come to Berlin, differences in political philosophy soon led to conflict, with the student movement providing a concrete focus for their disagreement. Schleiermacher's role in excluding Hegel from the Berlin Academy of Sciences is shown to have heightened the tensions. The article concludes with an exploration of Hegel's critique of Schleiermacher's dogmatics. It is argued that the intellectual core of the conflict between the two men centers upon the problem of immediate knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463539
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263710
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Winter Charles R.
Abstract: Through the provision of a set of theses for the interpretation and evaluation of theologies of liberation, this paper attempts to mediate the existing conflict between academic theologians and theologians of liberation. It seeks to establish the legitimacy of theological discourse focused on the problem of alienation and liberation if carefully executed according to a clear set of guidelines. The paper begins with the argument that all interpretations of theologies of liberation must begin with an analysis of the theological genre within which these works fall. After insisting that theologies of liberation belong neither to the genre of systematic theology nor that of Christian social ethics, the paper develops the second thesis that theologies of liberation are best understood as members of a genre whose distinctive characteristics and functions are analogous to those intrinsic to secular ideologies. This thesis hinges upon a revisionist understanding of ideology drawn from the works of Clifford Geertz et al. and upon a careful specification of the generic similarities between the two forms of discourse. The second part of the paper moves from the level of interpretation to that of evaluation. It argues that theologies of liberation share with ideologies a tendency to occlude self-critical reflection. It suggests that a conscious recognition that theologies of liberation do not exhaust the possibilities of theological discourse but are relative models which select and interpret Christian symbols and doctrines in the light of the central dynamic of alienation and liberation might provide an antidote to this pathology. It maintains with Rosemary Ruether that there is no absolutely adequate model of alienation and liberation and that various models of alienation and liberation must be "interstructured" in order to overcome the perspectival biases of models which focus upon a single root of oppression. To establish relative degrees of adequacy between various theological models of liberation the paper argues that these models be evaluated a) by the criterion of appropriateness to the charter documents and to the historical development of one's chosen religious tradition, b) by the criterion of adequacy to the human condition in its essential commonality and in its historical diversity, and c) by the criterion of dialectical inclusiveness. The paper concludes by agreeing with theologians of liberation that ultimately no set of criteria validates a theology of liberation. As fundamentally geared to praxis, such a theology must be subject to a process of existential verification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463752
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263713
Date: 9 1, 1970
Author(s): Teselle Robert F.
Abstract: The thesis of this paper is that an absolute origin of evil, arising from the free will of a creature, must be incomprehensible. Although Augustine occasionally acknowledges this point, nevertheless in a number of better-known passages (chiefly in The City of God) he attempts to give a causal account of the fall of Adam and/or Satan. Much of the subsequent Christian tradition has unfortunately followed his lead, and major recent commentators routinely ignore or passively approve of his conceptual error. Augustine offers three unacceptable explanations of the fall, which conflict variously with his own doctrines of divine omnipotence, the goodness of creation, and creaturely free will and responsibility, as well as violating the canons of sound argumentation and explanation. First, his contention that free creatures made "out of nothing" inevitably fall makes the fall seem ontologically necessary (unfree) and thereby lays the ultimate responsibility for it on the Creator. Second, the appeal to pride as an explanation is a spurious causal account, for "pride" is only a synonym for "fallenness" itself and not a possible antecedent condition in a being created good and not yet fallen. Finally, his assertion that the first sin is intrinsically comprehensible, but not comprehensible to us because we are fallen, is an obfuscation masquerading as an explanation, for we have no warrant for supposing that this assertion is true or even meaningful. Instead of seeking causal explanation Augustine should have stayed with his own wiser observation that an evil will has no efficient cause. Theology of the Augustinian sort (which comprises much of the Christian tradition) ought to concede that the fall as a work of genuine freedom is an absurd "fact," an incomprehensible given which steadfastly and in principle resists causal explanation. The concluding section of the paper draws upon Ricoeur's insights to tell why the narrative structure of the "Adamic myth" (which has important positive functions of its own) begets as an unfortunate byproduct this tendency to spin out a causal account of the first evil, with the conceptual confusion resulting from it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1463800
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263756
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): Whitehead Lorne
Abstract: Freud, 1917:416
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464384
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263754
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Winquist James J.
Abstract: "C'est seulement dans la lecture que le dynamism de
configuration Achave son parcours. Et c'est au-dela de la lecture, dans l'action effective, instruite par les
oeuvres reques, que la configuration du texte se transmute en refiguration" (1985:230)
C'est seulement dans la lecture que le dynamism de configuration Achave son parcours
230
Et c'est au-dela de la lecture, dans l'action effective, instruite par les oeuvres reques, que la configuration du texte se transmute en refiguration
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1464458
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263774
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Wolterstorff Richard
Abstract: Tracy 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1465057
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263776
Date: 7 1, 1974
Author(s): Wolff Gary Alan
Abstract: "exile is already a reality" (259)
259
Exile is already a reality
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1465276
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263803
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Matthew G.
Abstract: Pelagian writings, "it is signifi-
cant that Augustine now quotes Ambrose with increasing frequency and devotion" (1999b: 140)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466069
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263784
Date: 7 1, 1967
Author(s): Woozley F. Samuel
Abstract: Macdonald 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466106
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i263794
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Sullivan Nadine Pence
Abstract: The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture [New
York: Harper San Francisco, 1991]
The Revelatory Text: Interpreting the New Testament as Sacred Scripture
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466172
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263808
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Williamson Tod
Abstract: Kristeva: 398
398
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466465
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i263809
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): Zaleski Charles T.
Abstract: Lear: 148-166, 219-246
148
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1466523
Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264940
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): Wittgenstein Roberto
Abstract: Borutti, 1996:11.
11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1479813
Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo Edizioni
Issue: i264935
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Yonnet Sergio Dalla
Abstract: The legend is, as custum, the place were the principle of reality is suspended: "the place were day-dreaming is allowed". Actually, in the current practice, the use of this fabulous space/instrument crosses ambits officially destinated to the reverie. Fragments of legend impregnate the entire experience allowing us the most shameless alchemy. If we consider the "legendary" in its pragmatic implications and pass through the question: "what do we do, in the every day life, when we evoke in a more or less explicit way the semantic constellation linked with the notion of legend?", then the "legendary" is not so much the "projective place" where we live for a moment our phantasies, but rather an operation that allows to reconcile concrete interests and ideal values, playing on the demarcation line and mixing up cards skilfully.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1480107
Journal Title: Peabody Journal of Education
Publisher: Peabody College of Vanderbilt University
Issue: i265901
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Taylor Patricia E.
Abstract: Fay later qualifies his notion of "genuine narrative,"
adopting the preferred term "anticipatory narrative" on the grounds that "the results of
human activities are forever occurring, so that any narrative about them must be inher-
ently fragmentary and tentative" (1977, p. 168)
168
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1492770
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i266025
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Whitehead Madeleine
Abstract: Creativity is seen as inherent in the developmental potential of the individual and of society as well. This "yen for becoming" is felt at all ages, and is in fact recognized as associated with the realization of the profoundest aspirations of man. Its origin is detected in early childhood. It is deeply rooted in the associative trend of thought and action, a trend which tends to perpetuate itself in the direction of unending abundance and novelty. The process assumes passage from awareness to memory, and even to the subconscious. The thought of the moment dips into the past, awakens memories, even those seemingly forgotten, reactivates all that is pertinent for the creation of new structures. It is believed that this tendency is essentially dynamic, endowed with energy which drives toward endless realizations. Nothing dies in the subconscious, as Freud pointed out. Each past experience is apt to return into consciousness and engage in a double process of homogenization and heterogenization, of convergent and divergent currents. Here the combinations, or commutations and permutations, are indefinite, an array which defies any computer. Creativity calls into play all energized experiences, present and stored, cognitive and affective, perceptual and conceptual, sensory and motoric, verbal and non-verbal, taxonomic and functional, real and symbolic; it constantly provokes new patterns. The richer the content of experience, the greater the possibility of innovation. The creative construction starts with the activation of readily available knowledge, the elements of which trigger related material in the memory and the subconscious. The movement is derived from active associations that continue to connect the units, and is oriented toward specific goals, leading to eventual syntheses, which may be expressed in either action or discourse. Here we face an unfurling, which coincides with interpretation, the unlocking of the new meaning built from the past upon the first meaning. This event, really never-ending, is a basic condition of life; it stimulates the spirit in a posture of perpetual emergence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1494512
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i266065
Date: 1 1, 1958
Author(s): Winch Denis C.
Abstract: According to a school of thought that has been gaining ground for about a century, the social sciences are best conceived as styles of humanistic inquiry akin to hermeneutics rather than as branches of naturalistic inquiry paralleling the natural or physical sciences. In the past decade or so, advocates of this position have been active in providing critiques of educational research. It is argued that, although the case has some merit, the prognosis is mistaken--traditional naturalistic inquiry in education and the social sciences will continue to have an important and strong role. /// D'après une école de pensée qui gagne du terrain depuis environ un siècle, les sciences sociales devraient être considérées comme des enquêtes humanistes apparentées à l'herméneutique plutôt que comme des disciplines cherchant à comprendre la nature des choses comme le font les sciences naturelles. Au cours de la dernière décennie, les partisans de ce point de vue ont multiplié leurs critiques à l'endroit de la recherche en éducation. On affirme que, même si ce point de vue est valable à certains égards, le pronostic donné est erroné: les recherches en éducation cherchant à élucider la nature même de son objet d'étude et les sciences sociales continueront à jouer un rôle clé. /// Eine geistige Richtung, die sich seit etwa einem Jahrhundert stärker durchsetzt, sieht die Socialwissenschaften am ehesten als Arten humanistischer Untersuchung, die mit der Hermeneutik verwandt sind, denn als Zweige der naturalistischen Untersuchung, die den Natur- oder Physik-Wissenschaften gleichen. In den letzten zehn Jahren etwa waren Vertreter dieser Schule aktiv damit beschäftig, kritische Abhandlungen über erziehungswissenschaftliche Forschung vorzubringen. Es wird argumentiert, daß die gestellte Prognose falsch ist, wenngleich die Sache einen gewissen Wert hat--traditionelle naturalistiche Forschung in den Erziehungs--und Sozialwissenschaften wird weiterhin eine wichtige und starke Rolle spielen. /// De acuerdo a una corriente de pensamiento que ha estado ganando terreno durante un centenar de años, las ciencias sociales se conceben como estilos de investigación de índole humanística, similares a la hermenéutica, más bien que como ramas de una investigación naturalística paralela a las ciencias naturales o físicas. En aproximadamente la última década, los partidarios de esta posición han estado activos en preparar críticas de la investigación en educación. Se argumenta que, aunque su caso tiene algún mérito, la prognosis que dan es equivocada; la investigación tradicional de índole naturalística en educación y en ciencias sociales sequirá teniendo un papel fuerte y importante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1495162
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i266072
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Van Ijzendoorn Carole
Abstract: À une époque où l'on dit des jeunes qu'ils sont dépolitisés, nous nous sommes interrogés sur l'éducation politique des jeunes Québécois. Cet aspect de leur éducation est analysé à partir de la documentation du ministère de l'Éducation et à partir d'entrevues et de questionnaires distribués dans des écoles primaires, secondaires et des Cégeps de la région de Québec. La grande majorité des étudiants du collégial et du secondaire que nous avons interrogés disent s'intéresser à la politique. Par contre, leurs professeurs soutiennent que ces derniers ne s'y intéressent pas d'une façon soutenue. Quoiqu'il en soit, les étudiants ne semblent pas très bien connaître le système politique canadien. Les auteurs de cet article suggèrent d'améliorer l'apprentissage du civisme par des activités de sensibilisation et d'implication dans la vie de l'école. /// Many believe contemporary youth are apolitical. We have chosen to assess this belief by studying the political education of Quebec youth. Ministry of Education documents, and interviews and questionnaires from elementary and secondary schools and CEGEPS of the Quebec City region, showed the great majority of CEGEP and secondary school students claimed to be interested in politics. Their teachers, however, say that student interest is not always sustained. Certainly students do not know the Canadian political system very well. Improved civic education requires that schools introduce pupils to political life and involve them in school life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1495423
Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: California Folklore Society
Issue: i266268
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Bellah Jay
Abstract: Sue Samuelson describes her own experi-
ence as an "expert witness" in her "Folklore and the Legal System: The Expert Witness,"
Western Folklore 41 (1982): 139-144
10.2307/1499786
139
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1499375
Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266364
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Willis Leo
Abstract: This paper focuses on the need for educational researchers to recognise the dialectic between theory and method. A methodology described as quasi-historical and based on a theory of social action is discussed in the first section. The second section proposes a means whereby the meaning of actions can be understood. A schema for the interpretation of text evidence is then outlined. This schema or methodology draws upon the theoretical work of Giddens, Thompson and Habermas and the interpretation theory of Ricoeur. The proposed schema avoids a theory-method dichotomy and offers researchers a form of disciplined enquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501153
Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266351
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Yorke D. M.
Abstract: In recent years personal construct theory has become increasingly used to underpin research into teachers' thinking, and a number of researchers have opted to give methodological prominence to the repertory grid. This paper points to the limitations of the theory in respect of research outside the domain of psychotherapy and to some of the problems associated with repertory grid studies. It is argued that repertory grids are inherently positivistic and are thus in philosophical tension with the theory on which they are based, a tension that is not removed by researching in a 'conversation paradigm'. The importance of events in personal construct theory is discussed, and it is suggested that an emphasis on events requires the researcher to adopt an approach that is informed by phenomenology and the philosophy of history. Finally, a return is made to the level of research practice,i and a methodological approach is outlined which is-to a greater extent than the repertory grid-consistent with the main thrust of personal construct theory. Stress is given to the importance of the quality of the relationships between constructs, since these have implications for connections between construing and action-an issue which is of crucial importance is the study of teachers' thinking.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501228
Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Company
Issue: i266408
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Woods Pat
Abstract: Anecdotal evidence suggests that many qualitative researchers have had the experience of discovering that their informants had told them lies. This is quite different to those instances where faulty memory, subjective perception, partial or erroneous knowledge, a desire to give the researcher what they think they want, or even where a 'personal myth' comes in to play, because a lie is a conscious and deliberate intention to deceive. What should researchers do when they discover that they have been misled? What are the implications for qualitative methodology and its practitioners in the light of the criteria for good practice outlined in the Tooley Report? This article draws on two examples of informants who lied, in order to explore some of the questions and issues that can arise. It suggests, tentatively, that generic criteria may not always be sufficiently sensitive to cope with complexities of social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1501598
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Harvard University Press
Issue: i267044
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Cuénot Christopher F.
Abstract: Comment je vois (1948), p. 23.
23
Comment je vois
1948
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1508793
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i267105
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Balthasar Kenneth
Abstract: "D" Society Of Cambrige University
sity
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509502
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267120
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Frank Steven D.
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 299.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509553
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i267091
Date: 10 1, 1964
Author(s): Freedman Jack R.
Abstract: David Noel Freedman, "Divine Commitment and
Human Obligation," Int 18 (1964) 3-15
Freedman
3
18
Int
1964
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509615
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267145
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Brueggemann J. Richard
Abstract: chap. 2, esp. 29-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509805
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267129
Date: 7 1, 1798
Author(s): Wordsworth Richard E.
Abstract: Wordsworth's "Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey" (1798)
Wordsworth
Lines, Written a Few Miles Above Tintern Abbey
1798
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509876
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1936
Author(s): Ayer Stephen W.
Abstract: Alfred J. Ayer, Lan-
guage, Truth and Logic (1936; reprinted Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1971
Ayer
Truth and Logic
1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509887
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267148
Date: 4 1, 1965
Author(s): d'Alverny Willemien
Abstract: Ein Jahrtausend lateinischer Hymnendichtung (2 vols.; ed.
Guido Maria Dreves, rev. Clemens Blume S.J.; Leipzig: Reisland, 1909) 1. 288
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1509888
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267158
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Ric∄r Elisabeth Schüssler
Abstract: Paul Ric∄r, "History and Rhetoric," 23.
Ric∄r
23
History and Rhetoric
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510095
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i267152
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Idem Francis Schüssler
Abstract: The Eyes of Faith (New York: Fordham University Press, 1990)
The Eyes of Faith
1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1510139
Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267285
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Polanyi Richard
Abstract: ) Schön (note 44).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511599
Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i267303
Date: 7 1, 1965
Author(s): Weber John
Abstract: Boltanski, "L'amour et la justice," 113
Boltanski
113
L'amour et la justice
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1511841
Journal Title: British Journal of Educational Studies
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i269832
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Woods Peter
Abstract: Economics is privileged in contemporary government policy such that all human transactions are seen as economic forms of exchange. Education has been discursively restructured according to the logic of the market, with education policy being increasingly colonised by economic policy imperatives. This paper explores some of the consequences of this reframing which draws upon metaphors from industrial and business domains. This paper examines a significant dimension of teaching that currently has marginal presence in official discourse: social contingency. We argue that social contingency is characterised by a variety of distinctive features that include unpredictability, relationality and ethical demands. The significance of social contingency is highlighted by a comparison with industrial production, which is organisationally contingent, and craft production, which is characterised as materially contingent. We argue that the different nature of contingency in these domains makes them inappropriate as metaphors for teaching. We explore the nature of social contingency and some of the practical and ethical consequences of the failure to articulate this in official discourse. Its absence in such discourse is illustrated by consideration of competence statements in the Initial Teacher Education context. We argue that the neglect of social contingency is founded on assumptions of teacher sovereignty that are both philosophically and ethically unsustainable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1555869
Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270157
Date: 10 1, 1955
Author(s): Stauffer Henri
Abstract: Ecce Homo a été décisif dans le cas
de ZINZENDORF
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560002
Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270179
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Bömer Gerd
Abstract: F. BÖMER: Untersuchungen über die Religion der Sklaven in
Griechenland und Rom. i, AbhMainz 1957, S. 178 f.
Bömer
178
i
Rom.
1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560014
Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i270171
Date: 7 1, 1935
Author(s): Cordier H.
Abstract: supra, p. 166; p. 178, n. I, 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1560228
Journal Title: Novum Testamentum
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i270299
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): White Jens
Abstract: White, Klio, 121
White
121
Klio
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1561329
Journal Title: The American Journal of Philology
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270356
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): von Reden Dean
Abstract: Gentili 1988, 63–66
63
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1562221
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i270365
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Wiesel Ronald L.
Abstract: Abraham Stahl, "Ritualistic Reading among Oriental Jews," Anthropological Quarterly 52, no.
2 (1979): 115-20, 117.
10.2307/3317261
115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1562391
Journal Title: Diacritics
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i270554
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Zupančič Tim
Abstract: Zupančič
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1566285
Journal Title: Perspecta
Publisher: Rizzoli International Publications
Issue: i270598
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Merleauponty Louise
Abstract: Essai sur l'Art
Essai sur l'Art
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1567174
Journal Title: Journal of Latin American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i208501
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Schroeder Michael J.
Abstract: This study of organised political violence in north-central Nicaragua from 1926 to 1934 focuses on the infamous Conservative gang leader Anastacio Hernandez and on Sandino's rebels. The contexts of a weak central state and local-regional caudillismo are outlined. It is shown that after the 1926-27 civil war. Hernandez and others produced ritualised spectacular violence in the service of their Chamorrista caudillo patrons. The language, practices, and characteristics of organised violence are examined. It is argued that Sandino's rebels appropriated these tools of political struggle, and that changes and continuities in the organisation of violence in Nicaraguan history merit greater attention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/157626
Journal Title: International Political Science Review / Revue internationale de science politique
Publisher: Butterworths Scientific Limited
Issue: i272292
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Llosa Roberto
Abstract: Notre analyse repose sur deux hypothèses générales complémentaires. La première hypothèse affirme l'existence non pas d'une crise de la pensée politique mais de trois situations critiques auxquelles doit faire face le pensée politique et qui déterminent des formes d'incertitude spécifiques, irréductibles les unes aux autres. La deuxième hypothèse affirme que l'intelligibilité des crises que connaît la pensée politique passe par celle des conditions politiques dans lesquelles s'exerce cette pensée. Pour préciser ces deux hypothèses nous faisons appel à un modèle construit à partir de la structure d'une action. Trois formes d'incertitude sont ainsi repérées: une incertitude concernant les valeurs, une incertitude concernant l'état des choses et une incertitude portant sur les voies d'action. Transposées sur le plan ou la dimension de la structure sociale, ces trois formes d'incertitude sont à saisir et à examiner respectivement comme crise au niveau du système de légitimation et de motivation, comme crise au niveau du système organisationnel ou des institutions et comme crise au niveau des stratégies ou système "opérationnel". Nous localisons la première forme de crise dans les sociétés du capitalisme "central", la deuxième dans les formations sociales socialistes et la troisième dans les sociétés du capitalisme "périphérique". A partir d'une analyse des conditions politiques qui ont rendu possible l'émergence de ces formes spécifiques de crise nous essayons de déterminer au moins certaines conditions nécessaires--mais non pas suffisantes--de leur dépassement. /// Two general complementary hypotheses underlie this analysis. The first contends that, although political science does not confront a crisis, it faces three critical challenges giving rise to uncertainty in the discipline. The second hypothesis asserts that to understand the present challenges testing political theory, it is necessary to relate the latter to the prevailing political context. To clarify the two hypotheses a model is presented, growing out of the structure of action. Three forms of uncertainty are thus identified, relating respectively to values, the state of affairs, and the means of action. These three uncertainties, seen in terms of social structure, are to be understood and examined in turn, in terms, respectively, of questions of legitimization and motivation, at the level of institutional and organizational arrangements, or with respect to strategy and "operational" systems. The first are identified in societies under a "central" capitalism, the second with socialist social organization, and the third with "peripheral" capitalism. On the basis of an analysis of political conditions which have facilitated the emergence of these specific forms of challenges, an effort is made to determine conditions which are necessary--but not sufficient--for these challenges to be dealt with.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1600886
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301565
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Weber Meili
Abstract: Seyla Benhabib, who attacks him for
his "neglect of the structural sources ofinequality, influence, resource and power" (124)
124
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1770799
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301593
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Wolk Julie A.
Abstract: A.A. Verbitskaya, Pokinutyi (Riga, 1925/6)
Verbitskaya
Pokinutyi
1925
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771253
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301599
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Zygelbojm D.G.
Abstract: Levinas himself nods when he introduces these terms into a discussion of S.Y Agnon in
"Poetry and Revelation."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771263
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i301583
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White Eric
Abstract: Rüdiger Landfester 154
154
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771325
Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis Ltd
Issue: i302185
Date: 6 1, 1982
Author(s): Wolf George Clement
Abstract: This essay explores the relation of authority to legitimacy through the social construction of local histories that validate claims to 'authentic' rulership. Using the historical example of the Chiefdom of Uyombe in northern Zambia, I intend to argue that the construction of these local histories has been a crucial element in the process of domination, subjugation, resistance and collaboration between rulers and those they would rule. Exploring specific Gramscian concepts, I will also argue that historical narratives contain hegemonic and ideological components that are critical to relating authority to legitimacy in an active manner. These narratives contain African voices, which express varied local interests. Through the narratives, Africans may be seen as active agents in contributing to the making of their own local histories of rulership. Thus, authority and legitimacy are conjoined through the fabrication, inscription and recitation of historical narratives and are an essential part of governance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1771857
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303065
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Wilden Louise O.
Abstract: 11. 632-633
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772376
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303076
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Towner Daniel
Abstract: Mekhilta, cf. Lauterbach's edition (176 ff.)
176
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772567
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics
Issue: i303076
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Wellmer Gerald
Abstract: KHI 146
146
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772571
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303091
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Todorov David
Abstract: O-VPT refers to "observer viewpoint."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772644
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303078
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schwarzchild Susan
Abstract: Rotenstreich 1968: 3-4
3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1772696
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Smith Brian
Abstract: John Watson. .. . That is, in first-person narrative
the author often pretends to be someone else making assertions" (1975: 328)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773076
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Wimmers Dorrit
Abstract: Martinez-Bonati's own
illustration (1981: 112)
112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773077
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303088
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): White Meir
Abstract: Labov (1972)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773082
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303098
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): White Gabriel
Abstract: Zikir Vakca-i Haile-i
Osmaniye
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773125
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303114
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White C. Allen
Abstract: White 1973: 22-29
22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773130
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303097
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Wellek Chanita
Abstract: Philip Johnson-Laird's (1983: 413)
413
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773141
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303101
Date: 7 1, 1938
Author(s): Al-Zayyat Israel
Abstract: Ricoeur (1981: 147)
147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773166
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303104
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Zea Walter D.
Abstract: Mignolo (1991, 1992a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773227
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303109
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Woolf Louise Shabat
Abstract: ibid.: 270
270
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773356
Journal Title: Poetics Today
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i303117
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Wyschogrod Shira
Abstract: Wolosky 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1773442
Journal Title: The Journal of African History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i209472
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Portelli Elizabeth
Abstract: H. U. E. Thoden Van Velzen, 'Robinson Crusoe and Friday: strength and
weakness of the big man paradigm', Man (n.s.), VIII, iv (1973), 592-612
10.2307/2800743
592
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/181133
Journal Title: Philosophy of Science
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i209645
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Currie Gregory
Abstract: This paper concerns the problem of how to give historical explanations of scientist's decisions to prefer one theory over another. It is argued that such explanations ought to contain only statements about the beliefs and preferences of the agents involved, and, in particular, ought not to include evaluative premises about the theories themselves. It is argued that Lakatos's attempt to build into such historical explanations premises of an evaluative kind is deficient. The arguments of Laudan to the effect that such explanations depend crucially upon evaluative assumptions about the rationality or irrationality of decisions are examined. It is argued that they do not establish the need for such assumptions. Similar criticisms are then shown to be applicable to a version of the 'hermeneutical' model of explanation for human actions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/186955
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Higham David
Abstract: john Higham, History: Professional Scholarship in
America [Baltimore, Md., 1983], 241
Higham
241
History: Professional Scholarship in America
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873746
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides Allan
Abstract: Thucydides, History
of the Peloponnesian War, trans. Rex Warner (Harmondsworth, Eng., 1954).
Thucydides
History of the Peloponnesian War
1954
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873749
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: The American Historical Association
Issue: i332152
Date: 6 1, 1962
Author(s): Mill Gertrude
Abstract: John Stuart Mill, "Coleridge," in Essays on Politics and Culture, ed. Gertrude Himmelfarb (New
York, 1962), 133.
Mill
Coleridge
133
Essays on Politics and Culture
1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1873752
Journal Title: Philosophy of Science
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i302046
Date: 6 1, 1979
Author(s): Wartofsky Patrick
Abstract: Hesse (1980).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/188010
Journal Title: Gender and Society
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i209797
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Yllö Carole
Abstract: Analysis of records of women at risk for abuse showed that though information about abuse was present, emergency room physicians rarely utilized it. The doctor-patient interaction tended to obscure rather than elucidate knowledge of abuse. Medicine's epistemologic model of care reconstructs abusive relationships through a medical encounter in which what is most significant is not seen. Nurses are less affected by the model but are under institutional constraints that lead to similar outcomes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/189767
Journal Title: The William and Mary Quarterly
Publisher: The Institute of Early American History and Culture
Issue: i305951
Date: 1 1, 1644
Author(s): Coke A. G.
Abstract: "Evangelical Revolt," WMQ, 3d Ser., XXXI [1974], 359
10.2307/1921628
359
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1920968
Journal Title: PSA: Proceedings of the Biennial Meeting of the Philosophy of Science Association
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i209985
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Rabinow Richard J.
Abstract: Against the background of disputes about modernity and post-modernity in philosophy, this paper probes the differences among Gadamer, Habermas, and Rorty. Focusing on the themes of praxis, phronesis, and practical discourse, it is argued that what initially appear to be hard and fast cleavages and irreconcilable differences turn out to be differences of emphasis. The common ground that emerges is adumbrated as "non-foundational pragmatic humanism". Although there are important differences among these three thinkers each of their voices contributes to a coherent conversation in developing "moral-political vision".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/192429
Journal Title: PSA: Proceedings of the Biennial Meeting of the Philosophy of Science Association
Publisher: Philosophy of Science Association
Issue: i209984
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): van Fraassen Patrick A.
Abstract: Using the methods of hermeneutic phenomenology, and against the background of the principle that the real is what is or can be given in a public way in perception as a state of the World, and of the thesis established elsewhere that acts of perception are always epistemic, contextual, and hermeneutical, the writer proposes that objects of scientific observation are perceptual objects, states of the World described by theoretical scientific terms and, therefore, real. This thesis of Hermeneutical Realism is proved by showing how the response of a standard instrument is 'read' as if it were a 'text'. Conclusions are then drawn about a number of topics, including Scientific Realism, Conventionalism, and Cultural Relativism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/192657
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333635
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): Wheelwright Eugene F.
Abstract: Ricoeur explains this point (1977, pp.
300-03)
300
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1954738
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i306776
Date: 3 1, 1968
Author(s): Lefebvre Fred R.
Abstract: In Praise of Philosophy, pp. 33, 46-47
33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1960324
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: The American Political Science Association
Issue: i333662
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): Skinner John G.
Abstract: Recent challenges to traditional approaches and purposes for studying the history of political theory have raised questions about its constitution as both a subject matter and subfield of political science. Methodological arguments advocating what is characterized as a more truly historical mode of inquiry for understanding political ideas and recovering textual meaning have become increasingly popular. The relationship of these hermeneutical claims about historicity, such as that advanced by Quentin Skinner, to the actual practice of interpretation is problematical. Such claims are more a defense of a certain norm of historical investigation than a method of interpretation, and the implications of this norm for the reconstitution of the history of political theory require careful consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/1961112
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006219
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Maddox Randy L.
Abstract: Johann Baptist Metz, Faith in History and Society (New York, NY: Crossroad, 1980), pp. 88-91, 110
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006225
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006219
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Faber Paul
Abstract: Hendrikus Berkhof, Christian Faith: An Introduction to the Study of the Faith, tr. Sierd Woudstra (Grand
Rapids, Michigan: Eerdmans, 1979), p. 118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006228
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20006306
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Arthur C. J.
Abstract: Morris Jastrow, The Study of Religion (London, 1901), p. 1
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20006312
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008134
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Berthold-Bond Daniel
Abstract: 'The Earliest System - Programme of German Idealism', cited in Henry Harris, Hegel's Development:
Toward the Sunlight, 1770-1801 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1972), 511.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008139
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008149
Date: 5 1, 1998
Author(s): Friedman R. Z.
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Anti-Semite and Jew (first published 1946), trans. George J. Becker (New York:
Schocken, 1965), pp. 67-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008152
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20008354
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: The first part of the essay explore's three features of Wolterstorff's account of God as a performer of speech acts: (1) the claim that God literally speaks, suggesting that this claim needs something like a Thomistic theory of analogy as an alternative to univocity and mere metaphor; (2) the claim that speaking is not reducible to revealing; and (3) the political implications of these claims, especially in relation to Habermasian theory. The second part focuses on the theory of double discourse, which seeks to make sense of the notion that God speaks to us through the human voices of prophets, apostles, and especially of Scripture, and seeks to show that a fuller account of the speech act by which God deputizes or appropriates human speech is needed. The final section suggests that Ricoeur and Derrida are not the threat to his theory that Wolterstorff takes them to be and that their emphasis on the text, rather than the author, makes sense in contexts where we have only the text to consult.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008358
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Ablex Publishing Corporation
Issue: i20008666
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: "The Study of Texts,"
paper presented at the Annual International Meeting of the Conference for the Study of
Political Thought, City University of New York Graduate School, New York City, March
20-23, 1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20008671
Journal Title: American Philosophical Quarterly
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i20009276
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Spiegelberg Herbert
Abstract: "Wittgenstein's Phenomenology," Philosophy and Phenomenological Research, vol. 20 (1959), pp. 37-50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20009279
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010333
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Johnson Greg
Abstract: This essay takes up the claim made recently by Simon Critchley in The Companion to Continental Philosophy that a "feature common to many philosophers in the Continental tradition" is the "utopian demand that things be otherwise." The general question I pursue has to do with whether or not such a claim includes movements within Continental philosophy that do not self-identify with the utopian (like critical theory). The particular question has to do with whether or not the movement of phenomenology is utopian or does it, because of its other commitments, view the utopian as the antithesis to its orientation, which makes that claim that phenomenology is utopian seem strange. My thesis is that phenomenology can be seen as a utopian tradition but that some account must be given that demonstrates this connection to the utopian. In particular, I argue that Maurice Merleau-Ponty's phenomenology provides an understanding of the utopian, which I call a non-conventional view, that is vastly different from the one assumed by most when they see or hear the word "utopian," which I lable conventional. I show that such a non-conventional understanding can be developed in a way that neither requires us to view the utopian solely as opposed to finitude and contingency, nor a form of thought and action from which we necessarily need to dissociate ourselves. It is this non-conventional view of the utopian that in the end enables us to understand how Continental philosophy in general and phenomenology in particular are important bearers of the utopian demand that things be otherwise.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010341
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010370
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Piercey Robert
Abstract: While it is clear that the Gadamer-Habermas debate has had a major influence on Paul Ricoeur, his commentators have had little to say about the nature of this influence. I try to remedy this silence by showing that Ricoeur's account of tradition is a direct response to the Gadamer-Habermas debate. First, I briefly explain the debate's importance and describe Ricoeur's reaction to it. Next, I show how his discussion of tradition in Time and Narrative steers a middle course between Gadamerian hermeneutics and Habermasian Ideologiekritik. Finally, I raise some critical questions about the adequacy of Ricoeur's middle course. Specifically, I argue that it rests on an implausible distinction between the form and the content of tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010375
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20010381
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Fisher William P.
Abstract: Academia's mathematical metaphysics are briefly explored en route to an elaboration of the qualitatively rigorous requirements underpinning the calibration and unambiguous interpretation of quantitative instrumentation in any science. Of particular interest are Gadamer's emphases on number as the paradigm of the noetic, on the role of play in interpretation, and on Hegel's sense of method as the activity of the thing itself that thought experiences. These point toward and overlap with (1) Latour's study of the metrological social networks through which technological phenomena are brought into language as modes of being that can be understood, and (2) the way that Rasch's models for measurement comprise a potential beginning for metaphysically astute, qualitatively and quantitatively integrated, mathematical methods in the social sciences. The paper closes with observations on the general problem that is philosophy, the need to remain open to multiplicities of meaning even as clear understandings are sought and obtained.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20010389
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011066
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Vinyard Dana
Abstract: This paper provides a phenomenological account of the writing of a young woman diagnosed with schizophrenia. The method of interpretation is to put ourselves in the place of the author drawing upon a combination of sympathy, reason, common-sense, experience, and "an intersubjective world, common to us all" (Schutz, 1945: 536). The result is the recognition of the person as also capable of putting herself in the place of others so as to understand their behavior. This "role-taking success" identifies the limits of the current sociological understanding of insanity's significance in social interaction as an instance of "role-taking failure" (Rosenberg, 1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011073
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011089
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Cissna Kenneth N.
Abstract: A version of the present essay was presented at the Cen¬
tral States Communication Association and Southern States Communication Association Joint
Conference, Lexington, Kentucky, in April, 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011095
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011143
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Brockelman Paul
Abstract: The new scientific cosmology which has emerged over the past forty years seems to be forcing philosophers and theologians alike to rethink the traditional theistic conception of God in which God is pictured as a First Cause designer of the universe in favor of what Joseph Campbell more mystically calls an "immanent ground of being, transcendent of conceptualization." The central thrust of these reflections is that we encounter that "immanent ground of being" through the experience of wonder and awe. Since actual experience is involved, then a phenomenological description of exactly what it is in the new cosmology (and the universe) which induces such wonder is possible. The basic thesis is that we experience wonder in the face of the remarkable and transcendent (beyond finite predicates and understanding) coming-into-being of nature over twelve to fifteen billion years. Wonder is the human reaction to and appreciation for the astounding fact that nature and all of its parts actually are. It is; we are; such is the ineffable beyond in our midst.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011155
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishing
Issue: i20011187
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): Topper Keith
Abstract: In recent years a number of writers have defended and attacked various features of structural, or neo-realist theories of international politics. Few, however, have quarrelled with one of the most foundational features of neorealist theory: its assumptions about the nature of science and scientific theories. In this essay I assess the views of science underlying much neorelist theory, especially as they are articulated in the work of Kenneth Waltz. I argue not only that neorealist theories rest on assumptions about science and theory that have been questioned by postpositivist philosophers and historians of science, but also that the failure to consider the work of these writers yields theories of international politics that are deficient in several respects: they are "weak" theories in the sense that they cannot illuminate crucial features of international politics, they presuppose and sustain a narrow view of power and power relations, they reify practices and relations in the international arena and they offer little promise of producing the sort of "Copernican Revolution" for which Waltz called (or, more modestly, even a minimally satisfactory theory of international politics). In light of these shortcomings, I sketch an alternative approach to the study of international affairs, one that has been termed "prototype studies." I contend that such an approach provides scholars with a rigorous way of studying international politics, without being a theoretical science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20011191
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019516
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Godlove Terry F.
Abstract: Types of Religious Experience (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1988), p. 41
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019521
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20019730
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Rennie B. S.
Abstract: Order Out of Chaos, p. 251
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20019737
Journal Title: Daedalus
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i20028008
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Geertz Clifford
Abstract: John Hughes, Indonesian Upheaval
[New York: McKay, 1967], 173-183
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20028014
Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i20059184
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Luna Erik
Abstract: Daniel W. Skubik, Book Review, 44 Fed. Law. 59,59-61 (Feb. 1997)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20059192
Journal Title: African Studies Review
Publisher: African Studies Association
Issue: i20065090
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): de Lame Danielle
Abstract: Rwanda became a Belgian trusteeship under mandate of the Société des Nations after the first World War. With churches playing a prominent role in the political evolution of Rwanda, the two countries were closely bound together. After the 1959 revolution in Rwanda and independence in 1962, development cooperation with strong NGO input still linked them. While the genocide still has tragic influence on the new Rwanda, Belgium has undergone a political process leading to a federal state. The colonial past refers to a national past. Changes in Rwanda and Belgium question any collective attempt of mourning for a past that is very different for all parties involved. /// Le Rwanda devint une possession de la Belgique sous le mandat de la Société des Nations après la Première Guerre Mondiale. La conséquence du rôle proéminent des églises dans l'évolution politique du Rwanda fut la création de liens étroits entre les deux pays. Après la révolution de 1959 au Rwanda et l'indépendance en 1962, la coopération de développement avec l'impact des ONG ont maintenu ces liens entre les deux pays. Alors que le génocide a aujourd'hui toujours des conséquences sur le Rwanda moderne, la Belgique a, elle, a vécu une transformation politique menant à la formation d'un état fédéral. Le passé colonial se mire dans le passé national. Les transformations du Rwanda et de la Belgique mettent en question toute tentative collective de faire l'expérience du deuil d'un passé commun, vécu de manière très différente par les deux cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20065094
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081335
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Freeman Kirrily
Abstract: Jean-Marie Guillon, 'Sociabilité et Rumeurs en Temps de Guerre: Bruits et
Contestations en Provence dans les Années Quarante', Provence Historique 47 (187) (1997), 245-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081339
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081727
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Deli Peter
Abstract: Face au Scepticisme [1976-1993]: les mutations du paysage intellectuel ou l'invention de l'intellectuel démocratique
(Paris:Editions la Découverte, 1994).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081731
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081753
Date: 11 1, 2000
Author(s): Geary Dick
Abstract: Stefan Berger and David Broughton, eds., The
Force of Labour. The Western European Labour Movement and the Working Classes (Oxford: Berg, 1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081764
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20081854
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Vion Antoine
Abstract: Grémion, Intelligence de l'anticommunisme, 623.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20081863
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097248
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Boucher David
Abstract: Burke, Speeches on Hastings, I, pp. 103 and 118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097251
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097541
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Prager Carol A. L.
Abstract: S. Strange, 'What about International Relations?', in William Clinton Olson (ed.), The Theory and
Practice of International Relations (Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1991), p. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097551
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097773
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Brown Chris
Abstract: Law of Peoples, p. 128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097776
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20097829
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Widmaier Wesley W.
Abstract: Joseph Stiglitz, 'What I Learned at the World Economic Crisis', The New Republic, 17 April 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20097834
Journal Title: World Politics
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: i308701
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Dittmer Lowell
Abstract: The concept of political culture embraces some of the most basic, perennially fascinating concerns in behavioral political science; because of certain ambiguities in its theoretical formulation, however, there has been a tendency for the term to grow fuzzy with continued use. Its connection with related concepts, such as political psychology, political structure, and political language, has remained unclear, with the result that political culture has been difficult to isolate as an independent variable. Thus it has come to occupy a position on the periphery of politics, and is usually presumed to reinforce the status quo. This paper re-examines previous formulations of the concept and proposes a theoretical synthesis. The analytical framework is derived from semiological theory, a branch of science specifically designed for the analysis of meanings. The central variable is the political symbol. By analyzing the interactions of political symbols within a comprehensive semiological framework, the traditional concerns of political culture can be accommodated in a more precise and systematic way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2010039
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20108002
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Prendeville Brendan
Abstract: 'Bundles for Them. A
History of Giving Bundles' (p. 379)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20108006
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i20109441
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Fox Russell Arben
Abstract: Puritanism and Confucianism have little in common in terms of their substantive teachings, but they do share an emphasis on bounded, authoritative, localized human arrangements, and this profoundly challenges the dominant presumptions of contemporary globalization. It is not enough to say that these worldviews are "communitarian" alternatives to globalism, for that defines away what needs to be explained. This article compares the ontology of certain elements of the Puritan and Confucian worldviews, and, by focusing on the role of both authority and activity in these systems, assesses (with the assistance of Max Weber) the theories of harmony that each invoke. It concludes by identifying the distinct options that these two modes of human existence suggest for those who wish to defend the relevance of boundedness and authority, and thus the very possibility of a human-scaled politics, in today's world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20109446
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press
Issue: i20109441
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Baek Jin
Abstract: In his philosophy of nothingness, Kitarō Nishida illuminates the matrix of transformation of the world "from the Created to the Creating" (tsukuru mono kara tsukurareta mono e) through shintai, or the body. In this matrix, shintai enters into the stage of an action-sensation continuum and emerges as the immaculate iconic tool of nothingness to create new figures as extended self. This idea of shintai has resonance with the development of postwar art in Japan. The "Space of Transparency" put forth by Ufan Lee, the leader of Monoha, is the principal example. This essay investigates Nishida's notion of shintai and its influence on Lee's theory of art.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20109448
Journal Title: Synthese
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20117410
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Horst Steven
Abstract: It has recently been claimed (1) that mental states such as beliefs are theoretical entities and (2) that they are therefore, in principle, subject to theoretical elimination if intentional psychology were to be supplanted by a psychology not employing mentalistic notions. Debate over these two issues is seriously hampered by the fact that the key terms 'theoretical' and 'belief' are ambiguous. This article argues that there is only one sense of 'theoretical' that is of use to the eliminativist, and in this sense some kinds of "belief" (dispositional states, infra-conscious states and the Freudian unconscious) are indeed "theoretical" and hence possible candidates for elimination, while others (consciously occurring thoughts like judgements and perceptual Gestalten) are not theoretical and hence not candidates for elimination.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20117419
Journal Title: Synthese
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i20118056
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Schulkin Jay
Abstract: Two philosophical traditions with much in common, (classical) pragmatism and (Heidegger's) hermeneutic philosophy, are here compared with respect to their approach to the philosophy of science. Both emphasize action as a mode of interpreting experience. Both have developed important categories -- inquiry, meaning, theory, praxis, coping, historicity, life-world -- and each has offered an alternative to the more traditional philosophies of science stemming from Descartes, Hume, and Comte. Pragmatism's "abduction" works with the dual perspectives of theory (as explanation) and praxis (as culture). The hermeneutical circle depends in addition on the lifeworld as background source of ontological meaning and resource for strategies of inquiry. Thus a hermeneutical philosophy of research involves three components: lifeworld (as ontological and strategic), theory (as explanatory), and praxis (as constitutive of culture).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20118058
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20126950
Date: 3 1, 1977
Author(s): Collins James
Abstract: S. Givone, La storia della filosofia secundo Kant (Milan: Mursia, 1972),
especially pp. 135-146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20126955
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20127418
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): Schmitz Kenneth L.
Abstract: Experience, Existence, and
the Good: Essays in Honor of Paul Weiss, ed. I. C. Lieb (Carbondale:
Southern Illinois University Press, 1961), pp. 143-57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20127421
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20128044
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): Sherover Charles
Abstract: Machiavelli, op. cit., I, iv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20128046
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20129849
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Cazeaux Clive
Abstract: Hausman, MA, 94
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20129854
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130068
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Moss Jean Dietz
Abstract: Larry Green, "The Reception of Aristotle's Rhetoric in the Renais-
sance," in Peripatetic Rhetoric, 338.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130074
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130607
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Emmanuel Levinas, Totality and Infinity: An Essay on Exteriority,
trans. Alphonso Lingis (Pittsburgh: Duquesne University Press, 1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130610
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130774
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Watson Stephen H.
Abstract: Ibid., 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130779
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130854
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: This article is a revision of a paper originally delivered to the Té-
menos Academy, London (UK) in March, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130858
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20130854
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Avramenko Richard
Abstract: von
Heyking, Augustine and Politics as Longing in the World, 51-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20130859
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc. The Catholic University of America
Issue: i20131299
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Norris Christopher
Abstract: Ideology and Rationality in the History of the Life Sci-
ences, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20131302
Journal Title: Revista de Historia de América
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i20139861
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Ramaglia Dante
Abstract: Así lo interpreta también Castellani: Leopoldo Lugones, Buenos Aires, Theoría, 1964,
p. 54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20139867
Journal Title: Die Welt des Islams
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i20140776
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Schielke Samuli
Abstract: Thomas Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, 3rd ed. (Chicago, Chicago Univer-
sity Press, 1996), chapter 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20140782
Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i20159066
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Hardy Cynthia
Abstract: Garud, Jain, & Kumar-
swamy, 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20159075
Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Getty Center for the History of Art and the Humanities
Issue: i20166911
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Lee Pamela M.
Abstract: I. Kopytoff, "The Cultural Biography of Things," pp. 68-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20166922
Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology, Harvard University
Issue: i20167584
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Elias Jamal J.
Abstract: Chidester, see note 11, p. 29
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20167598
Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology, Harvard University
Issue: i20167710
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Finkelstein Haim
Abstract: RS 1 [December
1924]:19
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20167724
Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20175108
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Isaac Joel
Abstract: Jamie Cohen-Cole, 'The reflexivity of cognitive science: the scientist as model of human nature',
History of the Human Sciences, 18 (2005), pp. 107-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20175119
Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184534
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Bithell Caroline
Abstract: In this introduction to a selection of case studies on the theme "the past in music" I offer a few thoughts on the nature of the past and the role of memory in constructing historical narrative, with reference to the way in which these concepts have been theorized by historians, archaeologists, anthropologists and ethnomusicologists. In reviewing the different ways in which echoes of the past can still be heard in the music of the present, I consider the capacity of music to evoke, embody and transform the past and, by so doing, to act as a medium for history and its interpretation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184537
Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184534
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Shelemay Kay Kaufman
Abstract: This paper explores the interactive relationship of memory and history during the ethnographic research process, using as its case study interviews with Syrian Jews about a hymn (pizmon) repertory. The paper uses strategies of the new historicism as well as concepts from psychology, literary theory and anthropology to explore ways in which ethnomusicologists are instrumental both in eliciting memories and in constructing historical narratives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184538
Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184534
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Bithell Caroline
Abstract: This paper focuses on the revival and reconstruction of polyphonic settings of the Latin Mass in selected villages in Corsica. Many such mass settings, often unique to a single village and preserved only in oral tradition, fell into disuse during the first half of the 20th century for a variety of reasons that are briefly explored. In some cases, however, fragments remained in the memories of surviving singers or on old recordings and these were to provide the seeds for the repertoire's later renaissance. My account of the processes of retrieval, reconstruction and re-absorption of the musical material itself is balanced by an examination of the different motives and ideologies of the various parties involved, together with an exploration of the broader theoretical implications of the enterprise of reclaiming the musical patrimony and, in particular, what it reveals about attitudes towards the past, authenticity, ownership and local identity. In the course of my analysis I draw on a series of metaphors and paradigms from the fields of archaeology and heritage conservation. Ultimately, I argue that the renewed practice of singing the mass in the "old way" should be viewed as an authentic part of the Corsican present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184542
Journal Title: Ethnomusicology Forum
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20184615
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Iguchi Kawori
Abstract: This article seeks to explore the act of reading as an essential element of notated musical practices and of the construction of knowledge about them. By examining how musical notations affect their reader-performers (and vice versa) in two different musical contexts in Japan--the Kyoto Gion festival and amateur lessons on the nohkan flute--the article draws attention to the ways in which the act of reading notation is central to the construction of knowledge about such musical practices. With reference to Etienne Wenger's notion of learning as a process of alignment, and to debates in the anthropology of reading, it then argues that, for learners of these musics, reading notations is a practice of reverse tracing towards the bodily practices of the accomplished. In discussing the musicians' concern for the efficacy of reading as a means of achieving a relevant state of understanding, the article also addresses questions on the role of reading as a method of becoming knowledgeable in the practice of anthropological inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20184621
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210419
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Klausner Samuel Z.
Abstract: The ways in which values are assimilated to social research differ according to the theoretical frame of reference informing the research. An example from the writings of E. Digby Baltzell illustrates how a moral commitment shaped his assumptions about the nature of the social matrix and his research strategies. A Western moral rhetoric fares well if the researcher chooses a methodologically individualist framework. The framework assists a moral rhetoric by providing it with concrete rather than abstract social actors and with a basis for explanation in terms of motive rather than situational forces. Along the way moral statements can appear in the form of empirical generalizations and historical laws. Should sociologists deem ethically neutral social research desirable, this study suggests that concentration on scientific method, without exploring the value bases for selecting a frame of reference, is not a promising approach. A value analysis, especially around Weber's "value relevance," may function propaedeuticly.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201851
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i210405
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Hall John R.
Abstract: Conventionally, proposals to improve working relations between sociology and history have been interdisciplinary. The present essay advances an alternative approach-consolidation of sociohistorical inquiry as a transdisciplinary enterprise. All socio-historical inquiry depends on four elemental forms of discourse: discourse on values, narrative discourse, social theoretical discourse, and the discourse of explanation. Though inquiry is transdisciplinary in the problematics of these discourses, concrete methodology typically is oriented either toward theorization in relation to cases (historical sociology) or toward comprehensive analysis of a single phenomenon (sociological history). Varying the articulated relations among the four forms of discourse once for historical sociology and again for sociological history yields eight ideal typical strategies of inquiry. The four strategies of historical sociology include universal history, theory application, macro-analytic history, and contrast-oriented comparison. The parallel strategies for sociological history are situational history, specific history, configurational history, and historicism. These ideal types offer standard reference points that help clarify the underpinnings of a diverse range of scholarly practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/201957
Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i20297304
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Moin A. Azfar
Abstract: Meisami, "Masʿūdī and the Reign of al-Amīn," 154-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20297308
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20453076
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Shalin Dmitri N.
Abstract: This article offers an alternative to classical hermeneutics, which focuses on discursive products and grasps meaning as the play of difference between linguistic signs. Pragmatist hermeneutics reconstructs meaning through an indefinite triangulation, which brings symbols, icons, and indices to bear on each other and considers a meaningful occasion as an embodied semiotic process. To illuminate the word-body-action nexus, the discussion identifies three basic types of signifying media: (1) the symbolic-discursive, (2) the somatic-affective, and (3) the behavioral-performative, each one marked by a special relationship between signs and their objects. An argument is made that the tension between various type-signifying media is unavoidable, that the pragmatic-discursive misalignment is an ontological condition, and that bridging the gap between our discursive, affective, and behavioral outputs is at the heart of ethical life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20453078
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i20453408
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Lemel Yannick
Abstract: Steve
Bruce (2001)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20453412
Journal Title: Third World Quarterly
Publisher: Routledge Publishing
Issue: i20454993
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bowden Brett
Abstract: As a tool for understanding the world in which we live the study of the history of political thought is stunted because of a preoccupation with the Western canon as the history of political thought to the exclusion of other histories and traditions. This ongoing exclusion is itself facilitated by a deeply entrenched select reading of the Western canon; a reading that overlooks a tendency within the canon to not just ignore but suppress and dismiss the value of other accounts of history and traditions of thought. An opening of the Western mind to these assumed to be alien traditions of social, legal and political thought reveals that, in the global market place of ideas, these purportedly competing and non-compatible traditions of thought might in fact have considerably more in common than what sets them apart: thus opening the way for an authentic inter-civilisational dialogue that focuses more on co-operation and less on clashes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20455003
Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Routledge Journals, Taylor & Francis
Issue: i20462366
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Crossouard Barbara
Abstract: Formative assessment has attracted increasing attention from both practitioners and scholars over the last decade. This paper draws on the authors' empirical research conducted over eleven years in educational situations ranging from infant schools to postgraduate education to propose a theorisation of formative assessment. Formative assessment is seen as taking place when teachers and learners seek to respond to student work, making judgements about what is good learning with a view to improving that learning. However, the theorisation emphasises formative assessment as being a discursive social practice, involving dialectical, sometimes conflictual, processes. These bring into play issues of power in which learners' and teachers' identities are implicated and what counts as legitimate knowledge is framed by institutional discourses and summative assessment demands. The paper argues that, rather than only paying attention to the content of learning, an ambition for formative assessment might be to deconstruct these contextual issues, allowing a critical consideration of learning as a wider process of becoming. The article suggests a model that might be useful to teachers and learners in achieving this.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20462368
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i20467899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Azérad Hugo
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, Idée de la prose, trans. by Gérard Macé (Paris: Christian Bourgois, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20467904
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i20475540
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Michel Trebitsch, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20475554
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Verlag Anton Hain
Issue: i20483266
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Hakoishi Masayuki
Abstract: T. Kôzuma, „Heidegger: Chronologie seines Lebens und Bibliographie”, in: Das Ideal
(Risô), Nr. 542, Tokyô, Juli 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20483277
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für philosophische Forschung
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i20484715
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Rinderle (2007, 1. Begriffe im Kontext).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20484719
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486556
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Mattingly Cheryl
Abstract: In this article I consider "narrative mind reading," the practical capability of inferring the motives that precipitate and underlie the actions of others. Following Jerome Bruner, I argue that this everyday capacity depends on our ability to place action within unfolding narrative contexts. While Bruner has focused on narrative mind reading as a within-culture affair, I look to border situations that cross race and class lines where there is a strong presumption among participants that they do not, in fact, share a cultural framework. Instead, interactions often reinforce actors' perceptions of mutual misunderstanding and cultural difference. Drawing on a longitudinal study of African American families who have children with severe illnesses, I examine narrative mind reading and misreading in one mother's interactions with the clinicians who treat her child. I further explore how narrative misreadings are supported through chart notes and "familiar stranger" stories. The focus on miscommunication grounds a theory of the reproduction of cultural difference in interactive dynamics and brings Bruner's emphasis on narrative into dialogue with contemporary anthropology of cultural borderlands.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486565
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i20486586
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Throop C. Jason
Abstract: Drawing from research conducted on the personal, cultural, and moral significance of pain on the island of Yap (Waqab), Federated States of Micronesia, I argue in this article that one possible root to reincorporating empathy within the context of contemporary culture theory is to uncover the cultural and phenomenological ways that understandings of empathy and what constitutes authentic empathetic acts are shaped. After briefly examining foundational philosophical definitions of empathy, the article advances a number of differing cultural phenomenological orientations implicated in the experience and expression of empathy. These orientations are understood to help to foreground the place of empathy in what may otherwise be viewed as a general reluctance to engage in empathetic attunement in Yapese society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486589
Journal Title: Human Rights Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i20486733
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Addis Adeno
Abstract: John Rawls, A Theory of Justice 455 (1971).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20486739
Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i20487848
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): West Traci C.
Abstract: Editorial, Washington Afro-American, December 3-9, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20487856
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i20530135
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Mollier Jean-Yves
Abstract: C. Ginzburg, Le Fromage et les vers, traduction française, Flammarion, Paris, 1980.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20530143
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i20531679
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Mérindol Jean-Yves
Abstract: L'AERES dialogue avec certains organismes de recherche pour tenir compte de leurs missions
spécifiques dans le système d'évaluation. Mais cette démarche ne semble pas, au moins pour le moment,
devoir être formalisée ou étendue. Ce dialogue est facilité par le nombre restreint des organismes et c'est
évidemment plus difficile de le mener avec les quelque deux cents autres établissements d'enseignement
supérieur que l'agence doit auditer. Mais on peut imaginer quelques options entre lesquelles les établisse-
ments auraient à choisir. Et ceux qui souhaiteraient une évaluation encore plus spécifique pourraient être
amenés à en assumer une partie du coût.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20531683
Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20533165
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): van Woudenberg René
Abstract: Fred Dretske, "Epistemic Operators", Journal of Philosophy 67
(1970): 1003-1013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20533170
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309659
Date: 2 1, 1979
Author(s): Wei-ming Tu
Abstract: This reflection on Errington's thought-provoking paper, by an intellectual historian and a student of Chinese philosophy, does not dispute her interpretive position on classical Malay literature in general and on hikayat in particular. Rather, it attempts to challenge three salient points of her argument: that the distinction between "oral" and "written" is a hazy one in the paratactic style of the hikayat; that the "images" in this type of literature are flat, repetitive and without content; and that the Malay art of story-telling is diametrically opposed to the rhetorical style of history characteristic of the post-Renaissance West. It is hoped that such a discussion will bring about fruitful encounters between scholars in different fields and disciplines in Asian studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2053417
Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20539803
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Sklodowska Elzbieta
Abstract: A. J. Greimas, "The Veridiction Contract", New Literary History, vol. XX, no 31 (1989),
pp. 651-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20539806
Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540240
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Sonderéguer María
Abstract: u..la narración alcanza su plena significación cuando se convierte en condición de la
existencia temporal", Paul Ricoeur, Tiempo y narración I, México, Siglo XXI, 1995, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540242
Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20540798
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Willson Patricia
Abstract: Ver, sobre este tema, M.T. Gramuglio, "Las minorías y la defensa de la cultura. Proyecciones
de un tópico de la crítica inglesa en Sur", Boletín/7 (octubre 1999), pp. 71-7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20540801
Journal Title: Hispamérica
Publisher: Hispamérica, Saúl Sosnowski
Issue: i20541639
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Molloy Sylvia
Abstract: "La sustitución del tema de la muerte por el que la locura no marca una
ruptura sino más bien una torsión dentro de la misma inquietud. Se trata siempre
de la nada de la existencia pero esa nada ya no se reconoce como término exterior
y final, a la vez amenaza y conclusión; se la experimenta en cambio desde el
interior, como la forma continua y constante de la existencia", Michel Foucault,
Histoire de la folie à l'âge classique, Paris, Union Générale des Editeurs, 1961,
p. 28. Traducción nuestra.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20541641
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Ciutǎ Felix
Abstract: Karin Fierke, 'Changing Worlds of Security', in Keith Krause and Michael C. Williams (eds),
Critical Security Studies (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press), p. 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542791
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542787
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Michel Torsten
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, 'What calls for Thinking', in David Farrell Krell (ed.), Martin Heidegger. Basic
Writings from Being and Time (1927) to The Task of Thinking (1964) (London and New York:
Routledge, 2007), p. 370.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542795
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20542799
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Brincat Shannon
Abstract: Hegel quoted in Mieczyslaw Maneli, 'Three Concepts of Freedom: Kant - Hegel - Marx',
Interpretation, 7:1 (January, 1978), p. 28
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20542805
Journal Title: Quaderni Urbinati di Cultura Classica
Publisher: Instituto Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i20546867
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Giordano-Zecharya Manuela
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20546873
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309677
Date: 8 1, 1978
Author(s): Weber Charles F.
Abstract: Although the Thai-Lao peasants living in rain-fed agricultural communities in northeastern Thailand have experienced some improvements in their socioeconomic situation as a consequence of the growth of the Thai economy since the mid-1950s, these peasants still constitute the poorest sector of the population of Thailand. Moreover, the socioeconomic position of the rural northeastern Thai populace has actually declined relative to that of the urban populace and that of the rural populace living in central Thailand. The economic disadvantageous position of Thai-Lao peasants is linked with a sense of being an ethnoregional minority within a polity that has been highly centralized since reforms instituted at the end of the nineteenth century. Much of the social action of Thai-Lao peasants with reference to the political-economic constraints on their world can be understood, as long-term research in one community reveals, as having been impelled by rational calculation aimed at improving the well being of peasant families. The ways in which peasants have assessed in practice the justice of these constraints as well as the ways in which they have assessed the limits to entrepreneurship must be seen, however, as being rooted in moral premises that Thai-Lao villagers have appropriated from Theravada Buddhism as known to them in their popular culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2054768
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: The Association for Asian Studies, Inc.
Issue: i309685
Date: 8 1, 1960
Author(s): Van Gennep Susan
Abstract: In Sumatra's Angkola Batak culture, rituals celebrating major kinship-related events such as marriage have many layers of social and symbolic meaning; they have political, kinship, musical, mythic, and philosophical dimensions as lengthy, oratory-filled ceremonies that unite wife-giving lineages with wife-receivers. This article examines several ways that the interpretive approach that is discussed in the introduction can help students of Indonesian ritual grasp diverse aspects of Batak marriage rituals such as their hidden symbolic organization and their practical political implications. The article deals with a short sequence of adat dance staged for anthropological research purposes. (Adat, once translated as customary law, roughly means Angkola ceremonial life, kinship norms, and political thought; adat is eminently flexible, redefined by each Batak generation.) The choreography of the dance (wife-receivers dancing with wife-givers), songs, clothing, the political biographies of the participants, and the fact that the event was staged render the ceremony open to both structural and social contextual inquiry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2056447
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20565615
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Festa Roberto
Abstract: Dopo un periodo, negli anni Sessanta e Settanta, in cui la fortuna di Lovejoy sembrò
declinare, lo studioso è tornato d'attualità negli anni Ottanta, con la ripresa della di-
scussione teorica intorno alia storia intellettuale. Nel 1987 il «Journal of the History of
Ideas» dedicò un numero per celebrare il mezzo secolo della Great Chain of Being, con
articoli di D.J. Wilson, G. Gordon-Bournique, E.P. Mahoney, F. Oakley e Melvin Ri-
chter (cfr. Lovejoy, «The Great Chain of Being» and the History of Ideas, in «Journal of
the History of Ideas», 48, 2, 1987). Contributi importanti sono inoltre venuti da Donald
R. Kelley, Tattuale editor del «Journal». Tra questi citiamo D.R. Kelley, Horizons of In-
tellectual History: Retrospect, Circumspect, Prospect, in «Journal of the History of Ideas»,
48, 1, 1987, pp. 143-169; e, sempre di Kelley, What is happening to the History of Ideas?,
in «Journal of the History of Ideas», 51, 1990, pp. 3-25. Proprio quest'ultimo articolo
rappresenta a tutt'oggi uno dei piú equilibrad tentativi di bilancio della history of ideas,
e al tempo stesso una meditazione sui futuro della disciplina da parte di uno degli «ere-
di» di Lovejoy. Significativamente Kelley propone di utilizzare Tespressione intellectual
history, e non piú history of ideas, proprio a voler allontanare i «fantasmi» di idealismo
impliciti nella scelta di fare della storia della filosofia il referente privilegiato della di-
sciplina (un'attitudine che era certamente di Lovejoy). Intellectual history è secondo Kel-
ley «doing a kind, or several kinds, of historical interpretation, in which philosophy and
literature figure not as controlling methods but as human creations suggesting the con-
ditions of historical understanding» [What is happening, cit., p. 18). L'approccio inter-
disciplinare, che era stato uno dei punti centrali del programma lovejoyano, rimane an-
cor oggi secondo Kelley valido, anche se ciò non deve significare Tadozione di strumenti
critici «alla moda» propri di altre discipline. A questo proposito si pone per Kelley il
problema dell'atteggiamento da tenere nei confronti di studiosi come Hayden White,
Dominick LaCapra, David Harlan, teorici del linguistic turn, un modo di fare storia che
si awale delle indicazioni provenienti dall'ermeneutica di Gadamer e Ricoeur, da Hei-
degger e dai suoi discepoli francesi Foucault e Derrida, e che rifiuta ogni reale possibi-
lità di giungere a una determinazione delle intenzioni dell'autore, cioè di un «significa-
to», della verità di un'opera, e del contesto entro cui Topera è stata composta. Per Kel-
ley non era possibile evitare le implicazioni che il linguistic turn poneva, tanto piú che
esso si rivelava utile soprattutto nel rivelare risorse, strutture, memorie culturali conser-
vate nel linguaggio (topoi, tropi, metafore, analogie), non soltanto dell'alta cultura ma
anche delle forme di espressione irriflessa, o popolare (anche questo secondo un'indica-
zione di Lovejoy). Se è però vero che il significato di un testo non è univoco, è altret-
tanto vero secondo Kelley che la ricerca delle intenzioni dell'autore è premessa indi-
spensabile di qualsiasi lavoro di storia intellettuale. Quanto alia questione dell'attenzio-
ne al «contesto», che i sostenitori del linguistic turn denigrano, Kelley prende atto che
non è certamente possibile giungere alia ricostruzione dell'intera rete di relazioni entro
cui un'opera si colloca. Ciò non significa pero che il testo o l'autore studiato non pos-
sano essere collocati in un «contesto», e che quindi, attraverso lo studio del linguaggio
di un'epoca, non si riesca a ricostruire le condizioni di possibilità per la nascita di
un'opera.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20565621
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Edizioni Dedalo
Issue: i20566703
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Sgambati Valeria
Abstract: Cfr. C. Ef Reagan and D, Stewart, eds., The Philosophy of Paul Ricoeur, Boston, 1978,
pp. 77-79, citato in H. White, La questione della narrazione nella teoria contemporanea
della storiografia, cit., pp. 69-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20566708
Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i20618429
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Clark Elizabeth A.
Abstract: R. P. C. Hanson, Allegory and Event: A Study of the Sources and Significance of Origen's
Interpretation of Scripture (Richmond: John Knox, 1959), 246.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20618431
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i20619665
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Liu Lydia H.
Abstract: Lu Xun 1981,
6:608
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20619669
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i20622153
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Elsaghe Yahya
Abstract: In "The Magic Mountain," the only literary text by Thomas Mann in which German anti-Semitism is an object of satire, it remains uncertain whether a number of individuals are to be considered Jewish, or not. These uncertainties are symptomatic of the novel's protracted genesis, and especially of Thomas Mann's lifelong, historically and biographically conditioned efforts to distance himself from the anti-Semitic typologies evident in his early work. The most prominent of the relevant individuals in "The Magic Mountain," Dr. Krokowski, exemplifies this phenomenon. The various characteristics attributed to Krokowski evoke the continuing memory of a literary figure through whom Thomas Mann had previously only intended to relieve his anti-Semitic resentments. Thus Krokowski has a dual significance, representing Thomas Mann's early anti-Semitism and his later and vigorous, but nevertheless not entirely successful, attempts to overcome it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20622158
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i20627996
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Kirby R. Kenneth
Abstract: In this article, the author argues that many of the best practices of oral history reflect phenomenological thinking even though practitioners may not describe themselves as using phenomenological methods. The author suggests that knowledge and application of phenomenology can clarify or minimize such potential problems as interviewer bias and informant unreliability and can refute accusations that oral history is less reliable than history taken from documents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628001
Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Kosicki Piotr H.
Abstract: Beginning with Maurice Halbwachs's theory of collective memory and the great body of sociological, historical, and political-science literature on war and aggression that postdates Halbwachs, the author attempts to identify the elements of aggressor—victim memory through a detailed analysis of the 1994 Rwandan genocide. In participant and third-party narratives of the genocide, it is possible to observe a commemorative quality in the campaign of mass murder. The author suggests that the persistence of post-traumatic culture and the failure of dialogue can lead people to kill in remembrance of earlier aggression: in such cases, "acting out" substitutes for "working through," with horrifying consequences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628282
Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Gödl Doris
Abstract: Using the example of former Yugoslavia, specifically the Serbian and Croatian nations, this article examines the transformation of collective memory of aggression and victimhood by focusing on the content of national narratives. The article begins by examining narratives developed at the founding of Yugoslavia and proceeds to trace the reinterpretation of these narratives as a function of their political instrumentality—especially in Serbia and Croatia—for respective nationalist projects. In the end, the article provides tools with which to frame two questions: first, whether political and social stability is being created at the cost of forgetting and repression; second, whether a "policy of remembrance" is socially "desirable" in practice. Both forgetting and an instrumental "policy of remembrance" based on the power of revelation perpetuate aggressor—victim divisions: what is needed, rather, is a stable, systematic process of remembrance and reconciliation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628284
Journal Title: International Journal of Sociology
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i20628279
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Curry Jane L.
Abstract: Democracy, the Market, and the New Europe (2006)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20628285
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i20630137
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Nicholson Hugh
Abstract: Paul Roscoe (2006: 43)
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp036
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für deutsches Altertum und deutsche Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i20656468
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Welz Dieter
Abstract: Nicolai [Anm. 49], S. 266.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20656475
Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675336
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Roussel Bernard
Abstract: Erasme, Ratio seu Methodius compendio perveniendi ad veram theologiam, dans
Ausgewählte Schriften, Bd. III, Darmstadt, 1967, p. 230 et 258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675338
Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20675774
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Margolin Jean-Claude
Abstract: Selon l'expression forgée par Vladimir Jankelevitch dans son livre, Le Mensonge
(Confluences, 1942).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20675778
Journal Title: Bibliothèque d'Humanisme et Renaissance
Publisher: Librairie Droz S. A.
Issue: i20680879
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Stawarz-Luginbühl Ruth
Abstract: Exemplaires consultés: BNF (Gallica); Bibliothèque publique et universitaire de Neu-
châtel (cote ZQ 300) ; Stadt- und Universitätsbibliothek Bern (cote k. 14).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20680883
Journal Title: Latin American Perspectives
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i20684666
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Barbera Rosemary
Abstract: The dictatorship in Chile perpetrated massive human rights violations for 17 years, causing a rupture in social processes and engendering fear in the population. Data being gathered in an ongoing participatory action research study of the población (shanty-town) La Pincoya show that while memory can be debilitating to most persons, it may empower others. Memories of the practices of the military regime continue to cause fear in some of the population, affecting community cohesion and participation in local organizations. This has led to the dismantling of social networks in the community, robbing members of their ability to be the protagonists of their own lives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20684672
Journal Title: Journal of Religion in Africa
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i20696813
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lambranca Béatrice Dias
Abstract: This paper focuses on gendered processes of socialization experienced by Christian religious groups in different Christian churches in post-civil war Gorongosa, a district in the centre of Mozambique. Discourses of radical social transformation through Christian interventions and experiences are prominent among Christians, both men and women. Yet a comprehensive and longitudinal analysis of the social world in which the Christian groups are embedded and the performances of Christian men and women demonstrates the emergence of complex processes of transformation and continuities with local cultural beliefs and practices that many non-Christians have partially or thoroughly reformed or abandoned. These changes and continuities also encompass the manifestation of fluid forms of submission and creativity, and masculinities and femininities against the ideological notion of thoroughly new and closed Christian identities. The overall analysis suggests that the tension between the practices of change and continuity are necessary in order to create and sustain the legitimacy of the various Christian groups in Gorongosa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20696817
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i20697357
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Mac-Millan Mary
Abstract: Agamben 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20697363
Journal Title: The Personalist Forum
Publisher: The Personalist Forum
Issue: i20708667
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Gulick Walter B.
Abstract: What is a Thing?, trans. W. B.
Barton, Jr., and Vera Deutsch (Chicago: Henry Regnery Company, 1967)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20708671
Journal Title: The Personalist Forum
Publisher: The Personalist Forum
Issue: i20708748
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Lyle Randall R.
Abstract: Ricoeur, Oneself as Another, 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20708755
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Society for Utopian Studies
Issue: i20719896
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Jenson Michael
Abstract: A recurrent misconception about the concept of utopia fails to realize fully that its essential endeavor constitutes a speculative act involving the distribution of power and resources. Consequently, utopian desire is closely linked to structures of power and can be manipulated by interests in positions of influence within these structures. It is these connections to the machinations of power that bring utopian visions their potential for social/political influence. However, these same types of links also provide avenues for these conceptions to be cynically influenced in ways that can usurp individual autonomy. The role of power and utopia can be analyzed in the formative process of a specific social structure as well as in their contribution to the conception of a common heritage or history. The "historical perspective" often serves as the foundation for the production of propaganda seeking to capture the imagination of a populace either to instigate positive social change or to legitimize an oppressive regime. Through the lens of Collingwood's philosophy of history, this article investigates the connection that the "historical consciousness" has to the attributes of power and utopia as well as the role that this relationship plays in the formation of a collective mentality. In short, it studies the essential characteristics of the bond between individuals that allows a community or collective to perpetuate itself. It also explores how the attributes of power and utopia can use latent historical perceptions to strengthen the process of ideological integration that underlies any social action or formal structure of authority.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20719901
Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i20721262
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): COWAN MICHAEL
Abstract: Pauli, Rhythmus und Resonanz, p. 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20721265
Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i20722633
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Scheil Andrew
Abstract: Versions of History: from Antiquity to the Enlightenment, ed. Donald Kelley (New
Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1991), p. 66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20722635
Journal Title: Ecología Política
Publisher: Icaria editorial / Fundación hogar del empleado
Issue: i20742913
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Riechmann Jorge
Abstract: Aquí puede enlazarse con la reflexión de Jon Elster sobre los «esta-
dos que son esencialmente subproductos» (Uvas amargas —sobre la
Subversión de la racionalidad, Península, Barcelona 1988, capttulo 2); y
con las recomendaciones de José Sanmartin sobre la conveniencia de
preferlr las buenas prácticas educativas a la ortopedla genética (Los nue-
vos redentores, Anthropos, Barcelona 1987, p. 150-151).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20742922
Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i20749578
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Marrouchi Mustapha
Abstract: Caryl Phillips's narrative is painfully concerned with the relationship of Empire, Colony, and the In-between; Europe, Africa, and the Caribbean; slavery, rebellion, and freedom; Men, women and children; absent or useless fathers and damaged, aimless sons. It explores what hold in common while never losing sight of the painful quotidian, the specific. It is a narrative where the picaresque shakes hands with the epic and the linearity is broken, encircled, and put fast forward or in reverse by a mise-en-abîme of sorts: the tale-within-the-tale-within-the-tale even if interrupted by the tapestry of an emergent voice that finally proposes itself as both the identity and the difference of its verbal universe. "Enter your own self and discover the world," Phillips seems to be saying, "but also go out into the world and discover yourself." Once that call is answered, fiction itself becomes another way of questioning truth as we strive for it through the paradox of a lie. That lie can be called the imagination. It can also be seen as a parallel reality. For it may be observed as a critical mirror of what passes for the truth in the world of convention. It certainly sets up a second universe of being, where the narrator, say Cambridge in Cambridge, has a reality greater, though no less important, than the host of hastily met and then forgotten people we deal with on a daily basis. It is in this sense that Phillips brings into light another way of telling in that his narrative gives weight and presence to the virtues and vices—the fugitive personalities—of our daily acquaintance. This is the prerogative of his style, which I try to discuss in this essay. It has the power to render disenchantment and pleasure without resolving the contradiction between them. In fact, what holds them in tension, as equal forces straining in opposite directions, is the artist's mature subjectivity, stripped of hubris, unashamed either of its fallibility or of the modest assurance it has gained as a result of being out of place and not quite right.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20749583
Journal Title: Il Giappone
Publisher: Centro di Cultura Italo-Giapponese
Issue: i20749767
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Vienna Maria Gioia
Abstract: Il sisma rase al suolo la zona di Tökyö e i paesi circostanti (1 settembre 1923).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20749772
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20757792
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Funk Julika
Abstract: Bachmann-Medick, s. Anm. 84, 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20757796
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762096
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Silvennoinen Martti
Abstract: SILVENNOINEN 2003, p.167
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762110
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762120
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: KELLER, HIRSELAND, SCHNEIDER and VIEHÖVER
(2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762128
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: Center for Historical Social Research / Zentrum für Historische Sozialforschung
Issue: i20762349
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Schmid Georg
Abstract: Unquestionable as history may seem, there are all the same quite different readings and disparate inferences despite the same series of facts. This goes to show that even professional historians can sometimes be overcome by meditations on past possibilities of bifurcations. As to "alternatives to actual history," is serves well to bear in mind that few are plausible, but that belief in a predeterminative universe of necessities would certainly be misplaced. Whereas some occurrences are clear-cut enough to make us understand which components would have had to be changed in order to get a different outcome, others are of such a high degree of complexity that attempts to imagine an alternative course and divergent results remain rather illusory: the examples of Midway (the former type) and the defeat of France in 1940 (intricately overdetermined) clearly show that it pays in any case, in defiance to all complexities, to consider past potential. It is prerequisite for choosing between future options in more reasonable and efficient ways than hitherto.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20762355
Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i20778321
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Volek Emil
Abstract: Jan Mukařovský planteó esta dialéctica de la referencialidad en su trabajo pionero "El arte
como hecho sígnico" (1934), aunque sin ninguna referencia al funcionamiento del sueño. Aunque
reconocido como "manifiesto" de la semiótica de la Escuela de Praga, este bosquejo, general-
mente mal traducido, no tuvo el menor eco en la semiótica posterior, embarrada en los pañales
de la sémiologie saussureana o en la tupida escolástica peirceana. Habría que releerlo junto con
el gran trabajo revisionista y desconstructivista, "La intencionalidad y la no intencionalidad en
el arte" (1943). Ambos ahora en Signo, función y valor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20778326
Journal Title: Journal for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Publisher: Group for Early Modern Cultural Studies
Issue: i20798265
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Domingo Darryl P.
Abstract: Drawing attention to the complex reciprocal relationship between commercialized leisure and commercial literature in the so-called "Age of Wit," this essay reconceives of the witty and witless in two important ways. Taking for granted, first of all, that wit is usually analyzed in terms of the efficacy of verbal language, the essay examines how and why debates concerning true and false wit were played out in physical terms—in this case, through the motions, gestures, and attitudes of the dancing body. Second of all, the essay attempts to account for the enduring, if unwitting, attractions of "false wit" by likening it to the tricks and transformations of contemporary English pantomime. Satirists of the 1720s, 1730s, and 1740s frequently invoke the unmeaning motion of Harlequin as a visual way of proscribing the verbal excesses of extravagant language. At the same time, apologists for pantomime associate Harlequin's "dumb Wit" with truth, reason, and the pattern of nature, claiming that the genre's corporeality allowed it to transcend the limitations and equivocations of words. The essay concludes that the popularity of pantomime contextualizes the Augustan reaction against false wit, in that it identifies a source of aesthetic pleasure in the public's eagerness to be duped by apparent sameness in difference. Early eighteenth-century readers enjoy luxuriant, illogical, and mixed metaphors, forced similes, and trifling jibes and quibbles for the same reason that early eighteenth-century spectators delight in the unexpected turns of pantomimic entertainment: in a world under the sway of Harlequin's magical slapstick, audiences derive satisfaction from being deceived.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20798269
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i20799672
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Caul-Futy Édouard Fouré
Abstract: Dans un registre similaire, c'est par la porte de la ruse et de la malice que Victor A. Stoichita réussit
le mieux à appréhender la mélodie des läutari roumains (2008: 52).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20799678
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i20799672
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Les pourcentages cités dans ce paragraphe proviennent de Hofmeyr 2006: 48-58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20799682
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i20799672
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Olivier Emmanuelle
Abstract: Ces relations sont facilitées dans la mesure
où Jul'hoan etIXuu parlent deux dialectes d'une
même langue (Güdelmann et Vossen 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20799683
Journal Title: Sociological Focus
Publisher: North Central Sociological Association
Issue: i20831390
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Dickie-Clark Hamish F.
Abstract: In this paper I try to show what kind of theory Giddens' theory of structuration is. I do so by first listing what Giddens accepts and what he rejects in his assessments of functionalism, hermeneutics, structuralism, and the writings of Marx. For what I think are good reasons, most of this part is given over to the use Giddens makes of Gadamer's hermeneutic philosophy. Next I set out my understanding of Giddens' view of theory as primarily concerned "with reworking conceptions of human being and human doing, social reproduction and social transformation" (Giddens 1984:xx). I seek to show the crucial implications of this for the way that theory enters directly into and helps to consitute social life. Taken together, these two steps lead to the conclusion that Giddens' theory is neither an attempt at an over-arching "Grand Theory," nor an imposition of new orthodoxy in place of the old. Instead I suggest that his avowed eclecticism is closely akin to the hermeneutic goal contained in Gadamer's concept of the "fusion of horizons." This notion recognizes the never-to-be-completed, but basic, human activity of creatively questioning what has been handed down from the past. It is questioned so that it may be applied — incomplete as it is — to the changed situation of the present with its different interests and problems. That those who can and do question it are themselves the products of past tradition, calls for a kind of social theory that is in some ways different from that modeled on the explanatory "laws" of natural science. I contend that Giddens' theory of structuration is such a theory. (For an introductory overview of the theory itself, see Dickie-Clark, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20831395
Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i310000
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Zurcher Jerzy
Abstract: In recent years, sociologists and anthropologists have conducted significant studies of modern life using concepts and perspectives derived from symbolic anthropology. This paper discusses the theoretical and methodological problems entailed, including the distinction between symbolic and nonsymbolic actions. Research on three major areas of behavior is reviewed: (a) studies of institutions, especially politics, law, and social control; (b) studies of ceremonial events, including life-cycle rituals, sports, and festivals; and (c) studies of everyday life, including consumer goods and food, and popular culture. We conclude with a discussion of the methodological issues of location and dimensionality and the different forms of symbolic analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2083183
Journal Title: Islamic Studies
Publisher: The Islamic Research Institute
Issue: i20837267
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): AFZAAL AHMED
Abstract: Jonathan E. Brockopp, ed., The
Islamic Ethics of Life: Abortion, War, and Euthanasia (Columbia: University of South Carolina
Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20837269
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20841693
Date: 9 1, 1954
Author(s): DEVAUX André-A.
Abstract: Méditations Cartésiennes, p. 3-4. Cf. aussi l'article sur la
Crise des Sciences Européennes où Husserl s'adresse à « chaquc homme
qui veut sérieusement devenir philosophe » (Et. Phil., 1949, 3-4,
p. 274-275).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20841696
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849478
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Monseu Nicolas
Abstract: Ibid, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849482
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849478
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Thirion Benoît
Abstract: Nous paraphrasons Ravaisson, H, p. 17 (119).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849486
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849541
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Bouton Christophe
Abstract: Sein undZeit, § 68, p. 350
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849550
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849693
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Goetschei Jacques
Abstract: Le dieu-masque: une figure du Dionysos d'Athènes, Paris, La Découverte, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849695
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849827
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Cormier Philippe
Abstract: J. Ratzinger, Zum Personverständnis in der Theologie, in Dogma und Verkündigung
Munich, Erich Wewel Verlag, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849830
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849843
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Chenavier Robert
Abstract: Husserl, Krisis, p. All All.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20849849
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i20849955
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Bienenstock Myriam
Abstract: Olivier Tinland (éd.), Lectures de Hegel, Paris,
Le Livre de poche, 2005, p. 223-267.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/leph.092.0207
Journal Title: International Journal of Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Plenum Publishing Corporation
Issue: i20852882
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Funari Pedro Paulo A.
Abstract: This paper discusses the relationship between history and archaeology in general, their common concerns and links with historical archaeology. It deals with the development of historical archaeology in three related South American countries, Argentina, Brazil, and Uruguay, and pays attention to recent trends in the theory and practice of the discipline in the area.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20852884
Journal Title: International Journal of Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i20853193
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Demers Paul A.
Abstract: In many parts of the world, excavations of British military sites have unearthed material reflecting lifeways in the British Empire. Specifically, studies of historical ceramics and glass have greatly advanced our understanding of status and material expression. This study highlights the current body of knowledge on British military crested ceramics, contrasting the rarity of archaeological finds with their abundance in documentary sources. An elemental stylistic analysis reveals that these crests expressed regimental affiliation as the fundamental unit of self-identification. Symbolic interpretation of these crests stresses their active role in the socialization of officers and structuring collective memory, particularly through the mess institution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20853199
Journal Title: RQ
Publisher: Reference Services Division of the American Library Association
Issue: i20862750
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: Some literary theorists have suggested that the process of reading is a complex one and is central to the interpretation of texts. These theorists do not ignore the creation of texts or the authors' creative activities, but place special emphasis on the role of the reader. This approach has relevance for the study of the use of libraries. This paper offers an analogy between text and library and between reader and library user. The analogy is possible because both reader and user adopt intentional stances with regard to that which is to be interpreted and employ cognitive and affective means in interpretation. At the heart of this approach is a phenomenological-hermeneutical way of thinking that treats reading and library use as an event consisting of varying intention and interpretive possibilities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20862762
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i20868876
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Bartel Caroline A.
Abstract: Experiences that do not fit squarely into known categories pose a challenge to notions of organizational learning that rely primarily on scientific or experiential approaches. Making sense of, responding to, and learning from such unusual experiences requires reflection and novel action by organizational actors. We argue that narrative development processes make this organizational learning possible. By developing narratives, organizational actors create situated understandings of unusual experiences, negotiate consensual meanings, and engage in coordinated actions. Through the accumulation of narratives about unusual experiences, an organization builds a memory with generative qualities. Specifically, through narratives, actors evoke memories of prior unusual experiences and how they were dealt with, and this generates new options for dealing with emerging unusual experiences. We outline a framework detailing how narrative development processes enable organizational learning from unusual experiences and conclude by summarizing how this approach differs from and yet builds upon scientific and experiential approaches to learning.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1287/orsc.1100.0536
Journal Title: Revue française d'études américaines
Publisher: Editions Belin
Issue: i20875993
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Hauchecorne Mathieu
Abstract: This essay is a comparative study of the tributes paid to the American philosopher John Rawls, in France and the United States, after his death in November 2010. Whereas in the U.S. tributes to Rawls appeared in scholarly journals, in France they did in political magazines and general interest media. Besides, the focus in U.S. journals on Rawls's philosophical commitments is at odds with the emphasis placed by the French media on the political interpretations of his theory of justice. The contrast between Rawls's French and U.S. "funerals" is a consequence of the way intellectual fields in France and the U.S. differ in their relation to politics. While Rawls conformed with what was expected of him in the American academia by staying away from politics almost all his life, he was seen in France as an intellectuel engagé, the typical figure of intellectual life since the Dreyfus case. The contrast between the French and American reactions to Rawls's death is also related to the fact that those who first got interested in his theory of justice in France were supporters of the anti-totalitarian left or center-right, rather than academic philosophers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/20875998
Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i336426
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Mauss Edward A.
Abstract: Marcel Mauss, Sociologie et Anthropologie, Paris:
Presses Universitaires de France, 1960, pp. xxiii-xxx.
Mauss
xxiii
Sociologie et Anthropologie
1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2091136
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: State University of New York at Buffalo
Issue: i310313
Date: 9 1, 1978
Author(s): Hofstadter Reiner
Abstract: "Questioning the
Foundation of Practical Philosophy," Human Studies, I, 1978, pp. 357-368
357
I
Human Studies
1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107140
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i310337
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Hoffman Mark
Abstract: "A Philosophical Perspective on the Problems of Metaphor," in R. H. Hoffman and R.
Honeck (eds.), Cognition and Figurative Language (Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum,
1979), 47-67.
Hoffman
A Philosophical Perspective on the Problems of Metaphor
47
Cognition and Figurative Language
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107356
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Brown University
Issue: i336936
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Ricoeur Robert
Abstract: "When is the Will Free?" Philosophical Perspectives, vol. 4 (Atascadero: Ridgview Pub-
lishing) (forthcoming).
4
Philosophical Perspectives
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2107958
Journal Title: American Journal of Political Science
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i310502
Date: 2 1, 1996
Author(s): Kritzer Herbert M.
Abstract: Interpretation is central to the social scientist's process of analysis, regardless of whether that analysis relies on quantitative or qualitative data. This essay presents a "reconstructed logic" of the interpretation process involved in quantitative data analysis. Drawing upon a broad literature on interpretation, the paper shows how the interpretive processes for quantitative "data" has significant similarities to interpretation in other settings. For example, both qualitative textual analysis and quantitative statistical analysis rely upon contextual and topological paradigms, although the specific conventions differ in many respects. The process of play employed by musicians and actors in developing an interpretation of a piece of music or a dramatic role suggests ways in which the quantitative analyst might let data perform to help in arriving at appropriate interpretations of statistical results. The lines between quantitative and qualitative social science are less clear than often presumed. Both types of analysis involve extensive interpretation, and tools of interpretation that have many fundamental similarities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2111692
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern History
Publisher: The University of Chicago Press
Issue: i337200
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur distills this point well: "When we discover that there are
several cultures instead of just one and consequently at the time when we acknowledge
the end of a sort of cultural monopoly, be it illusory or real, we are threatened with the
destruction of our own discovery. Suddenly it becomes possible that there are just
others, that we ourselves are an 'other' among others" (History and Truth [Evanston,
Ill., 1965], p. 278).
Ricoeur
278
History and Truth
1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2124538
Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: Southern Political Science Association
Issue: i337338
Date: 11 1, 1968
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Fred R.
Abstract: Die Abenteuer der Dialektik (Franldurt-Main: Suhrkamp, 1968),
7-11
7
Die Abenteuer der Dialektik
1968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2129401
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i311434
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Young Lisa
Abstract: 22, 141, 211
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2155816
Journal Title: The Journal of Southern History
Publisher: Southern Historical Association
Issue: i338382
Date: 11 1, 1971
Author(s): Ricoeur Drew Gilpin
Abstract: Rhett, "Agricultural Address," 714.
714
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2207713
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211059
Date: 11 1, 1997
Author(s): Kane Anne E.
Abstract: Though the process of meaning construction is widely recognized to be a crucial factor in the mobilization, unfolding, and outcomes of social movements, the conditions and mechanisms that allow meaning construction and cultural transformation are often misconceptualized and/or underanalyzed. Following a "tool kit" perspective on culture, dominant social movement theory locates meaning only as it is embodied in concrete social practices. Meaning construction from this perspective is a matter of manipulating static symbols and meaning to achieve goals. I argue instead that meaning is located in the structure of culture, and that the condition and mechanism of meaning construction and transformation are, respectively, the metaphoric nature of symbolic systems, and individual and collective interpretation of those systems in the face of concrete events. This theory is demonstrated by analyzing, through textual analysis, meaning construction during the Irish Land War, 1879-1882, showing how diverse social groups constructed new and emergent symbolic meanings and how transformed collective understandings contributed to specific, yet unpredictable, political action and movement outcomes. The theoretical model and empirical case demonstrates that social movement analysis must examine the metaphoric logic of symbolic systems and the interpretive process by which people construct meaning in order to fully explain the role of culture in social movements, the agency of movement participants, and the contingency of the course and outcomes of social movements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223306
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i211061
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Ku Agnes S.
Abstract: There exist around the notion of the public three different yet overlapping dichotomies posed on different levels of analysis: public (sphere) versus private (sphere), public versus mass, and publicness versus privacy/secrecy. Habermas's book ([1962]1989) incorporates all the three sets of dichotomy without resolving the contradictory meanings and bridging the gaps among them. As a result, his conception of the public sphere becomes paradoxical in terms, and it undertheorizes the cultural property of publicness. This article proposes an alternative conception of the public that may encompass the structural, institutional, and cultural levels of theorization in a more precise and coherent way. It is argued that the public is an imagined category about citizen membership that is attached to both institutions of state and civil society. In political practices, a symbolic "public" is institutionalized through an open communicative space where it is called upon, constructed, and contested as the central source of cultural references. In this connection, a notion of public credibility is introduced as an attempt to bring forth a richer and more dynamic conception about the role of culture in democratic struggles than that of critical rationality by Habermas.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223313
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Jossey-Bass Inc.
Issue: i211057
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Rogers Mary F.
Abstract: The work of literary structuralists, particularly Roland Barthes, provides sharper insights into ethnomethodology than symbolic interactionism, labeling theory, or phenomenology. Further, it suggests that the metaphor of text may be fruitful for analysts of everyday life. Greater theoretical benefits derive from that metaphor, however, if one applies it using the ideas of literary theorists outside the structuralist tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/223347
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004205
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): MAGATTI MAURO
Abstract: Lipset 1969: 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004210
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004116
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): TEDESCHI ENRICA
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, La structure symbolique de I'action, cit., p. 38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004523
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004828
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): ANDRINI SIMONA
Abstract: Jamme - Schneider (1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004831
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23004843
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): PARDI FRANCESCO
Abstract: The article identifies a paradox in the concept of person and in its use. Modernity, and the liberation from the logic of status, should have brought about the ultimate consolidation of the idea of personal value. On the contrary it caused such a drastic functional differentiation within society that the individual has come to be defined by his/her function (citizen, economic actor, etc.) rather than as the single bearer of different roles. The concept of person has thus become an expression to identify only the communicative aspect of social life. That is the reason why in our complex society the concept of person cannot find a proper location and comes to the fore only when the other codes fail.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23004936
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005130
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): PAVESI NICOLETTA
Abstract: ibid.: 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005136
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005171
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): CEREDA AMBROGIA
Abstract: Castellani (1995: 70-72).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005179
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005104
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): MARTINI ELVIRA
Abstract: Plutarco 1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005221
Journal Title: Studi di Sociologia
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i23005054
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): CADARIO VITTORINO
Abstract: 2001b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23005280
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23011419
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Ram Kalpana
Abstract: The long-standing dominance of history in the adjudication of debates on postcolonialism and modernity in India has resulted in the relegation of the knowledge claims of `classical' performance traditions and aesthetic concepts to the domain of the essentializing and the untrustworthy. This paper argues that performances of music and dance have preserved an understanding of tradition that is more dynamic and agential than that put forward by nationalist understandings of tradition, and that aesthetic conceptions continue to illuminate the values and efficacy of these practices in engaging the affects of spectators. The paper explores in particular the subject position of the rasika as offering a distinctive way of inhabiting the present. The class privilege implicit in being able to take up such an invitation is explored in the second part of the paper. La longue domination de l'histoire dans l'orientation des débats sur le post-colonialisme et la modernité en Inde a relégué les prétentions au statut de savoir des arts performatifs et des concepts esthétiques « classiques » au domaine des choses essentialisantes et peu fiables. Le présent article fait valoir que les performances de musique et de danse ont préservé une compréhension de la tradition plus dynamique et agentielle que celle mise en avant dans les interprétations nationalistes, et que les conceptions esthétiques continuent de mettre en lumière les valeurs et l'efficacité de ces pratiques en faisant appel aux affects des spectateurs. L'article explore en particulier la position de sujet du rasika comme une manière différente d'habiter le présent. Le privilège de classe, implicite dans la possibilité d'accepter une telle invitation, est exploré dans la deuxième partie de l'article.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9655.2011.01694.x
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23011305
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Armstrong-Fumero Fernando
Abstract: This article draws on ethnographic examples to examine how rural Maya-speakers in the Mexican state of Yucatán ground the experience of identity politics in quotidian engagements with pre-Hispanic objects and utterances in the Maya language. My argument is intended as a revision of models of critical scholarship that have been influenced by poststructuralism and that place an overwhelming emphasis on discourse as a modality through which politically viable identities are created and performed. Specific examples show how vernacular multiculturalism is shaped by the agency of forms of language use and physical objects that have been a part of local life-worlds long before the popularization of Mayan identity politics. This offers some potentials for collaborative work that have not been fully explored in poststructural critiques of representation. L'auteur s'appuie sur des exemples ethnographiques pour étudier la manière dont les locuteurs du maya vivant dans les zones rurales de l'état mexicain du Yucatán fondent leur expérience de la politique identitaire sur une interaction quotidienne avec les objets et énoncés préhispaniques de la langue maya. Son argumentation se veut une remise en cause des modèles universitaires critiques influencés par le poststructuralisme, qui mettent lourdement l'accent sur le discours en tant que modalité permettant de créer et de réaliser des identités politiquement viables. Des exemples concrets montrent comme un multiculturalisme vernaculaire se constitue par l'action des formes d'usage du langage et des objets matériels qui faisaient partie de la vie locale longtemps avant que la politique identitaire maya se popularise. Cette approche offre un potentiel de travail en collaboration qui n'a pas été complètement exploré par les critiques poststructuralistes de la représentation.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9655.2010.01669.x
Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23013006
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Gelbart Matthew
Abstract: Rodel, 'Extreme Noise
Terror'.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/ml/gcr037
Journal Title: Religious Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23013293
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): SEACHRIS JOSHUA
Abstract: Death and futility are among a cluster of themes that closely track discussions of life's meaning. Moreover, futility is thought to supervene on naturalistic meta-narratives because of how they will end. While the nature of naturalistic meta-narrative endings is part of the explanation for concluding that such meta-narratives are cosmically or deeply futile, this explanation is truncated. I argue that the reason the nature of the ending is thought to be normatively important is first anchored in the fact that narrative ending qua ending is thought to be normatively important. Indeed, I think futility is often thought to characterize naturalistic meta-narratives because a narrative's ending has significant proleptic power to elicit a wide range of broadly normative human responses on, possibly, emotional, aesthetic, and moral levels towards the narrative as a whole.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0034412510000223
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23013417
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Mourad François-Marie
Abstract: Ibid., p. 494.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23013424
Journal Title: Information Systems Research
Publisher: The Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences (INFORMS)
Issue: i23011115
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Saunders Carol S.
Abstract: Hollingshead and
McGrath's (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23015731
Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23017455
Date: 8 1, 2011
Author(s): Rhodes R. A. W.
Abstract: What intellectual influence, if any, have British public administration scholars had on their American counterparts since World War II? In this article, the author briefly reviews the major areas of theory and research in the British study of publication administration, further identifying important contributions by British scholars in the areas of modernist-empiricism, the new public management, regulation, policy networks and governance, and interpretive theory. Although there is a discernible American influence on British public administration, there is little British impact on U.S. public administration; nowadays it is a one-way street. Increasingly, British scholars are involved in a growing community of European public administration scholars with whom they share active, two-way connections. Recent European developments suggest that American and European public administration academics are growing further apart. Due to the immense strength of modernist-empiricism throughout American universities, plus the interpretive turn to a European epistemology of "blurred genres," these twin, traditionally self-referential, communities seem to be parting company with an attendant danger that future intellectual engagement may be a dead end.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1540-6210.2011.02388.x
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23020023
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Cisneros Ariane Hentsch
Abstract: Dallmayr 2009, 24, 27
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9795.2011.00475.x
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23019993
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Rothchild Jonathan
Abstract: Rothchild 2007
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-9795.2010.00465.x
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i23020380
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Marks Susan
Abstract: Schwartz argues for the later rabbinic development of practices related to death: "Indeed, if it
is the case that even strongly 'Jewish' Jews were often buried without the accompaniment of Jewish
iconography—that despite what we are accustomed to think about such liminal moments as birth,
death, marriage and so on, death was not yet generally an occasion among Palestinian Jews for
strong public affirmation of group identity—then Beth Shearim shows that the judaization of
Jewish burial practice was now (third-fourth century) underway in some circles" (2001: 154).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr001
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23025453
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): GUNNELL JOHN G.
Abstract: Cora Diamond, The Realistic Spirit in Philosophy: Wittgenstein, Philosophy, and the Mind
(Cambridge: MIT, 1991).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0260210510001609
Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i23025612
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Sherman Anita Gilman
Abstract: Wulf Kansteiner, "Memory, Media, and Menschen: Where Is the Individual in Collective
Memory Studies?" Memory Studies 3 (2010): 3-4.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/shq.2011.0003
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23029135
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Brauer Juliane
Abstract: Reinhart Koselleck, „Erfahrungsraum" und „Erwartungshorizont". Zwei historische
Kategorien, in: ders., Vergangene Zukunft. Zur Semantik geschichtlicher Zeiten,
Frankfurt 1989, S. 349-375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23029140
Journal Title: Religion & Literature
Publisher: University of Notre Dame English Department
Issue: i23049383
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Wright Peter Matthews
Abstract: Jonathan Z. Smith's essay "Map Is Not Territory" was a watershed event in the academic study of religion, but, this author contends, for reasons yet to be adequately addressed by the discipline. Indeed, as argued in this essay, Smith's "Map" is best understood as a Romantic manifesto performed in a register indebted to Wordsworth and Wallace Stevens (following such precursors as Kant, Coleridge, and Ralph Waldo Emerson) as opposed to the Romantic register of Mircea Eliade (which was much indebted to the late German Romanticism of Hegel). Consequently, to practice the academic study of religion in a manner consistent with Smith's intervention involves a specifically Romantic mode of literary engagement with the textual remains by which one traces the careers of myth, ritual, and experiences of transformation among individuals and groups.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23049389
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i23055602
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): RORTY AMÉLIE
Abstract: Alvin Goldman, Simulating Minds (New York: Oxford University Press,
2006), Ch. 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23055638
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i23055602
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): BUTERIN DAMION
Abstract: Nietzsche, The Anti-Christ §§ 9-10, 8-9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23055641
Journal Title: Illinois Classical Studies
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i23057364
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): COOK ALBERT
Abstract: Schadewaldt, op. cit., pp. 391-94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23062531
Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071583
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hayek Ghenwa
Abstract: Introduction; Jens Hanssen's Fiti-de-Siecle Beirut.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X596140
Journal Title: Journal of Arabic Literature
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23071596
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Scott Bede
Abstract: This article explores the crisis initiated by colonial modernity in Naguib Mahfouz's 1947 novel Midaq Alley. I begin by discussing the significance of anger within the narrative, arguing that this dominant structure of feeling could be read as a collective response to wider social and historical forces. In other words, rather than understanding emotion as the "subjective property" of the individual, I regard it here as a relational practice embedded within and determined by quite specific sociocultural circumstances. I then proceed to discuss the role of rumour in the novel and the significance of its pronounced melodramatic qualities. In the first case, I shall argue, the circulation of rumour provides a way of containing or quarantining the negative feelings produced by modernity, while also reinforcing the boundaries of a community facing the very real possibility of its own demise. In the second case, I would like to suggest that the narrative's tendency to privilege the melodramatic mode creates a sense of social order and moral intelligibility by channelling these feelings into a stable and predictable generic structure. This latter project is ultimately frustrated, however, when the forces of evil emerge to destroy the novel's principle representative of virtue.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1163/157006411X575792
Journal Title: Latin American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i23072521
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Sabloff Jeremy A.
Abstract: This study builds on the premise that local knowledge of limestone—and its workable characteristics—was foundational to landscape inhabitation in the Puuc region of Yucatán, México. Classic Maya architecture of the northern Yucatán generally is considered to represent the apogee of Maya construction prowess with extensive use of core-veneer masonry and the creation of tall, wide corbelled vaults. Less commonly discussed is the variable distribution of high-quality limestone across the Yucatán, the social matrix that undergirds the quarrying, transporting, and working of limestone, and the pronounced social differences materialized in stone architecture. This study explores these three topics by bringing to bear Yucatec Mayan linguistic evidence and excavation data from the archaeological site of Sayil, in the hilly Puuc region of Yucatán. That information provides a basis for understanding the development of a sprawling residential complex, the role that variable limestone quality played in its expansion, and serves as an index of intra-compound social difference. Late additions to the dwellings indicate that recognition of the cultural value of carved stone persisted long after masonry skills became attenuated. The durability of stone renders it a particularly effective—if underutilized—medium for interpreting social landscapes of the past. Este estudio amplifica la premisa de que el conocimiento de la piedra caliza—y sus propiedades arteseanales—fue una base fundamental para la ocupación del paisaje de la Región Puuc, Yucatán, México. En general, la arquitectura de los mayas de la época Clásica del norte de Yucatán se considera representativa del apogeo de su proeza arquitectónica con el uso extensivo de núcleos de piedra burda recubiertos de piedra labrada y la creación de habitaciones con bóvedas altas y anchas. Menos mencionados son la distribución geográfica variable de piedra caliza de alta calidad a través de Yucatán, la matriz social que permite la explotación de canteras y el transporte y trabajo de los bloques, y la diferencia social profunda que se nota en la arquitectura en piedra. Este estudio explora estos tres temas usando evidencia de la lengua maya yucateca y datos de excavaciones del sitio arqueológico de Sayil, en la serranía Puuc. Esta información proporciona las bases para entender el desarrollo de un grupo residencial expansivo y el papel que la calidad variable de la piedra caliza tuvo en su expansión, y sirve como índice de diferencias sociales entre los habitantes del mismo grupo. Adiciones tardías a los edificios indican que el reconocimiento del valor cultural de la piedra trabajada persistió mucho tiempo después de la disminución de las técnicas especializadas de albañilería. La durabilidad de la piedra la hace un buen instrumento, aunque poco utilizado, para interpretar los paisajes sociales del pasado.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23072558
Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23074560
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Martín Encarna Nicolás
Abstract: F. Bédarida: «Temps présent
et présence de l'histoire», que es
la conclusion del volumen dedi-
cado a su homenaje. La cita en
pág. 401.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075555
Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23074560
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Saz Ismael
Abstract: Tony Judt: «The past is ano-
ther country; myth and memory
in post-war Europe», en J.-W.
Müller (ed.): Memory and Power
in Post-War Europe, págs. 157-
183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075557
Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23074563
Date: 8 1, 2001
Author(s): Sánchez Carlos Gómez
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Estética,
psicoanálisis y religión, trad, de
E. Rabossi, Buenos Aires,
Sudamericana, 1976.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075682
Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23075093
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Tomás Rafael
Abstract: Cornelius Castoriadis, autor
de L'institution, imaginaire de la so-
ciété (París, Seuil, l999), cofun-
dador de Socialisme ou barbarie,
subrayaba justamente la impor-
tancia de lo que consideraba co-
mo un déficit de imaginario en
nuestras sociedades y en nues-
tra filosofía. Ver La montée de l'in-
signifiance, París, Seuil, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075878
Journal Title: Pasajes
Publisher: Universitat de València y la Fundación Cañada Blanch
Issue: i23075114
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Montero Eva
Abstract: Jorge Semprún, L'Ecriture ou
la
vie, París, Gallimard, 1994, págs.
23-24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23075892
Journal Title: Studi Storici
Publisher: Carocci editore
Issue: i23078532
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Zapponi Elena
Abstract: A. Wieviorka, L'era del testimone, Milano, Cortina, 1999, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23078539
Journal Title: Merrill-Palmer Quarterly of Behavior and Development
Publisher: Wayne State University Press
Issue: i23083926
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Youniss James
Abstract: This paper offers a discussion of contemporary theories of moral development. At present, these theories are at odds regarding the origins of morality. One camp has proposed a cognitive basis, while the other claims that morality consists in affectivity. Both these positions are discussed, and a third alternative is proposed for their resolution, based upon the model of the subject within communicative relations, whose life involves constructing reality through social procedures with others. This model is described and contrasted with the model of the self-reflecting individual which seems to underlie most current theories. In addition, a number of studies are reviewed in order to show more clearly how this third alternative provides insight into the social basis of moral judgment. Throughout the paper, two themes remain central: (a) that rationality can be considered to result from consensual validation which is obtained through communication; and (b) that sense of community, the grounds for moral action, is not incompatible with establishing or maintaining one's own individual identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23083932
Journal Title: Criticism
Publisher: Wayne State University Press
Issue: i23103221
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): ARMSTRONG PAUL B.
Abstract: Conrad, Lord Jim, p. 27.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23103225
Journal Title: Western Folklore
Publisher: Western States Folklore Society
Issue: i23120620
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Garlough Christine
Abstract: This article explores the tensions between acknowledgment and recognition in performances by progressive South Asian American activists at the Minnesota Festival of Nations in the year 2000. Focusing on specific South Asian American folk performances that take place within the context of an "India" cultural booth, I argue performers are enjoined to enact cultural practices in ways that foreground a reified sense of "Indianness" that is at odds with the multicultural vision of their progressive grassroots school.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23120624
Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23175155
Date: 7 1, 2004
Author(s): Nagy Piroska
Abstract: This essay focuses on a strange medieval phenomenon, the so-called gift of tears—religious weeping that brings beatitude. This internal purifying process, which was embedded in the specific conditions of historical Christianity, was described and understood as a procedure in which God himself acts and, therefore, as a process that humankind cannot learn, formalize, or ritualize. However, the author analyzes religious weeping as a peculiar, 'intimate ritual' in which the formalized process took place in the soul or spirituality of the weeping person. This essay aims to describe and analyze this practice while examining the historical conditions that enabled such a cultural elaboration to develop.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23178860
Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182019
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Øye Inger-Elin
Abstract: Building on 25 months of fieldwork in eastern Germany from 1991 to 2003, this article explores the interpenetration of aesthetics and politics, and questions them as theoretical categories. A multilayered description depicts aesthetic perception and action, guided by an imagery of façade, as constituted and reproduced by state policies, positioned experiences, and subversive responses. Moving beyond the Cold War legacy, aesthetics' potency and politicization is dated back to early nation building and Protestant and Romantic influences. Being essential to and controlled by shifting, largely authoritarian regimes, aesthetics simultaneously provided a 'shadow life' and a 'lingua franca', cross-cutting verbal and non-verbal mediums and everyday and high culture, as people juggled with, distrusted, and decoded surfaces, expressing and in search of deeper, hidden truths. I argue that historically generated aesthetic perceptions and praxis not only mark east German political culture but also emerge in Habermas's public sphere theory and, moreover, offer arguments to revise it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23182146
Journal Title: Social Analysis: The International Journal of Social and Cultural Practice
Publisher: Berghahn Books
Issue: i23182432
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Courtney Sheleyah A.
Abstract: This article explores socio-cultural practices with regard to aging women in Vārāṇāsī, a city in North India. It is based on 17 months of field research carried out in 1999—2000 among marginalized Hindu women. I argue that aging is a continuous process that is characterized by the specific psychological patterns that form throughout a woman's life history. These patterns are demonstrated by women's particular types of behaviors and demeanors and, in turn, permit others to ascribe to them—in varying combinations and ratios—specific cultural values or qualities. I argue that these attributes are the critical ones that inform the cultural construction and designation of being 'middle-aged' and 'older' as it pertains to Hindu women of Vārāṇāsī.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23182437
Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Viella
Issue: i23199886
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Verga Marcello
Abstract: Europa e musei. Identità e rappresentazioni. Atti del Convegno di Torino, 5-6 aprile
2001, Celia, Torino 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23202164
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i23211194
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J'ai développé ce concept à propos de la pragmatique des récits héroïques que nous
appréhendons comme des « mythes » et des fictions narratives dans Claude Calame,
« La pragmatique poétique des mythes grecs: fiction référentielle et performance
rituelle », in F. Lavocat et A. Duprat (dir.), Fiction et cultures, Paris, sflgc, 2010, p. 33-
56; voir aussi Id., « Fiction référentielle et poétique rituelle: pour une pragmatique du
mythe (Sappho 17 et Bacchylide 13)», in D.AUGER et C. Delattre (dir.), Mythe et
fiction, Paris, Presses universitaires de Paris Ouest, 2010, p. 117-135.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23211237
Journal Title: Daedalus
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i23240257
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Wood Michael
Abstract: This essay explores the suggestion that many American narratives are supplementary, correcting narratives — alternatives to the main story on offer. The guiding thought is that of Henry James's "possible other case," and the chief example is Cormac McCarthy's "No Country for Old Men," in which one story after another fails to cope with the ongoing mystery it faces. The novel may imply, then, that narrative itself, rather than any individual report or fiction, is in crisis or has come to the end of its road. A coda to the essay proposes the option of nonnarrative understandings of the world in those extreme situations where storytelling is no longer the sense-making activity we so often take it to be.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/DAED_a_00135
Journal Title: Mid-American Review of Sociology
Publisher: Department of Sociology, University of Kansas
Issue: i23252723
Date: 12 1, 1982
Author(s): Dasilva Fabio B.
Abstract: This essay represents an attempt to critically assess the intellectual orientation often termed 'structuralism.' In particular, the essay is concerned with European, and even more specifically French, structuralism as displayed in the writings of Louis Althusser, Roland Barthes, Michel Foucault, and C. Levi-Strauss. The analysis indicates that despite a novel language, an often rigorous character, and some interesting, indeed exciting, intellectual constructions, structuralism is very much a child of positivism. The positivism/structuralism relationship is most clearly revealed when structuralism is contrasted with Marxian social inquiry. For comparative and illustrative purposes, then, the essay contrasts structuralism and Marxism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23252731
Journal Title: Hypatia
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23254812
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): SLATMAN JENNY
Abstract: In this paper, I explore the meaning of bodily integrity in disfiguring breast cancer. Bodily integrity is a normative principle precisely because it does not simply refer to actual physical or functional intactness. It rather indicates what should be regarded and respected as inviolable in vulnerable and damageable bodies. I will argue that this normative inviolability or wholeness can be based upon a person's embodied experience of wholeness. This phenomenological stance differs from the liberal view that identifies respect for integrity with respect for autonomy (resulting in an invalidation of bodily integrity's proper normative meaning), as well as from the view that bodily integrity is based upon ideologies of wholeness (which runs the risk of being disadvantageous to women). I propose that bodily integrity involves a process of identification between the experience of one's body as "Leib" and the experience of one's body as "Körper." If identification fails or is not possible, one's integrity is threatened. This idea of bodily integrity can support breast cancer patients and survivors in making decisions about possible corrective interventions. To implement this idea in oncology care, empirical-phenomenological research needs to establish how breast cancer patients express their embodied self-experiences.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1527-2001.2011.01261.x
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i23257667
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Arrigo Bruce A.
Abstract: The ultramodern condition represents the "third wave" in postmodernist-inspired philosophy and cultural practice. Two of ultramodernism's critical theoretical components are the human/social forces, flows, and assemblages that sustain transgression; and the human/social intensities, fluctuations, and thresholds that make transcendence possible as both will and way. In the ultramodern age, then, transcendence is about overcoming and transforming the conditions (i.e., forces, flows, and assemblages) that co-produce harm-generating (i.e., transgressive) tendencies. This manuscript problematizes transgression by way of ultramodern theory. This critical investigation represents "the phenomenology of the shadow," or the ultramodern philosophy of harm. To contextualize this phenomenology and philosophy, the intellectual history of ultramodern thought is recounted. This includes a review of the shadow construct by way of its prominent socio-cultural, psychoanalytic, and political-economic currents; and a chronicling of the reification process (regarding risk, captivity, and harm) since the modernist era (i.e., the industrial revolution). The article concludes with some very speculative observations concerning "the phenomenology of the stranger," or the ultramodern philosophy of transcendence as both will and way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23257675
Journal Title: International Journal of Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i23258894
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Russell Lynette
Abstract: This paper serves as an introduction to this special edition of the International Journal of Historical Archaeology on the theme of archaeology, memory and oral history. Recent approaches to oral history and memory destabilise existing grand narratives and confront some of the epistemological assumptions underpinning scientific archaeology. Here we discuss recent approaches to memory and explore their impact on historical archaeology, including the challenges that forms of oral and social memory present to a field traditionally defined by the relationship between material culture and text. We then review a number of themes addressed by the articles in this volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23258942
Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261550
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Jacobs Anton K.
Abstract: This essay suggests Friedrich Nietzsche has a contribution to make to the theoretical enterprise of social science. Contemporary theorizing, reflecting an increased attention to language, has been focusing on the dialogical mode of production and, of course, on hermeneutics. This has led to a renewal of interest in Friedrich Nietzsche. In this essay, two alternative models of the hermeneutic circle are examined: one arising out of the work of the school of Konstanz; the other associated primarily with the work of Juergen Habermas. The former presents a circular image of the "conversational" situation; the latter portrays a time schedule of the process based on the psychoanalytic process of therapy. Nietzsche's contributions are suggested to be significant, in the first model, in regard to the mode of production and, in the second, the stage of the quasi-naturalistic turn. Nietzsche's way to truth is through constant and relentless criticizing. In contrast to the rationalistic practices of Western philosophy, Nietzsche exercised an art of interpreting based on the use of metaphor and aphorism. This practice seems to reflect Nietzsche's concern to communicate truth in a world he saw as inherently ambiguous and dynamic, thus, rendering propositional truth impossible. Nietzsche radically challenges the rational foundations on which we stand. Thus he presents us with a mode of knowledge production that reclaims traditions lost to science. In addition, Nietzsche shows, by word and example, that his existential approach offers a way to see life as a text and source for quasi-naturalistic forays toward understanding. In this way Nietzsche shows that the traditional concept of knowledge is a pseudo-concept by revealing the intimate and inseparable connection between life and knowledge. Knowledge is rooted in life; it is a manifestation of concrete psychological and political realities. Consequently, it makes sense not to ignore life as a source for explanation when examining resources for re-establishing communication when the hermeneutic circle breaks down in a moment of misunderstanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261695
Journal Title: Humboldt Journal of Social Relations
Publisher: Humboldt State University
Issue: i23261891
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Shalin Dmitri N.
Abstract: This paper presents an historical outlook on the macro-micro distinction in modern sociology. It links the genesis of social interactionism and microsociology to the rise of Romantic philosophy and attempts to elaborate methodological principles dividing macro- and microscopic perspectives in sociology. Six ideal-typical distinctions are considered: natural vs. social universality, emergent properties vs. emergent processes, morphological structuralism vs. genetical interactionism, choice among socially structured alternatives vs. structuring appearance into reality, structural vs. emergent directionality, operational vs. hermeneutical analysis. The complementarity of the languages of macro- and microsociological theories is advocated as a foundation for the further elaboration of conceptual links between the two levels of analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23261895
Journal Title: The Geographical Journal
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i23263262
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): JOHNSON NUALA C
Abstract: This commentary reflects on the first official visit made by a British monarch to Ireland since its independence. Focusing on three key moments of Queen Elizabeth's itinerary — the Garden of Remembrance, the Irish National War Memorial, Islandbridge, and the state banquet, Dublin Castle — I suggest that efforts to simultaneously honour rebels/soldiers in acts of public remembrance sought to re-position the past between these two islands in ways which recognised conflict but also aspired towards reconciled understandings of how that past could be more peacefully calibrated.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1475-4959.2011.00454.x
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i23264766
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Thévoz Samuel
Abstract: également Samuel Thévoz (2011)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23264789
Journal Title: Journal of British Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i23265372
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Prince Simon
Abstract: Beiner (again) is among the rare exceptions to the rule that Irish memory studies overlook narrative
theory: Guy Beiner, "In Anticipation of a Post-Memory Boom Syndrome," Cultural Analysis 7 (2008):
107-12.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1086/661184
Journal Title: Hispania
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Spanish and Portuguese
Issue: i23266099
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): McEvoy Gabriela
Abstract: Este trabajo analiza la novela de inmigración Barrio Palestina (1998), de la escritora paraguaya Susana Gertopán. Se explora, por un lado, los problemas de asimilación que enfrenta el inmigrante judío en el Paraguay y, por otro, se analiza la representación de la memoria colectiva de la comunidad judía como un mecanismo de defensa ante la asimilación y el fortalecimiento de los valores culturales de la diáspora judía. Este ensayo se centra específicamente en un suceso histórico intrínsecamente relacionado con el genocidio y la violencia y que tuvo grandes repercusiones sociales, políticas y económicas en las sociedades latinoamericanas: la Segunda Guerra Mundial (1939—45). El análisis de Barrio Palestina me permitirá argumentar que esta novela de inmigración se enfoca en el impacto de la guerra en las subjetividades del inmigrante, especialmente dentro del núcleo familiar.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23266143
Journal Title: New Hibernia Review / Iris Éireannach Nua
Publisher: Center for Irish Studies at the University of St. Thomas
Issue: i23266696
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Harney-Mahajan Tara
Abstract: Ricoeur, Memory, History, Forgetting, p. 494.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23266702
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i23267018
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Cler Jérôme
Abstract: Jean During (1994: 407 sq.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23267125
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23270664
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): BERNIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Nicolo ruling of 1989.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0960777312000264
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i23270692
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Zeitlyn David
Abstract: http://www.rrnpilot.
org/.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev-anthro-092611-145721
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i23277635
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): KUUKKANEN JOUNI-MATTI
Abstract: Rescher, Objectivity; Max Weber, "Objectivity in Social Sciences and
Social Policy," in Weber, The Methodology of the Social Sciences (New York: The Free Press, 1949).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2303.2012.00632.x
Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i23279968
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): de Mello e Souza André
Abstract: Grant and Keohane 2005, especially 36, 38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23279972
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23285898
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Marty Martin E.
Abstract: David Tracy, Blessed Rage for Order: The New Pluralism in Theology (New York:
The Seabury Press, Inc., 1975), the section on "Interpretation Theory," pp. 72-79, espe-
cially 78.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23285900
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289637
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Barlow Philip L.
Abstract: "Baptism for the Dead,"
Times and Seasons 3:760.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289683
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23289708
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Turley Kylie Nielson
Abstract: Hannah T[apfield], King, "Sympathy," Woman's Exponent 3 (April
1, 1875): 166
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23289868
Journal Title: Journal of Mormon History
Publisher: Mormon History Association
Issue: i23291609
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Parker Stuart
Abstract: Bushman, Believing History, 210-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23291614
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i23292872
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): ZIÓŁKOWSKI MAREK
Abstract: Sulek 2001: 33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23292875
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23303150
Date: 4 1, 1960
Author(s): LICHTIGFELD A.
Abstract: Jaspers' thesis (while rejecting the claim of philosophers of the Western tradition to universal validity and Truth, yet conceding that their metaphysical systems express an awareness of Being) is as follows: "Reality is neither the object nor the subject, but that which encompasses both, the Encompassing which is illuminated in the division between subject and object"; He — the One God — is Encompassing and the greatest closeness which has its place within the inwardness of man". The whole inquiry leads Jaspers to claim that the existential self is rooted in Transcendence and the ground of all things lies in the real ization of the existential self in freedom in which eternity and time coalesce. In this freedom time — far from being the "moving image of eternity" — becomes the actual scene of the existential self's moral striving with the forces of this world, and by seizing the cipher (= the language of Transcendence) as the symbol of Transcendence, the existential self achieves authentic existence, thus endowing the historical process of time with unique and ultimate meaning. 1) Reason: It is because of reason with which God has endowed man that any content of a pretended revelation possesses any self-evidencing power: "In diesem Menschwerden durch Vernunft wird das Eine der Transzendenz fühlbar dem Einen der jeweils geschichtlichen Existenz". Yet by abandoning belief in universal Truth we become open for Truth, realised and determined in its concrete historic form for each individual by means of communication. Communication therefore becomes "the universal condition of man's being". It follows that Truth cannot be separated from communicability. It only appears in time as a realitythrough-communication so much so "that I can not even become myself alone without emerging out of my being with others". Now the element in which existential communication lives and moves and has its spiritual being is — reason ("reason is what penetrates everything"). 2) Unity of Mankind: The discovery of the unreality of man's existence apart from God, is the discovery at the same time of the fact that God is the ultimate ground of the unity of mankind. According to Jaspers the fact of life are to conform to the principle of that wider order of reality disclosed to us in the experience of communication in which the reality of each person's likeness to the image of God finds its practical application. The development of communication depends on the principle of correlation of Existenz and Transcendenz which is the property of no finite existential self, but manifests itself alike in all. Though we may be confronted with the question "Is it God or the devil who governs the world?", it remains equally true that even "failure is no argument against the truth that is rooted in transcendence". 3) Ultimate Dignity of Man: Jaspers' unequivocal emphasis on freedom, stating that "Freedom and God are inseparable" serves to assure this ideal its place in human society. Thus man's exercise of freedom knits him up into the transcendental design. The claim that certain facts and experiences yield a basis for the recognition of the ultimate dignity of man is justified precisely by this evidence that through God, as inseparable from freedom, we discern the ultimate significance of both man and humanity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23303155
Journal Title: Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory: J-PART
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23319479
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Leong Ching
Abstract: Leong 2010
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jopart/mus001
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23327447
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Serban Claudia
Abstract: Nous formulons cette question sans ignorer que la Befindlichkeit heideg-
gérienne n'est pas YEmpfindung que Michel Henry mettra à l'honneur. Mais bien
qu'il s'agisse de deux conceptions de l'affectivité fort différentes, l'intérêt commun
pour l'affect comme mode de révélation à soi antérieur à la réflexion demeure
remarquable.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.124.0473
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: החברה הפילוסופית בירושלים
Issue: i23340007
Date: 10 1, 1965
Author(s): EPSTEIN F.
Abstract: The significance of the conception of the "I" as an "integral ego", which is fundamental to Ricoeur's thought, is brought out. The "integral ego" forms the basis of an analysis of the relations between the voluntary and involuntary in human action and enables these relations to be seen and comperehended from a fresh perspective. The "integral ego" is conceived as an organic unity of the "Cartesian cogito" and the existent body. This necessitates a view of the body as a Corps propre in Merleau-Ponty's sense; "a-body-moved-by-the-will", a conscious body, imbued with meaning. The body is on no account to be regarded as a mere physical object related to other physical objects in a mechanical causal chain. There is no place in man for the Cartesian dualism between thinking substance and extended substance. Although Ricoeur's method in analysing these relations is one of pure or "eidetic" description, he, in contradistinction to Husserl, attempts to integrate the body, as a Corps propre, with the cogito. He repeatedly stresses the danger of naturalizing the cogito; of viewing psychic processes as natural facts and the body as an empirical object. The rigorous phenomenological description clarifies the inter-relation and reciprocity between the voluntary and involuntary—whether in human decision, physical action or consent. The voluntary (the project, the moving of the body and consent) is based on and nourished by the involuntary (motives and given values; body, emotions and habits; character, sub-conscious and life). On the other hand, the involuntary has meaning only within the harmonious synthesis of human action. This analysis enables Ricoeur to refute various traditional explanations of human action. Both deterministic and irrationalistic interpretations distort and misinterpret the place and meaning of the components of human action because of an inadequate representation of man's nature. Determinism is wrong in regarding consciousness as a fact of nature and in confusing motives with causes; irrationalism, which advocates a "liberté d'indifférence", basing itself on the same premise as rationalism, and confusing motives with causes, is wrong in seeing the negation of the very existence of motives as the one way of saving human freedom. Both views disregard the fact that human action is impossible and cannot be understood without motives and that this, in turn, does not mean a determination of man in a mechanical way, for motives are not a part of nature but rather an organic element in a specific human situation—voluntary action. Human freedom is the freedom peculiar to a finite being immersed in time. Both those who stress passivity and receptivity and those who stress the dynamic creating ability of the self are wrong; both those who thought that freedom is possible only on the basis of clear and distinct motives and that action is nothing but the end of deliberation (St. Thomas) and those who thought that freedom is possible only by an irrational emergence of the vital ego (Bergson) or by negating the existence of any previous determination of the self (Sartre) are mistaken. A true human decision is composed of two elements; given motives and values on the one hand, and non-intellectualist spontaneous choice on the other. Duality is peculiar to human action. This is made more explicit in dealing with the more fundamental involuntary elements; character, sub-consciousness and life. Man acts freely from a finite and determined point of view; he acts in a clear and transparent way on the basis of confused and amorphous data; he lives his freedom when thrown into life. Necessity is inherent in man; it is one of his modes of being. There is no "inner freedom" on the one hand and "objective" causal necessity on the other. This conception of human action as both activity and passivity is reminiscent of Merleau-Ponty's statement in his "Philosophie du perception": "Le monde est déjá constitué, mais aussi jamais complètement constitué.... Il n'y a donc jamais déterminisme et jamais choix absolu, jamais je ne suis chose et jamais conscience nue". There is no dilemna between determinism and irrationalism, just as there is none between extended substance and thinking substance; there is dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23340010
Journal Title: Acta Musicologica
Publisher: Bärenreiter
Issue: i23339818
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Bohlman Philip V.
Abstract: Marilyn Strathern, "Making Incomplete," in Carved Flesh/Cast Selves: Gendered Symbols and Social
Practices, ed. Vigdis Broch-Due, Ingrid Rudie, and Tony Bleie (Oxford: Berg, 1993), 41-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23343882
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: מרכז ש. ה. ברגמן לעיון פילוסופי, הפקולטה למדעי הרוח של האוניברסיטה העברית בירושלים
Issue: i23350503
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Svorai Moran
Abstract: Jean-Luc Nancy and Philippe
Lacoue-Labarthe's The Title of the Letter: A Reading of Lacan (Albany: State
University of New York Press, 1992), especially p. xxix.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23352977
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23352863
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Cabantous Alain
Abstract: Jeffrey Bolster, Blackjacks. African Ameñcan Seamen in the Age of Sail, Cambridge (Mass.),
Harvard, UP, 1997.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhis.123.0705
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i23353270
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Guery François
Abstract: La Métaphysique, traduction et commentaire par Jules Tricot, Paris, Vrin, coll. « Bibliothèque
des textes philosophiques», 1933.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.124.0611
Journal Title: Early China
Publisher: The Society for the Study of Early China and the Institute of East Asian Studies, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i23351649
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Schaberg David
Abstract: Duke Ling of Jin (Zuozhuan, Xuan 2.3 [Yang, 655-59]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23354245
Journal Title: Jerusalem Studies in Hebrew Literature / מחקרי ירושלים בספרות עברית
Publisher: הוצאת ספרים ע"ש י"ל מאגנס, האוניברסיטה העברית
Issue: i23359698
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Stern David
Abstract: This article considers the function of the mashal (parable) in Rabbinic literature and the connection between the use to which the mashal is put in that literature and the literary form it takes. Following a consideration of the contexts, narrative and exegetical, in which the mashal appears in midrashic and talmudic literature, three disctinct models for the form are proposed: (1) As a didactic tool, whose form is exoteric and relies largely on figurative language that illustrates the ideas the parable teaches. (2) As an instrument of sectarian doctrine, often esoteric in its form, and one which closely resembles allegory and seeks to disguise its message if not to hide it. (3) As a homiletical device with the form of an allusive tale told for an ulterior purpose, in order to persuade its audience of a certain inexplicit message. The article suggests that the mashal in Rabbinic literature generally falls into the third category, and that the messages it seeks to persuade are mainly on the order of praise or blame (or a subtype of praise or blame, like apologetics, polemics, eulogy, or complaint). Examples of meshalim for several of these categories are briefly discussed. The article concludes with a detailed analysis of the meshal found in Lamentations Rabba 3, 21. This is a praise-mashal whose narrative also suggests a certain kind of blame and, in effect, allows the mashal to be read in two ways. On the basis of this analysis, it is suggested that the rhetorical richness of the mashal derives in part from the tension between the mashal's function and its narrative complexity, and that the popularity of the form was a result of the fact that the use of narrative in the mashal allowed the Rabbis to express certain feelings and attitudes that other, more prosaic, midrashic literary forms could not convey.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23360896
Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i23361522
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): APTER EMILY
Abstract: Roberto Esposito, Immunitas: The Protection and Negation of Life, trans. Zakiya Hanafi
(London: Polity Press, 2011), pp. 145-77.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00107
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i23375394
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): CUCHET Guillaume
Abstract: Muray, 1984, passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23375400
Journal Title: Studies in Education / עיונים בחינוך
Publisher: הוצאת הספרים של אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23392461
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): GOLOMB JACOB
Abstract: Nietzsche's impact on educational thought has always been surprisingly neglected, possibly because it is hard to divorce his educational views from his philosophical endeavour, as a whole which has given rise to considerable scholarly polemics during the last few decades. Recently several articles propagating various interpretations of Nietzsche's educational teaching have been published Their main weakness lies in the fact that Nietzsche's central educational theses are discussed quite apart from his "psychological" philosophy, while it is the philosophy that serves as the necessary background for understanding those theses. The present paper, mainly analyzing nietzsche's essay "Schopenhauer as Educator", will attempt to provide a better insight into Nietzsche's early psychological and pedagogic thought. It will also demonsrate those basic criteria implicit in his method of psychologization, which at the very outset had served Nietzsche as an educational means of testing the integrity of certain examplary personalities. Nietzsche's Educational Thought is established in the service of authenticity — a central and influential Existentialist concept, the main ideas of which are explicated in the paper. Another Nietzschean concept, much negleted yet significant, that of the "Higher-Self", is elaborated and compared to Freud's parallel notion of the "Super-Ego".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23393846
Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23416461
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Benari Motti
Abstract: The paper examines the process of figurative reading in the presence of a marker (like / as), namely the unique cognitive impact caused by shaping figurative expressions as similes. The solution is sought through theoretical discussion and analysis of relevant excerpts from Hebrew poetry. Recently Bethlehem argued that a simile does not necessarily indicate the presence of resemblance of some sort; the simile only presents itself as such via its marker, like/as, but actually it can bear a variety of figurative relations, of which metaphoric relations are only one possible option. Consequently, simile has only coincidental relations with metaphor, if any (Bethlehem, 1996: 1997) First I address this criticism, trying to reinforce the widespread view that a simile is indeed a sub-type of metaphor, and that there is no fundamental difference between them, that is, comprehension processes in metaphor and simile are basically similar. Next I distinguish the simile from the literal comparison in a new comprehensive way. Finally I try to identify and study the special impression a figurative expression might create as a result of being shaped as a simile. Despite this basic sameness of simile and metaphor, the marker's presence in a simile has its unique cognitive effects, accumulating to a distinctive impact. I analyze the unique cognitive effects potentially evolved during the construction process of the simile's meaning. In this analysis this paper reexamines central issues pertaining to similes, their essence, and the cognitive processes they trigger in readers. Among these I focus on a problem never thoroughly explored so far: the essential nature of the coexistence of similarity and dissimilarity (without working against each other) in both metaphor and simile.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23417592
Journal Title: European Journal of Psychology of Education
Publisher: I.S.P.A. / Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada
Issue: i23419999
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Hasse Cathrine
Abstract: It has been argued that in higher education academic disciplines can be seen as communities of practices. This implies a focus on what constitutes identities in academic culture. In this article I argue that the transition from newcomer to a full participant in a community of practice of physicists entails a focus on how identities emerge in learning how to highlight certain aspects of personal life histories. The analysis of interviews with 55 physicists shows that physicists often perceive experiences in their childhood as the first step into their professional identities as physicists. These experiences involve recollections of the ability to think scientifically (e.g., 'go beyond the surface'), and the ability to play with toys which can be connected to the practical life of physics. The process of identity formation can be described as developing in a relational zone of proximal development, where old-timers recognize particular playful qualities in newcomers as a legitimate access to a physicist identity. The article discusses how play which physicists connects with a scientific mind can constitute a relational zone of proximal developments in a community of practice as a particular "space of authoring" in a physicist culture, which cut across other cultural differences. Il a été admis que les disciplines de l'éducation supérieure peuvent être considérées comme des communautés de pratique. Cela pose la question de savoir comment se constituent les identités dans la culture académique. Dans cet article, pour mettre en évidence la transition de nouveau venu à participant à part entière dans une communauté de pratique de physiciens, j'examine non seulement la manière dont des identités émergent au travers des pratiques, mais aussi les aspects biographiques que les participants identifient comme ayant facilité leur transition. Une cohorte de 55 physiciens a été interviewée et leurs analyses ont été comparées à des données supplémentaires, notamment tirées d'une observation participante d'étudiants en physique. Les physiciens identifient souvent des expériences de leur enfance comme premiers pas vers leur identité professionnelle de physiciens. Ces expériences requièrent une pensée de type scientifique et une capacité à jouer liée avec les pratiques de la physique. Le processus de formation identitaire peut être décrit comme se développant dans une zone relationnelle de développement proximal, dans laquelle les aînés reconnaissent les qualités ludiques des nouveaux venus comme légitimant leur accès à l'identité de physicien. L'article discute la manière dont le jeu, que les physiciens associent à l'esprit scientifique, constitue une zone de développement proximal dans une communauté de pratique, comme «espace d'auteur» dans la culture des physiciens — laquelle peut par ailleurs dépasser d'autres différences culturelles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23421595
Journal Title: European Journal of Psychology of Education
Publisher: I.S.P.A. / Instituto Superior de Psicologia Aplicada
Issue: i23419999
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Hviid Pernille
Abstract: How do children conceptualise their own development? From their point of view, what serve as constraints for their movements in time and space? The theoretical framework of the experiment described here was a cultural historical first person developmental perspective. The concept of transition is here put in use to capture the children's experience of their movements with or against a dynamic, inviting and demanding socio-cultural landscape over time. An interpretation of children's experience of their developmental timing with temporalities of the childhood landscape is presented. Comment les enfants conceptualisent-ils leur propre développement? De leur point de vue, qu'est-ce qui contraint leurs mouvements dans l'espace et dans le temps? Le cadre théorique de la recherche décrite ici est une perspective historico-culturelle, développementale et à la première personne. Le concept de transition est utilisé pour mettre en évidence l'expérience que les enfants ont de leurs mouvements, allant avec, ou à l'encontre de leur environnement socioculturel et temporel, lequel est à la fois dynamique, invitant et exigeant. Une interprétation de l'expérience que les enfants ont de la temporalité de leur propre développement est présentée en rapport avec les temporalités caractérisant l'environnement de l'enfance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23421597
Journal Title: Israeli Sociology / סוציולוגיה ישראלית
Publisher: החוג לסוציולוגיה ולאנתרופולוגיה, הפקולטה למדעי החברה ע"ש גרשון גורדון אוניברסיטת תל-אביב
Issue: i23442333
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Shenhav Yehouda
Abstract: מסה זו עוסקת בסוציולוגיה של התרגום בתנאים של יחסי כוח תיאולוגיים וקולוניאליים בין שפות. בעקבות ולטר בנימין, פול ריקר, ז'אק דרידה והספרות הפוסט-קולוניאלית, אדגים כיצד תחומים בלתי ניתנים לתרגום הופכים את התרגום לאשליה משיחית. דרך דוגמאות מתוך ספרות הנכבה שנכתבה בערבית אני מבקש להראות כיצד התחומים הבלתי ניתנים לתרגום מוצפים במסמנים לא יציבים ובמצבים אפורתיים של מבוי סתום. למשל, השימוש במילה נכבה אינו עקבי אלא תלוי בהקשר של זמן הכתיבה וזמן התרגום. בערבית אפשר למצוא לבד מנכבה גם את המושגים כארת'ה, הזימה, נכסה ומאסאה. בעברית אפשר למצוא שימוש באסון, בתבוסה, בטרגדיה או בנכבה. גם המסמנים ההיסטוריוגרפיים ומסמני הזמן והמרחב בספרות הנכבה אינם יציבים אלא משתנים תמידית. תובנות אלה מציעות אסטרטגיות תרגום שמתבססות על הטיות זמן מתאימות (למשל זמן הווה מתמשך במקום זמן עבר), על היעזרות בהערות חיצוניות לטקסט ועל שערוב מסוים של העברית. What is translation under asymmetrical conditions of power? How do colonial and theological practices shape the relationships between languages? Drawing on Walter Benjamin, Paul Ricoeur, Jacque Derrida, and postcolonial literature in general, I show how untranslatable texts stemming from such asymmetry result in insurmountable gaps which render the messianic "perfect translation" impossible. Using examples from literature on the Palestinian Naqba, I examine how untranslatable texts (from Arabic to Hebrew) are inflated with unstable signifiers, which themselves are contingent on the time/space aspect of the translation. Using these examples, I demonstrate the extent to which translation from Arabic to Hebrew necessitates peculiar political and aesthetic strategies which are sensitive to colonial and theological conditions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23443031
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23450960
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Berdoulay Vincent
Abstract: R.Rolland, Le Cloître de la rue d'Vlm, Paris, A.Michel (Cahiers Romain Rolland), 1952,
p. 202-203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23451531
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23454232
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): LUSSAULT Michel
Abstract: Louis Marin dans « La ville dans sa carte et
son portrait: propositions de recherche», Cahiers de Fontenay, Paris, 1983, p. 11 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23454921
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23456193
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Chivallon Christine
Abstract: E. de Léplne dans Le Progressiste, 17-11-1982, p. 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23456691
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457093
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Lévy Jacques
Abstract: Margaret Thatcher Foundation : http://www.margaret-
thatcher.org/speeches/displaydocument.asp?docid=106689.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23457595
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23458030
Date: 2 1, 2013
Author(s): Héritier Stéphane
Abstract: Gauchon et al., 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458032
Journal Title: Annales de Géographie
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i23457606
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Lefort Isabelle
Abstract: Vasset Ph. (2007), Un livre blanc. Récit avec cartes, Paris, Fayard.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23458463
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i23483400
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): SHERIDAN RUTH
Abstract: The Australian Oxford English Dictionary [ed. Bruce Moore; 2nd ed.; Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 2004], 968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23487893
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Fundación Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i23496240
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): de la Pascua Sánchez María José
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 126-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23496317
Journal Title: Hebrew Union College Annual
Publisher: Hebrew Union College
Issue: i23503346
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): TOWNER W. SIBLEY
Abstract: supra, pp. 107-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23507627
Journal Title: Beit Mikra: Journal for the Study of the Bible and Its World / בית מקרא: כתב-עת לחקר המקרא ועולמו
Publisher: המרכז העולמי לתנ"ך בירושלים
Issue: i23509413
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): L. Greenstein Edward
Abstract: Although the character of Job's wife has been given very little space in the biblical text of Job, she has been treated by many exegetes as significant. There are two main streams of interpretation in which she has figured prominently. In classical Christian approaches, ranging from Augustine to some modern commentators such as Habel, Job's wife tends to be regarded as a temptress in the mold of Eve and as a collaborator of the Satan. Post-modern, especially feminist, approaches tend to rehabilitate the character of Job's wife, accrediting her with prompting Job's critical reflection and with anticipating the direction in which the plot of the book develops. In the present article, interpretive approaches to Job's wife, including the favorable approach of some Jewish exegesis of antiquity, as well as the somewhat middle road of medieval Jewish exegesis, are surveyed. A critical discussion of feminist treatments of Job's wife deals primarily with the work of Newsom, Pardes and van Wolde. The place of Job's wife in the book is assessed with regard to how her theological views compare to those of the Satan on the one hand, and Job on the other, as well as to her role as a catalyst in the plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23509418
Journal Title: Sartre Studies International
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i23508848
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Stawarska Beata
Abstract: The major thesis developed in Sartre's L'imaginaire is that all imaginary acts can be subsumed under the heading of one "image family" and, therefore, that imagination as a whole can be theorized in terms of pictorial representation. Yet this theory fails to meet the objective of Sartre's study, to demonstrate that imaginary activity is not a derivative of perception but an attitude with a character and dignity of its own. The subsidiary account of imagination in terms of neutralization of belief has the advantage of not being constrained by the requirement that imaginary activity serve a purely reproductive function of bringing an absent "original" into a quasi presence and, thus, leaves room for free creativity and fiction. It also points to a concrete lived experience of alterity at the heart of subjective life where the subject stages its life as if it were the life of an other, putting pressure onto Sartre's contention that the cogito defines subjectivity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23510958
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i23527844
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Ledesma José Luis
Abstract: Keith Jenkins:
¿Por qué la historia? Ética y posmodernidad, México, FCE, 2006 [1999].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23530140
Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i23535034
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): NEKVAPIL JIŘÍ
Abstract: Hájek, Dlouhá 2011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23535537
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535689
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Gordon Rae Beth
Abstract: "La dérive d'une vie," that of the hero in En rade, is metaphorized by the dérive of narrative, composed of a complex network of metaphors. In 1893, Paul Souriau proposed that metaphor makes a fleeting representation pass into the unconscious. Dreams and hysteria, states in which the unconscious holds sway, are of considerable importance in this text. An analysis of the way that metaphor works will shed light on the relationships between dream and reality, and between consciousness and the unconscious in general. The double fil of extended metaphor is also metaphorized as a bifurcating road, the road of narrative and the labyrinthine path the hero's thoughts take. In fact, route or chemin is not only a metaphor for the text and for extended metaphor itself, but also for the complex pathways of the nerves and brain. If the road or path of narrative is also a representation of nerves/brain, then retracing these pathways of metaphors would be a way of following the text's attempt to dissect the brain and uncover the links between dream and reality, the double sphere of activity that characterizes this novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23537218
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century French Studies
Publisher: The University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i23535701
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Best Janice
Abstract: By incorporating the battle of Waterloo into the events of their novels, Hugo and Stendhal create a portrait of its principal protagonist, Napoléon ler. Associated in one case with a spatial prison out of time and in the other case with a temporal exile out of space, the image of the emperor is that of a figure of power deprived of time and, consequently, of its legitimacy. Stendhal imprisons his character in the present to deny the reality of Napoleon's defeat. Hugo, on the other hand, exiles his character from the present to link the past to the future and propose a new model of heroism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23537321
Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaii Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i23538400
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Johnson Donovan
Abstract: Augustine applies rhetorical principles of On Christian Doctrine to Book Eight of the Confessions by synthesizing four conversion stories as reenactments of the gospel paradigm. This pattern invites readers to repeat that reenactment. Thus Augustine's rhetorical design rather than a self-analysis or compulsion to confess informs the Confessions as autobiography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23539907
Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i23538737
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): SCOTT CATHERINE
Abstract: In this article I examine Christopher Reeve's memoir Still Me, in which Reeve explores the painful and traumatic shift from his previous able-body to his present disabled body. I explore not only the way in which Reeve struggles with his public image as Superman, but also the way in which Reeve's narrative continually fast forwards through episodes of pain and suffering, in order to keep the strong and powerful image of the Super-Crip intact.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23540573
Journal Title: Early American Studies
Publisher: THE McNEIL CENTER FOR EARLY AMERICAN STUDIES
Issue: i23545403
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): SCRABA JEFFREY
Abstract: Ibid., 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23546624
Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548426
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): ALBINUS LARS
Abstract: Nagy 1990b: 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23549696
Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548420
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Urban Hugh B.
Abstract: Eliade 1969: 8, 9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551195
Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548558
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Schilbrack Kevin
Abstract: Stoller
(1997)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551721
Journal Title: Method & Theory in the Study of Religion
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23548563
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Vásquez Manuel A.
Abstract: Johnson (2007: 258)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23551871
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire moderne et contemporaine (1954-)
Publisher: Société d'histoire moderne et contemporaine
Issue: i23557514
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Singaravélou Pierre
Abstract: Rodney P. CARLISLE, Geoffrey GOLSON, American in Revolt during the 1960's and
1970's, Santa Barbara, ABC Clio, 2008
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23558104
Journal Title: Social Theory and Practice
Publisher: Department of Philosophy, Florida State University
Issue: i23555926
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Striblen Cassie
Abstract: Nelson, Damaged Identities, Narrative Repair, p. 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23558475
Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23558175
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Grelle Bruce
Abstract: The Tasks of the Political Educator," in Political and Social Essays by Paul Ricoeur,
ed. David Stewert and Joseph Bein (Athens: Ohio University Press, 1974), 271.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559566
Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23557669
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Hays Richard B.
Abstract: Hays, Echoes, 125-31, 149-53, 191-92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23559673
Journal Title: The Annual of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556517
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Birkenfeld Darryl L.
Abstract: Winter, Liberating Creation, 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23560010
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23561471
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Ross Susan A.
Abstract: IN THIS ESSAY I CONSIDER POSSIBLE CONTRIBUTIONS OF FEMINIST THEOLogy to theological aesthetics and ethics by comparing the work of Hans Urs von Balthasar (1905—88), the predominant figure in theological aesthetics, with that of Elizabeth Johnson and Sallie McFague. Balthasar's emphasis on contemplation and obedience in response to the unexpected revelation of God's glory contrasts with the practicality, mutuality, and creativity of feminist theological ethics. On the other hand, feminist theology's emphasis on appropriate language and images for God suggests an implicit aesthetics. The artistic work of contemporary African women in crisis situations sheds further light on both Balthasar and feminist theology and brings into relief the relationship of beauty and justice. Although Balthasar's emphasis on the transcendent glory of God may leave him with an undeveloped ethics, feminist theology's agent-oriented approach could benefit from greater attention to contemplation and a transformed understanding of obedience. These conclusions urge greater appreciation and development of the aesthetic and imaginative dimensions of feminist theological ethics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561477
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23556513
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Reuschling Wyndy Corbin
Abstract: IN THIS ESSAY I EXPLORE THE WAYS IN WHICH OBEDIENCE TO AUTHORITY functions as a moral norm in evangelical ethics, with the potential of constraining and even endangering the multifaceted nature of Christian morality. I consider two particular sources of moral authority in evangelicalism: the Bible and leaders. I discuss the reasons and ways in which obedience to these two sources of moral authority functions in evangelical ethics and provide an ethical critique to these two moral norms and ethical practices. My primary aim is to expand an understanding of Christian morality that takes seriously the narrative dimensions of Christian ethics, conscience formation, moral agency, and skills in moral discernment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561600
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: The Society of Christian Ethics
Issue: i23561545
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): O'Neill William
Abstract: CONTEMPORARY HUMANITARIAN CRISES UNDERSCORE WHAT HANNAH Arendt called the "perplexities" of human rights; the very category "refugee" attests the failure of the global rights regime. Indeed, the "abstract nakedness of being nothing but human" belies the "right to have rights." In light of this criticism, I offer a reconstructive, communitarian interpretation of the rights of the forcibly displaced. The grammar of rights, I argue, presumes the communicative virtues of respect and recognition of the "concrete other." I conclude by showing how biblical narrative "re-inscribes" stateless persons/strangers precisely as neighbor (Lev. 19:18, 33—34) in "anamnestic solidarity."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23561858
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Issue: i23562435
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Clairmont David A.
Abstract: THIS ESSAY EXAMINES THE RELEVANCE FOR RELIGIOUS ETHICS OF BUDDHIST Abhidhamma texts, those dealing with the analysis and systematization of mental states arising in and examined by meditation practice. Developing recent scholarship on the prevalence and significance of interlocking lists in Buddhist canonical texts and commentaries, the Buddhist use of lists in the Abhidhamma constitutes a kind of narrative expression of moral development through the sequential occurrence of carefully defined mental states. Attention to this narrative dimension of the moral life, while related to other recent proposals about the place of narrative in religious ethics, offers a way to employ this underexamined genre of religious literature (lists) drawn from a comparative context (Buddhist and Christian ethics), in service of a more nuanced account of moral development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23562950
Journal Title: Journal of the Society of Christian Ethics
Publisher: Georgetown University Press
Issue: i23562533
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Dulkin Ryan S.
Abstract: The exegetical stories of Genesis Rabbah 8 portray God as engaged in an ethical debate over the implications of humanity's creation. These stories narrativize the necessity of favoring mercy over justice. The Deity must mobilize the attribute of mercy to overcome the justice problem of human fallibility. These stories rehearse the conflict of values in an "organic" fashion as opposed to discursive argumentation over abstract principles, and suggest a virtue theory grounded in mercy and kindness without being inflexible or absolutist. As such, mercy and kindness should be inculcated not over and above Jewish law but prior to the law.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23563070
Journal Title: Political Research Quarterly
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i23562433
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Lee Fred
Abstract: This essay examines how two Jefferson biographies represented the Thomas Jefferson—Sally Hemings relationship in the post—civil rights movement era: Fawn Brodie's Thomas Jefferson (1974), a controversial publication that claimed that Hemings and Jefferson loved each other, and Joseph Ellis's American Sphinx (1996), one of the last mainstream biographies to deny that they had any children together. The story in both cases serves as an allegory of founding authority and national membership. The author finds that Ellis and Brodie characterize Jefferson as a fallible founder to affirm that founding ideals can accommodate and overcome racial differences and injustices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23563161
Journal Title: Boletín de Antropología Americana
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografia e Historia
Issue: i23565170
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): quezada raúl francisco gonzález
Abstract: Bate, 1984:118-120.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23565765
Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i23564251
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): BALAMIR AYDAN
Abstract: This paper addresses the problem of interpreting the concepts of tradition and traditionalism with specific reference to the tradition of the Anatolian house and the recent erosion of place quality in Turkish towns. The Anatolian house provides a remarkable example of cultural diffusion and transformation. During the reign of the late Ottoman, a variety of cultures impinged on one another, giving rise to autochthonous traditions that were shared by different religious and ethnic groups. But during the Republican Period the process of Westernization interrupted the continuity of historic traditions, resulting in the emergence of a peculiar contemporary tradition. The majority of Turkish housing today displays characteristics of a "vernacular modernism" conditioned by the moral and technical orders of a market economy. The worldwide spread of such cultural mediocrity has often been attributed to the corrosive influence of a single world civilization. A number of recent attempts have been made to search for a national idiom in Turkey. But these attempts, often promoting a "vernacular historicism," have yet to account for any distinct revision of urban house-form. Argument today revolves around an old rhetorical opposition between universal civilization and national culture. Should a post-traditional society sustain its cultural tradition to attain universal values, or vice-versa? The conservative in this debate is more involved in the revival than in the preservation of tradition. The progressive, though an ardent defender of preservation, resists revivalism because of its chauvinistic connotations and pastiche effects. This paper attempts to resolve this argument by suggesting a simultaneous unfolding of the historical problems of the Anatolian house tradition and the theoretical problems of presumed dichotomies such as "traditional vs. modern." Finally, the paper advocates the development of research strategies to facilitate correct readings of cultural tradition and design strategies to improve the quality of residential environments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23566252
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA' GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568534
Date: 1 1, 1958
Author(s): de Finance Joseph
Abstract: S. Thomas, Summ. theol., Ι" II*·, q. 23. a. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23571379
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568617
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Latourelle René
Abstract: R. Latourelle, Authenticité historique des miracles de Jésus. Es-
sai de critériologie, dans: Gregorianum, 54 (1973), pp. 251-255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23575244
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568620
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Hamel Edouard
Abstract: B. Fraling, Glaube und Ethos, Normfindung in
der Gemeinschaft der Glàubingen, in: Th. und Gl. 64 (1974) 389400.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23575592
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568647
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Magnani Giovanni
Abstract: Merton Gill, Psychic Energy, J.A.PsA, 1977 p. 581
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576028
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23568927
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Schmidinger Heinrich M.
Abstract: siehe oben Anm. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23576208
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569552
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Pastor Félix-Alejandro
Abstract: Perspectiva Teològica 17 (1985) 114-116.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577074
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569613
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Rosato Philip J.
Abstract: Die Kirchliche Dogmatik III/3,
Ziirich 1950, p. 500 (Church Dogmatics, III/3, Edinburgh 1960, ρ. 430).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577665
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569630
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: P.H. Kolvenbach, «Linguistica e teologia» dans Rassegna di teologia, 1985,
pp. 481-595.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23577822
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569608
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Pelland Gilles
Abstract: «La vérité de l'Ecriture et l'herméneutique biblique», RTL 18
(1987) 171-186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578218
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569626
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Meyer Ben F.
Abstract: Coreth, Grundfragen, 128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578309
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569621
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Caba José
Abstract: Dei Verbum 12: AAS 58 (1966) 824.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23578657
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569865
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Wainright Geoffrey
Abstract: Gemeinsame ròmisch-katholische evangelisch-
lutherische Kommission, Kircne und Rechfertigung. Das Verstàndnis der Kirche im Licht
der Rechtfertigungslehre (Paderborn: Bonifatius; Frankfurt: Lembeck, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579346
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570132
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Rasco Emilio
Abstract: Szeged 1995: «Az Apostolok Cselekedeteivel Kapcso-
latos Kutatàs Legalapvetobb Szakaszai», 7-29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579575
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITA GREGORIANA
Issue: i23569632
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Id. 124.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23579748
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570137
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Lawrence Fred
Abstract: Lonergan, "Mission and Spirit" 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23580263
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570142
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Lucas Ramón Lucas
Abstract: M.F. Sciacca, Morte e immortalità, 106-107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581124
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570322
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: M. Heidegger, De l'essence de la vérité, 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581548
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Finamore Rosanna
Abstract: H.G. Gadamer, Verità e metodo, 442.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581824
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITAS GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570197
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: Friendship and the Ways to Truth, Notre Carne,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581825
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23570983
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Carlotti Paolo
Abstract: Concilio Ecumenico Vaticano II, Gaudium et spes, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581907
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571955
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: Ibid., 248.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23581948
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23573307
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Mateo Rogelio García
Abstract: R. Garcìa Mateo, Ignacio de Loyola. Su espiritualidad y su mundo cultural, Bilbao, 2000,
161-206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582170
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572032
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Kapusta Paweł
Abstract: 1 John 1:1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582267
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23571645
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Nebel Mathias
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Histoire et vérité, 106-109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582361
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23575105
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Margaria Luca
Abstract: E. Lévinas, L'au-delà du verset, 175.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582521
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i23572489
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Nkeramihigo Théoneste
Abstract: Ibid., n. 322.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23582746
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. MOHR (PAUL SIEBECK)
Issue: i23584417
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Janowski Bernd
Abstract: Gese, Tod, 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23584888
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23584999
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Weder Hans
Abstract: G. Ebeling, Die Wahrheit des Evangeliums. Eine Lesehilfe zum Galaterbrief,
1981, 340
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585590
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585001
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Ringleben Joachim
Abstract: Klopstocks sämmtliche Werke, 5. Bd., 1854, 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585648
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: J.C.B. Mohr (Paul Siebeck)
Issue: i23585004
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Zumstein Jean
Abstract: B. Feuillet, L'heure de la femme (s. Anm. 29).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585653
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585752
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Schneider-Flume Gunda
Abstract: Ricceur [s. Anm. 6], Bd. 3,335-
349
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585759
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585557
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Morgenstern Matthias
Abstract: G. Aicher, Das Alte
Testament in der Mischna, Freiburg i.Br. 1906, 67f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23585919
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585596
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Krause Cyprian
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586078
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585695
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ahrens Theodor
Abstract: Steinmann [s. Anm. 22], 221-239), 221ff.
227ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586129
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585712
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Schröter Jens
Abstract: R. Koselleck, Vergangene Zukunft. Zur Semantik geschichtlicher Zeiten
(stw 757), 1979, 206
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/004435411795870282
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585707
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Stoellger Philipp
Abstract: E. Levinas, Autrement qu'etre ou au-delä de l'essence, Paris 1974,
29-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23586358
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i23585724
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Seibert Christoph
Abstract: Lk23,34.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/004435412799484295
Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23593146
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Mahieu François-Régis
Abstract: Ballet, Bazin, 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23593645
Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23592762
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Pouligny Béatrice
Abstract: F. G. Bailey, Les règles du jeu politique. Paris, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594213
Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23592810
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Garciandia Helena
Abstract: F. Polletta, Contending stories..., in Quali-
tative Sociology, vol. 21, n
4, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594314
Journal Title: Revue Tiers Monde
Publisher: l'Institut d'Étude du Développement économique et social
Issue: i23594288
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): de Freitas Dutra Eliana
Abstract: Idem.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23594373
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23596134
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): DE BRITO AMÉLIA SILVEIRA
Abstract: Cortina, Adela - Ètica de la razón cordial, cit., p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23596156
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23608439
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Zermeño Guillermo
Abstract: Algunos debates en Historia Mexicana, xlvi:3 (183) (ene.-mar. 1997),
pp. 563-580, recogidos de The Hispanic American Historical Review,
79:2 (1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23608575
Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23613631
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): DE FRANCESCHI Sylvio Hermann
Abstract: L. Avezou, Sully à travers l'histoire. Les avatars d'un mythe politique,
préface B. Barbiche, Paris, 2001, «Le Grand Dessein, première gloire posthume de Sully?», p. 166-172.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23613639
Journal Title: Histoire, Économie et Société
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23614385
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): De Franceschi Sylvio Hermann
Abstract: Ibid., t. Ier, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23614392
Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i23615227
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Pholsena Vatthana
Abstract: Hyunah Yang, Finding the 'map of memory，、p. 87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615373
Journal Title: European Journal of East Asian Studies
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23615377
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): YANG CHUNG FANG
Abstract: Cheung, Rujia Lunli Tu gjhixu Qingjie', Liu, Chui Rong, 'gjiongguoren De Caifu
Guarnían' (The Chinese conception of wealth), in K.S. Yang (ed.), jjiongguoren Dejiazhi
Guan (Value Orientations of the Chinese People) (Taipei: Guiguan Books, 1993).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23615674
Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23615225
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): HANSKA JAN
Abstract: This article concerns itself with establishing and defining the concept of prophetic politics as a narrative-based political leadership. It focuses on the use of religious, mythical and otherwise culturally dominating narratives which are often taken for granted or as 'common sense.' By a skilful politician, these stories can be given new forms and used as tools of leadership. This article explores the differences between traditional prophesies in the religious context and political prophesies and shows how with the use of prophetic narratives the politician is able to keep politics from stagnation since every moment and every decision can be endowed with special importance in actualizing the vision that remains the fascinating but elusive goal of politics - whatever it is narrated to be. This might re-invigorate the citizens to participate more in politics. The focus of the article is on American politics since the American civil religion and the narrative tradition of the jeremiad provide ample tools for political prophets, but the concept is not restricted solely to America. I argue that well told narratives have great influence on how people think and that can be manipulated politically. This type of leadership opens new vistas for political candidates, but it also opens new vistas for researchers to use in their study of politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616226
Journal Title: Perspectives
Publisher: INSTITUTE OF INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS
Issue: i23616196
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): HAYS GEORGE
Abstract: This article examines Campbell's concept of 'foreign policy' and its application to identifiers 'below' those utilized by Campbell. Campbell's discussion of 'foreign policy' at the level of the ruling elite, though perhaps necessary for the historical breadth of his analysis, provides a skewed and privileged understanding of both national identity and its creation. Through an analysis of 'foreign policy' at the sub-elite level, using the three versions of The Quiet American as illustrative examples, this article demonstrates that a separation of 'foreign policy' from Foreign Policy can yield multiple potentially conflicting national identities. While at times taking on the form of an argument ad absurdum, it is not the intent of this article to disprove Campbell's work. Rather, its intent is to use the concept of 'foreign policy' with a different level of identifier to demonstrate that the tenuousness and indefiniteness of national identity are actually greater than those proposed by Campbell.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23616255
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i23617005
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): GRABAR OLEG
Abstract: Barry Flood, comme The Great
MosqueMosque of Damascus: studies on the makines of an Umayyad visual culture
(Leiden, 2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23617810
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23616938
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): SAUZEAU PIERRE
Abstract: A. Stadter, op. cit., p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23618051
Journal Title: Estudios Demográficos y Urbanos
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i23621772
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Rodríguez Anabella
Abstract: Proença Leite, 2004: 284
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23621792
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i23622119
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Slipak Daniela
Abstract: Véase Aboy Cariés (2001: 163-258).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23622286
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23630184
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: "C'était bien la même Amérique que j'avais laissée, les mêmes questions, les mêmes
Blancs qui cherchaient un bouc émissaire!" Haley, Alex & Malcolm X - op. cit., p. 288.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23631110
Journal Title: The British Journal of Criminology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23637282
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): Rock Paul
Abstract: The Sunday Times, 23 June 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23638713
Journal Title: The British Journal of Criminology
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23638508
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Pavlich George
Abstract: Van Swaaningen 1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23638899
Journal Title: The British Journal of Criminology
Publisher: OXFORD JOURNALS OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23639156
Date: 5 1, 2007
Author(s): Vaughan Barry
Abstract: Archer (2003: 319)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23639547
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i23644129
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Schulz-Forberg Hagen
Abstract: »Die räumlichen und zeitlichen Schichten der Globalgeschichte: Überlegungen zu einer globalen Begriffsgeschichte anhand der Ausweitung von Reinhart Kosellecks Zeitschichten in globale Räume«. Recent debates on global history have challenged the understanding of history beyond the nation-state. Simultaneously, they search for non-Eurocentric approaches. This has repercussions on the relation between historical space and time in both historical interpretation and in research design. This article reflects on the possibilities of a global conceptual history by expanding Reinhart Koselleck's theory of temporal layers (Zeitschichten) into global spaces. To this end, it introduces the notion of spatial layers (Raumschichten). First, historicisation and its relation to and interaction with spatialisation and temporalisation is pondered; then, the impact of global spatial and temporal complexities on comparative and conceptual history is considered, before, thirdly, a framework of three tensions of global history - normative, temporal and spatial - is introduced as a way to concretely unfold historical research questions through global conceptual history. Regarding time and space, the main lines of argument in global history have focused either on the question of whether or not European powers were ahead of non-European ones or on the supposedly Western linearity of time as opposed to a non-Western cosmology or circularity of time. Taking its point of departure in Zeitschichten, which break from the linear-vs.-circular logic, this article instead proposes to foreground an actor-based, multi-lingual, global conceptual history to better understand spatio-temporal practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23644524
Journal Title: RES: Anthropology and Aesthetics
Publisher: The Peabody Museum of Archaeology and Ethnology and the Harvard University Art Museums
Issue: i23646290
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): PEZOLET NICOLA
Abstract: "Golden Lion for Malick Sidibé," Nafas (May 2007), http://
universes-in-universe.org/eng/nafas/articles/2007/news_tips/malick_
sidibe (accessed March 30, 2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23647795
Journal Title: Asian Journal of Social Science
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23653908
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): bte Hussin Dayang Istiaisyah
Abstract: History is not neutral. It is rendered ideological by the very act of being conveyed in a narrative form, for language is both the purveyor of meaning and the principle locus of ideology. This paper explores the idea of history as discourse, and its deployment in the cultural-symbolic construction of the Singapore nation. To this end, I have chosen to analyse a key moment for Singapore history, the years 1963-65, when Singapore was first merged with the nation of Malaysia, and then separated from it. The way that these events are described in official histories is used by the government of Singapore to justify its policy of multiracialism, which also serves as a legitimating device confirming the state in its political and ideological hegemony. I have examined the events through analysis of local newspapers, The Straits Times and Berita Harían, to see in what ways their reporting may have helped to mould popular understandings of what was happening.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23653958
Journal Title: Asian Journal of Social Science
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23653923
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Taylor Betsy
Abstract: Wilshire (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23654398
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23660538
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): BEDJAI MARC
Abstract: Signes, Paris, nrf, 1960, 438 p., p. 291.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23670904
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662339
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Liebe und Gerechtigkeit, Tubingen, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671125
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23662048
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): SAUZEAU ANDRÉ
Abstract: J. S. Cooper, Sumerian and Aryan : Racial theory, Académie Politics and Parisian
Assiriology, RHR, 210, 1993, p. 169-205.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23671687
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676200
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): HEINZ RUDOLF
Abstract: K. Popper, Die offene Gesellschaft und ihre Feinde, Bd. 2: Falsche Prophe-
ten, Bern 1958, S. 265.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23678579
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676237
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): ZIRK-SADOWSKI MAREK
Abstract: Ibid., p. 155.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23679193
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag GmbH
Issue: i23676219
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): HEINZ RUDOLF
Abstract: Eine beispielhafte Passage dazu findet sich bei Binswanger 1955, S. 169/170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23679260
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676322
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Huster Stefan
Abstract: Goethe, Maximen und Reflexionen, in: ders., Werke. Hamburger Ausgabe in 14 Bänden, Bd. 12,
365, 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680756
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676381
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Morikawa Takemitsu
Abstract: Kodalle [Fn. 21], 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680910
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676359
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schmitz Heinz-Gerd
Abstract: A. Hamilton/J. Madison/J. Jay, The Federalist or, The New Consitution, introduction by W.R. Brock,
London/New York 1961, 37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23680922
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676356
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Cerar Miro
Abstract: Maihofer (note 28), 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681113
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676353
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Sabete Wagdi
Abstract: „Sociologie juridique",
P.U.F., léreéd., 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681243
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676296
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Kirste Stephan
Abstract: Arthur Kaufmann, Naturrecht und Geschichtlichkeit. Tübingen 1957, S. 16
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681355
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676298
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, État d'exception, 2003, 87
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681447
Journal Title: ARSP: Archiv für Rechts- und Sozialphilosophie / Archives for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i23676311
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Dédeyan Daniel
Abstract: KrV, XVIf.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23681577
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: CENTRE D'ÉTUDE DES CONFLITS L'HARMATTAN
Issue: i23696068
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): CATANZARO Raimondo
Abstract: C. Duggan, Facism and the Mafia, New Haven : Yale university Press, 1989, p. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698736
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696193
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): APTER DAVID E.
Abstract: David E. Apter et Tony Saich, Revolutionary Discourse in "Mao's Republic",
Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698813
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696192
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): CEYHAN AYSE
Abstract: A. Etzioni, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23698873
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696886
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): GBIKPI Bernard
Abstract: Id., p. 103.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699434
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696812
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): CROWLEY John
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, Seuil, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699461
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696812
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): MCGIBBON Rodd
Abstract: Campbell (David), National reconstruction: Violence, Identity and Justice in Bosnia,
op. cit., pp. 165-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699462
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23696812
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): CROWLEY John
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris,
Seuil, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23699464
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i23697554
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): WASINSKI Christophe
Abstract: Doubler M., Closing with Enemy - How Gis Fought the War in Europe,
1944-1945, Lawrence, University Press of Kansas, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23703529
Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23709094
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): McBEATH GRAHAM B.
Abstract: This paper, a reply to Professor R. S. Downie's criticisms of our paper 'A Political Critique of Kantian Ethics in Social Work', both appearing in BJSW 19, 6, tries to answer the main charge against us of illegitimately bridging the logical gap between statements of value and statements of fact. In addition to this, we explicate further our original arguments that language and power are indissolubly bound to each other, and that a Kantian approach to social work theory and practice fails in trying to dissolve that relationship by finding a neutral, universal ground from which to derive ethical principles and judgements.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23709099
Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23714806
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): BANKS SARAH
Abstract: This paper examines the ethical implications of recent changes in social work, particularly in relation to the conception of social workers as professionals guided by a code of ethics. These changes include the fragmentation of the occupation, the increasing proceduralization of the work and the growing focus on consumer rights and user participation. Some people have argued that codes of ethics are becoming increasingly irrelevant in this climate, in that they assume a unified occupational group and are based upon professionals' definition of values without consultation with service users. On the other hand, it has also been maintained that it is ever more important to retain and strengthen codes of ethics in order to maintain professional identity and to defend the work of the profession from outside attack. This paper explores the relevance of a code of professional ethics for social work, focusing particularly on the British Association of Social Workers' code, in the context of the changing organization and practice of the work. It considers two alternative approaches: the 'new consumerism' which focuses on the worker's technical skills (rather than professional ethics) and consumer rights (as opposed to professional obligations); and a 'new radicalism' which stresses the worker's own personal or political commitment and individual moral responsibility (as opposed to an externally imposed code of professional ethics). It is concluded that the changes in social work do threaten the notion of a single set of professional ethics articulated in a code, and that, in some types of work, this model is less appropriate. However, there is still mileage in retaining and developing a code of ethics, not as an imposed set of rules developed by the professional association, but as part of a dynamic and evolving ethical tradition in social work and as a stimulus for debate and reflection on changing and contradictory values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23714811
Journal Title: Social Work
Publisher: National Association of Social Workers
Issue: i23715106
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Norton Dolores G.
Abstract: Although the dual perspective should be used to focus on diversity, it should be applied within the context of an anthropological—ecological framework to prevent stereotyping, to illuminate the universal goals of societal organization underlying human behavior, and to explore the early socialization of children. This view is illustrated with preliminary findings from an ongoing longitudinal study of lower socioeconomic inner-city African American children that examines the importance of a sense of time, its evolution in early socialization, and the relationship of parent-child interactions to the development of a sense of time.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23716885
Journal Title: The British Journal of Social Work
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23720551
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Wilks Tom
Abstract: Most accounts of social work values contain two central conceptual strands: social work ethics and anti-discriminatory practice. Within social work, relatively little attention has been paid to the potential of feminist approaches to ethics, grounded in identity to bring these two strands together. Narrative ethics is an approach which, like the feminist ethic of care, takes identity as its starting point and therefore has the potential to bridge these two distinctive approaches to social work values. However, in asserting the centrality of narrative in the construction of our identities, it moves beyond the feminist approach. Narrative approaches to ethics have been widely adopted in medicine. This paper explores their applicability to social work practice, particularly in the light of an increasing interest in narrative as a basis for practice intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23720555
Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Istituti Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i23718540
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Fiori Stefano
Abstract: WN, IV, p. 456.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23722186
Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Gruppo Editoriale Internazionale
Issue: i23718600
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Coats A. W. "Bob"
Abstract: Terence W. Hutchison (1988), p. 527.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23722264
Journal Title: History of Economic Ideas
Publisher: Fabrizio Serra editore
Issue: i23722717
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Archer 1998,194
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23723537
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730852
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Kontler László
Abstract: Robert Bernasconi (2000) and (2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730856
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730852
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Feres João
Abstract: Jurgen Habermas (1989) and (1990).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730857
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730861
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kontler László
Abstract: Lorraine Daston, "Afterword: The Ethos of Enlightenment" in
William Clark, Jan Golinski, and Simon Schaffer (1999), 495-504.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730867
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i23730893
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Scuccimarra Luca
Abstract: Sandro
Chignola (2005), 195.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23730896
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i23730902
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): IFVERSEN JAN
Abstract: http://www.concepta-net.org/beyond_classical_key_concepts.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/choc.2011.060104
Journal Title: Innovar: Revista de ciencias administrativas y sociales
Publisher: UNIVERSIDAD NACIONAL DE COLOMBIA
Issue: i23741451
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Tognato Carlo
Abstract: Stevens y Toneguzzo (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23745584
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO "SAN JOSÉ DE CALASANZ" DE PEDAGOGÍA CONSEJO SUPERIOR DE INVESTIGACIONES CIENTÍFICAS
Issue: i23757207
Date: 12 1, 1970
Author(s): Pérez Miguel Fernández
Abstract: A. J. Ayer, "Language, Truth and Logic", GoIIancz, London, 1948.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23762714
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO «SAN JOSÉ DE CALASANZ» DE PEDAGOGÍA CONSEJO SUPERIOR DE INVESTIGACIONES CIENTÍFICAS
Issue: i23757323
Date: 12 1, 1971
Author(s): Seima José Vila
Abstract: Vicens Vives [1952], 1969, 15, 16.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23762901
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: consejo superior de investigaciones científicas
Issue: i23757753
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Botía Antonio Bolívar
Abstract: This paper argues that the role of teacher, in the process of curriculum development, is conceptually dependent on the different curriculum approaches. It has been analysed and discussed the instrumental role (user and implementor) which it has from a technical-scientific approach, the curriculum development agent's role from an interpretative-cultural view, and the role of the institucional development from a critical approach. The potentialities and insufficiencies of a curriculum practical view and the teacher's role have been analysed. We suggest the School Institutional Development as one of the most promising ways for curriculum development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23764915
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: INSTITUTO EUROPEO DE INICIATIVAS EDUCATIVAS
Issue: i23757777
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): BÁRCENA Fernando
Abstract: The main end of this article is to offer a critical analysis of autonomy conceived as a basic idea in modern educational philosophy. After the tragic experience and dramatic consequences of totalitarianism, is not possible to defend a kantian concept of autonomy as a unique source of moral responsibility and ethical action. After holocaust, we need to defend, on the contrary, the principle of previous value of heteronomy, conceived as the practice of otherness, in its levinasian perspective. So, the authors explore the thesis of the prior value of heteronomy on autonomy, as a source and foundation of moral responsibility in educational relationship, and to reflect the general educational implications of the jewish philosophical tradition of otherness in philosophical educational discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23765223
Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Thought (JET) / Revue de la Pensée Éducative
Publisher: Faculty of Education, University of Calgary
Issue: i23762745
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ROTH WOLFF-MICHAEL
Abstract: Present discourses on technology education are taking a positive and value-neutral approach with utilitarian and vocational overtones. The discourses generally lack discussions of human agency and human responsibility for techno-scientific activities and technological literacy. To support the emergence of a collective civic literacy, we argue in this text that technology education needs to take up critical and value-acknowledging aspects with emphasis on building sustainable relationships among human beings, technology, and lifeworld. To understand the relationship between human agency and modern technology, we examine the nature of technology in the dimensions of technology as causality and technology as a relationship of lifeworld. Discussing Martin Heidegger's perspectives on the causalities of technology, we question how the nature of technology situates human beings in power-related relationships to the world. Understanding technology as process and relationship of lifeworld, the paper extends its discussion of the responsibility of a dialectical human-technology-lifeworld relation based on a socio-technical and ethico-moral framework of technology. By recognizing human responsibility of and for modern technology, we outline a critical and reflective approach to technological literacy. The approach challenges the position of current approaches to technology in the attempt to provide a foundation for a contemporary pedagogy of technological awareness and values. Aujourd'hui, les discours en matière d'enseignement de la technologie sont en train de prendre une orientation positive et dépourvue de jugement de valeur comportant des connotations utilitaristes et professionnelles. En général, les discours n'ouvrent pas assez de discussions sur l'action humaine et la responsabilité humaine dans les activités technico-scientifiques et dans l'alphabétisme technologique. Dans ce papier, afin de renforcer l'éclosion de l'alphabétisme civique collectif, nous ouvrons le débat sur le fait que l'enseignement de la technologie a besoin d'aborder des aspects critiques et de valeur reconnue avec un accent mis sur la construction durable des relations chez les êtres humains, dans la technologie et dans la vie mondiale. Dans le but de comprendre les relations entre l'action humaine et la technologie moderne, nous analysons la nature de la technologie en tant que causalité et en tant que relation de la vie mondiale. Nous discutons des perspectives de Martin Heidegger sur les causalités de la technologie. Nous posons des questions sur la manière que la nature de la technologie situe les êtres humains dans les relations basées sur le pouvoir face au monde. Nous assimilons la technologie comme processus et comme relation de la vie mondiale. L'article élargit les propos sur la responsabilité dune relation dialectale humaine technologie/vie mondiale, fondée sur une structure de technologie sociotechnique et éthico morale. En reconnaissant la responsabilité humaine de et pour la technologie moderne, nous soulignons une démarche critique et réfléchie de l'alphabétisme technologique. La démarche remet en question la position des approches actuelles vers le chemin de la technologie afin d'apporter une base à une pédagogie contemporaine de sensibilisation et de valeurs technologiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23767086
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23781981
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Marques Tiago Pires
Abstract: L. F. Crespo et M. L. Muñoz, 2004 : 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785623
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Azevedo Valérie Robin
Abstract: Steve Stern Remembering Pinochet's
Chile, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785644
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23783400
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Aubin-Boltanski Emma
Abstract: N. Olesen, 1991 : 68
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785646
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783024
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): AGIS DOMINGO FERNÁNDEZ
Abstract: Cioran, Emile - Ese maldito yo, ed. cit., p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785814
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i23782111
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Gauthier Claudine
Abstract: Id., 1960 : XI, 13 d
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785829
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783067
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): AMORIM MIGUEL
Abstract: Amorim, Miguel-A Catallegory Fatigue Sampler for an Im-pertinent History of
Cinema, take one. Barcelona: unpublished, 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785881
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: REVISTA PORTUGUESA de Filosofia
Issue: i23783067
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CATALÃO HELENA B.
Abstract: Marión, Jean-Luc-Étant donné, ed. cit., p. 334.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23785889
Journal Title: Ägypten und Levante / Egypt and the Levant
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i23785611
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Schneider Thomas
Abstract: Spiegel's statement (Soziale und weltan-
schauliche Reformbewegungen im alten Ägypten, Heidelberg
1950, 59)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23788656
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799461
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): ROUGÉ BERTRAND
Abstract: infra
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799586
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799461
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): YOUNG-HAE KIM
Abstract: Gté par Susan Buch, The Chinese Literati on Painting Harvard-Yenching Institute Studies XXVII, Har-
vard University Press, Cambridge, Massachusetts, 1971, p. 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799592
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23799482
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): ALEXANDRE DIDIER
Abstract: Michel Foucault, L'Ordre du discours, Paris, Gallimard, 1971, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23799786
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i23795498
Date: 5 1, 1977
Author(s): Sacré James
Abstract: Hamlet et Panurge, Le Seuil, Paris, 1971, p. 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23801842
Journal Title: Ethics
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i341189
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Gutmann Thomas
Abstract: "The Search for a Defensible Good: The Emerging
Dilemma of Liberalism," pp. 253-80, esp. pp. 264-65
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2382168
Journal Title: Durkheimian Studies / Études Durkheimiennes
Publisher: Berghahn Books and The Durkheim Press
Issue: i23861492
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Béra Matthieu Dimitri
Abstract: This is based on research that has discovered crucial, hitherto unknown biographical information. First, I review the theories of authors who helped to generate the whole 'affair' of Durkheim's two pre-names, most often in seeing it as a way to interrogate his relation with Judaism. Next, I discuss how the issue comes with elements that are incomplete or inexact. It is then to present new evidence of Durkheim's ambivalence and changing attitude towards his first, identifiably Jewish pre-name. The census records during his time at Bordeaux show that he registered himself as 'David' in 1891 and 1896, but abandoned this and switched to 'Émile' in 1901. Accordingly, I examine possible interpretations of the change, in terms of the political context of the Dreyfus Affair, events in his family life, his institutional position, his growing reputation, and a programme of research in which he resolved on a scientific treatment of religion.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/ds.2011.170106
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychotherapie
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i23860471
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Scheidt Carl Eduard
Abstract: Bauer 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23871488
Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23881647
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): WERBNER PNINA
Abstract: This article considers the production of an Islamic utopian or millennial discourse by British South Asian Muslims in the diasporic public sphere and its possible impact on the younger generation of Muslims growing up in the UK. Associated with such a discourse, the article considers the vulnerability of diasporas — the process whereby global events can precipitate radical diasporic estrangement, leading to self-estrangement. Such estrangement is fed by moral panics, expressed in the speeches of politicians, in newspaper columns and global news reports. This exposes the fragility of multicultural discourses in the public sphere in the UK.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23889239
Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23880901
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): PATRICK MORAG
Abstract: Many contemporary liberals increasingly accept that plural societies must aspire to far more expansive and inclusive ideals of justice and citizenship than liberal doctrine would suggest. The dominant perception is that extending the set of rights is the most effective way to implement a just and stable multicultural society. In fact, this is not a very plausible description of what people seek in demanding greater respect for diversity. Nor does it offer a compelling vision of how things ought to be. First, social expectations regarding recognition are not uniquely linked to rights; they encompass intractable struggles over values, as well as ways of living and evaluating. For example, a central feature of feminist, black and multicultural politics is the attempt to change social culture into a medium through which personal integrity and self-esteem may be acquired. Second, liberalism cannot easily accommodate this type of struggle, since it takes for granted a narrowly constricted conception of politics that is based on instituting public laws that harmonize the freedom of everyone. Anyone who takes seriously the idea that recognition surpasses legal relations of respect will then surely wish to consider whether liberalism must not be corrected and extended to reveal the political significance of the social conditions that enable individuals to experience themselves as both autonomous and individuated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23889940
Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i23881003
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): SCOTT-BAUMANN ALISON
Abstract: In order to manage our daily lives, we make many decisions based on empirical evidence derived from instrumental action. At the other extreme, we are often attracted by a so-called postmodern solution that invites us to make arbitrary choices. In the education system, the pressing dilemma should not be a choice between standards of competence or unthinking relativism, but how to take action towards intercultural tolerance. Establishing a small teacher training course for a group of British Muslims has shown that communicative action informed by understanding can be disabled by the instrumentality of positivist frameworks, such as those used by government inspectors. In philosophy, Ricoeur offers a provisional dialectic of hope that can be used to show why neither positivist methods, rational analytic philosophy, postmodernity nor any one belief system for interpreting the world should be allowed to exert hegemonic control. The ethicopractical philosophy of Ricoeur also offers a reconstructive view of reality that helps us to rehabilitate belief in human nature and encourages us to seek solutions to conflicts of interpretation in understanding others. It is applied, in this instance, to project work with Muslim women in the UK, in which an ontology of action shows the power of working collaboratively towards an understanding of oneself as another.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23890295
Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i23884619
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Van Den Avenne Cécile
Abstract: This article attempts to pose the principles for the use of certain tools, forged in linguistics, for sociological analysis, particularly for the analysis of interviews. Far from being a simple collection of information, the interviews with migrants analyzed here are an arena for intense language activity. With the use of concepts such as annunciation, pragmatism and natural logic, various language functions are identified that sociologists should take into consideration: the construction of representations, negotiation of one's position in an interaction. Contrary to the spontaneous sociology of certain linguistics, language practices are not those of an actor free of all social determinants. On the contrary, by taking into consideration the complexity of language, sociology can construct a plural, heterogeneous and even divided actor. Cet article essaie de poser les principes d'utilisation de quelques outils forgés en linguistique pour l'analyse sociologique, plus particulièrement pour l'analyse des entretiens. Loin d'être une simple collection d'informations, les entretiens analysés ici, qui sont des entretiens de migrants, sont le lieu d'une intense activité langagière. En recourant aux concepts de l'énonciation, de la pragmatique et de la logique naturelle, sont repérés divers fonctionnements langagiers que le sociologue a tout intérêt à considérer: construction des représentations, négociation des places dans l'interaction. Cependant, contrairement à la sociologie spontanée de certaines linguistiques, les pratiques langagières ne sont pas celles d'un acteur libre de toutes déterminations. Au contraire, en prenant en compte toute la complexité du langage, le sociologue peut construire un acteur pluriel, hétérogène, voire divisé.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23891479
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: E. J. BRILL-VERLAG GMBH
Issue: i23886187
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): FLEISCHER MANFRED P.
Abstract: Francis Delaisi: Political Myths and Economic
Realities, New York 1927
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23895065
Journal Title: Philippine Sociological Review
Publisher: The Philippine Sociological Society
Issue: i23898240
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Pertierra Raul
Abstract: The mobile and other new communication technologies such as the Internet are having unprecedented effects on society and culture worldwide. While some of the claims for these new communication technologies are wildly exaggerated, there is little doubt that they are changing our world significantly. This paper addresses some of the theoretical issues associated with the new communication technology and assesses their impact for the Philippines. Just as Durkheim and other early theorists responded to the changes resulting from the Industrial Revolution, one may expect a similar theoretical renewal to address contemporary transformations. The social sciences, in particular Sociology, will have to reconsider its basic paradigms to accommodate these transformations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23898243
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Religions- und Geistesgeschichte
Publisher: BRILL
Issue: i23889006
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): MEHRING REINHARD
Abstract: H. Arendt, Vorwort: Die Lücke zwischen Vergangenheit und Zukunft, in: dies.,
Zwischen Vergangenheit und Zukunft, 7-19, hier: 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23898645
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: LAROUSSE
Issue: i23899665
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: Jacques Guilhaumou, La langue politique
et la Révolution française y Méridiens Klincksieck, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23906644
Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23908595
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Streib Heinz
Abstract: Fowler 1981, 198. Vgl. dazu auch Fowlers Beitrag: „The Enlightenment and Faith
Development Theory" (in: J.E.T. 1 (1988), 29-42), in dem er den Beitrag der faith deveop-
ment theory zur religiös-kulturellen Lage der Gegenwart darin sieht, eine Sprache und ein
Begriffssystem dafür bereitszustellen, „for ordering and speaking intelligibly about the
clash of cultural levels of development".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23908603
Journal Title: Archiv für Religionspsychologie / Archive for the Psychology of Religion
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i23912365
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Kwon Soo-Young
Abstract: The current methods in psychoanalytic studies of God images and representations have focused almost exclusively on individual, internal processes. This article examines how psychological anthropologists go about formulating symbolic representations of deity in their research, in comparison with the object relations method of God-representations. Drawing on Melford Spiro's integrative proposal for interpreting the mental and collective representations in religious symbol systems, this paper proposes that there is a need for a comprehensive model of the representational process in the Eastern world in order to suit its cultural traditions. The author uses both theoretical and historical materials as well as personal narrative throughout its entirety to balance the two in a mutual and coherent flow of understanding. Noting the culturally patterned interactions with culturally postulated God-symbols, the object relations method of God-representations will be utilized to probe how God is both created and found on a collective (cultural) level as well as individual level.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23912375
Journal Title: Theoria: An International Journal for Theory, History and Foundations of Science
Publisher: Centro de Análisis, Lógica e Informática Jurídica (CALIJ) / SERVICIO EDITORIAL UNIVERSIDAD DEL PAIS VASCO / ARGITARAPEN ZERBITZUA EUSKAL HERRIKO UNIBERTSITATEA
Issue: i23915266
Date: 10 12, 1992
Author(s): ZUNZUNEGUI Edurne
Abstract: In this paper, I assume that speech act theory should be based on a theory of action. I will try to show that a pragmatic theory of speech acts (Gazdar, 1981) can be easily based on a certain theory of action (a model combining Searle's and Von Wright's proposals).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23915288
Journal Title: Theoria: An International Journal for Theory, History and Foundations of Science
Publisher: CENTRO DE ANÁLISIS, LÓGICA E INFORMÁTICA JURÍDICA (CALIJ) / DEPARTAMENTO DE LÓGICA Y FILOSOFÍA DE LA CIENCIA / FACULTAD DE FILOSOFÏA Y CCEE, UNIVERSIDAD DEL PAÍS VASCO
Issue: i23915212
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): PAYCHERE François
Abstract: Language and judicial activities are both signs of the existence of a society. There is, therefore, good reason for a dialogue between the science of language and the science of law. This article applies a linguistic theory of the Paris School (semiotics) to the examination of a legal text, namely a contract. The author points to some elements shared by legal and other texts, and demonstrates how a semiotic interpretation can provide interesting and unexpected insights into the deeper levels of a legal text. He concludes that a similar approach could fruitfully be used with other types of legal text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23916027
Journal Title: Theoria: An International Journal for Theory, History and Foundations of Science
Publisher: Centro de Análisis, Lógica e Informática Jurídica (CALIJ) / SERVICIO EDITORIAL UNIVERSIDAD DEL PAIS VASCO / ARGITARAPEN ZERBITZUA EUSKAL HERRIKO UNIBERTSITATEA
Issue: i23918489
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): ZUSKA Vlastimil
Abstract: The paper offers a new model of genre. The model employs Deleuze and Guattari's concepts of plane of immanence, chaos, and, in particular, concepts and approaches of cognitive science. Genre in general and the film genre in particular are modelled as a multidimensional space with a network of vector sequences, as a plane of immanence with individual works in the role of concepts, as a cluster category without a centre. That genre model provides more explanatory power than the recent semantic-syntactical one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23918667
Journal Title: Administrative Science Quarterly
Publisher: Cornell University Graduate School of Business and Public Administration
Issue: i341309
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Woodward Gareth
Abstract: Burrell and Morgan (1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2392283
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917901
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): LeBlanc John Randolph
Abstract: Albert Camus's interrogation of the ethical and spiritual vacuity of the twentieth century convinced him that authentic political existence requires a vision that embraces while transcending the human condition. He found his ethical model in art. The work of the artist can be analogous to that of the just political actor. The principal components of ethical political being are all present in Camus's aesthetics: a vision of life in human community (lucidity), a grounded sense of justice subject to the limitations of human existence (beauty), a need to redress the defects of political reality (the urge to create), and an understanding that any structural solution is of necessity temporary (the need to rearticulate the initial vision). Camus's vision requires him to reject our positive political categories in the name of creative, grounded human being.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925254
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917900
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Levey David
Abstract: This essay argues that a religious perspective on South African writing (the term is defined as including any cultural artefact, spoken or written, which uses language(s) as its main means of communication) is both fruitful and long overdue. The essay traces, or outlines, the general situation and lists some areas in which religious concerns, such as transformation, suffering and hope, poverty and marginality, can contribute to debates on South African writing. Some of these are further discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925815
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917930
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Whitehouse Glenn
Abstract: This article interprets John Sayles' 1996 film Lone Star as a reflection on how a community whose history is steeped in violence, such as the US, should seek to manage its difficult cultural memory. A conceptual triad of love, justice, and tragedy utilised to interpret the film's last line, 'Forget the Alamo.' It is concluded that the memory of a troubled past can only serve as the basis for responsible public life when we, like the characters in Lone Star, choose to remember with a charity that liberates both our ancestors and our selves from having to play out the roles of hero or villain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23925968
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917924
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Wright Dale S.
Abstract: Mandala is a Korean film that follows the careers of two Buddhist monks who pursue antithetical forms of religious practice—meditative selfcultivation, and antinomian pursuit of freedom. Mandala culminates in the enlightenment of both, as they come to realize the limits intrinsic in self-absorption in either form. The paper seeks to explore the larger ethical issues posed in the film in relation to their background in Mahayana Buddhism and to show their applicability in our own cultural setting to the emergence of a 'theological humanism', which articulates various forms of transcendence or depth experienced in the midst of human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926053
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917915
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Bongmba Elias
Abstract: This essay suggests that the images of love in Ngugi's first written novel, The River Between can be read as a phenomenology of love. Such a phenomenology demonstrates that the love Waiyaki, the main character, has for Nyambura points to a conciliatory path in resistance to colonialism. It is argued that although the main character fails in his mission, his declaration of love for the daughter of the pastor, who opposes indigenous practices, is an erotic manifestation that is a rejection of partisan spirit as well as a critique of Christian praxis in colonial Kenya, and could serve as a basis for reconfiguring contemporary gender relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926293
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23919272
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Anderson Pamela Sue
Abstract: I propose both a critique of canonicity and a feminist defence of the careful re-reading of certain canonical texts. My proposal for a critique of the limits of our thinking about and with texts is informed by a re-reading of the canonical text of Kant. Admittedly Kant himself might be excluded from any possible feminist canon whether in literary theory or theology. However, my qualified defence of the Kantian text is part of a larger concern to rethink texts by men and women. The aim is not to reaffirm a conservative culture, but to provide crucial tools for the judgements and practices of still highly significant forms of critical hermeneutics. In particular, the process of suppression and repression of valuable texts by women and minorities cannot properly be reversed without taking seriously the particular skills of post-Kantian critique. Critical and historical skills will help distinguish when to think merely about a text and when to think with it so that we might come up with a new picture of canon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926797
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917895
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Ward Bruce K.
Abstract: The contemporary philosopher, Paul Ricoeur, has characterized the dominant trend in modern interpretative thought as the 'school of suspicion', whose most significant 'masters' are Freud and Nietzsche. For them, to seek meaning—whether in a text, dream, discourse, or institution—is, first and foremost, to suspect 'truth as lying'. It is my contention that Ricoeur could well have named Dostoevsky as a third master of this modern school of interpretation, for he, too, was preoccupied with exploring the possibility of 'truth as lying', whether to others or to oneself. The general concern of my essay is to clarify Dostoevsky's relation to the modern 'hermeneutics of suspicion' in a manner which is mutually illuminating. The particular focus is on Dostoevsky's hermeneutics of suspicion as employed in The Brothers Karamazov, especially with the object of deciphering the avowed 'love of humanity' which motivates Ivan Karamazov's famous 'rebellion' against God. Ivan's humanism is highly ambiguous, as his words and actions (of omission and commission) throughout the novel demonstrate. I attempt to show that the ambiguity of Ivan Karamazov can be illumined as an exercise of suspicion on Dostoevsky's part which distinguishes between the manifest sources of Ivan's moral stance and what is in reality its hidden basis. And, in order to situate Dostoevsky in relation to the modern 'school of suspicion', his interpretation of the ambiguous text of modern humanism is compared with that of Nietzsche. The dialogue which the essay sets up between Nietzsche and Dostoevsky on the problem embodied by Ivan Karamazov reveals areas of convergence and divergence: the former apparent in a shared suspicion of a secular humanism which affirms the love of humanity apart from religious faith; and the latter apparent in their different understandings of love—whether of humanity or of God. The comparison between Dostoevsky and Nietzsche, then, highlights the distinction between a hermeneutics of suspicion which is ultimately reductive in intent, and one which can be said to be ultimately 'recollective'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926812
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23926961
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Ward Graham
Abstract: The correlation of narrative and ethics has a long history in literature, and frequently ethics has been associated with a transcendental notion of truth. The recent attention to narrative and theology has offered more theoretical reflections of both poetic and hermeneutical practices that return us to the earliest literary, philosophical and theological productions. In this essay, I wish to present a different way of examining the correlation of narrative and ethics; one less orientated towards Scripture and less concerned with the Church. The narratives I consider are secular fictions from the modernist period. Through examining these works phenomenologically and the role the imagination plays in the production of beliefs, I argue that all narratives structure emotions, desires and hopes and this structuring continually opens up a transcendent horizon.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23926969
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922199
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Schleicher Marianne
Abstract: Responding to the ethical and performative call of Judith Butler not to propagate the sex- and gender-related violence of the imbedded discourse that we study, this article inquires into the discursive strategies of Jewish scripture by analysing how it orchestrates certain norms of sex and gender and makes them serve the overall aim of securing cultural survival. Following this, it traces reflections on persons of ambiguous or indeterminate sex from rabbinic to modern Judaism so as to inquire into the rabbinic dependency on scripture when non-conforming individuals challenge its bipolar sex and gender system. Finally, the article considers if scripture, as suggested by Butler, can play a subversive role in how we attend to non-conforming others today. To do so, the author's distinction between hermeneutical and artifactual uses of scripture is presented to evaluate the extent to which modern Jews and non-Jews are able to influence their own representations of sex and gender and thus liberate themselves from the normativity implied by scriptural discourse.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frr051
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922199
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Morgan Ben
Abstract: The article uses a reading of Eliot's Middlemarch and a discussion of Levinas and Heidegger to challenge two aspects of the approach to literary texts proposed by Toril Moi. I suggest that we needn't assume that the inner lives of others are inaccessible in the way Moi (following Stanley Cavell) does, nor that literature has a privileged role in helping us come to terms with this alterity. Literature is one practice amongst others with which relations with other people are negotiated more or less honestly. I argue that recent developments in phenomenology and cognitive science, in particular the focus on enactive and participatory models of being in the world, can help to make more concrete Heidegger's concept of being-with (Mitsein) and Levinas' concept of proximité. Heidegger and Levinas' can then take their place in a counter tradition of 20th-century thinkers who engage with human togetherness rather than declare it to be impossible. The question Heidegger and Levinas' raise about the ethical challenge of human togetherness is not, however, answered by more recent research. It is by turning back to Middlemarch and viewing it in the context of its original marketing that we can see one way that this challenge may be confronted in everyday life.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frr049
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917935
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Is liability insurance simply a necessary evil in today's climate of litigation? Or does it have greater implications beyond its social and economic remit? In this article, I argue that when the insurance policy is viewed hermeneutically as a text, its negligence-based definition of action supplants the understanding of responsibility, therefore having theological and philosophical implications. Insurance, in this sense, comes 'in between' humanity and its relation to others and fundamental ontological questions concerning the meaning of uncertainty and suffering.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23927311
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23917944
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Ward Graham
Abstract: Having defined how 'secular' is to be understood in this context, this essay explores two sets of observations. The first concerns the relationship between religion and literature as cultural products of a specific cultural imaginary. Both are fundamentally associated with narrative, which, as even contemporary neuroscience demonstrates, continually attempts to make sense of the world. Both are narratives in which there is a reflection upon, and a performance of, creativity. Since the cultural imaginary has been shaped historically by the religious, then all reflections upon creating are coloured by the sacred. The second set of observations issues from the first and concerns the relationship between authorial standpoint and literary creation. The essay examines authorial intention, the nature of language and the operation of the imagination as each relates to the cultural imaginary and the act of 'making believe'. The two sets of observations and their examination demonstrate the ways in which literature continually resists secularity.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frp057
Journal Title: Literature and Theology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i23922202
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Hass Andrew W.
Abstract: The following essay explores the nature of theory within the interdisciplinary space we call literature and theology—or more generally religion and literature—and the role theory has played in that space's collective practice. It argues that theory is natural to the 'binding' of religion with literature and of literature with religion, since both are caught in a dilemma of reading, including the 'reading' of the practices that mark each of their respective disciplines. The discussion then looks at the spectatorial nature of the ancient notion of theory as theoria, before it traces how theory, in moving from theoria to high Theory, has figured in the 25 volumes of Literature and Theology itself. This tracing covers a double assumption of theory and an appropriation of the 'other' as theory. The essay concludes by looking at the dynamic that continues to bind literature and theology, and indeed the readers of a journal such as this one, in a communality of theory, practice, and interpretation.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/litthe/frs032
Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: ISTITUTI EDITORIALI E POLIGRAFICI INTERNAZIONALI®
Issue: i23921424
Date: 8 1, 2001
Author(s): Terrusi Leonardo
Abstract: Michele Dell'Aquila, ivi, pp. 90-1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23937096
Journal Title: Italianistica: Rivista di letteratura italiana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i23922211
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Boezio Sara
Abstract: C. Hamilton, The future of Cognitive poetics, «Zeszyty Naukowe Uniwersytetu Rzeszowskiego. Seria fi-
lologiczna - Studia anglica resoviensia 2», xiv, 2003, pp. 120-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23938239
Journal Title: Journal of Korean Religions
Publisher: Institute for the Study of Religion
Issue: i23942764
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Park Jun Hwan
Abstract: In the world of Korean shamanism, there is a particular god, called taegam, which is allegedly famous for its love of money and its abundance of greed for material wealth. During the shamanic ritual of chaesu-kut, the rites for good fortune and luck, this god is popularly worshipped as the Deity of Wealth and is typically symbolized by money placed all over its face and spirit costumes. Nonetheless, as money has the two sides of heads and tails, taegam also has two very different faces—so-taegam and taegam. This article explores the ambiguity of the two taegam gods, focusing on the symbolic action of money-offerings and how its meaning is taken from the perspective of the ritual actors, in the hope of shedding light on the place of Korea's traditional popular religion of shamanism in today's transformed urban landscape. By discussing the semantics of "money is the filial child" (a remark made by so-taegam) and "money is the enemy" (as remarked by taegam), statements I often heard during my fieldwork in Seoul, I suggest that the ambivalent symbolic nature of taegam should be seen as an indispensible vehicle for understanding ritual life, as well as everyday life, of urban Korean people since it is closely related to both normative orientations and the contradictory aspects of the material culture of contemporary urbanites inhabiting the borderless, globalized, and fluctuating modern capitalist market. This conclusion is reached partly with reference to existing sociological theories of money and anthropological inquiries into the ambivalent aspects of taegam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23943367
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE MINISTERE DE L'ÉDUCATION NATIONALE ET DE LA CULTURE FRANÇAISE ET DE LA FONDATION UNIVERSITAIRE
Issue: i23945405
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): HUTTNER Jan
Abstract: Nickles, Thomas, "Scientific Discovery & the Future of Philosophy of Science" in
Nickles, op. cit., esp. p. 18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23945411
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE MINISTERE DE L'ÉDUCATION NATIONALE ET DE LA CULTURE FRANÇAISE ET DE LA FONDATION UNIVERSITAIRE
Issue: i23945465
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Laks André
Abstract: Schleiermacher, Hermeneutik und Kritik, i.e., p. 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23945471
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Allard Julie
Abstract: J. Habermas, op. cit., p.258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955868
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Rosenfeld Michel
Abstract: Michel ROSENFELD, Just Interpretations, at 270-71
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955870
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Presses universitaires de France
Issue: i23955850
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Timsit Gérard
Abstract: G. Timsit, Éléments pour une théorie des cas extrêmes, in Sur les cas extrêmes, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955871
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i23955659
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): LE RIDER Jacques
Abstract: nietzsche, Considérations inactuelles, I, David Strauss, le confesseur et l'écri-
vain, in Nietzsche, Œuvres, loc. cit., p. 187.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23955966
Journal Title: Revue Internationale de Philosophie
Publisher: Librairie Philosophique VRIN
Issue: i23961541
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Moreau Didier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23961547
Journal Title: Iyyun: The Jerusalem Philosophical Quarterly / עיון: רבעון פילוסופי
Publisher: מרכז ש. ה. ברגמן לעיון פילוסופי, הפקולטה למדעי הרוח של האוניברסיטה העברית בירושלים
Issue: i23975214
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Delgadillo Jorge Medina
Abstract: Loumansky, "Levinas and the Possibility of Justice" (note 30 above), 156.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23979077
Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: Westdeutscher Verlag
Issue: i23983253
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Glassman Deborah
Abstract: The article of M. Lilla marks the political position of Derrida in the context of French philosophy since Sartre. Presenting him as an engaged opponent of existentialism and structuralism Lilla shows that Derrida's vehement philosophical fight is directed fundamentally against what he calls the logocentrism of all western philosophy. Derrida's only remedy against this disease: deconstruction of the language. In applying this recipe himself, Derrida ends at a somewhat mysterious one and only notion, the concept of justice, which according to him is not destructible and should not be destructed. The provocative explanation Lilla gives for the surprising fact, that Derrida's most fervent adherents live in the United States is the unlimited self-confidence and good nature of the Americans.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23984407
Journal Title: Dappim: Research in Literature / דפים למחקר בספרות
Publisher: החוג לספרות עברית והשוואתית, אוניברסיטת חיפה
Issue: i23986509
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Katsman Roman
Abstract: In this article alternative history is regarded not as a postmodern genre of Since Fiction but as a universal mode of thinking and storytelling. Its research is especially effective in discussions of historical-mythical pseudo-chronicles of lost civilizations, such as Agnon's Ir u-mloa, his Holocaust opus magnum. The article is devoted to the story from this volume "In Search of a Rabbi, or The Spirit of the Ruler" (Ha-mekhapsim lahem rav, o be-ruakh ha-moshel). The method lays open the author's complex historical and historiographic conceptions hidden in plots and characters, as well as in symbols of historical alternativeness such as "Crusher of Grits" (Kotesh grisin).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23986511
Journal Title: Leviathan
Publisher: VS Verlag für Sozialwissenschaften
Issue: i23983251
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Paul Axel T.
Abstract: Danielle de Lame: Une Colline entre mille ou le calme avant le tempête. Transforma-
tions et blocages du Rwanda rurale, Tervuren 1996, S. 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23987369
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: PLON
Issue: i23985518
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): LEACH EDMUND
Abstract: Robert H. Pfeiffer, Introduction
to the Old Testament (London, A. and
C. Black, 1952), pp. 342-359-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23988308
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychoanalyse
Publisher: Verlag für Medizinische Psychologie
Issue: i23987215
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Schelling Walter A.
Abstract: Es wird der Begriff der „Lebensgeschichte“ zur Diskussion gestellt. Am Beispiel ausgewählter Therapie-Konzeptionen (Dührssen, Cremerius, Loch, Kohut, Morgenthaler) wird gezeigt, daß in jeder therapeutischen Richtung verschiedene Segmente des lebensgeschichtlichen Problemfeldes isoliert, ausgearbeitet und zum Ansatzpunkt des therapeutischen Handelns gemacht werden. Die entsprechenden Konsequenzen für Diagnostik, Therapie und Forschung werden im Blick auf aktuelle Strömungen der therapeutischen Psychoanalyse (Ich-Psychologie, Narzißmus-Analyse, Repräsentanzenlehre, hermeneutische Psychoanalyse) verdeutlicht. The concept of „life history“ is the theme of this discussion. Working from a selection of therapy models (Dührssen, Cremerius, Loch, Kohut, Morgenthaler) it can be shown that in every therapeutic approach various segments from the problem area of life histories in general can be isolated, developed and made into the central point of therapeutic activity. The relevant consequences for diagnosis, therapy and research will be clarified with respect to present-day movements in therapeutic psychoanalysis (ego-psychology, the analysis of narcissism, hermeneutic psychoanalysis).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23996624
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Psychosomatische Medizin und Psychoanalyse
Publisher: Verlag für Medizinische Psychologie
Issue: i23987363
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Tress Wolfgang
Abstract: Unsere Literaturübersicht diskutiert die Frage, ob und inwieweit eine reife Liebesfähigkeit Erwachsener von entsprechenden Früherfahrungen abhängt bzw. inwieweit Liebe und Partnerschaft eine Korrektur ungünstiger emotionaler Erfahrungen der frühen Kindheit ermöglichen. Bestimmte Partnerschaftsstörungen stehen zu konkreten familiären Gegebenheiten der ersten Lebensjahre in keinem zwingenden Bezug. Sind Partnerschaftsstörungen nach traditioneller psychoanalytischer Auffassung als Folge eines ungelösten infantilen Konfliktes anzusehen, so greifen neuere Ansätze angesichts des weitgehenden Fehlens einer psychoanalytischen Interaktionstheorie bei der Beschreibung und Erklärung interpersoneller Phänomene zunehmend auf systemische Ansätze zurück. Äußerungen psychoanalytischer Autoren zur Entwicklung der Liebesfähigkeit reflektieren im historischen Überblick wesentliche Veränderungen der Theoriebildung. Neuere empirische Arbeiten weisen auf Korrektur- und Kompensationsmöglichkeiten ungünstiger Früherfahrungen von mittlerem Schweregrad hin. Dafür aber dürfte die warme und bedürfnisgerechte Zuwendung durch eine oder mehrere feste Bezugspersonen (möglichst durch die liebevoll und partnerschaftlich aufeinander bezogenen Eltern) in den ersten Lebensjahren eine grundlegende Voraussetzung erwachsener Liebes- und Partnerschaftsfähigkeit sein. In this survey of literature on the subject, we discuss the question of whether or not and if so to what extent a mature, adult ability to love depends on relevant early experience, or whether it functions as a corrective to unfavorable emotional experience in early childhood. There is no compelling connection between certain disturbances of partner relations and concrete family circumstances in the first years of life. Such disturbances are regarded by traditional psychoanalysis as the result of an unresolved infantile conflict; however, since there is no psychoanalytical interaction theory for the description and explanation of interpersonal phenomena, recent discussions have drawn increasingly on a systematic approach. From an historical point of view, psychoanalytical discussions reflect essential changes in theories about the ability to love. More recent empirical studies point to a possible involvement of corrective and compensatory mechanisms for unfavorable early experiences of a medium degree of seriousness. Nevertheless, warm affection based on needs during the first years of life (at best from loving parents with a partner-oriented relationship) provides a basis for the adult's ability to love and form partnerships.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23997632
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23998986
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Frère Bruno
Abstract: Castoriadis (1997a).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23998993
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i23985776
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): LEACH EDMUND
Abstract: C. Black, 1952), pp. 342-359-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/23999537
Journal Title: Il Politico
Publisher: UNIVERSITÀ DEGLI STUDI DI PAVIA
Issue: i24003450
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Frétigné Jean-Yves
Abstract: J.-Y. Frétigné, Les intellectuels italiens et la politisation de leur peuple de
l'Unité aux années 1930, in « Raisons Politiques », novembre 2003, p. 149-168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24005351
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24006560
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Pelosi Olimpia
Abstract: Pozzi, Scrittrici mistiche italiane, p. 462: "Nel 1629 cessarono le visioni e le estasi. La fama di
quelle meraviglie, uscita dalla clausura, aveva perô provocato il fenomeno, comune a molte altre
estatiche, di un grande traffico spirituale intomo alla suora: le scrissero senza tregua religiosi e
prelati,... ma le scrissero soprattutto dame dell'alta aristocrazia, dai vicini ducati di Mantova e
. Savoia alle lontane plaghe di Spagna, Boemia, Baviera. Roma intervenne allora col solito rigore;
senza emettere condanne, le proibl ogni corrispondenza con Testerno. Cos! calô su di lei un
silenzio non piu rotto da fatti straordinari né da rumori del secolo, fino alla morte, avvenuta il 12
febbraio 1671".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24006576
Journal Title: Hagut: Studies in Jewish Educational Thought / הגות: מחקרים בהגות החינוך היהודי
Publisher: המרכז להגות בחינוך היהודי ליד מכללת ליפשיץ
Issue: i24006088
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Ophir Natan
Abstract: Rav H̱isday Crescas (1340-1410/11), Rabbi of Aragonese Jewry in Christian Spain and a major figure in medieval Jewish philosophy, is unique in positing an all-embracing thesis of Love. This thesis permeates his theories of cosmogony, metaphysics and theology and generates far-reaching didactic implications. This article examines Crescas' rather bold description of Love as a positive Divine attribute, an anthropopathism meant to convey ontological meaning about the Divine Nature via an analogous construct. Themes such as Infinite Goodness, Joy and Kindness enable Rav H̱isday to structure a new conception of the Creator and Providence. After postulating Divine Love as the Cosmic Force sustaining creation, Crescas explains the purpose of Torah and mitzvot in terms of evoking love for God thus drawing the soul to link up to the Divine Overflow of Love. Even spiritual existence after death is explicated in terms of the soul's love for its Divine Source. To understand Crescas' unique theory of Love, we compare it with the views of his predecessors and analyze his use of philosophic sources such as the 5th century BCE pre-Socratic scientist-mystic Empedocles. We examine educational aspects of Crescas' teachings on love and view them in context of the mass conversions to Christianity resulting from the 1391 riots. Finally, Crescas' ideas are read as pedagogical messages relevant to both Jews and conversos in the twenty traumatic years after 1391 when he served as chief rabbi and political leader in Saragossa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24008146
Journal Title: Hagut: Studies in Jewish Educational Thought / הגות: מחקרים בהגות החינוך היהודי
Publisher: המרכז להגות בחינוך היהודי ע"ש דב רפל ליד מכללת ליפשיץ
Issue: i24008140
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Weiss Tzahi
Abstract: The curriculum for biblical studies in the Israeli public high school system is designated by the official program of the ministry of education to be taught along essentially critical lines based on historical-philological research tools. The aim of this article is to expound on the cultural consequences and hermeneutical problems which are a direct product of this prescription, with emphasis on three major points: first, the fact that the official program of studies has completely disregarded contemporary hermeneutical approaches; second, the import of this hermeneutic deficiency given a literal reading of the biblical text which is meager in descriptive details but is hermeneutically saturated; third, the cultural status of the Bible class as sole agent of socialization pertaining to Jewish knowledge in Israeli public high-schools.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24008249
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24008692
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Smith Jonathan
Abstract: note 14
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24009862
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24009986
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Picone Michelangelo
Abstract: Cherchi, "Opra d'aragna (RVF, clxxii)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24009993
Journal Title: Wiener Zeitschrift für die Kunde Südasiens / Vienna Journal of South Asian Studies
Publisher: VERLAG DER ÖSTERREICHISCHEN AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN
Issue: i24010799
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): D'Sa Francis X.
Abstract: P. RiCOEUR, The Task of Hermeneutics. Hermeneutics and the Human
Sciences, 43ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24010826
Journal Title: Annali d'Italianistica
Publisher: Annali d'Italianistica, Inc.
Issue: i24017782
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Cervigni Dino S.
Abstract: 32n7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24017806
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24021505
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Ungureanu Camil
Abstract: Heyd 2005: 163-165
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10746-013-9267-z
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24021626
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Holzman Lois
Abstract: Racine and Müller
2008
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10746-013-9293-x
Journal Title: Ethnography
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24046637
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Souza lara
Abstract: This article inquires as to the meaning of nervoso (nerves) among poor, working-class women from Salvador, Brazil. Our aim is to understand nerves as an experience that emerges from the background of a life trajectory and that, in many significant ways, disrupts the taken-for-granted character of that trajectory. From a phenomenological-hermeneutical tradition, we explore the links between experience, embodiment and temporality and then discuss the relevance of this approach for the understanding of women′s nervoso. In order to do so we present the life histories of three middle-aged women who have been afflicted with nerves. The accounts describe significant ways in which culturally inherited possibilities – grounded in a lived context of class and gender – are recovered and come to pre-figure a certain future. As we argue throughout the article, it is only when we situate the experience of nervoso within the temporal frame of life that we can truly understand it – that is, grasp it as part of a movement that involves both recovery and creation of meaning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24047842
Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Bell Allan
Abstract: This article questions the aptness of 'discourse analysis' as a label for our field, and prefers the less reductionist concept of 'Discourse Interpretation'. It does this through drawing on ideas from the field of philosophical hermeneutics – the theory and practice of interpreting texts. It operationalizes and adapts the construct of the Interpretive Arc from the philosophy of Paul Ricoeur in order to address issues that are central to discourse work, including that of how we warrant the validity of our textual interpretations. The Interpretive Arc consists of six interlinked phases, which the article presents and exemplifies through discussion of a single text – the story of Babel. Phase I of the arc defines readers as being in a state of Estrangement before the text because of the distancing created by its written or technological form. Phase 2 is that of Pre-view, the state of opinion or knowledge that readers bring to a text. At phase 3, a first reading forms readers' Proto-understanding, their initial 'guess' at what the text means. Then processes of Analysis (phase 4) test and evidence the validity of alternative readings, limiting the interpretations which can plausibly be taken from a text. Three byways of interpretive analysis are challenged and discarded: the dominance of author intention, structuralist analysis and limitless polysemy. Analysis then leads into 5, the phase of informed Understanding of the matter or injunction of the text, of what is disclosed or unfolded before the text. The Interpretive Arc is completed in phase 6, Ownership. Here, through processes of critique of their own and the text's ideologies and of fresh listening, readers are led to a new self formed by the matter of the text. There is a dialectic amongst Analysis, Understanding and Ownership, with each informing and modifying the other. The approach emphasizes interpretation as the heart of discourse work. The 3000-year-old narrative of Babel is a subject as well as an object here. It contributes to the matter of the article and its interpretation is interwoven with the theoretical substance. The story is shown to be an integrated narrative abounding in sophisticated linguistic techniques which show a delight in language. The traditional Christian and Western interpretation of Babel – as an affront to God which results in the curse of multilingualism – is challenged. A re-constructed interpretation informed by intertextual evidence reads the fault of Babel to be the people's refusal to spread through the earth. Babel can be interpreted as a manifesto against the monolingual and monocultural impetus of empires ancient and contemporary. The multilingual outcome is a positive affirmation of sociocultural and linguistic diversity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049945
Journal Title: Discourse Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24049943
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Scott-Baumann Alison
Abstract: Ricoeur placed a great deal of importance upon text and the interpretation of text. Bell accepts this by virtue of his extended analysis of the story of Babel, and I hope to offer ways of extending and developing Bell's arguments to incorporate the ethical demands that Ricoeur placed upon text, upon our interpretation of text and upon action as a form of readable text. This will not include a commentary on discourse analysis, which I am not qualified to give. Ricoeur differed from the structuralist tradition in that he saw the relationship between language and life as taking a dialectical form: debate that presumes the possibility of altering one's position by grappling with different views, and often taking inspiration from Hegelian dialectics, with their contrasting polarized views and the eventual attempt at affirmative common ground. The term λογοσ (logos) was first used in a philosophical way by Heraclitus to give us the principle of order and knowledge, and yet for Heraclitus the world was dominated by conflict and change. Ricoeur studied this tension within logos between order and disorder, partly by his writing about language and his work on signs and symbols, partly through metaphor and narrative and also through his insights on translation. For him, all these are facets of the need for both Explaining and Understanding as forms of interpretation of language, ethics and action. Ricoeur's work on logos provides us with an approach that asks whether ethics controls language or vice versa or both and how this fits in with structuralism and later movements. For Ricoeur, signs (words, texts) are not the centres of our perceptual experience. At the heart of our perception are our motivations and our actions, for which we must take responsibility in a sort of provisional affirmation that we will keep trying. In so doing we must doubt (be suspicious of) our own motives just as much as those of others, and see action as a form of readable text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24049950
Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24053272
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'eveil de la Chine [The awakening of China], Editions de I'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24053278
Journal Title: China Perspectives
Publisher: cefc French Centre for Research on Contemporary China
Issue: i24054563
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MORIER-GENOUD DAMIEN
Abstract: Robert Eskildsen, "Of Civilization and Savages: The Mimetic Imperialism of Japan's
1874 Expedition to Taiwan," American Historical Review, 107.2, April 2002, pp. 388-
418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24054621
Journal Title: Perspectives Chinoises
Publisher: Centre d'Etudes Francais sur la Chine contemporaine
Issue: i24071587
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): GARAPON ANTOINE
Abstract: Chen Yan, L'Éveil de la Chine, La Tour d'Aiguës, Éditions de l'Aube, 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24071720
Journal Title: Perspectives Chinoises
Publisher: Centre d'Etudes Francais sur la Chine contemporaine
Issue: i24072078
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MORIER-GENOUD DAMIEN
Abstract: Robert Eskildsen, « Of Civilization and Savages : The Mimetic Imperialism of
Japan's 1874 Expedition to Taiwan », American Historical Review, vol. 107, n° 2, avril
2002, p. 388-418.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24072124
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24136797
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Janssen Philip Jost
Abstract: . Sowiport is based on 18 databases, including Socio-
logical Abstracts and Worldwide Political Science Abstracts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24139028
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24145431
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Gerber Doris
Abstract: Currently, epistemological debates on the formation of concepts in the field of history are close to nonexistent. For that reason alone, this book written by philosopher of history Doris Gerber - with which she earned her habilitation degree at the University of Tübingen - is a welcome addition to the literature in the field. In this work, Gerber addresses the metaphysical question of what "history" really is. In this study, she considers approaches typically adopted within the field of history, and questions whether the intention to act is essential in writing history, or whether it is even required in the first place. The findings of the four reviewers that follow are diverse in their opinion of this provocative study.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24145795
Journal Title: Democratic Culture / תרבות דמוקרטית
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן, הפקולטה למשפטים
Issue: i24146606
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Ginsberg Yona
Abstract: Through ethnographies in Immanuel and interviews with its residents, this article examines the unique influences of the environment on social relationships and actions taken by individuals and groups. The findings of the ethnographies illustrate the dramatic heterogeneity of the population in Immanuel (made up of ultra-Orthodox Ashkenazim and Mizrahim, newly religious Mizrahim, a group of newly religious ex-convicts, and a group of "drifters"), and show the blatant disregard of the members of the various groups for each other. They also reveal the large number of deserted apartments and buildings in the town. The findings from the interviews present explicit definitions of Immanuel as "a different place." They report the dialectics between the general "invisibility" of Immanuel in the media as compared to its visibility when critical incidents occur (such as terrorist attacks, the Immanuel controversy, and reports of sexual harassment). They also stress the yearning of the interviewees to leave Immanuel, and the paradoxicality of the environment (manifested by the simultaneity of cultural prejudices and protest). With this background in mind, we suggest using the heterotopian concept of Michel Foucault for the complex comprehension of the Immanuel environment. The discussion indicates the "otherness" of Immanuel (heterotopia), and the relationships between social control, heterogeneity, and social protest.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24148015
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24159065
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Kern Walter
Abstract: ]. B. Metz: Concilium I (1965) 484—492.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24159901
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: herder
Issue: i24163982
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Tschuggnall Peter
Abstract: Bachtin (s. Anm. 3) 124.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24166821
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164415
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Guggenberger Wilhelm
Abstract: J. Niewiadomski, Menschenrechte: ein gordischer Knoten der heutigen Gnaden-
theologie. In: ThPQ 145 (1997) 269-280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168120
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: VERLAG HERDER
Issue: i24164439
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Tschuggnall Peter
Abstract: Ausgabe H. Rochol (Meiner Verlag, Hamburg): Philosophische Bissen (1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24168217
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: herder
Issue: i24160379
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Rosenberger Michael
Abstract: H. J. Pottmeyer, Zeichen und Kriterien der Glaubwürdigkeit des Christentums, in: HFTh
4, 373—413; hier: 400f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24169211
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: herder
Issue: i24160375
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Eckholt Margit
Abstract: /. Duque, Narrati-
ve Theologie. Chancen und Grenzen - Im Anschluß an E. Jüngel, P. Ricœur und G. La-
font, in: ThPh 72 (1997) 31-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24169692
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160523
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hoffmann Veronika
Abstract: Gabel,
Inspiration und Wahrheit, 131.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24170846
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160644
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Quisinsky Michael
Abstract: »Höhepunkt und Quel-
le« (ebd.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24170920
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für katholische Theologie
Publisher: Echter Verlag GmbH
Issue: i24160671
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Bründl Jürgen
Abstract: Fuchs, Jesus, 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24171368
Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24183660
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Avi Sagie (Shweitzer)
Abstract: The purpose of this article is to examine the development of the notion of "The Other" and to trace the implications of its effect on the dialoguic Philosophy. In "I and Thou" this category was not developed, at best it was suggested only vaguely, for in this text Buber does not carry out any ontological explication of this category. But such an explication was necessary and was later formulated gradualy by Buber. The clearer the ontological explication, the sharper the category of "the Other" is delineated. It is this category which establishes the I-Thou relationship. This development is expressed in Buber's writings with great tension, and we analyze it in detail, for the category of "the Other" and the central position which it occupies undermine the significance of the I-Thou relationship as it is presented in the book "I and Thou". Together with an acceptance of the primacy of "the Other" in this relationship, we must also assert the primacy of the "I" as the subject of reflective action, of the recognition of the other in his otherness. In this situation it is not the relationship which comes first but the detachment and the aloneness which exist between the I and Thou. We now have to rewise the notion of the dialogue from that purety of an event without content to that of an action of mutual assertion between I and the Other, where each one asserts the other in his otherness, where at the same time each is conscious of being asserted by the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24184936
Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24185941
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Shechterman Deborah
Abstract: Original Sin is considered to be a uniquely Christian doctrine. Nevertheless, an analysis of apparently forgotten Jewish treatises — most of which are to be found only in manuscript form — reveals that an extraordinary philosophical theory of Original Sin is present in late medieval Jewish thought. It implies, therefore, a new dimension in characterising this doctrine and has implications for the understanding of the process of inter-communicating of Jewish and Christian thought. This study focuses on fundamental Jewish passages, beginning with Apocalyptic literature and ending with medieval philosophical texts. Yet, the examination of those Hebrew texts is carried out in the light of the writing of Christian scholars. This means that the attempt to clarify this Jewish doctrine is made, from a methodological viewpoint, both by looking at the development of this doctrine trough the history of the Jewish thought, and by a close examination of the parallel general sources. It is only then that one can see that rudiments of the Christian doctrine of Original Sin were inserted into the Aristotelian theory of Nature, and combined with elements from Maimonides' Biblical-allegoric exegesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24186900
Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah / דעת: כתב-עת לפילוסופיה יהודית וקבלה
Publisher: אוניברסיטת בר-אילן
Issue: i24193434
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Meir Ephraim
Abstract: The article deals with the problem of revelation in Levinas' writings. The first part of the article analizes Levinas' ideas on the Same and the Other, more particularly the topics of the face and of discourse, as these come to the fore in the first section of Totality and Infinity. Investigating the non-totalising relationship between the Same and the Other presents us with the suitable framework for understanding the relation between the finite and the Infinite. Leaving out any ontotheological speech, Levinas shows how Metaphysics is enacted in the ethical relation. The second part cootinues with a description of Levinas' position on revelation in the Jewish tradition. The active Interpretation of Biblical texts "beyond the verse" represents an opportunity of hearing the divine word today and to enter into a more primordial Order than the Order of the Same. In the course of the article, we point to affinities and striking similarities between E. Levinas' and F. Rosenzweig's view on revelation. We also demonstrate how Levinas Orients his Jewish writings to his philosophy of the Other and vice versa. In writing on revelation, Levinas' main concern seems to be the description of the possibility of a fracture in the immanent order of totality and in the self-sufficiency of reason which is its correlative. This fraction is produced by the command "thou shalt not kill", calling the Same to open itself to the Other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24195890
Journal Title: Jahrbuch für Liturgik und Hymnologie
Publisher: Internationalen Arbeitsgemeinschaft für Hymnologie / International Fellowship for Research in Hymnology / Cercle International d'Etudes Hymnologiques
Issue: i24200577
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Rickli-Koser Linda
Abstract: Ebd.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24207749
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Politik
Publisher: NOMOS Verlagsgesellschaft mbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24227920
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Rinderle Peter
Abstract: Begriff des »Private Citizen« von Bruce Ackerman in: We the People, Vol. 1
Foundations (Cambridge, Mass. 1993, S. 232 ff.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24228116
Journal Title: Cambridge Journal of Economics
Publisher: OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
Issue: i24232498
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Frobert Ludovic
Abstract: Stiglitz, 2003, p. 77
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24232518
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i24243336
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Ziethen Antje
Abstract: Beck 12
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24245214
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i24243336
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Licops Dominique
Abstract: Licops, Origi/nation" 84-85
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24245216
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i24243336
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Tchumkam Hervé
Abstract: Sprouse 80
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24245221
Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MUSICOLOGÍA
Issue: i24243488
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): CALVO-SOTELO Javier CAMPOS
Abstract: TITON, Jeff Todd. «Music and Sustainability:
An Ecological Viewpoint». The World of Music, 51, 1 (2009), pp. 119-137
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24246266
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249044
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Zékian Stéphane
Abstract: Sur ce point précis, l'enjeu de cet ouvrage
croise celui que soulève Krzysztof Pomian dans
Des saintes reliques à Vart moderne, Paris, Gal-
limard, 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249069
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249293
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Hénaff Marcel
Abstract: C. Lévi-Strauss, la Pensée sauvage, op. cit., p. 255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249309
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249293
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Voir P. Ricœur, Temps et récit, 3 t., Paris, Le Seuil, 1983-1985.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249311
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249297
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Dewitte Jacques
Abstract: Wladimir Weidlé, Gestalt und Sprache des Kunstwerks, Mittenwald, Mäander Verlag,
1981, p. 48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249341
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249817
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: J.-M. Ferry, les Grammaires de l'intelligence, op. cit., p. 143-146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249824
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249817
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: Voir notamment l'ouvrage de Bernard Perret, De la société comme monde commun, Paris,
Desclée de Brouwer, 2003, pour qui le souci de l'institution d'un monde commun est lié à la
créativité humaine plus qu'à un processus d'objectivation. Il s'appuie explicitement (bien que
Merleau-Ponty ne soit pas directement évoqué) sur le point de vue de la phénoménologie et sur
les outils qu'elle nous fournit pour penser la perpétuation du monde commun comme culture
vivante, ensemble de valeurs partagées dans la durée autant que dans l'espace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249825
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249860
Date: 11 1, 2004
Author(s): Schattner Marius
Abstract: Y. Leibowitz, Peuple, terre, État..., op. cit., p. 110-111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24249866
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24250408
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24250445
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24250408
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Crépon Marc
Abstract: J. Patoékà, « Réflexion sur l'Europe », art. cité, p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24250446
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249237
Date: 12 1, 1950
Author(s): RICŒUR PAUL
Abstract: L'Homme et l'Univers (compte rendu) mai 1949, pp. 74^-7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24250872
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24248789
Date: 12 1, 1948
Author(s): RICŒUR PAUL
Abstract: Rapporté au Congré Esprit de 1948, avec les « Tâches actuelles d'une
pensée d'inspiration personnaliste • d'E. Mounier, paru dans notre n° 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24250927
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24251297
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Marrou Henri-Irénée
Abstract: Voir « Tristesse de l'historien », art. cité, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24251368
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24251892
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Marrou Henri-Irénée
Abstract: Voir « Tristesse de l'historien », art. cité, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24252084
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24249985
Date: 1 1, 1952
Author(s): Auzias Jean-Marie
Abstract: Goetz à Hilda : « Je te dis que Dieu est mort. Nous n'avons plus de témoin... Comme
tu es vraie depuis qu'il n'est plus » (p. 271).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24252750
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24252256
Date: 11 1, 1957
Author(s): LAPIERRE JEAN WILLIAM
Abstract: Charles Le Cœur, Le rite et l'outil, Puf, 1939, p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24254583
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24252478
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): DOMENACH JEAN-MARIE
Abstract: Idem.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24255294
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24255017
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Monod Jean-Claude
Abstract: Wittgenstein, Philosophische Bemerkungen, V, § 49, cité par H. Blumenberg, Ästhe-
tische..., op. cit., p. 213.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24255440
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24255017
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): de Rochegonde Thierry
Abstract: Voir T. de Rochegonde, « Les yeux grands ouverts. Plaidoyer pour que les psychana-
lystes s'intéressent aux questions nées de la crise de l'éthique médicale », revue de psychana-
lyse Che Vuoi?, n° 17, juin 2002, Paris, L'Harmattan, p. 89-104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24255449
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24252251
Date: 8 1, 1957
Author(s): FEJTÖ FRANÇOIS
Abstract: du
13 juin 1957.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24256573
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24256635
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Court Raymond
Abstract: Kant, Projet de paix perpétuelle. Œuvres complètes, III, op. cit., p. 376.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24256765
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24256635
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Helcinel Gaston
Abstract: La Bruyère, les Caractères, chap. 2 : « Du mérite personnel », pensée 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24256769
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257105
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: 0. Gross, "Chaos and Rules: Should Responses to Violent Crises Always Be Constitutio-
nal?", art. cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257120
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257105
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: 76k/., p. 141.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257122
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Vigne Éric
Abstract: P. Ricœur, la Mémoire, l'Histoire, l'Oubli, op. cit., p. 650. On rappelera, sur un autre
registre, les analyses de Marcel Détienne, Comment être autochtone : du pur Athénien au Fran-
çais racisé, Paris, Le Seuil, 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257150
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: P. Ricœur, la Métaphore vive, Paris, Le Seuil, coll. « Points Essais », n° 347, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257151
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Éric Weil, Philosophie politique, Paris, Vrin, 1956, p. 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257154
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Simon Anne
Abstract: L'action, prisée à juste titre par Ricœur, peut précisément prendre la forme d'une œuvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257156
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Voir « La liberté selon l'espérance », dans le Conflit des interprétations, op. cit., p. 393-
415.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257157
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Schlegel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Un autre exemple de trivialité : au début de son texte, Badiou évoque un conflit, une
« guerre abstraite » actuellement en cours entre vision juive et vision chrétienne de l'histoire;
et donc, selon lui, la Mémoire... s'inscrit dans cette rivalité pour conquérir la « direction spiri-
tuelle du camp "démocratique" ». Et attention, Ricœur vise à « rien moins qu'une victoire »!
Le déclin de l'influence chrétienne et le brio de la pensée juive au sens large (sans garantie de
durée!) dans la culture française et européenne sont patents, mais ce constat accrédite-t-il une
vision paranoïaque de la vie intellectuelle? D'autres exemples dans le Siècle, op. cit., par
exemple une parole d'un poème de Celan inspiré de la mémoire d'Auschwitz, rapportée par
Badiou aux slogans des manifestants de décembre 1995 pour leur retraite, à Roanne-Trifouillis-
les-Oies : « Tous ensemble, tous ensemble, ouais! » (p. 139).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257158
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Bégout Bruce
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Du texte à Vaction, op. cit., p. 36.38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257161
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Ibid., p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257163
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: Dans les sociétés politiques, affirme Marcel Hénaff, « la reconnaissance publique de cha-
cun est assurée par la loi; devant elle, tous les membres de la communauté citoyenne sont
égaux. [...] Pourtant, il est quelque chose que ce dispositif ne produit ni n'assure ou protège,
c'est le lien d'attachement de chacun à chacun ou même de chacun à tous. Ni l'appartenance
civique, ni l'interdépendance économique ne me sollicitent à reconnaître autrui personnelle-
ment. Cette limite est constitutive des sociétés politiques et du système du marché; c'est à ce
manque que peut répondre une offre d'amour collective d'un dieu qui enveloppe un peuple ou
une communauté dans sa faveur exclusive; ou d'un chef charismatique qui suscite l'oblation de
soi dans le rapport fusionnel aux autres fervents de sa cause », dans M. Hénaff, le Prix de la
vérité..., op. cit., p. 514.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257164
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): le Blanc Guillaume
Abstract: P. Ricœur, le Juste 2, op. cit., p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257165
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: F. Crépeau, Droit d'asile..., op. cit., p. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257166
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Id., « Autonomie et vulnérabilité », op. cit., p. 88.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257168
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257107
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Worms Frédéric
Abstract: J. Derrida, Apprendre à vivre enfin, op. cit., p. 26, souligné dans le texte.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257169
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257176
Date: 2 1, 2006
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: P. Nora, Lieux de mémoire, op. cit., Ill, p. 1009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257240
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257176
Date: 2 1, 2006
Author(s): Perron Daniel
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, « Les trois niveaux du juge-
ment médical », Esprit, décembre 19%.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257252
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24256999
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Aboudrar Bruno-Nassim
Abstract: D. Arasse, On n'y voit rien. Descriptions, op. cit., p. 189.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24257725
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259161
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Youf Dominique
Abstract: Les établissements pénitentiaires pour mineurs (Epm) sont prévus par la loi du 9 sep-
tembre 2002. Le premier établissement doit accueillir ses premiers condamnés à Quivrechain
(Nord) au printemps 2007. Il n'y aura pas de mirador, pas de chemin de ronde, mais un mur
d'enceinte de 6 mètres de haut. Le temps d'encellulement ne pourra excéder 10 heures par jour,
le reste du temps étant constitué d'activités scolaires, sportives, de formation technique et de
loisirs. L'encadrement sera mixte : surveillants de l'Administration pénitentiaire et éducateurs
de la Protection judiciaire de la jeunesse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259208
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259930
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Giraud Michel
Abstract: Par exemple, le collectif des Antillais, Guyanais, Réunionnais ne manque pas une occa-
sion de rappeler qu'il mobilise plus de 40000 personnes (soit au moins 7 % environ de la popu-
lation totale des Domiens dans l'Hexagone!) mais, pour réaliser un tel exploit, il est obligé
d'amalgamer adhérents et sympathisants dans ce chiffre, sans faire aucune distinction entre
ceux-ci. Trop fort!
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259951
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24259930
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Weil Patrick
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, les Abus de la mémoire, Paris, Arléa, 1995, cité par Paul Ricœur, la
Mémoire, l'Histoire, l'Oubli, Paris, Le Seuil, 2000, p. 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24259968
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257554
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Dumas André
Abstract: Dans Le Monde, 11-12 juin 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24260531
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24255127
Date: 11 1, 1960
Abstract: E. Rideau, « Christianisme et libération de l'homme dans Revue de l'Action Populaire,
(mars i960 : I/hi3toire de l'homme chrétien).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24260685
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24257940
Date: 3 1, 1970
Author(s): BARTOLI HENRI
Abstract: « Un « fantastique » de bibliothèque », Cahiers Renaud-
Barrault, mars 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24260832
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24262705
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Abdelmadjid Salim
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24262792
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24262705
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Ning Zhang
Abstract: Voir par exemple Zhang Ning, VAppropriation par la Chine du théâtre occidental. Un
autre sens de l'Occident, Paris, L'Harmattan, 1998, p. 151-164, sur la question de la dramatisa-
tion et de la psychologisation dans le travail entrepris en Chine, dans les années 1980, de trans-
position de Shakespeare dans l'opéra chinois de style kunqu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24262794
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Cadolle Sylvie
Abstract: Cette réflexion sur l'homoparentalité comme révélateur des changements de la parenté en
général, et ouvrant vers la question de la pluriparentalité dans le droit contemporain de la
famille, est entamée depuis de longues années. On peut se reporter en particulier à la conclu-
sion de mon article « Pacs, sexualité et différence des sexes », Esprit, octobre 1999, qui mettait
en cause la logique « identitariste » (opposant deux grandes classes substantielles d'individus,
les homosexuels versus les hétérosexuels) au profit d'une approche « relationnelle » de l'égalité
(impliquant de transformer le droit commun de la famille dans un sens pluraliste en instituant
le couple de même sexe et non pas seulement le couple de sexe opposé).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265393
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Lindenberg Daniel
Abstract: Voir François Dosse, Gilles Deleuze et Félix Guattari. Biographie croisée, Paris, La Décou-
verte, 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265408
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Worms Frédéric
Abstract: C'est ce que nous nous proposons notamment de faire à travers la chronique intitulée « À
quoi tenons-nous » qui paraît dans Esprit depuis novembre 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265411
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24265362
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: P. Grémion, Modernisation et progressisme, op. cit., p. 130-131.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24265413
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266858
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Zawadzki Paul
Abstract: P. Zawadzki, « Scientisme et dévoiements de la pensée critique », dans Eugène Enriquez,
Claudine Haroche, Jan Spurk (sous la dir. de), Désir de penser; peur de penser, Lyon, Parangon,
2006, p. 84-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266868
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Id., «Justice sociale, redistribution, reconnaissance», art. cité, p. 157.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266909
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266899
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lamouche Fabien
Abstract: Ibid., p. 380-381.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24266910
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24266747
Date: 5 1, 1977
Author(s): Pucheu René
Abstract: Y. Transvouez, « La fondation et
les débuts de la Vie intellectuelle », Annales des Sciences sociales des religions, juillet-
décembre 1972.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267129
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267380
Date: 11 1, 2008
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: On peut notamment s'interroger sur la réalité du contrôle que procurent les indicateurs;
voir à ce sujet: «Des indicateurs pour les ministres au risque de l'illusion du contrôle», par
Anne Pezet et Samuel Sponem recensé par Maya Beauvallet (www.laviedesidees.fr).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267392
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267532
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Boblet Marie-Hélène
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Temps et récit, III, Paris, Le Seuil, p. 235.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267612
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24267532
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Maréchal Jean-Paul
Abstract: De « gattopardo » qui signifie guépard en italien et qui, dans le roman éponyme de Giu-
seppe Tomasi di Lampedusa, est la métaphore du prince Salina.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24267616
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Voir les nombreuses publications liées aux activités de l'Association des parents et
futurs parents gays et lesbiens (Apgl), en particulier: E. Dubreuil, Des parents de même sexe,
Paris, Odile Jacob, 1998; M. Gross (sous la dir. de), Homoparentalités, état des lieux, Toulouse,
Érès, 2005; M. Gross et M. Peyceré, Fonder une famille homoparentale, Paris, Ramsay, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268098
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268086
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): de Parseval Geneviève Delaisi
Abstract: J'ai remarqué que, dans les congrès, qu'ils soient médicaux, juridiques ou «psy », il est
fréquent d'entendre l'orateur parler du «père biologique», voire de vrai père pour désigner le
donneur de sperme... puis, se rendant compte de son lapsus au vu de quelques sourires dans la
salle, tâche de se rattraper - mal, comme dans toutes les gaffes - parlant alors de « père social »
pour désigner le vrai père, ce qui constitue tout autant un lapsus que le premier...
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268099
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268016
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Pour bénéficier du label « intérêt général » (et donc des aides subséquentes), une publica-
tion doit avoir un rythme quotidien ou hebdomadaire et ne pas s'adresser à un lectorat spécia-
lisé. À regarder la liste des hebdos et celle des mensuels, on s'interrogera sur cette discrimina-
tion « périodique »!
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268247
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24268016
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: J. Patocka, Essais hérétiques..., op. cit., p. 144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24268261
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269130
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: Ibid., p. 568.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269150
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269179
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: « L'impouvoir », entretien avec H. Choplin, dans «Au-delà du pouvoir. À partir de la phi-
losophie française contemporaine », Revue de métaphysique et de morale, 2008/4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269189
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269179
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: On pourrait dire que la logique de Vagapè a plus à voir avec cela qu'avec la logique du
don, et qu'elle résiste au don quand celui-ci, comme dans les réseaux mafieux, oblige au contre-
don.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269191
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269178
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Masson Nicolas
Abstract: Taswir musalsal abû tabar ba'd ramdân (« Tournage de la série Abou Tabar après Rama-
dan »), Al-ma'had al-arabî, 20 septembre 2008, disponible en arabe à l'adresse http://www.ma3
hd.net/vb/ma3hd3/arab37494/ consultée pour la dernière fois en octobre 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269229
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269178
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: Id., le Récit, la lettre et le corps, op. cit., p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269231
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269493
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Simon-Nahum Perrine
Abstract: A. Badiou, Deleuze. La clameur de l'Être, op. cit., p. 15.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269500
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269493
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Rajotte Pierre
Abstract: J.-M. Labrèche, les Pas... sages d'un pèlerin..., op. cit., p. 83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269507
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269705
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Chrétien Jean-Pierre
Abstract: G. Duby, les Trois ordres ou l'imaginaire du féodalisme, Paris, Gallimard, 1978; C. Casto-
riadis, l'Institution imaginaire de la société, Paris, Le Seuil, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269716
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24269757
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Curieusement, H. Rosa ne dit rien des diverses formes d'effervescences religieuses qui
manifestent un désir de re-ritualisation temporelle des existences. Il est vrai que toutes ne sont
pas compatibles avec le projet de la modernité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24269762
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270971
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Monod Jean-Claude
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « L'écriture de l'histoire et la représentation du passé », art. cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24270984
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270825
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Ferry Jean-Marc
Abstract: avril-mai 1986 (NDLR).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271258
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270884
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Abrams Erika
Abstract: Le θαύμα άρχή τΐ|ς σοφίϊς (Thèétète, 115 d), EH, p. 53 et ΡΕ, p. 69.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271367
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271363
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Voir Roberto Esposito, Communauté, immunité, biopolitique, Paris, Les Prairies ordi-
naires, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271397
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271363
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Padis Marc-Olivier
Abstract: Le rapport de l'Inspection générale des Affaires sociales, remis au ministre de la Santé le 15 janvier dernier, démonte les mécanismes de l'affaire du Mediator, notamment les défaillances du contrôle public. Or, le système actuel, appuyé sur des agences et un large recours aux experts, avait été créé, après le scandale du sang contaminé, pour reconstruire un vrai système de santé publique. Tout est-il, une nouvelle fois, à reprendre ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271398
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270523
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Caroux Jacques
Abstract: Id., p. 686.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271440
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271669
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): Bessone Magali
Abstract: Voir, pour une présentation de la démocratie délibérative, Charles Girard et Alice Le Goff,
la Démocratie délibérative, une anthologie, Paris, Hermann, 2010 : la délibération repose sur une
éthique normative particulièrement exigeante et les critères d'une parole juste, impartiale, libre,
égale, rationnelle, argumentée, sont rarement rencontrés sur les forums de discussion, même en
l'absence de tout troll.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24271686
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270751
Date: 11 1, 1987
Author(s): Pontalis J.B.
Abstract: K. Papaioannou, La consécration de l'histoire, Champ libre, 1983, p. 168-169.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272039
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272182
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Pajon Alexandre
Abstract: François Furet, «Les intellectuels français et le structuralisme», Preuves, février 1967,
n° 92, repris dans l'Atelier de l'histoire, Paris, Flammarion, 1982, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272194
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272182
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Fœssel Michaël
Abstract: Descartes, Discours de la méthode, Première partie.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272197
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272231
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Voir, par exemple, Stephen Benedict, « Tunisie, le mirage de l'État fort », Esprit, mars-avril
1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272292
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272547
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Lalaut Clémence
Abstract: Le chartalisme est un courant analytique initié par Georg-Friedrich Knapp au début du
XXe siècle, réactivé depuis quelques années sous l'impulsion de travaux qui s'attachent à souli-
gner les liens établis entre État et monnaie.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272585
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272759
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: Voir P. Ricœur, Temps et récit, III, op. cit., p. 308.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24272774
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272892
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Roman Joël
Abstract: Préfaces, n°l,
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24273307
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271058
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Eslin Jean-Claude
Abstract: The Origins of
Totalitarianism, New York, Harcourt Brace & Co, lere édition, 1951, p. 439.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24273346
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24270051
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Thibaud Paul
Abstract: Richard Kuisel, Le capitalisme et l'Etat en France,
Gallimard, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24273735
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272843
Date: 5 1, 1990
Author(s): Thibaud Paul
Abstract: d'Esprit de décembre 1989, le coup de sonde de Daniel
Lindenberg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24274204
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272634
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Essais hérétiques sur la philosophie de l'histoire, trad. Erika Abrams, préface de Paul
Ricceur, postface de Roman Jakobson, Prague, éd. Petlice, 1975, Lagrasse, éd. Verdier, 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24274381
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274426
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Pierre Michon, Le roi vient quand il veut, Paris, Albin Michel, 2007, p. 315.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24274467
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272636
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: Pierre Bouretz (éd.), ta Force du droit, Éditions Esprit, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24274611
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272638
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Tassin Étienne
Abstract: B. Voyenne, Histoire de l'idée européenne, Paris, Payot, 1964, p. 192 et passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24274844
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273233
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lindenberg Daniel
Abstract: Alban Vistel, « Fondements spirituels de la Résistance », Esprit, octobre 1952.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275304
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272900
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): de Lara Philippe
Abstract: « Le juste et le bien », Revue de métaphysique et de morale, n° 1, 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275347
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272901
Date: 2 1, 1994
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Mario Bettati discute quelques ob-
jections faites à l'expression et à la notion
de « droit d'ingérence humanitaire » dans
« Droit d'ingérence ou droit d'assis-
tance? », le Trimestre du monde, 2e tri-
mestre 1993. J'exprime ma dette à l'égard
de l'important article de Mario Bettati :
"The Right of Humanitarian Intervention
or the Right of Pree Access to Victims?»,
The Review, Oa 43/131, 8 décembre 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275518
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273552
Date: 6 1, 1992
Author(s): Eslin Jean-Claude
Abstract: Seuil, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275556
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272637
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, « Qu'est-ce que l'acte de juger? », rencontre avec Paul Ricœur organisée
par l'Institut des hautes études sur la justice à la Cour de cassation, le 12 décembre 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275567
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272637
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Lectures I. Aulour du politique, Seuil, 1991, p. 176-195.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275568
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272713
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Bédarida François
Abstract: Rabi, « Péguy reconnu », Esprit, août-septembre 1964, p. 336.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275693
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272713
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: « Si le monde est la totalité de ce qui est le cas, le faire ne se laisse pas inclure dans
cette totalité. En d'autres termes encore, le faire fait que la réalité ne soit pas totalisable »,
P. Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Seuil, 1986, p. 270.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275698
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273554
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Salas Denis
Abstract: Isabelle Passet, « L'alternative à l'incarcération du toxicomane », Rev. sc. crim. octobre-
décembre 1992, Dalloz, p. 790.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24275929
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272706
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Chambat Pierre
Abstract: « Les équivoques de la dépolitisation », Arguments, n° 27-28, 3e et 4e trimestres 1962,
p. 35.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276027
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24273483
Date: 11 1, 1994
Author(s): Schulte Christoph
Abstract: Le Principe responsabilité, trad, de l'allemand par J. Greisch, Le Cerf, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276313
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272896
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Roustang Guy
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « Travail et parole », Esprit, janvier 1953.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276373
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272890
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Bruckner Pascal
Abstract: L'opposant serbe Vuk Draskovic a très bien rendu compte de cette perte morale de son
peuple : « C'est ainsi que dans cette guerre atroce - qui dure encore et dont la fin est difficile
à entrevoir - la grande, la divine frontière qui nous séparait de nos bourreaux, qui faisait la
différence entre le livre de la honte et le livre de l'agneau a été à tous points de vue effacée.
Il s'agit là de la plus grande défaite serbe, la seule véritable chute de notre peuple depuis qu'il
existe », discours préparé pour le deuxième congrès des intellectuels serbes, 23-24 avril 1994,
reproduit par Libération, 25 mai 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276452
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275616
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): Herzog Philippe
Abstract: Philippe Herzog, Reconstruire un pouvoir politique, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276587
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275615
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Maréchal Jean-Paul
Abstract: « Emprise
de la finance », in Manière de ooir (Le Monde
Diplomatique), n° 28, p. 26-28.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276675
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275622
Date: 5 1, 1998
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: P. Beauchamp, op. cit., p. 180.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276767
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24272895
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Antoine Agnès
Abstract: Puissances et latences..., op. cit., p. 16.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24276983
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Poursuivant sa réflexion sur « l'acte de juger », qui a d'abord porté sur l'institution judiciaire, Paul Ricœur s'intéresse ici au domaine médical. Son analyse porte sur les niveaux de jugement qui entrent en jeu dans le face à face médical du médecin et du patient.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277262
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Hegel, Textes pédagogiques, Vrin, 1978, p. 84-85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277266
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24274280
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Monod Jean-Claude
Abstract: Le Moïse de Freud, op. cit., p. 188.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277280
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277336
Date: 11 1, 2013
Author(s): Hénaff Marcel
Abstract: Jocelyn Holland, German Romanticism and Science: Procreative Poetics in Goethe,
Novalis and Ritter, New York, Routledge, 2009. En ce qui concerne Goethe, il faudrait recons-
tituer tout l'héritage des théories de la morphogénèse qui va de D'Arcy W. Thompson - On
Growth and Form, 1917 - à Lévi-Strauss - et sa théorie des transformations des groupes de
mythes - et finalement à la mathématique des fractals de Mandelbrot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277346
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277336
Date: 11 1, 2013
Author(s): d'Allonnes Myriam Revault
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « Postface au Temps de la responsabilité », Lectures 1, Paris, Le Seuil, 1991,
p. 277.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277348
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277458
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Il faut prendre acte avec tristesse de cette situation invraisemblable : la Chine, la Russie,
l'Arabie Saoudite et Cuba (quatre pays hautement démocratiques!) ont été élus au Conseil des
droits de l'homme des Nations unies basé à Genève (la Russie et la Chine ont chacune recueilli
176 suffrages émanant des 193 pays membres de l'Assemblée générale des Nations unies!).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277463
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276469
Date: 11 1, 1998
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: (Jacques Birouste, Smain Laacher, Jean-Michel Servet et Bruno
Théret) publié dans Alternatives économiques, n° 162, septembre 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277551
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275606
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: A. Garapon, le Gardien..., op. cit.,
p. 241.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277610
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277618
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): Garapon Antoine
Abstract: Jean-Jacques Rousseau, le Contrat social. Livre IV, 8, « De la religion civile ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277625
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277618
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): Fischer Francisco Díez
Abstract: Voir P. Ricœur, « Étranger soi-même », Les Réseaux des parvis, 1999, n° 46, point 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277631
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275643
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): Toscano Roberto
Abstract: Pierre Hassner également (op. cit., p. 362)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24277764
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276662
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Stiker Henri-Jacques
Abstract: H. Arendt voir la préface de Paul Ricœur à la
Condition de l'homme moderne, Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1961 et 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278083
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275625
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: G. Steiner, Après Babel, Paris, Albin Michel, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278122
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275624
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: David Garland, « Les contradictions de la société punitive : le cas britannique », Actes
de la recherche en sciences sociales, Paris, Le Seuil, septembre 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278184
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276712
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Rouyer Muriel
Abstract: C. Schmitt, la Notion de politique, op. cit., p. 117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278265
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276187
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): de Maillard Jean
Abstract: J. de Maillard, l'Avenir du crime, Paris,
Flammarion, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278321
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24277179
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Simon Alfred
Abstract: In Regarder la France, Paris, Perrin, 1997, p. 22.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278350
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24276800
Date: 2 1, 2000
Author(s): Worms Frédéric
Abstract: Selon l'expression de Rawls dans le Libéralisme politique, 1993, trad. fr. PUF, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278477
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24278642
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Ferrier Michaël
Abstract: Sur ce point, voir l'ouvrage essentiel de François Hartog, Régimes d'historicité.
Présentisme et expériences du temps, Paris, Le Seuil, 2003, ainsi que le livre d'Hartmut Rosa,
Accélération. Une critique sociale du temps, Paris, La Découverte, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278651
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Thibaud Paul
Abstract: « Les droits de l'homme et
l'Etat-providence », repris dans Essais sur le politique, Seuil, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278822
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Sur
Vindividualisme, Seuil, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278823
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Roman Joël
Abstract: Individu et justice sociale, Le Seuil, 1988, p. 129-144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278824
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Petitdemange Guy
Abstract: Du texte a l'action, op. cit., p. 261-277.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278827
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Du texte a Vaction (cité ici 7M), Seuil, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278829
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Raynaud Philippe
Abstract: NB p. 84, n. 32
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278831
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24271971
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Schlegel Jean-Louis
Abstract: Cahier de la nuit surveillée sur Rosenzweig, p. 55-56.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278839
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24278302
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Lhuilier Gilles
Abstract: Esprit (« Un père est-il réductible à ses
chromosomes? », Esprit, mai 1998, p. 182).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24278925
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275629
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Molino Jean
Abstract: Goethe, le Divan occidental-oriental, « Talisman » : À Dieu est l'Orient! / À Dieu est
l'Occident! / Au Nord et au Sud la terre / Repose dans la paix de ses mains.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279149
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275632
Date: 10 1, 2001
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: B. Williams, « Le cas Makropoulos et l'ennui qui s'attache à l'immortalité », 1972, repris
dans la Fortune morale, Paris, PUF, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279301
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275632
Date: 10 1, 2001
Author(s): Llored Patrick
Abstract: J. Bollack, la Grèce de personne. Les mots sous le mythe, introduction, Paris, Le Seuil,
1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279302
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275639
Date: 5 1, 2002
Author(s): le Blanc Guillaume
Abstract: Pascal Engel, « La nature et la norme », Sciences et avenir, hors série n° 130,
« L'embryon est-il humain? », mars-avril 2002, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279494
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275636
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Mongin Olivier
Abstract: Olivier Mongin, Paul Ricœur, Paris, Le
Seuil, 1994, repris en Points-Seuil, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279633
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24275636
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: t. III, le Système totalitaire, trad. fr. de Jean-Loup Bourget, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24279636
Journal Title: Esprit (1940-)
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24282776
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Bouretz Pierre
Abstract: L'action humanitaire a eu vingt ans l'an dernier. Au-delà de savoir si elle a triomphé ou échoué, mieux vaut s'interroger sur ce qui déchire ses principaux acteurs et comprendre les conflits qui opposent les pères fondateurs (Kouchner, Malhuret, Emmanuelli, Brauman). Plutôt que d'opposer abruptement l'humanitaire et la politique, on aura sûrement beaucoup à gagner à imaginer un triangle de l'humanitaire où les pôles juridique, éthique et politique se renforcent mutuellement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24283429
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24292824
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Vatinel Denis
Abstract: Robert Greif en 1622 (supra, η. 439).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24295584
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24293042
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Boudou Bénédicte
Abstract: M. Conche, « La méthode pyrrhonienne de
Montaigne », in Bull, de la Soc. des amis de Montaigne, Paris, 1974, n° 10-11,
pp. 47-62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24296639
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24292443
Date: 6 1, 1992
Author(s): Poujol Jacques
Abstract: Georges Lefranc, Le Mouvement socialiste sous la Troisième République,
Payot, 1963, p. 283.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24296975
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308965
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Mellet Paul-Alexis
Abstract: J.G.A. POCOCK, L'Ancienne constitution et le droit féodal. Etude sur la pensée historique
dans l'Angleterre du XVLT siècle (1957), Paris: P.U.F., 2000, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309044
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308969
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 351.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309093
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24308872
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Moreil Françoise
Abstract: Françoise MOREIL, «La maison d'Orange à Berlin au début du XVIIIe siècle », actes du colloque
international sur La principauté d'Orange, Avignon, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24309352
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309455
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Kirschleger Pierre-Yves
Abstract: Patrick Cabanel, Juifs et protestants en France, les affinités électives. XVI'-XXI' siècles, Paris,
Fayard, 2004, 351 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310413
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Au siège de la Société
Issue: i24309455
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Delteil Gérard
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Prospective du monde et perspective
chrétienne», in L'Eglise vers l'avenir, s. dir. Gérard Bessière, Paris, Cerf, 1969, p. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24310414
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311661
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Goyard-Fabre Simone
Abstract: CSF. pp. 289-303. pp. 368-372
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311669
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i24311064
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Escoubas Éliane
Abstract: Heidegger dans La Vérité en peinture
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24311714
Journal Title: Rivista Italiana di Musicologia
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki Editore
Issue: i24321280
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Sanguinetti Giorgio
Abstract: Desidero ringraziare Laurence Dreyfus, James Haar, Lewis Lockwood, John Nâ-
das, Anthony Newcomb, Christopher Reynolds e Richard Taruskin per aver espresso le
loro opinioni sulla prima stesura di questo saggio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24321287
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324948
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): DE MATTOS MOTTA FLÁVIA
Abstract: Paul RICOUER, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327761
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH
Issue: i24324905
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Kofes Suely
Abstract: SEGALEN, 1978, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327805
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i24325569
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Alvarez Sonia E.
Abstract: COSTA, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24327891
Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Etnologický Ústav Akademie ved Ceské Republiky, v. v. i.
Issue: i24330169
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): MOKRZAN MICHAŁ
Abstract: The article discusses the theoretical and methodological considerations as well as the practical application of two incarnations of the rhetorical turn in socio-cultural anthropology. Rhetorical turn is understood as a linguistie and constructivist turn, which marks a substantial part of contemporary thinking in the social sciences and humanities. Reflection about the relation between anthropology and rhetoric shows that the rhetorical turn is oriented on analyzing the rhetoric of anthropological texts, in their persuasive and figurative dimension. On the other hand, rhetorical turn refers to the research perspective in anthropology which is focused on the interpretation of society and culture in which an important role is played by the tools and concepts of rhetoric. Článek je věnován teoretickým a metodologickým úvahám, stejně jako praktické aplikaci dvou aspektů rétorického obratu v sociokulturní antropologii. Spojení „rétorický obrat” je zde použito pro lingvistický a konstruktivistický obrat, který významnou měrou poznamenal současný stav společenských a humanitních věd. Zaměříme-li se na vztah antropologie a rétoriky, zjistíme, že rétorický obrat s sebou přinesl úvahy o rétorice antropologických textů, o jejich přesvědčovacím a obrazném rozměru. Na druhé straně se rétorický obrat vztahuje k výzkumné perspektivě v antropologii, soustředěné na interpretaci společnosti a kultury, v níž hrají významnou roli nástroje a koncepty rétoriky.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24330171
Journal Title: Bruniana & Campanelliana
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24337272
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Blum Paul Richard
Abstract: A term from the philosophy of history of Paul Ricoeur: data are gathered and made un-
derstandable in a narrative plot.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24337688
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24347731
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): OKOLO Okonda
Abstract: Lalande, A., op. cit., p. 1271.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24349937
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350138
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): KINYONGO J.
Abstract: Grahay, F., « Le Décollage conceptuel, condition d'une philosophie
n. 52,
bantoue », in Diogène, 1965, n. 52, p. 64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24350142
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24347878
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): BILOLO Mubabinge
Abstract: « Civilisation uni-
verselle et Culture nationale », in Esprit (octobre 1961).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24350657
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24348524
Date: 9 1, 1985
Author(s): SOUFFRANT Claude
Abstract: Janet Vaillant, « Dilemmas For Anti-Western Patriotism : Slavophilism
and Négritude », The Journal of Modern African Studies, vol. 12, n° 3, 1974,
p. 377-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24351247
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350806
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): KI-ZERBO Lazare
Abstract: Le règne de la critique de
R. Koselleck (éd. Minuit).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24351580
Journal Title: Présence Africaine
Publisher: Présence Africaine Editions
Issue: i24350798
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): KASEREKA Kavwahirehi M.
Abstract: M. Foucault, Dits et écrits. 1954-1988. Vol. IV 1980-1988. Édition établie sous la
direction de Daniel Defert et François Ewald, Paris, Gallimard, 1994, p. 637.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352132
Journal Title: McGill International Journal of Sustainable Development Law and Policy / Revue internationale de droit et politique du développement durable de McGill
Publisher: McGill
Issue: i24352116
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Gaillard Emilie
Abstract: Brown-Weiss, Justice, supra note 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24352650
Journal Title: Journal of Applied Philosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24354104
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): ATKINS KIM
Abstract: In his famous paper, What Is It Like To Be A Bat?, Thomas Nagel argues against a reductive physicalist account of consciousness by highlighting what he calls "the subjective character of experience". In this paper I will argue that Nagel's insight is important for understanding the value placed on patient autonomy in medical ethics. Appreciation of the subjective character of experience brings with it the necessity for an epistemological humility with respect to the lives of others and what can be said to be "right" for them. Appreciation of the subjective character of experience lies at the heart of empathy and our capacity to make decisions that genuinely reflect respect for the patient's autonomy. Through the example of a case involving extreme medical intervention, I identify some impediments to the proper recognition of autonomy. These kind of cases highlight the significance of affective responses with respect to the subjective character of experience, and, by extension, to our capacity to imagine and act in accordance with another's perspective. I argue that affective responses are appropriate and needed considerations in the case where one must attempt to assume another's perspective in order to respect autonomy. I conclude that understanding that experience has an irreducibly subjective character is essential to respecting patient autonomy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354111
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: H. BOUVIER u. CO. VERLAG
Issue: i24354771
Date: 1 1, 1961
Author(s): Schmandt Jürgen
Abstract: Ebenda S. 58 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24354774
Journal Title: Revue de Philosophie Ancienne
Publisher: Éditions Ousia
Issue: i24353845
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Nobilio Fabien
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Philosophische Untersuchungen, traduction
G.E.M. ANSCOMBE, Philosophical Investigations, Oxford, 1953.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24357995
Journal Title: Revue de Philosophie Ancienne
Publisher: Éditions OUSIA
Issue: i24353823
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Guéguen Haud
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, op. cit., p. 169.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358725
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG HERBERT GRUNDMANN
Issue: i24358961
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Jaeger Henry-Evrard Hasso
Abstract: Daß die Verstiegenheiten und Mißbräuche, welche die Scholiasten der Spätantike seit
der Kaiserzeit mit der Etymologie getrieben haben, aller ernsten Grundlagen entbehrten
und reine Fabrikation ebenso mittelmäßiger wie phantasievoller Wichtigtuer darstellten,
die sich „Philologen" und „Grammatiker" nannten und noch bis in die byzantinische Epoche
hinein fortwirkten, ist allgemein bekannt (s. zum Beispiel die vielfachen Entlarvungen dieses
durch die Jahrhunderte mitgeschleppten Ballastes von Pseudogelehrsamkeit bei W. G. Ruther-
ford, A Chapter in the History of Annotation, Being Scholia Aristophanica, Bd. III, London
1905, S. 392 etc). Daß die ebenso irrationalen und vielleicht noch geschmackloseren ety-
mologischen Spekulationen, die man im 20. Jahrhundert auf die Wortgruppe έρμηνεία, έρμη-
νεύειν, ερμηνευτικός anwendete und immer noch anwendet, im gängigen akademischen Lehr-
betrieb heute ernst genommen werden und sich professoraler Autorität erfreuen, ist nicht
nur ein bildungsgeschichtliches curiosum, sondern ein Zeugnis irrationaler Aushöhlung der
„geisteswissenschaftlichen" Fakultäten. Als Beispiel seien nur erwähnt Karl Kerényi, Her-
meneia und Hermeneutike, Ursprung und Sinn der Hermeneutik in ders., Griechische Grundbegriffe,
Fragen und Antworten aus der heutigen Situation, Zürich 1964, 42-52, und F. K. Mayr, Der
Gott Hermes und die Hermeneutik in Tijdschrift voor Filosofie, 30, 1968, 525-635. Wie der Autor
des zuletzt genannten Artikels selbst, auf Heideggers Formulierung zurückgreifend, sagt,
ist das „Spiel des Denkens verbindlicher als die Strenge der Wissenschaft"... Wohin eine
im Banne Heideggers stehende „Begriffsgeschichte" führt, kann man bei der Lektüre dieses
Schwalls besser „verstehen"... Wie wenig Tragweite die immer wieder angeführte (Techné)
hermeneutike in der Epinomis 975 c hat, sagt der Text selbst: bei der Kunst Orakel zu inter-
pretieren, die weder Seelengröße noch Weisheit hervorbringt, weiß der „Interpret" nur,
was er sagt, ob es jedoch wahr ist, hat er nicht gelernt (τό λεγόμενον γάρ οίδεν μόνον, εΐ
δ' αληθές, ούχ έμαθεν). Übrigens kommt das Wort έρμηνευτική in den pseudo-platonischen
Definitiones in seiner sonst gebräuchlichen Bedeutung vor, 414 d 4: "Ονομα διάλεκτος άσιλιθετος
έρμηνεντική τοϋ τε κατά τής ουσίας κατηγορουμένου και παντός του μή καθ' έαντοϋ λεγομένου.
(Nomen, zuzusammengesetzte Ausdrucksweise für etwas seinem Wesen entsprechend
Bezeichnetes, sowie auch für alles von diesem Ausgesagtes). — Pierre Chantraine, Dictionnaire
Etymologique de la Langue Grecque, Histoire des Mots, Paris, 1970, S. 373, sagt ausdrücklich,
„Terme technique sans étymologid'. Vgl. auch F. Solmsen, Ein dorisches Komödienstück in Rheinisches
Museum für Philologie NF 63, 1908, 329-340. (dort s. 336 f über den ionischen Ursprung
der Worte έρμηνεΰσα, έρμηνεύς).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24358965
Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358314
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Benoist Stéphane
Abstract: T. Benton, « Epigraphy and Fascism », dans
The Afterlife of Inscriptions, cit. supra, p. 183-186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359120
Journal Title: BMS: Bulletin of Sociological Methodology / Bulletin de Méthodologie Sociologique
Publisher: AIMS
Issue: i24359731
Date: 3 1, 1997
Author(s): Jenny Jacques
Abstract: An initial awareness is needed of the debates regarding the choice of research approaches in sociology and the diversity and specificity of methods currently being used in the domain of textual data analysis in France. In general the influence of the French socio-linguistic tradition looms large, including, on the one hand, the older works of Michel Pécheux on the "discursive formations" and his A.A.D. (Analyse Automatique du Discours, 1969), and on the other hand, two main perspectives of the "Ecole Française d'Analyse du/de Discours" - which refer to the "speech act" concept and to the problematics of enunciation, and emphasizes the processes and "sociodiscursive practices" between socially-located speakers. Such theoretical conceptions and specific requirements lead to build on methodologies different from the classic, theme-based content analysis, though not yet translated into an operational software. Then the main software developments currently having an impact (at least potential) on practices of computer-aided sociological analysis of textual data, in France, are classified : from the lexicometric using procedures of "French Data Analysis" ('Analyse Factorielle des Correspondances' of Benzecri, and so on...), to a set of "expert-systems" working on specific theoretical frameworks, through more classical methods of content analysis and coding-sorting-retrieving socio-semantic procedures, eventually with various statistical methods. L'auteur expose d'abord quelques considèrations épistémologiques générales sur les présupposés implicites des méthodes de recherche sociologique, abusivement séparées en qualitatives et quantitatives, et des interrogations spécifiques sur le statut des corpus textuels et des pratiques socio-discursives dans différents domaines et selon divers types de problématique en sociologie. Puis, après un résumé des problématiques sociolinguistiques de l'"énonciation", propres aux courants de l'Analyse de Discours à la française", il propose une classification des principaux lieux d'élaboration théorico-méthodologique ayant (ou susceptibles d'avoir) un impact sur les pratiques informatisées d'analyse textuelle: de la lexicométrique inspirée de l'"Analyse des données a la française", actuellement dominante, a des quasi-systèmes-experts, branchés sur des problématiques sociologiques particulières, en passant par des méthodes plus "classiques" d'analyse de contenu thématique, de type socio-sémantique, et de codification a posteriori de réponses à des questions ouvertes et autres énoncés produits en langage naturel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359736
Journal Title: Cahiers du Centre Gustave Glotz
Publisher: DE BOCCARD
Issue: i24358311
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bouvier David
Abstract: P. Ellinger, La légende nationale, cit. supra, p. 71, qui a également bien relevé la référence au
κτήμα ές αίεί de Thucydide.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24359953
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24359168
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Orth Ernst Wolfgang
Abstract: Martin Heidegger: Phänomenologie und Theologie (1927/1928),
Frankfurt a. M., 1970, 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360106
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358400
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Kelkel A. L.
Abstract: Signes, 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360181
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358415
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: „Qu'est-ce qu'un texte?" (Ricœur 1970)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360307
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358456
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: L III 93, 109 u. 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360378
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358502
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: R. Kühn, Leben als Bedürfen.
Eine lebensphänomenologische Analyse zu Kultur und Wirtschaft, Heidelberg 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360385
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: Verlag Karl Alber
Issue: i24358463
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Schumacher Bernard
Abstract: J. Derrida, Apories, 133 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360438
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24359550
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Breitling Andris
Abstract: Andris Breitling: Die Tragik
der Handlung. Ricoeurs Ethik an der Grenze zwischen Philosophie und Nicht-Philosophie.
In: Andris Breitling / Stefan Orth / Birgit Schaaff (Hg.): Das herausgeforderte Selbst. Perspek-
tiven auf Paul Ricoeurs Ethik. Würzburg 1999. S. 75-94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360479
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358609
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Günzel Stephan
Abstract: Stephan Günzel: Hermeneutik im Widerstreit. Habermas zwi-
schen den Traditionen. In: Ders.: Anteile. Analytik, Hermeneutik, Politik. Weimar 2002. 95-
98. 93-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360647
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358470
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Serra Alice Mara
Abstract: Ebd. 38 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360892
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Römer Inga
Abstract: Gondek, Tengelyi: Neue Phänomenologie in Frankreich. 671, vgl. 671-673.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360912
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Amthor David
Abstract: Dodd: „The dignity of the mind". 40 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360913
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358654
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Bauer Katharina
Abstract: Henaff: Der Preis der Wahrheit. 44.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360918
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bonnemann Jens
Abstract: Buber: Urdistanz und Beziehung. 36 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360948
Journal Title: Phänomenologische Forschungen
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24358589
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Summa Michela
Abstract: Husserl: Zur Phänomenologie des inneren Zeitbewusstseins. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24360954
Journal Title: Aufklärung
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361794
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Hien Markus
Abstract: Buttlar, Das.Nationale' als Thema der Gartenkunst (wie Anm. 122), 196-198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361825
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: FELIX MEINER VERLAG
Issue: i24361677
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Kowalewicz Michel Henri
Abstract: Vgl. R. Ingarden: Ο tlumaczeniach, a.a.O. [Anm. 58] 186: » Pozwolç sobie to rozwinqc na
przykladzie Krytyki czystego rozumu Kanta, dokonanego przez P. Chmielowskiego. Wiadomo,
ze terminologia przez Chmielowskiego przyjçta rozpowszechnila siç dose znacznie w publika-
cjach polskich na temat Kanta, a nawet bywa przez niektorych filozofôw polskich stosowana w
pracach specjalnie ζ filozolia Kanta nie zwi^zanych. Przyzwyczajono siç Erscheinung nazywac
>zjawiskiem< (i nawet w szerokich kolach naukowych polskich, np. wsrôd fizykow), Anschau-
ung - >ogli}dem<, Vernunft - >rozumem<, Verstand - >rozs^dkiem< itd. Czy mamy siç liczyc ζ tym
faktem i w dalszym ci;(gu stosowac te terminy w tlumaczeniu i w pracach naszych filozoficznych?
Nie da siç zaprzeczyc, ze przynajmniej niektôre ζ tych terminow nie oddajg tresci faktycznych
pojçc Kantowskich. Mimo catego przyzwyczajenia do nich przy glçbszym wnikniçciu w wywody
Kanta trudno nam siç zgodzic, jakoby Verstand Kantowski byt »rozsqdkiem«. Stowo to oznacza
pewng wlasciwosc umyslu ludzkiego w praktycznym zachowaniu siç cztowieka, tymczasem u
Kanta Verstand jest gtôwn^ poznawcz^ wtadzq (czy zdolnosciç), gdzie sprawy zycia praktyczne-
go nie odgrywajg zadnej roli. Wiadomo tez, ze Kant tç stronç zycia umysiowego, czy zdolnosci
umyslu, ktöra wigze siç ζ zagadnieniami praktyki (w szczegolnosci etycznej), nazwal wlasnie nie
Verstand, lecz praktische Vernunft
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24361939
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360243
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): von Heydebrand Renate
Abstract: Vgl. auch Gebhard (s. Anm. 29), S. 143: „Das Gleichnis" - das meint im Zusammenhang
die Parabel - „dürfte kaum aus dem Wertungszusammenhang seines prophetisch-eschatologi-
schen Ursprungs so herauslösbar sein, daß es Weisheit von jenem Leben werden könnte, das zu
kritisieren der biblische Auftrag war".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362928
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360243
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Liebsch Burkhard
Abstract: Merleau-Ponty: Die Struktur des Verhaltens, S. 223 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362936
Journal Title: Archiv für Begriffsgeschichte
Publisher: BOUVIER VERLAG
Issue: i24360276
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Makita Etsuro
Abstract: Jan Edward Garrett meint, daß es bei Gadamer zwei verschiedene Begriffe der Horizont-
verschmelzung gäbe, d. h. eine schweigende Horizontverschmelzung und eine explizite und ab-
sichtliche, die der ersteren folge. Die Horizontverschmelzung ist aber in Wirklichkeit ein Phäno-
men nach der Entstehung des historischen Bewußtseins, während die Vermittlung der Vergangen-
heit mit der Gegenwart ein allgemeines Phänomen darstellt, das immer geschieht, obwohl die Ho-
rizontverschmelzung eine spezifische Form der Vermittlung ist. Garrett verwechselt die Hori-
zontverschmelzung mit der Vermittlung überhaupt. Die „schweigende Horizontverschmelzung"
ist ein attributiver Widerspruch, weil die Horizontverschmelzung eine mit dem historischen Be-
wußtsein vollzogene, absichtliche und „kontrollierte" (312) Vermittlung ist. Die Vermittlung
überhaupt beginnt vom Anfang des Verstehens an, während die Horizontverschmelzung erst an
seinem Ende stattfindet. Vgl. J. E. Garrett: Hans-Georg Gadamer on „Fusion of Horizons".
In: Man and World. Vol. 11 (1987) pp. 392-400, p. 397 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24362964
Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24364384
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Sennett, 2009
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24364433
Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24364367
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Ruiz Jorge Ruiz
Abstract: Rescher (1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24364482
Journal Title: Cuadernos de Pensamiento Político
Publisher: faes-fundación para el análisis y los estudios sociales
Issue: i24367200
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): VERA MARIO RAMOS
Abstract: Manuel Fraljó, "Fundamentalismo y religión: El caso del Islam" en Fraljó, Manuel y Román,
Ramón (coords.), Fundamentalismo y violencia, Córdoba, UNED, 2004, p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24367946
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24367195
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Silva José Alfredo Rangel
Abstract: Ankerson, El caudillo agrarista, pp. 16-20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369025
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i24368678
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Behnke Marisol Palma
Abstract: Cita extractada de la exposición Fotos del terremoto y maremoto del 60, Museo Azul, Ancud Chiloé,
diciembre de 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369235
Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Verlag Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i24368988
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Weiland Marc
Abstract: Schapp (Anm. 34), S. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369776
Journal Title: KulturPoetik
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24368991
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Ächtler Norman
Abstract: Gerd Appenzeller,
Das alte Märchen zieht wieder. In: Der Tagesspiegel, 05.05.2014, S. 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24369901
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: l'Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i24372731
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Bocianowska Cécile
Abstract: I. Stokfiszewski, Zwrotpolityczny, Warszawa, Wyd. Krytyki Politycznej, 2009. Sur le virage politique
et ses influences sur la critique, voir aussi : D. Kozicka, Krytyczne (nie)porzqdki..., op. cit. Note du rédacteur :
cette activité fait partie du groupe de jeunes intellectuels « Krytyka polityczna ». Cf. introduction dans ce
volume.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24372736
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24388723
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): MEDINA RAQUEL
Abstract: El propósito de este artículo es analizar la representación del alzheimer en el poemario de Juana Castro Los cuerpos oscuros (2005) tanto a nivel de contenido como de lenguaje poético. En primer lugar se hace un recorrido sobre cómo se ha representado la demencia en la esfera cultural y lo que de ella encontramos en los discursos actuales sobre el alzheimer. Desde lo aportado por los estudios del envejecimiento y, sobre todo, por los estudios de la demencia, se establecen las cuestiones de identidad y de subjetividad que se plantean con la polifonía de voces que nos ofrece el poemario de la poeta cordobesa. Por último se analiza la relación entre la memoria semántica y el lenguaje metafórico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24388730
Journal Title: Sociologisk Forskning
Publisher: Sveriges Sociologförbund
Issue: i24393153
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Basic Goran
Abstract: Greve & Bergsmo 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24393158
Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: LAROUSSE
Issue: i24395537
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Gautier Antoine
Abstract: Berrendonner & Béguelin (1989 : 99).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396625
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): JAMES ALISON
Abstract: Georges Perec, Tentative d'épuisement d'un lieu parisien, Paris, Christian Bourgois,
1982.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396931
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i24395823
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): DUBOUCLEZ OLIVIER
Abstract: 20. « Les acteurs savent que toute la pièce tend vers le salut » (Voir PM, p. 69).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24396932
Journal Title: Religion & Literature
Publisher: University of Notre Dame English Department
Issue: i24395973
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Kirkpatrick Robin
Abstract: This forum gathers together a set of essays composed in response to the 2011 special issue of Religion & Literature 42.1–2, titled "Something Fearful": Medievalist Scholars on the "Religious Turn" in Literary Criticism, edited by Kathryn Kerby-Fulton and Jonathan Juilfs. The forum's ten authors reflect both on essays within the original volume and on the broader questions engaged by it and through its very publication; responsive remarks from Kathryn Kerby-Fulton and two contributors to that initiating volume conclude the conversation. Through conversation, response, and critical engagement, the forum's contributors weigh questions of the language of belief in scholarly discourse, of the continuities of religious practice across history, of the assumptions and beliefs undergirding critical work on religion and literature and culture, and of the acknowledgement of the religious convictions of medievalists' scholarly subjects, scholars, and the communities of both.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24397749
Journal Title: Revue Canadienne d'Études cinématographiques / Canadian Journal of Film Studies
Publisher: Film Studies Association of Canada / Association canadienne d'études cinématographiques
Issue: i24402488
Date: 10 1, 2000
Author(s): ROY LUCIE
Abstract: By establishing a parallel between the cycle of Lumière films and the Age of the Enlightenment ("siècle des lumières"), the author identifies the pensive character of the films' images as well as the aesthetic of the visible world they display. She then examines the transformation of a time-image into a memory-image in the Lumière films, arguing that the films are not only offer time-images, that is, residual images of the past, but have become images-as-memory in the contemporary spectator's mind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24402662
Journal Title: Renaissance Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24411931
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Chojnacki Stanley
Abstract: Cf. Scott, "'Experience'", 34: '[Subjects] are not unified, autonomous individuals exercising
free will, but rather subjects whose agency is created through situations and statuses conferred on
them.'
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24411934
Journal Title: History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd.
Issue: i24427273
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): DEAN TREVOR
Abstract: T. Parsons, Nonexistent
Objects (New Haven, CN, 1980).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24428913
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i24431277
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): de Oliveira MARIANO Márcia Corrêa
Abstract: LAPHAM, 2012, p.33,
traduçao nossa
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24434338
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24435585
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Khatchadourian Haig
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 506.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24435587
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: BASIL BLACKWELL
Issue: i24436910
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): GOMILA ANTONI
Abstract: Ian Hacking: "Language, Truth and Reason", in M. Hollis and S. Lukes (eds ):
Rationality and Realism, B. Blackwell, Oxford 1982, pp. 48-66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24436919
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438872
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): KNIGHT DEBORAH
Abstract: L. B. Cebik, quoted in Branigan (1992, 27).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438877
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24438983
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): DELACAMPAGNE CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Attached for a long time to the illusion of its national "singularity", French philosophy has remained, for a good part of this century, closed to any foreign influence (with the exception of German phenomenology and existentialism). This situation started to change, however, in the early 1980's. From that moment on, the tendency to translate foreign philosophy has strongly increased among French publishers, allowing France to take a more active part in the international philosophical conversation. The French-American dialogue, in particular, is currently experiencing an expanding phase – but this recent trend must continue to be encouraged from both sides of the Atlantic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24438994
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439205
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): BEGGS DONALD
Abstract: "several disciplines" (77)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439209
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439292
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): TOHANEANU CECILIA
Abstract: Braudel's La Mediteranee.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439303
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24439308
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): ESS CHARLES
Abstract: course (188)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439325
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24439327
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): STEELE MEILI
Abstract: Steele 1997, chapter 5
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439464
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439507
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): CHRISTMAN JOHN
Abstract: Hacking 1995, 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439514
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24439785
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): COLAPIETRO VINCENT
Abstract: "In the Wake of Darwin" (Colapietro 2003)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24439818
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24439506
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): LOOBUYCK PATRICK
Abstract: cf. Smith 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24440253
Journal Title: Metaphilosophy
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i24441733
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): VIDAL CLÉMENT
Abstract: Philosophy lacks criteria to evaluate its philosophical theories. To fill this gap, this essay introduces nine criteria to compare worldviews, classified in three broad categories: objective criteria (objective consistency, scientificity, scope), subjective criteria (subjective consistency, personal utility, emotionality), and intersubjective criteria (intersubjective consistency, collective utility, narrativity). The essay first defines what a worldview is and exposes the heuristic used in the quest for criteria. After describing each criterion individually, it shows what happens when each of them is violated. From the criteria, it derives assessment tests to compare and improve different worldviews. These include the is-ought, ought-act, and is-act first-order tests; the critical and dialectical second-order tests; the mixed-questions and first-second-order third-order tests; and the we-I, we-it, and it-I tests. The essay then applies these criteria and tests to a concrete example, comparing the Flying Spaghetti Monster deity with Intelligent Design. For another application, it draws more general fruitful suggestions for the dialogue between science and religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24441743
Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Cross Currents Corporation
Issue: i24455296
Date: 1 1, 1964
Author(s): Lingis Al
Abstract: "Le Yogi,
le Commissaire et le Prophète," Christianisme Social, janvier, 1949.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24457107
Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Convergence, Inc.
Issue: i24456710
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): PLÉ ALBERT
Abstract: Karl Marx, The Holy Family, cited in Michel Verret, Les Marxistes et la Religion. Essai sur
l'Athéisme Moderne (Paris: Editions sociales, 1965), p. 142.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24458785
Journal Title: CrossCurrents
Publisher: Convergence, Inc.
Issue: i24456942
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): SWIDLER LEONARD
Abstract: Austin Flannery, Vatican Council II (Collegeville, Mn.: Li-
turgical Press, 1975) p. 1003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24458868
Journal Title: English Literary Renaissance
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i24463741
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): ANDERSON JUDITH H.
Abstract: Medusa's
Mirrors: Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, and the Metamorphosis of the Female Self (Newark, 1998), ch.
3, esp. pp. 112-13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24463746
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: OPHRYS
Issue: i24465912
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): KENTISH-BARNES Nancy
Abstract: Pochard,
Zittoun and Hervé, 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24466388
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24465850
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Bouchard Michel
Abstract: Les monuments voués à la guerre abondent en Russie, comme dans de nombreux autres pays. Ils font partie du paysage, tout en le caractérisant. Ces monuments font appel au passé et aux souvenirs. Ce faisant, ils définissent l'appartenance. Et tout en remémorant le passé, ils cherchent également à déterminer l'avenir. Le fait de se souvenir d'une guerre est un acte politique en soi. On se souvient, et en se souvenant on se définit au sein de sa communauté, de son pays et du monde. À tout le moins, c'est le cas dans l'Europe de l'Est et la Russie. Le territoire a été envahi maintes fois au cours des derniers siècles et cela a entrainé le développement d'une mémoire sélective, une « curation » de la nation. Nous étudions ici les souvenirs de la Russie afin de démontrer comment les monuments et les musées de guerre définissent non seulement le passé, mais également le présent et les rêves que l'on forge pour l'avenir. War monuments are abundant in Russia; they are part of the landscape, while defining the terrain. Calling to the past and bringing forth memories, they define belonging, commemorating the past while shaping the future. Remembering a war is a political act and, in remembering, we define our place in our community, country and the world. Such is the case in Eastern Europe and Russia whose territories have been invaded many times over the centuries, which has led to development of a selective memory, the "curation" of the nation. This article explores memories of Russia to demonstrate how monuments and museums of war define the past, present and dreams for the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467379
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24465850
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Gandsman Ari
Abstract: For anthropologists working on the topic of human rights, fieldwork often consists of collecting narratives documenting experiences of violence and loss. Drawing on research with human organizations in Argentina, this article questions this methodological focus that is often related to human rights activism. While these narratives are often treated as organic accounts, they are also products of the human rights movement. Analyses that fail to address this larger institutional context may end up reproducing conventionally held knowledge. By exploring the larger interconnections between narrative, human rights and trauma, I conclude by questioning the prevalent normative assumptions about narrative. Pour l'anthropologue travaillant sur le sujet des droits humains, le travail de terrain consiste souvent à recueillir des récits documentant des expériences de violence et de perte. À partir de recherches menées auprès d'organismes de défense des droits humains en Argentine, cet article interroge ce parti-pris méthodologique qu'on associe souvent au militantisme pour les droits humains. Alors que ces récits sont souvent traités comme des comptes-rendus organiques, ils sont aussi des produits du mouvement pour les droits humains. Les analyses qui omettent de tenir compte de ce contexte institutionnel plus étendu peuvent finir par reproduire des connaissances conventionnellement admises. En explorant les interconnexions plus étendues entre les récits, les droits humains et les traumatismes, je conclus en remettant en question les a priori normatifs courants relatifs aux récits.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467380
Journal Title: Revue d'histoire des sciences
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i24466320
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): SEIGNAN Gérard
Abstract: Gaël Alain, Penser mieux, travailler moins
(Paris : Eyrolles, 2013).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24467764
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24468543
Date: 5 1, 1986
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: In Geschichten verstrickt, op. cit., p. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24469050
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i24467905
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Lasserre Evelyne
Abstract: Le présent article s'inscrit dans le prolongement d'une recherche en cours portant sur la compréhension et l'analyse des usages de jeux vidéo en ligne par des personnes en situation de handicap. En soulignant les apports épistémiques et méthodologiques d'une ethnographie en ligne, il pointe les limites heuristiques de la classique distinction entre un monde supposé réel qui se verrait redoublé par son pendant virtuel. L'exemple précis des jeux vidéo permet ici non seulement de questionner la dichotomie virtuel / réel mais aussi la définition traditionnelle du jeu élaborée à partir du modèle de la règle distincte de son effectuation concrète. L'analyse des pratiques ludiques de personnes en situation de handicap pointe enfin la nécessité d'une attention portée sur les modes d'appropriation corporelle d'un dispositif techno-communicationnel. En conséquence, il s'agit d'envisager les formes d'expériences vidéo-ludiques comme des « instances de procuration » autorisant l'exploration sensible de mondes moins disjoints les uns des autres qu'en interaction constante. This article is a continuation of ongoing research to understand the uses of online gaming by people with physical disabilities. By emphasizing the epistemic and methodological contributions of online ethnography, it points to the heuristic limits of the traditional distinction between a supposedly real world and that which would be repeated in the virtual. The specific use of video games in this example, makes it possible not only to question the virtual–real dichotomy, but also to question the traditional definition of the game which starts from the premise that the rule is distinct from its concrete execution. Analysis of the recreational practices of disabled people also points to the need for attention to modes of bodily appropriation of techno-communication devices. In the end, it is a question of considering video entertainment experiences like "instances of proxy," authorizing the sensitive exploration of worlds that are less disconnected and instead are in constant interaction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24469614
Journal Title: Esprit
Publisher: Esprit
Issue: i24469665
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Dès ses premières réflexions portant sur le volontaire et l'involontaire, Ricœur aborde frontalement l'énigme du mal. Si celle-ci croise la tradition biblique et la philosophie, elle ne conduit pas la pensée à souscrire à une théodicée mais à élaborer une pensée de l'agir. Pour Ricœur, l'être est acte plutôt que substance car il engage à l'action pour répliquer au mal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24470067
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales
Issue: i24476009
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): De Rosis Carolina
Abstract: Si comme Foucault lui-même le souligne, la question de la vérité occupe dans
toute sa recherche une place à différents égards cruciale (Foucault 1994 III : 30-
31, IV : 693), ce n'est qu'à partir des années 1980 qu'elle devient ensemble à
la problématique du sujet la préoccupation principale du philosophe. En effet,
déjà dans ses recherches sur la sexualité, Foucault s'est intéressé à une forme
particulière d'assujettissement à l'œuvre dans la pastorale chrétienne et qui sera
par la suite un modèle exemplaire pour les actions disciplinaires (Foucault 1994
III: 256-257, IV: 125-129, 148, 383-385, 783-788). Le sujet est contraint
d'avouer la vérité sur sa vie la plus intime, et notamment celle sexuelle, « pour
mieux renoncer à lui-même et se soumettre à son directeur de conscience » (Granjon
2005 : 42). Il s'agit d'un processus de formation du sujet dans un rapport à soi
aliéné. Selon FOUCAULT (1994 III : 551), ce modèle de formation du sujet est à
l'œuvre également dans « toutes les grandes machines disciplinaires : casernes,
écoles, ateliers et prisons [...] qui permettent de cerner l'individu, de savoir ce
qu'il est, ce qu'il fait, ce qu'on peut en faire, où il faut le placer, comment le
placer parmi les autres ». En 1980 lors d'une leçon au Collège de France pour
le cours intitulé « Du gouvernement des vivants », Foucault (2012 : 80-81) refor-
mule la question de la formation du sujet dans les termes de « régimes de vérité ».
Les années 1980 représentent un tournant dans les orientations analytiques du
philosophe. Dans un article paru en 1981, FOUCAULT (1994 IV : 693) annonce son
projet de recherche à venir, toutefois interrompu par sa mort prématurée. Il
reviendra à plusieurs reprises sur ce changement de thème directeur en essayant
aussi de montrer qu'il était sous-jacent dans ses recherches antérieures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24476017
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales
Issue: i24476009
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Maitilasso Annalisa
Abstract: On fait référence à la différence entre éthique et morale proposée par P. Ricœur
(1990) : « Je réserverai le terme d'"éthique" pour la visée d'une vie accomplie
sous le signe des actions estimées bonnes et celui de "morale" pour le côté
obligatoire, marqué par des normes, des obligations, des interdictions. » Dans ce
sens, selon une perspective éthique, la migration devrait pouvoir se justifier
comme action estimée bonne pour tous. Il ne serait pas nécessaire de recourir
à une légitimité morale octroyée pour des raisons de force majeure (la pauvreté,
la guerre, les besoins familiaux).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24476022
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i24486301
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): الوﻛﻴﻞ سعيد أحمد
Abstract: This article explores the narrative representation of the desert in Leslie Silko's Ceremony and Ibrahim Al-Koni's The Bleeding of the Stone. In both novels, the physical is transformed into an existential realm, through which questions about human existence are raised. The desert is a microcosm that allows for a re-enactment of the story of creation. It is also the catalyst in the protagonists' initiation processes and the loci for the ceremonies necessary for restoring balance in the universe. But whereas Silko's novel celebrates desert myths as the infallible source of wisdom, Al-Koni's text regards the desert as a stimulus for Sufi quest. يلفتنا في كثير من روايات إبراهيم الكوني النظر إلى الصحراء بوصفها وسيله إلى فهم الحياه نفسها، حيث تبدو مركز العالم، وما سواها هو الهامش وأهله الأغيار، كما أن حقيقة الإنسان هي حقيقة الصحراء. ونجد أنفسنا في روايات ليزلي مارمون سيلكو بإزاء نصوص تستحضر الأرض بحيث تدمج بين الزمني والفضائي، وتبني الأسطورة الضاربة في عمق الزمن واللاوعي، وذلك في اﻵني والمعيش وفضاء الشخصيات المتفاعلة. تحاول المقالة استكشاف التمثيل السردﻱ للصحراء على مستوى الرؤية والتقنيات في رواية نزيف الحجر للكوني والطقوس لسيلكو، ملقية الضوء على نقاط الالتقاء والاختلاف بين عالميهما، وصولاﹰ إلى تأويل علاقة النص بالصحراء والعالم .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24487181
Journal Title: Cuban Studies
Publisher: University of Pittsburgh Press
Issue: i24482950
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): GUTIÉRREZ RAFAEL ROJAS
Abstract: This essay explores the relationship between poetics and politics in Martí's work. By way of an archeology of the political images in his poetry (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos, Versos libres) and, conversely, of the poetic representations that abound in his prose and oratory, the author argues for a tension between the two textual dimensions that is never quite resolved or diluted within a discursive or historical synthesis. And yet, the authorial schism is not exactly a fault to be "corrected" by critical reading, but rather the very axis of a martinian hermeneutics. Este ensayo explora las relaciones entre poética y política dentro de la escritura de José Martí. A través de una arqueología de las imágenes políticas que aparecen en su poesía (Ismaelillo, Versos sencillos y Versos libres) y, a la inversa, de las representaciones poéticas que abundan en la oratoria y la prosa de Martí, el autor sostiene que esos dos mundos del texto viven siempre en tensión, sin que ambas identidades textuales puedan diluirse en una síntesis discursiva o histórica. Sin embargo, la escisión de la autoría no es, aquí, una falla que el crítico debe "corregir", sino el eje de una hermenéutica del sujeto martiano.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24487741
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hart Kevin
Abstract: J.-L. Marion, Being Given, op. cit., p. 215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488407
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485962
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: M. Sanchez-Mazas et R. Gely, Des appartenances
aux identités, Vers une citoyenneté politique européenne, « Connexions », 84, 2006, pp. 73-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488416
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485961
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: P. Sheehy, The Reality
of Social Groups, Ashgate, Aldershot, 2006, p. 194.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488473
Journal Title: Archivio di Filosofia
Publisher: FABRIZIO SERRA EDITORE
Issue: i24485965
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: Hugues de saint-Victor: Lire le monde au Moyen Age, Actes du colloque de la
Société internationale de philosophie médiévale, Paris, Centre Sèvres, 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24488760
Journal Title: French Politics, Culture & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24517600
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Mbembe Achille
Abstract: This article offers a genealogy of the impact of French and Francophone Studies during the past decades in order to offer suggestions about how the field might be reconfigured and re-imagined in the present. We argue that the best way forward will be to dispense with traditional boundaries and borders within the field and instead embrace a general identity as Francophonists in order to bring together work on and from different regions of the globe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24517984
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Palgrave Macmillan
Issue: i24537834
Date: 4 1, 2014
Author(s): Gimbel Edward W.
Abstract: Michael Bamett's
Eyewitness to a Genocide (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24540199
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542833
Date: 5 1, 2013
Author(s): ANKERSMIT FRANK
Abstract: What I have described elsewhere as "the Magritte conception of history." See Ankersmit,
Meaning, Truth, and Reference in Historical Representation (Ithaca, NY, and London: Cornell Uni-
versity Press, 2012), 192-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542850
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i24542986
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Grethlein Jonas
Abstract: This book examines Greek engagements with the past as articulations of memory formulated against the contingency of chance associated with temporality. Based on a phenomenological understanding of temporality, it identifies four memorializing strategies: continuity (tradition), regularity (exemplarity), development, and acceptance of chance. This framework serves in pursuing a twofold aim: to reconstruct the literary field of memory in fifth-century BCE Greece; and to interpret Greek historiography as a memorializing mode. The key contention advanced by this approach is that acts of memory entailed an "idea of history" that was articulated not only in historiography, but also in epinician poetry, elegy, tragedy, and oratory. The book offers a rich account of poetic conventions and contexts through which each of these genres counterbalanced contingency through the use of exemplary and traditional modes of memory. This fine analysis highlights the grip of the present on the past as a significant feature of both historiographical and nonhistoriographical genres. The essay argues that this work fills a disciplinary gap by extending the reflection on memory to a new period, Greek antiquity. The retrospective positioning of this period at the outset of Western historical thought brings Grethlein's investigation to the center of debates about memory, temporality, and the meaning history. In engaging with the book's argument, the essay suggests that historiographical memory emerged in Greece not as a first-order encounter with time, but as a second-order encounter with forgetting. This confrontation marked a certain separation of historiography from other memorializing genres. Whereas poetic and rhetorical memories were posited against contingency, historiography sought to retrieve those aspects of the past that may otherwise have been irretrievably lost and forgotten. In doing so, it formulated the historiographical imperative as a negation of forgetting that problematized the truth-value of memory and the very act of remembering the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24542996
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24563540
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Capelle-Pogácean Antonela
Abstract: Un récent sondage réalisé par l'Organisation internationale pour les migrations révélait que 40 % des Roumains avaient
des projets d'émigration, plus de 20 % d'entre eux ayant déjà effectué des démarches concrètes en ce sens. Cité par Mircea
Boari, « Un loc din care vrei sa fugi » [Un lieu d'où l'on veut s'enfuir], Curentul, 18 mai 1999, http://curentul.logicnet.ro.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24563556
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564451
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Tomanova Zuzana
Abstract: Je remercie pour leur coopération et leur disponibilité Josef Alan, Jin Kabele, Milos Kucera, Hana Librovâ,
Miloslav Petrusek, Olga Srrridovâ, Zdenëk Uherek, Ivan Vodochodsky, qui m'ont livré des récits plus ou moins bio-
graphiques, et Tomas Bitrich, Marie Cerna, Zdenèk Konopâsek, Jin Nekvapil, Majda Rajanova, Eva Stehlikovâ,
Tereza Stôckelovâ, dont les conseils et remarques ont considérablement contribué à la rédaction de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564461
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24564534
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Niewiedzial Agnieszka
Abstract: Une bibliographie est disponible sur le site du CERI (http://www.ceri-sciences-po.org/cerifr/publica/cri-
tique/criti.htm).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24564545
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565178
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Israël Liora
Abstract: Avant le procès David Rousset et celui dit de 1'« Internationale des traîtres », qui, dans les années suivantes, ont
opposé à nouveau des journalistes communistes (défendus notamment par Joë Nordmann) et des dénonciateurs de
la répression soviétique. Sur le procès Rousset, voir T. Wieder, « La commission internationale contre le régime
concentrationnaire, 1949-1959 : des rescapés des camps nazis combattent les camps de concentration », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565186
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565251
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Chappuis Romain
Abstract: R. Barthes, Mythologies, op. rit, p. 217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565257
Journal Title: Histoire & Mesure
Publisher: Éditions du CNRS
Issue: i24563536
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): LEPETIT Bernard
Abstract: L'histoire quantitative aujourd'hui n'est plus à la mode. Pendant une génération, aux lendemains de la seconde guerre mondiale, elle a constitué pour les historiens français une pratique dominante, et la référence par rapport à laquelle furent longtemps jaugées les manières de faire de l'histoire. La tendance aujourd'hui s'est inversée. Le doute s'est répandu quant à la capacité du chiffre à rendre compte des compartements les plus fondamentaux. En examinant certaines manières de faire de l'histoire quantitative toujours fructueuses et en se gardant de certaines impasses, on cherche à montrer que la démonstration historique ne peut se ramener ni à une logique de la persuasion, ni à une logique de la narration. Les critères de sa pertinence doivent s'apprécier à l'articulation de la définition d'une problématique, des modalités de sa mise en oeuvre expérimentale, et de la confrontation au démenti des données empiriques des propositions historiques. Quantitative history is no longer in fashion. For a generation after the Second World War, it was the usual practice for French historians and the reference for judging work in history. This frame of trend has now been reversed. Doubt has spread concerning the capacity of numbers to explain the most important behaviours. While taking in consideration different styles of research in quantitative history which are always fruitful, and being aware of certain kinds of types of deadlocks, one wants to show how historic demonstration must never be pure persuasion nor pure story. The criteria of its pertinency must be appreciated adequately between the definition of problematic and of testing ground, and in confrontation between empirical data and historical assertions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565903
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24565951
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Bouissou Jean-Marie
Abstract: Pour répondre aux normes éditoriales de Critique internationale, le texte original a été coupé sans toucher au
contenu général (NdT).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24565955
Journal Title: Critique internationale
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24567235
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Naudet Jules
Abstract: Pour les longues discussions que nous avons eues sur le thème de cette étude, je remercie Nicolas Patin, qui
a beaucoup travaillé sur la mise en valeur de l'expérience de guerre des députés du Reichstag (Nicolas Patin,
La catastrophe allemande (1914-1945), Paris, Fayard, 2014).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24567243
Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i24569478
Date: 11 1, 2013
Author(s): Monrad Merete
Abstract: While identity researchers are utilizing a variety of methods, the potential advantages of combinations of qualitative and quantitative methods remain largely unexploited. This article discusses the interplay of methods, theoretical content and meta-theoretical assumptions in identity research and calls for the use of mixed methods. The article applies a symbolic interactionist perspective and discusses what aspects of identification different methodological approaches provide insight into. It is discussed how different methodologies imply different assumptions about identity, particularly regarding the stability of identities, the constitution of identities and the conception of meaning. The influential quantitative Burke–Tully approach is brought into focus and compared to different qualitative approaches, particularly narrative interviews. A quantitative self-report measure neglects the narrative, performative and embodied quality of identification. However, the quantitative approach of Burke and Tully enables the systematic, standardized comparison of individuals making it possible to examine patterns of identification in large populations. Since different methods enable the study of different aspects of identity, while remaining blind to other aspects, mixed methods may contribute to more complete insights into identity processes. Importantly, mixed methods may be used to examine patterns available to the outside observer and the lifeworld of the individual actor and thus to both explain and understand.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24569484
Journal Title: Biography
Publisher: University of Hawaiʻi Press for the Biographical Research Center
Issue: i24570215
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): STUMM BETTINA
Abstract: This article examines the ethical responsibilities of relating and responding to subjects of oppression in the context of collaborative life writing. One well-established ethical response to oppression is the practice of recognition. Drawing on the phenomenological ethics of Emmanuel Levinas and Paul Ricoeur, as well as the related work of Kelly Oliver, I raise some of the limitations of recognition, and delineate the ethical alternative of witnessing, bringing both to bear on my collaborative work with Holocaust survivor Rhodea Shandler.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570271
Journal Title: Estudios Demográficos y Urbanos
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24570762
Date: 4 1, 2015
Author(s): Malizia Matilde
Abstract: Bauman (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24570789
Journal Title: Hispania
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Spanish and Portuguese, Inc.
Issue: i24572060
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Rohrer Kristine
Abstract: Este artículo analiza el mediometraje televisivo La cabina (1972) y sus coordinadas políticas, sociales, culturales y filosóficas. La película alcanzó una gran aceptación entre la crítica y tuvo un gran impacto popular, hasta el punto de convertirse en un icono de la cultura española en aquel tiempo. A pesar de ello, no hay ningún estudio académico previo de esta obra. Concebida por sus autores como una obra de ciencia ficción de interpretación abierta, este estudio demuestra que está enraizada en el teatro vanguardista y la temática existencial característica de la época mediante un análisis comparativo con obras del absurdo y el existencialismo. La cabina tiene los siguientes rasgos formales del teatro del absurdo: el diseño arquetípico de unos personajes aislados, carentes de poder volitivo y sometidos a las circunstancias; la falta de función del lenguaje; la temática medieval de la Fortuna y el Ars Moriendi; y los asuntos prototípicos del absurdo como la circularidad del tiempo, la muerte y el suicidio. Como el teatro del absurdo, La cabina puede ser relacionada con el movimiento filosófico existencialista pujante entonces, pero relevantemente también muestra los mismos rasgos diferenciadores que el absurdo, esto es, pesimismo vital y falta de agentividad de los personajes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24572240
Journal Title: Journal of Black Studies
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24572645
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Hlongwane Gugu
Abstract: This article offers an examination of Lee Hirsch's Amandla!: A Revolution in Four-Part Harmony. Beginning with the liberation songs that gained salience during the National Party's implementation of apartheid policy in 1948 and ending with the struggle songs of a post-1994 democratic South Africa, the documentary's aim is to retrieve and recount the role of freedom songs in antiapartheid struggle. Using the writings of Ernesto Laclau, John Mbiti, Paul Ricoeur, and Alfred Schutz, this essay will argue that liberation songs are ancestral text that were partly used by antiapartheid activists to create their collective identities. This essay will further argue that Amandla! set itself the task of retrieving South Africa's liberation songs and liberation's praise singers from the ancestral region John Mbiti calls Zamani to a region he calls Sasa. However, this essay will assert that the ancestral retrieval task of this documentary is compromised by the documentary's privileging of the hegemonic groups within the African National Congress (ANC), the documentary's presentation of the ANC as a monolithic and univocal organization, and the producer's snowball sampling method. Arguing that this documentary relegates some of the South African struggle experiences into Zamani, this essay will attempt to correct these omissions and broaden the context of liberation songs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24572832
Journal Title: Contributions to the History of Concepts
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i24573102
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): SCHÄFER RIEKE
Abstract: W.B. Gallie, "Essentially Contested Concepts," in Philosophy and the Historical Under-
standing (London: Chatto & Windus, 1964), 157-191.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24573108
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: EL COLEGIO DE MÉXICO
Issue: i24573231
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Ayala Elisa Cárdenas
Abstract: Rivera, Entretenimientos, p. 18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24575179
Journal Title: Latin American Perspectives
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i24573183
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Furio Victoria J.
Abstract: In Colombia, society has come to be organized in terms of a division between those with and those without links to narcotrafficking. This moral boundary recently experienced a symbolic disturbance with the entrance on the country's cultural scene of Andrés López López, a former Colombian drug trafficker, and his El cartel de los sapos (2008). An examination of the discursive and political strategies employed in this book, in which drug trafficking is referred to through the metaphor "bacteria," allows us to understand the construction of a narrator who calls attention to the hypocrisy of the government and society regarding the reincorporation of narcotraffickers into civilian life while provoking a national debate on the difference between history and fiction. En Colombia, la sociedad ha llegado a organizarse en términos de una división entre aquellos que tienen y no vínculos con el narcotráfico. Este límite moral experimentó un reciente disturbio simbólico con la entrada de Andrés López López, un ex-narcotraficante colombiano, y su libro El cartel de los sapos (2008) en la escena cultural del país. Un análisis de las estrategias discursivas y políticas empleadas en este libro, en el que el tráfico de drogas se define a través de la metáfora de la "bacteria," nos permite entender la construcción de un narrador que devela la hipocresía gubernamental y social con respecto a la reincorporación de los narcotraficantes en la vida civil al mismo tiempo que provoca un debate nacional sobre la diferencia entre historia y ficción.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24575503
Journal Title: Histoire de l'éducation
Publisher: ÉCOLE NORMALE SUPÉRIEURE DE LYON: Institut français de l'Éducation
Issue: i24573366
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Forestier Yann
Abstract: Jean Le Veugle, «Une révolution culturelle, oui. mais laquelle?», Le Monde, 23 mal 1968.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24577182
Journal Title: Max Weber Studies
Publisher: Max Weber Studies
Issue: i24574382
Date: 7 1, 2004
Author(s): Lassman Peter
Abstract: Larmore, The Morals of Modernity, p. 151.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24579691
Journal Title: Max Weber Studies
Publisher: Max Weber Studies
Issue: i24577610
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Djedi Youcef
Abstract: P. Haenni, L'islam de marché, pp. 10-12, 21 sq., 30, 35 sq., 41-44,49, 50, 57, 59
sq., 70-83, 86, 91-93, 95,97-99,102,103-108.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24579976
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i24582422
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Bessy Christian
Abstract: Descombes (2004)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24583127
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24598544
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Yinda André Marie Yinda
Abstract: Voir Clarence E. Walker, Deromanticizing black history : critical essays
and reappraisals, Knoxville, University of Tennessee Press, 1992, ainsi que le
dossier « Réparations, restitutions, réconciliations. Entre Afriques, Europe et
Amériques » dirigé par Bosumil Jewsiewicki, Cahier d'Etudes Africaines,
n° 173-174, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598550
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24598544
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Puig Nicolas
Abstract: Evoquant l'habitude, Ricœur constate qu'elle donne une histoire au
caractère : « une histoire dans laquelle la sédimentation tend à recouvrir et, à la
limite, à abolir l'innovation qui l'a précédée [...]. C'est cette sédimentation qui
confère au caractère la sorte de permanence dans le temps que j'interprète ici
comme recouvrement de Y ipse par l'idem ». In Soi-même comme un autre,
Paris, Seuil, 1990, p. 146.
L'ipseque Philippe Corcuff synthétise comme « la part subjective de l'identité
personnelle » (« Figures de l'individualité, de Marx aux sociologies
contemporaines », Espacestemps.net, web : http://www.espacestemps.net/
documentl390.html, 2005, non paginé) renvoie à la possibilité de n'être que
partiellement investi dans un rôle. On glisse ici du caractère à l'appartenance
pour amener cette idée d'un retrait ou d'une déprise de l'identité stabilisée
autour de symboles rigides en faveur de moments de mise en avant d'une
identité personnelle répondant à un besoin d'individualisation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598552
Journal Title: James Joyce Quarterly
Publisher: University of Tulsa
Issue: i24598607
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Bruns Gerald L.
Abstract: The basic unit of Joyce's fiction is, arguably, the encounter, a reminder of the Dubliners story of that name. This essay explores the many occasions of self-encounter, as when Joyce's characters see themselves in mirrors, in the eyes of others, or in the guise of someone other than they are or appear to be: when Gerty MacDowell projects her "Lady Bountiful" self onto Bloom's erotic gaze, for instance. The regulating idea here (as in Maurice Merleau-Ponty's phenomenology of perception) is that we perceive ourselves through our bodies, but this perception is not an empirical mirror-image; it is an image mediated (and thus transformed) by an array of intentions, memories, desires, and ongoing experiences of ourselves and others, including our experiences of how others see us (something to which Stephen is particularly subject). Joyce's mirror-experiences range from ironic unmasking—"The Dead"—to phantasmagorias—the "Circe" episode of Ulysses, where no image is unreal, and every misnomer (like "Henry Flower") has its moment of truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598622
Journal Title: James Joyce Quarterly
Publisher: University of Tulsa
Issue: i24598683
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Benjamin Roy
Abstract: In this paper, I examine the influence of the Gospel of John on Joyce's aesthetic. My basic claim is that the gospel aided Joyce in charting a middle course between materialism (body without spirit) and spiritualism (spirit without body). After examining the temptations of flying too high (symbolism, mysticism, gnosticism) and flying too low (historicism, realism, materialism), I show how Joyce made use of the Johannine strategies of epiphany and realized eschatology to achieve a synthesis between these extremes. The essay is much indebted to two students of John—Rudolph Bultmann and Franz Mussner—who examined John's peculiar synthesis of fact and allegory. In addition, the scholar Jacques Aubert was indispensable for his analysis of a similar trajectory in Joyce's aesthetic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24598696
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599377
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Zecchini Laetitia
Abstract: M. Darwich, Exil 4, Contrepoint.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599382
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599376
Date: 11 1, 2009
Author(s): Čapek Jakub
Abstract: Cette manière de voir les choses, qui renoue avec la notion du politique de
Hannah Arendt, est chère à certains signataires de la Charte 77. Voir par
exemple les réflexions de Martin Palous ici même, et surtout les textes de
Vâclav Benda sur une « polis parallèle ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599441
Journal Title: Tumultes
Publisher: ÉDITIONS KIMÉ
Issue: i24599447
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Smola Julia
Abstract: Cf. Herbert Paul Grice, « Logic and Conversation », in P. Cole and
J.L.Morgan (dir.), Syntax and Semantics, Academic Press, Inc., vol. Ill,
Speech Acts, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24599458
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences, Inc.
Issue: i24619291
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): HARLEY DAVID N.
Abstract: W. Stukeley, The Healing of Diseases, a Character of the Messiah (London, 1750).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24623265
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24618790
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): SADOWSKY JONATHAN
Abstract: Pressman, Last Resort, p. 132.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24632274
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i24636588
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): SOKOLOWSKI ROBERT
Abstract: Arthur Little, S.J., The Platonic Heritage of Th.omism (Dublin:
Golden Eagle Books, 1950).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24636739
Journal Title: The Journal of Theological Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i24623237
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Collicutt Joanna
Abstract: W. Brueggemann, The Book that Breathes New Life (Minneapolis: Fortress
Press, 2005), p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24637949
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i24640649
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Carrozzo Mario
Abstract: http://www.gherush92.com/newsJt.asp?tipo=A.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24642255
Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24650361
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Valle Paola Della
Abstract: A. Liakos, La crise dans les Balkans et le Nationalisme en Grèce, in «Science(s) Politique(s)», 2-3,1993, pp.
179-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24651692
Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24650922
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Poulot Dominique
Abstract: D. Fabre, Ancienneté, altérité, autochtonie, in D. Fabre (a cura di), Domestiquer l'histoire. Ethnologie des
monuments historiques, Paris, Editions de la Maison des sciences de l'homme, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24653002
Journal Title: Contemporanea
Publisher: il Mulino
Issue: i24651135
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lollini Andrea
Abstract: Ibidem.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24653108
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24649492
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): WATSON STEPHEN H.
Abstract: Paul Klee's art found broad impact upon philosophers of varying commitments, including Hans-Georg Gadamer. Moreover, Klee himself was not only one of the most important artists of aesthetic modernism but one of its leading theoreticians, and much in his work, as in Gadamer's, originated in post-Kantian literary theory's explications of symbol and allegory. Indeed at one point in Truth and Method, Gadamer associates his project for a general "theory of hermeneutic experience" not only with Goethe's metaphysical account of the symbolic but equally with a "rehabilitation" of allegory. In this paper, I examine this position and Gadamer's own use of it in his analysis of Klee's work, contrasting it with that of Walter Benjamin's account of allegory, equally indebted to Goethe and this archive. Finally, I contrast the resulting interpretations of Klee, discussing the implications that evolve for understanding both Gadamer and Benjamin—but equally for understanding Klee's work and, provisionally, the work of art, thus construed, for philosophy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24654833
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24657854
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): FRODEMAN ROBERT
Abstract: Environmentally we seem to be both the victims and the perpetrators of a type of bait and switch: lured into the discussion by one set of intuitions, our interests become redescribed in terms that are intellectually more respectable. Our deepest concerns with the environment are converted into foreign discourses, as we strain to make the languages of science, economics, and interest group politics express our intuitions. The circumscription of environmental philosophy within environmental ethics is one manifestation of this process of bait and switch. 'Corrosive Effects' critiques this process through a case study of acid mine drainage-water pollution resulting from mining activities. An analysis of acid mine drainage reveals the metaphysical and theological roots of many of our environmental problems.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659212
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659492
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Watson Stephen H.
Abstract: 5 186
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659578
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Mei Todd S.
Abstract: Ricoeur, "Work and the Word," in History and Truth, trans. C. A. Kelbley (Evanston: North-
western University Press, 1965), 218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659841
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659485
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Marder Michael
Abstract: Ibid., 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24659848
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Kelly Oliver in
"Forgiveness and Subjectivity," Philosophy Today 47, no. 3 (2003): 280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660187
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Rasmussen David M.
Abstract: my "Justice, Interpretation and the Cosmopolitan Idea," Distincktion 8 (2004): 37-45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660190
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659511
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Dauenhauer Bernard P.
Abstract: his Interpretation Theory: Discourse and the Surplus of Mean-
ing (Fort Worth: Texas Christian University Press, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660191
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659515
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Llewelyn John
Abstract: On the Gift," 66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660224
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24659507
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jung Hwa Yol
Abstract: The Rustle of Language, trans. Richard
Howard [New York: Hill and Wang, 1986], 72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24660238
Journal Title: Indo-Iranian Journal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24663608
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): HILTEBEITEL ALF
Abstract: The superfluity arises from the fact that this "double of Krsna" never has to
take the reins, since Nala is driving; see Hiltebeitel, Rethinking, 232-33. As men-
tioned in n. 7 above, J. Brockington finds this "implausible." For valuable discus-
sion of the "avatära" theme in both epics, and especially in the Rämäyam, see
also Robert P. Goldman and Sally J. Sutherland, trans. The Rämäyam of Välmlki,
Vol. 5: Sundarakäyanda (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1996), 29-33, 69,
73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24663613
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i24666124
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Reynoso Carlos
Abstract: http://www.medieva-
lists.net/2008/09/27/interview-with-natalie-zemon-
davis/
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24671803
Journal Title: Islamic Studies
Publisher: Islamic Research Institute
Issue: i24666682
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): AKRAM MUHAMMAD
Abstract: Schöwbel, "History of Religions," 72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24671816
Journal Title: Philippine Studies: Historical & Ethnographic Viewpoints
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University
Issue: i24666671
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): FRANCISCO JOSE MARIO C.
Abstract: Official collective statements of Catholic bishops construct and promote the imaginary of the Philippines as "Catholic nation." This conflation of the body Catholic and the body politic has served as the church's platform for defending its interests in education against perceived nationalist threats and for engaging social issues. This article traces the genealogy of this discourse and uncovers its distorted account of the Filipino nation's emergence and its deductive pastoral logic. Given the inevitable link between "the religious" and "the secular," the imaginary is challenged today by the call for greater inclusivity and the impact of digital connectivity on community, whether religious or national.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24672316
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24671554
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Chaubet François
Abstract: Diana Pinto, « La conversion de l'intellectuel », in Denis
Lacorne, Jacques Rupnik et Marie-France Toinet, Un siècle de
fascinations et d'aversions, Paris, Hachette, 1986, p. 124-136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673715
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24672910
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Mazurel Hervé
Abstract: Ibid., p. 152.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673881
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i24672910
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Rebreyend Anne-Claire
Abstract: Lettre de Cécile à Etienne, été 1965.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24673888
Journal Title: Revue d'économie politique
Publisher: SIREY
Issue: i24690811
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): VILLEY Daniel
Abstract: Du grec : τό συμφέρον : l'intérêt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24691307
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24698746
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Ciarcia Gaetano
Abstract: Ici, le mot « mémorial » est utilisé à dessein pour indiquer les supports physiques ou les notions
discursives exprimant la volonté de se souvenir des faits du passé en complément de l'adjectif
« mémoriel » qui dénoterait plutôt les qualités spontanées ou les capacités sélectives des activités de
la mémoire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24698752
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Aubin-Boltanski Emma
Abstract: Je remercie le linguiste Jérôme Lentin de m'avoir précisément expliqué l'évolution sémantique
de ce terme.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699246
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699234
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: Même si ce n'était pas l'objet de ce travail, et outre les féconds prolongements de l'anthro-
pologie historique déjà évoqués au début de cet article, il faut rappeler les fructueux échanges
empiriques que les historiens, en particulier pour le Moyen Âge, ont pu avoir depuis vingt ans avec
différents courants de l'anthropologie, qu'il s'agisse par exemple de l'anthropologie juridique dans
le cadre des débats sur la mutation de l'an mil (cf. les travaux de Dominique Barthélémy [1997,
1999]), de l'anthropologie visuelle de chercheurs comme Hans Belting (cf. Schmitt [2002];
ou Baschet [2008]), de l'anthropologie des pratiques d'écriture dans la lignée de Jack Goody
(pour une présentation synthétique de l'historiographie médiévale dans ce domaine, cf. Chastang
[2008]), de l'anthropologie économique (avec Feller, Gramain & Weber [2005]), ou encore des
réflexions de Maurice Godelier ou de Louis Dumont (mobilisés par Iogna-Prat [1998, 2006]).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699250
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24699828
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: Ces réserves sont ponctuelles, en voici quelques exemples. Comme tout binôme, et il n'est pas
le seul dans le livre, le terme de contre-mémoire risque de produire l'impression d'opposition
mécanique ce qui n'est sûrement pas l'intention de l'auteure. Sur un autre registre, malgré tout
mon respect pour l'héritage intellectuel de Pierre Bourdieu, je ne suis pas convaincu par les efforts
de Christine Chivallon d'appliquer son appareil conceptuel à l'analyse du travail de la mémoire.
Puisque son érudition est très impressionnante, l'absence des travaux de Nathan Wachtel surprend
d'autant plus. L'Invention du quotidien de Michel de Certeau est citée, mais je n'ai trouvé aucune
mention de son concept opératoire de « propre », à mon avis très pertinent pour la démarche de
l'auteure. J'estime également que le concept de « lieu de mémoire » de Pierre Nora est trop rapidement
jugé inopérant pour sa recherche.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24699837
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24700246
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Le Voortrekker Monument a été érigé en souvenir des Boers qui entamèrent le grand trek
(« migration ») en 1835, quittant la colonie du Cap, après l'abolition de l'esclavage, pour se diriger
vers le Nord, où certains fonderont les républiques boers du Transvaal et de l'Etat libre d'Orange.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24700256
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707302
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: J. P. van Praag, 'Levensovertuiging, filosofie en wetenschap' ('World-view,
philosophy and science'), valedictory address given on retirement from the Univer-
sity of Leiden, 13th November 1979, Utrecht, Humanistisch Verbond, pp. 9, 7, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707304
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707886
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Dengerink J. D.
Abstract: Het actualistisch historisme onderscheid ik van het traditionalistisch historisme. Het laatste
kent een normatief bindend gezag toe aan het zogenaamd historisch gewordene, dikwijls gezien
als iets dat tot stand gekomen is krachtens een verborgen wetmatigheid, wel geduid als een
voorzienig plan. Het eerste tendeert er naar een normatieve waarde te hechten aan de geschie-
denis van het nu, waarbij dat nu nog meer of minder uitgestrekt kan zijn. Het laatste is derhalve
gekenmerkt door een uitgesproken conservat-isme en neigt tot een verheerlijking van de status
quo. Het eerste vertoont revolutionaire trekken als gevolg van een miskenning van de norm
van de historische continuïteit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707889
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707951
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha M. Elaine
Abstract: It would be more accurate to refer to 'ontic' or 'ontical' in this respect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707953
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24707971
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton Herbert Donald
Abstract: Thus J. van der Hoeven in an article with the telling title, Ontwikkeling in het Iicht van
ontmoeting' [Development in the light of encounter], p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24707974
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708591
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Seerveld Calvin
Abstract: Jean Brun, 'Le voyage dans le temps. De la chronophotographie au Futurisme', Tempo-
ralité et Aliénatkon, p.364.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708593
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708868
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Klapwijk Jacob
Abstract: Ernst Troeltsch distinguished between naive, apologetic and evolutionistic absoluteness.
From the original spontaneity of 'naive absoluteness' and its artificial (partly super-
naturalistic, partly rationalistic) defence as 'apologetic absoluteness' (in the Middle Ages and
in the Enlightenment, respectively) there came forth in Hegel the idea of 'evolutionistic
absoluteness' — an ingenious but untenable attempt to reconcile the solid apologetic
conception of absoluteness of that day with the dynamics of history by presenting it as the
outcome and terminus of historical progression. See Troeltsch, Die Absolutheit des Christen-
tums, 87ff. Cf. J. Klapwijk, Tussen historisme en relativisme, 222-29. At present the belief in
progress and thus also the mix of it with the idea of absoluteness is no longer a subject of
discussion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708873
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Geertsema Hendrik
Abstract: Hendrik G. Geertsema, Van boven naar voren (Kampen: J.H. Kok, 1980), pp. 95-201
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708911
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Olthuis James H.
Abstract: Martin Heidegger, Being and time, trans. John Macquarrie and Edward Robinson (New
York: Harper & Row, 1962), p. 174.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708912
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24708906
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Blosser Philip
Abstract: Steen, Structure, p. 272; cf. above, n. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24708915
Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24709107
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): Labooy Guus H
Abstract: Adv. haereses V, 2, 1; 'non aliéna in dolo diripiens, sed sua propria juste et benigne assumens' (http://
archive.org/stream/sanctiirenaeiep00harvgoog#page/n326/mode/2up)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709183
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709638
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Interestingly enough it appears that the structural features of reconciliation show a re-
versed version of the structural features of evil. Resolving the evil I do toward the other re-
quires that I am able to say what I have done wrong (the reverse of silence and the
tinspeakable), that I recognize my guilt (which is incompatible with splitting) and that I ask for
forgiveness (which is very shameful, but may résolve shame when penitence is accepted and
forgiveness is given); see Glas (in press); Muφhyand Hampton (1988); Volf (1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709643
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Desmond is certainly not blind to the risks of such an endeavor: God and the Betioeen
mentions on the one hand a loss of faith in case of the forlorn mystic who in his 'ardor for the
divine other' is confronted with his own 'lack and nothing' (GB 266), and on the other a
possible usurpation of divine sovereignty (GB 268).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709686
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i24709683
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Glas Gerrit
Abstract: Because they escape precise modal qualification, Troost suggests that insight into disposi-
tions can only be gained in an idea-ruled (idee-matig) understanding, in an idea-regulated 'on
the way' in the transcendental direction of time. For reformational philosophy this raises an
old and prima facie purely theoretical problem: Do the modalities 'continue' right into the
heart? One could paraphrase Troost's view for example such that for him the heart should
primarily be sought 'below' or 'behind' the act structure, and that the dispositions — relative
to this vertical axis — constitute a horizontal layer in which the lower substructures are
interwoven with the act structure. In that case the integration of the lower structures in the act
structure would take place via the dispositions rather than through a direct relationship with
the heart. This notion — for which hints can be found in Dooyeweerd — would in any case
lead to an appreciably more nuanced picture of the 'binding' and 'releasing' of substructures.
If I understand Troost correctly, he would allow this interpretation for the substructures,
though not for the modalities. His caution concerning the 'continuing' of the modalities 'into
the' heart is epistemological: the cosmological concentration of the modal functions in the
heart is a transcendental idea; at best we see dots (the idea-regulated 'on the way' in the
transcendental direction of time), but we should not turn them into lines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709687
Journal Title: Jewish History
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i24708650
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): GOLDBERG SYLVIE ANNE
Abstract: Goldberg, L'histoire et la mémoire de l'histoire.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24709812
Journal Title: Philosophia Reformata
Publisher: Association for Reformational Philosophy
Issue: i24710027
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Griffioen Sander
Abstract: Broad definitions are often used in Christian apologetics. One example: 'Everyone has a
worldview. Whether or not we realize it, we all have certain presuppositions and biases that
affect the way we view all of life and reality. A worldview is like a set of lenses which taint our
vision or alter the way we perceive the world around us.' (http://christianworldview.net/,
consulted Jan. 23, 2012)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24710030
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: Universidad Internacional de La Rioja
Issue: i24710715
Date: 8 1, 2015
Author(s): BERTAGNA Giuseppe
Abstract: The main aim of this article is to offer a critical reflection on the need of rethinking the teachers' professional skills and their academic pathway, given the changes and current transformations (crisis, in its etymological sense). In fact, a series of changes, transformations, are identified and affect directly the educator's comprehension. Amongst others: the transformation of work bound up with the processes of the economic globalization, and the transformation of the learning environments imbued by the TICs; the population growth, a demographic transformation with geopolitics relevance, and finally, as a result from the previous ones, the raise in the migratory flows. Under this context, this paper tries to reconceptualize teachers' training and their depiction as professionals from the view of Gustav Mahler in his statement Tradition is the spreading of fire and not the veneration of ashes. Thereupon, some categories that help in the teaching update, are proposed and explained; such as authority (as reputation or moral authority, role model and, hence, less so as bare exercise of power), the personalization of education, the importance of home community (society), and, lastly, the alternation within school-society and work-study. El objetivo de este trabajo es ofrecer una reflexión acerca de la necesidad de re-pensar la profesionalidad de los docentes y de su itinerario formativo, a la luz los cambios y transformaciones actuales (crisis, en sentido etimológico). En efecto, se identifican una serie de cambios, de transformaciones, que afectan directamente a la comprensión del docente, del enseñante. Entre otros: la transformación del trabajo vinculada a los procesos de la globalización económica y la transformación de los entornos de aprendizaje imbuidos en las TICs; el aumento de la población, la transformación demográfica con trascendencia geopolítica; y por último, y como confluencia de las dos anteriores, el aumento de los flujos migratorios. En este contexto, el trabajo trata de reconceptualizar la formación de los profesores y de su imagen como profesionales desde el enfoque que era expresado por Gustav Mahler en la frase la tradición es el mantenimiento del fuego y no la adoración de sus cenizas. Así, se proponen y se explican algunas categorías que ayudan a la actualización de la docencia hoy, tales como: la autoridad (como prestigio o autoridad moral, ejemplo, y no tanto como mero ejercicio del poder), la personalización de la enseñanza, la trascendencia de la comunidad de origen (a la sociedad) y por último, la alternancia entre escuela y sociedad, trabajo y estudio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24711293
Journal Title: Revista Española de Pedagogía
Publisher: Universidad Internacional de La Rioja
Issue: i24710732
Date: 8 1, 2016
Author(s): GARCÍA DEL DUJO Ángel
Abstract: The struggles for recognition, focused on cultural and identity issues until recently, are returning to public arenas in the form of struggles for legal recognition, precisely when we are witnessing, in the context of the post-2008 economic recession, a downward review of citizenship rights, in particular social and labour rights. This article discusses this issue by: first, associating education to the struggles for legal recognition, using the «moral grammar of social conflicts» of Axel Honneth; second, showing how education, connected to empowerment, may have an interesting role in the qualification of social actors involved in these struggles; third, defining the major articulations of this educational role in terms of empowerment. The article concludes by demonstrating the strategic role of empowerment, when promoted by education, in the struggles against the recession of subjective or citizenship rights. Las luchas por el reconocimiento, centradas hasta hace poco en aspectos culturales e identitarios, vuelven al dominio público en forma de luchas por el reconocimiento legal, precisamente cuando estamos asistiendo, en el contexto de la recesión económica posterior a 2008, a una revisión a la baja de los derechos de ciudadanía, particularmente de los derechos sociales y laborales. Este artículo aborda este problema: primero, asociando la educación con las luchas por el reconocimiento legal, en base a la «gramática moral de los conflictos sociales» de Axel Honneth; segundo, mostrando cómo la educación, conectada con el empoderamiento, puede desempeñar un interesante papel en la cualificación de los actores sociales involucrados en estas luchas y, en tercer lugar, definiendo las principales expresiones de este papel de la educación en términos de empoderamiento. El artículo concluye demostrando el estratégico papel del empoderamiento, cuando es potenciado por la educación, en las luchas contra la recesión de los derechos subjetivos o de ciudadanía.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24711385
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24713074
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lutterbach Hubertus
Abstract: Dazu sei verwiesen auf die Monografie von Hubertus Lutterbach, Kinder und Chris-
tentum. Der religiöse Beitrag zur UN-Kinderrechtskonvention (im Druck).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24713089
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24713074
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Konz Britta
Abstract: Metz, Glaube, aaO. (Anm.4), 115.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24713091
Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715389
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Morier-Genoud Damien
Abstract: Benjamin (2000): 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716509
Journal Title: Extrême-Orient Extrême-Occident
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes
Issue: i24715391
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Vuilleumier Victor
Abstract: La destruction symbolique du corps (similaire à la promotion de la latinisation,
latinx.ua 拉丁イヒ）chez Lu Xun est différente des représentations dualisantes de la
Nouvelle littérature des années 1920, opposant à l'âme souffrante le corps déprécié,
qui expriment ainsi directement leurs frustrations. Pourtant, Lu Xun n'est pas un
« contempteur du corps », même si ceiui-ci tend à servir surtout « l'esprit » (voir Gao
2007 :181). Il vise le Kôrper, non le Leib, insistant avec Nietzsche sur le processus
de vie (leben) et le rejet du désir de mort, mais rejetant l'esthétique du corps et du
surhomme. Lu Xun combat le corps comme expression figée et obstacle à la vie, pour
contrer la souffrance de cette impossibilité à régénérer la voix. Cependant, le corps
littéraire, par sa destruction symbolique et sa mise à distance comme signe, laisse
soupçonner une ultime aliénation du corps. Car, si le corps individuel comme « lieu
ou scène de la manifestation [d'un] trouble » est « premier signifiant mis en œuvre par
le langage » (StarobinsKi 1981:273), comment comprendre qu il soit tu ？ C'est peut-
être la dernière souffrance, celle du corps muet, obligé de demeurer un signe statique
interdit de parole individuelle, au nom de la dénonciation du silence collectif et du
refus de l'épanchement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24716534
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24715377
Date: 10 1, 2015
Author(s): BERNAL ALEJANDRA
Abstract: Desde modalidades enunciativas contrastantes, vinculadas a sus respectivos contextos de producción, En estado de memoria (1990) de Tununa Mercado y Los topos (2008) de Félix Bruzzone funcionan a contracorriente del canon narrativo de la memoria de postdictadura argentina. Ambos relatos abandonan toda pretensión de verdad histórica a favor de construcciones subjetivas inestables, sin renunciar a la dimensión ética del trabajo colectivo de rememoración, sino inscribiéndola precisamente en el acto de denunciar discursos, hábitos o dispositivos encaminados a hacer del sujeto de memoria un vehículo de dicha pretensión de verdad. Si se tiene en cuenta la doble función restitutiva y prospectiva de la alegoría, central en ambos relatos, se hace evidente la tematización del riesgo de convertir el deber ético de la memoria en imperativo esencialista. La lectura alegórica resuelve igualmente la aparente paradoja (restitución por textualización vs destitución por somatización) que surge al leer ambos textos como síntomas de la aceptación o negación del imperativo de duelo. En última instancia, ambos relatos suponen una disociación momentánea entre la escritura como praxis subversiva y la literatura como institución de memoria cultural, mecanismo metaficticio que, siguiendo a Guy Debord, denomino détournement mnemónico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24717171
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i24715377
Date: 10 1, 2015
Author(s): LEFERE ROBIN
Abstract: La noche de los tiempos (2009), de Antonio Muñoz Molina, constituye una novela histórica que debe ser comprendida en función del debate español sobre la "memoria histórica". El presente estudio empieza rastreando los artículos comprometidos del autor que preceden y preparan la novela (un epitexto con efecto paratextual), y pone de relieve cómo forjan un mito republicano que se reivindica no solo en tanto recuperación de una herencia sino como referencia para enjuiciar el presente y fundamentar un nuevo porvenir. Luego, examina en qué medida y de qué manera la novela, en especial gracias a las especificidades del pensamiento ficticio, constituye una aportación original: por una parte, con respecto a dichos artículos, cuyo ideario acaba socavando al mismo tiempo que lo exalta, y, por otra, de cara a la memoria controvertida de la Guerra Civil, superando los paradigmas habituales del reconocimiento y de la instrumentalización hacia la construcción de un discurso complejo y no partidista, caracterizado por una representación densísima y polifónica, la ejemplaridad filosófica y un metadiscurso tan crítico como autocrítico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24717177
Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Issue: i24721305
Date: 3 1, 2016
Author(s): Herrera-Racionero Paloma
Abstract: Herrera-Racionero
y Lizcano (2012: 81-84).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721310
Journal Title: Research in Phenomenology
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers, Inc.
Issue: i24721810
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Vassilicos Basil
Abstract: In Matter and Memory, Bergson examines the relationship between perception and memory, the status of consciousness in its relation to the brain, and more generally, a possible conjunction of matter and mind. Our reading focuses in particular on his understanding of the evanescent presence of the present and of its debt vis-à-vis the "unconscious" consciousness of a "virtual" past. We wish to show that the Bergsonian version of a critique of "the metaphysics of presence" is, for all that, an offshoot of a Platonic type of metaphysics. It is true that Bergson departs from traditional stand-points on the side of a self-sufficient and original present and a form of presence to which the transparency of consciousness would confer the character of immediate evidence. All the same, it can hardly be claimed that his rehabilitation of the past and the unconscious opens up new perspectives on how forgetting and death are bound up with the work of memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24721816
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Derecho
Publisher: FACULTAD DE DERECHO PONTIFICIA UNIVERSIDAD CATÓLICA DE CHILE
Issue: i24721887
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Caldera Cristóbal Carmona
Abstract: Guastini (2001) p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24722062
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739848
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Langlois Claude
Abstract: Revue : La science catholique, revue des questions religieuses [puis] des sciences sacrées
et profanes, Lyon, Paris, Delhomme et Briguet [puis] Arras, Paris, Sueur-Charruey, 1886-1906.
Fusion ultérieure : La Revue des sciences ecclésiastiques et La Science catholique (1906-1910).
Ouvrages : John Augustine Zahm, chanoine régulier de la Sainte-Croix, pseud. Le Père H. J.
Mozans, Science catholique et savants catholiques [Catholic science and catholic scientists,
1893], traduit de l'anglais par M. l'abbé J. Flageolet, Paris, P. Lethielleux, 1895. A. Jeanniard
du Dot, L'hypnotisme et la science catholique, Paris, Librairie Bloud et Barrai, 1898, 1900.
Théophile Ortolan, Rivalités scientifiques : ou la science catholique et la prétendue impartialité
des historiens, I- La manie du dénigrement, II- Fausses réputations, Paris, Bloud et Barrai,
Collection : Science et religion : Études pour le temps présent, 1900.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739862
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739884
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Voir mon étude à paraître : « Das Spiel der Transzendenz: „Trans-Aszendenz", „Trans-
Deszendenz", „Trans-Passibilität", „Trans-Possibilität" » in : Ingolf U. Dalfert (éd.), Herme-
neutik der Transzendenz.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739891
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739884
Date: 3 1, 2015
Author(s): Portier Philippe
Abstract: Claude Lefort, « Permanence du théologico-politique », art. précité, p. 59-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24739900
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Ramírez Camilo
Abstract: La Comisión Valech fue creada el 26 de septiembre del 2003 por el Presidente Lagos
para elaborar otro informe oficial que esta vez reconociera a las víctimas de la dictadura que
habían sufrido la privación de su libertad y la tortura, y permitiera gestionar algunas medidas
de reparación.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740002
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Varlik Selami
Abstract: Arkoun propose de promouvoir des lectures qui « intègrent, à la fois l'exigence théo-
logique des croyants, l'impératif philologique de l'historien positif (mais non positiviste), la
perspective explicative de l'anthropologue et le contrôle critique du philosophe ». M. Arkoun,
1982 : XXII.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740013
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: ÉDITIONS DE L'ÉCOLE DES HAUTES ÉTUDES EN SCIENCES SOCIALES
Issue: i24739982
Date: 6 1, 2015
Author(s): Kreil Aymon
Abstract: Les travaux de A. Le Renard se situent dans la ligne des débats sur les modalités de
constitution possible pour un « féminisme islamique » (cf. S. Latte Abdallah, 2010, pour une
synthèse de ces débats).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24740014
Journal Title: Atlantis
Publisher: The Spanish Association of Anglo-American Studies (AEDEAN)
Issue: i24757752
Date: 12 1, 2015
Author(s): Villegas-López Sonia
Abstract: In From Beast to the Blonde, Marina Warner studies the status of fairy tales as historical documents which
give an account of women's daily experiences, as they illustrate their particular rites of passage and the relevance
of maternal figures in their lives. The resonance of Mother Goose is taken by Warner "either as a historical source,
or a fantasy of origin" which she can trace into ancient traditions, like the Islamic or the Christian, and which
adds credibility to the stories (1994, xxiii).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24757782
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: ARMAND COLIN
Issue: i24776583
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): HARTER PIERRE-JULIEN
Abstract: Un grand merci à Gareth Sparham et à David Rawson pour leur remarques
et leur critiques qui ont permis d'améliorer le contenu de cet article.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24776605
Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: e24798115
Date: September 29, 1993
Author(s): Clasquin-Johnson Michel
Abstract: The Earth’s Children series of prehistoric novels by Jean M. Auel, beginning with
The Clan of the Cave Bear(1980) and culminating inThe Land of Painted Caves(2010), contains a compelling vision of two species of human practising two utterly different kinds of religion. On the one hand there are the Neanderthals, who practice a pure totemism, while on the other there are the anatomically modern humans, whose religion centres on the worship of an Earth Goddess. Auel’s heroine, Ayla, straddles both religious spheres, but she herself initiates a crisis within the anatomically modern human religious world. This article examines the different fictional religions in these popular and influential books, considers the sources Auel drew on in creating them and considers the influence these books may exert on public understanding of religion, including among future cohorts of students of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798121
Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: e24798420
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Blond Louis
Abstract: By inquiring into the translatability of Judaism and philosophy, we reawaken an ancient problem that asks after philosophy’s relation with religion:
What has Athens to do with Jerusalem?Translation is a rejuvenated means of wrestling with this irksome question, which seeks to understand how multiple approaches to meaning and being can exist concurrently or whether any interaction forfeits multiplicity for the primacy of one form over all others. The specific issue that linguistic versions of the problem address is whether or not the languages that Judaism and philosophy speak are separate and distinct and if those distinctions are established on deeper, non-linguistic ground. For this reason, translation not only raises the problem of articulacy and context in interlingual translations, it also alludes to an ontological or metaphysical separation that speaks of different, non-shared worlds. Whether or not a translation theory addresses, repairs or upholds the opposition between religion and philosophy is in question, and translation becomes a vehicle for discussing what Jerusalem has to offer Athens and what Athens has for Jerusalem. In this essay, I examine the translation problem as an attempt to repair or re-gloss the relation between Judaism and philosophy by way of Michael Fagenblat’s recovery of Emmanuel Levinas’ thought in his work,A Covenant of Creatures: Levinas’s Philosophy of Judaism(2010).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24798426
Journal Title: Journal for the Study of Religion
Publisher: Murray Coombes Publishers
Issue: e24805687
Date: June 1, 1991
Author(s): Mason Garth
Abstract: In this article I examine Philip Qipa (P.Q.) Vundla’s Moral Rearmament-inspired (MRA) politics with a view to explicating the previously hidden currents at work in his political activism. In my analysis, I draw on the theoretical frameworks of Paul Ricoeur and Homi Bhabha. In terms of these conceptual foundations, I investigate Vundla’s involvement in two foundational events in the history of the South African struggle, namely the school boycott of 1955 and the bus boycott of 1957. The official history of these two events, written by social historians such as Tom Lodge, interprets them as the dawn of mass opposition against apartheid. However, I contend that a closer analysis of these two events via biographical material reveals a more complex history, implicitly connected to the person of P.Q. Vundla and his politics of negotiation and finding common ground between opposing ideologies. Vundla stands out within this context because he was a nonconforming ANC leader, who disagreed with the way the party leadership approached political activism. His approach was driven by MRA values, which sought political solutions through dialogue and aimed to benefit all communities within South Africa. Vundla can be seen as an early forerunner of the bridge-building politics of Nelson Mandela. It is hoped that, by examining the role of MRA values in Vundla’s activism, a fuller, more complex account of politics in the 1950s can be arrived at.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24805696
Journal Title: Strategic Management Journal
Publisher: John Wiley and Sons
Issue: i342456
Date: 3 1, 1975
Author(s): Zaleznik Danny
Abstract: Many parallels can be drawn between organizational and individual pathologies. We believe that the fantasies of top executives and the neurotic styles to which they give rise are important determinants of the nature of organizational dysfunctions. This is particularly true in centralized organizations where the top executives have a major impact upon organizational climate, structure, strategy and even the selection of the environment; and, where organizational recruitment and promotion processes ensure uniformity, or at least conformity, among the top ranks of executives. Using an empirically derived taxonomy, we have isolated five common pathological organizational types and related each of these to the fantasies and neurotic styles of their top executives. Each type is shown to reflect a large number of elements of structure and strategy that are consistent with and probably caused by the neurotic style of the cadre of top executives. The types are called paranoid, compulsive, histrionic, depressive and schizoid. Implications for management research and organizational change are discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2486009
Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Constitucional
Publisher: CENTRO DE ESTUDIOS POLÍTICOS Y CONSTITUCIONALES
Issue: i24886035
Date: 8 1, 2010
Author(s): LUTHER JÖRG
Abstract: BVerfG, 1 BvR 2150/08, 4.11.2009, www.bverfg.de/entscheidungen/rs20091104_lbvr
215008.html, sobre el recurso presentado por una persona posteriormente fallecida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24886059
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: REIMER
Issue: i24888256
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Malefakis Alexis
Abstract: Fieldwork is sometimes marked by experiences of frictions and frustration. Fieldwork with mobile street vendors in an African city may confront the fieldworker with the problem of locating the 'field' and attaining access to it, both spatially and temporally. As I will show by reference to my fieldwork with a group of shoe vendors on the streets of Dar es Salaam, Tanzania, the frictions that occurred at the beginning of my fieldwork nevertheless ignited a process of ethnographic knowledge-gaining that led me to understand the importance of temporality and rhythmicity for the shoe vendors' practices. In their active engagement with the spatio-temporal landscape of the city, the street vendors organised their practices as an experiential rhythm that unfolded as sequences of rising and subsequently declining cognitive and corporeal tensions. These rhythms did not flow smoothly, but were necessarily interspersed with disturbances and frictions by the rhythms of other pedestrians in the streets, whose attention the street vendors tried to attain.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24888264
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i24890799
Date: 6 1, 2016
Author(s): Chabal Emile
Abstract: Chabal,
A Divided Republic, ch. 1-4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24891225
Journal Title: Region
Publisher: Slavica on behalf of the Institute of Russian Studies at the Hankuk University of Foreign Studies
Issue: i24896621
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Echevskaia Olga
Abstract: Donald E. Polk-
inghorne, Narrative Knowing and the Human Sciences (Albany: SUNY Press, 1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24896624
Journal Title: Diplomatic History
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i24912290
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): LEFFLER MELVYN P.
Abstract: I am referring to the influential essay by Charles S. Maier, "Marking Time: The
Historiography of International Relations," in The Past Before Us: Contemporary Historical Writ-
ing in the United States, ed. Michael Kämmen (Ithaca, 1980), 355-87; and to the prize-winning
book by Richard E. Neustadt and Ernest R. May, Thinking in Time: The Uses of History for
Decision-Makers (New York, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/24912293
Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i322601
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Popławski Brian A.
Abstract: Narodowiec [Dmowski], "W naszym obozie," Przegla̧d Wszechpolski, 1901: 421-
22. Emphasis mine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2500129
Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002117
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Cheney Jim
Abstract: Biddy Martin and Chandra Talpade Mohanty, "Feminist Politics: What's Home Got to Do
With It?" in Feminist Studies/Critical Studies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002122
Journal Title: Journal of Feminist Studies in Religion
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i25002165
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Sands Kathleen M.
Abstract: Karl Rahner, Foundations of Christian Faith (New York: Seabury Press, 1978), 22.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25002168
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i25010803
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Berger, Harry
Abstract: 42
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25010805
Journal Title: Classical Antiquity
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i25010989
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Louden Bruce
Abstract: "Homer as Oral Poet," HSCP 72 [1968] 1-46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25010993
Journal Title: The Catholic Historical Review
Publisher: The Catholic University of America
Issue: i25025058
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Standaert Nicolas
Abstract: The Conquest of America: The Question of the Other,
trans. Richard Howard (New York, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25025062
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342877
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): Becker Larry
Abstract: Phenomenology and the Human Sciences
(Pittsburgh, 1963).
Phenomenology and the Human Sciences
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504325
Journal Title: Studia Musicologica Academiae Scientiarum Hungaricae
Publisher: Akadémiai Kiadó
Issue: i25047383
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Richter Pál
Abstract: Richter Pál: "Bitematikus stratégiák szonáta formájú
tételekben" [Bithematic Strategies of Sonata Form Movements], Magyar Zene 39/2,2001, pp. 161-162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25047387
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342936
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricoeur Hayden
Abstract: Ricoeur's latest work, Time and Narrative (Chicago, 1983).
Ricoeur
Time and Narrative
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504969
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University Press
Issue: i342934
Date: 10 1, 1947
Author(s): Alonso Suzanne
Abstract: Paul Zumthor, "Autobiography in the Middle Ages," 29
29
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2504985
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342951
Date: 12 1, 1972
Author(s): Hexter C. Behan
Abstract: Time and Narrative, 60-64
60
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505043
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342962
Date: 10 1, 1963
Author(s): Huizinga Perez
Abstract: J. Huizinga, "A Definition of the Concept of History," in Philosophy and History, ed. Ray-
mond Klibansky and H. J. Paton [1936] (New York, 1963), 8-9.
Huizinga
A Definition of the Concept of History
8
Philosophy and History
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505051
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342947
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): MacIntyre F. R.
Abstract: A. MacIntyre, "The Relationship of Philosophy to Its Past," in Philosophy in History, ed.
R. Rorty, J. B. Schneewind, and Q. Skinner (Cambridge, 1984), 31-49.
MacIntyre
The Relationship of Philosophy to Its Past
31
Philosophy in History
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505129
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Harjo Kerwin Lee
Abstract: Joy Harjo, "Grace," in In Mad Love and War (Middletown, Conn., 1993), 1.
Harjo
Grace
1
In Mad Love and War
1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505403
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342983
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Platt Fred
Abstract: Gerald M. Platt, "Sociology: Origins, Orientations, Crises,"Annals of Scholarship9(1992),
427-436.
Platt
427
9
Annals of Scholarship
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505404
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1981
Author(s): Goekjian Richard T.
Abstract: Bann, ibid., 367.
367
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505462
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1985
Author(s): Sternberg Nancy
Abstract: Meir Sternberg in The Poetics of Biblical Narrative (Bloomington, Ind., 1985), 7-13
Sternberg
7
The Poetics of Biblical Narrative
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505463
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342993
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Carr Steven G.
Abstract: Ibid., 179-180.
179
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505467
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Meiyi Prasenjit
Abstract: Yang, "From Gender Erasure to Gender Difference," for the PRC's "state feminism."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505487
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Nelson Chris
Abstract: J. Nelson, A. Megill, and D. McCloskey, "Rhetoric of Inquiry," in The Rhetoric of the Human
Sciences, ed. Megill and McCloskey, 3-18.
Nelson
Rhetoric of Inquiry
3
The Rhetoric of the Human Sciences
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505488
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342994
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Mink John H.
Abstract: L. Mink, "Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument," in The Writing of History: Literary
Form and Historical Understanding, ed. R. H. Canary and H. Kozicki (Madison, Wisc., 1978), 129-
149.
Mink
Narrative Form as a Cognitive Instrument
129
The Writing of History: Literary Form and Historical Understanding
1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505489
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342984
Date: 2 1, 1957
Author(s): Jaspers David
Abstract: Collingwood, "The Philosophy of the Christian
Religion," Sept. 29, 1920, Dep 1, 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505516
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1899
Author(s): Bosanquet Martyn P.
Abstract: Bernard Bosanquet, The Philosophical Theory of the State (London, 1899).
Bosanquet
The Philosophical Theory of the State
1899
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505525
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342974
Date: 10 1, 1957
Author(s): Nietzsche Wulf
Abstract: Friedrich Nietzsche, The Use and Abuse of History, transl. Adrian Collins
(Indianapolis, 1957).
Nietzsche
The Use and Abuse of History
1957
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505526
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342965
Date: 5 1, 1986
Author(s): van Fraasen Andrew P.
Abstract: Ibid., 139-142
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505536
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i342990
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Nipperdey Lucian
Abstract: Thomas Nipperdey, "Historismus und Historismuskritik heute," in Nipperdey, Gesell-
schaft, Theorie, Kultur (Gottingen, 1976), 59-73.
Nipperdey
Historismus und Historismuskritik heute
59
Gesellschaft, Theorie, Kultur
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505548
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342980
Date: 2 1, 1992
Author(s): Bloch Ignacio
Abstract: M. Bloch, The Historian's Craft, transl. P. Putnam (Manchester, Eng., 1992), 39.
Bloch
39
The Historian's Craft
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505581
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342968
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): LaCapra Dale S.
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra, Rethinking
Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, N. Y., 1983).
LaCapra
Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505607
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wesleyan University
Issue: i342982
Date: 10 1, 1952
Author(s): Shakespeare Jan R.
Abstract: Ibid., 126.
126
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2505620
Journal Title: Journal of Japanese Studies
Publisher: The Society for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25064644
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Kono Shion
Abstract: Nakamura Shin'ichirō, Kimura Kenkadō no saron (Tokyo: Shinchōsha, 2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25064647
Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066776
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Brashier K. E.
Abstract: Rappaport, Ritual and Religion in the Making of Humanity, p. 394.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066779
Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Huntington Rania
Abstract: "Yihonglou shi cao xu" [Unrepresented Characters], in Chunzaitang zawen wubian, 4:6.25b-26a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066855
Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i25066852
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Kurita Kyoko
Abstract: The Content of the Form, p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25066858
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i25068549
Date: 10 1, 1998
Author(s): Gross Robert F.
Abstract: Wolfgang Sohlich, "Allegory in the Technological Age: A Case Study of Ibsen's The Wild
Duck," Journal of Dramatic Theory and Criticism 6 (Spring 1992): 99-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25068554
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25073957
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Randels, George D.
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to discuss rival views of business and business ethics in terms of narrative. I want to show that we can tell various stories about business, and that our worldview narratives shape our accounts of business. These narratives not only involve description, but contain normative ramifications. We can only act within the world that we perceive. To evaluate competing narratives, I suggest dialectical comparison of the narratives with important values. The second part of the paper discusses five distinct genres of worldview narratives and their implications for business: homo economicus, libertarian, conservative, liberal, and religio-philosophical.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25073962
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25075125
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Mellema Gregory
Abstract: Much light can be shed on events which characterize or underlie scandals at firms such as Enron, Arthur Andersen, Worldcom, ImClone, and Tyco by appealing to the notion of ethical distance. Various inquiries have highlighted the difficulties in finding or identifying particular individuals to blame for particular events, and in the context of situations as complex as these it can sometimes be helpful to investigate the comparative ethical distance of various participants in these events. In this essay I offer a characterization of ethical distance in terms of moral responsibility, and in doing so I describe and illustrate the rough inverse correlation between moral distance and degrees of moral responsibility. I urge that the concept of ethical distance is capable of shedding light upon situations in which several people are involved in bringing about a state of affairs. I then argue that moral responsibility cannot do justice to all situations involving ethical distance. When the distance between a person and a state of affairs grows sufficiently large, a different type of treatment is called for, and I introduce the notion of moral taint to describe the moral status of agents in these situations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25075132
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25075156
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Arenas Daniel
Abstract: Based on the experience of a course taught by the authors, this paper seeks to show that an adequate use of IT in the teaching of a Business Etchics (BE) course depends on clarifying the assumptions about ethics and the place of the course within a programme. For this purpose it explains how IT can be used to strengthen a view of BE based on dialogue and mutual learning and it encourages the combination between virtual and face-to-face teaching. Finally, the paper examines the relationship between the use of IT, individual learning processes and communities of practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25075168
Journal Title: The Massachusetts Review
Publisher: The Massachusetts Review, Inc.
Issue: i25090461
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Jacobson Joanne
Abstract: Shoshana Felman, "Education and Crisis, or the Vicissitudes of
Teaching," American Imago 48 (Spring 1991), p. 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25090469
Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i25098007
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Heisler Martin O.
Abstract: Societies, like individuals, strive to have positive self-concepts. They endow stories of their origin and associate their course through history with ethical principles that attest to who they are and how they want to be seen. Such principles define the society for its members and for the world at large. But all societies must at some time confront evidence of actions undertaken in their name that violate their fundamental principles and conflict with their desired self-image. Following a glance at the basic elements of the politics of history and identity, the author suggests two sources of the tensions between "bad acts" and positive self-concepts. Both relate to shifts in developmental time. First, actions not considered wrong when they were undertaken in the past are inconsistent with current expectation. Second, transsocietal differences in normative frameworks lead to cross-boundary criticisms of behavior in which the critics' societies likely engaged at an earlier time. Accusations or criticisms generally meet with defensive, often hostile responses. Hypocrisy tends to rule in most cases, with little or no normative learning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25098022
Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i25115452
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Templeton Alice
Abstract: What is the use of writing poems against war if they reenact rather than alter the binaries and brutalities of the war imagination they claim to protest? Why does so much contemporary war poetry only compound war's depleting effect instead of offering us energy for resistance? In The Life of Poetry (1949), Muriel Rukeyser defines poetry as a vital but underused national resource for a culture dominated by war. As a creative transfer of energy, poetry complicates and resists habits of imagination that sustain war. Using Rukeyser's analysis to contrast a representative poem from the volume Poets Against the War (2003) to several poems by Forche, Celan, James Wright, Blake, Yeats, Oppen, and Levertov, this paper discusses ways in which poetry about war and wartime can provide useful, life-giving energy without replicating the very violences it claims to oppose.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25115458
Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i25115472
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rodden John
Abstract: This essay posits the conceptual rudiments of "rhetoric of narrative." Approaching contemporary narrative theory according to the classical trivium, the essay explores what and how stories mean and argue. It focuses on the relevance and value of the rhetorical tradition for illuminating distinctive features of a "rhetoric of narrative," showing how a "rhetoric" of narrative builds upon a "grammar" and a "logic" of narrative. Ultimately the essay posits that narratives can be positioned at some point along a continuum represented by poles roughly characterized as "aesthetic" and "ideological," with propagandistic argument lying at the latter extreme. The chief literary example for applying the conceptual distinctions emerging from our investigations is George Orwell's Nineteen Eighty-Four.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25115482
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i25123273
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Galavielle Jean-Pierre
Abstract: The myth of an economy where nobody could have a predominant position, has lost its credibility. The presentiment of a high risk of social explosion makes companies undertake tentative moral legitimation. Thus, a new paradigm develops according to which the firm has to care for the satisfaction of public interest if "it wants to try to win forgiveness" for misbehavior towards the decorum rules of the atomicity of competition. Thus, there is a wave of "business ethics industry" building up. However, the stock exchange performances considered as ethical, are not different from others! The market does not seem to be able to say why it might be interesting to invest in stock considered as ethical. Moreover, opinion polls reveal a very significant discrepancy between the characterization of "the responsible company" as defined by itself or by notation agencies and, on the other hand, the hierarchy of criteria according to the answers of polled people. When companies and agencies favor sustainable development and good governance, rejecting child labor and so on, polled people consider that the paramount criterion of ethical conduct is personnel management. The problem is right here. Such is the view of a positively critical economist, situated at the point where macroeconomics meets corporate management.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25123278
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25133559
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: J. Revel (« Pratiques du contemporain et régimes d'historicité », Le Genre
humain, 2000, 35: Actualités du contemporain: 13-20
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25133563
Journal Title: Historia Mexicana
Publisher: El Centro de Estudios Históricos de El Colegio de México
Issue: i25139862
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): López Antonio Irigoyen
Abstract: AGNEM, Prot. del notario Juan Bautista Espinosa, ff. 139v.-140v., 19-
11-1674.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25139864
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i25146120
Date: 8 1, 2007
Author(s): Kärreman Dan
Abstract: This paper addresses human resources management (HRM) systems and practices in a large multinational management consultancy firm. The firm invests considerable resources in HRM, and is frequently praised by employees for its accomplishments in hiring, developing, and promotion. However, this general faith in HRM does not align particularly well with employees' experiences and perceptions of the specific HRM practices in the firm. The paper critically interprets the meaning and the functions of the HRM system and the beliefs supporting it. The paper suggests a reinterpretation of HRM systems and practices based on a cultural-symbolic perspective. It introduces the concepts of excess ceremonialism, identity projects, and aspirational control to highlight and interpret the significance of organizational symbolism in accounting for the role of HRM systems and practices, and the various effects of HRM systems and practices on employee identity and compliance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25146131
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i25146196
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Worline Monica C.
Abstract: On September 11, 2001, the passengers and crew members aboard Flight 93 responded to the hijacking of their airplane by organizing a counterattack against the hijackers. The airplane crashed into an unpopulated field, causing no damage to human lives or national landmarks beyond the lives of those aboard the airplane. We draw on this story of courageous collective action to explore the question of what makes this kind of action possible. We propose that to take courageous collective action, people need three narratives-a personal narrative that helps them understand who they are beyond the immediate situation and manage the intense emotions that accompany duress, a narrative that explains the duress that has been imposed upon them sufficiently to make moral and practical judgments about how to act, and a narrative of collective action-and the resources that make the creation of these narratives feasible. We also consider how the creation of these narratives is relevant to courageous collective action in more common organizational circumstances, and identify how this analysis suggests new insights into our understanding of the core framing tasks of social movements, ways in which social movement actors draw on social infrastructure, the role of discourse and morality in social movements, the formation of collective identity, and resource mobilization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25146198
Journal Title: U.S. Catholic Historian
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i25154949
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Talar C. J. T.
Abstract: Terrence W. Tilley,
History, Theology and Faith: Dissolving the Modern Problematic (Maryknoll, N.Y.: Orbis, 2004). 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25154952
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157076
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: 1990, 11-35 et 60-72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157079
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i25157122
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: Glissant 1990 : 46
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25157129
Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25162277
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Natij Salah
Abstract: Goethe, cité par Pierre Bertaux, « Goethe », Encyclopédia Universalis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162281
Journal Title: Archiv für Musikwissenschaft
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25162377
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Strohm Reinhard
Abstract: Ernst Cassirer, Die Philosophie der Aufklärung, Tübingen, 1932, Kap. 7.II: Die klassizisti-
sche Ästhetik und das Problem der Objektivität des Schönen, S. 375
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25162379
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i25165879
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Libesman Heidi
Abstract: The focus of this article is the theory of integration advanced by Alan Cairns in his book, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal peoples and the Canadian State". Cairns' theory has had a mixed reception since its publication. Like much scholarship and public policy in the Aboriginal rights field, "Citizens Plus" has attracted strong proponents and opponents. At present "Citizens Plus" remains one of the primary competitors vying for influence in guiding the postcolonial reconfiguration of the relationship between Aboriginal peoples, the Canadian state and civil society on terms of justice that may be perceived as legitimate by both Aboriginal and non-Aboriginal peoples. The prime alternative, as conceived by both Cairns and his critics, is the nation-to-nation constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples. The author provides a political theoretical reading of "Citizens Plus". She seeks to disclose the normative and conceptual structure of Cairns' argument and to situate Cairns' theory in the context of debates concerning the future of Aboriginal peoples and the constitution of Canada. This reading foregrounds an alternative interpretation of the relationship between "Citizens Plus" and the constitutional vision of the Royal Commission on Aboriginal Peoples, which makes it possible to see them as complementary rather than opposed constitutional visions. The author also raises broader questions concerning the reasons for continuing the search, at the heart of Cairns' work, for a post-colonial theory and praxis of normative integration in diverse societies, and the conditions of the possibility of such a theory and praxis. Ultimately the author argues that whether one agrees or disagrees with Cairns' prescription, at a minimum "Citizens Plus" should be understood as raising a fundamental question to which multinational constitutional theory must respond. /// Le présent article a pour objet d'examiner la théorie avancée par Alan Cairns dans son ouvrage, "Citizens Plus: Aboriginal Peoples and the Canadian State". Cette théorie est loin de faire l'unanimité; comme beaucoup d'autres ouvrages ou initiatives dans le domaine des droits autochtones, "Citizens Plus" a ses partisans et ses détracteurs. À l'heure actuelle, "Citizens Plus" demeure l'une des principales approches possibles de la redéfinition postcoloniale des relations entre les peuples autochtones et l'État et la société civile canadiens sur le fondement de conditions justes dont la légitimité est susceptible d'être reconnue autant par les peuples autochtones que par les non-autochtones. La vision de relations de nation à nation, telle qu'exprimée par la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones, est, selon Cairns ainsi que ses détracteurs, la principale alternative à "Citizens Plus". Dans le présent article, l'auteure interprète "Citizens Plus" dans une optique de théorie politique. Elle cherche à faire ressortir la structure normative et conceptuelle de l'argument de Cairns et à situer la théorie de Cairns dans le contexte des débats concernant l'avenir des peuples autochtones et de la constitution canadienne. L'auteure veut ainsi attirer l'attention sur une autre interprétation possible de la relation entre "Citizens Plus" et la vision de la Commission royale sur les peuples autochtones. Selon cette interprétation, il s'agit de visions complémentaires plutôt que contradictoires. L'auteure soulève également des questions plus générales, concernant les raisons de poursuivre la recherche d'une théorie et d'une praxie d'intégration normative au sein de sociétés empreintes de diversité, ainsi que les conditions de la possibilité d'une telle théorie et d'une telle praxie. Cette recherche est, par ailleurs, au cœur de l'œuvre de Cairns. En dernière analyse, l'auteure soutient que, peu importe que l'on souscrive ou non à ce que Cairns propose, "Citizens Plus" soulève, à tout le moins, une question fondamentale à laquelle la théorie constitutionnelle multinationale doit répondre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25165887
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i25166287
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Giroux Dalie
Abstract: La réflexion offerte dans cet essai s'inscrit dans une entreprise d'approfondissement de la compréhension générale que nous avons de l'activité politique (parler, écrire, revendiquer, mettre en scène), et particulièrement de la relation que cette activité entretient avec l'idée de l'émancipation. Plus précisément, il s'agit de prendre pour objet d'exploration théorique le fait de parole, défini en termes d'articulation performative des espaces-temps humains, et d'en faire le paradigme de toute action politique. L'analyse de ce paradigme, au terme, permettra de pointer vers une matière utopique qui se qualifie à la fois comme événement et comme permanence du commun. /// In this article, the author seeks a better understanding of the modalities of political action (speaking, writing, claming, staging), and more specifically of the relation between political action and the idea of emancipation. To do so, the author proposes that the speech act, comprehended as the performed articulation of lived space/time, is to be taken as the paradigm of political action. Further analysis of this paradigm, as developed in the article, compels the manifestation of a philosophical object which qualifies both as event and as the manifestation of the perennially of the common.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25166290
Journal Title: Anthropology & Education Quarterly
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i25166609
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Lafaye Claudette
Abstract: Families of squatters who had settled in a quiet neighborhood of Paris wished to send their children to the local school. Our ethnohistorical inquiry explores how the mobilization in favor of schooling the children was embedded in other controversies and mobilizations that arose from the squatters' presence in the occupied building. Many collective social actors (associations, unions, administrations, and politicians) were involved in conflicting mobilizations in an ongoing struggle of competing arguments. The contemporary crisis of the French model of political representation has enabled the emergence of new forms of collective protest: new ways of defining social problems and a new repertory of civil actions, that is, the "mediatization" of social action and the recourse to litigation. Our study suggests some of the possible extensions and limitations of this movement, especially in the context of action taken by teachers' unions and parents' associations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25166615
Journal Title: The Sixteenth Century Journal
Publisher: Sixteenth Century Journal
Issue: i323404
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Carroll Linda L.
Abstract: From the beginning of his career, sixteenth-century playwright Angelo Beolco (also known as Ruzante, the name of the peasant character he created and played) declared his anguish at the worsening of the peasants' economic and political position. Illegitimate child of the authoritarian patriarch of a minor noble family beginning its decline and (probably) a household servant likely of peasant origin, he appears to have identified with the peasants' exclusion from governing institutions and the blocking of their access to wealth. At first, the Evangelical reform movement, with its emphasis on justice for the poor, appealed to him as an effective instrument for persuading the powerful to correct the situation. That hope having proved illusory, Beolco passed through a rapid evolution of beliefs that calls into question Lucien Febvre's theory of the parameters of religious experience in the Renaissance. The present article explores this evolution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2541606
Journal Title: The Sixteenth Century Journal
Publisher: Sixteenth Century Journal
Issue: i323394
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Flynn Maureen
Abstract: In this semiotic analysis of the Spanish auto defe, we begin to understand for the first time the meaning of religious rituals that have appeared completely incomprehensible in traditional accounts. The morning processions of penitents through city streets, the formal denunciations of heretics on public scaffolds, and the final burning at the stake of unrepentant sinners are placed within the context of medieval penitential practices and eschatological beliefs. The ceremony of the auto defe unveiled in time the Judgment Day awaiting all humankind at the end of time. For this reason, the spectacle aroused the interest of spectators all over Christendom, filling them with apprehension of their own final judgment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2542736
Journal Title: The Jewish Quarterly Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25470137
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Weidner Daniel
Abstract: Arnold Gold-
erg, Rabbinische Texte als Gegenstand der Auslegung (Tübingen, 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25470141
Journal Title: Educational Studies in Mathematics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25472056
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Ongstad Sigmund
Abstract: The article investigates in the first part critically dyadic and essentialist understanding of signs and utterances in mathematics and mathematics education as opposed to a triadic view. However even Peircean semiotics, giving priority to triadic, dynamic sign may face challenges, such as explaining the sign as a pragmatic act and how signs are related to context. To meet these and other hurdles an explicit communicational, pragmatic and triadic view, found in parts of the works of Bühler, Bakhtin, Habermas, and Halliday, is developed. Two basic principles are combined and established in a theoretical framework. Firstly, whenever uttering, there will exist in any semiotic sign system, dynamic reciprocity and simultaneity between expressing through form, referring to content, and addressing as an act. Secondly, meaning will be created by the dynamics between given and new in utterances and between utterances and contextual genres. The latter principle explains how meaning merge in communication dynamically and create the basis for a discursive understanding of semiosis and hence even learning at large. The second part exemplifies each of the three main aspects and the dynamics of utterance and genre and given and new by excerpts from a textbook in mathematics education. The concept 'positioning', in use for operationalisation, is explained in relation to main principles of the framework. The article ends focusing crucial implications for validation when moving from a dyadic to a triadic understanding of mathematics and mathematics education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25472067
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478718
Date: 2 1, 2008
Author(s): Carr David
Abstract: his contribution to this Forum (History and Theory 47 [February 2008], xx-xx).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478721
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478809
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Smith Steven G.
Abstract: Steven G. Smith, The Concept of
the Spiritual (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1988), chap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478811
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Kansteiner Wulf
Abstract: Martin Broszat's "Plea for the
Historicization of National Socialism," in Reworking the Past: Hitler, the Holocaust, and the
Historians' Debate, ed. Peter Baldwin (Boston: Beacon Press, 1990), 77-87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478836
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Wächter Kirsten
Abstract: History and Memory 9, no. 1 & 2
(1997), 113-144.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478838
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25478832
Date: 5 1, 2009
Author(s): Carbonell Bettina M.
Abstract: Susan Crane's "Memory, Distortion, and History in the Museum," History and Theory, Theme Issue
36 (1997), 44-63.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25478840
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484065
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Springs Jason A.
Abstract: Crossley 2004: 31-51
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfn087
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i25484099
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts Tyler
Abstract: Robert Orsi here, who claims that as scholars we must allow our conceptions of
ourselves to be "vulnerable to the radically destabilizing possibilities of a genuine encounter with
an unfamiliar way of life" (2005: 198).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfp012
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25486317
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Elfenbein Andrew
Abstract: Cognitive psychologists studying the reading process have developed a detailed conceptual vocabulary for describing the microprocesses of reading. Modified for the purposes of literary criticism, this vocabulary provides a framework that has been missing from most literary-critical investigations of the history of literate practice. Such concepts as the production of a coherent memory representation, the limitations of working memory span, the relation between online and offline reading processes, the landscape model of comprehension, and the presence of standards of coherence allow for close attention to general patterns in reading and to the ways that individual readers modify them. The interpretation of Victorian responses to the poetry of Robert Browning provides a case study in the adaptation of cognitive models to the history of reading. Such an adaptation can reveal not only reading strategies used by historical readers but also those fostered by the discipline of literary criticism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25486327
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25487835
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Taylor Janelle S.
Abstract: The onset of dementia raises troubling questions. Does the person with dementia still recognize you? If someone cannot recognize you, can they still care about you? This essay takes such questions as the entry point for a broader inquiry into recognition, its linkages to care, and how claims to social and political "recognition" are linked to, or premised on, the demonstrated capacity to "recognize" people and things. In the words and actions of her severely impaired mother, the author finds guidance toward a better, more compassionate question to ask about dementia: how can we best strive to "keep the cares together"?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25487838
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501821
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Emery Jacob
Abstract: Andrey Bely's novel "Petersburg" (one of the high points of Russian literary modernism and a rough analogue to James Joyce's Ulysses) repeatedly claims that parent and child, being of the same flesh and blood, share an ambivalent identity. At the same time, because the novel opens by invoking a major character's genealogical relation to Adam, the book implies that this kin identity is universal and can be applied to the entire human race. This essay analyzes the role of kinship metaphor in "Petersburg", demonstrating that tropes of parent-child identity facilitate the novel's dizzying metaphoric conflation, that they form a kind of metafictional mirror in which the novel probes its own nature as a work of the imagination, and that Bely's theory and practice of metaphor touch on broader philosophical issues of figure and fictionality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501828
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i25501873
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Phillips Siobhan
Abstract: While Robert Frost's emphasis on ordinary themes has often been noted, his use of ordinary time bears further attention: his poems show how the repetitive pattern of daily living can be a creative possibility rather than an enervating necessity. His everyday verse suggests revised definitions of lyric temporality as well as new reconciliations of the dualistic oppositions structuring accounts of modernist and Americanist literature. In Frost, human repetition allows a willful independence endorsed by the natural world. The generally neglected poem "In the Home Stretch" demonstrates his most beneficent version of ordinary living, showing how retrospection and conversation are crucial elements of its practice and how marriage can promote these habits. Frost provides a contrasting, failed version of everyday practice in "Home Burial" and a comparable sense of repetitive possibility in "Never Again Would Birds' Song Be the Same."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25501879
Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Press
Issue: i25517119
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Parker Michael
Abstract: George O'Brien, 'Capturing the Lonely Voice', The Irish Times,
12 May 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25517127
Journal Title: Social Psychology Quarterly
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i25593919
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Pagis Michal
Abstract: Dumont 1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25593927
Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i25594483
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Pauset Eve Norah
Abstract: Id., p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25594487
Journal Title: The Musical Times
Publisher: The Musical Times Publications Ltd.
Issue: i25597630
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Cesetti Durval
Abstract: Szymanowski
temporarily assuaged
his desire by writing the
Symphonie-Concertante,
Smeterlin goes back to his
original request in p.77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25597638
Journal Title: Historia: Zeitschrift für Alte Geschichte
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25598394
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Doukellis Panagiotis N.
Abstract: St. Panayotakis et al. (eds.), The Ancient Novel
and Beyond, Leyde 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25598398
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600245
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Hogle Jerrold E.
Abstract: James A. Notopoulos, The
Platonism of Shelley (Durham, N.C.: Duke U. Press, 1949)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600248
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600705
Date: 7 1, 1988
Author(s): Hildebrand William H.
Abstract: Hawthorne's account, in The English Notebooks, ed. Randall Stewart (New York:
Russell and Russell, 1962)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600712
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25600991
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): King Ross
Abstract: Simulations, trans. Paul Foss, et al. (New York: Semiotext[e], 1983) 96-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25600995
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601150
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Harding Anthony John
Abstract: Heidegger's Estrangements: Language, Truth, and Poetry (New Haven: Yale UP, 1989)
XXV.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601152
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25601207
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Baker, John
Abstract: Agamben on the function of the pronoun in medieval grammatical thought:
"Inasmuch as it contains both a particular mode of signification and an indicative act, the
pronoun is that part of speech in which the passage from signifying to demonstrating is
enacted: pure being, the substantia indeterminata that it signifies and that, as such, is not in
itself signifiable or definable, becomes signifiable and determinable through an act of 'indi-
cation'" (31/22).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25601213
Journal Title: Studies in Romanticism
Publisher: The Graduate School, Boston University
Issue: i25602110
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Levinson Marjorie
Abstract: Taylor 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25602113
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Canadian Research Center for Anthropology, St. Paul University
Issue: i25605067
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Stephens Christopher
Abstract: 1968
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605069
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Laurentian University
Issue: i25605168
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Miller Ann
Abstract: Cet article aborde un aspect du processus d'interprétation de la vie religieuse ou cloîtrée amorcé au sein des communautés religieuses catholiques romaines dans les années '70. On avance que, durant cette période de transition, on a fait l'expérience d'un rejet massif du concept de "cloître" en tant que clôture au sens physique, en soulignant le fait qu'il y avait là plus qu'une simple modification de la pratique communautaire, axé sur une réalité transcendante de caractère utopique qu'on aurait voulu orientée en direction d'une expérience communautaire de caractère profane. En fait, ce type de rejet apparaît comme une transformation du concept de "cloître," ne niant point le fait de la continuité au niveau de l'identité communautaire. Les religieuses catholiques romaines ont eu recours à deux images de pointe: la fiancée éternelle du Christ et le clown, ou bouffon, du monde profane. /// This paper examines one aspect of the interpretive process undertaken by religious communities of North American Roman Catholic sisters in the 1970s, or the redefinition of cloister. It is suggested that during this transitional period, widespread rejection of the concept of cloister as physical enclosure was more than a mere illustrative shift away from a communal paradigm stressing utopian transcendence, and toward a communal paradigm identified as profane. In fact, this rejection signaled a transformation in the concept of cloister that allowed for continuity in communal themes of identity across contrasting paradigms. To effect this transformation, Roman Catholic sisters contrasted two liminal images: the transcendent Bride of Christ, and the profane clown.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605179
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25605290
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Vanthuyne Karine
Abstract: A partir d'une étude menée en avril 2003 auprès de trois ONG guatémaltèques impliquées dans le processus de paix, cet article cherche à interroger les registres dominants en ce qui concerne les modalités de réconciliation de pays ayant connu la guerre. En étudiant les registres locaux de la reconstruction du "vivre-ensemble", l'économie morale et politique dans laquelle ils s'inscrivent, et les champs du discours auxquels ils renvoient, je veux montrer les limites que pose un contexte encore répressif aux approches et pratiques actuellement en vogue dans le domaine de la paix et de la réconciliation. /// Based on a study conducted within three NGOs involved in the Guatemalan peace process, this article interrogates dominant discourses and practices upon which strategies of reconciliation in postwar countries are based. Examining local idioms of the reconstruction of the principle of "living together," and in particular the moral and political economy in which these idioms are embedded and the discursive fields to which they refer, enables us to identify the obstacles that a repressive political context may impose on processes of peace-building and reconciliation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605300
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25605554
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Howes David
Abstract: This essay traces the involution of anthropological understanding from the 1950s to the present. It is shown that as the conception of "doing ethnography" changed from sensing patterns to reading texts, and from reading texts to writing culture, so too did the content of anthropological knowledge change from being multi-sensory to being self-centred. The essay also proposes a way of escaping the tunnel-vision of contemporary (post-modern) ethnography — namely, by treating cultures as constituted by a particular interplay of the senses which the ethnographer must simulate before making any attempt to describe or evoke the culture under study. /// Cet article trace l'enchevêtrement qu'a subi l'étude de l'anthropologie depuis les années cinquante à nos jours. L'auteur démontre que le concept de "faire de l'ethnographie" a changé radicalement — de la perception sensorielle à la lecture des textes et de cette lecture à l'acte d'écrire une culture. Également, le contenu des connaissances anthropologiques a subi un changement du multi-sensoriel à l'égocentrique. L'article propose comment s'éloigner du champ de vue plutôt étroit de l'ethnographie contemporaine (dite post-moderne) en suggérant que les ethnographes traitent les cultures telles que constituées par l'action réciproque particulière des sens qui doivent être simulés avant que les ethnographes puissent essayer de décrire ou d'évoquer la culture en question.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25605558
Journal Title: Anthropologica
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i25606186
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Ulin Robert C.
Abstract: This paper argues against the all too common dichotomy of globalization into a process of homogenization or a process of significant diversification. The paper seeks to bridge this dichotomy by arguing for the relative autonomy of culture with respect to global political-economy, for the plurality of voices that constitute ongoing social interaction, and for a vision of actors operating in fields of power that position human agents differentially. The essay makes use of world systems theory to illustrate the merits and problems of global analysis while focussing on the ethnographic examples of French and Michigan wine growers. /// L'article s'inscrit en faux contre la vision dichotomique et récurrente de la mondialisation selon laquelle il s'agit soit d'un processus d'homogénéisation, soit d'un profond processus de diversification. L'article cherche à surmonter cette dichotomie en soutenant l'existence d'une autonomie relative des cultures face à l'économie politique mondiale, d'une pluralité des voix qui constituent les interactions sociales en cours et d'une vision qui situe les acteurs au sein de cercles de pouvoir qui leur imposent des positions différentielles. L'essai se sert de la théorie des systèmes-monde pour illustrer le bien-fondé et les défauts des analyses de niveau mondial. Il met l'accent sur des exemples ethnographiques de viticulteurs de la France et du Michigan.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25606191
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i25609163
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Sieg Christian
Abstract: Siegfried Kracauer, Schriften, ed. Karsten Witte,
vol. 1 (Frankfurt am Main: Suhrkamp, 1971), 7-101.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1215/0094033X-2009-019
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i25610177
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Udoh Fabian E.
Abstract: Luke 12:42-44
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25610185
Journal Title: Administrative Theory & Praxis
Publisher: Public Administration Theory Network
Issue: i25611611
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Abascàl-Hildebrand Mary
Abstract: The philosophy of Paul Ricoeur is offered as an argument for civic education to overcome intense preoccupation with economic activity, because of the need to properly relate politics to economics via ethics. Persons too concerned with economics will ignore their obligations to engage with one another politically. They become disabled from viewing one another as resources for both political and even for economic activity. Furthermore, they tend to regard one another's varying viewpoints as challenges to vibrant economic activity, so that diversity of viewpoints or diversity of experience is regarded as divisive, not as rich variations that come from commonalties and can contribute to a cohesive community. The problem is morphological: suspicions about diversity make conflict resolution difficult and they also make civic education difficult because suspicions about diversities endanger the equitable allocation of resources needed for widespread civic engagement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25611615
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i25614148
Date: 8 1, 2009
Author(s): Juárez Vania Galindo
Abstract: afp, 17 de septiembre de 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25614159
Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i25614457
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Secci M. Cristina
Abstract: Podna resultar estimulante la lectura del nümero tematico de Archivum
Historicum Societatis Iesu dedicado a "The Jesuits and cultural intermediacy in the
early modern world", al cuidado de Diogo Ramada Curto, 74, 2005, 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25614461
Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616334
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Larsen Eric L.
Abstract: Medicine bottles, examined within a larger context, provide an opportunity to explore how material culture influences, reinforces, and reflects late 19th-century gender roles. Bottles from one of Harpers Ferry National Historical Park's late 19th-century privies reflect the gender role of a mother. Available information limits this paper to the examination of a 19th-century ideal. Examining the ideal through both archaeological and documentary evidence, however, reveals the apparatus of ideology and the effects of the ideal in practice. A mutual relationship between genders becomes apparent as does the need to maintain the interrelatedness of gender with other structuring principles of culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616343
Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i25616488
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): McCarthy John P.
Abstract: Much archaeological scholarship on consumption has approached its subject matter as the means to an end—e.g., as a way of studying socioeconomic status—rather than as a proper object of study in its own right. The "consumer choice" school, and, more recently, advocates of consumer behavior studies, have supported approaches that emphasize quantitative methods, at the same time downplaying the "qualitative" or symbolic aspects of consumption. A considerable body of literature on the symbolic aspects of consumption exists both in historical archaeology and other fields. The intention of this essay is to draw together this recent literature on consumption and combine it into a single approach that emphasizes shopping as the meaningful action at the very heart of consumption. With the emphasis on agency, this approach presents shopping as that crucial moment of transformation where identity, intention, and symbol combine in the decision to purchase, to own, an object.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25616493
Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i25619740
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pierson Michele
Abstract: Branden W. Joseph's analysis of Smith's baroque aesthetic
in "Primitives and Flaming Creatures," in Beyond the Dream Syndicate.- Tony Conrad and the Arts After Cage (New
York: Zone Books, 2008), 213-278.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25619742
Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i25619787
Date: 8 1, 2009
Author(s): Cody Francis
Abstract: This essay examines how activists in rural southern India have sought to reshape the field of political communication by encouraging lower-caste women to submit written, signed petitions to district-level government offices, and so represent themselves to the state. I argue that contradictions between democratic recognition and the will to development that inhere to the political structure of contemporary governance in rural India correspond to tensions within the semiotic structure of signature itself, between constative representation and performative creation. Governmentality and the forms of communication that it requires often rest on the notion that written self-representation constitutes an act of political agency. But the limits of a governmental communicative reason that would conflate written subject and agent become especially clear in postcolonial contexts where the construction of those citizens that would be represented is in fact a product of the very act of representation. It is the narrative of development-as-pedagogy that holds out the promise of a future alignment of communicative frameworks, technologies, and participant roles, allowing for the transparent self-representation of an already-constituted citizen. By tracking the ambivalent experience of one group of women in particular, this account focuses on how the logic of signature as self-representation has served to recontextualize the marginality of petitioners as something within the state's broader field of power.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2009.01035.x
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323894
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): Buttimer Anne
Abstract: Recent attempts by geographers to explore the human experience of space have focused on overt behavior and its cognitive foundations. The language and style of our descriptions, however, often fail to speak in categories appropriate for the elucidation of lived experience, and we need to evaluate our modes of knowing in the light of modes of being in the everyday world. Phenomenologists provide some guidelines for this task. They point to the preconsciously given aspects of behavior and perception residing in the "lifeworld"-the culturally defined spatiotemporal setting or horizon of everyday life. Scientific procedures which separate "subjects" and "objects," thought and action, people and environments are inadequate to investigate this lifeworld. The phenomenological approach ideally should allow lifeworld to reveal itself in its own terms. In practice, however, phenomenological descriptions remain opaque to the functional dynamism of spatial systems, just as geographical descriptions of space have neglected many facets of human experience. There are certain avenues for dialogue between these two disciplines in three major research areas: the sense of place, social space, and time-space rhythms. Such a dialogue could contribute to a more humanistic foundation for human geography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2562470
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Association of American Geographers
Issue: i323950
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Tuan Yi-Fu
Abstract: How places are made is at the core of human geography. Overwhelmingly the discipline has emphasized the economic and material forces at work. Neglected is the explicit recognition of the crucial role of language, even though without speech humans cannot even begin to formulate ideas, discuss them, and translate them into action that culminates in a built place. Moreover, words alone, used in an appropriate situation, can have the power to render objects, formerly invisible because unattended, visible, and impart to them a certain character: thus a mere rise on a flat surface becomes something far more-a place that promises to open up to other places-when it is named "Mount Prospect." The different ways by which language contributes toward the making of place may be shown by exploring a wide range of situations and cultural contexts. Included in this paper are the contexts of hunter-gatherers, explorers and pioneers, intimate friendship, literary London, Europe in relation to Asia, and Chinese gardening and landscape art. There is a moral dimension to speech as there is to physical action. Thus warm conversation between friends can make the place itself seem warm; by contrast, malicious speech has the power to destroy a place's reputation and thereby its visibility. In the narrative-descriptive approach, the question of how and why language is effective is implied or informally woven into the presentation, but not explicitly formulated or developed. Ways of making place in different situations-from the naming of objects by pioneers, to informal conversation in any home, to the impact of written texts-are highlighted and constitute the paper's principal purpose, rather than causal explanations, which must vary with each type of linguistic behavior and each situation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2563430
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i25650854
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Roberts John
Abstract: Janet A. Kaplan,
'Flirtations with Evidence', Art in America,
October 2004, pp. 134-8, 169-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25650861
Journal Title: Arabica
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i25651682
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Zine Mohammed Chaouki
Abstract: Shokoufeh Taghi, The Two Wings of Wisdom. Mysticism and Philosophy in the Risalat ut-
tair of Ibn Sind, Uppsala, Uppsala University Library («Studia Iranica Upsaliensia», 4), 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25651686
Journal Title: The New England Quarterly
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i25652049
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): RONDA BRUCE
Abstract: Sanborn to Harris, 3 March 1888, "Letters to William Torrey Harris, [1864]-
1909," CFPL
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25652051
Journal Title: Luso-Brazilian Review
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i25654803
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Passos José Luiz
Abstract: It has become commonplace to describe Machado de Assis's characters and narrators as deeper than those of his contemporaries, and his novels as representations more creatively ambiguous than most literary depictions of nineteenth-century Brazil. In this essay I argue that throughout his novels psychological depth is a function of moral imagination; and a troubled moral imagination is a necessary condition for the literary representation of the modern self. Machado's protagonists are able to fashion the public presentation of their selves by imagining alternatives to their origins, desires, and social predicaments. They have in their pasts a burden they need to overcome, and while doing so they find themselves in conditions of freedom and harm. Evil then arises as a consequence of moral dynamism, in so far as it becomes a project for undoing the other. The genesis of a radical conception of free will and evil in Machado's narratives goes back to his translation of Victor Hugo's The Toilers of the Sea (1866). His concern with a more meticulous characterization of inwardness deepens between Iaiá Garcia (1878) and Dom Casmurro (1899), when adopting the structure of a confessional narrative he arrives at a balance between disguised motives (malice), double chronology (nostalgia), and human life as an unfolding, reversible, and self-aware process (metamorphosis). To frame Machado's strategy for depicting moral change, I take from Augustine's Confessions the suggestion that retrospection is the only way of restoring the identity of someone whose self is marked by his or her sense of dissimilarity with the past. Finally, from Kant and Paul Ricoeur I draw the elements for a further consideration of evil as an invitation to think differently about seeing, judging, and narrating human life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25654810
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i25654931
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Fortin Jutta
Abstract: Geoffrey Gorer, 'The Pornography of Death', in Death, Grief and Mourning in Contempo-
rary Britain (London: Cresset Press, 1965), pp. 192-99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25654937
Journal Title: Proceedings of the Annual Meeting (American Society of International Law)
Publisher: The American Society of International Law
Issue: i25658878
Date: 4 8, 1995
Author(s): Ruggie John Gerard
Abstract: William C. Wohlforth, Realism and the End of the Cold War, Winter 1994/1995, 91-129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25658896
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25676962
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cisternas Cristián
Abstract: Vidal 55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25676967
Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i25677409
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Kelty Christopher
Abstract: In this paper we argue that the concept and practice of responsibility is being transformed within science and engineering. It tells the story of attempts by nanotechnologists to make responsibility 'do-able' and calculable in a setting where the established language and tools of risk and risk analysis are seen as inadequate. The research is based on ethnographic participant-observation at the National Science Foundation-funded Center for Biological and Environmental Nanotechnology (CBEN) at Rice University in Texas, during the period 2003 to 2007, including the controversies and public discussions it was engaged in and the creation of the International Council on Nanotechnology (ICON). CBEN began as a project to study 'applications' of nanotechnology to environmental and biological systems, but turned immediately to the study of 'implications' to biology and environment. We argue here that the notion of 'implications' and the language of risk employed early on addressed two separate but entangled ideas: the risks that nanomaterials pose to biology and environment, and the risks that research on this area poses to the health of nanotechnology itself. Practitioners at CBEN sought ways to accept responsibility both as scientists with a duty to protect science (from the public, from de-funding, from 'backlash') and as citizens with a responsibility to protect the environment and biology through scientific research. Ultimately, the language of risk has failed, and in its place ideas about responsibility, prudence, and accountability for the future have emerged, along with new questions about the proper venues and 'modes of veridiction' by which claims about safety or responsibility might be scientifically adjudicated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25677414
Journal Title: The Academy of Management Journal
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i302938
Date: 12 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein John L.
Abstract: Calas & Smircich, 1991: 570-571
570
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/256821
Journal Title: Die Welt des Orients
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i25683717
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Richter Hans-Friedemann
Abstract: Es ist also zu uberlegen, ob nicht auch an unserer Stelle die Ubersetzung mit “War-
nung" geniigt. leqayin bedeutet dann “zugunsten Kains" (wie le in Jes 5,4 u.6.) und
nicht in lokalem Sinne “an Kain daran".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25683725
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25701911
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Tritsmans Bruno
Abstract: Michel de Certeau a attribué les traits de la métis au récit dans L'Inven-
tion du quotidien.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25701917
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25701911
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Carrière Marie
Abstract: "La Parole" 263
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25701921
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702177
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Lorre Christine
Abstract: On peut noter que Jean-Francois Billeter etablit une distinction generale entre les
deux systemes de pensee, grecque et chinoise, qui recoupe, dans ses grandes lignes, celle
exposee par Jullien: "On peut apercevoir [...], me semble-t-il, une difference fondamen-
tale entre la pensee grecque et la tradition intellectuelle qui en est issue d'une part, et
l'ensemble (ou presque) de la pensee chinoise de l'autre. Notre tradition intellectuelle a
eu tendance a privilegier la conscience thetique et la conscience reflechie, qui font toutes
deux abstraction du mouvement, du changement, des transformations dans lesquels nous
sommes continuellement pris dans les faits. [...] La philosophie a par consequent eu dans
notre civilisation une vocation "theorique," contemplative. La pensee chinoise me parait
avoir ete, dans l'ensemble, beaucoup plus fidele aux donnees de lexperience commune, au
rapport spontane que nous entretenons avec nous-memes et avec les choses dans le cours
de nos activites. Elle a donne la priorite aux formes que notre vie consciente prend lorsque
nous nous mouvons, que nous agissons, etc., et a celles que la realite a pour nous dans ces
moments-la" ("Comment lire Wang Fuzhi?" 111-12).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702181
Journal Title: Nouvelles Études Francophones
Publisher: Conseil International d'Études Francophones
Issue: i25702217
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Tegomo Guy
Abstract: Chris Marker (1921 -)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702234
Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i25702390
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Nielsen Richard P.
Abstract: In this updated and revised version of his 2008 Society for Business Ethics presidential address, Richard Nielsen documents the characteristics and extent of the 2007–2009 economic crisis and analyzes how the ethics issues of the economic crisis are structurally related to a relatively new form of capitalism, high-leverage finance capitalism. Four types of high-leverage finance capitalism are considered: hedge funds; private equity-leveraged buyouts; high-leverage, subprime mortgage banking; and high-leverage banking. The structurally related problems with the four types of high-leverage finance capitalism converged in something of a perfect economic storm. Explanations for the crisis are offered in the context of the type of the high-leverage finance capitalism system that permitted and facilitated the economic crisis. Ethics issues and potential reforms are considered that may be able to mitigate the destructive effects of what Schumpeter referred to as the "creative destructive" effects of evolutionary forms of capitalism while realizing the Aristotelian economic ideal of creating wealth in such a way as to make us better people and the world a better place.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702400
Journal Title: Archiv für Musikwissenschaft
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25702869
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): UTZ CHRISTIAN
Abstract: Übersichtsdarstellungen zu diesen Fragen geben u. a. die Beiträge Gunter Kreutz, Melodiewahr-
nehmung: Funktionen von Arbeitsgeddähtnis und Aufinerksamkeit und Christoph Louven, Reiz- und
wissensgeleitete harmonische Informationsverarbeitung, in: Musikpsychologie (Handbuch der syste-
matischen Musikwissenschaft, 3), hg. von Helga de la Motte Haber und Gunther Rötter, Laaber 2005,
S. 185-207 bzw. 208-230.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25702872
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703051
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Zapata Florencia
Abstract: Greenwood, 1993: 115
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703063
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703087
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Chartier Roger
Abstract: «Cam-
bio de experiencia y cambio de metodo. Un apunte historico-antropologico*, en Reinhart Koselleck, Los es-
tratos del tiempo: estudios sobre la historia, Barcelona, Buenos Aires y Mexico, Ediciones Paidos, 2001, ps. 43-92
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703098
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Iranzo Teresa
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703113
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25703106
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bofill Mireia
Abstract: Bajo la direccion de Jacques Semelin, Claire Andrieu y Sarah Gensburger, en el marco del Centre d'-
histoire des Sciences Po, Paris, en diciembre de 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703115
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703512
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Gómez-Bravo Ana M.
Abstract: Juan del Encina ("Tiempo").
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703514
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i25703529
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): de Looze Laurence
Abstract: Vinsauf's Poetria Nova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25703531
Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728159
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): کامبانيني ماسيمو
Abstract: The aim of the present article is to investigate how the passages of the Holy Text regarding natural sciences or the cosmological order of the universe can be read from a hermeneutical viewpoint, in a philosophical rather than a historical, grammatical or stylistic sense; the debated problems of literary and artistic character, and the relationship between Qur'an and science per se, are not involved here. If we assume as a working hypothesis the Gadamerian perspective that 'being, as far as we can understand it, is language', we can accept that the being of God and of the universe are disclosed in Qur'anic language and that the Qur'an becomes the framework of the aletheia (in the Heideggerian sense) of science. This paper utilises the above-mentioned epistemological and hermeneutical key in order to make a first attempt to explore the possibility of a philosophical analysis of the question of science in the Qur'an, and concludes that, although it can sound highly paradoxical, the attitudes of total agreement, partial agreement or no agreement between Qur'an and science are not mutually exclusive, but rather work in parallel at different linguistic levels. الهدف من هذه الدراسة هو بحث کيف يمکن فهم الآيات القرآنية المتعلقة بالعلوم الطبيعية أو النظام الکوني من وجهة نظر منهج تفسيري من ناحية فلسفية لا تاريخية أو نحوية أو بلاغية. لن يتم هنا مناقشة قضايا أدبية أو فنية أو العلاقة بين القرآن والعلم في هذا البحث. إذا افترضنا أن وجهة نظر جادامير (remadaG)، وهي أن " الوجود، کما نفهمه، هو اللغة "، تعتبر نظرية قابلة للتطبيق، يمکن أن نقبل أن وجود الله والکون يبين من خلال اللغة القرآنية وأن القرآن يصبح إطار الوصول للحقيقة، طبقاً لفهم هيدجر (reggedieH). إن هذا البحث يستخدم علم الحد والمنهج التفسيري من أجل القيام بأول محاولة لاستکشاف إمکانية تحليل فلسفي لقضية العلم في القرآن. وقد انتهى هذا البحث إلى أن التوافق بين القرآن والعلم تاما أو جزئيا أوعدم التوافق لا يعتبر أمرا قاطعا من الجهتين لکنه يعمل على درجات لغوية مختلفة متوازنة.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728164
Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i25728283
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): لوسون تود
Abstract: This article highlights two features of Qur'anic style and content: duality/opposition and typological figuration, which can be seen as providing a continuous and consistent 'narrative stream' through the Qur'an. It is of some interest that both of these features have been singled out as distinctive of apocalypse as a genre in the study of numerous religious and cultural traditions. As debate on whether or not the Qur'an is a bona fide example of apocalyptic literature quietly continues, the interplay of conceptual and substantive oppositions and dualities is discussed in order to highlight the importance of this prominent feature to both the form and contents of the Book. It is suggested that its function is profoundly related to the typological figuration indispensable to the Qur'anic depiction of, for example, the character of the prophets and therefore prophethood. Whether or not this represents a genuine instance of apocalyptic literature, it nonetheless remains that the prominence of the motif renders the Qur'an susceptible of a reading expressive of something called an apocalyptic imagination. It is hoped that this article succeeds in demonstrating that in fact these apparently familiar subjects are stimulated to new life by considering them as defining, interlocking, structural elements of a distinctive Islamic apocalypse. تبرز هذه الدراسة خاصيتين لأسلوب القرآن ومادته: الثنائية/التقابل وتصنيف النماذج مما قد ينظر إليه على أنه يمثل تيارا مستمرا ثابتا في القرآن. ومن اللافت للنظر أنه قد جرى الترکيز على هاتين الخاصيتين على أنهما يختصان بالحديث عن أحوال الآخرة في کثير من الأديان والتقاليد الثقافية. وفي هذا المقال سندرس التفاعل بين الثنائية والتقابل لکي نبرز الأهمية الأساسية لهذه الخاصية بالنسبة لشکل القرآن ومحتواه. فنحن نرى أن وظيفتها تمت بقوة إلى ظاهرة تصنيف الأنواع في تصوير القرآن لشخصيات الأنبياء ثم النبوة نفسها. والأمل أن ينجح هذا المقال في التدليل على أن هذه الموضوعات المألوفة يمکن رؤيتها على أنها نمط إسلامي فريد في الحديث عن الأخرويات.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25728287
Journal Title: Hermes
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i25741132
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Schubert Charlotte
Abstract: auch Angela Kuhr, Als Kadmos nach Boiotien kam: Polis und
Ethnos im Spiegel thebanischer Griindungsmythen, Wiesbaden 2006,16f. u. 23 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25741134
Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i211454
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Smircich Linda
Abstract: Debates regarding research methods in the social sciences are linked directly to assumptions about ontology, epistemology, and human nature. After reviewing a range of positions relating to these assumptions, we argue that the dichotomy between quantitative and qualitative methods is a rough and oversimplified one. Contemporary social science is dominated by commitments to research methods almost as ends in themselves, resulting in abstracted modes of empiricism based on both quantitative and qualitative methods. Qualitative research is an approach rather than a particular set of techniques, and its appropriateness derives from the nature of the social phenomena to be explored.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/257453
Journal Title: Hispania
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Spanish and Portuguess
Issue: i25758229
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Meredith R. Alan
Abstract: The interdependence of language and culture highlights the need to find methods for second language students to acquire cultural information and practices. This article reviews definitions of culture posited by anthropologists and language educators and discusses problems related to the recent paradigm shift from "small 'c' and big 'C'" as classifications for culture to the three 'P's of products, practices, and perspectives proposed by the Standards for Foreign Language Learning in the 21st Century (National Standards 2006). Drawing from Kramsch's (1993) postulate of real culture (C1) versus perceived culture (C1'), the current study solicited responses to a questionnaire regarding the practices of Spaniards from two age groups (young and mature) and American students involved in a study abroad program in Spain. Data analyses reveal that perceptions of American Students most closely align with those of Young Spaniards. Implications point to the need for intervention and instruction to provide students with a broader perspective of Spain's cultural practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25758244
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i25758995
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Salazar Philippe-Joseph
Abstract: L'intrigue raciale. Essai de critique anthropologique, Paris, Meridiens Klincksieck, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25758999
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i25759142
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: F. La Cecla, Le malentendu (II malentenso, 1997), trad.
A. Sauzeau, preface de M. Auge, Paris, Balland, « Voix et Regards », 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759149
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25759932
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Gómez Roberto Suazo
Abstract: Droguett, Supay 102
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759940
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i25759932
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Thomas Dublé Eduardo
Abstract: Usigli 22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25759942
Journal Title: Social Forces
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i344318
Date: 6 1, 1973
Author(s): Williame Herman
Abstract: This is the translation of a paper originally presented, under the title "Lecture phénoméno-
logique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim," at the Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala, 1978
(R.C. 6: History of Sociology: Groupe d'etudes Durkheimiennes)
Lecture phénoménologique de l'oeuvre de Durkheim
Ninth World Congress of Sociology, Uppsala
1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2577975
Journal Title: Samuel Beckett Today / Aujourd'hui
Publisher: Rodopi
Issue: i25781274
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Abbott H. Porter
Abstract: Beckett's aggressiveness in crossing generic lines paradoxically accompanied a keen sensitivity to genre and medium differences that often constrained his writing. My argument here is that this combination of abandon and respect was founded in a recognition not just of formal differences in art but of differences in the ways we think. In the wake of groundbreaking work by Jerry Fodor and Howard Gardner, there has been a great deal of research advancing (and qualifying) a modular conception of how the mind evolved and how it continues to work in modern humans. This work puts new light on both the formal differences between mimesis and diegesis, and on Beckett's approach to these two different ways of rendering narrative. Particularly it makes clear why Beckett should have so radically subordinated character and action to staged diegesis in his later work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25781285
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i25782894
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Ginzburg Carlo
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, introduction a Marc Bloch, / re taumaturghi.
Studi sul carattere sovrannaturale attribuito alia potenza dei re particolarmente in Francia e
in Inghilterra, Turin, Einaudi, 1973, en particulier, p. xiv-xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25782896
Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i25790882
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): MURAKAMI Yasusuke
Abstract: Kennan, George (1951): American Diplomacy 1900-1950. University of Chicago Press,
Chicago, Chap.6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25790885
Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i25800662
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Deeb Hadi Nicholas
Abstract: Paul V. Kroskrity, Arizona Tewa Kiva Speech
as a Manifestation of a Dominant Language Ideology, in LANGUAGE IDEOLOGIES, supra note 16, at
117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25800672
Journal Title: Journal of World Prehistory
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i25801252
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Watkins Trevor
Abstract: Asouti 2006
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25801256
Journal Title: Oriente Moderno
Publisher: Istituto per l'Oriente C. A. Nallino
Issue: i25817824
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): VAN DEN BOS MATTHIJS
Abstract: Hokumat-e vel yi, Kadivar represents a Sufi and Gnostic ideal type: "When politics
would be in the hands of the Friends of God, the Gnostics and the Sufis, this would be an era
of Light, and that time which would lack the divine rulings of the Friends and Wayfarers
would be dominated by oppression" (p. 30).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25817830
Journal Title: Oriente Moderno
Publisher: Istituto per l'Oriente C. A. Nallino
Issue: i25817858
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): HAAG-HIGUCHI ROXANE
Abstract: Parsipur, Tuba va macna-ye sab, cit., p. 159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25817867
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: CIDOB
Issue: i25822772
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Ramírez-Orozco Mario
Abstract: Ortiz, 1978
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25822788
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i25842884
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Scheuch Erwin K.
Abstract: Leggewie
1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/25842888
Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i302985
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Zey-Ferrell Andrew J.
Abstract: Critical theory is presented as a general method for analyzing an organization science based on either a natural science or interpretive paradigm. This is accomplished by introducing epistemic inquiry into organization science methodology. Specifically, critical theory provides a means of examining the socio-political interplay among the researcher, the research enterprise, the practitioner, and the organization members. Such an analysis requires the examination of ideology, technology, and praxis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/258463
Journal Title: The Economic History Review
Publisher: Titus Wilson and Son Ltd.
Issue: i324319
Date: 8 1, 1981
Author(s): Vico François
Abstract: Stern, ed. The varieties of history, p. 32
32
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2596249
Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth-Heinemann
Issue: i324426
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): Banerjee Sanjoy
Abstract: How does international interaction shape states' patterns of thought, emotion, and action? This paper examines the processes by which motives and practices feed each other in reproducing historical structures. An artificial intelligence model defines state-subjects as cultures combining special meanings that produce causal attribution, state self-identification, emotions, and action motives. These special meanings are built from subjective cultural categories describing social acts and group character of the self and others. Anger, pride, fear, and relief motivate action. A collection of such subject-cultures may produce a pattern of actions that reiterates the cultures. The model discriminates between those combinations of elements in special meanings which reproduce subjects and historical structures, and those which do not. The meanings discovered in such reproduction analysis can be validated by discourse analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600387
Journal Title: Planning Theory
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i26004236
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Gunder Michael
Abstract: This article briefly reviews the history and concept of ideology, largely as articulated by exponents of the Frankfurt School, and considers the impact that this has had on historical planning theory and practice, culminating in Habermasian derived communicative planning theory. It then considers the role of ideology in a post-Marxist world and argues for the value of Žižekian critique for understanding planning's contemporary role of ideologically defining the use of neoliberal space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26004239
Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Butterworth Publishers
Issue: i324420
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): George Jim
Abstract: Recent debates in International Relations have seen some of the characteristic dichotomies of the discipline under severe and sophisticated challenge. The proposition, for example, that the study of International Relations, is somehow "independent" of mainstream debates on theory and practice in the social sciences is now widely rejected. The disciplines change in attitude on this issue owes much, in the 1980s, to the influences of an as yet small group of scholars who have infused the "third debate" in International Relations with an appreciation for previously "alien" approaches to knowledge and society, drawn from interdisciplinary sources, which repudiate (meta) theoretical dualism in all its forms. Utilizing the sponge term "postpositivism" Yosef Lapid has concentrated on an important aspect of the "third debate," one which has seen positivist based perspectives repudiated in favor of critical perspectives derived, primarily, from debates on the philosophy of science. This paper takes a broader view of the "third debate" in focusing on some of the broader patterns of dissent in social theory that are now evident in its literature. It argues that for all the differences associated with the new critical social theory approaches, theirs is critique with common purpose. Its purpose: to help us understand more about contemporary global life by opening up for questioning dimensions of inquiry which have been previously closed off and supressed; by listening closely to voices previously unheard; by examining "realities" excluded from consideration under a traditional (realist) regime of unity and singularity. Its purpose, reiterated: the search for "thinking space" within an International Relations discipline produced by and articulated through Western modernist discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2600460
Journal Title: Belfagor
Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26144100
Date: 5 31, 1985
Author(s): Cambiano Giuseppe
Abstract: Polit. 260 de.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26145414
Journal Title: Theologische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i26152689
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Körtner Ulrich H. J.
Abstract: J. Werbick, Der Pluralismus der pluralistischen Religionstheologie. Eine Anfrage,
in: R Schwager (Hg.), Christus allein? Der Streit um die pluralistische Religionstheolo-
gie (QD 160), Freiburg/Basel/Wien 1996,140-157, hier 153 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26153715
Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167879
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Cameron W. S. K.
Abstract: Heidegger's characterization of Dasein as Being-in-the-world suggests a natural relation to environmental philosophy. Among environmentalists, however, closer inspection must raise alarm, both since Heidegger's approach is in some senses inescapably anthropocentric and since Dasein discovers its environment through its usability, serviceability, and accessibility. Yet Heidegger does not simply adopt a traditionally modern, instrumental view. The conditions under which the environment appears imply neither that the environment consists only of tools, nor that what is true of the parts is also true of the whole, nor that an orientation to use—where appropriate—precludes any other orientation. Heidegger's anthropocentric commitments thus do not rule out the possibility of a non-instrumental perspective on the natural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167884
Journal Title: Environmental Philosophy
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: e26167934
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Scharper Stephen B.
Abstract: See See
Richard Peet and Micahel Watts, eds. Liberation Ecologies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26167941
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie et philosophie médiévales
Publisher: PEETERS
Issue: i26172285
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sère Bénédicte
Abstract: P. RlCŒUR, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris 1990, p. 43: «Le concept de personne
serait un concept primitif, dans la mesure où on ne saurait remonter au-delà de lui».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26172290
Journal Title: Revista Española de Derecho Internacional
Publisher: ASOCIACIÓN ESPAÑOLA DE PROFESORES DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL Y RELACIONES INTERNACIONALES
Issue: e26177211
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): García Picazo Paloma
Abstract: Este trabajo está dedicado a todos los que, como Maximilian M. Kolbe (1894-1941), son capaces e dar su vida por otros, sin pedir nada a cambio, sin furia y sin rencor, tan sólo porque su idea de Dios omprende a la humanidad. Kolbe murió en un «búnker de inanición» del campo de exterminio de uschwitz. Entregó voluntariamente su vida a cambio de la de otro prisionero que era padre de familia. l suplicio del hambre (inanición absoluta) duró catorce días, en los que fallecieron seis condenados; uego, una inyección letal liquidó a los tres moribundos restantes, que «tardaban» demasiado. Así acabó olbe. La pena se dictó como castigo colectivo por la fuga de otro preso del bloque
14. Fischer, U., Maximilian Kolbe, Viena, Sal Terrae-Maria Roggendorf, 1975.En Auschwitz se inyectaba gasolina directamente n el corazón.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26177217
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26188535
Date: 12 1, 1979
Author(s): Smalley B.
Abstract: G. Olsen, The Idea of the «Ecclesia Primitiva» in the Writings of the
Twelflh-Cenlury Canonists, in Traditio 25 (1969) 61-86; B. Smalley, Ecclesiastical
Attitudes to Novelty c. 1100-c. 1250, in Studies in Church History, op. cit., η. 32,
113-133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26188539
Journal Title: Recherches de théologie ancienne et médiévale
Publisher: ABBAYE DU MONT CÉSAR
Issue: i26189080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Laird Martin S.
Abstract: Conf. 10,11 (p. 138).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26189087
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26193081
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Rosoux Valérie
Abstract: Twelve years after the genocide, nothing has been forgotten in Rwanda. The country resembles a multiplicity of experiences, words and silences. The aim of the article is to reflect on the representations – or absence of representations – of the past. The approach is based on the ambivalence of any reference to the past. It is not a question of making a judgement in the abstract about the more or less legitimate character of the attitudes observed, but to understand the dynamics at work. The analysis is divided into three parts. The first part recalls the specific aspects of the case under study. The second examines the silences that weigh upon Rwandan society. The third notes the main accounts of the past.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26193085
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26194247
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: The author had just studied the gradual formation of a French government public policy of evoking the «Righteous» in her sociology thesis when she was contacted by several media on the occasion of the Nation’s Homage to the Righteous of France at the Panthéon on January 18, 2007. In this article, she discusses the difficulties researchers may face in disseminating their conclusions outside the academic world and the means they can use to overcome them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26194255
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: e26194540
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Bulle Sylvaine
Abstract: This article takes another look at the relationship between the city dwellers of Shu’faat and their environment, which allows it to characterise the importance of proximity. These refugee city dwellers, committed to the fundamental principles of national resistance, the struggle for the right to return and membership in the Palestinian community, are nevertheless driven by relationships expressing their roots and attachment s that place a value on proximity and private property.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26194547
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26196595
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Martial Agnès
Abstract: According to recent analyses, we are said to be witnessing in the West a « naturalisation » of filiation. The present article challenges this hypothesis, based on anthropological and historical analyses of old “parallel” kinships and the new forms of family configurations. It recalls the longstanding reference to nature in the representations and uses of kinship and the existence of a metaphorical and symbolic world characterised both in the past and today by the plurality of meanings given to kinship relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196604
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196962
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DE OLIVEIRA CLÁUDIA MARIA ROCHA
Abstract: Starting by the distinction made by Henrique Cláudio de Lima Vaz between the democratic ideal and real democracy, and to assume that we will only be able to build a true democratic community if we act within that same community as authentic persons, we defend in this article that being a person is constituted as a call to hope. We will divide the article into three parts. In the first part, we will explain in what sense the personalism is constituted as an option for hope. Then we indicate what it means to be a person for Lima Vaz. Finally, we show how we can become a person and what are the difficulties to this accomplishment. Only when we exist as authentical people we will be able to establish the right relationship between the democratic ideal and real democracy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196973
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DA COSTA ANTÓNIO MARTINS
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyse some questions proposed by the debate on the issue of modernity and post-modernity in the context of the philosophy of Leonardo Coimbra, from the reflection on these issues made by Jürgen Habermas in the work
The Philosophical Discourse of Modernity. Thus, the critique to modern reason, the reflection on the metaphysics, the issues about the relationship between reason and faith, the religious phenomenon, the process of secularization, are our starting point for the questioning and the philosophical understanding that postmodernity makes of these problems The inauguration of this new rationality allows a new questioning about the reason and the world, manifesting the sublime character of its nature, allowing a new reflection, a critique of self-sufficient and self-reflexive reason and recovering another discursive and cooperative form of reason.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26196999
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DE FREITAS DA SILVA CLAUDINEI APARECIDO
Abstract: From the perspective of Gabriel Marcel’s juvenile writings, most notably
Fragments Philosophiques(1909-1914) andJournal Métaphysique(1914-1923), this study discuss the first theoretical statute of the experience of God. This reflexive movement, strictly speaking, phenomenological-existential is based (as background) on the critique of absolute knowledge (modern idealism and scientism) which, according to Marcel, is an unavoidable contradiction: at the same time, it affirms the being, it denies the being. What draws attention is the fact that such explanatory model is transposed and, therefore, applied using the classical formulation of the so-called problem of the existence of God, of which theodicy has one of the most eloquent and emblematic metaphysical discourses. For the young French thinker, God cannot be verified or justified as an ontological proof: God is the Inverifiable Absolute, since it has to be experienced in the act of faith, in the expression of love and grace.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197005
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: e26196983
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): DOTTI FEDERICA
Abstract: In the context of the family’s crisis, in addition to the marital failures that produce suffering and inconvenience, there are biases due to controversies, ideological interests and opinions, which originate general and simplistic solutions to complex problems with peculiar characteristics. The article, – according to the commitment of the Holy Father Francisco to mitigate the heavy burden of people in “irregular” unions (where situations of fragility or misery improve stigma of exclusion) – try demonstrate the continuity of the Magisterium Pontifical Council, in which
Amoris Laetitiaand the reform of the canonical matrimonial process were inserted. Through the study of the answers and the search for solutions that are careful to the hierarchy of truths, the Holy Father pointed out: “to generate personal and personalized processes”; to follow paths of reflection and discreet understanding the conditions of each case; ultimately, to help progress guided by a logic of forgiveness and reconciliation, according to a merciful and encouraging pastoral care. Sacraments and consciences, both sacred, require to be served with truth.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197006
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26197854
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): Lazarus Jeanne
Abstract: Public financial education is an emerging theme in international public policy, presented by its promoters as a way of protecting citizens faced with the liberalization of financial markets, which shifts risk from the State and collective actors to individuals. This article will examine its development in France, and its overlap with the transformation of social work. We will first describe the social space of financial education, which brings together an unexpected coalition of representatives from financial institutions and social service and aid organizations. We will then go on to focus on one of this space’s central actors,
Finances et Pedagogie(an association created by the bankCaisses d’Épargne), analyzing its partnerships with associations and social services.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26197860
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26199296
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Depraz Nathalie
Abstract: J. Derrida, o.e.., 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26199304
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26200188
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: M. Heidegger, Approche de
Hölderlin, Paris, Gallimard, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26200194
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201540
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Wessel Marleen
Abstract: Lettre du 10 août 1907; Fonds Lucien Febvre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201549
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201560
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: Pour une analyse approfondie
de ce problème, cf. G. Noiriel,
La Tyrannie..., op. cit., notamment
le chapitre « la persécution et l'art
d'écrire», pp. 247-301.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201564
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201706
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Noiriel Gérard
Abstract: C'est en vertu de cette logique que Ph. Raynaud -
ignorant délibérément toutes les pages que j'ai consacrées
à l'explicitation de ma problématique - peut présenter
mes recherches empiriques sur l'histoire du droit d'asile
comme une critique «idéologique» de la «démocratie»,
inspirée par la philosophie de Foucault (péché capital
pour les tenants du libéralisme); voir Ph. Raynaud,
«Heurs et malheurs du citoyen», Le Débat, 75,
mai-août 1993, pp. 124-125. Pour une discussion
plus approfondie sur ce point, voir la préface de mon livre,
G. Noiriel, Réfugiés et sans-papiers. La République face
au droit d'asile, Paris, Hachette-Pluriel, 1998
(rééd. en poche de la Tyrannie du national. Le droit d'asile
en Europe (1793-1993), Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1991).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201716
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26201705
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Desrosières Alain
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et Récit, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26201769
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202379
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Mauger Gérard
Abstract: Dans cette perspective, toute pratique de lecture
peut être décrite comme un mouvement en trois temps :
«avant lire »/«lire »/«après lire». Des «intérêts
à la lecture » qui trouvent leur origine dans la situation
du lecteur - « avant lire » - incitent à un « faire » - « lire » -
qui porte à conséquences, immédiates ou différées
- «après lire» - et qui consolident en retour les «intérêts
à la lecture ». L'accent mis classiquement sur la seconde
phase (« lire ») - qui est aussi la plus difficilement
accessible à l'enquête - est alors déplacé sur les deux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202389
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202500
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Linhardt Dominique
Abstract: John Best, « But Seriously Folks : The Limitations of the
Strict Constructionist Interpretation of Social Sciences »,
ibid., pp. 109-127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202506
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Ponsard Nathalie
Abstract: Dans mon travail, j'ai distingué les fonctions utilitaires
(ordinaires et extraordinaires) et les fonctions
de divertissement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202747
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202740
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: C. Dauphin, A. Farge (éd.), Séduction et sociétés:
approches historiques, Paris, EHESS-Seuil, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202748
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202767
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Offenstadt Nicolas
Abstract: Voir le texte de l'article : « Uses and Abuses of
Historical Analogies : Not Munich but Greece », Annals
of International Studies, Genève, 1970, pp. 224-232.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202776
Journal Title: Genèses
Publisher: ÉDITIONS BELIN
Issue: i26202872
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Vidal Laurent
Abstract: Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities, London,
Verso, 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26202880
Journal Title: Espace géographique (English Edition)
Publisher: BELIN
Issue: e26213697
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: La littérature académique de langue française fait un usage très abondant des notions d’ancrage et d’enracinement quand elle traite de l’habiter et des pratiques résidentielles. Si l’origine métaphorique de ces notions est parfois rappelée, sinon exploitée, par les auteurs qui y ont recours, elle est souvent passée sous silence. Cet article propose de raviver la dimension métaphorique de ces notions, en les complétant de deux autres – mouillage et amarrage – dans une double intention: d’une part, en montrant qu’en les prenant au sérieux, il est possible de leur faire désigner différents types de rapport aux lieux qui exploitent directement les images sous-jacentes; d’autre part, en rappelant que ces images participent d’une poétique du savoir qui distille des effets de vérité dont les motivations sont à rechercher dans les options épistémologiques majeures adoptées.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26213710
Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26215872
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Rengger N.J.
Abstract: Cited in Maurice Cranston, John Locke: A Biography (Oxford, 1985), p. 244.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26215878
Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219815
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Swaine Lucas A.
Abstract: Sorel, Montesquieu, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219821
Journal Title: History of Political Thought
Publisher: Imprint Academic
Issue: i26219891
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Chowers Eyal
Abstract: Zygmunt Bauman, Liquid Modernity (Cambridge, 2000), p. 178. Agnes Heller makes
a similar point in her 'Where are We at Home?', pp. 17-18.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26219896
Journal Title: Lares
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e26233631
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): Riccardo Gaetano
Abstract: Cfr. Bergson, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26233634
Journal Title: Espace géographique
Publisher: Belin
Issue: e26236445
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Debarbieux Bernard
Abstract: Francophone academic literature makes abundant use of the notions of anchoring and rootedness when dealing with dwelling and residential practices. Though the metaphoric origin of these notions can be evoked, and even exploited by the authors, it is generally glossed over. This article seeks to revive the metaphorical dimension of these terms by adding two others – mooring and docking. Our goal is twofold. First, we demonstrate that by taking the terms seriously, it is possible to have them designate different types of of relationships to place, which directly use underlying images. Second, we discuss how these images participate in the poetics of knowledge that distills the effects of truth, whose motivations must be sought out in the major epistemological options that have been adopted.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26236458
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: LEO S. OLSCHKI
Issue: i26264537
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Bottoni Luciano
Abstract: Ch. Batteux, Sulla frase cit., p. 203.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26264540
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26266382
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Leri Clara
Abstract: Ricordo, a titolo di esempio, solo alcuni degli scrittori e degli studiosi che non
hanno avuto, per così dire, accesso alla rassegna (pur se implicitamente e continuamente
vivissimi all'attenzione di chi scrive) per l'impossibilità oggettiva di esibire lo sconfinato
universo delle presenze bibliche nella letteratura compresa tra il Duecento e il primo Ot-
tocento: il Dante delle opere 'minori', soprattutto della Vita Nuova (V. Branca, G. Gor-
ni), la predicazione medievale e moderna (C. Delcorno, R. Rusconi, L. Bolzoni, J. Berlioz,
etc.), le laude (G. Varanini, R. Bettarini, F. Mancini etc.), la sacra rappresentazione (M.
Martelli, N. Newbigin, F. Doglio, G. Ponte, F. Pezzarossa), il Boccaccio delle Rime e
delle Epistole (V. Branca, G. Auzzas) e di alcune parti del Decameron (P. Cherchi), la
produzione 'sacra' tassiana (Rime Sacre, Mondo Creato), l'Aretino (Larivaille) e il Folengo
(M. Chiesa, S. Gatti) nei panni di scrittori cristiani, l'Arcadia edificante, per riprendere
un titolo preciso del Di Biase, certa tragedia sacra settecentesca come quella di Martello
(I. Magnani, P. Trivero) e, soprattutto, l'Alfieri biblico del Saul e dell'Abele (A. Di Bene-
detto, E. Raimondi), lo Jacopo Ortis (M. A. Terzoli) e l'Ipercalisse del Foscolo (B. Rosada,
A. Forlini), il linguaggio poetico religioso del Porta (G. Pozzi) e del Belli, il Tommaseo
(M. Guglielminetti), il Pascoli (A. Traina, G. Goffis), D'Annunzio e molti altri ancora:
spesso, tra l'altro, privi di una vera e propria bibliografia «scritturale» a largo spettro,
se non di studi singoli, difficilmente annoverabili nell'ambito ristretto di una precisazione
doverosa, ma non esaustiva. Va detto anche che, sebbene la rassegna si chiuda con il
1995, qua e là è stato segnalato qualche libro del 1996, a cui si vuole ora aggiungere,
senza l'ambizione di averne citato tutti i volumi relativi all'oggetto delle precedenti pagi-
ne, A. Stauble, Le sirene eterne. Studi sull'eredità classica e biblica nella letteratura italia-
na, Ravenna, Longo, 1996; e E. Esposito, R. Manica, N. Longo, R. Scrivano, Memo-
ria biblica nell'opera di Dante, Roma, Bulzoni, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26266388
Journal Title: Lettere Italiane
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i26267185
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Scotto Davide
Abstract: Si ringraziano la B. «C. Bonetta» e l'ASCP per aver concesso la pubblicazione delle
dantesche; il personale della B. Universitaria e della Β. «P. Fraccaro» di Pavia, della B. Na-
zionale Braidense di Milano, della B. Astense e del Museo Storico Italiano della Guerra di
Rovereto. Alla prof. Elisa Signori, al dott. Giovanni Zaffignani e al prof. Gilberto Pizzami-
glio devo i suggerimenti preziosi raccolti durante la discussione delle cartoline e delle boz-
ze. Per l'ospitalità su queste pagine, e l'attenzione ricevuta anche da lontano, sono grato al
prof. Carlo Ossola. Due ringraziamenti speciali vanno al prof. Giorgio Cracco e alla prof.
Daniela Rando i quali, oltre ad aver seguito la ricerca, ne hanno mantenuto viva l'ispirazio-
ne con uno 'sguardo' sempre luminoso. A loro penso leggendo i versi di Purg. VI, 43-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26267188
Journal Title: Ecology and Society
Publisher: Resilience Alliance
Issue: e26267950
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Lambin Xavier
Abstract: The benefits of increasing the contribution of the social sciences in the fields of environmental and conservation science disciplines are increasingly recognized. However, integration between the social and natural sciences has been limited, in part because of the barrier caused by major philosophical differences in the perspectives between these research areas. This paper aims to contribute to more effective interdisciplinary integration by explaining some of the philosophical views underpinning social research and how these views influence research methods and outcomes. We use a project investigating the motivation of volunteers working in an adaptive co-management project to eradicate American Mink from the Cairngorms National Park in Scotland as a case study to illustrate the impact of philosophical perspectives on research. Consideration of different perspectives promoted explicit reflection of the contributing researcher’s assumptions, and the implications of his or her perspectives on the outcomes of the research. We suggest a framework to assist conservation research projects by: (1) assisting formulation of research questions; (2) focusing dialogue between managers and researchers, making underlying worldviews explicit; and (3) helping researchers and managers improve longer-term strategies by helping identify overall goals and objectives and by identifying immediate research needs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26268007
Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26280077
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Léonard Albert
Abstract: Jean Onimus, La Communication littéraire (Paris: Ed. Desclée de Brouwer,
1970), p. 70. (C'est nous qui soulignons.) Du même auteur, on lira Lecture
et critique dans Réflexions et recherches de nouvelle critique (Paris: Les
Belles Lettres, 1969, Annales de la Faculté des Lettres et Sciences hu-
maines de Nice).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26280079
Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26280797
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Sturm-Maddox Sara
Abstract: Jacques Roubaud hypothesizes that "le mystère sur la généalogie des person-
nages de la famille du Graal chez Chrétien et dans tous les romans... est dû
à la dissimulation d'une relation incestueuse": see "Généalogie morale des
rois-pêcheurs," Change, XVI-XV11 (1973), pp. 228-247.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26280809
Journal Title: Modern Fiction Studies
Publisher: THE PURDUE UNIVERSITY DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH
Issue: i26280028
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Brown Suzanne Hunter
Abstract: "Metacommentary," PMLA,
86 (January 1971), 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26281276
Journal Title: L'Esprit Créateur
Publisher: L'ESPRIT CREATEUR, Inc.
Issue: i26283874
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Bauschatz Cathleen M.
Abstract: Montaigne, Œuvres Complètes, ed. Thibaudet & Rat (Paris: Gallimard, 1962), 1,
xxvi. 150-51. a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26283878
Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i26289332
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Mohr Michel
Abstract: Aramaki 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/26289495
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i345219
Date: 8 1, 1974
Author(s): Wittgenstein Ramkrishnan V.
Abstract: Knowledge-intensive firms are composed of multiple communities with specialized expertise, and are often characterized by lateral rather than hierarchical organizational forms. We argue that producing knowledge to create innovative products and processes in such firms requires the ability to make strong perspectives within a community, as well as the ability to take the perspective of another into account. We present models of language, communication and cognition that can assist in the design of electronic communication systems for perspective making and perspective taking. By appreciating how communication is both like a language game played in a local community and also like a transmission of messages through a conduit, and by appreciating how cognition includes a capacity to narrativize our experience as well as a capacity to process information, we identify some guidelines for designing electronic communication systems to support knowledge work. The communication systems we propose emphasize that narratives can help construct strong perspectives within a community of knowing, and that reflecting upon and representing that perspective can create boundary objects which allow for perspective taking between communities. We conclude by describing our vision of an idealized knowledge intensive firm with a strong culture of perspective making and perspective taking, and by identifying some elements of the electronic communication systems we would expect to see in such a firm.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2634993
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute of Management Sciences
Issue: i345213
Date: 5 1, 1990
Author(s): Zigurs Marshall Scott
Abstract: The past decade has brought advanced information technologies, which include electronic messaging systems, executive information systems, collaborative systems, group decision support systems, and other technologies that use sophisticated information management to enable multiparty participation in organization activities. Developers and users of these systems hold high hopes for their potential to change organizations for the better, but actual changes often do not occur, or occur inconsistently. We propose adaptive structuration theory (AST) as a viable approach for studying the role of advanced information technologies in organization change. AST examines the change process from two vantage points: (1) the types of structures that are provided by advanced technologies, and (2) the structures that actually emerge in human action as people interact with these technologies. To illustrate the principles of AST, we consider the small group meeting and the use of a group decision support system (GDSS). A GDSS is an interesting technology for study because it can be structured in a myriad of ways, and social interaction unfolds as the GDSS is used. Both the structure of the technology and the emergent structure of social action can be studied. We begin by positioning AST among competing theoretical perspectives of technology and change. Next, we describe the theoretical roots and scope of the theory as it is applied to GDSS use and state the essential assumptions, concepts, and propositions of AST. We outline an analytic strategy for applying AST principles and provide an illustration of how our analytic approach can shed light on the impacts of advanced technologies on organizations. A major strength of AST is that it expounds the nature of social structures within advanced information technologies and the key interaction processes that figure in their use. By capturing these processes and tracing their impacts, we can reveal the complexity of technology-organization relationships. We can attain a better understanding of how to implement technologies, and we may also be able to develop improved designs or educational programs that promote productive adaptations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2635011
Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Ltd.
Issue: i324967
Date: 6 1, 1985
Author(s): Scott Sean
Abstract: Fields, 'Political Contingencies of Witchcraft',
Canadian Journal of African Studies, 16 (1982), pp. 567-593.
10.2307/484560
567
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637060
Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Carfax Publishing, Taylor and Francis Ltd.
Issue: i324979
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Dube David
Abstract: Osborne, Modernity, p. 37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2637603
Journal Title: The Historical Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i325015
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Collinson Tom
Abstract: Thomas Brooks, 'Epistle to the saints', Heaven on earth, n.p
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2639939
Journal Title: The Journal of Politics
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i345540
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Warren Peter A.
Abstract: (1992)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2647505
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: American Historical Association
Issue: i345591
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Shields Timothy
Abstract: Breen, "Ideology and Nationalism on the Eve of the American Revolution," 13-39.
13
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2649962
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: International Phenomenological Society
Issue: i345615
Date: 6 1, 1958
Author(s): Wittgenstein Daniel
Abstract: Melden, 1961, p. 208
208
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2653677
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: International Phenomenological Society
Issue: i325476
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Vidler Ken
Abstract: KSA, vol. 13, p. 190
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2653702
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Association for Asian Studies
Issue: i325590
Date: 5 1, 1993
Author(s): Zhong Edward X.
Abstract: Liu Xiaofeng, Zhengjiu yu Xiaoyao (Redemption and Easiness) (Shanghai: Shanghai
renmin chubanshe, 1988)
Xiaofeng
Zhengjiu yu Xiaoyao (Redemption and Easiness)
1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2659402
Journal Title: American Journal of Political Science
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i325946
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Schiemann John W.
Abstract: Rational choice theory and the critical theory of Jurgen Habermas exclude important social categories from their analyses of strategic interaction. Successful strategic action in many contexts, however, depends upon the irreducibly intersubjective categories of the lifeworld. I defend this claim by analyzing the use of focal points to solve the multiple equilibria problem in coordination games, reconstructing both the generation of the salience behind focal points as well as the strategic rationality of using them. The goal of this reconstruction is to demonstrate the compatibility of what appears to be mutually hostile research traditions, validating the intuition that together they provide a better understanding of politics than either school can on its own.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2669289
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Rosen William H.
Abstract: Stanley Rosen, The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity (New Haven: Yale
University Press, 1989).
Rosen
The Ancients and the Moderns: Rethinking Modernity
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677987
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345910
Date: 12 1, 1756
Author(s): Tulard Jay M.
Abstract: "The
Determinist Fix," 31
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2677990
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345905
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Hall Anne
Abstract: Sewell, "Historical Events as Structural Transformations," 852
852
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678014
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1986
Author(s): Jameson Julia Adeney
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, "Reflections in Conclusion," in Ernst Bloch et al., Aesthetics and Politics
(London: Verso, 1986), 207.
Jameson
Reflections in Conclusion
207
Aesthetics and Politics
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678066
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345907
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Althusser Nicole
Abstract: Althusser's formula: "Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere nec-
essary for breathing and existence" (L. Althusser, For Marx [London: Verso, 1969], 232).
Althusser
Human societies secrete ideology as an element or atmosphere necessary for breathing and existence
232
For Marx
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678068
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i345901
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Prigogine David F.
Abstract: Ibid., 104-106.
104
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2678084
Journal Title: International Organization
Publisher: The MIT Press
Issue: i346132
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Sartre Richard K.
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline, p. 170.
170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2706440
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346236
Date: 9 1, 1956
Author(s): Lacroix John
Abstract: "L'action politique d'Emmanuel Mounier," Les Cahiers de la République, II
(1956), 90.
90
II
Les Cahiers de la République
1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2708959
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346279
Date: 6 1, 1977
Author(s): Taplin Margaret
Abstract: Frankel's Commentary on Agamemnon, 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709287
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346306
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Habermas David
Abstract: De l'Esprit: Heidegger et la question (Paris,
1987).
De l'Esprit: Heidegger et la question
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709586
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346290
Date: 3 1, 1958
Author(s): Toulmin Allan
Abstract: Adolf Griinbaum, "Falsifiability and Rationality," unpublished typescript quoted
in Richard Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism: Science, Hermeneutics, and
Praxis (Philadelphia, 1983), 79.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709615
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346302
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Laerman Donald R.
Abstract: Lovejoy (see above, n. 23).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709744
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Journal of the History of Ideas, Inc.
Issue: i346292
Date: 9 1, 1984
Author(s): Sacks Patrick H.
Abstract: Oliver Sacks, "The Lost Mariner," The New York Review of Books (16 February
1984), 18-19.
Sacks
16 February
18
The New York Review of Books
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2709758
Journal Title: Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies
Publisher: Harvard-Yenching Institute
Issue: i327733
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Sakutarō Earl
Abstract: Francis Ponge, Nouvelle Revue Française, 1957.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2719288
Journal Title: Eighteenth-Century Studies
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i327842
Date: 4 1, 1973
Author(s): Defoe Robert
Abstract: Defoe, Swift, Smollett, Sterne, and Johnson all did "hack" work. J. H. Plumb, The
Commercialisation of Leisure in Eighteenth-Century England. The Stenton Lecture
1972 (Reading: Univ. of Reading Press, 1973).
Defoe
hack
The Commercialisation of Leisure in Eighteenth-Century England. The Stenton Lecture 1972
1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2739362
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327920
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Voigt William J.
Abstract: The structural analysis of myth is a prime focus of anthropological interest, largely because of the efforts of Levi-Strauss. This paper uses some Levi-Straussian ideas to develop a strategy for myth analysis that I call the non-sense-in-myth strategy (NIMS). The strategy is given a trial run on a well-known and (I believe) much-misunderstood myth: Adam and Eve in Eden. The structure identified has an evolutionary character consistent with many modern understandings concerning the nature of human reality. NIMS, a mediator between Levi-Straussian intellectual leaps and a real methodology, indicates the value of cautious optimism concerning the question "Can structural analysis of myth become a scientific endeavor?"
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741121
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327920
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Scholte Bob
Abstract: The task of anthropology consists in describing and explaining cultures and ultimately reaching an understanding of them through interpretation. The practical difficulties of this are obvious to all those who have dealth with members of another culture. As Malinowski observed, the anthropologist's task is to be "the interpreter of the native." It is suggested that some of the principles elucidated in the philosophical discipline of hermeneutics, such as understanding in context as opposed to preunderstanding and the dialectical relationship between the interpreter and the object of interpretation, may be helpful in defining the essential problems that anthropologists may encounter in their attempts to interpret cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741124
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327931
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): Crocker J. Christopher
Abstract: Anthropologists have overlooked the importance of the metaphor in human culture. Core etaphors can help us identify ultimate cosmic constructs underlying a given social or religious world view. But, even more centrally, metaphors can serve as key data in our attempts to understand how a cultural system adapts to and incorporates sensated experience from the physical world. Metaphors thus provide both a "reality" principle and a "tool" for change. Their special status rests on the way in which a metaphor moves between two different types of thought (Fernandez, CA, 1974). A variety of comments which E. R. Leach and C. Levi-Strauss have made on this issue are summarized, and it is pointed out that both men have underestimated the possibilities for images to develop meaning at the level of affect and motor experience alone, without recourse to opposition or to categorical contrast. Along similar lines, it is argued that many authors mistakenly attempt to isolate metaphoric from metonymic thought. This is taken as a false problem, and the continuity of a process which uses both paradigm contrast and analogic continuity is seen as fundamental. The paper concludes by suggesting that the contemporary theological and anthropological approaches to metaphor are roughly complementary. It is hoped that they will come to interact. Fernandez's article is seen as a useful step in this direction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741153
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327935
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): Spodick David H.
Abstract: A number of investigators are agreed that the popular medical systems of tribal, peasant, and allied peoples are "effective." Most of the literature closely examining that effectiveness focuses on the ethnopharmacological dimensions of the healing systems and generally ignores psychosocial factors. Recent developments in psychophysiology may offer insights into these neglected areas. The specific idea to be examined here is that successful "general medical treatment," or "symbolic healing," by either the shaman or physician, is based in part on a psychosocial mobilization of the patient's biochemical response system. Moreover, it is argued that to account fully for these processes we must reconceptualize the character of the human organism; a unitary alternative to standard Western Cartesian dualism (mind vs. body) is proposed, based on a model derived from recent research in neuroendocrinology. This model can be the basis for a nonreductionist theory of medical effectiveness needed to account for a series of observations (derived from both anthropological and medical contexts) which seem to transcend the explanatory powers of the traditional reductionist biomedical model.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2741861
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327937
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): Watson-Gegeo Karen Ann
Abstract: Two traditions have been vying for supremacy in the area of cultural analysis. The first sees culture as encompassing the totality of socially learned human phenomena; the second restricts the term to shared mental-primarily cognitive-properties. David Schneider has achieved a dominant positon in the latter school. In this paper I examine critically Schneider's approach to culture, with special attention to the problems raised by his perspective with respect to intracultural consistency and contradiction. While agreeing that the ethnographer must attempt to shun prior assumptions as to the nature of symbolic and conceptual domains recognized by the people under study, that it is incumbent on the anthropologist to comprehend reality from the natives' point of view before attempting to formulate laws or generalizations, that the symbolic systems and their associated meanings plays an essential part in making sense of any human action system, I shall argue that cultures do not exhibit the degree of integration, consistency, and articulation assumed by Schneider, that in his attempt to render culture wholly integrated and consisten he strips the concept of its analytic utility, that social action and symbolic systems are empirically and epistemologically more closely intertwined than he would lead us to believe, and that the very debate over what culture "really" is constitutes an exercise in reification.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742111
Journal Title: Current Anthropology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i327960
Date: 10 1, 1983
Author(s): Ulin Robert C.
Abstract: The argument of Evans-Pritchard's classic The Nuer has been subject to conflicting interpretations. We examine these interpretations and then present a reading of the work that treats it as a whole. A key conclusion is that Evans-Pritchard distinguishes among three aspects of the "systems" he describes: (1) logical possibilities immanent in all forms of action, (2) cultural or local idioms in terms of which action is formulated and expressed, and (3) conditions and patterns of action. With this framework he develops, through an examination of the way interests in cattle are translated into political practices, an analysis in which the central theoretical problem is the relationship of structure to human agency. Our reading raises questions about the utility of standard classifications of theoretical orientations in social and cultural anthropology, particularly of the category of structural-functionalism, of which The Nuer is taken to be a central text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2742453
Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504177
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Berner Knut
Abstract: Evil should be characterised as a specific constellation, which results from destructive connections between individual activities and systemic influences. The article shows some important aspects of the structure of evil and prefers the terms of wickedness and obscene coincidences to describe its own character. Therefore, also the division between rationality and affectivity appears as inadequate, because evil has on the one side an intrinsic attractiveness for individuals and is on the other side in modern societies more and more a product of a rationality, which is free from passion. Especially the emotional impoverishment is responsible for the increase of evil, which is demonstrated by two examples. Based on Paul Ricoeur, the evolution of malum can be developed by a short analyse of the relationship between Ethics and Emotions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504184
Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504203
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Sissela Bok, Secrets (1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504207
Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i27504265
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Nussbaum, 2002, p. 272
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27504272
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505627
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Hershberger John K.
Abstract: This paper places the problem of child abuse in the perspective of evil. In so doing it calls into question the amoral assumptions of social science and human services. The current social science paradigm paradoxically dismisses evil as a real factor in the world, despite its concern for indisputably moral issues such as child abuse. The practical advantages of a perspective incorporating evil are several. Among them are a more realistic appreciation of the need for mechanisms of social control in preventing abuse, the role of confession and conversion, and the role of pastoral care as a support system for families.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505633
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27505754
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Helminiak Daniel A.
Abstract: Temporal lobe epilepsy and certain personality disorders often result in experiences described as "religious." TLE research suggests a possible neurological basis for such experiences. Immediately the question arises about the authenticity of these experiences as religious. An experience is authentic if it furthers the authentic growth of the subject, regardless of what triggered it. So pathology may occasion authentic religious experiences, even as history exemplifies. For practical purposes, the further question about God in religious experience is secondary. The exception, miraculous occurrences, should not be granted without sufficient reason. This approach dissolves all conflict between science and faith.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27505759
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27510634
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Manuel Gerdenio M.
Abstract: While individual and group psychotherapy are often referred to as forms of secular confession, the relationship of early religious confessional practices to the psychology of contemporary helping group processes needs further exploration. An examination of the theology and form of the Catholic rites of reconciliation indicates that their psychology and structure clearly parallel many of the healing processes at work in group psychotherapy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27510640
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Human Sciences Press
Issue: i27510691
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Bulkley Kelly
Abstract: The subject of dreams and spirituality has received a great deal of attention in recent years. It has not, however, been seriously examined by religious studies scholars; thus, our ability to explore the spiritual potentials of dreams has been left sadly undeveloped. This essay attempts to improve that understanding. The concept of "root metaphors" will be presented as a means of developing a sophisticated, critical understanding of dreams and spirituality. Three dreams in which root metaphors emerge to provide important spiritual meanings for the dreamer will be discussed. Some practical guidelines, oriented around the model of playing with dreams, will also be presented to help make the spiritual dimension of dreams more accessible to psychotherapists, pastoral counselors, and lay people.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27510695
Journal Title: Labour History
Publisher: Australian Society for the Study of Labour History
Issue: i27516030
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Murphy John
Abstract: The recollections of elderly men of work in a time of full employment are the focus of this paper. It is based on in-depth qualitative interviews with men who were young parents in the mid-1950s. Drawing on literature about masculinity, post-war Fordism and the constitution of self-identity through narrative, it explores their themes of how central security was to their identity as providers, and examines what satisfactions they got from working. The narrative bookends of their experience are strong memories of their parents in the Depression, and acute awareness of the contemporary insecurity of their children and grandchildren.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27516045
Journal Title: Presidential Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Center for the Study of the Presidency
Issue: i27547583
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): Maidment Richard
Abstract: The conflict between President John F. Kennedy and the management of the steel industry in April, 1962 has been interpreted in an unsatisfactory manner. Many of Kennedy's reactions appear to be inexplicable and do not conform with the impression of him either as an "idealist without illusions" or the calculating cynic of recent revisionist writing. This paper is an attempt to provide another understanding of Kennedy's behaviour. We argue that Kennedy was neither hero nor villain, but a practising politician aware of the obligations and function of his profession in a liberal democratic polity. We suggest that Kennedy was aware of the sensibilities of his constituency and that he possessed a finely attuned ear to the language and discourse of American politics in the early 1960s. Consequently Kennedy realised the peril, in the steel crisis, to his political standing and thus felt compelled to embark on a dramatic and potentially dangerous course of action. We attempt to sustain this argument by closely examining the political language of the participants, relying heavily for our analysis on the writings of the Swiss linguist Ferdinand de Saussure, the Italian semiologist, Umberto Eco and the Russian linguist V.N. Volosinov.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27547588
Journal Title: Journal of American Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27557684
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Coates Peter
Abstract: Robyn Dixon, "Silent Warning? Sparrows are Vanishing
Throughout Great Britain," Eos Angeles Times, 12 July 2002, at: http://www.ecology.com/
eco...o2/articles.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27557692
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i27582855
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: The article proposes to analyse the fictional aspects in history writing. Indeed, history doesn't borrow from fiction its compositional techniques only; the discursive strategy which consists in narrating a story is in fact part of historical knowledge as such. A study of Cambysis's biography in Herodotus (II,l-III,66) leads us to grant a very specific function to Book II dealing with Egypt—nearly always considered as some sort of useless overgrowth—and to the "secondary remarks" concerning the Greek world (III,38, 39-60). Setting the Egyptian civilization as a foil enables Herodotus to establish a parallel between expansionist ideas and folly and he includes the Greeks in a plot itself critical of helleno-centric ideology. Our methodological approach owes as much to Ricœur's hermeneutics, as to H. R. Jauss's esthetics of reception and to the various streaks of narratology (narrative syntax and "mise en abîme"), with a view to showing that, once replaced in its "Erwarthunghorizonte", the form of the historical narrative makes full sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27582857
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i27586360
Date: 8 1, 2000
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: Cf. Antoine Berman, L'épreuve de l'étranger, Paris, Gallimard, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27586362
Journal Title: Journal of Religion in Africa
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27594410
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Johnson Paul Christopher
Abstract: Garifuna religion is derived from a confluence of Amerindian, African and European antecedents. For the Garifuna in Central America, the spatial focus of authentic religious practice has for over two centuries been that of their former homeland and site of ethnogenesis, the island of St Vincent. It is from St Vincent that the ancestors return, through spirit possession, to join with their living descendants in ritual events. During the last generation, about a third of the population migrated to the US, especially to New York City. This departure created a new diasporic horizon, as the Central American villages left behind now acquired their own aura of ancestral fidelity and religious power. Yet New-York-based Garifuna are now giving attention to the African components of their story of origin, to a degree that has not occurred in homeland villages of Honduras. This essay considers the notion of 'leaving' and 'joining' the African diaspora by examining religious components of Garifuna social formation on St Vincent, the deportation to Central America, and contemporary processes of Africanization being initiated in New York.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27594413
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i27638371
Date: 10 1, 2006
Author(s): Busch Austin
Abstract: Busch, "Convictions and Questions," 366–72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27638376
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i27638444
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sandoval Timothy J.
Abstract: Prov 1:2–6
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27638448
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642719
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Glynn Simon
Abstract: I argue that meaning or significance per se, along with the capacity to be conscious thereof, and the values, motives and aspirations, etc. central to the constitution of our intrinsic personal identities, arise, as indeed do our extrinsic social identities, and our very self-consciousness as such, from socio-cultural structures and relations to others. However, so far from our identities and behavior therefore being determined, I argue that the capacity for critical reflection and evaluation emerge from these same structural relations, the more complex and quintessentially human aspects of our behavior being explained not in terms of responses to stimuli but as choices reflecting our evaluation of meaningful or significant alternatives. Finally I provide theoretical grounds for accepting the existence of other subjects and give a holistic, as opposed to a dialectical, account of the way individuals may challenge and change the very socio-cultural ways of relating to and interacting with others so central to constituting their capacities and identities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642722
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642730
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Renn Joachim
Abstract: In his theory of communication Schutz exhibits a significant tension between two fundamental perspectives, phenomenology and pragmatism, and in the long run he fails to reconcile the contradictory implications these perspectives have with regard to his model of interaction. The main problem seems to be the notion of sense-constitution. Schutz develops two distinguishable accounts of constitution: an egological one and a model based on the phenomenon of direct interaction of empirical subjects. Two key concepts are related to these different modes of constitution: the model of appresentation with regard to language, symbols and signs, and the model of synchronisation as triangulation of streams of consciousness and outward action sequences. They are analyzed as significant for two different methods and two different theories of communication. I propose some reasons for Schutz's insistence on a phenomenological account of the ego and the constitution of sense, and offer a brief sketch of an alternative strategy that is implicit in Schutz's theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642733
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642764
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Tony Judt, Postwar: A History of Europe since 1945, Penguin, 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642770
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27642781
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Vasterling Veronica
Abstract: Vasterling (2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27642784
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27643230
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Doja Albert
Abstract: Douglas-Klotz 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27643234
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27643303
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Jackson Robert
Abstract: Jackson (forthcoming)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27643307
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27644419
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Honig Bonnie
Abstract: Honig
2001b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27644422
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i27644471
Date: 11 1, 2007
Author(s): Jenco Leigh Kathryn
Abstract: Panikkar 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27644482
Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646172
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Anderson Pamela Sue
Abstract: 'Janké',
p. 352n85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646178
Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646172
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Keyes et al. (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646182
Journal Title: International Journal for Philosophy of Religion
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27646209
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): DiCenso James
Abstract: Freud (1955a, p. 98).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27646213
Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i27652935
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Kliger Ilya
Abstract: O literaturnom geroe (Leningrad, 1979), 129–43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27652939
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666303
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Lucas Fábio
Abstract: Cf. Arnold Rothe (ROTHE 12, p. 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666314
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista
Issue: i27666769
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): de Rezende Neide Luzia
Abstract: Antonio Candido, "Digressão sentimental sobre Oswald de Andrade" (1977, p. 71-2). Também nesse
artigo, o crítico conta que, em 1945, Oswald prestara, na Faculdade de Filosofia da mesma universidade,
concurso de livre-docência para a cadeira de Literatura Brasileira.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27666778
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669149
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gandesha Samir
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Hegel: Three Studies, trans. Shierry Weber Nicholsen (Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press, 1993), 41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669158
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669194
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Moses A. Dirk
Abstract: German
Intellectuals and the Nazi Past (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669198
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i27669227
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Broadbent Philip
Abstract: Herzinger, "Jung, Schick und Heiter," 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27669234
Journal Title: The American Sociologist
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i27698778
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Caulfield Jon
Abstract: Visual sociology has two main interests: picture-making by researchers (or their subjects) in the course of sociological fieldwork, and pictures made by social actors in the context of everyday life. Focusing on the latter interest and based in three social aspects of images—that they are produced in general societal settings and specific institutional settings, and are a kind of discursive practice—three approaches to the sociology of visual material are illustrated.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27698784
Journal Title: The Journal of English and Germanic Philology
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: i27710725
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Chickering Howell
Abstract: Samuel Johnson, The Rambler, No. 94, The Yale Edition of the Works of Samuel John-
son, ed. W. J. Bate and A. B. Strauss (New Haven: Yale Univ. Press, 1969), iv, 136.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27710729
Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27718647
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Berghmans Ron
Abstract: Advance directives for psychiatric care are the subject of debate in a number of Western societies. By using psychiatric advance directives (or so-called "Ulysses contracts"), it would be possible for mentally ill persons who are competent and with their disease in remission, and who want timely intervention in case of future mental crisis, to give prior authorisation to treatment at a later time when they are incompetent, have become non-compliant, and are refusing care. Thus the devastating consequences of recurrent psychosis could be minimised. Ulysses contracts raise a number of ethical questions. In this article the central issues of concern and debate are discussed from a narrative perspective. Ulysses contracts are viewed as elements of an ongoing narrative in which patient and doctor try to make sense of and get a hold on the recurrent crisis inherent in the patient's psychiatric condition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27718653
Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27719254
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Leget C.
Abstract: Beginning with an exemplary case study, this paper diagnoses and analyses some important strategies of evasion and factors of hindrance that are met in the teaching of medical ethics to undergraduate medical students. Some of these inhibitions are inherent to ethical theories; others are connected with the nature of medicine or cultural trends. It is argued that in order to avoid an attitude of evasion in medical ethics teaching, a philosophical theory of emotions is needed that is able to clarify on a conceptual level the ethical importance of emotions. An approach is proposed with the help of the emotion theory Martha Nussbaum works out in her book Upheavals of thought. The paper ends with some practical recommendations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27719270
Journal Title: Journal of Medical Ethics
Publisher: BMJ Publishing Group
Issue: i27719445
Date: 8 1, 2005
Author(s): Boyd K. M.
Abstract: Medical ethics, principles, persons, and perspectives is discussed under three headings: "History", "Theory", and "Practice". Under "Theory", the author will say something about some different approaches to the study and discussion of ethical issues in medicine–especially those based on principles, persons, or perspectives. Under "Practice", the author will discuss how one perspectives based approach, hermeneutics, might help in relation first to everyday ethical issues and then to public controversies. In that context some possible advantages of moving from controversy to conversation will be explored; and that will then be illustrated with reference to a current controversy about the use of human embryos in stem cell therapy research. The paper begins with history, and it begins in the author's home city of Edinburgh.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27719458
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738594
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase J. Santiso, "Les horloges et les nuages: Temps et contretemps des démo-
cratisations", Hermès, núm. 19, 1996, pp. 165-182; J. Santiso, "Time, Démocratisation
and Rational Choice", trabajo presentado durante el Nuffield Sodology Seminar, organiza-
do por John Goldthorpe, el 29 de noviembre de 1997, Oxford University; P. Schmitter,
"Rhytm, Timing and Sequence in the Constitution of Democracy", op. cit., pp. 3 y ss. La
mayor parte de la obra de Linz, empezando por sus trabajos más recientes, aborda esta
dimensión temporal de las democratizaciones. Cabe mencionar, por ejemplo, J. Linz y
Y. Shain, "The Timing and the Nature of First Democratic Elections", en Linz y Shain
(comps.), Between States. Interim Governments and Democratic Transitions, Cambridge y
Nueva York, 1995, pp. 76-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738597
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27738655
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Duque Sonia
Abstract: Según la definición de EG. Bailey en Les règles du jeu politique, París, PUF, 1971, p. 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27738660
Journal Title: Foro Internacional
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i27739107
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Santiso Javier
Abstract: Véase Paul Ricoeur, " Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon ", en Ricoeur, Le juste, Paris,
Esprit Editions, 1995, pp. 193-208.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739114
Journal Title: The American Journal of Economics and Sociology
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i27739697
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Lopes Helena
Abstract: This article begins by presenting experimental evidence that remains unexplained by standard and utility-extended economic models: experimental subjects tend to honor their promises even on occasions when an assessment of consequences asks them to defect; subjects voluntarily contribute to collective goods, and this contribution is highly conditional on others contributing as well; subjects evaluate and value the intentions behind actions as well as the consequences of actions. Arguments are sought for in moral philosophy that would more plainly explain the collected experimental evidence and that would help economists revise their explanatory frames. The hypothesis advanced is that the observed behavior may be interpreted as resulting from the moral strength of indignation and justice norms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739705
Journal Title: The American Journal of Economics and Sociology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i27739756
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Tillmanns Jenny
Abstract: This paper deals with the question of historical responsibility. It can be subdivided into whether historical responsibility exists, consequently what it is about, and then how it can be put into practice. I am raising these questions as a third-generation German against the background of the Holocaust. In this paper I unfold various views and thus dimensions of historical responsibility, which I finally complement in the form of six models of historical responsibility. These models provide a multilayered perspective on and approach to the philosophical and practical dimensions of historical responsibility and, as a consequence, are of relevance to contemporary political culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27739763
Journal Title: Anales de la literatura española contemporánea
Publisher: Society of Spanish and Spanish-American Studies
Issue: i27741343
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Pratt Dale J.
Abstract: La discusión teórica de posibles signos interartísticos es siempre arriesgada y resbaladiza; la gran tentación es abandonar la postura crítica para fundar el intento comparativo en una sinestesia impresionista entre las artes. Es muy posible que la poesía y la pintura no tengan en común una estructura estética o mimética subyacente a la que cada signo de ambos sistemas se refiere; la posible incomensurabilidad de estos signos y sus referentes deja abierta la cuestión de cómo se relacionan las dos artes. Miguel de Unamuno explota estas ostensibles incomensurabilidades para caracterizar su propia búsqueda de fe en Dios en "El Cristo de Velázquez". La tarea de Unamuno es primero capturar el sentido del cuadro en el poema por medio de una transmutación o traducción de los códigos visuales a códigos poéticos, para luego acercarse al referente divino desde su propia metaforización del cuadro. Su encuentro con lo divino nace y sigue naciendo perpetuamente de la continua búsqueda, el descontento con la insuficiencia de la postura dogmática u ortodoxa; su intento de hallar o construir una analogía interartística entre un poema y un cuadro tiene la misma forma que la búsqueda vital de Dios. En otras palabras, Unamuno nos ofrece la analogía interartística en El Cristo de Velázquez como una heurística del proceso de conocerle a Dios.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27741346
Journal Title: Anales de la literatura española contemporánea
Publisher: Society of Spanish and Spanish-American Studies
Issue: i27741428
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Basterra Gabriela S.
Abstract: En la tragedia clásica el destino reafirma su victoria a través de la muerte del héroe. Las tragedias de "Lorca Bodas de sangre y Yerma" logran transformar esta narración a la vez que la repiten, desarticulando su lógica inexorable. Como la narración trágica presupone la usurpación de la capacidad humana de actuar por parte de una fuerza transcendente, estos dramas abren un espacio para la acción creativa en el mismo escenario trágico en el que se niega más redicalmente tal posibilidad. Si los protagonistas piensan que sus actos están predeterminados por el destino, es a causa de su compulsión por repetir una narración del pasado o del futuro, que proyectan en el presente del drama. Como consecuencia, pierden la capacidad de relacionarse con los otros y de actuar creativamente. Esta pérdida de la capacidad para la acción, y la subsiguiente falta de un agente al que hacer responsable de sus actos, lleva a los personajes a construir una otredad terrible, el destino, a la que atribuyen el control sobre sus vidas. Al reconfigurar la tragedia como la incapacidad adquirida por los personajes de reconocer la presencia del otro y actuar, "Bodas de sangre y Yerma" sugieren una nueva descripción de la acción creativa como la creación de relaciones éticas en un espacio de responsabilidad que asegure, a su vez, la dimensión libre y voluntaria de toda otra acción.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27741431
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27749757
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Bird Frederick
Abstract: Typically people make ethical judgments with reference to unchanging principles, standards, rights, and values. This essay argues that such an ahistorical approach to ethics should be supplemented by a due regard for history. Invoking precedents by authors such as Jonsen and Toulmin, McIntyre, Niebuhr, Weber, De Tocqueville, Machiavelli and others, this essay explores several important ways in which a due regard for history can and should shape the practice of business ethics. Thus a due regard for history helps us both to cultivate fitting appreciation of cultural mores and to understand how current problems and issues have developed as they have; it helps us to gauge current responsibilities with respect legacies of problems inherited from the past; it helps us to develop a lively sense of what is possible in the present, given current contingencies and past experiences; and it moves us to rethink the practice of ethical auditing: not just as a backward-looking effort to gauge compliance but as a forward-looking way of learning from actual experiences and developing fitting responses.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27749769
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i27749812
Date: 2 1, 2010
Author(s): Clegg Stewart R.
Abstract: Although studies in organizational storytelling have dealt extensively with the relationship between narrative, power and organizational change, little attention has been paid to the implications of this for ethics within organizations. This article addresses this by presenting an analysis of narrative and ethics as it relates to the practice of organizational downsizing. Drawing on Paul Ricoeur's theories of narrative and ethics, we analyze stories of organizational change reported by employees and managers in an organization that had undergone persistent downsizing. Our analysis maintains that the presence of a dominant story that seeks to legitimate organizational change also serves to normalize it, and that this, in turn, diminishes the capacity for organizations to scrutinize the ethics of their actions. We argue that when organizational change narratives become singularized through dominant forms of emplotment, ethical deliberation and responsibility in organizations are diminished. More generally, we contend that the narrative closure achieved by the presence of a dominant narrative amongst employees undergoing organizational change is antithetical to the openness required for ethical questioning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27749819
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27752851
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: Habría que insistir en los efectos nada beneficiosos que se derivan de la forma de finan-
ciar muchas de esas becas: los proyectos de investigación tienen que ceñirse –obligados por
la convocatoria– a la historia de la localidad o región en la que se solicitan. Por no extender-
nos en el carácter tan alejado de los criterios científicos que suponen las pruebas de pureza
de vecindad, por las que un alicantino que resida en Alicante, por ejemplo, tiene francamen-
te difícil acceder a una beca del gobierno aragonés (aunque siempre se le podría decir, como
consuelo, que a un aragonés tampoco se la darían en Alicante).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27752858
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27752901
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Alcantud José Antonio González
Abstract: La antropología-acción presenta dos características metodológicamente impactantes: la
incorporación del conocimiento local a las investigaciones, que son realizadas en colabora-
ción con los estudiados; y el eclecticismo y la diversidad teóricos, puesto que métodos y teo-
rías sólo poseen virtudes instrumentales (Greenwood et alii., 1993: 178-179).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27752917
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753054
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Vilanova Mercedes
Abstract: Yara Dulce Bandeira Ataide, Decifra-me ou devoro-te, Edicoes Loyola, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753057
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753153
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Pons Alex Matas
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Historia y narratividad, Barcelona, Paidós, 1999, p. 153.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753161
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753167
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Udina Dolors
Abstract: La ambivalencia de pharmakon queda subrayada desde otra perspectiva por J. Derrida, en "La pharmacie de
Platon", en Id., La dissémination, París, 1972.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753170
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753167
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Conill Montserrat
Abstract: En las referencias que aparecen a continuación, cuando no figura el lugar de la edieión signifiea que se
trata de Paris.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753177
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Universitat de Barcelona, Publicacions; Diputación Provincial de Granada, Centro de Investigaciones Etnológicas Ángel Ganivet; Ajuntament de Barcelona, Arxiu Històric de la Ciutat
Issue: i27753185
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Epele María
Abstract: Connors, M., "Stories of Pain and the Problem of AIDS Prevention: Injecting Drug Withdrawal and its
Effect on Pisk Behavior". Medical Anthropology Quarterly, 8–1 (1994), ps. 47–68.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27753200
Journal Title: Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i27758257
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Nerlich Brigitte
Abstract: 18 Cf. à ce propos Descombes, 1979, p. 114s. : "I° le signifiant précède le signifié. Le langage
n'est en aucune façon un medium, un moyen d'expression, une médiation entre l'intérieur et
l'extérieur. Car le code précède le message. (...) Le message n'est pas l'expression d'une expérience,
mais il exprime plutôt les possibilités et les limites du code utilisé au regard de l'expérience. D'où
le problème: comment énoncer de l'imprévu?".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27758261
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27762621
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): DE GRANDIS RITA
Abstract: En este estudio se exponen las asunciones fundamentales de una teoría fenomenológica de la literatura, la de Mario Valdés en Shadows in the Cave. En esta teoría, cuatro son los elementos productores de sentido: texto, autor, lector y crítico. El texto se realiza a través de la lectura, mediante un proceso en el cual el autor, en tanto lector y crítico, establece una dinámica creativa en donde la escritura se convierte en un acto de lectura. Tales postulados serán ejemplificados con un análisis de "Pierre Menard, autor del Quijote" de Jorge Luis Borges. Dicho análisis pondrá en evidencia que "Pierre Menard, autor del Quijote" es el resultado de la lectura contemporánea que el autor hace de El Quijote de Cervantes. Entre "Pierre Menard, autor del Quijote," de Borges y Don Quijote de Cervantes existe una relación de intertextualidad la cual será descrita en términos de conflicto, isomorfismo y continuidad. La relación de intertextualidad entre texto e intertexto revela que "Pierre Menard, autor del Quijote" constituye un comentario, "nota bibliográfica," que cuestiona los postulados de la ficción literaria permitiendo así al narrador de este comentario-ensayo-cuento recrear las condiciones de escritura, disectándolas para hacerlas accesibles al lector y así orientar el proceso de la lectura.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27762624
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27762759
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): DE VALDÉS MARÍA ELENA
Abstract: Este estudio sobre una novela de Carlos Fuentes tiene el propósito de profundizar sobre el sexismo institucionalizado en México y el papel que tiene la literatura como propagación de ideología para extender y para subvertir el patriarcado. Fuentes se destaca entre los escritores actuales como uno de los más subversivos del patriarcado. En este estudio se examina la caracterización de los tres personajes femeninos: Harriet Winslow, la mujer de la cara de luna y la Garduña – una trinidad femenina en el mundo del macho.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27762763
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27762816
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): LAGUNA ELPIDIO
Abstract: Este estudio es una aproximación a la obra histórica y novelística de Pedro Mir con el propósito de desentrañar dos claves hermenéuticas que fundamentan su particular visión de la historia dominicana y su proyección literaria en la novela Cuando amaban las tierras comuneras. La primera, la visión miriana de la génesis sociocultural del pueblo dominicano. La segunda, su noción del conocimiento histórico efectivo como resultado del devenir histórico-institucional del pueblo. Ello supone la consideración analítica de los textos historiográficos de Mir para dilucidar su noción de sociogénesis y periodicidad histórica, frente al mundo simbólico que nos presenta en la novela y a través del cual se intenta una re-instalación en la "verdad" de esa historia. Tal aproximación nos compele a ver la obra histórica y la novela como textos dialogantes que proponen un círculo hermenéutico en el cual el devenir histórico del pueblo es el sentido mismo de la historia y es, también, lo que dinamiza la simbología interactuante de la novela.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27762822
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763130
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): BOYER RICHARD
Abstract: Las narraciones históricas no se basan en los hechos y palabras de seres imaginados sino en los de personas reales cuyos aconteceres han sido reconstruidos a partir de fuentes documentadas. A lo largo del tiempo, el historiador se ha acercado a sus fuentes desde tres perspectivas distintas: (1) respetándolas como autoridad, (2) utilizándolas como prueba evidencial o (3) dialogando con ellas. Aunque estas tres posiciones persisten aún, la práctica actual se apoya en la tercera puesto que va más allá del simple recopilar de los documentos al enfatizar la búsqueda de su significación. Con este procedimiento se evidencia la presencia del historiador en su narración al convertirse en interlocutor, y se muestra una actitud interactiva que ilustro en este artículo con mi propia aproximación a los casos sacados de los registros del Santo Oficio de la Inquisición del México colonial.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763134
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763150
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): IBSEN KRISTINE
Abstract: El propósito de este trabajo es examinar los recursos de textualización – tanto transtextuales como metatextuales – mediante los cuales Carlos Fuentes, en su novela Cambio de piel, activa al lector y cómo esta activación coincide con sus nociones del papel de la literatura en la sociedad. El estudio concluye que Fuentes pretende implicar al lector como una manera de comunicación que extiende más allá de las fronteras del texto mismo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763157
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763258
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): VALDÉS MARIO J.
Abstract: La hermenéutica es una disciplina filosófica dedicada a la interpretación de textos culturales. Aunque tiene sus orígenes en el siglo diecisiete ha sido en los últimos treinta años que se ha distanciado de la influencia idealista de Dilthey y ha tomado un lugar prominente en los debates teóricos que han caracterizado nuestro tiempo. La época contemporánea de la hermenéutica parte de Heidegger y Gadamer; ante la crítica de Habermas y Derrida se reelaboran cuestiones centrales de intención, intencionalidad, lo determinado e indeterminado, y se emprende la hermenéutica postmoderna de Paul Ricoeur. Mis libros han venido desarrollando una teoría y crítica literaria basada en los principios hermenéuticos que aquí se demuestran en otro medio. El lector encontrará un estudio hermenéutico de la representación de la mujer en películas hispánicas que han sido parte de nuestra cultura colectiva. El artículo tiene cinco partes: principios hermenéuticos y resumen de los films; comentario hermenéutico sobre los tres films y las tres protagonistas: Ana, Gloria, Julia; problemática de la representación de la mujer en el cine; el símbolo fílmico de la mujer en su contexto social; y la función reflexiva del cine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763266
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763258
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): BENET VICENTE J.
Abstract: Ciertos filmes españoles recientes plantean un enfrentamiento con el pasado en el que destacan unas elaboraciones imaginarias densas, retóricas y alejadas de la vertiente naturalista y realista, e incluso documental, que caracterizó al cine de la transición a la democracia. Para poder conducirlas, las tramas detectivescas se han convertido en una estrategia común de estas nuevas lecturas del pasado. En ellas se identifica un trayecto hermenéutico con otro biográfico, el del personaje-detective, e histórico. Y todo ello en un marco narrativo definido por continuas metáforas del totalitarismo, referidas sobre todo a las imágenes tenebristas de la postguerra española. El cine español contemporáneo se ha distanciado de esa reflexión crítica con el pasado reciente pero permite, en filmes como los que nos ocupan en este trabajo, que las sombras de sus fantasmas se proyecten sobre el presente impregnándolo con una atmósfera de pesadilla. El relato parece conducirnos a una verdad esencial en la que siempre aparece aguardar la figura de un siniestro demiurgo, depositario final del sentido de la búsqueda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763274
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27763277
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): RUSSELL DOMINIQUE
Abstract: En la poesía de Pablo Neruda hay una preocupación por la muerte y una respuesta al tiempo que marca su avance. Esta respuesta se manifiesta en varios temas entre los cuales los más importantes son: la naturaleza, el compromiso político y el amor. En este artículo se examinan estos temas en dos de los últimos libros de Neruda, El mar y las campanas y Jardín de invierno y se compara la actitud de la voz lírica con actitudes en poemas anteriores. Se concluye que hay una nota pesimista que se introduce, como si, cerca de la muerte, el poeta dudara de la posibilidad de enfrentarse al tiempo. No se justifica, pues, la idea de que los poemas póstumos de Neruda nos dejan con un optimismo final. Más bien estos poemas demuestran la misma complejidad y las oposiciones presentes en su obra entre el poder del amor y el de la muerte, entre los dones de la naturaleza y su indiferencia, entre el papel público del poeta y el intimismo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27763286
Journal Title: Revista Canadiense de Estudios Hispánicos
Publisher: Asociación Canadiense de Hispanistas
Issue: i27764046
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): AGUADO TXETXU
Abstract: En Los amantes del Círculo Polar de Julio Medem (1998) la relación entre Otto y Ana es punto de partida, origen, momento de apertura a un otro para hacer frente a los vacíos cada vez más pronunciados del vivir. Si es una relación utópica es porque se sitúa más allá de la realidad, es decir, de las condiciones de realidad positivas de los personajes. Éstos reclaman un momento de totalidad, un momento que, aun sabiéndose efímero, no se quiere tal. Los personajes niegan la realidad de lo que se les presenta – el dolor en sus vidas: la muerte del padre de Ana, la separación de sus padres y posterior muerte de la madre de Otto – porque les deja sin referencialidad a la cual seguir aferrándose para vivir sin miedo a la muerte, para vivir sin miedo la vida. Sin embargo, no están dispuestos ni a dejarse anular ni a renunciar a momentos de plenitud. Sobre si ello es factible, sobre si es posible en este mundo burlar de alguna manera a la muerte e instalarse aunque sea precariamente en la felicidad conseguida con el amor, trata este artículo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27764050
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i27793826
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giulea Dragoş A.
Abstract: Norris
1991:273-274
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27793828
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i27797773
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Heinze Carsten
Abstract: Diese zusätzlichen “Quellen" der autobiographischen Erzählung werden oftmals von
Autoren im Vor- oder Nachwort explizit als Gedächtnisstütze genannt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27797778
Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i27802687
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: Williams, A Key into the Language of America, [i–ii].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27802693
Journal Title: Dead Sea Discoveries
Publisher: Brill
Issue: i27806733
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Jokiranta Jutta
Abstract: Cecilia Wassen and Jutta Jokiranta,
"Groups in Tension: Sectarianism in the Damascus Document and the Commu-
nity Rule," in Sectarianism in Early Judaism: Sociological Advances (ed. David J.
Chalcraft; London: Equinox, 2007), 205–45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27806736
Journal Title: Cuadernos de Pensamiento Político
Publisher: FAES-Fundación para el Análisis y los Estudios Sociales
Issue: i27822317
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): FERRER GUILLERMO GRAÍÑO
Abstract: Para los que piensen, con Rawls, que puede fundamentarse, al modo liberal, una justicia sin
moral, véase Guillermo Graffio Ferrer (2008).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27822325
Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i27823295
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Yiyu Liu
Abstract: The essential significance of scientific metaphor lies in applying the general metaphorical theory to specific interpretations and elaborations of scientific theories to form a methodology of scientific explanation. It is a contextual grasp of objective reality. A given metaphorical context and its grasp of the essence of reality can only be valid when the context is continually restructured. Taking the context as a whole, the methodological characteristic of scientific metaphor lies in the unity of understanding and choice, experience and concepts, semantic structures and metaphorical domains, rationality and irrationality. As a form of thinking based on reasons, scientific metaphor plays an important role in invention, representation, explanation, evaluation, and communication. 𱆅𣎘𡥇𰍀𦐒𤡇𠁁𢌒𤅸𣕘𰍀𡥇𩜂𤈒𩦒𠄐𱆅𣎘𩜂𰍀𠡕𠌇 𡙄𦄦𠀓, 𰀁𧒒𤐘𥄄𱆁𱆅𣎘𰍀𦁁𧡡𤘅𤠙. 𣐧𦅙𣕅𣑘𣑔𢌒𰍀𱆁𢙙𡉰 𥈦𥕩, 𡒂𦍷𢙙𰍀𦀩𦔀, 𥅥𣑐𡥇𢙙𰍀𣎄𢌒𡑐𠡔𥈦𥕩𣑔𢌒𦐒𰍀 𦍷𥤨𤘕. 𱆅𣎘𡥇𰍀𦁁𧡡𩌅𤑉𩘖𠀦: 𩜂𥌡, 𧀐𤕥, 𠁁𦔀 𡥇𢒕, 𩜂𤘕𩜂𤘕𰍀. 𠌖𠀦𱆁𦍷𩜂𰀁𥔒𩜂𰍀𤘅𤐘𤌵, 𱆅𣎘𡥇𠡕𦍷 𡑗𦄦, 𤑉, 𦄦, 𠈕𡑐𠄲𧥩𱕡𦁁𰍀𡅑.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27823305
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329132
Date: 3 1, 1971
Author(s): Wolseley Ronald N.
Abstract: Roth (1996)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782354
Journal Title: American Journal of Sociology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i329128
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Antonio Robert J.
Abstract: Although a very important figure in interdisciplinary social theory, Nietzsche is absent from sociological theory, especially in the United States. Equating rationalization with cultural homogenization and liquidation of particularity, Nietzsche saw "decadence" where modern social theorists saw progress. He held that sociology drapes cultural domination, regimentation, and exhaustion with the appearance of legitimacy. This essay explores his views about the depletion of social resources stressed in modern theory. It elaborates his "antisociology" and then traces the impact of this framework on three divergent currents of social theory. Nietzsche is read against the backdrop of modern theory in order to explore his continuing challenge to this tradition and his relevance to sociology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2782505
Journal Title: Anthropology Today
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute
Issue: i329149
Date: 10 1, 1961
Author(s): van Gennep Emiko
Abstract: M. Phylactou's
1989 Ph.D. dissertation
(University of London)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2783570
Journal Title: La Ricerca Folklorica
Publisher: Grafo
Issue: i27859582
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): ATZENI PAOLA
Abstract: Riprendo, ampliando i conte-
sti di riferimento, la complessa
nozione demartiniana di mun-
dus (De Martino 1977:11-282)
che comprende il mondo inte-
riore, come vissuto psicopatolo-
gico e di alienazione, e il mondo
esterno spazio-temporale e sim-
bolico per analizzare il rapporto
discorso-mondo. Mi allontano
dalla nozione di Searle (2001,
trad. it. 2003: 117-137) in cui la
direzione d' aggiustamento ri-
guarda un mondo come real-
tà supposta data. Mi accosto,
invece, a Vernant (1997: 49) il
cui approccio pragmatico con-
duce non solo a moltiplicare i
mondi - mondo esterno comu-
ne, mondo interno del locuto-
re, differenti mondi costituenti
ciascuno il risultato di un pro-
cesso specifico d'interazione e
di transazione-, ma anche ad
individuare senso e finalità dei
discorsi e potenza interazionale
e transazionale dei soggetti.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27859595
Journal Title: Arthuriana
Publisher: Southern Methodist University
Issue: i27869176
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): KNEPPER WENDY
Abstract: Critics have traditionally treated the narrator's addresses as evidence to assess whether Chrétien promoted the ideal of courtly love in the "Charrete". If we consider the use of appropriation and recoil movements in the total text, the operation of the will emerges as the dominant theme of the text. This theme is considered in the context of the parallel but contrasting pacts formed by Lancelot in the service of Guinevere and Chrétien in the service of Marie de Champagne.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27869182
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27888766
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: « Le temps présent est devenu éphémère, irréversible et insaisissable »,
dit A. Y. Gourevitch. Il est aussi homogène et orienté. L'historien sovié-
tique ajoute : « Pour la première fois, l'homme a constaté que le temps dont
il ne décelait le cours qu'à travers les événements, ne s'arrête pas, même en
l'absence d'événement. » A. Y. Gourevitch réintroduit ici une acception
métaphysique du temps, s'il entend bien par événements des phénomènes,
alors que dans le reste de sa contribution, il paraît convaincu de la maté-
rialité du temps. La preuve expérimentale de l'existence du temps hors des
phénomènes n'a pas été fournie et ne peut l'être. Les temps dans lesquels
nous vivons, sont celui de notre existence même, celui de notre société, celui
des mouvements des astres, etc. L'homme ne « constate » donc pas que le
temps ne s'arrête pas même en l'absence d'événement, ces événements lui
sont cachés par l'usage d'un temps quantitatif qui se réfère à l'un d'entre
eux exprimé par les horloges, devenu la référence unique, apparemment
« dématérialisé » par son omnipotence et occultant l'existence des autres
temps.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27888811
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889645
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): SPITÉRI Gérard
Abstract: Par exemple, Claude Allègre était bien considéré par la presse de droite, tandis
que celle de gauche s'est montrée plus critique à son égard. La raison en est que le
ministre de l'Education nationale s'était mis à dos le personnel enseignant, considéré
comme majoritairement à gauche. /-
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889647
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27889984
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): GROSSIN William
Abstract: Edouard T. Hall. La danse de la vie. Temps culturel et temps vécu,
Parla, Seuil, 1984, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27889995
Journal Title: L'Année sociologique (1940/1948-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i27890547
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Raulin Anne
Abstract: Si la Danse du Lion ne présente pas en soi un caractère religieux, les v ux
(offerts contre des dons en argent) sont proférés devant des autels, et prennent ainsi
un vague caractère de bénédiction. Ces autels installés dans les boutiques, sont le
plus souvent dédiés au Dieu du sol (ou « Maître des lieux ») mais aussi à d'autres divinités
dont les effigies sont promenées dans les défilés mis en place dans la Petite Asie au cours
des années 1990. Pour une description détaillée de la Danse du Lion, cf. Raulin, 2000,
101-102.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/anso.081.0047
Journal Title: Hebrew Studies
Publisher: National Association of Professors of Hebrew in Institutions of Higher Learning
Issue: i27913784
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Nevo Gideon
Abstract: S. Yizhar, Days ofZiklag, p. 1143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27913803
Journal Title: College Literature
Publisher: West Chester University
Issue: i27917777
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Speight Allen
Abstract: This article explores Arendt's approach to narrative in theory as well as practice. The first part looks at Arendt's use of philosophical sources from the tradition—Aristotle, Augustine and Hegel—with an eye to how her appropriation of these figures differs from that of contemporary philosophers of narrative. Three of Arendt's typically bold and rich claims about narrative action emerge as important: the notion of action as revealing an agent's own daimõn; the condition that such action be revealable within a world or shared public space which has resilience yet vulnerability; and the potential for agents revealed within such a world to discover some form of narrative rebirth in their efforts at story-telling. The second section examines the extent to which Arendt herself allowed those claims to be tested and thought through in her own attempts (in Men in Dark Times, Rahel Varnhagen and elsewhere) at constructing biographical narratives
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27917787
Journal Title: College Composition and Communication
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i27917904
Date: 2 1, 2011
Author(s): Cooper Marilyn M.
Abstract: Individual agency is necessary for the possibility of rhetoric, and especially for deliberative rhetoric, which enables the composition of what Latour calls a good common world. Drawing on neurophenomenology, this essay defines individual agency as the process through which organisms create meanings through acting into the world and changing their structure in response to the perceived consequences of their actions. Conceiving of agency in this way enables writers to recognize their rhetorical acts, whether conscious or nonconscious, as acts that make them who they are, that affect others, and that can contribute to the common good. Responsible rhetorical agency entails being open to and responsive to the meanings of concrete others, and thus seeing persuasion as an invitation to listeners as also always agents in persuasion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27917907
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i27919256
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Smith Jonathan Z.
Abstract: 'Pathologies in the Academic
Study of Religion: North American Institutional Case Studies,' edited by Gary Lease."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919268
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i27919976
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Ambrona Antonio Cil
Abstract: P. Ric ur, op. cit., p. 429.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27919986
Journal Title: Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Publisher: Asociación Historia, Antropología y Fuentes Orales
Issue: i27920008
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Filipetto Celia
Abstract: Adjetivo derivado del sustantivo dietrologia. En el lenguaje político y periodístico, el término designa
la búsqueda de supuestas motivaciones ocultas en el origen de un acontecimiento. [N. de la T.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27920017
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i27920233
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Juillerat Bernard
Abstract: Ibid. : 77 et 82. Les critiques viennent aussi des philosophes de l'esprit, comme John Searle. En ce
qui concerne une anthropologie cognitive, voir notre introduction « La dérive cognitiviste en anthropo-
logie » dans Penser Vimaginaire, op. cit. : 9-38.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27920242
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i27929842
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): مكدوجال جيمس
Abstract: This article proposes an interpretive reading of contemporary Algerian cultural practice as providing 'techniques of living' in which social memories of traumatic experiences are encoded. Working across several genres—literary fiction, popular music, scholarship, autobiography, political humor, and journalism—the essay seeks to delineate the economy of narration through which intensely disruptive experiences of exile and war, and competing ways of accounting for them, are internalized and expressed in the social production of self-narratives. تقوم المقالة بقراءة تأويلية للممارسات الثقافية ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ المعاصرة بوصفها ((تقنيات للعيش))٬ حيث تتحول ذكريات اجتماعية واسترجاعات جماعية للتجارب الفاجعة ٳلى أعمال أدبية وفنية بثغراتها الخاصة. وتتطرق المقالة ٳلى أجناس فنية ونقدية متعددة ـ الرواية الأدبية والموسيقى ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﺠﺔ والدراسات الأكاديمية والسير الذاتية والفكاهة ذات الطابع السياسي والصحافة ـ ساعية ٳلى ترسيم الاقتصاد الرمزي الذي عبره يتم احتواء تجارب الحرب والمنفى ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻄﱢﻠﺔ احتواءً نفسياً والتعبير عنها في نتاج يعكس الذات .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27929846
Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27932546
Date: 6 1, 1968
Author(s): Xirau Ramón
Abstract: El problema es, naturalmente, mucho más antiguo. Podrían
encontrarse sus orígenes en la discusión entre los partidarios
del movimiento —más los discípulos de Heráclito que Heráclito
mismo— y los partidarios eleáticos de la inmovilidad.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27932549
Journal Title: Diálogos: Artes, Letras, Ciencias humanas
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i27933019
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Dallal Alberto
Abstract: Sin embargo, Rousseau se dedica, como hombre que ha per-
dido su "sencillez original" y ya no puede "pasársela sin leyes y
patrones" a "respetar los cimientos sagrados" de su sociedad y
"escrupulosamente a obedecer las leyes y a los hombres que son
sus creadores y sus ministros", burlándose al mismo tiempo "de
una constitución que puede ser mantenida sólo con el auxilio de
tanta gente respetable... y la cual, a pesar de todos los cuidados
de ellos, siempre produce más calamidades reales que ventajas
aparentes".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27933025
Journal Title: Romanische Forschungen
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i27940618
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Rudelic-Fernandez Dana
Abstract: Jean Racine, Phèdre, acte V, scène 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27940625
Journal Title: Romanische Forschungen
Publisher: Vittorio Klostermann
Issue: i27942539
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Laferl Christopher F.
Abstract: In diesem Zusammenhang muß natürlich von kalligraphischen und sphragistischen
Aspekten der Urkundenbetrachtung abgesehen werden, denn diese beiden fallen nicht nur
in den Gegenstandsbereich der Historie, sondern auch in jenen der Kunstgeschichte, fur
die Fragen der Ästhetik zentral sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27942542
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944038
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Towne Edgar A.
Abstract: Sheila Greeve Davaney, "Options in Post-Modern Theology," Dialog 26 (1987), 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944043
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944252
Date: 5 1, 2002
Author(s): Doak Mary
Abstract: Moltmann, "Liberation," 276.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944254
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944372
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): van Huyssteen J. Wentzel
Abstract: Nicholas Rescher, A System of Pragmatic Idealism. Volume II: The Validity of Values
(Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1993), 3ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944375
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology & Philosophy
Publisher: Highlands Institute for American Religious Thought
Issue: i27944386
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Dorrien Gary
Abstract: Joseph L. Price, "Pedagogy
and Theological Method: The Praxis of Langdon Gilkey," ibid., 465-83.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27944392
Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i27975857
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Dans Les Chemins du paradis, Gorz est plus précis. En fait, il n'y a pas deux niveaux (macro-
social hétéronome et individuel autonome), mais trois (les deux précédents plus un niveau micro-
social autonome). Résumons ces trois niveaux: « 1) le travail macrosocial hétéronome, organisé
à l'échelle de la société tout entière et qui assure le fonctionnement ainsi que la couverture des
besoins de base [de l'ensemble des membres de la société] ; 2) les activités microsociales, coopéra-
tives, communautaires ou associatives, auto-organisées à l'échelle locale et qui auront un caractère
facultatif et volontaire, sauf dans les cas où elles se substituent au travail macrosocial pour couvrir
des besoins de base ; 3) les activités autonomes correspondant aux projets et désir personnels des
individus, familles ou petits groupes. » (Gorz [1988], p. 125-126.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/27975861
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330145
Date: 9 1, 1980
Author(s): Clifford James
Abstract: Maurice Leenhardt's ethnographic work in New Caledonia spanned nearly half a century, from 1902-1948. The first part of this field research is described and analysed, as background to his later anthropological writings. Leenhardt's specific position as a missionary-ethnographer is discussed, its advantages and disadvantages weighed. A liberal missionary perspective is found, in this case, to be conducive to a portrayal of cultural process. Leenhardt's translation methodology and his relations with key informants are detailed. Transcription, the means by which ethnographic texts are constituted by more than a single subject, is speculatively extended to ethnographic practice generally. Field research may be seen as a collective, reciprocal endeavour through which textualised translations are made. This viewpoint calls into question common notions of description, interpretation and authorship in the writing of ethnography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2801348
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330173
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): Morton John
Abstract: Central Australian Aboriginal `increase ritual' has often been seen exclusively as an attempt to control environmental forces. Following Durkheim's early arguments against this view, and expanding them to encompass a psychoanalytic perspective, it is argued that the direct effect of so-called `increase ritual' is psychological, but that this effect has consequences for the maintenance of resources in a hunter-gatherer society. `Increase ritual', as Durkheim suggested, is structured as a form of sacrifice. It is also, as Freud suggested, linked to the death of the father. It is argued here that these symbolic themes relate practically to the control which mature men exercise over the reproduction of the social and natural orders.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802500
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330179
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Spencer Jonathan
Abstract: This article reviews the recent interest in the literary aspects of ethnographic writing, concentrating on the work of Geertz, Sperber and the authors associated with the collective volume Writing culture. While it is argued that serious questions are raised in some of this work, it is also argued that recent fashions in literary critical theory may prove unhelpful in addresing those questions. In particular, the tendency to read texts with little or no consideration for the social and historical context in which they were written seems an especially barren approach. Instead it is argued that anthropology is as much a way of working-a kind of practical activity-as it is a way of writing. Acknowledgement of the personal element in the making of ethnographic texts may help the reader to a better assessment of the interpretation on offer; more radical change requires a change in anthropological practice as well as in anthropological writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802551
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330167
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Messick Brinkley
Abstract: Muftis are literate scholars who specialise in Muslim legal-religious interpretation. They provide an example of a higher level of systematic indigenous interpretation than the common sense, everyday constructions of reality that have been discussed in anthropological accounts. I discuss the institutional form of the muftiship, and contrast it with the judgeship, with reference to indigenous ideal-types found in several categories of written Muslim social thought. This ideal form is then compared with the identities of historical and contemporary muftis in Yemen. The interpretive method employed by muftis joins a Greek-derived concept of analogy with recitation and hermeneutics. While their method is structurally similar to scriptural interpretation, muftis are worldly interpreters who address practical life problems posed by lay questioners.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2802649
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330193
Date: 9 1, 1992
Author(s): Bowen John R.
Abstract: Muslims, and other people whose religions are based in scripture, develop and transform stories from scripture to explain local practices in world-religious terms, yet anthropologists seldom study these processes. This article concerns elaborations on Islamic traditions by Gayo people in highland Sumatra, Indonesia. Gayo narrators draw on stories of Adam and Eve's children to account for processes of birth, hunting and agriculture. Special attention is given here to the functions played by ideas of sibling conflict, improper marriage, and gender in these narrative transformations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2803926
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330183
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Ohnuki-Tierney Emiko
Abstract: Most symbols are polytropic as well as polysemic in that their multiple meanings in various contexts functions as different types ot trope. This article pursues the complex nature of polytropes through a formulation of synecdoche as an interstitial trope between metaphor and metonymy, and demonstrates how the two conceptual principles of analogy and contiguity, that define metaphor and metonymy respectively, are interdependent and interpenetrated, rather than of basically different natures as presented in the biaxial image of structural linguistics. The analogic thought expressed in methaphor involves movement and temporality, just as does the discursive thought of metonymy. The interpenetration of the two modes of thought is demostrated through an analysis of the process of objectification of what, throughout history, has been a dominant symbol of self in Japanese culture: the monkey. As a polysemic and polytropic symbol, the monkey takes on different meanings, and functions as different tropic types, sequentially or simultaneously, as actors use and/or interpret the symbol in varying historical and social contexts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804111
Journal Title: Man
Publisher: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland
Issue: i330184
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Carrithers Michael
Abstract: Sociocultural anthropology and evolutionary biology have reached the point at which it is possible to give a coherent and synthetic account of the origins of human cultural variability. From a sociocultural perspective what must be explained is not just the fact of varying cultures and societies, but also the human capacity to create, maintain and alter social forms over time. From a biological perspective we have to ask, what is the selective advantage of such variability? The answer lies in human sociality. Sociality consists in a package of social intellectual capacities-higher order intentionality, pedagogy, narrativity, crativity, speech-which made possible an increasing division of labour. But as these capacities grew, they gave rise to distinctively human (rather than Darwinian) history, that is to the forms of social, political, economic and cultural causation which create ever new variations on the theme of social existence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2804560
Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212428
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Hodder Ian
Abstract: This paper seeks further to define the processes of the interpretation of meaning in archaeology and to explore the public role such interpretation might play. In contrast to postmodern and poststructuralist perspectives, a hermeneutic debate is described that takes account of a critical perspective. An interpretive postprocessual archaeology needs to incorporate three components: a guarded objectivity of the data, hermeneutic procedures for inferring internal meanings, and reflexivity. The call for an interpretive position is related closely to new, more active roles that the archaeological past is filling in a multicultural world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/280968
Journal Title: American Antiquity
Publisher: Society for American Archaeology
Issue: i212446
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Williamson Ronald F.
Abstract: In this paper we argue that archaeologists and anthropologists should be aware of forces that encourage the separation of archaeology from anthropology. Sociological, organizational, and intellectual factors that do not necessarily have disciplinary separation as their logical consequence can nonetheless have a cumulative effect that moves the relationship between the subfields of anthropology in the direction of greater or lesser independence. We compare the relative strength of certain factors that could either encourage or discourage the perpetuation of four-field anthropology in Canada and the United States.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/282294
Journal Title: Transactions of the American Philological Association (1974-)
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i212536
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Brooks Deborah H.
Abstract: "literature would be incomprehensible if it did not give a con-
figuration to what was already a figure in human action" (above, note 3) 64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/284267
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: The Mediaeval Academy of America
Issue: i333021
Date: 4 1, 1946
Author(s): Gilson Gerhart B.
Abstract: Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899, Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis (Paris,
1946), p. 288
Letter to André Fontainas of March, 1899
288
Lettres de Gauguin à sa femme et à ses amis
1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2854972
Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212645
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Godin Benoit
Abstract: Literature discussing rhetoric is mainly concerned with rhetoric per se - its structure, and the categorization of arguments by kind. Rarely do rhetorical studies examine the actual effects on audiences, and auditors' reactions. On the other hand, sociological studies of scientific controversies look at rhetoric - or argumentation - in action, but with few references to rhetorical studies. The purpose of this paper is to integrate rhetorical studies into the sociology of technology in order to integrate the concept of action into discourse analysis. I intend to show how the use of discourse to enroll actors in a health technology is intimately linked to action. I deconstruct the promoters' strategy into two discursive components - the utility component and the fear-reduction component - to show how the rhetoric of expectations (utility) and representations (fear) contingently shape the fate of a technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285670
Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i212655
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Bowen G. Michael
Abstract: In this paper, we describe and theorize the topology of 'vision' in field ecology, a domain considerably different from laboratory work in the physical sciences, and discuss the temporal extension of data-collection practices. Data collection in this field is characterized by widely varying measurements, measurement dimensions and temporal extension of data collection. We present the ecologists' field laboratory as a perceptual machinery with a heterogeneous and heteromaterial topology as it pertains to measures, precision, replication and other material practices. Because of the complexity of ecological fieldwork, considerable co-ordination and articulation work is necessary. Here, tables, tags and labels are central tools to achieve coherence of inscriptions. We topicalize the work that digitizes measurements conducted on lizards and their habitats, and that therefore imposes signs that lend themselves to mathematical and statistical processes. It is only through these digitizing processes that lizards become visible to other (interested) ecologists, most of whom have not seen this particular animal species in person. We thereby contribute in new ways to discussions of the topography and topology of scientific vision, to the relation of measurement to practice, and to the 'adequation' of nature and mathematics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/285799
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i337890
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Wimsatt Linda
Abstract: Middleton, 127-36
127
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2865344
Journal Title: French Historical Studies
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i212745
Date: 4 1, 1840
Author(s): Thierry Bonnie G.
Abstract: Natalie Zemon Davis, "History's Two Bodies," American Historical Review93 (February
1988): 1-30.
10.2307/1865687
1
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/286626
Journal Title: French Historical Studies
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i212745
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): de Certeau Roger
Abstract: Michel de Certeau, The Practice of Everyday Life, trans. Steven F. Rendall (Berkeley, Calif.,
1984), 29-42.
de Certeau
29
The Practice of Everyday Life
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/286629
Journal Title: French Historical Studies
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i212737
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Rémond John
Abstract: ibid.,
340-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/286783
Journal Title: French Historical Studies
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i212746
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): Spitzer Lloyd
Abstract: Ibid., 186.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/286939
Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i338567
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Foucault Leeds
Abstract: conference "The Mental
World of the Jacobean Court," The Folger Shakespeare Library, March 18, 1988.
The Mental World of the Jacobean Court
conference
1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2870707
Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: The Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i338604
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Price Michael
Abstract: Martin Price, Forms of Life: Character and
Moral Imagination in the Novel (New Haven, CT: Yale UP, 1983), 55.
Price
55
Forms of Life: Character and Moral Imagination in the Novel
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2871252
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i342167
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Irving Monika
Abstract: Thomas Luckmann, "Gelebte Zeiten-und deren Überschneidungen im Tages- und Lebenslauf,"
in Epochenschwelle und Epochenbewußtsein, ed. Herzog and Koselleck (above, n.2), pp. 283-304.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2886761
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i345794
Date: 12 1, 1909
Author(s): James Kevin
Abstract: Henry
James, The Wings of the Dove, 2 vols., vols. 19-20 of the New York Edition [New York:
Charles Scribner's Sons, 1909], II, 226).
James
226
II
The Wings of the Dove
1909
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903145
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i346021
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): HaackAbstract: Newsweek, January 30, 1956, p. 56.
January 30
56
Newsweek
1956
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2903882
Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i346371
Date: 3 1, 1947
Author(s): Leenhardt Eduardo
Abstract: Maurice Leenhardt's superb Do Kamo. La personne et le mythe dans le monde
mélanésien, (Paris, 1947), particularly the ninth chapter, "La parole," pp. 164-86.
Leenhardt
La parole
164
Do Kamo. La personne et le mythe dans le monde mélanésien
1947
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2906107
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Fiction
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i348122
Date: 9 1, 1975
Author(s): Knoepflmacher John P.
Abstract: "George Eliot's 'Eminent
Failure': Will Ladislaw," in This Particular Web, pp. 22-42
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2932968
Journal Title: Nineteenth-Century Literature
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i348147
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Weltman Sharon Aronofsky
Abstract: Ruskin's complex attitude toward women has long been important to feminist and Victorian studies; over a quarter-century ago Kate Millett published Sexual Politics and its famous attack on Ruskin's essay "Of Queens' Gardens." She charged Ruskin with promoting a sugar-coated but perfidious system of separate spheres for men and women. Yet shortly after Ruskin produced that idealized vision of housewife-queens in 1865, he created a new ideal queen in his mythological study The Queen of the Air (1869), this time elaborated from Athena. Through his mythopoesis, Ruskin disrupts both conventional gender categories and his own implication in them. Ruskin presents a series of binary oppositions that he immediately conflates: Athena and Medusa, air and earth, bird and snake, formation and destruction, science and myth, male and female. Ruskin documents the instability of his oppositions through a bizarre "natural language" where real-life creatures such as birds and snakes serve as eternal hieroglyphs, signifying universally recognizable abstractions. That seemingly fixed signs in Athena's hieroglyphic code inevitably change is clear from Ruskin's acknowledgment of Darwin's evolutionary theory. But evolution slips into a wild image of degenerative metamorphosis, where all the divisions that Ruskin has so laboriously noted dissolve. Since Ruskin identifies Athena with each seemingly opposed animal signifier in his language of living hieroglyphs, he subverts all linguistic difference and ultimately feminizes signification itself. Through myth Ruskin creates a mutable language, one where genders as well as signs become mobile rather than fixed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2933999
Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews Inc.
Issue: i348454
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Kuklick Henrika
Abstract: Before World War II the intellectual climate of American sociology was congenial to the growth of a sociology of knowledge akin to Mannheim's. Yet in the postwar period American sociologists committed themselves to ahistorical theory, positivist methodology, and team research; their "scientistic" sociology did not permit the historicism, relativism, and holism necessary to Mannheimian analysis. Currently, however, convergent trends in a number of disciplines--not only sociology but also philosophy, anthropology, literary criticism, and the histories of ideas, science, and art--favor a revival of the Mannheimian program. Analysts of culture now seek to integrate the sociological goals of "explanation" and "understanding"--the formulation of quasi-laws of behavior, based on identification of the social structural elements of culture production, and the interpretation of the subjective meaning of culture, based on recovery of actors' intentions. Their research program requires investigation of the peculiar sociohistorical circumstances that condition actors' perceptions, necessitating attention to the cognitive content of culture. This article surveys both the theoretical justifications for such a research program and recent exemplifications of it, focusing on anlyses of what Mannheim termed "objective culture"--such symbolic vehicles for conceptions as religion, the arts, science, and political thought that acquire independent existence, becoming subject to diverse interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/2946067
Journal Title: Australasian Historical Archaeology
Publisher: The Australasian Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i29544323
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): SHORTLAND MICHAEL
Abstract: Sigmund Freud's work continues to attract interest from philosophers, analysts and historians, and the earliest formulation of his theory of the unconscious and the 'seduction hypothesis' have recently received particular attention. While Freud's intellectual debt to such figures as Darwin, Nietzsche, Helmholtz and Brücke has been well documented, the influence of Heinrich Schliemann on him and his work is little known. The purpose of this paper is to explore the ways in which Schliemann's work helped Freud fashion himself as an 'archaeologist of the mind' and how, in the crucial year 1896, it enabled him to construct and present his new ideas. The paper also explores Freud's interest in collecting and suggests how and why Freud's debts to archaeology are not, as commonly thought, visible in the so-called 'archaeological metaphor of mind', but present in other areas of his life and writing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29544326
Journal Title: Annual Review of Sociology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i29737680
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Abell Peter
Abstract: Abell (1987)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29737695
Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i29739944
Date: 2 1, 1987
Author(s): Yamal Ricardo
Abstract: Bretón, Manifiesto del Surrealismo, p. 96.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29739955
Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i29742024
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Ortega Francisco
Abstract: Francisco Ortega, Amizade e estética da existencia em Foucault,
Biblioteca de Filosofía e Historia das Ciencias, 22 (Rio de Janeiro: Ediçoes Graal, 1999),
especially 21-29; 123-143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29742027
Journal Title: Grial
Publisher: Editorial Galaxia
Issue: i29750702
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Queiruga Andrés Torres
Abstract: Th. Nkeramihigo, L!komme et la transcendence selon Paul Ricoeur. Essai de poetique dans
la philosophie de Paul Ricoeur, Paris/Namur 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29750705
Journal Title: Grial
Publisher: Editorial Galaxia
Issue: i29751160
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Villaverde Marcelino Agís
Abstract: Ricoeur, P. Ibidem, p. 231.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29751165
Journal Title: East and West
Publisher: Istituto Italiano per l'Africa e l'Oriente
Issue: i29757250
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Santangelo Paolo
Abstract: F. Dallmayr, 'Tradition, Modernity and Confucianism', Human Studies, 16,
1993, pp. 203-11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29757264
Journal Title: Gesta
Publisher: International Center of Medieval Art
Issue: i29764899
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): CARRUTHERS MARY J.
Abstract: To serve their purpose well, many so-called mnemonic images in the Middle Ages facilitated meditation and invention by presenting many rich materials in a highly abbreviated form, which could be expanded and recombined for a variety of compositions. To abbreviate fruitfully requires rigorous compression and selection, a kind of forgetting that was distinguished both in theory and practice from rote recitation or learning by heart. The twelfth- and thirteenth-century diagram called the Cherub offers an excellent example of how such an image was used in study and composition. Focusing on six versions of it, this essay demonstrates that the medieval cherub image is not an illustration tied to any particular text but functioned independently as an analytical tool, an art for inventing arguments, which incorporated the methods of medieval dialectic and rhetoric.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29764902
Journal Title: Review of Social Economy
Publisher: Catholic Economic Association
Issue: i29767894
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Goulet Denis A.
Abstract: 1960 by Lebret,
"Problematique de la Morale Collective."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29767895
Journal Title: Review of Social Economy
Publisher: Routledge Journals
Issue: i29769874
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Mischel Kenneth
Abstract: Wright (1945)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29769878
Journal Title: Irish University Review
Publisher: Irish University Review
Issue: i29777260
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Lin Yu-chen
Abstract: This essay explores the drama of selfhood and the attendant problem of ethics in Brian Friel's Faith Healer. Drawing from the tenets of Freudian psychoanalysis, I scrutinize the protagonist's narrative identity through fissures created by the discrepancy between his story and the other two characters' versions. These crevices register the protagonist's post-traumatic affects for an uncanny home, which, intertwined with his equally uncanny talent to become the place of trauma, compels him to return time and again instead of acknowledging its loss. Symptomatically, in his fixation on an uncanny home in order to disavow its loss, the protagonist sutures his privation, to such an extent that he not only bars memory exchange with other characters, but appropriates them into a master narrative. Given the fact that the three characters' stories are addressed to invisible auditors who converge with the play's actual audience, the healer's final act of authority is limited as long as it is subject to the audience's interpretation of his memory narrative. In its appeal to the audience's decision on ethical justice for the healer's narrative imagination among multiple proposals, this play is an exercise of poetical ethics of memory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29777267
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782741
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Chivallon Christine
Abstract: Yang-Ting (2000).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782752
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i29782767
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Giraud Michel
Abstract: Dubois 1998 : 8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/29782785
Journal Title: Social Service Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i30011441
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): White Sheldon H.
Abstract: The rhetoric of social work often seeks its legitimacy and authority on the idea that knowledge can be translated into skills. Knowledge is made in universities in the form of timeless, objective, context-free truths about people and social institutions. Such knowledge rationalizes and justifies the professional practices of social work. It is not clear, however, that the knowledge-into-skills story fully explains social work practices. Practice is often ineffective and tends to throw social workers into moral quandaries, leaving them to practice in a context of faith and doubt. In addition to skills, social workers share values, purposes, the wielding of and submission to power, and mythic stories. Timely, value-expressive, contextual knowledge helps social work to create and maintain social solidarity and to shift its dispositions of skills, purposes, power, and myth to keep up with the pace of social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30011443
Journal Title: Anthropological Linguistics
Publisher: Department of Anthropology and the American Indian Studies Research Institute, Indiana University
Issue: i30027993
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Bonvillain Nancy
Abstract: This paper discusses semantic aspects of noun incorporation in Akwesasne Mohawk, one of six Northern Iroquoian languages spoken today. Meanings of verb stems with incorporated nouns are shown to range from literal referents of transitive action to abstract, nontangible metaphors. NI is examined as the structural means through which novel semantic units are formed. These new units expand the interpretative range of basic meanings as part of creative linguistic and conceptual processes. Metaphors are created to fulfill lexical and poetic functions. Data are presented and analyzed from body part and other semantic domains.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30027997
Journal Title: Asian Folklore Studies
Publisher: Nanzan University, Anthropological Institute
Issue: i30030308
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Kim Seong-Nae
Abstract: Oral traditions can contain elements of historical evidence and convey meaning. The narrative pattern of oral epics serves not merely as "a mnemonic device" that aids in recalling significant historical events but makes meaningful connections to the cultural experience of identity politics. On Cheju Island, a volcanic island located some fifty miles below the southernmost tip of the Korean peninsula, the indigenous sense of identity and history is expressed and accentuated in the fate of the shrine deities who are portrayed as exiles in shamanic epics such as ponhyang ponp'uri. The tragic heroism in the cliché of exile and return of the shrine deities recapitulates the historical identity of Cheju people as "exiles at the frontier." After Cheju Island lost political autonomy as an independent kingdom, Tam-ra, in the early twelfth century, the Cheju people's cultural memory of isolation and redemptive desire for liberation from the mainland state's domination becomes intelligible and justifiable textually through the heroic acts of exiled deities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30030312
Journal Title: British Educational Research Journal
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i30032703
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): James David
Abstract: Grounded theory's popularity persists after three decades of broad-ranging critique. In this article three problematic notions are discussed-'theory,' 'ground' and 'discovery'-which linger in the continuing use and development of grounded theory procedures. It is argued that far from providing the epistemic security promised by grounded theory, these notions-embodied in continuing reinventions of grounded theory-constrain and distort qualitative inquiry, and that what is contrived is not in fact theory in any meaningful sense, that 'ground' is a misnomer when talking about interpretation and that what ultimately materializes following grounded theory procedures is less like discovery and more akin to invention. The procedures admittedly provide signposts for qualitative inquirers, but educational researchers should be wary, for the significance of interpretation, narrative and reflection can be undermined in the procedures of grounded theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30032707
Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i30036245
Date: 11 1, 2007
Author(s): Westlund Ingrid
Abstract: Recently, a five-year trial period without a set timetable for compulsory school education in 79 municipalities was concluded in Sweden. The overall idea of the trial was to facilitate local participation, local time governance and flexible learning. Within the pilot trial, each individual pupil's school activities were supposed to be designed to suit his/her needs, interests and prerequisites. This article examines how teachers, principals and students describe students' schoolwork as being located in the intersection between school/home, work/leisure, time/task and individual/collective spheres. Three empirical studies indicate that the essential part of new temporal habits of school concerns a reconstructed task orientation. Time has been taken into the service of tasks and clocktime is not always a taken for granted regulator in educational settings. Potential disadvantages with a more task-oriented education are also discussed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036255
Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i30036862
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Laoire Lillis Ó.
Abstract: White
1998:38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30036872
Journal Title: The Academy of Management Review
Publisher: Academy of Management
Issue: i30040701
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Crane Andrew
Abstract: We use a narrative perspective to explore the relevance of the sciences dealing with ecology for management theory and practice, presenting the issues of ecoscience from the perspective of green narrative, based on the "evolutionary epic." Adopting an interpretive sensemaking perspective on narrative, we address the narratological basis of the evolutionary epic and examine the potential for the narrative to inform a new relationship between management and the natural environment. We suggest implications for management theory and practice by examining elements of the narrative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30040710
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i30040946
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Gordon Peter Eli
Abstract: Habermas, The Theory of Communicative Action, I: Reason and the
Rationalization of Society (Boston: Beacon Press, 1984), and "Die Moderne-ein unvol-
lendetes Projekt," Die Moderne ein unvollendetes Projekt, Philosophisch-politische Auf
sätze (Leipzig: Reclam, 1994) 32-54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30040953
Journal Title: Studies: An Irish Quarterly Review
Publisher: The Talbot Press, The Academic Press
Issue: i30087245
Date: 12 1, 1967
Author(s): Gallagher Michael P.
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, De l'Interprétation: essai sur Freud, Paris, 1965, P. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30087253
Journal Title: Studies: An Irish Quarterly Review
Publisher: The Talbot Press, The Academic Press
Issue: i30088705
Date: 7 1, 1971
Author(s): Gallagher Michael Paul
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, 'The Hermeneutics of Symbols and Philosophical Reflection', Inter-
national Philosophical Quarterly, ii (1962), 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30088712
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30116051
Date: 3 1, 1982
Author(s): Vincent Gilbert
Abstract: Reflections by scientists, philosophers and sociologists upon the role of science as the motor of modern history show that apocalyptics can be interpreted neither as irrationalism nor as rhetorical, emphatic speech. Speaking out of the imagination, apocalyptics takes the form of a discourse that is hypercritical of and the least inexact about science, whenever scientific successes have rendered the habitual distinction between reality and model untenable. The imaginary realm of apocalyptics follows upon utopia and science fiction. However it has to be separated from "catastrophism". The latter still takes science to be a messiah because its idea of scientific develop. ment conceals favorable future effects underneath presentday catastrophic consequences. By refusing to separate intentions and effects and by objectifying science as a "totalizing" power, apocalyptics, on the other hand, leads to an irreversible situation that identifies history and destiny. Not only the semantic contents of the apocalyptic discourse are examined but also its "pragmatic" value is weighed. Its paradoxical declarations assume the form of a discourse whose proclamation has a meaning-an instituting scope-that literally contradicts its content, the proclaimed "non-sense" of science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30116057
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30116663
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Manevy Anne
Abstract: AUSTIN, 1955.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30116666
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30124108
Date: 6 1, 1976
Author(s): Silverstone Roger
Abstract: Caws, 1970, p. 214
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30124111
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Centre national de la recherche scientifique
Issue: i30128575
Date: 9 1, 1992
Author(s): Stoller Paul
Abstract: Avec cette ethnologie de la possession chez les Songhay l'auteur propose une anthropologie de la possession valable pour l'ensemble du monde noir. II établit un parallèle entre possession et roman folkloriste (ou blues) pour dégager cette mémoire profonde des hommes. Une analyse bibliographique critique atteste des progrès accomplis par les sciences sociales dans ce domaine. L'A. conclut que ce n'est pas seulement la vision qui déclenche la possession mais tout autant les odeurs, les sons et les rythmes. La possession lui apparaît comme un phénomène dont la fonction est d'orienter les interrogations des hommes sur leur identité personnelle d'une part et d'autre part, comme une manière d'aborder les manifestations extérieures qui les assaillent. Les différents sens sont évoqués en parallèle avec la littérature anthropologique concernant le « blues » nord-américain noir, en même temps que la dure quotidienneté actuelle. /// Con este análisis de la posesión entre los Songhaï, el autor propone una antropología de la posesión válida para el conjunto del universo cultural de las sociedades africanas. Establece un paralelo entre posesión y novela foklórica para poder desprender la memoria profunda de los hombres. Al conocimiento minucioso del terreno se superpone una investigación crítica de la bibliografía que permite comprender la progresión y los avances que las ciencias sociales han realizado en este sector. El autor llega a la conclusión que no es únicamente la visión que provoca la posesión sino, en igual medida, los olores, los sonidos y los ritmos. Presenta la posesión como un fenómeno que tiene por función orientar la interrogación de los hombres sobre su identidad personal por una parte y, por otra, como una manera de abordar las manifestaciones exteriores que les acometen. Las diferentes significaciones son evocadas en paralelo con la literatura anthropológica relativa a los « blues » norteamericanos. Al mismo tiempo, es la cotidianidad dura y concreta que es evocada en el estudio.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128582
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i30128859
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Furtado Claudio
Abstract: Latouche, Laurent, Singleton, Servais, 2004
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30128866
Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i30133352
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): della Dora Veronica
Abstract: Over the past few years, the relationship between landscape and the body as two physical entities mutually informed through performance has been increasingly interrogated by cultural geographers. Similar issues about memory, embodiment and performativity have been raised in the social sciences, yet often obliterating the material specificities of place and landscape. This paper reconsiders the relationship between landscape and memory in terms of embodied, visual and spatial practice, rather than as a contested cultural politics of heritage and identity (as it has been generally understood in cultural geography after the so-called 'cultural turn'). Drawing on Nora's 'memory places' and on the Deleuzian notion of 'ontological past', as well as on recent writing on historical geographies of exploration and travel, the paper explores the spatial re-activation of Classical historical memory by nineteenth-century British officers and travellers to Aegean mountain peaks through their embodied and site-located practices of climbing, surveying or simply 'gazing'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30133358
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i30141875
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Matheson Tamara Chaplin
Abstract: Grain de Philo, Les mots de la philosophie, Pas si vite, Cogito, L'abécedaire de Gilles
Deleuze and Philosophies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30141880
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154098
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Johannsen Jochen
Abstract: After some initial remarks on the ongoing historiographic debates regarding experience as an analytical category, the article first tries to show, through a concise survey of J. G. Herder's essays on Ossian and Shakespeare, that Herder cannot be claimed as a source for the notion of historical experience in the sense of an immediate access to the past, as the theorist of history F. R. Ankersmit has stated. Instead, this article argues, experience can be understood as one of the key terms of Herder's historical view of modernity, whose development he describes as involving a paradigmatic change in the character of human experience itself. For Herder, the shift from primary to secondary experience in the modern historical process results in the necessity of an aestheticization of historiography. In this respect, the article briefly concludes, Herder inspired 19thcentury historians such as G. G. Gervinus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154104
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154135
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Statkiewicz Max
Abstract: The article resituates Ricur's theory of métaphore vive in the contemporary context of the so-called "cognitive revolution." The latter denomination is highly misleading. There is nothing revolutionary about the cognitivist study of metaphor as a general pattern of thought; just like the discipline of rhetoric that was already on the decline in l8th century Europe, it is conservative in its validation of everyday, ideologically charged language as the model for all language, including that of poetry and art. Riceur’s conception of "live metaphor," on the other hand, does justice to the "revolutionary" character of poetic language, its function of breaking the order of "commonplaces we live by"—and are ruled by. A "poem in miniature," metaphor constitutes the model for any "poietic," creative imagination. Resulting from a clash, disturbing the common everyday language, live metaphor (and poetry in general) projects a world in such a way as to render strange and thus question the world we live in.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154140
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30154373
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Wogenstein Sebastian
Abstract: The question how to situate Dea Loher's drama Manhattan Medea in the Medea reception serves as a point of departure for a discussion of imitation, originality, and the act of copying. In their dialogues, the characters Medea, as in Euripides' tragedy a refugee, and Velazquez, a security guard, reflect on originality and imitation. The article explores the theoretical and self-referential aspects evoked by these discussions and links them with a more general inquiry into the dimensions of interpretation in the arts. The question of originality and appropriation is expanded and problematized through focusing on radical social criticism voiced among others by the drag queen Deaf Daisy. In this context the article also examines the potential of performative signification encountered in Medea's deadly bridal gift, especially in light of Marjorie Garber's remark that "[w]hat gets married is a dress." Transgressive in its form too, Manhattan Medea combines tragic elements and those characteristic of comedy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30154377
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30157392
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): McDonald William C.
Abstract: Hie vor dô wir kinder wâren by Der Wilde Alexander (fl. 1250) proceeds from the words of St. Paul: "Even so we, when we were children [nepioi], were in bondage under the elements of the world" (Galatians 4:3). Accordingly, the "Kindheitslied" is no nostalgic song of retrospection in the form of sacred, didactic allegory (a gloss is absent), but rather is an extended scriptural analogy addressing the change from the Old Law to the New. The words dô and nu (1,1 and 1,7) reflect New Testament rhetoric. The biblical echo in the opening line permits immediate identification; thus Alexander relies neither on progressive unveiling of his message nor on a language or ciphers. The "Kindheitslied" can be profitably discussed in conjunction with the body of literature on the encounter of Church and Synagogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30157396
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30157601
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Christensen Peter G.
Abstract: Verein der Freunde
einer Schwulen Museum, Eldorado: Homosexuelle Frauen und Männer in Berlin 1850-
1950: Geschichte, Alltag, und Kultur. (Berlin: Froelich & Kaufmann, 1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30157608
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i30161639
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Wiegmann Reinhilde
Abstract: Ricoeur 238-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30161646
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203180
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Marsé Juan
Abstract: Gérard Genette's Narrative
Discourse:
I propose, without insisting on the obvious reasons for my choice of terms, to
use the word story for the signified, or narrative content (even if this content
turns out, in a given case, to be low in dramatic intensity or fullness of incident),
to use the word narrative for the signifier, statement, discourse or narrative text
itself, and to use the word narrating for the producing narrative action and, by
extension, the whole of the real or fictional situation in which that action takes
place. (27)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203187
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203366
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): García Carlos Javier
Abstract: Margarita (en quien
reconocemos a Matilde) que tenía "limitada su agudeza por la seguridad de sí misma
que le era habitual" (99), afirmándose sujactancia y su actitud dominadora (101)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203381
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203516
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Iarocci Michael P.
Abstract: Galdós' classic treatment of the subject, "La sociedad presente como materia
novelable" (Ensayos 173-182)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203520
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203516
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Aggor F. Komla
Abstract: Artaud opts for lunacy,
Nieva always emerges with "la risa" in the midst of tragedy (Barrajón 16)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203531
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30203651
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): de Ràfols Wifredo
Abstract: Lima 56-57)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30203654
Journal Title: Computers and the Humanities
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i30204873
Date: 2 1, 2003
Author(s): Gardner Colin
Abstract: Traditional discourses upon literature have been predicated upon the ability to refer to a text that others may consult (Landow, 1994, p. 33). Texts that involve elements of feedback and nontrivial decision-making on the part of the reader (Aarseth, 1997, p. 1) therefore present a challenge to readers and critics alike. Since a persuasive case has been made against a critical method that sets out to "identify the task of interpretation as a task of territorial exploration and territorial mastery" (Aarseth, p. 87), this paper proposes the use of readers in an empirically based approach to hypertext fiction. Meta-interpretation, a method that combines individual responses to a text, reading logs, screen recordings and limited qualitative/quantitative analysis, and critical interpretation is outlined. By analysing readers' responses it is possible to suggest both the ways that textual elements may have influenced or determined readers' choices and the ways that readers' choices "configure" the text. The method thus addresses Espen Aarseth's concerns and illuminates interesting features of interactive processes in fictional environments. The paper is divided into two parts: the first part sketches out meta-interpretation through consideration of the main problems confronting the literary critic; the second part describes reading research aimed at generating data for the literary critic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30204878
Journal Title: Revista Hispánica Moderna
Publisher: Hispanic Institute, Columbia University
Issue: i30207958
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Garlinger Patrick Paul
Abstract: Derrida's well-known analysis of the link
between "genre" and "gender" in "The Law of Genre."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30207972
Journal Title: Keats-Shelley Journal
Publisher: Keats-Shelley Association of America
Issue: i30210332
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Murphy John F.
Abstract: Reading Paul de Man Reading, ed., Lindsay Walters and Wlad
Godzich (Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1989), 155-70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30210343
Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222215
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Harth Dietrich
Abstract: C. Geertz: The Interpreation of Cultures. Selected Essays, New York 1973. Ders.: Local Know-
ledge. Further Essays in Interpretive Anthropology, New York 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222224
Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30222610
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Forsyth Neil
Abstract: God who can both love and hate (1.5 - 8.32)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30222613
Journal Title: International Journal of the Classical Tradition
Publisher: Transaction Periodicals Consortium
Issue: i30224118
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Simons Karen
Abstract: Thomas' opposition of the personal and the traditional somewhat
problematic, however; he writes, for instance, that "personal experience is private property,
while literary tradition is shared and accessible to all poets" (183)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30224122
Journal Title: The Journal of Modern African Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i30224936
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Rubbers Benjamin
Abstract: In order to give an account of the Congolese tragedy since independence, the inhabitants of Haut-Katanga often resort to four different narratives: the abandonment by Belgium; the biblical curse on Africans; the conspiracy of Western capitalism; or the alienation of life powers by Whites. Though these four stories offer different scenarios, they are all constructed with two types of actors - Whites and Congolese people. This article suggests that this racial/national frame finds its origins in colonial and national ideologies, which have left their mark on Haut-Katanga, and that it continues today to structure the narratives through which people remember their post-colonial history. Collective memory and racial/national identity are reciprocally constituted in these stories, but in different terms. They offer, accordingly, different ways of influencing the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30224943
Journal Title: Contemporary Religions in Japan
Publisher: International Institute for the Study of Religions
Issue: i30233022
Date: 9 1, 1968
Author(s): Ching Julia
Abstract: Ibid., p. 382.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233024
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233499
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Deal William E.
Abstract: RICOEUR's discussion (1986) of Weber's views of ideology
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233502
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233773
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Leighton Taigen Dan
Abstract: MORRELL 1987, pp. 47-48, 103-22
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233778
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Rhodes Robert F.
Abstract: SEKIGUCHI 1968, 90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233812
Journal Title: Japanese Journal of Religious Studies
Publisher: Nanzan Institute of Religion and Culture
Issue: i30233809
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bathgate Michael
Abstract: BAKHTIN 1981, 252
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30233813
Journal Title: Israel Studies
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i30245669
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Glasner-Heled Galia
Abstract: Among the prominent writers on the Holocaust, Yehiel Dinur, who wrote under the pseudonym Ka-Tzetnik, offers his readers the most horrific, almost unbearable reading experience. This article examines the reader-writer relationship in Holocaust literature by considering whether readers of Ka-Tzetnik’s works are able, in Ricoeur's terms, to appropriate or actualize the meaning of a literary text that discloses a mode of "being-in-the-world" that is intensely unbearable and seemingly inexpressible. Interviews were conducted with a group of people who, through their professions as writer, literary scholar, educator, or historian, are concerned with such issues. Two main responses to Ka-Tzetnik were discerned: Some readers perceive him as so warped by his experiences that his extreme, even "insane", vision actually stands as a barrier between the reader and the reality of the Holocaust. For others, it is precisely the unrestrained portrayal of the insane Holocaust reality that is identified with an unmediated "true" Holocaust experience. The first group of readers does not believe that Ka-Tzetnik’s texts can be appropriated. But the reading experience of the second group can also not be characterized as appropriation: for them Ka-Tzetnik creates a primarily emotional core experience, which cannot be deconstructed to reconstruct or actualize the text in the reader's own terms, in the present. The case of Ka-Tzetnik, therefore, raises the difficult question of whether the Holocaust can be understood through a dialogical process of deconstruction and appropriation, or whether Holocaust literature should offer an overwhelming, totalizing experience in which precisely the inability to deconstruct and appropriate the text ensures the communication of the inconceivable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30245675
Journal Title: La Linguistique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i30248594
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): François Frédéric
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, «Recherches de critère du phénomène idéologique» (et autres
articles), in Du texte à l'action. Essais d'herméneutique, II, Ed. du Seuil, 1986, 410 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/30248603
Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213383
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Young Laura E.
Abstract: Singer, A Metaphorics of Fiction, 27.
27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303282
Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213389
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Hintikka Meili
Abstract: Bernstein, Beyond Objectivism and Relativism, 82.
82
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303361
Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213385
Date: 4 1, 1929
Author(s): Dewey Ross
Abstract: The Later Works, 3: 10
10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303450
Journal Title: boundary 2
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i213400
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): Wellmer Alan
Abstract: "The Adequacy of the Aesthetic," Philosophy and Social Criticism
20, no. 1-2 (1994): 39-72
Wellmer
1
39
20
Philosophy and Social Criticism
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/303757
Journal Title: Speculum
Publisher: Medieval Academy of America
Issue: i353371
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Derrida Peter W.
Abstract: Jacques
Derrida, "Différance," trans. Alan Bass, repr. in Hazard Adams and Leroy Searle, eds., Critical Theory
since 1965 (Tallahassee, Fla., 1986), p. 121.
Derrida
Différance
121
Critical Theory since 1965
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3040976
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354084
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Elkins James
Abstract: J. Elkins, "The
Dissolution of Ideas: On Writing in the History of
Art,"
Elkins
The Dissolution of Ideas: On Writing in the History of Art
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046110
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Goldbard Michael S.
Abstract: Arlene Goldbard, "Let Them Eat Pie: Philanthropy ;i la Mode," Tzkkun,
xi, no. 4, July-Aug. 1996.
Goldbard
4
xi
Tzkkun
1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046227
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354091
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Hung Robert S.
Abstract: idem, Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and
Architecture, Stanford, Calif., 1995, 18-24
Hung
18
Monumentalzty in Early Chinese Art and Architecture
1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046228
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354093
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Taylor Karen
Abstract: Keith Moxey, "Motivating History," Art Bulletin, LXXVII, no. 3, Sept.
1995, 392-401
10.2307/3046117
392
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3046260
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354352
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Geertz Larry
Abstract: Time and Narrative, i, Chicago, 1984
i
Time and Narrative
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051038
Journal Title: The Art Bulletin
Publisher: College Art Association of America
Issue: i354373
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Stock Robert A.
Abstract: Of the many surviving Romanesque cartularies, very few are illuminated. After reviewing general considerations of the oral, textual, and visual elements at play in these works, this paper then focuses on the Vierzon Cartulary, particularly on the processes of its charters' transcription to codex. Specifically, this paper argues the performative role of the scribe and illuminator, who, by their transformation of the mise-en-page, appropriation of papal notarial authority, and translation of sealing practice, participated in a new diplomatic ceremony of conveyance. This paper advances a reconsideration of text-image relations to account for ritual performance, both actual and symbolic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3051335
Journal Title: Law & Society Review
Publisher: Law and Society Association
Issue: i354567
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Silbey Susan S.
Abstract: The authors outline a sociology of narrative-an analysis of the role of narrative in various social contexts, including academic sociolegal scholarship. Narratives are social acts that depend for their production and cognition on norms of performance and content that specify when, what, how, and why stories are told. Because narratives are situationally produced and interpreted, they have no necessary political or epistemological valence but depend on the particular context and organization of their production for their political effect. The analysis specifies the variable conditions that produce hegemonic tales-stories that reproduce existing relations of power and inequity-and subversive stories-narratives that challenge the taken-for-granted hegemony by making visible and explicit the connections between particular lives and social organization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3054010
Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i354683
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Zbikowski Martin
Abstract: Rowell as "empathy ... 'to be at heart with"' (1982:328)
328
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3060769
Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355552
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Proust Christie
Abstract: Marcel Proust, Jean Santeuil (Paris: Gallimard, 1971), 659.
Proust
659
Jean Santeuil
1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090583
Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i355554
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Sante Catherine
Abstract: Lue Sante, The Factory of Facts (New York: Pantheon Book, 1998), 175.
Sante
175
The Factory of Facts
1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3090588
Journal Title: Social Problems
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i355770
Date: 5 1, 1982
Author(s): Zinn Francesca
Abstract: Derrick Bell
(1992)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3097241
Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356101
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Lipietz Philip
Abstract: Alain Lipietz, Mirages and Miracles (London, 1987)
Lipietz
Mirages and Miracles
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3105717
Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i356114
Date: 1 1, 1936
Author(s): de Havilland Eric
Abstract: G. de Havilland, "'Filled' Resins and Aircraft Construction," Journal of the
Aeronautical Sciences 3 (1936): 356-57. De Havilland concluded, based on preliminary
research, that it was "likely that synthetic resins may one day play an important part in
aircraft construction" (p. 357)
de Havilland
356
3
Journal of the Aeronautical Sciences
1936
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3106748
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i356660
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Adorno Michael
Abstract: Theodor W. Adorno, Problems of Moral Philosophy, ed. Thomas SchriSder,
trans. Rodney Livingstone (Stanford: Stanford UP, 2000) 70.
Adorno
70
Problems of Moral Philosophy
2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3115175
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i356734
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Young W. James
Abstract: "Entre ici, Jean Moulin, avec ton terrible cortége" (Malraux 1971,
135).
135
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3117713
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i356737
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Wendt Tim
Abstract: Huntington 1991, esp. 85ff
85
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3117924
Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i357300
Date: 2 1, 1987
Author(s): Weedon Kathryn
Abstract: Computer-mediated communication (CMC) can spark students' interest and develop their cross-cultural communication skills. This article describes an on-going CMC cross-cultural project, "Images, Myths, and Realities across Cultures" (IMRAC), between French and American university students. The possibilities and limits of CMC are explored using the research of Claire Kramsch and Paul Ricœur, who provide a practical and theoretical framework in which to analyze student-authored writing. A three-fold articulation of self emerges as students participate in IMRAC. Through a process of mediation, the discussions on the chats offer students a praxis, a way of being that can contribute to making them more culturally literate citizens.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3133361
Journal Title: Church History
Publisher: American Society of Church History
Issue: i358721
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Bem Laurie F.
Abstract: Bem, The
Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality (New Haven, Conn., 1993)
Bem
The Lenses of Gender: Transforming the Debate on Sexual Equality
1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3168841
Journal Title: History in Africa
Publisher: African Studies Association
Issue: i358795
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): Shillingsburg David
Abstract: Peter L. Shillingsburg, Scholarly Editing in the Computer
Age (Athens, Ga., 1986), esp. 31-43
Shillingsburg
31
Scholarly Editing in the Computer Age
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3171834
Journal Title: The Journal of Religion
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i358812
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Weaver William
Abstract: David Tracy, "Literary Theory and the Return of the Forms of Naming and
Thinking God in Theology," Journal of Religion 74, no. 3 (1994): 302-19
10.2307/1204490
302
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3172234
Journal Title: Signs
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i358910
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Daly Gayle
Abstract: "The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the
Mother," to be published in Narrating Mothers, ed. Brenda O. Daly and Maureen
Reddy (Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1991), in press
Daly
The Diaries of Jane Somers: Doris Lessing, Feminism, and the Mother
Narrating Mothers
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3174512
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359033
Date: 11 1, 1992
Author(s): Drewal Amy
Abstract: Margaret Thomson Drewal, Yoruba Ritual: Performers, Play, Agency (Bloomington:
Indiana University Press, 1992), pp. 1-11.
Drewal
1
Yoruba Ritual
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176407
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359014
Date: 2 1, 1976
Author(s): Naquin Hugh B.
Abstract: Susan Naquin, Millenarian Rebellion in China
(New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1976)
Naquin
Millenarian Rebellion in China
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176606
Journal Title: History of Religions
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i359009
Date: 11 1, 1994
Author(s): Sahlins Aletta
Abstract: Sahlins, "Goodbye to Tristes Tropes."
Sahlins
Goodbye to Tristes Tropes
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3176685
Journal Title: Journal of the American Institute for Conservation
Publisher: American Institute for Conservation of Historic and Artistic Works
Issue: i359233
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Zumbach Steven W.
Abstract: A formal claim was made in the mid-20th century that the goal of art conservation is to present the artwork as the artist intended it to be seen. Dispute over this claim among conservators and art historians involved differences of perspective on the relative roles of science and art history in the interpretation of artist's intent. A separate but concurrent debate among philosophers, art critics, and literary critics was sparked by publication of "The Intentional Fallacy," a scholarly article discrediting appeals to the intentions of artists and authors in art and literary criticism. In this separate debate, difficulty in the evaluation and application of artist's intent was traced to ambiguity of the term "intent." The author discusses 11 variations of its meaning and puts the issues surrounding artist's intent together in the contexts of art conservation. He also presents more recent viewpoints in the social sciences that associate issues of artist's intent with the role of the artist in the continued existence of the artwork. The writings of contemporary philosophers contribute useful perspectives on the essential nature of art and the autonomy of artworks from their creators. The author finds that the interpretation and application of artist's intent is an interdisciplinary task and that its evaluation in conservation contexts is limited to consideration of distinctive stylistic characteristics that demonstrate the correlated individuality of artists and their work. /// [French] Au milieu du 20e siècle, on prétendait que l'objectif de la restauration était de rendre aux oeuvres d'art l'aspect que l'artiste avait voulu leur donner. La controverse qui s'en suivit parmi les restaurateurs et les historiens d'art suscita des différences de considération sur les rôles relatifs de la science et de l'histoire de l'art dans l'interprétation de l'intention de l'artiste. Un débat séparé mais parallèle parmi les philosophes, les critiques d'art et les critiques littéraires fut déclenché par la publication d'un article érudit intitulé "The Intentional Fallacy," qui s'opposait à cette référence aux intentions des artistes et des auteurs dans la critique artistique et littéraire. Dans ce débat particulier, la difficulté de l'évaluation et de l'application de l'intention de l'artiste provenait de l'ambiguïté même du terme "intention." L'auteur examine 11 significations différnetes de ce mot, et il pose le problème de l'intention de l'artiste dans les contextes liés au domaine de la restauration. En outre, il présente des points de vue plus recénts, tirés des sciences sociales qui associent les problèmes de l'intention de l'artiste à celui de son rôle dans l'existence continue de l'oeuvre d'art. Les ouvrages des philosophes contemporains apportent des perspectives utiles sur la nature essentielle de l'art et de l'autonomie des oeuvres vis-à-vis de leurs créateurs. L'auteur pense que l'interprétation et l'étude des intentions de l'artiste est une tâche interdisciplinaire, et que son évaluation dans les contextes de la restauration doit être limitée à la considération des caractéristiques stylistiques particulières qui démontrent l'individualité corrélative des artistes et de leurs oeuvres. /// [Spanish] A mediados del siglo 20 fue hecha una afirmación formal acerca de que el objetivo de la conservación de arte es presentar la obra para que sea vista de acuerdo a la intención del artista. La disputa sobre esta afirmación entre conservadores e historiadores del arte comprendió diferencias de perspectiva sobre los roles relativos de la ciencia y la historia del arte en la interpretación de la intención del artista. Un debate entre filósofos, criticos de arte y críticos literarios, generado en forma independiente pero concurrente con esta disputa, fue encendido por la publicación de "La Falacia Internacional," un artóculo erudito que desacredita el recurso de apelar a las intenciones de los artistas y autores en las críticas del arte y la literatura. En este debate independiente, la dificultad en la evaluación y aplicación de la intención del artista fue adjudicada a la ambigüedad del término "intención." El autor discute 11 variaciones en el significado de este término, y coloca conjuntamente las cuestiones que rodean a la intención del artista dentro de los contextos de la conservación de arte. También presenta puntos de cista mas recientes en el campo de las ciencias sociales que asocian las cuestiones relativas a la intención del artista con el rol que éste tiene en la existencia perdurable de la obra de arte. Los escritos de filósofos contemporáneos contribuyen con perspectivas útiles acerca de la naturalcza esencial del arte y la autonomía de las obras de arte respecto de sus creadores. El autor encuentra que la interpretación y aplicación de la intención del artista es una tarea interdisciplinaria, y que su evaluación en contextos de conservacíon esta limitada a consideraciones sobre caractéristicas estilísticas distintivas, que demuestran la correlativa individualidad de los artistas y sus obras.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3179782
Journal Title: Yale French Studies
Publisher: Yale University Press
Issue: i359415
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Lukes Samuel
Abstract: Anti-Dühring in Steven Lukes, Marxism and Morality (Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1985), 11.
Lukes
Anti-Dühring
11
Marxism and Morality
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3182503
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360887
Date: 10 1, 1981
Author(s): Moore Elin
Abstract: Honor Moore, "Women Alone,
Women Together," in Women in American Theatre, eds. Helen Krich Chinoy and Linda Walsh Jenkins
(New York: Crown Publishers, 1981), pp. 184-90
Moore
Women Alone, Women Together
184
Women in American Theatre
1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3206848
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360886
Date: 5 1, 1984
Author(s): Barthes Patricia
Abstract: Roland Barthes, "Writers, Intellectuals, Teachers," p. 211.
Barthes
211
Writers, Intellectuals, Teachers
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3207061
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360888
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Lentricchia Bruce A.
Abstract: Lentricchia's Criticism and Social Change (Chicago: University
of Chicago Press, 1984), especially pp. 113-43
Lentricchia
113
Criticism and Social Change
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3207520
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360902
Date: 5 1, 1878
Author(s): Voltaire Joseph R.
Abstract: Voltaire, Siecle de Louis XIV, in Oeuvres Completes (Paris: Garnier, 1878), 14: 516.
Voltaire
Siecle de Louis XIV
516
14
Oeuvres Completes
1878
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3207856
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360910
Date: 5 1, 1988
Author(s): Carr Thomas
Abstract: David Carr, Time, Narrative, and History (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1988), 16.
Carr
16
Time, Narrative, and History
1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3208214
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360925
Date: 3 1, 1981
Author(s): Bakhtin Jeanette R.
Abstract: Mikhail Bakhtin, The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays, ed. Michael Holquist, trans. Caryl Emerson
and Michael Holquist (Austin: University of Texas Press, 1981), 427.
Bakhtin
427
The Dialogic Imagination: Four Essays
1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3208808
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360920
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Merleau-Ponty Stanton B.
Abstract: Great
Reckonings, 8
8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3209015
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360924
Date: 12 1, 1974
Author(s): Toll Harry J.
Abstract: Robert Toll, Blacking Up: The Minstrel Show in Nineteenth Century America (New York: Oxford
University Press, 1974), 55.
Toll
55
Blacking Up: The Minstrel Show in Nineteenth Century America
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3209069
Journal Title: Theatre Journal
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i360924
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Touraine Darko
Abstract: Alain Touraine, The Self-Production of Society, tr. D. Coltman (Chicago: University of Chicago Press,
1977), 10.
Touraine
10
The Self-Production of Society
1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3209074
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362030
Date: 12 1, 1976
Author(s): Lane Richard
Abstract: David Lane, The Socialist
Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism (London: Allen and
Unwin, 1976), 143-74.
Lane
143
The Socialist Industrial State: Towards a Political Sociology of State Socialism
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3227447
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Political Science / Revue canadienne de science politique
Publisher: Wilfrid Laurier University Press
Issue: i362151
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Lepetit Anne
Abstract: Lepetit, « Histoire des pratiques », 19.
Lepetit
19
Histoire des pratiques
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3232167
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362311
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Lukács William M.
Abstract: "Han-
nah Arendt's Communications Concept of Power," Social Research 44, no. 1
(Spring 1977): pp. 3-25
1
3
44
Social Research
1977
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234279
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362307
Date: 12 1, 1962
Author(s): Mehta Hwa Yol
Abstract: Civilization and Its Discontents, trans. and ed. James Strachey (New York:
Norton, 1962), p. 92.
92
Civilization and Its Discontents
1962
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234445
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362333
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Ricoeur David
Abstract: P. Ricoeur, Hermeneutics and the
Human Sciences, ed. and trans. by J. B. Thompson (Cambridge: Cambridge Uni-
versity Press, 1981)
Ricoeur
Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences
1981
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234573
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362333
Date: 7 1, 1977
Author(s): Hegel Michael T.
Abstract: Hampshire, p. 271.
271
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234574
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362346
Date: 10 1, 1954
Author(s): Thucydides William
Abstract: Ibid., p. 27.
27
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234923
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362373
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Stites Alison
Abstract: Kathryn Sikkink, "Codes of Conduct: The WHO/UNICEF Case," Inter-
national Organization, 40 (Autumn 1986): 815-40.
10.2307/2706830
815
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3234960
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362361
Date: 7 1, 1957
Author(s): Selznick Dean C.
Abstract: p. 4
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235049
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362393
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Somers Rudra
Abstract: Since contending methodological perspectives and different types of research products are founded on irreconcilable philosophical assumptions, the sharp, recurrent debates over social science research methods are likely to be fruitless and counterproductive. This article begins by exposing some of the philosophical assumptions underlying the most recent calls for a unified social science methodology and seeks to help develop a common appreciation of how different kinds of methods and research products advance our understanding of different aspects of social life at different levels of abstraction. Such commonly posited dichotomies as deductivist/inductivist logic, quantitative/qualitative analysis, and nomothetic/idiographic research products are shown to obscure significant differences along a continuum of strategies through which context-bound information and analytic constructs are combined to produce interpretations of varying degrees of complexity or generality. Durkheim's conception of "organic solidarity" in a social "division of labor" serves as a useful metaphor here to capture the complementary roles performed by various research products as well as the trade-offs arising from the strengths and weaknesses of various methodological approaches (ranging from formal and statistical approaches to various case-based and interpretive approaches). Thus, sharp claims regarding the strengths and limitations of particular methods are transformed into elements of an overarching agnostic understanding of the trade-offs and complementarities among these methods. Finally, a distinctive role is identified for an ideal-typical "middle-range" comparative-historical approach in fostering greater communication among a more inclusively defined community of methodologically diverse social scientists.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235291
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i362399
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Levinas Robb A.
Abstract: Levinas,
Beyond the Verse, xvii
xvii
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3235430
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i363325
Date: 1 1, 1880
Author(s): Spitta James
Abstract: 'Die Wiederbelebung', 57
57
Die Wiederbelebung
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3250669
Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i363380
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Bernstein Eric
Abstract: Michael Bernstein, Foregone Conclusions (Berkeley: UC Press, 1994) 29.
Bernstein
29
Foregone Conclusions
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3251603
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364384
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): McFague Walter
Abstract: Sallie McFague, Metaphorical Theology (Philadelphia: Fortress, 1982)
McFague
Metaphorical Theology
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3260922
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364501
Date: 6 1, 1925
Author(s): Blass-Debrunner-Funk Robert C.
Abstract: vs.
51
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3263096
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364491
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Moore John Dominic
Abstract: J. Jeremias (op. cit., p. 182)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3263614
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364576
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Brueggemann Walter
Abstract: Walter Brueggemann, "At the Mercy
of Babylon: A Subversive Rereading of the Empire:" JBL 110 (1991) 3-22
10.2307/3267146
3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3266779
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364607
Date: 7 1, 1976
Author(s): Payne Paul R.
Abstract: Payne, "Old Testament Exegesis"; idem, "Characteristic Word-Play."
Payne
Old Testament Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3267083
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364606
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Beardslee Walter
Abstract: William A. Beardslee, "Ethics and Hermeneutics," in
Text and Logos: The Humanistic Interpretation of the New Testament (ed. Theodore W Jennings;
Atlanta: Scholars Press, 1990) 15-32
Beardslee
Ethics and Hermeneutics
15
Text and Logos: The Humanistic Interpretation of the New Testament
1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3267146
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364637
Date: 12 1, 1963
Author(s): Horsley Alan
Abstract: Horsley, "Ethics and Exe-
gesis," 17
Horsley
17
Ethics and Exegesis
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268071
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364634
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): BakhtinAbstract: OT: The
God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God (Nashville: Abingdon, forth-
coming)
The God Who Feeds Her Children: An Old Testament Metaphor for God
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268094
Journal Title: Journal of Biblical Literature
Publisher: Society of Biblical Literature
Issue: i364632
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Childs Michael H.
Abstract: R. P. Carroll's theory of "cognitive
dissonance" ("Ancient Israelite Prophecy and Dissonance Theory," in The Place Is Too Small for
Us, ed. Gordon, 377-91)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3268153
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364779
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Widengren Walter H.
Abstract: Jes P. Asmussen, "'Manichaeism," in Historia Religionum. op. cit., pp. 580-610
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269640
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364805
Date: 7 1, 1978
Author(s): Scopello Ingvild Sælid
Abstract: Turner, 1969, p. 200.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3269891
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: E. J. Brill
Issue: i364813
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Kitagawa Gregory D.
Abstract: Kitagawa's The History of Religions: Retrospect and
Prospect (New York: Macmillan, 1985)
Kitagawa
The History of Religions: Retrospect and Prospect
1985
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270143
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364847
Date: 1 1, 1946
Author(s): Gerth Hans G.
Abstract: Hans H. Gerth/C. Wright Mills, From Max Weber p. 155.
Gerth
155
From Max Weber
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270324
Journal Title: Numen
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i364859
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Shepherd Hugh B.
Abstract: Shepherd, Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend, Hyde Park: University
Books 1970, vii-viii.
Shepherd
vii
Introduction to The Diary of a Drug Fiend
1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3270489
Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273470
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Minow Steven L.
Abstract: Minow, The Supreme Court 1986 Term - Foreword: Justice Engendered, 101
HARV. L. REV.10 (1987)
Minow
10
101
HARV. L. REV.
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312131
Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273485
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): DeWolf Steven D.
Abstract: Jefferson, supra note 11, at 958
958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312322
Journal Title: University of Pennsylvania Law Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Law School
Issue: i273488
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Delgado Richard
Abstract: Delgado & Stefancic, supra note 88, at 1930
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3312406
Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274774
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Young Jon W.
Abstract: Whose perspective is reflected in ethnographic accounts is the enduring problem in bringing ethnographic observation forward in the construction of ethnographies. Both ethnographic research and modes of account display a liminal character that puts this problem in a more organizational perspective on their heterogeneous authority and unites doing ethnography and constructing ethnographies in similar ontological ambiguities arising in the social organization of communication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317352
Journal Title: Anthropological Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic University of America Press
Issue: i274799
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Turner Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This article examines some of the discursive practices through which residents of West Virginia coal-mining communities negotiate the emically defined role of "neighbor." Notions of personhood privilege the synaptic, the contextual, and the relational. The ontology informing these discursive practices is contextualized within the historical conditions of their lives as working-class. Data and analysis contest essentialized notions of 'Appalachia', working-class consciousness, and social 'identity'.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3317776
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274954
Date: 9 1, 1963
Author(s): Marx Pierre
Abstract: MARX (K.), Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte, Paris, Ed. Sociales, 1963, p. 13.
Marx
13
Le 18 brumaire de Louis Bonaparte
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3320234
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i274979
Date: 12 1, 1966
Author(s): Vergote François-André
Abstract: C. DuQuoc: op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321166
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i275032
Date: 3 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Francis
Abstract: Boudon (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3321487
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i275049
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Wisner Nicolas
Abstract: Pre'ventique, n°; 10, aoit-septembre 1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322034
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275054
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Veyne Nathalie
Abstract: E. Goffman, 1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322166
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275060
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Young Isabelle
Abstract: Dodier (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3322372
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275088
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Harrison Olivier
Abstract: de White (1992,
1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323136
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275093
Date: 6 1, 1963
Author(s): Wright Dominique
Abstract: Conan (1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323160
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i275089
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Warin Claudette
Abstract: Meuret (2000)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3323204
Journal Title: Publius
Publisher: Center for the Study of Federalism
Issue: i366482
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Zashin William H.
Abstract: Zashin and Chapman, "Uses of Metaphor and Analogy," p. 294.
Zashin
294
Uses of Metaphor and Analogy
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3329753
Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275763
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Yankelovich Donald
Abstract: 1977b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3340198
Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275803
Date: 4 1, 1969
Author(s): WittgensteinAbstract: Baldus, 1990a
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341193
Journal Title: The Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: University of Alberta
Issue: i275834
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Zola Tanya
Abstract: Minnich (1990)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3341823
Journal Title: Indonesia
Publisher: Cornell University
Issue: i367402
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Gadamer Razif
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Problem of Historical Consciousness," in Interpretive Social Science, ed. Paul
Rabinow and William Sullivan (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1979), p. 152.
Gadamer
The Problem of Historical Consciousness
152
Interpretive Social Science
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3351308
Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i368415
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Young Chrysoula
Abstract: The paper begins with a clarification of the terms 'effective' versus 'successful' teacher and their implications. There follows a summary of the results of a study addressing the issues: a) which Careers Education and Guidance (CEG) aims in Greece are considered most important, and b) what constitutes a successful careers teacher. The study is based on the responses of careers coordinators in Greece and consultants at the Greek Pedagogical Institute. Issues concerning Information and Self-Awareness as Careers Education and Guidance aims are discussed, and an alternative approach to Information is suggested. The main emphasis is placed on the importance of the teacher as an indispensable factor for the implementation of CEG aims in particular, and educational aims in general. /// Der Artikel beginnt mit der Klärung der Begriffe "effektive" gegen "erfolgreiche" Lehrer und deren Bedeutung. Es folgt eine Zusammenfassung der Ergebnisse einer Studieüber die Themen: a) welche Ziele der Berufsberatung und -lenkung werden in Griechenland als wichtig angesehen und b) was macht einen in der Berufsberatung erfolgreichen Lehrer aus. Die. Studie basiert auf den Antworten derer, die die Berufsberatung in Griechenland koordinieren sowie der Berater im Griechischen Pädagogischen Institut. Streitfragen über Information und Selbsterkenntnis als Ziele der Berufsberatung und -lenkung werden diskutiert, und ein alternativer Ansatz zu Information vorgeschlagen. Das Hauptgewicht wird vor allem auf die Bedeutung des Lehrers als unersetzlicher Faktor für die Durchsetzung der Ziele von Berufsberatung und -lenkung im besonderen und die erzieherischen Ziele im allgemeinen gelegt. /// Le présent article commence par une clarification des termes "efficacité" et "succès" de l'enseignant et de leurs implications. On présente ensuite un résumé des résultats d'une étude portant sur les questions suivantes: a) quels sont les objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles considérés comme les plus importants en Grèce, et b) qu'est-ce qui contribue au succès d'un professeur d'enseignement professionnel. Cette étude se fonde sur les réponses des coordinateurs de l'enseignement professionnel en Grèce et des consultants à l'Institut pédagogique grec. On discute des questions concernant l'information et la conscience de soi comme objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles, et l'on suggère une nouvelle approche de l'information. L'accent majeur est mis sur l'importance de l'enseignant en tant que facteur indispensable à la réalisation des objectifs de la formation et de l'orientation professionnelles en particulier, et des objectifs éducatifs en général.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3444510
Journal Title: Hispania
Publisher: The American Association of Teachers of Spanish and Portuguese
Issue: i214785
Date: 9 1, 1972
Author(s): Carpio Teresa
Abstract: Al eliminar un tercio de la Fuenteovejuna de Lope para adecuarla a su público, Lorca genera un "tiempo de iniciativa" mediante la fusión del espacio de la experiencia de sus espectadores y su horizonte de expectativas. Al reconocer en la sociedad retratada por Lope aspectos limitantes de su realidad presente que aún no han sido superados, los espectadores convierten sus experiencias en un proceso dinámico que les permite imaginar un futuro en que tales limitaciones no existen. La fusión de ambos horizontes se logra mediante una intensificación de la acción colectiva que se muestra como una legítima herramienta de poder para modificar la historia. Con esta actualización de Fuenteovejuna, Lorca no sólo revitaliza la obra de Lope, sino que promueve una nueva concepción del poder cuyo ejercicio debe ser compartido por el pueblo y la autoridad. Estos cambios se enmarcan dentro del espíritu innovador del teatro modernista de comienzos de siglo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/345824
Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276939
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Donald Edward L.
Abstract: Johnson, Racial Critiques,
supra note 6, at 155-60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480700
Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276943
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Meisels Paolo
Abstract: supra note 232, at 83-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480757
Journal Title: California Law Review
Publisher: School of Law, University of California, Berkeley
Issue: i276929
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Kagay Steven L.
Abstract: Id. at 8, col. 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3480802
Journal Title: The William and Mary Quarterly
Publisher: Omohundro Institute of Early American History and Culture
Issue: i278777
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Naipaul Catherine
Abstract: V. S. Naipaul, "Reading and Writing: A Personal Account," Literary
Occasions: Essays (New York, 2003), 3-31 (quotation, 30).
Naipaul
Reading and Writing: A Personal Account
3
Literary Occasions: Essays
2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3491726
Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i281422
Date: 1 1, 1986
Author(s): WILLIs Édouard
Abstract: Rappelons que, pour Alchian et Demsetz, le travail d'equipe, qui est consubstantiel
au concept d'entreprise capitaliste, rend impossible de determiner les productivites in-
dividuelles: << Avec le travail d'equipe, il est difficile, par la simple observation de la
production totale, de soit definir, soit d6terminer la contribution individuelle de chacun
des inputs en cooperation. La production d'une equipe, par definition, n'est pas la somme
des produits separables de chacun de ses membres. >> [1972, p.779.]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3502963
Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i281438
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Williamson Cécile
Abstract: Maeso-Fernandez, Osbat and Schnatz 120011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3503213
Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284496
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Foss Alexander
Abstract: 'The Writer-To-Be: An Impression of Living', Sub Stance, 9 (1980), 104-14 (P. 10).
104
9
Sub Stance
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509253
Journal Title: The Yearbook of English Studies
Publisher: Modern Humanities Research Association
Issue: i284497
Date: 1 1, 1946
Author(s): Sinclair T. J.
Abstract: The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri, ed. and trans. by John
D. Sinclair, 3 vols (London: Bodley Head, 1946), III, 74-75
Sinclair
74
III
The Divine Comedy of Dante Alighieri
1946
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3509375
Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284859
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): Winter Gibson
Abstract: The natural science model has fostered fragmentation among the human sciences, leaving them ill-equipped to address matters of public policy which demand more holistic approaches. This paper proposes a science of political ethics which could encompass factual, normative, and value materials. Ricoeur's processes of guessing, explanation, and comprehension are used to develop a theory of interpretation for the new science. The work of art is used as the metaphor for interpreting societal processes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510158
Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284834
Date: 10 1, 1968
Author(s): Zuck W. Widick
Abstract: This paper examines the professionalization of religious research in the United States and related topics. Because professional societies illumine value orientations and practices among workers in a given field, the nature of the American Catholic Sociological Society, the American Society of Christian Ethics, the Religious Research Association, and the Society for the Scientific Study of Religion are briefly considered. The differential appropriation of religious research in various ecclesiastical bodies, the problem of funding religious research in the American situation, and the shift in emphasis from a pragmatic problem-solving approach focused on institutional survival to a more theoretical approach to the understanding of religious phenomena are discussed. The bifurcation between persons interested in religious research trained under theological faculties and those trained under social science faculties is noted. Likely future lines of development in theory and research are projected.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510319
Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284833
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Ryan Marie Augusta
Abstract: When religious orders are compared on differences in belief described as Pre-Vatican and Post-Vatican they also differ significantly in their preference for certain theologians and their preferences for types of works. Although age also explains this difference, even with age held constant the difference remains. Those with Post-Vatican beliefs express reading preferences and choice of works which affirm action to transform society as distinct from action to adjust to existing patterns.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3510419
Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Religious Research Association
Issue: i284917
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Wulff James E.
Abstract: This paper argues that the question of the relationship between religiosity and mental health has been miscast because both religiosity and mental health have been understood in the discipline from a distinctly modernist perspective. This modernist perspective is characterized by a metaphysic of substances and by empiricism, and it insists that all scientifically interesting relationships must be efficient causal relationships among substances. From this perspective the only legitimate questions revolve around which way the causal arrow points. The paper argues that this framing of the question and the modernist perspective which gives rise to it fail as adequate accounts of either phenomenon and, thus, of their relation. Further, in some fundamental sense the perspective fails to take either religiosity or psychopathology seriously.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3511734
Journal Title: Review of Educational Research
Publisher: American Educational Research Association
Issue: i368708
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Yaroshevsky Peter
Abstract: This essay explores the notion of meaning, particularly as applied to acts of producing and reading texts. The analysis is grounded in principles of activity theory and cultural semiotics and focuses on the ways in which reading takes place among readers and texts in a culturally mediated, codified experience characterized here as the "transactional zone." The author builds on Vygotsky's work to argue that meaning comes through a reader's generation of new texts in response to the text being read. As a means of accounting for this phenomenon, examples are provided from studies illustrating, for instance, Vygotsky's zones of meaning, the dialogic role of composing during a reading transaction, and the necessity of culturally constructed subjectivity in meaning construction. The author concludes by locating meaning in the transactional zone in which signs become tools for extending or developing concepts and the richness of meaning coming from the potential of a reading transaction to generate new texts. "When I use a word," Humpty Dumpty said in a rather scornful tone, "it means just what I choose it to mean-neither more nor less." (Lewis Carroll, Through the Looking Glass)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3516069
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: American Musicological Society
Issue: i369130
Date: 10 1, 1967
Author(s): Hansell Martha
Abstract: K. Hansell, "Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal
Teatro," 1:114
Hansell
114
1
Opera and Ballet at the Regio Ducal Teatro
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3519834
Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282450
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Wuthnow Adriana
Abstract: Rhoades, 1987: 528-538
528
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3540806
Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282488
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Yang Isabel
Abstract: Niethammer, 1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541155
Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282482
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Weber Isabel
Abstract: Loach, 1994:48.
48
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541230
Journal Title: Revista Mexicana de Sociología
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Sociales de la Universidad Nacional Autonoma de Mexico
Issue: i282498
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Williams Farid
Abstract: Stewart, 1998: 507-508
507
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3541570
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i369322
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Samuels Vera
Abstract: Ibid., 133.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3557481
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i278737
Date: 9 1, 1969
Author(s): Wolf K.
Abstract: Concerns with how cultural factors influenced agrarian social change remained an abiding interest in the work of James Scott. I begin by sketching out the context of debates in Marxist theory, development studies, and social and political anthropology that, during the 1980s, turned to relations between ideas, power, and processes of conflict and change in a world of new postcolonial nations and rapid agrarian development. In the article, then, I carefully examine the ideas Scott developed about resistance and hegemony in conversation with the work of E. P. Thompson. Tracing the genealogy of Scott's ideas about hegemony and rural social protest, I comment in some detail on the literature on resistance that arose in anthropology during the 1980s and the role of Scott's "Weapons of the Weak" (1985) in shaping that literature while interacting with "Subaltern Studies" (Guha 1982-87), studies of social movements, and examinations of power in interpersonal relations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3567020
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369550
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Rüsen Jörn
Abstract: Jirn Rüsen, Introduction: "Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse," in Western
Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate, ed. Jörn Rüsen (New York: Berghahn Books, 2002), 1-
14
Rüsen
Historical Thinking as Intercultural Discourse
1
Western Historical Thinking: An Intercultural Debate
2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590639
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369549
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Davidson Tor Egil
Abstract: idem, Essays on Actions and
Events (New York: Oxford University Press, 1980), quotation from 230-231
Davidson
230
Essays on Actions and Events
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590646
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369543
Date: 2 1, 1966
Author(s): Ricoeur Jonathan A.
Abstract: Ibid., 214-217.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590799
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369543
Date: 2 1, 2000
Author(s): Shatzmiller Abdelmajid
Abstract: Maya Shatzmiller,
The Berbers and the Islamic State (Princeton: Markus Wiener, 2000)
Shatzmiller
The Berbers and the Islamic State
2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590803
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369553
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Benda A. Dirk
Abstract: Julien Benda, The Betrayal of the Intellectuals (Boston: Beacon, 1958).
Benda
The Betrayal of the Intellectuals
1958
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590818
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i369544
Date: 5 1, 1931
Author(s): Tagore Peter
Abstract: Rabindra-
nath Tagore, The Religion of Man (London: George Allen and Unwin, 1931)
Tagore
The Religion of Man
1931
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3590880
Journal Title: Comparative Literature
Publisher: University of Oregon
Issue: i369787
Date: 7 1, 1919
Author(s): Wolf Nathaniel
Abstract: Coren's Sleep Thieves
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3593497
Journal Title: Political Theory
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i369959
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Critchley Sofia
Abstract: What is the connection between modern democratic thought and globalization? This article examines the rationale behind the present crisis of democracy. It demonstrates that the problem facing modern democratic thought has less to do with the asymmetries associated with the forces of globalization and more to do with an asymmetry within popular sovereignty itself: the fact that the boundaries of democracy cannot themselves be democratically legitimated. By making this argument the article seeks to move beyond the contemporary opposition between nationalism and cosmopolitanism. It shows that the appeal to globalization among contemporary political theorists to a large extent is analogous to the appeal to the nation during the French Revolution.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3595713
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282749
Date: 1 1, 1947
Author(s): Sund Brendan
Abstract: Sund, True to Temperament, p. 146
Sund
146
True to Temperament
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600432
Journal Title: Past & Present
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i282783
Date: 11 1, 2001
Author(s): Kaschuba James M.
Abstract: Kaschuba, '1848/49: Horizonte politischer Kultur', 64.
Kaschuba
64
1848/49: Horizonte politischer Kultur
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3600871
Journal Title: Journal of Anthropological Research
Publisher: University of New Mexico
Issue: i286629
Date: 7 1, 1956
Author(s): Steiner Roger M.
Abstract: Recent work on conventional metaphor together with reinterpretations of classic studies of "soul substance" and mana are examined to assess the dangers of overinterpretation--the attribution of nonexistent theologies and metaphysics--by ethnographers. In our project of cultural translation, are we prone to attribute deeper salience to other peoples' way of talk than they in fact imply?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3630416
Journal Title: Journal of Anthropological Research
Publisher: University of New Mexico
Issue: i286652
Date: 4 1, 1972
Author(s): Yang Barbara
Abstract: Beginning in the 1970s there has been a shift in cultural anthropological methodology from participant observation toward the observation of participation. During participant observation ethnographers attempt to be both emotionally engaged participants and coolly dispassionate observers of the lives of others. In the observation of participation, ethnographers both experience and observe their own and others' coparticipation within the ethnographic encounter. The shift from the one methodology to the other entails a representational transformation in which, instead of a choice between writing an ethnographic memoir centering on the Self or a standard monograph centering on the Other, both the Self and Other are presented together within a single narrative ethnography, focused on the character and process of the ethnographic dialogue.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3630581
Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: American Association for the Advancement of Slavic Studies
Issue: i370063
Date: 4 1, 2002
Author(s): Fabian Maria
Abstract: Ibid., 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3650070
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i370115
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wrigley Trevor J.
Abstract: In this article, I reflect upon and attempt to understand the changing theoretical nature of post-World War II Anglo-American economic geography. In particular, I contrast the kind of theorizing that first occurred in the discipline during the 1950s with the very different kind now carried out under what has been called the "cultural turn" or the "new economic geography." I argue that, during this transition, not only did the use of specific theories alter, but the very idea and practice of theorization also changed. I characterize the phases of this movement by using the terms "epistemological" and "hermeneutic theorizing," defined on the basis of works by pragmatist philosopher Richard Rorty and science studies writer Donna Haraway. I argue that "epistemological theorizing" best describes the first period of theorization in the discipline around the quantitative revolution of the late 1950s and early 1960s, and that it is bound by the quest for accurate (mirror) representation. In contrast, hermeneutic theorizing describes the kind of theorizing found in the new economic geography, marked by an interpretive mode of inquiry that is reflexive, open-ended, and catholic in its theoretical sources.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651287
Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370147
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Young Carole
Abstract: Narratives of the Tibetan resistance army are not a part of national history in the Tibetan exile community. Drawing on stories by veterans of the resistance to the Chinese invasion and the explanations they give of its absence in Tibetan national history, I argue that this history has been "arrested" because of the challenges it poses to normative versions of history and community and, in turn, to internal and external representations of Tibet. This practice signifies the postponing of narrating certain histories until a time in the future when the dangers they pose to sustaining a unified Tibetan community in exile has receded. This practice of historical (un)production offers insight into temporality and subjectivity, plural identities in the face of national hegemony, and why history might be considered a combination of truth, fear, and lies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651543
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370165
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Zilberfein Carol A.
Abstract: Despite the abundance of psychological studies on trauma related ills of descendants of historical trauma, and the extensive scholarly work describing the memory politics of silenced traumatic pasts, there has yet to emerge a critical analysis of the constitutive practices of descendants of historical trauma. This article presents an ethnographic account of a support group for descendants of Holocaust survivors, proposing that the discursive frame of intergenerational transmission of Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) and support group based narrative practices allow descendants to fashion their sense of self as survivors of the distant traumatic past. The discursive frame of transmitted PTSD acts as both a mnemonic bridge to the past and a mechanism of identity making, as participants narratively reemplot their life stories as having been personally constituted by the distant past. A close ethnographic reading of on-site discursive practices points to how culture ferments to produce narratives, practices and ultimately carriers of memory to both sustain and revitalize historical grand narratives and the cultural scenarios they embed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3651794
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370271
Date: 4 1, 1963
Author(s): Durkheim Richard
Abstract: "Author's Preface to Pragmatism," Pragmatism and Other
Essays [New York, 1963], 3
Author's Preface to Pragmatism
3
Pragmatism and Other Essays
1963
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3653870
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370275
Date: 4 1, 1933
Author(s): Ayers S. H.
Abstract: Michael Ayers, John Locke, I, 124
Ayers
124
I
John Locke
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3653975
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370292
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Phillips Neil
Abstract: Mark Phillips, " 'If Mrs Mure Be Not Sorry for Poor King Charles': History, the Novel
and the Sentimental Reader," History Workshop Journal, 43 (1997), 111-31.
Phillips
111
43
History Workshop Journal
1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654197
Journal Title: Journal of the History of Ideas
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i370306
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Geertz Albert
Abstract: Diamond, "The Inauthenticity of Anthropology."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3654351
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i370404
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Waal Anne-Lise
Abstract: This article looks at HIV prevention projects in which established stigmatized and stigmatizing roles were actively reversed and manipulated in pursuit of HIV harm reduction. In two Norwegian projects, sex workers and drug users carried out harm-reduction activities with other drug users and sex workers. Although HIV-related harm reduction was the aim of the projects, termination or reduction of drug use or sex work was not. Such changes nevertheless occurred among the sex workers and drug users who took active part in the project. The article considers these changes in order to reflect on the meanings and roles of participation in HIV prevention work. In particular, the discussion theorizes on possible ways in which alteration of roles and subject positions may produce self-reflective effects with transformative potentials.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3655496
Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Economico y Social
Issue: i370465
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Martin Mariana
Abstract: N. Loraux, Les mores en deuil, op. cit., p. 69 y p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3655856
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Kunstgeschichte
Publisher: Deutscher Kunstverlag
Issue: i370504
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Habermaas Mari
Abstract: Jürgen Habermaas, Knowledge and Human Interests.
London 1972, 3.
Habermaas
3
Knowledge and Human Interests
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657236
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i370519
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Eilberg-Schwartz Jonathan
Abstract: SBL conference
in Boston, November 1999
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657400
Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i370531
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): al-Ya'qūbī Mohammad Ali
Abstract: id., 'Imam absconditus and the beginnings of a
theology of occultation: Imami Shi'ism circai 280-90/900 A.D.', JAOS, 117/1, 1997, 1-12
Amir Arjomand
1
1
117
JAOS
1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3657538
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oral History Association
Issue: i287256
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Plagens Richard Cándida
Abstract: Kienholz interview, 345.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3675238
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i287269
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Soffer Andrew
Abstract: Soffer, "Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations," 609-610.
Soffer
609
Oral History and the History of American Foreign Relations
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3675588
Journal Title: SubStance
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i287917
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Perec H. Porter
Abstract: Assessing the limits of evolutionary and cognitive approaches to the study of culture goes to the heart of an issue that tends to divide humanists and scientists. The issue is how far, in dealing with complex cultural texts and the complex transactions we perform as readers, can we advance by scientific reduction? The issue is vexed by the fact that at times the complexity and novelty of humanistic discourse is little more than obfuscation and strained ingenuity. But such failings discredit neither the search for novelty, nor the earned perception of irreducible complexity, nor the immense importance of work that is necessarily, and terminally, speculative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3685513
Journal Title: Revue belge de Musicologie / Belgisch Tijdschrift voor Muziekwetenschap
Publisher: Societe Belge de Musicologie / Belgische Vereniging voor Muziekwetenschap
Issue: i287990
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Loret Philippe
Abstract: Alain Loret, «L'athlète, le rocker et le surfer », in Génération glisse (Paris, Éditions Autrement, 1995),
p. 30.
Loret
30
L'athlète, le rocker et le surfer », in Génération glisse
1995
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3686915
Journal Title: Perspectives on Politics
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i288399
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): Zur Stathis N.
Abstract: I discuss several conceptual problems raised by current understandings of political violence, especially as they pertain to actions, motivations, and identities in civil wars. Actions "on the ground" often turn out to be related to local and private conflicts rather than the war's driving (or "master") cleavage. The disjunction between dynamics at the top and at the bottom undermines prevailing assumptions about civil wars, which are informed by two competing interpretive frames, most recently described as "greed and grievance." Rather than posit a dichotomy between greed and grievance, I point to the interaction between political and private identities and actions. Civil wars are not binary conflicts, but complex and ambiguous processes that foster the "joint" action of local and supralocal actors, civilians, and armies, whose alliance results in violence that aggregates yet still reflects their diverse goals. It is the convergence of local motives and supralocal imperatives that endows civil wars with their particular and often puzzling character, straddling the divide between the political and the private, the collective and the individual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3688707
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i215719
Date: 11 1, 1990
Author(s): Young Michele
Abstract: Lindbeck (1984)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/370187
Journal Title: Sociological Analysis
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288280
Date: 12 1, 1960
Author(s): van Gennep Paul M.
Abstract: A distinction is drawn between theatricality and dramaturgy as modes for interpreting social and religious life. By means of theatricality scholars tend to analyze life as "theater," as "playacting" or "role-playing." Theater is viewed as a metaphor for what "actually" occurs in life. By contrast, dramaturgists interpret life as essentially dramatic in its interpersonal and collective aspects, whether the drama is significant or trivial, good or poor, "genuine" or "theatrical." But there are certain elements and conditions which must be present in order to increase the possibility of the deeper levels of drama. Religious, social and moral life do not routinely achieve these levels, but when it happens the participants and persons in the active audience can recognize the moment as extraordinary, perhaps as an event of awesome significance. It is within these moments that new religious and moral paradigms may arise. At such time role-playing and theatricality are eclipsed but do not totally disappear.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3710121
Journal Title: Sociological Analysis
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288283
Date: 10 1, 1972
Author(s): Zaretsky Joseph Michael
Abstract: Wallace (1966)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3710444
Journal Title: Sociology of Religion
Publisher: Association for the Sociology of Religion
Issue: i288371
Date: 7 1, 1966
Author(s): WolfAbstract: For the past twenty-five years, a sub-branch of biblical studies has engaged, sometimes rather vigorously, in the pursuit of using sociological methods to understand the Bible. These, often autodidact biblical scholars, have taken over a branch of sociology of religion. The methods they follow in their pursuit of the strange world of the Bible can teach sociology how to retrieve a more critical sociology. The questions they ask would be helpful more generally to sociology of religion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3711745
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son Ltd
Issue: i288876
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Cole Teresa
Abstract: Figures autres que tropes (1827)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3733997
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288896
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): JonasAbstract: Hans Jonas, The Imperative of Responsibility. In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age (Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1984).
Jonas
The Imperative of Responsibility
In Search of an Ethics for a Technological Age
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3735715
Journal Title: The Modern Language Review
Publisher: Maney Publishing
Issue: i288905
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Nagel Marco
Abstract: Charles Taylor, 'Hegel's Philosophy of Mind', in Human Agency and Language, pp. 77-96
(p. 78).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3737813
Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289521
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Gadamer Brice R.
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, Kleine Schriften I (Tilbingen: J. C. B. Mohr,
1976), 44
Gadamer
44
Kleine Schriften I
1976
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3750416
Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289522
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Frankfurt Stan
Abstract: Harry
Frankfurt, 'The Importance of What We Care About', Synthese53, No. 2
(1982), 257-272
Frankfurt
2
257
53
Synthese
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3750674
Journal Title: Philosophy
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i289564
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Cavell Martin
Abstract: S. Cavell, The Claim of Reason: Wittgenstein. Skepticism. Morality and
Tragedy (Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1979), 177
Cavell
177
The Claim of Reason: Wittgenstein. Skepticism. Morality and Tragedy
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3752092
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290807
Date: 9 1, 1974
Author(s): Soljenitsyne Laurent
Abstract: Alexandre Soljenitsyne, l'Archipel du Goulag, Paris, Seuil,
1974
Soljenitsyne
l'Archipel du Goulag
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770546
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290799
Date: 9 1, 1966
Author(s): Schreiner Sabine
Abstract: TC fait état de 40 000 signatures à la fin 1966
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770910
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290799
Date: 9 1, 1976
Author(s): Vick Christian
Abstract: Graham Vick, Entretien avec Jean-Franqois Labie,
King Arthur, Livret du spectacle, op. cit., p. 26
Vick
26
King Arthur, Livret du spectacle
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770923
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290812
Date: 12 1, 1997
Author(s): Winock Michelle
Abstract: Serge Moscovici, ≪ Passion révolutionnaire et passion éthi-
que ≫, dans M. Wieviorka (dir.), op. cit., p. 89-109
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3770930
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290798
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Ricœur Emmanuel
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit, tome 1, L'intrigue et le récit
historique, Paris, Le Seuil, 1983 (Points Essais)
Ricœur
L'intrigue et le récit historique
1
Temps et récit
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771547
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290822
Date: 6 1, 1972
Author(s): Deleuze Philippe
Abstract: G. Deleuze et M. Foucault, " Les in-
tellectuels et le pouvoir (1972), dans M. Foucault, Dits et
écrits, tome 2, op. cit
Deleuze
2
Dits et écrits
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3771704
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290825
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Conan Jean-Jacques
Abstract: éclaire le décret
du 3 février 1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772126
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Ricœur François
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, Paris, Le Seuil, 1986,
p. 391
Ricœur
391
Du texte à l'action
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772370
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290821
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Felman François
Abstract: Shoshana Felman, À l'âge du témoignage: Shoah de
Claude Lanzmann , dans Au sujet de Shoah, Paris, Belin,
1990, p. 55-56
Felman
À l'âge du témoignage: Shoah de Claude Lanzmann
55
Au sujet de Shoah
1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772371
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290824
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Malraux Vincent
Abstract: Andre Malraux, Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres
grands discours, Bry-sur-Marne, Institut national de laudio-
visuel, 1989
Malraux
Hommage à Jean Moulin et autres grands discours
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772428
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290823
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Milward Robert
Abstract: Alan Milward, The European Rescue of the Nation-State,
Londres, Routledge, 2e édition, 2000
Milward
2
The European Rescue of the Nation-State
2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772532
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i290830
Date: 6 1, 1974
Author(s): de Certeau François
Abstract: Michel de Certeau, La possession de
Loudun, op. cit., p. 218
de Certeau
218
La possession de Loudun
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3772579
Journal Title: College English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i216082
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Fodor Louise Wetherbee
Abstract: J. A. Fodor, T. G. Bever, and M. F. Garrett, The Psychology of Language: An Introduction
to Psycholinguistics and Generative Grammar (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1974), pp. 271, 342-44.
Fodor
271
The Psychology of Language: An Introduction to Psycholinguistics and Generative Grammar
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/377350
Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Editions Ouvrieres
Issue: i291720
Date: 12 1, 1835
Author(s): Maleville Alain
Abstract: Tribune prolétaire, 17 mai1835
17 mai
Tribune prolétaire
1835
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3778206
Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Editions de l'Atelier
Issue: i291756
Date: 12 1, 1974
Author(s): Gutierrez Sabine
Abstract: G. GUTIERREZ, Théologie de la libération, Bruxelles, Lumen Vitae, 1974
Gutierrez
Théologie de la libération
1974
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3778953
Journal Title: Journal of Social History
Publisher: Carnegie-Mellon University
Issue: i292588
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): Levine David
Abstract: The collection of essays under review is the most innovative attempt thus far to expain the decline of fertility in Europe. Of particular interest is the frequent mention of culture as a prominent factor in such explanations. The review suggests that while this collection is significant in higlighting its importance, bringing culture into population history may require a rethinking of the metanarratives and metaphors in which that history is cast.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3788989
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i371165
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Bryant Rebecca
Abstract: In this article, I examine the politics and practices of apprenticeship in the "traditions" of Turkish folk music through playing the bağama, or saz. The saz has become iconically representative of a folk music collected and preserved in the era of nationalism, and I examine the meaning of such a self-conscious and reflexive tradition's claims to traditionality. I outline the ways in which that tradition is acquired as an aesthetics of self, requiring one to consciously shape the self to become the type of person who can play the saz and, hence, improvise within the sensibility of a tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3805280
Journal Title: Journal of Folklore Research
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i291342
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Žižek Sergei
Abstract: The literary epic Lāčplēsis, written in the nineteenth century, was a conscious attempt to create a cultural frame of reference for the emerging Latvian nation. In this article, which examines how poet Andrejs Pumpurs imagined his community, Kruks compares the Latvian epic hero with his Estonian counterpart, Kalevipoeg, who was invented at the same time under similar conditions of domination by Russians and Baltic Germans. Kruks's narrative analysis demonstrates the different frameworks through which social bonds are constructed for the heroes. Kalevipoeg is a pragmatic actor with an explicitly formulated duty; he errs, but he recognizes his personal responsibility. The Latvian hero Lāčplēsis, on the other hand, is not given a clearly formulated duty; he is simply a hero by destiny and definition. As a resource of symbols that feed contemporary discourses, the epic impedes the construction of a modern national identity capable of engendering a civic society through active pragmatic participation. For past generations, Lāčplēsis explained unjust foreign domination. Kruks argues that contemporary Latvian society now seeks a new frame of cultural reference that will permit the construction of a future-oriented national identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3814743
Journal Title: Huntington Library Quarterly
Publisher: Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery
Issue: i292120
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Jacques A. J.
Abstract: Francis Jacques, Difference
and Subjectivity (New Haven, Conn., 1991)
Jacques
Difference and Subjectivity
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3817676
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Indiana University
Issue: i293969
Date: 4 1, 1984
Author(s): Jones Christopher
Abstract: Gareth Stedman Jones, "Some Notes on Karl Marx and the English Labour Movement," History
Workshop, no. 18 (1984), 136.
Jones
18
136
History Workshop
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3828224
Journal Title: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Temple University
Issue: i294250
Date: 7 1, 1915
Author(s): Cummings William
Abstract: Affirmations—Vorticism" (14 January1915), Visual Arts, pp. 7-8.
14 January
7
Visual Arts
1915
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3831319
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i371427
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): McKendrick Karen L.
Abstract: Neil
McKendrick, John Brewer and J.H. Plumb in
The Birth of Consumer Society: The
Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England
(Europa Publications: London, 1982)
McKendrick
The Birth of Consumer Society: The Commercialization of Eighteenth-Century England
1982
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3841014
Journal Title: Shakespeare Quarterly
Publisher: Folger Shakespeare Library
Issue: i371502
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Fraser Heather
Abstract: Russell Fraser, "Shakespeare's
Book of Genesis," Comparative Drama25 (1991): 121-28
Fraser
121
25
Comparative Drama
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3844057
Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Society for Business Ethics
Issue: i294320
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Westin Georges
Abstract: Recalling several profound disagreements about business ethics as it is currently discussed in Western societies, I emphasize the need for business ethics as an academic discipline that constitutes the "backbone" for both teaching business ethics and improving business practice (section 1). Then I outline a conceptual framework of business ethics that promotes a "bottom-up" approach (section 2). This "problem- and action-oriented" conception appears to be fruitful in terms of both practical relevance and theoretical understanding. Finally, I argue for (section 3) the relevance of discussing goals at all levels of human action (i.e., individuals, organizations, systems) as well as the indispensability of human rights, and propose Amartya Sen's "goal-rights-system" approach as a normative-ethical framework for business ethics that integrates these two fundamental aspects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3857240
Journal Title: Business Ethics Quarterly
Publisher: Society for Business Ethics
Issue: i294330
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Williams Richard P.
Abstract: There can be ethical understanding of organizational policy issues and that is important. However, there can be policy understanding about what the organization should do without understanding of individual level responsibility. There can be cognitive understanding of both policy and individual level ethics responsibilities and that is important. However, there can be cognitive understanding without affective, emotive concern. intellectual understanding without affective concern can lead to understanding without motivation. There can be cognitive understanding and affective concern and that is important, but not enough. There can be cognitive understanding and affective concern without effective political method. An action-learning approach to organizational ethics can join cognitive understanding of policy and individual level issues with both affective concern and effective political method. Joining of cognitive understanding, affective concern, and effective political method can stimulate and enable ethical character.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3857440
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371616
Date: 5 1, 2005
Author(s): Borden William
Abstract: Iain Borden, "Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture," in Borden and Dunster, ed.,
Architecture and the Sites of History, 387-399
Borden
Cities, Critical Theory, Architecture
387
Architecture and the Sites of History
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874104
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i371617
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Ricoeur Michael
Abstract: Being and Time
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874129
Journal Title: Feminist Review
Publisher: Palgrave Macmillan
Issue: i371629
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Vindhya Srila
Abstract: Satarupa Sanyal,
Anu (1998)
Sanyal
Anu
1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3874385
Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i371885
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Scott Sam
Abstract: Joan Wallach Scott, "A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'in-
dustrie à Paris, 1847-1848," in Gender and the Politics of History (New York: Colum-
bia University Press, 1988), 137.
Scott
A Statistical Representation of Work: La Statistique de l'industrie à Paris, 1847-1848
137
Gender and the Politics of History
1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3879450
Journal Title: Newsletter: Rhetoric Society of America
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375717
Date: 5 1, 1971
Author(s): YoungAbstract: vegincev, V. Semazjologija.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885137
Journal Title: Rhetoric Society Quarterly
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375814
Date: 7 1, 1980
Author(s): WildeAbstract: lan Wilde, "Surfacings: Reflections on the Epistemology of Late Modernism,' Boundary28 (Winter 1980): 219.
Wilde
8
219
2
Boundary
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885293
Journal Title: Rhetoric Society Quarterly
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375857
Date: 4 1, 1991
Author(s): Ferreira Walter
Abstract: Taylor,
Sources of the Self, p. 72
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3885959
Journal Title: Rhetoric Society Quarterly
Publisher: Rhetoric Society of America
Issue: i375920
Date: 7 1, 1999
Author(s): Welch David M.
Abstract: Aristotle's discussion of political deliberation fixes the practice in that it implicitly addresses critiques found in the writings of earlier authors such as Aristophanes, the Old Oligarch, Thucydides, Plato and Isocrates. His perspective likewise fixes political deliberation by securing its status as the central means by which the polis is able to confront the contingent and pursue the expedient. The acceptance of argument from probability, and the disciplining of that argument into proper and improper forms, made his position in favor of political deliberation tenable. Finally, his perspective fixes political deliberation in that it stands as the latest and most thorough treatment of the subject in the classical period.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/3886010
Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i216617
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Worton David
Abstract: Michel Tournier is the most controversial French writer alive today. His fiction has provided fertile ground for diverse, often conflicting theoretical practices, and sharpened critiques, yet the author himself has remained aloof and is often perplexed at the way in which his work is received. Focusing on one story from Le Médianoche amoureux (1989), this article records a quest for the essential Tournier. Under the auspices of a master narrator, the reader of "Pyrotechnie" embarks on a voyage of discovery, which is ultimately one of self-discovery, for it finishes, delightfully, in the story-telling world of the child.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/397914
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40000336
Date: 3 1, 2004
Author(s): Dhand Arti
Abstract: "The epic's view of this matter is far from
straightforward" (367)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40005876
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40000341
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Chidester David
Abstract: Kiernan (1985)
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfm094
Journal Title: The American Historical Review
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40000455
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): Sizgorich Thomas
Abstract: Bourdieu, Outline of a Theory of Practice, 192-193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40008441
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000755
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Gregory Eric
Abstract: (Niebuhr 1960,
277).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014866
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000757
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Novak David
Abstract: (Heidegger 1977, 308).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014885
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000757
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Krondorfer Björn
Abstract: (Geary 1994, 17-18).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014887
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Religious Ethics, Inc.
Issue: i40000760
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Bernstein John Andrew
Abstract: Shaftesbury's deism, widely representative of eighteenth-century liberal theology, may be profitably viewed as a reaction against Puritanism in particular and Pauline theology in general. Seen from this perspective, it implies, without explicitly asserting, a reduction of moral standards from the infinite conception of moral law characteristic of Protestantism. Shaftesbury showed no appreciation of the need for redemption or forgiveness, and changed the emphasis in religion from devotion to God above all else to a purely anthropocentric morality which God merely supported. But, in spite of the crudity of his theology and the dubious implications of his ethics, Shaftesbury sought to combat some of the harmful psychological effects to which Paulinism might lead when received in the wrong spirit, and manifested genuine religious insight in this effort.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014915
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: University of Notre Dame Press
Issue: i40000764
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Jung Patricia B.
Abstract: An account of character is developed on the basis of Ricoeur's philosophy of the will. Particular attention is paid to the role of the bodily involuntary in the process of character-formation. This augments the interpretation of the moral meaning of sanctification developed by Hauerwas. When interpreted in light of corporeality, sanctification entails not only a perceptual transformation but also an affective change in the agent's value orientation, the competent retraining of the agent's emotions, and the gracious triggering of an adoptive disposition toward the agent's incarnate situation. Finally, the rootedness of character in embodiment, with the attendant problem of automatism, indicates the limits of the usefulness of an "ethics of character" for moral theology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40014958
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000774
Date: 10 1, 1988
Author(s): Jung Patricia Beattie
Abstract: In this essay I argue that childbearing and various kinds of organ donation are morally analogous activities. I argue, further, that the ethos of giftgiving ought to inform our analyses of both of these forms of bodily life support. This reframing of the abortion and organ donation debates yields new insights into two relatively neglected subtopics. First, though frequently asserted, few have demonstrated why bodily life support--especially in the form of childbearing--cannot be morally required. This comparison yields insights into the reasons for such an axiom. Second, while the giving of bodily life support is sometimes exhorted and almost always respected and admired, its intelligibility and political meaningfulness as a moral choice is rarely explored. This analogical wager reveals why one ought to give another bodily life support. In summary, the analogy yields insights crucial to the development of cogent arguments regarding both the grounds for and limits of the responsibility to give bodily life support. Further, the analogy displays the disparity between what has been demanded traditionally of those who are pregnant and of those men (and women) who by virtue of tissue or blood type can offer other forms of bodily life support. The analogy enables reflection on abortion (and organ donation) to develop in a context free of sexist biases. Finally, efforts are made to assess this giftgiving ethos in light of the feminist "hermeneutics of suspicion" regarding arguments which have and can sacralize victimization.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015096
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000781
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Lewis Paul
Abstract: (1983, 184).
Harrison 1985,
12-15).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015184
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Smith 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015210
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000783
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Hansen Anne
Abstract: Hallisey 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015212
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000785
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Cahill Lisa Sowle
Abstract: Roman Catholic social ethics traditionally has affirmed moral objectivity, universal moral goods, and progressive social reform - premises that guide just war theory. In recent decades these guiding values have been challenged by contemporary critical philosophies, confessional or communitarian religious ethics, and the fact of cultural pluralism. I A the middle of this century, thinkers like John Courtney Murray gave Catholic ethics a more historical turn, while retaining an essentially realist and meliorist approach to morality and politics. Now this confidence and optimism are questioned anew by ethnopolitical violence, the ambiguities of humanitar- ian intervention, and uncertain attempts at reconciliation and restoration. Such developments show that the central quandary of Christian and po- litical ethics is not the achievement of agreement on basic human goods; it is the expansion of the circle of solidarity in which basic goods are shared in practice. I will suggest that Christian symbols can help evoke the sense of human solidarity that is necessary to sustain peace, and that transformative efforts toward peace in violence-torn societies can be successful.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015244
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000790
Date: 10 1, 2001
Author(s): Ferreira M. Jamie
Abstract: Schrag 1997, 14n., 100, 144,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40015299
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000901
Date: 9 1, 2006
Author(s): Ferreira M. Jamie
Abstract: footnote 14
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017697
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40000904
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): Conn Walter E.
Abstract: Erik Erikson's work in psychosocial developmental theory has made valuable contributions to the field of religious ethics on some very basic issues. This paper makes scattered elements of Erikson's explicit ethical perspective available in concise fashion for critical ethical reflection. It does this in such a way as to highlight the centrally important fact for religious ethics that implicitly operative in Erikson's view is a criterion of "self-transcendence" as definitive of mature personal (fully human, ethical) development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017730
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Religious Ethics, Inc.
Issue: i40000905
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Ogletree Thomas W.
Abstract: The essay sets forth a historical style in ethics. At the center is the explication of meanings forming the life worlds of representative actors in concrete situations. The sense of life world is sketched in terms of intentionality, intersubjectivity, temporality and embodiment. The essay then delineates the kinds of interpretative activity relevant for understanding life situations: the application of received conventions; suspicion of those conventions as distortions of underlying personal/social dynamics; and a dialectical interplay between a retrieval of one's own traditions, and hospitality to understandings of others differently oriented to the situations in question. The goal is the achievement of common ground which enables us to determine "fitting" action, or at least to keep open the wholeness it promises.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017734
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000909
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Guevin Benedict M.
Abstract: Stanley Hauerwas, in developing what he calls "an ethics of character," discusses the importance of vision, imagination, and community for the shaping of character by means of "stories." Hauerwas convincingly argues that if persons are to be Christian disciples, they must allow their own way of life to be shaped by the story of Jesus' life. What Hauerwas does not undertake to explain is how the literary impact of stories (where vision, imagination and community become operative) affects the shaping of character. In this essay, I will demonstrate how the literary impact of one type of story, viz., the parable, can affect the shaping of character.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40017780
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40000931
Date: 4 1, 1974
Author(s): Hauerwas Stanley
Abstract: Albert Speer's life offers a paradigm of self-deception, and his autobiography serves to illustrate Fingarette's account of self-deception as a persistent failure to spell out our engagements in the world. Using both Speer and Fingarette, we show how self-deception becomes our lot as the stories we adopt to shape our lives cover up what is destructive in our activity. Had Speer not settled for the neutral label of "architect," he might have found a story substantive enough to allow him to recognize the implications of his engagements with Hitler's Reich. This side of Auschwitz we require a story which allows us to appropriate our own capacities for evil and yet empowers us to go on.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018102
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000935
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Wall John
Abstract: Critchley (1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018135
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Scholars Press
Issue: i40000936
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): Wattles Jeffrey
Abstract: Ephesians 4:30: "Grieve not the spirit of God."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018144
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000937
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Schweiker William
Abstract: Glover 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018153
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i40000941
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Rees Geoffrey
Abstract: (Aquinas 1964, I-II, 81.1),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40018203
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40001101
Date: 4 1, 1977
Author(s): Winter Gibson
Abstract: The authors distinguish three perspectives to be found in contemporary religious social ethics, which stem from three different views of the source and nature of the ethos: the ontological approach, the actional approach and hermeneutic ontology. They trace the implications of each view for both theory and practice; and they consider the prospects for an integrative discipline of religious social ethics which can accommodate all three perspectives.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40020364
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: American Academy of Religion
Issue: i40001434
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Ogletree Thomas W.
Abstract: Three approaches to bio-medical ethics are identified: one weighs the values/disvalues of the probable "total" outcome of contemplated actions (value-dominant); the second gives privileged consideration to the likely impact of actions on the "rights" of human subjects involved (obligation-dominant); the third gives pre-eminence to the discretionary judgment of moral actors for the concrete resolution of moral problems (virtue-dominant). The three approaches are clarified through a commentary on the recommendations regarding fetal experimentation of the National Commission for the Protection of Human Subjects. The recommendations are read as virtue-dominant; the essay in contrast argues for an obligation-dominant perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40025972
Journal Title: Africa: Journal of the International African Institute
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40001513
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Hellweg Joseph
Abstract: Hellweg 2001, 2004,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40027294
Journal Title: Victorian Poetry
Publisher: West Virginia University
Issue: i40001871
Date: 7 1, 1981
Author(s): Findlay L. M.
Abstract: James R. Kincaid, Tennyson's Major Poems: The Comic and Ironic Patterns (Yale Univ.
Press, 1975), pp. 44-45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40035465
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i40002077
Date: 10 1, 2002
Author(s): Benoît Gerald
Abstract: The field of library and information science (LIS) has built its practice and research perspective on a logico-analytic philosophy, which has generated useful, tangible technologies. Lately there is interest in nonempirical philosophies, such as hermeneutics and critical theory, to fulfill better LIS' service-oriented mission of providing "information" to user populations. One dimension of critical theory, Jürgen Habermas' theory of communicative action, can expand LIS' conception of information and supplement logico-empirical research methods and research practices. This article examines how LIS, particularly research into librarian-patron interaction and information system design, favors an empiricist view of language and, as a consequence, may be limiting its effectiveness. It proposes how the field might expand to include communicative action in fulfilling its mission and research agenda.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40039792
Journal Title: Stanford Law Review
Publisher: Stanford University School of Law
Issue: i40002095
Date: 4 1, 2004
Author(s): Hussain Nasser
Abstract: Clinton L. Rossiter,
Constitutional Dictatorship: Crisis Government in Modern Democracies (1948).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40040179
Journal Title: Philosophy and Phenomenological Research
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40002170
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Pettigrove Glen
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, "The Relevance of the Beautiful" (1977), in
The Relevance of the Beautiful and Other Essays, Nicholas Walker, trans. (New
York: Cambridge, 1986) 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40041031
Journal Title: Technology and Culture
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40002604
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Shah Esha
Abstract: several chapters in Shah (n. 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40061431
Journal Title: The Town Planning Review
Publisher: Liverpool University Press
Issue: i40003740
Date: 7 1, 2002
Author(s): Campbell Heather
Abstract: The development of the intellectual basis for planning activity has been a slow and problematic process. This paper seeks to build on existing intellectual understanding to argue that future developments in planning thought must take questions of ethical value as their starting point. The paper is essentially divided into three parts. The first makes the important distinction between planning as a narrow set of regulatory practices and planning as an idea, or more particularly a long-enduring societal activity. It is the latter concept of planning that frames the discussion in the remainder of the paper. The second, in which the core of the argument is developed, explores the nature of planning as an activity; an activity that is centrally concerned with making ethical judgements about better and worse, with and for others, in just institutions. It is about an idea of value. The third section examines the implications of this perspective for planning as a subject of academic endeavour. The argument is illustrated throughout with examples drawn from the author's research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40112514
Journal Title: Research in the Teaching of English
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of English
Issue: i40004720
Date: 12 1, 1990
Author(s): Attridge Steve
Abstract: Vico maintained that metaphor is a fundamental process of human mental life which bridges the gap between emotion and cognition. This Vichian perspective is reflected in areas of critical theory treating metaphor and other tropes, particularly their use in narrative. In psychology too, the significance of metaphor is increasingly recognized despite the Cartesian emphasis on literal thought and language in contemporary psychology's central paradigm, cognitive science. The paper compares the Cartesian and Vichian perspectives and suggests that the former limits the integrated treatment of cognition and emotion. This is illustrated with an example of how a child's feelings about a distressing situation are both revealed and changed in storytelling. The Vichian perspective is more appropriate to understanding this therapeutic interaction of cognition and emotion through metaphoric narrative play. This perspective has significant echoes in psychoanalytic and textual studies suggesting how sensitivity to the latent content of narrative metaphors offers both speaker and hearer a unique insight into the experience of the narrator.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40171175
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005456
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Pielhoff Stephen
Abstract: Ralf Dahrendorf, Das Zerbrechen der Ligaturen und die Utopie der Weltbürgergesellschaft,
in: Ulrich Beck u. Elisabeth Beck-Gernsheim (Hg.), Riskante Freiheiten. Individualisierung in
modernen Gesellschaften, Frankfurt 1994, S. 421-436.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40182220
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005493
Date: 3 1, 1984
Author(s): del Aguila Tejerina Rafael
Abstract: J. Muguerza, "La crisis de identidad de la filosofía de la
identidad (una aproximación teológico-política)", op. cit., p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183055
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005509
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Benito Luis Enrique Alonso
Abstract: Ortí, «La apertura...», art. cit., p. 166.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183346
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera Ignacio Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183635
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005525
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): de la Yncera I. Sánchez
Abstract: Ibidem, pp. 227-228.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183642
Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005526
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Donati Pierpaolo
Abstract: P. Donati (1985), cap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183648
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005535
Date: 9 1, 1992
Author(s): Guillén Mauro F.
Abstract: Las profesiones contemporáneas actúan en un medio dominado por las grandes empresas y por el Estado, verificándose una división del trabajo experto entre los diversos grupos profesionales. En este artículo se estudia el caso de las ocupaciones y profesiones económicas españolas en perspectiva histórica y comparada. El marco teórico recalca la importancia de estudiar las luchas entre diversos grupos ocupativos y profesionales por controlar esferas de actuación, institucionalizar la enseñanza universitaria, crear y reproducir un conocimiento profesional abstracto y exclusivo, convencer a la opinión pública y obtener legislación estatal favorable. También se analizan las mentalidades e ideologías profesionales y su incidencia sobre la dinámica de poder y cambio, no solamente del sistema de profesiones en su conjunto, sino también dentro de cada grupo profesional.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183824
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005542
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Baena Enrique Luque
Abstract: (Jaeger, 1960, pp. 315-316).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40183985
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005571
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Flyvbjerg Bent
Abstract: Diccionario (1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184584
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40005577
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Alastuey Eduardo Bericat
Abstract: El presente artículo expone los principales resultados de una investigación realizada con el objeto de analizar el papel que cumplen las emociones colectivas en el mantenimiento del orden social. En concreto, trata de explicar el hecho de que las noticias más importantes que aparecen en los medios de comunicación sean noticias de horror, es decir, noticias en las que la muerte siempre aparece en el primer plano de la escena. Los informativos de los medios de comunicación expresan y fomentan la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. Ahora bien, para entender esta cultura es preciso determinar previamente la naturaleza emocional del horror, así como establecer una definición sociológica de este sentimiento. El horror es una emoción compleja compuesta por sentimientos de terror, de asco y de conmoción. El horror, sociológicamente, puede entenderse como "la emoción mediante la que un orden social señala sus límites más extremos". El estudio concluye señalando que existen dos modos alternativos de mantener el orden y la cohesión en el seno de un sistema social. El primer modo de legitimación, característico de las sociedades centrípetas, funciona mediante la gran potencia atractiva que ejerce sobre el campo social un núcleo central de valores sociales positivos. El segundo, característico de las sociedades centrífugas, funciona mediante la gran potencia repulsiva que ejercen sobre el campo social las transgresiones flagrantes del orden moral. El modo típico en el que las sociedades centrífugas regulan el orden social explica la cultura del horror característica de nuestras sociedades avanzadas. /// This article sets out the main results obtained from a research study carried out for the purpose of analysing the role that collective emotions play in maintaining social order. In specifíc terms, it attempts to explain the fact that the most important items of news that appear in the media are news of horror, in other words, news in which death always appears in the foreground. The news programmes of the media express and encourage the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies. However, in order to understand this culture, we must first establish the emotional nature of horror and also establish a sociological definition of this feeling. Horror is a complex emotion made up of feelings of terror, disgust and shock. Sociologically speaking, horror can be understood as "the emotion through which a social order indicates its outermost limits". The study concludes showing that there are two alternative ways of maintaining order and cohesión within the bosom of a social system. The first method of legitimation, which is characteristic of centripetal societies, works through the great power of attraction it exerts over the social field of a central nucleus of positive social values. The second, which is characteristic of centrifugal societies, works through the great power of repulsion exerted by flagrant transgressions of moral order over the social field. The typical method in which centrifugal societies regulate social order explains the culture of horror that is characteristic of our advanced societies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40184683
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005685
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): Lorenz Chirs
Abstract: Zagorin, Historiography and Postmodernism, S. 271,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40185861
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005703
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Epple Angelika
Abstract: Koselleck, Darstellung, Ereignis und Struktur, S. 149.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186008
Journal Title: Geschichte und Gesellschaft
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht
Issue: i40005728
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Dejung Christof
Abstract: Jakob Tanner, Historisch Anthropologie zur Einführung, Hamburg 2004, S. 117-122.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40186237
Journal Title: Research in Higher Education
Publisher: Human Sciences Press, Inc.
Issue: i40006432
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Toma J. Douglas
Abstract: With the rise of alternative inquiry paradigms across academic fields, faculty within the same academic departments choose to ground themselves within different intellectual traditions and distinct academic cultures, not simply those parallel to the positivist tradition. One illustration of the emerging paradigmatic pluralism across academe is the actual paradigm choice by individual scholars. Appreciating these paradigm choices is critical if we are to interpret the faculty work and faculty culture that shape institutional culture and influence resource allocation at universities and colleges. Using qualitative methods, I focus upon a single discipline in my exploratory study, law, but extend these concepts and issues in analyzing and interpreting my findings to how they might apply to faculty working in other academic fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40196372
Journal Title: Geografiska Annaler. Series B, Human Geography
Publisher: Swedish Society for Anthropology and Geography
Issue: i40006783
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dodgshon Robert A.
Abstract: From the moment it began to engage with time in a considered way, human geography has employed a variety of analytical and conceptual approaches to it. Recent work especially has greatly extended the range of these different approaches by stressing the innate variability of time, leading some to talk of 'multiple temporalities' and to pronounce time as 'uneven' even within the same society. Fractured by such differences over how time may be used and interpreted, the possibility of an overarching concept of time in human geography has long gone. However, this does not prevent us from asking whether it is still possible to produce a coherent review of the differences involved. This paper offers such a review, arguing that setting these differences down within a structured framework can provide a clearer sense of how diverse the debate among human geographers has become and the trends of thought that have underpinned this growing diversity. Among the trends identified, it places particular stress on the shift from objectified interpretations to those dealing with relational forms of lived and experiential time and on how the separation of early discussions of space from those on time, their dimensional stand-off from each other, has slowly given way to a view in which space and time are treated as sticky concepts that are difficult to separate from each other.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40205021
Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40006944
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Stanford James N.
Abstract: Among the Sui people of rural southwestern China, descent- group loyalties are closely tied to linguistic features. In every village, long-term dialect contact occurs between local villagers and in-marrying women from different clans, yet most speakers maintain their original dialect features to a high degree. The present study conducts ethnographic interviews to more deeply understand why such behavior occurs. Most current, practice-based models of identity tend to emphasize dynamic, flexible, individualistic choices-an approach that suits variation on many levels in many societies. However, to understand the descent-group loyalties particular to indigenous, non-Western, clan-based cultures like Sui, a more tempered, culturally sensitive model is necessary. Speakers show a deep sense of stability, permanence, and collective loyalty to communities of descent, (re) produced through stable linguistic expressions: acts of loyalty. The study also highlights the use of indigenous minorities' own categories (place, toponyms, lineage) rather than non- indigenous categories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40207964
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007183
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Meshel Naphtali S.
Abstract: (the Yoruba sexual
taboos, The Savage Mind, 132-33).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211958
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007184
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Lamberth David C.
Abstract: Michael Welker, "Who is Jesus Christ for Us Today?" HTR 95 (2002) 129-46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211970
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40007184
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Jackson Michael D.
Abstract: Leslie White, "Autobiography of an Acoma Indian," in New Material from Acoma (Bureau of
American Ethnology Bulletin 136; Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution, 1943) 301-59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40211974
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i40007296
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Ward Ian
Abstract: Skinner, Visions of Politics, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213502
Journal Title: Polity
Publisher: Northeastern Political Science Association
Issue: i40007298
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): McManus Helen
Abstract: Tracy Strong, "Introduction: The Self and the Political Order", in The Self and the Political Order,
ed. Tracy Strong (New York: New York University Press, 1992), 3, 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213520
Journal Title: Intégral
Publisher: Eastman School of Music
Issue: i40007321
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Korsyn Kevin
Abstract: Richard Rorty in
Contingency, Irony, and Solidarity (Cambridge: Cambridge University
Press, 1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40213949
Journal Title: Intégral
Publisher: Department of Music Theory, Eastman School of Music, University of Rochester
Issue: i40007332
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Wheeldon Marianne
Abstract: Hutcheon, Parody. 101.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40214086
Journal Title: Revue française de sociologie
Publisher: Editions Ophrys
Issue: i40007683
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Kentish-Barnes Nancy
Abstract: (Pochard et al., 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40217637
Journal Title: Population Research and Policy Review
Publisher: Kluwer Academic Publishers
Issue: i40008393
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Browne M. Neil
Abstract: The doctrine of comparable worth is frequently denounced by economists as inefficient, unnecessary, unworkable, incredibly costly, and replete with unfortunate consequences for the same low-wage workers it alleges to be helping. This paper attempts to identify an explanation for both the vigor and content of economists' common antipathy toward comparable worth. The methodology of the paper is taken from Donald McCloskey's recent The Rhetoric of Economics and Feyerabend's epistemology of conversation. A content analysis of economists' criticisms of comparable worth reveals a much different methodology from that deified in the beginning chapters of Principles of Economics texts. Facts and empirical validation are not the primary bases responsible for their conclusions. The theoretical and empirical support for current relative wages is not solid enough to explain either the nearunanimity of economists' arguments or their vitriolic tone. This paper analyzes the fundamental role played by metaphor in guiding economists' analysis of comparable worth. Metaphor is treated in this paper as a pre-rational image that, much like Kuhn's paradigms, provides insight and establishes blind spots.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40230000
Journal Title: Imago Mundi
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40008710
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Schauerte Paul
Abstract: A comparison of Giuseppe Bagetti's landscape sketches, watercolours, oil paintings and engravings with contemporary maps and the existing landscape reveals that in the creation of Bagetti's landscapes, narrative played a role that differed in cartographic and artistic representations. The comparison also demonstrates that his images were powerful constructions that were more successful in reflecting a narrative of glorious conquest than was possible through cartography. This paper offers a critical examination of Bagetti's representations of Napoleon's northern Italian campaign, which he sketched and painted between 1802 and 1809. Bagetti's paintings were neither pacifist nor an expression of Piedmontese patriotism but instead were inspired by, and constructed according to, a narrative about the conquest that reflected the views of the French authorities. The narrative found expression in formal written instructions from the central cartographical office in the Dépôt de la guerre, Paris, in verbal and written instructions from Bagetti's immediate superior, Jean François Martinel, and in letters personally addressed to Bagetti from the officer commanding the Dépôt. It is clear from a careful reading of the correspondence and from a comparison of Bagetti's paintings with both the present landscape and maps made at the time that Bagetti's disputes with his supervisors revolved around protecting his artistic integrity and reputation rather than resisting the authority of a foreign regime. /// Une comparaison entre les dessins, aquarelles, peintures et gravures de paysages de Giuseppe Bagetti avec des cartes de son temps et les paysages actuels révèle que dans la création des paysages de Bagetti le récit ne joue pas le même rôle que dans les représentations cartographiques et artistiques. La comparaison démontre également que ses images étaient des constructions puissantes qui reflétaient l'histoire d'une conquête victorieuse plus efficacement que la cartographie ne le permettait. Cet article propose un examen critique des représentations des campagnes napoléoniennes en Italie du Nord, dessinées ou peintes par Bagetti entre 1802 et 1809. Les peintures de Bagetti n'étaient ni pacifistes, ni représentatives d'un patriotisme piémontais, mais au contraire inspirées par un récit de la conquête qui reflétait les vues des autorités françaises et construites selon celui-ci. Ce récit se trouvait exprimé dans les instructions écrites de l'office central de cartographie du Dépôt de la Guerre à Paris, dans les instructions verbales et écrites du supérieur direct de Bagetti, Jean-François Martinel, et dans les lettres adressées à Bagetti en personne par l'officier qui dirigeait le Dépôt. Il est clair, si on lit attentivement la correspondance et si l'on compare les peintures de Bagetti avec le paysage actuel et les cartes faites à l'époque, que les discussions entre Bagetti et ses chefs tournaient autour de la préservation de son intégrité et de sa réputation artistique plutôt que de sa résistance à l'autorité d'un régime étranger. /// Ein Vergleich von Giuseppe Bagettis Landschaftsskizzen, Aquarellen, Ölbildern und Druckgraphiken mit zeitgenössischen Karten und der erhaltenen realen Landschaft zeigt, dass bei der Entstehung von Bagettis Landschaftsdarstellungen eine Variante der Ereignisgeschichte eine Rolle spielte, die in seinem Werk zu anderen Ergebnissen führte als bei kartographischen und anderen künstlerischen Darstellungen. Die Vergleiche zeigen auch, dass dabei aussagestarke Bilder entstanden, die die Geschichte der erfolgreichen Eroberungen besser transportierten als es mit den Mitteln der Kartographie möglich war. In diesem Beitrag werden Bagettis Darstellungen der Oberitalienischen Feldzüge Napoleons, die er zwischen 1802 und 1809 anfertigte, kritisch gewürdigt. Seine Darstellungen waren weder pazifistisch noch Ausdruck eines Piemontesischen Patriotismus, sondern Bagetti folgte bei der Konzeption seiner Landschaftsdarstellungen der von offizieller französischer Seite bevorzugten Sichtweise der Geschichte der Eroberungen. Seine Grundlagen bildeten formelle schriftliche Instruktionen der zentralen kartographischen Einrichtung, des Dépôt de la guerre in Paris, sowie mündliche und schriftliche Anweisungen durch Bagettis unmittelbaren Vorgesetzten, Jean François Martinel. Darüber hinaus erhielt er Briefe, die vom Kommandanten des Dépôt de la guerre an ihn persönlich gerichtet waren. Bei sorgfältiger Auswertung dieser Korrespondenz und dem Vergleich seiner Gemälde mit der erhaltenen realen Landschaft und den zeitgenössischen Karten wird deutlich, dass es bei Bagettis Auseinandersetzungen mit seinen Vorgesetzten mehr um Fragen seiner künstlerischen Integrität und Reputation ging als um den Widerstand gegen die Autorität eines fremden Regimes. /// Una comparación de los bocetos de paisajes, aguadas, óleos y grabados de Giuseppe Bagetti con mapas contemporáneos y con el paisaje existente, revela que en la creación paisajística de Bagetti la narrativa jugó un papel diferente de las representaciones cartográficas y artísticas. La comparación también demuestra que sus imágenes eran poderosas construcciones que reflejaban una narrativa de famosas conquistas de manera más acertada de lo que era posible a través de la cartografía. Este artículo ofrece un examen crítico de las representaciones de las campañas napoleónicas en el norte de Italia, que Bagetti dibujó y pintó entre 1802 y 1809. Las pinturas de Bagetti no fueron ni pacifistas ni una expresión del patriotismo piamontés, sino que fueron inspiradas y construidas de acuerdo a una narrativa sobre la conquista que reflejaba el punto de vista de las autoridades francesas. La narrativa encontró su expresión en instrucciones formales escritas desde el centro cartográfico del Dépôt de la Guerre en Paris, en instrucciones verbales y escritas del inmediato superior de Bagetti, Jean François Martinel y en cartas personales dirigidas a Bagetti por el oficial que mandaba el Dépôt. Queda claro, a través de una cuidadosa lectura de la correspondencia y de la comparación de las pinturas de Bagetti con el paisaje actual y con los mapas de su tiempo, que las disputas de Bagetti con su supervisor se centraban en proteger su integridad artística y su reputación más que en resistirse a la autoridad de un régimen extranjero.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40233993
Journal Title: Yale Law & Policy Review
Publisher: Yale Law School
Issue: i40009089
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Taylor George H.
Abstract: J. Bleicher, Contemporary Hermeneutics
(1980).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40239136
Journal Title: Cahiers de musiques traditionnelles
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i40009168
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Randrianary Victor
Abstract: Cet article témoigne du courage, de l'éthique et du succès, ainsi que des tourments d'une musicienne. A Madagascar, il demeure essentiel de connaître ses racines et son appartenance ethnique. Or Mama Sana a abandonné volontairement sa communauté d'origine pour se faire adopter par une autre: un acte inhabituel que les siens pourraient ressentir comme une trahison, mais aussi un choix motivé par la passion de l'autre. A une époque où l'intolérance ethnique devient cruciale, la démarche de Sana est exemplaire. La vie de cette musicienne attitrée de la famille princière fut une suite ininterrompue de succès. Et pourtant, la souffrance de la nostalgie maladive appelée jagobo est au coeur de sa musique. Elle mettait en musique la peine des individus, pour que toute la société s'y associe. Sana plonge au plus profond de son inspiration pour chanter la nostalgie et la passion amoureuse, qui l'amènent à décrìre ses propres passions. A la fin de sa vie, cette virtuose de la valiha, adepte de la forme ouverte, se nommait elle même "jeune fille usée". L'angoisse d'un second exode l'avait alors assaillie au point de devenir musique, du connu à l'inconnu, de la vie à l'au-delà.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40240446
Journal Title: Cahiers de musiques traditionnelles
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i40009170
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Olivier Emmanuelle
Abstract: d'Emmanuel Grimaud (2004).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40240519
Journal Title: Cahiers d'ethnomusicologie
Publisher: ateliers d'ethnomusicologie
Issue: i40009174
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Kosmicki Guillaume
Abstract: Simon in Collin (1997: 209).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40240667
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers
Issue: i40010625
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Ihde Don
Abstract: This introduction to the special issue of Human Studies on postphenomenology outlines specific developments which have led to this style of phenomenology. Postphenomenology adapts aspects of pragmatism, including its anti-Cartesian program against early modern subject/object epistemology. Postphenomenology retains and emphasizes the use of phenomenological variations as an analytic tool, and in practice postphenomenology takes what is commonly now called "an empirical turn," which deeply analyzes case studies or concrete issues under its purview.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40270637
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers
Issue: i40010630
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Mudde Anna
Abstract: Allen Speight (2001)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40270688
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers
Issue: i40010631
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Svenaeus Fredrik
Abstract: In this paper I develop a phenomenology of falling ill by presenting, interpreting and developing the basic model we find in Jean-Paul Sartre's Being and Nothingness (1956). The three steps identified by Sartre in this process are analysed, developed further and brought to a five- step model: (1) pre-reflective experience of discomfort, (2) lived, bodily discomfort, (3) suffered illness, (4) disease pondering, and (5) disease state. To fall ill is to fall victim to a gradual process of alienation, and with each step this alienating process is taken to a new qualitative level. Consequently, the five steps of falling ill have not only a contingent chronological order but also a kind of logical order, in that they typically presuppose each other. I adopt Sartre's focus on embodiment as the core ground of the alienation process, but point out that the alienation of the body in illness is not only the experience of a psychic object, but an experience of the independent life of one's own body. This facticity of the body is the result neither of the gaze of the other person, nor of a reflection adopting the outer perspective of the other in an indirect way, but is a result of the very otherness of one's own body, which addresses and plagues us when we fall ill. I use examples of falling ill and being a patient to show how a phenomenology of falling ill can be helpful in educating health-care personnel (and perhaps also patients) about the ways of the lived body.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40270700
Journal Title: The British Journal for the History of Science
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i385381
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Latour J. R. R.
Abstract: New York Times (19 April1987, section 6,
p. 42)
19 April
42
New York Times
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4027463
Journal Title: Journal of Southern African Studies
Publisher: Routledge, Taylor & Francis Group
Issue: i40011236
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Igreja Victor
Abstract: A. Guebuza, at the time Frelimo candidate for the national presidential elections. Domingo, 15 August 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40283167
Journal Title: Ethical Theory and Moral Practice
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40011321
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Foster Gary
Abstract: Alan Soble (2005), p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284280
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40011359
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Dawdy Shannon Lee
Abstract: -Ibid., t. 1, p. 112.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40284757
Journal Title: Australian Archaeology
Publisher: Australian Archaeological Association
Issue: i40011554
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Clarke Catherine
Abstract: Developing more effective teaching and learning approaches is an important aspect of disciplinary practice and will require archaeologists to undertake a scholarly exploration of educational theory and methods, areas as yet unfamiliar to most. Here, I argue for this undertaking through an exploration of the role of narrative in teaching and learning. Although often undefined, the term 'narrative' has been addressed by archaeologists from a range of theoretical persuasions to argue for different research and interpretive perspectives as well as to acknowledge the value of narrative for developing public awareness of archaeology. However, such projects are primarily aimed outside the discipline: to provide socially responsible information about the past and to generate and maintain public support. There has been a dearth of attention given to the possible ways that narrative can be used to educate archaeologists to better equip them to engage with their professional responsibilities. Here, I outline theoretical considerations for the use of narrative in education and suggest some research approaches for improved teaching and learning in archaeology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40287816
Journal Title: The American Archivist
Publisher: Society of American Archivists
Issue: i40011857
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): Mifflin Jeffrey
Abstract: James Clifford, On the Edges of Anthropology: Interviews
(Chicago: Prickly Paradigm Press, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40294449
Journal Title: Nueva Revista de Filología Hispánica
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012098
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Williamson Rodney
Abstract: "Owen, el símbolo y el mito", NRFH, 29 (1980),
556-573.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40298735
Journal Title: Journal of Design History
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40012202
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Grel Meltem Ö.
Abstract: This study scrutinizes consumption of modern design as a strategy of distinction in Turkey. Conceptualizing taste as an acquired and dynamic medium through which inhabitants build and sustain social relationships, the article examines domestic furnishings as tools for constructing a Western socio-cultural difference from the late nineteenth century through to the 1950s and 1960s. Furthermore, it looks at the structures acting on furniture design and consumer choices. The study explicates the view that architects and decorators promoted a taste reform towards different versions of European Modernism throughout the 1930s and in the mid-twentieth century. The modern emerged as a distinctive element not just between different classes but also within upper-class consumers themselves. The luxurious hotel projects, particularly the pivotal Istanbul Hilton Hotel, were instrumental in spreading the codes of furniture and for shaping contemporary practices, when the influx of US culture had an all-pervading impact, in the post Second World War context. A shift in the dominant taste towards modern designs, the use of synthetic materials, such as Formica, and the advent of new design elements, such as the American bar, revealed a concern for taking part in a new modern identity that reflected cultural competence in the way the West was (re)interpreted.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40301423
Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012882
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Devalle Susana B. C.
Abstract: Williams, 1978, p. 128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313308
Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012882
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Lara Gabriela
Abstract: Kiernan y Boua, 1982, pp. 327-328.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313309
Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012903
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Duceux Isabelle
Abstract: Th. De Bary, "Individualism and Humanitarianism in Late Ming Thought",
en ibid., p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313608
Journal Title: Estudios de Asia y Africa
Publisher: El Colegio de Mexico
Issue: i40012913
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Muñoz Adrián
Abstract: Theosophical Transactions, en Thompson, op. cit., p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40313753
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Caffarena José Gómez
Abstract: (Ak. XXII, 55, 62, 1 18)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314294
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40012947
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: KICOEUR, Paul -La metaphore vive, op.cit, p. 375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40314300
Journal Title: Transactions of the Charles S. Peirce Society
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40013450
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Tunstall Dwayne
Abstract: ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40321138
Journal Title: Philosophy of Music Education Review
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40013929
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Fink-Jensen Kirsten
Abstract: In this paper Kirsten Fink-Jensen suggests how a phenomenological-hermeneutic perspective can contribute to the knowledge of learning and teaching processes in music education in school The philosophical frame is Danish philosophy of life, represented by Knud Ejler Løgstrup, and Merleau-Ponty's philosophy of body, both pointing to the wholeness of mind and body in all kinds of actions. Within this framework interpretation is an epistemological, practical-hermeneutic activity based on different analytical methods. Phenomenologically, experiences of music are constituted in an intertwinement of personal, cultural, and local meaning. The challenge facing the teacher is then to understand what becomes meaningful to persons in a given situation. 'Bodily dialogue' is a metaphor of a hermeneutic process of understanding that highlights the importance of bodily aspects in the teacher's answer to a child's musical attuned articulations. This focus can facilitate children's learning processes and change and qualify the teacher's didactic reflections on the impact and progression of music lessons.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40327268
Journal Title: Oceania
Publisher: University of Sydney
Issue: i40014217
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): Telban Borut
Abstract: By focusing on children involved in the ritual practices in Ambonwari village, East Sepik Province, Papua New Guinea, this essay compares two types of ritual: that of healing and that of male initiation. Like other life crisis rituals both deal with two dimensions of the Ambonwari life-world, that is with the living and the dead and, in a broader sense, with people and spirits. Though both are based upon the same cosmology there are fundamental differences between them. First, healers in healing ceremonies treat uninitiated children as 'non-beings'. From the perspective of Ambonwari 'selves' or 'beings', children belong to this domain. They exist as extensions of their parents or carers, from whom they cannot be separated conceptually. Second, by examining the Ambonwari concepts of negation I show that healers do not approach the domain of cosmological non-existence: they are not concerned with the cosmogony of the Ambonwari life-world. The male initiation rituals do just the opposite, however. It is only in the male initiation ritual, seen as a cosmogonic event, that young boys are cut off from their parents and 'thrown' abruptly into a state of becoming. Unlike the healing rites, these rituals treat young boys as both Ambonwari beginnings and Ambonwari beings. I argue that Ambonwari initiation rituals are not concerned with symbolic death followed by rebirth, but with states of being. Initiation means that death becomes possible for a child. The initiated boy will now be able to die as an Ambonwari being.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40331578
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014372
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Pires Celestino
Abstract: Strasser, o. c, p. 216.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335176
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014376
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): de Lima Vaz Henrique C.
Abstract: Walz, A., Saint Thomas d'Aquin (adapt, fr. par Paul Nova-
rina) (Philosopfoes médiévaux, V), Publ. Univereitaires /B. Nauwelaerts,
Louvaln-Parls, 1962, pp. 21-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335269
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014387
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): Silva Carlos Henrique Do Carmo
Abstract: SADZIK, Joseph, EsthStiqne de Martin Heidegger, «Encyclopédie universitaire*
Paris Ed. Universitaires, 1963, 216 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335497
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014404
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Sumares Manuel
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, «Scientism or Transcendental Hermeneutics?: on the Ques-
tion of the Interpretation of Signes in the Semiotics of Pragmatism», Towards a Trans-
formation of Philosophy, translated by G. Adey and D. Frisby, Routledge and Kegan
Paul, London, 1980, p. 123.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335810
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014407
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: Leuven, Peeters, e Louvain-la-Neuve,
Éditions de l'lnstitut Supérieur de Philosophie, 1985 (291 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335866
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014410
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Vila-Chã João
Abstract: Francis Jacques, op. cit., p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335930
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014411
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: "Wir bestimmen
den Begriff der Situation eben dadurch; dass sie einen Standort dar-
stellt, der die Möglickeiten des Sehens beschränkt. Zum Begriff der
Situation gehört daher wesenhaft der Begriff des Horizontes", p. 286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335935
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014411
Date: 9 1, 1988
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: Idem, p. 46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335937
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014412
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: Ak., p. 143; trad, port., p. 96.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335944
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014414
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Morujão Alexandre Fradique
Abstract: Entretiens Paul-Ricoeur Gabriel Marcel, pp. 63-64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335968
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014415
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Genís Octavi Fullat
Abstract: MERLEAU-PONTY, Phénoménologie de la perception; Paris, 1945;
pág. 498.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335977
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014415
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Araújo Alberto Filipe
Abstract: C.R.S.E., Proposta Global de Reforma (Relatório Final), p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40335981
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014421
Date: 6 1, 1989
Author(s): Do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: Occam: T 5.47321 e 3.328:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336050
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014422
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Borges Paulo Alexandre Esteves
Abstract: para tudo quanto aqui expressamos, St.° Agostinho, De Trinitate. XIII, 13-14, 17-18,
e XIII, 17-18 e 22-23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336062
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: L'homme faillible, p. 54.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336077
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Henriques Fernanda
Abstract: Ricoeur em
Temps et Récit I, Paris, Seuil, 1983, 12:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336078
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: HN. 614-615.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336079
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Sumares Manuel
Abstract: o terceiro volume de
Temps et récit. Seuil, Paris, 1985, pp. 230-232
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336080
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014423
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Costa Miguel Dias
Abstract: KRISHNAMURTI, La révolution du silence, Ed. Stock, Paris, 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336081
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014427
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Gama José
Abstract: Durand, G.,L' Imagination Symbolique, 4. éd., Paris, PUF, 1984, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336138
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade Pontifícia de Filosofia
Issue: i40014435
Date: 3 1, 1955
Author(s): Fragata Júlio
Abstract: Grundzüge einer Metaphysik der Erkenntnis, Be Him, 1925, cap. 20,
pp. 164-168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336335
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014439
Date: 3 1, 1966
Author(s): Alves Aníbal
Abstract: por Moix, pág. 330.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336454
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014452
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Vila-Chà Joào
Abstract: Rilke:
«Quem justamente estima e celebra a morte, magnifica a vida».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336818
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014452
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Sumares M.
Abstract: Fritjof Capra in Le too de la physique, Sand, Paris, 1985 (edição,
americana, 1975), p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40336821
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014462
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): Virgoulay René
Abstract: A. CAMUS, Essais, Paris Gallimard 1965, p. 708.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337044
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014463
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): de Albuquerque Sacadura Carlos Alexandre Bellino
Abstract: Marina Ramos THEMUDO, art. -Cit. p. 216.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337059
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014464
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): do Carmo Silva Carlos Henrique
Abstract: S. BRETON,
"Examen particulier", in: L. GI ARD, ed., Philosopher par passion etpar raison -S. Breton, Grenoble,
J. Millon, 1990, pp. 8
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337098
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014466
Date: 3 1, 1995
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: (Paul RICOEUR,
«Des difficultes d'une phenomenologie de la religion», em Lectures III. Aux frontieres de
philosophies Paris, Seuil, 1 994, pp. 264-265.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337114
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014468
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Nunes Etelvina Pires Lopes
Abstract: R. Burggraeve, E. Levinas, une
bibliographie primaire et secondaire (1929-1989), Peeters, Leuven, 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337153
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014471
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Borges Paulo Alexandre Esteves
Abstract: Ibid., III. 1,3, 8 e 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337203
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014477
Date: 6 1, 1999
Author(s): da Veiga Manuel Alte
Abstract: Na la meditação «em que se pretende não falar de valor», o autor esforça-se por manter um discurso linear sobre o interesse humano de pensar e agir relativamente a um tema tão fundamental, que parece quase impossivel evitar a «petitio principii». Pode-se sintetizar a primeira meditação nestas duas alíneas: (a) O desejo de felicidade é o grande motor da busca de meios para uma vida sempre melhor; (b) O ser humano estrutura a sua ideia de felicidade, vida, meios adequados, objectivos de graus diversos, em função dos conhecimentos de que disōpe. A 2 a meditação reconhece que a neutralidade de discurso da 1a meditação não teve éxito. As palavras são extremamente analógicas e pressupōem um «pensamento e discurso ocultos» , coniventes com o conceito de valor, que se pretendia evitar. O desejo de plenitude da qualidade de vida implica o acto, por vezes inconsciente, de valorização. /// The 1.st meditation aims to maintain a discourse independent of the concept of value. Like in an « Impossible mission», we face a project that easily forces the adventurer to return over his lost pathways in a desert. I. e., falling in a «petitio principii». The result of that l. st meditation could be synthesized as it follows: (a) The desire of hapiness is what forces us to search a better and better quality of life; (b) Human beings structure their idea of hapiness. life, adequate means to various kinds of objectives, according to their available knowledge. The 2. nd meditation recognizes the failure of the searched neutral discourse in the l. st meditation: its words and concepts exemplify a very deep analogy and reveal an occult system of thought and discourse, where the notion of value is unmistakably implicated. The desire of a quality of life in all its richness implies, although some times unconsciously, the act of evaluation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337312
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): de Brito José Henrique Silveira
Abstract: FERNÁNDEZ FERNÁNDEZ. José Luis -"Responsabilidad moral y liderazgo ético "en"
y "de" laempresa". In: Razóny Fé. 231(1995), p. 500.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337341
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014479
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Sacadura Carlos Alexandre Bellino A.
Abstract: H. I. MARROU op. cit, p. 234
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337344
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: "L'Europe et la philosophic politique", in Revue Internationale de Philosophie Poli-
tique, n° 1, Outubro 1991 [n° especial -"L'Europe"], pp. 7, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337579
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Silva Maria Luísa Portocarrero
Abstract: Das Erbe Europas, 173:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337580
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Renaud François
Abstract: Bolgar (1954, 389),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337582
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Lawrence Frederick G.
Abstract: KSI,67,461.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337583
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Duque João
Abstract: J. Duque, "Apocalíptica e teologia na pós-modernidade" in: Cendculo 150
(1999)404-425.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337585
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Carr Thomas K.
Abstract: Gadamer, The Beginning and the Beyond, p. 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337586
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014488
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Oraa José María Aguirre
Abstract: (Traducción castellana de Manuel Jiménez, José F. Ivars y Luis Martín
Santos, revisada por José Vidal Beneyto Conocimiento e interés, Madrid, Taurus, 1982,
pp. 314-315).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337587
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Gilbert Paul
Abstract: Dans "Etica e vivere bene", 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337636
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Caffarena José Gómez
Abstract: (o .c. nota 51),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337637
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: S. Freud, 'Remembering,
Repeating, and Working-Through' in The Standard Edition of the Complete Psychological
Works of Sigmund Freud, Hogarth Press, London, 1955, Vol 12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337638
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014491
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Queiruga Andrés Torres
Abstract: De hecho, en una ocasión he hablado ya de "finitud histórica" (El Dios de Jesús. Aproxi-
mación en cuatro metáforas, ed. Sal Terrae, Santander 1991, 25).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337641
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Is.53.7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337652
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014492
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Splett Jörg
Abstract: Joh 16, 23],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337654
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Casalla Mario
Abstract: G.I. Roth, FCE,
México, 1954,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337740
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Schmitz-Perrin Rudolf
Abstract: Pourquoi la psychanalyse ?, Paris, Champs, Rammarion, 1999, 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337742
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014497
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Corona Néstor A.
Abstract: Soi-même comme un autre, Ed. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337747
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: Thomas Merton,
Contemplative Prayer (Garden City, NY: Doubleday, 1971).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337861
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Jeremias, p. 253.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337865
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Putt B. Keith
Abstract: ibid., p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337866
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014503
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Martins Florinda
Abstract: Michel Henry, Encarnacão: Uma filosofia da carne, trad, de Florinda Martins, ed. Círculo
deLeitores, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337870
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40014504
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Fraga Fernando Aranda
Abstract: Revista de Filosofía de la Universidad de Costa Rica, Volumen XXXVII, N°
91 (Enero-Junio 1999), 41-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40337881
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014512
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Welsen Peter
Abstract: MR II 316 / HN II 286.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338189
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014514
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Henriques Mendo Castro
Abstract: Method in Theology, op.cit., pp. 161-2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338238
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40014514
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Doran Robert M.
Abstract: B. Lonergan -"Dimensions of Meaning." In: Collection. Collected Works of Bernard
Lonergan, vol. 4. Edited by Frederick E. Crowe and Robert M. Doran. Toronto: University of
Toronto Press, 1988, p. 245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40338253
Journal Title: Ethics and the Environment
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40014552
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Liszka James Jakób
Abstract: Although philosophers often focus on the essays of Leopold's Sand County Almanac, especially "The Land Ethic," there is also a normative argument present in the stories that comprise most of the book. In fact the shack stories may be more persuasive, with a subtlety and complexity not available in his prose piece. This paper develops a narrative ethics methodology gleaned from rhetoric theory, and current interest in narrative ethics among literary theorists, in order to discern the normative underpinnings of the stories in Part 1. The narrative ethics approach sidesteps the need to ground the land ethic in ethical theory—which has been a reconstructive and problematic task for the philosophical interpreters of Leopold—and suggests, instead, that it emerges in Leopold's very effort to narrate his, professional, personal, and practical experience with nature. The involves examining the stories in terms of their emotional, logical and performative aspects. The result is an analysis that shows not only how these stories express normative claims, but also justify them. One conclusion of the analyses is that, in the narratives, there is less emphasis on the problematic notion of an over-arching "community" than in the prose pieces, and more emphasis on the metaphor of other living things as "fellow travelers" in the "odyssey of evolution." Second, the narratives take on an ironic attitude toward the ecological order, less discernable in the prose essays. The order itself may not be ethically admirable, but should be preserved since it makes possible any ethical relations within it. Thus, the narrative reading suggests some temperance to the usual holistic interpretation of his land ethic and its concomitant criticisms especially the charge of ecofacism. We should not take the land ethic imperative at its face value, in the sense that the good of the order itself is an intrinsic good. In the narratives, individuals are shown not merely to be means to the ecological whole, but the focus of sympathy and concern, in a manner that demands their good should also be an object of moral consideration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40339066
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014642
Date: 7 1, 1993
Author(s): Martínez Marina Sanchis
Abstract: Tucídides, History of
the Peloponnesian War, trad. Rex Warner (Harmonds worth, Eng. 1954).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340335
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014675
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Marre Diana
Abstract: Anderson [1991] 1993, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340765
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40014688
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Garrayo M. L. Ferrandis
Abstract: Marc Ferro, Comment on raconte l'histoire aux enfants à travers le monde entier, París, 1981; traducido
al inglés como The Use and Abuse of History, or How the Past is Taught, Londres, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40340919
Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Springer
Issue: i40014886
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Dachun Yang
Abstract: The view of language is greatly changed from early modern philosophy to later modern philosophy and to postmodern philosophy. The linguistic question in early modern philosophy, which is characterized by rationalism and empiricism, is discussed in this paper. Linguistic phenomena are not at the center of philosophical reflections in early modern philosophy. The subject of consciousness is at the center of the philosophy, which makes language serve purely as an instrument for representing thoughts. Locke, Leibniz and Descartes consider language from a representationalist point of view. To them, language itself is idealized and represents thought as if it were thought representing itself. Like the structural linguist Saussure, the founders of phenomenology and analytical philosophy give much attention to the logical or static structure of language, and stick up for the representationalism of early modern philosophy. However, their successors refuse to accept this attitude, meaning the final collapse of representationalism. /// 从早期现代哲学到后期现代哲学再到后现代哲学，在语言观上产生了重大的 变化。早期现代哲学以唯理论和经验论为典型形式。语言现象没有成为该时期哲学 反思的中心问题; 意识主体处于哲学的中心，这使得语言仅仅充当着表象思想的工 具。洛克、莱布尼茨和笛卡尔都从表象论的角度看待语言，在他们那里，语言本身 被观念化了，它们表象思想，就像思想在表象它自身。正像结构语言学家索绪尔一 样，现象学和分析哲学的创始人关注的都是语言的逻辑结构或静态结构，他们延续 了早期现代哲学的表象论，但他们的后继者拒绝接受这种态度，而这意味着最终突 破表象论。
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40343900
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014917
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Hart Curtis W.
Abstract: J. Robert Oppenheimer was among the most important and enigmatic figures in 20th century science. He is best known for successfully directing the Manhattan Project that produced the first atomic bombs that were dropped on Japan at the end of World War II. Subsequently, he became a scientist and statesman who advised the United States government in the areas of atomic weapons development and public policy. He later became subject to an investigation in 1954 into his previous political affiliations and his personal behavior that ended in the revoking of his security clearance. This essay seeks to chronicle Oppenheimer's coming of age as a public intellectual with a view toward his own psychological history and most especially in relationship to the stages of faith development articulated by James Fowler and colleagues. Moreover, though not conventionally religious, Oppenheimer's life and thought were permeated with themes and ideas of a religious and ethical nature that shaped his adult character and informed his view of the world. This essay was originally presented at The Richardson History of Psychiatry Research Seminar at Weill Cornell Medical College.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40344427
Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014975
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Conces Rory J.
Abstract: Louden 1992: 152-153
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40345271
Journal Title: Studies in East European Thought
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40014978
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Kačerauskas Tomas
Abstract: Sodeika (1979, 1980a, b, 1981a, b, c).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40345300
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015280
Date: 11 1, 1984
Author(s): Foxley Carmen
Abstract: Revista de Occidente, E1
arquero, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356403
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015281
Date: 4 1, 1985
Author(s): Osses José Emilio
Abstract: AL, p. 189.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356416
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015301
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Dublé Eduardo Thomas
Abstract: Francois Meyer: La ontologia de Miguel de Unamuno. Editorial Gredos, Madrid, 1962,
pp. 85 y ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40356793
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40015317
Date: 11 1, 2003
Author(s): Martíinez Luz Ángela
Abstract: En el siglo XVII
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40357074
Journal Title: The High School Journal
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40015763
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Stones Christopher R.
Abstract: Zucker, R. Aronoff, J., & Rabin, A. (1984). Metatheoretical
issues in personology. In R. Zucker, J. Aronoff & A.
Rabin (Eds.), Personality and the prediction of behav-
ior. Orlando: Academic Press, (pp. 1-5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40364532
Journal Title: Cahiers Vilfredo Pareto
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016137
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Piaget Jean
Abstract: H. Sinclair de Zwart, Acquisition du langage et développement de la
pensée,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40368741
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016201
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Ogien Albert
Abstract: Erving Goffman, Stigmate, Paris, Ed. de Minuit, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40369638
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hamel Jacques
Abstract: Sociologie et sociétés, vol. XIX, n° 2, 1987,
pp. 77-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370050
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016225
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: La démarche scientifique de Vilfredo Pareto. Pour une reiecture du « Traité de sociolo-
gie générale», Louvain-La-Neuve, Cabay, 1981.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370054
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016231
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Timsit Gérard
Abstract: G. Timsit, Les figures du jugement > Paris, PUF, 1993,
et Blasons de la légalité, Paris, PUF, 1995.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370152
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016236
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Maréchal Jean-Paul
Abstract: F. Dastur, Hölderlin. Tragédle et modernité, Fougères,
Enere Marine, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370248
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016236
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Grize Jean-Blaise
Abstract: S. Dehaene, Le cerveau en action. Imagerie cérébrale fonctionnelle en Psycholo-
gie cognitive, Paris, PUF, 1997, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370250
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016247
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Flückiger Alexandre
Abstract: Michel van de Kerchove et François Ost, Le droit ou les paradoxes du jeu,
Paris, 1992, p. 136s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370461
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016248
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Passeron Jean-Claude
Abstract: M. Weber, Gesammelte Aufsätze zur Wissenschaftslehre, Tübingen, JCB Mohr, 1922, trad. mod. ;
trad. fr. J. Freund, Paris, Plon, 1965, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370471
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016252
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: J. Piaget, Problémes généraux de la recherche interdisciplinaire et mécanismes communs, in
Tendances principales de la recherche dans les sciences sociales et humaines. Premiére partie:
Sciences sociales. Préface de R. Maheu, Paris, Unesco, 1970, pp. 588-589.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370519
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016253
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Busino Giovanni
Abstract: P. Livet, Formaliser
I 'argumentation en restant sensible au contexte, pp. 49-66,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370526
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016253
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Flueckiger Alexandre
Abstract: ci-dessus, pp. 5-10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370530
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016254
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): November Valérie
Abstract: Bruno Latour, « Du principe de précaution au principe de bon gouvernement», Etudes, no 393-4,
octobre 2000, pp. 339-346.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370544
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016257
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Berthoud Gérald
Abstract: Laville 2001: 85).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370574
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016282
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Ch. Ruby, Les archipels de la différence, Paris, ed. du Félin, 1990, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40370936
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016287
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Berthoud Gérald
Abstract: Brin 1998
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40371021
Journal Title: Diderot Studies
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40016377
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Wall Anthony
Abstract: Daniel Arasse, "L' image et son discours: deux descriptions de Diderot", in ed.
Dominique Chateau, A propos de "La critique" (Paris: L'Harmattan, 1995), 203-37.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40372901
Journal Title: College Music Symposium
Publisher: The College Music Society
Issue: i40016455
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Miles Stephen
Abstract: Op. cit., 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40374567
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40016558
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Sfeir-Khayat Jihane
Abstract: Saum Tamari et Elia Zureik (éd.), Reinterpreting the historical records: the uses of
Palestinian Refugee archives for social science research and policy analysis, Jerusalem, Institute
for Jerusalem Studies/Institute for Palestine Studies, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40376499
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40016566
Date: 2 1, 2009
Author(s): Van Damme Stéphane
Abstract: Marcel Gauchet (éd.), Philosophie des sciences histortques. Le moment romantique, Pans,
Le Seuil, [1988] 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40376863
Journal Title: The Journal of Religious Ethics
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40016628
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Landres J. Shawn
Abstract: Memory brings the past into the present. It is a feature of human temporality, contingency, and identity. Attention to memory's psychological and social importance suggests new vistas for work in religious ethics. This essay examines four recent works on memory's importance for self-interpretation, social criticism, and public justice. My focus will be on normative questions about memory. The works under review ask whether, and on what terms, we have an obligation to remember, whether memory is linked to neighbors near and distant, how memory is related to justice and forgiveness, and whether memory sits easily with the kind of relationships that allegedly characterize life in democratic public culture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40378119
Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40016648
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Sperl Stefan
Abstract: Muslim (1978: nr. 2626).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40378935
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40016685
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Glassner Jean-Jacques
Abstract: Récemment, Isabelle Klock-Fontanille
(2007)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40379660
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of African Studies / Revue Canadienne des Études Africaines
Publisher: Canadian Association of African Studies
Issue: i40016717
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: The quest for recognition of subjectivity and human dignity is at the heart of current social activism. Africans have struggled for recognition since they were stripped of human dignity, first by the slave trade and later by colonialism. Their struggle has been revealed essentially through writing and monotheism. This article suggests looking at the performative elaboration of the self. On the continent as well as in the diaspora, the construction of the subjectivity and dignity of the modern African / black person is represented in all its autonomy. The empirical example chosen is that of Central Africa. /// La quête pour la reconnaissance de la subjectivité et la dignité est au coeur des mouvements sociaux actuels. Les Africains se battent pour obtenir la reconnaissance depuis l'époque où la traite des esclaves et plus tard la colonisation les ont dépouillés de leurs qualités humaines. Ces combats ont été essentiellement révélés par l'écriture et le monothéisme. L'article actuel suggère aux lecteurs de considérer la construction performative du moi où la subjectivité Africaine / Noire est représentée dans toute son autonomie. L'exemple empirique proposé est celui de l'Afrique centrale.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40380099
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i40017159
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Lassave Pierre
Abstract: Pierre-Antoine Fabre,
« Sciences sociales et histoire de la spiritualité moderne : perspectives de recherche », Recherches
de science religieuse, 97-1, 2009, pp. 33-51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40386522
Journal Title: Archaeology in Oceania
Publisher: University of Sydney
Issue: i40017228
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Ballard Chris
Abstract: The role of narrative in explanation has received considerable attention in most of the disciplines concerned with questions of historical process, including history, geology, psychoanalysis and palaeo-anthropology. Archaeologists, however, have been curiously reluctant to consider the proposition that their reconstructions of the past are fundamentally narrative in character. An argument is put forward for the serious study of narrative in archaeology, and three case studies from the prehistory of the New Guinea Highlands are presented in support: a brief review of the debate over the impact of sweet potato on Highland society; an analysis of the changing interpretations of the Kuk Swamp agricultural site by Jack Golson; and a summary of the role of indigenous narratives in accounting for the history of wetland drainage amongst Huli speakers in the Southern Highlands of Papua New Guinea.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40387255
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40017405
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Simon Bennett
Abstract: Zimmerli, Ezekiel, 2:420-21 : "But the priestly/prophetic witness of Ezekiel 43 still knows
nothing of that terrifying act of God in which he gives himself in his servant, in order to crown his
love, to the unclean world as a pure sin offering (Is 53:10)."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40390027
Journal Title: Journal of Management Information Systems
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i40018320
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Swanson E. Burton
Abstract: Making sense of new information technology (IT) and the many buzzwords associated with it is by no means an easy task for executives. Yet doing so is crucial to making good innovation decisions. This paper examines how information systems (IS) executives respond to what has been termed organizing visions for IT, grand ideas for applying IT, the presence of which is typically announced by much "buzz" and hyperbole. Developed and promulgated in the wider interorganizational community, organizing visions play a central role in driving the innovation adoption and diffusion process. Familiar and recent examples include electronic commerce, data warehousing, and enterprise systems. A key aspect of an organizing vision is that it has a career. That is, even as it helps shape how IS managers think about the future of application and practice in their field, the organizing vision undertakes its own struggle to achieve ascendancy in the community. The present research explores this struggle, specifically probing how IS executives respond to visions that are in different career stages. Employing field interviews and a survey, the study identifies four dimensions of executive response focusing on a vision's interpretability, plausibility, importance, and discontinuity. Taking a comparative approach, the study offers several grounded conjectures con-cerning the career dynamics of organizing visions. For the IS executive, the findings help point the way to a more proactive, systematic, and critical stance toward innovations that can place the executive in a better position to make informed adoption decisions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40398616
Journal Title: Journal of Management Information Systems
Publisher: M. E. Sharpe
Issue: i40018336
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Sidorova Anna
Abstract: In this paper, we use concepts from actor-network theory (ANT) to interpret the sequence of events that led to business process change (BPC) failure at a telecommunications company in the United States. Through our intensive examination of the BPC initiative, we find that a number of issues suggested by ANT, such as errors in problematization, parallel translation, betrayal, and irreversible inscription of interests, contributed significantly to the failure. We provide nine abstraction statements capturing the essence of our findings in a concrete form. The larger implication of our study is that, for sociotechnical phenomena such as BPC with significant political components, an ANT-informed understanding can enable practitioners to better anticipate and cope with emergent complexities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40398827
Journal Title: Science & Society
Publisher: Guilford Publications
Issue: i40018666
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Öncü Ahmet
Abstract: Analysis of the Turkish state in the 20th century both draws upon and supports Gramsci's definition of the state as "dictatorship + hegemony." Both the form of the capitalist state and its activities rest upon the hegemony of the dominant class. The importance of society and class conflicts in understanding the capitalist state suggests a critical position vis-à-vis the state autonomy tradition. The history of the Turkish state provides support for the argument that the dominant class must have established hegemony in the state in the first place, since without this there is no guarantee of successful use of the coercive power of the state on behalf of the sectional interests of the dominant class.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40404762
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): da Silva Estanqueiro Rocha Acílio
Abstract: Alocu9ao "Faculdade de Filosofia, hoje" (aquando dos 25 anos da Universidade Catolica,
na Faculdade de Filosofia de Braga, em 1993), em EFCP, 272.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419406
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Enes José
Abstract: 2Phys.lec. 3, n. 161 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419423
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Renaud Michel
Abstract: «de dez entrevistas feitas por Anita Kechikian a alguns dos mais representatives filosofos
franceses da actualidade, publicadas em Le Monde de I' Education entre os meses de Fevereiro e
Julho/Agosto de 1985», p.7).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419447
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Faculdade de Filosofia
Issue: i40019045
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): de Albuquerque Sacadura Carlos Alexandre Bellino
Abstract: (op. cit., p. 30).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419449
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Salmann, Elmar; Mounaro, Aniceto (ed.) – Filosofia e mistica: Itinerari di un progetto di
ricerca. Roma: Pontificio Ateneo S. Anselmo, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419467
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Urban Martina
Abstract: Ricœur, Rule of Metaphor, p. 287.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419478
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019046
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Rizvi Sajjad H.
Abstract: Qumml, Mirqat al-asrar in al-Arba'lniyyat, 1 54.2-1 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419487
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Jorge Maria Manuel Araújo
Abstract: António Coutinho, "Ora então, vamos à vida", Ciclo de
Colóquios "Despertar para a Ciência", Reitoria da Universidade do Porto, 10/02/2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419509
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019047
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Maldamé Jean-Michel
Abstract: Gérard-Henry Baudry, op. cit., pp. 387-411.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419529
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019048
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Costa Marcos Roberto Nunes
Abstract: Di Stefano, 1960, p. 51, nota 70:
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419555
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Birault, Henri -De litre, du divin
et des dieux. Edition 6tablie par Mathias Goy ; bibliographic par Guy Basset ; preface par Philippe
Capelle. Paris: Cerf, 2005, p. 153.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419588
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Mooney Edward F.
Abstract: Furtak, Rick -Wisdom in Love, cit., p. 197.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419591
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Vidal Dolors Perarnau
Abstract: sks 22 nb12: 134.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419598
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40019049
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Westphal Merold
Abstract: (gwcm 89-90).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40419606
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019078
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Devalle Susana B. C.
Abstract: Barrier y Dusenbery, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420139
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019109
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Margulis Mario
Abstract: Paul Virilio, La bomba informática, Madrid, Cátedra, 1999, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420719
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019115
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Saavedra Marco Estrada
Abstract: Sobre el tema, consúltese Enrique Serrano Gómez, Filosofia del conflicto político.
Necesidad y contingencia del orden social, México, Porrúa Ajam-i, 2001, en especial el cap. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420833
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019118
Date: 8 1, 2005
Author(s): Murillo Lorena
Abstract: Nicholas Abercrombie, Stephen Hill y Bryan S. Turner, Diccionario
de sociología, trad, de Marta Sansigre, Madrid, Cátedra, 1998, la cual se hizo a partir de la
primera edición de 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420885
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019121
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): Tarrés María Luisa
Abstract: Gloria
Carmona de Alva y Pilar Alberti, De la práctica a la teoría del feminismo rural, Red
Nacional de Promotoras y Asesoras Rurales, Documento Mujer Rural número 3, México,
1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40420924
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019126
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Margulis Mario
Abstract: Lucien Goldmann, "Importancia del concepto de conciencia posible para la comunica-
ción", en Lucien Goldmann et al., El concepto de información en la ciencia contemporánea,
México, Siglo XXI, 1966, pp. 31-40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40421024
Journal Title: Estudios Sociológicos
Publisher: El Colegio de México
Issue: i40019135
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Tinat Karine
Abstract: (Garner y Garfinkel, 1979)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40421164
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020050
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Mitlewski Bernd
Abstract: Internationalen Amerikani-
stenkongreß 1988 in Amsterdam.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40462117
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020056
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Valjavec Friedrich
Abstract: (Enzensberger 1990: 980).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40462658
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020060
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Kuper Adam
Abstract: (Kuper
1992: 14).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463022
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020066
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Rössler Martin
Abstract: Scheff 1986: 408.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463564
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Paulusdruckerei
Issue: i40020067
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Berg Mark L.
Abstract: (Damm 1938: 52, 83).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40463662
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Editions St-Paul
Issue: i40020097
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Hoeppe Götz
Abstract: Descola 1994: 62-76.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40465859
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Editions St-Paul
Issue: i40020109
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hahn Hans Peter
Abstract: Hahn (2004b).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40466874
Journal Title: Anthropos
Publisher: Editions St-Paul
Issue: i40020113
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Singleton Michael
Abstract: Singleton (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40467177
Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i40020159
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mathuray Mark
Abstract: This paper departs from and problematizes the almost exclusive focus in criticism of Ngugi's early works on Christianity and the effects of the colonial intrusion. Following Ngugi's exhortation to resume the broken dialogue with the gods of his people, Ngugi's early novels are read in relation to precolonial East African discourses and practices of prophecy, Gikuyu religion, and Gikuyu nationalist strategies that drew on different and opposing prophetic traditions, and, in a broader sense, discourses of religion in Africa. By locating his early work within the nexus of these discourses, a far more nuanced view of Ngugi's relation to religious and nationalist discourses emerges. This paper also attempts to uncover a symbolic geometry in Ngugi's novels determined by Gikuyu religious and cultural concepts. A focus on The River Between reveals certain authorial deployments of historical inaccuracies and dislocations in the interests of a schematization of the conflicts in the novel.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40468115
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i376713
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Agina Mohammaed
Abstract: This article constitutes an exploration of Mahmud Darwish's poem, "The Hoopoe," as part of a study on the relationship of myths to culture, in general, and to literature and poetry, in particular. It starts from the hoopoe as a mythical symbol pulling the text in two directions. First, a direction that relates the poem, through time, to the realms of the universe, dream, and poetry, using the language of insinuations and allusions; second, a fictional direction that makes of the the poem-through evocation of previous quest journeys, including texts by Al-Jahiz, Avicenna, Al-Suhrawardi, Al-Hallaj, Aristophanes, and Farid Al-Din Attar-a quest into the depths of the individual and the collective self. Memory, history, and language, culminate in the discovery of the mother-land. Thus, Darwish's poem may be classified as poetry, prose, drama, and epic. It is, in fact, a mixture of all these genres, as well as a literary myth narrating the story of the search for a sacred time-the time of beginnings, and of childhood. /تمثل المقالة حفراﹰ استبطانياﹰ في قصيدة "الهدهد" لمحمود درويش - ضمن بحث في علاقة الأساطير بالثقافة عامة وبالأدب والشعر خاصة - انطلاقاﹰ من الهدهد كرمز أسطوري يتجاذب النص في اتجاهين اثنين: أ- اتجاه جدولي، يصل القصيدة - عبر الزمن - بعالم الكون وعالم المنام وعالم الشعر في لغة اللمح والإشارة٠ ب- اتجاه أفقي قصصي، يجعل من القصيدة - عبر رحلات نموذجية سابقة ومن خلال نصوص حاضرة غائبة للجاحظ، وابن سينا، والسهروردي، والحلاج، وأرسطوفان، وفريد الدين العطار، وغيرهم - رحلة في أعماق الذات الفردية، وفي أعماق الذات الجماعية ذاكرة وتاريخاﹰ٠ تجمع قصيدة درويش بين "الشعر" و"النثر" والمسرحية والملحمة، كما أنها أسطورة أدبية تقص علينا قصة بحث عن زمن مقدس هو زمن البدايات والطفولة٠
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4047433
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40021726
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Mercier Charles
Abstract: René Rémond, La Règle et le consentement, op. cit., p. 106.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40495932
Journal Title: Albion: A Quarterly Journal Concerned with British Studies
Publisher: Appalachian State University
Issue: i386779
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Kureishi Stephen
Abstract: As You Like It (London, 1975), II.iv, 15.
15
As You Like It
1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4052032
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40022928
Date: 12 1, 1970
Author(s): Crouzet Michel
Abstract: Critique et vérité, p. 56, 58, 60.
71. 73.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40523979
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40022973
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): Parent Monique
Abstract: Ibid., p. 94.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40526074
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40022983
Date: 4 1, 1980
Author(s): Crouzet Michel
Abstract: Ethique à Nicomaque, VI, 4, 1140 a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40526519
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40023051
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Ravis-Françon Suzanne
Abstract: Chroniques du Bel Canto, le chant de
Fougère dans La Mise à mort, et ce passage du Cahier noir, op. cit., p. 36 : "Qu'on rie si l'on
veut de l'imagination de l'amour qui se rencontre au théâtre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40529967
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40023051
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Béguin Édouard
Abstract: Art. cit., p. 405.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40529970
Journal Title: Salmagundi
Publisher: Skidmore College
Issue: i40023164
Date: 4 1, 1974
Author(s): KAVOLIS VYTAUTAS
Abstract: Morse Peckham, Man's Rage for
Chaos: Biology, Behavior, and the Arts (New York: Schocken Books, 1967).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40535896
Journal Title: The Journal of Educational Research
Publisher: Heldref Publications
Issue: i40023288
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Hendry Petra Munro
Abstract: The author suggests that all research is narrative. Resituating all research as narrative, as opposed to characterizing narrative as one particular form of inquiry, provides a critical space for rethinking research beyond current dualisms and bifurcations that create boundaries that limit the capacity for dialogue across diverse epistemologies. The contemporary bifurcation of research as either quantitative or qualitative, or as scientific or nonscientific, has resulted in a master narrative of research which assumes incommensurability across paradigms. The author weaves 3 questions through this research: (a) What is lost when narrative and science are constructed as opposing and incommensurable modes of inquiry? (b) How might scholars reconceptualize inquiry outside a binary framework that privileges science? and (c) In what ways can resituating all narrative as inquiry open spaces for dialogue across multiple epistemologies that is the heart of democratic inquiry? The author concludes by suggesting that narrative is not a method, but rather a process of meaning making that encompasses 3 major spheres of inquiry: the scientific (physical), the symbolic (human experience) and the sacred (metaphysical).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00220670903323354
Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing
Issue: i40023410
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: How can we understand the social impact of cognitions of a projected future, taking into account both the institutional determinants of hopes and their personal inventiveness? How can we document the repercussions, often contrary to intentions, "back from" such projected futures to the production and transformation of social structures? These are some of the questions to be addressed by a cultural sociology that attempts to look seriously at the effects of a projected future as a dynamic force undergirding social change. In this essay I discuss some of the reasons why the analysis of the future has been so neglected in sociological theory and research, and then sketch a possible framework for reincorporating it that specifies some of the cognitive dimensions of projectivity. In the process, I will show how a focus on future projections can help us make a link between cognition and action in a manner that has so far been neglected in the sociological literature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40542699
Journal Title: Salmagundi
Publisher: Skidmore College
Issue: i40023843
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): LEVIN DAVID MICHAEL
Abstract: Basil Langton, "Journey to Ka Mountain", The Drama Review (volume 17,
number 2: June, 1973), pp. 47-57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40546886
Journal Title: symplokē
Publisher: Jeffrey R. Di Leo
Issue: i40023959
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Franke William
Abstract: David Tracy's The Analogical Imagination.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40550341
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40024525
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Kosmicki Guillaume
Abstract: P. Tagg, « From refrain to rave : the decline of figure and the rise of ground », Popular Music 13/2,
Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1994, p. 209-222.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40567119
Journal Title: Geography
Publisher: Geographical Association
Issue: i40024598
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Mead W. R.
Abstract: The paper considers the map and the milieu of Europe. Five distinguishing characteristics are discussed. Special attention is given to the "states system" of Europe, the intensity of the boundary network and the increasing tendency from the point of view of human geography to treat the continent as divided rather than as unitary. The first post-war generation of British geographers tended to neglect Europe in favour of North America. Sweden and France have been important in restoring the connection. Those whose research focuses on European topics will encounter bibliographical, linguistic and other problems; but these will be offset by the cordial working relationships among European geographers which, as among colleagues in the English-speaking world, seem to spring from the nature of the subject itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40570560
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025222
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Affaya Mohammed Noureddine
Abstract: En este texto, el autor intenta esclarecer determinados aspectos del imaginario en relación con el Estado, la política, pero también en relación con la violencia y el mal, en un contexto en el que la dialéctica de la identidad y de la alteridad sigue siendo una de las estructuras del imaginario. El imaginario, más allá del ámbito exclusivo de las representaciones, actúa sobre el mundo y sobre la evolución de la historia. Pero el mundo también actúa sobre el imaginario y son los períodos de crisis los que amplían sus manifestaciones, destinadas a "a servir de pantalla contra los temores". En este sentido, la violencia, frente a la cual cabe adoptar actitudes diferentes, se convierte en un elemento simbólico para interpretar nuestras fuerzas. ¿Hasta qué punto estamos presenciando un nuevo modo de funcionamiento de los imaginarios políticos y religiosos? Para responder a esta pregunta, el autor habla de esperanza intercultural "en un mundo donde las voluntades de poder de lo trágico interfieren en los impulsos de lo comunicacional". In this text, the author attempts to clarify certain aspects of imaginarles in relation to the State and politics, but also in relation to violence and evil, in a context in which the dialectic of identity and otherness continues to be one of the structures of imaginarles. Imaginarles, beyond the exclusive sphere of representations, act on the world and on the evolution of history. But, the world also acts on imaginarles, and it is the periods of crisis that enlarge their manifestations, destined to "serve as a screen against fears." In this sense, violence, in the face of which different attitudes can be adopted, becomes a symbolic element for interpreting our strengths. To what extent are we witnessing a new way of functioning of political and religious imaginarles? To answer this question, the author discusses intercultural hope "in a world in which the will of the power of the tragic interferes with communicational impulses."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586092
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025222
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Affaya Mohammed Noureddine
Abstract: L'auteur tente dans ce texte d'éclaircir certains aspects de l'imaginaire en relation avec l'Etat, la politique, mais aussi avec la violence et le mal, dans un contexte où la dialectique de l'identité et de l'altérité reste l'une des structures de l'imaginaire. L'imaginaire, débordant le champ exclusif des représentations, agit sur le monde et sur le mouvement de l'histoire. Mais le monde agit aussi sur l'imaginaire et ce sont les périodes de crise qui amplifient ses manifestations, appelées à "faire écran contre les peurs". C'est dans ce sens que la violence, face à laquelle différentes attitudes sont possibles, devient un élément symbolique pour interpréter nos forces. Jusqu'à quel point est-on en train d'assister à un nouveau mode de fonctionnement des imaginaires politiques et religieux ? Pour répondre à cette question l'auteur parle d'espérance interculturelle "dans un monde où les volontés de puissance du tragique brouillent les élans du communicationnel". In this text, the author attempts to clarify certain aspects of imaginarles in relation to the State and politics, but also in relation to violence and evil, in a context in which the dialectic of identity and otherness continues to be one of the structures of imaginarles. Imaginarles, beyond the exclusive sphere of representations, act on the world and on the evolution of history. But, the world also acts on imaginarles, and it is the periods of crisis that enlarge their manifestations, destined to "serve as a screen against fears." In this sense, violence, in the face of which different attitudes can be adopted, becomes a symbolic element for interpreting our strengths. To what extent are we witnessing a new way of functioning of political and religious imaginarles? To answer this question, the author discusses intercultural hope "in a world in which the will of the power of the tragic interferes with communicational impulses."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586105
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025230
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Martuccelli Danilo
Abstract: El artículo se interroga sobre la manera de producir la solidaridad entre actores distintos y distantes en la era de la globalización. Después de una breve revisión de sus formas tradicionales y sus límites actuales, el texto explora críticamente ciertas propuestas contemporáneas y propone un modelo general. A través de la capacidad de establecer un impacto comprensivo en torno a ciertas pruebas individuales, se deberán sentar las bases intelectuales de la solidaridad. Un modelo que abre a un programa de investigación intercultural con vocación política. This article questions the way of producing solidarity among different and distant actors in the age of globalisation. Following a brief review of its traditional forms and current limitations, the text critically explores certain contemporary proposals and puts forward a general model. Through the ability to establish a comprehensive impact regarding certain individual proofs, the intellectual bases of solidarity should be established. It is a model which opens up an intercultural research programme with a political will.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586230
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025230
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Martuccelli Danilo
Abstract: L'article s'interroge sur la manière de produire la solidarité entre des acteurs différents et distants à l'ère de la mondialisation. Après une brève révision de ses modalités traditionnelles et de ses limites actuelles, le texte explore d'une façon critique certaines propositions contemporaines, et propose un modèle général. Ce sera par la capacité d'établir un impact compréhensif autour de certaines épreuves individuelles que devront être posées les bases intellectuelles de la solidarité. Un modèle qui engage un programme de recherche interculturel à vocation politique. This article questions the way of producing solidarity among different and distant actors in the age of globalisation. Following a brief review of its traditional forms and current limitations, the text critically explores certain contemporary proposals and puts forward a general model. Through the ability to establish a comprehensive impact regarding certain individual proofs, the intellectual bases of solidarity should be established. It is a model which opens up an intercultural research programme with a political will.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586240
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: Centre d'Informació Documentació Internacionals a Barcelona
Issue: i40025242
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): de Barros Laan Mendes
Abstract: Vivimos en un contexto de disolución de fronteras en múltiples aspectos, de convergencia e hibridación de tecnologías, de medios de comunicación y de culturas. El contexto es de redimensionamiento del tiempo práctico, de los desplazamientos y de las relaciones entre lo local y lo global. En estos tiempos de interculturalidad, la comunicación juega un rol muy importante; no tanto en su dimensión mediática tecnológica, sino en especial en las dinámicas de mediaciones culturales que se desdoblan de las relaciones mediatizadas. Este trabajo pretende reflexionar sobre las transformaciones de los procesos comunicacionales en la contemporaneidad, marcados por fuertes movimientos de hibridación, así como pensar la interculturalidad en el contexto de las mediaciones culturales, a partir de autores latinoamericanos en diálogo con autores franceses. También, a partir de material de los medios, se presentarán ilustraciones del escenario cultural brasileño, que está marcado por una larga historia de hibridación, llena de dinámicas interculturales. We live in a context of borders that are dissolving in many senses, of the convergence and hybridisation of technologies, mass media and cultures. The context is the resizing of practical time, of movements and links between the local and the global. In these times of interculturality, communication plays a very important role; not so much in its technological media dimension, but particularly in the dynamics of cultural mediations that are dividing off from mediatised relations. This article aims to reflect on the transformations in present-day communication processes, marked by strong movements of hybridisation, as well as examining how to consider interculturality in the context of cultural mediations, based on dialogue between Latin American and French authors. Also, using media material, the article presents illustrations of the Brazilian cultural scene, which is marked by a long history of hybridisation that is filled with intercultural dynamics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40586507
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Schaeffer Jean-Marie
Abstract: François Flahault
(pp. 38-42)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590300
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Heinich Nathalie
Abstract: Heinich & Edelman (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590302
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Colleyn Jean-Paul
Abstract: d'Andréa Paganini, pp. 482-485.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590306
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40025495
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Descombes Vincent
Abstract: Edmond & Marie-Cécile Ortigues, eds, Que cherche
l'enfant dans les psychothérapies ?, Paris, Érès, 1999 : 34, n. 8).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40590322
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025520
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GRABÓCZ Márta
Abstract: J. Ujfalussy cité en note 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591026
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025539
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Kululuka Apollinaire Anakesa
Abstract: Messiaen, à travers ses « personnages
rythmiques ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591262
Journal Title: Musurgia
Publisher: ESKA Editions
Issue: i40025541
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Joos Maxime
Abstract: d'Enzo Restagno, op. cit., p. 80-81
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40591277
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026193
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Rozenberg Jacques J.
Abstract: R. Baker, « Stem cell rhetoric and the pragmatics of naming », The American Journal of Bio-
ethics, vol. 2, n° 1, hiver 2002, p. 52-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40599480
Journal Title: Curriculum Inquiry
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026362
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): SCHUBERT WILLIAM H.
Abstract: Schultz (2008)
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-873X.2009.00468.x
Journal Title: La Linguistique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40026513
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Deprez Christine
Abstract: Andrée Tabouret-Keller, 1985, « Langage et société : les corrélations sont
muettes», La Linguistique, n° 21, Paris, PUF, p. 125-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40605069
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40026571
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Epele María E.
Abstract: Closely linked to the increase in psychotropic pill consumption, forgetting and remembering emerged from devastated social scenarios as a new local idiom among poor youth in the late 1990s and the new millennium. Drawing on ethnographic fieldwork carried out during the years of the deepest economic crisis in Argentina (2001-03), I argue that psychotropic pill consumption is associated with not only deteriorating economic conditions but also changes in the quality and price of cocaine, and in the scarcity and subsequent change of status of medications during the economic breakdown. Taking into account developments in the field of memory studies, I examine the relationship among political economy, social memory work, and changing drug-use practices. Regarding memory as a social practice, I argue that the growth of psychotropic pill consumption in the late 1990s can be understood through the interplay of Paul Ricoeur's notions regarding different kinds and levels of forgetting. By analyzing changing survival strategies, social network dismantlement, changing mortality patterns, and abusive police repression, I discuss how social fragmentation engendered by structural reforms has modified social memory work.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1387.2010.01083.x
Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40026575
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Ferrari Chiara
Abstract: Freccerò, "Zeno's Last Cigarette."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40606245
Journal Title: Journal of Music Theory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i40026609
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Klein Michael L.
Abstract: Klein
2004, 45-48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40606879
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027020
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): O'DONOVAN PATRICK
Abstract: Nicholas Zurbrugg, Beckett and Proust (Gerrard's Cross: Colin Smy-
the, 1988), pp. 173-89.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40617404
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027065
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Engler Winfried
Abstract: Henri Mitterand, „L'envers de la , belle époque' : structure et histoire dans Paris de Zola", in: Hans-
Otto Dill (Hg.), Geschichte und Text in der Literatur Frankreichs... Festschrift Rita Schober, Ber-
lin 2000, 43-50,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40618653
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für französische Sprache und Literatur
Publisher: Franz Steiner Verlag
Issue: i40027071
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): François Jacques
Abstract: François (2003b, chapitre III),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40618787
Journal Title: Nouvelles Questions Féministes
Publisher: éditions tierce
Issue: i40027126
Date: 2 1, 1997
Author(s): Caraglio Martine
Abstract: Le sujet est la construction identitaire des lesbiennes qui se perçoivent elles-mêmes comme masculines et qui sont ainsi perçues par leur entourage: par les lesbiennes aussi bien que par les autres personnes. Le "masculin" est envisagé comme une création dans et par la hiérarchie de genre.L'au teure a mené pendant un an une enquête dans une discothèque; 19 histoires de vie apportent leur témoignage. Au terme de ses recherches, la masculinité en question apparaît: 1) comme une manière supportable d'être une femme pour celles qui ne sereconnaissent pas dans le stéréotype féminin; 2) comme un "paysage", c'est-àdire comme quelque chose dontlalesbienne trouve les traits dans le système de genres de la société et dont elle s'empare, faute de mieux ou d'autre chose, pour manifester son refus de la position genrée à quoi la société l'assigne. This article is about the construction of identity among lesbians who perceive themselves and are perceived as "masculine" by others, including other lesbians. The "masculine" is seen by the author as a construction of the gender hierarchy. The author has conducted interviews for a year in a bar and has collected 19 life-stories.Her findings show that the masculinity attributed to lesbians is: 1) a way of making tolerable the fact of being a woman for those women who do not accept the feminine stereotypes; 2) a landscape: an environment made up by lesbians with elements they find in society's gender system, for lack of alternative models, and which they use to express their refusal of the gendered position society wants to assign them.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40619659
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027215
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Budapest, Esprit, mars-avril 2006, p. 26.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.033.0031
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027215
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rojtman Betty
Abstract: Roland Barthes (Paris, Le Seuil, 1966),
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.033.0063
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40027222
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Kallinikos Jannis
Abstract: http://www.lse.ac.uk/collections/informationsystems/newsAndEvents/2008events/SSIT8pro-
gramme.htm.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.039.0013
Journal Title: Alternatives: Global, Local, Political
Publisher: Lynne Rienner Publishers
Issue: i40027896
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Parker Noel
Abstract: While concepts of a postinternational politics properly highlight the constant variance of entities in play in international relations, the approach lacks an ontology that shows how such an unstable variety of types of players can coexist in a common field in the first place. This article draws upon Deleuze's philosophy to set out an ontology in which the continual reformulation of entities in play in "postinternational" society can be grasped.This entails a strategic shift from speaking about the "borders" between sovereign states to referring instead to the "margins" between a plethora of entities that are ever open to modifications of identity. The concept of the margin possesses a much wider reach than borders, and focuses continual attention on the meetings and interactions between a range of indeterminate entities whose interactions may determine both themselves and the types of entity that are in play.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40645256
Journal Title: The International History Review
Publisher: Simon Fraser University
Issue: i40027995
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): IMLAY TALBOT C.
Abstract: M. Newman,
Socialism and European Unity: The Dilemma of the Left in Britain and France (London, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40646918
Journal Title: Journal of African Cultural Studies
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40028027
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Armstrong Andrew H.
Abstract: The attempt to write extreme violence, or to reco[r]d[e] traumatic cultural memory - the representation of horror - tests both the representational capacity of language and the rationality of subjecthood. Much narrative endeavour is spent trying to narrativise or 'structure' horror into story. However, because traumatic memories resist the narrative framework of the novel, questions are posed not only about the reliability of the narrator's memory and his/her ability to narrate a credible story, but also about the suitability of the fictional form of the novel to represent historical events such as extreme violence. How does language in narrative, with its insistence on order and sequence, 'capture' the destructuring nature of violence? Where is the subject or the idea of rational subjectivity in these de-structuring acts of violence? I will attempt to address these issues through a critical 'reading' of Moses Isegawa's novels Abyssinian Chronicles (2000) and Snakepit (2004). In these novels, Isegawa recasts and reenacts a period of recent Ugandan history marked by violence and chaos, emanating from the dictatorship of Idi Amin. However, both novels stretch the limits of 'factual' or historical credulity, reminding the reader that they are in fact works of historical fabrication. I am of the view that the narrative endeavour in these two novels is not only to record the chaotic events experienced during the years before and after the fall of Idi Amin, but to recode, through the tropes of language (symbol, imagery, and metaphor), the devastating effects of those years on the literary landscape of Uganda.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/13696810903259335
Journal Title: Law and Contemporary Problems
Publisher: Duke University School of Law
Issue: i40028035
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): DAN-COHEN MEIR
Abstract: Yael Zerubavel, Recovered Roots: Collective Memory and the Making of Israeli
Nation al Tradition (1995).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40647741
Journal Title: International Labor and Working-Class History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40028073
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Pimenta Ricardo Medeiros
Abstract: The aim of this paper is to analyze how Brazilian trade unions are using social memory as a tool to build up workers' collective identities, in an attempt to fight the fragmentation resulting from the impact of the industrial restructuring of the 1990s. We will draw upon two ongoing programs conducted by the ABC Metal Workers Union (SMABC) and the Oil Workers Union of Brazil's state oil company Petrobras (Sindipetro). The SMABC and Sindipetro have recently been addressing the issue of workers memory with social and public projects. These projects are building up memories, which in spite of being institution-based are also collective, framed by the unions through the use of new types of communication and electronic media.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40648514
Journal Title: Oral History
Publisher: Oral History Society
Issue: i40028140
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Gildea Robert
Abstract: This paper is the text of an inaugural lecture given as Professor of Modern History in the University of Oxford on 7 November 2008. It arises from a research project entitled Around 1968: Activism, Networks, Trajectories', which involves a team of historians examining samples of activist networks in fourteen European countries, in order to understand ways of becoming an activist, being an activist and making sense of activism. The key terms of this project are transnationalism – tracing resonances and interactions between activists and activist networks across frontiers – and subjectivity – using oral testimony to understand the phenomenon of activism. The framing and presentation of the project incited a rethink of the methods of oral history, not least because the project originated in Oxford, where scepticism persists about the credibility of oral history as a discipline. To persuade this audience of the power of oral history, the approach was taken to locate it at the confluence of three recent developments which have impacted on the study of history as a whole: the linguistic turn, memory studies, and interest in subjectivity, intersubjectivity and the unconscious. These reflections are then used to illuminate evidence drawn from French activists interviewed in the course of 2007 and 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40650317
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40028448
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Metzger Jean-Luc
Abstract: Duveau, 1961.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40656811
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028534
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Paniagua Javier
Abstract: J. García Oliver, El eco de
los pasos..., pág. 190.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657946
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028538
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Casanova Julián
Abstract: "El tiempo presente, la memoria y el mito", p. 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40657994
Journal Title: Historia Social
Publisher: Centro de la UNED Alzira-Valencia, Instituto de Historia Social
Issue: i40028548
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Pasamar Gonzalo
Abstract: (La historia vivida, pp. 289-332).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40658151
Journal Title: The Modern Law Review
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40028761
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Koops Bert-Jaap
Abstract: A. Rip, 'Constructing Expertise: In a Third Wave of Science Studies?' (2003) 33 Social Studies of
Science 419.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40660735
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40029008
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Carbine Rosemary P.
Abstract: http://www.barackobama.com/speeches/index.php.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40666525
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030235
Date: 6 1, 1969
Author(s): Decouflé André
Abstract: (Maladie mentale et psychologie, nouv. éd., 1968, p. 43).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689477
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030250
Date: 12 1, 1975
Author(s): Albou Paul
Abstract: Chandessais, La stratégie des besoins,
Journées de Vaucresson, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689735
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030262
Date: 12 1, 1981
Author(s): Durand Gilbert
Abstract: « Structure et fonction récurrentes de la ligure de
Dieu », in Éranos Jahrbuch, n° 37, Zurich, Rhein Verlag, 1970.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40689960
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Ladrière Paul
Abstract: Ibid., p. 127.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690421
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030281
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Gosselin Gabriel
Abstract: Ibid., § 5 du chapitre premier, p. 30-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690424
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030285
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Lazar Judith
Abstract: F. Chazel in Revue française de Sociologie.
1983, XXIV, p. 369-393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690513
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030292
Date: 6 1, 1996
Author(s): Guillaume Jean-François
Abstract: (P. Berger, T. Luckmann, 1986).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690659
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030297
Date: 6 1, 1998
Author(s): Leclerc-Olive Michèle
Abstract: L'entretien biographique de Khaled Kelkal publié dans Le Monde
(5 octobre 1995)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690769
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030301
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): Moulin Pierre
Abstract: (Mallet, 1998).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690843
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030302
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Gingras Yves
Abstract: Stephen S. Cole, Making Science. Between Nature and
Society, Cambridge, Harvard University Press, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690856
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030305
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Prévost-Thomas Cécile
Abstract: « Temps des actes de creation qui interviennent toujours en tant que
conduites effervescentes dans la réalité sociale, mais qui de sous-jacentes, deviennent
ostensibles et dominantes durant les révolutions », in Georges Gurvitch, 1963,
p. 344.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690911
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030307
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Gaussot Ludovic
Abstract: Löwy (1985)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690947
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030308
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Gonthier Frédéric
Abstract: Logique des sciences sociales et autres essais [1982-1984], trad, franc., Paris, PUF,
« Philosophie d'aujourd'hui », 1987, p. 19-26.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690958
Journal Title: Cahiers Internationaux de Sociologie
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40030310
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Martuccelli Danilo
Abstract: Walzer M., De l'Exode à la liberté [1985], Paris, Calmann-Lévy, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40690994
Journal Title: Recherches Économiques de Louvain / Louvain Economic Review
Publisher: De Boeck
Issue: i40032645
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: WHITE, in Swedberg (1980, p. 89),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40723974
Journal Title: Monumenta Serica
Publisher: Monumenta Serica Institute
Issue: i40032858
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Rule Paul
Abstract: Journal of Chinese Religion 27 (1999), pp. 105-111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40727471
Journal Title: Journal of Institutional and Theoretical Economics (JITE) / Zeitschrift für die gesamte Staatswissenschaft
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034129
Date: 3 1, 1996
Author(s): Rubin Edward L.
Abstract: The lawyer's crucial role in the contractual process has not been adequately addressed. Transaction cost economics provides a promising approach for doing so, but does not fully account for the lawyer's motivations or intentions. To do so, a more comprehensive theory of human behavior is required. Husserl's phenomenology, specifically his analysis of the natural attitude, provides such a theory. This article describes the role of lawyers in drafting complex entertainment contracts and explains that role in terms of both transaction cost economics and phenomenology. It argues that the two explanations are consistent, but that phenomenology offers additional insights and more fully explains the lawyer's actions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40751913
Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034232
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Subtelny Maria E.
Abstract: Tishby, Wisdom of the Zohar,
3: 1090-91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753349
Journal Title: Jewish Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40034250
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Slavet Eliza
Abstract: Freud, Moses and Monotheism, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40753472
Journal Title: Africa: Rivista trimestrale di studi e documentazione dell’Istituto italiano per l’Africa e l’Oriente
Publisher: Istituto italiano per l'Africa e l'Oriente
Issue: i40034726
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Giordano Rosario
Abstract: C. Braeckman, Congo. Après la Commission Lumumba. Un
nouveau chantier sur la décolonisation s'est ouvert pour les historiens, "Le Soir", 19 novembre
2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40761871
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40035400
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): ZACKA BERNARDO
Abstract: The critical discourse on U.S. military detainee abuse at Abu Ghraib prison has been dominated by Weberian-style arguments (a bureaucracy gone wrong, insufficient or badly applied administrative rules, or individuals acting as cogs in a machine). We argue that Michel Foucault's "security apparatus" provides a more insightful model for understanding the Abu Ghraib phenomenon. According to this model, the prison becomes a nodal point in an information-gathering nexus confronting unforeseen, emergent, and unclear events, a place where power is less disciplinary than improvisational, exercised through practical judgments about uncertain situations. The performance of such power at Abu Ghraib included the use of photography and acts that, we claim, resemble M. M. Bahktin's negative carnivalesque.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1425.2010.01250.x
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037285
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Lapprand Marc
Abstract: (Cortázar 1959).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40836666
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037286
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Perron Dominique
Abstract: Au sujet de ce concept dun discours hégémomque, relié à un "récit hégémo-
nique," il faut lire l'intéressant ouvrage de Micheline Cambrón, Une société, un
récit: discours culturel au Québec, 1967-1976 (Montréal: L'Hexagone, 1989).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40836687
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037333
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Châtel Vivianne
Abstract: Catherine Chalier sur les thèses de Emmanuel Lévinas, pp. 113-4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40837735
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037345
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Maddox Kelly-Anne
Abstract: Selon Sibony « [...] l'amour est une façon de revivre sa source d'être, de se redonner l'origine à l'état brut,
l'inconscient comme tel » (98)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40838099
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40037347
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Boudreault Laurence
Abstract: Mamadou Abib Kebe, dans « Plurilinguisme culturel et création romanesque : le cas d'Ahmadou Kourouma »
(http://critaoi.org/bib [12 décembre 2004]), parle même, chez Kourouma, d'une « écriture syncrétique » (p. 5)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40838133
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038151
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): PAILLER Claire
Abstract: On étudie, dans les textes de deux poètes nicaraguayens, Pablo Antonio Cuadra et Ernesto Cardenal, le recours au temps des mythes primordiaux par l'actualisation de la figure du héros fondateur et, parallèlement, la projection d'une situation historique présente dans une perspective eschatologique où la fin des temps est aussi la fin et l'accomplissement du Temps. Se estudia, en los textos de los dos poetas nicaragüenses Pablo Antonio Cuadra y Ernesto Cardenal, el recurso al tiempo de los mitos primordiales por la actualización de la figura del héroe fundador y, paralelamente la proyección de una situación histórica presente a una perspectiva escatològica, en la que el fin de los tiempos es también el fin y el cumplimiento del Tiempo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40853175
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038176
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): GALLAND Nathalie
Abstract: Ea
Barbarie, Paris, PUF, 1987, p. 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40854405
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40038188
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): LANGUE Frédérique
Abstract: Maité Rico, «La reinvención de la agonía y muerte de Bolívar. El empeño de Chávez
de investigar el 'asesinato' del Libertador desata la polémica entre los historiadores», El
País, 21 de diciembre de 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40855059
Journal Title: Canadian Slavonic Papers / Revue Canadienne des Slavistes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Slavists
Issue: i40038652
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Love Jeff
Abstract: Gary Saul Morson, "Writing
Like Roulette," Introduction to The Gambler, trans. Constance Garnett (New York:
Random House, 2003) xi-xliii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40860047
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038933
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lampert Tom
Abstract: Ibid., 139-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864442
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40038937
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): GRETHLEIN JONAS
Abstract: John Demos, Afterword: Notes from, and about, the History/Fiction Borderland, Rethinking
History 9, no. 2/3 (2005), 329.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40864496
Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40039166
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Lee Sherry D.
Abstract: Ibid. 313.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40871577
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Otto Schwartz
Issue: i40039318
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Lepenies Wolf
Abstract: J.-M. Domenach : „Le système et la personne“,
in: Esprit XXXV (1967), Nr. 360 (Structuralismes. Idéologie et Méthode), S. 771 ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40876918
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Otto Schwartz
Issue: i40039408
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Wiedenmann Rainer E.
Abstract: Kritik von Paul Ricoeur (1973, S. 68),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40877852
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039445
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Wohlrab-Sahr Monika
Abstract: Verständnis von Biographie Koller (1993)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878293
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039451
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Olsen Ole Johnny
Abstract: (Edwards 1979).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878346
Journal Title: Soziale Welt
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40039483
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Lentz Carola
Abstract: Programms (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40878654
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039556
Date: 12 1, 1957
Author(s): VERBEKE G.
Abstract: Chesterton, Heretics (aangehaald door W. James, Pragmatism, a new name for
some old ways of thinking. New York, London, Toronto, 1946, p. 3).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880337
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039569
Date: 3 1, 1961
Author(s): DE BRIE G. A.
Abstract: Zie
Ueber die Frage einer formalen Existentialethik, in Schriften zur Theologie, II, p. 239.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880649
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039577
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): VERMEULEN E. E. G.
Abstract: Jan Romein, Carillon der tijden, Amsterdam, 1953, 12 v.v.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880785
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Philosophie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039581
Date: 12 1, 1954
Author(s): DE VOGELAERE A. V.
Abstract: F. Heiler (Das Gebet, p. 491)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880906
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039582
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): VANSINA Dirk F.
Abstract: HV, 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40880933
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039604
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): GEVAERT F.
Abstract: HR., I, p. 120.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881262
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039608
Date: 12 1, 1968
Author(s): IJSSELING Samuel
Abstract: S. Leclaire op het Seminane aan de École Normale Supérieure te Parijs
(20 maart 1968).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881347
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039609
Date: 3 1, 1967
Author(s): GEVAERT F.
Abstract: HR., II, p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881378
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039610
Date: 6 1, 1967
Author(s): PARRET H.
Abstract: Blanchot, M., Nietzsche et l'écriture fragmentaire, m : Nouvelle Revue Fran-
çaise, jan. 1967, p. 32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881401
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039614
Date: 6 1, 1968
Author(s): ROBERT J.-D.
Abstract: M. J. Wild, L’ anthropologie philosophique et la crise des
sciences européennes, dans Husserl, Paris, Ed. de Minuit, 1959, 279-292 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881488
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039621
Date: 6 1, 1970
Author(s): BERGER H.
Abstract: LM, biz. 64-66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881786
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039625
Date: 6 1, 1971
Author(s): ROBERT J. D.
Abstract: H. Lefèbvre, in L'homme et la société, 1967,
3-22, pp. 16-17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40881917
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Vereeniging voor Wijsgeerige Uitgaven
Issue: i40039630
Date: 6 1, 1969
Author(s): IJSSELING Samuel
Abstract: Über den Humanismus, Frankfurt a.M., 1947, p. 30
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882078
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039640
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): HOLENSTEIN Elmar
Abstract: (Husserl, 1966, p. 339).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882437
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039641
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): ROBERT J. D.
Abstract: Théories et modèles relationnels (pp. 144-151)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882498
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039646
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): KWANT R. C.
Abstract: Les mots et les choses, pp. 392-398.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882696
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039649
Date: 3 1, 1976
Author(s): ZWEERMAN Th.
Abstract: Oosterhuis' gedieht „Vier Muren" in: dez., Zien
Soms Even. Bilthoven, 1972, p. 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40882819
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039657
Date: 3 1, 1978
Author(s): VAN DER VEKEN J.
Abstract: RC 155 : „c'est L'Être qui parle en nous plutôt que nous ne parlons
de l'Être".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883139
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039658
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): GEERTS Adri
Abstract: PF, p. 333-334.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883186
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039661
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): ROBERT J.-D.
Abstract: A. De Waelhens, La réalité humaine,
in Homme, in Encyclopaedia Universalis, vol. 8 (1970), 501-510 ; surtout: Le sacré, pp. 509-510.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883287
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039664
Date: 9 1, 1979
Author(s): BOUDIER C. STRUYKER
Abstract: J. Plat, Ethiek en Godsdienst, van Immanuel Kant tot
Emmanuel Levinas, in Alg. Ned. Tijdscbr. v. Wijsb., 6e jrg., afl. 1, jan. 1972, 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883393
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039667
Date: 6 1, 1980
Author(s): KOCKELMANS Joseph J.
Abstract: Edmund Husserl, „Erneuerung", in Kaiso-la Rekonstruyo, 3 (1923) 84-92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883538
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039670
Date: 6 1, 1981
Author(s): GIER Nicholas F.
Abstract: D. L.
Couprie, op. cit., footnote 6.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883673
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039674
Date: 6 1, 1982
Author(s): Moyaert Paul
Abstract: LACAN, o.c., blz. 807/2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40883850
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Filosoficum der Vlaamse Dominikanen en door het Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte te Leuven
Issue: i40039680
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): ROBERT J.-D.
Abstract: Les fonctions de la phénoménologie à l'égard des sciences de l'homme et des
philosophes, 1977, 273-308.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884094
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039685
Date: 9 1, 1983
Author(s): MOYAERT PAUL
Abstract: ibid., blz. 802.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40884294
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039704
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): Verschaffel Bart
Abstract: Bergson se faisant, in : Signes (Paris, I960).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40885537
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039724
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Kuiper Mark
Abstract: Léon HANSSEN. W.E.
Krul en Anton VAN DER Lem (red.) (Utrecht, 1991), nr. 1378.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40886742
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039758
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): van Tongeren P.
Abstract: Bijvoorbeeld: H. STIERLIN, Nietzsche, Hölderlin und das Verrückte. Systemische Exkurse. Heidelberg,
Carl-Auer-Systeme Verlag, 1992, 21 χ 13,5, 182 p., DM 36,-.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40888657
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039779
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Berns Egidius
Abstract: Les fins de l'homme, Paris, Galilée, 1981, p. 114.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40889682
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039789
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Figal Günter
Abstract: Edmund HUSSERL, Ideen I, Husserliana III. 1, S. 62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890094
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039790
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Aydin Ciano
Abstract: CP 6.64.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890137
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039792
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Brabant Christophe
Abstract: Ricœur, Temps et récit I, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890226
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039795
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): de Boer Theo
Abstract: Seamus Heaney, De genoegdoening van poëzie, vertaald door Jan EIjKELBOOM, Amsterdam, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890370
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039796
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): De Visscher Jacques
Abstract: Gentse Cultuurvereniging (1 oktober 2007)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890392
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Hoger Instituut voor Wijsbegeerte (K.U. Leuven)
Issue: i40039798
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): van Tongeren Paul
Abstract: Aurelius Augustinus, Confessionum Libri XIII. Zwolle, Tjeenk Willink, 1960, X.50 (p. 164).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890441
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40039802
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Alloa Emmanuel
Abstract: Aristote, Poet. 4, 1448b13 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40890626
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040146
Date: 9 1, 1950
Author(s): Husserl E.
Abstract: Ideen, I, fait déjà allusion à cette activité productrice,
créatrice de l' Ego primitif (§ 122).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40899510
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040186
Date: 9 1, 1959
Author(s): Reboul Jean
Abstract: Husserl, Ideen I, traduct. Ricœur, Gallimard, p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40900471
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040202
Date: 6 1, 1964
Author(s): Vansina D. F.
Abstract: Premier entretien privé, dans L'angoisse du temps présent et les devoirs de l'esprit
(Rencontres internationales de Genève 1953), Neuchâtel, 1953, 210.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40900809
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040254
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Stanguennec André
Abstract: Hegel, Principes de la Philosophie du Droit, trad. Kaan, § 7
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40901758
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040258
Date: 6 1, 1978
Author(s): Gabaude Jean-Marc
Abstract: Ibidem, p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40901848
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040275
Date: 9 1, 1981
Author(s): Raulet Gérard
Abstract: B. Schmidt : « Ernst Bloch, philosophe marxiste », in Le Discours utopique -Actes
du colloque de Cerisy, 1975, Paris, U.G.E., 1978 (« 10/18 »).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902274
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040285
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Romeyer-Dherbey Gilbert
Abstract: T., I, 248-249.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902536
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040288
Date: 9 1, 1984
Author(s): Armengaud Françoise
Abstract: G. Weiler, « On Relevance », in Mind, 1962.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902608
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040298
Date: 6 1, 1987
Author(s): Jacques Francis
Abstract: M. Dummett, Frege : Philosophy of Language, Duckworth, 1973.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40902866
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040304
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): Hunyadi Mark
Abstract: HN, p. 562-563.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903004
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040311
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): Amselek Paul
Abstract: Hans-Georg Gadamer, (Vérité et méthode, Paris, Seuil, 1976, p. 239 sq.) et de Paul
Ricœur (Du texte à l'action, Paris, Seuil, 1986, p. 111 sq.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903110
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040313
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: GA 24, p. 393-405.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903140
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040318
Date: 6 1, 1992
Author(s): Debru Claude
Abstract: Henri Bergson, Matière et Mémoire, Œuvres, édition du Centenaire, Paris, P.U.F.,
1959, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903219
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040320
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Seidengart Jean
Abstract: E. Cassirer, Die Philosophie der symbolischen Formen, III : Phänomenologie der
Erkenntnis, op. cit., p. 525.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903245
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40040330
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Balibar Étienne
Abstract: Cancrini, 1970, p. 20-21,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903439
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040338
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Ricœur Paul
Abstract: (ibid.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903576
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040350
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Hermeneutik und Meta-
physik. Eine Problemgeschichte, Munich, W. Fink Verlag, 1994, p. 121-128.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903769
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040351
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Benoist Jocelyn
Abstract: Ibid., p. 355-356.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903791
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040355
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Hunyadi Mark
Abstract: Sylvie Mesure et Alain Renaut, Alter Ego, les paradoxes de l'identité démocratique, Paris,
Aubier, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903850
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040366
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: R. W. Emerson, La Confiance en soi, Paris, Rivages Poche, 2000, p. 109.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40903987
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40040375
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Melcer Alain
Abstract: Le Champ de
l'argumentation, op. cit., p. 312.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40904121
Journal Title: Scandinavian Studies
Publisher: Society for the Advancement of Scandinavian Study
Issue: i40041327
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Kramer Nathaniel
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur's after-the-fact
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40920773
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i378409
Date: 9 1, 1976
Author(s): Woodside Tine
Abstract: Intertwining ethnographic and literary accounts, this article explores the mutual relationship between suffering and agency. The article describes how young Vietnamese women use narrative to find meaning in the suffering that a late-term abortion causes. Seeking to further develop anthropological use of the concept of social suffering, the article argues that existing scholarship has tended to neglect the importance of human agency and imagination, hinging as it does on suffering as entrenched within structural forces. The article contends that this neglect must be understood in the context of the particular epistemological and ethical conditions under which anthropological studies of human suffering are produced, and that closer attention to the human engagements out of which ethnographic accounts are fashioned may bring into analysis not only the harm that social forces can inflict on people, but also their capacities for action and imagination. / Mêlant ethnographic et récits littéraires, l'article explore la relation réciproque entre souffrance et agency. Il décrit comment les jeunes femmes vietnamiennes utilisent la narration pour trouver un sens à la souffrance causée par une fausse couche tardive. Visant à élargir l'utilisation anthropologique du concept de souffrance humaine, l'auteur montre que les études tendent à négliger l'importance de l'agency et de l'imagination, qui s'articule sur la souffrance enracinée dans les forces structurelles. L'auteur affirme que cette négligence doit être comprise dans le contexte de conditions épistémologiques et éthiques particulières dans lesquelles sont produites les études anthropologiques de la souffrance humaine, et qu'une analyse plus attentive des engagements humains desquels sont issus les récits ethnographiques peut introduire dans la réflexion non seulement le mal que les forces sociales peuvent infliger aux individus, mais aussi les capacités d'action et d'imagination de ceux-ci.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4092509
Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40041727
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Franzosi Roberto P.
Abstract: Franzosi 2004a, pp. 266-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40928085
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041831
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Escudier Alexandre
Abstract: R. Koselleck, «Historische Kriterien...», art. cit., p. 67-86, ici p. 86, repris in Le
futur passé..., op. cit., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929925
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041832
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Anheim Étienne
Abstract: J. Gracq, Au Château d'Argol, ibid., t. 1, p. 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40929990
Journal Title: Archives de sciences sociales des religions
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des hautes etudes en sciences sociales
Issue: i40041838
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Truc Gérôme
Abstract: (Halbwachs, 2008 : 149),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930307
Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40041850
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): HAYWARD EVA
Abstract: In When Species Meet (2008) Donna Haraway proposes that creatures' identities and affinities emerge through their encounters, their relationships. Following Haraway's lead, I attend to how different species sense and apprehend one another, leaving impressions—concrescences of perceptual data, or texture. This essay reports on fieldwork alongside marine biologists and with a population of cup corals (B. elegans) housed at the Long Marine Laboratory, Santa Cruz, California. While I assisted researchers who were studying metabolic rates and reproductive strategies in coral communities, these cup corals simultaneously taught me that being and sensing are inextricably enfolded. We were variously situated—corals generating generations, me interpretations. We met through a material-semiotic apparatus I call "fingeryeyes." As an act of sensuous manifesting, fingeryeyes offers a queer reading of how making sense and sensual meaning are produced through determinable and permeable species boundaries.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1548-1360.2010.01070.x
Journal Title: Contemporary European History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041857
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): GORDON DANIEL A.
Abstract: 50 ans plus tard. . . le réalisme c'est toujours l'utopie, 10 April 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930576
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40041866
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Bovon François
Abstract: Jean-Daniel Macchi and Christophe Nihan, "Mort, résurrection et au-delà dans la Bible
hébraïque et dans le judaïsme ancien," BCPE 62 (2010) 1-53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40930894
Journal Title: Cahiers du Monde russe
Publisher: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40041890
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): GRIESSE MALTE
Abstract: GARF,f. R-9665,op. 1,d. 205,1. 52-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40931325
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i378715
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): Zizek Tyler
Abstract: Orsi stresses the "tragic" nature of religious agency and meaning making
(2005: 144, 170).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4094005
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042682
Date: 1 1, 1957
Author(s): Léonard Émile G.
Abstract: K. C. Steek, Der evangelische Christ und die römische
Kirche (Munich, Kaiser, 1952, 48 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40948827
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042739
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Boutruche Robert
Abstract: Mentionnons sans insister, car il est hâtif et souffre d'une information défec-
tueuse, le petit livre de Fernand Niel, Albigeois et Cathares. Paris, Presses Universitaires
de France, in-16, 127 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40950619
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042777
Date: 6 1, 1975
Author(s): Simon Marcel
Abstract: Pasquale Testini, Le catacombe e gli antichi cimiteri cristiani in Roma, Bologne,
Casa Editrice Licinio Cappelli, 1966, 413 p., 8 500 lires.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40952253
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042803
Date: 3 1, 1979
Author(s): Kaplan Steven
Abstract: R. Marquant, Les bureaux de place-
ment en France sous l'Empire et la Restauration, Revue d'histoire économique et sociale,
1962, XL.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40953225
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042843
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): Sirinelli Jean-François
Abstract: Jean-Pierre Rioux et moi-
même seront publiés à l'automne 1988 dans le Cahier de l'IHTP n° 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40954650
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042887
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): Bédarida François
Abstract: livre, Objectivity is not Neutrality : explanatory schemes in history, Baltimore, Johns
Hopkins University Press, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40956185
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042916
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Senséby Chantai
Abstract: Paul Ricœur (La mémoire, l'oubli..., op. cit. (n. 65),
p. 97-111).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40957349
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042926
Date: 7 1, 2006
Author(s): Gross Guillaume
Abstract: Mary J. Carruthers,, Machina memorialis, op. at., p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40957797
Journal Title: Revue Historique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40042929
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Hazareesingh Sudhir
Abstract: Laird Boswell, L'historiographie du communisme français est-elle dans une impasse ?,
Revue française de science politique, 55, n° 5-6, octobre-décembre 2005, p. 919-933.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40957935
Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40042984
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Mérindol Jean-Yves
Abstract: L. Viry, Le monde vécu des
universitaires ou la République des Egos, Rennes, Presses Universitaires de Rennes, 2006.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40959665
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40043093
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): NEL PHILIP
Abstract: Taylor, "The South Will Rise Again?", p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40961962
Journal Title: Cinema Journal
Publisher: University of Texas Press
Issue: i40043125
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Celik Ipek A.
Abstract: Fredric Jameson, The Political Unconscious (Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press, 1981), 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40962837
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043588
Date: 4 1, 1967
Author(s): PASSERON JEAN-CLAUDE
Abstract: Sahlins, loc. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40969868
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043626
Date: 4 1, 1978
Author(s): SUHÜRMANN REINER
Abstract: Arendt, "Martin Heidegger at Eighty," p. 50.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970325
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043634
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): SHALIN DMITRI N.
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, New Rules of Sociological Method: A Positive Critique of Inter-
pretative Sociologies (New York: Basic Books, 1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970406
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043636
Date: 10 1, 1986
Author(s): GIDDENS ANTHONY
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Hermeneutics and the Human Sciences (Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1981).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970430
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043638
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): BRUNER JEROME
Abstract: Ulric Neisser, "Autobiographical Memory," unpublished manuscript, Emory
University, 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970444
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SASS LOIUIS A.
Abstract: L. Sass and R.
Woolfolk, "Psychoanalysis and the Hermeneutic Turn: A Critique of Narrative Truth
and Historical Truth," Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970521
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043645
Date: 12 1, 1988
Author(s): SAIEDI NADER
Abstract: Anthony Giddens, "Actions, Subjectivity, and the Constitution of Meaning,"
Social Research 53 (Autumn 1986): 538.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970528
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043647
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): COATS A.W.
Abstract: Dopfer, "The Histonomic Approach to
Economics."
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970547
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043668
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): SHEEHAN THOMAS
Abstract: Mircea Eliade, "The Myths of the Modern World," in Myths, Dreams, and
Mysteries (New York: Harper Torchbook, 1971), pp. 23ff.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40970798
Journal Title: Social Research
Publisher: Graduate Faculty of Political and Social Science, New School for Social Research
Issue: i40043684
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Radzai Ronald
Abstract: Tony Judt, "The Past is Another
Country: Myth and Memory in Postwar Europe," in "Immobile Democracy?" Daedalus
121:4 (1992).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40971010
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043913
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Leclerc-Olive Michèle
Abstract: I. Calvino,
Leçons américaines, Gallimard, 1989, p. 100.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978632
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043917
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Garelli Jacques
Abstract: Renaud
Barbaras, in Le tournant de l'expérience, Pans, Vnn, 1998 et Le désir et la distance, Pans,
Vnn, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40978678
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043976
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Bidima Jean-Godefroy
Abstract: Arferean, op. cit., p. 139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40979945
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043976
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Bidima Jean-Godefroy
Abstract: Du Sinaï
au Champ-de-Mars. L'autre et le même au fondement du droit, Bruxelles, Éditions Lessius,
1999, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40979956
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40043987
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): MUSTAPHA MOUNIRA BEN
Abstract: Monique Castillo. Kant, l'invention
critique, Vrin. Paris, 1997, p. 148.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rdes.061.0098
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044003
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): Massit-Folléa Françoise
Abstract: Rapport Unesco, p. 165.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40980531
Journal Title: Rue Descartes
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044003
Date: 2 1, 2007
Author(s): CHATONSKY GRÉGORY
Abstract: Jean-François
Lyotard, «Domus et la mégapole» in L'Inhumain,
op. cit., p. 210-212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40980535
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40044033
Date: 5 1, 2010
Author(s): Barber Michael
Abstract: Schutz (forthcoming, pp. 16-20; 1957, pp. 15-18/
035231-035234; 1966, pp. 64-66)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40981087
Journal Title: Journal of Music Theory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i40044259
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cox Franklin
Abstract: Adorno 1963, 365-437.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40984940
Journal Title: Luso-Brazilian Review
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40044266
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Simas-Almeida Leonor
Abstract: Since its first publication, A Costa dos Murmúrios has attracted the critics' attention to the paradox of the explicit denial of its own authority over the historical facts that are part of the narration and its implicit, if qualified, affirmation of the same authority. This article also focuses on the sort of subliminal tension but from the angle of the literary construction of emotions, rather than examining either the poetics of historiographic metafiction or the role of memory in the narration of the past. Analyzing various aspects of A Costa dos Murmúrios (such as the predominant points of view, the structure of the narrative, the disintegration of the characters' identities, the emotional impact of a few vivid scences, the personalization of national events), a case is made for reading this novel as an intimate chronicle of historical facts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985100
Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40044274
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Menke Christoph
Abstract: (Herder, Cognition 212).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985267
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40044280
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Campe Rüdiger
Abstract: "Ak-
tualität des Bildes. Die Zeit rhetorischer Figuration," Figur und Figuration. Studien zu Wahrneh-
mung und Wissen. Eds. Gottfried Boehm, Gabriele Brandstetter, Achatz von Müller (Munich:
Fink, 2007), 163-182.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40985371
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044518
Date: 6 1, 1994
Author(s): Ramognino Nicole
Abstract: Le défi du groupe Luciole consiste à montrer l'intérêt heuristique d'une observation de la matérialité des formes symboliques. La campagne présidentielle 1988 par voie d'affiches, a servi de corpus. Nous avons ainsi décrit ces affiches comme des matériaux mixtes, complexes et hétérogènes : description des opérations cognitives, symboliques, interactives et intertextuelles qui permettent la construction et la co-construction des significations matérialisées dans l'affiche. Les résultats obtenus sont cumulables avec deux conceptualisations différentes : servir d'étalon pour mesurer la « réalité sociale » (l'émission et/ou la réception) ; ou attribuer au « sens » la valeur de condition de possibilité de la réalité sociale. The challenge take up by the LUCIOLE group is to demonstrate the heuristic interest of the observation of the materiality of symbolic forms. The posters of the French presidential election campaign of 1988 provided us with our study corpus. We have described these posters as mixed materials of a complex and heterogeneous nature. We describe the cognitive, symbolic, interactive and inter textual operations which allow for the construction and co-construction of the significations materialised in the posters. The results obtained may be added to those of two different conceptualisations. They may serve as benchmarks to measure « social reality » (its emission and/or reception) or, alternatively, give the « sense » of the poster a value as a condition for a possible social reality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40989544
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40044538
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Vultur Smaranda
Abstract: En étudiant les récits de vie des paysans roumains du Banat et d'Olténie déportés dans les années cinquante dans la plaine de Bǎrǎgan, nous avons essayé de mettre en évidence de quelle façon le récit de vie peut être un révélateur d'une réalité ethno-historique et anthropologique. Nous avons souligné le problème d'ordre méthodologique qu'une telle étude pose au chercheur. Dans un premier temps, nous avons discuté le statut discursif du récit de vie comme discours de témoignage, et les conséquences qui en dérivent pour son analyse comme texte narratif et argumentatif qui développe une rhétorique spécifique. Une description du contexte historique auquel font référence les textes, ainsi que des circonstances dans lesquelles l'enquête orale a été menée, nous a semblé nécessaire pour dégager l'importance du thème de l'identité et de la différence dans les récits de nos interlocuteurs. En analysant ce thème, nous avons tenu compte des constellations idéologiques et symboliques qui dominent ces développements dans le texte des critères que les paysans utilisent pour se différencier de l'Autre sous ses différents visages. L'analyse de ces facteurs suggère des pistes intéressantes pour déceler certaines mentalités et pratiques culturelles, surtout celles liées au foyer et à la famille et aux pratiques culinaires. Studiind povesteǎ vieţii a 70 de ţǎrani deporţati între anii 1951-1956 în Bǎrǎgan am pus în evidenţǎ problemele de ordin metodologic şi teoretic cu care se confruntǎ cercetǎorul dornic sǎ reconstituie o realitate istoricǎ, etnograficǎ şi antropologicǎ pornind de la mǎrturiile celor ce povestesc evenimentul deportǎrii. Purtînd mǎrcile subiecti viaţii naratorului şi a unei ideologii personale aceste texte sunt în acelaşţi timp naraţiuni şi o formǎ de a depune mǎrturie. Ele dezvoltǎ deci o retoricǎ specialǎ prin care faptul trǎit se transformǎ în fapt povestit şi se comunicǎ unui interlocutor. Analia acestei retorici necesitǎ cunoaşterea discursurilor prin care evenimentul ne parvine, a condiţiilor în care s-a desfǎşurat ancheta, compararea povestirilor între ele pentru a constata apropierile diferenþele şi mai ales diferitele tipuri de focalizǎri. Acestea din urmǎ ne permit sa sesizǎm ce e mai important pentru cel ce povesteşte şi de ce. Pentru a ilustra aceasta problematicǎ ne-am oprit la tema identitǎţii şi alţeritǎţii, încercînd sǎ urmǎrim constelatiile idéologice şi culturale sub semnul cǎrora stau expansiunile ei in texte, criteriile prin care Celǎlalt este identificat şi prezentat. Through the study of the life stories told by the Romanian peasants of Banat and Oltenie, who were deported during the 1950s to the plain of Baragan, this article attempts to show how such biographical accounts can serve to reveal an ethno-historical and anthropological reality.We begin by underlining the methodological problems that such studies pose for the researcher. We discuss the discursive status of these accounts as a discourse intended to bear witness and the implications of this status for an analysis as a narrative and argumentative text, generating its own specific rhetoric. Along with an account of how this oral enquiry was carried out, it also seemed necessary to give a description of the historical context to which these accounts refer, in order to draw attention to the theme of identity and difference in the accounts given. The analysis of this theme required that due attention be paid do the ideological and symbolic constellations that surround it, in the criteria that the peasants use to differentiate the Other, in his or her multifarious guises. The examination of these factors offers several interesting lines of enquiry on cultural practices and mentalities, and on those in particular which relate to the household, the family and culinary habits. Indem wir die Lebensgeschichten der rumänischen Bauern aus Banat und Oltenie studierten, die in den fünfziger Jahren in die Ebene von Baragan vertrieben wurden, versuchten wir, herauszustellen, wie die Lebensgeschichte eine volksgeschichtliche und anthropologische Wirklichkeit ans Licht stellen kann. Wir haben das methodologische Problem betont, die sich für den Forscher aus derartigen Studie ergibt. Zuerst haben wir den erzählerischen Status der Lebenserzählung als Zeugnisrede erörtert, sowohl als auch die Folgen, die sich daraus ergeben, wenn sie als erzählender und argumentierender Text analysiert werden soll, der eine spezifische Rhetorik entwickelt. Eine Schilderung des historischen Zusammenhangs, worauf sich die Texte beziehen, und der Umstände, unter denen die mündliche Befragung sich abspielte, kam uns als notwendig vor, um die Bedeutung des Themas der Identität und des Unterschieds in den Erzählungen unserer Gesprächspartner hervorzuheben. In der Analyse dieses Themas nahmen wir die ideologischen und symbolischen Konstellationen in Kauf, die in den Textstellen vorherrschend sind, wo die Kriterien dargelegt werden, die die Bauern benutzen, um sich von dem Anderen unter seinen verschiedenen Gesichten zu unterscheiden. Die Analyse dieser Faktoren legt uns interessante Forschungswege nahe, die es erlauben, manche Denkweisen und kulturelle Verhaltensweisen herauszuheben, und zwar insbesondere diejenigen, die mit dem Heim -, Familienleben und Kochsitten verbunden sind.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990061
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044548
Date: 3 1, 2001
Author(s): Puccio Deborah
Abstract: L'expérience professionnelle et humaine de Giovanni Falcone, le juge instructeur du plus spectaculaire procès intenté contre la mafia, nous amène à examiner les relations entre l'enquête judiciaire et l'enquête ethnographique : car c'est grâce à l'instruction du Maxiprocesso (1986) qu'aujourd'hui nous disposons d'une abondante moisson de données sur Cosa Nostra, son fonctionnement, ses règles internes et son code d'honneur. Si la reconstruction d'une vérité au moyen d'indices, dans un monde protégé par l'omertà, apparente les techniques d'investigation du juge au modèle épistémologique qui est au fondement des sciences humaines depuis le XIXe siècle, l'utilisation d'informateurs appartenant à l'univers mafieux — les repentis — est à mettre en parallèle plus directement avec les méthodes de l'ethnographie. The human and professional experience of Giovanni Falcone, the examining magistrate in the most spectacular legal operation launched against the Mafia, makes us examine the relations between the judicial and the ethnographic investigation, for it is due to the inquiries of the Maxiprocesso (1986) that we now possess an abundant source of data on the Cosa Nostra, its operation, its internal rules and its code of honour. While, in a world protected by the omertà, the re-establishment of facts by means of evidence places the investigative techniques of the judge among those of the epistemological model, basis of the human sciences since the 19th century, the use of informers — the pentiti — from the world of the Mafia, on the other hand, reflects more directly the methods of ethnography. Das berufliche und menschliche Erfahrenheit des Untersuchungsrichters Giovanni Falcone im spektakulärsten aller jemals gegen die Mafia durchgeführten Prozesse führt uns zu einer Überprüfung der Beziehungen zwischen gerichtlicher und ethnographischer Untersuchung, denn dank der Voruntersuchung im Maxiprocesso (1986) verfügen wir heute über eine umfangreiche Sammlung von Angaben über die Cosa Nostra, über ihre Arbeitsweise, ihre inneren Regeln und ihren Ehrenkodex. In einer durch die Omertà geschützten Welt gleicht die Vorgehensweise des Richters bei der Aufdeckung der Wahrheit dem epistemologischen Modell, das den Humanwissenschaften seit dem 19. Jahrhundert zugrunde liegt, während die Verwendung von Informanten aus dem Bereiche der Mafia — den Pentiti — sich eher mit den Methoden der Ethnographie vergleichen lässt.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990302
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044553
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Giordano Christian
Abstract: Le Tessin représente l'unique canton de la Suisse à grande majorité italophone. La construction de l'identité se base essentiellement sur la notion d'« italianité » et sur celle de « helvétidté ». Il s'agit en réalité d'une « double appartenance », et l'article analyse les différents modes de production sociale de l'ambivalence au plan des discours (historiques, linguistiques, folkloriques, politiques, rituels et visuels) et des pratiques sociales correspondantes. The canton Ticino is the unique Swiss canton with Italian-speaking majority. The construction of identity is based essentially on che notions of « italianity » and « swissness » which reveal in fact a « multiple belonging » to Italy and Switzerland. The article analyzes social production of ambivalence in historical, linguistic, folkloric, political, ritual and visual discourses and the corresponding social practices. Der Kanton Tessin ist der einzige Kanton mit italienisch-sprenchender Mehrheit. Die Konstruktion der nationalen Identität beruht hauptsächlich auf den Begriffen von « italianità » und « patria svizzera », was eine multiple italienische und schweizerische Angehörigkeit andeutet. Der Artikel analysiert die verschiedenen Modi von Sozialer Produktion von Ambivalenz in historischen, linguistischen politischen, ritualen und visualen Diskursen und der entsprechenden sozialen Praktiken.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990449
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044564
Date: 3 1, 2005
Author(s): Chabert Pierre
Abstract: La sociabilité méridionale offre l'occasion d'un débat pluri-transdisciplinaire dont l'auteur, à la suite des historiens et des ethnologues, a tenté d'établir une typologie. Il s'agira d'approfondir la dimension politique dont certains cercles de villages font preuve, tant par leur action au sein d'une démocratie participative que par un ensemble de pratiques recourant à la notion de légitimité. Parmi ces mécanismes de contre-pouvoir, le patrimoine politique dont le cercle est le symbole recouvre la notion d'un imaginaire qui trouve à la fois ses sources dans l'histoire locale et dans la mémoire nationale. The southern sociability offers the opportunity of a pluri-transdisciplinary debate of which the author, following historians and ethnologists, tried to establish a typology. The purpose here is to better define the political dimension of some village circles revealed both through their action within a participative democracy and a set of practices appealing to the notion of legitimacy. Among these counterpower mechanisms the political heritage symbolised by the circle covers the notion of imagination rooted both in the local history and the national memory. Die südfranzösische Geselligkeit bietet die Gelegenheit einer inter- und transdisziplinären Debatte. Der Autor hat versucht, deren Typologie zu erstellen, dabei Historikern und Ethnologen folgend. Es handelt sich hier darum, die politische Dimension näher zu bestimmen, die einige Dorfkreise durch ihre Tätigkeit innerhalb einer partizipativen Demokratie sowie durch eine Gesamtheit von Praktiken aufzeigen, die den Begriff der Legitimität in Anspruch nehmen. Unter diesen Gegenkraftsmechanismen umfasst das durch den Kreis symbolisierte politische Erbe den Begriff der Vorstellungswelt, die in der lokalen Geschichte und dem nationalen Gedächtnis gewurzelt ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990771
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044567
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Tornatore Jean-Louis
Abstract: Entrepris depuis un quart de siècle, le démantèlement de l'industrie lourde lorraine (mines et sidérurgie) touche à sa fin. À partir de la comparaison entre le dernier événement en date, la fermeture spectaculaire de la dernière mine de charbon, et la mise en scène, une décennie plus tôt, de la dernière coulée d'une usine de la Lorraine sidérurgique, l'auteur s'interroge sur les finalités patrimoniales de telles célébrations. Présentant quelques moments du traitement culturel — patrimonial, mémoriel... — de la crise industrielle lorraine, depuis les symptômes photographiques d'une mémoire empêchée jusqu'au musée très « contrôlé » en passant par la monumentalisation controversée de restes industriels, il met l'accent sur la lutte des représentations qui se noue autour de la construction de la « Lorraine industrielle » en objet-frontière patrimonial. Cet article souhaite ainsi contribuer à une anthropologie politique de l'institution de la mémoire. The dismantling of the heavy industry in Lorraine that is under way since a quarter of century (mines and iron and steel industry) is nearing its end. When comparing the latest event — the spectacular closure of the last coalmine — with the staging of the last casting in an iron and steel factory of Lorraine ten years earlier the author questions about the patrimonial aims of such celebrations. He shows some sequences of the cultural treatment (patrimonial, memorial) of the industrial crisis in Lorraine, from the photographic « symptoms » of a hindered memory to the highly « controlled » museum and to the industrial remains turned into historic buildings, a largely controversial fact. In this context he stresses the conflicting representations of « industrial Lorraine » as a patrimonial Boundary Object (abstract or concrete, that several actors can appropriate as they like). This article is meant to contribute to a political anthropology of memory institution. Die Zerschlagung der lothringischen Schwerindustrie (Bergwerken und Eisen- und Stahlindustrie) geht zu Ende. Der Autor vergleicht das jüngste Ereignis, die spektakuläre Schliessung der letzten Kohlenbergwerks, mit der Inszenierung des letzten Giessens einer lothringischen Eisenhütte zehn Jare früher und fragt sich über die patrimonialen Finalitäten solcher Zelebrationen. Er zeigt einige Zeitpunkte der kulturellen Behandlung der lothringischen industriellen Krise (bezüglich des Erbes und Gedächtnisses), von den photographischen Symptomen eines verhinderten Gedächtnisses über die industriellen Resten, die nun unter dem Denkmalschutz stehen, was sehr umstritten wird, bis hin zu dem höchst « kontrollierten » Museum. In diesem Kontext hebt er die Kämpfe hervor, die um die Repräsentationen der Konstruktion des « industriellen » Lothringens als ein patrimoniales (abstraktes oder konkretes) « Grenzobjekt » entstanden, das sich mehrere Akteure nach Belieben aneignen können. Das Ziel dieser Artikel ist, zu einer politischen Anthropologie der Gedächtnisinstitution einen Beitrag zu leisten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990851
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044569
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Raveneau Gilles
Abstract: La plongée sous-marine en milieu naturel est une activité qui modifie l'équilibre et la perception du corps. Les plongeurs – souvent convaincus de pratiquer une activité sans danger – s'exposent pourtant à des risques potentiellement mortels. À partir d'une enquête ethnographique, l'auteur montre qu'en définitive ce sport laisse une place aux transgressions des normes où le risque est progressivement converti en sécurité. Cet arrangement implique d'acquérir la maîtrise des « techniques de neutralisation » du risque, permettant aux plongeurs d'entretenir paradoxalement un système normatif, tout en le « violant ». Il apparaît ainsi que la transgression des normes de sécurité est moins un acte individuel qu'une conduite déterminée par l'organisation sociale de la plongée. Diving in a natural medium modifies the equilibrium and perception of the body. Divers — often convinced to practice a safe activity — expose themselves to potentially mortal risks. On the basis of an ethnographic survey the author shows that this sport leaves room for an infringement of norms where risk is progressively neutralized. This implies that divers master the neutralization techniques that enable them paradoxically to maintain a normative system and to violate it at the same time. Infringement of safety norms thus appears to be an individual act rather than a behaviour determined by the divers' social organization. Der Tauchsport in einem natürlichen Medium verändert das Equilibrium und die Wahrnehmung des Körpers. Die Taucher — die oft davon überzeugt sind, dass sie einen risikolosen Sport treiben — setzen sich potentiell tödlichen Risiken aus. Auf der Basis eiener ethnographischen Studie zeigt der Autor, dass dieser Sport Platz für eine Übertretung der Normen lässt, wo das Risiko allmählich neutralisiert wird. Dies setzt voraus, dass die Taucher die Neutralisationstechniken beherrschen, die sie paradoxerweise ermöglichen, ein normatives System zu erhalten und zur gleicher Zeit zu verletzen. Es zeigt sich, dass die Übertretung der Sicherheitsnormen eher eine individuelle Handlung als ein von der sozialen Organisation der Taucher bedingtes Verhalten ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40990897
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044571
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Laborde Denis
Abstract: De 1997 à 2002, eurent lieu la naissance, l'élaboration puis la création par l'Ensemble Modem de Francfort d'un opéra vidéo du compositeur minimaliste américain Steve Reich et de la vidéaste Beryl Korot: Three Tales. Cet opéra était une commande de Klaus Peter Kehr, directeur musical des Wiener Festwochen (Vienne). Sa réalisation mobilisa un important réseau de collaborations aboutissant à un montage financier mené sur la base d'une coproduction de grande ampleur réunissant des festivals européens de création contemporaine de premier rang et deux festivals américains. L'auteur décrit sa démarche, à travers quelques « moteurs de recherche », ainsi que son implication personnelle dans le projet lui-même. The birth, preparation, and actual performance of Three Tales, a video opera signed by Steve Reich, the American minimalist composer, and Beryl Korot, the video-artist, took place between 1997 and 2002, under the aegis of the Frankfurt Modern Ensemble. The opera had been commissioned by Klaus Peter Kehr, musical director of the Wiener Festwochen in Vienna. The project was thus based on a vast collaborative network resulting in an coproduction agreement for funding. This agreement brought together a number of leading European festivals for contemporary creation and two American festivals. The author of the paper describes his research protocol, by way of a certain number of "search engines". He also refers to his own personal involved in the project. Zwischen 1997 und 2002 wurde die Idee zu der Videooper „Three Tales" des minimalistischen Komponisten Steve Reich und des Videokünstlers Beryl Korot vom Modernen Ensemble der Oper Frankfurt umgesetzt. Die Oper war eine Auftragsarbeit des Intendanten der Wiener Festwochen, Klaus Peter Kehr. Ihre Inszenierung konnte finanziell durch ein Netzwerk realisiert werden, einer Kooperation von hochrangigen europäischen und amerikanischen Festivals zeitgenössischer Kunst. Der Autor beschreibt seine persönliche Mitarbeit an dem Projekt und sein Vorgehen anhand einiger „Suchmaschinen“.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ethn.081.0119
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044573
Date: 3 1, 2007
Author(s): Rémy Catherine
Abstract: L'auteure présente un outil d'exploration des situations sociales : l'arrêt sur image. Elle revient sur ses diverses contraintes techniques et méthodologiques et démontre leur intérêt au sein d'une enquête inspirée par la sociologie de l'action. C'est en tenant compte de la temporalité des actions humaines que l'image semble pouvoir évoluer d'un rôle d'illustration à celui d'outil d'analyse. En passant indifféremment d'image animée à image statique, l'enregistrement vidéo permet un choix de séquences filmées et une lecture multiple des contextes observés. Il aide à suivre finement les activités des acteurs, et à mettre en évidence la différence entre les normes du groupe et celles de l'individu. The author présents a tool for explorating social situations : freezing on the frame. She evokes its various technical and methodological limits and shows its interest for a survey inspired by action sociology. By taking into account the temporality of human actions the image can be more than illustrative and become an analysis tool. By passing indiscriminately from an animated image to a static one video recording permits a sélection of filmed séquences and a multiple reading of the observed contexts. It helps to follow minutely the actors' activities and to show the différence between group norms and individual norms. Die Autorin stellt ein Beobachtungsmittel der sozialen Lagen dar : das Standbild. Sie beschreibt seine verschiedenen technischen und methodologischen Beschränkungen und zeigt sein Interesse für eine von der Handlungssoziologie inspirierten Erhebung. Durch die Berücksichtigung der Zeitlichkeit der Menschenhandlungen ist das Bild mehr als illustrativ und kann zum Analysemittel werden. Beim unterschiedslosen Übergehen von einem belebten zu einem statischen Bild bietet die Videoaufnahme eine Auswahl von gefilmten Bildfolgen und ein vielfaches Lesen der beobachteten Kontexten. Sie hilft dazu, den Unterschied zwischen Gruppennormen und individualen Normen hervorzuheben.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991029
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044579
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): Troller Fenn
Abstract: Cet article examine le concept de la performativité du don dans une communauté côtière ethniquement diversifiée, composée majoritairement d'autochtones sames et de Norvégiens. Inspirée par Mauss puis par Ricœur, l'auteure avance l'idée que la pratique du don revêt une importance capitale dans ces territoires isolés et peut être vue comme facteur d'émergence d'un sentiment de communauté et d'identité. Le don devient un acte performatif de relations et d'ethnicité, et une manière d'aborder la situation postcoloniale dans la région. This article addresses the performativity of the gift in an ethnically mixed coastal community, the population being predominantly indigenous Saami and Norwegian. Taking inspiration from Mauss and later Ricœur, my argument is that giving is highly important in these remote areas and can be seen as a way of creating community as well as identity. The gift becomes an act of performing relations as well as ethnicity and a way of approaching the postcolonial situation in the region. Das Konzept der Performativität des Gebens innerhalb einer ethnisch gemischten Gemeinschaft (Norweger und Samen) an der Küste Norwegens steht im Mittelpunkt dieses Artikels. Inspiriert durch die Theorien von Mauss und Ricœur verfolgt der Autor die Idee, dass das Geben eine wichtige Funktion in isolierten Gemeinschaften übernimmt und zum Aufkommen eines Gefühls von Gemeinschaft und Identität beiträgt. Das Geben wird zu einem performativen Akt unter den Ethnien und zu einer Mittel mit der postkolonialen Situation der Region umzugehen. Artikkelen adresserer gavens performativitet i etniske sammensatte kystsamfunn bestående av samisk og norsk befolkning. Inspirert av Mauss og Ricœur blir det argumentert for at å gi gaver ; er viktig i disse samfunnene og kan ses som konstituerende i forhold til både fellesskap og identitet. Gavebytte er handlinger som relasjoner gjøres gjennom og adresserer etnisk ambivalens, i tillegg til à være tilnærmingsmåter til den postkoloniale situasjon i region.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ethn.092.0275
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Gensburger Sarah
Abstract: Le titre de « Juste parmi les Nations » est décerné depuis 1963 par l'État d'Israël afin d'honorer la mémoire des non-Juifs « qui ont risqué leur vie pour venir en aide à des Juifs » . Le « Juste » reçoit un diplôme et une médaille par un représentant de l'Etat hébreu lors d'une cérémonie publique où les individus « sauvés » et leurs « sauveteurs » , ou leurs descendants, sont réunis. Cet article étudie comment, à travers cette cérémonie, s'effectue un bricolage entre des « mémoires » véhiculées par des institutions et des individus, Juifs et non-Juifs, résidant en France et en Israël. Comment s'explique le recours à une seule et même pratique de rappel public du passé par des individus dont les récits des souvenirs peuvent diverger ? The title of « Righteous among the Nations » has been attributed since 1963 by the State of Israel to honor « the high-minded gentiles who risked their lives to save Jews » . Each nomination goes with the gift of a medal and a diploma to the nominee during an official ceremony. This public event gathers « rescued people » and « rescuers » and members of each family. In this article, the author studies how, through this ceremony, a « patchwork » between different and plural memories can take place. In a common place and time, the different actors crosses institutions, individuals, Jews and non-Jews, living in France or in Israël. How can we explain the use of a single common practice of remembrance by individuals whose social characteristics are different and whose narrations of the past diverge from each other ? Der Titel « Gerechte(r) unter den Nationen » wird seit 1963 vom Staat Israel verliehen, um an Nicht-Juden zu erinnern, « die ihr Leben riskiert haben um Juden zu helfen » . Der/die Gerecht(e) erhält von einem Vertreter des Staates Israel im Rahmen einer Zeremonie und im Beisein der « Geretteten » ein Diplom und eine Medaille verliehen. Dieser Artikel geht an Hand einer Analyse dieser Zeremonie der Frage nach, inwiefern durch die Übertragung von Erinnerungen der Individuen und Institutionen — jüdische und nicht-jüdische, französische und israelische - ein Patchwork von Erinnerungen entsteht. Im Vordergrund steht dabei die Frage, wie der offizielle Rückgriff auf lediglich eine Vergangenheit zu erklären ist, wo doch von einer Verschiedenheit der Erinnerungen auszugehen ist ?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991427
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lapierre Nicole
Abstract: Le combat juif pour la mémoire du génocide et la reconnaissance finalement obtenue sont devenus un modèle et un cadre référentiel pour d'autres populations persécutées. Mais l'ampleur de cette effervescence mémorielle suscite à son tour des réactions critiques. Quant au modèle, il est parfois contesté de façon virulente par la dérive minoritaire d'une compétition victimaire. Après avoir rappelé le processus à travers lequel ce phénomène mémoriel s'est progressivement imposé, on analysera son rôle référentiel, les critiques qu'il soulève et les controverses dont il fait l'objet. The Jewish fight for the genocide's memory and the recognition it eventually reached have become a model and a referential frame for other persecuted people. Yet in return some react critically to this rising memorial effervescence. As victims compete and minorities conflict, the Shoah model is in itself more and more contested. This article retraces how this memorial phenomenon has progressively settled and analyses its referential, yet controversial, role. Der jüdische Kampf um eine kollektive Erinnerung an die Vernichtung und ihre letztliche Anerkennung sind im Laufe der Zeit zu einer Art Modell und zu einem Bezugsrahmen für andere verfolgte Bevölkerungsgruppen geworden. Jedoch erzeugt die Omnipräsenz der Erinnerungen vielfach auch Kritik. Das Erinnerungsmodell wird von Seiten bestimmter Minderheitenströmungen innerhalb des herrschenden « Opferwettbewerbs » oftmals heftig angegriffen. Zunächst analysiert dieser Artikel den Prozess der Durchsetzung des Phänomens des Sich-Erinnerns, im Anschluss daran wird seine Referenzwirkung diskutiert sowie die Kritik und die Debatte die es hervorruft.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991432
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044587
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Lemee-Gonçalves Carole
Abstract: Partant du constat que les faits sociaux de mémoire sont portés par des actes de communication, il s'agit ici de dégager les pratiques qui alimentent les formes de « l'agir » socio-mémoriel, aujourd'hui présent en France et ailleurs. Quels processus sont a l'œuvre dans des situations post-génocidaires, souvent aussi post-migratoires, comme dans la Shoah (« Khurbn » en yiddish) par exemple ? Dans le cas d'Ashkénazes, il s'agit d'une reinscription qualitative au sein des cartographies de la parenté, mais aussi d'une reconnexion avec des périodes antérieures au genocide et à l'ethnocide à travers des événements culturels. Since the work of memory cannot exist without inter-subjective exchanges, this paper introduces in the study of memory the concept of « social acting » created by Weber. Attempting to point out the plurality of the practices that feed the various forms of socio-memorial movements present today in France and elsewhere. Which are the processes taking on a very particular aspect in post-genocidal as in post-migratory situations such as after the Shoah (Khurbn in Yiddish) ? In the case of the Ashkenase, these processes are also post-ethnocide and consist in a qualitative re-inscription within genealogical mapping and simultaneously in the long development of a history in which the genocide constitutes a memorial screen as well as actions of re-inscribing and re-connecting with cultural markers associated to periods antedating the genocide and ethnocide. Da Erinnerungsarbeit nicht ohne das Betrachten von zwischenmenschlichem Austausch und sozialer Praxis erfolgen kann, soll im Rahmen dieses Artikels das Webersche Konzept des « Sozialen Handelns » in die Untersuchung von Erinnerungen einbezogen werden. Ausgehend von der Tatsache, dass soziale Erinnerungen durch Kommunikation ausgedrückt werden, möchte dieser Artikel die Vielfalt der Praktiken zeigen, die heute in Frankreich und anderswo die Vielzahl der gesellschaftlichen Erinnerungsbewegungen prägen. Die Erinnerungsprozesse verdeutlichen vor allem die soziale und zeitliche Beziehung zum Anderen. Besonders interessant zu analysieren ist sind Post-Shoah-(Khurbn auf Jiddisch) und Post-Auswanderungs-Erinnerungenen. In diesem Artikel richtet sich das Augenmerk vor allem auf Ashkenasische Juden aus Deutschland, Zentral-und Osteuropa, deren Situation nach dem Ethnozid betrachtet wird. Dabei ist eine qualitative Wiederaufnahme der Lebenspraxis der Elterngeneration zu beobachten ; ebenso wie ein Anknüpfen im Rahmen bestimmter kultureller Riten an die Zeit vor dem Völkermord.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991434
Journal Title: Ethnologie française
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40044591
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): Mancuso Alessandro
Abstract: Rappelant la spécificité occidentale des valeurs historiques et commémoratives liées au temps « décimal » tel l'an 2000, l'article s'interroge sur des échéances temporelles dont la portée se trouve massivement amplifiée par le tourisme, les médias, les sites Internet, et une attente millénariste qui les transforme en reflet des fautes de l'Occident et des technologies. Des auteurs tels que Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao mettent en avant le temps vécu et reconnaissent que les cultures interagissent avec le temps pour produire des valeurs symboliques qui reflètent leurs propres choix. Aujourd'hui cependant il semble nécessaire de reconnaître la fracture du temps de l'historicisme et de l'humanisme de De Martino, et d'accepter des modalités plurielles et hétérogènes de la pensée, de l'expérience temporelle. The article recalls the Western specificity of historical and commemorative values related to « decimal » time, such as the year 2000. It questions about deadlines the consequences of which are massively amplified by tourism, medias, Internet sites and millenarist waiting and turned into a reflection of Western faults and technologies. Authors such as Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao are interested in the time lived and admit that cultures use time to produce symbolic values reflecting their own choices. But today it seems necessary to acknowledge time fracture in De Martino's historicism and humanism and to accept plural and heterogenous modalities of thought and temporal experience. Der Artikel erinnert an die mit der Dezimalzeit, wie dem Jahr 2000, verbundene westliche Spezifizität der geschichtlichen und Gedenkwerte, und fragt sich über Terminen deren Tragweite massenweise durch den Tourismus, die Medien, das Internet und das Warten auf das Millenium verstärkt wird, die sie in die Spiegelung der westlichen Fehler und Technologien verwandeln. Autore wie Ricœur, De Martino, Marramao interessieren sich fur die gelebte Zeit und erkennen an, dass die Kulturen die Zeit gebrauchen, um symbolische Werte zu produzieren, die ihre eigene Wahlen widerspiegeln. Doch scheint es heute notwendig, den sozialen Zeitbruch von De Martino's Historizismus und Humanismus anzuerkennen und die pluralen und heterogenen Modalitäten des Denkens und der zeitlichen Erfahrung anzunehmen.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40991534
Journal Title: Revista Geográfica
Publisher: Instituto Panamericano de Geografía e Historia
Issue: i40045037
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Sánchez Darío César
Abstract: Benítez, M. 2003, "La investigación-acción y el rol del investigador en las ciencias sociales", Geo-
demos, 6:147-168, Buenos Aires, CONICET-IMHICIHU.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40996763
Journal Title: Social Studies of Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40045097
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Schnell Izhak
Abstract: Within the last 2000 years the land demarcated by the Mediterranean Sea to the west and the Jordan Valley to the east has been one of the most disputed territories in history. World powers have redrawn its boundaries numerous times. Since the establishment of the state of Israel in 1948 within British Mandate Palestine, Palestinians and Israelis have disagreed over the national identity of the land that they both inhabit.The struggles have extended from the battlefields to the classrooms. In the process, different national and ethnic groups have used various sciences, ranging from archeology to history and geography, to prove territorial claims based on their historical presence in the region. But how have various Israeli social and political groups used maps to solidify claims over the territory? In this paper we bring together science studies and critical cartography in order to investigate cartographic representations as socially embedded practices and address how visual rhetoric intersects with knowledge claims in cartography. Before the 1967 war between Israel and its Arab neighbors, the Israeli government and the Jewish National Fund produced maps of Israel that established a Hebrew topography of the land. After 1967, Israel's expanded territorial control made the demarcation of its borders ever more controversial. Consequently, various Israeli interest groups and political parties increasingly used various cartographic techniques to forge territorial spaces, demarcate disputed boundaries, and inscribe particular national, political, and ethnic identities onto the land.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/40997773
Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045563
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Aguiar Joaquim
Abstract: «L'explication en Sociologie», in Introduction à l'épistémo-
logie génétique, t. III, «La pensée biologique, la pensée psychologique et la
pensée sociologique», Paris, PUF, 1951 XIII, reeditado em «Études sociologi-
ques», Librairie Droz, Genève, 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41007596
Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Gabinete de Investigações Sociais
Issue: i40045662
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Emediato Carlos A.
Abstract: Samuel Bowles, Class Power and Mass Education,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41010296
Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045731
Date: 10 1, 1999
Author(s): Bonifácio M. Fátima
Abstract: H. Arendt, «Qu'est-ce que la liberté?», in La crise de la culture, cit., pp. 186-252.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41011354
Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045733
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Valentim Artur
Abstract: (Patrício, 1989, pp. 226-227).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41011406
Journal Title: Análise Social
Publisher: Instituto de Ciências Sociais da Universidade de Lisboa
Issue: i40045761
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Santos Catarina
Abstract: Un dernier verre avant la guerre, éd.
Rivages, Paris, cap. 14, 2001).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41012172
Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i380530
Date: 12 1, 1965
Author(s): Weller Dwight B.
Abstract: Traditional sources of sociohistorical data capture only a narrow sense of past lifeworlds. Ethnographic accounts often preserve greater details of social practice but have less clear guidelines for use as data. We evaluate the use of hermeneutical theory as providing guidelines for a method by which ethnographies may be used as sociohistorical data. Hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic "texts" is used to reconstruct patterns of daily life in early-twentieth-century rural Appalachia. This method involves: (1) concept-critique to separate observations from the theoretical framework of the ethnographic account, and (2) validation through a logic of internal consistency and comparison. Through hermeneutical analysis, ethnographics can be made to yield observations of social relations not otherwise available. Our analysis suggests benefits and drawbacks of hermeneutical analysis of ethnographic texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4106338
Journal Title: International Journal of Arts Management
Publisher: École des Hautes Études Commerciales
Issue: i40047561
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Cova Bernard
Abstract: The proposition is that arts marketing should be conceived of as a dedicated field of endeavour so that consumers' immersion in the artistic experience occurs even in the case of a "difficult" art work. The focus is artistic experience-related phenomena. The authors introduce the concept of appropriation and then develop an appropriation cycle construct. Empirical research comprises introspective reports on consumer attendance at classical music concerts. The results show that the artistic experience is predicated on multiple rather than one-time immersion, and that full immersion may never occur. The authors conclude that those service elements that affect the way in which consumers experience an arts event should be managed throughout the appropriation process. Les auteurs proposent de concevoir le marketing des arts comme un domaine d'activité spécifique, afin que l'immersion des consommateurs dans l'expérience artistique soit possible même dans le cas d'une œuvre « difficile » . L'accent est mis sur les phénomènes liés à l'expérience artistique. Ils présentent le concept d'appropriation, puis développent un construit du cycle d'appropriation. Ils ont recours à la recherche empirique, soit les rapports d'analyse introspective des consommateurs ayant assisté à des concerts de musique classique. Les résultats indiquent que l'expérience artistique suppose de multiples immersions, non pas une seule, et que l'immersion totale risque de ne jamais se produire. Les auteurs concluent que les éléments du service qui influent sur l'expérience individuelle d'un événement artistique devraient être gérés tout au long du processus d'appropriation. Los autores proponen la idea de que el márketing de las artes debe concebirse como un emprendimiento en sí mismo, a fin de lograr la inmersión del consumidor en experiencia artística incluso en el caso de obras de arte "difíciles". El acento, entonces, está puesto en los fenómenos que se vinculan con la experiencia artística. Los autores presentan el concepto de apropiación y elaboran luego un modelo teórico de ciclo de apropiación. Por otra parte, analuzan los resultados de uno investigación empírica basada sobre los relatos introspectivos realizados por consumidores luego de asistir a conciertos de música clásica. Dichos resultados indican que la experienca artística toma forma con múltiples inmersiones y no sólo con una, y que la inmersión total puede no darse jamás. Los autores llegan a la conclusión de que el proceso de apropiación es el abordaje más idóneo para manejar aquellos elemontos del servicio que afectan la forma en que el consumidor experimenta un evento artístico.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41064841
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048111
Date: 1 1, 1955
Author(s): Burloud A.
Abstract: Paul Ricœur : Philosophie de la Volonté (1949).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41088184
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048216
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Stiegler Bernard
Abstract: J. Bottéro, op. cit., p. 111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41096290
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048262
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Brès Yvon
Abstract: Revue philosophique, 2001-4, p. 469.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41098930
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048276
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Keck Frédéric
Abstract: C. Gautier dans
L'invention de la société civile, Lectures anglo-écossaises, Mandeville, Smith, Fer-
guson, Paris, PUF, 1993, p. 254
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41099694
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048280
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Virgoulay René
Abstract: Dialogues avec les philosophes, p. 271-280 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41099898
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048293
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Marc Fumaroli, Paris-New York et retour. Voyage dans les
arts et les images, Paris, Fayard, 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rphi.093.0355
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048303
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): De Smet Daniel
Abstract: Brunschvig, « Devoir et pouvoir », p. 183, 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41100921
Journal Title: Revue Philosophique de la France et de l'Étranger
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40048317
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Boyer Alain
Abstract: Deuxième partie, chap. II, p. 211-212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41101451
Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son LTD
Issue: i40048505
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): ARNAUT ANA PAULA
Abstract: Roland Barthes, 'Le discours de l'histoire', Poétique, 49 (1982), 13-21 (p. 16).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41105128
Journal Title: Portuguese Studies
Publisher: W. S. Maney & Son LTD
Issue: i40048536
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): GARCÍA ANA ISABEL BRIONES
Abstract: Pires, p. 183.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41105755
Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i40049549
Date: 9 1, 1996
Author(s): KABELE JIŘÍ
Abstract: Schumpeter [1 942]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41131224
Journal Title: Sociologický Časopis / Czech Sociological Review
Publisher: Sociologický ústav Akademie Věd České Republiky
Issue: i40049614
Date: 6 1, 2008
Author(s): Jacobs Amy
Abstract: Jan Tomasz Gross, Les Voisins {The
Neighbours) [2001].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41132596
Journal Title: GeoJournal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40050915
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Rosin Christopher
Abstract: (www.argos.org.nz).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148278
Journal Title: GeoJournal
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40050932
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Meschkank Julia
Abstract: (Pott 2007,
p. 173ff).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148435
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40050938
Date: 3 1, 1994
Author(s): Lautier Nicole
Abstract: À partir d'une enquête effectuée auprès d'élèves de Quatrième, Troisième, Seconde et Première, on propose un modèle intermédiaire d'appropriation de l'histoire. En utilisant les classificateurs expérimentés en sémantique cognitive, on peut ramener à deux grandes catégories cognitives, l'identification du texte de l'histoire : l'une de type événement-changement s'inscrit dans un schéma narratif, l'autre de type entité stable dans un intervalle temporel met en œuvre des processus de catégorisation. Les événements, concepts et entités de l'historien ne correspondent pas toujours aux modes de perception des élèves. Ces derniers procèdent par catégorisation naturelle en multipliant les analogies entre des périodes historiques différentes, en ancrant les informations nouvelles dans une pensée sociale. How do secondary school students get in contact with historical texts ? Examples drawn from an investigation are used to present identification processes as a change-event or as lasting entities in a time interval, analogical categorization processes and social thinking rooting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41148526
Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051411
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Reichardt Ulfried
Abstract: Hoffmann 280.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41157336
Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag C. Winter
Issue: i40051449
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sielke Sabine
Abstract: Sabine Sielke and Anne
Hofmann, "Serienmörder und andere Killer: Die Endzeitfiktionen von Bret Easton Ellis und Mi-
chel Houellebecq," Anglo-Romanische Kulturkontakte: von Humanismus bis Postkolonialismus,
ed. Andrew Johnston and Ulrike Schneider (Berlin: Dahlem UP, 2002) 283-318.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41158073
Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051541
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): JABLONKA Ivan
Abstract: Ibid.,p.viii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41159914
Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051561
Date: 5 1, 2006
Author(s): BAUBÉROT Arnaud
Abstract: «Le CNAL et nous», Foi éducation, 29e année, n° 49, octobre-décembre
1959, pp. 194-196.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160239
Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051561
Date: 5 1, 2006
Author(s): ENCREVÉ André
Abstract: Le Christianisme, 25 août 1960, p. 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160240
Journal Title: Histoire de l'education
Publisher: Institut national de recherche pédagogique
Issue: i40051575
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): LÉTOURNEAU Jocelyn
Abstract: Jacques Beauchemin, « Accueillir sans renoncer à soi-même », Le Devoir, 22 Janvier 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41160504
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40051689
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): Legrond Louis
Abstract: Enseigner la
morale aujourd'hui? PUF. L'éducateur. 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41163138
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053819
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Bruner Jerome
Abstract: Tout au long de l'histoire de la psychologie, la revolution cognitive n'a pas cessé de progresser. Celle qui a cours aujourd'hui cherche à expliquer comment les individus parviennent a donner des significations au monde complexe qui les entoure : il est temps à présent de comprendre différents modes d'élaboration du sens. Quatre modes distincts sont suggérés. Le premier, le mode intersubjectif, concerne l'établissement, le façonnement et le maintien de l'intersubjectivité. Le deuxième, le mode actionnel, concerne l'organisation de l'action. Le troisième, le mode normatif, intègre les éléments particuliers dans des contextes normatifs et s'exprime en imposant des contraintes aux deux premiers modes. Les trois modes ont en commun d'être fortement dépendants du contexte: Les narratifs — ou les récits — sont l'instrument par excellence permettant d'ancrer les trois premiers modes d'élaboration du sens dans un ensemble plus structuré. On peut supposer que le quatrième mode d'élaboration du sens, le mode propositionnel, vise à décontextualiser les trois modes précédents en les soumettant à la vérification et aux justifications logiques. Throughout the entire history of cognitive psychology, a cognitive revolution has always been in progress. The current cognitive revolution began to explain how individuals come to make meaning out of a complex world ; it now needs to turn more vigorously to different forms of meaning making. Four modes are suggested. The first one is directed to the establishment, shaping and maintenance of intersubjectivity. A second form, the actional mode, is concerned with the way action is organized. The third form, the normative mode, construes particulars in normative contexts ; it expresses itself by imposing constraints on the first two modes. These three modes of meaning making have in common to be context dependent. Narratives or stories are the vehicles par excellence for entrenching the first three modes into a more structured whole. It is suggested that the fourth mode of meaning making, the propositional mode, is directed to the decontextualization of the preceeding three modes by imposing verifiability and logical justification. A brief account of how this set of meaning making processes might have grown out of human evolution is discussed. In conclusion : no reductionist theory on mind will do it proper justice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200526
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053820
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Leray Christian
Abstract: Que ce soit à l'IUFM ou à l'Université en Sciences de l'Éducation, les enseignants sont de plus en plus confrontés à la diversité des expériences des parcours de formation des étudiants à qui ils s'adressent. Cette pluralité n'impose-t-elle pas un changement des pratiques de formation et notamment le développement, dans les groupes de travail, d'une communication favorisant la symbiose des divers apports culturels de ces étudiants ? L'utilisation des biographies ou des histoires de vie en formation ne peut-elle pas permettre d'instrumenter ce travail et notamment faciliter la prise en compte des itinéraires individuels de formation ? The students are more specifically invited to meditate on the development of their curriculum. The building of their formative biography creates the mental space that is needed to question the ideas and notions which will allow them to use biography as an instrument to identify the mental representations as well as the events and situations of their life from which the individual, collective, social and cultural dimensions of their activities emerged. In this sense, this research and training shows that formative life history can allow us to distance ourselves from a priori assumptions, as well as introduce students to different methods of research.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200549
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053825
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Lorcerie Françoise
Abstract: L'idée de laïcité n'est pas soustraite à l'histoire. C'est pourquoi il est illusoire de postuler son sens dans l'absolu. Aujourd'hui, comme en d'autres époques, sa valeur politique tend à se polariser sur une opposition binaire entre une acception libérale et une acception anti-libérale dite républicaine. Toutefois, trois traits semblent particuliers aux années 1990 : — une disjonction entre l'acception politique dominante de la laïcité et sa force juridique, gagée par la Constitution et cadrée par des instruments juridiques internationaux ; — l'orientation nationalitaire du débat, pointant vers les populations issues de l'immigration musulmane, et questionnant leur appartenance à la nation ; — enfin, l'inscription du débat dans la problématique globale de la modernisation des formes scolaires, laquelle véhicule à la fois une epistemologie constructiviste et interactionniste, et une éthique laïque ef libérale. Les « affaires de foulards » sont un analyseur de cette complexité. Secularity concept must not be taken away from history. So it would be illusory to think about it as an abstract notion. Presently, as in older times, its political value tends to be focusing on a binary opposition between a liberal notion and an anti-liberal, so-called republican one. However three characteristics are specific of the nineties : — the split between main political meaning of secularity and its strength in legal terms, provided by the Constitution and by international legal tools ; — a debate focusing on nationality issues, with questions related to national belonging or muslim immigrants ; — last, the integration of this debate into the global issue of school modernization, which is concerned with a constructivist and interactionist epistemology and a liberal, secular ethic, as well. « Headscarves cases » are an indicator of this complexity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200674
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053828
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Meirieu Philippe
Abstract: À partir d'une définition de l'éducation comme « relation dissymétrique, nécessaire et provisoire, visant à l'émergence d'un sujet », la pédagogie est proposée comme effort pour penser cette activité dans des situations données. Refusant une posture philosophique qui décrète l'existence du sujet pour le faire advenir, comme une attitude inspirée des sciences humaines qui abolit le sujet en réduisant ses actes à la résultante des forces qui s'exercent sur lui, la pédagogie peut se définir comme « anticipation contextualisée ». Dans cette perspective, elle requiert un discours qui exprime la singularité des sujets en situation et la mette en perspective d'universalité. Le récit peut avoir cette fonction et « faire théorie » sans, pour autant, s'abstraire des situations particulières qu'il décrit. La pédagogie comme « récits d'éducation » a alors pour fonction de favoriser la prise de décision éducative. Education being defined as "a dissymetric, necessary and temporary relation focusing on the emergence of a subject", pedagogy is considered as an endeavour to think this activity in given situations. If we refuse a philosophical position which decides the existence of a subject to make it turn into a reality - as an attitude inspired by human sciences which reduces the subject's acts to the resultant of forces exerced on him - pedagogy may be defined as a "contextualized anticipation". In this perspective, we must display the uniqueness of subjects in a specific situation and set it in a universal perspective. Narratives may have this function without neglecting the specificity of situations. Pedagogy as "narratives on education" is able to facilitate educational decision making.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41200740
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Violet Dominique
Abstract: Les processus complexes et souvent paradoxaux que l'alternance met en jeu chez l'apprenant se révèlent de possibles points d'appui des apprentissages signifiants. Une pédagogie qui ne tente pas de les éliminer amène alors à concevoir le travail de l'enseignant comme un travail de médiation elle aussi paradoxale. Une telle conception de l'alternance, loin d'enfermer celle-ci dans un rapport sclérosant à la tradition et sans pour autant l'en couper, montre en quoi l'articulation d'espaces et de temps contradictoires peut être pédagogiquement dynamique. Ce qui, en retour, ne manque pas d'interroger l'enseignement/apprentissage dans l'école dite traditionnelle. Complex and often paradoxical processes elaborated by the learner in an alternation situation may help realizing relevant learning. When pedagogy doesn't try to eliminate them, teacners'work can be conceived of as a mediation activity equally paradoxical. In such a conception, alternation is not separated from tradition but not blocked by it either. It shows to what extend links between contradictory spaces and periods of time may be educationally dynamic. Which, in return, asks questions concerning teaching/learning in a traditional school.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201487
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053874
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Denoyel Noël
Abstract: L'alternance entre les trois pôles de la formation (auto-hétéro-oïko) présente dans les pratiques de formation alternée (variété des situations d'apprentissage et des acteurs) renvoie à la différenciation des trois personnes pronominales (je-tu-il) du langage courant et s'inscrit dans l'épistémologie ternaire de la sémiotique initiée par Peirce. L'intelligence pratique et rusée (la métis des Grecs), repérée chez des artisans grâce à l'expression régionale « le biais du gars », met en scène une logique ouverte où transduction et abduction s'articulent à déduction et induction. Une « raison expérientielle » , dialogique, écologique, à visée éthique, est ainsi forgée. C'est une rationalité pratique cherchant à actualiser le potentiel de la situation. Elle est empreinte de sagesse et de « prudence » en action, au sens d'Aristote (phronésis). L'éc(h)oformation qui émerge de cette raison expérientielle, de ce regard interactionnel, est indissociable de la boucle étrange entre deux autres raisons : la raison sensible et la raison formelle, entre spontanéité et habitude. The tripolar concept of training (auto-hetero-oïko), foundation of alternating courses practice (with multiple learning situations and actors), draws us back to the differenciation between the three main persons singular (I, You, He) expressed in common language as the compound epistemology of semiotics put forward by Peirce... Practical intelligence (close to the "metis" of the Greeks) can be noticed among craftsmen when they refer to the "biais du gars" bespeaking an open logic where transduction and abduction are linked to deduction and induction. A constructive reasoning, interactive ans ecological, with ethical objectives, is created. It's a practical rationality aiming at actualizing the potentiality of the situation and marked by sagaciy and prudence in action in the Aristotelian sense (phronesis). The "ec(h)otraining" emerging from the wisdom of experience, this interactive vision of things is necessarily included in the chain linking two other thoughts : the intuitive thought and the formal thought, between spontaneity and habit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201489
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053878
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: Le discours de la recherche sur les enseignants et leurs savoirs est souvent tenté de détacher la connaissance du sujet connaissant, traduisant des préoccupations de fonctionnalité et de transférabilité des savoirs. À cette perspective rationaliste résiste néanmoins une mouvance de recherche qui défend une approche anthropologique du savoir enseignant, moins soucieuse de légiférer l'acte d'enseignement que de mettre au jour les formes complexes et locales de construction de l'enseignant-sujet et de ses savoirs, que ceux-ci soient inscrits dans une forme de vie, incarnés, ou dessinés réflexivement dans l'espace narratif. Ce courant phénoménologique et herméneutique, pluriel et très vivace dans le monde anglo-saxon, promeut le savoir ordinaire des enseignants, se démarquant ainsi des études attentives aux seuls savoirs ' extraordinaires' de l'expert. Traduisant un retour du sujet qui traverse les sciences sociales depuis la dernière décennie, cette tendance dans la recherche éducative à réhabiliter la subjectivité enseignante, sans pour autant la magnifier, adresse des questions importantes à notre champ de recherche sur les choix épistémologiques qui le guident. Research discourse on teachers and their knowledge has a tendency to separate knowledge from the one who knows as it is focusing on knowledge functionality and transfer. Nevertheless, one research movement is resisting to this rationalist perspective, preferring an anthropological approach of teachers' knowledge focusing on sophisticated and local forms of construction of knowledge and knowing subject rather than on teaching laws (these constructions being embodied or reflexively designed in narrative space). This multifaceted phenomenological and hermeneutic trend, observed in anglosaxon world, is promoting teachers' ordinary knowledge, when the majority of investigations focus only on expert knowledge. As it can be observed in all social sciences in this last decade, the importance of the subject - the teacher in that case - is acknowledged (not overestimated), resulting in major questions aimed at our research field about its epistemologic orientations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201593
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053884
Date: 3 1, 2002
Author(s): Olry Paul
Abstract: Se former dans le travail apparaît maintenant comme une part naturelle, évidente de l'activité. Les personnes semblent pouvoir spontanément passer d'une posture de production à une position d'apprenant. Étudier les conditions pour se former dans des univers contraints révèle la nécessité de s'ajuster aux délais de la production et au rythme de la formation. Nous désignons par tempo cet ajustement de l'individu aux contraintes temporelles de la production, lui permettant de saisir dans les situations des occasions d'apprentissage. Les exemples fournis, issus de formations qualifiantes dans l'industrie, en proposent une interprétation croisant les dimensions d'engagement personnel et de transformation de l'activité. The "on the job training" seems for everyone, a natural part of the working activity. People would be able to change their point of view to perform the product target and in the same time the goals of training. This article shows that workers have to play with the time constraints to create by themselves a learning situation. We call "tempo" this capacity to catch in the course of the job, an opportunity to learn. From examples taken in the field of the training within industry, we suggest that this tempo depends on personal involvement in the changing or the activity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41201764
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053899
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): Derouet Jean-Louis
Abstract: Il s'agit d'éclairer plusieurs déplacements qui se sont produits dans les trente dernières années. Tout d'abord la création d'un milieu d'experts intermédiaires entre la politique, l'administration et la recherche. Ensuite un changement du cadre à l'intérieur duquel se situe la réflexion. Il s'agit moins de penser la cohésion d'une société dans un cadre national qu'à la manière dont le pays peut maintenir son rang dans la compétition internationale. Enfin un changement d'orientation politique : le souci de la formation de l'élite redevient primordial même s'il ne s'agit plus de maintenir une tradition culturelle mais de sauvegarder ses parts de marché. Le texte étudie ces évolutions en France en distinguant trois périodes : une période de « politique à l'état gazeux » où la gauche tente de transformer les idéaux libertaires de 1968 en programme de gouvernement ; une tentative de passage à l'état solide avec la loi d'orientation de 1989 et la création de la Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective ; une déstabilisation de ce système par le ministre Claude Allègre qui jette le système éducatif français dans le grand bain de la concurrence internationale. Il s'ensuit une période à la fois « sous influence » et d'incertitude. The idea is to explain several moves that have happened in the last thirty years. First of all, the creation of a body of experts, middlemen between politics, government and research. Then a change in the setting of the thinking process. It is less to think about social cohesion within a national setting than the way the country can live up to its ranking when competing at the international level. Finally, a change in political orientations: teaching the elite becomes a crucial problem again even if it does not mean keeping cultural traditions alive any more but securing market shares. This article studies those changes and defines three periods: firstly, a period of politics in "gaseous-state" in which the left tried to change 1968's libertarian ideals into a political agenda; secondly, an attempt to change to solid state with the 1989's Orientation Act (act laying down the basic principles for government action in education) and the creation of the "Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective" (assessment & futurology office); finally, the destabilisation of this system by Claude Allègre, the then French education secretary who put the French educational system into the picture of international competition. A period of doubts "under influence" followed right after. Es handelt sich darum, mehrere in den letzten 30 Jahren vorgefundenen Verwandlungen aufzuklären: zunächst die Gründung eines Expertenmilieus zwischen Politik, Verwaltung und Forschung. Dann einen Wandel des Rahmens, in dem die Überlegung stattfindet: es geht nämlich weniger darum, über den Zusammenhalt einer Gesellschaft in einem internationalen Rahmen nachzudenken als über die Art und Weise zu überlegen, wie das Land seinen Platz im internationalen Wettbewerb behalten kann. Schließlich einen Wandel der politischen Orientierung: die Bemühung um die Bildung einer Elite wird wieder vorrangig, auch wenn es nicht mehr darauf ankommt, eine kulturelle Tradition zu behalten, sondern seinen Marktanteil zu retten. Der Text bearbeitet diese Entwicklungen in Frankreich und unterscheidet dabei drei Perioden: erstens eine Zeit der „gasförmigen” Politik, in der die Linksparteien versuchen, die anarchistischen 1968er Ideale in ein Regierungsprogramm umzusetzen; zweitens ein Versuch der Verfestigung mit dem Orientierungsgesetz 1989 und die Gründung des Bewertungs- und Forschungsamtes (Direction de l'évaluation et de la prospective); drittens eine Destabilisierung dieses Systems durch den Erziehungsminister Claude Allègre, der das französische Schulsystem mit der internationalen Konkurrenz konfrontiert. Darauf folgt eine „unter Einfluß" stehende und zugleich unsichere Periode. Se trata de aclarar varios desplazamientos que se produjeron en los treinta últimos años. Primero, la creación de un medio de expertos intermediarios entre la política, la administración y investigación. Después, un cambio del marco dentro del que se sitúa la reflexión. No se trata tanto de pensar la cohesión de una sociedad en un marco nacional como de la manera en que el país puede mantener su rango en la competencia internacional. Por fin, un cambio de orientación política : la preocupación por la formación de lo más selecto vuelve a ser primordial aunque ya no se trata de mantener una tradición cultural sino de proteger sus cuotas de mercado. El texto estudia estas evoluciones en Francia distinguiendo tres períodos : un período de « política en estado gaseoso » en el que la izquierda intenta transformar los ideales libertarios de 1968 en programa de gobierno ; un intento de pasar al estado sólido con la ley de orientación de 1989 y la creación la Dirección de la evaluación y de la prospectiva ; una destabilización de este sistema por el ministro Claude Allègre que echa el sistema educativo francés en el gran baño de la competencia internacional. De ahí resulta un período a la vez «bajo influencia » y de incertidumbre.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202115
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053904
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Daunay Bertrand
Abstract: Depuis que la didactique du français s'est constituée comme champ de recherche, la question de l'enseignement de la littérature a toujours été centrale, même si l'approche didactique de la littérature apparaît davantage comme un espace de questions que comme un lieu de construction d'une théorie cohérente de la littérature, de son enseignement et de son apprentissage. Concernant l'enseignement de la littérature, la didactique du français est essentiellement un champ de discussions théoriques, qui portent aussi bien sur le statut des objets enseignables et sur les conditions de leur enseignabilité que sur la sélection des outils théoriques permettant l'approche de ces objets. Si, aux fondements de la didactique de la littérature, c'est la contestation de l'enseignement traditionnel qui domine, sur des postulats théoriques à forte teneur idéologique, de nombreuses recherches descriptives ont interrogé aussi bien la notion de littérature que les pratiques de lecture des élèves comme les pratiques effectives d'enseignement de la littérature. Au cœur des recherches didactiques se place la question de la sélection des savoirs et des pratiques (lecture et écriture notamment) susceptibles de devenir objets d'enseignement et d'apprentissage, à tous les niveaux du cursus scolaire. Since the didactics of French formed a research field, the question of teaching literature has constantly been crucial, even if the didactical approach of literature seems more like a forum to ask questions, rather than a place where a coherent theory on literature, its teaching and learning is being developed. As for teaching literature, the didactics of French is mainly an area of theoretical discussion as much about the status of objects to be taught and the conditions on which they can be taught as how to select theoretical tools to approach those objects. If, of all the founding elements of didactics of literature, objecting to traditional teaching is the main element based on theoretical postulates with strong ideological content, numerous descriptive research works have questioned the notion of literature as well as the students' reading practices and the actual literature teaching practices. The question of selecting the knowledge and practices (reading and writing for instance) that could become teaching and learning objects at all schooling levels is central to didactical research. Desde que la didáctica del francés se constituyó como campo de investigación, la cuestión de la enseñanza de la literatura siempre ha sido central, aunque el enfoque didáctico de la literatura se presenta más como un espacio de cuestiones que como un lugar de construcción de una teoría coherente de la literatura, de su enseñanza y de su aprendizaje. En lo que se refiere a la enseñanza de la literatura, la didáctica del francés es esencialmente un campo de discusiones teóricas, que tratan tanto del estatuto de los objetos que se pueden enseñar y las condiciones en que pueden ser enseñados como de la selección de los instrumentos teóricos que permiten el enfoque de esos objetos. Si, en los cimientos de la didáctica de la literatura, es la discusión de la enseñanza tradicional la que domina, sobre los postulados teóricos con fuerte contenido ideológico, numerosas investigaciones descriptivas han interrogado tanto la noción de literatura como las prácticas de lectura de los alumnos como las prácticas efectivas de enseñanza de la literatura. En el medio de las investigaciones didácticas se plantea la cuestión de la selección de los saberes y de las prácticas (lectura y escritura particularmente) susceptibles de ser objetos de enseñanza y aprendizaje, en todos los niveles del recorrido escolar. Seit die Didaktik des Französichen zum Forschungsfeld herangewachsen ist, hat die Frage des Unterrichtens der Literatur immer im Mittelpunkt gestanden, auch wenn die didaktische Vorgenshensweise der Literatur eher als ein Feld der Fragen als ein Feld der Bildung einer zusammenhängenden Literaturtheorie erscheint, die die Art und Weise bestimmt, wie man sie unterrichten und lernen muss. Was das Unterrichten der Literatur angeht, erweist sich die Didaktik des Französichen als ein Feld der theoretischen Diskussionen, die sowohl den Status der zu unterrichtenden Inhalte und die Bedingungen ihres möglichen Unterrichtetwerdens als die Wahl der theoretischen Werkzeuge betreffen, die die Behandlung dieser Inhalte ermöglichen. Wenn in den Ursprüngen der Literaturdidaktik das Bestreiten des traditionnellen Unterrichts im Mittelpunkt steht, so haben auf theoretischen Postulaten mit starkem ideologischen Inhalt viele Forschungsarbeiten sowohl den Begriff der Literatur als auch die Lesepraktiken der Schüler sowie die tatsächlichen Unterrichtspraktiken der Literatur in Frage gestellt. Im Herzen der didaktichen Forschungsarbeiten steht die Frage der Auswahl der Kenntnisse und der Praktiken (insbesondere Lesen und Schreiben), die imstande sind, Lehr- und Lernobjekte in allen Stufen des Schulprogramms zu werden.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202262
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053911
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Tutiaux-Guillon Nicole
Abstract: Le rapport qu'entretiennent histoire et mémoire à l'école est complexe et ambigu. Jusqu'aux années quatrevingt-dix, il a surtout été posé comme la relation, légitimée ou dénoncée, entre savoirs historiques, histoire scolaire et mémoire nationale. Dès les années soixante, le débat prend en compte le rapport entre le récit national et des histoires régionalistes qui revendiquent une place dans la culture scolaire, au nom des identités et du droit au passé. Cette dernière acception prévaut largement à l'heure actuelle mais cette fois au nom des minorités dépossédées de leur histoire, dès lors qu'elle n'a pas d'expression publique. Dans ces débats, la mémoire serait la forme d'une histoire parallèle, occultée et clandestine ; de leur côté les historiens tendent à distinguer histoire et mémoire. L'histoire scolaire, elle, admet l'histoire mais non les mémoires comme savoir de référence légitime ; pourtant les commémorations et le « devoir de mémoire » s'y invitent de plus en plus fréquemment. De telles évolutions interrogent les composantes de la discipline scolaire : au premier chef les finalités et les contenus mais aussi les pratiques, inégalement connues dans ce domaine et, finalement, les apprentissages souvent plus espérés qu'avérés. The connection that exists at school between history and memory is complicated and ambiguous; it is source of debate and demands which recently intensified with public and political uses. School history accepts history but not memories as good legitimate reference. And yet commemoration ceremonies and the "duty to remember" are more and more in the schools. Such changes question the elements of that school subject: its purpose of building identity and citizenship, its contents and their changes, its teaching practices, not really evenly known in this field, and finally the learning that is more often wished for than actually delivered. La relación que mantienen historia y memoria en la Escuela es compleja y ambigua; alimenta debates y reivindicaciones que recientemente han sido avivados por los usos públicos y políticos de la historia y de la memoria. La historia escolar admite la historia pero no las memorias como saber de referencia legítimo; sin embargo las conmemoraciones y el "deber de memoria" se invitan cada vez más frecuentemente. Tales evoluciones interrogan los componentes de la asignatura escolar: las finalidades identitarias y cívicas, los contenidos y sus renovaciones, las prácticas, desigualmente conocidas en este campo, y finalmente los aprendizajes a menudo más esperados que comprobados. Das Verhältnis zwischen Geschichte und Gedächtnis in der Schule ist komplex und mehrdeutig. Es gibt den Anlass zu Debatten und Forderungen, die die öffentlichen und politischen Anwendungen des Gedächtnisses und der Geschichte neulich haben aufleben Tassen. Die Schulgeschichte duldet die Geschichte aber nicht die Erinnerungen als Maßstab gebendes Wissen, während Gedenkfeier und "Erinnerungsgebot'' (Aufarbeitung der Vergangenheit) immer öfter daran teilhaben. Eine solche Entwicklung stellt die Komponenten des Schulfachs Geschichte in Frage: über seine Zwecke, was die Identitätsfrage und den Bürgersinn betrifft, über den Inhalt und seine Veränderungen, über Praktiken, die in diesem Gebiet oft ungenügend bekannt sind, und schließlich über das tatsächliche Erlernen, das oft eher erhofft als erwiesen ist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202424
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053917
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): Théry Irène
Abstract: Cet article (1) présente une réflexion théorique sur la notion de genre, de ses définitions et ses usages en sciences sociales. S'opposant à l'approche dominante qui conçoit le genre comme identité ou attribut socialement construits des personnes, conception qu'elle considère comme essentialisante ou substantialisante, l'auteur argumente en faveur d'une approche relationnelle du genre conçu comme modalité des relations sociales. Elle se fonde pour cela sur des travaux d'anthropologie comparative et historique qui contraignent à reconsidérer le dualisme du moi et du corps constitutif de l'idéologie individualiste de la personne, et critique I'hypostase du Moi comme homoncule constitué à partir d'une absolutisation de la première personne. Analysant le système sexué des trois personnes grammaticales, elle soutient que, n'étant pas référentiel, « le je de l'interlocution n'a ni sexe, ni genre ». Les apports croisés de l'anthropologie et de la philosophie analytique la conduisent à revoir la notion de personne pour mieux penser la capacité proprement humaine de se reconnaître comme d'un sexe sans être jamais assigné à celui-ci. This article presents a theoretical work on the idea of gender, its definitions and uses in social science. The author objects to the mainstream approach that sees gender as an identity or an attribute that some people socially construct. She sees that idea as essentializing or substantializing. She argues in favor of a relational approach of gender conceived as mode of social interactions. Her approach is based on comparative and historical works of anthropologists that lead to consider the dualism of the ego and the body which make the individualistic ideology of a persona, and she criticizes the hypostasis of the ego as homunculus made up from absolutizing the id. Analyzing the gender system of the three grammatical persons, she asserts that, as it is not a reference, the other person's "I" does not have a sex nor a gender. The contributions from both anthropology and analytic philosophy lead her to reconsider the notion of persona so as to better grasp the capacity—specifically human—to see ourselves belonging to a sex group without having ever been assigned to it. Este artículo presenta una reflexión teórica respecto a la noción de género, de sus definiciones y sus usos en ciencias sociales. Oponiéndose al enfoque dominante que concibe el género como identidad o atributo socialmente construidos de las personas, concepción que considera como esencializante y sustancializante, la autora argumenta a favor de un enfoque relacional del género concebido como modalidad de las relaciones sociales. Para ella, se basa en los trabajos de antropología comparativa e histórica que obligan a reconsiderar el dualismo del yo y del cuerpo constitutivo de la ideología individualista de la persona, y critica la hipóstasis del Yo como homúnculo constituido a partir de una absolutización de la primera persona. Al analizar el sistema sexuado de las tres personas gramaticales, sostiene que al no ser referencial, "el yo de la interlocución no tiene ni sexo, ni género". Los aportes convergentes de la antropología y de la filosofía analítica lo llevan a reconsiderar la noción de persona para pensar mejor la capacidad propiamente humana de reconocerse como de un sexo sin nunca ser asignado a él. Dieser Artikel bietet theoretische Uberlegungen über den Begriff Gender, seine Definitionen und seinen Gebrauch in den Sozialwissenschaften. Die Autorin setzt sich gegen die meist verbreitete Auffassung des Genders als sozial aufgebaute Identität oder Attribut des Einzelnen, denn sie betrachtet sie als eine essentialisierende bzw. substantialisierende Definition. Dagegen argumentiert sie für eine beziehungsmäßige Herangehensweise an das Gender, die es als eine Modalität der sozialen Beziehungen erfasst. Sie bezieht sich dabei auf vergleichenden und historischen Anthropologiearbeiten, die uns dazu zwingen, das Dualismus des Ichs und des Körpers zu überdenken, der einen Bestandteil der individualistischen Ideologie des Menschen darstellt, und kritisiert dazu die Hypostase des Ichs als Einzelnen, der auf Grund einer Absolutisierung der ersten Person geschaffen wird. Indem sie das geschlechtliche System der drei grammatikalischen Personen analysiert, behauptet die Autorin, dass auf Grund seiner Unbezüglichkeit „das Ich in der Interlokution weder Geschlecht noch Gender hat". Die Beiträge der Anthropologie und der analytischen Philosophie führen zu einer Überdenkung des Begriffs Mensch, um die rein menschliche Fähigkeit besser zu erfassen, die darin besteht, dass man sich einem Geschlecht anschließt, ohne dass es einem je zugewiesen wird.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202564
Journal Title: Revue française de pédagogie
Publisher: Institut National de Recherche Pédagogique
Issue: i40053918
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): Allieu-Mary Nicole
Abstract: Cette note de synthèse souligne la spécificité de la discipline enseignée. L'histoire scolaire occupe une position originale dans le champ des didactiques par la complexité de ses références (production savante, auto-référence scolaire et usages publics de l'histoire). Tendus entre une transmission de connaissances consensuelles et la recherche d'une posture critique, les objets d'histoire enseignés demeurent soumis à des questionnements renouvelés au gré de la demande sociale comme le montrent les récents débats autour des questions mémorielles vives et concurrentes. L'histoire enseignée apparaît ainsi comme un mixte articulant représentations sociales, savoirs privés et connaissances validées. Depuis une quinzaine d'années, des travaux ont permis de mieux cerner le « penser en histoire » et les processus cognitifs spécifiques en jeu dans la classe (temps historique, conceptualisation, problématisation, construction de schemes explicatifs). Des recherches contextualisées ont permis d'explorer les pratiques professionnelles effectives et d'en modéliser le fonctionnement « normal » : une discipline qui privilégie la transmission de savoirs disant la réalité du passé et attachée à la neutralité du texte enseigné ; une discipline qui peine à mettre en cohérence des finalités intellectuelles ambitieuses (outiller le citoyen actif dans la cité de demain) et des activités dans la classe souvent cantonnées à la mémorisation, au repérage et à la catégorisation. Aussi voit-on se dessiner dans les travaux actuels, une problématique centrée sur les écarts entre les intentions et les pratiques. En articulant la notion de soumission aux règles du « contrat didactique » avec les autres modèles théoriques des sciences humaines et sociales mobilisés au sein des équipes de recherche, les travaux menés de manière encore trop dispersée, laissent apparaître des acquis importants qui pourraient être pris en compte dans la formation des enseignants This paper underlines the specificity of the subject taught. School history holds a special position in didactics due to the complexity of its references (scholarly production, self referencing and public use of history). Set in between passing consensual knowledge on and seeking a critical position, school history objects are still under new questioning that changes with social demands as recent debates on actual competing questions related to memory show it. Therefore school history seems to be a blend of social representations, private knowledge and proven knowledge. For fifteen years, works have enabled us to better define "historical thinking" and the specific cognitive processes that are involved in class (historical time, conceptualization, problematization, construction of explanatory schemes). Conceptualized research have allowed to explore real professional practices and model their "normal" functioning: a subject that favours passing on knowledge telling the truth about the past and being attached to using neutral documents; a subject that has difficulty to coherently link ambitious intellectual purposes (preparing active citizens for tomorrow's world) to class activities often limited to memorizing, recognizing and sorting. That is why we can see a problematic develop which is centered on the difference between intentions and practices. Connecting the notion of adherence to the rules of the "didactical contract" to the other theoretical models of human sciences developed within the research team., the work -done in a still too unfocused way -reveals some important acquired knowledge which could be taken into account in teacher training programmes. Esta nota subraya la especificidad de la disciplina enseñada. La historia escolar ocupa una posición original en el campo de las didácticas por la complejidad de sus referencias (producción sabia, autorreferencia escolar y usos públicos de la historia). Divididos entre una transmisión de conocimientos consensúales y la búsqueda de una postura crítica, los objetos de historia enseñados permanecen sometidos a interrogaciones repetidas a merced de la petición social como lo muestran los debates recientes en torno a las cuestiones relativas a las memorias vivas y competidoras. La historia enseñada aparece así como una mezcla que articula representaciones sociales, saberes privados y conocimientos validados. Desde hace unos quince años, ciertos trabajos permitieron delimitar mejor el "pensar en historia" y los procesos cognoscitivos específicos en juego en la clase (tiempo histórico, conceptualización, problematización, construcción de esquemas explicativos). Investigaciones contextualizadas han permitido explorar las prácticas profesionales efectivas y modelizar su funcionamiento "normal": una disciplina que privilegia la transmisión de saberes que dicen la realidad del pasado y apegada a la neutralidad del texto enseñado; una disciplina a la que le cuesta poner en coherencia finalidades intelectuales ambiciosas (preparar al ciudadano activo en la ciudad de mañana) y actividades en la clase a menudo limitadas a la memorización, la localización y la categorización. Por eso se ve dibujarse en los trabajos actuales, una problemática centrada en las diferencias entre las intenciones y las prácticas. Articulando la noción de sumisión a las reglas del "contrato didáctico" con los otros modelos teóricos de las SHS movilizadas en el seno de los equipos de investigación, los trabajos llevados de manera todavía demasiado dispersada dejan aparecer experiencias ¡mportantes que podrían tomarse en consideración en la formación de los docentes. Dieser Bericht unterstreicht die Besonderheit des Schulfachs Geschichte. Geschichte in der Schule hat eine originale Stellung im Feld der Didaktik wegen der Komplexität ihrer Referenzen (wissenschaftliche Schriften, Referenz für sich selbst in der Schule und öffentliche Benutzung der Geschichte). Zwischen der Verbreitung konsesueller Kenntnisse und der Suche nach einer kritischen Haltung hin-und hergerissen, sind die Lehrinhalte in Geschichte nach wie vor je nach sozialer Anfrage einer ständigen Fragestellung ausgesetzt, wie neulich die Debatten um lebhafte und entgegengesetzte Gedächtnisfragen. Die Geschichte als Schulfach erscheint also als eine Mischung zwischen sozialen Vorstellungen, privatem Wissen und bewährten Kenntnissen. Seit etwa 15 Jahren haben einige Arbeiten es ermöglicht, das „Denken in Geschichte” und die kognitiven Prozesse besser einzuschätzen, die in der Schule auf dem Spiel stehen (historische Zeit, Konzeptualisierung, Problematisierung, Bildung erklärender Schemata). Kontextualisierte Forschungsarbeiten haben es erlaubt, die tatsächlichen Berufspraktiken zu erforschen und „normalen” Betrieb zu modellieren: ein Schulfach, das die Übertragung von Kenntnissen, die die Realität der Vergangenheit beschreibt und großen Wert auf die Neutralität des unterrichteten Textes legt; ein Fach, das sich Mühe gibt, ehrgeizige intellektuelle Zwecke (den aktiven Bürger in der Stadt von morgen mit Werkzeugen bewaffnen) mit Aktivitäten in der Klasse in Kohärenz zu bringen, die sich oft auf Memorisierung, Markierung und Kategorisierung begrenzen. Auf diese Weise kann man in den heutigen Arbeiten beobachten, wie eine Problematik auftaucht, im Mittelpunkt derer die Diskrepanz zwischen Absichten und Praktiken steht. In dem man den Begriff der Unterwerfung zu den Regeln des „didaktischen Vertrags” mit den anderen theoretischen Modellen (in den Sozial-und Geschichtswissenschaften) kombiniert, die in den Forschungsteams benutzt werden, lassen die bisher auf noch zu verstreute Weise geführten Arbeiten wichtige Erwerbungen erkennen, die in der Lehrerausbildung berücksichtigt werden könnten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41202586
Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: JAI Press Inc.
Issue: i383087
Date: 8 1, 1983
Author(s): Williams E. Doyle
Abstract: Throughoput its history, "ideology" (the concept and theory) served as social science's foil, an opposing standard against which it defined its own knowledge-as-truth. As social science since mid-century has undergone changes in its idea of itself and its methods of inquiry, the theory of ideology has served as register, visably recording these changes. Works by the structuralists and poststructuralists, especially Althusser and Foucault, forced upon social theorists a profound rethinking of power and its operations and moved "ideology" away from the theory of false consciousness towards a view of ideology as cultural practice. For some, ideology theory is obsolete (due to its classical roots as "false consciousness") or redundant (due to its links to "culture"). Despite the merits of these arguments, a provisional argument on behalf of ideology theory is offered.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4121218
Journal Title: The Sociological Quarterly
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i383096
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Zerubavel Pablo
Abstract: On the U.S.-Mexican border, the label "Mexican" refers simultaneously to both nationality and ethnicity. Playing with the multiple meanings of the word, border actors construct narratives about themselves and Others to deal with a local hegemonic discourse that states that "poverty is Mexican." Thus, while border identities are constructed within a culturally specific system of classification, people also develop a sense of themselves as subjects by imagining themselves as protagonists in stories. To know border narratives is important because people generally act according to how they understand their place in any number of social relations whose meaning is narratively constructed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4121269
Journal Title: Desarrollo Económico
Publisher: Instituto de Desarrollo Económico y Social
Issue: i40054876
Date: 6 1, 2010
Author(s): BARANGER DENIS
Abstract: D. Robbins (2008)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41219137
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Vila-Chã João J.
Abstract: Carìtas in Ventate, nr. 45; cit., p. 78
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220788
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Swaton Sophie
Abstract: Livet, P. -[Compte-rendu de] Leroux, Alain -Eliminer la pauvreté en France avec l'allo-
cation personnelle. Paris : Economica, 2004. In : Revue de Philosophie Economique. (2005), n. 10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220797
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Zanotti Gabriel J.
Abstract: Lakatos, Imre -The Methodology of Scientific Research Programmes. Edited by John
Worrall; Gregory Currie. Cambridge; New York: Cambridge University Press, 1978.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220799
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054974
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Díaz Álvarez Jesús M.
Abstract: "hermeneutizar la ética
discursiva de Apel y Habermas para superar su procedimentalismo restrictivo" (213).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220822
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40054977
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Hénaff Marcel
Abstract: Goffman, Erving -Encounters: Two Studies in the Sociology of Interaction. Indianapolis:
Bobbs-Merrill, 1961.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41220905
Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i40055419
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): PIRLOT Barbara
Abstract: STAVIS (Balthasar 2001),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41229762
Journal Title: Monatshefte
Publisher: University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40055887
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Ruf Oliver
Abstract: Halbwachs, Das Gedächtnis und seine sozialen Bedingungen 158.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mon.2011.0028
Journal Title: Reference & User Services Quarterly
Publisher: American Library Association
Issue: i40056015
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Budd John M.
Abstract: The philosophical and practical work of M. M. Bakhtin provides an important aid to theoretical grounding with regard to information seeking. In particular, his ideas of dialogic communication suggest a way to engage in the act of information seeking and the accompanying mediation. His work is especially important because of its phenomenological basis, which emphasizes the intentionality of communication, the connection of practice to being, and the relationship between self and other. Bakhtin's thought offers a framework for the rethinking of public services in libraries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41241356
Journal Title: Cultural Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i383702
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): ZizekAbstract: Arguing that without a differentiated and relational notion of the cultural, the social sciences would he crippled, reducing social action to notions of pure instrumentality, in this article, I trace the growth of cultural analysis from the beginnings of modern anthropology to the present as a layered set of experimental systems whose differential lenses create epistemic objects with increasing precision and differential focus and resolution. Arguing that culture is not a variable-culture is relational, it is elsewhere or in passage, it is where meaning is woven and renewed, often through gaps and silences, and forces beyond the conscious control of individuals, and yet the space where individual and institutional social responsibility and ethical struggle take place-I name culture as a set of central anthropological forms of knowledge grounding human beings' self-understandings. The challenge of cultural analysis is to develop translation and mediation tools for helping make visible the differences of interests, access, power, needs, desires, and philosophical perspective. In particular, as we begin to face new kinds of ethical dilemmas stemming from developments in biotechnologies, expansive information and image databases, and ecological interactions, we are challenged to develop differentiated cultural analyses that can help articulate new social institutions for an evolving civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4124728
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: Canadian Society for the Study of Education
Issue: i384150
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Tillema Anne M.
Abstract: Inquiry-based teacher education promotes an exploration of concrete particulars as the route to wise practice. The case study presented illustrates one teacher candidate's struggle to let go of a conception of knowledge as generalizable formulae that can be readily applied in practice and to become more open to practice itself as a site of learning. Teacher educators can nurture such openness by helping aspiring teachers to appreciate the fragility of knowledge, the epistemological value of feeling, and the priority of the particular, in teaching. In so doing, educators recover practical wisdom as the beginning and end-in-view of teacher education. /// La formation à l'enseignement axée sur la recherche favorise la prise en compte des conditions particulières et, de ce fait, une pratique éclairée. L'étude de cas présentée dans cet article illustre les efforts d'une candidate à l'enseignement en vue de se départir d'une conception de la connaissance définie comme une formule généralisable, facilement applicable dans la pratique, et de mieux accueillir la pratique elle-même comme un lieu d'apprentissage. Les responsables de la formation à l'enseignement peuvent contribuer à cette ouverture en aidant les futurs enseignants à saisir la fragilité de la connaissance, la valeur épistémologique des sentiments et l'importance des conditions particulières dans l'enseignement. Ce faisant, les éducateurs redécouvrent la sagesse comme le début et l'objectif à atteindre dans la formation à l'enseignement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4126474
Journal Title: Oxford Review of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing
Issue: i384248
Date: 9 1, 2001
Author(s): Wiliam Mark
Abstract: The formative Assessment for Learning proposals outlined by Black and Wiliam (e.g. Black et al., 2002) have been well publicised. Since 2002, in its Assessment is for Learning programme, the Scottish Executive Education Department (SEED) has been exploring ways of bringing research, policy and practice in assessment into closer alignment using research on both assessment and transformational change. This paper focuses on one project within Assessment Is for Learning, in which pilot primary and secondary schools across Scotland were encouraged to develop formative assessment approaches in classrooms. They were supported in this by researchers, curriculum developers and local and national policy-makers. The paper examines the rationale and methods behind the enactment of formative assessment in these schools. It draws upon evidence provided by the interim and final reports of participating schools to draw conclusions about areas of success within the project and potential barriers to the project's future in its evolution from pilot to national programme.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127143
Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40057447
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Campbell Scott
Abstract: Richard Rorty uses Nietzsche to show that people need to create themselves because there is no foundationalist language which they can establish as an anchor. Although this perspective is Nietzschean, it is not Jamesian, and so Rorty misappropriates James when he conflates James and Nietzsche as like-minded progenitors of the mythologizing of a privileged vocabulary. This essay evaluates Rorty's reading of James by considering whether truth in Rorty's textualist sense can abide by the stream of thought. Although James does mythologize privileged vocabularies, he believes that words need to reflect the world more accurately (something Rorty would never say) by abiding by the flux of experience. As such, James recognizes the value that old words have as tools. Whereas Rorty shows disdain for old words, James shows us the cash value those words have in helping us to do anything from paying our bills to constructing more practical and effective theories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274405
Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40057449
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Gross Robert F.
Abstract: The Play About the Baby remains neglected by interpreters of Albee's work because its austerely schematic mode of presentation seems to keeps everything on the surface, making acts of interpretation seem superfluous. Therefore, rather than trying to interpret the play, it is more useful to ask, following the suggestion of Gilles Deleuze, what it does. The play is a dramamachine that produces loss and asserts the centrality of loss to the constitution of selfhood. This loss is achieved by the deployment of perversion, both sexual and linguistic, against Boy and Girl's innocence. The use of perversion ultimately even questions whether there was ever any state of presence that preceded loss. These tactics seem to suggest a wider set of sexual possibilities, but the tactics are ultimately subordinated to the production of melancholia though loss, a subordination that traps the work in a world of severely limited possibilities and encounters.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274460
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057457
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Strauss 1991 p. 19)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274562
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057460
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): BOKSZAŃSKI ZBIGNIEW
Abstract: The article begins with an analysis of the concept of identity and a description of two theoretical traditions which lie at the source of this concept and which determine the operationalisations of the identity concept within the context of social change (G.H. Mead and E. Erikson). The author then goes on to discuss the problems which evolve from the many applications of the concept of identity to analysis of collectives. The concept of collective identity is outlined and four basic ways of understanding this concept in contemporary sociology are discussed. The author refers in his presentation to the works of F. Barth, R. Turner, A. Touraine, S. N. Eisenstadt, E. Gellner, and A. Kłoskowska. The author concludes his article with several comments focusing on the relationships between social change and collective identity and he refers to those approaches which either stress the relative independence of identity formulae and social structure or even view the evolving patterns of identity as a factor contributing to social change.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274594
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057467
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): KURCZEWSKI JACEK
Abstract: Jedlicki op. cit. p. 107.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274654
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): KŁOSKOWSKA ANTONINA
Abstract: As the twentieth century comes to an end, and with it a millennium, there has been much heated reflection on the passing age and the period of transition. Among the many characteristic phenomena of modern times, globalization has attracted particularly much attention. The process of European integration may be traced back to ancient times (vide Roman imperialism or Carolingian universalism). Recently, however, globalization has expanded and it has accelerated considerably. The author of this paper focuses on the current, paradoxical coexistence of global tendencies toward integration on the one hand and very clearly manifested, diversifying (or even separatists) national and nationalist tendencies on the other hand. The author analyzes these homogenizing tendencies at the level of media pop culture on the one hand and the increasing, even acute, awareness of diversity, including the diversity of national cultures, on the other hand. She does so within the framework of the symbolic culture concept. Contemporarily, tendencies toward globalization are suspended between the Scylla of uniformizatdon and the Charybdis of diversity. Sociology is particularly qualified to study these phenomena, at both local and universal levels.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274671
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057469
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): MORAWSKI WITOLD
Abstract: (Karski 1997:3).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274674
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057477
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Religia i polityka," [Religion and Politics] interview in L'Express (23-29 July
1998), reprinted in Forum , no 32, 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274749
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057483
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: T. Abel, Systematic Sociology in Germany: A Critical Analysis of Some Attempts to Establish Sociology
as an Independent Science. New York: Columbia University Press, 1929, p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41274815
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057509
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): DONATI PIERPAOLO
Abstract: Father and Son" (Gesù di Nazaret , Rizzoli, Milano,
2007, p. 399).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275097
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): STANISZKIS JADWIGA
Abstract: Brussels 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275147
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40057513
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): HAŁAS ELŻBIETA
Abstract: (Kania 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41275150
Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i384292
Date: 9 1, 1973
Author(s): VarineAbstract: This ethnographic study of the creation of a museum in Le Creusot (France) provides an analysis of the heritage industry that emerged in the wake of the demise of a family company around which the town was built. This museum was a reaction to the passing of an age when industrial and urban environments were intrinsically linked. Through this description of how the past is collected and recollected in a museum, this article attempts to determine if this duty of remembrance is not, to a certain extent, a strategy of forgetfulness. Is cultural regeneration-the staging of history fading into oblivion-our society's sole response to industrial regeneration?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127614
Journal Title: The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i384292
Date: 9 1, 1955
Author(s): Whyte Jack
Abstract: In a variety of ways, all ethnographies are politically cast and policy relevant. Each of three recurrent political rhetorics is related to a unique set of fieldwork practices. Ethnographies that report holistically on journeys to "the other side" build policy/political significance by contesting popular stereotypes. Theoretical ethnographies draw on political imagination to fill in for a lack of variation in participant observation data and to model an area of social life without attempting to rule out alternative explanations. Comparative analytic studies build political relevance by revealing social forces that are hidden by local cultures. Each of these three genres of ethnographic methodology faces unique challenges in relating fieldwork data to politically significant explanations. By shaping the ethnographers relations to subjects and readers, each methodology also structures a distinctive class identity for the researchers-as worker, as aristocrat, or as bourgeois professional.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4127626
Journal Title: American Studies International
Publisher: George Washington University
Issue: i40057778
Date: 2 1, 2003
Author(s): Trubina Elena G.
Abstract: Elaine Tyler May, Homeward Bound: American
Families in the Cold War Era (New York: Basic Books, 1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41279954
Journal Title: British Journal of Sociology of Education
Publisher: Carfax Publishing Co.
Issue: i384398
Date: 9 1, 1995
Author(s): Zerilli Jo-Anne
Abstract: This paper seeks to outline and evaluate Pierre Bourdieu's work as it has appeared most recently in feminist studies and the field of gender and education. In particular, it suggests ways in which Bourdieu's theoretical insights could be seen to more effectively contribute to cutting edge debates in both social theory and feminist thought regarding concepts such as agency, identity and domination. It also argues that a more creative and empirical engagement with the recent work of Bourdieu, alongside an interdisciplinary reading of more recent cultural and social theories of power, would be a fruitful way forward in advancing a feminist sociology of education. In the present historical moment and against the tide of postmodern and post-structuralist feminist accounts, Bourdieu is often read as a determinist who has little to offer contemporary feminist debates or who argues that masculine domination is too tightly woven to social practices of a given field. In short, this paper argues that such a view is not only a misreading of Bourdieu's work on fundamental theoretical grounds, but fails to acknowledge the ways in which his more recent work on masculinity addresses both the cultural and social conditions underlying contemporary forms of symbolic domination. In short, the paper argues that Bourdieu's theory offers an analytical breadth and range beyond the scope of anything that a normative, liberal account of masculine domination could provide. Yet, in drawing from such diversity, Bourdieu's oeuvre is able to resist incomprehensibility. It stands as a highly focused, realistic and generative attempt (McNay, 1999; McLeod, 2004) to chart the problems of subordination, differentiation and hierarchy, and to expose the possibilities, as well as the limits, of gendered self-hood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4128673
Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40058124
Date: 8 1, 2004
Author(s): Bidussa David
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, Microstoma: due o tre cose che so di lei , «Quaderni storici»,
1994, n. 86, pp. 511-539.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41287671
Journal Title: Tijdschrift voor Filosofie
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40058259
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): de Wit Theo W.A.
Abstract: H. Lübbe, 'Politik und Religion nach der Aufklärung', Politik nach der Aufklärung. Philosophi-
sche Aufsätze, München, Wilhelm Fink Verlag, 2001, pp. 39-75 (p. 66).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41289471
Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058627
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Hanna Martha
Abstract: L'Oeuvre 4 February 1923.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41298984
Journal Title: Historical Reflections / Réflexions Historiques
Publisher: Division of Human Studies, Alfred University
Issue: i40058637
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Pickering Mary
Abstract: Major-Poetzl, Michel Foucault's
Archaeology, pp. 198-99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41299088
Journal Title: Guerres mondiales et conflits contemporains
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058713
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Barasz Johanna
Abstract: Claire Andrieu, « La Résistance dans le siècle », in François Marcot (dir.), Dictionnaire
Historique de la Résistance, op. cit., p. 46-54.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/gmcc.242.0027
Journal Title: Guerres mondiales et conflits contemporains
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40058714
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Fageol Pierre-Éric
Abstract: T. Todorov, Nous et les autres, Paris, Le Seuil, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300029
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058715
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): BONNEUIL NOËL
Abstract: Noel Bonneuil, "Morphological Transition of Schooling in Nineteenth Century France,"
(submitted).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300048
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058716
Date: 2 1, 2011
Author(s): FORCE PIERRE
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300058
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40058718
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): VIEIRA RYAN ANTHONY
Abstract: Patrick
Joyce, The Rule of Freedom: Liberalism and the Modern City (New York: Verso, 2003), 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300101
Journal Title: MLN
Publisher: Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i40058774
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Mall Laurence
Abstract: Jean-Claude Bonnet, « Introduction » i.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/mln.2011.0073
Journal Title: Revista CIDOB d'Afers Internacionals
Publisher: CIDOB
Issue: i40058779
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Savransky Martin
Abstract: Thilo Sarrazin (2010)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41300916
Journal Title: Le Mouvement social
Publisher: Association Le Mouvement Social
Issue: i40058804
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Fabbiano Giulia
Abstract: G. Fabbiano, « Les harkis du Bachaga Boualam. Des Béni-Boudouanes à Mas Thibert »,
in F. Besnaci-Lancou et G. Manceron (dir.), Les Harkis dans la colonisation et ses suites , op. cit.,
p. 113-124.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41301841
Journal Title: Organization Science
Publisher: Institute for Operations Research and the Management Sciences
Issue: i40058868
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Zilber Tammar B.
Abstract: In this paper I uncover the routine, ongoing practices that sustain institutional multiplicity. Drawing on a comparative study of the two high-tech conferences held in Israel in 2002,1 examine how diverse institutions are discursively handled in field-configuring events. Institutional multiplicity was expressed at this site through two identity discourses, one that situated the industry within a national context and another that oriented it toward the global markets. In addition, the conferences were constructed around different best-practice discourses that focused on guidelines for either investment or management. These four discourses reflected and further affected power relations between the field's actors, and they were differentially distributed across separate social spaces between the conferences and within them. The contribution of this study to our understanding of institutional multiplicity lies in demonstrating how it is maintained in practice, politically negotiated between actors, and refracted across separate social spaces.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1287/orsc.1100.0611
Journal Title: History of Education Quarterly
Publisher: Wiley Periodicals, Inc.
Issue: i40058901
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Franklin V. P.
Abstract: Vanessa
Siddle Walker and Ulyssus Byas, Hello Professor: A Black Principal and Professional
Leadership in the Segregated South (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2009
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1748-5959.2011.00336.x
Journal Title: Early Science and Medicine
Publisher: Brill Academic Publishers
Issue: i384650
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Ricoeur Stephen
Abstract: "An-
cient Hypotheses of Fiction," 3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4130480
Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i40058970
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Imaizumi Yoshiko
Abstract: Meiji Jingū 1934-1945, pp. 619-24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304927
Journal Title: Japan Review
Publisher: International Research Center for Japanese Studies
Issue: i40058970
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Shields James Mark
Abstract: Sakaguchi 1991d, pp. 4, 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304930
Journal Title: Reis: Revista Española de Investigaciones Sociológicas
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40058971
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Romanos Eduardo
Abstract: «A los companeros del ML
exilados en Mexico, desde Espana», 27/06/1944 (IISH,
FGP, 804
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41304936
Journal Title: Journal of Social History
Publisher: George Mason University
Issue: i40058998
Date: 7 1, 2011
Author(s): McCormack Jo
Abstract: This article examines social memories in France over the last 10 years. There has been a significant amount of 'memory work' during this period, concerning various aspects of French history, including the World Wars, but predominantly postcolonial issues: the Algerian War, the legacy of slavery, memories of Empire and memories of Immigration in particular. The 'devoir de mémoire' (duty to remember) and 'work of memory' (Paul Ricœur) have taken on greater, and controversial, proportions. While President Jacques Chirac was for some the 'président du devoir de mémoire' (President who championed the duty to remember), President Nicolas Sarkozy seems intent on ending what he sees as the trend towards 'repentance'. After a discussion of the wider memory culture in France, this article focuses on collective and social memories of the Franco-Algerian War (1954-62) Through an analysis of various 'vectors of memory' (Henry Rousso) it argues that the recent upsurge in 'memory work' in France is very much anchored in the present postcolonial social context in France. That memory work is however largely symbolic and in some ways unsatisfactory. It shows that much of the recent work of memory has been only belatedly and partially undertaken by the State, and with civil society in some ways yet to follow.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1353/jsh.2011.0048
Journal Title: Review of International Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40059146
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): GRUIN JULIAN
Abstract: Michael King, 'What's the Use of Luhmann's
Theory?' in M. King and C. Thornhill (eds), Luhmann on Law and Politics: Critical Appraisals and
Applications (Oxford: Hart, 2006), pp. 37-53.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S026021051000152X
Journal Title: AJS Review
Publisher: Association for Jewish Studies
Issue: i387649
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Cixous Sidra DeKoven
Abstract: "The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim," #17, in Open Closed Open,
trans. Chana Bloch and Chana Kronfeld (NewYork: Harcourt, Inc., 2000) [from Patuah sagur patuah]
pp. 26-27.
The Bible and You, the Bible and You, and Other Midrashim,"
26
Open Closed Open
2000
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4131512
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Internationale Beziehungen
Publisher: Nomos Verlagsgesellschaft
Issue: i40059445
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Spencer Alexander
Abstract: http://archiv.bundesregierung.de/bpaexport/artikel/30/637330/multi.htm;
23.02.2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41315277
Journal Title: Oxford Art Journal
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40059451
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Baumgartner Frédérique
Abstract: Pane, Lettre, p. 152.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/oxartj/kcr020
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060506
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Moya Antonio Morales
Abstract: Lottman, La caída de Paris. 14 de junio de 1940, Tusquets,
Barcelona, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41324355
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060531
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Spiegel Gabrielle M.
Abstract: Hollinger, D.: «How Wide the Circle of "We"? Ameri-
can
Intellectuals and the Problem of the Ethnos Since World War II»,
American His-
torical Review, 98 (1993), p. 310.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41324970
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: El autor reflexiona sobre la evolución de la historia del discurso en Francia y su aproximación a la historia semántica, inspirada en la obra de Koselleck, y a la historia del discurso de tradición anglosajona. Tras repasar los antecedentes de la actual historia del discurso francesa desde los años setenta y evaluar la influencia de la obra de Foucault en esta disciplina, el autor aborda, a la luz de los últimos trabajos de Quentin Skinner, la cuestión de la intencionalidad individual y colectiva de los textos históricos, es decir, los mecanismos que constituyen y explican, en palabras de Koselleck, «la conexión empírica entre la realidad y el discurso». The author thinks about the evolution of the history of discourse in France and its approach to semantic history as inspired by the work of Koselleck, and also to the history of discourse in the Anglo-Saxon tradition. After revising the precedents of the current French history of speech from the 70s and evaluating the influence of the work of Foucault in this discipline, the author approaches, in the light of Quentin Skinner's last works, the question of the individual and collective premeditation of historical texts, that is to say, the mechanisms that constitute and explain, in words of Koselleck, «the empirical connection between reality and discourse».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325250
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Jaume Lucien
Abstract: «refiguración
del tiempo por el relato» (p. 226).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325254
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Sebastián Javier Fernández
Abstract: Ibid., p. 632.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325255
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060550
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Martín Ignacio Peiró
Abstract: Moses, S.: op. cit., p. 147.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41325257
Journal Title: Ayer
Publisher: Asociación de Historia Contemporánea
Issue: i40060601
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Juste Antonio Moreno
Abstract: Casanova, J.: «Una historia común», El País, 5 de marzo de
2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41326053
Journal Title: Annual Review of Anthropology
Publisher: Annual Reviews
Issue: i388662
Date: 1 1, 1980
Author(s): Zablocki Charles F.
Abstract: Peacock &
Kirsch's The Human Direction (1980)
Peacock
The Human Direction
1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4132879
Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40061446
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Lebel Udi
Abstract: Individual behaviors, such as loss-coping and “grief work” are affected in organizational contexts. In everything pertaining to coping with trauma in general, and loss more particularly, the individual is “trapped” within a political psychology that enforces the habitus and expectations of institutional dominance on the ostensibly intimate and private response. Regimes have perceived bereavement over battlefield deaths as a form of social capital that can be mobilized to enhance national loyalty and political support. Employing both existential/hermeneutic and institutional analysis, this study examines three diachronic models of bereavement — hegemonic, political and civil — and their political ramifications in the Israeli context.Drawing on changing parental conceptual orientations towards fallen sons and their role as cultural and ideological agents in public sphere, the article traces the movement of bereavement from its capture by the hegemonic state institutions to its creations under the domination of others institutions: political and civic and ultimate use in critiquing the political and military echelon. The article indicates the powerful impact of the social institutional-organizational context on the intimate-psychological context of coping with loss, by illustrating this phenomenon in the Israeli society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41330471
Journal Title: Reis
Publisher: Centro de Investigaciones Sociologicas
Issue: i40063192
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Lizcano Emmánuel
Abstract: (Fishier, 1992)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41336851
Journal Title: Tulsa Studies in Women's Literature
Publisher: University of Tulsa
Issue: i40063225
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Bostic Heidi
Abstract: Françoise de Graffigny's mid-eighteenth-century play Phaza features a main character who is unknowingly crossed dressed as male. The text provides a rich starting point for exploring questions of gender identity and performance. This article situates Phaza within the fairy-tale tradition in which women authors played a major role. Its analysis draws upon philosophies of narrative identity and theories of gender to show that identity comprises both permanence and performance. Reading Graffigny can make an important difference in our understanding of gender, authorship, and relations between the sexes in Enlightenment France. Phaza's masquerade sheds light on the ways in which women authors of the era approached and assumed various gender identities. Eighteenth-century texts like Phaza reveal a lineage of ideas that continue to influence feminist thought today and will do so in the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41337280
Journal Title: Chasqui
Publisher: Chasqui: Revista de literatura latinoamericana
Issue: i40063690
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Llarull Gustavo
Abstract: (Paz Soldán 107).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342180
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): PHILLIPS MARK SALBER
Abstract: Hume, Treatise , 385.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342618
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40063719
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): MARION MATHIEU
Abstract: Collingwood et la philosophie
du vingtième siècle! Collingwood and Twentieth-Century Philosophy, at the Université du Québec à
Montréal in October 2007 .
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342623
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Jewsiewicki Bogumil
Abstract: (Dibwe dia Mwembu & Jewsiewicki 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342880
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063738
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Lallier Christian
Abstract: Gérard Althabe au séminaire
de Nicolas Flamant, « Anthropologie et entreprise », à l'École des hautes études en sciences sociales,
en 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41342881
Journal Title: L'Homme
Publisher: École des hautes études en sciences sociales (EHESS)
Issue: i40063745
Date: 3 1, 2011
Author(s): Barbe Noël
Abstract: Gérard Noiriel, Les Fils maudits de la République..., op. cit. : 257.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41343076
Journal Title: The French Review
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of French
Issue: i40063959
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Roe Glenn H.
Abstract: A fierce opponent of the historicist approach to literature that dominated French academe during his lifetime, the essayist and poet Charles Péguy (1873–1914) would theorize an alternative literary method that through the act of faithful and participatory reading could transcend the limitations of historicism. Outlined in his dialogue with History, Clio, Péguy's vision of the literary act is that of an intersubjective operation of mutual understanding between reader and author, in which the living relevance of literary works extends beyond their narrow historical origins; a conception that prefigures the formalist and hermeneutic literary approaches that will arise decades later.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41346152
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: American Academy of Religion, Oxford University Press
Issue: i40064262
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Furey Constance M.
Abstract: Genealogies
of Religion in 1993.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1093/jaarel/lfr088
Journal Title: Journal of Qur'anic Studies
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press / ﻣﻄﺒﻌﺔ ﺟﺎﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﺩﻧﺒﺮﺓ
Issue: i40064400
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): غروبر كريستين
Abstract: This study argues that the exponential growth of divinatory texts variously attributed to ᶜAlī and Jaᶜfar al-Ṣādiq included at the end of Qur'ans produced during the Ṣafavid period provides further evidence for the widespread interest in divination during the tenth/sixteenth and eleventh/seventeenth centuries in Iran. Treatises on 'divination by the Qur'an' (fāl-i Qur'ān) indicate that it was considered permissible to seek guidance by means of holy scripture at this time. On a more symbolic level, fāl-i Qur'āns can be understood as a kind of restoration of the 'defective' ᶜUthmānic codex by re-Shïᶜifying it-if not by reinserting supposedly dropped verses on the ahi al-bayt, then at the very least by adding terminal divinations attributed to the figureheads of Shīᶜī Islam. This particular practice therefore follows general 'Shīᶜification' trends found in a number of cultural and artistic practices of the Ṣafavid period, which also are potentially discernible within the domain of Qur'an production. هذه الدراسة تذهب إلى أن النمو الهائل من النصوص التي تتنبأ بالمستقبل والمنسوبة بأشكال مختلفة لعلي وجعفر الصادق والملحقة بنهاية المصاحف التي أنتجت ﺧﻼﻝ الفترة الصفوية تقدم مزيداﹰ من اﻷدلة على اﻻهتمام واسع النطاق بالعراﻓﺔ في ايران ﺧﻼﻝ القرون / العاشر والحادي عشر السادس عشر / السابع عشر . وتشير المصنفات في الفأل بالقرآن إلى أنه ﺧﻼﻝ تلك الحقبة كان التماس التوجيه من الكتاب المقدس يعتبر أمرا جائزاﹰ. على مستوى أكثر رمزية، فإن فأل القرآن يمكن أن يفهم على أنه معالجة للمصحف العثماني بإعادة " تشييعه " وهذا وإن لم يكن من ﺧﻼﻝ إعادة آيات تتعلق بآل البيت يدعى أنها مسقطة من اﻷصل، فعلى اﻷقل من ﺧﻼﻝ زيادة تنبؤات في آخر المصحف بعد النص القرآني منسوبة لرموز الشيعة. لهذا فإن هذا العمل يتبع توجهات " تشييع " وجدت في عدد من الممارسات الثقافية والفنية في العصر الصفوي يمكن أيضاﹰ ﻣﻼحظتها في إطار إنتاج المصاحف .
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3366/jqs.2011.0019
Journal Title: Merveilles & contes
Publisher: University of Colorado
Issue: i40067568
Date: 5 1, 1992
Author(s): Schmölders Claudia
Abstract: Das Mārchen als Psychologe— Eine Hommage an Max Lüthi This essay was wtitten in honor of Max Lūthi, the renowned Swiss folklorist, who died in 1991. The starting point is an article by Lüthi in which he coined the term "the fairy tale as psychologist." In contrast to the psychoanalytic approach of Freudians and Jungians, Schmölders demonstrates how Lüthi drew a line between literature and psychology in his works. First, Lüthi studied the hero in the fairy tale from an anthropomorphological viewpoint. Second, Lūthi analyzed the style of fairy tales by examining the moral, aesthetic, and economic aspects of the action. Third, Lūthi also dealt with "the legend as psychologist." Using Lüthi's notions, Schmōlders stresses the dialogic strategies and anthropomorphological concerns of the tales within the domain of psychological object-relations theory, and it is in this regard that Lūthi's term "the fairy tale as psychologist" assumes its importance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41390331
Journal Title: Estudios Internacionales
Publisher: Instituto de Estudios Internacionales de la Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40067662
Date: 9 1, 1990
Author(s): Tomassini Luciano
Abstract: Berroeta, "Los Felices Tiempos Mediocres", en El Nacional. Caracas,
6 de mayo de 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41391337
Journal Title: Estudios Internacionales
Publisher: Instituto de Estudios Internacionales de la Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40067701
Date: 3 1, 2003
Author(s): Pelfini Alejandro
Abstract: Krarup, Signe y Ramesohl, Stefan:
op. cit., pág. 61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41391726
Journal Title: The Georgia Review
Publisher: The University of Georgia
Issue: i40068095
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): Adams William
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, Locai Knowledge (New York: Basic Books, 1983), p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41398860
Journal Title: Journal of the American Academy of Religion
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i387657
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Wyschogrod Lawrence M.
Abstract: Lewis (1986: 69-87).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4139956
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40068374
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Muchnik Natalia
Abstract: Eckart Blrnstlel, Estelle
Aebersold et Patrick G ab anel dans Diasporas. Histoire et sociétés, 8, 2006, p. 22-77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41405858
Journal Title: Annales. Histoire, Sciences Sociales
Publisher: Éditions de l'École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40068376
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Koveneva Olga
Abstract: Jocelyne Dakhlia, «L'Islam à l'épreuve de la comparaison», Annales HSS, 56-6,
2001, p. 1177-1199, ici p. 1181
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41405961
Journal Title: Field Day Review
Publisher: Field Day Publications
Issue: i40068723
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Honan Kevin
Abstract: Valences. 612.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41411795
Journal Title: Design Issues
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40069703
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Jahnke Marcus
Abstract: Gadamer, Truth and Method, 366.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/DESI_a_00141
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40069706
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): Fernández Germán Darío
Abstract: Descombes (1996: 287),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41427885
Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40069741
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): BRYANT REBECCA
Abstract: "Tales from the Coffeeshop,'" Cyprus Mail , 6 Aug. 2006.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0010417512000060
Journal Title: Renaissance Quarterly
Publisher: Renaissance Society of America
Issue: i388096
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): Van der Poel Reinier
Abstract: Kushner, 1996
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4143696
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40070293
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Zembrzycki Stacey
Abstract: As oral historians, we devote a great deal of time to painstakingly designing our projects, cognizant of the fact that our research requires us to interact with human beings in often intimate ways. For this same reason, though, our careful methodology and meticulously designed projects are constantly being tested. This article is a reflection on some of the ethical and methodological challenges that the authors faced during their life story interviews with Holocaust survivors in Montreal, Canada. In particular, it explores three major themes: the elaborate process of learning to "share authority" and build trust with interviewees; the limitations of "deep listening" and their implications; and the struggle to deal with contentious politics, such as perceived racism, that emerged out of some interviews. Reflection on these methodological and ethical challenges not only opens up a wider and important discussion among researchers about how practice relates to theory but also teaches us about our interviewees. For example, what does an interviewee's refusal to engage deeply about his or her past tell us about how they formed their identity in the aftermath of mass violence? Challenges, such as this one, are part of the story. They shed light on questions of narrative formation, the identity politics that result from survival, and how individual memory interacts with dominant narratives about atrocity. They force us to recognize that both our interviewees—and ourselves—are human beings, and not just collections of stories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41440802
Journal Title: Cités
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40070469
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Godin Christian
Abstract: D. Reynié, Populismes : la pente fatale , op. cit., p. 134.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/cite.049.0011
Journal Title: Revue européenne des sciences sociales
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40070481
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): BRONNER GÉRALD
Abstract: Stupple (1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41445019
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: American Political Science Association
Issue: i387744
Date: 2 1, 1983
Author(s): Wyschogrod Thomas
Abstract: Wallach (2001, 189-90, 230, 298-99)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4145301
Journal Title: American Sociological Review
Publisher: American Sociological Association
Issue: i387752
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Zukin Fred
Abstract: O'Connor (2001)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4145370
Journal Title: The Eighteenth Century
Publisher: Texas Tech Press
Issue: i40071427
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Ulmer Gregory L.
Abstract: Abrams, "The Deconstructive Angel," Critical Inquiry 3 (1977): 425-438.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41467190
Journal Title: The Eighteenth Century
Publisher: Texas Tech Press
Issue: i40071436
Date: 4 1, 1982
Author(s): Canfield Douglas
Abstract: Kallich, ch. 2,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41467264
Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071849
Date: 5 1, 2011
Author(s): Adams Julia
Abstract: (Clemens 2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41475694
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071887
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Renouard Cecile
Abstract: This article explores the possible convergence between the capabilities approach and utilitarianism to specify CSR. It defends the idea that this key issue is related to the anthropological perspective that underpins both theories and demonstrates that a relational conception of individual freedoms and rights present in both traditions gives adequate criteria for CSR toward the company's stakeholders. I therefore defend "relational capability" as a means of providing a common paradigm, a shared vision of a core component of human development. This could further lead to a set of indicators aimed at assessing corporate social performance as the maximization of the relational capability of people impacted by the activities of companies. In particular, I suggest a way of evaluating the contribution of extractive companies to the communities close to their industrial sites in extremely poor areas, not from the viewpoint of material resources and growth, but from the viewpoint of the quality of the social environment and empowerment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476130
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40071895
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Waistell Jeff
Abstract: This study investigates how business leaders dynamically narrate their aspirational ethical leadership identities. In doing so, it furthers understanding of ethical leadership as a process situated in time and place. The analysis focuses on the discursive strategies used to narrate identity and ethics by ethnic Chinese business leaders in Indonesia after their conversion to Pentecostal-charismatic Christianity. By exploring the use of metaphor, our study shows how these business leaders discursively deconstruct their 'old' identities and construct their 'new' aspirational identities as ethical leaders. This leads to the following contributions. First, we show that ethical leadership is constructed in identity talk as the business leaders actively narrate aspirational identities. Second, the identity narratives of the business leaders suggest that ethical leadership is a context-bound and situated claim vis-à-vis unethical practice. Third, we propose a conceptual template, identifying processes of realisation and inspiration followed by significant shifts in understanding, for the study of aspirational ethical leadership.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41476230
Journal Title: Human Studies
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072033
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Keller Reiner
Abstract: Wetherell
and Potter (1988).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41478455
Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072112
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Malet Régis
Abstract: (Ricoeur 1990, p. 211).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480119
Journal Title: International Review of Education / Internationale Zeitschrift für Erziehungswissenschaft / Revue Internationale de l'Education
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40072145
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Torres Carlos Alberto
Abstract: (Teodoro and Torres 2007, p. 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41480683
Journal Title: Studia Rosenthaliana
Publisher: Peeters
Issue: i40072258
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Klein Gil P.
Abstract: BT Bava Batra 75a. See his interpretation of Job 40:30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41482514
Journal Title: Africa: Journal of the International African Institute
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40072402
Date: 8 1, 2011
Author(s): Ally Shireen
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/S0001972011000441
Journal Title: Dispositio
Publisher: Department of Romance Languages (University of Michigan)
Issue: i40072811
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Ruprecht Hans-George
Abstract: "L'intertexte isotope: "Horridum somnium", de Julián del Casal" à paraître
dans Nord/Sud, Revue Canadienne des études latino-américaines, vol. II (1977), no. 3 et 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41491104
Journal Title: The American Political Science Review
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40073035
Date: 5 1, 2012
Author(s): DIETZ MARY G.
Abstract: Thucydides' (I.76.2)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41495079
Journal Title: Music Analysis
Publisher: Wiley-Blackwell
Issue: i40073078
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): PURI MICHAEL J.
Abstract: When conceived as the presence of the past, memory can be said to pervade the music of Maurice Ravel. The number and range of these acts of musical memory -including illeces modelled on the medieval ballade, the Renaissance chanson, the Baroque tombeau, the Classical sonatine and the Romantic poème, among others -seem at first glance to testify to a uncomplicated relation between past and present which, upon closer review, is revealed to be problematic. One of the most complex and captivating artistic testaments to what Andreas Huyssen has called 'twilight memory' -not only in Ravel's music, but in Western modernism as a whole - is the eighth and final waltz of his illano suite Valses nobles et sentimentales (1911). In this waltz, which Ravel entitled 'Éilllogue', the hope of making the past present is reborn with each of its numerous thematic recollections, only to be dashed repeatedly by the melancholy knowledge of its impossibility. In the present study, affinities between the Éilllogue's musical behaviours and philosophical accounts of memory by Bergson, Jankélévitch and Nora are explored, along with the compositional precedents established by Beethoven, Schumann, Debussy and others.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1468-2249.2011.00306.x
Journal Title: British Journal of Ethnomusicology
Publisher: British Forum for Ethnomusicology
Issue: i388404
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lisha Chou
Abstract: Jonathan Stock (1993)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4149903
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Kunstgeschichte
Publisher: Deutscher Kunstverlag
Issue: i388628
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): KonersmannAbstract: Siehe dazu auch Ricoeur (wie Anm.28), 203-208,
226-227 u. 274-275
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4150708
Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075224
Date: 2 1, 2001
Author(s): Rastier François
Abstract: Douay, 1988, p. 287
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41558987
Journal Title: Langue Française
Publisher: Larousse
Issue: i40075256
Date: 12 1, 1996
Author(s): Bouchard Robert
Abstract: This paper is about the analysis of the written production of argumentative discourse. Thanks to the technique of collective writing it is possible to observe the process of discourse production. Declarative, strategic and procedural abilities of two non native adults are successively analyzed and compared periodically to those of two young native speakers. This study focuses on only two levels : global and interphrasal organisation of discourse. The organisation of debates in class so as to bring students to build argumentative concepts and help them in their approach of texts (reading and writing) shows the limits of a didactic scheme which relies on oral language practice for the elaboration of written texts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41559347
Journal Title: Les Études philosophiques
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40075883
Date: 12 1, 1982
Author(s): Zum Brunn Emilie
Abstract: Trad. Jean Gouillard, Mystique ď Orient et ď Occident,
Paris, Payot, 1950, p. 95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41581564
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40076402
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Eckert Cornelia
Abstract: Este artigo traz uma reflexão sobre o método etnográfico enquanto encapsulando o tema da identidade narrativa do antropólogo, em especial, enfocando o problema ético-moral da busca da coerência interna de sua produção etnográfica através da análise do processo de construção do conhecimento antropológico. Trata-se de pontuar, neste processo, o que está verdadeiramente em jogo, ou seja, o ato de configuração e reconfiguração do tempo que encerra a ação interpretativa em Antropologia. This article brings a reflections about the ethnographic method while encapsulating the identity theme describes by the anthropologist, in special, focusing the moral-ethic problem of the searching of the internal coherence of its ethnographic production through the study of the process of the anthropologic knowledge construction. It is to point, in this process, that is really in the play, or, the act of configuration and reconfiguration of time that stops the interpretative action in anthropology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41601948
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077028
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Lagrou Elsje Maria
Abstract: O artigo é uma leitura do debate epistemológico sobre as condições de conhecimento na antropologia. Partindo das críticas que o próprío C. Geertz faz a seus seguidores, a autora se propõe a avaliar o potencial crítico da hermenêutica. Recupera seu questionamento acerca da oposiçâo sujeito/objeto e propõe a busca de uma objetividade negociada interpares e situada historicamente. A partir desse debate questiona-se uma ciência pura e sem implicações práticas e morais. O percurso que faz avaliando vários autores lhe permite concluir que o excesso de relativismo ou de subjetivismo transforma toda possibilidade de ciência em ficção. Para dar conta em sua etnografia dos sistemas simbólicos não lingüísticos, a autora busca um diálogo entre a teoría antropológica e as teorias nativas e afirma que é na experiência vivida em campo que está a fertilidade das perguntas e reformulações de conceitos da antropologia. This article is an attempt to interpret the epistemological debate concerning conditions of knoledge in antropology. Discussing the criticism which C. Geertz has made in regard to the work of his followers, the autor proposes to evaluate the critical potential of hermeneutics. A critique of the subject-object split opens the way for proposing a form of objectivity wich is historically located and negotiated among equals. This debate constitutes a point os departure for questioning the notion of a pure science devoid of moral and practical implications. In the course of discussing a number of authors, the conclusion may well be that excessive relativism and subjectivism transform all possibilities of science into fiction. In order to deal with nonlinguistic symbolic systems in etnography, the author sees the importance of dialogue between anthropological theory and native theory. Fertile grounds for raising questions and reformulating anthropological concepts are found in fieldword experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616139
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077039
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Lewgoy Bernardo
Abstract: O presente artigo propõe uma interpretação do fenômeno Chico Xavier na cultura e na sociedade brasileira. A partir do reconhecimento da importância cruciai de seu modelo mítico de espírita exemplar, o lugar de absolute destaque ocupado pelo médium mineiro na história do kardecismo brasileiro será interpretado à luz de urn código cultural articulado em sua biografia, que busca sintetizar os personagens paradigmáticos do "santo" e do "caxias". Desdobrado na unidade de sua obra mediúnica e trajetória pública, o tipo de espiritismo construído em Chico Xavier evidencia a proposta kardecista dominante ao longo do século XX, enquanto modelo de cidadania, prática religiosa e projeto nacional. The present article is a reading of the place of the phenomenon Chico Xavier in the Brazilian culture and society. Starting from the recognition of his crucial importance as a mythical model of exemplary spiritualist, the absolute prominence of the medium in the history of the Brazilian spiritualism will be interpreted in the light of a cultural code articulated in his biography, that synthesizes the Brazilian mythical characters of the "saint" and of the "caxias". Unfolded from his life and works the model of spiritualism built by Chico Xavier evidences the kardecismo's dominant religious point of view along the 20th Century, while citizenship model, religious practice and national project.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616295
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077045
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): de Oliveira Luís Roberto Cardoso
Abstract: O artigo procura discutir a contribuição da perspectiva antropológica para a análise de conflitos, contrastando a ênfase da Antropologia na pesquisa empírica com a orientação predominantemente doutrinária que caracteriza o Direito. Dialogando com textos de repercussão significativa na Antropologia do Direito, o artigo realça a importância da dimensão simbólica dos direitos, caracterizada como aspecto central do universo empírico investigado, e sem a qual demandas por direitos, acordos e decisões judiciais não podem ser adequadamente compreendidos. The article makes a brief assessment of the contribution of Anthropology's perspective to the analysis of conflicts, contrasting Anthropology's emphasis in empirical research with the doctrinarian approach that predominates in Law. Drawing on significant texts in the Anthropology of Law, the article highlights the symbolic dimension of rights, characterized as a core aspect of empirical data, and without which demands for rights, judicial agreements and decisions cannot be adequately understood.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616381
Journal Title: Revista de Antropologia
Publisher: Departamento de Antropologia da Faculdade de Filosofia, Letras e Ciências Humanas da Universidade de São Paulo
Issue: i40077062
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Ferreira Francirosy Campos Barbosa
Abstract: O objetivo deste artigo é apresentar os significados atribuídos pelos muçulmanos à matança do carneiro, que acontece todos os anos na Festa do Sacrifício (Eid Al-Adha), a segunda maior da religião islâmica. Para dar conta desses significados, lanço mão da teoria winnicottiana do não-eu, expressão esta também cunhada na forma de não não-eu por Richard Schechner para tratar da atuação do ator. O artigo explora a idéia de que o carneiro ocupa o lugar do fiel que se entrega a Deus, estabelecendo uma analogia entre o sacrifício do carneiro e o sacrifício daquele que é muçulmano. In this article I would like to explore the multiples senses that muslins attributes to the sacrificial goat at the Feast of Sacrifice, Eid Adhha, one of the most important celebrations of the Islamic calendar, second only to Ramadan. This sacrifice is here analyzed from the perspective of D.W. Winnicott's psychoanalytical theory, as a sort of transitional object, "not me" and "not not me", the latest also supported by Richard Schechner when focuses the actor's experience. The idea developed here is to demonstrate that the goat occupies the devotee's place and establish an analogy between the goat sacrifice and the sacrifice of the one that is a muslin.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41616696
Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40077132
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Di Nola Annalisa
Abstract: Originario della Polo-
nia, Liebmann Hersch (1882-1955),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41618976
Journal Title: La Rassegna Mensile di Israel
Publisher: Unione delle Comunità ebraiche italiane
Issue: i40077153
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Pavoncello Vittorio
Abstract: Can the act of creation itself be considered like an infinite forgiveness that God turns to the earth and to those who live there after having preferred the waters as his place of first existence? The conference "In the beginning it was the forgiveness" held in L'Aquila in the occasion of a pluriconfessional meeting, suggests some hypothesis starting even from some biblical episodes like: the universal deluge, the Amalek's remembering, Giuseppe and his brothers, Isaac's sacrifice, and furthermore with Moses' death, to end with the forgiveness from the original sin through the entrance in the promise land. A suggestive analysis of the forgiveness in the Hebraism, seen too often as a pure religion of the contraposition law to the forgiveness given from the religion of love. The forgiveness in this way is dealt with the inter-religious point of view, and also with the human one that in the relationship between God and man has its top and beginning in the solemnity of Kippur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41619685
Journal Title: Rivista Internazionale di Scienze Sociali
Publisher: Societa Cattolica Italiana per gli Studi Scientifici
Issue: i40077267
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): VILLANI ANDREA
Abstract: A community, in the same way as an individual, can follow as a normal way of behaviour — or as a wanted criteria for behaviour — for all future circumstances to decide discretionally, «case by case», or to define in a moment in time the rule (or a set of rules) that must be valid for the future. To define rules in a community has been indicated by some authors (Geoffrey Brennan and James M. Buchanan particularly) as a way to exit from a situation of a war of every man against every other man, as in the Hobbesian jungle, on one side, and from a situation dominated by a Leviathan on the other. This in a perspective where rules of a common living have been set through a social contract. The rules established through this contract would also form the criteria for a just conduct, in the end therefore for criteria of justice. The essay analyzes the situations and the conditions in which constraining oneself can be rational, even as it is not definible that in all circumstances constraining is more rational than not constraining oneself, that it is more desirable to have rules rather than discretionary decisions, the definition of ways of behaviour rather than the pre-definition of outcomes. As for what concerns the problem of justice, it is indicated how through a contractarian and constitutional procedure rules can be put by unanimous consent, but the problem of the foundation of the same rules remains unresolved. Rules do not seek truth, but only express values accepted by the counterparts in a certain moment in time, and have individuals as sources of these values.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41623852
Journal Title: Revista de Letras
Publisher: Universidade Estadual Paulista (UNESP)
Issue: i40077754
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): de Serpa BRANDÃO Saulo Cunha
Abstract: W. J. G. Ord-Hume (1998)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41634269
Journal Title: The Review of Metaphysics
Publisher: Philosophy Education Society, Inc., The Catholic University of America
Issue: i40077786
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): MADDALENA GIOVANNI
Abstract: Fulbright Program for the
Research Scholar Grant 2009-10,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41635484
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung. Supplement
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40077837
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Jarausch Konrad H.
Abstract: Konrad H. Jarausch, "German Civility? Retying Social Bonds after Barbarism," European
Review of History 18 (2011), 373-86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41637867
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer Science + Business Media
Issue: i40078333
Date: 6 1, 2012
Author(s): Zarzycka Beata
Abstract: Duriez and
Hutsebaut 2010
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41653779
Journal Title: Journal of Religion and Health
Publisher: Springer Science + Business Media
Issue: i40078338
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Aist Clark S.
Abstract: This paper reviews a body of data that identifies underlying influences that have contributed to an evolving change in American Psychiatry toward a more positive and receptive stance toward religion and spirituality over the past three decades. This development, surprising in light of the remedicalization of psychiatry and its predominantly neuro-biological orientation, is attributed to five foundational ideas that have helped to leverage this change. These are significance of culture, creative power of ritual, psychic function of belief, neuro-biology of spirituality, and relevance of recovery narratives. The impact of these factors for psychiatric assessment and treatment is described, as well as the contribution of the Oskar Pfister legacy and award to the ongoing dialogue between religion and psychiatry. Adapted from the American Psychiatric Association's 2011 Oskar Pfister Lecture in Religion and Psychiatry.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41653855
Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393665
Date: 8 1, 1973
Author(s): Voloshinov Michelle Z.
Abstract: I begin by introducing the Ilongots and some of their attitudes toward speech. Whereas most modern theorists think of language as a tool designed primarily to "express" or to "refer," Ilongots think of language first in terms of action. They see commands as the exemplary act of speech, displaying less concern for the subjective meanings that an utterance conveys than for the social contexts in which utterances are heard. An ethnographic sketch thus outlines how Ilongots think of words and how their thought relates to aspects of their practice -- providing an external foil for theorists found closer to home. Speech Act Theory is discussed and questioned first on internal grounds, as an approach that recognizes but slights important situational and cultural constraints on forms of language use. A consideration of the application of Searle's taxonomy of acts of speech to Ilongot categories of language use then leads to a clarification of the individualistic and relatively asocial biases of his essentially intra-cultural account. Last, I return to Ilongot directives. A partial analysis of Ilongot acts of speech provides the basis for a statement of the ways in which indigenous categories are related to the forms that actions take, as both of these, in turn, reflect the sociocultural ordering of local worlds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4167311
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i40078771
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Costa Ricardo Lionel
Abstract: Madero (2001: 28-32).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41676227
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i40078779
Date: 3 1, 2009
Author(s): Velasco Mónica Quijano
Abstract: Paz 1979: 85-100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41676774
Journal Title: Iberoamericana (2001-)
Publisher: Iberoamericana Editorial Vervuert
Issue: i40078791
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Nava Brenda Vega
Abstract: (Lezama Lima 1977: 285).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41677557
Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393682
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): ZubinAbstract: In our research, we wish to illuminate different types of discursive intentions which are structured into discourse via the verb inflections and auxiliaries, together with their entailed social effects. In the present report, we examine the use of the simple present by two three-year-olds, and argue that analyses in terms of tense or aspect are not adequate to account for its use. One needs to recognize the way in which the form implicitly refers to norms and thereby entails a type of impersonal motivation -- especially as it is just this feature of the use of this form that structures the ongoing activity into a nondialogic, normative activity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4167800
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40078818
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Moureau François
Abstract: TC, t. II, p. 990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41678510
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079011
Date: 6 1, 1983
Author(s): Toussaint Maurice
Abstract: « Approche de l'idéogénèse », B. pp. 62-74.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41681962
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079106
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Meschonnic Henri
Abstract: Roland Barthes, « Pourquoi j' aime Benveniste », pour la parution du tome premier des Problèmes
de linguistique générale, baptisés Essais par une erreur redoublée pour le deuxième, en 1974. Dans Le
bruissement de la langue, déjà cité, p. 193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683199
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079106
Date: 6 1, 1995
Author(s): Noël Mireille
Abstract: FNRS suisse (requête n° 1214-031059-91).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683201
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079109
Date: 9 1, 1997
Author(s): Bres Jacques
Abstract: A. Joly (1996, « Les variations d'un
invariant : approche morphogénétique de l'imparfait français », Modèles linguistiques XVII, 1, 187-202)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683229
Journal Title: Langages
Publisher: Didier / Larousse
Issue: i40079141
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): Longhi Julien
Abstract: We analyse the French noun livre « book » according to an argumentative conception of language. A summary is presented of the theories of Anscombre (Theory of stereotypes) and of Carel and Ducrot (Theory of semantic blocks), which are used to reveal the argumentative dimensions of livre. Argumentation is argued to derive from a common sense system (Sarfati) leading to the ascription of doxa in language governed by a topohbased device, which corresponds to discursive object. Semiotisation is supported by phenomenological processes: the Indexicality of meaning (Lebas 1999, Cadiot and Visetti 2001) is concerned at the Linguistic level with the construction of semantic forms along three dimensions of meaning, known in the Theory of semantic forms as motifs, profiles, and themes. The contributions of the discursive levels to the constitution of a semantic form are raised in view of the phenomenon of lexical anticipation. What we call "inserted motifs" reveals the genericity of Discursive Formations. In the course of "profiling", these motifs constitute a pre-syntactic zone of stabilisation. The "doxic profiles" allows the construction of topoï by thematisation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41683593
Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i40079193
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): KURCZYNSKI KAREN
Abstract: "Le cinéma après Alain Resnais," pp. 8-9.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1162/OCTO_a_00096
Journal Title: Language in Society
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i393712
Date: 3 1, 1963
Author(s): ZookAbstract: "The Budget" is a newspaper which has served Amish communities for over a hundred years by disseminating community news to Amish settlements across North America. The main feature of this newspaper are newsletters written by volunteers from local Amish settlements, called "scribes," who report news and happenings from their church districts. In this study the generic characteristics of the newsletters are identified, as is their role in the reproduction of Amish cultural values. The newsletters display generic consistency demonstrated in the predictable location, form, and content of the components of the newsletter. Scribes' reports of community news report events which are central to maintaining the importance of the interpersonal basis of Amish community life, and serve to maintain those items as reportable and noteworthy topics in the Amish communicative economy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4168495
Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Ho Meilu
Abstract: Singing songs in service (kirtan seva) constitutes the primary expression of devotion in the Pushti Marg (Path of Grace) tradition of India. This liturgical practice is singular amongst South Asian, Hindu traditions in its extensive use of rag set to classical poetry. I consider the meaning of this sung liturgy using the ideas of hermeneutic philosophy that concern understanding. I suggest that performing song in service is similar to the act of understanding a work, one in which a self is disclosed in the mode of play. Critically, such continual self-unveilings over a lifetime of service to Krishna afford the practitioner the possibility of the lived liberation promised by founder, Vallabhacharya.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699881
Journal Title: The World of Music
Publisher: Verlag für Wissenschaft und Bildung
Issue: i40079811
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Simonett Helena
Abstract: Although today much of the Mayo-Yoreme sacred myths and their inherent symbolism is rather esoteric knowledge, known to a few only, the community's performance of the responso (ritual of honoring the dead) is important for the re-establishment of relationships between humans and the supernatural beings and between living persons and the ancestors. The communal experience of the responso and the sense of beingenjoined are characteristic of the spiritual experience and fundamental to the musical experience as well Since life/death of any individual is an experience tied to other individuals, I argue that a philosophical inquiry of selfhood—of both the individual and the community—may help us reason about and make possible an understanding of the responso.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41699882
Journal Title: Political Theory
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i40079984
Date: 8 1, 2012
Author(s): Goldman Loren
Abstract: Kant's progressive philosophy of history is an integral aspect of his critical system, yet it is often ignored or even treated as an embarrassment by contemporary scholars. In this article, I defend Kant and argue for the continuing relevance of his regulative assumption of historical progress. I suggest, furthermore, that the first-person stance of practical belief exemplified in Kant's conception of hope offers new resources for thinking about the relationship between the ideal and the real in political theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41703079
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080047
Date: 2 1, 1978
Author(s): Grimaud Michel
Abstract: « Vers une poétique psychanalytique. Lectures de Victor Hugo » (Thése, université du Wis-
consin [Madison], 1976)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704432
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080050
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Bem Jeanne
Abstract: Giono, fasciné par « le drame du sang, [...] le couteau qui ouvre la porte d'un
personnage fermé ». Jean Giono à Robert Ricatte, cité in Pléiade I, p. xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704459
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080069
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): JACOT JEAN-PAUL
Abstract: Dans différents articles recueillis aujourd'hui dans un livre intitulé Antonin Artaud, ce désespéré qui vous parle,
Paris, Seuil, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704667
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080082
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Pradeau Christophe
Abstract: «Judith Schlanger:
Explorer of Lettered Space», SubStance, Univ. of Madison Press, n° 97, vol. 31, n° 1, avril 2002 et «L'effet
de "déjà-lu" dans l'œuvre de Jacques Roubaud», in D. Guillaume (dir.), Poésies et poétiques contemporai-
nes, Le Temps qu'il fait, à paraître en 2002.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704839
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080082
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): CAMBRON MICHELINE
Abstract: Le lieu de l'homme. La culture comme distance et mémoire, présentation de Serge Cantin, Montréal,
Bibliothèque Québécoise, 1994 [1968], p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704842
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080090
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): SIMON ANNE
Abstract: RTP, I, p. 156.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41704938
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): MONTIER JEAN-PIERRE
Abstract: Guy Larroux, «La solidarité du dénouement avec un épisode initial se
trouve illustrée par maints récits», op. cit., p. 60.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705031
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): CAMPAIGNOLLE-CATEL HÉLÈNE
Abstract: M. Calle-Gruber, Librairie A.-G. Nizet, 1991, (Dis-
cussion I: texte, intertexte, création dialogique), p. 313-314.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705032
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): TRITSMANS BRUNO
Abstract: Sol absolu et autres textes, Paris, Gallimard, coll. Poésie, 1982, p. 7-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705034
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080097
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): JEANNELLE JEAN-LOUIS
Abstract: Tzvetan Todorov, Mémoire du mal, tentation du bien. Enquête
sur le siècle. Paris, R. Laffont, 2000, p. 133-140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705035
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080098
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): XANTHOS NICOLAS
Abstract: Frédéric Berthier : «l'aménagement du sens n'étant jamais que l'effet second d'un
emménagement du sujet dans le discours». «Éléments de conversation», Communications,
n° 30, 1979, p. 110.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705046
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080100
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): THOMASSEAU JEAN-MARIE
Abstract: «De l'écriture du texte de théâtre à la mise en
scène», Cahiers de praxématique, n° 26, «Les mots de la scène», 1996, p. 71-93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705073
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080110
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): CROIZY-NAQUET CATHERINE
Abstract: Michel Jarrety, art. cité, p. 82.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705188
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080116
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): MACÉ MARIELLE
Abstract: Michel de Certeau, op. cit., p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705261
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080120
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Boulay Bérenger
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, « Frove e possibilita » (1984), Il filo et le tracce, op. cit., p. 303.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705312
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080123
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): ARTOUS-BOUVET GUILLAUME
Abstract: Circonfession, dans Jacques Derrida, op. cit., p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705358
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Armand Colin et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080124
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Coquet Jean-Claude
Abstract: M.R. Anspach, À charge de revanche. Figures élémentaires de la réciprocité
(Seuil, 2002)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705372
Journal Title: Business & Professional Ethics Journal
Publisher: Philosophy Documentation Center
Issue: i40080131
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Deslandes Ghislain
Abstract: "Each answer gives more than ordinary prudence requires. The right cheek?
Turn the other cheek! The coat? Take the tunic as well! A thousand? One more!"
(2006b, 171).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.5840/bpej20123111
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French, Dalhousie University
Issue: i40080135
Date: 10 1, 2010
Author(s): Azérad Hugues
Abstract: La Philosophie herméneutique 193.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41705534
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080464
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): Méchoulan Éric
Abstract: Giorgio Agamben, Le langage et la mort : un séminaire sur le lieu de la négativité, trad. M.
Raiola, Paris, C. Bourgois, 1991, p. 57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713201
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080468
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Adam Jean-Michel
Abstract: Philippe Hamon, 1993, pages 189 à 198.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713260
Journal Title: Littérature
Publisher: Larousse et le Département de littérature française de l'université Paris-8
Issue: i40080471
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Costantini Michel
Abstract: Description de San Marco et le guide Gallimard de Venise, éd. Nouveaux-
Loisirs, 1992.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41713297
Journal Title: Group
Publisher: Mental Health Resources
Issue: i40080844
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Schermer Victor L.
Abstract: A broad conceptual framework is presented for utilizing spirituality in group psychotherapy. The author considers (a) selected concepts and theory relevant to the spiritual aspect of psychotherapy practice; (b) the change in assumptions about the person and the group they imply; (c) the mystical aspects of the listening/observing process; and (d) aspects of the new sciences compatible with spiritual principles. Using a psychospiritual paradigm, the author offers a view of group therapy that emphasizes the therapist as a contemporary mystic, the group as a sacred space, and a return to profound, timeless, nonrelativist spiritual values and goals, nonsensory infinite dimensional experience leading to deep transformation of the self, and the compatibility of contemporary scientific frameworks with spiritual principles that can form the basis of new theorizing and group interpretations.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41719065
Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392481
Date: 1 1, 1978
Author(s): Van Laan Arthur F.
Abstract: "Homiletic Tragicomedy and the Ending of Measure for Measure," an unpublished
essay Ide has shared with me, 10
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174289
Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i392513
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Shklovsky Robert
Abstract: Fussner, Historical Revolution, 220-21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4174538
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS – Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40081890
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Thévenot Laurent
Abstract: Griesse 2008a, 2008b, 2011
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756470
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Departamento de Literatura, Universidad de Chile
Issue: i40081899
Date: 11 1, 2012
Author(s): Herceg José Santos
Abstract: Foucault, Orden 38-39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41756623
Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081937
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): ALHASANI NADIA M.
Abstract: In the quest for a more sustainable environment, there appears to be a need to confront issues of tradition vs. modernity and culture vs. technology in a world where boundaries once dividing these issues are collapsing, and differences once separating them are disappearing. This study demonstrates, through examination of a series of built examples, the successful integration of tradition and modernity as they are reflected in Muslim cultures. In practice, the notion of culture and technology is addressed through the built context, ultimately establishing the identity of a society through its architecture. This paper argues for the preservation of a culture through understanding the level of symbolism established in its built environment: the higher the level of symbolism, the further detached an artifact becomes from its place of origin. This research focuses on possible scenarios involving the conscious application of past and present typologies of form and technology in search of a recognizable cultural identity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41757196
Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081952
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): RASHID MAHBUB
Abstract: Critics have pointed out that in many contemporary cities wasteful modes of consumption, encouraged and facilitated by fantastic developments in technology, have significantly eroded the values of the traditional urban environment. Contemporary cities very often lack the sense of placeness, vibrant public life, and harmonious relationship between man and nature characteristic of the traditional urban environment. This article studies how the configuration of the physical boundary may be used as an important tool to reconstitute these values in contemporary cities. It suggests that the boundary is more than an abstract pattern of lines. Rather, it is integral to life within the city, and should possess greater significance in the design of the built environment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41757684
Journal Title: Traditional Dwellings and Settlements Review
Publisher: International Association for the Study of Traditional Environments (IASTE)
Issue: i40081977
Date: 10 1, 2007
Author(s): MARCHAND TREVOR H.J.
Abstract: This article challenges the assumption that "tradition" is a quality pertaining chiefly to objects, stylistic conventions, or the use of materials. Equally, it refutes the notion that tradition is merely the perpetuation of ritualized practices or skilled techniques. By considering the complex relation between vocational migration, heritage, and identity among contemporary fine woodworkers at London's Building Crafts College, it argues that tradition is a state of mind — a recurring nostalgia for an idealized past, or the desire for a Utopian future. More specifically, the article investigates a "tradition of longing" for engagement in nonalienating modes of production, aesthetic work, and an authentic way of living.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41758513
Journal Title: African Journal of Reproductive Health / La Revue Africaine de la Santé Reproductive
Publisher: Women's Health and Action Research Centre
Issue: i40082442
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): Martin Caroline H
Abstract: At present there is under utilization of maternity service provision in Nigeria, with only a third of childbearing women electing to deliver in healthcare facilities. This is relevant since Nigeria's maternal mortality rate is second highest in the world and is estimated at 1,100 per 100,000 live births. To date, studies have sought cause and effect and have neglected the opinion of the people about what they perceive to be problematic and what they believe constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision. An exploratory qualitative study was carried out to identify pregnant women in a rural Niger Delta community's perceptions of conventional maternity service provision. Participants included 8 pregnant Niger Delta women from differing sub-groups within the homogeneous population. Semi-structured interviews were conducted to explore informants' views of what constitutes satisfactory maternity service provision, what comprises inadequate care, barriers that obstruct delivery of maternity care, and what promotes positive outcomes. Five major themes emerged from the data. These included: (1) Women's requirements for information; (1a) nutritional and dietary advice, (1b) how to recognise developing complications, (1c) appropriate fetal development, (1e) importance of attending clinics; (2) Staff services required: (2a) availability, (2b) well managed, and (2c) good quality; (3) Apparatus: (3a) equipment available, (3b) adequate infrastructure; (4) Affordability; (5) Place of traditional and spiritual methods. The interviewed childbearing Niger Delta women voiced several factors that they considered altered their satisfaction with maternity service provision. Finding out more about what causes satisfaction/dissatisfaction in childbearing women facilitates maternity care professionals to improve standards of care and allocate resources more effectively. Policy changes are driven by initiatives that reinforce strengths of current specification and recognise weaknesses. In addition, the WHO recommends that working towards improving health related culture is important. A l'heure actuelle, il y a une sous utilisation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux au Nigeria, étant donné qu'un tiers des femmes en âge de procréer optent pour accoucher dans des établissements de santé. Les études antérieure ont recherché la cause et l'effet et ont négligé les opinions des femmes concernant ce qu'elles croient être la bonne prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux. Nous avons mené une étude qualitative exploratrice pour identifier 8 femmes enceintes à partir des perceptions d'une communauté rurale du Niger Delta à l'égard de la prestation de services de gynécologie-obstétricaux conventionnels. Des interviews semi-structures ont exploré les opinions des enquêtées sur ce qui constitue la prestation de services de gynécologieobstétricaux satisfaisant, ce qui constitue les soins insuffisants, les obstacles qui entravent la prestation de soins de gynécologieobstétricaux et ce qui avance les résultats positifs. Cinq thèmes importants ont émergé à partir des données : (i) Les besoins des femmes pour les renseignements ; 1a) le conseil nutritionnel et alimentaire, 1b) comment reconnaître des complications qui se préparent, 1c) le développement approprié des fétus, le) la nécessité de fréquenter les cliniques, 2) bien gérer, 2c) la bonne qualité 3) appareil 3a) l'équipement disponible, 3b) l'infrastructure adéquate ; 4) s'ils sont abordables ; 5) la place des méthodes traditionnelles et spirituelles. Les femmes enquêtées ont mentionné plusieurs facteurs qui ont modifié leur satisfaction avec la prestation de service de gynécologie-obstétricaux. La recherche supplémentaire concernant les causes de la satisfaction ou du mécontentement rend facile la tâche des professionnels de soins de maternité leur permettant d'améliorer la qualité de soin et d'affecter des ressources plus efficacement.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41762346
Journal Title: Log
Publisher: Anyone Corporation
Issue: i40082909
Date: 7 1, 2005
Author(s): Eigen Edward
Abstract: Christopher Lane, "The Poverty of
Context: Historicism and Nonmimetic
Fiction," PMLA 118, no. 3 (May 2003): 465.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41765045
Journal Title: Log
Publisher: Anyone Corporation
Issue: i40082915
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Teyssot Georges
Abstract: Gilles Deleuze and Felix Guattari,
Anti-Oedipus: Capitalism and
Schizophrenia, trans. Robert Hurley,
Mark Seem, and Helen R. Lane
(Minneapolis: University of Minnesota
Press, 1985, 1989), 143-44, 160-61.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41765182
Journal Title: Management Revue
Publisher: Rainer Hampp Verlag
Issue: i40083560
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): Hoßfeld Heiko
Abstract: This paper considers how companies use their own mass communication media to create, with the aid of metaphors, a legitimizing image of their practices. The analysis is based on the example of two banks, both of which undertook massive staff and cost reductions between 2001 and 2003. Downsizing measures like theirs are often met with resistance if they conflict with the interests, values or worldviews of stakeholders. Companies approach this threat of resistance by building a linguistic façade of legitimacy that suggests conformity with prevailing ideas of good or correct managerial conduct. Our metaphor analysis, which covers all publicly accessible texts of the two banks' own mass communication, identifies nine metaphoric concepts, which we further condense into three persuasive meta concepts: concealing metaphor, euphemistic metaphor, and urgency and control metaphor each fulfil different persuasive functions and vary systematically according to the conditions surrounding the managerial practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41783738
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revue canadienne des études latino-américaines et caraïbes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Association Canadienne des études Latino-Américaines et Caraïbes
Issue: i40084751
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): FRIDMAN VIVIANA
Abstract: Ce texte propose un examen de la figure d'Eva Perón, épouse du président populiste de l'Argentine, Juan Perón, comme icône de l'identité argentine. Elle est récupérée comme un espace d'identification inéluctable dans l'imaginaire politique national et la représentation que l'on se fait d'elle varie selon la conjoncture et les acteurs en jeu. L'« Evita populiste » incarne une image maternelle de protection des secteurs populaires, tandis que l'« Evita Montonera » et l'« Evita piquetera » dessinent les contours d'un profil révolutionnaire. Qu'en est-il alors de l'appropriation que fait la Présidente actuelle de l'Argentine, Cristina Fernández de Kirchner? Ce travail a comme but d'examiner la spécificité des différentes lectures du mythe et de montrer que loin d'avoir diminuée, l'importance de cette figure reste fondamentale dans les manières de faire encore aujourd'hui de la politique en Argentine. Este texto propone un análisis de la figura de Eva Perón, esposa del presidente populista de la Argentina, Juan Perón, como ícono de la identidad argentina. Dicha figura se constituye en un espacio de identificación ineluctable para el imaginario político nacional, pero las representaciones que se construyen varían en función de la coyuntura política y de los actores involucrados. La "Eva populista" encarna una imagen maternal y protectora de los sectores populares, mientras que la "Evita montonera" y la "Evita piquetera" evocan un perfil revolucionario. ¿Que tipo de apropiación propone la Presidente actual de la Argentina, Cristina Fernández de Kirchner? Este trabajo tiene como objetivo examinar la especificidad de las diferentes lecturas del mito y mostrar que lejos de haberse disipado, la importancia de esta figura continua marcando la forma actual de hacer política en Argentina.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41800525
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Revue canadienne des études latino-américaines et caraïbes
Publisher: Canadian Association of Latin American and Caribbean Studies / Association Canadienne des études Latino-Américaines et Caraïbes
Issue: i40084753
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): MICÓ JOSÉ ANTONIO GIMÉNEZ
Abstract: La época que nos ha tocado vivir, que, a falta de mejores términos, denominamos tentativamente "globalización," provoca el entretejido de una malla virtual que aglutina privilegiadas zonas de contacto e ignorados ghettos de exclusión, así como irreconciliables identidades monolíticas y múltiples (individuales, locales, étnicas, religiosas, de género, de preferencias sexuales, nacionales, mundiales... et al.); fragmentaciones, opacidades, pro-, proto-, pos-, antinaciones, transnaciones, translenguas, transculturas... La novela Rojo, amarillo y verde, del autor boliviano-quebequés-canadiense-planetario Alejandro Saravia, es representativa del titubeante imaginario planetario que comienza a perfilarse. Lejos de ser una apología celebratoria de la "aldea global," este multifacético imaginario propone un contrapeso dialógico al monólogo del pensamiento único que pretende imponernos el capitalismo globalizante. La période que nous vivons, que nous nommons provisoirement la "mondialisation" à défaut de meilleurs termes, provoque l'entre-tissage d'un réseau virtuel agglutinant des zones de contact privilégiées et des ghettos d'exclusion ignorés; des identités monolithiques et multiples irréconciliables (individuelles, locales, ethniques, religieuses, de genre, d'orientations sexuelles, nationales, mondiales... et al.); des fragmentations, des opacités, des pro-, proto-, post-, anti-nations, des trans-nations, des trans-langues, des trans-cultures... Le roman Rojo, amarillo y verde, de l'auteur bolivien-québécois-canadien-planétaire Alejandro Saravia, est représentatif du chancelant imaginaire planétaire qui commence à se profiler. Loin d'être une apologie célébratoire du "Village global," cet imaginaire aux mille visages propose un contrepoids dialogique au monologue de la pensée unique, celle que le capitalisme mondialisant essaie de nous imposer. The age we find ourselves living in which, for lack of a better term, we tentatively call "globalization" provokes the interweaving of a virtual meshwork that brings together privileged zones of contact and forgotten ghettos of exclusion, as well as irreconcilable monolithic and multiple identities (individual, local, ethnic, religious, national, global, of gender or sexual preference... et al.); fragmentations, opacities, pro-, proto-, post-, antinations, transnations, translinguistics, transcultures... The novel Rojo, amarillo y verde > by Alejandro Saravia, a Bolivian-Quebecker-Canadian-Planetarian author, represents the hesitant global imaginary that is beginning to take shape. Far from being a celebratory apology of the "global village," this multifaceted imaginary proposes a dialogic counterweight to the monologue of the single thought the globalizing capitalism is trying to impose on us.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41800579
Journal Title: Theoria: A Journal of Social and Political Theory
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40084882
Date: 4 1, 2008
Author(s): Mitchell Joshua
Abstract: Because Hobbes is understood to be a proto-liberal thinker, a great deal hinges on how we understand his writings. Does he contribute to the development of a purely secular political self-understanding, as many liberals today claim? And, by extension, does that mean that liberal thought today best stands on a purely secular foundation? What, then, should we make of the extensive theological speculation throughout his Leviathan! Here, I argue that to reconcile the seemingly purely secular claims in Leviathan with the obviously religious claims found there we must move beyond reading him in terms of what I here call 'the fable of liberalism', and comprehend Leviathan as a whole in terms of Reformation era debates between Protestants and Roman Catholics about the limits and purview of reason. Understood in that way we see his claims about 'reason' in a new and important light. Rather than being an inevitable development that comes to supercede honour and glory, as the fable of liberalism suggests, 'reason' is seen to have an historically contingent character, whose parameters are established by wagers about the meaning of religious experience.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802392
Journal Title: Theoria: A Journal of Social and Political Theory
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40084883
Date: 8 1, 2008
Author(s): Cochrane James R.
Abstract: The essay refers to a concern for social justice in the origins of public health, borne in part by religious commitments, and to more recent expressions of a similar concern in debates about health equity. Equity, moreover, is affected by discursive power relations (dominant/hegemonic versus local/suppressed), which are discussed in relation to current research in the African Religious Health Assets Programme on the interaction of particular 'healthworlds' (a conceptual innovation) that shape the choices and behaviour of health-seekers. Two background theoretical positions guide the argument: Amartya Sen's claim that development is linked to freedom (including religious freedom); and, building on Sen's and Martha Nussbaum's human capabilities theory, an asset-based community approach to the building or reconstruction of public health systems. On this basis, it is argued that health systems and health interventions are just to the extent that they mediate between the necessary leadership or polity from 'above' (techné) and the experience and wisdom (métis) of those who are 'below', taking into account the asymmetries of power that this equation represents. Because difference and diversity are so often expressed in what we might reasonably call 'religious' terms, I specifically emphasize the continuing persistence of religion and, hence, the importance of accounting for its pertinence in social theory generally, and in relation to discourses of health and justice in the African context specifically. Acknowledging the ambiguities of religion, I nevertheless argue that an appreciative alignment between public health systems and religious or faith-based initiatives in health promotion, prevention and care is crucial to sustainable and just health systems in Africa.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41802404
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084990
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SANTOS LAURA
Abstract: Justice Brennan,, ct., p. 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41803947
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084996
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): CLAVEL JUAN MASIÁ
Abstract: Changeaux, Jean Pierre / Ricœur, Paul - La nature et la règle. Ce qui nous fait penser.
Paris: Odile Jacob, 1998, p. 300.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41804058
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40084996
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): DUQUE JOÃO
Abstract: Metz, J. B. - "Religion und Politik", p. 276.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41804059
Journal Title: Minerva
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40085908
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Pestre Dominique
Abstract: Fressoz (2009)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41821497
Journal Title: Estudios Atacameños
Publisher: Universidad Católica del Norte, Instituto de Investigaciones Arqueológicas y Museo
Issue: i40086186
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Pizarro José Antonio González
Abstract: Manual Baedeker 1910: 35
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41825381
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: « Tolérance, intolérance, intolérable »,
in Lectures 1, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1991, p. 294-311.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0149
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kemp Peter
Abstract: Ibid., p. 43-44.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0173
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40086215
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Kearney Richard
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, especially the epilogue entitled "Le pardon
difficile", p. 593-658.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rmm.062.0197
Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087534
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Ron Amit
Abstract: The article develops an understanding of public deliberations during a peace process, focusing on the interaction between the elite level negotiations and the "public peace process." It does so by examining the dialogical mechanisms that are set to work in the public sphere once the elite consider the possibility of identifying the former enemies as allies or friends. These dialogical mechanisms, the author argues, add up to a shift in the manner the public interprets the discourse that regulates its relationship with the elite toward what the author calls, following Paul Ricoeur, 'hermeneutics of suspicion.' Thus, the peace process generates a need for the public to re-examine the terms of understanding that defined its relationship with the former enemy. However this same process might also lead the public to re-examine the terms by which it understands its relationship with the elite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852982
Journal Title: International Journal of Peace Studies
Publisher: International Peace Research Association
Issue: i40087536
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): Park Laureen
Abstract: Needs Theory (NT) has been a corner stone for conflict resolution scholarship (CRS) as it was conceived by John Burton and other pioneers of the field. Intuitively, NT makes sense. There are fundamental needs that all human beings have that if violated may cause conflict. Indeed only those conflicts that are due to the violation of such needs can truly be deep-rooted (versus disputes). However, the structural foundations for NT are still not firmly established for a variety of reasons. Psychoanalysis and critical theory help us to understand and establish the various factors that go into constituting needs, in part by critiquing the positivistic framework that has heretofore been primarily utilized in NT scholarship
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41852998
Journal Title: Journal of Advertising
Publisher: Board of Directors, American Academy of Advertising
Issue: i394073
Date: 9 1, 1986
Author(s): Wright Barbara B.
Abstract: This paper analyzes the presenter in advertisements by means of a theoretical framework drawn from literary criticism. The paper adapts literary theory to explore the advertising "who" -- the presenter of a message. It turns to dramaturgy and narratology theory to formulate a trichotomy of advertising "points of view" -- first-person narrator, third-person narrator, and dramatic character. The formal and functional properties of each are discussed with advertising examples. Advertising consequences are illustrated with examples taken from Advertising Age's "Best Advertising of 1989" compilation. These are discussed in terms of media patterns, message strategy, and overall communication objectives. The discussion also suggests the need for additional research to understand hybrid and parody forms.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4188803
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088669
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): NADEAU Martin
Abstract: Ibid., volume 3, rapport du bureau central du 20 mars 1797, Spectacles, p. 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41889310
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088676
Date: 9 1, 2004
Author(s): ANTONINI BRUNO
Abstract: Jean Jaurès, « Collectivisme », article de La Dépêche de Toulouse du 25 septembre 1893, dans
ESI, pp.160-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41889537
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Armand Colin
Issue: i40088706
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): MONNIER Raymonde
Abstract: Hans-Jürgen Lüsebrink, Rolf Reichardt, Die Bastille.
Zur Symbolgeschichte von Herrschaft und Freiheit, Frankfurt am Main, Fischer, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41890504
Journal Title: Annales historiques de la Révolution française
Publisher: Société des Etudes Robespierristes
Issue: i40088814
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Guilhaumou Jacques
Abstract: Principes régénérateurs du système social de Billaud-Varenne, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41914495
Journal Title: Northeast African Studies
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40089818
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Mennasemay Maimire
Abstract: The article discusses the presence of emancipatory Utopian ideas in Ethiopian history through a critical hermeneutical interpretation of Lalibela. Drawing on the concept of concrete utopia, the paper argues that the works and Chronicles of Lalibela secrete a concrete Utopian surplus that points to the conceptualization of knowledge as critique and as die mastery of nature, of labor as a transformative and emancipatory acüvity, and of power relations as expressions of equality between subjects and ruler. The article contends that Lalibelas Utopian surplus implies questions and reflections about social transformation, which, being rooted in Ethiopian history, provide possibilities for developing emancipatory ideas and practices that respond to the modern needs and aspirations of Ethiopians. It argues that, if Ethiopia u to extricate herself from the poverty and tyranny traps of passive modernization and successfully meet the challenges of modernity, reflection on and the quest for democracy and prosperity need to link up with the concrete Utopian surpluses that inform Ethiopian history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41931315
Journal Title: Sociologie du Travail
Publisher: Assocaition pour le développement de la sociologie du travail; Elsevier
Issue: i40089829
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Tuchszirer Carole
Abstract: Pette et Devin, 2005
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.soctra.2009.12.012
Journal Title: Rhetoric and Public Affairs
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40090085
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Arnett Ronald C.
Abstract: President Obama's commencement address on the University of Notre Dame campus evoked substantial controversy, providing public demonstration of rhetorical differences and demands generated by differing provincial and cosmopolitan positions. Icontend that public civic rhetoric, in an era of narrative and virtue contention, must address the creative interplay of both provincial and cosmopolitan perspectives. In this essay I examine reactions to the Obama address from news sources connected with the local Catholic diocese, as well as the South Bend and University of Notre Dame newspapers. I argue that Obamas address is an example of a public civic speech that openly engaged the interplay of provincial and cosmopolitan understandings of a controversial communal common center. Obamas Notre Dame speech framed discourse that walks within a world of tension and difference on the public stage, highlighting the communal rhetorical constitution of a speech moment shaped through the interplay of provincial and cosmopolitan commitments.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41935241
Journal Title: Rhetoric and Public Affairs
Publisher: Michigan State University Press
Issue: i40090341
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): Hatch John B.
Abstract: The book Letters Across the Divide: Two Friends Explore Racism, Friendship, and Faith embodies a dialogic rhetoric with significant potential to influence its intended audience to accept the need for racial atonement and reconciliation. It exemplifies what Aaron Gresson calls a "dance of agency" in both its interpersonal exchanges and constructed relationship with readers. Bringing white and black voices, individual and collective concerns, and (interpersonal and public discourse into dialogue, Letters demonstrates the transformative power of "voice," which mediates the "authenticity" of Buberian dialogic rhetoric and the cultural performances of Bakhtinian dialogism. The fact that the white coauthor boldly affirms commonplaces of white resistance increases the likelihood that white readers would identify with and be influenced by his profound attitudinal change in dialogue with his black friend. The coherence and credibility ofthat transformation depend upon the prefigurai power of the authors' shared religious narrative—both enabling and constraining Letters' influence on public racial reconciliation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41940477
Journal Title: Revista de Crítica Literaria Latinoamericana
Publisher: Latinoamericana Editores
Issue: i40090365
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Varas Patricia
Abstract: Writing History 68
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41940850
Journal Title: Zeitschrift für Ethnologie
Publisher: Dietrich Reimer Verlag
Issue: i40090374
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Hahn Hans Peter
Abstract: Holtzman 2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41941005
Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Florida Atlantic University
Issue: i40090504
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Gale Deborah Dysart
Abstract: An increasing number of individuals worldwide are receiving home nursing care from loved ones. Many healthcare professionals are exploring the use of narrative to help family caregivers meet the personal demands of this work. Citing Ricoeur's notion of narrative identity as a social process in which cultural norms and values are negotiated between speaker and audience, this paper argues that health care professionals can assist their clients by viewing narrative as collaboration, not autonomous construction. Collaboration in construction of narrative identity was observed in interactions between family caregivers and public health workers on the Caribbean island of St. Kitts. There, caregivers were supported by a dialogic process in which interlocutors explored the cultural values that define and delimit the possibilities for living as caregivers.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41942906
Journal Title: Storytelling, Self, Society
Publisher: Florida Atlantic University
Issue: i40090504
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Drew Sarah
Abstract: Improvements in treatments for childhood cancers have led to an "epidemic" of survival. Yet we have limited understanding about the overall ramifications of survival and quality of extended life for this growing population of young people. In this paper I consider lived experiences of longterm survival following cancer in childhood from a social science perspective. I explore young people's negotiations of narrative identity and associated processes of coming to terms with their own subjective position as young adult survivors. Discussion is based on qualitative data collected from 57 young adults in 2000. I focus on three concepts that help to discern ways in which cancer becomes enmeshed in personal identity — the Delta factor, narrative dissonance and narrative repair.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41942908
Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Scandinavian University Press
Issue: i388779
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): von Wright Mats
Abstract: Causal explanations of social actions are central to modern as well as to classic sociology. Even in its revised form. the most influential causal theory -- the covering law theory -- has not proved particularly fruitful for the study of social action. But there are alternative and potentially more fruitful theories. This article presents Weber's methodology and critical realism as two different contributions to a generative view of causality in social science which both try to transcend the protracted controversy between a hermeneutic interpretive sociology and a positivistic causal-explanatory sociology. From the generative standpoint. causal explanations are directed not towards the production of empirical correlations between variables or towards the making of predictions on the basis of empirical laws, but towards the uncovering of causal properties and the processes whereby social actions arise out of the complex interaction of internally related mental dispositions. meanings. intentions. social contexts and structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4194762
Journal Title: Acta Sociologica
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i388794
Date: 3 1, 1999
Author(s): Wilson Henrik
Abstract: A theory of the embodiment of action is proposed. Reflections on relations between human intentions, the human body and the notion of agency lead us to argue that phenomenological analysis is not sufficient for such a theory. Our consideration, that the most fundamental level of embodied agency is that of life itself, brings us to the philosophy of biology and the theory of the organism: briefly, certain parts of the natural environment are intrinsic to the constitution of organisms and, in their more sophisticated configuration, as agents. Action is embodied in the sense that certain physiological processes are internal in relation to it and play a constitutive role in its performance. The way in which environment, context and consciousness affect and constitute the nature of agency at personal and sub-personal levels is elaborated. We see that human agents perceive and act upon their world through a complex shifting between those levels. A summary of the ways in which the social sciences can be enriched by this more comprehensive view of human agency provides the basis of justification for claiming Actor-Network Theory (ANT), originally developed by sociologists studying science and technology, as a promising framework for the continuation of this reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4194959
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091451
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): KAHLMEYER-MERTENS ROBERTO S.
Abstract: Gadamer, Hans-Georg. – Wahrheit und Methode, ed. cit., p. 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955630
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091456
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): BARROSO PAULO
Abstract: Goethe, Johann Wolfgang — Máximas e Reflexões. Lisboa: Guimarães Editores, 2001,
p. 119.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955712
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40091456
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): SERRÃO DANIEL
Abstract: Meneses, Ramiro Dèlio Borges de — O Desvalido no Caminho. Santa Maria da Feira:
Edições Passionistas, 2008.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41955714
Journal Title: Revista de Musicología
Publisher: Sociedad Española de Musicología
Issue: i40091550
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): García Montalbán Antonio
Abstract: Lo Maravilloso en el Siglo de las Luces: La
Encyclopédie y Esteban de Arteaga (1747-1799). Valencia, Mu VIM, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41959346
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40092224
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): BUCHOLC MARTA
Abstract: Jakoubek, Svoboda, Budilova 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41969498
Journal Title: Polish Sociological Review
Publisher: The Polish Sociological Association
Issue: i40092224
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): BEDNARZ-ŁUCZEWSKA PAULINA
Abstract: In this paper, we attempt to show the fruitfulness of the theory of communicative action for memory studies. Specifically, we intend to demonstrate that concepts characteristic of the discipline, such as "history," "memory," and "dialogue," reflect three types of universal validity claims: "memory" formulates claims to authenticity, "history" formulates claims to truth, and "dialogue" formulates claims to Tightness. Thus, it is possible to introduce a seminal Habermasian notion of rationality that rests on validity claims. This notion can serve to integrate, enrich, and identify blind spots in memory studies. Our purpose is to demonstrate the relevance of collective memory to social cohesion (cultural reproduction, social integration, and socialization) and the public sphere (its development and atrophy, rationalization, and colonization).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41969499
Journal Title: Journal of Correctional Education
Publisher: Correctional Education Association
Issue: i40092321
Date: 6 1, 1993
Author(s): Baird Marie
Abstract: This article investigates the role of conversion in character reformation. It begins by exploring the initial formation of character in infancy and childhood, as well as challenges to the initial formation of character in adulthood. It then delineates the role ofconversion in character reformation by showing that an individual's encounter with a selftranscending conceptual universe may alter his or her self-identification. This alteration may be expressed as the individual's capacity to "tell a new story" about him or herself. This article argues that a shift in self-identification and self-narration lies at the heart of a reformation of character.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41970961
Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092521
Date: 9 1, 1949
Author(s): DE SAINT MAURICE BERAUD
Abstract: Trois Fontaines, "Existentialisme Chrétien: Gabriel Marcel." La Notion
de Prisence chez Gabriel Marcel, (Paris, 1947), p. 254.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41974378
Journal Title: Franciscan Studies
Publisher: Franciscan Institute
Issue: i40092589
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): GELBER HESTER GOODENOUGH
Abstract: Legenda maior in Analecta 10:626.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/41975266
Journal Title: Journal of Business Ethics
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40094286
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Brewster Chris
Abstract: United Nations 1948
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s10551-012-1397-0
Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Universitetsforlaget
Issue: i217592
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): O'Neill Ernest J.
Abstract: The purpose of this paper is to foster the regeneration and reorientation of peace research in the United States through its internationalization and radicalization. The authors locate the possible sources of this 'post-modern' redirection of American peace studies in the traditions of critical theory and phenomenology and in convergent work by contemporary West European scholars in Scandinavia and the Federal Republic of Germany. The main lines of this reorientation for American peace research are limned through an exploration of three substantive themes: power, violence, and hegemony; international society as totality; and the critical peace researcher as knower and actor.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/422497
Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i217647
Date: 8 1, 1972
Author(s): Wagar Helena
Abstract: Heidegger (1982, 1983)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/423471
Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: i394228
Date: 7 1, 1997
Author(s): ZipesAbstract: This essay considers a group of novels from the 1960s and 1970s about African-American revolution, by Barry Beckham, Nivi-kofi A. Easley, Sam Greenlee, Chester Himes, Blyden Jackson, William Melvin Kelley, John O. Killens, Warren Miller, Julian Moreau, Chuck Stone, John Edgar Wideman, and John A. Williams as examples of black power sf. It focuses in particular on their inability to imagine a post-revolutionary future, and the strategies they adopt in place of more conventional sf techniques of extrapolation-such as refusal, immanentization, veil-rending, and pornotopianism-in order to narrativize the problem of what Walter Mosley has characterized as breaking the chains of (white) reality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4241523
Journal Title: Journal of Peace Research
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i217691
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Vedlesen Arne Johan
Abstract: In this article, the case of Bosnia is used to raise important theoretical and practical questions concerning the role of third parties in preventing and punishing genocide. After the massacre at Srebrenica, a UN-declared 'safe area', the debate over complicity in genocide on the part of UN personnel has gained particular urgency, and much of the discussion here is related to that debate. The article also draws attention to the role of intellectuals in preparing for genocide by way of ideological hate speech, a role of crucial importance in top-down orchestrated genocidal campaigns such as those seen in Rwanda and Bosnia. On the basis of the empirical material presented, it is argued that considerable responsibility resides with knowledgeable third-party bystanders to unfolding acts of genocide. The article also tries to distinguish between different kinds of bystanders, and it attempts to define and discuss what it means - and what it should imply - to be a contemporary bystander to genocidal warfare.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/424645
Journal Title: Philosophische Rundschau
Publisher: Mohr Siebeck
Issue: i40095939
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Waldenfels Bernhard
Abstract: Günther Ort-
mann: Management in der Hypermoderne, Wiesbaden 2009.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1628/003181510791542418
Journal Title: Cinémas d'Amérique Latine
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40096383
Date: 1 1, 2013
Author(s): CHASSAING BORIS
Abstract: O melodrama histórico O que é isso, companheiro? (Bruno Barreto, 1997) e o documentário Hércules 56 (Silvio Da-Rin, 2006) adotam gêneros cinematográficos distintos na construção de versões antagônicas sobre o sequestro do embaixador dos EUA no Brasil, promovido pela luta armada revolucionária em 1969. Porém, de lado a lado, as opções estéticas identificáveis nos filmes conotam um encerramento do passado que não deixa de indicar certa convergência a respeito do presente brasileiro de "conciliação" democrática, quando permanece a impunidade de torturadores e assassinos. Le mélodrame historique O que é isso, companheiro? (Bruno Barreto, 1997) et le documentaire Hércules 56 (Silvio Da-Rin, 2006) adoptent des genres cinématographiques distincts dans la construction de versions antagoniques de l'enlèvement de l'ambassadeur des États-Unis au Brésil, perpétré par la lutte armée révolutionnaire en 1969. Pourtant, mis côte à côte, les choix esthétiques identifiables dans les films dénotent un verrouillage du passé qui n'est pas sans indiquer une certaine convergence au sujet de l'actuelle "conciliation" démocratique au Brésil, alors que les tortionnaires et assassins restent impunis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42598507
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096733
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Lapointe Roger
Abstract: ibid. 209-211, 246, en rapport avec le TWNT
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42609614
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096786
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): von Allmen Daniel
Abstract: L'Évangile
de Jésus-Christ, 317.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42610781
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40096984
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Navarro Luis Sánchez
Abstract: Beutler, Martyria, 237-306
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42614626
Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila University Press
Issue: i40098086
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Hau Caroline Sy
Abstract: This article focuses on a close reading of Rey Ventura's autobiographical narrative of his experience as an illegal migrant worker in Japan in order to unsettle the dominant paradigm of the overseas Filipino worker as hero(ine) and martyr. It examines the ways in which both the Philippine and Japanese states have acted as apparatuses of labor capture; the various discourses of nationness which inform the political construction of the OFW as "labor," "foreign," "illegal" and "depoliticized"; and the strategies of survival used by OFWs to negotiate with, and make claims on, the labor-sending and -receiving states.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42633649
Journal Title: Policy Sciences
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40098289
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Shankar Savita
Abstract: The policy literature has long recognized the inherent need for a program to fit the unique conditions found in a certain context. We present a theory of institutional contextualism that focuses on the mechanisms by which actors adapt a policy design to fit a situation. We conceptualize institutions as phenomena that are constituted by a constant dialectic between text (the general blueprint) and context (the particular setting). The first half of this dialectic, which is the diffusion of the constitutive text or norm onto the institutional setting, has been discussed in the literature. Our research focuses on the second half, and we delineate, in concept, mechanisms for fitting the program to the local context. We then use a case study of improvised microfinance programs in Tamil Nadu, India, to illustrate how this occurs in reality. The research underscores the unexamined link between effective governance and contextual fit and offers a typology of mechanisms for fit that should inform future research.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/s11077-012-9163-9
Journal Title: Český lid
Publisher: Ústav pro Etnografii a Folkloristiku Ceskoslovenské Akademia ved
Issue: i40098473
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): LOZOVIUK PETR
Abstract: The article is intended to indicate how the study of written and cultural texts may be used to approach the problem of identifying the system of thought characteristic of particular groups. Certain premises of what may be called an “interpretative paradigm” have been selected to create a theoretical starting-point, and in this context the most suggestive appear to be the concept of culture developed by symbolic anthropology, the cultural-semiotic concept of text and the multi-dimensional hermeneutic approach to textual intepretation. The author therefore seeks to bring together, in addition to the general features ofinterpetative ethnology, certain theoretical and methodological starting-points derived from the three approaches mentioned. One may approach the problem of understanding of a foreign testimony via “adequate interpretation”. Here, to understand means to adopt the cultural “language” of a message as one's own, and to interpret and so transfer the unknown into an accessible code, most often one's own code. The process of interpretation is understood as the discovery of the hidden content behind the apparent stirface, and in this activity the understanding of culturally remote testimony is axiomatically taken to bepossible and communicable. In a broader epistemological context we can see in adequate intepretation one of the means to the never-ending process of correction of our pre-judged knowledge. In a spirit of critical rationalism we could deflne such interpretation as the working hypothesis that may be falsified by further Scientific activity and then replaced by a better theory. Such conclusions on the methodological range of the interpretative approach indicate only one of the possible syntheses of various epistemological paradigms, for the theoretical use and application of which ethnology seems especially suited.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42639814
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100593
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Zajac Peter
Abstract: The study ’The meaning of action, the action of meaning’ raises the theoretical question of the relationship between the intent and meaning, the self-referentiality and referentiality of the literary text. It sets out from the hypothesis that a literary text has not only a self-referential, but also a referential character. Unlike non-literary texts whose function is their intent, the referentiality of a literary text is open. The ambiguity and polysemy of the text then results from the non-obviousness of reality itself. The concept that captures this difference between literary texts and texts with other functions is that of meaning. The study uses the concrete example of the thematicisation of the metamorphosis of a puppet, a monster or an animal into a man in Kleist, Collodi and Grass to illustrate the difference between mechanical intent founded upon efficiency and living meaning, founded on ambiguity and non-functional complexity. An analysis of Pavel Vilikovský’s novel Kôn na poschodí, slepec vo Vrábroch (’Horse Upstairs, Blind Man in Vráble’) shows how, in its thematic, ostentatiously self-referential action, meaning is born as an expression of the polysemic re fe re n tia lity of the text. The analy sis shows that behind this self-referentiality the text is also created in the referential action of meaning to such an extent that it is precisely the open action of meaning which becomes the r » on-obvious sense of the action of the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686311
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100605
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Hodrová Daniela
Abstract: This study represents a Chapter from a section devoted to the composition of a literary work and is part of a larger project called ‘The Poetics of a Work of Literature in the Twentieth Century’, which is being undertaken by the Theory Department of the Institute of Czech Literature. The fragment and fragmentariness in a twentieth-century literary work are a manifestation of a marked tendency towards discontinuity or in some cases towards continuity of a certain kind. There exist works of art that for various reasons remain fragments without, however, being preceived as such (the novels of Kafka and Ladislav Klíma’s Velký román, are cases in point); on the other hand, the fragment, that is to say an intentional fragment (such as a sketch or a synopsis), becomes an independent genre whose roots go back to Romanticism (for instance Novalis’s fragment). The fragment and fragmentarieness that manifests itself in the text in the widest possible number of ways (intentional incompleteness and sporadicity, ‘blank spots’ in the Story, the mixing of heterogeneous elements, the alternating of various genres within one work, and so on), we understand as a reaction to the idea about the work as a complete, inlernally unified and accomplished whole with a clear and single Sense, an idea that Classicism molleyeoddled, which was then to a large exient done by Realism and with it all so-called decadent literature (including tendencious, Socialist-Realist literature). The fragment and fragmentariness (with which is linked the idea of a sense that continuously defies being pinned down to any one definition, which follows from its quality of not being fully told, from suggestion, hints, silence, gaps and ‘ holes’) are, in the literature of the twentieth century, perceived as both a genre and also as approaches that can express the open nature of being and of the world better than the whole work can. Because fragmentary works often represent a work in a nascent state or in a state of transformation, they become a picture of a world that is, as Ladislav Klíma pointed out, ‘continuously creating itself’.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686479
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100618
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Špirit Michael
Abstract: Boje a směry socialistické kultury (1946a)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686700
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100622
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: Patočka summarized his conception of style in the essay „Umění a čas" [Art and Time] (1966), in which he observes style over historie periods and its increasing departure from a priori, metaphysically ascertained and universally valid meaning. In modern art, style is established by the freedom of the Creative act; its centre of gravity shifts to the level of „signifier". Patočka's essay „O minulém rázu umìění" [Concerning the Former Nature of Art] (written 1965) helped to clarify „aesthetic attitude". In this essay, he develops an interpretational duet: a critique of Hegel's metaphysical starting point, which distances itself from the experience of modern art, and an appraisal of Hegel's interpretation of time, which remains inspirational. In accordance with it, Patočka the phenomenologist considers art the place of „destructive creation", of vivifying revelation, whose source is in man. The next part of the article calls attention to a lecture by Paul Ricoeur „Vyprávění, metafora a teorie interpretace" [Narrative, Metaphor and the Theory of Interpretation] (1987), in which Ricoeur introduced a modern hermeneutic approach to literary studies. What is most relevant here is the concept of the „double reference". The first aspect of reference relates to empirical reality; the second to the „productive reference", which designs a world created by the literary work. Semantic innovation in the narration of a story has a parallel in the semantic innovation of the metaphor. In both cases there emerges „the new, the as yet unsaid, the inexpressible - in language".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686758
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100624
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Bílek Petr A.
Abstract: Eco
1997: 326
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686783
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100625
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Jankovič Milan
Abstract: In the late twentieth century two conceptions of text in a literary work followed from the original distinction between Sinn (smysl, sense) and Bedeutung (význam, reference), which was made by Gottlob Frege in 1892 - namely, those of Wolfgang Iser and Paul Ricoeur. For us, they are interesting for their direct or indirect affinity to Czech Structuralism. The article presents a detailed comparison of the two conceptions: Iser's 'act of reading', culminating in the 'play of the text', and Ricoeur's proposal of 'productive reference', which heads towards the references (Bedeutungen) of a world that is irmagined, without actually being, and announces itself through the creative power of language. The article concludes by returning to the question of the game and reference in the work of Iser and Eugene Fink. Play and art guard the vitality of sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686799
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100636
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Jílek Rudolf
Abstract: HESTER: 170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42686999
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100637
Date: 2 1, 2005
Author(s): Jiráček Pavel
Abstract: In the twentieth century the phenomenon of the subjective body was integrated into ontology in philosophy, moving from Phenomenology to Existentialism. The rediscovery of the body and affect as a way of thinking also led contemporary cognitive science to the topic of the relationship between emotion and cognition, to the necessity of expanding the model of the mind and of experiencing emotions and physical sensation. The extension of the explanatory possibilities of a scholarly metalanguage into the area of the emotions and physical sensation is also important for the analysis of the acoustic aspect of lyric verse. In the acoustic flow of verse, the sounds of language have, apart from a phonemic function, their own sensuous (emotional) effect of the articulating body. In literary studies so far the acoustic flow has been interpreted only at the segmental level as a sequence of phonemes or sounds (for example in constructs of acoustic succession, phonetic instrumentation, or phonetic composition). At the suprasegmental level the acoustic flow must be conceived of as a sequence of syllables, a sequence of articulated phonations, the semantic movement of the phonemic flow. A syllable has no semantic value, but does have an experiential form, which influences motivation, behaviour, and experience. In addition to sonic and tonal modulation at the suprasegmental level, qualitative modulation, modulation of timbre, and the sequences of tones and of noise are also employed. In modelling the semantic movement of syllables in a phonemic flow the methodological approaches of experimental psychosemantics have been used. Connotational objectivization took place in three dimensions that were polarized on the basis of domestic and alien, light and darkness, activity and passivity, and research was conducted with a sample of 2,800 respondents. The analysis of the acoustic side of lyric verse would be incomplete if in addition to accentual rhythm and melody we did not also consider qualitative modulation, the semantic movement of the phonic flow. At the segmental level of verse, phonemes are semantically completed by the lexical meanings of words. This semantic process is parallel to the semantic process of the phonemic flow, but apart from the metrical correspondence between them there is no causal connection, only similar semantic content. In addition to the semantic movement of the phonational flow and the semantic saturation of phonemes, the dynamic of the acoustic process of verse completes the phonic line of the verse, which in itself links occurrences of sonic and tonal modulation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687016
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100650
Date: 6 1, 2007
Author(s): Jiráček Pavel
Abstract: Bohumil Nuska points out the predominant limited conception of rhythm, which is usually linked only with acoustically symbolized and aurally perceived rhythms, while the rhythms that are optically symbolized and visually perceived are utterly ignored. In lyric verse, the double, parallel mental construction, which stems from the opposition of syllable and morpheme as constituents of a higher construct of the word, creates parallel Iines of mixed mental spaces of linear and non-linear rhythms (the rhythm of verse, the rhythm of the situation; the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation). Shared abstract structures in generic spaces within individual mixed spaces of lyric rhythm are shared axiological structures, represented at the highest level of abstraction by tension and relaxation (detension). The dynamic nature of these structures stems from the asymmetric distribution of tension and relaxation with regard to the dualistic symmetrical model of the axiological system. And thus deviations from its axial scheme emerge, creating these four parallel rhythmicized lyric structures (in terms of form). Similarity amongst the individual mixed mental spaces is only possible in a fractal dimension. In this theory, presented as a working hypothesis, it is assumed that the forms of the rhythm of the verse, the rhythm of the situation, the atmosphere of the verse, and the atmosphere of the situation, will be similar to each other, and their fractal mutual similarity emerges from the text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687271
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100677
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Kubíček Tomáš
Abstract: Dumas 1956: 11
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687783
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40100687
Date: 7 1, 2013
Author(s): Kotásek Miroslav
Abstract: This article discusses the options that narrative and language have in their attempts to capture or describe traumatic experience and death. It concentrates on two prose texts by Karel Čapek, Obyčejný život and Povětroň, and the first phase of Freudian psychoanalysis, pointing at generally distinguishable limits and distortions that arise when narrative and language come in contact with trauma and death. Contrary to the current trend within „trauma studies“ , the article does not deal with autobiographical records of traumatic experience. It rather tries to point out that thinking consistently about the connection between memory, language and trauma tends to blur and question the traditional distinction between fiction (understood as a work of imagination) and autobiography (taken as a description of real events). It also tries to show that psychoanalysis arrives, explicitly and implicitly, at a similar conclusion. The last part of the article poses the question what the resulting relationship between the outside (narrated, written Story) and the „inner“ experience is like, and to what extent the structure of this dyad can also be questioned.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42687982
Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101443
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Bleiker Roland
Abstract: Dipesh Chakrabarty, Provincializing Europe: Postcolonial Thought and His-
torical Difference (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2000), p. 98.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704577
Journal Title: Asian Perspective
Publisher: The Institue for Far Eastern Studies
Issue: i40101449
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Yang Kiwoong
Abstract: Jo,
Yang-Hyeon, "Controversy over East Asian History and U.S. House
Discussion Regarding the 'Comfort Women' Resolution: Recent Changes
and Implications for U.S.-Japan Relations," East Asian Review (Seoul),
vol. 19, No. 3 (Fall, 2007) pp. 3-31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42704641
Journal Title: Sartre Studies International
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40101494
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Clayton Cam
Abstract: Sartre's theory of the imagination is important both as an alternative to the idea that the imagination consists of images contained somehow in the mind - the "illusion of immanence" — and as an early formulation of Sartre's conception of consciousness. In this paper I defend Sartre's theory of imaginative consciousness against some of its critics. I show how difficulties with his theory parallel a perennial problem in Sartre-interpretation, that of understanding how consciousness can negate its past and posit possibilities beyond the facticity of its situation. In this short essay I will not provide a detailed exposition of Sartre's theory of the imagination. Rather, I provide the basis of an interpretation of this theory that emphasizes the role that the past plays in imaginative consciousness.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3167/ssi.2011.170202
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101602
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): Betori Giuseppe
Abstract: Ibidem, p. xv.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707132
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101610
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Kurz William S.
Abstract: Fitzmyer,
Luke I-IX, 47-51, esp. 48.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707320
Journal Title: Biblica
Publisher: Pontificio Instituto Biblico
Issue: i40101612
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Chirichigno G. C.
Abstract: U. Cassuto, Genesis. Part I (Jerusalem 1961) 213-216,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42707366
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro ceskou literaturu AV CR
Issue: i40101658
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Suchomel Milan
Abstract: The critical work of F. X. Šalda is from its beginnings full of the pathos of the arrival of the new poetry. The vision, comporting entirely with the principies of symbolisim, is characterized as the idea of synthesis of knowledge: ‘to abstract the Eternal, Unified, and Absolute from the secondary, accidental, relative, temporally and spatially limited, and the divided'. The analytical spirit of science and scholarship, and also of art, aroused a general scepticism and a need for a turnaround. It brought the knowledge that synthesis is the essence of art. It is from there, that Šalda derived his principies of criticism. Analysis, he argued, is justified to the extent that it is governed by a total view. The dark centre of art is accessible to criticism only at the price of criticism itself becoming art, and its essential instrument is intuition. The actual work of the critic begins when the he no longer knows where to go. He must rise above the insignificance of mere facts and look at the world from his own point of view. His work is complementary to the work of the artist, and the nature of art means that self-identification is the lot of the critic. Art cannot be explained causually; the connection between what is near and the suspected contexts, that is to say insight into the mystery of meaning, is the prerequisite of aesthetic contemplation. The author is not bound by objectivity towards the perceived world; the reader is not bound by the objectivity of the author's perceived world, is not limited by the author's intentions. The very action of synthesis is a dynamic reference and another possibility of being. The project of synthesism is a vision of thorough, concrete symbolism; both the expansion of consciousness and the indivisibility of the individual from the rest of the world are included in this postulated unity.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42708256
Journal Title: Politique étrangère
Publisher: Institut Français des Relations Internationales
Issue: i40102093
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Amghar Samir
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, dans L'ldéologie et l'Utopie, op. cit. [17].
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42715626
Journal Title: Philippine Studies
Publisher: Ateneo de Manila
Issue: i40102324
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): ROCHE JOSEPH L.
Abstract: "L'Augustinisme de Maurice Blon-
del," Sciences Ecclésiastiques, XIV (1962), pp. 180-81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42719916
Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103171
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Guisan Catherine
Abstract: Lily Gardner Feldman, Banchoff and Smith, Legitimacy and the European
Union cit., 66-90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42740404
Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103193
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): CORSETTI RITA
Abstract: Remo Cantoni, "La filosofia di Karl Jaspers", prefazione a Jaspers, La bomba atomica e il destino dell'uomo, cit.,
pp. XI-XXIV.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42741023
Journal Title: Rivista di Studi Politici Internazionali
Publisher: Università di Roma Sapienza
Issue: i40103201
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): KHADER BICHARA
Abstract: Achar, Op. cit., p. 431.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42741240
Journal Title: The Journal of Education
Publisher: Boston University School of Education
Issue: i40104951
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Greene Maxine
Abstract: Recent events indicate that self-interest and technicism today triumph over social consciousness; yet educators naturally turn to the humanities as an antidote to positivism and technical domination, even as humanities scholars are increasingly defensive, struggling to hold on to their enclaves. For those committed to the practice of freedom in education the humanities are of vital interest, particularly when they are defined as works that are articulations of some human consciousness thrusting into the world. After giving examples of works that may be classified as "humanities" according to this definition, the following essay discusses teaching situations and literary works which might free persons for awareness of human possibility, for authentic talk and widening perspectives. The humanities must be presented not as monuments to be revered but as works to be shared by students and applied to their own life situations. Students grounded in their "everydayness" can be awakened by Freiré's dialogical method, awakened to crítical consciousness and to the possibility of praxis in a world they share.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42772897
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Vincent Duclert, L'Avenir de l'histoire, Paris, Armand
Colin, 2010, p. 4-6 et 29.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0013
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Haipeng Zhang, « Bingdian Fukan kanwen
pipan Yuan Weishi : Zhang Haipeng, Fan di fan fengjian
shi jindai Zhongguo lishi de zhuti » (Premier numéro après
la reparution de Bingdian à la suite de l'article de Weishi
Yuan : l'anti-impérialisme et l'anti-féodalisme sont les sujets
de la Chine moderne) 2006, http://blog.chinesenewsnet.
com/?p=8072&cp=1 (28 février 2006).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0026
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Dosse François
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, « Propos d'un philosophe », dans Ecrire
l'histoire du temps présent : études en hommage à François Bédarida,
Paris, CNRS éditions, 1993, p. 35-41, p. 39 (actes de la jour-
née d'étude de l'Institut d'histoire du temps présent, 14 mai
1992).
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0133
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Bantigny Ludivine
Abstract: Daniel et Gabriel Cohn-Bendit, Le Gauchisme : remède à la
maladie sénile du communisme, Paris, Éd. du Seuil, 1968, p. 128.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0215
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104981
Date: 3 1, 2013
Author(s): Charle Christophe
Abstract: Christophe Charle et Jacques Vergé, Histoire
des universités, xii
-xxi
siècles, Paris, PUF, « Quadrige », 2012.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/vin.117.0231
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40104982
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Bohnekamp Dorothea
Abstract: Congrès juif mondial entre 2005 et 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42773508
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40105000
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Fouéré Marie-Aude
Abstract: Jean Copans, « Intellectuels visibles, intellectuels invisi-
bles », Politique africaine, 51, 1993, p. 7-25.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/ving.118.0061
Journal Title: Revue d'Histoire littéraire de la France
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40106353
Date: 6 1, 2013
Author(s): Chung Jy-Yong
Abstract: À Louise Colet, 31 janvier 1852, ibidem, t. II, p. 41.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.3917/rhlf.132.0311
Journal Title: French Politics, Culture & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40108178
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Fette Julie
Abstract: In societies coming to terms with historical injustices, public apology has recently emerged as a potent trend. This is particularly true of France, where the state served as a catalyst for a wave of public apologies for acts of intolerance committed during the Second World War. Following Jacques Chirac's 1995 official apology for Vichy's anti-Semitic policies, various groups in civil society publicly atoned for their particular Vichy roles in discrimination against Jews: the medical profession, the law bar, the Catholic Church, and the police. How does public apology, as distinct from court trials, historical commissions, and reparations, affect contemporary France's reconciliation with its past? This article also analyzes how apologizing for Vichy has created demand for an official French apology for the Algerian War. By 2006, the politics of memory in French society decidedly shifted attention from Vichy to post-colonialism: in both cases, the apology turn imposes new dynamics of remembering and forgetting.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42843550
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i40108570
Date: 9 1, 1978
Author(s): Wright Edmond
Abstract: The central point is that Schutz's idealization of reciprocity, the matching of subjective intentions in the public world of interactive behaviour, necessarily involves agents in an ironic process. This is largely because, since they are taking so much for granted, they cannot be aware of what is latent in the intentional perspectives of their social partners. In bringing out the pattern of the irony of inter subjective dialectic, the argument makes plain the importance of pretence as a vital concept in philosophy, sociology and hermeneutics. The article closes with a criticism of naive optimism among purveyors of dialectic, recommending a proper concern with the irreconcilables of tragedy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42852032
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108628
Date: 8 1, 1988
Author(s): Thompson John B.
Abstract: This paper argues that the analysis of culture and mass communication should be regarded as central concerns of sociology and social theory. It develops a framework for the analysis of culture and shows how this framework can be applied to the study of mass communication. Focusing on the medium of television, the paper highlights some of the distinctive characteristics of mass communication and examines some of the factors involved in the production, construction and reception of media messages. It is argued that this approach enables the analyst to pose questions concerning the ideological character of mass communication in a new and more fruitful way.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42854459
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108642
Date: 2 1, 1993
Author(s): Erben Michael
Abstract: The study of biography as an exercise in sociology has been under-used. The early proponents of a sociology of biography -most notably Wilhelm Dilthey -have not had their work greatly developed. However, with the emergence of Paul Ricoeur's work on the nature of narrativity, time and interpretation, plus the developing influence of the work of others, a hermeneutics of biography has now begun. This paper explores this development, and, further, briefly examines two highly important biographies to explore how theoretical injunction is matched by empirical practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855037
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: British Sociological Association Publications Limited
Issue: i40108657
Date: 5 1, 1996
Author(s): Hay Colin
Abstract: The winter of discontent continues to exert a powerful hold over the British political imaginary. It acts as a discursive key to a collective mythology seemingly appealed to, and conjured, in each wave of industrial unrest, in each hint of political turmoil and, until recently, whenever the election of a Labour Government looked credible. In this paper I consider the rhetorical strategies and linguistic devices deployed by the tabloid media in the narration of the events of the winter of 1978-79. I argue for an interpretation of the winter of discontent as a moment of state crisis. By crisis however I do not refer to the mere accumulation of contradictions but rather to a moment of transition, a moment of decisive intervention. Within such a framework, the winter of discontent emerges as a strategic moment in the transformation of the British state, and perhaps the key moment in the pre-history of Thatcherism. For, as I hope to demonstrate, the initial appeal of the New Right was premised upon its ability to offer a convincing construction of the winter of discontent as symptomatic of a more fundamental crisis of the state. In such a moment of crisis, a particular type of decisive intervention was called for. In this discursive construction of crisis the New Right proved itself capable of changing, if not the hearts and minds of the electorate, then certainly the predominant perceptions of the political context. It recruited subjects to its vision of the necessary response to the crisis of a monolithic state besieged by the trade unions. This was perhaps the only truly hegemonic moment of Thatcherism. It occurred well before Mrs Thatcher entered Number 10. It is thus not surprising that one of the most enduring and distinctive legacies of Thatcherism has been the new political lexicon of crisis, siege and subterfuge born of the winter of discontent.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42855681
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108686
Date: 8 1, 2003
Author(s): Langdridge Darren
Abstract: The public/private debate has not been a major feature in recent sociological theory. However; Bailey (2000) has argued for a renewed sociological research programme to focus on the sociological private. He outlines three dimensions of this: intimate relationships, the self and the unconscious. This article seeks to address two of these dimensions, the production of self-theories and unconscious disavowal. We extend this theorizing to account for the experience of sexual engagement present a discourse analysis of the diaries of the comedian and actor Kenneth Williams (1928-1988). Drawing principally on the thought of Merleau-Ponty (1962) we argue that our analysis demonstrates the importance of a prereflective engagement with the social world that is then reflected on in internal dialogue. We show how discourse analysis may be used to demonstrate the discursive production of a self-theory and the role of such a self-theory in the disavowal of the principal's pre-reflective engagement with others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856543
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108701
Date: 8 1, 2006
Author(s): Adamson Kay
Abstract: In July 2004, a young woman claimed that she had been attacked on the Paris urban railway system by four Maghrebins and two Africans and that the discovery that she might be Jewish had intensified the character of the attack. For a number of days, the French media were dominated by the case and leading politicians condemned it. The events drew attention to a number of issues concerning culture and identity in contemporary France and the role played in constituting this identity of history and memory. However, it also displayed how the constitution of identity is a selective process in which different elements may be dealt with, either in different ways or omitted altogether. This article explores how in attempting to come to terms with the legacies of anti-Semitism, other areas of history and memory have been neglected, including the legacy of France's colonial empire, and, in particular, her relationship with Algeria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856886
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108703
Date: 12 1, 2006
Author(s): Clarke Simon
Abstract: Over the past few years there has been an increasing interest in the use of psychoanalytic ideas within a sociological framework These ideas have been largely developed within sociological theory rather than practice. There does, however, seem to be a new frame of thought and practice emerging which we could term psycho-social studies, perhaps even a new discipline in its own right In this article I will discuss the development of the use of psychoanalytic ideas around sociological issues, explore some of the tensions that have arisen and evaluate the implications for methodological practice.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42856940
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108723
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Cochrane James R.
Abstract: People think about health and illness in multifaceted ways, evidencing a conceptual complexity that corresponds to equally complex behaviours in relation to a diversity of healing practices. Stimulated by fieldwork in Lesotho and elsewhere, and engaging principally with Jürgen Habermas, we set out to introduce, explain and develop a conceptual innovation: healthworld. We argue that this notion describes and provides a key analytical tool for the field of health in its social context; a tool that can explain the empirical complexity of health beliefs (importantly, including religion) and behaviours, thereby illuminating possibilities for improving health practice and outcomes. Framed in relation to Habermas's notion of lifeworld, the healthworld is identified as a distinctive 'region' of the lifeworld defined by a particular telos – that of comprehensive well-being, a lifeworld without dysfunction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857396
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108742
Date: 5 1, 1999
Author(s): Newton Tim
Abstract: This paper links the ideas of Norbert Elias to the conceptualisation of power and subjectivity that has developed in British industrial and organisational (I/O) sociology. It examines the relevance of power and subjectivity to British I/O sociology and reviews theoretical positions that have influenced this field. Elias's work is examined in some detail, exploring his approach to power, agency, the self, individualisation and discourse. His work is then applied to a re-examination of the perspectives on power and subjectivity contained within labour process, Foucauldian and actor network theory. The paper attempts to show how Elias's work re-frames our understanding of power and subjectivity through a stress on interdependencies and their asymmetry, the 'networked' nature of agency, and the interwoven form of human and socio-political development. It argues that Eliasian analysis maintains the critical concern with power asymmetries witnessed in labour process theory, yet avoids some of the difficulties in conceptualisation of power and subjectivity that are apparent in labour process, Foucauldian work and actor network theory. Elias's work also illustrates the need for a lengthier historical perspective than is typically observed in industrial and organisational sociology, and points to the value of studies which look beyond the context of the workplace. Finally, attention is paid to some of the limitations of Elias's work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857938
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40108744
Date: 11 1, 1999
Author(s): May Tim
Abstract: Following debates within this journal regarding the absence of adequate studies of resistance in the contemporary fields of industrial sociology and organisational behaviour, this paper seeks to understand its reasons and consequences. Through an examination of the history of approaches to the study of power and resistance at work, the grounds for this debate are considered and illuminated. The paper then suggests how this debate might be taken forward through developing the ideas of tactics and strategies and episodic and dispositional power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42857998
Journal Title: Sociology
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40108755
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Prior Lindsay
Abstract: This article is concerned with the ways in which people who work in and use a cancer genetics clinic in the UK talk about the 'gene for cancer'. By conceptualizing such a gene as a boundary object, and using empirical data derived from clinic consultations, observations in a genetics laboratory and interviews with patients, the author seeks to illustrate how the various parties involved adopt different discursive strategies to appropriate, describe and understand what is apparently the 'same' thing. The consequent focus on the ways in which the rhetorical and syntactical features of lay and professional talk interlink and diverge illustrates not merely how our contemporary knowledge of genes and genetics is structured, but also how different publics position themselves with respect to the biochemistry of life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42858282
Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394451
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Rigney James
Abstract: Anne
Rigney, The Rhetoric of Historical Represen-
tation: Three Narrative Histories of the French
Revolution (Cambridge, 1990)
Rigney
The Rhetoric of Historical Representation: Three Narrative Histories of the French Revolution
1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286169
Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: i394465
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): White James
Abstract: L. S.
Kramer, 'Literature, criticism, and historical imagi-
nation: the literary challenge of Hayden White and
Dominick LaCapra', in Hunt (ed.), New Cultural
History, op. cit., 97-128
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4286515
Journal Title: Études/Inuit/Studies
Publisher: Groupe d'Études Inuit et Circumpolaires (GÉTIC) et I'Association Inuksiutiit katimajiit inc.
Issue: i40109151
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Trudel François
Abstract: Trudel 1989b
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42869936
Journal Title: Social History
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i394488
Date: 11 1, 1973
Author(s): Marx John
Abstract: Marx, Surveys from
Exile. Political Writings, vol. 2, ed. D. Fernbach
(Harmondsworth, 1973), 146
Marx
146
2
Surveys from Exile. Political Writings
1973
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4287263
Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110313
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Taylor Carolyn
Abstract: This study suggests that political order within families is manifested in and constructed through family narrative activity. The study is based on a corpus of 100 family dinner narratives of two-parent American families. Our findings show that narrative roles (introducer, protagonist, primary recipient, problematizer of protagonists or other co-narrators, problematizee) differ in the control they exert and in their distribution across family members. Parents, especially mothers, tended to introduce narratives, thereby controlling narrative topic and timing. Children were the most frequent protagonists yet they rarely introduced narratives about themselves and were rarely ratified as preferred recipients of others' narratives. Fathers tended to be primary recipients, often orchestrated through mothers' introductions. Not coincidentally, fathers were also the dominant problematizers of family-member protagonists/co-narrators, assuming a panopticon-like role. Children sometimes resisted family narrative activity, suggesting a certain awareness of the politics of narrative and its potential to expose them as objects of scrutiny.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42887801
Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110317
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Drury John
Abstract: This paper examines reasoning and rhetoric about economic recession in selected newspapers. This is an interesting topic for discourse analysis because it is a site of argumentation. We begin by asking: (1) epistemological questions (e.g. What evidential basis is drawn on in rhetoric about recession?) and then (2) ontological questions (e.g. How is recession pictured? and How is recession coordinated with the social world?). We examine the management of evidence and definitions concerning whether or not there is a recession. We then examine the entities invoked, showing how (a) a range of metaphors depict the recession as either an uncontrollable agent or as a controllable thing; and (b) rhetorical strategies used by both critics and supporters of the government collude in picturing the economy as a realm abstracted from social life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42887856
Journal Title: Discourse & Society
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40110418
Date: 3 1, 2008
Author(s): ANDERSSON KJERSTIN
Abstract: In this article, a young man's narratives of violence are analysed, and a culturally shared storyline is identified as the basis of these narratives. It is argued that the stories are organized so as to construct a preferred self-presentation. One strategy to achieve this is to establish boundaries for what type of violence to use, whom to fight, where and for what reasons. I also argue that the narratives are structured to avoid being categorized as either victim or perpetrator, although both categories are drawn upon. Issues of masculinity are made relevant through categorization of the characters in the narrative, and positions are made available. Different masculine categories such as the hero/villain/non-man become relevant in the analysis. Different gendered positions are used in negotiating a masculine identity around narratives of and through telling about violence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42889187
Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110622
Date: 9 1, 1989
Author(s): Elson John S.
Abstract: supra notes 62, 72, 76, 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42893082
Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110670
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Morissette Yves-Marie
Abstract: [1994] 2 S.C.R. 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42893738
Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110909
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Gillers Stephen
Abstract: Robert B. McKay, The Lawyer in the Year 2000: Three Views, 25 Ala. L.
Rev. (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897913
Journal Title: Journal of Legal Education
Publisher: Association of American Law Schools
Issue: i40110912
Date: 12 1, 1984
Author(s): Murray James E.
Abstract: George P. Fletcher, Fairness and Utility in Tort Theory, 85 Harv. L. Rev. 571-73 (1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42897983
Journal Title: Revue d'économie financière
Publisher: Association d'Economie Financière
Issue: i40111222
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Thiveaud Jean-Marie
Abstract: E. Bloch, Le
Principe Espérance, t.II, Paris, Gallimard, 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42903160
Journal Title: Revue d'économie financière
Publisher: Association d'Economie Financière
Issue: i40111230
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): Elliet Guillaume
Abstract: Cass. civ. 1
, 5 novembre 1991, bull. civ. I, n° 297, p. 195 et JCP 92, ed. E, II, 255,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42903385
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i40113297
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Holdrege Barbara A.
Abstract: Jeffery, The Qur'ân as Scripture, pp. 75-78,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42942896
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: University of Nebraska Press
Issue: i40113314
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Astell Ann W.
Abstract: Weil, Waiting for God, p. 57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42943639
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Issue: i40113339
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Frunzâ Sandu
Abstract: "Finkielkraut, Au nom de l'autre, p. 11.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42944684
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Purdue University Press
Issue: i40113344
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Katz Claire
Abstract: S. Heschel, ed., Moral Grandeur, p. viii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42944908
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113378
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Parks Ward
Abstract: Defined as "an act of cognition that schematizes two semantic fields and simultaneously effects and denies their rapprochement," metaphor as it appears in Lycidas is subdivided into three types, quantitatively distinguished. Ornamental metaphor is the minimal unit, consisting of a single metaphoric equation. Structural metaphors operate over larger poetic blocks, typically the extended clause. Governing the entire poem, the Lycidas/King metaphor bridges the real and fictitious universes in a metaphoric act characteristic of the pastoral elegy genre. Cutting across this three-tiered classification scheme is another typology based on metaphoric conjunction among the semantic features Human/Non-Human and Abstract/Physical. Accompanying tables present the results of the analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945435
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113399
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Haney David P.
Abstract: In the apostrophe to "Imagination" in The Prelude, Book 6, a multileveled usurpation occurs which challenges the rhetorical foundation of Wordsworth's poem. The force of will exhibited in this passage is a paradoxical combination of actively exerted power and effortlessness, forced interruption and passively suffered usurpation, in which both the agent and the object of usurpation are put into question. The essential trope in this gesture is the anomalous figure of catachresis, whose uneasy place in eighteenth-century rhetorical classifications resulted from its combination of absolute propriety and absolute impropriety. For Wordsworth, this trope reveals the paradoxical connection between the powerful ground of the imagination's proper being and the abyss of loss and impropriety which threatens the imaginative will.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945760
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113403
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Ronen Ruth
Abstract: Temporal concepts such as "order," "chronology," "narrative present," and "exposition" are extensively used in narrative theory. Accepted notions of time can contribute to our understanding of these concepts and can allow us to question their "temporal" meaning in the context of fictional narrative. Fictional time may be thought of as a system of relations unique to the fictional world after real time. Theories of narrative tend to adopt an essentialist interpretation of temporal concepts and to ignore the ontological divergence between time in fiction and time in reality. As a result, concepts such as "exposition" or "present" appear which appear to carry a direct "temporal" meaning, actually function in a way that indicates the nature of time in fiction. In fiction, temporal divisions and time segmentations do not just construct a temporal structure; they also mark degrees of factuality in the fictional world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945827
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113407
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Meneses Paulo
Abstract: Fictionality is an immanent—though not exclusive—quality in literary texts, whatever their mode or genre. However, the property of fictionality is generally not mentioned in connection with lyric literary texts. Possible-worlds semantics helps us to envisage lyric texts as capable of generating fictional worlds: that is, poetic fictional worlds. Such worlds have a special character due to the texture constructing them. Some aspects of this uniqueness may be seen in the poetic world of Martin Codax, a thirteenth-century Galician jongleur.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945909
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113412
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): Stampfl Barry
Abstract: Narratology may be thought of as a complicated system of conceptual filters that enact a severe formalist reduction upon the corpus of what may be thought and said about storytelling. According to Shlomith Rimmon-Kenan, this reductiveness needs to be expanded in order to attend more to language. One way of answering to her reformist prescription is a turn to the study of linguistic surface structure organized as a meditation on the metaphor of the filter. For Seymour Chatman this metaphor designates a character through whom a narrator elects to tell a story. For Max Black, "filter" is a trope for metaphoric process. Examining these senses of the filter in Henry James's short story "The Beast in the Jungle" leads to emphasis upon negations and belief qualifiers. In James's story, both turn out to be invaded by the logic of Freudian negation, itself a type of intrapsychic filtration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42945988
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113416
Date: 10 1, 1993
Author(s): Burgan Mary
Abstract: Despite recent critical denigrations of the representation of temporality as a defining interest in narrative, it is important to reappraise the epiphany as a feature of the short stories of "founding" modernist women writers like Virginia Woolf and Katherine Mansfield. Nevertheless, the association of the epiphanic story with "feminine" writing drove a writer like Doris Lessing to reject the epiphany as an organizing principle in her stories; she chose, instead, the more fabular, allegorical model of a writer like D. H. Lawrence. Finally, however, Lessing, like other women writers of the short story, kept in touch with the intuition of revelation in moments of being whose power act not only as organizers of narrative but also as significations of a kind of feminine sensory apprehension of temporality. This discursive implementation of the moment as the center of modernist women writers' short fiction may be recuperated so as to preserve their achievements from the preference for a decentered écriture féminine.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946058
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113423
Date: 7 1, 1987
Author(s): van Alphen Ernst
Abstract: The difference between literal and figurative language becomes evident by comparing the Dutch novel The Journey of the Customs Officer to Bentheim (1983) by Willem Brakman with Proust's Remembrance of Things Past. Certain passages in the Dutch novel can be read either as literal or as metaphorical descriptions. The reader having a reading attitude which activates that frame of "reality" which is strictly separated from the frame of reference called "fiction and representation" will read crucial passages in this novel figuratively. The reader for whom fiction and reality are inseparable and situated on the same ontological level will read them literally. Both reading attitudes, the modernist aqd postmodernist ones, are personified in the two main characters of the novel. This twofold reading implies a critique of Hrushovski's descriptive method for the analysis of metaphor which is used throughout this paper. If the position of frames of reference is undefined in his theory, in his interpretive practice it becomes clear that for him frames of reference are situated in the text. Yet The Journey's ambiguity as to whether one or two frames is applicable undermines this position. It is up to the reader to differentiate or not hierarchically between reality and fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946147
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113430
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Fludernik Monika
Abstract: The narratological category "person" needs to be replaced by a different conceptual framework. The traditional distinctions between narrative levels and between story and discourse are inadequate to an explanation of much postmodernist writing. Classic narratological categories correlate with a realist understanding of story and with a realist conceptualization of story telling with some postmodernist techniques of writing, such as second-person fiction, refusing to play by such conceptualizations. Gabriel Josipovici's Contre-jour is an instance of a radical deconstruction of realist parameters. Realist recuperations or naturalizations of intractable writing have to be evaluated as readings against the anti-mimetic grain of such texts, and the possibility of such narrative recuperation does not provide evidence for the reinstatement of traditional narratological distinctions. The failing of current narratology to account for second-person narrative is due to the inapplicability of traditional narratological categories, a break-down that is motivated by the ideological commitments of much postmodernist, and especially second-person, fiction since these deliberately question realistic frames of cognition and story understanding.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946261
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113434
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Wright Terence R.
Abstract: A survey of recent books on Reader-Response, broadly defined as any literary theory that investigates the process of reading. This includes not only books by Norman Holland, Stanley Fish, and Wolfgang Iser, long regarded as central figures in the area of Reader-Response, but also discussions of the contribution to this area made by Jacques Derrida and Mikhail Bakhtin. A widespread reaction is observed against the impersonality of much literary theory and the dangers of reducing reading to a science, but alternative models that stress the therapeutic, self-enhancing, or playful elements in reading are also exposed to critical analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946310
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Northern Illinois University
Issue: i40113439
Date: 10 1, 1997
Author(s): Mosher, Harold F.
Abstract: Applied to Chaucer's Miller's Tale, A. J. Greimas's various analytic systems—the structure of roles or acteurs, the plots of struggle and exchange of objects, and the semiotic square—reveal Alison as an unchanging, passive object who is passed from her husband John to her lover Nicholas (and potentially to another lover, Absolon). But the application of Claude Bremond's more dynamic functional model reveals not only the story's symmetrical paradigms of seduction, retribution, and dissimulation but also the importance of the last of these isotopies and, above all, the central activity of Alison as seducer, dissimulator, and degrader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42946385
Journal Title: Bibliothèque de l’École des chartes
Publisher: Société de l'École des Chartes
Issue: i40114324
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): SARMANT Thierry
Abstract: Ibid., p. 131, 138-139.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42957733
Journal Title: The Cambridge Quarterly
Publisher: Oxford Unversity Press
Issue: i40115103
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Cain Sarah
Abstract: Eliot, Inventions of the March Hare, p. 71.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42967949
Journal Title: The Cambridge Quarterly
Publisher: Oxford Unversity Press
Issue: i40115114
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Regard Frédéric
Abstract: H.-G. Gadamer, Vérité et méthode: les grandes lignes d'une herméneutique philosophique
(1960; Paris 1990) p. 87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968080
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115197
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Emery-Hellwig Eric
Abstract: Les Mathématiques et la réalité (Vol. 29, 1975; p. 34).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42968906
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115211
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Ricoeur Paul
Abstract: Beginning with the paradoxical fact of the plurality of philosophical systems, the irrationality of this situation is examined, first, from the point of view of two solutions — the Hegelian solution and that which dissolves the paradox by denying that systems are exclusive of one another — judged to be inadequate; and then from the viewpoint of the contrast between the claims of genuine philosophy and its actual historical practice. The idea of system is examined from the perspective of Spinoza's Ethics and, finally, M. Gueroult's idéalisme intégral serves as a guide in exploring the result of subordinating the historical features of philosophical activity to its systematic features. Partant du fait paradoxal de la pluralité des systèmes philosophiques, l'auteur examine l'irrationalité de cette situation d'abord du point de vue de deux solutions — celle de Hegel et celle qui résoud le paradoxe en niant que les systèmes s'excluent mutuellement — solutions qui sont jugées inadéquates; puis du point de vue du contraste entre la véritable philosophie et sa pratique historique effective. L'idée de système est examinée dans la perspective de l'éthique de Spinoza et, enfin, l'idéalisme intégral de M. Gueroult sert de guide pour explorer les conséquences d'une subordination des aspects historiques de l'activité philosophique à ses aspects systématiques. Angesichts der paradoxen Situation der Pluralität von philosophischen Systemen wird die Irrationalität dieser Situation untersucht: zunächst vom Gesichtspunkt zweier Lösungen — nämlich der Lösung Hegels und derjenigen die darin besteht, die Unvereinbarkeit der Systeme zu leugnen —, die beide als inadäquat verworfen werden; dann von einem Standpunkt aus, der zwischen den Ansprüchen echter Philosophie und deren tatsächlicher historischer Praxis unterscheidet. Der Begriff des Systems wird aus der Perspektive von Spinozas Ethik untersucht und schliesslich wird M. Gueroults integraler Idealismus als Führer verwendet, um das Ergebnis einer Unterwerfung der historischen Züge philosophischer Tätigkeit unter ihre systematischen Züge zu durchleuchten.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969055
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115221
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Tonoiu Vasile
Abstract: La personnalité, l'activité et l'œuvre de Gonseth peuvent être interprétés organiquement dans une instructive pédagogie de dialogue. L'auteur évoque a) la structure dialogale intime de Gonseth, b) les dialogues peu fructueux qu'il a entretenus avec le Cercle de Vienne, puis lors des Entretiens de Zurich, c) les dialogues qu'il a imaginés dans Les mathématiques et la réalité entre trois personnages: Parfait, Sceptique et Idoine, auxquels vient s'ajouter à la fin le Nouvel Idoine, d) les rencontres avec les néo-scolastiques à Rome, e) la «doctrine» explicite du dialogue exposée dans La loi du dialogue. L'auteur s'interroge aussi sur les conditions d'un dialogue fécond et sur les obstacles qui peuvent s'y opposer, (en particulier: l'incompatibilité des référentiels). Gonseth the man, his life and his work can be interpreted organically in an instructive account of dialogue. The author treats the following topics: a) Gonseth's intimate dialogical structure, b) the fruitless dialogues he had with the Vienna Circle and then at the Entretiens de Zurich, c) his imaginary dialogues in Les mathématiques et la réalité between the characters Perfect, Sceptic and Appropriate, and finally New Appropriate, d) his contacts with neo-scholastics at Rome, e) the explicit 'doctrine' of dialogue presented in La loi du dialogue. The article is also concerned with conditions for a fruitful dialogue and with obstacles that can stand in the way (in particular, the incompatibility of reference systems). Die Persönlichkeit, die Aktivitäten und das Werk Gonseths können im Rahmen einer lehrreichen Pädagogik des Dialogs einheitlich interpretiert werden. Der Autor erörtert a) die intime Dialogstruktur Gonseths; b) die wenig fruchtbaren Dialoge, die er mit dem Wiener Kreis und während der Zürcher Gespräche führte; c) die Dialoge dreier Figuren, die er in Les mathématiques et la réalité in Szene gesetzt hat: Perfekt, Skeptiker und Geeignet, zu denen sich am Schluss der Neue Geeignete hinzugesellt; d) die Begegnungen mit den Neo-Scholastikern in Rom; e) die explizite «Doktrin» des Dialogs, die in La loi du dialogue dargelegt ist. Der Aufsatz stellt auch die Frage nach den Bedingungen eines befruchtenden Dialogs und nach den Hindernissen, die sich ihm entgegenstellen können (im besonderen: die Inkompatibilität der Bezugsrahmen).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969165
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115257
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): BLACK Max
Abstract: 1. A. Richards, 92.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42969757
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40115286
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Christoff Daniel
Abstract: L'Origine de la
géométrie (pour la trad., cf. note 1). Original in RIP 1939.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/42970516
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116683
Date: 4 1, 1999
Author(s): Rueff Martin
Abstract: M. Baxandall, "Painting and Experience in Fifteenth Century
Italy. A primer in the social History of Pictorial style, Oxford, Oxford University
Press, 1972, trad, française, Y. Delsault, L'œil du Quattrocento. L'usage de la peinture
dans l'Italie de la Renaissance, Paris, Gallimard, 1985 («Bibliothèque Illustrée des
Histoires»).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016070
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116704
Date: 10 1, 2009
Author(s): Sadkowski Piotr
Abstract: D. Garand, L'aller-retour du foyer, in F. Marcato-Falzoni (sous la direc-
tion de), Mythes et mythologies des origines dans la littérature québécoise, Bologna,
Clueb, 1994, pp. 33-72.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016516
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116712
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Guérin Jeanyves
Abstract: Camus,
l'Islam et les Arabes, in C. Mayaux (dir.), Ecrivains et intellectuels face au monde
arabe, Paris, Champion, 2011, pp. 15-27.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016665
Journal Title: Dialectica
Publisher: Blackwell-Wiley Publishing
Issue: i40116714
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Sandu Gabriel
Abstract: I.A. Richards, Speculative Instruments, University of Chicago Press, 1955,
P. 33.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016699
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116725
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Plamondon Jean-François
Abstract: J.-M. Schaeffer, Le Récit fictif, in J. Bessière, Études romanesques 2, Paris,
Lettres modernes, 1994, p. 51.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016937
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Università di Bologna
Issue: i40116725
Date: 4 1, 2007
Author(s): Cooreman Gaëlle
Abstract: Ibid., p. 267.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43016938
Journal Title: AAA: Arbeiten aus Anglistik und Amerikanistik
Publisher: Institut für Anglistik, Universität Graz
Issue: i40117059
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Russell
Abstract: Heiner Keupp, Thomas Ahbe, Wolfgang
Gmür, Renate Höfe, Beate Mitzscherlich, Wolfgang Kraus & Florian Straus, Identitäts-
konstruktionen: Das Patchwork der Identitäten in der Spätmoderne (Reinbek bei Hamburg:
Rowohlt, 1999).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43025718
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre National des Lettres et du CNRS
Issue: i40117102
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): GRÄSSLIN Matthias
Abstract: Actes de la Recherche en sciences sociales, n° 90, « La Souffrance »,
déc. 1991.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43026849
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre National du Livre et du Centre de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i40117109
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): BOUCHERON Patrick
Abstract: Ibid., p. 645.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43027001
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre national du livre et du Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i40117130
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): Lagorsse Marc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, La mémoire, l'histoire, l'oubli, Paris, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43027423
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes (Paris 8, Saint-Denis) soutenue par l'Institut des Sciences Humaines et Sociales du CNRS
Issue: i40117138
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): COURROUX Pierre
Abstract: G. Kurth, La Cité de Liège au Moyen Âge, Bruxelles, 1910, t. I, p. XXVII-XXVIII.
Link: external-fulltext-any', 'an external site', 'http://dx.doi.org/10.4000/medievales.7004
Journal Title: Médiévales
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de Vincennes-Paris VIII avec le concours du Centre National du Livre et du Centre de la Recherche Scientifique
Issue: i40117146
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): LUCKEN Christopher
Abstract: « L'Œil dans l'oreille. L'histoire ou le monstre de la fable »,
dans L'Histoire dans la littérature, L. Adert et E. Eigenmann éd., Genève, 2000,
p. 37-57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43027739
Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40117181
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Müller Jan-Dirk
Abstract: „Kulturwissenschaft historisch", S. 76 f.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028361
Journal Title: Poetica
Publisher: Wilhelm Fink GmbH & Co. Verlags-KG
Issue: i40117194
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bleumer Hartmut
Abstract: Joseph Bernhart. Mit einem Vorwort von Ernst Ludwig Grasmück, Frankfurt
a. M.: Insel-Verlag, 1998, XI, 25, 32-30, 39, S. 653-667.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43028513
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117272
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Senici Emanuele
Abstract: http://www. parterre.
com.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029593
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117280
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Carone Angela
Abstract: cit. in Edler, Schumann e il suo tempo cit., p. 154.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43029779
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117307
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Nattiez Jean-Jacques
Abstract: M. Baroni - R. Dalmonte - C. Jacoboni, Le regole della musica. Indagine sui mec-
canismi della comunicazione, Torino, EDT, 1999.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030373
Journal Title: Il Saggiatore musicale
Publisher: Leo S. Olschki
Issue: i40117308
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Della Seta Fabrizio
Abstract: Aristotele, Poetica, 1450 a.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43030385
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117424
Date: 3 1, 1961
Author(s): Tilliette Xavier
Abstract: Blondel et la Religion. Essai critique sur la « Lettre » de 1896.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43031978
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117427
Date: 3 1, 1962
Author(s): ROBERT Jean-Dominique
Abstract: Journées de rencontres de la
Sarte-Huy, en 1960, (Publié chez Casterman, 1961.)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43032039
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117480
Date: 6 1, 1967
Author(s): Le Blond J.-M.
Abstract: Dia Mystik und das Wort,
p. 399
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43032887
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117499
Date: 6 1, 1972
Author(s): VIDAL Jacques
Abstract: Ainsi parlait Zarathoustra, éd. bilingue, Paris, 1969, I, p. 179.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033428
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117511
Date: 3 1, 1976
Author(s): de RAYMOND Jean-François
Abstract: Philosophie première. p. 223.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43033799
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117518
Date: 12 1, 1977
Author(s): BOUILLARD Henri
Abstract: l'Autre, pp. 289-291
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034031
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117522
Date: 6 1, 1979
Author(s): VILLEY Michel
Abstract: La seconda
scolastica nella formazione dél diritto privato moderno p. 65.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034155
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117526
Date: 3 1, 1980
Author(s): MARTINEAU Emmanuel
Abstract: P. Conen, o.e., p. 110 sq.,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034286
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117536
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): VUILLEMIN Jules
Abstract: Stoicorum
veterum fragmenta, I, n°497, p. 111.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43034567
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117549
Date: 12 1, 1985
Author(s): PETIT Jean-Luc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, « The Task of hermeneutics », op. cit., I, 1, p. 54-59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035008
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117551
Date: 6 1, 1986
Author(s): RAULET Gérard
Abstract: Gangl 1984-3
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035068
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117557
Date: 12 1, 1987
Author(s): PORÉE Jérôme
Abstract: Ibid., p. 30-31 / EPh, p. 23.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035275
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne et Ses Fils
Issue: i40117588
Date: 6 1, 1968
Author(s): Sales Michel
Abstract: G. Fessard a repris et développé son analyse dans
un arride des Sciences Ecclésiastiques, Facultés sj, de Montréal, vol. XVIII, fasc.
3 (octobre-décembre 1966), p. 329-357
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43035991
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117594
Date: 3 1, 1974
Author(s): RADNITZKY Gérard
Abstract: (Lübbe, 1972).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036188
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117603
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): PÖGGELER Otto
Abstract: Discours prononcé à Stuttgart lors de la remise du Hegel-Preis à Paul Ricoeur. Comment a évolué Paul Ricœur parmi les courants philosophiques actuels. Lecture given at Stuttgart when Paul Ricœur received the Hegel-Preis. The way of Paul Ricoeur across contemporary philosophies.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036491
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117607
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): GAVIN William J.
Abstract: James, A Pluralistic Universe
(New York, Longmans, Green, and Co., 1909) particulièrement dans les conférences V, VI,
VII et VIII
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036661
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117612
Date: 3 1, 1991
Author(s): BERNIER Rejane
Abstract: Pirlot, 1989: 269-273.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43036798
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117623
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): KIRSCHER Gilbert
Abstract: idem, X,
p. 246
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037028
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117627
Date: 9 1, 1993
Author(s): PORÉE Jérôme
Abstract: Scheler, Le formalisme en éthique, op. cit., p. 49.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037104
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117638
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): VILLELA-PETIT Maria
Abstract: Idées directrices pour une phénoménologie et une philosophie phénoménologique
pure -Livre Troisième, trad. fr. par D. Tiffeneau sous le titre La phénoménologie et les
fondements des sciences, qui reprend le sous-titre allemand, PUF, 1993 (100, 120), trad,
modifiée. Edition allemande: Ideen III, Husserliana V, Nijhoff, La Haye, 1952.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037382
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117652
Date: 12 1, 1998
Author(s): THOUARD Denis
Abstract: Ibid., p. 224.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037732
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117657
Date: 3 1, 2000
Author(s): JERVOLINO DOMENICO
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Seuil, Paris, 1990, p. 365-367.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037798
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117658
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): GREISCH JEAN
Abstract: F. Schleiermacher, « Sendschreiben an Lücke », in: Heinz Bolli (éd.), Schleiermacher-
Auswahl, op. cit., p. 146.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037816
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117658
Date: 6 1, 2000
Author(s): PAREYDT LUC
Abstract: Penser la Bible, op. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037821
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne Éditeur
Issue: i40117659
Date: 9 1, 2000
Author(s): MICHAUD YVES
Abstract: L'article qui suit envisage quelques unes des questions que soulève aujourd'hui la notion d'identité aussi bien individuelle que collective dans le politique. En prenant appui notamment sur les réflexions d'Ernst Tugendhat dans Conscience de soi et autodétermination, je suggère que les préoccupations identitaires et les interrogations autour d'une crise de l'identité gagnent à être abordées à partir de la notion de projection et de détermination de la volonté et des actions plutôt qu'en termes de traits définitionnels statiques. Je suggère aussi que l'étude doit prendre en compte non seulement la situation dans ses dimensions individuelles et collectives mais aussi les conditions de désorientation que produit désormais l'incertitude concernant l'idée de l'humain elle-même. In this paper I consider some of the issues raised by the notion of identity in the political area to-day. Drawing upon the reflections of Ernst Tugendhat in his book Selbstbewusstsein und Selbstbestimmung, I suggest that contemporary problems of identity, individual and collective as well, and namely the idea of a postmodern crisis of political identities, are better understood when we view them in terms of projects and determination of actions. I also suggest we have to take into account not only individual and collective aspects of identity but also our inability to define our idea of what it is to be human.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43037831
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117672
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): TERTULIAN NICOLAS
Abstract: « Le concept d'aliénation chez Heidegger et Lukacs », Archives de
Philosophie, n° 56, juillet-septembre 1993, p. 431-443.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038068
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117682
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): POIREL CHRISTIAN
Abstract: R. Penrose, Shadows of the Mind. A Search in the Missing Science of Consciousness,
Oxford University Press, New York, 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038301
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117686
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): MANIGLIER PATRICE
Abstract: L.S., 1971 : 619
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038371
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117693
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): LETH PALLE
Abstract: F. D. E. Schleiermacher, « Des différentes methodes du traduire », 1813, tr. Antoine
Berman, in Des différentes méthodes du traduire et autre texte, éd. Christian Berner, Paris,
Seuil, « Points », 1999, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038484
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117697
Date: 12 1, 2008
Author(s): DALISSIER MICHEL
Abstract: Motoori Norinaga (本居宣長 1730-
1801) dans s「主体の鏡と物神としてのことば」 shutai no kagami to busshin toshite no
kotoba, Les mots comme miroirs du sujet et idoles,『坂部恵集』 Oeuvres choisies de Sakabe
Megumi, Iwanami, Tokyo, 2007, t. V., p. 23-47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038554
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117699
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): PORÉE JÉRÔME
Abstract: La critique et la conviction, op. cit., p. 235.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038586
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117701
Date: 12 1, 2009
Author(s): GABELLIERI EMMANUEL
Abstract: « Incommensurabilité et médiation: la
triple puissance de la métaphysique » in Penser l'être de l'action. La métaphysique du dernier
Blondel (E. Tourpe dir.), Peeters, Louvain, 2000, p. 101-118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038615
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117703
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): WALDENFELS BERNHARD
Abstract: « Sagen und Gesagtes » in Idiome des Denkens, loc. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038645
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117709
Date: 9 1, 2011
Author(s): ZUMWALD DAVID
Abstract: H. Maldiney, Aîtres de la langue et demeures de la pensée, Lausanne, L'Âge
d'Homme, 1975.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038748
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117711
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): GONTIER THIERRY
Abstract: Atti della Accademia Pontaniana, Napoli-
Supplemento, NS, vol. LIX (2010), p. 277-290.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038785
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117718
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): DASTUR FRANÇOISE
Abstract: Ibid., p. 138.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038896
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117718
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): ESCUDIER ALEXANDRE
Abstract: Ricoeur est explicite sur ce point en SMC A 31 ainsi que dans le texte récapitulatif inti-
tulé « De l'interprétation », in DTA 13-39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038897
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117720
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): MICHEL JOHANN
Abstract: Ibid., p. 45.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038928
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117721
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): HOUSSET EMMANUEL
Abstract: L'intelligence de la pitié, Paris, Cerf (La nuit
surveillée), 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43038955
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): GRONDIN Jean
Abstract: Wahrheit und Methode, p. 323 (Ges. Werke, II, p. 346) ; tr. fr. p. 184.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039435
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Beauchesne
Issue: i40117738
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): PINSON Jean-Claude
Abstract: P. Szondi, « Sur la connaissance philologique », in Poésies et poétiques de la
modernité, édité par Mayotte Bollack, Lille, PUL, 1982.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039437
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117743
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): THOUARD DENIS
Abstract: Das individuelle Allgemeine, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1977,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039534
Journal Title: Archives de Philosophie
Publisher: Centre Sèvres - Facultés jésuites de Paris
Issue: i40117744
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): BENSUSSAN GÉRARD
Abstract: Entre nous, éd. cit., p. 29.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43039550
Journal Title: Brigham Young University Studies
Publisher: Brigham Young University
Issue: i40118023
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Richardson Joseph E.
Abstract: Thomas S. Monson, "True to the Faith," Ensign 36 (May 2006): 18-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43044890
Journal Title: Teorema: Revista Internacional de Filosofía
Publisher: Universidad de Valencia
Issue: i40118091
Date: 1 1, 1981
Author(s): Sansigre Marta
Abstract: Esta discusión crítica se refiere a la cuestión general de la posibilidad y la legitimidad de un enfoque psicológico de la filosofía. A menudo se ha acusado a tal enfoque de reduccionismo psicológico, o de ser un estudio empírico externo sin importancia filosófica real. Se arguye aquí que esas acusaciones son el resultado de (lo que Kierkegaard llamó) "el mito del pensamiento puro"—la tendencia a separar ontológicamente los pensamientos abstractos y el resto de la experiencia humana. Una psicología de la filosofía del futuro que fuese adecuada debería, para librarse de esas acusaciones, proporcionar un argumento en contra de esta herencia platónica.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43046072
Journal Title: Teorema: Revista Internacional de Filosofía
Publisher: Universidad de Valencia
Issue: i40118177
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Radnitzky Gerard
Abstract: Neville, 1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047671
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118195
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Combrink H. J. B.
Abstract: The problem being dealt with in this paper is whether a text has only one legitimate meaning, or no meaning at all. The question becomes even more acute when the contexts of sender and receiver are different. Polysemy and ambiguity are well-known obstacles to communication on the level of the word. The necessity of a general semiotic theory is stressed, and explains the difference between denotation and connotation. The functionality of metaphor in biblical language points to the interpretive value of polyvalency. The impression of unlimited indeterminacy created by the recent emphasis on the active role of the reader, is in a sense misleading since author and reader function as a textual strategy. On the other hand, the actualization of the textual expression as the content of the text by applying the various codes and subcodes, implies a continuous interaction between intensional and extensional approaches. In this respect topics, thematics, ideological and world structures are operative. Since interpretation and application are not to be separated in a pragmatic context, as is the case with the text of the Bible, there inevitably remains the possibility of multiple interpretations due to the interpreting and applying of the text of the Bible in a concrete situation. Yet this interpretation and appropriation should always be done as comprehension of the text and in continuity with the tradition.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047857
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118202
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Joubert S J
Abstract: The linguistic structures of the letter of Jude encode and articulate important religious and social meanings, such as the author and his readers' (and their adversaries') position within their social universe, as well as their beliefs, practices, norms and values. At the same time the letter also affects the circumstances which occasioned its writing, whether to expose and label Jude's opponents as evil intruders who must be exposed of, or to actively maintain the religious purity of the community to which it is addressed. Jude's language is a language of social and religious control.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43047968
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118204
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): VAN DEN HEEVER G A
Abstract: CII 696; 725 11 9-10.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048017
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Smit Dirk J
Abstract: In a first part, the article tells the story of the Hermeneutics Group of the NTSSA. It is a story with three phases. In the first phase, interpretation was seen as more than the application of methods. In the second phase, the active role of the reader became more important. In the third phase, the importance of interpretive communities became more apparent. In a second part, some of the issues resulting from these developments are discussed under the rubric 'Why do we interpret the New Testament?' In a third part, the question is raised whether the Hermeneutics Group (and the NTSSA?) may be entering a new phase in its scholarly activity of dialogue with other reader-communities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048147
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Robinson A S (Rensia)
Abstract: Boesak 1987:126-138.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048155
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118210
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): LYONS CAMPBELL N D
Abstract: Gaonkar (1990:351)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048156
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118227
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Matthew Sam P.
Abstract: Soares-Prabhu (2001, 39).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048499
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118227
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): West Gerald O.
Abstract: Meyers 1988
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048500
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118232
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Ossom-Batsa George
Abstract: Ben Zvi (2000, 40).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048595
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118232
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Thiselton Anthony C.
Abstract: A flood of research literature on 1 Corinthians over the last fifteen years suggests an understanding of this epistle and of the ethos of the church in Corinth that resonates closely with issues in our culture today. The ethos of "secular" Corinth still heavily influenced the church in Corinth. It encouraged attitudes that today we associate with consumerism, postmodernism, and social construction, together with an overpreoccupation with autonomy, success, audience-pleasing rhetoric, and a "local" theology. The church sought to choose its own leaders, its own ethics, its own socio-political value-system, and its own criteria of spirituality. However, Paul sets forth a formative understanding of the cross; an understanding of the Church as one, holy, catholic, and apostolic; a Christomorphic re-definition of "spiritual" and of the Holy Spirit; love and respect for "the other"; and the gift-character of grace and resurrection. How does this relate to hermeneutical distance and appropriation?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048599
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118237
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): McLean Bradley H.
Abstract: Réda Bensmaïa, "Introduction," in Deleuze and Guattari 1986 [1975], xxvii.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43048706
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118260
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Long Timothy M S
Abstract: Thatcher (1999, 267-269).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049106
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40118266
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): McLean Bradley H.
Abstract: Deleuze, Guattari 1987 [1980], xiv, n. 24.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049255
Journal Title: Journal of Educational Media, Memory & Society
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40118271
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Ammert Niklas
Abstract: Since the early 1990s, the concept of historical consciousness has been central to didactic research in Sweden. It has mostly been used as a theoretical framework on a macro-level or as an attempt to identify students' historical consciousness. This article applies the theoretical concept of historical consciousness to tangible source material:history textbooks from the twentieth century. It focuses on whether Swedish history textbooks for lower secondary school have articulated contexts that may be conducive to developing historical consciousness. The article employs a number of theoretical concepts—narratives, multichronology, identity, and values—in order to analyze perspectives that can be utilized to trigger historical consciousness.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43049338
Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Hahnsche Buchhandlung
Issue: i40118588
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Létourneau Jocelyn
Abstract: P. Cornell,
J. Hamelin, F. Ouellet et M. Trudel, Canada, unité et diversité, Toronto: Holt, Rinehart & Winston,
1968.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43056295
Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Moritz Diesterweg GmbH & Co.
Issue: i40118640
Date: 1 1, 1996
Author(s): Karlegärd Christer
Abstract: Jörn Rüsen, „Historisches Lernen", Böhlau, Köln 1994, S. 70
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057053
Journal Title: Internationale Schulbuchforschung
Publisher: Verlag Hahnsche Buchhandlung
Issue: i40118660
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Quillévéré Isabelle
Abstract: François Audigier et al., L'enseignement de l'histoire et de la géographie en troisième et en seconde.
Etude comparative et descriptive, Paris, 1996.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43057346
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118824
Date: 3 1, 1980
Author(s): Nebuloni Roberto
Abstract: Ibid., pp. 478-479.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43060796
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118834
Date: 9 1, 1982
Author(s): Nebuloni Roberto
Abstract: HR, II, p. 87
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061023
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118861
Date: 6 1, 1988
Author(s): Rossi Fabio
Abstract: ibid., pp. 339 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061789
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118864
Date: 3 1, 1989
Author(s): Comolli Fabrizio
Abstract: Les écrits de Sartre ..., cit., p. 635,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43061881
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118871
Date: 6 1, 1991
Author(s): Ghidini Maria Candida
Abstract: Ibid., p. 130.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43062107
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118930
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Borella Sonia
Abstract: Ricoeur, La metafora, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063573
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118937
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): Pavan Antonio
Abstract: Ibi, PP-242-243.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063713
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118942
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): Ravelonantoandro Marc
Abstract: B. Iluga Kayombo, Paul Ricoeur. De l'attestation du
soi, Harmattan, Paris 2004, pp. 323-356
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063796
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118943
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): Averoldi Maria
Abstract: Id., Sur Maurice Blanchot, Fata Morgana, Montpellier 1975, p. 72, trad. it. di F.
Fistetti e A. Ponzio, Su Maurice Blanchot, Palomar, Bari 1994, p. 97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063814
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118945
Date: 9 1, 2008
Author(s): Bosco Domenico
Abstract: M. de Certeau, L'énonciation mystique, «Recherches de science religieuse»,
(1976), pp. 183-215.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063842
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118948
Date: 3 1, 2010
Author(s): Azzariti-Fumaroli Luigi
Abstract: L. Tolstoj, Detstvo (1852), in Id., Sobranie socinenij, Hudozestvennaja literatura,
I, Moskva 1960; trad. it. di R. Olkienizkaia-Naldi, Infanzia, Passigli, Firenze 1998, p. 39.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063903
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40118949
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Raynaud Savina
Abstract: G. Spinosa, Il metodo
storiografico di M.-D. Chenu medievista e lessicografo, RFNS, 94 (2002), pp. 347-354.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43063927
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Facoltà Filosofica dell'Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40119191
Date: 12 1, 1964
Author(s): Pazzaglia Luciano
Abstract: Aubert, Le problème, cit., in particolare pp. 310-317.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43068331
Journal Title: Rivista di Filosofia Neo-Scolastica
Publisher: Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
Issue: i40119260
Date: 9 1, 2012
Author(s): Fumaroli Luigi Azzariti
Abstract: P. Celan, Der Tod (1950), in Id., Die Gedichte aus dem Nachlaβ, Suhrkamp,
Frankfurt a. M. 1997; trad. it. di M. Ranchetti e J. Leskien, La morte, in Id., Sotto il tiro di
presagi. Poesie inedite 1948-1969, Einaudi, Torino 2001, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070016
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119280
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Decock Paul B
Abstract: Bastiaens 1993:8-9
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070285
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Combrink H J B
Abstract: Are the readings of Luke being proposed in this volume evidence of readers finding in the text what they want? Different readings of the same text can be related to different manifestations of "the reader". Yet a responsible reading of the text implies taking the text as a speech-act functioning in a communicative context. The role of the author and the context therefore becomes important again. The concept of foolproof composition is relevant too ās it implies the exclusion of the possibility of a counterreading of the text. Tlie phenomenon of the inspiration of a sacred text also functions as a constraint.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070297
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Botha J
Abstract: In this paper some elements of the reading process of Luke 12:35-48 are analysed according to the theory of Wolfgang Iser. Two problems are stated in the introduction, namely the impossibility of accounting for the reading process exhaustively in one all-encompassing theory, and the difficulty of "applying" Iser's theory, which is proposed as a theory of the reading process and not a method for analysing the reading process of an actual text. After a short exposition of the philosophical background and the main elements of the theory, a description of some elements of the reading process of this particular text is given. The paper concludes with a short reflection on the viability of this theory for a practical reception analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070301
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Schnell C W
Abstract: The tradition-historical method emerged at the turn of the century. It is used to understand biblical texts not only as products of the final author or redactor, but as documents which evolved over a period of time within a particular society. Consequently it grapples with the problems of how such texts refers to historical events, how one relates individual and collective religious experience and what authority these texts have in the lives of Christians today. Luke 12:35-48 is used to investigate the application of these ideas to practical exegesis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070302
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Hartin P J
Abstract: Interpretation has to take into consideration three poles: author, text and interpreter. In the field of literary studies deconstruction has provoked much interest and concern. The scope of this paper is to illustrate this activity of deconstruction unfolding by means of a reading of the parable of the Supervising Servant. This illustration from the Scriptures shows what happens to every text which is read again. It is reinterpreted anew according to new contexts. It is an example of the dissemination of the Word, whereby the Word becomes flesh.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070308
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119281
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Smit D J
Abstract: The different "readings and readers" are evaluated, with a view to responsible hermeneutics, on three levels. First, the question is asked as to whether the different readings took place in a responsible way in terms of their own presuppositions and goals. Some general remarks are made on the possible comparison and integration of these readings are made. Second, the question is asked whether some of these readings are more appropriate, responsible or legitimate readings of literature than others. The point is argued that such an evaluation cannot be timeless and abstract, but will depend on the purpose of the reader. Third, the question is asked how the specific pencope, namely a text from the Christian New Testament, can be responsibly read by New Testament scholars.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070311
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119282
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): SMIT J A
Abstract: Maartens (1980)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070314
Journal Title: Neotestamentica
Publisher: The New Testament Society of South Africa / Die Nuwe-Testamentiese Werkgemeenskap van Suid-Afrika
Issue: i40119282
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): SMIT J A
Abstract: Hengel 1974:25ff
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43070315
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i396847
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): MellonAbstract: [3, pp. 273-99]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4308865
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i404682
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Molyneux John M.
Abstract: Wallace [47]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309044
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i397373
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Jonas John M.
Abstract: The growth of knowledge in any discipline depends on discursive practice for the assertion of claims and the assessment of claims. At times, however, that discursive practice may be ideological in nature. Ideology is here defined as being grounded in efforts at domination--the ascendance of some ideas over others. Examination of the incidence of ideology in discourse is necessarily interpretive; part of this article explores the application of hermeneutics to the analysis of discourse. A set of examples of discursive practice in library and information science (LIS), purposely selected, is examined for ideological intent. Ultimately, the aim is to demonstrate that some discourse is ideological in nature and purpose, and to point out the implications of such discursive practice for knowledge growth in LIS.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309562
Journal Title: The Library Quarterly: Information, Community, Policy
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i397452
Date: 4 1, 1997
Author(s): Shenk Gary
Abstract: 58-60
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4309598
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120485
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Heimerl Daniela
Abstract: Graf York an Hans
Stempel am 25. Oktober 1950 und Martin Niemöller an Hans Stempel am 20. Dezember
1950, in: PLKS n° 768.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43098095
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120543
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Hempelmann Heinzpeter
Abstract: Karpp, Kirchengeschichte, aaO. (Anm. 23), 162.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43099470
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120557
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Hartweg Frédéric
Abstract: Georges Casalis, Un semeur est sorti pour semer. Paris 1988.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43099813
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120566
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Hartweg Frédéric
Abstract: Etymologisches Wörterbuch des Deutschen, Berlin 1989, 1409.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43100057
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40120596
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Feil Ernst
Abstract: Carl Schmitt, Tyrannei der Werte, in: Tyrannei der Werte, hg. von Sepp Schelz,
Hamburg 1979, 11-43.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43100785
Journal Title: Il Politico
Publisher: Facoltà di Scienze Politiche
Issue: i40120649
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Galizia Mario
Abstract: Giuseppe Capograssi (1889-1956) was an important legal philosopher and had a lively influence on the development of legal studies. The centre of his reflections lay in his many investigations into the concept of experience, which aimed to supersede the prevalent orientation in Italy, focussed on vertexes, emphasizing instead the importance of practices, both on the theoretical level and in the analysis of legal activity and political reality. Capograssi therefore paid great attention to the relationship between state and society viewed in a dynamic and pluralist perspective. No less illuminating are Capograssi's investigations into the value of the constitution and the principle of legality. During the Fascist period, Capograssi upheld the values of individual liberty and democratic principles, seeing as indispensable the continual involvement of citizens in the development of political action. This perspective played a further, particularly important role in the "ideas of Capograssi", after the war and the advent of the republican legal order. According to Capograssi, more space needed to be given to social life and to the spiritual links on which political community is based. In this sense, Capograssi found the teachings of Catholicism fundamental. His Catholicism placed great emphasis on freedom and solidarity and contained a lively, underlying sense of the cultural and spiritual, inspired by the ideal of "charity".
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43102057
Journal Title: Journal of Linguistic Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i40120808
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Shoaps Robin A.
Abstract: This article addresses how a perceived tension between the spontaneous personal and the shared textual elements of religious language is resolved in the context of Pentecostal services recorded at two Assemblies of God (AG) churches in California and Michigan. In an analysis of pray er and the metapragmatic commentary that surrounds it, I argue that the balance between spontaneously created prayer and invocation of fixed text plays on an opposition that goes beyond ritual or religious language; rather, it is best understood as characterizing two opposing text-building or entextualization strategies. Using evidence from AG prayer, sermons, and songs, I show that the preferred entextualization strategy highlights the situatedness of the text in a particular context and as emanating from a particular speaker. My findings have significance not only for research on religious language, but also for further understandings of entextualization and the discursive means of constructing personhood and affect.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43103994
Journal Title: Journal of Linguistic Anthropology
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i40120870
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): Shweder Lauren
Abstract: This article highlights the linguistic dimension of sleight-of-hand magic performance through a situated study of the transmission of a trick from expert to novice magician. Focusing on the context of apprenticeship rather than performance, we distinguish an emphasis on linguistic techniques for producing illusion, skills deeply embedded in the magician's artful practice. Ultimately, we conclude that a magician's talk is performative in that its meaning lies in the effect it has on the visual experience of the audience, who co-constructs the trick.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43104676
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121038
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Lordon Frédéric
Abstract: Charles Ramond (2005), "La loi du nombre", introduction au Traité politique, Spinoza, Œu-
vres, V, Epiméthée, PUF.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107698
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121042
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Rieucau Nicolas
Abstract: G. T. Tanselle (2006, p. 5).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43107739
Journal Title: Iranian Studies
Publisher: Society for Iranian Studies
Issue: i401420
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Browne Afsaneh
Abstract: Edward G. Browne, The Press and Po-
etry of Modern Persia (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1914; Los Angeles:
Kalimat Press, 1983), 177-79
Browne
177
The Press and Poetry of Modern Persia
1983
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4310971
Journal Title: Cahiers d'économie politique / Papers in Political Economy
Publisher: L'Harmattan
Issue: i40121221
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): Favereau Olivier
Abstract: Favereau, Biencourt et Eymard-Duvemay [2002]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43111556
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121375
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): MARSHALL TERENCE
Abstract: Emile III, O.C. IV, p. 470.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43116151
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40121415
Date: 10 1, 1973
Author(s): CARRÉ OLIVIER
Abstract: Van Nieuwen-
huijze (C.A.O.), Sociology of the Middle East. A stocktaking and interpretation, Leiden,
E.J. Brill, 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43117886
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121469
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): DELANNOI GIL
Abstract: L'essence du politique, Paris, Sirey, 1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43118719
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121488
Date: 2 1, 1991
Author(s): LEIBOVICI MARTINE
Abstract: Ibid., p. 77.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43118996
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121491
Date: 8 1, 1991
Author(s): CORCUFF PHILIPPE
Abstract: CNRS, PIRTTEM, Toulouse, 16-18 mai 1990
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119033
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121497
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): LÉTOURNEAU JOCELYN
Abstract: Luc Bureau, Entre l'eden et l'utopie:
les fondements imaginaires de l'espace québécois, Montréal, Québec/Amérique, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119121
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121504
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): SANTISO JAVIER
Abstract: Daniel Levine, « Pa-
radigm lost. Dependence to democracy », World Politics, 40 (3), avril 1988, p. 393.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119238
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121517
Date: 4 1, 1996
Author(s): LECA JEAN
Abstract: Rawls, 1987,
p. 21
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119438
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121528
Date: 2 1, 1998
Author(s): BRUGIDOU MATHIEU
Abstract: F. Backman, M. Brugi-
dou, «L'icône profane, l'image des hommes politiques, produits de consommation ou
objet sociologique: quelques éléments», Sociétés, 57, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119587
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GAXIE DANIEL
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119882
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121551
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): GENSBURGER SARAH
Abstract: Maurice Halbwachs, op. cit., p. 113.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119888
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121555
Date: 6 1, 2003
Author(s): JOBARD FABIEN
Abstract: Michel Dobry (Sociologie des crises politiques,
op. cit.) et de Michel Crozier (Le phénomène bureaucratique, op. cit.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119939
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121556
Date: 8 1, 2003
Author(s): VION ANTOINE
Abstract: Brian Hocking, Localizing Foreign Policy : Non-Central Government and Multi-
layered Diplomacy, New York, Saint-Martin's Press, 1993.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43119963
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121569
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): BUTON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: Didier Fassin, « La demande medicale à l'anthropologie », cite, p. 251.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120202
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121586
Date: 6 1, 2009
Author(s): RIBERT ÉVELYNE
Abstract: A. Sayad, ibid., p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120512
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121596
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Traini Christophe
Abstract: Olivier Fillieule (dir), Le désengagement militant, Paris,
Belin, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43120715
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121632
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): PITEAU Michel
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, «Droit de cités», Le Monde, 23 août 1991, p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121646
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation Nationale des Sciences Politiques
Issue: i40121636
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): SANTISO Javier
Abstract: Max Weber, Le savant et le politique, Paris, Plön, 1959, p. 168.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121717
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121655
Date: 12 1, 2007
Author(s): DÉLOYE YVES
Abstract: d'Alfredo Joignant, « Pour une sociologie
cognitive... », art. cité, p. 150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43121988
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121665
Date: 12 1, 2011
Author(s): Corcuff Philippe
Abstract: Ibid., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122361
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121674
Date: 2 1, 2012
Author(s): Martin Denis-Constant
Abstract: D.-C. Martin et le groupe IPI, « Écarts d'identité... », cité.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122571
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121675
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Farhat Nadim
Abstract: A. R. Zolberg, « The Making of Flemings and Walloons. Belgium : 1830-1914, art. cité, p. 233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122616
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Zittoun Philippe
Abstract: Frank Fischer, Reframing Public Policy, Oxford, Oxford University Press 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122942
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40121681
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: C. Shore, Building Europe. The Cultural Politics of European Integration, Abingdon, Routledge, 2000.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43122944
Journal Title: Sociologie du Travail
Publisher: Association pour le développement de la sociologie du travail
Issue: i40123040
Date: 9 1, 1994
Author(s): Cottereau Alain
Abstract: Schütz, 1962, notamment le chapitre On multiple realities.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43149904
Journal Title: Sociologie du Travail
Publisher: Association pour le développement de la sociologie du travail
Issue: i40123063
Date: 7 1, 1998
Author(s): Bernoux Philippe
Abstract: Neuville J.-P. (1997).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43150320
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): DE SOUZA SALLES SERGIO
Abstract: Ricœur, Paul—"Paul Ricoeur: a Declaração Universal dos Direitos Humanos—um
novo sopro", art. cit., p. 212.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151548
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): YÁÑEZ MIGUEL GRANDE
Abstract: Rodríguez Puerto—Op. cit., p. 102.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151549
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): ARY ANTÓNIO
Abstract: Ricœur, P. —"La conscience et la loi", art. cit., p. 214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151557
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123136
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): PASQUÍN RAFAEL VEGA
Abstract: Gadamer, H.-G. —Verdad y método I, ed. cit., p. 380.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151558
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Issue: i40123137
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): MAULEON XABIER ETXEBERRIA
Abstract: Rodríguez Pascual, Esther (coord.) - Los ojos del otro. Encuentros restaurativos
entre víctimas y exmiembros de ETA. Santander: Sal Terrae, 2013.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151573
Journal Title: Paragraph
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40123173
Date: 11 1, 2006
Author(s): Briggs Kate
Abstract: This article argues for a definition of translation as a form of writing under constraint. Quite straightforwardly, the translator must write the original text again in a language other than the one in which it was originally composed. Both inhibiting and enabling, that restriction is also translation's resource, ensuring its distinctiveness as a writing practice and providing the key to its unique transformative possibilities. Like lipogrammatical writing, translation is inaugurated by its constraint. The article explores the affinity between translation and the lipogram with reference to Georges Perec's La Disparition, where the prohibition of the letter e initiates a peculiarly inventive kind of writing. Peculiarly inventive, because the effects generated by writing without a given letter of the alphabet, or by writing a given text again in another, altogether different, language, are essentially unprogrammable: we do not know what is going to happen.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43151952
Journal Title: Philosophical Topics
Publisher: The University of Arkansas Press
Issue: i40123370
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Keedus Liisi
Abstract: In Arendt's interrogations of political modernity, the concepts of history and politics have an ambiguous relation. On the one hand, she insisted that the performative character of politics as action was bound to its narrative aspect as remembrance. She was also a fervent proponent of integrating the historical sense into political understanding. On the other hand, Arendt characterized the modern historical sensibility from the point of view of politics as a "ghastly absurdity," and asserted that the political thought of our times needed to free itself both "from history" and "from thinking in historical terms." This paper explores the different meanings that Arendt granted to "history" as a (anti) political force and to historical sensibility as the basis for political understanding. It argues that not only were Arendt's rejection of the modern concept of history and its politics of history central for her critique, but that it was one of the key concerns that shaped the articulation of her own theory of action. The paper also examines the problem against the background of the intellectual tradition of Arendt's youth and in particular its uncompromising antihistoricism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43154604
Journal Title: Review of Religious Research
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40124598
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Franzen Aaron B.
Abstract: The Bible is an important text in American history, but research analyzing the social consequences of reading the Bible is very limited. Research focusing on religious practices or religiosity with Bible reading as part of a scale shows a tendency towards conservatism and traditionalism, as do more literalist views of the Bible. In the present study, biblical literalism is treated as a powerful context guiding one's reading. The focus here is a quantitative view of Bible reading, deploying two 'conservative' and two 'liberal' moral/political scales and two competing views for how Bible reading may function. Results indicate that Bible reading is positively related to both of the liberal scales as well as the conservative scales for non-literalists, but not for those with literalist Bible views. The findings begin to show the importance of independent Bible reading, how it may function differently for literalists and non-literalists, and highlights the degree to which literalism and Bible reading are different constructs.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43185883
Journal Title: Sociological Theory
Publisher: SAGE Publications
Issue: i40124645
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): Tavory Iddo
Abstract: The role of nonhumans in social life has recently generated significant scholarly interest. The two main paradigms for explaining the sociological significance of nonhumans are constructivism and actor-network theory. We propose a pragmatist synthesis inspired by George Herbert Mead, demonstrating how interactions with nonhumans help constitute the social self—that is, the identity one constructs by imaginatively looking upon oneself as others would. Drawing upon observations of humans interacting with objects, animals, and nature, we identify two complementary ways that nonhumans organize the social self and enable people to experience group membership in absentia: (1) by molding how one is perceived by others and constraining alternative presentations of self and (2) by acting as a totem that conjures up awareness of, and feelings of attachment to, a particular social group. This formulation moves beyond constructivist claims that nonhumans reflect people's self-definitions, and it offers a corrective to actor-network theory's neglect of sociality.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43186662
Journal Title: Il Politico
Publisher: Istituto di Scienze Politiche dell'Università degli Studi di Pavia
Issue: i40125674
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Kontopoulos Kyriakos
Abstract: B. Spinoza, Letters to Friend and Foe , Elwes, trans., New York, Phi-
losophical Library, 1966, p. 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43207558
Journal Title: Anthropological Journal of European Cultures
Publisher: Berghahn Journals
Issue: i40127031
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): GIORDANO CHRISTIAN
Abstract: This article analyses the difficult relation between anthropology and history. The point, therefore, is to show how anthropology conceptualises the past differently from history as a discipline. Beginning with the differences between anthropology and history in terms of the concept of time, the article highlights that while for history time is concrete, objective and exogenous to human beings, for anthropology it is characterised by its being condensed, collectively subjective and endogenous. By analyzing actual examples, the article shows that the anthropologist is not interested in the past per se, but rather in the past as a dimension of the present. Accordingly, actualised, revised and manipulated history as well as the role of the past in the present need to be taken into account. Consequently, history and the past have their own specific efficiency because they are also a form of knowledge and social resource mobilised by single individuals or groups to find their bearings and act accordingly in the present and likewise to plan the future.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234561
Journal Title: Anthropological Journal on European Cultures
Publisher: European Centre for Traditional and Regional Cultures (ECTARC)
Issue: i40127040
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Cohen Anthony P.
Abstract: In Britain, as in France, 'mainstream' anthropologists were hesitant to acknowledge studies within their own country as proper subjects for anthropological enquiry. British social anthropology defined itself as the study of 'other cultures' and became entrenched in a tradition in which Otherness was confused with manifest difference. This naivete, elevated into a scientific principle, precluded the recognition of 'self as anything other than a scientific instrument; but also led to the invention of a generalisable Other, and thereby ignored the complexity of variation within the cultures it studied. By the same token, it blinded anthropologists to heterogeneity within their 'own' local cultures as well, and was finally changed only by a series of related paradigm leaps. Our understanding of culture changed from a set of prescriptive influences which integrated society, to a ragged and non-systemic array of interpretive tools which aggregated society. Consequent upon this change, symbols were acknowledged as vehicles of expression and of negotiable meaning rather than as having stipulated and invariant referents. The demise of modernist theories liberated anthropology from its scientific illusions and positivistic pretensions, enabling it to acknowledge the personal and speculative nature of the enterprise. This admission of the subjective, of the anthropologist's self, was necessary in order to see Otherness as inhering in 'person' rather than in an abstraction such as 'culture' and, therefore, to be enabled to recognise diversity within cultures rather than merely between them. This enhanced perception of internal heterogeneity clearly places the Self of the anthropologist at the centre of the stage and has led to the contemporary debates about the nature of ethnographic writing and the status of ethnographic 'authority'. It has also had obvious consequences for anthropological research, including the raising anew of the relationship of individual to society; and the extension of anthropological research into the urban and industrial heartlands of the ' developed' world. These substantive consequences have established incontrovertibly the appropriateness and potency of anthropology in the study of such societies; and have also provided a basis from which to inform the core debates and central concepts of the discipline. These developments are evident in recent studies of kinship, social identity and symbolism. The reflexivity which is an essential ingredient of research on these topics (until recently noted with more eloquence and alacrity in France than in Britain) calls attention to the inevitable, and desirable, intrusion of the Self into anthropological research. It also demands the explicit incorporation of the complex Self-Other opposition in the fomulation of anthropological 'problems' — not as a baring of the post-modernist soul, but as an interpretive resource. An important illustration of the power of this resource may be found in the study of ethnic and local identities which are thereby revealed to be a matter of internal discourse (among Selves, so to speak) as well as of relativistic counter-definition. It is in precisely this way that research in anthropologists' 'parochial' or local milieux will contribute to the maturation of anthropology generally.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234718
Journal Title: Anthropological Yearbook of European Cultures
Publisher: Lit Verlag
Issue: i40127062
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bellagamba Alice
Abstract: Hamilton (2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43234947
Journal Title: Verfassung und Recht in Übersee / Law and Politics in Africa, Asia and Latin America
Publisher: Institut für Internationale Angelegenheiten der Universität Hamburg
Issue: i40127374
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Njoya Jean
Abstract: Sèye, note 106, p. 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43239583
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: English Dominicans
Issue: i40127657
Date: 3 1, 1969
Author(s): Kerr Fergus
Abstract: 'The School of Conscience', by Thomas Deman, O.P., New Blackfriars,
December 1968, p. 129.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43245533
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128070
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Hill Robert J.
Abstract: Polanyi, M., The Tacit Dimension, (London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1966),
pp 29-52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251198
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128072
Date: 5 1, 2008
Author(s): Mills Mary
Abstract: Cottingham, Spiritual Dimension, pp. 171-2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251230
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128073
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Lawson James
Abstract: Brazilian
disciple Herbert de Souza (Betinho), A lista de Ailice (Sao Paulo, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251247
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128073
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Davies Oliver
Abstract: Gearty, Can Human Rights Survive?, pp. 140-57.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251249
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128077
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Meynell Hugo
Abstract: Lonergan, Insight, chapters
XIX and XX.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251315
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128085
Date: 11 1, 2010
Author(s): Taylor Charles
Abstract: Roger Lundin, Believing Again (Grand Rapids: Michigan: Eerdmans, 2009).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251452
Journal Title: New Blackfriars
Publisher: Blackwell Publishing Ltd
Issue: i40128094
Date: 3 1, 2012
Author(s): Turner Frank
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, "Tâches de l'educateur politique," in Lectures, I: Autour de Politique
(La Couleur des Idées) (Seuil, Paris, 1995), 241-247.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43251617
Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Orbán Katalin
Abstract: Clifford Geertz, "Ideology as a Cultural System," in The Interpretation of Cultures (New York: Basic
Books, 1973), 193-233.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265206
Journal Title: The Hungarian Historical Review
Publisher: Institute of History, Research Centre for the Humanities, Hungarian Academy of Sciences
Issue: i40128809
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Apor Péter
Abstract: Carlo Ginzburg, History, Rhetoric and Proof (Hanover, NH-London: University Press of New England,
1999), 5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43265207
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129162
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): DELAPERRIÈRE MARIA
Abstract: Th. Bernhard, Auslöschung, trad. G. Lambrichs, Paris, Gallimard, 1990, p. 507.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271490
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129176
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): RAGUET-BOUVART CHRISTINE
Abstract: « The servile path », On translation, éd. Reuben A. Brower, Cambridge (Mass.),
Harvard University Press, 1959, p. 97-110.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271914
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études Slaves
Issue: i40129177
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): LANDRY TRISTAN
Abstract: Jean-Paul Sartre, Qu 'est-ce que la littérature ?, Paris, 1948, p. 52.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43271945
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania Press
Issue: i40129792
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Francomano Emily C.
Abstract: "the pilgrim had a special association with money, for the very symbols of
his condition were the staff he held in one hand and the purse he carried over one shoulder. His
mobility depended in part on the convenient transferability of some of his wealth" (31).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43279322
Journal Title: Dance Research: The Journal of the Society for Dance Research
Publisher: Edinburgh University Press
Issue: i40129862
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): VEROLI PATRIZIA
Abstract: Serge Lifar built his career during the 1930s, a decade crucial to understanding his 'années noires'-or 'black years', as the French historian Henry Rousso called the period of the German occupation of Paris (1940—1944). Lifar's powerful and respected position at the Paris Opéra, the social connections he had built and maintained and the psychological impact of exile: all these elements help clarify Lifar's accommodating attitude towards the German occupants of his adopted city. During the 1930s Lifar came to be accepted in French intellectual society as the 'heir' of Serge Diaghilev. Through his publications he made a powerful contribution to the process by which Diaghilev's Ballets Russes assumed its paramount position in the development of modern ballet, a process set in motion by the impresario himself. Lifar played this role chiefly in France. In the English-speaking world, where relatively few of his books appeared in translation, other writers served to canonise the Diaghilev endeavour, albeit for somewhat different ends. A list of Lifar's publications in Russian and other languages (French above all) displays the growing influence of his actions and authority, the power of his connections (inherited primarily from Diaghilev), and his relentless will to overcome the problems of emigration as he secured not only success as a dancer and choreograph but also a public reputation as an intellectual. The recent discovery of new evidence has led to the identification of the respected Pushkin authority Modeste Hofmann as the writer whose unacknowledged work enabled Lifar to establish himself as an historian. This evidence, provided by Hofmann's grandsons André and Vladimir Hofmann, raises serious questions about the authority of Lifar's books. An interplay of subjective relationships is woven into the texture of these narratives in which survival and ambition, a paternal attitude and filial respect, exist in constant tension. Neither the making of these books nor the myth of Russian dance which they espouse can be understood without placing their authors in the milieu they shared in Paris as Russian émigrés.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43281365
Journal Title: European Journal of Sociology / Archives Européennes de Sociologie / Europäisches Archiv für Soziologie
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40129912
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): SHOHAM HIZKY
Abstract: (Hann 2007).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43282182
Journal Title: Philosophy East and West
Publisher: University of Hawai'i Press
Issue: i40130069
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Botz-Bornstein Thorsten
Abstract: Since 1990, two eminent French-speaking sinologists, François Jullien and Jean François Billeter, have been engaged in a debate on the principles of comparative philosophy and sinology. The debate has been developed in several books and articles and attracted the attention of a relatively broad public as well as of a wide range of French intellectuals. The arguments with regard to an older discussion on the difference between philology and philosophy are evaluated here, and conclusions are drawn concerning the present status of comparative philosophy in academia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43285887
Journal Title: Middle East Journal
Publisher: Middle East Institute
Issue: i399456
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Heradstveit G. Matthew
Abstract: Daniel Heradstveit, "Elite Perceptions of Ethical Problems Facing the Western Oil Industry in
Iran," Journal of Iranian Research and Analysis, Vol. 17, No. 2 (2001).
Heradstveit
2
17
Journal of Iranian Research and Analysis
2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4330418
Journal Title: Česká literatura
Publisher: Ústav pro Českou Literaturu AV ČR
Issue: i40132158
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Hrbata Zdeněk
Abstract: A. Jirásek, Psohlavci, 1886 (Praha: F. Šimáček), str. 1;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43322421
Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132187
Date: 10 1, 1991
Author(s): Corner James
Abstract: This essay is about the crisis of creativity and meaning in contemporary Western culture and how the use of modern landscape and architectural theory works to perpetuate an excessively "hard" or neutral world—a world in which culture can no longer figure or recollect itself. A brief critique of three predominant approaches toward contemporary theory is presented: positivism, the use of paradigms, and the Avant-Garde. In different ways, each approach derives from modern techno-scientific thinking and invariably seeks closure, certainty, and control. The built landscapes that result often suffer from an equally closed explicitude: a stifling immanence where all is exposed and nothing is left to imagination. The essay suggests an alternative strategy grounded in the tradition of hermeneutics. Here, theory is something ever-open, permitting a free association of ideas through the mechanics of situational interpretation and metaphor. Hermeneutics provides the basis for a landscape architectural theory that transcends pictorial image and historical style by critically engaging contemporary circumstance and tradition. The landscape itself is a hermeneutic medium and becomes the ground for such an endeavor, enabling the remembrance, renewal, and transformation of a cultural tradition. The author argues that a hermeneutic approach to the theory and practice of landscape architecture is a way of returning to our designed landscapes the powers of the everyday and the revelatory—the grounds of memory and hope.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323035
Journal Title: Landscape Journal
Publisher: The University of Wisconsin Press
Issue: i40132217
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Conan Michel
Abstract: The renewal of a dialog between landscape design and garden history demands a renewal of the questions and methods of garden history. This essay studies how garden reception and garden creation interact. It considers three main issues: first, it explores the domain of cultural expectations framing the engagement with a garden shared by users and creators at a given time—the poetical texture of gardens; second, the role of garden creation in exploiting, expanding or subverting this shared frame of expectations; and third, it proposes an approach—garden pragmatic—to study the broader interactions between garden creation and reception on the one hand, and social and cultural change on the other. The question of intersubjectivity—how do we share our sense and experiences of the world with others, and how do we transform them—is at the root of all the little stories—the fragments of a poetic of gardens—that propose new directions for garden history. Many of these stories have been presented during the last 15 years at symposia at Dumbarton Oaks where the author is presently the director of Garden and Landscape Studies. The general philosophy however had never been presented until the Fall 2004 when he published his "Essais de Poétique des Jardins." They were never made explicit at Dumbarton Oaks where each story only played its part in the theme of the symposium. Yet the whole course of ideas presented here results from these many exchanges with other scholars. This is why many footnotes make explicit references to their works. So, following the lead offered by this text or choosing a personal route, each reader may access many different voices that make garden history at present into a lively resource for pondering about the role of landscape creation in a multicultural world. These fragments of history are written to stimulate the designer's imagination, not to outline the course landscape design should follow.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43323728
Journal Title: Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft
Publisher: Kommissionsverlag Franz Steiner
Issue: i40133996
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): van Skyhawk Hugh
Abstract: Turner 1972: 212-221
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43380752
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135021
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): DEC IGNACY
Abstract: De Corte, jw. s. 62.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407629
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135031
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): WOLICKA ELŻBIETA
Abstract: The article of Elzbieta Wolicka is consecrated to the consideration of the phenomenon of time taken in the contexts of individual human experience, contemporary cultural situation and Christian faith. The starting point of the 1st part of the article is the fragment of Confessiones (ch. XI) of St. Augustine and the short parable of Franz Kafka entitled HE. The author of the article brings to the light the dialogical basis of the human perception of time and raises up the quaestion of "a hidden sabotage of trust" which is characteristic to the social relations of our times. This is also the one among many other factors of the so called "crisis of culture" (mal du siècle). The crisis consists of a feeling of a threat, a burden of the past and a fear of the future. The 2nd part of the article is concerned with the analysis of the eschatological meaning of some words of Christ in the Gospel of St. John (4, 23; 5, 25-29; 12, 13; 12, 27, 31). They reveal the Christian sense of the human temporal condition in the light of "the economy of salvation" and the dialogue between a believer and God. A catastrophic thrill, a feeling of existential paradox, a blockage of communication - the symptoms of the crisis of cultural conscience - could be described as "the edipse of God" (M. Buber) or "the abandonment of God" (J. Ellul) in the contemporary world. The Gospel points out that in the heart of human temporal experience there is still existing conversatio sacra and the presence of God in our history is actual.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43407775
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135135
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): CHUDY WOJCIECH
Abstract: W. Juszczak, Sophia, „Znak”, 41(1989), nr 2-3, s. 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43409686
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135149
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): WASZKINEL ROMUALD
Abstract: Ewolucji twórczej Bergsona, który J. Maritain umieszcza jako
motto pierwszej części swej książki La philosophie bergsonienne (Paris 1913, Ed. 4.
1948 s. 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410023
Journal Title: Roczniki Filozoficzne / Annales de Philosophie / Annals of Philosophy
Publisher: Towarzystwa Naukowego, Katolickiego Uniwersytetu Lubelskiego
Issue: i40135177
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): KOWALCZYK STANISŁAW
Abstract: W. Hryniewicz. Współczesne dyskusje na temat poligenizmu. „Roczniki
Teologiczno-Kanoniczne” 16:1969 z. 2 s. 115-143.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410517
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): TODT OLIVER
Abstract: Soentgen, Jens - "Stuff: A Phenomenological Definition", ed. cit., pp. 77 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410690
Journal Title: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia
Publisher: Revista Portuguesa de Filosofia / Aletheia - Associção Científica e Cultural
Issue: i40135186
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): LIND ANDREAS GONÇALVES
Abstract: Hölderlin, F. - Friedrich Hölderlins sämtliche Werke, ed. cit., p. 433
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43410698
Journal Title: Journal of Basic Writing
Publisher: City University of New York
Issue: i40136043
Date: 4 1, 2006
Author(s): Tassoni John Paul
Abstract: This essay offers a history of a basic writing course that began at a public ivy campus in the 1970s. Relying on principles of universal design and on insights derived from his school's studio program about ways the institution's selective functions can impact curricular matters, the author describes how the basic writing course was merely retrofitted to an English Department's goals, rather than integrated into its mainstream business. In turn, the author suggests that historical studies such as this can help basic writing teachers excavate and reinvigorate demoaatic reform efforts often backgrounded in light of a school's elite reputation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43444078
Journal Title: Renaissance and Reformation / Renaissance et Réforme
Publisher: Canadian Society for Renaissance Studies / Société canadienne d'études de la Renaissance, Pacific Northwest Renaissance Society, Toronto Renaissance and Reformation Colloquium and Victoria University Centre for Reformation and Renaissance Studies
Issue: i40136175
Date: 4 1, 2009
Author(s): EAGLESON HANNAH
Abstract: Des ciseaux et de la colle. Des ailes sur une page. La grandeur des caractères. Ces matériaux ont tous eu leur importance lorsque les lecteurs du début du XVIIe siècle ont tenté de comprendre leur théologie du temps à travers les pages de leurs livres. Cet article montre que la poésie de George Herbert revêt une profonde association entre les idées concernant le texte et celles relevant de l'histoire théologique, association qui était familière pour les lecteurs d'almanachs et d'harmonies bibliques. Les poèmes d'Herbert impliquent que l'individu puisse donner une signification à sa propre vie, dans le cadre d'une histoire théologique linéaire et cohérente basée sur la création, la chute, la rédemption et la résurrection des morts. Puisque cette histoire linéaire se basait sur les Écritures et sur son interprétation dans l'Angleterre du XVIIe siècle, la démarche consistant à donner une signification à une vie individuelle dans le cadre de cette histoire théologique était expérimentée à travers le texte, considéré à la fois comme un contenu intellectuel et comme une forme matérielle. The Temple révèle également des tensions entre l'exploration d'Herbert dans le temps de chaque jour apparemment chaotique et sa foi dans la cohérence de l'histoire théologique linéaire. Ses efforts pour réduire ces tensions le conduit à utiliser des métaphores impliquant la matérialité du texte, renforçant ainsi les liens entre la théologie du temps et la matérialité du texte dans son œuvre, ainsi que dans l'expérience de ses lecteurs contemporains.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43446096
Journal Title: English Literary Renaissance
Publisher: Department of English, University of Massachusetts
Issue: i40136258
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): THURN DAVID H.
Abstract: Stephen Booth argues this in detail in King Lear, Macbeth, Indefinition, and Tragedy (New
Haven, Conn., 1983), esp. pp. 81-90.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43447264
Journal Title: Studi Novecenteschi
Publisher: Istituti Editoriali e Poligrafici Internazionali
Issue: i40136381
Date: 6 1, 1997
Author(s): CORTELLESSA ANDREA
Abstract: W. Pedullà, C'è un eretico tra i classici, cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43449890
Journal Title: Amerikastudien / American Studies
Publisher: Universitätsverlag WINTER GmbH
Issue: i40138215
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Voelz Johannes
Abstract: McFarland 3-55.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43485840
Journal Title: Civilisations
Publisher: Institute de Sociologie
Issue: i40138298
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): TABOIS Stéphanie
Abstract: S. Tabois (2005).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487276
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Archaeology / Journal Canadien d'Archéologie
Publisher: Canadian Archeological Association
Issue: i40138301
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Schaepe David M.
Abstract: Archaeology assumes itself as a discipline through a practice of boundary-making that merges the past with the present. It is, in this practice, increasingly critiqued for being ethnocentric and separating power from the communities it claims to represent. In response, archaeology is experiencing a turn toward "community". Examining two community archaeology case studies, we assess whether archaeology can be transformed into a discipline that productively participates in the liveliness and messy connectedness of objects, peoples, histories and cultures— in contrast to a conventionally detached practice of objectifying other peoples' lifeways. In both cases, archaeological and descent communities play direct and central decision-making roles in this traditionally "distanced" discipline. They demonstrate means of re-figuring archaeology as a participatory practice. Community-founded archaeology is thus shown to transform methods commonly supporting institutional reproduction into a radically indigenous, emically structured, set of knowledge practices and outcomes. Archeologie suppose elle-même comme une discipline à travers une pratique de fabrication limite qui fusionne le passé au présent. Il est, dans cette pratique, plus en plus critiqué pour avoir été puissance ethnocentrique et séparation des communautés qu'elle prétend représenter. En réponse, archéologie connaît un tournant vers une « communauté ». Examen de deux études de cas communautaires archéologie, nous déterminer si archéologie peut se transformer en une discipline qui productivement participe à la vivacité et la connectivité désordre des objets, des peuples, des histoires et des cultures—contrairement à une pratique conventionnelle détachée d'objectiver les modes de vie des autres peuples. En cas, archéologiques et descente communautés jouent des rôles décisionnels directes et centrales dans ce traditionnellement « distanciés » discipline. Ils montrer les moyens de retrouver l'archéologie comme une pratique participative. Archéologie communauté fondée est ainsi montré à transformer les méthodes communément soutien institutionnelle reproduction en un jeu radicalement indigène, emically structuré, de connaissances pratiques et les résultats.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43487310
Journal Title: Dalhousie French Studies
Publisher: Department of French Dalhousie University
Issue: i40138358
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Belkacem Dalila
Abstract: Ph. Lejeune, Op. cit., p. 14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43488344
Journal Title: Hungarian Journal of English and American Studies (HJEAS)
Publisher: Institute of English and American Studies, University of Debrecen
Issue: i40138367
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Matolcsy Kálmán
Abstract: H. P. Lovecraft's texts deal with the cosmos providing words and mechanisms beyond words, such as analogy. Tracing the relationship between analogy and the poetic metaphor in the Lovecraftian text the paper turns to Paul Ricoeur's notion of the living metaphor as the embodiment of tension providing secondary referentiality. The essay argues that the ontological nature of analogy and metaphor supplies an indirect strategy to move towards the beyond, to transfer the unknown to the realm of the known. In this process, by referring to what is interstitial, void-like, and monstrous, this metaphorically active, poetic, and "ecstatic" Lovecraftian text becomes a "monster" in its own right: the indescribable and unnamable overflow into the world of representation, creating the monster-text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43488466
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i40138441
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): HANDLER-SPITZ Rivi
Abstract: "On the Childlike Mind," FS, 93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43490165
Journal Title: Historical Archaeology
Publisher: The Society for Historical Archaeology
Issue: i40138497
Date: 1 1, 2014
Author(s): Tuffin Richard
Abstract: The issues raised by different kinds of oral-historical research are explored here through a dialogue between two projects. In one case, the Alderley Sandhills Project, this work has been completed; in the other, the Ardnamurchan Transitions Project, the oral-historical research is in its early stages. Through a series of interactions, this article raises a number of different questions that oral-historical research posed at Alderley Sandhills, and it considers the ramifications of and the possible differences in these questions in the case of Ardnamurchan. Adoption of a nonlinear structure echoes one of the many fascinating aspects of oral-historical research itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43491406
Journal Title: Revue des études slaves
Publisher: Institut d'études slaves
Issue: i40138617
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): MASLOWSKI MICHEL
Abstract: Rozmowy, p. 87, passim.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43494192
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40138793
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Cellier Micheline
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Temps et récit III, op. cit., p. 358.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43497531
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Dodier Nicolas
Abstract: B. Glaser, A. Strauss, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550677
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique
Publisher: Presses de Sciences Po
Issue: i40141126
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Smaoui Sélim
Abstract: Christophe Traini (dir.), Émotions... Mobilisations J, Paris, Presses de Sciences Po, 2009.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43550678
Journal Title: The Journal of Asian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i40141279
Date: 2 1, 2014
Author(s): MUKHARJI PROJIT BIHARI
Abstract: Watson (2011).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43553395
Journal Title: Urban History Review / Revue d'histoire urbaine
Publisher: Becker Associates
Issue: i40141678
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): Backouche Isabelle
Abstract: L'article analyse les difficultés de constitution d'un champ de recherches autonome autour de la ville en France tout en repérant les fructueuses pistes ouvertes par les recherches récentes pour cerner la spécificité de l'urbain. Trois d'entre elles sont approfondies: l'entrée par l'espace, l'attention à la diversité des acteurs, la valorisation du changement urbain. Ces trois interrogations sont déclinées sur des terrains urbains variés et des époques différentes, montrant que les convergences de la recherche en histoire urbaine passent par un intérêt primordial pour l'expérimentation et le dialogue avec d'autres disciplines. This paper analyzes the difficulties of conducting independent research on the subject of the city in France, while exploring fruitful areas of study opened by recent scholarship that defines the urban specificity. Three of these areas are dealt with in depth: the introduction of space as an analytical tool, attention to diverse forces, and the development of urban changes. These three areas draw upon varied urban fields of study at different times, thus showing how urban history research converges on key subjects for experimentation and dialogue with other disciplines.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43562312
Journal Title: Ethnicities
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40142780
Date: 8 1, 2013
Author(s): Werbner Pnina
Abstract: This paper contrasts intersectionality, the negative definition of identities, and multiple identities, the situational valorisation of positive identities, to argue for a generational shift in the performance of everyday multiculturalism in Britain. In everyday encounters, actors work to sustain the definition of the situation (Goffman) and with it a surface of civility and mutual respect which are nevertheless morally compelling. Everyday relationships flow smoothly and naturally, in an unreflexive, taken-for-granted way, to constitute shared positive identities (Schutz). Such surface civility may, however, be disrupted by communicative breakdowns whenever participants do not share implicit systems of relevancy. Deconstructive analyses that probe beneath the surface of the everyday can also reveal the existence of negative identities, subject to discrimination and stigmatisation. This paper contrasts the experience of first-generation Commonwealth immigrants to Britain with that of successive generations, who unreflexively displayed a shared British identity during the London 2012 Olympics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43586593
Journal Title: Pacific Affairs
Publisher: University of British Columbia
Issue: i40143057
Date: 12 1, 2012
Author(s): Sejrup Jens
Abstract: China Times, "Jile Taiwan' xing fengbao, chuban 'Jile Dongjing' fan zhi?" ['Paradise
Taiwan' Sex Outrage -Should a 'Paradise Tokyo' Be Published in Response?] 16January 2002,
morning ed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43590473
Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40143278
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Hypothèses et formulations empruntées à Michel Foucault, L'Archeologie du savoir,
p. 11-12.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43595931
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143853
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., XXIV, 2.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605436
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143874
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): CALBOLI MONTEFUSCO Lucia
Abstract: Innocenti 1994: 357 s.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605789
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143884
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): PAILLER Jean-Marie
Abstract: Schmidt 1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43605945
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143901
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Knoepfler, 2001, p. 27, 35-40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606377
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40143908
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: Ibid., I, 1, 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43606498
Journal Title: Journal of Sport History
Publisher: The North American Society for Sport History
Issue: i40144300
Date: 4 1, 2005
Author(s): Schultz Jaime
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Time and Narrative, vol. 1, trans. Kathleen McLaughlin and David Pellauer (Chi-
cago: University of Chicago Press, 1984).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43610078
Journal Title: Cahiers Ferdinand de Saussure
Publisher: Librairie Droz
Issue: i40144558
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Liberman Kenneth
Abstract: Ethnomethodology captures ordinary events in ways that retain their dynamic and collaborative character. Ethnomethodologists identify people's methods for developing a practical objectivity that can render their local affairs meaningful and orderly, and they closely scrutinize the local details of mundane affairs in order to describe how a local cohort of cooperating parties concert themselves in providing an intelligibility for their social interaction, local work that is naturally occurring and depends upon the reflexive character of any emerging sense.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43615523
Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services
Issue: i40146446
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Johnston Erin F.
Abstract: Scott (1990: 295-296)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43653896
Journal Title: Pallas
Publisher: Universités de Toulouse-Le Mirail, d'Aix-en-Provence, Limoges, Paul Valéry à Montpellier, de Pau et des Pays de l'Adour
Issue: i40146910
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): NOUILHAN Michèle
Abstract: C'est d'abord s'étonner de la place qu'occupe dans l'œuvre novatrice de Freud la culture antique. Retracer l'itinéraire de la rencontre avec Œdipe, c'est faire comme un état des lieux. L'Interprétation des Rêves, Totem et Tabou, L'Homme Moïse et la religion monothéiste, mais aussi des articles moins connus, des extraits de sa correspondance, contiennent des analyses inattendues, sur l'origine de la tragédie grecque, son évolution, sa fonction, sur la catharsis, le plaisir tragique, etc... Le but n'est pas d'apprécier la pertinence des réponses, mais de dégager l'originalité d'une démarche qui lie fiction et réalité, structure et histoire, passé et présent. And our first response will be to marvel at the importance of the culture of antiquity in Freud’s innovating work. Tracing up the stages of his encounter with Œdipus is tantamount to an inventory of fixtures. The Interpretation of Dreams, Totem and Taboo, The Man Moses and monotheistic religion, but also less known articles and extracts from his correspondence contain unexpected analyses on the origin of Greek tragedy, its evolution, its function, on catharsis, tragic pleasure, etc. Our aim is not to assess the relevance of the answers but to bring out the originality of a procedure that links up fiction and fact, structure and history, past and present
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43660649
Journal Title: Anabases
Publisher: Université de Toulouse-Le Mirail
Issue: i40148226
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Payen Pascal
Abstract: Les
Grecs, les historiens, la démocratie, p. 219-245.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43682760
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148676
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): Encrevé André
Abstract: Foi et Vie, 1938 [en fait le numéro semble paru début 1939], p. 386.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691712
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148678
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Willaime Jean-Paul
Abstract: « Le protestantisme malade de sa
jeunesse », Études Théologiques et Religieuses, tome 76, 2001/2, p. 247-264.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691773
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148678
Date: 12 1, 2002
Author(s): Colin Pierre
Abstract: « La liberté religieuse au cours de l'histoire », Concilium, 1966, Tome 18, p. 19.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43691776
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148697
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Encrevé André
Abstract: Ibid., col. 1.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43692186
Journal Title: Bulletin de la Société de l'Histoire du Protestantisme Français (1903-)
Publisher: Société de l'Historie du Protestantisme Français
Issue: i40148697
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Pervillé Guy
Abstract: « Qui se sentira responsable ? », par R. Goullet Rucy et Jean-Michel Hornus,
ibid., 1962, n° 11-12, novembre-décembre, p. 781-784.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43692187
Journal Title: Theory and Society
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40148922
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Mische Ann
Abstract: Latour 2005
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43694727
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America, Cum Permissu Superiorum
Issue: i40149889
Date: 1 1, 1976
Author(s): Cahill P. Joseph
Abstract: Eliade, Patterns, 25.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43714118
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40149968
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): BLOMBERG CRAIG L.
Abstract: ("Nurturing Our Nurse: Literary Schol-
ars and Biblical Exegesis," Christianity and Literature 32 [1982] 17-18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43718221
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218327
Date: 11 1, 1970
Author(s): Alexander K. K.
Abstract: William Alexander, "Howells, Eliot, and the Humanized Reader," in The Interpretation of Narrative:
Theory and Practice, ed. Morton W. Bloomfield, Harvard English Studies I (Cambridge, Mass., 1970),
pp. 149-70.
Alexander
Howells, Eliot, and the Humanized Reader
149
The Interpretation of Narrative: Theory and Practice
1970
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/437183
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150058
Date: 10 1, 1992
Author(s): MITCHELL ALAN C.
Abstract: NRSV, NAB, and Attridge, The Epistle to the Hebrews, 206.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43720976
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150062
Date: 4 1, 1993
Author(s): BRUEGGEMANN WALTER
Abstract: Humphreys, The lYagic Vision, 39,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43721227
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150082
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): MILLER DOUGLAS B.
Abstract: Gordis (Koheleth, 130),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43722641
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150119
Date: 4 1, 2003
Author(s): LAUNDERVILLE DALE
Abstract: Block, "Prophet of the Spirit," 39-41.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43724946
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150136
Date: 7 1, 2007
Author(s): QUARLES CHARLES L.
Abstract: John Dominic Crossan, In Fragments: The Apho-
risms of Jesus [San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1983] ix-x
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726042
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150147
Date: 7 1, 2010
Author(s): CHAN MICHAEL J.
Abstract: Ulrich Mauser ("Isaiah 65:17-25," Int 36 [1982] 181-86, here 185-86)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726825
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150149
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): EARL DOUGLAS S.
Abstract: Moshe Greenberg, "On the Political Use of the Bible in Modern Israel," in Pomegran-
ates and Golden Bells: Studies in Biblical, Jewish, and Near Eastern Ritual, Law, and Literature in
Honor of Jacob Milgrom (ed. David P. Wright et al.; Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns, 1995) 461-71,
esp. 467-70,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43726964
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150154
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): BERGANT DIANNE
Abstract: Vanhoozer, Biblical Narrative, 140.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43727318
Journal Title: The Catholic Biblical Quarterly
Publisher: Catholic Biblical Association of America
Issue: i40150165
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): CLAASSENS L. JULIANA M.
Abstract: De Lange, "Hermeneutics of Dignity," forthcoming.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43728043
Journal Title: Mitteilungen des Kunsthistorischen Institutes in Florenz
Publisher: Kunsthistorisches Institut in Florenz, Max-Planck-Institut
Issue: i40150746
Date: 1 1, 2015
Author(s): Gerbron Cyril
Abstract: Humbert of Romans, "Expositio regulae B. Augustini", in: idem, Opera de
vita regulan, ed. by Joachim Joseph Berthier, Rome 1888/89, 1, pp. 248-268.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43738210
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Taylor & Francis
Issue: i40150967
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): MOORE ALLAN F.
Abstract: Sentimental Journey (Carlton, 1996).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43741609
Journal Title: Der Staat
Publisher: Duncker & Humblot
Issue: i40151309
Date: 1 1, 2009
Author(s): Loughlin Martin
Abstract: id., Notes Toward a Theory of Multilevel Governing in Europe,
MPIfG Discussion Paper 00/5.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43747723
Journal Title: Kirchliche Zeitgeschichte
Publisher: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht GmbH & Co. KG
Issue: i40151650
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Hartweg Frédéric
Abstract: Jean Baubérot, Le pouvoir de contester. Contestations politico-religie-
uses autour de „mai 68“ et le document „Eglise et pouvoirs“, Genève 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43751754
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i402288
Date: 4 26, 1968
Author(s): Cohn Lata
Abstract: Several debates arose in the nineteenth century on the status of women in India in the context of determining an appropriate colonial policy on such matters as "sati" which were seen to mark the depressed position of women in society. The reform of these practices was held to be part of the regenerating mission of colonisation. The most sensational and the first of these debates concerned the outlawing of "sati". The literature on "sati" (and on social reform) of the period has largely adopted the framework of modernisation theory. The paper argues that the characterisation of the official debate as one between 'preservationists' and impatient westerners obscures a number of important issues. For instance, rather than argue for the outlawing of "sati" as a cruel and barbarous act, officials in favour of abolition were at pains to illustrate that the abolition would be consonant with the principle of upholding tradition. By treating the debates on "sati" as a discourse and examining its production the article contests the conclusions on "sati" drawn by colonial officials.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4375595
Journal Title: Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale
Publisher: Presses Universitaires de France
Issue: i40153127
Date: 9 1, 2009
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: Saint Bonaventure et l'entrée de Dieu en théologie, Paris, Vrin, « Études de philosophie
médiévale», 2000, p. 24
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43775659
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i402828
Date: 10 31, 1975
Author(s): Ray Sudhir
Abstract: Seeking to understand the manifest in relation to the implicit and the unstated-the unconscious of the conscious-this paper focuses on the elusiveness of social consciousness in a transitional colonial society with a rich heritage of its own. The issue chosen for examination is that of widow marriage and the period is confined to the last three decades of the nineteenth century. Progressively convulsing the upper caste, mainly middle class, Hindu society, the issue was one that epitomised the interplay of conflicting emotions, values and ideas that characterised men's consciousness about women during this seminal phase of Indian history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4377663
Journal Title: Political Psychology
Publisher: Wiley Subscription Services, Inc.
Issue: i40153707
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Condor Susan
Abstract: Heins, 2007
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43783733
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218329
Date: 5 1, 1986
Author(s): Mack Max
Abstract: Spence, 1:265-66.
265
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438352
Journal Title: Problemas del Desarrollo
Publisher: Instituto de Investigaciones Económicas, Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México
Issue: i40157705
Date: 9 1, 2010
Author(s): Mañán Oscar
Abstract: Boisier, 2002
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43838834
Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158115
Date: 4 1, 1983
Author(s): Sampson Edward E.
Abstract: Psychology has uncritically adopted the individual person as its object of study without examining the concept and role of personhood within contemporary society and Western culture more generally. We examine three perspectives that challenge this familiar and unexamined object of our disciplinary inquiry: (1 ) Critical Theory's concept of the bourgeois individual as psychology's subject of ideology; (2) Poststructuralism's challenge to the concept of personhood as an integrated and self-present center of consciousness and action; (3) System Theory's alternative epistemology in which relations rather than entities have primacy. Each perspective introduces a concept of personhood that significantly differs from our present understanding of psychology's subject and that lays the foundation for a new subject of psychological inquiry: a multicentered, multidimensional subject.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43852967
Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158144
Date: 4 1, 1988
Author(s): Rettig Salomon
Abstract: Studies of laboratory research in the natural sciences have shown the significance of crossexperimenter dialogue in the determination of scientific facts. Behavioral and social scientists have largely ignored that role in the construction of scientific facts. A dialogic data base differs epistemogically from strict behavioral observations because of its retroductive and dialectic character. Its symbolic nature calls for hermeneutic efforts designed to achieve and assess consensual rather than empirical validation. Its ultimate aim is social organization rather than prediction and control. In view of this distinction, experimental research of human behavior must show the integration of the empirical and dialogic bases of behavioral data so as to more accurately reflect its constructive nature.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853344
Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158165
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): Muscari Paul G.
Abstract: What is the future of the poetic figures in a technological and scientific world where a more restricted view appears to be emerging as to what is adequate and relevant about metaphors? What part should the radical trope play in a script where the figures that are heralded are usually those that are perceived as having practical importance, i. e., those that fill in the gaps of existing knowledge? It will be the intent of this paper to show that the current preoccupation of much of philosophy and psychology with structural explanation and cognitive theory has certainly contributed to establishing a coordinated and unified theory of metaphors, but left unto itself such a concern is severely limited and does not adequately explain the full potential of metaphorical expressions.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853607
Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158169
Date: 10 1, 1994
Author(s): Muscari Paul G.
Abstract: Pinker, 1980
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43853652
Journal Title: The Journal of Mind and Behavior
Publisher: The Institute of Mind and Behavior
Issue: i40158229
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Leary David E.
Abstract: George Herbert Mead (1913/1964),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43854244
Journal Title: International Journal of Musicology
Publisher: PETER LANG
Issue: i40158446
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Frigyesi Judit
Abstract: Somfai, Béla Bartók: Composition, Concepts and Autograph Sources, 170.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43858010
Journal Title: Revue d'économie politique
Publisher: Dalloz
Issue: i40158547
Date: 10 1, 2013
Author(s): Ythier Jean Mercier
Abstract: Walzer's [1983]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43860037
Journal Title: Modern Philology
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i218358
Date: 5 1, 1976
Author(s): Ott-MeimbergAbstract: Ott-Meimberg, Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman? pp. 18-23.
Ott-Meimberg
18
Kreuzzugsepos oder Staatsroman?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/438628
Journal Title: Caravelle (1988-)
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40158730
Date: 12 1, 2013
Author(s): CAULA Elsa
Abstract: Certau, Michel «Operadores, en Certau, Michel de La toma de la palabra y otros escritos
políticos , Universidad Iberoamericana, A.C. México, 1995, p. 162-178.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43863876
Journal Title: Dialectical Anthropology
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40160154
Date: 12 1, 2014
Author(s): Medina Rafael Alarcón
Abstract: https://www.youtube.com/watch7vs-CGYPCvnlZg.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43895120
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: Centro de Comunicação e Expressão - CCE Centro de Filosofia e Clências Humanas - CFH Universidade Federal de Santa Catarina - UFSC
Issue: i40160634
Date: 8 1, 2014
Author(s): Freire Ida Mara
Abstract: ARENDT, 1996, p. 51
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43904231
Journal Title: Studies in Philology
Publisher: The University of North Carolina Press
Issue: i40161465
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Martin Catherine Gimelli
Abstract: Shakespearean
Pragmatism: Market of His Time [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1993], 10-18
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43921882
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161509
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): D'Agostino Simone
Abstract: E. Berti, Sumphilosophein. La vita nel-
l'accademia di Platone, Roma - Bari, 2010.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922418
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: PONTIFICIA UNIVERSITÀ GREGORIANA
Issue: i40161510
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bousquet François
Abstract: H.-J. Gagey, «La responsabilité clinique de la théologie» dans Fr. Bousquet -H.-J.
Gagey -G. Mêdevielle -J.-L. Souletœ (éds.), La responsabilité des Théologiens. Mélanges offerts
à Joseph Doré, Paris, 2002, 705-722.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43922456
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Études Africaines
Publisher: Ecole de Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i401224
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): TodorovAbstract: FANON
1952: 206
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4393369
Journal Title: Meridiana
Publisher: Viella
Issue: i40162518
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Audenino Patrizia
Abstract: À. Treves, Le nasate e la politica nell'Italia del Novecento, LED, Milano 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43941752
Journal Title: Études rurales
Publisher: Editions de l'Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales
Issue: i40163031
Date: 6 1, 2014
Author(s): Deffontaines Nicolas
Abstract: Pour expliquer le suicide des agriculteurs, les médias se limitent généralement au seul facteur économique. Une approche comprehensive de cette question révèle d'autres conditions objectives de production de ce qu'on peut appeler la « souffrance sociale ». Le déséquilibre structurel entre l'organisation prescrite et l'organisation réelle du travail génère chez les agriculteurs un sentiment de pénibilité mentale. Tenus de répondre à des impératifs d'autonomie et de réalisation de soi, ces derniers ne disposent pas tous des mêmes ressources sociales pour parvenir à une image positive d'eux-mêmes. Pour se développer, la souffrance suicidaire s'appuie en effet sur la distribution inégale du capital économique, culturel et d'autochtonie. When explaining suicide among farmers, the media tend to focus exclusively on economic factors. This paper argues that adopting a more comprehensive approach to the issue highlights other conditions of production of what might be termed "social suffering". It is suggested that the structural imbalance between the prescribed and actual organization of work causes mental pain among farmers. The paper argues that amid increasing pressure to demonstrate greater autonomy and self-realization, farmers may not have the same social resources for developing a positive self-image. Research shows that an unequal distribution of economic and cultural capital and capital of autochtony leads to increased suicidal thoughts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43948334
Journal Title: Revue de l'histoire des religions
Publisher: PRESSES UNIVERSITAIRES DE FRANCE
Issue: i40165716
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): BALLABRIGA ALAIN
Abstract: Karl Jaspers, Introduction à la philosophie, traduit de l'allemand
(1949) par Jeanne Hersch, Pion, 1951, p. 131-150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/43998718
Journal Title: Film Criticism
Publisher: Allegheny College
Issue: i40166711
Date: 4 1, 1978
Author(s): Dennis Larry R.
Abstract: paul Ricoeur, "Hermeneutics:The Approaches to Symbol," from Freud
and Philosophy (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1970), rptd. in Vernon W. Gras,
ed., European Literary Theory and Practice (New York: Dell Publishing Co., 1973),
p. 87.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44018603
Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40166963
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Restaino Franco
Abstract: F. Angeli, Milano, Rorty, Bernstein,
Mac Intyre. Filosofia e post-filosofia in America oggi.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44022599
Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167014
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Piazza Marco
Abstract: M. Piazza, Introduzione , in Maine de Biran, Osservazioni sulle divisioni orga-
niche del cervello , cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44023819
Journal Title: Rivista di Storia della Filosofia (1984-)
Publisher: Franco Angeli
Issue: i40167057
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Wahl Barbara
Abstract: Bonnefoy 2006, p. 88.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44024907
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167328
Date: 9 1, 2003
Author(s): hoogland renée c.
Abstract: This essay considers the critical role of art in the actualization of embodied subjectivity. Drawing on the work of Paul Ricoeur, Félix Guattari, and Mikhail Bakhtin, the author argues that an active engagement with art is intrinsic to both the generation of meaning and the process of subjective becoming.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029622
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167335
Date: 3 1, 1998
Author(s): OLSON MARY C.
Abstract: A study of the interactions between verbal and pictorial elements in the Old English Illustrated Hexateuch reveals the ways in which both modes of expression indicate narrative temporality through representations of duration, repetition, simultaneity, and causality, and the importance of temporal relationships as a fundamental aspect of narrative.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44029721
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167365
Date: 3 1, 2014
Author(s): CORSO JOHN J.
Abstract: Semiotician A.J. Greimas introduced the semiotic square to consider semiotic relationships (and constraints) between binary terms. Literary, art, and music critics have seized upon the procedure to analyze actants, narrative structures, and discursive paradigms. This essay argues that current literature ignores the visual aspects of the square.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030128
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167369
Date: 6 1, 2006
Author(s): COLLINGTON TARA
Abstract: This essay adopts an interdisciplinary approach to Duras's Le Ravissement de Loi V. Stein, examining the intersection between psychoanalysis and literary criticism. Temporal continuity and spatial cohesion are considered shared characteristics of both the self and narrative in this examination of how identity fragmentation is reflected in the structure of a text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030190
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167374
Date: 9 1, 2007
Author(s): VISVIS VIKKI
Abstract: Kern Sakamoto's novel The Electrical Field successfully resists a new and insidious form of social amnesia surrounding the Japanese-Canadian internment. Perpetuated by the act of collective remembering and reinforced by the teleological structure of social and literary narratives representing the internment, this communal forgetting is resisted through the novel's use of discourses of hysteria.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030265
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: i40167376
Date: 12 1, 2010
Author(s): HALL VANESSA
Abstract: This essay analyzes Carver's incorporation of African American characters into his short stories. Considering moments of black and white interaction in Carver's stories both enables a fuller understanding of the function of race in his writing and provides an examination of the many ways discourses of race shaped by white Americans' ideas about blackness were embedded in 1970s and 1980s America.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44030294
Journal Title: Logique et Analyse
Publisher: Centre National Belge de Recherches de Logique
Issue: i40170534
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): DE PRAETERE Thomas
Abstract: Wittgenstein L., On Certainty, § 142, transi, by D. Paul & G.E.M. Anscombe, Oxford,
1979.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44084387
Journal Title: Logique et Analyse
Publisher: Centre National Belge de Recherches de Logique
Issue: i40170538
Date: 12 1, 1963
Author(s): Masai François
Abstract: Op.cit., p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44084448
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170697
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Feuillet A.
Abstract: Éthi-
que à Nicomaque, iv, 14, 1128, 32-33; traduction avec introduction, notes et index, par
G. Tricot, Paris, 1959, p. 209
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088067
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170713
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Dreyfus F.
Abstract: R. Barthes, art. cit. (note 84),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088283
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170726
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): Dreyfus F.
Abstract: Sacra Scriptura eodem Spiritu interpretatur quo est condita: In Rom., cap. xii, lect. 2;
également: Quodl. 12, art. 17 (ou 16 selon les éd.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088450
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170727
Date: 4 1, 1979
Author(s): Dreyfus F.
Abstract: Paul (Act., xxvi)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088463
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170751
Date: 10 1, 1985
Author(s): Dewailly Louis-Marie
Abstract: A. Fridrichsen-H. Rie-
senfeld, Johannes, dans Svenskt Bibliskt Uppslagsverky Gavie, ²1962, I, 1204
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088775
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170759
Date: 10 1, 1987
Author(s): Grelot Pierre
Abstract: The Priority ..., pp. 60-62
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44088880
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170775
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Beauchamp Paul
Abstract: «Le Pentateuque et la lecture typologique», à paraître dans le Pentateuque (Congrès de
l'A. C. F.E.B. 1991), Cerf.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089094
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170787
Date: 7 1, 1995
Author(s): LaCocque André
Abstract: J. M. Sasson, «The Worship of the Golden Calf», Orient and Occident AOAT
22, 1973, pp. 151-159.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089239
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école biblique et archéologique française
Issue: i40170811
Date: 4 1, 2001
Author(s): Rico Christophe
Abstract: G. Genette, Fiction et diction (« Poétique »), Paris, Éditions du
Seuil, 1991, étude n° 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089546
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'école pratique d'études bibliques
Issue: i40170830
Date: 10 1, 1977
Author(s): Grelot Pierre
Abstract: I. Broer, Das Gleichnis vom verlorenen Sohn und die Theologie des Lukas, NTS, XX, 1973/74,
pp. 453-462.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44089783
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170907
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: L. Alonso Schökel & J.L. Sicre Diaz, Giobbe, pp. 92-93.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090749
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170907
Date: 7 1, 2003
Author(s): Murphy-O'Connor Jerome
Abstract: The Gospel according to St John (London: SPCK, 1962) 399.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090752
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170918
Date: 7 1, 2008
Author(s): Venard Olivier-Thomas
Abstract: S. Liebermann (Hellenism in Jewish Palestine,
New-York, Jewish Theological Seminary, 1950, 203-208),
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090898
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170919
Date: 10 1, 2008
Author(s): Viviano Benedict Thomas
Abstract: M. E. Stone, Adam's Con-
tract with Satan (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2002).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44090910
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170926
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Sakr Michel
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Du texte à l'action. Essais d'herméneutique II, Paris
1986, 116-117.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44091003
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40170946
Date: 7 1, 2009
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: J. Heinemann, Prayer in the Talmud, p. 99.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44091301
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40171004
Date: 4 1, 2011
Author(s): Wohlman Avital
Abstract: Paul Ricœur. Philosophie de la volonté. Finitude et culpabilité. I L'homme faillible.
II La symbolique du mal. Aubier Montaigne 1960
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44092056
Journal Title: Revue Biblique (1946-)
Publisher: L'Ecole Biblique et Archéologique Française
Issue: i40171007
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Sonek Krzysztof
Abstract: CBQ 73 (2011): 141
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44092093
Journal Title: Policy Sciences
Publisher: Springer
Issue: i40172080
Date: 9 1, 2014
Author(s): Araral Eduardo
Abstract: The first-generation literature on policy design has made considerable contributions over the last 30 years to our understanding of the process, politics and implications of policy design and instrument choice. This literature, however, has generally treated institutions as a black box and has not developed a coherent set of frameworks, theories and models of how institutions matter to policy design. In this paper, I unpack the black box of institutions using transaction cost and mechanism design to show how regulations can be better designed in developing countries when institutions are weak, unaccountable, corrupted or not credible. Under these conditions, I show that efficient regulatory design has to minimize transaction costs, particularly agency problems, by having incentive compatible (self-enforcing) mechanisms. I conclude with a second-generation research agenda on regulatory design with implications for environmental, food and drug safety, healthcare and financial regulation in developing countries.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44113970
Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172767
Date: 4 1, 1994
Author(s): BAHR HOWARD M.
Abstract: Disciplinary specialties and boundaries may impede as well as facilitate understanding. Standard scholarly orientations to the study of Navajos and other ethnic populations manifest many biases of ethnocentrism and a general tendency to stereotype. Specific observer-related tendencies to distort are noted, among them tendencies to understate social dynamics and the degree to which Navajos are functioning parts of wider social systems. The literature on Navajos is a product of changing tools in the hands of changing observers applied to changing communities in the context of ongoing change in the wider societies of both observer and observed. It is argued that "multiplying glimpses," or increasing the number and types of observers and the variety of disciplines and paradigms represented, may reduce observer and position biases that distort existing views of Navajo society. An overview of the massive literature on the Navajo leads to the identification of 21 distinct genres. These genres and other Navajo texts may profitably be viewed in the perspective of textual analysis, broadly defined. Issues of meaning and interpretation are considered, including the reality-language-text nexus, construction of texts, text-context patterns, and the interaction of text, situation, and analyst in interpretation. Appropriate use of existing texts is socially responsible "green research" and should not be professionally stigmatized. It substitutes resource-efficient recycling of discarded and underanalyzed texts for the old expensive, obtrusive colonial patterns of work.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126560
Journal Title: Human Organization
Publisher: Society for Applied Anthropology
Issue: i40172778
Date: 7 1, 1992
Author(s): WARRY WAYNE
Abstract: This paper examines key implications of praxis theory for applied anthropology. I am concerned with applied anthropology as a communicative and collaborative process and with a critical understanding of the anthropologist's role as consultant, practitioner, and analyst in processes of planned change. The use of praxis as a central analytic leitmotif places "practical" activity, informed by theory, at the center of applied research. The analysis is illustrated through a description of a multi-disciplinary, community-based health research and planning project in seven native communities in Ontario. I examine how practical knowledge and action constrains and transforms academic models of community based development.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44126722
Journal Title: Cahiers d'Extrême-Asie
Publisher: Ecole Française d'Extrême-Orient
Issue: i40174176
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Faure Bernard
Abstract: Dominick LaCapra,
Rethinking Intellectual History: Texts, Contexts, Language (Ithaca, New York, 1983).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44169122
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i401725
Date: 6 09, 2004
Author(s): Foucault Ranabir
Abstract: Can a historical event, such as Partition, be understood as an action that "resulted" from complex, wide forces of history or also as an event continually brought into being by the play of subject memories? A relationship of complementarity exists between the problems internal to history and the demands and desires of memory, so much so that together they form integral parts of a single operation, the historiographical operation. Yet memory sometimes appears the obverse of history making. Human action, as this article remonstrates, sometimes overcomes the bounds of passivity imposed by memory and this is also what determines history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4418297
Journal Title: Economic and Political Weekly
Publisher: Sameeksha Trust
Issue: i404816
Date: 5 18, 2004
Author(s): Harcourt Dipesh
Abstract: To discuss the practice of memory and its relations to politics, social scientists rely on three kinds of practices - memorialising, memorising and the act of remembering/forgetting. The commemoration of "1857" is unique in that official celebrations of the event have been instituted even as 1857 continues to refigure in myths and endures as a symbol of popular resistance. The articles in this special issue address the seeming contradictions and complexities that "remembering" 1857 involves, and the tension that prevails between different kinds of recall.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4419571
Journal Title: International Review of the Aesthetics and Sociology of Music
Publisher: Department for Music and Musicology of the Croatian Academy of Sciences and Arts, Croatian Musicological Society, Music Academy of the University of Zagreb
Issue: i40177262
Date: 12 1, 2016
Author(s): Yoon Sunny
Abstract: Sacred music has always been a source of controversy throughout history since it is an integral part of the liturgy. Contemporary Christian music (CCM) has reached a pinnacle of controversy as its realm of consumption expands globally and inter-denominationally. This study was inspired by the idea of Ricoeur's phenomenology of religion to examine the contemporary practice of liturgy and sacred music. This brings into discussion the historical controversy and cultural milieu of adopting popular culture into youth ministry. Korean case is important because Korea represents one of the strongest Christian populations in the world and at the same time challenges - a drop in the number of young members and a huge generational gap in its church congregations. In order to scrutinize the concrete process of youth culture in the Christian community, an empirical study of youth ministry in seven mega churches in Seoul in South Korean was conducted as a case study. Sakralna glazba oduvijek je tijekom povijesti bila izvor kontroverzi jer predstavlja integrálni dio liturgije, a povijest glazbe je iz nje izrasla. Suvremena kršèanska glazba dostigla je vrhunac kontroverzije kad se njezino potrošaèko podruèje proširilo globalno i medukonfesionalno. Ovaj je članak nastao na temelju Ricoeurove fenomenologije religije i nastoji ispitati suvremenu praksu u liturgiji i sakralnoj glazbi u svjetlu nasljeda povijesne kontroverze i kultúrne sredine u prihvaćanju populárne kultúre u mladenačkoj službi božjoj. Teologija glazbe, o kojoj su raspravljali u 16. stoljeèu Luther, Zwingli i Calvin, osobito je korisna za konzultiranje pri suvremenom prilagodavanju na populárnu kulturu u crkvi. Štoviše, humanizam usaden u liturgijsku reformaciju u razdoblju renesanse otvára filozofijsko pitanje čovjekova identiteta pred licem božanskoga, o èemu se raspravljalo tijekom moderne i postmoderne povijesti sve do danas. Kako bi se pažljivo ispitao konkrétni proces mladenačke kulture u kršćanskoj zajednici, provedeno je kao studija slučaja empirijsko istraživanje mladenačke službe božje u mega crkvama Južne Koreje. Korejsko je sluèaj važan jer Koreja predstavlja jednu od najjaèih kršèanskih populacija u svijetu, dok je s druge strane izložena izazovima kao što je primjerice pad broja mladih vjernika i ogromni generacijski jaz u njezinim crkvenim kongregacijama. Razmatranje mladenačkih kongregacija u sedam mega crkava u Seulu i tekstuaina analiza mladenačke službe božje s težištem na glazbu pruža informacije kóje povezuju filozofske rasprave o teologiji glazbe s pitanjem identiteta uključenog u hermeneutiku glazbene prakse u crkvama. Semiotièki prístup glazbenoj analizi prihvaèen je kao korisno sredstvo za povezivanje ovih empirijskih podataka s njihovim filozofijskim interpretacijama i za ispitivanje glazbene štruktúre i narativne štruktúre tekstova.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44234974
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178163
Date: 4 1, 2010
Author(s): Hoskins Gareth
Abstract: An interest in narrative has done much to shed light on our understandings of geography. Studies linking narrative to nation building, the making of place, identity, the region, the spaces of health, heritage, and environmental history, give some indication of the breadth at which geographical scholarship has been pushed forward by an applied interest in stories. This article attempts to develop such work with a particular focus on the performative capacities of narrative; how stories might work towards various recuperative outcomes. It discusses the revision of historic tours around Angel Island Immigration Station, a California State Park property and National Historic Landmark with reference to the term narrative economy. The Immigration Station plays host to a narrative economy where stories circulating around the site acquire value on the basis of their factual content and their compatibility with a set of approved messages. Some of these stories are disputed and devalued so as to distinguish them from factual 'histories' produced by recently commissioned research. The article considers how heritage sites negotiate tensions between the burden of representational accuracy and the need to function more broadly as platforms for liberatory intervention.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251338
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178169
Date: 10 1, 2011
Author(s): Cloke Paul
Abstract: This paper suggests that the vocabulary and meaningfulness of 'evil' can be re-articulated, and to some extent redeemed from the extremes of fundamentalism and relativism. It uses intellectual resources from Nigel Wright, Walter Wink and Rene Girard to reconstruct some foundations for a reworking of evil in human geography. It then presents an account of the reappearance of evil 'after postmodernism' in event, narrative and praxis, arguing that working through and acting against evil reveals its present nature in terms that defy the excesses of right-wing religious fundamentalism and the bland tolerance that can stem from an over-reliance on relativistic thinking. The paper considers how geographies of postsecular practice in areas such as homelessness emerge in response to discernment both of the spiritual interiorities and the exteriorities of landscapes of power, and of the ability of human action to influence these landscapes.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251434
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178171
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Merriman Peter
Abstract: What makes the figure of the passenger distinctive as both a subject and an object of mobility and transportation systems? What distinguishes the passenger from other mobile subjectivities, from nomad, flaneur to consumer? How is the passenger represented, practiced and performed? How has the passenger and their experiences been conceived, imagined, manipulated, regulated and engineered? And what kind of human-technology assemblages do passengers enact? Through four short perspectives, this paper seeks to 'profile' the passenger as a distinctive historical and conceptual figure that can help to add greater precision to the analysis of our mobile ways of life. The passenger is explored as an object of speculative theoretical debate, a figure entangled in a host of identities, practices, performances and contexts, and an important way to illuminate key conceptual problematics, from representation to embodiment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251468
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40178171
Date: 4 1, 2012
Author(s): Johnson Nuala C
Abstract: Drawing on the theoretical insights of Paul Ricoeur this paper investigates the geographies of public remembrance in a post-conflict society. In Northern Ireland, where political divisions have found expression through acts of extreme violence over the past 30 years, questions of memory and an amnesty for forgetting have particular resonance both at the individual and societal level, and render Ricoeur's framework particularly prescient. Since the signing of the Belfast Agreement in 1998, initiating the Peace Process through consociational structures, discovering a nomenclature and set of practices which would aid in the rapprochement of a deeply divided society has presented a complex array of issues. In this paper I examine the various practices of public remembrance of the 1998 bombing of Omagh as a means of understanding how memory-spaces evolve in a post-conflict context. In Omagh there were a variety of commemorative practices instituted and each, in turn, adopted a different contour towards achieving reconciliation with the violence and grief of the bombing. In particular the Garden of Light project is analysed as a collective monument which, with light as its metaphysical centre, invited the populace to reflect backward on the pain of the bombing while at the same time enabling the society to look forward toward a peaceful future where a politics of hope might eclipse a politics of despair.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44251471
Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: SOCIÉTÉ D'ÉDITION « LES BELLES LETTRES »
Issue: i40178289
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): PAYEN Pascal
Abstract: N. Wachtel, La vision des vaincus. Les Indiens du Pérou devant la
Conquête espagnole (1530-1570), Paris, Gallimard, 1971.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44254001
Journal Title: Frontiers of Philosophy in China
Publisher: Higher Education Press and Koninklijke Brill NV
Issue: i40178582
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Davies Oliver
Abstract: Davies 2001
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44259415
Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: L'Association pour l'encouragement des études Grecques
Issue: i40178617
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): CHIRON Pierre
Abstract: I. Rutherford, op. cit., p. 20.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44260526
Journal Title: Revue des Études Grecques
Publisher: SOCIÉTÉ D'ÉDITION « LES BELLES LETTRES »
Issue: i40178680
Date: 6 1, 1990
Author(s): Drossart P.
Abstract: D. Dubuisson, La parole de l'histoire, dans
Mythe et histoire, Cahier de littérature orale n° 17, pp. 47-70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44264416
Journal Title: Cultural Geographies
Publisher: SAGE
Issue: i40179555
Date: 4 1, 2013
Author(s): DeLoughrey Elizabeth M.
Abstract: This article explores how the concept of ecosystem ecologies, one of the most influential models of systems thinking, was developed in relation to the radioactive aftermath of US nuclear weapons testing in the Pacific Islands. Historian Richard Grove has demonstrated how tropical island colonies all over the globe served as vital laboratories and spaces of social, botanical, and industrial experiment in ways that informed modernity and the conservation movement. I propose a similar relationship between the militarized American island colonies of Micronesia and how their constitution as AEC laboratories contributed to both atomic modernity and the field of ecosystem ecology. This was enacted through metaphorical concepts of island isolation and distributed visually by Atomic Energy Commission films that upheld an aerial vision of the newly acquired atolls for an American audience. Finally, the myth of isolation is also at work in the ways in which Marshall Islanders exposed to nuclear fallout became human subjects for radiation experiments due to the idea of the biological isolate.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44289602
Journal Title: Student Bar Review
Publisher: Student Bar Association of the National Law School of India University
Issue: i40180293
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): George Abu Mathen
Abstract: Foucault and Derrida. R.
Radhakrishnan, In Memoriam: An Obituary of Edward Said, Frontline, Oct. 24., 2003, 105.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44308385
Journal Title: Christianity and Literature
Publisher: Pepperdine University
Issue: i40180515
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Lake Christina Bieber
Abstract: In this essay I argue that Carvers story "A Small, Good Thing" can be read as an illustration of Albert Borgmann's argument that contemporary technological society conceals grace by encouraging the illusion than an individual can exert total control over her environment. The story shows how radical contingency punctures this illusion and offers potential for grace-filled communion with others through humble acts of hospitality. These humble acts—the small, good things of life together—parallel the giving and receiving of grace that takes place during the Eucharist.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44314818
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Pego Puigbó Armando
Abstract: H.U. von Balthasar, Gloria, V, (cf. nt. 76), 361.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322281
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180926
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Baugh Lloyd
Abstract: R. Carroll, «Christ Resurrected as Black Revolutionary», The Guardian, 21 January
2006. www.guardian.co.uk/world/2006/jan/21/film.southafnca [accessed 10 July 2011],
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322286
Journal Title: Gregorianum
Publisher: Pontificia Universitas Gregoriana
Issue: i40180927
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Haers Jacques
Abstract: «Ten Building Blocks of Catholic Social Teaching», America, October 31, 1998, 9-12.
See: www.americamagazine.org/content/article.cfm?article_id=11297 (last consulted: March
31, 2012).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44322322
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181899
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): DuBois H. Etienne
Abstract: Die Kirche zwischen Ost und West, 1949, p. 9, 17.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44351376
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181937
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): BOVON FRANÇOIS
Abstract: F. W. Horn, Glaube und Handeln in der Theologie des Lukas (Göt-
tinger Theologische Arbeiten, 26), Göttingen, Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht, 1983.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44352517
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181941
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Marguerat Daniel
Abstract: Rom. 6 : 11-23 ; 8 : 1-2 ; 12 : 5 ; 15 : 17.
I Cor. i : 2-30 ; etc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44352683
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181944
Date: 1 1, 1982
Author(s): GEFFRÉ CLAUDE
Abstract: P. Gisel, Vérité et histoire. La Théologie dans la modernité: Ernst Käsemann,
Genève-Paris, Labor et Fides-Beauchesne, 1977.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44352815
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181950
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Widmer Gabriel-Ph.
Abstract: L'articulation du sens.
Paris, Aubier, Cerf, Delachaux, Desclée de Brou wer, 1970, p. 91 ss.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44353049
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181958
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 507-508.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44353352
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40181981
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Gouhier Henri
Abstract: Raymond Lebè-
gue : Tragique et dénouement heureux dans V ancien théâtre français, dans Le
Théâtre tragique..., ouvr. cit.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44354216
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182002
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Halpérin Jean
Abstract: La ville de la chance, Paris, Editions du Seuil, 1962, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44354971
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182011
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Christoff Daniel
Abstract: Correspondance... ; texte cité par P. Thévenaz, «Métaphysique et desti-
née » in L'Homme , « Etre et Penser », cahier 1, 1943, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355283
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182024
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Widmer Gabriel-Ph.
Abstract: id. op.
p. 40.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355718
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182024
Date: 1 1, 1985
Author(s): Mottu Henry
Abstract: Pierre Couprie, in: Cahiers de l'Association des Pasteurs de
France, N° 15, novembre 1984, p. 7.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44355719
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182054
Date: 1 1, 1952
Author(s): Thévenaz Pierre
Abstract: Phénoménologie de la perception, p. 520.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356012
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182058
Date: 1 1, 1979
Author(s): BERTHOUZOZ ROGER
Abstract: Autrement qu'être ou au-delà de
l'essence, La Haye 1974, surtout 10-13; 167-218.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356102
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE LA CONCORDE
Issue: i40182059
Date: 1 1, 1974
Author(s): Blaser Klauspeter
Abstract: Ott, op. cit., p. 58.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356128
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182068
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Bonzon Sylvie
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Du texte à l'action, essais herméneutiques II, le Seuil, 1986.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356467
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182076
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Fuchs Eric
Abstract: André Neher, «La Vigne de Naboth», Comprendre, Revue de politique de la
culture, n° 45-46 (1979-1980) (N° sur «Ethique et politique»), p. 96.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356795
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182079
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Basset Lytta
Abstract: A. Gouhier, Pour une métaphysique du pardon, Paris 1969, p. 584. On trouve une
analyse philosophique du pardon chez V. Jankelevitch, Le pardon, Paris 1967.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44356901
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182084
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Ruff Pierre-Yves
Abstract: J. Zumstein, «La communauté johannique et son histoire», pp. 359-374.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357090
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182092
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: Gadamer, dans le
collectif Hermeneutik und Ideologiekritik, Francfort, Suhrkamp, 1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357331
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182096
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): BONHÔTE FRANÇOISE
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 258.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357469
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182097
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: «D'une lecture à l'autre. L'interprétation et ses
déplacements» de septembre 1994.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357519
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182098
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Hort Bernard
Abstract: Esprit,
Paris, juin 1989, pp. 48 à 58,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357571
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182099
Date: 1 1, 1992
Author(s): Neuberg Marc
Abstract: «La contrainte», Dialogue
XXIX (1990), pp. 491-497.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357599
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182104
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Jacques Robert
Abstract: T. Winograd, F. Flores, L' intelligence artificielle en question, Paris, P. U. F, 1989.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357878
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Römer Thomas
Abstract: J. Moltmann, Der gekreuzigte Gott, München, C. Kaiser, 1972; traduction
française: Le Dieu crucifié : la croix du Christ, fondement et critique de la théologie
chrétienne, Paris, Cerf, 1978 (2
éd.), p. 13-14.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357942
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182105
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): Schouwey Jacques
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris, Seuil, 1990.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44357945
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182109
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Ferry Jean-Marc
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Sanction, réhabilitation, pardon», in Le Juste, op. cit., p. 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358147
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182111
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Quére France
Abstract: Ali Merad, Lumière sur Lumière, Ed. du Chalet, 1978, p. 70.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358207
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182113
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Reding Jean-Paul
Abstract: Ch. Perelman, Traité de l'argumentation. La nouvelle rhétorique, Bruxelles,
Editions de l'Université de Bruxelles, 1988 5, p. 549.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358278
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182115
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Graesslé Isabelle
Abstract: B. Neipp,
Rembrandt et la narration lucanienne ou l'exégèse d'un peintre, Faculté de théologie
de Lausanne, 1992,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358371
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182118
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Tétaz Jean-Marc
Abstract: Friedrich
Wilhelm Kantzenbach, Evangelium und Dogma. Die Bewältigung des theologischen
Problems der Dogmengeschichte im Protestantismus, Stuttgart, Evangelisches
Verlagswerk, 1959.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44358509
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182129
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Charrière Nicolas
Abstract: J. Quinn,
«L'Église dans le monde. L'exercice de la papauté.», Documentation catholique 93 (1996),
p. 930-943.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359019
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182140
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: «Les sources religieuses du soi et l'éthique de l'action juste», Laval Théologique et
Philosophique, 58/2, juin 2002, p. 341-356
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359383
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182140
Date: 1 1, 2002
Author(s): Romagnoli Simone
Abstract: Maine de Biran, De l'aperception immédiate, Paris, Vrin, t. IV, p. 86.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359384
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182141
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Célis Raphaël
Abstract: F. Nietzsche, Poésies complètes, Seuil, Paris, 1951, p. 47.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359420
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182142
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: S. Germain, «Lecture kaléidoscopique de la Bible», Bulletin du Centre
protestant d'études, Genève, 1998/1, p. 17-21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359466
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182150
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Ullern-Weite Isabelle
Abstract: C. Indermuhle
et T. Laus, cf. le psaume qumrânien qui aurait formé une conclusion au livre biblique du
Siracide, IIQPs XXI, in A. Dupont-Sommer et M. Philonenko (éds), Écrits intertesta-
mentaires, Paris, Gallimard, 1987, p. 318-322.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359666
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182154
Date: 1 1, 2005
Author(s): Vezeanu Ion
Abstract: L. Wittgenstein, Le Cahier bleu et le Cahier brun, p. 118.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359739
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR S.A.
Issue: i40182155
Date: 1 1, 2004
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: K . E Logstrup, Norme et spontanéité, trad. fr., Paris, Cerf, 1997.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44359784
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 340.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360042
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Gilbert Muriel
Abstract: P. Ricœur, «Le conscient et l'inconscient» (1960), in: H. Ey (éd.), L'inconscient.
VI
colloque de Bonneval. 1960, Paris, Desclée de Brouwer, 1966.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360043
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Calame Claude
Abstract: F. Affergan, S. Borutti, C. Calame, U. Fabietti,
M. Kilani, F. Remotti, Figures de l'humain. Les représentations de l'anthropologie,
Paris, Éditions de l'EHESS, 2003.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360044
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE ATAR ROTO PRESSE S.A.
Issue: i40182162
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): Lévy Emmanuelle
Abstract: Dia-ou syn- chronie? Considérations
herméneutiques sur deux exégèses de Gn 22,1-19, Université de Neuchâtel, Faculté de
théologie, 2005.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360045
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182163
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: Paris, Centurion, 1983 (Grundkurs des Glaubens, Fribourg-en-Brisgau, Herder,
1976).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360090
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182168
Date: 1 1, 2007
Author(s): Müller Denis
Abstract: C. Theobald, Le
christianisme comme style, 2 vol., Paris, Cerf, 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360225
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182171
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: G. Ebeling, «Theologie.
I. Begriffsgeschichtlich», in : Die Religion in Geschichte und Gegenwart, vol. VI,
Tübingen, Mohr, 1962³, col. 754-769, surtout 754-758.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360321
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182181
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Bühler Pierre
Abstract: Tiré de : Piem, Dieu et vous, op. cit. (cf. note 1).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360608
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182182
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Moser Félix
Abstract: J. Moltmann, Un nouveau style de vie, renouveau de la communauté,
trad, par P. Jundt, Paris, Centurion, (1977) 19842, p. 36.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360635
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182184
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Indermuhle Christian
Abstract: F. Jameson, Valences of the Dialectic, op. cit., p. 483, note 9.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360691
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182185
Date: 1 1, 2012
Author(s): Romele Alberto
Abstract: Ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360704
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Dermange François
Abstract: S. Freud, «Abrégé de psychanalyse» (1938 et publié en 1940), in: Œuvres
complètes, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360942
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Abel Olivier
Abstract: Liebe und Gerechtigkeii/Amour et Justice, Tübingen, Mohr, 1990 (repris dans
Amour et justice, Paris, Seuil, 2008), p. 56-58 et 66.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360945
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: IMPRIMERIE PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182196
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): Cimasoni Sabine
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Soi-même comme un autre, Paris, Seuil, 1990, p. 202.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44360948
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Pagès Claire
Abstract: P. Ricœur, Autrement. Lecture d'Autrement qu'être, Paris, P.U.F., 1997, chapitre
III, p. 21.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361054
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Burri Yannick
Abstract: EC, p. 13.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361055
Journal Title: Revue de Théologie et de Philosophie
Publisher: PCL PRESSES CENTRALES SA
Issue: i40182200
Date: 1 1, 2011
Author(s): Wykretowicz Hubert
Abstract: J. Searle sur le problème de la liberté dans sa conférence Liberté et neurobiologie, Paris,
Grasset, 2004.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361056
Journal Title: The Eastern Buddhist
Publisher: The Eastern Buddhist Society
Issue: i40182239
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): Maraldo John C.
Abstract: Kiyota, p. 31.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44361727
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182539
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Jennings Theodore W.
Abstract: Ritual studies is a new discipline within the field of the study of religion. Liturgical theology is, in the West, a recent development within the Held of systematic theology. The article describes each and indicates ways in which they may contribute to the work of the other while retaining their separate identities. The development of methods for describing and analyzing ritual action may enable liturgical theology to construct its own analyses upon a more broadly phenomenological base. At the same time theology's insight into the history of liturgical action may enable ritual studies to overcome an excessively synchronie perspective and to attend to the normative character of ritual gesture.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368318
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Religious Studies, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182541
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Laughlin Charles D.
Abstract: Masking is ubiquitous to the culture areas of the world and is a symbolic activity inextricably associated cross-culturally with cosmological drama and shamanic ritual. Our question is, "Masks work how?" In Part 1, we place masks within their physical, cultural and cosmological context so as to view the activity of masking as part of a wider symbolic process. Masks are seen to be transformations of face. In Part 2, the work of masking is realized as a transformation of experience, and is related to a general cycle of meaning in culture whereby cosmological beliefs give rise to direct experience, and experience verifies and vivifies cosmology. And in Part 3 the "how" of masking is explained using a biogenetic structural perspective which traces the possible transformations of brain that may occur within the wearer and audience and that may mediate a variety of mask-related experiences.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368364
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Anthropology, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182553
Date: 1 1, 2001
Author(s): Prattis Ian
Abstract: Metaphor, Vibration and Form identifies a process that underlies all ritual enactments. Whether it is Joseph Campbell's analysis of the Hero's journey, Victor Turner's theoretical and experiential interest in symbols, or Charles Laughlin's cycle of meaning, there is at work a particular kind of behavioral transformation system. It begins with the mind and the meanings provided metaphorically for symbols, then proceeds to an intense focus on symbolic sequences in meditation or in ritual dramas, so that the metaphor is taken into the body as physical experience. From this physical "ownership" of the metaphor, the properties associated with it are encouraged, socially and ritually, to come to the surface and be enacted in the form of everyday behavior. Questions of symbolic appropriation, the redundancy of symbol, and professional responsibility are addressed in the concluding remarks.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368586
Journal Title: Journal of Ritual Studies
Publisher: Department of Anthropology, University of Pittsburgh
Issue: i40182557
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Brown Gavin
Abstract: This paper, theoretical in nature, discusses how the study of ritual has been re-conceptualized in terms of performance theory. This involves firstly defining the difficult term 'performance' and then proceeding to explore how ritual can be recast as a (cultural) performance. Building on this discussion, it is argued that recasting ritual as performance has led the scholar of ritual to pay closer attention to how indeterminacy inheres within all ritual performances. This is explored in two senses. Firstly, by 'privileging the moment' in ritual analysis, the essentially indeterminate nature of meaning in ritual performances becomes evident. Secondly, working with Victor Turner's idea of ritual anti-structure and cultural reflexivity, I explore how rituals are constituted by cultural indeterminacy, a condition most discernible in the execution of ritual action, that is, in performance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44368641
Journal Title: L'Espace géographique
Publisher: doin éditeurs
Issue: i40183304
Date: 3 1, 1988
Author(s): BESSE Jean-Marc
Abstract: H. Maldiney, Regard, parole, espace. Lausanne,
1973, p. 150.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44379954
Journal Title: Clio
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40183934
Date: 1 1, 2008
Author(s): ALBORNOZ VASQUEZ María Eugenia
Abstract: Albornoz 2007.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44390692
Journal Title: Archives d'histoire doctrinale et littéraire du Moyen Âge
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184769
Date: 1 1, 1995
Author(s): de Courcelles Dominique
Abstract: In Boet., q. 6, a. 1, solution 3.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44403918
Journal Title: Clio
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40184874
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): DEJEUMONT Catherine
Abstract: Bourdieu 1998.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44405713
Journal Title: Clio
Publisher: Presses Universitaires du Mirail
Issue: i40184893
Date: 1 1, 2006
Author(s): ADELL-GOMBERT Nicolas
Abstract: Vincent 1987.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406351
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184898
Date: 4 1, 1968
Author(s): Salman D. H.
Abstract: W. J. Devlin, Psychodynamics of Personality Development. Staten Island
(N.Y.), Alba House, 1965 ; 15×21,5, 324 pp., $ 4.95.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406521
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184901
Date: 4 1, 1970
Author(s): Geffré Claude
Abstract: Rm 8, 18-25
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406610
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184903
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Rey Bernard
Abstract: W. Pannenberg, op. cit., p. 185-189,
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406645
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184904
Date: 4 1, 1971
Author(s): Jacquemont P.
Abstract: J.-P. Jossua, Échange sur la vie religieuse, dans Christus 16 (1969) n° 62, p. 255.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406674
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184911
Date: 1 1, 1973
Author(s): Coutagne P.
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54 (1970) 701-703.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406891
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184914
Date: 10 1, 1974
Author(s): Congar Yves
Abstract: J. Guichard, Église, lutte des classes et stratégies politiques. Paris, Éd. du Cerf
(coll. « Essais »), 1972 ; 13,5 × 19,5, 193 p., 20 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44406941
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184920
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: Emmanuel Lévinas, « Humanisme et An-archie », dans Rev. intern.
Phil., n
85-86 (1968) 323-337.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407032
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184921
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Lauret Bernard
Abstract: Et sur la nomination de Jésus -Christ comme phénomène de projection :
M. Bellet, Au Christ inconnu, Paris 1976.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407063
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184930
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Gisel Pierre
Abstract: ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407230
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184934
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Kühn Rolf
Abstract: Parole et Symbole : Le Symbole,
éd. par J. Ménard, Strasbourg 1975, p. 142-161.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407310
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184940
Date: 7 1, 1982
Author(s): Rémy Pierre
Abstract: P. Rémy, « Les faits interpellent le théologien», in Rev. Droit
canonique , 32 (1982), p. 30-33
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407406
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184945
Date: 7 1, 1984
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Gh. Lafont, op. cit. p. 200.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407491
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184951
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Gilliot Claude
Abstract: Histoire de la littérature arabe, Paris, Maisonneuve et Larose, 1966, p. 658-659.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407606
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184957
Date: 4 1, 1986
Author(s): De Bauw Christine
Abstract: « Le récit interprétatif : Exégèse etThéologie
dans les récits de la Passion » (1985).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407712
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184968
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Lichnerowicz André
Abstract: Les mathématiques, auxquelles on peut joindre la logique, et depuis 1960 une large part de l'informatique théorique, fournissent un témoignage sur une part essentielle du fonctionnement de l'esprit humain. Loin de fournir seulement des outils extérieurs, elles se sont faites mode de pensée nécessaire pour appréhender la réalité physique. Elles nous ont appris que ce que nous nommons raison, démarche rationnelle, est en réalité laborieusement construit. Un bref survol de l'histoire des mathématiques, anciennes, puis surtout depuis le XIXe s., montre en quel sens le concept ancien de « vérité scientifique » s'en trouve désormais modifié. Mathematics, to which one may add logic and, since 1960, a large section of theoretical computer technique, all furnish evidence concerning an essential part of the working of the human mind. Far from providing only external tools, they have evolved as a necessary mode of thought for the understanding of physical reality. They have taught us that what we call reason, or rational deduction, is in fact something we have ourselves laboriously constructed. A brief survey of the history of mathematics, ancient and modern but especially from and after the 19th century, shows ways in which the old concept of a 'scientific truth' must henceforth be modified.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407910
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184970
Date: 7 1, 1989
Author(s): Gilliot Claude
Abstract: al-Qayrawânî, La Risàia ou Épllre sur les éléments du dogme et de la loi de
rislâm selon le rite mâlikite, texte arabe et traduction française... par Léon Bercher,
Alger, J. Carbonel, 1948², p. 163.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407951
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184972
Date: 1 1, 1990
Author(s): Varet Gilbert
Abstract: Karl-Otto Apel, Sur le problème d'une fondation rationnelle de
l'éthique à l'âge de la science, Presses Universitaires de Lille, 1987, 198 p., «Opuscule».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44407987
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184973
Date: 4 1, 1990
Author(s): Jacquemont Patrick
Abstract: Jean-Pierre Jossua, Pour une histoire religieuse de l'expérience littéraire. Tome 2.
Poésie moderne. Paris, Beauchesne (coll. «Religions» 20), 1990; 16 × 24, 286 p., 230 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408013
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184974
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Franz Prammer, Die philosophische Hermeneutik Paul Fticœurs in ihrer
Bedeutung für eine theologische Sprachtheorie. Innsbruck-Wien, Tyrolia (coli. Inns-
brucker Theologische Studien», 22), 1988; 15 X 22,5, 237 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408029
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184976
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Maesschalck Marc
Abstract: Popper K., La société ouverte et ses ennemis, 2 tomes, trad, par J. Bernard et
Ph. Monod, Seuil, Paris, 1979, t. 2, p. 185, 198 et 199.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408054
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184981
Date: 4 1, 1992
Author(s): Hebert Geneviève
Abstract: Paul Ricœur, Les métamorphoses de la raison herméneutique, sous la direction de
Jean Greisch et Richard Kearney. Actes du colloque de Cerisy-la-Salle 1
-11 août
1988. Paris, Éditions du Cerf (coll. «Passages») 1991 ; 14,5 X 23,5, 413 p., 175 F.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408132
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184990
Date: 7 1, 1994
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: D. Vasse, Un parmi ďautres. Paris, Le Seuil, 1978, p. 45-46.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408291
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184997
Date: 7 1, 1996
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: Sœur Paula Picard o.s.b., Dictionnaire des symboles liturgiques. Le
Léopard d'Or, 1995; 14 × 22, 288 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408394
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40184999
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Mies Françoise
Abstract: Paul' Ricœur, Le Conflit des interprétations, p. 34.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408419
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185003
Date: 1 1, 1998
Author(s): Rousse-Lacordaire Jérôme
Abstract: op. cit., p. 266.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408493
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185011
Date: 4 1, 2000
Author(s): Côté Antoine
Abstract: supra note 4.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408613
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185012
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Quelquejeu Bernard
Abstract: Progrès de la conscience dans la philosophie occidentale, 2 vol., Paris, F. Alean,
1927, p. 357.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408632
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185012
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Robilliard Stéphane
Abstract: Éléments pour une éthique, p. 137 sq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408633
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185012
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Ibid. p. 53.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408635
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185016
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Quelquejeu Bernard
Abstract: P. Ricœur, art. cit. p. 158.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408690
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185016
Date: 7 1, 2001
Author(s): Gy Pierre-Marie
Abstract: L. Bianchi, « Vocabulaire et syntaxe dans les oraisons du missel romain », 163-214.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408692
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185019
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Colette Jacques
Abstract: O.C., XV, p. 275, citation de Genèse 32, 31-32.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408722
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185019
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Housset Emmanuel
Abstract: Étant donné, Paris, PUF, 1997, p. 302.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408723
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185020
Date: 9 1, 2002
Author(s): Courcier Jacques
Abstract: Ian Hacking, The Social Construction of What ? Cambridge, Harvard UP,
1999-2000; 15 × 23, 261 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408738
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185024
Date: 12 1, 2003
Author(s): Trottmann Christian
Abstract: J. Domanski, La Philosophie, théorie ou manière de
vivre? Les controverses de l'Antiquité à la Renaissance, Fribourg, Paris, 1996, p. 91-97.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408783
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185026
Date: 6 1, 2004
Author(s): Vieillard-Baron Jean-Louis
Abstract: Op. cit., p. 74 sqq.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408822
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Guibal Francis
Abstract: E. Jüngel, Dieu, mys-
tère du monde, Cerf, p. 284
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408862
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Labbé Yves
Abstract: Jean-Paul II, Fides el Ratio
(1998) : § 67, parmi d'autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408864
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185029
Date: 6 1, 2005
Author(s): Teboul Margaret
Abstract: La Haye, Martinus Nijhoff, 1961.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44408865
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185038
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Tardieu Michel
Abstract: Alger en 1968 (2 vol., 516 p.), la thèse de F. Décret a été
publiée par les Études august, en 1970 sous le titre: Aspects du manichéisme dans
l'Afrique romaine: les controverses de Fortunatus, Faustus et Felix avec saint Augustin
(16×25, 367 p.).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409104
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185043
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Coutagne Paul
Abstract: Rev. Sc. ph. th. 54, 1970, p. 707
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409216
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185049
Date: 4 1, 1966
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Van Luijk, pp. 268-269.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409344
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185058
Date: 1 1, 1970
Author(s): Jossua Jean-Pierre
Abstract: Foi Vivante n° 30 (1967) « Bonheur ou salut ».
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409590
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185073
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Laurentin René
Abstract: Ross Mackenzie, « Mariology as an Ecumenical Problem », dans Marian
Studies, 26 (1975) 230-231.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44409906
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185080
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Ibid., p. 357.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410001
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185081
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): de Berranger Olivier
Abstract: H. de Lubac, «Mystique et Mystère», TO , p. 59.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410029
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185083
Date: 10 1, 1996
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Günter Abel, Nietzsche. Die Dynamik des Willen zur Macht und die ewige Wie-
derkehr. Berlin-New York, de Gruyter, 1984.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410068
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185086
Date: 1 1, 1999
Author(s): Greisch Jean
Abstract: Alter. Revue de Phénoménologie N° 6/1998, Monde(s). Numéro coordonné par
Nathalie Depraz et Vincent Houillon, 541 p.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410141
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Falque Emmanuel
Abstract: SC n° 431, p. 301.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410219
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185091
Date: 12 1, 2005
Author(s): Harada Masaki
Abstract: G.-G. Granger, Sciences et réalité, Paris, Éditions Odile Jacob, 2001.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410220
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185094
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Dubarle A.-M.
Abstract: K. Rahner. Zum theologischen Begriff der Konkupiszenz (1941), repris dans
Schriften zur Theologie, I, 1954, pp. 377-414 ;
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410271
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185102
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): Quelquejeu Bernard
Abstract: Montaigne, Les Essais, Livre I, chap. 28. Paris, PUF (coll. « Quadrige »), 1965,
p. 188.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44410443
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185149
Date: 4 1, 1964
Author(s): Refoulé François
Abstract: R. Bultmann, La confession chr istoto gique de l'œcuménisme, dans : L'inter-
prétation..., pp. 219-235.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411089
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185176
Date: 1 1, 1955
Author(s): de Contenson P.-M.
Abstract: R. Kothen, Directives récentes de l'Église concernant l'exercice de la médecine.
Warny, Louvain et Paris. Oit. gén. du livre, 1952; 16×21, 135 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411478
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185191
Date: 10 1, 1960
Author(s): Pohier J. M.
Abstract: J. Vinchon, La magie du dessin. Du griffonnage automatique au dessin théra-
peutique. Paris, Desclée de Brouwer, 1959 ; 15×23, 182 pp., 15 NF.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44411791
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185260
Date: 1 1, 1953
Author(s): Léonard A.
Abstract: Theodicee en
Godsdienslphilosophie, Tijdschrifl voor Philosophie, 1952, n. 1, p. 104.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412826
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185265
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Contenson P.-M.
Abstract: J. Zirnheld, Cinquante années de syndicalisme chrétien. Paris, 1937.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44412963
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185293
Date: 10 1, 1965
Author(s): Geffré Claude J.
Abstract: Cl. Geffré, Histoire et mystère dans la connaissance du Christ, dans La Vie spirit.
juin 1964, p. 630
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44413507
Journal Title: Revue des Sciences philosophiques et théologiques
Publisher: LIBRAIRIE PHILOSOPHIQUE J. VRIN
Issue: i40185306
Date: 1 1, 1954
Author(s): Geiger L.-B.
Abstract: R. Voggensperger, Der Begriff der Geschichte als Wissenschaft im Lichte
arislolelisch-lhomisiischer Prinzipien (Zeilschr. für Schweiz. Kirchengesch. Beiheft 5).
Freiburg, Paulusverlag 1948; 24 × 16, 130 pp.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44413713
Journal Title: Historical Social Research / Historische Sozialforschung
Publisher: GESIS - Leibniz Institute for the Social Sciences
Issue: i40185962
Date: 1 1, 2017
Author(s): Centemeri Laura
Abstract: Jaspers 2011, 289
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44425364
Journal Title: Educational Technology
Publisher: Educational Technology Publications, Inc.
Issue: i40186207
Date: 6 1, 2011
Author(s): Faulconer James E.
Abstract: This article presents the concept of facilitative theorizing as an alternative to prescriptive and descriptive theory in educational technology. The authors contend that these traditional forms of theory do not offer sufficient assistance to practitioners as they go about everyday design work. Facilitative theorizing, as an alternative, is specifically devised to offer more flexible and useable insight to practicing educational technology designers. To clarify this view of theorizing, the authors explicate four major ideas on which it is based (co-constitution, incompletability, thick articulation, and thematization), discuss some of its implications for scholarship and practice, and offer examples of theorizing in this practice-oriented vein.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44430004
Journal Title: Educational Technology
Publisher: Educational Technology Publications, Inc.
Issue: i40186211
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Spackman Jonathan S.
Abstract: Clark (2011) recently reviewed literature on cognitive phenomena such as automaticity, non-conscious processing, and the "illusion of conscious will," concluding that most learning theories and instructional design models are informed by faulty assumptions regarding psychological functioning—namely, that most cognitive activity is conscious and volitional. Clark offered a number of recommendations for educational technology research and design based on the view that cognitive activity is mostly automated, unconscious, and determined by psychological variables outside of personal control. This response presents an alternative perspective and accompanying recommendations distinct from those offered by Clark. It primarily argues that evidence pertaining to automaticity and related phenomena may be reinterpreted to fit within a view of agency that emphasizes meaning, purpose, tacit knowledge, and narrative structure; and that this agentic view leads to a number of potentially fruitful avenues for theorizing and research in educational technology.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/44430071
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i405514
Date: 1 1, 1991
Author(s): MarionAbstract: his
"L'Interloqué" in Who Comes after the Subject? (ed. Eduado Cadava, Peter Connor, and Jean-Luc
Nancy; New York: Routledge, 1991) 236-45.
Marion
L'Interloqué
236
Who Comes after the Subject?
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495069
Journal Title: The Harvard Theological Review
Publisher: Faculty of Divinity, Harvard University
Issue: i405633
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): NussbaumAbstract: "Ban graven images: Literatur als Medium
ethischer Reflexion," in Literatur ohne Moral: Literaturwissenschaften und Ethik im Gespräch (ed.
Christoph Mandry; Muenster: LIT, 2003) 67-83.
Ban graven images: Literatur als Medium ethischer Reflexion
67
Literatur ohne Moral: Literaturwissenschaften und Ethik im Gespräch
2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495096
Journal Title: The Oral History Review
Publisher: Oral History Association
Issue: i405621
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Bakhtin Della
Abstract: Bakhtin, Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics. ed. and trans. Caryl Emerson (Min-
neapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984) 201
Bakhtin
201
Problems of Dostoevsky's Poetics
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4495291
Journal Title: Comparative Studies in Society and History
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i405056
Date: 10 1, 2004
Author(s): Woolard Patrick
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur (1988)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4497713
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i405180
Date: 9 1, 1998
Author(s): van DongenAbstract: In this article, I consider narratives told within a clinical setting. I argue that personnel in a day center for people with acquired brain damage are constantly involved in narrating about the disabled participants. The negotiation of who the participant is, and foremost will be, is in constant negotiation in regard to issues of hope. I further argue that hope is a meaning-making process and, as such, it has been defined as crucially connected to time. Hope has been said to enable a connection between the present and the future, because action taken in the present could bring about (positive) change in the future. However, I show that hope, in relation to narratives told about people with severe disabilities that are considered "incurable," must be understood within a realm of narrative foreclosure. Time seems to have lost the openness of its horizon for these people, and a narrative that tells of immediacy rather than chronology is created, resulting in hope being established within the present.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4499735
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405284
Date: 10 1, 2003
Author(s): On-Cho Ng Sheldon
Abstract: On-Cho Ng, "The Epochal Concept of 'Early Modernity' and the Intellectual History of Late
Imperial China," Journal of World History 14:1 (2003), 37-61.
On-Cho Ng
1
37
14
Journal of World History
2003
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502264
Journal Title: History and Theory
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i405481
Date: 12 1, 1944
Author(s): Joad Jonathan
Abstract: C. E. M. Joad, Philosophy, The Teach Yourself Books series (London: The English Universi-
ties Press, 1944), 13.
Joad
13
Philosophy
1944
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4502282
Journal Title: Policy Sciences
Publisher: Elsevier Scientific Publishing Company
Issue: i407754
Date: 11 1, 1953
Author(s): Wittgenstein Michael
Abstract: In this article we develop philosophically Cronbach's (1982) suggestion that the evaluator is an educator. The motivation for this article arose from problems encountered by us on a major evaluation project and from dissatisfaction with the existent philosophical underpinnings of evaluation theory. We propose, and provide a justification for, a model of evaluation based upon the notion of the evaluator as educator, which is sufficiently broad philosophically not only to subsume scientistic and humanistic models, but also to transcend them. Within this broad philosophical model we develop a particular theory of evaluation, based essentially upon Wittgenstein, and in which the notion of a learning community is taken as central. Finally we consider some practical implications of this theory of evaluation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4532052
Journal Title: Transactions of the American Philological Association (1974-)
Publisher: The Johns Hopkins University Press
Issue: i406101
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): WiedemannAbstract: Davidson
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4543295
Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408519
Date: 1 1, 1984
Author(s): Janaway Sebastian
Abstract: Op. cit., pp. 270 and 273.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545186
Journal Title: Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society
Publisher: Aristotelian Society
Issue: i408527
Date: 1 1, 1968
Author(s): Hart John
Abstract: Raz, op. cit., p. 243.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4545388
Journal Title: Central European History
Publisher: Humanities Press, Inc.
Issue: i412997
Date: 1 1, 1997
Author(s): Berlant Geoff
Abstract: Lauren
Berlant, The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship (Durham,
1997), esp. "Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere," 1-24
Berlant
Introduction: The Intimate Public Sphere
1
The Queen of America Goes to Washington City: Essays on Sex and Citizenship
1997
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4546795
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219691
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Barthes Charles F.
Abstract: Northrop Frye's recent criticism confronts the contemporary problem raised most powerfully by the Vietnam War-can we find a telos or definition of man on which we can ground our moral reactions and our visions of human development. Frye establishes this telos by an analysis of origins. Contained in a civilization's statements of "concern," in its imaginative treatments of its own condition, one can find an underlying structure of desire which defines the ends of man. This structure and the recurrent images it produces then can serve as the middle terms people use to justify and value their actions. Frye shares his treatment of mediation with contemporary Hegelians like Sartre, Lukács, and Ricoeur, but grounds his absolute in tradition rather than in ideal absolutes or posited evolutionary patterns. Frye's idea of mediation also provides an ethical model for literary criticism: the critic tries to combine literature as product and as cultural possession by interpreting his materials as projections of imaginative desire. Furthermore, we can use Frye to criticize the relativist denial of origins in structuralist critics like Michel Foucault and Jacques Derrida.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/461175
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219705
Date: 1 1, 1966
Author(s): Lord Walter J.
Abstract: Whereas the spoken word is part of present actuality, the written word normally is not. The writer, in isolation, constructs a role for his "audience" to play, and readers fictionalize themselves to correspond to the author's projection. The way readers fictionalize themselves shifts throughout literary history: Chaucer, Lyly, Nashe, Hemingway, and others furnish cases in point. All writing, from scientific monograph to history, epistolary correspondence, and diary writing, fictionalizes its readers. In oral performance, too, some fictionalizing of audience occurs, but in the live interaction between narrator and audience there is an existential relationship as well: the oral narrator modifies his story in accord with the real-not imagined-fatigue, enthusiasm, or other reactions of his listeners. Fictionalizing of audiences correlates with the use of masks or personae marking human communication generally, even with oneself. Lovers try to strip off all masks, and oral communication in a context of love can reduce masks to a minimum. In written communication and, a fortiori, print the masks are less removable.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/461344
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219705
Date: 1 1, 1972
Author(s): Sittler Roy
Abstract: Starting with Raglan's suggestion that Falstaff may be a "holy fool" and with Auden's belief that he is a comic symbol of charity, this essay explores the medieval tradition of wise fool, and especially Falstaff's always canny use of biblical allusion. His various jests, if read in relation to the political action of the main plot, reveal him as characterizing England's time of day and parodying the unchristian behavior of Hotspur, Henry, and Hal. By the time he dies mumbling Psalm xxiii to an uncomprehending Nell Quickly, there have accumulated many hints that he is, in fact, a candle to his age, a professional Fool with the heart of a faithful Lazarus, and destined to join Mowbray in Abraham's bosom. The merriment for which readers have found him lovable amid his masquerades of vice has its mysterious basis in his covertly Christian understanding of England's neo-Roman Caesars.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/461346
Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: i412005
Date: 7 1, 2000
Author(s): Woeber Stefan
Abstract: This article looks at the beginnings of anti-apartheid/anticolonial literary cultures in Johannesburg and Maputo (then Lourenqo Marques) after the Second World War. It pays specific attention to the ways in which they attempted to harness aesthetics of "newness." By focusing on the influential journals Drum (1951-) and Itinerário (1941-1955), I argue that both journals tapped into transnational intellectual currents such as Harlem Renaissance writing, but that the discrete discursive networks of English and Portuguese contributed to a differentiation of their aesthetic approaches. Itinerdrio acted out an avantgarde-like resistance to bourgeois/colonial culture. Drum was market-driven and achieved in its early phase a compromise between a racially circumscribed mass-cultural appeal and the literate ideals of mission-educated South African blacks. These differences can then be factored into an analysis of persistent differences between the literatures of South Africa and Mozambique.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4618384
Journal Title: Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
Publisher: Presses de la Fondation nationale des sciences politiques
Issue: i413107
Date: 12 1, 2004
Author(s): NeutresAbstract: Julien Neutres, «Le cinéma fait-il l'histoire? Le cas de
La Dolce Vita», Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire, 83, juillet-
septembre 2004, p. 53-63.
Neutres
juillet
53
83
Vingtième Siècle. Revue d'histoire
2004
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4619191
Journal Title: Annals of the Association of American Geographers
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i413081
Date: 3 1, 1992
Author(s): Zelinsky Jonathan M.
Abstract: Concepts of place, narrative, tradition, and identity are employed in a conservative reading of the Texas A&M Bonfire. Texas A&M embodied regional narratives of a dual Southern commitment to economic and technological development and conservation of traditional cultural. Institutionalized at Texas A&M in the late nineteenth century, these narratives made a paradoxical place. Bonfire expressed and obscured this paradox. In line with the narrative of tradition, Texas A&M was an all-male military school until 1965. The students were uniform, isolated, and regimented. This social structure engendered intense feelings of loyalty and community. These social emotions were further aroused at events like yell practice, and projected onto Bonfire. After the Second World War the commitment of university administrators to economic and technological progress increasingly threatened the narrative of tradition and the cultivation of manliness. Student veneration of Bonfire intensified. After 1965 mandatory military drill was discontinued, women were enrolled, and the student body was enlarged. Social pluralism fragmented the meaning of Bonfire; conflict and disorderly behavior ensued. By the 1990s the university had partly rationalized Bonfire as a corporate symbol; however, this trend was tragically terminated in 1999 when the cumulative errors of the oral tradition caused Bonfire to collapse, killing twelve students.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4620244
Journal Title: International Studies Quarterly
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i412377
Date: 6 1, 2002
Author(s): Zehfuss Vincent
Abstract: Suez crisis,
Mattern (2005)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4621718
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219755
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Toulmin Paul B.
Abstract: The debate about validity in interpretation has pitted monism against pluralism. Some theorists insist that any literary work has a single, determinate meaning, and others argue that there are no limits to the readings a text allows. Neither view adequately describes the field of conflicting interpretations. Critics can and do have legitimate disagreements about literary works; yet we can also say that some readings are wrong, not simply different. The hermeneutic field is divided among conflicting systems of interpretation, each based on different presuppositions that decide what its procedures will disclose and what they will disguise. But several tests for validity-inclusiveness, efficacy, and intersubjectivity-act as constraints on reading and regulate claims to legitimacy. While these tests have limitations that prevent them from resolving all hermeneutic disagreements, literary criticism is nevertheless a rational, disciplined enterprise-though an inherently pluralistic one.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462275
Journal Title: The Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute
Publisher: Blackwell Publishers
Issue: i413016
Date: 12 1, 1999
Author(s): Cyprus News Agency Olga
Abstract: This article is an ethnographic exploration of the process through which citizens come to conceptualize their identities as political subjects in rapidly changing contexts. The focus of the article is the lifting, in 2003, of a ban on crossing between the northern and southern parts of the island of Cyprus, which had been instituted in 1974. The article examines how this new political change affected state rhetoric, and concentrates on the reactions of Greek-Cypriot citizens to this shift. These data are related to the wider discussion on the political theory of subjectivity and the concept of 'event', where, it is argued, anthropology has a significant contribution to make. / Le présent article est une exploration ethnographique des processus par lequel les citoyens en viennent à conceptualiser leurs identités comme sujets politiques dans des contextes de changements rapides. Il est centré sur l'abolition, en 2003, de l'interdiction de passage imposée en 1974 entre les parties Nord et Sud de L'île de Chypre. L'auteur examine la manière dont ce nouveau changement politique a affecté la rhétorique étatique, et se concentre sur les réactions des Chypriotes Grecs à cette évolution. Ces données sont replacées dans un cadre de discussion plus large sur la théorie politique de la subjectivité et le concept « d'événement », auquel l'anthropologie peut, selon l'auteur, apporter une contribution importante.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/4623074
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219790
Date: 5 1, 1980
Author(s): Wolterstorff Roger
Abstract: Modern critical theory is commonly thought of as a collection of diverse methods, schools, systems, and approaches. There is, however, a significant pattern in the diversity. This pattern is generated by the conflict between the widespread effort of twentieth-century theorists to make criticism scientific and the internal resistance to that effort presented by the hermeneutic impulse. The scientific tradition is characterized and unified by a set of common theoretical principles and by a common sequence of transformations that each school within it undergoes. The result of these transformations is that every proposed scientific model for criticism changes into an interpretive method and the project of scientific criticism is subverted.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462439
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219804
Date: 10 1, 1962
Author(s): Williams Donald L.
Abstract: Reason as the medium of truth and freedom-though suppressed, the idea returns; it is presumed by our very participation in discourse. Its opponents say that only practices are real. But, as Milton and Habermas know, reason is itself a practice. Milton's "free and lawful debate at all times... of what opinion soever" recognizes interestedness, perspectivity, and struggle; Habermas's unconstrained communication is a neverachieved goal (an "ideal") regulating discursive practices here and now. Both writers recognize that meanings are cultural, social, and existential, that knowledge cannot be separated from interests; but they do not therefore stand outside praxis rhapsodizing about struggle and contingency. Instead, they seek to move toward social freedom and individual autonomy through reason-able communication-that ongoing search for unforced agreement which is our usual and best alternative to violence, our usual and best way to find meaning in the world, in our selves, and in one another.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462687
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219810
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Wordsworth Herbert F.
Abstract: The fortunes of epiphany indicate both recent historical disparities within literary criticism and current cultural disparities between academic and popular discourse. The contextualist practice of Wordsworth and Joyce, in contrast to the purist theory that arose with the New Criticism, suggests that epiphany is a narrative device underscoring the historical and cultural construction of character. This conception is borne out by the original Epiphany, in Matthew, which manifests divine personality to human eyes through an episode of cultural difference and accommodation. Robert Browning's historicist poetry uses comparable but secular means of manifesting personality. In his dramatic monologues "Karshish," "My Star," and " 'Transcendentalism,' " epiphanic themes serve as measures of their speakers' cultural construction. In discerning the relative differentiae that characterize such speakers, Browning's readers encounter their own relativity to interpretive conditions. As these examples imply, the modern literary epiphany ultimately effects the hermeneutic manifestation of the reader.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/462875
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219834
Date: 10 1, 1934
Author(s): Wyzewa Rebecca
Abstract: Mallarmé constructs a "crisis of verse" that mimes the circumstances of loss and the moment of lamentation to produce his celebrated poetic purity. Indeed, he constructs this purity out of the materials of ritual and philosophical defilement: not only does his poetic theory valorize death and danger, but his poetic practice largely relies on contact with the foreign, on semantic contagion, and on ambiguity. The significance of this defilement spreads in multiple directions: it is instrumental in producing newness and in mediating Mallarmé's professional rivalry with Wagner, it bears witness to the domestic crisis of the Third Republic, and it functions as a form of resistance to cultural assimilation. Moreover, because defilement is at once material and symbolic and because that "symbolism" is an obstinately obscure mode of referentiality, Mallarmé's cultivation of defilement is a recuperation of the scapegoats that "pure" philosophy necessarily exiles: the material and the hyperessential.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463153
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219832
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Yellin Peter A.
Abstract: In his Narrative (1845), Frederick Douglass constructs a self based on conversion rhetoric and binary logic. In the greatly expanded My Bondage and My Freedom (1855), he complicates this textual self by both imitating and criticizing tropes conventionally used in the slavery debate, such as metaphors related to animals. Christianity, and manhood. Emphasizing the constructed nature of mimesis and metaphor, Douglass demonstrates his ability to escape the bondage of reductionist language even as he claims the power associated with linguistic mastery. This revision of self emerges from his experience of northern racism, manifested in his limited role in William Lloyd Garrison's organization. Douglass's renunciation of Garrisonian dogma and his entry into political action-including his striking textual reinterpretation of the United States Constitution-coincide with the stylistically "modernist" self of the second autobiography.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463167
Journal Title: PMLA
Publisher: Modern Language Association of America
Issue: i219840
Date: 10 1, 1976
Author(s): Williams Wai Chee
Abstract: Does a literary text remain the same object across time? This essay answers no and bases a defense of literature on that answer. Temporal extension, a phenomenon neglected in contemporary literary studies, makes some meanings unrecoverable and others newly possible. A text endures as a nonintegral survivor, an echo of what it was and of what it might become, its resonance changing with shifts in interpretive contexts. Since this resonance cannot be addressed by synchronic historicism, I propose an alternative, diachronic historicism, inspired especially by scientific theories on background noise, by Einstein's account of the relativity of simultaneity, and by critiques of the visual bias in Western epistemology. I try to theorize the text as a temporal continuum, thick with receding and incipient nuances, exercising the ears of readers in divergent ways and yielding its words to contrary claims. Literature thus encourages a semantic democracy that honors disagreement as a crucial fact of civil society.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/463483
Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220185
Date: 1 1, 1969
Author(s): Ricoeur Mario J.
Abstract: Ricoeur, Husserl, pp. 45-49
Ricoeur
45
Husserl
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468315
Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220185
Date: 1 1, 1971
Author(s): Reiss Morton W.
Abstract: Edmund Reiss, "Symbolic Detail in Medieval Narrative: Floris and Blanche-
flour," PLL, 7 (1971), 339.
Reiss
339
7
PLL
1971
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468317
Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1969
Author(s): Janson F. E.
Abstract: Reproduced as Fig. 680 in H. W. Janson's History of Art (New York, 1969),
p. 452.
Janson
452
History of Art
1969
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468342
Journal Title: New Literary History
Publisher: University of Virginia
Issue: i220193
Date: 10 1, 1970
Author(s): Schmidt Cyrus
Abstract: GStA, IV, 1, 266, 11. 6ff.
1
266
IV
GStA
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/468347
Journal Title: Hispanic Review
Publisher: University of Pennsylvania
Issue: i220412
Date: 7 1, 1961
Author(s): Aranguren Thomas
Abstract: Aranguren, ibid.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/471580
Journal Title: Italica
Publisher: American Association of Teachers of Italian
Issue: i220755
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Toulmin Giorgio
Abstract: Stephen Toulmin (Human Understanding: The Collective Use and Evolution of
Concepts. Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1972, p. 23)
Toulmin
23
Human Understanding: The Collective Use and Evolution of Concepts
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/479135
Journal Title: Ethnohistory
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: i220959
Date: 4 1, 1981
Author(s): Walens Michael
Abstract: This paper outlines an approach to historical narratives that replaces the atomism of actor and event with a model that stresses the integration of event, narrative, and historical practice. The notion of contact as an event is addressed in the context of the Northwest Coast. A Heiltsuk English narrative dealing with contact is analyzed in the light of Heiltsuk cultural data. The analysis centers on Jakobson's distinction between metaphor and metonymy and leads to the conclusion that for the Heiltsuk, contact with Europeans resulted in the acquisition of a linear historicity. Finally, notions of temporality are examined with respect to historical practice and North American Indian cultures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/482699
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221175
Date: 10 1, 1978
Author(s): Habermas Jack
Abstract: Ricoeur, op. cit., p. 165
165
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/487850
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221182
Date: 7 1, 1975
Author(s): Riegel Trent
Abstract: Klaus Riegel, "Toward a Dialectical Theory of Development" in Human
Development, Vol. 18 (1975)
Riegel
18
Human Development
1975
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488026
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221198
Date: 10 1, 1984
Author(s): Wolin Pauline
Abstract: Wolin, "Modernism and Post-Modernism" 18.
Wolin
18
Modernism and Post-Modernism
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488256
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221189
Date: 10 1, 1980
Author(s): Marks Andreas
Abstract: AliceJardine cited in Footnote 56 and heressay "Gynesis,"
diacritics, 12:2 (Summer 1982), 54-65
10.2307/464680
54
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488352
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: New German Critique
Issue: i221189
Date: 10 1, 1971
Author(s): Rorty Seyla
Abstract: Chicago School (Stanley Tigerman, Frederick Read, Peter
Pran, Stuart Cohen, Thomas Beeby, Anders Nerheim) exhibited at "Die Revision der
Moderne," Deutsches Architekturmuseum, Frankfurt, Summer 1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488356
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221214
Date: 1 1, 1977
Author(s): Freud Joel
Abstract: Freud, "Instincts and their Vicissitudes," Complete Works vol. 14, 121-22.
Freud
Instincts and their Vicissitudes
121
14
Complete Works
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488385
Journal Title: New German Critique
Publisher: Telos Press
Issue: i221233
Date: 1 1, 1967
Author(s): Hoffmann Andreas
Abstract: E.T.A. Hoffmann, "Der Sandmann," Werke 2 (Frankfurt/Main: Insel, 1967) 38.
Hoffmann
Der Sandmann
38
2
Werke
1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/488598
Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221540
Date: 5 1, 1984
Author(s): Canary Harry
Abstract: February 1984 issue of AHA Perspectives
February
AHA Perspectives
1984
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/493382
Journal Title: The History Teacher
Publisher: Society for History Education
Issue: i221566
Date: 11 1, 1991
Author(s): Egan John E.
Abstract: Los Angeles Times, Feb. 20, 1991, p. E6
Feb. 20
6
Los Angeles Times
1991
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/494084
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221611
Date: 12 1, 1968
Author(s): Zhu Wei-qun
Abstract: Xu, p. 100
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495050
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221608
Date: 7 1, 1972
Author(s): Yingshi Anthony C.
Abstract: Jacques Derrida in Positions (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 1972), p. 77
77
Jacques Derrida in Positions
1972
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495139
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CLEAR
Issue: i221614
Date: 12 1, 1993
Author(s): Ning Sheng-Tai
Abstract: "Construct-
ing Postmodernism: the Chinese Case and Its Different Versions" (Canadian Review of Comparative Litera-
ture 20.1-2 [1993]: 49-61
1
49
20
Canadian Review of Comparative Literature
1993
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495308
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CODA Press
Issue: i221601
Date: 7 1, 1955
Author(s): Stevens Pauline
Abstract: "The Course of a Particular" (p. 157)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/495429
Journal Title: The Review of English Studies
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i222390
Date: 8 1, 1993
Author(s): Moore Susan
Abstract: Moore, 'In Defense of Suspense', 99.
Moore
99
Defense of Suspense
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/518944
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222578
Date: 1 1, 1983
Author(s): Thiongo Sabry
Abstract: This paper challenges the common assumption that the attention which modern literary theory pays to the textual aspects of literature is achieved at the expense of humanistic and moral concerns. It starts by outlining how modern literary theory differs epistemologically from the traditional critical approaches to literature. Traditional critical theory was developed in the defense of poetry against Plato's accusations, real or imagined, and this informed both its critical practice and its concept of man. It established its epistemology on an aesthetic, moral, social, philosophical or scientific basis in a manner that encumbered literature with the concepts of man inherent in them. In contrast, modern literary theory started from a different premise: instead of seeking to justify literature and its moral relevance, it strove to identify its literariness and the dynamics of its structure by using the disciplines of semiotics and linguistics. It posited the text as an autonomous entity and a complete structure aware of its existence in a society of texts with which it conducts a profoundly intertextual dialogue. As an autonomous structure, the literary work is independent of other social or philosophical constructs and thus capable of conducting a meaningful dialogue with them. The paper elaborates the various conceptual frameworks of Russian formalism, intertextuality, structuralism and deconstruction in order to examine their implicit assumptions about man. It shows how the autonomous and dialogical nature of the literary work in its Bakhtinian sense are relevant to the concept of man inherent in modern literary theory. In its elaboration of this concept, the paper shows how it was developed in conflict with the hierarchical nature of traditional, ethical and philosophical values. It illustrates also the relevance of autonomy, self-regulation, free-play and fair representation inherent in many concepts of modern literary theory to the question of human rights. The question of human rights in modern literary theory is closely connected to its concept of the "subject"; the paper outlines Barthes' concept of the centrality of the human subject and Derrida's concept of différance and its impact on his understanding of the concept of the subject. With Derrida's différance, which means both difference and deferral, it became impossible to talk about the concept of the "subject" in isolation from that of the "other," whether one is dealing with the national aspects of the subject or with its gender issues. The deconstruction of the concept of the "subject" brings into the fore the omitted, marginalised and neglected aspects pertinent to its composition and accentuates both the processes of difference and deferral inherent in it. The representation of the subject implies its difference from, and indeed suppression of, the other. It also shows how Derrida's concept of différance dealt a devastating blow to the various philosophical absolutes and social hierarchies which controlled our thinking. The paper then examines the implications of these new critical and philosophical concepts for two different "others": the similar other within the culture (women) and the different other, the stranger/outsider to the dominant Western culture. It demonstrates how modern literary theory helped women to liberate themselves from cultural oppression by deconstructing patriarchal binary thinking and its inherent bias against women and so consolidate their human rights. It limits itself in this domain to a discussion of the contribution of French feminist literary theory, particularly the work of Hélèn Cixous, Luce Irigaray and Julia Kristeva. Their work shows how the literary, philosophical and critical canon perpetuated patriarchy and oppressed women. As for the different other, the paper refers to the work of Edward Said in his deconstruction of Orientalism and its discourse which subjects the other to the demands, needs and visions of the Western "self" and sacrifices in the process his identity and human rights. It also studies the work of the African American critic Henry Louis Gates and shows how his attempt to develop a literary theory based on, and deriving its conceptual framework from, the literature of African and Afro-American writers played a significant role in liberating the African American, undermining their biased representation in the culture, and upholding their human rights.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521802
Journal Title: Alif: Journal of Comparative Poetics
Publisher: American University in Cairo. Department of English and Comparative Literature
Issue: i222566
Date: 4 1, 1974
Author(s): Culler ﻣﻬﺎ ﺟﻼﻝ
Abstract: «At the basis of the literary act is a consciousness of language. Whether or not the writer is given to abstract reflexion, there is in literature itself a metaliterary dimension.» In his article on the Evolution of Literary Theory, Tzvetan Todorov examines the relation between the «discourse on Literature» and the object of that discourse: literature. Whereas exegesis concerns itself with the Elucidation and explanation of an historically given object, theory itself constitutes its object. Theory then is in turn seen to be historically informed. From the Poetics of Aristotle, through the medieval hermeneuts, the Renaissance concern with genres, Todorov traces the development of the theoretical discourse which proposes literature as its object. Only in the romantic period is a theory of literature, in the strict sense, elaborated. In the 20th century this theory is further influenced by other emergent disciplines :Marxism, psychoanalysis etc. The final pages of Todorov's paper consider in detail the impact of structuralism, particularly in France, on the literary theoretical discourse. He concludes with reference to the changes taking place currently. According to Todorov, it is in the «idea of genre» that the «transformation will take place.»
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/521871
Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223701
Date: 12 1, 1971
Author(s): Ricouer Barbara A.
Abstract: Ricouer, "The Model of the Text," 93.
Ricouer
93
The Model of the Text
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/539608
Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223766
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Weeks Clover Nolan
Abstract: The construction of gender as patterned and enacted in many northern California bachelor parties is central to a more inclusive clustering and dichotomization of qualities and experiences in which masculine intentionality is defined in contradistinction to female "Otherness" and object-status. As forced Otherness, the bachelor's feminization, accomplished in part by cross-dressing and then stripping him, is thus also an objectification, a humiliation, and an expulsion.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541075
Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223750
Date: 3 1, 1987
Author(s): Zurbuchen Kenneth M.
Abstract: Recent studies on the interplay of written texts and oral performance have shifted away from "intrinsic" models of literacy and orality in favor of approaches that emphasize the ideological, social, and historical character of oral and literate practices. In keeping with this trend, I discuss how and why a minority religious community in Sulawesi (Indonesia) has incorporated writing and related textual practices into its tradition of ritual song performance.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541106
Journal Title: The Journal of American Folklore
Publisher: American Folklore Society
Issue: i223774
Date: 1 1, 1989
Author(s): Wang Barbara Rose
Abstract: This article describes fieldwork with Gypsy musicians of the Isten Gyülekezet, a Pentecostal church in southwest Hungary. Instrumental music performance represented a special form of leadership there, restricted by gender and based in secular cultural history as well as religious practice. Musicians and other believers interpreted my role as a woman ethnographer in contrasting ways. The exposure of these differences necessitates reflection upon the depth to which the ethnographer can know the world of the people with whom she works.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/541718
Journal Title: Journal of Near Eastern Studies
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i224007
Date: 4 1, 1976
Author(s): Lamberg-Karlovsky A. J.
Abstract: Hallo, "Royal Hymns and Mesopotamian
Unity," Journal of Cuneiform Studies 17 (1963): 112-
18.
10.2307/1359179
112
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/545469
Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd. For the London School of Economics
Issue: i224978
Date: 12 1, 1978
Author(s): Adorno Robert
Abstract: This paper is an advocacy for the employment of psychoanalytical concepts within sociological theorizing about the individual. Through an exposition of Freud's views on the development of intra-psychic structure and a critique of Parson's reduction of psychoanalysis to a branch of learning theory, I attempt to show that the sociological approach to the individual is implicitly behavioural and imprisoned in a series of assumptions which, among other things, treats subjectivity as epiphenomenal and identity as an unmediated reflection of some external reality. In contrast, psychoanalysis presents to us a picture of the individual as flawed and ambivalent in his relation to society, formed by but at odds with the demands of culture. In particular, the psychoanalytic concept of identification reveals that the acquisition of identity is a hard-won achievement marked by the renunciation of lost and forbidden objects. I argue, following Freud and Lacan, that the ego, far from being an agency of reason, somehow directly 'plugged into' reality, constitutes itself in the fantasied image of another and that the quality of this identification crucially affects the way the world is experienced and believed by the individual. This argument is elaborated through a discussion of Peter Berger's remarks on the social causes of identity crisis which, when set against the work of object-relations theorists on those suffering from disturbances of identity such as, for example, schizoid personalities, are shown to be both superficial and misleading. I conclude the paper by arguing that while psychoanalysis can enhance our understanding of the way in which the individual is formed by and through culture it also cautions us against making simple generalizations about the impact of culture upon the person, showing that the individual never submits himself unequivocally to its demands and interdicts.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/589361
Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge and Kegan Paul Ltd. For the London School of Economics
Issue: i224988
Date: 6 1, 1961
Author(s): Dalmais Kieran
Abstract: This paper is a preliminary exploration of a neglected area in sociology of religion. It aims to interpret and to characterize the distinctive performative basis of Christian liturgy. Ambiguities in liturgical enactment can be routinely handled as long as they relate to the nuministic content of the rite and not to its social form. Silence is a distinctive non-reducible phenomenon of rite that can be related to the regulation of ceremonial form through tactful management of the implicit. Liturgies work on the basis of an apophatic characteristic that makes them distinctive as religious rituals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/590801
Journal Title: The British Journal of Sociology
Publisher: Routledge Journals for the London School of Economics and Political Science
Issue: i225019
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Travers Andrew
Abstract: Analysis of a sequence of literary frames suggests that a heightened experience of interactional reality is also anomically constructive of the frame. In each of 16 frames, Durkheimian anomie neither destroys the frame's integrity nor renders its routine grounds unintelligible, as Goffman and Garfinkel would claim it must. Paradoxically, anomie ritually intensifies the frame. The selves in the paper's sequence of highly ritualized frames are not routine selves, however. They are 'strangers to themselves'. The analysis shows how Mead's 'I' can re-emerge from Goffman's ritual thinking - where the 'I' is collapsed into an interactionally-bound 'me' - as an original manifestation of great importance to interactants, and therefore to society as well. (Parenthetically it is also argued that selves need an element of rituality in order to be selflike and that it is interactional rituality which guarantees the evolution of social life beyond given frames, corpora, cultural repertoires, and collective representations.) The idea that interactants can be strangers to themselves is an advance on Goffman's and Garfinkel's accounts of interactional selfhood, but one that problematizes the prosecution of the interaction sociology that Goffman and Garfinkel pioneer, since strangers to themselves disappear in normal sociological appearances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/591341
Journal Title: Journal of the American Oriental Society
Publisher: American Oriental Society
Issue: i225333
Date: 12 1, 1986
Author(s): Feenberg Sheldon
Abstract: "Outline of the Genesis of Ideology in Modern Societies," in
The Political Forms of Modern Society, ed. John Thompson
[Cambridge: Polity Press, 1986], 181-236
Outline of the Genesis of Ideology in Modern Societies
181
The Political Forms of Modern Society
1986
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/604085
Journal Title: Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Publisher: The School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London
Issue: i225485
Date: 1 1, 1963
Author(s): von Rad John
Abstract: L'esprit humain selon C. Levi-Strauss', 30.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/614518
Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Institute of British Geographers
Issue: i225701
Date: 1 1, 1993
Author(s): Werlen Andrew
Abstract: This paper offers a dialectical interpretation of place. It argues that much of the confusion in the literature on place stems from its failure to engage with the ontological nature of place. This has led to much research implicitly accepting a restrictive Cartesian view of socio-spatial reality. Entrikin's (1991) 'betweenness of place' thesis is a notable recent illustration. In this paper I suggest that the problematic nature of place and its relationship to space can be resolved through a dialectical mode of argumentation. The spatialized dialectic of Henri Lefebvre offers a fruitful framework for reconciling the interaction between place and space insofar as it strives to overcome dualistic conceptions of capitalist spatiality. Lefevbre's dialectical approach will be counterposed to Entrikin's argument. The paper concludes by outlining the implications of the respective perspectives for robust place theorization and place politics.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/622564
Journal Title: Transactions of the Institute of British Geographers
Publisher: Royal Geographical Society (With the Institute of British Geographers)
Issue: i225724
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Zabus Clive
Abstract: Deconstruction has become a theme in various strands of geographical research. It has not, however, been the subject of much explicit commentary. This paper elaborates on some basic themes concerning the relationship between deconstruction and conceptualizations of context, with particular reference to issues of textual interpretation. The double displacement of textuality characteristic of deconstruction is discussed, followed by a consideration of the themes of 'writing' and 'iterability' as distinctive figures for an alternative spatialization of concepts of context. It is argued that deconstruction informs a questioning of the normative assumptions underwriting the value and empirical identity of context.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/623128
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201462
Date: 3 1, 1986
Author(s): Turner Mary
Abstract: This article explores a paradox - the simultaneous cultivation and suppression of "healing dramas" by pediatric rehabilitation therapists. Dramatic moments are defined as ones in which the routine exercises and treatment activities of therapeutic practice are transformed into narrative plots. These improvisational plots involve multiple characters, risks, suspense, and above all, a heightened sense that something is at stake. Experience itself becomes the focus of attention for the patient. Based upon ethnographic research in Chicago and Los Angeles, this article offers an anatomy of two such moments, investigating not only how healing dramas are constructed between patients and healers but how and why institutional discourses and practices invite their abandonment.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640585
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201461
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Traverso Regina M.
Abstract: This article investigates the exchanges of letters of 1987 between the historians Martin Broszat and Saul Friedlander through the interpretive framework of "dialogue." It is suggested that dialogue does not have a dyadic structure, but involves ever shifting Thirds that function as mediators in dialogue, i.e., God, conscience, reason, or tradition. On one hand, Thirds provide a seemingly stable, external reference point; on the other hand, they open up space for the play of power and desire. Four categories of Thirds are identified and their place and role in the dialogue between Broszat and Friedlander analyzed. The psychoanalytically inspired notions of "acting-out" and "working-through" are employed in order to interpret the varying degrees of critical control Broszat and Friedlander were able to apply to these interfering Thirds. Finally, I give an overall interpretation of Broszat's and Friedlander's positions in the dialogue, guided by the concepts of acting-out and working-through.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640616
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201469
Date: 9 1, 1965
Author(s): Winnicott Allen
Abstract: Psychoanalytic anthropologists assume that folktales often reflect unconscious beliefs and attitudes of listeners, who can tolerate anxiety-provoking images and messages (perhaps wish fulfillments) because these have been projected at a safe distance into the characters in the story. Here I argue that our theory for how such a process occurs is inadequate in terms of contemporary psychoanalytic theory. We need to reexamine a number of questions for which we may have assumed we already have answers, including the nature of repression and how it is accomplished; who or what "hears" an unconscious idea that has been collectively repressed when it is expressed in a folktale; and whether Freud's structural model of id-ego-super-ego can provide an adequate theoretical framework for understanding how unconscious ideas find their way into "expressive culture." I examine these questions in light of a folktale collected among Brazilian peasants. I conclude by questioning the central importance of the ego in repression, and propose a concept of a whole, or supraordinate, self to describe the actual agency in charge of repression.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640641
Journal Title: Ethos
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i201474
Date: 12 1, 1989
Author(s): Urban Joseph P.
Abstract: A detailed narrative performed by a Gros Ventre elder is analyzed for its significance in the construction of cultural identity. In the context of these analyses, it is argued that narrative performance can be central to the active construction of cultural identity for individuals engaged in social interaction. In the present instance, certain performative features of the narrative involve a discursive identification by the narrator with the narrative protagonist that affords a personal resolution of a cultural crisis-in-meaning. Finally, this discursive identification by the narrator results in the re-creation of narrative events that involve the audience as participants in ways that powerfully impact the cultural identities they too will construct.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/640707
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226344
Date: 5 1, 1972
Author(s): Zago Charles F.
Abstract: Notions of gender have a givenness for most people as they are rooted in fundamental assumptions about the underlying meaning of reality. In Buddhist Thailand, gender notions can be shown to derive from sources that formulate a Buddhist world view. In this paper it is maintained, contrary to the argument of some scholars, that Thai Buddhist culture does not relegate women to a religiously inferior status relative to men. Rather, both males and females who understand the world in Buddhist terms face the same problem of attachment to the world, although the characteristic tension between worldly attachment and orientation toward Buddhist salvation is expressed for females in gender images that are different than those for males. [gender imagery, images of women, sex roles, Buddhism, Thailand]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/643848
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226344
Date: 5 1, 1968
Author(s): Young Robert
Abstract: A discussion of the concept of power provides the theoretical basis for a semantic analysis of a case in which power changes hands. It is argued that a relationship of power presumes the capacity of ideas to require submission and that changes of power accompany changes in actors' conceptions of reality. The semantic analysis points to a pan-Indonesian conception of how power is created and destroyed. [power, political anthropology, symbolic analysis, complex organizations, Indonesia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/643850
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226345
Date: 8 1, 1976
Author(s): Whitten Michael F.
Abstract: In their interpretations of magical acts and utterances, anthropologists frequently argue that magic and technology are informed by two different kinds of logic, the former "expressive" in character, the latter "instrumental." A close analysis of magical hunting songs used by the Aguaruna of Amazonian Peru reveals that the songs are part of a general ordering process that encompasses the strategic use of thoughts, speech, objects, and acts to achieve practical ends. In Aguaruna thought the expressive imagery of magical songs is an instrumental tool that shapes events in the performer's world. [magic, ritual language, symbolic/cognitive analysis, native peoples of Amazonia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644631
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226336
Date: 5 1, 1977
Author(s): Tuan Miles
Abstract: This article describes how the people of Cartago, Costa Rica -- compelled, like each of us, to create -- incorporate the material culture of their town's market and plaza into social situations. In so doing, they move from the physical reality of simply being there to the distinctive social realities of being-in-the-market and being-in-the-plaza. The juxtaposition of these two complementary realities, the article concludes, constitutes the dialectic through which Spanish American culture becomes. [interpretation, symbolic interactionism, experience, material culture, humanistic anthropology]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644684
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226338
Date: 11 1, 1974
Author(s): Thompson Paul
Abstract: In any field of experience anthropologists are confronted by spates of signs, many of which they fail to perceive. By way of an analysis of the mundane activities associated with riding a Songhay bush taxi in the Republic of Niger, this article probes the reflexive process through which anthropologist and ethnographic other learn to interpret the signs that comprise the discourse of social action. Having been confronted repeatedly with the signs of the other's universe, anthropologists may not only gain a new awareness of the sociocultural systems they seek to uncover but may also realize the limitations of their knowledge. Through what Dilthey called the hermeneutic, anthropologists will be more able to proceed profoundly and accurately toward an understanding of those signs that give substance and order to the complexities of social universes. [ethnology, hermeneutics, fieldwork, Sahelian ethnography, Niger]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/644694
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226368
Date: 5 1, 1985
Author(s): White Judy
Abstract: Narrative, self, and face-to-face interaction all intersect in everyday storytelling practices in which children and caregivers make claims to personal experiences. This article examines such practices as a site for the social construction of self in early childhood. Drawing upon excerpts of narrative talk from a variety of cultural traditions in the United States, we describe the self-relevant meanings and processes entailed in three particular narrative practices. [narrative, self, childhood socialization, language socialization, ethnopsychology]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645081
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226367
Date: 2 1, 1977
Author(s): el Zein Michael
Abstract: The relationships among texts, readers, and moral community are explored in order to understand the dissonance and interplay of personal and textual authority in local Islamic practice (Sunni, Shaf'i branch) among Malagasy-speaking villagers of Mayotte (Comoro Islands, East Africa). A political economy of knowledge approach is linked to an analysis of recitation as a ritual activity in which illocutionary force exceeds referential meaning. The discussion has relevance for the understanding of the relationship between religious knowledge, power, and action in Islamic societies as well as of the interface between the oral and the written more generally. [Islam, religious texts and ritual utterances, knowledge, power, Malagasy, Comoros]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645250
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226374
Date: 11 1, 1982
Author(s): Wangyal Marcia S.
Abstract: Recent studies of performance genres suggest that many rituals generate propositional force by manipulating ritual frames and so drawing the audience to reflect upon various levels of performance reality. This article focuses on the fusion of such levels during the performance of a Tibetan opera before an audience of refugee Tibetans living in India, a spectacle wherein the mimetic performance of a mock exorcism became an actual exorcism. The article analyzes this transformation from the combined perspective of theatrical semiosis and speech act theory. [Tibet, performance theory, opera, ritual, theater]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645445
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226359
Date: 2 1, 1980
Author(s): Wikan Janice
Abstract: Examination of cultural and social factors surrounding zar spirit possession diagnoses in Northern Sudan suggests that a major issue addressed by the cult is the cultural overdetermination of women's selfhood. Circumcision and infibulation operate to establish in women a sense of self congruent with the cultural image of woman as reproducer. When experiences and expectations fail to mesh, some women fall ill and are ultimately diagnosed as possessed. Through acceptance of the possession diagnosis and participation in curing rites involving trance, a patient is given scope to expand and regenerate her sense of self and recontextualize her experiences. [ethnomedicine, women, Sudan, spirit possession, the self, gender identity]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645483
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226370
Date: 11 1, 1964
Author(s): Zuidema Constance
Abstract: The indigenous peoples of South America culturally code sensory perceptions in varied and complex ways. This article outlines and compares the sensory models of indigenous cultures from two contrasting South American regions: the central Andean highlands and the Amazonian lowlands. While the various peoples of the Andes appear to share the same basic sensory model, those of the Amazon manifest significant differences in the symbolic values they accord the different senses. One common factor among the Amazonians, which also distinguishes them from the Andeans, is the importance given to the senses dependent on proximity, particularly smell. Such differences can be attributed to a variety of causes and are seen to have a variety of cultural effects. In conclusion, the anthropological implications of examining indigenous theories and modes of perception are explored. [South America, Andes, Amazon, anthropology of the senses]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/645710
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226387
Date: 2 1, 1992
Author(s): Woolard Webb
Abstract: Sumbanese descriptions of the "traditional house" as a microcosm and emblem of local identity are neither unproblematic expressions of a cultural totality nor simply objectifications imposed by ethnography or modernity. One way the house is able to serve as a discursive object reflects, in part, specifically Sumbanese models of action and beliefs about language as refracted in changing historical circumstances. In ritual, speakers seek to engage and elicit responses from powerful others, whereas current religious and political developments reframe ritual words as means of describing a cultural world. Both sets of practices draw on the authority of "entextualized" language but interpret it in different ways. Emerging representations of cultural meaning are shaped by long-standing speech genres and by recent social and cultural transformations, mediated by shifting language ideologies. [culture theory, representation, discourse, ritual speech, language ideology, house, Indonesia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646048
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226394
Date: 11 1, 1977
Author(s): Witherspoon Robert
Abstract: An ethnographic study of the words and actions common to a shelter for people considered homeless and mentally ill shows how distinct forms of reasoning and personal agency relate to a set of practical concerns and political exigencies. Whereas the shelter's staff rely on and promote a referential language and direct, active forms of agency, its residents depend on tactical, persuasive uses of language and oblique, reactive forms of agency. Yet because the staff have the upper hand politically, their orientations to language, thought, and action take a more central role in encouraging people to act in sincere and reasonable ways. The residents draw on ideas of sincerity, reason, and personal accountability, but in makeshift ways, with the result that the ideas are caught up in the rhetoric of self-presentation. The article's findings underscore the need for anthropologists to attend to the diverse means, and political, linguistic, and cultural grounds, of human reason and agency. [agency, reason, language, power, mental illness, homelessness]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/646188
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226407
Date: 2 1, 1995
Author(s): Yankah Hirokazu
Abstract: In this article, I develop a theory of what I call the abeyance of agency, drawing upon a comparison between Fijian Christian church and gift-giving rituals. I argue that from religious practitioners' viewpoint, religious faith concerns not so much the intentions of an anthropomorphic God as the limits that are temporarily placed on ritual participants' agency. Such abeyance and subsequent recovery of their agency enables them to experience the intimations of an ultimate response. [agency, form, temporality, gift exchange, Christianity, Fiji]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647125
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226406
Date: 11 1, 1993
Author(s): Zola Matthew
Abstract: Using a form of narrative analysis, I explore how marriage in contemporary China influences people's identity formation as "men with disabilities." In particular, I examine how local practices of marriage exclusion shape the definition, marginalization, and experience of men who have trouble walking. This discussion is more phenomenological than most previous accounts of men's experiences of marriage in Chinese Society. [marriage, disability, identity, body, manhood, narrative, China]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647236
Journal Title: American Ethnologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226403
Date: 2 1, 1990
Author(s): Wikan James M.
Abstract: This study among the Maneo (Seram, Indonesia) focuses on the pragmatics of kinship knowledge. Through an extended investigation of a stranger's arrival, I untangle processes of recognition from those guiding the determination of relatedness. Recognition establishes the continuity of experience; as such, verity is a measure of the adequacy as opposed to accuracy of observation: a fact that contributes to the possibility of misrecognition. By contrast, relatedness is contingent upon the expression and suppression of different, sometimes contradictory historical ties. [kinship, knowledge, pragmatism, Maneo, Indonesia]
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/647504
Journal Title: Medical Anthropology Quarterly
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i226513
Date: 9 1, 1987
Author(s): White Cheryl
Abstract: Based on ethnographic work among North American occupational therapists, I compare two forms of everyday clinical talk. One, "chart talk," conforms to normative conceptions of clinical rationality. The second, storytelling, permeates clinical discussions but has no formal status as a vehicle for clinical reasoning. I argue that both modes of discourse provide avenues for reasoning about clinical problems. However, these discourses construct very different clinical objects and different phenomena to reason about. Further, the clinical problems created through storytelling point toward a more radically distinct conception of rationality than the one underlying biomedicine as it is formally conceived. Clinical storytelling is more usefully understood as a mode of Aristotle's "practical rationality" than the technical rationality of modern (enlightenment) conceptions of reasoning.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/649684
Journal Title: Past & Present
Publisher: Past and Present Society
Issue: i226616
Date: 2 1, 1967
Author(s): Swanson Natalie Zemon
Abstract: Guy E. Swanson, Religion and Regime: A Sociological
Account of the Reformation (Ann Arbor, Mich., 1967), ch. I
Swanson
ch. I
Religion and Regime: A Sociological Account of the Reformation
1967
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/650716
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227477
Date: 2 1, 1969
Author(s): Wolf Ino
Abstract: Lévi-Strauss claims that the unconscious activity of mind is more important than the conscious one for understanding social phenomena and that the unconscious consists of an aggregate of forms, which are imposed on psychological and physical content. The real inspiration of Lévi-Strauss' notion is the Kantian notion of mental constraints and the postulate of isomorphism of mental and physical laws. The methodological usefulness of the unconscious as a principle of intelligibility is placed in evidence.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/672338
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227518
Date: 12 1, 1973
Author(s): Verhaar Gary
Abstract: This study describes the symbolic process by which individuals attempted to realize, in organizational form, their variant interpretations of an extended metaphor - community mental health. Their metaphoric construals were embedded in everyday discourse and were initially unrecognized by participants at a community mental health center. The metaphoric process, that is, the movement involving the emergence, interpretation, and realization of these metaphors, was mediated by the self-images of the participants. They had embarked upon an innovative project to realize, in part, an ideal sense of self. The latter was a key factor in the development of new construals of community mental health and the implementation of these construals.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/676491
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227512
Date: 6 1, 1966
Author(s): Watts Karin R.
Abstract: This paper focuses upon the prevalent complementary definitions of myth and history and questions their analytic utility with reference to literary documents that bespeak the transition between mythic and historic cognition. In the style of ethnosemantic analysis, these definitions are treated as a semantic domain and subjected to formal analysis. The components elicited constitute a new definition - more precisely, a two-dimensional model of the relationship between myth and history. Subsequently, the model is applied to a series of books from the Bible with the conclusion that men and women are structurally equal since, in their roles as social actors, both represent different components of myth as well as history.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/676670
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227509
Date: 9 1, 1977
Author(s): Zeman Milton
Abstract: Peirce's general theory of signs, or semiotic, as he called it, yields a theory of the self that sees it both as the object and the subject of semiotic systems. From this viewpoint, the locus, unity, and continuity of the self will be found in the systems of signs that constitute the dialogues between utterers and interpreters of the signs. Personal identity, in this theory, is also a social and cultural identity and is not confined to the individual organism. Peirce's anti-Cartesianism, which denies intuitive and introspective knowledge of the self, derived that knowledge from the fallible inferences we all make from the observations of external facts, including the signs of the self. This laid the foundation for a semiotic psychology as well as for a semiotic anthropology
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/677438
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227551
Date: 3 1, 1933
Author(s): Williamson Bradd
Abstract: Cultural cognition is the product of two different sorts of meaning: (a) the (objective) semiotic organization of cultural texts or models, and (b) the (subjective) processes of meaning construction through which cultural symbols become available to consciousness as "experience." This article proposes a way to bridge these two kinds of meaning by considering how cultural knowledge is grounded in sensory experience. Several cognitive processes (schematization, synesthesia, secondary intersubjectivity) are proposed for linking the objectively available schemata found in cultural practices and the processes of meaning construction by which individuals appropriate symbols to consciousness. The nature of the relation between public symbols and individual experience is discussed in relation to a number of current issues in post-structuralist culture theory.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/681471
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227576
Date: 6 1, 1984
Author(s): Williams Anne M.
Abstract: Colomina
1992
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682216
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227565
Date: 9 1, 1969
Author(s): Zempleni Paul
Abstract: Because so many anthropologists have lost their senses of the smells, sounds, and tastes of the places they study, the major theorists of spirit possession have failed to consider relationships between bodily practices and cultural memory and countermemory. By regarding spirit possession in West Africa sensuously as an embodied practice, the author reveals the phenomenological arena in which cultural memory is fashioned and refashioned to produce and reproduce power.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682304
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227566
Date: 12 1, 1983
Author(s): Williams Robert
Abstract: An ethnographic study of a shelter in downtown Boston for people considered homeless and mentally ill documents the way in which the category of "experience," which many have taken to be universal and natural, is culturally and historically constituted. The residents of the shelter tend not to experience - defined here as an inwardly reflexive process that proceeds, coheres, and transforms through temporally integrative forms - but rather "struggle along" by way of an acutely tactile mode of perception that attends to episodic, temporally finite encounters. The fact that experience in the shelter is only a possibility, not a given, points to the need for a critical phenomenology that would help us to consider how this and other ways of being come about through specific social, cultural, political, and material forces.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/682450
Journal Title: American Anthropologist
Publisher: American Anthropological Association
Issue: i227591
Date: 3 1, 1972
Author(s): Wolpe Donald L.
Abstract: Recent changes within social and cultural anthropology have made history a key issue, but in this essay I argue that the field has yet to develop the resources that are required to deal with temporality. This point is made through an extended examination of Jean and John Comaroff's work on Christianity and colonialism in southern Africa. Arguably, the Comaroffs read history backward and then present its unfolding as a kind of inexorable logic. In doing so, they homogenize missionary and Tswana "cultures" and attribute agency to abstractions rather than to people acting in particular material contexts. In contrast, I argue for a narrative approach to historical anthropological explanation. The emergent qualities of events - and the variable ways in which capitalism, hegemony, Protestantism, and vernacular modernisms relate - require narrative for explanation, narrative that encompasses within itself the narratives of social actors themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/683926
Journal Title: Sociological Forum
Publisher: Eastern Sociological Society
Issue: i227652
Date: 12 1, 1994
Author(s): Zelizer Orville
Abstract: Derrida, 1976:158
158
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/685074
Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228006
Date: 7 1, 1990
Author(s): Selzer Greg
Abstract: The flight of Voyager 1 past Saturn in 1981 provides an occasion for a semiotic comparison of reports in French newspapers (Le Monde and Libération), a popular science article (in, La Recherche), and specialized scientific articles in Nature. The texts differ in the distance supposed between reader and writer, in the treatment of human and nonhuman actors, in characterization of the event and assumptions about readers' interest in it, and in their narrative structure. The analysis shows that popularizations and specialized scientific articles are not related in a simple dichotomy or scale and cannot be explained by a notion of the "general public"; rather, the various types of texts must be considered in terms of more complex relations between what are called in semiotic terms the enunciator and the enunciatee.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690095
Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228033
Date: 4 1, 1995
Author(s): Suchman G. Michael
Abstract: To date, little is known about when and to what degree science students begin to participate in authentic scientific graphing practices. This article presents the results of a series of studies on the production, transformation, and interpretation of graphical representation from Grade 8 to professional scientific practice both in formal testing situations (inside) and in the course of field/laboratory work (outside). The results of these studies can be grouped into two major areas. First, there is a discontinuity in the graph-related practices that marks a boundary between people who engage in work that requires them to transform data into graphical representations (converted) and people who do not have such experiences (cannibals). Second, the didactic practices of high school textbooks and university lectures exhibit a marked discontinuity relative to graphing practices in scientific journals. Graphs used in didactic circumstances may be associated with students' difficulties in interpreting "real data." It appears that school teachers and university professors (missionaries) do little to put their students on trajectories of increasing participation in authentic scientific graphing practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690254
Journal Title: Science, Technology, & Human Values
Publisher: Sage Publications
Issue: i228044
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Yoxen Anne
Abstract: Representations of the active brain have served to establish a particular domain of competence for brain mappers and to distinguish brain mapping's particular contributions to mind/brain research. At the heart of the claims about the emerging contributions of functional brain mapping is a paradox: functional imagers seem to reject representations while also using them at multiple points in their work. This article therefore considers a love-hate relationship between scientists and their object: the case of the iconoclastic imager. This paradoxical stance is the result of the formation of an interdisciplinary approach that brings together a number of scientific traditions and their particular standards of what constitutes scientific evidence. By examining the various ways in which images are deployed and rejected, the origins of these conflicting tendencies can be traced to the technological, methodological, and institutional elements in the work of functional imagers. This approach provides insight into the current demarcation of imaging and reflects on features of visual knowledge.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/690275
Journal Title: Cardozo Studies in Law and Literature
Publisher: Jacob Burns Institute for Advanced Legal Studies, Benjamin N. Cardozo School of Law of Yeshiva University
Issue: i229819
Date: 7 1, 1851
Author(s): Adams Milner S.
Abstract: John Adams, Discourses on Davilla, in C.F. Adams, ed., 6 The Works of John Adams 221
(1851).
Adams
221
6 The Works of John Adams
1851
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/743468
Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Society for Music Theory
Issue: i229978
Date: 4 1, 1987
Author(s): Neumeyer David
Abstract: David Neumeyer, "The Three-Voice Ursatz," In Theory Only 10,
nos. 1-2 (1987): 3-29
Neumeyer
1
3
10
Theory Only
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746080
Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230051
Date: 4 1, 1956
Author(s): de Hartmann John
Abstract: p. 147
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746221
Journal Title: 19th-Century Music
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230026
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Miller Anthony
Abstract: n. 30 above
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/746729
Journal Title: Journal for Research in Mathematics Education
Publisher: National Council of Teachers of Mathematics
Issue: i230371
Date: 3 1, 1990
Author(s): Woolgar G. Michael
Abstract: Graph-related practices are central to scientific endeavors, and graphing has long been hailed as one of the core "general process skills" that set scientists apart. We use two case studies from a large study among scientists to exemplify our findings that graphing is not a context-independent skill. Rather, scientists' competencies with respect to graph interpretation are highly contextual and are a function of their familiarity with the phenomena to which the graph pertains. If graphing practices are not general but are tied to embodied understandings and familiarity with representation practices, then there are implications for teaching graphing in school mathematics and science settings.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/749672
Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230999
Date: 10 1, 1979
Author(s): Scruton Karol
Abstract: Roger Scruton, The Aesthetics of Architecture (Princeton, 1979)
Scruton
The Aesthetics of Architecture
1979
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763970
Journal Title: The Journal of Musicology
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: i230999
Date: 10 1, 1956
Author(s): Poulet Regula Burckhardt
Abstract: Qureshi, op. cit. (1986)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/763973
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231248
Date: 1 1, 1994
Author(s): Wardhaugh Michael
Abstract: Ronald Wardhaugh, An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Oxford, 1994), 258-81 (p. 260).
Wardhaugh
258
An Introduction to Sociolinguistics
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766394
Journal Title: Journal of the Royal Musical Association
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i231237
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Nattiez Katharine
Abstract: Nattiez, '"Repons" et la crise de la
"communication" musicale contemporaine', Inharmoniques, 2 (1987), 193-210
Nattiez
193
2
Inharmoniques
1987
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/766438
Journal Title: October
Publisher: MIT Press
Issue: i231777
Date: 10 1, 1982
Author(s): Barthes Hal
Abstract: Derrida, Of Grammatology, pp. 77-93
77
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/778488
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232679
Date: 7 1, 1953
Author(s): Aeschylus Martha
Abstract: Violence and the Word, supra note 7, at 1629
1629
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796400
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232710
Date: 5 1, 1989
Author(s): Milner Anthony V.
Abstract: Id. at 81.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/796817
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232728
Date: 10 1, 1990
Author(s): Graves J. M.
Abstract: BERNARD WILLIAMS, MORAL LUCK 72-73 (1981).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797078
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232744
Date: 10 1, 1958
Author(s): Schleiermacher Rob
Abstract: Paul Ricoeur, Religion, Atheism, and Faith, in ALASDAIR MACINTYRE & PAUL RICOEUR,
THE RELIGIOUS SIGNIFICANCE OF ATHEIsM 57 (1969).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797142
Journal Title: The Yale Law Journal
Publisher: The Yale Law Journal Company
Issue: i232798
Date: 5 1, 1994
Author(s): Pinker George P.
Abstract: Steven Pinker, Editorial, The Game
of the Name, N.Y. TIMES, Apr. 5, 1994, at A21.
Pinker
Apr. 5
A21
N.Y. TIMES
1994
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/797532
Journal Title: Chinese Literature: Essays, Articles, Reviews (CLEAR)
Publisher: CODA Press
Issue: i233899
Date: 7 1, 1958
Author(s): Tsao Hsueh-chin Anthony C.
Abstract: Plaks, p. 78 and p. 207.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823527
Journal Title: Cambridge Opera Journal
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: i233914
Date: 3 1, 1921
Author(s): Thovez Roger
Abstract: here 117-18
117
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/823749
Journal Title: American Bar Foundation Research Journal
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234248
Date: 1 1, 1959
Author(s): Goffman Alan C.
Abstract: Erving Goffman, The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life 11 (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday &
Co., Anchor Books, 1959)
Goffman
11
The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life
1959
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828228
Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234283
Date: 1 1, 1987
Author(s): Darderian Janet
Abstract: Hofrichter, Neighborhood Justice (cited in note 11)
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828547
Journal Title: Law & Social Inquiry
Publisher: American Bar Foundation
Issue: i234271
Date: 1 1, 1948
Author(s): Corner Stephen A.
Abstract: George W. Corner, ed., The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through
Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813, at 236-37 (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton
University Press, 1948).
Corner
236
1948
The Autobiography of Benjamin Rush: His "Travels Through Life" together with his Commonplace Book for 1789-1813
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/828706
Journal Title: Journal of the American Musicological Society
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: i234478
Date: 4 1, 1989
Author(s): Charlton Berthold
Abstract: E. T. A.
Hofmnann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism, ed.
David Charlton, trans. Martyn Clarke (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989),
160-61
Charlton
160
E. T. A. Hoffmann's Musical Writings: "Kreisleriana," "The Poet and the Composer,"Music Criticism
1989
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/832063
Journal Title: The American Journal of Comparative Law
Publisher: The American Society of Comparative Law, Inc.
Issue: i234865
Date: 7 1, 1991
Author(s): Asser-Hartkamp Jan M.
Abstract: Verbintenissenrecht 2, 375 ff
375
Verbintenissenrecht 2
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/840497
Journal Title: Music & Letters
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: i235826
Date: 11 1, 1995
Author(s): Zietlow Annabelle
Abstract: Pinion, A Hardy Companion, p. 85.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/854625
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90000049
Date: 12 1, 2016
Author(s): Cobos Carla Pinochet
Abstract: The new information technologies have transformed reading practices in meaningful ways, promoting other skills and competences, and activating new ways of interacting with reading devices. Based on a qualitative study conducted in Mexico City, this article aims to explore how communicational innovations have had an impact on a specific type of reader, whose distinctive feature is to have an intense and/or enjoyable relationship with the act of read: the cultural creators. The analysis of these practices and the reflection as a result of this, allows us to observe that, far from creating isolated readers, the emerging technologies contribute to develop, in other ways,the potential for the sociability of reading, thus stimulating work networks and collaborative projects.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90000054
Journal Title: Francofonia
Publisher: Casa Editrice Leo S. Olschki
Issue: e90000928
Date: 4 1, 2014
Author(s): Plamondon Jean-François
Abstract: Les chercheurs ont d’ailleurs pointé ce malaise à plusieurs reprises en jouant avec les titres de leurs essais: Je est un autre (1980), P. Lejeune; Moi aussi (1986), P. Lejeune; Est-il Je? (2004), P. Gasparini; Je réel/Je fictif (2010), A. Schmitt; Je et moi (2011), P. Forest…
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90000930
Journal Title: Transformation
Publisher: Sage Publications, Ltd.
Issue: e90008098
Date: 10 1, 2012
Author(s): Farr Bernard C.
Abstract: Baker GP & Hacker PMS (2005) Wittgenstein: Understanding and Meaning (2nd ed.). Oxford, UK: Blackwell Publishing.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90008100
Journal Title: Mosaic: An Interdisciplinary Critical Journal
Publisher: University of Manitoba
Issue: e90011626
Date: 3 1, 2006
Author(s): WEST WILLIAM N.
Abstract: This essay compares passages from Freud’s
Interpretation of Dreams, Michelangelo’s sonnets, and Wittgenstein’sZettelthat include the image of a burning speaker, and suggests how to make sense of such uncanny repetitions between authors and texts. Comparative interpretation is justified less by theoretical understandings of psychoanalysis than by psychoanalytic practices.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90011634
Journal Title: Music Theory Spectrum
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: e90012057
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): DAVIS ANDREW
Abstract: This article proposes that Romantic sonatas exploit in their formal structures multiply directed temporal narratives, comprising a temporal stream and various other streams that can be broadly characterized as
atemporal. The temporal stream articulates the principal sonata trajectory and correlates with the concept known in structural narratology as thefirst narrative; the atemporal streams reside on alternate temporal levels and remain external to, or disengaged from, that of the first narrative. The structural and expressive implications of this opposition, together with the view of sonata-formal conventions made available in recent work on Sonata Theory, provide a framework within which the article explicates Chopin’s robust dialogue, in the first movement of his Piano Sonata in B Minor, Op. 58, with Classical German-Austrian sonata conventions and contemporary Romantic aesthetic currents. The reading provides a foundation for reassessing Chopin’s work in the sonata genre, the norms and expressive potential of which he is often thought of as never fully apprehending.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90012063
Journal Title: Africa Development / Afrique et Développement
Publisher: CODESRIA
Issue: e90013865
Date: 1 1, 2016
Author(s): Aliana Serge Bernard Emmanuel
Abstract: This article focuses on the concepts of deliberative democracy and African palaver to conceptually (re) formulate and make intelligible the practices and performance of governance in Africa, with the aim of achieving a genuine normalization of societal behavior. Based on an analysis of the texts and a synthesis of texts analyzed, and drawing on the evidence at the present time, this is about establishing that the African palaver, often excluded from the cartography of official epistemology and relegated to the level of indigenous knowledge and practice, can define the conditions of possibility and feasibility for deliberative democracy, a political paradigm deemed dominant universal. However, the issue is that of cognitive decentering. How can one imagine that African conceptual categories, labeled as cheesy and reduced to the mere field of ethnological studies, can interact and correlate with modern recipes, with the idea of starting a process of governability, the realization of which is resilient democracy?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90013868
Journal Title: Revue économique
Publisher: Sciences Po University Press
Issue: e90016168
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Sobel Richard
Abstract: Introduced in France since a decade, the work of Moishe Postone appears as a global new interpretation of Marx. It hinges on the thesis according to which Marx does not propose a criticism of capitalism from the angle of work, but a criticism of work under capitalism. This article assesses the significance of this heterodox Marxism by trying to situate its epistemological background between a structuralist interpretation and a phenomenological interpretation of Marx. It shows that Postone builds an original structuralism, combining Althusser and Hegel, but struggles to link it up with a theory of subjectivation and action up to a thought which aims for the social transformation of and the emancipation from capitalism.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016175
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): T. Leonidas Morales
Abstract: This article focuses on the last two novels by Adolfo Couve, La comedia del arte (1996) and Cuando pienso en mi falta de cabeza (La segunda comedia), posthumously published in 2000. The article proposes an allegorical reading of the transformation of the painter Camondo into a wax statue, the protagonist of both novels who later loses his mind. The article argues that the loss of the mind allegorizes a quotidian time, in tune with Couve's world, which spins and repeats itself, closed, without a horizon, a “beheaded” time (lacking future). This allows the possibility to build a coherent sense of a series of narrative forms (which include language, space, time, characters) and that, taken as a whole, show the particular way in which Couve's narrative is built and developed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016191
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Universidad de Chile
Issue: e90016177
Date: 11 1, 2017
Author(s): Soto Ana María Riveros
Abstract: This study presents an interpretation of the configuration of the poetic subject in the books of poems El Primer Libro (1985) and Albricia (1988) by Soledad Fariña (1943), which understand a self in a continuous process of gestation and birth. This process serves the purpose of recomposing a disarticulated subjectivity lost in the framework of the political and cultural conditions imposed by the military dictatorship that ruled Chile in the 1970s and 1980s. By using a metaphor of a journey and searching for a new language, the subject attempts to access a primitive stage andfind its maternal self in order to confront the dominant power, by codifying and configuring herself through an otherness in a feminine body-text. However, this process of maturation and discovery is intervened and left incomplete by the impulse of modernity, thereby creating a deformed, dissociated and off-centered self, which aims at growing opposed to logos. This conflict turns the upcoming of the new self into a painful event, like giving birth, that stems from the subject's wounded and fractured body, intending to re-establish de selffrom its fragments, traces and memories.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90016192
Journal Title: Cultures et Conflits
Publisher: L’Harmattan
Issue: e90017741
Date: 9 1, 2017
Author(s): COLLET Victor
Abstract: House J., MacMaster N., Paris 1961…, op. cit., pp. 323-375.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/90017748
Journal Title: Acta Musicologica
Publisher: Barenreiter
Issue: i238579
Date: 12 1, 1980
Author(s): Adorno Uwe
Abstract: Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt
Vergleichenden Musikwissenschaft für méglich hilt
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/932818
Journal Title: Revue de Musicologie
Publisher: Societe Francaise de Musicologie
Issue: i239150
Date: 1 1, 1965
Author(s): Aristote Jacques
Abstract: La Raison dans l'Histoire (Paris, 1965), p. 54.
54
La Raison dans l'Histoire
1965
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/947263
Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240071
Date: 12 1, 1992
Author(s): White William
Abstract: Does hermeneutics provide a useful framework for the study and practice of public administration? Danny L. Balfour and William Mesaros argue that a shift toward the hermeneutic perspective can move public administration towards the cutting edge of social research and practice while promoting the values of mutuality, understanding, and improved communication. Hermeneutics can help the field move away from methodological debates and toward more practical, cooperative research and an enhanced focus on the substantive issues that define and energize public policy and administration.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/976676
Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240081
Date: 2 1, 1987
Author(s): Wolf Larry D.
Abstract: Since the founding of this nation, the theater metaphor has had an influence on political discourse. Politicians often invoke the metaphor when they enact political dramas to construct themselves in the image of leader. An argument is presented that former President Ronald Reagan and his political strategists made extensive use of this strategy and were effective in portraying public administrators as evil villains. It is also argued that supporters of the administrative state relied on the theater metaphor as well. In an effort to counter Reagan's negative image of villain, supporters responded by portraying public administrators as heroes and innocent victims. This article suggests that the theater metaphor is problematic when viewed from the perspective of public administration theory and practice. The images of villain, hero and innocent victims emanating from the theater metaphor are troublesome and deserve scrutiny.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/976692
Journal Title: Public Administration Review
Publisher: American Society for Public Administration
Issue: i240080
Date: 12 1, 1995
Author(s): Van Erp Carol W.
Abstract: Do divergent values embedded in distinctive cultures satisfactorily explain current directions in public service ethics around the world? The authors draw upon expert observation by government and corporate officials who administer ethics programs, leaders known for their moral courage, survey research, and the scholarly literature to identify these directions and begin addressing the question. The central argument is that observable practice increasingly invalidates an approach that relies exclusively upon cultural particularities. Identified commonalties susceptible to objective research include shared values and norms such as impartiality and effectiveness in public service, structural elements in part fostered by shared goals and multinational anti-corruption initiatives, and the self-conscious injection of normative components into ethics programs. Emerging from a cross-cultural empirical perspective that allows for mutualities as well as differences, the authors' rich research agenda included investigation of the alleged links between public attitudes and ethics programs and between codes and actual administrative behavior, and development of appropriate measures of ethics programs' effectiveness. They concluded that professional public administration must remain intellectually open to global dialogue on shared values, norms, and structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/977250
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Education / Revue canadienne de l'éducation
Publisher: University of Toronto Press
Issue: canajeducrevucan.33.issue-4
Date: February 1, 2010
Author(s): Haig-Brown Celia
Abstract: Dans cet article, l'auteure pose la question suivante: « Quelle est la relation entre l'appropriation de la pensée autochtone et ce qu'on pourrait appeler l'
apprentissage en profondeurbasé sur des années d'expérience en éducation dans des contextes autochtones? » Après avoir analysé les divers sens attribués à la notion d'appropriation culturelle, l'auteure présente des textes de Gee sur les discours secondaires, de Foucault sur la production du discours et de Wertsch sur les structures profondes du discours et fait le lien avec des expériences décisives sur le terrain tirées d'années de recherche et d'enseignement. Gardant au fond de l'espoir, l'auteure conclut l'article en présentant le protocole d'appropriation culturelle recommandé par des universitaires autochtones lors de l'utilisation de savoirs autochtones par des personnes nonautochtones dans des contextes pédagogiques.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajeducrevucan.33.4.925
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: State University of New York Press
Issue: canajsocicahican.33.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2003
Author(s): Titchkosky Tanya
Abstract: Résumé. Ce texte démontre le genre de questions qui se présentent aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologieen interrogent les interactions qui émergent autour des luttes pour «l'accès» dans un milieu de travail scolaire/ académique. Au cours de mes expériences dans un des plus grands édifices dans une des plus grandes universités au Canada, j'ai amassé des paroles quotidiennes qui justifient l'exclusion des personnes handicapées. J'ai rassemblé des narratifs représentants ce-qui-est possible-de-dire aujourd'hui sur la lutte pour l'accessibilité. En utilisant une approche sociologique interprétativiste, ce texte illustre la façon dont les significations de l'incapacité sont générés par un discours qui rends légitime la construction exclusive ainsi que les structures inaccessible de la vie universitaire. Dans ce texte, je démontre que l'accès n'est pas synonyme de justice mais, par contre, est un point de départ pour la réflexion critique où les relations sociaux entre corps et espace peut être considéré à nouveau. Ce texte contribue aux études sur la condition des personnes handicapées informées par la sociologie en analysant la façon dont la narration ordinaire et quotidienne de l'incapacité peut continuer à, en même temps que l'environnement physique change, agir comme pouvoir social qui reproduit le statuquo.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.33.1.37
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: Hermann
Issue: canajsocicahican.36.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2010
Author(s): Roberge Jonathan
Abstract: jonathan.roberge@yale.edu
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.36.1.114
Journal Title: Canadian Journal of Sociology / Cahiers canadiens de sociologie
Publisher: Springer Verlag
Issue: canajsocicahican.37.issue-3
Date: August 30, 2010
Author(s): Yeo Michael
Abstract: Résumé. L'un des principaux problèmes dans la controverse entourant le recensement détaillé concernait la relation entre la science et la politique. En analysant les arguments et les hypothèses sous-jacentes de quatre interventions influentes et exemplaires faites au nom de la science, cet article rend un constat normatif de cette relation. Il nuance les idéaux protecteurs de la science que les critiques ont invoqués et avance que de telles ressources conceptuelles sont nécessaires pour protéger la science d'un empiètement politique indu. Cependant, dans leur zèle à défendre les droits de la science, les critiques en ont réclamé plus que nécessaire, ce qui a occulté la dimension de la valeur des décisions politiques et n'a pas respecté le rôle de la politique en tant que point légitime de prise de décision sur les questions de valeur. Un constat normatif adéquat de la relation entre la science et la politique dans la politique gouvernementale doit non seulement protéger la science contre la politique, mais aussi la politique contre la science.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/canajsocicahican.37.3.295
Journal Title: Daat: A Journal of Jewish Philosophy & Kabbalah
Publisher: Beacon Press
Issue: daat.issue-81
Date: 1 1, 1975
Author(s): Holzer Elie
Abstract: מחקר כזה יידרש בין השאר לתת את הדעת על ההבדלים בין קובצי הדרשות, כפי שציינתי בהערה 9 לעיל.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/daat.81.321
Journal Title: Estudos Feministas
Publisher: UnB
Issue: estufemi.22.issue-3
Date: 12 1, 1991
Author(s): da Silva Souza Camilla
Abstract: In this work we propose to discuss the relationship among imaginationy, work and sexuality, from the activities of crab pickers that live in the bragantina region, called Salgado Paraense. The aim is to link such themes to the enchanted figure that inhabits the mangroves where the people pick the crustaceans called Ataíde, as well as to discuss the sexual acts between people of the same sex, in this case, involving the masculine universe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/estufemi.22.3.755
Journal Title: Journal of Higher Education in Africa / Revue de l'enseignement supérieur en Afrique
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: jhigheducafri.8.issue-2
Date: October 1, 1958
Author(s): Macdonald Helen M.
Abstract: Cet article est issu d'une étude ethnographique menée à l'Université de Cape Town. Il explore la dynamique d'une intervention permettant au personnel de l'université de s'engager dans une voie alternative à celle de l'apartheid en Afrique du Sud. Il traite de la politique sociale qui apparut entre l'intervention, ses participants et non-participants imaginaires par rapport à la vision « transformatrice » de l'université. L'intention des interventionnistes a été retravaillée par les participants des principaux symboles qui mettent en forme les motifs de leurs comportements et donnent un sens à leurs expériences. Utilisant le modèle d'Ortner (1973) de reconnaissance et de symboles-clés, je soutiens que la « transformation » et « l'espace sûr » représentent une élaboration symboles, en ce sens qu'ils ont le pouvoir d'action et d'élaboration conceptuelle. Ces symboles d'élaboration fonctionnent en relais avec une sorte de logique qui « cristallise l'engagement » des participants vers l'intervention d'une manière émotionnellement puissante et relativement indifférenciée. Ce faisant, ils font de l'intervention un symbole capable d'exprimer ce que leur expérience signifie pour eux en tant que communauté imaginée par rapport aux autres.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/jhigheducafri.8.2.73
Journal Title: Revista Chilena de Literatura
Publisher: Península
Issue: revchilenalit.issue-87
Date: 11 1, 2002
Author(s): Aguilar Andrés Ferrada
Abstract: The article focuses on a selection of chronicles in which José Donoso provides a denaturalized image of the city of Santiago in the 1980s. By stressing a poetics of transformation, the author narrates a city that confronts the silence pervading its urban practices and neighbourhoods. Under this guise, Donoso’s writing tactically articulates a voice for the city that challenges both the homogeneity imposed by traditional renditions and the order of a contemporary oligarchy.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revchilenalit.87.115
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Belin
Issue: revfranscipoleng.60.issue-1
Date: 1 18, 2005
Author(s): Terry James
Abstract: Lecturer and researcher at the Institut d'Études politiques in Aix-en-Provence, junior member of the Institut universitaire de France,
Christophe Traïniis currently interested in the analysis of the role of affective dimensions in the process of activist engagement as well as in the future of activist organizations. On this subject, he publishedLa musique en colère(Paris: Presses de Sciences Po, 2009) (in the series “Contester”, 04). He also edited the collectionÉmotions… mobilisation!(Paris: Presses de Sciences Po, 2009). The development of activist organizations for animal rights had already caught his attention in his work on the Chasse Pêche Nature et Traditions movement:Les braconniers de la République: les conflits autour des représentations de la Nature et la politique(Paris: PUF, 2003).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.60.1.219
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: PUF
Issue: revfranscipoleng.62.issue-1
Date: September 6-8, 2005
Author(s): Morel Claire
Abstract: Denis-Constant Martinis Director of Research (FNSP) at Sciences Po Bordeaux (LAM, UMR 5115 within the CNRS), where he teaches political anthropology. His publications include: (with Olivier Roueff)La France du jazz, musique, modernité et identité dans la première moitié du 20e siècle(Marseille: Parenthèses, 2002), andCoon Carnival, New Year in Cape Town, Past and Present(Cape Town: David Philip, 1999); and he has editedSur la piste des OPNI (Objets politiques non identifiés)(Paris: Karthala, 2002);L'identité en jeux, pouvoirs, identifications, mobilisations(Paris: Karthala, 2010). His research focuses on social representations of the political, insofar as they can be reconstructed from the study of cultural practices (Sciences Po Bordeaux, LAM, 11 allée Ausone, Domaine universitaire, 33607 Pessac Cedex ).
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.62.1.17
Journal Title: Revue française de science politique (English Edition)
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: revfranscipoleng.63.issue-3-4
Date: 1 1, 2000
Author(s): Bevir Mark
Abstract: Mark Beviris a Professor in the Department of Political Science, University of California, Berkeley. He is the author ofThe Logic of the History of Ideas(1999),New Labour: A Critique(2005),Key Concepts of Governance(2009),Democratic Governance(2010), andThe Making of British Socialism(2011), and the co-author, with R. A. W. Rhodes, ofInterpreting British Governance(2003),Governance Stories(2006), andThe State as Cultural Practice(2010). His research interests in political theory include moral philosophy, political philosophy, and the history of political thought. His work on public policy focuses on organization theory, democratic theory, and governance. His methodological interests cover the philosophy of social science, the history of social science, and interpretive analysis.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/revfranscipoleng.63.3-4.115
Journal Title: South Atlantic Review
Publisher: Cambridge UP
Issue: soutatlarevi.79.issue-3-4
Date: August 1, 1995
Author(s): Yee Pamela M.
Abstract: Pamela M. Yee is a doctoral candidate and Provost's Fellow in the English department at the University of Rochester. Her research interests include late-medieval romance and dream-visions, confessional narratives, medieval medicine, cognition, psychology, affect theory, trauma studies, and the medical humanities; a secondary strand of her scholarship includes all things Arthurian and a nascent interest in medievalism within pop culture. Her dissertation explores confessional tropes as narrative, dialogic, and patient-centered healing in late Middle English secular literature. She has recently published articles in
ArthurianaandThe Once and Future Classroom, and has a forthcoming review inMedievally Speaking. In summer 2013, she curated an exhibit titled “Eugène Vinaver's MagnificentMalory” for the Rossell Hope Robbins Library. Her budding interest in Gower studies has resulted in a recent flurry of activity: her co-organizing of the 3rdInternational Congress of the John Gower Society in summer 2014 and her selection by JGS as the graduate student representative for the 2016 John Hurt Fisher Prize Committee. At her home institution, she serves as Assistant Editor of the TEAMS Middle English Texts Series, works as a library assistant for the Robbins Library, contributes to theCamelot Project, and teaches in the Writing, Speaking, and Argument Program. Email:pyee@ur.rochester.edu.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/soutatlarevi.79.3-4.89
Journal Title: Ulbandus Review
Publisher: University of California Press
Issue: ulbarevi.17
Date: August 31, 1997
Author(s): Mankovskaya Elizaveta
Abstract: ,Liisa H. Malkki
“News and culture: Transitory phenomena and the fieldwork tradition,”inAnthropological locations: Boundaries and grounds of a field science, ed.
andAkhil Gupta
(:James Ferguson
University of California Press,1997),91.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/ulbarevi.17.86
Journal Title: Ethics & the Environment
Publisher: The Guilford Press
Issue: ete.2010.15.issue-1
Date: January 25, 2003
Author(s): Crowley Thomas
Abstract: Evaluative terms are a crucial part of the environmental discourse. These terms, and the evaluative frameworks in which they are imbedded, serve as important guides to action. “Natural,” a term commonly used as a positive evaluation, is problematic because it can both justify unfair social relations and obscure the connections between humans and the rest of nature. “Sustainable,” another popular term, is extremely malleable, and is too often elaborated in frameworks that are neither socially nor ecologically responsible. The term “sustainable” is sometimes used in the framework of ecosystem health, but even this approach can fail to highlight the interconnectedness of social and ecological systems. The framework of ecosocial flourishing, introduced in this article, is better suited for highlighting the interconnected nature of the world and for drawing attention to questions of environmental justice. Evaluative terms (like “natural”) and frameworks (like “ecosocial flourishing”) are part of larger narratives that help people make sense of their interactions with, and emotional responses to, the non-human world.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/ete.2010.15.1.69
Journal Title: Global South, The
Publisher: Duke University Press
Issue: globalsouth.6.issue-2
Date: Nov. 23, 2007
Author(s): Davidson Emily F.
Abstract: Public history sites like the West Indian Museum of Panama and the Miraflores Visitors Center have different approaches to narrating the Panama Canal story, ranging from tales of man’s triumph over nature and celebratory discourses of nationalist victories, to testimonies of the racial histories silenced by official renderings of the past. Given the important role of museums as educational institutions, sites that inform public opinion, and representational platforms for national tourism, this article explores the relationship these institutions forge between visitors and canal history. Through a comparative analysis of the narratives and experiential strategies at each site, I evaluate the degree to which Panamanians are cast as spectators in grandiose histories of triumph, or as agents, responsible for shaping the past, present and future. In contrast to these physical sites, I consider how The Society of Friends of the West Indian Museum of Panama constructs a living past through memory practices that challenge the petrified histories traditionally found in museums.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/globalsouth.6.2.130
Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: Open University Press
Issue: histmemo.24.issue-2
Date: October 29, 2003
Author(s): Forlenza Rosario
Abstract: This article examines the formative role of the World War II experience in shaping politically relevant memories in postwar Italy. Rather than considering the past a legacy or a heritage—something abstract, malleable and susceptible to serving political interests—the focus here is on the meaning-giving power of memories and symbols in the historical evolution. The birth of Italian democracy after the war was preceded by disruptive events that could have divided the nation. This article illustrates how contested and fragmented interpretations of critical events were structured by and through the dimension of cultural memory, which sustained social and political imaginations, eventually shaping characters and outcomes of the Italian political transformation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/histmemo.24.2.73
Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: University of Massachusetts
Issue: histmemo.25.issue-1
Date: September 8, 2000
Author(s): Beiner Guy
Abstract: On the face of it, the legacy of the 1798 rebellion in the northeastern Irish counties of Antrim and Down seems to be a paradigmatic case of “collective amnesia.” Over the course of the long nineteenth century, growing identification of the Protestants of the area with unionism, loyalism and Orangeism, fortified through opposition to the rise of nationalism amongst Catholics, encouraged public effacement of discomforting memories of the mass participation of Protestants, in particular Presbyterians, in republican insurrection. However, the uncovering of a “hidden” (or perhaps relatively low-profile) popular historiography grounded in oral traditions reveals continuous obsessive, though characteristically ambivalent, local preoccupation with remembrance of the rebellion. Acknowledging that forgetting is not the antithesis, but an integral component, of memory, this case study of what appears to be an Ulster
lieu d'oubliconceptualizes “social forgetting” as the outcome of multi-layered relationships between oblivion and remembering.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/histmemo.25.1.9
Journal Title: History & Memory
Publisher: Wereldbibliotheek
Issue: histmemo.26.issue-2
Date: Oct. 12, 2011
Author(s): Lok Matthijs M.
Abstract: This article analyzes the social construction of silence in early-nineteenth-century Europe, focusing on France and the Netherlands. In both countries, the newly installed Restoration monarchies propagated a “politics of forgetting” of the problematic recent past of the revolution and the Napoleonic era as an essential part of attempts to build a stable and legitimate political order. This official forgetting was contested in both countries. On the basis of the “letters of adhesion,” the article examines the close interaction between the individual reconstruction of the personal past and social forgetting. Finally, it relates the rise of a historicizing culture in the early nineteenth century to the culture of silence in Restoration Europe.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/histmemo.26.2.40
Journal Title: Indiana Journal of Global Legal Studies
Publisher: U. Cal. Press
Issue: indjglolegstu.20.issue-2
Date: June 14, 1896
Author(s): Lindahl Hans
Abstract: This paper scrutinizes the fundamental assumption governing Gunther Teubner's theory of societal constitutionalism, namely that societal constitutions are ultimately about the regulation of inclusion and exclusion in global function systems. While endorsing the central role of inclusion/exclusion in constitutions, societal or otherwise, I argue that inclusion and exclusion are primordial categories of collective action, rather than functional categories. As a result, the self-closure which gives rise to a legal collective is spatial as much as it is temporal, and subjective no less than material. Inasmuch as legal orders must establish who ought to do what, where, and when, this entails, or so I argue, that any legal order we could imagine—including a global legal order such as cyberlaw—is necessarily bounded in space, time, content, and membership. This impinges directly on the inclusion/exclusion difference: that there can be no inclusion without exclusion entails, most fundamentally, that there can be no (il)legality without alegality, i.e. comportment that contests, sometimes radically, how a legal order draws the distinction between legality and illegality. In this fundamental sense, all legal orders have an outside—literally. Building on this insight, I suggest that the functional cosmopolitanism advocated by a theory of societal constitutionalism retains a residue of the logic of totalization it seeks to overcome. I conclude by exploring how a first-person plural theory of law both supports and transforms the insight that constitutions regulate the inclusion/exclusion difference by putting into place constitutive and limitative rules.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/indjglolegstu.20.2.697
Journal Title: Journal of Folklore Research: An International Journal of Folklore and Ethnomusicology
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: jfolkrese.51.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 1988
Author(s): Sandell David P.
Abstract: This article treats Mexican
retablos(devotional paintings) in relation to people's actions. Retablos serve as a basis for seeing, talking about, and interpreting events born from oppressive, modern conditions. Actions and artful representation indicate, respectively, proximity to reality, from near to far—a difference that outlines a space for aesthetic production. I argue that retablos contribute to an aesthetic that orients the senses and the mind against oppressive conditions and toward a positive vision of what the world might be.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jfolkrese.51.1.13
Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: jmodelite.34.2.issue-2
Date: June 26, 1987
Author(s): Harker James
Abstract: The longstanding critical refrain that Virginia Woolf's fiction represents a turn ““inward”” to the vagaries of the inner life has more recently been countered with an ““outward”” approach emphasizing Woolf's interest in the material world, its everyday objects and their social and political significance. Yet one of the most curious and pervasive features of Woolf's oeuvre is that characters are so frequently wrong in their perceptions. This essay consolidates the inward and outward approaches by tracing the trope of misperception in Woolf's fiction as well as in her conceptions of the work of author and reader. For Woolf, the modern literary experience derives from the nature of the faculties of perception, the tenuous points of connection —— and disjunction —— between the inner and the outer worlds.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.34.2.1
Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: New Directions
Issue: jmodelite.35.issue-3
Date: Oct. 1, 1991
Author(s): Carlson Celia
Abstract: Recent scholarship has given considerable attention to lyric poetry as a form of sensuous knowledge. This approach emphasizes the corporeal origins of poetry, its genesis in the body or in language viewed as material. The question of sensuous knowledge is central to the larger theoretical issue of modernity itself, in which lyric holds a central yet ambiguous status. The question of sensuous knowledge is ultimately a question of meaning. However, modern thought — thought pertaining to “modernity” — is fundamentally circular. This would seem to establish an epistemological impasse for aesthetics. But I argue that this circularity offers an important, and necessary, way to limit knowledge and thereby ground an ethical subjectivity. My essay places formalism at the heart of sensuous knowledge. In this essay I develop an account of the importance of abstraction in sensuous knowledge by way of Kant's concept of
Darstellung, “presentation [of sensory experience].” The “presentation” is the object as it has undergone a structural process of internalization and been made available for psychic use as meaning; that requires a recognition of loss. Where this is important for literature is that twentieth-century American poetry frequently uses very personal images of family life as a way of conveying sincerity about corporeal experience. I use this discussion of circularity in modern aesthetic thought to argue that there is a risk to taking shortcuts to meaning through images of the material bodies of children. In these contemporary poems by Gary Snyder, Sharon Olds and Rita Dove, the poets reject loss in favor of a very modern “affirmation” of the material. But affirmation and the visual image as a sign of affirmation cannot alone bind meaning to us. That meaning must be internalized through theworkof poetic presentation.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.35.3.158
Journal Title: jml: Journal of Modern Literature
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: jmodelite.37.issue-2
Date: Nov. 22, 2011
Author(s): Young Tory
Abstract: This essay uses Paul Ricoeur's concept of the “(as yet) untold story” to consider the relationship between James Joyce's 1904 short story “Eveline” (in
Dubliners) and Colm Tóibín's award-winning 2009 novel,Brooklyn. Although Tóibín has denied the influence of Joyce in general, there are many similarities in the storyworlds of the two protagonists, Eveline Hill and Eilis Lacey: Eveline wishes to leave her father's home in Dublin but stays, whilst Eilis would prefer to remain at home but is forced to emigrate. Both act according to their perception of their mother's wishes and the rightness of their decisions has preoccupied readers. Through close analysis of thought and speech presentation, this essay shows that interpretive responses to the actions of Eveline and Eilis are inextricably linked to the formal qualities of each text.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/jmodelite.37.2.123
Journal Title: Nashim: A Journal of Jewish Women's Studies & Gender Issues
Publisher: Jason Aronson
Issue: nashim.issue-22
Date: 10 1, 1995
Author(s): Mirguet Francoise
Abstract: This paper explores the
sugyain the Babylonian Talmud that includes the story of the Oven of Akhnai, in BTBaba metzi‘‘a58b––59b, expanding earlier studies by Jeffrey Rubenstein and Charlotte Fonrobert. It shows that two scriptural quotations involving, respectively, David and Tamar, situated in the first part of thesugya, anticipate the subsequent story and clarify how it functions as a ““foundation myth”” of the Beit Midrash (Fonrobert), and, therefore, of male identity (Boyarin). I suggest that the entiresugyaconstructs male identity by way of contrast with two ““others,”” the divine and the female realms, which are excluded from the Law-making process. The danger of verbal wrong, however, reveals the necessity of reintroducing the excluded ““others.”” The text achieves this by recognizing the existence of a transcendent justice, and by making Tamar, a foreign and female character with no access to the Law, a model of delicacy in verbal communication.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/nashim.22.88
Journal Title: Philosophy of Music Education Review
Publisher: Daidalos
Issue: philmusieducrevi.22.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2005
Author(s): Lilliedahl Jonathan
Abstract: Is the most important function of education to provide students with basic skills and useful knowledge in order to eventually become employable? In many parts of the world knowledge league tables and policy documents inform us this is the case. As the question of what should form the educational content seems to be answered, teachers can concentrate on how they should teach, and researchers can concentrate on what method is the most effective. In the current rhetoric, however, many vital pedagogical issues have been placed in the background and the aesthetic subjects are downgraded. These tendencies worried Frede V. Nielsen who stated that didactic studies and philosophical inquiries yet again are needed to explore and give substance to the content dimension. Nielsen's writings on didactics form the basis for this essay, where we highlight which perspectives and dilemmas could be placed on a critical, philosophical didactic study agenda. The starting point is the field of tension between the what and the why of education.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/philmusieducrevi.22.2.132
Journal Title: Prooftexts: A Journal of Jewish Literary History
Publisher: Indiana University Press
Issue: prooftexts.30.issue-2
Date: 04 2010
Author(s): Siff David B.
Abstract: R. Naḥman of Bratslav's magnum opus,
Liqutey Moharan, expresses contradictory attitudes toward the value and ontological primacy of books as opposed to living speech. When his discourses are sorted by the date delivered, one can see a specific shift in attitude. R. Naḥman's emphasis on oral expression, in discourses leading up to 1804, is characteristic of Hasidism's shift from the literary approach of Kabbalah toward an orally driven mass movement. Rebbe Naḥman's later emphasis on printed books can be understood in light of his decision in 1804 to embrace the printed book as a mechanism for spreading his ideas, a decision that may have stemmed from his messianic aspirations. Ontologies of orality and literacy are thus exposed as shifting ideological responses to biographical and historical circumstances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/prooftexts.30.2.238
Journal Title: Prooftexts: A Journal of Jewish Literary History
Publisher: Oxford University Press
Issue: prooftexts.34.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Author(s): Herzog Annabel
Abstract: For both Levinas and Derrida, the practice of philosophy, understood as commentary by the former and deconstruction by the latter, was founded on borrowing terms from other languages and finding their equivalents in French. This argument is developed through a discussion of two texts, Levinas's early Talmudic reading, “The Temptation of Temptation,” and Derrida's deconstruction of
The Merchant of Venicein “What Is a ‘Relevant’ Translation?” This essay shows how translated terms are interwoven into these texts. It also shows that translation is essential to Levinas's and Derrida's creative conceptualization, and to the performativity of their philosophies, meaning that Levinas and Derrida open their language to other languages in order to create concepts. It finally argues that in both Derrida and Levinas the question of the limits of translation, namely, of the moment in which translation becomes conversion, is left open.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/prooftexts.34.2.127
Journal Title: Research in African Literatures
Publisher: Lexington Books
Issue: reseafrilite.44.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2005
Author(s): Small Audrey
Abstract: A book proposing an overview of “African literature” is a very attractive proposition to the new reader seeking orientation in a vast and fastgrowing vibrant field, to the expert in one area looking to explore others, and perhaps also to the publisher with a canny eye to the bottom line. This essay examines the often bewildering array of apparent subcategories that emerge in some key texts published around the turn of the twentieth-first century that purport to offer an overview of African literature in French, but which seem to entirely set aside important international debates over “postcolonial,” diaspora, and hybridity, among others. These texts have an important role in the construction of knowledge of “African literature,” but their strengths and limitations become clear when we look closely at the categories suggested and no more so than when the category happens to be that of “identity.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/reseafrilite.44.3.1
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Harcourt
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-1
Date: April-June 13, 1920
Author(s): Schmitt Cannon
Abstract: Surface reading and similar developments in literary study advocate a turn away from symptomatic reading toward the superficial and self-evident. Arguing for the productivity of these approaches despite the contradictory language in which they have sometimes been formulated, this essay develops a related form of analysis: literal or denotative reading. Denotative reading does not reject deep or figurative interpretive possibilities. Rather, it insists they must be pursued in close connection with the facticity of fictional worlds, particularly in the case of maritime and other fiction deploying a specialized, technical lexicon. The essay treats Joseph Conrad's
Heart of Darkness(1899) as an exemplary instance of such fiction, contending that its precise articulation of tidal currents, nautical maneuvers, and ship design signals the key role of “restraint” not only in this novella but throughout Conrad's corpus.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.1.7
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Duke UP
Issue: victorianstudies.55.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 1985
Author(s): Heffernan Laura
Abstract: This article reviews recent methodological interventions in the field of literary study, many of which take nineteenth-century critics, readers, or writers as models for their less interpretive reading practices. In seeking out nineteenth-century models for twenty-first-century critical practice, these critics imagine a world in which English literature never became a discipline. Some see these new methods as formalist, yet we argue that they actually emerge from historicist self-critique. Specifically, these contemporary critics view the historicist projects of the 1980s as overly influenced by disciplinary models of textual interpretation—models that first arose, we show through our reading of the Jolly Bargemen scene in Charles Dickens's
Great Expectations(1860– 61), in the second half of the nineteenth century. In closing, we look more closely at the work of a few recent critics who sound out the metonymic, adjacent, and referential relations between readers, texts, and historical worlds in order sustain historicism's power to restore eroded meanings rather than reveal latent ones.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.55.4.615
Journal Title: Victorian Studies
Publisher: Ashgate
Issue: victorianstudies.56.issue-4
Date: 7 1, 2012
Author(s): Giles Paul
Abstract: P(aulGiles
paul.giles@sydney.edu.au) is Challis Professor of English at the University of Sydney. His most recent books areAntipodean America: Australasia and the Constitution of U.S. Literature(2013) andTransnationalism in Practice: Essays on American Studies, Literature, and Religion(2011). He is currently working on a study of how the transnational intersects with the cross-temporal.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.2979/victorianstudies.56.4.756
Journal Title: AMERICAN JOURNAL OF INTERNATIONAL LAW
Publisher: Duke University
Issue: amerjintelaw.106.issue-1
Date: May 26, 2010
Abstract: Political scientists are actively engaged in research on many aspects of international law and organizations. This article reviews the key theories and empirical findings that have emerged over the last two decades of that research program. The aim, in addition to a comprehensive review and assessment, is to outline an agenda for collaboration between political scientists and international lawyers on topics that will advance the state of the art in both fields.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5305/amerjintelaw.106.1.0047
Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: complitstudies.51.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: The combinatory and ludic polyculturalism, the parodic transmutation of meanings and values, the open, multilingual hybridization [which] are the devices responsible for the constant feeding and refeeding of this “baroquizing” almagest: the carnivalized transencyclopedia of the new barbarians, where everything can coexist with everything. They are the machinery that crushes the material of tradition, like the teeth of a tropical sugarmill, transforming stalks and husks into bagasse and juicy syrup.
145
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.1.0018
Journal Title: Comparative Literature Studies
Publisher: Verso
Issue: complitstudies.51.3.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 2013
Author(s): Damrosch David
Abstract: The world is a large and various place. Those wishing to chart new planetary cartographies are finding many languages to study beyond the French–German–English triad that long dominated Western comparative studies, and they are developing new methods appropriate to the expanded scope of our field. The tough linguistic and political analyses that Emily Apter rightly wishes comparatists to pursue will best be carried forward by widening our cultural and linguistic horizons, and by employing the full variety of critical and theoretical approaches that can be included in our cartographic toolboxes today.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/complitstudies.51.3.0504
Journal Title: The F. Scott Fitzgerald Review
Publisher: Penguin
Issue: fscotfitzrevi.12.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 1989
Author(s): Salmose Niklas
Abstract: Fitzgerald's nostalgic style, though, set an example of how a nostalgic narrative could be structured, and in its aftermath it was used by such different authors as Evelyn Waugh in
Brideshead Revisited(1945), Anthony Burgess inA Clockwork Orange(1962) and the works of Kazuo Ishiguro. The author's own later work employs it as well. The technique of using the reader's textual memory in order to evoke a phenomenological nostalgic experience is very evident in both versions ofTender Is the Night(the 1934 original, and Malcolm Cowley's 1951 restructuring). In the 1951 version, the structure of the narrative closely follows the pattern of happiness and reflection. An early description of a Swiss valley communicates an awe of life and nature: “The sun swam out into a blue sea of sky and suddenly it was a Swiss valley at its best—pleasant sounds and murmurs and a good fresh smell of health and cheer” (9). In the transitory third book, “Casualties: 1925,” the tone has changed from appreciative to melancholic, as in this description of the small town of Amiens: “In the day-time one is deflated by such towns, with their little trolley cars of twenty years ago crossing the great grey cobble-stoned squares in front of the cathedral, and the very weather seems to have a quality of the past, faded weather like that of old photographs” (138). At the end of the novel both Dick and Nicole Diver become obsessed with youth and the past as well as with time: “for Nicole the years slipped away by clock and calendar and birthday, with the added poignance of her perishable beauty” (228). Toward the end of the novel, Nicole's last sight of Dick—“her eyes followed his figure until it became a dot and mingled with the other dots in the summer crowd” (386)—forces the reader to reflect in a reversed movement. Instead of vanishing like Dick, this image suggests a backward recollection of what was a Swiss valley “at its best.”
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/fscotfitzrevi.12.1.0067
Journal Title: Interdisciplinary Literary Studies
Publisher: Harper and Row
Issue: intelitestud.16.2.issue-2
Date: 9 1, 1971
Author(s): Eze Chielozona
Abstract: Even in her familial tone, and perhaps because of it, Jabbeh Wesley never forgets that the healing and meaning-making function of grief and mourning, as painful as grief and mourning are, is not to be avoided. Rather, as DuBose argues, based on the painful experience of his wife's miscarriage, as “‘child’ and ‘parent’ disappeared, our bodies and our society
dys-appeared, and our connections and hopes re-appeared” (374). Jabbeh Wesley attaches the reappearance of the hopes for the healing and reconstruction of her Liberian world to people's ability and willingness to truly experience the painful process of grief and, perhaps informed by that cathartic experience, allow compassion and empathy to guide their relationship to others.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/intelitestud.16.2.0282
Journal Title: Journal of Africana Religions
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jafrireli.1.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 2013
Abstract: Some time ago, Paul Ricoeur pointed out that “the symbol gives rise to thought.”
These diasporic religious communities enable us to find a new beginning for thought that has the possibility of avoiding the exclusivity and elitism that has too often accompanied the objective meaning of thought as a science of the rational. Not only these diasporic religions, but also the very conundrum of the continent of Africa as a whole, to echo Skinner at the beginning of our paper, may serve in the same manner as one of the most important ways that thought might be renewed—and the relationship of thought to action and performance.38
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jafrireli.1.1.0091
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Is SPEP the city of God? This would be going too far. Not even the theological turn in French Phenomenology would make this claim. Dick Howard already threw in a troubling question: “diversification that perhaps gives more breadth than depth?” he asked. And there are plenty more troubling questions. SPEP is now a big operation. It has committees and subcommittees, multiple simultaneous sessions, blind review. All these developments are signs, perhaps inevitable ones, of its success, but all have familiar downsides: bureaucratization, diversification for its own sake, what Habermas would call
Unübersichtlichkeit. This is what happens when outsiders become insiders, the antis become their own sort of establishment. You can't blame some of us for feeling nostalgic for our long-lost innocence, even though we all know—you don't have to be a philosopher of history to know this—that we can't go there. History has rendered a judgment, but Dick Howard said, “Historywilljudge.” That's one problem with history: It's always rendering judgments, but they are never final. You'd have to be at the end of history for that, and despite the claim of some philosophers, we aren't there yet. The slaughter bench of history looks very different today from the early 1960s, but it's still in some ways a slaughter bench. So how will the SPEP of the early twenty-first century look to the philosopher-historians of 2061—or is it 2062?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0102
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In short, it is exposure to the experientially inspired and theoretically casual atmosphere of those early SPEP meetings—where neglected topics and unorthodox modes of thinking and speaking were encouraged in an undisciplined way—to which I owe the most. Of course, SPEP grew up. It has experienced its share of embarrassing upheavals, as the heavy presence of its own versions of the social and political prejudices in the larger culture became too obvious to ignore. But it is now a major event—the four-day anchor for a week-long convention that takes over hotels, runs multiple concurrent sessions, fosters satellite groups, and often follows established lines of discussion. Some even call it the alternative APA. Yet I am sure that as long as lifeworld experience continues to trump whatever it is currently fashionable to say about it, grown-up SPEP will retain enough of its original vitality and intellectual generosity so that another generation of aging academics will have cause to repeat our present thank-yous in another fifty years.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0108
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: Our plight, then, is not simply that we are all in the same boat, let alone on the same ocean. Yet we are still bound by the responsbility of inhabiting the same planet. What would it mean, then, to share the earth with all its inhabitants, not just in terms of occupying the same planet but also in terms of caring and looking after each other in the anachronistic sense of the word
dutyas plight? Can we risk pledging to solemnly avow our own investments in the very things we so self-rightousely protest against, not in order to stop protesting in the name of justice but, rather, in the hopes of turning the killing machine back against itself and taking another step toward “hunting down” and abolishing death penalities wherever they may be hiding, even in our own disowned fears and desires?
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0118
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: The point here is that whoever I am in terms of my personal identity and my capacity or incapacity to identify myself through sortal terms as a being in the world with others, I will have no doubt who is in pain or who will have the pain. Here, again, is a sense of “I” in which I can be aware of myself and refer to myself without it being necessary to employ any nonindexical or third-personal referents.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0222
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: No doubt the rise of religion has not only posed a particular dilemma for critical theory but also provided a curious place to end this reflection. Having started my career doing philosophy of religion it is somewhat surprising to meet religion again as I turn to what surely must be at least a later phase of my career. I am reminded of Antonio's line from the Italian film
C'eravamo Tanto Amati, translated asWe All Loved Each Other So Much: “We thought we could change the world, but the world changed us.” “Philosophers only interpret the world, the point is to change it,” so said Marx. But in a curious way those who would change the world are changed by it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0291
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: In 1986, however, SPEP's present mission statement could not have been conceived. Many important issues and questions remained unrecognized or simply ignored. But the opening before the organization was now a “postmodern” one, and a hallmark of what is called postmodern thought is its requirement that it transform in the force of its own lack of founded stability. I believe that 1986 began a series of developments that is turning SPEP toward ways of thought and life that cannot be labeled postmodern. I doubt that this turning constitutes a midlife crisis for SPEP in its fiftieth year. But it does highlight for me the fact that I have been giving a historical narrative that has to do with continuities in the dissolution of continuities, that I have not been—if I may put it this way—postmodern in an orthodox manner, although I have refused to give an unambiguous meaning to the term that has played a major role in organizing this essay. I do not know whether this discussion is postmodern, post-postmodern, or modern, and I do not care. I do care, however, about the openings that SPEP has provided for collegiality, conflict, unresolved differences, transformations, and sites for presentations, discussion, and critique. In my experience, in its own organizational development and travail, it has occasioned changes in the lives of many philosophers (mine among them). I expect that its indeterminate opening now—its continuing transformations in the interaction of many differences—will continue to surprise, irritate, and change those of us who participate in its opportunities. I close with a sense of beginning and an acknowledgment of the strangeness of the continuity that a series of beginnings provides: continuity without substance, continuity coming to pass.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0299
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: I want to conclude with one more argument from my own work. I have very often argued that philosophers of technology, regarding the expectations of society and their own traditions and habits, may come “too late” to technologies. They too often undertake their reflections
afterthe technologies are in place. Rather, I argue, they should reposition themselves at what I call the “R&D” position where technologies are taking developmental shape, in think tanks, in incubator facilities, in research centers. Only then can truly “new” and emerging technologies be fully philosophically engaged.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0321
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.26.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: We at SPEP have never been modern and have made a good living off the critique of modernism and of its binary oppositions. But I think that the business as usual of Continental philosophy will have to be expanded to include a critique of the opposition of the human and the nonhuman, of
physisandtechne, and of “Continental philosophy” and “science.” For the truth is that we have been a party to the science wars. That is why I think that the work of Catherine Malabou is exactly the sort of work that SPEP and Continental philosophy generally will have to do in the future.
We have yet to admit how deeply inscribed the human is in the nonhuman and the technical. We have yet to appreciate that being-in-the-world is not only historicized, gendered, and incarnate but also both a neural and a galactic event, of both microscopic and macroscopic proportions. Can it be of no interest to “philosophy,” can there be nothing to “wonder” about, that our bodies are literally made of stardust? We have yet to realize how deeply interwoven is the imagination of speculative physics with the wonder of the philosophers. If the best we can do is to protect our turf by saying that science does not think, the sciences will steal our thunder, that is, our wonder, right out from under us. Science does think, and science wonders, because wonder is the piety of thought. That is a matter to which SPEP, and Continental philosophers generally, whether they have taken a theological turn or are running in the opposite direction, should give more thought.36
37
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.26.2.0333
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Steinbock Anthony
Abstract: The articles collected here represent the richness and diversity of philosophical work presented at SPEP and thus serve to vindicate Steinbock's vision, expressed in his Co-director's Address, of SPEP as an organization that is grounded in a fundamental openness to experience that leads it to continually push against its own limits and thus to reimagine itself.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0213
Journal Title: The Journal of Speculative Philosophy
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: jspecphil.28.3.issue-3
Date: 7 1, 2014
Author(s): Davidson Scott
Abstract: For, if phenomenology renounces its search for the absolute and for foundations, then it must give up seeing itself as a single and self-contained discourse. The minimal phenomenologist renounces monolinguism and is no longer the master of only one discourse. Instead, he or she must practice a mixed discourse. To do this is to practice diglossia, to become a code-switcher. In its ordinary sense, the practice of code-switching refers to the passage from one language or dialect to another one in the course of a single conversation, for instance, when the conversation moves from an informal to a formal setting or when it moves from one topic to another. But in the phenomenological context, this would involve the ability to shift from a phenomenological discourse to its “others,” whether they might be Freudian energetics, Deleuzian aspects, Badiouan events, and so on. This practice of translation or code-switching has perhaps always been the role of the phenomenologist, if it is accepted that phenomenological reflection does not begin from itself but is nourished by a life that precedes it and gives rise to it.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/jspecphil.28.3.0315
Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: philrhet.45.4.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2012
Abstract: Adopting a hyperbolic perspective is also certainly a way to argue as well as a way to examine other “texts” because it is a trope and figure of thought that reveals those moments within discourse when one is attempting to transcend the bounds of reality because the extraordinary nature of a given situation or subject matter requires the use of an excessive prophetic voice or an ardent polemical exaggeration. As Mileur posits, “The work is a hyperbole, the intersection of other hyperboles, and the subject is, insofar as he can be written about at all, another hyperbole” (1990, 86). Rather than circumventing it, understanding hyperbole as the focus of thought and action can create significant moments of
inventioas well aselocutiofor the hyperbolist and critic alike. By approaching a particular text, a critical term, and even a piece of criticism itself from a hyperbolic perspective, one might (re)consider and (re)interpret these “texts” as a stretching of discursive limits that leads one toward a re-presentation of the extraordinary—an attempt to communicate the ineffable or transgress the expressible.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.45.4.0406
Journal Title: Philosophy & Rhetoric
Publisher: University of Chicago Press
Issue: philrhet.46.2.issue-2
Date: 4 1, 1998
Abstract: Second, how do we account for the fact that the processes of public memory are both created by individual choices and nurtured in collective contexts? Many scholars have productively addressed this question by unpacking specific examples in which individuals or groups vie to control public memories. The critical framework I recommend offers a more systematic approach to this issue. To view representations of the past through the nested lenses of rhetoric, public memory, and the agential spiral is to focus on how human beings—individually and in groups—forge connections with people of other times through the medium of public agency. The agential spiral, derived from my reading of Ricoeur's “threefold mimesis,” aims to pinpoint three moments in the construction of narratives in which human action is represented and reinterpreted within a temporal structure. As a critical framework, the agential spiral helps us to view the creation of public memories at three key moments and to see the process as a coiling whole. Using this tool, we can better understand why certain memories persist in certain societies and how those memories powerfully connect people across time as well as space.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/philrhet.46.2.0182
Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Wixson Christopher
Abstract: Chicagoan, 1 June 1934, 28. Courtesy of Quigley Publishing Company, a division of QP Media, Inc.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0001
Journal Title: Shaw
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: shaw.34.1.issue-1
Date: 10 1, 2014
Author(s): Einsohn Howard Ira
Abstract: Moreover, for Shaw and Ricoeur, imaginative works of art have the power to project alternative and potentially redemptive ways of living together harmoniously, which in turn can substantially change hearts, alter beliefs, and reorient behavior in an empathetic direction that promotes vigilant concern for the other. Be they biblical narratives, plays for the stage, fictions for the page, or other forms of literary texts broadly construed, stories can portray freedom and fault reconciled in compassionate beings committed to advancing the common good. In this way, poetic making can and has instilled in us not only faith and hope but magnanimity as well. Thus, the answer to the provocative question Shaw poses at the beginning of his last major treatise,
Everybody's Political What's What?—“Is Human Nature Incurably Depraved?”
—is a resounding no: not just for him but for Ricoeur, too. Where there is faith, there is hope; and where there is hope, there is life. Life expectant.55
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/shaw.34.1.0133
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of California P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Author(s): Boren Mark Edelman
Abstract: To challenge an unexamined critical alignment with Ishmael's limited epistemology in Herman Melville's
Moby-Dickshows how the placing of confidence in Ishmael as witness to Ahab's monomania leads to a misreading ofMoby-Dick. Ahab lies at the center of a highly developed epistemology that competes with and eludes the narrator's comprehension. The various trophies that appear throughout the text are manifest examples of this other-than-interpretive system of knowing, and Melville uses the act of possessing trophies, particularly the act of eating trophies, to show graphically how such a system works. In other words, Melville has developed a complex epistemological system of ingestion around Ahab to model how language can be materially invested with meaning and how that meaning is performed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.1
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: U of Wisconsin P
Issue: style.34.issue-1
Date: September 1, 1983
Author(s): Peters Joan Douglas
Abstract: It has been over ten years since anything significant has been published on D. H. Lawrence's critical prose, and nothing of note has ever been written on the subject of the short essays—“The Novel,” “Surgery for the novel—Or a Bomb,” “Morality and the Novel,” and “Why the novel Matters”—containing his theory of the novel. The rhetorical style Lawrence adopts is so informal, so comical, and often so bizarre that the impulse of critics, when they do refer to these essays, is to ignore the rhetoric and somehow extract a system of logocentric doctrine, a doctrine that does not bear scrutiny. To appreciate Lawrence's genre theory, one cannot ignore the style in which it is written but must instead focus on the dynamics of discourse comprising the rhetorical text. Grounding my reading in Bakhtin's
carnival, I argue that Lawrence celebrates the novel in terms of its “joyful relativity” (Bakhtin's term), a theory that articulates itself performatively in different ways through its own deconstruction. Read deconstructively, Lawrence's genre theory offers an important contribution to modernist concepts of language, an area from which Lawrence has traditionally been entirely excluded.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.1.36
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Norton
Issue: style.34.issue-2
Date: January 16, 1972
Author(s): Matz Jesse
Abstract: Mauriceis a novel that waits for the future (for completion, publication, and audience) but also looks nostagically to the past. This strange temporal location reflects a temporality basic to Forster's narrative structures and sexual identity: like philosophers who presently ascribe to the “tenseless theory of time,” Forster dispels identity among a tenseless order of moments, in a narrative structure that seeks likewise to trade “becoming” for a better order. InMaurice, such tactics as iterative seriality, overdetermined prolepsis, nonephiphany, and other modes of “detensing” give form to a version of homosexuality that would escape “identity,” with unusual implications for moderist temporality and narratological criticism. Forster's modernist time is eccentric for its interest in logical order; and the narratological criticism which would attend to his “tenseless” homosexual form must remember that it is often the combination of subversion and order that encourages the best narratological advances.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.34.2.188
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: style.35.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2000
Author(s): Walsh Richard
Abstract: The concept of fabula, or its many near equivalents, has always been a staple of narrative theory, yet it is vulnerable to many theoretical objections. It is possible to justify a rhetorical view of the concept's pragmatic value, and so its particular relevance to fiction, but only once various flawed notions of fabula have been eliminated. Some of these relate back quite directly to its Russian Formalist roots, but others have arisen through Structuralist mediations of the concept (in the guise of such pairs as “story” and “discourse”). The inadequacies of these models are manifest in fabula's relationship to event, chronology, temporality, causality, perspective, medium, and the genesis of narrative. The concept remains valuable, however, in respect of its role in interpretation, especially in the case of fictional narrative. The rhetorical basis of this view of fabula and its relation to sujet effectively overturns the logical hierarchy of previous representational models.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.35.4.592
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: UP of Virginia
Issue: style.36.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1993
Author(s): Kelly Marian
Abstract: Elizabeth Bowen subjects both her characters and her readers to the dynamics of nostalgia in two of her novels.
The House in ParisandThe Little Girlsare unique in Bowen'soeuvrein their use of “structural nostalgia”—a tripartite structure containing a section that takes place in the past put between two sections that take place in the present. Though this structure suggests that readers may simply engage in a nostalgic return along with the characters, Bowen uses it instead to force both her characters and her readers into a conscious examination of both the pleasures and the problems created by nostalgia.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.1.1
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: John Benjamins
Issue: style.36.issue-3
Date: 9 1, 1999
Author(s): Steen Gerard J.
Abstract: This paper presents the background, findings, and implications of a new line of research on the technical identification of linguistic metaphor. Inspired by the cognitive-linguistic approach to metaphor launched by Lakoff and Johnson, a new theoretical framework and operational definition has been developed for the identification of metaphorical expressions in authentic discourse. The paper presents a brief report of two reliability studies of the first stage of the approach, and spells out how it may be applied in linguistic, stylistic and rhetorical text analysis with reference to a poem by Alfred Lord Tennyson.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.36.3.386
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Mouton
Issue: style.39.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1965
Author(s): Steen Gerard
Abstract: To provide a context for the essays published here, this introduction to the special issue on metonymy highlights a number of aspects of the cognitive-linguistic discussion of metonymy of the past twenty-five years. It briefly sketches the development of metonymy studies in poetics, linguistics, and philosophy, emphasizing that the cognitive-linguistic approach to metonymy of the past decades represents a return to the semantic views of metonymy advocated in structuralist semantics. This development was triggered by the extensive study of metaphor, but metonymy has now emancipated itself as an autonomous field of study that displays complex and unresolved relations with metaphor. This introduction also attends to the new insights added by cognitive linguistics to such a semantic approach to metonymy, suggesting that metonymy has indeed gone cognitive linguistic.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.39.1.1
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Cornell UP
Issue: style.39.issue-2
Date: 6 1, 2001
Author(s): Marcus Amit
Abstract: In the essay I adopt Tamar Yacobi's “communication model” for settling discrepancies and inconsistencies in fictional texts and use it to demonstrate that the hypothesis of unreliable narration does not necessarily entail only one kind of interpretation. To support this point, I offer the distinction between
self-deceptiveandother-deceptivenarrating characters, and I argue that some texts constantly cause the reader to hesitate between conflicting interpretations of the narrator as belonging to one of these two types. Such equivocation on the part of the reader is then extended to competing interpretations of the text, in accordance with each type of narrator. The chosen novel for this purpose is Vladimir Nabokov'sLolita.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.39.2.187
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Shocken
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: October 1, 1998
Author(s): Mikkonen Kai
Abstract: The recent pragmatic-contextual theory of fiction entails the possibility of changes between fact and fiction over the course of time. It is also perhaps commonplace to state that this process can be reversed—that fictional texts may cease to be fictional. The question of generic fiction-to-fact transition, however, is rarely confronted in the theory of fiction. This essay investigates the generic expectations attached to texts that make a full-scale transition from fiction to nonfiction difficult, both culturally and psychologically. “Fiction” is understood here in a limited, pragmatic sense of a work of fiction, a text known and categorized as fiction. The discussion is structured around five interrelated reasons that contribute to the difficulty: (1) the commonness of as-if structures in everyday life; (2) the generic combinations among literature, fiction, factual representation, and narrative; (3) the relative stability of the communal values and ways of checking facts that determine the categories of fiction and fact (the fact convention); (4) the popularity, in fiction, of metalepsis and the theme of transworld travel between different ontological spheres; (5) and the fictionalization of literature in the historical perspective.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.291
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Routledge
Issue: style.40.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 2001
Author(s): Marcus Amit
Abstract: Most scholars dealing with unreliable narration consider the unreliable narrator inferior to the reader in either knowledge or morality. This conception implies that the readers are more reliable than the unreliable narrator and, thanks to this difference, capable of identifying unreliabilty, with no consequences or ramifications for themselves. Although this view is not entirely wrong, the readers' superiority to the narrator may change if the readers either find out new details about the narrator that urge them to reevaluate their classification or discover something new about themselves that encourages them to reconsider their superiority. An interesting combination of these two possibilities is found in Camus's novella
The Fall(La Chute). My interpretation ofThe Fallfocuses on the triad narrator-narratee-reader and the narrator's rhetorical manipulations, maintaining that the text both undermines the binary opposition between “unreliable narrator” and “reliable reader” and has some general implications on the position of the reader towards fiction.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.40.4.314
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Peter Lang
Issue: style.45.issue-1
Date: June 4, 2004
Author(s): Stefanescu Maria
Abstract: In this article, I attempt to bring together the post-structuralist, Levinas-oriented and the rhetorical-and-narratological branches of the contemporary ethical reflection on fiction and explore their respective understanding of the notion of an “implied author.” I argue that Booth's concept and its subsequent redefinitions remain fraught with ‘technical’ difficulties and prove indefensible. After reviewing discussions of the “implied author,” I compare two readings of Yann Martel's
Life of Pito explore the relevance of the notion for the cases when one wishes to arbitrate between contrasting interpretations of the same text. I then argue that neither the rhetorical and narratological nor the Levinas-oriented ethical criticism has succeeded in rendering Booth's concept a precise and effective tool for literary interpretation. I conclude my analysis by considering the possibility that an alternative understanding of intentionality will enable practitioners of both lines of inquiry to pursue their research without needing to resort to the concept of an implied author.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.45.1.48
Journal Title: Style
Publisher: Ohio State UP
Issue: style.45.issue-3
Date: Dec. 21, 2008
Author(s): Green Susan
Abstract: Drawing upon recent ideas from the cognitive sciences, this paper is an interdisciplinary exploration of the representation of consciousness in McEwan's novel
Enduring Love, focussing on overlapping manifestations of Theory of Mind ranging from altruism to violent pathology. Through techniques such as intertextuality, the use of paratexts, and the juxtaposition of scientific and literary discourses, McEwan constructs this novel as a Theory of Mind creating a demanding and appealing reading experience that mirrors the doubt and uncertainty of the characters as they strive to understand each others' minds. McEwan's deep interest in science and what it can and cannot tell us about human nature is a potent theme inEnduring Love. This article argues thatEnduring Loveexposes and exploits the unique potential of literary narrative to represent our intense desire to engage with other minds, both highlighting the fact that we are designed by nature to read and to misread minds, as well as the capacity of the novel to communicate the raw feel of human experience in a way that eludes scientific discourse.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/style.45.3.441
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.22.1.issue-1
Date: 1 1, 1998
Abstract: William Blake's poem
Jerusalem(1804–20), like all Perennial utopias, achieves a dialectical synthesis of the ideal and the actual through the narrative focalization of a religious experience at the level of character, one that is at once transhistorical and universal. By reading the poem through the lens of the Perennial paradigm, we discover that the temporal aspects ofJerusalemare intimately tied to the religious dimensions of Blake's utopian vision. In addition to giving us a new way to understand the well-documented distinctiveness of Blake's religious message, the Perennial paradigm shows Blake's soteriology inJerusalemto be utopian rather than salvationist (that is to say, individual-religious as opposed to collective-political). Because of the ultimately subjective nature of apprehension of the Divine Vision, Blake's utopian thought is not “clearly a forward-directed anticipatory and visionary concept,” as Magnus Ankarsjö has recently argued (15). Blake does not rally the reader towards some “ensuing peaceful millennium” (15) but rather to find enlightenment in the eternal moment. In light of Blake's suspicion of ratiocination, combined with his deliberate use of narrative focalization of Albion's religious vision, readingJerusalemas a Rational utopia grounded in Judeo-Christian of notions of Apocalypse is to miss Blake's core religious message.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.22.1.0019
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2012
Abstract: What is left unsaid in this article about the relationship between utopia and rhetoric could certainly fill the pages of many books. The range is especially rich when we turn to contemporary rhetorical theorists who specifically address society as a value to be combined with a remembered or imagined better place, as in Nedra Reynolds's
Geographies of Writingor bell hooks'sBelonging: A Culture of Place.
Just as constitutive rhetoric (that is, cumulative discourse that contributes to building the structure of human society) has been important in the works of theorists often cited by utopists as crucial to their work, so the utopian impulse continues to be inherent in the way rhetoricians see their subject. To persuade verbally or visually, we must have our own idea of what is socially better, and we must also be able to imagine what our audience believes to be better. The function of utopia, then, may be less philosophical and ideological at its root than it is linguistic in a pragmatic sense. As Kenneth Burke has written of human beings, we are “the symbol-making, symbol-using, symbol-misusing animal … rotten with perfection.”38
39
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.1.0113
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.23.2.issue-2
Date: 10 1, 2012
Abstract: Milan Kundera has described this kind of comedy as echoing a joyous, life-affirming laughter—“the serious laughter of angels expressing their joy of being.”
But that is not to suggest that there is anything divinely pious in this position: if Joyce is an angel, then he is one, like Stephen Dedalus, who will not blindly or uncritically serve.168
In commenting upon an earlier version of this article, Patrick Parrinder spoke of “the difficult relationship between Utopia and comedy.” This relationship is problematized by the fact that Utopia rarely seems able to laugh at itself or therefore to offer the liberating possibilities of comedy. Joyce's later writing, however, appears to advance the rare chance of a pluralist, ambiguous, and dynamic vision of Utopia: a Utopia that might be sustained into futurity—a Utopia that still has room for dreamers and for democrats. But is it still possible that we can call this realm of radical openness, this flux of possibilities, this resolutely material site, Utopian? And do we really need to? This kind of Utopia is not a category or a frame but a direction, a progress, a confluence of streams of consciousness and of unconsciousness, flowing into the river of life: not just a symbolic river but a real one too, the Liffey, the great Anna Livia Plurabelle herself. Or as Joyce put it, more succinctly (and more joyously), it is simply “Lff!”169
170
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.23.2.0472
Journal Title: Utopian Studies
Publisher: Pennsylvania State University Press
Issue: utopianstudies.25.1.issue-1
Date: 4 1, 2014
Abstract: It is in this sense that Utopia can be understood as
lying before us—in both senses of this confounding double phrase. Utopia resides in the past (beforein this instance means “behind us”) inasmuch as any reconsideration of Utopia in the present must inevitably begin with the past. But if the sources of Utopia in the present reside in the past, realization is in the future (beforein this instance means “ahead of us”). It is this double valence that links the articles that make up this special issue. Some deal with historical figures, literature, or places, while others take up analogous considerations that are closer to us now. However, in each case, the future is what is at issue: What shape will it take? How might the circumstances of its emergence be as propitious as possible? These key questions suffuse all of the articles that follow and are of the greatest urgency to all disciplines but in particular for architecture and urbanism, which are burdened with providing the stage upon which we play out the drama of our lives, individually and collectively.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5325/utopianstudies.25.1.0001
Journal Title: American Journal of Theology and Philosophy
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: amerjtheophil.35.2.issue-2
Date: 06 14, 2014
Author(s): Neville Robert Cummings
Abstract: Flush with the juices of adolescence, American philosophy declared independence from its European parentage in the work of Ralph Waldo Emerson and his generation. In 1837, Emerson addressed the Harvard Phi Beta Kappa Society on the occasion of its inaugural meeting for the year, which he called a "holiday." Emerson began: I greet you on the recommencement of our literary year. Our anniversary is one of hope, and, perhaps, not enough of labor. We do not meet for games of strength or skill, for the recitation of histories, tragedies, and odes, like the ancient Greeks; for parliaments of love and poesy, like the Troubadours; nor for the advancement of science, like our contemporaries in the British and European capitals. Thus far, our holiday has been simply a friendly sign of the survival of the love of letters amongst a people too busy to give letters any more. Perhaps the time is already come when it ought to be, and will be something else; when the sluggard intellect of this continent will look from under its iron lids and fill the postponed expectations of the world with something better than the expectations of mechanical skill. Our day of dependence, our long apprenticeship to the learning of other lands, draws to a close. The millions that around us are rushing into life, cannot always be fed on the sere remains of foreign harvests. Events, actions arise, that must be sung, that will sing themselves.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/amerjtheophil.35.2.0093
Journal Title: Journal of Aesthetic Education
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: jaesteduc.48.2.issue-2
Date: 05 08, 2014
Author(s): Cattorini Paolo M.
Abstract: Medical humanities and ethics are getting more and more important in Europe as essential disciplines of the core curriculum for health-care professionals. The idea of the physician as a technician shows itself to be unbearable because of the global historical changes we daily face in caring settings. We deal with chronic diseases, which require a sensitive physician/patient covenant and a good performance in communication skills1 because a whole life-style transformation is often necessary. Moreover, citizens are more informed about both the technological progress and their civil rights, so that a shared decision has to be prepared and implemented by exploring the emotional reactions to illness, by explaining the effects of different ways of treatment, and by revealing in advance the choices that could be taken.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/jaesteduc.48.2.0016
Journal Title: The Polish Review
Publisher: University of Illinois Press
Issue: polishreview.58.1.issue-1
Date: 06 15, 2013
Author(s): Kosmala Kinga
Abstract: Olga Stanisławska's reportage book
Rondo de Gaulle'a[Charles de Gaulle Roundabout] was published in 2001 by Wydawnictwo Twój Styl in Warsaw. The book describes one woman's yearlong journey across Africa, from Casablanca, to Morocco, through Mauritania, Mali, Niger, Nigeria, Chad, Cameroon, Guinea, Congo, Zaire, and Uganda to Nairobi, Kenya. Stanisławska writes about the political, economic, and social issues of numerous African countries. She describes the painful issue of modern-day slavery in Mauritania, the dramatic fate of the Tuareg nation, and recent conflicts in Chad. The book's narrative sometimes merges with objectified, newspaper-style news, but more often ventures into a solipsistic memoir and a warm and sensual portrayal of the various communities the author visits. Stanisławska's actual journey across Africa is complemented by her emotional and literary voyage from the paradise-like plains of the Saharan desert countries to the hellish depths of the jungle in the Congo. She frames her journey, or rather "travels," from Karen Blixen'sOut of Africa(a self-created paradise) to Joseph Conrad'sHeart of Darkness(a self-imposed hell). Both of Stanisławska's journeys–physical and literary–provide a captivating platform for studying her narrative as an unending and deeply empathic encounter with another human being. InCharles de Gaulle Roundaboutthere is a visible tension between the author's need to tell a story and her anxiety that in doing so she may (mis)treat people and turn them into fictional characters, that is, make their stories finite.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5406/polishreview.58.1.0015
Journal Title: Slavic Review
Publisher: Association for Slavic East European and Eurasian Studies
Issue: slavicreview.70.issue-4
Date: 12 1, 1978–84
Abstract: In this article, Ilya Kliger and Nasser Zakariya treat Lev Tolstoi’s conception of brotherhood from a narratological perspective. In the process, they trace the outlines of late Tolstoian narrative poetics, situating it within a variegated landscape of Tolstoi’s own more properly “realist” literary practice, and offering broader suggestions on the workings of narrative in its capacity to model social relations and ethical action. A narratological focus here allows them to elucidate how stories take part in contemporary understandings of social influence, human connectedness, and alienation—not only on the level of themes but also, and more deeply, on the level of the narrative organization of events. Their main focus is on one of Tolstoi’s late novellas “The Forged Coupon” and his last novel
Resurrection.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5612/slavicreview.70.4.0754
Journal Title: Bulletin of the American Schools of Oriental Research
Publisher: Biblical Archaeology Society
Issue: bullamerschoorie.issue-372
Date: 11 1, 2009
Abstract: In this paper, we present an analysis of an Iron Age I dwelling at the Phoenician site of Dor, on Israel's Carmel coast. We provide a definition for the architectural mental template for this type of house—a Central Courtyard Hash-Plan House. By combining an analysis of the size and layout of the house, and the distribution of artifacts and ecofacts in it, we define rooms devoted to specialized economic activities such as food production and storage and also attempt to identify gendered spaces. We conclude that the house was a self-contained agrarian unit engaged in complex economic activity. The same conceptual plan, housing similar economic activities, can be identified in other dwellings in the southern Levant, from Late Bronze Age I to Late Iron Age IIA. The gradual disappearance of this house type, vis-à-vis the emergence, on the one hand, of smaller and simpler dwellings such as the ubiquitous Four-Room House and, on the other, that of public facilities for specialized economic tasks, signifies to our minds a fundamental ideological and economic transformation, a change in the
habitusof Levantine society—namely, the gradual segregation between households and various aspects of economic life.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5615/bullamerschoorie.372.0039
Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: SF-TH Inc.
Issue: sciefictstud.38.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 2011
Abstract: Characterizing the slipstream genre, Bruce Sterling locates it between mainstream and science fiction; it “sets its face against consensus reality” and makes us feel “very strange.” A strong slipstream candidate is Steven Hall’s
The Raw Shark Texts(2007). Manifesting as a distributed literary system, the text has as its core a print novel, but other internet and real world sites also contain fragments or “negatives.” One of the text’s two villains, Mycroft Ward, has transformed into an online database; a posthuman subjectivity, he appropriates “node bodies” that upload their information and download new instructions. This separation of content (online database) from form (node body) is, according to Alan Liu, one of the primary characteristics of postindustrial knowledge work. To this extent, Hall positions his narrative not only against databases but also against knowledge that is, in Liu’s terms, autonomously mobile, transformable, and automated, having lost its material instantiation and been pulverized into atomized bits of information. The text’s second villain—a “conceptual shark,” the Ludovician—represents the complete fusion of form and content; the typographical symbols used to describe the shark also comprise its flesh in verbal and graphic representations. The text thus positions its protagonist, Eric Sanderson, as caught between twenty-first-century forms of knowledge and the implosion of signifier into signified. In this sense, the novel functions as a parable for the contemporary human condition, looking toward a posthuman future but incarnated within an ancient biological heritage.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.38.1.0115
Journal Title: Science Fiction Studies
Publisher: Johns Hopkins UP
Issue: sciefictstud.41.issue-1
Date: 3 1, 1973
Abstract: This essay examines the role of agency and metatextuality in Élisabeth Vonarburg's B
ridgeCycle, comprised mainly of a group of short stories originally published between 1977 and 2002 and then revised in their definitive French versions for the collectionLe Jeu des coquilles de nautilus(2003). The cycle's main storyline involves the uncertain journey between parallel worlds by a series of recurring characters. Three intimately linked narrative components—each closely related to certain protocols of reading fiction and of particular interest to science fiction—form the theoretical and analytical bases of this study: the three recurring topoï of the protagonist-Voyager's travels; character agency that in part drives the sense of these realms and their occupation; and the dénouement which gives a certain meaning and closure to the spaces in their diverse manifestations and to the characters who pursue their quests in these spaces. Vonarburg's narratives place their protagonists in a situation precisely similar to that of the reader as she must negotiate the trans-world context, come to grips with her own relative lack of agency, and at the same time seek some level of control through knowledge. Suchmise en abymeallows the author, through the choice of dénouement, to comment on the manner in which this universe and the real one are imagined, represented, and decoded, and on how meaning is conveyed.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5621/sciefictstud.41.1.0093
Journal Title: Philip Roth Studies
Publisher: Vintage Books
Issue: philrothstud.7.issue-2
Date: Oct. 10, 2007
Author(s): Geraci Ginevra
Abstract: In a period of immanent crisis when comprehensive historical narratives are no longer possible—nor is utopia—dystopia, or rather uchronia tinged with dystopia, seems to be a rather effective means to construct a sweeping historical narration. Through the “timeless time” of uchronia in which—as Ricoeur explains in
Time and Narrative(vol. III)—“we are torn between two fleeing horizons” so that “our present sees itself in crisis,” Roth looks back at a counterfactual past in order to better investigate historical causality and to embrace past and present into a postmodern problematic perspective on the temporal dimension.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5703/philrothstud.7.2.187
Journal Title: Shofar
Publisher: Harper
Issue: shofar.28.issue-3
Date: 4 1, 1962
Author(s): Knight Henry F.
Abstract: This essay places before the reader four historic texts that raise significant questions for Jews and Christians who choose to enter into post-Holocaust examination of their respective identities and their relationships to their grounding traditions. The Kristallnacht exhibit at the U.S. Holocaust Memorial Museum introduces museum visitors to the defaced Talmudic instruction of R. Eliezer—
Know before whom you stand-which frames this essay. As with the story the museum recounts, more than texts are at stake in this essay, but the way forward is distinctly framed by their critical presence. In this case, the distinctive texts are faced in reconfiguring ways, asking those who face them to rethink the place of the other in their identities and life-orienting commitments. Early on, Samuel Bak's surrealistic rendering of a crucified, Jewish child provides a refracting image for exploring the questions these texts pose for post-Shoah people of faith who take their place before them, asking in recursive fashion: before whom do you stand?http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5703/shofar.28.3.116
Journal Title: Cultural Critique
Publisher: Princeton University Press
Issue: culturalcritique.86.issue-2014
Date: 1 1, 1996
Abstract: Examining Agamben's reception of Hannah Arendt, and especially
The Human Condition, in his theorization of biopolitics, this essay argues thatHomo Sacer I, by identifying Arendt with a quasi-Straussian “political philosophy,” fails to acknowledge the complexity of her conception of history. Far from simply affirming the normative force of classical political categories, Arendt regards these as emerging from a living power of distinction that thinking, by showing the historical process that brings about the effacement of these distinctions, seeks to bring into view. Nevertheless, Arendt's conception of history is not without contradiction: while arguing that metaphysics went astray by subordinating praxis to poiesis, her very account of history suggests that this subordination is inevitable, since only a “poetic,” indeed violent, act of making a distinction can distinguish praxis from poiesis. Precisely this problem lies at the center of Agamben's early engagement with Arendt inThe Man without Content.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/culturalcritique.86.2014.0001
Journal Title: Future Anterior: Journal of Historic Preservation, History, Theory, and Criticism
Publisher: Relógio d'Água
Issue: futuante.10.issue-2
Date: 1 1, 1992
Abstract: The article focuses on the role of the “Survey on Regional Architecture in Portugal” in 1955 and its effects on contemporary Portuguese architecture. A photographic survey organizes and indexes a group of buildings with precise criteria, allowing a general panorama. In fact these built-environment, large-scale archives play an important role in heritage preservation. In the 1930s, an interesting phenomenon gathered architects who, although committed to the modern movement and enthusiasts of industrial progress, showed a growing interest in vernacular buildings and settlements. Some of these architects became photographers, attentive to a pre-industrial world that was endangered, to record timeless architecture and expose new aesthetic values. This interest generated several movements centered on an appreciation of regional architecture. Along with nostalgia, there stood out the feeling that there were still many lessons to be drawn from these threatened vernacular structures.
Link: http://www.jstor.org/stable/10.5749/futuante.10.2.0083